143 files changed, 85921 insertions, 46603 deletions

diff --git a/generic/README b/generic/README
index 285127c..6ac6bb4 100644
--- a/generic/README
+++ b/generic/README
@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
 This directory contains Tk source files that work on all the platforms
-where Tk runs (e.g. UNIX, PCs, and Macintoshes).  Platform-specific
-sources are in the directories ../unix, ../win, ../macosx, and ../mac.
+where Tk runs (e.g. UNIX, PCs, and MacOSX).  Platform-specific
+sources are in the directories ../unix, ../win, and ../macosx.
diff --git a/generic/default.h b/generic/default.h
index 6156f4d..6156f4d 100755..100644
--- a/generic/default.h
+++ b/generic/default.h
diff --git a/generic/prolog.ps b/generic/prolog.ps
deleted file mode 100644
index 4076282..0000000
--- a/generic/prolog.ps
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,283 +0,0 @@
-%%BeginProlog
-50 dict begin
-
-% This is a standard prolog for Postscript generated by Tk's canvas
-% widget.
-
-% The definitions below just define all of the variables used in
-% any of the procedures here.  This is needed for obscure reasons
-% explained on p. 716 of the Postscript manual (Section H.2.7,
-% "Initializing Variables," in the section on Encapsulated Postscript).
-
-/baseline 0 def
-/stipimage 0 def
-/height 0 def
-/justify 0 def
-/lineLength 0 def
-/spacing 0 def
-/stipple 0 def
-/strings 0 def
-/xoffset 0 def
-/yoffset 0 def
-/tmpstip null def
-
-% Define the array ISOLatin1Encoding (which specifies how characters are
-% encoded for ISO-8859-1 fonts), if it isn't already present (Postscript
-% level 2 is supposed to define it, but level 1 doesn't).
-
-systemdict /ISOLatin1Encoding known not {
-    /ISOLatin1Encoding [
-	/space /space /space /space /space /space /space /space
-	/space /space /space /space /space /space /space /space
-	/space /space /space /space /space /space /space /space
-	/space /space /space /space /space /space /space /space
-	/space /exclam /quotedbl /numbersign /dollar /percent /ampersand
-	    /quoteright
-	/parenleft /parenright /asterisk /plus /comma /minus /period /slash
-	/zero /one /two /three /four /five /six /seven
-	/eight /nine /colon /semicolon /less /equal /greater /question
-	/at /A /B /C /D /E /F /G
-	/H /I /J /K /L /M /N /O
-	/P /Q /R /S /T /U /V /W
-	/X /Y /Z /bracketleft /backslash /bracketright /asciicircum /underscore
-	/quoteleft /a /b /c /d /e /f /g
-	/h /i /j /k /l /m /n /o
-	/p /q /r /s /t /u /v /w
-	/x /y /z /braceleft /bar /braceright /asciitilde /space
-	/space /space /space /space /space /space /space /space
-	/space /space /space /space /space /space /space /space
-	/dotlessi /grave /acute /circumflex /tilde /macron /breve /dotaccent
-	/dieresis /space /ring /cedilla /space /hungarumlaut /ogonek /caron
-	/space /exclamdown /cent /sterling /currency /yen /brokenbar /section
-	/dieresis /copyright /ordfeminine /guillemotleft /logicalnot /hyphen
-	    /registered /macron
-	/degree /plusminus /twosuperior /threesuperior /acute /mu /paragraph
-	    /periodcentered
-	/cedillar /onesuperior /ordmasculine /guillemotright /onequarter
-	    /onehalf /threequarters /questiondown
-	/Agrave /Aacute /Acircumflex /Atilde /Adieresis /Aring /AE /Ccedilla
-	/Egrave /Eacute /Ecircumflex /Edieresis /Igrave /Iacute /Icircumflex
-	    /Idieresis
-	/Eth /Ntilde /Ograve /Oacute /Ocircumflex /Otilde /Odieresis /multiply
-	/Oslash /Ugrave /Uacute /Ucircumflex /Udieresis /Yacute /Thorn
-	    /germandbls
-	/agrave /aacute /acircumflex /atilde /adieresis /aring /ae /ccedilla
-	/egrave /eacute /ecircumflex /edieresis /igrave /iacute /icircumflex
-	    /idieresis
-	/eth /ntilde /ograve /oacute /ocircumflex /otilde /odieresis /divide
-	/oslash /ugrave /uacute /ucircumflex /udieresis /yacute /thorn
-	    /ydieresis
-    ] def
-} if
-
-% font ISOEncode font
-% This procedure changes the encoding of a font from the default
-% Postscript encoding to ISOLatin1.  It's typically invoked just
-% before invoking "setfont".  The body of this procedure comes from
-% Section 5.6.1 of the Postscript book.
-
-/ISOEncode {
-    dup length dict begin
-	{1 index /FID ne {def} {pop pop} ifelse} forall
-	/Encoding ISOLatin1Encoding def
-	currentdict
-    end
-
-    % I'm not sure why it's necessary to use "definefont" on this new
-    % font, but it seems to be important; just use the name "Temporary"
-    % for the font.
-
-    /Temporary exch definefont
-} bind def
-
-% StrokeClip
-%
-% This procedure converts the current path into a clip area under
-% the assumption of stroking.  It's a bit tricky because some Postscript
-% interpreters get errors during strokepath for dashed lines.  If
-% this happens then turn off dashes and try again.
-
-/StrokeClip {
-    {strokepath} stopped {
-	(This Postscript printer gets limitcheck overflows when) =
-	(stippling dashed lines;  lines will be printed solid instead.) =
-	[] 0 setdash strokepath} if
-    clip
-} bind def
-
-% desiredSize EvenPixels closestSize
-%
-% The procedure below is used for stippling.  Given the optimal size
-% of a dot in a stipple pattern in the current user coordinate system,
-% compute the closest size that is an exact multiple of the device's
-% pixel size.  This allows stipple patterns to be displayed without
-% aliasing effects.
-
-/EvenPixels {
-    % Compute exact number of device pixels per stipple dot.
-    dup 0 matrix currentmatrix dtransform
-    dup mul exch dup mul add sqrt
-
-    % Round to an integer, make sure the number is at least 1, and compute
-    % user coord distance corresponding to this.
-    dup round dup 1 lt {pop 1} if
-    exch div mul
-} bind def
-
-% width height string StippleFill --
-%
-% Given a path already set up and a clipping region generated from
-% it, this procedure will fill the clipping region with a stipple
-% pattern.  "String" contains a proper image description of the
-% stipple pattern and "width" and "height" give its dimensions.  Each
-% stipple dot is assumed to be about one unit across in the current
-% user coordinate system.  This procedure trashes the graphics state.
-
-/StippleFill {
-    % The following code is needed to work around a NeWSprint bug.
-
-    /tmpstip 1 index def
-
-    % Change the scaling so that one user unit in user coordinates
-    % corresponds to the size of one stipple dot.
-    1 EvenPixels dup scale
-
-    % Compute the bounding box occupied by the path (which is now
-    % the clipping region), and round the lower coordinates down
-    % to the nearest starting point for the stipple pattern.  Be
-    % careful about negative numbers, since the rounding works
-    % differently on them.
-
-    pathbbox
-    4 2 roll
-    5 index div dup 0 lt {1 sub} if cvi 5 index mul 4 1 roll
-    6 index div dup 0 lt {1 sub} if cvi 6 index mul 3 2 roll
-
-    % Stack now: width height string y1 y2 x1 x2
-    % Below is a doubly-nested for loop to iterate across this area
-    % in units of the stipple pattern size, going up columns then
-    % across rows, blasting out a stipple-pattern-sized rectangle at
-    % each position
-
-    6 index exch {
-	2 index 5 index 3 index {
-	    % Stack now: width height string y1 y2 x y
-
-	    gsave
-	    1 index exch translate
-	    5 index 5 index true matrix tmpstip imagemask
-	    grestore
-	} for
-	pop
-    } for
-    pop pop pop pop pop
-} bind def
-
-% -- AdjustColor --
-% Given a color value already set for output by the caller, adjusts
-% that value to a grayscale or mono value if requested by the CL
-% variable.
-
-/AdjustColor {
-    CL 2 lt {
-	currentgray
-	CL 0 eq {
-	    .5 lt {0} {1} ifelse
-	} if
-	setgray
-    } if
-} bind def
-
-% x y strings spacing xoffset yoffset justify stipple DrawText --
-% This procedure does all of the real work of drawing text.  The
-% color and font must already have been set by the caller, and the
-% following arguments must be on the stack:
-%
-% x, y -	Coordinates at which to draw text.
-% strings -	An array of strings, one for each line of the text item,
-%		in order from top to bottom.
-% spacing -	Spacing between lines.
-% xoffset -	Horizontal offset for text bbox relative to x and y: 0 for
-%		nw/w/sw anchor, -0.5 for n/center/s, and -1.0 for ne/e/se.
-% yoffset -	Vertical offset for text bbox relative to x and y: 0 for
-%		nw/n/ne anchor, +0.5 for w/center/e, and +1.0 for sw/s/se.
-% justify -	0 for left justification, 0.5 for center, 1 for right justify.
-% stipple -	Boolean value indicating whether or not text is to be
-%		drawn in stippled fashion.  If text is stippled,
-%		procedure StippleText must have been defined to call
-%		StippleFill in the right way.
-%
-% Also, when this procedure is invoked, the color and font must already
-% have been set for the text.
-
-/DrawText {
-    /stipple exch def
-    /justify exch def
-    /yoffset exch def
-    /xoffset exch def
-    /spacing exch def
-    /strings exch def
-
-    % First scan through all of the text to find the widest line.
-
-    /lineLength 0 def
-    strings {
-	stringwidth pop
-	dup lineLength gt {/lineLength exch def} {pop} ifelse
-	newpath
-    } forall
-
-    % Compute the baseline offset and the actual font height.
-
-    0 0 moveto (TXygqPZ) false charpath
-    pathbbox dup /baseline exch def
-    exch pop exch sub /height exch def pop
-    newpath
-
-    % Translate coordinates first so that the origin is at the upper-left
-    % corner of the text's bounding box. Remember that x and y for
-    % positioning are still on the stack.
-
-    translate
-    lineLength xoffset mul
-    strings length 1 sub spacing mul height add yoffset mul translate
-
-    % Now use the baseline and justification information to translate so
-    % that the origin is at the baseline and positioning point for the
-    % first line of text.
-
-    justify lineLength mul baseline neg translate
-
-    % Iterate over each of the lines to output it.  For each line,
-    % compute its width again so it can be properly justified, then
-    % display it.
-
-    strings {
-	dup stringwidth pop
-	justify neg mul 0 moveto
-	stipple {
-
-	    % The text is stippled, so turn it into a path and print
-	    % by calling StippledText, which in turn calls StippleFill.
-	    % Unfortunately, many Postscript interpreters will get
-	    % overflow errors if we try to do the whole string at
-	    % once, so do it a character at a time.
-
-	    gsave
-	    /char (X) def
-	    {
-		char 0 3 -1 roll put
-		currentpoint
-		gsave
-		char true charpath clip StippleText
-		grestore
-		char stringwidth translate
-		moveto
-	    } forall
-	    grestore
-	} {show} ifelse
-	0 spacing neg translate
-    } forall
-} bind def
-
-%%EndProlog
diff --git a/generic/tk.decls b/generic/tk.decls
index b64cc43..50b2837 100644
--- a/generic/tk.decls
+++ b/generic/tk.decls
@@ -6,6 +6,7 @@
 #	tkStub.c, and tkPlatStub.c files.
 #
 # Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Ajuba Solutions.
+# Copyright (c) 2007 Daniel A. Steffen <das@users.sourceforge.net>
 #
 # See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 # of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -163,7 +164,7 @@ declare 32 {
 declare 33 {
     unsigned long Tk_CreateBinding(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 	    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object,
-	    const char *eventStr, const char *script, int append)
+	    const char *eventStr, const char *command, int append)
 }
 declare 34 {
     Tk_BindingTable Tk_CreateBindingTable(Tcl_Interp *interp)
@@ -495,7 +496,7 @@ declare 123 {
 }
 declare 124 {
     void Tk_ManageGeometry(Tk_Window tkwin,
-	    Tk_GeomMgr *mgrPtr, ClientData clientData)
+	    const Tk_GeomMgr *mgrPtr, ClientData clientData)
 }
 declare 125 {
     void Tk_MapWindow(Tk_Window tkwin)
@@ -580,13 +581,13 @@ declare 147 {
     void Tk_PhotoBlank(Tk_PhotoHandle handle)
 }
 declare 148 {
-    void Tk_PhotoExpand(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height )
+    void Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height )
 }
 declare 149 {
     void Tk_PhotoGetSize(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
 }
 declare 150 {
-    void Tk_PhotoSetSize(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height)
+    void Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height)
 }
 declare 151 {
     int Tk_PointToChar(Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y)
@@ -942,12 +943,12 @@ declare 245 {
     void Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height)
 }
 declare 246 {
-    void Tk_PhotoPutBlock(Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+    void Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
 	    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y,
 	    int width, int height, int compRule)
 }
 declare 247 {
-    void Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+    void Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
 	    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y,
 	    int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY,
 	    int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule)
@@ -1018,6 +1019,54 @@ declare 264 {
 	    int width, int height, int state)
 }
 
+# TIP#116
+declare 265 {
+    int Tk_PhotoExpand(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+	    int width, int height)
+}
+declare 266 {
+    int Tk_PhotoPutBlock(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+	    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height,
+	    int compRule)
+}
+declare 267 {
+    int Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+	    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height,
+	    int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule)
+}
+declare 268 {
+    int Tk_PhotoSetSize(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+	    int width, int height)
+}
+# TIP#245
+declare 269 {
+    long Tk_GetUserInactiveTime(Display *dpy)
+}
+declare 270 {
+    void Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime(Display *dpy)
+}
+
+# TIP #264
+declare 271 {
+    Tcl_Interp *Tk_Interp(Tk_Window tkwin)
+}
+
+# Now that the Tk 8.2 -> 8.3 transition is long past, use more conventional
+# means to continue support for extensions using the USE_OLD_IMAGE to
+# continue use of their string-based Tcl_ImageTypes and Tcl_PhotoImageFormats.
+#
+# Note that this restores the usual rules for stub compatibility.  Stub-enabled
+# extensions compiled against 8.5 headers and linked to the 8.5 stub library
+# will produce a file [load]able into an interp with Tk 8.X, for X >= 5.
+# It will *not* be [load]able into interps with Tk 8.4 (or Tk 8.2!).
+# Developers who need to produce a file [load]able into legacy interps must
+# build against legacy sources.
+declare 272 {
+    void Tk_CreateOldImageType(Tk_ImageType *typePtr)
+}
+declare 273 {
+    void Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat(Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr)
+}
 
 # Define the platform specific public Tk interface.  These functions are
 # only available on the designated platform.
@@ -1047,7 +1096,8 @@ declare 5 win {
 	    UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam, LRESULT *result)
 }
 
-# Mac OS X specific functions
+################################
+# Aqua specific functions
 
 declare 0 aqua {
     void Tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler(
@@ -1077,10 +1127,10 @@ declare 6 aqua {
     void TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns(Tk_Window tkwin)
 }
 declare 7 aqua {
-    GWorldPtr TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort(Drawable drawable)
+    void *TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort(Drawable drawable)
 }
 declare 8 aqua {
-    ControlRef TkMacOSXGetRootControl(Drawable drawable)
+    void *TkMacOSXGetRootControl(Drawable drawable)
 }
 declare 9 aqua {
     void Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier(void)
@@ -1088,6 +1138,37 @@ declare 9 aqua {
 declare 10 aqua {
     int Tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront(void)
 }
+
+##############################################################################
+
+# Public functions that are not accessible via the stubs table.
+
+export {
+    const char *Tk_InitStubs(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *version,
+	    int exact)
+}
+export {
+    const char *Tk_PkgInitStubsCheck(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *version,
+	    int exact)
+}
+
+# Global variables that need to be exported from the tcl shared library.
+
+export {
+    TkStubs *tkStubsPtr                         (fool checkstubs)
+}
+export {
+    TkPlatStubs *tkPlatStubsPtr                 (fool checkstubs)
+}
+export {
+    TkIntStubs *tkIntStubsPtr                   (fool checkstubs)
+}
+export {
+    TkIntPlatStubs *tkIntPlatStubsPtr           (fool checkstubs)
+}
+export {
+    TkIntXlibStubs *tkIntXlibStubsPtr           (fool checkstubs)
+}
 
 # Local Variables:
 # mode: tcl
diff --git a/generic/tk.h b/generic/tk.h
index 4a5b371..f1f81cd 100644
--- a/generic/tk.h
+++ b/generic/tk.h
@@ -1,26 +1,32 @@
 /*
  * tk.h --
  *
- *	Declarations for Tk-related things that are visible
- *	outside of the Tk module itself.
+ *	Declarations for Tk-related things that are visible outside of the Tk
+ *	module itself.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1989-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Ajuba Solutions.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TK
 #define _TK
 
-#ifndef _TCL
 #include <tcl.h>
-#if (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION != 8) || (TCL_MINOR_VERSION != 4)
-#	error Tk 8.4 must be compiled with tcl.h from Tcl 8.4
+#if (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION != 8) || (TCL_MINOR_VERSION < 5)
+#	error Tk 8.5 must be compiled with tcl.h from Tcl 8.5
 #endif
+
+#ifndef _ANSI_ARGS_
+#   ifndef NO_PROTOTYPES
+#	define _ANSI_ARGS_(x)	x
+#   else
+#	define _ANSI_ARGS_(x)	()
+#   endif
 #endif
 
 /*
@@ -35,40 +41,41 @@ extern "C" {
  * When version numbers change here, you must also go into the following files
  * and update the version numbers:
  *
- * library/tk.tcl	(only if Major.minor changes, not patchlevel)
+ * library/tk.tcl	(2 LOC patch)
  * unix/configure.in	(2 LOC Major, 2 LOC minor, 1 LOC patch)
  * win/configure.in	(as above)
- * win/makefile.vc	(not patchlevel)
  * README		(sections 0 and 1)
- * mac/README		(not patchlevel)
+ * macosx/Wish.xcode/project.pbxproj (not patchlevel) 1 LOC
+ * macosx/Wish-Common.xcconfig (not patchlevel) 1 LOC
  * win/README		(not patchlevel)
  * unix/README		(not patchlevel)
- * unix/tk.spec		(3 LOC Major/Minor, 2 LOC patch)
+ * unix/tk.spec		(1 LOC patch)
  * win/tcl.m4		(not patchlevel)
  *
- * You may also need to update some of these files when the numbers change
- * for the version of Tcl that this release of Tk is compiled against.
+ * You may also need to update some of these files when the numbers change for
+ * the version of Tcl that this release of Tk is compiled against.
  */
 
-#define TK_MAJOR_VERSION   8
-#define TK_MINOR_VERSION   4
-#define TK_RELEASE_LEVEL   TCL_FINAL_RELEASE
-#define TK_RELEASE_SERIAL  19
+#define TK_MAJOR_VERSION	8
+#define TK_MINOR_VERSION	5
+#define TK_RELEASE_LEVEL	TCL_FINAL_RELEASE
+#define TK_RELEASE_SERIAL	13
 
-#define TK_VERSION	"8.4"
-#define TK_PATCH_LEVEL	"8.4.19"
+#define TK_VERSION		"8.5"
+#define TK_PATCH_LEVEL		"8.5.13"
 
-/* 
- * A special definition used to allow this header file to be included
- * from windows resource files so that they can obtain version
- * information.  RC_INVOKED is defined by default by the windows RC tool.
+/*
+ * A special definition used to allow this header file to be included from
+ * windows or mac resource files so that they can obtain version information.
+ * RC_INVOKED is defined by default by the windows RC tool and manually set
+ * for macintosh.
  *
- * Resource compilers don't like all the C stuff, like typedefs and
- * procedure declarations, that occur below, so block them out.
+ * Resource compilers don't like all the C stuff, like typedefs and procedure
+ * declarations, that occur below, so block them out.
  */
-    
+
 #ifndef RC_INVOKED
-    
+
 #ifndef _XLIB_H
 #   if defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
 #	include <X11/Xlib.h>
@@ -85,7 +92,7 @@ extern "C" {
 # undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
 #endif
-
+
 /*
  * Decide whether or not to use input methods.
  */
@@ -118,11 +125,11 @@ typedef struct Tk_StyledElement_ *Tk_StyledElement;
  * Additional types exported to clients.
  */
 
-typedef CONST char *Tk_Uid;
+typedef const char *Tk_Uid;
 
 /*
- * The enum below defines the valid types for Tk configuration options
- * as implemented by Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, etc.
+ * The enum below defines the valid types for Tk configuration options as
+ * implemented by Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, etc.
  */
 
 typedef enum {
@@ -148,56 +155,54 @@ typedef enum {
 } Tk_OptionType;
 
 /*
- * Structures of the following type are used by widgets to specify
- * their configuration options.  Typically each widget has a static
- * array of these structures, where each element of the array describes
- * a single configuration option.  The array is passed to
- * Tk_CreateOptionTable.
+ * Structures of the following type are used by widgets to specify their
+ * configuration options. Typically each widget has a static array of these
+ * structures, where each element of the array describes a single
+ * configuration option. The array is passed to Tk_CreateOptionTable.
  */
 
 typedef struct Tk_OptionSpec {
-    Tk_OptionType type;		/* Type of option, such as TK_OPTION_COLOR; 
-				 * see definitions above. Last option in
-				 * table must have type TK_OPTION_END. */
-    char *optionName;		/* Name used to specify option in Tcl	
+    Tk_OptionType type;		/* Type of option, such as TK_OPTION_COLOR;
+				 * see definitions above. Last option in table
+				 * must have type TK_OPTION_END. */
+    const char *optionName;	/* Name used to specify option in Tcl
 				 * commands. */
-    char *dbName;		/* Name for option in option database. */
-    char *dbClass;		/* Class for option in database. */
-    char *defValue;		/* Default value for option if not specified
-				 * in command line, the option database,
-				 * or the system. */
+    const char *dbName;		/* Name for option in option database. */
+    const char *dbClass;	/* Class for option in database. */
+    const char *defValue;	/* Default value for option if not specified
+				 * in command line, the option database, or
+				 * the system. */
     int objOffset;		/* Where in record to store a Tcl_Obj * that
 				 * holds the value of this option, specified
-				 * as an offset in bytes from the start of
-				 * the record. Use the Tk_Offset macro to
-				 * generate values for this.  -1 means don't
-				 * store the Tcl_Obj in the record. */
+				 * as an offset in bytes from the start of the
+				 * record. Use the Tk_Offset macro to generate
+				 * values for this. -1 means don't store the
+				 * Tcl_Obj in the record. */
     int internalOffset;		/* Where in record to store the internal
 				 * representation of the value of this option,
-				 * such as an int or XColor *.  This field
-				 * is specified as an offset in bytes
-				 * from the start of the record. Use the
-				 * Tk_Offset macro to generate values for it.
-				 * -1 means don't store the internal
-				 * representation in the record. */
+				 * such as an int or XColor *. This field is
+				 * specified as an offset in bytes from the
+				 * start of the record. Use the Tk_Offset
+				 * macro to generate values for it. -1 means
+				 * don't store the internal representation in
+				 * the record. */
     int flags;			/* Any combination of the values defined
 				 * below. */
     ClientData clientData;	/* An alternate place to put option-specific
-    				 * data. Used for the monochrome default value
+				 * data. Used for the monochrome default value
 				 * for colors, etc. */
-    int typeMask;		/* An arbitrary bit mask defined by the
-				 * class manager; typically bits correspond
-				 * to certain kinds of options such as all
-				 * those that require a redisplay when they
-				 * change.  Tk_SetOptions returns the bit-wise
-				 * OR of the typeMasks of all options that
-				 * were changed. */
+    int typeMask;		/* An arbitrary bit mask defined by the class
+				 * manager; typically bits correspond to
+				 * certain kinds of options such as all those
+				 * that require a redisplay when they change.
+				 * Tk_SetOptions returns the bit-wise OR of
+				 * the typeMasks of all options that were
+				 * changed. */
 } Tk_OptionSpec;
 
 /*
- * Flag values for Tk_OptionSpec structures.  These flags are shared by
- * Tk_ConfigSpec structures, so be sure to coordinate any changes
- * carefully.
+ * Flag values for Tk_OptionSpec structures. These flags are shared by
+ * Tk_ConfigSpec structures, so be sure to coordinate any changes carefully.
  */
 
 #define TK_OPTION_NULL_OK		(1 << 0)
@@ -218,28 +223,29 @@ typedef void (Tk_CustomOptionRestoreProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
 	Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr, char *saveInternalPtr));
 typedef void (Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
 	Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr));
-    
+
 typedef struct Tk_ObjCustomOption {
-    char *name;				/* Name of the custom option. */
-    Tk_CustomOptionSetProc *setProc;	/* Function to use to set a record's
-					 * option value from a Tcl_Obj */
-    Tk_CustomOptionGetProc *getProc;	/* Function to use to get a Tcl_Obj
-					 * representation from an internal
-					 * representation of an option. */
-    Tk_CustomOptionRestoreProc *restoreProc;	/* Function to use to restore a
-						 * saved value for the internal
-						 * representation. */
-    Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc *freeProc;	/* Function to use to free the internal
-					 * representation of an option. */
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Arbitrary one-word value passed to
-					 * the handling procs. */
+    const char *name; /* Name of the custom option. */
+    Tk_CustomOptionSetProc *setProc;
+				/* Function to use to set a record's option
+				 * value from a Tcl_Obj */
+    Tk_CustomOptionGetProc *getProc;
+				/* Function to use to get a Tcl_Obj
+				 * representation from an internal
+				 * representation of an option. */
+    Tk_CustomOptionRestoreProc *restoreProc;
+				/* Function to use to restore a saved value
+				 * for the internal representation. */
+    Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc *freeProc;
+				/* Function to use to free the internal
+				 * representation of an option. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary one-word value passed to the
+				 * handling procs. */
 } Tk_ObjCustomOption;
 
-
 /*
- * Macro to use to fill in "offset" fields of the Tk_OptionSpec.
- * struct.  Computes number of bytes from beginning of structure
- * to a given field.
+ * Macro to use to fill in "offset" fields of the Tk_OptionSpec structure.
+ * Computes number of bytes from beginning of structure to a given field.
  */
 
 #ifdef offsetof
@@ -249,34 +255,30 @@ typedef struct Tk_ObjCustomOption {
 #endif
 
 /*
- * The following two structures are used for error handling.  When
- * configuration options are being modified, the old values are
- * saved in a Tk_SavedOptions structure.  If an error occurs, then the
- * contents of the structure can be used to restore all of the old
- * values.  The contents of this structure are for the private use
- * Tk.  No-one outside Tk should ever read or write any of the fields
- * of these structures.
+ * The following two structures are used for error handling. When config
+ * options are being modified, the old values are saved in a Tk_SavedOptions
+ * structure. If an error occurs, then the contents of the structure can be
+ * used to restore all of the old values. The contents of this structure are
+ * for the private use Tk. No-one outside Tk should ever read or write any of
+ * the fields of these structures.
  */
 
 typedef struct Tk_SavedOption {
-    struct TkOption *optionPtr;		/* Points to information that describes
-					 * the option. */
-    Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;			/* The old value of the option, in
-					 * the form of a Tcl object; may be
-					 * NULL if the value wasn't saved as
-					 * an object. */
-    double internalForm;		/* The old value of the option, in
-					 * some internal representation such
-					 * as an int or (XColor *).  Valid
-					 * only if optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset
-					 * is < 0.  The space must be large
-					 * enough to accommodate a double, a
-					 * long, or a pointer; right now it
-					 * looks like a double is big
-					 * enough.  Also, using a double
-					 * guarantees that the field is
-					 * properly aligned for storing large
-					 * values. */
+    struct TkOption *optionPtr;	/* Points to information that describes the
+				 * option. */
+    Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;		/* The old value of the option, in the form of
+				 * a Tcl object; may be NULL if the value was
+				 * not saved as an object. */
+    double internalForm;	/* The old value of the option, in some
+				 * internal representation such as an int or
+				 * (XColor *). Valid only if the field
+				 * optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset is < 0. The
+				 * space must be large enough to accommodate a
+				 * double, a long, or a pointer; right now it
+				 * looks like a double (i.e., 8 bytes) is big
+				 * enough. Also, using a double guarantees
+				 * that the field is properly aligned for
+				 * storing large values. */
 } Tk_SavedOption;
 
 #ifdef TCL_MEM_DEBUG
@@ -286,31 +288,30 @@ typedef struct Tk_SavedOption {
 #endif
 
 typedef struct Tk_SavedOptions {
-    char *recordPtr;			/* The data structure in which to
-					 * restore configuration options. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window associated with recordPtr;
-					 * needed to restore certain options. */
-    int numItems;			/* The number of valid items in 
-					 * items field. */
+    char *recordPtr;		/* The data structure in which to restore
+				 * configuration options. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window associated with recordPtr; needed to
+				 * restore certain options. */
+    int numItems;		/* The number of valid items in items field. */
     Tk_SavedOption items[TK_NUM_SAVED_OPTIONS];
-					/* Items used to hold old values. */
-    struct Tk_SavedOptions *nextPtr;	/* Points to next structure in list;	
-					 * needed if too many options changed
-					 * to hold all the old values in a
-					 * single structure.  NULL means no
-					 * more structures. */
+				/* Items used to hold old values. */
+    struct Tk_SavedOptions *nextPtr;
+				/* Points to next structure in list; needed if
+				 * too many options changed to hold all the
+				 * old values in a single structure. NULL
+				 * means no more structures. */
 } Tk_SavedOptions;
 
 /*
- * Structure used to describe application-specific configuration
- * options:  indicates procedures to call to parse an option and
- * to return a text string describing an option. THESE ARE
- * DEPRECATED; PLEASE USE THE NEW STRUCTURES LISTED ABOVE.
+ * Structure used to describe application-specific configuration options:
+ * indicates procedures to call to parse an option and to return a text string
+ * describing an option. THESE ARE DEPRECATED; PLEASE USE THE NEW STRUCTURES
+ * LISTED ABOVE.
  */
 
 /*
- * This is a temporary flag used while tkObjConfig and new widgets
- * are in development.
+ * This is a temporary flag used while tkObjConfig and new widgets are in
+ * development.
  */
 
 #ifndef __NO_OLD_CONFIG
@@ -323,58 +324,58 @@ typedef char *(Tk_OptionPrintProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
 	Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
 
 typedef struct Tk_CustomOption {
-    Tk_OptionParseProc *parseProc;	/* Procedure to call to parse an
-					 * option and store it in converted
-					 * form. */
-    Tk_OptionPrintProc *printProc;	/* Procedure to return a printable
-					 * string describing an existing
-					 * option. */
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Arbitrary one-word value used by
-					 * option parser:  passed to
-					 * parseProc and printProc. */
+    Tk_OptionParseProc *parseProc;
+				/* Procedure to call to parse an option and
+				 * store it in converted form. */
+    Tk_OptionPrintProc *printProc;
+				/* Procedure to return a printable string
+				 * describing an existing option. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary one-word value used by option
+				 * parser: passed to parseProc and
+				 * printProc. */
 } Tk_CustomOption;
 
 /*
- * Structure used to specify information for Tk_ConfigureWidget.  Each
- * structure gives complete information for one option, including
- * how the option is specified on the command line, where it appears
- * in the option database, etc.
+ * Structure used to specify information for Tk_ConfigureWidget. Each
+ * structure gives complete information for one option, including how the
+ * option is specified on the command line, where it appears in the option
+ * database, etc.
  */
 
 typedef struct Tk_ConfigSpec {
     int type;			/* Type of option, such as TK_CONFIG_COLOR;
-				 * see definitions below.  Last option in
-				 * table must have type TK_CONFIG_END. */
-    char *argvName;		/* Switch used to specify option in argv.
-				 * NULL means this spec is part of a group. */
+				 * see definitions below. Last option in table
+				 * must have type TK_CONFIG_END. */
+    char *argvName;		/* Switch used to specify option in argv. NULL
+				 * means this spec is part of a group. */
     Tk_Uid dbName;		/* Name for option in option database. */
     Tk_Uid dbClass;		/* Class for option in database. */
-    Tk_Uid defValue;		/* Default value for option if not
-				 * specified in command line or database. */
-    int offset;			/* Where in widget record to store value;
-				 * use Tk_Offset macro to generate values
-				 * for this. */
+    Tk_Uid defValue;		/* Default value for option if not specified
+				 * in command line or database. */
+    int offset;			/* Where in widget record to store value; use
+				 * Tk_Offset macro to generate values for
+				 * this. */
     int specFlags;		/* Any combination of the values defined
-				 * below;  other bits are used internally
-				 * by tkConfig.c. */
-    Tk_CustomOption *customPtr;	/* If type is TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM then this is
-				 * a pointer to info about how to parse and
-				 * print the option.  Otherwise it is
+				 * below; other bits are used internally by
+				 * tkConfig.c. */
+    Tk_CustomOption *customPtr;	/* If type is TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM then this is a
+				 * pointer to info about how to parse and
+				 * print the option. Otherwise it is
 				 * irrelevant. */
 } Tk_ConfigSpec;
 
 /*
- * Type values for Tk_ConfigSpec structures.  See the user
- * documentation for details.
+ * Type values for Tk_ConfigSpec structures. See the user documentation for
+ * details.
  */
 
 typedef enum {
     TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, TK_CONFIG_INT, TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, TK_CONFIG_STRING,
     TK_CONFIG_UID, TK_CONFIG_COLOR, TK_CONFIG_FONT, TK_CONFIG_BITMAP,
-    TK_CONFIG_BORDER, TK_CONFIG_RELIEF, TK_CONFIG_CURSOR, 
-    TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR, TK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY, TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, 
+    TK_CONFIG_BORDER, TK_CONFIG_RELIEF, TK_CONFIG_CURSOR,
+    TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR, TK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY, TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR,
     TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, TK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE, TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE,
-    TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, TK_CONFIG_MM, TK_CONFIG_WINDOW, TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, 
+    TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, TK_CONFIG_MM, TK_CONFIG_WINDOW, TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM,
     TK_CONFIG_END
 } Tk_ConfigTypes;
 
@@ -386,10 +387,10 @@ typedef enum {
 #define TK_CONFIG_OBJS		0x80
 
 /*
- * Possible flag values for Tk_ConfigSpec structures.  Any bits at
- * or above TK_CONFIG_USER_BIT may be used by clients for selecting
- * certain entries.  Before changing any values here, coordinate with
- * tkOldConfig.c (internal-use-only flags are defined there).
+ * Possible flag values for Tk_ConfigSpec structures. Any bits at or above
+ * TK_CONFIG_USER_BIT may be used by clients for selecting certain entries.
+ * Before changing any values here, coordinate with tkOldConfig.c
+ * (internal-use-only flags are defined there).
  */
 
 #define TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK		(1 << 0)
@@ -405,14 +406,15 @@ typedef enum {
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    char *key;		/* The key string that flags the option in the
-			 * argv array. */
-    int type;		/* Indicates option type;  see below. */
-    char *src;		/* Value to be used in setting dst;  usage
-			 * depends on type. */
-    char *dst;		/* Address of value to be modified;  usage
-			 * depends on type. */
-    char *help;		/* Documentation message describing this option. */
+    char *key;			/* The key string that flags the option in the
+				 * argv array. */
+    int type;			/* Indicates option type; see below. */
+    char *src;			/* Value to be used in setting dst; usage
+				 * depends on type. */
+    char *dst;			/* Address of value to be modified; usage
+				 * depends on type. */
+    char *help;			/* Documentation message describing this
+				 * option. */
 } Tk_ArgvInfo;
 
 /*
@@ -444,8 +446,8 @@ typedef struct {
 #define TK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG	0x8
 
 /*
- * Enumerated type for describing actions to be taken in response
- * to a restrictProc established by Tk_RestrictEvents.
+ * Enumerated type for describing actions to be taken in response to a
+ * restrictProc established by Tk_RestrictEvents.
  */
 
 typedef enum {
@@ -483,10 +485,10 @@ typedef enum {
 #define TK_3D_DARK_GC		3
 
 /*
- * Special EnterNotify/LeaveNotify "mode" for use in events
- * generated by tkShare.c.  Pick a high enough value that it's
- * unlikely to conflict with existing values (like NotifyNormal)
- * or any new values defined in the future.
+ * Special EnterNotify/LeaveNotify "mode" for use in events generated by
+ * tkShare.c. Pick a high enough value that it's unlikely to conflict with
+ * existing values (like NotifyNormal) or any new values defined in the
+ * future.
  */
 
 #define TK_NOTIFY_SHARE		20
@@ -511,7 +513,7 @@ typedef enum {
 
 /*
  * The following structure is used by Tk_GetFontMetrics() to return
- * information about the properties of a Tk_Font.  
+ * information about the properties of a Tk_Font.
  */
 
 typedef struct Tk_FontMetrics {
@@ -523,9 +525,9 @@ typedef struct Tk_FontMetrics {
 				 * letter sticks below the baseline, plus any
 				 * extra blank space added by the designer of
 				 * the font. */
-    int linespace;		/* The sum of the ascent and descent.  How
-				 * far apart two lines of text in the same
-				 * font should be placed so that none of the
+    int linespace;		/* The sum of the ascent and descent. How far
+				 * apart two lines of text in the same font
+				 * should be placed so that none of the
 				 * characters in one line overlap any of the
 				 * characters in the other line. */
 } Tk_FontMetrics;
@@ -559,13 +561,12 @@ typedef void (Tk_ClassModalProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
 typedef struct Tk_ClassProcs {
     unsigned int size;
     Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc *worldChangedProc;
-				/* Procedure to invoke when the widget needs to
-				 * respond in some way to a change in the
+				/* Procedure to invoke when the widget needs
+				 * to respond in some way to a change in the
 				 * world (font changes, etc.) */
     Tk_ClassCreateProc *createProc;
-				/* Procedure to invoke when the
-				 * platform-dependent window needs to be
-                                 * created. */
+				/* Procedure to invoke when the platform-
+				 * dependent window needs to be created. */
     Tk_ClassModalProc *modalProc;
 				/* Procedure to invoke after all bindings on a
 				 * widget have been triggered in order to
@@ -573,8 +574,8 @@ typedef struct Tk_ClassProcs {
 } Tk_ClassProcs;
 
 /*
- * Simple accessor for Tk_ClassProcs structure.  Checks that the structure
- * is not NULL, then checks the size field and returns either the requested
+ * Simple accessor for Tk_ClassProcs structure. Checks that the structure is
+ * not NULL, then checks the size field and returns either the requested
  * field, if present, or NULL if the structure is too small to have the field
  * (or NULL if the structure is NULL).
  *
@@ -591,9 +592,9 @@ typedef struct Tk_ClassProcs {
     (((procs)->size <= Tk_Offset(Tk_ClassProcs, which)) ? NULL:(procs)->which))
 
 /*
- * Each geometry manager (the packer, the placer, etc.) is represented
- * by a structure of the following form, which indicates procedures
- * to invoke in the geometry manager to carry out certain functions.
+ * Each geometry manager (the packer, the placer, etc.) is represented by a
+ * structure of the following form, which indicates procedures to invoke in
+ * the geometry manager to carry out certain functions.
  */
 
 typedef void (Tk_GeomRequestProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
@@ -602,17 +603,17 @@ typedef void (Tk_GeomLostSlaveProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
 	Tk_Window tkwin));
 
 typedef struct Tk_GeomMgr {
-    char *name;			/* Name of the geometry manager (command
-				 * used to invoke it, or name of widget
-				 * class that allows embedded widgets). */
+    const char *name;		/* Name of the geometry manager (command used
+				 * to invoke it, or name of widget class that
+				 * allows embedded widgets). */
     Tk_GeomRequestProc *requestProc;
 				/* Procedure to invoke when a slave's
 				 * requested geometry changes. */
     Tk_GeomLostSlaveProc *lostSlaveProc;
-				/* Procedure to invoke when a slave is
-				 * taken away from one geometry manager
-				 * by another.  NULL means geometry manager
-				 * doesn't care when slaves are lost. */
+				/* Procedure to invoke when a slave is taken
+				 * away from one geometry manager by another.
+				 * NULL means geometry manager doesn't care
+				 * when slaves are lost. */
 } Tk_GeomMgr;
 
 /*
@@ -644,40 +645,45 @@ typedef struct Tk_GeomMgr {
 
 /*
  * A virtual event shares most of its fields with the XKeyEvent and
- * XButtonEvent structures.  99% of the time a virtual event will be
- * an abstraction of a key or button event, so this structure provides
- * the most information to the user.  The only difference is the changing
- * of the detail field for a virtual event so that it holds the name of the
- * virtual event being triggered.
+ * XButtonEvent structures. 99% of the time a virtual event will be an
+ * abstraction of a key or button event, so this structure provides the most
+ * information to the user. The only difference is the changing of the detail
+ * field for a virtual event so that it holds the name of the virtual event
+ * being triggered.
  *
- * When using this structure, if you want your code to work correctly
- * in Tk 8.5 as well, you should ensure that you zero out all the
+ * When using this structure, you should ensure that you zero out all the
  * fields first using memset() or bzero().
  */
 
 typedef struct {
     int type;
-    unsigned long serial;   /* # of last request processed by server */
-    Bool send_event;	    /* True if this came from a SendEvent request */
-    Display *display;	    /* Display the event was read from */
-    Window event;	    /* Window on which event was requested. */
-    Window root;	    /* root window that the event occured on */
-    Window subwindow;	    /* child window */
-    Time time;		    /* milliseconds */
-    int x, y;		    /* pointer x, y coordinates in event window */
-    int x_root, y_root;	    /* coordinates relative to root */
-    unsigned int state;	    /* key or button mask */
-    Tk_Uid name;	    /* Name of virtual event. */
-    Bool same_screen;	    /* same screen flag */
-    Tcl_Obj *user_data;		/* not used in Tk 8.4 */
+    unsigned long serial;	/* # of last request processed by server. */
+    Bool send_event;		/* True if this came from a SendEvent
+				 * request. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display the event was read from. */
+    Window event;		/* Window on which event was requested. */
+    Window root;		/* Root window that the event occured on. */
+    Window subwindow;		/* Child window. */
+    Time time;			/* Milliseconds. */
+    int x, y;			/* Pointer x, y coordinates in event
+				 * window. */
+    int x_root, y_root;		/* Coordinates relative to root. */
+    unsigned int state;		/* Key or button mask */
+    Tk_Uid name;		/* Name of virtual event. */
+    Bool same_screen;		/* Same screen flag. */
+    Tcl_Obj *user_data;		/* Application-specific data reference; Tk
+				 * will decrement the reference count *once*
+				 * when it has finished processing the
+				 * event. */
 } XVirtualEvent;
 
 typedef struct {
     int type;
-    unsigned long serial;   /* # of last request processed by server */
-    Bool send_event;	    /* True if this came from a SendEvent request */
-    Display *display;	    /* Display the event was read from */
-    Window window;	    /* Window in which event occurred. */
+    unsigned long serial;	/* # of last request processed by server. */
+    Bool send_event;		/* True if this came from a SendEvent
+				 * request. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display the event was read from. */
+    Window window;		/* Window in which event occurred. */
 } XActivateDeactivateEvent;
 typedef XActivateDeactivateEvent XActivateEvent;
 typedef XActivateDeactivateEvent XDeactivateEvent;
@@ -685,29 +691,29 @@ typedef XActivateDeactivateEvent XDeactivateEvent;
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Macros for querying Tk_Window structures.  See the
- * manual entries for documentation.
+ * Macros for querying Tk_Window structures. See the manual entries for
+ * documentation.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-#define Tk_Display(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->display)
-#define Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->screenNum)
-#define Tk_Screen(tkwin)		(ScreenOfDisplay(Tk_Display(tkwin), \
-	Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin)))
-#define Tk_Depth(tkwin)			(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->depth)
-#define Tk_Visual(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->visual)
-#define Tk_WindowId(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->window)
-#define Tk_PathName(tkwin) 		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->pathName)
-#define Tk_Name(tkwin)			(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->nameUid)
-#define Tk_Class(tkwin) 		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->classUid)
-#define Tk_X(tkwin)			(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->changes.x)
-#define Tk_Y(tkwin)			(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->changes.y)
-#define Tk_Width(tkwin)			(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->changes.width)
+#define Tk_Display(tkwin)	(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->display)
+#define Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin)	(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->screenNum)
+#define Tk_Screen(tkwin) \
+    (ScreenOfDisplay(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin)))
+#define Tk_Depth(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->depth)
+#define Tk_Visual(tkwin)	(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->visual)
+#define Tk_WindowId(tkwin)	(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->window)
+#define Tk_PathName(tkwin) 	(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->pathName)
+#define Tk_Name(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->nameUid)
+#define Tk_Class(tkwin) 	(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->classUid)
+#define Tk_X(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->changes.x)
+#define Tk_Y(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->changes.y)
+#define Tk_Width(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->changes.width)
 #define Tk_Height(tkwin) \
     (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->changes.height)
-#define Tk_Changes(tkwin)		(&((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->changes)
-#define Tk_Attributes(tkwin)		(&((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->atts)
+#define Tk_Changes(tkwin)	(&((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->changes)
+#define Tk_Attributes(tkwin)	(&((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->atts)
 #define Tk_IsEmbedded(tkwin) \
     (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)
 #define Tk_IsContainer(tkwin) \
@@ -722,8 +728,10 @@ typedef XActivateDeactivateEvent XDeactivateEvent;
     (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_WIN_MANAGED)
 #define Tk_TopWinHierarchy(tkwin) \
     (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY)
-#define Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqWidth)
-#define Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqHeight)
+#define Tk_IsManageable(tkwin) \
+    (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_WM_MANAGEABLE)
+#define Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin)	(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqWidth)
+#define Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin)	(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqHeight)
 /* Tk_InternalBorderWidth is deprecated */
 #define Tk_InternalBorderWidth(tkwin) \
     (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderLeft)
@@ -735,20 +743,19 @@ typedef XActivateDeactivateEvent XDeactivateEvent;
     (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderTop)
 #define Tk_InternalBorderBottom(tkwin) \
     (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderBottom)
-#define Tk_MinReqWidth(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->minReqWidth)
-#define Tk_MinReqHeight(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->minReqHeight)
-#define Tk_Parent(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->parentPtr)
-#define Tk_Colormap(tkwin)		(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->atts.colormap)
+#define Tk_MinReqWidth(tkwin)	(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->minReqWidth)
+#define Tk_MinReqHeight(tkwin)	(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->minReqHeight)
+#define Tk_Parent(tkwin)	(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->parentPtr)
+#define Tk_Colormap(tkwin)	(((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->atts.colormap)
 
 /*
- * The structure below is needed by the macros above so that they can
- * access the fields of a Tk_Window.  The fields not needed by the macros
- * are declared as "dummyX".  The structure has its own type in order to
- * prevent applications from accessing Tk_Window fields except using
- * official macros.  WARNING!! The structure definition must be kept
- * consistent with the TkWindow structure in tkInt.h.  If you change one,
- * then change the other.  See the declaration in tkInt.h for
- * documentation on what the fields are used for internally.
+ * The structure below is needed by the macros above so that they can access
+ * the fields of a Tk_Window. The fields not needed by the macros are declared
+ * as "dummyX". The structure has its own type in order to prevent apps from
+ * accessing Tk_Window fields except using official macros. WARNING!! The
+ * structure definition must be kept consistent with the TkWindow structure in
+ * tkInt.h. If you change one, then change the other. See the declaration in
+ * tkInt.h for documentation on what the fields are used for internally.
  */
 
 typedef struct Tk_FakeWin {
@@ -803,69 +810,65 @@ typedef struct Tk_FakeWin {
  * TK_ALREADY_DEAD:		1 means the window is in the process of
  *				being destroyed already.
  * TK_NEED_CONFIG_NOTIFY:	1 means that the window has been reconfigured
- *				before it was made to exist.  At the time of
+ *				before it was made to exist. At the time of
  *				making it exist a ConfigureNotify event needs
  *				to be generated.
- * TK_GRAB_FLAG:		Used to manage grabs.  See tkGrab.c for
- *				details.
+ * TK_GRAB_FLAG:		Used to manage grabs. See tkGrab.c for details
  * TK_CHECKED_IC:		1 means we've already tried to get an input
- *				context for this window;  if the ic field
- *				is NULL it means that there isn't a context
- *				for the field.
+ *				context for this window; if the ic field is
+ *				NULL it means that there isn't a context for
+ *				the field.
  * TK_DONT_DESTROY_WINDOW:	1 means that Tk_DestroyWindow should not
  *				invoke XDestroyWindow to destroy this widget's
- *				X window.  The flag is set when the window
- *				has already been destroyed elsewhere (e.g.
- *				by another application) or when it will be
- *				destroyed later (e.g. by destroying its
- *				parent).
+ *				X window. The flag is set when the window has
+ *				already been destroyed elsewhere (e.g. by
+ *				another application) or when it will be
+ *				destroyed later (e.g. by destroying its parent)
  * TK_WM_COLORMAP_WINDOW:	1 means that this window has at some time
  *				appeared in the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property
- *				for its toplevel, so we have to remove it
- *				from that property if the window is
- *				deleted and the toplevel isn't.
+ *				for its toplevel, so we have to remove it from
+ *				that property if the window is deleted and the
+ *				toplevel isn't.
  * TK_EMBEDDED:			1 means that this window (which must be a
  *				toplevel) is not a free-standing window but
  *				rather is embedded in some other application.
  * TK_CONTAINER:		1 means that this window is a container, and
- *				that some other application (either in
- *				this process or elsewhere) may be
- *				embedding itself inside the window.
+ *				that some other application (either in this
+ *				process or elsewhere) may be embedding itself
+ *				inside the window.
  * TK_BOTH_HALVES:		1 means that this window is used for
- *				application embedding (either as
- *				container or embedded application), and
- *				both the containing and embedded halves
- *				are associated with windows in this
- *				particular process.
+ *				application embedding (either as container or
+ *				embedded application), and both the containing
+ *				and embedded halves are associated with
+ *				windows in this particular process.
  * TK_DEFER_MODAL:		1 means that this window has deferred a modal
  *				loop until all of the bindings for the current
  *				event have been invoked.
- * TK_WRAPPER:			1 means that this window is the extra
- *				wrapper window created around a toplevel
- *				to hold the menubar under Unix.  See
- *				tkUnixWm.c for more information.
+ * TK_WRAPPER:			1 means that this window is the extra wrapper
+ *				window created around a toplevel to hold the
+ *				menubar under Unix. See tkUnixWm.c for more
+ *				information.
  * TK_REPARENTED:		1 means that this window has been reparented
  *				so that as far as the window system is
- *				concerned it isn't a child of its Tk
- *				parent.  Initially this is used only for
- *				special Unix menubar windows.
+ *				concerned it isn't a child of its Tk parent.
+ *				Initially this is used only for special Unix
+ *				menubar windows.
  * TK_ANONYMOUS_WINDOW:		1 means that this window has no name, and is
  *				thus not accessible from Tk.
  * TK_HAS_WRAPPER		1 means that this window has a wrapper window
- * TK_WIN_MANAGED		1 means that this window is a child of the
- *				root window, and is managed by the window
- *				manager.
- * TK_TOP_HIERARCHY		1 means this window is at the top of a
- *				physical window hierarchy within this
- *				process, i.e. the window's parent
- *				either doesn't exist or is not owned by
- *				this Tk application.
- * TK_PROP_PROPCHANGE		1 means that PropertyNotify events in
- *				this window's children should propagate
- *				up to this window.
+ * TK_WIN_MANAGED		1 means that this window is a child of the root
+ *				window, and is managed by the window manager.
+ * TK_TOP_HIERARCHY		1 means this window is at the top of a physical
+ *				window hierarchy within this process, i.e. the
+ *				window's parent either doesn't exist or is not
+ *				owned by this Tk application.
+ * TK_PROP_PROPCHANGE		1 means that PropertyNotify events in the
+ *				window's children should propagate up to this
+ *				window.
+ * TK_WM_MANAGEABLE		1 marks a window as capable of being converted
+ *				into a toplevel using [wm manage].
  */
 
-
 #define TK_MAPPED		1
 #define TK_TOP_LEVEL		2
 #define TK_ALREADY_DEAD		4
@@ -885,12 +888,12 @@ typedef struct Tk_FakeWin {
 #define TK_WIN_MANAGED		0x10000
 #define TK_TOP_HIERARCHY	0x20000
 #define TK_PROP_PROPCHANGE	0x40000
+#define TK_WM_MANAGEABLE	0x80000
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Procedure prototypes and structures used for defining new canvas
- * items:
+ * Procedure prototypes and structures used for defining new canvas items:
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -911,54 +914,48 @@ typedef struct Tk_SmoothMethod {
 } Tk_SmoothMethod;
 
 /*
- * For each item in a canvas widget there exists one record with
- * the following structure.  Each actual item is represented by
- * a record with the following stuff at its beginning, plus additional
- * type-specific stuff after that.
+ * For each item in a canvas widget there exists one record with the following
+ * structure. Each actual item is represented by a record with the following
+ * stuff at its beginning, plus additional type-specific stuff after that.
  */
 
 #define TK_TAG_SPACE 3
 
-typedef struct Tk_Item  {
-    int id;				/* Unique identifier for this item
-					 * (also serves as first tag for
-					 * item). */
-    struct Tk_Item *nextPtr;		/* Next in display list of all
-					 * items in this canvas.  Later items
-					 * in list are drawn on top of earlier
-					 * ones. */
-    Tk_Uid staticTagSpace[TK_TAG_SPACE];/* Built-in space for limited # of
-					 * tags. */
-    Tk_Uid *tagPtr;			/* Pointer to array of tags.  Usually
-					 * points to staticTagSpace, but
-					 * may point to malloc-ed space if
-					 * there are lots of tags. */
-    int tagSpace;			/* Total amount of tag space available
-					 * at tagPtr. */
-    int numTags;			/* Number of tag slots actually used
-					 * at *tagPtr. */
-    struct Tk_ItemType *typePtr;	/* Table of procedures that implement
-					 * this type of item. */
-    int x1, y1, x2, y2;			/* Bounding box for item, in integer
-					 * canvas units. Set by item-specific
-					 * code and guaranteed to contain every
-					 * pixel drawn in item.  Item area
-					 * includes x1 and y1 but not x2
-					 * and y2. */
-    struct Tk_Item *prevPtr;		/* Previous in display list of all
-					 * items in this canvas. Later items
-					 * in list are drawn just below earlier
-					 * ones. */
-    Tk_State state;			/* state of item */
-    char *reserved1;			/* reserved for future use */
-    int redraw_flags;			/* some flags used in the canvas */
+typedef struct Tk_Item {
+    int id;			/* Unique identifier for this item (also
+				 * serves as first tag for item). */
+    struct Tk_Item *nextPtr;	/* Next in display list of all items in this
+				 * canvas. Later items in list are drawn on
+				 * top of earlier ones. */
+    Tk_Uid staticTagSpace[TK_TAG_SPACE];
+				/* Built-in space for limited # of tags. */
+    Tk_Uid *tagPtr;		/* Pointer to array of tags. Usually points to
+				 * staticTagSpace, but may point to malloc-ed
+				 * space if there are lots of tags. */
+    int tagSpace;		/* Total amount of tag space available at
+				 * tagPtr. */
+    int numTags;		/* Number of tag slots actually used at
+				 * *tagPtr. */
+    struct Tk_ItemType *typePtr;/* Table of procedures that implement this
+				 * type of item. */
+    int x1, y1, x2, y2;		/* Bounding box for item, in integer canvas
+				 * units. Set by item-specific code and
+				 * guaranteed to contain every pixel drawn in
+				 * item. Item area includes x1 and y1 but not
+				 * x2 and y2. */
+    struct Tk_Item *prevPtr;	/* Previous in display list of all items in
+				 * this canvas. Later items in list are drawn
+				 * just below earlier ones. */
+    Tk_State state;		/* State of item. */
+    char *reserved1;		/* reserved for future use */
+    int redraw_flags;		/* Some flags used in the canvas */
 
     /*
      *------------------------------------------------------------------
-     * Starting here is additional type-specific stuff;  see the
-     * declarations for individual types to see what is part of
-     * each type.  The actual space below is determined by the
-     * "itemInfoSize" of the type's Tk_ItemType record.
+     * Starting here is additional type-specific stuff; see the declarations
+     * for individual types to see what is part of each type. The actual space
+     * below is determined by the "itemInfoSize" of the type's Tk_ItemType
+     * record.
      *------------------------------------------------------------------
      */
 } Tk_Item;
@@ -966,20 +963,19 @@ typedef struct Tk_Item  {
 /*
  * Flag bits for canvases (redraw_flags):
  *
- * TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT -	1 means that object needs to be
- *				redrawn if the canvas state changes.
- * TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW - 	1 means that the object redraw is already
- *				been prepared, so the general canvas code
- *				doesn't need to do that any more.
+ * TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT -	1 means that object needs to be redrawn if the
+ *				canvas state changes.
+ * TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW - 	1 means that the object redraw is already been
+ *				prepared, so the general canvas code doesn't
+ *				need to do that any more.
  */
 
 #define TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT		1
 #define TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW		2
 
 /*
- * Records of the following type are used to describe a type of
- * item (e.g.  lines, circles, etc.) that can form part of a
- * canvas widget.
+ * Records of the following type are used to describe a type of item (e.g.
+ * lines, circles, etc.) that can form part of a canvas widget.
  */
 
 #ifdef USE_OLD_CANVAS
@@ -995,13 +991,13 @@ typedef int	Tk_ItemCoordProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
 #else
 typedef int	Tk_ItemCreateProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
 		    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc,
-		    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
+		    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]));
 typedef int	Tk_ItemConfigureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
 		    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc,
-		    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags));
+		    Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int flags));
 typedef int	Tk_ItemCoordProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
 		    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc,
-		    Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[]));
+		    Tcl_Obj *const argv[]));
 #endif
 typedef void	Tk_ItemDeleteProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
 		    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display));
@@ -1035,100 +1031,103 @@ typedef void	Tk_ItemDCharsProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
 #ifndef __NO_OLD_CONFIG
 
 typedef struct Tk_ItemType {
-    char *name;				/* The name of this type of item, such
-					 * as "line". */
-    int itemSize;			/* Total amount of space needed for
-					 * item's record. */
-    Tk_ItemCreateProc *createProc;	/* Procedure to create a new item of
-					 * this type. */
-    Tk_ConfigSpec *configSpecs;		/* Pointer to array of configuration
-					 * specs for this type.  Used for
-					 * returning configuration info. */
-    Tk_ItemConfigureProc *configProc;	/* Procedure to call to change
-					 * configuration options. */
-    Tk_ItemCoordProc *coordProc;	/* Procedure to call to get and set
-					 * the item's coordinates. */
-    Tk_ItemDeleteProc *deleteProc;	/* Procedure to delete existing item of
-					 * this type. */
-    Tk_ItemDisplayProc *displayProc;	/* Procedure to display items of
-					 * this type. */
-    int alwaysRedraw;			/* Non-zero means displayProc should
-					 * be called even when the item has
-  					 * been moved off-screen. */
-    Tk_ItemPointProc *pointProc;	/* Computes distance from item to
-					 * a given point. */
-    Tk_ItemAreaProc *areaProc;		/* Computes whether item is inside,
-					 * outside, or overlapping an area. */
+    char *name;			/* The name of this type of item, such as
+				 * "line". */
+    int itemSize;		/* Total amount of space needed for item's
+				 * record. */
+    Tk_ItemCreateProc *createProc;
+				/* Procedure to create a new item of this
+				 * type. */
+    Tk_ConfigSpec *configSpecs;	/* Pointer to array of configuration specs for
+				 * this type. Used for returning configuration
+				 * info. */
+    Tk_ItemConfigureProc *configProc;
+				/* Procedure to call to change configuration
+				 * options. */
+    Tk_ItemCoordProc *coordProc;/* Procedure to call to get and set the item's
+				 * coordinates. */
+    Tk_ItemDeleteProc *deleteProc;
+				/* Procedure to delete existing item of this
+				 * type. */
+    Tk_ItemDisplayProc *displayProc;
+				/* Procedure to display items of this type. */
+    int alwaysRedraw;		/* Non-zero means displayProc should be called
+				 * even when the item has been moved
+				 * off-screen. */
+    Tk_ItemPointProc *pointProc;/* Computes distance from item to a given
+				 * point. */
+    Tk_ItemAreaProc *areaProc;	/* Computes whether item is inside, outside,
+				 * or overlapping an area. */
     Tk_ItemPostscriptProc *postscriptProc;
-					/* Procedure to write a Postscript
-					 * description for items of this
-					 * type. */
-    Tk_ItemScaleProc *scaleProc;	/* Procedure to rescale items of
-					 * this type. */
-    Tk_ItemTranslateProc *translateProc;/* Procedure to translate items of
-					 * this type. */
-    Tk_ItemIndexProc *indexProc;	/* Procedure to determine index of
-					 * indicated character.  NULL if
-					 * item doesn't support indexing. */
-    Tk_ItemCursorProc *icursorProc;	/* Procedure to set insert cursor pos.
-					 * to just before a given position. */
-    Tk_ItemSelectionProc *selectionProc;/* Procedure to return selection (in
-					 * STRING format) when it is in this
-					 * item. */
-    Tk_ItemInsertProc *insertProc;	/* Procedure to insert something into
-					 * an item. */
-    Tk_ItemDCharsProc *dCharsProc;	/* Procedure to delete characters
-					 * from an item. */
-    struct Tk_ItemType *nextPtr;	/* Used to link types together into
-					 * a list. */
-    char *reserved1;			/* Reserved for future extension. */
-    int   reserved2;			/* Carefully compatible with */
-    char *reserved3;			/* Jan Nijtmans dash patch */
+				/* Procedure to write a Postscript description
+				 * for items of this type. */
+    Tk_ItemScaleProc *scaleProc;/* Procedure to rescale items of this type. */
+    Tk_ItemTranslateProc *translateProc;
+				/* Procedure to translate items of this
+				 * type. */
+    Tk_ItemIndexProc *indexProc;/* Procedure to determine index of indicated
+				 * character. NULL if item doesn't support
+				 * indexing. */
+    Tk_ItemCursorProc *icursorProc;
+				/* Procedure to set insert cursor posn to just
+				 * before a given position. */
+    Tk_ItemSelectionProc *selectionProc;
+				/* Procedure to return selection (in STRING
+				 * format) when it is in this item. */
+    Tk_ItemInsertProc *insertProc;
+				/* Procedure to insert something into an
+				 * item. */
+    Tk_ItemDCharsProc *dCharsProc;
+				/* Procedure to delete characters from an
+				 * item. */
+    struct Tk_ItemType *nextPtr;/* Used to link types together into a list. */
+    char *reserved1;		/* Reserved for future extension. */
+    int reserved2;		/* Carefully compatible with */
+    char *reserved3;		/* Jan Nijtmans dash patch */
     char *reserved4;
 } Tk_ItemType;
 
 #endif
 
 /*
- * The following structure provides information about the selection and
- * the insertion cursor.  It is needed by only a few items, such as
- * those that display text.  It is shared by the generic canvas code
- * and the item-specific code, but most of the fields should be written
- * only by the canvas generic code.
+ * The following structure provides information about the selection and the
+ * insertion cursor. It is needed by only a few items, such as those that
+ * display text. It is shared by the generic canvas code and the item-specific
+ * code, but most of the fields should be written only by the canvas generic
+ * code.
  */
 
 typedef struct Tk_CanvasTextInfo {
     Tk_3DBorder selBorder;	/* Border and background for selected
-				 * characters.  Read-only to items.*/
-    int selBorderWidth;		/* Width of border around selection. 
-				 * Read-only to items. */
+				 * characters. Read-only to items.*/
+    int selBorderWidth;		/* Width of border around selection. Read-only
+				 * to items. */
     XColor *selFgColorPtr;	/* Foreground color for selected text.
 				 * Read-only to items. */
-    Tk_Item *selItemPtr;	/* Pointer to selected item.  NULL means
-				 * selection isn't in this canvas.
-				 * Writable by items. */
+    Tk_Item *selItemPtr;	/* Pointer to selected item. NULL means
+				 * selection isn't in this canvas. Writable by
+				 * items. */
     int selectFirst;		/* Character index of first selected
-				 * character.  Writable by items. */
-    int selectLast;		/* Character index of last selected
-				 * character.  Writable by items. */
-    Tk_Item *anchorItemPtr;	/* Item corresponding to "selectAnchor":
-				 * not necessarily selItemPtr.   Read-only
-				 * to items. */
-    int selectAnchor;		/* Character index of fixed end of
-				 * selection (i.e. "select to" operation will
-				 * use this as one end of the selection).
+				 * character. Writable by items. */
+    int selectLast;		/* Character index of last selected character.
 				 * Writable by items. */
+    Tk_Item *anchorItemPtr;	/* Item corresponding to "selectAnchor": not
+				 * necessarily selItemPtr. Read-only to
+				 * items. */
+    int selectAnchor;		/* Character index of fixed end of selection
+				 * (i.e. "select to" operation will use this
+				 * as one end of the selection). Writable by
+				 * items. */
     Tk_3DBorder insertBorder;	/* Used to draw vertical bar for insertion
-				 * cursor.  Read-only to items. */
-    int insertWidth;		/* Total width of insertion cursor.  Read-only
+				 * cursor. Read-only to items. */
+    int insertWidth;		/* Total width of insertion cursor. Read-only
 				 * to items. */
     int insertBorderWidth;	/* Width of 3-D border around insert cursor.
 				 * Read-only to items. */
-    Tk_Item *focusItemPtr;	/* Item that currently has the input focus,
-				 * or NULL if no such item.  Read-only to
-				 * items.  */
+    Tk_Item *focusItemPtr;	/* Item that currently has the input focus, or
+				 * NULL if no such item. Read-only to items. */
     int gotFocus;		/* Non-zero means that the canvas widget has
-				 * the input focus.  Read-only to items.*/
+				 * the input focus. Read-only to items.*/
     int cursorOn;		/* Non-zero means that an insertion cursor
 				 * should be displayed in focusItemPtr.
 				 * Read-only to items.*/
@@ -1147,7 +1146,7 @@ typedef struct Tk_Dash {
 } Tk_Dash;
 
 typedef struct Tk_TSOffset {
-    int flags;			/* flags; see below for possible values */
+    int flags;			/* Flags; see below for possible values */
     int xoffset;		/* x offset */
     int yoffset;		/* y offset */
 } Tk_TSOffset;
@@ -1170,22 +1169,23 @@ typedef struct Tk_Outline {
     double width;		/* Width of outline. */
     double activeWidth;		/* Width of outline. */
     double disabledWidth;	/* Width of outline. */
-    int offset;			/* Dash offset */
-    Tk_Dash dash;		/* Dash pattern */
-    Tk_Dash activeDash;		/* Dash pattern if state is active*/
-    Tk_Dash disabledDash;	/* Dash pattern if state is disabled*/
-    VOID *reserved1;		/* reserved for future expansion */
+    int offset;			/* Dash offset. */
+    Tk_Dash dash;		/* Dash pattern. */
+    Tk_Dash activeDash;		/* Dash pattern if state is active. */
+    Tk_Dash disabledDash;	/* Dash pattern if state is disabled. */
+    VOID *reserved1;		/* Reserved for future expansion. */
     VOID *reserved2;
     VOID *reserved3;
-    Tk_TSOffset tsoffset;	/* stipple offset for outline*/
+    Tk_TSOffset tsoffset;	/* Stipple offset for outline. */
     XColor *color;		/* Outline color. */
     XColor *activeColor;	/* Outline color if state is active. */
     XColor *disabledColor;	/* Outline color if state is disabled. */
     Pixmap stipple;		/* Outline Stipple pattern. */
-    Pixmap activeStipple;	/* Outline Stipple pattern if state is active. */
-    Pixmap disabledStipple;	/* Outline Stipple pattern if state is disabled. */
+    Pixmap activeStipple;	/* Outline Stipple pattern if state is
+				 * active. */
+    Pixmap disabledStipple;	/* Outline Stipple pattern if state is
+				 * disabled. */
 } Tk_Outline;
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -1202,7 +1202,7 @@ typedef int (Tk_ImageCreateProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
 	Tk_ImageMaster master, ClientData *masterDataPtr));
 #else
 typedef int (Tk_ImageCreateProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-	char *name, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], Tk_ImageType *typePtr,
+	char *name, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], Tk_ImageType *typePtr,
 	Tk_ImageMaster master, ClientData *masterDataPtr));
 #endif
 typedef ClientData (Tk_ImageGetProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
@@ -1221,39 +1221,37 @@ typedef int (Tk_ImagePostscriptProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
 	int x, int y, int width, int height, int prepass));
 
 /*
- * The following structure represents a particular type of image
- * (bitmap, xpm image, etc.).  It provides information common to
- * all images of that type, such as the type name and a collection
- * of procedures in the image manager that respond to various
- * events.  Each image manager is represented by one of these
- * structures.
+ * The following structure represents a particular type of image (bitmap, xpm
+ * image, etc.). It provides information common to all images of that type,
+ * such as the type name and a collection of procedures in the image manager
+ * that respond to various events. Each image manager is represented by one of
+ * these structures.
  */
 
 struct Tk_ImageType {
     char *name;			/* Name of image type. */
     Tk_ImageCreateProc *createProc;
-				/* Procedure to call to create a new image
-				 * of this type. */
+				/* Procedure to call to create a new image of
+				 * this type. */
     Tk_ImageGetProc *getProc;	/* Procedure to call the first time
-				 * Tk_GetImage is called in a new way
-				 * (new visual or screen). */
+				 * Tk_GetImage is called in a new way (new
+				 * visual or screen). */
     Tk_ImageDisplayProc *displayProc;
 				/* Call to draw image, in response to
 				 * Tk_RedrawImage calls. */
-    Tk_ImageFreeProc *freeProc;	/* Procedure to call whenever Tk_FreeImage
-				 * is called to release an instance of an
+    Tk_ImageFreeProc *freeProc;	/* Procedure to call whenever Tk_FreeImage is
+				 * called to release an instance of an
 				 * image. */
     Tk_ImageDeleteProc *deleteProc;
-				/* Procedure to call to delete image.  It
-				 * will not be called until after freeProc
-				 * has been called for each instance of the
-				 * image. */
+				/* Procedure to call to delete image. It will
+				 * not be called until after freeProc has been
+				 * called for each instance of the image. */
     Tk_ImagePostscriptProc *postscriptProc;
 				/* Procedure to call to produce postscript
 				 * output for the image. */
     struct Tk_ImageType *nextPtr;
 				/* Next in list of all image types currently
-				 * known.  Filled in by Tk, not by image
+				 * known. Filled in by Tk, not by image
 				 * manager. */
     char *reserved;		/* reserved for future expansion */
 };
@@ -1267,8 +1265,8 @@ struct Tk_ImageType {
  */
 
 /*
- * The following type is used to identify a particular photo image
- * to be manipulated:
+ * The following type is used to identify a particular photo image to be
+ * manipulated:
  */
 
 typedef void *Tk_PhotoHandle;
@@ -1279,29 +1277,28 @@ typedef void *Tk_PhotoHandle;
 
 typedef struct Tk_PhotoImageBlock {
     unsigned char *pixelPtr;	/* Pointer to the first pixel. */
-    int		width;		/* Width of block, in pixels. */
-    int		height;		/* Height of block, in pixels. */
-    int		pitch;		/* Address difference between corresponding
+    int width;			/* Width of block, in pixels. */
+    int height;			/* Height of block, in pixels. */
+    int pitch;			/* Address difference between corresponding
 				 * pixels in successive lines. */
-    int		pixelSize;	/* Address difference between successive
+    int pixelSize;		/* Address difference between successive
 				 * pixels in the same line. */
-    int		offset[4];	/* Address differences between the red, green,
+    int offset[4];		/* Address differences between the red, green,
 				 * blue and alpha components of the pixel and
 				 * the pixel as a whole. */
 } Tk_PhotoImageBlock;
 
 /*
- * The following values control how blocks are combined into photo
- * images when the alpha component of a pixel is not 255, a.k.a. the
- * compositing rule.
+ * The following values control how blocks are combined into photo images when
+ * the alpha component of a pixel is not 255, a.k.a. the compositing rule.
  */
 
 #define TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY	0
 #define TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET		1
 
 /*
- * Procedure prototypes and structures used in reading and
- * writing photo images:
+ * Procedure prototypes and structures used in reading and writing photo
+ * images:
  */
 
 typedef struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat Tk_PhotoImageFormat;
@@ -1324,68 +1321,61 @@ typedef int (Tk_ImageStringWriteProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
 	Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
 #else
 typedef int (Tk_ImageFileMatchProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan,
-	CONST char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr,
+	const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr,
 	int *heightPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp));
 typedef int (Tk_ImageStringMatchProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *dataObj,
 	Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
 	Tcl_Interp *interp));
 typedef int (Tk_ImageFileReadProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-	Tcl_Channel chan, CONST char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format,
+	Tcl_Channel chan, const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format,
 	Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY,
 	int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY));
 typedef int (Tk_ImageStringReadProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
 	Tcl_Obj *dataObj, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle,
 	int destX, int destY, int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY));
 typedef int (Tk_ImageFileWriteProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-	CONST char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
+	const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
 typedef int (Tk_ImageStringWriteProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
 	Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
 #endif
 
 /*
- * The following structure represents a particular file format for
- * storing images (e.g., PPM, GIF, JPEG, etc.).  It provides information
- * to allow image files of that format to be recognized and read into
- * a photo image.
+ * The following structure represents a particular file format for storing
+ * images (e.g., PPM, GIF, JPEG, etc.). It provides information to allow image
+ * files of that format to be recognized and read into a photo image.
  */
 
 struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat {
     char *name;			/* Name of image file format */
     Tk_ImageFileMatchProc *fileMatchProc;
-				/* Procedure to call to determine whether
-				 * an image file matches this format. */
+				/* Procedure to call to determine whether an
+				 * image file matches this format. */
     Tk_ImageStringMatchProc *stringMatchProc;
-				/* Procedure to call to determine whether
-				 * the data in a string matches this format. */
+				/* Procedure to call to determine whether the
+				 * data in a string matches this format. */
     Tk_ImageFileReadProc *fileReadProc;
-				/* Procedure to call to read data from
-				 * an image file into a photo image. */
+				/* Procedure to call to read data from an
+				 * image file into a photo image. */
     Tk_ImageStringReadProc *stringReadProc;
-				/* Procedure to call to read data from
-				 * a string into a photo image. */
+				/* Procedure to call to read data from a
+				 * string into a photo image. */
     Tk_ImageFileWriteProc *fileWriteProc;
-				/* Procedure to call to write data from
-				 * a photo image to a file. */
+				/* Procedure to call to write data from a
+				 * photo image to a file. */
     Tk_ImageStringWriteProc *stringWriteProc;
 				/* Procedure to call to obtain a string
 				 * representation of the data in a photo
 				 * image.*/
     struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat *nextPtr;
 				/* Next in list of all photo image formats
-				 * currently known.  Filled in by Tk, not
-				 * by image format handler. */
+				 * currently known. Filled in by Tk, not by
+				 * image format handler. */
 };
 
-EXTERN void		Tk_CreateOldImageType _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_ImageType *typePtr));
-EXTERN void		Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr));
-
-#if !defined(USE_TK_STUBS) && defined(USE_OLD_IMAGE)
+#ifdef USE_OLD_IMAGE
 #define Tk_CreateImageType Tk_CreateOldImageType
 #define Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat
 #endif
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -1398,6 +1388,7 @@ EXTERN void		Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat _ANSI_ARGS_((
 /*
  * Style support version tag.
  */
+
 #define TK_STYLE_VERSION_1      0x1
 #define TK_STYLE_VERSION        TK_STYLE_VERSION_1
 
@@ -1407,16 +1398,16 @@ EXTERN void		Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat _ANSI_ARGS_((
  */
 
 typedef void (Tk_GetElementSizeProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-        char *recordPtr, CONST Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr, Tk_Window tkwin,
+        char *recordPtr, const Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr, Tk_Window tkwin,
         int width, int height, int inner, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
 typedef void (Tk_GetElementBoxProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-        char *recordPtr, CONST Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr, Tk_Window tkwin,
+        char *recordPtr, const Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr, Tk_Window tkwin,
         int x, int y, int width, int height, int inner, int *xPtr, int *yPtr,
         int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
 typedef int (Tk_GetElementBorderWidthProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-        char *recordPtr, CONST Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr, Tk_Window tkwin));
+        char *recordPtr, const Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr, Tk_Window tkwin));
 typedef void (Tk_DrawElementProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-        char *recordPtr, CONST Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr, Tk_Window tkwin,
+        char *recordPtr, const Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr, Tk_Window tkwin,
         Drawable d, int x, int y, int width, int height, int state));
 
 typedef struct Tk_ElementOptionSpec {
@@ -1431,22 +1422,18 @@ typedef struct Tk_ElementSpec {
     Tk_ElementOptionSpec *options;
                                 /* List of required options. Last one's name
                                  * must be NULL. */
-
-    /*
-     * Hooks
-     */
-
     Tk_GetElementSizeProc *getSize;
-                                /* Compute the external (resp. internal) size of
-                                 * the element from its desired internal (resp.
-                                 * external) size. */
+                                /* Compute the external (resp. internal) size
+                                 * of the element from its desired internal
+                                 * (resp. external) size. */
     Tk_GetElementBoxProc *getBox;
                                 /* Compute the inscribed or bounding boxes
                                  * within a given area. */
     Tk_GetElementBorderWidthProc *getBorderWidth;
                                 /* Return the element's internal border width.
                                  * Mostly useful for widgets. */
-    Tk_DrawElementProc *draw;   /* Draw the element in the given bounding box.*/
+    Tk_DrawElementProc *draw;	/* Draw the element in the given bounding
+				 * box. */
 } Tk_ElementSpec;
 
 /*
@@ -1461,9 +1448,9 @@ typedef struct Tk_ElementSpec {
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * The definitions below provide backward compatibility for
- * functions and types related to event handling that used to
- * be in Tk but have moved to Tcl.
+ * The definitions below provide backward compatibility for functions and
+ * types related to event handling that used to be in Tk but have moved to
+ * Tcl.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1506,23 +1493,20 @@ typedef struct Tk_ElementSpec {
 #define Tk_Main(argc, argv, proc) \
     Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, proc, Tcl_CreateInterp())
 
-CONST char *Tk_InitStubs _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, char *version, int exact));
+const char *		Tk_InitStubs _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    const char *version, int exact));
+EXTERN const char *	Tk_PkgInitStubsCheck _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    const char *version, int exact));
 
 #ifndef USE_TK_STUBS
 
 #define Tk_InitStubs(interp, version, exact) \
-    Tcl_PkgRequire(interp, "Tk", version, exact)
+    Tk_PkgInitStubsCheck(interp, version, exact)
 
 #endif
 
-void Tk_InitImageArgs _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, char ***argv));
-
-#if !defined(USE_TK_STUBS) || !defined(USE_OLD_IMAGE)
-
 #define Tk_InitImageArgs(interp, argc, argv) /**/
 
-#endif
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -1548,7 +1532,6 @@ typedef Tk_RestrictAction (Tk_RestrictProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((
 typedef int (Tk_SelectionProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
 	int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes));
 
-
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
@@ -1560,12 +1543,11 @@ typedef int (Tk_SelectionProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
 #include "tkDecls.h"
 
 /*
- * Allow users to say that they don't want to alter their source to
- * add the extra argument to Tk_PhotoPutBlock(); DO NOT DEFINE THIS
- * WHEN BUILDING TK.
+ * Allow users to say that they don't want to alter their source to add extra
+ * arguments to Tk_PhotoPutBlock() et al; DO NOT DEFINE THIS WHEN BUILDING TK.
  *
- * This goes after the inclusion of the stubbed-decls so that the
- * declarations of what is actually there can be correct.
+ * This goes after the inclusion of the stubbed-decls so that the declarations
+ * of what is actually there can be correct.
  */
 
 #ifdef USE_COMPOSITELESS_PHOTO_PUT_BLOCK
@@ -1577,13 +1559,34 @@ typedef int (Tk_SelectionProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
 #	undef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock
 #   endif
 #   define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock	Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite
+#   define USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE
+#else /* !USE_COMPOSITELESS_PHOTO_PUT_BLOCK */
+#   ifdef USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE
+#	ifdef Tk_PhotoPutBlock
+#	    undef Tk_PhotoPutBlock
+#	endif
+#	define Tk_PhotoPutBlock		Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic
+#	ifdef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock
+#	    undef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock
+#	endif
+#	define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock	Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic
+#   endif /* USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE */
 #endif /* USE_COMPOSITELESS_PHOTO_PUT_BLOCK */
+#ifdef USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE
+#   ifdef Tk_PhotoExpand
+#	undef Tk_PhotoExpand
+#   endif
+#   define Tk_PhotoExpand		Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic
+#   ifdef Tk_PhotoSetSize
+#	undef Tk_PhotoSetSize
+#   endif
+#   define Tk_PhotoSetSize		Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic
+#endif /* USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE */
 
 /*
  * Tcl commands exported by Tk:
  */
 
-
 #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
 
@@ -1592,9 +1595,17 @@ typedef int (Tk_SelectionProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
 /*
  * end block for C++
  */
-    
+
 #ifdef __cplusplus
 }
 #endif
-    
+
 #endif /* _TK */
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tk3d.c b/generic/tk3d.c
index 4d9d163..caa40dd 100644
--- a/generic/tk3d.c
+++ b/generic/tk3d.c
@@ -1,40 +1,41 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tk3d.c --
  *
- *	This module provides procedures to draw borders in
- *	the three-dimensional Motif style.
+ *	This module provides procedures to draw borders in the
+ *	three-dimensional Motif style.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
+#include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tk3d.h"
 
 /*
- * The following table defines the string values for reliefs, which are
- * used by Tk_GetReliefFromObj.
+ * The following table defines the string values for reliefs, which are used
+ * by Tk_GetReliefFromObj.
  */
 
-static CONST char *reliefStrings[] = {"flat", "groove", "raised",
-				    "ridge", "solid", "sunken", 
-				    (char *) NULL};
+static CONST char *reliefStrings[] = {
+    "flat", "groove", "raised", "ridge", "solid", "sunken", NULL
+};
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		BorderInit _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
-static void		DupBorderObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr));
-static void		FreeBorderObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static int		Intersect _ANSI_ARGS_((XPoint *a1Ptr, XPoint *a2Ptr,
-			    XPoint *b1Ptr, XPoint *b2Ptr, XPoint *iPtr));
-static void		InitBorderObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		ShiftLine _ANSI_ARGS_((XPoint *p1Ptr, XPoint *p2Ptr,
-			    int distance, XPoint *p3Ptr));
+static void		BorderInit(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+static void		DupBorderObjProc(Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr);
+static void		FreeBorderObjProc(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static int		Intersect(XPoint *a1Ptr, XPoint *a2Ptr,
+			    XPoint *b1Ptr, XPoint *b2Ptr, XPoint *iPtr);
+static void		InitBorderObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		ShiftLine(XPoint *p1Ptr, XPoint *p2Ptr,
+			    int distance, XPoint *p3Ptr);
 
 /*
  * The following structure defines the implementation of the "border" Tcl
@@ -57,30 +58,30 @@ Tcl_ObjType tkBorderObjType = {
  *
  * Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj --
  *
- *	Given a Tcl_Obj *, map the value to a corresponding
- *	Tk_3DBorder structure based on the tkwin given.
+ *	Given a Tcl_Obj *, map the value to a corresponding Tk_3DBorder
+ *	structure based on the tkwin given.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for a data structure describing a
- *	3-D border.  This token may be passed to procedures such as
- *	Tk_Draw3DRectangle and Tk_Free3DBorder.  If an error prevented
- *	the border from being created then NULL is returned and an error
- *	message will be left in the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a token for a data structure describing a 3-D
+ *	border. This token may be passed to functions such as
+ *	Tk_Draw3DRectangle and Tk_Free3DBorder. If an error prevented the
+ *	border from being created then NULL is returned and an error message
+ *	will be left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The border is added to an internal database with a reference
- *	count. For each call to this procedure, there should eventually
- *	be a call to FreeBorderObjProc so that the database is
- *	cleaned up when borders aren't in use anymore.
+ *	The border is added to an internal database with a reference count.
+ *	For each call to this function, there should eventually be a call to
+ *	FreeBorderObjProc so that the database is cleaned up when borders
+ *	aren't in use anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_3DBorder
-Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error results. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Need the screen the border is used on.*/
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object giving name of color for window
+Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error results. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Need the screen the border is used on.*/
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Object giving name of color for window
 				 * background. */
 {
     TkBorder *borderPtr;
@@ -91,15 +92,15 @@ Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
     borderPtr = (TkBorder *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
 
     /*
-     * If the object currently points to a TkBorder, see if it's the
-     * one we want.  If so, increment its reference count and return.
+     * If the object currently points to a TkBorder, see if it's the one we
+     * want. If so, increment its reference count and return.
      */
 
     if (borderPtr != NULL) {
 	if (borderPtr->resourceRefCount == 0) {
 	    /*
-	     * This is a stale reference: it refers to a border that's
-	     * no longer in use.  Clear the reference.
+	     * This is a stale reference: it refers to a border that's no
+	     * longer in use. Clear the reference.
 	     */
 
 	    FreeBorderObjProc(objPtr);
@@ -112,24 +113,22 @@ Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The object didn't point to the border that we wanted.  Search
-     * the list of borders with the same name to see if one of the
-     * others is the right one.
+     * The object didn't point to the border that we wanted. Search the list
+     * of borders with the same name to see if one of the others is the right
+     * one.
      */
 
     /*
-     * If the cached value is NULL, either the object type was not a
-     * color going in, or the object is a color type but had
-     * previously been freed.
+     * If the cached value is NULL, either the object type was not a color
+     * going in, or the object is a color type but had previously been freed.
      *
-     * If the value is not NULL, the internal rep is the value
-     * of the color the last time this object was accessed. Check
-     * the screen and colormap of the last access, and if they
-     * match, we are done.
+     * If the value is not NULL, the internal rep is the value of the color
+     * the last time this object was accessed. Check the screen and colormap
+     * of the last access, and if they match, we are done.
      */
 
     if (borderPtr != NULL) {
-	TkBorder *firstBorderPtr = 
+	TkBorder *firstBorderPtr =
 		(TkBorder *) Tcl_GetHashValue(borderPtr->hashPtr);
 	FreeBorderObjProc(objPtr);
 	for (borderPtr = firstBorderPtr ; borderPtr != NULL;
@@ -138,19 +137,19 @@ Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
 		&& (Tk_Colormap(tkwin) == borderPtr->colormap)) {
 		borderPtr->resourceRefCount++;
 		borderPtr->objRefCount++;
-		objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) borderPtr;
+		objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) borderPtr;
 		return (Tk_3DBorder) borderPtr;
 	    }
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Still no luck.  Call Tk_Get3DBorder to allocate a new border.
+     * Still no luck. Call Tk_Get3DBorder to allocate a new border.
      */
 
     borderPtr = (TkBorder *) Tk_Get3DBorder(interp, tkwin,
 	    Tcl_GetString(objPtr));
-    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) borderPtr;
+    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) borderPtr;
     if (borderPtr != NULL) {
 	borderPtr->objRefCount++;
     }
@@ -165,31 +164,31 @@ Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
  *	Create a data structure for displaying a 3-D border.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for a data structure describing a
- *	3-D border.  This token may be passed to procedures such as
- *	Tk_Draw3DRectangle and Tk_Free3DBorder.  If an error prevented
- *	the border from being created then NULL is returned and an error
- *	message will be left in the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a token for a data structure describing a 3-D
+ *	border. This token may be passed to functions such as
+ *	Tk_Draw3DRectangle and Tk_Free3DBorder. If an error prevented the
+ *	border from being created then NULL is returned and an error message
+ *	will be left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Data structures, graphics contexts, etc. are allocated.
- *	It is the caller's responsibility to eventually call
- *	Tk_Free3DBorder to release the resources.
+ *	Data structures, graphics contexts, etc. are allocated. It is the
+ *	caller's responsibility to eventually call Tk_Free3DBorder to release
+ *	the resources.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_3DBorder
-Tk_Get3DBorder(interp, tkwin, colorName)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Place to store an error message. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window in which border will
-				 * be drawn. */
-    Tk_Uid colorName;		/* String giving name of color
-				 * for window background. */
+Tk_Get3DBorder(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Place to store an error message. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window in which border will be
+				 * drawn. */
+    Tk_Uid colorName)		/* String giving name of color for window
+				 * background. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;
     TkBorder *borderPtr, *existingBorderPtr;
-    int new;
+    int isNew;
     XGCValues gcValues;
     XColor *bgColorPtr;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;
@@ -200,8 +199,8 @@ Tk_Get3DBorder(interp, tkwin, colorName)
 	BorderInit(dispPtr);
     }
 
-    hashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->borderTable, colorName, &new);
-    if (!new) {
+    hashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->borderTable, colorName, &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
 	existingBorderPtr = (TkBorder *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
 	for (borderPtr = existingBorderPtr; borderPtr != NULL;
 		borderPtr = borderPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -216,12 +215,12 @@ Tk_Get3DBorder(interp, tkwin, colorName)
     }
 
     /*
-     * No satisfactory border exists yet.  Initialize a new one.
+     * No satisfactory border exists yet. Initialize a new one.
      */
 
     bgColorPtr = Tk_GetColor(interp, tkwin, colorName);
     if (bgColorPtr == NULL) {
-	if (new) {
+	if (isNew) {
 	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hashPtr);
 	}
 	return NULL;
@@ -246,9 +245,8 @@ Tk_Get3DBorder(interp, tkwin, colorName)
     Tcl_SetHashValue(hashPtr, borderPtr);
 
     /*
-     * Create the information for displaying the background color,
-     * but delay the allocation of shadows until they are actually
-     * needed for drawing.
+     * Create the information for displaying the background color, but delay
+     * the allocation of shadows until they are actually needed for drawing.
      */
 
     gcValues.foreground = borderPtr->bgColorPtr->pixel;
@@ -267,25 +265,24 @@ Tk_Get3DBorder(interp, tkwin, colorName)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A 3-D border will be drawn in the indicated drawable.
- *	The outside edges of the border will be determined by x,
- *	y, width, and height.  The inside edges of the border
- *	will be determined by the borderWidth argument.
+ *	A 3-D border will be drawn in the indicated drawable. The outside
+ *	edges of the border will be determined by x, y, width, and height. The
+ *	inside edges of the border will be determined by the borderWidth
+ *	argument.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
-	borderWidth, relief)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
-    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Token for border to draw. */
-    int x, y, width, height;	/* Outside area of region in
-				 * which border will be drawn. */
-    int borderWidth;		/* Desired width for border, in
-				 * pixels. */
-    int relief;			/* Type of relief: TK_RELIEF_RAISED,
+Tk_Draw3DRectangle(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    Tk_3DBorder border,		/* Token for border to draw. */
+    int x, int y, int width, int height,
+				/* Outside area of region in which border will
+				 * be drawn. */
+    int borderWidth,		/* Desired width for border, in pixels. */
+    int relief)			/* Type of relief: TK_RELIEF_RAISED,
 				 * TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN, TK_RELIEF_GROOVE, etc. */
 {
     if (width < 2*borderWidth) {
@@ -309,12 +306,11 @@ Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
  *
  * Tk_NameOf3DBorder --
  *
- *	Given a border, return a textual string identifying the
- *	border's color.
+ *	Given a border, return a textual string identifying the border's
+ *	color.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the string that was used to create
- *	the border.
+ *	The return value is the string that was used to create the border.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -323,8 +319,8 @@ Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
  */
 
 CONST char *
-Tk_NameOf3DBorder(border)
-    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Token for border. */
+Tk_NameOf3DBorder(
+    Tk_3DBorder border)		/* Token for border. */
 {
     TkBorder *borderPtr = (TkBorder *) border;
 
@@ -336,8 +332,7 @@ Tk_NameOf3DBorder(border)
  *
  * Tk_3DBorderColor --
  *
- *	Given a 3D border, return the X color used for the "flat"
- *	surfaces.
+ *	Given a 3D border, return the X color used for the "flat" surfaces.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns the color used drawing flat surfaces with the border.
@@ -348,10 +343,10 @@ Tk_NameOf3DBorder(border)
  *--------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 XColor *
-Tk_3DBorderColor(border)
-    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Border whose color is wanted. */
+Tk_3DBorderColor(
+    Tk_3DBorder border)		/* Border whose color is wanted. */
 {
-    return(((TkBorder *) border)->bgColorPtr);
+    return ((TkBorder *) border)->bgColorPtr;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -359,8 +354,8 @@ Tk_3DBorderColor(border)
  *
  * Tk_3DBorderGC --
  *
- *	Given a 3D border, returns one of the graphics contexts used to
- *	draw the border.
+ *	Given a 3D border, returns one of the graphics contexts used to draw
+ *	the border.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns the graphics context given by the "which" argument.
@@ -371,10 +366,10 @@ Tk_3DBorderColor(border)
  *--------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 GC
-Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, which)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
-    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Border whose GC is wanted. */
-    int which;			/* Selects one of the border's 3 GC's:
+Tk_3DBorderGC(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
+    Tk_3DBorder border,		/* Border whose GC is wanted. */
+    int which)			/* Selects one of the border's 3 GC's:
 				 * TK_3D_FLAT_GC, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC, or
 				 * TK_3D_DARK_GC. */
 {
@@ -390,11 +385,11 @@ Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, which)
     } else if (which == TK_3D_DARK_GC){
 	return borderPtr->darkGC;
     }
-    panic("bogus \"which\" value in Tk_3DBorderGC");
+    Tcl_Panic("bogus \"which\" value in Tk_3DBorderGC");
 
     /*
-     * The code below will never be executed, but it's needed to
-     * keep compilers happy.
+     * The code below will never be executed, but it's needed to keep
+     * compilers happy.
      */
 
     return (GC) None;
@@ -405,10 +400,9 @@ Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, which)
  *
  * Tk_Free3DBorder --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when a 3D border is no longer
- *	needed.  It frees the resources associated with the
- *	border.  After this call, the caller should never again
- *	use the "border" token.
+ *	This function is called when a 3D border is no longer needed. It frees
+ *	the resources associated with the border. After this call, the caller
+ *	should never again use the "border" token.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -420,8 +414,8 @@ Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, which)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_Free3DBorder(border)
-    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Token for border to be released. */
+Tk_Free3DBorder(
+    Tk_3DBorder border)		/* Token for border to be released. */
 {
     TkBorder *borderPtr = (TkBorder *) border;
     Display *display = DisplayOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
@@ -477,27 +471,27 @@ Tk_Free3DBorder(border)
  *
  * Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to release a border allocated by
- *	Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj. It does not throw away the Tcl_Obj *;
- *	it only gets rid of the hash table entry for this border
- *	and clears the cached value that is normally stored in the object.
+ *	This function is called to release a border allocated by
+ *	Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj. It does not throw away the Tcl_Obj *; it only
+ *	gets rid of the hash table entry for this border and clears the cached
+ *	value that is normally stored in the object.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The reference count associated with the border represented by
- *	objPtr is decremented, and the border's resources are released 
- *	to X if there are no remaining uses for it.
+ *	The reference count associated with the border represented by objPtr
+ *	is decremented, and the border's resources are released to X if there
+ *	are no remaining uses for it.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window this border lives in. Needed
-				 * for the screen and colormap values. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The Tcl_Obj * to be freed. */
+Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The window this border lives in. Needed for
+				 * the screen and colormap values. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The Tcl_Obj * to be freed. */
 {
     Tk_Free3DBorder(Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, objPtr));
     FreeBorderObjProc(objPtr);
@@ -506,66 +500,65 @@ Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * FreeBorderObjProc -- 
+ * FreeBorderObjProc --
  *
- *	This proc is called to release an object reference to a border.
- *	Called when the object's internal rep is released or when
- *	the cached borderPtr needs to be changed.
+ *	This proc is called to release an object reference to a border. Called
+ *	when the object's internal rep is released or when the cached
+ *	borderPtr needs to be changed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The object reference count is decremented. When both it
- *	and the hash ref count go to zero, the border's resources
- *	are released.
+ *	The object reference count is decremented. When both it and the hash
+ *	ref count go to zero, the border's resources are released.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeBorderObjProc(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object we are releasing. */
+FreeBorderObjProc(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object we are releasing. */
 {
     TkBorder *borderPtr = (TkBorder *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
 
     if (borderPtr != NULL) {
 	borderPtr->objRefCount--;
-	if ((borderPtr->objRefCount == 0) 
+	if ((borderPtr->objRefCount == 0)
 		&& (borderPtr->resourceRefCount == 0)) {
 	    ckfree((char *) borderPtr);
 	}
-	objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) NULL;
+	objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = NULL;
     }
 }
 
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * DupBorderObjProc -- 
+ * DupBorderObjProc --
  *
- *	When a cached border object is duplicated, this is called to
- *	update the internal reps.
+ *	When a cached border object is duplicated, this is called to update
+ *	the internal reps.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The border's objRefCount is incremented and the internal rep
- *	of the copy is set to point to it.
+ *	The border's objRefCount is incremented and the internal rep of the
+ *	copy is set to point to it.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DupBorderObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying from. */
-    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying to. */
+DupBorderObjProc(
+    Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,		/* The object we are copying from. */
+    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr)		/* The object we are copying to. */
 {
     TkBorder *borderPtr = (TkBorder *) srcObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
-    
+
     dupObjPtr->typePtr = srcObjPtr->typePtr;
-    dupObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) borderPtr;
+    dupObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) borderPtr;
 
     if (borderPtr != NULL) {
 	borderPtr->objRefCount++;
@@ -577,8 +570,8 @@ DupBorderObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
  *
  * Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder --
  *
- *	Change the background of a window to one appropriate for a given
- *	3-D border.
+ *	Change the background of a window to one appropriate for a given 3-D
+ *	border.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -590,9 +583,9 @@ DupBorderObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(tkwin, border)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window whose background is to be set. */
-    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Token for border. */
+Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window whose background is to be set. */
+    Tk_3DBorder border)		/* Token for border. */
 {
     register TkBorder *borderPtr = (TkBorder *) border;
 
@@ -618,13 +611,13 @@ Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(tkwin, border)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetReliefFromObj(interp, objPtr, resultPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object we are trying to get the 
-				 * value from. */
-    int *resultPtr;		/* Where to place the answer. */
+Tk_GetReliefFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* The object we are trying to get the value
+				 * from. */
+    int *resultPtr)		/* Where to place the answer. */
 {
-    return Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr, reliefStrings, "relief", 0, 
+    return Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr, reliefStrings, "relief", 0,
 	    resultPtr);
 }
 
@@ -633,13 +626,13 @@ Tk_GetReliefFromObj(interp, objPtr, resultPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetRelief --
  *
- *	Parse a relief description and return the corresponding
- *	relief value, or an error.
+ *	Parse a relief description and return the corresponding relief value,
+ *	or an error.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If all goes well then
- *	*reliefPtr is filled in with one of the values
- *	TK_RELIEF_RAISED, TK_RELIEF_FLAT, or TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If all goes well then *reliefPtr is
+ *	filled in with one of the values TK_RELIEF_RAISED, TK_RELIEF_FLAT, or
+ *	TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -648,10 +641,10 @@ Tk_GetReliefFromObj(interp, objPtr, resultPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetRelief(interp, name, reliefPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* For error messages. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of a relief type. */
-    int *reliefPtr;		/* Where to store converted relief. */
+Tk_GetRelief(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For error messages. */
+    CONST char *name,		/* Name of a relief type. */
+    int *reliefPtr)		/* Where to store converted relief. */
 {
     char c;
     size_t length;
@@ -688,12 +681,10 @@ Tk_GetRelief(interp, name, reliefPtr)
  *
  * Tk_NameOfRelief --
  *
- *	Given a relief value, produce a string describing that
- *	relief value.
+ *	Given a relief value, produce a string describing that relief value.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a static string that is equivalent
- *	to relief.
+ *	The return value is a static string that is equivalent to relief.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -702,9 +693,9 @@ Tk_GetRelief(interp, name, reliefPtr)
  */
 
 CONST char *
-Tk_NameOfRelief(relief)
-    int relief;		/* One of TK_RELIEF_FLAT, TK_RELIEF_RAISED,
-			 * or TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN. */
+Tk_NameOfRelief(
+    int relief)		/* One of TK_RELIEF_FLAT, TK_RELIEF_RAISED, or
+			 * TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN. */
 {
     if (relief == TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
 	return "flat";
@@ -730,39 +721,35 @@ Tk_NameOfRelief(relief)
  *
  * Tk_Draw3DPolygon --
  *
- *	Draw a border with 3-D appearance around the edge of a
- *	given polygon.
+ *	Draw a border with 3-D appearance around the edge of a given polygon.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Information is drawn in "drawable" in the form of a
- *	3-D border borderWidth units width wide on the left
- *	of the trajectory given by pointPtr and numPoints (or
- *	-borderWidth units wide on the right side, if borderWidth
- *	is negative).
+ *	Information is drawn in "drawable" in the form of a 3-D border
+ *	borderWidth units width wide on the left of the trajectory given by
+ *	pointPtr and numPoints (or -borderWidth units wide on the right side,
+ *	if borderWidth is negative).
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_Draw3DPolygon(tkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints,
-	borderWidth, leftRelief)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
-    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Token for border to draw. */
-    XPoint *pointPtr;		/* Array of points describing
-				 * polygon.  All points must be
-				 * absolute (CoordModeOrigin). */
-    int numPoints;		/* Number of points at *pointPtr. */
-    int borderWidth;		/* Width of border, measured in
-				 * pixels to the left of the polygon's
-				 * trajectory.   May be negative. */
-    int leftRelief;		/* TK_RELIEF_RAISED or
-				 * TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN: indicates how
-				 * stuff to left of trajectory looks
-				 * relative to stuff on right. */
+Tk_Draw3DPolygon(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    Tk_3DBorder border,		/* Token for border to draw. */
+    XPoint *pointPtr,		/* Array of points describing polygon. All
+				 * points must be absolute
+				 * (CoordModeOrigin). */
+    int numPoints,		/* Number of points at *pointPtr. */
+    int borderWidth,		/* Width of border, measured in pixels to the
+				 * left of the polygon's trajectory. May be
+				 * negative. */
+    int leftRelief)		/* TK_RELIEF_RAISED or TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN:
+				 * indicates how stuff to left of trajectory
+				 * looks relative to stuff on right. */
 {
     XPoint poly[4], b1, b2, newB1, newB2;
     XPoint perp, c, shift1, shift2;	/* Used for handling parallel lines. */
@@ -794,8 +781,8 @@ Tk_Draw3DPolygon(tkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints,
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the polygon is already closed, drop the last point from it
-     * (we'll close it automatically).
+     * If the polygon is already closed, drop the last point from it (we'll
+     * close it automatically).
      */
 
     p1Ptr = &pointPtr[numPoints-1];
@@ -805,8 +792,8 @@ Tk_Draw3DPolygon(tkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints,
     }
 
     /*
-     * The loop below is executed once for each vertex in the polgon.
-     * At the beginning of each iteration things look like this:
+     * The loop below is executed once for each vertex in the polgon. At the
+     * beginning of each iteration things look like this:
      *
      *          poly[1]       /
      *             *        /
@@ -824,23 +811,21 @@ Tk_Draw3DPolygon(tkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints,
      *             x-------------------------
      *
      * The job of this iteration is to do the following:
-     * (a) Compute x (the border corner corresponding to
-     *     pointPtr[i]) and put it in poly[2].  As part of
-     *	   this, compute a new b1 and b2 value for the next
-     *	   side of the polygon.
+     * (a) Compute x (the border corner corresponding to pointPtr[i]) and put
+     *	   it in poly[2]. As part of this, compute a new b1 and b2 value for
+     *	   the next side of the polygon.
      * (b) Put pointPtr[i] into poly[3].
      * (c) Draw the polygon given by poly[0..3].
-     * (d) Advance poly[0], poly[1], b1, and b2 for the
-     *     next side of the polygon.
+     * (d) Advance poly[0], poly[1], b1, and b2 for the next side of the
+     *     polygon.
      */
 
     /*
-     * The above situation doesn't first come into existence until
-     * two points have been processed;  the first two points are
-     * used to "prime the pump", so some parts of the processing
-     * are ommitted for these points.  The variable "pointsSeen"
-     * keeps track of the priming process;  it has to be separate
-     * from i in order to be able to ignore duplicate points in the
+     * The above situation doesn't first come into existence until two points
+     * have been processed; the first two points are used to "prime the pump",
+     * so some parts of the processing are ommitted for these points. The
+     * variable "pointsSeen" keeps track of the priming process; it has to be
+     * separate from i in order to be able to ignore duplicate points in the
      * polygon.
      */
 
@@ -852,9 +837,10 @@ Tk_Draw3DPolygon(tkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints,
 	}
 	if ((p2Ptr->x == p1Ptr->x) && (p2Ptr->y == p1Ptr->y)) {
 	    /*
-	     * Ignore duplicate points (they'd cause core dumps in
-	     * ShiftLine calls below).
+	     * Ignore duplicate points (they'd cause core dumps in ShiftLine
+	     * calls below).
 	     */
+
 	    continue;
 	}
 	ShiftLine(p1Ptr, p2Ptr, borderWidth, &newB1);
@@ -866,9 +852,8 @@ Tk_Draw3DPolygon(tkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints,
 	    parallel = Intersect(&newB1, &newB2, &b1, &b2, &poly[2]);
 
 	    /*
-	     * If two consecutive segments of the polygon are parallel,
-	     * then things get more complex.  Consider the following
-	     * diagram:
+	     * If two consecutive segments of the polygon are parallel, then
+	     * things get more complex. Consider the following diagram:
 	     *
 	     * poly[1]
 	     *    *----b1-----------b2------a
@@ -880,16 +865,16 @@ Tk_Draw3DPolygon(tkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints,
 	     *              --*--------*----c
 	     *              newB1    newB2
 	     *
-	     * Instead of using x and *p1Ptr for poly[2] and poly[3], as
-	     * in the original diagram, use a and b as above.  Then instead
-	     * of using x and *p1Ptr for the new poly[0] and poly[1], use
-	     * b and c as above.
+	     * Instead of using x and *p1Ptr for poly[2] and poly[3], as in
+	     * the original diagram, use a and b as above. Then instead of
+	     * using x and *p1Ptr for the new poly[0] and poly[1], use b and c
+	     * as above.
 	     *
 	     * Do the computation in three stages:
-	     * 1. Compute a point "perp" such that the line p1Ptr-perp
-	     *    is perpendicular to p1Ptr-p2Ptr.
-	     * 2. Compute the points a and c by intersecting the lines
-	     *    b1-b2 and newB1-newB2 with p1Ptr-perp.
+	     * 1. Compute a point "perp" such that the line p1Ptr-perp is
+	     *    perpendicular to p1Ptr-p2Ptr.
+	     * 2. Compute the points a and c by intersecting the lines b1-b2
+	     *    and newB1-newB2 with p1Ptr-perp.
 	     * 3. Compute b by shifting p1Ptr-perp to the right and
 	     *    intersecting it with p1Ptr-p2Ptr.
 	     */
@@ -955,33 +940,34 @@ Tk_Draw3DPolygon(tkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints,
  */
 
 void
-Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width,
-	height, borderWidth, relief)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
-    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Token for border to draw. */
-    int x, y, width, height;	/* Outside area of rectangular region. */
-    int borderWidth;		/* Desired width for border, in
-				 * pixels. Border will be *inside* region. */
-    int relief;			/* Indicates 3D effect: TK_RELIEF_FLAT,
+Tk_Fill3DRectangle(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    Tk_3DBorder border,		/* Token for border to draw. */
+    int x, int y, int width, int height,
+				/* Outside area of rectangular region. */
+    int borderWidth,		/* Desired width for border, in pixels. Border
+				 * will be *inside* region. */
+    int relief)			/* Indicates 3D effect: TK_RELIEF_FLAT,
 				 * TK_RELIEF_RAISED, or TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN. */
 {
     register TkBorder *borderPtr = (TkBorder *) border;
     int doubleBorder;
 
     /*
-     * This code is slightly tricky because it only draws the background
-     * in areas not covered by the 3D border. This avoids flashing
-     * effects on the screen for the border region.
+     * This code is slightly tricky because it only draws the background in
+     * areas not covered by the 3D border. This avoids flashing effects on the
+     * screen for the border region.
      */
-  
+
     if (relief == TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
 	borderWidth = 0;
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * We need to make this extra check, otherwise we will leave
-	 * garbage in thin frames [Bug: 3596]
+	 * We need to make this extra check, otherwise we will leave garbage
+	 * in thin frames [Bug: 3596]
 	 */
+
 	if (width < 2*borderWidth) {
 	    borderWidth = width/2;
 	}
@@ -1020,22 +1006,21 @@ Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width,
  */
 
 void
-Tk_Fill3DPolygon(tkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints,
-	borderWidth, leftRelief)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
-    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Token for border to draw. */
-    XPoint *pointPtr;		/* Array of points describing
-				 * polygon.  All points must be
-				 * absolute (CoordModeOrigin). */
-    int numPoints;		/* Number of points at *pointPtr. */
-    int borderWidth;		/* Width of border, measured in
-				 * pixels to the left of the polygon's
-				 * trajectory.   May be negative. */
-    int leftRelief;			/* Indicates 3D effect of left side of
+Tk_Fill3DPolygon(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    Tk_3DBorder border,		/* Token for border to draw. */
+    XPoint *pointPtr,		/* Array of points describing polygon. All
+				 * points must be absolute
+				 * (CoordModeOrigin). */
+    int numPoints,		/* Number of points at *pointPtr. */
+    int borderWidth,		/* Width of border, measured in pixels to the
+				 * left of the polygon's trajectory. May be
+				 * negative. */
+    int leftRelief)		/* Indicates 3D effect of left side of
 				 * trajectory relative to right:
-				 * TK_RELIEF_FLAT, TK_RELIEF_RAISED,
-				 * or TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN. */
+				 * TK_RELIEF_FLAT, TK_RELIEF_RAISED, or
+				 * TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN. */
 {
     register TkBorder *borderPtr = (TkBorder *) border;
 
@@ -1064,8 +1049,8 @@ Tk_Fill3DPolygon(tkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints,
  */
 
 static void
-BorderInit(dispPtr)
-     TkDisplay * dispPtr;     /* Used to access thread-specific data. */
+BorderInit(
+     TkDisplay *dispPtr)	/* Used to access thread-specific data. */
 {
     dispPtr->borderInit = 1;
     Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->borderTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
@@ -1076,9 +1061,8 @@ BorderInit(dispPtr)
  *
  * ShiftLine --
  *
- *	Given two points on a line, compute a point on a
- *	new line that is parallel to the given line and
- *	a given distance away from it.
+ *	Given two points on a line, compute a point on a new line that is
+ *	parallel to the given line and a given distance away from it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1090,36 +1074,31 @@ BorderInit(dispPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ShiftLine(p1Ptr, p2Ptr, distance, p3Ptr)
-    XPoint *p1Ptr;		/* First point on line. */
-    XPoint *p2Ptr;		/* Second point on line. */
-    int distance;		/* New line is to be this many
-				 * units to the left of original
-				 * line, when looking from p1 to
-				 * p2.  May be negative. */
-    XPoint *p3Ptr;		/* Store coords of point on new
-				 * line here. */
+ShiftLine(
+    XPoint *p1Ptr,		/* First point on line. */
+    XPoint *p2Ptr,		/* Second point on line. */
+    int distance,		/* New line is to be this many units to the
+				 * left of original line, when looking from p1
+				 * to p2. May be negative. */
+    XPoint *p3Ptr)		/* Store coords of point on new line here. */
 {
     int dx, dy, dxNeg, dyNeg;
 
     /*
-     * The table below is used for a quick approximation in
-     * computing the new point.  An index into the table
-     * is 128 times the slope of the original line (the slope
-     * must always be between 0 and 1).  The value of the table
-     * entry is 128 times the amount to displace the new line
-     * in y for each unit of perpendicular distance.  In other
-     * words, the table maps from the tangent of an angle to
-     * the inverse of its cosine.  If the slope of the original
-     * line is greater than 1, then the displacement is done in
-     * x rather than in y.
+     * The table below is used for a quick approximation in computing the new
+     * point. An index into the table is 128 times the slope of the original
+     * line (the slope must always be between 0 and 1). The value of the table
+     * entry is 128 times the amount to displace the new line in y for each
+     * unit of perpendicular distance. In other words, the table maps from the
+     * tangent of an angle to the inverse of its cosine. If the slope of the
+     * original line is greater than 1, then the displacement is done in x
+     * rather than in y.
      */
 
     static int shiftTable[129];
 
     /*
-     * Initialize the table if this is the first time it is
-     * used.
+     * Initialize the table if this is the first time it is used.
      */
 
     if (shiftTable[0] == 0) {
@@ -1171,10 +1150,9 @@ ShiftLine(p1Ptr, p2Ptr, distance, p3Ptr)
  *	Find the intersection point between two lines.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Under normal conditions 0 is returned and the point
- *	at *iPtr is filled in with the intersection between
- *	the two lines.  If the two lines are parallel, then
- *	-1 is returned and *iPtr isn't modified.
+ *	Under normal conditions 0 is returned and the point at *iPtr is filled
+ *	in with the intersection between the two lines. If the two lines are
+ *	parallel, then -1 is returned and *iPtr isn't modified.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1183,19 +1161,19 @@ ShiftLine(p1Ptr, p2Ptr, distance, p3Ptr)
  */
 
 static int
-Intersect(a1Ptr, a2Ptr, b1Ptr, b2Ptr, iPtr)
-    XPoint *a1Ptr;		/* First point of first line. */
-    XPoint *a2Ptr;		/* Second point of first line. */
-    XPoint *b1Ptr;		/* First point of second line. */
-    XPoint *b2Ptr;		/* Second point of second line. */
-    XPoint *iPtr;		/* Filled in with intersection point. */
+Intersect(
+    XPoint *a1Ptr,		/* First point of first line. */
+    XPoint *a2Ptr,		/* Second point of first line. */
+    XPoint *b1Ptr,		/* First point of second line. */
+    XPoint *b2Ptr,		/* Second point of second line. */
+    XPoint *iPtr)		/* Filled in with intersection point. */
 {
     int dxadyb, dxbdya, dxadxb, dyadyb, p, q;
 
     /*
-     * The code below is just a straightforward manipulation of two
-     * equations of the form y = (x-x1)*(y2-y1)/(x2-x1) + y1 to solve
-     * for the x-coordinate of intersection, then the y-coordinate.
+     * The code below is just a straightforward manipulation of two equations
+     * of the form y = (x-x1)*(y2-y1)/(x2-x1) + y1 to solve for the
+     * x-coordinate of intersection, then the y-coordinate.
      */
 
     dxadyb = (a2Ptr->x - a1Ptr->x)*(b2Ptr->y - b1Ptr->y);
@@ -1236,26 +1214,26 @@ Intersect(a1Ptr, a2Ptr, b1Ptr, b2Ptr, iPtr)
  *
  * Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj --
  *
- *	Returns the border referred to by a Tcl object.  The border must
- *	already have been allocated via a call to Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj 
- *	or Tk_Get3DBorder.
+ *	Returns the border referred to by a Tcl object. The border must
+ *	already have been allocated via a call to Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj or
+ *	Tk_Get3DBorder.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns the Tk_3DBorder that matches the tkwin and the string rep
- *	of the name of the border given in objPtr.
+ *	Returns the Tk_3DBorder that matches the tkwin and the string rep of
+ *	the name of the border given in objPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a border, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a border, the conversion will free any
+ *	old internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_3DBorder
-Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object whose string value selects
-				 * a border. */
+Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object whose string value selects a
+				 * border. */
 {
     TkBorder *borderPtr = NULL;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;
@@ -1266,10 +1244,9 @@ Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If we are lucky (and the user doesn't use too many different
-     * displays, screens, or colormaps...) then the  TkBorder 
-     * structure we need will be cached in the internal
-     * representation of the Tcl_Obj.  Check it out...
+     * If we are lucky (and the user doesn't use too many different displays,
+     * screens, or colormaps...) then the TkBorder structure we need will be
+     * cached in the internal representation of the Tcl_Obj. Check it out...
      */
 
     borderPtr = (TkBorder *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
@@ -1278,22 +1255,22 @@ Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
 	    && (Tk_Screen(tkwin) == borderPtr->screen)
 	    && (Tk_Colormap(tkwin) == borderPtr->colormap)) {
 	/*
-	 * The object already points to the right border structure.
-	 * Just return it.
+	 * The object already points to the right border structure. Just
+	 * return it.
 	 */
+
 	return (Tk_3DBorder) borderPtr;
     }
 
     /*
-     * If we make it here, it means we aren't so lucky.  Either there
-     * was no cached TkBorder in the Tcl_Obj, or the TkBorder that was
-     * there is for the wrong screen/colormap.  Either way, we have
-     * to search for the right TkBorder.  For each color name, there is
-     * linked list of TkBorder structures, one structure for each 
-     * screen/colormap combination.  The head of the linked list is
-     * recorded in a hash table (where the key is the color name)
-     * attached to the TkDisplay structure.  Walk this list to find
-     * the right TkBorder structure.
+     * If we make it here, it means we aren't so lucky. Either there was no
+     * cached TkBorder in the Tcl_Obj, or the TkBorder that was there is for
+     * the wrong screen/colormap. Either way, we have to search for the right
+     * TkBorder. For each color name, there is linked list of TkBorder
+     * structures, one structure for each screen/colormap combination. The
+     * head of the linked list is recorded in a hash table (where the key is
+     * the color name) attached to the TkDisplay structure. Walk this list to
+     * find the right TkBorder structure.
      */
 
     hashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->borderTable, Tcl_GetString(objPtr));
@@ -1305,14 +1282,14 @@ Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
 	if ((Tk_Screen(tkwin) == borderPtr->screen)
 		&& (Tk_Colormap(tkwin) == borderPtr->colormap)) {
 	    FreeBorderObjProc(objPtr);
-	    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) borderPtr;
+	    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) borderPtr;
 	    borderPtr->objRefCount++;
 	    return (Tk_3DBorder) borderPtr;
 	}
     }
 
-    error:
-    panic("Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj called with non-existent border!");
+  error:
+    Tcl_Panic("Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj called with non-existent border!");
     /*
      * The following code isn't reached; it's just there to please compilers.
      */
@@ -1333,20 +1310,20 @@ Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
  *	unless "interp" is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If no error occurs, a blank internal format for a border value
- *	is intialized. The final form cannot be done without a Tk_Window.
+ *	If no error occurs, a blank internal format for a border value is
+ *	intialized. The final form cannot be done without a Tk_Window.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-InitBorderObj(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object to convert. */
+InitBorderObj(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object to convert. */
 {
-    Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
+    const Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. 
+     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
      */
 
     Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
@@ -1355,7 +1332,7 @@ InitBorderObj(objPtr)
 	(*typePtr->freeIntRepProc)(objPtr);
     }
     objPtr->typePtr = &tkBorderObjType;
-    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) NULL;
+    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = NULL;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1363,13 +1340,13 @@ InitBorderObj(objPtr)
  *
  * TkDebugBorder --
  *
- *	This procedure returns debugging information about a border.
+ *	This function returns debugging information about a border.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a list with one sublist for each TkBorder
- *	corresponding to "name".  Each sublist has two elements that
- *	contain the resourceRefCount and objRefCount fields from the
- *	TkBorder structure.
+ *	corresponding to "name". Each sublist has two elements that contain
+ *	the resourceRefCount and objRefCount fields from the TkBorder
+ *	structure.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1378,10 +1355,10 @@ InitBorderObj(objPtr)
  */
 
 Tcl_Obj *
-TkDebugBorder(tkwin, name)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window in which the border will be
-				 * used (not currently used). */
-    char *name;			/* Name of the desired color. */
+TkDebugBorder(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The window in which the border will be used
+				 * (not currently used). */
+    char *name)			/* Name of the desired color. */
 {
     TkBorder *borderPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;
@@ -1393,16 +1370,24 @@ TkDebugBorder(tkwin, name)
     if (hashPtr != NULL) {
 	borderPtr = (TkBorder *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
 	if (borderPtr == NULL) {
-	    panic("TkDebugBorder found empty hash table entry");
+	    Tcl_Panic("TkDebugBorder found empty hash table entry");
 	}
 	for ( ; (borderPtr != NULL); borderPtr = borderPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
 		    Tcl_NewIntObj(borderPtr->resourceRefCount));
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
-		    Tcl_NewIntObj(borderPtr->objRefCount)); 
+		    Tcl_NewIntObj(borderPtr->objRefCount));
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, objPtr);
 	}
     }
     return resultPtr;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tk3d.h b/generic/tk3d.h
index 2905ff5..5e0a0cf 100644
--- a/generic/tk3d.h
+++ b/generic/tk3d.h
@@ -1,13 +1,12 @@
 /*
  * tk3d.h --
  *
- *	Declarations of types and functions shared by the 3d border
- *	module.
+ *	Declarations of types and functions shared by the 3d border module.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TK3D
@@ -22,9 +21,8 @@
 
 /*
  * One of the following data structures is allocated for each 3-D border
- * currently in use.  Structures of this type are indexed by
- * borderTable, so that a single structure can be shared for several
- * uses.
+ * currently in use. Structures of this type are indexed by borderTable, so
+ * that a single structure can be shared for several uses.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkBorder {
@@ -38,18 +36,17 @@ typedef struct TkBorder {
     int resourceRefCount;	/* Number of active uses of this color (each
 				 * active use corresponds to a call to
 				 * Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj or Tk_Get3DBorder).
-				 * If this count is 0, then this structure
-				 * is no longer valid and it isn't present
-				 * in borderTable: it is being kept around
-				 * only because there are objects referring
-				 * to it.  The structure is freed when
-				 * resourceRefCount and objRefCount are
-				 * both 0. */
+				 * If this count is 0, then this structure is
+				 * no longer valid and it isn't present in
+				 * borderTable: it is being kept around only
+				 * because there are objects referring to it.
+				 * The structure is freed when
+				 * resourceRefCount and objRefCount are both
+				 * 0. */
     int objRefCount;		/* The number of Tcl objects that reference
 				 * this structure. */
-    XColor *bgColorPtr;		/* Background color (intensity
-				 * between lightColorPtr and
-				 * darkColorPtr). */
+    XColor *bgColorPtr;		/* Background color (intensity between
+				 * lightColorPtr and darkColorPtr). */
     XColor *darkColorPtr;	/* Color for darker areas (must free when
 				 * deleting structure). NULL means shadows
 				 * haven't been allocated yet.*/
@@ -57,28 +54,26 @@ typedef struct TkBorder {
 				 * (must free this when deleting structure).
 				 * NULL means shadows haven't been allocated
 				 * yet. */
-    Pixmap shadow;		/* Stipple pattern to use for drawing
-				 * shadows areas.  Used for displays with
-				 * <= 64 colors or where colormap has filled
-				 * up. */
-    GC bgGC;			/* Used (if necessary) to draw areas in
-				 * the background color. */
-    GC darkGC;			/* Used to draw darker parts of the
-				 * border. None means the shadow colors
-				 * haven't been allocated yet.*/
-    GC lightGC;			/* Used to draw lighter parts of
-				 * the border. None means the shadow colors
-				 * haven't been allocated yet. */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;	/* Entry in borderTable (needed in
-				 * order to delete structure). */
+    Pixmap shadow;		/* Stipple pattern to use for drawing shadows
+				 * areas. Used for displays with <= 64 colors
+				 * or where colormap has filled up. */
+    GC bgGC;			/* Used (if necessary) to draw areas in the
+				 * background color. */
+    GC darkGC;			/* Used to draw darker parts of the border.
+				 * None means the shadow colors haven't been
+				 * allocated yet.*/
+    GC lightGC;			/* Used to draw lighter parts of the border.
+				 * None means the shadow colors haven't been
+				 * allocated yet. */
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;	/* Entry in borderTable (needed in order to
+				 * delete structure). */
     struct TkBorder *nextPtr;	/* Points to the next TkBorder structure with
-				 * the same color name.  Borders with the
-				 * same name but different screens or
-				 * colormaps are chained together off a
-				 * single entry in borderTable. */
+				 * the same color name. Borders with the same
+				 * name but different screens or colormaps are
+				 * chained together off a single entry in
+				 * borderTable. */
 } TkBorder;
 
-
 /*
  * Maximum intensity for a color:
  */
@@ -89,10 +84,9 @@ typedef struct TkBorder {
  * Declarations for platform specific interfaces used by this module.
  */
 
-EXTERN TkBorder *	TkpGetBorder _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
-EXTERN void		TkpGetShadows _ANSI_ARGS_((TkBorder *borderPtr,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-EXTERN void		TkpFreeBorder _ANSI_ARGS_((TkBorder *borderPtr));
+MODULE_SCOPE TkBorder	*TkpGetBorder(void);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpGetShadows(TkBorder *borderPtr, Tk_Window tkwin);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpFreeBorder(TkBorder *borderPtr);
 
 # undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
diff --git a/generic/tkArgv.c b/generic/tkArgv.c
index 4ee3b78..a338e45 100644
--- a/generic/tkArgv.c
+++ b/generic/tkArgv.c
@@ -1,85 +1,81 @@
 /*
  * tkArgv.c --
  *
- *	This file contains a procedure that handles table-based
- *	argv-argc parsing.
+ *	This file contains a function that handles table-based argv-argc
+ *	parsing.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
-#include "tk.h"
+#include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * Default table of argument descriptors.  These are normally available
- * in every application.
+ * Default table of argument descriptors. These are normally available in
+ * every application.
  */
 
 static Tk_ArgvInfo defaultTable[] = {
-    {"-help",	TK_ARGV_HELP,	(char *) NULL,	(char *) NULL,
+    {"-help",	TK_ARGV_HELP, NULL, NULL,
 	"Print summary of command-line options and abort"},
-    {NULL,	TK_ARGV_END,	(char *) NULL,	(char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL}
+    {NULL,	TK_ARGV_END, NULL, NULL, NULL}
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void	PrintUsage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-		    Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable, int flags));
+static void	PrintUsage(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable,
+		    int flags);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_ParseArgv --
  *
- *	Process an argv array according to a table of expected
- *	command-line options.  See the manual page for more details.
+ *	Process an argv array according to a table of expected command-line
+ *	options. See the manual page for more details.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return value.  If an
- *	error occurs then an error message is left in the interp's result.
- *	Under normal conditions, both *argcPtr and *argv are modified
- *	to return the arguments that couldn't be processed here (they
- *	didn't match the option table, or followed an TK_ARGV_REST
- *	argument).
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs
+ *	then an error message is left in the interp's result. Under normal
+ *	conditions, both *argcPtr and *argv are modified to return the
+ *	arguments that couldn't be processed here (they didn't match the
+ *	option table, or followed an TK_ARGV_REST argument).
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Variables may be modified, resources may be entered for tkwin,
- *	or procedures may be called.  It all depends on the arguments
- *	and their entries in argTable.  See the user documentation
- *	for details.
+ *	Variables may be modified, resources may be entered for tkwin, or
+ *	functions may be called. It all depends on the arguments and their
+ *	entries in argTable. See the user documentation for details.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_ParseArgv(interp, tkwin, argcPtr, argv, argTable, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Place to store error message. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to use for setting Tk options.
-				 * NULL means ignore Tk option specs. */
-    int *argcPtr;		/* Number of arguments in argv.  Modified
-				 * to hold # args left in argv at end. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Array of arguments.  Modified to hold
-				 * those that couldn't be processed here. */
-    Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable;	/* Array of option descriptions */
-    int flags;			/* Or'ed combination of various flag bits,
+Tk_ParseArgv(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Place to store error message. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to use for setting Tk options. NULL
+				 * means ignore Tk option specs. */
+    int *argcPtr,		/* Number of arguments in argv. Modified to
+				 * hold # args left in argv at end. */
+    CONST char **argv,		/* Array of arguments. Modified to hold those
+				 * that couldn't be processed here. */
+    Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable,	/* Array of option descriptions */
+    int flags)			/* Or'ed combination of various flag bits,
 				 * such as TK_ARGV_NO_DEFAULTS. */
 {
     register Tk_ArgvInfo *infoPtr;
-				/* Pointer to the current entry in the
-				 * table of argument descriptions. */
+				/* Pointer to the current entry in the table
+				 * of argument descriptions. */
     Tk_ArgvInfo *matchPtr;	/* Descriptor that matches current argument. */
     CONST char *curArg;		/* Current argument */
     register char c;		/* Second character of current arg (used for
-				 * quick check for matching;  use 2nd char.
-				 * because first char. will almost always
-				 * be '-'). */
+				 * quick check for matching; use 2nd char.
+				 * because first char. will almost always be
+				 * '-'). */
     int srcIndex;		/* Location from which to read next argument
 				 * from argv. */
     int dstIndex;		/* Index into argv to which next unused
@@ -109,9 +105,8 @@ Tk_ParseArgv(interp, tkwin, argcPtr, argv, argTable, flags)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Loop throught the argument descriptors searching for one with
-	 * the matching key string.  If found, leave a pointer to it in
-	 * matchPtr.
+	 * Loop throught the argument descriptors searching for one with the
+	 * matching key string. If found, leave a pointer to it in matchPtr.
 	 */
 
 	matchPtr = NULL;
@@ -123,44 +118,43 @@ Tk_ParseArgv(interp, tkwin, argcPtr, argv, argTable, flags)
 	    }
 	    for (; (infoPtr != NULL) && (infoPtr->type != TK_ARGV_END);
 		    infoPtr++) {
-		 if (infoPtr->key == NULL) {
-		     continue;
-		 }
-		 if ((infoPtr->key[1] != c)
-			 || (strncmp(infoPtr->key, curArg, length) != 0)) {
-		     continue;
-		 }
-		 if ((tkwin == NULL)
-			 && ((infoPtr->type == TK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION)
-			 || (infoPtr->type == TK_ARGV_OPTION_VALUE)
-			 || (infoPtr->type == TK_ARGV_OPTION_NAME_VALUE))) {
-		     continue;
-		 }
-		 if (infoPtr->key[length] == 0) {
-		     matchPtr = infoPtr;
-		     goto gotMatch;
-		 }
-		 if (flags & TK_ARGV_NO_ABBREV) {
-		     continue;
-		 }
-		 if (matchPtr != NULL) {
-		     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "ambiguous option \"", curArg,
-			     "\"", (char *) NULL);
-		     return TCL_ERROR;
-		 }
-		 matchPtr = infoPtr;
+		if (infoPtr->key == NULL) {
+		    continue;
+		}
+		if ((infoPtr->key[1] != c)
+			|| (strncmp(infoPtr->key, curArg, length) != 0)) {
+		    continue;
+		}
+		if ((tkwin == NULL)
+			&& ((infoPtr->type == TK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION)
+			|| (infoPtr->type == TK_ARGV_OPTION_VALUE)
+			|| (infoPtr->type == TK_ARGV_OPTION_NAME_VALUE))) {
+		    continue;
+		}
+		if (infoPtr->key[length] == 0) {
+		    matchPtr = infoPtr;
+		    goto gotMatch;
+		}
+		if (flags & TK_ARGV_NO_ABBREV) {
+		    continue;
+		}
+		if (matchPtr != NULL) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "ambiguous option \"", curArg,
+			    "\"", NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		matchPtr = infoPtr;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (matchPtr == NULL) {
-
 	    /*
-	     * Unrecognized argument.  Just copy it down, unless the caller
+	     * Unrecognized argument. Just copy it down, unless the caller
 	     * prefers an error to be registered.
 	     */
 
 	    if (flags & TK_ARGV_NO_LEFTOVERS) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unrecognized argument \"",
-			curArg, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+			curArg, "\"", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    argv[dstIndex] = curArg;
@@ -172,154 +166,143 @@ Tk_ParseArgv(interp, tkwin, argcPtr, argv, argTable, flags)
 	 * Take the appropriate action based on the option type
 	 */
 
-	gotMatch:
+    gotMatch:
 	infoPtr = matchPtr;
 	switch (infoPtr->type) {
-	    case TK_ARGV_CONSTANT:
-		*((int *) infoPtr->dst) = (int) infoPtr->src;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ARGV_INT:
-		if (argc == 0) {
-		    goto missingArg;
-		} else {
-		    char *endPtr;
-
-		    *((int *) infoPtr->dst) =
-			    strtol(argv[srcIndex], &endPtr, 0);
-		    if ((endPtr == argv[srcIndex]) || (*endPtr != 0)) {
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "expected integer argument ",
-				"for \"", infoPtr->key, "\" but got \"",
-				argv[srcIndex], "\"", (char *) NULL);
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    srcIndex++;
-		    argc--;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_ARGV_STRING:
-		if (argc == 0) {
-		    goto missingArg;
-		} else {
-		    *((CONST char **)infoPtr->dst) = argv[srcIndex];
-		    srcIndex++;
-		    argc--;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_ARGV_UID:
-		if (argc == 0) {
-		    goto missingArg;
-		} else {
-		    *((Tk_Uid *)infoPtr->dst) = Tk_GetUid(argv[srcIndex]);
-		    srcIndex++;
-		    argc--;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_ARGV_REST:
-		*((int *) infoPtr->dst) = dstIndex;
-		goto argsDone;
-	    case TK_ARGV_FLOAT:
-		if (argc == 0) {
-		    goto missingArg;
-		} else {
-		    char *endPtr;
-
-		    *((double *) infoPtr->dst) =
-			    strtod(argv[srcIndex], &endPtr);
-		    if ((endPtr == argv[srcIndex]) || (*endPtr != 0)) {
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "expected floating-point ",
-				"argument for \"", infoPtr->key,
-				"\" but got \"", argv[srcIndex], "\"",
-				(char *) NULL);
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    srcIndex++;
-		    argc--;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_ARGV_FUNC: {
-		typedef int (ArgvFunc) _ANSI_ARGS_ ((char *, char *,
-			CONST char *));
-		ArgvFunc *handlerProc;
+	case TK_ARGV_CONSTANT:
+	    *((int *) infoPtr->dst) = PTR2INT(infoPtr->src);
+	    break;
+	case TK_ARGV_INT:
+	    if (argc == 0) {
+		goto missingArg;
+	    } else {
+		char *endPtr;
 
-		handlerProc = (ArgvFunc *) infoPtr->src;
-		if ((*handlerProc)(infoPtr->dst, infoPtr->key,
-			argv[srcIndex])) {
-		    srcIndex += 1;
-		    argc -= 1;
+		*((int *) infoPtr->dst) = strtol(argv[srcIndex], &endPtr, 0);
+		if ((endPtr == argv[srcIndex]) || (*endPtr != 0)) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"expected integer argument for \"",
+			    infoPtr->key, "\" but got \"", argv[srcIndex],
+			    "\"", NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		break;
+		srcIndex++;
+		argc--;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_ARGV_STRING:
+	    if (argc == 0) {
+		goto missingArg;
+	    }
+	    *((CONST char **)infoPtr->dst) = argv[srcIndex];
+	    srcIndex++;
+	    argc--;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ARGV_UID:
+	    if (argc == 0) {
+		goto missingArg;
 	    }
-	    case TK_ARGV_GENFUNC: {
-		typedef int (ArgvGenFunc)_ANSI_ARGS_((char *, Tcl_Interp *, 
-			char *, int, CONST char **));
-		ArgvGenFunc *handlerProc;
+	    *((Tk_Uid *)infoPtr->dst) = Tk_GetUid(argv[srcIndex]);
+	    srcIndex++;
+	    argc--;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ARGV_REST:
+	    *((int *) infoPtr->dst) = dstIndex;
+	    goto argsDone;
+	case TK_ARGV_FLOAT:
+	    if (argc == 0) {
+		goto missingArg;
+	    } else {
+		char *endPtr;
 
-		handlerProc = (ArgvGenFunc *) infoPtr->src;
-		argc = (*handlerProc)(infoPtr->dst, interp, infoPtr->key,
-			argc, argv+srcIndex);
-		if (argc < 0) {
+		*((double *) infoPtr->dst) = strtod(argv[srcIndex], &endPtr);
+		if ((endPtr == argv[srcIndex]) || (*endPtr != 0)) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "expected floating-point ",
+			    "argument for \"", infoPtr->key, "\" but got \"",
+			    argv[srcIndex], "\"", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		break;
+		srcIndex++;
+		argc--;
 	    }
-	    case TK_ARGV_HELP:
-		PrintUsage (interp, argTable, flags);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    case TK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION:
-		Tk_AddOption(tkwin, infoPtr->dst, infoPtr->src,
-			TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO);
-		break;
-	    case TK_ARGV_OPTION_VALUE:
-		if (argc < 1) {
-		    goto missingArg;
-		}
-		Tk_AddOption(tkwin, infoPtr->dst, argv[srcIndex],
-			TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO);
+	    break;
+	case TK_ARGV_FUNC: {
+	    typedef int (ArgvFunc)(char *, char *, CONST char *);
+	    ArgvFunc *handlerProc = (ArgvFunc *) infoPtr->src;
+
+	    if ((*handlerProc)(infoPtr->dst, infoPtr->key, argv[srcIndex])) {
 		srcIndex++;
 		argc--;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ARGV_OPTION_NAME_VALUE:
-		if (argc < 2) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\"", curArg,
-			    "\" option requires two following arguments",
-			    (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		Tk_AddOption(tkwin, argv[srcIndex], argv[srcIndex+1],
-			TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO);
-		srcIndex += 2;
-		argc -= 2;
-		break;
-	    default: {
-		char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-		
-		sprintf(buf, "bad argument type %d in Tk_ArgvInfo",
-			infoPtr->type);
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+	case TK_ARGV_GENFUNC: {
+	    typedef int (ArgvGenFunc)(char *, Tcl_Interp *, char *, int,
+		    CONST char **);
+	    ArgvGenFunc *handlerProc = (ArgvGenFunc *) infoPtr->src;
+
+	    argc = (*handlerProc)(infoPtr->dst, interp, infoPtr->key,
+		    argc, argv+srcIndex);
+	    if (argc < 0) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+	case TK_ARGV_HELP:
+	    PrintUsage(interp, argTable, flags);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	case TK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION:
+	    Tk_AddOption(tkwin, infoPtr->dst, infoPtr->src,
+		    TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO);
+	    break;
+	case TK_ARGV_OPTION_VALUE:
+	    if (argc < 1) {
+		goto missingArg;
+	    }
+	    Tk_AddOption(tkwin, infoPtr->dst, argv[srcIndex],
+		    TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO);
+	    srcIndex++;
+	    argc--;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ARGV_OPTION_NAME_VALUE:
+	    if (argc < 2) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\"", curArg,
+			"\" option requires two following arguments", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
+	    Tk_AddOption(tkwin, argv[srcIndex], argv[srcIndex+1],
+		    TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO);
+	    srcIndex += 2;
+	    argc -= 2;
+	    break;
+	default: {
+	    char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+
+	    sprintf(buf, "bad argument type %d in Tk_ArgvInfo", infoPtr->type);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * If we broke out of the loop because of an OPT_REST argument,
-     * copy the remaining arguments down.
+     * If we broke out of the loop because of an OPT_REST argument, copy the
+     * remaining arguments down.
      */
 
-    argsDone:
+  argsDone:
     while (argc) {
 	argv[dstIndex] = argv[srcIndex];
 	srcIndex++;
 	dstIndex++;
 	argc--;
     }
-    argv[dstIndex] = (char *) NULL;
+    argv[dstIndex] = NULL;
     *argcPtr = dstIndex;
     return TCL_OK;
 
-    missingArg:
+  missingArg:
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\"", curArg,
-	    "\" option requires an additional argument", (char *) NULL);
+	    "\" option requires an additional argument", NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -331,10 +314,9 @@ Tk_ParseArgv(interp, tkwin, argcPtr, argv, argTable, flags)
  *	Generate a help string describing command-line options.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The interp's result will be modified to hold a help string
- *	describing all the options in argTable, plus all those
- *	in the default table unless TK_ARGV_NO_DEFAULTS is
- *	specified in flags.
+ *	The interp's result will be modified to hold a help string describing
+ *	all the options in argTable, plus all those in the default table
+ *	unless TK_ARGV_NO_DEFAULTS is specified in flags.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -343,31 +325,29 @@ Tk_ParseArgv(interp, tkwin, argcPtr, argv, argTable, flags)
  */
 
 static void
-PrintUsage(interp, argTable, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Place information in this interp's
-				 * result area. */
-    Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable;	/* Array of command-specific argument
+PrintUsage(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Place information in this interp's result
+				 * area. */
+    Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable,	/* Array of command-specific argument
 				 * descriptions. */
-    int flags;			/* If the TK_ARGV_NO_DEFAULTS bit is set
-				 * in this word, then don't generate
-				 * information for default options. */
+    int flags)			/* If the TK_ARGV_NO_DEFAULTS bit is set in
+				 * this word, then don't generate information
+				 * for default options. */
 {
     register Tk_ArgvInfo *infoPtr;
-    int width, i, numSpaces;
-#define NUM_SPACES 20
-    static CONST char spaces[] = "                    ";
+    size_t width, i, numSpaces;
     char tmp[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
 
     /*
-     * First, compute the width of the widest option key, so that we
-     * can make everything line up.
+     * First, compute the width of the widest option key, so that we can make
+     * everything line up.
      */
 
     width = 4;
     for (i = 0; i < 2; i++) {
 	for (infoPtr = i ? defaultTable : argTable;
 		infoPtr->type != TK_ARGV_END; infoPtr++) {
-	    int length;
+	    size_t length;
 	    if (infoPtr->key == NULL) {
 		continue;
 	    }
@@ -378,59 +358,54 @@ PrintUsage(interp, argTable, flags)
 	}
     }
 
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Command-specific options:", (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Command-specific options:", NULL);
     for (i = 0; ; i++) {
 	for (infoPtr = i ? defaultTable : argTable;
 		infoPtr->type != TK_ARGV_END; infoPtr++) {
 	    if ((infoPtr->type == TK_ARGV_HELP) && (infoPtr->key == NULL)) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", infoPtr->help, (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", infoPtr->help, NULL);
 		continue;
 	    }
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n ", infoPtr->key, ":", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n ", infoPtr->key, ":", NULL);
 	    numSpaces = width + 1 - strlen(infoPtr->key);
-	    while (numSpaces > 0) {
-		if (numSpaces >= NUM_SPACES) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, spaces, (char *) NULL);
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, spaces+NUM_SPACES-numSpaces,
-			    (char *) NULL);
-		}
-		numSpaces -= NUM_SPACES;
+	    while (numSpaces-- > 0) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ", NULL);
 	    }
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, infoPtr->help, (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, infoPtr->help, NULL);
 	    switch (infoPtr->type) {
-		case TK_ARGV_INT: {
-		    sprintf(tmp, "%d", *((int *) infoPtr->dst));
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n\t\tDefault value: ",
-			    tmp, (char *) NULL);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_ARGV_FLOAT: {
-		    sprintf(tmp, "%g", *((double *) infoPtr->dst));
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n\t\tDefault value: ",
-			    tmp, (char *) NULL);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_ARGV_STRING: {
-		    char *string;
+	    case TK_ARGV_INT:
+		sprintf(tmp, "%d", *((int *) infoPtr->dst));
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n\t\tDefault value: ", tmp, NULL);
+		break;
+	    case TK_ARGV_FLOAT:
+		Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, *((double *) infoPtr->dst), tmp);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n\t\tDefault value: ", tmp, NULL);
+		break;
+	    case TK_ARGV_STRING: {
+		char *string = *((char **) infoPtr->dst);
 
-		    string = *((char **) infoPtr->dst);
-		    if (string != NULL) {
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n\t\tDefault value: \"",
-				string, "\"", (char *) NULL);
-		    }
-		    break;
-		}
-		default: {
-		    break;
+		if (string != NULL) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n\t\tDefault value: \"", string,
+			    "\"", NULL);
 		}
+		break;
+	    }
+	    default:
+		break;
 	    }
 	}
 
 	if ((flags & TK_ARGV_NO_DEFAULTS) || (i > 0)) {
 	    break;
 	}
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\nGeneric options for all commands:",
-		(char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\nGeneric options for all commands:", NULL);
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkAtom.c b/generic/tkAtom.c
index 108e989..fe1b5b3 100644
--- a/generic/tkAtom.c
+++ b/generic/tkAtom.c
@@ -1,28 +1,26 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkAtom.c --
  *
- *	This file manages a cache of X Atoms in order to avoid
- *	interactions with the X server.  It's much like the Xmu
- *	routines, except it has a cleaner interface (caller
- *	doesn't have to provide permanent storage for atom names,
- *	for example).
+ *	This file manages a cache of X Atoms in order to avoid interactions
+ *	with the X server. It's much like the Xmu routines, except it has a
+ *	cleaner interface (caller doesn't have to provide permanent storage
+ *	for atom names, for example).
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * The following are a list of the predefined atom strings.
- * They should match those found in xatom.h
+ * The following are a list of the predefined atom strings. They should match
+ * those found in xatom.h
  */
 
-static CONST char *atomNameArray[] = {
+static const char *atomNameArray[] = {
     "PRIMARY",		"SECONDARY",		"ARC",
     "ATOM",		"BITMAP",		"CARDINAL",
     "COLORMAP",		"CURSOR",		"CUT_BUFFER0",
@@ -46,24 +44,24 @@ static CONST char *atomNameArray[] = {
     "COPYRIGHT",	"NOTICE",		"FONT_NAME",
     "FAMILY_NAME",	"FULL_NAME",		"CAP_HEIGHT",
     "WM_CLASS",		"WM_TRANSIENT_FOR",
-    (char *) NULL
+    NULL
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward references to procedures defined in this file:
+ * Forward references to functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void	AtomInit _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+static void	AtomInit(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_InternAtom --
  *
- *	Given a string, produce the equivalent X atom.  This
- *	procedure is equivalent to XInternAtom, except that it
- *	keeps a local cache of atoms.  Once a name is known,
- *	the server need not be contacted again for that name.
+ *	Given a string, produce the equivalent X atom. This function is
+ *	equivalent to XInternAtom, except that it keeps a local cache of
+ *	atoms. Once a name is known, the server need not be contacted again
+ *	for that name.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is the Atom corresponding to name.
@@ -75,32 +73,31 @@ static void	AtomInit _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
  */
 
 Atom
-Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, name)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window token;  map name to atom
-				 * for this window's display. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name to turn into atom. */
+Tk_InternAtom(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window token; map name to atom for this
+				 * window's display. */
+    CONST char *name)		/* Name to turn into atom. */
 {
     register TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     register Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-    int new;
+    int isNew;
 
     dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
     if (!dispPtr->atomInit) {
 	AtomInit(dispPtr);
     }
 
-    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->nameTable, name, &new);
-    if (new) {
+    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->nameTable, name, &isNew);
+    if (isNew) {
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr2;
 	Atom atom;
 
 	atom = XInternAtom(dispPtr->display, name, False);
-	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, atom);
-	hPtr2 = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, (char *) atom,
-		&new);
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, INT2PTR(atom));
+	hPtr2 = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, INT2PTR(atom), &isNew);
 	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr2, Tcl_GetHashKey(&dispPtr->nameTable, hPtr));
     }
-    return (Atom) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    return (Atom) PTR2INT(Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr));
 }
 
 /*
@@ -108,16 +105,15 @@ Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, name)
  *
  * Tk_GetAtomName --
  *
- *	This procedure is equivalent to XGetAtomName except that
- *	it uses the local atom cache to avoid contacting the
- *	server.
+ *	This function is equivalent to XGetAtomName except that it uses the
+ *	local atom cache to avoid contacting the server.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a character string corresponding to
- *	the atom given by "atom".  This string's storage space
- *	is static:  it need not be freed by the caller, and should
- *	not be modified by the caller.  If "atom" doesn't exist
- *	on tkwin's display, then the string "?bad atom?" is returned.
+ *	The return value is a character string corresponding to the atom given
+ *	by "atom". This string's storage space is static: it need not be freed
+ *	by the caller, and should not be modified by the caller. If "atom"
+ *	doesn't exist on tkwin's display, then the string "?bad atom?"  is
+ *	returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -126,11 +122,10 @@ Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, name)
  */
 
 CONST char *
-Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, atom)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window token;  map atom to name
-				 * relative to this window's
-				 * display. */
-    Atom atom;			/* Atom whose name is wanted. */
+Tk_GetAtomName(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window token; map atom to name relative to
+				 * this window's display. */
+    Atom atom)			/* Atom whose name is wanted. */
 {
     register TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     register Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
@@ -140,14 +135,14 @@ Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, atom)
 	AtomInit(dispPtr);
     }
 
-    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, (char *) atom);
+    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, INT2PTR(atom));
     if (hPtr == NULL) {
 	char *name;
 	Tk_ErrorHandler handler;
-	int new, mustFree;
+	int isNew, mustFree;
 
-	handler= Tk_CreateErrorHandler(dispPtr->display, BadAtom,
-		-1, -1, (Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+	handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(dispPtr->display, BadAtom, -1, -1,
+		NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
 	name = XGetAtomName(dispPtr->display, atom);
 	mustFree = 1;
 	if (name == NULL) {
@@ -155,15 +150,13 @@ Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, atom)
 	    mustFree = 0;
 	}
 	Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
-	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->nameTable, (char *) name,
-		&new);
-	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, atom);
+	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->nameTable, name, &isNew);
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, INT2PTR(atom));
 	if (mustFree) {
 	    XFree(name);
 	}
 	name = Tcl_GetHashKey(&dispPtr->nameTable, hPtr);
-	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, (char *) atom,
-		&new);
+	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, INT2PTR(atom), &isNew);
 	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, name);
     }
     return Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
@@ -186,8 +179,8 @@ Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, atom)
  */
 
 static void
-AtomInit(dispPtr)
-    register TkDisplay *dispPtr;	/* Display to initialize. */
+AtomInit(
+    register TkDisplay *dispPtr)/* Display to initialize. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     Atom atom;
@@ -197,19 +190,27 @@ AtomInit(dispPtr)
     Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->atomTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
 
     for (atom = 1; atom <= XA_LAST_PREDEFINED; atom++) {
-	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, (char *) atom);
-	if (hPtr == NULL) {
-	    CONST char *name;
-	    int new;
-
-	    name = atomNameArray[atom - 1];
-	    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->nameTable, (char *) name,
-		&new);
-	    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, atom);
-	    name = Tcl_GetHashKey(&dispPtr->nameTable, hPtr);
-	    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, (char *) atom,
-		&new);
-	    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, name);
+	const char *name;
+	int isNew;
+
+	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, INT2PTR(atom));
+	if (hPtr != NULL) {
+	    continue;
 	}
+
+	name = atomNameArray[atom - 1];
+	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->nameTable, name, &isNew);
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, INT2PTR(atom));
+	name = Tcl_GetHashKey(&dispPtr->nameTable, hPtr);
+	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, INT2PTR(atom), &isNew);
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, name);
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkBind.c b/generic/tkBind.c
index 3d617d4..8d20fa9 100644
--- a/generic/tkBind.c
+++ b/generic/tkBind.c
@@ -1,18 +1,17 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkBind.c --
  *
- *	This file provides procedures that associate Tcl commands
- *	with X events or sequences of X events.
+ *	This file provides functions that associate Tcl commands with X events
+ *	or sequences of X events.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1989-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 #ifdef __WIN32__
@@ -23,7 +22,6 @@
 #include "tkUnixInt.h"
 #endif
 
-
 /*
  * File structure:
  *
@@ -44,111 +42,109 @@
  * Non-package-specific helpers.
  */
 
-
 /*
- * The following union is used to hold the detail information from an
- * XEvent (including Tk's XVirtualEvent extension).
+ * The following union is used to hold the detail information from an XEvent
+ * (including Tk's XVirtualEvent extension).
  */
+
 typedef union {
-    KeySym	keySym;	    /* KeySym that corresponds to xkey.keycode. */
-    int		button;	    /* Button that was pressed (xbutton.button). */
-    Tk_Uid	name;	    /* Tk_Uid of virtual event. */
-    ClientData	clientData; /* Used when type of Detail is unknown, and to
-			     * ensure that all bytes of Detail are initialized
-			     * when this structure is used in a hash key. */
+    KeySym keySym;		/* KeySym that corresponds to xkey.keycode. */
+    int button;			/* Button that was pressed (xbutton.button). */
+    Tk_Uid name;		/* Tk_Uid of virtual event. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Used when type of Detail is unknown, and to
+				 * ensure that all bytes of Detail are
+				 * initialized when this structure is used in
+				 * a hash key. */
 } Detail;
 
 /*
- * The structure below represents a binding table.  A binding table
- * represents a domain in which event bindings may occur.  It includes
- * a space of objects relative to which events occur (usually windows,
- * but not always), a history of recent events in the domain, and
- * a set of mappings that associate particular Tcl commands with sequences
- * of events in the domain.  Multiple binding tables may exist at once,
- * either because there are multiple applications open, or because there
- * are multiple domains within an application with separate event
- * bindings for each (for example, each canvas widget has a separate
- * binding table for associating events with the items in the canvas).
- *
- * Note: it is probably a bad idea to reduce EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE much
- * below 30.  To see this, consider a triple mouse button click while
- * the Shift key is down (and auto-repeating).  There may be as many
- * as 3 auto-repeat events after each mouse button press or release
- * (see the first large comment block within Tk_BindEvent for more on
- * this), for a total of 20 events to cover the three button presses
- * and two intervening releases.  If you reduce EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE too
- * much, shift multi-clicks will be lost.
- * 
+ * The structure below represents a binding table. A binding table represents
+ * a domain in which event bindings may occur. It includes a space of objects
+ * relative to which events occur (usually windows, but not always), a history
+ * of recent events in the domain, and a set of mappings that associate
+ * particular Tcl commands with sequences of events in the domain. Multiple
+ * binding tables may exist at once, either because there are multiple
+ * applications open, or because there are multiple domains within an
+ * application with separate event bindings for each (for example, each canvas
+ * widget has a separate binding table for associating events with the items
+ * in the canvas).
+ *
+ * Note: it is probably a bad idea to reduce EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE much below 30.
+ * To see this, consider a triple mouse button click while the Shift key is
+ * down (and auto-repeating). There may be as many as 3 auto-repeat events
+ * after each mouse button press or release (see the first large comment block
+ * within Tk_BindEvent for more on this), for a total of 20 events to cover
+ * the three button presses and two intervening releases. If you reduce
+ * EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE too much, shift multi-clicks will be lost.
  */
 
 #define EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE 30
 typedef struct BindingTable {
-    XEvent eventRing[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE];/* Circular queue of recent events
-					 * (higher indices are for more recent
-					 * events). */
-    Detail detailRing[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE];/* "Detail" information (keySym,
-					 * button, Tk_Uid, or 0) for each
-					 * entry in eventRing. */
-    int curEvent;			/* Index in eventRing of most recent
-					 * event.  Newer events have higher
-					 * indices. */
-    Tcl_HashTable patternTable;		/* Used to map from an event to a
-					 * list of patterns that may match that
-					 * event.  Keys are PatternTableKey
-					 * structs, values are (PatSeq *). */
-    Tcl_HashTable objectTable;		/* Used to map from an object to a
-					 * list of patterns associated with
-					 * that object.  Keys are ClientData,
-					 * values are (PatSeq *). */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter in which commands are
-					 * executed. */
+    XEvent eventRing[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE];
+				/* Circular queue of recent events (higher
+				 * indices are for more recent events). */
+    Detail detailRing[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE];
+				/* "Detail" information (keySym, button,
+				 * Tk_Uid, or 0) for each entry in
+				 * eventRing. */
+    int curEvent;		/* Index in eventRing of most recent event.
+				 * Newer events have higher indices. */
+    Tcl_HashTable patternTable;	/* Used to map from an event to a list of
+				 * patterns that may match that event. Keys
+				 * are PatternTableKey structs, values are
+				 * (PatSeq *). */
+    Tcl_HashTable objectTable;	/* Used to map from an object to a list of
+				 * patterns associated with that object. Keys
+				 * are ClientData, values are (PatSeq *). */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which commands are
+				 * executed. */
 } BindingTable;
 
 /*
- * The following structure represents virtual event table.  A virtual event
- * table provides a way to map from platform-specific physical events such
- * as button clicks or key presses to virtual events such as <<Paste>>,
+ * The following structure represents virtual event table. A virtual event
+ * table provides a way to map from platform-specific physical events such as
+ * button clicks or key presses to virtual events such as <<Paste>>,
  * <<Close>>, or <<ScrollWindow>>.
  *
  * A virtual event is usually never part of the event stream, but instead is
- * synthesized inline by matching low-level events.  However, a virtual
- * event may be generated by platform-specific code or by Tcl scripts.  In
- * that case, no lookup of the virtual event will need to be done using
- * this table, because the virtual event is actually in the event stream.
+ * synthesized inline by matching low-level events. However, a virtual event
+ * may be generated by platform-specific code or by Tcl scripts. In that case,
+ * no lookup of the virtual event will need to be done using this table,
+ * because the virtual event is actually in the event stream.
  */
 
 typedef struct VirtualEventTable {
-    Tcl_HashTable patternTable;     /* Used to map from a physical event to
-				     * a list of patterns that may match that
-				     * event.  Keys are PatternTableKey
-				     * structs, values are (PatSeq *). */
-    Tcl_HashTable nameTable;	    /* Used to map a virtual event name to
-				     * the array of physical events that can
-				     * trigger it.  Keys are the Tk_Uid names
-				     * of the virtual events, values are
-				     * PhysicalsOwned structs. */
+    Tcl_HashTable patternTable;	/* Used to map from a physical event to a list
+				 * of patterns that may match that event. Keys
+				 * are PatternTableKey structs, values are
+				 * (PatSeq *). */
+    Tcl_HashTable nameTable;	/* Used to map a virtual event name to the
+				 * array of physical events that can trigger
+				 * it. Keys are the Tk_Uid names of the
+				 * virtual events, values are PhysicalsOwned
+				 * structs. */
 } VirtualEventTable;
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used as a key in a patternTable for both 
- * binding tables and a virtual event tables.
+ * The following structure is used as a key in a patternTable for both binding
+ * tables and a virtual event tables.
  *
- * In a binding table, the object field corresponds to the binding tag
- * for the widget whose bindings are being accessed.
+ * In a binding table, the object field corresponds to the binding tag for the
+ * widget whose bindings are being accessed.
  *
- * In a virtual event table, the object field is always NULL.  Virtual
- * events are a global definiton and are not tied to a particular
- * binding tag.
+ * In a virtual event table, the object field is always NULL. Virtual events
+ * are a global definiton and are not tied to a particular binding tag.
  *
- * The same key is used for both types of pattern tables so that the 
- * helper functions that traverse and match patterns will work for both
- * binding tables and virtual event tables.
+ * The same key is used for both types of pattern tables so that the helper
+ * functions that traverse and match patterns will work for both binding
+ * tables and virtual event tables.
  */
+
 typedef struct PatternTableKey {
     ClientData object;		/* For binding table, identifies the binding
 				 * tag of the object (or class of objects)
-				 * relative to which the event occurred.
-				 * For virtual event table, always NULL. */
+				 * relative to which the event occurred. For
+				 * virtual event table, always NULL. */
     int type;			/* Type of event (from X). */
     Detail detail;		/* Additional information, such as keysym,
 				 * button, Tk_Uid, or 0 if nothing
@@ -162,37 +158,34 @@ typedef struct PatternTableKey {
 
 typedef struct Pattern {
     int eventType;		/* Type of X event, e.g. ButtonPress. */
-    int needMods;		/* Mask of modifiers that must be
-				 * present (0 means no modifiers are
-				 * required). */
-    Detail detail;		/* Additional information that must
-				 * match event.  Normally this is 0,
-				 * meaning no additional information
-				 * must match.  For KeyPress and
-				 * KeyRelease events, a keySym may
-				 * be specified to select a
-				 * particular keystroke (0 means any
-				 * keystrokes).  For button events,
-				 * specifies a particular button (0
-				 * means any buttons are OK).  For virtual
-				 * events, specifies the Tk_Uid of the
+    int needMods;		/* Mask of modifiers that must be present (0
+				 * means no modifiers are required). */
+    Detail detail;		/* Additional information that must match
+				 * event. Normally this is 0, meaning no
+				 * additional information must match. For
+				 * KeyPress and KeyRelease events, a keySym
+				 * may be specified to select a particular
+				 * keystroke (0 means any keystrokes). For
+				 * button events, specifies a particular
+				 * button (0 means any buttons are OK). For
+				 * virtual events, specifies the Tk_Uid of the
 				 * virtual event name (never 0). */
 } Pattern;
 
 /*
  * The following structure defines a pattern sequence, which consists of one
- * or more patterns.  In order to trigger, a pattern sequence must match
- * the most recent X events (first pattern to most recent event, next
- * pattern to next event, and so on).  It is used as the hash value in a
- * patternTable for both binding tables and virtual event tables.
- *
- * In a binding table, it is the sequence of physical events that make up
- * a binding for an object.
- * 
- * In a virtual event table, it is the sequence of physical events that
- * define a virtual event.
- *
- * The same structure is used for both types of pattern tables so that the 
+ * or more patterns. In order to trigger, a pattern sequence must match the
+ * most recent X events (first pattern to most recent event, next pattern to
+ * next event, and so on). It is used as the hash value in a patternTable for
+ * both binding tables and virtual event tables.
+ *
+ * In a binding table, it is the sequence of physical events that make up a
+ * binding for an object.
+ *
+ * In a virtual event table, it is the sequence of physical events that define
+ * a virtual event.
+ *
+ * The same structure is used for both types of pattern tables so that the
  * helper functions that traverse and match patterns will work for both
  * binding tables and virtual event tables.
  */
@@ -200,57 +193,56 @@ typedef struct Pattern {
 typedef struct PatSeq {
     int numPats;		/* Number of patterns in sequence (usually
 				 * 1). */
-    TkBindEvalProc *eventProc;	/* The procedure that will be invoked on
-				 * the clientData when this pattern sequence
+    TkBindEvalProc *eventProc;	/* The function that will be invoked on the
+				 * clientData when this pattern sequence
 				 * matches. */
-    TkBindFreeProc *freeProc;	/* The procedure that will be invoked to
+    TkBindFreeProc *freeProc;	/* The function that will be invoked to
 				 * release the clientData when this pattern
 				 * sequence is freed. */
     ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitray data passed to eventProc and
 				 * freeProc when sequence matches. */
     int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flag values; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
-    int refCount;		/* Number of times that this binding is in
-				 * the midst of executing.  If greater than 1,
-				 * then a recursive invocation is happening.
-				 * Only when this is zero can the binding
-				 * actually be freed. */
-    struct PatSeq *nextSeqPtr;  /* Next in list of all pattern sequences
-				 * that have the same initial pattern.  NULL
-				 * means end of list. */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;	/* Pointer to hash table entry for the
-				 * initial pattern.  This is the head of the
-				 * list of which nextSeqPtr forms a part. */
-    struct VirtualOwners *voPtr;/* In a binding table, always NULL.  In a
+    int refCount;		/* Number of times that this binding is in the
+				 * midst of executing. If greater than 1, then
+				 * a recursive invocation is happening. Only
+				 * when this is zero can the binding actually
+				 * be freed. */
+    struct PatSeq *nextSeqPtr;	/* Next in list of all pattern sequences that
+				 * have the same initial pattern. NULL means
+				 * end of list. */
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;	/* Pointer to hash table entry for the initial
+				 * pattern. This is the head of the list of
+				 * which nextSeqPtr forms a part. */
+    struct VirtualOwners *voPtr;/* In a binding table, always NULL. In a
 				 * virtual event table, identifies the array
 				 * of virtual events that can be triggered by
 				 * this event. */
-    struct PatSeq *nextObjPtr;  /* In a binding table, next in list of all
+    struct PatSeq *nextObjPtr;	/* In a binding table, next in list of all
 				 * pattern sequences for the same object (NULL
-				 * for end of list).  Needed to implement
-				 * Tk_DeleteAllBindings.  In a virtual event
+				 * for end of list). Needed to implement
+				 * Tk_DeleteAllBindings. In a virtual event
 				 * table, always NULL. */
-    Pattern pats[1];		/* Array of "numPats" patterns.  Only one
+    Pattern pats[1];		/* Array of "numPats" patterns. Only one
 				 * element is declared here but in actuality
-				 * enough space will be allocated for "numPats"
-				 * patterns.  To match, pats[0] must match
-				 * event n, pats[1] must match event n-1, etc.
-				 */
+				 * enough space will be allocated for
+				 * "numPats" patterns. To match, pats[0] must
+				 * match event n, pats[1] must match event
+				 * n-1, etc. */
 } PatSeq;
 
 /*
  * Flag values for PatSeq structures:
  *
- * PAT_NEARBY		1 means that all of the events matching
- *			this sequence must occur with nearby X
- *			and Y mouse coordinates and close in time.
- *			This is typically used to restrict multiple
- *			button presses.
+ * PAT_NEARBY		1 means that all of the events matching this sequence
+ *			must occur with nearby X and Y mouse coordinates and
+ *			close in time. This is typically used to restrict
+ *			multiple button presses.
  * MARKED_DELETED	1 means that this binding has been marked as deleted
  *			and removed from the binding table, but its memory
- *			could not be released because it was already queued for
- *			execution.  When the binding is actually about to be
- *			executed, this flag will be checked and the binding
+ *			could not be released because it was already queued
+ *			for execution. When the binding is actually about to
+ *			be executed, this flag will be checked and the binding
  *			skipped if set.
  */
 
@@ -258,52 +250,49 @@ typedef struct PatSeq {
 #define MARKED_DELETED		0x2
 
 /*
- * Constants that define how close together two events must be
- * in milliseconds or pixels to meet the PAT_NEARBY constraint:
+ * Constants that define how close together two events must be in milliseconds
+ * or pixels to meet the PAT_NEARBY constraint:
  */
 
 #define NEARBY_PIXELS		5
 #define NEARBY_MS		500
 
-
 /*
  * The following structure keeps track of all the virtual events that are
- * associated with a particular physical event.  It is pointed to by the
- * voPtr field in a PatSeq in the patternTable of a  virtual event table.
+ * associated with a particular physical event. It is pointed to by the voPtr
+ * field in a PatSeq in the patternTable of a virtual event table.
  */
 
 typedef struct VirtualOwners {
-    int numOwners;		    /* Number of virtual events to trigger. */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *owners[1];	    /* Array of pointers to entries in
-				     * nameTable.  Enough space will
-				     * actually be allocated for numOwners
-				     * hash entries. */
+    int numOwners;		/* Number of virtual events to trigger. */
+    Tcl_HashEntry *owners[1];	/* Array of pointers to entries in nameTable.
+				 * Enough space will actually be allocated for
+				 * numOwners hash entries. */
 } VirtualOwners;
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used in the nameTable of a virtual event
- * table to associate a virtual event with all the physical events that can
- * trigger it.
+ * The following structure is used in the nameTable of a virtual event table
+ * to associate a virtual event with all the physical events that can trigger
+ * it.
  */
 typedef struct PhysicalsOwned {
-    int numOwned;		    /* Number of physical events owned. */
-    PatSeq *patSeqs[1];		    /* Array of pointers to physical event
-				     * patterns.  Enough space will actually
-				     * be allocated to hold numOwned. */
+    int numOwned;		/* Number of physical events owned. */
+    PatSeq *patSeqs[1];		/* Array of pointers to physical event
+				 * patterns. Enough space will actually be
+				 * allocated to hold numOwned. */
 } PhysicalsOwned;
 
 /*
- * One of the following structures exists for each interpreter.  This
- * structure keeps track of the current display and screen in the
- * interpreter, so that a script can be invoked whenever the display/screen
- * changes (the script does things like point tk::Priv at a display-specific
- * structure).
+ * One of the following structures exists for each interpreter. This structure
+ * keeps track of the current display and screen in the interpreter, so that a
+ * script can be invoked whenever the display/screen changes (the script does
+ * things like point tk::Priv at a display-specific structure).
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    TkDisplay *curDispPtr;	/* Display for last binding command invoked
-				 * in this application. */
-    int curScreenIndex;		/* Index of screen for last binding command. */
+    TkDisplay *curDispPtr;	/* Display for last binding command invoked in
+				 * this application. */
+    int curScreenIndex;		/* Index of screen for last binding command */
     int bindingDepth;		/* Number of active instances of Tk_BindEvent
 				 * in this application. */
 } ScreenInfo;
@@ -311,21 +300,21 @@ typedef struct {
 /*
  * The following structure is used to keep track of all the C bindings that
  * are awaiting invocation and whether the window they refer to has been
- * destroyed.  If the window is destroyed, then all pending callbacks for
- * that window will be cancelled.  The Tcl bindings will still all be
- * invoked, however.  
+ * destroyed. If the window is destroyed, then all pending callbacks for that
+ * window will be cancelled. The Tcl bindings will still all be invoked,
+ * however.
  */
 
 typedef struct PendingBinding {
     struct PendingBinding *nextPtr;
-				/* Next in chain of pending bindings, in
-				 * case a recursive binding evaluation is in
+				/* Next in chain of pending bindings, in case
+				 * a recursive binding evaluation is in
 				 * progress. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window that the following bindings
 				 * depend upon. */
-    int deleted;		/* Set to non-zero by window cleanup code
-				 * if tkwin is deleted. */
-    PatSeq *matchArray[5];	/* Array of pending C bindings.  The actual
+    int deleted;		/* Set to non-zero by window cleanup code if
+				 * tkwin is deleted. */
+    PatSeq *matchArray[5];	/* Array of pending C bindings. The actual
 				 * size of this depends on how many C bindings
 				 * matched the event passed to Tk_BindEvent.
 				 * THIS FIELD MUST BE THE LAST IN THE
@@ -333,8 +322,8 @@ typedef struct PendingBinding {
 } PendingBinding;
 
 /*
- * The following structure keeps track of all the information local to
- * the binding package on a per interpreter basis.
+ * The following structure keeps track of all the information local to the
+ * binding package on a per interpreter basis.
  */
 
 typedef struct BindInfo {
@@ -342,39 +331,38 @@ typedef struct BindInfo {
 				/* The virtual events that exist in this
 				 * interpreter. */
     ScreenInfo screenInfo;	/* Keeps track of the current display and
-				 * screen, so it can be restored after
-				 * a binding has executed. */
+				 * screen, so it can be restored after a
+				 * binding has executed. */
     PendingBinding *pendingList;/* The list of pending C bindings, kept in
 				 * case a C or Tcl binding causes the target
 				 * window to be deleted. */
-    int deleted;		/* 1 the application has been deleted but
-				 * the structure has been preserved. */
+    int deleted;		/* 1 the application has been deleted but the
+				 * structure has been preserved. */
 } BindInfo;
-    
+
 /*
- * In X11R4 and earlier versions, XStringToKeysym is ridiculously
- * slow.  The data structure and hash table below, along with the
- * code that uses them, implement a fast mapping from strings to
- * keysyms.  In X11R5 and later releases XStringToKeysym is plenty
- * fast so this stuff isn't needed.  The #define REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP
- * is normally undefined, so that XStringToKeysym gets used.  It
- * can be set in the Makefile to enable the use of the hash table
- * below.
+ * In X11R4 and earlier versions, XStringToKeysym is ridiculously slow. The
+ * data structure and hash table below, along with the code that uses them,
+ * implement a fast mapping from strings to keysyms. In X11R5 and later
+ * releases XStringToKeysym is plenty fast so this stuff isn't needed. The
+ * #define REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP is normally undefined, so that XStringToKeysym
+ * gets used. It can be set in the Makefile to enable the use of the hash
+ * table below.
  */
 
 #ifdef REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP
 typedef struct {
-    char *name;				/* Name of keysym. */
-    KeySym value;			/* Numeric identifier for keysym. */
+    char *name;			/* Name of keysym. */
+    KeySym value;		/* Numeric identifier for keysym. */
 } KeySymInfo;
 static KeySymInfo keyArray[] = {
 #ifndef lint
 #include "ks_names.h"
 #endif
-    {(char *) NULL, 0}
+    {NULL, 0}
 };
-static Tcl_HashTable keySymTable;	/* keyArray hashed by keysym value. */
-static Tcl_HashTable nameTable;		/* keyArray hashed by keysym name. */
+static Tcl_HashTable keySymTable; /* keyArray hashed by keysym value. */
+static Tcl_HashTable nameTable;	/* keyArray hashed by keysym name. */
 #endif /* REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP */
 
 /*
@@ -386,16 +374,17 @@ static int initialized = 0;
 TCL_DECLARE_MUTEX(bindMutex)
 
 /*
- * A hash table is kept to map from the string names of event
- * modifiers to information about those modifiers.  The structure
- * for storing this information, and the hash table built at
- * initialization time, are defined below.
+ * A hash table is kept to map from the string names of event modifiers to
+ * information about those modifiers. The structure for storing this
+ * information, and the hash table built at initialization time, are defined
+ * below.
  */
 
 typedef struct {
     char *name;			/* Name of modifier. */
-    int mask;			/* Button/modifier mask value,							 * such as Button1Mask. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flags;  see below for
+    int mask;			/* Button/modifier mask value, such as
+				 * Button1Mask. */
+    int flags;			/* Various flags; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
 } ModInfo;
 
@@ -423,6 +412,7 @@ static ModInfo modArray[] = {
     {"Meta",		META_MASK,	0},
     {"M",		META_MASK,	0},
     {"Alt",		ALT_MASK,	0},
+    {"Extended",	EXTENDED_MASK,	0},
     {"B1",		Button1Mask,	0},
     {"Button1",		Button1Mask,	0},
     {"B2",		Button2Mask,	0},
@@ -448,32 +438,29 @@ static ModInfo modArray[] = {
     {"Double",		0,		DOUBLE},
     {"Triple",		0,		TRIPLE},
     {"Quadruple",	0,		QUADRUPLE},
-    {"Any",		0,		0},	/* Ignored: historical relic. */
+    {"Any",		0,		0},	/* Ignored: historical relic */
     {NULL,		0,		0}
 };
 static Tcl_HashTable modTable;
 
 /*
- * This module also keeps a hash table mapping from event names
- * to information about those events.  The structure, an array
- * to use to initialize the hash table, and the hash table are
- * all defined below.
+ * This module also keeps a hash table mapping from event names to information
+ * about those events. The structure, an array to use to initialize the hash
+ * table, and the hash table are all defined below.
  */
 
 typedef struct {
     char *name;			/* Name of event. */
-    int type;			/* Event type for X, such as
-				 * ButtonPress. */
-    int eventMask;		/* Mask bits (for XSelectInput)
-				 * for this event type. */
+    int type;			/* Event type for X, such as ButtonPress. */
+    int eventMask;		/* Mask bits (for XSelectInput) for this event
+				 * type. */
 } EventInfo;
 
 /*
- * Note:  some of the masks below are an OR-ed combination of
- * several masks.  This is necessary because X doesn't report
- * up events unless you also ask for down events.  Also, X
- * doesn't report button state in motion events unless you've
- * asked about button events.
+ * Note: some of the masks below are an OR-ed combination of several masks.
+ * This is necessary because X doesn't report up events unless you also ask
+ * for down events. Also, X doesn't report button state in motion events
+ * unless you've asked about button events.
  */
 
 static EventInfo eventArray[] = {
@@ -507,18 +494,18 @@ static EventInfo eventArray[] = {
     {"CirculateRequest", CirculateRequest,	SubstructureRedirectMask},
     {"ConfigureRequest", ConfigureRequest,	SubstructureRedirectMask},
     {"Create",		CreateNotify,		SubstructureNotifyMask},
-    {"MapRequest",	MapRequest,             SubstructureRedirectMask},
+    {"MapRequest",	MapRequest,		SubstructureRedirectMask},
     {"ResizeRequest",	ResizeRequest,		ResizeRedirectMask},
-    {(char *) NULL,	0,			0}
+    {NULL,		0,			0}
 };
 static Tcl_HashTable eventTable;
 
 /*
- * The defines and table below are used to classify events into
- * various groups.  The reason for this is that logically identical
- * fields (e.g. "state") appear at different places in different
- * types of events.  The classification masks can be used to figure
- * out quickly where to extract information from events.
+ * The defines and table below are used to classify events into various
+ * groups. The reason for this is that logically identical fields (e.g.
+ * "state") appear at different places in different types of events. The
+ * classification masks can be used to figure out quickly where to extract
+ * information from events.
  */
 
 #define KEY			0x1
@@ -546,7 +533,7 @@ static Tcl_HashTable eventTable;
 #define CIRCREQ			0x400000
 
 #define KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL	(KEY|BUTTON|MOTION|VIRTUAL)
-#define KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING	(KEY|BUTTON|MOTION|CROSSING|VIRTUAL)
+#define KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING	(KEY|BUTTON|MOTION|VIRTUAL|CROSSING)
 
 static int flagArray[TK_LASTEVENT] = {
    /* Not used */		0,
@@ -585,18 +572,17 @@ static int flagArray[TK_LASTEVENT] = {
    /* ClientMessage */		0,
    /* MappingNotify */		0,
    /* VirtualEvent */		VIRTUAL,
-   /* Activate */		ACTIVATE,	    
+   /* Activate */		ACTIVATE,
    /* Deactivate */		ACTIVATE,
    /* MouseWheel */		KEY
 };
 
 /*
- * The following table is used to map between the location where an
- * generated event should be queued and the string used to specify the
- * location.
+ * The following table is used to map between the location where an generated
+ * event should be queued and the string used to specify the location.
  */
- 
-static TkStateMap queuePosition[] = {
+
+static const TkStateMap queuePosition[] = {
     {-1,			"now"},
     {TCL_QUEUE_HEAD,		"head"},
     {TCL_QUEUE_MARK,		"mark"},
@@ -605,13 +591,13 @@ static TkStateMap queuePosition[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * The following tables are used as a two-way map between X's internal
- * numeric values for fields in an XEvent and the strings used in Tcl.  The
- * tables are used both when constructing an XEvent from user input and
- * when providing data from an XEvent to the user.
+ * The following tables are used as a two-way map between X's internal numeric
+ * values for fields in an XEvent and the strings used in Tcl. The tables are
+ * used both when constructing an XEvent from user input and when providing
+ * data from an XEvent to the user.
  */
 
-static TkStateMap notifyMode[] = {
+static const TkStateMap notifyMode[] = {
     {NotifyNormal,		"NotifyNormal"},
     {NotifyGrab,		"NotifyGrab"},
     {NotifyUngrab,		"NotifyUngrab"},
@@ -619,7 +605,7 @@ static TkStateMap notifyMode[] = {
     {-1, NULL}
 };
 
-static TkStateMap notifyDetail[] = {
+static const TkStateMap notifyDetail[] = {
     {NotifyAncestor,		"NotifyAncestor"},
     {NotifyVirtual,		"NotifyVirtual"},
     {NotifyInferior,		"NotifyInferior"},
@@ -631,20 +617,20 @@ static TkStateMap notifyDetail[] = {
     {-1, NULL}
 };
 
-static TkStateMap circPlace[] = {
+static const TkStateMap circPlace[] = {
     {PlaceOnTop,		"PlaceOnTop"},
     {PlaceOnBottom,		"PlaceOnBottom"},
     {-1, NULL}
 };
 
-static TkStateMap visNotify[] = {
-    {VisibilityUnobscured,	    "VisibilityUnobscured"},
-    {VisibilityPartiallyObscured,   "VisibilityPartiallyObscured"},
-    {VisibilityFullyObscured,	    "VisibilityFullyObscured"},
+static const TkStateMap visNotify[] = {
+    {VisibilityUnobscured,	  "VisibilityUnobscured"},
+    {VisibilityPartiallyObscured, "VisibilityPartiallyObscured"},
+    {VisibilityFullyObscured,	  "VisibilityFullyObscured"},
     {-1, NULL}
 };
 
-static TkStateMap configureRequestDetail[] = {
+static const TkStateMap configureRequestDetail[] = {
     {None,		"None"},
     {Above,		"Above"},
     {Below,		"Below"},
@@ -654,79 +640,71 @@ static TkStateMap configureRequestDetail[] = {
     {-1, NULL}
 };
 
-static TkStateMap propNotify[] = {
+static const TkStateMap propNotify[] = {
     {PropertyNewValue,	"NewValue"},
     {PropertyDelete,	"Delete"},
     {-1, NULL}
 };
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for local procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for local functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ChangeScreen _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *dispName, int screenIndex));
-static int		CreateVirtualEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static void		ChangeScreen(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *dispName,
+			    int screenIndex);
+static int		CreateVirtualEvent(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr, char *virtString,
-			    char *eventString));
-static int		DeleteVirtualEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    char *eventString);
+static int		DeleteVirtualEvent(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr, char *virtString,
-			    char *eventString));
-static void		DeleteVirtualEventTable _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr));
-static void		ExpandPercents _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-			    CONST char *before, XEvent *eventPtr, KeySym keySym,
-			    Tcl_DString *dsPtr));
-static void		FreeTclBinding _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static PatSeq *		FindSequence _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    char *eventString);
+static void		DeleteVirtualEventTable(VirtualEventTable *vetPtr);
+static void		ExpandPercents(TkWindow *winPtr, const char *before,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr,KeySym keySym,Tcl_DString *dsPtr);
+static void		FreeTclBinding(ClientData clientData);
+static PatSeq *		FindSequence(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tcl_HashTable *patternTablePtr, ClientData object,
-			    CONST char *eventString, int create,
-			    int allowVirtual, unsigned long *maskPtr));
-static void		GetAllVirtualEvents _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr));
-static char *		GetField _ANSI_ARGS_((char *p, char *copy, int size));
-static void		GetPatternString _ANSI_ARGS_((PatSeq *psPtr,
-			    Tcl_DString *dsPtr));
-static int		GetVirtualEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr, char *virtString));
-static Tk_Uid		GetVirtualEventUid _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *virtString));
-static int		HandleEventGenerate _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window main, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		InitVirtualEventTable _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr));
-static PatSeq *		MatchPatterns _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr,
+			    const char *eventString, int create,
+			    int allowVirtual, unsigned long *maskPtr);
+static void		GetAllVirtualEvents(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr);
+static char *		GetField(char *p, char *copy, int size);
+static void		GetPatternString(PatSeq *psPtr, Tcl_DString *dsPtr);
+static int		GetVirtualEvent(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr, char *virtString);
+static Tk_Uid		GetVirtualEventUid(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    char *virtString);
+static int		HandleEventGenerate(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window main,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		InitVirtualEventTable(VirtualEventTable *vetPtr);
+static PatSeq *		MatchPatterns(TkDisplay *dispPtr,
 			    BindingTable *bindPtr, PatSeq *psPtr,
 			    PatSeq *bestPtr, ClientData *objectPtr,
-			    PatSeq **sourcePtrPtr));
-static int		NameToWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window main, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
-			    Tk_Window *tkwinPtr));
-static int		ParseEventDescription _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    CONST char **eventStringPtr, Pattern *patPtr,
-			    unsigned long *eventMaskPtr));
-static void		DoWarp _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+			    PatSeq **sourcePtrPtr);
+static int		NameToWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window main,
+			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *tkwinPtr);
+static int		ParseEventDescription(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    const char **eventStringPtr, Pattern *patPtr,
+			    unsigned long *eventMaskPtr);
+static void		DoWarp(ClientData clientData);
 
 /*
- * The following define is used as a short circuit for the callback
- * procedure to evaluate a TclBinding.  The actual evaluation of the
- * binding is handled inline, because special things have to be done
- * with a Tcl binding before evaluation time.
+ * The following define is used as a short circuit for the callback function
+ * to evaluate a TclBinding. The actual evaluation of the binding is handled
+ * inline, because special things have to be done with a Tcl binding before
+ * evaluation time.
  */
 
 #define EvalTclBinding	((TkBindEvalProc *) 1)
-
 
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkBindInit --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is created.  It
- *	initializes all the structures used by bindings and virtual
- *	events.  It must be called before any other functions in this
- *	file are called.
+ *	This function is called when an application is created. It initializes
+ *	all the structures used by bindings and virtual events. It must be
+ *	called before any other functions in this file are called.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -738,39 +716,37 @@ static void		DoWarp _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
  */
 
 void
-TkBindInit(mainPtr)
-    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* The newly created application. */
+TkBindInit(
+    TkMainInfo *mainPtr)	/* The newly created application. */
 {
     BindInfo *bindInfoPtr;
 
     if (sizeof(XEvent) < sizeof(XVirtualEvent)) {
-	panic("TkBindInit: virtual events can't be supported");
+	Tcl_Panic("TkBindInit: virtual events can't be supported");
     }
 
     /*
-     * Initialize the static data structures used by the binding package.
-     * They are only initialized once, no matter how many interps are
-     * created.
+     * Initialize the static data structures used by the binding package. They
+     * are only initialized once, no matter how many interps are created.
      */
 
     if (!initialized) {
-        Tcl_MutexLock(&bindMutex);
+	Tcl_MutexLock(&bindMutex);
 	if (!initialized) {
 	    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 	    ModInfo *modPtr;
 	    EventInfo *eiPtr;
 	    int newEntry;
-
 #ifdef REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP
 	    KeySymInfo *kPtr;
 
 	    Tcl_InitHashTable(&keySymTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
 	    Tcl_InitHashTable(&nameTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
 	    for (kPtr = keyArray; kPtr->name != NULL; kPtr++) {
-	        hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&keySymTable, kPtr->name, &newEntry);
+		hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&keySymTable, kPtr->name, &newEntry);
 		Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, kPtr->value);
 		hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&nameTable, (char *) kPtr->value,
-		        &newEntry);
+			&newEntry);
 		if (newEntry) {
 		    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, kPtr->name);
 		}
@@ -779,18 +755,18 @@ TkBindInit(mainPtr)
 
 	    Tcl_InitHashTable(&modTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
 	    for (modPtr = modArray; modPtr->name != NULL; modPtr++) {
-	        hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&modTable, modPtr->name, &newEntry);
+		hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&modTable, modPtr->name, &newEntry);
 		Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, modPtr);
 	    }
-    
+
 	    Tcl_InitHashTable(&eventTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
 	    for (eiPtr = eventArray; eiPtr->name != NULL; eiPtr++) {
-	        hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&eventTable, eiPtr->name, &newEntry);
+		hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&eventTable, eiPtr->name, &newEntry);
 		Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, eiPtr);
 	    }
 	    initialized = 1;
 	}
-        Tcl_MutexUnlock(&bindMutex);
+	Tcl_MutexUnlock(&bindMutex);
     }
 
     mainPtr->bindingTable = Tk_CreateBindingTable(mainPtr->interp);
@@ -812,8 +788,8 @@ TkBindInit(mainPtr)
  *
  * TkBindFree --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is deleted.  It
- *	deletes all the structures used by bindings and virtual events.
+ *	This function is called when an application is deleted. It deletes all
+ *	the structures used by bindings and virtual events.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -825,11 +801,11 @@ TkBindInit(mainPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkBindFree(mainPtr)
-    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* The newly created application. */
+TkBindFree(
+    TkMainInfo *mainPtr)	/* The newly created application. */
 {
     BindInfo *bindInfoPtr;
-    
+
     Tk_DeleteBindingTable(mainPtr->bindingTable);
     mainPtr->bindingTable = NULL;
 
@@ -848,8 +824,8 @@ TkBindFree(mainPtr)
  *	Set up a new domain in which event bindings may be created.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the new table, which must
- *	be passed to procedures like Tk_CreateBinding.
+ *	The return value is a token for the new table, which must be passed to
+ *	functions like Tk_CreateBinding.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory is allocated for the new table.
@@ -858,9 +834,9 @@ TkBindFree(mainPtr)
  */
 
 Tk_BindingTable
-Tk_CreateBindingTable(interp)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to associate with the binding
-				 * table:  commands are executed in this
+Tk_CreateBindingTable(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Interpreter to associate with the binding
+				 * table: commands are executed in this
 				 * interpreter. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr;
@@ -887,9 +863,8 @@ Tk_CreateBindingTable(interp)
  *
  * Tk_DeleteBindingTable --
  *
- *	Destroy a binding table and free up all its memory.
- *	The caller should not use bindingTable again after
- *	this procedure returns.
+ *	Destroy a binding table and free up all its memory. The caller should
+ *	not use bindingTable again after this function returns.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -901,9 +876,9 @@ Tk_CreateBindingTable(interp)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DeleteBindingTable(bindingTable)
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;	/* Token for the binding table to
-					 * destroy. */
+Tk_DeleteBindingTable(
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable)
+				/* Token for the binding table to destroy. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr = (BindingTable *) bindingTable;
     PatSeq *psPtr, *nextPtr;
@@ -911,8 +886,7 @@ Tk_DeleteBindingTable(bindingTable)
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
 
     /*
-     * Find and delete all of the patterns associated with the binding
-     * table.
+     * Find and delete all of the patterns associated with the binding table.
      */
 
     for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&bindPtr->patternTable, &search);
@@ -931,8 +905,7 @@ Tk_DeleteBindingTable(bindingTable)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Clean up the rest of the information associated with the
-     * binding table.
+     * Clean up the rest of the information associated with the binding table.
      */
 
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&bindPtr->patternTable);
@@ -945,41 +918,39 @@ Tk_DeleteBindingTable(bindingTable)
  *
  * Tk_CreateBinding --
  *
- *	Add a binding to a binding table, so that future calls to
- *	Tk_BindEvent may execute the command in the binding.
+ *	Add a binding to a binding table, so that future calls to Tk_BindEvent
+ *	may execute the command in the binding.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if an error occurred while setting
- *	up the binding.  In this case, an error message will be
- *	left in the interp's result.  If all went well then the return
- *	value is a mask of the event types that must be made
- *	available to Tk_BindEvent in order to properly detect when
- *	this binding triggers.  This value can be used to determine
+ *	The return value is 0 if an error occurred while setting up the
+ *	binding. In this case, an error message will be left in the interp's
+ *	result. If all went well then the return value is a mask of the event
+ *	types that must be made available to Tk_BindEvent in order to properly
+ *	detect when this binding triggers. This value can be used to determine
  *	what events to select for in a window, for example.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	An existing binding on the same event sequence may be
- *	replaced.  
- *	The new binding may cause future calls to Tk_BindEvent to
- *	behave differently than they did previously.
+ *	An existing binding on the same event sequence may be replaced. The
+ *	new binding may cause future calls to Tk_BindEvent to behave
+ *	differently than they did previously.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 unsigned long
-Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString, command, append)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
+Tk_CreateBinding(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
 				/* Table in which to create binding. */
-    ClientData object;		/* Token for object with which binding is
+    ClientData object,		/* Token for object with which binding is
 				 * associated. */
-    CONST char *eventString;	/* String describing event sequence that
+    const char *eventString,	/* String describing event sequence that
 				 * triggers binding. */
-    CONST char *command;	/* Contains Tcl command to execute when
+    const char *command,	/* Contains Tcl command to execute when
 				 * binding triggers. */
-    int append;			/* 0 means replace any existing binding for
+    int append)			/* 0 means replace any existing binding for
 				 * eventString; 1 means append to that
-				 * binding.  If the existing binding is for a
+				 * binding. If the existing binding is for a
 				 * callback function and not a Tcl command
 				 * string, the existing binding will always be
 				 * replaced. */
@@ -987,27 +958,30 @@ Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString, command, append)
     BindingTable *bindPtr = (BindingTable *) bindingTable;
     PatSeq *psPtr;
     unsigned long eventMask;
-    char *new, *old;
+    char *newStr, *oldStr;
 
+    if (!*command) {
+	/* Silently ignore empty scripts -- see SF#3006842 */
+	return 1;
+    }
     psPtr = FindSequence(interp, &bindPtr->patternTable, object, eventString,
 	    1, 1, &eventMask);
     if (psPtr == NULL) {
 	return 0;
     }
     if (psPtr->eventProc == NULL) {
-	int new;
+	int isNew;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-	
+
 	/*
-	 * This pattern sequence was just created.
-	 * Link the pattern into the list associated with the object, so
-	 * that if the object goes away, these bindings will all
-	 * automatically be deleted.
+	 * This pattern sequence was just created. Link the pattern into the
+	 * list associated with the object, so that if the object goes away,
+	 * these bindings will all automatically be deleted.
 	 */
 
 	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&bindPtr->objectTable, (char *) object,
-		&new);
-	if (new) {
+		&isNew);
+	if (isNew) {
 	    psPtr->nextObjPtr = NULL;
 	} else {
 	    psPtr->nextObjPtr = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
@@ -1025,23 +999,23 @@ Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString, command, append)
 	append = 0;
     }
 
-    old = (char *) psPtr->clientData;
-    if ((append != 0) && (old != NULL)) {
-	int length;
+    oldStr = (char *) psPtr->clientData;
+    if ((append != 0) && (oldStr != NULL)) {
+	size_t length;
 
-	length = strlen(old) + strlen(command) + 2;
-	new = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) length);
-	sprintf(new, "%s\n%s", old, command);
+	length = strlen(oldStr) + strlen(command) + 2;
+	newStr = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) length);
+	sprintf(newStr, "%s\n%s", oldStr, command);
     } else {
-	new = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) strlen(command) + 1);
-	strcpy(new, command);
+	newStr = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) strlen(command) + 1);
+	strcpy(newStr, command);
     }
-    if (old != NULL) {
-	ckfree(old);
+    if (oldStr != NULL) {
+	ckfree(oldStr);
     }
     psPtr->eventProc = EvalTclBinding;
     psPtr->freeProc = FreeTclBinding;
-    psPtr->clientData = (ClientData) new;
+    psPtr->clientData = (ClientData) newStr;
     return eventMask;
 }
 
@@ -1051,39 +1025,37 @@ Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString, command, append)
  * TkCreateBindingProcedure --
  *
  *	Add a C binding to a binding table, so that future calls to
- *	Tk_BindEvent may callback the procedure in the binding.
+ *	Tk_BindEvent may callback the function in the binding.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if an error occurred while setting
- *	up the binding.  In this case, an error message will be
- *	left in the interp's result.  If all went well then the return
- *	value is a mask of the event types that must be made
- *	available to Tk_BindEvent in order to properly detect when
- *	this binding triggers.  This value can be used to determine
+
+ *	The return value is 0 if an error occurred while setting up the
+ *	binding. In this case, an error message will be left in the interp's
+ *	result. If all went well then the return value is a mask of the event
+ *	types that must be made available to Tk_BindEvent in order to properly
+ *	detect when this binding triggers. This value can be used to determine
  *	what events to select for in a window, for example.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Any existing binding on the same event sequence will be
- *	replaced.  
+ *	Any existing binding on the same event sequence will be replaced.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 unsigned long
-TkCreateBindingProcedure(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString,
-	eventProc, freeProc, clientData)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
+TkCreateBindingProcedure(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
 				/* Table in which to create binding. */
-    ClientData object;		/* Token for object with which binding is
+    ClientData object,		/* Token for object with which binding is
 				 * associated. */
-    CONST char *eventString;	/* String describing event sequence that
+    const char *eventString,	/* String describing event sequence that
 				 * triggers binding. */
-    TkBindEvalProc *eventProc;	/* Procedure to invoke when binding
-				 * triggers.  Must not be NULL. */
-    TkBindFreeProc *freeProc;	/* Procedure to invoke when binding is
-				 * freed.  May be NULL for no procedure. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary ClientData to pass to eventProc
+    TkBindEvalProc *eventProc,	/* Function to invoke when binding triggers.
+				 * Must not be NULL. */
+    TkBindFreeProc *freeProc,	/* Function to invoke when binding is freed.
+				 * May be NULL for no function. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Arbitrary ClientData to pass to eventProc
 				 * and freeProc. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr = (BindingTable *) bindingTable;
@@ -1096,26 +1068,24 @@ TkCreateBindingProcedure(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString,
 	return 0;
     }
     if (psPtr->eventProc == NULL) {
-	int new;
+	int isNew;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-	
+
 	/*
-	 * This pattern sequence was just created.
-	 * Link the pattern into the list associated with the object, so
-	 * that if the object goes away, these bindings will all
-	 * automatically be deleted.
+	 * This pattern sequence was just created. Link the pattern into the
+	 * list associated with the object, so that if the object goes away,
+	 * these bindings will all automatically be deleted.
 	 */
 
 	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&bindPtr->objectTable, (char *) object,
-		&new);
-	if (new) {
+		&isNew);
+	if (isNew) {
 	    psPtr->nextObjPtr = NULL;
 	} else {
 	    psPtr->nextObjPtr = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 	}
 	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, psPtr);
     } else {
-
 	/*
 	 * Free existing callback.
 	 */
@@ -1139,24 +1109,25 @@ TkCreateBindingProcedure(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString,
  *	Remove an event binding from a binding table.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The result is a standard Tcl return value.  If an error
- *	occurs then the interp's result will contain an error message.
+ *	The result is a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs then the
+ *	interp's result will contain an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The binding given by object and eventString is removed
- *	from bindingTable.
+ *	The binding given by object and eventString is removed from
+ *	bindingTable.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;	/* Table in which to delete binding. */
-    ClientData object;			/* Token for object with which binding
-					 * is associated. */
-    CONST char *eventString;		/* String describing event sequence
-					 * that triggers binding. */
+Tk_DeleteBinding(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
+				/* Table in which to delete binding. */
+    ClientData object,		/* Token for object with which binding is
+				 * associated. */
+    const char *eventString)	/* String describing event sequence that
+				 * triggers binding. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr = (BindingTable *) bindingTable;
     PatSeq *psPtr, *prevPtr;
@@ -1171,13 +1142,13 @@ Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Unlink the binding from the list for its object, then from the
-     * list for its pattern.
+     * Unlink the binding from the list for its object, then from the list for
+     * its pattern.
      */
 
     hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&bindPtr->objectTable, (char *) object);
     if (hPtr == NULL) {
-	panic("Tk_DeleteBinding couldn't find object table entry");
+	Tcl_Panic("Tk_DeleteBinding couldn't find object table entry");
     }
     prevPtr = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
     if (prevPtr == psPtr) {
@@ -1185,7 +1156,7 @@ Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
     } else {
 	for ( ; ; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextObjPtr) {
 	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
-		panic("Tk_DeleteBinding couldn't find on object list");
+		Tcl_Panic("Tk_DeleteBinding couldn't find on object list");
 	    }
 	    if (prevPtr->nextObjPtr == psPtr) {
 		prevPtr->nextObjPtr = psPtr->nextObjPtr;
@@ -1203,7 +1174,7 @@ Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
     } else {
 	for ( ; ; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextSeqPtr) {
 	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
-		panic("Tk_DeleteBinding couldn't find on hash chain");
+		Tcl_Panic("Tk_DeleteBinding couldn't find on hash chain");
 	    }
 	    if (prevPtr->nextSeqPtr == psPtr) {
 		prevPtr->nextSeqPtr = psPtr->nextSeqPtr;
@@ -1230,13 +1201,12 @@ Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
  *	Return the command associated with a given event string.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the command string
- *	associated with eventString for object in the domain
- *	given by bindingTable.  If there is no binding for
- *	eventString, or if eventString is improperly formed,
- *	then NULL is returned and an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result.  The return value is semi-static:  it
- *	will persist until the binding is changed or deleted.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the command string associated with
+ *	eventString for object in the domain given by bindingTable. If there
+ *	is no binding for eventString, or if eventString is improperly formed,
+ *	then NULL is returned and an error message is left in the interp's
+ *	result. The return value is semi-static: it will persist until the
+ *	binding is changed or deleted.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1244,15 +1214,15 @@ Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-CONST char *
-Tk_GetBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;	/* Table in which to look for
-					 * binding. */
-    ClientData object;			/* Token for object with which binding
-					 * is associated. */
-    CONST char *eventString;		/* String describing event sequence
-					 * that triggers binding. */
+const char *
+Tk_GetBinding(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
+				/* Table in which to look for binding. */
+    ClientData object,		/* Token for object with which binding is
+				 * associated. */
+    const char *eventString)	/* String describing event sequence that
+				 * triggers binding. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr = (BindingTable *) bindingTable;
     PatSeq *psPtr;
@@ -1264,7 +1234,7 @@ Tk_GetBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
 	return NULL;
     }
     if (psPtr->eventProc == EvalTclBinding) {
-	return (CONST char *) psPtr->clientData;
+	return (const char *) psPtr->clientData;
     }
     return "";
 }
@@ -1274,14 +1244,14 @@ Tk_GetBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
  *
  * Tk_GetAllBindings --
  *
- *	Return a list of event strings for all the bindings
- *	associated with a given object.
+ *	Return a list of event strings for all the bindings associated with a
+ *	given object.
  *
  * Results:
- *	There is no return value.  The interp's result is modified to
- *	hold a Tcl list with one entry for each binding associated
- *	with object in bindingTable.  Each entry in the list
- *	contains the event string associated with one binding.
+ *	There is no return value. The interp's result is modified to hold a
+ *	Tcl list with one entry for each binding associated with object in
+ *	bindingTable. Each entry in the list contains the event string
+ *	associated with one binding.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1290,13 +1260,11 @@ Tk_GetBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, bindingTable, object)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter returning result or
-					 * error. */
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;	/* Table in which to look for
-					 * bindings. */
-    ClientData object;			/* Token for object. */
-
+Tk_GetAllBindings(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter returning result or error. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
+				/* Table in which to look for bindings. */
+    ClientData object)		/* Token for object. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr = (BindingTable *) bindingTable;
     PatSeq *psPtr;
@@ -1310,11 +1278,11 @@ Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, bindingTable, object)
     Tcl_DStringInit(&ds);
     for (psPtr = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr); psPtr != NULL;
 	    psPtr = psPtr->nextObjPtr) {
-	/* 
-	 * For each binding, output information about each of the
-	 * patterns in its sequence.
+	/*
+	 * For each binding, output information about each of the patterns in
+	 * its sequence.
 	 */
-	 
+
 	Tcl_DStringSetLength(&ds, 0);
 	GetPatternString(psPtr, &ds);
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds));
@@ -1327,12 +1295,11 @@ Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, bindingTable, object)
  *
  * Tk_DeleteAllBindings --
  *
- *	Remove all bindings associated with a given object in a
- *	given binding table.
+ *	Remove all bindings associated with a given object in a given binding
+ *	table.
  *
  * Results:
- *	All bindings associated with object are removed from
- *	bindingTable.
+ *	All bindings associated with object are removed from bindingTable.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1341,10 +1308,10 @@ Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, bindingTable, object)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DeleteAllBindings(bindingTable, object)
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;	/* Table in which to delete
-					 * bindings. */
-    ClientData object;			/* Token for object. */
+Tk_DeleteAllBindings(
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
+				/* Table in which to delete bindings. */
+    ClientData object)		/* Token for object. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr = (BindingTable *) bindingTable;
     PatSeq *psPtr, *prevPtr;
@@ -1357,12 +1324,12 @@ Tk_DeleteAllBindings(bindingTable, object)
     }
     for (psPtr = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr); psPtr != NULL;
 	    psPtr = nextPtr) {
-	nextPtr  = psPtr->nextObjPtr;
+	nextPtr = psPtr->nextObjPtr;
 
 	/*
-	 * Be sure to remove each binding from its hash chain in the
-	 * pattern table.  If this is the last pattern in the chain,
-	 * then delete the hash entry too.
+	 * Be sure to remove each binding from its hash chain in the pattern
+	 * table. If this is the last pattern in the chain, then delete the
+	 * hash entry too.
 	 */
 
 	prevPtr = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(psPtr->hPtr);
@@ -1375,7 +1342,7 @@ Tk_DeleteAllBindings(bindingTable, object)
 	} else {
 	    for ( ; ; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextSeqPtr) {
 		if (prevPtr == NULL) {
-		    panic("Tk_DeleteAllBindings couldn't find on hash chain");
+		    Tcl_Panic("Tk_DeleteAllBindings couldn't find on hash chain");
 		}
 		if (prevPtr->nextSeqPtr == psPtr) {
 		    prevPtr->nextSeqPtr = psPtr->nextSeqPtr;
@@ -1400,11 +1367,10 @@ Tk_DeleteAllBindings(bindingTable, object)
  *
  * Tk_BindEvent --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process an X event.  The
- *	event is added to those recorded for the binding table.
- *	Then each of the objects at *objectPtr is checked in
- *	order to see if it has a binding that matches the recent
- *	events.  If so, the most specific binding is invoked for
+ *	This function is invoked to process an X event. The event is added to
+ *	those recorded for the binding table. Then each of the objects at
+ *	*objectPtr is checked in order to see if it has a binding that matches
+ *	the recent events. If so, the most specific binding is invoked for
  *	each object.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -1413,32 +1379,32 @@ Tk_DeleteAllBindings(bindingTable, object)
  * Side effects:
  *	Depends on the command associated with the matching binding.
  *
- *	All Tcl bindings scripts for each object are accumulated before
- *	the first binding is evaluated.  If the action of a Tcl binding
- *	is to change or delete a binding, or delete the window associated
- *	with the binding, all the original Tcl binding scripts will still
- *	fire.  Contrast this with C binding procedures.  If a pending C
- *	binding (one that hasn't fired yet, but is queued to be fired for
- *	this window) is deleted, it will not be called, and if it is
- *	changed, then the new binding procedure will be called.  If the
- *	window itself is deleted, no further C binding procedures will be
- *	called for this window.  When both Tcl binding scripts and C binding
- *	procedures are interleaved, the above rules still apply. 
+ *	All Tcl bindings scripts for each object are accumulated before the
+ *	first binding is evaluated. If the action of a Tcl binding is to
+ *	change or delete a binding, or delete the window associated with the
+ *	binding, all the original Tcl binding scripts will still fire.
+ *	Contrast this with C binding functions. If a pending C binding (one
+ *	that hasn't fired yet, but is queued to be fired for this window) is
+ *	deleted, it will not be called, and if it is changed, then the new
+ *	binding function will be called. If the window itself is deleted, no
+ *	further C binding functions will be called for this window. When both
+ *	Tcl binding scripts and C binding functions are interleaved, the above
+ *	rules still apply.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;	/* Table in which to look for
-					 * bindings. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* What actually happened. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window on display where event
-					 * occurred (needed in order to
-					 * locate display information). */
-    int numObjects;			/* Number of objects at *objectPtr. */
-    ClientData *objectPtr;		/* Array of one or more objects
-					 * to check for a matching binding. */
+Tk_BindEvent(
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
+				/* Table in which to look for bindings. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr,		/* What actually happened. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window on display where event occurred
+				 * (needed in order to locate display
+				 * information). */
+    int numObjects,		/* Number of objects at *objectPtr. */
+    ClientData *objectPtr)	/* Array of one or more objects to check for a
+				 * matching binding. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;
@@ -1453,15 +1419,14 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     Tcl_DString scripts, savedResult;
     Detail detail;
     char *p, *end;
-    PendingBinding *pendingPtr;
-    PendingBinding staticPending;
-    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)tkwin;
+    PendingBinding staticPending, *pendingPtr;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     PatternTableKey key;
     Tk_ClassModalProc *modalProc;
+
     /*
-     * Ignore events on windows that don't have names: these are windows
-     * like wrapper windows that shouldn't be visible to the
-     * application.
+     * Ignore events on windows that don't have names: these are windows like
+     * wrapper windows that shouldn't be visible to the application.
      */
 
     if (winPtr->pathName == NULL) {
@@ -1469,21 +1434,20 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Ignore the event completely if it is an Enter, Leave, FocusIn,
-     * or FocusOut event with detail NotifyInferior.  The reason for
-     * ignoring these events is that we don't want transitions between
-     * a window and its children to visible to bindings on the parent:
-     * this would cause problems for mega-widgets, since the internal
-     * structure of a mega-widget isn't supposed to be visible to
-     * people watching the parent.
+     * Ignore the event completely if it is an Enter, Leave, FocusIn, or
+     * FocusOut event with detail NotifyInferior. The reason for ignoring
+     * these events is that we don't want transitions between a window and its
+     * children to visible to bindings on the parent: this would cause
+     * problems for mega-widgets, since the internal structure of a
+     * mega-widget isn't supposed to be visible to people watching the parent.
      */
 
-    if ((eventPtr->type == EnterNotify)  || (eventPtr->type == LeaveNotify)) {
+    if ((eventPtr->type == EnterNotify) || (eventPtr->type == LeaveNotify)) {
 	if (eventPtr->xcrossing.detail == NotifyInferior) {
 	    return;
 	}
     }
-    if ((eventPtr->type == FocusIn)  || (eventPtr->type == FocusOut)) {
+    if ((eventPtr->type == FocusIn) || (eventPtr->type == FocusOut)) {
 	if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyInferior) {
 	    return;
 	}
@@ -1494,20 +1458,19 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     bindInfoPtr = (BindInfo *) winPtr->mainPtr->bindInfo;
 
     /*
-     * Add the new event to the ring of saved events for the
-     * binding table.  Two tricky points:
+     * Add the new event to the ring of saved events for the binding table.
+     * Two tricky points:
      *
-     * 1. Combine consecutive MotionNotify events.  Do this by putting
-     *    the new event *on top* of the previous event.
+     * 1. Combine consecutive MotionNotify events. Do this by putting the new
+     *    event *on top* of the previous event.
      * 2. If a modifier key is held down, it auto-repeats to generate
-     *    continuous KeyPress and KeyRelease events.  These can flush
-     *    the event ring so that valuable information is lost (such
-     *    as repeated button clicks).  To handle this, check for the
-     *    special case of a modifier KeyPress arriving when the previous
-     *    two events are a KeyRelease and KeyPress of the same key.
-     *    If this happens, mark the most recent event (the KeyRelease)
-     *    invalid and put the new event on top of the event before that
-     *    (the KeyPress).
+     *    continuous KeyPress and KeyRelease events. These can flush the event
+     *    ring so that valuable information is lost (such as repeated button
+     *    clicks). To handle this, check for the special case of a modifier
+     *    KeyPress arriving when the previous two events are a KeyRelease and
+     *    KeyPress of the same key. If this happens, mark the most recent
+     *    event (the KeyRelease) invalid and put the new event on top of the
+     *    event before that (the KeyPress).
      */
 
     if ((eventPtr->type == MotionNotify)
@@ -1517,6 +1480,7 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	 */
     } else if (eventPtr->type == KeyPress) {
 	int i;
+
 	for (i = 0; ; i++) {
 	    if (i >= dispPtr->numModKeyCodes) {
 		goto advanceRingPointer;
@@ -1543,14 +1507,15 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	bindPtr->eventRing[bindPtr->curEvent].type = -1;
 	bindPtr->curEvent = i;
     } else {
-	advanceRingPointer:
+
+    advanceRingPointer:
 	bindPtr->curEvent++;
 	if (bindPtr->curEvent >= EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE) {
 	    bindPtr->curEvent = 0;
 	}
     }
     ringPtr = &bindPtr->eventRing[bindPtr->curEvent];
-    memcpy((VOID *) ringPtr, (VOID *) eventPtr, sizeof(XEvent));
+    memcpy((void *) ringPtr, (void *) eventPtr, sizeof(XEvent));
     detail.clientData = 0;
     flags = flagArray[ringPtr->type];
     if (flags & KEY) {
@@ -1575,14 +1540,12 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     memset(&key, 0, sizeof(key));
 
     if (ringPtr->type != VirtualEvent) {
-	Tcl_HashTable *veptPtr;
+	Tcl_HashTable *veptPtr = &bindInfoPtr->virtualEventTable.patternTable;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 
-	veptPtr = &bindInfoPtr->virtualEventTable.patternTable;
-
-        key.object  = NULL;
-	key.type    = ringPtr->type;
-	key.detail  = detail;
+	key.object = NULL;
+	key.type = ringPtr->type;
+	key.detail = detail;
 
 	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(veptPtr, (char *) &key);
 	if (hPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1593,37 +1556,34 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	    key.detail.clientData = 0;
 	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(veptPtr, (char *) &key);
 	    if (hPtr != NULL) {
-	        vMatchNoDetailList = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+		vMatchNoDetailList = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 	    }
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Loop over all the binding tags, finding the binding script or
-     * callback for each one.  Append all of the binding scripts, with
-     * %-sequences expanded, to "scripts", with null characters separating
-     * the scripts for each object.  Append all the callbacks to the array
-     * of pending callbacks.  
+     * Loop over all the binding tags, finding the binding script or callback
+     * for each one. Append all of the binding scripts, with %-sequences
+     * expanded, to "scripts", with null characters separating the scripts for
+     * each object. Append all the callbacks to the array of pending
+     * callbacks.
      */
-	       
+
     pendingPtr = &staticPending;
     matchCount = 0;
     matchSpace = sizeof(staticPending.matchArray) / sizeof(PatSeq *);
     Tcl_DStringInit(&scripts);
 
     for ( ; numObjects > 0; numObjects--, objectPtr++) {
-	PatSeq *matchPtr, *sourcePtr;
+	PatSeq *matchPtr = NULL, *sourcePtr = NULL;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 
-	matchPtr = NULL;
-	sourcePtr = NULL;
-
 	/*
 	 * Match the new event against those recorded in the pattern table,
-	 * saving the longest matching pattern.  For events with details
-	 * (button and key events), look for a binding for the specific
-	 * key or button.  First see if the event matches a physical event
-	 * that the object is interested in, then look for a virtual event.
+	 * saving the longest matching pattern. For events with details
+	 * (button and key events), look for a binding for the specific key or
+	 * button. First see if the event matches a physical event that the
+	 * object is interested in, then look for a virtual event.
 	 */
 
 	key.object = *objectPtr;
@@ -1631,7 +1591,7 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	key.detail = detail;
 	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&bindPtr->patternTable, (char *) &key);
 	if (hPtr != NULL) {
-	    matchPtr = MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, 
+	    matchPtr = MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr,
 		    (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr), matchPtr, NULL,
 		    &sourcePtr);
 	}
@@ -1643,7 +1603,7 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 
 	/*
 	 * If no match was found, look for a binding for all keys or buttons
-	 * (detail of 0).  Again, first match on a virtual event.
+	 * (detail of 0). Again, first match on a virtual event.
 	 */
 
 	if ((detail.clientData != 0) && (matchPtr == NULL)) {
@@ -1656,24 +1616,24 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	    }
 
 	    if (vMatchNoDetailList != NULL) {
-	        matchPtr = MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, vMatchNoDetailList,
+		matchPtr = MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, vMatchNoDetailList,
 			matchPtr, objectPtr, &sourcePtr);
 	    }
 
 	}
-    
+
 	if (matchPtr != NULL) {
 	    if (sourcePtr->eventProc == NULL) {
-		panic("Tk_BindEvent: missing command");
+		Tcl_Panic("Tk_BindEvent: missing command");
 	    }
 	    if (sourcePtr->eventProc == EvalTclBinding) {
 		ExpandPercents(winPtr, (char *) sourcePtr->clientData,
 			eventPtr, detail.keySym, &scripts);
 	    } else {
 		if (matchCount >= matchSpace) {
-		    PendingBinding *new;
+		    PendingBinding *newPtr;
 		    unsigned int oldSize, newSize;
-		    
+
 		    oldSize = sizeof(staticPending)
 			    - sizeof(staticPending.matchArray)
 			    + matchSpace * sizeof(PatSeq*);
@@ -1681,20 +1641,21 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 		    newSize = sizeof(staticPending)
 			    - sizeof(staticPending.matchArray)
 			    + matchSpace * sizeof(PatSeq*);
-		    new = (PendingBinding *) ckalloc(newSize);
-		    memcpy((VOID *) new, (VOID *) pendingPtr, oldSize);
+		    newPtr = (PendingBinding *) ckalloc(newSize);
+		    memcpy((void *) newPtr, (void *) pendingPtr, oldSize);
 		    if (pendingPtr != &staticPending) {
 			ckfree((char *) pendingPtr);
 		    }
-		    pendingPtr = new;
+		    pendingPtr = newPtr;
 		}
 		sourcePtr->refCount++;
 		pendingPtr->matchArray[matchCount] = sourcePtr;
 		matchCount++;
 	    }
+
 	    /*
-	     * A "" is added to the scripts string to separate the
-	     * various scripts that should be invoked.
+	     * A "" is added to the scripts string to separate the various
+	     * scripts that should be invoked.
 	     */
 
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&scripts, "", 1);
@@ -1705,29 +1666,28 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Now go back through and evaluate the binding for each object,
-     * in order, dealing with "break" and "continue" exceptions
-     * appropriately.
+     * Now go back through and evaluate the binding for each object, in order,
+     * dealing with "break" and "continue" exceptions appropriately.
      *
      * There are two tricks here:
-     * 1. Bindings can be invoked from in the middle of Tcl commands,
-     *    where the interp's result is significant (for example, a widget
-     *    might be deleted because of an error in creating it, so the
-     *    result contains an error message that is eventually going to
-     *    be returned by the creating command).  To preserve the result,
-     *    we save it in a dynamic string.
-     * 2. The binding's action can potentially delete the binding,
-     *    so bindPtr may not point to anything valid once the action
-     *    completes.  Thus we have to save bindPtr->interp in a
-     *    local variable in order to restore the result.
+     * 1. Bindings can be invoked from in the middle of Tcl commands, where
+     *    the interp's result is significant (for example, a widget might be
+     *    deleted because of an error in creating it, so the result contains
+     *    an error message that is eventually going to be returned by the
+     *    creating command). To preserve the result, we save it in a dynamic
+     *    string.
+     * 2. The binding's action can potentially delete the binding, so bindPtr
+     *    may not point to anything valid once the action completes. Thus we
+     *    have to save bindPtr->interp in a local variable in order to restore
+     *    the result.
      */
 
     interp = bindPtr->interp;
     Tcl_DStringInit(&savedResult);
 
     /*
-     * Save information about the current screen, then invoke a script
-     * if the screen has changed.
+     * Save information about the current screen, then invoke a script if the
+     * screen has changed.
      */
 
     Tcl_DStringGetResult(interp, &savedResult);
@@ -1744,9 +1704,8 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     if (matchCount > 0) {
 	/*
 	 * Remember the list of pending C binding callbacks, so we can mark
-	 * them as deleted and not call them if the act of evaluating a C
-	 * or Tcl binding deletes a C binding callback or even the whole
-	 * window.
+	 * them as deleted and not call them if the act of evaluating a C or
+	 * Tcl binding deletes a C binding callback or even the whole window.
 	 */
 
 	pendingPtr->nextPtr = bindInfoPtr->pendingList;
@@ -1754,11 +1713,11 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	pendingPtr->deleted = 0;
 	bindInfoPtr->pendingList = pendingPtr;
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * Save the current value of the TK_DEFER_MODAL flag so we can
-     * restore it at the end of the loop.  Clear the flag so we can
-     * detect any recursive requests for a modal loop.
+     * Save the current value of the TK_DEFER_MODAL flag so we can restore it
+     * at the end of the loop. Clear the flag so we can detect any recursive
+     * requests for a modal loop.
      */
 
     flags = winPtr->flags;
@@ -1769,16 +1728,15 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     i = 0;
 
     /*
-     * Be carefule when dereferencing screenPtr or bindInfoPtr.  If we
-     * evaluate something that destroys ".", bindInfoPtr would have been
-     * freed, but we can tell that by first checking to see if
-     * winPtr->mainPtr == NULL.
+     * Be carefule when dereferencing screenPtr or bindInfoPtr. If we evaluate
+     * something that destroys ".", bindInfoPtr would have been freed, but we
+     * can tell that by first checking to see if winPtr->mainPtr == NULL.
      */
 
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) bindInfoPtr);
     while (p < end) {
 	int code;
-	
+
 	if (!bindInfoPtr->deleted) {
 	    screenPtr->bindingDepth++;
 	}
@@ -1786,7 +1744,7 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 
 	if (*p == '\0') {
 	    PatSeq *psPtr;
-	    
+
 	    psPtr = pendingPtr->matchArray[i];
 	    i++;
 	    code = TCL_OK;
@@ -1804,6 +1762,7 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    int len = (int) strlen(p);
+
 	    code = Tcl_EvalEx(interp, p, len, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
 	    p += len;
 	}
@@ -1815,7 +1774,7 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	if (code != TCL_OK) {
 	    if (code == TCL_CONTINUE) {
 		/*
-		 * Do nothing:  just go on to the next command.
+		 * Do nothing: just go on to the next command.
 		 */
 	    } else if (code == TCL_BREAK) {
 		break;
@@ -1829,13 +1788,13 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 
     if (matchCount > 0 && !pendingPtr->deleted) {
 	/*
-	 * Restore the original modal flag value and invoke the modal loop
-	 * if needed.
+	 * Restore the original modal flag value and invoke the modal loop if
+	 * needed.
 	 */
 
 	deferModal = winPtr->flags & TK_DEFER_MODAL;
-	winPtr->flags = (winPtr->flags & (unsigned int) ~TK_DEFER_MODAL) 
-	    | (flags & TK_DEFER_MODAL);
+	winPtr->flags = (winPtr->flags & (unsigned int) ~TK_DEFER_MODAL)
+		| (flags & TK_DEFER_MODAL);
 	if (deferModal) {
 	    modalProc = Tk_GetClassProc(winPtr->classProcsPtr, modalProc);
 	    if (modalProc != NULL) {
@@ -1846,12 +1805,10 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 
     if (!bindInfoPtr->deleted && (screenPtr->bindingDepth != 0)
 	    && ((oldDispPtr != screenPtr->curDispPtr)
-                    || (oldScreen != screenPtr->curScreenIndex))) {
-
+		    || (oldScreen != screenPtr->curScreenIndex))) {
 	/*
-	 * Some other binding script is currently executing, but its
-	 * screen is no longer current.  Change the current display
-	 * back again.
+	 * Some other binding script is currently executing, but its screen is
+	 * no longer current. Change the current display back again.
 	 */
 
 	screenPtr->curDispPtr = oldDispPtr;
@@ -1864,10 +1821,10 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     if (matchCount > 0) {
 	if (!bindInfoPtr->deleted) {
 	    /*
-	     * Delete the pending list from the list of pending scripts
-	     * for this window.
+	     * Delete the pending list from the list of pending scripts for
+	     * this window.
 	     */
-	     
+
 	    PendingBinding **curPtrPtr;
 
 	    for (curPtrPtr = &bindInfoPtr->pendingList; ; ) {
@@ -1890,8 +1847,8 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
  *
  * TkBindDeadWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when it is determined that a window is
- *	dead.  It cleans up bind-related information about the window
+ *	This function is invoked when it is determined that a window is dead.
+ *	It cleans up bind-related information about the window
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1901,20 +1858,22 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 void
-TkBindDeadWindow(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* The window that is being deleted. */
+TkBindDeadWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* The window that is being deleted. */
 {
     BindInfo *bindInfoPtr;
     PendingBinding *curPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Certain special windows like those used for send and clipboard
-     * have no mainPtr.
+     * Certain special windows like those used for send and clipboard have no
+     * mainPtr.
      */
-    if (winPtr->mainPtr == NULL)
-        return;
+
+    if (winPtr->mainPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
 
     bindInfoPtr = (BindInfo *) winPtr->mainPtr->bindInfo;
     curPtr = bindInfoPtr->pendingList;
@@ -1931,58 +1890,59 @@ TkBindDeadWindow(winPtr)
  *
  * MatchPatterns --
  *
- *      Given a list of pattern sequences and a list of recent events,
- *      return the pattern sequence that best matches the event list,
- *	if there is one.
+ *	Given a list of pattern sequences and a list of recent events, return
+ *	the pattern sequence that best matches the event list, if there is
+ *	one.
  *
- *	This procedure is used in two different ways.  In the simplest
- *	use, "object" is NULL and psPtr is a list of pattern sequences,
- *	each of which corresponds to a binding.  In this case, the
- *	procedure finds the pattern sequences that match the event list
- *	and returns the most specific of those, if there is more than one.
+ *	This function is used in two different ways. In the simplest use,
+ *	"object" is NULL and psPtr is a list of pattern sequences, each of
+ *	which corresponds to a binding. In this case, the function finds the
+ *	pattern sequences that match the event list and returns the most
+ *	specific of those, if there is more than one.
  *
- *	In the second case, psPtr is a list of pattern sequences, each
- *	of which corresponds to a definition for a virtual binding.
- *	In order for one of these sequences to "match", it must match
- *	the events (as above) but in addition there must be a binding
- *	for its associated virtual event on the current object.  The
- *	"object" argument indicates which object the binding must be for.
+ *	In the second case, psPtr is a list of pattern sequences, each of
+ *	which corresponds to a definition for a virtual binding. In order for
+ *	one of these sequences to "match", it must match the events (as above)
+ *	but in addition there must be a binding for its associated virtual
+ *	event on the current object. The "object" argument indicates which
+ *	object the binding must be for.
  *
  * Results:
- *      The return value is NULL if bestPtr is NULL and no pattern matches
- *	the recent events from bindPtr.  Otherwise the return value is
- *	the most specific pattern sequence among bestPtr and all those
- *	at psPtr that match the event list and object.  If a pattern
- *	sequence other than bestPtr is returned, then *bestCommandPtr
- *	is filled in with a pointer to the command from the best sequence.
+
+ *	The return value is NULL if bestPtr is NULL and no pattern matches the
+ *	recent events from bindPtr. Otherwise the return value is the most
+ *	specific pattern sequence among bestPtr and all those at psPtr that
+ *	match the event list and object. If a pattern sequence other than
+ *	bestPtr is returned, then *bestCommandPtr is filled in with a pointer
+ *	to the command from the best sequence.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 static PatSeq *
-MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display from which the event came. */
-    BindingTable *bindPtr;	/* Information about binding table, such as
+MatchPatterns(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr,		/* Display from which the event came. */
+    BindingTable *bindPtr,	/* Information about binding table, such as
 				 * ring of recent events. */
-    PatSeq *psPtr;		/* List of pattern sequences. */
-    PatSeq *bestPtr; 		/* The best match seen so far, from a
-				 * previous call to this procedure.  NULL
-				 * means no prior best match. */
-    ClientData *objectPtr;	/* If NULL, the sequences at psPtr
-				 * correspond to "normal" bindings.  If
-				 * non-NULL, the sequences at psPtr correspond
-				 * to virtual bindings; in order to match each
-				 * sequence must correspond to a virtual
-				 * binding for which a binding exists for
-				 * object in bindPtr. */
-    PatSeq **sourcePtrPtr;	/* Filled with the pattern sequence that
+    PatSeq *psPtr,		/* List of pattern sequences. */
+    PatSeq *bestPtr,		/* The best match seen so far, from a previous
+				 * call to this function. NULL means no prior
+				 * best match. */
+    ClientData *objectPtr,	/* If NULL, the sequences at psPtr correspond
+				 * to "normal" bindings. If non-NULL, the
+				 * sequences at psPtr correspond to virtual
+				 * bindings; in order to match each sequence
+				 * must correspond to a virtual binding for
+				 * which a binding exists for object in
+				 * bindPtr. */
+    PatSeq **sourcePtrPtr)	/* Filled with the pattern sequence that
 				 * contains the eventProc and clientData
-				 * associated with the best match.  If this
+				 * associated with the best match. If this
 				 * differs from the return value, it is the
 				 * virtual event that most closely matched the
-				 * return value (a physical event).  Not
+				 * return value (a physical event). Not
 				 * modified unless a result other than bestPtr
 				 * is returned. */
 {
@@ -1995,22 +1955,17 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
      */
 
     for ( ; psPtr != NULL; psPtr = psPtr->nextSeqPtr) {
-	XEvent *eventPtr;
-	Pattern *patPtr;
-	Window window;
-	Detail *detailPtr;
-	int patCount, ringCount, flags, state;
-	int modMask;
+	XEvent *eventPtr = &bindPtr->eventRing[bindPtr->curEvent];
+	Detail *detailPtr = &bindPtr->detailRing[bindPtr->curEvent];
+	Pattern *patPtr = psPtr->pats;
+	Window window = eventPtr->xany.window;
+	int patCount, ringCount, flags, state, modMask, i;
 
 	/*
-	 * Iterate over all the patterns in a sequence to be
-	 * sure that they all match.
+	 * Iterate over all the patterns in a sequence to be sure that they
+	 * all match.
 	 */
 
-	eventPtr = &bindPtr->eventRing[bindPtr->curEvent];
-	detailPtr = &bindPtr->detailRing[bindPtr->curEvent];
-	window = eventPtr->xany.window;
-	patPtr = psPtr->pats;
 	patCount = psPtr->numPats;
 	ringCount = EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE;
 	while (patCount > 0) {
@@ -2019,21 +1974,21 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 	    }
 	    if (eventPtr->xany.type != patPtr->eventType) {
 		/*
-		 * Most of the event types are considered superfluous
-		 * in that they are ignored if they occur in the middle
-		 * of a pattern sequence and have mismatching types.  The
-		 * only ones that cannot be ignored are ButtonPress and
-		 * ButtonRelease events (if the next event in the pattern
-		 * is a KeyPress or KeyRelease) and KeyPress and KeyRelease
-		 * events (if the next pattern event is a ButtonPress or
-		 * ButtonRelease).  Here are some tricky cases to consider:
+		 * Most of the event types are considered superfluous in that
+		 * they are ignored if they occur in the middle of a pattern
+		 * sequence and have mismatching types. The only ones that
+		 * cannot be ignored are ButtonPress and ButtonRelease events
+		 * (if the next event in the pattern is a KeyPress or
+		 * KeyRelease) and KeyPress and KeyRelease events (if the next
+		 * pattern event is a ButtonPress or ButtonRelease). Here are
+		 * some tricky cases to consider:
 		 * 1. Double-Button or Double-Key events.
 		 * 2. Double-ButtonRelease or Double-KeyRelease events.
-		 * 3. The arrival of various events like Enter and Leave
-		 *    and FocusIn and GraphicsExpose between two button
-		 *    presses or key presses.
-		 * 4. Modifier keys like Shift and Control shouldn't
-		 *    generate conflicts with button events.
+		 * 3. The arrival of various events like Enter and Leave and
+		 *    FocusIn and GraphicsExpose between two button presses or
+		 *    key presses.
+		 * 4. Modifier keys like Shift and Control shouldn't generate
+		 *    conflicts with button events.
 		 */
 
 		if ((patPtr->eventType == KeyPress)
@@ -2046,8 +2001,6 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 			|| (patPtr->eventType == ButtonRelease)) {
 		    if ((eventPtr->xany.type == KeyPress)
 			    || (eventPtr->xany.type == KeyRelease)) {
-			int i;
-
 			/*
 			 * Ignore key events if they are modifier keys.
 			 */
@@ -2058,6 +2011,7 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 				/*
 				 * This key is a modifier key, so ignore it.
 				 */
+
 				goto nextEvent;
 			    }
 			}
@@ -2067,32 +2021,28 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 		goto nextEvent;
 	    }
 	    if (eventPtr->xany.type == CreateNotify
-		&& eventPtr->xcreatewindow.parent != window) {
+		    && eventPtr->xcreatewindow.parent != window) {
 		goto nextSequence;
-	    } else 
-	    if (eventPtr->xany.window != window) {
+	    } else if (eventPtr->xany.window != window) {
 		goto nextSequence;
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Note: it's important for the keysym check to go before
-	     * the modifier check, so we can ignore unwanted modifier
-	     * keys before choking on the modifier check.
+	     * Note: it's important for the keysym check to go before the
+	     * modifier check, so we can ignore unwanted modifier keys before
+	     * choking on the modifier check.
 	     */
 
 	    if ((patPtr->detail.clientData != 0)
 		    && (patPtr->detail.clientData != detailPtr->clientData)) {
 		/*
-		 * The detail appears not to match.  However, if the event
-		 * is a KeyPress for a modifier key then just ignore the
-		 * event.  Otherwise event sequences like "aD" never match
-		 * because the shift key goes down between the "a" and the
-		 * "D".
+		 * The detail appears not to match. However, if the event is a
+		 * KeyPress for a modifier key then just ignore the event.
+		 * Otherwise event sequences like "aD" never match because the
+		 * shift key goes down between the "a" and the "D".
 		 */
 
 		if (eventPtr->xany.type == KeyPress) {
-		    int i;
-
 		    for (i = 0; i < dispPtr->numModKeyCodes; i++) {
 			if (dispPtr->modKeyCodes[i] == eventPtr->xkey.keycode) {
 			    goto nextEvent;
@@ -2102,7 +2052,7 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 		goto nextSequence;
 	    }
 	    flags = flagArray[eventPtr->type];
-	    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL) {
 		state = eventPtr->xkey.state;
 	    } else if (flags & CROSSING) {
 		state = eventPtr->xcrossing.state;
@@ -2130,10 +2080,9 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 		}
 	    }
 	    if (psPtr->flags & PAT_NEARBY) {
-		XEvent *firstPtr;
+		XEvent *firstPtr = &bindPtr->eventRing[bindPtr->curEvent];
 		int timeDiff;
 
-		firstPtr = &bindPtr->eventRing[bindPtr->curEvent];
 		timeDiff = (Time) firstPtr->xkey.time - eventPtr->xkey.time;
 		if ((firstPtr->xkey.x_root
 			    < (eventPtr->xkey.x_root - NEARBY_PIXELS))
@@ -2149,7 +2098,7 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 	    }
 	    patPtr++;
 	    patCount--;
-	    nextEvent:
+	nextEvent:
 	    if (eventPtr == bindPtr->eventRing) {
 		eventPtr = &bindPtr->eventRing[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE-1];
 		detailPtr = &bindPtr->detailRing[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE-1];
@@ -2169,9 +2118,9 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 	    PatternTableKey key;
 
 	    /*
-	     * The sequence matches the physical constraints.
-	     * Is this object interested in any of the virtual events
-	     * that correspond to this sequence?  
+	     * The sequence matches the physical constraints. Is this object
+	     * interested in any of the virtual events that correspond to this
+	     * sequence?
 	     */
 
 	    voPtr = psPtr->voPtr;
@@ -2182,26 +2131,24 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 	    key.detail.clientData = 0;
 
 	    for (iVirt = 0; iVirt < voPtr->numOwners; iVirt++) {
-	        Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = voPtr->owners[iVirt];
+		Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = voPtr->owners[iVirt];
 
-	        key.detail.name = (Tk_Uid) Tcl_GetHashKey(hPtr->tablePtr,
+		key.detail.name = (Tk_Uid) Tcl_GetHashKey(hPtr->tablePtr,
 			hPtr);
 		hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&bindPtr->patternTable,
 			(char *) &key);
 		if (hPtr != NULL) {
-
 		    /*
 		     * This tag is interested in this virtual event and its
 		     * corresponding physical event is a good match with the
 		     * virtual event's definition.
 		     */
 
-		    PatSeq *virtMatchPtr;
+		    PatSeq *virtMatchPtr = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 
-		    virtMatchPtr = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 		    if ((virtMatchPtr->numPats != 1)
 			    || (virtMatchPtr->nextSeqPtr != NULL)) {
-			panic("MatchPattern: badly constructed virtual event");
+			Tcl_Panic("MatchPattern: badly constructed virtual event");
 		    }
 		    sourcePtr = virtMatchPtr;
 		    goto match;
@@ -2212,19 +2159,19 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 	     * The physical event matches a virtual event's definition, but
 	     * the tag isn't interested in it.
 	     */
+
 	    goto nextSequence;
 	}
-	match:
+    match:
 
 	/*
-	 * This sequence matches.  If we've already got another match,
-	 * pick whichever is most specific.  Detail is most important,
-	 * then needMods.
+	 * This sequence matches. If we've already got another match, pick
+	 * whichever is most specific. Detail is most important, then
+	 * needMods.
 	 */
 
 	if (bestPtr != NULL) {
 	    Pattern *patPtr2;
-	    int i;
 
 	    if (matchPtr->numPats != bestPtr->numPats) {
 		if (bestPtr->numPats > matchPtr->numPats) {
@@ -2252,51 +2199,49 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 		    }
 		}
 	    }
+
 	    /*
 	     * Tie goes to current best pattern.
 	     *
-	     * (1) For virtual vs. virtual, the least recently defined
-	     * virtual wins, because virtuals are examined in order of
-	     * definition.  This order is _not_ guaranteed in the
-	     * documentation.
+	     * (1) For virtual vs. virtual, the least recently defined virtual
+	     * wins, because virtuals are examined in order of definition.
+	     * This order is _not_ guaranteed in the documentation.
 	     *
-	     * (2) For virtual vs. physical, the physical wins because all
-	     * the physicals are examined before the virtuals.  This order
-	     * is guaranteed in the documentation.
+	     * (2) For virtual vs. physical, the physical wins because all the
+	     * physicals are examined before the virtuals. This order is
+	     * guaranteed in the documentation.
 	     *
 	     * (3) For physical vs. physical pattern, the most recently
 	     * defined physical wins, because physicals are examined in
-	     * reverse order of definition.  This order is guaranteed in
-	     * the documentation.
+	     * reverse order of definition. This order is guaranteed in the
+	     * documentation.
 	     */
 
-	    goto nextSequence;	
+	    goto nextSequence;
 	}
-	newBest:
+    newBest:
 	bestPtr = matchPtr;
 	bestSourcePtr = sourcePtr;
 
-	nextSequence:
+    nextSequence:
 	continue;
     }
 
     *sourcePtrPtr = bestSourcePtr;
     return bestPtr;
 }
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * ExpandPercents --
  *
- *	Given a command and an event, produce a new command
- *	by replacing % constructs in the original command
- *	with information from the X event.
+ *	Given a command and an event, produce a new command by replacing %
+ *	constructs in the original command with information from the X event.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The new expanded command is appended to the dynamic string
- *	given by dsPtr.
+ *	The new expanded command is appended to the dynamic string given by
+ *	dsPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2305,23 +2250,23 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ExpandPercents(winPtr, before, eventPtr, keySym, dsPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window where event occurred:  needed to
-				 * get input context. */
-    CONST char *before;		/* Command containing percent expressions
-				 * to be replaced. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X event containing information to be
-				 * used in % replacements. */
-    KeySym keySym;		/* KeySym: only relevant for KeyPress and
+ExpandPercents(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Window where event occurred: needed to get
+				 * input context. */
+    const char *before,		/* Command containing percent expressions to
+				 * be replaced. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr,		/* X event containing information to be used
+				 * in % replacements. */
+    KeySym keySym,		/* KeySym: only relevant for KeyPress and
 				 * KeyRelease events). */
-    Tcl_DString *dsPtr;		/* Dynamic string in which to append new
+    Tcl_DString *dsPtr)		/* Dynamic string in which to append new
 				 * command. */
 {
     int spaceNeeded, cvtFlags;	/* Used to substitute string as proper Tcl
 				 * list element. */
     int number, flags, length;
 #define NUM_SIZE 40
-    CONST char *string;
+    const char *string;
     Tcl_DString buf;
     char numStorage[NUM_SIZE+1];
 
@@ -2332,10 +2277,11 @@ ExpandPercents(winPtr, before, eventPtr, keySym, dsPtr)
     } else {
 	flags = 0;
     }
+
     while (1) {
 	/*
-	 * Find everything up to the next % character and append it
-	 * to the result string.
+	 * Find everything up to the next % character and append it to the
+	 * result string.
 	 */
 
 	for (string = before; (*string != 0) && (*string != '%'); string++) {
@@ -2350,303 +2296,313 @@ ExpandPercents(winPtr, before, eventPtr, keySym, dsPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * There's a percent sequence here.  Process it.
+	 * There's a percent sequence here. Process it.
 	 */
 
 	number = 0;
 	string = "??";
 	switch (before[1]) {
-	    case '#':
-		number = eventPtr->xany.serial;
-		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'a':
-		if (flags & CONFIG) {
-		    TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xconfigure.above);
-		    string = numStorage;
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'b':
-		if (flags & BUTTON) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xbutton.button;
-		    goto doNumber;
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'c':
-		if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xexpose.count;
-		    goto doNumber;
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'd':
-		if (flags & (CROSSING|FOCUS)) {
-		    if (flags & FOCUS) {
-			number = eventPtr->xfocus.detail;
-		    } else {
-			number = eventPtr->xcrossing.detail;
-		    }
-		    string = TkFindStateString(notifyDetail, number);
-		} else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
-		    if (eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.value_mask & CWStackMode) {
-			string = TkFindStateString(configureRequestDetail,
-					eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.detail);
-		    } else {
-			string = "";
-		    }
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'f':
-		if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcrossing.focus;
-		    goto doNumber;
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'h':
-		if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xexpose.height;
-		} else if (flags & (CONFIG)) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xconfigure.height;
-		} else if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.height;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
-		    number =  eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.height;
-		} else if (flags & RESIZEREQ) {
-		    number =  eventPtr->xresizerequest.height;
-		} else {
-		    goto doString;
-		}
-		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'i':
-		if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xcreatewindow.window);
-		} else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
-		    TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.window);
-		} else if (flags & MAPREQ) {
-		    TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xmaprequest.window);
-		} else {
-		    TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xany.window);
-		}
+	case '#':
+	    number = eventPtr->xany.serial;
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'a':
+	    if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xconfigure.above);
 		string = numStorage;
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'k':
-		if ((flags & KEY) && (eventPtr->type != MouseWheelEvent)) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xkey.keycode;
-		    goto doNumber;
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'm':
-		if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcrossing.mode;
-		    string = TkFindStateString(notifyMode, number);
-		} else if (flags & FOCUS) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xfocus.mode;
-		    string = TkFindStateString(notifyMode, number);
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'o':
-		if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.override_redirect;
-		} else if (flags & MAP) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xmap.override_redirect;
-		} else if (flags & REPARENT) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xreparent.override_redirect;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIG) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xconfigure.override_redirect;
-		} else {
-		    goto doString;
-		}
-		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'p':
-		if (flags & CIRC) {
-		    string = TkFindStateString(circPlace, eventPtr->xcirculate.place);
-		} else if (flags & CIRCREQ) {
-		    string = TkFindStateString(circPlace, eventPtr->xcirculaterequest.place);
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 's':
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xkey.state;
-		} else if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcrossing.state;
-		} else if (flags & PROP) {
-		    string = TkFindStateString(propNotify,
-			    eventPtr->xproperty.state);
-		    goto doString;
-		} else if (flags & VISIBILITY) {
-		    string = TkFindStateString(visNotify,
-			    eventPtr->xvisibility.state);
-		    goto doString;
-		} else {
-		    goto doString;
-		}
-		goto doNumber;
-	    case 't':
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
-		    number = (int) eventPtr->xkey.time;
-		} else if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    number = (int) eventPtr->xcrossing.time;
-		} else if (flags & PROP) {
-		    number = (int) eventPtr->xproperty.time;
-		} else {
-		    goto doString;
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'b':
+	    if (flags & BUTTON) {
+		number = eventPtr->xbutton.button;
 		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'v':
-		number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.value_mask;
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'c':
+	    if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xexpose.count;
 		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'w':
-		if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xexpose.width;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIG) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xconfigure.width;
-		} else if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.width;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
-		    number =  eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.width;
-		} else if (flags & RESIZEREQ) {
-		    number =  eventPtr->xresizerequest.width;
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'd':
+	    if (flags & (CROSSING|FOCUS)) {
+		if (flags & FOCUS) {
+		    number = eventPtr->xfocus.detail;
 		} else {
-		    goto doString;
+		    number = eventPtr->xcrossing.detail;
 		}
-		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'x':
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xkey.x;
-		} else if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcrossing.x;
-		} else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xexpose.x;
-		} else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.x;
-		} else if (flags & REPARENT) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xreparent.x;
-		} else if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.x;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
-		    number =  eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.x;
+		string = TkFindStateString(notifyDetail, number);
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
+		if (eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.value_mask & CWStackMode) {
+		    string = TkFindStateString(configureRequestDetail,
+			    eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.detail);
 		} else {
-		    goto doString;
+		    string = "";
 		}
-		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'y':
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xkey.y;
-		} else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xexpose.y;
-		} else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.y;
-		} else if (flags & REPARENT) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xreparent.y;
-		} else if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcrossing.y;
-		} else if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.y;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.y;
+	    } else if (flags & VIRTUAL) {
+		XVirtualEvent *vePtr = (XVirtualEvent *) eventPtr;
+
+		if (vePtr->user_data != NULL) {
+		    string = Tcl_GetString(vePtr->user_data);
 		} else {
-		    goto doString;
+		    string = "";
 		}
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'f':
+	    if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcrossing.focus;
 		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'A':
-		if ((flags & KEY) && (eventPtr->type != MouseWheelEvent)) {
-		    Tcl_DStringFree(&buf);
-		    string = TkpGetString(winPtr, eventPtr, &buf);
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'h':
+	    if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xexpose.height;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigure.height;
+	    } else if (flags & CREATE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.height;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.height;
+	    } else if (flags & RESIZEREQ) {
+		number = eventPtr->xresizerequest.height;
+	    } else {
 		goto doString;
-	    case 'B':
-		if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.border_width;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.border_width;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIG) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xconfigure.border_width;
-		} else {
-		    goto doString;
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'i':
+	    if (flags & CREATE) {
+		TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xcreatewindow.window);
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
+		TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage,
+			eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.window);
+	    } else if (flags & MAPREQ) {
+		TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xmaprequest.window);
+	    } else {
+		TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xany.window);
+	    }
+	    string = numStorage;
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'k':
+	    if ((flags & KEY) && (eventPtr->type != MouseWheelEvent)) {
+		number = eventPtr->xkey.keycode;
 		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'D':
-		/*
-		 * This is used only by the MouseWheel event.
-		 */
-		if ((flags & KEY) && (eventPtr->type == MouseWheelEvent)) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xkey.keycode;
-		    goto doNumber;
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'm':
+	    if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcrossing.mode;
+		string = TkFindStateString(notifyMode, number);
+	    } else if (flags & FOCUS) {
+		number = eventPtr->xfocus.mode;
+		string = TkFindStateString(notifyMode, number);
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'o':
+	    if (flags & CREATE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.override_redirect;
+	    } else if (flags & MAP) {
+		number = eventPtr->xmap.override_redirect;
+	    } else if (flags & REPARENT) {
+		number = eventPtr->xreparent.override_redirect;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigure.override_redirect;
+	    } else {
 		goto doString;
-	    case 'E':
-		number = (int) eventPtr->xany.send_event;
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'p':
+	    if (flags & CIRC) {
+		string = TkFindStateString(circPlace,
+			eventPtr->xcirculate.place);
+	    } else if (flags & CIRCREQ) {
+		string = TkFindStateString(circPlace,
+			eventPtr->xcirculaterequest.place);
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 's':
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL) {
+		number = eventPtr->xkey.state;
 		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'K':
-		if ((flags & KEY) && (eventPtr->type != MouseWheelEvent)) {
-		    char *name;
-
-		    name = TkKeysymToString(keySym);
-		    if (name != NULL) {
-			string = name;
-		    }
-		}
+	    } else if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcrossing.state;
+		goto doNumber;
+	    } else if (flags & PROP) {
+		string = TkFindStateString(propNotify,
+			eventPtr->xproperty.state);
+	    } else if (flags & VISIBILITY) {
+		string = TkFindStateString(visNotify,
+			eventPtr->xvisibility.state);
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 't':
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL) {
+		number = (int) eventPtr->xkey.time;
+	    } else if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		number = (int) eventPtr->xcrossing.time;
+	    } else if (flags & PROP) {
+		number = (int) eventPtr->xproperty.time;
+	    } else {
 		goto doString;
-	    case 'N':
-		if ((flags & KEY) && (eventPtr->type != MouseWheelEvent)) {
-		    number = (int) keySym;
-		    goto doNumber;
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'v':
+	    number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.value_mask;
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'w':
+	    if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xexpose.width;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigure.width;
+	    } else if (flags & CREATE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.width;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.width;
+	    } else if (flags & RESIZEREQ) {
+		number = eventPtr->xresizerequest.width;
+	    } else {
 		goto doString;
-	    case 'P':
-		if (flags & PROP) {
-		    string = Tk_GetAtomName((Tk_Window) winPtr, eventPtr->xproperty.atom);
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'x':
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL) {
+		number = eventPtr->xkey.x;
+	    } else if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcrossing.x;
+	    } else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xexpose.x;
+	    } else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.x;
+	    } else if (flags & REPARENT) {
+		number = eventPtr->xreparent.x;
+	    } else if (flags & CREATE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.x;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.x;
+	    } else {
 		goto doString;
-	    case 'R':
-		if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
-		    TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xkey.root);
-		    string = numStorage;
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'y':
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL) {
+		number = eventPtr->xkey.y;
+	    } else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xexpose.y;
+	    } else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.y;
+	    } else if (flags & REPARENT) {
+		number = eventPtr->xreparent.y;
+	    } else if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcrossing.y;
+	    } else if (flags & CREATE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.y;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.y;
+	    } else {
 		goto doString;
-            case 'S':
-		if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
-		    TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xkey.subwindow);
-		    string = numStorage;
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'A':
+	    if ((flags & KEY) && (eventPtr->type != MouseWheelEvent)) {
+		Tcl_DStringFree(&buf);
+		string = TkpGetString(winPtr, eventPtr, &buf);
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'B':
+	    if (flags & CREATE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.border_width;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.border_width;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigure.border_width;
+	    } else {
 		goto doString;
-	    case 'T':
-		number = eventPtr->type;
-		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'W': {
-		Tk_Window tkwin;
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'D':
+	    /*
+	     * This is used only by the MouseWheel event.
+	     */
 
-		tkwin = Tk_IdToWindow(eventPtr->xany.display,
-			eventPtr->xany.window);
-		if (tkwin != NULL) {
-		    string = Tk_PathName(tkwin);
-		} else {
-		    string = "??";
-		}
-		goto doString;
+	    if ((flags & KEY) && (eventPtr->type == MouseWheelEvent)) {
+		number = eventPtr->xkey.keycode;
+		goto doNumber;
 	    }
-	    case 'X':
-		if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xkey.x_root;
-		    goto doNumber;
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'Y':
-		if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xkey.y_root;
-		    goto doNumber;
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'E':
+	    number = (int) eventPtr->xany.send_event;
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'K':
+	    if ((flags & KEY) && (eventPtr->type != MouseWheelEvent)) {
+		char *name = TkKeysymToString(keySym);
+
+		if (name != NULL) {
+		    string = name;
 		}
-		goto doString;
-	    default:
-		numStorage[0] = before[1];
-		numStorage[1] = '\0';
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'N':
+	    if ((flags & KEY) && (eventPtr->type != MouseWheelEvent)) {
+		number = (int) keySym;
+		goto doNumber;
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'P':
+	    if (flags & PROP) {
+		string = Tk_GetAtomName((Tk_Window) winPtr,
+			eventPtr->xproperty.atom);
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'R':
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
+		TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xkey.root);
 		string = numStorage;
-		goto doString;
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'S':
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
+		TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xkey.subwindow);
+		string = numStorage;
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'T':
+	    number = eventPtr->type;
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'W': {
+	    Tk_Window tkwin;
+
+	    tkwin = Tk_IdToWindow(eventPtr->xany.display,
+		    eventPtr->xany.window);
+	    if (tkwin != NULL) {
+		string = Tk_PathName(tkwin);
+	    } else {
+		string = "??";
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	}
+	case 'X':
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
+		number = eventPtr->xkey.x_root;
+		goto doNumber;
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'Y':
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
+		number = eventPtr->xkey.y_root;
+		goto doNumber;
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	default:
+	    numStorage[0] = before[1];
+	    numStorage[1] = '\0';
+	    string = numStorage;
+	    goto doString;
 	}
 
-	doNumber:
+    doNumber:
 	sprintf(numStorage, "%d", number);
 	string = numStorage;
 
-	doString:
+    doString:
 	spaceNeeded = Tcl_ScanElement(string, &cvtFlags);
 	length = Tcl_DStringLength(dsPtr);
 	Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, length + spaceNeeded);
@@ -2664,28 +2620,27 @@ ExpandPercents(winPtr, before, eventPtr, keySym, dsPtr)
  *
  * ChangeScreen --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever the current screen changes
- *	in an application.  It invokes a Tcl procedure named
- *	"tk::ScreenChanged", passing it the screen name as argument.
- *	tk::ScreenChanged does things like making the tk::Priv variable
- *	point to an array for the current display.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever the current screen changes in an
+ *	application. It invokes a Tcl command named "tk::ScreenChanged",
+ *	passing it the screen name as argument. tk::ScreenChanged does things
+ *	like making the tk::Priv variable point to an array for the current
+ *	display.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Depends on what tk::ScreenChanged does.  If an error occurs
- *	them bgerror will be invoked.
+ *	Depends on what tk::ScreenChanged does. If an error occurs then
+ *	bgerror will be invoked.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ChangeScreen(interp, dispName, screenIndex)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter in which to invoke
-					 * command. */
-    char *dispName;			/* Name of new display. */
-    int screenIndex;			/* Index of new screen. */
+ChangeScreen(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter in which to invoke command. */
+    char *dispName,		/* Name of new display. */
+    int screenIndex)		/* Index of new screen. */
 {
     Tcl_DString cmd;
     int code;
@@ -2698,21 +2653,21 @@ ChangeScreen(interp, dispName, screenIndex)
     Tcl_DStringAppend(&cmd, screen, -1);
     code = Tcl_EvalEx(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&cmd), Tcl_DStringLength(&cmd),
 	    TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&cmd);
     if (code != TCL_OK) {
 	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
 		"\n    (changing screen in event binding)");
 	Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
     }
 }
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_EventCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "event" Tcl command.
- *	It is used to define and generate events.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "event" Tcl command. It is
+ *	used to define and generate events.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -2724,17 +2679,17 @@ ChangeScreen(interp, dispName, screenIndex)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_EventObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_EventObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     int index;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;
     TkBindInfo bindInfo;
-    static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
+    static const char *optionStrings[] = {
 	"add",		"delete",	"generate",	"info",
 	NULL
     };
@@ -2756,64 +2711,61 @@ Tk_EventObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case EVENT_ADD: {
-	    int i;
-	    char *name, *event;
-	    
-	    if (objc < 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"virtual sequence ?sequence ...?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-	    for (i = 3; i < objc; i++) {
-		event = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], NULL);
-		if (CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, name, event) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case EVENT_ADD: {
+	int i;
+	char *name, *event;
+
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "virtual sequence ?sequence ...?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case EVENT_DELETE: {
-	    int i;
-	    char *name, *event;
-	    
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"virtual ?sequence sequence ...?");
+	name = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	for (i = 3; i < objc; i++) {
+	    event = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	    if (CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, name, event) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		return DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, name, NULL);
-	    }
-	    for (i = 3; i < objc; i++) {
-		event = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], NULL);
-		if (DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, name, event) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case EVENT_GENERATE: {
-	    if (objc < 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window event ?options?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    return HandleEventGenerate(interp, tkwin, objc - 2, objv + 2);
+	break;
+    }
+    case EVENT_DELETE: {
+	int i;
+	char *name, *event;
+
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "virtual ?sequence sequence ...?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case EVENT_INFO: {
-	    if (objc == 2) {
-		GetAllVirtualEvents(interp, vetPtr);
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    } else if (objc == 3) {	
-		return GetVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr,
-			Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL));
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?virtual?");
+	name = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    return DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, name, NULL);
+	}
+	for (i = 3; i < objc; i++) {
+	    event = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	    if (DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, name, event) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case EVENT_GENERATE:
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window event ?options?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	return HandleEventGenerate(interp, tkwin, objc - 2, objv + 2);
+    case EVENT_INFO:
+	if (objc == 2) {
+	    GetAllVirtualEvents(interp, vetPtr);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else if (objc == 3) {
+	    return GetVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?virtual?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -2823,8 +2775,8 @@ Tk_EventObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * InitVirtualEventTable --
  *
- *	Given storage for a virtual event table, set up the fields to
- *	prepare a new domain in which virtual events may be defined.
+ *	Given storage for a virtual event table, set up the fields to prepare
+ *	a new domain in which virtual events may be defined.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2836,9 +2788,9 @@ Tk_EventObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static void
-InitVirtualEventTable(vetPtr)
-    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;	/* Pointer to virtual event table.  Memory
-				 * is supplied by the caller. */
+InitVirtualEventTable(
+    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr)	/* Pointer to virtual event table. Memory is
+				 * supplied by the caller. */
 {
     Tcl_InitHashTable(&vetPtr->patternTable,
 	    sizeof(PatternTableKey) / sizeof(int));
@@ -2850,7 +2802,7 @@ InitVirtualEventTable(vetPtr)
  *
  * DeleteVirtualEventTable --
  *
- *	Delete the contents of a virtual event table.  The caller is
+ *	Delete the contents of a virtual event table. The caller is
  *	responsible for freeing any memory used by the table itself.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -2863,8 +2815,8 @@ InitVirtualEventTable(vetPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteVirtualEventTable(vetPtr)
-    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;	/* The virtual event table to delete. */
+DeleteVirtualEventTable(
+    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr)	/* The virtual event table to delete. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
@@ -2883,7 +2835,7 @@ DeleteVirtualEventTable(vetPtr)
 
     hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&vetPtr->nameTable, &search);
     for ( ; hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
-        ckfree((char *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr));
+	ckfree((char *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr));
     }
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&vetPtr->nameTable);
 }
@@ -2893,29 +2845,27 @@ DeleteVirtualEventTable(vetPtr)
  *
  * CreateVirtualEvent --
  *
- *	Add a new definition for a virtual event.  If the virtual event
- *	is already defined, the new definition augments those that
- *	already exist.
+ *	Add a new definition for a virtual event. If the virtual event is
+ *	already defined, the new definition augments those that already exist.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is TCL_ERROR if an error occured while
- *	creating the virtual binding.  In this case, an error message
- *	will be left in the interp's result.  If all went well then the
- *	return value is TCL_OK.
+ *	The return value is TCL_ERROR if an error occured while creating the
+ *	virtual binding. In this case, an error message will be left in the
+ *	interp's result. If all went well then the return value is TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The virtual event may cause future calls to Tk_BindEvent to
- *	behave differently than they did previously.
+ *	The virtual event may cause future calls to Tk_BindEvent to behave
+ *	differently than they did previously.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;/* Table in which to augment virtual event. */
-    char *virtString;		/* Name of new virtual event. */
-    char *eventString;		/* String describing physical event that
+CreateVirtualEvent(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr,	/* Table in which to augment virtual event. */
+    char *virtString,		/* Name of new virtual event. */
+    char *eventString)		/* String describing physical event that
 				 * triggers virtual event. */
 {
     PatSeq *psPtr;
@@ -2925,10 +2875,10 @@ CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
     PhysicalsOwned *poPtr;
     VirtualOwners *voPtr;
     Tk_Uid virtUid;
-    
+
     virtUid = GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString);
     if (virtUid == NULL) {
-        return TCL_ERROR;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -2938,7 +2888,7 @@ CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
     psPtr = FindSequence(interp, &vetPtr->patternTable, NULL, eventString,
 	    1, 0, &eventMask);
     if (psPtr == NULL) {
-        return TCL_ERROR;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -2956,20 +2906,21 @@ CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 	poPtr = (PhysicalsOwned *) ckalloc(sizeof(PhysicalsOwned));
 	poPtr->numOwned = 0;
     } else {
-        /*
+	/*
 	 * See if this virtual event is already defined for this physical
 	 * event and just return if it is.
 	 */
 
 	int i;
+
 	for (i = 0; i < poPtr->numOwned; i++) {
 	    if (poPtr->patSeqs[i] == psPtr) {
-	        return TCL_OK;
+		return TCL_OK;
 	    }
 	}
 	poPtr = (PhysicalsOwned *) ckrealloc((char *) poPtr,
 		sizeof(PhysicalsOwned) + poPtr->numOwned * sizeof(PatSeq *));
-    }	
+    }
     Tcl_SetHashValue(vhPtr, (ClientData) poPtr);
     poPtr->patSeqs[poPtr->numOwned] = psPtr;
     poPtr->numOwned++;
@@ -2980,10 +2931,10 @@ CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 
     voPtr = psPtr->voPtr;
     if (voPtr == NULL) {
-        voPtr = (VirtualOwners *) ckalloc(sizeof(VirtualOwners));
+	voPtr = (VirtualOwners *) ckalloc(sizeof(VirtualOwners));
 	voPtr->numOwners = 0;
     } else {
-        voPtr = (VirtualOwners *) ckrealloc((char *) voPtr,
+	voPtr = (VirtualOwners *) ckrealloc((char *) voPtr,
 		sizeof(VirtualOwners)
 		+ voPtr->numOwners * sizeof(Tcl_HashEntry *));
     }
@@ -2999,31 +2950,31 @@ CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
  *
  * DeleteVirtualEvent --
  *
- *	Remove the definition of a given virtual event.  If the 
- *	event string is NULL, all definitions of the virtual event
- *	will be removed.  Otherwise, just the specified definition
- *	of the virtual event will be removed.
+ *	Remove the definition of a given virtual event. If the event string is
+ *	NULL, all definitions of the virtual event will be removed.
+ *	Otherwise, just the specified definition of the virtual event will be
+ *	removed.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The result is a standard Tcl return value.  If an error
- *	occurs then the interp's result will contain an error message.
- *	It is not an error to attempt to delete a virtual event that
- *	does not exist or a definition that does not exist.
+ *	The result is a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs then the
+ *	interp's result will contain an error message. It is not an error to
+ *	attempt to delete a virtual event that does not exist or a definition
+ *	that does not exist.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The virtual event given by virtString may be removed from the
- *	virtual event table.  
+ *	The virtual event given by virtString may be removed from the virtual
+ *	event table.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;/* Table in which to delete event. */
-    char *virtString;		/* String describing event sequence that
+DeleteVirtualEvent(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr,	/* Table in which to delete event. */
+    char *virtString,		/* String describing event sequence that
 				 * triggers binding. */
-    char *eventString;		/* The event sequence that should be deleted,
+    char *eventString)		/* The event sequence that should be deleted,
 				 * or NULL to delete all event sequences for
 				 * the entire virtual event. */
 {
@@ -3035,12 +2986,12 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 
     virtUid = GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString);
     if (virtUid == NULL) {
-        return TCL_ERROR;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     vhPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&vetPtr->nameTable, virtUid);
     if (vhPtr == NULL) {
-        return TCL_OK;
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
     poPtr = (PhysicalsOwned *) Tcl_GetHashValue(vhPtr);
 
@@ -3049,28 +3000,27 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 	unsigned long eventMask;
 
 	/*
-	 * Delete only the specific physical event associated with the
-	 * virtual event.  If the physical event doesn't already exist, or
-	 * the virtual event doesn't own that physical event, return w/o
-	 * doing anything.
+	 * Delete only the specific physical event associated with the virtual
+	 * event. If the physical event doesn't already exist, or the virtual
+	 * event doesn't own that physical event, return w/o doing anything.
 	 */
 
 	eventPSPtr = FindSequence(interp, &vetPtr->patternTable, NULL,
 		eventString, 0, 0, &eventMask);
 	if (eventPSPtr == NULL) {
-	    CONST char *string;
+	    const char *string = Tcl_GetStringResult(interp);
 
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringResult(interp); 
 	    return (string[0] != '\0') ? TCL_ERROR : TCL_OK;
 	}
     }
 
     for (iPhys = poPtr->numOwned; --iPhys >= 0; ) {
 	PatSeq *psPtr = poPtr->patSeqs[iPhys];
+
 	if ((eventPSPtr == NULL) || (psPtr == eventPSPtr)) {
 	    int iVirt;
 	    VirtualOwners *voPtr;
-	    
+
 	    /*
 	     * Remove association between this physical event and the given
 	     * virtual event that it triggers.
@@ -3083,15 +3033,17 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 		}
 	    }
 	    if (iVirt == voPtr->numOwners) {
-		panic("DeleteVirtualEvent: couldn't find owner");
+		Tcl_Panic("DeleteVirtualEvent: couldn't find owner");
 	    }
 	    voPtr->numOwners--;
 	    if (voPtr->numOwners == 0) {
 		/*
-		 * Removed last reference to this physical event, so
-		 * remove it from physical->virtual map.
+		 * Removed last reference to this physical event, so remove it
+		 * from physical->virtual map.
 		 */
+
 		PatSeq *prevPtr = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(psPtr->hPtr);
+
 		if (prevPtr == psPtr) {
 		    if (psPtr->nextSeqPtr == NULL) {
 			Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(psPtr->hPtr);
@@ -3102,7 +3054,7 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 		} else {
 		    for ( ; ; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextSeqPtr) {
 			if (prevPtr == NULL) {
-			    panic("DeleteVirtualEvent couldn't find on hash chain");
+			    Tcl_Panic("DeleteVirtualEvent couldn't find on hash chain");
 			}
 			if (prevPtr->nextSeqPtr == psPtr) {
 			    prevPtr->nextSeqPtr = psPtr->nextSeqPtr;
@@ -3115,23 +3067,23 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 	    } else {
 		/*
 		 * This physical event still triggers some other virtual
-		 * event(s).  Consolidate the list of virtual owners for
-		 * this physical event so it no longer triggers the
-		 * given virtual event.
+		 * event(s). Consolidate the list of virtual owners for this
+		 * physical event so it no longer triggers the given virtual
+		 * event.
 		 */
+
 		voPtr->owners[iVirt] = voPtr->owners[voPtr->numOwners];
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Now delete the virtual event's reference to the physical
-	     * event.
+	     * Now delete the virtual event's reference to the physical event.
 	     */
 
 	    poPtr->numOwned--;
 	    if (eventPSPtr != NULL && poPtr->numOwned != 0) {
-	        /*
-		 * Just deleting this one physical event.  Consolidate list
-		 * of owned physical events and return.
+		/*
+		 * Just deleting this one physical event. Consolidate list of
+		 * owned physical events and return.
 		 */
 
 		poPtr->patSeqs[iPhys] = poPtr->patSeqs[poPtr->numOwned];
@@ -3142,10 +3094,10 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 
     if (poPtr->numOwned == 0) {
 	/*
-	 * All the physical events for this virtual event were deleted,
-	 * either because there was only one associated physical event or
-	 * because the caller was deleting the entire virtual event.  Now
-	 * the virtual event itself should be deleted.
+	 * All the physical events for this virtual event were deleted, either
+	 * because there was only one associated physical event or because the
+	 * caller was deleting the entire virtual event. Now the virtual event
+	 * itself should be deleted.
 	 */
 
 	ckfree((char *) poPtr);
@@ -3159,16 +3111,16 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
  *
  * GetVirtualEvent --
  *
- *	Return the list of physical events that can invoke the
- *	given virtual event.
+ *	Return the list of physical events that can invoke the given virtual
+ *	event.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is TCL_OK and the interp's result is filled with the
  *	string representation of the physical events associated with the
  *	virtual event; if there are no physical events for the given virtual
- *	event, the interp's result is filled with and empty string.  If the
- *	virtual event string is improperly formed, then TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned and an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	event, the interp's result is filled with and empty string. If the
+ *	virtual event string is improperly formed, then TCL_ERROR is returned
+ *	and an error message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3177,10 +3129,10 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
  */
 
 static int
-GetVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for reporting. */
-    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;/* Table in which to look for event. */
-    char *virtString;		/* String describing virtual event. */
+GetVirtualEvent(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for reporting. */
+    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr,	/* Table in which to look for event. */
+    char *virtString)		/* String describing virtual event. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *vhPtr;
     Tcl_DString ds;
@@ -3190,12 +3142,12 @@ GetVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString)
 
     virtUid = GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString);
     if (virtUid == NULL) {
-        return TCL_ERROR;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     vhPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&vetPtr->nameTable, virtUid);
     if (vhPtr == NULL) {
-        return TCL_OK;
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
     Tcl_DStringInit(&ds);
@@ -3216,13 +3168,12 @@ GetVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString)
  *
  * GetAllVirtualEvents --
  *
- *	Return a list that contains the names of all the virtual
- *	event defined.
+ *	Return a list that contains the names of all the virtual event
+ *	defined.
  *
  * Results:
- *	There is no return value.  The interp's result is modified to
- *	hold a Tcl list with one entry for each virtual event in 
- *	nameTable.  
+ *	There is no return value. The interp's result is modified to hold a
+ *	Tcl list with one entry for each virtual event in nameTable.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3231,9 +3182,9 @@ GetVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString)
  */
 
 static void
-GetAllVirtualEvents(interp, vetPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter returning result. */
-    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;/* Table containing events. */
+GetAllVirtualEvents(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter returning result. */
+    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr)	/* Table containing events. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
@@ -3243,11 +3194,11 @@ GetAllVirtualEvents(interp, vetPtr)
 
     hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&vetPtr->nameTable, &search);
     for ( ; hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
-	Tcl_DStringSetLength(&ds, 0);	
+	Tcl_DStringSetLength(&ds, 0);
 	Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, "<<", 2);
 	Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, Tcl_GetHashKey(hPtr->tablePtr, hPtr), -1);
 	Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, ">>", 2);
-        Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds));
+	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds));
     }
 
     Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
@@ -3258,45 +3209,45 @@ GetAllVirtualEvents(interp, vetPtr)
  *
  * HandleEventGenerate --
  *
- *	Helper function for the "event generate" command.  Generate and
- *	process an XEvent, constructed from information parsed from the
- *	event description string and its optional arguments.
+ *	Helper function for the "event generate" command. Generate and process
+ *	an XEvent, constructed from information parsed from the event
+ *	description string and its optional arguments.
  *
  *	argv[0] contains name of the target window.
  *	argv[1] contains pattern string for one event (e.g, <Control-v>).
- *	argv[2..argc-1] contains -field/option pairs for specifying
- *		        additional detail in the generated event.
+ *	argv[2..argc-1] contains -field/option pairs for specifying additional
+ *			detail in the generated event.
  *
- *	Either virtual or physical events can be generated this way.
- *	The event description string must contain the specification
- *	for only one event.
+ *	Either virtual or physical events can be generated this way. The event
+ *	description string must contain the specification for only one event.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When constructing the event, 
- *	 event.xany.serial is filled with the current X serial number.
- *	 event.xany.window is filled with the target window.
- *	 event.xany.display is filled with the target window's display.
+ *	When constructing the event,
+ *	    event.xany.serial is filled with the current X serial number.
+ *	    event.xany.window is filled with the target window.
+ *	    event.xany.display is filled with the target window's display.
  *	Any other fields in eventPtr which are not specified by the pattern
  *	string or the optional arguments, are set to 0.
  *
- *	The event may be handled sychronously or asynchronously, depending
- *	on the value specified by the optional "-when" option.  The
- *	default setting is synchronous.
+ *	The event may be handled sychronously or asynchronously, depending on
+ *	the value specified by the optional "-when" option. The default
+ *	setting is synchronous.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static int
-HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for errors return and name lookup. */
-    Tk_Window mainWin;		/* Main window associated with interp. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+HandleEventGenerate(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for errors return and name lookup. */
+    Tk_Window mainWin,		/* Main window associated with interp. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    XEvent event;    
-    CONST char *p;
+    union {XEvent general; XVirtualEvent virtual;} event;
+    const char *p;
     char *name, *windowName;
     int count, flags, synch, i, number, warp;
     Tcl_QueuePosition pos;
@@ -3304,10 +3255,11 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
     Tk_Window tkwin, tkwin2;
     TkWindow *mainPtr;
     unsigned long eventMask;
-    static CONST char *fieldStrings[] = {
+    Tcl_Obj *userDataObj;
+    static const char *fieldStrings[] = {
 	"-when",	"-above",	"-borderwidth",	"-button",
-	"-count",	"-delta",	"-detail",	"-focus",
-	"-height",
+	"-count",	"-data",	"-delta",	"-detail",
+	"-focus",	"-height",
 	"-keycode",	"-keysym",	"-mode",	"-override",
 	"-place",	"-root",	"-rootx",	"-rooty",
 	"-sendevent",	"-serial",	"-state",	"-subwindow",
@@ -3316,8 +3268,8 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
     };
     enum field {
 	EVENT_WHEN,	EVENT_ABOVE,	EVENT_BORDER,	EVENT_BUTTON,
-	EVENT_COUNT,	EVENT_DELTA,	EVENT_DETAIL,	EVENT_FOCUS,
-	EVENT_HEIGHT,
+	EVENT_COUNT,	EVENT_DATA,	EVENT_DELTA,	EVENT_DETAIL,
+	EVENT_FOCUS,	EVENT_HEIGHT,
 	EVENT_KEYCODE,	EVENT_KEYSYM,	EVENT_MODE,	EVENT_OVERRIDE,
 	EVENT_PLACE,	EVENT_ROOT,	EVENT_ROOTX,	EVENT_ROOTY,
 	EVENT_SEND,	EVENT_SERIAL,	EVENT_STATE,	EVENT_SUBWINDOW,
@@ -3325,7 +3277,7 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
 	EVENT_X,	EVENT_Y
     };
 
-    windowName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[0], NULL);
+    windowName = Tcl_GetString(objv[0]);
     if (!windowName[0]) {
 	tkwin = mainWin;
     } else if (NameToWindow(interp, mainWin, objv[0], &tkwin) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -3335,18 +3287,16 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
     mainPtr = (TkWindow *) mainWin;
     if ((tkwin == NULL)
 	    || (mainPtr->mainPtr != ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr)) {
-	char *name;
-
-	name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[0], NULL);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window id \"", name, 		
-		"\" doesn't exist in this application", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window id \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]),
+		"\" doesn't exist in this application", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], NULL);
+    name = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
 
     p = name;
     eventMask = 0;
+    userDataObj = NULL;
     count = ParseEventDescription(interp, &p, &pat, &eventMask);
     if (count == 0) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -3362,48 +3312,49 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    memset((VOID *) &event, 0, sizeof(event));
-    event.xany.type = pat.eventType;
-    event.xany.serial = NextRequest(Tk_Display(tkwin));
-    event.xany.send_event = False;
+    memset((void *) &event, 0, sizeof(event));
+    event.general.xany.type = pat.eventType;
+    event.general.xany.serial = NextRequest(Tk_Display(tkwin));
+    event.general.xany.send_event = False;
     if (windowName[0]) {
-	event.xany.window = Tk_WindowId(tkwin);
+	event.general.xany.window = Tk_WindowId(tkwin);
     } else {
-	event.xany.window = RootWindow(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin));
+	event.general.xany.window =
+		RootWindow(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin));
     }
-    event.xany.display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    event.general.xany.display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
 
-    flags = flagArray[event.xany.type];
+    flags = flagArray[event.general.xany.type];
     if (flags & DESTROY) {
 	/*
-	 * Event DesotryNotify should be generated by destroying 
-	 * the window.
+	 * Event DestroyNotify should be generated by destroying the window.
 	 */
+
 	Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
-    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
-	event.xkey.state = pat.needMods;
-	if ((flags & KEY) && (event.xany.type != MouseWheelEvent)) {
-	    TkpSetKeycodeAndState(tkwin, pat.detail.keySym, &event);
+    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL) {
+	event.general.xkey.state = pat.needMods;
+	if ((flags & KEY) && (event.general.xany.type != MouseWheelEvent)) {
+	    TkpSetKeycodeAndState(tkwin, pat.detail.keySym, &event.general);
 	} else if (flags & BUTTON) {
-	    event.xbutton.button = pat.detail.button;
+	    event.general.xbutton.button = pat.detail.button;
 	} else if (flags & VIRTUAL) {
-	    ((XVirtualEvent *) &event)->name = pat.detail.name;
+	    event.virtual.name = pat.detail.name;
 	}
     }
     if (flags & (CREATE|UNMAP|MAP|REPARENT|CONFIG|GRAVITY|CIRC)) {
-	event.xcreatewindow.window = event.xany.window;
+	event.general.xcreatewindow.window = event.general.xany.window;
     }
 
-    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-	event.xkey.x_root = -1;
-	event.xkey.y_root = -1;
+    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
+	event.general.xkey.x_root = -1;
+	event.general.xkey.y_root = -1;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Process the remaining arguments to fill in additional fields
-     * of the event.
+     * Process the remaining arguments to fill in additional fields of the
+     * event.
      */
 
     synch = 1;
@@ -3412,7 +3363,7 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
     for (i = 2; i < objc; i += 2) {
 	Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, *valuePtr;
 	int index;
-	
+
 	optionPtr = objv[i];
 	valuePtr = objv[i + 1];
 
@@ -3422,446 +3373,451 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
 	}
 	if (objc & 1) {
 	    /*
-	     * This test occurs after Tcl_GetIndexFromObj() so that
-	     * "event generate <Button> -xyz" will return the error message
-	     * that "-xyz" is a bad option, rather than that the value
-	     * for "-xyz" is missing.
+	     * This test occurs after Tcl_GetIndexFromObj() so that "event
+	     * generate <Button> -xyz" will return the error message that
+	     * "-xyz" is a bad option, rather than that the value for "-xyz"
+	     * is missing.
 	     */
 
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"",
-		    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(optionPtr, NULL), "\" missing",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", Tcl_GetString(optionPtr),
+		    "\" missing", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	switch ((enum field) index) {
-	    case EVENT_WARP: {
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &warp) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (!(flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL))) {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	case EVENT_WARP:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &warp) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_WHEN: {
-		pos = (Tcl_QueuePosition) TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, 
-			queuePosition, valuePtr);
-		if ((int) pos < -1) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		synch = 0;
-		if ((int) pos == -1) {
-		    synch = 1;
-		}
-		break;
+	    if (!(flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_ABOVE: {
-		if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & CONFIG) {
-		    event.xconfigure.above = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_WHEN:
+	    pos = (Tcl_QueuePosition) TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr,
+		    queuePosition, valuePtr);
+	    if ((int) pos < -1) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_BORDER: {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG)) {
-		    event.xcreatewindow.border_width = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    synch = 0;
+	    if ((int) pos == -1) {
+		synch = 1;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_BUTTON: {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & BUTTON) {
-		    event.xbutton.button = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_ABOVE:
+	    if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_COUNT: {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    event.xexpose.count = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		event.general.xconfigure.above = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_DELTA: {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if ((flags & KEY) && (event.xkey.type == MouseWheelEvent)) {
-		    event.xkey.keycode = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_BORDER:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp,tkwin,valuePtr,&number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_DETAIL: {
-		number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, notifyDetail,
-			valuePtr);
-		if (number < 0) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & FOCUS) {
-		    event.xfocus.detail = number;
-		} else if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    event.xcrossing.detail = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG)) {
+		event.general.xcreatewindow.border_width = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_FOCUS: {
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    event.xcrossing.focus = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_BUTTON:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_HEIGHT: {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		     event.xexpose.height = number;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIG) {
-		    event.xconfigure.height = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    if (flags & BUTTON) {
+		event.general.xbutton.button = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_KEYCODE: {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if ((flags & KEY) && (event.xkey.type != MouseWheelEvent)) {
-		    event.xkey.keycode = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_COUNT:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_KEYSYM: {
-		KeySym keysym;
-		char *value;
+	    if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		event.general.xexpose.count = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_DATA:
+	    if (flags & VIRTUAL) {
+		/*
+		 * Do not increment reference count until after parsing
+		 * completes and we know that the event generation is really
+		 * going to happen.
+		 */
 
-		value = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, NULL);
-		keysym = TkStringToKeysym(value);
-		if (keysym == NoSymbol) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown keysym \"", value, "\"",
-			    (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
+		userDataObj = valuePtr;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_DELTA:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if ((flags & KEY) && (event.general.xkey.type == MouseWheelEvent)) {
+		event.general.xkey.keycode = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_DETAIL:
+	    number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, notifyDetail,
+		    valuePtr);
+	    if (number < 0) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & FOCUS) {
+		event.general.xfocus.detail = number;
+	    } else if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		event.general.xcrossing.detail = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_FOCUS:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		event.general.xcrossing.focus = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_HEIGHT:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr,
+		    &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		event.general.xexpose.height = number;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		event.general.xconfigure.height = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_KEYCODE:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if ((flags & KEY) && (event.general.xkey.type != MouseWheelEvent)) {
+		event.general.xkey.keycode = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_KEYSYM: {
+	    KeySym keysym;
+	    char *value;
+
+	    value = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
+	    keysym = TkStringToKeysym(value);
+	    if (keysym == NoSymbol) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown keysym \"", value, "\"",
+			NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
 
-		TkpSetKeycodeAndState(tkwin, keysym, &event);
-		if (event.xkey.keycode == 0) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no keycode for keysym \"", value,
-			    "\"", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (!(flags & KEY) || (event.xkey.type == MouseWheelEvent)) {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    TkpSetKeycodeAndState(tkwin, keysym, &event.general);
+	    if (event.general.xkey.keycode == 0) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no keycode for keysym \"", value,
+			"\"", NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_MODE: {
-		number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, notifyMode,
-			valuePtr);
-		if (number < 0) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    event.xcrossing.mode = number;
-		} else if (flags & FOCUS) {
-		    event.xfocus.mode = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    if (!(flags & KEY)
+		    || (event.general.xkey.type == MouseWheelEvent)) {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_OVERRIDE: {
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    event.xcreatewindow.override_redirect = number;
-		} else if (flags & MAP) {
-		    event.xmap.override_redirect = number;
-		} else if (flags & REPARENT) {
-		    event.xreparent.override_redirect = number;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIG) {
-		    event.xconfigure.override_redirect = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	}
+	case EVENT_MODE:
+	    number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp,optionPtr,notifyMode,valuePtr);
+	    if (number < 0) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_PLACE: {
-		number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, circPlace,
-			valuePtr);
-		if (number < 0) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & CIRC) {
-		    event.xcirculate.place = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		event.general.xcrossing.mode = number;
+	    } else if (flags & FOCUS) {
+		event.general.xfocus.mode = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_ROOT: {
-		if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-		    event.xkey.root = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_OVERRIDE:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_ROOTX: {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-		    event.xkey.x_root = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    if (flags & CREATE) {
+		event.general.xcreatewindow.override_redirect = number;
+	    } else if (flags & MAP) {
+		event.general.xmap.override_redirect = number;
+	    } else if (flags & REPARENT) {
+		event.general.xreparent.override_redirect = number;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		event.general.xconfigure.override_redirect = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_ROOTY: {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-		    event.xkey.y_root = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_PLACE:
+	    number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, circPlace, valuePtr);
+	    if (number < 0) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & CIRC) {
+		event.general.xcirculate.place = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_ROOT:
+	    if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
+		event.general.xkey.root = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_SEND: {
-		CONST char *value;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_ROOTX:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp,tkwin,valuePtr,&number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
+		event.general.xkey.x_root = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_ROOTY:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp,tkwin,valuePtr,&number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
+		event.general.xkey.y_root = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_SEND: {
+	    const char *value;
 
-		value = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, NULL);
-		if (isdigit(UCHAR(value[0]))) {
-		    /*
-		     * Allow arbitrary integer values for the field; they
-		     * are needed by a few of the tests in the Tk test suite.
-		     */
+	    value = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
+	    if (isdigit(UCHAR(value[0]))) {
+		/*
+		 * Allow arbitrary integer values for the field; they are
+		 * needed by a few of the tests in the Tk test suite.
+		 */
 
-		    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number)
-			    != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		} else {
-		    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number)
-			    != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		}
-		event.xany.send_event = number;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case EVENT_SERIAL: {
 		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		event.xany.serial = number;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case EVENT_STATE: {
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-		    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number)
-			    != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
-			event.xkey.state = number;
-		    } else {
-			event.xcrossing.state = number;
-		    }
-		} else if (flags & VISIBILITY) {
-		    number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, visNotify,
-			    valuePtr);
-		    if (number < 0) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    event.xvisibility.state = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case EVENT_SUBWINDOW: {
-		if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
+	    } else {
+		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp,valuePtr,&number) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-		    event.xkey.subwindow = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_TIME: {
+	    event.general.xany.send_event = number;
+	    break;
+	}
+	case EVENT_SERIAL:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    event.general.xany.serial = number;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_STATE:
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
 		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-		    event.xkey.time = (Time) number;
-		} else if (flags & PROP) {
-		    event.xproperty.time = (Time) number;
+		if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL) {
+		    event.general.xkey.state = number;
 		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
+		    event.general.xcrossing.state = number;
 		}
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case EVENT_WIDTH: {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &number)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
+	    } else if (flags & VISIBILITY) {
+		number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, visNotify,
+			valuePtr);
+		if (number < 0) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    event.xexpose.width = number;
-		} else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG)) {
-		    event.xcreatewindow.width = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+		event.general.xvisibility.state = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_WINDOW: {
-		if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & (CREATE|UNMAP|MAP|REPARENT|CONFIG
-			|GRAVITY|CIRC)) {
-		    event.xcreatewindow.window = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_SUBWINDOW:
+	    if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_X: {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &number)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {	
-		    event.xkey.x = number;
-		    /*
-		     * Only modify rootx as well if it hasn't been changed.
-		     */
-		    if (event.xkey.x_root == -1) {
-			int rootX, rootY;
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
+		event.general.xkey.subwindow = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_TIME:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
+		event.general.xkey.time = (Time) number;
+	    } else if (flags & PROP) {
+		event.general.xproperty.time = (Time) number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_WIDTH:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp,tkwin,valuePtr,&number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		event.general.xexpose.width = number;
+	    } else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG)) {
+		event.general.xcreatewindow.width = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_WINDOW:
+	    if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & (CREATE|UNMAP|MAP|REPARENT|CONFIG|GRAVITY|CIRC)) {
+		event.general.xcreatewindow.window = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_X:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp,tkwin,valuePtr,&number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
+		event.general.xkey.x = number;
 
-			Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, &rootX, &rootY);
-			event.xkey.x_root = rootX + number;
-		    }
-		} else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    event.xexpose.x = number;
-		} else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) { 
-		    event.xcreatewindow.x = number;
-		} else if (flags & REPARENT) {		
-		    event.xreparent.x = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
+		/*
+		 * Only modify rootx as well if it hasn't been changed.
+		 */
+
+		if (event.general.xkey.x_root == -1) {
+		    int rootX, rootY;
+
+		    Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, &rootX, &rootY);
+		    event.general.xkey.x_root = rootX + number;
 		}
-		break;
+	    } else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		event.general.xexpose.x = number;
+	    } else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) {
+		event.general.xcreatewindow.x = number;
+	    } else if (flags & REPARENT) {
+		event.general.xreparent.x = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_Y: {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &number)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-		    event.xkey.y = number;
-		    /*
-		     * Only modify rooty as well if it hasn't been changed.
-		     */
-		    if (event.xkey.y_root == -1) {
-			int rootX, rootY;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_Y:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp,tkwin,valuePtr,&number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
+		event.general.xkey.y = number;
 
-			Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, &rootX, &rootY);
-			event.xkey.y_root = rootY + number;
-		    }
-		} else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    event.xexpose.y = number;
-		} else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) {
-		    event.xcreatewindow.y = number;
-		} else if (flags & REPARENT) {
-		    event.xreparent.y = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
+		/*
+		 * Only modify rooty as well if it hasn't been changed.
+		 */
+
+		if (event.general.xkey.y_root == -1) {
+		    int rootX, rootY;
+
+		    Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, &rootX, &rootY);
+		    event.general.xkey.y_root = rootY + number;
 		}
-		break;
+	    } else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		event.general.xexpose.y = number;
+	    } else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) {
+		event.general.xcreatewindow.y = number;
+	    } else if (flags & REPARENT) {
+		event.general.xreparent.y = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
+	    break;
 	}
 	continue;
-	
-	badopt:
+
+    badopt:
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, name, " event doesn't accept \"",
-		Tcl_GetStringFromObj(optionPtr, NULL), "\" option", NULL);
+		Tcl_GetString(optionPtr), "\" option", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
+    if (userDataObj != NULL) {
+	XVirtualEvent *vePtr = (XVirtualEvent *) &event;
+
+	/*
+	 * Must be virtual event to set that variable to non-NULL. Now we want
+	 * to install the object into the event. Note that we must incr the
+	 * refcount before firing it into the low-level event subsystem; the
+	 * refcount will be decremented once the event has been processed.
+	 */
+
+	vePtr->user_data = userDataObj;
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(userDataObj);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Now we have constructed the event, inject it into the event handling
+     * code.
+     */
+
     if (synch != 0) {
-	Tk_HandleEvent(&event);
+	Tk_HandleEvent(&event.general);
     } else {
-	Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, pos);
+	Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event.general, pos);
     }
+
     /*
-     * We only allow warping if the window is mapped
+     * We only allow warping if the window is mapped.
      */
+
     if ((warp != 0) && Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) {
-	TkDisplay *dispPtr;
-	dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(event.xmotion.display);
+	TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(event.general.xmotion.display);
+
 	if (!(dispPtr->flags & TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP)) {
 	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DoWarp, (ClientData) dispPtr);
 	    dispPtr->flags |= TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP;
 	}
-	dispPtr->warpWindow = event.xany.window;
-	dispPtr->warpX = event.xkey.x;
-	dispPtr->warpY = event.xkey.y;
+	dispPtr->warpWindow = event.general.xany.window;
+	dispPtr->warpX = event.general.xkey.x;
+	dispPtr->warpY = event.general.xkey.y;
     }
     Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
     return TCL_OK;
-		
 }
+
 static int
-NameToWindow(interp, mainWin, objPtr, tkwinPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error return and name lookup. */
-    Tk_Window mainWin;		/* Main window of application. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Contains name or id string of window. */
-    Tk_Window *tkwinPtr;	/* Filled with token for window. */
+NameToWindow(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error return and name lookup. */
+    Tk_Window mainWin,		/* Main window of application. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* Contains name or id string of window. */
+    Tk_Window *tkwinPtr)	/* Filled with token for window. */
 {
     char *name;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     Window id;
 
-    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, NULL);
+    name = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
     if (name[0] == '.') {
 	tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, name, mainWin);
 	if (tkwin == NULL) {
@@ -3871,14 +3827,14 @@ NameToWindow(interp, mainWin, objPtr, tkwinPtr)
     } else {
 	/*
 	 * Check for the winPtr being valid, even if it looks ok to
-	 * TkpScanWindowId.  [Bug #411307]
+	 * TkpScanWindowId. [Bug #411307]
 	 */
 
 	if ((TkpScanWindowId(NULL, name, &id) != TCL_OK) ||
 		((*tkwinPtr = Tk_IdToWindow(Tk_Display(mainWin), id))
 			== NULL)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad window name/identifier \"",
-		    name, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    name, "\"", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     }
@@ -3901,13 +3857,13 @@ NameToWindow(interp, mainWin, objPtr, tkwinPtr)
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 static void
-DoWarp(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;
+DoWarp(
+    ClientData clientData)
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = (TkDisplay *) clientData;
 
     XWarpPointer(dispPtr->display, (Window) None, (Window) dispPtr->warpWindow,
-                     0, 0, 0, 0, (int) dispPtr->warpX, (int) dispPtr->warpY);
+	    0, 0, 0, 0, (int) dispPtr->warpX, (int) dispPtr->warpY);
     XForceScreenSaver(dispPtr->display, ScreenSaverReset);
     dispPtr->flags &= ~TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP;
 }
@@ -3917,35 +3873,36 @@ DoWarp(clientData)
  *
  * GetVirtualEventUid --
  *
- *	Determine if the given string is in the proper format for a
- *	virtual event.
+ *	Determine if the given string is in the proper format for a virtual
+ *	event.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is NULL if the virtual event string was
- *	not in the proper format.  In this case, an error message
- *	will be left in the interp's result.  Otherwise the return
- *	value is a Tk_Uid that represents the virtual event.
+ *	The return value is NULL if the virtual event string was not in the
+ *	proper format. In this case, an error message will be left in the
+ *	interp's result. Otherwise the return value is a Tk_Uid that
+ *	represents the virtual event.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static Tk_Uid
-GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    char *virtString;
+GetVirtualEventUid(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    char *virtString)
 {
     Tk_Uid uid;
-    int length;
+    size_t length;
 
     length = strlen(virtString);
 
     if (length < 5 || virtString[0] != '<' || virtString[1] != '<' ||
 	    virtString[length - 2] != '>' || virtString[length - 1] != '>') {
-        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "virtual event \"", virtString,
-		"\" is badly formed", (char *) NULL);
-        return NULL;
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "virtual event \"", virtString,
+		"\" is badly formed", NULL);
+	return NULL;
     }
     virtString[length - 2] = '\0';
     uid = Tk_GetUid(virtString + 2);
@@ -3953,27 +3910,24 @@ GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString)
 
     return uid;
 }
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * FindSequence --
  *
- *	Find the entry in the pattern table that corresponds to a
- *	particular pattern string, and return a pointer to that
- *	entry.
+ *	Find the entry in the pattern table that corresponds to a particular
+ *	pattern string, and return a pointer to that entry.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is normally a pointer to the PatSeq
- *	in patternTable that corresponds to eventString.  If an error
- *	was found while parsing eventString, or if "create" is 0 and
- *	no pattern sequence previously existed, then NULL is returned
- *	and the interp's result contains a message describing the problem.
- *	If no pattern sequence previously existed for eventString, then
- *	a new one is created with a NULL command field.  In a successful
- *	return, *maskPtr is filled in with a mask of the event types
- *	on which the pattern sequence depends.
+ *	The return value is normally a pointer to the PatSeq in patternTable
+ *	that corresponds to eventString. If an error was found while parsing
+ *	eventString, or if "create" is 0 and no pattern sequence previously
+ *	existed, then NULL is returned and the interp's result contains a
+ *	message describing the problem. If no pattern sequence previously
+ *	existed for eventString, then a new one is created with a NULL command
+ *	field. In a successful return, *maskPtr is filled in with a mask of
+ *	the event types on which the pattern sequence depends.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	A new pattern sequence may be allocated.
@@ -3982,45 +3936,39 @@ GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString)
  */
 
 static PatSeq *
-FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
-	allowVirtual, maskPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error
-				 * reporting. */
-    Tcl_HashTable *patternTablePtr; /* Table to use for lookup. */
-    ClientData object;		/* For binding table, token for object with
-				 * which binding is associated.
-				 * For virtual event table, NULL. */
-    CONST char *eventString;	/* String description of pattern to
-				 * match on.  See user documentation
-				 * for details. */
-    int create;			/* 0 means don't create the entry if
-				 * it doesn't already exist.   Non-zero
-				 * means create. */
-    int allowVirtual;		/* 0 means that virtual events are not
-				 * allowed in the sequence.  Non-zero
-				 * otherwise. */
-    unsigned long *maskPtr;	/* *maskPtr is filled in with the event
-				 * types on which this pattern sequence
-				 * depends. */
+FindSequence(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tcl_HashTable *patternTablePtr,
+				/* Table to use for lookup. */
+    ClientData object,		/* For binding table, token for object with
+				 * which binding is associated. For virtual
+				 * event table, NULL. */
+    const char *eventString,	/* String description of pattern to match on.
+				 * See user documentation for details. */
+    int create,			/* 0 means don't create the entry if it
+				 * doesn't already exist. Non-zero means
+				 * create. */
+    int allowVirtual,		/* 0 means that virtual events are not allowed
+				 * in the sequence. Non-zero otherwise. */
+    unsigned long *maskPtr)	/* *maskPtr is filled in with the event types
+				 * on which this pattern sequence depends. */
 {
-
     Pattern pats[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE];
     int numPats, virtualFound;
-    CONST char *p;
+    const char *p;
     Pattern *patPtr;
     PatSeq *psPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-    int flags, count, new;
+    int flags, count, isNew;
     size_t sequenceSize;
     unsigned long eventMask;
     PatternTableKey key;
 
     /*
      *-------------------------------------------------------------
-     * Step 1: parse the pattern string to produce an array
-     * of Patterns.  The array is generated backwards, so
-     * that the lowest-indexed pattern corresponds to the last
-     * event that must occur.
+     * Step 1: parse the pattern string to produce an array of Patterns. The
+     * array is generated backwards, so that the lowest-indexed pattern
+     * corresponds to the last event that must occur.
      *-------------------------------------------------------------
      */
 
@@ -4045,7 +3993,7 @@ FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
 
 	if (eventMask & VirtualEventMask) {
 	    if (allowVirtual == 0) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, 
+		Tcl_SetResult(interp,
 			"virtual event not allowed in definition of another virtual event",
 			TCL_STATIC);
 		return NULL;
@@ -4067,8 +4015,8 @@ FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
 
     /*
      *-------------------------------------------------------------
-     * Step 2: find the sequence in the binding table if it exists,
-     * and add a new sequence to the table if it doesn't.
+     * Step 2: find the sequence in the binding table if it exists, and add a
+     * new sequence to the table if it doesn't.
      *-------------------------------------------------------------
      */
 
@@ -4081,15 +4029,15 @@ FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
 		TCL_STATIC);
 	return NULL;
     }
-    
+
     patPtr = &pats[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE-numPats];
     memset(&key, 0, sizeof(key));
     key.object = object;
     key.type = patPtr->eventType;
     key.detail = patPtr->detail;
-    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(patternTablePtr, (char *) &key, &new);
+    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(patternTablePtr, (char *) &key, &isNew);
     sequenceSize = numPats*sizeof(Pattern);
-    if (!new) {
+    if (!isNew) {
 	for (psPtr = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr); psPtr != NULL;
 		psPtr = psPtr->nextSeqPtr) {
 	    if ((numPats == psPtr->numPats)
@@ -4101,17 +4049,18 @@ FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
 	}
     }
     if (!create) {
-	if (new) {
+	if (isNew) {
 	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
 	}
+
 	/*
-	 * No binding exists for the sequence, so return an empty error.
-	 * This is a special error that the caller will check for in order
-	 * to silently ignore this case.  This is a hack that maintains
-	 * backward compatibility for Tk_GetBinding but the various "bind"
-	 * commands silently ignore missing bindings.
+	 * No binding exists for the sequence, so return an empty error. This
+	 * is a special error that the caller will check for in order to
+	 * silently ignore this case. This is a hack that maintains backward
+	 * compatibility for Tk_GetBinding but the various "bind" commands
+	 * silently ignore missing bindings.
 	 */
-	
+
 	return NULL;
     }
     psPtr = (PatSeq *) ckalloc((unsigned) (sizeof(PatSeq)
@@ -4128,9 +4077,9 @@ FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
     psPtr->nextObjPtr = NULL;
     Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, psPtr);
 
-    memcpy((VOID *) psPtr->pats, (VOID *) patPtr, sequenceSize);
+    memcpy((void *) psPtr->pats, (void *) patPtr, sequenceSize);
 
-    done:
+  done:
     *maskPtr = eventMask;
     return psPtr;
 }
@@ -4140,34 +4089,31 @@ FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
  *
  * ParseEventDescription --
  *
- *	Fill Pattern buffer with information about event from
- *	event string.
+ *	Fill Pattern buffer with information about event from event string.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Leaves error message in interp and returns 0 if there was an
- *	error due to a badly formed event string.  Returns 1 if proper
- *	event was specified, 2 if Double modifier was used in event
- *	string, or 3 if Triple was used.
+ *	Leaves error message in interp and returns 0 if there was an error due
+ *	to a badly formed event string. Returns 1 if proper event was
+ *	specified, 2 if Double modifier was used in event string, or 3 if
+ *	Triple was used.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	On exit, eventStringPtr points to rest of event string (after the
- *	closing '>', so that this procedure can be called repeatedly to
- *	parse all the events in the entire sequence.
+ *	closing '>', so that this function can be called repeatedly to parse
+ *	all the events in the entire sequence.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
-	eventMaskPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* For error messages. */
-    CONST char **eventStringPtr;/* On input, holds a pointer to start of
-				 * event string.  On exit, gets pointer to
-				 * rest of string after parsed event. */
-    Pattern *patPtr;		/* Filled with the pattern parsed from the
+ParseEventDescription(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For error messages. */
+    const char **eventStringPtr,/* On input, holds a pointer to start of event
+				 * string. On exit, gets pointer to rest of
+				 * string after parsed event. */
+    Pattern *patPtr,		/* Filled with the pattern parsed from the
 				 * event string. */
-    unsigned long *eventMaskPtr;/* Filled with event mask of matched event. */
-				 
+    unsigned long *eventMaskPtr)/* Filled with event mask of matched event. */
 {
     char *p;
     unsigned long eventMask;
@@ -4186,7 +4132,7 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
 
     eventMask = 0;
     count = 1;
-    
+
     /*
      * Handle simple ASCII characters.
      */
@@ -4204,7 +4150,7 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
 		patPtr->detail.keySym = *p;
 	    } else {
 		char buf[64];
-		
+
 		sprintf(buf, "bad ASCII character 0x%x", (unsigned char) *p);
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 		count = 0;
@@ -4216,8 +4162,8 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
     }
 
     /*
-     * A fancier event description.  This can be either a virtual event
-     * or a physical event.
+     * A fancier event description. This can be either a virtual event or a
+     * physical event.
      *
      * A virtual event description consists of:
      *
@@ -4228,30 +4174,30 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
      * A physical event description consists of:
      *
      * 1. open angle bracket.
-     * 2. any number of modifiers, each followed by spaces
-     *    or dashes.
+     * 2. any number of modifiers, each followed by spaces or dashes.
      * 3. an optional event name.
-     * 4. an option button or keysym name.  Either this or
-     *    item 3 *must* be present;  if both are present
-     *    then they are separated by spaces or dashes.
+     * 4. an option button or keysym name. Either this or item 3 *must* be
+     *	  present; if both are present then they are separated by spaces or
+     *	  dashes.
      * 5. a close angle bracket.
      */
 
     p++;
     if (*p == '<') {
 	/*
-	 * This is a virtual event: soak up all the characters up to
-	 * the next '>'.
+	 * This is a virtual event: soak up all the characters up to the next
+	 * '>'.
 	 */
 
-	char *field = p + 1;	    
+	char *field = p + 1;
+
 	p = strchr(field, '>');
 	if (p == field) {
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "virtual event \"<<>>\" is badly formed",
 		    TCL_STATIC);
 	    count = 0;
 	    goto done;
-	}	    
+	}
 	if ((p == NULL) || (p[1] != '>')) {
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "missing \">\" in virtual binding",
 		    TCL_STATIC);
@@ -4270,13 +4216,15 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
 
     while (1) {
 	ModInfo *modPtr;
+
 	p = GetField(p, field, FIELD_SIZE);
 	if (*p == '>') {
 	    /*
 	     * This solves the problem of, e.g., <Control-M> being
-	     * misinterpreted as Control + Meta + missing keysym
-	     * instead of Control + KeyPress + M.
+	     * misinterpreted as Control + Meta + missing keysym instead of
+	     * Control + KeyPress + M.
 	     */
+
 	     break;
 	}
 	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&modTable, field);
@@ -4285,10 +4233,13 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
 	}
 	modPtr = (ModInfo *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 	patPtr->needMods |= modPtr->mask;
-	if (modPtr->flags & (MULT_CLICKS)) {
+	if (modPtr->flags & MULT_CLICKS) {
 	    int i = modPtr->flags & MULT_CLICKS;
+
 	    count = 2;
-	    while (i >>= 1) count++;
+	    while (i >>= 1) {
+		count++;
+	    }
 	}
 	while ((*p == '-') || isspace(UCHAR(*p))) {
 	    p++;
@@ -4298,8 +4249,7 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
     eventFlags = 0;
     hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&eventTable, field);
     if (hPtr != NULL) {
-	EventInfo *eiPtr;
-	eiPtr = (EventInfo *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	EventInfo *eiPtr = (EventInfo *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 
 	patPtr->eventType = eiPtr->type;
 	eventFlags = flagArray[eiPtr->type];
@@ -4318,17 +4268,18 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
 		goto getKeysym;
 	    } else if ((eventFlags & BUTTON) == 0) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "specified button \"", field,
-			"\" for non-button event", (char *) NULL);
+			"\" for non-button event", NULL);
 		count = 0;
 		goto done;
 	    }
 	    patPtr->detail.button = (*field - '0');
 	} else {
-	    getKeysym:
+
+	getKeysym:
 	    patPtr->detail.keySym = TkStringToKeysym(field);
 	    if (patPtr->detail.keySym == NoSymbol) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad event type or keysym \"",
-			field, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+			field, "\"", NULL);
 		count = 0;
 		goto done;
 	    }
@@ -4337,7 +4288,7 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
 		eventMask = KeyPressMask;
 	    } else if ((eventFlags & KEY) == 0) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "specified keysym \"", field,
-			"\" for non-key event", (char *) NULL);
+			"\" for non-key event", NULL);
 		count = 0;
 		goto done;
 	    }
@@ -4369,10 +4320,10 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
     }
     p++;
 
-end:
+  end:
     *eventStringPtr += (p - Tcl_DStringValue(&copy));
     *eventMaskPtr |= eventMask;
-done:
+  done:
     Tcl_DStringFree(&copy);
     return count;
 }
@@ -4382,17 +4333,15 @@ done:
  *
  * GetField --
  *
- *	Used to parse pattern descriptions.  Copies up to
- *	size characters from p to copy, stopping at end of
- *	string, space, "-", ">", or whenever size is
- *	exceeded.
+ *	Used to parse pattern descriptions. Copies up to size characters from
+ *	p to copy, stopping at end of string, space, "-", ">", or whenever
+ *	size is exceeded.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the character just
- *	after the last one copied (usually "-" or space or
- *	">", but could be anything if size was exceeded).
- *	Also places NULL-terminated string (up to size
- *	character, including NULL), at copy.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the character just after the last one
+ *	copied (usually "-" or space or ">", but could be anything if size was
+ *	exceeded). Also places NULL-terminated string (up to size character,
+ *	including NULL), at copy.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4401,11 +4350,10 @@ done:
  */
 
 static char *
-GetField(p, copy, size)
-    char *p;		/* Pointer to part of pattern. */
-    char *copy;	/* Place to copy field. */
-    int size;			/* Maximum number of characters to
-				 * copy. */
+GetField(
+    char *p,			/* Pointer to part of pattern. */
+    char *copy,			/* Place to copy field. */
+    int size)			/* Maximum number of characters to copy. */
 {
     while ((*p != '\0') && !isspace(UCHAR(*p)) && (*p != '>')
 	    && (*p != '-') && (size > 1)) {
@@ -4423,22 +4371,23 @@ GetField(p, copy, size)
  *
  * GetPatternString --
  *
- *	Produce a string version of the given event, for displaying to
- *	the user.  
+ *	Produce a string version of the given event, for displaying to the
+ *	user.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The string is left in dsPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	It is the caller's responsibility to initialize the DString before
- *	and to free it after calling this procedure.
+ *	It is the caller's responsibility to initialize the DString before and
+ *	to free it after calling this function.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static void
-GetPatternString(psPtr, dsPtr)
-    PatSeq *psPtr;
-    Tcl_DString *dsPtr;
+GetPatternString(
+    PatSeq *psPtr,
+    Tcl_DString *dsPtr)
 {
     Pattern *patPtr;
     char c, buffer[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
@@ -4453,19 +4402,17 @@ GetPatternString(psPtr, dsPtr)
 
     for (patsLeft = psPtr->numPats, patPtr = &psPtr->pats[psPtr->numPats - 1];
 	    patsLeft > 0; patsLeft--, patPtr--) {
-
 	/*
 	 * Check for simple case of an ASCII character.
 	 */
 
 	if ((patPtr->eventType == KeyPress)
-		&& ((psPtr->flags & PAT_NEARBY) == 0) 
+		&& ((psPtr->flags & PAT_NEARBY) == 0)
 		&& (patPtr->needMods == 0)
 		&& (patPtr->detail.keySym < 128)
 		&& isprint(UCHAR(patPtr->detail.keySym))
 		&& (patPtr->detail.keySym != '<')
 		&& (patPtr->detail.keySym != ' ')) {
-
 	    c = (char) patPtr->detail.keySym;
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, &c, 1);
 	    continue;
@@ -4483,12 +4430,13 @@ GetPatternString(psPtr, dsPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * It's a more general event specification.  First check
-	 * for "Double", "Triple", "Quadruple", then modifiers,
-	 * then event type, then keysym or button detail.
+	 * It's a more general event specification. First check for "Double",
+	 * "Triple", "Quadruple", then modifiers, then event type, then keysym
+	 * or button detail.
 	 */
 
 	Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, "<", 1);
+
 	if ((psPtr->flags & PAT_NEARBY) && (patsLeft > 1)
 		&& (memcmp((char *) patPtr, (char *) (patPtr-1),
 			sizeof(Pattern)) == 0)) {
@@ -4510,6 +4458,7 @@ GetPatternString(psPtr, dsPtr)
 		Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, "Double-", 7);
 	    }
 	}
+
 	for (needMods = patPtr->needMods, modPtr = modArray;
 		needMods != 0; modPtr++) {
 	    if (modPtr->mask & needMods) {
@@ -4518,6 +4467,7 @@ GetPatternString(psPtr, dsPtr)
 		Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, "-", 1);
 	    }
 	}
+
 	for (eiPtr = eventArray; eiPtr->name != NULL; eiPtr++) {
 	    if (eiPtr->type == patPtr->eventType) {
 		Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, eiPtr->name, -1);
@@ -4531,9 +4481,7 @@ GetPatternString(psPtr, dsPtr)
 	if (patPtr->detail.clientData != 0) {
 	    if ((patPtr->eventType == KeyPress)
 		    || (patPtr->eventType == KeyRelease)) {
-		char *string;
-
-		string = TkKeysymToString(patPtr->detail.keySym);
+		char *string = TkKeysymToString(patPtr->detail.keySym);
 		if (string != NULL) {
 		    Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, string, -1);
 		}
@@ -4542,6 +4490,7 @@ GetPatternString(psPtr, dsPtr)
 		Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, buffer, -1);
 	    }
 	}
+
 	Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, ">", 1);
     }
 }
@@ -4551,8 +4500,8 @@ GetPatternString(psPtr, dsPtr)
  *
  * EvalTclBinding --
  *
- *	The procedure that is invoked by Tk_BindEvent when a Tcl binding
- *	is fired.  
+ *	The function that is invoked by Tk_BindEvent when a Tcl binding is
+ *	fired.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result code, the result of globally evaluating the
@@ -4565,8 +4514,8 @@ GetPatternString(psPtr, dsPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeTclBinding(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;
+FreeTclBinding(
+    ClientData clientData)
 {
     ckfree((char *) clientData);
 }
@@ -4576,12 +4525,11 @@ FreeTclBinding(clientData)
  *
  * TkStringToKeysym --
  *
- *	This procedure finds the keysym associated with a given keysym
- *	name.
+ *	This function finds the keysym associated with a given keysym name.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the keysym that corresponds to name, or
- *	NoSymbol if there is no such keysym.
+ *	The return value is the keysym that corresponds to name, or NoSymbol
+ *	if there is no such keysym.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4590,19 +4538,18 @@ FreeTclBinding(clientData)
  */
 
 KeySym
-TkStringToKeysym(name)
-    char *name;			/* Name of a keysym. */
+TkStringToKeysym(
+    char *name)			/* Name of a keysym. */
 {
 #ifdef REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-    KeySym keysym;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&keySymTable, name);
 
-    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&keySymTable, name);
     if (hPtr != NULL) {
 	return (KeySym) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
     }
     if (strlen(name) == 1) {
-	keysym = (KeySym) (unsigned char) name[0];
+	KeySym keysym = (KeySym) (unsigned char) name[0];
+
 	if (TkKeysymToString(keysym) != NULL) {
 	    return keysym;
 	}
@@ -4616,12 +4563,11 @@ TkStringToKeysym(name)
  *
  * TkKeysymToString --
  *
- *	This procedure finds the keysym name associated with a given
- *	keysym.
+ *	This function finds the keysym name associated with a given keysym.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to a static string containing
- *	the name of the given keysym, or NULL if there is no known name.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to a static string containing the name
+ *	of the given keysym, or NULL if there is no known name.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4630,17 +4576,17 @@ TkStringToKeysym(name)
  */
 
 char *
-TkKeysymToString(keysym)
-    KeySym keysym;
+TkKeysymToString(
+    KeySym keysym)
 {
 #ifdef REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&nameTable, (char *)keysym);
 
-    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&nameTable, (char *)keysym);
     if (hPtr != NULL) {
 	return (char *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
     }
 #endif /* REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP */
+
     return XKeysymToString(keysym);
 }
 
@@ -4649,25 +4595,24 @@ TkKeysymToString(keysym)
  *
  * TkCopyAndGlobalEval --
  *
- *	This procedure makes a copy of a script then passes to Tcl
- *	to evaluate it.  It's used in situations where the execution of
- *	a command may cause the original command string to be reallocated.
+ *	This function makes a copy of a script then calls Tcl_EvalEx to
+ *	evaluate it. It's used in situations where the execution of a command
+ *	may cause the original command string to be reallocated.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns the result of evaluating script, including both a standard
- *	Tcl completion code and a string in the interp's result.
+ *	Returns the result of evaluating script, including both a standard Tcl
+ *	completion code and a string in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	None.
+ *	Any; depends on script.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-TkCopyAndGlobalEval(interp, script)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter in which to evaluate
-					 * script. */
-    char *script;			/* Script to evaluate. */
+TkCopyAndGlobalEval(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter in which to evaluate script. */
+    char *script)		/* Script to evaluate. */
 {
     Tcl_DString buffer;
     int code;
@@ -4679,5 +4624,40 @@ TkCopyAndGlobalEval(interp, script)
     Tcl_DStringFree(&buffer);
     return code;
 }
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetBindingXEvent --
+ *
+ *	This function returns the XEvent associated with the currently
+ *	executing binding. This function can only be invoked while a binding
+ *	is executing.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a pointer to the XEvent that caused the current binding code
+ *	to be run.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
 
+XEvent *
+TkpGetBindingXEvent(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Interpreter. */
+{
+   TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_MainWindow(interp);
+   BindingTable *bindPtr = (BindingTable *) winPtr->mainPtr->bindingTable;
 
+   return &(bindPtr->eventRing[bindPtr->curEvent]);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkBitmap.c b/generic/tkBitmap.c
index 5c8a9fc..09545d6 100644
--- a/generic/tkBitmap.c
+++ b/generic/tkBitmap.c
@@ -1,43 +1,42 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkBitmap.c --
  *
  *	This file maintains a database of read-only bitmaps for the Tk
- *	toolkit.  This allows bitmaps to be shared between widgets and
- *	also avoids interactions with the X server.
+ *	toolkit. This allows bitmaps to be shared between widgets and also
+ *	avoids interactions with the X server.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
  * The includes below are for pre-defined bitmaps.
  *
- * Platform-specific issue: Windows complains when the bitmaps are
- * included, because an array of characters is being initialized with
- * integers as elements.  For lint purposes, the following pragmas
- * temporarily turn off that warning message.
+ * Platform-specific issue: Windows complains when the bitmaps are included,
+ * because an array of characters is being initialized with integers as
+ * elements. For lint purposes, the following pragmas temporarily turn off
+ * that warning message.
  */
 
 #if defined(_MSC_VER)
 #pragma warning (disable : 4305)
 #endif
 
-#include "error.bmp"
-#include "gray12.bmp"
-#include "gray25.bmp"
-#include "gray50.bmp"
-#include "gray75.bmp"
-#include "hourglass.bmp"
-#include "info.bmp"
-#include "questhead.bmp"
-#include "question.bmp"
-#include "warning.bmp"
+#include "error.xbm"
+#include "gray12.xbm"
+#include "gray25.xbm"
+#include "gray50.xbm"
+#include "gray75.xbm"
+#include "hourglass.xbm"
+#include "info.xbm"
+#include "questhead.xbm"
+#include "question.xbm"
+#include "warning.xbm"
 
 #if defined(_MSC_VER)
 #pragma warning (default : 4305)
@@ -45,82 +44,80 @@
 
 /*
  * One of the following data structures exists for each bitmap that is
- * currently in use.  Each structure is indexed with both "idTable" and
+ * currently in use. Each structure is indexed with both "idTable" and
  * "nameTable".
  */
 
 typedef struct TkBitmap {
-    Pixmap bitmap;		/* X identifier for bitmap.  None means this
-				 * bitmap was created by Tk_DefineBitmap
-				 * and it isn't currently in use. */
+    Pixmap bitmap;		/* X identifier for bitmap. None means this
+				 * bitmap was created by Tk_DefineBitmap and
+				 * it isn't currently in use. */
     int width, height;		/* Dimensions of bitmap. */
     Display *display;		/* Display for which bitmap is valid. */
-    int screenNum;		/* Screen on which bitmap is valid */
+    int screenNum;		/* Screen on which bitmap is valid. */
     int resourceRefCount;	/* Number of active uses of this bitmap (each
 				 * active use corresponds to a call to
-				 * Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj or Tk_GetBitmap).
-				 * If this count is 0, then this TkBitmap
+				 * Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj or Tk_GetBitmap). If
+				 * this count is 0, then this TkBitmap
 				 * structure is no longer valid and it isn't
 				 * present in nameTable: it is being kept
 				 * around only because there are objects
-				 * referring to it.  The structure is freed
-				 * when resourceRefCount and objRefCount
-				 * are both 0. */
-    int objRefCount;		/* Number of Tcl_Obj's that reference
-				 * this structure. */
+				 * referring to it. The structure is freed
+				 * when resourceRefCount and objRefCount are
+				 * both 0. */
+    int objRefCount;		/* Number of Tcl_Obj's that reference this
+				 * structure. */
     Tcl_HashEntry *nameHashPtr;	/* Entry in nameTable for this structure
 				 * (needed when deleting). */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr;	/* Entry in idTable for this structure
-				 * (needed when deleting). */
+    Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr;	/* Entry in idTable for this structure (needed
+				 * when deleting). */
     struct TkBitmap *nextPtr;	/* Points to the next TkBitmap structure with
-				 * the same name.  All bitmaps with the
-				 * same name (but different displays or
-				 * screens) are chained together off a 
-				 * single entry in nameTable. */
+				 * the same name. All bitmaps with the same
+				 * name (but different displays or screens)
+				 * are chained together off a single entry in
+				 * nameTable. */
 } TkBitmap;
 
-/* 
- * Used in bitmapDataTable, stored in the TkDisplay structure, to map
- * between in-core data about a bitmap to its TkBitmap structure.
+/*
+ * Used in bitmapDataTable, stored in the TkDisplay structure, to map between
+ * in-core data about a bitmap to its TkBitmap structure.
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    CONST char *source;		/* Bitmap bits. */
+    const char *source;		/* Bitmap bits. */
     int width, height;		/* Dimensions of bitmap. */
 } DataKey;
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    int initialized;            /* 0 means table below needs initializing. */
+    int initialized;		/* 0 means table below needs initializing. */
     Tcl_HashTable predefBitmapTable;
-                                /* Hash table created by Tk_DefineBitmap 
-				 * to map from a name to a collection 
-				 * of in-core data about a bitmap.  The 
-				 * table is indexed by the address of the 
-				 * data for the bitmap, and the entries
-				 * contain pointers to TkPredefBitmap 
-				 * structures. */
+				/* Hash table created by Tk_DefineBitmap to
+				 * map from a name to a collection of in-core
+				 * data about a bitmap. The table is indexed
+				 * by the address of the data for the bitmap,
+				 * and the entries contain pointers to
+				 * TkPredefBitmap structures. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		BitmapInit _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
-static void		DupBitmapObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr));
-static void		FreeBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((TkBitmap *bitmapPtr));
-static void		FreeBitmapObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static TkBitmap *	GetBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name));
-static TkBitmap *	GetBitmapFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		InitBitmapObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+static void		BitmapInit(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+static void		DupBitmapObjProc(Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr);
+static void		FreeBitmap(TkBitmap *bitmapPtr);
+static void		FreeBitmapObjProc(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static TkBitmap *	GetBitmap(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    const char *name);
+static TkBitmap *	GetBitmapFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		InitBitmapObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
 
 /*
  * The following structure defines the implementation of the "bitmap" Tcl
- * object, which maps a string bitmap name to a TkBitmap object.  The
- * ptr1 field of the Tcl_Obj points to a TkBitmap object.
+ * object, which maps a string bitmap name to a TkBitmap object. The ptr1
+ * field of the Tcl_Obj points to a TkBitmap object.
  */
 
 Tcl_ObjType tkBitmapObjType = {
@@ -136,33 +133,33 @@ Tcl_ObjType tkBitmapObjType = {
  *
  * Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj --
  *
- *	Given a Tcl_Obj *, map the value to a corresponding
- *	Pixmap structure based on the tkwin given.
+ *	Given a Tcl_Obj *, map the value to a corresponding Pixmap structure
+ *	based on the tkwin given.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired bitmap
- *	(i.e. a Pixmap with a single plane), unless string couldn't be
- *	parsed correctly.  In this case, None is returned and an error
- *	message is left in the interp's result.  The caller should never
- *	modify the bitmap that is returned, and should eventually call
- *	Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj when the bitmap is no longer needed.
+ *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired bitmap (i.e. a
+ *	Pixmap with a single plane), unless string couldn't be parsed
+ *	correctly. In this case, None is returned and an error message is left
+ *	in the interp's result. The caller should never modify the bitmap that
+ *	is returned, and should eventually call Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj when the
+ *	bitmap is no longer needed.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The bitmap is added to an internal database with a reference count.
- *	For each call to this procedure, there should eventually be a call
- *	to Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj, so that the database can be cleaned up 
- *	when bitmaps aren't needed anymore.
+ *	For each call to this function, there should eventually be a call to
+ *	Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj, so that the database can be cleaned up when
+ *	bitmaps aren't needed anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Pixmap
-Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error results. This may 
-				 * be NULL. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Need the screen the bitmap is used on.*/
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object describing bitmap; see manual
-				 * entry for legal syntax of string value. */
+Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error results. This may be
+				 * NULL. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Need the screen the bitmap is used on.*/
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Object describing bitmap; see manual entry
+				 * for legal syntax of string value. */
 {
     TkBitmap *bitmapPtr;
 
@@ -172,54 +169,54 @@ Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
     bitmapPtr = (TkBitmap *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
 
     /*
-     * If the object currently points to a TkBitmap, see if it's the
-     * one we want.  If so, increment its reference count and return.
+     * If the object currently points to a TkBitmap, see if it's the one we
+     * want. If so, increment its reference count and return.
      */
 
     if (bitmapPtr != NULL) {
 	if (bitmapPtr->resourceRefCount == 0) {
 	    /*
-	     * This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkBitmap that's
-	     * no longer in use.  Clear the reference.
+	     * This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkBitmap that's no
+	     * longer in use. Clear the reference.
 	     */
 
 	    FreeBitmapObjProc(objPtr);
 	    bitmapPtr = NULL;
-	} else if ( (Tk_Display(tkwin) == bitmapPtr->display)
-		&& (Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin) == bitmapPtr->screenNum) ) {
+	} else if ((Tk_Display(tkwin) == bitmapPtr->display)
+		&& (Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin) == bitmapPtr->screenNum)) {
 	    bitmapPtr->resourceRefCount++;
 	    return bitmapPtr->bitmap;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * The object didn't point to the TkBitmap that we wanted.  Search
-     * the list of TkBitmaps with the same name to see if one of the
-     * others is the right one.
+     * The object didn't point to the TkBitmap that we wanted. Search the list
+     * of TkBitmaps with the same name to see if one of the others is the
+     * right one.
      */
 
     if (bitmapPtr != NULL) {
-	TkBitmap *firstBitmapPtr =
-		(TkBitmap *) Tcl_GetHashValue(bitmapPtr->nameHashPtr);
+	TkBitmap *firstBitmapPtr = (TkBitmap *)
+		Tcl_GetHashValue(bitmapPtr->nameHashPtr);
 	FreeBitmapObjProc(objPtr);
 	for (bitmapPtr = firstBitmapPtr; bitmapPtr != NULL;
 		bitmapPtr = bitmapPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    if ( (Tk_Display(tkwin) == bitmapPtr->display) &&
-		    (Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin) == bitmapPtr->screenNum) ) {
+	    if ((Tk_Display(tkwin) == bitmapPtr->display) &&
+		    (Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin) == bitmapPtr->screenNum)) {
 		bitmapPtr->resourceRefCount++;
 		bitmapPtr->objRefCount++;
-		objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) bitmapPtr;
+		objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) bitmapPtr;
 		return bitmapPtr->bitmap;
 	    }
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Still no luck.  Call GetBitmap to allocate a new TkBitmap object.
+     * Still no luck. Call GetBitmap to allocate a new TkBitmap object.
      */
 
     bitmapPtr = GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objPtr));
-    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) bitmapPtr;
+    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) bitmapPtr;
     if (bitmapPtr == NULL) {
 	return None;
     }
@@ -232,35 +229,36 @@ Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetBitmap --
  *
- *	Given a string describing a bitmap, locate (or create if necessary)
- *	a bitmap that fits the description.
+ *	Given a string describing a bitmap, locate (or create if necessary) a
+ *	bitmap that fits the description.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired bitmap
- *	(i.e. a Pixmap with a single plane), unless string couldn't be
- *	parsed correctly.  In this case, None is returned and an error
- *	message is left in the interp's result.  The caller should never
- *	modify the bitmap that is returned, and should eventually call
- *	Tk_FreeBitmap when the bitmap is no longer needed.
+ *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired bitmap (i.e. a
+ *	Pixmap with a single plane), unless string couldn't be parsed
+ *	correctly. In this case, None is returned and an error message is left
+ *	in the interp's result. The caller should never modify the bitmap that
+ *	is returned, and should eventually call Tk_FreeBitmap when the bitmap
+ *	is no longer needed.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The bitmap is added to an internal database with a reference count.
- *	For each call to this procedure, there should eventually be a call
- *	to Tk_FreeBitmap, so that the database can be cleaned up when bitmaps
+ *	For each call to this function, there should eventually be a call to
+ *	Tk_FreeBitmap, so that the database can be cleaned up when bitmaps
  *	aren't needed anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Pixmap
-Tk_GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, string)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting,
+Tk_GetBitmap(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting,
 				 * this may be NULL. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which bitmap will be used. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* Description of bitmap.  See manual entry
-				 * for details on legal syntax. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which bitmap will be used. */
+    const char *string)		/* Description of bitmap. See manual entry for
+				 * details on legal syntax. */
 {
     TkBitmap *bitmapPtr = GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, string);
+
     if (bitmapPtr == NULL) {
 	return None;
     }
@@ -272,53 +270,52 @@ Tk_GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, string)
  *
  * GetBitmap --
  *
- *	Given a string describing a bitmap, locate (or create if necessary)
- *	a bitmap that fits the description. This routine returns the
- *	internal data structure for the bitmap. This avoids extra
- *	hash table lookups in Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj.
+ *	Given a string describing a bitmap, locate (or create if necessary) a
+ *	bitmap that fits the description. This routine returns the internal
+ *	data structure for the bitmap. This avoids extra hash table lookups in
+ *	Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired bitmap
- *	(i.e. a Pixmap with a single plane), unless string couldn't be
- *	parsed correctly.  In this case, None is returned and an error
- *	message is left in the interp's result.  The caller should never
- *	modify the bitmap that is returned, and should eventually call
- *	Tk_FreeBitmap when the bitmap is no longer needed.
+ *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired bitmap (i.e. a
+ *	Pixmap with a single plane), unless string couldn't be parsed
+ *	correctly. In this case, None is returned and an error message is left
+ *	in the interp's result. The caller should never modify the bitmap that
+ *	is returned, and should eventually call Tk_FreeBitmap when the bitmap
+ *	is no longer needed.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The bitmap is added to an internal database with a reference count.
- *	For each call to this procedure, there should eventually be a call
- *	to Tk_FreeBitmap or Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj, so that the database can
- *	be cleaned up when bitmaps aren't needed anymore.
+ *	For each call to this function, there should eventually be a call to
+ *	Tk_FreeBitmap or Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj, so that the database can be
+ *	cleaned up when bitmaps aren't needed anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static TkBitmap *
-GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, string)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting,
+GetBitmap(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting,
 				 * this may be NULL. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which bitmap will be used. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* Description of bitmap.  See manual entry
-				 * for details on legal syntax. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which bitmap will be used. */
+    const char *string)		/* Description of bitmap. See manual entry for
+				 * details on legal syntax. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *nameHashPtr, *predefHashPtr;
     TkBitmap *bitmapPtr, *existingBitmapPtr;
     TkPredefBitmap *predefPtr;
-    int new;
     Pixmap bitmap;
-    int width, height;
-    int dummy2;
+    int isNew, width, height, dummy2;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (!dispPtr->bitmapInit) {
 	BitmapInit(dispPtr);
     }
 
-    nameHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapNameTable, string, &new);
-    if (!new) {
+    nameHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapNameTable, string,
+	    &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
 	existingBitmapPtr = (TkBitmap *) Tcl_GetHashValue(nameHashPtr);
 	for (bitmapPtr = existingBitmapPtr; bitmapPtr != NULL;
 		bitmapPtr = bitmapPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -333,26 +330,25 @@ GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, string)
     }
 
     /*
-     * No suitable bitmap exists.  Create a new bitmap from the
-     * information contained in the string.  If the string starts
-     * with "@" then the rest of the string is a file name containing
-     * the bitmap.  Otherwise the string must refer to a bitmap
-     * defined by a call to Tk_DefineBitmap.
+     * No suitable bitmap exists. Create a new bitmap from the information
+     * contained in the string. If the string starts with "@" then the rest of
+     * the string is a file name containing the bitmap. Otherwise the string
+     * must refer to a bitmap defined by a call to Tk_DefineBitmap.
      */
 
     if (*string == '@') {	/* INTL: ISO char */
 	Tcl_DString buffer;
 	int result;
 
-        if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
-            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't specify bitmap with '@' in a",
-                    " safe interpreter", (char *) NULL);
-            goto error;
-        }
+	if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't specify bitmap with '@' in a",
+		    " safe interpreter", NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Note that we need to cast away the CONST from the string because
-	 * Tcl_TranslateFileName is non const, even though it doesn't modify
+	 * Note that we need to cast away the const from the string because
+	 * Tcl_TranslateFileName is non-const, even though it doesn't modify
 	 * the string.
 	 */
 
@@ -366,29 +362,29 @@ GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, string)
 		&bitmap, &dummy2, &dummy2);
 	if (result != BitmapSuccess) {
 	    if (interp != NULL) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error reading bitmap file \"", string,
-		    "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error reading bitmap file \"",
+			string, "\"", NULL);
 	    }
 	    Tcl_DStringFree(&buffer);
 	    goto error;
 	}
 	Tcl_DStringFree(&buffer);
     } else {
-	predefHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->predefBitmapTable, 
-                string);
+	predefHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->predefBitmapTable, string);
 	if (predefHashPtr == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * The following platform specific call allows the user to
-	     * define bitmaps that may only exist during run time.  If
-	     * it returns None nothing was found and we return the error.
+	     * The following platform specific call allows the user to define
+	     * bitmaps that may only exist during run time. If it returns None
+	     * nothing was found and we return the error.
 	     */
+
 	    bitmap = TkpGetNativeAppBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), string,
 		    &width, &height);
-	    
+
 	    if (bitmap == None) {
 		if (interp != NULL) {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bitmap \"", string,
-			"\" not defined", (char *) NULL);
+			    "\" not defined", NULL);
 		}
 		goto error;
 	    }
@@ -400,13 +396,12 @@ GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, string)
 		bitmap = TkpCreateNativeBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin),
 		    predefPtr->source);
 		if (bitmap == None) {
-		    panic("native bitmap creation failed");
+		    Tcl_Panic("native bitmap creation failed");
 		}
 	    } else {
 		bitmap = XCreateBitmapFromData(Tk_Display(tkwin),
-		    RootWindowOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)), 
-		    predefPtr->source,
-		    (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height);
+			RootWindowOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)),
+			predefPtr->source, (unsigned)width, (unsigned)height);
 	    }
 	}
     }
@@ -424,18 +419,18 @@ GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, string)
     bitmapPtr->resourceRefCount = 1;
     bitmapPtr->objRefCount = 0;
     bitmapPtr->nameHashPtr = nameHashPtr;
-    bitmapPtr->idHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapIdTable, 
-            (char *) bitmap, &new);
-    if (!new) {
-	panic("bitmap already registered in Tk_GetBitmap");
+    bitmapPtr->idHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapIdTable,
+	    (char *) bitmap, &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
+	Tcl_Panic("bitmap already registered in Tk_GetBitmap");
     }
     bitmapPtr->nextPtr = existingBitmapPtr;
     Tcl_SetHashValue(nameHashPtr, bitmapPtr);
     Tcl_SetHashValue(bitmapPtr->idHashPtr, bitmapPtr);
     return bitmapPtr;
 
-    error:
-    if (new) {
+  error:
+    if (isNew) {
 	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(nameHashPtr);
     }
     return NULL;
@@ -446,53 +441,53 @@ GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, string)
  *
  * Tk_DefineBitmap --
  *
- *	This procedure associates a textual name with a binary bitmap
- *	description, so that the name may be used to refer to the
- *	bitmap in future calls to Tk_GetBitmap.
+ *	This function associates a textual name with a binary bitmap
+ *	description, so that the name may be used to refer to the bitmap in
+ *	future calls to Tk_GetBitmap.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.  If an error occurs then TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned and a message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result. If an error occurs then TCL_ERROR is returned
+ *	and a message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	"Name" is entered into the bitmap table and may be used from
- *	here on to refer to the given bitmap.
+ *	"Name" is entered into the bitmap table and may be used from here on
+ *	to refer to the given bitmap.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_DefineBitmap(interp, name, source, width, height)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name to use for bitmap.  Must not already
-				 * be defined as a bitmap. */
-    CONST char *source;		/* Address of bits for bitmap. */
-    int width;			/* Width of bitmap. */
-    int height;			/* Height of bitmap. */
+Tk_DefineBitmap(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    const char *name,		/* Name to use for bitmap. Must not already be
+				 * defined as a bitmap. */
+    const char *source,		/* Address of bits for bitmap. */
+    int width,			/* Width of bitmap. */
+    int height)			/* Height of bitmap. */
 {
-    int new;
+    int isNew;
     Tcl_HashEntry *predefHashPtr;
     TkPredefBitmap *predefPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
-    /* 
+    /*
      * Initialize the Bitmap module if not initialized already for this
-     * thread.  Since the current TkDisplay structure cannot be 
-     * introspected from here, pass a NULL pointer to BitmapInit,
-     * which will know to initialize only the data in the 
-     * ThreadSpecificData structure for the current thread.
-     */ 
+     * thread. Since the current TkDisplay structure cannot be introspected
+     * from here, pass a NULL pointer to BitmapInit, which will know to
+     * initialize only the data in the ThreadSpecificData structure for the
+     * current thread.
+     */
 
     if (!tsdPtr->initialized) {
-	BitmapInit((TkDisplay *) NULL);
+	BitmapInit(NULL);
     }
 
-    predefHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->predefBitmapTable, 
-            name, &new);
-    if (!new) {
-        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bitmap \"", name,
-		"\" is already defined", (char *) NULL);
+    predefHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->predefBitmapTable,
+	    name, &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bitmap \"", name, "\" is already defined",
+		NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     predefPtr = (TkPredefBitmap *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkPredefBitmap));
@@ -509,8 +504,7 @@ Tk_DefineBitmap(interp, name, source, width, height)
  *
  * Tk_NameOfBitmap --
  *
- *	Given a bitmap, return a textual string identifying the
- *	bitmap.
+ *	Given a bitmap, return a textual string identifying the bitmap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is the string name associated with bitmap.
@@ -521,19 +515,18 @@ Tk_DefineBitmap(interp, name, source, width, height)
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-CONST char *
-Tk_NameOfBitmap(display, bitmap)
-    Display *display;			/* Display for which bitmap was
-					 * allocated. */
-    Pixmap bitmap;			/* Bitmap whose name is wanted. */
+const char *
+Tk_NameOfBitmap(
+    Display *display,		/* Display for which bitmap was allocated. */
+    Pixmap bitmap)		/* Bitmap whose name is wanted. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr;
     TkBitmap *bitmapPtr;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
 
     if (dispPtr == NULL || !dispPtr->bitmapInit) {
-	unknown:
-	panic("Tk_NameOfBitmap received unknown bitmap argument");
+    unknown:
+	Tcl_Panic("Tk_NameOfBitmap received unknown bitmap argument");
     }
 
     idHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapIdTable, (char *) bitmap);
@@ -549,35 +542,33 @@ Tk_NameOfBitmap(display, bitmap)
  *
  * Tk_SizeOfBitmap --
  *
- *	Given a bitmap managed by this module, returns the width
- *	and height of the bitmap.
+ *	Given a bitmap managed by this module, returns the width and height of
+ *	the bitmap.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The words at *widthPtr and *heightPtr are filled in with
- *	the dimenstions of bitmap.
+ *	The words at *widthPtr and *heightPtr are filled in with the
+ *	dimenstions of bitmap.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If bitmap isn't managed by this module then the procedure
- *	panics..
+ *	If bitmap isn't managed by this module then the function panics..
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_SizeOfBitmap(display, bitmap, widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    Display *display;			/* Display for which bitmap was
-					 * allocated. */
-    Pixmap bitmap;			/* Bitmap whose size is wanted. */
-    int *widthPtr;			/* Store bitmap width here. */
-    int *heightPtr;			/* Store bitmap height here. */
+Tk_SizeOfBitmap(
+    Display *display,		/* Display for which bitmap was allocated. */
+    Pixmap bitmap,		/* Bitmap whose size is wanted. */
+    int *widthPtr,		/* Store bitmap width here. */
+    int *heightPtr)		/* Store bitmap height here. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr;
     TkBitmap *bitmapPtr;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
 
     if (!dispPtr->bitmapInit) {
-	unknownBitmap:
-	panic("Tk_SizeOfBitmap received unknown bitmap argument");
+    unknownBitmap:
+	Tcl_Panic("Tk_SizeOfBitmap received unknown bitmap argument");
     }
 
     idHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapIdTable, (char *) bitmap);
@@ -594,23 +585,23 @@ Tk_SizeOfBitmap(display, bitmap, widthPtr, heightPtr)
  *
  * FreeBitmap --
  *
- *	This procedure does all the work of releasing a bitmap allocated by
- *	Tk_GetBitmap or TkGetBitmapFromData.  It is invoked by both
+ *	This function does all the work of releasing a bitmap allocated by
+ *	Tk_GetBitmap or TkGetBitmapFromData. It is invoked by both
  *	Tk_FreeBitmap and Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The reference count associated with bitmap is decremented, and
- *	it is officially deallocated if no-one is using it anymore.
+ *	The reference count associated with bitmap is decremented, and it is
+ *	officially deallocated if no-one is using it anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeBitmap(bitmapPtr)
-    TkBitmap *bitmapPtr;			/* Bitmap to be released. */
+FreeBitmap(
+    TkBitmap *bitmapPtr)	/* Bitmap to be released. */
 {
     TkBitmap *prevPtr;
 
@@ -644,35 +635,34 @@ FreeBitmap(bitmapPtr)
  *
  * Tk_FreeBitmap --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to release a bitmap allocated by
- *	Tk_GetBitmap or TkGetBitmapFromData.
+ *	This function is called to release a bitmap allocated by Tk_GetBitmap
+ *	or TkGetBitmapFromData.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The reference count associated with bitmap is decremented, and
- *	it is officially deallocated if no-one is using it anymore.
+ *	The reference count associated with bitmap is decremented, and it is
+ *	officially deallocated if no-one is using it anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeBitmap(display, bitmap)
-    Display *display;			/* Display for which bitmap was
-					 * allocated. */
-    Pixmap bitmap;			/* Bitmap to be released. */
+Tk_FreeBitmap(
+    Display *display,		/* Display for which bitmap was allocated. */
+    Pixmap bitmap)		/* Bitmap to be released. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
 
     if (!dispPtr->bitmapInit) {
-	panic("Tk_FreeBitmap called before Tk_GetBitmap");
+	Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeBitmap called before Tk_GetBitmap");
     }
 
     idHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapIdTable, (char *) bitmap);
     if (idHashPtr == NULL) {
-	panic("Tk_FreeBitmap received unknown bitmap argument");
+	Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeBitmap received unknown bitmap argument");
     }
     FreeBitmap((TkBitmap *) Tcl_GetHashValue(idHashPtr));
 }
@@ -682,27 +672,27 @@ Tk_FreeBitmap(display, bitmap)
  *
  * Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to release a bitmap allocated by
- *	Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj. It does not throw away the Tcl_Obj *;
- *	it only gets rid of the hash table entry for this bitmap
- *	and clears the cached value that is normally stored in the object.
+ *	This function is called to release a bitmap allocated by
+ *	Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj. It does not throw away the Tcl_Obj *; it only
+ *	gets rid of the hash table entry for this bitmap and clears the cached
+ *	value that is normally stored in the object.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The reference count associated with the bitmap represented by
- *	objPtr is decremented, and the bitmap is released to X if there are 
- *	no remaining uses for it.
+ *	The reference count associated with the bitmap represented by objPtr
+ *	is decremented, and the bitmap is released to X if there are no
+ *	remaining uses for it.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window this bitmap lives in. Needed
-				 * for the display value. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The Tcl_Obj * to be freed. */
+Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The window this bitmap lives in. Needed for
+				 * the display value. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The Tcl_Obj * to be freed. */
 {
     FreeBitmap(GetBitmapFromObj(tkwin, objPtr));
 }
@@ -710,26 +700,25 @@ Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * FreeBitmapObjProc -- 
+ * FreeBitmapObjProc --
  *
  *	This proc is called to release an object reference to a bitmap.
- *	Called when the object's internal rep is released or when
- *	the cached bitmapPtr needs to be changed.
+ *	Called when the object's internal rep is released or when the cached
+ *	bitmapPtr needs to be changed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The object reference count is decremented. When both it
- *	and the hash ref count go to zero, the color's resources
- *	are released.
+ *	The object reference count is decremented. When both it and the hash
+ *	ref count go to zero, the color's resources are released.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeBitmapObjProc(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object we are releasing. */
+FreeBitmapObjProc(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object we are releasing. */
 {
     TkBitmap *bitmapPtr = (TkBitmap *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
 
@@ -739,37 +728,37 @@ FreeBitmapObjProc(objPtr)
 		&& (bitmapPtr->resourceRefCount == 0)) {
 	    ckfree((char *) bitmapPtr);
 	}
-	objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) NULL;
+	objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = NULL;
     }
 }
 
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * DupBitmapObjProc -- 
+ * DupBitmapObjProc --
  *
- *	When a cached bitmap object is duplicated, this is called to
- *	update the internal reps.
+ *	When a cached bitmap object is duplicated, this is called to update
+ *	the internal reps.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The color's objRefCount is incremented and the internal rep
- *	of the copy is set to point to it.
+ *	The color's objRefCount is incremented and the internal rep of the
+ *	copy is set to point to it.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DupBitmapObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying from. */
-    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying to. */
+DupBitmapObjProc(
+    Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,		/* The object we are copying from. */
+    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr)		/* The object we are copying to. */
 {
     TkBitmap *bitmapPtr = (TkBitmap *) srcObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
-    
+
     dupObjPtr->typePtr = srcObjPtr->typePtr;
-    dupObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) bitmapPtr;
+    dupObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) bitmapPtr;
 
     if (bitmapPtr != NULL) {
 	bitmapPtr->objRefCount++;
@@ -781,22 +770,22 @@ DupBitmapObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetBitmapFromData --
  *
- *	Given a description of the bits for a bitmap, make a bitmap that
- *	has the given properties. *** NOTE:  this procedure is obsolete
- *	and really shouldn't be used anymore. ***
+ *	Given a description of the bits for a bitmap, make a bitmap that has
+ *	the given properties. *** NOTE: this function is obsolete and really
+ *	shouldn't be used anymore. ***
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired bitmap
- *	(a one-plane Pixmap), unless it couldn't be created properly.
- *	In this case, None is returned and an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result.  The caller should never modify the bitmap that
- *	is returned, and should eventually call Tk_FreeBitmap when the
- *	bitmap is no longer needed.
+ *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired bitmap (a
+ *	one-plane Pixmap), unless it couldn't be created properly. In this
+ *	case, None is returned and an error message is left in the interp's
+ *	result. The caller should never modify the bitmap that is returned,
+ *	and should eventually call Tk_FreeBitmap when the bitmap is no longer
+ *	needed.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The bitmap is added to an internal database with a reference count.
- *	For each call to this procedure, there should eventually be a call
- *	to Tk_FreeBitmap, so that the database can be cleaned up when bitmaps
+ *	For each call to this function, there should eventually be a call to
+ *	Tk_FreeBitmap, so that the database can be cleaned up when bitmaps
  *	aren't needed anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -804,15 +793,15 @@ DupBitmapObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 Pixmap
-Tk_GetBitmapFromData(interp, tkwin, source, width, height)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which bitmap will be used. */
-    CONST char *source;		/* Bitmap data for bitmap shape. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of bitmap. */
+Tk_GetBitmapFromData(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which bitmap will be used. */
+    const char *source,		/* Bitmap data for bitmap shape. */
+    int width, int height)	/* Dimensions of bitmap. */
 {
     DataKey nameKey;
     Tcl_HashEntry *dataHashPtr;
-    int new;
+    int isNew;
     char string[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
     char *name;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
@@ -826,9 +815,9 @@ Tk_GetBitmapFromData(interp, tkwin, source, width, height)
     nameKey.source = source;
     nameKey.width = width;
     nameKey.height = height;
-    dataHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapDataTable, 
-            (char *) &nameKey, &new);
-    if (!new) {
+    dataHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapDataTable,
+	    (char *) &nameKey, &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
 	name = (char *) Tcl_GetHashValue(dataHashPtr);
     } else {
 	dispPtr->bitmapAutoNumber++;
@@ -848,27 +837,28 @@ Tk_GetBitmapFromData(interp, tkwin, source, width, height)
  *
  * Tk_GetBitmapFromObj --
  *
- *	Returns the bitmap referred to by a Tcl object.  The bitmap must
- *	already have been allocated via a call to Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj
- *	or Tk_GetBitmap.
+ *	Returns the bitmap referred to by a Tcl object. The bitmap must
+ *	already have been allocated via a call to Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj or
+ *	Tk_GetBitmap.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns the Pixmap that matches the tkwin and the string rep
- *	of objPtr.
+ *	Returns the Pixmap that matches the tkwin and the string rep of
+ *	objPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a bitmap, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a bitmap, the conversion will free any
+ *	old internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Pixmap
-Tk_GetBitmapFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object from which to get pixels. */
+Tk_GetBitmapFromObj(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object from which to get pixels. */
 {
     TkBitmap *bitmapPtr = GetBitmapFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
+
     return bitmapPtr->bitmap;
 }
 
@@ -877,28 +867,28 @@ Tk_GetBitmapFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
  *
  * GetBitmapFromObj --
  *
- *	Returns the bitmap referred to by a Tcl object.  The bitmap must
- *	already have been allocated via a call to Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj
- *	or Tk_GetBitmap.
+ *	Returns the bitmap referred to by a Tcl object. The bitmap must
+ *	already have been allocated via a call to Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj or
+ *	Tk_GetBitmap.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns the TkBitmap * that matches the tkwin and the string rep
- *	of  objPtr.
+ *	Returns the TkBitmap * that matches the tkwin and the string rep of
+ *	objPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a bitmap, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a bitmap, the conversion will free any
+ *	old internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static TkBitmap *
-GetBitmapFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which the bitmap will be used. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object that describes the desired
+GetBitmapFromObj(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which the bitmap will be used. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object that describes the desired
 				 * bitmap. */
 {
-    TkBitmap *bitmapPtr; 
+    TkBitmap *bitmapPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
@@ -907,7 +897,7 @@ GetBitmapFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
     }
 
     bitmapPtr = (TkBitmap *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
-    if (bitmapPtr != NULL) { 
+    if (bitmapPtr != NULL) {
 	if ((bitmapPtr->resourceRefCount > 0)
 		&& (Tk_Display(tkwin) == bitmapPtr->display)) {
 	    return bitmapPtr;
@@ -915,29 +905,29 @@ GetBitmapFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
 	hashPtr = bitmapPtr->nameHashPtr;
 	FreeBitmapObjProc(objPtr);
     } else {
-	hashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapNameTable, 
-                Tcl_GetString(objPtr));
+	hashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->bitmapNameTable,
+		Tcl_GetString(objPtr));
 	if (hashPtr == NULL) {
 	    goto error;
 	}
-    } 
+    }
 
     /*
-     * At this point we've got a hash table entry, off of which hang
-     * one or more TkBitmap structures.  See if any of them will work.
+     * At this point we've got a hash table entry, off of which hang one or
+     * more TkBitmap structures. See if any of them will work.
      */
 
     for (bitmapPtr = (TkBitmap *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
 	    bitmapPtr != NULL;  bitmapPtr = bitmapPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (Tk_Display(tkwin) == bitmapPtr->display) {
-	    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) bitmapPtr;
+	    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) bitmapPtr;
 	    bitmapPtr->objRefCount++;
 	    return bitmapPtr;
 	}
     }
 
-    error:
-    panic("GetBitmapFromObj called with non-existent bitmap!");
+  error:
+    Tcl_Panic("GetBitmapFromObj called with non-existent bitmap!");
     /*
      * The following code isn't reached; it's just there to please compilers.
      */
@@ -949,27 +939,27 @@ GetBitmapFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
  *
  * InitBitmapObj --
  *
- *	Bookeeping procedure to change an objPtr to a bitmap type.
+ *	Bookeeping function to change an objPtr to a bitmap type.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The old internal rep of the object is freed. The internal
- *	rep is cleared. The final form of the object is set
- *	by either Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj or GetBitmapFromObj.
+ *	The old internal rep of the object is freed. The internal rep is
+ *	cleared. The final form of the object is set by either
+ *	Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj or GetBitmapFromObj.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-InitBitmapObj(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object to convert. */
+InitBitmapObj(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object to convert. */
 {
-    Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
+    const Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. 
+     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
      */
 
     Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
@@ -978,21 +968,22 @@ InitBitmapObj(objPtr)
 	(*typePtr->freeIntRepProc)(objPtr);
     }
     objPtr->typePtr = &tkBitmapObjType;
-    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) NULL;
+    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = NULL;
 }
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * BitmapInit --
- *	Initializes hash tables used by this module.  Initializes 
- *      tables stored in TkDisplay structure if a TkDisplay pointer
- *      is passed in.  Iinitializes the thread-local data
- *      in the current thread's ThreadSpecificData structure.
+ *
+ *	Initializes hash tables used by this module. Initializes tables stored
+ *	in TkDisplay structure if a TkDisplay pointer is passed in. Also
+ *	initializes the thread-local data in the current thread's
+ *	ThreadSpecificData structure.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
- *  
+ *	None.
+ *
  * Side effects:
  *	Read the code.
  *
@@ -1000,70 +991,70 @@ InitBitmapObj(objPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-BitmapInit(dispPtr)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;         /* TkDisplay structure encapsulating 
-				 * thread-specific data used by this 
-				 * module, or NULL if unavailable. */
+BitmapInit(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr)		/* TkDisplay structure encapsulating
+				 * thread-specific data used by this module,
+				 * or NULL if unavailable. */
 {
     Tcl_Interp *dummy;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
-    /* 
-     * First initialize the data in the ThreadSpecificData strucuture,
-     * if needed.
+    /*
+     * First initialize the data in the ThreadSpecificData strucuture, if
+     * needed.
      */
 
     if (!tsdPtr->initialized) {
 	tsdPtr->initialized = 1;
-        dummy = Tcl_CreateInterp();
+	dummy = Tcl_CreateInterp();
 	Tcl_InitHashTable(&tsdPtr->predefBitmapTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
 
-        Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "error", (char *) error_bits,
+	Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "error", (char *) error_bits,
 		error_width, error_height);
-        Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "gray75", (char *) gray75_bits,
-                gray75_width, gray75_height);
-        Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "gray50", (char *) gray50_bits,
-                gray50_width, gray50_height);
-        Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "gray25", (char *) gray25_bits,
-                gray25_width, gray25_height);
-        Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "gray12", (char *) gray12_bits,
-                gray12_width, gray12_height);
-        Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "hourglass", (char *) hourglass_bits,
-                hourglass_width, hourglass_height);
-        Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "info", (char *) info_bits,
-	        info_width, info_height);
-        Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "questhead", (char *) questhead_bits,
-	        questhead_width, questhead_height);
-        Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "question", (char *) question_bits,
-	        question_width, question_height);
-        Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "warning", (char *) warning_bits,
-	        warning_width, warning_height);
-
-        TkpDefineNativeBitmaps();
-        Tcl_DeleteInterp(dummy);
+	Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "gray75", (char *) gray75_bits,
+		gray75_width, gray75_height);
+	Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "gray50", (char *) gray50_bits,
+		gray50_width, gray50_height);
+	Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "gray25", (char *) gray25_bits,
+		gray25_width, gray25_height);
+	Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "gray12", (char *) gray12_bits,
+		gray12_width, gray12_height);
+	Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "hourglass", (char *) hourglass_bits,
+		hourglass_width, hourglass_height);
+	Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "info", (char *) info_bits,
+		info_width, info_height);
+	Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "questhead", (char *) questhead_bits,
+		questhead_width, questhead_height);
+	Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "question", (char *) question_bits,
+		question_width, question_height);
+	Tk_DefineBitmap(dummy, "warning", (char *) warning_bits,
+		warning_width, warning_height);
+
+	TkpDefineNativeBitmaps();
+	Tcl_DeleteInterp(dummy);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Was a valid TkDisplay pointer passed?  If so, initialize the
-     * Bitmap module tables in that structure.
+     * Was a valid TkDisplay pointer passed? If so, initialize the Bitmap
+     * module tables in that structure.
      */
 
     if (dispPtr != NULL) {
-        dispPtr->bitmapInit = 1;
+	dispPtr->bitmapInit = 1;
 	Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->bitmapNameTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
-	Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->bitmapDataTable, sizeof(DataKey)
-                /sizeof(int));
+	Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->bitmapDataTable,
+		sizeof(DataKey) / sizeof(int));
 
 	/*
-	 * The call below is tricky:  can't use sizeof(IdKey) because it
-	 * gets padded with extra unpredictable bytes on some 64-bit
-	 * machines.
+	 * The call below is tricky: can't use sizeof(IdKey) because it gets
+	 * padded with extra unpredictable bytes on some 64-bit machines.
 	 */
 
 	/*
 	 * The comment above doesn't make sense...
 	 */
+
 	Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->bitmapIdTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
     }
 }
@@ -1073,8 +1064,8 @@ BitmapInit(dispPtr)
  *
  * TkReadBitmapFile --
  *
- *	Loads a bitmap image in X bitmap format into the specified
- *	drawable.  This is equivelent to the XReadBitmapFile in X.
+ *	Loads a bitmap image in X bitmap format into the specified drawable.
+ *	This is equivelent to the XReadBitmapFile in X.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Sets the size, hotspot, and bitmap on success.
@@ -1086,16 +1077,15 @@ BitmapInit(dispPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkReadBitmapFile(display, d, filename, width_return, height_return,
-	bitmap_return, x_hot_return, y_hot_return) 
-    Display* display;
-    Drawable d;
-    CONST char* filename;
-    unsigned int* width_return;
-    unsigned int* height_return;
-    Pixmap* bitmap_return;
-    int* x_hot_return;
-    int* y_hot_return;
+TkReadBitmapFile(
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable d,
+    const char *filename,
+    unsigned int *width_return,
+    unsigned int *height_return,
+    Pixmap *bitmap_return,
+    int *x_hot_return,
+    int *y_hot_return)
 {
     char *data;
 
@@ -1108,23 +1098,22 @@ TkReadBitmapFile(display, d, filename, width_return, height_return,
 
     *bitmap_return = XCreateBitmapFromData(display, d, data, *width_return,
 	    *height_return);
-
     ckfree(data);
     return BitmapSuccess;
-  }
+}
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkDebugBitmap --
  *
- *	This procedure returns debugging information about a bitmap.
+ *	This function returns debugging information about a bitmap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a list with one sublist for each TkBitmap
- *	corresponding to "name".  Each sublist has two elements that
- *	contain the resourceRefCount and objRefCount fields from the
- *	TkBitmap structure.
+ *	corresponding to "name". Each sublist has two elements that contain
+ *	the resourceRefCount and objRefCount fields from the TkBitmap
+ *	structure.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1133,10 +1122,10 @@ TkReadBitmapFile(display, d, filename, width_return, height_return,
  */
 
 Tcl_Obj *
-TkDebugBitmap(tkwin, name)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window in which the bitmap will be
-				 * used (not currently used). */
-    char *name;			/* Name of the desired color. */
+TkDebugBitmap(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The window in which the bitmap will be used
+				 * (not currently used). */
+    char *name)			/* Name of the desired color. */
 {
     TkBitmap *bitmapPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;
@@ -1148,45 +1137,54 @@ TkDebugBitmap(tkwin, name)
     if (hashPtr != NULL) {
 	bitmapPtr = (TkBitmap *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
 	if (bitmapPtr == NULL) {
-	    panic("TkDebugBitmap found empty hash table entry");
+	    Tcl_Panic("TkDebugBitmap found empty hash table entry");
 	}
 	for ( ; (bitmapPtr != NULL); bitmapPtr = bitmapPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
 		    Tcl_NewIntObj(bitmapPtr->resourceRefCount));
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
-		    Tcl_NewIntObj(bitmapPtr->objRefCount)); 
+		    Tcl_NewIntObj(bitmapPtr->objRefCount));
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, objPtr);
 	}
     }
     return resultPtr;
 }
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkGetBitmapPredefTable --
- *      This procedure is used by tkMacBitmap.c to access the thread-
- *      specific predefBitmap table that maps from the names of 
- *      the predefined bitmaps to data associated with those 
- *      bitmaps.  It is required because the table is allocated in 
- *      thread-local storage and is not visible outside this file.
+ *
+ *	This function is used by tkMacBitmap.c to access the thread-specific
+ *	predefBitmap table that maps from the names of the predefined bitmaps
+ *	to data associated with those bitmaps. It is required because the
+ *	table is allocated in thread-local storage and is not visible outside
+ *	this file.
 
  * Results:
- *      Returns a pointer to the predefined bitmap hash table for 
- *      the current thread.
+ *	Returns a pointer to the predefined bitmap hash table for the current
+ *	thread.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 Tcl_HashTable *
-TkGetBitmapPredefTable()
+TkGetBitmapPredefTable(void)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     return &tsdPtr->predefBitmapTable;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkButton.c b/generic/tkButton.c
index 9a261e9..70bba83 100644
--- a/generic/tkButton.c
+++ b/generic/tkButton.c
@@ -1,39 +1,40 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkButton.c --
  *
- *	This module implements a collection of button-like
- *	widgets for the Tk toolkit.  The widgets implemented
- *	include labels, buttons, checkbuttons, and radiobuttons.
+ *	This module implements a collection of button-like widgets for the Tk
+ *	toolkit. The widgets implemented include buttons, checkbuttons,
+ *	radiobuttons, and labels.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
+#include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkButton.h"
 #include "default.h"
 
-typedef struct ThreadSpecificData { 
+typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
     int defaultsInitialized;
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * Class names for buttons, indexed by one of the type values defined
- * in tkButton.h.
+ * Class names for buttons, indexed by one of the type values defined in
+ * tkButton.h.
  */
 
-static CONST char *CONST classNames[] = {"Label", "Button", "Checkbutton", "Radiobutton"};
+static const char *const classNames[] = {"Label", "Button", "Checkbutton", "Radiobutton"};
 
 /*
- * The following table defines the legal values for the -default option.
- * It is used together with the "enum defaultValue" declaration in tkButton.h.
+ * The following table defines the legal values for the -default option. It is
+ * used together with the "enum defaultValue" declaration in tkButton.h.
  */
 
-static CONST char *CONST defaultStrings[] = {
-    "active", "disabled", "normal", (char *) NULL
+static const char *const defaultStrings[] = {
+    "active", "disabled", "normal", NULL
 };
 
 /*
@@ -41,8 +42,8 @@ static CONST char *CONST defaultStrings[] = {
  * It is used together with the "enum state" declaration in tkButton.h.
  */
 
-static CONST char *CONST stateStrings[] = {
-    "active", "disabled", "normal", (char *) NULL
+static const char *const stateStrings[] = {
+    "active", "disabled", "normal", NULL
 };
 
 /*
@@ -50,18 +51,24 @@ static CONST char *CONST stateStrings[] = {
  * It is used with the "enum compound" declaration in tkButton.h
  */
 
-static CONST char *CONST compoundStrings[] = {
-    "bottom", "center", "left", "none", "right", "top", (char *) NULL
+static const char *const compoundStrings[] = {
+    "bottom", "center", "left", "none", "right", "top", NULL
 };
 
+char tkDefButtonHighlightWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH;
+char tkDefButtonPadx[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_BUTTON_PADX;
+char tkDefButtonPady[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_BUTTON_PADY;
 char tkDefButtonBorderWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_BUTTON_BORDER_WIDTH;
+char tkDefLabelHighlightWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_LABEL_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH;
+char tkDefLabelPadx[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_LABCHKRAD_PADX;
+char tkDefLabelPady[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_LABCHKRAD_PADY;
 
 /*
  * Information used for parsing configuration options.  There is a
  * separate table for each of the four widget classes.
  */
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec labelOptionSpecs[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec labelOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground",
 	DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, activeBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
@@ -73,10 +80,10 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec labelOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	DEF_BUTTON_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, normalBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap",
 	DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, bitmap),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
@@ -93,8 +100,8 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec labelOptionSpecs[] = {
 	"DisabledForeground", DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, disabledFg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
 	(ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	DEF_BUTTON_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
@@ -109,7 +116,7 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec labelOptionSpecs[] = {
 	DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightColorPtr),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
-	"HighlightThickness", DEF_LABEL_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH,
+	"HighlightThickness", tkDefLabelHighlightWidth,
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidthPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
@@ -118,10 +125,10 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec labelOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
 	DEF_BUTTON_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, justify), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
-	DEF_LABCHKRAD_PADX, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padXPtr),
+	tkDefLabelPadx, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padXPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, padX), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad",
-	DEF_LABCHKRAD_PADY, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padYPtr),
+	tkDefLabelPady, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padYPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, padY), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
 	DEF_LABCHKRAD_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, relief), 0, 0, 0},
@@ -143,11 +150,10 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec labelOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength",
 	DEF_BUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLengthPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLength), 0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0}
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec buttonOptionSpecs[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec buttonOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground",
 	DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, activeBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
@@ -159,10 +165,10 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec buttonOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	DEF_BUTTON_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, normalBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap",
 	DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, bitmap),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
@@ -185,8 +191,8 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec buttonOptionSpecs[] = {
 	"DisabledForeground", DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, disabledFg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
 	(ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	DEF_BUTTON_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
@@ -201,7 +207,7 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec buttonOptionSpecs[] = {
 	DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightColorPtr),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
-	"HighlightThickness", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH,
+	"HighlightThickness", tkDefButtonHighlightWidth,
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidthPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
@@ -213,10 +219,10 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec buttonOptionSpecs[] = {
 	 DEF_BUTTON_OVER_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, overRelief),
 	 TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
-	DEF_BUTTON_PADX, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padXPtr),
+	tkDefButtonPadx, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padXPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, padX), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad",
-	DEF_BUTTON_PADY, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padYPtr),
+	tkDefButtonPady, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padYPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, padY), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
 	DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, relief),
@@ -245,11 +251,10 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec buttonOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength",
 	DEF_BUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLengthPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLength), 0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec checkbuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec checkbuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground",
 	DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, activeBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
@@ -261,10 +266,10 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec checkbuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	DEF_BUTTON_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, normalBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap",
 	DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, bitmap),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
@@ -284,8 +289,8 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec checkbuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
 	"DisabledForeground", DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, disabledFg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
 	(ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	DEF_BUTTON_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
@@ -300,7 +305,7 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec checkbuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
 	DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightColorPtr),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
-	"HighlightThickness", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH,
+	"HighlightThickness", tkDefButtonHighlightWidth,
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidthPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
@@ -320,10 +325,10 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec checkbuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
 	 DEF_BUTTON_OVER_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, overRelief),
 	 TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
-	DEF_LABCHKRAD_PADX, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padXPtr),
+	tkDefLabelPadx, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padXPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, padX), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad",
-	DEF_LABCHKRAD_PADY, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padYPtr),
+	tkDefLabelPady, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padYPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, padY), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
 	DEF_LABCHKRAD_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, relief), 0, 0, 0},
@@ -344,6 +349,11 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec checkbuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
 	DEF_BUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, textVarNamePtr), -1,
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tristateimage", "tristateImage", "TristateImage",
+	DEF_BUTTON_IMAGE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tristateImagePtr), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tristatevalue", "tristateValue", "TristateValue",
+	DEF_BUTTON_TRISTATE_VALUE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tristateValuePtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline",
 	DEF_BUTTON_UNDERLINE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, underline), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable",
@@ -354,11 +364,10 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec checkbuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength",
 	DEF_BUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLengthPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLength), 0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec radiobuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec radiobuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground",
 	DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, activeBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
@@ -370,10 +379,10 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec radiobuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	DEF_BUTTON_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, normalBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap",
 	DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, bitmap),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
@@ -393,8 +402,8 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec radiobuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
 	"DisabledForeground", DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, disabledFg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
 	(ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	DEF_BUTTON_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
@@ -409,7 +418,7 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec radiobuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
 	DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightColorPtr),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
-	"HighlightThickness", DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH,
+	"HighlightThickness", tkDefButtonHighlightWidth,
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidthPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
@@ -426,10 +435,10 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec radiobuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
 	 DEF_BUTTON_OVER_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, overRelief),
 	 TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
-	DEF_LABCHKRAD_PADX, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padXPtr),
+	tkDefLabelPadx, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padXPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, padX), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad",
-	DEF_LABCHKRAD_PADY, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padYPtr),
+	tkDefLabelPady, Tk_Offset(TkButton, padYPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, padY), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
 	DEF_LABCHKRAD_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, relief), 0, 0, 0},
@@ -450,6 +459,11 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec radiobuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
 	DEF_BUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, textVarNamePtr), -1,
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tristateimage", "tristateImage", "TristateImage",
+	DEF_BUTTON_IMAGE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tristateImagePtr), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tristatevalue", "tristateValue", "TristateValue",
+	DEF_BUTTON_TRISTATE_VALUE, Tk_Offset(TkButton, tristateValuePtr), -1, 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline",
 	DEF_BUTTON_UNDERLINE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkButton, underline), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-value", "value", "Value",
@@ -462,17 +476,15 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec radiobuttonOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength",
 	DEF_BUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLengthPtr),
 	Tk_Offset(TkButton, wrapLength), 0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * The following table maps from one of the type values defined in
- * tkButton.h, such as TYPE_LABEL, to the option template for that
- * class of widgets.
+ * The following table maps from one of the type values defined in tkButton.h,
+ * such as TYPE_LABEL, to the option template for that class of widgets.
  */
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec *CONST optionSpecs[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec *const optionSpecs[] = {
     labelOptionSpecs,
     buttonOptionSpecs,
     checkbuttonOptionSpecs,
@@ -480,18 +492,17 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec *CONST optionSpecs[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * The following tables define the widget commands supported by
- * each of the classes, and map the indexes into the string tables
- * into a single enumerated type used to dispatch the widget command.
+ * The following tables define the widget commands supported by each of the
+ * classes, and map the indexes into the string tables into a single
+ * enumerated type used to dispatch the widget command.
  */
 
-static CONST char *commandNames[][8] = {
-    {"cget", "configure", (char *) NULL},
-    {"cget", "configure", "flash", "invoke", (char *) NULL},
-    {"cget", "configure", "deselect", "flash", "invoke", "select",
-	    "toggle", (char *) NULL},
+static const char *commandNames[][8] = {
+    {"cget", "configure", NULL},
+    {"cget", "configure", "flash", "invoke", NULL},
     {"cget", "configure", "deselect", "flash", "invoke", "select",
-	    (char *) NULL}
+	    "toggle", NULL},
+    {"cget", "configure", "deselect", "flash", "invoke", "select", NULL}
 };
 enum command {
     COMMAND_CGET, COMMAND_CONFIGURE, COMMAND_DESELECT, COMMAND_FLASH,
@@ -507,91 +518,92 @@ static enum command map[][8] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ButtonCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static int		ButtonCreate _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+static void		ButtonCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ButtonCreate(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int type));
-static void		ButtonEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		ButtonImageProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int type);
+static void		ButtonEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		ButtonImageProc(ClientData clientData,
 			    int x, int y, int width, int height,
-			    int imgWidth, int imgHeight));
-static void		ButtonSelectImageProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, int x, int y, int width,
-			    int height, int imgWidth, int imgHeight));
-static char *		ButtonTextVarProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name1,
-			    CONST char *name2, int flags));
-static char *		ButtonVarProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name1,
-			    CONST char *name2, int flags));
-static int		ButtonWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    int imgWidth, int imgHeight);
+static void		ButtonSelectImageProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height,
+			    int imgWidth, int imgHeight);
+static void		ButtonTristateImageProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height,
+			    int imgWidth, int imgHeight);
+static char *		ButtonTextVarProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name1,
+			    const char *name2, int flags);
+static char *		ButtonVarProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name1,
+			    const char *name2, int flags);
+static int		ButtonWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		ConfigureButton _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkButton *butPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		DestroyButton _ANSI_ARGS_((TkButton *butPtr));
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		ConfigureButton(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkButton *butPtr,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		DestroyButton(TkButton *butPtr);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_ButtonCmd, Tk_CheckbuttonCmd, Tk_LabelCmd, Tk_RadiobuttonCmd --
  *
- *	These procedures are invoked to process the "button", "label",
- *	"radiobutton", and "checkbutton" Tcl commands.  See the
- *	user documentation for details on what they do.
+ *	These functions are invoked to process the "button", "label",
+ *	"radiobutton", and "checkbutton" Tcl commands. See the user
+ *	documentation for details on what they do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	See the user documentation.  These procedures are just wrappers;
- *	they call ButtonCreate to do all of the real work.
+ *	See the user documentation. These functions are just wrappers; they
+ *	call ButtonCreate to do all of the real work.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_ButtonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument values. */
+Tk_ButtonObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument values. */
 {
     return ButtonCreate(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_BUTTON);
 }
 
 int
-Tk_CheckbuttonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument values. */
+Tk_CheckbuttonObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument values. */
 {
     return ButtonCreate(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON);
 }
 
 int
-Tk_LabelObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument values. */
+Tk_LabelObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument values. */
 {
     return ButtonCreate(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_LABEL);
 }
 
 int
-Tk_RadiobuttonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument values. */
+Tk_RadiobuttonObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument values. */
 {
     return ButtonCreate(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON);
 }
@@ -601,9 +613,9 @@ Tk_RadiobuttonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ButtonCreate --
  *
- *	This procedure does all the real work of implementing the
- *	"button", "label", "radiobutton", and "checkbutton" Tcl
- *	commands.  See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function does all the real work of implementing the "button",
+ *	"label", "radiobutton", and "checkbutton" Tcl commands. See the user
+ *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -615,23 +627,23 @@ Tk_RadiobuttonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-ButtonCreate(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument values. */
-    int type;			/* Type of button to create: TYPE_LABEL,
+ButtonCreate(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[],	/* Argument values. */
+    int type)			/* Type of button to create: TYPE_LABEL,
 				 * TYPE_BUTTON, TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON, or
 				 * TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON. */
 {
     TkButton *butPtr;
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-	Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (!tsdPtr->defaultsInitialized) {
-	TkpButtonSetDefaults(NULL);
+	TkpButtonSetDefaults();
 	tsdPtr->defaultsInitialized = 1;
     }
 
@@ -645,14 +657,14 @@ ButtonCreate(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type)
      */
 
     tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL);
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has already
-     * been created, the cached pointer will be returned.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, the cached pointer will be returned.
      */
 
     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs[type]);
@@ -681,6 +693,8 @@ ButtonCreate(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type)
     butPtr->image = NULL;
     butPtr->selectImagePtr = NULL;
     butPtr->selectImage = NULL;
+    butPtr->tristateImagePtr = NULL;
+    butPtr->tristateImage = NULL;
     butPtr->state = STATE_NORMAL;
     butPtr->normalBorder = NULL;
     butPtr->activeBorder = NULL;
@@ -725,6 +739,7 @@ ButtonCreate(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type)
     butPtr->selVarNamePtr = NULL;
     butPtr->onValuePtr = NULL;
     butPtr->offValuePtr = NULL;
+    butPtr->tristateValuePtr = NULL;
     butPtr->cursor = None;
     butPtr->takeFocusPtr = NULL;
     butPtr->commandPtr = NULL;
@@ -754,9 +769,9 @@ ButtonCreate(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type)
  *
  * ButtonWidgetCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -768,11 +783,11 @@ ButtonCreate(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type)
  */
 
 static int
-ButtonWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about button widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument values. */
+ButtonWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about button widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument values. */
 {
     TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *) clientData;
     int index;
@@ -791,137 +806,126 @@ ButtonWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) butPtr);
 
     switch (map[butPtr->type][index]) {
-	case COMMAND_CGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) butPtr,
-		    butPtr->optionTable, objv[2], butPtr->tkwin);
+    case COMMAND_CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) butPtr,
+		butPtr->optionTable, objv[2], butPtr->tkwin);
+	if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	    goto error;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+
+    case COMMAND_CONFIGURE:
+	if (objc <= 3) {
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) butPtr,
+		    butPtr->optionTable, (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL,
+		    butPtr->tkwin);
 	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		 goto error;
+		goto error;
 	    } else {
 		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc-2, objv+2);
 	}
+	break;
 
-	case COMMAND_CONFIGURE: {
-	    if (objc <= 3) {
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) butPtr,
-			butPtr->optionTable,
-			(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-			butPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    goto error;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		}
-	    } else {
-		result = ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc-2, objv+2);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case COMMAND_DESELECT:
+	if (objc > 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "deselect");
+	    goto error;
 	}
-
-	case COMMAND_DESELECT: {
-	    if (objc > 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "deselect");
+	if (butPtr->type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) {
+	    if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, butPtr->selVarNamePtr, NULL,
+		    butPtr->offValuePtr, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
+		    == NULL) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (butPtr->type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) {
-		if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, butPtr->selVarNamePtr, NULL,
-			butPtr->offValuePtr, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
-			== NULL) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
-	    } else if (butPtr->flags & SELECTED) {
-		if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp,
-			butPtr->selVarNamePtr, NULL, Tcl_NewObj(),
-			TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
-			== NULL) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
+	} else if (butPtr->flags & SELECTED) {
+	    if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, butPtr->selVarNamePtr, NULL,
+		     Tcl_NewObj(), TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG) == NULL){
+		goto error;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
+	break;
 
-	case COMMAND_FLASH: {
+    case COMMAND_FLASH:
+	if (objc > 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "flash");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (butPtr->state != STATE_DISABLED) {
 	    int i;
 
-	    if (objc > 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "flash");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (butPtr->state != STATE_DISABLED) {
-		for (i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
-		    if (butPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) {
-			butPtr->state = STATE_ACTIVE; 
-			Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(butPtr->tkwin,
-				butPtr->activeBorder);
-		    } else {
-			butPtr->state = STATE_NORMAL; 
-			Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(butPtr->tkwin,
-				butPtr->normalBorder);
-		    }
-		    TkpDisplayButton((ClientData) butPtr);
-    
-		    /*
-		     * Special note: must cancel any existing idle handler
-		     * for TkpDisplayButton;  it's no longer needed, and
-		     * TkpDisplayButton cleared the REDRAW_PENDING flag.
-		     */
-    
-		    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(TkpDisplayButton, (ClientData) butPtr);
-		    XFlush(butPtr->display);
-		    Tcl_Sleep(50);
+	    for (i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
+		if (butPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) {
+		    butPtr->state = STATE_ACTIVE;
+		    Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(butPtr->tkwin,
+			    butPtr->activeBorder);
+		} else {
+		    butPtr->state = STATE_NORMAL;
+		    Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(butPtr->tkwin,
+			    butPtr->normalBorder);
 		}
+		TkpDisplayButton((ClientData) butPtr);
+
+		/*
+		 * Special note: must cancel any existing idle handler for
+		 * TkpDisplayButton; it's no longer needed, and
+		 * TkpDisplayButton cleared the REDRAW_PENDING flag.
+		 */
+
+		Tcl_CancelIdleCall(TkpDisplayButton, (ClientData) butPtr);
+		XFlush(butPtr->display);
+		Tcl_Sleep(50);
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
+	break;
 
-	case COMMAND_INVOKE: {
-	    if (objc > 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "invoke");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (butPtr->state != STATE_DISABLED) {
-		result = TkInvokeButton(butPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case COMMAND_INVOKE:
+	if (objc > 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "invoke");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (butPtr->state != STATE_DISABLED) {
+	    result = TkInvokeButton(butPtr);
 	}
+	break;
 
-	case COMMAND_SELECT: {
-	    if (objc > 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "select");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, butPtr->selVarNamePtr, NULL,
-		    butPtr->onValuePtr, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
-		    == NULL) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case COMMAND_SELECT:
+	if (objc > 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "select");
+	    goto error;
 	}
+	if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, butPtr->selVarNamePtr, NULL,
+		butPtr->onValuePtr, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
+		== NULL) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	break;
 
-	case COMMAND_TOGGLE: {
-	    if (objc > 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "toggle");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, butPtr->selVarNamePtr, NULL,
-		    (butPtr->flags & SELECTED) ? butPtr->offValuePtr
-		    : butPtr->onValuePtr,
-		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
-		    == NULL) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case COMMAND_TOGGLE:
+	if (objc > 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "toggle");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, butPtr->selVarNamePtr, NULL,
+		(butPtr->flags & SELECTED) ? butPtr->offValuePtr
+		: butPtr->onValuePtr, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
+		== NULL) {
+	    goto error;
 	}
+	break;
     }
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) butPtr);
     return result;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) butPtr);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -931,8 +935,8 @@ ButtonWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * DestroyButton --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by ButtonEventProc to free all the
- *	resources of a button and clean up its state.
+ *	This function is invoked by ButtonEventProc to free all the resources
+ *	of a button and clean up its state.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -944,8 +948,8 @@ ButtonWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyButton(butPtr)
-    TkButton *butPtr;		/* Info about button widget. */
+DestroyButton(
+    TkButton *butPtr)		/* Info about button widget. */
 {
     butPtr->flags |= BUTTON_DELETED;
     TkpDestroyButton(butPtr);
@@ -955,9 +959,8 @@ DestroyButton(butPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then
-     * let Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related
-     * stuff.
+     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let
+     * Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
      */
 
     Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(butPtr->interp, butPtr->widgetCmd);
@@ -972,6 +975,9 @@ DestroyButton(butPtr)
     if (butPtr->selectImage != NULL) {
 	Tk_FreeImage(butPtr->selectImage);
     }
+    if (butPtr->tristateImage != NULL) {
+	Tk_FreeImage(butPtr->tristateImage);
+    }
     if (butPtr->normalTextGC != None) {
 	Tk_FreeGC(butPtr->display, butPtr->normalTextGC);
     }
@@ -1009,28 +1015,28 @@ DestroyButton(butPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureButton --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an objc/objv list to set
+ *	This function is called to process an objc/objv list to set
  *	configuration options for a button widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then an error message is left in interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then an error message is left in interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font,
- *	etc. get set for butPtr;  old resources get freed, if there
- *	were any.  The button is redisplayed.
+ *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font, etc. get
+ *	set for butPtr; old resources get freed, if there were any. The button
+ *	is redisplayed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    register TkButton *butPtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or may
+ConfigureButton(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    register TkButton *butPtr,	/* Information about widget;  may or may
 				 * not already have values for some fields. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument values. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument values. */
 {
     Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
     Tcl_Obj *errorResult = NULL;
@@ -1042,21 +1048,21 @@ ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc, objv)
      */
 
     if (butPtr->textVarNamePtr != NULL) {
-	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, Tcl_GetString(butPtr->textVarNamePtr), 
+	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, Tcl_GetString(butPtr->textVarNamePtr),
 		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		ButtonTextVarProc, (ClientData) butPtr);
     }
     if (butPtr->selVarNamePtr != NULL) {
-	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, Tcl_GetString(butPtr->selVarNamePtr), 
+	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, Tcl_GetString(butPtr->selVarNamePtr),
 		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		ButtonVarProc, (ClientData) butPtr);
     }
 
     /*
-     * The following loop is potentially executed twice.  During the
-     * first pass configuration options get set to their new values.
-     * If there is an error in this pass, we execute a second pass
-     * to restore all the options to their previous values.
+     * The following loop is potentially executed twice. During the first pass
+     * configuration options get set to their new values. If there is an error
+     * in this pass, we execute a second pass to restore all the options to
+     * their previous values.
      */
 
     for (error = 0; error <= 1; error++) {
@@ -1067,7 +1073,7 @@ ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc, objv)
 
 	    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) butPtr,
 		    butPtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
-		    butPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, (int *) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+		    butPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 		continue;
 	    }
 	} else {
@@ -1089,8 +1095,8 @@ ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc, objv)
 
 	/*
 	 * A few options need special processing, such as setting the
-	 * background from a 3-D border, or filling in complicated
-	 * defaults that couldn't be specified to Tk_SetOptions.
+	 * background from a 3-D border, or filling in complicated defaults
+	 * that couldn't be specified to Tk_SetOptions.
 	 */
 
 	if ((butPtr->state == STATE_ACTIVE)
@@ -1114,28 +1120,43 @@ ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc, objv)
 
 	if (butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) {
 	    Tcl_Obj *valuePtr, *namePtr;
-    
+
 	    if (butPtr->selVarNamePtr == NULL) {
 		butPtr->selVarNamePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
 			Tk_Name(butPtr->tkwin), -1);
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(butPtr->selVarNamePtr);
 	    }
 	    namePtr = butPtr->selVarNamePtr;
-    
+
 	    /*
 	     * Select the button if the associated variable has the
-	     * appropriate value, initialize the variable if it doesn't
-	     * exist, then set a trace on the variable to monitor future
-	     * changes to its value.
+	     * appropriate value, initialize the variable if it doesn't exist,
+	     * then set a trace on the variable to monitor future changes to
+	     * its value.
 	     */
-    
+
 	    valuePtr = Tcl_ObjGetVar2(interp, namePtr, NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
 	    butPtr->flags &= ~SELECTED;
+            butPtr->flags &= ~TRISTATED;
 	    if (valuePtr != NULL) {
-		if (strcmp(Tcl_GetString(valuePtr),
-			Tcl_GetString(butPtr->onValuePtr)) == 0) {
+		const char *value = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
+		if (strcmp(value, Tcl_GetString(butPtr->onValuePtr)) == 0) {
 		    butPtr->flags |= SELECTED;
-		}
+		} else if (strcmp(value,
+                        Tcl_GetString(butPtr->tristateValuePtr)) == 0) {
+		    butPtr->flags |= TRISTATED;
+
+		    /*
+		     * For checkbuttons if the tristate value is the
+		     * same as the offvalue then prefer off to tristate
+		     */
+
+		    if (butPtr->offValuePtr
+			&& strcmp(value,
+			    Tcl_GetString(butPtr->offValuePtr)) == 0) {
+			butPtr->flags &= ~TRISTATED;
+		    }
+                }
 	    } else {
 		if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, namePtr, NULL,
 			(butPtr->type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON)
@@ -1146,8 +1167,8 @@ ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc, objv)
 		}
 
 		/*
-		 * If a radiobutton has the empty string as value
-		 * it should be selected.
+		 * If a radiobutton has the empty string as value it should be
+		 * selected.
 		 */
 
  		if ((butPtr->type == TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON) &&
@@ -1158,11 +1179,11 @@ ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Get the images for the widget, if there are any.  Allocate the
-	 * new images before freeing the old ones, so that the reference
-	 * counts don't go to zero and cause image data to be discarded.
+	 * Get the images for the widget, if there are any. Allocate the new
+	 * images before freeing the old ones, so that the reference counts
+	 * don't go to zero and cause image data to be discarded.
 	 */
-    
+
 	if (butPtr->imagePtr != NULL) {
 	    image = Tk_GetImage(butPtr->interp, butPtr->tkwin,
 		    Tcl_GetString(butPtr->imagePtr), ButtonImageProc,
@@ -1191,6 +1212,20 @@ ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc, objv)
 	    Tk_FreeImage(butPtr->selectImage);
 	}
 	butPtr->selectImage = image;
+	if (butPtr->tristateImagePtr != NULL) {
+	    image = Tk_GetImage(butPtr->interp, butPtr->tkwin,
+		    Tcl_GetString(butPtr->tristateImagePtr),
+		    ButtonTristateImageProc, (ClientData) butPtr);
+	    if (image == NULL) {
+		continue;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    image = NULL;
+	}
+	if (butPtr->tristateImage != NULL) {
+	    Tk_FreeImage(butPtr->tristateImage);
+	}
+	butPtr->tristateImage = image;
 
 	haveImage = 0;
 	if (butPtr->imagePtr != NULL || butPtr->bitmap != None) {
@@ -1203,7 +1238,7 @@ ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc, objv)
 	     * on the variable's value, create the variable if it doesn't
 	     * exist, and fetch its current value.
 	     */
-    
+
 	    Tcl_Obj *valuePtr, *namePtr;
 
 	    namePtr = butPtr->textVarNamePtr;
@@ -1222,22 +1257,21 @@ ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc, objv)
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(butPtr->textPtr);
 	    }
 	}
-    
+
 	if ((butPtr->bitmap != None) || (butPtr->imagePtr != NULL)) {
 	    /*
-	     * The button must display the contents of an image or
-	     * bitmap.
+	     * The button must display the contents of an image or bitmap.
 	     */
 
 	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->widthPtr,
 		    &butPtr->width) != TCL_OK) {
-		widthError:
+	    widthError:
 		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (processing -width option)");
 		continue;
 	    }
 	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->heightPtr,
 		    &butPtr->height) != TCL_OK) {
-		heightError:
+	    heightError:
 		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (processing -height option)");
 		continue;
 	    }
@@ -1275,7 +1309,7 @@ ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc, objv)
 		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		ButtonVarProc, (ClientData) butPtr);
     }
-    
+
     TkButtonWorldChanged((ClientData) butPtr);
     if (error) {
 	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
@@ -1291,9 +1325,9 @@ ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkButtonWorldChanged --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way and the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts
- *	and determine its new geometry.
+ *      This function is called when the world has changed in some way and the
+ *      widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine its
+ *      new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
  *      None.
@@ -1303,10 +1337,10 @@ ConfigureButton(interp, butPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 void
-TkButtonWorldChanged(instanceData)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about widget. */
+TkButtonWorldChanged(
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     XGCValues gcValues;
     GC newGC;
@@ -1322,7 +1356,7 @@ TkButtonWorldChanged(instanceData)
     gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(butPtr->tkfont);
     gcValues.foreground = butPtr->normalFg->pixel;
     gcValues.background = Tk_3DBorderColor(butPtr->normalBorder)->pixel;
-    
+
     /*
      * Note: GraphicsExpose events are disabled in normalTextGC because it's
      * used to copy stuff from an off-screen pixmap onto the screen (we know
@@ -1369,8 +1403,8 @@ TkButtonWorldChanged(instanceData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Allocate the disabled graphics context, for drawing text in
-     * its disabled state.
+     * Allocate the disabled graphics context, for drawing text in its
+     * disabled state.
      */
 
     mask = GCForeground | GCBackground | GCFont;
@@ -1406,31 +1440,31 @@ TkButtonWorldChanged(instanceData)
  *
  * ButtonEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on buttons.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	buttons.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up. When
+ *	it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ButtonEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+ButtonEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *) clientData;
     if ((eventPtr->type == Expose) && (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0)) {
 	goto redraw;
     } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
 	/*
-	 * Must redraw after size changes, since layout could have changed
-	 * and borders will need to be redrawn.
+	 * Must redraw after size changes, since layout could have changed and
+	 * borders will need to be redrawn.
 	 */
 
 	goto redraw;
@@ -1453,7 +1487,7 @@ ButtonEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
     }
     return;
 
-    redraw:
+  redraw:
     if ((butPtr->tkwin != NULL) && !(butPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TkpDisplayButton, (ClientData) butPtr);
 	butPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
@@ -1465,9 +1499,9 @@ ButtonEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * ButtonCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1479,16 +1513,16 @@ ButtonEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ButtonCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+ButtonCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *) clientData;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted or because the command
-     * was deleted, and then this procedure destroys the widget.  The
-     * BUTTON_DELETED flag distinguishes these cases.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted or because the command was deleted,
+     * and then this function destroys the widget. The BUTTON_DELETED flag
+     * distinguishes these cases.
      */
 
     if (!(butPtr->flags & BUTTON_DELETED)) {
@@ -1501,14 +1535,14 @@ ButtonCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * TkInvokeButton --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to carry out the actions associated
- *	with a button, such as invoking a Tcl command or setting a
- *	variable.  This procedure is invoked, for example, when the
- *	button is invoked via the mouse.
+ *	This function is called to carry out the actions associated with a
+ *	button, such as invoking a Tcl command or setting a variable. This
+ *	function is invoked, for example, when the button is invoked via the
+ *	mouse.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  Information is also left in
- *	the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. Information is also left in the interp's
+ *	result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Depends on the button and its associated command.
@@ -1517,8 +1551,8 @@ ButtonCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  */
 
 int
-TkInvokeButton(butPtr)
-    TkButton *butPtr;			/* Information about button. */
+TkInvokeButton(
+    TkButton *butPtr)		/* Information about button. */
 {
     Tcl_Obj *namePtr = butPtr->selVarNamePtr;
 
@@ -1555,10 +1589,9 @@ TkInvokeButton(butPtr)
  *
  * ButtonVarProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when someone changes the
- *	state variable associated with a radio button.  Depending
- *	on the new value of the button's variable, the button
- *	may be selected or deselected.
+ *	This function is invoked when someone changes the state variable
+ *	associated with a radio button. Depending on the new value of the
+ *	button's variable, the button may be selected or deselected.
  *
  * Results:
  *	NULL is always returned.
@@ -1571,12 +1604,12 @@ TkInvokeButton(butPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static char *
-ButtonVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about button. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
-    CONST char *name1;		/* Name of variable. */
-    CONST char *name2;		/* Second part of variable name. */
-    int flags;			/* Information about what happened. */
+ButtonVarProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about button. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
+    const char *name1,		/* Name of variable. */
+    const char *name2,		/* Second part of variable name. */
+    int flags)			/* Information about what happened. */
 {
     register TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *) clientData;
     char *name, *value;
@@ -1585,12 +1618,13 @@ ButtonVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
     name = Tcl_GetString(butPtr->selVarNamePtr);
 
     /*
-     * If the variable is being unset, then just re-establish the
-     * trace unless the whole interpreter is going away.
+     * If the variable is being unset, then just re-establish the trace unless
+     * the whole interpreter is going away.
      */
 
     if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
 	butPtr->flags &= ~SELECTED;
+        butPtr->flags &= ~TRISTATED;
 	if ((flags & TCL_TRACE_DESTROYED) && !(flags & TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED)) {
 	    Tcl_TraceVar(interp, name,
 		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
@@ -1600,34 +1634,47 @@ ButtonVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Use the value of the variable to update the selected status of
-     * the button.
+     * Use the value of the variable to update the selected status of the
+     * button.
      */
 
     valuePtr = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(interp, name, NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
     if (valuePtr == NULL) {
-	value = "";
+	value = Tcl_GetString(butPtr->tristateValuePtr);
     } else {
 	value = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
     }
     if (strcmp(value, Tcl_GetString(butPtr->onValuePtr)) == 0) {
 	if (butPtr->flags & SELECTED) {
-	    return (char *) NULL;
+	    return NULL;
 	}
 	butPtr->flags |= SELECTED;
-    } else if (butPtr->flags & SELECTED) {
-	butPtr->flags &= ~SELECTED;
+        butPtr->flags &= ~TRISTATED;
+    } else if (butPtr->offValuePtr 
+	&& strcmp(value, Tcl_GetString(butPtr->offValuePtr)) == 0) {
+	if (!(butPtr->flags & (SELECTED | TRISTATED))) {
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+	butPtr->flags &= ~(SELECTED | TRISTATED);
+    } else if (strcmp(value, Tcl_GetString(butPtr->tristateValuePtr)) == 0) {
+        if (butPtr->flags & TRISTATED) {
+            return NULL;
+        }
+        butPtr->flags |= TRISTATED;
+        butPtr->flags &= ~SELECTED;
+    } else if (butPtr->flags & (SELECTED | TRISTATED)) {
+	butPtr->flags &= ~(SELECTED | TRISTATED);
     } else {
-	return (char *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
 
-    redisplay:
+  redisplay:
     if ((butPtr->tkwin != NULL) && Tk_IsMapped(butPtr->tkwin)
 	    && !(butPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TkpDisplayButton, (ClientData) butPtr);
 	butPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
     }
-    return (char *) NULL;
+    return NULL;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1635,52 +1682,51 @@ ButtonVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
  *
  * ButtonTextVarProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when someone changes the variable
- *	whose contents are to be displayed in a button.
+ *	This function is invoked when someone changes the variable whose
+ *	contents are to be displayed in a button.
  *
  * Results:
  *	NULL is always returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The text displayed in the button will change to match the
- *	variable.
+ *	The text displayed in the button will change to match the variable.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static char *
-ButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about button. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
-    CONST char *name1;		/* Not used. */
-    CONST char *name2;		/* Not used. */
-    int flags;			/* Information about what happened. */
+ButtonTextVarProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about button. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
+    const char *name1,		/* Not used. */
+    const char *name2,		/* Not used. */
+    int flags)			/* Information about what happened. */
 {
     TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *) clientData;
     char *name;
     Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;
 
     if (butPtr->flags & BUTTON_DELETED) {
-	return (char *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
 
     name = Tcl_GetString(butPtr->textVarNamePtr);
 
     /*
-     * If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless
-     * the whole interpreter is going away.
+     * If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless the whole
+     * interpreter is going away.
      */
 
     if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
 	if ((flags & TCL_TRACE_DESTROYED) && !(flags & TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED)) {
-	    Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, name, NULL, butPtr->textPtr, 
+	    Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, name, NULL, butPtr->textPtr,
 		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
 	    Tcl_TraceVar(interp, name,
 		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		    ButtonTextVarProc, clientData);
 	}
-	return (char *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
 
     valuePtr = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(interp, name, NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
@@ -1697,7 +1743,7 @@ ButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TkpDisplayButton, (ClientData) butPtr);
 	butPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
     }
-    return (char *) NULL;
+    return NULL;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1705,9 +1751,9 @@ ButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
  *
  * ButtonImageProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the image code whenever the manager
- *	for an image does something that affects the size or contents
- *	of an image displayed in a button.
+ *	This function is invoked by the image code whenever the manager for an
+ *	image does something that affects the size or contents of an image
+ *	displayed in a button.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1719,13 +1765,13 @@ ButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
  */
 
 static void
-ButtonImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth, imgHeight)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to widget record. */
-    int x, y;				/* Upper left pixel (within image)
-					 * that must be redisplayed. */
-    int width, height;			/* Dimensions of area to redisplay
-					 * (may be <= 0). */
-    int imgWidth, imgHeight;		/* New dimensions of image. */
+ButtonImageProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to widget record. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
+				 * be redisplayed. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of area to redisplay (might be
+				 * <= 0). */
+    int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
 {
     register TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *) clientData;
 
@@ -1743,9 +1789,9 @@ ButtonImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth, imgHeight)
  *
  * ButtonSelectImageProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the image code whenever the manager
- *	for an image does something that affects the size or contents
- *	of the image displayed in a button when it is selected.
+ *	This function is invoked by the image code whenever the manager for an
+ *	image does something that affects the size or contents of the image
+ *	displayed in a button when it is selected.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1757,18 +1803,18 @@ ButtonImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth, imgHeight)
  */
 
 static void
-ButtonSelectImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth, imgHeight)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to widget record. */
-    int x, y;				/* Upper left pixel (within image)
-					 * that must be redisplayed. */
-    int width, height;			/* Dimensions of area to redisplay
-					 * (may be <= 0). */
-    int imgWidth, imgHeight;		/* New dimensions of image. */
+ButtonSelectImageProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to widget record. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
+				 * be redisplayed. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of area to redisplay (might be
+				 * <= 0). */
+    int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
 {
     register TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *) clientData;
 
     /*
-     * Don't recompute geometry:  it's controlled by the primary image.
+     * Don't recompute geometry: it's controlled by the primary image.
      */
 
     if ((butPtr->flags & SELECTED) && (butPtr->tkwin != NULL)
@@ -1778,3 +1824,52 @@ ButtonSelectImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth, imgHeight)
 	butPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ButtonTristateImageProc --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked by the image code whenever the manager for an
+ *	image does something that affects the size or contents of the image
+ *	displayed in a button when it is selected.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May arrange for the button to get redisplayed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+ButtonTristateImageProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to widget record. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
+				 * be redisplayed. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of area to redisplay (might be
+				 * <= 0). */
+    int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
+{
+    register TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *) clientData;
+
+    /*
+     * Don't recompute geometry: it's controlled by the primary image.
+     */
+
+    if ((butPtr->flags & TRISTATED) && (butPtr->tkwin != NULL)
+	    && Tk_IsMapped(butPtr->tkwin)
+	    && !(butPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TkpDisplayButton, (ClientData) butPtr);
+	butPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkButton.h b/generic/tkButton.h
index 9547c9a..09aaee2 100644
--- a/generic/tkButton.h
+++ b/generic/tkButton.h
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
 /*
  * tkButton.h --
  *
- *	Declarations of types and functions used to implement
- *	button-like widgets.
+ *	Declarations of types and functions used to implement button-like
+ *	widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1998 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKBUTTON
@@ -17,11 +17,6 @@
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #endif
 
-#ifdef BUILD_tk
-# undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
-# define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
-#endif
-
 /*
  * Legal values for the "compound" field of TkButton records.
  */
@@ -48,20 +43,20 @@ enum defaultState {
 };
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each widget managed by
+ * this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the button.  NULL
-				 * means that the window has been destroyed. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget.  Needed to
-				 * free up resources after tkwin is gone. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the button. NULL means
+				 * that the window has been destroyed. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget. Needed to free
+				 * up resources after tkwin is gone. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with button. */
     Tcl_Command widgetCmd;	/* Token for button's widget command. */
     int type;			/* Type of widget, such as TYPE_LABEL:
 				 * restricts operations that may be performed
-				 * on widget.  See below for legal values. */
+				 * on widget. See below for legal values. */
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Table that defines configuration options
 				 * available for this widget. */
 
@@ -71,96 +66,102 @@ typedef struct {
 
     Tcl_Obj *textPtr;		/* Value of -text option: specifies text to
 				 * display in button. */
-    int underline;		/* Value of -underline option: specifies
-				 * index of character to underline.  < 0 means
-				 * don't underline anything. */
+    int underline;		/* Value of -underline option: specifies index
+				 * of character to underline. < 0 means don't
+				 * underline anything. */
     Tcl_Obj *textVarNamePtr;	/* Value of -textvariable option: specifies
-				 * name of variable or NULL.  If non-NULL,
+				 * name of variable or NULL. If non-NULL,
 				 * button displays the contents of this
 				 * variable. */
-    Pixmap bitmap;		/* Value of -bitmap option.  If not None,
+    Pixmap bitmap;		/* Value of -bitmap option. If not None,
 				 * specifies bitmap to display and text and
 				 * textVar are ignored. */
-    Tcl_Obj *imagePtr;		/* Value of -image option: specifies image
-				 * to display in window, or NULL if none.
-				 * If non-NULL, bitmap, text, and textVarName
-				 * are ignored.*/
+    Tcl_Obj *imagePtr;		/* Value of -image option: specifies image to
+				 * display in window, or NULL if none. If
+				 * non-NULL, bitmap, text, and textVarName are
+				 * ignored.*/
     Tk_Image image;		/* Derived from imagePtr by calling
-				 * Tk_GetImage, or NULL if imagePtr is NULL. */
+				 * Tk_GetImage, or NULL if imagePtr is
+				 * NULL. */
     Tcl_Obj *selectImagePtr;	/* Value of -selectimage option: specifies
 				 * image to display in window when selected,
-				 * or NULL if none.  Ignored if imagePtr is
+				 * or NULL if none. Ignored if imagePtr is
 				 * NULL. */
     Tk_Image selectImage;	/* Derived from selectImagePtr by calling
-				 * Tk_GetImage, or NULL if selectImagePtr
-				 * is NULL. */
+				 * Tk_GetImage, or NULL if selectImagePtr is
+				 * NULL. */
+    Tcl_Obj *tristateImagePtr;	/* Value of -tristateimage option: specifies
+				 * image to display in window when selected,
+				 * or NULL if none. Ignored if imagePtr is
+				 * NULL. */
+    Tk_Image tristateImage;	/* Derived from tristateImagePtr by calling
+				 * Tk_GetImage, or NULL if tristateImagePtr is
+				 * NULL. */
 
     /*
      * Information used when displaying widget:
      */
 
-    enum state state;		/* Value of -state option: specifies
-				 * state of button for display purposes.*/
+    enum state state;		/* Value of -state option: specifies state of
+				 * button for display purposes.*/
     Tk_3DBorder normalBorder;	/* Value of -background option: specifies
 				 * color for background (and border) when
 				 * window isn't active. */
-    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;	/* Value of -activebackground option:
-				 * this is the color used to draw 3-D border
-				 * and background when widget is active. */
+    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;	/* Value of -activebackground option: this is
+				 * the color used to draw 3-D border and
+				 * background when widget is active. */
     Tcl_Obj *borderWidthPtr;	/* Value of -borderWidth option: specifies
 				 * width of border in pixels. */
     int borderWidth;		/* Integer value corresponding to
-				 * borderWidthPtr.  Always >= 0. */
+				 * borderWidthPtr. Always >= 0. */
     int relief;			/* Value of -relief option: specifies 3-d
 				 * effect for border, such as
 				 * TK_RELIEF_RAISED. */
-    int overRelief;		/* Value of -overrelief option: specifies a 3-d
-				 * effect for the border, such as
+    int overRelief;		/* Value of -overrelief option: specifies a
+				 * 3-d effect for the border, such as
 				 * TK_RELIEF_RAISED, to be used when the mouse
 				 * is over the button. */
     int offRelief;		/* Value of -offrelief option: specifies a 3-d
 				 * effect for the border, such as
 				 * TK_RELIEF_RAISED, to be used when a
-				 * checkbutton or radiobutton without 
-				 * indicator is off */
+				 * checkbutton or radiobutton without
+				 * indicator is off. */
     Tcl_Obj *highlightWidthPtr;	/* Value of -highlightthickness option:
 				 * specifies width in pixels of highlight to
 				 * draw around widget when it has the focus.
 				 * <= 0 means don't draw a highlight. */
     int highlightWidth;		/* Integer value corresponding to
-				 * highlightWidthPtr.  Always >= 0. */
+				 * highlightWidthPtr. Always >= 0. */
     Tk_3DBorder highlightBorder;/* Value of -highlightbackground option:
 				 * specifies background with which to draw 3-D
 				 * default ring and focus highlight area when
 				 * highlight is off. */
-    XColor *highlightColorPtr;	/* Value of -highlightcolor option:
-				 * specifies color for drawing traversal
-				 * highlight. */
+    XColor *highlightColorPtr;	/* Value of -highlightcolor option: specifies
+				 * color for drawing traversal highlight. */
     int inset;			/* Total width of all borders, including
 				 * traversal highlight and 3-D border.
-				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must
-				 * be offset from outside edges to leave
-				 * room for borders. */
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Value of -font option: specifies font
-				 * to use for display text. */
+				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must be
+				 * offset from outside edges to leave room for
+				 * borders. */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Value of -font option: specifies font to
+				 * use for display text. */
     XColor *normalFg;		/* Value of -font option: specifies foreground
 				 * color in normal mode. */
     XColor *activeFg;		/* Value of -activeforeground option:
-				 * foreground color in active mode.  NULL
-				 * means use -foreground instead. */
+				 * foreground color in active mode. NULL means
+				 * use -foreground instead. */
     XColor *disabledFg;		/* Value of -disabledforeground option:
-				 * foreground color when disabled.  NULL
-				 * means use normalFg with a 50% stipple
-				 * instead. */
-    GC normalTextGC;		/* GC for drawing text in normal mode.  Also
+				 * foreground color when disabled. NULL means
+				 * use normalFg with a 50% stipple instead. */
+    GC normalTextGC;		/* GC for drawing text in normal mode. Also
 				 * used to copy from off-screen pixmap onto
 				 * screen. */
     GC activeTextGC;		/* GC for drawing text in active mode (NULL
 				 * means use normalTextGC). */
     GC disabledGC;		/* Used to produce disabled effect for text
 				 * and check/radio marks. */
-    GC stippleGC;		/* Used to produce disabled stipple effect
-				 * for images when disabled. */
+    GC stippleGC;		/* Used to produce disabled stipple effect for
+				 * images when disabled. */
     Pixmap gray;		/* Pixmap for displaying disabled text if
 				 * disabledFg is NULL. */
     GC copyGC;			/* Used for copying information from an
@@ -169,33 +170,34 @@ typedef struct {
     int width;			/* Integer value corresponding to widthPtr. */
     Tcl_Obj *heightPtr;		/* Value of -height option. */
     int height;			/* Integer value corresponding to heightPtr. */
-    Tcl_Obj *wrapLengthPtr;	/* Value of -wraplength option: specifies
-				 * line length (in pixels) at which to wrap
-				 * onto next line.  <= 0 means don't wrap
-				 * except at newlines. */
+    Tcl_Obj *wrapLengthPtr;	/* Value of -wraplength option: specifies line
+				 * length (in pixels) at which to wrap onto
+				 * next line. <= 0 means don't wrap except at
+				 * newlines. */
     int wrapLength;		/* Integer value corresponding to
 				 * wrapLengthPtr. */
     Tcl_Obj *padXPtr;		/* Value of -padx option: specifies how many
 				 * pixels of extra space to leave on left and
-				 * right of text.  Ignored for bitmaps and
+				 * right of text. Ignored for bitmaps and
 				 * images. */
     int padX;			/* Integer value corresponding to padXPtr. */
     Tcl_Obj *padYPtr;		/* Value of -padx option: specifies how many
 				 * pixels of extra space to leave above and
-				 * below text.  Ignored for bitmaps and
+				 * below text. Ignored for bitmaps and
 				 * images. */
     int padY;			/* Integer value corresponding to padYPtr. */
     Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Value of -anchor option: specifies where
 				 * text/bitmap should be displayed inside
 				 * button region. */
-    Tk_Justify justify;		/* Value of -justify option: specifies how
-				 * to align lines of multi-line text. */
-    int indicatorOn;		/* Value of -indicatoron option:  1 means
-				 * draw indicator in checkbuttons and
-				 * radiobuttons, 0 means don't draw it. */
+    Tk_Justify justify;		/* Value of -justify option: specifies how to
+				 * align lines of multi-line text. */
+    int indicatorOn;		/* Value of -indicatoron option: 1 means draw
+				 * indicator in checkbuttons and radiobuttons,
+				 * 0 means don't draw it. */
     Tk_3DBorder selectBorder;	/* Value of -selectcolor option: specifies
 				 * color for drawing indicator background, or
-				 * perhaps widget background, when selected. */
+				 * perhaps widget background, when
+				 * selected. */
     int textWidth;		/* Width needed to display text as requested,
 				 * in pixels. */
     int textHeight;		/* Height needed to display text as requested,
@@ -206,26 +208,28 @@ typedef struct {
     int indicatorDiameter;	/* Diameter of indicator, in pixels. */
     enum defaultState defaultState;
 				/* Value of -default option, such as
-				 * DEFAULT_NORMAL: specifies state
-				 * of default ring for buttons (normal,
-				 * active, or disabled).  NULL for other
-				 * classes. */
+				 * DEFAULT_NORMAL: specifies state of default
+				 * ring for buttons (normal, active, or
+				 * disabled). NULL for other classes. */
 
     /*
-     * For check and radio buttons, the fields below are used
-     * to manage the variable indicating the button's state.
+     * For check and radio buttons, the fields below are used to manage the
+     * variable indicating the button's state.
      */
 
     Tcl_Obj *selVarNamePtr;	/* Value of -variable option: specifies name
-				 * of variable used to control selected
-				 * state of button. */
+				 * of variable used to control selected state
+				 * of button. */
     Tcl_Obj *onValuePtr;	/* Value of -offvalue option: specifies value
 				 * to store in variable when this button is
 				 * selected. */
     Tcl_Obj *offValuePtr;	/* Value of -offvalue option: specifies value
-				 * to store in variable when this button
-				 * isn't selected.  Used only by
-				 * checkbuttons. */
+				 * to store in variable when this button isn't
+				 * selected. Used only by checkbuttons. */
+    Tcl_Obj *tristateValuePtr;	/* Value of -tristatevalue option: specifies
+				 * value to display Tristate or Multivalue
+				 * mode when variable matches this value.
+				 * Used by check- buttons. */
 
     /*
      * Miscellaneous information:
@@ -233,31 +237,30 @@ typedef struct {
 
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Value of -cursor option: if not None,
 				 * specifies current cursor for window. */
-    Tcl_Obj *takeFocusPtr;	/* Value of -takefocus option;  not used in
-				 * the C code, but used by keyboard traversal
+    Tcl_Obj *takeFocusPtr;	/* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
+				 * C code, but used by keyboard traversal
 				 * scripts. */
-    Tcl_Obj *commandPtr;	/* Value of -command option: specifies script 
-				 * to execute when button is invoked.  If
-				 * widget is label or has no command, this
-				 * is NULL. */
-    int compound;		/* Value of -compound option; specifies whether
-				 * the button should show both an image and
-				 * text, and, if so, how. */
-    int repeatDelay;		/* Value of -repeatdelay option; specifies
-				 * the number of ms after which the button will
+    Tcl_Obj *commandPtr;	/* Value of -command option: specifies script
+				 * to execute when button is invoked. If
+				 * widget is label or has no command, this is
+				 * NULL. */
+    int compound;		/* Value of -compound option; specifies
+				 * whether the button should show both an
+				 * image and text, and, if so, how. */
+    int repeatDelay;		/* Value of -repeatdelay option; specifies the
+				 * number of ms after which the button will
 				 * start to auto-repeat its command. */
     int repeatInterval;		/* Value of -repeatinterval option; specifies
 				 * the number of ms between auto-repeat
 				 * invocataions of the button command. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flags;  see below for
+    int flags;			/* Various flags; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
 } TkButton;
 
 /*
- * Possible "type" values for buttons.  These are the kinds of
- * widgets supported by this file.  The ordering of the type
- * numbers is significant:  greater means more features and is
- * used in the code.
+ * Possible "type" values for buttons. These are the kinds of widgets
+ * supported by this file. The ordering of the type numbers is significant:
+ * greater means more features and is used in the code.
  */
 
 #define TYPE_LABEL		0
@@ -268,53 +271,52 @@ typedef struct {
 /*
  * Flag bits for buttons:
  *
- * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler
- *				has already been queued to redraw
- *				this window.
- * SELECTED:			Non-zero means this button is selected,
- *				so special highlight should be drawn.
- * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this button currently
- *				has the input focus.
+ * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler has
+ *				already been queued to redraw this window.
+ * SELECTED:			Non-zero means this button is selected, so
+ *				special highlight should be drawn.
+ * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this button currently has the
+ *				input focus.
  * BUTTON_DELETED:		Non-zero needs that this button has been
- *				deleted, or is in the process of being
- *				deleted.
+ *				deleted, or is in the process of being deleted
  */
 
 #define REDRAW_PENDING		(1 << 0)
 #define SELECTED		(1 << 1)
 #define GOT_FOCUS		(1 << 2)
 #define BUTTON_DELETED		(1 << 3)
+#define TRISTATED		(1 << 4)
+
 /*
  * Declaration of button class functions structure
  * and button/label defaults, for use in optionSpecs.
  */
 
-extern Tk_ClassProcs tkpButtonProcs;
-extern char tkDefButtonBorderWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+MODULE_SCOPE Tk_ClassProcs tkpButtonProcs;
+MODULE_SCOPE char tkDefButtonHighlightWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+MODULE_SCOPE char tkDefButtonPadx[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+MODULE_SCOPE char tkDefButtonPady[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+MODULE_SCOPE char tkDefButtonBorderWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+MODULE_SCOPE char tkDefLabelHighlightWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+MODULE_SCOPE char tkDefLabelPadx[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+MODULE_SCOPE char tkDefLabelPady[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
 
 /*
- * Declaration of procedures used in the implementation of the button
- * widget. 
+ * Declaration of functions used in the implementation of the button widget.
  */
 
 #ifndef TkpButtonSetDefaults
-EXTERN void		TkpButtonSetDefaults _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr));
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpButtonSetDefaults();
 #endif
-EXTERN void		TkButtonWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData instanceData));
-EXTERN void		TkpComputeButtonGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkButton *butPtr));
-EXTERN TkButton *	TkpCreateButton _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkButtonWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpComputeButtonGeometry(TkButton *butPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkButton	*TkpCreateButton(Tk_Window tkwin);
 #ifndef TkpDestroyButton
-EXTERN void 		TkpDestroyButton _ANSI_ARGS_((TkButton *butPtr));
+MODULE_SCOPE void 	TkpDestroyButton(TkButton *butPtr);
 #endif
 #ifndef TkpDisplayButton
-EXTERN void		TkpDisplayButton _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpDisplayButton(ClientData clientData);
 #endif
-EXTERN int		TkInvokeButton  _ANSI_ARGS_((TkButton *butPtr));
-
-# undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
-# define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkInvokeButton(TkButton *butPtr);
 
 #endif /* _TKBUTTON */
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvArc.c b/generic/tkCanvArc.c
index 9bee1ef..ecd57b8 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvArc.c
+++ b/generic/tkCanvArc.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkCanvArc.c --
  *
  *	This file implements arc items for canvas widgets.
@@ -6,14 +6,14 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include <stdio.h>
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkCanvas.h"
+
 /*
  * The structure below defines the record for each arc item.
  */
@@ -22,41 +22,42 @@ typedef enum {
     PIESLICE_STYLE, CHORD_STYLE, ARC_STYLE
 } Style;
 
-typedef struct ArcItem  {
+typedef struct ArcItem {
     Tk_Item header;		/* Generic stuff that's the same for all
-				 * types.  MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
+				 * types. MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
     Tk_Outline outline;		/* Outline structure */
     double bbox[4];		/* Coordinates (x1, y1, x2, y2) of bounding
 				 * box for oval of which arc is a piece. */
     double start;		/* Angle at which arc begins, in degrees
 				 * between 0 and 360. */
-    double extent;		/* Extent of arc (angular distance from
-				 * start to end of arc) in degrees between
-				 * -360 and 360. */
-    double *outlinePtr;		/* Points to (x,y) coordinates for points
-				 * that define one or two closed polygons
+    double extent;		/* Extent of arc (angular distance from start
+				 * to end of arc) in degrees between -360 and
+				 * 360. */
+    double *outlinePtr;		/* Points to (x,y) coordinates for points that
+				 * define one or two closed polygons
 				 * representing the portion of the outline
-				 * that isn't part of the arc (the V-shape
-				 * for a pie slice or a line-like segment
-				 * for a chord).  Malloc'ed. */
-    int numOutlinePoints;	/* Number of points at outlinePtr.  Zero
-				 * means no space allocated. */
+				 * that isn't part of the arc (the V-shape for
+				 * a pie slice or a line-like segment for a
+				 * chord). Malloc'ed. */
+    int numOutlinePoints;	/* Number of points at outlinePtr. Zero means
+				 * no space allocated. */
     Tk_TSOffset tsoffset;
     XColor *fillColor;		/* Color for filling arc (used for drawing
-				 * outline too when style is "arc").  NULL
+				 * outline too when style is "arc"). NULL
 				 * means don't fill arc. */
     XColor *activeFillColor;	/* Color for filling arc (used for drawing
 				 * outline too when style is "arc" and state
-				 * is "active").  NULL means use fillColor. */
+				 * is "active"). NULL means use fillColor. */
     XColor *disabledFillColor;	/* Color for filling arc (used for drawing
 				 * outline too when style is "arc" and state
 				 * is "disabled". NULL means use fillColor */
     Pixmap fillStipple;		/* Stipple bitmap for filling item. */
-    Pixmap activeFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling item if state
-				 * is active. */
-    Pixmap disabledFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling item if state
-				 * is disabled. */
-    Style style;		/* How to draw arc: arc, chord, or pieslice. */
+    Pixmap activeFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling item if state is
+				 * active. */
+    Pixmap disabledFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling item if state is
+				 * disabled. */
+    Style style;		/* How to draw arc: arc, chord, or
+				 * pieslice. */
     GC fillGC;			/* Graphics context for filling item. */
     double center1[2];		/* Coordinates of center of arc outline at
 				 * start (see ComputeArcOutline). */
@@ -65,8 +66,8 @@ typedef struct ArcItem  {
 } ArcItem;
 
 /*
- * The definitions below define the sizes of the polygons used to
- * display outline information for various styles of arcs:
+ * The definitions below define the sizes of the polygons used to display
+ * outline information for various styles of arcs:
  */
 
 #define CHORD_OUTLINE_PTS	7
@@ -77,14 +78,11 @@ typedef struct ArcItem  {
  * Information used for parsing configuration specs:
  */
 
-static int	StyleParseProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-		    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static int	StyleParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
 		    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value,
-		    char *widgRec, int offset));
-static char *	StylePrintProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-		    ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
-		    char *widgRec, int offset,
-		    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
+		    char *widgRec, int offset);
+static char *	StylePrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+		    char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr);
 
 static Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
     (Tk_OptionParseProc *) TkStateParseProc,
@@ -112,169 +110,152 @@ static Tk_CustomOption pixelOption = {
 };
 
 static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activedash", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.activeDash),
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activedash", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.activeDash),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activefill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, activeFillColor),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activeoutline", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.activeColor),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activeoutlinestipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.activeStipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activestipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, activeFillStipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activefill", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, activeFillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activeoutline", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.activeColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activeoutlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.activeStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activestipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, activeFillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", NULL, NULL,
 	"0.0", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.activeWidth),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.dash),
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.dash),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL,
 	"0", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.offset), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.disabledDash),
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.disabledDash),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, disabledFillColor),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledoutline", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.disabledColor),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledoutlinestipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.disabledStipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, disabledFillStipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disabledwidth", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, disabledFillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledoutline", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.disabledColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledoutlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.disabledStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, disabledFillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disabledwidth", NULL, NULL,
 	"0.0", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.disabledWidth),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, "-extent", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, "-extent", NULL, NULL,
 	"90", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, extent), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, fillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, fillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", NULL, NULL,
 	"0,0", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, tsoffset),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &offsetOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-outline", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-outline", NULL, NULL,
 	"black", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.color), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-outlineoffset", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-outlineoffset", NULL, NULL,
 	"0,0", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.tsoffset),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &offsetOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-outlinestipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.stipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, "-start", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-outlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.stipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, "-start", NULL, NULL,
 	"0", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, start), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK,
-	&stateOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, fillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-style", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, style), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, fillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-style", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ArcItem, style), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT,
 	&styleOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-width", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-width", NULL, NULL,
 	"1.0", Tk_Offset(ArcItem, outline.width), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT,
 	&pixelOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+    {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ComputeArcBbox _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    ArcItem *arcPtr));
-static int		ConfigureArc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static void		ComputeArcBbox(Tk_Canvas canvas, ArcItem *arcPtr);
+static int		ConfigureArc(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags));
-static int		CreateArc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags);
+static int		CreateArc(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		DeleteArc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display));
-static void		DisplayArc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DeleteArc(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display);
+static void		DisplayArc(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst,
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
-static int		ArcCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		ArcToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr));
-static double		ArcToPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *coordPtr));
-static int		ArcToPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass));
-static void		ScaleArc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height);
+static int		ArcCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		ArcToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr);
+static double		ArcToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *coordPtr);
+static int		ArcToPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass);
+static void		ScaleArc(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY,
-			    double scaleX, double scaleY));
-static void		TranslateArc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY));
-static int		AngleInRange _ANSI_ARGS_((double x, double y,
-			    double start, double extent));
-static void		ComputeArcOutline _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    ArcItem *arcPtr));
-static int		HorizLineToArc _ANSI_ARGS_((double x1, double x2,
+			    double scaleX, double scaleY);
+static void		TranslateArc(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY);
+static int		AngleInRange(double x, double y,
+			    double start, double extent);
+static void		ComputeArcOutline(Tk_Canvas canvas, ArcItem *arcPtr);
+static int		HorizLineToArc(double x1, double x2,
 			    double y, double rx, double ry,
-			    double start, double extent));
-static int		VertLineToArc _ANSI_ARGS_((double x, double y1,
+			    double start, double extent);
+static int		VertLineToArc(double x, double y1,
 			    double y2, double rx, double ry,
-			    double start, double extent));
+			    double start, double extent);
 
 /*
- * The structures below defines the arc item types by means of procedures
- * that can be invoked by generic item code.
+ * The structures below defines the arc item types by means of functions that
+ * can be invoked by generic item code.
  */
 
 Tk_ItemType tkArcType = {
-    "arc",				/* name */
-    sizeof(ArcItem),			/* itemSize */
-    CreateArc,				/* createProc */
-    configSpecs,			/* configSpecs */
-    ConfigureArc,			/* configureProc */
-    ArcCoords,				/* coordProc */
-    DeleteArc,				/* deleteProc */
-    DisplayArc,				/* displayProc */
-    TK_CONFIG_OBJS,			/* flags */
-    ArcToPoint,				/* pointProc */
-    ArcToArea,				/* areaProc */
-    ArcToPostscript,			/* postscriptProc */
-    ScaleArc,				/* scaleProc */
-    TranslateArc,			/* translateProc */
-    (Tk_ItemIndexProc *) NULL,		/* indexProc */
-    (Tk_ItemCursorProc *) NULL,		/* icursorProc */
-    (Tk_ItemSelectionProc *) NULL,	/* selectionProc */
-    (Tk_ItemInsertProc *) NULL,		/* insertProc */
-    (Tk_ItemDCharsProc *) NULL,		/* dTextProc */
-    (Tk_ItemType *) NULL,		/* nextPtr */
+    "arc",			/* name */
+    sizeof(ArcItem),		/* itemSize */
+    CreateArc,			/* createProc */
+    configSpecs,		/* configSpecs */
+    ConfigureArc,		/* configureProc */
+    ArcCoords,			/* coordProc */
+    DeleteArc,			/* deleteProc */
+    DisplayArc,			/* displayProc */
+    TK_CONFIG_OBJS,		/* flags */
+    ArcToPoint,			/* pointProc */
+    ArcToArea,			/* areaProc */
+    ArcToPostscript,		/* postscriptProc */
+    ScaleArc,			/* scaleProc */
+    TranslateArc,		/* translateProc */
+    NULL,			/* indexProc */
+    NULL,			/* icursorProc */
+    NULL,			/* selectionProc */
+    NULL,			/* insertProc */
+    NULL,			/* dTextProc */
+    NULL,			/* nextPtr */
 };
 
 #ifndef PI
-#    define PI 3.14159265358979323846
+#define PI	3.14159265358979323846
 #endif
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * CreateArc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to create a new arc item in
- *	a canvas.
+ *	This function is invoked to create a new arc item in a canvas.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurred in
- *	creating the item, then an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result;  in this case itemPtr is
- *	left uninitialized, so it can be safely freed by the
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If an error occurred in creating the
+ *	item, then an error message is left in the interp's result; in this
+ *	case itemPtr is left uninitialized, so it can be safely freed by the
  *	caller.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -284,24 +265,24 @@ Tk_ItemType tkArcType = {
  */
 
 static int
-CreateArc(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas to hold new item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Record to hold new item;  header
-					 * has been initialized by caller. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Arguments describing arc. */
+CreateArc(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas to hold new item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Record to hold new item; header has been
+				 * initialized by caller. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Arguments describing arc. */
 {
     ArcItem *arcPtr = (ArcItem *) itemPtr;
     int i;
 
     if (objc == 0) {
-	panic("canvas did not pass any coords\n");
+	Tcl_Panic("canvas did not pass any coords\n");
     }
 
     /*
-     * Carry out initialization that is needed in order to clean
-     * up after errors during the the remainder of this procedure.
+     * Carry out initialization that is needed in order to clean up after
+     * errors during the the remainder of this function.
      */
 
     Tk_CreateOutline(&(arcPtr->outline));
@@ -327,6 +308,7 @@ CreateArc(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 
     for (i = 1; i < objc; i++) {
 	char *arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+
 	if ((arg[0] == '-') && (arg[1] >= 'a') && (arg[1] <= 'z')) {
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -337,7 +319,8 @@ CreateArc(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
     if (ConfigureArc(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc-i, objv+i, 0) == TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
-    error:
+
+  error:
     DeleteArc(canvas, itemPtr, Tk_Display(Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas)));
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -347,9 +330,8 @@ CreateArc(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ArcCoords --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "coords" widget
- *	command on arcs.  See the user documentation for details
- *	on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "coords" widget command on
+ *	arcs. See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR, and sets the interp's result.
@@ -361,21 +343,20 @@ CreateArc(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-ArcCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item whose coordinates are to be
-					 * read or modified. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of coordinates supplied in
-					 * objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1,
-					 * x2, y2, ... */
+ArcCoords(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item whose coordinates are to be read or
+				 * modified. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of coordinates supplied in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1, x2, y2, ... */
 {
     ArcItem *arcPtr = (ArcItem *) itemPtr;
 
     if (objc == 0) {
 	Tcl_Obj *obj = Tcl_NewObj();
 	Tcl_Obj *subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(arcPtr->bbox[0]);
+
 	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
 	subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(arcPtr->bbox[1]);
 	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
@@ -391,7 +372,7 @@ ArcCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else if (objc != 4) {
 		char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	
+
 		sprintf(buf, "wrong # coordinates: expected 4, got %d", objc);
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -410,7 +391,7 @@ ArcCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 	ComputeArcBbox(canvas, arcPtr);
     } else {
 	char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	
+
 	sprintf(buf, "wrong # coordinates: expected 0 or 4, got %d", objc);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -423,28 +404,28 @@ ArcCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ConfigureArc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to configure various aspects
- *	of a arc item, such as its outline and fill colors.
+ *	This function is invoked to configure various aspects of a arc item,
+ *	such as its outline and fill colors.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result code.  If an error occurs, then
- *	an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result code. If an error occurs, then an error message
+ *	is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors and stipple
- *	patterns, may be set for itemPtr.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors and stipple patterns, may be
+ *	set for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureArc(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Arc item to reconfigure. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of elements in objv.  */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
+ConfigureArc(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Arc item to reconfigure. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of elements in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
 {
     ArcItem *arcPtr = (ArcItem *) itemPtr;
     XGCValues gcValues;
@@ -466,8 +447,8 @@ ConfigureArc(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     state = itemPtr->state;
 
     /*
-     * A few of the options require additional processing, such as
-     * style and graphics contexts.
+     * A few of the options require additional processing, such as style and
+     * graphics contexts.
      */
 
     if (arcPtr->outline.activeWidth > arcPtr->outline.width ||
@@ -506,8 +487,7 @@ ConfigureArc(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     i = (int) (arcPtr->extent/360.0);
     arcPtr->extent -= i*360.0;
 
-    mask = Tk_ConfigOutlineGC(&gcValues, canvas, itemPtr,
-	    &(arcPtr->outline));
+    mask = Tk_ConfigOutlineGC(&gcValues, canvas, itemPtr, &(arcPtr->outline));
     if (mask) {
 	gcValues.cap_style = CapButt;
 	mask |= GCCapStyle;
@@ -596,8 +576,8 @@ ConfigureArc(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * DeleteArc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to clean up the data structure
- *	associated with a arc item.
+ *	This function is called to clean up the data structure associated with
+ *	an arc item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -609,11 +589,10 @@ ConfigureArc(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteArc(canvas, itemPtr, display)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Info about overall canvas. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being deleted. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display containing window for
-					 * canvas. */
+DeleteArc(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Info about overall canvas. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being deleted. */
+    Display *display)		/* Display containing window for canvas. */
 {
     ArcItem *arcPtr = (ArcItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -649,31 +628,29 @@ DeleteArc(canvas, itemPtr, display)
  *
  * ComputeArcBbox --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to compute the bounding box of
- *	all the pixels that may be drawn as part of an arc.
+ *	This function is invoked to compute the bounding box of all the pixels
+ *	that may be drawn as part of an arc.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header
- *	for itemPtr.
+ *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-ComputeArcBbox(canvas, arcPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    ArcItem *arcPtr;			/* Item whose bbox is to be
-					 * recomputed. */
+ComputeArcBbox(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    ArcItem *arcPtr)		/* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
 {
     double tmp, center[2], point[2];
     double width;
     Tk_State state = arcPtr->header.state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
@@ -700,14 +677,14 @@ ComputeArcBbox(canvas, arcPtr)
      */
 
     if (arcPtr->bbox[1] > arcPtr->bbox[3]) {
-	double tmp;
-	tmp = arcPtr->bbox[3];
+	double tmp = arcPtr->bbox[3];
+
 	arcPtr->bbox[3] = arcPtr->bbox[1];
 	arcPtr->bbox[1] = tmp;
     }
     if (arcPtr->bbox[0] > arcPtr->bbox[2]) {
-	double tmp;
-	tmp = arcPtr->bbox[2];
+	double tmp = arcPtr->bbox[2];
+
 	arcPtr->bbox[2] = arcPtr->bbox[0];
 	arcPtr->bbox[0] = tmp;
     }
@@ -715,10 +692,10 @@ ComputeArcBbox(canvas, arcPtr)
     ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr);
 
     /*
-     * To compute the bounding box, start with the the bbox formed
-     * by the two endpoints of the arc.  Then add in the center of
-     * the arc's oval (if relevant) and the 3-o'clock, 6-o'clock,
-     * 9-o'clock, and 12-o'clock positions, if they are relevant.
+     * To compute the bounding box, start with the the bbox formed by the two
+     * endpoints of the arc. Then add in the center of the arc's oval (if
+     * relevant) and the 3-o'clock, 6-o'clock, 9-o'clock, and 12-o'clock
+     * positions, if they are relevant.
      */
 
     arcPtr->header.x1 = arcPtr->header.x2 = (int) arcPtr->center1[0];
@@ -768,8 +745,8 @@ ComputeArcBbox(canvas, arcPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Lastly, expand by the width of the arc (if the arc's outline is
-     * being drawn) and add one extra pixel just for safety.
+     * Lastly, expand by the width of the arc (if the arc's outline is being
+     * drawn) and add one extra pixel just for safety.
      */
 
     if (arcPtr->outline.gc == None) {
@@ -788,28 +765,26 @@ ComputeArcBbox(canvas, arcPtr)
  *
  * DisplayArc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to draw an arc item in a given
- *	drawable.
+ *	This function is invoked to draw an arc item in a given drawable.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation
- *	information in canvas.
+ *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation information in
+ *	canvas.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayArc(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display on which to draw item. */
-    Drawable drawable;			/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
-					 * item. */
-    int x, y, width, height;		/* Describes region of canvas that
-					 * must be redisplayed (not used). */
+DisplayArc(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to be displayed. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw item. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw item. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Describes region of canvas that must be */
+    int width, int height)	/* redisplayed (not used). */
 {
     ArcItem *arcPtr = (ArcItem *) itemPtr;
     short x1, y1, x2, y2;
@@ -818,7 +793,7 @@ DisplayArc(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
     Pixmap stipple;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
     lineWidth = arcPtr->outline.width;
@@ -837,7 +812,7 @@ DisplayArc(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 	if (arcPtr->activeFillStipple != None) {
 	    stipple = arcPtr->activeFillStipple;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (arcPtr->outline.disabledWidth > 0) {
 	    lineWidth = arcPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
 	}
@@ -850,8 +825,8 @@ DisplayArc(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Compute the screen coordinates of the bounding box for the item,
-     * plus integer values for the angles.
+     * Compute the screen coordinates of the bounding box for the item, plus
+     * integer values for the angles.
      */
 
     Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, arcPtr->bbox[0], arcPtr->bbox[1],
@@ -868,16 +843,18 @@ DisplayArc(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
     extent = (int) ((64*arcPtr->extent) + 0.5);
 
     /*
-     * Display filled arc first (if wanted), then outline.  If the extent
-     * is zero then don't invoke XFillArc or XDrawArc, since this causes
-     * some window servers to crash and should be a no-op anyway.
+     * Display filled arc first (if wanted), then outline. If the extent is
+     * zero then don't invoke XFillArc or XDrawArc, since this causes some
+     * window servers to crash and should be a no-op anyway.
      */
 
     if ((arcPtr->fillGC != None) && (extent != 0)) {
 	if (stipple != None) {
-	    int w=0; int h=0;
+	    int w = 0;
+	    int h = 0;
 	    Tk_TSOffset *tsoffset = &arcPtr->tsoffset;
 	    int flags = tsoffset->flags;
+
 	    if (flags & (TK_OFFSET_CENTER|TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE)) {
 		Tk_SizeOfBitmap(display, stipple, &w, &h);
 		if (flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
@@ -914,10 +891,10 @@ DisplayArc(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If the outline width is very thin, don't use polygons to draw
-	 * the linear parts of the outline (this often results in nothing
-	 * being displayed); just draw lines instead. The same is done if
-	 * the outline is dashed, because then polygons don't work.
+	 * If the outline width is very thin, don't use polygons to draw the
+	 * linear parts of the outline (this often results in nothing being
+	 * displayed); just draw lines instead. The same is done if the
+	 * outline is dashed, because then polygons don't work.
 	 */
 
 	if (lineWidth < 1.5 || dashnumber != 0) {
@@ -948,8 +925,8 @@ DisplayArc(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 		TkFillPolygon(canvas, arcPtr->outlinePtr, PIE_OUTLINE1_PTS,
 			display, drawable, arcPtr->outline.gc, None);
 		TkFillPolygon(canvas, arcPtr->outlinePtr + 2*PIE_OUTLINE1_PTS,
-			PIE_OUTLINE2_PTS, display, drawable, arcPtr->outline.gc,
-			None);
+			PIE_OUTLINE2_PTS, display, drawable,
+			arcPtr->outline.gc, None);
 	    }
 	}
 
@@ -962,17 +939,16 @@ DisplayArc(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
  *
  * ArcToPoint --
  *
- *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given
- *	arc, in canvas units.
+ *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given arc, in canvas
+ *	units.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates
- *	are coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the arc.  If the
- *	point isn't inside the arc then the return value is the
- *	distance from the point to the arc.  If itemPtr is filled,
- *	then anywhere in the interior is considered "inside"; if
- *	itemPtr isn't filled, then "inside" means only the area
- *	occupied by the outline.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates are
+ *	coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the arc. If the point isn't
+ *	inside the arc then the return value is the distance from the point to
+ *	the arc. If itemPtr is filled, then anywhere in the interior is
+ *	considered "inside"; if itemPtr isn't filled, then "inside" means only
+ *	the area occupied by the outline.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -982,10 +958,10 @@ DisplayArc(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static double
-ArcToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against point. */
-    double *pointPtr;		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
+ArcToPoint(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against point. */
+    double *pointPtr)		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
 {
     ArcItem *arcPtr = (ArcItem *) itemPtr;
     double vertex[2], pointAngle, diff, dist, newDist;
@@ -993,7 +969,7 @@ ArcToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
     int filled, angleInRange;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
@@ -1009,10 +985,9 @@ ArcToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * See if the point is within the angular range of the arc.
-     * Remember, X angles are backwards from the way we'd normally
-     * think of them.  Also, compensate for any eccentricity of
-     * the oval.
+     * See if the point is within the angular range of the arc. Remember, X
+     * angles are backwards from the way we'd normally think of them. Also,
+     * compensate for any eccentricity of the oval.
      */
 
     vertex[0] = (arcPtr->bbox[0] + arcPtr->bbox[2])/2.0;
@@ -1039,14 +1014,13 @@ ArcToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	    ((arcPtr->extent < 0) && ((diff - 360.0) >= arcPtr->extent));
 
     /*
-     * Now perform different tests depending on what kind of arc
-     * we're dealing with.
+     * Now perform different tests depending on what kind of arc we're dealing
+     * with.
      */
 
     if (arcPtr->style == ARC_STYLE) {
 	if (angleInRange) {
-	    return TkOvalToPoint(arcPtr->bbox, width,
-		    0, pointPtr);
+	    return TkOvalToPoint(arcPtr->bbox, width, 0, pointPtr);
 	}
 	dist = hypot(pointPtr[0] - arcPtr->center1[0],
 		pointPtr[1] - arcPtr->center1[1]);
@@ -1072,7 +1046,7 @@ ArcToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	    dist = TkPolygonToPoint(arcPtr->outlinePtr, PIE_OUTLINE1_PTS,
 		    pointPtr);
 	    newDist = TkPolygonToPoint(arcPtr->outlinePtr + 2*PIE_OUTLINE1_PTS,
-			PIE_OUTLINE2_PTS, pointPtr);
+		    PIE_OUTLINE2_PTS, pointPtr);
 	} else {
 	    dist = TkLineToPoint(vertex, arcPtr->center1, pointPtr);
 	    newDist = TkLineToPoint(vertex, arcPtr->center2, pointPtr);
@@ -1090,17 +1064,16 @@ ArcToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * This is a chord-style arc.  We have to deal specially with the
-     * triangular piece that represents the difference between a
-     * chord-style arc and a pie-slice arc (for small angles this piece
-     * is excluded here where it would be included for pie slices;
-     * for large angles the piece is included here but would be
-     * excluded for pie slices).
+     * This is a chord-style arc. We have to deal specially with the
+     * triangular piece that represents the difference between a chord-style
+     * arc and a pie-slice arc (for small angles this piece is excluded here
+     * where it would be included for pie slices; for large angles the piece
+     * is included here but would be excluded for pie slices).
      */
 
     if (width > 1.0) {
 	dist = TkPolygonToPoint(arcPtr->outlinePtr, CHORD_OUTLINE_PTS,
-		    pointPtr);
+		pointPtr);
     } else {
 	dist = TkLineToPoint(arcPtr->center1, arcPtr->center2, pointPtr);
     }
@@ -1134,14 +1107,13 @@ ArcToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
  *
  * ArcToArea --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to determine whether an item
- *	lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or overlapping
- *	a given area.
+ *	This function is called to determine whether an item lies entirely
+ *	inside, entirely outside, or overlapping a given area.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area
- *	given by rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely
- *	inside the given area.
+ *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area given by
+ *	rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside the given
+ *	area.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1151,26 +1123,25 @@ ArcToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-ArcToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against arc. */
-    double *rectPtr;		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
-				 * (x1, y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular
-				 * area.  */
+ArcToArea(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against arc. */
+    double *rectPtr)		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates (x1,
+				 * y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular area. */
 {
     ArcItem *arcPtr = (ArcItem *) itemPtr;
-    double rx, ry;		/* Radii for transformed oval:  these define
-				 * an oval centered at the origin. */
-    double tRect[4];		/* Transformed version of x1, y1, x2, y2,
-				 * for coord. system where arc is centered
-				 * on the origin. */
+    double rx, ry;		/* Radii for transformed oval: these define an
+				 * oval centered at the origin. */
+    double tRect[4];		/* Transformed version of x1, y1, x2, y2, for
+				 * coord. system where arc is centered on the
+				 * origin. */
     double center[2], width, angle, tmp;
     double points[20], *pointPtr;
     int numPoints, filled;
     int inside;			/* Non-zero means every test so far suggests
-				 * that arc is inside rectangle.  0 means
-				 * every test so far shows arc to be outside
-				 * of rectangle. */
+				 * that arc is inside rectangle. 0 means every
+				 * test so far shows arc to be outside of
+				 * rectangle. */
     int newInside;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
@@ -1182,7 +1153,7 @@ ArcToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
 	if (arcPtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
 	    width = (double) arcPtr->outline.activeWidth;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (arcPtr->outline.disabledWidth>0) {
 	    width = (double) arcPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
 	}
@@ -1198,8 +1169,8 @@ ArcToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Transform both the arc and the rectangle so that the arc's oval
-     * is centered on the origin.
+     * Transform both the arc and the rectangle so that the arc's oval is
+     * centered on the origin.
      */
 
     center[0] = (arcPtr->bbox[0] + arcPtr->bbox[2])/2.0;
@@ -1212,17 +1183,16 @@ ArcToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
     ry = arcPtr->bbox[3] - center[1] + width/2.0;
 
     /*
-     * Find the extreme points of the arc and see whether these are all
-     * inside the rectangle (in which case we're done), partly in and
-     * partly out (in which case we're done), or all outside (in which
-     * case we have more work to do).  The extreme points include the
-     * following, which are checked in order:
+     * Find the extreme points of the arc and see whether these are all inside
+     * the rectangle (in which case we're done), partly in and partly out (in
+     * which case we're done), or all outside (in which case we have more work
+     * to do). The extreme points include the following, which are checked in
+     * order:
      *
-     * 1. The outside points of the arc, corresponding to start and
-     *	  extent.
+     * 1. The outside points of the arc, corresponding to start and extent.
      * 2. The center of the arc (but only in pie-slice mode).
-     * 3. The 12, 3, 6, and 9-o'clock positions (but only if the arc
-     *    includes those angles).
+     * 3. The 12, 3, 6, and 9-o'clock positions (but only if the arc includes
+     *	  those angles).
      */
 
     pointPtr = points;
@@ -1283,8 +1253,8 @@ ArcToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Now that we've located the extreme points, loop through them all
-     * to see which are inside the rectangle.
+     * Now that we've located the extreme points, loop through them all to see
+     * which are inside the rectangle.
      */
 
     inside = (points[0] > tRect[0]) && (points[0] < tRect[2])
@@ -1302,17 +1272,17 @@ ArcToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * So far, oval appears to be outside rectangle, but can't yet tell
-     * for sure.  Next, test each of the four sides of the rectangle
-     * against the bounding region for the arc.  If any intersections
-     * are found, then return "overlapping".  First, test against the
-     * polygon(s) forming the sides of a chord or pie-slice.
+     * So far, oval appears to be outside rectangle, but can't yet tell for
+     * sure. Next, test each of the four sides of the rectangle against the
+     * bounding region for the arc. If any intersections are found, then
+     * return "overlapping". First, test against the polygon(s) forming the
+     * sides of a chord or pie-slice.
      */
 
     if (arcPtr->style == PIESLICE_STYLE) {
 	if (width >= 1.0) {
 	    if (TkPolygonToArea(arcPtr->outlinePtr, PIE_OUTLINE1_PTS,
-		    rectPtr) != -1)  {
+		    rectPtr) != -1) {
 		return 0;
 	    }
 	    if (TkPolygonToArea(arcPtr->outlinePtr + 2*PIE_OUTLINE1_PTS,
@@ -1340,9 +1310,9 @@ ArcToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Next check for overlap between each of the four sides and the
-     * outer perimiter of the arc.  If the arc isn't filled, then also
-     * check the inner perimeter of the arc.
+     * Next check for overlap between each of the four sides and the outer
+     * perimiter of the arc. If the arc isn't filled, then also check the
+     * inner perimeter of the arc.
      */
 
     if (HorizLineToArc(tRect[0], tRect[2], tRect[1], rx, ry, arcPtr->start,
@@ -1371,11 +1341,11 @@ ArcToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The arc still appears to be totally disjoint from the rectangle,
-     * but it's also possible that the rectangle is totally inside the arc.
-     * Do one last check, which is to check one point of the rectangle
-     * to see if it's inside the arc.  If it is, we've got overlap.  If
-     * it isn't, the arc's really outside the rectangle.
+     * The arc still appears to be totally disjoint from the rectangle, but
+     * it's also possible that the rectangle is totally inside the arc. Do one
+     * last check, which is to check one point of the rectangle to see if it's
+     * inside the arc. If it is, we've got overlap. If it isn't, the arc's
+     * really outside the rectangle.
      */
 
     if (ArcToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr) == 0.0) {
@@ -1389,15 +1359,14 @@ ArcToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
  *
  * ScaleArc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to rescale an arc item.
+ *	This function is invoked to rescale an arc item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The arc referred to by itemPtr is rescaled so that the
- *	following transformation is applied to all point
- *	coordinates:
+ *	The arc referred to by itemPtr is rescaled so that the following
+ *	transformation is applied to all point coordinates:
  *		x' = originX + scaleX*(x-originX)
  *		y' = originY + scaleY*(y-originY)
  *
@@ -1405,12 +1374,13 @@ ArcToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ScaleArc(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing arc. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Arc to be scaled. */
-    double originX, originY;		/* Origin about which to scale rect. */
-    double scaleX;			/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
-    double scaleY;			/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
+ScaleArc(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing arc. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Arc to be scaled. */
+    double originX,		/* Origin about which to scale rect. */
+    double originY,
+    double scaleX,		/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
+    double scaleY)		/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
 {
     ArcItem *arcPtr = (ArcItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -1426,25 +1396,24 @@ ScaleArc(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
  *
  * TranslateArc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to move an arc by a given amount.
+ *	This function is called to move an arc by a given amount.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The position of the arc is offset by (xDelta, yDelta), and
- *	the bounding box is updated in the generic part of the item
- *	structure.
+ *	The position of the arc is offset by (xDelta, yDelta), and the
+ *	bounding box is updated in the generic part of the item structure.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TranslateArc(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being moved. */
-    double deltaX, deltaY;		/* Amount by which item is to be
-					 * moved. */
+TranslateArc(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being moved. */
+    double deltaX,		/* Amount by which item is to be moved. */
+    double deltaY)
 {
     ArcItem *arcPtr = (ArcItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -1460,26 +1429,25 @@ TranslateArc(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
  *
  * ComputeArcOutline --
  *
- *	This procedure creates a polygon describing everything in
- *	the outline for an arc except what's in the curved part.
- *	For a "pie slice" arc this is a V-shaped chunk, and for
- *	a "chord" arc this is a linear chunk (with cutaway corners).
- *	For "arc" arcs, this stuff isn't relevant.
+ *	This function creates a polygon describing everything in the outline
+ *	for an arc except what's in the curved part. For a "pie slice" arc
+ *	this is a V-shaped chunk, and for a "chord" arc this is a linear chunk
+ *	(with cutaway corners). For "arc" arcs, this stuff isn't relevant.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The information at arcPtr->outlinePtr gets modified, and
- *	storage for arcPtr->outlinePtr may be allocated or freed.
+ *	The information at arcPtr->outlinePtr gets modified, and storage for
+ *	arcPtr->outlinePtr may be allocated or freed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about overall canvas. */
-    ArcItem *arcPtr;			/* Information about arc. */
+ComputeArcOutline(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about overall canvas. */
+    ArcItem *arcPtr)		/* Information about arc. */
 {
     double sin1, cos1, sin2, cos2, angle, width, halfWidth;
     double boxWidth, boxHeight;
@@ -1487,10 +1455,9 @@ ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr)
     double *outlinePtr;
     Tk_State state = arcPtr->header.state;
 
-
     /*
-     * Make sure that the outlinePtr array is large enough to hold
-     * either a chord or pie-slice outline.
+     * Make sure that the outlinePtr array is large enough to hold either a
+     * chord or pie-slice outline.
      */
 
     if (arcPtr->numOutlinePoints == 0) {
@@ -1500,14 +1467,13 @@ ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr)
     }
     outlinePtr = arcPtr->outlinePtr;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
     /*
-     * First compute the two points that lie at the centers of
-     * the ends of the curved arc segment, which are marked with
-     * X's in the figure below:
+     * First compute the two points that lie at the centers of the ends of the
+     * curved arc segment, which are marked with X's in the figure below:
      *
      *
      *				  * * *
@@ -1517,13 +1483,13 @@ ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr)
      *			*   *             *   *
      *			 X *               * X
      *
-     * The code is tricky because the arc can be ovular in shape.
-     * It computes the position for a unit circle, and then
-     * scales to fit the shape of the arc's bounding box.
+     * The code is tricky because the arc can be ovular in shape. It computes
+     * the position for a unit circle, and then scales to fit the shape of the
+     * arc's bounding box.
      *
-     * Also, watch out because angles go counter-clockwise like you
-     * might expect, but the y-coordinate system is inverted.  To
-     * handle this, just negate the angles in all the computations.
+     * Also, watch out because angles go counter-clockwise like you might
+     * expect, but the y-coordinate system is inverted. To handle this, just
+     * negate the angles in all the computations.
      */
 
     boxWidth = arcPtr->bbox[2] - arcPtr->bbox[0];
@@ -1542,8 +1508,8 @@ ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr)
     arcPtr->center2[1] = vertex[1] + sin2*boxHeight/2.0;
 
     /*
-     * Next compute the "outermost corners" of the arc, which are
-     * marked with X's in the figure below:
+     * Next compute the "outermost corners" of the arc, which are marked with
+     * X's in the figure below:
      *
      *				  * * *
      *			      *          *
@@ -1552,12 +1518,11 @@ ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr)
      *			X   *             *   X
      *			   *               *
      *
-     * The code below is tricky because it has to handle eccentricity
-     * in the shape of the oval.  The key in the code below is to
-     * realize that the slope of the line from arcPtr->center1 to corner1
-     * is (boxWidth*sin1)/(boxHeight*cos1), and similarly for arcPtr->center2
-     * and corner2.  These formulas can be computed from the formula for
-     * the oval.
+     * The code below is tricky because it has to handle eccentricity in the
+     * shape of the oval. The key in the code below is to realize that the
+     * slope of the line from arcPtr->center1 to corner1 is (boxWidth*sin1)
+     * divided by (boxHeight*cos1), and similarly for arcPtr->center2 and
+     * corner2. These formulas can be computed from the formula for the oval.
      */
 
     width = arcPtr->outline.width;
@@ -1565,7 +1530,7 @@ ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr)
 	if (arcPtr->outline.activeWidth>arcPtr->outline.width) {
 	    width = arcPtr->outline.activeWidth;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (arcPtr->outline.disabledWidth>arcPtr->outline.width) {
 	    width = arcPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
 	}
@@ -1588,10 +1553,10 @@ ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr)
     corner2[1] = arcPtr->center2[1] + sin(angle)*halfWidth;
 
     /*
-     * For a chord outline, generate a six-sided polygon with three
-     * points for each end of the chord.  The first and third points
-     * for each end are butt points generated on either side of the
-     * center point.  The second point is the corner point.
+     * For a chord outline, generate a six-sided polygon with three points for
+     * each end of the chord. The first and third points for each end are butt
+     * points generated on either side of the center point. The second point
+     * is the corner point.
      */
 
     if (arcPtr->style == CHORD_STYLE) {
@@ -1611,10 +1576,9 @@ ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr)
 		- arcPtr->center1[1];
     } else if (arcPtr->style == PIESLICE_STYLE) {
 	/*
-	 * For pie slices, generate two polygons, one for each side
-	 * of the pie slice.  The first arm has a shape like this,
-	 * where the center of the oval is X, arcPtr->center1 is at Y, and
-	 * corner1 is at Z:
+	 * For pie slices, generate two polygons, one for each side of the pie
+	 * slice. The first arm has a shape like this, where the center of the
+	 * oval is X, arcPtr->center1 is at Y, and corner1 is at Z:
 	 *
 	 *	 _____________________
 	 *	|		      \
@@ -1622,7 +1586,6 @@ ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr)
 	 *	X		     Y  Z
 	 *	|		       /
 	 *	|_____________________/
-	 *
 	 */
 
 	TkGetButtPoints(arcPtr->center1, vertex, width, 0,
@@ -1639,7 +1602,6 @@ ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr)
 	/*
 	 * The second arm has a shape like this:
 	 *
-	 *
 	 *	   ______________________
 	 *	  /			  \
 	 *	 /			   \
@@ -1648,10 +1610,10 @@ ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr)
 	 *	  \______________________/
 	 *
 	 * Similar to above X is the center of the oval/circle, Y is
-	 * arcPtr->center2, and Z is corner2.  The extra jog out to the left
-	 * of X is needed in or to produce a butted joint with the
-	 * first arm;  the corner to the right of X is one of the
-	 * first two points of the first arm, depending on extent.
+	 * arcPtr->center2, and Z is corner2. The extra jog out to the left of
+	 * X is needed in or to produce a butted joint with the first arm; the
+	 * corner to the right of X is one of the first two points of the
+	 * first arm, depending on extent.
 	 */
 
 	TkGetButtPoints(arcPtr->center2, vertex, width, 0,
@@ -1680,15 +1642,13 @@ ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr)
  *
  * HorizLineToArc --
  *
- *	Determines whether a horizontal line segment intersects
- *	a given arc.
+ *	Determines whether a horizontal line segment intersects a given arc.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if the given line intersects the
- *	infinitely-thin arc section defined by rx, ry, start,
- *	and extent, and 0 otherwise.  Only the perimeter of the
- *	arc is checked: interior areas (e.g. pie-slice or chord)
- *	are not checked.
+ *	The return value is 1 if the given line intersects the infinitely-thin
+ *	arc section defined by rx, ry, start, and extent, and 0 otherwise.
+ *	Only the perimeter of the arc is checked: interior areas (e.g. chord
+ *	or pie-slice) are not checked.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1697,25 +1657,24 @@ ComputeArcOutline(canvas,arcPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-HorizLineToArc(x1, x2, y, rx, ry, start, extent)
-    double x1, x2;		/* X-coords of endpoints of line segment. 
-				 * X1 must be <= x2. */
-    double y;			/* Y-coordinate of line segment. */
-    double rx, ry;		/* These x- and y-radii define an oval
+HorizLineToArc(
+    double x1, double x2,	/* X-coords of endpoints of line segment. X1
+				 * must be <= x2. */
+    double y,			/* Y-coordinate of line segment. */
+    double rx, double ry,	/* These x- and y-radii define an oval
 				 * centered at the origin. */
-    double start, extent;	/* Angles that define extent of arc, in
-				 * the standard fashion for this module. */
+    double start, double extent)/* Angles that define extent of arc, in the
+				 * standard fashion for this module. */
 {
-    double tmp;
+    double tmp, x;
     double tx, ty;		/* Coordinates of intersection point in
 				 * transformed coordinate system. */
-    double x;
 
     /*
-     * Compute the x-coordinate of one possible intersection point
-     * between the arc and the line.  Use a transformed coordinate
-     * system where the oval is a unit circle centered at the origin.
-     * Then scale back to get actual x-coordinate.
+     * Compute the x-coordinate of one possible intersection point between the
+     * arc and the line. Use a transformed coordinate system where the oval is
+     * a unit circle centered at the origin. Then scale back to get actual
+     * x-coordinate.
      */
 
     ty = y/ry;
@@ -1744,15 +1703,13 @@ HorizLineToArc(x1, x2, y, rx, ry, start, extent)
  *
  * VertLineToArc --
  *
- *	Determines whether a vertical line segment intersects
- *	a given arc.
+ *	Determines whether a vertical line segment intersects a given arc.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if the given line intersects the
- *	infinitely-thin arc section defined by rx, ry, start,
- *	and extent, and 0 otherwise.  Only the perimeter of the
- *	arc is checked: interior areas (e.g. pie-slice or chord)
- *	are not checked.
+ *	The return value is 1 if the given line intersects the infinitely-thin
+ *	arc section defined by rx, ry, start, and extent, and 0 otherwise.
+ *	Only the perimeter of the arc is checked: interior areas (e.g. chord
+ *	or pie-slice) are not checked.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1761,25 +1718,24 @@ HorizLineToArc(x1, x2, y, rx, ry, start, extent)
  */
 
 static int
-VertLineToArc(x, y1, y2, rx, ry, start, extent)
-    double x;			/* X-coordinate of line segment. */
-    double y1, y2;		/* Y-coords of endpoints of line segment. 
-				 * Y1 must be <= y2. */
-    double rx, ry;		/* These x- and y-radii define an oval
+VertLineToArc(
+    double x,			/* X-coordinate of line segment. */
+    double y1, double y2,	/* Y-coords of endpoints of line segment. Y1
+				 * must be <= y2. */
+    double rx, double ry,	/* These x- and y-radii define an oval
 				 * centered at the origin. */
-    double start, extent;	/* Angles that define extent of arc, in
-				 * the standard fashion for this module. */
+    double start, double extent)/* Angles that define extent of arc, in the
+				 * standard fashion for this module. */
 {
-    double tmp;
+    double tmp, y;
     double tx, ty;		/* Coordinates of intersection point in
 				 * transformed coordinate system. */
-    double y;
 
     /*
-     * Compute the y-coordinate of one possible intersection point
-     * between the arc and the line.  Use a transformed coordinate
-     * system where the oval is a unit circle centered at the origin.
-     * Then scale back to get actual y-coordinate.
+     * Compute the y-coordinate of one possible intersection point between the
+     * arc and the line. Use a transformed coordinate system where the oval is
+     * a unit circle centered at the origin. Then scale back to get actual
+     * y-coordinate.
      */
 
     tx = x/rx;
@@ -1808,15 +1764,14 @@ VertLineToArc(x, y1, y2, rx, ry, start, extent)
  *
  * AngleInRange --
  *
- *	Determine whether the angle from the origin to a given
- *	point is within a given range.
+ *	Determine whether the angle from the origin to a given point is within
+ *	a given range.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if the angle from (0,0) to (x,y)
- *	is in the range given by start and extent, where angles
- *	are interpreted in the standard way for ovals (meaning
- *	backwards from normal interpretation).  Otherwise the
- *	return value is 0.
+ *	The return value is 1 if the angle from (0,0) to (x,y) is in the range
+ *	given by start and extent, where angles are interpreted in the
+ *	standard way for ovals (meaning backwards from normal interpretation).
+ *	Otherwise the return value is 0.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1825,11 +1780,11 @@ VertLineToArc(x, y1, y2, rx, ry, start, extent)
  */
 
 static int
-AngleInRange(x, y, start, extent)
-    double x, y;		/* Coordinate of point;  angle measured
-				 * from origin to here, relative to x-axis. */
-    double start;		/* First angle, degrees, >=0, <=360. */
-    double extent;		/* Size of arc in degrees >=-360, <=360. */
+AngleInRange(
+    double x, double y,		/* Coordinate of point; angle measured from
+				 * origin to here, relative to x-axis. */
+    double start,		/* First angle, degrees, >=0, <=360. */
+    double extent)		/* Size of arc in degrees >=-360, <=360. */
 {
     double diff;
 
@@ -1855,15 +1810,13 @@ AngleInRange(x, y, start, extent)
  *
  * ArcToPostscript --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to generate Postscript for
- *	arc items.
+ *	This function is called to generate Postscript for arc items.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If an error
- *	occurs in generating Postscript then an error message is
- *	left in the interp's result, replacing whatever used
- *	to be there.  If no error occurs, then Postscript for the
- *	item is appended to the result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If an error occurs in
+ *	generating Postscript then an error message is left in the interp's
+ *	result, replacing whatever used to be there. If no error occurs, then
+ *	Postscript for the item is appended to the result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1872,15 +1825,13 @@ AngleInRange(x, y, start, extent)
  */
 
 static int
-ArcToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Leave Postscript or error message
-					 * here. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about overall canvas. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item for which Postscript is
-					 * wanted. */
-    int prepass;			/* 1 means this is a prepass to
-					 * collect font information;  0 means
-					 * final Postscript is being created. */
+ArcToPostscript(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Leave Postscript or error message here. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about overall canvas. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item for which Postscript is wanted. */
+    int prepass)		/* 1 means this is a prepass to collect font
+				 * information; 0 means final Postscript is
+				 * being created. */
 {
     ArcItem *arcPtr = (ArcItem *) itemPtr;
     char buffer[400];
@@ -1900,7 +1851,7 @@ ArcToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 	ang2 = arcPtr->start;
     }
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
     color = arcPtr->outline.color;
@@ -1920,7 +1871,7 @@ ArcToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 	if (arcPtr->activeFillStipple!=None) {
 	    fillStipple = arcPtr->activeFillStipple;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (arcPtr->outline.disabledColor!=NULL) {
 	    color = arcPtr->outline.disabledColor;
 	}
@@ -1936,15 +1887,15 @@ ArcToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the arc is filled, output Postscript for the interior region
-     * of the arc.
+     * If the arc is filled, output Postscript for the interior region of the
+     * arc.
      */
 
     if (arcPtr->fillGC != None) {
 	sprintf(buffer, "matrix currentmatrix\n%.15g %.15g translate %.15g %.15g scale\n",
 		(arcPtr->bbox[0] + arcPtr->bbox[2])/2, (y1 + y2)/2,
 		(arcPtr->bbox[2] - arcPtr->bbox[0])/2, (y1 - y2)/2);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 	if (arcPtr->style == CHORD_STYLE) {
 	    sprintf(buffer, "0 0 1 %.15g %.15g arc closepath\nsetmatrix\n",
 		    ang1, ang2);
@@ -1953,21 +1904,20 @@ ArcToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 		    "0 0 moveto 0 0 1 %.15g %.15g arc closepath\nsetmatrix\n",
 		    ang1, ang2);
 	}
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 	if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, fillColor) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	};
+	}
 	if (fillStipple != None) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", (char *) NULL);
-	    if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, fillStipple)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", NULL);
+	    if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, fillStipple) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    if (arcPtr->outline.gc != None) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore gsave\n", (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore gsave\n", NULL);
 	    }
 	} else {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", NULL);
 	}
     }
 
@@ -1979,16 +1929,15 @@ ArcToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 	sprintf(buffer, "matrix currentmatrix\n%.15g %.15g translate %.15g %.15g scale\n",
 		(arcPtr->bbox[0] + arcPtr->bbox[2])/2, (y1 + y2)/2,
 		(arcPtr->bbox[2] - arcPtr->bbox[0])/2, (y1 - y2)/2);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 	sprintf(buffer, "0 0 1 %.15g %.15g", ang1, ang2);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer,
-		" arc\nsetmatrix\n0 setlinecap\n", (char *) NULL);
-	if (Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, itemPtr,
-		&(arcPtr->outline)) != TCL_OK) {
+		" arc\nsetmatrix\n0 setlinecap\n", NULL);
+	if (Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, itemPtr, &(arcPtr->outline)) != TCL_OK){
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (arcPtr->style != ARC_STYLE) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore gsave\n", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore gsave\n", NULL);
 	    if (arcPtr->style == CHORD_STYLE) {
 		Tk_CanvasPsPath(interp, canvas, arcPtr->outlinePtr,
 			CHORD_OUTLINE_PTS);
@@ -2000,15 +1949,14 @@ ArcToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		if (stipple != None) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", (char *) NULL);
-		    if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas,
-			    stipple) != TCL_OK) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", NULL);
+		    if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple) != TCL_OK){
 			return TCL_ERROR;
 		    }
 		} else {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", NULL);
 		}
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore gsave\n", (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore gsave\n", NULL);
 		Tk_CanvasPsPath(interp, canvas,
 			arcPtr->outlinePtr + 2*PIE_OUTLINE1_PTS,
 			PIE_OUTLINE2_PTS);
@@ -2018,13 +1966,12 @@ ArcToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    if (stipple != None) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", (char *) NULL);
-		if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas,
-			stipple) != TCL_OK) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", NULL);
+		if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 	    } else {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", NULL);
 	    }
 	}
     }
@@ -2037,34 +1984,34 @@ ArcToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
  *
  * StyleParseProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked during option processing to handle
- *	the "-style" option.
+ *	This function is invoked during option processing to handle the
+ *	"-style" option.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return value.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The state for a given item gets replaced by the state
- *	indicated in the value argument.
+ *	The state for a given item gets replaced by the state indicated in the
+ *	value argument.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-StyleParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* some flags.*/
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for reporting errors. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    CONST char *value;			/* Value of option. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item. */
+StyleParseProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* some flags.*/
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for reporting errors. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing canvas widget. */
+    CONST char *value,		/* Value of option. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record for item. */
+    int offset)			/* Offset into item. */
 {
     int c;
     size_t length;
 
     register Style *stylePtr = (Style *) (widgRec + offset);
 
-    if(value == NULL || *value == 0) {
+    if (value == NULL || *value == 0) {
 	*stylePtr = PIESLICE_STYLE;
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
@@ -2085,9 +2032,8 @@ StyleParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad -style option \"",
-	    value, "\": must be arc, chord, or pieslice",
-	    (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad -style option \"", value,
+	    "\": must be arc, chord, or pieslice", NULL);
     *stylePtr = PIESLICE_STYLE;
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -2097,16 +2043,15 @@ StyleParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  *
  * StylePrintProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk configuration code
- *	to produce a printable string for the "-style"
- *	configuration option.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk configuration code to produce a
+ *	printable string for the "-style" configuration option.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a string describing the state for
- *	the item referred to by "widgRec".  In addition, *freeProcPtr
- *	is filled in with the address of a procedure to call to free
- *	the result string when it's no longer needed (or NULL to
- *	indicate that the string doesn't need to be freed).
+ *	The return value is a string describing the state for the item
+ *	referred to by "widgRec". In addition, *freeProcPtr is filled in with
+ *	the address of a function to call to free the result string when it's
+ *	no longer needed (or NULL to indicate that the string doesn't need to
+ *	be freed).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2115,22 +2060,30 @@ StyleParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  */
 
 static char *
-StylePrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Ignored. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Ignored. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item. */
-    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr;		/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
-					 * information about how to reclaim
-					 * storage for return string. */
+StylePrintProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Ignored. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Ignored. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record for item. */
+    int offset,			/* Offset into item. */
+    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)	/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
+				 * information about how to reclaim storage
+				 * for return string. */
 {
     register Style *stylePtr = (Style *) (widgRec + offset);
 
-    if (*stylePtr==ARC_STYLE) {
+    if (*stylePtr == ARC_STYLE) {
 	return "arc";
-    } else if (*stylePtr==CHORD_STYLE) {
+    } else if (*stylePtr == CHORD_STYLE) {
 	return "chord";
     } else {
 	return "pieslice";
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvBmap.c b/generic/tkCanvBmap.c
index f308c52..30aa429 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvBmap.c
+++ b/generic/tkCanvBmap.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkCanvBmap.c --
  *
  *	This file implements bitmap items for canvas widgets.
@@ -6,13 +6,12 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include <stdio.h>
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkCanvas.h"
 
 /*
@@ -21,11 +20,10 @@
 
 typedef struct BitmapItem  {
     Tk_Item header;		/* Generic stuff that's the same for all
-				 * types.  MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
+				 * types. MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
     double x, y;		/* Coordinates of positioning point for
 				 * bitmap. */
-    Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Where to anchor bitmap relative to
-				 * (x,y). */
+    Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Where to anchor bitmap relative to (x,y) */
     Pixmap bitmap;		/* Bitmap to display in window. */
     Pixmap activeBitmap;	/* Bitmap to display in window. */
     Pixmap disabledBitmap;	/* Bitmap to display in window. */
@@ -35,8 +33,8 @@ typedef struct BitmapItem  {
     XColor *bgColor;		/* Background color to use for bitmap. */
     XColor *activeBgColor;	/* Background color to use for bitmap. */
     XColor *disabledBgColor;	/* Background color to use for bitmap. */
-    GC gc;			/* Graphics context to use for drawing
-				 * bitmap on screen. */
+    GC gc;			/* Graphics context to use for drawing bitmap
+				 * on screen. */
 } BitmapItem;
 
 /*
@@ -53,96 +51,95 @@ static Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
 };
 
 static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activebackground", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, activeBgColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activebitmap", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, activeBitmap), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activeforeground", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, activeFgColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-anchor", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activebackground", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, activeBgColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activebitmap", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, activeBitmap), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activeforeground", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, activeFgColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-anchor", NULL, NULL,
 	"center", Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, anchor), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-background", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, bgColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-bitmap", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, bitmap), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledbackground", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, disabledBgColor),
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-background", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, bgColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-bitmap", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, bitmap), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledbackground", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, disabledBgColor),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledbitmap", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, disabledBitmap),
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledbitmap", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, disabledBitmap),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, disabledFgColor),
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, disabledFgColor),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-foreground", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-foreground", NULL, NULL,
 	"black", Tk_Offset(BitmapItem, fgColor), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK,
 	&stateOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static int		BitmapCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static int		BitmapCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		BitmapToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr));
-static double		BitmapToPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *coordPtr));
-static int		BitmapToPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass));
-static void		ComputeBitmapBbox _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    BitmapItem *bmapPtr));
-static int		ConfigureBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		BitmapToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr);
+static double		BitmapToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *coordPtr);
+static int		BitmapToPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass);
+static void		ComputeBitmapBbox(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    BitmapItem *bmapPtr);
+static int		ConfigureBitmap(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags));
-static int		TkcCreateBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags);
+static int		TkcCreateBitmap(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		DeleteBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display));
-static void		DisplayBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DeleteBitmap(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display);
+static void		DisplayBitmap(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst,
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
-static void		ScaleBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height);
+static void		ScaleBitmap(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY,
-			    double scaleX, double scaleY));
-static void		TranslateBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY));
+			    double scaleX, double scaleY);
+static void		TranslateBitmap(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    double deltaX, double deltaY);
 
 /*
- * The structures below defines the bitmap item type in terms of
- * procedures that can be invoked by generic item code.
+ * The structures below defines the bitmap item type in terms of functions
+ * that can be invoked by generic item code.
  */
 
 Tk_ItemType tkBitmapType = {
-    "bitmap",				/* name */
-    sizeof(BitmapItem),			/* itemSize */
-    TkcCreateBitmap,			/* createProc */
-    configSpecs,			/* configSpecs */
-    ConfigureBitmap,			/* configureProc */
-    BitmapCoords,			/* coordProc */
-    DeleteBitmap,			/* deleteProc */
-    DisplayBitmap,			/* displayProc */
-    TK_CONFIG_OBJS,			/* flags */
-    BitmapToPoint,			/* pointProc */
-    BitmapToArea,			/* areaProc */
-    BitmapToPostscript,			/* postscriptProc */
-    ScaleBitmap,			/* scaleProc */
-    TranslateBitmap,			/* translateProc */
-    (Tk_ItemIndexProc *) NULL,		/* indexProc */
-    (Tk_ItemCursorProc *) NULL,		/* icursorProc */
-    (Tk_ItemSelectionProc *) NULL,	/* selectionProc */
-    (Tk_ItemInsertProc *) NULL,		/* insertProc */
-    (Tk_ItemDCharsProc *) NULL,		/* dTextProc */
-    (Tk_ItemType *) NULL,		/* nextPtr */
+    "bitmap",			/* name */
+    sizeof(BitmapItem),		/* itemSize */
+    TkcCreateBitmap,		/* createProc */
+    configSpecs,		/* configSpecs */
+    ConfigureBitmap,		/* configureProc */
+    BitmapCoords,		/* coordProc */
+    DeleteBitmap,		/* deleteProc */
+    DisplayBitmap,		/* displayProc */
+    TK_CONFIG_OBJS,		/* flags */
+    BitmapToPoint,		/* pointProc */
+    BitmapToArea,		/* areaProc */
+    BitmapToPostscript,		/* postscriptProc */
+    ScaleBitmap,		/* scaleProc */
+    TranslateBitmap,		/* translateProc */
+    NULL,			/* indexProc */
+    NULL,			/* icursorProc */
+    NULL,			/* selectionProc */
+    NULL,			/* insertProc */
+    NULL,			/* dTextProc */
+    NULL,			/* nextPtr */
 };
 
 /*
@@ -150,14 +147,13 @@ Tk_ItemType tkBitmapType = {
  *
  * TkcCreateBitmap --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to create a new bitmap
- *	item in a canvas.
+ *	This function is invoked to create a new bitmap item in a canvas.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurred in
- *	creating the item, then an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result;  in this case itemPtr is left uninitialized,
- *	so it can be safely freed by the caller.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If an error occurred in creating the
+ *	item, then an error message is left in the interp's result; in this
+ *	case itemPtr is left uninitialized, so it can be safely freed by the
+ *	caller.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	A new bitmap item is created.
@@ -166,13 +162,13 @@ Tk_ItemType tkBitmapType = {
  */
 
 static int
-TkcCreateBitmap(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas to hold new item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Record to hold new item;  header
-					 * has been initialized by caller. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Arguments describing rectangle. */
+TkcCreateBitmap(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas to hold new item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Record to hold new item; header has been
+				 * initialized by caller. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Arguments describing rectangle. */
 {
     BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
     int i;
@@ -198,8 +194,8 @@ TkcCreateBitmap(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
     bmapPtr->gc = None;
 
     /*
-     * Process the arguments to fill in the item record.
-     * Only 1 (list) or 2 (x y) coords are allowed.
+     * Process the arguments to fill in the item record. Only 1 (list) or 2 (x
+     * y) coords are allowed.
      */
 
     if (objc == 1) {
@@ -219,7 +215,7 @@ TkcCreateBitmap(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    error:
+  error:
     DeleteBitmap(canvas, itemPtr, Tk_Display(Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas)));
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -229,9 +225,8 @@ TkcCreateBitmap(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * BitmapCoords --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "coords" widget
- *	command on bitmap items.  See the user documentation for
- *	details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "coords" widget command on
+ *	bitmap items. See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR, and sets the interp's result.
@@ -243,20 +238,19 @@ TkcCreateBitmap(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-BitmapCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item whose coordinates are to be
-					 * read or modified. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of coordinates supplied in
-					 * objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1,
-					 * x2, y2, ... */
+BitmapCoords(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item whose coordinates are to be read or
+				 * modified. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of coordinates supplied in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1, x2, y2, ... */
 {
     BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
 
     if (objc == 0) {
 	Tcl_Obj *obj = Tcl_NewObj();
+
 	Tcl_Obj *subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(bmapPtr->x);
 	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
 	subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(bmapPtr->y);
@@ -297,12 +291,12 @@ BitmapCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ConfigureBitmap --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to configure various aspects
- *	of a bitmap item, such as its anchor position.
+ *	This function is invoked to configure various aspects of a bitmap
+ *	item, such as its anchor position.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result code.  If an error occurs, then
- *	an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result code. If an error occurs, then an error message
+ *	is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Configuration information may be set for itemPtr.
@@ -311,13 +305,13 @@ BitmapCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureBitmap(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Bitmap item to reconfigure. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of elements in objv.  */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
+ConfigureBitmap(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Bitmap item to reconfigure. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of elements in objv.  */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
 {
     BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
     XGCValues gcValues;
@@ -336,8 +330,8 @@ ConfigureBitmap(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * A few of the options require additional processing, such as those
-     * that determine the graphics context.
+     * A few of the options require additional processing, such as those that
+     * determine the graphics context.
      */
 
     state = itemPtr->state;
@@ -410,8 +404,8 @@ ConfigureBitmap(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * DeleteBitmap --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to clean up the data structure
- *	associated with a bitmap item.
+ *	This function is called to clean up the data structure associated with
+ *	a bitmap item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -423,11 +417,10 @@ ConfigureBitmap(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteBitmap(canvas, itemPtr, display)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Info about overall canvas widget. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being deleted. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display containing window for
-					 * canvas. */
+DeleteBitmap(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Info about overall canvas widget. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being deleted. */
+    Display *display)		/* Display containing window for canvas. */
 {
     BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -468,27 +461,24 @@ DeleteBitmap(canvas, itemPtr, display)
  *
  * ComputeBitmapBbox --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to compute the bounding box of
- *	all the pixels that may be drawn as part of a bitmap item.
- *	This procedure is where the child bitmap's placement is
- *	computed.
+ *	This function is invoked to compute the bounding box of all the pixels
+ *	that may be drawn as part of a bitmap item. This function is where the
+ *	child bitmap's placement is computed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header
- *	for itemPtr.
+ *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-ComputeBitmapBbox(canvas, bmapPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    BitmapItem *bmapPtr;		/* Item whose bbox is to be
-					 * recomputed. */
+ComputeBitmapBbox(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    BitmapItem *bmapPtr)	/* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
 {
     int width, height;
     int x, y;
@@ -525,36 +515,36 @@ ComputeBitmapBbox(canvas, bmapPtr)
     Tk_SizeOfBitmap(Tk_Display(Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas)), bitmap,
 	    &width, &height);
     switch (bmapPtr->anchor) {
-	case TK_ANCHOR_N:
-	    x -= width/2;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
-	    x -= width;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_E:
-	    x -= width;
-	    y -= height/2;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
-	    x -= width;
-	    y -= height;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_S:
-	    x -= width/2;
-	    y -= height;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
-	    y -= height;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_W:
-	    y -= height/2;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
-	    x -= width/2;
-	    y -= height/2;
-	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_N:
+	x -= width/2;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
+	x -= width;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_E:
+	x -= width;
+	y -= height/2;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
+	x -= width;
+	y -= height;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_S:
+	x -= width/2;
+	y -= height;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
+	y -= height;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_W:
+	y -= height/2;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
+	x -= width/2;
+	y -= height/2;
+	break;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -572,28 +562,27 @@ ComputeBitmapBbox(canvas, bmapPtr)
  *
  * DisplayBitmap --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to draw a bitmap item in a given
- *	drawable.
+ *	This function is invoked to draw a bitmap item in a given drawable.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation
- *	information in canvas.
+ *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation information in
+ *	canvas.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayBitmap(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display on which to draw item. */
-    Drawable drawable;			/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
-					 * item. */
-    int x, y, width, height;		/* Describes region of canvas that
-					 * must be redisplayed (not used). */
+DisplayBitmap(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to be displayed. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw item. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw item. */
+    int x, int y, int width, int height)
+				/* Describes region of canvas that must be
+				 * redisplayed (not used). */
 {
     BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
     int bmapX, bmapY, bmapWidth, bmapHeight;
@@ -602,9 +591,8 @@ DisplayBitmap(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
     /*
-     * If the area being displayed doesn't cover the whole bitmap,
-     * then only redisplay the part of the bitmap that needs
-     * redisplay.
+     * If the area being displayed doesn't cover the whole bitmap, then only
+     * redisplay the part of the bitmap that needs redisplay.
      */
 
     if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
@@ -650,9 +638,9 @@ DisplayBitmap(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 		&drawableX, &drawableY);
 
 	/*
-	 * Must modify the mask origin within the graphics context
-	 * to line up with the bitmap's origin (in order to make
-	 * bitmaps with "-background {}" work right).
+	 * Must modify the mask origin within the graphics context to line up
+	 * with the bitmap's origin (in order to make bitmaps with
+	 * "-background {}" work right).
 	 */
 
 	XSetClipOrigin(display, bmapPtr->gc, drawableX - bmapX,
@@ -669,14 +657,14 @@ DisplayBitmap(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
  *
  * BitmapToPoint --
  *
- *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given
- *	rectangle, in canvas units.
+ *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given rectangle, in
+ *	canvas units.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates
- *	are coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the bitmap.  If the
- *	point isn't inside the bitmap then the return value is the
- *	distance from the point to the bitmap.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates are
+ *	coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the bitmap. If the point isn't
+ *	inside the bitmap then the return value is the distance from the point
+ *	to the bitmap.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -686,10 +674,10 @@ DisplayBitmap(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static double
-BitmapToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, coordPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against point. */
-    double *coordPtr;		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
+BitmapToPoint(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against point. */
+    double *coordPtr)		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
 {
     BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
     double x1, x2, y1, y2, xDiff, yDiff;
@@ -727,14 +715,13 @@ BitmapToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, coordPtr)
  *
  * BitmapToArea --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to determine whether an item
- *	lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or overlapping
- *	a given rectangle.
+ *	This function is called to determine whether an item lies entirely
+ *	inside, entirely outside, or overlapping a given rectangle.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area
- *	given by rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely
- *	inside the given area.
+ *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area given by
+ *	rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside the given
+ *	area.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -744,12 +731,12 @@ BitmapToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, coordPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-BitmapToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against rectangle. */
-    double *rectPtr;		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
-				 * (x1, y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular
-				 * area.  */
+BitmapToArea(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against rectangle. */
+    double *rectPtr)		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
+				 * (x1,y1,x2,y2) describing rectangular
+				 * area. */
 {
     BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -773,16 +760,16 @@ BitmapToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
  *
  * ScaleBitmap --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to rescale a bitmap item in a
- *	canvas.  It is one of the standard item procedures for
- *	bitmap items, and is invoked by the generic canvas code.
+ *	This function is invoked to rescale a bitmap item in a canvas. It is
+ *	one of the standard item functions for bitmap items, and is invoked by
+ *	the generic canvas code.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The item referred to by itemPtr is rescaled so that the
- *	following transformation is applied to all point coordinates:
+ *	The item referred to by itemPtr is rescaled so that the following
+ *	transformation is applied to all point coordinates:
  *		x' = originX + scaleX*(x-originX)
  *		y' = originY + scaleY*(y-originY)
  *
@@ -790,12 +777,13 @@ BitmapToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ScaleBitmap(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing rectangle. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Rectangle to be scaled. */
-    double originX, originY;		/* Origin about which to scale item. */
-    double scaleX;			/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
-    double scaleY;			/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
+ScaleBitmap(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing rectangle. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Rectangle to be scaled. */
+    double originX, double originY,
+				/* Origin about which to scale item. */
+    double scaleX,		/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
+    double scaleY)		/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
 {
     BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -809,25 +797,24 @@ ScaleBitmap(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
  *
  * TranslateBitmap --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to move an item by a given amount.
+ *	This function is called to move an item by a given amount.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The position of the item is offset by (xDelta, yDelta), and
- *	the bounding box is updated in the generic part of the item
- *	structure.
+ *	The position of the item is offset by (xDelta, yDelta), and the
+ *	bounding box is updated in the generic part of the item structure.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TranslateBitmap(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being moved. */
-    double deltaX, deltaY;		/* Amount by which item is to be
-					 * moved. */
+TranslateBitmap(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being moved. */
+    double deltaX, double deltaY)
+				/* Amount by which item is to be moved. */
 {
     BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -841,15 +828,13 @@ TranslateBitmap(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
  *
  * BitmapToPostscript --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to generate Postscript for
- *	bitmap items.
+ *	This function is called to generate Postscript for bitmap items.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If an error
- *	occurs in generating Postscript then an error message is
- *	left in the interp's result, replacing whatever used to be there.
- *	If no error occurs, then Postscript for the item is appended
- *	to the result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If an error occurs in
+ *	generating Postscript then an error message is left in the interp's
+ *	result, replacing whatever used to be there. If no error occurs, then
+ *	Postscript for the item is appended to the result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -858,15 +843,13 @@ TranslateBitmap(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
  */
 
 static int
-BitmapToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Leave Postscript or error message
-					 * here. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about overall canvas. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item for which Postscript is
-					 * wanted. */
-    int prepass;			/* 1 means this is a prepass to
-					 * collect font information;  0 means
-					 * final Postscript is being created. */
+BitmapToPostscript(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Leave Postscript or error message here. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about overall canvas. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item for which Postscript is wanted. */
+    int prepass)		/* 1 means this is a prepass to collect font
+				 * information; 0 means final Postscript is
+				 * being created. */
 {
     BitmapItem *bmapPtr = (BitmapItem *) itemPtr;
     double x, y;
@@ -911,8 +894,8 @@ BitmapToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Compute the coordinates of the lower-left corner of the bitmap,
-     * taking into account the anchor position for the bitmp.
+     * Compute the coordinates of the lower-left corner of the bitmap, taking
+     * into account the anchor position for the bitmp.
      */
 
     x = bmapPtr->x;
@@ -920,15 +903,15 @@ BitmapToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
     Tk_SizeOfBitmap(Tk_Display(Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas)), bitmap,
 	    &width, &height);
     switch (bmapPtr->anchor) {
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:			y -= height;		break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_N:	x -= width/2.0; y -= height;		break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:	x -= width;	y -= height;		break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_E:	x -= width;	y -= height/2.0;	break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:	x -= width;				break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_S:	x -= width/2.0;				break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:						break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_W:			y -= height/2.0;	break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:	x -= width/2.0; y -= height/2.0;	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:			   y -= height;		break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_N:	   x -= width/2.0; y -= height;		break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:	   x -= width;	   y -= height;		break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_E:	   x -= width;	   y -= height/2.0;	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:	   x -= width;				break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_S:	   x -= width/2.0;			break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:						break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_W:			   y -= height/2.0;	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER: x -= width/2.0; y -= height/2.0;	break;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -939,18 +922,18 @@ BitmapToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 	sprintf(buffer,
 		"%.15g %.15g moveto %d 0 rlineto 0 %d rlineto %d %s\n",
 		x, y, width, height, -width, "0 rlineto closepath");
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 	if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, bgColor) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", NULL);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Draw the bitmap, if there is a foreground color.  If the bitmap
-     * is very large, then chop it up into multiple bitmaps, each
-     * consisting of one or more rows.  This is needed because Postscript
-     * can't handle single strings longer than 64 KBytes long.
+     * Draw the bitmap, if there is a foreground color. If the bitmap is very
+     * large, then chop it up into multiple bitmaps, each consisting of one or
+     * more rows. This is needed because Postscript can't handle single
+     * strings longer than 64 KBytes long.
      */
 
     if (fgColor != NULL) {
@@ -960,8 +943,7 @@ BitmapToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 	if (width > 60000) {
 	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't generate Postscript",
-		    " for bitmaps more than 60000 pixels wide",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    " for bitmaps more than 60000 pixels wide", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	rowsAtOnce = 60000/width;
@@ -969,7 +951,7 @@ BitmapToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 	    rowsAtOnce = 1;
 	}
 	sprintf(buffer, "%.15g %.15g translate\n", x, y+height);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 	for (curRow = 0; curRow < height; curRow += rowsAtOnce) {
 	    rowsThisTime = rowsAtOnce;
 	    if (rowsThisTime > (height - curRow)) {
@@ -977,13 +959,21 @@ BitmapToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 	    }
 	    sprintf(buffer, "0 -%.15g translate\n%d %d true matrix {\n",
 		    (double) rowsThisTime, width, rowsThisTime);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 	    if (Tk_CanvasPsBitmap(interp, canvas, bitmap,
 		    0, curRow, width, rowsThisTime) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n} imagemask\n", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n} imagemask\n", NULL);
 	}
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvImg.c b/generic/tkCanvImg.c
index ba85b4f..9e928c7 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvImg.c
+++ b/generic/tkCanvImg.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkCanvImg.c --
  *
  *	This file implements image items for canvas widgets.
@@ -6,13 +6,12 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include <stdio.h>
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkCanvas.h"
 
 /*
@@ -21,24 +20,24 @@
 
 typedef struct ImageItem  {
     Tk_Item header;		/* Generic stuff that's the same for all
-				 * types.  MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
+				 * types. MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
     Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing the image. */
     double x, y;		/* Coordinates of positioning point for
 				 * image. */
-    Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Where to anchor image relative to
-				 * (x,y). */
-    char *imageString;		/* String describing -image option (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means no image right now. */
+    Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Where to anchor image relative to (x,y). */
+    char *imageString;		/* String describing -image option
+				 * (malloc-ed). NULL means no image right
+				 * now. */
     char *activeImageString;	/* String describing -activeimage option.
 				 * NULL means no image right now. */
     char *disabledImageString;	/* String describing -disabledimage option.
 				 * NULL means no image right now. */
-    Tk_Image image;		/* Image to display in window, or NULL if
-				 * no image at present. */
-    Tk_Image activeImage;	/* Image to display in window, or NULL if
-				 * no image at present. */
-    Tk_Image disabledImage;	/* Image to display in window, or NULL if
-				 * no image at present. */
+    Tk_Image image;		/* Image to display in window, or NULL if no
+				 * image at present. */
+    Tk_Image activeImage;	/* Image to display in window, or NULL if no
+				 * image at present. */
+    Tk_Image disabledImage;	/* Image to display in window, or NULL if no
+				 * image at present. */
 } ImageItem;
 
 /*
@@ -55,86 +54,81 @@ static Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
 };
 
 static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-activeimage", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ImageItem, activeImageString),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-anchor", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-activeimage", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ImageItem, activeImageString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-anchor", NULL, NULL,
 	"center", Tk_Offset(ImageItem, anchor), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-disabledimage", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ImageItem, disabledImageString),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-image", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(ImageItem, imageString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK,
-	&stateOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-disabledimage", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ImageItem, disabledImageString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-image", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ImageItem, imageString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ImageChangedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+static void		ImageChangedProc(ClientData clientData,
 			    int x, int y, int width, int height, int imgWidth,
-			    int imgHeight));
-static int		ImageCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int imgHeight);
+static int		ImageCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[]));
-static int		ImageToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr));
-static double		ImageToPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *coordPtr));
-static int		ImageToPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass));
-static void		ComputeImageBbox _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    ImageItem *imgPtr));
-static int		ConfigureImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[]);
+static int		ImageToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr);
+static double		ImageToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *coordPtr);
+static int		ImageToPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass);
+static void		ComputeImageBbox(Tk_Canvas canvas, ImageItem *imgPtr);
+static int		ConfigureImage(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[], int flags));
-static int		CreateImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[], int flags);
+static int		CreateImage(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[]));
-static void		DeleteImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display));
-static void		DisplayImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[]);
+static void		DeleteImage(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display);
+static void		DisplayImage(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst,
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
-static void		ScaleImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height);
+static void		ScaleImage(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY,
-			    double scaleX, double scaleY));
-static void		TranslateImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY));
+			    double scaleX, double scaleY);
+static void		TranslateImage(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY);
 
 /*
- * The structures below defines the image item type in terms of
- * procedures that can be invoked by generic item code.
+ * The structures below defines the image item type in terms of functions that
+ * can be invoked by generic item code.
  */
 
 Tk_ItemType tkImageType = {
-    "image",				/* name */
-    sizeof(ImageItem),			/* itemSize */
-    CreateImage,			/* createProc */
-    configSpecs,			/* configSpecs */
-    ConfigureImage,			/* configureProc */
-    ImageCoords,			/* coordProc */
-    DeleteImage,			/* deleteProc */
-    DisplayImage,			/* displayProc */
-    TK_CONFIG_OBJS,			/* flags */
-    ImageToPoint,			/* pointProc */
-    ImageToArea,			/* areaProc */
-    ImageToPostscript,	                /* postscriptProc */
-    ScaleImage,				/* scaleProc */
-    TranslateImage,			/* translateProc */
-    (Tk_ItemIndexProc *) NULL,		/* indexProc */
-    (Tk_ItemCursorProc *) NULL,		/* icursorProc */
-    (Tk_ItemSelectionProc *) NULL,	/* selectionProc */
-    (Tk_ItemInsertProc *) NULL,		/* insertProc */
-    (Tk_ItemDCharsProc *) NULL,		/* dTextProc */
-    (Tk_ItemType *) NULL,		/* nextPtr */
+    "image",			/* name */
+    sizeof(ImageItem),		/* itemSize */
+    CreateImage,		/* createProc */
+    configSpecs,		/* configSpecs */
+    ConfigureImage,		/* configureProc */
+    ImageCoords,		/* coordProc */
+    DeleteImage,		/* deleteProc */
+    DisplayImage,		/* displayProc */
+    TK_CONFIG_OBJS,		/* flags */
+    ImageToPoint,		/* pointProc */
+    ImageToArea,		/* areaProc */
+    ImageToPostscript,		/* postscriptProc */
+    ScaleImage,			/* scaleProc */
+    TranslateImage,		/* translateProc */
+    NULL,			/* indexProc */
+    NULL,			/* icursorProc */
+    NULL,			/* selectionProc */
+    NULL,			/* insertProc */
+    NULL,			/* dTextProc */
+    NULL,			/* nextPtr */
 };
 
 /*
@@ -142,14 +136,13 @@ Tk_ItemType tkImageType = {
  *
  * CreateImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to create a new image
- *	item in a canvas.
+ *	This function is invoked to create a new image item in a canvas.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurred in
- *	creating the item, then an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result;  in this case itemPtr is left uninitialized,
- *	so it can be safely freed by the caller.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If an error occurred in creating the
+ *	item, then an error message is left in the interp's result; in this
+ *	case itemPtr is left uninitialized, so it can be safely freed by the
+ *	caller.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	A new image item is created.
@@ -158,19 +151,19 @@ Tk_ItemType tkImageType = {
  */
 
 static int
-CreateImage(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas to hold new item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Record to hold new item;  header
-					 * has been initialized by caller. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Arguments describing rectangle. */
+CreateImage(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas to hold new item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Record to hold new item; header has been
+				 * initialized by caller. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Arguments describing rectangle. */
 {
     ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
     int i;
 
     if (objc == 0) {
-	panic("canvas did not pass any coords\n");
+	Tcl_Panic("canvas did not pass any coords\n");
     }
 
     /*
@@ -187,8 +180,8 @@ CreateImage(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
     imgPtr->disabledImage = NULL;
 
     /*
-     * Process the arguments to fill in the item record.
-     * Only 1 (list) or 2 (x y) coords are allowed.
+     * Process the arguments to fill in the item record. Only 1 (list) or 2 (x
+     * y) coords are allowed.
      */
 
     if (objc == 1) {
@@ -207,7 +200,7 @@ CreateImage(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    error:
+  error:
     DeleteImage(canvas, itemPtr, Tk_Display(Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas)));
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -217,9 +210,8 @@ CreateImage(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ImageCoords --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "coords" widget
- *	command on image items.  See the user documentation for
- *	details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "coords" widget command on
+ *	image items. See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR, and sets the interp's result.
@@ -231,20 +223,19 @@ CreateImage(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-ImageCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item whose coordinates are to be
-					 * read or modified. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of coordinates supplied in
-					 * objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1,
-					 * x2, y2, ... */
+ImageCoords(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item whose coordinates are to be read or
+				 * modified. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of coordinates supplied in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1, x2, y2, ... */
 {
     ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
 
     if (objc == 0) {
 	Tcl_Obj *obj = Tcl_NewObj();
+
 	Tcl_Obj *subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(imgPtr->x);
 	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
 	subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(imgPtr->y);
@@ -271,7 +262,7 @@ ImageCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 	ComputeImageBbox(canvas, imgPtr);
     } else {
 	char buf[64];
-	
+
 	sprintf(buf, "wrong # coordinates: expected 0 or 2, got %d", objc);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -284,12 +275,12 @@ ImageCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ConfigureImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to configure various aspects
- *	of an image item, such as its anchor position.
+ *	This function is invoked to configure various aspects of an image
+ *	item, such as its anchor position.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result code.  If an error occurs, then
- *	an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result code. If an error occurs, then an error message
+ *	is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Configuration information may be set for itemPtr.
@@ -298,13 +289,13 @@ ImageCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureImage(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Image item to reconfigure. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of elements in objv.  */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
+ConfigureImage(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Image item to reconfigure. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of elements in objv.  */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
 {
     ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
@@ -317,10 +308,10 @@ ConfigureImage(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the image.  Save the old image around and don't free it
-     * until after the new one is allocated.  This keeps the reference
-     * count from going to zero so the image doesn't have to be recreated
-     * if it hasn't changed.
+     * Create the image. Save the old image around and don't free it until
+     * after the new one is allocated. This keeps the reference count from
+     * going to zero so the image doesn't have to be recreated if it hasn't
+     * changed.
      */
 
     if (imgPtr->activeImageString != NULL) {
@@ -376,8 +367,8 @@ ConfigureImage(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * DeleteImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to clean up the data structure
- *	associated with a image item.
+ *	This function is called to clean up the data structure associated with
+ *	a image item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -389,11 +380,10 @@ ConfigureImage(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteImage(canvas, itemPtr, display)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Info about overall canvas widget. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being deleted. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display containing window for
-					 * canvas. */
+DeleteImage(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Info about overall canvas widget. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being deleted. */
+    Display *display)		/* Display containing window for canvas. */
 {
     ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -422,27 +412,24 @@ DeleteImage(canvas, itemPtr, display)
  *
  * ComputeImageBbox --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to compute the bounding box of
- *	all the pixels that may be drawn as part of a image item.
- *	This procedure is where the child image's placement is
- *	computed.
+ *	This function is invoked to compute the bounding box of all the pixels
+ *	that may be drawn as part of a image item. This function is where the
+ *	child image's placement is computed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header
- *	for itemPtr.
+ *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-ComputeImageBbox(canvas, imgPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    ImageItem *imgPtr;			/* Item whose bbox is to be
-					 * recomputed. */
+ComputeImageBbox(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    ImageItem *imgPtr)		/* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
 {
     int width, height;
     int x, y;
@@ -478,36 +465,36 @@ ComputeImageBbox(canvas, imgPtr)
 
     Tk_SizeOfImage(image, &width, &height);
     switch (imgPtr->anchor) {
-	case TK_ANCHOR_N:
-	    x -= width/2;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
-	    x -= width;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_E:
-	    x -= width;
-	    y -= height/2;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
-	    x -= width;
-	    y -= height;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_S:
-	    x -= width/2;
-	    y -= height;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
-	    y -= height;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_W:
-	    y -= height/2;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
-	    x -= width/2;
-	    y -= height/2;
-	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_N:
+	x -= width/2;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
+	x -= width;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_E:
+	x -= width;
+	y -= height/2;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
+	x -= width;
+	y -= height;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_S:
+	x -= width/2;
+	y -= height;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
+	y -= height;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_W:
+	y -= height/2;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
+	x -= width/2;
+	y -= height/2;
+	break;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -525,35 +512,34 @@ ComputeImageBbox(canvas, imgPtr)
  *
  * DisplayImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to draw a image item in a given
- *	drawable.
+ *	This function is invoked to draw a image item in a given drawable.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation
- *	information in canvas.
+ *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation information in
+ *	canvas.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayImage(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display on which to draw item. */
-    Drawable drawable;			/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
-					 * item. */
-    int x, y, width, height;		/* Describes region of canvas that
-					 * must be redisplayed (not used). */
+DisplayImage(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to be displayed. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw item. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw item. */
+    int x, int y, int width, int height)
+				/* Describes region of canvas that must be
+				 * redisplayed (not used). */
 {
     ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
     short drawableX, drawableY;
     Tk_Image image;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
@@ -587,14 +573,14 @@ DisplayImage(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
  *
  * ImageToPoint --
  *
- *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given
- *	rectangle, in canvas units.
+ *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given rectangle, in
+ *	canvas units.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates
- *	are coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the image.  If the
- *	point isn't inside the image then the return value is the
- *	distance from the point to the image.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates are
+ *	coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the image. If the point isn't
+ *	inside the image then the return value is the distance from the point
+ *	to the image.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -603,10 +589,10 @@ DisplayImage(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
  */
 
 static double
-ImageToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, coordPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against point. */
-    double *coordPtr;		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
+ImageToPoint(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against point. */
+    double *coordPtr)		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
 {
     ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
     double x1, x2, y1, y2, xDiff, yDiff;
@@ -644,14 +630,13 @@ ImageToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, coordPtr)
  *
  * ImageToArea --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to determine whether an item
- *	lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or overlapping
- *	a given rectangle.
+ *	This function is called to determine whether an item lies entirely
+ *	inside, entirely outside, or overlapping a given rectangle.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area
- *	given by rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely
- *	inside the given area.
+ *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area given by
+ *	rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside the given
+ *	area.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -660,12 +645,12 @@ ImageToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, coordPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-ImageToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against rectangle. */
-    double *rectPtr;		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
-				 * (x1, y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular
-				 * area.  */
+ImageToArea(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against rectangle. */
+    double *rectPtr)		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
+				 * (x1,y1,x2,y2) describing rectangular
+				 * area. */
 {
     ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -689,15 +674,13 @@ ImageToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
  *
  * ImageToPostscript --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to generate Postscript for
- *	image items.
+ *	This function is called to generate Postscript for image items.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If an error
- *	occurs in generating Postscript then an error message is
- *	left in interp->result, replacing whatever used to be there.
- *	If no error occurs, then Postscript for the item is appended
- *	to the result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If an error occurs in
+ *	generating Postscript then an error message is left in interp->result,
+ *	replacing whatever used to be there. If no error occurs, then
+ *	Postscript for the item is appended to the result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -706,15 +689,13 @@ ImageToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-ImageToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Leave Postscript or error message
-					 * here. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about overall canvas. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item for which Postscript is
-					 * wanted. */
-    int prepass;			/* 1 means this is a prepass to
-					 * collect font information;  0 means
-					 * final Postscript is being created.*/
+ImageToPostscript(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Leave Postscript or error message here. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about overall canvas. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item for which Postscript is wanted. */
+    int prepass)		/* 1 means this is a prepass to collect font
+				 * information; 0 means final Postscript is
+				 * being created.*/
 {
     ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *)itemPtr;
     Tk_Window canvasWin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas);
@@ -725,7 +706,7 @@ ImageToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
     Tk_Image image;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
@@ -743,33 +724,34 @@ ImageToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 	/*
 	 * Image item without actual image specified.
 	 */
-	return TCL_OK;
+
+        return TCL_OK;
     }
     Tk_SizeOfImage(image, &width, &height);
 
     /*
-     * Compute the coordinates of the lower-left corner of the image,
-     * taking into account the anchor position for the image.
+     * Compute the coordinates of the lower-left corner of the image, taking
+     * into account the anchor position for the image.
      */
 
     x = imgPtr->x;
     y = Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, imgPtr->y);
 
     switch (imgPtr->anchor) {
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:			y -= height;		break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_N:	x -= width/2.0; y -= height;		break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:	x -= width;	y -= height;		break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_E:	x -= width;	y -= height/2.0;	break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:	x -= width;				break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_S:	x -= width/2.0;				break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:						break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_W:			y -= height/2.0;	break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:	x -= width/2.0; y -= height/2.0;	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:			   y -= height;		break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_N:	   x -= width/2.0; y -= height;		break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:	   x -= width;	   y -= height;		break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_E:	   x -= width;	   y -= height/2.0;	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:	   x -= width;				break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_S:	   x -= width/2.0;			break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:						break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_W:			   y -= height/2.0;	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER: x -= width/2.0; y -= height/2.0;	break;
     }
 
     if (!prepass) {
 	sprintf(buffer, "%.15g %.15g", x, y);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, " translate\n", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, " translate\n", NULL);
     }
 
     return Tk_PostscriptImage(image, interp, canvasWin,
@@ -781,14 +763,14 @@ ImageToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
  *
  * ScaleImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to rescale an item.
+ *	This function is invoked to rescale an item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The item referred to by itemPtr is rescaled so that the
- *	following transformation is applied to all point coordinates:
+ *	The item referred to by itemPtr is rescaled so that the following
+ *	transformation is applied to all point coordinates:
  *		x' = originX + scaleX*(x-originX)
  *		y' = originY + scaleY*(y-originY)
  *
@@ -796,12 +778,13 @@ ImageToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
  */
 
 static void
-ScaleImage(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing rectangle. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Rectangle to be scaled. */
-    double originX, originY;		/* Origin about which to scale rect. */
-    double scaleX;			/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
-    double scaleY;			/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
+ScaleImage(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing rectangle. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Rectangle to be scaled. */
+    double originX, double originY,
+				/* Origin about which to scale rect. */
+    double scaleX,		/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
+    double scaleY)		/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
 {
     ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -815,25 +798,24 @@ ScaleImage(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
  *
  * TranslateImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to move an item by a given amount.
+ *	This function is called to move an item by a given amount.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The position of the item is offset by (xDelta, yDelta), and
- *	the bounding box is updated in the generic part of the item
- *	structure.
+ *	The position of the item is offset by (xDelta, yDelta), and the
+ *	bounding box is updated in the generic part of the item structure.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TranslateImage(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being moved. */
-    double deltaX, deltaY;		/* Amount by which item is to be
-					 * moved. */
+TranslateImage(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being moved. */
+    double deltaX, double deltaY)
+				/* Amount by which item is to be moved. */
 {
     ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -847,9 +829,9 @@ TranslateImage(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
  *
  * ImageChangedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the image code whenever the manager
- *	for an image does something that affects the image's size or
- *	how it is displayed.
+ *	This function is invoked by the image code whenever the manager for an
+ *	image does something that affects the image's size or how it is
+ *	displayed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -861,21 +843,21 @@ TranslateImage(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
  */
 
 static void
-ImageChangedProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth, imgHeight)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to canvas item for image. */
-    int x, y;				/* Upper left pixel (within image)
-					 * that must be redisplayed. */
-    int width, height;			/* Dimensions of area to redisplay
-					 * (may be <= 0). */
-    int imgWidth, imgHeight;		/* New dimensions of image. */
+ImageChangedProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to canvas item for image. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
+				 * be redisplayed. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be <=
+				 * 0). */
+    int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
 {
     ImageItem *imgPtr = (ImageItem *) clientData;
 
     /*
-     * If the image's size changed and it's not anchored at its
-     * northwest corner then just redisplay the entire area of the
-     * image.  This is a bit over-conservative, but we need to do
-     * something because a size change also means a position change.
+     * If the image's size changed and it's not anchored at its northwest
+     * corner then just redisplay the entire area of the image. This is a bit
+     * over-conservative, but we need to do something because a size change
+     * also means a position change.
      */
 
     if (((imgPtr->header.x2 - imgPtr->header.x1) != imgWidth)
@@ -885,9 +867,17 @@ ImageChangedProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth, imgHeight)
 	height = imgHeight;
 	Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw(imgPtr->canvas, imgPtr->header.x1,
 		imgPtr->header.y1, imgPtr->header.x2, imgPtr->header.y2);
-    } 
+    }
     ComputeImageBbox(imgPtr->canvas, imgPtr);
     Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw(imgPtr->canvas, imgPtr->header.x1 + x,
 	    imgPtr->header.y1 + y, (int) (imgPtr->header.x1 + x + width),
 	    (int) (imgPtr->header.y1 + y + height));
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvLine.c b/generic/tkCanvLine.c
index 4c7b9be..cce3460 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvLine.c
+++ b/generic/tkCanvLine.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkCanvLine.c --
  *
  *	This file implements line items for canvas widgets.
@@ -7,13 +7,12 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include <stdio.h>
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkCanvas.h"
 
 /*
@@ -26,21 +25,21 @@ typedef enum {
 
 typedef struct LineItem  {
     Tk_Item header;		/* Generic stuff that's the same for all
-				 * types.  MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
+				 * types. MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
     Tk_Outline outline;		/* Outline structure */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item.  Needed for
-				 * parsing arrow shapes. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. Needed for parsing
+				 * arrow shapes. */
     int numPoints;		/* Number of points in line (always >= 0). */
-    double *coordPtr;		/* Pointer to malloc-ed array containing
-				 * x- and y-coords of all points in line.
+    double *coordPtr;		/* Pointer to malloc-ed array containing x-
+				 * and y-coords of all points in line.
 				 * X-coords are even-valued indices, y-coords
 				 * are corresponding odd-valued indices. If
-				 * the line has arrowheads then the first
-				 * and last points have been adjusted to refer
-				 * to the necks of the arrowheads rather than
-				 * their tips.  The actual endpoints are
-				 * stored in the *firstArrowPtr and
-				 * *lastArrowPtr, if they exist. */
+				 * the line has arrowheads then the first and
+				 * last points have been adjusted to refer to
+				 * the necks of the arrowheads rather than
+				 * their tips. The actual endpoints are stored
+				 * in the *firstArrowPtr and *lastArrowPtr, if
+				 * they exist. */
     int capStyle;		/* Cap style for line. */
     int joinStyle;		/* Join style for line. */
     GC arrowGC;			/* Graphics context for drawing arrowheads. */
@@ -53,13 +52,13 @@ typedef struct LineItem  {
 				 * edge of shaft. */
     double *firstArrowPtr;	/* Points to array of PTS_IN_ARROW points
 				 * describing polygon for arrowhead at first
-				 * point in line.  First point of arrowhead
-				 * is tip.  Malloc'ed.  NULL means no arrowhead
-				 * at first point. */
+				 * point in line. First point of arrowhead is
+				 * tip. Malloc'ed. NULL means no arrowhead at
+				 * first point. */
     double *lastArrowPtr;	/* Points to polygon for arrowhead at last
 				 * point in line (PTS_IN_ARROW points, first
-				 * of which is tip).  Malloc'ed.  NULL means
-				 * no arrowhead at last point. */
+				 * of which is tip). Malloc'ed. NULL means no
+				 * arrowhead at last point. */
     Tk_SmoothMethod *smooth;	/* Non-zero means draw line smoothed (i.e.
 				 * with Bezier splines). */
     int splineSteps;		/* Number of steps in each spline segment. */
@@ -72,65 +71,63 @@ typedef struct LineItem  {
 #define PTS_IN_ARROW 6
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static int		ArrowheadPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static int		ArrowheadPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, LineItem *linePtr,
-			    double *arrowPtr));
-static void		ComputeLineBbox _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    LineItem *linePtr));
-static int		ConfigureLine _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    double *arrowPtr);
+static void		ComputeLineBbox(Tk_Canvas canvas, LineItem *linePtr);
+static int		ConfigureLine(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags));
-static int		ConfigureArrows _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    LineItem *linePtr));
-static int		CreateLine _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags);
+static int		ConfigureArrows(Tk_Canvas canvas, LineItem *linePtr);
+static int		CreateLine(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		DeleteLine _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display));
-static void		DisplayLine _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DeleteLine(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display);
+static void		DisplayLine(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst,
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
-static int		GetLineIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height);
+static int		GetLineIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *obj, int *indexPtr));
-static int		LineCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *obj, int *indexPtr);
+static int		LineCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		LineDeleteCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int first, int last));
-static void		LineInsert _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int beforeThis, Tcl_Obj *obj));
-static int		LineToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr));
-static double		LineToPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *coordPtr));
-static int		LineToPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass));
-static int		ArrowParseProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		LineDeleteCoords(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int first, int last);
+static void		LineInsert(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int beforeThis, Tcl_Obj *obj);
+static int		LineToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr);
+static double		LineToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *coordPtr);
+static int		LineToPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass);
+static int		ArrowParseProc(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    CONST char *value, char *recordPtr, int offset));
-static char *		ArrowPrintProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    CONST char *value, char *recordPtr, int offset);
+static char *		ArrowPrintProc(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *recordPtr, int offset,
-			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
-static int		ParseArrowShape _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr);
+static int		ParseArrowShape(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    CONST char *value, char *recordPtr, int offset));
-static char *		PrintArrowShape _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    CONST char *value, char *recordPtr, int offset);
+static char *		PrintArrowShape(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *recordPtr, int offset,
-			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
-static void		ScaleLine _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr);
+static void		ScaleLine(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY,
-			    double scaleX, double scaleY));
-static void		TranslateLine _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY));
+			    double scaleX, double scaleY);
+static void		TranslateLine(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY);
 
 /*
- * Information used for parsing configuration specs.  If you change any
- * of the default strings, be sure to change the corresponding default
- * values in CreateLine.
+ * Information used for parsing configuration specs. If you change any of the
+ * default strings, be sure to change the corresponding default values in
+ * CreateLine.
  */
 
 static Tk_CustomOption arrowShapeOption = {
@@ -168,73 +165,65 @@ static Tk_CustomOption pixelOption = {
 };
 
 static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activedash", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.activeDash),
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activedash", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.activeDash),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activefill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.activeColor),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activestipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.activeStipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activefill", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.activeColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activestipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.activeStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", NULL, NULL,
 	"0.0", Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.activeWidth),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-arrow", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-arrow", NULL, NULL,
 	"none", Tk_Offset(LineItem, arrow), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &arrowOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-arrowshape", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-arrowshape", NULL, NULL,
 	"8 10 3", Tk_Offset(LineItem, arrowShapeA),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &arrowShapeOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE, "-capstyle", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE, "-capstyle", NULL, NULL,
 	"butt", Tk_Offset(LineItem, capStyle), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", NULL, NULL,
 	"black", Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.color), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.dash),
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.dash),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"0", Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.offset),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.disabledDash),
+    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL,
+	"0", Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.offset), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.disabledDash),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.disabledColor),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.disabledStipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disabledwidth", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.disabledColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.disabledStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disabledwidth", NULL, NULL,
 	"0.0", Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.disabledWidth),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE, "-joinstyle", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE, "-joinstyle", NULL, NULL,
 	"round", Tk_Offset(LineItem, joinStyle), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", NULL, NULL,
 	"0,0", Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.tsoffset),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &offsetOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-smooth", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-smooth", NULL, NULL,
 	"0", Tk_Offset(LineItem, smooth),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &smoothOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-splinesteps", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-splinesteps", NULL, NULL,
 	"12", Tk_Offset(LineItem, splineSteps), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK,
-	&stateOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.stipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-width", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.stipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-width", NULL, NULL,
 	"1.0", Tk_Offset(LineItem, outline.width),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+    {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * The structures below defines the line item type by means
- * of procedures that can be invoked by generic item code.
+ * The structures below defines the line item type by means of functions that
+ * can be invoked by generic item code.
  */
 
 Tk_ItemType tkLineType = {
@@ -253,17 +242,17 @@ Tk_ItemType tkLineType = {
     ScaleLine,				/* scaleProc */
     TranslateLine,			/* translateProc */
     (Tk_ItemIndexProc *) GetLineIndex,	/* indexProc */
-    (Tk_ItemCursorProc *) NULL,		/* icursorProc */
-    (Tk_ItemSelectionProc *) NULL,	/* selectionProc */
+    NULL,				/* icursorProc */
+    NULL,				/* selectionProc */
     (Tk_ItemInsertProc *) LineInsert,	/* insertProc */
     LineDeleteCoords,			/* dTextProc */
-    (Tk_ItemType *) NULL,		/* nextPtr */
+    NULL,				/* nextPtr */
 };
 
 /*
- * The definition below determines how large are static arrays
- * used to hold spline points (splines larger than this have to
- * have their arrays malloc-ed).
+ * The definition below determines how large are static arrays used to hold
+ * spline points (splines larger than this have to have their arrays
+ * malloc-ed).
  */
 
 #define MAX_STATIC_POINTS 200
@@ -273,14 +262,13 @@ Tk_ItemType tkLineType = {
  *
  * CreateLine --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to create a new line item in
- *	a canvas.
+ *	This function is invoked to create a new line item in a canvas.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurred in
- *	creating the item, then an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result;  in this case itemPtr is left uninitialized,
- *	so it can be safely freed by the caller.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If an error occurred in creating the
+ *	item, then an error message is left in the interp's result; in this
+ *	case itemPtr is left uninitialized, so it can be safely freed by the
+ *	caller.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	A new line item is created.
@@ -289,25 +277,24 @@ Tk_ItemType tkLineType = {
  */
 
 static int
-CreateLine(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas to hold new item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Record to hold new item;  header
-					 * has been initialized by caller. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Arguments describing line. */
+CreateLine(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas to hold new item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Record to hold new item; header has been
+				 * initialized by caller. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Arguments describing line. */
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
     int i;
 
     if (objc == 0) {
-	panic("canvas did not pass any coords\n");
+	Tcl_Panic("canvas did not pass any coords\n");
     }
 
     /*
-     * Carry out initialization that is needed to set defaults and to
-     * allow proper cleanup after errors during the the remainder of
-     * this procedure.
+     * Carry out initialization that is needed to set defaults and to allow
+     * proper cleanup after errors during the the remainder of this function.
      */
 
     Tk_CreateOutline(&(linePtr->outline));
@@ -323,17 +310,18 @@ CreateLine(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
     linePtr->arrowShapeC = (float)3.0;
     linePtr->firstArrowPtr = NULL;
     linePtr->lastArrowPtr = NULL;
-    linePtr->smooth = (Tk_SmoothMethod *) NULL;
+    linePtr->smooth = NULL;
     linePtr->splineSteps = 12;
 
     /*
-     * Count the number of points and then parse them into a point
-     * array.  Leading arguments are assumed to be points if they
-     * start with a digit or a minus sign followed by a digit.
+     * Count the number of points and then parse them into a point array.
+     * Leading arguments are assumed to be points if they start with a digit
+     * or a minus sign followed by a digit.
      */
 
     for (i = 1; i < objc; i++) {
 	char *arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+
 	if ((arg[0] == '-') && (arg[1] >= 'a') && (arg[1] <= 'z')) {
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -345,7 +333,7 @@ CreateLine(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    error:
+  error:
     DeleteLine(canvas, itemPtr, Tk_Display(Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas)));
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -355,9 +343,8 @@ CreateLine(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * LineCoords --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "coords" widget
- *	command on lines.  See the user documentation for details
- *	on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "coords" widget command on
+ *	lines. See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR, and sets the interp's result.
@@ -369,15 +356,13 @@ CreateLine(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-LineCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item whose coordinates are to be
-					 * read or modified. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of coordinates supplied in
-					 * objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1,
-					 * x2, y2, ... */
+LineCoords(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item whose coordinates are to be read or
+				 * modified. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of coordinates supplied in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1, x2, y2, ... */
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
     int i, numPoints;
@@ -414,20 +399,22 @@ LineCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
     }
     if (objc & 1) {
 	char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+
 	sprintf(buf, "wrong # coordinates: expected an even number, got %d",
 		objc);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     } else if (objc < 4) {
 	char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+
 	sprintf(buf, "wrong # coordinates: expected at least 4, got %d", objc);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     } else {
 	numPoints = objc/2;
 	if (linePtr->numPoints != numPoints) {
-	    coordPtr = (double *) ckalloc((unsigned)
-		    (sizeof(double) * objc));
+	    coordPtr = (double *)
+		    ckalloc((unsigned) (sizeof(double) * objc));
 	    if (linePtr->coordPtr != NULL) {
 		ckfree((char *) linePtr->coordPtr);
 	    }
@@ -468,28 +455,28 @@ LineCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ConfigureLine --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to configure various aspects
- *	of a line item such as its background color.
+ *	This function is invoked to configure various aspects of a line item
+ *	such as its background color.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result code.  If an error occurs, then
- *	an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result code. If an error occurs, then an error message
+ *	is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors and stipple
- *	patterns, may be set for itemPtr.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors and stipple patterns, may be
+ *	set for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureLine(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Line item to reconfigure. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of elements in objv.  */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
+ConfigureLine(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Line item to reconfigure. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of elements in objv.  */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
     XGCValues gcValues;
@@ -505,8 +492,8 @@ ConfigureLine(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * A few of the options require additional processing, such as
-     * graphics contexts.
+     * A few of the options require additional processing, such as graphics
+     * contexts.
      */
 
     state = itemPtr->state;
@@ -571,9 +558,8 @@ ConfigureLine(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Setup arrowheads, if needed.  If arrowheads are turned off,
-     * restore the line's endpoints (they were shortened when the
-     * arrowheads were added).
+     * Setup arrowheads, if needed. If arrowheads are turned off, restore the
+     * line's endpoints (they were shortened when the arrowheads were added).
      */
 
     if ((linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) && (linePtr->arrow != ARROWS_FIRST)
@@ -611,8 +597,8 @@ ConfigureLine(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * DeleteLine --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to clean up the data structure
- *	associated with a line item.
+ *	This function is called to clean up the data structure associated with
+ *	a line item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -624,11 +610,10 @@ ConfigureLine(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteLine(canvas, itemPtr, display)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Info about overall canvas widget. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being deleted. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display containing window for
-					 * canvas. */
+DeleteLine(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Info about overall canvas widget. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being deleted. */
+    Display *display)		/* Display containing window for canvas. */
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -652,24 +637,22 @@ DeleteLine(canvas, itemPtr, display)
  *
  * ComputeLineBbox --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to compute the bounding box of
- *	all the pixels that may be drawn as part of a line.
+ *	This function is invoked to compute the bounding box of all the pixels
+ *	that may be drawn as part of a line.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header
- *	for itemPtr.
+ *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ComputeLineBbox(canvas, linePtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    LineItem *linePtr;			/* Item whose bbos is to be
-					 * recomputed. */
+ComputeLineBbox(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    LineItem *linePtr)		/* Item whose bbos is to be recomputed. */
 {
     double *coordPtr;
     int i, intWidth;
@@ -705,13 +688,12 @@ ComputeLineBbox(canvas, linePtr)
     linePtr->header.y1 = linePtr->header.y2 = (int) coordPtr[1];
 
     /*
-     * Compute the bounding box of all the points in the line,
-     * then expand in all directions by the line's width to take
-     * care of butting or rounded corners and projecting or
-     * rounded caps.  This expansion is an overestimate (worst-case
-     * is square root of two over two) but it's simple.  Don't do
-     * anything special for curves.  This causes an additional
-     * overestimate in the bounding box, but is faster.
+     * Compute the bounding box of all the points in the line, then expand in
+     * all directions by the line's width to take care of butting or rounded
+     * corners and projecting or rounded caps. This expansion is an
+     * overestimate (worst-case is square root of two over two) but it's
+     * simple. eDon't do anything special for curves. This causes an
+     * additional overestimate in the bounding box, but is faster.
      */
 
     for (i = 1, coordPtr = linePtr->coordPtr+2; i < linePtr->numPoints;
@@ -780,9 +762,9 @@ ComputeLineBbox(canvas, linePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * For mitered lines, make a second pass through all the points.
-     * Compute the locations of the two miter vertex points and add
-     * those into the bounding box.
+     * For mitered lines, make a second pass through all the points. Compute
+     * the locations of the two miter vertex points and add those into the
+     * bounding box.
      */
 
     if (linePtr->joinStyle == JoinMiter) {
@@ -790,7 +772,7 @@ ComputeLineBbox(canvas, linePtr)
 		i--, coordPtr += 2) {
 	    double miter[4];
 	    int j;
-    
+
 	    if (TkGetMiterPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, coordPtr+4,
 		    width, miter, miter+2)) {
 		for (j = 0; j < 4; j += 2) {
@@ -820,8 +802,8 @@ ComputeLineBbox(canvas, linePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Add one more pixel of fudge factor just to be safe (e.g.
-     * X may round differently than we do).
+     * Add one more pixel of fudge factor just to be safe (e.g. X may round
+     * differently than we do).
      */
 
     linePtr->header.x1 -= 1;
@@ -835,28 +817,27 @@ ComputeLineBbox(canvas, linePtr)
  *
  * DisplayLine --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to draw a line item in a given
- *	drawable.
+ *	This function is invoked to draw a line item in a given drawable.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation
- *	information in canvas.
+ *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation information in
+ *	canvas.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayLine(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display on which to draw item. */
-    Drawable drawable;			/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
-					 * item. */
-    int x, y, width, height;		/* Describes region of canvas that
-					 * must be redisplayed (not used). */
+DisplayLine(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to be displayed. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw item. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw item. */
+    int x, int y, int width, int height)
+				/* Describes region of canvas that must be
+				 * redisplayed (not used). */
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
     XPoint staticPoints[MAX_STATIC_POINTS*3];
@@ -883,16 +864,15 @@ DisplayLine(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 	}
     }
     /*
-     * Build up an array of points in screen coordinates.  Use a
-     * static array unless the line has an enormous number of points;
-     * in this case, dynamically allocate an array.  For smoothed lines,
-     * generate the curve points on each redisplay.
+     * Build up an array of points in screen coordinates. Use a static array
+     * unless the line has an enormous number of points; in this case,
+     * dynamically allocate an array. For smoothed lines, generate the curve
+     * points on each redisplay.
      */
 
     if ((linePtr->smooth) && (linePtr->numPoints > 2)) {
-	numPoints = linePtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, (double *) NULL,
-		linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, (XPoint *) NULL,
-		(double *) NULL);
+	numPoints = linePtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, NULL,
+		linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, NULL, NULL);
     } else {
 	numPoints = linePtr->numPoints;
     }
@@ -905,18 +885,17 @@ DisplayLine(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 
     if ((linePtr->smooth) && (linePtr->numPoints > 2)) {
 	numPoints = linePtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, linePtr->coordPtr,
-		linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, pointPtr,
-		(double *) NULL);
+		linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, pointPtr, NULL);
     } else {
 	numPoints = TkCanvTranslatePath((TkCanvas*)canvas, numPoints,
 		linePtr->coordPtr, 0, pointPtr);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Display line, the free up line storage if it was dynamically
-     * allocated.  If we're stippling, then modify the stipple offset
-     * in the GC.  Be sure to reset the offset when done, since the
-     * GC is supposed to be read-only.
+     * Display line, the free up line storage if it was dynamically allocated.
+     * If we're stippling, then modify the stipple offset in the GC. Be sure
+     * to reset the offset when done, since the GC is supposed to be
+     * read-only.
      */
 
     if (Tk_ChangeOutlineGC(canvas, itemPtr, &(linePtr->outline))) {
@@ -972,24 +951,24 @@ DisplayLine(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
  */
 
 static void
-LineInsert(canvas, itemPtr, beforeThis, obj)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing text item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Line item to be modified. */
-    int beforeThis;		/* Index before which new coordinates
-				 * are to be inserted. */
-    Tcl_Obj *obj;		/* New coordinates to be inserted. */
+LineInsert(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing text item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Line item to be modified. */
+    int beforeThis,		/* Index before which new coordinates are to
+				 * be inserted. */
+    Tcl_Obj *obj)		/* New coordinates to be inserted. */
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
     int length, objc, i;
-    double *new, *coordPtr;
+    double *newCoordPtr, *coordPtr;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
     Tcl_Obj **objv;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
-    if (!obj || (Tcl_ListObjGetElements((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, obj, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
+    if (!obj || (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(NULL, obj, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
 	    || !objc || objc&1) {
 	return;
     }
@@ -1008,38 +987,40 @@ LineInsert(canvas, itemPtr, beforeThis, obj)
 	linePtr->coordPtr[length-2] = linePtr->lastArrowPtr[0];
 	linePtr->coordPtr[length-1] = linePtr->lastArrowPtr[1];
     }
-    new = (double *) ckalloc((unsigned)(sizeof(double) * (length + objc)));
-    for(i=0; i<beforeThis; i++) {
-	new[i] = linePtr->coordPtr[i];
+    newCoordPtr = (double *)
+	    ckalloc(sizeof(double) * (unsigned)(length + objc));
+    for (i=0; i<beforeThis; i++) {
+	newCoordPtr[i] = linePtr->coordPtr[i];
     }
-    for(i=0; i<objc; i++) {
-	if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj((Tcl_Interp *) NULL,objv[i],
-		new+(i+beforeThis))!=TCL_OK) {
+    for (i=0; i<objc; i++) {
+	if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, objv[i],
+		&newCoordPtr[i + beforeThis]) != TCL_OK) {
 	    Tcl_ResetResult(((TkCanvas *)canvas)->interp);
-	    ckfree((char *) new);
+	    ckfree((char *) newCoordPtr);
 	    return;
 	}
     }
 
-    for(i=beforeThis; i<length; i++) {
-	new[i+objc] = linePtr->coordPtr[i];
+    for (i=beforeThis; i<length; i++) {
+	newCoordPtr[i+objc] = linePtr->coordPtr[i];
     }
     if (linePtr->coordPtr) {
 	ckfree((char *) linePtr->coordPtr);
     }
-    linePtr->coordPtr = new;
+    linePtr->coordPtr = newCoordPtr;
     length += objc;
     linePtr->numPoints = length / 2;
 
     if ((length>3) && (state != TK_STATE_HIDDEN)) {
 	/*
-	 * This is some optimizing code that will result that only the part
-	 * of the polygon that changed (and the objects that are overlapping
-	 * with that part) need to be redrawn. A special flag is set that
-	 * instructs the general canvas code not to redraw the whole
-	 * object. If this flag is not set, the canvas will do the redrawing,
-	 * otherwise I have to do it here.
+	 * This is some optimizing code that will result that only the part of
+	 * the polygon that changed (and the objects that are overlapping with
+	 * that part) need to be redrawn. A special flag is set that instructs
+	 * the general canvas code not to redraw the whole object. If this
+	 * flag is not set, the canvas will do the redrawing, otherwise I have
+	 * to do it here.
 	 */
+
 	itemPtr->redraw_flags |= TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
 
 	if (beforeThis>0) {beforeThis -= 2; objc+=2; }
@@ -1055,23 +1036,29 @@ LineInsert(canvas, itemPtr, beforeThis, obj)
 	itemPtr->x1 = itemPtr->x2 = (int) linePtr->coordPtr[beforeThis];
 	itemPtr->y1 = itemPtr->y2 = (int) linePtr->coordPtr[beforeThis+1];
 	if ((linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) && (beforeThis<1)) {
-	    /* include old first arrow */
+	    /*
+	     * Include old first arrow.
+	     */
+
 	    for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->firstArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
 		    i++, coordPtr += 2) {
 		TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
 	    }
 	}
 	if ((linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) && ((beforeThis+objc)>=length)) {
-		/* include old last arrow */
+	    /*
+	     * Include old last arrow.
+	     */
+
 	    for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->lastArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
 		    i++, coordPtr += 2) {
 		TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
 	    }
 	}
 	coordPtr = linePtr->coordPtr+beforeThis+2;
-	for(i=2; i<objc; i+=2) {
+	for (i=2; i<objc; i+=2) {
 	    TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
-		coordPtr+=2;
+	    coordPtr+=2;
 	}
     }
     if (linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1083,21 +1070,28 @@ LineInsert(canvas, itemPtr, beforeThis, obj)
 	linePtr->lastArrowPtr = NULL;
     }
     if (linePtr->arrow != ARROWS_NONE) {
-	    ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr);
+	ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr);
     }
 
-    if(itemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW) {
+    if (itemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW) {
 	double width;
 	int intWidth;
+
 	if ((linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) && (beforeThis>2)) {
-	    /* include new first arrow */
+	    /*
+	     * Include new first arrow.
+	     */
+
 	    for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->firstArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
 		    i++, coordPtr += 2) {
 		TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
 	    }
 	}
-	if ((linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) && ((beforeThis+objc)<(length-2))) {
-	    /* include new right arrow */
+	if ((linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) && (beforeThis+objc < length-2)) {
+	    /*
+	     * Include new right arrow.
+	     */
+
 	    for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->lastArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
 		    i++, coordPtr += 2) {
 		TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
@@ -1105,13 +1099,13 @@ LineInsert(canvas, itemPtr, beforeThis, obj)
 	}
 	width = linePtr->outline.width;
 	if (((TkCanvas *)canvas)->currentItemPtr == itemPtr) {
-		if (linePtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
-		    width = linePtr->outline.activeWidth;
-		}
+	    if (linePtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
+		width = linePtr->outline.activeWidth;
+	    }
 	} else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
-		if (linePtr->outline.disabledWidth>0) {
-		    width = linePtr->outline.disabledWidth;
-		}
+	    if (linePtr->outline.disabledWidth>0) {
+		width = linePtr->outline.disabledWidth;
+	    }
 	}
 	intWidth = (int) (width + 0.5);
 	if (intWidth < 1) {
@@ -1137,18 +1131,18 @@ LineInsert(canvas, itemPtr, beforeThis, obj)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Characters between "first" and "last", inclusive, get
- *	deleted from itemPtr.
+ *	Characters between "first" and "last", inclusive, get deleted from
+ *	itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-LineDeleteCoords(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item in which to delete characters. */
-    int first;			/* Index of first character to delete. */
-    int last;			/* Index of last character to delete. */
+LineDeleteCoords(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item in which to delete characters. */
+    int first,			/* Index of first character to delete. */
+    int last)			/* Index of last character to delete. */
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
     int count, i, first1, last1;
@@ -1156,7 +1150,7 @@ LineDeleteCoords(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
     double *coordPtr;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
@@ -1180,36 +1174,51 @@ LineDeleteCoords(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
 	linePtr->coordPtr[length-2] = linePtr->lastArrowPtr[0];
 	linePtr->coordPtr[length-1] = linePtr->lastArrowPtr[1];
     }
-    first1 = first; last1 = last;
-    if(first1>0) first1 -= 2;
-    if(last1<length-2) last1 += 2;
+    first1 = first;
+    last1 = last;
+    if (first1 > 0) {
+	first1 -= 2;
+    }
+    if (last1 < length-2) {
+	last1 += 2;
+    }
     if (linePtr->smooth) {
-	if(first1>0) first1 -= 2;
-	if(last1<length-2) last1 += 2;
+	if (first1 > 0) {
+	    first1 -= 2;
+	}
+	if (last1 < length-2) {
+	    last1 += 2;
+	}
     }
 
-    if((first1<2) && (last1 >= length-2)) {
+    if (!(first1 < 2) && (last1 >= length-2)) {
 	/*
-	 * This is some optimizing code that will result that only the part
-	 * of the line that changed (and the objects that are overlapping
-	 * with that part) need to be redrawn. A special flag is set that
-	 * instructs the general canvas code not to redraw the whole
-	 * object. If this flag is set, the redrawing has to be done here,
-	 * otherwise the general Canvas code will take care of it.
+	 * This is some optimizing code that will result that only the part of
+	 * the line that changed (and the objects that are overlapping with
+	 * that part) need to be redrawn. A special flag is set that instructs
+	 * the general canvas code not to redraw the whole object. If this
+	 * flag is set, the redrawing has to be done here, otherwise the
+	 * general Canvas code will take care of it.
 	 */
 
 	itemPtr->redraw_flags |= TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
 	itemPtr->x1 = itemPtr->x2 = (int) linePtr->coordPtr[first1];
 	itemPtr->y1 = itemPtr->y2 = (int) linePtr->coordPtr[first1+1];
-	if ((linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) && (first1<2)) {
-	    /* include old first arrow */
+	if ((linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) && (first1 < 2)) {
+	    /*
+	     * Include old first arrow.
+	     */
+
 	    for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->firstArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
 		    i++, coordPtr += 2) {
 		TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
 	    }
 	}
-	if ((linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) && (last1>=length-2)) {
-		/* include old last arrow */
+	if ((linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) && (last1 >= length-2)) {
+	    /*
+	     * Include old last arrow.
+	     */
+
 	    for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->lastArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
 		    i++, coordPtr += 2) {
 		TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
@@ -1218,7 +1227,7 @@ LineDeleteCoords(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
 	coordPtr = linePtr->coordPtr+first1+2;
 	for (i=first1+2; i<=last1; i+=2) {
 	    TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
-	    coordPtr+=2;
+	    coordPtr += 2;
 	}
     }
 
@@ -1236,20 +1245,27 @@ LineDeleteCoords(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
 	linePtr->lastArrowPtr = NULL;
     }
     if (linePtr->arrow != ARROWS_NONE) {
-	    ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr);
+	ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr);
     }
-    if(itemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW) {
+    if (itemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW) {
 	double width;
 	int intWidth;
-	if ((linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) && (first1<4)) {
-	    /* include new first arrow */
+
+	if ((linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) && (first1 < 4)) {
+	    /*
+	     * Include new first arrow.
+	     */
+
 	    for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->firstArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
 		    i++, coordPtr += 2) {
 		TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
 	    }
 	}
-	if ((linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) && (last1>(length-4))) {
-	    /* include new right arrow */
+	if ((linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) && (last1 > length-4)) {
+	    /*
+	     * Include new right arrow.
+	     */
+
 	    for (i = 0, coordPtr = linePtr->lastArrowPtr; i < PTS_IN_ARROW;
 		    i++, coordPtr += 2) {
 		TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, coordPtr);
@@ -1257,20 +1273,22 @@ LineDeleteCoords(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
 	}
 	width = linePtr->outline.width;
 	if (((TkCanvas *)canvas)->currentItemPtr == itemPtr) {
-		if (linePtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
-		    width = linePtr->outline.activeWidth;
-		}
+	    if (linePtr->outline.activeWidth > width) {
+		width = linePtr->outline.activeWidth;
+	    }
 	} else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
-		if (linePtr->outline.disabledWidth>0) {
-		    width = linePtr->outline.disabledWidth;
-		}
+	    if (linePtr->outline.disabledWidth > 0) {
+		width = linePtr->outline.disabledWidth;
+	    }
 	}
 	intWidth = (int) (width + 0.5);
 	if (intWidth < 1) {
 	    intWidth = 1;
 	}
-	itemPtr->x1 -= intWidth; itemPtr->y1 -= intWidth;
-	itemPtr->x2 += intWidth; itemPtr->y2 += intWidth;
+	itemPtr->x1 -= intWidth;
+	itemPtr->y1 -= intWidth;
+	itemPtr->x2 += intWidth;
+	itemPtr->y2 += intWidth;
 	Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw(canvas, itemPtr->x1, itemPtr->y1,
 		itemPtr->x2, itemPtr->y2);
     }
@@ -1282,14 +1300,14 @@ LineDeleteCoords(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
  *
  * LineToPoint --
  *
- *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given
- *	line, in canvas units.
+ *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given line, in canvas
+ *	units.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates
- *	are pointPtr[0] and pointPtr[1] is inside the line.  If the
- *	point isn't inside the line then the return value is the
- *	distance from the point to the line.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates are
+ *	pointPtr[0] and pointPtr[1] is inside the line. If the point isn't
+ *	inside the line then the return value is the distance from the point
+ *	to the line.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1299,10 +1317,10 @@ LineDeleteCoords(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static double
-LineToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against point. */
-    double *pointPtr;		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
+LineToPoint(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against point. */
+    double *pointPtr)		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
 {
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
@@ -1311,15 +1329,15 @@ LineToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
     double poly[10];
     double bestDist, dist, width;
     int numPoints, count;
-    int changedMiterToBevel;	/* Non-zero means that a mitered corner
-				 * had to be treated as beveled after all
-				 * because the angle was < 11 degrees. */
+    int changedMiterToBevel;	/* Non-zero means that a mitered corner had to
+				 * be treated as beveled after all because the
+				 * angle was < 11 degrees. */
 
     bestDist = 1.0e36;
 
     /*
-     * Handle smoothed lines by generating an expanded set of points
-     * against which to do the check.
+     * Handle smoothed lines by generating an expanded set of points against
+     * which to do the check.
      */
 
     if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
@@ -1338,9 +1356,8 @@ LineToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
     }
 
     if ((linePtr->smooth) && (linePtr->numPoints > 2)) {
-	numPoints = linePtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, (double *) NULL,
-		linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, (XPoint *) NULL,
-		(double *) NULL);
+	numPoints = linePtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, NULL,
+		linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, NULL, NULL);
 	if (numPoints <= MAX_STATIC_POINTS) {
 	    linePoints = staticSpace;
 	} else {
@@ -1348,8 +1365,7 @@ LineToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 		    (2*numPoints*sizeof(double)));
 	}
 	numPoints = linePtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, linePtr->coordPtr,
-		linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, (XPoint *) NULL,
-		linePoints);
+		linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, NULL, linePoints);
     } else {
 	numPoints = linePtr->numPoints;
 	linePoints = linePtr->coordPtr;
@@ -1362,26 +1378,25 @@ LineToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
     if (!numPoints || itemPtr->state==TK_STATE_HIDDEN) {
 	return bestDist;
     } else if (numPoints == 1) {
-	bestDist = hypot(linePoints[0] - pointPtr[0], linePoints[1] - pointPtr[1])
-		    - width/2.0;
+	bestDist = hypot(linePoints[0]-pointPtr[0], linePoints[1]-pointPtr[1])
+		- width/2.0;
 	if (bestDist < 0) bestDist = 0;
 	return bestDist;
     }
 
     /*
-     * The overall idea is to iterate through all of the edges of
-     * the line, computing a polygon for each edge and testing the
-     * point against that polygon.  In addition, there are additional
-     * tests to deal with rounded joints and caps.
+     * The overall idea is to iterate through all of the edges of the line,
+     * computing a polygon for each edge and testing the point against that
+     * polygon. In addition, there are additional tests to deal with rounded
+     * joints and caps.
      */
 
     changedMiterToBevel = 0;
     for (count = numPoints, coordPtr = linePoints; count >= 2;
 	    count--, coordPtr += 2) {
-
 	/*
-	 * If rounding is done around the first point then compute
-	 * the distance between the point and the point.
+	 * If rounding is done around the first point then compute the
+	 * distance between the point and the point.
 	 */
 
 	if (((linePtr->capStyle == CapRound) && (count == numPoints))
@@ -1398,9 +1413,9 @@ LineToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Compute the polygonal shape corresponding to this edge,
-	 * consisting of two points for the first point of the edge
-	 * and two points for the last point of the edge.
+	 * Compute the polygonal shape corresponding to this edge, consisting
+	 * of two points for the first point of the edge and two points for
+	 * the last point of the edge.
 	 */
 
 	if (count == numPoints) {
@@ -1412,14 +1427,13 @@ LineToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	    poly[2] = poly[4];
 	    poly[3] = poly[5];
 	} else {
-	    TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr+2, coordPtr, width, 0,
-		    poly, poly+2);
+	    TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr+2, coordPtr, width, 0, poly, poly+2);
 
 	    /*
-	     * If this line uses beveled joints, then check the distance
-	     * to a polygon comprising the last two points of the previous
-	     * polygon and the first two from this polygon;  this checks
-	     * the wedges that fill the mitered joint.
+	     * If this line uses beveled joints, then check the distance to a
+	     * polygon comprising the last two points of the previous polygon
+	     * and the first two from this polygon; this checks the wedges
+	     * that fill the mitered joint.
 	     */
 
 	    if ((linePtr->joinStyle == JoinBevel) || changedMiterToBevel) {
@@ -1442,8 +1456,8 @@ LineToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	    if (TkGetMiterPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, coordPtr+4,
 		    width, poly+4, poly+6) == 0) {
 		changedMiterToBevel = 1;
-		TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, width,
-			0, poly+4, poly+6);
+		TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, width, 0,
+			poly+4, poly+6);
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, width, 0,
@@ -1461,8 +1475,8 @@ LineToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If caps are rounded, check the distance to the cap around the
-     * final end point of the line.
+     * If caps are rounded, check the distance to the cap around the final end
+     * point of the line.
      */
 
     if (linePtr->capStyle == CapRound) {
@@ -1503,7 +1517,7 @@ LineToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	}
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     if ((linePoints != staticSpace) && (linePoints != linePtr->coordPtr)) {
 	ckfree((char *) linePoints);
     }
@@ -1515,14 +1529,12 @@ LineToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
  *
  * LineToArea --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to determine whether an item
- *	lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or overlapping
- *	a given rectangular area.
+ *	This function is called to determine whether an item lies entirely
+ *	inside, entirely outside, or overlapping a given rectangular area.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the
- *	area, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely
- *	inside the given area.
+ *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area, 0 if it
+ *	overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside the given area.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1532,10 +1544,10 @@ LineToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-LineToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against line. */
-    double *rectPtr;
+LineToArea(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against line. */
+    double *rectPtr)
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
     double staticSpace[2*MAX_STATIC_POINTS];
@@ -1564,6 +1576,7 @@ LineToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
 	return -1;
     } else if (linePtr->numPoints == 1) {
 	double oval[4];
+
 	oval[0] = linePtr->coordPtr[0]-radius;
 	oval[1] = linePtr->coordPtr[1]-radius;
 	oval[2] = linePtr->coordPtr[0]+radius;
@@ -1572,14 +1585,13 @@ LineToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Handle smoothed lines by generating an expanded set of points
-     * against which to do the check.
+     * Handle smoothed lines by generating an expanded set of points against
+     * which to do the check.
      */
 
     if ((linePtr->smooth) && (linePtr->numPoints > 2)) {
-	numPoints = linePtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, (double *) NULL,
-		linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, (XPoint *) NULL,
-		(double *) NULL);
+	numPoints = linePtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, NULL,
+		linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, NULL, NULL);
 	if (numPoints <= MAX_STATIC_POINTS) {
 	    linePoints = staticSpace;
 	} else {
@@ -1587,8 +1599,7 @@ LineToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
 		    (2*numPoints*sizeof(double)));
 	}
 	numPoints = linePtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, linePtr->coordPtr,
-		linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, (XPoint *) NULL,
-		linePoints);
+		linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, NULL, linePoints);
     } else {
 	numPoints = linePtr->numPoints;
 	linePoints = linePtr->coordPtr;
@@ -1602,7 +1613,7 @@ LineToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
 	width = 1.0;
     }
 
-    result = TkThickPolyLineToArea(linePoints, numPoints, 
+    result = TkThickPolyLineToArea(linePoints, numPoints,
 	    width, linePtr->capStyle, linePtr->joinStyle,
 	    rectPtr);
     if (result == 0) {
@@ -1630,7 +1641,7 @@ LineToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
 	}
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     if ((linePoints != staticSpace) && (linePoints != linePtr->coordPtr)) {
 	ckfree((char *) linePoints);
     }
@@ -1642,15 +1653,14 @@ LineToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
  *
  * ScaleLine --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to rescale a line item.
+ *	This function is invoked to rescale a line item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The line referred to by itemPtr is rescaled so that the
- *	following transformation is applied to all point
- *	coordinates:
+ *	The line referred to by itemPtr is rescaled so that the following
+ *	transformation is applied to all point coordinates:
  *		x' = originX + scaleX*(x-originX)
  *		y' = originY + scaleY*(y-originY)
  *
@@ -1658,20 +1668,21 @@ LineToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ScaleLine(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing line. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Line to be scaled. */
-    double originX, originY;		/* Origin about which to scale rect. */
-    double scaleX;			/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
-    double scaleY;			/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
+ScaleLine(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing line. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Line to be scaled. */
+    double originX, double originY,
+				/* Origin about which to scale rect. */
+    double scaleX,		/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
+    double scaleY)		/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
     double *coordPtr;
     int i;
 
     /*
-     * Delete any arrowheads before scaling all the points (so that
-     * the end-points of the line get restored).
+     * Delete any arrowheads before scaling all the points (so that the
+     * end-points of the line get restored).
      */
 
     if (linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1705,14 +1716,13 @@ ScaleLine(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
  *
  * GetLineIndex --
  *
- *	Parse an index into a line item and return either its value
- *	or an error.
+ *	Parse an index into a line item and return either its value or an
+ *	error.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.  If all went well, then *indexPtr is
- *	filled in with the index (into itemPtr) corresponding to
- *	string.  Otherwise an error message is left in
- *	interp->result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result. If all went well, then *indexPtr is filled in
+ *	with the index (into itemPtr) corresponding to string. Otherwise an
+ *	error message is left in interp->result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1721,14 +1731,14 @@ ScaleLine(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
  */
 
 static int
-GetLineIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item for which the index is being
+GetLineIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item for which the index is being
 				 * specified. */
-    Tcl_Obj *obj;		/* Specification of a particular coord
-				 * in itemPtr's line. */
-    int *indexPtr;		/* Where to store converted index. */
+    Tcl_Obj *obj,		/* Specification of a particular coord in
+				 * itemPtr's line. */
+    int *indexPtr)		/* Where to store converted index. */
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
     int length;
@@ -1738,16 +1748,14 @@ GetLineIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
 	if (strncmp(string, "end", (unsigned) length) == 0) {
 	    *indexPtr = 2*linePtr->numPoints;
 	} else {
-	    badIndex:
-
 	    /*
-	     * Some of the paths here leave messages in interp->result,
-	     * so we have to clear it out before storing our own message.
+	     * Some of the paths here leave messages in interp->result, so we
+	     * have to clear it out before storing our own message.
 	     */
 
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *) NULL, TCL_STATIC);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad index \"", string, "\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	badIndex:
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, NULL, TCL_STATIC);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad index \"", string, "\"", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     } else if (string[0] == '@') {
@@ -1780,7 +1788,7 @@ GetLineIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
 	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, obj, indexPtr) != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto badIndex;
 	}
-	*indexPtr &= -2; /* if index is odd, make it even */
+	*indexPtr &= -2;		/* if index is odd, make it even */
 	if (*indexPtr < 0){
 	    *indexPtr = 0;
 	} else if (*indexPtr > (2*linePtr->numPoints)) {
@@ -1795,25 +1803,24 @@ GetLineIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
  *
  * TranslateLine --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to move a line by a given amount.
+ *	This function is called to move a line by a given amount.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The position of the line is offset by (xDelta, yDelta), and
- *	the bounding box is updated in the generic part of the item
- *	structure.
+ *	The position of the line is offset by (xDelta, yDelta), and the
+ *	bounding box is updated in the generic part of the item structure.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TranslateLine(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being moved. */
-    double deltaX, deltaY;		/* Amount by which item is to be
-					 * moved. */
+TranslateLine(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being moved. */
+    double deltaX, double deltaY)
+				/* Amount by which item is to be moved. */
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
     double *coordPtr;
@@ -1846,13 +1853,13 @@ TranslateLine(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
  *
  * ParseArrowShape --
  *
- *	This procedure is called back during option parsing to
- *	parse arrow shape information.
+ *	This function is called back during option parsing to parse arrow
+ *	shape information.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result:  TCL_OK means
- *	that the arrow shape information was parsed ok, and
- *	TCL_ERROR means it couldn't be parsed.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result: TCL_OK means that the arrow
+ *	shape information was parsed ok, and TCL_ERROR means it couldn't be
+ *	parsed.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Arrow information in recordPtr is updated.
@@ -1862,14 +1869,14 @@ TranslateLine(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-ParseArrowShape(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, offset)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Not used. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Not used. */
-    CONST char *value;		/* Textual specification of arrow shape. */
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to item record in which to
-				 * store arrow information. */
-    int offset;			/* Offset of shape information in widget
+ParseArrowShape(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Not used. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Not used. */
+    CONST char *value,		/* Textual specification of arrow shape. */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* Pointer to item record in which to store
+				 * arrow information. */
+    int offset)			/* Offset of shape information in widget
 				 * record. */
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) recordPtr;
@@ -1878,14 +1885,14 @@ ParseArrowShape(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, offset)
     CONST char **argv = NULL;
 
     if (offset != Tk_Offset(LineItem, arrowShapeA)) {
-	panic("ParseArrowShape received bogus offset");
+	Tcl_Panic("ParseArrowShape received bogus offset");
     }
 
     if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, (char *) value, &argc, &argv) != TCL_OK) {
 	syntaxError:
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad arrow shape \"", value,
-		"\": must be list with three numbers", (char *) NULL);
+		"\": must be list with three numbers", NULL);
 	if (argv != NULL) {
 	    ckfree((char *) argv);
 	}
@@ -1913,8 +1920,8 @@ ParseArrowShape(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, offset)
  *
  * PrintArrowShape --
  *
- *	This procedure is a callback invoked by the configuration
- *	code to return a printable value describing an arrow shape.
+ *	This function is a callback invoked by the configuration code to
+ *	return a printable value describing an arrow shape.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1927,14 +1934,14 @@ ParseArrowShape(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, offset)
 
     /* ARGSUSED */
 static char *
-PrintArrowShape(clientData, tkwin, recordPtr, offset, freeProcPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Not used. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window associated with linePtr's widget. */
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to item record containing current
+PrintArrowShape(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Not used. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window associated with linePtr's widget. */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* Pointer to item record containing current
 				 * shape information. */
-    int offset;			/* Offset of arrow information in record. */
-    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr;	/* Store address of procedure to call to
-				 * free string here. */
+    int offset,			/* Offset of arrow information in record. */
+    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)	/* Store address of function to call to free
+				 * string here. */
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) recordPtr;
     char *buffer;
@@ -1952,27 +1959,27 @@ PrintArrowShape(clientData, tkwin, recordPtr, offset, freeProcPtr)
  *
  * ArrowParseProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked during option processing to handle
- *	the "-arrow" option.
+ *	This function is invoked during option processing to handle the
+ *	"-arrow" option.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return value.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The arrow for a given item gets replaced by the arrow
- *	indicated in the value argument.
+ *	The arrow for a given item gets replaced by the arrow indicated in the
+ *	value argument.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ArrowParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* some flags.*/
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for reporting errors. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    CONST char *value;			/* Value of option. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item. */
+ArrowParseProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* some flags.*/
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for reporting errors. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing canvas widget. */
+    CONST char *value,		/* Value of option. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record for item. */
+    int offset)			/* Offset into item. */
 {
     int c;
     size_t length;
@@ -2004,9 +2011,8 @@ ArrowParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad arrow spec \"", value, 
-	    "\": must be none, first, last, or both",
-	    (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad arrow spec \"", value,
+	    "\": must be none, first, last, or both", NULL);
     *arrowPtr = ARROWS_NONE;
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -2016,16 +2022,15 @@ ArrowParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  *
  * ArrowPrintProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk configuration code
- *	to produce a printable string for the "-arrow"
- *	configuration option.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk configuration code to produce a
+ *	printable string for the "-arrow" configuration option.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a string describing the arrows for
- *	the item referred to by "widgRec".  In addition, *freeProcPtr
- *	is filled in with the address of a procedure to call to free
- *	the result string when it's no longer needed (or NULL to
- *	indicate that the string doesn't need to be freed).
+ *	The return value is a string describing the arrows for the item
+ *	referred to by "widgRec". In addition, *freeProcPtr is filled in with
+ *	the address of a function to call to free the result string when it's
+ *	no longer needed (or NULL to indicate that the string doesn't need to
+ *	be freed).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2034,25 +2039,25 @@ ArrowParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  */
 
 static char *
-ArrowPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Ignored. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item. */
-    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr;		/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
-					 * information about how to reclaim
-					 * storage for return string. */
+ArrowPrintProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Ignored. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing canvas widget. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record for item. */
+    int offset,			/* Offset into item. */
+    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)	/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
+				 * information about how to reclaim storage
+				 * for return string. */
 {
     register Arrows *arrowPtr = (Arrows *) (widgRec + offset);
 
     switch (*arrowPtr) {
-      case ARROWS_FIRST:
+    case ARROWS_FIRST:
 	return "first";
-      case ARROWS_LAST:
+    case ARROWS_LAST:
 	return "last";
-      case ARROWS_BOTH:
+    case ARROWS_BOTH:
 	return "both";
-      default:
+    default:
 	return "none";
     }
 }
@@ -2062,40 +2067,38 @@ ArrowPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureArrows --
  *
- *	If arrowheads have been requested for a line, this
- *	procedure makes arrangements for the arrowheads.
+ *	If arrowheads have been requested for a line, this function makes
+ *	arrangements for the arrowheads.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Always returns TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Information in linePtr is set up for one or two arrowheads.
- *	the firstArrowPtr and lastArrowPtr polygons are allocated
- *	and initialized, if need be, and the end points of the line
- *	are adjusted so that a thick line doesn't stick out past
- *	the arrowheads.
+ *	Information in linePtr is set up for one or two arrowheads. The
+ *	firstArrowPtr and lastArrowPtr polygons are allocated and initialized,
+ *	if need be, and the end points of the line are adjusted so that a
+ *	thick line doesn't stick out past the arrowheads.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas in which arrows will be
-					 * displayed (interp and tkwin
-					 * fields are needed). */
-    LineItem *linePtr;			/* Item to configure for arrows. */
+ConfigureArrows(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas in which arrows will be displayed
+				 * (interp and tkwin fields are needed). */
+    LineItem *linePtr)		/* Item to configure for arrows. */
 {
     double *poly, *coordPtr;
     double dx, dy, length, sinTheta, cosTheta, temp;
-    double fracHeight;			/* Line width as fraction of
-					 * arrowhead width. */
-    double backup;			/* Distance to backup end points
-					 * so the line ends in the middle
-					 * of the arrowhead. */
-    double vertX, vertY;		/* Position of arrowhead vertex. */
-    double shapeA, shapeB, shapeC;	/* Adjusted coordinates (see
-					 * explanation below). */
+    double fracHeight;		/* Line width as fraction of arrowhead
+				 * width. */
+    double backup;		/* Distance to backup end points so the line
+				 * ends in the middle of the arrowhead. */
+    double vertX, vertY;	/* Position of arrowhead vertex. */
+    double shapeA, shapeB, shapeC;
+				/* Adjusted coordinates (see explanation
+				 * below). */
     double width;
     Tk_State state = linePtr->header.state;
 
@@ -2119,10 +2122,10 @@ ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The code below makes a tiny increase in the shape parameters
-     * for the line.  This is a bit of a hack, but it seems to result
-     * in displays that more closely approximate the specified parameters.
-     * Without the adjustment, the arrows come out smaller than expected.
+     * The code below makes a tiny increase in the shape parameters for the
+     * line. This is a bit of a hack, but it seems to result in displays that
+     * more closely approximate the specified parameters. Without the
+     * adjustment, the arrows come out smaller than expected.
      */
 
     shapeA = linePtr->arrowShapeA + 0.001;
@@ -2130,9 +2133,9 @@ ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr)
     shapeC = linePtr->arrowShapeC + width/2.0 + 0.001;
 
     /*
-     * If there's an arrowhead on the first point of the line, compute
-     * its polygon and adjust the first point of the line so that the
-     * line doesn't stick out past the leading edge of the arrowhead.
+     * If there's an arrowhead on the first point of the line, compute its
+     * polygon and adjust the first point of the line so that the line doesn't
+     * stick out past the leading edge of the arrowhead.
      */
 
     fracHeight = (width/2.0)/shapeC;
@@ -2169,9 +2172,8 @@ ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr)
 	poly[7] = poly[9]*fracHeight + vertY*(1.0-fracHeight);
 
 	/*
-	 * Polygon done.  Now move the first point towards the second so
-	 * that the corners at the end of the line are inside the
-	 * arrowhead.
+	 * Polygon done. Now move the first point towards the second so that
+	 * the corners at the end of the line are inside the arrowhead.
 	 */
 
 	linePtr->coordPtr[0] = poly[0] - backup*cosTheta;
@@ -2186,8 +2188,8 @@ ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr)
 	coordPtr = linePtr->coordPtr + 2*(linePtr->numPoints-2);
 	poly = linePtr->lastArrowPtr;
 	if (poly == NULL) {
-	    poly = (double *) ckalloc((unsigned)
-		    (2*PTS_IN_ARROW*sizeof(double)));
+	    poly = (double *)
+		    ckalloc((unsigned) (2*PTS_IN_ARROW*sizeof(double)));
 	    poly[0] = poly[10] = coordPtr[2];
 	    poly[1] = poly[11] = coordPtr[3];
 	    linePtr->lastArrowPtr = poly;
@@ -2203,10 +2205,10 @@ ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr)
 	}
 	vertX = poly[0] - shapeA*cosTheta;
 	vertY = poly[1] - shapeA*sinTheta;
-	temp = shapeC*sinTheta;
+	temp = shapeC * sinTheta;
 	poly[2] = poly[0] - shapeB*cosTheta + temp;
 	poly[8] = poly[2] - 2*temp;
-	temp = shapeC*cosTheta;
+	temp = shapeC * cosTheta;
 	poly[3] = poly[1] - shapeB*sinTheta - temp;
 	poly[9] = poly[3] + 2*temp;
 	poly[4] = poly[2]*fracHeight + vertX*(1.0-fracHeight);
@@ -2225,15 +2227,13 @@ ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr)
  *
  * LineToPostscript --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to generate Postscript for
- *	line items.
+ *	This function is called to generate Postscript for line items.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If an error
- *	occurs in generating Postscript then an error message is
- *	left in the interp's result, replacing whatever used
- *	to be there.  If no error occurs, then Postscript for the
- *	item is appended to the result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If an error occurs in
+ *	generating Postscript then an error message is left in the interp's
+ *	result, replacing whatever used to be there. If no error occurs, then
+ *	Postscript for the item is appended to the result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2242,15 +2242,13 @@ ConfigureArrows(canvas, linePtr)
  */
 
 static int
-LineToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Leave Postscript or error message
-					 * here. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about overall canvas. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item for which Postscript is
-					 * wanted. */
-    int prepass;			/* 1 means this is a prepass to
-					 * collect font information;  0 means
-					 * final Postscript is being created. */
+LineToPostscript(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Leave Postscript or error message here. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about overall canvas. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item for which Postscript is wanted. */
+    int prepass)		/* 1 means this is a prepass to collect font
+				 * information; 0 means final Postscript is
+				 * being created. */
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
     char buffer[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
@@ -2299,24 +2297,23 @@ LineToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 		linePtr->coordPtr[0], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, linePtr->coordPtr[1]),
 		width/2.0, width/2.0);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "matrix currentmatrix\n",buffer,
-		" scale 1 0 moveto 0 0 1 0 360 arc\nsetmatrix\n", (char *) NULL);
-	if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, color)
-		!= TCL_OK) {
+		" scale 1 0 moveto 0 0 1 0 360 arc\nsetmatrix\n", NULL);
+	if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, color) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (stipple != None) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", NULL);
 	    if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	} else {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", NULL);
 	}
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
     /*
-     * Generate a path for the line's center-line (do this differently
-     * for straight lines and smoothed lines).
+     * Generate a path for the line's center-line (do this differently for
+     * straight lines and smoothed lines).
      */
 
     if ((!linePtr->smooth) || (linePtr->numPoints < 3)) {
@@ -2327,29 +2324,27 @@ LineToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 		    linePtr->coordPtr, linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps);
 	} else {
 	    /*
-	     * Special hack: Postscript printers don't appear to be able
-	     * to turn a path drawn with "curveto"s into a clipping path
-	     * without exceeding resource limits, so TkMakeBezierPostscript
-	     * won't work for stippled curves.  Instead, generate all of
-	     * the intermediate points here and output them into the
-	     * Postscript file with "lineto"s instead.
+	     * Special hack: Postscript printers don't appear to be able to
+	     * turn a path drawn with "curveto"s into a clipping path without
+	     * exceeding resource limits, so TkMakeBezierPostscript won't work
+	     * for stippled curves. Instead, generate all of the intermediate
+	     * points here and output them into the Postscript file with
+	     * "lineto"s instead.
 	     */
 
 	    double staticPoints[2*MAX_STATIC_POINTS];
 	    double *pointPtr;
 	    int numPoints;
 
-	    numPoints = linePtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, (double *) NULL,
-		    linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, (XPoint *) NULL,
-		    (double *) NULL);
+	    numPoints = linePtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, NULL,
+		    linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, NULL, NULL);
 	    pointPtr = staticPoints;
 	    if (numPoints > MAX_STATIC_POINTS) {
 		pointPtr = (double *) ckalloc((unsigned)
 			(numPoints * 2 * sizeof(double)));
 	    }
 	    numPoints = linePtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, linePtr->coordPtr,
-		    linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, (XPoint *) NULL,
-		    pointPtr);
+		    linePtr->numPoints, linePtr->splineSteps, NULL, pointPtr);
 	    Tk_CanvasPsPath(interp, canvas, pointPtr, numPoints);
 	    if (pointPtr != staticPoints) {
 		ckfree((char *) pointPtr);
@@ -2367,17 +2362,16 @@ LineToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
     } else if (linePtr->capStyle == CapProjecting) {
 	style = "2 setlinecap\n";
     }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, style, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, style, NULL);
     style = "0 setlinejoin\n";
     if (linePtr->joinStyle == JoinRound) {
 	style = "1 setlinejoin\n";
     } else if (linePtr->joinStyle == JoinBevel) {
 	style = "2 setlinejoin\n";
     }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, style, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, style, NULL);
 
-    if (Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, itemPtr,
-	    &(linePtr->outline)) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, itemPtr, &(linePtr->outline)) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -2387,8 +2381,7 @@ LineToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 
     if (linePtr->firstArrowPtr != NULL) {
 	if (stipple != None) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore gsave\n",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore gsave\n", NULL);
 	}
 	if (ArrowheadPostscript(interp, canvas, linePtr,
 		linePtr->firstArrowPtr) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -2397,7 +2390,7 @@ LineToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
     }
     if (linePtr->lastArrowPtr != NULL) {
 	if (stipple != None) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore gsave\n", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore gsave\n", NULL);
 	}
 	if (ArrowheadPostscript(interp, canvas, linePtr,
 		linePtr->lastArrowPtr) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -2412,15 +2405,14 @@ LineToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
  *
  * ArrowheadPostscript --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to generate Postscript for
- *	an arrowhead for a line item.
+ *	This function is called to generate Postscript for an arrowhead for a
+ *	line item.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If an error
- *	occurs in generating Postscript then an error message is
- *	left in the interp's result, replacing whatever used
- *	to be there.  If no error occurs, then Postscript for the
- *	arrowhead is appended to the result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If an error occurs in
+ *	generating Postscript then an error message is left in the interp's
+ *	result, replacing whatever used to be there. If no error occurs, then
+ *	Postscript for the arrowhead is appended to the result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2429,14 +2421,13 @@ LineToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
  */
 
 static int
-ArrowheadPostscript(interp, canvas, linePtr, arrowPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Leave Postscript or error message
-					 * here. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about overall canvas. */
-    LineItem *linePtr;			/* Line item for which Postscript is
-					 * being generated. */
-    double *arrowPtr;			/* Pointer to first of five points
-					 * describing arrowhead polygon. */
+ArrowheadPostscript(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Leave Postscript or error message here. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about overall canvas. */
+    LineItem *linePtr,		/* Line item for which Postscript is being
+				 * generated. */
+    double *arrowPtr)		/* Pointer to first of five points describing
+				 * arrowhead polygon. */
 {
     Pixmap stipple;
     Tk_State state = linePtr->header.state;
@@ -2458,13 +2449,20 @@ ArrowheadPostscript(interp, canvas, linePtr, arrowPtr)
 
     Tk_CanvasPsPath(interp, canvas, arrowPtr, PTS_IN_ARROW);
     if (stipple != None) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", (char *) NULL);
-	if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple)
-		!= TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", NULL);
+	if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", NULL);
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvPoly.c b/generic/tkCanvPoly.c
index 3027c88..b86bc63 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvPoly.c
+++ b/generic/tkCanvPoly.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkCanvPoly.c --
  *
  *	This file implements polygon items for canvas widgets.
@@ -7,13 +7,12 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Ajuba Solutions.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include <stdio.h>
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkCanvas.h"
 
 /*
@@ -22,24 +21,28 @@
 
 typedef struct PolygonItem  {
     Tk_Item header;		/* Generic stuff that's the same for all
-				 * types.  MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
+				 * types. MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
     Tk_Outline outline;		/* Outline structure */
-    int numPoints;		/* Number of points in polygon.
-				 * Polygon is always closed. */
+    int numPoints;		/* Number of points in polygon. Polygon is
+				 * always closed. */
     int pointsAllocated;	/* Number of points for which space is
 				 * allocated at *coordPtr. */
-    double *coordPtr;		/* Pointer to malloc-ed array containing
-				 * x- and y-coords of all points in polygon.
+    double *coordPtr;		/* Pointer to malloc-ed array containing x-
+				 * and y-coords of all points in polygon.
 				 * X-coords are even-valued indices, y-coords
 				 * are corresponding odd-valued indices. */
     int joinStyle;		/* Join style for outline */
     Tk_TSOffset tsoffset;
     XColor *fillColor;		/* Foreground color for polygon. */
-    XColor *activeFillColor;	/* Foreground color for polygon if state is active. */
-    XColor *disabledFillColor;	/* Foreground color for polygon if state is disabled. */
+    XColor *activeFillColor;	/* Foreground color for polygon if state is
+				 * active. */
+    XColor *disabledFillColor;	/* Foreground color for polygon if state is
+				 * disabled. */
     Pixmap fillStipple;		/* Stipple bitmap for filling polygon. */
-    Pixmap activeFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling polygon if state is active. */
-    Pixmap disabledFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling polygon if state is disabled. */
+    Pixmap activeFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling polygon if state
+				 * is active. */
+    Pixmap disabledFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling polygon if state
+				 * is disabled. */
     GC fillGC;			/* Graphics context for filling polygon. */
     Tk_SmoothMethod *smooth;	/* Non-zero means draw shape smoothed (i.e.
 				 * with Bezier splines). */
@@ -79,125 +82,116 @@ static Tk_CustomOption pixelOption = {
 };
 
 static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activedash", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.activeDash),
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activedash", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.activeDash),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activefill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, activeFillColor),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activeoutline", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.activeColor),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activeoutlinestipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.activeStipple),
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activefill", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, activeFillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activeoutline", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.activeColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activeoutlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.activeStipple),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activestipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, activeFillStipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activestipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, activeFillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", NULL, NULL,
 	"0.0", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.activeWidth),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.dash),
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.dash),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL,
 	"0", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.offset),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.disabledDash),
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.disabledDash),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, disabledFillColor),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledoutline", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.disabledColor),
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, disabledFillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledoutline", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.disabledColor),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledoutlinestipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.disabledStipple),
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledoutlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.disabledStipple),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, disabledFillStipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disabledwidth", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, disabledFillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disabledwidth", NULL, NULL,
 	"0.0", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.disabledWidth),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", NULL, NULL,
 	"black", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, fillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE, "-joinstyle", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE, "-joinstyle", NULL, NULL,
 	"round", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, joinStyle), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", NULL, NULL,
 	"0,0", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, tsoffset),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &offsetOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-outline", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.color),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-outlineoffset", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-outline", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.color), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-outlineoffset", NULL, NULL,
 	"0,0", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.tsoffset),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &offsetOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-outlinestipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.stipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-smooth", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-outlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.stipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-smooth", NULL, NULL,
 	"0", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, smooth),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &smoothOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-splinesteps", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-splinesteps", NULL, NULL,
 	"12", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, splineSteps), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK,
-	&stateOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, fillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-width", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, fillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-width", NULL, NULL,
 	"1.0", Tk_Offset(PolygonItem, outline.width),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+    {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ComputePolygonBbox _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    PolygonItem *polyPtr));
-static int		ConfigurePolygon _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static void		ComputePolygonBbox(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    PolygonItem *polyPtr);
+static int		ConfigurePolygon(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags));
-static int		CreatePolygon _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags);
+static int		CreatePolygon(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		DeletePolygon _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr,  Display *display));
-static void		DisplayPolygon _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DeletePolygon(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr,  Display *display);
+static void		DisplayPolygon(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst,
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
-static int		GetPolygonIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height);
+static int		GetPolygonIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *obj, int *indexPtr));
-static int		PolygonCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *obj, int *indexPtr);
+static int		PolygonCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		PolygonDeleteCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int first, int last));
-static void		PolygonInsert _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int beforeThis, Tcl_Obj *obj));
-static int		PolygonToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr));
-static double		PolygonToPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr));
-static int		PolygonToPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass));
-static void		ScalePolygon _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		PolygonDeleteCoords(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int first, int last);
+static void		PolygonInsert(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int beforeThis, Tcl_Obj *obj);
+static int		PolygonToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr);
+static double		PolygonToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr);
+static int		PolygonToPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass);
+static void		ScalePolygon(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY,
-			    double scaleX, double scaleY));
-static void		TranslatePolygon _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY));
+			    double scaleX, double scaleY);
+static void		TranslatePolygon(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY);
 
 /*
- * The structures below defines the polygon item type by means
- * of procedures that can be invoked by generic item code.
+ * The structures below defines the polygon item type by means of functions
+ * that can be invoked by generic item code.
  */
 
 Tk_ItemType tkPolygonType = {
@@ -216,17 +210,17 @@ Tk_ItemType tkPolygonType = {
     ScalePolygon,			/* scaleProc */
     TranslatePolygon,			/* translateProc */
     (Tk_ItemIndexProc *) GetPolygonIndex,/* indexProc */
-    (Tk_ItemCursorProc *) NULL,		/* icursorProc */
-    (Tk_ItemSelectionProc *) NULL,	/* selectionProc */
+    NULL,				/* icursorProc */
+    NULL,				/* selectionProc */
     (Tk_ItemInsertProc *) PolygonInsert,/* insertProc */
     PolygonDeleteCoords,		/* dTextProc */
-    (Tk_ItemType *) NULL,		/* nextPtr */
+    NULL,				/* nextPtr */
 };
 
 /*
- * The definition below determines how large are static arrays
- * used to hold spline points (splines larger than this have to
- * have their arrays malloc-ed).
+ * The definition below determines how large are static arrays used to hold
+ * spline points (splines larger than this have to have their arrays
+ * malloc-ed).
  */
 
 #define MAX_STATIC_POINTS 200
@@ -236,14 +230,12 @@ Tk_ItemType tkPolygonType = {
  *
  * CreatePolygon --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to create a new polygon item in
- *	a canvas.
+ *	This function is invoked to create a new polygon item in a canvas.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurred in
- *	creating the item, then an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result;  in this case itemPtr is
- *	left uninitialized, so it can be safely freed by the
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If an error occurred in creating the
+ *	item, then an error message is left in the interp's result; in this
+ *	case itemPtr is left uninitialized, so it can be safely freed by the
  *	caller.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -253,24 +245,24 @@ Tk_ItemType tkPolygonType = {
  */
 
 static int
-CreatePolygon(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas to hold new item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Record to hold new item;  header
-					 * has been initialized by caller. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Arguments describing polygon. */
+CreatePolygon(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas to hold new item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Record to hold new item; header has been
+				 * initialized by caller. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Arguments describing polygon. */
 {
     PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
     int i;
 
     if (objc == 0) {
-	panic("canvas did not pass any coords\n");
+	Tcl_Panic("canvas did not pass any coords\n");
     }
 
     /*
-     * Carry out initialization that is needed in order to clean
-     * up after errors during the the remainder of this procedure.
+     * Carry out initialization that is needed in order to clean up after
+     * errors during the the remainder of this function.
      */
 
     Tk_CreateOutline(&(polyPtr->outline));
@@ -288,14 +280,14 @@ CreatePolygon(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
     polyPtr->activeFillStipple = None;
     polyPtr->disabledFillStipple = None;
     polyPtr->fillGC = None;
-    polyPtr->smooth = (Tk_SmoothMethod *) NULL;
+    polyPtr->smooth = NULL;
     polyPtr->splineSteps = 12;
     polyPtr->autoClosed = 0;
 
     /*
-     * Count the number of points and then parse them into a point
-     * array.  Leading arguments are assumed to be points if they
-     * start with a digit or a minus sign followed by a digit.
+     * Count the number of points and then parse them into a point array.
+     * Leading arguments are assumed to be points if they start with a digit
+     * or a minus sign followed by a digit.
      */
 
     for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
@@ -313,7 +305,7 @@ CreatePolygon(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    error:
+  error:
     DeletePolygon(canvas, itemPtr, Tk_Display(Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas)));
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -323,9 +315,8 @@ CreatePolygon(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * PolygonCoords --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "coords" widget
- *	command on polygons.  See the user documentation for details
- *	on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "coords" widget command on
+ *	polygons. See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR, and sets the interp's result.
@@ -337,25 +328,25 @@ CreatePolygon(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-PolygonCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item whose coordinates are to be
-					 * read or modified. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of coordinates supplied in
-					 * objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1,
-					 * x2, y2, ... */
+PolygonCoords(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item whose coordinates are to be read or
+				 * modified. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of coordinates supplied in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1, x2, y2, ... */
 {
     PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
     int i, numPoints;
 
     if (objc == 0) {
 	/*
-	 * Print the coords used to create the polygon.  If we auto
-	 * closed the polygon then we don't report the last point.
+	 * Print the coords used to create the polygon. If we auto closed the
+	 * polygon then we don't report the last point.
 	 */
+
 	Tcl_Obj *subobj, *obj = Tcl_NewObj();
+
 	for (i = 0; i < 2*(polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed); i++) {
 	    subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(polyPtr->coordPtr[i]);
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
@@ -371,6 +362,7 @@ PolygonCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
     }
     if (objc & 1) {
 	char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+
 	sprintf(buf, "wrong # coordinates: expected an even number, got %d",
 		objc);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
@@ -383,8 +375,8 @@ PolygonCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * One extra point gets allocated here, because we always
-	     * add another point to close the polygon.
+	     * One extra point gets allocated here, because we always add
+	     * another point to close the polygon.
 	     */
 
 	    polyPtr->coordPtr = (double *) ckalloc((unsigned)
@@ -403,7 +395,7 @@ PolygonCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 	/*
 	 * Close the polygon if it isn't already closed.
 	 */
-    
+
 	if (objc>2 && ((polyPtr->coordPtr[objc-2] != polyPtr->coordPtr[0])
 		|| (polyPtr->coordPtr[objc-1] != polyPtr->coordPtr[1]))) {
 	    polyPtr->autoClosed = 1;
@@ -421,28 +413,28 @@ PolygonCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ConfigurePolygon --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to configure various aspects
- *	of a polygon item such as its background color.
+ *	This function is invoked to configure various aspects of a polygon
+ *	item such as its background color.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result code.  If an error occurs, then
- *	an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result code. If an error occurs, then an error message
+ *	is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors and stipple
- *	patterns, may be set for itemPtr.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors and stipple patterns, may be
+ *	set for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigurePolygon(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Polygon item to reconfigure. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of elements in objv.  */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
+ConfigurePolygon(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Polygon item to reconfigure. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of elements in objv.  */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
 {
     PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
     XGCValues gcValues;
@@ -460,8 +452,8 @@ ConfigurePolygon(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * A few of the options require additional processing, such as
-     * graphics contexts.
+     * A few of the options require additional processing, such as graphics
+     * contexts.
      */
 
     state = itemPtr->state;
@@ -562,8 +554,8 @@ ConfigurePolygon(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * DeletePolygon --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to clean up the data structure
- *	associated with a polygon item.
+ *	This function is called to clean up the data structure associated with
+ *	a polygon item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -575,11 +567,10 @@ ConfigurePolygon(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  */
 
 static void
-DeletePolygon(canvas, itemPtr, display)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Info about overall canvas widget. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being deleted. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display containing window for
-					 * canvas. */
+DeletePolygon(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Info about overall canvas widget. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being deleted. */
+    Display *display)		/* Display containing window for canvas. */
 {
     PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -615,24 +606,22 @@ DeletePolygon(canvas, itemPtr, display)
  *
  * ComputePolygonBbox --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to compute the bounding box of
- *	all the pixels that may be drawn as part of a polygon.
+ *	This function is invoked to compute the bounding box of all the pixels
+ *	that may be drawn as part of a polygon.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header
- *	for itemPtr.
+ *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ComputePolygonBbox(canvas, polyPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    PolygonItem *polyPtr;		/* Item whose bbox is to be
-					 * recomputed. */
+ComputePolygonBbox(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    PolygonItem *polyPtr)	/* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
 {
     double *coordPtr;
     int i;
@@ -664,12 +653,11 @@ ComputePolygonBbox(canvas, polyPtr)
     polyPtr->header.y1 = polyPtr->header.y2 = (int) coordPtr[1];
 
     /*
-     * Compute the bounding box of all the points in the polygon,
-     * then expand in all directions by the outline's width to take
-     * care of butting or rounded corners and projecting or
-     * rounded caps.  This expansion is an overestimate (worst-case
-     * is square root of two over two) but it's simple.  Don't do
-     * anything special for curves.  This causes an additional
+     * Compute the bounding box of all the points in the polygon, then expand
+     * in all directions by the outline's width to take care of butting or
+     * rounded corners and projecting or rounded caps. This expansion is an
+     * overestimate (worst-case is square root of two over two) but it's
+     * simple. Don't do anything special for curves. This causes an additional
      * overestimate in the bounding box, but is faster.
      */
 
@@ -715,6 +703,7 @@ ComputePolygonBbox(canvas, polyPtr)
 	if (tsoffset) {
 	    if (tsoffset->flags & TK_OFFSET_INDEX) {
 		int index = tsoffset->flags & ~TK_OFFSET_INDEX;
+
 		if (tsoffset->flags == INT_MAX) {
 		    index = (polyPtr->numPoints - 1) * 2;
 		}
@@ -750,13 +739,14 @@ ComputePolygonBbox(canvas, polyPtr)
 
 	/*
 	 * For mitered lines, make a second pass through all the points.
-	 * Compute the locations of the two miter vertex points and add
-	 * those into the bounding box.
+	 * Compute the locations of the two miter vertex points and add those
+	 * into the bounding box.
 	 */
 
 	if (polyPtr->joinStyle == JoinMiter) {
 	    double miter[4];
 	    int j;
+
 	    coordPtr = polyPtr->coordPtr;
 	    if (polyPtr->numPoints>3) {
 		if (TkGetMiterPoints(coordPtr+2*(polyPtr->numPoints-2),
@@ -767,9 +757,8 @@ ComputePolygonBbox(canvas, polyPtr)
 		    }
 		}
 	     }
-	    for (i = polyPtr->numPoints ; i >= 3;
-		    i--, coordPtr += 2) {
-    
+	    for (i = polyPtr->numPoints ; i >= 3; i--, coordPtr += 2) {
+
 		if (TkGetMiterPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, coordPtr+4,
 			width, miter, miter+2)) {
 		    for (j = 0; j < 4; j += 2) {
@@ -781,8 +770,8 @@ ComputePolygonBbox(canvas, polyPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Add one more pixel of fudge factor just to be safe (e.g.
-     * X may round differently than we do).
+     * Add one more pixel of fudge factor just to be safe (e.g. X may round
+     * differently than we do).
      */
 
     polyPtr->header.x1 -= 1;
@@ -796,34 +785,33 @@ ComputePolygonBbox(canvas, polyPtr)
  *
  * TkFillPolygon --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to convert a polygon to screen
- *	coordinates and display it using a particular GC.
+ *	This function is invoked to convert a polygon to screen coordinates
+ *	and display it using a particular GC.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation
- *	information in canvas.
+ *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation information in
+ *	canvas.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkFillPolygon(canvas, coordPtr, numPoints, display, drawable, gc, outlineGC)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas whose coordinate system
-					 * is to be used for drawing. */
-    double *coordPtr;			/* Array of coordinates for polygon:
-					 * x1, y1, x2, y2, .... */
-    int numPoints;			/* Twice this many coordinates are
-					 * present at *coordPtr. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display on which to draw polygon. */
-    Drawable drawable;			/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
-					 * polygon. */
-    GC gc;				/* Graphics context for drawing. */
-    GC outlineGC;			/* If not None, use this to draw an
-					 * outline around the polygon after
-					 * filling it. */
+TkFillPolygon(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas whose coordinate system is to be
+				 * used for drawing. */
+    double *coordPtr,		/* Array of coordinates for polygon: x1, y1,
+				 * x2, y2, .... */
+    int numPoints,		/* Twice this many coordinates are present at
+				 * *coordPtr. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw polygon. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
+				 * polygon. */
+    GC gc,			/* Graphics context for drawing. */
+    GC outlineGC)		/* If not None, use this to draw an outline
+				 * around the polygon after filling it. */
 {
     XPoint staticPoints[MAX_STATIC_POINTS];
     XPoint *pointPtr;
@@ -831,9 +819,9 @@ TkFillPolygon(canvas, coordPtr, numPoints, display, drawable, gc, outlineGC)
     int i;
 
     /*
-     * Build up an array of points in screen coordinates.  Use a
-     * static array unless the polygon has an enormous number of points;
-     * in this case, dynamically allocate an array.
+     * Build up an array of points in screen coordinates. Use a static array
+     * unless the polygon has an enormous number of points; in this case,
+     * dynamically allocate an array.
      */
 
     if (numPoints <= MAX_STATIC_POINTS) {
@@ -842,7 +830,7 @@ TkFillPolygon(canvas, coordPtr, numPoints, display, drawable, gc, outlineGC)
 	pointPtr = (XPoint *) ckalloc((unsigned) (numPoints * sizeof(XPoint)));
     }
 
-    for (i = 0, pPtr = pointPtr; i < numPoints; i += 1, coordPtr += 2, pPtr++) {
+    for (i=0, pPtr=pointPtr ; i<numPoints; i+=1, coordPtr+=2, pPtr++) {
 	Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, coordPtr[0], coordPtr[1], &pPtr->x,
 		&pPtr->y);
     }
@@ -870,28 +858,27 @@ TkFillPolygon(canvas, coordPtr, numPoints, display, drawable, gc, outlineGC)
  *
  * DisplayPolygon --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to draw a polygon item in a given
- *	drawable.
+ *	This function is invoked to draw a polygon item in a given drawable.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation
- *	information in canvas.
+ *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation information in
+ *	canvas.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayPolygon(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display on which to draw item. */
-    Drawable drawable;			/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
-					 * item. */
-    int x, y, width, height;		/* Describes region of canvas that
-					 * must be redisplayed (not used). */
+DisplayPolygon(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to be displayed. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw item. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw item. */
+    int x, int y, int width, int height)
+				/* Describes region of canvas that must be
+				 * redisplayed (not used). */
 {
     PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
@@ -904,7 +891,7 @@ DisplayPolygon(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 	return;
     }
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
     if (((TkCanvas *)canvas)->currentItemPtr == itemPtr) {
@@ -922,16 +909,17 @@ DisplayPolygon(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 	    stipple = polyPtr->disabledFillStipple;
 	}
     }
+
     /*
-     * If we're stippling then modify the stipple offset in the GC.  Be
-     * sure to reset the offset when done, since the GC is supposed to be
-     * read-only.
+     * If we're stippling then modify the stipple offset in the GC. Be sure to
+     * reset the offset when done, since the GC is supposed to be read-only.
      */
 
     if ((stipple != None) && (polyPtr->fillGC != None)) {
 	Tk_TSOffset *tsoffset = &polyPtr->tsoffset;
 	int w=0; int h=0;
 	int flags = tsoffset->flags;
+
 	if (!(flags & TK_OFFSET_INDEX) && (flags & (TK_OFFSET_CENTER|TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE))) {
 	    Tk_SizeOfBitmap(display, stipple, &w, &h);
 	    if (flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
@@ -956,6 +944,7 @@ DisplayPolygon(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
     if(polyPtr->numPoints < 3) {
 	short x,y;
 	int intLineWidth = (int) (linewidth + 0.5);
+
 	if (intLineWidth < 1) {
 	    intLineWidth = 1;
 	}
@@ -974,13 +963,12 @@ DisplayPolygon(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 	XPoint *pointPtr;
 
 	/*
-	 * This is a smoothed polygon.  Display using a set of generated
-	 * spline points rather than the original points.
+	 * This is a smoothed polygon. Display using a set of generated spline
+	 * points rather than the original points.
 	 */
 
-	numPoints = polyPtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, (double *) NULL,
-		polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps, (XPoint *) NULL,
-		(double *) NULL);
+	numPoints = polyPtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, NULL,
+		polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps, NULL, NULL);
 	if (numPoints <= MAX_STATIC_POINTS) {
 	    pointPtr = staticPoints;
 	} else {
@@ -988,8 +976,7 @@ DisplayPolygon(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 		    (numPoints * sizeof(XPoint)));
 	}
 	numPoints = polyPtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, polyPtr->coordPtr,
-		polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps, pointPtr,
-		(double *) NULL);
+		polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps, pointPtr, NULL);
 	if (polyPtr->fillGC != None) {
 	    XFillPolygon(display, drawable, polyPtr->fillGC, pointPtr,
 		    numPoints, Complex, CoordModeOrigin);
@@ -1025,118 +1012,134 @@ DisplayPolygon(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
  */
 
 static void
-PolygonInsert(canvas, itemPtr, beforeThis, obj)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing text item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Line item to be modified. */
-    int beforeThis;		/* Index before which new coordinates
-				 * are to be inserted. */
-    Tcl_Obj *obj;		/* New coordinates to be inserted. */
+PolygonInsert(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing text item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Line item to be modified. */
+    int beforeThis,		/* Index before which new coordinates are to
+				 * be inserted. */
+    Tcl_Obj *obj)		/* New coordinates to be inserted. */
 {
     PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
     int length, objc, i;
     Tcl_Obj **objv;
-    double *new;
+    double *newCoordPtr;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
     if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
-    if (!obj || (Tcl_ListObjGetElements((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, obj, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
+    if (!obj || (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(NULL, obj, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
 	    || !objc || objc&1) {
 	return;
     }
     length = 2*(polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed);
-    while(beforeThis>length) beforeThis-=length;
-    while(beforeThis<0) beforeThis+=length;
-    new = (double *) ckalloc((unsigned)(sizeof(double) * (length + 2 + objc)));
+    while (beforeThis>length) {
+	beforeThis -= length;
+    }
+    while (beforeThis<0) {
+	beforeThis += length;
+    }
+    newCoordPtr = (double *)
+	    ckalloc(sizeof(double) * (unsigned)(length + 2 + objc));
     for (i=0; i<beforeThis; i++) {
-	new[i] = polyPtr->coordPtr[i];
+	newCoordPtr[i] = polyPtr->coordPtr[i];
     }
     for (i=0; i<objc; i++) {
-	if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj((Tcl_Interp *) NULL,objv[i],
-		new+(i+beforeThis))!=TCL_OK) {
-	    ckfree((char *) new);
+	if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, objv[i],
+		&newCoordPtr[i+beforeThis]) != TCL_OK){
+	    ckfree((char *) newCoordPtr);
 	    return;
 	}
     }
 
-    for(i=beforeThis; i<length; i++) {
-	new[i+objc] = polyPtr->coordPtr[i];
+    for (i=beforeThis; i<length; i++) {
+	newCoordPtr[i+objc] = polyPtr->coordPtr[i];
     }
-    if(polyPtr->coordPtr) ckfree((char *) polyPtr->coordPtr);
-    length+=objc;
-    polyPtr->coordPtr = new;
+    if (polyPtr->coordPtr) {
+	ckfree((char *) polyPtr->coordPtr);
+    }
+    length += objc;
+    polyPtr->coordPtr = newCoordPtr;
     polyPtr->numPoints = (length/2) + polyPtr->autoClosed;
 
     /*
-     * Close the polygon if it isn't already closed, or remove autoclosing
-     * if the user's coordinates are now closed.
+     * Close the polygon if it isn't already closed, or remove autoclosing if
+     * the user's coordinates are now closed.
      */
 
     if (polyPtr->autoClosed) {
-	if ((new[length-2] == new[0]) && (new[length-1] == new[1])) {
+	if ((newCoordPtr[length-2] == newCoordPtr[0])
+		&& (newCoordPtr[length-1] == newCoordPtr[1])) {
 	    polyPtr->autoClosed = 0;
 	    polyPtr->numPoints--;
 	}
-    }
-    else {
-	if ((new[length-2] != new[0]) || (new[length-1] != new[1])) {
+    } else {
+	if ((newCoordPtr[length-2] != newCoordPtr[0])
+		|| (newCoordPtr[length-1] != newCoordPtr[1])) {
 	    polyPtr->autoClosed = 1;
 	    polyPtr->numPoints++;
 	}
     }
 
-    new[length] = new[0];
-    new[length+1] = new[1];
+    newCoordPtr[length] = newCoordPtr[0];
+    newCoordPtr[length+1] = newCoordPtr[1];
     if (((length-objc)>3) && (state != TK_STATE_HIDDEN)) {
 	/*
-	 * This is some optimizing code that will result that only the part
-	 * of the polygon that changed (and the objects that are overlapping
-	 * with that part) need to be redrawn. A special flag is set that
-	 * instructs the general canvas code not to redraw the whole
-	 * object. If this flag is not set, the canvas will do the redrawing,
-	 * otherwise I have to do it here.
+	 * This is some optimizing code that will result that only the part of
+	 * the polygon that changed (and the objects that are overlapping with
+	 * that part) need to be redrawn. A special flag is set that instructs
+	 * the general canvas code not to redraw the whole object. If this
+	 * flag is not set, the canvas will do the redrawing, otherwise I have
+	 * to do it here.
 	 */
+
     	double width;
 	int j;
 	itemPtr->redraw_flags |= TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
 
 	/*
-	 * The header elements that normally are used for the
-	 * bounding box, are now used to calculate the bounding
-	 * box for only the part that has to be redrawn. That
-	 * doesn't matter, because afterwards the bounding
-	 * box has to be re-calculated anyway.
+	 * The header elements that normally are used for the bounding box,
+	 * are now used to calculate the bounding box for only the part that
+	 * has to be redrawn. That doesn't matter, because afterwards the
+	 * bounding box has to be re-calculated anyway.
 	 */
 
 	itemPtr->x1 = itemPtr->x2 = (int) polyPtr->coordPtr[beforeThis];
 	itemPtr->y1 = itemPtr->y2 = (int) polyPtr->coordPtr[beforeThis+1];
 	beforeThis-=2; objc+=4;
-	if(polyPtr->smooth) {
-	    beforeThis-=2; objc+=4;
-	} /* be carefull; beforeThis could now be negative */
-	for(i=beforeThis; i<beforeThis+objc; i+=2) {
-		j=i;
-		if(j<0) j+=length;
-		if(j>=length) j-=length;
-		TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, polyPtr->coordPtr+j);
+	if (polyPtr->smooth) {
+	    beforeThis-=2;
+	    objc+=4;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Be careful; beforeThis could now be negative
+	 */
+
+	for (i=beforeThis; i<beforeThis+objc; i+=2) {
+	    j = i;
+	    if (j<0) {
+		j += length;
+	    } else if (j>=length) {
+		j -= length;
+	    }
+	    TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, polyPtr->coordPtr+j);
 	}
 	width = polyPtr->outline.width;
 	if (((TkCanvas *)canvas)->currentItemPtr == itemPtr) {
-		if (polyPtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
-		    width = polyPtr->outline.activeWidth;
-		}
+	    if (polyPtr->outline.activeWidth > width) {
+		width = polyPtr->outline.activeWidth;
+	    }
 	} else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
-		if (polyPtr->outline.disabledWidth>0.0) {
-		    width = polyPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
-		}
+	    if (polyPtr->outline.disabledWidth > 0.0) {
+		width = polyPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
+	    }
 	}
 	itemPtr->x1 -= (int) width; itemPtr->y1 -= (int) width;
 	itemPtr->x2 += (int) width; itemPtr->y2 += (int) width;
 	Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw(canvas,
-		itemPtr->x1, itemPtr->y1,
-		itemPtr->x2, itemPtr->y2);
+		itemPtr->x1, itemPtr->y1, itemPtr->x2, itemPtr->y2);
     }
 
     ComputePolygonBbox(canvas, polyPtr);
@@ -1153,37 +1156,47 @@ PolygonInsert(canvas, itemPtr, beforeThis, obj)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Characters between "first" and "last", inclusive, get
- *	deleted from itemPtr.
+ *	Characters between "first" and "last", inclusive, get deleted from
+ *	itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-PolygonDeleteCoords(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item in which to delete characters. */
-    int first;			/* Index of first character to delete. */
-    int last;			/* Index of last character to delete. */
+PolygonDeleteCoords(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item in which to delete characters. */
+    int first,			/* Index of first character to delete. */
+    int last)			/* Index of last character to delete. */
 {
     PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
     int count, i;
     int length = 2*(polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed);
 
-    while(first>=length) first-=length;
-    while(first<0)	 first+=length;
-    while(last>=length)	 last-=length;
-    while(last<0)	 last+=length;
+    while (first>=length) {
+	first -= length;
+    }
+    while (first<0) {
+	first += length;
+    }
+    while (last>=length) {
+	last -= length;
+    }
+    while (last<0) {
+	last += length;
+    }
 
     first &= -2;
     last &= -2;
 
     count = last + 2 - first;
-    if(count<=0) count +=length;
+    if (count<=0) {
+	count += length;
+    }
 
-    if(count >= length) {
+    if (count >= length) {
 	polyPtr->numPoints = 0;
-	if(polyPtr->coordPtr != NULL) {
+	if (polyPtr->coordPtr != NULL) {
 	    ckfree((char *) polyPtr->coordPtr);
 	    polyPtr->coordPtr = NULL;
 	}
@@ -1191,7 +1204,7 @@ PolygonDeleteCoords(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
 	return;
     }
 
-    if(last>=first) {
+    if (last>=first) {
 	for(i=last+2; i<length; i++) {
 	    polyPtr->coordPtr[i-count] = polyPtr->coordPtr[i];
 	}
@@ -1211,14 +1224,14 @@ PolygonDeleteCoords(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
  *
  * PolygonToPoint --
  *
- *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given
- *	polygon, in canvas units.
+ *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given polygon, in canvas
+ *	units.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates
- *	are pointPtr[0] and pointPtr[1] is inside the polygon.  If the
- *	point isn't inside the polygon then the return value is the
- *	distance from the point to the polygon.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates are
+ *	pointPtr[0] and pointPtr[1] is inside the polygon. If the point isn't
+ *	inside the polygon then the return value is the distance from the
+ *	point to the polygon.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1228,10 +1241,10 @@ PolygonDeleteCoords(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static double
-PolygonToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against point. */
-    double *pointPtr;		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
+PolygonToPoint(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against point. */
+    double *pointPtr)		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
 {
     PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
     double *coordPtr, *polyPoints;
@@ -1240,15 +1253,15 @@ PolygonToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
     double radius;
     double bestDist, dist;
     int numPoints, count;
-    int changedMiterToBevel;	/* Non-zero means that a mitered corner
-				 * had to be treated as beveled after all
-				 * because the angle was < 11 degrees. */
+    int changedMiterToBevel;	/* Non-zero means that a mitered corner had to
+				 * be treated as beveled after all because the
+				 * angle was < 11 degrees. */
     double width;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
     bestDist = 1.0e36;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
     width = polyPtr->outline.width;
@@ -1269,9 +1282,9 @@ PolygonToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
      */
 
     if ((polyPtr->smooth) && (polyPtr->numPoints>2)) {
-	numPoints = polyPtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, (double *) NULL,
-		polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps, (XPoint *) NULL,
-		(double *) NULL);
+	numPoints = polyPtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, NULL,
+		polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps, NULL,
+		NULL);
 	if (numPoints <= MAX_STATIC_POINTS) {
 	    polyPoints = staticSpace;
 	} else {
@@ -1279,7 +1292,7 @@ PolygonToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 		    (2*numPoints*sizeof(double)));
 	}
 	numPoints = polyPtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, polyPtr->coordPtr,
-		polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps, (XPoint *) NULL,
+		polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps, NULL,
 		polyPoints);
     } else {
 	numPoints = polyPtr->numPoints;
@@ -1300,22 +1313,23 @@ PolygonToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	}
     }
 
-    if ((polyPtr->outline.gc == None) || (width <= 1)) goto donepoint;
+    if ((polyPtr->outline.gc == None) || (width <= 1)) {
+	goto donepoint;
+    }
 
     /*
-     * The overall idea is to iterate through all of the edges of
-     * the line, computing a polygon for each edge and testing the
-     * point against that polygon.  In addition, there are additional
-     * tests to deal with rounded joints and caps.
+     * The overall idea is to iterate through all of the edges of the line,
+     * computing a polygon for each edge and testing the point against that
+     * polygon. In addition, there are additional tests to deal with rounded
+     * joints and caps.
      */
 
     changedMiterToBevel = 0;
     for (count = numPoints, coordPtr = polyPoints; count >= 2;
 	    count--, coordPtr += 2) {
-
 	/*
-	 * If rounding is done around the first point then compute
-	 * the distance between the point and the point.
+	 * If rounding is done around the first point then compute the
+	 * distance between the point and the point.
 	 */
 
 	if (polyPtr->joinStyle == JoinRound) {
@@ -1330,9 +1344,9 @@ PolygonToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Compute the polygonal shape corresponding to this edge,
-	 * consisting of two points for the first point of the edge
-	 * and two points for the last point of the edge.
+	 * Compute the polygonal shape corresponding to this edge, consisting
+	 * of two points for the first point of the edge and two points for
+	 * the last point of the edge.
 	 */
 
 	if (count == numPoints) {
@@ -1348,10 +1362,10 @@ PolygonToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 		    poly, poly+2);
 
 	    /*
-	     * If this line uses beveled joints, then check the distance
-	     * to a polygon comprising the last two points of the previous
-	     * polygon and the first two from this polygon;  this checks
-	     * the wedges that fill the mitered joint.
+	     * If this line uses beveled joints, then check the distance to a
+	     * polygon comprising the last two points of the previous polygon
+	     * and the first two from this polygon; this checks the wedges
+	     * that fill the mitered joint.
 	     */
 
 	    if ((polyPtr->joinStyle == JoinBevel) || changedMiterToBevel) {
@@ -1374,8 +1388,8 @@ PolygonToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	    if (TkGetMiterPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, coordPtr+4,
 		    (double) width, poly+4, poly+6) == 0) {
 		changedMiterToBevel = 1;
-		TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, (double) width,
-			0, poly+4, poly+6);
+		TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, (double) width, 0,
+			poly+4, poly+6);
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, (double) width, 0,
@@ -1392,7 +1406,7 @@ PolygonToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	}
     }
 
-    donepoint:
+  donepoint:
     if ((polyPoints != staticSpace) && polyPoints != polyPtr->coordPtr) {
 	ckfree((char *) polyPoints);
     }
@@ -1404,14 +1418,13 @@ PolygonToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
  *
  * PolygonToArea --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to determine whether an item
- *	lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or overlapping
- *	a given rectangular area.
+ *	This function is called to determine whether an item lies entirely
+ *	inside, entirely outside, or overlapping a given rectangular area.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area
- *	given by rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely
- *	inside the given area.
+ *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area given by
+ *	rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside the given
+ *	area.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1421,12 +1434,12 @@ PolygonToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-PolygonToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against polygon. */
-    double *rectPtr;		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
-				 * (x1, y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular
-				 * area.  */
+PolygonToArea(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against polygon. */
+    double *rectPtr)		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
+				 * (x1,y1,x2,y2) describing rectangular
+				 * area. */
 {
     PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
     double *coordPtr;
@@ -1434,19 +1447,18 @@ PolygonToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
     double *polyPoints, poly[10];
     double radius;
     int numPoints, count;
-    int changedMiterToBevel;	/* Non-zero means that a mitered corner
-				 * had to be treated as beveled after all
-				 * because the angle was < 11 degrees. */
-    int inside;			/* Tentative guess about what to return,
-				 * based on all points seen so far:  one
-				 * means everything seen so far was
-				 * inside the area;  -1 means everything
-				 * was outside the area.  0 means overlap
-				 * has been found. */ 
+    int changedMiterToBevel;	/* Non-zero means that a mitered corner had to
+				 * be treated as beveled after all because the
+				 * angle was < 11 degrees. */
+    int inside;			/* Tentative guess about what to return, based
+				 * on all points seen so far: one means
+				 * everything seen so far was inside the area;
+				 * -1 means everything was outside the area. 0
+				 * means overlap has been found. */
     double width;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
@@ -1468,60 +1480,62 @@ PolygonToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
 	return -1;
     } else if (polyPtr->numPoints <3) {
 	double oval[4];
+
 	oval[0] = polyPtr->coordPtr[0]-radius;
 	oval[1] = polyPtr->coordPtr[1]-radius;
 	oval[2] = polyPtr->coordPtr[0]+radius;
 	oval[3] = polyPtr->coordPtr[1]+radius;
 	return TkOvalToArea(oval, rectPtr);
     }
+
     /*
      * Handle smoothed polygons by generating an expanded set of points
      * against which to do the check.
      */
 
     if (polyPtr->smooth) {
-	numPoints = polyPtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, (double *) NULL,
-		polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps, (XPoint *) NULL,
-		(double *) NULL);
+	numPoints = polyPtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, NULL,
+		polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps, NULL, NULL);
 	if (numPoints <= MAX_STATIC_POINTS) {
 	    polyPoints = staticSpace;
 	} else {
-	    polyPoints = (double *) ckalloc((unsigned)
-		    (2*numPoints*sizeof(double)));
+	    polyPoints = (double *)
+		    ckalloc((unsigned) (2*numPoints*sizeof(double)));
 	}
 	numPoints = polyPtr->smooth->coordProc(canvas, polyPtr->coordPtr,
-		polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps, (XPoint *) NULL,
-		polyPoints);
+		polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps, NULL, polyPoints);
     } else {
 	numPoints = polyPtr->numPoints;
 	polyPoints = polyPtr->coordPtr;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Simple test to see if we are in the polygon.  Polygons are
-     * different from othe canvas items in that they register points
-     * being inside even if it isn't filled.
+     * Simple test to see if we are in the polygon. Polygons are different
+     * from othe canvas items in that they register points being inside even
+     * if it isn't filled.
      */
+
     inside = TkPolygonToArea(polyPoints, numPoints, rectPtr);
-    if (inside==0) goto donearea;
+    if (inside==0) {
+	goto donearea;
+    }
 
-    if (polyPtr->outline.gc == None) goto donearea ;
+    if (polyPtr->outline.gc == None) {
+	goto donearea;
+    }
 
     /*
-     * Iterate through all of the edges of the line, computing a polygon
-     * for each edge and testing the area against that polygon.  In
-     * addition, there are additional tests to deal with rounded joints
-     * and caps.
+     * Iterate through all of the edges of the line, computing a polygon for
+     * each edge and testing the area against that polygon. In addition, there
+     * are additional tests to deal with rounded joints and caps.
      */
 
     changedMiterToBevel = 0;
     for (count = numPoints, coordPtr = polyPoints; count >= 2;
 	    count--, coordPtr += 2) {
- 
 	/*
-	 * If rounding is done around the first point of the edge
-	 * then test a circular region around the point with the
-	 * area.
+	 * If rounding is done around the first point of the edge then test a
+	 * circular region around the point with the area.
 	 */
 
 	if (polyPtr->joinStyle == JoinRound) {
@@ -1536,28 +1550,26 @@ PolygonToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Compute the polygonal shape corresponding to this edge,
-	 * consisting of two points for the first point of the edge
-	 * and two points for the last point of the edge.
+	 * Compute the polygonal shape corresponding to this edge, consisting
+	 * of two points for the first point of the edge and two points for
+	 * the last point of the edge.
 	 */
 
 	if (count == numPoints) {
-	    TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr+2, coordPtr, width,
-		    0, poly, poly+2);
+	    TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr+2, coordPtr, width, 0, poly, poly+2);
 	} else if ((polyPtr->joinStyle == JoinMiter) && !changedMiterToBevel) {
 	    poly[0] = poly[6];
 	    poly[1] = poly[7];
 	    poly[2] = poly[4];
 	    poly[3] = poly[5];
 	} else {
-	    TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr+2, coordPtr, width, 0,
-		    poly, poly+2);
+	    TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr+2, coordPtr, width, 0, poly, poly+2);
 
 	    /*
-	     * If the last joint was beveled, then also check a
-	     * polygon comprising the last two points of the previous
-	     * polygon and the first two from this polygon;  this checks
-	     * the wedges that fill the beveled joint.
+	     * If the last joint was beveled, then also check a polygon
+	     * comprising the last two points of the previous polygon and the
+	     * first two from this polygon; this checks the wedges that fill
+	     * the beveled joint.
 	     */
 
 	    if ((polyPtr->joinStyle == JoinBevel) || changedMiterToBevel) {
@@ -1571,18 +1583,15 @@ PolygonToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
 	    }
 	}
 	if (count == 2) {
-	    TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, width,
-		    0, poly+4, poly+6);
+	    TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, width, 0, poly+4, poly+6);
 	} else if (polyPtr->joinStyle == JoinMiter) {
 	    if (TkGetMiterPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, coordPtr+4,
 		    width, poly+4, poly+6) == 0) {
 		changedMiterToBevel = 1;
-		TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, width,
-			0, poly+4, poly+6);
+		TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, width,0, poly+4, poly+6);
 	    }
 	} else {
-	    TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, width, 0,
-		    poly+4, poly+6);
+	    TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr, coordPtr+2, width, 0, poly+4, poly+6);
 	}
 	poly[8] = poly[0];
 	poly[9] = poly[1];
@@ -1592,7 +1601,7 @@ PolygonToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
 	}
     }
 
-    donearea:
+  donearea:
     if ((polyPoints != staticSpace) && (polyPoints != polyPtr->coordPtr)) {
 	ckfree((char *) polyPoints);
     }
@@ -1604,15 +1613,14 @@ PolygonToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
  *
  * ScalePolygon --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to rescale a polygon item.
+ *	This function is invoked to rescale a polygon item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The polygon referred to by itemPtr is rescaled so that the
- *	following transformation is applied to all point
- *	coordinates:
+ *	The polygon referred to by itemPtr is rescaled so that the following
+ *	transformation is applied to all point coordinates:
  *		x' = originX + scaleX*(x-originX)
  *		y' = originY + scaleY*(y-originY)
  *
@@ -1620,12 +1628,13 @@ PolygonToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ScalePolygon(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing polygon. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Polygon to be scaled. */
-    double originX, originY;		/* Origin about which to scale rect. */
-    double scaleX;			/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
-    double scaleY;			/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
+ScalePolygon(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing polygon. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Polygon to be scaled. */
+    double originX, double originY,
+				/* Origin about which to scale rect. */
+    double scaleX,		/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
+    double scaleY)		/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
 {
     PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
     double *coordPtr;
@@ -1644,14 +1653,13 @@ ScalePolygon(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
  *
  * GetPolygonIndex --
  *
- *	Parse an index into a polygon item and return either its value
- *	or an error.
+ *	Parse an index into a polygon item and return either its value or an
+ *	error.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.  If all went well, then *indexPtr is
- *	filled in with the index (into itemPtr) corresponding to
- *	string.  Otherwise an error message is left in
- *	interp->result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result. If all went well, then *indexPtr is filled in
+ *	with the index (into itemPtr) corresponding to string. Otherwise an
+ *	error message is left in interp->result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1660,33 +1668,31 @@ ScalePolygon(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
  */
 
 static int
-GetPolygonIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item for which the index is being
+GetPolygonIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item for which the index is being
 				 * specified. */
-    Tcl_Obj *obj;		/* Specification of a particular coord
-				 * in itemPtr's line. */
-    int *indexPtr;		/* Where to store converted index. */
+    Tcl_Obj *obj,		/* Specification of a particular coord in
+				 * itemPtr's line. */
+    int *indexPtr)		/* Where to store converted index. */
 {
     PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
     int length;
     char *string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, &length);
 
     if (string[0] == 'e') {
-	if (strncmp(string, "end", (unsigned) length) == 0) {
+	if (strncmp(string, "end", (unsigned)length) == 0) {
 	    *indexPtr = 2*(polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed);
 	} else {
-	    badIndex:
-
 	    /*
-	     * Some of the paths here leave messages in interp->result,
-	     * so we have to clear it out before storing our own message.
+	     * Some of the paths here leave messages in interp->result, so we
+	     * have to clear it out before storing our own message.
 	     */
 
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *) NULL, TCL_STATIC);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad index \"", string, "\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	badIndex:
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, NULL, TCL_STATIC);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad index \"", string, "\"", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     } else if (string[0] == '@') {
@@ -1717,6 +1723,7 @@ GetPolygonIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
 	}
     } else {
 	int count = 2*(polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed);
+
 	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, obj, indexPtr) != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto badIndex;
 	}
@@ -1739,26 +1746,24 @@ GetPolygonIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
  *
  * TranslatePolygon --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to move a polygon by a given
- *	amount.
+ *	This function is called to move a polygon by a given amount.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The position of the polygon is offset by (xDelta, yDelta),
- *	and the bounding box is updated in the generic part of the
- *	item structure.
+ *	The position of the polygon is offset by (xDelta, yDelta), and the
+ *	bounding box is updated in the generic part of the item structure.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TranslatePolygon(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being moved. */
-    double deltaX, deltaY;		/* Amount by which item is to be
-					 * moved. */
+TranslatePolygon(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being moved. */
+    double deltaX, double deltaY)
+				/* Amount by which item is to be moved. */
 {
     PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
     double *coordPtr;
@@ -1777,15 +1782,13 @@ TranslatePolygon(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
  *
  * PolygonToPostscript --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to generate Postscript for
- *	polygon items.
+ *	This function is called to generate Postscript for polygon items.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If an error
- *	occurs in generating Postscript then an error message is
- *	left in the interp's result, replacing whatever used
- *	to be there.  If no error occurs, then Postscript for the
- *	item is appended to the result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If an error occurs in
+ *	generating Postscript then an error message is left in the interp's
+ *	result, replacing whatever used to be there. If no error occurs, then
+ *	Postscript for the item is appended to the result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1794,15 +1797,13 @@ TranslatePolygon(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
  */
 
 static int
-PolygonToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Leave Postscript or error message
-					 * here. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about overall canvas. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item for which Postscript is
-					 * wanted. */
-    int prepass;			/* 1 means this is a prepass to
-					 * collect font information;  0 means
-					 * final Postscript is being created. */
+PolygonToPostscript(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Leave Postscript or error message here. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about overall canvas. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item for which Postscript is wanted. */
+    int prepass)		/* 1 means this is a prepass to collect font
+				 * information; 0 means final Postscript is
+				 * being created. */
 {
     PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
     char *style;
@@ -1868,17 +1869,17 @@ PolygonToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 		polyPtr->coordPtr[0], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, polyPtr->coordPtr[1]),
 		width/2.0, width/2.0);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "matrix currentmatrix\n",string,
-		" scale 1 0 moveto 0 0 1 0 360 arc\nsetmatrix\n", (char *) NULL);
+		" scale 1 0 moveto 0 0 1 0 360 arc\nsetmatrix\n", NULL);
 	if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, color) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (stipple != None) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", NULL);
 	    if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	} else {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", NULL);
 	}
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
@@ -1899,16 +1900,15 @@ PolygonToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (fillStipple != None) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "eoclip ", (char *) NULL);
-	    if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, fillStipple)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "eoclip ", NULL);
+	    if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, fillStipple) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    if (color != NULL) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore gsave\n", (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore gsave\n", NULL);
 	    }
 	} else {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "eofill\n", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "eofill\n", NULL);
 	}
     }
 
@@ -1917,13 +1917,12 @@ PolygonToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
      */
 
     if (color != NULL) {
-
 	if (!polyPtr->smooth || !polyPtr->smooth->postscriptProc) {
 	    Tk_CanvasPsPath(interp, canvas, polyPtr->coordPtr,
-		polyPtr->numPoints);
+		    polyPtr->numPoints);
 	} else {
 	    polyPtr->smooth->postscriptProc(interp, canvas, polyPtr->coordPtr,
-		polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps);
+		    polyPtr->numPoints, polyPtr->splineSteps);
 	}
 
 	if (polyPtr->joinStyle == JoinRound) {
@@ -1933,8 +1932,7 @@ PolygonToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 	} else {
 	    style = "0";
 	}
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, style," setlinejoin 1 setlinecap\n",
-		(char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, style," setlinejoin 1 setlinecap\n", NULL);
 	if (Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, itemPtr,
 		&(polyPtr->outline)) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1942,3 +1940,11 @@ PolygonToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvPs.c b/generic/tkCanvPs.c
index 88e106a..ac8f105 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvPs.c
+++ b/generic/tkCanvPs.c
@@ -1,28 +1,28 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkCanvPs.c --
  *
- *	This module provides Postscript output support for canvases,
- *	including the "postscript" widget command plus a few utility
- *	procedures used for generating Postscript.
+ *	This module provides Postscript output support for canvases, including
+ *	the "postscript" widget command plus a few utility functions used for
+ *	generating Postscript.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkCanvas.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
+#include "tkFont.h"
 
 /*
  * See tkCanvas.h for key data structures used to implement canvases.
  */
 
 /*
- * The following definition is used in generating postscript for images
- * and windows.
+ * The following definition is used in generating postscript for images and
+ * windows.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkColormapData {	/* Hold color information for a window */
@@ -36,11 +36,12 @@ typedef struct TkColormapData {	/* Hold color information for a window */
 
 /*
  * One of the following structures is created to keep track of Postscript
- * output being generated.  It consists mostly of information provided on
- * the widget command line.
+ * output being generated. It consists mostly of information provided on the
+ * widget command line.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkPostscriptInfo {
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The canvas being printed. */
     int x, y, width, height;	/* Area to print, in canvas pixel
 				 * coordinates. */
     int x2, y2;			/* x+width and y+height. */
@@ -55,93 +56,90 @@ typedef struct TkPostscriptInfo {
     double scale;		/* Scale factor for conversion: each pixel
 				 * maps into this many points. */
     Tk_Anchor pageAnchor;	/* How to anchor bbox on Postscript page. */
-    int rotate;			/* Non-zero means output should be rotated
-				 * on page (landscape mode). */
+    int rotate;			/* Non-zero means output should be rotated on
+				 * page (landscape mode). */
     char *fontVar;		/* If non-NULL, gives name of global variable
 				 * containing font mapping information.
 				 * Malloc'ed. */
     char *colorVar;		/* If non-NULL, give name of global variable
 				 * containing color mapping information.
 				 * Malloc'ed. */
-    char *colorMode;		/* Mode for handling colors:  "monochrome",
+    char *colorMode;		/* Mode for handling colors: "monochrome",
 				 * "gray", or "color".  Malloc'ed. */
-    int colorLevel;		/* Numeric value corresponding to colorMode:
-				 * 0 for mono, 1 for gray, 2 for color. */
+    int colorLevel;		/* Numeric value corresponding to colorMode: 0
+				 * for mono, 1 for gray, 2 for color. */
     char *fileName;		/* Name of file in which to write Postscript;
 				 * NULL means return Postscript info as
 				 * result. Malloc'ed. */
-    char *channelName;		/* If -channel is specified, the name of
-                                 * the channel to use. */
+    char *channelName;		/* If -channel is specified, the name of the
+                                 * channel to use. */
     Tcl_Channel chan;		/* Open channel corresponding to fileName. */
     Tcl_HashTable fontTable;	/* Hash table containing names of all font
-				 * families used in output.  The hash table
+				 * families used in output. The hash table
 				 * values are not used. */
-    int prepass;		/* Non-zero means that we're currently in
-				 * the pre-pass that collects font information,
-				 * so the Postscript generated isn't
-				 * relevant. */
-    int prolog;			/* Non-zero means output should contain
-				   the file prolog.ps in the header. */
+    int prepass;		/* Non-zero means that we're currently in the
+				 * pre-pass that collects font information, so
+				 * the Postscript generated isn't relevant. */
+    int prolog;			/* Non-zero means output should contain the
+				 * prolog definitions in the header. */
 } TkPostscriptInfo;
 
 /*
- * The table below provides a template that's used to process arguments
- * to the canvas "postscript" command and fill in TkPostscriptInfo
- * structures.
+ * The table below provides a template that's used to process arguments to the
+ * canvas "postscript" command and fill in TkPostscriptInfo structures.
  */
 
 static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-colormap", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-colormap", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, colorVar), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-colormode", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-colormode", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, colorMode), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-file", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-file", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, fileName), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-channel", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-channel", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, channelName), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-fontmap", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-fontmap", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, fontVar), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-height", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-height", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, height), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-pageanchor", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-pageanchor", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, pageAnchor), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-pageheight", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-pageheight", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, pageHeightString), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-pagewidth", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-pagewidth", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, pageWidthString), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-pagex", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-pagex", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, pageXString), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-pagey", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-pagey", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, pageYString), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, "-prolog", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, "-prolog", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, prolog), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, "-rotate", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, "-rotate", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, rotate), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-width", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-width", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, width), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-x", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-x", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, x), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-y", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-y", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TkPostscriptInfo, y), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+    {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static int		GetPostscriptPoints _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *string, double *doublePtr));
+static int		GetPostscriptPoints(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    char *string, double *doublePtr);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkCanvPostscriptCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "postscript" options
- *	of the widget command for canvas widgets. See the user
- *	documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "postscript" options of the
+ *	widget command for canvas widgets. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -154,16 +152,15 @@ static int		GetPostscriptPoints _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
 
     /* ARGSUSED */
 int
-TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
-    TkCanvas *canvasPtr;		/* Information about canvas widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Argument strings.  Caller has
-					 * already parsed this command enough
-					 * to know that argv[1] is
-					 * "postscript". */
+TkCanvPostscriptCmd(
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr,	/* Information about canvas widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    CONST char **argv)		/* Argument strings. Caller has already parsed
+				 * this command enough to know that argv[1] is
+				 * "postscript". */
 {
-    TkPostscriptInfo psInfo;
+    TkPostscriptInfo psInfo, *psInfoPtr = &psInfo;
     Tk_PostscriptInfo oldInfoPtr;
     int result;
     Tk_Item *itemPtr;
@@ -173,30 +170,28 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
     time_t now;
     size_t length;
     Tk_Window tkwin = canvasPtr->tkwin;
-    int deltaX = 0, deltaY = 0;		/* Offset of lower-left corner of
-					 * area to be marked up, measured
-					 * in canvas units from the positioning
-					 * point on the page (reflects
-					 * anchor position).  Initial values
-					 * needed only to stop compiler
-					 * warnings. */
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     Tcl_DString buffer;
-    char psenccmd[]="::tk::ensure_psenc_is_loaded";
+    char psenccmd[] = "::tk::ensure_psenc_is_loaded";
+    int deltaX = 0, deltaY = 0;	/* Offset of lower-left corner of area to be
+				 * marked up, measured in canvas units from
+				 * the positioning point on the page (reflects
+				 * anchor position). Initial values needed
+				 * only to stop compiler warnings. */
 
     /*
-     *----------------------------------------------------------------
-     * Initialize the data structure describing Postscript generation,
-     * then process all the arguments to fill the data structure in.
-     *----------------------------------------------------------------
+     * Initialize the data structure describing Postscript generation, then
+     * process all the arguments to fill the data structure in.
      */
+
     result = Tcl_EvalEx(interp,psenccmd,-1,TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
     if (result != TCL_OK) {
         return result;
     }
     oldInfoPtr = canvasPtr->psInfo;
-    canvasPtr->psInfo = (Tk_PostscriptInfo) &psInfo;
+    canvasPtr->psInfo = (Tk_PostscriptInfo) psInfoPtr;
+    psInfo.tkwin = canvasPtr->tkwin;
     psInfo.x = canvasPtr->xOrigin;
     psInfo.y = canvasPtr->yOrigin;
     psInfo.width = -1;
@@ -220,9 +215,8 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
     psInfo.prepass = 0;
     psInfo.prolog = 1;
     Tcl_InitHashTable(&psInfo.fontTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
-    result = Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin,
-	    configSpecs, argc-2, argv+2, (char *) &psInfo,
-	    TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
+    result = Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, argc-2, argv+2,
+	    (char *) &psInfo, TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
     if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	goto cleanup;
     }
@@ -265,38 +259,38 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 	psInfo.scale /= WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
     }
     switch (psInfo.pageAnchor) {
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_W:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
-	    deltaX = 0;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_N:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_S:
-	    deltaX = -psInfo.width/2;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_E:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
-	    deltaX = -psInfo.width;
-	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_W:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
+	deltaX = 0;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_N:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_S:
+	deltaX = -psInfo.width/2;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_E:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
+	deltaX = -psInfo.width;
+	break;
     }
     switch (psInfo.pageAnchor) {
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_N:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
-	    deltaY = - psInfo.height;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_W:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_E:
-	    deltaY = -psInfo.height/2;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_S:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
-	    deltaY = 0;
-	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_N:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
+	deltaY = - psInfo.height;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_W:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_E:
+	deltaY = -psInfo.height/2;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_S:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
+	deltaY = 0;
+	break;
     }
 
     if (psInfo.colorMode == NULL) {
@@ -310,22 +304,20 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 	} else if (strncmp(psInfo.colorMode, "color", length) == 0) {
 	    psInfo.colorLevel = 2;
 	} else {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad color mode \"",
-		    psInfo.colorMode, "\": must be monochrome, ",
-		    "gray, or color", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad color mode \"", psInfo.colorMode,
+		    "\": must be monochrome, gray, or color", NULL);
 	    goto cleanup;
 	}
     }
 
     if (psInfo.fileName != NULL) {
-
         /*
          * Check that -file and -channel are not both specified.
          */
 
         if (psInfo.channelName != NULL) {
             Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't specify both -file",
-                    " and -channel", (char *) NULL);
+                    " and -channel", NULL);
             result = TCL_ERROR;
             goto cleanup;
         }
@@ -337,11 +329,11 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 
         if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
             Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't specify -file in a",
-                    " safe interpreter", (char *) NULL);
+                    " safe interpreter", NULL);
             result = TCL_ERROR;
             goto cleanup;
         }
-        
+
 	p = Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, psInfo.fileName, &buffer);
 	if (p == NULL) {
 	    goto cleanup;
@@ -355,35 +347,31 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 
     if (psInfo.channelName != NULL) {
         int mode;
-        
+
         /*
-         * Check that the channel is found in this interpreter and that it
-         * is open for writing.
+         * Check that the channel is found in this interpreter and that it is
+         * open for writing.
          */
 
-        psInfo.chan = Tcl_GetChannel(interp, psInfo.channelName,
-                &mode);
+        psInfo.chan = Tcl_GetChannel(interp, psInfo.channelName, &mode);
         if (psInfo.chan == (Tcl_Channel) NULL) {
             result = TCL_ERROR;
             goto cleanup;
         }
         if ((mode & TCL_WRITABLE) == 0) {
-            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "channel \"",
-                    psInfo.channelName, "\" wasn't opened for writing",
-                    (char *) NULL);
+            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "channel \"", psInfo.channelName,
+		    "\" wasn't opened for writing", NULL);
             result = TCL_ERROR;
             goto cleanup;
         }
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     *--------------------------------------------------------
-     * Make a pre-pass over all of the items, generating Postscript
-     * and then throwing it away.  The purpose of this pass is just
-     * to collect information about all the fonts in use, so that
-     * we can output font information in the proper form required
-     * by the Document Structuring Conventions.
-     *--------------------------------------------------------
+     * Make a pre-pass over all of the items, generating Postscript and then
+     * throwing it away. The purpose of this pass is just to collect
+     * information about all the fonts in use, so that we can output font
+     * information in the proper form required by the Document Structuring
+     * Conventions.
      */
 
     psInfo.prepass = 1;
@@ -401,11 +389,10 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    /*
-	     * An error just occurred.  Just skip out of this loop.
-	     * There's no need to report the error now;  it can be
-	     * reported later (errors can happen later that don't
-	     * happen now, so we still have to check for errors later
-	     * anyway).
+	     * An error just occurred. Just skip out of this loop. There's no
+	     * need to report the error now; it can be reported later (errors
+	     * can happen later that don't happen now, so we still have to
+	     * check for errors later anyway).
 	     */
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -413,117 +400,109 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
     psInfo.prepass = 0;
 
     /*
-     *--------------------------------------------------------
      * Generate the header and prolog for the Postscript.
-     *--------------------------------------------------------
      */
 
     if (psInfo.prolog) {
-      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0\n",
-		       "%%Creator: Tk Canvas Widget\n", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0\n",
+		"%%Creator: Tk Canvas Widget\n", NULL);
 #ifdef HAVE_PW_GECOS
-    if (!Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
-	struct passwd *pwPtr = getpwuid(getuid());	/* INTL: Native. */
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%For: ",
-		(pwPtr != NULL) ? pwPtr->pw_gecos : "Unknown", "\n",
-		(char *) NULL);
-	endpwent();
-    }
+	if (!Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
+	    struct passwd *pwPtr = getpwuid(getuid());	/* INTL: Native. */
+
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%For: ",
+		    (pwPtr != NULL) ? pwPtr->pw_gecos : "Unknown", "\n", NULL);
+	    endpwent();
+	}
 #endif /* HAVE_PW_GECOS */
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%Title: Window ",
-	    Tk_PathName(tkwin), "\n", (char *) NULL);
-    time(&now);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%CreationDate: ",
-	    ctime(&now), (char *) NULL);		/* INTL: Native. */
-    if (!psInfo.rotate) {
-	sprintf(string, "%d %d %d %d",
-		(int) (psInfo.pageX + psInfo.scale*deltaX),
-		(int) (psInfo.pageY + psInfo.scale*deltaY),
-		(int) (psInfo.pageX + psInfo.scale*(deltaX + psInfo.width)
-			+ 1.0),
-		(int) (psInfo.pageY + psInfo.scale*(deltaY + psInfo.height)
-			+ 1.0));
-    } else {
-	sprintf(string, "%d %d %d %d",
-		(int) (psInfo.pageX - psInfo.scale*(deltaY + psInfo.height)),
-		(int) (psInfo.pageY + psInfo.scale*deltaX),
-		(int) (psInfo.pageX - psInfo.scale*deltaY + 1.0),
-		(int) (psInfo.pageY + psInfo.scale*(deltaX + psInfo.width)
-			+ 1.0));
-    }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%BoundingBox: ", string,
-	    "\n", (char *) NULL);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%Pages: 1\n", 
-	    "%%DocumentData: Clean7Bit\n", (char *) NULL);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%Orientation: ",
-	    psInfo.rotate ? "Landscape\n" : "Portrait\n", (char *) NULL);
-    p = "%%DocumentNeededResources: font ";
-    for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&psInfo.fontTable, &search);
-	    hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, p,
-		Tcl_GetHashKey(&psInfo.fontTable, hPtr),
-		"\n", (char *) NULL);
-	p = "%%+ font ";
-    }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%EndComments\n\n", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%Title: Window ", Tk_PathName(tkwin), "\n",
+		NULL);
+	time(&now);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%CreationDate: ",
+		ctime(&now), NULL);		/* INTL: Native. */
+	if (!psInfo.rotate) {
+	    sprintf(string, "%d %d %d %d",
+		    (int) (psInfo.pageX + psInfo.scale*deltaX),
+		    (int) (psInfo.pageY + psInfo.scale*deltaY),
+		    (int) (psInfo.pageX + psInfo.scale*(deltaX + psInfo.width)
+			    + 1.0),
+		    (int) (psInfo.pageY + psInfo.scale*(deltaY + psInfo.height)
+			    + 1.0));
+	} else {
+	    sprintf(string, "%d %d %d %d",
+		    (int) (psInfo.pageX - psInfo.scale*(deltaY+psInfo.height)),
+		    (int) (psInfo.pageY + psInfo.scale*deltaX),
+		    (int) (psInfo.pageX - psInfo.scale*deltaY + 1.0),
+		    (int) (psInfo.pageY + psInfo.scale*(deltaX + psInfo.width)
+			    + 1.0));
+	}
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%BoundingBox: ", string, "\n", NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%Pages: 1\n",
+		"%%DocumentData: Clean7Bit\n", NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%Orientation: ",
+		psInfo.rotate ? "Landscape\n" : "Portrait\n", NULL);
+	p = "%%DocumentNeededResources: font ";
+	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&psInfo.fontTable, &search);
+		hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, p,
+		    Tcl_GetHashKey(&psInfo.fontTable, hPtr), "\n", NULL);
+	    p = "%%+ font ";
+	}
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%EndComments\n\n", NULL);
 
-    /*
-     * Insert the prolog
-     */
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetVar(interp,"::tk::ps_preamable",
-	    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY), (char *) NULL);
+	/*
+	 * Insert the prolog
+	 */
 
-    if (psInfo.chan != NULL) {
-        Tcl_Write(psInfo.chan, Tcl_GetStringResult(interp), -1);
-	Tcl_ResetResult(canvasPtr->interp);
-    }
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetVar(interp,"::tk::ps_preamable",
+		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY), NULL);
 
-    /*
-     *-----------------------------------------------------------
-     * Document setup:  set the color level and include fonts.
-     *-----------------------------------------------------------
-     */
+	if (psInfo.chan != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_Write(psInfo.chan, Tcl_GetStringResult(interp), -1);
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(canvasPtr->interp);
+	}
 
-    sprintf(string, "/CL %d def\n", psInfo.colorLevel);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%BeginSetup\n", string,
-	    (char *) NULL);
-    for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&psInfo.fontTable, &search);
-	    hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%IncludeResource: font ",
-		Tcl_GetHashKey(&psInfo.fontTable, hPtr), "\n", (char *) NULL);
-    }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%EndSetup\n\n", (char *) NULL);
+	/*
+	 * Document setup:  set the color level and include fonts.
+	 */
 
-    /*
-     *-----------------------------------------------------------
-     * Page setup:  move to page positioning point, rotate if
-     * needed, set scale factor, offset for proper anchor position,
-     * and set clip region.
-     *-----------------------------------------------------------
-     */
+	sprintf(string, "/CL %d def\n", psInfo.colorLevel);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%BeginSetup\n", string, NULL);
+	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&psInfo.fontTable, &search);
+		hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%IncludeResource: font ",
+		    Tcl_GetHashKey(&psInfo.fontTable, hPtr), "\n", NULL);
+	}
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%EndSetup\n\n", NULL);
 
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%Page: 1 1\n", "save\n",
-	    (char *) NULL);
-    sprintf(string, "%.1f %.1f translate\n", psInfo.pageX, psInfo.pageY);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, (char *) NULL);
-    if (psInfo.rotate) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "90 rotate\n", (char *) NULL);
-    }
-    sprintf(string, "%.4g %.4g scale\n", psInfo.scale, psInfo.scale);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, (char *) NULL);
-    sprintf(string, "%d %d translate\n", deltaX - psInfo.x, deltaY);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, (char *) NULL);
-    sprintf(string, "%d %.15g moveto %d %.15g lineto %d %.15g lineto %d %.15g",
-	    psInfo.x,
-	    Tk_PostscriptY((double) psInfo.y, (Tk_PostscriptInfo) &psInfo),
-	    psInfo.x2,
-	    Tk_PostscriptY((double) psInfo.y, (Tk_PostscriptInfo) &psInfo),
-	    psInfo.x2, 
-	    Tk_PostscriptY((double) psInfo.y2, (Tk_PostscriptInfo) &psInfo),
-	    psInfo.x,
-	    Tk_PostscriptY((double) psInfo.y2, (Tk_PostscriptInfo) &psInfo));
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string,
-	" lineto closepath clip newpath\n", (char *) NULL);
+	/*
+	 * Page setup: move to page positioning point, rotate if needed, set
+	 * scale factor, offset for proper anchor position, and set clip
+	 * region.
+	 */
+
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "%%Page: 1 1\n", "save\n", NULL);
+	sprintf(string, "%.1f %.1f translate\n", psInfo.pageX, psInfo.pageY);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, NULL);
+	if (psInfo.rotate) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "90 rotate\n", NULL);
+	}
+	sprintf(string, "%.4g %.4g scale\n", psInfo.scale, psInfo.scale);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, NULL);
+	sprintf(string, "%d %d translate\n", deltaX - psInfo.x, deltaY);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, NULL);
+	sprintf(string,
+		"%d %.15g moveto %d %.15g lineto %d %.15g lineto %d %.15g",
+		psInfo.x, Tk_PostscriptY((double)psInfo.y,
+			(Tk_PostscriptInfo)psInfoPtr),
+		psInfo.x2, Tk_PostscriptY((double)psInfo.y,
+			(Tk_PostscriptInfo)psInfoPtr),
+		psInfo.x2, Tk_PostscriptY((double)psInfo.y2,
+			(Tk_PostscriptInfo)psInfoPtr),
+		psInfo.x, Tk_PostscriptY((double)psInfo.y2,
+			(Tk_PostscriptInfo)psInfoPtr));
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string,
+		" lineto closepath clip newpath\n", NULL);
     }
     if (psInfo.chan != NULL) {
 	Tcl_Write(psInfo.chan, Tcl_GetStringResult(interp), -1);
@@ -531,10 +510,8 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
     }
 
     /*
-     *---------------------------------------------------------------------
      * Iterate through all the items, having each relevant one draw itself.
      * Quit if any of the items returns an error.
-     *---------------------------------------------------------------------
      */
 
     result = TCL_OK;
@@ -550,7 +527,7 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 	if (itemPtr->state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN) {
 	    continue;
 	}
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "gsave\n", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "gsave\n", NULL);
 	result = (*itemPtr->typePtr->postscriptProc)(interp,
 		(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, 0);
 	if (result != TCL_OK) {
@@ -561,7 +538,7 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 	    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, msg);
 	    goto cleanup;
 	}
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore\n", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore\n", NULL);
 	if (psInfo.chan != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_Write(psInfo.chan, Tcl_GetStringResult(interp), -1);
 	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
@@ -569,15 +546,13 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
     }
 
     /*
-     *---------------------------------------------------------------------
-     * Output page-end information, such as commands to print the page
-     * and document trailer stuff.
-     *---------------------------------------------------------------------
+     * Output page-end information, such as commands to print the page and
+     * document trailer stuff.
      */
 
     if (psInfo.prolog) {
-      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "restore showpage\n\n",
-	    "%%Trailer\nend\n%%EOF\n", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "restore showpage\n\n",
+		"%%Trailer\nend\n%%EOF\n", NULL);
     }
     if (psInfo.chan != NULL) {
 	Tcl_Write(psInfo.chan, Tcl_GetStringResult(interp), -1);
@@ -588,7 +563,7 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
      * Clean up psInfo to release malloc'ed stuff.
      */
 
-    cleanup:
+  cleanup:
     if (psInfo.pageXString != NULL) {
 	ckfree(psInfo.pageXString);
     }
@@ -629,16 +604,15 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * Tk_PostscriptColor --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by individual canvas items when
- *	they want to set a color value for output.  Given information
- *	about an X color, this procedure will generate Postscript
- *	commands to set up an appropriate color in Postscript.
+ *	This function is called by individual canvas items when they want to
+ *	set a color value for output. Given information about an X color, this
+ *	function will generate Postscript commands to set up an appropriate
+ *	color in Postscript.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurs
- *	then an error message will be left in the interp's result.
- *	If no error occurs, then additional Postscript will be
- *	appended to the interp's result.
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs then an error
+ *	message will be left in the interp's result. If no error occurs, then
+ *	additional Postscript will be appended to the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -647,10 +621,10 @@ TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, argc, argv)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_PostscriptColor(interp, psInfo, colorPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo;		/* Postscript info. */
-    XColor *colorPtr;			/* Information about color. */
+Tk_PostscriptColor(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo,	/* Postscript info. */
+    XColor *colorPtr)		/* Information about color. */
 {
     TkPostscriptInfo *psInfoPtr = (TkPostscriptInfo *) psInfo;
     int tmp;
@@ -662,9 +636,8 @@ Tk_PostscriptColor(interp, psInfo, colorPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If there is a color map defined, then look up the color's name
-     * in the map and use the Postscript commands found there, if there
-     * are any.
+     * If there is a color map defined, then look up the color's name in the
+     * map and use the Postscript commands found there, if there are any.
      */
 
     if (psInfoPtr->colorVar != NULL) {
@@ -673,22 +646,21 @@ Tk_PostscriptColor(interp, psInfo, colorPtr)
 	cmdString = Tcl_GetVar2(interp, psInfoPtr->colorVar,
 		Tk_NameOfColor(colorPtr), 0);
 	if (cmdString != NULL) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, cmdString, "\n", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, cmdString, "\n", NULL);
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * No color map entry for this color.  Grab the color's intensities
-     * and output Postscript commands for them.  Special note:  X uses
-     * a range of 0-65535 for intensities, but most displays only use
-     * a range of 0-255, which maps to (0, 256, 512, ... 65280) in the
-     * X scale.  This means that there's no way to get perfect white,
-     * since the highest intensity is only 65280 out of 65535.  To
-     * work around this problem, rescale the X intensity to a 0-255
-     * scale and use that as the basis for the Postscript colors.  This
-     * scheme still won't work if the display only uses 4 bits per color,
-     * but most diplays use at least 8 bits.
+     * No color map entry for this color. Grab the color's intensities and
+     * output Postscript commands for them. Special note: X uses a range of
+     * 0-65535 for intensities, but most displays only use a range of 0-255,
+     * which maps to (0, 256, 512, ... 65280) in the X scale. This means that
+     * there's no way to get perfect white, since the highest intensity is
+     * only 65280 out of 65535. To work around this problem, rescale the X
+     * intensity to a 0-255 scale and use that as the basis for the Postscript
+     * colors. This scheme still won't work if the display only uses 4 bits
+     * per color, but most diplays use at least 8 bits.
      */
 
     tmp = colorPtr->red;
@@ -699,7 +671,7 @@ Tk_PostscriptColor(interp, psInfo, colorPtr)
     blue = ((double) (tmp >> 8))/255.0;
     sprintf(string, "%.3f %.3f %.3f setrgbcolor AdjustColor\n",
 	    red, green, blue);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, NULL);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -708,88 +680,89 @@ Tk_PostscriptColor(interp, psInfo, colorPtr)
  *
  * Tk_PostscriptFont --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by individual canvas items when
- *	they want to output text.  Given information about an X
- *	font, this procedure will generate Postscript commands
- *	to set up an appropriate font in Postscript.
+ *	This function is called by individual canvas items when they want to
+ *	output text. Given information about an X font, this function will
+ *	generate Postscript commands to set up an appropriate font in
+ *	Postscript.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurs
- *	then an error message will be left in the interp's result.
- *	If no error occurs, then additional Postscript will be
- *	appended to the interp's result.
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs then an error
+ *	message will be left in the interp's result. If no error occurs, then
+ *	additional Postscript will be appended to the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The Postscript font name is entered into psInfoPtr->fontTable
- *	if it wasn't already there.
+ *	The Postscript font name is entered into psInfoPtr->fontTable if it
+ *	wasn't already there.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_PostscriptFont(interp, psInfo, tkfont)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo;		/* Postscript Info. */
-    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* Information about font in which text
-					 * is to be printed. */
+Tk_PostscriptFont(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo,	/* Postscript Info. */
+    Tk_Font tkfont)		/* Information about font in which text is to
+				 * be printed. */
 {
     TkPostscriptInfo *psInfoPtr = (TkPostscriptInfo *) psInfo;
-    char *end;
     char pointString[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
     Tcl_DString ds;
     int i, points;
 
     /*
-     * First, look up the font's name in the font map, if there is one.
-     * If there is an entry for this font, it consists of a list
-     * containing font name and size.  Use this information.
+     * First, look up the font's name in the font map, if there is one. If
+     * there is an entry for this font, it consists of a list containing font
+     * name and size. Use this information.
      */
 
-    Tcl_DStringInit(&ds);
-    
     if (psInfoPtr->fontVar != NULL) {
-	CONST char *list;
-	int argc;
+	CONST char *name = Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont);
+	Tcl_Obj **objv;
+	int objc;
 	double size;
-	CONST char **argv;
-	CONST char *name;
+	Tcl_Obj *list = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(interp, psInfoPtr->fontVar, name, 0);
 
-	name = Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont);
-	list = Tcl_GetVar2(interp, psInfoPtr->fontVar, name, 0);
 	if (list != NULL) {
-	    if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, list, &argc, &argv) != TCL_OK) {
-		badMapEntry:
+	    CONST char *fontname;
+
+	    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, list, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK
+		    || objc != 2
+		    || Tcl_GetString(objv[0])[0]=='\0'
+		    || Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[1], &size) != TCL_OK
+		    || size <= 0) {
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad font map entry for \"", name,
-			"\": \"", list, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+			"\": \"", Tcl_GetString(list), "\"", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (argc != 2) {
-		goto badMapEntry;
-	    }
-	    size = strtod(argv[1], &end);
-	    if ((size <= 0) || (*end != 0)) {
-		goto badMapEntry;
-	    }
 
-	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, argv[0], -1);
-	    points = (int) size;
-	    
-	    ckfree((char *) argv);
-	    goto findfont;
+	    fontname = Tcl_GetString(objv[0]);
+	    sprintf(pointString, "%d", (int)size);
+
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "/", fontname, " findfont ",
+		    pointString, " scalefont ", NULL);
+	    if (strncasecmp(fontname, "Symbol", 7) != 0) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "ISOEncode ", NULL);
+	    }
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "setfont\n", NULL);
+	    Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&psInfoPtr->fontTable, fontname, &i);
+	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
-    } 
+    }
 
-    points = Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, &ds);
+    /*
+     * Nothing in the font map, so fall back to the old guessing technique.
+     */
 
-    findfont:
-    sprintf(pointString, "%d", points);
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&ds);
+    points = Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, &ds);
+    sprintf(pointString, "%d", TkFontGetPoints(psInfoPtr->tkwin, points));
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "/", Tcl_DStringValue(&ds), " findfont ",
-	    pointString, " scalefont ", (char *) NULL);
+	    pointString, " scalefont ", NULL);
     if (strncasecmp(Tcl_DStringValue(&ds), "Symbol", 7) != 0) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "ISOEncode ", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "ISOEncode ", NULL);
     }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "setfont\n", (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "setfont\n", NULL);
     Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&psInfoPtr->fontTable, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds), &i);
     Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
 
@@ -801,16 +774,14 @@ Tk_PostscriptFont(interp, psInfo, tkfont)
  *
  * Tk_PostscriptBitmap --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to output the contents of a
- *	sub-region of a bitmap in proper image data format for
- *	Postscript (i.e. data between angle brackets, one bit
- *	per pixel).
+ *	This function is called to output the contents of a sub-region of a
+ *	bitmap in proper image data format for Postscript (i.e. data between
+ *	angle brackets, one bit per pixel).
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurs
- *	then an error message will be left in the interp's result.
- *	If no error occurs, then additional Postscript will be
- *	appended to the interp's result.
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs then an error
+ *	message will be left in the interp's result. If no error occurs, then
+ *	additional Postscript will be appended to the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -819,16 +790,14 @@ Tk_PostscriptFont(interp, psInfo, tkfont)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_PostscriptBitmap(interp, tkwin, psInfo, bitmap, startX, startY, width,
-	height)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo;		/* Postscript info. */
-    Pixmap bitmap;			/* Bitmap for which to generate
-					 * Postscript. */
-    int startX, startY;			/* Coordinates of upper-left corner
-					 * of rectangular region to output. */
-    int width, height;			/* Height of rectangular region. */
+Tk_PostscriptBitmap(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo,	/* Postscript info. */
+    Pixmap bitmap,		/* Bitmap for which to generate Postscript. */
+    int startX, int startY,	/* Coordinates of upper-left corner of
+				 * rectangular region to output. */
+    int width, int height)	/* Height of rectangular region. */
 {
     TkPostscriptInfo *psInfoPtr = (TkPostscriptInfo *) psInfo;
     XImage *imagePtr;
@@ -845,10 +814,10 @@ Tk_PostscriptBitmap(interp, tkwin, psInfo, bitmap, startX, startY, width,
 
     /*
      * The following call should probably be a call to Tk_SizeOfBitmap
-     * instead, but it seems that we are occasionally invoked by custom
-     * item types that create their own bitmaps without registering them
-     * with Tk.  XGetGeometry is a bit slower than Tk_SizeOfBitmap, but
-     * it shouldn't matter here.
+     * instead, but it seems that we are occasionally invoked by custom item
+     * types that create their own bitmaps without registering them with Tk.
+     * XGetGeometry is a bit slower than Tk_SizeOfBitmap, but it shouldn't
+     * matter here.
      */
 
     XGetGeometry(Tk_Display(tkwin), bitmap, &dummyRoot,
@@ -856,7 +825,7 @@ Tk_PostscriptBitmap(interp, tkwin, psInfo, bitmap, startX, startY, width,
 	    (unsigned int *) &totalHeight, &dummyBorderwidth, &dummyDepth);
     imagePtr = XGetImage(Tk_Display(tkwin), bitmap, 0, 0,
 	    totalWidth, totalHeight, 1, XYPixmap);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "<", (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "<", NULL);
     mask = 0x80;
     value = 0;
     charsInLine = 0;
@@ -870,25 +839,25 @@ Tk_PostscriptBitmap(interp, tkwin, psInfo, bitmap, startX, startY, width,
 	    mask >>= 1;
 	    if (mask == 0) {
 		sprintf(string, "%02x", value);
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, NULL);
 		mask = 0x80;
 		value = 0;
 		charsInLine += 2;
 		if (charsInLine >= 60) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", NULL);
 		    charsInLine = 0;
 		}
 	    }
 	}
 	if (mask != 0x80) {
 	    sprintf(string, "%02x", value);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, NULL);
 	    mask = 0x80;
 	    value = 0;
 	    charsInLine += 2;
 	}
     }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ">", (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ">", NULL);
     XDestroyImage(imagePtr);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -898,18 +867,16 @@ Tk_PostscriptBitmap(interp, tkwin, psInfo, bitmap, startX, startY, width,
  *
  * Tk_PostscriptStipple --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by individual canvas items when
- *	they have created a path that they'd like to be filled with
- *	a stipple pattern.  Given information about an X bitmap,
- *	this procedure will generate Postscript commands to fill
- *	the current clip region using a stipple pattern defined by the
- *	bitmap.
+ *	This function is called by individual canvas items when they have
+ *	created a path that they'd like to be filled with a stipple pattern.
+ *	Given information about an X bitmap, this function will generate
+ *	Postscript commands to fill the current clip region using a stipple
+ *	pattern defined by the bitmap.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurs
- *	then an error message will be left in the interp's result.
- *	If no error occurs, then additional Postscript will be
- *	appended to the interp's result.
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs then an error
+ *	message will be left in the interp's result. If no error occurs, then
+ *	additional Postscript will be appended to the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -918,12 +885,12 @@ Tk_PostscriptBitmap(interp, tkwin, psInfo, bitmap, startX, startY, width,
  */
 
 int
-Tk_PostscriptStipple(interp, tkwin, psInfo, bitmap)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo;		/* Interpreter for returning Postscript
-					 * or error message. */
-    Pixmap bitmap;			/* Bitmap to use for stippling. */
+Tk_PostscriptStipple(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo,	/* Interpreter for returning Postscript or
+				 * error message. */
+    Pixmap bitmap)		/* Bitmap to use for stippling. */
 {
     TkPostscriptInfo *psInfoPtr = (TkPostscriptInfo *) psInfo;
     int width, height;
@@ -938,22 +905,22 @@ Tk_PostscriptStipple(interp, tkwin, psInfo, bitmap)
 
     /*
      * The following call should probably be a call to Tk_SizeOfBitmap
-     * instead, but it seems that we are occasionally invoked by custom
-     * item types that create their own bitmaps without registering them
-     * with Tk.  XGetGeometry is a bit slower than Tk_SizeOfBitmap, but
-     * it shouldn't matter here.
+     * instead, but it seems that we are occasionally invoked by custom item
+     * types that create their own bitmaps without registering them with Tk.
+     * XGetGeometry is a bit slower than Tk_SizeOfBitmap, but it shouldn't
+     * matter here.
      */
 
     XGetGeometry(Tk_Display(tkwin), bitmap, &dummyRoot,
 	    (int *) &dummyX, (int *) &dummyY, (unsigned *) &width,
 	    (unsigned *) &height, &dummyBorderwidth, &dummyDepth);
     sprintf(string, "%d %d ", width, height);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, NULL);
     if (Tk_PostscriptBitmap(interp, tkwin, psInfo, bitmap, 0, 0,
 	    width, height) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " StippleFill\n", (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " StippleFill\n", NULL);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -962,12 +929,13 @@ Tk_PostscriptStipple(interp, tkwin, psInfo, bitmap)
  *
  * Tk_PostscriptY --
  *
- *	Given a y-coordinate in local coordinates, this procedure
- *	returns a y-coordinate to use for Postscript output.
+ *	Given a y-coordinate in local coordinates, this function returns a
+ *	y-coordinate to use for Postscript output. Required because canvases
+ *	have their origin in the top-left, but postscript pages have their
+ *	origin in the bottom left.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns the Postscript coordinate that corresponds to
- *	"y".
+ *	Returns the Postscript coordinate that corresponds to "y".
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -976,9 +944,9 @@ Tk_PostscriptStipple(interp, tkwin, psInfo, bitmap)
  */
 
 double
-Tk_PostscriptY(y, psInfo)
-    double y;				/* Y-coordinate in canvas coords. */
-    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo;		/* Postscript info */
+Tk_PostscriptY(
+    double y,			/* Y-coordinate in canvas coords. */
+    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo)	/* Postscript info */
 {
     TkPostscriptInfo *psInfoPtr = (TkPostscriptInfo *) psInfo;
 
@@ -990,8 +958,8 @@ Tk_PostscriptY(y, psInfo)
  *
  * Tk_PostscriptPath --
  *
- *	Given an array of points for a path, generate Postscript
- *	commands to create the path.
+ *	Given an array of points for a path, generate Postscript commands to
+ *	create the path.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Postscript commands get appended to what's in the interp's result.
@@ -1003,14 +971,13 @@ Tk_PostscriptY(y, psInfo)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_PostscriptPath(interp, psInfo, coordPtr, numPoints)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo;		/* Canvas on whose behalf Postscript
-					 * is being generated. */
-    double *coordPtr;			/* Pointer to first in array of
-					 * 2*numPoints coordinates giving
-					 * points for path. */
-    int numPoints;			/* Number of points at *coordPtr. */
+Tk_PostscriptPath(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo,	/* Canvas on whose behalf Postscript is being
+				 * generated. */
+    double *coordPtr,		/* Pointer to first in array of 2*numPoints
+				 * coordinates giving points for path. */
+    int numPoints)		/* Number of points at *coordPtr. */
 {
     TkPostscriptInfo *psInfoPtr = (TkPostscriptInfo *) psInfo;
     char buffer[200];
@@ -1020,12 +987,12 @@ Tk_PostscriptPath(interp, psInfo, coordPtr, numPoints)
     }
     sprintf(buffer, "%.15g %.15g moveto\n", coordPtr[0],
 	    Tk_PostscriptY(coordPtr[1], psInfo));
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     for (numPoints--, coordPtr += 2; numPoints > 0;
 	    numPoints--, coordPtr += 2) {
 	sprintf(buffer, "%.15g %.15g lineto\n", coordPtr[0],
 		Tk_PostscriptY(coordPtr[1], psInfo));
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     }
 }
 
@@ -1034,15 +1001,14 @@ Tk_PostscriptPath(interp, psInfo, coordPtr, numPoints)
  *
  * GetPostscriptPoints --
  *
- *	Given a string, returns the number of Postscript points
- *	corresponding to that string.
+ *	Given a string, returns the number of Postscript points corresponding
+ *	to that string.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result.  If
- *	TCL_OK is returned, then everything went well and the
- *	screen distance is stored at *doublePtr;  otherwise
- *	TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result. If TCL_OK is
+ *	returned, then everything went well and the screen distance is stored
+ *	at *doublePtr; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is
+ *	left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1051,44 +1017,41 @@ Tk_PostscriptPath(interp, psInfo, coordPtr, numPoints)
  */
 
 static int
-GetPostscriptPoints(interp, string, doublePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Use this for error reporting. */
-    char *string;		/* String describing a screen distance. */
-    double *doublePtr;		/* Place to store converted result. */
+GetPostscriptPoints(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Use this for error reporting. */
+    char *string,		/* String describing a screen distance. */
+    double *doublePtr)		/* Place to store converted result. */
 {
     char *end;
     double d;
 
     d = strtod(string, &end);
     if (end == string) {
-	error:
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad distance \"", string,
-		"\"", (char *) NULL);
-	return TCL_ERROR;
+	goto error;
     }
     while ((*end != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*end))) {
 	end++;
     }
     switch (*end) {
-	case 'c':
-	    d *= 72.0/2.54;
-	    end++;
-	    break;
-	case 'i':
-	    d *= 72.0;
-	    end++;
-	    break;
-	case 'm':
-	    d *= 72.0/25.4;
-	    end++;
-	    break;
-	case 0:
-	    break;
-	case 'p':
-	    end++;
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    goto error;
+    case 'c':
+	d *= 72.0/2.54;
+	end++;
+	break;
+    case 'i':
+	d *= 72.0;
+	end++;
+	break;
+    case 'm':
+	d *= 72.0/25.4;
+	end++;
+	break;
+    case 0:
+	break;
+    case 'p':
+	end++;
+	break;
+    default:
+	goto error;
     }
     while ((*end != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*end))) {
 	end++;
@@ -1098,34 +1061,37 @@ GetPostscriptPoints(interp, string, doublePtr)
     }
     *doublePtr = d;
     return TCL_OK;
-}
 
+  error:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad distance \"", string, "\"", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkImageGetColor --
  *
- *	This procedure converts a pixel value to three floating
- *      point numbers, representing the amount of red, green, and 
- *      blue in that pixel on the screen.  It makes use of colormap
- *      data passed as an argument, and should work for all Visual
- *      types.
+ *	This function converts a pixel value to three floating point numbers,
+ *	representing the amount of red, green, and blue in that pixel on the
+ *	screen. It makes use of colormap data passed as an argument, and
+ *	should work for all Visual types.
  *
- *	This implementation is bogus on Windows because the colormap
- *	data is never filled in.  Instead all postscript generated
- *	data coming through here is expected to be RGB color data.
- *	To handle lower bit-depth images properly, XQueryColors
- *	must be implemented for Windows.
+ *	This implementation is bogus on Windows because the colormap data is
+ *	never filled in. Instead all postscript generated data coming through
+ *	here is expected to be RGB color data. To handle lower bit-depth
+ *	images properly, XQueryColors must be implemented for Windows.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns red, green, and blue color values in the range 
- *      0 to 1.  There are no error returns.
+ *	Returns red, green, and blue color values in the range 0 to 1. There
+ *	are no error returns.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 #ifdef WIN32
 #include <windows.h>
 
@@ -1134,35 +1100,41 @@ GetPostscriptPoints(interp, string, doublePtr)
  #define GetRValue(rgb)	((BYTE)(rgb))
  #define GetGValue(rgb)	((BYTE)(((WORD)(rgb)) >> 8))
  #define GetBValue(rgb)	((BYTE)((rgb)>>16))
-*/
-#else
+ */
+
+#else /* !WIN32 */
+
 #define GetRValue(rgb)	((rgb & cdata->red_mask) >> cdata->red_shift)
 #define GetGValue(rgb)	((rgb & cdata->green_mask) >> cdata->green_shift)
 #define GetBValue(rgb)	((rgb & cdata->blue_mask) >> cdata->blue_shift)
-#endif
+
+#endif /* WIN32 */
 
 #if defined(WIN32) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
 static void
-TkImageGetColor(cdata, pixel, red, green, blue)
-    TkColormapData *cdata;              /* Colormap data */
-    unsigned long pixel;                /* Pixel value to look up */
-    double *red, *green, *blue;         /* Color data to return */
+TkImageGetColor(
+    TkColormapData *cdata,	/* Colormap data */
+    unsigned long pixel,	/* Pixel value to look up */
+    double *red, double *green, double *blue)
+				/* Color data to return */
 {
     *red   = (double) GetRValue(pixel) / 255.0;
     *green = (double) GetGValue(pixel) / 255.0;
     *blue  = (double) GetBValue(pixel) / 255.0;
 }
-#else
+#else /* ! (WIN32 || MAC_OSX_TK) */
 static void
-TkImageGetColor(cdata, pixel, red, green, blue)
-    TkColormapData *cdata;              /* Colormap data */
-    unsigned long pixel;                /* Pixel value to look up */
-    double *red, *green, *blue;         /* Color data to return */
+TkImageGetColor(
+    TkColormapData *cdata,	/* Colormap data */
+    unsigned long pixel,	/* Pixel value to look up */
+    double *red, double *green, double *blue)
+				/* Color data to return */
 {
     if (cdata->separated) {
 	int r = GetRValue(pixel);
 	int g = GetGValue(pixel);
 	int b = GetBValue(pixel);
+
 	*red   = cdata->colors[r].red / 65535.0;
 	*green = cdata->colors[g].green / 65535.0;
 	*blue  = cdata->colors[b].blue / 65535.0;
@@ -1172,24 +1144,22 @@ TkImageGetColor(cdata, pixel, red, green, blue)
 	*blue  = cdata->colors[pixel].blue / 65535.0;
     }
 }
-#endif
-
+#endif /* WIN32 || MAC_OSX_TK */
+
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkPostscriptImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to output the contents of an
- *	image in Postscript, using a format appropriate for the 
- *      current color mode (i.e. one bit per pixel in monochrome, 
- *      one byte per pixel in gray, and three bytes per pixel in
- *      color).
+ *	This function is called to output the contents of an image in
+ *	Postscript, using a format appropriate for the current color mode
+ *	(i.e. one bit per pixel in monochrome, one byte per pixel in gray, and
+ *	three bytes per pixel in color).
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurs
- *	then an error message will be left in interp->result.
- *	If no error occurs, then additional Postscript will be
- *	appended to interp->result.
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs then an error
+ *	message will be left in interp->result. If no error occurs, then
+ *	additional Postscript will be appended to interp->result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1198,13 +1168,13 @@ TkImageGetColor(cdata, pixel, red, green, blue)
  */
 
 int
-TkPostscriptImage(interp, tkwin, psInfo, ximage, x, y, width, height)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo;	/* postscript info */
-    XImage *ximage;		/* Image to draw */
-    int x, y;			/* First pixel to output */
-    int width, height;		/* Width and height of area */
+TkPostscriptImage(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo,	/* postscript info */
+    XImage *ximage,		/* Image to draw */
+    int x, int y,		/* First pixel to output */
+    int width, int height)	/* Width and height of area */
 {
     TkPostscriptInfo *psInfoPtr = (TkPostscriptInfo *) psInfo;
     char buffer[256];
@@ -1225,9 +1195,8 @@ TkPostscriptImage(interp, tkwin, psInfo, ximage, x, y, width, height)
     visual = Tk_Visual(tkwin);
 
     /*
-     * Obtain information about the colormap, ie the mapping between
-     * pixel values and RGB values.  The code below should work
-     * for all Visual types.
+     * Obtain information about the colormap, ie the mapping between pixel
+     * values and RGB values. The code below should work for all Visual types.
      */
 
     ncolors = visual->map_entries;
@@ -1242,33 +1211,42 @@ TkPostscriptImage(interp, tkwin, psInfo, ximage, x, y, width, height)
 	cdata.red_shift = 0;
 	cdata.green_shift = 0;
 	cdata.blue_shift = 0;
-	while ((0x0001 & (cdata.red_mask >> cdata.red_shift)) == 0)
+
+	while ((0x0001 & (cdata.red_mask >> cdata.red_shift)) == 0) {
 	    cdata.red_shift ++;
-	while ((0x0001 & (cdata.green_mask >> cdata.green_shift)) == 0)
+	}
+	while ((0x0001 & (cdata.green_mask >> cdata.green_shift)) == 0) {
 	    cdata.green_shift ++;
-	while ((0x0001 & (cdata.blue_mask >> cdata.blue_shift)) == 0)
+	}
+	while ((0x0001 & (cdata.blue_mask >> cdata.blue_shift)) == 0) {
 	    cdata.blue_shift ++;
-	for (i = 0; i < ncolors; i ++)
+	}
+
+	for (i = 0; i < ncolors; i ++) {
 	    cdata.colors[i].pixel =
-		((i << cdata.red_shift) & cdata.red_mask) |
-		((i << cdata.green_shift) & cdata.green_mask) |
-		((i << cdata.blue_shift) & cdata.blue_mask);
+		    ((i << cdata.red_shift) & cdata.red_mask) |
+		    ((i << cdata.green_shift) & cdata.green_mask) |
+		    ((i << cdata.blue_shift) & cdata.blue_mask);
+	}
     } else {
 	cdata.separated=0;
-	for (i = 0; i < ncolors; i ++)
+	for (i = 0; i < ncolors; i ++) {
 	    cdata.colors[i].pixel = i;
+	}
     }
-    if (visual->class == StaticGray || visual->class == GrayScale)
+
+    if (visual->class == StaticGray || visual->class == GrayScale) {
 	cdata.color = 0;
-    else
+    } else {
 	cdata.color = 1;
+    }
 
     XQueryColors(Tk_Display(tkwin), cmap, cdata.colors, ncolors);
 
     /*
-     * Figure out which color level to use (possibly lower than the 
-     * one specified by the user).  For example, if the user specifies
-     * color with monochrome screen, use gray or monochrome mode instead. 
+     * Figure out which color level to use (possibly lower than the one
+     * specified by the user). For example, if the user specifies color with
+     * monochrome screen, use gray or monochrome mode instead.
      */
 
     if (!cdata.color && level == 2) {
@@ -1280,15 +1258,15 @@ TkPostscriptImage(interp, tkwin, psInfo, ximage, x, y, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Check that at least one row of the image can be represented
-     * with a string less than 64 KB long (this is a limit in the 
-     * Postscript interpreter).
+     * Check that at least one row of the image can be represented with a
+     * string less than 64 KB long (this is a limit in the Postscript
+     * interpreter).
      */
 
     switch (level) {
-	case 0: bytesPerLine = (width + 7) / 8;  maxWidth = 240000;  break;
-	case 1: bytesPerLine = width;  maxWidth = 60000;  break;
-	case 2: bytesPerLine = 3 * width;  maxWidth = 20000;  break;
+    case 0: bytesPerLine = (width + 7) / 8;  maxWidth = 240000; break;
+    case 1: bytesPerLine = width;	     maxWidth = 60000;  break;
+    case 2: bytesPerLine = 3 * width;	     maxWidth = 20000;  break;
     }
 
     if (bytesPerLine > 60000) {
@@ -1296,7 +1274,7 @@ TkPostscriptImage(interp, tkwin, psInfo, ximage, x, y, width, height)
 	sprintf(buffer,
 		"Can't generate Postscript for images more than %d pixels wide",
 		maxWidth);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 	ckfree((char *) cdata.colors);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -1306,107 +1284,110 @@ TkPostscriptImage(interp, tkwin, psInfo, ximage, x, y, width, height)
     for (band = height-1; band >= 0; band -= maxRows) {
 	int rows = (band >= maxRows) ? maxRows : band + 1;
 	int lineLen = 0;
+
 	switch (level) {
-	    case 0:
-		sprintf(buffer, "%d %d 1 matrix {\n<", width, rows);
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
-		break;
-	    case 1:
-		sprintf(buffer, "%d %d 8 matrix {\n<", width, rows);
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
-		break;
-	    case 2:
-		sprintf(buffer, "%d %d 8 matrix {\n<",
-			width, rows);
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
-		break;
+	case 0:
+	    sprintf(buffer, "%d %d 1 matrix {\n<", width, rows);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+	    break;
+	case 1:
+	    sprintf(buffer, "%d %d 8 matrix {\n<", width, rows);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+	    break;
+	case 2:
+	    sprintf(buffer, "%d %d 8 matrix {\n<", width, rows);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+	    break;
 	}
 	for (yy = band; yy > band - rows; yy--) {
 	    switch (level) {
-		case 0: {
-		    /*
-		     * Generate data for image in monochrome mode.
-		     * No attempt at dithering is made--instead, just
-		     * set a threshold.
-		     */
-		    unsigned char mask=0x80;
-		    unsigned char data=0x00;
-		    for (xx = x; xx< x+width; xx++) {
-			TkImageGetColor(&cdata, XGetPixel(ximage, xx, yy),
-					&red, &green, &blue);
-			if (0.30 * red + 0.59 * green + 0.11 * blue > 0.5)
-			    data |= mask;
-			mask >>= 1;
-			if (mask == 0) {
-			    sprintf(buffer, "%02X", data);
-			    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
-			    lineLen += 2;
-			    if (lineLen > 60) {
-			        lineLen = 0;
-			        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", (char *) NULL);
-			    }
-			    mask=0x80;
-			    data=0x00;
-			}
-		    }
-		    if ((width % 8) != 0) {
-		        sprintf(buffer, "%02X", data);
-		        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
-		        mask=0x80;
-		        data=0x00;
+	    case 0: {
+		/*
+		 * Generate data for image in monochrome mode. No attempt at
+		 * dithering is made--instead, just set a threshold.
+		 */
+
+		unsigned char mask = 0x80;
+		unsigned char data = 0x00;
+
+		for (xx = x; xx< x+width; xx++) {
+		    TkImageGetColor(&cdata, XGetPixel(ximage, xx, yy),
+			    &red, &green, &blue);
+		    if (0.30 * red + 0.59 * green + 0.11 * blue > 0.5) {
+			data |= mask;
 		    }
-		    break;
-		}
-		case 1: {
-		    /*
-		     * Generate data in gray mode--in this case, take a 
-		     * weighted sum of the red, green, and blue values.
-		     */
-		    for (xx = x; xx < x+width; xx ++) {
-			TkImageGetColor(&cdata, XGetPixel(ximage, xx, yy),
-					&red, &green, &blue);
-			sprintf(buffer, "%02X", (int) floor(0.5 + 255.0 *
-				(0.30 * red + 0.59 * green + 0.11 * blue)));
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+		    mask >>= 1;
+		    if (mask == 0) {
+			sprintf(buffer, "%02X", data);
+			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 			lineLen += 2;
 			if (lineLen > 60) {
 			    lineLen = 0;
-			    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", (char *) NULL);
+			    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", NULL);
 			}
+			mask=0x80;
+			data=0x00;
 		    }
-		    break;
 		}
-		case 2: {
-		    /*
-		     * Finally, color mode.  Here, just output the red, green,
-		     * and blue values directly.
-		     */
-		    for (xx = x; xx < x+width; xx++) {
-			TkImageGetColor(&cdata, XGetPixel(ximage, xx, yy),
-				&red, &green, &blue);
-			sprintf(buffer, "%02X%02X%02X",
-				(int) floor(0.5 + 255.0 * red),
-				(int) floor(0.5 + 255.0 * green),
-				(int) floor(0.5 + 255.0 * blue));
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
-			lineLen += 6;
-			if (lineLen > 60) {
-			    lineLen = 0;
-			    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", (char *) NULL);
-			}
+		if ((width % 8) != 0) {
+		    sprintf(buffer, "%02X", data);
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+		    mask=0x80;
+		    data=0x00;
+		}
+		break;
+	    }
+	    case 1:
+		/*
+		 * Generate data in gray mode; in this case, take a weighted
+		 * sum of the red, green, and blue values.
+		 */
+
+		for (xx = x; xx < x+width; xx ++) {
+		    TkImageGetColor(&cdata, XGetPixel(ximage, xx, yy),
+			    &red, &green, &blue);
+		    sprintf(buffer, "%02X", (int) floor(0.5 + 255.0 *
+			    (0.30 * red + 0.59 * green + 0.11 * blue)));
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+		    lineLen += 2;
+		    if (lineLen > 60) {
+			lineLen = 0;
+			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", NULL);
+		    }
+		}
+		break;
+	    case 2:
+		/*
+		 * Finally, color mode. Here, just output the red, green, and
+		 * blue values directly.
+		 */
+
+		for (xx = x; xx < x+width; xx++) {
+		    TkImageGetColor(&cdata, XGetPixel(ximage, xx, yy),
+			    &red, &green, &blue);
+		    sprintf(buffer, "%02X%02X%02X",
+			    (int) floor(0.5 + 255.0 * red),
+			    (int) floor(0.5 + 255.0 * green),
+			    (int) floor(0.5 + 255.0 * blue));
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+		    lineLen += 6;
+		    if (lineLen > 60) {
+			lineLen = 0;
+			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", NULL);
 		    }
-		    break;
 		}
+		break;
 	    }
 	}
 	switch (level) {
-	    case 0: sprintf(buffer, ">\n} image\n"); break;
-	    case 1: sprintf(buffer, ">\n} image\n"); break;
-	    case 2: sprintf(buffer, ">\n} false 3 colorimage\n"); break;
+	case 0: case 1:
+	    sprintf(buffer, ">\n} image\n"); break;
+	case 2:
+	    sprintf(buffer, ">\n} false 3 colorimage\n"); break;
 	}
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 	sprintf(buffer, "0 %d translate\n", rows);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     }
     ckfree((char *) cdata.colors);
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -1417,28 +1398,28 @@ TkPostscriptImage(interp, tkwin, psInfo, ximage, x, y, width, height)
  *
  * Tk_PostscriptPhoto --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to output the contents of a
- *	photo image in Postscript, using a format appropriate for
- *	the requested postscript color mode (i.e. one byte per pixel
- *	in gray, and three bytes per pixel in color).
+ *	This function is called to output the contents of a photo image in
+ *	Postscript, using a format appropriate for the requested postscript
+ *	color mode (i.e. one byte per pixel in gray, and three bytes per pixel
+ *	in color).
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurs
- *	then an error message will be left in interp->result.
- *	If no error occurs, then additional Postscript will be
- *	appended to the interpreter's result.
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs then an error
+ *	message will be left in interp->result. If no error occurs, then
+ *	additional Postscript will be appended to the interpreter's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 int
-Tk_PostscriptPhoto(interp, blockPtr, psInfo, width, height)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
-    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo;
-    int width, height;
+Tk_PostscriptPhoto(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
+    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo,
+    int width, int height)
 {
     TkPostscriptInfo *psInfoPtr = (TkPostscriptInfo *) psInfo;
     int colorLevel = psInfoPtr->colorLevel;
@@ -1462,20 +1443,20 @@ Tk_PostscriptPhoto(interp, blockPtr, psInfo, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Define the "TkPhoto" function, which is a modified version
-     * of the original "transparentimage" function posted
-     * by ian@five-d.com (Ian Kemmish) to comp.lang.postscript.
-     * For a monochrome colorLevel this is a slightly different
-     * version that uses the imagemask command instead of image.
+     * Define the "TkPhoto" function, which is a modified version of the
+     * original "transparentimage" function posted by ian@five-d.com (Ian
+     * Kemmish) to comp.lang.postscript. For a monochrome colorLevel this is a
+     * slightly different version that uses the imagemask command instead of
+     * image.
      */
 
-    if( !codeIncluded && (colorLevel != 0) ) {
+    if (!codeIncluded && (colorLevel != 0)) {
 	/*
 	 * Color and gray-scale code.
 	 */
 
 	codeIncluded = !0;
-	Tcl_AppendResult( interp,
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
 		"/TkPhoto { \n",
 		"  gsave \n",
 		"  32 dict begin \n",
@@ -1544,14 +1525,14 @@ Tk_PostscriptPhoto(interp, blockPtr, psInfo, width, height)
 		"  } for \n",
 		"  end \n",
 		"  grestore \n",
-		"} bind def \n\n\n", (char *) NULL);
-    } else if( !codeIncluded && (colorLevel == 0) ) {
+		"} bind def \n\n\n", NULL);
+    } else if (!codeIncluded && (colorLevel == 0)) {
 	/*
 	 * Monochrome-only code
 	 */
 
 	codeIncluded = !0;
-	Tcl_AppendResult( interp,
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
 		"/TkPhoto { \n",
 		"  gsave \n",
 		"  32 dict begin \n",
@@ -1588,27 +1569,26 @@ Tk_PostscriptPhoto(interp, blockPtr, psInfo, width, height)
 		"  } for \n",
 		"  end \n",
 		"  grestore \n",
-		"} bind def \n\n\n", (char *) NULL);
+		"} bind def \n\n\n", NULL);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Check that at least one row of the image can be represented
-     * with a string less than 64 KB long (this is a limit in the
-     * Postscript interpreter).
+     * Check that at least one row of the image can be represented with a
+     * string less than 64 KB long (this is a limit in the Postscript
+     * interpreter).
      */
 
-    switch (colorLevel)
-	{
-	    case 0: bytesPerLine = (width + 7) / 8;  maxWidth = 240000;  break;
-	    case 1: bytesPerLine = width;  maxWidth = 60000;  break;
-	    case 2: bytesPerLine = 3 * width;  maxWidth = 20000;  break;
-	}
+    switch (colorLevel) {
+    case 0: bytesPerLine = (width + 7) / 8; maxWidth = 240000; break;
+    case 1: bytesPerLine = width;	    maxWidth = 60000;  break;
+    case 2: bytesPerLine = 3 * width;	    maxWidth = 20000;  break;
+    }
     if (bytesPerLine > 60000) {
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	sprintf(buffer,
 		"Can't generate Postscript for images more than %d pixels wide",
 		maxWidth);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -1617,45 +1597,37 @@ Tk_PostscriptPhoto(interp, blockPtr, psInfo, width, height)
      */
 
     switch (colorLevel) {
-	case 0: 
-	    strcpy( cspace, "/DeviceGray");
-	    strcpy( decode, "[1 0]");
-	    bpc = 1;
-	    break;
-	case 1: 
-	    strcpy( cspace, "/DeviceGray");
-	    strcpy( decode, "[0 1]");
-	    bpc = 8;
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    strcpy( cspace, "/DeviceRGB");
-	    strcpy( decode, "[0 1 0 1 0 1]");
-	    bpc = 8;
-	    break;
+    case 0:
+	strcpy(cspace, "/DeviceGray");
+	strcpy(decode, "[1 0]");
+	bpc = 1;
+	break;
+    case 1:
+	strcpy(cspace, "/DeviceGray");
+	strcpy(decode, "[0 1]");
+	bpc = 8;
+	break;
+    default:
+	strcpy(cspace, "/DeviceRGB");
+	strcpy(decode, "[0 1 0 1 0 1]");
+	bpc = 8;
+	break;
     }
 
 
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-	    cspace, " setcolorspace\n\n", (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, cspace, " setcolorspace\n\n", NULL);
 
-    sprintf(buffer,
-	    "  /Width %d\n  /Height %d\n  /BitsPerComponent %d\n",
+    sprintf(buffer, "  /Width %d\n  /Height %d\n  /BitsPerComponent %d\n",
 	    width, height,  bpc);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-	    "<<\n  /ImageType 1\n", buffer,
-	    "  /DataSource currentfile",
-	    "  /ASCIIHexDecode filter\n", (char *) NULL);
-
-
-    sprintf(buffer,
-	    "  /ImageMatrix [1 0 0 -1 0 %d]\n", height);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer,
-	    "  /Decode ", decode, "\n>>\n1 TkPhoto\n", (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "<<\n  /ImageType 1\n", buffer,
+	    "  /DataSource currentfile  /ASCIIHexDecode filter\n", NULL);
 
+    sprintf(buffer, "  /ImageMatrix [1 0 0 -1 0 %d]\n", height);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, "  /Decode ", decode,
+	    "\n>>\n1 TkPhoto\n", NULL);
 
     /*
-     * Check the PhotoImageBlock information.
-     * We assume that:
+     * Check the PhotoImageBlock information. We assume that:
      *     if pixelSize is 1,2 or 4, the image is R,G,B,A;
      *     if pixelSize is 3, the image is R,G,B and offset[3] is bogus.
      */
@@ -1678,198 +1650,192 @@ Tk_PostscriptPhoto(interp, blockPtr, psInfo, width, height)
 	alphaOffset = blockPtr->offset[3];
     }
 
-
     for (yy = 0, lineLen=0; yy < height; yy++) {
 	switch (colorLevel) {
-	    case 0: {
-		/*
-		 * Generate data for image in monochrome mode.
-		 * No attempt at dithering is made--instead, just
-		 * set a threshold.
-		 * To handle transparecies we need to output two lines:
-		 * one for the black pixels, one for the white ones.
-		 */
+	case 0: {
+	    /*
+	     * Generate data for image in monochrome mode. No attempt at
+	     * dithering is made--instead, just set a threshold. To handle
+	     * transparecies we need to output two lines: one for the black
+	     * pixels, one for the white ones.
+	     */
 
-		unsigned char mask=0x80;
-		unsigned char data=0x00;
-		for (xx = 0; xx< width; xx ++) {
-		    pixelPtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr 
-			+ (yy * blockPtr->pitch) 
+	    unsigned char mask = 0x80;
+	    unsigned char data = 0x00;
+
+	    for (xx = 0; xx< width; xx ++) {
+		pixelPtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr + (yy * blockPtr->pitch)
 			+ (xx *blockPtr->pixelSize);
 
-		    red = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[0]];
-		    green = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[1]];
-		    blue = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[2]];
+		red = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[0]];
+		green = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[1]];
+		blue = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[2]];
 
-		    alpha = *(alphaPtr + (yy * alphaPitch)
-			    + (xx * alphaIncr) + alphaOffset);
+		alpha = *(alphaPtr + (yy * alphaPitch)
+			+ (xx * alphaIncr) + alphaOffset);
 
-		    /*
-		     * If pixel is less than threshold, then it is black.
-		     */
+		/*
+		 * If pixel is less than threshold, then it is black.
+		 */
 
-		    if ((alpha != 0) && 
-			    ( 0.3086 * red 
-				    + 0.6094 * green 
-				    + 0.082 * blue < 128)) {
-			data |= mask;
-		    }
-		    mask >>= 1;
-		    if (mask == 0) {
-			sprintf(buffer, "%02X", data);
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
-			lineLen += 2;
-			if (lineLen >= 60) {
-			    lineLen = 0;
-			    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", (char *) NULL);
-			}
-			mask=0x80;
-			data=0x00;
-		    }
+		if ((alpha != 0) &&
+			(0.3086*red + 0.6094*green + 0.082*blue < 128)) {
+		    data |= mask;
 		}
-		if ((width % 8) != 0) {
+		mask >>= 1;
+		if (mask == 0) {
 		    sprintf(buffer, "%02X", data);
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
-		    mask=0x80;
-		    data=0x00;
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+		    lineLen += 2;
+		    if (lineLen >= 60) {
+			lineLen = 0;
+			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", NULL);
+		    }
+		    mask = 0x80;
+		    data = 0x00;
 		}
+	    }
+	    if ((width % 8) != 0) {
+		sprintf(buffer, "%02X", data);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+		mask = 0x80;
+		data = 0x00;
+	    }
 
-		mask=0x80;
-		data=0x00;
-		for (xx = 0; xx< width; xx ++) {
-		    pixelPtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr 
-			+ (yy * blockPtr->pitch) 
+	    mask = 0x80;
+	    data = 0x00;
+	    for (xx=0 ; xx<width ; xx++) {
+		pixelPtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr + (yy * blockPtr->pitch)
 			+ (xx *blockPtr->pixelSize);
 
-		    red = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[0]];
-		    green = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[1]];
-		    blue = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[2]];
-
-		    alpha = *(alphaPtr + (yy * alphaPitch)
-			    + (xx * alphaIncr) + alphaOffset);
-			    
-		    /*
-		     * If pixel is greater than threshold, then it is white.
-		     */
-
-		    if ((alpha != 0) && 
-			    (  0.3086 * red 
-				    + 0.6094 * green 
-				    + 0.082 * blue >= 128)) {
-			data |= mask;
-		    }
-		    mask >>= 1;
-		    if (mask == 0) {
-			sprintf(buffer, "%02X", data);
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
-			lineLen += 2;
-			if (lineLen >= 60) {
-			    lineLen = 0;
-			    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", (char *) NULL);
-			}
-			mask=0x80;
-			data=0x00;
-		    }
-		}
-		if ((width % 8) != 0) {
-		    sprintf(buffer, "%02X", data);
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
-		    mask=0x80;
-		    data=0x00;
-		}
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case 1: {
+		red = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[0]];
+		green = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[1]];
+		blue = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[2]];
+
+		alpha = *(alphaPtr + (yy * alphaPitch)
+			+ (xx * alphaIncr) + alphaOffset);
+
 		/*
-		 * Generate transparency data.
-		 * We must prevent a transparent value of 0
-		 * because of a bug in some HP printers.
+		 * If pixel is greater than threshold, then it is white.
 		 */
 
-		for (xx = 0; xx < width; xx ++) {
-		    alpha = *(alphaPtr + (yy * alphaPitch)
-			    + (xx * alphaIncr) + alphaOffset);
-		    sprintf(buffer, "%02X", alpha | 0x01);
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+		if ((alpha != 0) &&
+			(0.3086*red + 0.6094*green + 0.082*blue >= 128)) {
+		    data |= mask;
+		}
+		mask >>= 1;
+		if (mask == 0) {
+		    sprintf(buffer, "%02X", data);
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 		    lineLen += 2;
 		    if (lineLen >= 60) {
 			lineLen = 0;
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", (char *) NULL);
+			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", NULL);
 		    }
+		    mask = 0x80;
+		    data = 0x00;
 		}
+	    }
+	    if ((width % 8) != 0) {
+		sprintf(buffer, "%02X", data);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+		mask = 0x80;
+		data = 0x00;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+	case 1: {
+	    /*
+	     * Generate transparency data. We must prevent a transparent value
+	     * of 0 because of a bug in some HP printers.
+	     */
 
+	    for (xx = 0; xx < width; xx ++) {
+		alpha = *(alphaPtr + (yy * alphaPitch)
+			+ (xx * alphaIncr) + alphaOffset);
+		sprintf(buffer, "%02X", alpha | 0x01);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+		lineLen += 2;
+		if (lineLen >= 60) {
+		    lineLen = 0;
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", NULL);
+		}
+	    }
 
-		/*
-		 * Generate data in gray mode--in this case, take a 
-		 * weighted sum of the red, green, and blue values.
-		 */
+	    /*
+	     * Generate data in gray mode; in this case, take a weighted sum
+	     * of the red, green, and blue values.
+	     */
 
-		for (xx = 0; xx < width; xx ++) {
-		    pixelPtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr 
-			+ (yy * blockPtr->pitch) 
+	    for (xx = 0; xx < width; xx ++) {
+		pixelPtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr + (yy * blockPtr->pitch)
 			+ (xx *blockPtr->pixelSize);
 
-		    red = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[0]];
-		    green = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[1]];
-		    blue = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[2]];
-
-		    sprintf(buffer, "%02X", (int) floor(0.5 +
-			    ( 0.3086 * red + 0.6094 * green + 0.0820 * blue)));
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
-		    lineLen += 2;
-		    if (lineLen >= 60) {
-			lineLen = 0;
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", (char *) NULL);
-		    }
+		red = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[0]];
+		green = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[1]];
+		blue = pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[2]];
+
+		sprintf(buffer, "%02X", (int) floor(0.5 +
+			( 0.3086 * red + 0.6094 * green + 0.0820 * blue)));
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+		lineLen += 2;
+		if (lineLen >= 60) {
+		    lineLen = 0;
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", NULL);
 		}
-		break;
 	    }
-	    default: {
-		/*
-		 * Generate transparency data.
-		 * We must prevent a transparent value of 0
-		 * because of a bug in some HP printers.
-		 */
+	    break;
+	}
+	default:
+	    /*
+	     * Generate transparency data. We must prevent a transparent value
+	     * of 0 because of a bug in some HP printers.
+	     */
 
-		for (xx = 0; xx < width; xx ++) {
-		    alpha = *(alphaPtr + (yy * alphaPitch)
-			    + (xx * alphaIncr) + alphaOffset);
-		    sprintf(buffer, "%02X", alpha | 0x01);
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
-		    lineLen += 2;
-		    if (lineLen >= 60) {
-			lineLen = 0;
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", (char *) NULL);
-		    }
+	    for (xx = 0; xx < width; xx ++) {
+		alpha = *(alphaPtr + (yy * alphaPitch)
+			+ (xx * alphaIncr) + alphaOffset);
+		sprintf(buffer, "%02X", alpha | 0x01);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+		lineLen += 2;
+		if (lineLen >= 60) {
+		    lineLen = 0;
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", NULL);
 		}
+	    }
 
+	    /*
+	     * Finally, color mode. Here, just output the red, green, and blue
+	     * values directly.
+	     */
 
-		/*
-		 * Finally, color mode.  Here, just output the red, green,
-		 * and blue values directly.
-		 */
-
-		for (xx = 0; xx < width; xx ++) {
-		    pixelPtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr 
-			+ (yy * blockPtr->pitch) 
-			+ (xx *blockPtr->pixelSize);
-
-		    sprintf(buffer, "%02X%02X%02X",
-			    pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[0]],
-			    pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[1]],
-			    pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[2]]);
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
-		    lineLen += 6;
-		    if (lineLen >= 60) {
-			lineLen = 0;
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", (char *) NULL);
-		    }
+	    for (xx = 0; xx < width; xx ++) {
+		pixelPtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr + (yy * blockPtr->pitch)
+			+ (xx * blockPtr->pixelSize);
+
+		sprintf(buffer, "%02X%02X%02X",
+			pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[0]],
+			pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[1]],
+			pixelPtr[blockPtr->offset[2]]);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+		lineLen += 6;
+		if (lineLen >= 60) {
+		    lineLen = 0;
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", NULL);
 		}
-		break;
 	    }
+	    break;
 	}
     }
 
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ">\n", (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ">\n", NULL);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvText.c b/generic/tkCanvText.c
index 282482f..24c3c7f 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvText.c
+++ b/generic/tkCanvText.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkCanvText.c --
  *
  *	This file implements text items for canvas widgets.
@@ -6,33 +6,32 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include <stdio.h>
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkCanvas.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "default.h"
 
 /*
  * The structure below defines the record for each text item.
  */
 
-typedef struct TextItem  {
+typedef struct TextItem {
     Tk_Item header;		/* Generic stuff that's the same for all
-				 * types.  MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
+				 * types. MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
     Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr;
 				/* Pointer to a structure containing
 				 * information about the selection and
-				 * insertion cursor.  The structure is owned
-				 * by (and shared with) the generic canvas
+				 * insertion cursor. The structure is owned by
+				 * (and shared with) the generic canvas
 				 * code. */
     /*
      * Fields that are set by widget commands other than "configure".
      */
-     
+
     double x, y;		/* Positioning point for text. */
     int insertPos;		/* Character index of character just before
 				 * which the insertion cursor is displayed. */
@@ -52,8 +51,10 @@ typedef struct TextItem  {
     Pixmap activeStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for text, or None. */
     Pixmap disabledStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for text, or None. */
     char *text;			/* Text for item (malloc-ed). */
-    int width;			/* Width of lines for word-wrap, pixels.
-				 * Zero means no word-wrap. */
+    int width;			/* Width of lines for word-wrap, pixels. Zero
+				 * means no word-wrap. */
+    int underline;		/* Index of character to put underline beneath
+				 * or -1 for no underlining. */
 
     /*
      * Fields whose values are derived from the current values of the
@@ -63,18 +64,18 @@ typedef struct TextItem  {
     int numChars;		/* Length of text in characters. */
     int numBytes;		/* Length of text in bytes. */
     Tk_TextLayout textLayout;	/* Cached text layout information. */
-    int leftEdge;		/* Pixel location of the left edge of the
-				 * text item; where the left border of the
-				 * text layout is drawn. */
-    int rightEdge;		/* Pixel just to right of right edge of
-				 * area of text item.  Used for selecting up
-				 * to end of line. */
+    int leftEdge;		/* Pixel location of the left edge of the text
+				 * item; where the left border of the text
+				 * layout is drawn. */
+    int rightEdge;		/* Pixel just to right of right edge of area
+				 * of text item. Used for selecting up to end
+				 * of line. */
     GC gc;			/* Graphics context for drawing text. */
     GC selTextGC;		/* Graphics context for selected text. */
     GC cursorOffGC;		/* If not None, this gives a graphics context
 				 * to use to draw the insertion cursor when
-				 * it's off.  Used if the selection and
-				 * insertion cursor colors are the same.  */
+				 * it's off. Used if the selection and
+				 * insertion cursor colors are the same. */
 } TextItem;
 
 /*
@@ -95,89 +96,86 @@ static Tk_CustomOption offsetOption = {
 };
 
 static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activefill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, activeColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activestipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, activeStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-anchor", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"center", Tk_Offset(TextItem, anchor),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, disabledColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, disabledStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activefill", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, activeColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activestipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, activeStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-anchor", NULL, NULL,
+	"center", Tk_Offset(TextItem, anchor), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, disabledColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, disabledStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", NULL, NULL,
 	"black", Tk_Offset(TextItem, color), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_FONT, "-font", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_FONT, "-font", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_CANVTEXT_FONT, Tk_Offset(TextItem, tkfont), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY, "-justify", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"left", Tk_Offset(TextItem, justify),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY, "-justify", NULL, NULL,
+	"left", Tk_Offset(TextItem, justify), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", NULL, NULL,
 	"0,0", Tk_Offset(TextItem, tsoffset),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &offsetOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK,
-	&stateOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, stipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-text", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TextItem, stipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-text", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(TextItem, text), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-width", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-underline", NULL, NULL,
+	"-1", Tk_Offset(TextItem, underline), 0},
+    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-width", NULL, NULL,
 	"0", Tk_Offset(TextItem, width), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+    {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ComputeTextBbox _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    TextItem *textPtr));
-static int		ConfigureText _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static void		ComputeTextBbox(Tk_Canvas canvas, TextItem *textPtr);
+static int		ConfigureText(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags));
-static int		CreateText _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags);
+static int		CreateText(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		DeleteText _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display));
-static void		DisplayCanvText _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DeleteText(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display);
+static void		DisplayCanvText(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst,
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
-static int		GetSelText _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height);
+static int		GetSelText(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int offset, char *buffer,
-			    int maxBytes));
-static int		GetTextIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int maxBytes);
+static int		GetTextIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *obj, int *indexPtr));
-static void		ScaleText _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tcl_Obj *obj, int *indexPtr);
+static void		ScaleText(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY,
-			    double scaleX, double scaleY));
-static void		SetTextCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int index));
-static int		TextCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    double scaleX, double scaleY);
+static void		SetTextCursor(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int index);
+static int		TextCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		TextDeleteChars _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int first, int last));
-static void		TextInsert _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int beforeThis, char *string));
-static int		TextToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr));
-static double		TextToPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr));
-static int		TextToPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass));
-static void		TranslateText _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY));
+			    int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		TextDeleteChars(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int first, int last);
+static void		TextInsert(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int beforeThis, char *string);
+static int		TextToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr);
+static double		TextToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr);
+static int		TextToPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass);
+static void		TranslateText(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY);
 
 /*
- * The structures below defines the rectangle and oval item types
- * by means of procedures that can be invoked by generic item code.
+ * The structures below defines the rectangle and oval item types by means of
+ * functions that can be invoked by generic item code.
  */
 
 Tk_ItemType tkTextType = {
@@ -200,7 +198,7 @@ Tk_ItemType tkTextType = {
     GetSelText,			/* selectionProc */
     TextInsert,			/* insertProc */
     TextDeleteChars,		/* dTextProc */
-    (Tk_ItemType *) NULL,	/* nextPtr */
+    NULL,			/* nextPtr */
 };
 
 /*
@@ -208,14 +206,12 @@ Tk_ItemType tkTextType = {
  *
  * CreateText --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to create a new text item
- *	in a canvas.
+ *	This function is invoked to create a new text item in a canvas.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurred in
- *	creating the item then an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result;  in this case itemPtr is left uninitialized
- *	so it can be safely freed by the caller.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If an error occurred in creating the item
+ *	then an error message is left in the interp's result; in this case
+ *	itemPtr is left uninitialized so it can be safely freed by the caller.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	A new text item is created.
@@ -224,24 +220,24 @@ Tk_ItemType tkTextType = {
  */
 
 static int
-CreateText(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas to hold new item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Record to hold new item; header has been
+CreateText(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas to hold new item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Record to hold new item; header has been
 				 * initialized by caller. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments describing rectangle. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Arguments describing rectangle. */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
     int i;
 
     if (objc == 0) {
-	panic("canvas did not pass any coords\n");
+	Tcl_Panic("canvas did not pass any coords\n");
     }
 
     /*
      * Carry out initialization that is needed in order to clean up after
-     * errors during the the remainder of this procedure.
+     * errors during the the remainder of this function.
      */
 
     textPtr->textInfoPtr = Tk_CanvasGetTextInfo(canvas);
@@ -262,6 +258,7 @@ CreateText(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
     textPtr->disabledStipple = None;
     textPtr->text	= NULL;
     textPtr->width	= 0;
+    textPtr->underline	= -1;
 
     textPtr->numChars	= 0;
     textPtr->numBytes	= 0;
@@ -273,14 +270,15 @@ CreateText(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
     textPtr->cursorOffGC = None;
 
     /*
-     * Process the arguments to fill in the item record.
-     * Only 1 (list) or 2 (x y) coords are allowed.
+     * Process the arguments to fill in the item record. Only 1 (list) or 2 (x
+     * y) coords are allowed.
      */
 
     if (objc == 1) {
 	i = 1;
     } else {
 	char *arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
+
 	i = 2;
 	if ((arg[0] == '-') && (arg[1] >= 'a') && (arg[1] <= 'z')) {
 	    i = 1;
@@ -293,7 +291,7 @@ CreateText(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    error:
+  error:
     DeleteText(canvas, itemPtr, Tk_Display(Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas)));
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -303,9 +301,8 @@ CreateText(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * TextCoords --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "coords" widget
- *	command on text items.  See the user documentation for
- *	details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "coords" widget command on
+ *	text items. See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR, and sets the interp's result.
@@ -317,18 +314,19 @@ CreateText(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-TextCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item whose coordinates are to be read or
+TextCoords(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item whose coordinates are to be read or
 				 * modified. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of coordinates supplied in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1, x2, y2, ... */
+    int objc,			/* Number of coordinates supplied in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1, x2, y2, ... */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
 
     if (objc == 0) {
 	Tcl_Obj *obj = Tcl_NewObj();
+
 	Tcl_Obj *subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(textPtr->x);
 	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
 	subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(textPtr->y);
@@ -347,15 +345,16 @@ TextCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
-	if ((Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[0], &textPtr->x) != TCL_OK)
+	if ((Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[0],
+		    &textPtr->x) != TCL_OK)
 		|| (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[1],
-  		    &textPtr->y) != TCL_OK)) {
+		    &textPtr->y) != TCL_OK)) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	ComputeTextBbox(canvas, textPtr);
     } else {
 	char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	
+
 	sprintf(buf, "wrong # coordinates: expected 0 or 2, got %d", objc);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -368,28 +367,28 @@ TextCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ConfigureText --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to configure various aspects
- *	of a text item, such as its border and background colors.
+ *	This function is invoked to configure various aspects of a text item,
+ *	such as its border and background colors.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result code.  If an error occurs, then
- *	an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result code. If an error occurs, then an error message
+ *	is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors and stipple
- *	patterns, may be set for itemPtr.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors and stipple patterns, may be
+ *	set for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureText(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Rectangle item to reconfigure. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of elements in objv.  */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
+ConfigureText(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Rectangle item to reconfigure. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of elements in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
     XGCValues gcValues;
@@ -409,14 +408,13 @@ ConfigureText(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * A few of the options require additional processing, such as
-     * graphics contexts.
+     * A few of the options require additional processing, such as graphics
+     * contexts.
      */
 
     state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if (textPtr->activeColor != NULL ||
-	    textPtr->activeStipple != None) {
+    if (textPtr->activeColor != NULL || textPtr->activeStipple != None) {
 	itemPtr->redraw_flags |= TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT;
     } else {
 	itemPtr->redraw_flags &= ~TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT;
@@ -497,14 +495,14 @@ ConfigureText(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 
 
     /*
-     * If the text was changed, move the selection and insertion indices
-     * to keep them inside the item.
+     * If the text was changed, move the selection and insertion indices to
+     * keep them inside the item.
      */
 
     textPtr->numBytes = strlen(textPtr->text);
     textPtr->numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(textPtr->text, textPtr->numBytes);
     if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr == itemPtr) {
-	
+
 	if (textInfoPtr->selectFirst >= textPtr->numChars) {
 	    textInfoPtr->selItemPtr = NULL;
 	} else {
@@ -530,8 +528,8 @@ ConfigureText(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * DeleteText --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to clean up the data structure
- *	associated with a text item.
+ *	This function is called to clean up the data structure associated with
+ *	a text item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -543,10 +541,10 @@ ConfigureText(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteText(canvas, itemPtr, display)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Info about overall canvas widget. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item that is being deleted. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing window for canvas. */
+DeleteText(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Info about overall canvas widget. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being deleted. */
+    Display *display)		/* Display containing window for canvas. */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -590,26 +588,25 @@ DeleteText(canvas, itemPtr, display)
  *
  * ComputeTextBbox --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to compute the bounding box of
- *	all the pixels that may be drawn as part of a text item.
- *	In addition, it recomputes all of the geometry information
- *	used to display a text item or check for mouse hits.
+ *	This function is invoked to compute the bounding box of all the pixels
+ *	that may be drawn as part of a text item. In addition, it recomputes
+ *	all of the geometry information used to display a text item or check
+ *	for mouse hits.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header
- *	for itemPtr, and the linePtr structure is regenerated
- *	for itemPtr.
+ *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header for itemPtr,
+ *	and the linePtr structure is regenerated for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ComputeTextBbox(canvas, textPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    TextItem *textPtr;		/* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
+ComputeTextBbox(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    TextItem *textPtr)		/* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
 {
     Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr;
     int leftX, topY, width, height, fudge;
@@ -629,57 +626,56 @@ ComputeTextBbox(canvas, textPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Use overall geometry information to compute the top-left corner
-     * of the bounding box for the text item.
+     * Use overall geometry information to compute the top-left corner of the
+     * bounding box for the text item.
      */
 
     leftX = (int) floor(textPtr->x + 0.5);
     topY = (int) floor(textPtr->y + 0.5);
     switch (textPtr->anchor) {
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_N:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
-	    break;
-
-	case TK_ANCHOR_W:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_E:
-	    topY -= height / 2;
-	    break;
-
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_S:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
-	    topY -= height;
-	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_N:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
+	break;
+
+    case TK_ANCHOR_W:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_E:
+	topY -= height / 2;
+	break;
+
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_S:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
+	topY -= height;
+	break;
     }
     switch (textPtr->anchor) {
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_W:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
-	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_W:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
+	break;
 
-	case TK_ANCHOR_N:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_S:
-	    leftX -= width / 2;
-	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_N:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_S:
+	leftX -= width / 2;
+	break;
 
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_E:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
-	    leftX -= width;
-	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_E:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
+	leftX -= width;
+	break;
     }
 
-    textPtr->leftEdge  = leftX;
+    textPtr->leftEdge = leftX;
     textPtr->rightEdge = leftX + width;
 
     /*
-     * Last of all, update the bounding box for the item.  The item's
-     * bounding box includes the bounding box of all its lines, plus
-     * an extra fudge factor for the cursor border (which could
-     * potentially be quite large).
+     * Last of all, update the bounding box for the item. The item's bounding
+     * box includes the bounding box of all its lines, plus an extra fudge
+     * factor for the cursor border (which could potentially be quite large).
      */
 
     textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr;
@@ -698,26 +694,26 @@ ComputeTextBbox(canvas, textPtr)
  *
  * DisplayCanvText --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to draw a text item in a given
- *	drawable.
+ *	This function is invoked to draw a text item in a given drawable.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation
- *	information in canvas.
+ *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation information in
+ *	canvas.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayCanvText(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display on which to draw item. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw item. */
-    int x, y, width, height;	/* Describes region of canvas that must be
+DisplayCanvText(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to be displayed. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw item. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw item. */
+    int x, int y, int width, int height)
+				/* Describes region of canvas that must be
 				 * redisplayed (not used). */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr;
@@ -749,8 +745,8 @@ DisplayCanvText(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If we're stippling, then modify the stipple offset in the GC.  Be
-     * sure to reset the offset when done, since the GC is supposed to be
+     * If we're stippling, then modify the stipple offset in the GC. Be sure
+     * to reset the offset when done, since the GC is supposed to be
      * read-only.
      */
 
@@ -792,7 +788,7 @@ DisplayCanvText(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 	    for (y = yFirst ; y <= yLast; y += height) {
 		if (y == yLast) {
 		    width = xLast + wLast - x;
-		} else {	    
+		} else {
 		    width = textPtr->rightEdge - textPtr->leftEdge - x;
 		}
 		Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas,
@@ -811,11 +807,11 @@ DisplayCanvText(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 
     /*
      * If the insertion point should be displayed, then draw a special
-     * background for the cursor before drawing the text.  Note:  if
-     * we're the cursor item but the cursor is turned off, then redraw
-     * background over the area of the cursor.  This guarantees that
-     * the selection won't make the cursor invisible on mono displays,
-     * where both are drawn in the same color.
+     * background for the cursor before drawing the text. Note: if we're the
+     * cursor item but the cursor is turned off, then redraw background over
+     * the area of the cursor. This guarantees that the selection won't make
+     * the cursor invisible on mono displays, where both are drawn in the same
+     * color.
      */
 
     if ((textInfoPtr->focusItemPtr == itemPtr) && (textInfoPtr->gotFocus)) {
@@ -836,11 +832,10 @@ DisplayCanvText(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 			textInfoPtr->insertBorderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
 	    } else if (textPtr->cursorOffGC != None) {
 		/*
-		 * Redraw the background over the area of the cursor,
-		 * even though the cursor is turned off.  This
-		 * guarantees that the selection won't make the cursor
-		 * invisible on mono displays, where both may be drawn
-		 * in the same color.
+		 * Redraw the background over the area of the cursor, even
+		 * though the cursor is turned off. This guarantees that the
+		 * selection won't make the cursor invisible on mono displays,
+		 * where both may be drawn in the same color.
 		 */
 
 		XFillRectangle(display, drawable, textPtr->cursorOffGC,
@@ -851,16 +846,14 @@ DisplayCanvText(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 	}
     }
 
-
     /*
-     * If there is no selected text or the selected text foreground
-     * is the same as the regular text foreground, then draw one
-     * text string. If there is selected text and the foregrounds
-     * differ, draw the regular text up to the selection, draw
-     * the selection, then draw the rest of the regular text.
-     * Drawing the regular text and then the selected text over
-     * it would causes problems with anti-aliased text because the
-     * two anti-aliasing colors would blend together.
+     * If there is no selected text or the selected text foreground is the
+     * same as the regular text foreground, then draw one text string. If
+     * there is selected text and the foregrounds differ, draw the regular
+     * text up to the selection, draw the selection, then draw the rest of the
+     * regular text. Drawing the regular text and then the selected text over
+     * it would causes problems with anti-aliased text because the two
+     * anti-aliasing colors would blend together.
      */
 
     Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, (double) textPtr->leftEdge,
@@ -878,6 +871,8 @@ DisplayCanvText(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 	Tk_DrawTextLayout(display, drawable, textPtr->gc, textPtr->textLayout,
 	    drawableX, drawableY, 0, -1);
     }
+    Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(display, drawable, textPtr->gc, textPtr->textLayout,
+	    drawableX, drawableY, textPtr->underline);
 
     if (stipple != None) {
 	XSetTSOrigin(display, textPtr->gc, 0, 0);
@@ -895,24 +890,23 @@ DisplayCanvText(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The text in the given item is modified.  The cursor and
- *	selection positions are also modified to reflect the
- *	insertion.
+ *	The text in the given item is modified. The cursor and selection
+ *	positions are also modified to reflect the insertion.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TextInsert(canvas, itemPtr, index, string)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing text item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Text item to be modified. */
-    int index;			/* Character index before which string is
-				 * to be inserted. */
-    char *string;		/* New characters to be inserted. */
+TextInsert(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing text item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Text item to be modified. */
+    int index,			/* Character index before which string is to
+				 * be inserted. */
+    char *string)		/* New characters to be inserted. */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
     int byteIndex, byteCount, charsAdded;
-    char *new, *text;
+    char *newStr, *text;
     Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr;
 
     string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj((Tcl_Obj *) string, &byteCount);
@@ -931,20 +925,20 @@ TextInsert(canvas, itemPtr, index, string)
 	return;
     }
 
-    new = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) textPtr->numBytes + byteCount + 1);
-    memcpy(new, text, (size_t) byteIndex);
-    strcpy(new + byteIndex, string);
-    strcpy(new + byteIndex + byteCount, text + byteIndex);
+    newStr = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) textPtr->numBytes + byteCount + 1);
+    memcpy(newStr, text, (size_t) byteIndex);
+    strcpy(newStr + byteIndex, string);
+    strcpy(newStr + byteIndex + byteCount, text + byteIndex);
 
     ckfree(text);
-    textPtr->text = new;
+    textPtr->text = newStr;
     charsAdded = Tcl_NumUtfChars(string, byteCount);
     textPtr->numChars += charsAdded;
     textPtr->numBytes += byteCount;
 
     /*
      * Inserting characters invalidates indices such as those for the
-     * selection and cursor.  Update the indices appropriately.
+     * selection and cursor. Update the indices appropriately.
      */
 
     if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr == itemPtr) {
@@ -976,25 +970,24 @@ TextInsert(canvas, itemPtr, index, string)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Characters between "first" and "last", inclusive, get
- *	deleted from itemPtr, and things like the selection
- *	position get updated.
+ *	Characters between "first" and "last", inclusive, get deleted from
+ *	itemPtr, and things like the selection position get updated.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TextDeleteChars(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item in which to delete characters. */
-    int first;			/* Character index of first character to
+TextDeleteChars(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item in which to delete characters. */
+    int first,			/* Character index of first character to
 				 * delete. */
-    int last;			/* Character index of last character to
-				 * delete (inclusive). */
+    int last)			/* Character index of last character to delete
+				 * (inclusive). */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
     int byteIndex, byteCount, charsRemoved;
-    char *new, *text;
+    char *newStr, *text;
     Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr;
 
     text = textPtr->text;
@@ -1012,19 +1005,19 @@ TextDeleteChars(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
     byteIndex = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(text, first) - text;
     byteCount = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(text + byteIndex, charsRemoved)
 	- (text + byteIndex);
-    
-    new = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (textPtr->numBytes + 1 - byteCount));
-    memcpy(new, text, (size_t) byteIndex);
-    strcpy(new + byteIndex, text + byteIndex + byteCount);
+
+    newStr = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (textPtr->numBytes + 1 - byteCount));
+    memcpy(newStr, text, (size_t) byteIndex);
+    strcpy(newStr + byteIndex, text + byteIndex + byteCount);
 
     ckfree(text);
-    textPtr->text = new;
+    textPtr->text = newStr;
     textPtr->numChars -= charsRemoved;
     textPtr->numBytes -= byteCount;
 
     /*
-     * Update indexes for the selection and cursor to reflect the
-     * renumbering of the remaining characters.
+     * Update indexes for the selection and cursor to reflect the renumbering
+     * of the remaining characters.
      */
 
     if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr == itemPtr) {
@@ -1066,14 +1059,14 @@ TextDeleteChars(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
  *
  * TextToPoint --
  *
- *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given
- *	text item, in canvas units.
+ *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given text item, in
+ *	canvas units.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates
- *	are pointPtr[0] and pointPtr[1] is inside the text item.  If
- *	the point isn't inside the text item then the return value
- *	is the distance from the point to the text item.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates are
+ *	pointPtr[0] and pointPtr[1] is inside the text item. If the point
+ *	isn't inside the text item then the return value is the distance from
+ *	the point to the text item.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1082,10 +1075,10 @@ TextDeleteChars(canvas, itemPtr, first, last)
  */
 
 static double
-TextToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against point. */
-    double *pointPtr;		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
+TextToPoint(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against point. */
+    double *pointPtr)		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
@@ -1095,7 +1088,7 @@ TextToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
     textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
-    value =  (double) Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(textPtr->textLayout,
+    value = (double) Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(textPtr->textLayout,
 	    (int) pointPtr[0] - textPtr->leftEdge,
 	    (int) pointPtr[1] - textPtr->header.y1);
 
@@ -1111,14 +1104,13 @@ TextToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
  *
  * TextToArea --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to determine whether an item
- *	lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or overlapping
- *	a given rectangle.
+ *	This function is called to determine whether an item lies entirely
+ *	inside, entirely outside, or overlapping a given rectangle.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area
- *	given by rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely
- *	inside the given area.
+ *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area given by
+ *	rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside the given
+ *	area.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1127,12 +1119,12 @@ TextToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-TextToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against rectangle. */
-    double *rectPtr;		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
-				 * (x1, y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular
-				 * area.  */
+TextToArea(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against rectangle. */
+    double *rectPtr)		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
+				 * (x1,y1,x2,y2) describing rectangular
+				 * area. */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
@@ -1154,26 +1146,27 @@ TextToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
  *
  * ScaleText --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to rescale a text item.
+ *	This function is invoked to rescale a text item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Scales the position of the text, but not the size
- *	of the font for the text.
+ *	Scales the position of the text, but not the size of the font for the
+ *	text.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-ScaleText(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing rectangle. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Rectangle to be scaled. */
-    double originX, originY;	/* Origin about which to scale rect. */
-    double scaleX;		/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
-    double scaleY;		/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
+ScaleText(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing rectangle. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Rectangle to be scaled. */
+    double originX, double originY,
+				/* Origin about which to scale rect. */
+    double scaleX,		/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
+    double scaleY)		/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -1188,25 +1181,24 @@ ScaleText(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
  *
  * TranslateText --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to move a text item by a
- *	given amount.
+ *	This function is called to move a text item by a given amount.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The position of the text item is offset by (xDelta, yDelta),
- *	and the bounding box is updated in the generic part of the
- *	item structure.
+ *	The position of the text item is offset by (xDelta, yDelta), and the
+ *	bounding box is updated in the generic part of the item structure.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TranslateText(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item that is being moved. */
-    double deltaX, deltaY;	/* Amount by which item is to be moved. */
+TranslateText(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being moved. */
+    double deltaX, double deltaY)
+				/* Amount by which item is to be moved. */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -1220,14 +1212,13 @@ TranslateText(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
  *
  * GetTextIndex --
  *
- *	Parse an index into a text item and return either its value
- *	or an error.
+ *	Parse an index into a text item and return either its value or an
+ *	error.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.  If all went well, then *indexPtr is
- *	filled in with the index (into itemPtr) corresponding to
- *	string.  Otherwise an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result. If all went well, then *indexPtr is filled in
+ *	with the index (into itemPtr) corresponding to string. Otherwise an
+ *	error message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1236,18 +1227,19 @@ TranslateText(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
  */
 
 static int
-GetTextIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item for which the index is being
+GetTextIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item for which the index is being
 				 * specified. */
-    Tcl_Obj *obj;		/* Specification of a particular character
-				 * in itemPtr's text. */
-    int *indexPtr;		/* Where to store converted character
+    Tcl_Obj *obj,		/* Specification of a particular character in
+				 * itemPtr's text. */
+    int *indexPtr)		/* Where to store converted character
 				 * index. */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
-    int c, length;
+    int length;
+    int c;
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) canvas;
     Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr;
     char *string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, &length);
@@ -1256,17 +1248,18 @@ GetTextIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
 
     if ((c == 'e') && (strncmp(string, "end", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
 	*indexPtr = textPtr->numChars;
-    } else if ((c=='i') && (strncmp(string, "insert", (unsigned) length)==0)) {
+    } else if ((c == 'i')
+	    && (strncmp(string, "insert", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
 	*indexPtr = textPtr->insertPos;
-    } else if ((c=='s') && (strncmp(string, "sel.first", (unsigned) length)==0)
-	    && (length >= 5)) {
+    } else if ((c == 's') && (length >= 5)
+	    && (strncmp(string, "sel.first", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
 	if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr != itemPtr) {
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "selection isn't in item", TCL_STATIC);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	*indexPtr = textInfoPtr->selectFirst;
-    } else if ((c=='s') && (strncmp(string, "sel.last", (unsigned) length)==0)
-	    && (length >= 5)) {
+    } else if ((c == 's') && (length >= 5)
+	    && (strncmp(string, "sel.last", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
 	if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr != itemPtr) {
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "selection isn't in item", TCL_STATIC);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1292,7 +1285,7 @@ GetTextIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
 	*indexPtr = Tk_PointToChar(textPtr->textLayout,
 		x + canvasPtr->scrollX1 - textPtr->leftEdge,
 		y + canvasPtr->scrollY1 - textPtr->header.y1);
-    } else if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj((Tcl_Interp *)NULL, obj, indexPtr) == TCL_OK) {
+    } else if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, obj, indexPtr) == TCL_OK) {
 	if (*indexPtr < 0){
 	    *indexPtr = 0;
 	} else if (*indexPtr > textPtr->numChars) {
@@ -1300,14 +1293,13 @@ GetTextIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
 	}
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * Some of the paths here leave messages in the interp's result,
-	 * so we have to clear it out before storing our own message.
+	 * Some of the paths here leave messages in the interp's result, so we
+	 * have to clear it out before storing our own message.
 	 */
 
-	badIndex:
-	Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *) NULL, TCL_STATIC);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad index \"", string, "\"",
-		(char *) NULL);
+    badIndex:
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, NULL, TCL_STATIC);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad index \"", string, "\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -1331,18 +1323,18 @@ GetTextIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-SetTextCursor(canvas, itemPtr, index)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Record describing canvas widget. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Text item in which cursor position is to
-				 * be set. */
-    int index;			/* Character index of character just before
+SetTextCursor(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Record describing canvas widget. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Text item in which cursor position is to be
+				 * set. */
+    int index)			/* Character index of character just before
 				 * which cursor is to be positioned. */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
 
     if (index < 0) {
 	textPtr->insertPos = 0;
-    } else  if (index > textPtr->numChars) {
+    } else if (index > textPtr->numChars) {
 	textPtr->insertPos = textPtr->numChars;
     } else {
 	textPtr->insertPos = index;
@@ -1354,15 +1346,14 @@ SetTextCursor(canvas, itemPtr, index)
  *
  * GetSelText --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to return the selected portion
- *	of a text item.  It is only called when this item has
- *	the selection.
+ *	This function is invoked to return the selected portion of a text
+ *	item. It is only called when this item has the selection.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the number of non-NULL bytes stored
- *	at buffer.  Buffer is filled (or partially filled) with a
- *	NULL-terminated string containing part or all of the selection,
- *	as given by offset and maxBytes.
+ *	The return value is the number of non-NULL bytes stored at buffer.
+ *	Buffer is filled (or partially filled) with a NULL-terminated string
+ *	containing part or all of the selection, as given by offset and
+ *	maxBytes.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1371,18 +1362,18 @@ SetTextCursor(canvas, itemPtr, index)
  */
 
 static int
-GetSelText(canvas, itemPtr, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing selection. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Text item containing selection. */
-    int offset;			/* Byte offset within selection of first
+GetSelText(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing selection. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Text item containing selection. */
+    int offset,			/* Byte offset within selection of first
 				 * character to be returned. */
-    char *buffer;		/* Location in which to place selection. */
-    int maxBytes;		/* Maximum number of bytes to place at
-				 * buffer, not including terminating NULL
+    char *buffer,		/* Location in which to place selection. */
+    int maxBytes)		/* Maximum number of bytes to place at buffer,
+				 * not including terminating NULL
 				 * character. */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
-    int byteCount; 
+    int byteCount;
     char *text;
     CONST char *selStart, *selEnd;
     Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr;
@@ -1412,15 +1403,13 @@ GetSelText(canvas, itemPtr, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  *
  * TextToPostscript --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to generate Postscript for
- *	text items.
+ *	This function is called to generate Postscript for text items.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If an error
- *	occurs in generating Postscript then an error message is
- *	left in the interp's result, replacing whatever used
- *	to be there.  If no error occurs, then Postscript for the
- *	item is appended to the result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If an error occurs in
+ *	generating Postscript then an error message is left in the interp's
+ *	result, replacing whatever used to be there. If no error occurs, then
+ *	Postscript for the item is appended to the result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1429,13 +1418,13 @@ GetSelText(canvas, itemPtr, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  */
 
 static int
-TextToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Leave Postscript or error message here. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Information about overall canvas. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item for which Postscript is wanted. */
-    int prepass;		/* 1 means this is a prepass to collect
-				 * font information; 0 means final Postscript
-				 * is being created. */
+TextToPostscript(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Leave Postscript or error message here. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about overall canvas. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item for which Postscript is wanted. */
+    int prepass)		/* 1 means this is a prepass to collect font
+				 * information; 0 means final Postscript is
+				 * being created. */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
     int x, y;
@@ -1446,7 +1435,7 @@ TextToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
     Pixmap stipple;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
     color = textPtr->color;
@@ -1480,41 +1469,53 @@ TextToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     if (stipple != None) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "/StippleText {\n    ",
-		(char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "/StippleText {\n    ", NULL);
 	Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "} bind def\n", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "} bind def\n", NULL);
     }
 
     sprintf(buffer, "%.15g %.15g [\n", textPtr->x,
 	    Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, textPtr->y));
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 
     Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(interp, textPtr->textLayout);
 
     x = 0;  y = 0;  justify = NULL;	/* lint. */
     switch (textPtr->anchor) {
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:	x = 0; y = 0;	break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_N:	x = 1; y = 0;	break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:	x = 2; y = 0;	break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_E:	x = 2; y = 1;	break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:	x = 2; y = 2;	break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_S:	x = 1; y = 2;	break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:	x = 0; y = 2;	break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_W:	x = 0; y = 1;	break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:	x = 1; y = 1;	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:	   x = 0; y = 0; break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_N:	   x = 1; y = 0; break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:	   x = 2; y = 0; break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_E:	   x = 2; y = 1; break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:	   x = 2; y = 2; break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_S:	   x = 1; y = 2; break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:	   x = 0; y = 2; break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_W:	   x = 0; y = 1; break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER: x = 1; y = 1; break;
     }
     switch (textPtr->justify) {
-        case TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT:	justify = "0";	break;
-	case TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER: justify = "0.5";break;
-	case TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT:  justify = "1";	break;
+    case TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT:   justify = "0";   break;
+    case TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER: justify = "0.5"; break;
+    case TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT:  justify = "1";   break;
     }
 
     Tk_GetFontMetrics(textPtr->tkfont, &fm);
-    sprintf(buffer, "] %d %g %g %s %s DrawText\n",
-	    fm.linespace, x / -2.0, y / 2.0, justify,
-	    ((stipple == None) ? "false" : "true"));
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    sprintf(buffer, "] %d ", fm.linespace);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, x / -2.0, buffer);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, y / 2.0, buffer);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ", buffer, NULL);
+    sprintf(buffer, " %s %s DrawText\n",
+	    justify, ((stipple == None) ? "false" : "true"));
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvUtil.c b/generic/tkCanvUtil.c
index 8ad3b5c..eca3789 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvUtil.c
+++ b/generic/tkCanvUtil.c
@@ -1,29 +1,64 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkCanvUtil.c --
  *
- *	This procedure contains a collection of utility procedures
- *	used by the implementations of various canvas item types.
+ *	This file contains a collection of utility functions used by the
+ *	implementations of various canvas item types.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1994 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
- * Copyright (c) 1994 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkCanvas.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include <assert.h>
 
+/*
+ * Structures defined only in this file.
+ */
+
+typedef struct SmoothAssocData {
+    struct SmoothAssocData *nextPtr;
+				/* Pointer to next SmoothAssocData. */
+    Tk_SmoothMethod smooth;	/* Name and functions associated with this
+				 * option. */
+} SmoothAssocData;
+
+Tk_SmoothMethod tkBezierSmoothMethod = {
+    "true",
+    TkMakeBezierCurve,
+    (void (*) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr,
+	    int numPoints, int numSteps)) TkMakeBezierPostscript,
+};
+static Tk_SmoothMethod tkRawSmoothMethod = {
+    "raw",
+    TkMakeRawCurve,
+    (void (*) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr,
+	    int numPoints, int numSteps)) TkMakeRawCurvePostscript,
+};
+
+/*
+ * Function forward-declarations.
+ */
+
+static void		SmoothMethodCleanupProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static SmoothAssocData *InitSmoothMethods(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static int		DashConvert(char *l, CONST char *p, int n,
+			    double width);
+static void		TranslateAndAppendCoords(TkCanvas *canvPtr,
+			    double x, double y, XPoint *outArr, int numOut);
+
+#define ABS(a) ((a>=0)?(a):(-(a)))
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_CanvasTkwin --
  *
- *	Given a token for a canvas, this procedure returns the
- *	widget that represents the canvas.
+ *	Given a token for a canvas, this function returns the widget that
+ *	represents the canvas.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a handle for the widget.
@@ -35,8 +70,8 @@
  */
 
 Tk_Window
-Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Token for the canvas. */
+Tk_CanvasTkwin(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas)		/* Token for the canvas. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) canvas;
     return canvasPtr->tkwin;
@@ -47,16 +82,15 @@ Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas)
  *
  * Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords --
  *
- *	Given an (x,y) coordinate pair within a canvas, this procedure
+ *	Given an (x,y) coordinate pair within a canvas, this function
  *	returns the corresponding coordinates at which the point should
  *	be drawn in the drawable used for display.
  *
  * Results:
- *	There is no return value.  The values at *drawableXPtr and
- *	*drawableYPtr are filled in with the coordinates at which
- *	x and y should be drawn.  These coordinates are clipped
- *	to fit within a "short", since this is what X uses in
- *	most cases for drawing.
+ *	There is no return value. The values at *drawableXPtr and
+ *	*drawableYPtr are filled in with the coordinates at which x and y
+ *	should be drawn. These coordinates are clipped to fit within a
+ *	"short", since this is what X uses in most cases for drawing.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -65,11 +99,12 @@ Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, x, y, drawableXPtr, drawableYPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Token for the canvas. */
-    double x, y;			/* Coordinates in canvas space. */
-    short *drawableXPtr, *drawableYPtr;	/* Screen coordinates are stored
-					 * here. */
+Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Token for the canvas. */
+    double x,			/* Coordinates in canvas space. */
+    double y,
+    short *drawableXPtr,	/* Screen coordinates are stored here. */
+    short *drawableYPtr)
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) canvas;
     double tmp;
@@ -88,7 +123,7 @@ Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, x, y, drawableXPtr, drawableYPtr)
 	*drawableXPtr = (short) tmp;
     }
 
-    tmp = y  - canvasPtr->drawableYOrigin;
+    tmp = y - canvasPtr->drawableYOrigin;
     if (tmp > 0) {
 	tmp += 0.5;
     } else {
@@ -108,15 +143,14 @@ Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, x, y, drawableXPtr, drawableYPtr)
  *
  * Tk_CanvasWindowCoords --
  *
- *	Given an (x,y) coordinate pair within a canvas, this procedure
- *	returns the corresponding coordinates in the canvas's window.
+ *	Given an (x,y) coordinate pair within a canvas, this function returns
+ *	the corresponding coordinates in the canvas's window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	There is no return value.  The values at *screenXPtr and
- *	*screenYPtr are filled in with the coordinates at which
- *	(x,y) appears in the canvas's window.  These coordinates
- *	are clipped to fit within a "short", since this is what X
- *	uses in most cases for drawing.
+ *	There is no return value. The values at *screenXPtr and *screenYPtr
+ *	are filled in with the coordinates at which (x,y) appears in the
+ *	canvas's window. These coordinates are clipped to fit within a
+ *	"short", since this is what X uses in most cases for drawing.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -125,11 +159,12 @@ Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, x, y, drawableXPtr, drawableYPtr)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_CanvasWindowCoords(canvas, x, y, screenXPtr, screenYPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Token for the canvas. */
-    double x, y;			/* Coordinates in canvas space. */
-    short *screenXPtr, *screenYPtr;	/* Screen coordinates are stored
-					 * here. */
+Tk_CanvasWindowCoords(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Token for the canvas. */
+    double x,			/* Coordinates in canvas space. */
+    double y,
+    short *screenXPtr,		/* Screen coordinates are stored here. */
+    short *screenYPtr)
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) canvas;
     double tmp;
@@ -148,7 +183,7 @@ Tk_CanvasWindowCoords(canvas, x, y, screenXPtr, screenYPtr)
 	*screenXPtr = (short) tmp;
     }
 
-    tmp = y  - canvasPtr->yOrigin;
+    tmp = y - canvasPtr->yOrigin;
     if (tmp > 0) {
 	tmp += 0.5;
     } else {
@@ -172,11 +207,10 @@ Tk_CanvasWindowCoords(canvas, x, y, screenXPtr, screenYPtr)
  *	corresponding to that string.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result.  If
- *	TCL_OK is returned, then everything went well and the
- *	canvas coordinate is stored at *doublePtr;  otherwise
- *	TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result. If TCL_OK is
+ *	returned, then everything went well and the canvas coordinate is
+ *	stored at *doublePtr; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -185,14 +219,15 @@ Tk_CanvasWindowCoords(canvas, x, y, screenXPtr, screenYPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_CanvasGetCoord(interp, canvas, string, doublePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas to which coordinate applies. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* Describes coordinate (any screen
-				 * coordinate form may be used here). */
-    double *doublePtr;		/* Place to store converted coordinate. */
+Tk_CanvasGetCoord(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas to which coordinate applies. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* Describes coordinate (any screen coordinate
+				 * form may be used here). */
+    double *doublePtr)		/* Place to store converted coordinate. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) canvas;
+
     if (Tk_GetScreenMM(canvasPtr->interp, canvasPtr->tkwin, string,
 	    doublePtr) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -210,11 +245,10 @@ Tk_CanvasGetCoord(interp, canvas, string, doublePtr)
  *	corresponding to that string.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result.  If
- *	TCL_OK is returned, then everything went well and the
- *	canvas coordinate is stored at *doublePtr;  otherwise
- *	TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left in
- *	interp->result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result. If TCL_OK is
+ *	returned, then everything went well and the canvas coordinate is
+ *	stored at *doublePtr; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error
+ *	message is left in interp->result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -223,20 +257,16 @@ Tk_CanvasGetCoord(interp, canvas, string, doublePtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, obj, doublePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas to which coordinate applies. */
-    Tcl_Obj *obj;		/* Describes coordinate (any screen
-				 * coordinate form may be used here). */
-    double *doublePtr;		/* Place to store converted coordinate. */
+Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas to which coordinate applies. */
+    Tcl_Obj *obj,		/* Describes coordinate (any screen coordinate
+				 * form may be used here). */
+    double *doublePtr)		/* Place to store converted coordinate. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) canvas;
-    if (Tk_GetMMFromObj(canvasPtr->interp, canvasPtr->tkwin, obj,
-	    doublePtr) != TCL_OK) {
-	return TCL_ERROR;
-    }
-    *doublePtr *= canvasPtr->pixelsPerMM;
-    return TCL_OK;
+
+    return Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj(canvasPtr->interp, canvasPtr->tkwin, obj, doublePtr);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -244,9 +274,9 @@ Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, obj, doublePtr)
  *
  * Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin --
  *
- *	This procedure sets the stipple origin in a graphics context
- *	so that stipples drawn with the GC will line up with other
- *	stipples previously drawn in the canvas.
+ *	This function sets the stipple origin in a graphics context so that
+ *	stipples drawn with the GC will line up with other stipples previously
+ *	drawn in the canvas.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -258,12 +288,11 @@ Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, obj, doublePtr)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin(canvas, gc)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Token for a canvas. */
-    GC gc;			/* Graphics context that is about to be
-				 * used to draw a stippled pattern as
-				 * part of redisplaying the canvas. */
-
+Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Token for a canvas. */
+    GC gc)			/* Graphics context that is about to be used
+				 * to draw a stippled pattern as part of
+				 * redisplaying the canvas. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) canvas;
 
@@ -276,9 +305,9 @@ Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin(canvas, gc)
  *
  * Tk_CanvasSetOffset--
  *
- *	This procedure sets the stipple offset in a graphics
- *	context so that stipples drawn with the GC will
- *	line up with other stipples with the same offset.
+ *	This function sets the stipple offset in a graphics context so that
+ *	stipples drawn with the GC will line up with other stipples with the
+ *	same offset.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -290,12 +319,12 @@ Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin(canvas, gc)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_CanvasSetOffset(canvas, gc, offset)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Token for a canvas. */
-    GC gc;			/* Graphics context that is about to be
-				 * used to draw a stippled pattern as
-				 * part of redisplaying the canvas. */
-    Tk_TSOffset *offset;	/* offset (may be NULL pointer)*/
+Tk_CanvasSetOffset(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Token for a canvas. */
+    GC gc,			/* Graphics context that is about to be used
+				 * to draw a stippled pattern as part of
+				 * redisplaying the canvas. */
+    Tk_TSOffset *offset)	/* Offset (may be NULL pointer)*/
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) canvas;
     int flags = 0;
@@ -320,17 +349,16 @@ Tk_CanvasSetOffset(canvas, gc, offset)
  *
  * Tk_CanvasGetTextInfo --
  *
- *	This procedure returns a pointer to a structure containing
- *	information about the selection and insertion cursor for
- *	a canvas widget.  Items such as text items save the pointer
- *	and use it to share access to the information with the generic
- *	canvas code.
+ *	This function returns a pointer to a structure containing information
+ *	about the selection and insertion cursor for a canvas widget. Items
+ *	such as text items save the pointer and use it to share access to the
+ *	information with the generic canvas code.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a pointer to the structure holding text
- *	information for the canvas.  Most of the fields should not
- *	be modified outside the generic canvas code;  see the user
- *	documentation for details.
+ *	information for the canvas. Most of the fields should not be modified
+ *	outside the generic canvas code; see the user documentation for
+ *	details.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -339,8 +367,8 @@ Tk_CanvasSetOffset(canvas, gc, offset)
  */
 
 Tk_CanvasTextInfo *
-Tk_CanvasGetTextInfo(canvas)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Token for the canvas widget. */
+Tk_CanvasGetTextInfo(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas)		/* Token for the canvas widget. */
 {
     return &((TkCanvas *) canvas)->textInfo;
 }
@@ -350,28 +378,27 @@ Tk_CanvasGetTextInfo(canvas)
  *
  * Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked during option processing to handle
- *	"-tags" options for canvas items.
+ *	This function is invoked during option processing to handle "-tags"
+ *	options for canvas items.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return value.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The tags for a given item get replaced by those indicated
- *	in the value argument.
+ *	The tags for a given item get replaced by those indicated in the value
+ *	argument.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Not used.*/
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for reporting errors. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    CONST char *value;			/* Value of option (list of tag
-					 * names). */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item (ignored). */
+Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Not used.*/
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for reporting errors. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing canvas widget. */
+    CONST char *value,		/* Value of option (list of tag names). */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record for item. */
+    int offset)			/* Offset into item (ignored). */
 {
     register Tk_Item *itemPtr = (Tk_Item *) widgRec;
     int argc, i;
@@ -387,8 +414,7 @@ Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Make sure that there's enough space in the item to hold the
-     * tag names.
+     * Make sure that there's enough space in the item to hold the tag names.
      */
 
     if (itemPtr->tagSpace < argc) {
@@ -415,16 +441,16 @@ Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  *
  * Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk configuration code
- *	to produce a printable string for the "-tags" configuration
- *	option for canvas items.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk configuration code to produce a
+ *	printable string for the "-tags" configuration option for canvas
+ *	items.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a string describing all the tags for
- *	the item referred to by "widgRec".  In addition, *freeProcPtr
- *	is filled in with the address of a procedure to call to free
- *	the result string when it's no longer needed (or NULL to
- *	indicate that the string doesn't need to be freed).
+ *	The return value is a string describing all the tags for the item
+ *	referred to by "widgRec". In addition, *freeProcPtr is filled in with
+ *	the address of a function to call to free the result string when it's
+ *	no longer needed (or NULL to indicate that the string doesn't need to
+ *	be freed).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -433,61 +459,55 @@ Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  */
 
 char *
-Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Ignored. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Ignored. */
-    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr;		/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
-					 * information about how to reclaim
-					 * storage for return string. */
+Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Ignored. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing canvas widget. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record for item. */
+    int offset,			/* Ignored. */
+    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)	/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
+				 * information about how to reclaim storage
+				 * for return string. */
 {
     register Tk_Item *itemPtr = (Tk_Item *) widgRec;
 
     if (itemPtr->numTags == 0) {
-	*freeProcPtr = (Tcl_FreeProc *) NULL;
+	*freeProcPtr = NULL;
 	return "";
     }
     if (itemPtr->numTags == 1) {
-	*freeProcPtr = (Tcl_FreeProc *) NULL;
+	*freeProcPtr = NULL;
 	return (char *) itemPtr->tagPtr[0];
     }
     *freeProcPtr = TCL_DYNAMIC;
     return Tcl_Merge(itemPtr->numTags, (CONST char **) itemPtr->tagPtr);
 }
 
-
-static int	DashConvert _ANSI_ARGS_((char *l, CONST char *p,
-			int n, double width));
-#define ABS(a) ((a>=0)?(a):(-(a)))
-
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkCanvasDashParseProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked during option processing to handle
- *	"-dash", "-activedash" and "-disableddash" options for canvas
- *	objects.
+ *	This function is invoked during option processing to handle "-dash",
+ *	"-activedash" and "-disableddash" options for canvas objects.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return value.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The dash list for a given canvas object gets replaced by
- *	those indicated in the value argument.
+ *	The dash list for a given canvas object gets replaced by those
+ *	indicated in the value argument.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-TkCanvasDashParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Not used.*/
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for reporting errors. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    CONST char *value;			/* Value of option. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item. */
+TkCanvasDashParseProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Not used.*/
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for reporting errors. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing canvas widget. */
+    CONST char *value,		/* Value of option. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record for item. */
+    int offset)			/* Offset into item. */
 {
     return Tk_GetDash(interp, value, (Tk_Dash *)(widgRec+offset));
 }
@@ -497,16 +517,16 @@ TkCanvasDashParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  *
  * TkCanvasDashPrintProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk configuration code
- *	to produce a printable string for the "-dash", "-activedash"
- *	and "-disableddash" configuration options for canvas items.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk configuration code to produce a
+ *	printable string for the "-dash", "-activedash" and "-disableddash"
+ *	configuration options for canvas items.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a string describing all the dash list for
- *	the item referred to by "widgRec"and "offset".  In addition,
- *	*freeProcPtr is filled in with the address of a procedure to
- *	call to free the result string when it's no longer needed (or
- *	NULL to indicate that the string doesn't need to be freed).
+ *	The return value is a string describing all the dash list for the item
+ *	referred to by "widgRec"and "offset". In addition, *freeProcPtr is
+ *	filled in with the address of a function to call to free the result
+ *	string when it's no longer needed (or NULL to indicate that the string
+ *	doesn't need to be freed).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -515,14 +535,14 @@ TkCanvasDashParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  */
 
 char *
-TkCanvasDashPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Ignored. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset in record for item. */
-    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr;		/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
-					 * information about how to reclaim
-					 * storage for return string. */
+TkCanvasDashPrintProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Ignored. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing canvas widget. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record for item. */
+    int offset,			/* Offset in record for item. */
+    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)	/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
+				 * information about how to reclaim storage
+				 * for return string. */
 {
     Tk_Dash *dash = (Tk_Dash *) (widgRec+offset);
     char *buffer;
@@ -533,18 +553,18 @@ TkCanvasDashPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
 	i = -i;
 	*freeProcPtr = TCL_DYNAMIC;
 	buffer = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned int) (i+1));
-	p = (i > sizeof(char *)) ? dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
+	p = (i > (int)sizeof(char *)) ? dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
 	memcpy(buffer, p, (unsigned int) i);
 	buffer[i] = 0;
 	return buffer;
     } else if (!i) {
-	*freeProcPtr = (Tcl_FreeProc *) NULL;
+	*freeProcPtr = NULL;
 	return "";
     }
     buffer = (char *)ckalloc((unsigned int) (4*i));
     *freeProcPtr = TCL_DYNAMIC;
 
-    p = (i > sizeof(char *)) ? dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
+    p = (i > (int)sizeof(char *)) ? dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
     sprintf(buffer, "%d", *p++ & 0xff);
     while(--i) {
 	sprintf(buffer+strlen(buffer), " %d", *p++ & 0xff);
@@ -555,46 +575,80 @@ TkCanvasDashPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_CreateSmoothMethod --
+ * InitSmoothMethods --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to add additional values
- *	for the "-smooth" option to the list.
+ *	This function is invoked to set up the initial state of the list of
+ *	"-smooth" methods. It should only be called when the list installed
+ *	in the interpreter is NULL.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.
+ *	Pointer to the start of the list of default smooth methods.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	In the future "-smooth <name>" will be accepted as
- *	smooth method for the line and polygon.
+ *	A linked list of smooth methods is created and attached to the
+ *	interpreter's association key "smoothMethod"
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-Tk_SmoothMethod tkBezierSmoothMethod = {
-    "bezier",
-    TkMakeBezierCurve,
-    (void (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
-	    double *coordPtr, int numPoints, int numSteps)))
-		TkMakeBezierPostscript,
-};
+static SmoothAssocData *
+InitSmoothMethods(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    SmoothAssocData *methods, *ptr;
 
-static void SmoothMethodCleanupProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-		Tcl_Interp *interp));
+    methods = (SmoothAssocData *) ckalloc(sizeof(SmoothAssocData));
+    methods->smooth.name = tkRawSmoothMethod.name;
+    methods->smooth.coordProc = tkRawSmoothMethod.coordProc;
+    methods->smooth.postscriptProc = tkRawSmoothMethod.postscriptProc;
 
-typedef struct SmoothAssocData {
-    struct SmoothAssocData *nextPtr;	/* pointer to next SmoothAssocData */
-    Tk_SmoothMethod smooth;		/* name and functions associated with this
-					 * option */
-} SmoothAssocData;
+    methods->nextPtr = (SmoothAssocData *) ckalloc(sizeof(SmoothAssocData));
+
+    ptr = methods->nextPtr;
+    ptr->smooth.name = tkBezierSmoothMethod.name;
+    ptr->smooth.coordProc = tkBezierSmoothMethod.coordProc;
+    ptr->smooth.postscriptProc = tkBezierSmoothMethod.postscriptProc;
+    ptr->nextPtr = NULL;
+
+    Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, "smoothMethod", SmoothMethodCleanupProc,
+	    (ClientData) methods);
+    return methods;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_CreateSmoothMethod --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked to add additional values for the "-smooth"
+ *	option to the list.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl return value.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	In the future "-smooth <name>" will be accepted as smooth method for
+ *	the line and polygon.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
 
 void
-Tk_CreateSmoothMethod(interp, smooth)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tk_SmoothMethod *smooth;
+Tk_CreateSmoothMethod(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tk_SmoothMethod *smooth)
 {
     SmoothAssocData *methods, *typePtr2, *prevPtr, *ptr;
     methods = (SmoothAssocData *) Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "smoothMethod",
-	    (Tcl_InterpDeleteProc **) NULL);
+	    NULL);
+
+    /*
+     * Initialize if we were not previously initialized.
+     */
+
+    if (methods == NULL) {
+	methods = InitSmoothMethods(interp);
+    }
 
     /*
      * If there's already a smooth method with the given name, remove it.
@@ -618,15 +672,16 @@ Tk_CreateSmoothMethod(interp, smooth)
     ptr->smooth.postscriptProc = smooth->postscriptProc;
     ptr->nextPtr = methods;
     Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, "smoothMethod", SmoothMethodCleanupProc,
-		(ClientData) ptr);
+	    (ClientData) ptr);
 }
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * SmoothMethodCleanupProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever an interpreter is deleted
- *	to cleanup the smooth methods.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever an interpreter is deleted to
+ *	cleanup the smooth methods.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -638,10 +693,10 @@ Tk_CreateSmoothMethod(interp, smooth)
  */
 
 static void
-SmoothMethodCleanupProc(clientData, interp)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Points to "smoothMethod" AssocData
-				 * for the interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter that is being deleted. */
+SmoothMethodCleanupProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Points to "smoothMethod" AssocData for the
+				 * interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Interpreter that is being deleted. */
 {
     SmoothAssocData *ptr, *methods = (SmoothAssocData *) clientData;
 
@@ -655,8 +710,8 @@ SmoothMethodCleanupProc(clientData, interp)
  *
  * TkSmoothParseProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked during option processing to handle
- *	the "-smooth" option.
+ *	This function is invoked during option processing to handle the
+ *	"-smooth" option.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return value.
@@ -669,33 +724,54 @@ SmoothMethodCleanupProc(clientData, interp)
  */
 
 int
-TkSmoothParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* some flags.*/
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for reporting errors. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    CONST char *value;			/* Value of option. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item. */
+TkSmoothParseProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* some flags.*/
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for reporting errors. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing canvas widget. */
+    CONST char *value,		/* Value of option. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record for item. */
+    int offset)			/* Offset into item. */
 {
     register Tk_SmoothMethod **smoothPtr =
-	(Tk_SmoothMethod **) (widgRec + offset);
+	    (Tk_SmoothMethod **) (widgRec + offset);
     Tk_SmoothMethod *smooth = NULL;
     int b;
     size_t length;
     SmoothAssocData *methods;
 
     if (value == NULL || *value == 0) {
-	*smoothPtr = (Tk_SmoothMethod *) NULL;
+	*smoothPtr = NULL;
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
     length = strlen(value);
     methods = (SmoothAssocData *) Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "smoothMethod",
-	    (Tcl_InterpDeleteProc **) NULL);
-    while (methods != (SmoothAssocData *) NULL) {
+	    NULL);
+
+    /*
+     * Not initialized yet; fix that now.
+     */
+
+    if (methods == NULL) {
+	methods = InitSmoothMethods(interp);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Backward compatability hack.
+     */
+
+    if (strncmp(value, "bezier", length) == 0) {
+	smooth = &tkBezierSmoothMethod;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Search the list of installed smooth methods.
+     */
+
+    while (methods != NULL) {
 	if (strncmp(value, methods->smooth.name, length) == 0) {
-	    if (smooth != (Tk_SmoothMethod *) NULL) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "ambigeous smooth method \"", value,
-			"\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    if (smooth != NULL) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "ambiguous smooth method \"", value,
+			"\"", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    smooth = &methods->smooth;
@@ -705,19 +781,16 @@ TkSmoothParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
     if (smooth) {
 	*smoothPtr = smooth;
 	return TCL_OK;
-    } else if (strncmp(value, tkBezierSmoothMethod.name, length) == 0) {
-	/*
-	 * We need to do handle the built-in bezier method.
-	 */
-	*smoothPtr = &tkBezierSmoothMethod;
-	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
+    /*
+     * Did not find it. Try parsing as a boolean instead.
+     */
 
     if (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, (char *) value, &b) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    *smoothPtr = b ? &tkBezierSmoothMethod : (Tk_SmoothMethod*) NULL;
+    *smoothPtr = b ? &tkBezierSmoothMethod : NULL;
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 /*
@@ -725,16 +798,15 @@ TkSmoothParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  *
  * TkSmoothPrintProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk configuration code
- *	to produce a printable string for the "-smooth"
- *	configuration option.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk configuration code to produce a
+ *	printable string for the "-smooth" configuration option.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a string describing the smooth option for
- *	the item referred to by "widgRec".  In addition, *freeProcPtr
- *	is filled in with the address of a procedure to call to free
- *	the result string when it's no longer needed (or NULL to
- *	indicate that the string doesn't need to be freed).
+ *	The return value is a string describing the smooth option for the item
+ *	referred to by "widgRec". In addition, *freeProcPtr is filled in with
+ *	the address of a function to call to free the result string when it's
+ *	no longer needed (or NULL to indicate that the string doesn't need to
+ *	be freed).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -743,16 +815,17 @@ TkSmoothParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  */
 
 char *
-TkSmoothPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Ignored. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item. */
-    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr;		/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
-					 * information about how to reclaim
-					 * storage for return string. */
+TkSmoothPrintProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Ignored. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing canvas widget. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record for item. */
+    int offset,			/* Offset into item. */
+    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)	/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
+				 * information about how to reclaim storage
+				 * for return string. */
 {
-    register Tk_SmoothMethod **smoothPtr = (Tk_SmoothMethod **) (widgRec + offset);
+    register Tk_SmoothMethod **smoothPtr =
+	    (Tk_SmoothMethod **) (widgRec + offset);
 
     return (*smoothPtr) ? (*smoothPtr)->name : "0";
 }
@@ -761,13 +834,12 @@ TkSmoothPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetDash
  *
- *	This procedure is used to parse a string, assuming
- *	it is dash information.
+ *	This function is used to parse a string, assuming it is dash
+ *	information.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result:  TCL_OK means
- *	that the dash information was parsed ok, and
- *	TCL_ERROR means it couldn't be parsed.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result: TCL_OK means that the dash
+ *	information was parsed ok, and TCL_ERROR means it couldn't be parsed.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Dash information in the dash structure is updated.
@@ -776,29 +848,34 @@ TkSmoothPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetDash(interp, value, dash)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    CONST char *value;		/* Textual specification of dash list. */
-    Tk_Dash *dash;		/* Pointer to record in which to
-				 * store dash information. */
+Tk_GetDash(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    CONST char *value,		/* Textual specification of dash list. */
+    Tk_Dash *dash)		/* Pointer to record in which to store dash
+				 * information. */
 {
     int argc, i;
     CONST char **largv, **argv = NULL;
     char *pt;
 
-    if ((value==(char *) NULL) || (*value==0) ) {
+    if ((value==NULL) || (*value==0) ) {
 	dash->number = 0;
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
-    if ((*value == '.') || (*value == ',') ||
-	    (*value == '-') || (*value == '_')) {
-	i = DashConvert((char *) NULL, value, -1, 0.0);
+
+    /*
+     * switch is usually compiled more efficiently than a chain of conditions.
+     */
+
+    switch (*value) {
+    case '.': case ',': case '-': case '_':
+	i = DashConvert(NULL, value, -1, 0.0);
 	if (i>0) {
 	    i = strlen(value);
 	} else {
 	    goto badDashList;
 	}
-	if (i > sizeof(char *)) {
+	if (i > (int)sizeof(char *)) {
 	    dash->pattern.pt = pt = (char *) ckalloc(strlen(value));
 	} else {
 	    pt = dash->pattern.array;
@@ -807,26 +884,16 @@ Tk_GetDash(interp, value, dash)
 	dash->number = -i;
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
+
     if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, (char *) value, &argc, &argv) != TCL_OK) {
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-    badDashList:
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad dash list \"", value,
-		"\": must be a list of integers or a format like \"-..\"",
-		(char *) NULL);
-    syntaxError:
-	if (argv != NULL) {
-	    ckfree((char *) argv);
-	}
-	if (ABS(dash->number) > sizeof(char *))
-	    ckfree((char *) dash->pattern.pt);
-	dash->number = 0;
-	return TCL_ERROR;
+	goto badDashList;
     }
 
-    if (ABS(dash->number) > sizeof(char *)) {
+    if ((unsigned int)ABS(dash->number) > sizeof(char *)) {
 	ckfree((char *) dash->pattern.pt);
     }
-    if (argc > sizeof(char *)) {
+    if (argc > (int)sizeof(char *)) {
 	dash->pattern.pt = pt = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned int) argc);
     } else {
 	pt = dash->pattern.array;
@@ -834,23 +901,41 @@ Tk_GetDash(interp, value, dash)
     dash->number = argc;
 
     largv = argv;
-    while(argc>0) {
-	if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, *largv, &i) != TCL_OK ||
-	    i < 1 || i>255) {
+    while (argc>0) {
+	if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, *largv, &i) != TCL_OK || i < 1 || i>255) {
 	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "expected integer in the range 1..255 but got \"",
-			 *largv, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		    "expected integer in the range 1..255 but got \"",
+		    *largv, "\"", NULL);
 	    goto syntaxError;
 	}
 	*pt++ = i;
-	argc--; largv++; 
+	argc--;
+	largv++;
     }
-  
+
     if (argv != NULL) {
 	ckfree((char *) argv);
     }
-
     return TCL_OK;
+
+    /*
+     * Something went wrong. Generate error message, clean up and return.
+     */
+
+  badDashList:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad dash list \"", value,
+	    "\": must be a list of integers or a format like \"-..\"",
+	    NULL);
+  syntaxError:
+    if (argv != NULL) {
+	ckfree((char *) argv);
+    }
+    if ((unsigned int)ABS(dash->number) > sizeof(char *)) {
+	ckfree((char *) dash->pattern.pt);
+    }
+    dash->number = 0;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -858,8 +943,8 @@ Tk_GetDash(interp, value, dash)
  *
  * Tk_CreateOutline
  *
- *	This procedure initializes the Tk_Outline structure
- *	with default values.
+ *	This function initializes the Tk_Outline structure with default
+ *	values.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None
@@ -870,8 +955,9 @@ Tk_GetDash(interp, value, dash)
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void Tk_CreateOutline(outline)
-    Tk_Outline *outline;
+void
+Tk_CreateOutline(
+    Tk_Outline *outline)	/* Outline structure to be filled in. */
 {
     outline->gc = None;
     outline->width = 1.0;
@@ -897,8 +983,8 @@ void Tk_CreateOutline(outline)
  *
  * Tk_DeleteOutline
  *
- *	This procedure frees all memory that might be
- *	allocated and referenced in the Tk_Outline structure.
+ *	This function frees all memory that might be allocated and referenced
+ *	in the Tk_Outline structure.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None
@@ -909,20 +995,21 @@ void Tk_CreateOutline(outline)
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void Tk_DeleteOutline(display, outline)
-    Display *display;			/* Display containing window */
-    Tk_Outline *outline;
+void
+Tk_DeleteOutline(
+    Display *display,		/* Display containing window. */
+    Tk_Outline *outline)
 {
     if (outline->gc != None) {
 	Tk_FreeGC(display, outline->gc);
     }
-    if (ABS(outline->dash.number) > sizeof(char *)) {
+    if ((unsigned int)ABS(outline->dash.number) > sizeof(char *)) {
 	ckfree((char *) outline->dash.pattern.pt);
     }
-    if (ABS(outline->activeDash.number) > sizeof(char *)) {
+    if ((unsigned int)ABS(outline->activeDash.number) > sizeof(char *)) {
 	ckfree((char *) outline->activeDash.pattern.pt);
     }
-    if (ABS(outline->disabledDash.number) > sizeof(char *)) {
+    if ((unsigned int)ABS(outline->disabledDash.number) > sizeof(char *)) {
 	ckfree((char *) outline->disabledDash.pattern.pt);
     }
     if (outline->color != NULL) {
@@ -950,15 +1037,14 @@ void Tk_DeleteOutline(display, outline)
  *
  * Tk_ConfigOutlineGC
  *
- *	This procedure should be called in the canvas object
- *	during the configure command. The graphics context
- *	description in gcValues is updated according to the
- *	information in the dash structure, as far as possible.
+ *	This function should be called in the canvas object during the
+ *	configure command. The graphics context description in gcValues is
+ *	updated according to the information in the dash structure, as far as
+ *	possible.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return-value is a mask, indicating which
- *	elements of gcValues have been updated.
- *	0 means there is no outline.
+ *	The return-value is a mask, indicating which elements of gcValues have
+ *	been updated. 0 means there is no outline.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	GC information in gcValues is updated.
@@ -966,11 +1052,12 @@ void Tk_DeleteOutline(display, outline)
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-int Tk_ConfigOutlineGC(gcValues, canvas, item, outline)
-    XGCValues *gcValues;
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;
-    Tk_Item *item;
-    Tk_Outline *outline;
+int
+Tk_ConfigOutlineGC(
+    XGCValues *gcValues,
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,
+    Tk_Item *item,
+    Tk_Outline *outline)
 {
     int mask = 0;
     double width;
@@ -1015,7 +1102,7 @@ int Tk_ConfigOutlineGC(gcValues, canvas, item, outline)
 	if (outline->activeStipple!=None) {
 	    stipple = outline->activeStipple;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (outline->disabledWidth>0) {
 	    width = outline->disabledWidth;
 	}
@@ -1047,12 +1134,10 @@ int Tk_ConfigOutlineGC(gcValues, canvas, item, outline)
     if (mask && (dash->number != 0)) {
 	gcValues->line_style = LineOnOffDash;
 	gcValues->dash_offset = outline->offset;
-	if (dash->number >= 2) {
-	    gcValues->dashes = 4;
-	} else if (dash->number > 0) {
+	if (dash->number > 0) {
 	    gcValues->dashes = dash->pattern.array[0];
 	} else {
-	    gcValues->dashes = (char) (4 * width);
+	    gcValues->dashes = (char) (4 * width + 0.5);
 	}
 	mask |= GCLineStyle|GCDashList|GCDashOffset;
     }
@@ -1064,15 +1149,12 @@ int Tk_ConfigOutlineGC(gcValues, canvas, item, outline)
  *
  * Tk_ChangeOutlineGC
  *
- *	Updates the GC to represent the full information of
- *	the dash structure. Partly this is already done in
- *	Tk_ConfigOutlineGC().
- *	This function should be called just before drawing
- *	the dashed item.
+ *	Updates the GC to represent the full information of the dash
+ *	structure. Partly this is already done in Tk_ConfigOutlineGC(). This
+ *	function should be called just before drawing the dashed item.
  *
  * Results:
- *	1 if there is a stipple pattern.
- *	0 otherwise.
+ *	1 if there is a stipple pattern, and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	GC is updated.
@@ -1081,10 +1163,10 @@ int Tk_ConfigOutlineGC(gcValues, canvas, item, outline)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_ChangeOutlineGC(canvas, item, outline)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;
-    Tk_Item *item;
-    Tk_Outline *outline;
+Tk_ChangeOutlineGC(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,
+    Tk_Item *item,
+    Tk_Outline *outline)
 {
     CONST char *p;
     double width;
@@ -1134,25 +1216,30 @@ Tk_ChangeOutlineGC(canvas, item, outline)
 	return 0;
     }
 
-    if ((dash->number<-1) || ((dash->number == -1) && (dash->pattern.array[1]!=','))) {
+    if ((dash->number<-1) ||
+	    ((dash->number == -1) && (dash->pattern.array[0] != ','))) {
 	char *q;
 	int i = -dash->number;
 
-        p = (i > sizeof(char *)) ? dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
+	p = (i > (int)sizeof(char *)) ? dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
 	q = (char *) ckalloc(2*(unsigned int)i);
 	i = DashConvert(q, p, i, width);
-	XSetDashes(((TkCanvas *)canvas)->display, outline->gc, outline->offset, q, i);
+	XSetDashes(((TkCanvas *)canvas)->display, outline->gc,
+		outline->offset, q, i);
 	ckfree(q);
-    } else if ( dash->number>2 || (dash->number==2 &&
-		(dash->pattern.array[0]!=dash->pattern.array[1]))) {
-        p = (char *) (dash->number > sizeof(char *)) ? dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
-	XSetDashes(((TkCanvas *)canvas)->display, outline->gc, outline->offset, p, dash->number);
+    } else if (dash->number>2 || (dash->number==2 &&
+	    (dash->pattern.array[0]!=dash->pattern.array[1]))) {
+	p = (dash->number > (int)sizeof(char *))
+		? dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
+	XSetDashes(((TkCanvas *)canvas)->display, outline->gc,
+		outline->offset, p, dash->number);
     }
     if (stipple!=None) {
 	int w=0; int h=0;
 	Tk_TSOffset *tsoffset = &outline->tsoffset;
 	int flags = tsoffset->flags;
-	if (!(flags & TK_OFFSET_INDEX) && (flags & (TK_OFFSET_CENTER|TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE))) {
+	if (!(flags & TK_OFFSET_INDEX) &&
+		(flags & (TK_OFFSET_CENTER|TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE))) {
 	    Tk_SizeOfBitmap(((TkCanvas *)canvas)->display, stipple, &w, &h);
 	    if (flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
 		w /= 2;
@@ -1181,26 +1268,24 @@ Tk_ChangeOutlineGC(canvas, item, outline)
  *
  * Tk_ResetOutlineGC
  *
- *	Restores the GC to the situation before 
- *	Tk_ChangeDashGC() was called.
- *	This function should be called just after the dashed
- *	item is drawn, because the GC is supposed to be
- *	read-only.
+ *	Restores the GC to the situation before Tk_ChangeDashGC() was called.
+ *	This function should be called just after the dashed item is drawn,
+ *	because the GC is supposed to be read-only.
  *
  * Results:
- *	1 if there is a stipple pattern.
- *	0 otherwise.
+ *	1 if there is a stipple pattern, and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	GC is updated.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 int
-Tk_ResetOutlineGC(canvas, item, outline)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;
-    Tk_Item *item;
-    Tk_Outline *outline;
+Tk_ResetOutlineGC(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,
+    Tk_Item *item,
+    Tk_Outline *outline)
 {
     char dashList;
     double width;
@@ -1232,7 +1317,7 @@ Tk_ResetOutlineGC(canvas, item, outline)
 	if (outline->activeStipple!=None) {
 	    stipple = outline->activeStipple;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (outline->disabledWidth>width) {
 	    width = outline->disabledWidth;
 	}
@@ -1251,14 +1336,12 @@ Tk_ResetOutlineGC(canvas, item, outline)
     }
 
     if ((dash->number > 2) || (dash->number < -1) || (dash->number==2 &&
-		(dash->pattern.array[0] != dash->pattern.array[1])) ||
-		((dash->number == -1) && (dash->pattern.array[1] != ','))) {
-	if (dash->number < 0) {
-	    dashList = (int) (4 * width + 0.5);
-	} else if (dash->number<3) {
+	    (dash->pattern.array[0] != dash->pattern.array[1])) ||
+	    ((dash->number == -1) && (dash->pattern.array[0] != ','))) {
+	if (dash->number > 0) {
 	    dashList = dash->pattern.array[0];
 	} else {
-	    dashList = 4;
+	    dashList = (char) (4 * width + 0.5);
 	}
 	XSetDashes(((TkCanvas *)canvas)->display, outline->gc,
 		outline->offset, &dashList , 1);
@@ -1269,30 +1352,30 @@ Tk_ResetOutlineGC(canvas, item, outline)
     }
     return 0;
 }
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_CanvasPsOutline
  *
- *	Creates the postscript command for the correct
- *	Outline-information (width, dash, color and stipple).
+ *	Creates the postscript command for the correct Outline-information
+ *	(width, dash, color and stipple).
  *
  * Results:
  *	TCL_OK if succeeded, otherwise TCL_ERROR.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	canvas->interp->result contains the postscript string,
- *	or an error message if the result was TCL_ERROR.
+ *	canvas->interp->result contains the postscript string, or an error
+ *	message if the result was TCL_ERROR.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 int
-Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, item, outline)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;
-    Tk_Item *item;
-    Tk_Outline *outline;
+Tk_CanvasPsOutline(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,
+    Tk_Item *item,
+    Tk_Outline *outline)
 {
     char string[41];
     char pattern[11];
@@ -1314,6 +1397,7 @@ Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, item, outline)
     if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
+
     if (((TkCanvas *)canvas)->currentItemPtr == item) {
 	if (outline->activeWidth > width) {
 	    width = outline->activeWidth;
@@ -1342,7 +1426,7 @@ Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, item, outline)
 	}
     }
     sprintf(string, "%.15g setlinewidth\n", width);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, NULL);
 
     if (dash->number > 10) {
 	str = (char *)ckalloc((unsigned int) (1 + 4*dash->number));
@@ -1350,38 +1434,40 @@ Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, item, outline)
 	str = (char *)ckalloc((unsigned int) (1 - 8*dash->number));
 	lptr = (char *)ckalloc((unsigned int) (1 - 2*dash->number));
     }
-    ptr = (char *) ((ABS(dash->number) > sizeof(char *)) ) ?
-	dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
+    ptr = ((unsigned int)ABS(dash->number) > sizeof(char *)) ?
+	    dash->pattern.pt : dash->pattern.array;
     if (dash->number > 0) {
 	char *ptr0 = ptr;
+
 	sprintf(str, "[%d", *ptr++ & 0xff);
 	i = dash->number-1;
 	while (i--) {
 	    sprintf(str+strlen(str), " %d", *ptr++ & 0xff);
 	}
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, str, (char *)NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, str, NULL);
 	if (dash->number&1) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ", str+1, (char *)NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ", str+1, NULL);
 	}
 	sprintf(str, "] %d setdash\n", outline->offset);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, str, (char *)NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, str, NULL);
 	ptr = ptr0;
     } else if (dash->number < 0) {
 	if ((i = DashConvert(lptr, ptr, -dash->number, width)) != 0) {
 	    char *lptr0 = lptr;
+
 	    sprintf(str, "[%d", *lptr++ & 0xff);
 	    while (--i) {
 		sprintf(str+strlen(str), " %d", *lptr++ & 0xff);
 	    }
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, str, (char *)NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, str, NULL);
 	    sprintf(str, "] %d setdash\n", outline->offset);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, str, (char *)NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, str, NULL);
 	    lptr = lptr0;
 	} else {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "[] 0 setdash\n", (char *)NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "[] 0 setdash\n", NULL);
 	}
     } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "[] 0 setdash\n", (char *)NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "[] 0 setdash\n", NULL);
     }
     if (str != string) {
 	ckfree(str);
@@ -1393,32 +1479,28 @@ Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, item, outline)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     if (stipple != None) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "StrokeClip ", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "StrokeClip ", NULL);
 	if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, stipple) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "stroke\n", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "stroke\n", NULL);
     }
 
     return TCL_OK;
 }
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * DashConvert
  *
- *	Converts a character-like dash-list (e.g. "-..")
- *	into an X11-style. l must point to a string that
- *	holds room to at least 2*n characters. if
- *	l == NULL, this function can be used for
- *	syntax checking only.
+ *	Converts a character-like dash-list (e.g. "-..") into an X11-style. l
+ *	must point to a string that holds room to at least 2*n characters. If
+ *	l == NULL, this function can be used for syntax checking only.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The length of the resulting X11 compatible
- *	dash-list. -1 if failed.
+ *	The length of the resulting X11 compatible dash-list. -1 if failed.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None
@@ -1427,11 +1509,13 @@ Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, item, outline)
  */
 
 static int
-DashConvert (l, p, n, width)
-    char *l;
-    CONST char *p;
-    int n;
-    double width;
+DashConvert(
+    char *l,			/* Must be at least 2*n chars long, or NULL to
+				 * indicate "just check syntax". */
+    CONST char *p,		/* String to parse. */
+    int n,			/* Length of string to parse, or -1 to
+				 * indicate that strlen() should be used. */
+    double width)		/* Width of line. */
 {
     int result = 0;
     int size, intWidth;
@@ -1445,30 +1529,28 @@ DashConvert (l, p, n, width)
     }
     while (n-- && *p) {
 	switch (*p++) {
-	    case ' ':
-		if (result) {
-		    if (l) {
-			l[-1] += intWidth + 1;
-		    }
-		    continue;
-		} else {
-		    return 0;
+	case ' ':
+	    if (result) {
+		if (l) {
+		    l[-1] += intWidth + 1;
 		}
-		break;
-	    case '_':
-		size = 8;
-		break;
-	    case '-':
-		size = 6;
-		break;
-	    case ',':
-		size = 4;
-		break;
-	    case '.':
-		size = 2;
-		break;
-	    default:
-		return -1;
+		continue;
+	    }
+	    return 0;
+	case '_':
+	    size = 8;
+	    break;
+	case '-':
+	    size = 6;
+	    break;
+	case ',':
+	    size = 4;
+	    break;
+	case '.':
+	    size = 2;
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    return -1;
 	}
 	if (l) {
 	    *l++ = size * intWidth;
@@ -1482,14 +1564,14 @@ DashConvert (l, p, n, width)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * translateAndAppendCoords --
+ * TranslateAndAppendCoords --
  *
  *	This is a helper routine for TkCanvTranslatePath() below.
  *
- *	Given an (x,y) coordinate pair within a canvas, this procedure
- *	computes the corresponding coordinates at which the point should
- *	be drawn in the drawable used for display.  Those coordinates are
- *	then written into outArr[numOut*2] and outArr[numOut*2+1].
+ *	Given an (x,y) coordinate pair within a canvas, this function computes
+ *	the corresponding coordinates at which the point should be drawn in
+ *	the drawable used for display. Those coordinates are then written into
+ *	outArr[numOut*2] and outArr[numOut*2+1].
  *
  * Results:
  *	There is no return value.
@@ -1501,11 +1583,12 @@ DashConvert (l, p, n, width)
  */
 
 static void
-translateAndAppendCoords(canvPtr, x, y, outArr, numOut)
-    TkCanvas *canvPtr;			/* The canvas. */
-    double x, y;			/* Coordinates in canvas space. */
-    XPoint *outArr;                     /* Write results into this array */
-    int numOut;                         /* Num of prior entries in outArr[] */
+TranslateAndAppendCoords(
+    TkCanvas *canvPtr,		/* The canvas. */
+    double x,			/* Coordinates in canvas space. */
+    double y,
+    XPoint *outArr,		/* Write results into this array */
+    int numOut)			/* Num of prior entries in outArr[] */
 {
     double tmp;
 
@@ -1517,7 +1600,7 @@ translateAndAppendCoords(canvPtr, x, y, outArr, numOut)
     }
     outArr[numOut].x = (short) tmp;
 
-    tmp = y  - canvPtr->drawableYOrigin;
+    tmp = y - canvPtr->drawableYOrigin;
     if (tmp > 0) {
 	tmp += 0.5;
     } else {
@@ -1531,225 +1614,262 @@ translateAndAppendCoords(canvPtr, x, y, outArr, numOut)
  *
  * TkCanvTranslatePath
  *
- *	Translate a line or polygon path so that all vertices are
- *	within a rectangle that is 1000 pixels larger than the total
- *	size of the canvas window.  This will prevent pixel coordinates
- *	from overflowing the 16-bit integer size limitation imposed by
- *	most windowing systems.
- *
- *      coordPtr must point to an array of doubles, two doubles per
- *      vertex.  There are a total of numVertex vertices, or 2*numVertex
- *      entries in coordPtr.  The result vertices written into outArr
- *      have their coordinate origin shifted to canvPtr->drawableXOrigin
- *      by canvPtr->drawableYOrigin.  There might be as many as 3 times
- *      more output vertices than there are input vertices.  The calling
- *      function should allocate space accordingly.
- *
- *	This routine limits the width and height of a canvas window
- *	to 31767 pixels.  At the highest resolution display devices
- *	available today (210 ppi in Jan 2003) that's a window that is
- *      over 13 feet wide and tall.  Should be enough for the near
- *	future.
+ *	Translate a line or polygon path so that all vertices are within a
+ *	rectangle that is 1000 pixels larger than the total size of the canvas
+ *	window. This will prevent pixel coordinates from overflowing the
+ *	16-bit integer size limitation imposed by most windowing systems.
+ *
+ *	coordPtr must point to an array of doubles, two doubles per vertex.
+ *	There are a total of numVertex vertices, or 2*numVertex entries in
+ *	coordPtr. The result vertices written into outArr have their
+ *	coordinate origin shifted to canvPtr->drawableXOrigin by
+ *	canvPtr->drawableYOrigin. There might be as many as 3 times more
+ *	output vertices than there are input vertices. The calling function
+ *	should allocate space accordingly.
+ *
+ *	This routine limits the width and height of a canvas window to 31767
+ *	pixels. At the highest resolution display devices available today (210
+ *	ppi in Jan 2003) that's a window that is over 13 feet wide and tall.
+ *	Should be enough for the near future.
  *
  * Results:
- *      Clipped and translated path vertices are written into outArr[].
- *      There might be as many as twice the vertices in outArr[] as there
- *      are in coordPtr[].  The return value is the number of vertices
- *      actually written into outArr[].
+ *	Clipped and translated path vertices are written into outArr[]. There
+ *	might be as many as twice the vertices in outArr[] as there are in
+ *	coordPtr[]. The return value is the number of vertices actually
+ *	written into outArr[].
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 int
-TkCanvTranslatePath (canvPtr, numVertex, coordArr, closedPath, outArr)
-    TkCanvas *canvPtr;  /* The canvas */
-    int numVertex;      /* Number of vertices specified by coordArr[] */
-    double *coordArr;   /* X and Y coordinates for each vertex */
-    int closedPath;     /* True if this is a closed polygon */
-    XPoint *outArr;     /* Write results here, if not NULL */
+TkCanvTranslatePath(
+    TkCanvas *canvPtr,		/* The canvas */
+    int numVertex,		/* Number of vertices specified by
+				 * coordArr[] */
+    double *coordArr,		/* X and Y coordinates for each vertex */
+    int closedPath,		/* True if this is a closed polygon */
+    XPoint *outArr)		/* Write results here, if not NULL */
 {
-    int numOutput = 0;  /* Number of output coordinates */
-    double lft, rgh;    /* Left and right sides of the bounding box */
-    double top, btm;    /* Top and bottom sizes of the bounding box */
-    double *tempArr;    /* Temporary storage used by the clipper */
-    double *a, *b, *t;  /* Pointers to parts of the temporary storage */
-    int i, j;           /* Loop counters */
-    int maxOutput;      /* Maximum number of outputs that we will allow */
-    double limit[4];          /* Boundries at which clipping occurs */
-    double staticSpace[480];  /* Temp space from the stack */
+    int numOutput = 0;		/* Number of output coordinates */
+    double lft, rgh;		/* Left and right sides of the bounding box */
+    double top, btm;		/* Top and bottom sizes of the bounding box */
+    double *tempArr;		/* Temporary storage used by the clipper */
+    double *a, *b, *t;		/* Pointers to parts of the temporary
+				 * storage */
+    int i, j;			/* Loop counters */
+    int maxOutput;		/* Maximum number of outputs that we will
+				 * allow */
+    double limit[4];		/* Boundries at which clipping occurs */
+    double staticSpace[480];	/* Temp space from the stack */
 
     /*
-    ** Constrain all vertices of the path to be within a box that is no
-    ** larger than 32000 pixels wide or height.  The top-left corner of
-    ** this clipping box is 1000 pixels above and to the left of the top
-    ** left corner of the window on which the canvas is displayed.
-    **
-    ** This means that a canvas will not display properly on a canvas
-    ** window that is larger than 31000 pixels wide or high.  That is not
-    ** a problem today, but might someday become a factor for ultra-high
-    ** resolutions displays.
-    **
-    ** The X11 protocol allows us (in theory) to expand the size of the
-    ** clipping box to 32767 pixels.  But we have found experimentally that
-    ** XFree86 sometimes fails to draw lines correctly if they are longer
-    ** than about 32500 pixels.  So we have left a little margin in the
-    ** size to mask that bug.
-    */
+     * Constrain all vertices of the path to be within a box that is no larger
+     * than 32000 pixels wide or height. The top-left corner of this clipping
+     * box is 1000 pixels above and to the left of the top left corner of the
+     * window on which the canvas is displayed.
+     *
+     * This means that a canvas will not display properly on a canvas window
+     * that is larger than 31000 pixels wide or high. That is not a problem
+     * today, but might someday become a factor for ultra-high resolutions
+     * displays.
+     *
+     * The X11 protocol allows us (in theory) to expand the size of the
+     * clipping box to 32767 pixels. But we have found experimentally that
+     * XFree86 sometimes fails to draw lines correctly if they are longer than
+     * about 32500 pixels. So we have left a little margin in the size to mask
+     * that bug.
+     */
+
     lft = canvPtr->xOrigin - 1000.0;
     top = canvPtr->yOrigin - 1000.0;
     rgh = lft + 32000.0;
     btm = top + 32000.0;
 
-    /* Try the common case first - no clipping.  Loop over the input
-    ** coordinates and translate them into appropriate output coordinates.
-    ** But if a vertex outside of the bounding box is seen, break out of
-    ** the loop.
-    **
-    ** Most of the time, no clipping is needed, so this one loop is 
-    ** sufficient to do the translation.
-    */
-    for(i=0; i<numVertex; i++){
-        double x, y;
-        x = coordArr[i*2];
-        y = coordArr[i*2+1];
-        if( x<lft || x>rgh || y<top || y>btm ) break;
-        translateAndAppendCoords(canvPtr, x, y, outArr, numOutput++);
-    }
-    if( i==numVertex ){
-        assert( numOutput==numVertex );
-        return numOutput;
-    }
-
-    /* If we reach this point, it means that some clipping is required.
-    ** Begin by allocating some working storage - at least 6 times as much space
-    ** as coordArr[] requires.  Divide this space into two separate arrays
-    ** a[] and b[].  Initialize a[] to be equal to coordArr[].
-    */
-    if( numVertex*12 <= sizeof(staticSpace)/sizeof(staticSpace[0]) ){
-        tempArr = staticSpace;
+    /*
+     * Try the common case first - no clipping. Loop over the input
+     * coordinates and translate them into appropriate output coordinates.
+     * But if a vertex outside of the bounding box is seen, break out of the
+     * loop.
+     *
+     * Most of the time, no clipping is needed, so this one loop is sufficient
+     * to do the translation.
+     */
+
+    for (i=0; i<numVertex; i++){
+	double x, y;
+
+	x = coordArr[i*2];
+	y = coordArr[i*2+1];
+	if (x<lft || x>rgh || y<top || y>btm) {
+	    break;
+	}
+	TranslateAndAppendCoords(canvPtr, x, y, outArr, numOutput++);
+    }
+    if (i == numVertex){
+	assert(numOutput == numVertex);
+	return numOutput;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If we reach this point, it means that some clipping is required. Begin
+     * by allocating some working storage - at least 6 times as much space as
+     * coordArr[] requires. Divide this space into two separate arrays a[] and
+     * b[]. Initialize a[] to be equal to coordArr[].
+     */
+
+    if (numVertex*12 <= (int)(sizeof(staticSpace)/sizeof(staticSpace[0]))) {
+	tempArr = staticSpace;
     } else {
-        tempArr = (double*)ckalloc( numVertex*12*sizeof(tempArr[0]) );
+	tempArr = (double *)ckalloc(numVertex*12*sizeof(tempArr[0]));
     }
-    for(i=0; i<numVertex*2; i++){
-        tempArr[i] = coordArr[i];
+    for (i=0; i<numVertex*2; i++){
+	tempArr[i] = coordArr[i];
     }
     a = tempArr;
     b = &tempArr[numVertex*6];
 
-    /* We will make four passes through the input data.  On each pass,
-    ** we copy the contents of a[] over into b[].  As we copy, we clip
-    ** any line segments that extend to the right past xClip then we
-    ** rotate the coordinate system 90 degrees clockwise.  After each
-    ** pass is complete, we interchange a[] and b[] in preparation for
-    ** the next pass.
-    **
-    ** Each pass clips line segments that extend beyond a single side
-    ** of the bounding box, and four passes rotate the coordinate system
-    ** back to its original value.  I'm not an expert on graphics 
-    ** algorithms, but I think this is called Cohen-Sutherland polygon
-    ** clipping.
-    **
-    ** The limit[] array contains the xClip value used for each of the
-    ** four passes.
-    */
+    /*
+     * We will make four passes through the input data. On each pass, we copy
+     * the contents of a[] over into b[]. As we copy, we clip any line
+     * segments that extend to the right past xClip then we rotate the
+     * coordinate system 90 degrees clockwise. After each pass is complete, we
+     * interchange a[] and b[] in preparation for the next pass.
+     *
+     * Each pass clips line segments that extend beyond a single side of the
+     * bounding box, and four passes rotate the coordinate system back to its
+     * original value. I'm not an expert on graphics algorithms, but I think
+     * this is called Cohen-Sutherland polygon clipping.
+     *
+     * The limit[] array contains the xClip value used for each of the four
+     * passes.
+     */
+
     limit[0] = rgh;
     limit[1] = -top;
     limit[2] = -lft;
     limit[3] = btm;
 
-    /* This is the loop that makes the four passes through the data.
-    */
+    /*
+     * This is the loop that makes the four passes through the data.
+     */
+
     maxOutput = numVertex*3;
-    for(j=0; j<4; j++){
-        double xClip = limit[j];
-        int inside = a[0]<xClip;
-        double priorY = a[1];
-        numOutput = 0;
-
-        /* Clip everything to the right of xClip.  Store the results in
-        ** b[] rotated by 90 degrees clockwise.
-        */
-        for(i=0; i<numVertex; i++){
-            double x = a[i*2];
-            double y = a[i*2+1];
-            if( x>=xClip ){
-                /* The current vertex is to the right of xClip.
-                */
-                if( inside ){
-                    /* If the current vertex is to the right of xClip but
-                    ** the previous vertex was left of xClip, then draw a
-                    ** line segment from the previous vertex to until it
-                    ** intersects the vertical at xClip.
-                    */
-                    double x0, y0, yN;
-                    assert( i>0 );
-                    x0 = a[i*2-2];
-                    y0 = a[i*2-1];
-                    yN = y0 + (y - y0)*(xClip-x0)/(x-x0);
-                    b[numOutput*2] = -yN;
-                    b[numOutput*2+1] = xClip;
-                    numOutput++;
-                    assert( numOutput<=maxOutput );
-                    priorY = yN;
-                    inside = 0;
-                }else if( i==0 ){
-                    /* If the first vertex is to the right of xClip, add
-                    ** a vertex that is the projection of the first vertex
-                    ** onto the vertical xClip line.
-                    */
-                    b[0] = -y;
-                    b[1] = xClip;
-                    numOutput = 1;
-                    priorY = y;
-                }
-            }else{
-                /* The current vertex is to the left of xClip
-                */
-                if( !inside ){
-                    /* If the current vertex is on the left of xClip and
-                    ** one or more prior vertices where to the right, then
-                    ** we have to draw a line segment along xClip that extends
-                    ** from the spot where we first crossed from left to right
-                    ** to the spot where we cross back from right to left.
-                    */
-                    double x0, y0, yN;
-                    assert( i>0 );
-                    x0 = a[i*2-2];
-                    y0 = a[i*2-1];
-                    yN = y0 + (y - y0)*(xClip-x0)/(x-x0);
-                    if( yN!=priorY ){
-                        b[numOutput*2] = -yN;
-                        b[numOutput*2+1] = xClip;
-                        numOutput++;
-                        assert( numOutput<=maxOutput );
-                    }
-                    inside = 1;
-                }
-                b[numOutput*2] = -y;
-                b[numOutput*2+1] = x;
-                numOutput++;
-                assert( numOutput<=maxOutput );
-            }
-        }
-
-        /* Interchange a[] and b[] in preparation for the next pass.
-        */
-        t = a;
-        a = b;
-        b = t;
-        numVertex = numOutput;
-    }
-
-    /* All clipping is now finished.  Convert the coordinates from doubles
-    ** into XPoints and translate the origin for the drawable.
-    */
-    for(i=0; i<numVertex; i++){
-        translateAndAppendCoords(canvPtr, a[i*2], a[i*2+1], outArr, i);
-    }
-    if( tempArr!=staticSpace ){
-        ckfree((char *) tempArr);
+    for (j=0; j<4; j++){
+	double xClip = limit[j];
+	int inside = a[0]<xClip;
+	double priorY = a[1];
+	numOutput = 0;
+
+	/*
+	 * Clip everything to the right of xClip. Store the results in b[]
+	 * rotated by 90 degrees clockwise.
+	 */
+
+	for (i=0; i<numVertex; i++){
+	    double x = a[i*2];
+	    double y = a[i*2+1];
+
+	    if (x >= xClip) {
+		/*
+		 * The current vertex is to the right of xClip.
+		 */
+
+		if (inside) {
+		    /*
+		     * If the current vertex is to the right of xClip but the
+		     * previous vertex was left of xClip, then draw a line
+		     * segment from the previous vertex to until it intersects
+		     * the vertical at xClip.
+		     */
+
+		    double x0, y0, yN;
+
+		    assert(i > 0);
+		    x0 = a[i*2-2];
+		    y0 = a[i*2-1];
+		    yN = y0 + (y - y0)*(xClip-x0)/(x-x0);
+		    b[numOutput*2] = -yN;
+		    b[numOutput*2+1] = xClip;
+		    numOutput++;
+		    assert(numOutput <= maxOutput);
+		    priorY = yN;
+		    inside = 0;
+		} else if (i == 0) {
+		    /*
+		     * If the first vertex is to the right of xClip, add a
+		     * vertex that is the projection of the first vertex onto
+		     * the vertical xClip line.
+		     */
+
+		    b[0] = -y;
+		    b[1] = xClip;
+		    numOutput = 1;
+		    priorY = y;
+		}
+	    } else {
+		/*
+		 * The current vertex is to the left of xClip
+		 */
+		if (!inside) {
+		    /* If the current vertex is on the left of xClip and one
+		     * or more prior vertices where to the right, then we have
+		     * to draw a line segment along xClip that extends from
+		     * the spot where we first crossed from left to right to
+		     * the spot where we cross back from right to left.
+		     */
+
+		    double x0, y0, yN;
+
+		    assert(i > 0);
+		    x0 = a[i*2-2];
+		    y0 = a[i*2-1];
+		    yN = y0 + (y - y0)*(xClip-x0)/(x-x0);
+		    if (yN != priorY) {
+			b[numOutput*2] = -yN;
+			b[numOutput*2+1] = xClip;
+			numOutput++;
+			assert(numOutput <= maxOutput);
+		    }
+		    inside = 1;
+		}
+		b[numOutput*2] = -y;
+		b[numOutput*2+1] = x;
+		numOutput++;
+		assert(numOutput <= maxOutput);
+	    }
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Interchange a[] and b[] in preparation for the next pass.
+	 */
+
+	t = a;
+	a = b;
+	b = t;
+	numVertex = numOutput;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * All clipping is now finished. Convert the coordinates from doubles into
+     * XPoints and translate the origin for the drawable.
+     */
+
+    for (i=0; i<numVertex; i++){
+	TranslateAndAppendCoords(canvPtr, a[i*2], a[i*2+1], outArr, i);
+    }
+    if (tempArr != staticSpace) {
+	ckfree((char *) tempArr);
     }
     return numOutput;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvWind.c b/generic/tkCanvWind.c
index 96fcadd..b62859c 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvWind.c
+++ b/generic/tkCanvWind.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkCanvWind.c --
  *
  *	This file implements window items for canvas widgets.
@@ -6,13 +6,12 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include <stdio.h>
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkCanvas.h"
 
 /*
@@ -49,103 +48,99 @@ static Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {
 };
 
 static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-anchor", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, "-anchor", NULL, NULL,
 	"center", Tk_Offset(WindowItem, anchor), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-height", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-height", NULL, NULL,
 	"0", Tk_Offset(WindowItem, height), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK,
-	&stateOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-width", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-width", NULL, NULL,
 	"0", Tk_Offset(WindowItem, width), TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_WINDOW, "-window", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(WindowItem, tkwin), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+    {TK_CONFIG_WINDOW, "-window", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(WindowItem, tkwin), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ComputeWindowBbox _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    WindowItem *winItemPtr));
-static int		ConfigureWinItem _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static void		ComputeWindowBbox(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    WindowItem *winItemPtr);
+static int		ConfigureWinItem(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags));
-static int		CreateWinItem _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags);
+static int		CreateWinItem(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		DeleteWinItem _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display));
-static void		DisplayWinItem _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DeleteWinItem(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display);
+static void		DisplayWinItem(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst,
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
-static void		ScaleWinItem _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height);
+static void		ScaleWinItem(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY,
-			    double scaleX, double scaleY));
-static void		TranslateWinItem _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY));
-static int		WinItemCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    double scaleX, double scaleY);
+static void		TranslateWinItem(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY);
+static int		WinItemCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		WinItemLostSlaveProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		WinItemRequestProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		WinItemStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int		WinItemToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr));
-static int		WinItemToPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass));
-static double		WinItemToPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr));
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		WinItemLostSlaveProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		WinItemRequestProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		WinItemStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		WinItemToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr);
+static int		WinItemToPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass);
+static double		WinItemToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr);
 #ifdef X_GetImage
-static int		xerrorhandler _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XErrorEvent *e));
+static int		xerrorhandler(ClientData clientData, XErrorEvent *e);
 #endif
-static int		CanvasPsWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static int		CanvasPsWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Canvas canvas, double x,
-			    double y, int width, int height));
+			    double y, int width, int height);
 
 /*
- * The structure below defines the window item type by means of procedures
+ * The structure below defines the window item type by means of functions
  * that can be invoked by generic item code.
  */
 
 Tk_ItemType tkWindowType = {
-    "window",				/* name */
-    sizeof(WindowItem),			/* itemSize */
-    CreateWinItem,			/* createProc */
-    configSpecs,			/* configSpecs */
-    ConfigureWinItem,			/* configureProc */
-    WinItemCoords,			/* coordProc */
-    DeleteWinItem,			/* deleteProc */
-    DisplayWinItem,			/* displayProc */
-    1|TK_CONFIG_OBJS,			/* flags */
-    WinItemToPoint,			/* pointProc */
-    WinItemToArea,			/* areaProc */
-    WinItemToPostscript,	        /* postscriptProc */
-    ScaleWinItem,			/* scaleProc */
-    TranslateWinItem,			/* translateProc */
-    (Tk_ItemIndexProc *) NULL,		/* indexProc */
-    (Tk_ItemCursorProc *) NULL,		/* cursorProc */
-    (Tk_ItemSelectionProc *) NULL,	/* selectionProc */
-    (Tk_ItemInsertProc *) NULL,		/* insertProc */
-    (Tk_ItemDCharsProc *) NULL,		/* dTextProc */
-    (Tk_ItemType *) NULL,		/* nextPtr */
+    "window",			/* name */
+    sizeof(WindowItem),		/* itemSize */
+    CreateWinItem,		/* createProc */
+    configSpecs,		/* configSpecs */
+    ConfigureWinItem,		/* configureProc */
+    WinItemCoords,		/* coordProc */
+    DeleteWinItem,		/* deleteProc */
+    DisplayWinItem,		/* displayProc */
+    1|TK_CONFIG_OBJS,		/* flags */
+    WinItemToPoint,		/* pointProc */
+    WinItemToArea,		/* areaProc */
+    WinItemToPostscript,	/* postscriptProc */
+    ScaleWinItem,		/* scaleProc */
+    TranslateWinItem,		/* translateProc */
+    NULL,			/* indexProc */
+    NULL,			/* cursorProc */
+    NULL,			/* selectionProc */
+    NULL,			/* insertProc */
+    NULL,			/* dTextProc */
+    NULL,			/* nextPtr */
 };
 
-
 /*
- * The structure below defines the official type record for the
- * placer:
+ * The structure below defines the official type record for the canvas (as
+ * geometry manager):
  */
 
-static Tk_GeomMgr canvasGeomType = {
+static const Tk_GeomMgr canvasGeomType = {
     "canvas",				/* name */
     WinItemRequestProc,			/* requestProc */
     WinItemLostSlaveProc,		/* lostSlaveProc */
@@ -156,14 +151,12 @@ static Tk_GeomMgr canvasGeomType = {
  *
  * CreateWinItem --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to create a new window
- *	item in a canvas.
+ *	This function is invoked to create a new window item in a canvas.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurred in
- *	creating the item, then an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result;  in this case itemPtr is
- *	left uninitialized, so it can be safely freed by the
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If an error occurred in creating the
+ *	item, then an error message is left in the interp's result; in this
+ *	case itemPtr is left uninitialized, so it can be safely freed by the
  *	caller.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -173,19 +166,19 @@ static Tk_GeomMgr canvasGeomType = {
  */
 
 static int
-CreateWinItem(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas to hold new item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Record to hold new item;  header
-					 * has been initialized by caller. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Arguments describing window. */
+CreateWinItem(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas to hold new item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Record to hold new item; header has been
+				 * initialized by caller. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Arguments describing window. */
 {
     WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
     int i;
 
     if (objc == 0) {
-	panic("canvas did not pass any coords\n");
+	Tcl_Panic("canvas did not pass any coords\n");
     }
 
     /*
@@ -199,8 +192,8 @@ CreateWinItem(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
     winItemPtr->canvas = canvas;
 
     /*
-     * Process the arguments to fill in the item record.
-     * Only 1 (list) or 2 (x y) coords are allowed.
+     * Process the arguments to fill in the item record. Only 1 (list) or 2 (x
+     * y) coords are allowed.
      */
 
     if (objc == 1) {
@@ -220,7 +213,7 @@ CreateWinItem(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    error:
+  error:
     DeleteWinItem(canvas, itemPtr, Tk_Display(Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas)));
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -230,9 +223,8 @@ CreateWinItem(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * WinItemCoords --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "coords" widget
- *	command on window items.  See the user documentation for
- *	details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "coords" widget command on
+ *	window items. See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR, and sets the interp's result.
@@ -244,15 +236,13 @@ CreateWinItem(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-WinItemCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item whose coordinates are to be
-					 * read or modified. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of coordinates supplied in
-					 * objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1,
-					 * x2, y2, ... */
+WinItemCoords(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item whose coordinates are to be read or
+				 * modified. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of coordinates supplied in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1, x2, y2, ... */
 {
     WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -297,12 +287,12 @@ WinItemCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ConfigureWinItem --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to configure various aspects
- *	of a window item, such as its anchor position.
+ *	This function is invoked to configure various aspects of a window
+ *	item, such as its anchor position.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result code.  If an error occurs, then
- *	an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result code. If an error occurs, then an error message
+ *	is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Configuration information may be set for itemPtr.
@@ -311,13 +301,13 @@ WinItemCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureWinItem(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Window item to reconfigure. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of elements in objv.  */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
+ConfigureWinItem(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Window item to reconfigure. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of elements in objv.  */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
 {
     WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
     Tk_Window oldWindow;
@@ -338,8 +328,7 @@ ConfigureWinItem(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	if (oldWindow != NULL) {
 	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(oldWindow, StructureNotifyMask,
 		    WinItemStructureProc, (ClientData) winItemPtr);
-	    Tk_ManageGeometry(oldWindow, (Tk_GeomMgr *) NULL,
-		    (ClientData) NULL);
+	    Tk_ManageGeometry(oldWindow, NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
 	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(oldWindow, canvasTkwin);
 	    Tk_UnmapWindow(oldWindow);
 	}
@@ -347,10 +336,10 @@ ConfigureWinItem(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	    Tk_Window ancestor, parent;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Make sure that the canvas is either the parent of the
-	     * window associated with the item or a descendant of that
-	     * parent.  Also, don't allow a top-of-hierarchy window to be
-	     * managed inside a canvas.
+	     * Make sure that the canvas is either the parent of the window
+	     * associated with the item or a descendant of that parent. Also,
+	     * don't allow a top-of-hierarchy window to be managed inside a
+	     * canvas.
 	     */
 
 	    parent = Tk_Parent(winItemPtr->tkwin);
@@ -360,10 +349,10 @@ ConfigureWinItem(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 		    break;
 		}
 		if (((Tk_FakeWin *) (ancestor))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) {
-		    badWindow:
+		badWindow:
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't use ",
 			    Tk_PathName(winItemPtr->tkwin),
-			    " in a window item of this canvas", (char *) NULL);
+			    " in a window item of this canvas", NULL);
 		    winItemPtr->tkwin = NULL;
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
@@ -399,8 +388,8 @@ ConfigureWinItem(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * DeleteWinItem --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to clean up the data structure
- *	associated with a window item.
+ *	This function is called to clean up the data structure associated with
+ *	a window item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -412,11 +401,10 @@ ConfigureWinItem(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteWinItem(canvas, itemPtr, display)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Overall info about widget. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being deleted. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display containing window for
-					 * canvas. */
+DeleteWinItem(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Overall info about widget. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being deleted. */
+    Display *display)		/* Display containing window for canvas. */
 {
     WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
     Tk_Window canvasTkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas);
@@ -424,7 +412,7 @@ DeleteWinItem(canvas, itemPtr, display)
     if (winItemPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
 	Tk_DeleteEventHandler(winItemPtr->tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
 		WinItemStructureProc, (ClientData) winItemPtr);
-	Tk_ManageGeometry(winItemPtr->tkwin, (Tk_GeomMgr *) NULL,
+	Tk_ManageGeometry(winItemPtr->tkwin, NULL,
 		(ClientData) NULL);
 	if (canvasTkwin != Tk_Parent(winItemPtr->tkwin)) {
 	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(winItemPtr->tkwin, canvasTkwin);
@@ -438,26 +426,23 @@ DeleteWinItem(canvas, itemPtr, display)
  *
  * ComputeWindowBbox --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to compute the bounding box of
- *	all the pixels that may be drawn as part of a window item.
- *	This procedure is where the child window's placement is
- *	computed.
+ *	This function is invoked to compute the bounding box of all the pixels
+ *	that may be drawn as part of a window item. This function is where the
+ *	child window's placement is computed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header
- *	for itemPtr.
+ *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ComputeWindowBbox(canvas, winItemPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    WindowItem *winItemPtr;		/* Item whose bbox is to be
-					 * recomputed. */
+ComputeWindowBbox(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    WindowItem *winItemPtr)	/* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
 {
     int width, height, x, y;
     Tk_State state = winItemPtr->header.state;
@@ -470,10 +455,10 @@ ComputeWindowBbox(canvas, winItemPtr)
     }
     if ((winItemPtr->tkwin == NULL) || (state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN)) {
 	/*
-	 * There is no window for this item yet.  Just give it a 1x1
-	 * bounding box.  Don't give it a 0x0 bounding box; there are
-	 * strange cases where this bounding box might be used as the
-	 * dimensions of the window, and 0x0 causes problems under X.
+	 * There is no window for this item yet. Just give it a 1x1 bounding
+	 * box. Don't give it a 0x0 bounding box; there are strange cases
+	 * where this bounding box might be used as the dimensions of the
+	 * window, and 0x0 causes problems under X.
 	 */
 
 	winItemPtr->header.x1 = x;
@@ -507,36 +492,36 @@ ComputeWindowBbox(canvas, winItemPtr)
      */
 
     switch (winItemPtr->anchor) {
-	case TK_ANCHOR_N:
-	    x -= width/2;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
-	    x -= width;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_E:
-	    x -= width;
-	    y -= height/2;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
-	    x -= width;
-	    y -= height;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_S:
-	    x -= width/2;
-	    y -= height;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
-	    y -= height;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_W:
-	    y -= height/2;
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
-	    break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
-	    x -= width/2;
-	    y -= height/2;
-	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_N:
+	x -= width/2;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
+	x -= width;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_E:
+	x -= width;
+	y -= height/2;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
+	x -= width;
+	y -= height;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_S:
+	x -= width/2;
+	y -= height;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
+	y -= height;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_W:
+	y -= height/2;
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
+	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
+	x -= width/2;
+	y -= height/2;
+	break;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -554,36 +539,32 @@ ComputeWindowBbox(canvas, winItemPtr)
  *
  * DisplayWinItem --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to "draw" a window item in a given
- *	drawable.  Since the window draws itself, we needn't do any
- *	actual redisplay here.  However, this procedure takes care
- *	of actually repositioning the child window so that it occupies
- *	the correct screen position.
+ *	This function is invoked to "draw" a window item in a given drawable.
+ *	Since the window draws itself, we needn't do any actual redisplay
+ *	here. However, this function takes care of actually repositioning the
+ *	child window so that it occupies the correct screen position.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The child window's position may get changed.  Note: this
- *	procedure gets called both when a window needs to be displayed
- *	and when it ceases to be visible on the screen (e.g. it was
- *	scrolled or moved off-screen or the enclosing canvas is
- *	unmapped).
+ *	The child window's position may get changed. Note: this function gets
+ *	called both when a window needs to be displayed and when it ceases to
+ *	be visible on the screen (e.g. it was scrolled or moved off-screen or
+ *	the enclosing canvas is unmapped).
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayWinItem(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, regionX, regionY,
-	regionWidth, regionHeight)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display on which to draw item. */
-    Drawable drawable;			/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
-					 * item. */
-    int regionX, regionY, regionWidth, regionHeight;
-					/* Describes region of canvas that
-					 * must be redisplayed (not used). */
+DisplayWinItem(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to be displayed. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw item. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw item. */
+    int regionX, int regionY, int regionWidth, int regionHeight)
+				/* Describes region of canvas that must be
+				 * redisplayed (not used). */
 {
     WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
     int width, height;
@@ -616,16 +597,16 @@ DisplayWinItem(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, regionX, regionY,
     height = winItemPtr->header.y2 - winItemPtr->header.y1;
 
     /*
-     * If the window is completely out of the visible area of the canvas
-     * then unmap it.  This code used not to be present (why unmap the
-     * window if it isn't visible anyway?) but this could cause the
-     * window to suddenly reappear if the canvas window got resized.
+     * If the window is completely out of the visible area of the canvas then
+     * unmap it. This code used not to be present (why unmap the window if it
+     * isn't visible anyway?) but this could cause the window to suddenly
+     * reappear if the canvas window got resized.
      */
 
     if (((x + width) <= 0) || ((y + height) <= 0)
 	    || (x >= Tk_Width(canvasTkwin)) || (y >= Tk_Height(canvasTkwin))) {
 	if (canvasTkwin == Tk_Parent(winItemPtr->tkwin)) {
-	    Tk_UnmapWindow(winItemPtr->tkwin); 
+	    Tk_UnmapWindow(winItemPtr->tkwin);
 	} else {
 	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(winItemPtr->tkwin, canvasTkwin);
 	}
@@ -633,8 +614,8 @@ DisplayWinItem(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, regionX, regionY,
     }
 
     /*
-     * Reposition and map the window (but in different ways depending
-     * on whether the canvas is the window's parent).
+     * Reposition and map the window (but in different ways depending on
+     * whether the canvas is the window's parent).
      */
 
     if (canvasTkwin == Tk_Parent(winItemPtr->tkwin)) {
@@ -655,14 +636,14 @@ DisplayWinItem(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, regionX, regionY,
  *
  * WinItemToPoint --
  *
- *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given
- *	window, in canvas units.
+ *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given window, in canvas
+ *	units.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates
- *	are coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the window.  If the
- *	point isn't inside the window then the return value is the
- *	distance from the point to the window.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates are
+ *	coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the window. If the point isn't
+ *	inside the window then the return value is the distance from the point
+ *	to the window.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -671,10 +652,10 @@ DisplayWinItem(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, regionX, regionY,
  */
 
 static double
-WinItemToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against point. */
-    double *pointPtr;		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
+WinItemToPoint(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against point. */
+    double *pointPtr)		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
 {
     WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
     double x1, x2, y1, y2, xDiff, yDiff;
@@ -712,14 +693,13 @@ WinItemToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
  *
  * WinItemToArea --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to determine whether an item
- *	lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or overlapping
- *	a given rectangle.
+ *	This function is called to determine whether an item lies entirely
+ *	inside, entirely outside, or overlapping a given rectangle.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area
- *	given by rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely
- *	inside the given area.
+ *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area given by
+ *	rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside the given
+ *	area.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -728,11 +708,11 @@ WinItemToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-WinItemToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against rectangle. */
-    double *rectPtr;		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
-				 * (x1, y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular
+WinItemToArea(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against rectangle. */
+    double *rectPtr)		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
+				 * (x1,y1,x2,y2) describing rectangular
 				 * area.  */
 {
     WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
@@ -757,8 +737,8 @@ WinItemToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
  *
  * xerrorhandler --
  *
- *	This is a dummy function to catch X11 errors during an
- *	attempt to print a canvas window.
+ *	This is a dummy function to catch X11 errors during an attempt to
+ *	print a canvas window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -771,11 +751,11 @@ WinItemToArea(canvas, itemPtr, rectPtr)
 
 #ifdef X_GetImage
 static int
-xerrorhandler(clientData, e)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    XErrorEvent *e;
+xerrorhandler(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    XErrorEvent *e)
 {
-	return 0;
+    return 0;
 }
 #endif
 
@@ -785,15 +765,13 @@ xerrorhandler(clientData, e)
  *
  * WinItemToPostscript --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to generate Postscript for
- *	window items.
+ *	This function is called to generate Postscript for window items.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If an error
- *	occurs in generating Postscript then an error message is
- *	left in interp->result, replacing whatever used to be there.
- *	If no error occurs, then Postscript for the item is appended
- *	to the result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If an error occurs in
+ *	generating Postscript then an error message is left in interp->result,
+ *	replacing whatever used to be there. If no error occurs, then
+ *	Postscript for the item is appended to the result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -802,15 +780,13 @@ xerrorhandler(clientData, e)
  */
 
 static int
-WinItemToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Leave Postscript or error message
-					 * here. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about overall canvas. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item for which Postscript is
-					 * wanted. */
-    int prepass;			/* 1 means this is a prepass to
-					 * collect font information;  0 means
-					 * final Postscript is being created.*/
+WinItemToPostscript(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Leave Postscript or error message here. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about overall canvas. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item for which Postscript is wanted. */
+    int prepass)		/* 1 means this is a prepass to collect font
+				 * information; 0 means final Postscript is
+				 * being created. */
 {
     WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *)itemPtr;
 
@@ -821,80 +797,75 @@ WinItemToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
     if (prepass || winItemPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
         return TCL_OK;
     }
-    
+
     width = Tk_Width(tkwin);
     height = Tk_Height(tkwin);
 
     /*
-     * Compute the coordinates of the lower-left corner of the window,
-     * taking into account the anchor position for the window.
+     * Compute the coordinates of the lower-left corner of the window, taking
+     * into account the anchor position for the window.
      */
 
     x = winItemPtr->x;
     y = Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, winItemPtr->y);
-    
+
     switch (winItemPtr->anchor) {
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:			y -= height;		break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_N:	x -= width/2.0; y -= height;		break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:	x -= width;	y -= height;		break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_E:	x -= width;	y -= height/2.0;	break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:	x -= width;				break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_S:	x -= width/2.0;				break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:						break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_W:			y -= height/2.0;	break;
-	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:	x -= width/2.0; y -= height/2.0;	break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:			    y -= height;	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_N:	    x -= width/2.0; y -= height;	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:	    x -= width;	    y -= height;	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_E:	    x -= width;	    y -= height/2.0;	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:	    x -= width;				    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_S:	    x -= width/2.0;			    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:						    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_W:			    y -= height/2.0;	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:  x -= width/2.0; y -= height/2.0;	    break;
     }
 
     return CanvasPsWindow(interp, tkwin, canvas, x, y, width, height);
 }
-
+
 static int
-CanvasPsWindow(interp, tkwin, canvas, x, y, width, height)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Leave Postscript or error message
-					 * here. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* window to be printed */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about overall canvas. */
-    double x, y;			/* origin of window. */
-    int width, height;			/* width/height of window. */
+CanvasPsWindow(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Leave Postscript or error message here. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* window to be printed */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about overall canvas. */
+    double x, double y,		/* origin of window. */
+    int width, int height)	/* width/height of window. */
 {
     char buffer[256];
     XImage *ximage;
     int result;
     Tcl_DString buffer1, buffer2;
 #ifdef X_GetImage
-    Tk_ErrorHandler	handle;
+    Tk_ErrorHandler handle;
 #endif
 
     sprintf(buffer, "\n%%%% %s item (%s, %d x %d)\n%.15g %.15g translate\n",
 	    Tk_Class(tkwin), Tk_PathName(tkwin), width, height, x, y);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 
-    /* first try if the widget has its own "postscript" command. If it
-     * exists, this will produce much better postscript than
-     * when a pixmap is used.
+    /*
+     * First try if the widget has its own "postscript" command. If it exists,
+     * this will produce much better postscript than when a pixmap is used.
      */
 
     Tcl_DStringInit(&buffer1);
     Tcl_DStringInit(&buffer2);
     Tcl_DStringGetResult(interp, &buffer2);
-    sprintf (buffer, "%s postscript -prolog 0\n", Tk_PathName(tkwin));
+    sprintf(buffer, "%s postscript -prolog 0\n", Tk_PathName(tkwin));
     result = Tcl_Eval(interp, buffer);
     Tcl_DStringGetResult(interp, &buffer1);
     Tcl_DStringResult(interp, &buffer2);
     Tcl_DStringFree(&buffer2);
 
     if (result == TCL_OK) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-		"50 dict begin\nsave\ngsave\n",
-		(char *) NULL);
-	sprintf (buffer,
-		"0 %d moveto %d 0 rlineto 0 -%d rlineto -%d",
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "50 dict begin\nsave\ngsave\n", NULL);
+	sprintf(buffer, "0 %d moveto %d 0 rlineto 0 -%d rlineto -%d",
 		height, width, height, width);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " 0 rlineto closepath\n",
 		"1.000 1.000 1.000 setrgbcolor AdjustColor\nfill\ngrestore\n",
-		Tcl_DStringValue(&buffer1), "\nrestore\nend\n\n\n",
-		(char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_DStringValue(&buffer1), "\nrestore\nend\n\n\n", NULL);
 	Tcl_DStringFree(&buffer1);
 
 	return result;
@@ -902,17 +873,18 @@ CanvasPsWindow(interp, tkwin, canvas, x, y, width, height)
     Tcl_DStringFree(&buffer1);
 
     /*
-     * If the window is off the screen it will generate an BadMatch/XError
-     * We catch any BadMatch errors here
+     * If the window is off the screen it will generate a BadMatch/XError. We
+     * catch any BadMatch errors here
      */
+
 #ifdef X_GetImage
     handle = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(Tk_Display(tkwin), BadMatch,
 	    X_GetImage, -1, xerrorhandler, (ClientData) tkwin);
 #endif
 
     /*
-     * Generate an XImage from the window.  We can then read pixel 
-     * values out of the XImage.
+     * Generate an XImage from the window. We can then read pixel values out
+     * of the XImage.
      */
 
     ximage = XGetImage(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_WindowId(tkwin), 0, 0,
@@ -922,7 +894,7 @@ CanvasPsWindow(interp, tkwin, canvas, x, y, width, height)
     Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handle);
 #endif
 
-    if (ximage == (XImage*) NULL) { 
+    if (ximage == NULL) {
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
@@ -938,15 +910,14 @@ CanvasPsWindow(interp, tkwin, canvas, x, y, width, height)
  *
  * ScaleWinItem --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to rescale a window item.
+ *	This function is invoked to rescale a window item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The window referred to by itemPtr is rescaled
- *	so that the following transformation is applied to all
- *	point coordinates:
+ *	The window referred to by itemPtr is rescaled so that the following
+ *	transformation is applied to all point coordinates:
  *		x' = originX + scaleX*(x-originX)
  *		y' = originY + scaleY*(y-originY)
  *
@@ -954,12 +925,13 @@ CanvasPsWindow(interp, tkwin, canvas, x, y, width, height)
  */
 
 static void
-ScaleWinItem(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing window. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Window to be scaled. */
-    double originX, originY;		/* Origin about which to scale window. */
-    double scaleX;			/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
-    double scaleY;			/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
+ScaleWinItem(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing window. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Window to be scaled. */
+    double originX, double originY,
+				/* Origin about which to scale window. */
+    double scaleX,		/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
+    double scaleY)		/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
 {
     WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -979,25 +951,24 @@ ScaleWinItem(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
  *
  * TranslateWinItem --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to move a window by a given amount.
+ *	This function is called to move a window by a given amount.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The position of the window is offset by (xDelta, yDelta),
- *	and the bounding box is updated in the generic part of the
- *	item structure.
+ *	The position of the window is offset by (xDelta, yDelta), and the
+ *	bounding box is updated in the generic part of the item structure.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TranslateWinItem(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being moved. */
-    double deltaX, deltaY;		/* Amount by which item is to be
-					 * moved. */
+TranslateWinItem(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being moved. */
+    double deltaX, double deltaY)
+				/* Amount by which item is to be moved. */
 {
     WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -1011,25 +982,23 @@ TranslateWinItem(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
  *
  * WinItemStructureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever StructureNotify events
- *	occur for a window that's managed as part of a canvas window
- *	item.  This procudure's only purpose is to clean up when
- *	windows are deleted.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever StructureNotify events occur for a
+ *	window that's managed as part of a canvas window item. This function's
+ *	only purpose is to clean up when windows are deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The window is disassociated from the window item when it is
- *	deleted.
+ *	The window is disassociated from the window item when it is deleted.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-WinItemStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to record describing window item. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Describes what just happened. */
+WinItemStructureProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to record describing window item. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) clientData;
 
@@ -1043,8 +1012,8 @@ WinItemStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * WinItemRequestProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever a window that's associated
- *	with a window canvas item changes its requested dimensions.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever a window that's associated with a
+ *	window canvas item changes its requested dimensions.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1057,10 +1026,9 @@ WinItemStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-WinItemRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to record for window item. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window that changed its desired
-					 * size. */
+WinItemRequestProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to record for window item. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window that changed its desired size. */
 {
     WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) clientData;
 
@@ -1080,8 +1048,8 @@ WinItemRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * WinItemLostSlaveProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry
- *	claims control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry claims
+ *	control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1094,10 +1062,10 @@ WinItemRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-WinItemLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* WindowItem structure for slave window that
+WinItemLostSlaveProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* WindowItem structure for slave window that
 				 * was stolen away. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
 {
     WindowItem *winItemPtr = (WindowItem *) clientData;
     Tk_Window canvasTkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(winItemPtr->canvas);
@@ -1110,3 +1078,11 @@ WinItemLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
     Tk_UnmapWindow(winItemPtr->tkwin);
     winItemPtr->tkwin = NULL;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvas.c b/generic/tkCanvas.c
index 8f9641f..14fe1ab 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvas.c
+++ b/generic/tkCanvas.c
@@ -1,23 +1,22 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkCanvas.c --
  *
- *	This module implements canvas widgets for the Tk toolkit.
- *	A canvas displays a background and a collection of graphical
- *	objects such as rectangles, lines, and texts.
+ *	This module implements canvas widgets for the Tk toolkit. A canvas
+ *	displays a background and a collection of graphical objects such as
+ *	rectangles, lines, and texts.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 /* #define USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH 1 */
 
 #include "default.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkCanvas.h"
 #ifdef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
@@ -31,32 +30,29 @@
 
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
 /*
- * The structure defined below is used to keep track of a tag search
- * in progress.  No field should be accessed by anyone other than
- * StartTagSearch and NextItem.
+ * The structure defined below is used to keep track of a tag search in
+ * progress. No field should be accessed by anyone other than StartTagSearch
+ * and NextItem.
  */
 
 typedef struct TagSearch {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr;	/* Canvas widget being searched. */
-    Tk_Uid tag;			/* Tag to search for.   0 means return
-				 * all items. */
+    Tk_Uid tag;			/* Tag to search for. 0 means return all
+				 * items. */
     Tk_Item *currentPtr;	/* Pointer to last item returned. */
-    Tk_Item *lastPtr;		/* The item right before the currentPtr
-				 * is tracked so if the currentPtr is
-				 * deleted we don't have to start from the
-				 * beginning. */
+    Tk_Item *lastPtr;		/* The item right before the currentPtr is
+				 * tracked so if the currentPtr is deleted we
+				 * don't have to start from the beginning. */
     int searchOver;		/* Non-zero means NextItem should always
 				 * return NULL. */
 } TagSearch;
 
 #else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 /*
- * The structure defined below is used to keep track of a tag search
- * in progress.  No field should be accessed by anyone other than
- * TagSearchScan, TagSearchFirst, TagSearchNext,
- * TagSearchScanExpr, TagSearchEvalExpr, 
- * TagSearchExprInit, TagSearchExprDestroy,
- * TagSearchDestroy.
+ * The structure defined below is used to keep track of a tag search in
+ * progress. No field should be accessed by anyone other than TagSearchScan,
+ * TagSearchFirst, TagSearchNext, TagSearchScanExpr, TagSearchEvalExpr,
+ * TagSearchExprInit, TagSearchExprDestroy, TagSearchDestroy.
  * (
  *   Not quite accurate: the TagSearch structure is also accessed from:
  *    CanvasWidgetCmd, FindItems, RelinkItems
@@ -72,24 +68,32 @@ typedef struct TagSearch {
 typedef struct TagSearch {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr;	/* Canvas widget being searched. */
     Tk_Item *currentPtr;	/* Pointer to last item returned. */
-    Tk_Item *lastPtr;		/* The item right before the currentPtr
-				 * is tracked so if the currentPtr is
-				 * deleted we don't have to start from the
-				 * beginning. */
+    Tk_Item *lastPtr;		/* The item right before the currentPtr is
+				 * tracked so if the currentPtr is deleted we
+				 * don't have to start from the beginning. */
     int searchOver;		/* Non-zero means NextItem should always
 				 * return NULL. */
-    int type;			/* search type */
-    int id;			/* item id for searches by id */
+    int type;			/* Search type (see #defs below) */
+    int id;			/* Item id for searches by id */
+    char *string;		/* Tag expression string */
+    int stringIndex;		/* Current position in string scan */
+    int stringLength;		/* Length of tag expression string */
+    char *rewritebuffer;	/* Tag string (after removing escapes) */
+    unsigned int rewritebufferAllocated;
+				/* Available space for rewrites. */
+    TagSearchExpr *expr;	/* Compiled tag expression. */
+} TagSearch;
 
-    char *string;		/* tag expression string */
-    int stringIndex;		/* current position in string scan */
-    int stringLength;		/* length of tag expression string */
+/*
+ * Values for the TagSearch type field.
+ */
 
-    char *rewritebuffer;	/* tag string (after removing escapes) */
-    unsigned int rewritebufferAllocated;	/* available space for rewrites */
+#define SEARCH_TYPE_EMPTY	0	/* Looking for empty tag */
+#define SEARCH_TYPE_ID		1	/* Looking for an item by id */
+#define SEARCH_TYPE_ALL		2	/* Looking for all items */
+#define SEARCH_TYPE_TAG		3	/* Looking for an item by simple tag */
+#define SEARCH_TYPE_EXPR	4	/* Compound search */
 
-    TagSearchExpr *expr;	/* compiled tag expression */
-} TagSearch;
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 
 /*
@@ -119,10 +123,8 @@ static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
     {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	DEF_CANVAS_BG_MONO, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, bgBorder),
 	TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY},
-    {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bd", "borderWidth", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bg", "background", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0},
+    {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bd", "borderWidth", NULL, NULL, 0, 0},
+    {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bg", "background", NULL, NULL, 0, 0},
     {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
 	DEF_CANVAS_BORDER_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, borderWidth), 0},
     {TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, "-closeenough", "closeEnough", "CloseEnough",
@@ -203,13 +205,12 @@ static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
 	"ScrollIncrement",
 	DEF_CANVAS_Y_SCROLL_INCREMENT, Tk_Offset(TkCanvas, yScrollIncrement),
 	0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+    {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * List of all the item types known at present. This is *global* and
- * is protected by typeListMutex.
+ * List of all the item types known at present. This is *global* and is
+ * protected by typeListMutex.
  */
 
 static Tk_ItemType *typeList = NULL;	/* NULL means initialization hasn't
@@ -218,9 +219,10 @@ TCL_DECLARE_MUTEX(typeListMutex)
 
 #ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
 /*
- * Uids for operands in compiled advanced tag search expressions
+ * Uids for operands in compiled advanced tag search expressions.
  * Initialization is done by GetStaticUids()
  */
+
 typedef struct {
     Tk_Uid allUid;
     Tk_Uid currentUid;
@@ -235,107 +237,89 @@ typedef struct {
 } SearchUids;
 
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
-static SearchUids *GetStaticUids _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+static SearchUids *	GetStaticUids(void);
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 
 /*
- * Standard item types provided by Tk:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-extern Tk_ItemType tkArcType, tkBitmapType, tkImageType, tkLineType;
-extern Tk_ItemType tkOvalType, tkPolygonType;
-extern Tk_ItemType tkRectangleType, tkTextType, tkWindowType;
-
-/*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined later in this file:
- */
-
-static void		CanvasBindProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		CanvasBlinkProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		CanvasCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		CanvasDoEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		CanvasEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int		CanvasFetchSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, int offset,
-			    char *buffer, int maxBytes));
-static Tk_Item *	CanvasFindClosest _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
-			    double coords[2]));
-static void		CanvasFocusProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
-			    int gotFocus));
-static void		CanvasLostSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		CanvasSelectTo _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int index));
-static void		CanvasSetOrigin _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
-			    int xOrigin, int yOrigin));
-static void		CanvasUpdateScrollbars _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkCanvas *canvasPtr));
-static int		CanvasWidgetCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST *argv));
-static void		CanvasWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData instanceData));
-static int		ConfigureCanvas _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkCanvas *canvasPtr, int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST *argv,
-			    int flags));
-static void		DestroyCanvas _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static void		DisplayCanvas _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		DoItem _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tk_Uid tag));
-static void		EventuallyRedrawItem _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr));
+static void		CanvasBindProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		CanvasBlinkProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		CanvasCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		CanvasDoEvent(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		CanvasEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		CanvasFetchSelection(ClientData clientData, int offset,
+			    char *buffer, int maxBytes);
+static Tk_Item *	CanvasFindClosest(TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
+			    double coords[2]);
+static void		CanvasFocusProc(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, int gotFocus);
+static void		CanvasLostSelection(ClientData clientData);
+static void		CanvasSelectTo(TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int index);
+static void		CanvasSetOrigin(TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
+			    int xOrigin, int yOrigin);
+static void		CanvasUpdateScrollbars(TkCanvas *canvasPtr);
+static int		CanvasWidgetCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST *argv);
+static void		CanvasWorldChanged(
+			    ClientData instanceData);
+static int		ConfigureCanvas(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkCanvas *canvasPtr, int argc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST *argv, int flags);
+static void		DestroyCanvas(char *memPtr);
+static void		DisplayCanvas(ClientData clientData);
+static void		DoItem(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tk_Uid tag);
+static void		EventuallyRedrawItem(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr);
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-static int		FindItems _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkCanvas *canvasPtr, int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST *argv,
-			    Tcl_Obj *newTagObj, int first));
+static int		FindItems(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
+			    int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST *argv,
+			    Tcl_Obj *newTagObj, int first);
 #else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-static int		FindItems _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkCanvas *canvasPtr, int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST *argv,
+static int		FindItems(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
+			    int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST *argv,
 			    Tcl_Obj *newTagObj, int first,
-			    TagSearch **searchPtrPtr));
+			    TagSearch **searchPtrPtr);
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-static int		FindArea _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tcl_Obj *CONST *argv, Tk_Uid uid,
-			    int enclosed));
-static double		GridAlign _ANSI_ARGS_((double coord, double spacing));
-static CONST char**	GetStringsFromObjs _ANSI_ARGS_((int argc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST *objv));
-static void		InitCanvas _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+static int		FindArea(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST *argv, Tk_Uid uid, int enclosed);
+static double		GridAlign(double coord, double spacing);
+static CONST char**	TkGetStringsFromObjs(int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST *objv);
+static void		InitCanvas(void);
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-static Tk_Item *	NextItem _ANSI_ARGS_((TagSearch *searchPtr));
+static Tk_Item *	NextItem(TagSearch *searchPtr);
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-static void		PickCurrentItem _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static Tcl_Obj *	ScrollFractions _ANSI_ARGS_((int screen1,
-			    int screen2, int object1, int object2));
+static void		PickCurrentItem(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, XEvent *eventPtr);
+static Tcl_Obj *	ScrollFractions(int screen1,
+			    int screen2, int object1, int object2);
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-static void		RelinkItems _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *tag, Tk_Item *prevPtr));
-static Tk_Item *	StartTagSearch _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *tag, TagSearch *searchPtr));
+static void		RelinkItems(TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *tag, Tk_Item *prevPtr);
+static Tk_Item *	StartTagSearch(TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *tag, TagSearch *searchPtr);
 #else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-static int		RelinkItems _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *tag, Tk_Item *prevPtr,
-			    TagSearch **searchPtrPtr));
-static void 		TagSearchExprInit _ANSI_ARGS_ ((
-			    TagSearchExpr **exprPtrPtr));
-static void		TagSearchExprDestroy _ANSI_ARGS_((TagSearchExpr *expr));
-static void		TagSearchDestroy _ANSI_ARGS_((TagSearch *searchPtr));
-static int		TagSearchScan _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *tag, TagSearch **searchPtrPtr));
-static int		TagSearchScanExpr _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TagSearch *searchPtr, TagSearchExpr *expr));
-static int		TagSearchEvalExpr _ANSI_ARGS_((TagSearchExpr *expr,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr));
-static Tk_Item *	TagSearchFirst _ANSI_ARGS_((TagSearch *searchPtr));
-static Tk_Item *	TagSearchNext _ANSI_ARGS_((TagSearch *searchPtr));
+static int		RelinkItems(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tcl_Obj *tag,
+			    Tk_Item *prevPtr, TagSearch **searchPtrPtr);
+static void 		TagSearchExprInit(TagSearchExpr **exprPtrPtr);
+static void		TagSearchExprDestroy(TagSearchExpr *expr);
+static void		TagSearchDestroy(TagSearch *searchPtr);
+static int		TagSearchScan(TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *tag, TagSearch **searchPtrPtr);
+static int		TagSearchScanExpr(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TagSearch *searchPtr, TagSearchExpr *expr);
+static int		TagSearchEvalExpr(TagSearchExpr *expr,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr);
+static Tk_Item *	TagSearchFirst(TagSearch *searchPtr);
+static Tk_Item *	TagSearchNext(TagSearch *searchPtr);
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 
 /*
- * The structure below defines canvas class behavior by means of procedures
+ * The structure below defines canvas class behavior by means of functions
  * that can be invoked from generic window code.
  */
 
@@ -344,15 +328,38 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs canvasClass = {
     CanvasWorldChanged,		/* worldChangedProc */
 };
 
+/*
+ * Macros that significantly simplify all code that finds items.
+ */
+
+#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
+#define FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objPtr,searchPtrPtr,errorExitClause) \
+    (itemPtr) = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr,(objPtr),&search)
+#define FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objPtr,searchPtrPtr,errorExitClause) \
+    for ((itemPtr) = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, (objPtr), &search); \
+	    (itemPtr) != NULL; (itemPtr) = NextItem(&search))
+#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+#define FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objPtr,searchPtrPtr,errorExitClause) \
+    if ((result=TagSearchScan(canvasPtr,(objPtr),(searchPtrPtr))) != TCL_OK){ \
+	errorExitClause; \
+    } \
+    itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(*(searchPtrPtr));
+#define FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objPtr,searchPtrPtr,errorExitClause) \
+    if ((result=TagSearchScan(canvasPtr,(objPtr),(searchPtrPtr))) != TCL_OK){ \
+	errorExitClause; \
+    } \
+    for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(*(searchPtrPtr)); \
+	    itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(*(searchPtrPtr)))
+#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_CanvasObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "canvas" Tcl
- *	command.  See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "canvas" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -364,16 +371,15 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs canvasClass = {
  */
 
 int
-Tk_CanvasObjCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_CanvasObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr;
-    Tk_Window new;
+    Tk_Window newWin;
 
     if (typeList == NULL) {
 	InitCanvas();
@@ -384,21 +390,20 @@ Tk_CanvasObjCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    new = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin,
-	    Tcl_GetString(argv[1]), (char *) NULL);
-    if (new == NULL) {
+    newWin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp,tkwin,Tcl_GetString(argv[1]),NULL);
+    if (newWin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Initialize fields that won't be initialized by ConfigureCanvas,
-     * or which ConfigureCanvas expects to have reasonable values
-     * (e.g. resource pointers).
+     * Initialize fields that won't be initialized by ConfigureCanvas, or
+     * which ConfigureCanvas expects to have reasonable values (e.g. resource
+     * pointers).
      */
 
     canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkCanvas));
-    canvasPtr->tkwin = new;
-    canvasPtr->display = Tk_Display(new);
+    canvasPtr->tkwin = newWin;
+    canvasPtr->display = Tk_Display(newWin);
     canvasPtr->interp = interp;
     canvasPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
 	    Tk_PathName(canvasPtr->tkwin), CanvasWidgetCmd,
@@ -460,8 +465,8 @@ Tk_CanvasObjCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
     canvasPtr->hotPrevPtr = NULL;
     canvasPtr->cursor = None;
     canvasPtr->takeFocus = NULL;
-    canvasPtr->pixelsPerMM = WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(new));
-    canvasPtr->pixelsPerMM /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(new));
+    canvasPtr->pixelsPerMM = WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(newWin));
+    canvasPtr->pixelsPerMM /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(newWin));
     canvasPtr->flags = 0;
     canvasPtr->nextId = 1;
     canvasPtr->psInfo = NULL;
@@ -492,7 +497,7 @@ Tk_CanvasObjCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
     Tcl_SetResult(interp, Tk_PathName(canvasPtr->tkwin), TCL_STATIC);
     return TCL_OK;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tk_DestroyWindow(canvasPtr->tkwin);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -502,9 +507,9 @@ Tk_CanvasObjCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * CanvasWidgetCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -516,22 +521,21 @@ Tk_CanvasObjCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  */
 
 static int
-CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about canvas
-					 * widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Argument objects. */
+CanvasWidgetCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about canvas widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) clientData;
-    int c, length, result;
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr = NULL;		/* Initialization needed only to
-					 * prevent compiler warning. */
+    int c, result;
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr = NULL;	/* Initialization needed only to prevent
+				 * compiler warning. */
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
     TagSearch search;
 #else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-    TagSearch *searchPtr = NULL;	/* Allocated by first TagSearchScan
-					 * Freed by TagSearchDestroy */
+    TagSearch *searchPtr = NULL;/* Allocated by first TagSearchScan, freed by
+				 * TagSearchDestroy */
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 
     int index;
@@ -569,7 +573,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
     result = TCL_OK;
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-      case CANV_ADDTAG: {
+    case CANV_ADDTAG:
 	if (objc < 4) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tag searchCommand ?arg arg ...?");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
@@ -581,13 +585,12 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	result = FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, objc, objv, objv[2], 3, &searchPtr);
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 	break;
-      }
 
-      case CANV_BBOX: {
+    case CANV_BBOX: {
 	int i, gotAny;
-	int x1 = 0, y1 = 0, x2 = 0, y2 = 0;	/* Initializations needed
-						 * only to prevent compiler
-						 * warnings. */
+	int x1 = 0, y1 = 0, x2 = 0, y2 = 0;	/* Initializations needed only
+						 * to prevent overcautious
+						 * compiler warnings. */
 
 	if (objc < 3) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tagOrId ?tagOrId ...?");
@@ -596,17 +599,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 	gotAny = 0;
 	for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	    for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[i], &search);
-		    itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-	    if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[i], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-		    itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(searchPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-
+	    FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[i], &searchPtr, goto done) {
 		if ((itemPtr->x1 >= itemPtr->x2)
 			|| (itemPtr->y1 >= itemPtr->y2)) {
 		    continue;
@@ -635,13 +628,13 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 	if (gotAny) {
 	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
-	    
+
 	    sprintf(buf, "%d %d %d %d", x1, y1, x2, y2);
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_BIND: {
+    }
+    case CANV_BIND: {
 	ClientData object;
 
 	if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 5)) {
@@ -651,8 +644,8 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Figure out what object to use for the binding (individual
-	 * item vs. tag).
+	 * Figure out what object to use for the binding (individual item vs.
+	 * tag).
 	 */
 
 	object = 0;
@@ -674,7 +667,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	    if (object == 0) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "item \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-			"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
+			"\" doesn't exist", NULL);
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
@@ -683,13 +676,15 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    object = (ClientData) Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
 	}
 #else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-	if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
+	result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	if (searchPtr->type == 1) {
+	if (searchPtr->type == SEARCH_TYPE_ID) {
 	    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
 
-	    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&canvasPtr->idTable, (char *) searchPtr->id);
+	    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&canvasPtr->idTable,
+		    (char *) INT2PTR(searchPtr->id));
 	    if (entryPtr != NULL) {
 		itemPtr = (Tk_Item *) Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
 		object = (ClientData) itemPtr;
@@ -697,7 +692,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	    if (object == 0) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "item \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-			"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
+			"\" doesn't exist", NULL);
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
@@ -707,8 +702,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 
 	/*
-	 * Make a binding table if the canvas doesn't already have
-	 * one.
+	 * Make a binding table if the canvas doesn't already have one.
 	 */
 
 	if (canvasPtr->bindingTable == NULL) {
@@ -718,18 +712,19 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	if (objc == 5) {
 	    int append = 0;
 	    unsigned long mask;
-	    char* argv4 = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[4],NULL);
+	    char* argv4 = Tcl_GetString(objv[4]);
 
 	    if (argv4[0] == 0) {
 		result = Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, canvasPtr->bindingTable,
-			object, Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL));
+			object, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
 		goto done;
 	    }
 #ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	    if (searchPtr->type == 4) {
-	        /*
-	         * if new tag expression, then insert in linked list
-	         */
+	    if (searchPtr->type == SEARCH_TYPE_EXPR) {
+		/*
+		 * If new tag expression, then insert in linked list.
+		 */
+
 	    	TagSearchExpr *expr, **lastPtr;
 
 		lastPtr = &(canvasPtr->bindTagExprs);
@@ -741,25 +736,27 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		}
 		if (!expr) {
 		    /*
-		     * transfer ownership of expr to bindTagExprs list
+		     * Transfer ownership of expr to bindTagExprs list.
 		     */
+
 		    *lastPtr = searchPtr->expr;
 		    searchPtr->expr->next = NULL;
 
 		    /*
-		     * flag in TagSearch that expr has changed ownership
-		     * so that TagSearchDestroy doesn't try to free it
+		     * Flag in TagSearch that expr has changed ownership so
+		     * that TagSearchDestroy doesn't try to free it.
 		     */
+
 		    searchPtr->expr = NULL;
 		}
-            }
+	    }
 #endif /* not USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 	    if (argv4[0] == '+') {
 		argv4++;
 		append = 1;
 	    }
 	    mask = Tk_CreateBinding(interp, canvasPtr->bindingTable,
-		    object, Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3],NULL), argv4, append);
+		    object, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), argv4, append);
 	    if (mask == 0) {
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
@@ -770,27 +767,28 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		    |EnterWindowMask|LeaveWindowMask|KeyPressMask
 		    |KeyReleaseMask|PointerMotionMask|VirtualEventMask)) {
 		Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, canvasPtr->bindingTable,
-			object, Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL));
+			object, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "requested illegal events; ",
 			"only key, button, motion, enter, leave, and virtual ",
-			"events may be used", (char *) NULL);
+			"events may be used", NULL);
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
 	} else if (objc == 4) {
 	    CONST char *command;
-    
+
 	    command = Tk_GetBinding(interp, canvasPtr->bindingTable,
-		    object, Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL));
+		    object, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
 	    if (command == NULL) {
 		CONST char *string;
 
-		string = Tcl_GetStringResult(interp); 
+		string = Tcl_GetStringResult(interp);
+
 		/*
-		 * Ignore missing binding errors.  This is a special hack
-		 * that relies on the error message returned by FindSequence
-		 * in tkBind.c.
+		 * Ignore missing binding errors. This is a special hack that
+		 * relies on the error message returned by FindSequence in
+		 * tkBind.c.
 		 */
 
 		if (string[0] != '\0') {
@@ -806,8 +804,8 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, canvasPtr->bindingTable, object);
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_CANVASX: {
+    }
+    case CANV_CANVASX: {
 	int x;
 	double grid;
 	char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
@@ -834,8 +832,8 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tcl_PrintDouble(interp, GridAlign((double) x, grid), buf);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_CANVASY: {
+    }
+    case CANV_CANVASY: {
 	int y;
 	double grid;
 	char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
@@ -862,8 +860,8 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tcl_PrintDouble(interp, GridAlign((double) y, grid), buf);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_CGET: {
+    }
+    case CANV_CGET:
 	if (objc != 3) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
@@ -872,11 +870,10 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	result = Tk_ConfigureValue(interp, canvasPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
 		(char *) canvasPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 0);
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_CONFIGURE: {
+    case CANV_CONFIGURE:
 	if (objc == 2) {
 	    result = Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, canvasPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
-		    (char *) canvasPtr, (char *) NULL, 0);
+		    (char *) canvasPtr, NULL, 0);
 	} else if (objc == 3) {
 	    result = Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, canvasPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
 		    (char *) canvasPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 0);
@@ -885,43 +882,37 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		    TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_COORDS: {
+    case CANV_COORDS:
 	if (objc < 3) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tagOrId ?x y x y ...?");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[2], &search);
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-	if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-	    goto done;
-	}
-	itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done);
 	if (itemPtr != NULL) {
 	    if (objc != 3) {
 		EventuallyRedrawItem((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr);
 	    }
 	    if (itemPtr->typePtr->coordProc != NULL) {
-	      if (itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) {
-		result = (*itemPtr->typePtr->coordProc)(interp,
-			(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objc-3, objv+3);
-	      } else {
-		CONST char **args = GetStringsFromObjs(objc-3, objv+3);
-		result = (*itemPtr->typePtr->coordProc)(interp,
-			(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objc-3, (Tcl_Obj **) args);
-		if (args) ckfree((char *) args);
-	      }
+		if (itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) {
+		    result = (*itemPtr->typePtr->coordProc)(interp,
+			    (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objc-3, objv+3);
+		} else {
+		    CONST char **args = TkGetStringsFromObjs(objc-3, objv+3);
+		    result = (*itemPtr->typePtr->coordProc)(interp,
+			    (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objc-3,
+			    (Tcl_Obj **) args);
+		    if (args != NULL) {
+			ckfree((char *) args);
+		    }
+		}
 	    }
 	    if (objc != 3) {
 		EventuallyRedrawItem((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr);
 	    }
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_CREATE: {
+    case CANV_CREATE: {
 	Tk_ItemType *typePtr;
 	Tk_ItemType *matchPtr = NULL;
 	Tk_Item *itemPtr;
@@ -929,6 +920,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	int isNew = 0;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
 	char *arg;
+	int length;
 
 	if (objc < 3) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "type coords ?arg arg ...?");
@@ -940,13 +932,12 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tcl_MutexLock(&typeListMutex);
 	for (typePtr = typeList; typePtr != NULL; typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if ((c == typePtr->name[0])
-		    && (strncmp(arg, typePtr->name, (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
+		    && (strncmp(arg, typePtr->name, (unsigned)length) == 0)) {
 		if (matchPtr != NULL) {
 		    Tcl_MutexUnlock(&typeListMutex);
-		  badType:
+		badType:
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-			    "unknown or ambiguous item type \"",
-			    arg, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+			    "unknown or ambiguous item type \"",arg,"\"",NULL);
 		    result = TCL_ERROR;
 		    goto done;
 		}
@@ -984,10 +975,12 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    result = (*typePtr->createProc)(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
 		    itemPtr, objc-3, objv+3);
 	} else {
-	    CONST char **args = GetStringsFromObjs(objc-3, objv+3);
+	    CONST char **args = TkGetStringsFromObjs(objc-3, objv+3);
 	    result = (*typePtr->createProc)(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
 		    itemPtr, objc-3, (Tcl_Obj **) args);
-	    if (args) ckfree((char *) args);
+	    if (args != NULL) {
+		ckfree((char *) args);
+	    }
 	}
 	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    ckfree((char *) itemPtr);
@@ -996,7 +989,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 	itemPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
 	entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&canvasPtr->idTable,
-		(char *) itemPtr->id, &isNew);
+		(char *) INT2PTR(itemPtr->id), &isNew);
 	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, itemPtr);
 	itemPtr->prevPtr = canvasPtr->lastItemPtr;
 	canvasPtr->hotPtr = itemPtr;
@@ -1013,8 +1006,8 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	sprintf(buf, "%d", itemPtr->id);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_DCHARS: {
+    }
+    case CANV_DCHARS: {
 	int first, last;
 	int x1,x2,y1,y2;
 
@@ -1023,37 +1016,32 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[2], &search);
-		itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-	if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-	    goto done;
-	}
-	for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-		itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(searchPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done) {
 	    if ((itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc == NULL)
 		    || (itemPtr->typePtr->dCharsProc == NULL)) {
 		continue;
 	    }
 	    if (itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) {
-		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
-			itemPtr, (char *) objv[3], &first);
+		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp,
+			(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, (char *) objv[3],
+			&first);
 	    } else {
-		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
-			itemPtr, Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL), &first);
+		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp,
+			(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+			&first);
 	    }
 	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
 		goto done;
 	    }
 	    if (objc == 5) {
 		if (itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) {
-		    result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
-			    itemPtr, (char *) objv[4], &last);
+		    result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp,
+			    (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, (char *) objv[4],
+			    &last);
 		} else {
-		    result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
-			    itemPtr, Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[4], NULL), &last);
+		    result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp,
+			    (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr,
+			    Tcl_GetString(objv[4]), &last);
 		}
 		if (result != TCL_OK) {
 		    goto done;
@@ -1063,10 +1051,10 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Redraw both item's old and new areas:  it's possible
-	     * that a delete could result in a new area larger than
-	     * the old area. Except if the insertProc sets the
-	     * TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW flag, nothing more needs to be done.
+	     * Redraw both item's old and new areas: it's possible that a
+	     * delete could result in a new area larger than the old area.
+	     * Except if the insertProc sets the TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW flag,
+	     * nothing more needs to be done.
 	     */
 
 	    x1 = itemPtr->x1; y1 = itemPtr->y1;
@@ -1082,22 +1070,13 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    itemPtr->redraw_flags &= ~TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_DELETE: {
+    }
+    case CANV_DELETE: {
 	int i;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
 
 	for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	    for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[i], &search);
-		itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-	    if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[i], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-		itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(searchPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	    FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[i], &searchPtr, goto done) {
 		EventuallyRedrawItem((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr);
 		if (canvasPtr->bindingTable != NULL) {
 		    Tk_DeleteAllBindings(canvasPtr->bindingTable,
@@ -1109,7 +1088,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		    ckfree((char *) itemPtr->tagPtr);
 		}
 		entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&canvasPtr->idTable,
-			(char *) itemPtr->id);
+			(char *) INT2PTR(itemPtr->id));
 		Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entryPtr);
 		if (itemPtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
 		    itemPtr->nextPtr->prevPtr = itemPtr->prevPtr;
@@ -1148,8 +1127,8 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_DTAG: {
+    }
+    case CANV_DTAG: {
 	Tk_Uid tag;
 	int i;
 
@@ -1159,20 +1138,11 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    goto done;
 	}
 	if (objc == 4) {
-	    tag = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL));
+	    tag = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
 	} else {
-	    tag = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL));
+	    tag = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[2], &search);
-		itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-            goto done;
-        }
-        for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-                itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(searchPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done) {
 	    for (i = itemPtr->numTags-1; i >= 0; i--) {
 		if (itemPtr->tagPtr[i] == tag) {
 		    itemPtr->tagPtr[i] = itemPtr->tagPtr[itemPtr->numTags-1];
@@ -1181,22 +1151,21 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_FIND: {
+    }
+    case CANV_FIND:
 	if (objc < 3) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "searchCommand ?arg arg ...?");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	result = FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, objc, objv, (Tcl_Obj *) NULL, 2);
+	result = FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, objc, objv, NULL, 2);
 #else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-	result = FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, objc, objv,
-	    (Tcl_Obj *) NULL, 2, &searchPtr);
+	result = FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, objc, objv, NULL, 2,
+		&searchPtr);
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_FOCUS: {
+    case CANV_FOCUS:
 	if (objc > 3) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?tagOrId?");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1206,7 +1175,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	if (objc == 2) {
 	    if (itemPtr != NULL) {
 		char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-		
+
 		sprintf(buf, "%d", itemPtr->id);
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	    }
@@ -1215,20 +1184,11 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	if ((itemPtr != NULL) && (canvasPtr->textInfo.gotFocus)) {
 	    EventuallyRedrawItem((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr);
 	}
-	if (Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL)[0] == 0) {
+	if (Tcl_GetString(objv[2])[0] == 0) {
 	    canvasPtr->textInfo.focusItemPtr = NULL;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[2], &search);
-		itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-            goto done;
-        }
-        for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-                itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(searchPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done) {
 	    if (itemPtr->typePtr->icursorProc != NULL) {
 		break;
 	    }
@@ -1241,21 +1201,13 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    EventuallyRedrawItem((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr);
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_GETTAGS: {
+    case CANV_GETTAGS:
 	if (objc != 3) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tagOrId");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[2], &search);
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-            goto done;
-        }
-        itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done);
 	if (itemPtr != NULL) {
 	    int i;
 	    for (i = 0; i < itemPtr->numTags; i++) {
@@ -1263,8 +1215,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_ICURSOR: {
+    case CANV_ICURSOR: {
 	int index;
 
 	if (objc != 4) {
@@ -1272,26 +1223,19 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[2], &search);
-		itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-            goto done;
-        }
-        for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-                itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(searchPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done) {
 	    if ((itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc == NULL)
 		    || (itemPtr->typePtr->icursorProc == NULL)) {
 		goto done;
 	    }
 	    if (itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) {
-		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
-			itemPtr, (char *) objv[3], &index);
+		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp,
+			(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, (char *) objv[3],
+			&index);
 	    } else {
-		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
-			itemPtr, Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL), &index);
+		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp,
+			(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+			&index);
 	    }
 	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
 		goto done;
@@ -1304,9 +1248,8 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_INDEX: {
-
+    }
+    case CANV_INDEX: {
 	int index;
 	char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
 
@@ -1315,23 +1258,14 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[2], &search);
-		itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-            goto done;
-        }
-        for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-                itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(searchPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done) {
 	    if (itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc != NULL) {
 		break;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (itemPtr == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't find an indexable item \"",
-		    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL), "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "\"", NULL);
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
@@ -1340,7 +1274,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		    itemPtr, (char *) objv[3], &index);
 	} else {
 	    result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
-		    itemPtr, Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL), &index);
+		    itemPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index);
 	}
 	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto done;
@@ -1348,8 +1282,8 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	sprintf(buf, "%d", index);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_INSERT: {
+    }
+    case CANV_INSERT: {
 	int beforeThis;
 	int x1,x2,y1,y2;
 
@@ -1358,37 +1292,29 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[2], &search);
-		itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-            goto done;
-        }
-        for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-                itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(searchPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done) {
 	    if ((itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc == NULL)
 		    || (itemPtr->typePtr->insertProc == NULL)) {
 		continue;
 	    }
 	    if (itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) {
-		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
-			itemPtr, (char *) objv[3], &beforeThis);
+		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp,
+			(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, (char *) objv[3],
+			&beforeThis);
 	    } else {
-		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
-			itemPtr, Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL), &beforeThis);
+		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp,
+			(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+			&beforeThis);
 	    }
 	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
 		goto done;
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Redraw both item's old and new areas:  it's possible
-	     * that an insertion could result in a new area either
-	     * larger or smaller than the old area. Except if the
-	     * insertProc sets the TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW flag, nothing
-	     * more needs to be done.
+	     * Redraw both item's old and new areas: it's possible that an
+	     * insertion could result in a new area either larger or smaller
+	     * than the old area. Except if the insertProc sets the
+	     * TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW flag, nothing more needs to be done.
 	     */
 
 	    x1 = itemPtr->x1; y1 = itemPtr->y1;
@@ -1399,7 +1325,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 			itemPtr, beforeThis, (char *) objv[4]);
 	    } else {
 		(*itemPtr->typePtr->insertProc)((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
-			itemPtr, beforeThis, Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[4], NULL));
+			itemPtr, beforeThis, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
 	    }
 	    if (!(itemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW)) {
 		Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
@@ -1409,48 +1335,31 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    itemPtr->redraw_flags &= ~TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW;
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_ITEMCGET: {
+    }
+    case CANV_ITEMCGET:
 	if (objc != 4) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tagOrId option");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[2], &search);
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-            goto done;
-        }
-        itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done);
 	if (itemPtr != NULL) {
 	    result = Tk_ConfigureValue(canvasPtr->interp, canvasPtr->tkwin,
 		    itemPtr->typePtr->configSpecs, (char *) itemPtr,
-		    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL), 0);
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), 0);
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_ITEMCONFIGURE: {
+    case CANV_ITEMCONFIGURE:
 	if (objc < 3) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tagOrId ?option value ...?");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[2], &search);
-		itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-            goto done;
-        }
-        for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-                itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(searchPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done) {
 	    if (objc == 3) {
 		result = Tk_ConfigureInfo(canvasPtr->interp, canvasPtr->tkwin,
 			itemPtr->typePtr->configSpecs, (char *) itemPtr,
-			(char *) NULL, 0);
+			NULL, 0);
 	    } else if (objc == 4) {
 		result = Tk_ConfigureInfo(canvasPtr->interp, canvasPtr->tkwin,
 			itemPtr->typePtr->configSpecs, (char *) itemPtr,
@@ -1458,15 +1367,17 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    } else {
 		EventuallyRedrawItem((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr);
 		if (itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) {
-		result = (*itemPtr->typePtr->configProc)(interp,
-			(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objc-3, objv+3,
-			TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
+		    result = (*itemPtr->typePtr->configProc)(interp,
+			    (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objc-3, objv+3,
+			    TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
 		} else {
-		CONST char **args = GetStringsFromObjs(objc-3, objv+3);
-		result = (*itemPtr->typePtr->configProc)(interp,
-			(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objc-3, (Tcl_Obj **) args,
-			TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
-		if (args) ckfree((char *) args);
+		    CONST char **args = TkGetStringsFromObjs(objc-3, objv+3);
+		    result = (*itemPtr->typePtr->configProc)(interp,
+			    (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, objc-3,
+			    (Tcl_Obj **) args, TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
+		    if (args != NULL) {
+			ckfree((char *) args);
+		    }
 		}
 		EventuallyRedrawItem((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr);
 		canvasPtr->flags |= REPICK_NEEDED;
@@ -1476,8 +1387,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_LOWER: {
+    case CANV_LOWER: {
 	Tk_Item *itemPtr;
 
 	if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
@@ -1487,24 +1397,16 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * First find the item just after which we'll insert the
-	 * named items.
+	 * First find the item just after which we'll insert the named items.
 	 */
 
 	if (objc == 3) {
 	    itemPtr = NULL;
 	} else {
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	    itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[3], &search);
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-            if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[3], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-                goto done;
-            }
-            itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	    FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[3], &searchPtr, goto done);
 	    if (itemPtr == NULL) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "tag \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
-			"\" doesn't match any items", (char *) NULL);
+			"\" doesn't match any items", NULL);
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
@@ -1513,13 +1415,11 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
 	RelinkItems(canvasPtr, objv[2], itemPtr);
 #else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if ((result = RelinkItems(canvasPtr, objv[2], itemPtr, &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-            goto done;
-        }
+	result = RelinkItems(canvasPtr, objv[2], itemPtr, &searchPtr);
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_MOVE: {
+    }
+    case CANV_MOVE: {
 	double xAmount, yAmount;
 
 	if (objc != 5) {
@@ -1533,16 +1433,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[2], &search);
-		itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-            goto done;
-        }
-        for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-                itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(searchPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done) {
 	    EventuallyRedrawItem((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr);
 	    (void) (*itemPtr->typePtr->translateProc)((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
 		    itemPtr,  xAmount, yAmount);
@@ -1550,14 +1441,17 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    canvasPtr->flags |= REPICK_NEEDED;
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_POSTSCRIPT: {
-	CONST char **args = GetStringsFromObjs(objc, objv);
+    }
+    case CANV_POSTSCRIPT: {
+	CONST char **args = TkGetStringsFromObjs(objc, objv);
+
 	result = TkCanvPostscriptCmd(canvasPtr, interp, objc, args);
-	if (args) ckfree((char *) args);
+	if (args != NULL) {
+	    ckfree((char *) args);
+	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_RAISE: {
+    }
+    case CANV_RAISE: {
 	Tk_Item *prevPtr;
 
 	if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
@@ -1567,29 +1461,19 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * First find the item just after which we'll insert the
-	 * named items.
+	 * First find the item just after which we'll insert the named items.
 	 */
 
 	if (objc == 3) {
 	    prevPtr = canvasPtr->lastItemPtr;
 	} else {
 	    prevPtr = NULL;
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	    for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[3], &search);
-		    itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-            if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[3], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-                goto done;
-            }
-            for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-                    itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(searchPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	    FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[3], &searchPtr, goto done) {
 		prevPtr = itemPtr;
 	    }
 	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "tagOrId \"", Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL),
-			"\" doesn't match any items", (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "tagOrId \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+			"\" doesn't match any items", NULL);
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
@@ -1597,14 +1481,11 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
 	RelinkItems(canvasPtr, objv[2], prevPtr);
 #else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        result = RelinkItems(canvasPtr, objv[2], prevPtr, &searchPtr);
-        if (result != TCL_OK) {
-            goto done;
-        }
+	result = RelinkItems(canvasPtr, objv[2], prevPtr, &searchPtr);
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_SCALE: {
+    }
+    case CANV_SCALE: {
 	double xOrigin, yOrigin, xScale, yScale;
 
 	if (objc != 7) {
@@ -1626,16 +1507,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[2], &search);
-		itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-            goto done;
-        }
-        for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-                itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(searchPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done) {
 	    EventuallyRedrawItem((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr);
 	    (void) (*itemPtr->typePtr->scaleProc)((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
 		    itemPtr, xOrigin, yOrigin, xScale, yScale);
@@ -1643,9 +1515,9 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    canvasPtr->flags |= REPICK_NEEDED;
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_SCAN: {
-	int x, y, gain=10;
+    }
+    case CANV_SCAN: {
+	int x, y, gain = 10;
 	static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
 	    "mark", "dragto", NULL
 	};
@@ -1687,8 +1559,8 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, newXOrigin, newYOrigin);
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_SELECT: {
+    }
+    case CANV_SELECT: {
 	int index, optionindex;
 	static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
 	    "adjust", "clear", "from", "item", "to", NULL
@@ -1703,16 +1575,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    goto done;
 	}
 	if (objc >= 4) {
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	    for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[3], &search);
-		    itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-            if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[3], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-                goto done;
-            }
-            for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-                    itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(searchPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	    FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[3], &searchPtr, goto done) {
 		if ((itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc != NULL)
 			&& (itemPtr->typePtr->selectionProc != NULL)){
 		    break;
@@ -1721,30 +1584,32 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    if (itemPtr == NULL) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
 			"can't find an indexable and selectable item \"",
-			Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL), "\"", (char *) NULL);
+			Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "\"", NULL);
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (objc == 5) {
 	    if (itemPtr->typePtr->alwaysRedraw & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) {
-		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
-			itemPtr, (char *) objv[4], &index);
+		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp,
+			(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, (char *) objv[4],
+			&index);
 	    } else {
-		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
-			itemPtr, Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[4], NULL), &index);
+		result = itemPtr->typePtr->indexProc(interp,
+			(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]),
+			&index);
 	    }
 	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
 		goto done;
 	    }
 	}
-	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], optionStrings, "select option", 0,
-		&optionindex) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], optionStrings,
+		"select option", 0, &optionindex) != TCL_OK) {
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
 	switch ((enum options) optionindex) {
-	  case CANV_ADJUST: {
+	case CANV_ADJUST:
 	    if (objc != 5) {
 		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagOrId index");
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1762,10 +1627,9 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	    CanvasSelectTo(canvasPtr, itemPtr, index);
 	    break;
-	  }
-	  case CANV_CLEAR: {
+	case CANV_CLEAR:
 	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, 3, objv, (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
@@ -1776,8 +1640,7 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	    goto done;
 	    break;
-	  }
-	  case CANV_FROM: {
+	case CANV_FROM:
 	    if (objc != 5) {
 		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagOrId index");
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1786,22 +1649,18 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    canvasPtr->textInfo.anchorItemPtr = itemPtr;
 	    canvasPtr->textInfo.selectAnchor = index;
 	    break;
-	  }
-	  case CANV_ITEM: {
+	case CANV_ITEM:
 	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
 	    if (canvasPtr->textInfo.selItemPtr != NULL) {
-		char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-		
-		sprintf(buf, "%d", canvasPtr->textInfo.selItemPtr->id);
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+			Tcl_NewIntObj(canvasPtr->textInfo.selItemPtr->id));
 	    }
 	    break;
-	  }
-	  case CANV_TO: {
+	case CANV_TO:
 	    if (objc != 5) {
 		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tagOrId index");
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1809,30 +1668,21 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	    CanvasSelectTo(canvasPtr, itemPtr, index);
 	    break;
-	  }
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_TYPE: {
+    }
+    case CANV_TYPE:
 	if (objc != 3) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tag");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, objv[2], &search);
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if ((result = TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, objv[2], &searchPtr)) != TCL_OK) {
-            goto done;
-        }
-        itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(searchPtr);
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto done);
 	if (itemPtr != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, itemPtr->typePtr->name, TCL_STATIC);
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_XVIEW: {
+    case CANV_XVIEW: {
 	int count, type;
 	int newX = 0;		/* Initialization needed only to prevent
 				 * gcc warnings. */
@@ -1845,84 +1695,89 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		    - canvasPtr->inset, canvasPtr->scrollX1,
 		    canvasPtr->scrollX2));
 	} else {
-	    CONST char **args = GetStringsFromObjs(objc, objv);
+	    CONST char **args = TkGetStringsFromObjs(objc, objv);
 	    type = Tk_GetScrollInfo(interp, objc, args, &fraction, &count);
-	    if (args) ckfree((char *) args);
+	    if (args != NULL) {
+		ckfree((char *) args);
+	    }
 	    switch (type) {
-		case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		    goto done;
-		case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
-		    newX = canvasPtr->scrollX1 - canvasPtr->inset
-			    + (int) (fraction * (canvasPtr->scrollX2
-			    - canvasPtr->scrollX1) + 0.5);
-		    break;
-		case TK_SCROLL_PAGES:
-		    newX = (int) (canvasPtr->xOrigin + count * .9
-			    * (Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin) - 2*canvasPtr->inset));
-		    break;
-		case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
-		    if (canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement > 0) {
-			newX = canvasPtr->xOrigin
-				+ count*canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement;
-		    } else {
-			newX = (int) (canvasPtr->xOrigin + count * .1
-				* (Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin)
-				- 2*canvasPtr->inset));
-		    }
-		    break;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
+		goto done;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
+		newX = canvasPtr->scrollX1 - canvasPtr->inset
+			+ (int) (fraction * (canvasPtr->scrollX2
+			- canvasPtr->scrollX1) + 0.5);
+		break;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_PAGES:
+		newX = (int) (canvasPtr->xOrigin + count * .9
+			* (Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin) - 2*canvasPtr->inset));
+		break;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
+		if (canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement > 0) {
+		    newX = canvasPtr->xOrigin
+			    + count*canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement;
+		} else {
+		    newX = (int) (canvasPtr->xOrigin + count * .1
+			    * (Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin)
+			    - 2*canvasPtr->inset));
+		}
+		break;
 	    }
 	    CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, newX, canvasPtr->yOrigin);
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_YVIEW: {
+    }
+    case CANV_YVIEW: {
 	int count, type;
 	int newY = 0;		/* Initialization needed only to prevent
 				 * gcc warnings. */
 	double fraction;
 
 	if (objc == 2) {
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,ScrollFractions(\
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ScrollFractions(
 		    canvasPtr->yOrigin + canvasPtr->inset,
 		    canvasPtr->yOrigin + Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin)
-		    - canvasPtr->inset, canvasPtr->scrollY1,
-		    canvasPtr->scrollY2));
+		    - canvasPtr->inset,
+		    canvasPtr->scrollY1, canvasPtr->scrollY2));
 	} else {
-	    CONST char **args = GetStringsFromObjs(objc, objv);
+	    CONST char **args = TkGetStringsFromObjs(objc, objv);
 	    type = Tk_GetScrollInfo(interp, objc, args, &fraction, &count);
-	    if (args) ckfree((char *) args);
+	    if (args != NULL) {
+		ckfree((char *) args);
+	    }
 	    switch (type) {
-		case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		    goto done;
-		case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
-		    newY = canvasPtr->scrollY1 - canvasPtr->inset
-			    + (int) (fraction*(canvasPtr->scrollY2
-			    - canvasPtr->scrollY1) + 0.5);
-		    break;
-		case TK_SCROLL_PAGES:
-		    newY = (int) (canvasPtr->yOrigin + count * .9
+	    case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
+		goto done;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
+		newY = canvasPtr->scrollY1 - canvasPtr->inset
+			+ (int) (fraction*(canvasPtr->scrollY2
+			- canvasPtr->scrollY1) + 0.5);
+		break;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_PAGES:
+		newY = (int) (canvasPtr->yOrigin + count * .9
+			* (Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin)
+			- 2*canvasPtr->inset));
+		break;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
+		if (canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement > 0) {
+		    newY = canvasPtr->yOrigin
+			    + count*canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement;
+		} else {
+		    newY = (int) (canvasPtr->yOrigin + count * .1
 			    * (Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin)
 			    - 2*canvasPtr->inset));
-		    break;
-		case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
-		    if (canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement > 0) {
-			newY = canvasPtr->yOrigin
-				+ count*canvasPtr->yScrollIncrement;
-		    } else {
-			newY = (int) (canvasPtr->yOrigin + count * .1
-				* (Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin)
-				- 2*canvasPtr->inset));
-		    }
-		    break;
+		}
+		break;
 	    }
 	    CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, canvasPtr->xOrigin, newY);
 	}
 	break;
-      }
     }
-    done:
+    }
+
+  done:
 #ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
     TagSearchDestroy(searchPtr);
 #endif /* not USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
@@ -1935,9 +1790,9 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * DestroyCanvas --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a canvas at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	This function is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to clean
+ *	up the internal structure of a canvas at a safe time (when no-one is
+ *	using it anymore).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1949,8 +1804,8 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyCanvas(memPtr)
-    char *memPtr;		/* Info about canvas widget. */
+DestroyCanvas(
+    char *memPtr)		/* Info about canvas widget. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) memPtr;
     Tk_Item *itemPtr;
@@ -1974,9 +1829,8 @@ DestroyCanvas(memPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling,
-     * then let Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related
-     * stuff.
+     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let
+     * Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
      */
 
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&canvasPtr->idTable);
@@ -1990,7 +1844,7 @@ DestroyCanvas(memPtr)
 	TagSearchExprDestroy(expr);
 	expr = next;
     }
-#endif
+#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
     Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(canvasPtr->insertBlinkHandler);
     if (canvasPtr->bindingTable != NULL) {
 	Tk_DeleteBindingTable(canvasPtr->bindingTable);
@@ -2005,33 +1859,33 @@ DestroyCanvas(memPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureCanvas --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an objv/objc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a canvas widget.
+ *	This function is called to process an objv/objc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) a canvas
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width,
- *	etc. get set for canvasPtr;  old resources get freed,
- *	if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width, etc. get set
+ *	for canvasPtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureCanvas(interp, canvasPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    TkCanvas *canvasPtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or may
-				 * not already have values for some fields. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of valid entries in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
+ConfigureCanvas(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr,	/* Information about widget; may or may not
+				 * already have values for some fields. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of valid entries in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Argument objects. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
 {
     XGCValues gcValues;
-    GC new;
+    GC newGC;
+    Tk_State old_canvas_state=canvasPtr->canvas_state;
 
     if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, canvasPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
 	    objc, (CONST char **) objv, (char *) canvasPtr,
@@ -2040,9 +1894,8 @@ ConfigureCanvas(interp, canvasPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * A few options need special processing, such as setting the
-     * background from a 3-D border and creating a GC for copying
-     * bits to the screen.
+     * A few options need special processing, such as setting the background
+     * from a 3-D border and creating a GC for copying bits to the screen.
      */
 
     Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(canvasPtr->tkwin, canvasPtr->bgBorder);
@@ -2055,12 +1908,33 @@ ConfigureCanvas(interp, canvasPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     gcValues.function = GXcopy;
     gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
     gcValues.foreground = Tk_3DBorderColor(canvasPtr->bgBorder)->pixel;
-    new = Tk_GetGC(canvasPtr->tkwin,
+    newGC = Tk_GetGC(canvasPtr->tkwin,
 	    GCFunction|GCGraphicsExposures|GCForeground, &gcValues);
     if (canvasPtr->pixmapGC != None) {
 	Tk_FreeGC(canvasPtr->display, canvasPtr->pixmapGC);
     }
-    canvasPtr->pixmapGC = new;
+    canvasPtr->pixmapGC = newGC;
+
+    /*
+     * Reconfigure items to reflect changed state disabled/normal.
+     */
+
+    if ( old_canvas_state != canvasPtr->canvas_state ) {
+	Tk_Item *itemPtr;
+	int result;
+
+	for ( itemPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr; itemPtr != NULL;
+	    	    	    itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if ( itemPtr->state == TK_STATE_NULL ) {
+		result = (*itemPtr->typePtr->configProc)(canvasPtr->interp,
+			(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, itemPtr, 0, NULL,
+			TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
+		if (result != TCL_OK) {
+		    Tcl_ResetResult(canvasPtr->interp);
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    }
 
     /*
      * Reset the desired dimensions for the window.
@@ -2070,8 +1944,8 @@ ConfigureCanvas(interp, canvasPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	    canvasPtr->height + 2*canvasPtr->inset);
 
     /*
-     * Restart the cursor timing sequence in case the on-time or off-time
-     * just changed.
+     * Restart the cursor timing sequence in case the on-time or off-time just
+     * changed.
      */
 
     if (canvasPtr->textInfo.gotFocus) {
@@ -2096,7 +1970,7 @@ ConfigureCanvas(interp, canvasPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	}
 	if (argc2 != 4) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad scrollRegion \"",
-		    canvasPtr->regionString, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    canvasPtr->regionString, "\"", NULL);
 	    badRegion:
 	    ckfree(canvasPtr->regionString);
 	    ckfree((char *) argv2);
@@ -2133,8 +2007,8 @@ ConfigureCanvas(interp, canvasPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Reset the canvas's origin (this is a no-op unless confine
-     * mode has just been turned on or the scroll region has changed).
+     * Reset the canvas's origin (this is a no-op unless confine mode has just
+     * been turned on or the scroll region has changed).
      */
 
     CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, canvasPtr->xOrigin, canvasPtr->yOrigin);
@@ -2151,24 +2025,24 @@ ConfigureCanvas(interp, canvasPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * CanvasWorldChanged --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way and the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts
- *	and determine its new geometry.
+ *	This function is called when the world has changed in some way and the
+ *	widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine its
+ *	new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configures all items in the canvas with a empty argc/argv, for
- *	the side effect of causing all the items to recompute their
- *	geometry and to be redisplayed.
+ *	Configures all items in the canvas with a empty argc/argv, for the
+ *	side effect of causing all the items to recompute their geometry and
+ *	to be redisplayed.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 static void
-CanvasWorldChanged(instanceData)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about widget. */
+CanvasWorldChanged(
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr;
     Tk_Item *itemPtr;
@@ -2196,9 +2070,9 @@ CanvasWorldChanged(instanceData)
  *
  * DisplayCanvas --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws the contents of a canvas window.
- *	It is invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs
- *	when there's nothing else for the application to do.
+ *	This function redraws the contents of a canvas window. It is invoked
+ *	as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs when there's nothing else
+ *	for the application to do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2210,8 +2084,8 @@ CanvasWorldChanged(instanceData)
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayCanvas(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about widget. */
+DisplayCanvas(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = canvasPtr->tkwin;
@@ -2228,8 +2102,8 @@ DisplayCanvas(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Choose a new current item if that is needed (this could cause
-     * event handlers to be invoked).
+     * Choose a new current item if that is needed (this could cause event
+     * handlers to be invoked).
      */
 
     while (canvasPtr->flags & REPICK_NEEDED) {
@@ -2244,9 +2118,9 @@ DisplayCanvas(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Scan through the item list, registering the bounding box
-     * for all items that didn't do that for the final coordinates
-     * yet. This can be determined by the FORCE_REDRAW flag.
+     * Scan through the item list, registering the bounding box for all items
+     * that didn't do that for the final coordinates yet. This can be
+     * determined by the FORCE_REDRAW flag.
      */
 
     for (itemPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr; itemPtr != NULL;
@@ -2258,8 +2132,8 @@ DisplayCanvas(clientData)
 	}
     }
     /*
-     * Compute the intersection between the area that needs redrawing
-     * and the area that's visible on the screen.
+     * Compute the intersection between the area that needs redrawing and the
+     * area that's visible on the screen.
      */
 
     if ((canvasPtr->redrawX1 < canvasPtr->redrawX2)
@@ -2283,43 +2157,39 @@ DisplayCanvas(clientData)
 	if ((screenX1 >= screenX2) || (screenY1 >= screenY2)) {
 	    goto borders;
 	}
-    
+
 	width = screenX2 - screenX1;
 	height = screenY2 - screenY1;
 
 #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
 	/*
-	 * Redrawing is done in a temporary pixmap that is allocated
-	 * here and freed at the end of the procedure.  All drawing
-	 * is done to the pixmap, and the pixmap is copied to the
-	 * screen at the end of the procedure. The temporary pixmap
-	 * serves two purposes:
+	 * Redrawing is done in a temporary pixmap that is allocated here and
+	 * freed at the end of the function. All drawing is done to the
+	 * pixmap, and the pixmap is copied to the screen at the end of the
+	 * function. The temporary pixmap serves two purposes:
 	 *
-	 * 1. It provides a smoother visual effect (no clearing and
-	 *    gradual redraw will be visible to users).
-	 * 2. It allows us to redraw only the objects that overlap
-	 *    the redraw area.  Otherwise incorrect results could
-	 *	  occur from redrawing things that stick outside of
-	 *	  the redraw area (we'd have to redraw everything in
-	 *    order to make the overlaps look right).
+	 * 1. It provides a smoother visual effect (no clearing and gradual
+	 *    redraw will be visible to users).
+	 * 2. It allows us to redraw only the objects that overlap the redraw
+	 *    area. Otherwise incorrect results could occur from redrawing
+	 *    things that stick outside of the redraw area (we'd have to
+	 *    redraw everything in order to make the overlaps look right).
 	 *
 	 * Some tricky points about the pixmap:
 	 *
-	 * 1. We only allocate a large enough pixmap to hold the
-	 *    area that has to be redisplayed.  This saves time in
-	 *    in the X server for large objects that cover much
-	 *    more than the area being redisplayed:  only the area
-	 *    of the pixmap will actually have to be redrawn.
-	 * 2. Some X servers (e.g. the one for DECstations) have troubles
-	 *    with characters that overlap an edge of the pixmap (on the
-	 *    DEC servers, as of 8/18/92, such characters are drawn one
-	 *    pixel too far to the right).  To handle this problem,
-	 *    make the pixmap a bit larger than is absolutely needed
-	 *    so that for normal-sized fonts the characters that overlap
-	 *    the edge of the pixmap will be outside the area we care
-	 *    about.
+	 * 1. We only allocate a large enough pixmap to hold the area that has
+	 *    to be redisplayed. This saves time in in the X server for large
+	 *    objects that cover much more than the area being redisplayed:
+	 *    only the area of the pixmap will actually have to be redrawn.
+	 * 2. Some X servers (e.g. the one for DECstations) have troubles with
+	 *    with characters that overlap an edge of the pixmap (on the DEC
+	 *    servers, as of 8/18/92, such characters are drawn one pixel too
+	 *    far to the right). To handle this problem, make the pixmap a bit
+	 *    larger than is absolutely needed so that for normal-sized fonts
+	 *    the characters that overlap the edge of the pixmap will be
+	 *    outside the area we care about.
 	 */
-    
+
 	canvasPtr->drawableXOrigin = screenX1 - 30;
 	canvasPtr->drawableYOrigin = screenY1 - 30;
 	pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
@@ -2334,24 +2204,24 @@ DisplayCanvas(clientData)
 		screenX1 - canvasPtr->xOrigin, screenY1 - canvasPtr->yOrigin,
 		width, height);
 #endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
-    
+
 	/*
 	 * Clear the area to be redrawn.
 	 */
-    
+
 	XFillRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap, canvasPtr->pixmapGC,
 		screenX1 - canvasPtr->drawableXOrigin,
 		screenY1 - canvasPtr->drawableYOrigin, (unsigned int) width,
 		(unsigned int) height);
-    
+
 	/*
-	 * Scan through the item list, redrawing those items that need it.
-	 * An item must be redraw if either (a) it intersects the smaller
+	 * Scan through the item list, redrawing those items that need it. An
+	 * item must be redraw if either (a) it intersects the smaller
 	 * on-screen area or (b) it intersects the full canvas area and its
-	 * type requests that it be redrawn always (e.g. so subwindows can
-	 * be unmapped when they move off-screen).
+	 * type requests that it be redrawn always (e.g. so subwindows can be
+	 * unmapped when they move off-screen).
 	 */
-    
+
 	for (itemPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr; itemPtr != NULL;
 		itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if ((itemPtr->x1 >= screenX2)
@@ -2375,13 +2245,13 @@ DisplayCanvas(clientData)
 		    canvasPtr->display, pixmap, screenX1, screenY1, width,
 		    height);
 	}
-    
+
 #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
 	/*
-	 * Copy from the temporary pixmap to the screen, then free up
-	 * the temporary pixmap.
+	 * Copy from the temporary pixmap to the screen, then free up the
+	 * temporary pixmap.
 	 */
-    
+
 	XCopyArea(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
 		canvasPtr->pixmapGC,
 		screenX1 - canvasPtr->drawableXOrigin,
@@ -2398,7 +2268,7 @@ DisplayCanvas(clientData)
      * Draw the window borders, if needed.
      */
 
-    borders:
+  borders:
     if (canvasPtr->flags & REDRAW_BORDERS) {
 	canvasPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_BORDERS;
 	if (canvasPtr->borderWidth > 0) {
@@ -2426,7 +2296,7 @@ DisplayCanvas(clientData)
 	}
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     canvasPtr->flags &= ~(REDRAW_PENDING|BBOX_NOT_EMPTY);
     canvasPtr->redrawX1 = canvasPtr->redrawX2 = 0;
     canvasPtr->redrawY1 = canvasPtr->redrawY2 = 0;
@@ -2440,23 +2310,23 @@ DisplayCanvas(clientData)
  *
  * CanvasEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on canvases.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	canvases.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up.
+ *	When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-CanvasEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+CanvasEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) clientData;
 
@@ -2491,8 +2361,8 @@ CanvasEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	canvasPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBARS;
 
 	/*
-	 * The call below is needed in order to recenter the canvas if
-	 * it's confined and its scroll region is smaller than the window.
+	 * The call below is needed in order to recenter the canvas if it's
+	 * confined and its scroll region is smaller than the window.
 	 */
 
 	CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, canvasPtr->xOrigin, canvasPtr->yOrigin);
@@ -2513,9 +2383,9 @@ CanvasEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	Tk_Item *itemPtr;
 
 	/*
-	 * Special hack:  if the canvas is unmapped, then must notify
-	 * all items with "alwaysRedraw" set, so that they know that
-	 * they are no longer displayed.
+	 * Special hack: if the canvas is unmapped, then must notify all items
+	 * with "alwaysRedraw" set, so that they know that they are no longer
+	 * displayed.
 	 */
 
 	for (itemPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr; itemPtr != NULL;
@@ -2533,9 +2403,9 @@ CanvasEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * CanvasCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2547,17 +2417,17 @@ CanvasEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-CanvasCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+CanvasCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = canvasPtr->tkwin;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (tkwin != NULL) {
@@ -2571,8 +2441,8 @@ CanvasCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw --
  *
- *	Arrange for part or all of a canvas widget to redrawn at
- *	some convenient time in the future.
+ *	Arrange for part or all of a canvas widget to redrawn at some
+ *	convenient time in the future.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2584,18 +2454,20 @@ CanvasCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw(canvas, x1, y1, x2, y2)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Information about widget. */
-    int x1, y1;			/* Upper left corner of area to redraw.
-				 * Pixels on edge are redrawn. */
-    int x2, y2;			/* Lower right corner of area to redraw.
+Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about widget. */
+    int x1, int y1,		/* Upper left corner of area to redraw. Pixels
+				 * on edge are redrawn. */
+    int x2, int y2)		/* Lower right corner of area to redraw.
 				 * Pixels on edge are not redrawn. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) canvas;
+
     /*
      * If tkwin is NULL, the canvas has been destroyed, so we can't really
      * redraw it.
      */
+
     if (canvasPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
 	return;
     }
@@ -2637,8 +2509,8 @@ Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw(canvas, x1, y1, x2, y2)
  *
  * EventuallyRedrawItem --
  *
- *	Arrange for part or all of a canvas widget to redrawn at
- *	some convenient time in the future.
+ *	Arrange for part or all of a canvas widget to redrawn at some
+ *	convenient time in the future.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2650,9 +2522,9 @@ Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw(canvas, x1, y1, x2, y2)
  */
 
 static void
-EventuallyRedrawItem(canvas, itemPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Information about widget. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* item to be redrawn. */
+EventuallyRedrawItem(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about widget. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr)		/* Item to be redrawn. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) canvas;
     if ((itemPtr->x1 >= itemPtr->x2) || (itemPtr->y1 >= itemPtr->y2) ||
@@ -2698,27 +2570,26 @@ EventuallyRedrawItem(canvas, itemPtr)
  *
  * Tk_CreateItemType --
  *
- *	This procedure may be invoked to add a new kind of canvas
- *	element to the core item types supported by Tk.
+ *	This function may be invoked to add a new kind of canvas element to
+ *	the core item types supported by Tk.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	From now on, the new item type will be useable in canvas
- *	widgets (e.g. typePtr->name can be used as the item type
- *	in "create" widget commands).  If there was already a
- *	type with the same name as in typePtr, it is replaced with
- *	the new type.
+ *	From now on, the new item type will be useable in canvas widgets
+ *	(e.g. typePtr->name can be used as the item type in "create" widget
+ *	commands). If there was already a type with the same name as in
+ *	typePtr, it is replaced with the new type.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_CreateItemType(typePtr)
-    Tk_ItemType *typePtr;		/* Information about item type;
-					 * storage must be statically
-					 * allocated (must live forever). */
+Tk_CreateItemType(
+    Tk_ItemType *typePtr)	/* Information about item type; storage must
+				 * be statically allocated (must live
+				 * forever). */
 {
     Tk_ItemType *typePtr2, *prevPtr;
 
@@ -2752,14 +2623,14 @@ Tk_CreateItemType(typePtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetItemTypes --
  *
- *	This procedure returns a pointer to the list of all item
- *	types. Note that this is inherently thread-unsafe, but since
- *	item types are only ever registered very rarely this is
- *	unlikely to be a problem in practice.
+ *	This function returns a pointer to the list of all item types. Note
+ *	that this is inherently thread-unsafe, but since item types are only
+ *	ever registered very rarely this is unlikely to be a problem in
+ *	practice.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the first in the list
- *	of item types currently supported by canvases.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the first in the list of item types
+ *	currently supported by canvases.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2768,7 +2639,7 @@ Tk_CreateItemType(typePtr)
  */
 
 Tk_ItemType *
-Tk_GetItemTypes()
+Tk_GetItemTypes(void)
 {
     if (typeList == NULL) {
 	InitCanvas();
@@ -2777,13 +2648,12 @@ Tk_GetItemTypes()
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * InitCanvas --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to perform once-only-ever
- *	initialization for the module, such as setting up the type
- *	table.
+ *	This function is invoked to perform once-only-ever initialization for
+ *	the module, such as setting up the type table.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2791,11 +2661,11 @@ Tk_GetItemTypes()
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-InitCanvas()
+InitCanvas(void)
 {
     Tcl_MutexLock(&typeListMutex);
     if (typeList != NULL) {
@@ -2821,33 +2691,30 @@ InitCanvas()
  *
  * StartTagSearch --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to initiate an enumeration of
- *	all items in a given canvas that contain a given tag.
+ *	This function is called to initiate an enumeration of all items in a
+ *	given canvas that contain a given tag.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the first item in
- *	canvasPtr that matches tag, or NULL if there is no
- *	such item.  The information at *searchPtr is initialized
- *	such that successive calls to NextItem will return
- *	successive items that match tag.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the first item in canvasPtr that
+ *	matches tag, or NULL if there is no such item. The information at
+ *	*searchPtr is initialized such that successive calls to NextItem will
+ *	return successive items that match tag.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	SearchPtr is linked into a list of searches in progress
- *	on canvasPtr, so that elements can safely be deleted
- *	while the search is in progress.  EndTagSearch must be
- *	called at the end of the search to unlink searchPtr from
- *	this list.
+ *	SearchPtr is linked into a list of searches in progress on canvasPtr,
+ *	so that elements can safely be deleted while the search is in
+ *	progress. EndTagSearch must be called at the end of the search to
+ *	unlink searchPtr from this list.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static Tk_Item *
-StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, tagObj, searchPtr)
-    TkCanvas *canvasPtr;		/* Canvas whose items are to be
-					 * searched. */
-    Tcl_Obj *tagObj;			/* Object giving tag value. */
-    TagSearch *searchPtr;		/* Record describing tag search;
-					 * will be initialized here. */
+StartTagSearch(
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr,	/* Canvas whose items are to be searched. */
+    Tcl_Obj *tagObj,		/* Object giving tag value. */
+    TagSearch *searchPtr)	/* Record describing tag search; will be
+				 * initialized here. */
 {
     int id;
     Tk_Item *itemPtr, *lastPtr;
@@ -2869,10 +2736,10 @@ StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, tagObj, searchPtr)
     searchPtr->searchOver = 0;
 
     /*
-     * Find the first matching item in one of several ways. If the tag
-     * is a number then it selects the single item with the matching
-     * identifier.  In this case see if the item being requested is the
-     * hot item, in which case the search can be skipped.
+     * Find the first matching item in one of several ways. If the tag is a
+     * number then it selects the single item with the matching identifier.
+     * In this case see if the item being requested is the hot item, in which
+     * case the search can be skipped.
      */
 
     if (isdigit(UCHAR(*tag))) {
@@ -2883,7 +2750,7 @@ StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, tagObj, searchPtr)
 	id = strtoul(tag, &end, 0);
 	if (*end == 0) {
 	    itemPtr = canvasPtr->hotPtr;
-            lastPtr = canvasPtr->hotPrevPtr;
+	    lastPtr = canvasPtr->hotPrevPtr;
 	    if ((itemPtr == NULL) || (itemPtr->id != id) || (lastPtr == NULL)
 		    || (lastPtr->nextPtr != itemPtr)) {
 		dispPtr->numSlowSearches++;
@@ -2916,7 +2783,7 @@ StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, tagObj, searchPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * None of the above.  Search for an item with a matching tag.
+     * None of the above. Search for an item with a matching tag.
      */
 
     for (lastPtr = NULL, itemPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr; itemPtr != NULL;
@@ -2940,15 +2807,15 @@ StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, tagObj, searchPtr)
  *
  * NextItem --
  *
- *	This procedure returns successive items that match a given
- *	tag;  it should be called only after StartTagSearch has been
- *	used to begin a search.
+ *	This function returns successive items that match a given tag; it
+ *	should be called only after StartTagSearch has been used to begin a
+ *	search.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the next item that matches
- *	the tag specified to StartTagSearch, or NULL if no such
- *	item exists.  *SearchPtr is updated so that the next call
- *	to this procedure will return the next item.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the next item that matches the tag
+ *	specified to StartTagSearch, or NULL if no such item exists.
+ *	*SearchPtr is updated so that the next call to this function will
+ *	return the next item.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2957,9 +2824,8 @@ StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, tagObj, searchPtr)
  */
 
 static Tk_Item *
-NextItem(searchPtr)
-    TagSearch *searchPtr;		/* Record describing search in
-					 * progress. */
+NextItem(
+    TagSearch *searchPtr)	/* Record describing search in progress. */
 {
     Tk_Item *itemPtr, *lastPtr;
     int count;
@@ -2967,8 +2833,8 @@ NextItem(searchPtr)
     Tk_Uid *tagPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Find next item in list (this may not actually be a suitable
-     * one to return), and return if there are no items left.
+     * Find next item in list (this may not actually be a suitable one to
+     * return), and return if there are no items left.
      */
 
     lastPtr = searchPtr->lastPtr;
@@ -2983,10 +2849,10 @@ NextItem(searchPtr)
     }
     if (itemPtr != searchPtr->currentPtr) {
 	/*
-	 * The structure of the list has changed.  Probably the
-	 * previously-returned item was removed from the list.
-	 * In this case, don't advance lastPtr;  just return
-	 * its new successor (i.e. do nothing here).
+	 * The structure of the list has changed. Probably the previously-
+	 * returned item was removed from the list. In this case, don't
+	 * advance lastPtr; just return its new successor (i.e. do nothing
+	 * here).
 	 */
     } else {
 	lastPtr = itemPtr;
@@ -3023,29 +2889,28 @@ NextItem(searchPtr)
     return NULL;
 }
 
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+#else /* !USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * GetStaticUids --
  *
- *This procedure is invoked to return a structure filled with
- *the Uids used when doing tag searching. If it was never before
- *called in the current thread, it initializes the structure for
- *that thread (uids are only ever local to one thread [Bug
- *1114977]).
+ *	This function is invoked to return a structure filled with the Uids
+ *	used when doing tag searching. If it was never before called in the
+ *	current thread, it initializes the structure for that thread (uids are
+ *	only ever local to one thread [Bug 1114977]).
  *
  * Results:
- *None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *None.
+ *	None.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static SearchUids *
-GetStaticUids()
+GetStaticUids(void)
 {
     SearchUids *searchUids = (SearchUids *)
 	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(SearchUids));
@@ -3070,7 +2935,7 @@ GetStaticUids()
  *
  * TagSearchExprInit --
  *
- *      This procedure allocates and initializes one TagSearchExpr struct.
+ *	This function allocates and initializes one TagSearchExpr struct.
  *
  * Results:
  *
@@ -3080,8 +2945,8 @@ GetStaticUids()
  */
 
 static void
-TagSearchExprInit(exprPtrPtr)
-    TagSearchExpr **exprPtrPtr;
+TagSearchExprInit(
+    TagSearchExpr **exprPtrPtr)
 {
     TagSearchExpr* expr = *exprPtrPtr;
 
@@ -3096,67 +2961,63 @@ TagSearchExprInit(exprPtrPtr)
     expr->length = 0;
     *exprPtrPtr = expr;
 }
- 
+
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TagSearchExprDestroy --
  *
- *      This procedure destroys one TagSearchExpr structure.
+ *	This function destroys one TagSearchExpr structure.
  *
  * Results:
  *
  * Side effects:
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
-     */
+ */
 
 static void
-TagSearchExprDestroy(expr)
-    TagSearchExpr *expr;
+TagSearchExprDestroy(
+    TagSearchExpr *expr)
 {
     if (expr) {
     	if (expr->uids) {
-        	ckfree((char *)expr->uids);
+	    ckfree((char *)expr->uids);
 	}
-        ckfree((char *)expr);
+	ckfree((char *)expr);
     }
 }
-
+
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TagSearchScan --
  *
- *      This procedure is called to initiate an enumeration of
- *      all items in a given canvas that contain a tag that matches
- *      the tagOrId expression.
+ *	This function is called to initiate an enumeration of all items in a
+ *	given canvas that contain a tag that matches the tagOrId expression.
  *
  * Results:
- *      The return value indicates if the tagOrId expression
- *      was successfully scanned (syntax).
- *      The information at *searchPtr is initialized
- *      such that a call to TagSearchFirst, followed by
- *      successive calls to TagSearchNext will return items
- *      that match tag.
+ *	The return value indicates if the tagOrId expression was successfully
+ *	scanned (syntax). The information at *searchPtr is initialized such
+ *	that a call to TagSearchFirst, followed by successive calls to
+ *	TagSearchNext will return items that match tag.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      SearchPtr is linked into a list of searches in progress
- *      on canvasPtr, so that elements can safely be deleted
- *      while the search is in progress.
+ *	SearchPtr is linked into a list of searches in progress on canvasPtr,
+ *	so that elements can safely be deleted while the search is in
+ *	progress.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, tagObj, searchPtrPtr)
-    TkCanvas *canvasPtr;                /* Canvas whose items are to be
-                                         * searched. */
-    Tcl_Obj *tagObj;                    /* Object giving tag value. */
-    TagSearch **searchPtrPtr;           /* Record describing tag search;
-                                         * will be initialized here. */
+TagSearchScan(
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr,	/* Canvas whose items are to be searched. */
+    Tcl_Obj *tagObj,		/* Object giving tag value. */
+    TagSearch **searchPtrPtr)	/* Record describing tag search; will be
+				 * initialized here. */
 {
-    char *tag = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(tagObj,NULL);
+    char *tag = Tcl_GetString(tagObj);
     int i;
     TagSearch *searchPtr;
 
@@ -3165,61 +3026,78 @@ TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, tagObj, searchPtrPtr)
      */
 
     if (*searchPtrPtr) {
-        searchPtr = *searchPtrPtr;
+	searchPtr = *searchPtrPtr;
     } else {
-        /* Allocate primary search struct on first call */
-        *searchPtrPtr = searchPtr = (TagSearch *) ckalloc(sizeof(TagSearch));
+	/*
+	 * Allocate primary search struct on first call.
+	 */
+
+	*searchPtrPtr = searchPtr = (TagSearch *) ckalloc(sizeof(TagSearch));
 	searchPtr->expr = NULL;
 
-        /* Allocate buffer for rewritten tags (after de-escaping) */
-        searchPtr->rewritebufferAllocated = 100;
-        searchPtr->rewritebuffer =
-            ckalloc(searchPtr->rewritebufferAllocated);
+	/*
+	 * Allocate buffer for rewritten tags (after de-escaping).
+	 */
+
+	searchPtr->rewritebufferAllocated = 100;
+	searchPtr->rewritebuffer = ckalloc(searchPtr->rewritebufferAllocated);
     }
     TagSearchExprInit(&(searchPtr->expr));
 
-    /* How long is the tagOrId ? */
+    /*
+     * How long is the tagOrId?
+     */
+
     searchPtr->stringLength = strlen(tag);
 
-    /* Make sure there is enough buffer to hold rewritten tags */
+    /*
+     * Make sure there is enough buffer to hold rewritten tags.
+     */
+
     if ((unsigned int)searchPtr->stringLength >=
 	    searchPtr->rewritebufferAllocated) {
-        searchPtr->rewritebufferAllocated = searchPtr->stringLength + 100;
-        searchPtr->rewritebuffer =
-            ckrealloc(searchPtr->rewritebuffer,
-		    searchPtr->rewritebufferAllocated);
+	searchPtr->rewritebufferAllocated = searchPtr->stringLength + 100;
+	searchPtr->rewritebuffer =
+		ckrealloc(searchPtr->rewritebuffer,
+		searchPtr->rewritebufferAllocated);
     }
 
-    /* Initialize search */
+    /*
+     * Initialize search.
+     */
+
     searchPtr->canvasPtr = canvasPtr;
     searchPtr->searchOver = 0;
-    searchPtr->type = 0;
+    searchPtr->type = SEARCH_TYPE_EMPTY;
 
     /*
-     * Find the first matching item in one of several ways. If the tag
-     * is a number then it selects the single item with the matching
-     * identifier.  In this case see if the item being requested is the
-     * hot item, in which case the search can be skipped.
+     * Find the first matching item in one of several ways. If the tag is a
+     * number then it selects the single item with the matching identifier.
+     * In this case see if the item being requested is the hot item, in which
+     * case the search can be skipped.
      */
 
     if (searchPtr->stringLength && isdigit(UCHAR(*tag))) {
-        char *end;
+	char *end;
 
-        searchPtr->id = strtoul(tag, &end, 0);
-        if (*end == 0) {
-            searchPtr->type = 1;
-            return TCL_OK;
+	searchPtr->id = strtoul(tag, &end, 0);
+	if (*end == 0) {
+	    searchPtr->type = SEARCH_TYPE_ID;
+	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * For all other tags and tag expressions convert to a UID.
-     * This UID is kept forever, but this should be thought of
-     * as a cache rather than as a memory leak.
+     * For all other tags and tag expressions convert to a UID. This UID is
+     * kept forever, but this should be thought of as a cache rather than as a
+     * memory leak.
      */
     searchPtr->expr->uid = Tk_GetUid(tag);
 
-    /* short circuit impossible searches for null tags */
+    /*
+     * Short circuit impossible searches for null tags.
+     */
+
     if (searchPtr->stringLength == 0) {
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
@@ -3228,55 +3106,58 @@ TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, tagObj, searchPtrPtr)
      * Pre-scan tag for at least one unquoted "&&" "||" "^" "!"
      *   if not found then use string as simple tag
      */
+
     for (i = 0; i < searchPtr->stringLength ; i++) {
-        if (tag[i] == '"') {
-            i++;
-            for ( ; i < searchPtr->stringLength; i++) {
-                if (tag[i] == '\\') {
-                    i++;
-                    continue;
-                }
-                if (tag[i] == '"') {
-                    break;
-                }
-            }
-        } else {
-            if ((tag[i] == '&' && tag[i+1] == '&')
-             || (tag[i] == '|' && tag[i+1] == '|')
-             || (tag[i] == '^')
-             || (tag[i] == '!')) {
-                searchPtr->type = 4;
-                break;
-            }
-        }
+	if (tag[i] == '"') {
+	    i++;
+	    for ( ; i < searchPtr->stringLength; i++) {
+		if (tag[i] == '\\') {
+		    i++;
+		    continue;
+		}
+		if (tag[i] == '"') {
+		    break;
+		}
+	    }
+	} else if ((tag[i] == '&' && tag[i+1] == '&')
+		|| (tag[i] == '|' && tag[i+1] == '|')
+		|| (tag[i] == '^')
+		|| (tag[i] == '!')) {
+	    searchPtr->type = SEARCH_TYPE_EXPR;
+	    break;
+	}
     }
 
     searchPtr->string = tag;
     searchPtr->stringIndex = 0;
-    if (searchPtr->type == 4) {
-        /*
-         * an operator was found in the prescan, so
-         * now compile the tag expression into array of Tk_Uid
-         * flagging any syntax errors found
-         */
-	if (TagSearchScanExpr(canvasPtr->interp, searchPtr, searchPtr->expr) != TCL_OK) {
-            /* Syntax error in tag expression */
-	    /* Result message set by TagSearchScanExpr */
+    if (searchPtr->type == SEARCH_TYPE_EXPR) {
+	/*
+	 * An operator was found in the prescan, so now compile the tag
+	 * expression into array of Tk_Uid flagging any syntax errors found.
+	 */
+
+	if (TagSearchScanExpr(canvasPtr->interp, searchPtr,
+		searchPtr->expr) != TCL_OK) {
+	    /*
+	     * Syntax error in tag expression. The result message was set by
+	     * TagSearchScanExpr.
+	     */
+
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	searchPtr->expr->length = searchPtr->expr->index;
+    } else if (searchPtr->expr->uid == GetStaticUids()->allUid) {
+	/*
+	 * All items match.
+	 */
+
+	searchPtr->type = SEARCH_TYPE_ALL;
     } else {
-        if (searchPtr->expr->uid == GetStaticUids()->allUid) {
-            /*
-             * All items match.
-             */
-            searchPtr->type = 2;
-        } else {
-            /*
-             * Optimized single-tag search
-             */
-            searchPtr->type = 3;
-        }
+	/*
+	 * Optimized single-tag search
+	 */
+
+	searchPtr->type = SEARCH_TYPE_TAG;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -3286,24 +3167,26 @@ TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, tagObj, searchPtrPtr)
  *
  * TagSearchDestroy --
  *
- *      This procedure destroys any dynamic structures that
- *      may have been allocated by TagSearchScan.
+ *	This function destroys any dynamic structures that may have been
+ *	allocated by TagSearchScan.
  *
  * Results:
+ *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
+ *	Deallocates memory.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TagSearchDestroy(searchPtr)
-    TagSearch *searchPtr;               /* Record describing tag search */
+TagSearchDestroy(
+    TagSearch *searchPtr)	/* Record describing tag search */
 {
     if (searchPtr) {
-        TagSearchExprDestroy(searchPtr->expr);
-        ckfree((char *)searchPtr->rewritebuffer);
-        ckfree((char *)searchPtr);
+	TagSearchExprDestroy(searchPtr->expr);
+	ckfree((char *)searchPtr->rewritebuffer);
+	ckfree((char *)searchPtr);
     }
 }
 
@@ -3312,16 +3195,14 @@ TagSearchDestroy(searchPtr)
  *
  * TagSearchScanExpr --
  *
- *      This recursive procedure is called to scan a tag expression
- *      and compile it into an array of Tk_Uids.
+ *	This recursive function is called to scan a tag expression and compile
+ *	it into an array of Tk_Uids.
  *
  * Results:
- *      The return value indicates if the tagOrId expression
- *      was successfully scanned (syntax).
- *      The information at *searchPtr is initialized
- *      such that a call to TagSearchFirst, followed by
- *      successive calls to TagSearchNext will return items
- *      that match tag.
+ *	The return value indicates if the tagOrId expression was successfully
+ *	scanned (syntax). The information at *searchPtr is initialized such
+ *	that a call to TagSearchFirst, followed by successive calls to
+ *	TagSearchNext will return items that match tag.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *
@@ -3329,216 +3210,233 @@ TagSearchDestroy(searchPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-TagSearchScanExpr(interp, searchPtr, expr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;         /* Current interpreter. */
-    TagSearch *searchPtr;       /* Search data */
-    TagSearchExpr *expr;	/* compiled expression result */
+TagSearchScanExpr(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    TagSearch *searchPtr,	/* Search data */
+    TagSearchExpr *expr)	/* compiled expression result */
 {
-    int looking_for_tag;        /* When true, scanner expects
-                                 * next char(s) to be a tag,
-                                 * else operand expected */
-    int found_tag;              /* One or more tags found */
-    int found_endquote;         /* For quoted tag string parsing */
-    int negate_result;          /* Pending negation of next tag value */
-    char *tag;                  /* tag from tag expression string */
+    int looking_for_tag;	/* When true, scanner expects next char(s) to
+				 * be a tag, else operand expected */
+    int found_tag;		/* One or more tags found */
+    int found_endquote;		/* For quoted tag string parsing */
+    int negate_result;		/* Pending negation of next tag value */
+    char *tag;			/* Tag from tag expression string */
     char c;
     SearchUids *searchUids;	/* Collection of uids for basic search
 				 * expression terms. */
- 
+
     searchUids = GetStaticUids();
     negate_result = 0;
     found_tag = 0;
     looking_for_tag = 1;
     while (searchPtr->stringIndex < searchPtr->stringLength) {
-        c = searchPtr->string[searchPtr->stringIndex++];
+	c = searchPtr->string[searchPtr->stringIndex++];
 
-        if (expr->allocated == expr->index) {
-            expr->allocated += 15;
+	/*
+	 * Need two slots free at this point, not one. [Bug 2931374]
+	 */
+
+	if (expr->index >= expr->allocated-1) {
+	    expr->allocated += 15;
 	    if (expr->uids) {
-		expr->uids =
-                    (Tk_Uid *) ckrealloc((char *)(expr->uids),
-                    (expr->allocated)*sizeof(Tk_Uid));
+		expr->uids = (Tk_Uid *)
+			ckrealloc((char *)(expr->uids),
+			(expr->allocated)*sizeof(Tk_Uid));
 	    } else {
-		expr->uids =
-		(Tk_Uid *) ckalloc((expr->allocated)*sizeof(Tk_Uid));
+		expr->uids = (Tk_Uid *)
+			ckalloc((expr->allocated)*sizeof(Tk_Uid));
 	    }
-        }
-
-        if (looking_for_tag) {
-
-            switch (c) {
-                case ' '  :	/* ignore unquoted whitespace */
-                case '\t' :
-                case '\n' :
-                case '\r' :
-                    break;
-
-                case '!'  :	/* negate next tag or subexpr */
-                    if (looking_for_tag > 1) {
-                        Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-				"Too many '!' in tag search expression",
-				(char *) NULL);
-                        return TCL_ERROR;
-                    }
-                    looking_for_tag++;
-                    negate_result = 1;
-                    break;
-
-                case '('  :	/* scan (negated) subexpr recursively */
-                    if (negate_result) {
-                        expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->negparenUid;
-                        negate_result = 0;
-		    } else {
-                        expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->parenUid;
+	}
+
+	if (looking_for_tag) {
+
+	    switch (c) {
+	    case ' ':	/* ignore unquoted whitespace */
+	    case '\t':
+	    case '\n':
+	    case '\r':
+		break;
+
+	    case '!':	/* negate next tag or subexpr */
+		if (looking_for_tag > 1) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+			    "Too many '!' in tag search expression",
+			    NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		looking_for_tag++;
+		negate_result = 1;
+		break;
+
+	    case '(':	/* scan (negated) subexpr recursively */
+		if (negate_result) {
+		    expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->negparenUid;
+		    negate_result = 0;
+		} else {
+		    expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->parenUid;
+		}
+		if (TagSearchScanExpr(interp, searchPtr, expr) != TCL_OK) {
+		    /*
+		     * Result string should be already set by nested call to
+		     * tag_expr_scan()
+		     */
+
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		looking_for_tag = 0;
+		found_tag = 1;
+		break;
+
+	    case '"':	/* quoted tag string */
+		if (negate_result) {
+		    expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->negtagvalUid;
+		    negate_result = 0;
+		} else {
+		    expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->tagvalUid;
+		}
+		tag = searchPtr->rewritebuffer;
+		found_endquote = 0;
+		while (searchPtr->stringIndex < searchPtr->stringLength) {
+		    c = searchPtr->string[searchPtr->stringIndex++];
+		    if (c == '\\') {
+			c = searchPtr->string[searchPtr->stringIndex++];
 		    }
-                    if (TagSearchScanExpr(interp, searchPtr, expr) != TCL_OK) {
-                        /* Result string should be already set
-                         * by nested call to tag_expr_scan() */
-			return TCL_ERROR;
+		    if (c == '"') {
+			found_endquote = 1;
+			break;
 		    }
-                    looking_for_tag = 0;
-                    found_tag = 1;
-                    break;
-
-                case '"'  :	/* quoted tag string */
-                    if (negate_result) {
-                        expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->negtagvalUid;
-                        negate_result = 0;
-                    } else {
-                        expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->tagvalUid;
+		    *tag++ = c;
+		}
+		if (! found_endquote) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+			    "Missing endquote in tag search expression",
+			    NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		if (! (tag - searchPtr->rewritebuffer)) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+			    "Null quoted tag string in tag search expression",
+			    NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		*tag++ = '\0';
+		expr->uids[expr->index++] =
+			Tk_GetUid(searchPtr->rewritebuffer);
+		looking_for_tag = 0;
+		found_tag = 1;
+		break;
+
+	    case '&':	/* illegal chars when looking for tag */
+	    case '|':
+	    case '^':
+	    case ')':
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+			"Unexpected operator in tag search expression",
+			NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+
+	    default:	/* unquoted tag string */
+		if (negate_result) {
+		    expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->negtagvalUid;
+		    negate_result = 0;
+		} else {
+		    expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->tagvalUid;
+		}
+		tag = searchPtr->rewritebuffer;
+		*tag++ = c;
+
+		/*
+		 * Copy rest of tag, including any embedded whitespace.
+		 */
+
+		while (searchPtr->stringIndex < searchPtr->stringLength) {
+		    c = searchPtr->string[searchPtr->stringIndex];
+		    if (c == '!' || c == '&' || c == '|' || c == '^'
+			    || c == '(' || c == ')' || c == '"') {
+			break;
 		    }
-                    tag = searchPtr->rewritebuffer;
-                    found_endquote = 0;
-                    while (searchPtr->stringIndex < searchPtr->stringLength) {
-                        c = searchPtr->string[searchPtr->stringIndex++];
-                        if (c == '\\') {
-                            c = searchPtr->string[searchPtr->stringIndex++];
-			}
-                        if (c == '"') {
-                            found_endquote = 1;
-			    break;
-			}
-                        *tag++ = c;
-                    }
-                    if (! found_endquote) {
-                        Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-				"Missing endquote in tag search expression",
-				(char *) NULL);
-                        return TCL_ERROR;
-                    }
-                    if (! (tag - searchPtr->rewritebuffer)) {
-                        Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-                            "Null quoted tag string in tag search expression",
-                            (char *) NULL);
-                        return TCL_ERROR;
-                    }
-                    *tag++ = '\0';
-                    expr->uids[expr->index++] =
-			    Tk_GetUid(searchPtr->rewritebuffer);
-                    looking_for_tag = 0;
-                    found_tag = 1;
-                    break;
-
-                case '&'  :	/* illegal chars when looking for tag */
-                case '|'  :
-                case '^'  :
-                case ')'  :
-                    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-			    "Unexpected operator in tag search expression",
-			    (char *) NULL);
-                    return TCL_ERROR;
-
-                default :	/* unquoted tag string */
-                    if (negate_result) {
-                        expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->negtagvalUid;
-                        negate_result = 0;
-                    } else {
-                        expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->tagvalUid;
-                    }
-                    tag = searchPtr->rewritebuffer;
-                    *tag++ = c;
-                    /* copy rest of tag, including any embedded whitespace */
-                    while (searchPtr->stringIndex < searchPtr->stringLength) {
-                        c = searchPtr->string[searchPtr->stringIndex];
-                        if (c == '!' || c == '&' || c == '|' || c == '^'
-				|| c == '(' || c == ')' || c == '"') {
-			    break;
-                        }
-                        *tag++ = c;
-                        searchPtr->stringIndex++;
-                    }
-                    /* remove trailing whitespace */
-                    while (1) {
-                        c = *--tag;
-                        /* there must have been one non-whitespace char,
-                         *  so this will terminate */
-                        if (c != ' ' && c != '\t' && c != '\n' && c != '\r') {
-                            break;
-			}
-                    }
-                    *++tag = '\0';
-                    expr->uids[expr->index++] =
-			    Tk_GetUid(searchPtr->rewritebuffer);
-                    looking_for_tag = 0;
-                    found_tag = 1;
-            }
-
-        } else {    /* ! looking_for_tag */
-
-            switch (c) {
-                case ' '  :	/* ignore whitespace */
-                case '\t' :
-                case '\n' :
-                case '\r' :
-                    break;
-
-                case '&'  :	/* AND operator */
-                    c = searchPtr->string[searchPtr->stringIndex++];
-                    if (c != '&') {
-                        Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-                                "Singleton '&' in tag search expression",
-                                (char *) NULL);
-                        return TCL_ERROR;
-                    }
-                    expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->andUid;
-                    looking_for_tag = 1;
-                    break;
-
-                case '|'  :	/* OR operator */
-                    c = searchPtr->string[searchPtr->stringIndex++];
-                    if (c != '|') {
-                        Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-                                "Singleton '|' in tag search expression",
-                                (char *) NULL);
-                        return TCL_ERROR;
-                    }
-                    expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->orUid;
-                    looking_for_tag = 1;
-                    break;
-
-                case '^'  :	/* XOR operator */
-                    expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->xorUid;
-                    looking_for_tag = 1;
-                    break;
-
-                case ')'  :	/* end subexpression */
-                    expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->endparenUid;
-                    goto breakwhile;
-
-                default   :	/* syntax error */
-                    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-			    "Invalid boolean operator in tag search expression",
-			    (char *) NULL);
-                    return TCL_ERROR;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-    breakwhile:
+		    *tag++ = c;
+		    searchPtr->stringIndex++;
+		}
+
+		/*
+		 * Remove trailing whitespace.
+		 */
+
+		while (1) {
+		    c = *--tag;
+
+		    /*
+		     * There must have been one non-whitespace char, so this
+		     * will terminate.
+		     */
+
+		    if (c != ' ' && c != '\t' && c != '\n' && c != '\r') {
+			break;
+		    }
+		}
+		*++tag = '\0';
+		expr->uids[expr->index++] =
+			Tk_GetUid(searchPtr->rewritebuffer);
+		looking_for_tag = 0;
+		found_tag = 1;
+	    }
+
+	} else {    /* ! looking_for_tag */
+	    switch (c) {
+	    case ' ':	/* ignore whitespace */
+	    case '\t':
+	    case '\n':
+	    case '\r':
+		break;
+
+	    case '&':	/* AND operator */
+		c = searchPtr->string[searchPtr->stringIndex++];
+		if (c != '&') {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+			    "Singleton '&' in tag search expression",
+			    NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->andUid;
+		looking_for_tag = 1;
+		break;
+
+	    case '|':	/* OR operator */
+		c = searchPtr->string[searchPtr->stringIndex++];
+		if (c != '|') {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+			    "Singleton '|' in tag search expression",
+			    NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->orUid;
+		looking_for_tag = 1;
+		break;
+
+	    case '^'  :	/* XOR operator */
+		expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->xorUid;
+		looking_for_tag = 1;
+		break;
+
+	    case ')'  :	/* end subexpression */
+		expr->uids[expr->index++] = searchUids->endparenUid;
+		goto breakwhile;
+
+	    default:	/* syntax error */
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+			"Invalid boolean operator in tag search expression",
+			NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+  breakwhile:
     if (found_tag && ! looking_for_tag) {
-        return TCL_OK;
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Missing tag in tag search expression",
-	    (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Missing tag in tag search expression", NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -3547,11 +3445,11 @@ TagSearchScanExpr(interp, searchPtr, expr)
  *
  * TagSearchEvalExpr --
  *
- *      This recursive procedure is called to eval a tag expression.
+ *	This recursive function is called to eval a tag expression.
  *
  * Results:
- *      The return value indicates if the tagOrId expression
- *      successfully matched the tags of the current item.
+ *	The return value indicates if the tagOrId expression successfully
+ *	matched the tags of the current item.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *
@@ -3559,18 +3457,17 @@ TagSearchScanExpr(interp, searchPtr, expr)
  */
 
 static int
-TagSearchEvalExpr(expr, itemPtr)
-    TagSearchExpr *expr;        /* Search expression */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;           /* Item being test for match */
+TagSearchEvalExpr(
+    TagSearchExpr *expr,	/* Search expression */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr)		/* Item being test for match */
 {
-    int looking_for_tag;        /* When true, scanner expects
-                                 * next char(s) to be a tag,
-                                 * else operand expected */
-    int negate_result;          /* Pending negation of next tag value */
+    int looking_for_tag;	/* When true, scanner expects next char(s) to
+				 * be a tag, else operand expected. */
+    int negate_result;		/* Pending negation of next tag value */
     Tk_Uid uid;
     Tk_Uid *tagPtr;
     int count;
-    int result;                 /* Value of expr so far */
+    int result;			/* Value of expr so far */
     int parendepth;
     SearchUids *searchUids;	/* Collection of uids for basic search
 				 * expression terms. */
@@ -3581,77 +3478,84 @@ TagSearchEvalExpr(expr, itemPtr)
     negate_result = 0;
     looking_for_tag = 1;
     while (expr->index < expr->length) {
-        uid = expr->uids[expr->index++];
-        if (looking_for_tag) {
-            if (uid == searchUids->tagvalUid) {
+	uid = expr->uids[expr->index++];
+	if (looking_for_tag) {
+	    if (uid == searchUids->tagvalUid) {
 /*
- *              assert(expr->index < expr->length);
+ *		assert(expr->index < expr->length);
  */
-                uid = expr->uids[expr->index++];
-                result = 0;
-                /*
-                 * set result 1 if tag is found in item's tags
-                 */
-                for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
-                    count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
-                    if (*tagPtr == uid) {
-                        result = 1;
-                        break;
-                    }
-                }
-
-            } else if (uid == searchUids->negtagvalUid) {
-                negate_result = ! negate_result;
+		uid = expr->uids[expr->index++];
+		result = 0;
+
+		/*
+		 * set result 1 if tag is found in item's tags
+		 */
+
+		for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
+			count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
+		    if (*tagPtr == uid) {
+			result = 1;
+			break;
+		    }
+		}
+
+	    } else if (uid == searchUids->negtagvalUid) {
+		negate_result = ! negate_result;
 /*
- *              assert(expr->index < expr->length);
+ *		assert(expr->index < expr->length);
  */
-                uid = expr->uids[expr->index++];
-                result = 0;
-                /*
-                 * set result 1 if tag is found in item's tags
-                 */
-                for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
-                    count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
-                    if (*tagPtr == uid) {
-                        result = 1;
-                        break;
-                    }
-                }
-
-            } else if (uid == searchUids->parenUid) {
-                /*
-                 * evaluate subexpressions with recursion
-                 */
-                result = TagSearchEvalExpr(expr, itemPtr);
-
-            } else if (uid == searchUids->negparenUid) {
-                negate_result = ! negate_result;
-                /*
-                 * evaluate subexpressions with recursion
-                 */
-                result = TagSearchEvalExpr(expr, itemPtr);
+		uid = expr->uids[expr->index++];
+		result = 0;
+
+		/*
+		 * set result 1 if tag is found in item's tags
+		 */
+
+		for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
+			count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
+		    if (*tagPtr == uid) {
+			result = 1;
+			break;
+		    }
+		}
+
+	    } else if (uid == searchUids->parenUid) {
+		/*
+		 * Evaluate subexpressions with recursion
+		 */
+
+		result = TagSearchEvalExpr(expr, itemPtr);
+
+	    } else if (uid == searchUids->negparenUid) {
+		negate_result = ! negate_result;
+
+		/*
+		 * Evaluate subexpressions with recursion
+		 */
+
+		result = TagSearchEvalExpr(expr, itemPtr);
 /*
- *          } else {
- *              assert(0);
+ *	    } else {
+ *		assert(0);
  */
-            }
-            if (negate_result) {
-                result = ! result;
-                negate_result = 0;
-            }
-            looking_for_tag = 0;
-        } else {    /* ! looking_for_tag */
-            if (((uid == searchUids->andUid) && (!result)) ||
+	    }
+	    if (negate_result) {
+		result = ! result;
+		negate_result = 0;
+	    }
+	    looking_for_tag = 0;
+	} else {    /* ! looking_for_tag */
+	    if (((uid == searchUids->andUid) && (!result)) ||
 		    ((uid == searchUids->orUid) && result)) {
-                /*
-                 * short circuit expression evaluation
-                 *
-                 * if result before && is 0, or result before || is 1,
-                 *   then the expression is decided and no further
-                 *   evaluation is needed.
-                 */
-
-                    parendepth = 0;
+		/*
+		 * Short circuit expression evaluation.
+		 *
+		 * if result before && is 0, or result before || is 1, then
+		 * the expression is decided and no further evaluation is
+		 * needed.
+		 */
+
+		parendepth = 0;
 		while (expr->index < expr->length) {
 		    uid = expr->uids[expr->index++];
 		    if (uid == searchUids->tagvalUid ||
@@ -3663,7 +3567,7 @@ TagSearchEvalExpr(expr, itemPtr)
 			    uid == searchUids->negparenUid) {
 			parendepth++;
 			continue;
-		    } 
+		    }
 		    if (uid == searchUids->endparenUid) {
 			parendepth--;
 			if (parendepth < 0) {
@@ -3671,24 +3575,24 @@ TagSearchEvalExpr(expr, itemPtr)
 			}
 		    }
 		}
-                return result;
+		return result;
 
-            } else if (uid == searchUids->xorUid) {
-                /*
-                 * if the previous result was 1
-                 *   then negate the next result
-                 */
-                negate_result = result;
+	    } else if (uid == searchUids->xorUid) {
+		/*
+		 * If the previous result was 1 then negate the next result.
+		 */
 
-            } else if (uid == searchUids->endparenUid) {
-                return result;
+		negate_result = result;
+
+	    } else if (uid == searchUids->endparenUid) {
+		return result;
 /*
- *          } else {
- *               assert(0);
+ *	    } else {
+ *		assert(0);
  */
-            }
-            looking_for_tag = 1;
-        }
+	    }
+	    looking_for_tag = 1;
+	}
     }
 /*
  *  assert(! looking_for_tag);
@@ -3701,104 +3605,103 @@ TagSearchEvalExpr(expr, itemPtr)
  *
  * TagSearchFirst --
  *
- *      This procedure is called to get the first item
- *      item that matches a preestablished search predicate
- *      that was set by TagSearchScan.
+ *	This function is called to get the first item item that matches a
+ *	preestablished search predicate that was set by TagSearchScan.
  *
  * Results:
- *      The return value is a pointer to the first item, or NULL
- *      if there is no such item.  The information at *searchPtr
- *      is updated such that successive calls to TagSearchNext
- *      will return successive items.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the first item, or NULL if there is
+ *	no such item. The information at *searchPtr is updated such that
+ *	successive calls to TagSearchNext will return successive items.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      SearchPtr is linked into a list of searches in progress
- *      on canvasPtr, so that elements can safely be deleted
- *      while the search is in progress.
+ *	SearchPtr is linked into a list of searches in progress on canvasPtr,
+ *	so that elements can safely be deleted while the search is in
+ *	progress.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static Tk_Item *
-TagSearchFirst(searchPtr)
-    TagSearch *searchPtr;               /* Record describing tag search */
+TagSearchFirst(
+    TagSearch *searchPtr)	/* Record describing tag search */
 {
     Tk_Item *itemPtr, *lastPtr;
     Tk_Uid uid, *tagPtr;
     int count;
 
-    /* short circuit impossible searches for null tags */
+    /*
+     * Short circuit impossible searches for null tags.
+     */
+
     if (searchPtr->stringLength == 0) {
-        return NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the first matching item in one of several ways. If the tag
-     * is a number then it selects the single item with the matching
-     * identifier.  In this case see if the item being requested is the
-     * hot item, in which case the search can be skipped.
+     * Find the first matching item in one of several ways. If the tag is a
+     * number then it selects the single item with the matching identifier.
+     * In this case see if the item being requested is the hot item, in which
+     * case the search can be skipped.
      */
 
-    if (searchPtr->type == 1) {
-        Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
-
-        itemPtr = searchPtr->canvasPtr->hotPtr;
-        lastPtr = searchPtr->canvasPtr->hotPrevPtr;
-        if ((itemPtr == NULL) || (itemPtr->id != searchPtr->id) ||
-		(lastPtr == NULL) || (lastPtr->nextPtr != itemPtr)) {
-            entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&searchPtr->canvasPtr->idTable,
-		    (char *) searchPtr->id);
-            if (entryPtr != NULL) {
-                itemPtr = (Tk_Item *)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
-                lastPtr = itemPtr->prevPtr;
-            } else {
-                lastPtr = itemPtr = NULL;
-            }
-        }
-        searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
-        searchPtr->searchOver = 1;
-        searchPtr->canvasPtr->hotPtr = itemPtr;
-        searchPtr->canvasPtr->hotPrevPtr = lastPtr;
-        return itemPtr;
-    }
-
-    if (searchPtr->type == 2) {
-
-        /*
-         * All items match.
-         */
-
-        searchPtr->lastPtr = NULL;
-        searchPtr->currentPtr = searchPtr->canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
-        return searchPtr->canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
-    }
-
-    if (searchPtr->type == 3) {
-
-        /*
-         * Optimized single-tag search
-         */
-
-        uid = searchPtr->expr->uid;
-        for (lastPtr = NULL, itemPtr = searchPtr->canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
-                itemPtr != NULL; lastPtr = itemPtr, itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) {
-            for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
-                    count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
-                if (*tagPtr == uid) {
-                    searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
-                    searchPtr->currentPtr = itemPtr;
-                    return itemPtr;
-                }
-            }
-        }
+    if (searchPtr->type == SEARCH_TYPE_ID) {
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+
+	itemPtr = searchPtr->canvasPtr->hotPtr;
+	lastPtr = searchPtr->canvasPtr->hotPrevPtr;
+	if ((itemPtr == NULL) || (itemPtr->id != searchPtr->id)
+		|| (lastPtr == NULL) || (lastPtr->nextPtr != itemPtr)) {
+	    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&searchPtr->canvasPtr->idTable,
+		    (char *) INT2PTR(searchPtr->id));
+	    if (entryPtr != NULL) {
+		itemPtr = (Tk_Item *)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+		lastPtr = itemPtr->prevPtr;
+	    } else {
+		lastPtr = itemPtr = NULL;
+	    }
+	}
+	searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
+	searchPtr->searchOver = 1;
+	searchPtr->canvasPtr->hotPtr = itemPtr;
+	searchPtr->canvasPtr->hotPrevPtr = lastPtr;
+	return itemPtr;
+    }
+
+    if (searchPtr->type == SEARCH_TYPE_ALL) {
+	/*
+	 * All items match.
+	 */
+
+	searchPtr->lastPtr = NULL;
+	searchPtr->currentPtr = searchPtr->canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
+	return searchPtr->canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
+    }
+
+    if (searchPtr->type == SEARCH_TYPE_TAG) {
+	/*
+	 * Optimized single-tag search
+	 */
+
+	uid = searchPtr->expr->uid;
+	for (lastPtr = NULL, itemPtr = searchPtr->canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
+		itemPtr != NULL; lastPtr = itemPtr, itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
+		    count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
+		if (*tagPtr == uid) {
+		    searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
+		    searchPtr->currentPtr = itemPtr;
+		    return itemPtr;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
     } else {
 
 	/*
-	 * None of the above.  Search for an item matching the tag expression.
+	 * None of the above. Search for an item matching the tag expression.
 	 */
 
 	for (lastPtr = NULL, itemPtr = searchPtr->canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
-		itemPtr != NULL; lastPtr=itemPtr, itemPtr=itemPtr->nextPtr) {
+		itemPtr != NULL; lastPtr = itemPtr, itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    searchPtr->expr->index = 0;
 	    if (TagSearchEvalExpr(searchPtr->expr, itemPtr)) {
 		searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
@@ -3817,89 +3720,86 @@ TagSearchFirst(searchPtr)
  *
  * TagSearchNext --
  *
- *      This procedure returns successive items that match a given
- *      tag;  it should be called only after TagSearchFirst has been
- *      used to begin a search.
+ *	This function returns successive items that match a given tag; it
+ *	should be called only after TagSearchFirst has been used to begin a
+ *	search.
  *
  * Results:
- *      The return value is a pointer to the next item that matches
- *      the tag expr specified to TagSearchScan, or NULL if no such
- *      item exists.  *SearchPtr is updated so that the next call
- *      to this procedure will return the next item.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the next item that matches the tag
+ *	expr specified to TagSearchScan, or NULL if no such item exists.
+ *	*SearchPtr is updated so that the next call to this function will
+ *	return the next item.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static Tk_Item *
-TagSearchNext(searchPtr)
-    TagSearch *searchPtr;               /* Record describing search in
-                                         * progress. */
+TagSearchNext(
+    TagSearch *searchPtr)	/* Record describing search in progress. */
 {
     Tk_Item *itemPtr, *lastPtr;
     Tk_Uid uid, *tagPtr;
     int count;
 
     /*
-     * Find next item in list (this may not actually be a suitable
-     * one to return), and return if there are no items left.
+     * Find next item in list (this may not actually be a suitable one to
+     * return), and return if there are no items left.
      */
 
     lastPtr = searchPtr->lastPtr;
     if (lastPtr == NULL) {
-        itemPtr = searchPtr->canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
+	itemPtr = searchPtr->canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
     } else {
-        itemPtr = lastPtr->nextPtr;
+	itemPtr = lastPtr->nextPtr;
     }
     if ((itemPtr == NULL) || (searchPtr->searchOver)) {
-        searchPtr->searchOver = 1;
-        return NULL;
+	searchPtr->searchOver = 1;
+	return NULL;
     }
     if (itemPtr != searchPtr->currentPtr) {
-        /*
-         * The structure of the list has changed.  Probably the
-         * previously-returned item was removed from the list.
-         * In this case, don't advance lastPtr;  just return
-         * its new successor (i.e. do nothing here).
-         */
+	/*
+	 * The structure of the list has changed. Probably the previously-
+	 * returned item was removed from the list. In this case, don't
+	 * advance lastPtr; just return its new successor (i.e. do nothing
+	 * here).
+	 */
     } else {
-        lastPtr = itemPtr;
-        itemPtr = lastPtr->nextPtr;
+	lastPtr = itemPtr;
+	itemPtr = lastPtr->nextPtr;
     }
 
-    if (searchPtr->type == 2) {
-
-        /*
-         * All items match.
-         */
+    if (searchPtr->type == SEARCH_TYPE_ALL) {
+	/*
+	 * All items match.
+	 */
 
-        searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
-        searchPtr->currentPtr = itemPtr;
-        return itemPtr;
+	searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
+	searchPtr->currentPtr = itemPtr;
+	return itemPtr;
     }
 
-    if (searchPtr->type == 3) {
-
-        /*
-         * Optimized single-tag search
-         */
+    if (searchPtr->type == SEARCH_TYPE_TAG) {
+	/*
+	 * Optimized single-tag search
+	 */
 
-        uid = searchPtr->expr->uid;
-        for ( ; itemPtr != NULL; lastPtr = itemPtr, itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) {
-            for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
-                    count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
-                if (*tagPtr == uid) {
-                    searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
-                    searchPtr->currentPtr = itemPtr;
-                    return itemPtr;
-                }
-            }
-        }
-        searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
-        searchPtr->searchOver = 1;
-        return NULL;
+	uid = searchPtr->expr->uid;
+	for (; itemPtr != NULL; lastPtr = itemPtr, itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    for (tagPtr = itemPtr->tagPtr, count = itemPtr->numTags;
+		    count > 0; tagPtr++, count--) {
+		if (*tagPtr == uid) {
+		    searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
+		    searchPtr->currentPtr = itemPtr;
+		    return itemPtr;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+	searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
+	searchPtr->searchOver = 1;
+	return NULL;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -3907,12 +3807,12 @@ TagSearchNext(searchPtr)
      */
 
     for ( ; itemPtr != NULL; lastPtr = itemPtr, itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) {
-        searchPtr->expr->index = 0;
-        if (TagSearchEvalExpr(searchPtr->expr, itemPtr)) {
-            searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
-            searchPtr->currentPtr = itemPtr;
-            return itemPtr;
-        }
+	searchPtr->expr->index = 0;
+	if (TagSearchEvalExpr(searchPtr->expr, itemPtr)) {
+	    searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
+	    searchPtr->currentPtr = itemPtr;
+	    return itemPtr;
+	}
     }
     searchPtr->lastPtr = lastPtr;
     searchPtr->searchOver = 1;
@@ -3925,29 +3825,27 @@ TagSearchNext(searchPtr)
  *
  * DoItem --
  *
- *	This is a utility procedure called by FindItems.  It
- *	either adds itemPtr's id to the result forming in interp,
- *	or it adds a new tag to itemPtr, depending on the value
- *	of tag.
+ *	This is a utility function called by FindItems. It either adds
+ *	itemPtr's id to the result forming in interp, or it adds a new tag to
+ *	itemPtr, depending on the value of tag.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If tag is NULL then itemPtr's id is added as a list element
- *	to the interp's result;  otherwise tag is added to itemPtr's
- *	list of tags.
+ *	If tag is NULL then itemPtr's id is added as a list element to the
+ *	interp's result; otherwise tag is added to itemPtr's list of tags.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DoItem(interp, itemPtr, tag)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter in which to (possibly)
-					 * record item id. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item to (possibly) modify. */
-    Tk_Uid tag;				/* Tag to add to those already
-					 * present for item, or NULL. */
+DoItem(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter in which to (possibly) record
+				 * item id. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to (possibly) modify. */
+    Tk_Uid tag)			/* Tag to add to those already present for
+				 * item, or NULL. */
 {
     Tk_Uid *tagPtr;
     int count;
@@ -3972,18 +3870,17 @@ DoItem(interp, itemPtr, tag)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Grow the tag space if there's no more room left in the current
-     * block.
+     * Grow the tag space if there's no more room left in the current block.
      */
 
     if (itemPtr->tagSpace == itemPtr->numTags) {
 	Tk_Uid *newTagPtr;
 
 	itemPtr->tagSpace += 5;
-	newTagPtr = (Tk_Uid *) ckalloc((unsigned)
-		(itemPtr->tagSpace * sizeof(Tk_Uid)));
-	memcpy((VOID *) newTagPtr, (VOID *) itemPtr->tagPtr,
-		(itemPtr->numTags * sizeof(Tk_Uid)));
+	newTagPtr = (Tk_Uid *)
+		ckalloc((unsigned) (itemPtr->tagSpace * sizeof(Tk_Uid)));
+	memcpy((void *) newTagPtr, itemPtr->tagPtr,
+		itemPtr->numTags * sizeof(Tk_Uid));
 	if (itemPtr->tagPtr != itemPtr->staticTagSpace) {
 	    ckfree((char *) itemPtr->tagPtr);
 	}
@@ -4004,57 +3901,51 @@ DoItem(interp, itemPtr, tag)
  *
  * FindItems --
  *
- *	This procedure does all the work of implementing the
- *	"find" and "addtag" options of the canvas widget command,
- *	which locate items that have certain features (location,
- *	tags, position in display list, etc.).
+ *	This function does all the work of implementing the "find" and
+ *	"addtag" options of the canvas widget command, which locate items that
+ *	have certain features (location, tags, position in display list, etc.)
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If newTag is NULL, then a
- *	list of ids from all the items that match argc/argv is
- *	returned in the interp's result.  If newTag is NULL, then
- *	the normal the interp's result is an empty string.  If an error
- *	occurs, then the interp's result will hold an error message.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If newTag is NULL, then a list of ids
+ *	from all the items that match objc/objv is returned in the interp's
+ *	result. If newTag is NULL, then the normal the interp's result is an
+ *	empty string. If an error occurs, then the interp's result will hold
+ *	an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If newTag is non-NULL, then all the items that match the
- *	information in argc/argv have that tag added to their
- *	lists of tags.
+ *	If newTag is non-NULL, then all the items that match the information
+ *	in objc/objv have that tag added to their lists of tags.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, argc, argv, newTag, first)
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, argc, argv, newTag, first, searchPtrPtr)
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    TkCanvas *canvasPtr;		/* Canvas whose items are to be
-					 * searched. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of entries in argv.  Must be
-					 * greater than zero. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST *argv;		/* Arguments that describe what items
-					 * to search for (see user doc on
-					 * "find" and "addtag" options). */
-    Tcl_Obj *newTag;			/* If non-NULL, gives new tag to set
-					 * on all found items;  if NULL, then
-					 * ids of found items are returned
-					 * in the interp's result. */
-    int first;				/* For error messages:  gives number
-					 * of elements of argv which are already
-					 * handled. */
+FindItems(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr,	/* Canvas whose items are to be searched. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of entries in argv. Must be greater
+				 * than zero. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST *objv,	/* Arguments that describe what items to
+				 * search for (see user doc on "find" and
+				 * "addtag" options). */
+    Tcl_Obj *newTag,		/* If non-NULL, gives new tag to set on all
+				 * found items; if NULL, then ids of found
+				 * items are returned in the interp's
+				 * result. */
+    int first			/* For error messages: gives number of
+				 * elements of objv which are already
+				 * handled. */
 #ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-    TagSearch **searchPtrPtr;           /* From CanvasWidgetCmd local vars*/
+    ,TagSearch **searchPtrPtr	/* From CanvasWidgetCmd local vars*/
 #endif /* not USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+    )
 {
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
     TagSearch search;
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
     Tk_Item *itemPtr;
     Tk_Uid uid;
-    int index;
+    int index, result;
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
 	"above", "all", "below", "closest",
 	"enclosed", "overlapping", "withtag", NULL
@@ -4065,41 +3956,34 @@ FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, argc, argv, newTag, first, searchPtrPtr)
     };
 
     if (newTag != NULL) {
-	uid = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetStringFromObj(newTag, NULL));
+	uid = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(newTag));
     } else {
 	uid = NULL;
     }
-    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, argv[first], optionStrings, "search command", 0,
-	    &index) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[first], optionStrings,
+	    "search command", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-      case CANV_ABOVE: {
+    case CANV_ABOVE: {
 	Tk_Item *lastPtr = NULL;
-	if (argc != first+2) {
-	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, first+1, argv, "tagOrId");
+
+	if (objc != first+2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, first+1, objv, "tagOrId");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, argv[first+1], &search);
-		itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if (TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, argv[first+1], searchPtrPtr) != TCL_OK) {
-            return TCL_ERROR;
-        }
-        for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(*searchPtrPtr);
-                itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(*searchPtrPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[first+1], searchPtrPtr,
+		return TCL_ERROR) {
 	    lastPtr = itemPtr;
 	}
 	if ((lastPtr != NULL) && (lastPtr->nextPtr != NULL)) {
 	    DoItem(interp, lastPtr->nextPtr, uid);
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_ALL: {
-	if (argc != first+1) {
-	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, first+1, argv, (char *) NULL);
+    }
+    case CANV_ALL:
+	if (objc != first+1) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, first+1, objv, NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
@@ -4108,52 +3992,43 @@ FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, argc, argv, newTag, first, searchPtrPtr)
 	    DoItem(interp, itemPtr, uid);
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_BELOW: {
-	Tk_Item *itemPtr;
 
-	if (argc != first+2) {
-	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, first+1, argv, "tagOrId");
+    case CANV_BELOW:
+	if (objc != first+2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, first+1, objv, "tagOrId");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, argv[first+1], &search);
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if (TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, argv[first+1], searchPtrPtr) != TCL_OK) {
-            return TCL_ERROR;
-        }
-        itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(*searchPtrPtr);
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[first+1], searchPtrPtr,
+		return TCL_ERROR);
 	if (itemPtr != NULL) {
 	    if (itemPtr->prevPtr != NULL) {
 		DoItem(interp, itemPtr->prevPtr, uid);
 	    }
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_CLOSEST: {
+    case CANV_CLOSEST: {
 	double closestDist;
 	Tk_Item *startPtr, *closestPtr;
 	double coords[2], halo;
 	int x1, y1, x2, y2;
 
-	if ((argc < first+3) || (argc > first+5)) {
-	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, first+1, argv, "x y ?halo? ?start?");
+	if ((objc < first+3) || (objc > first+5)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, first+1, objv, "x y ?halo? ?start?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if ((Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, argv[first+1],
+	if ((Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, objv[first+1],
 		&coords[0]) != TCL_OK) || (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp,
-		(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, argv[first+2], &coords[1]) != TCL_OK)) {
+		(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, objv[first+2], &coords[1]) != TCL_OK)) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (argc > first+3) {
-	    if (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, argv[first+3],
+	if (objc > first+3) {
+	    if (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, objv[first+3],
 		    &halo) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    if (halo < 0.0) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't have negative halo value \"",
-			Tcl_GetString(argv[3]), "\"", (char *) NULL);
+			Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "\"", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	} else {
@@ -4165,31 +4040,26 @@ FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, argc, argv, newTag, first, searchPtrPtr)
 	 */
 
 	startPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr;
-	if (argc == first+5) {
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	    itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, argv[first+4], &search);
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-            if (TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, argv[first+4], searchPtrPtr) != TCL_OK) {
-                return TCL_ERROR;
-            }
-            itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(*searchPtrPtr);
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	if (objc == first+5) {
+	    FIRST_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[first+4], searchPtrPtr,
+		    return TCL_ERROR);
 	    if (itemPtr != NULL) {
 		startPtr = itemPtr;
 	    }
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * The code below is optimized so that it can eliminate most
-	 * items without having to call their item-specific procedures.
-	 * This is done by keeping a bounding box (x1, y1, x2, y2) that
-	 * an item's bbox must overlap if the item is to have any
-	 * chance of being closer than the closest so far.
+	 * The code below is optimized so that it can eliminate most items
+	 * without having to call their item-specific functions. This is done
+	 * by keeping a bounding box (x1, y1, x2, y2) that an item's bbox must
+	 * overlap if the item is to have any chance of being closer than the
+	 * closest so far.
 	 */
 
 	itemPtr = startPtr;
 	while(itemPtr && (itemPtr->state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN ||
-	    (itemPtr->state == TK_STATE_NULL && canvasPtr->canvas_state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN))) {
+		(itemPtr->state == TK_STATE_NULL &&
+		canvasPtr->canvas_state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN))) {
 	    itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr;
 	}
 	if (itemPtr == NULL) {
@@ -4204,8 +4074,8 @@ FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, argc, argv, newTag, first, searchPtrPtr)
 	    double newDist;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Update the bounding box using itemPtr, which is the
-	     * new closest item.
+	     * Update the bounding box using itemPtr, which is the new closest
+	     * item.
 	     */
 
 	    x1 = (int) (coords[0] - closestDist - halo - 1);
@@ -4215,9 +4085,9 @@ FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, argc, argv, newTag, first, searchPtrPtr)
 	    closestPtr = itemPtr;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Search for an item that beats the current closest one.
-	     * Work circularly through the canvas's item list until
-	     * getting back to the starting item.
+	     * Search for an item that beats the current closest one. Work
+	     * circularly through the canvas's item list until getting back to
+	     * the starting item.
 	     */
 
 	    while (1) {
@@ -4229,7 +4099,8 @@ FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, argc, argv, newTag, first, searchPtrPtr)
 		    DoItem(interp, closestPtr, uid);
 		    return TCL_OK;
 		}
-		if (itemPtr->state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN || (itemPtr->state == TK_STATE_NULL &&
+		if (itemPtr->state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN ||
+			(itemPtr->state == TK_STATE_NULL &&
 			canvasPtr->canvas_state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN)) {
 		    continue;
 		}
@@ -4249,39 +4120,28 @@ FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, argc, argv, newTag, first, searchPtrPtr)
 	    }
 	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case CANV_ENCLOSED: {
-	if (argc != first+5) {
-	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, first+1, argv, "x1 y1 x2 y2");
+    }
+    case CANV_ENCLOSED:
+	if (objc != first+5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, first+1, objv, "x1 y1 x2 y2");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	return FindArea(interp, canvasPtr, argv+first+1, uid, 1);
-      }
-      case CANV_OVERLAPPING: {
-	if (argc != first+5) {
-	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, first+1, argv, "x1 y1 x2 y2");
+	return FindArea(interp, canvasPtr, objv+first+1, uid, 1);
+    case CANV_OVERLAPPING:
+	if (objc != first+5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, first+1, objv, "x1 y1 x2 y2");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	return FindArea(interp, canvasPtr, argv+first+1, uid, 0);
-      }
-      case CANV_WITHTAG: {
-	if (argc != first+2) {
-	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, first+1, argv, "tagOrId");
+	return FindArea(interp, canvasPtr, objv+first+1, uid, 0);
+    case CANV_WITHTAG:
+	if (objc != first+2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, first+1, objv, "tagOrId");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, argv[first+1], &search);
-		itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        if (TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, argv[first+1], searchPtrPtr) != TCL_OK) {
-            return TCL_ERROR;
-        }
-        for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(*searchPtrPtr);
-                itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(*searchPtrPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+	FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[first+1], searchPtrPtr,
+		return TCL_ERROR) {
 	    DoItem(interp, itemPtr, uid);
 	}
-      }
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -4291,53 +4151,49 @@ FindItems(interp, canvasPtr, argc, argv, newTag, first, searchPtrPtr)
  *
  * FindArea --
  *
- *	This procedure implements area searches for the "find"
- *	and "addtag" options.
+ *	This function implements area searches for the "find" and "addtag"
+ *	options.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If newTag is NULL, then a
- *	list of ids from all the items overlapping or enclosed
- *	by the rectangle given by argc is returned in the interp's result.
- *	If newTag is NULL, then the normal the interp's result is an
- *	empty string.  If an error occurs, then the interp's result will
- *	hold an error message.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If newTag is NULL, then a list of ids
+ *	from all the items overlapping or enclosed by the rectangle given by
+ *	objc is returned in the interp's result. If newTag is NULL, then the
+ *	normal the interp's result is an empty string. If an error occurs,
+ *	then the interp's result will hold an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If uid is non-NULL, then all the items overlapping
- *	or enclosed by the area in argv have that tag added to
- *	their lists of tags.
+ *	If uid is non-NULL, then all the items overlapping or enclosed by the
+ *	area in objv have that tag added to their lists of tags.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-FindArea(interp, canvasPtr, argv, uid, enclosed)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for error reporting
-					 * and result storing. */
-    TkCanvas *canvasPtr;		/* Canvas whose items are to be
-					 * searched. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST *argv;		/* Array of four arguments that
-					 * give the coordinates of the
-					 * rectangular area to search. */
-    Tk_Uid uid;				/* If non-NULL, gives new tag to set
-					 * on all found items;  if NULL, then
-					 * ids of found items are returned
-					 * in the interp's result. */
-    int enclosed;			/* 0 means overlapping or enclosed
-					 * items are OK, 1 means only enclosed
-					 * items are OK. */
+FindArea(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting and result
+				 * storing. */
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr,	/* Canvas whose items are to be searched. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST *objv,	/* Array of four arguments that give the
+				 * coordinates of the rectangular area to
+				 * search. */
+    Tk_Uid uid,			/* If non-NULL, gives new tag to set on all
+				 * found items; if NULL, then ids of found
+				 * items are returned in the interp's
+				 * result. */
+    int enclosed)		/* 0 means overlapping or enclosed items are
+				 * OK, 1 means only enclosed items are OK. */
 {
     double rect[4], tmp;
     int x1, y1, x2, y2;
     Tk_Item *itemPtr;
 
-    if ((Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, argv[0],
+    if ((Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, objv[0],
 		&rect[0]) != TCL_OK)
-	    || (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, argv[1],
+	    || (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, objv[1],
 		&rect[1]) != TCL_OK)
-	    || (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, argv[2],
+	    || (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, objv[2],
 		&rect[2]) != TCL_OK)
-	    || (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, argv[3],
+	    || (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, objv[3],
 		&rect[3]) != TCL_OK)) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -4349,8 +4205,8 @@ FindArea(interp, canvasPtr, argv, uid, enclosed)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Use an integer bounding box for a quick test, to avoid
-     * calling item-specific code except for items that are close.
+     * Use an integer bounding box for a quick test, to avoid calling
+     * item-specific code except for items that are close.
      */
 
     x1 = (int) (rect[0]-1.0);
@@ -4380,65 +4236,60 @@ FindArea(interp, canvasPtr, argv, uid, enclosed)
  *
  * RelinkItems --
  *
- *	Move one or more items to a different place in the
- *	display order for a canvas.
+ *	Move one or more items to a different place in the display order for a
+ *	canvas.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The items identified by "tag" are moved so that they
- *	are all together in the display list and immediately
- *	after prevPtr.  The order of the moved items relative
- *	to each other is not changed.
+ *	The items identified by "tag" are moved so that they are all together
+ *	in the display list and immediately after prevPtr. The order of the
+ *	moved items relative to each other is not changed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
 static void
-RelinkItems(canvasPtr, tag, prevPtr)
+RelinkItems(
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr,	/* Canvas to be modified. */
+    Tcl_Obj *tag,		/* Tag identifying items to be moved in the
+				 * redisplay list. */
+    Tk_Item *prevPtr)		/* Reposition the items so that they go just
+				 * after this item (NULL means put at
+				 * beginning of list). */
 #else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 static int
-RelinkItems(canvasPtr, tag, prevPtr, searchPtrPtr)
+RelinkItems(
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr,	/* Canvas to be modified. */
+    Tcl_Obj *tag,		/* Tag identifying items to be moved in the
+				 * redisplay list. */
+    Tk_Item *prevPtr,		/* Reposition the items so that they go just
+				 * after this item (NULL means put at
+				 * beginning of list). */
+    TagSearch **searchPtrPtr)	/* From CanvasWidgetCmd local vars */
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-    TkCanvas *canvasPtr;	/* Canvas to be modified. */
-    Tcl_Obj *tag;		/* Tag identifying items to be moved
-				 * in the redisplay list. */
-    Tk_Item *prevPtr;		/* Reposition the items so that they
-				 * go just after this item (NULL means
-				 * put at beginning of list). */
-#ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-    TagSearch **searchPtrPtr;   /* From CanvasWidgetCmd local vars */
-#endif /* not USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 {
     Tk_Item *itemPtr;
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
     TagSearch search;
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
     Tk_Item *firstMovePtr, *lastMovePtr;
+    int result;
 
     /*
-     * Find all of the items to be moved and remove them from
-     * the list, making an auxiliary list running from firstMovePtr
-     * to lastMovePtr.  Record their areas for redisplay.
+     * Find all of the items to be moved and remove them from the list, making
+     * an auxiliary list running from firstMovePtr to lastMovePtr. Record
+     * their areas for redisplay.
      */
 
     firstMovePtr = lastMovePtr = NULL;
-#ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-    for (itemPtr = StartTagSearch(canvasPtr, tag, &search);
-	    itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = NextItem(&search)) {
-#else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-    if (TagSearchScan(canvasPtr, tag, searchPtrPtr) != TCL_OK) {
-        return TCL_ERROR;
-    }
-    for (itemPtr = TagSearchFirst(*searchPtrPtr);
-            itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = TagSearchNext(*searchPtrPtr)) {
-#endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+    FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(tag, searchPtrPtr, return TCL_ERROR) {
 	if (itemPtr == prevPtr) {
 	    /*
-	     * Item after which insertion is to occur is being
-	     * moved!  Switch to insert after its predecessor.
+	     * Item after which insertion is to occur is being moved! Switch
+	     * to insert after its predecessor.
 	     */
 
 	    prevPtr = prevPtr->prevPtr;
@@ -4470,15 +4321,15 @@ RelinkItems(canvasPtr, tag, prevPtr, searchPtrPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Insert the list of to-be-moved items back into the canvas's
-     * at the desired position.
+     * Insert the list of to-be-moved items back into the canvas's at the
+     * desired position.
      */
 
     if (firstMovePtr == NULL) {
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
 	return;
 #else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-        return TCL_OK;
+	return TCL_OK;
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
     }
     if (prevPtr == NULL) {
@@ -4510,24 +4361,23 @@ RelinkItems(canvasPtr, tag, prevPtr, searchPtrPtr)
  *
  * CanvasBindProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher to handle
- *	events associated with bindings on items.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher to handle events
+ *	associated with bindings on items.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Depends on the command invoked as part of the binding
- *	(if there was any).
+ *	Depends on the command invoked as part of the binding (if there was
+ *	any).
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-CanvasBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to canvas structure. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Pointer to X event that just
-					 * happened. */
+CanvasBindProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to canvas structure. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Pointer to X event that just happened. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) clientData;
 
@@ -4535,47 +4385,46 @@ CanvasBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 
     /*
      * This code below keeps track of the current modifier state in
-     * canvasPtr>state.  This information is used to defer repicks of
-     * the current item while buttons are down.
+     * canvasPtr>state. This information is used to defer repicks of the
+     * current item while buttons are down.
      */
 
     if ((eventPtr->type == ButtonPress) || (eventPtr->type == ButtonRelease)) {
 	int mask;
 
 	switch (eventPtr->xbutton.button) {
-	    case Button1:
-		mask = Button1Mask;
-		break;
-	    case Button2:
-		mask = Button2Mask;
-		break;
-	    case Button3:
-		mask = Button3Mask;
-		break;
-	    case Button4:
-		mask = Button4Mask;
-		break;
-	    case Button5:
-		mask = Button5Mask;
-		break;
-	    default:
-		mask = 0;
-		break;
+	case Button1:
+	    mask = Button1Mask;
+	    break;
+	case Button2:
+	    mask = Button2Mask;
+	    break;
+	case Button3:
+	    mask = Button3Mask;
+	    break;
+	case Button4:
+	    mask = Button4Mask;
+	    break;
+	case Button5:
+	    mask = Button5Mask;
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    mask = 0;
+	    break;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * For button press events, repick the current item using the
-	 * button state before the event, then process the event.  For
-	 * button release events, first process the event, then repick
-	 * the current item using the button state *after* the event
-	 * (the button has logically gone up before we change the
-	 * current item).
+	 * For button press events, repick the current item using the button
+	 * state before the event, then process the event. For button release
+	 * events, first process the event, then repick the current item using
+	 * the button state *after* the event (the button has logically gone
+	 * up before we change the current item).
 	 */
 
 	if (eventPtr->type == ButtonPress) {
 	    /*
-	     * On a button press, first repick the current item using
-	     * the button state before the event, the process the event.
+	     * On a button press, first repick the current item using the
+	     * button state before the event, the process the event.
 	     */
 
 	    canvasPtr->state = eventPtr->xbutton.state;
@@ -4584,9 +4433,9 @@ CanvasBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	    CanvasDoEvent(canvasPtr, eventPtr);
 	} else {
 	    /*
-	     * Button release: first process the event, with the button
-	     * still considered to be down.  Then repick the current
-	     * item under the assumption that the button is no longer down.
+	     * Button release: first process the event, with the button still
+	     * considered to be down. Then repick the current item under the
+	     * assumption that the button is no longer down.
 	     */
 
 	    canvasPtr->state = eventPtr->xbutton.state;
@@ -4608,7 +4457,7 @@ CanvasBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
     }
     CanvasDoEvent(canvasPtr, eventPtr);
 
-    done:
+  done:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) canvasPtr);
 }
 
@@ -4617,34 +4466,31 @@ CanvasBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * PickCurrentItem --
  *
- *	Find the topmost item in a canvas that contains a given
- *	location and mark the the current item.  If the current
- *	item has changed, generate a fake exit event on the old
- *	current item, a fake enter event on the new current item
- *	item and force a redraw of the two items. Canvas items
- *      that are hidden or disabled are ignored.
+ *	Find the topmost item in a canvas that contains a given location and
+ *	mark the the current item. If the current item has changed, generate a
+ *	fake exit event on the old current item, a fake enter event on the new
+ *	current item item and force a redraw of the two items. Canvas items
+ *	that are hidden or disabled are ignored.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The current item for canvasPtr may change.  If it does,
- *	then the commands associated with item entry and exit
- *	could do just about anything.  A binding script could
- *	delete the canvas, so callers should protect themselves
- *	with Tcl_Preserve and Tcl_Release.
+ *	The current item for canvasPtr may change. If it does, then the
+ *	commands associated with item entry and exit could do just about
+ *	anything. A binding script could delete the canvas, so callers should
+ *	protect themselves with Tcl_Preserve and Tcl_Release.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-PickCurrentItem(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
-    TkCanvas *canvasPtr;		/* Canvas widget in which to select
-					 * current item. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Event describing location of
-					 * mouse cursor.  Must be EnterWindow,
-					 * LeaveWindow, ButtonRelease, or
-					 * MotionNotify. */
+PickCurrentItem(
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr,	/* Canvas widget in which to select current
+				 * item. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Event describing location of mouse cursor.
+				 * Must be EnterWindow, LeaveWindow,
+				 * ButtonRelease, or MotionNotify. */
 {
     double coords[2];
     int buttonDown;
@@ -4654,23 +4500,24 @@ PickCurrentItem(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
 #endif
 
     /*
-     * Check whether or not a button is down.  If so, we'll log entry
-     * and exit into and out of the current item, but not entry into
-     * any other item.  This implements a form of grabbing equivalent
-     * to what the X server does for windows.
+     * Check whether or not a button is down. If so, we'll log entry and exit
+     * into and out of the current item, but not entry into any other item.
+     * This implements a form of grabbing equivalent to what the X server does
+     * for windows.
      */
 
     buttonDown = canvasPtr->state
 	    & (Button1Mask|Button2Mask|Button3Mask|Button4Mask|Button5Mask);
 
     /*
-     * Save information about this event in the canvas.  The event in
-     * the canvas is used for two purposes:
+     * Save information about this event in the canvas. The event in the
+     * canvas is used for two purposes:
      *
      * 1. Event bindings: if the current item changes, fake events are
      *    generated to allow item-enter and item-leave bindings to trigger.
-     * 2. Reselection: if the current item gets deleted, can use the
-     *    saved event to find a new current item.
+     * 2. Reselection: if the current item gets deleted, can use the saved
+     *    event to find a new current item.
+     *
      * Translate MotionNotify events into EnterNotify events, since that's
      * what gets reported to item handlers.
      */
@@ -4703,10 +4550,10 @@ PickCurrentItem(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If this is a recursive call (there's already a partially completed
-     * call pending on the stack;  it's in the middle of processing a
-     * Leave event handler for the old current item) then just return;
-     * the pending call will do everything that's needed.
+     * If this is a recursive call (there's already a partially completed call
+     * pending on the stack; it's in the middle of processing a Leave event
+     * handler for the old current item) then just return; the pending call
+     * will do everything that's needed.
      */
 
     if (canvasPtr->flags & REPICK_IN_PROGRESS) {
@@ -4714,8 +4561,8 @@ PickCurrentItem(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * A LeaveNotify event automatically means that there's no current
-     * object, so the check for closest item can be skipped.
+     * A LeaveNotify event automatically means that there's no current object,
+     * so the check for closest item can be skipped.
      */
 
     coords[0] = canvasPtr->pickEvent.xcrossing.x + canvasPtr->xOrigin;
@@ -4738,12 +4585,11 @@ PickCurrentItem(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
     if (!buttonDown) {
 	canvasPtr->flags &= ~LEFT_GRABBED_ITEM;
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * Simulate a LeaveNotify event on the previous current item and
-     * an EnterNotify event on the new current item.  Remove the "current"
-     * tag from the previous current item and place it on the new current
-     * item.
+     * Simulate a LeaveNotify event on the previous current item and an
+     * EnterNotify event on the new current item. Remove the "current" tag
+     * from the previous current item and place it on the new current item.
      */
 
     if ((canvasPtr->newCurrentPtr != canvasPtr->currentItemPtr)
@@ -4757,9 +4603,9 @@ PickCurrentItem(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
 	event.type = LeaveNotify;
 
 	/*
-	 * If the event's detail happens to be NotifyInferior the
-	 * binding mechanism will discard the event.  To be consistent,
-	 * always use NotifyAncestor.
+	 * If the event's detail happens to be NotifyInferior the binding
+	 * mechanism will discard the event. To be consistent, always use
+	 * NotifyAncestor.
 	 */
 
 	event.xcrossing.detail = NotifyAncestor;
@@ -4768,28 +4614,29 @@ PickCurrentItem(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
 	canvasPtr->flags &= ~REPICK_IN_PROGRESS;
 
 	/*
-	 * The check below is needed because there could be an event
-	 * handler for <LeaveNotify> that deletes the current item.
+	 * The check below is needed because there could be an event handler
+	 * for <LeaveNotify> that deletes the current item.
 	 */
 
 	if ((itemPtr == canvasPtr->currentItemPtr) && !buttonDown) {
 	    for (i = itemPtr->numTags-1; i >= 0; i--) {
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-		if (itemPtr->tagPtr[i] == Tk_GetUid("current")) {
+		if (itemPtr->tagPtr[i] == Tk_GetUid("current"))
 #else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-		if (itemPtr->tagPtr[i] == searchUids->currentUid) {
+		if (itemPtr->tagPtr[i] == searchUids->currentUid)
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
+		    /* then */ {
 		    itemPtr->tagPtr[i] = itemPtr->tagPtr[itemPtr->numTags-1];
 		    itemPtr->numTags--;
 		    break;
 		}
 	    }
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
-	 * Note:  during CanvasDoEvent above, it's possible that
-	 * canvasPtr->newCurrentPtr got reset to NULL because the
-	 * item was deleted.
+	 * Note: during CanvasDoEvent above, it's possible that
+	 * canvasPtr->newCurrentPtr got reset to NULL because the item was
+	 * deleted.
 	 */
     }
     if ((canvasPtr->newCurrentPtr != canvasPtr->currentItemPtr) && buttonDown) {
@@ -4798,9 +4645,9 @@ PickCurrentItem(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Special note:  it's possible that canvasPtr->newCurrentPtr ==
-     * canvasPtr->currentItemPtr here.  This can happen, for example,
-     * if LEFT_GRABBED_ITEM was set.
+     * Special note: it's possible that canvasPtr->newCurrentPtr ==
+     * canvasPtr->currentItemPtr here. This can happen, for example, if
+     * LEFT_GRABBED_ITEM was set.
      */
 
     prevItemPtr = canvasPtr->currentItemPtr;
@@ -4810,23 +4657,21 @@ PickCurrentItem(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
 	    (prevItemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT)) {
 	EventuallyRedrawItem((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, prevItemPtr);
 	(*prevItemPtr->typePtr->configProc)(canvasPtr->interp,
-		(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, prevItemPtr, 0, (Tcl_Obj **) NULL,
+		(Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, prevItemPtr, 0, NULL,
 		TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
     }
     if (canvasPtr->currentItemPtr != NULL) {
 	XEvent event;
 
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-	DoItem((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, canvasPtr->currentItemPtr, 
-                Tk_GetUid("current"));
+	DoItem(NULL, canvasPtr->currentItemPtr, Tk_GetUid("current"));
 #else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
-	DoItem((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, canvasPtr->currentItemPtr,
-		searchUids->currentUid);
+	DoItem(NULL, canvasPtr->currentItemPtr, searchUids->currentUid);
 #endif /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEA */
 	if ((canvasPtr->currentItemPtr->redraw_flags & TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT &&
 		prevItemPtr != canvasPtr->currentItemPtr)) {
 	    (*canvasPtr->currentItemPtr->typePtr->configProc)(canvasPtr->interp,
-		    (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, canvasPtr->currentItemPtr, 0, (Tcl_Obj **) NULL,
+		    (Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, canvasPtr->currentItemPtr, 0, NULL,
 		    TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
 	    EventuallyRedrawItem((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
 		    canvasPtr->currentItemPtr);
@@ -4843,13 +4688,13 @@ PickCurrentItem(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
  *
  * CanvasFindClosest --
  *
- *	Given x and y coordinates, find the topmost canvas item that
- *	is "close" to the coordinates. Canvas items that are hidden
- *	or disabled are ignored.
+ *	Given x and y coordinates, find the topmost canvas item that is
+ *	"close" to the coordinates. Canvas items that are hidden or disabled
+ *	are ignored.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the topmost item that is
- *	close to (x,y), or NULL if no item is close.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the topmost item that is close to
+ *	(x,y), or NULL if no item is close.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4858,10 +4703,10 @@ PickCurrentItem(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static Tk_Item *
-CanvasFindClosest(canvasPtr, coords)
-    TkCanvas *canvasPtr;		/* Canvas widget to search. */
-    double coords[2];			/* Desired x,y position in canvas,
-					 * not screen, coordinates.) */
+CanvasFindClosest(
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr,	/* Canvas widget to search. */
+    double coords[2])		/* Desired x,y position in canvas, not screen,
+				 * coordinates.) */
 {
     Tk_Item *itemPtr;
     Tk_Item *bestPtr;
@@ -4897,27 +4742,25 @@ CanvasFindClosest(canvasPtr, coords)
  *
  * CanvasDoEvent --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to invoke binding processing
- *	for a new event that is associated with the current item
- *	for a canvas.
+ *	This function is called to invoke binding processing for a new event
+ *	that is associated with the current item for a canvas.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Depends on the bindings for the canvas.  A binding script
- *	could delete the canvas, so callers should protect themselves
- *	with Tcl_Preserve and Tcl_Release.
+ *	Depends on the bindings for the canvas. A binding script could delete
+ *	the canvas, so callers should protect themselves with Tcl_Preserve and
+ *	Tcl_Release.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-CanvasDoEvent(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
-    TkCanvas *canvasPtr;		/* Canvas widget in which event
-					 * occurred. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Real or simulated X event that
-					 * is to be processed. */
+CanvasDoEvent(
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr,	/* Canvas widget in which event occurred. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Real or simulated X event that is to be
+				 * processed. */
 {
 #define NUM_STATIC 3
     ClientData staticObjects[NUM_STATIC];
@@ -4944,30 +4787,30 @@ CanvasDoEvent(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
 
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
     /*
-     * Set up an array with all the relevant objects for processing
-     * this event.  The relevant objects are (a) the event's item,
-     * (b) the tags associated with the event's item, and (c) the
-     * tag "all".  If there are a lot of tags then malloc an array
-     * to hold all of the objects.
+     * Set up an array with all the relevant objects for processing this
+     * event. The relevant objects are (a) the event's item, (b) the tags
+     * associated with the event's item, and (c) the tag "all". If there are a
+     * lot of tags then malloc an array to hold all of the objects.
      */
 
     numObjects = itemPtr->numTags + 2;
 #else /* USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
     /*
-     * Set up an array with all the relevant objects for processing
-     * this event.  The relevant objects are:
+     * Set up an array with all the relevant objects for processing this
+     * event. The relevant objects are:
      * (a) the event's item,
-     * (b) the tags associated with the event's item, 
+     * (b) the tags associated with the event's item,
      * (c) the expressions that are true for the event's item's tags, and
-     * (d) the tag "all". 
+     * (d) the tag "all".
      *
-     * If there are a lot of tags then malloc an array to hold all of
-     * the objects.
+     * If there are a lot of tags then malloc an array to hold all of the
+     * objects.
      */
 
     /*
-     * flag and count all expressions that match item's tags
+     * Flag and count all expressions that match item's tags.
      */
+
     numExprs = 0;
     expr = canvasPtr->bindTagExprs;
     while (expr) {
@@ -4984,8 +4827,8 @@ CanvasDoEvent(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
     if (numObjects <= NUM_STATIC) {
 	objectPtr = staticObjects;
     } else {
-	objectPtr = (ClientData *)
-		ckalloc((unsigned) (numObjects * sizeof(ClientData)));
+	objectPtr = (ClientData *) ckalloc((unsigned)
+		(numObjects * sizeof(ClientData)));
     }
 #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
     objectPtr[0] = (ClientData) Tk_GetUid("all");
@@ -4996,10 +4839,12 @@ CanvasDoEvent(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
 	objectPtr[i+1] = (ClientData) itemPtr->tagPtr[i];
     }
     objectPtr[itemPtr->numTags+1] = (ClientData) itemPtr;
+
 #ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
     /*
-     * copy uids of matching expressions into object array
+     * Copy uids of matching expressions into object array
      */
+
     i = itemPtr->numTags+2;
     expr = canvasPtr->bindTagExprs;
     while (expr) {
@@ -5011,8 +4856,8 @@ CanvasDoEvent(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
 #endif /* not USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 
     /*
-     * Invoke the binding system, then free up the object array if
-     * it was malloc-ed.
+     * Invoke the binding system, then free up the object array if it was
+     * malloc-ed.
      */
 
     if (canvasPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
@@ -5029,22 +4874,22 @@ CanvasDoEvent(canvasPtr, eventPtr)
  *
  * CanvasBlinkProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called as a timer handler to blink the
- *	insertion cursor off and on.
+ *	This function is called as a timer handler to blink the insertion
+ *	cursor off and on.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The cursor gets turned on or off, redisplay gets invoked,
- *	and this procedure reschedules itself.
+ *	The cursor gets turned on or off, redisplay gets invoked, and this
+ *	function reschedules itself.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-CanvasBlinkProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to record describing entry. */
+CanvasBlinkProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to record describing entry. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) clientData;
 
@@ -5073,9 +4918,9 @@ CanvasBlinkProc(clientData)
  *
  * CanvasFocusProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called whenever a canvas gets or loses the
- *	input focus.  It's also called whenever the window is
- *	reconfigured while it has the focus.
+ *	This function is called whenever a canvas gets or loses the input
+ *	focus. It's also called whenever the window is reconfigured while it
+ *	has the focus.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -5087,9 +4932,9 @@ CanvasBlinkProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-CanvasFocusProc(canvasPtr, gotFocus)
-    TkCanvas *canvasPtr;	/* Canvas that just got or lost focus. */
-    int gotFocus;		/* 1 means window is getting focus, 0 means
+CanvasFocusProc(
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr,	/* Canvas that just got or lost focus. */
+    int gotFocus)		/* 1 means window is getting focus, 0 means
 				 * it's losing it. */
 {
     Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(canvasPtr->insertBlinkHandler);
@@ -5124,8 +4969,8 @@ CanvasFocusProc(canvasPtr, gotFocus)
  *
  * CanvasSelectTo --
  *
- *	Modify the selection by moving its un-anchored end.  This could
- *	make the selection either larger or smaller.
+ *	Modify the selection by moving its un-anchored end. This could make
+ *	the selection either larger or smaller.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -5137,10 +4982,10 @@ CanvasFocusProc(canvasPtr, gotFocus)
  */
 
 static void
-CanvasSelectTo(canvasPtr, itemPtr, index)
-    TkCanvas *canvasPtr;	/* Information about widget. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item that is to hold selection. */
-    int index;			/* Index of element that is to become the
+CanvasSelectTo(
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr,	/* Information about widget. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is to hold selection. */
+    int index)			/* Index of element that is to become the
 				 * "other" end of the selection. */
 {
     int oldFirst, oldLast;
@@ -5186,15 +5031,15 @@ CanvasSelectTo(canvasPtr, itemPtr, index)
  *
  * CanvasFetchSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk to return part or all of
- *	the selection, when the selection is in a canvas widget.
- *	This procedure always returns the selection as a STRING.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk to return part or all of the selection,
+ *	when the selection is in a canvas widget. This function always returns
+ *	the selection as a STRING.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the number of non-NULL bytes stored
- *	at buffer.  Buffer is filled (or partially filled) with a
- *	NULL-terminated string containing part or all of the selection,
- *	as given by offset and maxBytes.
+ *	The return value is the number of non-NULL bytes stored at buffer.
+ *	Buffer is filled (or partially filled) with a NULL-terminated string
+ *	containing part or all of the selection, as given by offset and
+ *	maxBytes.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5203,15 +5048,14 @@ CanvasSelectTo(canvasPtr, itemPtr, index)
  */
 
 static int
-CanvasFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about canvas widget. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset within selection of first
-					 * character to be returned. */
-    char *buffer;			/* Location in which to place
-					 * selection. */
-    int maxBytes;			/* Maximum number of bytes to place
-					 * at buffer, not including terminating
-					 * NULL character. */
+CanvasFetchSelection(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about canvas widget. */
+    int offset,			/* Offset within selection of first character
+				 * to be returned. */
+    char *buffer,		/* Location in which to place selection. */
+    int maxBytes)		/* Maximum number of bytes to place at buffer,
+				 * not including terminating NULL
+				 * character. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) clientData;
 
@@ -5231,22 +5075,22 @@ CanvasFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  *
  * CanvasLostSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is called back by Tk when the selection is
- *	grabbed away from a canvas widget.
+ *	This function is called back by Tk when the selection is grabbed away
+ *	from a canvas widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The existing selection is unhighlighted, and the window is
- *	marked as not containing a selection.
+ *	The existing selection is unhighlighted, and the window is marked as
+ *	not containing a selection.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-CanvasLostSelection(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about entry widget. */
+CanvasLostSelection(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about entry widget. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) clientData;
 
@@ -5262,13 +5106,11 @@ CanvasLostSelection(clientData)
  *
  * GridAlign --
  *
- *	Given a coordinate and a grid spacing, this procedure
- *	computes the location of the nearest grid line to the
- *	coordinate.
+ *	Given a coordinate and a grid spacing, this function computes the
+ *	location of the nearest grid line to the coordinate.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the location of the grid line nearest
- *	to coord.
+ *	The return value is the location of the grid line nearest to coord.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5277,10 +5119,10 @@ CanvasLostSelection(clientData)
  */
 
 static double
-GridAlign(coord, spacing)
-    double coord;		/* Coordinate to grid-align. */
-    double spacing;		/* Spacing between grid lines.   If <= 0
-				 * then no alignment is done. */
+GridAlign(
+    double coord,		/* Coordinate to grid-align. */
+    double spacing)		/* Spacing between grid lines. If <= 0 then no
+				 * alignment is done. */
 {
     if (spacing <= 0.0) {
 	return coord;
@@ -5296,15 +5138,14 @@ GridAlign(coord, spacing)
  *
  * ScrollFractions --
  *
- *	Given the range that's visible in the window and the "100%
- *	range" for what's in the canvas, return a list of two
- *	doubles representing the scroll fractions.  This procedure
- *	is used for both x and y scrolling.
+ *	Given the range that's visible in the window and the "100% range" for
+ *	what's in the canvas, return a list of two doubles representing the
+ *	scroll fractions. This function is used for both x and y scrolling.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The memory pointed to by string is modified to hold
- *	two real numbers containing the scroll fractions (between
- *	0 and 1) corresponding to the other arguments.
+ *	A List Tcl_Obj with two real numbers (Double Tcl_Objs) containing the
+ *	scroll fractions (between 0 and 1) corresponding to the other
+ *	arguments.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5313,14 +5154,14 @@ GridAlign(coord, spacing)
  */
 
 static Tcl_Obj *
-ScrollFractions(screen1, screen2, object1, object2)
-    int screen1;		/* Lowest coordinate visible in the window. */
-    int screen2;		/* Highest coordinate visible in the window. */
-    int object1;		/* Lowest coordinate in the object. */
-    int object2;		/* Highest coordinate in the object. */
+ScrollFractions(
+    int screen1,		/* Lowest coordinate visible in the window. */
+    int screen2,		/* Highest coordinate visible in the window. */
+    int object1,		/* Lowest coordinate in the object. */
+    int object2)		/* Highest coordinate in the object. */
 {
+    Tcl_Obj *buffer[2];
     double range, f1, f2;
-    char buffer[2*TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE+2];
 
     range = object2 - object1;
     if (range <= 0) {
@@ -5339,8 +5180,9 @@ ScrollFractions(screen1, screen2, object1, object2)
 	    f2 = f1;
 	}
     }
-    sprintf(buffer, "%g %g", f1, f2);
-    return Tcl_NewStringObj(buffer, -1);
+    buffer[0] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(f1);
+    buffer[1] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(f2);
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(2, buffer);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -5348,46 +5190,45 @@ ScrollFractions(screen1, screen2, object1, object2)
  *
  * CanvasUpdateScrollbars --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever a canvas has changed in
- *	a way that requires scrollbars to be redisplayed (e.g. the
- *	view in the canvas has changed).
+ *	This function is invoked whenever a canvas has changed in a way that
+ *	requires scrollbars to be redisplayed (e.g. the view in the canvas has
+ *	changed).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If there are scrollbars associated with the canvas, then
- *	their scrolling commands are invoked to cause them to
- *	redisplay.  If errors occur, additional Tcl commands may
- *	be invoked to process the errors.
+ *	If there are scrollbars associated with the canvas, then their
+ *	scrolling commands are invoked to cause them to redisplay. If errors
+ *	occur, additional Tcl commands may be invoked to process the errors.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-CanvasUpdateScrollbars(canvasPtr)
-    TkCanvas *canvasPtr;		/* Information about canvas. */
+CanvasUpdateScrollbars(
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr)		/* Information about canvas. */
 {
     int result;
     Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    int xOrigin, yOrigin, inset, width, height, scrollX1, scrollX2,
-        scrollY1, scrollY2;
+    int xOrigin, yOrigin, inset, width, height;
+    int scrollX1, scrollX2, scrollY1, scrollY2;
     char *xScrollCmd, *yScrollCmd;
 
     /*
      * Save all the relevant values from the canvasPtr, because it might be
      * deleted as part of either of the two calls to Tcl_VarEval below.
      */
-    
+
     interp = canvasPtr->interp;
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
     xScrollCmd = canvasPtr->xScrollCmd;
-    if (xScrollCmd != (char *) NULL) {
-        Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) xScrollCmd);
+    if (xScrollCmd != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) xScrollCmd);
     }
     yScrollCmd = canvasPtr->yScrollCmd;
-    if (yScrollCmd != (char *) NULL) {
-        Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) yScrollCmd);
+    if (yScrollCmd != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) yScrollCmd);
     }
     xOrigin = canvasPtr->xOrigin;
     yOrigin = canvasPtr->yOrigin;
@@ -5402,27 +5243,27 @@ CanvasUpdateScrollbars(canvasPtr)
     if (canvasPtr->xScrollCmd != NULL) {
 	Tcl_Obj *fractions = ScrollFractions(xOrigin + inset,
 		xOrigin + width - inset, scrollX1, scrollX2);
-	result = Tcl_VarEval(interp, xScrollCmd, " ", 
-		Tcl_GetString(fractions), (char *) NULL);
+	result = Tcl_VarEval(interp, xScrollCmd, " ", Tcl_GetString(fractions),
+		NULL);
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(fractions);
 	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
 	}
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-        Tcl_Release((ClientData) xScrollCmd);
+	Tcl_Release((ClientData) xScrollCmd);
     }
 
     if (yScrollCmd != NULL) {
 	Tcl_Obj *fractions = ScrollFractions(yOrigin + inset,
 		yOrigin + height - inset, scrollY1, scrollY2);
-	result = Tcl_VarEval(interp, yScrollCmd, " ", 
-		Tcl_GetString(fractions), (char *) NULL);
+	result = Tcl_VarEval(interp, yScrollCmd, " ", Tcl_GetString(fractions),
+		NULL);
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(fractions);
 	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
 	}
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-        Tcl_Release((ClientData) yScrollCmd);
+	Tcl_Release((ClientData) yScrollCmd);
     }
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
 }
@@ -5432,38 +5273,35 @@ CanvasUpdateScrollbars(canvasPtr)
  *
  * CanvasSetOrigin --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to change the mapping between
- *	canvas coordinates and screen coordinates in the canvas
- *	window.
+ *	This function is invoked to change the mapping between canvas
+ *	coordinates and screen coordinates in the canvas window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The canvas will be redisplayed to reflect the change in
- *	view.  In addition, scrollbars will be updated if there
- *	are any.
+ *	The canvas will be redisplayed to reflect the change in view. In
+ *	addition, scrollbars will be updated if there are any.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, xOrigin, yOrigin)
-    TkCanvas *canvasPtr;	/* Information about canvas. */
-    int xOrigin;		/* New X origin for canvas (canvas x-coord
+CanvasSetOrigin(
+    TkCanvas *canvasPtr,	/* Information about canvas. */
+    int xOrigin,		/* New X origin for canvas (canvas x-coord
 				 * corresponding to left edge of canvas
 				 * window). */
-    int yOrigin;		/* New Y origin for canvas (canvas y-coord
+    int yOrigin)		/* New Y origin for canvas (canvas y-coord
 				 * corresponding to top edge of canvas
 				 * window). */
 {
     int left, right, top, bottom, delta;
 
     /*
-     * If scroll increments have been set, round the window origin
-     * to the nearest multiple of the increments.  Remember, the
-     * origin is the place just inside the borders,  not the upper
-     * left corner.
+     * If scroll increments have been set, round the window origin to the
+     * nearest multiple of the increments. Remember, the origin is the place
+     * just inside the borders, not the upper left corner.
      */
 
     if (canvasPtr->xScrollIncrement > 0) {
@@ -5491,13 +5329,13 @@ CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, xOrigin, yOrigin)
 
     /*
      * Adjust the origin if necessary to keep as much as possible of the
-     * canvas in the view.  The variables left, right, etc. keep track of
-     * how much extra space there is on each side of the view before it
-     * will stick out past the scroll region.  If one side sticks out past
-     * the edge of the scroll region, adjust the view to bring that side
-     * back to the edge of the scrollregion (but don't move it so much that
-     * the other side sticks out now).  If scroll increments are in effect,
-     * be sure to adjust only by full increments.
+     * canvas in the view. The variables left, right, etc. keep track of how
+     * much extra space there is on each side of the view before it will stick
+     * out past the scroll region.  If one side sticks out past the edge of
+     * the scroll region, adjust the view to bring that side back to the edge
+     * of the scrollregion (but don't move it so much that the other side
+     * sticks out now). If scroll increments are in effect, be sure to adjust
+     * only by full increments.
      */
 
     if ((canvasPtr->confine) && (canvasPtr->regionString != NULL)) {
@@ -5540,11 +5378,11 @@ CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, xOrigin, yOrigin)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Tricky point: must redisplay not only everything that's visible
-     * in the window's final configuration, but also everything that was
-     * visible in the initial configuration.  This is needed because some
-     * item types, like windows, need to know when they move off-screen
-     * so they can explicitly undisplay themselves.
+     * Tricky point: must redisplay not only everything that's visible in the
+     * window's final configuration, but also everything that was visible in
+     * the initial configuration. This is needed because some item types, like
+     * windows, need to know when they move off-screen so they can explicitly
+     * undisplay themselves.
      */
 
     Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr,
@@ -5559,37 +5397,38 @@ CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, xOrigin, yOrigin)
 	    canvasPtr->xOrigin + Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin),
 	    canvasPtr->yOrigin + Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin));
 }
-
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * GetStringsFromObjs
+ * TkGetStringsFromObjs --
  *
  * Results:
  *	Converts object list into string list.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Memory is allocated for the argv array, which must
- *	be freed using ckfree() when no longer needed.
+ *	Memory is allocated for the objv array, which must be freed using
+ *	ckfree() when no longer needed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 /* ARGSUSED */
 static CONST char **
-GetStringsFromObjs(argc, objv)
-    int argc;
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];
+TkGetStringsFromObjs(
+    int objc,
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])
 {
     register int i;
     CONST char **argv;
-    if (argc <= 0) {
+    if (objc <= 0) {
 	return NULL;
     }
-    argv = (CONST char **) ckalloc((argc+1) * sizeof(char *));
-    for (i = 0; i < argc; i++) {
-	argv[i] = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], NULL);
+    argv = (CONST char **) ckalloc((objc+1) * sizeof(char *));
+    for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
+	argv[i] = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
     }
-    argv[argc] = 0;
+    argv[objc] = 0;
     return argv;
 }
 
@@ -5598,16 +5437,15 @@ GetStringsFromObjs(argc, objv)
  *
  * Tk_CanvasPsColor --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by individual canvas items when
- *	they want to set a color value for output.  Given information
- *	about an X color, this procedure will generate Postscript
- *	commands to set up an appropriate color in Postscript.
+ *	This function is called by individual canvas items when they want to
+ *	set a color value for output. Given information about an X color, this
+ *	function will generate Postscript commands to set up an appropriate
+ *	color in Postscript.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurs
- *	then an error message will be left in interp->result.
- *	If no error occurs, then additional Postscript will be
- *	appended to interp->result.
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs then an error
+ *	message will be left in interp->result. If no error occurs, then
+ *	additional Postscript will be appended to interp->result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5616,11 +5454,11 @@ GetStringsFromObjs(argc, objv)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, colorPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for returning Postscript
-					 * or error message. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about canvas. */
-    XColor *colorPtr;			/* Information about color. */
+Tk_CanvasPsColor(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for returning Postscript or
+				 * error message. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about canvas. */
+    XColor *colorPtr)		/* Information about color. */
 {
     return Tk_PostscriptColor(interp, ((TkCanvas *) canvas)->psInfo,
 	    colorPtr);
@@ -5631,31 +5469,30 @@ Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, colorPtr)
  *
  * Tk_CanvasPsFont --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by individual canvas items when
- *	they want to output text.  Given information about an X
- *	font, this procedure will generate Postscript commands
- *	to set up an appropriate font in Postscript.
+ *	This function is called by individual canvas items when they want to
+ *	output text. Given information about an X font, this function will
+ *	generate Postscript commands to set up an appropriate font in
+ *	Postscript.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurs
- *	then an error message will be left in interp->result.
- *	If no error occurs, then additional Postscript will be
- *	appended to the interp->result.
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs then an error
+ *	message will be left in interp->result. If no error occurs, then
+ *	additional Postscript will be appended to the interp->result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The Postscript font name is entered into psInfoPtr->fontTable
- *	if it wasn't already there.
+ *	The Postscript font name is entered into psInfoPtr->fontTable if it
+ *	wasn't already there.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_CanvasPsFont(interp, canvas, tkfont)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for returning Postscript
-					 * or error message. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about canvas. */
-    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* Information about font in which text
-					 * is to be printed. */
+Tk_CanvasPsFont(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for returning Postscript or
+				 * error message. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about canvas. */
+    Tk_Font tkfont)		/* Information about font in which text is to
+				 * be printed. */
 {
     return Tk_PostscriptFont(interp, ((TkCanvas *) canvas)->psInfo, tkfont);
 }
@@ -5665,16 +5502,14 @@ Tk_CanvasPsFont(interp, canvas, tkfont)
  *
  * Tk_CanvasPsBitmap --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to output the contents of a
- *	sub-region of a bitmap in proper image data format for
- *	Postscript (i.e. data between angle brackets, one bit
- *	per pixel).
+ *	This function is called to output the contents of a sub-region of a
+ *	bitmap in proper image data format for Postscript (i.e. data between
+ *	angle brackets, one bit per pixel).
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurs
- *	then an error message will be left in interp->result.
- *	If no error occurs, then additional Postscript will be
- *	appended to interp->result.
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs then an error
+ *	message will be left in interp->result. If no error occurs, then
+ *	additional Postscript will be appended to interp->result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5683,15 +5518,14 @@ Tk_CanvasPsFont(interp, canvas, tkfont)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_CanvasPsBitmap(interp, canvas, bitmap, startX, startY, width, height)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for returning Postscript
-					 * or error message. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about canvas. */
-    Pixmap bitmap;			/* Bitmap for which to generate
-					 * Postscript. */
-    int startX, startY;			/* Coordinates of upper-left corner
-					 * of rectangular region to output. */
-    int width, height;			/* Height of rectangular region. */
+Tk_CanvasPsBitmap(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for returning Postscript or
+				 * error message. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about canvas. */
+    Pixmap bitmap,		/* Bitmap for which to generate Postscript. */
+    int startX, int startY,	/* Coordinates of upper-left corner of
+				 * rectangular region to output. */
+    int width, int height)	/* Size of rectangular region. */
 {
     return Tk_PostscriptBitmap(interp, ((TkCanvas *) canvas)->tkwin,
 	    ((TkCanvas *) canvas)->psInfo, bitmap, startX, startY,
@@ -5703,18 +5537,16 @@ Tk_CanvasPsBitmap(interp, canvas, bitmap, startX, startY, width, height)
  *
  * Tk_CanvasPsStipple --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by individual canvas items when
- *	they have created a path that they'd like to be filled with
- *	a stipple pattern.  Given information about an X bitmap,
- *	this procedure will generate Postscript commands to fill
- *	the current clip region using a stipple pattern defined by the
- *	bitmap.
+ *	This function is called by individual canvas items when they have
+ *	created a path that they'd like to be filled with a stipple pattern.
+ *	Given information about an X bitmap, this function will generate
+ *	Postscript commands to fill the current clip region using a stipple
+ *	pattern defined by the bitmap.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurs
- *	then an error message will be left in interp->result.
- *	If no error occurs, then additional Postscript will be
- *	appended to interp->result.
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs then an error
+ *	message will be left in interp->result. If no error occurs, then
+ *	additional Postscript will be appended to interp->result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5723,11 +5555,11 @@ Tk_CanvasPsBitmap(interp, canvas, bitmap, startX, startY, width, height)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, bitmap)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for returning Postscript
-					 * or error message. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about canvas. */
-    Pixmap bitmap;			/* Bitmap to use for stippling. */
+Tk_CanvasPsStipple(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for returning Postscript or
+				 * error message. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about canvas. */
+    Pixmap bitmap)		/* Bitmap to use for stippling. */
 {
     return Tk_PostscriptStipple(interp, ((TkCanvas *) canvas)->tkwin,
 	    ((TkCanvas *) canvas)->psInfo, bitmap);
@@ -5738,12 +5570,11 @@ Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, bitmap)
  *
  * Tk_CanvasPsY --
  *
- *	Given a y-coordinate in canvas coordinates, this procedure
- *	returns a y-coordinate to use for Postscript output.
+ *	Given a y-coordinate in canvas coordinates, this function returns a
+ *	y-coordinate to use for Postscript output.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns the Postscript coordinate that corresponds to
- *	"y".
+ *	Returns the Postscript coordinate that corresponds to "y".
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5752,10 +5583,10 @@ Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, bitmap)
  */
 
 double
-Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, y)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Token for canvas on whose behalf
-					 * Postscript is being generated. */
-    double y;				/* Y-coordinate in canvas coords. */
+Tk_CanvasPsY(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Token for canvas on whose behalf Postscript
+				 * is being generated. */
+    double y)			/* Y-coordinate in canvas coords. */
 {
     return Tk_PostscriptY(y, ((TkCanvas *) canvas)->psInfo);
 }
@@ -5765,8 +5596,8 @@ Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, y)
  *
  * Tk_CanvasPsPath --
  *
- *	Given an array of points for a path, generate Postscript
- *	commands to create the path.
+ *	Given an array of points for a path, generate Postscript commands to
+ *	create the path.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Postscript commands get appended to what's in interp->result.
@@ -5778,16 +5609,23 @@ Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, y)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_CanvasPsPath(interp, canvas, coordPtr, numPoints)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Put generated Postscript in this
-					 * interpreter's result field. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas on whose behalf Postscript
-					 * is being generated. */
-    double *coordPtr;			/* Pointer to first in array of
-					 * 2*numPoints coordinates giving
-					 * points for path. */
-    int numPoints;			/* Number of points at *coordPtr. */
+Tk_CanvasPsPath(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Put generated Postscript in this
+				 * interpreter's result field. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas on whose behalf Postscript is being
+				 * generated. */
+    double *coordPtr,		/* Pointer to first in array of 2*numPoints
+				 * coordinates giving points for path. */
+    int numPoints)		/* Number of points at *coordPtr. */
 {
     Tk_PostscriptPath(interp, ((TkCanvas *) canvas)->psInfo,
 	    coordPtr, numPoints);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvas.h b/generic/tkCanvas.h
index ad6c555..d009cfa 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvas.h
+++ b/generic/tkCanvas.h
@@ -1,15 +1,14 @@
 /*
  * tkCanvas.h --
  *
- *	Declarations shared among all the files that implement
- *	canvas widgets.
+ *	Declarations shared among all the files that implement canvas widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKCANVAS
@@ -23,36 +22,39 @@
 typedef struct TagSearchExpr_s TagSearchExpr;
 
 struct TagSearchExpr_s {
-    TagSearchExpr *next;        /* for linked lists of expressions - used in bindings */
-    Tk_Uid uid;                 /* the uid of the whole expression */
-    Tk_Uid *uids;               /* expresion compiled to an array of uids */
-    int allocated;              /* available space for array of uids */
-    int length;                 /* length of expression */
-    int index;                  /* current position in expression evaluation */
-    int match;                  /* this expression matches event's item's tags*/
+    TagSearchExpr *next;	/* For linked lists of expressions - used in
+				 * bindings. */
+    Tk_Uid uid;			/* The uid of the whole expression. */
+    Tk_Uid *uids;		/* Expresion compiled to an array of uids. */
+    int allocated;		/* Available space for array of uids. */
+    int length;			/* Length of expression. */
+    int index;			/* Current position in expression
+				 * evaluation. */
+    int match;			/* This expression matches event's item's
+				 * tags. */
 };
 #endif /* not USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */
 
 /*
- * The record below describes a canvas widget.  It is made available
- * to the item procedures so they can access certain shared fields such
- * as the overall displacement and scale factor for the canvas.
+ * The record below describes a canvas widget. It is made available to the
+ * item functions so they can access certain shared fields such as the overall
+ * displacement and scale factor for the canvas.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkCanvas {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the canvas.  NULL
-				 * means that the window has been destroyed
-				 * but the data structures haven't yet been
-				 * cleaned up.*/
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget;  needed, among
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the canvas. NULL means
+				 * that the window has been destroyed but the
+				 * data structures haven't yet been cleaned
+				 * up.*/
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget; needed, among
 				 * other things, to release resources after
 				 * tkwin has already gone away. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with canvas. */
     Tcl_Command widgetCmd;	/* Token for canvas's widget command. */
-    Tk_Item *firstItemPtr;	/* First in list of all items in canvas,
-				 * or NULL if canvas empty. */
-    Tk_Item *lastItemPtr;	/* Last in list of all items in canvas,
-				 * or NULL if canvas empty. */
+    Tk_Item *firstItemPtr;	/* First in list of all items in canvas, or
+				 * NULL if canvas empty. */
+    Tk_Item *lastItemPtr;	/* Last in list of all items in canvas, or
+				 * NULL if canvas empty. */
 
     /*
      * Information used when displaying widget:
@@ -62,39 +64,39 @@ typedef struct TkCanvas {
     Tk_3DBorder bgBorder;	/* Used for canvas background. */
     int relief;			/* Indicates whether window as a whole is
 				 * raised, sunken, or flat. */
-    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw
-				 * around widget when it has the focus.
-				 * <= 0 means don't draw a highlight. */
+    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw around
+				 * widget when it has the focus. <= 0 means
+				 * don't draw a highlight. */
     XColor *highlightBgColorPtr;
-				/* Color for drawing traversal highlight
-				 * area when highlight is off. */
+				/* Color for drawing traversal highlight area
+				 * when highlight is off. */
     XColor *highlightColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing traversal highlight. */
     int inset;			/* Total width of all borders, including
 				 * traversal highlight and 3-D border.
-				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must
-				 * be offset from outside edges to leave
-				 * room for borders. */
+				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must be
+				 * offset from outside edges to leave room for
+				 * borders. */
     GC pixmapGC;		/* Used to copy bits from a pixmap to the
 				 * screen and also to clear the pixmap. */
     int width, height;		/* Dimensions to request for canvas window,
 				 * specified in pixels. */
-    int redrawX1, redrawY1;	/* Upper left corner of area to redraw,
-				 * in pixel coordinates.  Border pixels
-				 * are included.  Only valid if
-				 * REDRAW_PENDING flag is set. */
-    int redrawX2, redrawY2;	/* Lower right corner of area to redraw,
-				 * in integer canvas coordinates.  Border
-				 * pixels will *not* be redrawn. */
-    int confine;		/* Non-zero means constrain view to keep
-				 * as much of canvas visible as possible. */
+    int redrawX1, redrawY1;	/* Upper left corner of area to redraw, in
+				 * pixel coordinates. Border pixels are
+				 * included. Only valid if REDRAW_PENDING flag
+				 * is set. */
+    int redrawX2, redrawY2;	/* Lower right corner of area to redraw, in
+				 * integer canvas coordinates. Border pixels
+				 * will *not* be redrawn. */
+    int confine;		/* Non-zero means constrain view to keep as
+				 * much of canvas visible as possible. */
 
     /*
      * Information used to manage the selection and insertion cursor:
      */
 
-    Tk_CanvasTextInfo textInfo; /* Contains lots of fields;  see tk.h for
-				 * details.  This structure is shared with
-				 * the code that implements individual items. */
+    Tk_CanvasTextInfo textInfo; /* Contains lots of fields; see tk.h for
+				 * details. This structure is shared with the
+				 * code that implements individual items. */
     int insertOnTime;		/* Number of milliseconds cursor should spend
 				 * in "on" state for each blink. */
     int insertOffTime;		/* Number of milliseconds cursor should spend
@@ -104,7 +106,7 @@ typedef struct TkCanvas {
 				 * off. */
 
     /*
-     * Transformation applied to canvas as a whole:  to compute screen
+     * Transformation applied to canvas as a whole: to compute screen
      * coordinates (X,Y) from canvas coordinates (x,y), do the following:
      *
      * X = x - xOrigin;
@@ -116,65 +118,63 @@ typedef struct TkCanvas {
 				 * canvas pixel units. */
     int drawableXOrigin, drawableYOrigin;
 				/* During redisplay, these fields give the
-				 * canvas coordinates corresponding to
-				 * the upper-left corner of the drawable
-				 * where items are actually being drawn
-				 * (typically a pixmap smaller than the
-				 * whole window). */
+				 * canvas coordinates corresponding to the
+				 * upper-left corner of the drawable where
+				 * items are actually being drawn (typically a
+				 * pixmap smaller than the whole window). */
 
     /*
      * Information used for event bindings associated with items.
      */
 
     Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
-				/* Table of all bindings currently defined
-				 * for this canvas.  NULL means that no
-				 * bindings exist, so the table hasn't been
-				 * created.  Each "object" used for this
-				 * table is either a Tk_Uid for a tag or
-				 * the address of an item named by id. */
+				/* Table of all bindings currently defined for
+				 * this canvas. NULL means that no bindings
+				 * exist, so the table hasn't been created.
+				 * Each "object" used for this table is either
+				 * a Tk_Uid for a tag or the address of an
+				 * item named by id. */
     Tk_Item *currentItemPtr;	/* The item currently containing the mouse
 				 * pointer, or NULL if none. */
     Tk_Item *newCurrentPtr;	/* The item that is about to become the
-				 * current one, or NULL.  This field is
-				 * used to detect deletions  of the new
-				 * current item pointer that occur during
-				 * Leave processing of the previous current
-				 * item.  */
-    double closeEnough;		/* The mouse is assumed to be inside an
-				 * item if it is this close to it. */
-    XEvent pickEvent;		/* The event upon which the current choice
-				 * of currentItem is based.  Must be saved
-				 * so that if the currentItem is deleted,
-				 * can pick another. */
-    int state;			/* Last known modifier state.  Used to
-				 * defer picking a new current object
-				 * while buttons are down. */
+				 * current one, or NULL. This field is used to
+				 * detect deletions of the new current item
+				 * pointer that occur during Leave processing
+				 * of the previous current item. */
+    double closeEnough;		/* The mouse is assumed to be inside an item
+				 * if it is this close to it. */
+    XEvent pickEvent;		/* The event upon which the current choice of
+				 * currentItem is based. Must be saved so that
+				 * if the currentItem is deleted, can pick
+				 * another. */
+    int state;			/* Last known modifier state. Used to defer
+				 * picking a new current object while buttons
+				 * are down. */
 
     /*
      * Information used for managing scrollbars:
      */
 
     char *xScrollCmd;		/* Command prefix for communicating with
-				 * horizontal scrollbar.  NULL means no
-				 * horizontal scrollbar.  Malloc'ed*/
+				 * horizontal scrollbar. NULL means no
+				 * horizontal scrollbar. Malloc'ed. */
     char *yScrollCmd;		/* Command prefix for communicating with
-				 * vertical scrollbar.  NULL means no
-				 * vertical scrollbar.  Malloc'ed*/
+				 * vertical scrollbar. NULL means no vertical
+				 * scrollbar. Malloc'ed. */
     int scrollX1, scrollY1, scrollX2, scrollY2;
 				/* These four coordinates define the region
 				 * that is the 100% area for scrolling (i.e.
 				 * these numbers determine the size and
 				 * location of the sliders on scrollbars).
 				 * Units are pixels in canvas coords. */
-    char *regionString;		/* The option string from which scrollX1
-				 * etc. are derived.  Malloc'ed. */
+    char *regionString;		/* The option string from which scrollX1 etc.
+				 * are derived. Malloc'ed. */
     int xScrollIncrement;	/* If >0, defines a grid for horizontal
-				 * scrolling.  This is the size of the "unit",
+				 * scrolling. This is the size of the "unit",
 				 * and the left edge of the screen will always
 				 * lie on an even unit boundary. */
     int yScrollIncrement;	/* If >0, defines a grid for horizontal
-				 * scrolling.  This is the size of the "unit",
+				 * scrolling. This is the size of the "unit",
 				 * and the left edge of the screen will always
 				 * lie on an even unit boundary. */
 
@@ -195,11 +195,11 @@ typedef struct TkCanvas {
      */
 
     Tk_Item *hotPtr;		/* Pointer to "hot" item (one that's been
-				 * recently used.  NULL means there's no
-				 * hot item. */
+				 * recently used. NULL means there's no hot
+				 * item. */
     Tk_Item *hotPrevPtr;	/* Pointer to predecessor to hotPtr (NULL
-				 * means item is first in list).  This is
-				 * only a hint and may not really be hotPtr's
+				 * means item is first in list). This is only
+				 * a hint and may not really be hotPtr's
 				 * predecessor. */
 
     /*
@@ -207,61 +207,61 @@ typedef struct TkCanvas {
      */
 
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
-    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option;  not used in
-				 * the C code, but used by keyboard traversal
-				 * scripts.  Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
-    double pixelsPerMM;		/* Scale factor between MM and pixels;
-				 * used when converting coordinates. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flags;  see below for
+    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
+				 * C code, but used by keyboard traversal
+				 * scripts. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
+    double pixelsPerMM;		/* Scale factor between MM and pixels; used
+				 * when converting coordinates. */
+    int flags;			/* Various flags; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
-    int nextId;			/* Number to use as id for next item
-				 * created in widget. */
-    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo;
-				/* Pointer to information used for generating
-				 * Postscript for the canvas.  NULL means
-				 * no Postscript is currently being
-				 * generated. */
+    int nextId;			/* Number to use as id for next item created
+				 * in widget. */
+    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo;	/* Pointer to information used for generating
+				 * Postscript for the canvas. NULL means no
+				 * Postscript is currently being generated. */
     Tcl_HashTable idTable;	/* Table of integer indices. */
+
     /*
      * Additional information, added by the 'dash'-patch
      */
-    VOID *reserved1;
-    Tk_State canvas_state;	/* state of canvas */
-    VOID *reserved2;
-    VOID *reserved3;
+
+    void *reserved1;
+    Tk_State canvas_state;	/* State of canvas. */
+    void *reserved2;
+    void *reserved3;
     Tk_TSOffset tsoffset;
 #ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH
-    TagSearchExpr *bindTagExprs; /* linked list of tag expressions used in bindings */
+    TagSearchExpr *bindTagExprs;/* Linked list of tag expressions used in
+				 * bindings. */
 #endif
 } TkCanvas;
 
 /*
  * Flag bits for canvases:
  *
- * REDRAW_PENDING -		1 means a DoWhenIdle handler has already
- *				been created to redraw some or all of the
- *				canvas.
+ * REDRAW_PENDING -		1 means a DoWhenIdle handler has already been
+ *				created to redraw some or all of the canvas.
  * REDRAW_BORDERS - 		1 means that the borders need to be redrawn
  *				during the next redisplay operation.
  * REPICK_NEEDED -		1 means DisplayCanvas should pick a new
  *				current item before redrawing the canvas.
- * GOT_FOCUS -			1 means the focus is currently in this
- *				widget, so should draw the insertion cursor
- *				and traversal highlight.
+ * GOT_FOCUS -			1 means the focus is currently in this widget,
+ *				so should draw the insertion cursor and
+ *				traversal highlight.
  * CURSOR_ON -			1 means the insertion cursor is in the "on"
- *				phase of its blink cycle.  0 means either
- *				we don't have the focus or the cursor is in
- *				the "off" phase of its cycle.
- * UPDATE_SCROLLBARS -		1 means the scrollbars should get updated
- *				as part of the next display operation.
- * LEFT_GRABBED_ITEM -		1 means that the mouse left the current
- *				item while a grab was in effect, so we
- *				didn't change canvasPtr->currentItemPtr.
+ *				phase of its blink cycle. 0 means either we
+ *				don't have the focus or the cursor is in the
+ *				"off" phase of its cycle.
+ * UPDATE_SCROLLBARS -		1 means the scrollbars should get updated as
+ *				part of the next display operation.
+ * LEFT_GRABBED_ITEM -		1 means that the mouse left the current item
+ *				while a grab was in effect, so we didn't
+ *				change canvasPtr->currentItemPtr.
  * REPICK_IN_PROGRESS -		1 means PickCurrentItem is currently
- *				executing.  If it should be called recursively,
+ *				executing. If it should be called recursively,
  *				it should simply return immediately.
- * BBOX_NOT_EMPTY -		1 means that the bounding box of the area
- *				that should be redrawn is not empty.
+ * BBOX_NOT_EMPTY -		1 means that the bounding box of the area that
+ *				should be redrawn is not empty.
  */
 
 #define REDRAW_PENDING		1
@@ -277,8 +277,8 @@ typedef struct TkCanvas {
 /*
  * Flag bits for canvas items (redraw_flags):
  *
- * FORCE_REDRAW -		1 means that the new coordinates of some
- *				item are not yet registered using
+ * FORCE_REDRAW -		1 means that the new coordinates of some item
+ *				are not yet registered using
  *				Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw(). It should still
  *				be done by the general canvas code.
  */
@@ -286,20 +286,21 @@ typedef struct TkCanvas {
 #define FORCE_REDRAW		8
 
 /*
- * Canvas-related procedures that are shared among Tk modules but not
- * exported to the outside world:
+ * Canvas-related functions that are shared among Tk modules but not exported
+ * to the outside world:
  */
 
-extern int		TkCanvPostscriptCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkCanvPostscriptCmd(TkCanvas *canvasPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv);
+MODULE_SCOPE int 	TkCanvTranslatePath(TkCanvas *canvPtr,
+			    int numVertex, double *coordPtr, int closed,
+			    XPoint *outPtr);
 /*
- * Other procedures that are shared among Tk canvas modules but not exported
- * to the outside world:
+ * Standard item types provided by Tk:
  */
-extern int 		TkCanvTranslatePath _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCanvas *canvPtr,
-			    int numVertex, double *coordPtr, int closed,
-			    XPoint *outPtr));
 
+MODULE_SCOPE Tk_ItemType tkArcType, tkBitmapType, tkImageType, tkLineType;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tk_ItemType tkOvalType, tkPolygonType;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tk_ItemType tkRectangleType, tkTextType, tkWindowType;
 
 #endif /* _TKCANVAS */
diff --git a/generic/tkClipboard.c b/generic/tkClipboard.c
index e4d5c8e..c6748a1 100644
--- a/generic/tkClipboard.c
+++ b/generic/tkClipboard.c
@@ -1,48 +1,46 @@
 /*
  * tkClipboard.c --
  *
- * 	This file manages the clipboard for the Tk toolkit,
- * 	maintaining a collection of data buffers that will be
- * 	supplied on demand to requesting applications.
+ * 	This file manages the clipboard for the Tk toolkit, maintaining a
+ * 	collection of data buffers that will be supplied on demand to
+ * 	requesting applications.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkSelect.h"
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures used only in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions used only in this file:
  */
 
-static int		ClipboardAppHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes));
-static int		ClipboardHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes));
-static int		ClipboardWindowHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, int offset, char *buffer,
-			    int maxBytes));
-static void		ClipboardLostSel _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int		ClipboardGetProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, char *portion));
+static int		ClipboardAppHandler(ClientData clientData,
+			    int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes);
+static int		ClipboardHandler(ClientData clientData,
+			    int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes);
+static int		ClipboardWindowHandler(ClientData clientData,
+			    int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes);
+static void		ClipboardLostSel(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ClipboardGetProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, char *portion);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * ClipboardHandler --
  *
- *	This procedure acts as selection handler for the
- *	clipboard manager.  It extracts the required chunk of
- *	data from the buffer chain for a given selection target.
+ *	This function acts as selection handler for the clipboard manager. It
+ *	extracts the required chunk of data from the buffer chain for a given
+ *	selection target.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a count of the number of bytes
- *	actually stored at buffer.
+ *	The return value is a count of the number of bytes actually stored at
+ *	buffer.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -51,17 +49,17 @@ static int		ClipboardGetProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
  */
 
 static int
-ClipboardHandler(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about data to fetch. */
-    int offset;			/* Return selection bytes starting at this
+ClipboardHandler(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about data to fetch. */
+    int offset,			/* Return selection bytes starting at this
 				 * offset. */
-    char *buffer;		/* Place to store converted selection. */
-    int maxBytes;		/* Maximum # of bytes to store at buffer. */
+    char *buffer,		/* Place to store converted selection. */
+    int maxBytes)		/* Maximum # of bytes to store at buffer. */
 {
     TkClipboardTarget *targetPtr = (TkClipboardTarget*) clientData;
     TkClipboardBuffer *cbPtr;
     char *srcPtr, *destPtr;
-    int count = 0;
+    size_t count = 0;
     int scanned = 0;
     size_t length, freeCount;
 
@@ -104,7 +102,7 @@ ClipboardHandler(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
 	srcPtr = cbPtr->buffer;
 	length = cbPtr->length;
     }
-    return count;
+    return (int)count;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -112,16 +110,15 @@ ClipboardHandler(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  *
  * ClipboardAppHandler --
  *
- *	This procedure acts as selection handler for retrievals of type
- *	TK_APPLICATION.  It returns the name of the application that
- *	owns the clipboard.  Note:  we can't use the default Tk
- *	selection handler for this selection type, because the clipboard
- *	window isn't a "real" window and doesn't have the necessary
- *	information.
+ *	This function acts as selection handler for retrievals of type
+ *	TK_APPLICATION. It returns the name of the application that owns the
+ *	clipboard. Note: we can't use the default Tk selection handler for
+ *	this selection type, because the clipboard window isn't a "real"
+ *	window and doesn't have the necessary information.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a count of the number of bytes
- *	actually stored at buffer.
+ *	The return value is a count of the number of bytes actually stored at
+ *	buffer.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -130,12 +127,12 @@ ClipboardHandler(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  */
 
 static int
-ClipboardAppHandler(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to TkDisplay structure. */
-    int offset;			/* Return selection bytes starting at this
+ClipboardAppHandler(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to TkDisplay structure. */
+    int offset,			/* Return selection bytes starting at this
 				 * offset. */
-    char *buffer;		/* Place to store converted selection. */
-    int maxBytes;		/* Maximum # of bytes to store at buffer. */
+    char *buffer,		/* Place to store converted selection. */
+    int maxBytes)		/* Maximum # of bytes to store at buffer. */
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = (TkDisplay *) clientData;
     size_t length;
@@ -151,7 +148,7 @@ ClipboardAppHandler(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
 	length = maxBytes;
     }
     strncpy(buffer, p, length);
-    return length;
+    return (int)length;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -159,15 +156,13 @@ ClipboardAppHandler(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  *
  * ClipboardWindowHandler --
  *
- *	This procedure acts as selection handler for retrievals of
- *	type TK_WINDOW.  Since the clipboard doesn't correspond to
- *	any particular window, we just return ".".  We can't use Tk's
- *	default handler for this selection type, because the clipboard
- *	window isn't a valid window.
+ *	This function acts as selection handler for retrievals of type
+ *	TK_WINDOW. Since the clipboard doesn't correspond to any particular
+ *	window, we just return ".". We can't use Tk's default handler for this
+ *	selection type, because the clipboard window isn't a valid window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1, the number of non-null bytes stored
- *	at buffer.
+ *	The return value is 1, the number of non-null bytes stored at buffer.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -176,12 +171,12 @@ ClipboardAppHandler(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  */
 
 static int
-ClipboardWindowHandler(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Not used. */
-    int offset;			/* Return selection bytes starting at this
+ClipboardWindowHandler(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Not used. */
+    int offset,			/* Return selection bytes starting at this
 				 * offset. */
-    char *buffer;		/* Place to store converted selection. */
-    int maxBytes;		/* Maximum # of bytes to store at buffer. */
+    char *buffer,		/* Place to store converted selection. */
+    int maxBytes)		/* Maximum # of bytes to store at buffer. */
 {
     buffer[0] = '.';
     buffer[1] = 0;
@@ -193,9 +188,9 @@ ClipboardWindowHandler(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  *
  * ClipboardLostSel --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever clipboard ownership is
- *	claimed by another window.  It just sets a flag so that we
- *	know the clipboard was taken away.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever clipboard ownership is claimed by
+ *	another window. It just sets a flag so that we know the clipboard was
+ *	taken away.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -207,8 +202,8 @@ ClipboardWindowHandler(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  */
 
 static void
-ClipboardLostSel(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to TkDisplay structure. */
+ClipboardLostSel(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to TkDisplay structure. */
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = (TkDisplay*) clientData;
 
@@ -220,33 +215,31 @@ ClipboardLostSel(clientData)
  *
  * Tk_ClipboardClear --
  *
- *	Take control of the clipboard and clear out the previous
- *	contents.  This procedure must be invoked before any
- *	calls to Tk_ClipboardAppend.
+ *	Take control of the clipboard and clear out the previous contents.
+ *	This function must be invoked before any calls to Tk_ClipboardAppend.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.  If an error occurs, an error message is
- *	left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result. If an error occurs, an error message is left in
+ *	the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	From now on, requests for the CLIPBOARD selection will be
- *	directed to the clipboard manager routines associated with
- *	clipWindow for the display of tkwin.  In order to guarantee
- *	atomicity, no event handling should occur between
- *	Tk_ClipboardClear and the following Tk_ClipboardAppend
- *	calls.  This procedure may cause a user-defined LostSel command 
- * 	to be invoked when the CLIPBOARD is claimed, so any calling
- *	function should be reentrant at the point Tk_ClipboardClear is
+ *	From now on, requests for the CLIPBOARD selection will be directed to
+ *	the clipboard manager routines associated with clipWindow for the
+ *	display of tkwin. In order to guarantee atomicity, no event handling
+ *	should occur between Tk_ClipboardClear and the following
+ *	Tk_ClipboardAppend calls. This function may cause a user-defined
+ *	LostSel command to be invoked when the CLIPBOARD is claimed, so any
+ *	calling function should be reentrant at the point Tk_ClipboardClear is
  *	invoked.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_ClipboardClear(interp, tkwin)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in application that is clearing
-				 * clipboard;  identifies application and
+Tk_ClipboardClear(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window in application that is clearing
+				 * clipboard; identifies application and
 				 * display. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
@@ -264,8 +257,8 @@ Tk_ClipboardClear(interp, tkwin)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Discard any existing clipboard data and delete the selection
-     * handler(s) associated with that data.
+     * Discard any existing clipboard data and delete the selection handler(s)
+     * associated with that data.
      */
 
     for (targetPtr = dispPtr->clipTargetPtr; targetPtr != NULL;
@@ -301,38 +294,37 @@ Tk_ClipboardClear(interp, tkwin)
  *
  * Tk_ClipboardAppend --
  *
- * 	Append a buffer of data to the clipboard.  The first buffer of
- *	a given type determines the format for that type.  Any successive
- *	appends to that type must have the same format or an error will
- *	be returned.  Tk_ClipboardClear must be called before a sequence
- *	of Tk_ClipboardAppend calls can be issued.  In order to guarantee
+ *	Append a buffer of data to the clipboard. The first buffer of a given
+ *	type determines the format for that type. Any successive appends to
+ *	that type must have the same format or an error will be returned.
+ *	Tk_ClipboardClear must be called before a sequence of
+ *	Tk_ClipboardAppend calls can be issued. In order to guarantee
  *	atomicity, no event handling should occur between Tk_ClipboardClear
  *	and the following Tk_ClipboardAppend calls.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.  If an error is returned, an error message
- *	is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result. If an error is returned, an error message is
+ *	left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- * 	The specified buffer will be copied onto the end of the clipboard.
- *	The clipboard maintains a list of buffers which will be used to
- *	supply the data for a selection get request.  The first time a given
- *	type is appended, Tk_ClipboardAppend will register a selection
- * 	handler of the appropriate type.
+ *	The specified buffer will be copied onto the end of the clipboard.
+ *	The clipboard maintains a list of buffers which will be used to supply
+ *	the data for a selection get request. The first time a given type is
+ *	appended, Tk_ClipboardAppend will register a selection handler of the
+ *	appropriate type.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_ClipboardAppend(interp, tkwin, type, format, buffer)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that selects a display. */
-    Atom type;			/* The desired conversion type for this
+Tk_ClipboardAppend(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window that selects a display. */
+    Atom type,			/* The desired conversion type for this
 				 * clipboard item, e.g. STRING or LENGTH. */
-    Atom format;		/* Format in which the selection
-				 * information should be returned to
-				 * the requestor. */
-    char* buffer;		/* NULL terminated string containing the data
+    Atom format,		/* Format in which the selection information
+				 * should be returned to the requestor. */
+    char* buffer)		/* NULL terminated string containing the data
 				 * to be added to the clipboard. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
@@ -341,8 +333,8 @@ Tk_ClipboardAppend(interp, tkwin, type, format, buffer)
     TkClipboardBuffer *cbPtr;
 
     /*
-     * If this application doesn't already own the clipboard, clear
-     * the clipboard.  If we don't own the clipboard selection, claim it.
+     * If this application doesn't already own the clipboard, clear the
+     * clipboard. If we don't own the clipboard selection, claim it.
      */
 
     if (dispPtr->clipboardAppPtr != winPtr->mainPtr) {
@@ -355,14 +347,15 @@ Tk_ClipboardAppend(interp, tkwin, type, format, buffer)
 
     /*
      * Check to see if the specified target is already present on the
-     * clipboard.  If it isn't, we need to create a new target; otherwise,
-     * we just append the new buffer to the clipboard list.
+     * clipboard. If it isn't, we need to create a new target; otherwise, we
+     * just append the new buffer to the clipboard list.
      */
 
     for (targetPtr = dispPtr->clipTargetPtr; targetPtr != NULL;
 	    targetPtr = targetPtr->nextPtr) {
-	if (targetPtr->type == type)
+	if (targetPtr->type == type) {
 	    break;
+	}
     }
     if (targetPtr == NULL) {
 	targetPtr = (TkClipboardTarget*) ckalloc(sizeof(TkClipboardTarget));
@@ -377,7 +370,7 @@ Tk_ClipboardAppend(interp, tkwin, type, format, buffer)
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "format \"", Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, format),
 		"\" does not match current format \"",
 		Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, targetPtr->format),"\" for ",
-		Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, type), (char *) NULL);
+		Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, type), NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -408,9 +401,8 @@ Tk_ClipboardAppend(interp, tkwin, type, format, buffer)
  *
  * Tk_ClipboardObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "clipboard" Tcl
- *	command.  See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "clipboard" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -422,12 +414,11 @@ Tk_ClipboardAppend(interp, tkwin, type, format, buffer)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_ClipboardObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument strings. */
+Tk_ClipboardObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument strings. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     char *path = NULL;
@@ -447,173 +438,173 @@ Tk_ClipboardObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case CLIPBOARD_APPEND: {
-	    Atom target, format;
-	    char *targetName = NULL;
-	    char *formatName = NULL;
-	    char *string;
-	    static CONST char *appendOptionStrings[] = {
-		"-displayof", "-format", "-type", NULL
-	    };
-	    enum appendOptions { APPEND_DISPLAYOF, APPEND_FORMAT,
-				     APPEND_TYPE };
-	    int subIndex, length;
-	    
-	    for (i = 2; i < objc - 1; i++) {
-		string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
-		if (string[0] != '-') {
-		    break;
-		}
-		
-		/*
-		 * If the argument is "--", it signifies the end of arguments.
-		 */
-		if (string[1] == '-' && length == 2) {
-		    i++;
-		    break;
-		}
-		if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], appendOptionStrings,
-			"option", 0, &subIndex) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-
-		/*
-		 * Increment i so that it points to the value for the flag
-		 * instead of the flag itself.
-		 */
+    case CLIPBOARD_APPEND: {
+	Atom target, format;
+	char *targetName = NULL;
+	char *formatName = NULL;
+	char *string;
+	static CONST char *appendOptionStrings[] = {
+	    "-displayof", "-format", "-type", NULL
+	};
+	enum appendOptions { APPEND_DISPLAYOF, APPEND_FORMAT, APPEND_TYPE };
+	int subIndex, length;
+
+	for (i = 2; i < objc - 1; i++) {
+	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
+	    if (string[0] != '-') {
+		break;
+	    }
 
+	    /*
+	     * If the argument is "--", it signifies the end of arguments.
+	     */
+	    if (string[1] == '-' && length == 2) {
 		i++;
-		if (i >= objc) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string,
-			    "\" missing", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		switch ((enum appendOptions) subIndex) {
-		    case APPEND_DISPLAYOF:
-			path = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
-			break;
-		    case APPEND_FORMAT:
-			formatName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
-			break;
-		    case APPEND_TYPE:
-			targetName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
-			break;
-		}
+		break;
 	    }
-	    if (objc - i != 1) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options? data");
+	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], appendOptionStrings,
+		    "option", 0, &subIndex) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (path != NULL) {
-		tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, path, tkwin);
-	    }
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
+
+	    /*
+	     * Increment i so that it points to the value for the flag instead
+	     * of the flag itself.
+	     */
+
+	    i++;
+	    if (i >= objc) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string,
+			"\" missing", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (targetName != NULL) {
-		target = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, targetName);
-	    } else {
-		target = XA_STRING;
-	    }
-	    if (formatName != NULL) {
-		format = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, formatName);
-	    } else {
-		format = XA_STRING;
+	    switch ((enum appendOptions) subIndex) {
+	    case APPEND_DISPLAYOF:
+		path = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+		break;
+	    case APPEND_FORMAT:
+		formatName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+		break;
+	    case APPEND_TYPE:
+		targetName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+		break;
 	    }
-	    return Tk_ClipboardAppend(interp, tkwin, target, format,
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]));
 	}
-	case CLIPBOARD_CLEAR: {
-	    static CONST char *clearOptionStrings[] = { "-displayof", NULL };
-	    enum clearOptions { CLEAR_DISPLAYOF };
-	    int subIndex;
-	    if (objc != 2 && objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+	if (objc - i != 1) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options? data");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (path != NULL) {
+	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, path, tkwin);
+	}
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (targetName != NULL) {
+	    target = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, targetName);
+	} else {
+	    target = XA_STRING;
+	}
+	if (formatName != NULL) {
+	    format = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, formatName);
+	} else {
+	    format = XA_STRING;
+	}
+	return Tk_ClipboardAppend(interp, tkwin, target, format,
+		Tcl_GetString(objv[i]));
+    }
+    case CLIPBOARD_CLEAR: {
+	static CONST char *clearOptionStrings[] = { "-displayof", NULL };
+	enum clearOptions { CLEAR_DISPLAYOF };
+	int subIndex;
+
+	if (objc != 2 && objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    if (objc == 4) {
-		if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], clearOptionStrings,
-			"option", 0, &subIndex) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if ((enum clearOptions) subIndex == CLEAR_DISPLAYOF) {
-		    path = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (path != NULL) {
-		tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, path, tkwin);
-	    }
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	if (objc == 4) {
+	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], clearOptionStrings,
+		    "option", 0, &subIndex) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    return Tk_ClipboardClear(interp, tkwin);
-	}
-	case CLIPBOARD_GET: {
-	    Atom target;
-	    char *targetName = NULL;
-	    Tcl_DString selBytes;
-	    int result;
-	    char *string;
-	    static CONST char *getOptionStrings[] = {
-		"-displayof", "-type", NULL
-	    };
-	    enum getOptions { APPEND_DISPLAYOF, APPEND_TYPE };
-	    int subIndex;
-
-	    for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
-		string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
-		if (string[0] != '-') {
-		    break;
-		}
-		if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], getOptionStrings,
-			"option", 0, &subIndex) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		i++;
-		if (i >= objc) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string,
-			    "\" missing", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		switch ((enum getOptions) subIndex) {
-		    case APPEND_DISPLAYOF:
-			path = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
-			break;
-		    case APPEND_TYPE:
-			targetName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
-			break;
-		}
+	    if ((enum clearOptions) subIndex == CLEAR_DISPLAYOF) {
+		path = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
 	    }
-	    if (path != NULL) {
-		tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, path, tkwin);
+	}
+	if (path != NULL) {
+	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, path, tkwin);
+	}
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	return Tk_ClipboardClear(interp, tkwin);
+    }
+    case CLIPBOARD_GET: {
+	Atom target;
+	char *targetName = NULL;
+	Tcl_DString selBytes;
+	int result;
+	char *string;
+	static CONST char *getOptionStrings[] = {
+	    "-displayof", "-type", NULL
+	};
+	enum getOptions { APPEND_DISPLAYOF, APPEND_TYPE };
+	int subIndex;
+
+	for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	    if (string[0] != '-') {
+		break;
 	    }
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], getOptionStrings,
+		    "option", 0, &subIndex) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    selection = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, "CLIPBOARD");
-
-	    if (objc - i > 1) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options?");
+	    i++;
+	    if (i >= objc) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string,
+			"\" missing", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    } else if (objc - i == 1) {
-		target = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[i]));
-	    } else if (targetName != NULL) {
-		target = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, targetName);
-	    } else {
-		target = XA_STRING;
 	    }
-
-	    Tcl_DStringInit(&selBytes);
-	    result = Tk_GetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target,
-		    ClipboardGetProc, (ClientData) &selBytes);
-	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		Tcl_DStringResult(interp, &selBytes);
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_DStringFree(&selBytes);
+	    switch ((enum getOptions) subIndex) {
+	    case APPEND_DISPLAYOF:
+		path = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+		break;
+	    case APPEND_TYPE:
+		targetName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+		break;
 	    }
-	    return result;
 	}
+	if (path != NULL) {
+	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, path, tkwin);
+	}
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	selection = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, "CLIPBOARD");
+
+	if (objc - i > 1) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	} else if (objc - i == 1) {
+	    target = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[i]));
+	} else if (targetName != NULL) {
+	    target = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, targetName);
+	} else {
+	    target = XA_STRING;
+	}
+
+	Tcl_DStringInit(&selBytes);
+	result = Tk_GetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target,
+		ClipboardGetProc, (ClientData) &selBytes);
+	if (result == TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_DStringResult(interp, &selBytes);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&selBytes);
+	}
+	return result;
+    }
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -623,8 +614,8 @@ Tk_ClipboardObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkClipInit --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to initialize the window for claiming
- *	clipboard ownership and for receiving selection get results.  This
+ *	This function is called to initialize the window for claiming
+ *	clipboard ownership and for receiving selection get results. This
  *	function is called from tkSelect.c as well as tkClipboard.c.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -639,17 +630,16 @@ Tk_ClipboardObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 int
-TkClipInit(interp, dispPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error
-				 * reporting. */
-    register TkDisplay *dispPtr;/* Display to initialize. */
+TkClipInit(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    register TkDisplay *dispPtr)/* Display to initialize. */
 {
     XSetWindowAttributes atts;
 
     dispPtr->clipTargetPtr = NULL;
     dispPtr->clipboardActive = 0;
     dispPtr->clipboardAppPtr = NULL;
-    
+
     /*
      * Create the window used for clipboard ownership and selection retrieval,
      * and set up an event handler for it.
@@ -658,23 +648,25 @@ TkClipInit(interp, dispPtr)
     dispPtr->clipWindow = (Tk_Window) TkAllocWindow(dispPtr,
 	DefaultScreen(dispPtr->display), NULL);
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) dispPtr->clipWindow);
+    ((TkWindow *) dispPtr->clipWindow)->flags |= TK_TOP_HIERARCHY|TK_TOP_LEVEL|TK_HAS_WRAPPER|TK_WIN_MANAGED;
+    TkWmNewWindow((TkWindow *) dispPtr->clipWindow);
     atts.override_redirect = True;
     Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes(dispPtr->clipWindow, CWOverrideRedirect, &atts);
     Tk_MakeWindowExist(dispPtr->clipWindow);
 
     if (dispPtr->multipleAtom == None) {
 	/*
-	 * Need to invoke selection initialization to make sure that
-	 * atoms we depend on below are defined.
+	 * Need to invoke selection initialization to make sure that atoms we
+	 * depend on below are defined.
 	 */
 
 	TkSelInit(dispPtr->clipWindow);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create selection handlers for types TK_APPLICATION and TK_WINDOW
-     * on this window.  Can't use the default handlers for these types
-     * because this isn't a full-fledged window.
+     * Create selection handlers for types TK_APPLICATION and TK_WINDOW on
+     * this window. Can't use the default handlers for these types because
+     * this isn't a full-fledged window.
      */
 
     Tk_CreateSelHandler(dispPtr->clipWindow, dispPtr->clipboardAtom,
@@ -691,29 +683,37 @@ TkClipInit(interp, dispPtr)
  *
  * ClipboardGetProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process pieces of the selection
- *	as they arrive during "clipboard get" commands.
+ *	This function is invoked to process pieces of the selection as they
+ *	arrive during "clipboard get" commands.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Always returns TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Bytes get appended to the dynamic string pointed to by the
- *	clientData argument.
+ *	Bytes get appended to the dynamic string pointed to by the clientData
+ *	argument.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-ClipboardGetProc(clientData, interp, portion)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Dynamic string holding partially
-				 * assembled selection. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter used for error
-				 * reporting (not used). */
-    char *portion;		/* New information to be appended. */
+ClipboardGetProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Dynamic string holding partially assembled
+				 * selection. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter used for error reporting (not
+				 * used). */
+    char *portion)		/* New information to be appended. */
 {
     Tcl_DStringAppend((Tcl_DString *) clientData, portion, -1);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkCmds.c b/generic/tkCmds.c
index 1e830e2..a86ef84 100644
--- a/generic/tkCmds.c
+++ b/generic/tkCmds.c
@@ -1,48 +1,47 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkCmds.c --
  *
- *	This file contains a collection of Tk-related Tcl commands
- *	that didn't fit in any particular file of the toolkit.
+ *	This file contains a collection of Tk-related Tcl commands that didn't
+ *	fit in any particular file of the toolkit.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 2000 Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 #if defined(WIN32)
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
-#elif defined(MAC_OSX_TK) 
+#elif defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
 #include "tkMacOSXInt.h"
 #else
 #include "tkUnixInt.h"
 #endif
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static TkWindow *	GetToplevel _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-static char *		WaitVariableProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name1,
-			    CONST char *name2, int flags));
-static void		WaitVisibilityProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		WaitWindowProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
+static TkWindow *	GetTopHierarchy(Tk_Window tkwin);
+static char *		WaitVariableProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name1,
+			    const char *name2, int flags);
+static void		WaitVisibilityProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		WaitWindowProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_BellObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "bell" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "bell" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -54,18 +53,21 @@ static void		WaitWindowProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
  */
 
 int
-Tk_BellObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_BellObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    static CONST char *bellOptions[] = {"-displayof", "-nice", (char *) NULL};
+    static const char *bellOptions[] = {
+	"-displayof", "-nice", NULL
+    };
     enum options { TK_BELL_DISPLAYOF, TK_BELL_NICE };
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     int i, index, nice = 0;
 
     if (objc > 4) {
+    wrongArgs:
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "?-displayof window? ?-nice?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -76,20 +78,18 @@ Tk_BellObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	switch ((enum options) index) {
-	    case TK_BELL_DISPLAYOF:
-		if (++i >= objc) {
-		    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv,
-			    "?-displayof window? ?-nice?");
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), tkwin);
-		if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_BELL_NICE:
-		nice = 1;
-		break;
+	case TK_BELL_DISPLAYOF:
+	    if (++i >= objc) {
+		goto wrongArgs;
+	    }
+	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), tkwin);
+	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_BELL_NICE:
+	    nice = 1;
+	    break;
 	}
     }
     XBell(Tk_Display(tkwin), 0);
@@ -105,8 +105,8 @@ Tk_BellObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * Tk_BindObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "bind" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "bind" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -118,23 +118,23 @@ Tk_BellObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_BindObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_BindObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     TkWindow *winPtr;
     ClientData object;
     char *string;
-    
+
     if ((objc < 2) || (objc > 4)) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "window ?pattern? ?command?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     string = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
-    
+
     /*
      * Bind tags either a window name or a tag name for the first argument.
      * If the argument starts with ".", assume it is a window; otherwise, it
@@ -153,8 +153,8 @@ Tk_BindObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If there are four arguments, the command is modifying a binding.  If
-     * there are three arguments, the command is querying a binding.  If there
+     * If there are four arguments, the command is modifying a binding. If
+     * there are three arguments, the command is querying a binding. If there
      * are only two arguments, the command is querying all the bindings for
      * the given tag/window.
      */
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Tk_BindObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	char *sequence, *script;
 	sequence	= Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
 	script		= Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
-	
+
 	/*
 	 * If the script is null, just delete the binding.
 	 */
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Tk_BindObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	 * If the script begins with "+", append this script to the existing
 	 * binding.
 	 */
-	
+
 	if (script[0] == '+') {
 	    script++;
 	    append = 1;
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Tk_BindObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     } else if (objc == 3) {
-	CONST char *command;
+	const char *command;
 
 	command = Tk_GetBinding(interp, winPtr->mainPtr->bindingTable,
 		object, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
@@ -210,8 +210,8 @@ Tk_BindObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkBindEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk_HandleEvent for each event;  it
- *	causes any appropriate bindings for that event to be invoked.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk_HandleEvent for each event; it causes
+ *	any appropriate bindings for that event to be invoked.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -224,9 +224,9 @@ Tk_BindObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 void
-TkBindEventProc(winPtr, eventPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;			/* Pointer to info about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Information about event. */
+TkBindEventProc(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Pointer to info about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
 #define MAX_OBJS 20
     ClientData objects[MAX_OBJS], *objPtr;
@@ -242,8 +242,8 @@ TkBindEventProc(winPtr, eventPtr)
     objPtr = objects;
     if (winPtr->numTags != 0) {
 	/*
-	 * Make a copy of the tags for the window, replacing window names
-	 * with pointers to the pathName from the appropriate window.
+	 * Make a copy of the tags for the window, replacing window names with
+	 * pointers to the pathName from the appropriate window.
 	 */
 
 	if (winPtr->numTags > MAX_OBJS) {
@@ -291,8 +291,8 @@ TkBindEventProc(winPtr, eventPtr)
  *
  * Tk_BindtagsObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "bindtags" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "bindtags" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -304,18 +304,18 @@ TkBindEventProc(winPtr, eventPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_BindtagsObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_BindtagsObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     TkWindow *winPtr, *winPtr2;
     int i, length;
     char *p;
     Tcl_Obj *listPtr, **tags;
-    
+
     if ((objc < 2) || (objc > 3)) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "window ?taglist?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -373,9 +373,9 @@ Tk_BindtagsObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	    /*
 	     * Handle names starting with "." specially: store a malloc'ed
-	     * string, rather than a Uid;  at event time we'll look up the
-	     * name in the window table and use the corresponding window,
-	     * if there is one.
+	     * string, rather than a Uid; at event time we'll look up the name
+	     * in the window table and use the corresponding window, if there
+	     * is one.
 	     */
 
 	    copy = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(p) + 1));
@@ -393,9 +393,9 @@ Tk_BindtagsObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkFreeBindingTags --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to free all of the binding tags
- *	associated with a window;  typically it is only invoked where
- *	there are window-specific tags.
+ *	This function is called to free all of the binding tags associated
+ *	with a window; typically it is only invoked where there are
+ *	window-specific tags.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -407,8 +407,8 @@ Tk_BindtagsObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 void
-TkFreeBindingTags(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window whose tags are to be released. */
+TkFreeBindingTags(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Window whose tags are to be released. */
 {
     int i;
     char *p;
@@ -417,10 +417,10 @@ TkFreeBindingTags(winPtr)
 	p = (char *) (winPtr->tagPtr[i]);
 	if (*p == '.') {
 	    /*
-	     * Names starting with "." are malloced rather than Uids, so
-	     * they have to be freed.
+	     * Names starting with "." are malloced rather than Uids, so they
+	     * have to be freed.
 	     */
-    
+
 	    ckfree(p);
 	}
     }
@@ -434,8 +434,8 @@ TkFreeBindingTags(winPtr)
  *
  * Tk_DestroyObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "destroy" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "destroy" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -447,12 +447,11 @@ TkFreeBindingTags(winPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_DestroyObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_DestroyObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window window;
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
@@ -467,13 +466,12 @@ Tk_DestroyObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tk_DestroyWindow(window);
 	if (window == tkwin) {
 	    /*
-	     * We just deleted the main window for the application! This
-	     * makes it impossible to do anything more (tkwin isn't
-	     * valid anymore).
+	     * We just deleted the main window for the application! This makes
+	     * it impossible to do anything more (tkwin isn't valid anymore).
 	     */
 
 	    break;
-	 }
+	}
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -483,8 +481,8 @@ Tk_DestroyObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * Tk_LowerObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "lower" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "lower" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -497,12 +495,11 @@ Tk_DestroyObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 int
-Tk_LowerObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_LowerObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window mainwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin, other;
@@ -527,7 +524,7 @@ Tk_LowerObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     if (Tk_RestackWindow(tkwin, Below, other) != TCL_OK) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't lower \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[1]),
 		"\" below \"", (other ? Tcl_GetString(objv[2]) : ""),
-		"\"", (char *) NULL);
+		"\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -538,8 +535,8 @@ Tk_LowerObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * Tk_RaiseObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "raise" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "raise" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -552,12 +549,11 @@ Tk_LowerObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 int
-Tk_RaiseObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_RaiseObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window mainwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin, other;
@@ -582,7 +578,7 @@ Tk_RaiseObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     if (Tk_RestackWindow(tkwin, Above, other) != TCL_OK) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't raise \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[1]),
 		"\" above \"", (other ? Tcl_GetString(objv[2]) : ""),
-		"\"", (char *) NULL);
+		"\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -593,8 +589,8 @@ Tk_RaiseObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * Tk_TkObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "tk" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "tk" Tcl command. See the user
+ *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -606,21 +602,21 @@ Tk_RaiseObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_TkObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_TkObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     int index;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
-    static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
+    static const char *optionStrings[] = {
 	"appname",	"caret",	"scaling",	"useinputmethods",
-	"windowingsystem",		NULL
+	"windowingsystem",		"inactive",	NULL
     };
     enum options {
 	TK_APPNAME,	TK_CARET,	TK_SCALING,	TK_USE_IM,
-	TK_WINDOWINGSYSTEM
+	TK_WINDOWINGSYSTEM,		TK_INACTIVE
     };
 
     tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
@@ -635,214 +631,257 @@ Tk_TkObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-        case TK_APPNAME: {
-	    TkWindow *winPtr;
-	    char *string;
-
-	    if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp,
-			"appname not accessible in a safe interpreter",
-			TCL_STATIC);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+    case TK_APPNAME: {
+	TkWindow *winPtr;
+	char *string;
+
+	if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+		    "appname not accessible in a safe interpreter",
+		    TCL_STATIC);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+	winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
-	    if (objc > 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?newName?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-		winPtr->nameUid = Tk_GetUid(Tk_SetAppName(tkwin, string));
-	    }
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, winPtr->nameUid, NULL);
-	    break;
+	if (objc > 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?newName?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	    winPtr->nameUid = Tk_GetUid(Tk_SetAppName(tkwin, string));
+	}
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, winPtr->nameUid, NULL);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_CARET: {
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+	TkCaret *caretPtr;
+	Tk_Window window;
+	static const char *caretStrings[] = {
+	    "-x",	"-y", "-height", NULL
+	};
+	enum caretOptions {
+	    TK_CARET_X, TK_CARET_Y, TK_CARET_HEIGHT
+	};
+
+	if ((objc < 3) || ((objc > 4) && !(objc & 1))) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "window ?-x x? ?-y y? ?-height height?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case TK_CARET: {
-	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
-	    TkCaret *caretPtr;
-	    Tk_Window window;
-	    static CONST char *caretStrings[]
-		= { "-x",	"-y", "-height", NULL };
-	    enum caretOptions
-		{ TK_CARET_X, TK_CARET_Y, TK_CARET_HEIGHT };
-
-	    if ((objc < 3) || ((objc > 4) && !(objc & 1))) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"window ?-x x? ?-y y? ?-height height?");
+	window = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), tkwin);
+	if (window == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	caretPtr = &(((TkWindow *) window)->dispPtr->caret);
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    /*
+	     * Return all the current values
+	     */
+
+	    objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
+		    Tcl_NewStringObj("-height", 7));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
+		    Tcl_NewIntObj(caretPtr->height));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
+		    Tcl_NewStringObj("-x", 2));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
+		    Tcl_NewIntObj(caretPtr->x));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
+		    Tcl_NewStringObj("-y", 2));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
+		    Tcl_NewIntObj(caretPtr->y));
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	} else if (objc == 4) {
+	    int value;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Return the current value of the selected option
+	     */
+
+	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[3], caretStrings,
+		    "caret option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    window = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), tkwin);
-	    if (window == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    if (index == TK_CARET_X) {
+		value = caretPtr->x;
+	    } else if (index == TK_CARET_Y) {
+		value = caretPtr->y;
+	    } else /* if (index == TK_CARET_HEIGHT) -- last case */ {
+		value = caretPtr->height;
 	    }
-	    caretPtr = &(((TkWindow *) window)->dispPtr->caret);
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		/*
-		 * Return all the current values
-		 */
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
-			Tcl_NewStringObj("-height", 7));
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
-			Tcl_NewIntObj(caretPtr->height));
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
-			Tcl_NewStringObj("-x", 2));
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
-			Tcl_NewIntObj(caretPtr->x));
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
-			Tcl_NewStringObj("-y", 2));
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, objPtr,
-			Tcl_NewIntObj(caretPtr->y));
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-	    } else if (objc == 4) {
-		int value;
-		/*
-		 * Return the current value of the selected option
-		 */
-		if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[3], caretStrings,
-			"caret option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), value);
+	} else {
+	    int i, value, x = 0, y = 0, height = -1;
+
+	    for (i = 3; i < objc; i += 2) {
+		if ((Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], caretStrings,
+			"caret option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) ||
+			Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp,objv[i+1],&value) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		if (index == TK_CARET_X) {
-		    value = caretPtr->x;
+		    x = value;
 		} else if (index == TK_CARET_Y) {
-		    value = caretPtr->y;
+		    y = value;
 		} else /* if (index == TK_CARET_HEIGHT) -- last case */ {
-		    value = caretPtr->height;
-		}
-		Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), value);
-	    } else {
-		int i, value, x = 0, y = 0, height = -1;
-
-		for (i = 3; i < objc; i += 2) {
-		    if ((Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], caretStrings,
-			    "caret option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) ||
-			    (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &value)
-				!= TCL_OK)) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    if (index == TK_CARET_X) {
-			x = value;
-		    } else if (index == TK_CARET_Y) {
-			y = value;
-		    } else /* if (index == TK_CARET_HEIGHT) -- last case */ {
-			height = value;
-		    }
-		}
-		if (height < 0) {
-		    height = Tk_Height(window);
+		    height = value;
 		}
-		Tk_SetCaretPos(window, x, y, height);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	    if (height < 0) {
+		height = Tk_Height(window);
+	    }
+	    Tk_SetCaretPos(window, x, y, height);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_SCALING: {
+	Screen *screenPtr;
+	int skip, width, height;
+	double d;
+
+	if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+		    "scaling not accessible in a safe interpreter",
+		    TCL_STATIC);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case TK_SCALING: {
-	    Screen *screenPtr;
-	    int skip, width, height;
-	    double d;
 
-	    if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp,
-			"scaling not accessible in a safe interpreter",
-			TCL_STATIC);
+	skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	screenPtr = Tk_Screen(tkwin);
+	if (objc - skip == 2) {
+	    d = 25.4 / 72;
+	    d *= WidthOfScreen(screenPtr);
+	    d /= WidthMMOfScreen(screenPtr);
+	    Tcl_SetDoubleObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), d);
+	} else if (objc - skip == 3) {
+	    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2+skip], &d) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-
-	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
-	    if (skip < 0) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    d = (25.4 / 72) / d;
+	    width = (int) (d * WidthOfScreen(screenPtr) + 0.5);
+	    if (width <= 0) {
+		width = 1;
 	    }
-	    screenPtr = Tk_Screen(tkwin);
-	    if (objc - skip == 2) {
-		d = 25.4 / 72;
-		d *= WidthOfScreen(screenPtr);
-		d /= WidthMMOfScreen(screenPtr);
-		Tcl_SetDoubleObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), d);
-	    } else if (objc - skip == 3) {
-		if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2+skip], &d) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		d = (25.4 / 72) / d;
-		width = (int) (d * WidthOfScreen(screenPtr) + 0.5);
-		if (width <= 0) {
-		    width = 1;
-		}
-		height = (int) (d * HeightOfScreen(screenPtr) + 0.5); 
-		if (height <= 0) {
-		    height = 1;
-		}
-		WidthMMOfScreen(screenPtr) = width;
-		HeightMMOfScreen(screenPtr) = height;
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"?-displayof window? ?factor?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    height = (int) (d * HeightOfScreen(screenPtr) + 0.5);
+	    if (height <= 0) {
+		height = 1;
 	    }
-	    break;
+	    WidthMMOfScreen(screenPtr) = width;
+	    HeightMMOfScreen(screenPtr) = height;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "?-displayof window? ?factor?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_USE_IM: {
+	TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+	int skip;
+
+	if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+		    "useinputmethods not accessible in a safe interpreter",
+		    TCL_STATIC);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case TK_USE_IM: {
-	    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
-	    int skip;
 
-	    if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp,
-			"useinputmethods not accessible in a safe interpreter",
-			TCL_STATIC);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+	skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc-2, objv+2, &tkwin);
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
+	if ((objc - skip) == 3) {
+	    /*
+	     * In the case where TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS is not defined, this
+	     * will be ignored and we will always return 0. That will indicate
+	     * to the user that input methods are just not available.
+	     */
 
-	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc-2, objv+2, &tkwin);
-	    if (skip < 0) {
+	    int boolVal;
+
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[2+skip],
+		    &boolVal) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
-	    if ((objc - skip) == 3) {
-		/*
-		 * In the case where TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS is not defined,
-		 * this will be ignored and we will always return 0.
-		 * That will indicate to the user that input methods
-		 * are just not available.
-		 */
-		int boolVal;
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[2+skip], &boolVal)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
 #ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
-		if (boolVal) {
-		    dispPtr->flags |= TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM;
-		} else {
-		    dispPtr->flags &= ~TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM;
-		}
-#endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */
-	    } else if ((objc - skip) != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"?-displayof window? ?boolean?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    if (boolVal) {
+		dispPtr->flags |= TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM;
+	    } else {
+		dispPtr->flags &= ~TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM;
 	    }
-	    Tcl_SetBooleanObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-		    (int) (dispPtr->flags & TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM));
-	    break;
+#endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */
+	} else if ((objc - skip) != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "?-displayof window? ?boolean?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetBooleanObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
+		(int) (dispPtr->flags & TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM));
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_WINDOWINGSYSTEM: {
+	const char *windowingsystem;
+
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-        case TK_WINDOWINGSYSTEM: {
-	    CONST char *windowingsystem;
-	    
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
 #if defined(WIN32)
-	    windowingsystem = "win32";
+	windowingsystem = "win32";
 #elif defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
-	    windowingsystem = "aqua";
+	windowingsystem = "aqua";
 #else
-	    windowingsystem = "x11";
+	windowingsystem = "x11";
 #endif
-	    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), windowingsystem, -1);
-	    break;
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), windowingsystem, -1);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_INACTIVE: {
+	int skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
+
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (objc - skip == 2) {
+	    long inactive;
+
+	    inactive = (Tcl_IsSafe(interp) ? -1 :
+		    Tk_GetUserInactiveTime(Tk_Display(tkwin)));
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewLongObj(inactive));
+
+	} else if (objc - skip == 3) {
+	    char *string;
+
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(objv[objc-1]);
+	    if (strcmp(string, "reset") != 0) {
+		Tcl_Obj *msg = Tcl_NewStringObj("bad option \"", -1);
+
+		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(msg, string, "\": must be reset", NULL);
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, msg);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
+		Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+			"resetting the user inactivity timer "
+			"is not allowed in a safe interpreter", TCL_STATIC);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime(Tk_Display(tkwin));
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window? ?reset?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
+	break;
+    }
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -852,8 +891,8 @@ Tk_TkObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * Tk_TkwaitObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "tkwait" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "tkwait" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -866,19 +905,21 @@ Tk_TkObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 int
-Tk_TkwaitObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_TkwaitObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     int done, index;
-    static CONST char *optionStrings[] = { "variable", "visibility", "window",
-					 (char *) NULL };
-    enum options { TKWAIT_VARIABLE, TKWAIT_VISIBILITY, TKWAIT_WINDOW };
-    
+    static const char *optionStrings[] = {
+	"variable", "visibility", "window", NULL
+    };
+    enum options {
+	TKWAIT_VARIABLE, TKWAIT_VISIBILITY, TKWAIT_WINDOW
+    };
+
     if (objc != 3) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "variable|visibility|window name");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -890,78 +931,78 @@ Tk_TkwaitObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case TKWAIT_VARIABLE: {
-	    if (Tcl_TraceVar(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
-		    WaitVariableProc, (ClientData) &done) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    done = 0;
-	    while (!done) {
-		Tcl_DoOneEvent(0);
-	    }
-	    Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
-		    WaitVariableProc, (ClientData) &done);
-	    break;
+    case TKWAIT_VARIABLE:
+	if (Tcl_TraceVar(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
+		WaitVariableProc, (ClientData) &done) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	done = 0;
+	while (!done) {
+	    Tcl_DoOneEvent(0);
 	}
-	
-	case TKWAIT_VISIBILITY: {
-	    Tk_Window window;
+	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
+		WaitVariableProc, (ClientData) &done);
+	break;
 
-	    window = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), tkwin);
-	    if (window == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    Tk_CreateEventHandler(window,
-		    VisibilityChangeMask|StructureNotifyMask,
-		    WaitVisibilityProc, (ClientData) &done);
-	    done = 0;
-	    while (!done) {
-		Tcl_DoOneEvent(0);
-	    }
-	    if (done != 1) {
-		/*
-		 * Note that we do not delete the event handler because it
-		 * was deleted automatically when the window was destroyed.
-		 */
-		
-		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-			"\" was deleted before its visibility changed",
-			(char *) NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(window,
-		    VisibilityChangeMask|StructureNotifyMask,
-		    WaitVisibilityProc, (ClientData) &done);
-	    break;
+    case TKWAIT_VISIBILITY: {
+	Tk_Window window;
+
+	window = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), tkwin);
+	if (window == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	
-	case TKWAIT_WINDOW: {
-	    Tk_Window window;
-	    
-	    window = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), tkwin);
-	    if (window == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    Tk_CreateEventHandler(window, StructureNotifyMask,
-		    WaitWindowProc, (ClientData) &done);
-	    done = 0;
-	    while (!done) {
-		Tcl_DoOneEvent(0);
-	    }
+	Tk_CreateEventHandler(window,
+		VisibilityChangeMask|StructureNotifyMask,
+		WaitVisibilityProc, (ClientData) &done);
+	done = 0;
+	while (!done) {
+	    Tcl_DoOneEvent(0);
+	}
+	if (done != 1) {
 	    /*
-	     * Note:  there's no need to delete the event handler.  It was
+	     * Note that we do not delete the event handler because it was
 	     * deleted automatically when the window was destroyed.
 	     */
-	    break;
+
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		    "\" was deleted before its visibility changed", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
+	Tk_DeleteEventHandler(window,
+		VisibilityChangeMask|StructureNotifyMask,
+		WaitVisibilityProc, (ClientData) &done);
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case TKWAIT_WINDOW: {
+	Tk_Window window;
+
+	window = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), tkwin);
+	if (window == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Tk_CreateEventHandler(window, StructureNotifyMask,
+		WaitWindowProc, (ClientData) &done);
+	done = 0;
+	while (!done) {
+	    Tcl_DoOneEvent(0);
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Note: there's no need to delete the event handler. It was deleted
+	 * automatically when the window was destroyed.
+	 */
+
+	break;
+    }
     }
 
     /*
-     * Clear out the interpreter's result, since it may have been set
-     * by event handlers.
+     * Clear out the interpreter's result, since it may have been set by event
+     * handlers.
      */
 
     Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
@@ -970,24 +1011,24 @@ Tk_TkwaitObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static char *
-WaitVariableProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to integer to set to 1. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
-    CONST char *name1;		/* Name of variable. */
-    CONST char *name2;		/* Second part of variable name. */
-    int flags;			/* Information about what happened. */
+WaitVariableProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to integer to set to 1. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
+    const char *name1,		/* Name of variable. */
+    const char *name2,		/* Second part of variable name. */
+    int flags)			/* Information about what happened. */
 {
     int *donePtr = (int *) clientData;
 
     *donePtr = 1;
-    return (char *) NULL;
+    return NULL;
 }
 
 	/*ARGSUSED*/
 static void
-WaitVisibilityProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to integer to set to 1. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event (not used). */
+WaitVisibilityProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to integer to set to 1. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event (not used). */
 {
     int *donePtr = (int *) clientData;
 
@@ -1000,9 +1041,9 @@ WaitVisibilityProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 }
 
 static void
-WaitWindowProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to integer to set to 1. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+WaitWindowProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to integer to set to 1. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     int *donePtr = (int *) clientData;
 
@@ -1016,8 +1057,8 @@ WaitWindowProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * Tk_UpdateObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "update" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "update" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -1030,14 +1071,13 @@ WaitWindowProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 int
-Tk_UpdateObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_UpdateObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    static CONST char *updateOptions[] = {"idletasks", (char *) NULL};
+    static const char *updateOptions[] = {"idletasks", NULL};
     int flags, index;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;
 
@@ -1050,19 +1090,18 @@ Tk_UpdateObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 	flags = TCL_IDLE_EVENTS;
     } else {
-        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "?idletasks?");
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "?idletasks?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Handle all pending events, sync all displays, and repeat over
-     * and over again until all pending events have been handled.
-     * Special note:  it's possible that the entire application could
-     * be destroyed by an event handler that occurs during the update.
-     * Thus, don't use any information from tkwin after calling
-     * Tcl_DoOneEvent.
+     * Handle all pending events, sync all displays, and repeat over and over
+     * again until all pending events have been handled. Special note: it's
+     * possible that the entire application could be destroyed by an event
+     * handler that occurs during the update. Thus, don't use any information
+     * from tkwin after calling Tcl_DoOneEvent.
      */
-  
+
     while (1) {
 	while (Tcl_DoOneEvent(flags) != 0) {
 	    /* Empty loop body */
@@ -1077,8 +1116,8 @@ Tk_UpdateObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Must clear the interpreter's result because event handlers could
-     * have executed commands.
+     * Must clear the interpreter's result because event handlers could have
+     * executed commands.
      */
 
     Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
@@ -1090,8 +1129,8 @@ Tk_UpdateObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * Tk_WinfoObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "winfo" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "winfo" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -1103,12 +1142,11 @@ Tk_UpdateObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_WinfoObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_WinfoObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     int index, x, y, width, height, useX, useY, class, skip;
     char *string;
@@ -1116,7 +1154,7 @@ Tk_WinfoObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
 
-    static TkStateMap visualMap[] = {
+    static const TkStateMap visualMap[] = {
 	{PseudoColor,	"pseudocolor"},
 	{GrayScale,	"grayscale"},
 	{DirectColor,	"directcolor"},
@@ -1125,7 +1163,7 @@ Tk_WinfoObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	{StaticGray,	"staticgray"},
 	{-1,		NULL}
     };
-    static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
+    static const char *optionStrings[] = {
 	"cells",	"children",	"class",	"colormapfull",
 	"depth",	"geometry",	"height",	"id",
 	"ismapped",	"manager",	"name",		"parent",
@@ -1136,7 +1174,7 @@ Tk_WinfoObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	"toplevel",	"viewable",	"visual",	"visualid",
 	"vrootheight",	"vrootwidth",	"vrootx",	"vrooty",
 	"width",	"x",		"y",
-	
+
 	"atom",		"atomname",	"containing",	"interps",
 	"pathname",
 
@@ -1156,7 +1194,7 @@ Tk_WinfoObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	WIN_TOPLEVEL,	WIN_VIEWABLE,	WIN_VISUAL,	WIN_VISUALID,
 	WIN_VROOTHEIGHT,WIN_VROOTWIDTH,	WIN_VROOTX,	WIN_VROOTY,
 	WIN_WIDTH,	WIN_X,		WIN_Y,
-	
+
 	WIN_ATOM,	WIN_ATOMNAME,	WIN_CONTAINING,	WIN_INTERPS,
 	WIN_PATHNAME,
 
@@ -1165,7 +1203,7 @@ Tk_WinfoObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     };
 
     tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
-    
+
     if (objc < 2) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1180,7 +1218,7 @@ Tk_WinfoObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
 	tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
 	if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1190,502 +1228,468 @@ Tk_WinfoObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case WIN_CELLS: {
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_Visual(tkwin)->map_entries);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_CHILDREN: {
-	    Tcl_Obj *strPtr;
-
-	    winPtr = winPtr->childList;
-	    for ( ; winPtr != NULL; winPtr = winPtr->nextPtr) {
-		if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_ANONYMOUS_WINDOW)) {
-		    strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(winPtr->pathName, -1);
-		    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, strPtr);
-		}
+    case WIN_CELLS:
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_Visual(tkwin)->map_entries);
+	break;
+    case WIN_CHILDREN: {
+	Tcl_Obj *strPtr;
+
+	winPtr = winPtr->childList;
+	for ( ; winPtr != NULL; winPtr = winPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_ANONYMOUS_WINDOW)) {
+		strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(winPtr->pathName, -1);
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, strPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_CLASS: {
-	    Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, Tk_Class(tkwin), -1);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_COLORMAPFULL: {
-	    Tcl_SetBooleanObj(resultPtr,
-		    TkpCmapStressed(tkwin, Tk_Colormap(tkwin)));
-	    break;
 	}
-	case WIN_DEPTH: {
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_Depth(tkwin));
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_GEOMETRY: {
-	    char buf[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
+	break;
+    }
+    case WIN_CLASS:
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, Tk_Class(tkwin), -1);
+	break;
+    case WIN_COLORMAPFULL:
+	Tcl_SetBooleanObj(resultPtr,
+		TkpCmapStressed(tkwin, Tk_Colormap(tkwin)));
+	break;
+    case WIN_DEPTH:
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_Depth(tkwin));
+	break;
+    case WIN_GEOMETRY: {
+	char buf[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
+
+	sprintf(buf, "%dx%d+%d+%d", Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin),
+		Tk_X(tkwin), Tk_Y(tkwin));
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, buf, -1);
+	break;
+    }
+    case WIN_HEIGHT:
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_Height(tkwin));
+	break;
+    case WIN_ID: {
+	char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
 
-	    sprintf(buf, "%dx%d+%d+%d", Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin),
-		    Tk_X(tkwin), Tk_Y(tkwin));
-	    Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, buf, -1);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_HEIGHT: {
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_Height(tkwin));
-	    break;
+	Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin);
+	TkpPrintWindowId(buf, Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
+
+	/*
+	 * interp result may have changed, refetch it
+	 */
+
+	resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, buf, -1);
+	break;
+    }
+    case WIN_ISMAPPED:
+	Tcl_SetBooleanObj(resultPtr, (int) Tk_IsMapped(tkwin));
+	break;
+    case WIN_MANAGER:
+	if (winPtr->geomMgrPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, winPtr->geomMgrPtr->name, -1);
+	}
+	break;
+    case WIN_NAME:
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, Tk_Name(tkwin), -1);
+	break;
+    case WIN_PARENT:
+	if (winPtr->parentPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, winPtr->parentPtr->pathName, -1);
+	}
+	break;
+    case WIN_POINTERX:
+	useX = 1;
+	useY = 0;
+	goto pointerxy;
+    case WIN_POINTERY:
+	useX = 0;
+	useY = 1;
+	goto pointerxy;
+    case WIN_POINTERXY:
+	useX = 1;
+	useY = 1;
+
+    pointerxy:
+	winPtr = GetTopHierarchy(tkwin);
+	if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	    x = -1;
+	    y = -1;
+	} else {
+	    TkGetPointerCoords((Tk_Window) winPtr, &x, &y);
 	}
-	case WIN_ID: {
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	    
-	    Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin);
-	    TkpPrintWindowId(buf, Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
-	    /*
-	     * interp result may have changed, refetch it
-	     */
-	    resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+	if (useX & useY) {
+	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 2];
+
+	    sprintf(buf, "%d %d", x, y);
 	    Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, buf, -1);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_ISMAPPED: {
-	    Tcl_SetBooleanObj(resultPtr, (int) Tk_IsMapped(tkwin));
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_MANAGER: {
-	    if (winPtr->geomMgrPtr != NULL) {
-		Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, winPtr->geomMgrPtr->name, -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_NAME: {
-	    Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, Tk_Name(tkwin), -1);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_PARENT: {
-	    if (winPtr->parentPtr != NULL) {
-		Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, winPtr->parentPtr->pathName, -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	} else if (useX) {
+	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, x);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, y);
 	}
-	case WIN_POINTERX: {
-	    useX = 1;
-	    useY = 0;
-	    goto pointerxy;
-	}
-	case WIN_POINTERY: {
-	    useX = 0;
-	    useY = 1;
-	    goto pointerxy;
-	}
-	case WIN_POINTERXY: {
-	    useX = 1;
-	    useY = 1;
-
-	    pointerxy:
-	    winPtr = GetToplevel(tkwin);
-	    if (winPtr == NULL) {
-		x = -1;
-		y = -1;
-	    } else {
-		TkGetPointerCoords((Tk_Window) winPtr, &x, &y);
+	break;
+    case WIN_REQHEIGHT:
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin));
+	break;
+    case WIN_REQWIDTH:
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin));
+	break;
+    case WIN_ROOTX:
+	Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, &x, &y);
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, x);
+	break;
+    case WIN_ROOTY:
+	Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, &x, &y);
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, y);
+	break;
+    case WIN_SCREEN: {
+	char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+
+	sprintf(buf, "%d", Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin));
+	Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(resultPtr, Tk_DisplayName(tkwin),".",buf, NULL);
+	break;
+    }
+    case WIN_SCREENCELLS:
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, CellsOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
+	break;
+    case WIN_SCREENDEPTH:
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, DefaultDepthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
+	break;
+    case WIN_SCREENHEIGHT:
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, HeightOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
+	break;
+    case WIN_SCREENWIDTH:
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
+	break;
+    case WIN_SCREENMMHEIGHT:
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, HeightMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
+	break;
+    case WIN_SCREENMMWIDTH:
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
+	break;
+    case WIN_SCREENVISUAL:
+	class = DefaultVisualOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin))->class;
+	goto visual;
+    case WIN_SERVER:
+	TkGetServerInfo(interp, tkwin);
+	break;
+    case WIN_TOPLEVEL:
+	winPtr = GetTopHierarchy(tkwin);
+	if (winPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, winPtr->pathName, -1);
+	}
+	break;
+    case WIN_VIEWABLE: {
+	int viewable = 0;
+
+	for ( ; ; winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr) {
+	    if ((winPtr == NULL) || !(winPtr->flags & TK_MAPPED)) {
+		break;
 	    }
-	    if (useX & useY) {
-		char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 2];
-		
-		sprintf(buf, "%d %d", x, y);
-		Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, buf, -1);
-	    } else if (useX) {
-		Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, x);
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, y);
+	    if (winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) {
+		viewable = 1;
+		break;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case WIN_REQHEIGHT: {
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin));
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_REQWIDTH: {
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin));
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_ROOTX: {
-	    Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, &x, &y);
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, x);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_ROOTY: {
-	    Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, &x, &y);
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, y);
-	    break;
+
+	Tcl_SetBooleanObj(resultPtr, viewable);
+	break;
+    }
+    case WIN_VISUAL:
+	class = Tk_Visual(tkwin)->class;
+
+    visual:
+	string = TkFindStateString(visualMap, class);
+	if (string == NULL) {
+	    string = "unknown";
+	}
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, string, -1);
+	break;
+    case WIN_VISUALID: {
+	char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+
+	sprintf(buf, "0x%x",
+		(unsigned int) XVisualIDFromVisual(Tk_Visual(tkwin)));
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, buf, -1);
+	break;
+    }
+    case WIN_VROOTHEIGHT:
+	Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, height);
+	break;
+    case WIN_VROOTWIDTH:
+	Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, width);
+	break;
+    case WIN_VROOTX:
+	Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, x);
+	break;
+    case WIN_VROOTY:
+	Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, y);
+	break;
+    case WIN_WIDTH:
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_Width(tkwin));
+	break;
+    case WIN_X:
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_X(tkwin));
+	break;
+    case WIN_Y:
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_Y(tkwin));
+	break;
+
+	/*
+	 * Uses -displayof.
+	 */
+
+    case WIN_ATOM:
+	skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_SCREEN: {
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	    
-	    sprintf(buf, "%d", Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin));
-	    Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(resultPtr, Tk_DisplayName(tkwin), ".",
-		    buf, NULL);
-	    break;
+	if (objc - skip != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window? name");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_SCREENCELLS: {
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, CellsOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
-	    break;
+	objv += skip;
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	Tcl_SetLongObj(resultPtr, (long) Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, string));
+	break;
+    case WIN_ATOMNAME: {
+	const char *name;
+	long id;
+
+	skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_SCREENDEPTH: {
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, DefaultDepthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
-	    break;
+	if (objc - skip != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window? id");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_SCREENHEIGHT: {
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, HeightOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
-	    break;
+	objv += skip;
+	if (Tcl_GetLongFromObj(interp, objv[2], &id) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_SCREENWIDTH: {
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
-	    break;
+	name = Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, (Atom) id);
+	if (strcmp(name, "?bad atom?") == 0) {
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	    Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(resultPtr,
+		    "no atom exists with id \"", string, "\"", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_SCREENMMHEIGHT: {
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, HeightMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
-	    break;
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, name, -1);
+	break;
+    }
+    case WIN_CONTAINING:
+	skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_SCREENMMWIDTH: {
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
-	    break;
+	if (objc - skip != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "?-displayof window? rootX rootY");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_SCREENVISUAL: {
-	    class = DefaultVisualOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin))->class;
-	    goto visual;
+	objv += skip;
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, string, &x) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_SERVER: {
-	    TkGetServerInfo(interp, tkwin);
-	    break;
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+	if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, string, &y) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_TOPLEVEL: {
-	    winPtr = GetToplevel(tkwin);
-	    if (winPtr != NULL) {
-		Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, winPtr->pathName, -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	tkwin = Tk_CoordsToWindow(x, y, tkwin);
+	if (tkwin != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, Tk_PathName(tkwin), -1);
 	}
-	case WIN_VIEWABLE: {
-	    int viewable = 0;
-	    for ( ; ; winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr) {
-		if ((winPtr == NULL) || !(winPtr->flags & TK_MAPPED)) {
-		    break;
-		}
-		if (winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) {
-		    viewable = 1;
-		    break;
-		}
-	    }
+	break;
+    case WIN_INTERPS: {
+	int result;
 
-	    Tcl_SetBooleanObj(resultPtr, viewable);
-	    break;
+	skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_VISUAL: {
-	    class = Tk_Visual(tkwin)->class;
-
-	    visual:
-	    string = TkFindStateString(visualMap, class);
-	    if (string == NULL) {
-		string = "unknown";
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, string, -1);
-	    break;
+	if (objc - skip != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_VISUALID: {
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+	result = TkGetInterpNames(interp, tkwin);
+	return result;
+    }
+    case WIN_PATHNAME: {
+	Window id;
 
-	    sprintf(buf, "0x%x",
-		    (unsigned int) XVisualIDFromVisual(Tk_Visual(tkwin)));
-	    Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, buf, -1);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_VROOTHEIGHT: {
-	    Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, height);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_VROOTWIDTH: {
-	    Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, width);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_VROOTX: {
-	    Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, x);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_VROOTY: {
-	    Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, y);
-	    break;
+	skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_WIDTH: {
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_Width(tkwin));
-	    break;
+	if (objc - skip != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window? id");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_X: {
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_X(tkwin));
-	    break;
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2 + skip]);
+	if (TkpScanWindowId(interp, string, &id) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_Y: {
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_Y(tkwin));
-	    break;
+	winPtr = (TkWindow *)Tk_IdToWindow(Tk_Display(tkwin), id);
+	if ((winPtr == NULL) ||
+		(winPtr->mainPtr != ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(resultPtr, "window id \"", string,
+		    "\" doesn't exist in this application", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Uses -displayof.
+	 * If the window is a utility window with no associated path (such as
+	 * a wrapper window or send communication window), just return an
+	 * empty string.
 	 */
-	 
-	case WIN_ATOM: {
-	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
-	    if (skip < 0) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (objc - skip != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window? name");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    objv += skip;
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-	    Tcl_SetLongObj(resultPtr, (long) Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, string));
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_ATOMNAME: {
-	    CONST char *name;
-	    long id;
-	    
-	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
-	    if (skip < 0) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (objc - skip != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window? id");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    objv += skip;
-	    if (Tcl_GetLongFromObj(interp, objv[2], &id) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    name = Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, (Atom) id);
-	    if (strcmp(name, "?bad atom?") == 0) {
-		string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(resultPtr, 
-			"no atom exists with id \"", string, "\"", NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, name, -1);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_CONTAINING: {
-	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
-	    if (skip < 0) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (objc - skip != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"?-displayof window? rootX rootY");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    objv += skip;
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-	    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, string, &x) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL);
-	    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, string, &y) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    tkwin = Tk_CoordsToWindow(x, y, tkwin);
-	    if (tkwin != NULL) {
-		Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, Tk_PathName(tkwin), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WIN_INTERPS: {
-	    int result;
-	    
-	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
-	    if (skip < 0) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (objc - skip != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    result = TkGetInterpNames(interp, tkwin);
-	    return result;
-	}
-	case WIN_PATHNAME: {
-	    Window id;
 
-	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
-	    if (skip < 0) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (objc - skip != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window? id");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2 + skip], NULL);
-	    if (TkpScanWindowId(interp, string, &id) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    winPtr = (TkWindow *)Tk_IdToWindow(Tk_Display(tkwin), id);
-	    if ((winPtr == NULL) ||
-		    (winPtr->mainPtr != ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr)) {
-		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(resultPtr, "window id \"", string,
-			"\" doesn't exist in this application", (char *) NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-
-	    /*
-	     * If the window is a utility window with no associated path
-	     * (such as a wrapper window or send communication window), just
-	     * return an empty string.
-	     */
-
-	    tkwin = (Tk_Window) winPtr;
-	    if (Tk_PathName(tkwin) != NULL) {
-		Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, Tk_PathName(tkwin), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	tkwin = (Tk_Window) winPtr;
+	if (Tk_PathName(tkwin) != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, Tk_PathName(tkwin), -1);
 	}
+	break;
+    }
 
 	/*
 	 * objv[3] is window.
 	 */
 
-	case WIN_EXISTS: {
-	    int alive;
+    case WIN_EXISTS: {
+	int alive;
 
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-	    winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
-	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	    resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
 
-	    alive = 1;
-	    if ((winPtr == NULL) || (winPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD)) {
-		alive = 0;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetBooleanObj(resultPtr, alive);
-	    break;
+	alive = 1;
+	if ((winPtr == NULL) || (winPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD)) {
+	    alive = 0;
 	}
-	case WIN_FPIXELS: {
-	    double mm, pixels;
+	Tcl_SetBooleanObj(resultPtr, alive);
+	break;
+    }
+    case WIN_FPIXELS: {
+	double mm, pixels;
 
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window number");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL);
-	    if (Tk_GetScreenMM(interp, tkwin, string, &mm) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    pixels = mm * WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin))
-		    / WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
-	    Tcl_SetDoubleObj(resultPtr, pixels);
-	    break;
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window number");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_PIXELS: {
-	    int pixels;
-	    
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window number");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL);
-	    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, string, &pixels) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, pixels);
-	    break;
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+	if (Tk_GetScreenMM(interp, tkwin, string, &mm) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_RGB: {
-	    XColor *colorPtr;
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 3];
+	pixels = mm * WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin))
+		/ WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	Tcl_SetDoubleObj(resultPtr, pixels);
+	break;
+    }
+    case WIN_PIXELS: {
+	int pixels;
 
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window colorName");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL);
-	    colorPtr = Tk_GetColor(interp, tkwin, string);
-	    if (colorPtr == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    sprintf(buf, "%d %d %d", colorPtr->red, colorPtr->green,
-		    colorPtr->blue);
-	    Tk_FreeColor(colorPtr);
-	    Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, buf, -1);
-	    break;
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window number");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case WIN_VISUALSAVAILABLE: {
-	    XVisualInfo template, *visInfoPtr;
-	    int count, i;
-	    int includeVisualId;
-	    Tcl_Obj *strPtr;
-	    char buf[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	    char visualIdString[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		includeVisualId = 0;
-	    } else if ((objc == 4)
-		    && (strcmp(Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3], NULL),
-			    "includeids") == 0)) {
-		includeVisualId = 1;
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?includeids?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+	if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, string, &pixels) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, pixels);
+	break;
+    }
+    case WIN_RGB: {
+	XColor *colorPtr;
+	char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 3];
 
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin); 
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) { 
-		return TCL_ERROR; 
-	    }
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window colorName");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+	colorPtr = Tk_GetColor(interp, tkwin, string);
+	if (colorPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	sprintf(buf, "%d %d %d", colorPtr->red, colorPtr->green,
+		colorPtr->blue);
+	Tk_FreeColor(colorPtr);
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr, buf, -1);
+	break;
+    }
+    case WIN_VISUALSAVAILABLE: {
+	XVisualInfo template, *visInfoPtr;
+	int count, i;
+	int includeVisualId;
+	Tcl_Obj *strPtr;
+	char buf[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+	char visualIdString[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    includeVisualId = 0;
+	} else if ((objc == 4)
+		&& (strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "includeids") == 0)) {
+	    includeVisualId = 1;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?includeids?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    template.screen = Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin);
-	    visInfoPtr = XGetVisualInfo(Tk_Display(tkwin), VisualScreenMask,
-		    &template, &count);
-	    if (visInfoPtr == NULL) {
-		Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr,
-			"can't find any visuals for screen", -1);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	template.screen = Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin);
+	visInfoPtr = XGetVisualInfo(Tk_Display(tkwin), VisualScreenMask,
+		&template, &count);
+	if (visInfoPtr == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetStringObj(resultPtr,
+		    "can't find any visuals for screen", -1);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	for (i = 0; i < count; i++) {
+	    string = TkFindStateString(visualMap, visInfoPtr[i].class);
+	    if (string == NULL) {
+		strcpy(buf, "unknown");
+	    } else {
+		sprintf(buf, "%s %d", string, visInfoPtr[i].depth);
 	    }
-	    for (i = 0; i < count; i++) {
-		string = TkFindStateString(visualMap, visInfoPtr[i].class);
-		if (string == NULL) {
-		    strcpy(buf, "unknown");
-		} else {
-		    sprintf(buf, "%s %d", string, visInfoPtr[i].depth);
-		}
-		if (includeVisualId) {
-		    sprintf(visualIdString, " 0x%x",
-			    (unsigned int) visInfoPtr[i].visualid);
-		    strcat(buf, visualIdString);
-		}
-		strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(buf, -1);
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, strPtr);
+	    if (includeVisualId) {
+		sprintf(visualIdString, " 0x%x",
+			(unsigned int) visInfoPtr[i].visualid);
+		strcat(buf, visualIdString);
 	    }
-	    XFree((char *) visInfoPtr);
-	    break;
+	    strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(buf, -1);
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, strPtr);
 	}
+	XFree((char *) visInfoPtr);
+	break;
+    }
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -1696,8 +1700,8 @@ Tk_WinfoObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * Tk_WmObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm" Tcl command. See the user
+ *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -1710,24 +1714,23 @@ Tk_WinfoObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 int
-Tk_WmObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_WmObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     TkWindow *winPtr;
 
-    static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
+    static const char *optionStrings[] = {
 	"aspect",	"client",	"command",	"deiconify",
 	"focusmodel",	"frame",	"geometry",	"grid",
 	"group",	"iconbitmap",	"iconify",	"iconmask",
 	"iconname",	"iconposition",	"iconwindow",	"maxsize",
 	"minsize",	"overrideredirect",	"positionfrom",	"protocol",
 	"resizable",	"sizefrom",	"state",	"title",
-	"tracing",	"transient",	"withdraw",	(char *) NULL
+	"tracing",	"transient",	"withdraw",	NULL
     };
     enum options {
 	TKWM_ASPECT,	TKWM_CLIENT,	TKWM_COMMAND,	TKWM_DEICONIFY,
@@ -1786,127 +1789,119 @@ Tk_WmObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
     if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", winPtr->pathName,
-		"\" isn't a top-level window", (char *) NULL);
+		"\" isn't a top-level window", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case TKWM_ASPECT: {
-	    TkpWmAspectCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_CLIENT: {
-	    TkpWmClientCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_COMMAND: {
-	    TkpWmCommandCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_DEICONIFY: {
-	    TkpWmDeiconifyCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_FOCUSMOD: {
-	    TkpWmFocusmodCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_FRAME: {
-	    TkpWmFrameCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_GEOMETRY: {
-	    TkpWmGeometryCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_GRID: {
-	    TkpWmGridCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_GROUP: {
-	    TkpWmGroupCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_ICONBMP: {
-	    TkpWmIconbitmapCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_ICONIFY: {
-	    TkpWmIconifyCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_ICONMASK: {
-	    TkpWmIconmaskCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_ICONNAME: {
-	    /* slight Unix variation */
-	    TkpWmIconnameCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_ICONPOS: {
-	    /* nearly same - 1 line more on Unix */
-	    TkpWmIconpositionCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_ICONWIN: {
-	    TkpWmIconwindowCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_MAXSIZE: {
-	    /* nearly same, win diffs */
-	    TkpWmMaxsizeCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_MINSIZE: {
-	    /* nearly same, win diffs */
-	    TkpWmMinsizeCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_OVERRIDE: {
-	    /* almost same */
-	    TkpWmOverrideCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_POSFROM: {
-	    /* Equal across platforms */
-	    TkpWmPositionfromCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_PROTOCOL: {
-	    /* Equal across platforms */
-	    TkpWmProtocolCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_RESIZABLE: {
-	    /* almost same */
-	    TkpWmResizableCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_SIZEFROM: {
-	    /* Equal across platforms */
-	    TkpWmSizefromCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_STATE: {
-	    TkpWmStateCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_TITLE: {
-	    TkpWmTitleCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_TRANSIENT: {
-	    TkpWmTransientCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TKWM_WITHDRAW: {
-	    TkpWmWithdrawCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
+    case TKWM_ASPECT:
+	TkpWmAspectCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_CLIENT:
+	TkpWmClientCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_COMMAND:
+	TkpWmCommandCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_DEICONIFY:
+	TkpWmDeiconifyCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_FOCUSMOD:
+	TkpWmFocusmodCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_FRAME:
+	TkpWmFrameCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_GEOMETRY:
+	TkpWmGeometryCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_GRID:
+	TkpWmGridCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_GROUP:
+	TkpWmGroupCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_ICONBMP:
+	TkpWmIconbitmapCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_ICONIFY:
+	TkpWmIconifyCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_ICONMASK:
+	TkpWmIconmaskCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_ICONNAME:
+	/*
+	 * Slight Unix variation.
+	 */
+	TkpWmIconnameCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_ICONPOS:
+	/*
+	 * nearly same - 1 line more on Unix.
+	 */
+	TkpWmIconpositionCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_ICONWIN:
+	TkpWmIconwindowCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_MAXSIZE:
+	/*
+	 * Nearly same, win diffs.
+	 */
+	TkpWmMaxsizeCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_MINSIZE:
+	/*
+	 * Nearly same, win diffs
+	 */
+	TkpWmMinsizeCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_OVERRIDE:
+	/*
+	 * Almost same.
+	 */
+	TkpWmOverrideCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_POSFROM:
+	/*
+	 * Equal across platforms
+	 */
+	TkpWmPositionfromCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_PROTOCOL:
+	/*
+	 * Equal across platforms
+	 */
+	TkpWmProtocolCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_RESIZABLE:
+	/*
+	 * Almost same
+	 */
+	TkpWmResizableCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_SIZEFROM:
+	/*
+	 * Equal across platforms
+	 */
+	TkpWmSizefromCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_STATE:
+	TkpWmStateCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_TITLE:
+	TkpWmTitleCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_TRANSIENT:
+	TkpWmTransientCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TKWM_WITHDRAW:
+	TkpWmWithdrawCmd(interp, tkwin, winPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
     }
 
-    updateGeom:
+  updateGeom:
     if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
 	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
@@ -1920,21 +1915,20 @@ Tk_WmObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkGetDisplayOf --
  *
- *	Parses a "-displayof window" option for various commands.  If
- *	present, the literal "-displayof" should be in objv[0] and the
- *	window name in objv[1].
+ *	Parses a "-displayof window" option for various commands. If present,
+ *	the literal "-displayof" should be in objv[0] and the window name in
+ *	objv[1].
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the argument strings did not contain
- *	the "-displayof" option.  The return value is 2 if the
- *	argument strings contained both the "-displayof" option and
- *	a valid window name.  Otherwise, the return value is -1 if
- *	the window name was missing or did not specify a valid window.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the argument strings did not contain the
+ *	"-displayof" option. The return value is 2 if the argument strings
+ *	contained both the "-displayof" option and a valid window name.
+ *	Otherwise, the return value is -1 if the window name was missing or
+ *	did not specify a valid window.
  *
- *	If the return value was 2, *tkwinPtr is filled with the
- *	token for the window specified on the command line.  If the
- *	return value was -1, an error message is left in interp's
- *	result object.
+ *	If the return value was 2, *tkwinPtr is filled with the token for the
+ *	window specified on the command line. If the return value was -1, an
+ *	error message is left in interp's result object.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1943,14 +1937,14 @@ Tk_WmObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 int
-TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc, objv, tkwinPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. If it is present,
+TkGetDisplayOf(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[],	/* Argument objects. If it is present,
 				 * "-displayof" should be in objv[0] and
 				 * objv[1] the name of a window. */
-    Tk_Window *tkwinPtr;	/* On input, contains main window of
-				 * application associated with interp.  On
+    Tk_Window *tkwinPtr)	/* On input, contains main window of
+				 * application associated with interp. On
 				 * output, filled with window specified as
 				 * option to "-displayof" argument, or
 				 * unmodified if "-displayof" argument was not
@@ -1958,7 +1952,7 @@ TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc, objv, tkwinPtr)
 {
     char *string;
     int length;
-    
+
     if (objc < 1) {
 	return 0;
     }
@@ -1970,8 +1964,7 @@ TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc, objv, tkwinPtr)
 		    "value for \"-displayof\" missing", -1);
 	    return -1;
 	}
-	string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], NULL);
-	*tkwinPtr = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, *tkwinPtr);
+	*tkwinPtr = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), *tkwinPtr);
 	if (*tkwinPtr == NULL) {
 	    return -1;
 	}
@@ -1986,11 +1979,11 @@ TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc, objv, tkwinPtr)
  * TkDeadAppCmd --
  *
  *	If an application has been deleted then all Tk commands will be
- *	re-bound to this procedure.
+ *	re-bound to this function.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl error is reported to let the user know that
- *	the application is dead.
+ *	A standard Tcl error is reported to let the user know that the
+ *	application is dead.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	See the user documentation.
@@ -2000,28 +1993,28 @@ TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc, objv, tkwinPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 int
-TkDeadAppCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Dummy. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+TkDeadAppCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Dummy. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    const char **argv)		/* Argument strings. */
 {
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't invoke \"", argv[0],
-	    "\" command:  application has been destroyed", (char *) NULL);
+	    "\" command:  application has been destroyed", NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * GetToplevel --
+ * GetTopHierarchy --
  *
- *	Retrieves the toplevel window which is the nearest ancestor of
- *	of the specified window.
+ *	Retrieves the top-of-hierarchy window which is the nearest ancestor of
+ *	the specified window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns the toplevel window or NULL if the window has no
- *	ancestor which is a toplevel.
+ *	Returns the top-of-hierarchy window, or NULL if the window has no
+ *	ancestor which is at the top of a physical window hierarchy.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2030,17 +2023,22 @@ TkDeadAppCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  */
 
 static TkWindow *
-GetToplevel(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which the toplevel should be
-				 * deterined. */
+GetTopHierarchy(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window for which the top-of-hierarchy
+				 * ancestor should be deterined. */
 {
-     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
-
-     while (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
-	 winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr;
-	 if (winPtr == NULL) {
-	     return NULL;
-	 }
-     }
-     return winPtr;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+
+    while ((winPtr != NULL) && !(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY)) {
+	winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr;
+    }
+    return winPtr;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkColor.c b/generic/tkColor.c
index 848e9ab..76d0baa 100755..100644
--- a/generic/tkColor.c
+++ b/generic/tkColor.c
@@ -40,11 +40,10 @@ static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
  * Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ColorInit _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
-static void		DupColorObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr));
-static void		FreeColorObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		InitColorObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+static void		ColorInit(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+static void		DupColorObjProc(Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr);
+static void		FreeColorObjProc(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		InitColorObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
 
 /*
  * The following structure defines the implementation of the "color" Tcl
@@ -85,11 +84,11 @@ Tcl_ObjType tkColorObjType = {
  */
 
 XColor *
-Tk_AllocColorFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used only for error reporting.  If NULL,
+Tk_AllocColorFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used only for error reporting. If NULL,
 				 * then no messages are provided. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which the color will be used.*/
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object that describes the color; string
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which the color will be used.*/
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Object that describes the color; string
 				 * value is a color name such as "red" or
 				 * "#ff0000".*/
 {
@@ -128,8 +127,8 @@ Tk_AllocColorFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
      */
 
     if (tkColPtr != NULL) {
-	TkColor *firstColorPtr = 
-		(TkColor *) Tcl_GetHashValue(tkColPtr->hashPtr);
+	TkColor *firstColorPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(tkColPtr->hashPtr);
+
 	FreeColorObjProc(objPtr);
 	for (tkColPtr = firstColorPtr; tkColPtr != NULL;
 		tkColPtr = tkColPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -137,7 +136,7 @@ Tk_AllocColorFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
 		    && (Tk_Colormap(tkwin) == tkColPtr->colormap)) {
 		tkColPtr->resourceRefCount++;
 		tkColPtr->objRefCount++;
-		objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) tkColPtr;
+		objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) tkColPtr;
 		return (XColor *) tkColPtr;
 	    }
 	}
@@ -148,7 +147,7 @@ Tk_AllocColorFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
      */
 
     tkColPtr = (TkColor *) Tk_GetColor(interp, tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objPtr));
-    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) tkColPtr;
+    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) tkColPtr;
     if (tkColPtr != NULL) {
 	tkColPtr->objRefCount++;
     }
@@ -180,11 +179,11 @@ Tk_AllocColorFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
  */
 
 XColor *
-Tk_GetColor(interp, tkwin, name)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Place to leave error message if color can't
+Tk_GetColor(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Place to leave error message if color can't
 				 * be found. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which color will be used. */
-    Tk_Uid name;		/* Name of color to be allocated (in form
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which color will be used. */
+    Tk_Uid name)		/* Name of color to be allocated (in form
 				 * suitable for passing to XParseColor). */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *nameHashPtr;
@@ -203,7 +202,7 @@ Tk_GetColor(interp, tkwin, name)
 
     nameHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->colorNameTable, name, &isNew);
     if (!isNew) {
-	existingColPtr = (TkColor *) Tcl_GetHashValue(nameHashPtr);
+	existingColPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(nameHashPtr);
 	for (tkColPtr = existingColPtr; tkColPtr != NULL;
 		tkColPtr = tkColPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if ((tkColPtr->screen == Tk_Screen(tkwin))
@@ -234,7 +233,7 @@ Tk_GetColor(interp, tkwin, name)
 	if (isNew) {
 	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(nameHashPtr);
 	}
-	return (XColor *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -281,9 +280,9 @@ Tk_GetColor(interp, tkwin, name)
  */
 
 XColor *
-Tk_GetColorByValue(tkwin, colorPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window where color will be used. */
-    XColor *colorPtr;		/* Red, green, and blue fields indicate
+Tk_GetColorByValue(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window where color will be used. */
+    XColor *colorPtr)		/* Red, green, and blue fields indicate
 				 * desired color. */
 {
     ValueKey valueKey;
@@ -312,7 +311,7 @@ Tk_GetColorByValue(tkwin, colorPtr)
     valueHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->colorValueTable,
 	    (char *) &valueKey, &isNew);
     if (!isNew) {
-	tkColPtr = (TkColor *) Tcl_GetHashValue(valueHashPtr);
+	tkColPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(valueHashPtr);
 	tkColPtr->resourceRefCount++;
 	return &tkColPtr->color;
     }
@@ -358,13 +357,12 @@ Tk_GetColorByValue(tkwin, colorPtr)
  */
 
 CONST char *
-Tk_NameOfColor(colorPtr)
-    XColor *colorPtr;		/* Color whose name is desired. */
+Tk_NameOfColor(
+    XColor *colorPtr)		/* Color whose name is desired. */
 {
     register TkColor *tkColPtr = (TkColor *) colorPtr;
 
-    if ((tkColPtr->magic == COLOR_MAGIC) &&
-	    (tkColPtr->type == TK_COLOR_BY_NAME)) {
+    if (tkColPtr->magic==COLOR_MAGIC && tkColPtr->type==TK_COLOR_BY_NAME) {
 	return tkColPtr->hashPtr->key.string;
     } else {
 	ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
@@ -397,10 +395,10 @@ Tk_NameOfColor(colorPtr)
  */
 
 GC
-Tk_GCForColor(colorPtr, drawable)
-    XColor *colorPtr;		/* Color for which a GC is desired. Must have
+Tk_GCForColor(
+    XColor *colorPtr,		/* Color for which a GC is desired. Must have
 				 * been allocated by Tk_GetColor. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* Drawable in which the color will be used
+    Drawable drawable)		/* Drawable in which the color will be used
 				 * (must have same screen and depth as the one
 				 * for which the color was allocated). */
 {
@@ -442,8 +440,8 @@ Tk_GCForColor(colorPtr, drawable)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeColor(colorPtr)
-    XColor *colorPtr;		/* Color to be released.  Must have been
+Tk_FreeColor(
+    XColor *colorPtr)		/* Color to be released. Must have been
 				 * allocated by Tk_GetColor or
 				 * Tk_GetColorByValue. */
 {
@@ -477,7 +475,7 @@ Tk_FreeColor(colorPtr)
     }
     TkpFreeColor(tkColPtr);
 
-    prevPtr = (TkColor *) Tcl_GetHashValue(tkColPtr->hashPtr);
+    prevPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(tkColPtr->hashPtr);
     if (prevPtr == tkColPtr) {
 	if (tkColPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(tkColPtr->hashPtr);
@@ -524,10 +522,10 @@ Tk_FreeColor(colorPtr)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeColorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window this color lives in. Needed
-				 * for the screen and colormap values. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The Tcl_Obj * to be freed. */
+Tk_FreeColorFromObj(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The window this color lives in. Needed for
+				 * the screen and colormap values. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The Tcl_Obj * to be freed. */
 {
     Tk_FreeColor(Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr));
     FreeColorObjProc(objPtr);
@@ -553,8 +551,8 @@ Tk_FreeColorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeColorObjProc(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object we are releasing. */
+FreeColorObjProc(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object we are releasing. */
 {
     TkColor *tkColPtr = (TkColor *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
 
@@ -564,7 +562,7 @@ FreeColorObjProc(objPtr)
 		&& (tkColPtr->resourceRefCount == 0)) {
 	    ckfree((char *) tkColPtr);
 	}
-	objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) NULL;
+	objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = NULL;
     }
 }
 
@@ -587,14 +585,14 @@ FreeColorObjProc(objPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-DupColorObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying from. */
-    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying to. */
+DupColorObjProc(
+    Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,		/* The object we are copying from. */
+    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr)		/* The object we are copying to. */
 {
     TkColor *tkColPtr = (TkColor *) srcObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
 
     dupObjPtr->typePtr = srcObjPtr->typePtr;
-    dupObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) tkColPtr;
+    dupObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) tkColPtr;
 
     if (tkColPtr != NULL) {
 	tkColPtr->objRefCount++;
@@ -621,10 +619,10 @@ DupColorObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
  */
 
 XColor *
-Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window in which the color will be
+Tk_GetColorFromObj(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The window in which the color will be
 				 * used. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* String value contains the name of the
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* String value contains the name of the
 				 * desired color. */
 {
     TkColor *tkColPtr;
@@ -667,12 +665,12 @@ Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
     if (hashPtr == NULL) {
 	goto error;
     }
-    for (tkColPtr = (TkColor *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
+    for (tkColPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
 	    (tkColPtr != NULL); tkColPtr = tkColPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if ((Tk_Screen(tkwin) == tkColPtr->screen)
 		&& (Tk_Colormap(tkwin) == tkColPtr->colormap)) {
 	    FreeColorObjProc(objPtr);
-	    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) tkColPtr;
+	    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) tkColPtr;
 	    tkColPtr->objRefCount++;
 	    return (XColor *) tkColPtr;
 	}
@@ -705,10 +703,10 @@ Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-InitColorObj(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object to convert. */
+InitColorObj(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object to convert. */
 {
-    Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
+    const Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
 
     /*
      * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
@@ -720,7 +718,7 @@ InitColorObj(objPtr)
 	(*typePtr->freeIntRepProc)(objPtr);
     }
     objPtr->typePtr = &tkColorObjType;
-    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) NULL;
+    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = NULL;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -740,8 +738,8 @@ InitColorObj(objPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ColorInit(dispPtr)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+ColorInit(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr)
 {
     if (!dispPtr->colorInit) {
 	dispPtr->colorInit = 1;
@@ -771,10 +769,10 @@ ColorInit(dispPtr)
  */
 
 Tcl_Obj *
-TkDebugColor(tkwin, name)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window in which the color will be used
+TkDebugColor(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The window in which the color will be used
 				 * (not currently used). */
-    char *name;			/* Name of the desired color. */
+    char *name)			/* Name of the desired color. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;
     Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
@@ -783,7 +781,7 @@ TkDebugColor(tkwin, name)
     resultPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
     hashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->colorNameTable, name);
     if (hashPtr != NULL) {
-	TkColor *tkColPtr = (TkColor *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
+	TkColor *tkColPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
 
 	if (tkColPtr == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_Panic("TkDebugColor found empty hash table entry");
@@ -832,11 +830,11 @@ CONST char *CONST tkWebColors[20] = {
 };
 
 Status
-TkParseColor(display, map, name, color)
-    Display * display;		/* The display */
-    Colormap map;			/* Color map */
-    CONST char* name;     /* String to be parsed */
-    XColor * color;
+TkParseColor(
+    Display *display,		/* The display */
+    Colormap map,			/* Color map */
+    const char *name,     /* String to be parsed */
+    XColor *color)
 {
     char buf[14];
     if (*name == '#') {
diff --git a/generic/tkColor.h b/generic/tkColor.h
index 2a59e05..d4679cf 100644
--- a/generic/tkColor.h
+++ b/generic/tkColor.h
@@ -1,13 +1,12 @@
 /*
  * tkColor.h --
  *
- *	Declarations of data types and functions used by the
- *	Tk color module.
+ *	Declarations of data types and functions used by the Tk color module.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKCOLOR
@@ -16,14 +15,14 @@
 #include <tkInt.h>
 
 #ifdef BUILD_tk
-# undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
-# define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
+#undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
+#define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
 #endif
 
 /*
- * One of the following data structures is used to keep track of
- * each color that is being used by the application; typically there
- * is a colormap entry allocated for each of these colors.
+ * One of the following data structures is used to keep track of each color
+ * that is being used by the application; typically there is a colormap entry
+ * allocated for each of these colors.
  */
 
 #define TK_COLOR_BY_NAME	1
@@ -34,39 +33,38 @@
 typedef struct TkColor {
     XColor color;		/* Information about this color. */
     unsigned int magic;		/* Used for quick integrity check on this
-				 * structure.   Must always have the
-				 * value COLOR_MAGIC. */
+				 * structure. Must always have the value
+				 * COLOR_MAGIC. */
     GC gc;			/* Simple gc with this color as foreground
-				 * color and all other fields defaulted.
-				 * May be None. */
-    Screen *screen;		/* Screen where this color is valid.  Used
-				 * to delete it, and to find its display. */
+				 * color and all other fields defaulted. May
+				 * be None. */
+    Screen *screen;		/* Screen where this color is valid. Used to
+				 * delete it, and to find its display. */
     Colormap colormap;		/* Colormap from which this entry was
 				 * allocated. */
-    Visual *visual;             /* Visual associated with colormap. */
+    Visual *visual;		/* Visual associated with colormap. */
     int resourceRefCount;	/* Number of active uses of this color (each
 				 * active use corresponds to a call to
-				 * Tk_AllocColorFromObj or Tk_GetColor).
-				 * If this count is 0, then this TkColor
+				 * Tk_AllocColorFromObj or Tk_GetColor). If
+				 * this count is 0, then this TkColor
 				 * structure is no longer valid and it isn't
-				 * present in a hash table: it is being
-				 * kept around only because there are objects
-				 * referring to it.  The structure is freed
-				 * when resourceRefCount and objRefCount
-				 * are both 0. */
+				 * present in a hash table: it is being kept
+				 * around only because there are objects
+				 * referring to it. The structure is freed
+				 * when resourceRefCount and objRefCount are
+				 * both 0. */
     int objRefCount;		/* The number of Tcl objects that reference
 				 * this structure. */
-    int type;			/* TK_COLOR_BY_NAME or TK_COLOR_BY_VALUE */
+    int type;			/* TK_COLOR_BY_NAME or TK_COLOR_BY_VALUE. */
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;	/* Pointer to hash table entry for this
 				 * structure. (for use in deleting entry). */
     struct TkColor *nextPtr;	/* Points to the next TkColor structure with
-				 * the same color name.  Colors with the
-				 * same name but different screens or
-				 * colormaps are chained together off a
-				 * single entry in nameTable.  For colors in
-				 * valueTable (those allocated by
-				 * Tk_GetColorByValue) this field is always
-				 * NULL. */
+				 * the same color name. Colors with the same
+				 * name but different screens or colormaps are
+				 * chained together off a single entry in
+				 * nameTable. For colors in valueTable (those
+				 * allocated by Tk_GetColorByValue) this field
+				 * is always NULL. */
 } TkColor;
 
 /*
@@ -74,14 +72,12 @@ typedef struct TkColor {
  */
 
 #ifndef TkpFreeColor
-EXTERN void		TkpFreeColor _ANSI_ARGS_((TkColor *tkColPtr));
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpFreeColor(TkColor *tkColPtr);
 #endif
-EXTERN TkColor *	TkpGetColor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    Tk_Uid name));
-EXTERN TkColor *	TkpGetColorByValue _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    XColor *colorPtr));	
+MODULE_SCOPE TkColor *	TkpGetColor(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid name);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkColor *	TkpGetColorByValue(Tk_Window tkwin, XColor *colorPtr);
 
-# undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
-# define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
+#undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
+#define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
 
 #endif /* _TKCOLOR */
diff --git a/generic/tkConfig.c b/generic/tkConfig.c
index 1e66af0..f2eaa33 100644
--- a/generic/tkConfig.c
+++ b/generic/tkConfig.c
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkConfig.c --
  *
- *	This file contains procedures that manage configuration options
- *	for widgets and other things.
+ *	This file contains functions that manage configuration options for
+ *	widgets and other things.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1997-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 /*
@@ -23,129 +23,123 @@
 #define __NO_OLD_CONFIG
 #endif
 
-#include "tk.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkFont.h"
 
 /*
- * The following definition is an AssocData key used to keep track of
- * all of the option tables that have been created for an interpreter.
+ * The following definition is an AssocData key used to keep track of all of
+ * the option tables that have been created for an interpreter.
  */
 
 #define OPTION_HASH_KEY "TkOptionTable"
 
 /*
- * The following two structures are used along with Tk_OptionSpec
- * structures to manage configuration options.  Tk_OptionSpec is
- * static templates that are compiled into the code of a widget
- * or other object manager.  However, to look up options efficiently
- * we need to supplement the static information with additional
- * dynamic information, and this dynamic information may be different
- * for each application.  Thus we create structures of the following
- * two types to hold all of the dynamic information; this is done
- * by Tk_CreateOptionTable.
- * 
- * One of the following structures corresponds to each Tk_OptionSpec.
- * These structures exist as arrays inside TkOptionTable structures.
+ * The following two structures are used along with Tk_OptionSpec structures
+ * to manage configuration options. Tk_OptionSpec is static templates that are
+ * compiled into the code of a widget or other object manager. However, to
+ * look up options efficiently we need to supplement the static information
+ * with additional dynamic information, and this dynamic information may be
+ * different for each application. Thus we create structures of the following
+ * two types to hold all of the dynamic information; this is done by
+ * Tk_CreateOptionTable.
+ *
+ * One of the following structures corresponds to each Tk_OptionSpec. These
+ * structures exist as arrays inside TkOptionTable structures.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkOption {
-    CONST Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;	/* The original spec from the template
-					 * passed to Tk_CreateOptionTable.*/
-    Tk_Uid dbNameUID;		 	/* The Uid form of the option database 
-					 * name. */
-    Tk_Uid dbClassUID;			/* The Uid form of the option database
-					 * class name. */
-    Tcl_Obj *defaultPtr;		/* Default value for this option. */
+    const Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;
+				/* The original spec from the template passed
+				 * to Tk_CreateOptionTable.*/
+    Tk_Uid dbNameUID;	 	/* The Uid form of the option database
+				 * name. */
+    Tk_Uid dbClassUID;		/* The Uid form of the option database class
+				 * name. */
+    Tcl_Obj *defaultPtr;	/* Default value for this option. */
     union {
-	Tcl_Obj *monoColorPtr;		/* For color and border options, this
-					 * is an alternate default value to
-					 * use on monochrome displays. */
-	struct TkOption *synonymPtr;	/* For synonym options, this points to
-					 * the master entry. */
-	struct Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom;  /* For TK_OPTION_CUSTOM. */
+	Tcl_Obj *monoColorPtr;	/* For color and border options, this is an
+				 * alternate default value to use on
+				 * monochrome displays. */
+	struct TkOption *synonymPtr;
+				/* For synonym options, this points to the
+				 * master entry. */
+	struct Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom;
+				/* For TK_OPTION_CUSTOM. */
     } extra;
-    int flags;				/* Miscellaneous flag values; see
-					 * below for definitions. */
+    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flag values; see below for
+				 * definitions. */
 } Option;
 
 /*
  * Flag bits defined for Option structures:
  *
- * OPTION_NEEDS_FREEING -	1 means that FreeResources must be
- *				invoke to free resources associated with
- *				the option when it is no longer needed.
+ * OPTION_NEEDS_FREEING -	1 means that FreeResources must be invoked to
+ *				free resources associated with the option when
+ *				it is no longer needed.
  */
 
 #define OPTION_NEEDS_FREEING		1
 
 /*
- * One of the following exists for each Tk_OptionSpec array that has
- * been passed to Tk_CreateOptionTable.
+ * One of the following exists for each Tk_OptionSpec array that has been
+ * passed to Tk_CreateOptionTable.
  */
 
 typedef struct OptionTable {
-    int refCount;			/* Counts the number of uses of this
-					 * table (the number of times
-					 * Tk_CreateOptionTable has returned
-					 * it).  This can be greater than 1 if
-					 * it is shared along several option
-					 * table  chains, or if the same table
-					 * is used for multiple purposes. */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;	/* Hash table entry that refers to this
-					 * table; used to delete the entry. */
-    struct OptionTable *nextPtr;	/* If templatePtr was part of a chain
-					 * of templates, this points to the
-					 * table corresponding to the next
-					 * template in the chain. */
-    int numOptions;			/* The number of items in the options
-					 * array below. */
-    Option options[1];			/* Information about the individual
-					 * options in the table.  This must be
-					 * the last field in the structure:
-					 * the actual size of the array will
-					 * be numOptions, not 1. */
+    int refCount;		/* Counts the number of uses of this table
+				 * (the number of times Tk_CreateOptionTable
+				 * has returned it). This can be greater than
+				 * 1 if it is shared along several option
+				 * table chains, or if the same table is used
+				 * for multiple purposes. */
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;/* Hash table entry that refers to this table;
+				 * used to delete the entry. */
+    struct OptionTable *nextPtr;/* If templatePtr was part of a chain of
+				 * templates, this points to the table
+				 * corresponding to the next template in the
+				 * chain. */
+    int numOptions;		/* The number of items in the options array
+				 * below. */
+    Option options[1];		/* Information about the individual options in
+				 * the table. This must be the last field in
+				 * the structure: the actual size of the array
+				 * will be numOptions, not 1. */
 } OptionTable;
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static int		DoObjConfig _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *recordPtr, Option *optionPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *valuePtr, Tk_Window tkwin, 
-			    Tk_SavedOption *savePtr));
-static void		DestroyOptionHashTable _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static void		FreeResources _ANSI_ARGS_((Option *optionPtr, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, char *internalPtr,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static Tcl_Obj *	GetConfigList _ANSI_ARGS_((char *recordPtr,
-			    Option *optionPtr, Tk_Window tkwin));
-static Tcl_Obj *	GetObjectForOption _ANSI_ARGS_((char *recordPtr,
-			    Option *optionPtr, Tk_Window tkwin));
-static Option *		GetOption _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *name,
-			    OptionTable *tablePtr));
-static Option *		GetOptionFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, OptionTable *tablePtr));
-static int		ObjectIsEmpty _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static int		SetOptionFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+static int		DoObjConfig(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr,
+			    Option *optionPtr, Tcl_Obj *valuePtr,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_SavedOption *savePtr);
+static void		DestroyOptionHashTable(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static void		FreeResources(Option *optionPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+			    char *internalPtr, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static Tcl_Obj *	GetConfigList(char *recordPtr,
+			    Option *optionPtr, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static Tcl_Obj *	GetObjectForOption(char *recordPtr,
+			    Option *optionPtr, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static Option *		GetOption(const char *name, OptionTable *tablePtr);
+static Option *		GetOptionFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, OptionTable *tablePtr);
+static int		ObjectIsEmpty(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static int		SetOptionFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
 
 /*
- * The structure below defines an object type that is used to cache the
- * result of looking up an option name.  If an object has this type, then
- * its internalPtr1 field points to the OptionTable in which it was looked up,
- * and the internalPtr2 field points to the entry that matched.
+ * The structure below defines an object type that is used to cache the result
+ * of looking up an option name. If an object has this type, then its
+ * internalPtr1 field points to the OptionTable in which it was looked up, and
+ * the internalPtr2 field points to the entry that matched.
  */
 
 Tcl_ObjType tkOptionObjType = {
-    "option",				/* name */
-    (Tcl_FreeInternalRepProc *) NULL,	/* freeIntRepProc */
-    (Tcl_DupInternalRepProc *) NULL,	/* dupIntRepProc */
-    (Tcl_UpdateStringProc *) NULL,	/* updateStringProc */
-    SetOptionFromAny			/* setFromAnyProc */
+    "option",			/* name */
+    NULL,			/* freeIntRepProc */
+    NULL,			/* dupIntRepProc */
+    NULL,			/* updateStringProc */
+    SetOptionFromAny		/* setFromAnyProc */
 };
 
 /*
@@ -153,12 +147,12 @@ Tcl_ObjType tkOptionObjType = {
  *
  * Tk_CreateOptionTable --
  *
- *	Given a template for configuration options, this procedure
- *	creates a table that may be used to look up options efficiently.
+ *	Given a template for configuration options, this function creates a
+ *	table that may be used to look up options efficiently.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a token to a structure that can be passed to procedures
- *	such as Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, and Tk_FreeConfigOptions.
+ *	Returns a token to a structure that can be passed to functions such as
+ *	Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, and Tk_FreeConfigOptions.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Storage is allocated.
@@ -167,29 +161,29 @@ Tcl_ObjType tkOptionObjType = {
  */
 
 Tk_OptionTable
-Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter associated with the
-					 * application in which this table
-					 * will be used. */
-    CONST Tk_OptionSpec *templatePtr;	/* Static information about the
-					 * configuration options. */
+Tk_CreateOptionTable(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter associated with the application
+				 * in which this table will be used. */
+    const Tk_OptionSpec *templatePtr)
+				/* Static information about the configuration
+				 * options. */
 {
     Tcl_HashTable *hashTablePtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;
     int newEntry;
     OptionTable *tablePtr;
-    CONST Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr, *specPtr2;
+    const Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr, *specPtr2;
     Option *optionPtr;
     int numOptions, i;
 
     /*
-     * We use an AssocData value in the interpreter to keep a hash
-     * table of all the option tables we've created for this application.
-     * This is used for two purposes.  First, it allows us to share the
-     * tables (e.g. in several chains) and second, we use the deletion
-     * callback for the AssocData to delete all the option tables when
-     * the interpreter is deleted.  The code below finds the hash table
-     * or creates a new one if it doesn't already exist.
+     * We use an AssocData value in the interpreter to keep a hash table of
+     * all the option tables we've created for this application. This is used
+     * for two purposes. First, it allows us to share the tables (e.g. in
+     * several chains) and second, we use the deletion callback for the
+     * AssocData to delete all the option tables when the interpreter is
+     * deleted. The code below finds the hash table or creates a new one if it
+     * doesn't already exist.
      */
 
     hashTablePtr = (Tcl_HashTable *) Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, OPTION_HASH_KEY,
@@ -202,8 +196,8 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * See if a table has already been created for this template.  If
-     * so, just reuse the existing table.
+     * See if a table has already been created for this template. If so, just
+     * reuse the existing table.
      */
 
     hashEntryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(hashTablePtr, (char *) templatePtr,
@@ -215,8 +209,8 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Count the number of options in the template, then create the
-     * table structure.
+     * Count the number of options in the template, then create the table
+     * structure.
      */
 
     numOptions = 0;
@@ -245,14 +239,13 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
 
 	if (specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_SYNONYM) {
 	    /*
-	     * This is a synonym option; find the master option that it
-	     * refers to and create a pointer from the synonym to the
-	     * master.
+	     * This is a synonym option; find the master option that it refers
+	     * to and create a pointer from the synonym to the master.
 	     */
 
 	    for (specPtr2 = templatePtr, i = 0; ; specPtr2++, i++) {
 		if (specPtr2->type == TK_OPTION_END) {
-		    panic("Tk_CreateOptionTable couldn't find synonym");
+		    Tcl_Panic("Tk_CreateOptionTable couldn't find synonym");
 		}
 		if (strcmp(specPtr2->optionName,
 			(char *) specPtr->clientData) == 0) {
@@ -265,12 +258,10 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
 		optionPtr->dbNameUID = Tk_GetUid(specPtr->dbName);
 	    }
 	    if (specPtr->dbClass != NULL) {
-		optionPtr->dbClassUID = 
-			Tk_GetUid(specPtr->dbClass);
+		optionPtr->dbClassUID = Tk_GetUid(specPtr->dbClass);
 	    }
 	    if (specPtr->defValue != NULL) {
-		optionPtr->defaultPtr =
-			Tcl_NewStringObj(specPtr->defValue, -1);
+		optionPtr->defaultPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(specPtr->defValue,-1);
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(optionPtr->defaultPtr);
 	    }
 	    if (((specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_COLOR)
@@ -286,7 +277,7 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
 		 * Get the custom parsing, etc., functions.
 		 */
 		optionPtr->extra.custom =
-		    (Tk_ObjCustomOption *)specPtr->clientData;
+			(Tk_ObjCustomOption *) specPtr->clientData;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (((specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_STRING)
@@ -304,9 +295,9 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
     Tcl_SetHashValue(hashEntryPtr, tablePtr);
 
     /*
-     * Finally, check to see if this template chains to another template
-     * with additional options.  If so, call ourselves recursively to
-     * create the next table(s).
+     * Finally, check to see if this template chains to another template with
+     * additional options. If so, call ourselves recursively to create the
+     * next table(s).
      */
 
     if (specPtr->clientData != NULL) {
@@ -322,22 +313,22 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
  *
  * Tk_DeleteOptionTable --
  *
- *	Called to release resources used by an option table when 
- *	the table is no longer needed.
+ *	Called to release resources used by an option table when the table is
+ *	no longer needed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The option table and associated resources (such as additional
- *	option tables chained off it) are destroyed.
+ *	The option table and associated resources (such as additional option
+ *	tables chained off it) are destroyed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DeleteOptionTable(optionTable)
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;		/* The option table to delete. */
+Tk_DeleteOptionTable(
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable)	/* The option table to delete. */
 {
     OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable;
     Option *optionPtr;
@@ -372,25 +363,25 @@ Tk_DeleteOptionTable(optionTable)
  *
  * DestroyOptionHashTable --
  *
- *	This procedure is the deletion callback associated with the
- *	AssocData entry created by Tk_CreateOptionTable.  It is
- *	invoked when an interpreter is deleted, and deletes all of
- *	the option tables associated with that interpreter.
+ *	This function is the deletion callback associated with the AssocData
+ *	entry created by Tk_CreateOptionTable. It is invoked when an
+ *	interpreter is deleted, and deletes all of the option tables
+ *	associated with that interpreter.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The option hash table is destroyed along with all of the
- *	OptionTable structures that it refers to.
+ *	The option hash table is destroyed along with all of the OptionTable
+ *	structures that it refers to.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyOptionHashTable(clientData, interp)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* The hash table we are destroying */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interpreter we are destroying */
+DestroyOptionHashTable(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* The hash table we are destroying */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* The interpreter we are destroying */
 {
     Tcl_HashTable *hashTablePtr = (Tcl_HashTable *) clientData;
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
@@ -404,13 +395,12 @@ DestroyOptionHashTable(clientData, interp)
 
 	/*
 	 * The following statements do two tricky things:
-	 * 1. They ensure that the option table is deleted, even if
-	 *    there are outstanding references to it.
-	 * 2. They ensure that Tk_DeleteOptionTable doesn't delete
-	 *    other tables chained from this one; we'll do it when
-	 *    we come across the hash table entry for the chained
-	 *    table (in fact, the chained table may already have
-	 *    been deleted).
+	 * 1. They ensure that the option table is deleted, even if there are
+	 *    outstanding references to it.
+	 * 2. They ensure that Tk_DeleteOptionTable doesn't delete other
+	 *    tables chained from this one; we'll do it when we come across
+	 *    the hash table entry for the chained table (in fact, the chained
+	 *    table may already have been deleted).
 	 */
 
 	tablePtr->refCount = 1;
@@ -426,16 +416,16 @@ DestroyOptionHashTable(clientData, interp)
  *
  * Tk_InitOptions --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when an object such as a widget
- *	is created.  It supplies an initial value for each configuration
- *	option (the value may come from the option database, a system
- *	default, or the default in the option table).
+ *	This function is invoked when an object such as a widget is created.
+ *	It supplies an initial value for each configuration option (the value
+ *	may come from the option database, a system default, or the default in
+ *	the option table).
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is TCL_OK if the procedure completed
- *	successfully, and TCL_ERROR if one of the initial values was
- *	bogus.  If an error occurs and interp isn't NULL, then an
- *	error message will be left in its result.
+ *	The return value is TCL_OK if the function completed successfully, and
+ *	TCL_ERROR if one of the initial values was bogus. If an error occurs
+ *	and interp isn't NULL, then an error message will be left in its
+ *	result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Fields of recordPtr are filled in with initial values.
@@ -444,21 +434,21 @@ DestroyOptionHashTable(clientData, interp)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting.    NULL
-				 * means don't leave an error message. */
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to the record to configure.
-				 * Note: the caller should have properly
-				 * initialized the record with NULL
-				 * pointers for each option value. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* The token which matches the config
-				 * specs for the widget in question. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Certain options types (such as
-				 * TK_OPTION_COLOR) need fields out
-				 * of the window they are used in to
-				 * be able to calculate their values.
-				 * Not needed unless one of these
-				 * options is in the configSpecs record. */
+Tk_InitOptions(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. NULL means
+				 * don't leave an error message. */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* Pointer to the record to configure. Note:
+				 * the caller should have properly initialized
+				 * the record with NULL pointers for each
+				 * option value. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,	/* The token which matches the config specs
+				 * for the widget in question. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Certain options types (such as
+				 * TK_OPTION_COLOR) need fields out of the
+				 * window they are used in to be able to
+				 * calculate their values. Not needed unless
+				 * one of these options is in the configSpecs
+				 * record. */
 {
     OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable;
     Option *optionPtr;
@@ -471,8 +461,8 @@ Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
 
     /*
      * If this table chains to other tables, handle their initialization
-     * first.  That way, if both tables refer to the same field of the
-     * record, the value in the first table will win.
+     * first. That way, if both tables refer to the same field of the record,
+     * the value in the first table will win.
      */
 
     if (tablePtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
@@ -489,11 +479,11 @@ Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
 
     for (optionPtr = tablePtr->options, count = tablePtr->numOptions;
 	    count > 0; optionPtr++, count--) {
-
 	/*
 	 * If we specify TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, then the user has
 	 * processed and set a default for this already.
 	 */
+
 	if ((optionPtr->specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_SYNONYM) ||
 		(optionPtr->specPtr->flags & TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT)) {
 	    continue;
@@ -502,12 +492,12 @@ Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
 
 	/*
 	 * We look in three places for the initial value, using the first
-	 * non-NULL value that we find.  First, check the option database.
+	 * non-NULL value that we find. First, check the option database.
 	 */
 
 	valuePtr = NULL;
 	if (optionPtr->dbNameUID != NULL) {
-	    value = Tk_GetOption(tkwin, optionPtr->dbNameUID, 
+	    value = Tk_GetOption(tkwin, optionPtr->dbNameUID,
 		    optionPtr->dbClassUID);
 	    if (value != NULL) {
 		valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(value, -1);
@@ -518,6 +508,7 @@ Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
 	/*
 	 * Second, check for a system-specific default value.
 	 */
+
 	if ((valuePtr == NULL)
 		&& (optionPtr->dbNameUID != NULL)) {
 	    valuePtr = TkpGetSystemDefault(tkwin, optionPtr->dbNameUID,
@@ -528,16 +519,16 @@ Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Third and last, use the default value supplied by the option
-	 * table.  In the case of color objects, we pick one of two
-	 * values depending on whether the screen is mono or color.
+	 * Third and last, use the default value supplied by the option table.
+	 * In the case of color objects, we pick one of two values depending
+	 * on whether the screen is mono or color.
 	 */
 
 	if (valuePtr == NULL) {
-	    if ((tkwin != NULL) 
+	    if ((tkwin != NULL)
 		    && ((optionPtr->specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_COLOR)
 		    || (optionPtr->specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_BORDER))
-		    && (Tk_Depth(tkwin) <= 1) 
+		    && (Tk_Depth(tkwin) <= 1)
 		    && (optionPtr->extra.monoColorPtr != NULL)) {
 		valuePtr = optionPtr->extra.monoColorPtr;
 	    } else {
@@ -554,25 +545,26 @@ Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
 	 * referenced here, and will be properly free'd when finished,
 	 * regardless of what DoObjConfig does.
 	 */
+
 	Tcl_IncrRefCount(valuePtr);
-	
+
 	if (DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin,
-		(Tk_SavedOption *) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+		NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 	    if (interp != NULL) {
 		char msg[200];
-    
+
 		switch (source) {
-		    case OPTION_DATABASE:
-			sprintf(msg, "\n    (database entry for \"%.50s\")",
-				optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
-			break;
-		    case SYSTEM_DEFAULT:
-			sprintf(msg, "\n    (system default for \"%.50s\")",
-				optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
-			break;
-		    case TABLE_DEFAULT:
-			sprintf(msg, "\n    (default value for \"%.50s\")",
-				optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
+		case OPTION_DATABASE:
+		    sprintf(msg, "\n    (database entry for \"%.50s\")",
+			    optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
+		    break;
+		case SYSTEM_DEFAULT:
+		    sprintf(msg, "\n    (system default for \"%.50s\")",
+			    optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
+		    break;
+		case TABLE_DEFAULT:
+		    sprintf(msg, "\n    (default value for \"%.50s\")",
+			    optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
 		}
 		if (tkwin != NULL) {
 		    sprintf(msg + strlen(msg) - 1, " in widget \"%.50s\")",
@@ -593,40 +585,38 @@ Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
  *
  * DoObjConfig --
  *
- *	This procedure applies a new value for a configuration option
- *	to the record being configured.
+ *	This function applies a new value for a configuration option to the
+ *	record being configured.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is TCL_OK if the procedure completed
- *	successfully.  If an error occurred then TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned and an error message is left in interp's result, if
- *	interp isn't NULL.  In addition, if oldValuePtrPtr isn't
- *	NULL then it *oldValuePtrPtr is filled in with a pointer
- *	to the option's old value.
+ *	The return value is TCL_OK if the function completed successfully. If
+ *	an error occurred then TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is
+ *	left in interp's result, if interp isn't NULL. In addition, if
+ *	oldValuePtrPtr isn't NULL then it *oldValuePtrPtr is filled in with a
+ *	pointer to the option's old value.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	RecordPtr gets modified to hold the new value in the form of
- *	a Tcl_Obj, an internal representation, or both.  The old
- *	value is freed if oldValuePtrPtr is NULL.
+ *	RecordPtr gets modified to hold the new value in the form of a
+ *	Tcl_Obj, an internal representation, or both. The old value is freed
+ *	if oldValuePtrPtr is NULL.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin, savedOptionPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting.  If
-				 * NULL, then no message is left if an error
+DoObjConfig(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL,
+				 * then no message is left if an error
 				 * occurs. */
-    char *recordPtr;		/* The record to modify to hold the new
-				 * option value. */
-    Option *optionPtr;		/* Pointer to information about the
-				 * option. */
-    Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;		/* New value for option. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which option will be used (needed
+    char *recordPtr,		/* The record to modify to hold the new option
+				 * value. */
+    Option *optionPtr,		/* Pointer to information about the option. */
+    Tcl_Obj *valuePtr,		/* New value for option. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which option will be used (needed
 				 * to allocate resources for some options).
-				 * May be NULL if the option doesn't
-				 * require window-related resources. */
-    Tk_SavedOption *savedOptionPtr;
+				 * May be NULL if the option doesn't require
+				 * window-related resources. */
+    Tk_SavedOption *savedOptionPtr)
 				/* If NULL, the old value for the option will
 				 * be freed. If non-NULL, the old value will
 				 * be stored here, and it becomes the property
@@ -634,14 +624,15 @@ DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin, savedOptionPtr)
 				 * free the old value). */
 {
     Tcl_Obj **slotPtrPtr, *oldPtr;
-    char *internalPtr;		/* Points to location in record where
-				 * internal representation of value should
-				 * be stored, or NULL. */
+    char *internalPtr;		/* Points to location in record where internal
+				 * representation of value should be stored,
+				 * or NULL. */
     char *oldInternalPtr;	/* Points to location in which to save old
 				 * internal representation of value. */
-    Tk_SavedOption internal;	/* Used to save the old internal representation
-				 * of the value if savedOptionPtr is NULL. */
-    CONST Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;
+    Tk_SavedOption internal;	/* Used to save the old internal
+				 * representation of the value if
+				 * savedOptionPtr is NULL. */
+    const Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;
     int nullOK;
 
     /*
@@ -658,8 +649,8 @@ DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin, savedOptionPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Apply the new value in a type-specific way.  Also remember the
-     * old object and internal forms, if they exist.
+     * Apply the new value in a type-specific way. Also remember the old
+     * object and internal forms, if they exist.
      */
 
     if (specPtr->internalOffset >= 0) {
@@ -676,296 +667,293 @@ DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin, savedOptionPtr)
     }
     nullOK = (optionPtr->specPtr->flags & TK_OPTION_NULL_OK);
     switch (optionPtr->specPtr->type) {
-	case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN: {
-	    int new;
+    case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN: {
+	int newBool;
 
-	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &new)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
-		*((int *) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &newBool) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_INT: {
-	    int new;
-	    
-	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &new) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
-		*((int *) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
+	    *((int *) internalPtr) = newBool;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_DOUBLE: {
-	    double new;
-	    
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = 0;
-	    } else {
-		if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &new) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_INT: {
+	int newInt;
 
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((double *) oldInternalPtr) = *((double *) internalPtr);
-		*((double *) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &newInt) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_STRING: {
-	    char *new, *value;
-	    int length;
-
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		if (valuePtr != NULL) {
-		    value = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, &length);
-		    new = ckalloc((unsigned) (length + 1));
-		    strcpy(new, value);
-		} else {
-		    new = NULL;
-		}
-		*((char **) oldInternalPtr) = *((char **) internalPtr);
-		*((char **) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
+	    *((int *) internalPtr) = newInt;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE: {
-	    int new;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_DOUBLE: {
+	double newDbl;
 
-	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, valuePtr,
-		    (CONST char **) optionPtr->specPtr->clientData,
-		    optionPtr->specPtr->optionName+1, 0, &new) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newDbl = 0;
+	} else {
+	    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &newDbl) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
-		*((int *) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_COLOR: {
-	    XColor *newPtr;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		newPtr = NULL;
-	    } else {
-		newPtr = Tk_AllocColorFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
-		if (newPtr == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((XColor **) oldInternalPtr) = *((XColor **) internalPtr);
-		*((XColor **) internalPtr) = newPtr;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((double *) oldInternalPtr) = *((double *) internalPtr);
+	    *((double *) internalPtr) = newDbl;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_FONT: {
-	    Tk_Font new;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_STRING: {
+	char *newStr, *value;
+	int length;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = NULL;
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	}
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    if (valuePtr != NULL) {
+		value = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, &length);
+		newStr = ckalloc((unsigned) (length + 1));
+		strcpy(newStr, value);
 	    } else {
-		new = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
-		if (new == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Tk_Font *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Font *) internalPtr);
-		*((Tk_Font *) internalPtr) = new;
+		newStr = NULL;
 	    }
-	    break;
+	    *((char **) oldInternalPtr) = *((char **) internalPtr);
+	    *((char **) internalPtr) = newStr;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_STYLE: {
-	    Tk_Style new;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE: {
+	int newValue;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = NULL;
-	    } else {
-		new = Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(interp, valuePtr);
-		if (new == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Tk_Style *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr);
-		*((Tk_Style *) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, valuePtr,
+		(const char **) optionPtr->specPtr->clientData,
+		optionPtr->specPtr->optionName+1, 0, &newValue) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_BITMAP: {
-	    Pixmap new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
+	    *((int *) internalPtr) = newValue;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_COLOR: {
+	XColor *newPtr;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = None;
-	    } else {
-		new = Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
-		if (new == None) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Pixmap *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Pixmap *) internalPtr);
-		*((Pixmap *) internalPtr) = new;
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newPtr = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    newPtr = Tk_AllocColorFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
+	    if (newPtr == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_BORDER: {
-	    Tk_3DBorder new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((XColor **) oldInternalPtr) = *((XColor **) internalPtr);
+	    *((XColor **) internalPtr) = newPtr;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_FONT: {
+	Tk_Font newFont;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = NULL;
-	    } else {
-		new = Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
-		if (new == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Tk_3DBorder *) oldInternalPtr) =
-			*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr);
-		*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr) = new;
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newFont = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    newFont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
+	    if (newFont == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_RELIEF: {
-	    int new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Tk_Font *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Font *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Tk_Font *) internalPtr) = newFont;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_STYLE: {
+	Tk_Style newStyle;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = TK_RELIEF_NULL;
-	    } else {
-		if (Tk_GetReliefFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &new) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
-		*((int *) internalPtr) = new;
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newStyle = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    newStyle = Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(interp, valuePtr);
+	    if (newStyle == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_CURSOR: {
-	    Tk_Cursor new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Tk_Style *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr) = newStyle;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_BITMAP: {
+	Pixmap newBitmap;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		new = None;
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-	    } else {
-		new = Tk_AllocCursorFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
-		if (new == None) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Tk_Cursor *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr);
-		*((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr) = new;
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newBitmap = None;
+	} else {
+	    newBitmap = Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
+	    if (newBitmap == None) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    Tk_DefineCursor(tkwin, new);
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY: {
-	    Tk_Justify new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Pixmap *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Pixmap *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Pixmap *) internalPtr) = newBitmap;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_BORDER: {
+	Tk_3DBorder newBorder;
 
-	    if (Tk_GetJustifyFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &new) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newBorder = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    newBorder = Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
+	    if (newBorder == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Tk_Justify *) oldInternalPtr)
-			= *((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr);
-		*((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_ANCHOR: {
-	    Tk_Anchor new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Tk_3DBorder *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr) = newBorder;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_RELIEF: {
+	int newRelief;
 
-	    if (Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &new) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newRelief = TK_RELIEF_NULL;
+	} else {
+	    if (Tk_GetReliefFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &newRelief) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Tk_Anchor *) oldInternalPtr)
-			= *((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr);
-		*((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_PIXELS: {
-	    int new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
+	    *((int *) internalPtr) = newRelief;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_CURSOR: {
+	Tk_Cursor newCursor;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = 0;
-	    } else {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr,
-			&new) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
-		*((int *) internalPtr) = new;
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    newCursor = None;
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    newCursor = Tk_AllocCursorFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
+	    if (newCursor == None) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_WINDOW: {
-	    Tk_Window new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Tk_Cursor *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr) = newCursor;
+	}
+	Tk_DefineCursor(tkwin, newCursor);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY: {
+	Tk_Justify newJustify;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = None;
-	    } else {
-		if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &new)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Tk_Window *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Window *) internalPtr);
-		*((Tk_Window *) internalPtr) = new;
+	if (Tk_GetJustifyFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &newJustify) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Tk_Justify *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr) = newJustify;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_ANCHOR: {
+	Tk_Anchor newAnchor;
+
+	if (Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &newAnchor) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Tk_Anchor *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr) = newAnchor;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_PIXELS: {
+	int newPixels;
+
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newPixels = 0;
+	} else {
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr,
+		    &newPixels) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
-	    Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
-	    if (custom->setProc(custom->clientData, interp, tkwin,
-		    &valuePtr, recordPtr, optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset,
-		    (char *)oldInternalPtr,
-		    optionPtr->specPtr->flags) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
+	    *((int *) internalPtr) = newPixels;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_WINDOW: {
+	Tk_Window newWin;
+
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newWin = None;
+	} else {
+	    if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr,
+		    &newWin) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	    
-	default: {
-	    char buf[40+TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	    sprintf(buf, "bad config table: unknown type %d",
-		    optionPtr->specPtr->type);
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Tk_Window *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Window *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Tk_Window *) internalPtr) = newWin;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
+	Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
+
+	if (custom->setProc(custom->clientData, interp, tkwin,
+		&valuePtr, recordPtr, optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset,
+		(char *)oldInternalPtr, optionPtr->specPtr->flags) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    {
+	char buf[40+TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+
+    default:
+	sprintf(buf, "bad config table: unknown type %d",
+		optionPtr->specPtr->type);
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
     }
 
     /*
-     * Release resources associated with the old value, if we're not
-     * returning it to the caller, then install the new object value into
-     * the record.
+     * Release resources associated with the old value, if we're not returning
+     * it to the caller, then install the new object value into the record.
      */
 
     if (savedOptionPtr == NULL) {
@@ -990,12 +978,11 @@ DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin, savedOptionPtr)
  *
  * ObjectIsEmpty --
  *
- *	This procedure tests whether the string value of an object is
- *	empty.
+ *	This function tests whether the string value of an object is empty.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if the string value of objPtr has length
- *	zero, and 0 otherwise.
+ *	The return value is 1 if the string value of objPtr has length zero,
+ *	and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1004,8 +991,8 @@ DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin, savedOptionPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-ObjectIsEmpty(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object to test.  May be NULL. */
+ObjectIsEmpty(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Object to test. May be NULL. */
 {
     int length;
 
@@ -1024,15 +1011,14 @@ ObjectIsEmpty(objPtr)
  *
  * GetOption --
  *
- *	This procedure searches through a chained option table to find
- *	the entry for a particular option name.
+ *	This function searches through a chained option table to find the
+ *	entry for a particular option name.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the matching entry, or NULL
- *	if no matching entry could be found.
- *	Note: if the matching entry is a synonym then this procedure
- *	returns a pointer to the synonym entry, *not* the "real" entry
- *	that the synonym refers to.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the matching entry, or NULL if no
+ *	matching entry could be found. Note: if the matching entry is a
+ *	synonym then this function returns a pointer to the synonym entry,
+ *	*not* the "real" entry that the synonym refers to.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1041,25 +1027,24 @@ ObjectIsEmpty(objPtr)
  */
 
 static Option *
-GetOption(name, tablePtr)
-    CONST char *name;		/* String balue to be looked up in the
-				 * option table. */
-    OptionTable *tablePtr;	/* Table in which to look up name. */
+GetOption(
+    const char *name,		/* String balue to be looked up in the option
+				 * table. */
+    OptionTable *tablePtr)	/* Table in which to look up name. */
 {
     Option *bestPtr, *optionPtr;
     OptionTable *tablePtr2;
-    CONST char *p1, *p2;
+    const char *p1, *p2;
     int count;
 
     /*
-     * Search through all of the option tables in the chain to find the
-     * best match.  Some tricky aspects:
+     * Search through all of the option tables in the chain to find the best
+     * match. Some tricky aspects:
      *
      * 1. We have to accept unique abbreviations.
-     * 2. The same name could appear in different tables in the chain.
-     *    If this happens, we use the entry from the first table. We
-     *    have to be careful to distinguish this case from an ambiguous
-     *    abbreviation.
+     * 2. The same name could appear in different tables in the chain. If this
+     *    happens, we use the entry from the first table. We have to be
+     *    careful to distinguish this case from an ambiguous abbreviation.
      */
 
     bestPtr = NULL;
@@ -1071,40 +1056,38 @@ GetOption(name, tablePtr)
 		    *p1 == *p2; p1++, p2++) {
 		if (*p1 == 0) {
 		    /*
-		     * This is an exact match.  We're done.
+		     * This is an exact match. We're done.
 		     */
 
-		    bestPtr = optionPtr;
-		    goto done;
+		    return optionPtr;
 		}
 	    }
 	    if (*p1 == 0) {
 		/*
-		 * The name is an abbreviation for this option.  Keep
-		 * to make sure that the abbreviation only matches one
-		 * option name.  If we've already found a match in the
-		 * past, then it is an error unless the full names for
-		 * the two options are identical; in this case, the first
-		 * option overrides the second.
+		 * The name is an abbreviation for this option. Keep to make
+		 * sure that the abbreviation only matches one option name.
+		 * If we've already found a match in the past, then it is an
+		 * error unless the full names for the two options are
+		 * identical; in this case, the first option overrides the
+		 * second.
 		 */
 
 		if (bestPtr == NULL) {
 		    bestPtr = optionPtr;
-		} else {
-		    if (strcmp(bestPtr->specPtr->optionName,
-			    optionPtr->specPtr->optionName) != 0) {
-			goto error;
-		    }
+		} else if (strcmp(bestPtr->specPtr->optionName,
+			optionPtr->specPtr->optionName) != 0) {
+		    return NULL;
 		}
 	    }
 	}
     }
 
-    done:
-    return bestPtr;
+    /*
+     * Return whatever we have found, which could be NULL if nothing
+     * matched. The multiple-matching case is handled above.
+     */
 
-    error:
-    return NULL;
+    return bestPtr;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1112,32 +1095,30 @@ GetOption(name, tablePtr)
  *
  * GetOptionFromObj --
  *
- *      This procedure searches through a chained option table to find
- *      the entry for a particular option name.
+ *	This function searches through a chained option table to find the
+ *	entry for a particular option name.
  *
  * Results:
- *      The return value is a pointer to the matching entry, or NULL
- *      if no matching entry could be found.  If NULL is returned and
- *      interp is not NULL than an error message is left in its result.
- *      Note: if the matching entry is a synonym then this procedure
- *      returns a pointer to the synonym entry, *not* the "real" entry
- *      that the synonym refers to.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the matching entry, or NULL if no
+ *	matching entry could be found. If NULL is returned and interp is not
+ *	NULL than an error message is left in its result. Note: if the
+ *	matching entry is a synonym then this function returns a pointer to
+ *	the synonym entry, *not* the "real" entry that the synonym refers to.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      Information about the matching entry is cached in the object
- *      containing the name, so that future lookups can proceed more
- *      quickly.
+ *	Information about the matching entry is cached in the object
+ *	containing the name, so that future lookups can proceed more quickly.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static Option *
-GetOptionFromObj(interp, objPtr, tablePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;         /* Used only for error reporting; if NULL
-                                 * no message is left after an error. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;            /* Object whose string value is to be
-                                 * looked up in the option table. */
-    OptionTable *tablePtr;      /* Table in which to look up objPtr. */
+GetOptionFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used only for error reporting; if NULL no
+				 * message is left after an error. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* Object whose string value is to be looked
+				 * up in the option table. */
+    OptionTable *tablePtr)	/* Table in which to look up objPtr. */
 {
     Option *bestPtr;
     char *name;
@@ -1147,16 +1128,16 @@ GetOptionFromObj(interp, objPtr, tablePtr)
      */
 
     if (objPtr->typePtr == &tkOptionObjType) {
-        if (objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 == (VOID *) tablePtr) {
-            return (Option *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2;
-        }
+	if (objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 == (void *) tablePtr) {
+	    return (Option *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2;
+	}
     }
 
     /*
      * The answer isn't cached.
      */
 
-    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, NULL);
+    name = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
     bestPtr = GetOption(name, tablePtr);
     if (bestPtr == NULL) {
 	goto error;
@@ -1166,15 +1147,14 @@ GetOptionFromObj(interp, objPtr, tablePtr)
 	    && (objPtr->typePtr->freeIntRepProc != NULL)) {
 	objPtr->typePtr->freeIntRepProc(objPtr);
     }
-    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) tablePtr;
-    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2 = (VOID *) bestPtr;
+    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) tablePtr;
+    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2 = (void *) bestPtr;
     objPtr->typePtr = &tkOptionObjType;
     return bestPtr;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     if (interp != NULL) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown option \"", name,
-		"\"", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown option \"", name, "\"", NULL);
     }
     return NULL;
 }
@@ -1184,29 +1164,28 @@ GetOptionFromObj(interp, objPtr, tablePtr)
  *
  * TkGetOptionSpec --
  *
- *      This procedure searches through a chained option table to find
- *      the option spec for a particular option name.
+ *	This function searches through a chained option table to find the
+ *	option spec for a particular option name.
  *
  * Results:
- *      The return value is a pointer to the option spec of the matching
- *      entry, or NULL if no matching entry could be found.
- *      Note: if the matching entry is a synonym then this procedure
- *      returns a pointer to the option spec of the synonym entry, *not*
- *      the "real" entry that the synonym refers to.
- *      Note: this call is primarily used by the style management code
- *      (tkStyle.c) to look up an element's option spec into a widget's
- *      option table.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the option spec of the matching
+ *	entry, or NULL if no matching entry could be found. Note: if the
+ *	matching entry is a synonym then this function returns a pointer to
+ *	the option spec of the synonym entry, *not* the "real" entry that the
+ *	synonym refers to. Note: this call is primarily used by the style
+ *	management code (tkStyle.c) to look up an element's option spec into a
+ *	widget's option table.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-CONST Tk_OptionSpec *
-TkGetOptionSpec(name, optionTable)
-    CONST char *name;			/* String value to be looked up. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;		/* Table in which to look up name. */
+const Tk_OptionSpec *
+TkGetOptionSpec(
+    const char *name,		/* String value to be looked up. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable)	/* Table in which to look up name. */
 {
     Option *optionPtr;
 
@@ -1222,14 +1201,14 @@ TkGetOptionSpec(name, optionTable)
  *
  * SetOptionFromAny --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to convert a Tcl object to option
- *	internal form. However, this doesn't make sense (need to have a
- *	table of options in order to do the conversion) so the
- *	procedure always generates an error.
+ *	This function is called to convert a Tcl object to option internal
+ *	form. However, this doesn't make sense (need to have a table of
+ *	options in order to do the conversion) so the function always
+ *	generates an error.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is always TCL_ERROR, and an error message is
- *	left in interp's result if interp isn't NULL. 
+ *	The return value is always TCL_ERROR, and an error message is left in
+ *	interp's result if interp isn't NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1238,9 +1217,9 @@ TkGetOptionSpec(name, optionTable)
  */
 
 static int
-SetOptionFromAny(interp, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
-    register Tcl_Obj *objPtr;	/* The object to convert. */
+SetOptionFromAny(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
+    register Tcl_Obj *objPtr)	/* The object to convert. */
 {
     Tcl_AppendToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
 	    "can't convert value to option except via GetOptionFromObj API",
@@ -1253,53 +1232,47 @@ SetOptionFromAny(interp, objPtr)
  *
  * Tk_SetOptions --
  *
- *	Process one or more name-value pairs for configuration options
- *	and fill in fields of a record with new values.
+ *	Process one or more name-value pairs for configuration options and
+ *	fill in fields of a record with new values.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If all goes well then TCL_OK is returned and the old values of
- *	any modified objects are saved in *savePtr, if it isn't NULL (the
- *	caller must eventually call Tk_RestoreSavedOptions or
- *	Tk_FreeSavedOptions to free the contents of *savePtr).  In
- *	addition, if maskPtr isn't NULL then *maskPtr is filled in with
- *	the OR of the typeMask bits from all modified options.  If an
- *	error occurs then TCL_ERROR is returned and a message 
- *	is left in interp's result unless interp is NULL; nothing is
+ *	If all goes well then TCL_OK is returned and the old values of any
+ *	modified objects are saved in *savePtr, if it isn't NULL (the caller
+ *	must eventually call Tk_RestoreSavedOptions or Tk_FreeSavedOptions to
+ *	free the contents of *savePtr). In addition, if maskPtr isn't NULL
+ *	then *maskPtr is filled in with the OR of the typeMask bits from all
+ *	modified options. If an error occurs then TCL_ERROR is returned and a
+ *	message is left in interp's result unless interp is NULL; nothing is
  *	saved in *savePtr or *maskPtr in this case.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The fields of recordPtr get filled in with object pointers
- *	from objc/objv.  Old information in widgRec's fields gets 
- * 	recycled.  Information may be left at *savePtr.
+ *	The fields of recordPtr get filled in with object pointers from
+ *	objc/objv. Old information in widgRec's fields gets recycled.
+ *	Information may be left at *savePtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr,
-	maskPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for error reporting.
-					 * If NULL, then no error message is
-					 * returned.*/
-    char *recordPtr;	    		/* The record to configure. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;		/* Describes valid options. */
-    int objc;				/* The number of elements in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Contains one or more name-value
-					 * pairs. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window associated with the thing
-					 * being configured; needed for some
-					 * options (such as colors). */
-    Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr;		/* If non-NULL, the old values of
-					 * modified options are saved here
-					 * so that they can be restored
-					 * after an error. */
-    int *maskPtr;			/* It non-NULL, this word is modified
-					 * on a successful return to hold the
-					 * bit-wise OR of the typeMask fields
-					 * of all options that were modified
-					 * by this call.  Used by the caller
-					 * to figure out which options
-					 * actually changed. */
+Tk_SetOptions(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL,
+				 * then no error message is returned.*/
+    char *recordPtr,	    	/* The record to configure. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,	/* Describes valid options. */
+    int objc,			/* The number of elements in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[],	/* Contains one or more name-value pairs. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window associated with the thing being
+				 * configured; needed for some options (such
+				 * as colors). */
+    Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr,	/* If non-NULL, the old values of modified
+				 * options are saved here so that they can be
+				 * restored after an error. */
+    int *maskPtr)		/* It non-NULL, this word is modified on a
+				 * successful return to hold the bit-wise OR
+				 * of the typeMask fields of all options that
+				 * were modified by this call. Used by the
+				 * caller to figure out which options actually
+				 * changed. */
 {
     OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable;
     Option *optionPtr;
@@ -1315,8 +1288,8 @@ Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr,
     lastSavePtr = savePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Scan through all of the arguments, processing those
-     * that match entries in the option table.
+     * Scan through all of the arguments, processing those that match entries
+     * in the option table.
      */
 
     mask = 0;
@@ -1333,19 +1306,18 @@ Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr,
 	    if (interp != NULL) {
 		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
 			"value for \"", Tcl_GetStringFromObj(*objv, NULL),
-			"\" missing", (char *) NULL);
+			"\" missing", NULL);
 		goto error;
 	    }
 	}
 	if ((savePtr != NULL)
 		&& (lastSavePtr->numItems >= TK_NUM_SAVED_OPTIONS)) {
 	    /*
-	     * We've run out of space for saving old option values.  Allocate
+	     * We've run out of space for saving old option values. Allocate
 	     * more space.
 	     */
 
-	    newSavePtr = (Tk_SavedOptions *) ckalloc(sizeof(
-		    Tk_SavedOptions));
+	    newSavePtr = (Tk_SavedOptions *) ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_SavedOptions));
 	    newSavePtr->recordPtr = recordPtr;
 	    newSavePtr->tkwin = tkwin;
 	    newSavePtr->numItems = 0;
@@ -1355,7 +1327,7 @@ Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr,
 	}
 	if (DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, objv[1], tkwin,
 		(savePtr != NULL) ? &lastSavePtr->items[lastSavePtr->numItems]
-		: (Tk_SavedOption *) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+		: NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 	    char msg[100];
 
 	    sprintf(msg, "\n    (processing \"%.40s\" option)",
@@ -1373,7 +1345,7 @@ Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr,
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     if (savePtr != NULL) {
 	Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(savePtr);
     }
@@ -1385,38 +1357,38 @@ Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr,
  *
  * Tk_RestoreSavedOptions --
  *
- *	This procedure undoes the effect of a previous call to
- *	Tk_SetOptions by restoring all of the options to their value
- *	before the call to Tk_SetOptions.
+ *	This function undoes the effect of a previous call to Tk_SetOptions by
+ *	restoring all of the options to their value before the call to
+ *	Tk_SetOptions.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The configutation record is restored and all the information
- *	stored in savePtr is freed.
+ *	The configutation record is restored and all the information stored in
+ *	savePtr is freed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(savePtr)
-    Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr;	/* Holds saved option information; must
-				 * have been passed to Tk_SetOptions. */
+Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(
+    Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr)	/* Holds saved option information; must have
+				 * been passed to Tk_SetOptions. */
 {
     int i;
     Option *optionPtr;
     Tcl_Obj *newPtr;		/* New object value of option, which we
-				 * replace with old value and free.  Taken
-				 * from record. */
+				 * replace with old value and free. Taken from
+				 * record. */
     char *internalPtr;		/* Points to internal value of option in
 				 * record. */
-    CONST Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;
+    const Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Be sure to restore the options in the opposite order they were
-     * set.  This is important because it's possible that the same
-     * option name was used twice in a single call to Tk_SetOptions.
+     * Be sure to restore the options in the opposite order they were set.
+     * This is important because it's possible that the same option name was
+     * used twice in a single call to Tk_SetOptions.
      */
 
     if (savePtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1429,8 +1401,8 @@ Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(savePtr)
 	specPtr = optionPtr->specPtr;
 
 	/*
-	 * First free the new value of the option, which is currently
-	 * in the record.
+	 * First free the new value of the option, which is currently in the
+	 * record.
 	 */
 
 	if (specPtr->objOffset >= 0) {
@@ -1459,101 +1431,69 @@ Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(savePtr)
 		    = savePtr->items[i].valuePtr;
 	}
 	if (specPtr->internalOffset >= 0) {
+	    register char *ptr = (char *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm;
+
 	    switch (specPtr->type) {
-		case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN: {
-		    *((int *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_INT: {
-		    *((int *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_DOUBLE: {
-		    *((double *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((double *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_STRING: {
-		    *((char **) internalPtr)
-			    = *((char **) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE: {
-		    *((int *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_COLOR: {
-		    *((XColor **) internalPtr)
-			    = *((XColor **) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_FONT: {
-		    *((Tk_Font *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Tk_Font *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_STYLE: {
-		    *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Tk_Style *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_BITMAP: {
-		    *((Pixmap *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Pixmap *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_BORDER: {
-		    *((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Tk_3DBorder *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_RELIEF: {
-		    *((int *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_CURSOR: {
-		    *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Tk_Cursor *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    Tk_DefineCursor(savePtr->tkwin,
-			    *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr));
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY: {
-		    *((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Tk_Justify *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_ANCHOR: {
-		    *((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Tk_Anchor *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_PIXELS: {
-		    *((int *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_WINDOW: {
-		    *((Tk_Window *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Tk_Window *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
-		    Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
-		    if (custom->restoreProc != NULL) {
-			custom->restoreProc(custom->clientData, savePtr->tkwin,
-				internalPtr,
-				(char *)&savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    }
-		    break;
-		}
-		default: {
-		    panic("bad option type in Tk_RestoreSavedOptions");
+	    case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN:
+		*((int *) internalPtr) = *((int *) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_INT:
+		*((int *) internalPtr) = *((int *) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_DOUBLE:
+		*((double *) internalPtr) = *((double *) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_STRING:
+		*((char **) internalPtr) = *((char **) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE:
+		*((int *) internalPtr) = *((int *) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_COLOR:
+		*((XColor **) internalPtr) = *((XColor **) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_FONT:
+		*((Tk_Font *) internalPtr) = *((Tk_Font *) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_STYLE:
+		*((Tk_Style *) internalPtr) = *((Tk_Style *) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_BITMAP:
+		*((Pixmap *) internalPtr) = *((Pixmap *) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_BORDER:
+		*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr) = *((Tk_3DBorder *) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_RELIEF:
+		*((int *) internalPtr) = *((int *) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_CURSOR:
+		*((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr) = *((Tk_Cursor *) ptr);
+		Tk_DefineCursor(savePtr->tkwin, *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr));
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY:
+		*((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr) = *((Tk_Justify *) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_ANCHOR:
+		*((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr) = *((Tk_Anchor *) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_PIXELS:
+		*((int *) internalPtr) = *((int *) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_WINDOW:
+		*((Tk_Window *) internalPtr) = *((Tk_Window *) ptr);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
+		Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
+
+		if (custom->restoreProc != NULL) {
+		    custom->restoreProc(custom->clientData, savePtr->tkwin,
+			    internalPtr, ptr);
 		}
+		break;
+	    }
+	    default:
+		Tcl_Panic("bad option type in Tk_RestoreSavedOptions");
 	    }
 	}
     }
@@ -1565,8 +1505,8 @@ Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(savePtr)
  *
  * Tk_FreeSavedOptions --
  *
- *	Free all of the saved configuration option values from a
- *	previous call to Tk_SetOptions.
+ *	Free all of the saved configuration option values from a previous call
+ *	to Tk_SetOptions.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1578,9 +1518,9 @@ Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(savePtr)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeSavedOptions(savePtr)
-    Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr;	/* Contains options saved in a previous
-				 * call to Tk_SetOptions. */
+Tk_FreeSavedOptions(
+    Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr)	/* Contains options saved in a previous call
+				 * to Tk_SetOptions. */
 {
     int count;
     Tk_SavedOption *savedOptionPtr;
@@ -1613,27 +1553,27 @@ Tk_FreeSavedOptions(savePtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	All of the Tcl_Obj's in recordPtr that are controlled by
- *	configuration options in optionTable are freed.
+ *	All of the Tcl_Obj's in recordPtr that are controlled by configuration
+ *	options in optionTable are freed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 void
-Tk_FreeConfigOptions(recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Record whose fields contain current
-				 * values for options. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Describes legal options. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window associated with recordPtr; needed
+Tk_FreeConfigOptions(
+    char *recordPtr,		/* Record whose fields contain current values
+				 * for options. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,	/* Describes legal options. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window associated with recordPtr; needed
 				 * for freeing some options. */
 {
     OptionTable *tablePtr;
     Option *optionPtr;
     int count;
-    Tcl_Obj **oldPtrPtr, *oldPtr; 
+    Tcl_Obj **oldPtrPtr, *oldPtr;
     char *oldInternalPtr;
-    CONST Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;
+    const Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;
 
     for (tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable; tablePtr != NULL;
 	    tablePtr = tablePtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -1670,114 +1610,113 @@ Tk_FreeConfigOptions(recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
  *
  * FreeResources --
  *
- *	Free system resources associated with a configuration option,
- *	such as colors or fonts.
+ *	Free system resources associated with a configuration option, such as
+ *	colors or fonts.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Any system resources associated with objPtr are released.  However,
+ *	Any system resources associated with objPtr are released. However,
  *	objPtr itself is not freed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeResources(optionPtr, objPtr, internalPtr, tkwin)
-    Option *optionPtr;		/* Description of the configuration option. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The current value of the option, specified
+FreeResources(
+    Option *optionPtr,		/* Description of the configuration option. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* The current value of the option, specified
 				 * as an object. */
-    char *internalPtr;		/* A pointer to an internal representation for
+    char *internalPtr,		/* A pointer to an internal representation for
 				 * the option's value, such as an int or
-				 * (XColor *).  Only valid if
+				 * (XColor *). Only valid if
 				 * optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset >= 0. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window in which this option is used. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* The window in which this option is used. */
 {
     int internalFormExists;
 
     /*
      * If there exists an internal form for the value, use it to free
-     * resources (also zero out the internal form).  If there is no
-     * internal form, then use the object form.
+     * resources (also zero out the internal form). If there is no internal
+     * form, then use the object form.
      */
 
     internalFormExists = optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset >= 0;
     switch (optionPtr->specPtr->type) {
-	case TK_OPTION_STRING:
-	    if (internalFormExists) {
-		if (*((char **) internalPtr) != NULL) {
-		    ckfree(*((char **) internalPtr));
-		    *((char **) internalPtr) = NULL;
-		}
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_OPTION_COLOR:
-	    if (internalFormExists) {
-		if (*((XColor **) internalPtr) != NULL) {
-		    Tk_FreeColor(*((XColor **) internalPtr));
-		    *((XColor **) internalPtr) = NULL;
-		}
-	    } else if (objPtr != NULL) {
-		Tk_FreeColorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_OPTION_FONT:
-	    if (internalFormExists) {
-		Tk_FreeFont(*((Tk_Font *) internalPtr));
-		*((Tk_Font *) internalPtr) = NULL;
-	    } else if (objPtr != NULL) {
-		Tk_FreeFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_OPTION_STYLE:
-	    if (internalFormExists) {
-		Tk_FreeStyle(*((Tk_Style *) internalPtr));
-		*((Tk_Style *) internalPtr) = NULL;
-	    } else if (objPtr != NULL) {
-		Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_OPTION_BITMAP:
-	    if (internalFormExists) {
-		if (*((Pixmap *) internalPtr) != None) {
-		    Tk_FreeBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), *((Pixmap *) internalPtr));
-		    *((Pixmap *) internalPtr) = None;
-		}
-	    } else if (objPtr != NULL) {
-		Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_OPTION_BORDER:
-	    if (internalFormExists) {
-		if (*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr) != NULL) {
-		    Tk_Free3DBorder(*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr));
-		    *((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr) = NULL;
-		}
-	    } else if (objPtr != NULL) {
-		Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_OPTION_CURSOR:
-	    if (internalFormExists) {
-		if (*((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr) != None) {
-		    Tk_FreeCursor(Tk_Display(tkwin),
-			    *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr));
-		    *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr) = None;
-		}
-	    } else if (objPtr != NULL) {
-		Tk_FreeCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
-	    Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
-	    if (internalFormExists && custom->freeProc != NULL) {
-		custom->freeProc(custom->clientData, tkwin, internalPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	default:
-	    break;
+    case TK_OPTION_STRING:
+	if (internalFormExists) {
+	    if (*((char **) internalPtr) != NULL) {
+		ckfree(*((char **) internalPtr));
+		*((char **) internalPtr) = NULL;
+	    }
+	}
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_COLOR:
+	if (internalFormExists) {
+	    if (*((XColor **) internalPtr) != NULL) {
+		Tk_FreeColor(*((XColor **) internalPtr));
+		*((XColor **) internalPtr) = NULL;
+	    }
+	} else if (objPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tk_FreeColorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_FONT:
+	if (internalFormExists) {
+	    Tk_FreeFont(*((Tk_Font *) internalPtr));
+	    *((Tk_Font *) internalPtr) = NULL;
+	} else if (objPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tk_FreeFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_STYLE:
+	if (internalFormExists) {
+	    Tk_FreeStyle(*((Tk_Style *) internalPtr));
+	    *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr) = NULL;
+	} else if (objPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_BITMAP:
+	if (internalFormExists) {
+	    if (*((Pixmap *) internalPtr) != None) {
+		Tk_FreeBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), *((Pixmap *) internalPtr));
+		*((Pixmap *) internalPtr) = None;
+	    }
+	} else if (objPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_BORDER:
+	if (internalFormExists) {
+	    if (*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr) != NULL) {
+		Tk_Free3DBorder(*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr));
+		*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr) = NULL;
+	    }
+	} else if (objPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_CURSOR:
+	if (internalFormExists) {
+	    if (*((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr) != None) {
+		Tk_FreeCursor(Tk_Display(tkwin), *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr));
+		*((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr) = None;
+	    }
+	} else if (objPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tk_FreeCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
+	Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
+	if (internalFormExists && custom->freeProc != NULL) {
+	    custom->freeProc(custom->clientData, tkwin, internalPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    default:
+	break;
     }
 }
 
@@ -1786,23 +1725,21 @@ FreeResources(optionPtr, objPtr, internalPtr, tkwin)
  *
  * Tk_GetOptionInfo --
  *
- *	Returns a list object containing complete information about
- *	either a single option or all the configuration options in a
- *	table.
+ *	Returns a list object containing complete information about either a
+ *	single option or all the configuration options in a table.
  *
  * Results:
- *	This procedure normally returns a pointer to an object.
- *	If namePtr isn't NULL, then the result object is a list with
- *	five elements: the option's name, its database name, database
- *	class, default value, and current value.  If the option is a
- *	synonym then the list will contain only two values: the option
- *	name and the name of the option it refers to.  If namePtr is
- *	NULL, then information is returned for every option in the
- *	option table: the result will have one sub-list (in the form
- *	described above) for each option in the table.  If an error
- *	occurs (e.g. because namePtr isn't valid) then NULL is returned
- *	and an error message will be left in interp's result unless
- *	interp is NULL.
+
+ *	This function normally returns a pointer to an object. If namePtr
+ *	isn't NULL, then the result object is a list with five elements: the
+ *	option's name, its database name, database class, default value, and
+ *	current value. If the option is a synonym then the list will contain
+ *	only two values: the option name and the name of the option it refers
+ *	to. If namePtr is NULL, then information is returned for every option
+ *	in the option table: the result will have one sub-list (in the form
+ *	described above) for each option in the table. If an error occurs
+ *	(e.g. because namePtr isn't valid) then NULL is returned and an error
+ *	message will be left in interp's result unless interp is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1811,18 +1748,18 @@ FreeResources(optionPtr, objPtr, internalPtr, tkwin)
  */
 
 Tcl_Obj *
-Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting.  If	
-				 * NULL, then no error message is created. */
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Record whose fields contain current
-				 * values for options. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Describes all the legal options. */
-    Tcl_Obj *namePtr;		/* If non-NULL, the string value selects
-				 * a single option whose info is to be
-				 * returned.  Otherwise info is returned for
-				 * all options in optionTable. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window associated with recordPtr; needed
-				 * to compute correct default value for some
+Tk_GetOptionInfo(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL,
+				 * then no error message is created. */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* Record whose fields contain current values
+				 * for options. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,	/* Describes all the legal options. */
+    Tcl_Obj *namePtr,		/* If non-NULL, the string value selects a
+				 * single option whose info is to be returned.
+				 * Otherwise info is returned for all options
+				 * in optionTable. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window associated with recordPtr; needed to
+				 * compute correct default value for some
 				 * options. */
 {
     Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
@@ -1831,14 +1768,14 @@ Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
     int count;
 
     /*
-     * If information is only wanted for a single configuration
-     * spec, then handle that one spec specially.
+     * If information is only wanted for a single configuration spec, then
+     * handle that one spec specially.
      */
 
     if (namePtr != NULL) {
 	optionPtr = GetOptionFromObj(interp, namePtr, tablePtr);
 	if (optionPtr == NULL) {
-	    return (Tcl_Obj *) NULL;
+	    return NULL;
 	}
 	if (optionPtr->specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_SYNONYM) {
 	    optionPtr = optionPtr->extra.synonymPtr;
@@ -1847,11 +1784,11 @@ Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Loop through all the specs, creating a big list with all
-     * their information.
+     * Loop through all the specs, creating a big list with all their
+     * information.
      */
 
-    resultPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **) NULL);
+    resultPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
     for (; tablePtr != NULL; tablePtr = tablePtr->nextPtr) {
 	for (optionPtr = tablePtr->options, count = tablePtr->numOptions;
 		count > 0; optionPtr++, count--) {
@@ -1867,12 +1804,12 @@ Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
  *
  * GetConfigList --
  *
- *	Create a valid Tcl list holding the configuration information
- *	for a single configuration option.
+ *	Create a valid Tcl list holding the configuration information for a
+ *	single configuration option.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A Tcl list, dynamically allocated.  The caller is expected to
- *	arrange for this list to be freed eventually.
+ *	A Tcl list, dynamically allocated. The caller is expected to arrange
+ *	for this list to be freed eventually.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory is allocated.
@@ -1881,37 +1818,37 @@ Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
  */
 
 static Tcl_Obj *
-GetConfigList(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to record holding current
-				 * values of configuration options. */
-    Option *optionPtr;		/* Pointer to information describing a
+GetConfigList(
+    char *recordPtr,		/* Pointer to record holding current values of
+				 * configuration options. */
+    Option *optionPtr,		/* Pointer to information describing a
 				 * particular option. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window corresponding to recordPtr. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window corresponding to recordPtr. */
 {
     Tcl_Obj *listPtr, *elementPtr;
 
-    listPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **) NULL);
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, listPtr, 
+    listPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, listPtr,
 	    Tcl_NewStringObj(optionPtr->specPtr->optionName, -1));
 
     if (optionPtr->specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_SYNONYM) {
 	elementPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
 		optionPtr->extra.synonymPtr->specPtr->optionName, -1);
-	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, listPtr, elementPtr);
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, listPtr, elementPtr);
     } else {
 	if (optionPtr->dbNameUID == NULL) {
 	    elementPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
 	} else {
 	    elementPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(optionPtr->dbNameUID, -1);
 	}
-	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, listPtr, elementPtr);
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, listPtr, elementPtr);
 
 	if (optionPtr->dbClassUID == NULL) {
 	    elementPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
 	} else {
 	    elementPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(optionPtr->dbClassUID, -1);
 	}
-	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, listPtr, elementPtr);
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, listPtr, elementPtr);
 
 	if ((tkwin != NULL) && ((optionPtr->specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_COLOR)
 		|| (optionPtr->specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_BORDER))
@@ -1923,7 +1860,7 @@ GetConfigList(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
 	} else {
 	    elementPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
 	}
-	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, listPtr, elementPtr);
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, listPtr, elementPtr);
 
 	if (optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset >= 0) {
 	    elementPtr = *((Tcl_Obj **) (recordPtr
@@ -1934,7 +1871,7 @@ GetConfigList(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
 	} else {
 	    elementPtr = GetObjectForOption(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin);
 	}
-	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, listPtr, elementPtr);
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, listPtr, elementPtr);
     }
     return listPtr;
 }
@@ -1944,14 +1881,13 @@ GetConfigList(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
  *
  * GetObjectForOption --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to create an object that contains the
- *	value for an option.  It is invoked by GetConfigList and
- *	Tk_GetOptionValue when only the internal form of an option is
- *	stored in the record.
+ *	This function is called to create an object that contains the value
+ *	for an option. It is invoked by GetConfigList and Tk_GetOptionValue
+ *	when only the internal form of an option is stored in the record.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to a Tcl object.  The caller
- *	must call Tcl_IncrRefCount on this object to preserve it.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to a Tcl object. The caller must call
+ *	Tcl_IncrRefCount on this object to preserve it.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1960,13 +1896,13 @@ GetConfigList(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
  */
 
 static Tcl_Obj *
-GetObjectForOption(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to record holding current
-				 * values of configuration options. */
-    Option *optionPtr;		/* Pointer to information describing an
-				 * option whose internal value is stored
-				 * in *recordPtr. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window corresponding to recordPtr. */
+GetObjectForOption(
+    char *recordPtr,		/* Pointer to record holding current values of
+				 * configuration options. */
+    Option *optionPtr,		/* Pointer to information describing an option
+				 * whose internal value is stored in
+				 * *recordPtr. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window corresponding to recordPtr. */
 {
     Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
     char *internalPtr;		/* Points to internal value of option in
@@ -1975,107 +1911,103 @@ GetObjectForOption(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
     internalPtr = recordPtr + optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset;
     objPtr = NULL;
     switch (optionPtr->specPtr->type) {
-	case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *) internalPtr));
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_INT: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *) internalPtr));
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_DOUBLE: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(*((double *) internalPtr));
-	    break;
+    case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *) internalPtr));
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_INT:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *) internalPtr));
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_DOUBLE:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(*((double *) internalPtr));
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_STRING:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(*((char **) internalPtr), -1);
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(((char **) optionPtr->specPtr->clientData)[
+		*((int *) internalPtr)], -1);
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_COLOR: {
+	XColor *colorPtr = *((XColor **) internalPtr);
+
+	if (colorPtr != NULL) {
+	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfColor(colorPtr), -1);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_FONT: {
+	Tk_Font tkfont = *((Tk_Font *) internalPtr);
+
+	if (tkfont != NULL) {
+	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont), -1);
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_STRING: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(*((char **) internalPtr), -1);
-	    break;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_STYLE: {
+	Tk_Style style = *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr);
+
+	if (style != NULL) {
+	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfStyle(style), -1);
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE: {
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_BITMAP: {
+	Pixmap pixmap = *((Pixmap *) internalPtr);
+
+	if (pixmap != None) {
 	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
-		    ((char **) optionPtr->specPtr->clientData)[
-		    *((int *) internalPtr)], -1);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_COLOR: { 
-	    XColor *colorPtr = *((XColor **) internalPtr);
-	    if (colorPtr != NULL) {
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfColor(colorPtr), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_FONT: {
-	    Tk_Font tkfont = *((Tk_Font *) internalPtr);
-	    if (tkfont != NULL) {
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_STYLE: {
-	    Tk_Style style = *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr);
-	    if (style != NULL) {
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfStyle(style), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_BITMAP: {
-	    Pixmap pixmap = *((Pixmap *) internalPtr);
-	    if (pixmap != None) {
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin),
-			pixmap), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_BORDER: {
-	    Tk_3DBorder border = *((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr);
-	    if (border != NULL) {
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOf3DBorder(border), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_RELIEF: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfRelief(
-		    *((int *) internalPtr)), -1);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_CURSOR: {
-	    Tk_Cursor cursor = *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr);
-	    if (cursor != None) {
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
-			Tk_NameOfCursor(Tk_Display(tkwin), cursor), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
+		    Tk_NameOfBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap), -1);
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfJustify(
-		    *((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr)), -1);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_ANCHOR: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfAnchor(
-		    *((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr)), -1);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_PIXELS: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *) internalPtr));
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_WINDOW: {
-	    Tk_Window tkwin = *((Tk_Window *) internalPtr);
-	    if (tkwin != NULL) {
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(tkwin), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
-	    Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
-	    objPtr = custom->getProc(custom->clientData, tkwin, recordPtr,
-		    optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset);
-	    break;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_BORDER: {
+	Tk_3DBorder border = *((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr);
+
+	if (border != NULL) {
+	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOf3DBorder(border), -1);
 	}
-	default: {
-	    panic("bad option type in GetObjectForOption");
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_RELIEF:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfRelief(*((int *) internalPtr)), -1);
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_CURSOR: {
+	Tk_Cursor cursor = *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr);
+
+	if (cursor != None) {
+	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
+		    Tk_NameOfCursor(Tk_Display(tkwin), cursor), -1);
 	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfJustify(
+		*((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr)), -1);
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_ANCHOR:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfAnchor(
+		*((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr)), -1);
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_PIXELS:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *) internalPtr));
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_WINDOW: {
+	Tk_Window tkwin = *((Tk_Window *) internalPtr);
+
+	if (tkwin != NULL) {
+	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(tkwin), -1);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
+	Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
+
+	objPtr = custom->getProc(custom->clientData, tkwin, recordPtr,
+		optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset);
+	break;
+    }
+    default:
+	Tcl_Panic("bad option type in GetObjectForOption");
     }
     if (objPtr == NULL) {
 	objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
@@ -2088,14 +2020,13 @@ GetObjectForOption(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
  *
  * Tk_GetOptionValue --
  *
- *	This procedure returns the current value of a configuration
- *	option.
+ *	This function returns the current value of a configuration option.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the object holding the current value of
- *	the option given by namePtr.  If no such option exists, then
- *	the return value is NULL and an error message is left in
- *	interp's result (if interp isn't NULL).
+ *	The return value is the object holding the current value of the option
+ *	given by namePtr. If no such option exists, then the return value is
+ *	NULL and an error message is left in interp's result (if interp isn't
+ *	NULL).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2104,16 +2035,16 @@ GetObjectForOption(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
  */
 
 Tcl_Obj *
-Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting.  If
-				 * NULL then no messages are provided for
+Tk_GetOptionValue(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL
+				 * then no messages are provided for
 				 * errors. */
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Record whose fields contain current
-				 * values for options. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Describes legal options. */
-    Tcl_Obj *namePtr;		/* Gives the command-line name for the
-				 * option whose value is to be returned. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window corresponding to recordPtr. */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* Record whose fields contain current values
+				 * for options. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,	/* Describes legal options. */
+    Tcl_Obj *namePtr,		/* Gives the command-line name for the option
+				 * whose value is to be returned. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window corresponding to recordPtr. */
 {
     OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable;
     Option *optionPtr;
@@ -2127,16 +2058,16 @@ Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
 	optionPtr = optionPtr->extra.synonymPtr;
     }
     if (optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset >= 0) {
-	resultPtr = *((Tcl_Obj **) (recordPtr + optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset));
+	resultPtr = *((Tcl_Obj **) (recordPtr+optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset));
 	if (resultPtr == NULL) {
 	    /*
 	     * This option has a null value and is represented by a null
-	     * object pointer.  We can't return the null pointer, since that
-	     * would indicate an error.  Instead, return a new empty object.
+	     * object pointer. We can't return the null pointer, since that
+	     * would indicate an error. Instead, return a new empty object.
 	     */
-    
+
 	    resultPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
-	} 
+	}
     } else {
 	resultPtr = GetObjectForOption(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin);
     }
@@ -2148,19 +2079,17 @@ Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
  *
  * TkDebugConfig --
  *
- *	This is a debugging procedure that returns information about
- *	one of the configuration tables that currently exists for an
- *	interpreter.
+ *	This is a debugging function that returns information about one of the
+ *	configuration tables that currently exists for an interpreter.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If the specified table exists in the given interpreter, then a
- *	list is returned describing the table and any other tables that
- *	it chains to: for each table there will be three list elements
- *	giving the reference count for the table, the number of elements
- *	in the table, and the command-line name for the first option
- *	in the table.  If the table doesn't exist in the interpreter
- *	then an empty object is returned.  The reference count for the
- *	returned object is 0.
+ *	If the specified table exists in the given interpreter, then a list is
+ *	returned describing the table and any other tables that it chains to:
+ *	for each table there will be three list elements giving the reference
+ *	count for the table, the number of elements in the table, and the
+ *	command-line name for the first option in the table. If the table
+ *	doesn't exist in the interpreter then an empty object is returned.
+ *	The reference count for the returned object is 0.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2169,12 +2098,12 @@ Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
  */
 
 Tcl_Obj *
-TkDebugConfig(interp, table)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter in which the table is
-					 * defined. */
-    Tk_OptionTable table;		/* Table about which information is to
-					 * be returned.  May not necessarily
-					 * exist in the interpreter anymore. */
+TkDebugConfig(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter in which the table is
+				 * defined. */
+    Tk_OptionTable table)	/* Table about which information is to be
+				 * returned. May not necessarily exist in the
+				 * interpreter anymore. */
 {
     OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) table;
     Tcl_HashTable *hashTablePtr;
@@ -2190,8 +2119,8 @@ TkDebugConfig(interp, table)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Scan all the tables for this interpreter to make sure that the
-     * one we want still is valid.
+     * Scan all the tables for this interpreter to make sure that the one we
+     * want still is valid.
      */
 
     for (hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(hashTablePtr, &search);
@@ -2199,17 +2128,23 @@ TkDebugConfig(interp, table)
 	    hashEntryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	if (tablePtr == (OptionTable *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr)) {
 	    for ( ; tablePtr != NULL; tablePtr = tablePtr->nextPtr) {
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, objPtr,
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
 			Tcl_NewIntObj(tablePtr->refCount));
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, objPtr,
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
 			Tcl_NewIntObj(tablePtr->numOptions));
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, objPtr,
-			Tcl_NewStringObj(
-				tablePtr->options[0].specPtr->optionName,
-			-1));
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, Tcl_NewStringObj(
+			tablePtr->options[0].specPtr->optionName, -1));
 	    }
 	    break;
 	}
     }
     return objPtr;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkConsole.c b/generic/tkConsole.c
index e93c0fc..f894638 100644
--- a/generic/tkConsole.c
+++ b/generic/tkConsole.c
@@ -1,15 +1,14 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkConsole.c --
  *
- *	This file implements a Tcl console for systems that may not
- *	otherwise have access to a console.  It uses the Text widget
- *	and provides special access via a console command.
+ *	This file implements a Tcl console for systems that may not otherwise
+ *	have access to a console. It uses the Text widget and provides special
+ *	access via a console command.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
- *    
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tk.h"
@@ -23,8 +22,8 @@
  */
 
 typedef struct ConsoleInfo {
-    Tcl_Interp *consoleInterp;        /* Interpreter displaying the console. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;               /* Interpreter controlled by console. */
+    Tcl_Interp *consoleInterp;	/* Interpreter displaying the console. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter controlled by console. */
     int refCount;
 } ConsoleInfo;
 
@@ -40,30 +39,26 @@ typedef struct ChannelData {
     int type;			/* TCL_STDOUT or TCL_STDERR */
 } ChannelData;
 
-/* 
+/*
  * Prototypes for local procedures defined in this file:
  */
 
-static int	ConsoleClose _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData instanceData,
-		    Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static void	ConsoleDeleteProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void	ConsoleEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-		    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int	ConsoleHandle _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData instandeData,
-		    int direction, ClientData *handlePtr));
-static int	ConsoleInput _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData instanceData,
-		    char *buf, int toRead, int *errorCode));
-static int	ConsoleObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-		    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	ConsoleOutput _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData instanceData,
-		    CONST char *buf, int toWrite, int *errorCode));
-static void	ConsoleWatch _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData instanceData,
-		    int mask));
-static void	DeleteConsoleInterp _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void	InterpDeleteProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-		    Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static int	InterpreterObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-		    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
+static int	ConsoleClose(ClientData instanceData, Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static void	ConsoleDeleteProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void	ConsoleEventProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int	ConsoleHandle(ClientData instanceData,
+		    int direction, ClientData *handlePtr);
+static int	ConsoleInput(ClientData instanceData,
+		    char *buf, int toRead, int *errorCode);
+static int	ConsoleObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int	ConsoleOutput(ClientData instanceData,
+		    CONST char *buf, int toWrite, int *errorCode);
+static void	ConsoleWatch(ClientData instanceData, int mask);
+static void	DeleteConsoleInterp(ClientData clientData);
+static void	InterpDeleteProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static int	InterpreterObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+		    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
 
 /*
  * This structure describes the channel type structure for file based IO:
@@ -84,13 +79,12 @@ static Tcl_ChannelType consoleChannelType = {
     NULL,			/* Always non-blocking.*/
     NULL,			/* flush proc. */
     NULL,			/* handler proc. */
-    NULL,                       /* wide seek proc */
-    NULL,                       /* thread action proc */
+    NULL,			/* wide seek proc */
+    NULL,			/* thread action proc */
+    NULL
 };
-
 
 #ifdef __WIN32__
-
 #include <windows.h>
 
 /*
@@ -98,20 +92,21 @@ static Tcl_ChannelType consoleChannelType = {
  *
  * ShouldUseConsoleChannel
  *
- * 	Check to see if console window should be used for a given
- *      standard channel
+ *	Check to see if console window should be used for a given standard
+ *	channel.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Creates the console channel and installs it as the standard
- *	channels.
+ *	Creates the console channel and installs it as the standard channels.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static int ShouldUseConsoleChannel(type)
-    int type;
+
+static int
+ShouldUseConsoleChannel(
+    int type)
 {
     DWORD handleId;		/* Standard handle to retrieve. */
     DCB dcb;
@@ -120,18 +115,18 @@ static int ShouldUseConsoleChannel(type)
     HANDLE handle;
 
     switch (type) {
-	case TCL_STDIN:
-	    handleId = STD_INPUT_HANDLE;
-	    break;
-	case TCL_STDOUT:
-	    handleId = STD_OUTPUT_HANDLE;
-	    break;
-	case TCL_STDERR:
-	    handleId = STD_ERROR_HANDLE;
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    return 0;
-	    break;
+    case TCL_STDIN:
+	handleId = STD_INPUT_HANDLE;
+	break;
+    case TCL_STDOUT:
+	handleId = STD_OUTPUT_HANDLE;
+	break;
+    case TCL_STDERR:
+	handleId = STD_ERROR_HANDLE;
+	break;
+    default:
+	return 0;
+	break;
     }
 
     handle = GetStdHandle(handleId);
@@ -139,7 +134,7 @@ static int ShouldUseConsoleChannel(type)
     /*
      * Note that we need to check for 0 because Windows will return 0 if this
      * is not a console mode application, even though this is not a valid
-     * handle. 
+     * handle.
      */
 
     if ((handle == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) || (handle == 0)) {
@@ -147,27 +142,27 @@ static int ShouldUseConsoleChannel(type)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Win2K BUG: GetStdHandle(STD_OUTPUT_HANDLE) can return what appears
-     * to be a valid handle.  See TclpGetDefaultStdChannel() for this change
-     * implemented.  We didn't change it here because GetFileType() [below]
-     * will catch this with FILE_TYPE_UNKNOWN and appropriately return a
-     * value of 1, anyways.
+     * Win2K BUG: GetStdHandle(STD_OUTPUT_HANDLE) can return what appears to
+     * be a valid handle. See TclpGetDefaultStdChannel() for this change
+     * implemented. We didn't change it here because GetFileType() [below]
+     * will catch this with FILE_TYPE_UNKNOWN and appropriately return a value
+     * of 1, anyways.
      *
      *    char dummyBuff[1];
      *    DWORD dummyWritten;
      *
      *    if ((type == TCL_STDOUT)
-     *	    && !WriteFile(handle, dummyBuff, 0, &dummyWritten, NULL)) {
-     *	return 1;
+     *		&& !WriteFile(handle, dummyBuff, 0, &dummyWritten, NULL)) {
+     *	     return 1;
      *    }
      */
 
     fileType = GetFileType(handle);
 
     /*
-     * If the file is a character device, we need to try to figure out
-     * whether it is a serial port, a console, or something else.  We
-     * test for the console case first because this is more common.
+     * If the file is a character device, we need to try to figure out whether
+     * it is a serial port, a console, or something else. We test for the
+     * console case first because this is more common.
      */
 
     if (fileType == FILE_TYPE_CHAR) {
@@ -175,10 +170,10 @@ static int ShouldUseConsoleChannel(type)
 	if (!GetConsoleMode(handle, &consoleParams) &&
 		!GetCommState(handle, &dcb)) {
 	    /*
-	     * Don't use a CHAR type channel for stdio, otherwise Tk
-	     * runs into trouble with the MS DevStudio debugger.
+	     * Don't use a CHAR type channel for stdio, otherwise Tk runs into
+	     * trouble with the MS DevStudio debugger.
 	     */
-	    
+
 	    return 1;
 	}
     } else if (fileType == FILE_TYPE_UNKNOWN) {
@@ -202,23 +197,22 @@ static int ShouldUseConsoleChannel(type)
  *
  * Tk_InitConsoleChannels --
  *
- * 	Create the console channels and install them as the standard
- * 	channels.  All I/O will be discarded until Tk_CreateConsoleWindow
- *	is called to attach the console to a text widget.
+ * 	Create the console channels and install them as the standard channels.
+ * 	All I/O will be discarded until Tk_CreateConsoleWindow is called to
+ * 	attach the console to a text widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Creates the console channel and installs it as the standard
- *	channels.
+ *	Creates the console channel and installs it as the standard channels.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_InitConsoleChannels(interp)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+Tk_InitConsoleChannels(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)
 {
     static Tcl_ThreadDataKey consoleInitKey;
     int *consoleInitPtr, doIn, doOut, doErr;
@@ -226,11 +220,11 @@ Tk_InitConsoleChannels(interp)
     Tcl_Channel consoleChannel;
 
     /*
-     * Ensure that we are getting the matching version of Tcl.  This is
-     * really only an issue when Tk is loaded dynamically.
+     * Ensure that we are getting a compatible version of Tcl. This is really
+     * only an issue when Tk is loaded dynamically.
      */
 
-    if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, TCL_VERSION, 1) == NULL) {
+    if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, "8.5.0", 0) == NULL) {
         return;
     }
 
@@ -326,9 +320,9 @@ Tk_InitConsoleChannels(interp)
  *
  * Tk_CreateConsoleWindow --
  *
- *	Initialize the console.  This code actually creates a new
- *	application and associated interpreter.  This effectivly hides
- *	the implementation from the main application.
+ *	Initialize the console. This code actually creates a new application
+ *	and associated interpreter. This effectivly hides the implementation
+ *	from the main application.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -339,9 +333,9 @@ Tk_InitConsoleChannels(interp)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-int 
-Tk_CreateConsoleWindow(interp)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter to use for prompting. */
+int
+Tk_CreateConsoleWindow(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Interpreter to use for prompting. */
 {
     Tcl_Channel chan;
     ConsoleInfo *info;
@@ -350,28 +344,26 @@ Tk_CreateConsoleWindow(interp)
     int result = TCL_OK;
     int haveConsoleChannel = 1;
 
-    static CONST char *initCmd = "source $tk_library/console.tcl";
-
     /* Init an interp with Tcl and Tk */
     Tcl_Interp *consoleInterp = Tcl_CreateInterp();
     if (Tcl_Init(consoleInterp) != TCL_OK) {
-      goto error;
+	goto error;
     }
     if (Tk_Init(consoleInterp) != TCL_OK) {
 	goto error;
     }
-    
+
     /*
      * Fetch the instance data from whatever std channel is a
      * console channel.  If none, create fresh instance data.
      */
 
     if (Tcl_GetChannelType(chan = Tcl_GetStdChannel(TCL_STDIN))
-          == &consoleChannelType) {
+	    == &consoleChannelType) {
     } else if (Tcl_GetChannelType(chan = Tcl_GetStdChannel(TCL_STDOUT))
-          == &consoleChannelType) {
+	    == &consoleChannelType) {
     } else if (Tcl_GetChannelType(chan = Tcl_GetStdChannel(TCL_STDERR))
-          == &consoleChannelType) {
+	    == &consoleChannelType) {
     } else {
 	haveConsoleChannel = 0;
     }
@@ -418,14 +410,14 @@ Tk_CreateConsoleWindow(interp)
     Tcl_CallWhenDeleted(consoleInterp, InterpDeleteProc, (ClientData) info);
     info->refCount++;
     Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler(DeleteConsoleInterp,
-	(ClientData) consoleInterp);
-    
-    /* 
-     * Add console commands to the interp 
+	    (ClientData) consoleInterp);
+
+    /*
+     * Add console commands to the interp
      */
 
     token = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "console", ConsoleObjCmd,
-          (ClientData) info, ConsoleDeleteProc);
+	    (ClientData) info, ConsoleDeleteProc);
     info->refCount++;
 
     /*
@@ -444,22 +436,11 @@ Tk_CreateConsoleWindow(interp)
     }
 
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) consoleInterp);
-    result = Tcl_EvalEx(consoleInterp, initCmd, -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+    result = Tcl_EvalEx(consoleInterp, "source $tk_library/console.tcl",
+	    -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
     if (result == TCL_ERROR) {
-	Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(consoleInterp, "errorCode", NULL,
-		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
-	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	if (objPtr) {
-	    Tcl_SetObjErrorCode(interp, objPtr);
-	}
-
-	objPtr = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(consoleInterp, "errorInfo", NULL,
-		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
-	if (objPtr) {
-	    int numBytes;
-	    CONST char *message = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, &numBytes);
-	    Tcl_AddObjErrorInfo(interp, message, numBytes);
-	}
+	Tcl_SetReturnOptions(interp,
+		Tcl_GetReturnOptions(consoleInterp, result));
 	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_GetObjResult(consoleInterp));
     }
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) consoleInterp);
@@ -476,7 +457,7 @@ Tk_CreateConsoleWindow(interp)
 	goto error;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
-    
+
     error:
     Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (creating console window)");
     if (!Tcl_InterpDeleted(consoleInterp)) {
@@ -490,12 +471,12 @@ Tk_CreateConsoleWindow(interp)
  *
  * ConsoleOutput--
  *
- *	Writes the given output on the IO channel. Returns count of how
- *	many characters were actually written, and an error indication.
+ *	Writes the given output on the IO channel. Returns count of how many
+ *	characters were actually written, and an error indication.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A count of how many characters were written is returned and an
- *	error indication is returned in an output argument.
+ *	A count of how many characters were written is returned and an error
+ *	indication is returned in an output argument.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Writes output on the actual channel.
@@ -504,11 +485,11 @@ Tk_CreateConsoleWindow(interp)
  */
 
 static int
-ConsoleOutput(instanceData, buf, toWrite, errorCode)
-    ClientData instanceData;		/* Indicates which device to use. */
-    CONST char *buf;			/* The data buffer. */
-    int toWrite;			/* How many bytes to write? */
-    int *errorCode;			/* Where to store error code. */
+ConsoleOutput(
+    ClientData instanceData,	/* Indicates which device to use. */
+    CONST char *buf,		/* The data buffer. */
+    int toWrite,		/* How many bytes to write? */
+    int *errorCode)		/* Where to store error code. */
 {
     ChannelData *data = (ChannelData *)instanceData;
     ConsoleInfo *info = data->info;
@@ -560,7 +541,7 @@ ConsoleOutput(instanceData, buf, toWrite, errorCode)
  *
  * ConsoleInput --
  *
- *	Read input from the console.  Not currently implemented.
+ *	Read input from the console. Not currently implemented.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Always returns EOF.
@@ -573,12 +554,12 @@ ConsoleOutput(instanceData, buf, toWrite, errorCode)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-ConsoleInput(instanceData, buf, bufSize, errorCode)
-    ClientData instanceData;		/* Unused. */
-    char *buf;				/* Where to store data read. */
-    int bufSize;			/* How much space is available
-                                         * in the buffer? */
-    int *errorCode;			/* Where to store error code. */
+ConsoleInput(
+    ClientData instanceData,	/* Unused. */
+    char *buf,			/* Where to store data read. */
+    int bufSize,		/* How much space is available in the
+				 * buffer? */
+    int *errorCode)		/* Where to store error code. */
 {
     return 0;			/* Always return EOF. */
 }
@@ -601,9 +582,9 @@ ConsoleInput(instanceData, buf, bufSize, errorCode)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-ConsoleClose(instanceData, interp)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Unused. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Unused. */
+ConsoleClose(
+    ClientData instanceData,	/* Unused. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Unused. */
 {
     ChannelData *data = (ChannelData *)instanceData;
     ConsoleInfo *info = data->info;
@@ -623,9 +604,9 @@ ConsoleClose(instanceData, interp)
  *
  * ConsoleWatch --
  *
- *	Called by the notifier to set up the console device so that
- *	events will be noticed. Since there are no events on the
- *	console, this routine just returns without doing anything.
+ *	Called by the notifier to set up the console device so that events
+ *	will be noticed. Since there are no events on the console, this
+ *	routine just returns without doing anything.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -638,12 +619,11 @@ ConsoleClose(instanceData, interp)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-ConsoleWatch(instanceData, mask)
-    ClientData instanceData;		/* Device ID for the channel. */
-    int mask;				/* OR-ed combination of
-                                         * TCL_READABLE, TCL_WRITABLE and
-                                         * TCL_EXCEPTION, for the events
-                                         * we are interested in. */
+ConsoleWatch(
+    ClientData instanceData,	/* Device ID for the channel. */
+    int mask)			/* OR-ed combination of TCL_READABLE,
+				 * TCL_WRITABLE and TCL_EXCEPTION, for the
+				 * events we are interested in. */
 {
 }
 
@@ -653,8 +633,7 @@ ConsoleWatch(instanceData, mask)
  * ConsoleHandle --
  *
  *	Invoked by the generic IO layer to get a handle from a channel.
- *	Because console channels are not devices, this function always
- *	fails.
+ *	Because console channels are not devices, this function always fails.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Always returns TCL_ERROR.
@@ -667,12 +646,12 @@ ConsoleWatch(instanceData, mask)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-ConsoleHandle(instanceData, direction, handlePtr)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Device ID for the channel. */
-    int direction;		/* TCL_READABLE or TCL_WRITABLE to indicate
+ConsoleHandle(
+    ClientData instanceData,	/* Device ID for the channel. */
+    int direction,		/* TCL_READABLE or TCL_WRITABLE to indicate
 				 * which direction of the channel is being
 				 * requested. */
-    ClientData *handlePtr;	/* Where to store handle */
+    ClientData *handlePtr)	/* Where to store handle */
 {
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -695,11 +674,11 @@ ConsoleHandle(instanceData, direction, handlePtr)
  */
 
 static int
-ConsoleObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Access to the console interp */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Argument objects */
+ConsoleObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Access to the console interp */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects */
 {
     int index, result;
     static CONST char *options[] = {"eval", "hide", "show", "title", NULL};
@@ -755,22 +734,8 @@ ConsoleObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     if (consoleInterp && !Tcl_InterpDeleted(consoleInterp)) {
 	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) consoleInterp);
 	result = Tcl_EvalObjEx(consoleInterp, cmd, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
-	if (result == TCL_ERROR) {
-	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(consoleInterp, "errorCode",
-		    NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
-	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	    if (objPtr) {
-		Tcl_SetObjErrorCode(interp, objPtr);
-	    }
-
-	    objPtr = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(consoleInterp, "errorInfo",
-		    NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
-	    if (objPtr) {
-		int numBytes;
-		CONST char *message = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, &numBytes);
-		Tcl_AddObjErrorInfo(interp, message, numBytes);
-	    }
-	}
+	Tcl_SetReturnOptions(interp,
+		Tcl_GetReturnOptions(consoleInterp, result));
 	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_GetObjResult(consoleInterp));
 	Tcl_Release((ClientData) consoleInterp);
     } else {
@@ -786,8 +751,8 @@ ConsoleObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * InterpreterObjCmd --
  *
- *	This command allows the console interp to communicate with the
- *	main interpreter.
+ *	This command allows the console interp to communicate with the main
+ *	interpreter.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -796,11 +761,11 @@ ConsoleObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-InterpreterObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Not used */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Argument objects */
+InterpreterObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects */
 {
     int index, result = TCL_OK;
     static CONST char *options[] = {"eval", "record", NULL};
@@ -813,7 +778,7 @@ InterpreterObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], options, "option", 0, &index)
-	!= TCL_OK) {
+	    != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -830,30 +795,16 @@ InterpreterObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) otherInterp);
     switch ((enum option) index) {
     case OTHER_EVAL:
-	result = Tcl_EvalObjEx(otherInterp, objv[2], TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+   	result = Tcl_EvalObjEx(otherInterp, objv[2], TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
 	/*
 	 * TODO: Should exceptions be filtered here?
 	 */
-	if (result == TCL_ERROR) {
-	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(otherInterp, "errorCode",
-		    NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
-	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	    if (objPtr) {
-		Tcl_SetObjErrorCode(interp, objPtr);
-	    }
-
-	    objPtr = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(otherInterp, "errorInfo",
-		    NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
-	    if (objPtr) {
-		int numBytes;
-		CONST char *message = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, &numBytes);
-		Tcl_AddObjErrorInfo(interp, message, numBytes);
-	    }
-	}
+	Tcl_SetReturnOptions(interp,
+		Tcl_GetReturnOptions(otherInterp, result));
 	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_GetObjResult(otherInterp));
 	break;
     case OTHER_RECORD:
-	Tcl_RecordAndEvalObj(otherInterp, objv[2], TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+   	Tcl_RecordAndEvalObj(otherInterp, objv[2], TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
 	/*
 	 * By not setting result, we discard any exceptions or errors here
 	 * and always return TCL_OK.  All the caller wants is the
@@ -878,8 +829,8 @@ InterpreterObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteConsoleInterp(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;
+DeleteConsoleInterp(
+    ClientData clientData)
 {
     Tcl_Interp *interp = (Tcl_Interp *)clientData;
     Tcl_DeleteInterp(interp);
@@ -890,23 +841,28 @@ DeleteConsoleInterp(clientData)
  *
  * InterpDeleteProc --
  *
- *    React when the interp in which the console is displayed is deleted
- *    for any reason.
+ *	React when the interp in which the console is displayed is deleted
+ *	for any reason.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A new console it created.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-InterpDeleteProc(clientData, interp)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+InterpDeleteProc(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)
 {
     ConsoleInfo *info = (ConsoleInfo *) clientData;
 
-    if(info->consoleInterp == interp) {
+    if (info->consoleInterp == interp) {
 	Tcl_DeleteThreadExitHandler(DeleteConsoleInterp,
-		(ClientData) info-> consoleInterp);
+		(ClientData) info->consoleInterp);
 	info->consoleInterp = NULL;
     }
     if (--info->refCount <= 0) {
@@ -920,20 +876,20 @@ InterpDeleteProc(clientData, interp)
  * ConsoleDeleteProc --
  *
  *	If the console command is deleted we destroy the console window and
- * 	all associated data structures.
-
+ *	all associated data structures.
+ *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new console is created.
+ *	A new console it created.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ConsoleDeleteProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;
+ConsoleDeleteProc(
+    ClientData clientData)
 {
     ConsoleInfo *info = (ConsoleInfo *) clientData;
 
@@ -950,10 +906,11 @@ ConsoleDeleteProc(clientData)
  *
  * ConsoleEventProc --
  *
- * 	This event function is registered on the main window of the slave
- *	interpreter.  If the user or a running script causes the main window to
- * 	be destroyed, then we need to inform the console interpreter by
+ *	This event function is registered on the main window of the slave
+ *	interpreter. If the user or a running script causes the main window to
+ *	be destroyed, then we need to inform the console interpreter by
  *	invoking "::tk::ConsoleExit".
+ *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
@@ -964,9 +921,9 @@ ConsoleDeleteProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-ConsoleEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    XEvent *eventPtr;
+ConsoleEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    XEvent *eventPtr)
 {
     if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
 	ConsoleInfo *info = (ConsoleInfo *) clientData;
@@ -981,3 +938,11 @@ ConsoleEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	}
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkCursor.c b/generic/tkCursor.c
index f599083..410aea9 100644
--- a/generic/tkCursor.c
+++ b/generic/tkCursor.c
@@ -1,52 +1,50 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkCursor.c --
  *
  *	This file maintains a database of read-only cursors for the Tk
- *	toolkit.  This allows cursors to be shared between widgets and
- *	also avoids round-trips to the X server.
+ *	toolkit. This allows cursors to be shared between widgets and also
+ *	avoids round-trips to the X server.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * A TkCursor structure exists for each cursor that is currently
- * active.  Each structure is indexed with two hash tables defined
- * below.  One of the tables is cursorIdTable, and the other is either
- * cursorNameTable or cursorDataTable, each of which are stored in the
- * TkDisplay structure for the current thread.
+ * A TkCursor structure exists for each cursor that is currently active. Each
+ * structure is indexed with two hash tables defined below. One of the tables
+ * is cursorIdTable, and the other is either cursorNameTable or
+ * cursorDataTable, each of which are stored in the TkDisplay structure for
+ * the current thread.
  */
 
 typedef struct {
     CONST char *source;		/* Cursor bits. */
     CONST char *mask;		/* Mask bits. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of cursor (and data
-				 * and mask). */
+    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of cursor (and data and
+				 * mask). */
     int xHot, yHot;		/* Location of cursor hot-spot. */
     Tk_Uid fg, bg;		/* Colors for cursor. */
     Display *display;		/* Display on which cursor will be used. */
 } DataKey;
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		CursorInit _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
-static void		DupCursorObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr));
-static void		FreeCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCursor *cursorPtr));
-static void		FreeCursorObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static TkCursor *	TkcGetCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name));
-static TkCursor *	GetCursorFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		InitCursorObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+static void		CursorInit(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+static void		DupCursorObjProc(Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr);
+static void		FreeCursor(TkCursor *cursorPtr);
+static void		FreeCursorObjProc(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static TkCursor *	TkcGetCursor(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name);
+static TkCursor *	GetCursorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		InitCursorObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
 
 /*
  * The following structure defines the implementation of the "cursor" Tcl
@@ -69,33 +67,32 @@ Tcl_ObjType tkCursorObjType = {
  *
  * Tk_AllocCursorFromObj --
  *
- *	Given a Tcl_Obj *, map the value to a corresponding
- *	Tk_Cursor structure based on the tkwin given.
+ *	Given a Tcl_Obj *, map the value to a corresponding Tk_Cursor
+ *	structure based on the tkwin given.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired cursor,
- *	unless objPtr couldn't be parsed correctly.  In this case,
- *	None is returned and an error message is left in the interp's result.
- *	The caller should never modify the cursor that is returned, and
- *	should eventually call Tk_FreeCursorFromObj when the cursor is no 
- *	longer needed.
+ *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired cursor, unless
+ *	objPtr couldn't be parsed correctly. In this case, None is returned
+ *	and an error message is left in the interp's result. The caller should
+ *	never modify the cursor that is returned, and should eventually call
+ *	Tk_FreeCursorFromObj when the cursor is no longer needed.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The cursor is added to an internal database with a reference count.
- *	For each call to this procedure, there should eventually be a call
- *	to Tk_FreeCursorFromObj, so that the database can be cleaned up 
- *	when cursors aren't needed anymore.
+ *	For each call to this function, there should eventually be a call to
+ *	Tk_FreeCursorFromObj, so that the database can be cleaned up when
+ *	cursors aren't needed anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Cursor
-Tk_AllocCursorFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error results. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which the cursor will be used.*/
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object describing cursor; see manual
-				 * entry for description of legal
-				 * syntax of this obj's string rep. */
+Tk_AllocCursorFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error results. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which the cursor will be used.*/
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Object describing cursor; see manual entry
+				 * for description of legal syntax of this
+				 * obj's string rep. */
 {
     TkCursor *cursorPtr;
 
@@ -105,16 +102,17 @@ Tk_AllocCursorFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
     cursorPtr = (TkCursor *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
 
     /*
-     * If the object currently points to a TkCursor, see if it's the
-     * one we want.  If so, increment its reference count and return.
+     * If the object currently points to a TkCursor, see if it's the one we
+     * want. If so, increment its reference count and return.
      */
 
     if (cursorPtr != NULL) {
 	if (cursorPtr->resourceRefCount == 0) {
 	    /*
-	     * This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkCursor that's
-	     * no longer in use.  Clear the reference.
+	     * This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkCursor that's no
+	     * longer in use. Clear the reference.
 	     */
+
 	    FreeCursorObjProc(objPtr);
 	    cursorPtr = NULL;
 	} else if (Tk_Display(tkwin) == cursorPtr->display) {
@@ -124,38 +122,37 @@ Tk_AllocCursorFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The object didn't point to the TkCursor that we wanted.  Search
-     * the list of TkCursors with the same name to see if one of the
-     * other TkCursors is the right one.
+     * The object didn't point to the TkCursor that we wanted. Search the list
+     * of TkCursors with the same name to see if one of the other TkCursors is
+     * the right one.
      */
 
     if (cursorPtr != NULL) {
-	TkCursor *firstCursorPtr =
-		(TkCursor *) Tcl_GetHashValue(cursorPtr->hashPtr);
+	TkCursor *firstCursorPtr = (TkCursor *)
+		Tcl_GetHashValue(cursorPtr->hashPtr);
 	FreeCursorObjProc(objPtr);
 	for (cursorPtr = firstCursorPtr;  cursorPtr != NULL;
 		cursorPtr = cursorPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (Tk_Display(tkwin) == cursorPtr->display) {
 		cursorPtr->resourceRefCount++;
 		cursorPtr->objRefCount++;
-		objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) cursorPtr;
+		objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) cursorPtr;
 		return cursorPtr->cursor;
 	    }
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Still no luck.  Call TkcGetCursor to allocate a new TkCursor object.
+     * Still no luck. Call TkcGetCursor to allocate a new TkCursor object.
      */
 
     cursorPtr = TkcGetCursor(interp, tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objPtr));
-    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) cursorPtr;
+    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) cursorPtr;
     if (cursorPtr == NULL) {
 	return None;
-    } else {
-	cursorPtr->objRefCount++;
-	return cursorPtr->cursor;
     }
+    cursorPtr->objRefCount++;
+    return cursorPtr->cursor;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -163,32 +160,31 @@ Tk_AllocCursorFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetCursor --
  *
- *	Given a string describing a cursor, locate (or create if necessary)
- *	a cursor that fits the description.
+ *	Given a string describing a cursor, locate (or create if necessary) a
+ *	cursor that fits the description.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired cursor,
- *	unless string couldn't be parsed correctly.  In this case,
- *	None is returned and an error message is left in the interp's result.
- *	The caller should never modify the cursor that is returned, and
- *	should eventually call Tk_FreeCursor when the cursor is no longer
- *	needed.
+ *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired cursor, unless
+ *	string couldn't be parsed correctly. In this case, None is returned
+ *	and an error message is left in the interp's result. The caller should
+ *	never modify the cursor that is returned, and should eventually call
+ *	Tk_FreeCursor when the cursor is no longer needed.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The cursor is added to an internal database with a reference count.
- *	For each call to this procedure, there should eventually be a call
- *	to Tk_FreeCursor, so that the database can be cleaned up when cursors
+ *	For each call to this function, there should eventually be a call to
+ *	Tk_FreeCursor, so that the database can be cleaned up when cursors
  *	aren't needed anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Cursor
-Tk_GetCursor(interp, tkwin, string)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which cursor will be used. */
-    Tk_Uid string;		/* Description of cursor.  See manual entry
-				 * for details on legal syntax. */
+Tk_GetCursor(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which cursor will be used. */
+    Tk_Uid string)		/* Description of cursor. See manual entry for
+				 * details on legal syntax. */
 {
     TkCursor *cursorPtr = TkcGetCursor(interp, tkwin, string);
     if (cursorPtr == NULL) {
@@ -202,48 +198,47 @@ Tk_GetCursor(interp, tkwin, string)
  *
  * TkcGetCursor --
  *
- *	Given a string describing a cursor, locate (or create if necessary)
- *	a cursor that fits the description. This routine returns the
- *	internal data structure for the cursor, which avoids extra
- *	hash table lookups in Tk_AllocCursorFromObj.
+ *	Given a string describing a cursor, locate (or create if necessary) a
+ *	cursor that fits the description. This routine returns the internal
+ *	data structure for the cursor, which avoids extra hash table lookups
+ *	in Tk_AllocCursorFromObj.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the TkCursor for the desired
- *	cursor, unless string couldn't be parsed correctly.  In this
- *	case, NULL is returned and an error message is left in the
- *	interp's result. The caller should never modify the cursor that
- *	is returned, and should eventually call Tk_FreeCursor when the
- *	cursor is no longer needed.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the TkCursor for the desired cursor,
+ *	unless string couldn't be parsed correctly. In this case, NULL is
+ *	returned and an error message is left in the interp's result. The
+ *	caller should never modify the cursor that is returned, and should
+ *	eventually call Tk_FreeCursor when the cursor is no longer needed.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The cursor is added to an internal database with a reference count.
- *	For each call to this procedure, there should eventually be a call
- *	to Tk_FreeCursor, so that the database can be cleaned up when cursors
+ *	For each call to this function, there should eventually be a call to
+ *	Tk_FreeCursor, so that the database can be cleaned up when cursors
  *	aren't needed anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static TkCursor *
-TkcGetCursor(interp, tkwin, string)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which cursor will be used. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* Description of cursor.  See manual entry
-				 * for details on legal syntax. */
+TkcGetCursor(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which cursor will be used. */
+    CONST char *string)		/* Description of cursor. See manual entry for
+				 * details on legal syntax. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *nameHashPtr;
     register TkCursor *cursorPtr;
     TkCursor *existingCursorPtr = NULL;
-    int new;
+    int isNew;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
     if (!dispPtr->cursorInit) {
 	CursorInit(dispPtr);
     }
 
-    nameHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->cursorNameTable, 
-            string, &new);
-    if (!new) {
+    nameHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->cursorNameTable,
+            string, &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
 	existingCursorPtr = (TkCursor *) Tcl_GetHashValue(nameHashPtr);
 	for (cursorPtr = existingCursorPtr; cursorPtr != NULL;
 		cursorPtr = cursorPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -259,7 +254,7 @@ TkcGetCursor(interp, tkwin, string)
     cursorPtr = TkGetCursorByName(interp, tkwin, string);
 
     if (cursorPtr == NULL) {
-	if (new) {
+	if (isNew) {
 	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(nameHashPtr);
 	}
 	return NULL;
@@ -275,10 +270,10 @@ TkcGetCursor(interp, tkwin, string)
     cursorPtr->otherTable = &dispPtr->cursorNameTable;
     cursorPtr->hashPtr = nameHashPtr;
     cursorPtr->nextPtr = existingCursorPtr;
-    cursorPtr->idHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->cursorIdTable, 
-            (char *) cursorPtr->cursor, &new);
-    if (!new) {
-	panic("cursor already registered in Tk_GetCursor");
+    cursorPtr->idHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->cursorIdTable,
+            (char *) cursorPtr->cursor, &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
+	Tcl_Panic("cursor already registered in Tk_GetCursor");
     }
     Tcl_SetHashValue(nameHashPtr, cursorPtr);
     Tcl_SetHashValue(cursorPtr->idHashPtr, cursorPtr);
@@ -291,46 +286,43 @@ TkcGetCursor(interp, tkwin, string)
  *
  * Tk_GetCursorFromData --
  *
- *	Given a description of the bits and colors for a cursor,
- *	make a cursor that has the given properties.
+ *	Given a description of the bits and colors for a cursor, make a cursor
+ *	that has the given properties.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired cursor,
- *	unless it couldn't be created properly.  In this case, None is
- *	returned and an error message is left in the interp's result.  The
- *	caller should never modify the cursor that is returned, and
- *	should eventually call Tk_FreeCursor when the cursor is no
- *	longer needed.
+ *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired cursor, unless it
+ *	couldn't be created properly. In this case, None is returned and an
+ *	error message is left in the interp's result. The caller should never
+ *	modify the cursor that is returned, and should eventually call
+ *	Tk_FreeCursor when the cursor is no longer needed.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The cursor is added to an internal database with a reference count.
- *	For each call to this procedure, there should eventually be a call
- *	to Tk_FreeCursor, so that the database can be cleaned up when cursors
+ *	For each call to this function, there should eventually be a call to
+ *	Tk_FreeCursor, so that the database can be cleaned up when cursors
  *	aren't needed anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Cursor
-Tk_GetCursorFromData(interp, tkwin, source, mask, width, height,
-	xHot, yHot, fg, bg)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which cursor will be used. */
-    CONST char *source;		/* Bitmap data for cursor shape. */
-    CONST char *mask;		/* Bitmap data for cursor mask. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of cursor. */
-    int xHot, yHot;		/* Location of hot-spot in cursor. */
-    Tk_Uid fg;			/* Foreground color for cursor. */
-    Tk_Uid bg;			/* Background color for cursor. */
+Tk_GetCursorFromData(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which cursor will be used. */
+    CONST char *source,		/* Bitmap data for cursor shape. */
+    CONST char *mask,		/* Bitmap data for cursor mask. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of cursor. */
+    int xHot, int yHot,		/* Location of hot-spot in cursor. */
+    Tk_Uid fg,			/* Foreground color for cursor. */
+    Tk_Uid bg)			/* Background color for cursor. */
 {
     DataKey dataKey;
     Tcl_HashEntry *dataHashPtr;
     register TkCursor *cursorPtr;
-    int new;
+    int isNew;
     XColor fgColor, bgColor;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
-
     if (!dispPtr->cursorInit) {
 	CursorInit(dispPtr);
     }
@@ -344,27 +336,25 @@ Tk_GetCursorFromData(interp, tkwin, source, mask, width, height,
     dataKey.fg = fg;
     dataKey.bg = bg;
     dataKey.display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
-    dataHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->cursorDataTable, 
-            (char *) &dataKey, &new);
-    if (!new) {
+    dataHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->cursorDataTable,
+            (char *) &dataKey, &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
 	cursorPtr = (TkCursor *) Tcl_GetHashValue(dataHashPtr);
 	cursorPtr->resourceRefCount++;
 	return cursorPtr->cursor;
     }
 
     /*
-     * No suitable cursor exists yet.  Make one using the data
-     * available and add it to the database.
+     * No suitable cursor exists yet. Make one using the data available and
+     * add it to the database.
      */
 
     if (TkParseColor(dataKey.display, Tk_Colormap(tkwin), fg, &fgColor) == 0) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid color name \"", fg, "\"",
-		(char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid color name \"", fg, "\"", NULL);
 	goto error;
     }
     if (TkParseColor(dataKey.display, Tk_Colormap(tkwin), bg, &bgColor) == 0) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid color name \"", bg, "\"",
-		(char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid color name \"", bg, "\"", NULL);
 	goto error;
     }
 
@@ -379,18 +369,18 @@ Tk_GetCursorFromData(interp, tkwin, source, mask, width, height,
     cursorPtr->otherTable = &dispPtr->cursorDataTable;
     cursorPtr->hashPtr = dataHashPtr;
     cursorPtr->objRefCount = 0;
-    cursorPtr->idHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->cursorIdTable, 
-            (char *) cursorPtr->cursor, &new);
+    cursorPtr->idHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->cursorIdTable,
+            (char *) cursorPtr->cursor, &isNew);
     cursorPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
 
-    if (!new) {
-	panic("cursor already registered in Tk_GetCursorFromData");
+    if (!isNew) {
+	Tcl_Panic("cursor already registered in Tk_GetCursorFromData");
     }
     Tcl_SetHashValue(dataHashPtr, cursorPtr);
     Tcl_SetHashValue(cursorPtr->idHashPtr, cursorPtr);
     return cursorPtr->cursor;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(dataHashPtr);
     return None;
 }
@@ -403,12 +393,11 @@ Tk_GetCursorFromData(interp, tkwin, source, mask, width, height,
  *	Given a cursor, return a textual string identifying it.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If cursor was created by Tk_GetCursor, then the return
- *	value is the "string" that was used to create it.
- *	Otherwise the return value is a string giving the X
- *	identifier for the cursor.  The storage for the returned
- *	string is only guaranteed to persist up until the next
- *	call to this procedure.
+ *	If cursor was created by Tk_GetCursor, then the return value is the
+ *	"string" that was used to create it. Otherwise the return value is a
+ *	string giving the X identifier for the cursor. The storage for the
+ *	returned string is only guaranteed to persist up until the next call
+ *	to this function.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -417,9 +406,9 @@ Tk_GetCursorFromData(interp, tkwin, source, mask, width, height,
  */
 
 CONST char *
-Tk_NameOfCursor(display, cursor)
-    Display *display;		/* Display for which cursor was allocated. */
-    Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Identifier for cursor whose name is
+Tk_NameOfCursor(
+    Display *display,		/* Display for which cursor was allocated. */
+    Tk_Cursor cursor)		/* Identifier for cursor whose name is
 				 * wanted. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr;
@@ -429,9 +418,8 @@ Tk_NameOfCursor(display, cursor)
     dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
 
     if (!dispPtr->cursorInit) {
-	printid:
-	sprintf(dispPtr->cursorString, "cursor id 0x%x", 
-                (unsigned int) cursor);
+    printid:
+	sprintf(dispPtr->cursorString, "cursor id %p", cursor);
 	return dispPtr->cursorString;
     }
     idHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->cursorIdTable, (char *) cursor);
@@ -450,23 +438,22 @@ Tk_NameOfCursor(display, cursor)
  *
  * FreeCursor --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by both Tk_FreeCursor and
- *	Tk_FreeCursorFromObj; it does all the real work of deallocating
- *	a cursor.
+ *	This function is invoked by both Tk_FreeCursorFromObj and
+ *	Tk_FreeCursor; it does all the real work of deallocating a cursor.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The reference count associated with cursor is decremented, and
- *	it is officially deallocated if no-one is using it anymore.
+ *	The reference count associated with cursor is decremented, and it is
+ *	officially deallocated if no-one is using it anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeCursor(cursorPtr)
-    TkCursor *cursorPtr;	/* Cursor to be released. */
+FreeCursor(
+    TkCursor *cursorPtr)	/* Cursor to be released. */
 {
     TkCursor *prevPtr;
 
@@ -500,34 +487,34 @@ FreeCursor(cursorPtr)
  *
  * Tk_FreeCursor --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to release a cursor allocated by
- *	Tk_GetCursor or TkGetCursorFromData.
+ *	This function is called to release a cursor allocated by Tk_GetCursor
+ *	or TkGetCursorFromData.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The reference count associated with cursor is decremented, and
- *	it is officially deallocated if no-one is using it anymore.
+ *	The reference count associated with cursor is decremented, and it is
+ *	officially deallocated if no-one is using it anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeCursor(display, cursor)
-    Display *display;		/* Display for which cursor was allocated. */
-    Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Identifier for cursor to be released. */
+Tk_FreeCursor(
+    Display *display,		/* Display for which cursor was allocated. */
+    Tk_Cursor cursor)		/* Identifier for cursor to be released. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
 
     if (!dispPtr->cursorInit) {
-	panic("Tk_FreeCursor called before Tk_GetCursor");
+	Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeCursor called before Tk_GetCursor");
     }
 
     idHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->cursorIdTable, (char *) cursor);
     if (idHashPtr == NULL) {
-	panic("Tk_FreeCursor received unknown cursor argument");
+	Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeCursor received unknown cursor argument");
     }
     FreeCursor((TkCursor *) Tcl_GetHashValue(idHashPtr));
 }
@@ -537,27 +524,27 @@ Tk_FreeCursor(display, cursor)
  *
  * Tk_FreeCursorFromObj --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to release a cursor allocated by
- *	Tk_AllocCursorFromObj. It does not throw away the Tcl_Obj *;
- *	it only gets rid of the hash table entry for this cursor
- *	and clears the cached value that is normally stored in the object.
+ *	This function is called to release a cursor allocated by
+ *	Tk_AllocCursorFromObj. It does not throw away the Tcl_Obj *; it only
+ *	gets rid of the hash table entry for this cursor and clears the cached
+ *	value that is normally stored in the object.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The reference count associated with the cursor represented by
- *	objPtr is decremented, and the cursor is released to X if there are 
- *	no remaining uses for it.
+ *	The reference count associated with the cursor represented by objPtr
+ *	is decremented, and the cursor is released to X if there are no
+ *	remaining uses for it.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window this cursor lives in. Needed
-				 * for the display value. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The Tcl_Obj * to be freed. */
+Tk_FreeCursorFromObj(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The window this cursor lives in. Needed for
+				 * the display value. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The Tcl_Obj * to be freed. */
 {
     FreeCursor(GetCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr));
     FreeCursorObjProc(objPtr);
@@ -566,66 +553,65 @@ Tk_FreeCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * FreeCursorFromObjProc -- 
+ * FreeCursorFromObjProc --
  *
  *	This proc is called to release an object reference to a cursor.
- *	Called when the object's internal rep is released or when
- *	the cached tkColPtr needs to be changed.
+ *	Called when the object's internal rep is released or when the cached
+ *	tkColPtr needs to be changed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The object reference count is decremented. When both it
- *	and the hash ref count go to zero, the color's resources
- *	are released.
+ *	The object reference count is decremented. When both it and the hash
+ *	ref count go to zero, the color's resources are released.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeCursorObjProc(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object we are releasing. */
+FreeCursorObjProc(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object we are releasing. */
 {
     TkCursor *cursorPtr = (TkCursor *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
 
     if (cursorPtr != NULL) {
 	cursorPtr->objRefCount--;
-	if ((cursorPtr->objRefCount == 0) 
+	if ((cursorPtr->objRefCount == 0)
 		&& (cursorPtr->resourceRefCount == 0)) {
 	    ckfree((char *) cursorPtr);
 	}
-	objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) NULL;
+	objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = NULL;
     }
 }
 
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * DupCursorObjProc -- 
+ * DupCursorObjProc --
  *
- *	When a cached cursor object is duplicated, this is called to
- *	update the internal reps.
+ *	When a cached cursor object is duplicated, this is called to update
+ *	the internal reps.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The color's objRefCount is incremented and the internal rep
- *	of the copy is set to point to it.
+ *	The color's objRefCount is incremented and the internal rep of the
+ *	copy is set to point to it.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DupCursorObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying from. */
-    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying to. */
+DupCursorObjProc(
+    Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,		/* The object we are copying from. */
+    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr)		/* The object we are copying to. */
 {
     TkCursor *cursorPtr = (TkCursor *) srcObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
-    
+
     dupObjPtr->typePtr = srcObjPtr->typePtr;
-    dupObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) cursorPtr;
+    dupObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) cursorPtr;
 
     if (cursorPtr != NULL) {
 	cursorPtr->objRefCount++;
@@ -638,27 +624,31 @@ DupCursorObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
  * Tk_GetCursorFromObj --
  *
  *	Returns the cursor referred to buy a Tcl object. The cursor must
- *	already have been allocated via a call to Tk_AllocCursorFromObj or 
+ *	already have been allocated via a call to Tk_AllocCursorFromObj or
  *	Tk_GetCursor.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns the Tk_Cursor that matches the tkwin and the string rep
- *	of the name of the cursor given in objPtr.
+ *	Returns the Tk_Cursor that matches the tkwin and the string rep of the
+ *	name of the cursor given in objPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a cursor, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a cursor, the conversion will free any
+ *	old internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Cursor
-Tk_GetCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object from which to get pixels. */
+Tk_GetCursorFromObj(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object from which to get pixels. */
 {
     TkCursor *cursorPtr = GetCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
-    /* GetCursorFromObj should never return NULL */
+
+    /*
+     * GetCursorFromObj should never return NULL
+     */
+
     return cursorPtr->cursor;
 }
 
@@ -667,25 +657,25 @@ Tk_GetCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
  *
  * GetCursorFromObj --
  *
- *	Returns the cursor referred to by a Tcl object.  The cursor must
- *	already have been allocated via a call to Tk_AllocCursorFromObj
- *	or Tk_GetCursor.
+ *	Returns the cursor referred to by a Tcl object. The cursor must
+ *	already have been allocated via a call to Tk_AllocCursorFromObj or
+ *	Tk_GetCursor.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns the TkCursor * that matches the tkwin and the string rep
- *	of the name of the cursor given in objPtr.
+ *	Returns the TkCursor * that matches the tkwin and the string rep of
+ *	the name of the cursor given in objPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a cursor, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a cursor, the conversion will free any
+ *	old internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static TkCursor *
-GetCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which the cursor will be used. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object that describes the desired
+GetCursorFromObj(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which the cursor will be used. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object that describes the desired
 				 * cursor. */
 {
     TkCursor *cursorPtr;
@@ -697,11 +687,12 @@ GetCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The internal representation is a cache of the last cursor used
-     * with the given name.  But there can be lots different cursors
-     * for each cursor name; one cursor for each display.  Check to
-     * see if the cursor we have cached is the one that is needed.
+     * The internal representation is a cache of the last cursor used with the
+     * given name. But there can be lots different cursors for each cursor
+     * name; one cursor for each display. Check to see if the cursor we have
+     * cached is the one that is needed.
      */
+
     cursorPtr = (TkCursor *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
     if ((cursorPtr != NULL) && (Tk_Display(tkwin) == cursorPtr->display)) {
 	return cursorPtr;
@@ -721,14 +712,14 @@ GetCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
 	    cursorPtr != NULL; cursorPtr = cursorPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (Tk_Display(tkwin) == cursorPtr->display) {
 	    FreeCursorObjProc(objPtr);
-	    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) cursorPtr;
+	    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) cursorPtr;
 	    cursorPtr->objRefCount++;
 	    return cursorPtr;
 	}
     }
 
-    error:
-    panic("GetCursorFromObj called with non-existent cursor!");
+  error:
+    Tcl_Panic("GetCursorFromObj called with non-existent cursor!");
     /*
      * The following code isn't reached; it's just there to please compilers.
      */
@@ -740,27 +731,27 @@ GetCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
  *
  * InitCursorObj --
  *
- *	Bookeeping procedure to change an objPtr to a cursor type.
+ *	Bookeeping function to change an objPtr to a cursor type.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The old internal rep of the object is freed. The internal
- *	rep is cleared. The final form of the object is set
- *	by either Tk_AllocCursorFromObj or GetCursorFromObj.
+ *	The old internal rep of the object is freed. The internal rep is
+ *	cleared. The final form of the object is set by either
+ *	Tk_AllocCursorFromObj or GetCursorFromObj.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-InitCursorObj(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object to convert. */
+InitCursorObj(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object to convert. */
 {
-    Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
+    const Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. 
+     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
      */
 
     Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
@@ -769,7 +760,7 @@ InitCursorObj(objPtr)
 	(*typePtr->freeIntRepProc)(objPtr);
     }
     objPtr->typePtr = &tkCursorObjType;
-    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) NULL;
+    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = NULL;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -789,26 +780,26 @@ InitCursorObj(objPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-CursorInit(dispPtr)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;   /* Display used to store thread-specific data. */
+CursorInit(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr)		/* Display used to store thread-specific
+				 * data. */
 {
     Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->cursorNameTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
     Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->cursorDataTable, sizeof(DataKey)/sizeof(int));
 
     /*
-     * The call below is tricky:  can't use sizeof(IdKey) because it
-     * gets padded with extra unpredictable bytes on some 64-bit
-     * machines.
+     * The call below is tricky: can't use sizeof(IdKey) because it gets
+     * padded with extra unpredictable bytes on some 64-bit machines.
      */
 
-    /* 
-     *  Old code....
-     *     Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->cursorIdTable, sizeof(Display *) 
+    /*
+     * Old code....
+     *     Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->cursorIdTable, sizeof(Display *)
      *                       /sizeof(int));
      *
-     * The comment above doesn't make sense.
-     * However, XIDs should only be 32 bits, by the definition of X,
-     * so the code above causes Tk to crash.  Here is the real code:
+     * The comment above doesn't make sense. However, XIDs should only be 32
+     * bits, by the definition of X, so the code above causes Tk to crash.
+     * Here is the real code:
      */
 
     Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->cursorIdTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
@@ -821,13 +812,13 @@ CursorInit(dispPtr)
  *
  * TkDebugCursor --
  *
- *	This procedure returns debugging information about a cursor.
+ *	This function returns debugging information about a cursor.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a list with one sublist for each TkCursor
- *	corresponding to "name".  Each sublist has two elements that
- *	contain the resourceRefCount and objRefCount fields from the
- *	TkCursor structure.
+ *	corresponding to "name". Each sublist has two elements that contain
+ *	the resourceRefCount and objRefCount fields from the TkCursor
+ *	structure.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -836,10 +827,10 @@ CursorInit(dispPtr)
  */
 
 Tcl_Obj *
-TkDebugCursor(tkwin, name)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window in which the cursor will be
-				 * used (not currently used). */
-    char *name;			/* Name of the desired color. */
+TkDebugCursor(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The window in which the cursor will be used
+				 * (not currently used). */
+    char *name)			/* Name of the desired color. */
 {
     TkCursor *cursorPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;
@@ -854,16 +845,24 @@ TkDebugCursor(tkwin, name)
     if (hashPtr != NULL) {
 	cursorPtr = (TkCursor *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
 	if (cursorPtr == NULL) {
-	    panic("TkDebugCursor found empty hash table entry");
+	    Tcl_Panic("TkDebugCursor found empty hash table entry");
 	}
 	for ( ; (cursorPtr != NULL); cursorPtr = cursorPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
 		    Tcl_NewIntObj(cursorPtr->resourceRefCount));
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
-		    Tcl_NewIntObj(cursorPtr->objRefCount)); 
+		    Tcl_NewIntObj(cursorPtr->objRefCount));
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, objPtr);
 	}
     }
     return resultPtr;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkDecls.h b/generic/tkDecls.h
index 81871a2..d06df4b 100644
--- a/generic/tkDecls.h
+++ b/generic/tkDecls.h
@@ -29,882 +29,1651 @@
  * Exported function declarations:
  */
 
+#ifndef Tk_MainLoop_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MainLoop_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 0 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_MainLoop _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		Tk_MainLoop(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_3DBorderColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_3DBorderColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 1 */
-EXTERN XColor *		Tk_3DBorderColor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_3DBorder border));
+EXTERN XColor *		Tk_3DBorderColor(Tk_3DBorder border);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_3DBorderGC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_3DBorderGC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 2 */
-EXTERN GC		Tk_3DBorderGC _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tk_3DBorder border, int which));
+EXTERN GC		Tk_3DBorderGC(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border,
+				int which);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_3DHorizontalBevel_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_3DHorizontalBevel_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 3 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_3DHorizontalBevel _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+EXTERN void		Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(Tk_Window tkwin,
 				Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x,
 				int y, int width, int height, int leftIn,
-				int rightIn, int topBevel, int relief));
+				int rightIn, int topBevel, int relief);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_3DVerticalBevel_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_3DVerticalBevel_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 4 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_3DVerticalBevel _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+EXTERN void		Tk_3DVerticalBevel(Tk_Window tkwin,
 				Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x,
 				int y, int width, int height, int leftBevel,
-				int relief));
+				int relief);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_AddOption_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_AddOption_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 5 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_AddOption _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				CONST char *name, CONST char *value,
-				int priority));
+EXTERN void		Tk_AddOption(Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name,
+				CONST char *value, int priority);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_BindEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_BindEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 6 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_BindEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
+EXTERN void		Tk_BindEvent(Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
 				XEvent *eventPtr, Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int numObjects, ClientData *objectPtr));
+				int numObjects, ClientData *objectPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 7 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_Canvas canvas, double x, double y,
-				short *drawableXPtr, short *drawableYPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(Tk_Canvas canvas, double x,
+				double y, short *drawableXPtr,
+				short *drawableYPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 8 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_Canvas canvas, int x1, int y1, int x2,
-				int y2));
+EXTERN void		Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw(Tk_Canvas canvas, int x1,
+				int y1, int x2, int y2);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasGetCoord_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasGetCoord_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 9 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasGetCoord _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasGetCoord(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_Canvas canvas, CONST char *str,
-				double *doublePtr));
+				double *doublePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasGetTextInfo_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasGetTextInfo_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 10 */
-EXTERN Tk_CanvasTextInfo * Tk_CanvasGetTextInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_Canvas canvas));
+EXTERN Tk_CanvasTextInfo * Tk_CanvasGetTextInfo(Tk_Canvas canvas);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasPsBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasPsBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 11 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasPsBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasPsBitmap(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_Canvas canvas, Pixmap bitmap, int x,
-				int y, int width, int height));
+				int y, int width, int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasPsColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasPsColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 12 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasPsColor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Canvas canvas, XColor *colorPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasPsColor(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Canvas canvas, XColor *colorPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasPsFont_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasPsFont_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 13 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasPsFont _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Font font));
+EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasPsFont(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
+				Tk_Font font);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasPsPath_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasPsPath_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 14 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CanvasPsPath _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr,
-				int numPoints));
+EXTERN void		Tk_CanvasPsPath(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
+				double *coordPtr, int numPoints);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasPsStipple_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasPsStipple_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 15 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasPsStipple _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Canvas canvas, Pixmap bitmap));
+EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasPsStipple(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Canvas canvas, Pixmap bitmap);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasPsY_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasPsY_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 16 */
-EXTERN double		Tk_CanvasPsY _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, double y));
+EXTERN double		Tk_CanvasPsY(Tk_Canvas canvas, double y);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 17 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc));
+EXTERN void		Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin(Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 18 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value,
-				char *widgRec, int offset));
+EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc(ClientData clientData,
+				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 19 */
-EXTERN char *		Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
-				char *widgRec, int offset,
-				Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
+EXTERN char *		Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc(ClientData clientData,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset,
+				Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasTkwin_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasTkwin_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 20 */
-EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_CanvasTkwin _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas));
+EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_CanvasTkwin(Tk_Canvas canvas);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasWindowCoords_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasWindowCoords_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 21 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CanvasWindowCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-				double x, double y, short *screenXPtr,
-				short *screenYPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_CanvasWindowCoords(Tk_Canvas canvas, double x,
+				double y, short *screenXPtr,
+				short *screenYPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 22 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask,
-				XSetWindowAttributes *attsPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				unsigned long valueMask,
+				XSetWindowAttributes *attsPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CharBbox_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CharBbox_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 23 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_CharBbox _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_TextLayout layout,
-				int index, int *xPtr, int *yPtr,
-				int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_CharBbox(Tk_TextLayout layout, int index,
+				int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr,
+				int *heightPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ClearSelection_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ClearSelection_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 24 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_ClearSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Atom selection));
+EXTERN void		Tk_ClearSelection(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ClipboardAppend_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ClipboardAppend_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 25 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_ClipboardAppend _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN int		Tk_ClipboardAppend(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_Window tkwin, Atom target, Atom format,
-				char *buffer));
+				char *buffer);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ClipboardClear_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ClipboardClear_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 26 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_ClipboardClear _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN int		Tk_ClipboardClear(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ConfigureInfo_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ConfigureInfo_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 27 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_ConfigureInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec *specs,
-				char *widgRec, CONST char *argvName,
-				int flags));
+EXTERN int		Tk_ConfigureInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec,
+				CONST char *argvName, int flags);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ConfigureValue_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ConfigureValue_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 28 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_ConfigureValue _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN int		Tk_ConfigureValue(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec *specs,
 				char *widgRec, CONST char *argvName,
-				int flags));
+				int flags);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ConfigureWidget_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ConfigureWidget_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 29 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_ConfigureWidget _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN int		Tk_ConfigureWidget(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec *specs,
 				int argc, CONST84 char **argv, char *widgRec,
-				int flags));
+				int flags);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ConfigureWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ConfigureWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 30 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_ConfigureWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+EXTERN void		Tk_ConfigureWindow(Tk_Window tkwin,
 				unsigned int valueMask,
-				XWindowChanges *valuePtr));
+				XWindowChanges *valuePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ComputeTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ComputeTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 31 */
-EXTERN Tk_TextLayout	Tk_ComputeTextLayout _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font font,
-				CONST char *str, int numChars,
-				int wrapLength, Tk_Justify justify,
-				int flags, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
+EXTERN Tk_TextLayout	Tk_ComputeTextLayout(Tk_Font font, CONST char *str,
+				int numChars, int wrapLength,
+				Tk_Justify justify, int flags, int *widthPtr,
+				int *heightPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CoordsToWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CoordsToWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 32 */
-EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_CoordsToWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((int rootX, int rootY,
-				Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_CoordsToWindow(int rootX, int rootY,
+				Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateBinding_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateBinding_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 33 */
-EXTERN unsigned long	Tk_CreateBinding _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN unsigned long	Tk_CreateBinding(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
 				ClientData object, CONST char *eventStr,
-				CONST char *script, int append));
+				CONST char *command, int append);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateBindingTable_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateBindingTable_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 34 */
-EXTERN Tk_BindingTable	Tk_CreateBindingTable _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp));
+EXTERN Tk_BindingTable	Tk_CreateBindingTable(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateErrorHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateErrorHandler_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 35 */
-EXTERN Tk_ErrorHandler	Tk_CreateErrorHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				int errNum, int request, int minorCode,
+EXTERN Tk_ErrorHandler	Tk_CreateErrorHandler(Display *display, int errNum,
+				int request, int minorCode,
 				Tk_ErrorProc *errorProc,
-				ClientData clientData));
+				ClientData clientData);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateEventHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateEventHandler_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 36 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CreateEventHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window token,
+EXTERN void		Tk_CreateEventHandler(Tk_Window token,
 				unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc *proc,
-				ClientData clientData));
+				ClientData clientData);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateGenericHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateGenericHandler_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 37 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CreateGenericHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_GenericProc *proc, ClientData clientData));
+EXTERN void		Tk_CreateGenericHandler(Tk_GenericProc *proc,
+				ClientData clientData);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateImageType_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateImageType_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 38 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CreateImageType _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_ImageType *typePtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_CreateImageType(Tk_ImageType *typePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateItemType_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateItemType_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 39 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CreateItemType _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_ItemType *typePtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_CreateItemType(Tk_ItemType *typePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 40 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat(
+				Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateSelHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateSelHandler_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 41 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CreateSelHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Atom selection, Atom target,
-				Tk_SelectionProc *proc,
-				ClientData clientData, Atom format));
+EXTERN void		Tk_CreateSelHandler(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection,
+				Atom target, Tk_SelectionProc *proc,
+				ClientData clientData, Atom format);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 42 */
-EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_CreateWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window parent, CONST char *name,
-				CONST char *screenName));
+EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_CreateWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window parent,
+				CONST char *name, CONST char *screenName);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateWindowFromPath_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateWindowFromPath_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 43 */
-EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_CreateWindowFromPath _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
-				CONST char *pathName, CONST char *screenName));
+EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *pathName,
+				CONST char *screenName);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DefineBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DefineBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 44 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_DefineBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST char *name, CONST char *source,
-				int width, int height));
+EXTERN int		Tk_DefineBitmap(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name,
+				CONST char *source, int width, int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DefineCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DefineCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 45 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DefineCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window window,
-				Tk_Cursor cursor));
+EXTERN void		Tk_DefineCursor(Tk_Window window, Tk_Cursor cursor);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DeleteAllBindings_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DeleteAllBindings_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 46 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteAllBindings _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
-				ClientData object));
+EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteAllBindings(Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
+				ClientData object);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DeleteBinding_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DeleteBinding_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 47 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_DeleteBinding _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN int		Tk_DeleteBinding(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
-				ClientData object, CONST char *eventStr));
+				ClientData object, CONST char *eventStr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DeleteBindingTable_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DeleteBindingTable_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 48 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteBindingTable _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_BindingTable bindingTable));
+EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteBindingTable(Tk_BindingTable bindingTable);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DeleteErrorHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DeleteErrorHandler_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 49 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteErrorHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_ErrorHandler handler));
+EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(Tk_ErrorHandler handler);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DeleteEventHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DeleteEventHandler_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 50 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteEventHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window token,
+EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteEventHandler(Tk_Window token,
 				unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc *proc,
-				ClientData clientData));
+				ClientData clientData);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DeleteGenericHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DeleteGenericHandler_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 51 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteGenericHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_GenericProc *proc, ClientData clientData));
+EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteGenericHandler(Tk_GenericProc *proc,
+				ClientData clientData);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DeleteImage_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DeleteImage_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 52 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST char *name));
+EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteImage(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DeleteSelHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DeleteSelHandler_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 53 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteSelHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Atom selection, Atom target));
+EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteSelHandler(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection,
+				Atom target);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DestroyWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DestroyWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 54 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DestroyWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN void		Tk_DestroyWindow(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DisplayName_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DisplayName_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 55 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_DisplayName _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_DisplayName(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DistanceToTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DistanceToTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 56 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_DistanceToTextLayout _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y));
+EXTERN int		Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout layout, int x,
+				int y);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_Draw3DPolygon_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_Draw3DPolygon_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 57 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_Draw3DPolygon _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border,
-				XPoint *pointPtr, int numPoints,
-				int borderWidth, int leftRelief));
+EXTERN void		Tk_Draw3DPolygon(Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable,
+				Tk_3DBorder border, XPoint *pointPtr,
+				int numPoints, int borderWidth,
+				int leftRelief);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_Draw3DRectangle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_Draw3DRectangle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 58 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_Draw3DRectangle _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+EXTERN void		Tk_Draw3DRectangle(Tk_Window tkwin,
 				Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x,
 				int y, int width, int height,
-				int borderWidth, int relief));
+				int borderWidth, int relief);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DrawChars_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DrawChars_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 59 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DrawChars _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
-				CONST char *source, int numBytes, int x,
-				int y));
+EXTERN void		Tk_DrawChars(Display *display, Drawable drawable,
+				GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char *source,
+				int numBytes, int x, int y);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DrawFocusHighlight_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DrawFocusHighlight_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 60 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DrawFocusHighlight _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				GC gc, int width, Drawable drawable));
+EXTERN void		Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc,
+				int width, Drawable drawable);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DrawTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DrawTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 61 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DrawTextLayout _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
+EXTERN void		Tk_DrawTextLayout(Display *display,
 				Drawable drawable, GC gc,
 				Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y,
-				int firstChar, int lastChar));
+				int firstChar, int lastChar);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_Fill3DPolygon_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_Fill3DPolygon_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 62 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_Fill3DPolygon _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border,
-				XPoint *pointPtr, int numPoints,
-				int borderWidth, int leftRelief));
+EXTERN void		Tk_Fill3DPolygon(Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable,
+				Tk_3DBorder border, XPoint *pointPtr,
+				int numPoints, int borderWidth,
+				int leftRelief);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_Fill3DRectangle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_Fill3DRectangle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 63 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_Fill3DRectangle _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+EXTERN void		Tk_Fill3DRectangle(Tk_Window tkwin,
 				Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x,
 				int y, int width, int height,
-				int borderWidth, int relief));
+				int borderWidth, int relief);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FindPhoto_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FindPhoto_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 64 */
-EXTERN Tk_PhotoHandle	Tk_FindPhoto _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST char *imageName));
+EXTERN Tk_PhotoHandle	Tk_FindPhoto(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				CONST char *imageName);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FontId_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FontId_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 65 */
-EXTERN Font		Tk_FontId _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font font));
+EXTERN Font		Tk_FontId(Tk_Font font);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_Free3DBorder_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_Free3DBorder_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 66 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_Free3DBorder _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_3DBorder border));
+EXTERN void		Tk_Free3DBorder(Tk_3DBorder border);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 67 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Pixmap bitmap));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeBitmap(Display *display, Pixmap bitmap);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 68 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeColor _ANSI_ARGS_((XColor *colorPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeColor(XColor *colorPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeColormap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeColormap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 69 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeColormap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Colormap colormap));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeColormap(Display *display, Colormap colormap);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 70 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Tk_Cursor cursor));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeCursor(Display *display, Tk_Cursor cursor);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeFont_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeFont_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 71 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeFont _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font f));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeFont(Tk_Font f);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeGC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeGC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 72 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeGC _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeGC(Display *display, GC gc);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeImage_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeImage_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 73 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Image image));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeImage(Tk_Image image);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeOptions_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeOptions_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 74 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeOptions _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_ConfigSpec *specs,
-				char *widgRec, Display *display,
-				int needFlags));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeOptions(Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec,
+				Display *display, int needFlags);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreePixmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreePixmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 75 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreePixmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Pixmap pixmap));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreePixmap(Display *display, Pixmap pixmap);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 76 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeTextLayout _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_TextLayout textLayout));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout textLayout);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeXId_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeXId_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 77 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeXId _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, XID xid));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeXId(Display *display, XID xid);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GCForColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GCForColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 78 */
-EXTERN GC		Tk_GCForColor _ANSI_ARGS_((XColor *colorPtr,
-				Drawable drawable));
+EXTERN GC		Tk_GCForColor(XColor *colorPtr, Drawable drawable);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GeometryRequest_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GeometryRequest_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 79 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_GeometryRequest _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int reqWidth, int reqHeight));
+EXTERN void		Tk_GeometryRequest(Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth,
+				int reqHeight);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_Get3DBorder_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_Get3DBorder_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 80 */
-EXTERN Tk_3DBorder	Tk_Get3DBorder _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid colorName));
+EXTERN Tk_3DBorder	Tk_Get3DBorder(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Tk_Uid colorName);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetAllBindings_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetAllBindings_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 81 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_GetAllBindings _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN void		Tk_GetAllBindings(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
-				ClientData object));
+				ClientData object);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetAnchor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetAnchor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 82 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetAnchor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST char *str, Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetAnchor(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *str,
+				Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetAtomName_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetAtomName_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 83 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_GetAtomName _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Atom atom));
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_GetAtomName(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom atom);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetBinding_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetBinding_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 84 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_GetBinding _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_GetBinding(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
-				ClientData object, CONST char *eventStr));
+				ClientData object, CONST char *eventStr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 85 */
-EXTERN Pixmap		Tk_GetBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str));
+EXTERN Pixmap		Tk_GetBitmap(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *str);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetBitmapFromData_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetBitmapFromData_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 86 */
-EXTERN Pixmap		Tk_GetBitmapFromData _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN Pixmap		Tk_GetBitmapFromData(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *source,
-				int width, int height));
+				int width, int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetCapStyle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetCapStyle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 87 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetCapStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST char *str, int *capPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetCapStyle(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *str,
+				int *capPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 88 */
-EXTERN XColor *		Tk_GetColor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid name));
+EXTERN XColor *		Tk_GetColor(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Tk_Uid name);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetColorByValue_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetColorByValue_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 89 */
-EXTERN XColor *		Tk_GetColorByValue _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				XColor *colorPtr));
+EXTERN XColor *		Tk_GetColorByValue(Tk_Window tkwin, XColor *colorPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetColormap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetColormap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 90 */
-EXTERN Colormap		Tk_GetColormap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str));
+EXTERN Colormap		Tk_GetColormap(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *str);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 91 */
-EXTERN Tk_Cursor	Tk_GetCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid str));
+EXTERN Tk_Cursor	Tk_GetCursor(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Tk_Uid str);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetCursorFromData_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetCursorFromData_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 92 */
-EXTERN Tk_Cursor	Tk_GetCursorFromData _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN Tk_Cursor	Tk_GetCursorFromData(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *source,
 				CONST char *mask, int width, int height,
-				int xHot, int yHot, Tk_Uid fg, Tk_Uid bg));
+				int xHot, int yHot, Tk_Uid fg, Tk_Uid bg);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetFont_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetFont_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 93 */
-EXTERN Tk_Font		Tk_GetFont _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str));
+EXTERN Tk_Font		Tk_GetFont(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *str);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetFontFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetFontFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 94 */
-EXTERN Tk_Font		Tk_GetFontFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN Tk_Font		Tk_GetFontFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetFontMetrics_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetFontMetrics_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 95 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_GetFontMetrics _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font font,
-				Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_GetFontMetrics(Tk_Font font,
+				Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetGC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetGC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 96 */
-EXTERN GC		Tk_GetGC _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				unsigned long valueMask, XGCValues *valuePtr));
+EXTERN GC		Tk_GetGC(Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask,
+				XGCValues *valuePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetImage_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetImage_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 97 */
-EXTERN Tk_Image		Tk_GetImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name,
+EXTERN Tk_Image		Tk_GetImage(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *name,
 				Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc,
-				ClientData clientData));
+				ClientData clientData);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetImageMasterData_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetImageMasterData_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 98 */
-EXTERN ClientData	Tk_GetImageMasterData _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name,
-				Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr));
+EXTERN ClientData	Tk_GetImageMasterData(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				CONST char *name, Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetItemTypes_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetItemTypes_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 99 */
-EXTERN Tk_ItemType *	Tk_GetItemTypes _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN Tk_ItemType *	Tk_GetItemTypes(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetJoinStyle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetJoinStyle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 100 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetJoinStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST char *str, int *joinPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetJoinStyle(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *str,
+				int *joinPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetJustify_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetJustify_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 101 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetJustify _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST char *str, Tk_Justify *justifyPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetJustify(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *str,
+				Tk_Justify *justifyPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetNumMainWindows_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetNumMainWindows_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 102 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetNumMainWindows _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetNumMainWindows(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetOption_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetOption_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 103 */
-EXTERN Tk_Uid		Tk_GetOption _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				CONST char *name, CONST char *className));
+EXTERN Tk_Uid		Tk_GetOption(Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name,
+				CONST char *className);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetPixels_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetPixels_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 104 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetPixels _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str,
-				int *intPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetPixels(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *str, int *intPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetPixmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetPixmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 105 */
-EXTERN Pixmap		Tk_GetPixmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Drawable d, int width, int height, int depth));
+EXTERN Pixmap		Tk_GetPixmap(Display *display, Drawable d, int width,
+				int height, int depth);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetRelief_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetRelief_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 106 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetRelief _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST char *name, int *reliefPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetRelief(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name,
+				int *reliefPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetRootCoords_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetRootCoords_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 107 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_GetRootCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int *xPtr, int *yPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_GetRootCoords(Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr,
+				int *yPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetScrollInfo_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetScrollInfo_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 108 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetScrollInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				int argc, CONST84 char **argv,
-				double *dblPtr, int *intPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetScrollInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc,
+				CONST84 char **argv, double *dblPtr,
+				int *intPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetScreenMM_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetScreenMM_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 109 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetScreenMM _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str,
-				double *doublePtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetScreenMM(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *str, double *doublePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetSelection_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetSelection_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 110 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target,
-				Tk_GetSelProc *proc, ClientData clientData));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetSelection(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Atom selection, Atom target,
+				Tk_GetSelProc *proc, ClientData clientData);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetUid_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetUid_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 111 */
-EXTERN Tk_Uid		Tk_GetUid _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *str));
+EXTERN Tk_Uid		Tk_GetUid(CONST char *str);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetVisual_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetVisual_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 112 */
-EXTERN Visual *		Tk_GetVisual _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str,
-				int *depthPtr, Colormap *colormapPtr));
+EXTERN Visual *		Tk_GetVisual(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *str, int *depthPtr,
+				Colormap *colormapPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetVRootGeometry_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetVRootGeometry_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 113 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_GetVRootGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr,
-				int *heightPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_GetVRootGeometry(Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr,
+				int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_Grab_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_Grab_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 114 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_Grab _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, int grabGlobal));
+EXTERN int		Tk_Grab(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				int grabGlobal);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_HandleEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_HandleEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 115 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_HandleEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *eventPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_HandleEvent(XEvent *eventPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_IdToWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_IdToWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 116 */
-EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_IdToWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Window window));
+EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_IdToWindow(Display *display, Window window);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ImageChanged_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ImageChanged_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 117 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_ImageChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_ImageMaster master,
-				int x, int y, int width, int height,
-				int imageWidth, int imageHeight));
+EXTERN void		Tk_ImageChanged(Tk_ImageMaster master, int x, int y,
+				int width, int height, int imageWidth,
+				int imageHeight);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_Init_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_Init_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 118 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_Init _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp));
+EXTERN int		Tk_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_InternAtom_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_InternAtom_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 119 */
-EXTERN Atom		Tk_InternAtom _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				CONST char *name));
+EXTERN Atom		Tk_InternAtom(Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_IntersectTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_IntersectTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 120 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_IntersectTextLayout _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y,
-				int width, int height));
+EXTERN int		Tk_IntersectTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout layout, int x,
+				int y, int width, int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_MaintainGeometry_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MaintainGeometry_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 121 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_MaintainGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window slave,
+EXTERN void		Tk_MaintainGeometry(Tk_Window slave,
 				Tk_Window master, int x, int y, int width,
-				int height));
+				int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_MainWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MainWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 122 */
-EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_MainWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp));
+EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_MainWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_MakeWindowExist_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MakeWindowExist_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 123 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_MakeWindowExist _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN void		Tk_MakeWindowExist(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ManageGeometry_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ManageGeometry_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 124 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_ManageGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tk_GeomMgr *mgrPtr, ClientData clientData));
+EXTERN void		Tk_ManageGeometry(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST Tk_GeomMgr *mgrPtr,
+				ClientData clientData);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_MapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 125 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_MapWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN void		Tk_MapWindow(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_MeasureChars_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MeasureChars_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 126 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_MeasureChars _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font tkfont,
-				CONST char *source, int numBytes,
-				int maxPixels, int flags, int *lengthPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_MeasureChars(Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char *source,
+				int numBytes, int maxPixels, int flags,
+				int *lengthPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_MoveResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MoveResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 127 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_MoveResizeWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int x, int y, int width, int height));
+EXTERN void		Tk_MoveResizeWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y,
+				int width, int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_MoveWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MoveWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 128 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_MoveWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int x,
-				int y));
+EXTERN void		Tk_MoveWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_MoveToplevelWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MoveToplevelWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 129 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_MoveToplevelWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int x, int y));
+EXTERN void		Tk_MoveToplevelWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_NameOf3DBorder_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_NameOf3DBorder_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 130 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOf3DBorder _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_3DBorder border));
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOf3DBorder(Tk_3DBorder border);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_NameOfAnchor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_NameOfAnchor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 131 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfAnchor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Anchor anchor));
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfAnchor(Tk_Anchor anchor);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_NameOfBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_NameOfBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 132 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Pixmap bitmap));
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfBitmap(Display *display, Pixmap bitmap);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_NameOfCapStyle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_NameOfCapStyle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 133 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfCapStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((int cap));
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfCapStyle(int cap);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_NameOfColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_NameOfColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 134 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfColor _ANSI_ARGS_((XColor *colorPtr));
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfColor(XColor *colorPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_NameOfCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_NameOfCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 135 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Tk_Cursor cursor));
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfCursor(Display *display,
+				Tk_Cursor cursor);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_NameOfFont_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_NameOfFont_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 136 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfFont _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font font));
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfFont(Tk_Font font);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_NameOfImage_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_NameOfImage_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 137 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfImage _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster));
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfImage(Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_NameOfJoinStyle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_NameOfJoinStyle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 138 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfJoinStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((int join));
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfJoinStyle(int join);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_NameOfJustify_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_NameOfJustify_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 139 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfJustify _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_Justify justify));
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfJustify(Tk_Justify justify);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_NameOfRelief_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_NameOfRelief_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 140 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfRelief _ANSI_ARGS_((int relief));
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfRelief(int relief);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_NameToWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_NameToWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 141 */
-EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_NameToWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST char *pathName, Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_NameToWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				CONST char *pathName, Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_OwnSelection_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_OwnSelection_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 142 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_OwnSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Atom selection, Tk_LostSelProc *proc,
-				ClientData clientData));
+EXTERN void		Tk_OwnSelection(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection,
+				Tk_LostSelProc *proc, ClientData clientData);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ParseArgv_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ParseArgv_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 143 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_ParseArgv _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, int *argcPtr,
-				CONST84 char **argv, Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable,
-				int flags));
+EXTERN int		Tk_ParseArgv(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				int *argcPtr, CONST84 char **argv,
+				Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable, int flags);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 144 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite(Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
 				Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y,
-				int width, int height));
+				int width, int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 145 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite _ANSI_ARGS_((
+EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite(
 				Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
 				Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y,
 				int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY,
-				int subsampleX, int subsampleY));
+				int subsampleX, int subsampleY);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoGetImage_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PhotoGetImage_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 146 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_PhotoGetImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
-				Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_PhotoGetImage(Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+				Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoBlank_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PhotoBlank_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 147 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoBlank _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle));
+EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoBlank(Tk_PhotoHandle handle);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 148 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoExpand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
-				int width, int height));
+EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+				int width, int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoGetSize_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PhotoGetSize_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 149 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoGetSize _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
-				int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoGetSize(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int *widthPtr,
+				int *heightPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 150 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoSetSize _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
-				int width, int height));
+EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+				int width, int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PointToChar_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PointToChar_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 151 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_PointToChar _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_TextLayout layout,
-				int x, int y));
+EXTERN int		Tk_PointToChar(Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PostscriptFontName_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PostscriptFontName_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 152 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_PostscriptFontName _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font tkfont,
-				Tcl_DString *dsPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_PostscriptFontName(Tk_Font tkfont,
+				Tcl_DString *dsPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PreserveColormap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PreserveColormap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 153 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_PreserveColormap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Colormap colormap));
+EXTERN void		Tk_PreserveColormap(Display *display,
+				Colormap colormap);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_QueueWindowEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_QueueWindowEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 154 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_QueueWindowEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *eventPtr,
-				Tcl_QueuePosition position));
+EXTERN void		Tk_QueueWindowEvent(XEvent *eventPtr,
+				Tcl_QueuePosition position);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_RedrawImage_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_RedrawImage_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 155 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_RedrawImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Image image,
-				int imageX, int imageY, int width,
-				int height, Drawable drawable, int drawableX,
-				int drawableY));
+EXTERN void		Tk_RedrawImage(Tk_Image image, int imageX,
+				int imageY, int width, int height,
+				Drawable drawable, int drawableX,
+				int drawableY);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 156 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_ResizeWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int width, int height));
+EXTERN void		Tk_ResizeWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int width,
+				int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_RestackWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_RestackWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 157 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_RestackWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int aboveBelow, Tk_Window other));
+EXTERN int		Tk_RestackWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int aboveBelow,
+				Tk_Window other);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_RestrictEvents_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_RestrictEvents_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 158 */
-EXTERN Tk_RestrictProc * Tk_RestrictEvents _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_RestrictProc *proc, ClientData arg,
-				ClientData *prevArgPtr));
+EXTERN Tk_RestrictProc * Tk_RestrictEvents(Tk_RestrictProc *proc,
+				ClientData arg, ClientData *prevArgPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SafeInit_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SafeInit_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 159 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_SafeInit _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp));
+EXTERN int		Tk_SafeInit(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetAppName_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetAppName_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 160 */
-EXTERN CONST char *	Tk_SetAppName _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				CONST char *name));
+EXTERN CONST char *	Tk_SetAppName(Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 161 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Tk_3DBorder border);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetClass_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetClass_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 162 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetClass _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				CONST char *className));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetClass(Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *className);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetGrid_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetGrid_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 163 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetGrid _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int reqWidth, int reqHeight, int gridWidth,
-				int gridHeight));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetGrid(Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth,
+				int reqHeight, int gridWidth, int gridHeight);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetInternalBorder_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetInternalBorder_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 164 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetInternalBorder _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int width));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetInternalBorder(Tk_Window tkwin, int width);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetWindowBackground_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetWindowBackground_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 165 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetWindowBackground _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				unsigned long pixel));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetWindowBackground(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				unsigned long pixel);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 166 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_Window tkwin, Pixmap pixmap));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Pixmap pixmap);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetWindowBorder_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetWindowBorder_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 167 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetWindowBorder _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				unsigned long pixel));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetWindowBorder(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				unsigned long pixel);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 168 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int width));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth(Tk_Window tkwin, int width);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 169 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_Window tkwin, Pixmap pixmap));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Pixmap pixmap);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetWindowColormap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetWindowColormap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 170 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetWindowColormap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Colormap colormap));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetWindowColormap(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Colormap colormap);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetWindowVisual_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetWindowVisual_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 171 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_SetWindowVisual _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Visual *visual, int depth, Colormap colormap));
+EXTERN int		Tk_SetWindowVisual(Tk_Window tkwin, Visual *visual,
+				int depth, Colormap colormap);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SizeOfBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SizeOfBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 172 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SizeOfBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Pixmap bitmap, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SizeOfBitmap(Display *display, Pixmap bitmap,
+				int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SizeOfImage_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SizeOfImage_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 173 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SizeOfImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Image image,
-				int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SizeOfImage(Tk_Image image, int *widthPtr,
+				int *heightPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_StrictMotif_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_StrictMotif_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 174 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_StrictMotif _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN int		Tk_StrictMotif(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 175 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_TextLayout layout));
+EXTERN void		Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_TextLayout layout);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_TextWidth_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_TextWidth_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 176 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_TextWidth _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font font,
-				CONST char *str, int numBytes));
+EXTERN int		Tk_TextWidth(Tk_Font font, CONST char *str,
+				int numBytes);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_UndefineCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_UndefineCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 177 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_UndefineCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window window));
+EXTERN void		Tk_UndefineCursor(Tk_Window window);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_UnderlineChars_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_UnderlineChars_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 178 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_UnderlineChars _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
+EXTERN void		Tk_UnderlineChars(Display *display,
 				Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
 				CONST char *source, int x, int y,
-				int firstByte, int lastByte));
+				int firstByte, int lastByte);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_UnderlineTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_UnderlineTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 179 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_UnderlineTextLayout _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
+EXTERN void		Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(Display *display,
 				Drawable drawable, GC gc,
 				Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y,
-				int underline));
+				int underline);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_Ungrab_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_Ungrab_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 180 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_Ungrab _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN void		Tk_Ungrab(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_UnmaintainGeometry_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_UnmaintainGeometry_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 181 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_UnmaintainGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window slave,
-				Tk_Window master));
+EXTERN void		Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(Tk_Window slave,
+				Tk_Window master);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_UnmapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_UnmapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 182 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_UnmapWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN void		Tk_UnmapWindow(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_UnsetGrid_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_UnsetGrid_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 183 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_UnsetGrid _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN void		Tk_UnsetGrid(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_UpdatePointer_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_UpdatePointer_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 184 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_UpdatePointer _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int x,
-				int y, int state));
+EXTERN void		Tk_UpdatePointer(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y,
+				int state);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 185 */
-EXTERN Pixmap		Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN Pixmap		Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 186 */
-EXTERN Tk_3DBorder	Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN Tk_3DBorder	Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_AllocColorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_AllocColorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 187 */
-EXTERN XColor *		Tk_AllocColorFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN XColor *		Tk_AllocColorFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_AllocCursorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_AllocCursorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 188 */
-EXTERN Tk_Cursor	Tk_AllocCursorFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN Tk_Cursor	Tk_AllocCursorFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_AllocFontFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_AllocFontFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 189 */
-EXTERN Tk_Font		Tk_AllocFontFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN Tk_Font		Tk_AllocFontFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateOptionTable_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateOptionTable_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 190 */
-EXTERN Tk_OptionTable	Tk_CreateOptionTable _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST Tk_OptionSpec *templatePtr));
+EXTERN Tk_OptionTable	Tk_CreateOptionTable(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				CONST Tk_OptionSpec *templatePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DeleteOptionTable_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DeleteOptionTable_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 191 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteOptionTable _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_OptionTable optionTable));
+EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteOptionTable(Tk_OptionTable optionTable);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 192 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 193 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeColorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeColorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 194 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeColorFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeColorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeConfigOptions_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeConfigOptions_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 195 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeConfigOptions _ANSI_ARGS_((char *recordPtr,
-				Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeConfigOptions(char *recordPtr,
+				Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeSavedOptions_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeSavedOptions_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 196 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeSavedOptions _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeSavedOptions(Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeCursorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeCursorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 197 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeCursorFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeCursorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeFontFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeFontFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 198 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeFontFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeFontFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 199 */
-EXTERN Tk_3DBorder	Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN Tk_3DBorder	Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetAnchorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetAnchorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 200 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetAnchorFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetBitmapFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetBitmapFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 201 */
-EXTERN Pixmap		Tk_GetBitmapFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN Pixmap		Tk_GetBitmapFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetColorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetColorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 202 */
-EXTERN XColor *		Tk_GetColorFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN XColor *		Tk_GetColorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetCursorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetCursorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 203 */
-EXTERN Tk_Cursor	Tk_GetCursorFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN Tk_Cursor	Tk_GetCursorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetOptionInfo_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetOptionInfo_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 204 */
-EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	Tk_GetOptionInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable,
-				Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	Tk_GetOptionInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr,
+				Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj *namePtr,
+				Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetOptionValue_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetOptionValue_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 205 */
-EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	Tk_GetOptionValue _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	Tk_GetOptionValue(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable,
-				Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin));
+				Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetJustifyFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetJustifyFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 206 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetJustifyFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Justify *justifyPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetJustifyFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Justify *justifyPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetMMFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetMMFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 207 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetMMFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
-				double *doublePtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetMMFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr, double *doublePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetPixelsFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetPixelsFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 208 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetPixelsFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
-				int *intPtr));
+				int *intPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetReliefFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetReliefFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 209 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetReliefFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *resultPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetReliefFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *resultPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetScrollInfoObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetScrollInfoObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 210 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetScrollInfoObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
-				double *dblPtr, int *intPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+				Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], double *dblPtr,
+				int *intPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_InitOptions_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_InitOptions_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 211 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_InitOptions _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken,
-				Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN int		Tk_InitOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr,
+				Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_MainEx_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MainEx_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 212 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_MainEx _ANSI_ARGS_((int argc, char **argv,
+EXTERN void		Tk_MainEx(int argc, char **argv,
 				Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc,
-				Tcl_Interp *interp));
+				Tcl_Interp *interp);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_RestoreSavedOptions_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_RestoreSavedOptions_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 213 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_RestoreSavedOptions _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetOptions_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetOptions_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 214 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_SetOptions _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable,
-				int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
-				Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr,
-				int *maskPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_SetOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr,
+				Tk_OptionTable optionTable, int objc,
+				Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr, int *maskPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_InitConsoleChannels_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_InitConsoleChannels_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 215 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_InitConsoleChannels _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp));
+EXTERN void		Tk_InitConsoleChannels(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateConsoleWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateConsoleWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 216 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_CreateConsoleWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp));
+EXTERN int		Tk_CreateConsoleWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateSmoothMethod_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateSmoothMethod_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 217 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CreateSmoothMethod _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_SmoothMethod *method));
+EXTERN void		Tk_CreateSmoothMethod(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_SmoothMethod *method);
+#endif
 /* Slot 218 is reserved */
 /* Slot 219 is reserved */
+#ifndef Tk_GetDash_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetDash_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 220 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetDash _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST char *value, Tk_Dash *dash));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetDash(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *value,
+				Tk_Dash *dash);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateOutline_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateOutline_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 221 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CreateOutline _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Outline *outline));
+EXTERN void		Tk_CreateOutline(Tk_Outline *outline);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DeleteOutline_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DeleteOutline_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 222 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteOutline _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Tk_Outline *outline));
+EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteOutline(Display *display,
+				Tk_Outline *outline);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ConfigOutlineGC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ConfigOutlineGC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 223 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_ConfigOutlineGC _ANSI_ARGS_((XGCValues *gcValues,
+EXTERN int		Tk_ConfigOutlineGC(XGCValues *gcValues,
 				Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *item,
-				Tk_Outline *outline));
+				Tk_Outline *outline);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ChangeOutlineGC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ChangeOutlineGC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 224 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_ChangeOutlineGC _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-				Tk_Item *item, Tk_Outline *outline));
+EXTERN int		Tk_ChangeOutlineGC(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *item,
+				Tk_Outline *outline);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ResetOutlineGC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ResetOutlineGC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 225 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_ResetOutlineGC _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-				Tk_Item *item, Tk_Outline *outline));
+EXTERN int		Tk_ResetOutlineGC(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *item,
+				Tk_Outline *outline);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasPsOutline_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasPsOutline_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 226 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasPsOutline _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-				Tk_Item *item, Tk_Outline *outline));
+EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasPsOutline(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *item,
+				Tk_Outline *outline);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetTSOrigin_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetTSOrigin_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 227 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetTSOrigin _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc,
-				int x, int y));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetTSOrigin(Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int x, int y);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 228 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
-				Tcl_Obj *obj, double *doublePtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Canvas canvas, Tcl_Obj *obj,
+				double *doublePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CanvasSetOffset_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CanvasSetOffset_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 229 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CanvasSetOffset _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-				GC gc, Tk_TSOffset *offset));
+EXTERN void		Tk_CanvasSetOffset(Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc,
+				Tk_TSOffset *offset);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DitherPhoto_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DitherPhoto_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 230 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DitherPhoto _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
-				int x, int y, int width, int height));
+EXTERN void		Tk_DitherPhoto(Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int x, int y,
+				int width, int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PostscriptBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PostscriptBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 231 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_PostscriptBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN int		Tk_PostscriptBitmap(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo,
 				Pixmap bitmap, int startX, int startY,
-				int width, int height));
+				int width, int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PostscriptColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PostscriptColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 232 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_PostscriptColor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, XColor *colorPtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_PostscriptColor(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, XColor *colorPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PostscriptFont_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PostscriptFont_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 233 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_PostscriptFont _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, Tk_Font font));
+EXTERN int		Tk_PostscriptFont(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, Tk_Font font);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PostscriptImage_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PostscriptImage_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 234 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_PostscriptImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Image image,
+EXTERN int		Tk_PostscriptImage(Tk_Image image,
 				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
 				Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo, int x, int y,
-				int width, int height, int prepass));
+				int width, int height, int prepass);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PostscriptPath_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PostscriptPath_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 235 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_PostscriptPath _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN void		Tk_PostscriptPath(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, double *coordPtr,
-				int numPoints));
+				int numPoints);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PostscriptStipple_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PostscriptStipple_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 236 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_PostscriptStipple _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN int		Tk_PostscriptStipple(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo,
-				Pixmap bitmap));
+				Pixmap bitmap);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PostscriptY_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PostscriptY_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 237 */
-EXTERN double		Tk_PostscriptY _ANSI_ARGS_((double y,
-				Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo));
+EXTERN double		Tk_PostscriptY(double y, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PostscriptPhoto_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PostscriptPhoto_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 238 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_PostscriptPhoto _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN int		Tk_PostscriptPhoto(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
 				Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, int width,
-				int height));
+				int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 239 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc));
+EXTERN void		Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler(
+				Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 240 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc));
+EXTERN void		Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler(
+				Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 241 */
-EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window parent,
-				CONST char *screenName));
+EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Window parent, CONST char *screenName);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetClassProcs_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetClassProcs_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 242 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetClassProcs _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetClassProcs(Tk_Window tkwin,
 				Tk_ClassProcs *procs,
-				ClientData instanceData));
+				ClientData instanceData);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetInternalBorderEx_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetInternalBorderEx_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 243 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetInternalBorderEx _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int left, int right, int top, int bottom));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetInternalBorderEx(Tk_Window tkwin, int left,
+				int right, int top, int bottom);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 244 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				int minWidth, int minHeight);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_SetCaretPos_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_SetCaretPos_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 245 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_SetCaretPos _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int x,
-				int y, int height));
+EXTERN void		Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y,
+				int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 246 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoPutBlock _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
 				Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y,
-				int width, int height, int compRule));
+				int width, int height, int compRule);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 247 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+EXTERN void		Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic(Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
 				Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y,
 				int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY,
-				int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule));
+				int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CollapseMotionEvents_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CollapseMotionEvents_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 248 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_CollapseMotionEvents _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Display *display, int collapse));
+EXTERN int		Tk_CollapseMotionEvents(Display *display,
+				int collapse);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_RegisterStyleEngine_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_RegisterStyleEngine_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 249 */
-EXTERN Tk_StyleEngine	Tk_RegisterStyleEngine _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *name,
-				Tk_StyleEngine parent));
+EXTERN Tk_StyleEngine	Tk_RegisterStyleEngine(CONST char *name,
+				Tk_StyleEngine parent);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetStyleEngine_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetStyleEngine_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 250 */
-EXTERN Tk_StyleEngine	Tk_GetStyleEngine _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *name));
+EXTERN Tk_StyleEngine	Tk_GetStyleEngine(CONST char *name);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_RegisterStyledElement_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_RegisterStyledElement_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 251 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_RegisterStyledElement _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_StyleEngine engine,
-				Tk_ElementSpec *templatePtr));
+EXTERN int		Tk_RegisterStyledElement(Tk_StyleEngine engine,
+				Tk_ElementSpec *templatePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetElementId_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetElementId_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 252 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetElementId _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *name));
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetElementId(CONST char *name);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateStyle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateStyle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 253 */
-EXTERN Tk_Style		Tk_CreateStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *name,
-				Tk_StyleEngine engine, ClientData clientData));
+EXTERN Tk_Style		Tk_CreateStyle(CONST char *name,
+				Tk_StyleEngine engine, ClientData clientData);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetStyle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetStyle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 254 */
-EXTERN Tk_Style		Tk_GetStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST char *name));
+EXTERN Tk_Style		Tk_GetStyle(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeStyle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeStyle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 255 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Style style));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeStyle(Tk_Style style);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_NameOfStyle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_NameOfStyle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 256 */
-EXTERN CONST char *	Tk_NameOfStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Style style));
+EXTERN CONST char *	Tk_NameOfStyle(Tk_Style style);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_AllocStyleFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_AllocStyleFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 257 */
-EXTERN Tk_Style		Tk_AllocStyleFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN Tk_Style		Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetStyleFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetStyleFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 258 */
-EXTERN Tk_Style		Tk_GetStyleFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN Tk_Style		Tk_GetStyleFromObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_FreeStyleFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_FreeStyleFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 259 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_FreeStyleFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+EXTERN void		Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetStyledElement_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetStyledElement_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 260 */
-EXTERN Tk_StyledElement	 Tk_GetStyledElement _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Style style,
-				int elementId, Tk_OptionTable optionTable));
+EXTERN Tk_StyledElement	 Tk_GetStyledElement(Tk_Style style, int elementId,
+				Tk_OptionTable optionTable);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetElementSize_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetElementSize_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 261 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_GetElementSize _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Style style,
+EXTERN void		Tk_GetElementSize(Tk_Style style,
 				Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr,
 				Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height,
-				int inner, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
+				int inner, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetElementBox_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetElementBox_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 262 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_GetElementBox _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Style style,
+EXTERN void		Tk_GetElementBox(Tk_Style style,
 				Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr,
 				Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width,
 				int height, int inner, int *xPtr, int *yPtr,
-				int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
+				int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetElementBorderWidth_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetElementBorderWidth_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 263 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_GetElementBorderWidth _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Style style,
+EXTERN int		Tk_GetElementBorderWidth(Tk_Style style,
 				Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr,
-				Tk_Window tkwin));
+				Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_DrawElement_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_DrawElement_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 264 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_DrawElement _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Style style,
+EXTERN void		Tk_DrawElement(Tk_Style style,
 				Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr,
 				Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, int x, int y,
-				int width, int height, int state));
+				int width, int height, int state);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoExpand_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PhotoExpand_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 265 */
+EXTERN int		Tk_PhotoExpand(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoPutBlock_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PhotoPutBlock_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 266 */
+EXTERN int		Tk_PhotoPutBlock(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+				Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y,
+				int width, int height, int compRule);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 267 */
+EXTERN int		Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+				Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y,
+				int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY,
+				int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoSetSize_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PhotoSetSize_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 268 */
+EXTERN int		Tk_PhotoSetSize(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetUserInactiveTime_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetUserInactiveTime_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 269 */
+EXTERN long		Tk_GetUserInactiveTime(Display *dpy);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 270 */
+EXTERN void		Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime(Display *dpy);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_Interp_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_Interp_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 271 */
+EXTERN Tcl_Interp *	Tk_Interp(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateOldImageType_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateOldImageType_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 272 */
+EXTERN void		Tk_CreateOldImageType(Tk_ImageType *typePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 273 */
+EXTERN void		Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat(
+				Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr);
+#endif
 
 typedef struct TkStubHooks {
     struct TkPlatStubs *tkPlatStubs;
@@ -917,271 +1686,280 @@ typedef struct TkStubs {
     int magic;
     struct TkStubHooks *hooks;
 
-    void (*tk_MainLoop) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 0 */
-    XColor * (*tk_3DBorderColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_3DBorder border)); /* 1 */
-    GC (*tk_3DBorderGC) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border, int which)); /* 2 */
-    void (*tk_3DHorizontalBevel) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int leftIn, int rightIn, int topBevel, int relief)); /* 3 */
-    void (*tk_3DVerticalBevel) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int leftBevel, int relief)); /* 4 */
-    void (*tk_AddOption) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name, CONST char *value, int priority)); /* 5 */
-    void (*tk_BindEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, XEvent *eventPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int numObjects, ClientData *objectPtr)); /* 6 */
-    void (*tk_CanvasDrawableCoords) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, double x, double y, short *drawableXPtr, short *drawableYPtr)); /* 7 */
-    void (*tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2)); /* 8 */
-    int (*tk_CanvasGetCoord) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, CONST char *str, double *doublePtr)); /* 9 */
-    Tk_CanvasTextInfo * (*tk_CanvasGetTextInfo) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas)); /* 10 */
-    int (*tk_CanvasPsBitmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Pixmap bitmap, int x, int y, int width, int height)); /* 11 */
-    int (*tk_CanvasPsColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, XColor *colorPtr)); /* 12 */
-    int (*tk_CanvasPsFont) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Font font)); /* 13 */
-    void (*tk_CanvasPsPath) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr, int numPoints)); /* 14 */
-    int (*tk_CanvasPsStipple) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Pixmap bitmap)); /* 15 */
-    double (*tk_CanvasPsY) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, double y)); /* 16 */
-    void (*tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc)); /* 17 */
-    int (*tk_CanvasTagsParseProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)); /* 18 */
-    char * (*tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)); /* 19 */
-    Tk_Window (*tk_CanvasTkwin) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas)); /* 20 */
-    void (*tk_CanvasWindowCoords) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, double x, double y, short *screenXPtr, short *screenYPtr)); /* 21 */
-    void (*tk_ChangeWindowAttributes) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XSetWindowAttributes *attsPtr)); /* 22 */
-    int (*tk_CharBbox) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_TextLayout layout, int index, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)); /* 23 */
-    void (*tk_ClearSelection) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection)); /* 24 */
-    int (*tk_ClipboardAppend) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Atom target, Atom format, char *buffer)); /* 25 */
-    int (*tk_ClipboardClear) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 26 */
-    int (*tk_ConfigureInfo) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, CONST char *argvName, int flags)); /* 27 */
-    int (*tk_ConfigureValue) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, CONST char *argvName, int flags)); /* 28 */
-    int (*tk_ConfigureWidget) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, int argc, CONST84 char **argv, char *widgRec, int flags)); /* 29 */
-    void (*tk_ConfigureWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned int valueMask, XWindowChanges *valuePtr)); /* 30 */
-    Tk_TextLayout (*tk_ComputeTextLayout) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font font, CONST char *str, int numChars, int wrapLength, Tk_Justify justify, int flags, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)); /* 31 */
-    Tk_Window (*tk_CoordsToWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((int rootX, int rootY, Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 32 */
-    unsigned long (*tk_CreateBinding) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, CONST char *eventStr, CONST char *script, int append)); /* 33 */
-    Tk_BindingTable (*tk_CreateBindingTable) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp)); /* 34 */
-    Tk_ErrorHandler (*tk_CreateErrorHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, int errNum, int request, int minorCode, Tk_ErrorProc *errorProc, ClientData clientData)); /* 35 */
-    void (*tk_CreateEventHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window token, unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc *proc, ClientData clientData)); /* 36 */
-    void (*tk_CreateGenericHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_GenericProc *proc, ClientData clientData)); /* 37 */
-    void (*tk_CreateImageType) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_ImageType *typePtr)); /* 38 */
-    void (*tk_CreateItemType) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_ItemType *typePtr)); /* 39 */
-    void (*tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr)); /* 40 */
-    void (*tk_CreateSelHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target, Tk_SelectionProc *proc, ClientData clientData, Atom format)); /* 41 */
-    Tk_Window (*tk_CreateWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window parent, CONST char *name, CONST char *screenName)); /* 42 */
-    Tk_Window (*tk_CreateWindowFromPath) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *pathName, CONST char *screenName)); /* 43 */
-    int (*tk_DefineBitmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name, CONST char *source, int width, int height)); /* 44 */
-    void (*tk_DefineCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window window, Tk_Cursor cursor)); /* 45 */
-    void (*tk_DeleteAllBindings) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object)); /* 46 */
-    int (*tk_DeleteBinding) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, CONST char *eventStr)); /* 47 */
-    void (*tk_DeleteBindingTable) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_BindingTable bindingTable)); /* 48 */
-    void (*tk_DeleteErrorHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_ErrorHandler handler)); /* 49 */
-    void (*tk_DeleteEventHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window token, unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc *proc, ClientData clientData)); /* 50 */
-    void (*tk_DeleteGenericHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_GenericProc *proc, ClientData clientData)); /* 51 */
-    void (*tk_DeleteImage) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name)); /* 52 */
-    void (*tk_DeleteSelHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target)); /* 53 */
-    void (*tk_DestroyWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 54 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_DisplayName) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 55 */
-    int (*tk_DistanceToTextLayout) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y)); /* 56 */
-    void (*tk_Draw3DPolygon) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, XPoint *pointPtr, int numPoints, int borderWidth, int leftRelief)); /* 57 */
-    void (*tk_Draw3DRectangle) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int borderWidth, int relief)); /* 58 */
-    void (*tk_DrawChars) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char *source, int numBytes, int x, int y)); /* 59 */
-    void (*tk_DrawFocusHighlight) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int width, Drawable drawable)); /* 60 */
-    void (*tk_DrawTextLayout) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int firstChar, int lastChar)); /* 61 */
-    void (*tk_Fill3DPolygon) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, XPoint *pointPtr, int numPoints, int borderWidth, int leftRelief)); /* 62 */
-    void (*tk_Fill3DRectangle) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int borderWidth, int relief)); /* 63 */
-    Tk_PhotoHandle (*tk_FindPhoto) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *imageName)); /* 64 */
-    Font (*tk_FontId) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font font)); /* 65 */
-    void (*tk_Free3DBorder) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_3DBorder border)); /* 66 */
-    void (*tk_FreeBitmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Pixmap bitmap)); /* 67 */
-    void (*tk_FreeColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((XColor *colorPtr)); /* 68 */
-    void (*tk_FreeColormap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Colormap colormap)); /* 69 */
-    void (*tk_FreeCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Tk_Cursor cursor)); /* 70 */
-    void (*tk_FreeFont) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font f)); /* 71 */
-    void (*tk_FreeGC) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc)); /* 72 */
-    void (*tk_FreeImage) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Image image)); /* 73 */
-    void (*tk_FreeOptions) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, Display *display, int needFlags)); /* 74 */
-    void (*tk_FreePixmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Pixmap pixmap)); /* 75 */
-    void (*tk_FreeTextLayout) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_TextLayout textLayout)); /* 76 */
-    void (*tk_FreeXId) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, XID xid)); /* 77 */
-    GC (*tk_GCForColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((XColor *colorPtr, Drawable drawable)); /* 78 */
-    void (*tk_GeometryRequest) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight)); /* 79 */
-    Tk_3DBorder (*tk_Get3DBorder) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid colorName)); /* 80 */
-    void (*tk_GetAllBindings) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object)); /* 81 */
-    int (*tk_GetAnchor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *str, Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr)); /* 82 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_GetAtomName) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Atom atom)); /* 83 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_GetBinding) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, CONST char *eventStr)); /* 84 */
-    Pixmap (*tk_GetBitmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str)); /* 85 */
-    Pixmap (*tk_GetBitmapFromData) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *source, int width, int height)); /* 86 */
-    int (*tk_GetCapStyle) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *str, int *capPtr)); /* 87 */
-    XColor * (*tk_GetColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid name)); /* 88 */
-    XColor * (*tk_GetColorByValue) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, XColor *colorPtr)); /* 89 */
-    Colormap (*tk_GetColormap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str)); /* 90 */
-    Tk_Cursor (*tk_GetCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid str)); /* 91 */
-    Tk_Cursor (*tk_GetCursorFromData) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *source, CONST char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, Tk_Uid fg, Tk_Uid bg)); /* 92 */
-    Tk_Font (*tk_GetFont) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str)); /* 93 */
-    Tk_Font (*tk_GetFontFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 94 */
-    void (*tk_GetFontMetrics) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font font, Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr)); /* 95 */
-    GC (*tk_GetGC) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XGCValues *valuePtr)); /* 96 */
-    Tk_Image (*tk_GetImage) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name, Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc, ClientData clientData)); /* 97 */
-    ClientData (*tk_GetImageMasterData) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name, Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr)); /* 98 */
-    Tk_ItemType * (*tk_GetItemTypes) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 99 */
-    int (*tk_GetJoinStyle) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *str, int *joinPtr)); /* 100 */
-    int (*tk_GetJustify) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *str, Tk_Justify *justifyPtr)); /* 101 */
-    int (*tk_GetNumMainWindows) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 102 */
-    Tk_Uid (*tk_GetOption) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name, CONST char *className)); /* 103 */
-    int (*tk_GetPixels) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str, int *intPtr)); /* 104 */
-    Pixmap (*tk_GetPixmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d, int width, int height, int depth)); /* 105 */
-    int (*tk_GetRelief) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name, int *reliefPtr)); /* 106 */
-    void (*tk_GetRootCoords) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr)); /* 107 */
-    int (*tk_GetScrollInfo) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST84 char **argv, double *dblPtr, int *intPtr)); /* 108 */
-    int (*tk_GetScreenMM) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str, double *doublePtr)); /* 109 */
-    int (*tk_GetSelection) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target, Tk_GetSelProc *proc, ClientData clientData)); /* 110 */
-    Tk_Uid (*tk_GetUid) _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *str)); /* 111 */
-    Visual * (*tk_GetVisual) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str, int *depthPtr, Colormap *colormapPtr)); /* 112 */
-    void (*tk_GetVRootGeometry) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)); /* 113 */
-    int (*tk_Grab) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int grabGlobal)); /* 114 */
-    void (*tk_HandleEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *eventPtr)); /* 115 */
-    Tk_Window (*tk_IdToWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Window window)); /* 116 */
-    void (*tk_ImageChanged) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_ImageMaster master, int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight)); /* 117 */
-    int (*tk_Init) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp)); /* 118 */
-    Atom (*tk_InternAtom) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name)); /* 119 */
-    int (*tk_IntersectTextLayout) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int width, int height)); /* 120 */
-    void (*tk_MaintainGeometry) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window slave, Tk_Window master, int x, int y, int width, int height)); /* 121 */
-    Tk_Window (*tk_MainWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp)); /* 122 */
-    void (*tk_MakeWindowExist) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 123 */
-    void (*tk_ManageGeometry) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_GeomMgr *mgrPtr, ClientData clientData)); /* 124 */
-    void (*tk_MapWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 125 */
-    int (*tk_MeasureChars) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char *source, int numBytes, int maxPixels, int flags, int *lengthPtr)); /* 126 */
-    void (*tk_MoveResizeWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height)); /* 127 */
-    void (*tk_MoveWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y)); /* 128 */
-    void (*tk_MoveToplevelWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y)); /* 129 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOf3DBorder) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_3DBorder border)); /* 130 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfAnchor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Anchor anchor)); /* 131 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfBitmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Pixmap bitmap)); /* 132 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfCapStyle) _ANSI_ARGS_((int cap)); /* 133 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((XColor *colorPtr)); /* 134 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Tk_Cursor cursor)); /* 135 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfFont) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font font)); /* 136 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfImage) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster)); /* 137 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfJoinStyle) _ANSI_ARGS_((int join)); /* 138 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfJustify) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Justify justify)); /* 139 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfRelief) _ANSI_ARGS_((int relief)); /* 140 */
-    Tk_Window (*tk_NameToWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *pathName, Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 141 */
-    void (*tk_OwnSelection) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Tk_LostSelProc *proc, ClientData clientData)); /* 142 */
-    int (*tk_ParseArgv) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int *argcPtr, CONST84 char **argv, Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable, int flags)); /* 143 */
-    void (*tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height)); /* 144 */
-    void (*tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY)); /* 145 */
-    int (*tk_PhotoGetImage) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)); /* 146 */
-    void (*tk_PhotoBlank) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle)); /* 147 */
-    void (*tk_PhotoExpand) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height)); /* 148 */
-    void (*tk_PhotoGetSize) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)); /* 149 */
-    void (*tk_PhotoSetSize) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height)); /* 150 */
-    int (*tk_PointToChar) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y)); /* 151 */
-    int (*tk_PostscriptFontName) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font tkfont, Tcl_DString *dsPtr)); /* 152 */
-    void (*tk_PreserveColormap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Colormap colormap)); /* 153 */
-    void (*tk_QueueWindowEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_QueuePosition position)); /* 154 */
-    void (*tk_RedrawImage) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Image image, int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height, Drawable drawable, int drawableX, int drawableY)); /* 155 */
-    void (*tk_ResizeWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height)); /* 156 */
-    int (*tk_RestackWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int aboveBelow, Tk_Window other)); /* 157 */
-    Tk_RestrictProc * (*tk_RestrictEvents) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_RestrictProc *proc, ClientData arg, ClientData *prevArgPtr)); /* 158 */
-    int (*tk_SafeInit) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp)); /* 159 */
-    CONST char * (*tk_SetAppName) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name)); /* 160 */
-    void (*tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border)); /* 161 */
-    void (*tk_SetClass) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *className)); /* 162 */
-    void (*tk_SetGrid) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight, int gridWidth, int gridHeight)); /* 163 */
-    void (*tk_SetInternalBorder) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int width)); /* 164 */
-    void (*tk_SetWindowBackground) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long pixel)); /* 165 */
-    void (*tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Pixmap pixmap)); /* 166 */
-    void (*tk_SetWindowBorder) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long pixel)); /* 167 */
-    void (*tk_SetWindowBorderWidth) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int width)); /* 168 */
-    void (*tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Pixmap pixmap)); /* 169 */
-    void (*tk_SetWindowColormap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap)); /* 170 */
-    int (*tk_SetWindowVisual) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Visual *visual, int depth, Colormap colormap)); /* 171 */
-    void (*tk_SizeOfBitmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Pixmap bitmap, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)); /* 172 */
-    void (*tk_SizeOfImage) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Image image, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)); /* 173 */
-    int (*tk_StrictMotif) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 174 */
-    void (*tk_TextLayoutToPostscript) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_TextLayout layout)); /* 175 */
-    int (*tk_TextWidth) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font font, CONST char *str, int numBytes)); /* 176 */
-    void (*tk_UndefineCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window window)); /* 177 */
-    void (*tk_UnderlineChars) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char *source, int x, int y, int firstByte, int lastByte)); /* 178 */
-    void (*tk_UnderlineTextLayout) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int underline)); /* 179 */
-    void (*tk_Ungrab) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 180 */
-    void (*tk_UnmaintainGeometry) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window slave, Tk_Window master)); /* 181 */
-    void (*tk_UnmapWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 182 */
-    void (*tk_UnsetGrid) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 183 */
-    void (*tk_UpdatePointer) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int state)); /* 184 */
-    Pixmap (*tk_AllocBitmapFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 185 */
-    Tk_3DBorder (*tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 186 */
-    XColor * (*tk_AllocColorFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 187 */
-    Tk_Cursor (*tk_AllocCursorFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 188 */
-    Tk_Font (*tk_AllocFontFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 189 */
-    Tk_OptionTable (*tk_CreateOptionTable) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST Tk_OptionSpec *templatePtr)); /* 190 */
-    void (*tk_DeleteOptionTable) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_OptionTable optionTable)); /* 191 */
-    void (*tk_Free3DBorderFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 192 */
-    void (*tk_FreeBitmapFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 193 */
-    void (*tk_FreeColorFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 194 */
-    void (*tk_FreeConfigOptions) _ANSI_ARGS_((char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 195 */
-    void (*tk_FreeSavedOptions) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr)); /* 196 */
-    void (*tk_FreeCursorFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 197 */
-    void (*tk_FreeFontFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 198 */
-    Tk_3DBorder (*tk_Get3DBorderFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 199 */
-    int (*tk_GetAnchorFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr)); /* 200 */
-    Pixmap (*tk_GetBitmapFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 201 */
-    XColor * (*tk_GetColorFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 202 */
-    Tk_Cursor (*tk_GetCursorFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 203 */
-    Tcl_Obj * (*tk_GetOptionInfo) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 204 */
-    Tcl_Obj * (*tk_GetOptionValue) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 205 */
-    int (*tk_GetJustifyFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Justify *justifyPtr)); /* 206 */
-    int (*tk_GetMMFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, double *doublePtr)); /* 207 */
-    int (*tk_GetPixelsFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *intPtr)); /* 208 */
-    int (*tk_GetReliefFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *resultPtr)); /* 209 */
-    int (*tk_GetScrollInfoObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], double *dblPtr, int *intPtr)); /* 210 */
-    int (*tk_InitOptions) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 211 */
-    void (*tk_MainEx) _ANSI_ARGS_((int argc, char **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, Tcl_Interp *interp)); /* 212 */
-    void (*tk_RestoreSavedOptions) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr)); /* 213 */
-    int (*tk_SetOptions) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr, int *maskPtr)); /* 214 */
-    void (*tk_InitConsoleChannels) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp)); /* 215 */
-    int (*tk_CreateConsoleWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp)); /* 216 */
-    void (*tk_CreateSmoothMethod) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_SmoothMethod *method)); /* 217 */
+    void (*tk_MainLoop) (void); /* 0 */
+    XColor * (*tk_3DBorderColor) (Tk_3DBorder border); /* 1 */
+    GC (*tk_3DBorderGC) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border, int which); /* 2 */
+    void (*tk_3DHorizontalBevel) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int leftIn, int rightIn, int topBevel, int relief); /* 3 */
+    void (*tk_3DVerticalBevel) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int leftBevel, int relief); /* 4 */
+    void (*tk_AddOption) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name, CONST char *value, int priority); /* 5 */
+    void (*tk_BindEvent) (Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, XEvent *eventPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int numObjects, ClientData *objectPtr); /* 6 */
+    void (*tk_CanvasDrawableCoords) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double x, double y, short *drawableXPtr, short *drawableYPtr); /* 7 */
+    void (*tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw) (Tk_Canvas canvas, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2); /* 8 */
+    int (*tk_CanvasGetCoord) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, CONST char *str, double *doublePtr); /* 9 */
+    Tk_CanvasTextInfo * (*tk_CanvasGetTextInfo) (Tk_Canvas canvas); /* 10 */
+    int (*tk_CanvasPsBitmap) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Pixmap bitmap, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 11 */
+    int (*tk_CanvasPsColor) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, XColor *colorPtr); /* 12 */
+    int (*tk_CanvasPsFont) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Font font); /* 13 */
+    void (*tk_CanvasPsPath) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr, int numPoints); /* 14 */
+    int (*tk_CanvasPsStipple) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Pixmap bitmap); /* 15 */
+    double (*tk_CanvasPsY) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double y); /* 16 */
+    void (*tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin) (Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc); /* 17 */
+    int (*tk_CanvasTagsParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 18 */
+    char * (*tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 19 */
+    Tk_Window (*tk_CanvasTkwin) (Tk_Canvas canvas); /* 20 */
+    void (*tk_CanvasWindowCoords) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double x, double y, short *screenXPtr, short *screenYPtr); /* 21 */
+    void (*tk_ChangeWindowAttributes) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XSetWindowAttributes *attsPtr); /* 22 */
+    int (*tk_CharBbox) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int index, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 23 */
+    void (*tk_ClearSelection) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection); /* 24 */
+    int (*tk_ClipboardAppend) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Atom target, Atom format, char *buffer); /* 25 */
+    int (*tk_ClipboardClear) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 26 */
+    int (*tk_ConfigureInfo) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, CONST char *argvName, int flags); /* 27 */
+    int (*tk_ConfigureValue) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, CONST char *argvName, int flags); /* 28 */
+    int (*tk_ConfigureWidget) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, int argc, CONST84 char **argv, char *widgRec, int flags); /* 29 */
+    void (*tk_ConfigureWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned int valueMask, XWindowChanges *valuePtr); /* 30 */
+    Tk_TextLayout (*tk_ComputeTextLayout) (Tk_Font font, CONST char *str, int numChars, int wrapLength, Tk_Justify justify, int flags, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 31 */
+    Tk_Window (*tk_CoordsToWindow) (int rootX, int rootY, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 32 */
+    unsigned long (*tk_CreateBinding) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, CONST char *eventStr, CONST char *command, int append); /* 33 */
+    Tk_BindingTable (*tk_CreateBindingTable) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 34 */
+    Tk_ErrorHandler (*tk_CreateErrorHandler) (Display *display, int errNum, int request, int minorCode, Tk_ErrorProc *errorProc, ClientData clientData); /* 35 */
+    void (*tk_CreateEventHandler) (Tk_Window token, unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 36 */
+    void (*tk_CreateGenericHandler) (Tk_GenericProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 37 */
+    void (*tk_CreateImageType) (Tk_ImageType *typePtr); /* 38 */
+    void (*tk_CreateItemType) (Tk_ItemType *typePtr); /* 39 */
+    void (*tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat) (Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr); /* 40 */
+    void (*tk_CreateSelHandler) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target, Tk_SelectionProc *proc, ClientData clientData, Atom format); /* 41 */
+    Tk_Window (*tk_CreateWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window parent, CONST char *name, CONST char *screenName); /* 42 */
+    Tk_Window (*tk_CreateWindowFromPath) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *pathName, CONST char *screenName); /* 43 */
+    int (*tk_DefineBitmap) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name, CONST char *source, int width, int height); /* 44 */
+    void (*tk_DefineCursor) (Tk_Window window, Tk_Cursor cursor); /* 45 */
+    void (*tk_DeleteAllBindings) (Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object); /* 46 */
+    int (*tk_DeleteBinding) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, CONST char *eventStr); /* 47 */
+    void (*tk_DeleteBindingTable) (Tk_BindingTable bindingTable); /* 48 */
+    void (*tk_DeleteErrorHandler) (Tk_ErrorHandler handler); /* 49 */
+    void (*tk_DeleteEventHandler) (Tk_Window token, unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 50 */
+    void (*tk_DeleteGenericHandler) (Tk_GenericProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 51 */
+    void (*tk_DeleteImage) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name); /* 52 */
+    void (*tk_DeleteSelHandler) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target); /* 53 */
+    void (*tk_DestroyWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 54 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_DisplayName) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 55 */
+    int (*tk_DistanceToTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y); /* 56 */
+    void (*tk_Draw3DPolygon) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, XPoint *pointPtr, int numPoints, int borderWidth, int leftRelief); /* 57 */
+    void (*tk_Draw3DRectangle) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int borderWidth, int relief); /* 58 */
+    void (*tk_DrawChars) (Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char *source, int numBytes, int x, int y); /* 59 */
+    void (*tk_DrawFocusHighlight) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int width, Drawable drawable); /* 60 */
+    void (*tk_DrawTextLayout) (Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int firstChar, int lastChar); /* 61 */
+    void (*tk_Fill3DPolygon) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, XPoint *pointPtr, int numPoints, int borderWidth, int leftRelief); /* 62 */
+    void (*tk_Fill3DRectangle) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int borderWidth, int relief); /* 63 */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle (*tk_FindPhoto) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *imageName); /* 64 */
+    Font (*tk_FontId) (Tk_Font font); /* 65 */
+    void (*tk_Free3DBorder) (Tk_3DBorder border); /* 66 */
+    void (*tk_FreeBitmap) (Display *display, Pixmap bitmap); /* 67 */
+    void (*tk_FreeColor) (XColor *colorPtr); /* 68 */
+    void (*tk_FreeColormap) (Display *display, Colormap colormap); /* 69 */
+    void (*tk_FreeCursor) (Display *display, Tk_Cursor cursor); /* 70 */
+    void (*tk_FreeFont) (Tk_Font f); /* 71 */
+    void (*tk_FreeGC) (Display *display, GC gc); /* 72 */
+    void (*tk_FreeImage) (Tk_Image image); /* 73 */
+    void (*tk_FreeOptions) (Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, Display *display, int needFlags); /* 74 */
+    void (*tk_FreePixmap) (Display *display, Pixmap pixmap); /* 75 */
+    void (*tk_FreeTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout textLayout); /* 76 */
+    void (*tk_FreeXId) (Display *display, XID xid); /* 77 */
+    GC (*tk_GCForColor) (XColor *colorPtr, Drawable drawable); /* 78 */
+    void (*tk_GeometryRequest) (Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight); /* 79 */
+    Tk_3DBorder (*tk_Get3DBorder) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid colorName); /* 80 */
+    void (*tk_GetAllBindings) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object); /* 81 */
+    int (*tk_GetAnchor) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *str, Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr); /* 82 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_GetAtomName) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom atom); /* 83 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_GetBinding) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, CONST char *eventStr); /* 84 */
+    Pixmap (*tk_GetBitmap) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str); /* 85 */
+    Pixmap (*tk_GetBitmapFromData) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *source, int width, int height); /* 86 */
+    int (*tk_GetCapStyle) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *str, int *capPtr); /* 87 */
+    XColor * (*tk_GetColor) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid name); /* 88 */
+    XColor * (*tk_GetColorByValue) (Tk_Window tkwin, XColor *colorPtr); /* 89 */
+    Colormap (*tk_GetColormap) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str); /* 90 */
+    Tk_Cursor (*tk_GetCursor) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid str); /* 91 */
+    Tk_Cursor (*tk_GetCursorFromData) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *source, CONST char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, Tk_Uid fg, Tk_Uid bg); /* 92 */
+    Tk_Font (*tk_GetFont) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str); /* 93 */
+    Tk_Font (*tk_GetFontFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 94 */
+    void (*tk_GetFontMetrics) (Tk_Font font, Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr); /* 95 */
+    GC (*tk_GetGC) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XGCValues *valuePtr); /* 96 */
+    Tk_Image (*tk_GetImage) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name, Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc, ClientData clientData); /* 97 */
+    ClientData (*tk_GetImageMasterData) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name, Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr); /* 98 */
+    Tk_ItemType * (*tk_GetItemTypes) (void); /* 99 */
+    int (*tk_GetJoinStyle) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *str, int *joinPtr); /* 100 */
+    int (*tk_GetJustify) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *str, Tk_Justify *justifyPtr); /* 101 */
+    int (*tk_GetNumMainWindows) (void); /* 102 */
+    Tk_Uid (*tk_GetOption) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name, CONST char *className); /* 103 */
+    int (*tk_GetPixels) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str, int *intPtr); /* 104 */
+    Pixmap (*tk_GetPixmap) (Display *display, Drawable d, int width, int height, int depth); /* 105 */
+    int (*tk_GetRelief) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name, int *reliefPtr); /* 106 */
+    void (*tk_GetRootCoords) (Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr); /* 107 */
+    int (*tk_GetScrollInfo) (Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST84 char **argv, double *dblPtr, int *intPtr); /* 108 */
+    int (*tk_GetScreenMM) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str, double *doublePtr); /* 109 */
+    int (*tk_GetSelection) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target, Tk_GetSelProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 110 */
+    Tk_Uid (*tk_GetUid) (CONST char *str); /* 111 */
+    Visual * (*tk_GetVisual) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *str, int *depthPtr, Colormap *colormapPtr); /* 112 */
+    void (*tk_GetVRootGeometry) (Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 113 */
+    int (*tk_Grab) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int grabGlobal); /* 114 */
+    void (*tk_HandleEvent) (XEvent *eventPtr); /* 115 */
+    Tk_Window (*tk_IdToWindow) (Display *display, Window window); /* 116 */
+    void (*tk_ImageChanged) (Tk_ImageMaster master, int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight); /* 117 */
+    int (*tk_Init) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 118 */
+    Atom (*tk_InternAtom) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name); /* 119 */
+    int (*tk_IntersectTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 120 */
+    void (*tk_MaintainGeometry) (Tk_Window slave, Tk_Window master, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 121 */
+    Tk_Window (*tk_MainWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 122 */
+    void (*tk_MakeWindowExist) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 123 */
+    void (*tk_ManageGeometry) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST Tk_GeomMgr *mgrPtr, ClientData clientData); /* 124 */
+    void (*tk_MapWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 125 */
+    int (*tk_MeasureChars) (Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char *source, int numBytes, int maxPixels, int flags, int *lengthPtr); /* 126 */
+    void (*tk_MoveResizeWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 127 */
+    void (*tk_MoveWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); /* 128 */
+    void (*tk_MoveToplevelWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); /* 129 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOf3DBorder) (Tk_3DBorder border); /* 130 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfAnchor) (Tk_Anchor anchor); /* 131 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfBitmap) (Display *display, Pixmap bitmap); /* 132 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfCapStyle) (int cap); /* 133 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfColor) (XColor *colorPtr); /* 134 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfCursor) (Display *display, Tk_Cursor cursor); /* 135 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfFont) (Tk_Font font); /* 136 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfImage) (Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster); /* 137 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfJoinStyle) (int join); /* 138 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfJustify) (Tk_Justify justify); /* 139 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfRelief) (int relief); /* 140 */
+    Tk_Window (*tk_NameToWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *pathName, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 141 */
+    void (*tk_OwnSelection) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Tk_LostSelProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 142 */
+    int (*tk_ParseArgv) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int *argcPtr, CONST84 char **argv, Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable, int flags); /* 143 */
+    void (*tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 144 */
+    void (*tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY); /* 145 */
+    int (*tk_PhotoGetImage) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr); /* 146 */
+    void (*tk_PhotoBlank) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle); /* 147 */
+    void (*tk_PhotoExpand_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 148 */
+    void (*tk_PhotoGetSize) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 149 */
+    void (*tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 150 */
+    int (*tk_PointToChar) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y); /* 151 */
+    int (*tk_PostscriptFontName) (Tk_Font tkfont, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); /* 152 */
+    void (*tk_PreserveColormap) (Display *display, Colormap colormap); /* 153 */
+    void (*tk_QueueWindowEvent) (XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_QueuePosition position); /* 154 */
+    void (*tk_RedrawImage) (Tk_Image image, int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height, Drawable drawable, int drawableX, int drawableY); /* 155 */
+    void (*tk_ResizeWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height); /* 156 */
+    int (*tk_RestackWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int aboveBelow, Tk_Window other); /* 157 */
+    Tk_RestrictProc * (*tk_RestrictEvents) (Tk_RestrictProc *proc, ClientData arg, ClientData *prevArgPtr); /* 158 */
+    int (*tk_SafeInit) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 159 */
+    CONST char * (*tk_SetAppName) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name); /* 160 */
+    void (*tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border); /* 161 */
+    void (*tk_SetClass) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *className); /* 162 */
+    void (*tk_SetGrid) (Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight, int gridWidth, int gridHeight); /* 163 */
+    void (*tk_SetInternalBorder) (Tk_Window tkwin, int width); /* 164 */
+    void (*tk_SetWindowBackground) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long pixel); /* 165 */
+    void (*tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap) (Tk_Window tkwin, Pixmap pixmap); /* 166 */
+    void (*tk_SetWindowBorder) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long pixel); /* 167 */
+    void (*tk_SetWindowBorderWidth) (Tk_Window tkwin, int width); /* 168 */
+    void (*tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap) (Tk_Window tkwin, Pixmap pixmap); /* 169 */
+    void (*tk_SetWindowColormap) (Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap); /* 170 */
+    int (*tk_SetWindowVisual) (Tk_Window tkwin, Visual *visual, int depth, Colormap colormap); /* 171 */
+    void (*tk_SizeOfBitmap) (Display *display, Pixmap bitmap, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 172 */
+    void (*tk_SizeOfImage) (Tk_Image image, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 173 */
+    int (*tk_StrictMotif) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 174 */
+    void (*tk_TextLayoutToPostscript) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_TextLayout layout); /* 175 */
+    int (*tk_TextWidth) (Tk_Font font, CONST char *str, int numBytes); /* 176 */
+    void (*tk_UndefineCursor) (Tk_Window window); /* 177 */
+    void (*tk_UnderlineChars) (Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char *source, int x, int y, int firstByte, int lastByte); /* 178 */
+    void (*tk_UnderlineTextLayout) (Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int underline); /* 179 */
+    void (*tk_Ungrab) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 180 */
+    void (*tk_UnmaintainGeometry) (Tk_Window slave, Tk_Window master); /* 181 */
+    void (*tk_UnmapWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 182 */
+    void (*tk_UnsetGrid) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 183 */
+    void (*tk_UpdatePointer) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int state); /* 184 */
+    Pixmap (*tk_AllocBitmapFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 185 */
+    Tk_3DBorder (*tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 186 */
+    XColor * (*tk_AllocColorFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 187 */
+    Tk_Cursor (*tk_AllocCursorFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 188 */
+    Tk_Font (*tk_AllocFontFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 189 */
+    Tk_OptionTable (*tk_CreateOptionTable) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST Tk_OptionSpec *templatePtr); /* 190 */
+    void (*tk_DeleteOptionTable) (Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 191 */
+    void (*tk_Free3DBorderFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 192 */
+    void (*tk_FreeBitmapFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 193 */
+    void (*tk_FreeColorFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 194 */
+    void (*tk_FreeConfigOptions) (char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 195 */
+    void (*tk_FreeSavedOptions) (Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr); /* 196 */
+    void (*tk_FreeCursorFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 197 */
+    void (*tk_FreeFontFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 198 */
+    Tk_3DBorder (*tk_Get3DBorderFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 199 */
+    int (*tk_GetAnchorFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr); /* 200 */
+    Pixmap (*tk_GetBitmapFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 201 */
+    XColor * (*tk_GetColorFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 202 */
+    Tk_Cursor (*tk_GetCursorFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 203 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*tk_GetOptionInfo) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 204 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*tk_GetOptionValue) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj *namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 205 */
+    int (*tk_GetJustifyFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Justify *justifyPtr); /* 206 */
+    int (*tk_GetMMFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, double *doublePtr); /* 207 */
+    int (*tk_GetPixelsFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *intPtr); /* 208 */
+    int (*tk_GetReliefFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *resultPtr); /* 209 */
+    int (*tk_GetScrollInfoObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], double *dblPtr, int *intPtr); /* 210 */
+    int (*tk_InitOptions) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 211 */
+    void (*tk_MainEx) (int argc, char **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 212 */
+    void (*tk_RestoreSavedOptions) (Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr); /* 213 */
+    int (*tk_SetOptions) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr, int *maskPtr); /* 214 */
+    void (*tk_InitConsoleChannels) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 215 */
+    int (*tk_CreateConsoleWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 216 */
+    void (*tk_CreateSmoothMethod) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_SmoothMethod *method); /* 217 */
     VOID *reserved218;
     VOID *reserved219;
-    int (*tk_GetDash) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *value, Tk_Dash *dash)); /* 220 */
-    void (*tk_CreateOutline) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Outline *outline)); /* 221 */
-    void (*tk_DeleteOutline) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Tk_Outline *outline)); /* 222 */
-    int (*tk_ConfigOutlineGC) _ANSI_ARGS_((XGCValues *gcValues, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *item, Tk_Outline *outline)); /* 223 */
-    int (*tk_ChangeOutlineGC) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *item, Tk_Outline *outline)); /* 224 */
-    int (*tk_ResetOutlineGC) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *item, Tk_Outline *outline)); /* 225 */
-    int (*tk_CanvasPsOutline) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *item, Tk_Outline *outline)); /* 226 */
-    void (*tk_SetTSOrigin) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int x, int y)); /* 227 */
-    int (*tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tcl_Obj *obj, double *doublePtr)); /* 228 */
-    void (*tk_CanvasSetOffset) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc, Tk_TSOffset *offset)); /* 229 */
-    void (*tk_DitherPhoto) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int x, int y, int width, int height)); /* 230 */
-    int (*tk_PostscriptBitmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, Pixmap bitmap, int startX, int startY, int width, int height)); /* 231 */
-    int (*tk_PostscriptColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, XColor *colorPtr)); /* 232 */
-    int (*tk_PostscriptFont) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, Tk_Font font)); /* 233 */
-    int (*tk_PostscriptImage) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Image image, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo, int x, int y, int width, int height, int prepass)); /* 234 */
-    void (*tk_PostscriptPath) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, double *coordPtr, int numPoints)); /* 235 */
-    int (*tk_PostscriptStipple) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, Pixmap bitmap)); /* 236 */
-    double (*tk_PostscriptY) _ANSI_ARGS_((double y, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo)); /* 237 */
-    int (*tk_PostscriptPhoto) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, int width, int height)); /* 238 */
-    void (*tk_CreateClientMessageHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc)); /* 239 */
-    void (*tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc)); /* 240 */
-    Tk_Window (*tk_CreateAnonymousWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window parent, CONST char *screenName)); /* 241 */
-    void (*tk_SetClassProcs) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ClassProcs *procs, ClientData instanceData)); /* 242 */
-    void (*tk_SetInternalBorderEx) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int left, int right, int top, int bottom)); /* 243 */
-    void (*tk_SetMinimumRequestSize) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight)); /* 244 */
-    void (*tk_SetCaretPos) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height)); /* 245 */
-    void (*tk_PhotoPutBlock) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule)); /* 246 */
-    void (*tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule)); /* 247 */
-    int (*tk_CollapseMotionEvents) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, int collapse)); /* 248 */
-    Tk_StyleEngine (*tk_RegisterStyleEngine) _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *name, Tk_StyleEngine parent)); /* 249 */
-    Tk_StyleEngine (*tk_GetStyleEngine) _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *name)); /* 250 */
-    int (*tk_RegisterStyledElement) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_StyleEngine engine, Tk_ElementSpec *templatePtr)); /* 251 */
-    int (*tk_GetElementId) _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *name)); /* 252 */
-    Tk_Style (*tk_CreateStyle) _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *name, Tk_StyleEngine engine, ClientData clientData)); /* 253 */
-    Tk_Style (*tk_GetStyle) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name)); /* 254 */
-    void (*tk_FreeStyle) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Style style)); /* 255 */
-    CONST char * (*tk_NameOfStyle) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Style style)); /* 256 */
-    Tk_Style (*tk_AllocStyleFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 257 */
-    Tk_Style (*tk_GetStyleFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 258 */
-    void (*tk_FreeStyleFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); /* 259 */
-    Tk_StyledElement (*tk_GetStyledElement) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Style style, int elementId, Tk_OptionTable optionTable)); /* 260 */
-    void (*tk_GetElementSize) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height, int inner, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)); /* 261 */
-    void (*tk_GetElementBox) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int inner, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)); /* 262 */
-    int (*tk_GetElementBorderWidth) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 263 */
-    void (*tk_DrawElement) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, int x, int y, int width, int height, int state)); /* 264 */
+    int (*tk_GetDash) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *value, Tk_Dash *dash); /* 220 */
+    void (*tk_CreateOutline) (Tk_Outline *outline); /* 221 */
+    void (*tk_DeleteOutline) (Display *display, Tk_Outline *outline); /* 222 */
+    int (*tk_ConfigOutlineGC) (XGCValues *gcValues, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *item, Tk_Outline *outline); /* 223 */
+    int (*tk_ChangeOutlineGC) (Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *item, Tk_Outline *outline); /* 224 */
+    int (*tk_ResetOutlineGC) (Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *item, Tk_Outline *outline); /* 225 */
+    int (*tk_CanvasPsOutline) (Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *item, Tk_Outline *outline); /* 226 */
+    void (*tk_SetTSOrigin) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int x, int y); /* 227 */
+    int (*tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tcl_Obj *obj, double *doublePtr); /* 228 */
+    void (*tk_CanvasSetOffset) (Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc, Tk_TSOffset *offset); /* 229 */
+    void (*tk_DitherPhoto) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 230 */
+    int (*tk_PostscriptBitmap) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, Pixmap bitmap, int startX, int startY, int width, int height); /* 231 */
+    int (*tk_PostscriptColor) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, XColor *colorPtr); /* 232 */
+    int (*tk_PostscriptFont) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, Tk_Font font); /* 233 */
+    int (*tk_PostscriptImage) (Tk_Image image, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo, int x, int y, int width, int height, int prepass); /* 234 */
+    void (*tk_PostscriptPath) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, double *coordPtr, int numPoints); /* 235 */
+    int (*tk_PostscriptStipple) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, Pixmap bitmap); /* 236 */
+    double (*tk_PostscriptY) (double y, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo); /* 237 */
+    int (*tk_PostscriptPhoto) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, int width, int height); /* 238 */
+    void (*tk_CreateClientMessageHandler) (Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc); /* 239 */
+    void (*tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler) (Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc); /* 240 */
+    Tk_Window (*tk_CreateAnonymousWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window parent, CONST char *screenName); /* 241 */
+    void (*tk_SetClassProcs) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ClassProcs *procs, ClientData instanceData); /* 242 */
+    void (*tk_SetInternalBorderEx) (Tk_Window tkwin, int left, int right, int top, int bottom); /* 243 */
+    void (*tk_SetMinimumRequestSize) (Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight); /* 244 */
+    void (*tk_SetCaretPos) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height); /* 245 */
+    void (*tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule); /* 246 */
+    void (*tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule); /* 247 */
+    int (*tk_CollapseMotionEvents) (Display *display, int collapse); /* 248 */
+    Tk_StyleEngine (*tk_RegisterStyleEngine) (CONST char *name, Tk_StyleEngine parent); /* 249 */
+    Tk_StyleEngine (*tk_GetStyleEngine) (CONST char *name); /* 250 */
+    int (*tk_RegisterStyledElement) (Tk_StyleEngine engine, Tk_ElementSpec *templatePtr); /* 251 */
+    int (*tk_GetElementId) (CONST char *name); /* 252 */
+    Tk_Style (*tk_CreateStyle) (CONST char *name, Tk_StyleEngine engine, ClientData clientData); /* 253 */
+    Tk_Style (*tk_GetStyle) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name); /* 254 */
+    void (*tk_FreeStyle) (Tk_Style style); /* 255 */
+    CONST char * (*tk_NameOfStyle) (Tk_Style style); /* 256 */
+    Tk_Style (*tk_AllocStyleFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 257 */
+    Tk_Style (*tk_GetStyleFromObj) (Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 258 */
+    void (*tk_FreeStyleFromObj) (Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 259 */
+    Tk_StyledElement (*tk_GetStyledElement) (Tk_Style style, int elementId, Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 260 */
+    void (*tk_GetElementSize) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height, int inner, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 261 */
+    void (*tk_GetElementBox) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int inner, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* 262 */
+    int (*tk_GetElementBorderWidth) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 263 */
+    void (*tk_DrawElement) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char *recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, int x, int y, int width, int height, int state); /* 264 */
+    int (*tk_PhotoExpand) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 265 */
+    int (*tk_PhotoPutBlock) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule); /* 266 */
+    int (*tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule); /* 267 */
+    int (*tk_PhotoSetSize) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 268 */
+    long (*tk_GetUserInactiveTime) (Display *dpy); /* 269 */
+    void (*tk_ResetUserInactiveTime) (Display *dpy); /* 270 */
+    Tcl_Interp * (*tk_Interp) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 271 */
+    void (*tk_CreateOldImageType) (Tk_ImageType *typePtr); /* 272 */
+    void (*tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat) (Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr); /* 273 */
 } TkStubs;
 
 #ifdef __cplusplus
@@ -1790,17 +2568,17 @@ extern TkStubs *tkStubsPtr;
 #define Tk_PhotoBlank \
 	(tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoBlank) /* 147 */
 #endif
-#ifndef Tk_PhotoExpand
-#define Tk_PhotoExpand \
-	(tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoExpand) /* 148 */
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic
+#define Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic \
+	(tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoExpand_Panic) /* 148 */
 #endif
 #ifndef Tk_PhotoGetSize
 #define Tk_PhotoGetSize \
 	(tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoGetSize) /* 149 */
 #endif
-#ifndef Tk_PhotoSetSize
-#define Tk_PhotoSetSize \
-	(tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoSetSize) /* 150 */
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic
+#define Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic \
+	(tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic) /* 150 */
 #endif
 #ifndef Tk_PointToChar
 #define Tk_PointToChar \
@@ -2176,13 +2954,13 @@ extern TkStubs *tkStubsPtr;
 #define Tk_SetCaretPos \
 	(tkStubsPtr->tk_SetCaretPos) /* 245 */
 #endif
-#ifndef Tk_PhotoPutBlock
-#define Tk_PhotoPutBlock \
-	(tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutBlock) /* 246 */
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic
+#define Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic \
+	(tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic) /* 246 */
 #endif
-#ifndef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock
-#define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock \
-	(tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock) /* 247 */
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic
+#define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic \
+	(tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic) /* 247 */
 #endif
 #ifndef Tk_CollapseMotionEvents
 #define Tk_CollapseMotionEvents \
@@ -2252,6 +3030,42 @@ extern TkStubs *tkStubsPtr;
 #define Tk_DrawElement \
 	(tkStubsPtr->tk_DrawElement) /* 264 */
 #endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoExpand
+#define Tk_PhotoExpand \
+	(tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoExpand) /* 265 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoPutBlock
+#define Tk_PhotoPutBlock \
+	(tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutBlock) /* 266 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock
+#define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock \
+	(tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock) /* 267 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PhotoSetSize
+#define Tk_PhotoSetSize \
+	(tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoSetSize) /* 268 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetUserInactiveTime
+#define Tk_GetUserInactiveTime \
+	(tkStubsPtr->tk_GetUserInactiveTime) /* 269 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime
+#define Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime \
+	(tkStubsPtr->tk_ResetUserInactiveTime) /* 270 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_Interp
+#define Tk_Interp \
+	(tkStubsPtr->tk_Interp) /* 271 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateOldImageType
+#define Tk_CreateOldImageType \
+	(tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateOldImageType) /* 272 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat
+#define Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat \
+	(tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat) /* 273 */
+#endif
 
 #endif /* defined(USE_TK_STUBS) && !defined(USE_TK_STUB_PROCS) */
 
diff --git a/generic/tkEntry.c b/generic/tkEntry.c
index 996af63..26311a3 100644
--- a/generic/tkEntry.c
+++ b/generic/tkEntry.c
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-/* 
- * Entry.c --
+/*
+ * tkEntry.c --
  *
  *	This module implements entry and spinbox widgets for the Tk toolkit.
- *	An entry displays a string and allows the string to be edited.
- *	A spinbox expands on the entry by adding up/down buttons that control
+ *	An entry displays a string and allows the string to be edited. A
+ *	spinbox expands on the entry by adding up/down buttons that control
  *	the value of the entry widget.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
@@ -11,40 +11,40 @@
  * Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
  * Copyright (c) 2002 ActiveState Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "default.h"
 #include "tkEntry.h"
 
-
 /*
- * The following macro defines how many extra pixels to leave on each
- * side of the text in the entry.
+ * The following macro defines how many extra pixels to leave on each side of
+ * the text in the entry.
  */
 
 #define XPAD 1
 #define YPAD 1
 
 /*
- * A comparison function for double values.  For Spinboxes.
+ * A comparison function for double values. For Spinboxes.
  */
+
 #define MIN_DBL_VAL		1E-9
 #define DOUBLES_EQ(d1, d2)	(fabs((d1) - (d2)) < MIN_DBL_VAL)
 
 
-static CONST char *CONST stateStrings[] = {
-    "disabled", "normal", "readonly", (char *) NULL
+static const char *const stateStrings[] = {
+    "disabled", "normal", "readonly", NULL
 };
 
 /*
  * Definitions for -validate option values:
  */
 
-static CONST char *CONST validateStrings[] = {
-    "all", "key", "focus", "focusin", "focusout", "none", (char *) NULL
+static const char *const validateStrings[] = {
+    "all", "key", "focus", "focusin", "focusout", "none", NULL
 };
 enum validateType {
     VALIDATE_ALL, VALIDATE_KEY, VALIDATE_FOCUS,
@@ -61,115 +61,104 @@ enum validateType {
  * Information used for Entry objv parsing.
  */
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec entryOptSpec[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec entryOptSpec[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	DEF_ENTRY_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, normalBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_BG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_ENTRY_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, borderWidth), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
 	DEF_ENTRY_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, cursor),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-disabledbackground", "disabledBackground",
-	 "DisabledBackground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_COLOR, -1,
-	 Tk_Offset(Entry, disabledBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
-	 (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_MONO, 0},
+	"DisabledBackground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, disabledBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
+	(ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
-	 "DisabledForeground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_FG, -1,
-	 Tk_Offset(Entry, dfgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	"DisabledForeground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_FG, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, dfgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection",
-        "ExportSelection", DEF_ENTRY_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(Entry, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
+	"ExportSelection", DEF_ENTRY_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	DEF_ENTRY_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
-	DEF_ENTRY_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, fgColorPtr), 0, 
-        0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, fgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
 	"HighlightBackground", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_BG,
-	-1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightBgColorPtr), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	-1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
-	DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightColorPtr),
-	0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
-	"HighlightThickness", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1, 
+	"HighlightThickness", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1,
 	Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-insertbackground", "insertBackground", "Foreground",
-	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BG,
-	-1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorder), 
-        0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth", 
-        "BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_COLOR, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorderWidth), 0, 
-        (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorder), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth",
+	"BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorderWidth), 0,
+	(ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertofftime", "insertOffTime", "OffTime",
-        DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_OFF_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOffTime), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_OFF_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOffTime),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertontime", "insertOnTime", "OnTime",
-        DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_ON_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOnTime), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_ON_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOnTime), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertwidth", "insertWidth", "InsertWidth",
-	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertWidth), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-invalidcommand", "invalidCommand", "InvalidCommand",
 	DEF_ENTRY_INVALIDCMD, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, invalidCmd),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-invcmd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-invalidcommand", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-invcmd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-invalidcommand", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
 	DEF_ENTRY_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, justify), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-readonlybackground", "readonlyBackground",
-	 "ReadonlyBackground", DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_COLOR, -1,
-	 Tk_Offset(Entry, readonlyBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
-	 (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_MONO, 0},
+	"ReadonlyBackground", DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, readonlyBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
+	(ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
-	DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, relief), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, relief), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground",
-        DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorder),
-        0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", 
-        "BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_COLOR, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorderWidth), 
-        0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorder),
+	0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth",
+	"BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorderWidth),
+	0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background",
 	DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selFgColorPtr),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-show", "show", "Show",
-        DEF_ENTRY_SHOW, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, showChar), 
-        TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_SHOW, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, showChar),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
-	DEF_ENTRY_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, state), 
-        0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, state),
+	0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
-	DEF_ENTRY_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, takeFocus), 
-        TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, takeFocus),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
 	DEF_ENTRY_TEXT_VARIABLE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, textVarName),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-validate", "validate", "Validate",
-       DEF_ENTRY_VALIDATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validate),
-       0, (ClientData) validateStrings, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-validatecommand", "validateCommand", "ValidateCommand",
-       (char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validateCmd),
-       TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-vcmd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-validatecommand", 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_VALIDATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validate),
+	0, (ClientData) validateStrings, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-validatecommand", "validateCommand","ValidateCommand",
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validateCmd), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-vcmd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-validatecommand", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
 	DEF_ENTRY_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, prefWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-xscrollcommand", "xScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
 	DEF_ENTRY_SCROLL_COMMAND, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, scrollCmd),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
@@ -189,20 +178,19 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec entryOptSpec[] = {
 #define DEF_SPINBOX_VALUES		""
 #define DEF_SPINBOX_WRAP		"0"
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec sbOptSpec[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec sbOptSpec[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Background",
 	DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, activeBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	DEF_ENTRY_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, normalBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_BG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_ENTRY_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, borderWidth), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-buttonbackground", "Button.background", "Background",
 	DEF_BUTTON_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, buttonBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
@@ -210,11 +198,9 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec sbOptSpec[] = {
 	DEF_BUTTON_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, bCursor),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-buttondownrelief", "Button.relief", "Relief",
-	DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, bdRelief),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, bdRelief), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-buttonuprelief", "Button.relief", "Relief",
-	DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, buRelief),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, buRelief), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
 	DEF_SPINBOX_CMD, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, command),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
@@ -222,22 +208,21 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec sbOptSpec[] = {
 	DEF_ENTRY_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, cursor),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-disabledbackground", "disabledBackground",
-	 "DisabledBackground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_COLOR, -1,
-	 Tk_Offset(Entry, disabledBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
-	 (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_MONO, 0},
+	"DisabledBackground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, disabledBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
+	(ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
-	 "DisabledForeground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_FG, -1,
-	 Tk_Offset(Entry, dfgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	"DisabledForeground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_FG, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, dfgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection",
-        "ExportSelection", DEF_ENTRY_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(Entry, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
+	"ExportSelection", DEF_ENTRY_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	DEF_ENTRY_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
-	DEF_ENTRY_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, fgColorPtr), 0, 
-        0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, fgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-format", "format", "Format",
 	DEF_SPINBOX_FORMAT, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, reqFormat),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
@@ -245,84 +230,77 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec sbOptSpec[] = {
 	DEF_SPINBOX_FROM, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, fromValue), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
 	"HighlightBackground", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_BG,
-	-1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightBgColorPtr), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	-1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
-	DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightColorPtr),
-	0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
-	"HighlightThickness", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1, 
+	"HighlightThickness", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1,
 	Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-increment", "increment", "Increment",
 	DEF_SPINBOX_INCREMENT, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, increment), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-insertbackground", "insertBackground", "Foreground",
-	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorder), 
-        0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth", 
-        "BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_COLOR, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorderWidth), 0, 
-        (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorder), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth",
+	"BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorderWidth), 0,
+	(ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertofftime", "insertOffTime", "OffTime",
-        DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_OFF_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOffTime), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_OFF_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOffTime),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertontime", "insertOnTime", "OnTime",
-        DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_ON_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOnTime), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_ON_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOnTime), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertwidth", "insertWidth", "InsertWidth",
-	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertWidth), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-invalidcommand", "invalidCommand", "InvalidCommand",
 	DEF_ENTRY_INVALIDCMD, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, invalidCmd),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-invcmd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-invalidcommand", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-invcmd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-invalidcommand", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
 	DEF_ENTRY_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, justify), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
-	DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, relief), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, relief), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-readonlybackground", "readonlyBackground",
-	 "ReadonlyBackground", DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_COLOR, -1,
-	 Tk_Offset(Entry, readonlyBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
-	 (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_MONO, 0},
+	"ReadonlyBackground", DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, readonlyBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
+	(ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatdelay", "repeatDelay", "RepeatDelay",
-        DEF_SPINBOX_REPEAT_DELAY, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, repeatDelay), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SPINBOX_REPEAT_DELAY, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, repeatDelay),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatinterval", "repeatInterval", "RepeatInterval",
-        DEF_SPINBOX_REPEAT_INTERVAL, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, repeatInterval), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SPINBOX_REPEAT_INTERVAL, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, repeatInterval),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground",
-        DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorder),
-        0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", 
-        "BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_COLOR, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorderWidth), 
-        0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorder),
+	0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth",
+	"BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorderWidth),
+	0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background",
 	DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selFgColorPtr),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
-	DEF_ENTRY_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, state), 
-        0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, state),
+	0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
-	DEF_ENTRY_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, takeFocus), 
-        TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, takeFocus),
+	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
 	DEF_ENTRY_TEXT_VARIABLE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, textVarName),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-to", "to", "To",
 	DEF_SPINBOX_TO, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, toValue), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-validate", "validate", "Validate",
-       DEF_ENTRY_VALIDATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validate),
-       0, (ClientData) validateStrings, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-validatecommand", "validateCommand", "ValidateCommand",
-       (char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validateCmd),
-       TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_VALIDATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validate),
+	0, (ClientData) validateStrings, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-validatecommand", "validateCommand","ValidateCommand",
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validateCmd), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-values", "values", "Values",
-	 DEF_SPINBOX_VALUES, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, valueStr),
-	 TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-vcmd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-validatecommand", 0},
+	DEF_SPINBOX_VALUES, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, valueStr),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-vcmd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-validatecommand", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
 	DEF_ENTRY_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, prefWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-wrap", "wrap", "Wrap",
@@ -330,29 +308,28 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec sbOptSpec[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-xscrollcommand", "xScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
 	DEF_ENTRY_SCROLL_COMMAND, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, scrollCmd),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * The following tables define the entry widget commands (and sub-
- * commands) and map the indexes into the string tables into 
- * enumerated types used to dispatch the entry widget command.
+ * The following tables define the entry widget commands (and sub-commands)
+ * and map the indexes into the string tables into enumerated types used to
+ * dispatch the entry widget command.
  */
 
-static CONST char *entryCmdNames[] = {
-    "bbox", "cget", "configure", "delete", "get", "icursor", "index", 
-    "insert", "scan", "selection", "validate", "xview", (char *) NULL
+static const char *entryCmdNames[] = {
+    "bbox", "cget", "configure", "delete", "get", "icursor", "index",
+    "insert", "scan", "selection", "validate", "xview", NULL
 };
 
 enum entryCmd {
-    COMMAND_BBOX, COMMAND_CGET, COMMAND_CONFIGURE, COMMAND_DELETE, 
-    COMMAND_GET, COMMAND_ICURSOR, COMMAND_INDEX, COMMAND_INSERT, 
+    COMMAND_BBOX, COMMAND_CGET, COMMAND_CONFIGURE, COMMAND_DELETE,
+    COMMAND_GET, COMMAND_ICURSOR, COMMAND_INDEX, COMMAND_INSERT,
     COMMAND_SCAN, COMMAND_SELECTION, COMMAND_VALIDATE, COMMAND_XVIEW
 };
 
-static CONST char *selCmdNames[] = {
-    "adjust", "clear", "from", "present", "range", "to", (char *) NULL
+static const char *selCmdNames[] = {
+    "adjust", "clear", "from", "present", "range", "to", NULL
 };
 
 enum selCmd {
@@ -361,31 +338,30 @@ enum selCmd {
 };
 
 /*
- * The following tables define the spinbox widget commands (and sub-
- * commands) and map the indexes into the string tables into 
- * enumerated types used to dispatch the spinbox widget command.
+ * The following tables define the spinbox widget commands (and sub-commands)
+ * and map the indexes into the string tables into enumerated types used to
+ * dispatch the spinbox widget command.
  */
 
-static CONST char *sbCmdNames[] = {
+static const char *sbCmdNames[] = {
     "bbox", "cget", "configure", "delete", "get", "icursor", "identify",
     "index", "insert", "invoke", "scan", "selection", "set",
-    "validate", "xview", (char *) NULL
+    "validate", "xview", NULL
 };
 
 enum sbCmd {
-    SB_CMD_BBOX, SB_CMD_CGET, SB_CMD_CONFIGURE, SB_CMD_DELETE, 
+    SB_CMD_BBOX, SB_CMD_CGET, SB_CMD_CONFIGURE, SB_CMD_DELETE,
     SB_CMD_GET, SB_CMD_ICURSOR, SB_CMD_IDENTIFY, SB_CMD_INDEX,
     SB_CMD_INSERT, SB_CMD_INVOKE, SB_CMD_SCAN, SB_CMD_SELECTION,
     SB_CMD_SET, SB_CMD_VALIDATE, SB_CMD_XVIEW
 };
 
-static CONST char *sbSelCmdNames[] = {
-    "adjust", "clear", "element", "from", "present", "range", "to",
-    (char *) NULL
+static const char *sbSelCmdNames[] = {
+    "adjust", "clear", "element", "from", "present", "range", "to", NULL
 };
 
 enum sbselCmd {
-    SB_SEL_ADJUST, SB_SEL_CLEAR, SB_SEL_ELEMENT, SB_SEL_FROM, 
+    SB_SEL_ADJUST, SB_SEL_CLEAR, SB_SEL_ELEMENT, SB_SEL_FROM,
     SB_SEL_PRESENT, SB_SEL_RANGE, SB_SEL_TO
 };
 
@@ -393,91 +369,80 @@ enum sbselCmd {
  * Extra for selection of elements
  */
 
-/* 
- * This is the string array  corresponding to the enum in selelement.
- * If you modify them, you must modify the strings here.
+/*
+ * This is the string array corresponding to the enum in selelement. If you
+ * modify them, you must modify the strings here.
  */
- 
-static CONST char *selElementNames[] = {
-    "none", "buttondown", "buttonup", (char *) NULL, "entry"
+
+static const char *selElementNames[] = {
+    "none", "buttondown", "buttonup", NULL, "entry"
 };
+
 /*
- * Flags for GetEntryIndex procedure:
+ * Flags for GetEntryIndex function:
  */
 
 #define ZERO_OK			1
 #define LAST_PLUS_ONE_OK	2
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static int		ConfigureEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Entry *entryPtr, int objc, 
-                            Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags));
-static void		DeleteChars _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr, int index,
-			    int count));
-static void		DestroyEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static void		DisplayEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		EntryBlinkProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		EntryCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		EntryComputeGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr));
-static void		EntryEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		EntryFocusProc _ANSI_ARGS_ ((Entry *entryPtr,
-			    int gotFocus));
-static int		EntryFetchSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes));
-static void		EntryLostSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		EventuallyRedraw _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr));
-static void		EntryScanTo _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr, int y));
-static void		EntrySetValue _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr,
-			    CONST char *value));
-static void		EntrySelectTo _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    Entry *entryPtr, int index));
-static char *		EntryTextVarProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name1,
-			    CONST char *name2, int flags));
-static void		EntryUpdateScrollbar _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr));
-static int		EntryValidate _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr,
-			    char *cmd));
-static int		EntryValidateChange _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr,
-			    char *change, CONST char *new, int index,
-			    int type));
-static void		ExpandPercents _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr,
-			    CONST char *before, char *change, CONST char *new,
-			    int index, int type, Tcl_DString *dsPtr));
-static void		EntryValueChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr,
-			    CONST char *newValue));
-static void		EntryVisibleRange _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr,
-			    double *firstPtr, double *lastPtr));
-static int		EntryWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		EntryWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData instanceData));
-static int		GetEntryIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Entry *entryPtr, char *string, int *indexPtr));
-static void		InsertChars _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr, int index,
-			    char *string));
+static int		ConfigureEntry(Tcl_Interp *interp, Entry *entryPtr,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int flags);
+static void		DeleteChars(Entry *entryPtr, int index, int count);
+static void		DestroyEntry(char *memPtr);
+static void		DisplayEntry(ClientData clientData);
+static void		EntryBlinkProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		EntryCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		EntryComputeGeometry(Entry *entryPtr);
+static void		EntryEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		EntryFocusProc(Entry *entryPtr, int gotFocus);
+static int		EntryFetchSelection(ClientData clientData, int offset,
+			    char *buffer, int maxBytes);
+static void		EntryLostSelection(ClientData clientData);
+static void		EventuallyRedraw(Entry *entryPtr);
+static void		EntryScanTo(Entry *entryPtr, int y);
+static void		EntrySetValue(Entry *entryPtr, const char *value);
+static void		EntrySelectTo(Entry *entryPtr, int index);
+static char *		EntryTextVarProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name1,
+			    const char *name2, int flags);
+static void		EntryUpdateScrollbar(Entry *entryPtr);
+static int		EntryValidate(Entry *entryPtr, char *cmd);
+static int		EntryValidateChange(Entry *entryPtr, char *change,
+		const char *newStr, int index, int type);
+static void		ExpandPercents(Entry *entryPtr, const char *before,
+			    const char *change, const char *newStr, int index,
+			    int type, Tcl_DString *dsPtr);
+static void		EntryValueChanged(Entry *entryPtr,
+			    const char *newValue);
+static void		EntryVisibleRange(Entry *entryPtr,
+			    double *firstPtr, double *lastPtr);
+static int		EntryWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		EntryWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
+static int		GetEntryIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, Entry *entryPtr,
+			    char *string, int *indexPtr);
+static void		InsertChars(Entry *entryPtr, int index, char *string);
 
 /*
  * These forward declarations are the spinbox specific ones:
  */
 
-static int		SpinboxWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		GetSpinboxElement _ANSI_ARGS_((Spinbox *sbPtr,
-			    int x, int y));
-static int		SpinboxInvoke _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Spinbox *sbPtr, int element));
-static int		ComputeFormat _ANSI_ARGS_((Spinbox *sbPtr));
+static int		SpinboxWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		GetSpinboxElement(Spinbox *sbPtr, int x, int y);
+static int		SpinboxInvoke(Tcl_Interp *interp, Spinbox *sbPtr,
+			    int element);
+static int		ComputeFormat(Spinbox *sbPtr);
 
 /*
- * The structure below defines widget class behavior by means of procedures
+ * The structure below defines widget class behavior by means of functions
  * that can be invoked from generic window code.
  */
 
@@ -492,9 +457,8 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs entryClass = {
  *
  * Tk_EntryObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "entry" Tcl
- *	command.  See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "entry" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -506,11 +470,11 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs entryClass = {
  */
 
 int
-Tk_EntryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];      /* Argument objects. */
+Tk_EntryObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     register Entry *entryPtr;
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
@@ -523,27 +487,27 @@ Tk_EntryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-            Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL);
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has already
-     * been created, Tk will return the cached value.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, Tk will return the cached value.
      */
 
     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, entryOptSpec);
 
     /*
-     * Initialize the fields of the structure that won't be initialized
-     * by ConfigureEntry, or that ConfigureEntry requires to be
-     * initialized already (e.g. resource pointers).  Only the non-NULL/0
-     * data must be initialized as memset covers the rest.
+     * Initialize the fields of the structure that won't be initialized by
+     * ConfigureEntry, or that ConfigureEntry requires to be initialized
+     * already (e.g. resource pointers). Only the non-NULL/0 data must be
+     * initialized as memset covers the rest.
      */
 
     entryPtr			= (Entry *) ckalloc(sizeof(Entry));
-    memset((VOID *) entryPtr, 0, sizeof(Entry));
+    memset(entryPtr, 0, sizeof(Entry));
 
     entryPtr->tkwin		= tkwin;
     entryPtr->display		= Tk_Display(tkwin);
@@ -573,7 +537,7 @@ Tk_EntryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     entryPtr->validate		= VALIDATE_NONE;
 
     /*
-     * Keep a hold of the associated tkwin until we destroy the listbox,
+     * Keep a hold of the associated tkwin until we destroy the entry,
      * otherwise Tk might free it while we still need it.
      */
 
@@ -603,9 +567,9 @@ Tk_EntryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * EntryWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -617,11 +581,11 @@ Tk_EntryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-EntryWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about entry widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+EntryWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about entry widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
     int cmdIndex, selIndex, result;
@@ -632,9 +596,9 @@ EntryWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    /* 
-     * Parse the widget command by looking up the second token in
-     * the list of valid command names. 
+    /*
+     * Parse the widget command by looking up the second token in the list of
+     * valid command names.
      */
 
     result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], entryCmdNames,
@@ -645,398 +609,381 @@ EntryWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) entryPtr);
     switch ((enum entryCmd) cmdIndex) {
-        case COMMAND_BBOX: {
-	    int index, x, y, width, height;
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
+    case COMMAND_BBOX: {
+	int index, x, y, width, height;
+	char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
 
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    if ((index == entryPtr->numChars) && (index > 0)) {
-	        index--;
-	    }
-	    Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, index, &x, &y, 
-                    &width, &height);
-	    sprintf(buf, "%d %d %d %d", x + entryPtr->layoutX,
-		    y + entryPtr->layoutY, width, height);
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-	    break;
-	} 
-	
-        case COMMAND_CGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    
-	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
-		    entryPtr->optionTable, objv[2], entryPtr->tkwin);
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if ((index == entryPtr->numChars) && (index > 0)) {
+	    index--;
+	}
+	Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, index, &x, &y, &width, &height);
+	sprintf(buf, "%d %d %d %d", x + entryPtr->layoutX,
+		y + entryPtr->layoutY, width, height);
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case COMMAND_CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
+		entryPtr->optionTable, objv[2], entryPtr->tkwin);
+	if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	    goto error;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+
+    case COMMAND_CONFIGURE:
+	if (objc <= 3) {
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
+		    entryPtr->optionTable,
+		    (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL,
+		    entryPtr->tkwin);
 	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		 goto error;
+		goto error;
 	    } else {
 		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0);
 	}
+	break;
 
-        case COMMAND_CONFIGURE: {
-	    if (objc <= 3) {
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
-			entryPtr->optionTable,
-			(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-			entryPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    goto error;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		}
-	    } else {
-		result = ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case COMMAND_DELETE: {
+	int first, last;
+
+	if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&first) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    last = first + 1;
+	} else if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+		&last) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
 	}
+	if ((last >= first) && (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL)) {
+	    DeleteChars(entryPtr, first, last - first);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-        case COMMAND_DELETE: {
-	    int first, last;
+    case COMMAND_GET:
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), entryPtr->string, -1);
+	break;
 
-	    if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &first) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-	        last = first + 1;
-	    } else {
-	        if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), 
-                        &last) != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if ((last >= first) && (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL)) {
-	        DeleteChars(entryPtr, first, last - first);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case COMMAND_ICURSOR:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pos");
+	    goto error;
 	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&entryPtr->insertPos) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
+	break;
 
-        case COMMAND_GET: {
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, (char *) NULL);
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), entryPtr->string, -1);
-	    break;
+    case COMMAND_INDEX: {
+	int index;
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
 	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
+	break;
+    }
 
-        case COMMAND_ICURSOR: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pos");
+    case COMMAND_INSERT: {
+	int index;
+
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index text");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) {
+	    InsertChars(entryPtr, index, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case COMMAND_SCAN: {
+	int x;
+	char *minorCmd;
+
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "mark|dragto x");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	minorCmd = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	if (minorCmd[0] == 'm'
+		&& (strncmp(minorCmd, "mark", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
+	    entryPtr->scanMarkX = x;
+	    entryPtr->scanMarkIndex = entryPtr->leftIndex;
+	} else if ((minorCmd[0] == 'd')
+		&& (strncmp(minorCmd, "dragto", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
+	    EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad scan option \"",
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "\": must be mark or dragto",
+		    NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case COMMAND_SELECTION: {
+	int index, index2;
+
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?index?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Parse the selection sub-command, using the command table
+	 * "selCmdNames" defined above.
+	 */
+
+	result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], selCmdNames,
+		"selection option", 0, &selIndex);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Disabled entries don't allow the selection to be modified, but
+	 * 'selection present' must return a boolean.
+	 */
+
+	if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED)
+		&& (selIndex != SELECTION_PRESENT)) {
+	    goto done;
+	}
+
+	switch (selIndex) {
+	case SELECTION_ADJUST:
+	    if (objc != 4) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-                    &entryPtr->insertPos) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto error;
 	    }
-	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
+	    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
+		int half1, half2;
+
+		half1 = (entryPtr->selectFirst + entryPtr->selectLast)/2;
+		half2 = (entryPtr->selectFirst + entryPtr->selectLast + 1)/2;
+		if (index < half1) {
+		    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectLast;
+		} else if (index > half2) {
+		    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectFirst;
+		} else {
+		    /*
+		     * We're at about the halfway point in the selection; just
+		     * keep the existing anchor.
+		     */
+		}
+	    }
+	    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
 	    break;
-	}
-	
-        case COMMAND_INDEX: {
-	    int index;
 
+	case SELECTION_CLEAR:
 	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string");
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
+	    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
+		entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
+		entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
+		EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
 	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
-	    break;
-	}
-
-        case COMMAND_INSERT: {
-	    int index;
+	    goto done;
 
+	case SELECTION_FROM:
 	    if (objc != 4) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index text");
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) {
-	        InsertChars(entryPtr, index, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto error;
 	    }
+	    entryPtr->selectAnchor = index;
 	    break;
-	}
 
-        case COMMAND_SCAN: {
-	    int x;
-	    char *minorCmd;
+	case SELECTION_PRESENT:
+	    if (objc != 3) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+		goto error;
+	    }
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+		    Tcl_NewBooleanObj((entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0)));
+	    goto done;
 
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "mark|dragto x");
+	case SELECTION_RANGE:
+	    if (objc != 5) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "start end");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+		    &index) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto error;
 	    }
-
-	    minorCmd = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-	    if (minorCmd[0] == 'm' 
-                    && (strncmp(minorCmd, "mark", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
-	        entryPtr->scanMarkX = x;
-		entryPtr->scanMarkIndex = entryPtr->leftIndex;
-	    } else if ((minorCmd[0] == 'd')
-		&& (strncmp(minorCmd, "dragto", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
-	        EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x);
-	    } else {
-	        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad scan option \"", 
-                        Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "\": must be mark or dragto", 
-                        (char *) NULL);
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]),
+		    &index2) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
+	    if (index >= index2) {
+		entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
+		entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
+	    } else {
+		entryPtr->selectFirst = index;
+		entryPtr->selectLast = index2;
+	    }
+	    if (!(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)
+		    && (entryPtr->exportSelection)) {
+		Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY,
+			EntryLostSelection, (ClientData) entryPtr);
+		entryPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
+	    }
+	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
 	    break;
-	}
-	    
-	case COMMAND_SELECTION: {
-	    int index, index2;
 
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?index?");
+	case SELECTION_TO:
+	    if (objc != 4) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    
-	    /* 
-	     * Parse the selection sub-command, using the command
-	     * table "selCmdNames" defined above.
-	     */
-	    
-	    result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], selCmdNames,
-		    "selection option", 0, &selIndex);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
+	    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
+	    break;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-	    /*
-	     * Disabled entries don't allow the selection to be modified,
-	     * but 'selection present' must return a boolean.
-	     */
-
-	    if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED)
-		    && (selIndex != SELECTION_PRESENT)) {
-		goto done;
-	    }
-
-	    switch (selIndex) {
-	        case SELECTION_ADJUST: {
-		    if (objc != 4) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
-		        int half1, half2;
-		
-			half1 = (entryPtr->selectFirst 
-			        + entryPtr->selectLast)/2;
-			half2 = (entryPtr->selectFirst 
-				+ entryPtr->selectLast + 1)/2;
-			if (index < half1) {
-			    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectLast;
-			} else if (index > half2) {
-			    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectFirst;
-			} else {
-			  /*
-			   * We're at about the halfway point in the 
-			   * selection; just keep the existing anchor.
-			   */
-			}
-		    }
-		    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
-		    break;
-		}
-
-	        case SELECTION_CLEAR: {
-		    if (objc != 3) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, (char *) NULL);
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
-		        entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
-			entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
-			EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-		    }
-		    goto done;
-		}
-
-	        case SELECTION_FROM: {
-		    if (objc != 4) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    entryPtr->selectAnchor = index;
-		    break;
-		}
-
-	        case SELECTION_PRESENT: {
-		    if (objc != 3) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, (char *) NULL);
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
-			    Tcl_NewBooleanObj((entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0)));
-		    goto done;
-		}
+    case COMMAND_VALIDATE: {
+	int code;
 
-	        case SELECTION_RANGE: {
-		    if (objc != 5) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "start end");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[4]),& index2) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (index >= index2) {
-		        entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
-			entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
-		    } else {
-		        entryPtr->selectFirst = index;
-			entryPtr->selectLast = index2;
-		    }
-		    if (!(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)
-			    && (entryPtr->exportSelection)) {
-		        Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, 
-			        EntryLostSelection, (ClientData) entryPtr);
-			entryPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
-		    }
-		    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-		    break;
-		}
-		
-	        case SELECTION_TO: {
-		    if (objc != 4) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
-		    break;
-		}
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	selIndex = entryPtr->validate;
+	entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_ALL;
+	code = EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, NULL, entryPtr->string,
+		-1, VALIDATE_FORCED);
+	if (entryPtr->validate != VALIDATE_NONE) {
+	    entryPtr->validate = selIndex;
 	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj((code == TCL_OK)));
+	break;
+    }
 
-        case COMMAND_VALIDATE: {
-	    int code;
+    case COMMAND_XVIEW: {
+	int index;
 
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc == 2) {
+	    double first, last;
+	    char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
+
+	    EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, &first, &last);
+	    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, first, buf);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, last, buf);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ", buf, NULL);
+	    goto done;
+	} else if (objc == 3) {
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		    &index) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    selIndex = entryPtr->validate;
-	    entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_ALL;
-	    code = EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, (char *) NULL,
-				       entryPtr->string, -1, VALIDATE_FORCED);
-	    if (entryPtr->validate != VALIDATE_NONE) {
-		entryPtr->validate = selIndex;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj((code == TCL_OK)));
-	    break;
-	}
+	} else {
+	    double fraction;
+	    int count;
 
-        case COMMAND_XVIEW: {
-	    int index;
-
-	    if (objc == 2) {
-	        double first, last;
-		char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2];
-	    
-		EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, &first, &last);
-		sprintf(buf, "%g %g", first, last);
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-		goto done;
-	    } else if (objc == 3) {
-	        if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                        &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
-	    } else {
-	        double fraction;
-		int count;
-
-		index = entryPtr->leftIndex;
-		switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction, 
-                        &count)) {
-		    case TK_SCROLL_ERROR: {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO: {
-		        index = (int) ((fraction * entryPtr->numChars) + 0.5);
-			break;
-		    }
-		    case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: {
-		        int charsPerPage;
-		    
-			charsPerPage = ((Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin)
-    			        - 2 * entryPtr->inset) 
-                                / entryPtr->avgWidth) - 2;
-			if (charsPerPage < 1) {
-			    charsPerPage = 1;
-			}
-			index += count * charsPerPage;
-			break;
-		    }
-		    case TK_SCROLL_UNITS: {
-		        index += count;
-			break;
-		    }
+	    index = entryPtr->leftIndex;
+	    switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction,
+		    &count)) {
+	    case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
+		goto error;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
+		index = (int) ((fraction * entryPtr->numChars) + 0.5);
+		break;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: {
+		int charsPerPage;
+
+		charsPerPage = ((Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin)
+			- 2 * entryPtr->inset) / entryPtr->avgWidth) - 2;
+		if (charsPerPage < 1) {
+		    charsPerPage = 1;
 		}
+		index += count * charsPerPage;
+		break;
 	    }
-	    if (index >= entryPtr->numChars) {
-	        index = entryPtr->numChars - 1;
-	    }
-	    if (index < 0) {
-	        index = 0;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
+		index += count;
+		break;
 	    }
-	    entryPtr->leftIndex = index;
-	    entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
-	    EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
-	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-	    break;
 	}
+	if (index >= entryPtr->numChars) {
+	    index = entryPtr->numChars - 1;
+	}
+	if (index < 0) {
+	    index = 0;
+	}
+	entryPtr->leftIndex = index;
+	entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
+	EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
+	EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
+	break;
+    }
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) entryPtr);
     return result;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) entryPtr);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -1046,9 +993,9 @@ EntryWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * DestroyEntry --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of an entry at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	This function is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to clean
+ *	up the internal structure of an entry at a safe time (when no-one is
+ *	using it anymore).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1060,15 +1007,14 @@ EntryWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyEntry(memPtr)
-    char *memPtr;		/* Info about entry widget. */
+DestroyEntry(
+    char *memPtr)		/* Info about entry widget. */
 {
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) memPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then
-     * let Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related
-     * stuff.
+     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let
+     * Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
      */
 
     ckfree((char *)entryPtr->string);
@@ -1113,43 +1059,43 @@ DestroyEntry(memPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureEntry --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure)
- *	an entry widget.
+ *	This function is called to process an argv/argc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) an entry
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width,
- *	etc. get set for entryPtr;  old resources get freed,
- *	if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width, etc. get set
+ *	for entryPtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Entry *entryPtr;		/* Information about widget; may or may not
+ConfigureEntry(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Information about widget; may or may not
 				 * already have values for some fields. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[],	/* Argument objects. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
 {
     Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
     Tk_3DBorder border;
     Tcl_Obj *errorResult = NULL;
-    Spinbox *sbPtr = (Spinbox *) entryPtr;	/* Only used when this widget
-						 * is of type TK_SPINBOX */
-    char *oldValues = NULL;		/* lint initialization */
-    char *oldFormat = NULL;		/* lint initialization */
+    Spinbox *sbPtr = (Spinbox *) entryPtr;
+				/* Only used when this widget is of type
+				 * TK_SPINBOX */
+    char *oldValues = NULL;	/* lint initialization */
+    char *oldFormat = NULL;	/* lint initialization */
     int error;
-    int oldExport = 0;			/* lint initialization */
-    int valuesChanged = 0;		/* lint initialization */
-    double oldFrom = 0.0;		/* lint initialization */
-    double oldTo = 0.0;			/* lint initialization */
+    int oldExport = 0;		/* lint initialization */
+    int valuesChanged = 0;	/* lint initialization */
+    double oldFrom = 0.0;	/* lint initialization */
+    double oldTo = 0.0;		/* lint initialization */
 
     /*
      * Eliminate any existing trace on a variable monitored by the entry.
@@ -1157,16 +1103,17 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 
     if ((entryPtr->textVarName != NULL)
 	    && (entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_VAR_TRACED)) {
-	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, entryPtr->textVarName, 
+	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, entryPtr->textVarName,
 		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		EntryTextVarProc, (ClientData) entryPtr);
 	entryPtr->flags &= ~ENTRY_VAR_TRACED;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Store old values that we need to effect certain behavior if
-     * they change value
+     * Store old values that we need to effect certain behavior if they change
+     * value.
      */
+
     oldExport		= entryPtr->exportSelection;
     if (entryPtr->type == TK_SPINBOX) {
 	oldValues	= sbPtr->valueStr;
@@ -1183,7 +1130,7 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 
 	    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
 		    entryPtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
-		    entryPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, (int *) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+		    entryPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 		continue;
 	    }
 	} else {
@@ -1233,6 +1180,7 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 		 * calculate the minimum space we'll need for the values as
 		 * strings.
 		 */
+
 		int min, max;
 		size_t formatLen, formatSpace = TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE;
 		char fbuf[4], *fmt = sbPtr->reqFormat;
@@ -1241,7 +1189,7 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 		if ((fmt[0] != '%') || (fmt[formatLen-1] != 'f')) {
 		    badFormatOpt:
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad spinbox format specifier \"",
-			    sbPtr->reqFormat, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+			    sbPtr->reqFormat, "\"", NULL);
 		    continue;
 		}
 		if ((sscanf(fmt, "%%%d.%d%[f]", &min, &max, fbuf) == 3)
@@ -1259,16 +1207,19 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 		    formatSpace = TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE;
 		}
 		sbPtr->formatBuf = ckrealloc(sbPtr->formatBuf, formatSpace);
+
 		/*
-		 * We perturb the value of oldFrom to allow us to go into
-		 * the branch below that will reformat the displayed value.
+		 * We perturb the value of oldFrom to allow us to go into the
+		 * branch below that will reformat the displayed value.
 		 */
+
 		oldFrom = sbPtr->fromValue - 1;
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * See if we have to rearrange our listObj data
+	     * See if we have to rearrange our listObj data.
 	     */
+
 	    if (oldValues != sbPtr->valueStr) {
 		if (sbPtr->listObj != NULL) {
 		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(sbPtr->listObj);
@@ -1294,13 +1245,14 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Restart the cursor timing sequence in case the on-time or 
-	 * off-time just changed.  Set validate temporarily to none,
-	 * so the configure doesn't cause it to be triggered.
+	 * Restart the cursor timing sequence in case the on-time or off-time
+	 * just changed. Set validate temporarily to none, so the configure
+	 * doesn't cause it to be triggered.
 	 */
 
 	if (entryPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
 	    int validate = entryPtr->validate;
+
 	    entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_NONE;
 	    EntryFocusProc(entryPtr, 1);
 	    entryPtr->validate = validate;
@@ -1311,8 +1263,8 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	 */
 
 	if (entryPtr->exportSelection && (!oldExport)
-	        && (entryPtr->selectFirst != -1)
-	        && !(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)) {
+		&& (entryPtr->selectFirst != -1)
+		&& !(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)) {
 	    Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, EntryLostSelection,
 		    (ClientData) entryPtr);
 	    entryPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
@@ -1324,12 +1276,12 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	 */
 
 	Tk_SetInternalBorder(entryPtr->tkwin,
-	        entryPtr->borderWidth + entryPtr->highlightWidth);
+		entryPtr->borderWidth + entryPtr->highlightWidth);
 	if (entryPtr->highlightWidth <= 0) {
 	    entryPtr->highlightWidth = 0;
 	}
-	entryPtr->inset = entryPtr->highlightWidth 
-	        + entryPtr->borderWidth + XPAD;
+	entryPtr->inset = entryPtr->highlightWidth
+		+ entryPtr->borderWidth + XPAD;
 	break;
     }
     if (!error) {
@@ -1342,7 +1294,7 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
      */
 
     if (entryPtr->textVarName != NULL) {
-	CONST char *value;
+	const char *value;
 
 	value = Tcl_GetVar(interp, entryPtr->textVarName, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
 	if (value == NULL) {
@@ -1359,9 +1311,10 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
 
 	    /*
-	     * No check for error return, because there shouldn't be one
-	     * given the check for valid list above
+	     * No check for error return, because there shouldn't be one given
+	     * the check for valid list above.
 	     */
+
 	    Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, sbPtr->listObj, 0, &objPtr);
 	    EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objPtr));
 	} else if ((sbPtr->valueStr == NULL)
@@ -1370,15 +1323,15 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 			|| !DOUBLES_EQ(sbPtr->toValue, oldTo))) {
 	    /*
 	     * If the valueStr is empty and -from && -to are specified, check
-	     * to see if the current string is within the range.  If not,
-	     * it will be constrained to the nearest edge.  If the current
-	     * string isn't a double value, we set it to -from.
+	     * to see if the current string is within the range. If not, it
+	     * will be constrained to the nearest edge. If the current string
+	     * isn't a double value, we set it to -from.
 	     */
-	    int code;
+
 	    double dvalue;
 
-	    code = Tcl_GetDouble(NULL, entryPtr->string, &dvalue);
-	    if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	    if (sscanf(entryPtr->string, "%lf", &dvalue) == 0) {
+		/* Scan failure */
 		dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
 	    } else {
 		if (dvalue > sbPtr->toValue) {
@@ -1393,8 +1346,8 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Set up a trace on the variable's value after we've possibly
-     * constrained the value according to new -from/-to values.
+     * Set up a trace on the variable's value after we've possibly constrained
+     * the value according to new -from/-to values.
      */
 
     if ((entryPtr->textVarName != NULL)
@@ -1407,11 +1360,11 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 
     EntryWorldChanged((ClientData) entryPtr);
     if (error) {
-        Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(errorResult);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     } else {
-        return TCL_OK;
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
 }
 
@@ -1420,22 +1373,22 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * EntryWorldChanged --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way and the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts
- *	and determine its new geometry.
+ *	This function is called when the world has changed in some way and the
+ *	widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine its
+ *	new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      Entry will be relayed out and redisplayed.
+ *	Entry will be relayed out and redisplayed.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 static void
-EntryWorldChanged(instanceData)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about widget. */
+EntryWorldChanged(
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     XGCValues gcValues;
     GC gc = None;
@@ -1461,27 +1414,27 @@ EntryWorldChanged(instanceData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Default background and foreground are from the normal state.
-     * In a disabled state, both of those may be overridden; in the readonly
-     * state, the background may be overridden.
+     * Default background and foreground are from the normal state. In a
+     * disabled state, both of those may be overridden; in the readonly state,
+     * the background may be overridden.
      */
 
     border	= entryPtr->normalBorder;
     colorPtr	= entryPtr->fgColorPtr;
     switch (entryPtr->state) {
-	case STATE_DISABLED:
-	    if (entryPtr->disabledBorder != NULL) {
-		border = entryPtr->disabledBorder;
-	    }
-	    if (entryPtr->dfgColorPtr != NULL) {
-		colorPtr = entryPtr->dfgColorPtr;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case STATE_READONLY:
-	    if (entryPtr->readonlyBorder != NULL) {
-		border = entryPtr->readonlyBorder;
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case STATE_DISABLED:
+	if (entryPtr->disabledBorder != NULL) {
+	    border = entryPtr->disabledBorder;
+	}
+	if (entryPtr->dfgColorPtr != NULL) {
+	    colorPtr = entryPtr->dfgColorPtr;
+	}
+	break;
+    case STATE_READONLY:
+	if (entryPtr->readonlyBorder != NULL) {
+	    border = entryPtr->readonlyBorder;
+	}
+	break;
     }
 
     Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(entryPtr->tkwin, border);
@@ -1507,8 +1460,7 @@ EntryWorldChanged(instanceData)
     entryPtr->selTextGC = gc;
 
     /*
-     * Recompute the window's geometry and arrange for it to be
-     * redisplayed.
+     * Recompute the window's geometry and arrange for it to be redisplayed.
      */
 
     EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
@@ -1516,18 +1468,17 @@ EntryWorldChanged(instanceData)
     EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
 }
 
-#ifndef MAC_OSX_TK 
+#ifndef MAC_OSX_TK
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws the border of an entry widget.
- *      It overrides the generic border drawing code if the 
- *      entry widget parameters are such that the native widget
- *      drawing is a good fit.
- *      This version just returns o, so platforms that don't
- *      do special native drawing don't have to implement it.
+ *	This function redraws the border of an entry widget. It overrides the
+ *	generic border drawing code if the entry widget parameters are such
+ *	that the native widget drawing is a good fit. This version just
+ *	returns 0, so platforms that don't do special native drawing don't
+ *	have to implement it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	1 if it has drawn the border, 0 if not.
@@ -1539,26 +1490,24 @@ EntryWorldChanged(instanceData)
  */
 
 int
-TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus(entryPtr, pixmap, isSpinbox)
-    Entry *entryPtr;
-    Drawable pixmap;
-    int isSpinbox;
+TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus(
+    Entry *entryPtr,
+    Drawable pixmap,
+    int isSpinbox)
 {
     return 0;
 }
-
-
+
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkpDrawSpinboxButtons --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws the buttons of an spinbox widget.
- *      It overrides the generic button drawing code if the 
- *      spinbox widget parameters are such that the native widget
- *      drawing is a good fit.
- *      This version just returns 0, so platforms that don't
- *      do special native drawing don't have to implement it.
+ *	This function redraws the buttons of an spinbox widget. It overrides
+ *	the generic button drawing code if the spinbox widget parameters are
+ *	such that the native widget drawing is a good fit. This version just
+ *	returns 0, so platforms that don't do special native drawing don't
+ *	have to implement it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	1 if it has drawn the border, 0 if not.
@@ -1570,20 +1519,20 @@ TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus(entryPtr, pixmap, isSpinbox)
  */
 
 int
-TkpDrawSpinboxButtons(sbPtr, pixmap)
-    Spinbox *sbPtr; 
-    Pixmap pixmap;
+TkpDrawSpinboxButtons(
+    Spinbox *sbPtr,
+    Pixmap pixmap)
 {
     return 0;
 }
 #endif /* Not MAC_OSX_TK */
-
+
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * DisplayEntry --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws the contents of an entry window.
+ *	This function redraws the contents of an entry window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1595,8 +1544,8 @@ TkpDrawSpinboxButtons(sbPtr, pixmap)
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayEntry(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
+DisplayEntry(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about window. */
 {
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = entryPtr->tkwin;
@@ -1620,9 +1569,9 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
     if (entryPtr->flags & UPDATE_SCROLLBAR) {
 	entryPtr->flags &= ~UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
 
-        /*
-	 * Preserve/Release because updating the scrollbar can have
-	 * the side-effect of destroying or unmapping the entry widget.
+	/*
+	 * Preserve/Release because updating the scrollbar can have the
+	 * side-effect of destroying or unmapping the entry widget.
 	 */
 
 	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) entryPtr);
@@ -1637,10 +1586,10 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
 
 #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
     /*
-     * In order to avoid screen flashes, this procedure redraws the
-     * textual area of the entry into off-screen memory, then copies
-     * it back on-screen in a single operation.  This means there's
-     * no point in time where the on-screen image has been cleared.
+     * In order to avoid screen flashes, this function redraws the textual
+     * area of the entry into off-screen memory, then copies it back on-screen
+     * in a single operation. This means there's no point in time where the
+     * on-screen image has been cleared.
      */
 
     pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(entryPtr->display, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
@@ -1650,18 +1599,17 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
 #endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
 
     /*
-     * Compute x-coordinate of the pixel just after last visible
-     * one, plus vertical position of baseline of text.
+     * Compute x-coordinate of the pixel just after last visible one, plus
+     * vertical position of baseline of text.
      */
 
     xBound = Tk_Width(tkwin) - entryPtr->inset - entryPtr->xWidth;
     baseY = (Tk_Height(tkwin) + fm.ascent - fm.descent) / 2;
 
     /*
-     * On Windows and Mac, we need to hide the selection whenever we
-     * don't have the focus.
+     * Hide the selection whenever we don't have the focus, unless we
+     * always want to show selection.
      */
-
     if (TkpAlwaysShowSelection(entryPtr->tkwin)) {
 	showSelection = 1;
     } else {
@@ -1669,9 +1617,9 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Draw the background in three layers.  From bottom to top the
-     * layers are:  normal background, selection background, and
-     * insertion cursor background.
+     * Draw the background in three layers. From bottom to top the layers are:
+     * normal background, selection background, and insertion cursor
+     * background.
      */
 
     if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED) &&
@@ -1711,16 +1659,16 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
 		    MAC_OSX_ENTRY_SELECT_RELIEF
 #endif
 		    );
-	} 
+	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Draw a special background for the insertion cursor, overriding
-     * even the selection background.  As a special hack to keep the
-     * cursor visible when the insertion cursor color is the same as
-     * the color for selected text (e.g., on mono displays), write
-     * background in the cursor area (instead of nothing) when the
-     * cursor isn't on.  Otherwise the selection would hide the cursor.
+     * Draw a special background for the insertion cursor, overriding even the
+     * selection background. As a special hack to keep the cursor visible when
+     * the insertion cursor color is the same as the color for selected text
+     * (e.g., on mono displays), write background in the cursor area (instead
+     * of nothing) when the cursor isn't on. Otherwise the selection would
+     * hide the cursor.
      */
 
     if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) && (entryPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)) {
@@ -1730,25 +1678,22 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
 	cursorX -= (entryPtr->insertWidth)/2;
 	Tk_SetCaretPos(entryPtr->tkwin, cursorX, baseY - fm.ascent,
 		fm.ascent + fm.descent);
-	if (entryPtr->insertPos >= entryPtr->leftIndex) {
-	    if (cursorX < xBound) {
-		if (entryPtr->flags & CURSOR_ON) {
-		    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, entryPtr->insertBorder,
-			    cursorX, baseY - fm.ascent, entryPtr->insertWidth,
-			    fm.ascent + fm.descent,
-			    entryPtr->insertBorderWidth,
-			    TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
-		} else if (entryPtr->insertBorder == entryPtr->selBorder) {
-		    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border,
-			    cursorX, baseY - fm.ascent, entryPtr->insertWidth,
-			    fm.ascent + fm.descent, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
-		}
+	if (entryPtr->insertPos >= entryPtr->leftIndex && cursorX < xBound) {
+	    if (entryPtr->flags & CURSOR_ON) {
+		Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, entryPtr->insertBorder,
+			cursorX, baseY - fm.ascent, entryPtr->insertWidth,
+			fm.ascent + fm.descent, entryPtr->insertBorderWidth,
+			TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+	    } else if (entryPtr->insertBorder == entryPtr->selBorder) {
+		Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, cursorX,
+			baseY - fm.ascent, entryPtr->insertWidth,
+			fm.ascent + fm.descent, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
 	    }
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Draw the text in two pieces:  first the unselected portion, then the
+     * Draw the text in two pieces: first the unselected portion, then the
      * selected portion on top of it.
      */
 
@@ -1778,17 +1723,18 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
 	/*
 	 * Draw the spin button controls.
 	 */
-        if (TkpDrawSpinboxButtons(sbPtr, pixmap) == 0) {
-            xWidth = entryPtr->xWidth;
-            pad    = XPAD + 1;
-            inset  = entryPtr->inset - XPAD;
-            startx = Tk_Width(tkwin) - (xWidth + inset);
-            height = (Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*inset)/2;
+
+	if (TkpDrawSpinboxButtons(sbPtr, pixmap) == 0) {
+	    xWidth = entryPtr->xWidth;
+	    pad = XPAD + 1;
+	    inset = entryPtr->inset - XPAD;
+	    startx = Tk_Width(tkwin) - (xWidth + inset);
+	    height = (Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*inset)/2;
 #if 0
-            Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, sbPtr->buttonBorder,
-                    startx, inset, xWidth, height, 1, sbPtr->buRelief);
-            Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, sbPtr->buttonBorder,
-                    startx, inset+height, xWidth, height, 1, sbPtr->bdRelief);
+	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, sbPtr->buttonBorder,
+		    startx, inset, xWidth, height, 1, sbPtr->buRelief);
+	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, sbPtr->buttonBorder,
+		    startx, inset+height, xWidth, height, 1, sbPtr->bdRelief);
 #else
 	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, sbPtr->buttonBorder,
 		    startx, inset, xWidth, height, 1,
@@ -1799,90 +1745,97 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
 		    (sbPtr->selElement == SEL_BUTTONDOWN) ?
 		    TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN : TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
 #endif
-    
-            xWidth -= 2*pad;
-            /*
-             * Only draw the triangles if we have enough display space
-             */
-            if ((xWidth > 1)) {
-                XPoint points[3];
-                int starty, space, offset;
-
-                space = height - 2*pad;
-                /*
-                 * Ensure width of triangle is odd to guarantee a sharp tip
-                 */
-                if (!(xWidth % 2)) {
-                    xWidth++;
-                }
-                tHeight = (xWidth + 1) / 2;
-                if (tHeight > space) {
-                    tHeight = space;
-                }
-                space   = (space - tHeight) / 2;
-                startx += pad;
-                starty  = inset + height - pad - space;
-                offset  = (sbPtr->selElement == SEL_BUTTONUP);
-                /*
-                 * The points are slightly different for the up and down arrows
-                 * because (for *.x), we need to account for a bug in the way
-                 * XFillPolygon draws triangles, and we want to shift
-                 * the arrows differently when allowing for depressed behavior.
-                 */
-                points[0].x = startx + offset;
-                points[0].y = starty + (offset ? 0 : -1);
-                points[1].x = startx + xWidth/2 + offset;
-                points[1].y = starty - tHeight + (offset ? 0 : -1);
-                points[2].x = startx + xWidth + offset;
-                points[2].y = points[0].y;
-                XFillPolygon(entryPtr->display, pixmap, entryPtr->textGC,
-                        points, 3, Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
-
-                starty = inset + height + pad + space;
-                offset = (sbPtr->selElement == SEL_BUTTONDOWN);
-                points[0].x = startx + 1 + offset;
-                points[0].y = starty + (offset ? 1 : 0);
-                points[1].x = startx + xWidth/2 + offset;
-                points[1].y = starty + tHeight + (offset ? 0 : -1);
-                points[2].x = startx - 1 + xWidth + offset;
-                points[2].y = points[0].y;
-                XFillPolygon(entryPtr->display, pixmap, entryPtr->textGC,
-                        points, 3, Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
-            }
-        }
+
+	    xWidth -= 2*pad;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Only draw the triangles if we have enough display space
+	     */
+
+	    if ((xWidth > 1)) {
+		XPoint points[3];
+		int starty, space, offset;
+
+		space = height - 2*pad;
+
+		/*
+		 * Ensure width of triangle is odd to guarantee a sharp tip
+		 */
+
+		if (!(xWidth % 2)) {
+		    xWidth++;
+		}
+		tHeight = (xWidth + 1) / 2;
+		if (tHeight > space) {
+		    tHeight = space;
+		}
+		space	= (space - tHeight) / 2;
+		startx += pad;
+		starty	= inset + height - pad - space;
+		offset	= (sbPtr->selElement == SEL_BUTTONUP);
+
+		/*
+		 * The points are slightly different for the up and down
+		 * arrows because (for *.x), we need to account for a bug in
+		 * the way XFillPolygon draws triangles, and we want to shift
+		 * the arrows differently when allowing for depressed
+		 * behavior.
+		 */
+
+		points[0].x = startx + offset;
+		points[0].y = starty + (offset ? 0 : -1);
+		points[1].x = startx + xWidth/2 + offset;
+		points[1].y = starty - tHeight + (offset ? 0 : -1);
+		points[2].x = startx + xWidth + offset;
+		points[2].y = points[0].y;
+		XFillPolygon(entryPtr->display, pixmap, entryPtr->textGC,
+			points, 3, Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
+
+		starty = inset + height + pad + space;
+		offset = (sbPtr->selElement == SEL_BUTTONDOWN);
+		points[0].x = startx + 1 + offset;
+		points[0].y = starty + (offset ? 1 : 0);
+		points[1].x = startx + xWidth/2 + offset;
+		points[1].y = starty + tHeight + (offset ? 0 : -1);
+		points[2].x = startx - 1 + xWidth + offset;
+		points[2].y = points[0].y;
+		XFillPolygon(entryPtr->display, pixmap, entryPtr->textGC,
+			points, 3, Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
+	    }
+	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Draw the border and focus highlight last, so they will overwrite
-     * any text that extends past the viewable part of the window.
+     * Draw the border and focus highlight last, so they will overwrite any
+     * text that extends past the viewable part of the window.
      */
 
-    if (!TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus(entryPtr, pixmap, 
-            (entryPtr->type == TK_SPINBOX))) {
-        xBound = entryPtr->highlightWidth;
-        if (entryPtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
+    if (!TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus(entryPtr, pixmap,
+	    (entryPtr->type == TK_SPINBOX))) {
+	xBound = entryPtr->highlightWidth;
+	if (entryPtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
 	    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, xBound, xBound,
-                    Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * xBound,
+		    Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * xBound,
 		    Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * xBound,
 		    entryPtr->borderWidth, entryPtr->relief);
-        }
-        if (xBound > 0) {
+	}
+	if (xBound > 0) {
 	    GC fgGC, bgGC;
 
 	    bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(entryPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, pixmap);
 	    if (entryPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
-	        fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(entryPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap);
-	        TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, xBound, pixmap);
+		fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(entryPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap);
+		TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, xBound, pixmap);
 	    } else {
-	        TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, bgGC, bgGC, xBound, pixmap);
+		TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, bgGC, bgGC, xBound, pixmap);
 	    }
-        }
+	}
     }
 
 #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
     /*
-     * Everything's been redisplayed;  now copy the pixmap onto the screen
-     * and free up the pixmap.
+     * Everything's been redisplayed; now copy the pixmap onto the screen and
+     * free up the pixmap.
      */
 
     XCopyArea(entryPtr->display, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), entryPtr->textGC,
@@ -1898,24 +1851,24 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
  *
  * EntryComputeGeometry --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to recompute information about where
- *	in its window an entry's string will be displayed.  It also
- *	computes the requested size for the window.
+ *	This function is invoked to recompute information about where in its
+ *	window an entry's string will be displayed. It also computes the
+ *	requested size for the window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The leftX and tabOrigin fields are recomputed for entryPtr,
- *	and leftIndex may be adjusted.  Tk_GeometryRequest is called
- *	to register the desired dimensions for the window.
+ *	The leftX and tabOrigin fields are recomputed for entryPtr, and
+ *	leftIndex may be adjusted. Tk_GeometryRequest is called to register
+ *	the desired dimensions for the window.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr)
-    Entry *entryPtr;		/* Widget record for entry. */
+EntryComputeGeometry(
+    Entry *entryPtr)		/* Widget record for entry. */
 {
     int totalLength, overflow, maxOffScreen, rightX;
     int height, width, i;
@@ -1929,8 +1882,8 @@ EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If we're displaying a special character instead of the value of
-     * the entry, recompute the displayString.
+     * If we're displaying a special character instead of the value of the
+     * entry, recompute the displayString.
      */
 
     if (entryPtr->showChar != NULL) {
@@ -1939,10 +1892,10 @@ EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr)
 	int size;
 
 	/*
-	 * Normalize the special character so we can safely duplicate it
-	 * in the display string.  If we didn't do this, then two malformed
-	 * characters might end up looking like one valid UTF character in
-	 * the resulting string.
+	 * Normalize the special character so we can safely duplicate it in
+	 * the display string. If we didn't do this, then two malformed
+	 * characters might end up looking like one valid UTF character in the
+	 * resulting string.
 	 */
 
 	Tcl_UtfToUniChar(entryPtr->showChar, &ch);
@@ -1966,21 +1919,21 @@ EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr)
     entryPtr->layoutY = (Tk_Height(entryPtr->tkwin) - height) / 2;
 
     /*
-     * Recompute where the leftmost character on the display will
-     * be drawn (entryPtr->leftX) and adjust leftIndex if necessary
-     * so that we don't let characters hang off the edge of the
-     * window unless the entire window is full.
+     * Recompute where the leftmost character on the display will be drawn
+     * (entryPtr->leftX) and adjust leftIndex if necessary so that we don't
+     * let characters hang off the edge of the window unless the entire window
+     * is full.
      */
 
     overflow = totalLength -
-	(Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin) - 2*entryPtr->inset - entryPtr->xWidth);
+	    (Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin) - 2*entryPtr->inset - entryPtr->xWidth);
     if (overflow <= 0) {
 	entryPtr->leftIndex = 0;
 	if (entryPtr->justify == TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT) {
 	    entryPtr->leftX = entryPtr->inset;
 	} else if (entryPtr->justify == TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT) {
 	    entryPtr->leftX = Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin) - entryPtr->inset
-		- entryPtr->xWidth - totalLength;
+		    - entryPtr->xWidth - totalLength;
 	} else {
 	    entryPtr->leftX = (Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin)
 		    - entryPtr->xWidth - totalLength)/2;
@@ -1988,10 +1941,10 @@ EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr)
 	entryPtr->layoutX = entryPtr->leftX;
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * The whole string can't fit in the window.  Compute the
-	 * maximum number of characters that may be off-screen to
-	 * the left without leaving empty space on the right of the
-	 * window, then don't let leftIndex be any greater than that.
+	 * The whole string can't fit in the window. Compute the maximum
+	 * number of characters that may be off-screen to the left without
+	 * leaving empty space on the right of the window, then don't let
+	 * leftIndex be any greater than that.
 	 */
 
 	maxOffScreen = Tk_PointToChar(entryPtr->textLayout, overflow, 0);
@@ -2040,23 +1993,25 @@ EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	New information gets added to entryPtr;  it will be redisplayed
- *	soon, but not necessarily immediately.
+ *	New information gets added to entryPtr; it will be redisplayed soon,
+ *	but not necessarily immediately.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-InsertChars(entryPtr, index, value)
-    Entry *entryPtr;		/* Entry that is to get the new elements. */
-    int index;			/* Add the new elements before this
-				 * character index. */
-    char *value;		/* New characters to add (NULL-terminated
+InsertChars(
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry that is to get the new elements. */
+    int index,			/* Add the new elements before this character
+				 * index. */
+    char *value)		/* New characters to add (NULL-terminated
 				 * string). */
 {
-    int byteIndex, byteCount, oldChars, charsAdded, newByteCount;
-    CONST char *string;
-    char *new;
+    ptrdiff_t byteIndex;
+    size_t byteCount, newByteCount;
+    int oldChars, charsAdded;
+    const char *string;
+    char *newStr;
 
     string = entryPtr->string;
     byteIndex = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, index) - string;
@@ -2066,48 +2021,47 @@ InsertChars(entryPtr, index, value)
     }
 
     newByteCount = entryPtr->numBytes + byteCount + 1;
-    new = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) newByteCount);
-    memcpy(new, string, (size_t) byteIndex);
-    strcpy(new + byteIndex, value);
-    strcpy(new + byteIndex + byteCount, string + byteIndex);
+    newStr = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) newByteCount);
+    memcpy(newStr, string, byteIndex);
+    strcpy(newStr + byteIndex, value);
+    strcpy(newStr + byteIndex + byteCount, string + byteIndex);
 
     if ((entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_KEY ||
-	 entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_ALL) &&
-	EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, value, new, index,
-			    VALIDATE_INSERT) != TCL_OK) {
-	ckfree(new);
+	    entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_ALL) &&
+	    EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, value, newStr, index,
+		    VALIDATE_INSERT) != TCL_OK) {
+	ckfree(newStr);
 	return;
     }
 
     ckfree((char *)string);
-    entryPtr->string = new;
+    entryPtr->string = newStr;
 
     /*
-     * The following construction is used because inserting improperly
-     * formed UTF-8 sequences between other improperly formed UTF-8
-     * sequences could result in actually forming valid UTF-8 sequences;
-     * the number of characters added may not be Tcl_NumUtfChars(string, -1),
-     * because of context.  The actual number of characters added is how
-     * many characters are in the string now minus the number that
-     * used to be there.
+     * The following construction is used because inserting improperly formed
+     * UTF-8 sequences between other improperly formed UTF-8 sequences could
+     * result in actually forming valid UTF-8 sequences; the number of
+     * characters added may not be Tcl_NumUtfChars(string, -1), because of
+     * context. The actual number of characters added is how many characters
+     * are in the string now minus the number that used to be there.
      */
 
     oldChars = entryPtr->numChars;
-    entryPtr->numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(new, -1);
+    entryPtr->numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(newStr, -1);
     charsAdded = entryPtr->numChars - oldChars;
     entryPtr->numBytes += byteCount;
 
     if (entryPtr->displayString == string) {
-	entryPtr->displayString = new;
+	entryPtr->displayString = newStr;
 	entryPtr->numDisplayBytes = entryPtr->numBytes;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Inserting characters invalidates all indexes into the string.
-     * Touch up the indexes so that they still refer to the same
-     * characters (at new positions).  When updating the selection
-     * end-points, don't include the new text in the selection unless
-     * it was completely surrounded by the selection.
+     * Inserting characters invalidates all indexes into the string. Touch up
+     * the indexes so that they still refer to the same characters (at new
+     * positions). When updating the selection end-points, don't include the
+     * new text in the selection unless it was completely surrounded by the
+     * selection.
      */
 
     if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= index) {
@@ -2116,8 +2070,7 @@ InsertChars(entryPtr, index, value)
     if (entryPtr->selectLast > index) {
 	entryPtr->selectLast += charsAdded;
     }
-    if ((entryPtr->selectAnchor > index)
-	    || (entryPtr->selectFirst >= index)) {
+    if ((entryPtr->selectAnchor > index) || (entryPtr->selectFirst >= index)) {
 	entryPtr->selectAnchor += charsAdded;
     }
     if (entryPtr->leftIndex > index) {
@@ -2147,14 +2100,14 @@ InsertChars(entryPtr, index, value)
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteChars(entryPtr, index, count)
-    Entry *entryPtr;		/* Entry widget to modify. */
-    int index;			/* Index of first character to delete. */
-    int count;			/* How many characters to delete. */
+DeleteChars(
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry widget to modify. */
+    int index,			/* Index of first character to delete. */
+    int count)			/* How many characters to delete. */
 {
     int byteIndex, byteCount, newByteCount;
-    CONST char *string;
-    char *new, *todelete;
+    const char *string;
+    char *newStr, *toDelete;
 
     if ((index + count) > entryPtr->numChars) {
 	count = entryPtr->numChars - index;
@@ -2165,41 +2118,41 @@ DeleteChars(entryPtr, index, count)
 
     string = entryPtr->string;
     byteIndex = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, index) - string;
-    byteCount = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string + byteIndex, count) - (string + byteIndex);
+    byteCount = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string + byteIndex, count) - (string+byteIndex);
 
     newByteCount = entryPtr->numBytes + 1 - byteCount;
-    new = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) newByteCount);
-    memcpy(new, string, (size_t) byteIndex);
-    strcpy(new + byteIndex, string + byteIndex + byteCount);
+    newStr = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) newByteCount);
+    memcpy(newStr, string, (size_t) byteIndex);
+    strcpy(newStr + byteIndex, string + byteIndex + byteCount);
 
-    todelete = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (byteCount + 1));
-    memcpy(todelete, string + byteIndex, (size_t) byteCount);
-    todelete[byteCount] = '\0';
+    toDelete = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (byteCount + 1));
+    memcpy(toDelete, string + byteIndex, (size_t) byteCount);
+    toDelete[byteCount] = '\0';
 
     if ((entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_KEY ||
-	 entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_ALL) &&
-	EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, todelete, new, index,
-			    VALIDATE_DELETE) != TCL_OK) {
-	ckfree(new);
-	ckfree(todelete);
+	    entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_ALL) &&
+	    EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, toDelete, newStr, index,
+		    VALIDATE_DELETE) != TCL_OK) {
+	ckfree(newStr);
+	ckfree(toDelete);
 	return;
     }
 
-    ckfree(todelete);
+    ckfree(toDelete);
     ckfree((char *)entryPtr->string);
-    entryPtr->string = new;
+    entryPtr->string = newStr;
     entryPtr->numChars -= count;
     entryPtr->numBytes -= byteCount;
 
     if (entryPtr->displayString == string) {
-	entryPtr->displayString = new;
+	entryPtr->displayString = newStr;
 	entryPtr->numDisplayBytes = entryPtr->numBytes;
     }
 
     /*
      * Deleting characters results in the remaining characters being
-     * renumbered.  Update the various indexes into the string to reflect
-     * this change.
+     * renumbered. Update the various indexes into the string to reflect this
+     * change.
      */
 
     if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= index) {
@@ -2249,10 +2202,9 @@ DeleteChars(entryPtr, index, count)
  *
  * EntryValueChanged --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when characters are inserted into
- *	an entry or deleted from it.  It updates the entry's associated
- *	variable, if there is one, and does other bookkeeping such
- *	as arranging for redisplay.
+ *	This function is invoked when characters are inserted into an entry or
+ *	deleted from it. It updates the entry's associated variable, if there
+ *	is one, and does other bookkeeping such as arranging for redisplay.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2264,10 +2216,10 @@ DeleteChars(entryPtr, index, count)
  */
 
 static void
-EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, newValue)
-    Entry *entryPtr;		/* Entry whose value just changed. */
-    CONST char *newValue;	/* If this value is not NULL, we first
-				 * force the value of the entry to this */
+EntryValueChanged(
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry whose value just changed. */
+    const char *newValue)	/* If this value is not NULL, we first force
+				 * the value of the entry to this. */
 {
     if (newValue != NULL) {
 	EntrySetValue(entryPtr, newValue);
@@ -2283,10 +2235,10 @@ EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, newValue)
     if ((newValue != NULL) && (strcmp(newValue, entryPtr->string) != 0)) {
 	/*
 	 * The value of the variable is different than what we asked for.
-	 * This means that a trace on the variable modified it.  In this
-	 * case our trace procedure wasn't invoked since the modification
-	 * came while a trace was already active on the variable.  So,
-	 * update our value to reflect the variable's latest value.
+	 * This means that a trace on the variable modified it. In this case
+	 * our trace function wasn't invoked since the modification came while
+	 * a trace was already active on the variable. So, update our value to
+	 * reflect the variable's latest value.
 	 */
 
 	EntrySetValue(entryPtr, newValue);
@@ -2306,29 +2258,29 @@ EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, newValue)
  *
  * EntrySetValue --
  *
- *	Replace the contents of a text entry with a given value.  This
- *	procedure is invoked when updating the entry from the entry's
- *	associated variable.
+ *	Replace the contents of a text entry with a given value. This function
+ *	is invoked when updating the entry from the entry's associated
+ *	variable.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The string displayed in the entry will change.  The selection,
- *	insertion point, and view may have to be adjusted to keep them
- *	within the bounds of the new string.  Note: this procedure does
- *	*not* update the entry's associated variable, since that could
- *	result in an infinite loop.
+ *	The string displayed in the entry will change. The selection,
+ *	insertion point, and view may have to be adjusted to keep them within
+ *	the bounds of the new string. Note: this function does *not* update
+ *	the entry's associated variable, since that could result in an
+ *	infinite loop.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EntrySetValue(entryPtr, value)
-    Entry *entryPtr;		/* Entry whose value is to be changed. */
-    CONST char *value;		/* New text to display in entry. */
+EntrySetValue(
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry whose value is to be changed. */
+    const char *value)		/* New text to display in entry. */
 {
-    CONST char *oldSource;
+    const char *oldSource;
     int valueLen, malloced = 0;
 
     if (strcmp(value, entryPtr->string) == 0) {
@@ -2340,23 +2292,27 @@ EntrySetValue(entryPtr, value)
 	entryPtr->flags |= VALIDATE_ABORT;
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * If we validate, we create a copy of the value, as it may
-	 * point to volatile memory, like the value of the -textvar
-	 * which may get freed during validation
+	 * If we validate, we create a copy of the value, as it may point to
+	 * volatile memory, like the value of the -textvar which may get freed
+	 * during validation
 	 */
+
 	char *tmp = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (valueLen + 1));
+
 	strcpy(tmp, value);
 	value = tmp;
 	malloced = 1;
 
 	entryPtr->flags |= VALIDATE_VAR;
-	(void) EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, (char *) NULL, value, -1,
+	(void) EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, NULL, value, -1,
 		VALIDATE_FORCED);
 	entryPtr->flags &= ~VALIDATE_VAR;
+
 	/*
 	 * If VALIDATE_ABORT has been set, then this operation should be
 	 * aborted because the validatecommand did something else instead
 	 */
+
 	if (entryPtr->flags & VALIDATE_ABORT) {
 	    entryPtr->flags &= ~VALIDATE_ABORT;
 	    ckfree((char *)value);
@@ -2371,6 +2327,7 @@ EntrySetValue(entryPtr, value)
 	entryPtr->string = value;
     } else {
 	char *tmp = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (valueLen + 1));
+
 	strcpy(tmp, value);
 	entryPtr->string = tmp;
     }
@@ -2411,23 +2368,23 @@ EntrySetValue(entryPtr, value)
  *
  * EntryEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on entries.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	entries.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up.
+ *	When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EntryEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+EntryEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
 
@@ -2458,34 +2415,33 @@ EntryEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
     }
 
     switch (eventPtr->type) {
-	case Expose:
-	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-	    entryPtr->flags |= BORDER_NEEDED;
-	    break;
-	case DestroyNotify:
-	    if (!(entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED)) {
-		entryPtr->flags |= (ENTRY_DELETED | VALIDATE_ABORT);
-		Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(entryPtr->interp,
-			entryPtr->widgetCmd);
-		if (entryPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
-		    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayEntry, clientData);
-		}
-		Tcl_EventuallyFree(clientData, DestroyEntry);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case ConfigureNotify:
-	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) entryPtr);
-	    entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
-	    EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
-	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-	    Tcl_Release((ClientData) entryPtr);
-	    break;
-	case FocusIn:
-	case FocusOut:
-	    if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) {
-		EntryFocusProc(entryPtr, (eventPtr->type == FocusIn));
+    case Expose:
+	EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
+	entryPtr->flags |= BORDER_NEEDED;
+	break;
+    case DestroyNotify:
+	if (!(entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED)) {
+	    entryPtr->flags |= (ENTRY_DELETED | VALIDATE_ABORT);
+	    Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(entryPtr->interp, entryPtr->widgetCmd);
+	    if (entryPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
+		Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayEntry, clientData);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	    Tcl_EventuallyFree(clientData, DestroyEntry);
+	}
+	break;
+    case ConfigureNotify:
+	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) entryPtr);
+	entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
+	EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
+	EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
+	Tcl_Release((ClientData) entryPtr);
+	break;
+    case FocusIn:
+    case FocusOut:
+	if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) {
+	    EntryFocusProc(entryPtr, (eventPtr->type == FocusIn));
+	}
+	break;
     }
 }
 
@@ -2494,9 +2450,9 @@ EntryEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * EntryCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2508,20 +2464,20 @@ EntryEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-EntryCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+EntryCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (!(entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED)) {
-        Tk_DestroyWindow(entryPtr->tkwin);
+	Tk_DestroyWindow(entryPtr->tkwin);
     }
 }
 
@@ -2530,15 +2486,14 @@ EntryCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * GetEntryIndex --
  *
- *	Parse an index into an entry and return either its value
- *	or an error.
+ *	Parse an index into an entry and return either its value or an error.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.  If all went well, then *indexPtr is
- *	filled in with the character index (into entryPtr) corresponding to
- *	string.  The index value is guaranteed to lie between 0 and
- *	the number of characters in the string, inclusive.  If an
- *	error occurs then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result. If all went well, then *indexPtr is filled in
+ *	with the character index (into entryPtr) corresponding to string. The
+ *	index value is guaranteed to lie between 0 and the number of
+ *	characters in the string, inclusive. If an error occurs then an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2547,13 +2502,12 @@ EntryCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static int
-GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, string, indexPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* For error messages. */
-    Entry *entryPtr;		/* Entry for which the index is being
+GetEntryIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For error messages. */
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry for which the index is being
 				 * specified. */
-    char *string;		/* Specifies character in entryPtr. */
-    int *indexPtr;		/* Where to store converted character
-				 * index. */
+    char *string,		/* Specifies character in entryPtr. */
+    int *indexPtr)		/* Where to store converted character index */
 {
     size_t length;
 
@@ -2563,17 +2517,17 @@ GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	if (strncmp(string, "anchor", length) == 0) {
 	    *indexPtr = entryPtr->selectAnchor;
 	} else {
-	    badIndex:
+	badIndex:
 
 	    /*
 	     * Some of the paths here leave messages in the interp's result,
 	     * so we have to clear it out before storing our own message.
 	     */
 
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *) NULL, TCL_STATIC);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, NULL, TCL_STATIC);
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad ",
 		    (entryPtr->type == TK_ENTRY) ? "entry" : "spinbox",
-		    " index \"", string, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    " index \"", string, "\"", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     } else if (string[0] == 'e') {
@@ -2590,9 +2544,9 @@ GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	}
     } else if (string[0] == 's') {
 	if (entryPtr->selectFirst < 0) {
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *) NULL, TCL_STATIC);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, NULL, TCL_STATIC);
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "selection isn't in widget ",
-		    Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin), (char *) NULL);
+		    Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin), NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (length < 5) {
@@ -2625,10 +2579,10 @@ GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, string, indexPtr)
 		x - entryPtr->layoutX, 0);
 
 	/*
-	 * Special trick:  if the x-position was off-screen to the right,
-	 * round the index up to refer to the character just after the
-	 * last visible one on the screen.  This is needed to enable the
-	 * last character to be selected, for example.
+	 * Special trick: if the x-position was off-screen to the right, round
+	 * the index up to refer to the character just after the last visible
+	 * one on the screen. This is needed to enable the last character to
+	 * be selected, for example.
 	 */
 
 	if (roundUp && (*indexPtr < entryPtr->numChars)) {
@@ -2642,7 +2596,7 @@ GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	    *indexPtr = 0;
 	} else if (*indexPtr > entryPtr->numChars) {
 	    *indexPtr = entryPtr->numChars;
-	} 
+	}
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -2652,8 +2606,8 @@ GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, string, indexPtr)
  *
  * EntryScanTo --
  *
- *	Given a y-coordinate (presumably of the curent mouse location)
- *	drag the view in the window to implement the scan operation.
+ *	Given a y-coordinate (presumably of the curent mouse location) drag
+ *	the view in the window to implement the scan operation.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2665,21 +2619,21 @@ GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, string, indexPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x)
-    Entry *entryPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
-    int x;			/* X-coordinate to use for scan operation. */
+EntryScanTo(
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Information about widget. */
+    int x)			/* X-coordinate to use for scan operation. */
 {
     int newLeftIndex;
 
     /*
-     * Compute new leftIndex for entry by amplifying the difference
-     * between the current position and the place where the scan
-     * started (the "mark" position).  If we run off the left or right
-     * side of the entry, then reset the mark point so that the current
-     * position continues to correspond to the edge of the window.
-     * This means that the picture will start dragging as soon as the
-     * mouse reverses direction (without this reset, might have to slide
-     * mouse a long ways back before the picture starts moving again).
+     * Compute new leftIndex for entry by amplifying the difference between
+     * the current position and the place where the scan started (the "mark"
+     * position). If we run off the left or right side of the entry, then
+     * reset the mark point so that the current position continues to
+     * correspond to the edge of the window. This means that the picture will
+     * start dragging as soon as the mouse reverses direction (without this
+     * reset, might have to slide mouse a long ways back before the picture
+     * starts moving again).
      */
 
     newLeftIndex = entryPtr->scanMarkIndex
@@ -2691,7 +2645,7 @@ EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x)
     if (newLeftIndex < 0) {
 	newLeftIndex = entryPtr->scanMarkIndex = 0;
 	entryPtr->scanMarkX = x;
-    } 
+    }
 
     if (newLeftIndex != entryPtr->leftIndex) {
 	entryPtr->leftIndex = newLeftIndex;
@@ -2710,8 +2664,8 @@ EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x)
  *
  * EntrySelectTo --
  *
- *	Modify the selection by moving its un-anchored end.  This could
- *	make the selection either larger or smaller.
+ *	Modify the selection by moving its un-anchored end. This could make
+ *	the selection either larger or smaller.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2723,9 +2677,9 @@ EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x)
  */
 
 static void
-EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index)
-    Entry *entryPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
-    int index;			/* Character index of element that is to
+EntrySelectTo(
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Information about widget. */
+    int index)			/* Character index of element that is to
 				 * become the "other" end of the selection. */
 {
     int newFirst, newLast;
@@ -2771,15 +2725,15 @@ EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index)
  *
  * EntryFetchSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is called back by Tk when the selection is
- *	requested by someone.  It returns part or all of the selection
- *	in a buffer provided by the caller.
+ *	This function is called back by Tk when the selection is requested by
+ *	someone. It returns part or all of the selection in a buffer provided
+ *	by the caller.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the number of non-NULL bytes stored
- *	at buffer.  Buffer is filled (or partially filled) with a
- *	NULL-terminated string containing part or all of the selection,
- *	as given by offset and maxBytes.
+ *	The return value is the number of non-NULL bytes stored at buffer.
+ *	Buffer is filled (or partially filled) with a NULL-terminated string
+ *	containing part or all of the selection, as given by offset and
+ *	maxBytes.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2788,19 +2742,18 @@ EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index)
  */
 
 static int
-EntryFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about entry widget. */
-    int offset;			/* Byte offset within selection of first
+EntryFetchSelection(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about entry widget. */
+    int offset,			/* Byte offset within selection of first
 				 * character to be returned. */
-    char *buffer;		/* Location in which to place selection. */
-    int maxBytes;		/* Maximum number of bytes to place at
-				 * buffer, not including terminating NULL
-				 * character. */
+    char *buffer,		/* Location in which to place selection. */
+    int maxBytes)		/* Maximum number of bytes to place at buffer,
+				 * not including terminating NUL character. */
 {
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
     int byteCount;
-    CONST char *string;
-    CONST char *selStart, *selEnd;
+    const char *string;
+    const char *selStart, *selEnd;
 
     if ((entryPtr->selectFirst < 0) || !(entryPtr->exportSelection)) {
 	return -1;
@@ -2826,32 +2779,32 @@ EntryFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  *
  * EntryLostSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is called back by Tk when the selection is
- *	grabbed away from an entry widget.
+ *	This function is called back by Tk when the selection is grabbed away
+ *	from an entry widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The existing selection is unhighlighted, and the window is
- *	marked as not containing a selection.
+ *	The existing selection is unhighlighted, and the window is marked as
+ *	not containing a selection.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EntryLostSelection(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about entry widget. */
+EntryLostSelection(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about entry widget. */
 {
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
 
     entryPtr->flags &= ~GOT_SELECTION;
 
     /*
-     * On Windows and Mac systems, we want to remember the selection
-     * for the next time the focus enters the window.  On Unix, we need
-     * to clear the selection since it is always visible.  This is
-     * controlled by ::tk::AlwaysShowSelection.
+     * On Windows and Mac systems, we want to remember the selection for the
+     * next time the focus enters the window. On Unix, we need to clear the
+     * selection since it is always visible.
+     * This is controlled by ::tk::AlwaysShowSelection.
      */
 
     if (TkpAlwaysShowSelection(entryPtr->tkwin)
@@ -2873,26 +2826,26 @@ EntryLostSelection(clientData)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Information gets redisplayed.  Right now we don't do selective
- *	redisplays:  the whole window will be redrawn.  This doesn't
- *	seem to hurt performance noticeably, but if it does then this
- *	could be changed.
+ *	Information gets redisplayed. Right now we don't do selective
+ *	redisplays: the whole window will be redrawn. This doesn't seem to
+ *	hurt performance noticeably, but if it does then this could be
+ *	changed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr)
-    Entry *entryPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
+EventuallyRedraw(
+    Entry *entryPtr)		/* Information about widget. */
 {
     if ((entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED) || !Tk_IsMapped(entryPtr->tkwin)) {
 	return;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Right now we don't do selective redisplays:  the whole window
-     * will be redrawn.  This doesn't seem to hurt performance noticeably,
-     * but if it does then this could be changed.
+     * Right now we don't do selective redisplays: the whole window will be
+     * redrawn. This doesn't seem to hurt performance noticeably, but if it
+     * does then this could be changed.
      */
 
     if (!(entryPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
@@ -2906,13 +2859,12 @@ EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr)
  *
  * EntryVisibleRange --
  *
- *	Return information about the range of the entry that is
- *	currently visible.
+ *	Return information about the range of the entry that is currently
+ *	visible.
  *
  * Results:
- *	*firstPtr and *lastPtr are modified to hold fractions between
- *	0 and 1 identifying the range of characters visible in the
- *	entry.
+ *	*firstPtr and *lastPtr are modified to hold fractions between 0 and 1
+ *	identifying the range of characters visible in the entry.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2921,11 +2873,11 @@ EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, firstPtr, lastPtr)
-    Entry *entryPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
-    double *firstPtr;		/* Return position of first visible
-				 * character in widget. */
-    double *lastPtr;		/* Return position of char just after last
+EntryVisibleRange(
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Information about widget. */
+    double *firstPtr,		/* Return position of first visible character
+				 * in widget. */
+    double *lastPtr)		/* Return position of char just after last
 				 * visible one. */
 {
     int charsInWindow;
@@ -2956,10 +2908,10 @@ EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, firstPtr, lastPtr)
  *
  * EntryUpdateScrollbar --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever information has changed in
- *	an entry in a way that would invalidate a scrollbar display.
- *	If there is an associated scrollbar, then this procedure updates
- *	it by invoking a Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever information has changed in an entry
+ *	in a way that would invalidate a scrollbar display. If there is an
+ *	associated scrollbar, then this function updates it by invoking a Tcl
+ *	command.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2972,10 +2924,10 @@ EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, firstPtr, lastPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-EntryUpdateScrollbar(entryPtr)
-    Entry *entryPtr;			/* Information about widget. */
+EntryUpdateScrollbar(
+    Entry *entryPtr)			/* Information about widget. */
 {
-    char args[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2];
+    char firstStr[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE], lastStr[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
     int code;
     double first, last;
     Tcl_Interp *interp;
@@ -2987,8 +2939,10 @@ EntryUpdateScrollbar(entryPtr)
     interp = entryPtr->interp;
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
     EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, &first, &last);
-    sprintf(args, " %g %g", first, last);
-    code = Tcl_VarEval(interp, entryPtr->scrollCmd, args, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, first, firstStr);
+    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, last, lastStr);
+    code = Tcl_VarEval(interp, entryPtr->scrollCmd, " ", firstStr, " ",
+	    lastStr, NULL);
     if (code != TCL_OK) {
 	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
 		"\n    (horizontal scrolling command executed by ");
@@ -2996,7 +2950,7 @@ EntryUpdateScrollbar(entryPtr)
 	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, ")");
 	Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
     }
-    Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *) NULL, TCL_STATIC);
+    Tcl_SetResult(interp, NULL, TCL_STATIC);
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
 }
 
@@ -3005,22 +2959,22 @@ EntryUpdateScrollbar(entryPtr)
  *
  * EntryBlinkProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called as a timer handler to blink the
- *	insertion cursor off and on.
+ *	This function is called as a timer handler to blink the insertion
+ *	cursor off and on.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The cursor gets turned on or off, redisplay gets invoked,
- *	and this procedure reschedules itself.
+ *	The cursor gets turned on or off, redisplay gets invoked, and this
+ *	function reschedules itself.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EntryBlinkProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to record describing entry. */
+EntryBlinkProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to record describing entry. */
 {
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
 
@@ -3046,9 +3000,9 @@ EntryBlinkProc(clientData)
  *
  * EntryFocusProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called whenever the entry gets or loses the
- *	input focus.  It's also called whenever the window is reconfigured
- *	while it has the focus.
+ *	This function is called whenever the entry gets or loses the input
+ *	focus. It's also called whenever the window is reconfigured while it
+ *	has the focus.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -3060,9 +3014,9 @@ EntryBlinkProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-EntryFocusProc(entryPtr, gotFocus)
-    Entry *entryPtr;		/* Entry that got or lost focus. */
-    int gotFocus;		/* 1 means window is getting focus, 0 means
+EntryFocusProc(
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry that got or lost focus. */
+    int gotFocus)		/* 1 means window is getting focus, 0 means
 				 * it's losing it. */
 {
     Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(entryPtr->insertBlinkHandler);
@@ -3076,7 +3030,7 @@ EntryFocusProc(entryPtr, gotFocus)
 	if (entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_ALL ||
 	    entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_FOCUS ||
 	    entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_FOCUSIN) {
-	    EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, (char *) NULL,
+	    EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, NULL,
 				entryPtr->string, -1, VALIDATE_FOCUSIN);
 	}
     } else {
@@ -3085,7 +3039,7 @@ EntryFocusProc(entryPtr, gotFocus)
 	if (entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_ALL ||
 	    entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_FOCUS ||
 	    entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_FOCUSOUT) {
-	    EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, (char *) NULL,
+	    EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, NULL,
 				entryPtr->string, -1, VALIDATE_FOCUSOUT);
 	}
     }
@@ -3097,41 +3051,40 @@ EntryFocusProc(entryPtr, gotFocus)
  *
  * EntryTextVarProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when someone changes the variable
- *	whose contents are to be displayed in an entry.
+ *	This function is invoked when someone changes the variable whose
+ *	contents are to be displayed in an entry.
  *
  * Results:
  *	NULL is always returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The text displayed in the entry will change to match the
- *	variable.
+ *	The text displayed in the entry will change to match the variable.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static char *
-EntryTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about button. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
-    CONST char *name1;		/* Not used. */
-    CONST char *name2;		/* Not used. */
-    int flags;			/* Information about what happened. */
+EntryTextVarProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about button. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
+    const char *name1,		/* Not used. */
+    const char *name2,		/* Not used. */
+    int flags)			/* Information about what happened. */
 {
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
-    CONST char *value;
+    const char *value;
 
     if (entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED) {
 	/*
 	 * Just abort early if we entered here while being deleted.
 	 */
-	return (char *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless
-     * the whole interpreter is going away.
+     * If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless the whole
+     * interpreter is going away.
      */
 
     if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
@@ -3143,14 +3096,13 @@ EntryTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
 		    EntryTextVarProc, clientData);
 	    entryPtr->flags |= ENTRY_VAR_TRACED;
 	}
-	return (char *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Update the entry's text with the value of the variable, unless
-     * the entry already has that value (this happens when the variable
-     * changes value because we changed it because someone typed in
-     * the entry).
+     * Update the entry's text with the value of the variable, unless the
+     * entry already has that value (this happens when the variable changes
+     * value because we changed it because someone typed in the entry).
      */
 
     value = Tcl_GetVar(interp, entryPtr->textVarName, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
@@ -3158,7 +3110,7 @@ EntryTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
 	value = "";
     }
     EntrySetValue(entryPtr, value);
-    return (char *) NULL;
+    return NULL;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -3166,25 +3118,25 @@ EntryTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
  *
  * EntryValidate --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when any character is added or
- *	removed from the entry widget, or a focus has trigerred validation.
+ *	This function is invoked when any character is added or removed from
+ *	the entry widget, or a focus has trigerred validation.
  *
  * Results:
- *	TCL_OK if the validatecommand passes the new string.
- *      TCL_BREAK if the vcmd executed OK, but rejects the string.
- *      TCL_ERROR if an error occurred while executing the vcmd
- *      or a valid Tcl_Bool is not returned.
+
+ *	TCL_OK if the validatecommand passes the new string. TCL_BREAK if the
+ *	vcmd executed OK, but rejects the string. TCL_ERROR if an error
+ *	occurred while executing the vcmd or a valid Tcl_Bool is not returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      An error condition may arise
+ *	An error condition may arise
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-EntryValidate(entryPtr, cmd)
-     register Entry *entryPtr;	/* Entry that needs validation. */
-     register char *cmd;	/* Validation command (NULL-terminated
+EntryValidate(
+     register Entry *entryPtr,	/* Entry that needs validation. */
+     register char *cmd)	/* Validation command (NULL-terminated
 				 * string). */
 {
     register Tcl_Interp *interp = entryPtr->interp;
@@ -3193,9 +3145,10 @@ EntryValidate(entryPtr, cmd)
     code = Tcl_EvalEx(interp, cmd, -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL | TCL_EVAL_DIRECT);
 
     /*
-     * We accept TCL_OK and TCL_RETURN as valid return codes from the
-     * command callback.
+     * We accept TCL_OK and TCL_RETURN as valid return codes from the command
+     * callback.
      */
+
     if (code != TCL_OK && code != TCL_RETURN) {
 	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n\t(in validation command executed by ");
 	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin));
@@ -3207,8 +3160,9 @@ EntryValidate(entryPtr, cmd)
     /*
      * The command callback should return an acceptable Tcl boolean.
      */
+
     if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-			      &bool) != TCL_OK) {
+	    &bool) != TCL_OK) {
 	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
 		 "\nvalid boolean not returned by validation command");
 	Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
@@ -3225,45 +3179,45 @@ EntryValidate(entryPtr, cmd)
  *
  * EntryValidateChange --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when any character is added or
- *	removed from the entry widget, or a focus has trigerred validation.
+ *	This function is invoked when any character is added or removed from
+ *	the entry widget, or a focus has trigerred validation.
  *
  * Results:
- *	TCL_OK if the validatecommand accepts the new string,
- *      TCL_ERROR if any problems occured with validatecommand.
+ *	TCL_OK if the validatecommand accepts the new string, TCL_ERROR if any
+ *	problems occured with validatecommand.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      The insertion/deletion may be aborted, and the
- *      validatecommand might turn itself off (if an error
- *      or loop condition arises).
+ *	The insertion/deletion may be aborted, and the validatecommand might
+ *	turn itself off (if an error or loop condition arises).
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
-     register Entry *entryPtr;	/* Entry that needs validation. */
-     char *change;		/* Characters to be added/deleted
-				 * (NULL-terminated string). */
-     CONST char *new;           /* Potential new value of entry string */
-     int index;                 /* index of insert/delete, -1 otherwise */
-     int type;                  /* forced, delete, insert,
-				 * focusin or focusout */
+EntryValidateChange(
+     register Entry *entryPtr,	/* Entry that needs validation. */
+     char *change,		/* Characters to be added/deleted
+				 * (NUL-terminated string). */
+     const char *newValue,	/* Potential new value of entry string */
+     int index,			/* index of insert/delete, -1 otherwise */
+     int type)			/* forced, delete, insert, focusin or
+				 * focusout */
 {
     int code, varValidate = (entryPtr->flags & VALIDATE_VAR);
     char *p;
     Tcl_DString script;
-    
+
     if (entryPtr->validateCmd == NULL ||
 	entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_NONE) {
 	return (varValidate ? TCL_ERROR : TCL_OK);
     }
 
     /*
-     * If we're already validating, then we're hitting a loop condition
-     * Return and set validate to 0 to disallow further validations
-     * and prevent current validation from finishing
+     * If we're already validating, then we're hitting a loop condition Return
+     * and set validate to 0 to disallow further validations and prevent
+     * current validation from finishing
      */
+
     if (entryPtr->flags & VALIDATING) {
 	entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_NONE;
 	return (varValidate ? TCL_ERROR : TCL_OK);
@@ -3277,7 +3231,7 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
 
     Tcl_DStringInit(&script);
     ExpandPercents(entryPtr, entryPtr->validateCmd,
-	    change, new, index, type, &script);
+	    change, newValue, index, type, &script);
     Tcl_DStringAppend(&script, "", 1);
 
     p = Tcl_DStringValue(&script);
@@ -3285,10 +3239,10 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
     Tcl_DStringFree(&script);
 
     /*
-     * If e->validate has become VALIDATE_NONE during the validation, or
-     * we now have VALIDATE_VAR set (from EntrySetValue) and didn't before,
-     * it means that a loop condition almost occured.  Do not allow
-     * this validation result to finish.
+     * If e->validate has become VALIDATE_NONE during the validation, or we
+     * now have VALIDATE_VAR set (from EntrySetValue) and didn't before, it
+     * means that a loop condition almost occured. Do not allow this
+     * validation result to finish.
      */
 
     if (entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_NONE
@@ -3297,8 +3251,8 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
     }
 
     /*
-     * It's possible that the user deleted the entry during validation.
-     * In that case, abort future validation and return an error.
+     * It's possible that the user deleted the entry during validation. In
+     * that case, abort future validation and return an error.
      */
 
     if (entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED) {
@@ -3307,20 +3261,19 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
 
     /*
      * If validate will return ERROR, then disallow further validations
-     * Otherwise, if it didn't accept the new string (returned TCL_BREAK)
-     * then eval the invalidCmd (if it's set)
+     * Otherwise, if it didn't accept the new string (returned TCL_BREAK) then
+     * eval the invalidCmd (if it's set)
      */
 
     if (code == TCL_ERROR) {
 	entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_NONE;
     } else if (code == TCL_BREAK) {
 	/*
-	 * If we were doing forced validation (like via a variable
-	 * trace) and the command returned 0, the we turn off validation
-	 * because we assume that textvariables have precedence in
-	 * managing the value.  We also don't call the invcmd, as it
-	 * may want to do entry manipulation which the setting of the
-	 * var will later wipe anyway.
+	 * If we were doing forced validation (like via a variable trace) and
+	 * the command returned 0, the we turn off validation because we
+	 * assume that textvariables have precedence in managing the value.
+	 * We also don't call the invcmd, as it may want to do entry
+	 * manipulation which the setting of the var will later wipe anyway.
 	 */
 
 	if (varValidate) {
@@ -3328,13 +3281,13 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
 	} else if (entryPtr->invalidCmd != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_DStringInit(&script);
 	    ExpandPercents(entryPtr, entryPtr->invalidCmd,
-			   change, new, index, type, &script);
+		    change, newValue, index, type, &script);
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&script, "", 1);
 	    p = Tcl_DStringValue(&script);
 	    if (Tcl_EvalEx(entryPtr->interp, p, -1,
 		    TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL | TCL_EVAL_DIRECT) != TCL_OK) {
 		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(entryPtr->interp,
-				 "\n\t(in invalidcommand executed by entry)");
+			"\n\t(in invalidcommand executed by entry)");
 		Tcl_BackgroundError(entryPtr->interp);
 		code = TCL_ERROR;
 		entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_NONE;
@@ -3342,8 +3295,9 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
 	    Tcl_DStringFree(&script);
 
 	    /*
-	     * It's possible that the user deleted the entry during validation.
-	     * In that case, abort future validation and return an error.
+	     * It's possible that the user deleted the entry during
+	     * validation. In that case, abort future validation and return an
+	     * error.
 	     */
 
 	    if (entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED) {
@@ -3362,13 +3316,12 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
  *
  * ExpandPercents --
  *
- *	Given a command and an event, produce a new command
- *	by replacing % constructs in the original command
- *	with information from the X event.
+ *	Given a command and an event, produce a new command by replacing %
+ *	constructs in the original command with information from the X event.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The new expanded command is appended to the dynamic string
- *	given by dsPtr.
+ *	The new expanded command is appended to the dynamic string given by
+ *	dsPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3377,23 +3330,23 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
  */
 
 static void
-ExpandPercents(entryPtr, before, change, new, index, type, dsPtr)
-     register Entry *entryPtr;	/* Entry that needs validation. */
-     register CONST char *before;
-				/* Command containing percent
-				 * expressions to be replaced. */
-     char *change;		/* Characters to added/deleted
-				 * (NULL-terminated string). */
-     CONST char *new;		/* Potential new value of entry string */
-     int index;			/* index of insert/delete */
-     int type;			/* INSERT or DELETE */
-     Tcl_DString *dsPtr;	/* Dynamic string in which to append
-				 * new command. */
+ExpandPercents(
+     register Entry *entryPtr,	/* Entry that needs validation. */
+     register const char *before,
+				/* Command containing percent expressions to
+				 * be replaced. */
+     const char *change,	/* Characters to added/deleted (NUL-terminated
+				 * string). */
+     const char *newValue,	/* Potential new value of entry string */
+     int index,			/* index of insert/delete */
+     int type,			/* INSERT or DELETE */
+     Tcl_DString *dsPtr)	/* Dynamic string in which to append new
+				 * command. */
 {
     int spaceNeeded, cvtFlags;	/* Used to substitute string as proper Tcl
 				 * list element. */
     int number, length;
-    register CONST char *string;
+    register const char *string;
     Tcl_UniChar ch;
     char numStorage[2*TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
 
@@ -3402,14 +3355,18 @@ ExpandPercents(entryPtr, before, change, new, index, type, dsPtr)
 	    break;
 	}
 	/*
-	 * Find everything up to the next % character and append it
-	 * to the result string.
+	 * Find everything up to the next % character and append it to the
+	 * result string.
 	 */
 
 	string = before;
-	/* No need to convert '%', as it is in ascii range */
+
+	/*
+	 * No need to convert '%', as it is in ascii range.
+	 */
+
 	string = Tcl_UtfFindFirst(before, '%');
-	if (string == (char *) NULL) {
+	if (string == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, before, -1);
 	    break;
 	} else if (string != before) {
@@ -3418,7 +3375,7 @@ ExpandPercents(entryPtr, before, change, new, index, type, dsPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * There's a percent sequence here.  Process it.
+	 * There's a percent sequence here. Process it.
 	 */
 
 	before++; /* skip over % */
@@ -3431,80 +3388,82 @@ ExpandPercents(entryPtr, before, change, new, index, type, dsPtr)
 	    /*
 	     * -command %-substitution
 	     */
+
 	    switch (ch) {
-		case 's': /* Current string value of spinbox */
-		    string = entryPtr->string;
-		    break;
-		case 'd': /* direction, up or down */
-		    string = change;
-		    break;
-		case 'W': /* widget name */
-		    string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin);
-		    break;
-		default:
-		    length = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, numStorage);
-		    numStorage[length] = '\0';
-		    string = numStorage;
-		    break;
+	    case 's':		/* Current string value of spinbox */
+		string = entryPtr->string;
+		break;
+	    case 'd':		/* direction, up or down */
+		string = change;
+		break;
+	    case 'W':		/* widget name */
+		string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin);
+		break;
+	    default:
+		length = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, numStorage);
+		numStorage[length] = '\0';
+		string = numStorage;
+		break;
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    /*
 	     * -validatecommand / -invalidcommand %-substitution
 	     */
+
 	    switch (ch) {
-		case 'd': /* Type of call that caused validation */
-		    switch (type) {
-			case VALIDATE_INSERT:
-			    number = 1;
-			    break;
-			case VALIDATE_DELETE:
-			    number = 0;
-			    break;
-			default:
-			    number = -1;
-			    break;
-		    }
-		    sprintf(numStorage, "%d", number);
-		    string = numStorage;
-		    break;
-		case 'i': /* index of insert/delete */
-		    sprintf(numStorage, "%d", index);
-		    string = numStorage;
+	    case 'd':		/* Type of call that caused validation */
+		switch (type) {
+		case VALIDATE_INSERT:
+		    number = 1;
 		    break;
-		case 'P': /* 'Peeked' new value of the string */
-		    string = new;
+		case VALIDATE_DELETE:
+		    number = 0;
 		    break;
-		case 's': /* Current string value of spinbox */
-		    string = entryPtr->string;
-		    break;
-		case 'S': /* string to be inserted/deleted, if any */
-		    string = change;
-		    break;
-		case 'v': /* type of validation currently set */
-		    string = validateStrings[entryPtr->validate];
+		default:
+		    number = -1;
 		    break;
-		case 'V': /* type of validation in effect */
-		    switch (type) {
-			case VALIDATE_INSERT:
-			case VALIDATE_DELETE:
-			    string = validateStrings[VALIDATE_KEY];
-			    break;
-			case VALIDATE_FORCED:
-			    string = "forced";
-			    break;
-			default:
-			    string = validateStrings[type];
-			    break;
-		    }
+		}
+		sprintf(numStorage, "%d", number);
+		string = numStorage;
+		break;
+	    case 'i':		/* index of insert/delete */
+		sprintf(numStorage, "%d", index);
+		string = numStorage;
+		break;
+	    case 'P':		/* 'Peeked' new value of the string */
+		string = newValue;
+		break;
+	    case 's':		/* Current string value of spinbox */
+		string = entryPtr->string;
+		break;
+	    case 'S':		/* string to be inserted/deleted, if any */
+		string = change;
+		break;
+	    case 'v':		/* type of validation currently set */
+		string = validateStrings[entryPtr->validate];
+		break;
+	    case 'V':		/* type of validation in effect */
+		switch (type) {
+		case VALIDATE_INSERT:
+		case VALIDATE_DELETE:
+		    string = validateStrings[VALIDATE_KEY];
 		    break;
-		case 'W': /* widget name */
-		    string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin);
+		case VALIDATE_FORCED:
+		    string = "forced";
 		    break;
 		default:
-		    length = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, numStorage);
-		    numStorage[length] = '\0';
-		    string = numStorage;
+		    string = validateStrings[type];
 		    break;
+		}
+		break;
+	    case 'W': /* widget name */
+		string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin);
+		break;
+	    default:
+		length = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, numStorage);
+		numStorage[length] = '\0';
+		string = numStorage;
+		break;
 	    }
 	}
 
@@ -3523,9 +3482,8 @@ ExpandPercents(entryPtr, before, change, new, index, type, dsPtr)
  *
  * Tk_SpinboxObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "spinbox" Tcl
- *	command.  See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "spinbox" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3537,11 +3495,11 @@ ExpandPercents(entryPtr, before, change, new, index, type, dsPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_SpinboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];      /* Argument objects. */
+Tk_SpinboxObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     register Entry *entryPtr;
     register Spinbox *sbPtr;
@@ -3555,28 +3513,28 @@ Tk_SpinboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-            Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL);
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has already
-     * been created, Tk will return the cached value.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, Tk will return the cached value.
      */
 
     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, sbOptSpec);
 
     /*
-     * Initialize the fields of the structure that won't be initialized
-     * by ConfigureEntry, or that ConfigureEntry requires to be
-     * initialized already (e.g. resource pointers).  Only the non-NULL/0
-     * data must be initialized as memset covers the rest.
+     * Initialize the fields of the structure that won't be initialized by
+     * ConfigureEntry, or that ConfigureEntry requires to be initialized
+     * already (e.g. resource pointers). Only the non-NULL/0 data must be
+     * initialized as memset covers the rest.
      */
 
     sbPtr			= (Spinbox *) ckalloc(sizeof(Spinbox));
     entryPtr			= (Entry *) sbPtr;
-    memset((VOID *) sbPtr, 0, sizeof(Spinbox));
+    memset(sbPtr, 0, sizeof(Spinbox));
 
     entryPtr->tkwin		= tkwin;
     entryPtr->display		= Tk_Display(tkwin);
@@ -3618,7 +3576,7 @@ Tk_SpinboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     sbPtr->buRelief		= TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
 
     /*
-     * Keep a hold of the associated tkwin until we destroy the listbox,
+     * Keep a hold of the associated tkwin until we destroy the spinbox,
      * otherwise Tk might free it while we still need it.
      */
 
@@ -3640,7 +3598,7 @@ Tk_SpinboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     if (ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0) != TCL_OK) {
 	goto error;
     }
-    
+
     Tcl_SetResult(interp, Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin), TCL_STATIC);
     return TCL_OK;
 
@@ -3654,9 +3612,9 @@ Tk_SpinboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * SpinboxWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3668,11 +3626,11 @@ Tk_SpinboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-SpinboxWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about spinbox widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+SpinboxWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about spinbox widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
     Spinbox *sbPtr = (Spinbox *) clientData;
@@ -3685,8 +3643,8 @@ SpinboxWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Parse the widget command by looking up the second token in
-     * the list of valid command names. 
+     * Parse the widget command by looking up the second token in the list of
+     * valid command names.
      */
 
     result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], sbCmdNames,
@@ -3697,471 +3655,454 @@ SpinboxWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) entryPtr);
     switch ((enum sbCmd) cmdIndex) {
-        case SB_CMD_BBOX: {
-	    int index, x, y, width, height;
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
+    case SB_CMD_BBOX: {
+	int index, x, y, width, height;
+	char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
 
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    if ((index == entryPtr->numChars) && (index > 0)) {
-	        index--;
-	    }
-	    Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, index, &x, &y, 
-                    &width, &height);
-	    sprintf(buf, "%d %d %d %d", x + entryPtr->layoutX,
-		    y + entryPtr->layoutY, width, height);
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-	    break;
-	} 
-	
-        case SB_CMD_CGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    
-	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
-		    entryPtr->optionTable, objv[2], entryPtr->tkwin);
-	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		 goto error;
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if ((index == entryPtr->numChars) && (index > 0)) {
+	    index--;
 	}
+	Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, index, &x, &y,
+		&width, &height);
+	sprintf(buf, "%d %d %d %d", x + entryPtr->layoutX,
+		y + entryPtr->layoutY, width, height);
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	break;
+    }
 
-        case SB_CMD_CONFIGURE: {
-	    if (objc <= 3) {
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
-			entryPtr->optionTable,
-			(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-			entryPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    goto error;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		}
-	    } else {
-		result = ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case SB_CMD_CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	    goto error;
 	}
 
-        case SB_CMD_DELETE: {
-	    int first, last;
+	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
+		entryPtr->optionTable, objv[2], entryPtr->tkwin);
+	if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	    goto error;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
 
-	    if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
+    case SB_CMD_CONFIGURE:
+	if (objc <= 3) {
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
+		    entryPtr->optionTable,
+		    (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL,
+		    entryPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
 		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &first) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-	        last = first + 1;
 	    } else {
-	        if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), 
-                        &last) != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if ((last >= first) && (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL)) {
-	        DeleteChars(entryPtr, first, last - first);
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0);
 	}
+	break;
+
+    case SB_CMD_DELETE: {
+	int first, last;
 
-        case SB_CMD_GET: {
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, (char *) NULL);
+	if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&first) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    last = first + 1;
+	} else {
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+		    &last) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), entryPtr->string, -1);
-	    break;
 	}
+	if ((last >= first) && (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL)) {
+	    DeleteChars(entryPtr, first, last - first);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-        case SB_CMD_ICURSOR: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pos");
+    case SB_CMD_GET:
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), entryPtr->string, -1);
+	break;
+
+    case SB_CMD_ICURSOR:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pos");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&entryPtr->insertPos) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
+	break;
+
+    case SB_CMD_IDENTIFY: {
+	int x, y, elem;
+
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "x y");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK) ||
+		(Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	elem = GetSpinboxElement(sbPtr, x, y);
+	if (elem != SEL_NONE) {
+	    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
+		    selElementNames[elem], -1);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case SB_CMD_INDEX: {
+	int index;
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case SB_CMD_INSERT: {
+	int index;
+
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index text");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) {
+	    InsertChars(entryPtr, index, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case SB_CMD_INVOKE:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "elemName");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2],
+		selElementNames, "element", 0, &cmdIndex);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (entryPtr->state != STATE_DISABLED) {
+	    if (SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, cmdIndex) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-                    &entryPtr->insertPos) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-	    break;
 	}
-	
-        case SB_CMD_IDENTIFY: {
-	    int x, y, elem;
+	break;
 
+    case SB_CMD_SCAN: {
+	int x;
+	char *minorCmd;
+
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "mark|dragto x");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	minorCmd = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	if (minorCmd[0] == 'm'
+		&& (strncmp(minorCmd, "mark", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
+	    entryPtr->scanMarkX = x;
+	    entryPtr->scanMarkIndex = entryPtr->leftIndex;
+	} else if ((minorCmd[0] == 'd')
+		&& (strncmp(minorCmd, "dragto", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
+	    EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad scan option \"",
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "\": must be mark or dragto",
+		    NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case SB_CMD_SELECTION: {
+	int index, index2;
+
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?index?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Parse the selection sub-command, using the command table
+	 * "sbSelCmdNames" defined above.
+	 */
+
+	result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], sbSelCmdNames,
+		"selection option", 0, &selIndex);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Disabled entries don't allow the selection to be modified, but
+	 * 'selection present' must return a boolean.
+	 */
+
+	if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED)
+		&& (selIndex != SB_SEL_PRESENT)) {
+	    goto done;
+	}
+
+	switch (selIndex) {
+	case SB_SEL_ADJUST:
 	    if (objc != 4) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "x y");
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK) ||
-		    (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)) {
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    elem = GetSpinboxElement(sbPtr, x, y);
-	    if (elem != SEL_NONE) {
-		Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-			selElementNames[elem], -1);
+	    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
+		int half1, half2;
+
+		half1 = (entryPtr->selectFirst + entryPtr->selectLast)/2;
+		half2 = (entryPtr->selectFirst + entryPtr->selectLast + 1)/2;
+		if (index < half1) {
+		    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectLast;
+		} else if (index > half2) {
+		    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectFirst;
+		} else {
+		    /*
+		     * We're at about the halfway point in the selection; just
+		     * keep the existing anchor.
+		     */
+		}
 	    }
+	    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
 	    break;
-	}
-	
-        case SB_CMD_INDEX: {
-	    int index;
 
+	case SB_SEL_CLEAR:
 	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string");
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
+	    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
+		entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
+		entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
+		EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
 	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
-	    break;
-	}
-
-        case SB_CMD_INSERT: {
-	    int index;
+	    goto done;
 
+	case SB_SEL_FROM:
 	    if (objc != 4) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index text");
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) {
-	        InsertChars(entryPtr, index, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto error;
 	    }
+	    entryPtr->selectAnchor = index;
 	    break;
-	}
 
-        case SB_CMD_INVOKE: {
+	case SB_SEL_PRESENT:
 	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "elemName");
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2],
-		    selElementNames, "element", 0, &cmdIndex);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+		    Tcl_NewBooleanObj((entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0)));
+	    goto done;
+
+	case SB_SEL_RANGE:
+	    if (objc != 5) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "start end");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (entryPtr->state != STATE_DISABLED) {
-		if (SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, cmdIndex) != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-
-        case SB_CMD_SCAN: {
-	    int x;
-	    char *minorCmd;
-
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "mark|dragto x");
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[4]),& index2) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto error;
 	    }
-
-	    minorCmd = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-	    if (minorCmd[0] == 'm' 
-                    && (strncmp(minorCmd, "mark", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
-	        entryPtr->scanMarkX = x;
-		entryPtr->scanMarkIndex = entryPtr->leftIndex;
-	    } else if ((minorCmd[0] == 'd')
-		&& (strncmp(minorCmd, "dragto", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
-	        EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x);
+	    if (index >= index2) {
+		entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
+		entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
 	    } else {
-	        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad scan option \"", 
-                        Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "\": must be mark or dragto", 
-                        (char *) NULL);
-		goto error;
+		entryPtr->selectFirst = index;
+		entryPtr->selectLast = index2;
+	    }
+	    if (!(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)
+		    && (entryPtr->exportSelection)) {
+		Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY,
+			EntryLostSelection, (ClientData) entryPtr);
+		entryPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
 	    }
+	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
 	    break;
-	}
-
-	case SB_CMD_SELECTION: {
-	    int index, index2;
 
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?index?");
+	case SB_SEL_TO:
+	    if (objc != 4) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-
-	    /* 
-	     * Parse the selection sub-command, using the command
-	     * table "sbSelCmdNames" defined above.
-	     */
-	    
-	    result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], sbSelCmdNames,
-                    "selection option", 0, &selIndex);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto error;
 	    }
+	    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
+	    break;
 
-	    /*
-	     * Disabled entries don't allow the selection to be modified,
-	     * but 'selection present' must return a boolean.
-	     */
-
-	    if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED)
-		    && (selIndex != SB_SEL_PRESENT)) {
-		goto done;
+	case SB_SEL_ELEMENT:
+	    if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?elemName?");
+		goto error;
 	    }
+	    if (objc == 3) {
+		Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
+			selElementNames[sbPtr->selElement], -1);
+	    } else {
+		int lastElement = sbPtr->selElement;
 
-	    switch (selIndex) {
-	        case SB_SEL_ADJUST: {
-		    if (objc != 4) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
-		        int half1, half2;
-		
-			half1 = (entryPtr->selectFirst 
-			        + entryPtr->selectLast)/2;
-			half2 = (entryPtr->selectFirst 
-				+ entryPtr->selectLast + 1)/2;
-			if (index < half1) {
-			    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectLast;
-			} else if (index > half2) {
-			    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectFirst;
-			} else {
-			  /*
-			   * We're at about the halfway point in the 
-			   * selection; just keep the existing anchor.
-			   */
-			}
-		    }
-		    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
-		    break;
-		}
-
-	        case SB_SEL_CLEAR: {
-		    if (objc != 3) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, (char *) NULL);
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
-		        entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
-			entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
-			EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-		    }
-		    goto done;
-		}
-
-	        case SB_SEL_FROM: {
-		    if (objc != 4) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    entryPtr->selectAnchor = index;
-		    break;
-		}
-
-	        case SB_SEL_PRESENT: {
-		    if (objc != 3) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, (char *) NULL);
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
-			    Tcl_NewBooleanObj((entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0)));
-		    goto done;
+		result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[3], selElementNames,
+			"selection element", 0, &(sbPtr->selElement));
+		if (result != TCL_OK) {
+		    goto error;
 		}
-
-	        case SB_SEL_RANGE: {
-		    if (objc != 5) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "start end");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[4]),& index2) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (index >= index2) {
-		        entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
-			entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
-		    } else {
-		        entryPtr->selectFirst = index;
-			entryPtr->selectLast = index2;
-		    }
-		    if (!(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)
-			    && (entryPtr->exportSelection)) {
-		        Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, 
-			        EntryLostSelection, (ClientData) entryPtr);
-			entryPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
-		    }
+		if (lastElement != sbPtr->selElement) {
 		    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-		    break;
-		}
-		
-	        case SB_SEL_TO: {
-		    if (objc != 4) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
-		    break;
-		}
-
-	        case SB_SEL_ELEMENT: {
-		    if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?elemName?");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (objc == 3) {
-			Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-				selElementNames[sbPtr->selElement], -1);
-		    } else {
-			int lastElement = sbPtr->selElement;
-
-			result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[3],
-				selElementNames, "selection element", 0,
-				&(sbPtr->selElement));
-			if (result != TCL_OK) {
-			    goto error;
-			}
-			if (lastElement != sbPtr->selElement) {
-			    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-			}
-		    }
-		    break;
 		}
 	    }
 	    break;
 	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case SB_CMD_SET:
+	if (objc > 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?string?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
+	}
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), entryPtr->string, -1);
+	break;
 
-        case SB_CMD_SET: {
-	    if (objc > 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?string?");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), entryPtr->string, -1);
-	    break;
+    case SB_CMD_VALIDATE: {
+	int code;
+
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	    goto error;
 	}
+	selIndex = entryPtr->validate;
+	entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_ALL;
+	code = EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, NULL, entryPtr->string,
+		-1, VALIDATE_FORCED);
+	if (entryPtr->validate != VALIDATE_NONE) {
+	    entryPtr->validate = selIndex;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj((code == TCL_OK)));
+	break;
+    }
 
-        case SB_CMD_VALIDATE: {
-	    int code;
+    case SB_CMD_XVIEW: {
+	int index;
 
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc == 2) {
+	    double first, last;
+	    char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
+
+	    EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, &first, &last);
+	    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, first, buf);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, last, buf);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ", buf, NULL);
+	    goto done;
+	} else if (objc == 3) {
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		    &index) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    selIndex = entryPtr->validate;
-	    entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_ALL;
-	    code = EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, (char *) NULL,
-		    entryPtr->string, -1, VALIDATE_FORCED);
-	    if (entryPtr->validate != VALIDATE_NONE) {
-		entryPtr->validate = selIndex;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj((code == TCL_OK)));
-	    break;
-	}
+	} else {
+	    double fraction;
+	    int count;
 
-        case SB_CMD_XVIEW: {
-	    int index;
-
-	    if (objc == 2) {
-	        double first, last;
-		char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2];
-	    
-		EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, &first, &last);
-		sprintf(buf, "%g %g", first, last);
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-		goto done;
-	    } else if (objc == 3) {
-	        if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                        &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
-	    } else {
-	        double fraction;
-		int count;
-
-		index = entryPtr->leftIndex;
-		switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction, 
-                        &count)) {
-		    case TK_SCROLL_ERROR: {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO: {
-		        index = (int) ((fraction * entryPtr->numChars) + 0.5);
-			break;
-		    }
-		    case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: {
-		        int charsPerPage;
-		    
-			charsPerPage = ((Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin)
-    			        - 2 * entryPtr->inset - entryPtr->xWidth) 
-                                / entryPtr->avgWidth) - 2;
-			if (charsPerPage < 1) {
-			    charsPerPage = 1;
-			}
-			index += count * charsPerPage;
-			break;
-		    }
-		    case TK_SCROLL_UNITS: {
-		        index += count;
-			break;
-		    }
+	    index = entryPtr->leftIndex;
+	    switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction,
+		    &count)) {
+	    case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
+		goto error;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
+		index = (int) ((fraction * entryPtr->numChars) + 0.5);
+		break;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: {
+		int charsPerPage;
+
+		charsPerPage = ((Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin)
+			- 2 * entryPtr->inset - entryPtr->xWidth)
+			/ entryPtr->avgWidth) - 2;
+		if (charsPerPage < 1) {
+		    charsPerPage = 1;
 		}
+		index += count * charsPerPage;
+		break;
 	    }
-	    if (index >= entryPtr->numChars) {
-	        index = entryPtr->numChars - 1;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
+		index += count;
+		break;
 	    }
-	    if (index < 0) {
-	        index = 0;
-	    }
-	    entryPtr->leftIndex = index;
-	    entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
-	    EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
-	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-	    break;
 	}
+	if (index >= entryPtr->numChars) {
+	    index = entryPtr->numChars - 1;
+	}
+	if (index < 0) {
+	    index = 0;
+	}
+	entryPtr->leftIndex = index;
+	entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
+	EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
+	EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
+	break;
+    }
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) entryPtr);
     return result;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) entryPtr);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -4183,11 +4124,10 @@ SpinboxWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-GetSpinboxElement(sbPtr, x, y)
-    Spinbox *sbPtr;		/* Spinbox for which the index is being
+GetSpinboxElement(
+    Spinbox *sbPtr,		/* Spinbox for which the index is being
 				 * specified. */
-    int x;			/* x coord */
-    int y;			/* y coord */
+    int x, int y)		/* Widget-relative coordinates. */
 {
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) sbPtr;
 
@@ -4211,25 +4151,25 @@ GetSpinboxElement(sbPtr, x, y)
  *
  * SpinboxInvoke --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when the invoke method for the
- *	widget is called.
+ *	This function is invoked when the invoke method for the widget is
+ *	called.
  *
  * Results:
  *	TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      An background error condition may arise when invoking the
- *	callback.  The widget value may change.
+ *	An background error condition may arise when invoking the callback.
+ *	The widget value may change.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, element)
-    register Tcl_Interp *interp;	/* Current interpreter. */
-    register Spinbox *sbPtr;		/* Spinbox to invoke. */
-    int element;			/* element to invoke, either the "up"
-					 * or "down" button. */
+SpinboxInvoke(
+    register Tcl_Interp *interp,/* Current interpreter. */
+    register Spinbox *sbPtr,	/* Spinbox to invoke. */
+    int element)		/* Element to invoke, either the "up" or
+				 * "down" button. */
 {
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) sbPtr;
     char *type;
@@ -4237,16 +4177,16 @@ SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, element)
     Tcl_DString script;
 
     switch (element) {
-	case SEL_BUTTONUP:
-	    type = "up";
-	    up = 1;
-	    break;
-	case SEL_BUTTONDOWN:
-	    type = "down";
-	    up = 0;
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    return TCL_OK;
+    case SEL_BUTTONUP:
+	type = "up";
+	up = 1;
+	break;
+    case SEL_BUTTONDOWN:
+	type = "down";
+	up = 0;
+	break;
+    default:
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
     if (fabs(sbPtr->increment) > MIN_DBL_VAL) {
@@ -4256,11 +4196,11 @@ SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, element)
 	    Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, sbPtr->listObj, sbPtr->eIndex, &objPtr);
 	    if (strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objPtr), entryPtr->string)) {
 		/*
-		 * Somehow the string changed from what we expected,
-		 * so let's do a search on the list to see if the current
-		 * value is there.  If not, move to the first element of
-		 * the list.
+		 * Somehow the string changed from what we expected, so let's
+		 * do a search on the list to see if the current value is
+		 * there. If not, move to the first element of the list.
 		 */
+
 		int i, listc, elemLen, length = entryPtr->numChars;
 		char *bytes;
 		Tcl_Obj **listv;
@@ -4298,45 +4238,46 @@ SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, element)
 	} else if (!DOUBLES_EQ(sbPtr->fromValue, sbPtr->toValue)) {
 	    double dvalue;
 
-	    if (Tcl_GetDouble(NULL, entryPtr->string, &dvalue) != TCL_OK) {
+	    if (sscanf(entryPtr->string, "%lf", &dvalue) == 0) {
 		/*
-		 * If the string is empty, or isn't a valid double value,
-		 * just use the -from value
+		 * If the string doesn't scan as a double value, just
+		 * use the -from value
 		 */
+
 		dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
-	    } else {
-		if (up) {
-		    dvalue += sbPtr->increment;
-		    if (dvalue > sbPtr->toValue) {
-			if (sbPtr->wrap) {
-			    dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
-			} else {
-			    dvalue = sbPtr->toValue;
-			}
-		    } else if (dvalue < sbPtr->fromValue) {
-			/*
-			 * It's possible that when pressing up, we are
-			 * still less than the fromValue, because the
-			 * user may have manipulated the value by hand.
-			 */
+	    } else if (up) {
+		dvalue += sbPtr->increment;
+		if (dvalue > sbPtr->toValue) {
+		    if (sbPtr->wrap) {
 			dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
+		    } else {
+			dvalue = sbPtr->toValue;
 		    }
-		} else {
-		    dvalue -= sbPtr->increment;
-		    if (dvalue < sbPtr->fromValue) {
-			if (sbPtr->wrap) {
-			    dvalue = sbPtr->toValue;
-			} else {
-			    dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
-			}
-		    } else if (dvalue > sbPtr->toValue) {
-			/*
-			 * It's possible that when pressing down, we are
-			 * still greater than the toValue, because the
-			 * user may have manipulated the value by hand.
-			 */
+		} else if (dvalue < sbPtr->fromValue) {
+		    /*
+		     * It's possible that when pressing up, we are still less
+		     * than the fromValue, because the user may have
+		     * manipulated the value by hand.
+		     */
+
+		    dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
+		}
+	    } else {
+		dvalue -= sbPtr->increment;
+		if (dvalue < sbPtr->fromValue) {
+		    if (sbPtr->wrap) {
 			dvalue = sbPtr->toValue;
+		    } else {
+			dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
 		    }
+		} else if (dvalue > sbPtr->toValue) {
+		    /*
+		     * It's possible that when pressing down, we are still
+		     * greater than the toValue, because the user may have
+		     * manipulated the value by hand.
+		     */
+
+		    dvalue = sbPtr->toValue;
 		}
 	    }
 	    sprintf(sbPtr->formatBuf, sbPtr->valueFormat, dvalue);
@@ -4357,9 +4298,11 @@ SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, element)
 	if (code != TCL_OK) {
 	    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n\t(in command executed by spinbox)");
 	    Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+
 	    /*
 	     * Yes, it's an error, but a bg one, so we return OK
 	     */
+
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
 
@@ -4374,9 +4317,9 @@ SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, element)
  *
  * ComputeFormat --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to recompute the "format" fields
- *	of a spinbox's widget record, which determines how the value
- *	of the dial is converted to a string.
+ *	This function is invoked to recompute the "format" fields of a
+ *	spinbox's widget record, which determines how the value of the dial is
+ *	converted to a string.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Tcl result code.
@@ -4386,17 +4329,18 @@ SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, element)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static int
-ComputeFormat(sbPtr)
-     Spinbox *sbPtr;			/* Information about dial widget. */
+ComputeFormat(
+     Spinbox *sbPtr)		/* Information about dial widget. */
 {
     double maxValue, x;
     int mostSigDigit, numDigits, leastSigDigit, afterDecimal;
     int eDigits, fDigits;
 
     /*
-     * Compute the displacement from the decimal of the most significant
-     * digit required for any number in the dial's range.
+     * Compute the displacement from the decimal of the most significant digit
+     * required for any number in the dial's range.
      */
 
     if (sbPtr->reqFormat) {
@@ -4418,6 +4362,7 @@ ComputeFormat(sbPtr)
 	/*
 	 * A increment was specified, so use it.
 	 */
+
 	leastSigDigit = (int) floor(log10(sbPtr->increment));
     } else {
 	leastSigDigit = 0;
@@ -4428,13 +4373,13 @@ ComputeFormat(sbPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Compute the number of characters required using "e" format and
-     * "f" format, and then choose whichever one takes fewer characters.
+     * Compute the number of characters required using "e" format and "f"
+     * format, and then choose whichever one takes fewer characters.
      */
 
     eDigits = numDigits + 4;
     if (numDigits > 1) {
-	eDigits++;			/* Decimal point. */
+	eDigits++;		/* Decimal point. */
     }
     afterDecimal = numDigits - mostSigDigit - 1;
     if (afterDecimal < 0) {
@@ -4442,10 +4387,10 @@ ComputeFormat(sbPtr)
     }
     fDigits = (mostSigDigit >= 0) ? mostSigDigit + afterDecimal : afterDecimal;
     if (afterDecimal > 0) {
-	fDigits++;			/* Decimal point. */
+	fDigits++;		/* Decimal point. */
     }
     if (mostSigDigit < 0) {
-	fDigits++;			/* Zero to left of decimal point. */
+	fDigits++;		/* Zero to left of decimal point. */
     }
     if (fDigits <= eDigits) {
 	sprintf(sbPtr->digitFormat, "%%.%df", afterDecimal);
@@ -4455,3 +4400,11 @@ ComputeFormat(sbPtr)
     sbPtr->valueFormat = sbPtr->digitFormat;
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkEntry.h b/generic/tkEntry.h
index 3bb2f1d..7f8aa1f 100644
--- a/generic/tkEntry.h
+++ b/generic/tkEntry.h
@@ -1,13 +1,12 @@
 /*
  *  tkEntry.h --
- *  
- *  This module defined the structures for the Entry & SpinBox widgets.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * This module defined the structures for the Entry & SpinBox widgets.
  *
- *  Copyright (c) 2002 Apple Computer, Inc.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
+ * Copyright (c) 2002 Apple Computer, Inc.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKENTRY
@@ -18,8 +17,8 @@
 #endif
 
 #ifdef BUILD_tk
-# undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
-# define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
+#undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
+#define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
 #endif
 
 enum EntryType {
@@ -27,16 +26,16 @@ enum EntryType {
 };
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each Entry
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each Entry widget
+ * managed by this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the entry. NULL
-				 * means that the window has been destroyed
-				 * but the data structures haven't yet been
-				 * cleaned up.*/
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget.  Used, among
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the entry. NULL means
+				 * that the window has been destroyed but the
+				 * data structures haven't yet been cleaned
+				 * up.*/
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget. Used, among
 				 * other things, so that resources can be
 				 * freed even after tkwin has gone away. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with entry. */
@@ -48,9 +47,9 @@ typedef struct {
     /*
      * Fields that are set by widget commands other than "configure".
      */
-     
+
     CONST char *string;		/* Pointer to storage for string;
-				 * NULL-terminated;  malloc-ed. */
+				 * NULL-terminated; malloc-ed. */
     int insertPos;		/* Character index before which next typed
 				 * character will be inserted. */
 
@@ -58,8 +57,8 @@ typedef struct {
      * Information about what's selected, if any.
      */
 
-    int selectFirst;		/* Character index of first selected
-				 * character (-1 means nothing selected. */
+    int selectFirst;		/* Character index of first selected character
+				 * (-1 means nothing selected. */
     int selectLast;		/* Character index just after last selected
 				 * character (-1 means nothing selected. */
     int selectAnchor;		/* Fixed end of selection (i.e. "select to"
@@ -81,11 +80,11 @@ typedef struct {
 
     Tk_3DBorder normalBorder;	/* Used for drawing border around whole
 				 * window, plus used for background. */
-    Tk_3DBorder disabledBorder;	/* Used for drawing  border around whole
-				 * window in disabled state, plus used for
+    Tk_3DBorder disabledBorder;	/* Used for drawing border around whole window
+				 * in disabled state, plus used for
 				 * background. */
-    Tk_3DBorder readonlyBorder;	/* Used for drawing  border around whole
-				 * window in readonly state, plus used for
+    Tk_3DBorder readonlyBorder;	/* Used for drawing border around whole window
+				 * in readonly state, plus used for
 				 * background. */
     int borderWidth;		/* Width of 3-D border around window. */
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
@@ -94,12 +93,12 @@ typedef struct {
     Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Information about text font, or NULL. */
     XColor *fgColorPtr;		/* Text color in normal mode. */
     XColor *dfgColorPtr;	/* Text color in disabled mode. */
-    XColor *highlightBgColorPtr;/* Color for drawing traversal highlight
-				 * area when highlight is off. */
+    XColor *highlightBgColorPtr;/* Color for drawing traversal highlight area
+				 * when highlight is off. */
     XColor *highlightColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing traversal highlight. */
-    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw
-				 * around widget when it has the focus.
-				 * <= 0 means don't draw a highlight. */
+    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw around
+				 * widget when it has the focus. <= 0 means
+				 * don't draw a highlight. */
     Tk_3DBorder insertBorder;	/* Used to draw vertical bar for insertion
 				 * cursor. */
     int insertBorderWidth;	/* Width of 3-D border around insert cursor. */
@@ -115,44 +114,46 @@ typedef struct {
 				 * characters. */
     int selBorderWidth;		/* Width of border around selection. */
     XColor *selFgColorPtr;	/* Foreground color for selected text. */
-    int state;		        /* Normal or disabled.  Entry is read-only
-				 * when disabled. */
-    char *textVarName;		/* Name of variable (malloc'ed) or NULL.
-				 * If non-NULL, entry's string tracks the
-				 * contents of this variable and vice versa. */
-    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option;  not used in
-				 * the C code, but used by keyboard traversal
-				 * scripts.  Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
+    int state;			/* Normal or disabled. Entry is read-only when
+				 * disabled. */
+    char *textVarName;		/* Name of variable (malloc'ed) or NULL. If
+				 * non-NULL, entry's string tracks the
+				 * contents of this variable and vice
+				 * versa. */
+    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
+				 * C code, but used by keyboard traversal
+				 * scripts. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
     int prefWidth;		/* Desired width of window, measured in
 				 * average characters. */
     char *scrollCmd;		/* Command prefix for communicating with
-				 * scrollbar(s).  Malloc'ed.  NULL means
-				 * no command to issue. */
-    char *showChar;		/* Value of -show option.  If non-NULL, first
+				 * scrollbar(s). Malloc'ed. NULL means no
+				 * command to issue. */
+    char *showChar;		/* Value of -show option. If non-NULL, first
 				 * character is used for displaying all
-				 * characters in entry.  Malloc'ed.
-				 * This is only used by the Entry widget. */
+				 * characters in entry. Malloc'ed. This is
+				 * only used by the Entry widget. */
 
     /*
      * Fields whose values are derived from the current values of the
      * configuration settings above.
      */
 
-    CONST char *displayString;	/* String to use when displaying.  This may
-				 * be a pointer to string, or a pointer to
+    CONST char *displayString;	/* String to use when displaying. This may be
+				 * a pointer to string, or a pointer to
 				 * malloced memory with the same character
-				 * length as string but whose characters
-				 * are all equal to showChar. */
+				 * length as string but whose characters are
+				 * all equal to showChar. */
     int numBytes;		/* Length of string in bytes. */
-    int numChars;		/* Length of string in characters.  Both
-				 * string and displayString have the same
-				 * character length, but may have different
-				 * byte lengths due to being made from
-				 * different UTF-8 characters. */
+    int numChars;		/* Length of string in characters. Both string
+				 * and displayString have the same character
+				 * length, but may have different byte lengths
+				 * due to being made from different UTF-8
+				 * characters. */
     int numDisplayBytes;	/* Length of displayString in bytes. */
     int inset;			/* Number of pixels on the left and right
-				 * sides that are taken up by XPAD, borderWidth
-				 * (if any), and highlightWidth (if any). */
+				 * sides that are taken up by XPAD,
+				 * borderWidth (if any), and highlightWidth
+				 * (if any). */
     Tk_TextLayout textLayout;	/* Cached text layout information. */
     int layoutX, layoutY;	/* Origin for layout. */
     int leftX;			/* X position at which character at leftIndex
@@ -166,23 +167,22 @@ typedef struct {
     GC selTextGC;		/* For drawing selected text. */
     GC highlightGC;		/* For drawing traversal highlight. */
     int avgWidth;		/* Width of average character. */
-    int xWidth;			/* Extra width to reserve for widget.
-				 * Used by spinboxes for button space. */
-    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags;  see below for
+    int xWidth;			/* Extra width to reserve for widget. Used by
+				 * spinboxes for button space. */
+    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
 
-    int validate;               /* Non-zero means try to validate */
-    char *validateCmd;          /* Command prefix to use when invoking
-				 * validate command.  NULL means don't
-				 * invoke commands.  Malloc'ed. */
+    int validate;		/* Non-zero means try to validate */
+    char *validateCmd;		/* Command prefix to use when invoking
+				 * validate command. NULL means don't invoke
+				 * commands. Malloc'ed. */
     char *invalidCmd;		/* Command called when a validation returns 0
 				 * (successfully fails), defaults to {}. */
-
 } Entry;
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each spinbox
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each spinbox widget
+ * managed by this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct {
@@ -200,8 +200,8 @@ typedef struct {
     Tk_Cursor bCursor;		/* cursor for buttons, or None. */
     int bdRelief;		/* 3-D effect: TK_RELIEF_RAISED, etc. */
     int buRelief;		/* 3-D effect: TK_RELIEF_RAISED, etc. */
-    char *command;		/* Command to invoke for spin buttons.
-				 * NULL means no command to issue. */
+    char *command;		/* Command to invoke for spin buttons. NULL
+				 * means no command to issue. */
 
     /*
      * Spinbox specific fields for use with configuration settings above.
@@ -216,38 +216,37 @@ typedef struct {
     int repeatInterval;		/* repeat interval */
 
     double fromValue;		/* Value corresponding to left/top of dial */
-    double toValue;		/* Value corresponding to right/bottom
-				 * of dial */
-    double increment;		/* If > 0, all values are rounded to an
-				 * even multiple of this value. */
+    double toValue;		/* Value corresponding to right/bottom of
+				 * dial */
+    double increment;		/* If > 0, all values are rounded to an even
+				 * multiple of this value. */
     char *formatBuf;		/* string into which to format value.
 				 * Malloc'ed. */
     char *reqFormat;		/* Sprintf conversion specifier used for the
-				 * value that the users requests. Malloc'ed. */
-    char *valueFormat;		/* Sprintf conversion specifier used for
-				 * the value. */
+				 * value that the users requests. Malloc'ed */
+    char *valueFormat;		/* Sprintf conversion specifier used for the
+				 * value. */
     char digitFormat[10];	/* Sprintf conversion specifier computed from
-				 * digits and other information; used for
-				 * the value. */
+				 * digits and other information; used for the
+				 * value. */
 
     char *valueStr;		/* Values List. Malloc'ed. */
     Tcl_Obj *listObj;		/* Pointer to the list object being used */
     int eIndex;			/* Holds the current index into elements */
     int nElements;		/* Holds the current count of elements */
-
 } Spinbox;
 
 /*
- * Assigned bits of "flags" fields of Entry structures, and what those
- * bits mean:
+ * Assigned bits of "flags" fields of Entry structures, and what those bits
+ * mean:
  *
  * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler has
  *				already been queued to redisplay the entry.
  * BORDER_NEEDED:		Non-zero means 3-D border must be redrawn
- *				around window during redisplay.  Normally
- *				only text portion needs to be redrawn.
+ *				around window during redisplay. Normally only
+ *				text portion needs to be redrawn.
  * CURSOR_ON:			Non-zero means insert cursor is displayed at
- *				present.  0 means it isn't displayed.
+ *				present. 0 means it isn't displayed.
  * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this window has the input
  *				focus.
  * UPDATE_SCROLLBAR:		Non-zero means scrollbar should be updated
@@ -268,40 +267,40 @@ typedef struct {
 #define GOT_FOCUS		8
 #define UPDATE_SCROLLBAR	0x10
 #define GOT_SELECTION		0x20
-#define ENTRY_DELETED           0x40
-#define VALIDATING              0x80
-#define VALIDATE_VAR            0x100
-#define VALIDATE_ABORT          0x200
-#define ENTRY_VAR_TRACED        0x400
+#define ENTRY_DELETED		0x40
+#define VALIDATING		0x80
+#define VALIDATE_VAR		0x100
+#define VALIDATE_ABORT		0x200
+#define ENTRY_VAR_TRACED	0x400
 
 /*
- * The following enum is used to define a type for the -state option
- * of the Entry widget.  These values are used as indices into the 
- * string table below.
+ * The following enum is used to define a type for the -state option of the
+ * Entry widget. These values are used as indices into the string table below.
  */
 
 enum state {
     STATE_DISABLED, STATE_NORMAL, STATE_READONLY
 };
 
-/* 
+/*
  * This is the element index corresponding to the strings in selElementNames.
  * If you modify them, you must modify the numbers here.
  */
- 
+
 enum selelement {
     SEL_NONE, SEL_BUTTONDOWN, SEL_BUTTONUP, SEL_NULL, SEL_ENTRY
 };
 
 /*
- * Declaration of procedures used in the implementation of the native side
- * of the Entry widget. 
+ * Declaration of functions used in the implementation of the native side of
+ * the Entry widget.
  */
 
-int TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus(Entry *entryPtr, Drawable d, int isSpinbox);
-int TkpDrawSpinboxButtons(Spinbox *sbPtr, Drawable d);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus(Entry *entryPtr,
+			    Drawable d, int isSpinbox);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkpDrawSpinboxButtons(Spinbox *sbPtr, Drawable d);
 
-# undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
-# define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
+#undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
+#define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
 
-#endif /* _TKBUTTON */
+#endif /* _TKENTRY */
diff --git a/generic/tkError.c b/generic/tkError.c
index dabf898..6617c37 100644
--- a/generic/tkError.c
+++ b/generic/tkError.c
@@ -1,109 +1,98 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkError.c --
  *
- *	This file provides a high-performance mechanism for
- *	selectively dealing with errors that occur in talking
- *	to the X server.  This is useful, for example, when
- *	communicating with a window that may not exist.
+ *	This file provides a high-performance mechanism for selectively
+ *	dealing with errors that occur in talking to the X server. This is
+ *	useful, for example, when communicating with a window that may not
+ *	exist.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * The default X error handler gets saved here, so that it can
- * be invoked if an error occurs that we can't handle.
+ * The default X error handler gets saved here, so that it can be invoked if
+ * an error occurs that we can't handle.
  */
 
-static int	(*defaultHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-		    XErrorEvent *eventPtr)) = NULL;
-
+typedef int (*TkXErrorHandler)(Display *display, XErrorEvent *eventPtr);
+static TkXErrorHandler	defaultHandler = NULL;
 
 /*
  * Forward references to procedures declared later in this file:
  */
 
-static int	ErrorProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-		    XErrorEvent *errEventPtr));
+static int	ErrorProc(Display *display, XErrorEvent *errEventPtr);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_CreateErrorHandler --
  *
- *	Arrange for all a given procedure to be invoked whenever
- *	certain errors occur.
+ *	Arrange for all a given procedure to be invoked whenever certain
+ *	errors occur.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token identifying the handler;
- *	it must be passed to Tk_DeleteErrorHandler to delete the
- *	handler.
+ *	The return value is a token identifying the handler; it must be passed
+ *	to Tk_DeleteErrorHandler to delete the handler.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If an X error occurs that matches the error, request,
- *	and minor arguments, then errorProc will be invoked.
- *	ErrorProc should have the following structure:
+ *	If an X error occurs that matches the error, request, and minor
+ *	arguments, then errorProc will be invoked. ErrorProc should have the
+ *	following structure:
  *
  *	int
- *	errorProc(clientData, errorEventPtr)
- *	    caddr_t clientData;
- *	    XErrorEvent *errorEventPtr;
- *	{
+ *	errorProc(caddr_t clientData, XErrorEvent *errorEventPtr) {
  *	}
  *
- *	The clientData argument will be the same as the clientData
- *	argument to this procedure, and errorEvent will describe
- *	the error.  If errorProc returns 0, it means that it
- *	completely "handled" the error:  no further processing
- *	should be done.  If errorProc returns 1, it means that it
- *	didn't know how to deal with the error, so we should look
- *	for other error handlers, or invoke the default error
- *	handler if no other handler returns zero.  Handlers are
- *	invoked in order of age:  youngest handler first.
+ *	The clientData argument will be the same as the clientData argument to
+ *	this procedure, and errorEvent will describe the error. If errorProc
+ *	returns 0, it means that it completely "handled" the error: no further
+ *	processing should be done. If errorProc returns 1, it means that it
+ *	didn't know how to deal with the error, so we should look for other
+ *	error handlers, or invoke the default error handler if no other
+ *	handler returns zero. Handlers are invoked in order of age: youngest
+ *	handler first.
  *
- *	Note:  errorProc will only be called for errors associated
- *	with X requests made AFTER this call, but BEFORE the handler
- *	is deleted by calling Tk_DeleteErrorHandler.
+ *	Note: errorProc will only be called for errors associated with X
+ *	requests made AFTER this call, but BEFORE the handler is deleted by
+ *	calling Tk_DeleteErrorHandler.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_ErrorHandler
-Tk_CreateErrorHandler(display, error, request, minorCode, errorProc, clientData)
-    Display *display;		/* Display for which to handle
+Tk_CreateErrorHandler(
+    Display *display,		/* Display for which to handle errors. */
+    int error,			/* Consider only errors with this error_code
+				 * (-1 means consider all errors). */
+    int request,		/* Consider only errors with this major
+				 * request code (-1 means consider all major
+				 * codes). */
+    int minorCode,		/* Consider only errors with this minor
+				 * request code (-1 means consider all minor
+				 * codes). */
+    Tk_ErrorProc *errorProc,	/* Procedure to invoke when a matching error
+				 * occurs. NULL means just ignore matching
 				 * errors. */
-    int error;			/* Consider only errors with this
-				 * error_code (-1 means consider
-				 * all errors). */
-    int request;		/* Consider only errors with this
-				 * major request code (-1 means
-				 * consider all major codes). */
-    int minorCode;		/* Consider only errors with this
-				 * minor request code (-1 means
-				 * consider all minor codes). */
-    Tk_ErrorProc *errorProc;	/* Procedure to invoke when a
-				 * matching error occurs.  NULL means
-				 * just ignore matching errors. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary value to pass to
-				 * errorProc. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Arbitrary value to pass to errorProc. */
 {
     register TkErrorHandler *errorPtr;
     register TkDisplay *dispPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Find the display.  If Tk doesn't know about this display then
-     * it's an error:  panic.
+     * Find the display. If Tk doesn't know about this display then it's an
+     * error: panic.
      */
 
     dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
     if (dispPtr == NULL) {
-	panic("Unknown display passed to Tk_CreateErrorHandler");
+	Tcl_Panic("Unknown display passed to Tk_CreateErrorHandler");
     }
 
     /*
@@ -144,22 +133,19 @@ Tk_CreateErrorHandler(display, error, request, minorCode, errorProc, clientData)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The handler denoted by the "handler" argument will not
- *	be invoked for any X errors associated with requests
- *	made after this call.  However, if errors arrive later
- *	for requests made BEFORE this call, then the handler
- *	will still be invoked.  Call XSync if you want to be
- *	sure that all outstanding errors have been received
- *	and processed.
+ *	The handler denoted by the "handler" argument will not be invoked for
+ *	any X errors associated with requests made after this call. However,
+ *	if errors arrive later for requests made BEFORE this call, then the
+ *	handler will still be invoked. Call XSync if you want to be sure that
+ *	all outstanding errors have been received and processed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler)
-    Tk_ErrorHandler handler;	/* Token for handler to delete;
-				 * was previous return value from
-				 * Tk_CreateErrorHandler. */
+Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(
+    Tk_ErrorHandler handler)	/* Token for handler to delete; was previous
+				 * return value from Tk_CreateErrorHandler. */
 {
     register TkErrorHandler *errorPtr = (TkErrorHandler *) handler;
     register TkDisplay *dispPtr = errorPtr->dispPtr;
@@ -167,17 +153,15 @@ Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler)
     errorPtr->lastRequest = NextRequest(dispPtr->display) - 1;
 
     /*
-     * Every once-in-a-while, cleanup handlers that are no longer
-     * active.  We probably won't be able to free the handler that
-     * was just deleted (need to wait for any outstanding requests to
-     * be processed by server), but there may be previously-deleted
-     * handlers that are now ready for garbage collection.  To reduce
-     * the cost of the cleanup, let a few dead handlers pile up, then
-     * clean them all at once.  This adds a bit of overhead to errors
-     * that might occur while the dead handlers are hanging around,
-     * but reduces the overhead of scanning the list to clean up
-     * (particularly if there are many handlers that stay around
-     * forever).
+     * Every once-in-a-while, cleanup handlers that are no longer active. We
+     * probably won't be able to free the handler that was just deleted (need
+     * to wait for any outstanding requests to be processed by server), but
+     * there may be previously-deleted handlers that are now ready for garbage
+     * collection. To reduce the cost of the cleanup, let a few dead handlers
+     * pile up, then clean them all at once. This adds a bit of overhead to
+     * errors that might occur while the dead handlers are hanging around, but
+     * reduces the overhead of scanning the list to clean up (particularly if
+     * there are many handlers that stay around forever).
      */
 
     dispPtr->deleteCount += 1;
@@ -211,35 +195,33 @@ Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler)
  *
  * ErrorProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the X system when error
- *	events arrive.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the X system when error events arrive.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If it returns, the return value is zero.  However,
- *	it is possible that one of the error handlers may
- *	just exit.
+ *	If it returns, the return value is zero. However, it is possible that
+ *	one of the error handlers may just exit.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	This procedure does two things.  First, it uses the
- *	serial #  in the error event to eliminate handlers whose
- *	expiration serials are now in the past.  Second, it
- *	invokes any handlers that want to deal with the error.
+ *	This procedure does two things. First, it uses the serial # in the
+ *	error event to eliminate handlers whose expiration serials are now in
+ *	the past. Second, it invokes any handlers that want to deal with the
+ *	error.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ErrorProc(display, errEventPtr)
-    Display *display;			/* Display for which error
-					 * occurred. */
-    register XErrorEvent *errEventPtr;	/* Information about error. */
+ErrorProc(
+    Display *display,		/* Display for which error occurred. */
+    register XErrorEvent *errEventPtr)
+				/* Information about error. */
 {
     register TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     register TkErrorHandler *errorPtr;
 
     /*
-     * See if we know anything about the display.  If not, then
-     * invoke the default error handler.
+     * See if we know anything about the display. If not, then invoke the
+     * default error handler.
      */
 
     dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
@@ -264,42 +246,47 @@ ErrorProc(display, errEventPtr)
 		    && (errorPtr->lastRequest < errEventPtr->serial))) {
 	    continue;
 	}
-	if (errorPtr->errorProc == NULL) {
+	if (errorPtr->errorProc == NULL || (*errorPtr->errorProc)(
+		errorPtr->clientData, errEventPtr) == 0) {
 	    return 0;
-	} else {
-	    if ((*errorPtr->errorProc)(errorPtr->clientData,
-		    errEventPtr) == 0) {
-		return 0;
-	    }
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * See if the error is a BadWindow error.  If so, and it refers
-     * to a window that still exists in our window table, then ignore
-     * the error.  Errors like this can occur if a window owned by us
-     * is deleted by someone externally, like a window manager.  We'll
-     * ignore the errors at least long enough to clean up internally and
-     * remove the entry from the window table.
+     * See if the error is a BadWindow error. If so, and it refers to a window
+     * that still exists in our window table, then ignore the error. Errors
+     * like this can occur if a window owned by us is deleted by someone
+     * externally, like a window manager. We'll ignore the errors at least
+     * long enough to clean up internally and remove the entry from the window
+     * table.
      *
-     * NOTE: For embedding, we must also check whether the window was
-     * recently deleted. If so, it may be that Tk generated operations on
-     * windows that were deleted by the container. Now we are getting
-     * the errors (BadWindow) after Tk already deleted the window itself.
+     * NOTE: For embedding, we must also check whether the window was recently
+     * deleted. If so, it may be that Tk generated operations on windows that
+     * were deleted by the container. Now we are getting the errors
+     * (BadWindow) after Tk already deleted the window itself.
      */
 
-    if ((errEventPtr->error_code == BadWindow) &&
-            ((Tk_IdToWindow(display, (Window) errEventPtr->resourceid) !=
-                    NULL) ||
-                (TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted((Window) errEventPtr->resourceid,
-                        dispPtr)))) {
-	return 0;
+    if (errEventPtr->error_code == BadWindow) {
+	Window w = (Window) errEventPtr->resourceid;
+
+	if (Tk_IdToWindow(display, w) != NULL
+		|| TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted(w, dispPtr)) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * We couldn't handle the error.  Use the default handler.
+     * We couldn't handle the error. Use the default handler.
      */
 
-    couldntHandle:
+  couldntHandle:
     return (*defaultHandler)(display, errEventPtr);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkEvent.c b/generic/tkEvent.c
index 2b4943f..03e7283 100644
--- a/generic/tkEvent.c
+++ b/generic/tkEvent.c
@@ -1,69 +1,67 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkEvent.c --
  *
- *	This file provides basic low-level facilities for managing
- *	X events in Tk.
+ *	This file provides basic low-level facilities for managing X events in
+ *	Tk.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Ajuba Solutions.
+ * Copyright (c) 2004 George Peter Staplin
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include <signal.h>
 
 /*
- * There's a potential problem if a handler is deleted while it's
- * current (i.e. its procedure is executing), since Tk_HandleEvent
- * will need to read the handler's "nextPtr" field when the procedure
- * returns.  To handle this problem, structures of the type below
- * indicate the next handler to be processed for any (recursively
- * nested) dispatches in progress.  The nextHandler fields get
- * updated if the handlers pointed to are deleted.  Tk_HandleEvent
- * also needs to know if the entire window gets deleted;  the winPtr
- * field is set to zero if that particular window gets deleted.
+ * There's a potential problem if a handler is deleted while it's current
+ * (i.e. its function is executing), since Tk_HandleEvent will need to read
+ * the handler's "nextPtr" field when the function returns. To handle this
+ * problem, structures of the type below indicate the next handler to be
+ * processed for any (recursively nested) dispatches in progress. The
+ * nextHandler fields get updated if the handlers pointed to are deleted.
+ * Tk_HandleEvent also needs to know if the entire window gets deleted; the
+ * winPtr field is set to zero if that particular window gets deleted.
  */
 
 typedef struct InProgress {
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		 /* Event currently being handled. */
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		 /* Window for event.  Gets set to None if
-				  * window is deleted while event is being
-				  * handled. */
-    TkEventHandler *nextHandler; /* Next handler in search. */
-    struct InProgress *nextPtr;	 /* Next higher nested search. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Event currently being handled. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window for event. Gets set to None if
+				 * window is deleted while event is being
+				 * handled. */
+    TkEventHandler *nextHandler;/* Next handler in search. */
+    struct InProgress *nextPtr;	/* Next higher nested search. */
 } InProgress;
 
 /*
- * For each call to Tk_CreateGenericHandler, an instance of the following
- * structure will be created.  All of the active handlers are linked into a
- * list.
+ * For each call to Tk_CreateGenericHandler or Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler,
+ * an instance of the following structure will be created. All of the active
+ * handlers are linked into a list.
  */
 
 typedef struct GenericHandler {
-    Tk_GenericProc *proc;	/* Procedure to dispatch on all X events. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Client data to pass to procedure. */
-    int deleteFlag;		/* Flag to set when this handler is deleted. */
+    Tk_GenericProc *proc;	/* Function to dispatch on all X events. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Client data to pass to function. */
+    int deleteFlag;		/* Flag to set when this handler is
+				 * deleted. */
     struct GenericHandler *nextPtr;
 				/* Next handler in list of all generic
 				 * handlers, or NULL for end of list. */
 } GenericHandler;
 
 /*
- * There's a potential problem if Tk_HandleEvent is entered recursively.
- * A handler cannot be deleted physically until we have returned from
- * calling it.  Otherwise, we're looking at unallocated memory in advancing to
- * its `next' entry.  We deal with the problem by using the `delete flag' and
+ * There's a potential problem if Tk_HandleEvent is entered recursively. A
+ * handler cannot be deleted physically until we have returned from calling
+ * it. Otherwise, we're looking at unallocated memory in advancing to its
+ * `next' entry. We deal with the problem by using the `delete flag' and
  * deleting handlers only when it's known that there's no handler active.
- *
  */
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used for queueing X-style events on the
- * Tcl event queue.
+ * The following structure is used for queueing X-style events on the Tcl
+ * event queue.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkWindowEvent {
@@ -75,7 +73,7 @@ typedef struct TkWindowEvent {
  * Array of event masks corresponding to each X event:
  */
 
-static unsigned long eventMasks[TK_LASTEVENT] = {
+static unsigned long realEventMasks[MappingNotify+1] = {
     0,
     0,
     KeyPressMask,			/* KeyPress */
@@ -113,106 +111,694 @@ static unsigned long eventMasks[TK_LASTEVENT] = {
     0,					/* SelectionNotify */
     ColormapChangeMask,			/* ColormapNotify */
     0,					/* ClientMessage */
-    0,					/* Mapping Notify */
+    0					/* Mapping Notify */
+};
+
+static unsigned long virtualEventMasks[TK_LASTEVENT-VirtualEvent] = {
     VirtualEventMask,			/* VirtualEvents */
     ActivateMask,			/* ActivateNotify */
     ActivateMask,			/* DeactivateNotify */
     MouseWheelMask			/* MouseWheelEvent */
 };
 
+/*
+ * For each exit handler created with a call to TkCreateExitHandler or
+ * TkCreateThreadExitHandler there is a structure of the following type:
+ */
+
+typedef struct ExitHandler {
+    Tcl_ExitProc *proc;		/* Function to call when process exits. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* One word of information to pass to proc. */
+    struct ExitHandler *nextPtr;/* Next in list of all exit handlers for this
+				 * application, or NULL for end of list. */
+} ExitHandler;
 
 /*
- * The structure below is used to store Data for the Event module that
- * must be kept thread-local.  The "dataKey" is used to fetch the 
- * thread-specific storage for the current thread.
+ * The structure below is used to store Data for the Event module that must be
+ * kept thread-local. The "dataKey" is used to fetch the thread-specific
+ * storage for the current thread.
  */
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    int handlersActive;		/* The following variable has a non-zero 
-				 * value when a handler is active. */
-    InProgress *pendingPtr;	/* Topmost search in progress, or
-				 * NULL if none. */
+    int handlersActive;		/* The following variable has a non-zero value
+				 * when a handler is active. */
+    InProgress *pendingPtr;	/* Topmost search in progress, or NULL if
+				 * none. */
+
+    /*
+     * List of generic handler records.
+     */
+
+    GenericHandler *genericList;/* First handler in the list, or NULL. */
+    GenericHandler *lastGenericPtr;
+				/* Last handler in list. */
 
-    GenericHandler *genericList; /* First handler in the list, or NULL. */
-    GenericHandler *lastGenericPtr;	/* Last handler in list. */
+    /*
+     * List of client message handler records.
+     */
 
-    GenericHandler *cmList; /* First handler in the list, or NULL. */
+    GenericHandler *cmList;	/* First handler in the list, or NULL. */
     GenericHandler *lastCmPtr;	/* Last handler in list. */
 
     /*
-     * If someone has called Tk_RestrictEvents, the information below
-     * keeps track of it.
+     * If someone has called Tk_RestrictEvents, the information below keeps
+     * track of it.
      */
 
     Tk_RestrictProc *restrictProc;
-				/* Procedure to call.  NULL means no
+				/* Function to call. NULL means no
 				 * restrictProc is currently in effect. */
     ClientData restrictArg;	/* Argument to pass to restrictProc. */
+    ExitHandler *firstExitPtr;	/* First in list of all exit handlers for this
+				 * thread. */
+    int inExit;			/* True when this thread is exiting. This is
+				 * used as a hack to decide to close the
+				 * standard channels. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures that are only referenced locally within
- * this file.
+ * There are both per-process and per-thread exit handlers. The first list is
+ * controlled by a mutex. The other is in thread local storage.
+ */
+
+static ExitHandler *firstExitPtr = NULL;
+				/* First in list of all exit handlers for
+				 * application. */
+TCL_DECLARE_MUTEX(exitMutex)
+
+/*
+ * Prototypes for functions that are only referenced locally within this file.
+ */
+
+static void		CleanUpTkEvent(XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		DelayedMotionProc(ClientData clientData);
+static int		GetButtonMask(unsigned int Button);
+static unsigned long    GetEventMaskFromXEvent(XEvent *eventPtr);
+static TkWindow *	GetTkWindowFromXEvent(XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		InvokeClientMessageHandlers(ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		InvokeFocusHandlers(TkWindow **winPtrPtr,
+			    unsigned long mask, XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		InvokeGenericHandlers(ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		InvokeMouseHandlers(TkWindow *winPtr,
+			    unsigned long mask, XEvent *eventPtr);
+static Window		ParentXId(Display *display, Window w);
+static int		RefreshKeyboardMappingIfNeeded(XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		TkXErrorHandler(ClientData clientData,
+			    XErrorEvent *errEventPtr);
+static void		UpdateButtonEventState(XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		WindowEventProc(Tcl_Event *evPtr, int flags);
+#ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
+static void		CreateXIC(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * InvokeFocusHandlers --
+ *
+ *	Call focus-related code to look at FocusIn, FocusOut, Enter, and Leave
+ *	events; depending on its return value, ignore the event.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	0 further processing can be done on the event.
+ *	1 we are done with the event passed.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The *winPtrPtr in the caller may be changed to the TkWindow for the
+ *	window with focus.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+InvokeFocusHandlers(
+    TkWindow **winPtrPtr,
+    unsigned long mask,
+    XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    if ((mask & (FocusChangeMask|EnterWindowMask|LeaveWindowMask))
+	    && (TkFocusFilterEvent(*winPtrPtr, eventPtr) == 0)) {
+	return 1;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * MouseWheel events are not focus specific on Mac OS X.
+     */
+
+#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
+#define FOCUS_DIRECTED_EVENT_MASK (KeyPressMask|KeyReleaseMask)
+#else
+#define	FOCUS_DIRECTED_EVENT_MASK (KeyPressMask|KeyReleaseMask|MouseWheelMask)
+#endif
+
+    if (mask & FOCUS_DIRECTED_EVENT_MASK) {
+	(*winPtrPtr)->dispPtr->lastEventTime = eventPtr->xkey.time;
+	*winPtrPtr = TkFocusKeyEvent(*winPtrPtr, eventPtr);
+	if (*winPtrPtr == NULL) {
+	    return 1;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * InvokeMouseHandlers --
+ *
+ *	Call a grab-related function to do special processing on pointer
+ *	events.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	0 further processing can be done on the event.
+ *	1 we are done with the event passed.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	New events may be queued from TkPointerEvent and grabs may be added
+ *	and/or removed. The eventPtr may be changed by TkPointerEvent in some
+ *	cases.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+InvokeMouseHandlers(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,
+    unsigned long mask,
+    XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    if (mask & (ButtonPressMask|ButtonReleaseMask|PointerMotionMask
+	    |EnterWindowMask|LeaveWindowMask)) {
+
+	if (mask & (ButtonPressMask|ButtonReleaseMask)) {
+	    winPtr->dispPtr->lastEventTime = eventPtr->xbutton.time;
+	} else if (mask & PointerMotionMask) {
+	    winPtr->dispPtr->lastEventTime = eventPtr->xmotion.time;
+	} else {
+	    winPtr->dispPtr->lastEventTime = eventPtr->xcrossing.time;
+	}
+
+	if (TkPointerEvent(eventPtr, winPtr) == 0) {
+	    /*
+	     * The event should be ignored to make grab work correctly (as the
+	     * comment for TkPointerEvent states).
+	     */
+
+	    return 1;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * CreateXIC --
+ *
+ *	Create the X input context for our winPtr.
+ *	XIM is only ever enabled on Unix.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+#if defined(TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS)
+static void
+CreateXIC(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
+    long im_event_mask = 0L;
+    const char *preedit_attname = NULL;
+    XVaNestedList preedit_attlist = NULL;
+
+    if (dispPtr->inputStyle & XIMPreeditPosition) {
+	XPoint spot = {0, 0};
+
+	preedit_attname = XNPreeditAttributes;
+	preedit_attlist = XVaCreateNestedList(0,
+		XNSpotLocation, &spot,
+		XNFontSet, dispPtr->inputXfs,
+		NULL);
+    }
+
+    winPtr->inputContext = XCreateIC(dispPtr->inputMethod,
+	    XNInputStyle, dispPtr->inputStyle,
+	    XNClientWindow, winPtr->window,
+	    XNFocusWindow, winPtr->window,
+	    preedit_attname, preedit_attlist,
+	    NULL);
+
+    if (preedit_attlist) {
+	XFree(preedit_attlist);
+    }
+
+    
+    if (winPtr->inputContext == NULL) {
+	/* XCreateIC failed. */
+        return;
+    }
+    
+    /*
+     * Adjust the window's event mask if the IM requires it.
+     */
+    XGetICValues(winPtr->inputContext, XNFilterEvents, &im_event_mask, NULL);
+    if ((winPtr->atts.event_mask & im_event_mask) != im_event_mask) {
+	winPtr->atts.event_mask |= im_event_mask;
+	XSelectInput(winPtr->display, winPtr->window, winPtr->atts.event_mask);
+    }
+}
+#endif
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetTkWindowFromXEvent --
+ *
+ *	Attempt to find which TkWindow is associated with an event. If it
+ *	fails we attempt to get the TkWindow from the parent for a property
+ *	notification.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The TkWindow associated with the event or NULL.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	TkSelPropProc may influence selection on windows not known to Tk.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static TkWindow *
+GetTkWindowFromXEvent(
+    XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+    Window parentXId, handlerWindow = eventPtr->xany.window;
+
+    if ((eventPtr->xany.type == StructureNotifyMask)
+	    && (eventPtr->xmap.event != eventPtr->xmap.window)) {
+	handlerWindow = eventPtr->xmap.event;
+    }
+
+    winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_IdToWindow(eventPtr->xany.display, handlerWindow);
+
+    if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	/*
+	 * There isn't a TkWindow structure for this window. However, if the
+	 * event is a PropertyNotify event then call the selection manager (it
+	 * deals beneath-the-table with certain properties). Also, if the
+	 * window's parent is a Tk window that has the TK_PROP_PROPCHANGE flag
+	 * set, then we must propagate the PropertyNotify event up to the
+	 * parent.
+	 */
+
+	if (eventPtr->type != PropertyNotify) {
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+	TkSelPropProc(eventPtr);
+	parentXId = ParentXId(eventPtr->xany.display, handlerWindow);
+	if (parentXId == None) {
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+	winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_IdToWindow(eventPtr->xany.display, parentXId);
+	if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+	if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_PROP_PROPCHANGE)) {
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+    }
+    return winPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetEventMaskFromXEvent --
+ *
+ *	The event type is looked up in our eventMasks tables, and may be
+ *	changed to a different mask depending on the state of the event and
+ *	window members.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The mask for the event.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static unsigned long
+GetEventMaskFromXEvent(
+    XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    unsigned long mask;
+
+    /*
+     * Get the event mask from the correct table. Note that there are two
+     * tables here because that means we no longer need this code to rely on
+     * the exact value of VirtualEvent, which has caused us problems in the
+     * past when X11 changed the value of LASTEvent. [Bug ???]
+     */
+
+    if (eventPtr->xany.type <= MappingNotify) {
+	mask = realEventMasks[eventPtr->xany.type];
+    } else if (eventPtr->xany.type >= VirtualEvent
+	    && eventPtr->xany.type<TK_LASTEVENT) {
+	mask = virtualEventMasks[eventPtr->xany.type - VirtualEvent];
+    } else {
+	mask = 0;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Events selected by StructureNotify require special handling. They look
+     * the same as those selected by SubstructureNotify. The only difference
+     * is whether the "event" and "window" fields are the same. Compare the
+     * two fields and convert StructureNotify to SubstructureNotify if
+     * necessary.
+     */
+
+    if (mask == StructureNotifyMask) {
+	if (eventPtr->xmap.event != eventPtr->xmap.window) {
+	    mask = SubstructureNotifyMask;
+	}
+    }
+    return mask;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * RefreshKeyboardMappingIfNeeded --
+ *
+ *	If the event is a MappingNotify event, find its display and refresh
+ *	the keyboard mapping information for the display.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	0 if the event was not a MappingNotify event
+ *	1 if the event was a MappingNotify event
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+RefreshKeyboardMappingIfNeeded(
+    XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == MappingNotify) {
+	dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(eventPtr->xmapping.display);
+	if (dispPtr != NULL) {
+	    XRefreshKeyboardMapping(&eventPtr->xmapping);
+	    dispPtr->bindInfoStale = 1;
+	}
+	return 1;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetButtonMask --
+ *
+ *	Return the proper Button${n}Mask for the button.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A button mask.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+GetButtonMask(
+    unsigned int button)
+{
+    switch (button) {
+    case 1:
+	return Button1Mask;
+    case 2:
+	return Button2Mask;
+    case 3:
+	return Button3Mask;
+    case 4:
+	return Button4Mask;
+    case 5:
+	return Button5Mask;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * UpdateButtonEventState --
+ *
+ *	Update the button event state in our TkDisplay using the XEvent
+ *	passed. We also may modify the the XEvent passed to fit some aspects
+ *	of our TkDisplay.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The TkDisplay's private button state may be modified. The eventPtr's
+ *	state may be updated to reflect masks stored in our TkDisplay that the
+ *	event doesn't contain. The eventPtr may also be modified to not
+ *	contain a button state for the window in which it was not pressed in.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static void		DelayedMotionProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int		WindowEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Event *evPtr,
-			    int flags));
-static int		TkXErrorHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XErrorEvent *errEventPtr));
+static void
+UpdateButtonEventState(
+    XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+    int allButtonsMask = Button1Mask | Button2Mask | Button3Mask
+	    | Button4Mask | Button5Mask;
 
+    switch (eventPtr->type) {
+    case ButtonPress:
+	dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(eventPtr->xbutton.display);
+	dispPtr->mouseButtonWindow = eventPtr->xbutton.window;
+	eventPtr->xbutton.state |= dispPtr->mouseButtonState;
+
+	dispPtr->mouseButtonState |= GetButtonMask(eventPtr->xbutton.button);
+	break;
+
+    case ButtonRelease:
+	dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(eventPtr->xbutton.display);
+	dispPtr->mouseButtonWindow = None;
+	dispPtr->mouseButtonState &= ~GetButtonMask(eventPtr->xbutton.button);
+	eventPtr->xbutton.state |= dispPtr->mouseButtonState;
+	break;
+
+    case MotionNotify:
+	dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(eventPtr->xmotion.display);
+	if (dispPtr->mouseButtonState & allButtonsMask) {
+	    if (eventPtr->xbutton.window != dispPtr->mouseButtonWindow) {
+		/*
+		 * This motion event should not be interpreted as a button
+		 * press + motion event since this is not the same window the
+		 * button was pressed down in.
+		 */
+
+		dispPtr->mouseButtonState &= ~allButtonsMask;
+		dispPtr->mouseButtonWindow = None;
+	    } else {
+		eventPtr->xmotion.state |= dispPtr->mouseButtonState;
+	    }
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+}
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * InvokeClientMessageHandlers --
+ *
+ *	Iterate the list of handlers and invoke the function pointer for each.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Handlers may be deleted and events may be sent to handlers.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+InvokeClientMessageHandlers(
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    GenericHandler *prevPtr, *tmpPtr, *curPtr = tsdPtr->cmList;
+
+    for (prevPtr = NULL; curPtr != NULL; ) {
+	if (curPtr->deleteFlag) {
+	    if (!tsdPtr->handlersActive) {
+		/*
+		 * This handler needs to be deleted and there are no calls
+		 * pending through any handlers, so now is a safe time to
+		 * delete it.
+		 */
+
+		tmpPtr = curPtr->nextPtr;
+		if (prevPtr == NULL) {
+		    tsdPtr->cmList = tmpPtr;
+		} else {
+		    prevPtr->nextPtr = tmpPtr;
+		}
+		if (tmpPtr == NULL) {
+		    tsdPtr->lastCmPtr = prevPtr;
+		}
+		(void) ckfree((char *) curPtr);
+		curPtr = tmpPtr;
+		continue;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    int done;
+
+	    tsdPtr->handlersActive++;
+	    done = (*(Tk_ClientMessageProc *)curPtr->proc)(tkwin, eventPtr);
+	    tsdPtr->handlersActive--;
+	    if (done) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+	prevPtr = curPtr;
+	curPtr = curPtr->nextPtr;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * InvokeGenericHandlers --
+ *
+ *	Iterate the list of handlers and invoke the function pointer for each.
+ *	If the handler invoked returns a non-zero value then we are done.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	0 when the event wasn't handled by a handler. Non-zero when it was
+ *	processed and handled by a handler.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Handlers may be deleted and events may be sent to handlers.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+InvokeGenericHandlers(
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr,
+    XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    GenericHandler *prevPtr, *tmpPtr, *curPtr = tsdPtr->genericList;
+
+    for (prevPtr = NULL; curPtr != NULL; ) {
+	if (curPtr->deleteFlag) {
+	    if (!tsdPtr->handlersActive) {
+		/*
+		 * This handler needs to be deleted and there are no calls
+		 * pending through the handler, so now is a safe time to
+		 * delete it.
+		 */
+
+		tmpPtr = curPtr->nextPtr;
+		if (prevPtr == NULL) {
+		    tsdPtr->genericList = tmpPtr;
+		} else {
+		    prevPtr->nextPtr = tmpPtr;
+		}
+		if (tmpPtr == NULL) {
+		    tsdPtr->lastGenericPtr = prevPtr;
+		}
+		(void) ckfree((char *) curPtr);
+		curPtr = tmpPtr;
+		continue;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    int done;
+
+	    tsdPtr->handlersActive++;
+	    done = (*curPtr->proc)(curPtr->clientData, eventPtr);
+	    tsdPtr->handlersActive--;
+	    if (done) {
+		return done;
+	    }
+	}
+	prevPtr = curPtr;
+	curPtr = curPtr->nextPtr;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_CreateEventHandler --
  *
- *	Arrange for a given procedure to be invoked whenever
- *	events from a given class occur in a given window.
+ *	Arrange for a given function to be invoked whenever events from a
+ *	given class occur in a given window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	From now on, whenever an event of the type given by
- *	mask occurs for token and is processed by Tk_HandleEvent,
- *	proc will be called.  See the manual entry for details
- *	of the calling sequence and return value for proc.
+ *	From now on, whenever an event of the type given by mask occurs for
+ *	token and is processed by Tk_HandleEvent, proc will be called. See the
+ *	manual entry for details of the calling sequence and return value for
+ *	proc.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_CreateEventHandler(token, mask, proc, clientData)
-    Tk_Window token;		/* Token for window in which to
-				 * create handler. */
-    unsigned long mask;		/* Events for which proc should
-				 * be called. */
-    Tk_EventProc *proc;		/* Procedure to call for each
-				 * selected event */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary data to pass to proc. */
+Tk_CreateEventHandler(
+    Tk_Window token,		/* Token for window in which to create
+				 * handler. */
+    unsigned long mask,		/* Events for which proc should be called. */
+    Tk_EventProc *proc,		/* Function to call for each selected event */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Arbitrary data to pass to proc. */
 {
     register TkEventHandler *handlerPtr;
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) token;
-    int found;
 
     /*
-     * Skim through the list of existing handlers to (a) compute the
-     * overall event mask for the window (so we can pass this new
-     * value to the X system) and (b) see if there's already a handler
-     * declared with the same callback and clientData (if so, just
-     * change the mask).  If no existing handler matches, then create
-     * a new handler.
+     * Skim through the list of existing handlers to (a) compute the overall
+     * event mask for the window (so we can pass this new value to the X
+     * system) and (b) see if there's already a handler declared with the same
+     * callback and clientData (if so, just change the mask). If no existing
+     * handler matches, then create a new handler.
      */
 
-    found = 0;
     if (winPtr->handlerList == NULL) {
-	handlerPtr = (TkEventHandler *) ckalloc(
-		(unsigned) sizeof(TkEventHandler));
+	/*
+	 * No event handlers defined at all, so must create.
+	 */
+
+	handlerPtr = (TkEventHandler *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkEventHandler));
 	winPtr->handlerList = handlerPtr;
-	goto initHandler;
     } else {
+	int found = 0;
+
 	for (handlerPtr = winPtr->handlerList; ;
 		handlerPtr = handlerPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if ((handlerPtr->proc == proc)
@@ -224,31 +810,43 @@ Tk_CreateEventHandler(token, mask, proc, clientData)
 		break;
 	    }
 	}
-    }
 
-    /*
-     * Create a new handler if no matching old handler was found.
-     */
+	/*
+	 * If we found anything, we're done because we do not need to use
+	 * XSelectInput; Tk always selects on all events anyway in order to
+	 * support binding on classes, 'all' and other bind-tags.
+	 */
+
+	if (found) {
+	    return;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * No event handler matched, so create a new one.
+	 */
 
-    if (!found) {
 	handlerPtr->nextPtr = (TkEventHandler *)
 		ckalloc(sizeof(TkEventHandler));
 	handlerPtr = handlerPtr->nextPtr;
-	initHandler:
-	handlerPtr->mask = mask;
-	handlerPtr->proc = proc;
-	handlerPtr->clientData = clientData;
-	handlerPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
     }
 
     /*
-     * No need to call XSelectInput:  Tk always selects on all events
-     * for all windows (needed to support bindings on classes and "all").
+     * Initialize the new event handler.
+     */
+
+    handlerPtr->mask = mask;
+    handlerPtr->proc = proc;
+    handlerPtr->clientData = clientData;
+    handlerPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
+
+    /*
+     * No need to call XSelectInput: Tk always selects on all events for all
+     * windows (needed to support bindings on classes and "all").
      */
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_DeleteEventHandler --
  *
@@ -258,30 +856,29 @@ Tk_CreateEventHandler(token, mask, proc, clientData)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If there existed a handler as described by the
- *	parameters, the handler is deleted so that proc
- *	will not be invoked again.
+ *	If there existed a handler as described by the parameters, the handler
+ *	is deleted so that proc will not be invoked again.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DeleteEventHandler(token, mask, proc, clientData)
-    Tk_Window token;		/* Same as corresponding arguments passed */
-    unsigned long mask;		/* previously to Tk_CreateEventHandler. */
-    Tk_EventProc *proc;
-    ClientData clientData;
+Tk_DeleteEventHandler(
+    Tk_Window token,		/* Same as corresponding arguments passed */
+    unsigned long mask,		/* previously to Tk_CreateEventHandler. */
+    Tk_EventProc *proc,
+    ClientData clientData)
 {
     register TkEventHandler *handlerPtr;
     register InProgress *ipPtr;
     TkEventHandler *prevPtr;
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) token;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
-     * Find the event handler to be deleted, or return
-     * immediately if it doesn't exist.
+     * Find the event handler to be deleted, or return immediately if it
+     * doesn't exist.
      */
 
     for (handlerPtr = winPtr->handlerList, prevPtr = NULL; ;
@@ -296,8 +893,8 @@ Tk_DeleteEventHandler(token, mask, proc, clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If Tk_HandleEvent is about to process this handler, tell it to
-     * process the next one instead.
+     * If Tk_HandleEvent is about to process this handler, tell it to process
+     * the next one instead.
      */
 
     for (ipPtr = tsdPtr->pendingPtr; ipPtr != NULL; ipPtr = ipPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -317,43 +914,42 @@ Tk_DeleteEventHandler(token, mask, proc, clientData)
     }
     ckfree((char *) handlerPtr);
 
-
     /*
-     * No need to call XSelectInput:  Tk always selects on all events
-     * for all windows (needed to support bindings on classes and "all").
+     * No need to call XSelectInput: Tk always selects on all events for all
+     * windows (needed to support bindings on classes and "all").
      */
 }
 
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_CreateGenericHandler --
  *
- *	Register a procedure to be called on each X event, regardless
- *	of display or window.  Generic handlers are useful for capturing
- *	events that aren't associated with windows, or events for windows
- *	not managed by Tk.
+ *	Register a function to be called on each X event, regardless of
+ *	display or window. Generic handlers are useful for capturing events
+ *	that aren't associated with windows, or events for windows not managed
+ *	by Tk.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side Effects:
- *	From now on, whenever an X event is given to Tk_HandleEvent,
- *	invoke proc, giving it clientData and the event as arguments.
+ *	From now on, whenever an X event is given to Tk_HandleEvent, invoke
+ *	proc, giving it clientData and the event as arguments.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_CreateGenericHandler(proc, clientData)
-     Tk_GenericProc *proc;	/* Procedure to call on every event. */
-     ClientData clientData;	/* One-word value to pass to proc. */
+Tk_CreateGenericHandler(
+    Tk_GenericProc *proc,	/* Function to call on every event. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* One-word value to pass to proc. */
 {
     GenericHandler *handlerPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
-    
-    handlerPtr = (GenericHandler *) ckalloc (sizeof (GenericHandler));
-    
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+
+    handlerPtr = (GenericHandler *) ckalloc(sizeof(GenericHandler));
+
     handlerPtr->proc		= proc;
     handlerPtr->clientData	= clientData;
     handlerPtr->deleteFlag	= 0;
@@ -367,7 +963,7 @@ Tk_CreateGenericHandler(proc, clientData)
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_DeleteGenericHandler --
  *
@@ -377,77 +973,76 @@ Tk_CreateGenericHandler(proc, clientData)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side Effects:
- *	If there existed a handler as described by the parameters,
- *	that handler is logically deleted so that proc will not be
- *	invoked again.  The physical deletion happens in the event
- *	loop in Tk_HandleEvent.
+ *	If there existed a handler as described by the parameters, that
+ *	handler is logically deleted so that proc will not be invoked again.
+ *	The physical deletion happens in the event loop in Tk_HandleEvent.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DeleteGenericHandler(proc, clientData)
-     Tk_GenericProc *proc;
-     ClientData clientData;
+Tk_DeleteGenericHandler(
+    Tk_GenericProc *proc,
+    ClientData clientData)
 {
     GenericHandler * handler;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-	Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
-    
-    for (handler = tsdPtr->genericList; handler; handler = handler->nextPtr) {
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+
+    for (handler=tsdPtr->genericList ; handler ; handler=handler->nextPtr) {
 	if ((handler->proc == proc) && (handler->clientData == clientData)) {
 	    handler->deleteFlag = 1;
 	}
     }
 }
 
-/*--------------------------------------------------------------
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler --
  *
- *	Register a procedure to be called on each ClientMessage event.
+ *	Register a function to be called on each ClientMessage event.
  *	ClientMessage handlers are useful for Drag&Drop extensions.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side Effects:
- *	From now on, whenever a ClientMessage event is received that isn't
- *	a WM_PROTOCOL event or SelectionEvent, invoke proc, giving it
- *	tkwin and the event as arguments.
+ *	From now on, whenever a ClientMessage event is received that isn't a
+ *	WM_PROTOCOL event or SelectionEvent, invoke proc, giving it tkwin and
+ *	the event as arguments.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler(proc)
-     Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc;	/* Procedure to call on event. */
+Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler(
+    Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc)	/* Function to call on event. */
 {
     GenericHandler *handlerPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-	Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
-     * We use a GenericHandler struct, because it's basically the same,
-     * except with an extra clientData field we'll never use.
+     * We use a GenericHandler struct, because it's basically the same, except
+     * with an extra clientData field we'll never use.
      */
-    handlerPtr = (GenericHandler *)
-	ckalloc (sizeof (GenericHandler));
 
-    handlerPtr->proc		= (Tk_GenericProc *) proc;
-    handlerPtr->clientData	= NULL;	/* never used */
-    handlerPtr->deleteFlag	= 0;
-    handlerPtr->nextPtr		= NULL;
+    handlerPtr = (GenericHandler *) ckalloc(sizeof(GenericHandler));
+
+    handlerPtr->proc = (Tk_GenericProc *) proc;
+    handlerPtr->clientData = NULL;	/* never used */
+    handlerPtr->deleteFlag = 0;
+    handlerPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
     if (tsdPtr->cmList == NULL) {
-	tsdPtr->cmList		= handlerPtr;
+	tsdPtr->cmList = handlerPtr;
     } else {
 	tsdPtr->lastCmPtr->nextPtr = handlerPtr;
     }
-    tsdPtr->lastCmPtr		= handlerPtr;
+    tsdPtr->lastCmPtr = handlerPtr;
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler --
  *
@@ -457,24 +1052,23 @@ Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler(proc)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side Effects:
- *	If there existed a handler as described by the parameters,
- *	that handler is logically deleted so that proc will not be
- *	invoked again.  The physical deletion happens in the event
- *	loop in TkClientMessageEventProc.
+ *	If there existed a handler as described by the parameters, that
+ *	handler is logically deleted so that proc will not be invoked again.
+ *	The physical deletion happens in the event loop in
+ *	TkClientMessageEventProc.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler(proc)
-     Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc;
+Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler(
+    Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc)
 {
     GenericHandler * handler;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-	Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
-    for (handler = tsdPtr->cmList; handler != NULL;
-	 handler = handler->nextPtr) {
+    for (handler=tsdPtr->cmList ; handler!=NULL ; handler=handler->nextPtr) {
 	if (handler->proc == (Tk_GenericProc *) proc) {
 	    handler->deleteFlag = 1;
 	}
@@ -482,14 +1076,13 @@ Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler(proc)
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkEventInit --
  *
- *	This procedures initializes all the event module 
- *      structures used by the current thread.  It must be
- *      called before any other procedure in this file is 
- *      called.
+ *	This functions initializes all the event module structures used by the
+ *	current thread. It must be called before any other function in this
+ *	file is called.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -497,14 +1090,14 @@ Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler(proc)
  * Side Effects:
  *	None.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkEventInit _ANSI_ARGS_((void))
+TkEventInit(void)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-	Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     tsdPtr->handlersActive	= 0;
     tsdPtr->pendingPtr		= NULL;
@@ -517,28 +1110,26 @@ TkEventInit _ANSI_ARGS_((void))
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkXErrorHandler --
  *
- *	TkXErrorHandler is an error handler, to be installed
- *	via Tk_CreateErrorHandler, that will set a flag if an
- *	X error occurred.
+ *	TkXErrorHandler is an error handler, to be installed via
+ *	Tk_CreateErrorHandler, that will set a flag if an X error occurred.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Always returns 0, indicating that the X error was
- *	handled.
+ *	Always returns 0, indicating that the X error was handled.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-TkXErrorHandler (clientData, errEventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;      /* Pointer to flag we set       */
-    XErrorEvent *errEventPtr;   /* X error info                 */
+TkXErrorHandler(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to flag we set. */
+    XErrorEvent *errEventPtr)	/* X error info. */
 {
     int *error;
 
@@ -548,12 +1139,12 @@ TkXErrorHandler (clientData, errEventPtr)
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * ParentXId --
  *
- *	Returns the parent of the given window, or "None"
- *	if the window doesn't exist.
+ *	Returns the parent of the given window, or "None" if the window
+ *	doesn't exist.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns an X window ID.
@@ -561,13 +1152,13 @@ TkXErrorHandler (clientData, errEventPtr)
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static Window
-ParentXId(display, w)
-    Display *display;
-    Window w;
+ParentXId(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w)
 {
     Tk_ErrorHandler handler;
     int gotXError;
@@ -577,17 +1168,23 @@ ParentXId(display, w)
     Window *childList;
     unsigned int nChildren;
 
-    /* Handle errors ourselves. */
+    /*
+     * Handle errors ourselves.
+     */
 
     gotXError = 0;
     handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(display, -1, -1, -1,
-			TkXErrorHandler, (ClientData) (&gotXError));
+	    TkXErrorHandler, (ClientData) (&gotXError));
 
-    /* Get the parent window. */
+    /*
+     * Get the parent window.
+     */
 
     status = XQueryTree(display, w, &root, &parent, &childList, &nChildren);
 
-    /* Do some cleanup; gotta return "None" if we got an error. */
+    /*
+     * Do some cleanup; gotta return "None" if we got an error.
+     */
 
     Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
     XSync(display, False);
@@ -595,19 +1192,19 @@ ParentXId(display, w)
 	XFree(childList);
     }
     if (status == 0) {
-        parent = None;
+	parent = None;
     }
 
     return parent;
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_HandleEvent --
  *
- *	Given an event, invoke all the handlers that have
- *	been registered for the event.
+ *	Given an event, invoke all the handlers that have been registered for
+ *	the event.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -615,348 +1212,106 @@ ParentXId(display, w)
  * Side effects:
  *	Depends on the handlers.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_HandleEvent(eventPtr)
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Event to dispatch. */
+Tk_HandleEvent(
+    XEvent *eventPtr)	/* Event to dispatch. */
 {
     register TkEventHandler *handlerPtr;
-    register GenericHandler *genericPtr;
-    register GenericHandler *genPrevPtr;
     TkWindow *winPtr;
     unsigned long mask;
     InProgress ip;
-    Window handlerWindow;
-    Window parentXId;
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
-    Tcl_Interp *interp = (Tcl_Interp *) NULL;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-	Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
-
-    /*
-     * Hack for simulated X-events: Correct the state field
-     * of the event record to match with the ButtonPress
-     * and ButtonRelease events.
-     */
-
-    if (eventPtr->type==ButtonPress) {
-	dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(eventPtr->xbutton.display);
-	dispPtr->mouseButtonWindow = eventPtr->xbutton.window;
-	eventPtr->xbutton.state |= dispPtr->mouseButtonState;
-	switch (eventPtr->xbutton.button) {
-	    case 1: dispPtr->mouseButtonState |= Button1Mask; break; 
-	    case 2: dispPtr->mouseButtonState |= Button2Mask; break; 
-	    case 3: dispPtr->mouseButtonState |= Button3Mask; break; 
-	}
-    } else if (eventPtr->type==ButtonRelease) {
-	dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(eventPtr->xbutton.display);
-	dispPtr->mouseButtonWindow = 0;
-	switch (eventPtr->xbutton.button) {
-	    case 1: dispPtr->mouseButtonState &= ~Button1Mask; break; 
-	    case 2: dispPtr->mouseButtonState &= ~Button2Mask; break; 
-	    case 3: dispPtr->mouseButtonState &= ~Button3Mask; break; 
-	}
-	eventPtr->xbutton.state |= dispPtr->mouseButtonState;
-    } else if (eventPtr->type==MotionNotify) {
-	dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(eventPtr->xmotion.display);
-	if (dispPtr->mouseButtonState & (Button1Mask|Button2Mask|Button3Mask)) {
-	    if (eventPtr->xbutton.window != dispPtr->mouseButtonWindow) {
-	        /*
-	         * This motion event should not be interpreted as a button
-	         * press + motion event since this is not the same window
-	         * the button was pressed down in.
-	         */
-	        dispPtr->mouseButtonState &=
-	                ~(Button1Mask|Button2Mask|Button3Mask);
-	        dispPtr->mouseButtonWindow = 0;
-	    } else {
-	        eventPtr->xmotion.state |= dispPtr->mouseButtonState;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    /* 
-     * Next, invoke all the generic event handlers (those that are
-     * invoked for all events).  If a generic event handler reports that
-     * an event is fully processed, go no further.
-     */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp = NULL;
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
-    for (genPrevPtr = NULL, genericPtr = tsdPtr->genericList;  
-            genericPtr != NULL; ) {
-	if (genericPtr->deleteFlag) {
-	    if (!tsdPtr->handlersActive) {
-		GenericHandler *tmpPtr;
-
-		/*
-		 * This handler needs to be deleted and there are no
-		 * calls pending through the handler, so now is a safe
-		 * time to delete it.
-		 */
-
-		tmpPtr = genericPtr->nextPtr;
-		if (genPrevPtr == NULL) {
-		    tsdPtr->genericList = tmpPtr;
-		} else {
-		    genPrevPtr->nextPtr = tmpPtr;
-		}
-		if (tmpPtr == NULL) {
-		    tsdPtr->lastGenericPtr = genPrevPtr;
-		}
-		(void) ckfree((char *) genericPtr);
-		genericPtr = tmpPtr;
-		continue;
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    int done;
-
-	    tsdPtr->handlersActive++;
-	    done = (*genericPtr->proc)(genericPtr->clientData, eventPtr);
-	    tsdPtr->handlersActive--;
-	    if (done) {
-		return;
-	    }
-	}
-	genPrevPtr = genericPtr;
-	genericPtr = genPrevPtr->nextPtr;
-    }
+    UpdateButtonEventState(eventPtr);
 
     /*
-     * If the event is a MappingNotify event, find its display and
-     * refresh the keyboard mapping information for the display.
-     * After that there's nothing else to do with the event, so just
-     * quit.
+     * If the generic handler processed this event we are done and can return.
      */
 
-    if (eventPtr->type == MappingNotify) {
-	dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(eventPtr->xmapping.display);
-	if (dispPtr != NULL) {
-	    XRefreshKeyboardMapping(&eventPtr->xmapping);
-	    dispPtr->bindInfoStale = 1;
-	}
-	return;
+    if (InvokeGenericHandlers(tsdPtr, eventPtr)) {
+	goto releaseEventResources;
     }
 
-    /*
-     * Events selected by StructureNotify require special handling.
-     * They look the same as those selected by SubstructureNotify.
-     * The only difference is whether the "event" and "window" fields
-     * are the same.  Compare the two fields and convert StructureNotify
-     * to SubstructureNotify if necessary.
-     */
-
-    handlerWindow = eventPtr->xany.window;
-    mask = eventMasks[eventPtr->xany.type];
-    if (mask == StructureNotifyMask) {
-	if (eventPtr->xmap.event != eventPtr->xmap.window) {
-	    mask = SubstructureNotifyMask;
-	    handlerWindow = eventPtr->xmap.event;
-	}
-    }
-    winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_IdToWindow(eventPtr->xany.display, handlerWindow);
-    if (winPtr == NULL) {
+    if (RefreshKeyboardMappingIfNeeded(eventPtr)) {
 	/*
-	 * There isn't a TkWindow structure for this window.
-	 * However, if the event is a PropertyNotify event then call
-	 * the selection manager (it deals beneath-the-table with
-	 * certain properties). Also, if the window's parent is a
-	 * Tk window that has the TK_PROP_PROPCHANGE flag set, then
-	 * we must propagate the PropertyNotify event up to the parent.
+	 * We are done with a MappingNotify event.
 	 */
 
-	if (eventPtr->type != PropertyNotify) {
-	    return;
-	}
-
-	TkSelPropProc(eventPtr);
-
-	/* Get handlerWindow's parent. */
-
-	parentXId = ParentXId(eventPtr->xany.display, handlerWindow);
-	if (parentXId == None) {
-	    return;
-	}
-
-	winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_IdToWindow(eventPtr->xany.display, parentXId);
-	if (winPtr == NULL) {
-	    return;
-	}
+	goto releaseEventResources;
+    }
 
-	if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_PROP_PROPCHANGE)) {
-	    return;
-	}
+    mask = GetEventMaskFromXEvent(eventPtr);
+    winPtr = GetTkWindowFromXEvent(eventPtr);
 
-	handlerWindow = parentXId;
+    if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	goto releaseEventResources;
     }
 
     /*
      * Once a window has started getting deleted, don't process any more
-     * events for it except for the DestroyNotify event.  This check is
-     * needed because a DestroyNotify handler could re-invoke the event
-     * loop, causing other pending events to be handled for the window
-     * (the window doesn't get totally expunged from our tables until
-     * after the DestroyNotify event has been completely handled).
+     * events for it except for the DestroyNotify event. This check is needed
+     * because a DestroyNotify handler could re-invoke the event loop, causing
+     * other pending events to be handled for the window (the window doesn't
+     * get totally expunged from our tables until after the DestroyNotify
+     * event has been completely handled).
      */
 
     if ((winPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD)
 	    && (eventPtr->type != DestroyNotify)) {
-	return;
+	goto releaseEventResources;
     }
 
     if (winPtr->mainPtr != NULL) {
+	int result;
+
+	interp = winPtr->mainPtr->interp;
 
-        /*
-         * Protect interpreter for this window from possible deletion
-         * while we are dealing with the event for this window. Thus,
-         * widget writers do not have to worry about protecting the
-         * interpreter in their own code.
-         */
-        
-        interp = winPtr->mainPtr->interp;
-        Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
-        
-	/*
-	 * Call focus-related code to look at FocusIn, FocusOut, Enter,
-	 * and Leave events;  depending on its return value, ignore the
-	 * event.
-	 */
-    
-	if ((mask & (FocusChangeMask|EnterWindowMask|LeaveWindowMask))
-		&& !TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)) {
-            Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
-	    return;
-	}
-    
-	/*
-	 * Redirect KeyPress and KeyRelease events to the focus window,
-	 * or ignore them entirely if there is no focus window.  We also
-	 * route the MouseWheel event to the focus window.  The MouseWheel
-	 * event is an extension to the X event set.  Currently, it is only
-	 * available on the Windows version of Tk.
-	 */
-    
-#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
-        /* MouseWheel events are not focus specific on Mac OS X */
-	if (mask & (KeyPressMask|KeyReleaseMask)) {
-#else
-	if (mask & (KeyPressMask|KeyReleaseMask|MouseWheelMask)) {
-#endif
-	    winPtr->dispPtr->lastEventTime = eventPtr->xkey.time;
-	    winPtr = TkFocusKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr);
-	    if (winPtr == NULL) {
-                Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
-		return;
-	    }
-	}
-    
 	/*
-	 * Call a grab-related procedure to do special processing on
-	 * pointer events.
+	 * Protect interpreter for this window from possible deletion while we
+	 * are dealing with the event for this window. Thus, widget writers do
+	 * not have to worry about protecting the interpreter in their own
+	 * code.
 	 */
-    
-	if (mask & (ButtonPressMask|ButtonReleaseMask|PointerMotionMask
-		|EnterWindowMask|LeaveWindowMask)) {
-	    if (mask & (ButtonPressMask|ButtonReleaseMask)) {
-		winPtr->dispPtr->lastEventTime = eventPtr->xbutton.time;
-	    } else if (mask & PointerMotionMask) {
-		winPtr->dispPtr->lastEventTime = eventPtr->xmotion.time;
-	    } else {
-		winPtr->dispPtr->lastEventTime = eventPtr->xcrossing.time;
-	    }
-	    if (TkPointerEvent(eventPtr, winPtr) == 0) {
-                goto done;
-	    }
+
+	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
+
+	result = ((InvokeFocusHandlers(&winPtr, mask, eventPtr))
+		|| (InvokeMouseHandlers(winPtr, mask, eventPtr)));
+
+	if (result) {
+	    goto releaseInterpreter;
 	}
     }
 
-#ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
     /*
-     * Pass the event to the input method(s), if there are any, and
-     * discard the event if the input method(s) insist.  Create the
-     * input context for the window if it hasn't already been done
-     * (XFilterEvent needs this context).  XIM is only ever enabled on
-     * Unix, but this hasn't been factored out of the generic code yet.
+     * Create the input context for the window if it hasn't already been done
+     * (XFilterEvent needs this context). When the event is a FocusIn event,
+     * set the input context focus to the receiving window. This code is only
+     * ever active for X11.
      */
-    dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
-    if ((dispPtr->flags & TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM)) {
-	long im_event_mask = 0L;
+
+#ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
+    if ((winPtr->dispPtr->flags & TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM)) {
 	if (!(winPtr->flags & (TK_CHECKED_IC|TK_ALREADY_DEAD))) {
 	    winPtr->flags |= TK_CHECKED_IC;
-	    if (dispPtr->inputMethod != NULL) {
-#if TK_XIM_SPOT
-		if (dispPtr->flags & TK_DISPLAY_XIM_SPOT) {
-		    XVaNestedList preedit_attr;
-		    XPoint spot = {0, 0};
-
-		    if (dispPtr->inputXfs == NULL) {
-			/*
-			 * We only need to create one XFontSet
-			 */
-			char      **missing_list;
-			int       missing_count;
-			char      *def_string;
-
-			dispPtr->inputXfs = XCreateFontSet(dispPtr->display,
-				"-*-*-*-R-Normal--14-130-75-75-*-*",
-				&missing_list, &missing_count, &def_string);
-			if (missing_count > 0) {
-			    XFreeStringList(missing_list);
-			}
-		    }
-
-		    preedit_attr = XVaCreateNestedList(0, XNSpotLocation,
-			    &spot, XNFontSet, dispPtr->inputXfs, NULL);
-		    if (winPtr->inputContext != NULL)
-		        panic("inputContext not NULL");
-		    winPtr->inputContext = XCreateIC(dispPtr->inputMethod,
-			    XNInputStyle, XIMPreeditPosition|XIMStatusNothing,
-			    XNClientWindow, winPtr->window,
-			    XNFocusWindow, winPtr->window,
-			    XNPreeditAttributes, preedit_attr,
-			    NULL);
-		    XFree(preedit_attr);
-		} else {
-		    if (winPtr->inputContext != NULL)
-		        panic("inputContext not NULL");
-		    winPtr->inputContext = XCreateIC(dispPtr->inputMethod,
-			    XNInputStyle, XIMPreeditNothing|XIMStatusNothing,
-			    XNClientWindow, winPtr->window,
-			    XNFocusWindow, winPtr->window,
-			    NULL);
-		}
-#else
-		if (winPtr->inputContext != NULL)
-		    panic("inputContext not NULL");
-		winPtr->inputContext = XCreateIC(dispPtr->inputMethod,
-			XNInputStyle, XIMPreeditNothing|XIMStatusNothing,
-			XNClientWindow, winPtr->window,
-			XNFocusWindow, winPtr->window,
-			NULL);
-#endif
-	    }
-	}
-	if (winPtr->inputContext != NULL &&
-	    (eventPtr->xany.type == FocusIn)) {
-	    XGetICValues(winPtr->inputContext,
-			 XNFilterEvents, &im_event_mask, NULL);
-	    if (im_event_mask != 0L) {
-		XSelectInput(winPtr->display, winPtr->window,
-			     winPtr->atts.event_mask | im_event_mask);
-		XSetICFocus(winPtr->inputContext);
+	    if (winPtr->dispPtr->inputMethod != NULL) {
+		CreateXIC(winPtr);
 	    }
 	}
-	if (eventPtr->type == KeyPress || eventPtr->type == KeyRelease) {
-	    if (XFilterEvent(eventPtr, None)) {
-		goto done;
-	    }
+	if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn && winPtr->inputContext != NULL) {
+	    XSetICFocus(winPtr->inputContext);
 	}
     }
-#endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */
+#endif
 
     /*
-     * For events where it hasn't already been done, update the current
-     * time in the display.
+     * For events where it hasn't already been done, update the current time
+     * in the display.
      */
 
     if (eventPtr->type == PropertyNotify) {
@@ -964,8 +1319,8 @@ Tk_HandleEvent(eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * There's a potential interaction here with Tk_DeleteEventHandler.
-     * Read the documentation for pendingPtr.
+     * There's a potential interaction here with Tk_DeleteEventHandler. Read
+     * the documentation for pendingPtr.
      */
 
     ip.eventPtr = eventPtr;
@@ -983,49 +1338,8 @@ Tk_HandleEvent(eventPtr)
 		    Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr, "WM_PROTOCOLS")) {
 		TkWmProtocolEventProc(winPtr, eventPtr);
 	    } else {
-		/*
-		 * Finally, invoke any ClientMessage event handlers.
-		 */
-
-		for (genPrevPtr = NULL, genericPtr = tsdPtr->cmList;
-		     genericPtr != NULL; ) {
-		    if (genericPtr->deleteFlag) {
-			if (!tsdPtr->handlersActive) {
-			    GenericHandler *tmpPtr;
-
-			    /*
-			     * This handler needs to be deleted and there are
-			     * no calls pending through any handlers, so now
-			     * is a safe time to delete it.
-			     */
-
-			    tmpPtr = genericPtr->nextPtr;
-			    if (genPrevPtr == NULL) {
-				tsdPtr->cmList = tmpPtr;
-			    } else {
-				genPrevPtr->nextPtr = tmpPtr;
-			    }
-			    if (tmpPtr == NULL) {
-				tsdPtr->lastCmPtr = genPrevPtr;
-			    }
-			    (void) ckfree((char *) genericPtr);
-			    genericPtr = tmpPtr;
-			    continue;
-			}
-		    } else {
-			int done;
-
-			tsdPtr->handlersActive++;
-			done = (*(Tk_ClientMessageProc *)genericPtr->proc)
-			    ((Tk_Window) winPtr, eventPtr);
-			tsdPtr->handlersActive--;
-			if (done) {
-			    break;
-			}
-		    }
-		    genPrevPtr	= genericPtr;
-		    genericPtr	= genPrevPtr->nextPtr;
-		}
+		InvokeClientMessageHandlers(tsdPtr, (Tk_Window)winPtr,
+			eventPtr);
 	    }
 	}
     } else {
@@ -1040,44 +1354,53 @@ Tk_HandleEvent(eventPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Pass the event to the "bind" command mechanism.  But, don't
-	 * do this for SubstructureNotify events.  The "bind" command
-	 * doesn't support them anyway, and it's easier to filter out
-	 * these events here than in the lower-level procedures.
+	 * Pass the event to the "bind" command mechanism. But, don't do this
+	 * for SubstructureNotify events. The "bind" command doesn't support
+	 * them anyway, and it's easier to filter out these events here than
+	 * in the lower-level functions.
 	 */
 
 	/*
-	 * ...well, except when we use the tkwm patches, in which case
-	 * we DO handle CreateNotify events, so we gotta pass 'em through.
+	 * ...well, except when we use the tkwm patches, in which case we DO
+	 * handle CreateNotify events, so we gotta pass 'em through.
 	 */
 
 	if ((ip.winPtr != None)
 		&& ((mask != SubstructureNotifyMask)
-				|| (eventPtr->type == CreateNotify))) {
+		|| (eventPtr->type == CreateNotify))) {
 	    TkBindEventProc(winPtr, eventPtr);
 	}
     }
     tsdPtr->pendingPtr = ip.nextPtr;
-done:
 
     /*
      * Release the interpreter for this window so that it can be potentially
      * deleted if requested.
      */
-    
-    if (interp != (Tcl_Interp *) NULL) {
-        Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+
+  releaseInterpreter:
+    if (interp != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
     }
+
+    /*
+     * Release the user_data from the event (if it is a virtual event and the
+     * field was non-NULL in the first place.) Note that this is done using a
+     * Tcl_Obj interface, and we set the field back to NULL afterwards out of
+     * paranoia. Also clean up any cached %A substitutions from key events.
+     */
+
+  releaseEventResources:
+    CleanUpTkEvent(eventPtr);
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkEventDeadWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when it is determined that
- *	a window is dead.  It cleans up event-related information
- *	about the window.
+ *	This function is invoked when it is determined that a window is dead.
+ *	It cleans up event-related information about the window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1085,31 +1408,30 @@ done:
  * Side effects:
  *	Various things get cleaned up and recycled.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkEventDeadWindow(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Information about the window
-				 * that is being deleted. */
+TkEventDeadWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Information about the window that is being
+				 * deleted. */
 {
     register TkEventHandler *handlerPtr;
     register InProgress *ipPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
-     * While deleting all the handlers, be careful to check for
-     * Tk_HandleEvent being about to process one of the deleted
-     * handlers.  If it is, tell it to quit (all of the handlers
-     * are being deleted).
+     * While deleting all the handlers, be careful to check for Tk_HandleEvent
+     * being about to process one of the deleted handlers. If it is, tell it
+     * to quit (all of the handlers are being deleted).
      */
 
     while (winPtr->handlerList != NULL) {
 	handlerPtr = winPtr->handlerList;
 	winPtr->handlerList = handlerPtr->nextPtr;
-	for (ipPtr = tsdPtr->pendingPtr; ipPtr != NULL; 
-                ipPtr = ipPtr->nextPtr) {
+	for (ipPtr = tsdPtr->pendingPtr; ipPtr != NULL;
+		ipPtr = ipPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (ipPtr->nextHandler == handlerPtr) {
 		ipPtr->nextHandler = NULL;
 	    }
@@ -1126,15 +1448,13 @@ TkEventDeadWindow(winPtr)
  *
  * TkCurrentTime --
  *
- *	Try to deduce the current time.  "Current time" means the time
- *	of the event that led to the current code being executed, which
- *	means the time in the most recently-nested invocation of
- *	Tk_HandleEvent.
+ *	Try to deduce the current time. "Current time" means the time of the
+ *	event that led to the current code being executed, which means the
+ *	time in the most recently-nested invocation of Tk_HandleEvent.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the time from the current event, or
- *	CurrentTime if there is no current event or if the current
- *	event contains no time.
+ *	The return value is the time from the current event, or CurrentTime if
+ *	there is no current event or if the current event contains no time.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1143,31 +1463,31 @@ TkEventDeadWindow(winPtr)
  */
 
 Time
-TkCurrentTime(dispPtr)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display for which the time is desired. */
+TkCurrentTime(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr)		/* Display for which the time is desired. */
 {
     register XEvent *eventPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (tsdPtr->pendingPtr == NULL) {
 	return dispPtr->lastEventTime;
     }
     eventPtr = tsdPtr->pendingPtr->eventPtr;
     switch (eventPtr->type) {
-	case ButtonPress:
-	case ButtonRelease:
-	    return eventPtr->xbutton.time;
-	case KeyPress:
-	case KeyRelease:
-	    return eventPtr->xkey.time;
-	case MotionNotify:
-	    return eventPtr->xmotion.time;
-	case EnterNotify:
-	case LeaveNotify:
-	    return eventPtr->xcrossing.time;
-	case PropertyNotify:
-	    return eventPtr->xproperty.time;
+    case ButtonPress:
+    case ButtonRelease:
+	return eventPtr->xbutton.time;
+    case KeyPress:
+    case KeyRelease:
+	return eventPtr->xkey.time;
+    case MotionNotify:
+	return eventPtr->xmotion.time;
+    case EnterNotify:
+    case LeaveNotify:
+	return eventPtr->xcrossing.time;
+    case PropertyNotify:
+	return eventPtr->xproperty.time;
     }
     return dispPtr->lastEventTime;
 }
@@ -1177,15 +1497,14 @@ TkCurrentTime(dispPtr)
  *
  * Tk_RestrictEvents --
  *
- *	This procedure is used to globally restrict the set of events
- *	that will be dispatched.  The restriction is done by filtering
- *	all incoming X events through a procedure that determines
- *	whether they are to be processed immediately, deferred, or
- *	discarded.
+ *	This function is used to globally restrict the set of events that will
+ *	be dispatched. The restriction is done by filtering all incoming X
+ *	events through a function that determines whether they are to be
+ *	processed immediately, deferred, or discarded.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the previous restriction procedure in effect,
- *	if there was one, or NULL if there wasn't.
+ *	The return value is the previous restriction function in effect, if
+ *	there was one, or NULL if there wasn't.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	From now on, proc will be called to determine whether to process,
@@ -1195,16 +1514,15 @@ TkCurrentTime(dispPtr)
  */
 
 Tk_RestrictProc *
-Tk_RestrictEvents(proc, arg, prevArgPtr)
-    Tk_RestrictProc *proc;	/* Procedure to call for each incoming
-				 * event. */
-    ClientData arg;		/* Arbitrary argument to pass to proc. */
-    ClientData *prevArgPtr;	/* Place to store information about previous
+Tk_RestrictEvents(
+    Tk_RestrictProc *proc,	/* Function to call for each incoming event */
+    ClientData arg,		/* Arbitrary argument to pass to proc. */
+    ClientData *prevArgPtr)	/* Place to store information about previous
 				 * argument. */
 {
     Tk_RestrictProc *prev;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     prev = tsdPtr->restrictProc;
     *prevArgPtr = tsdPtr->restrictArg;
@@ -1218,7 +1536,7 @@ Tk_RestrictEvents(proc, arg, prevArgPtr)
  *
  * Tk_CollapseMotionEvents --
  *
- *	This procedure controls whether we collapse motion events in a
+ *	This function controls whether we collapse motion events in a
  *	particular display or not.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -1231,10 +1549,10 @@ Tk_RestrictEvents(proc, arg, prevArgPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_CollapseMotionEvents(display, collapse)
-    Display *display;		/* Display handling these events. */
-    int collapse;		/* boolean value that specifies whether
-				 * motion events should be collapsed. */
+Tk_CollapseMotionEvents(
+    Display *display,		/* Display handling these events. */
+    int collapse)		/* Boolean value that specifies whether motion
+				 * events should be collapsed. */
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = (TkDisplay *) display;
     int prev = (dispPtr->flags & TK_DISPLAY_COLLAPSE_MOTION_EVENTS);
@@ -1252,28 +1570,26 @@ Tk_CollapseMotionEvents(display, collapse)
  *
  * Tk_QueueWindowEvent --
  *
- *	Given an X-style window event, this procedure adds it to the
- *	Tcl event queue at the given position.  This procedure also
- *	performs mouse motion event collapsing if possible.
+ *	Given an X-style window event, this function adds it to the Tcl event
+ *	queue at the given position. This function also performs mouse motion
+ *	event collapsing if possible.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Adds stuff to the event queue, which will eventually be
- *	processed.
+ *	Adds stuff to the event queue, which will eventually be processed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_QueueWindowEvent(eventPtr, position)
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Event to add to queue.  This
-					 * procedures copies it before adding
-					 * it to the queue. */
-    Tcl_QueuePosition position;		/* Where to put it on the queue:
-					 * TCL_QUEUE_TAIL, TCL_QUEUE_HEAD,
-					 * or TCL_QUEUE_MARK. */
+Tk_QueueWindowEvent(
+    XEvent *eventPtr,		/* Event to add to queue. This function copies
+				 * it before adding it to the queue. */
+    Tcl_QueuePosition position)	/* Where to put it on the queue:
+				 * TCL_QUEUE_TAIL, TCL_QUEUE_HEAD, or
+				 * TCL_QUEUE_MARK. */
 {
     TkWindowEvent *wevPtr;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;
@@ -1292,10 +1608,11 @@ Tk_QueueWindowEvent(eventPtr, position)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Don't filter motion events if the user 
-     * defaulting to true (1), which could be set to false (0) when the
-     * user wishes to receive all the motion data)
+     * Don't filter motion events if the user defaulting to true (1), which
+     * could be set to false (0) when the user wishes to receive all the
+     * motion data)
      */
+
     if (!(dispPtr->flags & TK_DISPLAY_COLLAPSE_MOTION_EVENTS)) {
 	wevPtr = (TkWindowEvent *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkWindowEvent));
 	wevPtr->header.proc = WindowEventProc;
@@ -1308,9 +1625,8 @@ Tk_QueueWindowEvent(eventPtr, position)
 	if ((eventPtr->type == MotionNotify) && (eventPtr->xmotion.window
 		== dispPtr->delayedMotionPtr->event.xmotion.window)) {
 	    /*
-	     * The new event is a motion event in the same window as the
-	     * saved motion event.  Just replace the saved event with the
-	     * new one.
+	     * The new event is a motion event in the same window as the saved
+	     * motion event. Just replace the saved event with the new one.
 	     */
 
 	    dispPtr->delayedMotionPtr->event = *eventPtr;
@@ -1319,7 +1635,7 @@ Tk_QueueWindowEvent(eventPtr, position)
 		&& (eventPtr->type != NoExpose)
 		&& (eventPtr->type != Expose)) {
 	    /*
-	     * The new event may conflict with the saved motion event.  Queue
+	     * The new event may conflict with the saved motion event. Queue
 	     * the saved motion event now so that it will be processed before
 	     * the new event.
 	     */
@@ -1335,13 +1651,13 @@ Tk_QueueWindowEvent(eventPtr, position)
     wevPtr->event = *eventPtr;
     if ((eventPtr->type == MotionNotify) && (position == TCL_QUEUE_TAIL)) {
 	/*
-	 * The new event is a motion event so don't queue it immediately;
-	 * save it around in case another motion event arrives that it can
-	 * be collapsed with.
+	 * The new event is a motion event so don't queue it immediately; save
+	 * it around in case another motion event arrives that it can be
+	 * collapsed with.
 	 */
 
 	if (dispPtr->delayedMotionPtr != NULL) {
-	    panic("Tk_QueueWindowEvent found unexpected delayed motion event");
+	    Tcl_Panic("Tk_QueueWindowEvent found unexpected delayed motion event");
 	}
 	dispPtr->delayedMotionPtr = wevPtr;
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DelayedMotionProc, (ClientData) dispPtr);
@@ -1351,12 +1667,12 @@ Tk_QueueWindowEvent(eventPtr, position)
 }
 
 /*
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkQueueEventForAllChildren --
  *
- *	Given an XEvent, recursively queue the event for this window and
- *	all non-toplevel children of the given window.  
+ *	Given an XEvent, recursively queue the event for this window and all
+ *	non-toplevel children of the given window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1364,23 +1680,23 @@ Tk_QueueWindowEvent(eventPtr, position)
  * Side effects:
  *	Events queued.
  *
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkQueueEventForAllChildren(winPtr, eventPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;	    /* Window to which event is sent. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;	    /* The event to be sent. */
+TkQueueEventForAllChildren(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,	    /* Window to which event is sent. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)	    /* The event to be sent. */
 {
     TkWindow *childPtr;
 
     if (!Tk_IsMapped(winPtr)) {
-        return;
+	return;
     }
-    
+
     eventPtr->xany.window = winPtr->window;
     Tk_QueueWindowEvent(eventPtr, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
-    
+
     childPtr = winPtr->childList;
     while (childPtr != NULL) {
 	if (!Tk_TopWinHierarchy(childPtr)) {
@@ -1395,16 +1711,16 @@ TkQueueEventForAllChildren(winPtr, eventPtr)
  *
  * WindowEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by Tcl_DoOneEvent when a window event
- *	reaches the front of the event queue.  This procedure is responsible
- *	for actually handling the event.
+ *	This function is called by Tcl_DoOneEvent when a window event reaches
+ *	the front of the event queue. This function is responsible for
+ *	actually handling the event.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns 1 if the event was handled, meaning it should be removed
- *	from the queue.  Returns 0 if the event was not handled, meaning
- *	it should stay on the queue.  The event isn't handled if the
- *	TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS bit isn't set in flags, if a restrict proc
- *	prevents the event from being handled.
+ *	Returns 1 if the event was handled, meaning it should be removed from
+ *	the queue. Returns 0 if the event was not handled, meaning it should
+ *	stay on the queue. The event isn't handled if the TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS
+ *	bit isn't set in flags, if a restrict proc prevents the event from
+ *	being handled.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Whatever the event handlers for the event do.
@@ -1413,15 +1729,15 @@ TkQueueEventForAllChildren(winPtr, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-WindowEventProc(evPtr, flags)
-    Tcl_Event *evPtr;		/* Event to service. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags that indicate what events to
-				 * handle, such as TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS. */
+WindowEventProc(
+    Tcl_Event *evPtr,		/* Event to service. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags that indicate what events to handle,
+				 * such as TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS. */
 {
     TkWindowEvent *wevPtr = (TkWindowEvent *) evPtr;
     Tk_RestrictAction result;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (!(flags & TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS)) {
 	return 0;
@@ -1436,68 +1752,398 @@ WindowEventProc(evPtr, flags)
 		 * TK_DELETE_EVENT: return and say we processed the event,
 		 * even though we didn't do anything at all.
 		 */
+
+		CleanUpTkEvent(&wevPtr->event);
 		return 1;
 	    }
 	}
     }
     Tk_HandleEvent(&wevPtr->event);
+    CleanUpTkEvent(&wevPtr->event);
     return 1;
 }
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * CleanUpTkEvent --
+ *
+ *	This function is called to remove and deallocate any information in
+ *	the event which is not directly in the event structure itself. It may
+ *	be called multiple times per event, so it takes care to set the
+ *	cleared pointer fields to NULL afterwards.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Makes the event no longer have any external resources.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+CleanUpTkEvent(
+    XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    switch (eventPtr->type) {
+    case KeyPress:
+    case KeyRelease: {
+	TkKeyEvent *kePtr = (TkKeyEvent *) eventPtr;
+
+	if (kePtr->charValuePtr != NULL) {
+	    ckfree(kePtr->charValuePtr);
+	    kePtr->charValuePtr = NULL;
+	    kePtr->charValueLen = 0;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case VirtualEvent: {
+	XVirtualEvent *vePtr = (XVirtualEvent *) eventPtr;
+
+	if (vePtr->user_data != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(vePtr->user_data);
+	    vePtr->user_data = NULL;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * DelayedMotionProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked as an idle handler when a mouse motion
- *	event has been delayed.  It queues the delayed event so that it
- *	will finally be serviced.
+ *	This function is invoked as an idle handler when a mouse motion event
+ *	has been delayed. It queues the delayed event so that it will finally
+ *	be serviced.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The delayed mouse motion event gets added to the Tcl event
- *	queue for servicing.
+ *	The delayed mouse motion event gets added to the Tcl event queue for
+ *	servicing.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DelayedMotionProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to display containing a delayed
+DelayedMotionProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to display containing a delayed
 				 * motion event to be serviced. */
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = (TkDisplay *) clientData;
 
     if (dispPtr->delayedMotionPtr == NULL) {
-	panic("DelayedMotionProc found no delayed mouse motion event");
+	Tcl_Panic("DelayedMotionProc found no delayed mouse motion event");
     }
     Tcl_QueueEvent(&dispPtr->delayedMotionPtr->header, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
     dispPtr->delayedMotionPtr = NULL;
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkCreateExitHandler --
+ *
+ *	Same as Tcl_CreateExitHandler, but private to Tk.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects.
+ *	Sets a handler with Tcl_CreateExitHandler if this is the first call.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkCreateExitHandler(
+    Tcl_ExitProc *proc,		/* Function to invoke. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
+{
+    ExitHandler *exitPtr;
+
+    exitPtr = (ExitHandler *) ckalloc(sizeof(ExitHandler));
+    exitPtr->proc = proc;
+    exitPtr->clientData = clientData;
+    Tcl_MutexLock(&exitMutex);
+
+    /*
+     * The call to TclInExit() is disabled here. That's a private Tcl routine,
+     * and calling it is causing some trouble with portability of building Tk.
+     * We should avoid private Tcl routines generally.
+     *
+     * In this case, the TclInExit() call is being used only to prevent a
+     * Tcl_CreateExitHandler() call when Tcl finalization is in progress.
+     * That's a situation that shouldn't happen anyway. Recent changes within
+     * Tcl_Finalize now cause a Tcl_Panic() to happen if exit handlers get
+     * added after exit handling is complete. By disabling the guard here,
+     * that panic will serve to help us find the buggy conditions and correct
+     * them.
+     *
+     * We can restore this guard if we find we must (hopefully getting public
+     * access to TclInExit() if we discover extensions really do need this),
+     * but during alpha development, this is a good time to dig in and find
+     * the root causes of finalization bugs.
+     */
+
+    if (firstExitPtr == NULL/* && !TclInExit()*/) {
+	Tcl_CreateExitHandler(TkFinalize, NULL);
+    }
+    exitPtr->nextPtr = firstExitPtr;
+    firstExitPtr = exitPtr;
+    Tcl_MutexUnlock(&exitMutex);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkDeleteExitHandler --
+ *
+ *	Same as Tcl_DeleteExitHandler, but private to Tk.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkDeleteExitHandler(
+    Tcl_ExitProc *proc,		/* Function that was previously registered. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
+{
+    ExitHandler *exitPtr, *prevPtr;
+
+    Tcl_MutexLock(&exitMutex);
+    for (prevPtr = NULL, exitPtr = firstExitPtr; exitPtr != NULL;
+	    prevPtr = exitPtr, exitPtr = exitPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if ((exitPtr->proc == proc)
+		&& (exitPtr->clientData == clientData)) {
+	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
+		firstExitPtr = exitPtr->nextPtr;
+	    } else {
+		prevPtr->nextPtr = exitPtr->nextPtr;
+	    }
+	    ckfree((char *) exitPtr);
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    Tcl_MutexUnlock(&exitMutex);
+    return;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkCreateThreadExitHandler --
+ *
+ *	Same as Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler, but private to Tk.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Proc will be invoked with clientData as argument when the application
+ *	exits.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkCreateThreadExitHandler(
+    Tcl_ExitProc *proc,		/* Function to invoke. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
+{
+    ExitHandler *exitPtr;
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+
+    exitPtr = (ExitHandler *) ckalloc(sizeof(ExitHandler));
+    exitPtr->proc = proc;
+    exitPtr->clientData = clientData;
+
+    /*
+     * See comments in TkCreateExitHandler().
+     */
+
+    if (tsdPtr->firstExitPtr == NULL/* && !TclInExit()*/) {
+	Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler(TkFinalizeThread, NULL);
+    }
+    exitPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->firstExitPtr;
+    tsdPtr->firstExitPtr = exitPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkDeleteThreadExitHandler --
+ *
+ *	Same as Tcl_DeleteThreadExitHandler, but private to Tk.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If there is an exit handler corresponding to proc and clientData then
+ *	it is cancelled; if no such handler exists then nothing happens.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkDeleteThreadExitHandler(
+    Tcl_ExitProc *proc,		/* Function that was previously registered. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
+{
+    ExitHandler *exitPtr, *prevPtr;
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+
+    for (prevPtr = NULL, exitPtr = tsdPtr->firstExitPtr; exitPtr != NULL;
+	    prevPtr = exitPtr, exitPtr = exitPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if ((exitPtr->proc == proc)
+		&& (exitPtr->clientData == clientData)) {
+	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
+		tsdPtr->firstExitPtr = exitPtr->nextPtr;
+	    } else {
+		prevPtr->nextPtr = exitPtr->nextPtr;
+	    }
+	    ckfree((char *) exitPtr);
+	    return;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkFinalize --
+ *
+ *	Runs our private exit handlers and removes itself from Tcl. This is
+ *	benificial should we want to protect from dangling pointers should the
+ *	Tk shared library be unloaded prior to Tcl which can happen on windows
+ *	should the process be forcefully exiting from an exception handler.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkFinalize(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
+{
+    ExitHandler *exitPtr;
+
+    Tcl_DeleteExitHandler(TkFinalize, NULL);
+
+    Tcl_MutexLock(&exitMutex);
+    for (exitPtr = firstExitPtr; exitPtr != NULL; exitPtr = firstExitPtr) {
+	/*
+	 * Be careful to remove the handler from the list before invoking its
+	 * callback. This protects us against double-freeing if the callback
+	 * should call TkDeleteExitHandler on itself.
+	 */
+
+	firstExitPtr = exitPtr->nextPtr;
+	Tcl_MutexUnlock(&exitMutex);
+	(*exitPtr->proc)(exitPtr->clientData);
+	ckfree((char *) exitPtr);
+	Tcl_MutexLock(&exitMutex);
+    }
+    firstExitPtr = NULL;
+    Tcl_MutexUnlock(&exitMutex);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkFinalizeThread --
+ *
+ *	Runs our private thread exit handlers and removes itself from Tcl.
+ *	This is benificial should we want to protect from dangling pointers
+ *	should the Tk shared library be unloaded prior to Tcl which can happen
+ *	on Windows should the process be forcefully exiting from an exception
+ *	handler.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkFinalizeThread(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
+{
+    ExitHandler *exitPtr;
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+
+    Tcl_DeleteThreadExitHandler(TkFinalizeThread, NULL);
+
+    if (tsdPtr != NULL) {
+	tsdPtr->inExit = 1;
+
+	for (exitPtr = tsdPtr->firstExitPtr; exitPtr != NULL;
+		exitPtr = tsdPtr->firstExitPtr) {
+	    /*
+	     * Be careful to remove the handler from the list before invoking
+	     * its callback. This protects us against double-freeing if the
+	     * callback should call TkDeleteThreadExitHandler on itself.
+	     */
+
+	    tsdPtr->firstExitPtr = exitPtr->nextPtr;
+	    (*exitPtr->proc)(exitPtr->clientData);
+	    ckfree((char *) exitPtr);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_MainLoop --
  *
- *	Call Tcl_DoOneEvent over and over again in an infinite
- *	loop as long as there exist any main windows.
+ *	Call Tcl_DoOneEvent over and over again in an infinite loop as long as
+ *	there exist any main windows.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Arbitrary;  depends on handlers for events.
+ *	Arbitrary; depends on handlers for events.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_MainLoop()
+Tk_MainLoop(void)
 {
     while (Tk_GetNumMainWindows() > 0) {
 	Tcl_DoOneEvent(0);
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkFileFilter.c b/generic/tkFileFilter.c
index 3fa8303..547dd9b 100644
--- a/generic/tkFileFilter.c
+++ b/generic/tkFileFilter.c
@@ -6,33 +6,29 @@
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkFileFilter.h"
 
-static int		AddClause _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    Tcl_Interp * interp, FileFilter * filterPtr,
-			    CONST char * patternsStr, CONST char * ostypesStr,
-			    int isWindows));
-static void		FreeClauses _ANSI_ARGS_((FileFilter * filterPtr));
-static void		FreeGlobPatterns _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    FileFilterClause * clausePtr));
-static void		FreeMacFileTypes _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    FileFilterClause * clausePtr));
-static FileFilter *	GetFilter _ANSI_ARGS_((FileFilterList * flistPtr,
-			    CONST char * name));
+static int		AddClause(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    FileFilter *filterPtr, Tcl_Obj *patternsObj,
+			    Tcl_Obj *ostypesObj, int isWindows);
+static void		FreeClauses(FileFilter *filterPtr);
+static void		FreeGlobPatterns(FileFilterClause *clausePtr);
+static void		FreeMacFileTypes(FileFilterClause *clausePtr);
+static FileFilter *	GetFilter(FileFilterList *flistPtr, CONST char *name);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkInitFileFilters --
  *
- *	Initializes a FileFilterList data structure. A FileFilterList
- *	must be initialized EXACTLY ONCE before any calls to
- *	TkGetFileFilters() is made. The usual flow of control is:
+ *	Initializes a FileFilterList data structure. A FileFilterList must be
+ *	initialized EXACTLY ONCE before any calls to TkGetFileFilters() is
+ *	made. The usual flow of control is:
  *		TkInitFileFilters(&flist);
  *		    TkGetFileFilters(&flist, ...);
  *		    TkGetFileFilters(&flist, ...);
@@ -44,12 +40,13 @@ static FileFilter *	GetFilter _ANSI_ARGS_((FileFilterList * flistPtr,
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The fields in flistPtr are initialized.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkInitFileFilters(flistPtr)
-    FileFilterList * flistPtr;	/* The structure to be initialized. */
+TkInitFileFilters(
+    FileFilterList *flistPtr)	/* The structure to be initialized. */
 {
     flistPtr->filters = NULL;
     flistPtr->filtersTail = NULL;
@@ -61,11 +58,11 @@ TkInitFileFilters(flistPtr)
  *
  * TkGetFileFilters --
  *
- *	This function is called by the Mac and Windows implementation
- *	of tk_getOpenFile and tk_getSaveFile to translate the string
- *	value of the -filetypes option of into an easy-to-parse C
- *	structure (flistPtr). The caller of this function will then use
- *	flistPtr to perform filetype matching in a platform specific way.
+ *	This function is called by the Mac and Windows implementation of
+ *	tk_getOpenFile and tk_getSaveFile to translate the string value of the
+ *	-filetypes option into an easy-to-parse C structure (flistPtr). The
+ *	caller of this function will then use flistPtr to perform filetype
+ *	matching in a platform specific way.
  *
  *	flistPtr must be initialized (See comments in TkInitFileFilters).
  *
@@ -73,85 +70,74 @@ TkInitFileFilters(flistPtr)
  *	A standard TCL return value.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The fields in flistPtr are changed according to string.
+ *	The fields in flistPtr are changed according to 'types'.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 int
-TkGetFileFilters(interp, flistPtr, string, isWindows)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    FileFilterList * flistPtr;	/* Stores the list of file filters. */
-    char * string;		/* Value of the -filetypes option. */
-    int isWindows;		/* True if we are running on Windows. */
+TkGetFileFilters(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    FileFilterList *flistPtr,	/* Stores the list of file filters. */
+    Tcl_Obj *types,		/* Value of the -filetypes option. */
+    int isWindows)		/* True if we are running on Windows. */
 {
-    int listArgc;
-    CONST char ** listArgv = NULL;
-    CONST char ** typeInfo = NULL;
-    int code = TCL_OK;
+    int listObjc;
+    Tcl_Obj ** listObjv = NULL;
     int i;
 
-    if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, string, &listArgc, &listArgv) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (types == NULL) {
+        return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, types, &listObjc,
+	    &listObjv) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    if (listArgc == 0) {
-	goto done;
+    if (listObjc == 0) {
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Free the filter information that have been allocated the previous
-     * time -- the -filefilters option may have been used more than once in
-     * the command line.
+     * Free the filter information that have been allocated the previous time;
+     * the -filefilters option may have been used more than once in the
+     * command line.
      */
     TkFreeFileFilters(flistPtr);
 
-    for (i = 0; i<listArgc; i++) {
+    for (i = 0; i<listObjc; i++) {
 	/*
-	 * Each file type should have two or three elements: the first one
-	 * is the name of the type and the second is the filter of the type.
-	 * The third is the Mac OSType ID, but we don't care about them here.
+	 * Each file type should have two or three elements: the first one is
+	 * the name of the type and the second is the filter of the type. The
+	 * third is the Mac OSType ID, but we don't care about them here.
 	 */
+
 	int count;
-	FileFilter * filterPtr;
+	FileFilter *filterPtr;
+	Tcl_Obj **typeInfo;
 
-	if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, listArgv[i], &count, &typeInfo) != TCL_OK) {
-	    code = TCL_ERROR;
-	    goto done;
+	if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, listObjv[i], &count,
+		&typeInfo) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	
+
 	if (count != 2 && count != 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad file type \"", listArgv[i], "\", ",
-		"should be \"typeName {extension ?extensions ...?} ",
-		"?{macType ?macTypes ...?}?\"",	NULL);
-	    code = TCL_ERROR;
-	    goto done;
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad file type \"",
+		    Tcl_GetString(listObjv[i]), "\", ",
+		    "should be \"typeName {extension ?extensions ...?} ",
+		    "?{macType ?macTypes ...?}?\"", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
-	filterPtr = GetFilter(flistPtr, typeInfo[0]);
-
-	if (count == 2) {
-	    code = AddClause(interp, filterPtr, typeInfo[1], NULL,
-		isWindows);
-	} else {
-	    code = AddClause(interp, filterPtr, typeInfo[1], typeInfo[2],
-		isWindows);
-	}
-	if (code != TCL_OK) {
-	    goto done;
-	}
+	filterPtr = GetFilter(flistPtr, Tcl_GetString(typeInfo[0]));
 
-        if (typeInfo) {
-	    ckfree((char*)typeInfo);
+	if (AddClause(interp, filterPtr, typeInfo[1],
+		(count==2 ? NULL : typeInfo[2]), isWindows) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	typeInfo = NULL;
     }
 
-  done:
-    if (typeInfo) {
-       ckfree((char*)typeInfo);
-    }
-    if (listArgv) {
-	ckfree((char*)listArgv);
-    }
-    return code;
+    return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -166,19 +152,20 @@ TkGetFileFilters(interp, flistPtr, string, isWindows)
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The fields allocated by TkGetFileFilters() are freed.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkFreeFileFilters(flistPtr)
-    FileFilterList * flistPtr;	/* List of file filters to free */
+TkFreeFileFilters(
+    FileFilterList *flistPtr)	/* List of file filters to free */
 {
-    FileFilter * filterPtr, *toFree;
+    FileFilter *filterPtr, *toFree;
 
     filterPtr=flistPtr->filters;
-    while (filterPtr) {
+    while (filterPtr != NULL) {
 	toFree = filterPtr;
-	filterPtr=filterPtr->next;
+	filterPtr = filterPtr->next;
 	FreeClauses(toFree);
 	ckfree((char*)toFree->name);
 	ckfree((char*)toFree);
@@ -198,41 +185,82 @@ TkFreeFileFilters(flistPtr)
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The list of filter clauses are updated in filterPtr.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static int AddClause(interp, filterPtr, patternsStr, ostypesStr, isWindows)
-    Tcl_Interp * interp;	/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    FileFilter * filterPtr;	/* Stores the new filter clause */
-    CONST char * patternsStr;		/* A TCL list of glob patterns. */
-    CONST char * ostypesStr;		/* A TCL list of Mac OSType strings. */
-    int isWindows;		/* True if we are running on Windows; False
-				 * if we are running on the Mac; Glob
-				 * patterns need to be processed differently
-				 * on these two platforms */
+static int
+AddClause(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    FileFilter *filterPtr,	/* Stores the new filter clause */
+    Tcl_Obj *patternsObj,	/* A Tcl list of glob patterns. */
+    Tcl_Obj *ostypesObj,	/* A Tcl list of Mac OSType strings. */
+    int isWindows)		/* True if we are running on Windows; False if
+				 * we are running on the Mac; Glob patterns
+				 * need to be processed differently on these
+				 * two platforms */
 {
-    CONST char ** globList = NULL;
-    int globCount;
-    CONST char ** ostypeList = NULL;
-    int ostypeCount;
-    FileFilterClause * clausePtr;
-    int i;
-    int code = TCL_OK;
+    Tcl_Obj **globList = NULL, **ostypeList = NULL;
+    int globCount, ostypeCount, i, code = TCL_OK;
+    FileFilterClause *clausePtr;
+    Tcl_Encoding macRoman = NULL;
 
-    if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, patternsStr, &globCount, &globList)!= TCL_OK) {
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, patternsObj,
+	    &globCount, &globList) != TCL_OK) {
 	code = TCL_ERROR;
 	goto done;
     }
-    if (ostypesStr != NULL) {
-	if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, ostypesStr, &ostypeCount, &ostypeList)
-		!= TCL_OK) {
+    if (ostypesObj != NULL) {
+	if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, ostypesObj,
+		&ostypeCount, &ostypeList) != TCL_OK) {
 	    code = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
+
+	/*
+	 * We probably need this encoding now...
+	 */
+
+	macRoman = Tcl_GetEncoding(NULL, "macRoman");
+
+	/*
+	 * Might be cleaner to use 'Tcl_GetOSTypeFromObj' but that is actually
+	 * static to the MacOS X/Darwin version of Tcl, and would therefore
+	 * require further code refactoring.
+	 */
+
 	for (i=0; i<ostypeCount; i++) {
-	    if (strlen(ostypeList[i]) != 4) {
+	    int len;
+	    CONST char *strType = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(ostypeList[i], &len);
+
+	    /*
+	     * If len is < 4, it is definitely an error. If equal or longer,
+	     * we need to use the macRoman encoding to determine the correct
+	     * length (assuming there may be non-ascii characters, e.g.,
+	     * embedded nulls or accented characters in the string, the
+	     * macRoman length will be different).
+	     *
+	     * If we couldn't load the encoding, then we can't actually check
+	     * the correct length. But here we assume we're probably operating
+	     * on unix/windows with a minimal set of encodings and so don't
+	     * care about MacOS types. So we won't signal an error.
+	     */
+
+	    if (len >= 4 && macRoman != NULL) {
+		Tcl_DString osTypeDS;
+
+		/*
+		 * Convert utf to macRoman, since MacOS types are defined to
+		 * be 4 macRoman characters long
+		 */
+
+		Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(macRoman, strType, len, &osTypeDS);
+		len = Tcl_DStringLength(&osTypeDS);
+		Tcl_DStringFree(&osTypeDS);
+	    }
+	    if (len != 4) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad Macintosh file type \"",
-		    ostypeList[i], "\"", NULL);
+			Tcl_GetString(ostypeList[i]), "\"", NULL);
 		code = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
@@ -240,7 +268,7 @@ static int AddClause(interp, filterPtr, patternsStr, ostypesStr, isWindows)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Add the clause into the list of clauses 
+     * Add the clause into the list of clauses
      */
 
     clausePtr = (FileFilterClause*)ckalloc(sizeof(FileFilterClause));
@@ -259,40 +287,40 @@ static int AddClause(interp, filterPtr, patternsStr, ostypesStr, isWindows)
 
     if (globCount > 0 && globList != NULL) {
 	for (i=0; i<globCount; i++) {
-	    GlobPattern * globPtr = (GlobPattern*)ckalloc(sizeof(GlobPattern));
+	    GlobPattern *globPtr = (GlobPattern*)ckalloc(sizeof(GlobPattern));
 	    int len;
-	    
-	    len = (strlen(globList[i]) + 1) * sizeof(char);
 
-	    if (globList[i][0] && globList[i][0] != '*') {
+	    CONST char *str = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(globList[i], &len);
+	    len = (len + 1) * sizeof(char);
+
+	    if (str[0] && str[0] != '*') {
 		/*
 		 * Prepend a "*" to patterns that do not have a leading "*"
 		 */
+
 		globPtr->pattern = (char*)ckalloc((unsigned int) len+1);
 		globPtr->pattern[0] = '*';
-		strcpy(globPtr->pattern+1, globList[i]);
-	    }
-	    else if (isWindows) {
-		if (strcmp(globList[i], "*") == 0) {
-		    globPtr->pattern = (char*)ckalloc(4*sizeof(char));
+		strcpy(globPtr->pattern+1, str);
+	    } else if (isWindows) {
+		if (strcmp(str, "*") == 0) {
+		    globPtr->pattern = (char*)ckalloc(4 * sizeof(char));
 		    strcpy(globPtr->pattern, "*.*");
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(globList[i], "") == 0) {
+		} else if (strcmp(str, "") == 0) {
 		    /*
 		     * An empty string means "match all files with no
 		     * extensions"
 		     * BUG: "*." actually matches with all files on Win95
 		     */
-		    globPtr->pattern = (char*)ckalloc(3*sizeof(char));
+
+		    globPtr->pattern = (char *) ckalloc(3 * sizeof(char));
 		    strcpy(globPtr->pattern, "*.");
-		}
-		else {
-		    globPtr->pattern = (char*)ckalloc((unsigned int) len);
-		    strcpy(globPtr->pattern, globList[i]);
+		} else {
+		    globPtr->pattern = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned int) len);
+		    strcpy(globPtr->pattern, str);
 		}
 	    } else {
-		globPtr->pattern = (char*)ckalloc((unsigned int) len);
-		strcpy(globPtr->pattern, globList[i]);
+		globPtr->pattern = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned int) len);
+		strcpy(globPtr->pattern, str);
 	    }
 
 	    /*
@@ -308,13 +336,27 @@ static int AddClause(interp, filterPtr, patternsStr, ostypesStr, isWindows)
 	    globPtr->next = NULL;
 	}
     }
-    if (ostypeCount > 0 && ostypeList != NULL) {
+    if (ostypeList != NULL && ostypeCount > 0) {
+	if (macRoman == NULL) {
+	    macRoman = Tcl_GetEncoding(NULL, "macRoman");
+	}
 	for (i=0; i<ostypeCount; i++) {
-	    MacFileType * mfPtr = (MacFileType*)ckalloc(sizeof(MacFileType));
-	    CONST char *string = ostypeList[i];
+	    Tcl_DString osTypeDS;
+	    int len;
+	    MacFileType *mfPtr = (MacFileType *) ckalloc(sizeof(MacFileType));
+	    CONST char *strType = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(ostypeList[i], &len);
+	    char *string;
 
+	    /*
+	     * Convert utf to macRoman, since MacOS types are defined to be 4
+	     * macRoman characters long
+	     */
+
+	    Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(macRoman, strType, len, &osTypeDS);
+	    string = Tcl_DStringValue(&osTypeDS);
 	    mfPtr->type = (OSType) string[0] << 24 | (OSType) string[1] << 16 |
 		    (OSType) string[2] <<  8 | (OSType) string[3];
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&osTypeDS);
 
 	    /*
 	     * Add the Mac type pattern into the list of Mac types
@@ -331,15 +373,11 @@ static int AddClause(interp, filterPtr, patternsStr, ostypesStr, isWindows)
     }
 
   done:
-    if (globList) {
-	ckfree((char*)globList);
+    if (macRoman != NULL) {
+	Tcl_FreeEncoding(macRoman);
     }
-    if (ostypeList) {
-	ckfree((char*)ostypeList);
-    }
-
     return code;
-}	
+}
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -353,28 +391,30 @@ static int AddClause(interp, filterPtr, patternsStr, ostypesStr, isWindows)
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The list of filters are updated in flistPtr.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static FileFilter * GetFilter(flistPtr, name)
-    FileFilterList * flistPtr;	/* The FileFilterList that contains the
-				 * newly created filter */
-    CONST char * name;		/* Name of the filter. It is usually displayed
+static FileFilter *
+GetFilter(
+    FileFilterList *flistPtr,	/* The FileFilterList that contains the newly
+				 * created filter */
+    CONST char *name)		/* Name of the filter. It is usually displayed
 				 * in the "File Types" listbox in the file
 				 * dialogs. */
 {
-    FileFilter * filterPtr;
+    FileFilter *filterPtr = flistPtr->filters;
 
-    for (filterPtr=flistPtr->filters; filterPtr; filterPtr=filterPtr->next) {
-	if (strcmp(filterPtr->name, name)==0) {
+    for (; filterPtr; filterPtr=filterPtr->next) {
+	if (strcmp(filterPtr->name, name) == 0) {
 	    return filterPtr;
 	}
     }
 
-    filterPtr = (FileFilter*)ckalloc(sizeof(FileFilter));
+    filterPtr = (FileFilter *) ckalloc(sizeof(FileFilter));
     filterPtr->clauses = NULL;
     filterPtr->clausesTail = NULL;
-    filterPtr->name = (char*)ckalloc((strlen(name)+1) * sizeof(char));
+    filterPtr->name = (char *) ckalloc((strlen(name)+1) * sizeof(char));
     strcpy(filterPtr->name, name);
 
     if (flistPtr->filters == NULL) {
@@ -401,22 +441,23 @@ static FileFilter * GetFilter(flistPtr, name)
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The list of clauses in filterPtr->clauses are freed.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeClauses(filterPtr)
-    FileFilter * filterPtr;	/* FileFilter whose clauses are to be freed */
+FreeClauses(
+    FileFilter *filterPtr)	/* FileFilter whose clauses are to be freed */
 {
-    FileFilterClause * clausePtr, * toFree;
+    FileFilterClause *clausePtr = filterPtr->clauses;
+
+    while (clausePtr != NULL) {
+	FileFilterClause *toFree = clausePtr;
+	clausePtr = clausePtr->next;
 
-    clausePtr = filterPtr->clauses;
-    while (clausePtr) {
-	toFree = clausePtr;
-	clausePtr=clausePtr->next;
 	FreeGlobPatterns(toFree);
 	FreeMacFileTypes(toFree);
-	ckfree((char*)toFree);
+	ckfree((char *) toFree);
     }
     filterPtr->clauses = NULL;
     filterPtr->clausesTail = NULL;
@@ -434,22 +475,22 @@ FreeClauses(filterPtr)
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The list of glob patterns in clausePtr->patterns are freed.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeGlobPatterns(clausePtr)
-    FileFilterClause * clausePtr;/* The clause whose patterns are to be freed*/
+FreeGlobPatterns(
+    FileFilterClause *clausePtr)/* The clause whose patterns are to be freed*/
 {
-    GlobPattern * globPtr, * toFree;
+    GlobPattern *globPtr = clausePtr->patterns;
 
-    globPtr = clausePtr->patterns;
-    while (globPtr) {
-	toFree = globPtr;
-	globPtr=globPtr->next;
+    while (globPtr != NULL) {
+	GlobPattern *toFree = globPtr;
+	globPtr = globPtr->next;
 
-	ckfree((char*)toFree->pattern);
-	ckfree((char*)toFree);
+	ckfree((char *) toFree->pattern);
+	ckfree((char *) toFree);
     }
     clausePtr->patterns = NULL;
 }
@@ -466,21 +507,29 @@ FreeGlobPatterns(clausePtr)
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The list of Mac file types in clausePtr->macTypes are freed.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeMacFileTypes(clausePtr)
-    FileFilterClause * clausePtr;  /* The clause whose mac types are to be
-				    * freed */
+FreeMacFileTypes(
+    FileFilterClause *clausePtr)/* The clause whose mac types are to be
+				 * freed */
 {
-    MacFileType * mfPtr, * toFree;
+    MacFileType *mfPtr = clausePtr->macTypes;
 
-    mfPtr = clausePtr->macTypes;
-    while (mfPtr) {
-	toFree = mfPtr;
-	mfPtr=mfPtr->next;
-	ckfree((char*)toFree);
+    while (mfPtr != NULL) {
+	MacFileType *toFree = mfPtr;
+	mfPtr = mfPtr->next;
+	ckfree((char *) toFree);
     }
     clausePtr->macTypes = NULL;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkFileFilter.h b/generic/tkFileFilter.h
index 6df986f..24002df 100644
--- a/generic/tkFileFilter.h
+++ b/generic/tkFileFilter.h
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
 /*
  * tkFileFilter.h --
  *
- *	Declarations for the file filter processing routines needed by
- *	the file selection dialogs.
+ *	Declarations for the file filter processing routines needed by the
+ *	file selection dialogs.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TK_FILE_FILTER
@@ -21,65 +21,65 @@
 #endif
 
 typedef struct GlobPattern {
-    struct GlobPattern * next;		/* Chains to the next glob pattern
-					 * in a glob pattern list */
-    char * pattern;			/* String value of the pattern, such
-					 * as "*.txt" or "*.*"
-					 */
+    struct GlobPattern *next;	/* Chains to the next glob pattern in a glob
+				 * pattern list */
+    char *pattern;		/* String value of the pattern, such as
+				 * "*.txt" or "*.*" */
 } GlobPattern;
 
 typedef struct MacFileType {
-    struct MacFileType * next;		/* Chains to the next mac file type
-					 * in a mac file type list */
-    OSType type;			/* Mac file type, such as 'TEXT' or
-					 * 'GIFF' */
+    struct MacFileType *next;	/* Chains to the next mac file type in a mac
+				 * file type list */
+    OSType type;		/* Mac file type, such as 'TEXT' or 'GIFF' */
 } MacFileType;
 
 typedef struct FileFilterClause {
-    struct FileFilterClause * next;	/* Chains to the next clause in
-					 * a clause list */
-    GlobPattern * patterns;		/* Head of glob pattern type list */
-    GlobPattern * patternsTail;		/* Tail of glob pattern type list */
-    MacFileType * macTypes;		/* Head of mac file type list */
-    MacFileType * macTypesTail;		/* Tail of mac file type list */
+    struct FileFilterClause *next;
+				/* Chains to the next clause in a clause
+				 * list */
+    GlobPattern *patterns;	/* Head of glob pattern type list */
+    GlobPattern *patternsTail;	/* Tail of glob pattern type list */
+    MacFileType *macTypes;	/* Head of mac file type list */
+    MacFileType *macTypesTail;	/* Tail of mac file type list */
 } FileFilterClause;
 
 typedef struct FileFilter {
-    struct FileFilter * next;		/* Chains to the next filter
-					 * in a filter list */
-    char * name;			/* Name of the file filter,
-					 * such as "Text Documents" */
-    FileFilterClause * clauses;		/* Head of the clauses list */
-    FileFilterClause * clausesTail;	/* Tail of the clauses list */
+    struct FileFilter *next;	/* Chains to the next filter in a filter
+				 * list */
+    char *name;			/* Name of the file filter, such as "Text
+				 * Documents" */
+    FileFilterClause *clauses;	/* Head of the clauses list */
+    FileFilterClause *clausesTail;
+				/* Tail of the clauses list */
 } FileFilter;
 
-/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * FileFilterList --
  *
- * The routine TkGetFileFilters() translates the string value of the
- * -filefilters option into a FileFilterList structure, which consists
- * of a list of file filters.
+ *	The routine TkGetFileFilters() translates the string value of the
+ *	-filefilters option into a FileFilterList structure, which consists of
+ *	a list of file filters.
+ *
+ *	Each file filter consists of one or more clauses. Each clause has one
+ *	or more glob patterns and/or one or more Mac file types
  *
- * Each file filter consists of one or more clauses. Each clause has
- * one or more glob patterns and/or one or more Mac file types
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 typedef struct FileFilterList {
-    FileFilter * filters;		/* Head of the filter list */
-    FileFilter * filtersTail;		/* Tail of the filter list */
-    int numFilters;			/* number of filters in the list */
+    FileFilter *filters;	/* Head of the filter list */
+    FileFilter *filtersTail;	/* Tail of the filter list */
+    int numFilters;		/* number of filters in the list */
 } FileFilterList;
 
-EXTERN void		TkFreeFileFilters _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    FileFilterList * flistPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkInitFileFilters _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    FileFilterList * flistPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkGetFileFilters _ANSI_ARGS_ ((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-    			    FileFilterList * flistPtr, char * string,
-			    int isWindows));
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkFreeFileFilters(FileFilterList *flistPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkInitFileFilters(FileFilterList *flistPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkGetFileFilters(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    			    FileFilterList *flistPtr, Tcl_Obj *valuePtr,
+			    int isWindows);
 
 # undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
-
 #endif
diff --git a/generic/tkFocus.c b/generic/tkFocus.c
index 93e1617..85093ee 100644
--- a/generic/tkFocus.c
+++ b/generic/tkFocus.c
@@ -1,23 +1,20 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkFocus.c --
  *
- *	This file contains procedures that manage the input
- *	focus for Tk.
+ *	This file contains functions that manage the input focus for Tk.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
-
 
 /*
- * For each top-level window that has ever received the focus, there
- * is a record of the following type:
+ * For each top-level window that has ever received the focus, there is a
+ * record of the following type:
  */
 
 typedef struct TkToplevelFocusInfo {
@@ -31,19 +28,17 @@ typedef struct TkToplevelFocusInfo {
 } ToplevelFocusInfo;
 
 /*
- * One of the following structures exists for each display used by
- * each application.  These are linked together from the TkMainInfo
- * structure.  These structures are needed because it isn't
- * sufficient to store a single piece of focus information in each
- * display or in each application: we need the cross-product.
- * There needs to be separate information for each display, because
- * it's possible to have multiple focus windows active simultaneously
- * on different displays.  There also needs to be separate information
- * for each application, because of embedding: if an embedded
- * application has the focus, its container application also has
- * the focus.  Thus we keep a list of structures for each application:
- * the same display can appear in structures for several applications
- * at once.
+ * One of the following structures exists for each display used by each
+ * application. These are linked together from the TkMainInfo structure.
+ * These structures are needed because it isn't sufficient to store a single
+ * piece of focus information in each display or in each application: we need
+ * the cross-product. There needs to be separate information for each display,
+ * because it's possible to have multiple focus windows active simultaneously
+ * on different displays. There also needs to be separate information for each
+ * application, because of embedding: if an embedded application has the
+ * focus, its container application also has the focus. Thus we keep a list of
+ * structures for each application: the same display can appear in structures
+ * for several applications at once.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkDisplayFocusInfo {
@@ -58,49 +53,54 @@ typedef struct TkDisplayFocusInfo {
 				 * supposed to receive the X input focus as
 				 * soon as it is mapped (needed to handle the
 				 * fact that X won't allow the focus on an
-				 * unmapped window).  NULL means no delayed
+				 * unmapped window). NULL means no delayed
 				 * focus op in progress for this display. */
-    int forceFocus;		/* Associated with focusOnMapPtr:  non-zero
+    int forceFocus;		/* Associated with focusOnMapPtr: non-zero
 				 * means claim the focus even if some other
 				 * application currently has it. */
     unsigned long focusSerial;	/* Serial number of last request this
 				 * application made to change the focus on
-				 * this display.  Used to identify stale
-				 * focus notifications coming from the
-				 * X server. */
+				 * this display. Used to identify stale focus
+				 * notifications coming from the X server. */
     struct TkDisplayFocusInfo *nextPtr;
-				/* Next in list of all display focus
-				 * records for a given application. */
+				/* Next in list of all display focus records
+				 * for a given application. */
 } DisplayFocusInfo;
 
 /*
- * The following magic value is stored in the "send_event" field of
- * FocusIn and FocusOut events that are generated in this file.  This
- * allows us to separate "real" events coming from the server from
- * those that we generated.
+ * The following magic value is stored in the "send_event" field of FocusIn
+ * and FocusOut events that are generated in this file. This allows us to
+ * separate "real" events coming from the server from those that we generated.
  */
 
-#define GENERATED_EVENT_MAGIC ((Bool) 0x547321ac)
+#define GENERATED_EVENT_MAGIC	((Bool) 0x547321ac)
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Debugging support...
  */
 
+#define DEBUG(dispPtr, arguments) \
+    if ((dispPtr)->focusDebug) { \
+	printf arguments; \
+    }
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
+ */
 
-static DisplayFocusInfo *FindDisplayFocusInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr,
-			    TkDisplay *dispPtr));
-static void		FocusMapProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		GenerateFocusEvents _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *sourcePtr,
-			    TkWindow *destPtr));
+static DisplayFocusInfo*FindDisplayFocusInfo(TkMainInfo *mainPtr,
+			    TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+static void		FocusMapProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		GenerateFocusEvents(TkWindow *sourcePtr,
+			    TkWindow *destPtr);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_FocusObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "focus" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "focus" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -112,15 +112,14 @@ static void		GenerateFocusEvents _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *sourcePtr,
  */
 
 int
-Tk_FocusObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_FocusObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     static CONST char *focusOptions[] = {
-	"-displayof", "-force", "-lastfor", (char *) NULL
+	"-displayof", "-force", "-lastfor", NULL
     };
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) clientData;
@@ -142,17 +141,17 @@ Tk_FocusObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If invoked with a single argument beginning with "." then focus
-     * on that window.
+     * If invoked with a single argument beginning with "." then focus on that
+     * window.
      */
 
     if (objc == 2) {
-	windowName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], NULL);
+	windowName = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
 
 	/*
 	 * The empty string case exists for backwards compatibility.
 	 */
-	
+
 	if (windowName[0] == '\0') {
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
@@ -161,13 +160,15 @@ Tk_FocusObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    if (newPtr == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (!(newPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD)) {
-		TkSetFocusWin(newPtr, 0);
-	    }
+	    TkSetFocusWin(newPtr, 0);
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
     }
 
+    /*
+     * We have a subcommand to parse and act upon.
+     */
+
     if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], focusOptions, "option", 0,
 	    &index) != TCL_OK) {
     	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -177,63 +178,58 @@ Tk_FocusObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     switch (index) {
-        case 0: {        /* -displayof */
-	    windowName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-	    newPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowName, tkwin);
-	    if (newPtr == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    newPtr = TkGetFocusWin(newPtr);
-	    if (newPtr != NULL) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, newPtr->pathName, TCL_STATIC);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case 0:			/* -displayof */
+	windowName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	newPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowName, tkwin);
+	if (newPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	newPtr = TkGetFocusWin(newPtr);
+	if (newPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, newPtr->pathName, TCL_STATIC);
 	}
-        case 1: {        /* -force */
-	    windowName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
+	break;
+    case 1:			/* -force */
+	windowName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
 
-	    /*
-	     * The empty string case exists for backwards compatibility.
-	     */
-	
-	    if (windowName[0] == '\0') {
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    }
-	    newPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowName, tkwin);
-	    if (newPtr == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    TkSetFocusWin(newPtr, 1);
-	    break;
+	/*
+	 * The empty string case exists for backwards compatibility.
+	 */
+
+	if (windowName[0] == '\0') {
+	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
-        case 2: {        /* -lastfor */
-	    windowName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-	    newPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowName, tkwin);
-	    if (newPtr == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+	newPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowName, tkwin);
+	if (newPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	TkSetFocusWin(newPtr, 1);
+	break;
+    case 2:			/* -lastfor */
+	windowName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	newPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowName, tkwin);
+	if (newPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	for (topLevelPtr = newPtr; topLevelPtr != NULL;
+		topLevelPtr = topLevelPtr->parentPtr)  {
+	    if (!(topLevelPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY)) {
+		continue;
 	    }
-	    for (topLevelPtr = newPtr; topLevelPtr != NULL;
-		    topLevelPtr = topLevelPtr->parentPtr)  {
-		if (topLevelPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) {
-		    for (tlFocusPtr = newPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr;
-			    tlFocusPtr != NULL;
-			    tlFocusPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr) {
-		        if (tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr == topLevelPtr) {
-			    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
-				    tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr->pathName,
-				    TCL_STATIC);
-			    return TCL_OK;
-			}
-		    }
-		    Tcl_SetResult(interp, topLevelPtr->pathName, TCL_STATIC);
+	    for (tlFocusPtr = newPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr; tlFocusPtr != NULL;
+		    tlFocusPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr) {
+		if (tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr == topLevelPtr) {
+		    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+			    tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr->pathName, TCL_STATIC);
 		    return TCL_OK;
 		}
 	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	default: {
-	    panic("bad const entries to focusOptions in focus command");
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, topLevelPtr->pathName, TCL_STATIC);
+	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
+	break;
+    default:
+	Tcl_Panic("bad const entries to focusOptions in focus command");
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -243,13 +239,13 @@ Tk_FocusObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkFocusFilterEvent --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk_HandleEvent when it encounters
- *	a FocusIn, FocusOut, Enter, or Leave event.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk_HandleEvent when it encounters a
+ *	FocusIn, FocusOut, Enter, or Leave event.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A return value of 1 means that Tk_HandleEvent should process
- *	the event normally (i.e. event handlers should be invoked).
- *	A return value of 0 means that this event should be ignored.
+ *	A return value of 1 means that Tk_HandleEvent should process the event
+ *	normally (i.e. event handlers should be invoked). A return value of 0
+ *	means that this event should be ignored.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Additional events may be generated, and the focus may switch.
@@ -258,27 +254,25 @@ Tk_FocusObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 int
-TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that focus event is directed to. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* FocusIn, FocusOut, Enter, or Leave
+TkFocusFilterEvent(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Window that focus event is directed to. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* FocusIn, FocusOut, Enter, or Leave
 				 * event. */
 {
     /*
-     * Design notes: the window manager and X server work together to
-     * transfer the focus among top-level windows.  This procedure takes
-     * care of transferring the focus from a top-level or wrapper window
-     * to the actual window within that top-level that has the focus. 
-     * We do this by synthesizing X events to move the focus around. 
-     * None of the FocusIn and FocusOut events generated by X are ever
-     * used outside of this procedure;  only the synthesized events get
-     * through to the rest of the application.  At one point (e.g.
-     * Tk4.0b1) Tk used to call X to move the focus from a top-level to
-     * one of its descendants, then just pass through the events
-     * generated by X. This approach didn't work very well, for a
-     * variety of reasons. For example, if X generates the events they
-     * go at the back of the event queue, which could cause problems if
-     * other things have already happened, such as moving the focus to
-     * yet another window.
+     * Design notes: the window manager and X server work together to transfer
+     * the focus among top-level windows. This function takes care of
+     * transferring the focus from a top-level or wrapper window to the actual
+     * window within that top-level that has the focus. We do this by
+     * synthesizing X events to move the focus around. None of the FocusIn and
+     * FocusOut events generated by X are ever used outside of this function;
+     * only the synthesized events get through to the rest of the application.
+     * At one point (e.g. Tk4.0b1) Tk used to call X to move the focus from a
+     * top-level to one of its descendants, then just pass through the events
+     * generated by X. This approach didn't work very well, for a variety of
+     * reasons. For example, if X generates the events they go at the back of
+     * the event queue, which could cause problems if other things have
+     * already happened, such as moving the focus to yet another window.
      */
 
     ToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr;
@@ -288,8 +282,8 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     int retValue, delta;
 
     /*
-     * If this was a generated event, just turn off the generated
-     * flag and pass the event through to Tk bindings.
+     * If this was a generated event, just turn off the generated flag and
+     * pass the event through to Tk bindings.
      */
 
     if (eventPtr->xfocus.send_event == GENERATED_EVENT_MAGIC) {
@@ -298,11 +292,11 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Check for special events generated by embedded applications to
-     * request the input focus.  If this is one of those events, make
-     * the change in focus and return without any additional processing
-     * of the event (note: the "detail" field of the event indicates
-     * whether to claim the focus even if we don't already have it).
+     * Check for special events generated by embedded applications to request
+     * the input focus. If this is one of those events, make the change in
+     * focus and return without any additional processing of the event (note:
+     * the "detail" field of the event indicates whether to claim the focus
+     * even if we don't already have it).
      */
 
     if ((eventPtr->xfocus.mode == EMBEDDED_APP_WANTS_FOCUS)
@@ -312,10 +306,9 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * This was not a generated event.  We'll return 1 (so that the
-     * event will be processed) if it's an Enter or Leave event, and
-     * 0 (so that the event won't be processed) if it's a FocusIn or
-     * FocusOut event.
+     * This was not a generated event. We'll return 1 (so that the event will
+     * be processed) if it's an Enter or Leave event, and 0 (so that the event
+     * won't be processed) if it's a FocusIn or FocusOut event.
      */
 
     retValue = 0;
@@ -323,26 +316,26 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) {
 	/*
 	 * Skip FocusIn events that cause confusion
-	 * NotifyVirtual and NotifyNonlinearVirtual - Virtual events occur
-	 *	on windows in between the origin and destination of the
-	 *	focus change.  For FocusIn we may see this when focus
-	 *	goes into an embedded child.  We don't care about this,
-	 *	although we may end up getting a NotifyPointer later.
-	 * NotifyInferior - focus is coming to us from an embedded child.
-	 *	When focus is on an embeded focus, we still think we have
-	 *	the focus, too, so this message doesn't change our state.
-	 * NotifyPointerRoot - should never happen because this is sent
-	 *	to the root window.
+	 * NotifyVirtual and NotifyNonlinearVirtual - Virtual events occur on
+	 *	windows in between the origin and destination of the focus
+	 *	change. For FocusIn we may see this when focus goes into an
+	 *	embedded child. We don't care about this, although we may end
+	 *	up getting a NotifyPointer later.
+	 * NotifyInferior - focus is coming to us from an embedded child. When
+	 *	focus is on an embeded focus, we still think we have the
+	 *	focus, too, so this message doesn't change our state.
+	 * NotifyPointerRoot - should never happen because this is sent to the
+	 *	root window.
 	 *
 	 * Interesting FocusIn events are
 	 * NotifyAncestor - focus is coming from our parent, probably the root.
 	 * NotifyNonlinear - focus is coming from a different branch, probably
 	 *	another toplevel.
-	 * NotifyPointer - implicit focus because of the mouse position.
-	 *	This is	only interesting on toplevels, when it means that the
-	 *	focus has been set to the root window but the mouse is over
-	 *	this toplevel.  We take the focus implicitly (probably no
-	 *	window manager)
+	 * NotifyPointer - implicit focus because of the mouse position. This
+	 *	is only interesting on toplevels, when it means that the focus
+	 *	has been set to the root window but the mouse is over this
+	 *	toplevel. We take the focus implicitly (probably no window
+	 *	manager)
 	 */
 
 	if ((eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyVirtual)
@@ -355,12 +348,12 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
 	/*
 	 * Skip FocusOut events that cause confusion.
 	 * NotifyPointer - the pointer is in us or a child, and we are losing
-	 *	focus because of an XSetInputFocus.  Other focus events
-	 *	will set our state properly.
-	 * NotifyPointerRoot - should never happen because this is sent
-	 *	to the root window.
-	 * NotifyInferior - focus leaving us for an embedded child.  We
-	 *	retain a notion of focus when an embedded child has focus.
+	 *	focus because of an XSetInputFocus. Other focus events will
+	 *	set our state properly.
+	 * NotifyPointerRoot - should never happen because this is sent to the
+	 *	root window.
+	 * NotifyInferior - focus leaving us for an embedded child. We retain
+	 *	a notion of focus when an embedded child has focus.
 	 *
 	 * Interesting events are:
 	 * NotifyAncestor - focus is going to root.
@@ -392,8 +385,8 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If there is a grab in effect and this window is outside the
-     * grabbed tree, then ignore the event.
+     * If there is a grab in effect and this window is outside the grabbed
+     * tree, then ignore the event.
      */
 
     if (TkGrabState(winPtr) == TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED)  {
@@ -401,16 +394,15 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * It is possible that there were outstanding FocusIn and FocusOut
-     * events on their way to us at the time the focus was changed
-     * internally with the "focus" command.  If so, these events could
-     * potentially cause us to lose the focus (switch it to the window
-     * of the last FocusIn event) even though the focus change occurred
-     * after those events.  The following code detects this and ignores
-     * the stale events.
+     * It is possible that there were outstanding FocusIn and FocusOut events
+     * on their way to us at the time the focus was changed internally with
+     * the "focus" command. If so, these events could potentially cause us to
+     * lose the focus (switch it to the window of the last FocusIn event) even
+     * though the focus change occurred after those events. The following code
+     * detects this and ignores the stale events.
      *
-     * Note: the focusSerial is only generated by TkpChangeFocus,
-     * whereas in Tk 4.2 there was always a nop marker generated.
+     * Note: the focusSerial is only generated by TkpChangeFocus, whereas in
+     * Tk 4.2 there was always a nop marker generated.
      */
 
     delta = eventPtr->xfocus.serial - displayFocusPtr->focusSerial;
@@ -440,6 +432,7 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     /*
      * Ignore event if newFocus window is already dead!
      */
+
     if (newFocusPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD) {
 	return retValue;
     }
@@ -451,7 +444,7 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
 
 	/*
 	 * NotifyPointer gets set when the focus has been set to the root
-	 * window but we have the pointer.  We'll treat this like an implicit
+	 * window but we have the pointer. We'll treat this like an implicit
 	 * focus in event so that upon Leave events we release focus.
 	 */
 
@@ -463,12 +456,12 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
 	    }
 	}
     } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusOut) {
-	GenerateFocusEvents(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr, (TkWindow *) NULL);
+	GenerateFocusEvents(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr, NULL);
 
 	/*
-	 * Reset dispPtr->focusPtr, but only if it currently is the same
-	 * as this application's focusWinPtr: this check is needed to
-	 * handle embedded applications in the same process.
+	 * Reset dispPtr->focusPtr, but only if it currently is the same as
+	 * this application's focusWinPtr: this check is needed to handle
+	 * embedded applications in the same process.
 	 */
 
 	if (dispPtr->focusPtr == displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr) {
@@ -478,25 +471,22 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     } else if (eventPtr->type == EnterNotify) {
 	/*
 	 * If there is no window manager, or if the window manager isn't
-	 * moving the focus around (e.g. the disgusting "NoTitleFocus"
-	 * option has been selected in twm), then we won't get FocusIn
-	 * or FocusOut events.  Instead, the "focus" field will be set
-	 * in an Enter event to indicate that we've already got the focus
-	 * when the mouse enters the window (even though we didn't get
-	 * a FocusIn event).  Watch for this and grab the focus when it
-	 * happens.  Note: if this is an embedded application then don't
-	 * accept the focus implicitly like this;  the container
-	 * application will give us the focus explicitly if it wants us
-	 * to have it.
+	 * moving the focus around (e.g. the disgusting "NoTitleFocus" option
+	 * has been selected in twm), then we won't get FocusIn or FocusOut
+	 * events. Instead, the "focus" field will be set in an Enter event to
+	 * indicate that we've already got the focus when the mouse enters the
+	 * window (even though we didn't get a FocusIn event). Watch for this
+	 * and grab the focus when it happens. Note: if this is an embedded
+	 * application then don't accept the focus implicitly like this; the
+	 * container application will give us the focus explicitly if it wants
+	 * us to have it.
 	 */
 
 	if (eventPtr->xcrossing.focus &&
-                (displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr == NULL)
+		(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr == NULL)
 		&& !(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
-	    if (dispPtr->focusDebug) {
-		printf("Focussed implicitly on %s\n",
-			newFocusPtr->pathName);
-	    }
+	    DEBUG(dispPtr,
+		    ("Focussed implicitly on %s\n", newFocusPtr->pathName));
 
 	    GenerateFocusEvents(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr, newFocusPtr);
 	    displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = newFocusPtr;
@@ -507,22 +497,19 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
 	/*
 	 * If the pointer just left a window for which we automatically
 	 * claimed the focus on enter, move the focus back to the root
-	 * window, where it was before we claimed it above.  Note:
+	 * window, where it was before we claimed it above. Note:
 	 * dispPtr->implicitWinPtr may not be the same as
-	 * displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr (e.g. because the "focus"
-	 * command was used to redirect the focus after it arrived at
-	 * dispPtr->implicitWinPtr)!!  In addition, we generate events
+	 * displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr (e.g. because the "focus" command
+	 * was used to redirect the focus after it arrived at
+	 * dispPtr->implicitWinPtr)!! In addition, we generate events
 	 * because the window manager won't give us a FocusOut event when
-	 * we focus on the root. 
+	 * we focus on the root.
 	 */
 
 	if ((dispPtr->implicitWinPtr != NULL)
 		&& !(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
-	    if (dispPtr->focusDebug) {
-		printf("Defocussed implicit Async\n");
-	    }
-	    GenerateFocusEvents(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr,
-		    (TkWindow *) NULL);
+	    DEBUG(dispPtr, ("Defocussed implicit Async\n"));
+	    GenerateFocusEvents(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr, NULL);
 	    XSetInputFocus(dispPtr->display, PointerRoot, RevertToPointerRoot,
 		    CurrentTime);
 	    displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = NULL;
@@ -537,8 +524,8 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkSetFocusWin --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to change the focus window for a
- *	given display in a given application.
+ *	This function is invoked to change the focus window for a given
+ *	display in a given application.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -551,24 +538,32 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that is to be the new focus for
-				 * its display and application. */
-    int force;			/* If non-zero, set the X focus to this
-				 * window even if the application doesn't
-				 * currently have the X focus. */
+TkSetFocusWin(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Window that is to be the new focus for its
+				 * display and application. */
+    int force)			/* If non-zero, set the X focus to this window
+				 * even if the application doesn't currently
+				 * have the X focus. */
 {
     ToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr;
     DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
     TkWindow *topLevelPtr;
     int allMapped, serial;
 
+    /*
+     * Don't set focus if window is already dead. [Bug 3574708]
+     */
+
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD) {
+	return;
+    }
+
     displayFocusPtr = FindDisplayFocusInfo(winPtr->mainPtr, winPtr->dispPtr);
 
     /*
-     * If force is set, we should make sure we grab the focus regardless
-     * of the current focus window since under Windows, we may need to
-     * take control away from another application.
+     * If force is set, we should make sure we grab the focus regardless of
+     * the current focus window since under Windows, we may need to take
+     * control away from another application.
      */
 
     if (winPtr == displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr && !force) {
@@ -576,18 +571,19 @@ TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the top-level window for winPtr, then find (or create)
-     * a record for the top-level.  Also see whether winPtr and all its
-     * ancestors are mapped.
+     * Find the top-level window for winPtr, then find (or create) a record
+     * for the top-level. Also see whether winPtr and all its ancestors are
+     * mapped.
      */
 
     allMapped = 1;
     for (topLevelPtr = winPtr; ; topLevelPtr = topLevelPtr->parentPtr)  {
 	if (topLevelPtr == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * The window is being deleted.  No point in worrying about
-	     * giving it the focus.
+	     * The window is being deleted. No point in worrying about giving
+	     * it the focus.
 	     */
+
 	    return;
 	}
 	if (!(topLevelPtr->flags & TK_MAPPED)) {
@@ -599,11 +595,11 @@ TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the new focus window isn't mapped, then we can't focus on it
-     * (X will generate an error, for example).  Instead, create an
-     * event handler that will set the focus to this window once it gets
-     * mapped.  At the same time, delete any old handler that might be
-     * around;  it's no longer relevant.
+     * If the new focus window isn't mapped, then we can't focus on it (X will
+     * generate an error, for example). Instead, create an event handler that
+     * will set the focus to this window once it gets mapped. At the same
+     * time, delete any old handler that might be around; it's no longer
+     * relevant.
      */
 
     if (displayFocusPtr->focusOnMapPtr != NULL) {
@@ -637,16 +633,15 @@ TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
     tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = winPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Reset the window system's focus window and generate focus events,
-     * with two special cases:
+     * Reset the window system's focus window and generate focus events, with
+     * two special cases:
      *
-     * 1. If the application is embedded and doesn't currently have the
-     *    focus, don't set the focus directly.  Instead, see if the
-     *    embedding code can claim the focus from the enclosing
-     *    container.
-     * 2. Otherwise, if the application doesn't currently have the
-     *    focus, don't change the window system's focus unless it was
-     *    already in this application or "force" was specified.
+     * 1. If the application is embedded and doesn't currently have the focus,
+     *    don't set the focus directly. Instead, see if the embedding code can
+     *    claim the focus from the enclosing container.
+     * 2. Otherwise, if the application doesn't currently have the focus,
+     *    don't change the window system's focus unless it was already in this
+     *    application or "force" was specified.
      */
 
     if ((topLevelPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)
@@ -654,12 +649,11 @@ TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
 	TkpClaimFocus(topLevelPtr, force);
     } else if ((displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr != NULL) || force) {
 	/*
-	 * Generate events to shift focus between Tk windows.
-	 * We do this regardless of what TkpChangeFocus does with
-	 * the real X focus so that Tk widgets track focus commands
-	 * when there is no window manager.  GenerateFocusEvents will
-	 * set up a serial number marker so we discard focus events
-	 * that are triggered by the ChangeFocus.
+	 * Generate events to shift focus between Tk windows. We do this
+	 * regardless of what TkpChangeFocus does with the real X focus so
+	 * that Tk widgets track focus commands when there is no window
+	 * manager. GenerateFocusEvents will set up a serial number marker so
+	 * we discard focus events that are triggered by the ChangeFocus.
 	 */
 
 	serial = TkpChangeFocus(TkpGetWrapperWindow(topLevelPtr), force);
@@ -677,13 +671,13 @@ TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
  *
  * TkGetFocusWin --
  *
- *	Given a window, this procedure returns the current focus
- *	window for its application and display.
+ *	Given a window, this function returns the current focus window for its
+ *	application and display.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the window that currently
- *	has the input focus for the specified application and
- *	display, or NULL if none.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the window that currently has the
+ *	input focus for the specified application and display, or NULL if
+ *	none.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -692,14 +686,14 @@ TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
  */
 
 TkWindow *
-TkGetFocusWin(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that selects an application
-				 * and a display. */
+TkGetFocusWin(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Window that selects an application and a
+				 * display. */
 {
     DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
 
     if (winPtr == NULL) {
-	return (TkWindow *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
 
     displayFocusPtr = FindDisplayFocusInfo(winPtr->mainPtr, winPtr->dispPtr);
@@ -711,16 +705,16 @@ TkGetFocusWin(winPtr)
  *
  * TkFocusKeyEvent --
  *
- *	Given a window and a key press or release event that arrived for
- *	the window, use information about the keyboard focus to compute
- *	which window should really get the event.  In addition, update
- *	the event to refer to its new window.
+ *	Given a window and a key press or release event that arrived for the
+ *	window, use information about the keyboard focus to compute which
+ *	window should really get the event. In addition, update the event to
+ *	refer to its new window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the window that has the input
- *	focus in winPtr's application, or NULL if winPtr's application
- *	doesn't have the input focus.  If a non-NULL value is returned,
- *	eventPtr will be updated to refer properly to the focus window.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the window that has the input focus
+ *	in winPtr's application, or NULL if winPtr's application doesn't have
+ *	the input focus. If a non-NULL value is returned, eventPtr will be
+ *	updated to refer properly to the focus window.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -729,11 +723,11 @@ TkGetFocusWin(winPtr)
  */
 
 TkWindow *
-TkFocusKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that selects an application
-				 * and a display. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X event to redirect (should be KeyPress
-				 * or KeyRelease). */
+TkFocusKeyEvent(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Window that selects an application and a
+				 * display. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* X event to redirect (should be KeyPress or
+				 * KeyRelease). */
 {
     DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
     TkWindow *focusWinPtr;
@@ -760,9 +754,9 @@ TkFocusKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
 
     if ((focusWinPtr != NULL) && (focusWinPtr->mainPtr == winPtr->mainPtr)) {
 	/*
-	 * Map the x and y coordinates to make sense in the context of
-	 * the focus window, if possible (make both -1 if the map-from
-	 * and map-to windows don't share the same screen).
+	 * Map the x and y coordinates to make sense in the context of the
+	 * focus window, if possible (make both -1 if the map-from and map-to
+	 * windows don't share the same screen).
 	 */
 
 	if ((focusWinPtr->display != winPtr->display)
@@ -779,13 +773,13 @@ TkFocusKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The event doesn't belong to us.  Perhaps, due to embedding, it
-     * really belongs to someone else.  Give the embedding code a chance
-     * to redirect the event.
+     * The event doesn't belong to us. Perhaps, due to embedding, it really
+     * belongs to someone else. Give the embedding code a chance to redirect
+     * the event.
      */
 
     TkpRedirectKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr);
-    return (TkWindow *) NULL;
+    return NULL;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -793,9 +787,8 @@ TkFocusKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkFocusDeadWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when it is determined that
- *	a window is dead.  It cleans up focus-related information
- *	about the window.
+ *	This function is invoked when it is determined that a window is dead.
+ *	It cleans up focus-related information about the window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -807,25 +800,26 @@ TkFocusKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkFocusDeadWindow(winPtr)
-    register TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Information about the window
-					 * that is being deleted. */
+TkFocusDeadWindow(
+    register TkWindow *winPtr)	/* Information about the window that is being
+				 * deleted. */
 {
     ToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr, *prevPtr;
     DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Certain special windows like those used for send and clipboard
-     * have no mainPtr.
+     * Certain special windows like those used for send and clipboard have no
+     * mainPtr.
      */
 
-    if (winPtr->mainPtr == NULL)
-        return;
+    if (winPtr->mainPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
 
     /*
-     * Search for focus records that refer to this window either as
-     * the top-level window or the current focus window.
+     * Search for focus records that refer to this window either as the
+     * top-level window or the current focus window.
      */
 
     displayFocusPtr = FindDisplayFocusInfo(winPtr->mainPtr, winPtr->dispPtr);
@@ -834,16 +828,14 @@ TkFocusDeadWindow(winPtr)
 	    prevPtr = tlFocusPtr, tlFocusPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (winPtr == tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr) {
 	    /*
-	     * The top-level window is the one being deleted: free
-	     * the focus record and release the focus back to PointerRoot
-	     * if we acquired it implicitly.
+	     * The top-level window is the one being deleted: free the focus
+	     * record and release the focus back to PointerRoot if we acquired
+	     * it implicitly.
 	     */
 
 	    if (dispPtr->implicitWinPtr == winPtr) {
-		if (dispPtr->focusDebug) {
-		    printf("releasing focus to root after %s died\n",
-			    tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr->pathName);
-		}
+		DEBUG(dispPtr, ("releasing focus to root after %s died\n",
+			tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr->pathName));
 		dispPtr->implicitWinPtr = NULL;
 		displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = NULL;
 		dispPtr->focusPtr = NULL;
@@ -861,18 +853,15 @@ TkFocusDeadWindow(winPtr)
 	    break;
 	} else if (winPtr == tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr) {
 	    /*
-	     * The deleted window had the focus for its top-level:
-	     * move the focus to the top-level itself.
+	     * The deleted window had the focus for its top-level: move the
+	     * focus to the top-level itself.
 	     */
 
 	    tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr;
 	    if ((displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr == winPtr)
 		    && !(tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD)) {
-		if (dispPtr->focusDebug) {
-		    printf("forwarding focus to %s after %s died\n",
-			    tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr->pathName,
-			    winPtr->pathName);
-		}
+		DEBUG(dispPtr, ("forwarding focus to %s after %s died\n",
+			tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr->pathName, winPtr->pathName));
 		GenerateFocusEvents(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr,
 			tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr);
 		displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr;
@@ -888,9 +877,7 @@ TkFocusDeadWindow(winPtr)
      */
 
     if (displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr == winPtr) {
-	if (dispPtr->focusDebug) {
-	    printf("focus cleared after %s died\n", winPtr->pathName);
-	}
+	DEBUG(dispPtr, ("focus cleared after %s died\n", winPtr->pathName));
 	displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = NULL;
     }
 
@@ -904,8 +891,8 @@ TkFocusDeadWindow(winPtr)
  *
  * GenerateFocusEvents --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to create FocusIn and FocusOut events to
- *	move the input focus from one window to another.
+ *	This function is called to create FocusIn and FocusOut events to move
+ *	the input focus from one window to another.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -917,12 +904,11 @@ TkFocusDeadWindow(winPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-GenerateFocusEvents(sourcePtr, destPtr)
-    TkWindow *sourcePtr;	/* Window that used to have the focus (may
-				 * be NULL). */
-    TkWindow *destPtr;		/* New window to have the focus (may be
+GenerateFocusEvents(
+    TkWindow *sourcePtr,	/* Window that used to have the focus (may be
+				 * NULL). */
+    TkWindow *destPtr)		/* New window to have the focus (may be
 				 * NULL). */
-
 {
     XEvent event;
     TkWindow *winPtr;
@@ -948,26 +934,26 @@ GenerateFocusEvents(sourcePtr, destPtr)
  *
  * FocusMapProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called as an event handler for VisibilityNotify
- *	events, if a window receives the focus at a time when its
- *	toplevel isn't mapped.  The procedure is needed because X
- *	won't allow the focus to be set to an unmapped window;  we
- *	detect when the toplevel is mapped and set the focus to it then.
+ *	This function is called as an event handler for VisibilityNotify
+ *	events, if a window receives the focus at a time when its toplevel
+ *	isn't mapped. The function is needed because X won't allow the focus
+ *	to be set to an unmapped window; we detect when the toplevel is mapped
+ *	and set the focus to it then.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If this is a map event, the focus gets set to the toplevel
- *	given by clientData.
+ *	If this is a map event, the focus gets set to the toplevel given by
+ *	clientData.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FocusMapProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Toplevel window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+FocusMapProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Toplevel window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) clientData;
     DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
@@ -975,10 +961,8 @@ FocusMapProc(clientData, eventPtr)
     if (eventPtr->type == VisibilityNotify) {
 	displayFocusPtr = FindDisplayFocusInfo(winPtr->mainPtr,
 		winPtr->dispPtr);
-	if (winPtr->dispPtr->focusDebug) {
-	    printf("auto-focussing on %s, force %d\n", winPtr->pathName,
-		    displayFocusPtr->forceFocus);
-	}
+	DEBUG(winPtr->dispPtr, ("auto-focussing on %s, force %d\n",
+		winPtr->pathName, displayFocusPtr->forceFocus));
 	Tk_DeleteEventHandler((Tk_Window) winPtr, VisibilityChangeMask,
 		FocusMapProc, clientData);
 	displayFocusPtr->focusOnMapPtr = NULL;
@@ -991,9 +975,9 @@ FocusMapProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * FindDisplayFocusInfo --
  *
- *	Given an application and a display, this procedure locate the
- *	focus record for that combination.  If no such record exists,
- *	it creates a new record and initializes it.
+ *	Given an application and a display, this function locate the focus
+ *	record for that combination. If no such record exists, it creates a
+ *	new record and initializes it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a pointer to the record.
@@ -1005,10 +989,10 @@ FocusMapProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static DisplayFocusInfo *
-FindDisplayFocusInfo(mainPtr, dispPtr)
-    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* Record that identifies a particular
+FindDisplayFocusInfo(
+    TkMainInfo *mainPtr,	/* Record that identifies a particular
 				 * application. */
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display whose focus information is
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr)		/* Display whose focus information is
 				 * needed. */
 {
     DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
@@ -1022,7 +1006,7 @@ FindDisplayFocusInfo(mainPtr, dispPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The record doesn't exist yet.  Make a new one.
+     * The record doesn't exist yet. Make a new one.
      */
 
     displayFocusPtr = (DisplayFocusInfo *) ckalloc(sizeof(DisplayFocusInfo));
@@ -1053,21 +1037,154 @@ FindDisplayFocusInfo(mainPtr, dispPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkFocusFree(mainPtr)
-    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* Record that identifies a particular
+TkFocusFree(
+    TkMainInfo *mainPtr)	/* Record that identifies a particular
 				 * application. */
 {
-    DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
-    ToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr;
-
     while (mainPtr->displayFocusPtr != NULL) {
-	displayFocusPtr          = mainPtr->displayFocusPtr;
+	DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr = mainPtr->displayFocusPtr;
+
 	mainPtr->displayFocusPtr = mainPtr->displayFocusPtr->nextPtr;
 	ckfree((char *) displayFocusPtr);
     }
     while (mainPtr->tlFocusPtr != NULL) {
-	tlFocusPtr          = mainPtr->tlFocusPtr;
+	ToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr = mainPtr->tlFocusPtr;
+
 	mainPtr->tlFocusPtr = mainPtr->tlFocusPtr->nextPtr;
 	ckfree((char *) tlFocusPtr);
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkFocusSplit --
+ *
+ *	Adjust focus window for a newly managed toplevel, thus splitting
+ *      the toplevel into two toplevels.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A new record is allocated for the new toplevel window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkFocusSplit(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;          /* Window is the new toplevel
+                                * Any focus point at or below window
+				* must be moved to this new toplevel */
+{
+    ToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr;
+    TkWindow *topLevelPtr;
+    TkWindow *subWinPtr;
+
+    FindDisplayFocusInfo(winPtr->mainPtr, winPtr->dispPtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Find the top-level window for winPtr, then find (or create)
+     * a record for the top-level.  Also see whether winPtr and all its
+     * ancestors are mapped.
+     */
+
+    for (topLevelPtr = winPtr; ; topLevelPtr = topLevelPtr->parentPtr)  {
+	if (topLevelPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * The window is being deleted.  No point in worrying about
+	     * giving it the focus.
+	     */
+	    return;
+	}
+	if (topLevelPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) {
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Search all focus records to find child windows of winPtr */
+    for (tlFocusPtr = winPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr; tlFocusPtr != NULL;
+	 tlFocusPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr == topLevelPtr) {
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (tlFocusPtr == NULL) {
+	/* No focus record for this toplevel, nothing to do. */
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /* See if current focusWin is child of the new toplevel */
+    for (subWinPtr = tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr; 
+	 subWinPtr && subWinPtr != winPtr && subWinPtr != topLevelPtr;
+	 subWinPtr = subWinPtr->parentPtr) {}
+
+    if (subWinPtr == winPtr) {
+	/* Move focus to new toplevel */
+	ToplevelFocusInfo *newTlFocusPtr;
+
+	newTlFocusPtr = (ToplevelFocusInfo *) ckalloc(sizeof(ToplevelFocusInfo));
+	newTlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr = winPtr;
+	newTlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr;
+	newTlFocusPtr->nextPtr = winPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr;
+	winPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr = newTlFocusPtr;
+	/* Move old toplevel's focus to the toplevel itself */
+	tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = topLevelPtr;
+    }
+    /* If it's not, then let focus progress naturally */
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkFocusJoin --
+ *
+ *	Remove the focus record for this window that is nolonger managed
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A tlFocusPtr record is removed
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkFocusJoin(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;          /* Window is no longer a toplevel */
+{
+    ToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr;
+    ToplevelFocusInfo *tmpPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Remove old toplevel record
+     */
+    if (winPtr && winPtr->mainPtr && winPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr
+	&& winPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr == winPtr) {
+	tmpPtr = winPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr;
+	winPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr = tmpPtr->nextPtr;
+	ckfree((char *)tmpPtr);
+    } else {
+	for (tlFocusPtr = winPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr; tlFocusPtr != NULL;
+	     tlFocusPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (tlFocusPtr->nextPtr &&
+		tlFocusPtr->nextPtr->topLevelPtr == winPtr) {
+		tmpPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr;
+		tlFocusPtr->nextPtr = tmpPtr->nextPtr;
+		ckfree((char *)tmpPtr);
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkFont.c b/generic/tkFont.c
index 95feec3..1a6474f 100644
--- a/generic/tkFont.c
+++ b/generic/tkFont.c
@@ -1,44 +1,42 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkFont.c --
  *
- *	This file maintains a database of fonts for the Tk toolkit.
- *	It also provides several utility procedures for measuring and
- *	displaying text.
+ *	This file maintains a database of fonts for the Tk toolkit. It also
+ *	provides several utility functions for measuring and displaying text.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkFont.h"
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used to keep track of all the fonts that
- * exist in the current application.  It must be stored in the
- * TkMainInfo for the application.
+ * The following structure is used to keep track of all the fonts that exist
+ * in the current application. It must be stored in the TkMainInfo for the
+ * application.
  */
- 
+
 typedef struct TkFontInfo {
-    Tcl_HashTable fontCache;	/* Map a string to an existing Tk_Font.
-				 * Keys are string font names, values are
-				 * TkFont pointers. */
+    Tcl_HashTable fontCache;	/* Map a string to an existing Tk_Font. Keys
+				 * are string font names, values are TkFont
+				 * pointers. */
     Tcl_HashTable namedTable;	/* Map a name to a set of attributes for a
 				 * font, used when constructing a Tk_Font from
-				 * a named font description.  Keys are
-				 * strings, values are NamedFont pointers. */
+				 * a named font description. Keys are strings,
+				 * values are NamedFont pointers. */
     TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* Application that owns this structure. */
     int updatePending;		/* Non-zero when a World Changed event has
-				 * already been queued to handle a change to
-				 * a named font. */
+				 * already been queued to handle a change to a
+				 * named font. */
 } TkFontInfo;
 
 /*
  * The following data structure is used to keep track of the font attributes
- * for each named font that has been defined.  The named font is only deleted
+ * for each named font that has been defined. The named font is only deleted
  * when the last reference to it goes away.
  */
 
@@ -48,84 +46,83 @@ typedef struct NamedFont {
 				 * last reference goes away. */
     TkFontAttributes fa;	/* Desired attributes for named font. */
 } NamedFont;
-    
+
 /*
- * The following two structures are used to keep track of string
- * measurement information when using the text layout facilities.
+ * The following two structures are used to keep track of string measurement
+ * information when using the text layout facilities.
  *
  * A LayoutChunk represents a contiguous range of text that can be measured
- * and displayed by low-level text calls.  In general, chunks will be
- * delimited by newlines and tabs.  Low-level, platform-specific things
- * like kerning and non-integer character widths may occur between the
- * characters in a single chunk, but not between characters in different
- * chunks.
- *
- * A TextLayout is a collection of LayoutChunks.  It can be displayed with
- * respect to any origin.  It is the implementation of the Tk_TextLayout
- * opaque token.
+ * and displayed by low-level text calls. In general, chunks will be delimited
+ * by newlines and tabs. Low-level, platform-specific things like kerning and
+ * non-integer character widths may occur between the characters in a single
+ * chunk, but not between characters in different chunks.
+ *
+ * A TextLayout is a collection of LayoutChunks. It can be displayed with
+ * respect to any origin. It is the implementation of the Tk_TextLayout opaque
+ * token.
  */
 
 typedef struct LayoutChunk {
-    CONST char *start;		/* Pointer to simple string to be displayed.
+    const char *start;		/* Pointer to simple string to be displayed.
 				 * This is a pointer into the TkTextLayout's
 				 * string. */
     int numBytes;		/* The number of bytes in this chunk. */
     int numChars;		/* The number of characters in this chunk. */
     int numDisplayChars;	/* The number of characters to display when
-				 * this chunk is displayed.  Can be less than
+				 * this chunk is displayed. Can be less than
 				 * numChars if extra space characters were
-				 * absorbed by the end of the chunk.  This
-				 * will be < 0 if this is a chunk that is
-				 * holding a tab or newline. */
+				 * absorbed by the end of the chunk. This will
+				 * be < 0 if this is a chunk that is holding a
+				 * tab or newline. */
     int x, y;			/* The origin of the first character in this
 				 * chunk with respect to the upper-left hand
 				 * corner of the TextLayout. */
-    int totalWidth;		/* Width in pixels of this chunk.  Used
-				 * when hit testing the invisible spaces at
-				 * the end of a chunk. */
+    int totalWidth;		/* Width in pixels of this chunk. Used when
+				 * hit testing the invisible spaces at the end
+				 * of a chunk. */
     int displayWidth;		/* Width in pixels of the displayable
-				 * characters in this chunk.  Can be less than
+				 * characters in this chunk. Can be less than
 				 * width if extra space characters were
 				 * absorbed by the end of the chunk. */
 } LayoutChunk;
 
 typedef struct TextLayout {
     Tk_Font tkfont;		/* The font used when laying out the text. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* The string that was layed out. */
-    int width;			/* The maximum width of all lines in the
-				 * text layout. */
-    int numChunks;		/* Number of chunks actually used in
-				 * following array. */
-    LayoutChunk chunks[1];	/* Array of chunks.  The actual size will
-				 * be maxChunks.  THIS FIELD MUST BE THE LAST
-				 * IN THE STRUCTURE. */
+    const char *string;		/* The string that was layed out. */
+    int width;			/* The maximum width of all lines in the text
+				 * layout. */
+    int numChunks;		/* Number of chunks actually used in following
+				 * array. */
+    LayoutChunk chunks[1];	/* Array of chunks. The actual size will be
+				 * maxChunks. THIS FIELD MUST BE THE LAST IN
+				 * THE STRUCTURE. */
 } TextLayout;
 
 /*
  * The following structures are used as two-way maps between the values for
- * the fields in the TkFontAttributes structure and the strings used in
- * Tcl, when parsing both option-value format and style-list format font
- * name strings.
+ * the fields in the TkFontAttributes structure and the strings used in Tcl,
+ * when parsing both option-value format and style-list format font name
+ * strings.
  */
 
-static TkStateMap weightMap[] = {
+static const TkStateMap weightMap[] = {
     {TK_FW_NORMAL,	"normal"},
     {TK_FW_BOLD,	"bold"},
     {TK_FW_UNKNOWN,	NULL}
 };
 
-static TkStateMap slantMap[] = {
+static const TkStateMap slantMap[] = {
     {TK_FS_ROMAN,	"roman"},
     {TK_FS_ITALIC,	"italic"},
     {TK_FS_UNKNOWN,	NULL}
 };
 
-static TkStateMap underlineMap[] = {
+static const TkStateMap underlineMap[] = {
     {1,			"underline"},
     {0,			NULL}
 };
 
-static TkStateMap overstrikeMap[] = {
+static const TkStateMap overstrikeMap[] = {
     {1,			"overstrike"},
     {0,			NULL}
 };
@@ -135,7 +132,7 @@ static TkStateMap overstrikeMap[] = {
  * TkFontAttributes.
  */
 
-static TkStateMap xlfdWeightMap[] = {
+static const TkStateMap xlfdWeightMap[] = {
     {TK_FW_NORMAL,	"normal"},
     {TK_FW_NORMAL,	"medium"},
     {TK_FW_NORMAL,	"book"},
@@ -144,16 +141,16 @@ static TkStateMap xlfdWeightMap[] = {
     {TK_FW_BOLD,	"demi"},
     {TK_FW_BOLD,	"demibold"},
     {TK_FW_NORMAL,	NULL}		/* Assume anything else is "normal". */
-}; 
+};
 
-static TkStateMap xlfdSlantMap[] = {
+static const TkStateMap xlfdSlantMap[] = {
     {TK_FS_ROMAN,	"r"},
     {TK_FS_ITALIC,	"i"},
     {TK_FS_OBLIQUE,	"o"},
     {TK_FS_ROMAN,	NULL}		/* Assume anything else is "roman". */
 };
 
-static TkStateMap xlfdSetwidthMap[] = {
+static const TkStateMap xlfdSetwidthMap[] = {
     {TK_SW_NORMAL,	"normal"},
     {TK_SW_CONDENSE,	"narrow"},
     {TK_SW_CONDENSE,	"semicondensed"},
@@ -162,11 +159,11 @@ static TkStateMap xlfdSetwidthMap[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * The following structure and defines specify the valid builtin options 
- * when configuring a set of font attributes.
+ * The following structure and defines specify the valid builtin options when
+ * configuring a set of font attributes.
  */
 
-static CONST char *fontOpt[] = {
+static const char *fontOpt[] = {
     "-family",
     "-size",
     "-weight",
@@ -185,10 +182,10 @@ static CONST char *fontOpt[] = {
 #define FONT_NUMFIELDS	6
 
 /*
- * Hardcoded font aliases.  These are used to describe (mostly) identical
- * fonts whose names differ from platform to platform.  If the
- * user-supplied font name matches any of the names in one of the alias
- * lists, the other names in the alias list are also automatically tried.
+ * Hardcoded font aliases. These are used to describe (mostly) identical fonts
+ * whose names differ from platform to platform. If the user-supplied font
+ * name matches any of the names in one of the alias lists, the other names in
+ * the alias list are also automatically tried.
  */
 
 static char *timesAliases[] = {
@@ -226,7 +223,7 @@ static char *gothicAliases[] = {
 				/* Windows (MS goshikku). */
     "\344\270\270\343\202\264\343\202\267\343\203\203\343\202\257\342\210\222\357\274\255",
 				/* Mac (goshikku-M). */
-    NULL    
+    NULL
 };
 
 static char *dingbatsAliases[] = {
@@ -245,43 +242,46 @@ static char **fontAliases[] = {
     gothicAliases,
     dingbatsAliases,
     NULL
-};  
+};
 
 /*
- * Hardcoded font classes.  If the character cannot be found in the base 
- * font, the classes are examined in order to see if some other similar 
- * font should be examined also.  
+ * Hardcoded font classes. If the character cannot be found in the base font,
+ * the classes are examined in order to see if some other similar font should
+ * be examined also.
  */
 
 static char *systemClass[] = {
-    "fixed",				/* Unix. */
-					/* Windows. */
-    "chicago", "osaka", "sistemny",	/* Mac. */
+    "fixed",			/* Unix. */
+				/* Windows. */
+    "chicago", "osaka", "sistemny",
+				/* Mac. */
     NULL
 };
 
 static char *serifClass[] = {
-    "times", "palatino", "mincho",	/* All platforms. */
-    "song ti",				/* Unix. */
-    "ms serif", "simplified arabic", 	/* Windows. */
-    "latinski",				/* Mac. */
+    "times", "palatino", "mincho",
+				/* All platforms. */
+    "song ti",			/* Unix. */
+    "ms serif", "simplified arabic",
+				/* Windows. */
+    "latinski",			/* Mac. */
     NULL
 };
 
 static char *sansClass[] = {
-    "helvetica", "gothic",		/* All platforms. */
-					/* Unix. */
+    "helvetica", "gothic",	/* All platforms. */
+				/* Unix. */
     "ms sans serif", "traditional arabic",
-					/* Windows. */
-    "bastion",				/* Mac. */
+				/* Windows. */
+    "bastion",			/* Mac. */
     NULL
 };
 
 static char *monoClass[] = {
-    "courier", "gothic",		/* All platforms. */
-    "fangsong ti",			/* Unix. */
-    "simplified arabic fixed",		/* Windows. */
-    "monaco", "pryamoy",		/* Mac. */
+    "courier", "gothic",	/* All platforms. */
+    "fangsong ti",		/* Unix. */
+    "simplified arabic fixed",	/* Windows. */
+    "monaco", "pryamoy",	/* Mac. */
     NULL
 };
 
@@ -299,9 +299,9 @@ static char **fontFallbacks[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Global fallbacks.  If the character could not be found in the preferred
- * fallback list, this list is examined.  If the character still cannot be
- * found, all font families in the system are examined. 
+ * Global fallbacks. If the character could not be found in the preferred
+ * fallback list, this list is examined. If the character still cannot be
+ * found, all font families in the system are examined.
  */
 
 static char *globalFontClass[] = {
@@ -314,43 +314,35 @@ static char *globalFontClass[] = {
 };
 
 #define GetFontAttributes(tkfont) \
-		((CONST TkFontAttributes *) &((TkFont *) (tkfont))->fa)
+	((const TkFontAttributes *) &((TkFont *) (tkfont))->fa)
 
 #define GetFontMetrics(tkfont)    \
-		((CONST TkFontMetrics *) &((TkFont *) (tkfont))->fm)
-
-
-static int		ConfigAttributesObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
-			    TkFontAttributes *faPtr));
-static int		CreateNamedFont _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name,
-			    TkFontAttributes *faPtr));
-static void		DupFontObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr));
-static int		FieldSpecified _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *field));
-static void		FreeFontObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static int		GetAttributeInfoObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static LayoutChunk *	NewChunk _ANSI_ARGS_((TextLayout **layoutPtrPtr,
-			    int *maxPtr, CONST char *start, int numChars,
-			    int curX, int newX, int y));
-static int		ParseFontNameObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
-			    TkFontAttributes *faPtr));
-static void		RecomputeWidgets _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
-static int		SetFontFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		TheWorldHasChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		UpdateDependentFonts _ANSI_ARGS_((TkFontInfo *fiPtr,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr));
+	((const TkFontMetrics *) &((TkFont *) (tkfont))->fm)
+
+
+static int		ConfigAttributesObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[],
+			    TkFontAttributes *faPtr);
+static void		DupFontObjProc(Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr, Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr);
+static int		FieldSpecified(const char *field);
+static void		FreeFontObjProc(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static int		GetAttributeInfoObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    const TkFontAttributes *faPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static LayoutChunk *	NewChunk(TextLayout **layoutPtrPtr, int *maxPtr,
+			    const char *start, int numChars, int curX,
+			    int newX, int y);
+static int		ParseFontNameObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, TkFontAttributes *faPtr);
+static void		RecomputeWidgets(TkWindow *winPtr);
+static int		SetFontFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		TheWorldHasChanged(ClientData clientData);
+static void		UpdateDependentFonts(TkFontInfo *fiPtr,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr);
 
 /*
  * The following structure defines the implementation of the "font" Tcl
- * object, used for drawing. The internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 field of
- * each font object points to the TkFont structure for the font, or
- * NULL.
+ * object, used for drawing. The internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 field of each
+ * font object points to the TkFont structure for the font, or NULL.
  */
 
 Tcl_ObjType tkFontObjType = {
@@ -360,29 +352,29 @@ Tcl_ObjType tkFontObjType = {
     NULL,			/* updateStringProc */
     SetFontFromAny		/* setFromAnyProc */
 };
-
 
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkFontPkgInit --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is created.  It
- *	initializes all the structures that are used by the font
- *	package on a per application basis.
+ *	This function is called when an application is created. It initializes
+ *	all the structures that are used by the font package on a per
+ *	application basis.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Stores a token in the mainPtr to hold information needed by this 
- *	package on a per application basis. 
+ *	Stores a token in the mainPtr to hold information needed by this
+ *	package on a per application basis.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory allocated.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 void
-TkFontPkgInit(mainPtr)
-    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* The application being created. */
+TkFontPkgInit(
+    TkMainInfo *mainPtr)	/* The application being created. */
 {
     TkFontInfo *fiPtr;
 
@@ -401,9 +393,9 @@ TkFontPkgInit(mainPtr)
  *
  * TkFontPkgFree --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is deleted.  It
- *	deletes all the structures that were used by the font package
- *	for this application.
+ *	This function is called when an application is deleted. It deletes all
+ *	the structures that were used by the font package for this
+ *	application.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -415,8 +407,8 @@ TkFontPkgInit(mainPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkFontPkgFree(mainPtr)
-    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* The application being deleted. */
+TkFontPkgFree(
+    TkMainInfo *mainPtr)	/* The application being deleted. */
 {
     TkFontInfo *fiPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr, *searchPtr;
@@ -431,15 +423,17 @@ TkFontPkgFree(mainPtr)
 	    searchPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	fontsLeft++;
 #ifdef DEBUG_FONTS
-	fprintf(stderr, "Font %s still in cache.\n", 
+	fprintf(stderr, "Font %s still in cache.\n",
 		Tcl_GetHashKey(&fiPtr->fontCache, searchPtr));
 #endif
     }
+
 #ifdef PURIFY
     if (fontsLeft) {
-	panic("TkFontPkgFree: all fonts should have been freed already");
+	Tcl_Panic("TkFontPkgFree: all fonts should have been freed already");
     }
 #endif
+
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&fiPtr->fontCache);
 
     hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, &search);
@@ -457,10 +451,10 @@ TkFontPkgFree(mainPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_FontObjCmd -- 
+ * Tk_FontObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is implemented to process the "font" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is implemented to process the "font" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -472,16 +466,16 @@ TkFontPkgFree(mainPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_FontObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_FontObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     int index;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     TkFontInfo *fiPtr;
-    static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
+    static const char *optionStrings[] = {
 	"actual",	"configure",	"create",	"delete",
 	"families",	"measure",	"metrics",	"names",
 	NULL
@@ -504,259 +498,320 @@ Tk_FontObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case FONT_ACTUAL: {
-	    int skip, result;
-	    Tk_Font tkfont;
-	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
-	    CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr;
+    case FONT_ACTUAL: {
+	int skip, result, n;
+	const char *s;
+	Tk_Font tkfont;
+	Tcl_Obj *optPtr, *charPtr, *resultPtr;
+	Tcl_UniChar uniChar = 0;
+	const TkFontAttributes *faPtr;
+	TkFontAttributes fa;
 
-	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin);
-	    if (skip < 0) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if ((objc < 3) || (objc - skip > 4)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"font ?-displayof window? ?option?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
-	    if (tkfont == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    objc -= skip;
-	    objv += skip;
-	    faPtr = GetFontAttributes(tkfont);
-	    objPtr = NULL;
-	    if (objc > 3) {
-		objPtr = objv[3];
-	    }
-	    result = GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr);
-	    Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
-	    return result;
+	/*
+	 * Params 0 and 1 are 'font actual'. Param 2 is the font name. 3-4 may
+	 * be '-displayof $window'
+	 */
+
+	skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin);
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case FONT_CONFIGURE: {
-	    int result;
-	    char *string;
-	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
-	    NamedFont *nfPtr;
-	    Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
 
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fontname ?options?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-	    namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, string);
-	    nfPtr = NULL;		/* lint. */
-	    if (namedHashPtr != NULL) {
-		nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
-	    }
-	    if ((namedHashPtr == NULL) || (nfPtr->deletePending != 0)) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", string,
-			"\" doesn't exist", NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		objPtr = NULL;
-	    } else if (objc == 4) {
-		objPtr = objv[3];
+	/*
+	 * Next parameter may be an option.
+	 */
+
+	n = skip + 3;
+	optPtr = NULL;
+	charPtr = NULL;
+	if (n < objc) {
+	    s = Tcl_GetString(objv[n]);
+	    if (s[0] == '-' && s[1] != '-') {
+		optPtr = objv[n];
+		++n;
 	    } else {
-		result = ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc - 3,
-			objv + 3, &nfPtr->fa);
-		UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr);
-		return result;
+		optPtr = NULL;
 	    }
-	    return GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, &nfPtr->fa, objPtr);
 	}
-	case FONT_CREATE: {
-	    int skip, i;
-	    char *name;
-	    char buf[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	    TkFontAttributes fa;
-	    Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
 
-	    skip = 3;
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		name = NULL;
-	    } else {
-		name = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-		if (name[0] == '-') {
-		    name = NULL;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (name == NULL) {
-		/*
-		 * No font name specified.  Generate one of the form "fontX".
-		 */
+	/*
+	 * Next parameter may be '--' to mark end of options.
+	 */
 
-		for (i = 1; ; i++) {
-		    sprintf(buf, "font%d", i);
-		    namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, buf);
-		    if (namedHashPtr == NULL) {
-			break;
-		    }
-		}
-		name = buf;
-		skip = 2;
+	if (n < objc) {
+	    if (!strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[n]), "--")) {
+		++n;
 	    }
-	    TkInitFontAttributes(&fa);
-	    if (ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc - skip, objv + skip,
-		    &fa) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (CreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, &fa) != TCL_OK) {
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Next parameter is the character to get font information for.
+	 */
+
+	if (n < objc) {
+	    charPtr = objv[n];
+	    ++n;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * If there were fewer than 3 args, or args remain, that's an error.
+	 */
+
+	if (objc < 3 || n < objc) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "font ?-displayof window? ?option? ?--? ?char?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * The 'charPtr' arg must be a single Unicode.
+	 */
+
+	if (charPtr != NULL) {
+	    if (Tcl_GetCharLength(charPtr) != 1) {
+		resultPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
+			"expected a single character but got \"", -1);
+		Tcl_AppendLimitedToObj(resultPtr, Tcl_GetString(charPtr),
+			-1, 40, "...");
+		Tcl_AppendToObj(resultPtr, "\"", -1);
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, name, NULL);
-	    break;
+	    uniChar = Tcl_GetUniChar(charPtr, 0);
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Find the font.
+	 */
+
+	tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
+	if (tkfont == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case FONT_DELETE: {
-	    int i;
-	    char *string;
-	    NamedFont *nfPtr;
-	    Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
 
+	/*
+	 * Determine the font attributes.
+	 */
+
+	if (charPtr == NULL) {
+	    faPtr = GetFontAttributes(tkfont);
+	} else {
+	    TkpGetFontAttrsForChar(tkwin, tkfont, uniChar, &fa);
+	    faPtr = &fa;
+	}
+	result = GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, optPtr);
+
+	Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
+	return result;
+    }
+    case FONT_CONFIGURE: {
+	int result;
+	char *string;
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+	NamedFont *nfPtr;
+	Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
+
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fontname ?options?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, string);
+	nfPtr = NULL;		/* lint. */
+	if (namedHashPtr != NULL) {
+	    nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
+	}
+	if ((namedHashPtr == NULL) || (nfPtr->deletePending != 0)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", string,
+		    "\" doesn't exist", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    objPtr = NULL;
+	} else if (objc == 4) {
+	    objPtr = objv[3];
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc - 3, objv + 3,
+		    &nfPtr->fa);
+	    UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr);
+	    return result;
+	}
+	return GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, &nfPtr->fa, objPtr);
+    }
+    case FONT_CREATE: {
+	int skip, i;
+	char *name;
+	char buf[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+	TkFontAttributes fa;
+	Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
+
+	skip = 3;
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    name = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    name = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	    if (name[0] == '-') {
+		name = NULL;
+	    }
+	}
+	if (name == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * Delete the named font.  If there are still widgets using this
-	     * font, then it isn't deleted right away.
+	     * No font name specified. Generate one of the form "fontX".
 	     */
 
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fontname ?fontname ...?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
-		string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
-		namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, string);
+	    for (i = 1; ; i++) {
+		sprintf(buf, "font%d", i);
+		namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, buf);
 		if (namedHashPtr == NULL) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", string,
-			    "\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
-		if (nfPtr->refCount != 0) {
-		    nfPtr->deletePending = 1;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(namedHashPtr);
-		    ckfree((char *) nfPtr);
+		    break;
 		}
 	    }
-	    break;
+	    name = buf;
+	    skip = 2;
+	}
+	TkInitFontAttributes(&fa);
+	if (ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc - skip, objv + skip,
+		&fa) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (TkCreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, &fa) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case FONT_FAMILIES: {
-	    int skip;
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, name, NULL);
+	break;
+    }
+    case FONT_DELETE: {
+	int i, result = TCL_OK;
+	char *string;
 
-	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
-	    if (skip < 0) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (objc - skip != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    TkpGetFontFamilies(interp, tkwin);
-	    break;
+	/*
+	 * Delete the named font. If there are still widgets using this font,
+	 * then it isn't deleted right away.
+	 */
+
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fontname ?fontname ...?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case FONT_MEASURE: {
-	    char *string;
-	    Tk_Font tkfont;
-	    int length, skip;
-	    Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
-	    
-	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin);
-	    if (skip < 0) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (objc - skip != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"font ?-displayof window? text");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
-	    if (tkfont == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3 + skip], &length);
-	    resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, string, length));
-	    Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
-	    break;
+	for (i = 2; i < objc && result == TCL_OK; i++) {
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	    result = TkDeleteNamedFont(interp, tkwin, string);
+	}
+	return result;
+    }
+    case FONT_FAMILIES: {
+	int skip;
+
+	skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case FONT_METRICS: {
-	    Tk_Font tkfont;
-	    int skip, index, i;
-	    CONST TkFontMetrics *fmPtr;
-	    static CONST char *switches[] = {
-		"-ascent", "-descent", "-linespace", "-fixed", NULL
-	    };
+	if (objc - skip != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	TkpGetFontFamilies(interp, tkwin);
+	break;
+    }
+    case FONT_MEASURE: {
+	char *string;
+	Tk_Font tkfont;
+	int length = 0, skip = 0;
+	Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
 
+	if (objc > 4) {
 	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin);
 	    if (skip < 0) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if ((objc < 3) || ((objc - skip) > 4)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"font ?-displayof window? ?option?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
-	    if (tkfont == NULL) {
+	}
+	if (objc - skip != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "font ?-displayof window? text");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
+	if (tkfont == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3 + skip], &length);
+	resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, string, length));
+	Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
+	break;
+    }
+    case FONT_METRICS: {
+	Tk_Font tkfont;
+	int skip, index, i;
+	const TkFontMetrics *fmPtr;
+	static const char *switches[] = {
+	    "-ascent", "-descent", "-linespace", "-fixed", NULL
+	};
+
+	skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin);
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if ((objc < 3) || ((objc - skip) > 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "font ?-displayof window? ?option?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
+	if (tkfont == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	objc -= skip;
+	objv += skip;
+	fmPtr = GetFontMetrics(tkfont);
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
+
+	    sprintf(buf, "-ascent %d -descent %d -linespace %d -fixed %d",
+		    fmPtr->ascent, fmPtr->descent,
+		    fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent, fmPtr->fixed);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL);
+	} else {
+	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[3], switches, "metric", 0,
+		    &index) != TCL_OK) {
+		Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    objc -= skip;
-	    objv += skip;
-	    fmPtr = GetFontMetrics(tkfont);
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
-
-		sprintf(buf, "-ascent %d -descent %d -linespace %d -fixed %d",
-			fmPtr->ascent, fmPtr->descent,
-			fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent,
-			fmPtr->fixed);
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL);
-	    } else {
-		if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[3], switches,
-			"metric", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		    Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		i = 0;			/* Needed only to prevent compiler
-					 * warning. */
-		switch (index) {
-		    case 0: i = fmPtr->ascent;			break;
-		    case 1: i = fmPtr->descent;			break;
-		    case 2: i = fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent;	break;
-		    case 3: i = fmPtr->fixed;			break;
-		}
-		Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), i);
+	    i = 0;		/* Needed only to prevent compiler warning. */
+	    switch (index) {
+	    case 0: i = fmPtr->ascent;			break;
+	    case 1: i = fmPtr->descent;			break;
+	    case 2: i = fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent;	break;
+	    case 3: i = fmPtr->fixed;			break;
 	    }
-	    Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
-	    break;
+	    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), i);
 	}
-	case FONT_NAMES: {
-	    char *string;
-	    NamedFont *nfPtr;
-	    Tcl_HashSearch search;
-	    Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
-	    Tcl_Obj *strPtr, *resultPtr;
-	    
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "names");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
-	    namedHashPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, &search);
-	    while (namedHashPtr != NULL) {
-		nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
-		if (nfPtr->deletePending == 0) {
-		    string = Tcl_GetHashKey(&fiPtr->namedTable, namedHashPtr);
-		    strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(string, -1);
-		    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, strPtr);
-		}
-		namedHashPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+	Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
+	break;
+    }
+    case FONT_NAMES: {
+	char *string;
+	NamedFont *nfPtr;
+	Tcl_HashSearch search;
+	Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
+	Tcl_Obj *strPtr, *resultPtr;
+
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "names");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+	namedHashPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, &search);
+	while (namedHashPtr != NULL) {
+	    nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
+	    if (nfPtr->deletePending == 0) {
+		string = Tcl_GetHashKey(&fiPtr->namedTable, namedHashPtr);
+		strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(string, -1);
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, strPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	    namedHashPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
 	}
+	break;
+    }
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -766,10 +821,10 @@ Tk_FontObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * UpdateDependentFonts, TheWorldHasChanged, RecomputeWidgets --
  *
- *	Called when the attributes of a named font changes.  Updates all
- *	the instantiated fonts that depend on that named font and then
- *	uses the brute force approach and prepares every widget to
- *	recompute its geometry.
+ *	Called when the attributes of a named font changes. Updates all the
+ *	instantiated fonts that depend on that named font and then uses the
+ *	brute force approach and prepares every widget to recompute its
+ *	geometry.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -781,10 +836,10 @@ Tk_FontObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static void
-UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr)
-    TkFontInfo *fiPtr;		/* Info about application's fonts. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* A window in the application. */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;/* The named font that is changing. */
+UpdateDependentFonts(
+    TkFontInfo *fiPtr,		/* Info about application's fonts. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* A window in the application. */
+    Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr)/* The named font that is changing. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *cacheHashPtr;
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
@@ -794,8 +849,8 @@ UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr)
     nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
     if (nfPtr->refCount == 0) {
 	/*
-	 * Well nobody's using this named font, so don't have to tell
-	 * any widgets to recompute themselves.
+	 * Well nobody's using this named font, so don't have to tell any
+	 * widgets to recompute themselves.
 	 */
 
 	return;
@@ -818,8 +873,8 @@ UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr)
 }
 
 static void
-TheWorldHasChanged(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Info about application's fonts. */
+TheWorldHasChanged(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Info about application's fonts. */
 {
     TkFontInfo *fiPtr;
 
@@ -830,8 +885,8 @@ TheWorldHasChanged(clientData)
 }
 
 static void
-RecomputeWidgets(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to which command is sent. */
+RecomputeWidgets(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Window to which command is sent. */
 {
     Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc *proc;
     proc = Tk_GetClassProc(winPtr->classProcsPtr, worldChangedProc);
@@ -842,22 +897,23 @@ RecomputeWidgets(winPtr)
     /*
      * Notify all the descendants of this window that the world has changed.
      *
-     * This could be done recursively or iteratively.  The recursive version
-     * is easier to implement and understand, and typically, windows with a
-     * -font option will be leaf nodes in the widget heirarchy (buttons,
-     * labels, etc.), so the recursion depth will be shallow.
+     * This could be done recursively or iteratively. The recursive version is
+     * easier to implement and understand, and typically, windows with a -font
+     * option will be leaf nodes in the widget heirarchy (buttons, labels,
+     * etc.), so the recursion depth will be shallow.
      *
-     * However, the additional overhead of the recursive calls may become
-     * a performance problem if typical usage alters such that -font'ed widgets
-     * appear high in the heirarchy, causing deep recursion.  This could happen
+     * However, the additional overhead of the recursive calls may become a
+     * performance problem if typical usage alters such that -font'ed widgets
+     * appear high in the heirarchy, causing deep recursion. This could happen
      * with text widgets, or more likely with the (not yet existant) labeled
-     * frame widget.  With these widgets it is possible, even likely, that a
+     * frame widget. With these widgets it is possible, even likely, that a
      * -font'ed widget (text or labeled frame) will not be a leaf node, but
-     * will instead have many descendants.  If this is ever found to cause
-     * a performance problem, it may be worth investigating an iterative
-     * version of the code below.
+     * will instead have many descendants. If this is ever found to cause a
+     * performance problem, it may be worth investigating an iterative version
+     * of the code below.
      */
-    for (winPtr = winPtr->childList; winPtr != NULL; winPtr = winPtr->nextPtr) {
+
+    for (winPtr=winPtr->childList ; winPtr!=NULL ; winPtr=winPtr->nextPtr) {
 	RecomputeWidgets(winPtr);
     }
 }
@@ -865,56 +921,57 @@ RecomputeWidgets(winPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * CreateNamedFont --
+ * TkCreateNamedFont --
  *
- *	Create the specified named font with the given attributes in the
- *	named font table associated with the interp.  
+ *	Create the specified named font with the given attributes in the named
+ *	font table associated with the interp.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns TCL_OK if the font was successfully created, or TCL_ERROR
- *	if the named font already existed.  If TCL_ERROR is returned, an
- *	error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	Returns TCL_OK if the font was successfully created, or TCL_ERROR if
+ *	the named font already existed. If TCL_ERROR is returned, an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Assume there used to exist a named font by the specified name, and
  *	that the named font had been deleted, but there were still some
- *	widgets using the named font at the time it was deleted.  If a
- *	new named font is created with the same name, all those widgets
- *	that were using the old named font will be redisplayed using
- *	the new named font's attributes.
+ *	widgets using the named font at the time it was deleted. If a new
+ *	named font is created with the same name, all those widgets that were
+ *	using the old named font will be redisplayed using the new named
+ *	font's attributes.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static int
-CreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, faPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error return. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* A window associated with interp. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name for the new named font. */
-    TkFontAttributes *faPtr;	/* Attributes for the new named font. */
+int
+TkCreateNamedFont(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error return (can be NULL). */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* A window associated with interp. */
+    const char *name,		/* Name for the new named font. */
+    TkFontAttributes *faPtr)	/* Attributes for the new named font. */
 {
     TkFontInfo *fiPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
-    int new;
-    NamedFont *nfPtr;    
+    int isNew;
+    NamedFont *nfPtr;
 
     fiPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr;
 
-    namedHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, name, &new);
-		    
-    if (new == 0) {
+    namedHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, name, &isNew);
+
+    if (!isNew) {
 	nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
 	if (nfPtr->deletePending == 0) {
-	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", name,
-		    "\" already exists", (char *) NULL);
+	    if (interp) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", name,
+			"\" already exists", NULL);
+	    }
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Recreating a named font with the same name as a previous
-	 * named font.  Some widgets were still using that named
-	 * font, so they need to get redisplayed.
+	 * Recreating a named font with the same name as a previous named
+	 * font. Some widgets were still using that named font, so they need
+	 * to get redisplayed.
 	 */
 
 	nfPtr->fa = *faPtr;
@@ -927,7 +984,7 @@ CreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, faPtr)
     nfPtr->deletePending = 0;
     Tcl_SetHashValue(namedHashPtr, nfPtr);
     nfPtr->fa = *faPtr;
-    nfPtr->refCount = 0;	
+    nfPtr->refCount = 0;
     nfPtr->deletePending = 0;
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -935,76 +992,116 @@ CreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, faPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_GetFont -- 
+ * TkDeleteNamedFont --
+ *
+ *	Delete the named font. If there are still widgets using this font,
+ *	then it isn't deleted right away.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkDeleteNamedFont(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error return (can be NULL). */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* A window associated with interp. */
+    CONST char *name)		/* Name for the new named font. */
+{
+    TkFontInfo *fiPtr;
+    NamedFont *nfPtr;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
+
+    fiPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr;
+
+    namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, name);
+    if (namedHashPtr == NULL) {
+	if (interp) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", name,
+		    "\" doesn't exist", NULL);
+	}
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
+    if (nfPtr->refCount != 0) {
+	nfPtr->deletePending = 1;
+    } else {
+	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(namedHashPtr);
+	ckfree((char *) nfPtr);
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_GetFont --
  *
  *	Given a string description of a font, map the description to a
  *	corresponding Tk_Font that represents the font.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is token for the font, or NULL if an error
- *	prevented the font from being created.  If NULL is returned, an
- *	error message will be left in the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is token for the font, or NULL if an error prevented
+ *	the font from being created. If NULL is returned, an error message
+ *	will be left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The font is added to an internal database with a reference
- *	count.  For each call to this procedure, there should eventually
- *	be a call to Tk_FreeFont() or Tk_FreeFontFromObj() so that the
- *	database is cleaned up when fonts aren't in use anymore.
+ *	The font is added to an internal database with a reference count. For
+ *	each call to this function, there should eventually be a call to
+ *	Tk_FreeFont() or Tk_FreeFontFromObj() so that the database is cleaned
+ *	up when fonts aren't in use anymore.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Font
-Tk_GetFont(interp, tkwin, string)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for database and error return, or
-				 * NULL for no error messages. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For display on which font will be used. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String describing font, as: named font,
+Tk_GetFont(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for database and error return. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* For display on which font will be used. */
+    const char *string)		/* String describing font, as: named font,
 				 * native format, or parseable string. */
 {
-    Tk_Font tkfont; 
+    Tk_Font tkfont;
     Tcl_Obj *strPtr;
 
     strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj((char *) string, -1);
     Tcl_IncrRefCount(strPtr);
     tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, strPtr);
-    Tcl_DecrRefCount(strPtr);	
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(strPtr);
     return tkfont;
 }
 
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_AllocFontFromObj -- 
+ * Tk_AllocFontFromObj --
  *
  *	Given a string description of a font, map the description to a
  *	corresponding Tk_Font that represents the font.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is token for the font, or NULL if an error
- *	prevented the font from being created.  If NULL is returned, an
- *	error message will be left in interp's result object (if non-NULL).
+ *	The return value is token for the font, or NULL if an error prevented
+ *	the font from being created. If NULL is returned, an error message
+ *	will be left in interp's result object.
  *
  * Side effects:
- * 	The font is added to an internal database with a reference
- *	count.  For each call to this procedure, there should eventually
- *	be a call to Tk_FreeFont() or Tk_FreeFontFromObj() so that the
- *	database is cleaned up when fonts aren't in use anymore.
+ *	The font is added to an internal database with a reference count. For
+ *	each call to this function, there should eventually be a call to
+ *	Tk_FreeFont() or Tk_FreeFontFromObj() so that the database is cleaned
+ *	up when fonts aren't in use anymore.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Font
-Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for database and error return. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For screen on which font will be used. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object describing font, as: named font,
+Tk_AllocFontFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for database and error return. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* For screen on which font will be used. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Object describing font, as: named font,
 				 * native format, or parseable string. */
 {
     TkFontInfo *fiPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *cacheHashPtr, *namedHashPtr;
     TkFont *fontPtr, *firstFontPtr, *oldFontPtr;
-    int new, descent;
+    int isNew, descent;
     NamedFont *nfPtr;
 
     fiPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr;
@@ -1017,8 +1114,8 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
     if (oldFontPtr != NULL) {
 	if (oldFontPtr->resourceRefCount == 0) {
 	    /*
-	     * This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkFont that's
-	     * no longer in use.  Clear the reference.
+	     * This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkFont that's no
+	     * longer in use. Clear the reference.
 	     */
 
 	    FreeFontObjProc(objPtr);
@@ -1030,17 +1127,17 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Next, search the list of fonts that have the name we want, to see
-     * if one of them is for the right screen.
+     * Next, search the list of fonts that have the name we want, to see if
+     * one of them is for the right screen.
      */
 
-    new = 0;
+    isNew = 0;
     if (oldFontPtr != NULL) {
 	cacheHashPtr = oldFontPtr->cacheHashPtr;
 	FreeFontObjProc(objPtr);
     } else {
 	cacheHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&fiPtr->fontCache,
-		Tcl_GetString(objPtr), &new);
+		Tcl_GetString(objPtr), &isNew);
     }
     firstFontPtr = (TkFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(cacheHashPtr);
     for (fontPtr = firstFontPtr; (fontPtr != NULL);
@@ -1048,13 +1145,13 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
 	if (Tk_Screen(tkwin) == fontPtr->screen) {
 	    fontPtr->resourceRefCount++;
 	    fontPtr->objRefCount++;
-	    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) fontPtr;
+	    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) fontPtr;
 	    return (Tk_Font) fontPtr;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * The desired font isn't in the table.  Make a new one.
+     * The desired font isn't in the table. Make a new one.
      */
 
     namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable,
@@ -1079,7 +1176,7 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
 	    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr = Tcl_DuplicateObj(objPtr);
 
 	    if (ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, dupObjPtr, &fa) != TCL_OK) {
-		if (new) {
+		if (isNew) {
 		    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(cacheHashPtr);
 		}
 		Tcl_DecrRefCount(dupObjPtr);
@@ -1095,6 +1192,19 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
 	}
     }
 
+    /*
+     * Detect the system font engine going wrong and fail more gracefully.
+     */
+
+    if (fontPtr == NULL) {
+	if (isNew) {
+	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(cacheHashPtr);
+	}
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "failed to allocate font due to ",
+		"internal system font engine problem", NULL);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
     fontPtr->resourceRefCount = 1;
     fontPtr->objRefCount = 1;
     fontPtr->cacheHashPtr = cacheHashPtr;
@@ -1122,7 +1232,7 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
      * Get information used for drawing underlines in generic code on a
      * non-underlined font.
      */
-    
+
     descent = fontPtr->fm.descent;
     fontPtr->underlinePos = descent / 2;
     fontPtr->underlineHeight = TkFontGetPixels(tkwin, fontPtr->fa.size) / 10;
@@ -1131,9 +1241,9 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
     }
     if (fontPtr->underlinePos + fontPtr->underlineHeight > descent) {
 	/*
-	 * If this set of values would cause the bottom of the underline
-	 * bar to stick below the descent of the font, jack the underline
-	 * up a bit higher.
+	 * If this set of values would cause the bottom of the underline bar
+	 * to stick below the descent of the font, jack the underline up a bit
+	 * higher.
 	 */
 
 	fontPtr->underlineHeight = descent - fontPtr->underlinePos;
@@ -1142,8 +1252,8 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
 	    fontPtr->underlineHeight = 1;
 	}
     }
-    
-    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) fontPtr;
+
+    objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) fontPtr;
     return (Tk_Font) fontPtr;
 }
 
@@ -1152,31 +1262,31 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetFontFromObj --
  *
- *	Find the font that corresponds to a given object.  The font must
- *	have already been created by Tk_GetFont or Tk_AllocFontFromObj.
+ *	Find the font that corresponds to a given object. The font must have
+ *	already been created by Tk_GetFont or Tk_AllocFontFromObj.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the font that matches objPtr
- *	and is suitable for use in tkwin.
+ *	The return value is a token for the font that matches objPtr and is
+ *	suitable for use in tkwin.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a font ref, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a font ref, the conversion will free any
+ *	old internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Font
-Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window that the font will be used in. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object from which to get the font. */
+Tk_GetFontFromObj(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The window that the font will be used in. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object from which to get the font. */
 {
     TkFontInfo *fiPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr;
     TkFont *fontPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;
- 
+
     if (objPtr->typePtr != &tkFontObjType) {
-	SetFontFromAny((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, objPtr);
+	SetFontFromAny(NULL, objPtr);
     }
 
     fontPtr = (TkFont *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
@@ -1184,8 +1294,8 @@ Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
     if (fontPtr != NULL) {
 	if (fontPtr->resourceRefCount == 0) {
 	    /*
-	     * This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkFont that's
-	     * no longer in use.  Clear the reference.
+	     * This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkFont that's no
+	     * longer in use. Clear the reference.
 	     */
 
 	    FreeFontObjProc(objPtr);
@@ -1196,8 +1306,8 @@ Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Next, search the list of fonts that have the name we want, to see
-     * if one of them is for the right screen.
+     * Next, search the list of fonts that have the name we want, to see if
+     * one of them is for the right screen.
      */
 
     if (fontPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1211,13 +1321,13 @@ Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
 		fontPtr = fontPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (Tk_Screen(tkwin) == fontPtr->screen) {
 		fontPtr->objRefCount++;
-		objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) fontPtr;
+		objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) fontPtr;
 		return (Tk_Font) fontPtr;
 	    }
 	}
     }
 
-    panic("Tk_GetFontFromObj called with non-existent font!");
+    Tcl_Panic("Tk_GetFontFromObj called with non-existent font!");
     return NULL;
 }
 
@@ -1226,28 +1336,28 @@ Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
  *
  * SetFontFromAny --
  *
- *	Convert the internal representation of a Tcl object to the
- *	font internal form.
+ *	Convert the internal representation of a Tcl object to the font
+ *	internal form.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Always returns TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The object is left with its typePtr pointing to tkFontObjType.
- *	The TkFont pointer is NULL.
+ *	The object is left with its typePtr pointing to tkFontObjType. The
+ *	TkFont pointer is NULL.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-SetFontFromAny(interp, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object to convert. */
+SetFontFromAny(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object to convert. */
 {
-    Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
+    const Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. 
+     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
      */
 
     Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
@@ -1269,10 +1379,10 @@ SetFontFromAny(interp, objPtr)
  *	Given a font, return a textual string identifying it.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the description that was passed to
- *	Tk_GetFont() to create the font.  The storage for the returned
- *	string is only guaranteed to persist until the font is deleted.
- *	The caller should not modify this string.
+ *	The return value is the description that was passed to Tk_GetFont() to
+ *	create the font. The storage for the returned string is only
+ *	guaranteed to persist until the font is deleted. The caller should not
+ *	modify this string.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1280,9 +1390,9 @@ SetFontFromAny(interp, objPtr)
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-CONST char *
-Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont)
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font whose name is desired. */
+const char *
+Tk_NameOfFont(
+    Tk_Font tkfont)		/* Font whose name is desired. */
 {
     TkFont *fontPtr;
 
@@ -1293,7 +1403,7 @@ Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_FreeFont -- 
+ * Tk_FreeFont --
  *
  *	Called to release a font allocated by Tk_GetFont().
  *
@@ -1301,15 +1411,15 @@ Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The reference count associated with font is decremented, and
- *	only deallocated when no one is using it.
+ *	The reference count associated with font is decremented, and only
+ *	deallocated when no one is using it.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeFont(tkfont)
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font to be released. */
+Tk_FreeFont(
+    Tk_Font tkfont)		/* Font to be released. */
 {
     TkFont *fontPtr, *prevPtr;
     NamedFont *nfPtr;
@@ -1324,9 +1434,8 @@ Tk_FreeFont(tkfont)
     }
     if (fontPtr->namedHashPtr != NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * This font derived from a named font.  Reduce the reference
-	 * count on the named font and free it if no-one else is
-	 * using it.
+	 * This font derived from a named font. Reduce the reference count on
+	 * the named font and free it if no-one else is using it.
 	 */
 
 	nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(fontPtr->namedHashPtr);
@@ -1341,7 +1450,7 @@ Tk_FreeFont(tkfont)
     if (prevPtr == fontPtr) {
 	if (fontPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(fontPtr->cacheHashPtr);
-	} else  {
+	} else {
 	    Tcl_SetHashValue(fontPtr->cacheHashPtr, fontPtr->nextPtr);
 	}
     } else {
@@ -1360,7 +1469,7 @@ Tk_FreeFont(tkfont)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_FreeFontFromObj -- 
+ * Tk_FreeFontFromObj --
  *
  *	Called to release a font inside a Tcl_Obj *. Decrements the refCount
  *	of the font and removes it from the hash tables if necessary.
@@ -1369,17 +1478,17 @@ Tk_FreeFont(tkfont)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The reference count associated with font is decremented, and
- *	only deallocated when no one is using it.
+ *	The reference count associated with font is decremented, and only
+ *	deallocated when no one is using it.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window this font lives in. Needed
-				 * for the screen value. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The Tcl_Obj * to be freed. */
+Tk_FreeFontFromObj(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The window this font lives in. Needed for
+				 * the screen value. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The Tcl_Obj * to be freed. */
 {
     Tk_FreeFont(Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr));
 }
@@ -1387,26 +1496,25 @@ Tk_FreeFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * FreeFontObjProc -- 
+ * FreeFontObjProc --
  *
- *	This proc is called to release an object reference to a font.
- *	Called when the object's internal rep is released or when
- *	the cached fontPtr needs to be changed.
+ *	This proc is called to release an object reference to a font. Called
+ *	when the object's internal rep is released or when the cached fontPtr
+ *	needs to be changed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The object reference count is decremented. When both it
- *	and the hash ref count go to zero, the font's resources
- *	are released.
+ *	The object reference count is decremented. When both it and the hash
+ *	ref count go to zero, the font's resources are released.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeFontObjProc(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object we are releasing. */
+FreeFontObjProc(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object we are releasing. */
 {
     TkFont *fontPtr = (TkFont *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
 
@@ -1422,30 +1530,30 @@ FreeFontObjProc(objPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * DupFontObjProc -- 
+ * DupFontObjProc --
  *
- *	When a cached font object is duplicated, this is called to
- *	update the internal reps.
+ *	When a cached font object is duplicated, this is called to update the
+ *	internal reps.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The font's objRefCount is incremented and the internal rep
- *	of the copy is set to point to it.
+ *	The font's objRefCount is incremented and the internal rep of the copy
+ *	is set to point to it.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DupFontObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying from. */
-    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying to. */
+DupFontObjProc(
+    Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,		/* The object we are copying from. */
+    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr)		/* The object we are copying to. */
 {
     TkFont *fontPtr = (TkFont *) srcObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
-    
+
     dupObjPtr->typePtr = srcObjPtr->typePtr;
-    dupObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) fontPtr;
+    dupObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) fontPtr;
 
     if (fontPtr != NULL) {
 	fontPtr->objRefCount++;
@@ -1457,10 +1565,10 @@ DupFontObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
  *
  * Tk_FontId --
  *
- *	Given a font, return an opaque handle that should be selected
- *	into the XGCValues structure in order to get the constructed
- *	gc to use this font.  This procedure would go away if the
- *	XGCValues structure were replaced with a TkGCValues structure.
+ *	Given a font, return an opaque handle that should be selected into the
+ *	XGCValues structure in order to get the constructed gc to use this
+ *	font. This function would go away if the XGCValues structure were
+ *	replaced with a TkGCValues structure.
  *
  * Results:
  *	As above.
@@ -1472,8 +1580,9 @@ DupFontObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
  */
 
 Font
-Tk_FontId(tkfont)
-    Tk_Font tkfont;	/* Font that is going to be selected into GC. */
+Tk_FontId(
+    Tk_Font tkfont)		/* Font that is going to be selected into
+				 * GC. */
 {
     TkFont *fontPtr;
 
@@ -1486,26 +1595,27 @@ Tk_FontId(tkfont)
  *
  * Tk_GetFontMetrics --
  *
- *	Returns overall ascent and descent metrics for the given font.
- *	These values can be used to space multiple lines of text and
- *	to align the baselines of text in different fonts.
+ *	Returns overall ascent and descent metrics for the given font. These
+ *	values can be used to space multiple lines of text and to align the
+ *	baselines of text in different fonts.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If *heightPtr is non-NULL, it is filled with the overall height
- *	of the font, which is the sum of the ascent and descent.
- *	If *ascentPtr or *descentPtr is non-NULL, they are filled with
- *	the ascent and/or descent information for the font.
+ *	If *heightPtr is non-NULL, it is filled with the overall height of the
+ *	font, which is the sum of the ascent and descent. If *ascentPtr or
+ *	*descentPtr is non-NULL, they are filled with the ascent and/or
+ *	descent information for the font.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 void
-Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, fmPtr)
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font in which metrics are calculated. */
-    Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* Pointer to structure in which font
-				 * metrics for tkfont will be stored. */
+Tk_GetFontMetrics(
+    Tk_Font tkfont,		/* Font in which metrics are calculated. */
+    Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr)	/* Pointer to structure in which font metrics
+				 * for tkfont will be stored. */
 {
     TkFont *fontPtr;
 
@@ -1520,33 +1630,32 @@ Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, fmPtr)
  *
  * Tk_PostscriptFontName --
  *
- *	Given a Tk_Font, return the name of the corresponding Postscript
- *	font.
+ *	Given a Tk_Font, return the name of the corresponding Postscript font.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the pointsize of the given Tk_Font.
- *	The name of the Postscript font is appended to dsPtr.
+ *	The return value is the pointsize of the given Tk_Font. The name of
+ *	the Postscript font is appended to dsPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the font does not exist on the printer, the print job will
- *	fail at print time.  Given a "reasonable" Postscript printer,
- *	the following Tk_Font font families should print correctly:
+ *	If the font does not exist on the printer, the print job will fail at
+ *	print time. Given a "reasonable" Postscript printer, the following
+ *	Tk_Font font families should print correctly:
  *
  *	    Avant Garde, Arial, Bookman, Courier, Courier New, Geneva,
  *	    Helvetica, Monaco, New Century Schoolbook, New York,
  *	    Palatino, Symbol, Times, Times New Roman, Zapf Chancery,
  *	    and Zapf Dingbats.
  *
- *	Any other Tk_Font font families may not print correctly
- *	because the computed Postscript font name may be incorrect.
+ *	Any other Tk_Font font families may not print correctly because the
+ *	computed Postscript font name may be incorrect.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr)
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font in which text will be printed. */
-    Tcl_DString *dsPtr;		/* Pointer to an initialized Tcl_DString to
+Tk_PostscriptFontName(
+    Tk_Font tkfont,		/* Font in which text will be printed. */
+    Tcl_DString *dsPtr)		/* Pointer to an initialized Tcl_DString to
 				 * which the name of the Postscript font that
 				 * corresponds to tkfont will be appended. */
 {
@@ -1559,9 +1668,9 @@ Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr)
     fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont;
 
     /*
-     * Convert the case-insensitive Tk_Font family name to the
-     * case-sensitive Postscript family name.  Take out any spaces and
-     * capitalize the first letter of each word.
+     * Convert the case-insensitive Tk_Font family name to the case-sensitive
+     * Postscript family name. Take out any spaces and capitalize the first
+     * letter of each word.
      */
 
     family = fontPtr->fa.family;
@@ -1589,8 +1698,8 @@ Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr)
 	/*
 	 * Inline, capitalize the first letter of each word, lowercase the
 	 * rest of the letters in each word, and then take out the spaces
-	 * between the words.  This may make the DString shorter, which is
-	 * safe to do.
+	 * between the words. This may make the DString shorter, which is safe
+	 * to do.
 	 */
 
 	Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, family, -1);
@@ -1607,7 +1716,7 @@ Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr)
 		ch = Tcl_UniCharToUpper(ch);
 		upper = 0;
 	    } else {
-	        ch = Tcl_UniCharToLower(ch);
+		ch = Tcl_UniCharToLower(ch);
 	    }
 	    dest += Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, dest);
 	}
@@ -1655,14 +1764,12 @@ Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr)
     slantString = NULL;
     if (fontPtr->fa.slant == TK_FS_ROMAN) {
 	;
+    } else if ((strcmp(family, "Helvetica") == 0)
+	    || (strcmp(family, "Courier") == 0)
+	    || (strcmp(family, "AvantGarde") == 0)) {
+	slantString = "Oblique";
     } else {
-	if ((strcmp(family, "Helvetica") == 0)
-		|| (strcmp(family, "Courier") == 0)
-		|| (strcmp(family, "AvantGarde") == 0)) {
-	    slantString = "Oblique";
-	} else {
-	    slantString = "Italic";
-	}
+	slantString = "Italic";
     }
 
     /*
@@ -1671,7 +1778,7 @@ Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr)
      */
 
     if ((slantString == NULL) && (weightString == NULL)) {
-	if ((strcmp(family, "Times") == 0) 
+	if ((strcmp(family, "Times") == 0)
 		|| (strcmp(family, "NewCenturySchlbk") == 0)
 		|| (strcmp(family, "Palatino") == 0)) {
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, "-Roman", -1);
@@ -1695,8 +1802,8 @@ Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr)
  * Tk_TextWidth --
  *
  *	A wrapper function for the more complicated interface of
- *	Tk_MeasureChars.  Computes how much space the given
- *	simple string needs.
+ *	Tk_MeasureChars. Computes how much space the given simple string
+ *	needs.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is the width (in pixels) of the given string.
@@ -1708,11 +1815,11 @@ Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, string, numBytes)
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font in which text will be measured. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String whose width will be computed. */
-    int numBytes;		/* Number of bytes to consider from
-				 * string, or < 0 for strlen(). */
+Tk_TextWidth(
+    Tk_Font tkfont,		/* Font in which text will be measured. */
+    const char *string,		/* String whose width will be computed. */
+    int numBytes)		/* Number of bytes to consider from string, or
+				 * < 0 for strlen(). */
 {
     int width;
 
@@ -1726,15 +1833,15 @@ Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, string, numBytes)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_UnderlineChars --
+ * Tk_UnderlineChars, TkUnderlineCharsInContext --
  *
- *	This procedure draws an underline for a given range of characters
- *	in a given string.  It doesn't draw the characters (which are
- *	assumed to have been displayed previously); it just draws the
- *	underline.  This procedure would mainly be used to quickly
- *	underline a few characters without having to construct an
- *	underlined font.  To produce properly underlined text, the
- *	appropriate underlined font should be constructed and used. 
+ *	These procedures draw an underline for a given range of characters in
+ *	a given string. They don't draw the characters (which are assumed to
+ *	have been displayed previously); they just draw the underline. These
+ *	procedures would mainly be used to quickly underline a few characters
+ *	without having to construct an underlined font. To produce properly
+ *	underlined text, the appropriate underlined font should be constructed
+ *	and used.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1746,30 +1853,53 @@ Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, string, numBytes)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_UnderlineChars(display, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, x, y, firstByte,
-	lastByte)
-    Display *display;		/* Display on which to draw. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */
-    GC gc;			/* Graphics context for actually drawing
+Tk_UnderlineChars(
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    GC gc,			/* Graphics context for actually drawing
 				 * line. */
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font used in GC;  must have been allocated
-				 * by Tk_GetFont().  Used for character
+    Tk_Font tkfont,		/* Font used in GC; must have been allocated
+				 * by Tk_GetFont(). Used for character
 				 * dimensions, etc. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String containing characters to be
+    const char *string,		/* String containing characters to be
 				 * underlined or overstruck. */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates at which first character of
+    int x, int y,		/* Coordinates at which first character of
 				 * string is drawn. */
-    int firstByte;		/* Index of first byte of first character. */
-    int lastByte;		/* Index of first byte after the last
+    int firstByte,		/* Index of first byte of first character. */
+    int lastByte)		/* Index of first byte after the last
+				 * character. */
+{
+    TkUnderlineCharsInContext(display, drawable, gc, tkfont, string,
+	    lastByte, x, y, firstByte, lastByte);
+}
+
+void
+TkUnderlineCharsInContext(
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    GC gc,			/* Graphics context for actually drawing
+				 * line. */
+    Tk_Font tkfont,		/* Font used in GC; must have been allocated
+				 * by Tk_GetFont(). Used for character
+				 * dimensions, etc. */
+    const char *string,		/* String containing characters to be
+				 * underlined or overstruck. */
+    int numBytes,		/* Number of bytes in string. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Coordinates at which the first character of
+				 * the whole string would be drawn. */
+    int firstByte,		/* Index of first byte of first character. */
+    int lastByte)		/* Index of first byte after the last
 				 * character. */
 {
     TkFont *fontPtr;
     int startX, endX;
 
     fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont;
-    
-    Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, string, firstByte, -1, 0, &startX);
-    Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, string, lastByte, -1, 0, &endX);
+
+    TkpMeasureCharsInContext(tkfont, string, numBytes, 0, firstByte, -1, 0,
+	    &startX);
+    TkpMeasureCharsInContext(tkfont, string, numBytes, 0, lastByte, -1, 0,
+	    &endX);
 
     XFillRectangle(display, drawable, gc, x + startX,
 	    y + fontPtr->underlinePos, (unsigned int) (endX - startX),
@@ -1781,66 +1911,60 @@ Tk_UnderlineChars(display, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, x, y, firstByte,
  *
  * Tk_ComputeTextLayout --
  *
- *	Computes the amount of screen space needed to display a
- *	multi-line, justified string of text.  Records all the
- *	measurements that were done to determine to size and
- *	positioning of the individual lines of text; this information
- *	can be used by the Tk_DrawTextLayout() procedure to
+ *	Computes the amount of screen space needed to display a multi-line,
+ *	justified string of text. Records all the measurements that were done
+ *	to determine to size and positioning of the individual lines of text;
+ *	this information can be used by the Tk_DrawTextLayout() function to
  *	display the text quickly (without remeasuring it).
  *
- *	This procedure is useful for simple widgets that want to
- *	display single-font, multi-line text and want Tk to handle the
- *	details.
+ *	This function is useful for simple widgets that want to display
+ *	single-font, multi-line text and want Tk to handle the details.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a Tk_TextLayout token that holds the
- *	measurement information for the given string.  The token is
- *	only valid for the given string.  If the string is freed,
- *	the token is no longer valid and must also be freed.  To free
- *	the token, call Tk_FreeTextLayout().
+ *	The return value is a Tk_TextLayout token that holds the measurement
+ *	information for the given string. The token is only valid for the
+ *	given string. If the string is freed, the token is no longer valid and
+ *	must also be freed. To free the token, call Tk_FreeTextLayout().
  *
- *	The dimensions of the screen area needed to display the text
- *	are stored in *widthPtr and *heightPtr.
+ *	The dimensions of the screen area needed to display the text are
+ *	stored in *widthPtr and *heightPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Memory is allocated to hold the measurement information.  
+ *	Memory is allocated to hold the measurement information.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_TextLayout
-Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
-	widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font that will be used to display text. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String whose dimensions are to be
+Tk_ComputeTextLayout(
+    Tk_Font tkfont,		/* Font that will be used to display text. */
+    const char *string,		/* String whose dimensions are to be
 				 * computed. */
-    int numChars;		/* Number of characters to consider from
+    int numChars,		/* Number of characters to consider from
 				 * string, or < 0 for strlen(). */
-    int wrapLength;		/* Longest permissible line length, in
-				 * pixels.  <= 0 means no automatic wrapping:
-				 * just let lines get as long as needed. */
-    Tk_Justify justify;		/* How to justify lines. */
-    int flags;			/* Flag bits OR-ed together.
-				 * TK_IGNORE_TABS means that tab characters
-				 * should not be expanded.  TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES
-				 * means that newline characters should not
-				 * cause a line break. */
-    int *widthPtr;		/* Filled with width of string. */
-    int *heightPtr;		/* Filled with height of string. */
+    int wrapLength,		/* Longest permissible line length, in pixels.
+				 * <= 0 means no automatic wrapping: just let
+				 * lines get as long as needed. */
+    Tk_Justify justify,		/* How to justify lines. */
+    int flags,			/* Flag bits OR-ed together. TK_IGNORE_TABS
+				 * means that tab characters should not be
+				 * expanded. TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES means that
+				 * newline characters should not cause a line
+				 * break. */
+    int *widthPtr,		/* Filled with width of string. */
+    int *heightPtr)		/* Filled with height of string. */
 {
     TkFont *fontPtr;
-    CONST char *start, *end, *special;
-    int n, y, bytesThisChunk, maxChunks;
-    int baseline, height, curX, newX, maxWidth;
+    const char *start, *end, *special;
+    int n, y, bytesThisChunk, maxChunks, curLine, layoutHeight;
+    int baseline, height, curX, newX, maxWidth, *lineLengths;
     TextLayout *layoutPtr;
     LayoutChunk *chunkPtr;
-    CONST TkFontMetrics *fmPtr;
+    const TkFontMetrics *fmPtr;
     Tcl_DString lineBuffer;
-    int *lineLengths;
-    int curLine, layoutHeight;
 
     Tcl_DStringInit(&lineBuffer);
-    
+
     fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont;
     if ((fontPtr == NULL) || (string == NULL)) {
 	if (widthPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1865,11 +1989,11 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 
     maxChunks = 1;
 
-    layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) ckalloc(sizeof(TextLayout)
-	    + (maxChunks - 1) * sizeof(LayoutChunk));
-    layoutPtr->tkfont	    = tkfont;
-    layoutPtr->string	    = string;
-    layoutPtr->numChunks    = 0;
+    layoutPtr = (TextLayout *)
+	    ckalloc(sizeof(TextLayout) + (maxChunks-1) * sizeof(LayoutChunk));
+    layoutPtr->tkfont = tkfont;
+    layoutPtr->string = string;
+    layoutPtr->numChunks = 0;
 
     baseline = fmPtr->ascent;
     maxWidth = 0;
@@ -1884,7 +2008,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
     special = string;
 
     flags &= TK_IGNORE_TABS | TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES;
-    flags |= TK_WHOLE_WORDS | TK_AT_LEAST_ONE;	    
+    flags |= TK_WHOLE_WORDS | TK_AT_LEAST_ONE;
     for (start = string; start < end; ) {
 	if (start >= special) {
 	    /*
@@ -1892,7 +2016,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	     *
 	     * INTL: Note that it is safe to increment by byte, because we are
 	     * looking for 7-bit characters that will appear unchanged in
-	     * UTF-8.  At some point we may need to support the full Unicode
+	     * UTF-8. At some point we may need to support the full Unicode
 	     * whitespace set.
 	     */
 
@@ -1912,7 +2036,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 
 	/*
 	 * Special points at the next special character (or the end of the
-	 * string).  Process characters between start and special.
+	 * string). Process characters between start and special.
 	 */
 
 	chunkPtr = NULL;
@@ -1924,7 +2048,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	    if (bytesThisChunk > 0) {
 		chunkPtr = NewChunk(&layoutPtr, &maxChunks, start,
 			bytesThisChunk, curX, newX, baseline);
-			
+
 		start += bytesThisChunk;
 		curX = newX;
 	    }
@@ -1934,8 +2058,8 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	    /*
 	     * Handle the special character.
 	     *
-	     * INTL: Special will be pointing at a 7-bit character so we
-	     * can safely treat it as a single byte.
+	     * INTL: Special will be pointing at a 7-bit character so we can
+	     * safely treat it as a single byte.
 	     */
 
 	    chunkPtr = NULL;
@@ -1955,7 +2079,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 		    flags &= ~TK_AT_LEAST_ONE;
 		    continue;
 		}
-	    } else {	
+	    } else {
 		NewChunk(&layoutPtr, &maxChunks, start, 1, curX, curX,
 			baseline)->numDisplayChars = -1;
 		start++;
@@ -1964,9 +2088,9 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * No more characters are going to go on this line, either because
-	 * no more characters can fit or there are no more characters left.
-	 * Consume all extra spaces at end of line.  
+	 * No more characters are going to go on this line, either because no
+	 * more characters can fit or there are no more characters left.
+	 * Consume all extra spaces at end of line.
 	 */
 
 	while ((start < end) && isspace(UCHAR(*start))) { /* INTL: ISO space */
@@ -1983,12 +2107,12 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	    start++;
 	}
 	if (chunkPtr != NULL) {
-	    CONST char *end;
+	    const char *end;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Append all the extra spaces on this line to the end of the
-	     * last text chunk.  This is a little tricky because we are
-	     * switching back and forth between characters and bytes.
+	     * Append all the extra spaces on this line to the end of the last
+	     * text chunk. This is a little tricky because we are switching
+	     * back and forth between characters and bytes.
 	     */
 
 	    end = chunkPtr->start + chunkPtr->numBytes;
@@ -2002,7 +2126,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	    }
 	}
 
-        wrapLine: 
+    wrapLine:
 	flags |= TK_AT_LEAST_ONE;
 
 	/*
@@ -2015,8 +2139,8 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Remember width of this line, so that all chunks on this line
-	 * can be centered or right justified, if necessary.
+	 * Remember width of this line, so that all chunks on this line can be
+	 * centered or right justified, if necessary.
 	 */
 
 	Tcl_DStringAppend(&lineBuffer, (char *) &curX, sizeof(curX));
@@ -2026,9 +2150,8 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
     }
 
     /*
-     * If last line ends with a newline, then we need to make a 0 width
-     * chunk on the next line.  Otherwise "Hello" and "Hello\n" are the
-     * same height.
+     * If last line ends with a newline, then we need to make a 0 width chunk
+     * on the next line. Otherwise "Hello" and "Hello\n" are the same height.
      */
 
     if ((layoutPtr->numChunks > 0) && ((flags & TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES) == 0)) {
@@ -2039,7 +2162,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&lineBuffer, (char *) &curX, sizeof(curX));
 	    baseline += height;
 	}
-    }	    
+    }
 
     layoutPtr->width = maxWidth;
     layoutHeight = baseline - fmPtr->ascent;
@@ -2047,9 +2170,9 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	layoutHeight = height;
 
 	/*
-	 * This fake chunk is used by the other procedures so that they can
-	 * pretend that there is a chunk with no chars in it, which makes
-	 * the coding simpler.
+	 * This fake chunk is used by the other functions so that they can
+	 * pretend that there is a chunk with no chars in it, which makes the
+	 * coding simpler.
 	 */
 
 	layoutPtr->numChunks = 1;
@@ -2066,7 +2189,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	 * Using maximum line length, shift all the chunks so that the lines
 	 * are all justified correctly.
 	 */
-    
+
 	curLine = 0;
 	chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks;
 	y = chunkPtr->y;
@@ -2104,8 +2227,8 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
  *
  * Tk_FreeTextLayout --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to release the storage associated with
- *	a Tk_TextLayout when it is no longer needed.
+ *	This function is called to release the storage associated with a
+ *	Tk_TextLayout when it is no longer needed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2117,8 +2240,8 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeTextLayout(textLayout)
-    Tk_TextLayout textLayout;	/* The text layout to be released. */
+Tk_FreeTextLayout(
+    Tk_TextLayout textLayout)	/* The text layout to be released. */
 {
     TextLayout *layoutPtr;
 
@@ -2136,9 +2259,8 @@ Tk_FreeTextLayout(textLayout)
  *	Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to display a
  *	multi-line, justified string of text.
  *
- *	This procedure is useful for simple widgets that need to
- *	display single-font, multi-line text and want Tk to handle
- *	the details.
+ *	This function is useful for simple widgets that need to display
+ *	single-font, multi-line text and want Tk to handle the details.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2150,25 +2272,25 @@ Tk_FreeTextLayout(textLayout)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DrawTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, firstChar, lastChar)
-    Display *display;		/* Display on which to draw. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */
-    GC gc;			/* Graphics context to use for drawing text. */
-    Tk_TextLayout layout;	/* Layout information, from a previous call
-				 * to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
-    int x, y;			/* Upper-left hand corner of rectangle in
+Tk_DrawTextLayout(
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    GC gc,			/* Graphics context to use for drawing text. */
+    Tk_TextLayout layout,	/* Layout information, from a previous call to
+				 * Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper-left hand corner of rectangle in
 				 * which to draw (pixels). */
-    int firstChar;		/* The index of the first character to draw
-				 * from the given text item.  0 specfies the
+    int firstChar,		/* The index of the first character to draw
+				 * from the given text item. 0 specfies the
 				 * beginning. */
-    int lastChar;		/* The index just after the last character
-				 * to draw from the given text item.  A number
-				 * < 0 means to draw all characters. */
+    int lastChar)		/* The index just after the last character to
+				 * draw from the given text item. A number < 0
+				 * means to draw all characters. */
 {
     TextLayout *layoutPtr;
     int i, numDisplayChars, drawX;
-    CONST char *firstByte;
-    CONST char *lastByte;
+    const char *firstByte;
+    const char *lastByte;
     LayoutChunk *chunkPtr;
 
     layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout;
@@ -2214,15 +2336,14 @@ Tk_DrawTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, firstChar, lastChar)
  *
  * Tk_UnderlineTextLayout --
  *
- *	Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to display an
- *	underline below an individual character.  This procedure does
- *	not draw the text, just the underline.
+ *	Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to display an underline
+ *	below an individual character. This function does not draw the text,
+ *	just the underline.
  *
- *	This procedure is useful for simple widgets that need to
- *	display single-font, multi-line text with an individual
- *	character underlined and want Tk to handle the details.
- *	To display larger amounts of underlined text, construct
- *	and use an underlined font.
+ *	This function is useful for simple widgets that need to display
+ *	single-font, multi-line text with an individual character underlined
+ *	and want Tk to handle the details. To display larger amounts of
+ *	underlined text, construct and use an underlined font.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2234,16 +2355,16 @@ Tk_DrawTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, firstChar, lastChar)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline)
-    Display *display;		/* Display on which to draw. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */
-    GC gc;			/* Graphics context to use for drawing text. */
-    Tk_TextLayout layout;	/* Layout information, from a previous call
-				 * to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
-    int x, y;			/* Upper-left hand corner of rectangle in
+Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    GC gc,			/* Graphics context to use for drawing text. */
+    Tk_TextLayout layout,	/* Layout information, from a previous call to
+				 * Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper-left hand corner of rectangle in
 				 * which to draw (pixels). */
-    int underline;		/* Index of the single character to
-				 * underline, or -1 for no underline. */
+    int underline)		/* Index of the single character to underline,
+				 * or -1 for no underline. */
 {
     TextLayout *layoutPtr;
     TkFont *fontPtr;
@@ -2254,7 +2375,7 @@ Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline)
 	layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout;
 	fontPtr = (TkFont *) layoutPtr->tkfont;
 
-	XFillRectangle(display, drawable, gc, x + xx, 
+	XFillRectangle(display, drawable, gc, x + xx,
 		y + yy + fontPtr->fm.ascent + fontPtr->underlinePos,
 		(unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) fontPtr->underlineHeight);
     }
@@ -2266,25 +2387,25 @@ Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline)
  * Tk_PointToChar --
  *
  *	Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to determine the
- *	character closest to the given point.  The point must be
- *	specified with respect to the upper-left hand corner of the
- *	text layout, which is considered to be located at (0, 0).
+ *	character closest to the given point. The point must be specified with
+ *	respect to the upper-left hand corner of the text layout, which is
+ *	considered to be located at (0, 0).
  *
- *	Any point whose y-value is less that 0 will be considered closest
- *	to the first character in the text layout; any point whose y-value
- *	is greater than the height of the text layout will be considered
- *	closest to the last character in the text layout.
+ *	Any point whose y-value is less that 0 will be considered closest to
+ *	the first character in the text layout; any point whose y-value is
+ *	greater than the height of the text layout will be considered closest
+ *	to the last character in the text layout.
  *
- *	Any point whose x-value is less than 0 will be considered closest
- *	to the first character on that line; any point whose x-value is
- *	greater than the width of the text layout will be considered
- *	closest to the last character on that line.
+ *	Any point whose x-value is less than 0 will be considered closest to
+ *	the first character on that line; any point whose x-value is greater
+ *	than the width of the text layout will be considered closest to the
+ *	last character on that line.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the index of the character that was
- *	closest to the point.  Given a text layout with no characters,
- *	the value 0 will always be returned, referring to a hypothetical
- *	zero-width placeholder character.
+ *	The return value is the index of the character that was closest to the
+ *	point. Given a text layout with no characters, the value 0 will always
+ *	be returned, referring to a hypothetical zero-width placeholder
+ *	character.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2293,12 +2414,12 @@ Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y)
-    Tk_TextLayout layout;	/* Layout information, from a previous call
-				 * to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of point to check, with
-				 * respect to the upper-left corner of the
-				 * text layout. */
+Tk_PointToChar(
+    Tk_TextLayout layout,	/* Layout information, from a previous call to
+				 * Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
+    int x, int y)		/* Coordinates of point to check, with respect
+				 * to the upper-left corner of the text
+				 * layout. */
 {
     TextLayout *layoutPtr;
     LayoutChunk *chunkPtr, *lastPtr;
@@ -2307,8 +2428,8 @@ Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y)
 
     if (y < 0) {
 	/*
-	 * Point lies above any line in this layout.  Return the index of
-	 * the first char.
+	 * Point lies above any line in this layout. Return the index of the
+	 * first char.
 	 */
 
 	return 0;
@@ -2327,30 +2448,30 @@ Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y)
 	if (y < baseline + fontPtr->fm.descent) {
 	    if (x < chunkPtr->x) {
 		/*
-		 * Point is to the left of all chunks on this line.  Return
-		 * the index of the first character on this line.
+		 * Point is to the left of all chunks on this line. Return the
+		 * index of the first character on this line.
 		 */
 
 		return numChars;
 	    }
 	    if (x >= layoutPtr->width) {
 		/*
-		 * If point lies off right side of the text layout, return
-		 * the last char in the last chunk on this line.  Without
-		 * this, it might return the index of the first char that
-		 * was located outside of the text layout.
+		 * If point lies off right side of the text layout, return the
+		 * last char in the last chunk on this line. Without this, it
+		 * might return the index of the first char that was located
+		 * outside of the text layout.
 		 */
 
 		x = INT_MAX;
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Examine all chunks on this line to see which one contains
-	     * the specified point.
+	     * Examine all chunks on this line to see which one contains the
+	     * specified point.
 	     */
 
 	    lastPtr = chunkPtr;
-	    while ((i < layoutPtr->numChunks) && (chunkPtr->y == baseline))  {
+	    while ((i < layoutPtr->numChunks) && (chunkPtr->y == baseline)) {
 		if (x < chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->totalWidth) {
 		    /*
 		     * Point falls on one of the characters in this chunk.
@@ -2377,7 +2498,7 @@ Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y)
 
 	    /*
 	     * Point is to the right of all chars in all the chunks on this
-	     * line.  Return the index just past the last char in the last
+	     * line. Return the index just past the last char in the last
 	     * chunk on this line.
 	     */
 
@@ -2393,8 +2514,8 @@ Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Point lies below any line in this text layout.  Return the index
-     * just past the last char.
+     * Point lies below any line in this text layout. Return the index just
+     * past the last char.
      */
 
     return (lastPtr->start + lastPtr->numChars) - layoutPtr->string;
@@ -2405,29 +2526,28 @@ Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y)
  *
  * Tk_CharBbox --
  *
- *	Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to return the
- *	bounding box for the character specified by index.  
+ *	Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to return the bounding
+ *	box for the character specified by index.
  *
- *	The width of the bounding box is the advance width of the
- *	character, and does not include and left- or right-bearing.
- *	Any character that extends partially outside of the
- *	text layout is considered to be truncated at the edge.  Any
- *	character which is located completely outside of the text
- *	layout is considered to be zero-width and pegged against
- *	the edge.
+ *	The width of the bounding box is the advance width of the character,
+ *	and does not include and left- or right-bearing. Any character that
+ *	extends partially outside of the text layout is considered to be
+ *	truncated at the edge. Any character which is located completely
+ *	outside of the text layout is considered to be zero-width and pegged
+ *	against the edge.
  *
  *	The height of the bounding box is the line height for this font,
- *	extending from the top of the ascent to the bottom of the
- *	descent.  Information about the actual height of the individual
- *	letter is not available.
+ *	extending from the top of the ascent to the bottom of the descent.
+ *	Information about the actual height of the individual letter is not
+ *	available.
+ *
+ *	A text layout that contains no characters is considered to contain a
+ *	single zero-width placeholder character.
  *
- *	A text layout that contains no characters is considered to
- *	contain a single zero-width placeholder character.
- * 
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the index did not specify a character
- *	in the text layout, or non-zero otherwise.  In that case,
- *	*bbox is filled with the bounding box of the character.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the index did not specify a character in the
+ *	text layout, or non-zero otherwise. In that case, *bbox is filled with
+ *	the bounding box of the character.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2436,25 +2556,26 @@ Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_CharBbox(layout, index, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    Tk_TextLayout layout;   /* Layout information, from a previous call to
-			     * Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
-    int index;		    /* The index of the character whose bbox is
-			     * desired. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;	    /* Filled with the upper-left hand corner, in
-			     * pixels, of the bounding box for the character
-			     * specified by index, if non-NULL. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;
-			    /* Filled with the width and height of the
-			     * bounding box for the character specified by
-			     * index, if non-NULL. */
+Tk_CharBbox(
+    Tk_TextLayout layout,	/* Layout information, from a previous call to
+				 * Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
+    int index,			/* The index of the character whose bbox is
+				 * desired. */
+    int *xPtr, int *yPtr,	/* Filled with the upper-left hand corner, in
+				 * pixels, of the bounding box for the
+				 * character specified by index, if
+				 * non-NULL. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+				/* Filled with the width and height of the
+				 * bounding box for the character specified by
+				 * index, if non-NULL. */
 {
     TextLayout *layoutPtr;
     LayoutChunk *chunkPtr;
-    int i, x, w;
+    int i, x = 0, w;
     Tk_Font tkfont;
     TkFont *fontPtr;
-    CONST char *end;
+    const char *end;
 
     if (index < 0) {
 	return 0;
@@ -2476,7 +2597,7 @@ Tk_CharBbox(layout, index, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
 	    end = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, index);
 	    if (xPtr != NULL) {
 		Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, chunkPtr->start,
-			end -  chunkPtr->start, -1, 0, &x);
+			end - chunkPtr->start, -1, 0, &x);
 		x += chunkPtr->x;
 	    }
 	    if (widthPtr != NULL) {
@@ -2488,25 +2609,26 @@ Tk_CharBbox(layout, index, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
 	index -= chunkPtr->numChars;
 	chunkPtr++;
     }
-    if (index == 0) {
-	/*
-	 * Special case to get location just past last char in layout.
-	 */
-
-	chunkPtr--;
-	x = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->totalWidth;
-	w = 0;
-    } else {
+    if (index != 0) {
 	return 0;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Ensure that the bbox lies within the text layout.  This forces all
-     * chars that extend off the right edge of the text layout to have
-     * truncated widths, and all chars that are completely off the right
-     * edge of the text layout to peg to the edge and have 0 width.
+     * Special case to get location just past last char in layout.
+     */
+
+    chunkPtr--;
+    x = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->totalWidth;
+    w = 0;
+
+    /*
+     * Ensure that the bbox lies within the text layout. This forces all chars
+     * that extend off the right edge of the text layout to have truncated
+     * widths, and all chars that are completely off the right edge of the
+     * text layout to peg to the edge and have 0 width.
      */
-    check:
+
+  check:
     if (yPtr != NULL) {
 	*yPtr = chunkPtr->y - fontPtr->fm.ascent;
     }
@@ -2535,16 +2657,15 @@ Tk_CharBbox(layout, index, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
  *
  * Tk_DistanceToTextLayout --
  *
- *	Computes the distance in pixels from the given point to the
- *	given text layout.  Non-displaying space characters that occur
- *	at the end of individual lines in the text layout are ignored
- *	for hit detection purposes.
+ *	Computes the distance in pixels from the given point to the given text
+ *	layout. Non-displaying space characters that occur at the end of
+ *	individual lines in the text layout are ignored for hit detection
+ *	purposes.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the point (x, y) is inside the text
- *	layout.  If the point isn't inside the text layout then the
- *	return value is the distance in pixels from the point to the
- *	text item.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the point (x, y) is inside the text layout.
+ *	If the point isn't inside the text layout then the return value is the
+ *	distance in pixels from the point to the text item.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2553,12 +2674,12 @@ Tk_CharBbox(layout, index, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(layout, x, y)
-    Tk_TextLayout layout;	/* Layout information, from a previous call
+Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(
+    Tk_TextLayout layout,	/* Layout information, from a previous call
 				 * to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of point to check, with
-				 * respect to the upper-left corner of the
-				 * text layout (in pixels). */
+    int x, int y)		/* Coordinates of point to check, with respect
+				 * to the upper-left corner of the text layout
+				 * (in pixels). */
 {
     int i, x1, x2, y1, y2, xDiff, yDiff, dist, minDist, ascent, descent;
     LayoutChunk *chunkPtr;
@@ -2569,14 +2690,14 @@ Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(layout, x, y)
     fontPtr = (TkFont *) layoutPtr->tkfont;
     ascent = fontPtr->fm.ascent;
     descent = fontPtr->fm.descent;
-    
+
     minDist = 0;
     chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks;
     for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) {
 	if (chunkPtr->start[0] == '\n') {
 	    /*
-	     * Newline characters are not counted when computing distance
-	     * (but tab characters would still be considered).
+	     * Newline characters are not counted when computing distance (but
+	     * tab characters would still be considered).
 	     */
 
 	    chunkPtr++;
@@ -2620,15 +2741,15 @@ Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(layout, x, y)
  *
  * Tk_IntersectTextLayout --
  *
- *	Determines whether a text layout lies entirely inside,
- *	entirely outside, or overlaps a given rectangle.  Non-displaying
- *	space characters that occur at the end of individual lines in
- *	the text layout are ignored for intersection calculations.
+ *	Determines whether a text layout lies entirely inside, entirely
+ *	outside, or overlaps a given rectangle. Non-displaying space
+ *	characters that occur at the end of individual lines in the text
+ *	layout are ignored for intersection calculations.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is -1 if the text layout is entirely outside of
- *	the rectangle, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside
- *	of the rectangle.
+ *	The return value is -1 if the text layout is entirely outside of the
+ *	rectangle, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside of the
+ *	rectangle.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2637,15 +2758,15 @@ Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(layout, x, y)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_IntersectTextLayout(layout, x, y, width, height)
-    Tk_TextLayout layout;	/* Layout information, from a previous call
-				 * to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
-    int x, y;			/* Upper-left hand corner, in pixels, of
+Tk_IntersectTextLayout(
+    Tk_TextLayout layout,	/* Layout information, from a previous call to
+				 * Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper-left hand corner, in pixels, of
 				 * rectangular area to compare with text
-				 * layout.  Coordinates are with respect to
-				 * the upper-left hand corner of the text
-				 * layout itself. */
-    int width, height;		/* The width and height of the above
+				 * layout. Coordinates are with respect to the
+				 * upper-left hand corner of the text layout
+				 * itself. */
+    int width, int height)	/* The width and height of the above
 				 * rectangular area, in pixels. */
 {
     int result, i, x1, y1, x2, y2;
@@ -2656,19 +2777,19 @@ Tk_IntersectTextLayout(layout, x, y, width, height)
 
     /*
      * Scan the chunks one at a time, seeing whether each is entirely in,
-     * entirely out, or overlapping the rectangle.  If an overlap is
-     * detected, return immediately; otherwise wait until all chunks have
-     * been processed and see if they were all inside or all outside.
+     * entirely out, or overlapping the rectangle. If an overlap is detected,
+     * return immediately; otherwise wait until all chunks have been processed
+     * and see if they were all inside or all outside.
      */
-    
+
     layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout;
     chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks;
     fontPtr = (TkFont *) layoutPtr->tkfont;
 
-    left    = x;
-    top	    = y;
-    right   = x + width;
-    bottom  = y + height;
+    left = x;
+    top = y;
+    right = x + width;
+    bottom = y + height;
 
     result = 0;
     for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) {
@@ -2711,34 +2832,32 @@ Tk_IntersectTextLayout(layout, x, y, width, height)
  *
  * Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript --
  *
- *	Outputs the contents of a text layout in Postscript format.
- *	The set of lines in the text layout will be rendered by the user
- *	supplied Postscript function.  The function should be of the form:
+ *	Outputs the contents of a text layout in Postscript format. The set of
+ *	lines in the text layout will be rendered by the user supplied
+ *	Postscript function. The function should be of the form:
  *
- *	    justify x y string  function  --
+ *	    justify x y string function --
  *
  *	Justify is -1, 0, or 1, depending on whether the following string
- *	should be left, center, or right justified, x and y is the
- *	location for the origin of the string, string is the sequence
- *	of characters to be printed, and function is the name of the
- *	caller-provided function; the function should leave nothing
- *	on the stack.
- *
- *	The meaning of the origin of the string (x and y) depends on
- *	the justification.  For left justification, x is where the
- *	left edge of the string should appear.  For center justification,
- *	x is where the center of the string should appear.  And for right
- *	justification, x is where the right edge of the string should
- *	appear.  This behavior is necessary because, for example, right
- *	justified text on the screen is justified with screen metrics.
- *	The same string needs to be justified with printer metrics on
- *	the printer to appear in the correct place with respect to other
- *	similarly justified strings.  In all circumstances, y is the
- *	location of the baseline for the string.
+ *	should be left, center, or right justified, x and y is the location
+ *	for the origin of the string, string is the sequence of characters to
+ *	be printed, and function is the name of the caller-provided function;
+ *	the function should leave nothing on the stack.
+ *
+ *	The meaning of the origin of the string (x and y) depends on the
+ *	justification. For left justification, x is where the left edge of the
+ *	string should appear. For center justification, x is where the center
+ *	of the string should appear. And for right justification, x is where
+ *	the right edge of the string should appear. This behavior is necessary
+ *	because, for example, right justified text on the screen is justified
+ *	with screen metrics. The same string needs to be justified with
+ *	printer metrics on the printer to appear in the correct place with
+ *	respect to other similarly justified strings. In all circumstances, y
+ *	is the location of the baseline for the string.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The interp's result is modified to hold the Postscript code that
- *	will render the text layout.
+ *	The interp's result is modified to hold the Postscript code that will
+ *	render the text layout.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2747,20 +2866,17 @@ Tk_IntersectTextLayout(layout, x, y, width, height)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(interp, layout)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Filled with Postscript code. */
-    Tk_TextLayout layout;	/* The layout to be rendered. */
+Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Filled with Postscript code. */
+    Tk_TextLayout layout)	/* The layout to be rendered. */
 {
 #define MAXUSE 128
-    char buf[MAXUSE+30];
+    char buf[MAXUSE+30], uindex[5] = "\0\0\0\0", one_char[5];
     LayoutChunk *chunkPtr;
-    int i, j, used, c, baseline;
+    int i, j, used, c, baseline, charsize;
     Tcl_UniChar ch;
-    CONST char *p, *last_p,*glyphname;
+    const char *p, *last_p, *glyphname;
     TextLayout *layoutPtr;
-    char uindex[5]="\0\0\0\0";
-    char one_char[5];
-    int charsize;
     int bytecount=0;
 
     layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout;
@@ -2787,23 +2903,24 @@ Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(interp, layout)
 	    p = chunkPtr->start;
 	    for (j = 0; j < chunkPtr->numDisplayChars; j++) {
 		/*
-		 * INTL: For now we just treat the characters as binary
-		 * data and display the lower byte.  Eventually this should
-		 * be revised to handle international postscript fonts.
+		 * INTL: For now we just treat the characters as binary data
+		 * and display the lower byte. Eventually this should be
+		 * revised to handle international postscript fonts.
 		 */
-		last_p=p;
-		p +=(charsize= Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p,&ch));
-		Tcl_UtfToExternal(interp,NULL,last_p,charsize,0,NULL,one_char,4,
-			NULL,&bytecount,NULL); 
-                if (bytecount == 1) {
+
+		last_p = p;
+		p += (charsize = Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p,&ch));
+		Tcl_UtfToExternal(interp, NULL, last_p, charsize, 0, NULL,
+			one_char, 4, NULL, &bytecount, NULL);
+		if (bytecount == 1) {
 		    c = UCHAR(one_char[0]);
 		    /* c = UCHAR( ch & 0xFF) */;
 		    if ((c == '(') || (c == ')') || (c == '\\') || (c < 0x20)
 			    || (c >= UCHAR(0x7f))) {
 			/*
-			 * Tricky point:  the "03" is necessary in the sprintf
+			 * Tricky point: the "03" is necessary in the sprintf
 			 * below, so that a full three digits of octal are
-			 * always generated.  Without the "03", a number
+			 * always generated. Without the "03", a number
 			 * following this sequence could be interpreted by
 			 * Postscript as part of this sequence.
 			 */
@@ -2814,36 +2931,42 @@ Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(interp, layout)
 			buf[used++] = c;
 		    }
 		} else {
-		    /* This character doesn't belong to system character set.
-		     * So, we must use full glyph name */
-		    sprintf(uindex,"%04X",ch); /* endianness? */
-		    if ((glyphname = Tcl_GetVar2( interp , "::tk::psglyphs",uindex,0))) {
-			if (used > 0 && buf [used-1] == '(') 
+		    /*
+		     * This character doesn't belong to system character set.
+		     * So, we must use full glyph name.
+		     */
+
+		    sprintf(uindex, "%04X", ch);	/* endianness? */
+		    glyphname = Tcl_GetVar2(interp,"::tk::psglyphs",uindex,0);
+		    if (glyphname) {
+			if (used > 0 && buf [used-1] == '(') {
 			    --used;
-			else
+			} else {
 			    buf[used++] = ')';
+			}
 			buf[used++] = '/';
-			while( (*glyphname) && (used < (MAXUSE+27))) 
+			while ((*glyphname) && (used < (MAXUSE+27))) {
 			    buf[used++] = *glyphname++ ;
+			}
 			buf[used++] = '(';
 		    }
-		    
+
 		}
 		if (used >= MAXUSE) {
 		    buf[used] = '\0';
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL);
 		    used = 0;
 		}
 	    }
 	}
 	if (used >= MAXUSE) {
 	    /*
-	     * If there are a whole bunch of returns or tabs in a row,
-	     * then buf[] could get filled up.
+	     * If there are a whole bunch of returns or tabs in a row, then
+	     * buf[] could get filled up.
 	     */
-	     
+
 	    buf[used] = '\0';
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL);
 	    used = 0;
 	}
 	chunkPtr++;
@@ -2852,7 +2975,7 @@ Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(interp, layout)
     buf[used++] = ']';
     buf[used++] = '\n';
     buf[used] = '\0';
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -2864,33 +2987,32 @@ Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(interp, layout)
  *	initialized font attributes structure.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If TCL_ERROR is returned, an
- *	error message will be left in interp's result object (if non-NULL).
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If TCL_ERROR is returned, an error
+ *	message will be left in interp's result object.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The fields of the font attributes structure get filled in with
- *	information from argc/argv.  If an error occurs while parsing,
- *	the font attributes structure will contain all modifications
- *	specified in the command line options up to the point of the
- *	error.
+ *	information from argc/argv. If an error occurs while parsing, the font
+ *	attributes structure will contain all modifications specified in the
+ *	command line options up to the point of the error.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error return, or NULL. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For display on which font will be used. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of elements in argv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Command line options. */
-    TkFontAttributes *faPtr;	/* Font attributes structure whose fields
-				 * are to be modified.  Structure must already
-				 * be properly initialized. */
+ConfigAttributesObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error return. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* For display on which font will be used. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of elements in argv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[],	/* Command line options. */
+    TkFontAttributes *faPtr)	/* Font attributes structure whose fields are
+				 * to be modified. Structure must already be
+				 * properly initialized. */
 {
     int i, n, index;
     Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, *valuePtr;
     char *value;
-    
+
     for (i = 0; i < objc; i += 2) {
 	optionPtr = objv[i];
 	valuePtr = objv[i + 1];
@@ -2901,63 +3023,55 @@ ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr)
 	}
 	if ((i+2 >= objc) && (objc & 1)) {
 	    /*
-	     * This test occurs after Tcl_GetIndexFromObj() so that
-	     * "font create xyz -xyz" will return the error message
-	     * that "-xyz" is a bad option, rather than that the value
-	     * for "-xyz" is missing.
+	     * This test occurs after Tcl_GetIndexFromObj() so that "font
+	     * create xyz -xyz" will return the error message that "-xyz" is a
+	     * bad option, rather than that the value for "-xyz" is missing.
 	     */
 
 	    if (interp != NULL) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"",
-			Tcl_GetString(optionPtr), "\" option missing",
-			(char *) NULL);
+			Tcl_GetString(optionPtr), "\" option missing", NULL);
 	    }
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	switch (index) {
-	    case FONT_FAMILY: {
-		value = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
-		faPtr->family = Tk_GetUid(value);
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case FONT_SIZE: {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		faPtr->size = n;
-		break;
+	case FONT_FAMILY:
+	    value = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
+	    faPtr->family = Tk_GetUid(value);
+	    break;
+	case FONT_SIZE:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case FONT_WEIGHT: {
-		n = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, weightMap, valuePtr);
-		if (n == TK_FW_UNKNOWN) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		faPtr->weight = n;
-		break;
+	    faPtr->size = n;
+	    break;
+	case FONT_WEIGHT:
+	    n = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, weightMap, valuePtr);
+	    if (n == TK_FW_UNKNOWN) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case FONT_SLANT: {
-		n = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, slantMap, valuePtr);
-		if (n == TK_FS_UNKNOWN) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		faPtr->slant = n;
-		break;
+	    faPtr->weight = n;
+	    break;
+	case FONT_SLANT:
+	    n = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, slantMap, valuePtr);
+	    if (n == TK_FS_UNKNOWN) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case FONT_UNDERLINE: {
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		faPtr->underline = n;
-		break;
+	    faPtr->slant = n;
+	    break;
+	case FONT_UNDERLINE:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case FONT_OVERSTRIKE: {
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		faPtr->overstrike = n;
-		break;
+	    faPtr->underline = n;
+	    break;
+	case FONT_OVERSTRIKE:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
+	    faPtr->overstrike = n;
+	    break;
 	}
     }
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -2971,14 +3085,13 @@ ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr)
  *	Return information about the font attributes as a Tcl list.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is TCL_OK if the objPtr was non-NULL and
- *	specified a valid font attribute, TCL_ERROR otherwise.  If TCL_OK
- *	is returned, the interp's result object is modified to hold a
- *	description of either the current value of a single option, or a
- *	list of all options and their current values for the given font
- *	attributes.  If TCL_ERROR is returned, the interp's result is
- *	set to an error message describing that the objPtr did not refer
- *	to a valid option.
+ *	The return value is TCL_OK if the objPtr was non-NULL and specified a
+ *	valid font attribute, TCL_ERROR otherwise. If TCL_OK is returned, the
+ *	interp's result object is modified to hold a description of either the
+ *	current value of a single option, or a list of all options and their
+ *	current values for the given font attributes. If TCL_ERROR is
+ *	returned, the interp's result is set to an error message describing
+ *	that the objPtr did not refer to a valid option.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2987,16 +3100,16 @@ ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		  	/* Interp to hold result. */
-    CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr;	/* The font attributes to inspect. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		  	/* If non-NULL, indicates the single
-					 * option whose value is to be
-					 * returned. Otherwise information is
-					 * returned for all options. */
+GetAttributeInfoObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp to hold result. */
+    const TkFontAttributes *faPtr,
+				/* The font attributes to inspect. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* If non-NULL, indicates the single option
+				 * whose value is to be returned. Otherwise
+				 * information is returned for all options. */
 {
     int i, index, start, end;
-    CONST char *str;
+    const char *str;
     Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, *valuePtr, *resultPtr;
 
     resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
@@ -3015,32 +3128,32 @@ GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr)
     valuePtr = NULL;
     for (i = start; i < end; i++) {
 	switch (i) {
-	    case FONT_FAMILY:
-		str = faPtr->family;
-		valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, ((str == NULL) ? 0 : -1));
-		break;
+	case FONT_FAMILY:
+	    str = faPtr->family;
+	    valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, ((str == NULL) ? 0 : -1));
+	    break;
 
-	    case FONT_SIZE:
-		valuePtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(faPtr->size);
-		break;
+	case FONT_SIZE:
+	    valuePtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(faPtr->size);
+	    break;
 
-	    case FONT_WEIGHT:
-		str = TkFindStateString(weightMap, faPtr->weight);
-		valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, -1);
-		break;
-	
-	    case FONT_SLANT:
-		str = TkFindStateString(slantMap, faPtr->slant);
-		valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, -1);
-		break;
+	case FONT_WEIGHT:
+	    str = TkFindStateString(weightMap, faPtr->weight);
+	    valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, -1);
+	    break;
 
-	    case FONT_UNDERLINE:
-		valuePtr = Tcl_NewBooleanObj(faPtr->underline);
-		break;
+	case FONT_SLANT:
+	    str = TkFindStateString(slantMap, faPtr->slant);
+	    valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, -1);
+	    break;
 
-	    case FONT_OVERSTRIKE:
-		valuePtr = Tcl_NewBooleanObj(faPtr->overstrike);
-		break;
+	case FONT_UNDERLINE:
+	    valuePtr = Tcl_NewBooleanObj(faPtr->underline);
+	    break;
+
+	case FONT_OVERSTRIKE:
+	    valuePtr = Tcl_NewBooleanObj(faPtr->overstrike);
+	    break;
 	}
 	if (objPtr != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, valuePtr);
@@ -3058,8 +3171,8 @@ GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr)
  *
  * ParseFontNameObj --
  *
- *	Converts a object into a set of font attributes that can be used
- *	to construct a font.
+ *	Converts a object into a set of font attributes that can be used to
+ *	construct a font.
  *
  *	The string rep of the object can be one of the following forms:
  *		XLFD (see X documentation)
@@ -3067,10 +3180,10 @@ GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr)
  *		"-option value [-option value ...]"
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is TCL_ERROR if the object was syntactically
- *	invalid.  In that case an error message is left in interp's
- *	result object.  Otherwise, fills the font attribute buffer with
- *	the values parsed from the string and returns TCL_OK;
+ *	The return value is TCL_ERROR if the object was syntactically invalid.
+ *	In that case an error message is left in interp's result object.
+ *	Otherwise, fills the font attribute buffer with the values parsed from
+ *	the string and returns TCL_OK;
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3079,13 +3192,12 @@ GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error return, or NULL if no
-				 * error messages are to be generated. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For display on which font is used. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Parseable font description object. */
-    TkFontAttributes *faPtr;	/* Filled with attributes parsed from font
-				 * name.  Any attributes that were not
+ParseFontNameObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error return. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* For display on which font is used. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* Parseable font description object. */
+    TkFontAttributes *faPtr)	/* Filled with attributes parsed from font
+				 * name. Any attributes that were not
 				 * specified in font name are filled with
 				 * default values. */
 {
@@ -3093,7 +3205,7 @@ ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
     int objc, result, i, n;
     Tcl_Obj **objv;
     char *string;
-    
+
     TkInitFontAttributes(faPtr);
 
     string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
@@ -3102,7 +3214,7 @@ ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
 	 * This may be an XLFD or an "-option value" string.
 	 *
 	 * If the string begins with "-*" or a "-foundry-family-*" pattern,
-	 * then consider it an XLFD.  
+	 * then consider it an XLFD.
 	 */
 
 	if (string[1] == '*') {
@@ -3120,13 +3232,13 @@ ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
 
 	return ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr);
     }
-    
+
     if (*string == '*') {
 	/*
-	 * This is appears to be an XLFD.  Under Unix, all valid XLFDs were
-	 * already handled by TkpGetNativeFont.  If we are here, either we
-	 * have something that initially looks like an XLFD but isn't or we
-	 * have encountered an XLFD on Windows or Mac.
+	 * This is appears to be an XLFD. Under Unix, all valid XLFDs were
+	 * already handled by TkpGetNativeFont. If we are here, either we have
+	 * something that initially looks like an XLFD but isn't or we have
+	 * encountered an XLFD on Windows or Mac.
 	 */
 
     xlfd:
@@ -3134,18 +3246,32 @@ ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
 	if (result == TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
+
+	/*
+	 * If the string failed to parse but was considered to be a XLFD
+	 * then it may be a "-option value" string with a hyphenated family
+	 * name as per bug 2791352
+	 */
+
+	if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	if (ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr) == TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Wasn't an XLFD or "-option value" string.  Try it as a
-     * "font size style" list.
+     * Wasn't an XLFD or "-option value" string. Try it as a "font size style"
+     * list.
      */
 
     if ((Tcl_ListObjGetElements(NULL, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
 	    || (objc < 1)) {
 	if (interp != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "font \"", string, "\" doesn't exist",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    NULL);
 	}
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -3193,7 +3319,7 @@ ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
 
 	if (interp != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown font style \"",
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), "\"", NULL);
 	}
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -3205,9 +3331,8 @@ ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
  *
  * NewChunk --
  *
- *	Helper function for Tk_ComputeTextLayout().  Encapsulates a
- *	measured set of characters in a chunk that can be quickly
- *	drawn.
+ *	Helper function for Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). Encapsulates a measured
+ *	set of characters in a chunk that can be quickly drawn.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A pointer to the new chunk in the text layout.
@@ -3215,28 +3340,28 @@ ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
  * Side effects:
  *	The text layout is reallocated to hold more chunks as necessary.
  *
- *	Currently, Tk_ComputeTextLayout() stores contiguous ranges of
- *	"normal" characters in a chunk, along with individual tab
- *	and newline chars in their own chunks.  All characters in the
- *	text layout are accounted for.
+ *	Currently, Tk_ComputeTextLayout() stores contiguous ranges of "normal"
+ *	characters in a chunk, along with individual tab and newline chars in
+ *	their own chunks. All characters in the text layout are accounted for.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static LayoutChunk *
-NewChunk(layoutPtrPtr, maxPtr, start, numBytes, curX, newX, y)
-    TextLayout **layoutPtrPtr;
-    int *maxPtr;
-    CONST char *start;
-    int numBytes;
-    int curX;
-    int newX;
-    int y;
+NewChunk(
+    TextLayout **layoutPtrPtr,
+    int *maxPtr,
+    const char *start,
+    int numBytes,
+    int curX,
+    int newX,
+    int y)
 {
     TextLayout *layoutPtr;
     LayoutChunk *chunkPtr;
     int maxChunks, numChars;
     size_t s;
-    
+
     layoutPtr = *layoutPtrPtr;
     maxChunks = *maxPtr;
     if (layoutPtr->numChunks == maxChunks) {
@@ -3271,8 +3396,8 @@ NewChunk(layoutPtrPtr, maxPtr, start, numBytes, curX, newX, y)
  *
  * Results:
  *	Return value is TCL_ERROR if string was not a fully specified XLFD.
- *	Otherwise, fills font attribute buffer with the values parsed
- *	from the XLFD and returns TCL_OK.  
+ *	Otherwise, fills font attribute buffer with the values parsed from the
+ *	XLFD and returns TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3281,25 +3406,25 @@ NewChunk(layoutPtrPtr, maxPtr, start, numBytes, curX, newX, y)
  */
 
 int
-TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
-    CONST char *string;		/* Parseable font description string. */
-    TkFontAttributes *faPtr;	/* Filled with attributes parsed from font
-				 * name.  Any attributes that were not
+TkFontParseXLFD(
+    const char *string,		/* Parseable font description string. */
+    TkFontAttributes *faPtr,	/* Filled with attributes parsed from font
+				 * name. Any attributes that were not
 				 * specified in font name are filled with
 				 * default values. */
-    TkXLFDAttributes *xaPtr;	/* Filled with X-specific attributes parsed
-				 * from font name.  Any attributes that were
+    TkXLFDAttributes *xaPtr)	/* Filled with X-specific attributes parsed
+				 * from font name. Any attributes that were
 				 * not specified in font name are filled with
-				 * default values.  May be NULL if such
+				 * default values. May be NULL if such
 				 * information is not desired. */
 {
     char *src;
-    CONST char *str;
+    const char *str;
     int i, j;
     char *field[XLFD_NUMFIELDS + 2];
     Tcl_DString ds;
     TkXLFDAttributes xa;
-    
+
     if (xaPtr == NULL) {
 	xaPtr = &xa;
     }
@@ -3338,13 +3463,13 @@ TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
 
     /*
      * An XLFD of the form -adobe-times-medium-r-*-12-*-* is pretty common,
-     * but it is (strictly) malformed, because the first * is eliding both
-     * the Setwidth and the Addstyle fields.  If the Addstyle field is a
-     * number, then assume the above incorrect form was used and shift all
-     * the rest of the fields right by one, so the number gets interpreted
-     * as a pixelsize.  This fix is so that we don't get a million reports
-     * that "it works under X (as a native font name), but gives a syntax
-     * error under Windows (as a parsed set of attributes)".
+     * but it is (strictly) malformed, because the first * is eliding both the
+     * Setwidth and the Addstyle fields. If the Addstyle field is a number,
+     * then assume the above incorrect form was used and shift all the rest of
+     * the fields right by one, so the number gets interpreted as a pixelsize.
+     * This fix is so that we don't get a million reports that "it works under
+     * X (as a native font name), but gives a syntax error under Windows (as a
+     * parsed set of attributes)".
      */
 
     if ((i > XLFD_ADD_STYLE) && (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_ADD_STYLE]))) {
@@ -3394,8 +3519,8 @@ TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
     /* XLFD_ADD_STYLE ignored. */
 
     /*
-     * Pointsize in tenths of a point, but treat it as tenths of a pixel
-     * for historical compatibility.
+     * Pointsize in tenths of a point, but treat it as tenths of a pixel for
+     * historical compatibility.
      */
 
     faPtr->size = 12;
@@ -3422,7 +3547,7 @@ TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Pixel height of font.  If specified, overrides pointsize.
+     * Pixel height of font. If specified, overrides pointsize.
      */
 
     if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_PIXEL_SIZE])) {
@@ -3432,9 +3557,9 @@ TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
 	     *
 	     *	    [ N1 N2 N3 N4 ]
 	     *
-	     * where N1 is the pixel size, and where N2, N3, and N4 
-	     * are some additional numbers that I don't know
-	     * the purpose of, so I ignore them.
+	     * where N1 is the pixel size, and where N2, N3, and N4 are some
+	     * additional numbers that I don't know the purpose of, so I
+	     * ignore them.
 	     */
 
 	    faPtr->size = atoi(field[XLFD_PIXEL_SIZE] + 1);
@@ -3468,12 +3593,12 @@ TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
  *
  * FieldSpecified --
  *
- *	Helper function for TkParseXLFD().  Determines if a field in the
- *	XLFD was set to a non-null, non-don't-care value.
+ *	Helper function for TkParseXLFD(). Determines if a field in the XLFD
+ *	was set to a non-null, non-don't-care value.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the field in the XLFD was not set and
- *	should be ignored, non-zero otherwise.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the field in the XLFD was not set and should
+ *	be ignored, non-zero otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3482,11 +3607,12 @@ TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-FieldSpecified(field)
-    CONST char *field;	/* The field of the XLFD to check.  Strictly
-			 * speaking, only when the string is "*" does it mean
-			 * don't-care.  However, an unspecified or question
-			 * mark is also interpreted as don't-care. */
+FieldSpecified(
+    const char *field)		/* The field of the XLFD to check. Strictly
+				 * speaking, only when the string is "*" does
+				 * it mean don't-care. However, an unspecified
+				 * or question mark is also interpreted as
+				 * don't-care. */
 {
     char ch;
 
@@ -3513,11 +3639,11 @@ FieldSpecified(field)
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 int
-TkFontGetPixels(tkwin, size)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For point->pixel conversion factor. */
-    int size;			/* Font size. */
+TkFontGetPixels(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* For point->pixel conversion factor. */
+    int size)			/* Font size. */
 {
     double d;
 
@@ -3547,11 +3673,11 @@ TkFontGetPixels(tkwin, size)
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 int
-TkFontGetPoints(tkwin, size)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For pixel->point conversion factor. */
-    int size;			/* Font size. */
+TkFontGetPoints(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* For pixel->point conversion factor. */
+    int size)			/* Font size. */
 {
     double d;
 
@@ -3570,24 +3696,24 @@ TkFontGetPoints(tkwin, size)
  *
  * TkFontGetAliasList --
  *
- *	Given a font name, find the list of all aliases for that font
- *	name.  One of the names in this list will probably be the name
- *	that this platform expects when asking for the font.
+ *	Given a font name, find the list of all aliases for that font name.
+ *	One of the names in this list will probably be the name that this
+ *	platform expects when asking for the font.
  *
  * Results:
- *	As above.  The return value is NULL if the font name has no 
- *	aliases.
+
+ *	As above. The return value is NULL if the font name has no aliases.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-	
+
 char **
-TkFontGetAliasList(faceName)
-    CONST char *faceName;	/* Font name to test for aliases. */
-{   
+TkFontGetAliasList(
+    const char *faceName)	/* Font name to test for aliases. */
+{
     int i, j;
 
     for (i = 0; fontAliases[i] != NULL; i++) {
@@ -3605,9 +3731,8 @@ TkFontGetAliasList(faceName)
  *
  * TkFontGetFallbacks --
  *
- *	Get the list of font fallbacks that the platform-specific code
- *	can use to try to find the closest matching font the name 
- *	requested.
+ *	Get the list of font fallbacks that the platform-specific code can use
+ *	to try to find the closest matching font the name requested.
  *
  * Results:
  *	As above.
@@ -3617,9 +3742,9 @@ TkFontGetAliasList(faceName)
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-	
+
 char ***
-TkFontGetFallbacks()
+TkFontGetFallbacks(void)
 {
     return fontFallbacks;
 }
@@ -3642,9 +3767,9 @@ TkFontGetFallbacks()
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-	
+
 char **
-TkFontGetGlobalClass()
+TkFontGetGlobalClass(void)
 {
     return globalFontClass;
 }
@@ -3654,8 +3779,8 @@ TkFontGetGlobalClass()
  *
  * TkFontGetSymbolClass --
  *
- *	Get the list of fonts that are symbolic; used if the operating 
- *	system cannot apriori identify symbolic fonts on its own.
+ *	Get the list of fonts that are symbolic; used if the operating system
+ *	cannot apriori identify symbolic fonts on its own.
  *
  * Results:
  *	As above.
@@ -3665,9 +3790,9 @@ TkFontGetGlobalClass()
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-	
+
 char **
-TkFontGetSymbolClass()
+TkFontGetSymbolClass(void)
 {
     return symbolClass;
 }
@@ -3677,13 +3802,12 @@ TkFontGetSymbolClass()
  *
  * TkDebugFont --
  *
- *	This procedure returns debugging information about a font.
+ *	This function returns debugging information about a font.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a list with one sublist for each TkFont
- *	corresponding to "name".  Each sublist has two elements that
- *	contain the resourceRefCount and objRefCount fields from the
- *	TkFont structure.
+ *	corresponding to "name". Each sublist has two elements that contain
+ *	the resourceRefCount and objRefCount fields from the TkFont structure.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3692,10 +3816,10 @@ TkFontGetSymbolClass()
  */
 
 Tcl_Obj *
-TkDebugFont(tkwin, name)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window in which the font will be
-				 * used (not currently used). */
-    char *name;			/* Name of the desired color. */
+TkDebugFont(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The window in which the font will be used
+				 * (not currently used). */
+    char *name)			/* Name of the desired color. */
 {
     TkFont *fontPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;
@@ -3707,14 +3831,14 @@ TkDebugFont(tkwin, name)
     if (hashPtr != NULL) {
 	fontPtr = (TkFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr);
 	if (fontPtr == NULL) {
-	    panic("TkDebugFont found empty hash table entry");
+	    Tcl_Panic("TkDebugFont found empty hash table entry");
 	}
 	for ( ; (fontPtr != NULL); fontPtr = fontPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
 		    Tcl_NewIntObj(fontPtr->resourceRefCount));
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
-		    Tcl_NewIntObj(fontPtr->objRefCount)); 
+		    Tcl_NewIntObj(fontPtr->objRefCount));
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, objPtr);
 	}
     }
@@ -3726,13 +3850,13 @@ TkDebugFont(tkwin, name)
  *
  * TkFontGetFirstTextLayout --
  *
- *	This procedure returns the first chunk of a Tk_TextLayout,
- *	i.e. until the first font change on the first line (or the
- *	whole first line if there is no such font change).
+ *	This function returns the first chunk of a Tk_TextLayout, i.e. until
+ *	the first font change on the first line (or the whole first line if
+ *	there is no such font change).
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the byte length of the chunk, the chunk
- *	itself is copied into dst and its Tk_Font into font.
+ *	The return value is the byte length of the chunk, the chunk itself is
+ *	copied into dst and its Tk_Font into font.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3742,21 +3866,20 @@ TkDebugFont(tkwin, name)
 
 int
 TkFontGetFirstTextLayout(
-    Tk_TextLayout layout,	/* Layout information, from a previous call
-				 * to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
-    Tk_Font * font,
-    char    * dst)
+    Tk_TextLayout layout,	/* Layout information, from a previous call to
+				 * Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
+    Tk_Font *font,
+    char *dst)
 {
-    TextLayout  *layoutPtr;
+    TextLayout *layoutPtr;
     LayoutChunk *chunkPtr;
     int numBytesInChunk;
 
     layoutPtr = (TextLayout *)layout;
-    if ((layoutPtr==NULL)
-            || (layoutPtr->numChunks==0)
-            || (layoutPtr->chunks->numDisplayChars <= 0)) {
-        dst[0] = '\0';
-        return 0;
+    if ((layoutPtr==NULL) || (layoutPtr->numChunks==0)
+	    || (layoutPtr->chunks->numDisplayChars <= 0)) {
+	dst[0] = '\0';
+	return 0;
     }
     chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks;
     numBytesInChunk = chunkPtr->numBytes;
@@ -3764,3 +3887,11 @@ TkFontGetFirstTextLayout(
     *font = layoutPtr->tkfont;
     return numBytesInChunk;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkFont.h b/generic/tkFont.h
index 71c598c..ef6336c 100644
--- a/generic/tkFont.h
+++ b/generic/tkFont.h
@@ -1,40 +1,40 @@
 /*
  * tkFont.h --
  *
- *	Declarations for interfaces between the generic and platform-
- *	specific parts of the font package.  This information is not
- *	visible outside of the font package.
+ *	Declarations for interfaces between the generic and platform-specific
+ *	parts of the font package. This information is not visible outside of
+ *	the font package.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKFONT
 #define _TKFONT
 
 #ifdef BUILD_tk
-# undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
-# define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
+#undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
+#define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
 #endif
 
 /*
- * The following structure keeps track of the attributes of a font.  It can
- * be used to keep track of either the desired attributes or the actual
+ * The following structure keeps track of the attributes of a font. It can be
+ * used to keep track of either the desired attributes or the actual
  * attributes gotten when the font was instantiated.
  */
 
-typedef struct TkFontAttributes {
-    Tk_Uid family;		/* Font family, or NULL to represent
-				 * plaform-specific default system font. */
+struct TkFontAttributes {
+    Tk_Uid family;		/* Font family, or NULL to represent plaform-
+				 * specific default system font. */
     int size;			/* Pointsize of font, 0 for default size, or
 				 * negative number meaning pixel size. */
     int weight;			/* Weight flag; see below for def'n. */
     int slant;			/* Slant flag; see below for def'n. */
     int underline;		/* Non-zero for underline font. */
     int overstrike;		/* Non-zero for overstrike font. */
-} TkFontAttributes;
+};
 
 /*
  * Possible values for the "weight" field in a TkFontAttributes structure.
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ typedef struct TkFontAttributes {
 #define TK_FW_NORMAL	0
 #define TK_FW_BOLD	1
 
-#define TK_FW_UNKNOWN	-1	/* Unknown weight.  This value is used for
+#define TK_FW_UNKNOWN	-1	/* Unknown weight. This value is used for
 				 * error checking and is never actually stored
 				 * in the weight field. */
 
@@ -53,21 +53,21 @@ typedef struct TkFontAttributes {
  * Possible values for the "slant" field in a TkFontAttributes structure.
  */
 
-#define TK_FS_ROMAN	0	
+#define TK_FS_ROMAN	0
 #define TK_FS_ITALIC	1
-#define TK_FS_OBLIQUE	2	/* This value is only used when parsing X
-				 * font names to determine the closest
-				 * match.  It is only stored in the
-				 * XLFDAttributes structure, never in the
-				 * slant field of the TkFontAttributes. */
+#define TK_FS_OBLIQUE	2	/* This value is only used when parsing X font
+				 * names to determine the closest match. It is
+				 * only stored in the XLFDAttributes
+				 * structure, never in the slant field of the
+				 * TkFontAttributes. */
 
-#define TK_FS_UNKNOWN	-1	/* Unknown slant.  This value is used for
-				 * error checking and is never actually stored
-				 * in the slant field. */
+#define TK_FS_UNKNOWN	-1	/* Unknown slant. This value is used for error
+				 * checking and is never actually stored in
+				 * the slant field. */
 
 /*
  * The following structure keeps track of the metrics for an instantiated
- * font.  The metrics are the physical properties of the font itself.
+ * font. The metrics are the physical properties of the font itself.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkFontMetrics {
@@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ typedef struct TkFontMetrics {
 
 /*
  * The following structure is used to keep track of the generic information
- * about a font.  Each platform-specific font is represented by a structure
- * with the following structure at its beginning, plus any platform-
- * specific stuff after that.
+ * about a font. Each platform-specific font is represented by a structure
+ * with the following structure at its beginning, plus any platform-specific
+ * stuff after that.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkFont {
@@ -92,14 +92,14 @@ typedef struct TkFont {
 
     int resourceRefCount;	/* Number of active uses of this font (each
 				 * active use corresponds to a call to
-				 * Tk_AllocFontFromTable or Tk_GetFont).
-				 * If this count is 0, then this TkFont
-				 * structure is no longer valid and it isn't
-				 * present in a hash table: it is being
-				 * kept around only because there are objects
-				 * referring to it.  The structure is freed
-				 * when resourceRefCount and objRefCount
-				 * are both 0. */
+				 * Tk_AllocFontFromTable or Tk_GetFont). If
+				 * this count is 0, then this TkFont structure
+				 * is no longer valid and it isn't present in
+				 * a hash table: it is being kept around only
+				 * because there are objects referring to it.
+				 * The structure is freed when
+				 * resourceRefCount and objRefCount are both
+				 * 0. */
     int objRefCount;		/* The number of Tcl objects that reference
 				 * this structure. */
     Tcl_HashEntry *cacheHashPtr;/* Entry in font cache for this structure,
@@ -110,9 +110,9 @@ typedef struct TkFont {
 				 * was not based on a named font. */
     Screen *screen;		/* The screen where this font is valid. */
     int tabWidth;		/* Width of tabs in this font (pixels). */
-    int	underlinePos;		/* Offset from baseline to origin of
-				 * underline bar (used for drawing underlines
-				 * on a non-underlined font). */
+    int	underlinePos;		/* Offset from baseline to origin of underline
+				 * bar (used for drawing underlines on a
+				 * non-underlined font). */
     int underlineHeight;	/* Height of underline bar (used for drawing
 				 * underlines on a non-underlined font). */
 
@@ -122,33 +122,33 @@ typedef struct TkFont {
      */
 
     Font fid;			/* For backwards compatibility with XGCValues
-				 * structures.  Remove when TkGCValues is
-				 * implemented.  */
+				 * structures. Remove when TkGCValues is
+				 * implemented. */
     TkFontAttributes fa;	/* Actual font attributes obtained when the
 				 * the font was created, as opposed to the
 				 * desired attributes passed in to
-				 * TkpGetFontFromAttributes().  The desired
+				 * TkpGetFontFromAttributes(). The desired
 				 * metrics can be determined from the string
 				 * that was used to create this font. */
     TkFontMetrics fm;		/* Font metrics determined when font was
 				 * created. */
     struct TkFont *nextPtr;	/* Points to the next TkFont structure with
-				 * the same name.  All fonts with the
-				 * same name (but different displays) are
-				 * chained together off a single entry in
-				 * a hash table. */
+				 * the same name. All fonts with the same name
+				 * (but different displays) are chained
+				 * together off a single entry in a hash
+				 * table. */
 } TkFont;
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used to return attributes when parsing an
- * XLFD.  The extra information is of interest to the Unix-specific code
- * when attempting to find the closest matching font.
+ * The following structure is used to return attributes when parsing an XLFD.
+ * The extra information is of interest to the Unix-specific code when
+ * attempting to find the closest matching font.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkXLFDAttributes {
     Tk_Uid foundry;		/* The foundry of the font. */
-    int slant;			/* The tristate value for the slant, which
-				 * is significant under X. */
+    int slant;			/* The tristate value for the slant, which is
+				 * significant under X. */
     int setwidth;		/* The proportionate width, see below for
 				 * definition. */
     Tk_Uid charset;		/* The actual charset string. */
@@ -163,8 +163,8 @@ typedef struct TkXLFDAttributes {
 #define TK_SW_NORMAL	0
 #define TK_SW_CONDENSE	1
 #define TK_SW_EXPAND	2
-#define TK_SW_UNKNOWN	3	/* Unknown setwidth.  This value may be
-				 * stored in the setwidth field. */
+#define TK_SW_UNKNOWN	3	/* Unknown setwidth. This value may be stored
+				 * in the setwidth field. */
 
 /*
  * The following defines specify the meaning of the fields in a fully
@@ -193,34 +193,34 @@ typedef struct TkXLFDAttributes {
 #define TkInitFontAttributes(fa)   memset((fa), 0, sizeof(TkFontAttributes));
 #define TkInitXLFDAttributes(xa)   memset((xa), 0, sizeof(TkXLFDAttributes));
 
-EXTERN int		TkFontParseXLFD _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *string,
-			    TkFontAttributes *faPtr, TkXLFDAttributes *xaPtr));
-EXTERN char **		TkFontGetAliasList _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *faceName));
-EXTERN char ***		TkFontGetFallbacks _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
-EXTERN int		TkFontGetPixels _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, 
-			    int size));
-EXTERN int		TkFontGetPoints _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, 
-			    int size));
-EXTERN char **		TkFontGetGlobalClass _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
-EXTERN char **		TkFontGetSymbolClass _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
-EXTERN int		TkFontGetFirstTextLayout _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    Tk_TextLayout layout, Tk_Font *font, char *dst));
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkFontParseXLFD(CONST char *string,
+			    TkFontAttributes *faPtr, TkXLFDAttributes *xaPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE char **	TkFontGetAliasList(CONST char *faceName);
+MODULE_SCOPE char ***	TkFontGetFallbacks(void);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkFontGetPixels(Tk_Window tkwin, int size);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkFontGetPoints(Tk_Window tkwin, int size);
+MODULE_SCOPE char **	TkFontGetGlobalClass(void);
+MODULE_SCOPE char **	TkFontGetSymbolClass(void);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkCreateNamedFont(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    CONST char *name, TkFontAttributes *faPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkDeleteNamedFont(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkFontGetFirstTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout layout,
+			    Tk_Font *font, char *dst);
 
 /*
- * Low-level API exported by platform-specific code to generic code. 
+ * Low-level API exported by platform-specific code to generic code.
  */
 
-EXTERN void		TkpDeleteFont _ANSI_ARGS_((TkFont *tkFontPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkpFontPkgInit _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr));
-EXTERN TkFont *		TkpGetFontFromAttributes _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkFont *tkFontPtr, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkpGetFontFamilies _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-EXTERN TkFont *		TkpGetNativeFont _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    CONST char *name));
-
-# undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
-# define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpDeleteFont(TkFont *tkFontPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpFontPkgInit(TkMainInfo *mainPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkFont *	TkpGetFontFromAttributes(TkFont *tkFontPtr,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpGetFontFamilies(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkFont *	TkpGetNativeFont(Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name);
+
+#undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
+#define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
 
 #endif	/* _TKFONT */
diff --git a/generic/tkFrame.c b/generic/tkFrame.c
index e7a6dbe..e38fe87 100644
--- a/generic/tkFrame.c
+++ b/generic/tkFrame.c
@@ -1,20 +1,18 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkFrame.c --
  *
  *	This module implements "frame", "labelframe" and "toplevel" widgets
- *      for the Tk toolkit.  Frames are windows with a background color
- *	and possibly a 3-D effect, but not much else in the way of
- *	attributes.
+ *	for the Tk toolkit. Frames are windows with a background color and
+ *	possibly a 3-D effect, but not much else in the way of attributes.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "default.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
@@ -31,29 +29,29 @@ enum FrameType {
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the frame.  NULL
-				 * means that the window has been destroyed
-				 * but the data structures haven't yet been
-				 * cleaned up. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget.  Used, among
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the frame. NULL means
+				 * that the window has been destroyed but the
+				 * data structures haven't yet been cleaned
+				 * up. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget. Used, among
 				 * other things, so that resources can be
 				 * freed even after tkwin has gone away. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with widget.  Used
-				 * to delete widget command. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with widget. Used to
+				 * delete widget command. */
     Tcl_Command widgetCmd;	/* Token for frame's widget command. */
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Table that defines configuration options
 				 * available for this widget. */
     char *className;		/* Class name for widget (from configuration
-				 * option).  Malloc-ed. */
+				 * option). Malloc-ed. */
     enum FrameType type;	/* Type of widget, such as TYPE_FRAME. */
-    char *screenName;		/* Screen on which widget is created.  Non-null
-				 * only for top-levels.  Malloc-ed, may be
+    char *screenName;		/* Screen on which widget is created. Non-null
+				 * only for top-levels. Malloc-ed, may be
 				 * NULL. */
     char *visualName;		/* Textual description of visual for window,
-				 * from -visual option.  Malloc-ed, may be
+				 * from -visual option. Malloc-ed, may be
 				 * NULL. */
     char *colormapName;		/* Textual description of colormap for window,
-				 * from -colormap option.  Malloc-ed, may be
+				 * from -colormap option. Malloc-ed, may be
 				 * NULL. */
     char *menuName;		/* Textual description of menu to use for
 				 * menubar. Malloc-ed, may be NULL. */
@@ -61,32 +59,32 @@ typedef struct {
 				 * allocated for this window, which must be
 				 * freed when the window is deleted. */
     Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Structure used to draw 3-D border and
-				 * background.  NULL means no background
-				 * or border. */
+				 * background. NULL means no background or
+				 * border. */
     int borderWidth;		/* Width of 3-D border (if any). */
     int relief;			/* 3-d effect: TK_RELIEF_RAISED etc. */
-    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw
-				 * around widget when it has the focus.
-				 * 0 means don't draw a highlight. */
+    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw around
+				 * widget when it has the focus. 0 means don't
+				 * draw a highlight. */
     XColor *highlightBgColorPtr;
-				/* Color for drawing traversal highlight
-				 * area when highlight is off. */
+				/* Color for drawing traversal highlight area
+				 * when highlight is off. */
     XColor *highlightColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing traversal highlight. */
-    int width;			/* Width to request for window.  <= 0 means
+    int width;			/* Width to request for window. <= 0 means
 				 * don't request any size. */
-    int height;			/* Height to request for window.  <= 0 means
+    int height;			/* Height to request for window. <= 0 means
 				 * don't request any size. */
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
-    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option;  not used in
-				 * the C code, but used by keyboard traversal
-				 * scripts.  Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
+    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
+				 * C code, but used by keyboard traversal
+				 * scripts. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
     int isContainer;		/* 1 means this window is a container, 0 means
 				 * that it isn't. */
     char *useThis;		/* If the window is embedded, this points to
 				 * the name of the window in which it is
-				 * embedded (malloc'ed).  For non-embedded
+				 * embedded (malloc'ed). For non-embedded
 				 * windows this is NULL. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flags;  see below for
+    int flags;			/* Various flags; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
     Tcl_Obj *padXPtr;		/* Value of -padx option: specifies how many
 				 * pixels of extra space to leave on left and
@@ -99,46 +97,41 @@ typedef struct {
 } Frame;
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each labelframe
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each labelframe widget
+ * managed by this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct {
     Frame frame;		/* A pointer to the generic frame structure.
 				 * This must be the first element of the
 				 * Labelframe. */
-
     /*
      * Labelframe specific configuration settings.
      */
-
     Tcl_Obj *textPtr;		/* Value of -text option: specifies text to
 				 * display in button. */
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Value of -font option: specifies font
-				 * to use for display text. */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Value of -font option: specifies font to
+				 * use for display text. */
     XColor *textColorPtr;	/* Value of -fg option: specifies foreground
 				 * color in normal mode. */
     int labelAnchor;		/* Value of -labelanchor option: specifies
 				 * where to place the label. */
-    Tk_Window labelWin;		/* Value of -labelwidget option: Window to
-                                 * use as label for the frame. */
-
+    Tk_Window labelWin;		/* Value of -labelwidget option: Window to use
+				 * as label for the frame. */
     /*
      * Labelframe specific fields for use with configuration settings above.
      */
-
     GC textGC;			/* GC for drawing text in normal mode. */
     Tk_TextLayout textLayout;	/* Stored text layout information. */
     XRectangle labelBox;	/* The label's actual size and position. */
     int labelReqWidth;		/* The label's requested width. */
     int labelReqHeight;		/* The label's requested height. */
     int labelTextX, labelTextY;	/* Position of the text to be drawn. */
-
 } Labelframe;
 
 /*
- * The following macros define how many extra pixels to leave
- * around a label's text.
+ * The following macros define how many extra pixels to leave around a label's
+ * text.
  */
 
 #define LABELSPACING 1
@@ -147,20 +140,19 @@ typedef struct {
 /*
  * Flag bits for frames:
  *
- * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler
- *				has already been queued to redraw
- *				this window.
- * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this widget currently
- *				has the input focus.
+ * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler has
+ *				already been queued to redraw this window.
+ * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this widget currently has the
+ *				input focus.
  */
 
 #define REDRAW_PENDING		1
 #define GOT_FOCUS		4
 
 /*
- * The following enum is used to define a type for the -labelanchor option
- * of the Labelframe widget.  These values are used as indices into the 
- * string table below.
+ * The following enum is used to define a type for the -labelanchor option of
+ * the Labelframe widget. These values are used as indices into the string
+ * table below.
  */
 
 enum labelanchor {
@@ -170,34 +162,36 @@ enum labelanchor {
     LABELANCHOR_W, LABELANCHOR_WN, LABELANCHOR_WS
 };
 
-static CONST char *CONST labelAnchorStrings[] = {
+static CONST char *labelAnchorStrings[] = {
     "e", "en", "es", "n", "ne", "nw", "s", "se", "sw", "w", "wn", "ws",
-    (char *) NULL
+    NULL
 };
 
 /*
- * Information used for parsing configuration options.  There are
- * one common table used by all and one table for each widget class.
+ * Information used for parsing configuration options. There are one common
+ * table used by all and one table for each widget class.
  */
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec commonOptSpec[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec commonOptSpec[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	DEF_FRAME_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, border),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, (ClientData) DEF_FRAME_BG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-colormap", "colormap", "Colormap",
 	DEF_FRAME_COLORMAP, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, colormapName),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    /*
+     * Having -container is useless in a labelframe since a container has
+     * no border. It should be deprecated.
+     */
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-container", "container", "Container",
-	DEF_FRAME_CONTAINER, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, isContainer),
-	0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_FRAME_CONTAINER, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, isContainer), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
 	DEF_FRAME_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, cursor),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height",
-	DEF_FRAME_HEIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, height),
-	0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_FRAME_HEIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, height), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
 	"HighlightBackground", DEF_FRAME_HIGHLIGHT_BG, -1,
 	Tk_Offset(Frame, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
@@ -220,82 +214,71 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec commonOptSpec[] = {
 	DEF_FRAME_VISUAL, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, visualName),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width",
-	DEF_FRAME_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, width),
-	0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0}
+	DEF_FRAME_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, width), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0}
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec frameOptSpec[] = {
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
+static const Tk_OptionSpec frameOptSpec[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_FRAME_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, borderWidth),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_FRAME_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "class", "Class",
-	DEF_FRAME_CLASS, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, className),
-	0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_FRAME_CLASS, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, className), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
-	DEF_FRAME_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, relief),
-	0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0, 0, (ClientData) commonOptSpec, 0}
+	DEF_FRAME_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, relief), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, 0, 0, (ClientData) commonOptSpec, 0}
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec toplevelOptSpec[] = {
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
+static const Tk_OptionSpec toplevelOptSpec[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_FRAME_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, borderWidth),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_FRAME_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "class", "Class",
-	DEF_TOPLEVEL_CLASS, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, className),
-	0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_TOPLEVEL_CLASS, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, className), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-menu", "menu", "Menu",
 	DEF_TOPLEVEL_MENU, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, menuName),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
-	DEF_FRAME_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, relief),
-	0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_FRAME_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, relief), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-screen", "screen", "Screen",
 	DEF_TOPLEVEL_SCREEN, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, screenName),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-use", "use", "Use",
 	DEF_TOPLEVEL_USE, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, useThis),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0, 0, (ClientData) commonOptSpec, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, 0, 0, (ClientData) commonOptSpec, 0}
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec labelframeOptSpec[] = {
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
+static const Tk_OptionSpec labelframeOptSpec[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
 	DEF_LABELFRAME_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, borderWidth),
-        0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "class", "Class",
-	DEF_LABELFRAME_CLASS, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, className),
 	0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "class", "Class",
+	DEF_LABELFRAME_CLASS, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, className), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	DEF_LABELFRAME_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
 	DEF_LABELFRAME_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, textColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-labelanchor", "labelAnchor", "LabelAnchor",
 	DEF_LABELFRAME_LABELANCHOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, labelAnchor),
-        0, (ClientData) labelAnchorStrings, 0},
+	0, (ClientData) labelAnchorStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-labelwidget", "labelWidget", "LabelWidget",
-        (char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, labelWin),
-        TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, labelWin), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
-	DEF_LABELFRAME_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, relief),
-	0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_LABELFRAME_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, relief), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
 	DEF_LABELFRAME_TEXT, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, textPtr), -1,
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0, 0, (ClientData) commonOptSpec, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, 0, 0, (ClientData) commonOptSpec, 0}
 };
 
 /*
@@ -305,48 +288,47 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec labelframeOptSpec[] = {
 static CONST char *classNames[] = {"Frame", "Toplevel", "Labelframe"};
 
 /*
- * The following table maps from FrameType to the option template for
- * that class of widgets.
+ * The following table maps from FrameType to the option template for that
+ * class of widgets.
  */
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec *CONST optionSpecs[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec * const optionSpecs[] = {
     frameOptSpec,
     toplevelOptSpec,
     labelframeOptSpec
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ComputeFrameGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Frame *framePtr));
-static int		ConfigureFrame _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Frame *framePtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		CreateFrame _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[],
-			    enum FrameType type, char *appName));
-static void		DestroyFrame _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static void		DestroyFramePartly _ANSI_ARGS_((Frame *framePtr));
-static void		DisplayFrame _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		FrameCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		FrameEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		FrameLostSlaveProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		FrameRequestProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		FrameStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int		FrameWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		FrameWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData instanceData));
-static void		MapFrame _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+static void		ComputeFrameGeometry(Frame *framePtr);
+static int		ConfigureFrame(Tcl_Interp *interp, Frame *framePtr,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		CreateFrame(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[],
+			    enum FrameType type, char *appName);
+static void		DestroyFrame(char *memPtr);
+static void		DestroyFramePartly(Frame *framePtr);
+static void		DisplayFrame(ClientData clientData);
+static void		FrameCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		FrameEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		FrameLostSlaveProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		FrameRequestProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		FrameStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		FrameWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		FrameWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
+static void		MapFrame(ClientData clientData);
 
 /*
- * The structure below defines frame class behavior by means of procedures
- * that can be invoked from generic window code.
+ * The structure below defines frame class behavior by means of functions that
+ * can be invoked from generic window code.
  */
 
 static Tk_ClassProcs frameClass = {
@@ -355,67 +337,63 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs frameClass = {
 };
 
 /*
- * The structure below defines the official type record for the
- * labelframe's geometry manager:
+ * The structure below defines the official type record for the labelframe's
+ * geometry manager:
  */
 
-static Tk_GeomMgr frameGeomType = {
-    "labelframe",			/* name */
-    FrameRequestProc,			/* requestProc */
-    FrameLostSlaveProc			/* lostSlaveProc */
+static const Tk_GeomMgr frameGeomType = {
+    "labelframe",		/* name */
+    FrameRequestProc,		/* requestProc */
+    FrameLostSlaveProc		/* lostSlaveProc */
 };
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_FrameObjCmd, Tk_ToplevelObjCmd, Tk_LabelframeObjCmd --
  *
- *	These procedures are invoked to process the "frame",
- *      "toplevel" and "labelframe" Tcl commands.  See the user
- *      documentation for details on what they do.
+ *	These functions are invoked to process the "frame", "toplevel" and
+ *	"labelframe" Tcl commands. See the user documentation for details on
+ *	what they do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	See the user documentation.  These procedures are just wrappers;
- *	they call CreateFrame to do all of the real work.
+ *	See the user documentation. These functions are just wrappers; they
+ *	call CreateFrame to do all of the real work.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_FrameObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_FrameObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_FRAME,
-	    (char *) NULL);
+    return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_FRAME, NULL);
 }
 
 int
-Tk_ToplevelObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_ToplevelObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_TOPLEVEL,
-	    (char *) NULL);
+    return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_TOPLEVEL, NULL);
 }
 
 int
-Tk_LabelframeObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_LabelframeObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_LABELFRAME,
-	    (char *) NULL);
+    return CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, TYPE_LABELFRAME, NULL);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -423,10 +401,10 @@ Tk_LabelframeObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkCreateFrame --
  *
- *	This procedure is the old command procedure for the "frame"
- *      and "toplevel" commands.  Now it is used directly by Tk_Init to
- *      create a new main window.  See the user documentation for the
- *      "frame" and "toplevel" commands for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is the old command function for the "frame" and
+ *	"toplevel" commands. Now it is used directly by Tk_Init to create a
+ *	new main window. See the user documentation for the "frame" and
+ *	"toplevel" commands for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -438,20 +416,21 @@ Tk_LabelframeObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 int
-TkCreateFrame(clientData, interp, argc, argv, toplevel, appName)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
-    int toplevel;		/* Non-zero means create a toplevel window,
+TkCreateFrame(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Either NULL or pointer to option table. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv,		/* Argument strings. */
+    int toplevel,		/* Non-zero means create a toplevel window,
 				 * zero means create a frame. */
-    char *appName;		/* Should only be non-NULL if there is no main
+    char *appName)		/* Should only be non-NULL if there is no main
 				 * window associated with the interpreter.
-				 * Gives the base name to use for the
-				 * new application. */
+				 * Gives the base name to use for the new
+				 * application. */
 {
     int result, i;
     Tcl_Obj **objv = (Tcl_Obj **) ckalloc((argc+1) * sizeof(Tcl_Obj **));
+
     for (i=0; i<argc; i++) {
 	objv[i] = Tcl_NewStringObj(argv[i], -1);
 	Tcl_IncrRefCount(objv[i]);
@@ -467,23 +446,23 @@ TkCreateFrame(clientData, interp, argc, argv, toplevel, appName)
 }
 
 static int
-CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
-    enum FrameType type;	/* What widget type to create. */
-    char *appName;		/* Should only be non-NULL if there are no
-				 * Main window associated with the interpreter.
-				 * Gives the base name to use for the
-				 * new application. */
+CreateFrame(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Argument objects. */
+    enum FrameType type,	/* What widget type to create. */
+    char *appName)		/* Should only be non-NULL if there are no
+				 * Main window associated with the
+				 * interpreter. Gives the base name to use for
+				 * the new application. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     Frame *framePtr;
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
-    Tk_Window new;
+    Tk_Window newWin;
     CONST char *className, *screenName, *visualName, *colormapName, *arg, *useOption;
-    int i, c, depth, length;
+    int i, c, length, depth;
     unsigned int mask;
     Colormap colormap;
     Visual *visual;
@@ -494,17 +473,17 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has already
-     * been created, the cached pointer will be returned.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, the cached pointer will be returned.
      */
 
     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs[type]);
 
     /*
-     * Pre-process the argument list.  Scan through it to find any
-     * "-class", "-screen", "-visual", and "-colormap" options.  These
-     * arguments need to be processed specially, before the window
-     * is configured using the usual Tk mechanisms.
+     * Pre-process the argument list. Scan through it to find any "-class",
+     * "-screen", "-visual", and "-colormap" options. These arguments need to
+     * be processed specially, before the window is configured using the usual
+     * Tk mechanisms.
      */
 
     className = colormapName = screenName = visualName = useOption = NULL;
@@ -515,8 +494,8 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
 	    continue;
 	}
 	c = arg[1];
-	if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(arg, "-class", (unsigned) length) == 0)
-		&& (length >= 3)) {
+	if ((c == 'c') && (length >= 3)
+		&& (strncmp(arg, "-class", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
 	    className = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
 	} else if ((c == 'c')
 		&& (strncmp(arg, "-colormap", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
@@ -534,18 +513,17 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the window, and deal with the special options -use,
-     * -classname, -colormap, -screenname, and -visual.  These options
-     * must be handle before calling ConfigureFrame below, and they must
-     * also be processed in a particular order, for the following
-     * reasons:
-     * 1. Must set the window's class before calling ConfigureFrame,
-     *    so that unspecified options are looked up in the option
-     *    database using the correct class.
-     * 2. Must set visual information before calling ConfigureFrame
-     *    so that colors are allocated in a proper colormap.
+     * Create the window, and deal with the special options -use, -classname,
+     * -colormap, -screenname, and -visual. These options must be handle
+     * before calling ConfigureFrame below, and they must also be processed in
+     * a particular order, for the following reasons:
+     * 1. Must set the window's class before calling ConfigureFrame, so that
+     *	  unspecified options are looked up in the option database using the
+     *	  correct class.
+     * 2. Must set visual information before calling ConfigureFrame so that
+     *	  colors are allocated in a proper colormap.
      * 3. Must call TkpUseWindow before setting non-default visual
-     *    information, since TkpUseWindow changes the defaults.
+     *	  information, since TkpUseWindow changes the defaults.
      */
 
     if (screenName == NULL) {
@@ -553,88 +531,93 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Main window associated with interpreter.
-     * If we're called by Tk_Init to create a
-     * new application, then this is NULL.
+     * Main window associated with interpreter. If we're called by Tk_Init to
+     * create a new application, then this is NULL.
      */
 
     tkwin = Tk_MainWindow(interp);
     if (tkwin != NULL) {
-	new = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[1]),
+	newWin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[1]),
 		screenName);
     } else if (appName == NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * This occurs when someone tried to create a frame/toplevel
-	 * while we are being destroyed.  Let an error be thrown.
+	 * This occurs when someone tried to create a frame/toplevel while we
+	 * are being destroyed. Let an error be thrown.
 	 */
 
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unable to create widget \"",
-		Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), "\"", (char *) NULL);
-	new = NULL;
+		Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), "\"", NULL);
+	newWin = NULL;
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * We were called from Tk_Init;  create a new application.
+	 * We were called from Tk_Init; create a new application.
 	 */
 
-	new = TkCreateMainWindow(interp, screenName, appName);
+	newWin = TkCreateMainWindow(interp, screenName, appName);
     }
-    if (new == NULL) {
+    if (newWin == NULL) {
 	goto error;
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * Mark Tk frames as suitable candidates for [wm manage]
+	 */
+	TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)newWin;
+	winPtr->flags |= TK_WM_MANAGEABLE;
     }
     if (className == NULL) {
-	className = Tk_GetOption(new, "class", "Class");
+	className = Tk_GetOption(newWin, "class", "Class");
 	if (className == NULL) {
 	    className = classNames[type];
 	}
     }
-    Tk_SetClass(new, className);
+    Tk_SetClass(newWin, className);
     if (useOption == NULL) {
-	useOption = Tk_GetOption(new, "use", "Use");
+	useOption = Tk_GetOption(newWin, "use", "Use");
     }
     if ((useOption != NULL) && (*useOption != 0)) {
-	if (TkpUseWindow(interp, new, useOption) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (TkpUseWindow(interp, newWin, useOption) != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto error;
 	}
     }
     if (visualName == NULL) {
-	visualName = Tk_GetOption(new, "visual", "Visual");
+	visualName = Tk_GetOption(newWin, "visual", "Visual");
     }
     if (colormapName == NULL) {
-	colormapName = Tk_GetOption(new, "colormap", "Colormap");
+	colormapName = Tk_GetOption(newWin, "colormap", "Colormap");
     }
     if ((colormapName != NULL) && (*colormapName == 0)) {
 	colormapName = NULL;
     }
     if (visualName != NULL) {
-	visual = Tk_GetVisual(interp, new, visualName, &depth,
-		(colormapName == NULL) ? &colormap : (Colormap *) NULL);
+	visual = Tk_GetVisual(interp, newWin, visualName, &depth,
+		(colormapName == NULL) ? &colormap : NULL);
 	if (visual == NULL) {
 	    goto error;
 	}
-	Tk_SetWindowVisual(new, visual, depth, colormap);
+	Tk_SetWindowVisual(newWin, visual, depth, colormap);
     }
     if (colormapName != NULL) {
-	colormap = Tk_GetColormap(interp, new, colormapName);
+	colormap = Tk_GetColormap(interp, newWin, colormapName);
 	if (colormap == None) {
 	    goto error;
 	}
-	Tk_SetWindowColormap(new, colormap);
+	Tk_SetWindowColormap(newWin, colormap);
     }
 
     /*
-     * For top-level windows, provide an initial geometry request of
-     * 200x200,  just so the window looks nicer on the screen if it
-     * doesn't request a size for itself.
+     * For top-level windows, provide an initial geometry request of 200x200,
+     * just so the window looks nicer on the screen if it doesn't request a
+     * size for itself.
      */
 
     if (type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL) {
-	Tk_GeometryRequest(new, 200, 200);
+	Tk_GeometryRequest(newWin, 200, 200);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the widget record, process configuration options, and
-     * create event handlers.  Then fill in a few additional fields
-     * in the widget record from the special options.
+     * Create the widget record, process configuration options, and create
+     * event handlers. Then fill in a few additional fields in the widget
+     * record from the special options.
      */
 
     if (type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
@@ -644,11 +627,11 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
 	framePtr = (Frame *) ckalloc(sizeof(Frame));
 	memset((void *) framePtr, 0, (sizeof(Frame)));
     }
-    framePtr->tkwin		= new;
-    framePtr->display		= Tk_Display(new);
+    framePtr->tkwin		= newWin;
+    framePtr->display		= Tk_Display(newWin);
     framePtr->interp		= interp;
     framePtr->widgetCmd		= Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
-	    Tk_PathName(new), FrameWidgetObjCmd,
+	    Tk_PathName(newWin), FrameWidgetObjCmd,
 	    (ClientData) framePtr, FrameCmdDeletedProc);
     framePtr->optionTable = optionTable;
     framePtr->type = type;
@@ -665,14 +648,15 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
     /*
      * Store backreference to frame widget in window structure.
      */
-    Tk_SetClassProcs(new, &frameClass, (ClientData) framePtr);
+
+    Tk_SetClassProcs(newWin, &frameClass, (ClientData) framePtr);
 
     mask = ExposureMask | StructureNotifyMask | FocusChangeMask;
     if (type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL) {
-        mask |= ActivateMask;
+	mask |= ActivateMask;
     }
-    Tk_CreateEventHandler(new, mask, FrameEventProc, (ClientData) framePtr);
-    if ((Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) framePtr, optionTable, new)
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(newWin, mask, FrameEventProc, (ClientData) framePtr);
+    if ((Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) framePtr, optionTable, newWin)
 	    != TCL_OK) ||
 	    (ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc-2, objv+2) != TCL_OK)) {
 	goto error;
@@ -682,19 +666,19 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
 	    TkpMakeContainer(framePtr->tkwin);
 	} else {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "A window cannot have both the -use ",
-		    "and the -container option set.", (char *) NULL);
+		    "and the -container option set.", NULL);
 	    goto error;
 	}
     }
     if (type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL) {
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(MapFrame, (ClientData) framePtr);
     }
-    Tcl_SetResult(interp, Tk_PathName(new), TCL_STATIC);
+    Tcl_SetResult(interp, Tk_PathName(newWin), TCL_STATIC);
     return TCL_OK;
 
-    error:
-    if (new != NULL) {
-	Tk_DestroyWindow(new);
+  error:
+    if (newWin != NULL) {
+	Tk_DestroyWindow(newWin);
     }
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -704,9 +688,9 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
  *
  * FrameWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a frame widget.  See the user
- *	documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a frame widget. See the user documentation for details on what it
+ *	does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -718,14 +702,14 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
  */
 
 static int
-FrameWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about frame widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+FrameWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about frame widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     static CONST char *frameOptions[] = {
-	"cget", "configure", (char *) NULL
+	"cget", "configure", NULL
     };
     enum options {
 	FRAME_CGET, FRAME_CONFIGURE
@@ -745,27 +729,26 @@ FrameWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) framePtr);
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-      case FRAME_CGET: {
+    case FRAME_CGET:
 	if (objc != 3) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-        objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) framePtr,
+	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) framePtr,
 		framePtr->optionTable, objv[2], framePtr->tkwin);
-        if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	if (objPtr == NULL) {
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
-        } else {
+	} else {
 	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-        }
+	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case FRAME_CONFIGURE: {
+    case FRAME_CONFIGURE:
 	if (objc <= 3) {
 	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) framePtr,
 		    framePtr->optionTable,
-		    (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
+		    (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL,
 		    framePtr->tkwin);
 	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
@@ -775,8 +758,8 @@ FrameWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    /*
-	     * Don't allow the options -class, -colormap, -container,
-	     * -newcmap, -screen, -use, or -visual to be changed.
+	     * Don't allow the options -class, -colormap, -container, -screen,
+	     * -use, or -visual to be changed.
 	     */
 
 	    for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
@@ -785,34 +768,47 @@ FrameWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		    continue;
 		}
 		c = arg[1];
-		if (((c == 'c')
-			&& (strncmp(arg, "-class", (unsigned) length) == 0)
-			&& (length >= 2))
-			|| ((c == 'c')
-			&& (strncmp(arg, "-colormap", (unsigned) length) == 0)
-			&& (length >= 3))
-			|| ((c == 'c')
-			&& (strncmp(arg, "-container", (unsigned) length) == 0)
-			&& (length >= 3))
-			|| ((c == 's') && (framePtr->type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL)
-			&& (strncmp(arg, "-screen", (unsigned) length) == 0))
-			|| ((c == 'u') && (framePtr->type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL)
-			&& (strncmp(arg, "-use", (unsigned) length) == 0))
-			|| ((c == 'v')
-			&& (strncmp(arg, "-visual", (unsigned) length) ==0))) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't modify ", arg,
-			    " option after widget is created", (char *) NULL);
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		    goto done;
+		if (((c == 'c') && (length >= 2)
+			&& (strncmp(arg, "-class", (unsigned)length) == 0))
+		    || ((c == 'c') && (length >= 3)
+			&& (strncmp(arg, "-colormap", (unsigned)length) == 0))
+		    || ((c == 'c') && (length >= 3)
+			&& (strncmp(arg, "-container", (unsigned)length) == 0))
+		    || ((c == 's') && (framePtr->type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL)
+			&& (strncmp(arg, "-screen", (unsigned)length) == 0))
+		    || ((c == 'u') && (framePtr->type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL)
+			&& (strncmp(arg, "-use", (unsigned)length) == 0))
+		    || ((c == 'v')
+			&& (strncmp(arg, "-visual", (unsigned)length) == 0))) {
+
+		    #ifdef SUPPORT_CONFIG_EMBEDDED
+		    if (c == 'u') {
+			CONST char *string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
+			if (TkpUseWindow(interp, framePtr->tkwin,
+				string) != TCL_OK) {
+			    result = TCL_ERROR;
+			    goto done;
+			}
+		    } else {
+			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't modify ", arg,
+				" option after widget is created", NULL);
+			result = TCL_ERROR;
+			goto done;
+		    }
+		    #else
+			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't modify ", arg,
+				" option after widget is created", NULL);
+			result = TCL_ERROR;
+			goto done;
+		    #endif
 		}
 	    }
 	    result = ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc-2, objv+2);
 	}
 	break;
-      }
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) framePtr);
     return result;
 }
@@ -822,9 +818,9 @@ FrameWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * DestroyFrame --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a frame at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	This function is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to clean
+ *	up the internal structure of a frame at a safe time (when no-one is
+ *	using it anymore).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -836,8 +832,8 @@ FrameWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyFrame(memPtr)
-    char *memPtr;		/* Info about frame widget. */
+DestroyFrame(
+    char *memPtr)		/* Info about frame widget. */
 {
     register Frame *framePtr = (Frame *) memPtr;
     register Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *) memPtr;
@@ -859,10 +855,9 @@ DestroyFrame(memPtr)
  *
  * DestroyFramePartly --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to clean up everything that needs
- *      tkwin to be defined when deleted.  During the destruction
- *      process tkwin is always set to NULL and this procedure must
- *      be called before that happens.
+ *	This function is invoked to clean up everything that needs tkwin to be
+ *	defined when deleted. During the destruction process tkwin is always
+ *	set to NULL and this function must be called before that happens.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -874,16 +869,15 @@ DestroyFrame(memPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyFramePartly(framePtr)
-    Frame *framePtr;		/* Info about frame widget. */
+DestroyFramePartly(
+    Frame *framePtr)		/* Info about frame widget. */
 {
     register Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *) framePtr;
 
     if (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME && labelframePtr->labelWin != NULL) {
 	Tk_DeleteEventHandler(labelframePtr->labelWin, StructureNotifyMask,
 		FrameStructureProc, (ClientData) framePtr);
-	Tk_ManageGeometry(labelframePtr->labelWin, (Tk_GeomMgr *) NULL,
-		(ClientData) NULL);
+	Tk_ManageGeometry(labelframePtr->labelWin, NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
 	if (framePtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(labelframePtr->labelWin)) {
 	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(labelframePtr->labelWin, framePtr->tkwin);
 	}
@@ -892,7 +886,7 @@ DestroyFramePartly(framePtr)
     }
 
     Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) framePtr, framePtr->optionTable,
-            framePtr->tkwin);
+	    framePtr->tkwin);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -900,29 +894,28 @@ DestroyFramePartly(framePtr)
  *
  * ConfigureFrame --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an objv/objc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a frame widget.
+ *	This function is called to process an objv/objc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) a frame
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font,
- *	etc. get set for framePtr;  old resources get freed, if there
- *	were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font, etc. get
+ *	set for framePtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    register Frame *framePtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or may
-				 * not already have values for some fields. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of valid entries in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments. */
+ConfigureFrame(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    register Frame *framePtr,	/* Information about widget; may or may not
+				 * already have values for some fields. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of valid entries in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Arguments. */
 {
     Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
     char *oldMenuName;
@@ -932,7 +925,7 @@ ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
     /*
      * Need the old menubar name for the menu code to delete it.
      */
-    
+
     if (framePtr->menuName == NULL) {
     	oldMenuName = NULL;
     } else {
@@ -945,7 +938,7 @@ ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
     }
     if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) framePtr,
 	    framePtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
-	    framePtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, (int *) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+	    framePtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 	if (oldMenuName != NULL) {
 	    ckfree(oldMenuName);
 	}
@@ -958,10 +951,11 @@ ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
      * A few of the options require additional processing.
      */
 
-    if (((oldMenuName == NULL) && (framePtr->menuName != NULL))
+    if ((((oldMenuName == NULL) && (framePtr->menuName != NULL))
 	    || ((oldMenuName != NULL) && (framePtr->menuName == NULL))
 	    || ((oldMenuName != NULL) && (framePtr->menuName != NULL)
-	    && strcmp(oldMenuName, framePtr->menuName) != 0)) {
+	    && strcmp(oldMenuName, framePtr->menuName) != 0))
+	&& framePtr->type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL) {
 	TkSetWindowMenuBar(interp, framePtr->tkwin, oldMenuName,
 		framePtr->menuName);
     }
@@ -987,8 +981,8 @@ ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If a -labelwidget is specified, check that it is valid and set
-     * up geometry management for it.
+     * If a -labelwidget is specified, check that it is valid and set up
+     * geometry management for it.
      */
 
     if (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
@@ -996,8 +990,7 @@ ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
 	    if (oldWindow != NULL) {
 		Tk_DeleteEventHandler(oldWindow, StructureNotifyMask,
 			FrameStructureProc, (ClientData) framePtr);
-		Tk_ManageGeometry(oldWindow, (Tk_GeomMgr *) NULL,
-			(ClientData) NULL);
+		Tk_ManageGeometry(oldWindow, NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
 		Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(oldWindow, framePtr->tkwin);
 		Tk_UnmapWindow(oldWindow);
 	    }
@@ -1005,10 +998,9 @@ ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
 		Tk_Window ancestor, parent, sibling = NULL;
 
 		/*
-		 * Make sure that the frame is either the parent of the
-		 * window used as label or a descendant of that
-		 * parent.  Also, don't allow a top-level window to be
-		 * managed inside the frame.
+		 * Make sure that the frame is either the parent of the window
+		 * used as label or a descendant of that parent. Also, don't
+		 * allow a top-level window to be managed inside the frame.
 		 */
 
 		parent = Tk_Parent(labelframePtr->labelWin);
@@ -1022,7 +1014,7 @@ ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
 			badWindow:
 			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't use ",
 				Tk_PathName(labelframePtr->labelWin),
-				" as label in this frame", (char *) NULL);
+				" as label in this frame", NULL);
 			labelframePtr->labelWin = NULL;
 			return TCL_ERROR;
 		    }
@@ -1040,9 +1032,8 @@ ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
 			(ClientData) framePtr);
 
 		/*
-		 * If the frame is not parent to the label, make
-		 * sure the label is above its sibling in the stacking
-		 * order.
+		 * If the frame is not parent to the label, make sure the
+		 * label is above its sibling in the stacking order.
 		 */
 
 		if (sibling != NULL) {
@@ -1062,22 +1053,22 @@ ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * FrameWorldChanged --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way and the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts
- *	and determine its new geometry.
+ *	This function is called when the world has changed in some way and the
+ *	widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine its
+ *	new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      Frame will be relayed out and redisplayed.
+ *	Frame will be relayed out and redisplayed.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 static void
-FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about widget. */
+FrameWorldChanged(
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     Frame *framePtr = (Frame *) instanceData;
     Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *) framePtr;
@@ -1096,8 +1087,8 @@ FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
 
     if (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
 	/*
-	 * The textGC is needed even in the labelWin case, so it's
-	 * always created for a labelframe.
+	 * The textGC is needed even in the labelWin case, so it's always
+	 * created for a labelframe.
 	 */
 
 	gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(labelframePtr->tkfont);
@@ -1113,7 +1104,7 @@ FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
 	/*
 	 * Calculate label size.
 	 */
-	
+
 	labelframePtr->labelReqWidth = labelframePtr->labelReqHeight = 0;
 
 	if (anyTextLabel) {
@@ -1129,13 +1120,13 @@ FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
 	    labelframePtr->labelReqHeight = Tk_ReqHeight(labelframePtr->labelWin);
 	}
 
-	/* 
-	 * Make sure label size is at least as big as the border.
-	 * This simplifies later calculations and gives a better
-	 * appearance with thick borders.
+	/*
+	 * Make sure label size is at least as big as the border. This
+	 * simplifies later calculations and gives a better appearance with
+	 * thick borders.
 	 */
-     
-	if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) && 
+
+	if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) &&
 		(labelframePtr->labelAnchor <= LABELANCHOR_SW)) {
 	    if (labelframePtr->labelReqHeight < framePtr->borderWidth) {
 		labelframePtr->labelReqHeight = framePtr->borderWidth;
@@ -1151,34 +1142,34 @@ FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
      * Calculate individual border widths.
      */
 
-    bWidthBottom = bWidthTop = bWidthRight = bWidthLeft = 
-            framePtr->borderWidth + framePtr->highlightWidth;
+    bWidthBottom = bWidthTop = bWidthRight = bWidthLeft =
+	    framePtr->borderWidth + framePtr->highlightWidth;
 
     bWidthLeft   += framePtr->padX;
     bWidthRight  += framePtr->padX;
     bWidthTop    += framePtr->padY;
     bWidthBottom += framePtr->padY;
-    
+
     if (anyTextLabel || anyWindowLabel) {
 	switch (labelframePtr->labelAnchor) {
-	  case LABELANCHOR_E:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_EN:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_ES:
+	case LABELANCHOR_E:
+	case LABELANCHOR_EN:
+	case LABELANCHOR_ES:
 	    bWidthRight += labelframePtr->labelReqWidth -
 		    framePtr->borderWidth;
 	    break;
-	  case LABELANCHOR_N:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_NE:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_NW:
+	case LABELANCHOR_N:
+	case LABELANCHOR_NE:
+	case LABELANCHOR_NW:
 	    bWidthTop += labelframePtr->labelReqHeight - framePtr->borderWidth;
 	    break;
-	  case LABELANCHOR_S:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_SE:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_SW:
+	case LABELANCHOR_S:
+	case LABELANCHOR_SE:
+	case LABELANCHOR_SW:
 	    bWidthBottom += labelframePtr->labelReqHeight -
 		    framePtr->borderWidth;
 	    break;
-	  default:
+	default:
 	    bWidthLeft += labelframePtr->labelReqWidth - framePtr->borderWidth;
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -1197,11 +1188,12 @@ FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
 	int minwidth = labelframePtr->labelReqWidth;
 	int minheight = labelframePtr->labelReqHeight;
 	int padding = framePtr->highlightWidth;
+
 	if (framePtr->borderWidth > 0) {
 	    padding += framePtr->borderWidth + LABELMARGIN;
 	}
 	padding *= 2;
-	if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) && 
+	if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) &&
 		(labelframePtr->labelAnchor <= LABELANCHOR_SW)) {
 	    minwidth += padding;
 	    minheight += framePtr->borderWidth + framePtr->highlightWidth;
@@ -1229,9 +1221,9 @@ FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
  *
  * ComputeFrameGeometry --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to compute various geometrical
- *	information for a frame, such as where various things get
- *	displayed.  It's called when the window is reconfigured.
+ *	This function is called to compute various geometrical information for
+ *	a frame, such as where various things get displayed. It's called when
+ *	the window is reconfigured.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1243,8 +1235,8 @@ FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
  */
 
 static void
-ComputeFrameGeometry(framePtr)
-    register Frame *framePtr;		/* Information about widget. */
+ComputeFrameGeometry(
+    register Frame *framePtr)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     int otherWidth, otherHeight, otherWidthT, otherHeightT, padding;
     int maxWidth, maxHeight;
@@ -1256,12 +1248,13 @@ ComputeFrameGeometry(framePtr)
      */
 
     if (framePtr->type != TYPE_LABELFRAME) return;
-    if ((labelframePtr->textPtr == NULL) &&
-	    (labelframePtr->labelWin == NULL))  return;
+    if (labelframePtr->textPtr == NULL && labelframePtr->labelWin == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
 
     tkwin = framePtr->tkwin;
 
-    /* 
+    /*
      * Calculate the available size for the label
      */
 
@@ -1270,15 +1263,15 @@ ComputeFrameGeometry(framePtr)
 
     padding = framePtr->highlightWidth;
     if (framePtr->borderWidth > 0) {
-        padding += framePtr->borderWidth + LABELMARGIN;
+	padding += framePtr->borderWidth + LABELMARGIN;
     }
     padding *= 2;
 
     maxHeight = Tk_Height(tkwin);
     maxWidth  = Tk_Width(tkwin);
 
-    if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) && 
-            (labelframePtr->labelAnchor <= LABELANCHOR_SW)) {
+    if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) &&
+	    (labelframePtr->labelAnchor <= LABELANCHOR_SW)) {
 	maxWidth -= padding;
 	if (maxWidth < 1) maxWidth = 1;
     } else {
@@ -1293,9 +1286,9 @@ ComputeFrameGeometry(framePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Calculate label and text position.
-     * The text's position is based on the requested size (= the text's
-     * real size) to get proper alignment if the text does not fit.
+     * Calculate label and text position. The text's position is based on the
+     * requested size (= the text's real size) to get proper alignment if the
+     * text does not fit.
      */
 
     otherWidth   = Tk_Width(tkwin)  - labelframePtr->labelBox.width;
@@ -1305,64 +1298,64 @@ ComputeFrameGeometry(framePtr)
     padding = framePtr->highlightWidth;
 
     switch (labelframePtr->labelAnchor) {
-      case LABELANCHOR_E:
-      case LABELANCHOR_EN:
-      case LABELANCHOR_ES:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextX = otherWidthT - padding;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.x = otherWidth - padding;
-        break;
-      case LABELANCHOR_N:
-      case LABELANCHOR_NE:
-      case LABELANCHOR_NW:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextY = padding;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.y = padding;
-        break;
-      case LABELANCHOR_S:
-      case LABELANCHOR_SE:
-      case LABELANCHOR_SW:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextY = otherHeightT - padding;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.y = otherHeight - padding;
-        break;
-      default:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextX = padding;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.x = padding;
-        break;
+    case LABELANCHOR_E:
+    case LABELANCHOR_EN:
+    case LABELANCHOR_ES:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextX = otherWidthT - padding;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.x = otherWidth - padding;
+	break;
+    case LABELANCHOR_N:
+    case LABELANCHOR_NE:
+    case LABELANCHOR_NW:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextY = padding;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.y = padding;
+	break;
+    case LABELANCHOR_S:
+    case LABELANCHOR_SE:
+    case LABELANCHOR_SW:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextY = otherHeightT - padding;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.y = otherHeight - padding;
+	break;
+    default:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextX = padding;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.x = padding;
+	break;
     }
 
     if (framePtr->borderWidth > 0) {
-        padding += framePtr->borderWidth + LABELMARGIN;
+	padding += framePtr->borderWidth + LABELMARGIN;
     }
 
     switch (labelframePtr->labelAnchor) {
-      case LABELANCHOR_NW:
-      case LABELANCHOR_SW:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextX = padding;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.x = padding;
-        break;
-      case LABELANCHOR_N:
-      case LABELANCHOR_S:	
-        labelframePtr->labelTextX = otherWidthT / 2;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.x = otherWidth / 2;
-        break;
-      case LABELANCHOR_NE:
-      case LABELANCHOR_SE:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextX = otherWidthT - padding;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.x = otherWidth - padding;
-        break;
-      case LABELANCHOR_EN:
-      case LABELANCHOR_WN:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextY = padding;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.y = padding;
-        break;
-      case LABELANCHOR_E:
-      case LABELANCHOR_W:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextY = otherHeightT / 2;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.y = otherHeight / 2;
-        break;
-      default:
+    case LABELANCHOR_NW:
+    case LABELANCHOR_SW:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextX = padding;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.x = padding;
+	break;
+    case LABELANCHOR_N:
+    case LABELANCHOR_S:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextX = otherWidthT / 2;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.x = otherWidth / 2;
+	break;
+    case LABELANCHOR_NE:
+    case LABELANCHOR_SE:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextX = otherWidthT - padding;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.x = otherWidth - padding;
+	break;
+    case LABELANCHOR_EN:
+    case LABELANCHOR_WN:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextY = padding;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.y = padding;
+	break;
+    case LABELANCHOR_E:
+    case LABELANCHOR_W:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextY = otherHeightT / 2;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.y = otherHeight / 2;
+	break;
+    default:
 	labelframePtr->labelTextY = otherHeightT - padding;
 	labelframePtr->labelBox.y = otherHeight - padding;
-        break;
+	break;
     }
 }
 
@@ -1371,21 +1364,20 @@ ComputeFrameGeometry(framePtr)
  *
  * DisplayFrame --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to display a frame widget.
+ *	This function is invoked to display a frame widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Commands are output to X to display the frame in its
- *	current mode.
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the frame in its current mode.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayFrame(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about widget. */
+DisplayFrame(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     register Frame *framePtr = (Frame *) clientData;
     register Tk_Window tkwin = framePtr->tkwin;
@@ -1394,8 +1386,7 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
     TkRegion clipRegion = NULL;
 
     framePtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING;
-    if ((framePtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)
-        || framePtr->isContainer) {
+    if ((framePtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) {
 	return;
     }
 
@@ -1406,7 +1397,7 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
     hlWidth = framePtr->highlightWidth;
 
     if (hlWidth != 0) {
-        GC fgGC, bgGC;
+	GC fgGC, bgGC;
 
 	bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(framePtr->highlightBgColorPtr,
 		Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
@@ -1429,11 +1420,11 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
 
     if (framePtr->type != TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
 	/*
-	 * Pass to platform specific draw function.  In general, it just
-	 * draws a simple rectangle, but it may "theme" the background.
+	 * Pass to platform specific draw function. In general, it just draws
+	 * a simple rectangle, but it may "theme" the background.
 	 */
 
-	noLabel:
+    noLabel:
 	TkpDrawFrame(tkwin, framePtr->border, hlWidth,
 		framePtr->borderWidth, framePtr->relief);
     } else {
@@ -1446,10 +1437,10 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
 
 #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
 	/*
-	 * In order to avoid screen flashes, this procedure redraws the
-	 * frame into off-screen memory, then copies it back on-screen 
-	 * in a single operation.  This means there's no point in time 
-	 * where the on-screen image has been cleared.
+	 * In order to avoid screen flashes, this function redraws the frame
+	 * into off-screen memory, then copies it back on-screen in a single
+	 * operation. This means there's no point in time where the on-screen
+	 * image has been cleared.
 	 */
 
 	pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(framePtr->display, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
@@ -1458,7 +1449,7 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
 	pixmap = Tk_WindowId(tkwin);
 #endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
 
-	/* 
+	/*
 	 * Clear the pixmap.
 	 */
 
@@ -1474,61 +1465,56 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
 	bdY2 = Tk_Height(tkwin) - hlWidth;
 
 	switch (labelframePtr->labelAnchor) {
-	  case LABELANCHOR_E:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_EN:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_ES:
-	    bdX2 -= (labelframePtr->labelBox.width - framePtr->borderWidth)
-		    / 2;
+	case LABELANCHOR_E:
+	case LABELANCHOR_EN:
+	case LABELANCHOR_ES:
+	    bdX2 -= (labelframePtr->labelBox.width-framePtr->borderWidth) / 2;
 	    break;
-	  case LABELANCHOR_N:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_NE:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_NW:
-	    /* 
-	     * Since the glyphs of the text tend to be in the lower part
-             * we favor a lower border position by rounding up.
+	case LABELANCHOR_N:
+	case LABELANCHOR_NE:
+	case LABELANCHOR_NW:
+	    /*
+	     * Since the glyphs of the text tend to be in the lower part we
+	     * favor a lower border position by rounding up.
 	     */
 
-	    bdY1 += (labelframePtr->labelBox.height - framePtr->borderWidth +1)
-		    / 2;
+	    bdY1 += (labelframePtr->labelBox.height-framePtr->borderWidth+1)/2;
 	    break;
-	  case LABELANCHOR_S:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_SE:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_SW:
-	    bdY2 -= (labelframePtr->labelBox.height - framePtr->borderWidth)
-		    / 2;
+	case LABELANCHOR_S:
+	case LABELANCHOR_SE:
+	case LABELANCHOR_SW:
+	    bdY2 -= (labelframePtr->labelBox.height-framePtr->borderWidth) / 2;
 	    break;
-	  default:
-	    bdX1 += (labelframePtr->labelBox.width - framePtr->borderWidth)
-		    / 2;
+	default:
+	    bdX1 += (labelframePtr->labelBox.width-framePtr->borderWidth) / 2;
 	    break;
 	}
 
-	/* 
-         * Draw border
-         */
+	/*
+	 * Draw border
+	 */
 
 	Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, framePtr->border, bdX1, bdY1,
 		bdX2 - bdX1, bdY2 - bdY1, framePtr->borderWidth,
 		framePtr->relief);
 
-        if (labelframePtr->labelWin == NULL) {
-            /* 
-             * Clear behind the label
-             */
-
-            Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap,
-                    framePtr->border, labelframePtr->labelBox.x,
-                    labelframePtr->labelBox.y, labelframePtr->labelBox.width,
-                    labelframePtr->labelBox.height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
-
-            /*
-             * Draw label.
-	     * If there is not room for the entire label, use clipping to
-	     * get a nice appearance.
-             */
-	    
+	if (labelframePtr->labelWin == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Clear behind the label
+	     */
+
+	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap,
+		    framePtr->border, labelframePtr->labelBox.x,
+		    labelframePtr->labelBox.y, labelframePtr->labelBox.width,
+		    labelframePtr->labelBox.height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+
+	    /*
+	     * Draw label. If there is not room for the entire label, use
+	     * clipping to get a nice appearance.
+	     */
+
 	    if ((labelframePtr->labelBox.width < labelframePtr->labelReqWidth)
-		    || (labelframePtr->labelBox.height < 
+		    || (labelframePtr->labelBox.height <
 			    labelframePtr->labelReqHeight)) {
 		clipRegion = TkCreateRegion();
 		TkUnionRectWithRegion(&labelframePtr->labelBox, clipRegion,
@@ -1537,37 +1523,37 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
 			clipRegion);
 	    }
 
-            Tk_DrawTextLayout(framePtr->display, pixmap,
-                    labelframePtr->textGC, labelframePtr->textLayout,
-                    labelframePtr->labelTextX + LABELSPACING,
-                    labelframePtr->labelTextY + LABELSPACING, 0, -1);
+	    Tk_DrawTextLayout(framePtr->display, pixmap,
+		    labelframePtr->textGC, labelframePtr->textLayout,
+		    labelframePtr->labelTextX + LABELSPACING,
+		    labelframePtr->labelTextY + LABELSPACING, 0, -1);
 
 	    if (clipRegion != NULL) {
 		XSetClipMask(framePtr->display, labelframePtr->textGC, None);
 		TkDestroyRegion(clipRegion);
 	    }
-        } else {
+	} else {
 	    /*
 	     * Reposition and map the window (but in different ways depending
 	     * on whether the frame is the window's parent).
 	     */
-            
+
 	    if (framePtr->tkwin == Tk_Parent(labelframePtr->labelWin)) {
 		if ((labelframePtr->labelBox.x != Tk_X(labelframePtr->labelWin))
 			|| (labelframePtr->labelBox.y !=
 				Tk_Y(labelframePtr->labelWin))
-			|| (labelframePtr->labelBox.width != 
+			|| (labelframePtr->labelBox.width !=
 				Tk_Width(labelframePtr->labelWin))
-			|| (labelframePtr->labelBox.height != 
+			|| (labelframePtr->labelBox.height !=
 				Tk_Height(labelframePtr->labelWin))) {
 		    Tk_MoveResizeWindow(labelframePtr->labelWin,
-			    labelframePtr->labelBox.x, labelframePtr->labelBox.y, 
+			    labelframePtr->labelBox.x, labelframePtr->labelBox.y,
 			    labelframePtr->labelBox.width,
 			    labelframePtr->labelBox.height);
 		}
 		Tk_MapWindow(labelframePtr->labelWin);
 	    } else {
-		Tk_MaintainGeometry(labelframePtr->labelWin, framePtr->tkwin, 
+		Tk_MaintainGeometry(labelframePtr->labelWin, framePtr->tkwin,
 			labelframePtr->labelBox.x, labelframePtr->labelBox.y,
 			labelframePtr->labelBox.width,
 			labelframePtr->labelBox.height);
@@ -1577,7 +1563,7 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
 
 #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
 	/*
-	 * Everything's been redisplayed;  now copy the pixmap onto the screen
+	 * Everything's been redisplayed; now copy the pixmap onto the screen
 	 * and free up the pixmap.
 	 */
 
@@ -1597,24 +1583,24 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
  *
  * FrameEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher on
- *	structure changes to a frame.  For frames with 3D
- *	borders, this procedure is also invoked for exposures.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher on structure changes to
+ *	a frame. For frames with 3D borders, this function is also invoked for
+ *	exposures.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up.
+ *	When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FrameEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    register XEvent *eventPtr;	/* Information about event. */
+FrameEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    register XEvent *eventPtr)	/* Information about event. */
 {
     register Frame *framePtr = (Frame *) clientData;
 
@@ -1631,15 +1617,14 @@ FrameEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	    framePtr->menuName = NULL;
 	}
 	if (framePtr->tkwin != NULL) {
-
 	    /*
-	     * If this window is a container, then this event could be
-	     * coming from the embedded application, in which case
-	     * Tk_DestroyWindow hasn't been called yet.  When Tk_DestroyWindow
-	     * is called later, then another destroy event will be generated.
-	     * We need to be sure we ignore the second event, since the frame
-	     * could be gone by then.  To do so, delete the event handler
-	     * explicitly (normally it's done implicitly by Tk_DestroyWindow).
+	     * If this window is a container, then this event could be coming
+	     * from the embedded application, in which case Tk_DestroyWindow
+	     * hasn't been called yet. When Tk_DestroyWindow is called later,
+	     * then another destroy event will be generated. We need to be
+	     * sure we ignore the second event, since the frame could be gone
+	     * by then. To do so, delete the event handler explicitly
+	     * (normally it's done implicitly by Tk_DestroyWindow).
 	     */
 
 	    /*
@@ -1647,13 +1632,13 @@ FrameEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	     * DestroyFrame, we must free all options now.
 	     */
 
-            DestroyFramePartly(framePtr);
+	    DestroyFramePartly(framePtr);
 
 	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(framePtr->tkwin,
 		    ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
 		    FrameEventProc, (ClientData) framePtr);
 	    framePtr->tkwin = NULL;
-            Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(framePtr->interp, framePtr->widgetCmd);
+	    Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(framePtr->interp, framePtr->widgetCmd);
 	}
 	if (framePtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
 	    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayFrame, (ClientData) framePtr);
@@ -1680,7 +1665,7 @@ FrameEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
     }
     return;
 
-    redraw:
+  redraw:
     if ((framePtr->tkwin != NULL) && !(framePtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayFrame, (ClientData) framePtr);
 	framePtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
@@ -1692,9 +1677,9 @@ FrameEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * FrameCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1706,8 +1691,8 @@ FrameEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-FrameCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+FrameCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     Frame *framePtr = (Frame *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = framePtr->tkwin;
@@ -1720,19 +1705,19 @@ FrameCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (tkwin != NULL) {
-	/* 
-	 * Some options need tkwin to be freed, so we free them here,
-	 * before setting tkwin to NULL.
+	/*
+	 * Some options need tkwin to be freed, so we free them here, before
+	 * setting tkwin to NULL.
 	 */
 
-        DestroyFramePartly(framePtr);
+	DestroyFramePartly(framePtr);
 
 	framePtr->tkwin = NULL;
 	Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
@@ -1744,8 +1729,8 @@ FrameCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * MapFrame --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked as a when-idle handler to map a
- *	newly-created top-level frame.
+ *	This function is invoked as a when-idle handler to map a newly-created
+ *	top-level frame.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1757,16 +1742,16 @@ FrameCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-MapFrame(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to frame structure. */
+MapFrame(
+    ClientData clientData)		/* Pointer to frame structure. */
 {
     Frame *framePtr = (Frame *) clientData;
 
     /*
-     * Wait for all other background events to be processed before
-     * mapping window.  This ensures that the window's correct geometry
-     * will have been determined before it is first mapped, so that the
-     * window manager doesn't get a false idea of its desired geometry.
+     * Wait for all other background events to be processed before mapping
+     * window. This ensures that the window's correct geometry will have been
+     * determined before it is first mapped, so that the window manager
+     * doesn't get a false idea of its desired geometry.
      */
 
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) framePtr);
@@ -1776,8 +1761,8 @@ MapFrame(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * After each event, make sure that the window still exists
-	 * and quit if the window has been destroyed.
+	 * After each event, make sure that the window still exists and quit
+	 * if the window has been destroyed.
 	 */
 
 	if (framePtr->tkwin == NULL) {
@@ -1794,24 +1779,23 @@ MapFrame(clientData)
  *
  * TkInstallFrameMenu --
  *
- *	This function is needed when a Windows HWND is created
- *	and a menubar has been set to the window with a system
- *	menu. It notifies the menu package so that the system
- *	menu can be rebuilt.
+ *	This function is needed when a Windows HWND is created and a menubar
+ *	has been set to the window with a system menu. It notifies the menu
+ *	package so that the system menu can be rebuilt.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The system menu (if any) is created for the menubar
- *	associated with this frame.
+ *	The system menu (if any) is created for the menubar associated with
+ *	this frame.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkInstallFrameMenu(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window that was just created. */
+TkInstallFrameMenu(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* The window that was just created. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -1819,9 +1803,9 @@ TkInstallFrameMenu(tkwin)
 	Frame *framePtr;
 	framePtr = (Frame*) winPtr->instanceData;
 	if (framePtr == NULL) {
-	    panic("TkInstallFrameMenu couldn't get frame pointer");
+	    Tcl_Panic("TkInstallFrameMenu couldn't get frame pointer");
 	}
-	TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate(winPtr->mainPtr->interp, 
+	TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate(winPtr->mainPtr->interp,
 		framePtr->menuName);
     }
 }
@@ -1831,32 +1815,30 @@ TkInstallFrameMenu(tkwin)
  *
  * FrameStructureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever StructureNotify events
- *	occur for a window that's managed as label for the frame.
- *	This procudure's only purpose is to clean up when windows
- *	are deleted.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever StructureNotify events occur for a
+ *	window that's managed as label for the frame. This procudure's only
+ *	purpose is to clean up when windows are deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The window is disassociated from the frame when it is
- *	deleted.
+ *	The window is disassociated from the frame when it is deleted.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FrameStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to record describing frame. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Describes what just happened. */
+FrameStructureProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to record describing frame. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *) clientData;
 
     if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
 	/*
-	 * This should only happen in a labelframe but it doesn't
-	 * hurt to be careful.
+	 * This should only happen in a labelframe but it doesn't hurt to be
+	 * careful.
 	 */
 
 	if (labelframePtr->frame.type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
@@ -1871,24 +1853,23 @@ FrameStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * FrameRequestProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever a window that's associated
- *	with a frame changes its requested dimensions.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever a window that's associated with a
+ *	frame changes its requested dimensions.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The size and location on the screen of the window may change.
- *	depending on the options specified for the frame.
+ *	The size and location on the screen of the window may change depending
+ *	on the options specified for the frame.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FrameRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to record for frame. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window that changed its desired
-					 * size. */
+FrameRequestProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to record for frame. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window that changed its desired size. */
 {
     Frame *framePtr = (Frame *) clientData;
 
@@ -1900,8 +1881,8 @@ FrameRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * FrameLostSlaveProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry
- *	claims control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry claims
+ *	control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1913,19 +1894,19 @@ FrameRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
  */
 
 static void
-FrameLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Frame structure for slave window that
-				 * was stolen away. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
+FrameLostSlaveProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Frame structure for slave window that was
+				 * stolen away. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
 {
     Frame *framePtr = (Frame *) clientData;
     Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *) clientData;
 
     /*
-     * This should only happen in a labelframe but it doesn't
-     * hurt to be careful.
+     * This should only happen in a labelframe but it doesn't hurt to be
+     * careful.
      */
-    
+
     if (labelframePtr->frame.type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
 	Tk_DeleteEventHandler(labelframePtr->labelWin, StructureNotifyMask,
 		FrameStructureProc, (ClientData) labelframePtr);
@@ -1938,20 +1919,46 @@ FrameLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
     FrameWorldChanged((ClientData) framePtr);
 }
 
+void
+TkMapTopFrame (tkwin)
+     Tk_Window tkwin;
+{
+    Frame *framePtr = ((TkWindow*)tkwin)->instanceData;
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
+    if (Tk_IsTopLevel(tkwin) && framePtr->type == TYPE_FRAME) {
+	framePtr->type = TYPE_TOPLEVEL;
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(MapFrame, (ClientData)framePtr);
+	if (framePtr->menuName != NULL) {
+	    TkSetWindowMenuBar(framePtr->interp, framePtr->tkwin, NULL,
+			       framePtr->menuName);
+	}
+    } else if (!Tk_IsTopLevel(tkwin) && framePtr->type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL) {
+	framePtr->type = TYPE_FRAME;
+    } else {
+	/* Not a frame or toplevel, skip it */
+	return;
+    }
+    /*
+     * The option table has already been created so 
+     * the cached pointer will be returned.
+     */
+    optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(framePtr->interp, optionSpecs[framePtr->type]);
+    framePtr->optionTable = optionTable;
+}
+
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkToplevelWindowFromCommandToken --
  *
- *	If the given command name to the command for a toplevel window
- *	in the given interpreter, return the tkwin for that toplevel
- *	window.  Note that this lookup can't be done using the
- *	standard tkwin internal table because the command might have
- *	been renamed.
+ *	If the given command name to the command for a toplevel window in the
+ *	given interpreter, return the tkwin for that toplevel window. Note
+ *	that this lookup can't be done using the standard tkwin internal table
+ *	because the command might have been renamed.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A Tk_Window token, or NULL if the name does not refer to a
- *	toplevel window.
+ *	A Tk_Window token, or NULL if the name does not refer to a toplevel
+ *	window.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1960,9 +1967,9 @@ FrameLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
  */
 
 Tk_Window
-TkToplevelWindowForCommand(interp, cmdName)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    CONST char *cmdName;
+TkToplevelWindowForCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    CONST char *cmdName)
 {
     Tcl_CmdInfo cmdInfo;
     Frame *framePtr;
@@ -1979,3 +1986,11 @@ TkToplevelWindowForCommand(interp, cmdName)
     }
     return framePtr->tkwin;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkGC.c b/generic/tkGC.c
index 46a3a56..800e4d3 100644
--- a/generic/tkGC.c
+++ b/generic/tkGC.c
@@ -1,24 +1,23 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkGC.c --
  *
- *	This file maintains a database of read-only graphics contexts 
- *	for the Tk toolkit, in order to allow GC's to be shared.
+ *	This file maintains a database of read-only graphics contexts for the
+ *	Tk toolkit, in order to allow GC's to be shared.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * One of the following data structures exists for each GC that is
- * currently active.  The structure is indexed with two hash tables,
- * one based on the values in the graphics context and the other
- * based on the display and GC identifier.
+ * One of the following data structures exists for each GC that is currently
+ * active. The structure is indexed with two hash tables, one based on the
+ * values in the graphics context and the other based on the display and GC
+ * identifier.
  */
 
 typedef struct {
@@ -37,48 +36,48 @@ typedef struct {
 } ValueKey;
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		GCInit _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+static void		GCInit(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_GetGC --
  *
- *	Given a desired set of values for a graphics context, find
- *	a read-only graphics context with the desired values.
+ *	Given a desired set of values for a graphics context, find a read-only
+ *	graphics context with the desired values.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired graphics
- *	context.  The caller should never modify this GC, and should
- *	call Tk_FreeGC when the GC is no longer needed.
+ *	The return value is the X identifer for the desired graphics context.
+ *	The caller should never modify this GC, and should call Tk_FreeGC when
+ *	the GC is no longer needed.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The GC is added to an internal database with a reference count.
- *	For each call to this procedure, there should eventually be a call
- *	to Tk_FreeGC, so that the database can be cleaned up when GC's
- *	aren't needed anymore.
+ *	The GC is added to an internal database with a reference count. For
+ *	each call to this function, there should eventually be a call to
+ *	Tk_FreeGC, so that the database can be cleaned up when GC's aren't
+ *	needed anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 GC
-Tk_GetGC(tkwin, valueMask, valuePtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which GC will be used. */
-    register unsigned long valueMask;
-				/* 1 bits correspond to values specified
-				 * in *valuesPtr;  other values are set
-				 * from defaults. */
-    register XGCValues *valuePtr;
-				/* Values are specified here for bits set
-				 * in valueMask. */
+Tk_GetGC(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which GC will be used. */
+    register unsigned long valueMask,
+				/* 1 bits correspond to values specified in
+				 * *valuesPtr; other values are set from
+				 * defaults. */
+    register XGCValues *valuePtr)
+				/* Values are specified here for bits set in
+				 * valueMask. */
 {
     ValueKey valueKey;
     Tcl_HashEntry *valueHashPtr, *idHashPtr;
     register TkGC *gcPtr;
-    int new;
+    int isNew;
     Drawable d, freeDrawable;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
@@ -87,15 +86,15 @@ Tk_GetGC(tkwin, valueMask, valuePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Must zero valueKey at start to clear out pad bytes that may be
-     * part of structure on some systems.
+     * Must zero valueKey at start to clear out pad bytes that may be part of
+     * structure on some systems.
      */
 
-    memset((VOID *) &valueKey, 0, sizeof(valueKey));
+    memset(&valueKey, 0, sizeof(valueKey));
 
     /*
-     * First, check to see if there's already a GC that will work
-     * for this request (exact matches only, sorry).
+     * First, check to see if there's already a GC that will work for this
+     * request (exact matches only, sorry).
      */
 
     if (valueMask & GCFunction) {
@@ -216,24 +215,24 @@ Tk_GetGC(tkwin, valueMask, valuePtr)
     valueKey.display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
     valueKey.screenNum = Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin);
     valueKey.depth = Tk_Depth(tkwin);
-    valueHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->gcValueTable, 
-            (char *) &valueKey, &new);
-    if (!new) {
+    valueHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->gcValueTable,
+	    (char *) &valueKey, &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
 	gcPtr = (TkGC *) Tcl_GetHashValue(valueHashPtr);
 	gcPtr->refCount++;
 	return gcPtr->gc;
     }
 
     /*
-     * No GC is currently available for this set of values.  Allocate a
-     * new GC and add a new structure to the database.
+     * No GC is currently available for this set of values. Allocate a new GC
+     * and add a new structure to the database.
      */
 
     gcPtr = (TkGC *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkGC));
 
     /*
-     * Find or make a drawable to use to specify the screen and depth
-     * of the GC.  We may have to make a small pixmap, to avoid doing
+     * Find or make a drawable to use to specify the screen and depth of the
+     * GC. We may have to make a small pixmap, to avoid doing
      * Tk_MakeWindowExist on the window.
      */
 
@@ -254,10 +253,10 @@ Tk_GetGC(tkwin, valueMask, valuePtr)
     gcPtr->display = valueKey.display;
     gcPtr->refCount = 1;
     gcPtr->valueHashPtr = valueHashPtr;
-    idHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->gcIdTable, 
-            (char *) gcPtr->gc, &new);
-    if (!new) {
-	panic("GC already registered in Tk_GetGC");
+    idHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->gcIdTable,
+	    (char *) gcPtr->gc, &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
+	Tcl_Panic("GC already registered in Tk_GetGC");
     }
     Tcl_SetHashValue(valueHashPtr, gcPtr);
     Tcl_SetHashValue(idHashPtr, gcPtr);
@@ -273,43 +272,44 @@ Tk_GetGC(tkwin, valueMask, valuePtr)
  *
  * Tk_FreeGC --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to release a graphics context allocated by
+ *	This function is called to release a graphics context allocated by
  *	Tk_GetGC.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The reference count associated with gc is decremented, and
- *	gc is officially deallocated if no-one is using it anymore.
+ *	The reference count associated with gc is decremented, and gc is
+ *	officially deallocated if no-one is using it anymore.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeGC(display, gc)
-    Display *display;		/* Display for which gc was allocated. */
-    GC gc;			/* Graphics context to be released. */
+Tk_FreeGC(
+    Display *display,		/* Display for which gc was allocated. */
+    GC gc)			/* Graphics context to be released. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr;
     register TkGC *gcPtr;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
 
     if (!dispPtr->gcInit) {
-	panic("Tk_FreeGC called before Tk_GetGC");
+	Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeGC called before Tk_GetGC");
     }
     if (dispPtr->gcInit < 0) {
 	/*
-	 * The GCCleanup has been called, and remaining GCs have been
-	 * freed.  This may still get called by other things shutting
-	 * down, but the GCs should no longer be in use.
+	 * The GCCleanup has been called, and remaining GCs have been freed.
+	 * This may still get called by other things shutting down, but the
+	 * GCs should no longer be in use.
 	 */
+
 	return;
     }
 
     idHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->gcIdTable, (char *) gc);
     if (idHashPtr == NULL) {
-	panic("Tk_FreeGC received unknown gc argument");
+	Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeGC received unknown gc argument");
     }
     gcPtr = (TkGC *) Tcl_GetHashValue(idHashPtr);
     gcPtr->refCount--;
@@ -327,9 +327,8 @@ Tk_FreeGC(display, gc)
  *
  * TkGCCleanup --
  *
- *	Frees the structures used for GC management.
- *	We need to have it called near the end, when other cleanup that
- *	calls Tk_FreeGC is all done.
+ *	Frees the structures used for GC management. We need to have it called
+ *	near the end, when other cleanup that calls Tk_FreeGC is all done.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -341,22 +340,23 @@ Tk_FreeGC(display, gc)
  */
 
 void
-TkGCCleanup(dispPtr)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;	/* display to clean up resources in */
+TkGCCleanup(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr)		/* display to clean up resources in */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
     TkGC *gcPtr;
 
     for (entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&dispPtr->gcIdTable, &search);
-	 entryPtr != NULL;
-	 entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	    entryPtr != NULL; entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	gcPtr = (TkGC *) Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+
 	/*
-	 * This call is not needed, as it is only used on Unix to restore
-	 * the Id to the stack pool, and we don't want to use them anymore.
+	 * This call is not needed, as it is only used on Unix to restore the
+	 * Id to the stack pool, and we don't want to use them anymore.
 	 *   Tk_FreeXId(gcPtr->display, (XID) XGContextFromGC(gcPtr->gc));
 	 */
+
 	XFreeGC(gcPtr->display, gcPtr->gc);
 	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(gcPtr->valueHashPtr);
 	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entryPtr);
@@ -384,13 +384,21 @@ TkGCCleanup(dispPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-GCInit(dispPtr)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+GCInit(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr)
 {
     if (dispPtr->gcInit < 0) {
-	panic("called GCInit after GCCleanup");
+	Tcl_Panic("called GCInit after GCCleanup");
     }
     dispPtr->gcInit = 1;
     Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->gcValueTable, sizeof(ValueKey)/sizeof(int));
     Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->gcIdTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkGeometry.c b/generic/tkGeometry.c
index d53b6dd..4c8e4f8 100644
--- a/generic/tkGeometry.c
+++ b/generic/tkGeometry.c
@@ -1,23 +1,22 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkGeometry.c --
  *
- *	This file contains generic Tk code for geometry management
- *	(stuff that's used by all geometry managers).
+ *	This file contains generic Tk code for geometry management (stuff
+ *	that's used by all geometry managers).
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * Data structures of the following type are used by Tk_MaintainGeometry.
- * For each slave managed by Tk_MaintainGeometry, there is one of these
- * structures associated with its master.
+ * Data structures of the following type are used by Tk_MaintainGeometry. For
+ * each slave managed by Tk_MaintainGeometry, there is one of these structures
+ * associated with its master.
  */
 
 typedef struct MaintainSlave {
@@ -29,68 +28,67 @@ typedef struct MaintainSlave {
 				 * master. */
     int width, height;		/* Desired dimensions of slave. */
     struct MaintainSlave *nextPtr;
-				/* Next in list of Maintains associated
-				 * with master. */
+				/* Next in list of Maintains associated with
+				 * master. */
 } MaintainSlave;
 
 /*
- * For each window that has been specified as a master to
- * Tk_MaintainGeometry, there is a structure of the following type:
+ * For each window that has been specified as a master to Tk_MaintainGeometry,
+ * there is a structure of the following type:
  */
 
 typedef struct MaintainMaster {
-    Tk_Window ancestor;		/* The lowest ancestor of this window
-				 * for which we have *not* created a
-				 * StructureNotify handler.  May be the
-				 * same as the window itself. */
-    int checkScheduled;		/* Non-zero means that there is already a
-				 * call to MaintainCheckProc scheduled as
-				 * an idle handler. */
-    MaintainSlave *slavePtr;	/* First in list of all slaves associated
-				 * with this master. */
+    Tk_Window ancestor;		/* The lowest ancestor of this window for
+				 * which we have *not* created a
+				 * StructureNotify handler. May be the same as
+				 * the window itself. */
+    int checkScheduled;		/* Non-zero means that there is already a call
+				 * to MaintainCheckProc scheduled as an idle
+				 * handler. */
+    MaintainSlave *slavePtr;	/* First in list of all slaves associated with
+				 * this master. */
 } MaintainMaster;
 
 /*
  * Prototypes for static procedures in this file:
  */
 
-static void		MaintainCheckProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		MaintainMasterProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		MaintainSlaveProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		MaintainCheckProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		MaintainMasterProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		MaintainSlaveProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_ManageGeometry --
  *
- *	Arrange for a particular procedure to manage the geometry
- *	of a given slave window.
+ *	Arrange for a particular procedure to manage the geometry of a given
+ *	slave window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Proc becomes the new geometry manager for tkwin, replacing
- *	any previous geometry manager.  The geometry manager will
- *	be notified (by calling procedures in *mgrPtr) when interesting
- *	things happen in the future.  If there was an existing geometry
- *	manager for tkwin different from the new one, it is notified
- *	by calling its lostSlaveProc.
+ *	Proc becomes the new geometry manager for tkwin, replacing any
+ *	previous geometry manager. The geometry manager will be notified (by
+ *	calling procedures in *mgrPtr) when interesting things happen in the
+ *	future. If there was an existing geometry manager for tkwin different
+ *	from the new one, it is notified by calling its lostSlaveProc.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_ManageGeometry(tkwin, mgrPtr, clientData)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window whose geometry is to
-				 * be managed by proc.  */
-    Tk_GeomMgr *mgrPtr;		/* Static structure describing the
-				 * geometry manager.  This structure
-				 * must never go away. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary one-word argument to
-				 * pass to geometry manager procedures. */
+Tk_ManageGeometry(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window whose geometry is to be managed by
+				 * proc. */
+    CONST Tk_GeomMgr *mgrPtr,	/* Static structure describing the geometry
+				 * manager. This structure must never go
+				 * away. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Arbitrary one-word argument to pass to
+				 * geometry manager procedures. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -110,37 +108,35 @@ Tk_ManageGeometry(tkwin, mgrPtr, clientData)
  *
  * Tk_GeometryRequest --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by widget code to indicate
- *	its preferences about the size of a window it manages.
- *	In general, widget code should call this procedure
- *	rather than Tk_ResizeWindow.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by widget code to indicate its preferences
+ *	about the size of a window it manages. In general, widget code should
+ *	call this procedure rather than Tk_ResizeWindow.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The geometry manager for tkwin (if any) is invoked to
- *	handle the request.  If possible, it will reconfigure
- *	tkwin and/or other windows to satisfy the request.  The
- *	caller gets no indication of success or failure, but it
- *	will get X events if the window size was actually
+ *	The geometry manager for tkwin (if any) is invoked to handle the
+ *	request. If possible, it will reconfigure tkwin and/or other windows
+ *	to satisfy the request. The caller gets no indication of success or
+ *	failure, but it will get X events if the window size was actually
  *	changed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_GeometryRequest(tkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that geometry information
-				 * pertains to. */
-    int reqWidth, reqHeight;	/* Minimum desired dimensions for
-				 * window, in pixels. */
+Tk_GeometryRequest(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window that geometry information pertains
+				 * to. */
+    int reqWidth, int reqHeight)/* Minimum desired dimensions for window, in
+				 * pixels. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
     /*
-     * X gets very upset if a window requests a width or height of
-     * zero, so rounds requested sizes up to at least 1.
+     * X gets very upset if a window requests a width or height of zero, so
+     * rounds requested sizes up to at least 1.
      */
 
     if (reqWidth <= 0) {
@@ -165,9 +161,9 @@ Tk_GeometryRequest(tkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight)
  *
  * Tk_SetInternalBorderEx --
  *
- *	Notify relevant geometry managers that a window has an internal
- *	border of a given width and that child windows should not be
- *	placed on that border.
+ *	Notify relevant geometry managers that a window has an internal border
+ *	of a given width and that child windows should not be placed on that
+ *	border.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -181,10 +177,10 @@ Tk_GeometryRequest(tkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_SetInternalBorderEx(tkwin, left, right, top, bottom)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that will have internal border. */
-    int left, right;		/* Width of internal border, in pixels. */
-    int top, bottom;
+Tk_SetInternalBorderEx(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window that will have internal border. */
+    int left, int right,	/* Width of internal border, in pixels. */
+    int top, int bottom)
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     register int changed = 0;
@@ -223,40 +219,40 @@ Tk_SetInternalBorderEx(tkwin, left, right, top, bottom)
 
     /*
      * All the slaves for which this is the master window must now be
-     * repositioned to take account of the new internal border width.
-     * To signal all the geometry managers to do this, just resize the
-     * window to its current size.  The ConfigureNotify event will
-     * cause geometry managers to recompute everything.
+     * repositioned to take account of the new internal border width. To
+     * signal all the geometry managers to do this, just resize the window to
+     * its current size. The ConfigureNotify event will cause geometry
+     * managers to recompute everything.
      */
 
     if (changed) {
 	Tk_ResizeWindow(tkwin, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin));
     }
 }
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_SetInternalBorder --
  *
- *	Notify relevant geometry managers that a window has an internal
- *	border of a given width and that child windows should not be
- *	placed on that border.
+ *	Notify relevant geometry managers that a window has an internal border
+ *	of a given width and that child windows should not be placed on that
+ *	border.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The border width is recorded for the window, and all geometry
- *	managers of all children are notified so that can re-layout, if
- *	necessary.
+ *	The border width is recorded for the window, and all geometry managers
+ *	of all children are notified so that can re-layout, if necessary.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_SetInternalBorder(tkwin, width)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that will have internal border. */
-    int width;			/* Width of internal border, in pixels. */
+Tk_SetInternalBorder(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window that will have internal border. */
+    int width)			/* Width of internal border, in pixels. */
 {
     Tk_SetInternalBorderEx(tkwin, width, width, width, width);
 }
@@ -266,23 +262,23 @@ Tk_SetInternalBorder(tkwin, width)
  *
  * Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize --
  *
- *	Notify relevant geometry managers that a window has a minimum
- *	request size.
+ *	Notify relevant geometry managers that a window has a minimum request
+ *	size.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The minimum request size is recorded for the window, and 
- *      a new size is requested for the window, if necessary.
+ *	The minimum request size is recorded for the window, and a new size is
+ *	requested for the window, if necessary.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize(tkwin, minWidth, minHeight)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that will have internal border. */
-    int minWidth, minHeight;	/* Minimum requested size, in pixels. */
+Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window that will have internal border. */
+    int minWidth, int minHeight)/* Minimum requested size, in pixels. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -295,11 +291,11 @@ Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize(tkwin, minWidth, minHeight)
     winPtr->minReqHeight = minHeight;
 
     /*
-     * The changed min size may cause geometry managers to get a
-     * different result, so make them recompute.
-     * To signal all the geometry managers to do this, just resize the
-     * window to its current size.  The ConfigureNotify event will
-     * cause geometry managers to recompute everything.
+     * The changed min size may cause geometry managers to get a different
+     * result, so make them recompute. To signal all the geometry managers to
+     * do this, just resize the window to its current size. The
+     * ConfigureNotify event will cause geometry managers to recompute
+     * everything.
      */
 
     Tk_ResizeWindow(tkwin, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin));
@@ -310,40 +306,40 @@ Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize(tkwin, minWidth, minHeight)
  *
  * Tk_MaintainGeometry --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by geometry managers to handle slaves
- *	whose master's are not their parents.  It translates the desired
- *	geometry for the slave into the coordinate system of the parent
- *	and respositions the slave if it isn't already at the right place.
- *	Furthermore, it sets up event handlers so that if the master (or
- *	any of its ancestors up to the slave's parent) is mapped, unmapped,
- *	or moved, then the slave will be adjusted to match.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by geometry managers to handle slaves whose
+ *	master's are not their parents. It translates the desired geometry for
+ *	the slave into the coordinate system of the parent and respositions
+ *	the slave if it isn't already at the right place. Furthermore, it sets
+ *	up event handlers so that if the master (or any of its ancestors up to
+ *	the slave's parent) is mapped, unmapped, or moved, then the slave will
+ *	be adjusted to match.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Event handlers are created and state is allocated to keep track
- *	of slave.  Note:  if slave was already managed for master by
- *	Tk_MaintainGeometry, then the previous information is replaced
- *	with the new information.  The caller must eventually call
- *	Tk_UnmaintainGeometry to eliminate the correspondence (or, the
- *	state is automatically freed when either window is destroyed).
+ *	Event handlers are created and state is allocated to keep track of
+ *	slave. Note: if slave was already managed for master by
+ *	Tk_MaintainGeometry, then the previous information is replaced with
+ *	the new information. The caller must eventually call
+ *	Tk_UnmaintainGeometry to eliminate the correspondence (or, the state
+ *	is automatically freed when either window is destroyed).
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_MaintainGeometry(slave, master, x, y, width, height)
-    Tk_Window slave;		/* Slave for geometry management. */
-    Tk_Window master;		/* Master for slave; must be a descendant
-				 * of slave's parent. */
-    int x, y;			/* Desired position of slave within master. */
-    int width, height;		/* Desired dimensions for slave. */
+Tk_MaintainGeometry(
+    Tk_Window slave,		/* Slave for geometry management. */
+    Tk_Window master,		/* Master for slave; must be a descendant of
+				 * slave's parent. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Desired position of slave within master. */
+    int width, int height)	/* Desired dimensions for slave. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     MaintainMaster *masterPtr;
     register MaintainSlave *slavePtr;
-    int new, map;
+    int isNew, map;
     Tk_Window ancestor, parent;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) master)->dispPtr;
 
@@ -354,6 +350,7 @@ Tk_MaintainGeometry(slave, master, x, y, width, height)
 	 * call to Tk_MoveResizeWindow; the parent/child relationship will
 	 * take care of the rest.
 	 */
+
 	Tk_MoveResizeWindow(slave, x, y, width, height);
 
 	/*
@@ -361,6 +358,7 @@ Tk_MaintainGeometry(slave, master, x, y, width, height)
 	 * until the master is mapped later (in which case mapping the slave
 	 * is taken care of elsewhere).
 	 */
+
 	if (Tk_IsMapped(master)) {
 	    Tk_MapWindow(slave);
 	}
@@ -373,14 +371,14 @@ Tk_MaintainGeometry(slave, master, x, y, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * See if there is already a MaintainMaster structure for the master;
-     * if not, then create one.
+     * See if there is already a MaintainMaster structure for the master; if
+     * not, then create one.
      */
 
     parent = Tk_Parent(slave);
-    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->maintainHashTable, 
-            (char *) master, &new);
-    if (!new) {
+    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->maintainHashTable,
+	    (char *) master, &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
 	masterPtr = (MaintainMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
     } else {
 	masterPtr = (MaintainMaster *) ckalloc(sizeof(MaintainMaster));
@@ -391,8 +389,8 @@ Tk_MaintainGeometry(slave, master, x, y, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create a MaintainSlave structure for the slave if there isn't
-     * already one.
+     * Create a MaintainSlave structure for the slave if there isn't already
+     * one.
      */
 
     for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
@@ -410,10 +408,10 @@ Tk_MaintainGeometry(slave, master, x, y, width, height)
 	    (ClientData) slavePtr);
 
     /*
-     * Make sure that there are event handlers registered for all
-     * the windows between master and slave's parent (including master
-     * but not slave's parent).  There may already be handlers for master
-     * and some of its ancestors (masterPtr->ancestor tells how many).
+     * Make sure that there are event handlers registered for all the windows
+     * between master and slave's parent (including master but not slave's
+     * parent). There may already be handlers for master and some of its
+     * ancestors (masterPtr->ancestor tells how many).
      */
 
     for (ancestor = master; ancestor != parent;
@@ -426,11 +424,11 @@ Tk_MaintainGeometry(slave, master, x, y, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Fill in up-to-date information in the structure, then update the
-     * window if it's not currently in the right place or state.
+     * Fill in up-to-date information in the structure, then update the window
+     * if it's not currently in the right place or state.
      */
 
-    gotSlave:
+  gotSlave:
     slavePtr->x = x;
     slavePtr->y = y;
     slavePtr->width = width;
@@ -464,26 +462,25 @@ Tk_MaintainGeometry(slave, master, x, y, width, height)
  *
  * Tk_UnmaintainGeometry --
  *
- *	This procedure cancels a previous Tk_MaintainGeometry call,
- *	so that the relationship between slave and master is no longer
- *	maintained.
+ *	This procedure cancels a previous Tk_MaintainGeometry call, so that
+ *	the relationship between slave and master is no longer maintained.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The slave is unmapped and state is released, so that slave won't
- *	track master any more.  If we weren't previously managing slave
- *	relative to master, then this procedure has no effect.
+ *	The slave is unmapped and state is released, so that slave won't track
+ *	master any more. If we weren't previously managing slave relative to
+ *	master, then this procedure has no effect.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slave, master)
-    Tk_Window slave;		/* Slave for geometry management. */
-    Tk_Window master;		/* Master for slave; must be a descendant
-				 * of slave's parent. */
+Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(
+    Tk_Window slave,		/* Slave for geometry management. */
+    Tk_Window master)		/* Master for slave; must be a descendant of
+				 * slave's parent. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     MaintainMaster *masterPtr;
@@ -495,11 +492,11 @@ Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slave, master)
 	/*
 	 * If the slave is a direct descendant of the master,
 	 * Tk_MaintainGeometry will not have set up any of the extra
-	 * infrastructure.  Don't even bother to look for it, just return.
+	 * infrastructure. Don't even bother to look for it, just return.
 	 */
 	return;
     }
-    
+
     if (!dispPtr->geomInit) {
 	dispPtr->geomInit = 1;
 	Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->maintainHashTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
@@ -554,27 +551,27 @@ Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slave, master)
  *
  * MaintainMasterProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher in
- *	response to StructureNotify events on the master or one
- *	of its ancestors, on behalf of Tk_MaintainGeometry.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher in response to
+ *	StructureNotify events on the master or one of its ancestors, on
+ *	behalf of Tk_MaintainGeometry.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	It schedules a call to MaintainCheckProc, which will eventually
- *	caused the postions and mapped states to be recalculated for all
- *	the maintained slaves of the master.  Or, if the master window is
- *	being deleted then state is cleaned up.
+ *	It schedules a call to MaintainCheckProc, which will eventually caused
+ *	the postions and mapped states to be recalculated for all the
+ *	maintained slaves of the master. Or, if the master window is being
+ *	deleted then state is cleaned up.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-MaintainMasterProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to MaintainMaster structure
-					 * for the master window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Describes what just happened. */
+MaintainMasterProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to MaintainMaster structure for the
+				 * master window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     MaintainMaster *masterPtr = (MaintainMaster *) clientData;
     MaintainSlave *slavePtr;
@@ -589,9 +586,9 @@ MaintainMasterProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	}
     } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
 	/*
-	 * Delete all of the state associated with this master, but
-	 * be careful not to use masterPtr after the last slave is
-	 * deleted, since its memory will have been freed.
+	 * Delete all of the state associated with this master, but be careful
+	 * not to use masterPtr after the last slave is deleted, since its
+	 * memory will have been freed.
 	 */
 
 	done = 0;
@@ -610,25 +607,25 @@ MaintainMasterProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * MaintainSlaveProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher in
- *	response to StructureNotify events on a slave being managed
- *	by Tk_MaintainGeometry.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher in response to
+ *	StructureNotify events on a slave being managed by
+ *	Tk_MaintainGeometry.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the event is a DestroyNotify event then the Maintain state
- *	and event handlers for this slave are deleted.
+ *	If the event is a DestroyNotify event then the Maintain state and
+ *	event handlers for this slave are deleted.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-MaintainSlaveProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to MaintainSlave structure
-					 * for master-slave pair. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Describes what just happened. */
+MaintainSlaveProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to MaintainSlave structure for
+				 * master-slave pair. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     MaintainSlave *slavePtr = (MaintainSlave *) clientData;
 
@@ -642,12 +639,11 @@ MaintainSlaveProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * MaintainCheckProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher as an
- *	idle handler, when a master or one of its ancestors has been
- *	reconfigured, mapped, or unmapped.  Its job is to scan all of
- *	the slaves for the master and reposition them, map them, or
- *	unmap them as needed to maintain their geometry relative to
- *	the master.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher as an idle
+ *	handler, when a master or one of its ancestors has been reconfigured,
+ *	mapped, or unmapped. Its job is to scan all of the slaves for the
+ *	master and reposition them, map them, or unmap them as needed to
+ *	maintain their geometry relative to the master.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -659,9 +655,9 @@ MaintainSlaveProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-MaintainCheckProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to MaintainMaster structure
-					 * for the master window. */
+MaintainCheckProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to MaintainMaster structure for the
+				 * master window. */
 {
     MaintainMaster *masterPtr = (MaintainMaster *) clientData;
     MaintainSlave *slavePtr;
@@ -696,3 +692,11 @@ MaintainCheckProc(clientData)
 	}
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkGet.c b/generic/tkGet.c
index 10643ea..9fc0d50 100644
--- a/generic/tkGet.c
+++ b/generic/tkGet.c
@@ -1,27 +1,25 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkGet.c --
  *
- *	This file contains a number of "Tk_GetXXX" procedures, which
- *	parse text strings into useful forms for Tk.  This file has
- *	the simpler procedures, like Tk_GetDirection and Tk_GetUid.
- *	The more complex procedures like Tk_GetColor are in separate
- *	files.
+ *	This file contains a number of "Tk_GetXXX" procedures, which parse
+ *	text strings into useful forms for Tk. This file has the simpler
+ *	functions, like Tk_GetDirection and Tk_GetUid. The more complex
+ *	functions like Tk_GetColor are in separate files.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 
 /*
- * One of these structures is created per thread to store 
- * thread-specific data.  In this case, it is used to house the 
- * Tk_Uid structs used by each thread.  The "dataKey" below is 
- * used to locate the ThreadSpecificData for the current thread.
+ * One of these structures is created per thread to store thread-specific
+ * data. In this case, it is used to house the Tk_Uid structs used by each
+ * thread. The "dataKey" below is used to locate the ThreadSpecificData for
+ * the current thread.
  */
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
@@ -30,7 +28,7 @@ typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
-static void	FreeUidThreadExitProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+static void		FreeUidThreadExitProc(ClientData clientData);
 
 /*
  * The following tables defines the string values for reliefs, which are
@@ -38,12 +36,11 @@ static void	FreeUidThreadExitProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
  */
 
 static CONST char *anchorStrings[] = {
-    "n", "ne", "e", "se", "s", "sw", "w", "nw", "center", (char *) NULL
+    "n", "ne", "e", "se", "s", "sw", "w", "nw", "center", NULL
 };
 static CONST char *justifyStrings[] = {
-    "left", "right", "center", (char *) NULL
+    "left", "right", "center", NULL
 };
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -64,17 +61,17 @@ static CONST char *justifyStrings[] = {
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(interp, objPtr, anchorPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object we are trying to get the 
-				 * value from. */
-    Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr;	/* Where to place the Tk_Anchor that
+Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* The object we are trying to get the value
+				 * from. */
+    Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr)	/* Where to place the Tk_Anchor that
 				 * corresponds to the string value of
 				 * objPtr. */
 {
     int index, code;
 
-    code = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr, anchorStrings, "anchor", 0, 
+    code = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr, anchorStrings, "anchor", 0,
 	    &index);
     if (code == TCL_OK) {
 	*anchorPtr = (Tk_Anchor) index;
@@ -90,11 +87,10 @@ Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(interp, objPtr, anchorPtr)
  *	Given a string, return the corresponding Tk_Anchor.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result.  If
- *	TCL_OK is returned, then everything went well and the
- *	position is stored at *anchorPtr;  otherwise TCL_ERROR
- *	is returned and an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result. If TCL_OK is
+ *	returned, then everything went well and the position is stored at
+ *	*anchorPtr; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is
+ *	left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -103,62 +99,61 @@ Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(interp, objPtr, anchorPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetAnchor(interp, string, anchorPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Use this for error reporting. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String describing a direction. */
-    Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr;	/* Where to store Tk_Anchor corresponding
-				 * to string. */
+Tk_GetAnchor(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Use this for error reporting. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* String describing a direction. */
+    Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr)	/* Where to store Tk_Anchor corresponding to
+				 * string. */
 {
     switch (string[0]) {
-	case 'n':
-	    if (string[1] == 0) {
-		*anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_N;
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    } else if ((string[1] == 'e') && (string[2] == 0)) {
-		*anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_NE;
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    } else if ((string[1] == 'w') && (string[2] == 0)) {
-		*anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_NW;
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    }
-	    goto error;
-	case 's':
-	    if (string[1] == 0) {
-		*anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_S;
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    } else if ((string[1] == 'e') && (string[2] == 0)) {
-		*anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_SE;
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    } else if ((string[1] == 'w') && (string[2] == 0)) {
-		*anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_SW;
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    } else {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	case 'e':
-	    if (string[1] == 0) {
-		*anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_E;
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    }
-	    goto error;
-	case 'w':
-	    if (string[1] == 0) {
-		*anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_W;
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    }
-	    goto error;
-	case 'c':
-	    if (strncmp(string, "center", strlen(string)) == 0) {
-		*anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_CENTER;
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    }
+    case 'n':
+	if (string[1] == 0) {
+	    *anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_N;
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else if ((string[1] == 'e') && (string[2] == 0)) {
+	    *anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_NE;
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else if ((string[1] == 'w') && (string[2] == 0)) {
+	    *anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	goto error;
+    case 's':
+	if (string[1] == 0) {
+	    *anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_S;
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else if ((string[1] == 'e') && (string[2] == 0)) {
+	    *anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_SE;
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else if ((string[1] == 'w') && (string[2] == 0)) {
+	    *anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_SW;
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else {
 	    goto error;
+	}
+    case 'e':
+	if (string[1] == 0) {
+	    *anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_E;
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	goto error;
+    case 'w':
+	if (string[1] == 0) {
+	    *anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_W;
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	goto error;
+    case 'c':
+	if (strncmp(string, "center", strlen(string)) == 0) {
+	    *anchorPtr = TK_ANCHOR_CENTER;
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	goto error;
     }
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad anchor position \"", string,
-	    "\": must be n, ne, e, se, s, sw, w, nw, or center",
-	    (char *) NULL);
+	    "\": must be n, ne, e, se, s, sw, w, nw, or center", NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -167,8 +162,7 @@ Tk_GetAnchor(interp, string, anchorPtr)
  *
  * Tk_NameOfAnchor --
  *
- *	Given a Tk_Anchor, return the string that corresponds
- *	to it.
+ *	Given a Tk_Anchor, return the string that corresponds to it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -180,20 +174,20 @@ Tk_GetAnchor(interp, string, anchorPtr)
  */
 
 CONST char *
-Tk_NameOfAnchor(anchor)
-    Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Anchor for which identifying string
-				 * is desired. */
+Tk_NameOfAnchor(
+    Tk_Anchor anchor)		/* Anchor for which identifying string is
+				 * desired. */
 {
     switch (anchor) {
-	case TK_ANCHOR_N: return "n";
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NE: return "ne";
-	case TK_ANCHOR_E: return "e";
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SE: return "se";
-	case TK_ANCHOR_S: return "s";
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SW: return "sw";
-	case TK_ANCHOR_W: return "w";
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NW: return "nw";
-	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER: return "center";
+    case TK_ANCHOR_N: return "n";
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NE: return "ne";
+    case TK_ANCHOR_E: return "e";
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SE: return "se";
+    case TK_ANCHOR_S: return "s";
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SW: return "sw";
+    case TK_ANCHOR_W: return "w";
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NW: return "nw";
+    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER: return "center";
     }
     return "unknown anchor position";
 }
@@ -206,11 +200,10 @@ Tk_NameOfAnchor(anchor)
  *	Given a string, return the corresponding Tk JoinStyle.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result.  If
- *	TCL_OK is returned, then everything went well and the
- *	justification is stored at *joinPtr;  otherwise
- *	TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result. If TCL_OK is
+ *	returned, then everything went well and the justification is stored at
+ *	*joinPtr; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left
+ *	in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -219,11 +212,11 @@ Tk_NameOfAnchor(anchor)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetJoinStyle(interp, string, joinPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Use this for error reporting. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String describing a justification style. */
-    int *joinPtr;		/* Where to store join style corresponding
-				 * to string. */
+Tk_GetJoinStyle(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Use this for error reporting. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* String describing a justification style. */
+    int *joinPtr)		/* Where to store join style corresponding to
+				 * string. */
 {
     int c;
     size_t length;
@@ -245,8 +238,7 @@ Tk_GetJoinStyle(interp, string, joinPtr)
     }
 
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad join style \"", string,
-	    "\": must be bevel, miter, or round",
-	    (char *) NULL);
+	    "\": must be bevel, miter, or round", NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -255,8 +247,7 @@ Tk_GetJoinStyle(interp, string, joinPtr)
  *
  * Tk_NameOfJoinStyle --
  *
- *	Given a Tk JoinStyle, return the string that corresponds
- *	to it.
+ *	Given a Tk JoinStyle, return the string that corresponds to it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -268,14 +259,14 @@ Tk_GetJoinStyle(interp, string, joinPtr)
  */
 
 CONST char *
-Tk_NameOfJoinStyle(join)
-    int join;			/* Join style for which identifying string
-				 * is desired. */
+Tk_NameOfJoinStyle(
+    int join)			/* Join style for which identifying string is
+				 * desired. */
 {
     switch (join) {
-	case JoinBevel: return "bevel";
-	case JoinMiter: return "miter";
-	case JoinRound: return "round";
+    case JoinBevel: return "bevel";
+    case JoinMiter: return "miter";
+    case JoinRound: return "round";
     }
     return "unknown join style";
 }
@@ -288,11 +279,10 @@ Tk_NameOfJoinStyle(join)
  *	Given a string, return the corresponding Tk CapStyle.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result.  If
- *	TCL_OK is returned, then everything went well and the
- *	justification is stored at *capPtr;  otherwise
- *	TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result. If TCL_OK is
+ *	returned, then everything went well and the justification is stored at
+ *	*capPtr; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left
+ *	in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -301,11 +291,11 @@ Tk_NameOfJoinStyle(join)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetCapStyle(interp, string, capPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Use this for error reporting. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String describing a justification style. */
-    int *capPtr;		/* Where to store cap style corresponding
-				 * to string. */
+Tk_GetCapStyle(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Use this for error reporting. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* String describing a justification style. */
+    int *capPtr)		/* Where to store cap style corresponding to
+				 * string. */
 {
     int c;
     size_t length;
@@ -327,8 +317,7 @@ Tk_GetCapStyle(interp, string, capPtr)
     }
 
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad cap style \"", string,
-	    "\": must be butt, projecting, or round",
-	    (char *) NULL);
+	    "\": must be butt, projecting, or round", NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -337,8 +326,7 @@ Tk_GetCapStyle(interp, string, capPtr)
  *
  * Tk_NameOfCapStyle --
  *
- *	Given a Tk CapStyle, return the string that corresponds
- *	to it.
+ *	Given a Tk CapStyle, return the string that corresponds to it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -350,14 +338,14 @@ Tk_GetCapStyle(interp, string, capPtr)
  */
 
 CONST char *
-Tk_NameOfCapStyle(cap)
-    int cap;			/* Cap style for which identifying string
-				 * is desired. */
+Tk_NameOfCapStyle(
+    int cap)			/* Cap style for which identifying string is
+				 * desired. */
 {
     switch (cap) {
-	case CapButt: return "butt";
-	case CapProjecting: return "projecting";
-	case CapRound: return "round";
+    case CapButt: return "butt";
+    case CapProjecting: return "projecting";
+    case CapRound: return "round";
     }
     return "unknown cap style";
 }
@@ -381,11 +369,11 @@ Tk_NameOfCapStyle(cap)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetJustifyFromObj(interp, objPtr, justifyPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object we are trying to get the 
-				 * value from. */
-    Tk_Justify *justifyPtr;	/* Where to place the Tk_Justify that
+Tk_GetJustifyFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* The object we are trying to get the value
+				 * from. */
+    Tk_Justify *justifyPtr)	/* Where to place the Tk_Justify that
 				 * corresponds to the string value of
 				 * objPtr. */
 {
@@ -407,11 +395,10 @@ Tk_GetJustifyFromObj(interp, objPtr, justifyPtr)
  *	Given a string, return the corresponding Tk_Justify.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result.  If
- *	TCL_OK is returned, then everything went well and the
- *	justification is stored at *justifyPtr;  otherwise
- *	TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result. If TCL_OK is
+ *	returned, then everything went well and the justification is stored at
+ *	*justifyPtr; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is
+ *	left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -420,11 +407,11 @@ Tk_GetJustifyFromObj(interp, objPtr, justifyPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetJustify(interp, string, justifyPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Use this for error reporting. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String describing a justification style. */
-    Tk_Justify *justifyPtr;	/* Where to store Tk_Justify corresponding
-				 * to string. */
+Tk_GetJustify(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Use this for error reporting. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* String describing a justification style. */
+    Tk_Justify *justifyPtr)	/* Where to store Tk_Justify corresponding to
+				 * string. */
 {
     int c;
     size_t length;
@@ -446,8 +433,7 @@ Tk_GetJustify(interp, string, justifyPtr)
     }
 
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad justification \"", string,
-	    "\": must be left, right, or center",
-	    (char *) NULL);
+	    "\": must be left, right, or center", NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -469,14 +455,14 @@ Tk_GetJustify(interp, string, justifyPtr)
  */
 
 CONST char *
-Tk_NameOfJustify(justify)
-    Tk_Justify justify;		/* Justification style for which
-				 * identifying string is desired. */
+Tk_NameOfJustify(
+    Tk_Justify justify)		/* Justification style for which identifying
+				 * string is desired. */
 {
     switch (justify) {
-	case TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT: return "left";
-	case TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT: return "right";
-	case TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER: return "center";
+    case TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT: return "left";
+    case TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT: return "right";
+    case TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER: return "center";
     }
     return "unknown justification style";
 }
@@ -498,10 +484,10 @@ Tk_NameOfJustify(justify)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeUidThreadExitProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Not used. */
+FreeUidThreadExitProc(
+    ClientData clientData)		/* Not used. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&tsdPtr->uidTable);
     tsdPtr->initialized = 0;
@@ -512,17 +498,16 @@ FreeUidThreadExitProc(clientData)
  *
  * Tk_GetUid --
  *
- *	Given a string, this procedure returns a unique identifier
- *	for the string.
+ *	Given a string, this function returns a unique identifier for the
+ *	string.
  *
  * Results:
- *	This procedure returns a Tk_Uid corresponding to the "string"
- *	argument.  The Tk_Uid has a string value identical to string
- *	(strcmp will return 0), but it's guaranteed that any other
- *	calls to this procedure with a string equal to "string" will
- *	return exactly the same result (i.e. can compare Tk_Uid
- *	*values* directly, without having to call strcmp on what they
- *	point to).
+ *	This function returns a Tk_Uid corresponding to the "string" argument.
+ *	The Tk_Uid has a string value identical to string (strcmp will return
+ *	0), but it's guaranteed that any other calls to this function with a
+ *	string equal to "string" will return exactly the same result (i.e. can
+ *	compare Tk_Uid *values* directly, without having to call strcmp on
+ *	what they point to).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	New information may be entered into the identifier table.
@@ -531,11 +516,11 @@ FreeUidThreadExitProc(clientData)
  */
 
 Tk_Uid
-Tk_GetUid(string)
-    CONST char *string;		/* String to convert. */
+Tk_GetUid(
+    CONST char *string)		/* String to convert. */
 {
     int dummy;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr = &tsdPtr->uidTable;
 
@@ -553,15 +538,14 @@ Tk_GetUid(string)
  *
  * Tk_GetScreenMM --
  *
- *	Given a string, returns the number of screen millimeters
- *	corresponding to that string.
+ *	Given a string, returns the number of screen millimeters corresponding
+ *	to that string.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result.  If
- *	TCL_OK is returned, then everything went well and the
- *	screen distance is stored at *doublePtr;  otherwise
- *	TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result. If TCL_OK is
+ *	returned, then everything went well and the screen distance is stored
+ *	at *doublePtr; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is
+ *	left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -570,13 +554,13 @@ Tk_GetUid(string)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetScreenMM(interp, tkwin, string, doublePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Use this for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window whose screen determines conversion
+Tk_GetScreenMM(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Use this for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window whose screen determines conversion
 				 * from centimeters and other absolute
 				 * units. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String describing a screen distance. */
-    double *doublePtr;		/* Place to store converted result. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* String describing a screen distance. */
+    double *doublePtr)		/* Place to store converted result. */
 {
     char *end;
     double d;
@@ -584,35 +568,34 @@ Tk_GetScreenMM(interp, tkwin, string, doublePtr)
     d = strtod(string, &end);
     if (end == string) {
 	error:
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad screen distance \"", string,
-		"\"", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad screen distance \"", string, "\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     while ((*end != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*end))) {
 	end++;
     }
     switch (*end) {
-	case 0:
-	    d /= WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
-	    d *= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
-	    break;
-	case 'c':
-	    d *= 10;
-	    end++;
-	    break;
-	case 'i':
-	    d *= 25.4;
-	    end++;
-	    break;
-	case 'm':
-	    end++;
-	    break;
-	case 'p':
-	    d *= 25.4/72.0;
-	    end++;
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    goto error;
+    case 0:
+	d /= WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	d *= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	break;
+    case 'c':
+	d *= 10;
+	end++;
+	break;
+    case 'i':
+	d *= 25.4;
+	end++;
+	break;
+    case 'm':
+	end++;
+	break;
+    case 'p':
+	d *= 25.4/72.0;
+	end++;
+	break;
+    default:
+	goto error;
     }
     while ((*end != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*end))) {
 	end++;
@@ -629,15 +612,14 @@ Tk_GetScreenMM(interp, tkwin, string, doublePtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetPixels --
  *
- *	Given a string, returns the number of pixels corresponding
- *	to that string.
+ *	Given a string, returns the number of pixels corresponding to that
+ *	string.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result.  If
- *	TCL_OK is returned, then everything went well and the
- *	rounded pixel distance is stored at *intPtr;  otherwise
- *	TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result. If TCL_OK is
+ *	returned, then everything went well and the rounded pixel distance is
+ *	stored at *intPtr; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -646,13 +628,13 @@ Tk_GetScreenMM(interp, tkwin, string, doublePtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, string, intPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Use this for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window whose screen determines conversion
+Tk_GetPixels(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Use this for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window whose screen determines conversion
 				 * from centimeters and other absolute
 				 * units. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String describing a number of pixels. */
-    int *intPtr;		/* Place to store converted result. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* String describing a number of pixels. */
+    int *intPtr)		/* Place to store converted result. */
 {
     double d;
 
@@ -672,15 +654,15 @@ Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, string, intPtr)
  *
  * TkGetDoublePixels --
  *
- *	Given a string, returns the number of pixels corresponding
- *	to that string.
+ *	Given a string, returns the number of pixels corresponding to that
+ *	string.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result.  If
- *	TCL_OK is returned, then everything went well and the
- *	pixel distance is stored at *doublePtr;  otherwise
- *	TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left in
- *	interp->result.
+
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result. If TCL_OK is
+ *	returned, then everything went well and the pixel distance is stored
+ *	at *doublePtr; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is
+ *	left in interp->result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -689,52 +671,51 @@ Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, string, intPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkGetDoublePixels(interp, tkwin, string, doublePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Use this for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window whose screen determines conversion
+TkGetDoublePixels(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Use this for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window whose screen determines conversion
 				 * from centimeters and other absolute
 				 * units. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String describing a number of pixels. */
-    double *doublePtr;		/* Place to store converted result. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* String describing a number of pixels. */
+    double *doublePtr)		/* Place to store converted result. */
 {
     char *end;
     double d;
 
     d = strtod((char *) string, &end);
     if (end == string) {
-	error:
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad screen distance \"", string,
-		"\"", (char *) NULL);
+    error:
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad screen distance \"", string, "\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     while ((*end != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*end))) {
 	end++;
     }
     switch (*end) {
-	case 0:
-	    break;
-	case 'c':
-	    d *= 10*WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
-	    d /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
-	    end++;
-	    break;
-	case 'i':
-	    d *= 25.4*WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
-	    d /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
-	    end++;
-	    break;
-	case 'm':
-	    d *= WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
-	    d /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
-	    end++;
-	    break;
-	case 'p':
-	    d *= (25.4/72.0)*WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
-	    d /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
-	    end++;
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    goto error;
+    case 0:
+	break;
+    case 'c':
+	d *= 10*WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	d /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	end++;
+	break;
+    case 'i':
+	d *= 25.4*WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	d /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	end++;
+	break;
+    case 'm':
+	d *= WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	d /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	end++;
+	break;
+    case 'p':
+	d *= (25.4/72.0)*WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	d /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	end++;
+	break;
+    default:
+	goto error;
     }
     while ((*end != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*end))) {
 	end++;
@@ -745,5 +726,11 @@ TkGetDoublePixels(interp, tkwin, string, doublePtr)
     *doublePtr = d;
     return TCL_OK;
 }
-
-
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkGrab.c b/generic/tkGrab.c
index 4fa7393..44a4f8c 100644
--- a/generic/tkGrab.c
+++ b/generic/tkGrab.c
@@ -1,45 +1,44 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkGrab.c --
  *
- *	This file provides procedures that implement grabs for Tk.
+ *	This file provides functions that implement grabs for Tk.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
-#if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
+#ifdef __WIN32__
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+#elif !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
 #include "tkUnixInt.h"
 #endif
 
 /*
- * The grab state machine has four states: ungrabbed, button pressed,
- * grabbed, and button pressed while grabbed.  In addition, there are
- * three pieces of grab state information: the current grab window,
- * the current restrict window, and whether the mouse is captured.
- *
- * The current grab window specifies the point in the Tk window
- * heirarchy above which pointer events will not be reported.  Any
- * window within the subtree below the grab window will continue to
- * receive events as normal.  Events outside of the grab tree will be
- * reported to the grab window.
- *
- * If the current restrict window is set, then all pointer events will
- * be reported only to the restrict window.  The restrict window is
- * normally set during an automatic button grab.
- *
- * The mouse capture state specifies whether the window system will
- * report mouse events outside of any Tk toplevels.  This is set
- * during a global grab or an automatic button grab.
- *
- * The transitions between different states is given in the following
- * table:
- * 
+ * The grab state machine has four states: ungrabbed, button pressed, grabbed,
+ * and button pressed while grabbed. In addition, there are three pieces of
+ * grab state information: the current grab window, the current restrict
+ * window, and whether the mouse is captured.
+ *
+ * The current grab window specifies the point in the Tk window heirarchy
+ * above which pointer events will not be reported. Any window within the
+ * subtree below the grab window will continue to receive events as normal.
+ * Events outside of the grab tree will be reported to the grab window.
+ *
+ * If the current restrict window is set, then all pointer events will be
+ * reported only to the restrict window. The restrict window is normally set
+ * during an automatic button grab.
+ *
+ * The mouse capture state specifies whether the window system will report
+ * mouse events outside of any Tk toplevels. This is set during a global grab
+ * or an automatic button grab.
+ *
+ * The transitions between different states is given in the following table:
+ *
  * Event\State	U	B	G	GB
  * -----------	--	--	--	--
  * FirstPress	B	B	GB	GB
@@ -60,15 +59,14 @@
  * Grabbed		 1		0		b/g
  * Grab and Button	 1		1		1
  *
- * Note: 0 means variable is set to NULL, 1 means variable is set to
- * some window, b/g means the variable is set to a window if a button
- * is currently down or a global grab is in effect.
+ * Note: 0 means variable is set to NULL, 1 means variable is set to some
+ * window, b/g means the variable is set to a window if a button is currently
+ * down or a global grab is in effect.
  *
- * The final complication to all of this is enter and leave events.
- * In order to correctly handle all of the various cases, Tk cannot
- * rely on X enter/leave events in all situations.  The following
- * describes the correct sequence of enter and leave events that
- * should be observed by Tk scripts:
+ * The final complication to all of this is enter and leave events. In order
+ * to correctly handle all of the various cases, Tk cannot rely on X
+ * enter/leave events in all situations. The following describes the correct
+ * sequence of enter and leave events that should be observed by Tk scripts:
  *
  * Event(state)		Enter/Leave From -> To
  * ------------		----------------------
@@ -80,13 +78,13 @@
  * Ungrab(G):		anc(grab window, event window) -> event window
  * Ungrab(GB):		restrict window -> event window
  *
- * Note: anc(x,y) returns the least ancestor of y that is in the tree
- * of x, terminating at toplevels.
+ * Note: anc(x,y) returns the least ancestor of y that is in the tree of x,
+ * terminating at toplevels.
  */
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used to pass information to 
- * GrabRestrictProc from EatGrabEvents.
+ * The following structure is used to pass information to GrabRestrictProc
+ * from EatGrabEvents.
  */
 
 typedef struct {
@@ -99,47 +97,46 @@ typedef struct {
  *
  * GRAB_GLOBAL			1 means this is a global grab (we grabbed via
  *				the server so all applications are locked out).
- *				0 means this is a local grab that affects
- *				only this application.
+ *				0 means this is a local grab that affects only
+ *				this application.
  * GRAB_TEMP_GLOBAL		1 means we've temporarily grabbed via the
- *				server because a button is down and we want
- *				to make sure that we get the button-up
- *				event.  The grab will be released when the
- *				last mouse button goes up.
+ *				server because a button is down and we want to
+ *				make sure that we get the button-up event. The
+ *				grab will be released when the last mouse
+ *				button goes up.
  */
 
 #define GRAB_GLOBAL		1
 #define GRAB_TEMP_GLOBAL	4
 
 /*
- * The following structure is a Tcl_Event that triggers a change in
- * the grabWinPtr field of a display.  This event guarantees that
- * the change occurs in the proper order relative to enter and leave
- * events.
+ * The following structure is a Tcl_Event that triggers a change in the
+ * grabWinPtr field of a display. This event guarantees that the change occurs
+ * in the proper order relative to enter and leave events.
  */
 
 typedef struct NewGrabWinEvent {
     Tcl_Event header;		/* Standard information for all Tcl events. */
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display whose grab window is to change. */
-    Window grabWindow;		/* New grab window for display.  This is
+    Window grabWindow;		/* New grab window for display. This is
 				 * recorded instead of a (TkWindow *) because
-				 * it will allow us to detect cases where
-				 * the window is destroyed before this event
-				 * is processed. */
+				 * it will allow us to detect cases where the
+				 * window is destroyed before this event is
+				 * processed. */
 } NewGrabWinEvent;
 
 /*
  * The following magic value is stored in the "send_event" field of
- * EnterNotify and LeaveNotify events that are generated in this
- * file.  This allows us to separate "real" events coming from the
- * server from those that we generated.
+ * EnterNotify and LeaveNotify events that are generated in this file. This
+ * allows us to separate "real" events coming from the server from those that
+ * we generated.
  */
 
 #define GENERATED_EVENT_MAGIC ((Bool) 0x147321ac)
 
 /*
- * Mask that selects any of the state bits corresponding to buttons,
- * plus masks that select individual buttons' bits:
+ * Mask that selects any of the state bits corresponding to buttons, plus
+ * masks that select individual buttons' bits:
  */
 
 #define ALL_BUTTONS \
@@ -149,32 +146,27 @@ static unsigned int buttonStates[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures declared later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions declared later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		EatGrabEvents _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr,
-			    unsigned int serial));
-static TkWindow *	FindCommonAncestor _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr1,
-			    TkWindow *winPtr2, int *countPtr1,
-			    int *countPtr2));
-static Tk_RestrictAction GrabRestrictProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData arg,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int		GrabWinEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Event *evPtr,
-			    int flags));
-static void		MovePointer2 _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *sourcePtr,
-			    TkWindow *destPtr, int mode, int leaveEvents,
-			    int EnterEvents));
-static void		QueueGrabWindowChange _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr,
-			    TkWindow *grabWinPtr));
-static void		ReleaseButtonGrab _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+static void		EatGrabEvents(TkDisplay *dispPtr, unsigned int serial);
+static TkWindow *	FindCommonAncestor(TkWindow *winPtr1,
+			    TkWindow *winPtr2, int *countPtr1, int *countPtr2);
+static Tk_RestrictAction GrabRestrictProc(ClientData arg, XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		GrabWinEventProc(Tcl_Event *evPtr, int flags);
+static void		MovePointer2(TkWindow *sourcePtr, TkWindow *destPtr,
+			    int mode, int leaveEvents, int EnterEvents);
+static void		QueueGrabWindowChange(TkDisplay *dispPtr,
+			    TkWindow *grabWinPtr);
+static void		ReleaseButtonGrab(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_GrabObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "grab" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "grab" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -187,12 +179,11 @@ static void		ReleaseButtonGrab _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 int
-Tk_GrabObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_GrabObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     int globalGrab;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
@@ -200,14 +191,16 @@ Tk_GrabObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     char *arg;
     int index;
     int len;
-    static CONST char *optionStrings[] = { "current", "release",
-					 "set", "status", (char *) NULL };
-  
-    static CONST char *flagStrings[] = { "-global", (char *) NULL };
-
-    enum options { GRABCMD_CURRENT, GRABCMD_RELEASE,
-		       GRABCMD_SET, GRABCMD_STATUS };
-    
+    static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
+	"current", "release", "set", "status", NULL
+    };
+    static CONST char *flagStrings[] = {
+	"-global", NULL
+    };
+    enum options {
+	GRABCMD_CURRENT, GRABCMD_RELEASE, GRABCMD_SET, GRABCMD_STATUS
+    };
+
     if (objc < 2) {
 	/*
 	 * Can't use Tcl_WrongNumArgs here because we want the message to
@@ -221,8 +214,7 @@ Tk_GrabObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
 		Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), " ?-global? window\" or \"",
-		Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), " option ?arg arg ...?\"",
-		(char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), " option ?arg arg ...?\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -262,115 +254,114 @@ Tk_GrabObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * First argument is not a window name and not "-global", find out
-     * which option it is.
+     * First argument is not a window name and not "-global", find out which
+     * option it is.
      */
 
     if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], optionStrings, "option", 0,
 	    &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case GRABCMD_CURRENT: {
-	    /* [grab current ?window?] */
-	    if (objc > 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "current ?window?");
+    case GRABCMD_CURRENT:
+	/* [grab current ?window?] */
+	if (objc > 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "current ?window?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		    (Tk_Window) clientData);
+	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp,
-			Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), (Tk_Window) clientData);
-		if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
+	    dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
+	    if (dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr != NULL) {
+		Tcl_SetResult(interp, dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr->pathName,
+			TCL_STATIC);
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    for (dispPtr = TkGetDisplayList(); dispPtr != NULL;
+		    dispPtr = dispPtr->nextPtr) {
 		if (dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr != NULL) {
-		    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
-			    dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr->pathName, TCL_STATIC);
-		}
-	    } else {
-		for (dispPtr = TkGetDisplayList(); dispPtr != NULL;
-		     dispPtr = dispPtr->nextPtr) {
-		    if (dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr != NULL) {
-			Tcl_AppendElement(interp,
-				dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr->pathName);
-		    }
+		    Tcl_AppendElement(interp,
+			    dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr->pathName);
 		}
 	    }
-	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
+	return TCL_OK;
 
-	case GRABCMD_RELEASE: {
-	    /* [grab release window] */
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "release window");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp,
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), (Tk_Window) clientData);
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	    } else {
-		Tk_Ungrab(tkwin);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case GRABCMD_RELEASE:
+	/* [grab release window] */
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "release window");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	
-	case GRABCMD_SET: {
-	    /* [grab set ?-global? window] */
-	    if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "set ?-global? window");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		globalGrab = 0;
-		tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp,
-			Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), (Tk_Window) clientData);
-	    } else {
-		globalGrab = 1;
-		/*
-		 * We could just test the argument by hand instead of using
-		 * Tcl_GetIndexFromObj; the benefit of using the function is
-		 * that it sets up the error message for us, so we are
-		 * certain to be consistant with the rest of Tcl.
-		 */
-		if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], flagStrings, "option",
-			0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp,
-			Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), (Tk_Window) clientData);
-	    }
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    return Tk_Grab(interp, tkwin, globalGrab);
+	tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		(Tk_Window) clientData);
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	} else {
+	    Tk_Ungrab(tkwin);
 	}
+	break;
 
-	case GRABCMD_STATUS: {
-	    /* [grab status window] */
-	    TkWindow *winPtr;
+    case GRABCMD_SET:
+	/* [grab set ?-global? window] */
+	if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "set ?-global? window");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    globalGrab = 0;
+	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		    (Tk_Window) clientData);
+	} else {
+	    globalGrab = 1;
 
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "status window");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp,
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), (Tk_Window) clientData);
-	    if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * We could just test the argument by hand instead of using
+	     * Tcl_GetIndexFromObj; the benefit of using the function is that
+	     * it sets up the error message for us, so we are certain to be
+	     * consistant with the rest of Tcl.
+	     */
+
+	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], flagStrings, "option",
+		    0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
-	    if (dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr != winPtr) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "none", TCL_STATIC);
-	    } else if (dispPtr->grabFlags & GRAB_GLOBAL) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "global", TCL_STATIC);
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "local", TCL_STATIC);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+		    (Tk_Window) clientData);
+	}
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	return Tk_Grab(interp, tkwin, globalGrab);
+
+    case GRABCMD_STATUS: {
+	/* [grab status window] */
+	TkWindow *winPtr;
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "status window");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		(Tk_Window) clientData);
+	if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
+	if (dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr != winPtr) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "none", TCL_STATIC);
+	} else if (dispPtr->grabFlags & GRAB_GLOBAL) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "global", TCL_STATIC);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "local", TCL_STATIC);
 	}
+	break;
+    }
     }
 
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -381,34 +372,32 @@ Tk_GrabObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * Tk_Grab --
  *
- *	Grabs the pointer and keyboard, so that mouse-related events are
- *	only reported relative to a given window and its descendants.
+ *	Grabs the pointer and keyboard, so that mouse-related events are only
+ *	reported relative to a given window and its descendants.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result is returned.  TCL_OK is the normal return
- *	value;  if the grab could not be set then TCL_ERROR is returned
- *	and the interp's result will hold an error message.
+ *	A standard Tcl result is returned. TCL_OK is the normal return value;
+ *	if the grab could not be set then TCL_ERROR is returned and the
+ *	interp's result will hold an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Once this call completes successfully, no window outside the
- *	tree rooted at tkwin will receive pointer- or keyboard-related
- *	events until the next call to Tk_Ungrab.  If a previous grab was
- *	in effect within this application, then it is replaced with a new
- *	one.
+ *	Once this call completes successfully, no window outside the tree
+ *	rooted at tkwin will receive pointer- or keyboard-related events until
+ *	the next call to Tk_Ungrab. If a previous grab was in effect within
+ *	this application, then it is replaced with a new one.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_Grab(interp, tkwin, grabGlobal)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window on whose behalf the pointer
-					 * is to be grabbed. */
-    int grabGlobal;			/* Non-zero means issue a grab to the
-					 * server so that no other application
-					 * gets mouse or keyboard events.
-					 * Zero means the grab only applies
-					 * within this application. */
+Tk_Grab(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window on whose behalf the pointer is to be
+				 * grabbed. */
+    int grabGlobal)		/* Non-zero means issue a grab to the server
+				 * so that no other application gets mouse or
+				 * keyboard events. Zero means the grab only
+				 * applies within this application. */
 {
     int grabResult, numTries;
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
@@ -423,7 +412,7 @@ Tk_Grab(interp, tkwin, grabGlobal)
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
 	if (dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr->mainPtr != winPtr->mainPtr) {
-	    alreadyGrabbed:
+	alreadyGrabbed:
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "grab failed: another application has grab",
 		    TCL_STATIC);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -438,11 +427,11 @@ Tk_Grab(interp, tkwin, grabGlobal)
 	unsigned int state;
 
 	/*
-	 * Local grab.  However, if any mouse buttons are down, turn
-	 * it into a global grab temporarily, until the last button
-	 * goes up.  This does two things: (a) it makes sure that we
-	 * see the button-up event;  and (b) it allows us to track mouse
-	 * motion among all of the windows of this application.
+	 * Local grab. However, if any mouse buttons are down, turn it into a
+	 * global grab temporarily, until the last button goes up. This does
+	 * two things: (a) it makes sure that we see the button-up event; and
+	 * (b) it allows us to track mouse motion among all of the windows of
+	 * this application.
 	 */
 
 	dispPtr->grabFlags &= ~(GRAB_GLOBAL|GRAB_TEMP_GLOBAL);
@@ -454,30 +443,28 @@ Tk_Grab(interp, tkwin, grabGlobal)
 	}
     } else {
 	dispPtr->grabFlags |= GRAB_GLOBAL;
-	setGlobalGrab:
+    setGlobalGrab:
 
 	/*
-	 * Tricky point: must ungrab before grabbing.  This is needed
-	 * in case there is a button auto-grab already in effect.  If
-	 * there is, and the mouse has moved to a different window, X
-	 * won't generate enter and leave events to move the mouse if
-	 * we grab without ungrabbing.
+	 * Tricky point: must ungrab before grabbing. This is needed in case
+	 * there is a button auto-grab already in effect. If there is, and the
+	 * mouse has moved to a different window, X won't generate enter and
+	 * leave events to move the mouse if we grab without ungrabbing.
 	 */
 
 	XUngrabPointer(dispPtr->display, CurrentTime);
 	serial = NextRequest(dispPtr->display);
 
 	/*
-	 * Another tricky point: there are races with some window
-	 * managers that can cause grabs to fail because the window
-	 * manager hasn't released its grab quickly enough.  To work
-	 * around this problem, retry a few times after AlreadyGrabbed
-	 * errors to give the grab release enough time to register with
-	 * the server.
+	 * Another tricky point: there are races with some window managers
+	 * that can cause grabs to fail because the window manager hasn't
+	 * released its grab quickly enough. To work around this problem,
+	 * retry a few times after AlreadyGrabbed errors to give the grab
+	 * release enough time to register with the server.
 	 */
 
-	grabResult = 0;			/* Needed only to prevent gcc
-					 * compiler warnings. */
+	grabResult = 0;			/* Needed only to prevent gcc compiler
+					 * warnings. */
 	for (numTries = 0; numTries < 10; numTries++) {
 	    grabResult = XGrabPointer(dispPtr->display, winPtr->window,
 		    True, ButtonPressMask|ButtonReleaseMask|ButtonMotionMask
@@ -489,7 +476,7 @@ Tk_Grab(interp, tkwin, grabGlobal)
 	    Tcl_Sleep(100);
 	}
 	if (grabResult != 0) {
-	    grabError:
+	grabError:
 	    if (grabResult == GrabNotViewable) {
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "grab failed: window not viewable",
 			TCL_STATIC);
@@ -503,10 +490,10 @@ Tk_Grab(interp, tkwin, grabGlobal)
 			TCL_STATIC);
 	    } else {
 		char msg[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	
+
 		sprintf(msg, "grab failed for unknown reason (code %d)",
 			grabResult);
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, msg, (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, msg, NULL);
 	    }
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
@@ -519,13 +506,13 @@ Tk_Grab(interp, tkwin, grabGlobal)
 
 	/*
 	 * Eat up any grab-related events generated by the server for the
-	 * grab.  There are several reasons for doing this:
+	 * grab. There are several reasons for doing this:
 	 *
 	 * 1. We have to synthesize the events for local grabs anyway, since
 	 *    the server doesn't participate in them.
 	 * 2. The server doesn't always generate the right events for global
-	 *    grabs (e.g. it generates events even if the current window is
-	 *    in the grab tree, which we don't want).
+	 *    grabs (e.g. it generates events even if the current window is in
+	 *    the grab tree, which we don't want).
 	 * 3. We want all the grab-related events to be processed immediately
 	 *    (before other events that are already queued); events coming
 	 *    from the server will be in the wrong place, but events we
@@ -536,8 +523,8 @@ Tk_Grab(interp, tkwin, grabGlobal)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Synthesize leave events to move the pointer from its current window
-     * up to the lowest ancestor that it has in common with the grab window.
+     * Synthesize leave events to move the pointer from its current window up
+     * to the lowest ancestor that it has in common with the grab window.
      * However, only do this if the pointer is outside the grab window's
      * subtree but inside the grab window's application.
      */
@@ -563,8 +550,8 @@ Tk_Grab(interp, tkwin, grabGlobal)
  *
  * Tk_Ungrab --
  *
- *	Releases a grab on the mouse pointer and keyboard, if there
- *	is one set on the specified window.
+ *	Releases a grab on the mouse pointer and keyboard, if there is one set
+ *	on the specified window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -577,9 +564,8 @@ Tk_Grab(interp, tkwin, grabGlobal)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_Ungrab(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window whose grab should be
-					 * released. */
+Tk_Ungrab(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window whose grab should be released. */
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     TkWindow *grabWinPtr, *winPtr;
@@ -591,7 +577,7 @@ Tk_Ungrab(tkwin)
 	return;
     }
     ReleaseButtonGrab(dispPtr);
-    QueueGrabWindowChange(dispPtr, (TkWindow *) NULL);
+    QueueGrabWindowChange(dispPtr, NULL);
     if (dispPtr->grabFlags & (GRAB_GLOBAL|GRAB_TEMP_GLOBAL)) {
 	dispPtr->grabFlags &= ~(GRAB_GLOBAL|GRAB_TEMP_GLOBAL);
 	serial = NextRequest(dispPtr->display);
@@ -601,17 +587,17 @@ Tk_Ungrab(tkwin)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Generate events to move the pointer back to the window where it
-     * really is.  Some notes:
-     * 1. As with grabs, only do this if the "real" window is not a
-     *    descendant of the grab window, since in this case the pointer
-     *    is already where it's supposed to be.
+     * Generate events to move the pointer back to the window where it really
+     * is. Some notes:
+     * 1. As with grabs, only do this if the "real" window is not a descendant
+     *    of the grab window, since in this case the pointer is already where
+     *    it's supposed to be.
      * 2. If the "real" window is in some other application then don't
-     *    generate any events at all, since everything's already been
-     *    reported correctly.
-     * 3. Only generate enter events.  Don't generate leave events,
-     *    because we never told the lower-level windows that they
-     *    had the pointer in the first place.
+     *    generate any events at all, since everything's already been reported
+     *    correctly.
+     * 3. Only generate enter events. Don't generate leave events, because we
+     *    never told the lower-level windows that they had the pointer in the
+     *    first place.
      */
 
     for (winPtr = dispPtr->serverWinPtr; ; winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr) {
@@ -634,26 +620,26 @@ Tk_Ungrab(tkwin)
  *
  * ReleaseButtonGrab --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to release a simulated button grab, if
- *	there is one in effect.  A button grab is present whenever
- *	dispPtr->buttonWinPtr is non-NULL or when the GRAB_TEMP_GLOBAL
- *	flag is set.
+ *	This function is called to release a simulated button grab, if there
+ *	is one in effect. A button grab is present whenever
+ *	dispPtr->buttonWinPtr is non-NULL or when the GRAB_TEMP_GLOBAL flag is
+ *	set.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	DispPtr->buttonWinPtr is reset to NULL, and enter and leave
- *	events are generated if necessary to move the pointer from
- *	the button grab window to its current window.
+ *	DispPtr->buttonWinPtr is reset to NULL, and enter and leave events are
+ *	generated if necessary to move the pointer from the button grab window
+ *	to its current window.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ReleaseButtonGrab(dispPtr)
-    register TkDisplay *dispPtr;	/* Display whose button grab is to be
-					 * released. */
+ReleaseButtonGrab(
+    register TkDisplay *dispPtr)/* Display whose button grab is to be
+				 * released. */
 {
     unsigned int serial;
 
@@ -678,64 +664,64 @@ ReleaseButtonGrab(dispPtr)
  *
  * TkPointerEvent --
  *
- *	This procedure is called for each pointer-related event, before
- *	the event has been processed.  It does various things to make
- *	grabs work correctly.
+ *	This function is called for each pointer-related event, before the
+ *	event has been processed. It does various things to make grabs work
+ *	correctly.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If the return value is 1 it means the event should be processed
- *	(event handlers should be invoked).  If the return value is 0
- *	it means the event should be ignored in order to make grabs
- *	work correctly.  In some cases this procedure modifies the event.
+ *	If the return value is 1 it means the event should be processed (event
+ *	handlers should be invoked). If the return value is 0 it means the
+ *	event should be ignored in order to make grabs work correctly. In some
+ *	cases this function modifies the event.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Grab state information may be updated.  New events may also be
- *	pushed back onto the event queue to replace or augment the
- *	one passed in here.
+ *	Grab state information may be updated. New events may also be pushed
+ *	back onto the event queue to replace or augment the one passed in
+ *	here.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-TkPointerEvent(eventPtr, winPtr)
-    register XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Pointer to the event. */
-    TkWindow *winPtr;			/* Tk's information for window
-					 * where event was reported. */
+TkPointerEvent(
+    register XEvent *eventPtr,	/* Pointer to the event. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Tk's information for window where event was
+				 * reported. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr2;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
     unsigned int serial;
     int outsideGrabTree = 0;
     int ancestorOfGrab = 0;
-    int appGrabbed = 0;			/* Non-zero means event is being
-					 * reported to an application that is
-					 * affected by the grab. */
+    int appGrabbed = 0;		/* Non-zero means event is being reported to
+				 * an application that is affected by the
+				 * grab. */
 
     /*
      * Collect information about the grab (if any).
      */
 
     switch (TkGrabState(winPtr)) {
-	case TK_GRAB_IN_TREE:
-	    appGrabbed = 1;
-	    break;
-	case TK_GRAB_ANCESTOR:
-	    appGrabbed = 1;
-	    outsideGrabTree = 1;
-	    ancestorOfGrab = 1;
-	    break;
-	case TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED:
-	    appGrabbed = 1;
-	    outsideGrabTree = 1;
-	    break;
+    case TK_GRAB_IN_TREE:
+	appGrabbed = 1;
+	break;
+    case TK_GRAB_ANCESTOR:
+	appGrabbed = 1;
+	outsideGrabTree = 1;
+	ancestorOfGrab = 1;
+	break;
+    case TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED:
+	appGrabbed = 1;
+	outsideGrabTree = 1;
+	break;
     }
 
     if ((eventPtr->type == EnterNotify) || (eventPtr->type == LeaveNotify)) {
 	/*
-	 * Keep track of what window the mouse is *really* over.
-	 * Any events that we generate have a special send_event value,
-	 * which is detected below and used to ignore the event for
-	 * purposes of setting serverWinPtr.
+	 * Keep track of what window the mouse is *really* over. Any events
+	 * that we generate have a special send_event value, which is detected
+	 * below and used to ignore the event for purposes of setting
+	 * serverWinPtr.
 	 */
 
 	if (eventPtr->xcrossing.send_event != GENERATED_EVENT_MAGIC) {
@@ -748,13 +734,13 @@ TkPointerEvent(eventPtr, winPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * When a grab is active, X continues to report enter and leave
-	 * events for windows outside the tree of the grab window:
-	 * 1. Detect these events and ignore them except for
-	 *    windows above the grab window.
-	 * 2. Allow Enter and Leave events to pass through the
-	 *    windows above the grab window, but never let them
-	 *    end up with the pointer *in* one of those windows.
+	 * When a grab is active, X continues to report enter and leave events
+	 * for windows outside the tree of the grab window:
+	 * 1. Detect these events and ignore them except for windows above the
+	 *    grab window.
+	 * 2. Allow Enter and Leave events to pass through the windows above
+	 *    the grab window, but never let them end up with the pointer *in*
+	 *    one of those windows.
 	 */
 
 	if (dispPtr->grabWinPtr != NULL) {
@@ -763,22 +749,21 @@ TkPointerEvent(eventPtr, winPtr)
 		    return 0;
 		}
 		switch (eventPtr->xcrossing.detail) {
-		    case NotifyInferior:
-			return 0;
-		    case NotifyAncestor:
-			eventPtr->xcrossing.detail = NotifyVirtual;
-			break;
-		    case NotifyNonlinear:
-			eventPtr->xcrossing.detail = NotifyNonlinearVirtual;
-			break;
+		case NotifyInferior:
+		    return 0;
+		case NotifyAncestor:
+		    eventPtr->xcrossing.detail = NotifyVirtual;
+		    break;
+		case NotifyNonlinear:
+		    eventPtr->xcrossing.detail = NotifyNonlinearVirtual;
+		    break;
 		}
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Make buttons have the same grab-like behavior inside a grab
-	     * as they do outside a grab:  do this by ignoring enter and
-	     * leave events except for the window in which the button was
-	     * pressed.
+	     * Make buttons have the same grab-like behavior inside a grab as
+	     * they do outside a grab: do this by ignoring enter and leave
+	     * events except for the window in which the button was pressed.
 	     */
 
 	    if ((dispPtr->buttonWinPtr != NULL)
@@ -796,12 +781,12 @@ TkPointerEvent(eventPtr, winPtr)
     if (eventPtr->type == MotionNotify) {
 	/*
 	 * When grabs are active, X reports motion events relative to the
-	 * window under the pointer.  Instead, it should report the events
+	 * window under the pointer. Instead, it should report the events
 	 * relative to the window the button went down in, if there is a
-	 * button down.  Otherwise, if the pointer window is outside the
-	 * subtree of the grab window, the events should be reported
-	 * relative to the grab window.  Otherwise, the event should be
-	 * reported to the pointer window.
+	 * button down. Otherwise, if the pointer window is outside the
+	 * subtree of the grab window, the events should be reported relative
+	 * to the grab window. Otherwise, the event should be reported to the
+	 * pointer window.
 	 */
 
 	winPtr2 = winPtr;
@@ -820,32 +805,32 @@ TkPointerEvent(eventPtr, winPtr)
 
     /*
      * Process ButtonPress and ButtonRelease events:
-     * 1. Keep track of whether a button is down and what window it
-     *    went down in.
-     * 2. If the first button goes down outside the grab tree, pretend
-     *    it went down in the grab window.  Note: it's important to
-     *    redirect events to the grab window like this in order to make
-     *    things like menus work, where button presses outside the
-     *    grabbed menu need to be seen.  An application can always
-     *    ignore the events if they occur outside its window.
-     * 3. If a button press or release occurs outside the window where
-     *    the first button was pressed, retarget the event so it's reported
-     *    to the window where the first button was pressed.
-     * 4. If the last button is released in a window different than where
-     *    the first button was pressed, generate Enter/Leave events to
-     *    move the mouse from the button window to its current window.
-     * 5. If the grab is set at a time when a button is already down, or
-     *    if the window where the button was pressed was deleted, then
-     *    dispPtr->buttonWinPtr will stay NULL.  Just forget about the
-     *    auto-grab for the button press;  events will go to whatever
-     *    window contains the pointer.  If this window isn't in the grab
-     *    tree then redirect events to the grab window.
-     * 6. When a button is pressed during a local grab, the X server sets
-     *    a grab of its own, since it doesn't even know about our local
-     *    grab.  This causes enter and leave events no longer to be
-     *    generated in the same way as for global grabs.  To eliminate this
-     *    problem, set a temporary global grab when the first button goes
-     *    down and release it when the last button comes up.
+     * 1. Keep track of whether a button is down and what window it went down
+     *    in.
+     * 2. If the first button goes down outside the grab tree, pretend it went
+     *    down in the grab window. Note: it's important to redirect events to
+     *    the grab window like this in order to make things like menus work,
+     *    where button presses outside the grabbed menu need to be seen. An
+     *    application can always ignore the events if they occur outside its
+     *    window.
+     * 3. If a button press or release occurs outside the window where the
+     *    first button was pressed, retarget the event so it's reported to the
+     *    window where the first button was pressed.
+     * 4. If the last button is released in a window different than where the
+     *    first button was pressed, generate Enter/Leave events to move the
+     *    mouse from the button window to its current window.
+     * 5. If the grab is set at a time when a button is already down, or if
+     *    the window where the button was pressed was deleted, then
+     *    dispPtr->buttonWinPtr will stay NULL. Just forget about the
+     *    auto-grab for the button press; events will go to whatever window
+     *    contains the pointer. If this window isn't in the grab tree then
+     *    redirect events to the grab window.
+     * 6. When a button is pressed during a local grab, the X server sets a
+     *    grab of its own, since it doesn't even know about our local grab.
+     *    This causes enter and leave events no longer to be generated in the
+     *    same way as for global grabs. To eliminate this problem, set a
+     *    temporary global grab when the first button goes down and release it
+     *    when the last button comes up.
      */
 
     if ((eventPtr->type == ButtonPress) || (eventPtr->type == ButtonRelease)) {
@@ -906,12 +891,12 @@ TkPointerEvent(eventPtr, winPtr)
  * TkChangeEventWindow --
  *
  *	Given an event and a new window to which the event should be
- *	retargeted, modify fields of the event so that the event is
- *	properly retargeted to the new window.
+ *	retargeted, modify fields of the event so that the event is properly
+ *	retargeted to the new window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The following fields of eventPtr are modified:  window,
- *	subwindow, x, y, same_screen.
+ *	The following fields of eventPtr are modified: window, subwindow, x,
+ *	y, same_screen.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -920,12 +905,12 @@ TkPointerEvent(eventPtr, winPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkChangeEventWindow(eventPtr, winPtr)
-    register XEvent *eventPtr;	/* Event to retarget.  Must have
-				 * type ButtonPress, ButtonRelease, KeyPress,
-				 * KeyRelease, MotionNotify, EnterNotify,
-				 * or LeaveNotify. */
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* New target window for event. */
+TkChangeEventWindow(
+    register XEvent *eventPtr,	/* Event to retarget. Must have type
+				 * ButtonPress, ButtonRelease, KeyPress,
+				 * KeyRelease, MotionNotify, EnterNotify, or
+				 * LeaveNotify. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* New target window for event. */
 {
     int x, y, sameScreen, bd;
     register TkWindow *childPtr;
@@ -970,44 +955,44 @@ TkChangeEventWindow(eventPtr, winPtr)
  *
  * TkInOutEvents --
  *
- *	This procedure synthesizes EnterNotify and LeaveNotify events
- *	to correctly transfer the pointer from one window to another.
- *	It can also be used to generate FocusIn and FocusOut events
- *	to move the input focus.
+ *	This function synthesizes EnterNotify and LeaveNotify events to
+ *	correctly transfer the pointer from one window to another. It can also
+ *	be used to generate FocusIn and FocusOut events to move the input
+ *	focus.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Synthesized events may be pushed back onto the event queue.
- *	The event pointed to by eventPtr is modified.
+ *	Synthesized events may be pushed back onto the event queue. The event
+ *	pointed to by eventPtr is modified.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkInOutEvents(eventPtr, sourcePtr, destPtr, leaveType, enterType, position)
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* A template X event.  Must have all fields
+TkInOutEvents(
+    XEvent *eventPtr,		/* A template X event. Must have all fields
 				 * properly set except for type, window,
-				 * subwindow, x, y, detail, and same_screen
+				 * subwindow, x, y, detail, and same_screen.
 				 * (Not all of these fields are valid for
-				 * FocusIn/FocusOut events;  x_root and y_root
+				 * FocusIn/FocusOut events; x_root and y_root
 				 * must be valid for Enter/Leave events, even
 				 * though x and y needn't be valid). */
-    TkWindow *sourcePtr;	/* Window that used to have the pointer or
+    TkWindow *sourcePtr,	/* Window that used to have the pointer or
 				 * focus (NULL means it was not in a window
 				 * managed by this process). */
-    TkWindow *destPtr;		/* Window that is to end up with the pointer
+    TkWindow *destPtr,		/* Window that is to end up with the pointer
 				 * or focus (NULL means it's not one managed
 				 * by this process). */
-    int leaveType;		/* Type of events to generate for windows
-				 * being left (LeaveNotify or FocusOut).  0
+    int leaveType,		/* Type of events to generate for windows
+				 * being left (LeaveNotify or FocusOut). 0
 				 * means don't generate leave events. */
-    int enterType;		/* Type of events to generate for windows
-				 * being entered (EnterNotify or FocusIn).  0
+    int enterType,		/* Type of events to generate for windows
+				 * being entered (EnterNotify or FocusIn). 0
 				 * means don't generate enter events. */
-    Tcl_QueuePosition position;	/* Position at which events are added to
-				 * the system event queue. */
+    Tcl_QueuePosition position)	/* Position at which events are added to the
+				 * system event queue. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr;
     int upLevels, downLevels, i, j, focus;
@@ -1015,17 +1000,15 @@ TkInOutEvents(eventPtr, sourcePtr, destPtr, leaveType, enterType, position)
     /*
      * There are four possible cases to deal with:
      *
-     * 1. SourcePtr and destPtr are the same.  There's nothing to do in
-     *    this case.
-     * 2. SourcePtr is an ancestor of destPtr in the same top-level
-     *    window.  Must generate events down the window tree from source
-     *    to dest.
-     * 3. DestPtr is an ancestor of sourcePtr in the same top-level
-     *    window.  Must generate events up the window tree from sourcePtr
-     *    to destPtr.
-     * 4. All other cases.  Must first generate events up the window tree
-     *    from sourcePtr to its top-level, then down from destPtr's
-     *    top-level to destPtr. This form is called "non-linear."
+     * 1. SourcePtr and destPtr are the same. There's nothing to do in this
+     *    case.
+     * 2. SourcePtr is an ancestor of destPtr in the same top-level window.
+     *    Must generate events down the window tree from source to dest.
+     * 3. DestPtr is an ancestor of sourcePtr in the same top-level window.
+     *    Must generate events up the window tree from sourcePtr to destPtr.
+     * 4. All other cases. Must first generate events up the window tree from
+     *    sourcePtr to its top-level, then down from destPtr's top-level to
+     *    destPtr. This form is called "non-linear."
      *
      * The call to FindCommonAncestor separates these four cases and decides
      * how many levels up and down events have to be generated for.
@@ -1045,7 +1028,6 @@ TkInOutEvents(eventPtr, sourcePtr, destPtr, leaveType, enterType, position)
      * Generate enter/leave events and add them to the grab event queue.
      */
 
-
 #define QUEUE(w, t, d)					\
     if (w->window != None) {				\
 	eventPtr->type = t;				\
@@ -1060,7 +1042,6 @@ TkInOutEvents(eventPtr, sourcePtr, destPtr, leaveType, enterType, position)
     }
 
     if (downLevels == 0) {
-    
 	/*
 	 * SourcePtr is an inferior of destPtr.
 	 */
@@ -1076,7 +1057,6 @@ TkInOutEvents(eventPtr, sourcePtr, destPtr, leaveType, enterType, position)
 	    QUEUE(destPtr, enterType, NotifyInferior);
 	}
     } else if (upLevels == 0) {
-
 	/*
 	 * DestPtr is an inferior of sourcePtr.
 	 */
@@ -1088,6 +1068,7 @@ TkInOutEvents(eventPtr, sourcePtr, destPtr, leaveType, enterType, position)
 	    for (i = downLevels-1; i > 0; i--) {
 		for (winPtr = destPtr->parentPtr, j = 1; j < i;
 			winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr, j++) {
+		    /* empty */
 		}
 		QUEUE(winPtr, enterType, NotifyVirtual);
 	    }
@@ -1096,9 +1077,8 @@ TkInOutEvents(eventPtr, sourcePtr, destPtr, leaveType, enterType, position)
 	    }
 	}
     } else {
-
 	/*
-	 * Non-linear:  neither window is an inferior of the other.
+	 * Non-linear: neither window is an inferior of the other.
 	 */
 
 	if (leaveType != 0) {
@@ -1127,11 +1107,11 @@ TkInOutEvents(eventPtr, sourcePtr, destPtr, leaveType, enterType, position)
  *
  * MovePointer2 --
  *
- *	This procedure synthesizes  EnterNotify and LeaveNotify events
- *	to correctly transfer the pointer from one window to another.
- *	It is different from TkInOutEvents in that no template X event
- *	needs to be supplied;  this procedure generates the template
- *	event and calls TkInOutEvents.
+ *	This function synthesizes EnterNotify and LeaveNotify events to
+ *	correctly transfer the pointer from one window to another. It is
+ *	different from TkInOutEvents in that no template X event needs to be
+ *	supplied; this function generates the template event and calls
+ *	TkInOutEvents.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1143,20 +1123,20 @@ TkInOutEvents(eventPtr, sourcePtr, destPtr, leaveType, enterType, position)
  */
 
 static void
-MovePointer2(sourcePtr, destPtr, mode, leaveEvents, enterEvents)
-    TkWindow *sourcePtr;	/* Window currently containing pointer (NULL
+MovePointer2(
+    TkWindow *sourcePtr,	/* Window currently containing pointer (NULL
 				 * means it's not one managed by this
 				 * process). */
-    TkWindow *destPtr;		/* Window that is to end up containing the
-				 * pointer (NULL means it's not one managed
-				 * by this process). */
-    int mode;			/* Mode for enter/leave events, such as
+    TkWindow *destPtr,		/* Window that is to end up containing the
+				 * pointer (NULL means it's not one managed by
+				 * this process). */
+    int mode,			/* Mode for enter/leave events, such as
 				 * NotifyNormal or NotifyUngrab. */
-    int leaveEvents;		/* Non-zero means generate leave events for the
-				 * windows being left.  Zero means don't
+    int leaveEvents,		/* Non-zero means generate leave events for
+				 * the windows being left. Zero means don't
 				 * generate leave events. */
-    int enterEvents;		/* Non-zero means generate enter events for the
-				 * windows being entered.  Zero means don't
+    int enterEvents)		/* Non-zero means generate enter events for
+				 * the windows being entered. Zero means don't
 				 * generate enter events. */
 {
     XEvent event;
@@ -1172,12 +1152,10 @@ MovePointer2(sourcePtr, destPtr, mode, leaveEvents, enterEvents)
 	}
     }
 
-    event.xcrossing.serial = LastKnownRequestProcessed(
-	winPtr->display);
+    event.xcrossing.serial = LastKnownRequestProcessed(winPtr->display);
     event.xcrossing.send_event = GENERATED_EVENT_MAGIC;
     event.xcrossing.display = winPtr->display;
-    event.xcrossing.root = RootWindow(winPtr->display,
-	    winPtr->screenNum);
+    event.xcrossing.root = RootWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum);
     event.xcrossing.time = TkCurrentTime(winPtr->dispPtr);
     XQueryPointer(winPtr->display, winPtr->window, &dummy1, &dummy2,
 	    &event.xcrossing.x_root, &event.xcrossing.y_root,
@@ -1193,30 +1171,30 @@ MovePointer2(sourcePtr, destPtr, mode, leaveEvents, enterEvents)
  *
  * TkGrabDeadWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever a window is deleted, so that
+ *	This function is invoked whenever a window is deleted, so that
  *	grab-related cleanup can be performed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Various cleanups happen, such as generating events to move the
- *	pointer back to its "natural" window as if an ungrab had been
- *	done.  See the code.
+ *	Various cleanups happen, such as generating events to move the pointer
+ *	back to its "natural" window as if an ungrab had been done. See the
+ *	code.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkGrabDeadWindow(winPtr)
-    register TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that is in the process
-					 * of being deleted. */
+TkGrabDeadWindow(
+    register TkWindow *winPtr)	/* Window that is in the process of being
+				 * deleted. */
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
 
     if (dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr == winPtr) {
 	/*
-	 * Grab window was deleted.  Release the grab.
+	 * Grab window was deleted. Release the grab.
 	 */
 
 	Tk_Ungrab((Tk_Window) dispPtr->eventualGrabWinPtr);
@@ -1240,26 +1218,25 @@ TkGrabDeadWindow(winPtr)
  *
  * EatGrabEvents --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to eliminate any Enter, Leave,
- *	FocusIn, or FocusOut events in the event queue for a
- *	display that have mode NotifyGrab or NotifyUngrab and
- *	have a serial number no less than a given value and are not
- *	generated by the grab module.
+ *	This function is called to eliminate any Enter, Leave, FocusIn, or
+ *	FocusOut events in the event queue for a display that have mode
+ *	NotifyGrab or NotifyUngrab and have a serial number no less than a
+ *	given value and are not generated by the grab module.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	DispPtr's display gets sync-ed, and some of the events get
- *	removed from the Tk event queue.
+ *	DispPtr's display gets sync-ed, and some of the events get removed
+ *	from the Tk event queue.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EatGrabEvents(dispPtr, serial)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display from which to consume events. */
-    unsigned int serial;	/* Only discard events that have a serial
+EatGrabEvents(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr,		/* Display from which to consume events. */
+    unsigned int serial)	/* Only discard events that have a serial
 				 * number at least this great. */
 {
     Tk_RestrictProc *oldProc;
@@ -1280,10 +1257,10 @@ EatGrabEvents(dispPtr, serial)
  *
  * GrabRestrictProc --
  *
- *	A Tk_RestrictProc used by EatGrabEvents to eliminate any
- *	Enter, Leave, FocusIn, or FocusOut events in the event queue
- *	for a display that has mode NotifyGrab or NotifyUngrab and
- *	have a serial number no less than a given value.
+ *	A Tk_RestrictProc used by EatGrabEvents to eliminate any Enter, Leave,
+ *	FocusIn, or FocusOut events in the event queue for a display that has
+ *	mode NotifyGrab or NotifyUngrab and have a serial number no less than
+ *	a given value.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns either TK_DISCARD_EVENT or TK_DEFER_EVENT.
@@ -1295,17 +1272,17 @@ EatGrabEvents(dispPtr, serial)
  */
 
 static Tk_RestrictAction
-GrabRestrictProc(arg, eventPtr)
-    ClientData arg;
-    XEvent *eventPtr;
+GrabRestrictProc(
+    ClientData arg,
+    XEvent *eventPtr)
 {
     GrabInfo *info = (GrabInfo *) arg;
     int mode, diff;
 
     /*
-     * The diff caculation is trickier than it may seem.  Don't forget
-     * that serial numbers can wrap around, so can't compare the two
-     * serial numbers directly.
+     * The diff caculation is trickier than it may seem. Don't forget that
+     * serial numbers can wrap around, so can't compare the two serial numbers
+     * directly.
      */
 
     diff = eventPtr->xany.serial - info->serial;
@@ -1331,29 +1308,28 @@ GrabRestrictProc(arg, eventPtr)
  *
  * QueueGrabWindowChange --
  *
- *	This procedure queues a special event in the Tcl event queue,
- *	which will cause the "grabWinPtr" field for the display to get
- *	modified when the event is processed.  This is needed to make
- *	sure that the grab window changes at the proper time relative
- *	to grab-related enter and leave events that are also in the
- *	queue.  In particular, this approach works even when multiple
- *	grabs and ungrabs happen back-to-back.
+ *	This function queues a special event in the Tcl event queue, which
+ *	will cause the "grabWinPtr" field for the display to get modified when
+ *	the event is processed. This is needed to make sure that the grab
+ *	window changes at the proper time relative to grab-related enter and
+ *	leave events that are also in the queue. In particular, this approach
+ *	works even when multiple grabs and ungrabs happen back-to-back.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	DispPtr->grabWinPtr will be modified later (by GrabWinEventProc)
- *	when the event is removed from the grab event queue.
+ *	DispPtr->grabWinPtr will be modified later (by GrabWinEventProc) when
+ *	the event is removed from the grab event queue.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-QueueGrabWindowChange(dispPtr, grabWinPtr)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display on which to change the grab
+QueueGrabWindowChange(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr,		/* Display on which to change the grab
 				 * window. */
-    TkWindow *grabWinPtr;	/* Window that is to become the new grab
+    TkWindow *grabWinPtr)	/* Window that is to become the new grab
 				 * window (may be NULL). */
 {
     NewGrabWinEvent *grabEvPtr;
@@ -1375,25 +1351,25 @@ QueueGrabWindowChange(dispPtr, grabWinPtr)
  *
  * GrabWinEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked as a handler for Tcl_Events of type
- *	NewGrabWinEvent.  It updates the current grab window field in
- *	a display.
+ *	This function is invoked as a handler for Tcl_Events of type
+ *	NewGrabWinEvent. It updates the current grab window field in a
+ *	display.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns 1 if the event was processed, 0 if it should be deferred
- *	for processing later.
+ *	Returns 1 if the event was processed, 0 if it should be deferred for
+ *	processing later.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The grabWinPtr field is modified in the display associated with
- *	the event.
+ *	The grabWinPtr field is modified in the display associated with the
+ *	event.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-GrabWinEventProc(evPtr, flags)
-    Tcl_Event *evPtr;		/* Event of type NewGrabWinEvent. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags argument to Tk_DoOneEvent: indicates
+GrabWinEventProc(
+    Tcl_Event *evPtr,		/* Event of type NewGrabWinEvent. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags argument to Tk_DoOneEvent: indicates
 				 * what kinds of events are being processed
 				 * right now. */
 {
@@ -1409,19 +1385,19 @@ GrabWinEventProc(evPtr, flags)
  *
  * FindCommonAncestor --
  *
- *	Given two windows, this procedure finds their least common
- *	ancestor and also computes how many levels up this ancestor
- *	is from each of the original windows.
+ *	Given two windows, this function finds their least common ancestor and
+ *	also computes how many levels up this ancestor is from each of the
+ *	original windows.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If the windows are in different applications or top-level
- *	windows, then NULL is returned and *countPtr1 and *countPtr2
- *	are set to the depths of the two windows in their respective
- *	top-level windows (1 means the window is a top-level, 2 means
- *	its parent is a top-level, and so on).  Otherwise, the return
- *	value is a pointer to the common ancestor and the counts are
- *	set to the distance of winPtr1 and winPtr2 from this ancestor
- *	(1 means they're children, 2 means grand-children, etc.).
+ *	If the windows are in different applications or top-level windows,
+ *	then NULL is returned and *countPtr1 and *countPtr2 are set to the
+ *	depths of the two windows in their respective top-level windows (1
+ *	means the window is a top-level, 2 means its parent is a top-level,
+ *	and so on). Otherwise, the return value is a pointer to the common
+ *	ancestor and the counts are set to the distance of winPtr1 and winPtr2
+ *	from this ancestor (1 means they're children, 2 means grand-children,
+ *	etc.).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1430,12 +1406,12 @@ GrabWinEventProc(evPtr, flags)
  */
 
 static TkWindow *
-FindCommonAncestor(winPtr1, winPtr2, countPtr1, countPtr2)
-    TkWindow *winPtr1;		/* First window.   May be NULL. */
-    TkWindow *winPtr2;		/* Second window.  May be NULL. */
-    int *countPtr1;		/* Store nesting level of winPtr1 within
+FindCommonAncestor(
+    TkWindow *winPtr1,		/* First window. May be NULL. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr2,		/* Second window. May be NULL. */
+    int *countPtr1,		/* Store nesting level of winPtr1 within
 				 * common ancestor here. */
-    int *countPtr2;		/* Store nesting level of winPtr2 within
+    int *countPtr2)		/* Store nesting level of winPtr2 within
 				 * common ancestor here. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr;
@@ -1456,8 +1432,8 @@ FindCommonAncestor(winPtr1, winPtr2, countPtr1, countPtr2)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Search upwards from winPtr2 until an ancestor of winPtr1 is
-     * found or a top-level window is reached.
+     * Search upwards from winPtr2 until an ancestor of winPtr1 is found or a
+     * top-level window is reached.
      */
 
     winPtr = winPtr2;
@@ -1510,15 +1486,13 @@ FindCommonAncestor(winPtr1, winPtr2, countPtr1, countPtr2)
  *
  * TkPositionInTree --
  *
- *	Compute where the given window is relative to a particular
- *	subtree of the window hierarchy.
+ *	Compute where the given window is relative to a particular subtree of
+ *	the window hierarchy.
  *
  * Results:
- *
- *	Returns TK_GRAB_IN_TREE if the window is contained in the
- *	subtree.  Returns TK_GRAB_ANCESTOR if the window is an
- *	ancestor of the subtree, in the same toplevel.  Otherwise
- *	it returns TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED.
+ *	Returns TK_GRAB_IN_TREE if the window is contained in the subtree.
+ *	Returns TK_GRAB_ANCESTOR if the window is an ancestor of the subtree,
+ *	in the same toplevel. Otherwise it returns TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1527,9 +1501,9 @@ FindCommonAncestor(winPtr1, winPtr2, countPtr1, countPtr2)
  */
 
 int
-TkPositionInTree(winPtr, treePtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to be checked. */
-    TkWindow *treePtr;		/* Root of tree to compare against. */
+TkPositionInTree(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Window to be checked. */
+    TkWindow *treePtr)		/* Root of tree to compare against. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr2;
 
@@ -1556,21 +1530,20 @@ TkPositionInTree(winPtr, treePtr)
  *
  * TkGrabState --
  *
- *	Given a window, this procedure returns a value that indicates
- *	the grab state of the application relative to the window.
+ *	Given a window, this function returns a value that indicates the grab
+ *	state of the application relative to the window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is one of three things:
  *	    TK_GRAB_NONE -	no grab is in effect.
- *	    TK_GRAB_IN_TREE -   there is a grab in effect, and winPtr
- *				is in the grabbed subtree.
- *	    TK_GRAB_ANCESTOR -  there is a grab in effect;  winPtr is
- *				an ancestor of the grabbed window, in
- *				the same toplevel.
- *	    TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED -	there is a grab in effect; winPtr is
- *				outside the tree of the grab and is not
- *				an ancestor of the grabbed window in the
- *				same toplevel.
+ *	    TK_GRAB_IN_TREE -   there is a grab in effect, and winPtr is in
+ *				the grabbed subtree.
+ *	    TK_GRAB_ANCESTOR -  there is a grab in effect; winPtr is an
+ *				ancestor of the grabbed window, in the same
+ *				toplevel.
+ *	    TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED -	there is a grab in effect; winPtr is outside
+ *				the tree of the grab and is not an ancestor of
+ *				the grabbed window in the same toplevel.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1579,8 +1552,8 @@ TkPositionInTree(winPtr, treePtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkGrabState(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window for which grab information is
+TkGrabState(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Window for which grab information is
 				 * needed. */
 {
     TkWindow *grabWinPtr = winPtr->dispPtr->grabWinPtr;
@@ -1595,3 +1568,11 @@ TkGrabState(winPtr)
 
     return TkPositionInTree(winPtr, grabWinPtr);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkGrid.c b/generic/tkGrid.c
index 008e321..c6a00d5 100644
--- a/generic/tkGrid.c
+++ b/generic/tkGrid.c
@@ -5,8 +5,8 @@
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
@@ -19,26 +19,22 @@
 #   undef MAX
 #endif
 #define MAX(x,y)	((x) > (y) ? (x) : (y))
-#ifdef MIN
-#   undef MIN
-#endif
-#define MIN(x,y)	((x) > (y) ? (y) : (x))
 
-#define COLUMN	(1)		/* working on column offsets */
-#define ROW	(2)		/* working on row offsets */
+#define COLUMN		(1)	/* Working on column offsets. */
+#define ROW		(2)	/* Working on row offsets. */
 
-#define CHECK_ONLY	(1)	/* check max slot constraint */
-#define CHECK_SPACE	(2)	/* alloc more space, don't change max */
+#define CHECK_ONLY	(1)	/* Check max slot constraint. */
+#define CHECK_SPACE	(2)	/* Alloc more space, don't change max. */
 
 /*
- * Pre-allocate enough row and column slots for "typical" sized tables
- * this value should be chosen so by the time the extra malloc's are
- * required, the layout calculations overwehlm them. [A "slot" contains
- * information for either a row or column, depending upon the context.]
+ * Pre-allocate enough row and column slots for "typical" sized tables this
+ * value should be chosen so by the time the extra malloc's are required, the
+ * layout calculations overwehlm them. [A "slot" contains information for
+ * either a row or column, depending upon the context.]
  */
 
-#define TYPICAL_SIZE	25  /* (arbitrary guess) */
-#define PREALLOC	10  /* extra slots to allocate */
+#define TYPICAL_SIZE	25	/* (Arbitrary guess) */
+#define PREALLOC	10	/* Extra slots to allocate. */
 
 /*
  * Pre-allocate room for uniform groups during layout.
@@ -46,10 +42,10 @@
 
 #define UNIFORM_PREALLOC 10
 
-/* 
- * Data structures are allocated dynamically to support arbitrary sized tables.
- * However, the space is proportional to the highest numbered slot with
- * some non-default property.  This limit is used to head off mistakes and
+/*
+ * Data structures are allocated dynamically to support arbitrary sized
+ * tables. However, the space is proportional to the highest numbered slot
+ * with some non-default property. This limit is used to head off mistakes and
  * denial of service attacks by limiting the amount of storage required.
  */
 
@@ -64,63 +60,67 @@
 #define REL_VERT	'^'	/* Extend widget from row above. */
 
 /*
- *  Structure to hold information for grid masters.  A slot is either
- *  a row or column.
+ * Default value for 'grid anchor'.
+ */
+
+#define GRID_DEFAULT_ANCHOR TK_ANCHOR_NW
+
+/*
+ * Structure to hold information for grid masters. A slot is either a row or
+ * column.
  */
 
 typedef struct SlotInfo {
-	int minSize;		/* The minimum size of this slot (in pixels).
+    int minSize;		/* The minimum size of this slot (in pixels).
 				 * It is set via the rowconfigure or
 				 * columnconfigure commands. */
-	int weight;		/* The resize weight of this slot. (0) means
+    int weight;			/* The resize weight of this slot. (0) means
 				 * this slot doesn't resize. Extra space in
 				 * the layout is given distributed among slots
 				 * inproportion to their weights. */
-	int pad;		/* Extra padding, in pixels, required for
-				 * this slot.  This amount is "added" to the
-				 * largest slave in the slot. */
-        Tk_Uid uniform;		/* Value of -uniform option. It is used to
+    int pad;			/* Extra padding, in pixels, required for this
+				 * slot. This amount is "added" to the largest
+				 * slave in the slot. */
+    Tk_Uid uniform;		/* Value of -uniform option. It is used to
 				 * group slots that should have the same
 				 * size. */
-	int offset;		/* This is a cached value used for
-				 * introspection.  It is the pixel
-				 * offset of the right or bottom edge
-				 * of this slot from the beginning of the
-				 * layout. */
-     	int temp;		/* This is a temporary value used for
-     				 * calculating adjusted weights when
-     				 * shrinking the layout below its
-     				 * nominal size. */
+    int offset;			/* This is a cached value used for
+				 * introspection. It is the pixel offset of
+				 * the right or bottom edge of this slot from
+				 * the beginning of the layout. */
+    int temp;			/* This is a temporary value used for
+				 * calculating adjusted weights when shrinking
+				 * the layout below its nominal size. */
 } SlotInfo;
 
 /*
- * Structure to hold information during layout calculations.  There
- * is one of these for each slot, an array for each of the rows or columns.
+ * Structure to hold information during layout calculations. There is one of
+ * these for each slot, an array for each of the rows or columns.
  */
 
 typedef struct GridLayout {
-    struct Gridder *binNextPtr;	/* The next slave window in this bin.
-    				 * Each bin contains a list of all
-    				 * slaves whose spans are >1 and whose
-    				 * right edges fall in this slot. */
-    int minSize;		/* Minimum size needed for this slot,
-    				 * in pixels.  This is the space required
-    				 * to hold any slaves contained entirely
-    				 * in this slot, adjusted for any slot
-    				 * constrants, such as size or padding. */
+    struct Gridder *binNextPtr;	/* The next slave window in this bin. Each bin
+    				 * contains a list of all slaves whose spans
+    				 * are >1 and whose right edges fall in this
+    				 * slot. */
+    int minSize;		/* Minimum size needed for this slot, in
+    				 * pixels. This is the space required to hold
+    				 * any slaves contained entirely in this slot,
+    				 * adjusted for any slot constrants, such as
+    				 * size or padding. */
     int pad;			/* Padding needed for this slot */
     int weight;			/* Slot weight, controls resizing. */
-    Tk_Uid uniform;             /* Value of -uniform option. It is used to
+    Tk_Uid uniform;		/* Value of -uniform option. It is used to
 				 * group slots that should have the same
 				 * size. */
-    int minOffset;		/* The minimum offset, in pixels, from
-    				 * the beginning of the layout to the
-    				 * right/bottom edge of the slot calculated
-    				 * from top/left to bottom/right. */
-    int maxOffset;		/* The maximum offset, in pixels, from
-    				 * the beginning of the layout to the
-    				 * right-or-bottom edge of the slot calculated
-    				 * from bottom-or-right to top-or-left. */
+    int minOffset;		/* The minimum offset, in pixels, from the
+    				 * beginning of the layout to the bottom/right
+    				 * edge of the slot calculated from top/left
+    				 * to bottom/right. */
+    int maxOffset;		/* The maximum offset, in pixels, from the
+    				 * beginning of the layout to the bottom/right
+    				 * edge of the slot calculated from
+    				 * bottom/right to top/left. */
 } GridLayout;
 
 /*
@@ -136,81 +136,84 @@ typedef struct {
     				 * column constraints. */
     int rowEnd;			/* The last row occupied by any slave. */
     int rowMax;			/* The number of rows with constraints. */
-    int rowSpace;		/* The number of slots currently allocated
-    				 * for row constraints. */
+    int rowSpace;		/* The number of slots currently allocated for
+    				 * row constraints. */
     int startX;			/* Pixel offset of this layout within its
-    				 * parent. */
+    				 * master. */
     int startY;			/* Pixel offset of this layout within its
-    				 * parent. */
+    				 * master. */
+    Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Value of anchor option: specifies where a
+				 * grid without weight should be placed. */
 } GridMaster;
 
 /*
- * For each window that the grid cares about (either because
- * the window is managed by the grid or because the window
- * has slaves that are managed by the grid), there is a
- * structure of the following type:
+ * For each window that the grid cares about (either because the window is
+ * managed by the grid or because the window has slaves that are managed by
+ * the grid), there is a structure of the following type:
  */
 
 typedef struct Gridder {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk token for window.  NULL means that
-				 * the window has been deleted, but the
-				 * gridder hasn't had a chance to clean up
-				 * yet because the structure is still in
-				 * use. */
-    struct Gridder *masterPtr;	/* Master window within which this window
-				 * is managed (NULL means this window
-				 * isn't managed by the gridder). */
-    struct Gridder *nextPtr;	/* Next window managed within same
-				 * parent.  List order doesn't matter. */
-    struct Gridder *slavePtr;	/* First in list of slaves managed
-				 * inside this window (NULL means
-				 * no grid slaves). */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk token for window. NULL means that the
+				 * window has been deleted, but the gridder
+				 * hasn't had a chance to clean up yet because
+				 * the structure is still in use. */
+    struct Gridder *masterPtr;	/* Master window within which this window is
+				 * managed (NULL means this window isn't
+				 * managed by the gridder). */
+    struct Gridder *nextPtr;	/* Next window managed within same master.
+				 * List order doesn't matter. */
+    struct Gridder *slavePtr;	/* First in list of slaves managed inside this
+				 * window (NULL means no grid slaves). */
     GridMaster *masterDataPtr;	/* Additional data for geometry master. */
-    int column, row;		/* Location in the grid (starting
-				 * from zero). */
+    Tcl_Obj *in;                /* Store master name when removed. */
+    int column, row;		/* Location in the grid (starting from
+				 * zero). */
     int numCols, numRows;	/* Number of columns or rows this slave spans.
 				 * Should be at least 1. */
     int padX, padY;		/* Total additional pixels to leave around the
-				 * window.  Some is of this space is on each 
-				 * side.  This is space *outside* the window:
+				 * window. Some is of this space is on each
+				 * side. This is space *outside* the window:
 				 * we'll allocate extra space in frame but
 				 * won't enlarge window). */
-    int padLeft, padTop;	/* The part of padX or padY to use on the
-				 * left or top of the widget, respectively.
-				 * By default, this is half of padX or padY. */
+    int padLeft, padTop;	/* The part of padX or padY to use on the left
+				 * or top of the widget, respectively. By
+				 * default, this is half of padX or padY. */
     int iPadX, iPadY;		/* Total extra pixels to allocate inside the
 				 * window (half this amount will appear on
 				 * each side). */
     int sticky;			/* which sides of its cavity this window
 				 * sticks to. See below for definitions */
-    int doubleBw;		/* Twice the window's last known border
-				 * width.  If this changes, the window
-				 * must be re-arranged within its parent. */
-    int *abortPtr;		/* If non-NULL, it means that there is a nested
-				 * call to ArrangeGrid already working on
-				 * this window.  *abortPtr may be set to 1 to
-				 * abort that nested call.  This happens, for
-				 * example, if tkwin or any of its slaves
+    int doubleBw;		/* Twice the window's last known border width.
+				 * If this changes, the window must be
+				 * re-arranged within its master. */
+    int *abortPtr;		/* If non-NULL, it means that there is a
+				 * nested call to ArrangeGrid already working
+				 * on this window. *abortPtr may be set to 1
+				 * to abort that nested call. This happens,
+				 * for example, if tkwin or any of its slaves
 				 * is deleted. */
-    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags;  see below
-				 * for definitions. */
+    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags; see below for
+				 * definitions. */
 
     /*
      * These fields are used temporarily for layout calculations only.
      */
 
     struct Gridder *binNextPtr;	/* Link to next span>1 slave in this bin. */
-    int size;			/* Nominal size (width or height) in pixels
-    				 * of the slave.  This includes the padding. */
+    int size;			/* Nominal size (width or height) in pixels of
+    				 * the slave. This includes the padding. */
 } Gridder;
 
-/* Flag values for "sticky"ness  The 16 combinations subsume the packer's
+/*
+ * Flag values for "sticky"ness. The 16 combinations subsume the packer's
  * notion of anchor and fill.
  *
- * STICK_NORTH  	This window sticks to the top of its cavity.
- * STICK_EAST		This window sticks to the right edge of its cavity.
- * STICK_SOUTH		This window sticks to the bottom of its cavity.
- * STICK_WEST		This window sticks to the left edge of its cavity.
+ * STICK_NORTH			This window sticks to the top of its cavity.
+ * STICK_EAST			This window sticks to the right edge of its
+ *				cavity.
+ * STICK_SOUTH			This window sticks to the bottom of its cavity.
+ * STICK_WEST			This window sticks to the left edge of its
+ *				cavity.
  */
 
 #define STICK_NORTH		1
@@ -231,14 +234,13 @@ typedef struct UniformGroup {
 /*
  * Flag values for Grid structures:
  *
- * REQUESTED_RELAYOUT:		1 means a Tcl_DoWhenIdle request
- *				has already been made to re-arrange
- *				all the slaves of this window.
- *
- * DONT_PROPAGATE:		1 means don't set this window's requested
- *				size.  0 means if this window is a master
- *				then Tk will set its requested size to fit
- *				the needs of its slaves.
+ * REQUESTED_RELAYOUT		1 means a Tcl_DoWhenIdle request has already
+ *				been made to re-arrange all the slaves of this
+ *				window.
+ * DONT_PROPAGATE		1 means don't set this window's requested
+ *				size. 0 means if this window is a master then
+ *				Tk will set its requested size to fit the
+ *				needs of its slaves.
  */
 
 #define REQUESTED_RELAYOUT	1
@@ -248,66 +250,71 @@ typedef struct UniformGroup {
  * Prototypes for procedures used only in this file:
  */
 
-static void	AdjustForSticky _ANSI_ARGS_((Gridder *slavePtr, int *xPtr, 
-		    int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
-static int	AdjustOffsets _ANSI_ARGS_((int width,
-			int elements, SlotInfo *slotPtr));
-static void	ArrangeGrid _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int	CheckSlotData _ANSI_ARGS_((Gridder *masterPtr, int slot,
-			int slotType, int checkOnly));
-static int	ConfigureSlaves _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void	DestroyGrid _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static Gridder *GetGrid _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-static int	GridBboxCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridForgetRemoveCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridInfoCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridLocationCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridPropagateCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridRowColumnConfigureCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridSizeCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridSlavesCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void	GridStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void	GridLostSlaveProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void	GridReqProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void 	InitMasterData _ANSI_ARGS_((Gridder *masterPtr));
-static Tcl_Obj *NewPairObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp*, int, int));
-static Tcl_Obj *NewQuadObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp*, int, int, int, int));
-static int	ResolveConstraints _ANSI_ARGS_((Gridder *gridPtr,
-			int rowOrColumn, int maxOffset));
-static void	SetGridSize _ANSI_ARGS_((Gridder *gridPtr));
-static int	SetSlaveColumn _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			Gridder *slavePtr, int column, int numCols));
-static int	SetSlaveRow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			Gridder *slavePtr, int row, int numRows));
-static void	StickyToString _ANSI_ARGS_((int flags, char *result));
-static int	StringToSticky _ANSI_ARGS_((char *string));
-static void	Unlink _ANSI_ARGS_((Gridder *gridPtr));
-
-static Tk_GeomMgr gridMgrType = {
+static void		AdjustForSticky(Gridder *slavePtr, int *xPtr,
+			    int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+static int		AdjustOffsets(int width, int elements,
+			    SlotInfo *slotPtr);
+static void		ArrangeGrid(ClientData clientData);
+static int		CheckSlotData(Gridder *masterPtr, int slot,
+			    int slotType, int checkOnly);
+static int		ConfigureSlaves(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DestroyGrid(char *memPtr);
+static Gridder *	GetGrid(Tk_Window tkwin);
+static int		GridAnchorCommand(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridBboxCommand(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridForgetRemoveCommand(Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridInfoCommand(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridLocationCommand(Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridPropagateCommand(Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridSizeCommand(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridSlavesCommand(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		GridStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		GridLostSlaveProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		GridReqProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		InitMasterData(Gridder *masterPtr);
+static Tcl_Obj *	NewPairObj(int, int);
+static Tcl_Obj *	NewQuadObj(int, int, int, int);
+static int		ResolveConstraints(Gridder *gridPtr, int rowOrColumn,
+			    int maxOffset);
+static void		SetGridSize(Gridder *gridPtr);
+static int		SetSlaveColumn(Tcl_Interp *interp, Gridder *slavePtr,
+			    int column, int numCols);
+static int		SetSlaveRow(Tcl_Interp *interp, Gridder *slavePtr,
+			    int row, int numRows);
+static void		StickyToString(int flags, char *result);
+static int		StringToSticky(char *string);
+static void		Unlink(Gridder *gridPtr);
+
+static const Tk_GeomMgr gridMgrType = {
     "grid",			/* name */
     GridReqProc,		/* requestProc */
     GridLostSlaveProc,		/* lostSlaveProc */
 };
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_GridCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "grid" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the "grid" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -315,31 +322,32 @@ static Tk_GeomMgr gridMgrType = {
  * Side effects:
  *	See the user documentation.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GridObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_GridObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
-	"bbox", "columnconfigure", "configure", "forget",
-	"info",	"location", "propagate", "remove",
-	"rowconfigure", "size",	"slaves", (char *) NULL };
+	"anchor", "bbox", "columnconfigure", "configure",
+	"forget", "info", "location", "propagate", "remove",
+	"rowconfigure", "size",	"slaves", NULL
+    };
     enum options {
-	GRID_BBOX, GRID_COLUMNCONFIGURE, GRID_CONFIGURE, GRID_FORGET,
-	GRID_INFO, GRID_LOCATION, GRID_PROPAGATE, GRID_REMOVE,
-	GRID_ROWCONFIGURE, GRID_SIZE, GRID_SLAVES };
+	GRID_ANCHOR, GRID_BBOX, GRID_COLUMNCONFIGURE, GRID_CONFIGURE,
+	GRID_FORGET, GRID_INFO, GRID_LOCATION, GRID_PROPAGATE, GRID_REMOVE,
+	GRID_ROWCONFIGURE, GRID_SIZE, GRID_SLAVES
+    };
     int index;
-		
-  
+
     if (objc >= 2) {
 	char *argv1 = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
+
 	if ((argv1[0] == '.') || (argv1[0] == REL_SKIP) ||
     		(argv1[0] == REL_VERT)) {
 	    return ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc-1, objv+1);
@@ -356,22 +364,24 @@ Tk_GridObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-      case GRID_BBOX:
+    case GRID_ANCHOR:
+	return GridAnchorCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv);
+    case GRID_BBOX:
 	return GridBboxCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv);
-      case GRID_CONFIGURE:
+    case GRID_CONFIGURE:
 	return ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc-2, objv+2);
-      case GRID_FORGET:
-      case GRID_REMOVE:
+    case GRID_FORGET:
+    case GRID_REMOVE:
 	return GridForgetRemoveCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv);
-      case GRID_INFO:
+    case GRID_INFO:
 	return GridInfoCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv);
-      case GRID_LOCATION:
+    case GRID_LOCATION:
 	return GridLocationCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv);
-      case GRID_PROPAGATE:
+    case GRID_PROPAGATE:
 	return GridPropagateCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv);
-      case GRID_SIZE:
+    case GRID_SIZE:
 	return GridSizeCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv);
-      case GRID_SLAVES:
+    case GRID_SLAVES:
 	return GridSlavesCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv);
 
     /*
@@ -383,8 +393,8 @@ Tk_GridObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
      *  grid rowconfigure <master> <index> -option value -option value.
      */
 
-      case GRID_COLUMNCONFIGURE:
-      case GRID_ROWCONFIGURE:
+    case GRID_COLUMNCONFIGURE:
+    case GRID_ROWCONFIGURE:
 	return GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv);
     }
 
@@ -396,6 +406,75 @@ Tk_GridObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * GridAnchorCommand --
+ *
+ *	Implementation of the [grid anchor] subcommand. See the user
+ *	documentation for details on what it does.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Standard Tcl result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May recompute grid geometry.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+GridAnchorCommand(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Main window of the application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
+{
+    Tk_Window master;
+    Gridder *masterPtr;
+    GridMaster *gridPtr;
+    Tk_Anchor old;
+
+    if (objc > 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?anchor?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &master) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    masterPtr = GetGrid(master);
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	gridPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr;
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *) Tk_NameOfAnchor(gridPtr == NULL ?
+		GRID_DEFAULT_ANCHOR : gridPtr->anchor), TCL_VOLATILE);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    InitMasterData(masterPtr);
+    gridPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr;
+    old = gridPtr->anchor;
+    if (Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(interp, objv[3], &gridPtr->anchor) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Only request a relayout if the anchor changes.
+     */
+
+    if (old != gridPtr->anchor) {
+	if (masterPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
+	    *masterPtr->abortPtr = 1;
+	}
+	if (!(masterPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT)) {
+	    masterPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_RELAYOUT;
+	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ArrangeGrid, (ClientData) masterPtr);
+	}
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * GridBboxCommand --
  *
  *	Implementation of the [grid bbox] subcommand.
@@ -410,11 +489,11 @@ Tk_GridObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-GridBboxCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Main window of the application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+GridBboxCommand(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Main window of the application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window master;
     Gridder *masterPtr;		/* master grid record */
@@ -424,17 +503,17 @@ GridBboxCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
     int endX, endY;		/* last column/row in the layout */
     int x=0, y=0;		/* starting pixels for this bounding box */
     int width, height;		/* size of the bounding box */
-    
+
     if (objc!=3 && objc != 5 && objc != 7) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "master ?column row ?column row??");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &master) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     masterPtr = GetGrid(master);
-    
+
     if (objc >= 5) {
 	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &column) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -445,7 +524,7 @@ GridBboxCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	column2 = column;
 	row2 = row;
     }
-    
+
     if (objc == 7) {
 	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[5], &column2) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -454,65 +533,70 @@ GridBboxCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     }
-    
+
     gridPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr;
     if (gridPtr == NULL) {
-	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewQuadObj(interp, 0, 0, 0, 0));
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewQuadObj(0, 0, 0, 0));
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
-    
+
     SetGridSize(masterPtr);
     endX = MAX(gridPtr->columnEnd, gridPtr->columnMax);
     endY = MAX(gridPtr->rowEnd, gridPtr->rowMax);
-    
+
     if ((endX == 0) || (endY == 0)) {
-	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewQuadObj(interp, 0, 0, 0, 0));
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewQuadObj(0, 0, 0, 0));
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
     if (objc == 3) {
-	row = column = 0;
+	row = 0;
+	column = 0;
 	row2 = endY;
 	column2 = endX;
     }
-    
+
     if (column > column2) {
 	int temp = column;
-	column = column2, column2 = temp;
+
+	column = column2;
+	column2 = temp;
     }
     if (row > row2) {
 	int temp = row;
-	row = row2, row2 = temp;
+
+	row = row2;
+	row2 = temp;
     }
-    
+
     if (column > 0 && column < endX) {
 	x = gridPtr->columnPtr[column-1].offset;
-    } else if  (column > 0) {
+    } else if (column > 0) {
 	x = gridPtr->columnPtr[endX-1].offset;
     }
-    
+
     if (row > 0 && row < endY) {
 	y = gridPtr->rowPtr[row-1].offset;
     } else if (row > 0) {
 	y = gridPtr->rowPtr[endY-1].offset;
     }
-    
+
     if (column2 < 0) {
 	width = 0;
     } else if (column2 >= endX) {
 	width = gridPtr->columnPtr[endX-1].offset - x;
     } else {
 	width = gridPtr->columnPtr[column2].offset - x;
-    } 
-    
+    }
+
     if (row2 < 0) {
 	height = 0;
     } else if (row2 >= endY) {
 	height = gridPtr->rowPtr[endY-1].offset - y;
     } else {
 	height = gridPtr->rowPtr[row2].offset - y;
-    } 
-    
-    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewQuadObj(interp,
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewQuadObj(
 	    x + gridPtr->startX, y + gridPtr->startY, width, height));
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -522,8 +606,8 @@ GridBboxCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * GridForgetRemoveCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [grid forget]/[grid remove] subcommands.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what these do.
+ *	Implementation of the [grid forget]/[grid remove] subcommands. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what these do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
@@ -535,18 +619,18 @@ GridBboxCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-GridForgetRemoveCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Main window of the application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+GridForgetRemoveCommand(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Main window of the application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window slave;
     Gridder *slavePtr;
     int i;
     char *string = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
     char c = string[0];
-    
+
     for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
 	if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i], &slave) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -554,27 +638,48 @@ GridForgetRemoveCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	slavePtr = GetGrid(slave);
 	if (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL) {
-	    
 	    /*
 	     * For "forget", reset all the settings to their defaults
 	     */
-	    
+
 	    if (c == 'f') {
-		slavePtr->column = slavePtr->row = -1;
+		slavePtr->column = -1;
+		slavePtr->row = -1;
 		slavePtr->numCols = 1;
 		slavePtr->numRows = 1;
-		slavePtr->padX = slavePtr->padY = 0;
-		slavePtr->padLeft = slavePtr->padTop = 0;
-		slavePtr->iPadX = slavePtr->iPadY = 0;
+		slavePtr->padX = 0;
+		slavePtr->padY = 0;
+		slavePtr->padLeft = 0;
+		slavePtr->padTop = 0;
+		slavePtr->iPadX = 0;
+		slavePtr->iPadY = 0;
+		if (slavePtr->in != NULL) {
+		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(slavePtr->in);
+		    slavePtr->in = NULL;
+		}
 		slavePtr->doubleBw = 2*Tk_Changes(tkwin)->border_width;
 		if (slavePtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT) {
 		    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ArrangeGrid, (ClientData) slavePtr);
 		}
 		slavePtr->flags = 0;
 		slavePtr->sticky = 0;
+	    } else {
+		/*
+		 * When removing, store name of master to be able to
+		 * restore it later, even if the master is recreated.
+		 */
+
+		if (slavePtr->in != NULL) {
+		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(slavePtr->in);
+		    slavePtr->in = NULL;
+		}
+		if (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL) {
+		    slavePtr->in = Tcl_NewStringObj(
+			    Tk_PathName(slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin), -1);
+		    Tcl_IncrRefCount(slavePtr->in);
+		}
 	    }
-	    Tk_ManageGeometry(slave, (Tk_GeomMgr *) NULL,
-		    (ClientData) NULL);
+	    Tk_ManageGeometry(slave, NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
 	    if (slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin)) {
 		Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin,
 			slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin);
@@ -591,7 +696,7 @@ GridForgetRemoveCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * GridInfoCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [grid info] subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the [grid info] subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -604,16 +709,16 @@ GridForgetRemoveCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-GridInfoCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Main window of the application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+GridInfoCommand(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Main window of the application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     register Gridder *slavePtr;
     Tk_Window slave;
     char buffer[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
-    
+
     if (objc != 3) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -626,19 +731,19 @@ GridInfoCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
-    
+
     Tcl_AppendElement(interp, "-in");
     Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tk_PathName(slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin));
     sprintf(buffer, " -column %d -row %d -columnspan %d -rowspan %d",
 	    slavePtr->column, slavePtr->row,
 	    slavePtr->numCols, slavePtr->numRows);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "ipadx", slavePtr->iPadX/2, slavePtr->iPadX);
     TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "ipady", slavePtr->iPadY/2, slavePtr->iPadY);
     TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "padx", slavePtr->padLeft, slavePtr->padX);
     TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "pady", slavePtr->padTop, slavePtr->padY);
     StickyToString(slavePtr->sticky, buffer);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -sticky ", buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -sticky ", buffer, NULL);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -647,7 +752,7 @@ GridInfoCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * GridLocationCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [grid location] subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the [grid location] subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -660,58 +765,58 @@ GridInfoCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-GridLocationCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Main window of the application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+GridLocationCommand(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Main window of the application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window master;
-    Gridder *masterPtr;		/* master grid record */
-    GridMaster *gridPtr;	/* pointer to grid data */
+    Gridder *masterPtr;		/* Master grid record. */
+    GridMaster *gridPtr;	/* Pointer to grid data. */
     register SlotInfo *slotPtr;
-    int x, y;		/* Offset in pixels, from edge of parent. */
-    int i, j;		/* Corresponding column and row indeces. */
-    int endX, endY;		/* end of grid */
-    
+    int x, y;			/* Offset in pixels, from edge of master. */
+    int i, j;			/* Corresponding column and row indeces. */
+    int endX, endY;		/* End of grid. */
+
     if (objc != 5) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "master x y");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2], &master) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, master, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, master, objv[4], &y) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     masterPtr = GetGrid(master);
     if (masterPtr->masterDataPtr == NULL) {
-	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(interp, -1, -1));
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(-1, -1));
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
     gridPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr;
-    
-    /* 
-     * Update any pending requests.  This is not always the
-     * steady state value, as more configure events could be in
-     * the pipeline, but its as close as its easy to get.
+
+    /*
+     * Update any pending requests. This is not always the steady state value,
+     * as more configure events could be in the pipeline, but its as close as
+     * its easy to get.
      */
-    
+
     while (masterPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT) {
 	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ArrangeGrid, (ClientData) masterPtr);
-	ArrangeGrid ((ClientData) masterPtr);
+	ArrangeGrid((ClientData) masterPtr);
     }
     SetGridSize(masterPtr);
     endX = MAX(gridPtr->columnEnd, gridPtr->columnMax);
     endY = MAX(gridPtr->rowEnd, gridPtr->rowMax);
-    
-    slotPtr  = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr;
+
+    slotPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr;
     if (x < masterPtr->masterDataPtr->startX) {
 	i = -1;
     } else {
@@ -720,8 +825,8 @@ GridLocationCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	    /* null body */
 	}
     }
-    
-    slotPtr  = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr;
+
+    slotPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr;
     if (y < masterPtr->masterDataPtr->startY) {
 	j = -1;
     } else {
@@ -730,8 +835,8 @@ GridLocationCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	    /* null body */
 	}
     }
-    
-    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(interp, i, j));
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(i, j));
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -740,7 +845,7 @@ GridLocationCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * GridPropagateCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [grid propagate] subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the [grid propagate] subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -753,16 +858,16 @@ GridLocationCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-GridPropagateCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Main window of the application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+GridPropagateCommand(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Main window of the application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window master;
     Gridder *masterPtr;
     int propagate, old;
-    
+
     if (objc > 4) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?boolean?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -780,9 +885,11 @@ GridPropagateCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
     if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[3], &propagate) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
-    /* Only request a relayout if the propagation bit changes */
-    
+
+    /*
+     * Only request a relayout if the propagation bit changes.
+     */
+
     old = !(masterPtr->flags & DONT_PROPAGATE);
     if (propagate != old) {
 	if (propagate) {
@@ -790,12 +897,12 @@ GridPropagateCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	} else {
 	    masterPtr->flags |= DONT_PROPAGATE;
 	}
-	
+
 	/*
 	 * Re-arrange the master to allow new geometry information to
 	 * propagate upwards to the master's master.
 	 */
-	
+
 	if (masterPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
 	    *masterPtr->abortPtr = 1;
 	}
@@ -813,8 +920,7 @@ GridPropagateCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  * GridRowColumnConfigureCommand --
  *
  *	Implementation of the [grid rowconfigure] and [grid columnconfigure]
- *	subcommands.  See the user documentation for details on what these
- *	do.
+ *	subcommands. See the user documentation for details on what these do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
@@ -826,27 +932,29 @@ GridPropagateCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Main window of the application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Main window of the application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    Tk_Window master;
-    Gridder *masterPtr;
+    Tk_Window master, slave;
+    Gridder *masterPtr, *slavePtr;
     SlotInfo *slotPtr = NULL;
     int slot;			/* the column or row number */
     int slotType;		/* COLUMN or ROW */
     int size;			/* the configuration value */
-    int checkOnly;		/* check the size only */
     int lObjc;			/* Number of items in index list */
     Tcl_Obj **lObjv;		/* array of indices */
     int ok;			/* temporary TCL result code */
-    int i, j;
+    int i, j, first, last;
     char *string;
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
-	"-minsize", "-pad", "-uniform", "-weight", (char *) NULL };
-    enum options { ROWCOL_MINSIZE, ROWCOL_PAD, ROWCOL_UNIFORM, ROWCOL_WEIGHT };
+	"-minsize", "-pad", "-uniform", "-weight", NULL
+    };
+    enum options {
+	ROWCOL_MINSIZE, ROWCOL_PAD, ROWCOL_UNIFORM, ROWCOL_WEIGHT
+    };
     int index;
     Tcl_Obj *listCopy;
 
@@ -871,41 +979,40 @@ GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
     if (lObjc == 0) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no ",
 		(slotType == COLUMN) ? "column" : "row",
-		" indices specified", (char *) NULL);
+		" indices specified", NULL);
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    checkOnly = ((objc == 4) || (objc == 5));
     masterPtr = GetGrid(master);
-    if (checkOnly && (lObjc > 1)) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), " ",
-		Tcl_GetString(objv[1]),
-		": must specify a single element on retrieval", (char *) NULL);
-	Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
-	return TCL_ERROR;
-    }
-    for (j = 0; j < lObjc; j++) {
-	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, lObjv[j], &slot) != TCL_OK) {
+    first = 0; /* lint */
+    last = 0; /* lint */
+
+    if ((objc == 4) || (objc == 5)) {
+	if (lObjc != 1) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), " ",
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]),
+		    ": must specify a single element on retrieval", NULL);
 	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	ok = CheckSlotData(masterPtr, slot, slotType, checkOnly);
-	if ((ok != TCL_OK) && ((objc < 4) || (objc > 5))) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), " ", 
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), ": \"", Tcl_GetString(lObjv[j]),
-		    "\" is out of range", (char *) NULL);
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, lObjv[0], &slot) != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		    " (when retreiving options only integer indices are "
+		    "allowed)", NULL);
 	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	} else if (ok == TCL_OK) {
+	}
+	ok = CheckSlotData(masterPtr, slot, slotType, /* checkOnly */ 1);
+	if (ok == TCL_OK) {
 	    slotPtr = (slotType == COLUMN) ?
 		    masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr :
 		    masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Return all of the options for this row or column.  If the
-	 * request is out of range, return all 0's.
+	 * Return all of the options for this row or column. If the request is
+	 * out of range, return all 0's.
 	 */
 
 	if (objc == 4) {
@@ -939,116 +1046,200 @@ GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Loop through each option value pair, setting the values as
-	 * required.  If only one option is given, with no value, the
-	 * current value is returned.
+	 * If only one option is given, with no value, the current value is
+	 * returned.
 	 */
 
-	for (i = 4; i < objc; i += 2) {
-	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings, "option",
-			0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[4], optionStrings, "option", 0,
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (index == ROWCOL_MINSIZE) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+		    Tcl_NewIntObj((ok == TCL_OK) ? slotPtr[slot].minSize : 0));
+	} else if (index == ROWCOL_WEIGHT) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+		    Tcl_NewIntObj((ok == TCL_OK) ? slotPtr[slot].weight : 0));
+	} else if (index == ROWCOL_UNIFORM) {
+	    Tk_Uid value = (ok == TCL_OK) ? slotPtr[slot].uniform : "";
+
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+		    Tcl_NewStringObj(value == NULL ? "" : value, -1));
+	} else if (index == ROWCOL_PAD) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+		    Tcl_NewIntObj((ok == TCL_OK) ? slotPtr[slot].pad : 0));
+	}
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    for (j = 0; j < lObjc; j++) {
+	int allSlaves = 0;
+
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, lObjv[j], &slot) == TCL_OK) {
+	    first = slot;
+	    last = slot;
+	    slavePtr = NULL;
+	} else if (strcmp(Tcl_GetString(lObjv[j]), "all") == 0) {
+	    /*
+	     * Make sure master is initialised.
+	     */
+
+	    InitMasterData(masterPtr);
+
+	    slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr;
+	    if (slavePtr == NULL) {
+		continue;
+	    }
+	    allSlaves = 1;
+	} else if (TkGetWindowFromObj(NULL, tkwin, lObjv[j], &slave)
+		== TCL_OK) {
+	    /*
+	     * Is it gridded in this master?
+	     */
+
+	    slavePtr = GetGrid(slave);
+	    if (slavePtr->masterPtr != masterPtr) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), " ",
+			Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), ": the window \"",
+			Tcl_GetString(lObjv[j]), "\" is not managed by \"",
+		 	Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "\"", NULL);
 		Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (index == ROWCOL_MINSIZE) {
-		if (objc == 5) {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(
-			    (ok == TCL_OK) ? slotPtr[slot].minSize : 0));
-		} else if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, master, objv[i+1], &size)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
-		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    slotPtr[slot].minSize = size;
-		}
-	    } else if (index == ROWCOL_WEIGHT) {
-		int wt;
-		if (objc == 5) {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(
-			    (ok == TCL_OK) ? slotPtr[slot].weight : 0));
-		} else if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &wt)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
-		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		} else if (wt < 0) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid arg \"",
-			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
-			    "\": should be non-negative", (char *) NULL);
-		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), " ",
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), ": illegal index \"",
+		    Tcl_GetString(lObjv[j]), "\"", NULL);
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * The outer loop is only to handle "all".
+	 */
+
+	do {
+	    if (slavePtr != NULL) {
+		first = (slotType == COLUMN) ?
+			slavePtr->column : slavePtr->row;
+		last = first - 1 + ((slotType == COLUMN) ?
+			slavePtr->numCols : slavePtr->numRows);
+	    }
+
+	    for (slot = first; slot <= last; slot++) {
+		ok = CheckSlotData(masterPtr, slot, slotType, /*checkOnly*/ 0);
+		if (ok != TCL_OK) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), " ",
+			    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), ": \"",
+			    Tcl_GetString(lObjv[j]),
+			    "\" is out of range", NULL);
+   		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    slotPtr[slot].weight = wt;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == ROWCOL_UNIFORM) {
-		if (objc == 5) {
-		    Tk_Uid value;
-		    value = (ok == TCL_OK) ? slotPtr[slot].uniform : "";
-		    if (value == NULL) {
-			value = "";
+		slotPtr = (slotType == COLUMN) ?
+			masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr :
+			masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr;
+
+		/*
+		 * Loop through each option value pair, setting the values as
+		 * required.
+		 */
+
+		for (i = 4; i < objc; i += 2) {
+		    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings,
+			    "option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+   			Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
+			return TCL_ERROR;
 		    }
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(value, -1));
-		} else {
-		    slotPtr[slot].uniform = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]));
-		    if (slotPtr[slot].uniform != NULL &&
-			    slotPtr[slot].uniform[0] == 0) {
-			slotPtr[slot].uniform = NULL;
+		    if (index == ROWCOL_MINSIZE) {
+			if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, master, objv[i+1],
+				&size) != TCL_OK) {
+   			    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
+			    return TCL_ERROR;
+			} else {
+			    slotPtr[slot].minSize = size;
+			}
+		    } else if (index == ROWCOL_WEIGHT) {
+			int wt;
+
+			if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp,objv[i+1],&wt)!=TCL_OK) {
+   			    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
+			    return TCL_ERROR;
+			} else if (wt < 0) {
+			    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid arg \"",
+				    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
+				    "\": should be non-negative", NULL);
+   			    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
+			    return TCL_ERROR;
+			} else {
+			    slotPtr[slot].weight = wt;
+			}
+		    } else if (index == ROWCOL_UNIFORM) {
+			slotPtr[slot].uniform =
+				Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]));
+			if (slotPtr[slot].uniform != NULL &&
+				slotPtr[slot].uniform[0] == 0) {
+			    slotPtr[slot].uniform = NULL;
+			}
+		    } else if (index == ROWCOL_PAD) {
+			if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, master, objv[i+1],
+				&size) != TCL_OK) {
+   			    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
+			    return TCL_ERROR;
+			} else if (size < 0) {
+			    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid arg \"",
+				    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
+				    "\": should be non-negative", NULL);
+   			    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
+			    return TCL_ERROR;
+			} else {
+			    slotPtr[slot].pad = size;
+			}
 		    }
 		}
-	    } else if (index == ROWCOL_PAD) {
-		if (objc == 5) {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(
-			    (ok == TCL_OK) ? slotPtr[slot].pad : 0));
-		} else if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, master, objv[i+1], &size)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
-		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		} else if (size < 0) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid arg \"", 
-			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
-			    "\": should be non-negative", (char *) NULL);
-		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    slotPtr[slot].pad = size;
-		}
 	    }
-	}
+	    if (slavePtr != NULL) {
+		slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr;
+	    }
+	} while ((allSlaves == 1) && (slavePtr != NULL));
     }
     Tcl_DecrRefCount(listCopy);
 
     /*
-     * If we changed a property, re-arrange the table,
-     * and check for constraint shrinkage.
+     * We changed a property, re-arrange the table, and check for constraint
+     * shrinkage. A null slotPtr will occur for 'all' checks.
      */
 
-    if (objc != 5) {
+    if (slotPtr != NULL) {
 	if (slotType == ROW) {
 	    int last = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowMax - 1;
+
 	    while ((last >= 0) && (slotPtr[last].weight == 0)
-		    && (slotPtr[last].pad == 0)
-		    && (slotPtr[last].minSize == 0)
+		    && (slotPtr[last].pad == 0) && (slotPtr[last].minSize == 0)
 		    && (slotPtr[last].uniform == NULL)) {
 		last--;
 	    }
 	    masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowMax = last+1;
 	} else {
 	    int last = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnMax - 1;
+
 	    while ((last >= 0) && (slotPtr[last].weight == 0)
-		    && (slotPtr[last].pad == 0)
-		    && (slotPtr[last].minSize == 0)
+		    && (slotPtr[last].pad == 0) && (slotPtr[last].minSize == 0)
 		    && (slotPtr[last].uniform == NULL)) {
 		last--;
 	    }
 	    masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnMax = last + 1;
 	}
+    }
 
-	if (masterPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
-	    *masterPtr->abortPtr = 1;
-	}
-	if (!(masterPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT)) {
-	    masterPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_RELAYOUT;
-	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ArrangeGrid, (ClientData) masterPtr);
-	}
+    if (masterPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
+	*masterPtr->abortPtr = 1;
+    }
+    if (!(masterPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT)) {
+	masterPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_RELAYOUT;
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ArrangeGrid, (ClientData) masterPtr);
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -1058,7 +1249,7 @@ GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * GridSizeCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [grid size] subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the [grid size] subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -1071,16 +1262,16 @@ GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-GridSizeCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Main window of the application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+GridSizeCommand(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Main window of the application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window master;
     Gridder *masterPtr;
     GridMaster *gridPtr;	/* pointer to grid data */
-    
+
     if (objc != 3) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1090,15 +1281,15 @@ GridSizeCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     masterPtr = GetGrid(master);
-    
+
     if (masterPtr->masterDataPtr != NULL) {
 	SetGridSize(masterPtr);
 	gridPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr;
-	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(interp,
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(
 		MAX(gridPtr->columnEnd, gridPtr->columnMax),
 		MAX(gridPtr->rowEnd, gridPtr->rowMax)));
     } else {
-	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(interp, 0, 0));
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(0, 0));
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -1108,42 +1299,42 @@ GridSizeCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * GridSlavesCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [grid slaves] subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the [grid slaves] subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Places a list of slaves of the specified window in the
- *	interpreter's result field.
+ *	Places a list of slaves of the specified window in the interpreter's
+ *	result field.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-GridSlavesCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Main window of the application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+GridSlavesCommand(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Main window of the application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window master;
     Gridder *masterPtr;		/* master grid record */
     Gridder *slavePtr;
-    int i, value;
+    int i, value, index;
     int row = -1, column = -1;
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
-	"-column", "-row", (char *) NULL };
+	"-column", "-row", NULL
+    };
     enum options { SLAVES_COLUMN, SLAVES_ROW };
-    int index;
     Tcl_Obj *res;
-    
+
     if ((objc < 3) || ((objc % 2) == 0)) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?-option value...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     for (i = 3; i < objc; i += 2) {
 	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings, "option", 0,
 		&index) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1154,8 +1345,7 @@ GridSlavesCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 	if (value < 0) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
-		    " is an invalid value: should NOT be < 0",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    " is an invalid value: should NOT be < 0", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (index == SLAVES_COLUMN) {
@@ -1172,7 +1362,7 @@ GridSlavesCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 
     res = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
     for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
-	 slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (column>=0 && (slavePtr->column > column
 		|| slavePtr->column+slavePtr->numCols-1 < column)) {
 	    continue;
@@ -1189,30 +1379,29 @@ GridSlavesCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * GridReqProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk_GeometryRequest for
- *	windows managed by the grid.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by Tk_GeometryRequest for windows managed by
+ *	the grid.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Arranges for tkwin, and all its managed siblings, to
- *	be re-arranged at the next idle point.
+ *	Arranges for tkwin, and all its managed siblings, to be re-arranged at
+ *	the next idle point.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-GridReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Grid's information about
-				 * window that got new preferred
-				 * geometry.  */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Other Tk-related information
-				 * about the window. */
+GridReqProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Grid's information about window that got
+				 * new preferred geometry. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Other Tk-related information about the
+				 * window. */
 {
     register Gridder *gridPtr = (Gridder *) clientData;
 
@@ -1224,12 +1413,12 @@ GridReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * GridLostSlaveProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry
- *	claims control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry claims
+ *	control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1237,14 +1426,14 @@ GridReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
  * Side effects:
  *	Forgets all grid-related information about the slave.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-GridLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Grid structure for slave window that
-				 * was stolen away. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
+GridLostSlaveProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Grid structure for slave window that was
+				 * stolen away. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
 {
     register Gridder *slavePtr = (Gridder *) clientData;
 
@@ -1256,39 +1445,38 @@ GridLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * AdjustOffsets --
  *
- *	This procedure adjusts the size of the layout to fit in the
- *	space provided.  If it needs more space, the extra is added
- *	according to the weights.  If it needs less, the space is removed
- *	according to the weights, but at no time does the size drop below
- *	the minsize specified for that slot.
+ *	This procedure adjusts the size of the layout to fit in the space
+ *	provided. If it needs more space, the extra is added according to the
+ *	weights. If it needs less, the space is removed according to the
+ *	weights, but at no time does the size drop below the minsize specified
+ *	for that slot.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The initial offset of the layout,
- *	if all the weights are zero, else 0.
+ *	The size used by the layout.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The slot offsets are modified to shrink the layout.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-AdjustOffsets(size, slots, slotPtr)
-    int size;			/* The total layout size (in pixels). */
-    int slots;			/* Number of slots. */
-    register SlotInfo *slotPtr;	/* Pointer to slot array. */
+AdjustOffsets(
+    int size,			/* The total layout size (in pixels). */
+    int slots,			/* Number of slots. */
+    register SlotInfo *slotPtr)	/* Pointer to slot array. */
 {
     register int slot;		/* Current slot. */
     int diff;			/* Extra pixels needed to add to the layout. */
-    int totalWeight = 0;	/* Sum of the weights for all the slots. */
-    int weight = 0;		/* Sum of the weights so far. */
+    int totalWeight;		/* Sum of the weights for all the slots. */
+    int weight;			/* Sum of the weights so far. */
     int minSize;		/* Minimum possible layout size. */
-    int newDiff;		/* The most pixels that can be added on
-    				 * the current pass. */
+    int newDiff;		/* The most pixels that can be added on the
+    				 * current pass. */
 
     diff = size - slotPtr[slots-1].offset;
 
@@ -1297,24 +1485,24 @@ AdjustOffsets(size, slots, slotPtr)
      */
 
     if (diff == 0) {
-	return(0);
+	return size;
     }
 
     /*
-     * If all the weights are zero, center the layout in its parent if 
-     * there is extra space, else clip on the bottom/right.
+     * If all the weights are zero, there is nothing more to do.
      */
 
+    totalWeight = 0;
     for (slot = 0; slot < slots; slot++) {
 	totalWeight += slotPtr[slot].weight;
     }
 
-    if (totalWeight == 0 ) {
-	return(diff > 0 ? diff/2 : 0);
+    if (totalWeight == 0) {
+	return slotPtr[slots-1].offset;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Add extra space according to the slot weights.  This is done
+     * Add extra space according to the slot weights. This is done
      * cumulatively to prevent round-off error accumulation.
      */
 
@@ -1324,13 +1512,13 @@ AdjustOffsets(size, slots, slotPtr)
 	    weight += slotPtr[slot].weight;
 	    slotPtr[slot].offset += diff * weight / totalWeight;
 	}
-	return(0);
+	return size;
     }
 
     /*
-     * The layout must shrink below its requested size.  Compute the
-     * minimum possible size by looking at the slot minSizes.
-     * Store each slot's minimum size in temp.
+     * The layout must shrink below its requested size. Compute the minimum
+     * possible size by looking at the slot minSizes. Store each slot's
+     * minimum size in temp.
      */
 
     minSize = 0;
@@ -1346,34 +1534,35 @@ AdjustOffsets(size, slots, slotPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the requested size is less than the minimum required size,
-     * set the slot sizes to their minimum values, then clip on the 
-     * bottom/right.
+     * If the requested size is less than the minimum required size, set the
+     * slot sizes to their minimum values.
      */
 
     if (size <= minSize) {
     	int offset = 0;
+
 	for (slot = 0; slot < slots; slot++) {
 	    offset += slotPtr[slot].temp;
 	    slotPtr[slot].offset = offset;
 	}
-	return(0);
+	return minSize;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Remove space from slots according to their weights.  The weights
-     * get renormalized anytime a slot shrinks to its minimum size.
+     * Remove space from slots according to their weights. The weights get
+     * renormalized anytime a slot shrinks to its minimum size.
      */
 
     while (diff < 0) {
-
 	/*
 	 * Find the total weight for the shrinkable slots.
 	 */
 
-	for (totalWeight=slot=0; slot < slots; slot++) {
+	totalWeight = 0;
+	for (slot = 0; slot < slots; slot++) {
 	    int current = (slot == 0) ? slotPtr[slot].offset :
 		    slotPtr[slot].offset - slotPtr[slot-1].offset;
+
 	    if (current > slotPtr[slot].minSize) {
 		totalWeight += slotPtr[slot].weight;
 		slotPtr[slot].temp = slotPtr[slot].weight;
@@ -1391,9 +1580,10 @@ AdjustOffsets(size, slots, slotPtr)
 
 	newDiff = diff;
 	for (slot = 0; slot < slots; slot++) {
-	    int current;		/* current size of this slot */
-	    int maxDiff;		/* max diff that would cause
-	    				 * this slot to equal its minsize */
+	    int current;	/* Current size of this slot. */
+	    int maxDiff;	/* Maximum diff that would cause this slot to
+	    			 * equal its minsize. */
+
 	    if (slotPtr[slot].temp == 0) {
 	    	continue;
 	    }
@@ -1410,43 +1600,44 @@ AdjustOffsets(size, slots, slotPtr)
 	 * Now distribute the space.
 	 */
 
-	for (weight=slot=0; slot < slots; slot++) {
+	weight = 0;
+	for (slot = 0; slot < slots; slot++) {
 	    weight += slotPtr[slot].temp;
 	    slotPtr[slot].offset += newDiff * weight / totalWeight;
 	}
     	diff -= newDiff;
     }
-    return(0);
+    return size;
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * AdjustForSticky --
  *
- *	This procedure adjusts the size of a slave in its cavity based
- *	on its "sticky" flags.
+ *	This procedure adjusts the size of a slave in its cavity based on its
+ *	"sticky" flags.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The input x, y, width, and height are changed to represent the
- *	desired coordinates of the slave.
+ *	The input x, y, width, and height are changed to represent the desired
+ *	coordinates of the slave.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-AdjustForSticky(slavePtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    Gridder *slavePtr;	/* Slave window to arrange in its cavity. */
-    int *xPtr;		/* Pixel location of the left edge of the cavity. */
-    int *yPtr;		/* Pixel location of the top edge of the cavity. */
-    int *widthPtr;	/* Width of the cavity (in pixels). */
-    int *heightPtr;	/* Height of the cavity (in pixels). */
+AdjustForSticky(
+    Gridder *slavePtr,	/* Slave window to arrange in its cavity. */
+    int *xPtr,		/* Pixel location of the left edge of the cavity. */
+    int *yPtr,		/* Pixel location of the top edge of the cavity. */
+    int *widthPtr,	/* Width of the cavity (in pixels). */
+    int *heightPtr)	/* Height of the cavity (in pixels). */
 {
-    int diffx=0;	/* Cavity width - slave width. */
-    int diffy=0;	/* Cavity hight - slave height. */
+    int diffx = 0;	/* Cavity width - slave width. */
+    int diffy = 0;	/* Cavity hight - slave height. */
     int sticky = slavePtr->sticky;
 
     *xPtr += slavePtr->padLeft;
@@ -1479,14 +1670,13 @@ AdjustForSticky(slavePtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * ArrangeGrid --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked (using the Tcl_DoWhenIdle
- *	mechanism) to re-layout a set of windows managed by
- *	the grid.  It is invoked at idle time so that a
- *	series of grid requests can be merged into a single
+ *	This procedure is invoked (using the Tcl_DoWhenIdle mechanism) to
+ *	re-layout a set of windows managed by the grid. It is invoked at idle
+ *	time so that a series of grid requests can be merged into a single
  *	layout operation.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -1495,28 +1685,29 @@ AdjustForSticky(slavePtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
  * Side effects:
  *	The slaves of masterPtr may get resized or moved.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ArrangeGrid(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Structure describing parent whose slaves
+ArrangeGrid(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Structure describing master whose slaves
 				 * are to be re-layed out. */
 {
     register Gridder *masterPtr = (Gridder *) clientData;
-    register Gridder *slavePtr;	
+    register Gridder *slavePtr;
     GridMaster *slotPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr;
     int abort;
-    int width, height;		/* requested size of layout, in pixels */
-    int realWidth, realHeight;	/* actual size layout should take-up */
+    int width, height;		/* Requested size of layout, in pixels. */
+    int realWidth, realHeight;	/* Actual size layout should take-up. */
+    int usedX, usedY;
 
     masterPtr->flags &= ~REQUESTED_RELAYOUT;
 
     /*
-     * If the parent has no slaves anymore, then don't do anything
-     * at all:  just leave the parent's size as-is.  Otherwise there is
-     * no way to "relinquish" control over the parent so another geometry
-     * manager can take over.
+     * If the master has no slaves anymore, then don't do anything at all:
+     * just leave the master's size as-is. Otherwise there is no way to
+     * "relinquish" control over the master so another geometry manager can
+     * take over.
      */
 
     if (masterPtr->slavePtr == NULL) {
@@ -1528,9 +1719,9 @@ ArrangeGrid(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Abort any nested call to ArrangeGrid for this window, since
-     * we'll do everything necessary here, and set up so this call
-     * can be aborted if necessary.  
+     * Abort any nested call to ArrangeGrid for this window, since we'll do
+     * everything necessary here, and set up so this call can be aborted if
+     * necessary.
      */
 
     if (masterPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1545,13 +1736,13 @@ ArrangeGrid(clientData)
      */
 
     SetGridSize(masterPtr);
-    width =  ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, COLUMN, 0);
+    width = ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, COLUMN, 0);
     height = ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, ROW, 0);
     width += Tk_InternalBorderLeft(masterPtr->tkwin) +
 	    Tk_InternalBorderRight(masterPtr->tkwin);
     height += Tk_InternalBorderTop(masterPtr->tkwin) +
 	    Tk_InternalBorderBottom(masterPtr->tkwin);
-    
+
     if (width < Tk_MinReqWidth(masterPtr->tkwin)) {
 	width = Tk_MinReqWidth(masterPtr->tkwin);
     }
@@ -1569,15 +1760,14 @@ ArrangeGrid(clientData)
 	}
 	masterPtr->abortPtr = NULL;
 	Tcl_Release((ClientData) masterPtr);
-        return;
+	return;
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the currently requested layout size doesn't match the parent's
-     * window size, then adjust the slot offsets according to the
-     * weights.  If all of the weights are zero, center the layout in 
-     * its parent.  I haven't decided what to do if the parent is smaller
-     * than the requested size.
+     * If the currently requested layout size doesn't match the master's
+     * window size, then adjust the slot offsets according to the weights. If
+     * all of the weights are zero, place the layout according to the anchor
+     * value.
      */
 
     realWidth = Tk_Width(masterPtr->tkwin) -
@@ -1586,23 +1776,22 @@ ArrangeGrid(clientData)
     realHeight = Tk_Height(masterPtr->tkwin) -
 	    Tk_InternalBorderTop(masterPtr->tkwin) -
 	    Tk_InternalBorderBottom(masterPtr->tkwin);
-    slotPtr->startX = AdjustOffsets(realWidth,
-	    MAX(slotPtr->columnEnd,slotPtr->columnMax), slotPtr->columnPtr);
-    slotPtr->startY = AdjustOffsets(realHeight,
-	    MAX(slotPtr->rowEnd,slotPtr->rowMax), slotPtr->rowPtr);
-    slotPtr->startX += Tk_InternalBorderLeft(masterPtr->tkwin);
-    slotPtr->startY += Tk_InternalBorderTop(masterPtr->tkwin);
+    usedX = AdjustOffsets(realWidth,
+	    MAX(slotPtr->columnEnd, slotPtr->columnMax), slotPtr->columnPtr);
+    usedY = AdjustOffsets(realHeight, MAX(slotPtr->rowEnd, slotPtr->rowMax),
+	    slotPtr->rowPtr);
+    TkComputeAnchor(masterPtr->masterDataPtr->anchor, masterPtr->tkwin,
+	    0, 0, usedX, usedY, &slotPtr->startX, &slotPtr->startY);
 
     /*
-     * Now adjust the actual size of the slave to its cavity by
-     * computing the cavity size, and adjusting the widget according
-     * to its stickyness.
+     * Now adjust the actual size of the slave to its cavity by computing the
+     * cavity size, and adjusting the widget according to its stickyness.
      */
 
     for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL && !abort;
 	    slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
-	int x, y;			/* top left coordinate */
-	int width, height;		/* slot or slave size */
+	int x, y;			/* Top left coordinate */
+	int width, height;		/* Slot or slave size */
 	int col = slavePtr->column;
 	int row = slavePtr->row;
 
@@ -1612,49 +1801,47 @@ ArrangeGrid(clientData)
 	width = slotPtr->columnPtr[slavePtr->numCols+col-1].offset - x;
 	height = slotPtr->rowPtr[slavePtr->numRows+row-1].offset - y;
 
-        x += slotPtr->startX;
-        y += slotPtr->startY;
+	x += slotPtr->startX;
+	y += slotPtr->startY;
 
 	AdjustForSticky(slavePtr, &x, &y, &width, &height);
 
 	/*
-	 * Now put the window in the proper spot.  (This was taken directly
-	 * from tkPack.c.)  If the slave is a child of the master, then
-         * do this here.  Otherwise let Tk_MaintainGeometry do the work.
-         */
-
-        if (masterPtr->tkwin == Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin)) {
-            if ((width <= 0) || (height <= 0)) {
-                Tk_UnmapWindow(slavePtr->tkwin);
-            } else {
-                if ((x != Tk_X(slavePtr->tkwin))
-                        || (y != Tk_Y(slavePtr->tkwin))
-                        || (width != Tk_Width(slavePtr->tkwin))
-                        || (height != Tk_Height(slavePtr->tkwin))) {
-                    Tk_MoveResizeWindow(slavePtr->tkwin, x, y, width, height);
-                }
-                if (abort) {
-                    break;
-                }
- 
-                /*
-                 * Don't map the slave if the master isn't mapped: wait
-                 * until the master gets mapped later.
-                 */
- 
-                if (Tk_IsMapped(masterPtr->tkwin)) {
-                    Tk_MapWindow(slavePtr->tkwin);
-                }
-            }
-        } else {
-            if ((width <= 0) || (height <= 0)) {
-                Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, masterPtr->tkwin);
-                Tk_UnmapWindow(slavePtr->tkwin);
-            } else {
-                Tk_MaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, masterPtr->tkwin,
-                        x, y, width, height);
-            }
-        }
+	 * Now put the window in the proper spot. (This was taken directly
+	 * from tkPack.c.) If the slave is a child of the master, then do this
+	 * here. Otherwise let Tk_MaintainGeometry do the work.
+	 */
+
+	if (masterPtr->tkwin == Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin)) {
+	    if ((width <= 0) || (height <= 0)) {
+		Tk_UnmapWindow(slavePtr->tkwin);
+	    } else {
+		if ((x != Tk_X(slavePtr->tkwin))
+			|| (y != Tk_Y(slavePtr->tkwin))
+			|| (width != Tk_Width(slavePtr->tkwin))
+			|| (height != Tk_Height(slavePtr->tkwin))) {
+		    Tk_MoveResizeWindow(slavePtr->tkwin, x, y, width, height);
+		}
+		if (abort) {
+		    break;
+		}
+
+		/*
+		 * Don't map the slave if the master isn't mapped: wait until
+		 * the master gets mapped later.
+		 */
+
+		if (Tk_IsMapped(masterPtr->tkwin)) {
+		    Tk_MapWindow(slavePtr->tkwin);
+		}
+	    }
+	} else if ((width <= 0) || (height <= 0)) {
+	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, masterPtr->tkwin);
+	    Tk_UnmapWindow(slavePtr->tkwin);
+	} else {
+	    Tk_MaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, masterPtr->tkwin, x, y,
+		    width, height);
+	}
     }
 
     masterPtr->abortPtr = NULL;
@@ -1662,13 +1849,13 @@ ArrangeGrid(clientData)
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * ResolveConstraints --
  *
- *	Resolve all of the column and row boundaries.  Most of
- *	the calculations are identical for rows and columns, so this procedure
- *	is called twice, once for rows, and again for columns.
+ *	Resolve all of the column and row boundaries. Most of the calculations
+ *	are identical for rows and columns, so this procedure is called twice,
+ *	once for rows, and again for columns.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The offset (in pixels) from the left/top edge of this layout is
@@ -1678,34 +1865,34 @@ ArrangeGrid(clientData)
  *	The slot offsets are copied into the SlotInfo structure for the
  *	geometry master.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset) 
-    Gridder *masterPtr;		/* The geometry master for this grid. */
-    int slotType;		/* Either ROW or COLUMN. */
-    int maxOffset;		/* The actual maximum size of this layout
-    				 * in pixels,  or 0 (not currently used). */
+ResolveConstraints(
+    Gridder *masterPtr,		/* The geometry master for this grid. */
+    int slotType,		/* Either ROW or COLUMN. */
+    int maxOffset)		/* The actual maximum size of this layout in
+				 * pixels, or 0 (not currently used). */
 {
     register SlotInfo *slotPtr;	/* Pointer to row/col constraints. */
     register Gridder *slavePtr;	/* List of slave windows in this grid. */
     int constraintCount;	/* Count of rows or columns that have
-    				 * constraints. */
+				 * constraints. */
     int slotCount;		/* Last occupied row or column. */
-    int gridCount;		/* The larger of slotCount and constraintCount.
-    				 */
+    int gridCount;		/* The larger of slotCount and
+				 * constraintCount. */
     GridLayout *layoutPtr;	/* Temporary layout structure. */
     int requiredSize;		/* The natural size of the grid (pixels).
 				 * This is the minimum size needed to
 				 * accomodate all of the slaves at their
 				 * requested sizes. */
     int offset;			/* The pixel offset of the right edge of the
-    				 * current slot from the beginning of the
-    				 * layout. */
+				 * current slot from the beginning of the
+				 * layout. */
     int slot;			/* The current slot. */
     int start;			/* The first slot of a contiguous set whose
-    				 * constraints are not yet fully resolved. */
+				 * constraints are not yet fully resolved. */
     int end;			/* The Last slot of a contiguous set whose
 				 * constraints are not yet fully resolved. */
     UniformGroup uniformPre[UNIFORM_PREALLOC];
@@ -1713,13 +1900,14 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
     UniformGroup *uniformGroupPtr;
 				/* Uniform groups data. */
     int uniformGroups;		/* Number of currently used uniform groups. */
-    int uniformGroupsAlloced;	/* Size of allocated space for uniform groups.
-				 */
+    int uniformGroupsAlloced;	/* Size of allocated space for uniform
+				 * groups. */
     int weight, minSize;
+    int prevGrow, accWeight, grow;
 
     /*
-     * For typical sized tables, we'll use stack space for the layout data
-     * to avoid the overhead of a malloc and free for every layout.
+     * For typical sized tables, we'll use stack space for the layout data to
+     * avoid the overhead of a malloc and free for every layout.
      */
 
     GridLayout layoutData[TYPICAL_SIZE + 1];
@@ -1727,30 +1915,32 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
     if (slotType == COLUMN) {
 	constraintCount = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnMax;
 	slotCount = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnEnd;
-	slotPtr  = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr;
+	slotPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr;
     } else {
 	constraintCount = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowMax;
 	slotCount = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowEnd;
-	slotPtr  = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr;
+	slotPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr;
     }
 
     /*
      * Make sure there is enough memory for the layout.
      */
 
-    gridCount = MAX(constraintCount,slotCount);
+    gridCount = MAX(constraintCount, slotCount);
     if (gridCount >= TYPICAL_SIZE) {
-	layoutPtr = (GridLayout *) ckalloc(sizeof(GridLayout) * (1+gridCount));
+	layoutPtr = (GridLayout *)
+		ckalloc(sizeof(GridLayout) * (1+gridCount));
     } else {
 	layoutPtr = layoutData;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Allocate an extra layout slot to represent the left/top edge of
-     * the 0th slot to make it easier to calculate slot widths from
-     * offsets without special case code.
-     * Initialize the "dummy" slot to the left/top of the table.
-     * This slot avoids special casing the first slot.
+     * Allocate an extra layout slot to represent the left/top edge of the 0th
+     * slot to make it easier to calculate slot widths from offsets without
+     * special case code.
+     *
+     * Initialize the "dummy" slot to the left/top of the table. This slot
+     * avoids special casing the first slot.
      */
 
     layoutPtr->minOffset = 0;
@@ -1759,74 +1949,77 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 
     /*
      * Step 1.
-     * Copy the slot constraints into the layout structure,
-     * and initialize the rest of the fields.
+     * Copy the slot constraints into the layout structure, and initialize the
+     * rest of the fields.
      */
 
     for (slot=0; slot < constraintCount; slot++) {
-        layoutPtr[slot].minSize = slotPtr[slot].minSize;
-        layoutPtr[slot].weight  = slotPtr[slot].weight;
-        layoutPtr[slot].uniform = slotPtr[slot].uniform;
-        layoutPtr[slot].pad =  slotPtr[slot].pad;
-        layoutPtr[slot].binNextPtr = NULL;
+	layoutPtr[slot].minSize = slotPtr[slot].minSize;
+	layoutPtr[slot].weight = slotPtr[slot].weight;
+	layoutPtr[slot].uniform = slotPtr[slot].uniform;
+	layoutPtr[slot].pad = slotPtr[slot].pad;
+	layoutPtr[slot].binNextPtr = NULL;
     }
-    for(;slot<gridCount;slot++) {
-        layoutPtr[slot].minSize = 0;
-        layoutPtr[slot].weight = 0;
-        layoutPtr[slot].uniform = NULL;
-        layoutPtr[slot].pad = 0;
-        layoutPtr[slot].binNextPtr = NULL;
+    for (; slot<gridCount; slot++) {
+	layoutPtr[slot].minSize = 0;
+	layoutPtr[slot].weight = 0;
+	layoutPtr[slot].uniform = NULL;
+	layoutPtr[slot].pad = 0;
+	layoutPtr[slot].binNextPtr = NULL;
     }
 
     /*
      * Step 2.
-     * Slaves with a span of 1 are used to determine the minimum size of
-     * each slot.  Slaves whose span is two or more slots don't
-     * contribute to the minimum size of each slot directly, but can cause
-     * slots to grow if their size exceeds the the sizes of the slots they
-     * span.
-     * 
-     * Bin all slaves whose spans are > 1 by their right edges.  This
-     * allows the computation on minimum and maximum possible layout
-     * sizes at each slot boundary, without the need to re-sort the slaves.
+     * Slaves with a span of 1 are used to determine the minimum size of each
+     * slot. Slaves whose span is two or more slots don't contribute to the
+     * minimum size of each slot directly, but can cause slots to grow if
+     * their size exceeds the the sizes of the slots they span.
+     *
+     * Bin all slaves whose spans are > 1 by their right edges. This allows
+     * the computation on minimum and maximum possible layout sizes at each
+     * slot boundary, without the need to re-sort the slaves.
      */
- 
+
     switch (slotType) {
-    	case COLUMN:
-	    for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
-			slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
-		int rightEdge = slavePtr->column + slavePtr->numCols - 1;
-		slavePtr->size = Tk_ReqWidth(slavePtr->tkwin) +
-			slavePtr->padX + slavePtr->iPadX + slavePtr->doubleBw;
-		if (slavePtr->numCols > 1) {
-		    slavePtr->binNextPtr = layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr;
-		    layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr = slavePtr;
-		} else {
-		    int size = slavePtr->size + layoutPtr[rightEdge].pad;
-		    if (size > layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize) {
-			layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize = size;
-		    }
+    case COLUMN:
+	for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
+		slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    int rightEdge = slavePtr->column + slavePtr->numCols - 1;
+
+	    slavePtr->size = Tk_ReqWidth(slavePtr->tkwin) + slavePtr->padX
+		    + slavePtr->iPadX + slavePtr->doubleBw;
+	    if (slavePtr->numCols > 1) {
+		slavePtr->binNextPtr = layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr;
+		layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr = slavePtr;
+	    } else {
+		int size = slavePtr->size + layoutPtr[rightEdge].pad;
+
+		if (size > layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize) {
+		    layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize = size;
 		}
 	    }
-	    break;
-    	case ROW:
-	    for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
-			slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
-		int rightEdge = slavePtr->row + slavePtr->numRows - 1;
-		slavePtr->size = Tk_ReqHeight(slavePtr->tkwin) +
-			slavePtr->padY + slavePtr->iPadY + slavePtr->doubleBw;
-		if (slavePtr->numRows > 1) {
-		    slavePtr->binNextPtr = layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr;
-		    layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr = slavePtr;
-		} else {
-		    int size = slavePtr->size + layoutPtr[rightEdge].pad;
-		    if (size > layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize) {
-			layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize = size;
-		    }
+	}
+	break;
+    case ROW:
+	for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
+		slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    int rightEdge = slavePtr->row + slavePtr->numRows - 1;
+
+	    slavePtr->size = Tk_ReqHeight(slavePtr->tkwin) + slavePtr->padY
+		    + slavePtr->iPadY + slavePtr->doubleBw;
+	    if (slavePtr->numRows > 1) {
+		slavePtr->binNextPtr = layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr;
+		layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr = slavePtr;
+	    } else {
+		int size = slavePtr->size + layoutPtr[rightEdge].pad;
+
+		if (size > layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize) {
+		    layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize = size;
 		}
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
+	break;
+    }
 
     /*
      * Step 2b.
@@ -1858,13 +2051,14 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 			    * sizeof(UniformGroup);
 		    size_t newSize = (uniformGroupsAlloced + UNIFORM_PREALLOC)
 			    * sizeof(UniformGroup);
-		    UniformGroup *new = (UniformGroup *) ckalloc(newSize);
-		    UniformGroup *old = uniformGroupPtr;
-		    memcpy((VOID *) new, (VOID *) old, oldSize);
-		    if (old != uniformPre) {
-			ckfree((char *) old);
+		    UniformGroup *newUG = (UniformGroup *) ckalloc(newSize);
+		    UniformGroup *oldUG = uniformGroupPtr;
+
+		    memcpy(newUG, oldUG, oldSize);
+		    if (oldUG != uniformPre) {
+			ckfree((char *) oldUG);
 		    }
-		    uniformGroupPtr = new;
+		    uniformGroupPtr = newUG;
 		    uniformGroupsAlloced += UNIFORM_PREALLOC;
 		}
 		uniformGroups++;
@@ -1907,54 +2101,58 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 
     /*
      * Step 3.
-     * Determine the minimum slot offsets going from left to right
-     * that would fit all of the slaves.  This determines the minimum
+     * Determine the minimum slot offsets going from left to right that would
+     * fit all of the slaves. This determines the minimum
      */
 
-    for (offset=slot=0; slot < gridCount; slot++) {
-        layoutPtr[slot].minOffset = layoutPtr[slot].minSize + offset;
-        for (slavePtr = layoutPtr[slot].binNextPtr; slavePtr != NULL;
-                    slavePtr = slavePtr->binNextPtr) {
-	    int span = (slotType == COLUMN) ? slavePtr->numCols : slavePtr->numRows;
-            int required = slavePtr->size + layoutPtr[slot - span].minOffset;
-            if (required > layoutPtr[slot].minOffset) {
-                layoutPtr[slot].minOffset = required;
-            }
-        }
-        offset = layoutPtr[slot].minOffset;
+    for (offset=0,slot=0; slot < gridCount; slot++) {
+	layoutPtr[slot].minOffset = layoutPtr[slot].minSize + offset;
+	for (slavePtr = layoutPtr[slot].binNextPtr; slavePtr != NULL;
+		slavePtr = slavePtr->binNextPtr) {
+	    int span = (slotType == COLUMN) ?
+		    slavePtr->numCols : slavePtr->numRows;
+	    int required = slavePtr->size + layoutPtr[slot - span].minOffset;
+
+	    if (required > layoutPtr[slot].minOffset) {
+		layoutPtr[slot].minOffset = required;
+	    }
+	}
+	offset = layoutPtr[slot].minOffset;
     }
 
     /*
      * At this point, we know the minimum required size of the entire layout.
-     * It might be prudent to stop here if our "master" will resize itself
-     * to this size.
+     * It might be prudent to stop here if our "master" will resize itself to
+     * this size.
      */
 
     requiredSize = offset;
     if (maxOffset > offset) {
-    	offset=maxOffset;
+	offset=maxOffset;
     }
 
     /*
      * Step 4.
-     * Determine the minimum slot offsets going from right to left,
-     * bounding the pixel range of each slot boundary.
-     * Pre-fill all of the right offsets with the actual size of the table;
-     * they will be reduced as required.
+     * Determine the minimum slot offsets going from right to left, bounding
+     * the pixel range of each slot boundary. Pre-fill all of the right
+     * offsets with the actual size of the table; they will be reduced as
+     * required.
      */
 
     for (slot=0; slot < gridCount; slot++) {
-        layoutPtr[slot].maxOffset = offset;
+	layoutPtr[slot].maxOffset = offset;
     }
     for (slot=gridCount-1; slot > 0;) {
-        for (slavePtr = layoutPtr[slot].binNextPtr; slavePtr != NULL;
-                    slavePtr = slavePtr->binNextPtr) {
-	    int span = (slotType == COLUMN) ? slavePtr->numCols : slavePtr->numRows;
-            int require = offset - slavePtr->size;
-            int startSlot  = slot - span;
-            if (startSlot >=0 && require < layoutPtr[startSlot].maxOffset) {
-                layoutPtr[startSlot].maxOffset = require;
-            }
+	for (slavePtr = layoutPtr[slot].binNextPtr; slavePtr != NULL;
+		slavePtr = slavePtr->binNextPtr) {
+	    int span = (slotType == COLUMN) ?
+		    slavePtr->numCols : slavePtr->numRows;
+	    int require = offset - slavePtr->size;
+	    int startSlot = slot - span;
+
+	    if (startSlot >=0 && require < layoutPtr[startSlot].maxOffset) {
+		layoutPtr[startSlot].maxOffset = require;
+	    }
 	}
 	offset -= layoutPtr[slot].minSize;
 	slot--;
@@ -1967,58 +2165,56 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 
     /*
      * Step 5.
-     * At this point, each slot boundary has a range of values that
-     * will satisfy the overall layout size.
-     * Make repeated passes over the layout structure looking for
-     * spans of slot boundaries where the minOffsets are less than
-     * the maxOffsets, and adjust the offsets according to the slot
-     * weights.  At each pass, at least one slot boundary will have
-     * its range of possible values fixed at a single value.
+     * At this point, each slot boundary has a range of values that will
+     * satisfy the overall layout size. Make repeated passes over the layout
+     * structure looking for spans of slot boundaries where the minOffsets are
+     * less than the maxOffsets, and adjust the offsets according to the slot
+     * weights. At each pass, at least one slot boundary will have its range
+     * of possible values fixed at a single value.
      */
 
-    for (start=0; start < gridCount;) {
-    	int totalWeight = 0;	/* Sum of the weights for all of the
-    				 * slots in this span. */
-    	int need = 0;		/* The minimum space needed to layout
-    				 * this span. */
-    	int have;		/* The actual amount of space that will
-    				 * be taken up by this span. */
-    	int weight;		/* Cumulative weights of the columns in 
-    				 * this span. */
-    	int noWeights = 0;	/* True if the span has no weights. */
-
-    	/*
-    	 * Find a span by identifying ranges of slots whose edges are
-    	 * already constrained at fixed offsets, but whose internal
-    	 * slot boundaries have a range of possible positions.
-    	 */
-
-    	if (layoutPtr[start].minOffset == layoutPtr[start].maxOffset) {
+    for (start = 0; start < gridCount;) {
+	int totalWeight = 0;	/* Sum of the weights for all of the slots in
+				 * this span. */
+	int need = 0;		/* The minimum space needed to layout this
+				 * span. */
+	int have;		/* The actual amount of space that will be
+				 * taken up by this span. */
+	int weight;		/* Cumulative weights of the columns in this
+				 * span. */
+	int noWeights = 0;	/* True if the span has no weights. */
+
+	/*
+	 * Find a span by identifying ranges of slots whose edges are already
+	 * constrained at fixed offsets, but whose internal slot boundaries
+	 * have a range of possible positions.
+	 */
+
+	if (layoutPtr[start].minOffset == layoutPtr[start].maxOffset) {
 	    start++;
 	    continue;
 	}
 
-	for (end=start+1; end<gridCount; end++) {
+	for (end = start + 1; end < gridCount; end++) {
 	    if (layoutPtr[end].minOffset == layoutPtr[end].maxOffset) {
 		break;
 	    }
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * We found a span.  Compute the total weight, minumum space required,
-	 * for this span, and the actual amount of space the span should
-	 * use.
+	 * We found a span. Compute the total weight, minumum space required,
+	 * for this span, and the actual amount of space the span should use.
 	 */
 
-	for (slot=start; slot<=end; slot++) {
+	for (slot = start; slot <= end; slot++) {
 	    totalWeight += layoutPtr[slot].weight;
 	    need += layoutPtr[slot].minSize;
 	}
 	have = layoutPtr[end].maxOffset - layoutPtr[start-1].minOffset;
 
 	/*
-	 * If all the weights in the span are zero, then distribute the
-	 * extra space evenly.
+	 * If all the weights in the span are zero, then distribute the extra
+	 * space evenly.
 	 */
 
 	if (totalWeight == 0) {
@@ -2028,100 +2224,180 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 
 	/*
 	 * It might not be possible to give the span all of the space
-	 * available on this pass without violating the size constraints 
-	 * of one or more of the internal slot boundaries.
-	 * Determine the maximum amount of space that when added to the
-	 * entire span, would cause a slot boundary to have its possible
-	 * range reduced to one value, and reduce the amount of extra
-	 * space allocated on this pass accordingly.
-	 * 
-	 * The calculation is done cumulatively to avoid accumulating
-	 * roundoff errors.
+	 * available on this pass without violating the size constraints of
+	 * one or more of the internal slot boundaries. Try to determine the
+	 * maximum amount of space that when added to the entire span, would
+	 * cause a slot boundary to have its possible range reduced to one
+	 * value, and reduce the amount of extra space allocated on this pass
+	 * accordingly.
+	 *
+	 * The calculation is done cumulatively to avoid accumulating roundoff
+	 * errors.
 	 */
 
-	for (weight=0,slot=start; slot<end; slot++) {
-	    int diff = layoutPtr[slot].maxOffset - layoutPtr[slot].minOffset;
-	    weight += noWeights ? 1 : layoutPtr[slot].weight;
-	    if ((noWeights || layoutPtr[slot].weight>0) &&
-		    (diff*totalWeight/weight) < (have-need)) {
-		have = diff * totalWeight / weight + need;
+	do {
+	    int prevMinOffset = layoutPtr[start - 1].minOffset;
+
+	    prevGrow = 0;
+	    accWeight = 0;
+	    for (slot = start; slot <= end; slot++) {
+		weight = noWeights ? 1 : layoutPtr[slot].weight;
+		accWeight += weight;
+		grow = (have - need) * accWeight / totalWeight - prevGrow;
+		prevGrow += grow;
+
+		if ((weight > 0) &&
+			((prevMinOffset + layoutPtr[slot].minSize + grow)
+			> layoutPtr[slot].maxOffset)) {
+		    int newHave;
+
+		    /*
+		     * There is not enough room to grow that much. Calculate
+		     * how much this slot can grow and how much "have" that
+		     * corresponds to.
+		     */
+
+		    grow = layoutPtr[slot].maxOffset -
+			    layoutPtr[slot].minSize - prevMinOffset;
+		    newHave = grow * totalWeight / weight;
+		    if (newHave > totalWeight) {
+			/*
+			 * By distributing multiples of totalWeight we
+			 * minimize rounding errors since they will only
+			 * happen in the last loop(s).
+			 */
+
+			newHave = newHave / totalWeight * totalWeight;
+		    }
+		    if (newHave <= 0) {
+			/*
+			 * We can end up with a "have" of 0 here if the
+			 * previous slots have taken all the space. In that
+			 * case we cannot guess an appropriate "have" so we
+			 * just try some lower "have" that is >= 1, to make
+			 * sure this terminates.
+			 */
+
+			newHave = (have - need) - 1;
+			if (newHave > (3 * totalWeight)) {
+			    /*
+			     * Go down 25% for large values.
+			     */
+			    newHave = newHave * 3 / 4;
+			}
+
+			if (newHave > totalWeight) {
+			    /*
+			     * Round down to a multiple of totalWeight.
+			     */
+			    newHave = newHave / totalWeight * totalWeight;
+			}
+
+			if (newHave <= 0) {
+			    newHave = 1;
+			}
+		    }
+		    have = newHave + need;
+
+		    /*
+		     * Restart loop to check if the new "have" will fit.
+		     */
+
+		    break;
+		}
+		prevMinOffset += layoutPtr[slot].minSize + grow;
+		if (prevMinOffset < layoutPtr[slot].minOffset) {
+		    prevMinOffset = layoutPtr[slot].minOffset;
+		}
 	    }
-	}
+
+	    /*
+	     * Quit the outer loop if the inner loop ran all the way.
+	     */
+	} while (slot <= end);
 
 	/*
-	 * Now distribute the extra space among the slots by
-	 * adjusting the minSizes and minOffsets.
+	 * Now distribute the extra space among the slots by adjusting the
+	 * minSizes and minOffsets.
 	 */
 
-	for (weight=0,slot=start; slot<end; slot++) {
-	    weight += noWeights ? 1 : layoutPtr[slot].weight;
-	    layoutPtr[slot].minOffset +=
-		(int)((double) (have-need) * weight/totalWeight + 0.5);
-	    layoutPtr[slot].minSize = layoutPtr[slot].minOffset 
-		    - layoutPtr[slot-1].minOffset;
+	prevGrow = 0;
+	accWeight = 0;
+	for (slot = start; slot <= end; slot++) {
+	    accWeight += noWeights ? 1 : layoutPtr[slot].weight;
+	    grow = (have - need) * accWeight / totalWeight - prevGrow;
+	    prevGrow += grow;
+	    layoutPtr[slot].minSize += grow;
+	    if ((layoutPtr[slot-1].minOffset + layoutPtr[slot].minSize)
+		    > layoutPtr[slot].minOffset) {
+		layoutPtr[slot].minOffset = layoutPtr[slot-1].minOffset +
+			layoutPtr[slot].minSize;
+	    }
 	}
-	layoutPtr[slot].minSize = layoutPtr[slot].minOffset 
-		- layoutPtr[slot-1].minOffset;
 
 	/*
-	 * Having pushed the top/left boundaries of the slots to
-	 * take up extra space, the bottom/right space is recalculated
-	 * to propagate the new space allocation.
+	 * Having pushed the top/left boundaries of the slots to take up extra
+	 * space, the bottom/right space is recalculated to propagate the new
+	 * space allocation.
 	 */
 
-	for (slot=end; slot > start; slot--) {
-	    layoutPtr[slot-1].maxOffset = 
-		    layoutPtr[slot].maxOffset-layoutPtr[slot].minSize;
+	for (slot = end; slot > start; slot--) {
+	    /*
+	     * maxOffset may not go up.
+	     */
+
+	    if ((layoutPtr[slot].maxOffset-layoutPtr[slot].minSize)
+		    < layoutPtr[slot-1].maxOffset) {
+		layoutPtr[slot-1].maxOffset =
+			layoutPtr[slot].maxOffset-layoutPtr[slot].minSize;
+	    }
 	}
     }
 
-
     /*
      * Step 6.
-     * All of the space has been apportioned; copy the
-     * layout information back into the master.
+     * All of the space has been apportioned; copy the layout information back
+     * into the master.
      */
 
     for (slot=0; slot < gridCount; slot++) {
-        slotPtr[slot].offset = layoutPtr[slot].minOffset;
+	slotPtr[slot].offset = layoutPtr[slot].minOffset;
     }
 
     --layoutPtr;
     if (layoutPtr != layoutData) {
-	ckfree((char *)layoutPtr);
+	ckfree((char *) layoutPtr);
     }
     return requiredSize;
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * GetGrid --
  *
- *	This internal procedure is used to locate a Grid
- *	structure for a given window, creating one if one
- *	doesn't exist already.
+ *	This internal procedure is used to locate a Grid structure for a given
+ *	window, creating one if one doesn't exist already.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the Grid structure
- *	corresponding to tkwin.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the Grid structure corresponding to
+ *	tkwin.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new grid structure may be created.  If so, then
- *	a callback is set up to clean things up when the
- *	window is deleted.
+ *	A new grid structure may be created. If so, then a callback is set up
+ *	to clean things up when the window is deleted.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static Gridder *
-GetGrid(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window for which
-				 * grid structure is desired. */
+GetGrid(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for window for which grid structure
+				 * is desired. */
 {
     register Gridder *gridPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-    int new;
+    int isNew;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
     if (!dispPtr->gridInit) {
@@ -2130,12 +2406,12 @@ GetGrid(tkwin)
     }
 
     /*
-     * See if there's already grid for this window.  If not,
-     * then create a new one.
+     * See if there's already grid for this window. If not, then create a new
+     * one.
      */
 
-    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->gridHashTable, (char *) tkwin, &new);
-    if (!new) {
+    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->gridHashTable, (char*) tkwin, &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
 	return (Gridder *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
     }
     gridPtr = (Gridder *) ckalloc(sizeof(Gridder));
@@ -2146,18 +2422,23 @@ GetGrid(tkwin)
     gridPtr->slavePtr = NULL;
     gridPtr->binNextPtr = NULL;
 
-    gridPtr->column = gridPtr->row = -1;
+    gridPtr->column = -1;
+    gridPtr->row = -1;
     gridPtr->numCols = 1;
     gridPtr->numRows = 1;
 
-    gridPtr->padX = gridPtr->padY = 0;
-    gridPtr->padLeft = gridPtr->padTop = 0;
-    gridPtr->iPadX = gridPtr->iPadY = 0;
+    gridPtr->padX = 0;
+    gridPtr->padY = 0;
+    gridPtr->padLeft = 0;
+    gridPtr->padTop = 0;
+    gridPtr->iPadX = 0;
+    gridPtr->iPadY = 0;
     gridPtr->doubleBw = 2*Tk_Changes(tkwin)->border_width;
     gridPtr->abortPtr = NULL;
     gridPtr->flags = 0;
     gridPtr->sticky = 0;
     gridPtr->size = 0;
+    gridPtr->in = NULL;
     gridPtr->masterDataPtr = NULL;
     Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, gridPtr);
     Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
@@ -2166,35 +2447,34 @@ GetGrid(tkwin)
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * SetGridSize --
  *
- *	This internal procedure sets the size of the grid occupied
- *	by slaves.
+ *	This internal procedure sets the size of the grid occupied by slaves.
  *
  * Results:
- *	none
+ *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The width and height arguments are filled in the master data structure.
- *	Additional space is allocated for the constraints to accomodate
- *	the offsets.
+ *	The width and height arguments are filled in the master data
+ *	structure. Additional space is allocated for the constraints to
+ *	accomodate the offsets.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-SetGridSize(masterPtr)
-    Gridder *masterPtr;			/* The geometry master for this grid. */
+SetGridSize(
+    Gridder *masterPtr)		/* The geometry master for this grid. */
 {
-    register Gridder *slavePtr;		/* Current slave window. */
+    register Gridder *slavePtr;	/* Current slave window. */
     int maxX = 0, maxY = 0;
 
     for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
-		slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
-	maxX = MAX(maxX,slavePtr->numCols + slavePtr->column);
-	maxY = MAX(maxY,slavePtr->numRows + slavePtr->row);
+	    slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
+	maxX = MAX(maxX, slavePtr->numCols + slavePtr->column);
+	maxY = MAX(maxY, slavePtr->numRows + slavePtr->row);
     }
     masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnEnd = maxX;
     masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowEnd = maxY;
@@ -2207,37 +2487,37 @@ SetGridSize(masterPtr)
  *
  * SetSlaveColumn --
  *
- *     Update column data for a slave, checking that MAX_ELEMENT bound
+ *	Update column data for a slave, checking that MAX_ELEMENT bound
  *      is not passed.
  *
  * Results:
- *     TCL_ERROR if out of bounds, TCL_OK otherwise
+ *	TCL_ERROR if out of bounds, TCL_OK otherwise
  *
  * Side effects:
- *     Slave fields are updated.
+ *	Slave fields are updated.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
 SetSlaveColumn(
-    Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interp for error message */
-    Gridder *slavePtr,  /* Slave to be updated */
-    int column,         /* New column or -1 to be unchanged */
-    int numCols)        /* New columnspan or -1 to be unchanged */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error message. */
+    Gridder *slavePtr,		/* Slave to be updated. */
+    int column,			/* New column or -1 to be unchanged. */
+    int numCols)		/* New columnspan or -1 to be unchanged. */
 {
     int newColumn, newNumCols, lastCol;
 
-    newColumn  = (column  >= 0) ? column  : slavePtr->column;
+    newColumn = (column >= 0) ? column : slavePtr->column;
     newNumCols = (numCols >= 1) ? numCols : slavePtr->numCols;
 
-    lastCol    = ((newColumn >= 0) ? newColumn : 0) + newNumCols;
+    lastCol = ((newColumn >= 0) ? newColumn : 0) + newNumCols;
     if (lastCol >= MAX_ELEMENT) {
-       Tcl_SetResult(interp, "Column out of bounds", TCL_STATIC);
-       return TCL_ERROR;
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, "Column out of bounds", TCL_STATIC);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    slavePtr->column  = newColumn;
+    slavePtr->column = newColumn;
     slavePtr->numCols = newNumCols;
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -2247,70 +2527,70 @@ SetSlaveColumn(
  *
  * SetSlaveRow --
  *
- *     Update row data for a slave, checking that MAX_ELEMENT bound
+ *	Update row data for a slave, checking that MAX_ELEMENT bound
  *      is not passed.
  *
  * Results:
- *     TCL_ERROR if out of bounds, TCL_OK otherwise
+ *	TCL_ERROR if out of bounds, TCL_OK otherwise
  *
  * Side effects:
- *     Slave fields are updated.
+ *	Slave fields are updated.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
 SetSlaveRow(
-    Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interp for error message */
-    Gridder *slavePtr,  /* Slave to be updated */
-    int row,            /* New row or -1 to be unchanged */
-    int numRows)        /* New rowspan or -1 to be unchanged */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error message. */
+    Gridder *slavePtr,		/* Slave to be updated. */
+    int row,			/* New row or -1 to be unchanged. */
+    int numRows)		/* New rowspan or -1 to be unchanged. */
 {
     int newRow, newNumRows, lastRow;
 
-    newRow     = (row     >= 0) ? row     : slavePtr->row;
+    newRow = (row >= 0) ? row : slavePtr->row;
     newNumRows = (numRows >= 1) ? numRows : slavePtr->numRows;
 
-    lastRow    = ((newRow >= 0) ? newRow : 0) + newNumRows;
+    lastRow = ((newRow >= 0) ? newRow : 0) + newNumRows;
     if (lastRow >= MAX_ELEMENT) {
-       Tcl_SetResult(interp, "Row out of bounds", TCL_STATIC);
-       return TCL_ERROR;
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, "Row out of bounds", TCL_STATIC);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    slavePtr->row     = newRow;
+    slavePtr->row = newRow;
     slavePtr->numRows = newNumRows;
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * CheckSlotData --
  *
- *	This internal procedure is used to manage the storage for
- *	row and column (slot) constraints.
+ *	This internal procedure is used to manage the storage for row and
+ *	column (slot) constraints.
  *
  * Results:
  *	TRUE if the index is OK, False otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new master grid structure may be created.  If so, then
- *	it is initialized.  In addition, additional storage for
- *	a row or column constraints may be allocated, and the constraint
- *	maximums are adjusted.
+ *	A new master grid structure may be created. If so, then it is
+ *	initialized. In addition, additional storage for a row or column
+ *	constraints may be allocated, and the constraint maximums are
+ *	adjusted.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-CheckSlotData(masterPtr, slot, slotType, checkOnly)
-    Gridder *masterPtr;	/* the geometry master for this grid */
-    int slot;		/* which slot to look at */
-    int slotType;	/* ROW or COLUMN */
-    int checkOnly;	/* don't allocate new space if true */
+CheckSlotData(
+    Gridder *masterPtr,		/* The geometry master for this grid. */
+    int slot,			/* Which slot to look at. */
+    int slotType,		/* ROW or COLUMN. */
+    int checkOnly)		/* Don't allocate new space if true. */
 {
-    int numSlot;        /* number of slots already allocated (Space) */
-    int end;	        /* last used constraint */
+    int numSlot;		/* Number of slots already allocated (Space) */
+    int end;			/* Last used constraint. */
 
     /*
      * If slot is out of bounds, return immediately.
@@ -2326,35 +2606,36 @@ CheckSlotData(masterPtr, slot, slotType, checkOnly)
 
     /*
      * If we need to allocate more space, allocate a little extra to avoid
-     * repeated re-alloc's for large tables.  We need enough space to
-     * hold all of the offsets as well.
+     * repeated re-alloc's for large tables. We need enough space to hold all
+     * of the offsets as well.
      */
 
     InitMasterData(masterPtr);
     end = (slotType == ROW) ? masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowMax :
 	    masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnMax;
     if (checkOnly == CHECK_ONLY) {
-    	return  (end < slot) ? TCL_ERROR : TCL_OK;
+    	return ((end < slot) ? TCL_ERROR : TCL_OK);
     } else {
-    	numSlot = (slotType == ROW) ? masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowSpace 
-	                            : masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnSpace;
+    	numSlot = (slotType == ROW) ? masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowSpace
+		: masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnSpace;
     	if (slot >= numSlot) {
-	    int      newNumSlot = slot + PREALLOC ;
-	    size_t   oldSize = numSlot    * sizeof(SlotInfo) ;
-	    size_t   newSize = newNumSlot * sizeof(SlotInfo) ;
-	    SlotInfo *new = (SlotInfo *) ckalloc(newSize);
-	    SlotInfo *old = (slotType == ROW) ?
-		    masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr :
-		    masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr;
-	    memcpy((VOID *) new, (VOID *) old, oldSize );
-	    memset((VOID *) (new+numSlot), 0, newSize - oldSize );
-	    ckfree((char *) old);
+	    int newNumSlot = slot + PREALLOC;
+	    size_t oldSize = numSlot * sizeof(SlotInfo);
+	    size_t newSize = newNumSlot * sizeof(SlotInfo);
+	    SlotInfo *newSI = (SlotInfo *) ckalloc(newSize);
+	    SlotInfo *oldSI = (slotType == ROW)
+		    ? masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr
+		    : masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr;
+
+	    memcpy(newSI, oldSI, oldSize);
+	    memset(newSI+numSlot, 0, newSize - oldSize);
+	    ckfree((char *) oldSI);
 	    if (slotType == ROW) {
-	 	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr = new ;
-	    	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowSpace = newNumSlot ;
+	 	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr = newSI;
+	    	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowSpace = newNumSlot;
 	    } else {
-	    	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr = new;
-	    	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnSpace = newNumSlot ;
+	    	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr = newSI;
+	    	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnSpace = newNumSlot;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (slot >= end && checkOnly != CHECK_SPACE) {
@@ -2369,33 +2650,31 @@ CheckSlotData(masterPtr, slot, slotType, checkOnly)
 }
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * InitMasterData --
  *
- *	This internal procedure is used to allocate and initialize
- *	the data for a geometry master, if the data
- *	doesn't exist already.
+ *	This internal procedure is used to allocate and initialize the data
+ *	for a geometry master, if the data doesn't exist already.
  *
  * Results:
  *	none
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new master grid structure may be created.  If so, then
- *	it is initialized.
+ *	A new master grid structure may be created. If so, then it is
+ *	initialized.
  *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-InitMasterData(masterPtr)
-    Gridder *masterPtr;
+InitMasterData(
+    Gridder *masterPtr)
 {
-    size_t size;
     if (masterPtr->masterDataPtr == NULL) {
-	GridMaster *gridPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr =
-		(GridMaster *) ckalloc(sizeof(GridMaster));
-	size = sizeof(SlotInfo) * TYPICAL_SIZE;
+	GridMaster *gridPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr = (GridMaster *)
+		ckalloc(sizeof(GridMaster));
+	size_t size = sizeof(SlotInfo) * TYPICAL_SIZE;
 
 	gridPtr->columnEnd = 0;
 	gridPtr->columnMax = 0;
@@ -2407,9 +2686,10 @@ InitMasterData(masterPtr)
 	gridPtr->rowSpace = TYPICAL_SIZE;
 	gridPtr->startX = 0;
 	gridPtr->startY = 0;
+	gridPtr->anchor = GRID_DEFAULT_ANCHOR;
 
-	memset((VOID *) gridPtr->columnPtr, 0, size);
-	memset((VOID *) gridPtr->rowPtr, 0, size);
+	memset(gridPtr->columnPtr, 0, size);
+	memset(gridPtr->rowPtr, 0, size);
     }
 }
 
@@ -2418,21 +2698,21 @@ InitMasterData(masterPtr)
  *
  * Unlink --
  *
- *	Remove a grid from its parent's list of slaves.
+ *	Remove a grid from its master's list of slaves.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The parent will be scheduled for re-arranging, and the size of the
+ *	The master will be scheduled for re-arranging, and the size of the
  *	grid will be adjusted accordingly
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-Unlink(slavePtr)
-    register Gridder *slavePtr;		/* Window to unlink. */
+Unlink(
+    register Gridder *slavePtr)	/* Window to unlink. */
 {
     register Gridder *masterPtr, *slavePtr2;
 
@@ -2444,9 +2724,9 @@ Unlink(slavePtr)
     if (masterPtr->slavePtr == slavePtr) {
 	masterPtr->slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr;
     } else {
-	for (slavePtr2 = masterPtr->slavePtr; ; slavePtr2 = slavePtr2->nextPtr) {
+	for (slavePtr2=masterPtr->slavePtr ; ; slavePtr2=slavePtr2->nextPtr) {
 	    if (slavePtr2 == NULL) {
-		panic("Unlink couldn't find previous window");
+		Tcl_Panic("Unlink couldn't find previous window");
 	    }
 	    if (slavePtr2->nextPtr == slavePtr) {
 		slavePtr2->nextPtr = slavePtr->nextPtr;
@@ -2471,11 +2751,11 @@ Unlink(slavePtr)
  *
  * DestroyGrid --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a grid at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).   Cleaning up the grid involves
- *	freeing the main structure for all windows. and the master structure
- *	for geometry managers.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to
+ *	clean up the internal structure of a grid at a safe time (when no-one
+ *	is using it anymore). Cleaning up the grid involves freeing the main
+ *	structure for all windows and the master structure for geometry
+ *	managers.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2487,8 +2767,8 @@ Unlink(slavePtr)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyGrid(memPtr)
-    char *memPtr;		/* Info about window that is now dead. */
+DestroyGrid(
+    char *memPtr)		/* Info about window that is now dead. */
 {
     register Gridder *gridPtr = (Gridder *) memPtr;
 
@@ -2501,6 +2781,9 @@ DestroyGrid(memPtr)
 	}
 	ckfree((char *) gridPtr->masterDataPtr);
     }
+    if (gridPtr->in != NULL) {
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(gridPtr->in);
+    }
     ckfree((char *) gridPtr);
 }
 
@@ -2509,37 +2792,37 @@ DestroyGrid(memPtr)
  *
  * GridStructureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher in response
- *	to StructureNotify events.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher in response to
+ *	StructureNotify events.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	If a window was just deleted, clean up all its grid-related
- *	information.  If it was just resized, re-configure its slaves, if
- *	any.
+ *	information. If it was just resized, re-configure its slaves, if any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-GridStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Our information about window
-					 * referred to by eventPtr. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Describes what just happened. */
+GridStructureProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Our information about window referred to by
+				 * eventPtr. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     register Gridder *gridPtr = (Gridder *) clientData;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) gridPtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
     if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
-	if (!(gridPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT)) {
+	if ((gridPtr->slavePtr != NULL)
+		&& !(gridPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT)) {
 	    gridPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_RELAYOUT;
 	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ArrangeGrid, (ClientData) gridPtr);
 	}
-	if (gridPtr->doubleBw != 2*Tk_Changes(gridPtr->tkwin)->border_width) {
-	    if ((gridPtr->masterPtr != NULL) &&
-		    !(gridPtr->masterPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT)) {
+	if ((gridPtr->masterPtr != NULL) &&
+		(gridPtr->doubleBw != 2*Tk_Changes(gridPtr->tkwin)->border_width)) {
+	    if (!(gridPtr->masterPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT)) {
 		gridPtr->doubleBw = 2*Tk_Changes(gridPtr->tkwin)->border_width;
 		gridPtr->masterPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_RELAYOUT;
 		Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ArrangeGrid, (ClientData) gridPtr->masterPtr);
@@ -2552,7 +2835,7 @@ GridStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	    Unlink(gridPtr);
 	}
 	for (gridPtr2 = gridPtr->slavePtr; gridPtr2 != NULL;
-					   gridPtr2 = nextPtr) {
+		gridPtr2 = nextPtr) {
 	    Tk_UnmapWindow(gridPtr2->tkwin);
 	    gridPtr2->masterPtr = NULL;
 	    nextPtr = gridPtr2->nextPtr;
@@ -2566,7 +2849,8 @@ GridStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	gridPtr->tkwin = NULL;
 	Tcl_EventuallyFree((ClientData) gridPtr, DestroyGrid);
     } else if (eventPtr->type == MapNotify) {
-	if (!(gridPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT)) {
+	if ((gridPtr->slavePtr != NULL)
+		&& !(gridPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT)) {
 	    gridPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_RELAYOUT;
 	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ArrangeGrid, (ClientData) gridPtr);
 	}
@@ -2574,7 +2858,7 @@ GridStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	register Gridder *gridPtr2;
 
 	for (gridPtr2 = gridPtr->slavePtr; gridPtr2 != NULL;
-					   gridPtr2 = gridPtr2->nextPtr) {
+		gridPtr2 = gridPtr2->nextPtr) {
 	    Tk_UnmapWindow(gridPtr2->tkwin);
 	}
     }
@@ -2585,15 +2869,14 @@ GridStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureSlaves --
  *
- *	This implements the guts of the "grid configure" command.  Given
- *	a list of slaves and configuration options, it arranges for the
- *	grid to manage the slaves and sets the specified options.
- *	arguments consist of windows or window shortcuts followed by
- *	"-option value" pairs.
+ *	This implements the guts of the "grid configure" command. Given a list
+ *	of slaves and configuration options, it arranges for the grid to
+ *	manage the slaves and sets the specified options. Arguments consist
+ *	of windows or window shortcuts followed by "-option value" pairs.
  *
  * Results:
- *	TCL_OK is returned if all went well.  Otherwise, TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned and the interp's result is set to contain an error message.
+ *	TCL_OK is returned if all went well. Otherwise, TCL_ERROR is returned
+ *	and the interp's result is set to contain an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Slave windows get taken over by the grid.
@@ -2602,57 +2885,90 @@ GridStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Any window in application containing
-				 * slaves.  Used to look up slave names. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of elements in argv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects: contains one or more
-				 * window names followed by any number
-				 * of "option value" pairs.  Caller must
-				 * make sure that there is at least one
-				 * window name. */
+ConfigureSlaves(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Any window in application containing
+				 * slaves. Used to look up slave names. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of elements in argv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects: contains one or more
+				 * window names followed by any number of
+				 * "option value" pairs. Caller must make sure
+				 * that there is at least one window name. */
 {
-    Gridder *masterPtr;
+    Gridder *masterPtr = NULL;
     Gridder *slavePtr;
     Tk_Window other, slave, parent, ancestor;
     int i, j, tmp;
-    int length;
     int numWindows;
     int width;
-    int defaultColumn = 0;	/* default column number */
-    int defaultColumnSpan = 1;	/* default number of columns */
-    char *lastWindow;		/* use this window to base current
-				 * Row/col on */
-    int numSkip;		/* number of 'x' found */
+    int defaultRow = -1;
+    int defaultColumn = 0;	/* Default column number */
+    int defaultColumnSpan = 1;	/* Default number of columns */
+    char *lastWindow;		/* Use this window to base current row/col
+				 * on */
+    int numSkip;		/* Number of 'x' found */
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
 	"-column", "-columnspan", "-in", "-ipadx", "-ipady",
-	"-padx", "-pady", "-row", "-rowspan", "-sticky",
-	(char *) NULL };
+	"-padx", "-pady", "-row", "-rowspan", "-sticky", NULL
+    };
     enum options {
 	CONF_COLUMN, CONF_COLUMNSPAN, CONF_IN, CONF_IPADX, CONF_IPADY,
 	CONF_PADX, CONF_PADY, CONF_ROW, CONF_ROWSPAN, CONF_STICKY };
     int index;
     char *string;
-    char firstChar, prevChar;
+    char firstChar;
+    int positionGiven;
 
     /*
      * Count the number of windows, or window short-cuts.
      */
 
     firstChar = 0;
-    for (numWindows = i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
-	prevChar = firstChar;
+    for (numWindows=0, i=0; i < objc; i++) {
+	int length;
+	char prevChar = firstChar;
+
 	string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
     	firstChar = string[0];
-	
+
 	if (firstChar == '.') {
+	    /*
+	     * Check that windows are valid, and locate the first slave's
+	     * parent window (default for -in).
+	     */
+
+	    if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i], &slave) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (masterPtr == NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * Is there any saved -in from a removed slave?
+		 * If there is, it becomes default for -in.
+		 * If the stored master does not exist, just ignore it.
+		 */
+
+		struct Gridder *slavePtr = GetGrid(slave);
+		if (slavePtr->in != NULL) {
+		    if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, slave, slavePtr->in, &parent)
+			    == TCL_OK) {
+			masterPtr = GetGrid(parent);
+			InitMasterData(masterPtr);
+		    }
+		}
+	    }
+	    if (masterPtr == NULL) {
+		parent = Tk_Parent(slave);
+		if (parent != NULL) {
+		    masterPtr = GetGrid(parent);
+		    InitMasterData(masterPtr);
+		}
+	    }
 	    numWindows++;
 	    continue;
     	}
 	if (length > 1 && i == 0) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad argument \"", string,
-		    "\": must be name of window", (char *) NULL);
+		    "\": must be name of window", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     	if (length > 1 && firstChar == '-') {
@@ -2661,15 +2977,14 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	if (length > 1) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unexpected parameter, \"",
 		    string, "\", in configure list. ",
-		    "Should be window name or option", (char *) NULL);
+		    "Should be window name or option", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	if ((firstChar == REL_HORIZ) && ((numWindows == 0) ||
 		(prevChar == REL_SKIP) || (prevChar == REL_VERT))) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-		    "Must specify window before shortcut '-'.",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    "Must specify window before shortcut '-'.", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
@@ -2679,36 +2994,79 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid window shortcut, \"",
-		string, "\" should be '-', 'x', or '^'", (char *) NULL);
+		string, "\" should be '-', 'x', or '^'", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     numWindows = i;
 
     if ((objc - numWindows) & 1) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "extra option or",
-		" option with no value", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "extra option or option with no value", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Iterate over all of the slave windows and short-cuts, parsing
-     * options for each slave.  It's a bit wasteful to re-parse the
-     * options for each slave, but things get too messy if we try to
-     * parse the arguments just once at the beginning.  For example,
-     * if a slave already is managed we want to just change a few
-     * existing values without resetting everything.  If there are
-     * multiple windows, the -in option only gets processed for the
-     * first window.
+     * Go through all options looking for -in and -row, which are needed to be
+     * found first to handle the special case where ^ is used on a row without
+     * windows names, but with an -in option. Since all options are checked
+     * here, we do not need to handle the error case again later.
+     */
+
+    for (i = numWindows; i < objc; i += 2) {
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings, "option", 0,
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (index == CONF_IN) {
+	    if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other) !=
+		    TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    masterPtr = GetGrid(other);
+	    InitMasterData(masterPtr);
+	} else if (index == CONF_ROW) {
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK
+		    || tmp < 0) {
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad row value \"",
+			Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]), "\": must be ",
+			"a non-negative integer", NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    defaultRow = tmp;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If no -row is given, use the first unoccupied row of the master.
+     */
+
+    if (defaultRow < 0) {
+	if (masterPtr != NULL && masterPtr->masterDataPtr != NULL) {
+	    SetGridSize(masterPtr);
+	    defaultRow = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowEnd;
+	} else {
+	    defaultRow = 0;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Iterate over all of the slave windows and short-cuts, parsing options
+     * for each slave. It's a bit wasteful to re-parse the options for each
+     * slave, but things get too messy if we try to parse the arguments just
+     * once at the beginning. For example, if a slave already is managed we
+     * want to just change a few existing values without resetting everything.
+     * If there are multiple windows, the -in option only gets processed for
+     * the first window.
      */
 
-    masterPtr = NULL;
+    positionGiven = 0;
     for (j = 0; j < numWindows; j++) {
 	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[j]);
     	firstChar = string[0];
 
 	/*
-	 * '^' and 'x' cause us to skip a column.  '-' is processed
-	 * as part of its preceeding slave.
+	 * '^' and 'x' cause us to skip a column. '-' is processed as part of
+	 * its preceeding slave.
 	 */
 
 	if ((firstChar == REL_VERT) || (firstChar == REL_SKIP)) {
@@ -2722,6 +3080,7 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	for (defaultColumnSpan = 1; j + defaultColumnSpan < numWindows;
 		defaultColumnSpan++) {
 	    char *string = Tcl_GetString(objv[j + defaultColumnSpan]);
+
 	    if (*string != REL_HORIZ) {
 		break;
 	    }
@@ -2733,7 +3092,7 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 
 	if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(slave)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't manage \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[j]),
-		    "\": it's a top-level window", (char *) NULL);
+		    "\": it's a top-level window", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	slavePtr = GetGrid(slave);
@@ -2742,49 +3101,48 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	 * The following statement is taken from tkPack.c:
 	 *
 	 * "If the slave isn't currently managed, reset all of its
-	 * configuration information to default values (there could
-	 * be old values left from a previous packer)."
+	 * configuration information to default values (there could be old
+	 * values left from a previous packer)."
 	 *
-	 * I [D.S.] disagree with this statement.  If a slave is disabled (using
-	 * "forget") and then re-enabled, I submit that 90% of the time the
-	 * programmer will want it to retain its old configuration information.
-	 * If the programmer doesn't want this behavior, then the
+	 * I [D.S.] disagree with this statement. If a slave is disabled
+	 * (using "forget") and then re-enabled, I submit that 90% of the time
+	 * the programmer will want it to retain its old configuration
+	 * information. If the programmer doesn't want this behavior, then the
 	 * defaults can be reestablished by hand, without having to worry
-	 * about keeping track of the old state. 
+	 * about keeping track of the old state.
 	 */
 
 	for (i = numWindows; i < objc; i += 2) {
-	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings, "option", 0,
-		    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (index == CONF_COLUMN) {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK ||
-			tmp < 0) {
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad column value \"", 
-			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
-			    "\": must be a non-negative integer", (char *)NULL);
+	    Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings, "option", 0,
+		    &index);
+	    switch ((enum options) index) {
+	    case CONF_COLUMN:
+		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK
+			|| tmp < 0) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad column value \"",
+			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]), "\": must be ",
+			    "a non-negative integer", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		if (SetSlaveColumn(interp, slavePtr, tmp, -1) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_COLUMNSPAN) {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK ||
-			tmp <= 0) {
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		break;
+	    case CONF_COLUMNSPAN:
+		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK
+			|| tmp <= 0) {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad columnspan value \"",
-			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
-			    "\": must be a positive integer", (char *)NULL);
+			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]), "\": must be ",
+			    "a positive integer", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		if (SetSlaveColumn(interp, slavePtr, -1, tmp) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_IN) {
-		if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other) !=
-			TCL_OK) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_IN:
+		if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1],
+			&other) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		if (other == slave) {
@@ -2792,89 +3150,106 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 			    TCL_STATIC);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
+		positionGiven = 1;
 		masterPtr = GetGrid(other);
 		InitMasterData(masterPtr);
-	    } else if (index == CONF_IPADX) {
-		if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, slave, objv[i+1], &tmp)
-			!= TCL_OK)
-			|| (tmp < 0)) {
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		break;
+	    case CONF_STICKY: {
+		int sticky = StringToSticky(Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]));
+
+		if (sticky == -1) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad stickyness value \"",
+			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]), "\": must be ",
+			    "a string containing n, e, s, and/or w", NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		slavePtr->sticky = sticky;
+		break;
+	    }
+	    case CONF_IPADX:
+		if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, slave, objv[i+1],
+			&tmp) != TCL_OK) || (tmp < 0)) {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad ipadx value \"",
-			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
-			    "\": must be positive screen distance",
-			    (char *) NULL);
+			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]), "\": must be ",
+			    "positive screen distance", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		slavePtr->iPadX = tmp*2;
-	    } else if (index == CONF_IPADY) {
-		if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, slave, objv[i+1], &tmp)
-			!= TCL_OK)
-			|| (tmp < 0)) {
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		break;
+	    case CONF_IPADY:
+		if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, slave, objv[i+1],
+			&tmp) != TCL_OK) || (tmp < 0)) {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad ipady value \"",
-			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
-			    "\": must be positive screen distance",
-			    (char *) NULL);
+			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]), "\": must be ",
+			    "positive screen distance", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		slavePtr->iPadY = tmp*2;
-	    } else if (index == CONF_PADX) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_PADX:
 		if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1],
 			&slavePtr->padLeft, &slavePtr->padX) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_PADY) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_PADY:
 		if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1],
 			&slavePtr->padTop, &slavePtr->padY) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_ROW) {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK
+		break;
+	    case CONF_ROW:
+		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK
 			|| tmp < 0) {
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad grid value \"",
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad row value \"",
 			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
-			    "\": must be a non-negative integer", (char *)NULL);
+			    "\": must be a non-negative integer", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		if (SetSlaveRow(interp, slavePtr, tmp, -1) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_ROWSPAN) {
-		if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK)
+		break;
+	    case CONF_ROWSPAN:
+		if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK)
 			|| tmp <= 0) {
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad rowspan value \"",
 			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
-			    "\": must be a positive integer", (char *)NULL);
+			    "\": must be a positive integer", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		if (SetSlaveRow(interp, slavePtr, -1, tmp) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_STICKY) {
-		int sticky = StringToSticky(Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]));
-		if (sticky == -1) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad stickyness value \"",
-			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
-			    "\": must be a string containing n, e, s, and/or w",
-			    (char *)NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		slavePtr->sticky = sticky;
+		break;
 	    }
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Make sure we have a geometry master.  We look at:
-	 *  1)   the -in flag
-	 *  2)   the geometry master of the first slave (if specified)
-	 *  3)   the parent of the first slave.
+	 * If no position was specified via -in and the slave is already
+	 * packed, then leave it in its current location.
 	 */
-    
-    	if (masterPtr == NULL) {
+
+    	if (!positionGiven && (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL)) {
 	    masterPtr = slavePtr->masterPtr;
+	    goto scheduleLayout;
     	}
+
+	/*
+	 * If the same -in window is passed in again, then just leave it in
+	 * its current location.
+	 */
+
+	if (positionGiven && (masterPtr == slavePtr->masterPtr)) {
+	    goto scheduleLayout;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Make sure we have a geometry master. We look at:
+	 *  1)   the -in flag
+	 *  2)   the parent of the first slave.
+	 */
+
 	parent = Tk_Parent(slave);
     	if (masterPtr == NULL) {
 	    masterPtr = GetGrid(parent);
@@ -2888,15 +3263,16 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 
 	if (slavePtr->masterPtr == NULL) {
 	    Gridder *tempPtr = masterPtr->slavePtr;
+
 	    slavePtr->masterPtr = masterPtr;
 	    masterPtr->slavePtr = slavePtr;
 	    slavePtr->nextPtr = tempPtr;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Make sure that the slave's parent is either the master or
-	 * an ancestor of the master, and that the master and slave
-	 * aren't the same.
+	 * Make sure that the slave's parent is either the master or an
+	 * ancestor of the master, and that the master and slave aren't the
+	 * same.
 	 */
 
 	for (ancestor = masterPtr->tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
@@ -2905,8 +3281,7 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	    if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(ancestor)) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't put ", Tcl_GetString(objv[j]),
-			" inside ", Tk_PathName(masterPtr->tkwin),
-			(char *) NULL);
+			" inside ", Tk_PathName(masterPtr->tkwin), NULL);
 		Unlink(slavePtr);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
@@ -2919,8 +3294,7 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
      	if (masterPtr->masterPtr == slavePtr) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't put ", Tcl_GetString(objv[j]),
 		    " inside ", Tk_PathName(masterPtr->tkwin),
-		    ", would cause management loop.", 
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    ", would cause management loop.", NULL);
 	    Unlink(slavePtr);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
      	}
@@ -2932,7 +3306,7 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	 */
 
 	if (slavePtr->column == -1) {
-	    if (SetSlaveColumn(interp, slavePtr, defaultColumn, -1) != TCL_OK) {
+	    if (SetSlaveColumn(interp, slavePtr, defaultColumn,-1) != TCL_OK){
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
@@ -2941,23 +3315,18 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (slavePtr->row == -1) {
-	    if (masterPtr->masterDataPtr == NULL) {
-	    	slavePtr->row = 0;
-	    } else {
-		if (SetSlaveRow(interp, slavePtr, 
-			masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowEnd, -1) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
+	    if (SetSlaveRow(interp, slavePtr, defaultRow, -1) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
 	defaultColumn += slavePtr->numCols;
 	defaultColumnSpan = 1;
 
 	/*
-	 * Arrange for the parent to be re-arranged at the first
-	 * idle moment.
+	 * Arrange for the master to be re-arranged at the first idle moment.
 	 */
 
+    scheduleLayout:
 	if (masterPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
 	    *masterPtr->abortPtr = 1;
 	}
@@ -2967,14 +3336,16 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	}
     }
 
-    /* Now look for all the "^"'s. */
+    /*
+     * Now look for all the "^"'s.
+     */
 
     lastWindow = NULL;
     numSkip = 0;
     for (j = 0; j < numWindows; j++) {
 	struct Gridder *otherPtr;
-	int match;			/* found a match for the ^ */
-	int lastRow, lastColumn;	/* implied end of table */
+	int match;		 /* Found a match for the ^ */
+	int lastRow, lastColumn; /* Implied end of table. */
 
 	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[j]);
     	firstChar = string[0];
@@ -2991,28 +3362,28 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	if (masterPtr == NULL) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't use '^', cant find master",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't use '^', cant find master", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
-	/* Count the number of consecutive ^'s starting from this position */
+	/*
+	 * Count the number of consecutive ^'s starting from this position.
+	 */
+
 	for (width = 1; width + j < numWindows; width++) {
 	    char *string = Tcl_GetString(objv[j+width]);
-	    if (*string != REL_VERT) break;
+
+	    if (*string != REL_VERT) {
+		break;
+	    }
 	}
 
 	/*
 	 * Find the implied grid location of the ^
 	 */
 
-	if (lastWindow == NULL) { 
-	    if (masterPtr->masterDataPtr != NULL) {
-		SetGridSize(masterPtr);
-		lastRow = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowEnd - 2;
-	    } else {
-		lastRow = 0;
-	    }
+	if (lastWindow == NULL) {
+	    lastRow = defaultRow - 1;
 	    lastColumn = 0;
 	} else {
 	    other = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, lastWindow, tkwin);
@@ -3023,13 +3394,13 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 
 	lastColumn += numSkip;
 
-	for (match=0, slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
-					 slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
+	match = 0;
+	for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
+		slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
 
 	    if (slavePtr->column == lastColumn
 		    && slavePtr->row + slavePtr->numRows - 1 == lastRow) {
 		if (slavePtr->numCols <= width) {
-
 		    if (SetSlaveRow(interp, slavePtr, -1,
 			    slavePtr->numRows + 1) != TCL_OK) {
 			return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -3044,14 +3415,13 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	}
 	if (!match) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't find slave to extend with \"^\".",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     }
 
     if (masterPtr == NULL) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't determine master window",
-		(char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't determine master window", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     SetGridSize(masterPtr);
@@ -3063,8 +3433,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
  *
  * StickyToString
  *
- *	Converts the internal boolean combination of "sticky" bits onto
- *	a TCL list element containing zero or mor of n, s, e, or w.
+ *	Converts the internal boolean combination of "sticky" bits onto a Tcl
+ *	list element containing zero or more of n, s, e, or w.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A string is placed into the "result" pointer.
@@ -3076,9 +3446,9 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static void
-StickyToString(flags, result)
-    int flags;		/* the sticky flags */
-    char *result;	/* where to put the result */
+StickyToString(
+    int flags,			/* The sticky flags. */
+    char *result)		/* Where to put the result. */
 {
     int count = 0;
     if (flags&STICK_NORTH) {
@@ -3096,7 +3466,7 @@ StickyToString(flags, result)
     if (count) {
 	result[count] = '\0';
     } else {
-	sprintf(result,"{}");
+	sprintf(result, "{}");
     }
 }
 
@@ -3105,12 +3475,12 @@ StickyToString(flags, result)
  *
  * StringToSticky --
  *
- *	Converts an ascii string representing a widgets stickyness
- *	into the boolean result.
+ *	Converts an ascii string representing a widgets stickyness into the
+ *	boolean result.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The boolean combination of the "sticky" bits is retuned.  If an
- *	error occurs, such as an invalid character, -1 is returned instead.
+ *	The boolean combination of the "sticky" bits is retuned. If an error
+ *	occurs, such as an invalid character, -1 is returned instead.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	none
@@ -3119,20 +3489,30 @@ StickyToString(flags, result)
  */
 
 static int
-StringToSticky(string)
-    char *string;
+StringToSticky(
+    char *string)
 {
     int sticky = 0;
     char c;
 
     while ((c = *string++) != '\0') {
 	switch (c) {
-	    case 'n': case 'N': sticky |= STICK_NORTH; break;
-	    case 'e': case 'E': sticky |= STICK_EAST;  break;
-	    case 's': case 'S': sticky |= STICK_SOUTH; break;
-	    case 'w': case 'W': sticky |= STICK_WEST;  break;
-	    case ' ': case ',': case '\t': case '\r': case '\n': break;
-	    default: return -1;
+	case 'n': case 'N':
+	    sticky |= STICK_NORTH;
+	    break;
+	case 'e': case 'E':
+	    sticky |= STICK_EAST;
+	    break;
+	case 's': case 'S':
+	    sticky |= STICK_SOUTH;
+	    break;
+	case 'w': case 'W':
+	    sticky |= STICK_WEST;
+	    break;
+	case ' ': case ',': case '\t': case '\r': case '\n':
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    return -1;
 	}
     }
     return sticky;
@@ -3155,14 +3535,14 @@ StringToSticky(string)
  */
 
 static Tcl_Obj *
-NewPairObj(interp, val1, val2)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int val1, val2;
+NewPairObj(
+    int val1, int val2)
 {
-    Tcl_Obj *res = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(val1));
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(val2));
-    return res;
+    Tcl_Obj *ary[2];
+
+    ary[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val1);
+    ary[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val2);
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(2, ary);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -3182,14 +3562,22 @@ NewPairObj(interp, val1, val2)
  */
 
 static Tcl_Obj *
-NewQuadObj(interp, val1, val2, val3, val4)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int val1, val2, val3, val4;
+NewQuadObj(
+    int val1, int val2, int val3, int val4)
 {
-    Tcl_Obj *res = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(val1));
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(val2));
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(val3));
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(val4));
-    return res;
+    Tcl_Obj *ary[4];
+
+    ary[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val1);
+    ary[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val2);
+    ary[2] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val3);
+    ary[3] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val4);
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(4, ary);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkImage.c b/generic/tkImage.c
index 35f013f..6c7c9cd 100644
--- a/generic/tkImage.c
+++ b/generic/tkImage.c
@@ -1,19 +1,17 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkImage.c --
  *
- *	This module implements the image protocol, which allows lots
- *	of different kinds of images to be used in lots of different
- *	widgets.
+ *	This module implements the image protocol, which allows lots of
+ *	different kinds of images to be used in lots of different widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 
 /*
  * Each call to Tk_GetImage returns a pointer to one of the following
@@ -25,114 +23,162 @@ typedef struct Image {
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window passed to Tk_GetImage (needed to
 				 * "re-get" the image later if the manager
 				 * changes). */
-    Display *display;		/* Display for tkwin.  Needed because when
-				 * the image is eventually freed tkwin may
-				 * not exist anymore. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display for tkwin. Needed because when the
+				 * image is eventually freed tkwin may not
+				 * exist anymore. */
     struct ImageMaster *masterPtr;
 				/* Master for this image (identifiers image
 				 * manager, for example). */
-    ClientData instanceData;
-				/* One word argument to pass to image manager
+    ClientData instanceData;	/* One word argument to pass to image manager
 				 * when dealing with this image instance. */
     Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc;
 				/* Code in widget to call when image changes
 				 * in a way that affects redisplay. */
-    ClientData widgetClientData;
-				/* Argument to pass to changeProc. */
+    ClientData widgetClientData;/* Argument to pass to changeProc. */
     struct Image *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of all image instances
 				 * associated with the same name. */
-
 } Image;
 
 /*
- * For each image master there is one of the following structures,
- * which represents a name in the image table and all of the images
- * instantiated from it.  Entries in mainPtr->imageTable point to
- * these structures.
+ * For each image master there is one of the following structures, which
+ * represents a name in the image table and all of the images instantiated
+ * from it. Entries in mainPtr->imageTable point to these structures.
  */
 
 typedef struct ImageMaster {
-    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Information about image type.  NULL means
-				 * that no image manager owns this image:  the
+    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Information about image type. NULL means
+				 * that no image manager owns this image: the
 				 * image was deleted. */
-    ClientData masterData;	/* One-word argument to pass to image mgr
-				 * when dealing with the master, as opposed
-				 * to instances. */
+    ClientData masterData;	/* One-word argument to pass to image mgr when
+				 * dealing with the master, as opposed to
+				 * instances. */
     int width, height;		/* Last known dimensions for image. */
-    Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr;	/* Pointer to hash table containing image
-				 * (the imageTable field in some TkMainInfo
+    Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr;	/* Pointer to hash table containing image (the
+				 * imageTable field in some TkMainInfo
 				 * structure). */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;	/* Hash entry in mainPtr->imageTable for
-				 * this structure (used to delete the hash
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;	/* Hash entry in mainPtr->imageTable for this
+				 * structure (used to delete the hash
 				 * entry). */
     Image *instancePtr;		/* Pointer to first in list of instances
 				 * derived from this name. */
     int deleted;		/* Flag set when image is being deleted. */
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Main window of interpreter (used to
-				 * detect when the world is falling apart.) */
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Main window of interpreter (used to detect
+				 * when the world is falling apart.) */
 } ImageMaster;
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    Tk_ImageType *imageTypeList;/* First in a list of all known image 
-				 * types. */  
-    Tk_ImageType *oldImageTypeList;/* First in a list of all known old-style image 
-				 * types. */  
-} ThreadSpecificData;           
+    Tk_ImageType *imageTypeList;/* First in a list of all known image
+				 * types. */
+    Tk_ImageType *oldImageTypeList;
+				/* First in a list of all known old-style
+				 * image types. */
+    int initialized;		/* Set to 1 if we've initialized the
+				 * structure. */
+} ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for local procedures:
+ * Prototypes for local functions:
  */
 
-static void	DeleteImage _ANSI_ARGS_((ImageMaster *masterPtr));
-static void	EventuallyDeleteImage _ANSI_ARGS_((ImageMaster *masterPtr,
-						   int forgetHashEntryNow));
+static void		ImageTypeThreadExitProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		DeleteImage(ImageMaster *masterPtr);
+static void		EventuallyDeleteImage(ImageMaster *masterPtr,
+			    int forgetImageHashNow);
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ImageTypeThreadExitProc --
+ *
+ *	Clean up the registered list of image types.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The thread's linked lists of photo image formats is deleted.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+ImageTypeThreadExitProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* not used */
+{
+	Tk_ImageType *freePtr;
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr =
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+
+    while (tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList != NULL) {
+	freePtr = tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList;
+	tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList = tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList->nextPtr;
+	ckfree((char *) freePtr);
+    }
+    while (tsdPtr->imageTypeList != NULL) {
+	freePtr = tsdPtr->imageTypeList;
+	tsdPtr->imageTypeList = tsdPtr->imageTypeList->nextPtr;
+	ckfree((char *) freePtr);
+    }
+}
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_CreateOldImageType, Tk_CreateImageType --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by an image manager to tell Tk about
- *	a new kind of image and the procedures that manage the new type.
- *	The procedure is typically invoked during Tcl_AppInit.
+ *	This function is invoked by an image manager to tell Tk about a new
+ *	kind of image and the functions that manage the new type. The function
+ *	is typically invoked during Tcl_AppInit.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The new image type is entered into a table used in the "image
- *	create" command.
+ *	The new image type is entered into a table used in the "image create"
+ *	command.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_CreateOldImageType(typePtr)
-    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Structure describing the type.  All of
-				 * the fields except "nextPtr" must be filled
-				 * in by caller.  Must not have been passed
-				 * to Tk_CreateImageType previously. */
+Tk_CreateOldImageType(
+    Tk_ImageType *typePtr)	/* Structure describing the type. All of the
+				 * fields except "nextPtr" must be filled in
+				 * by caller. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	Tk_ImageType *copyPtr;
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr =
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
-    typePtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList;
-    tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList = typePtr;
+    if (!tsdPtr->initialized) {
+	tsdPtr->initialized = 1;
+	Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler(ImageTypeThreadExitProc, NULL);
+    }
+    copyPtr = (Tk_ImageType *) ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_ImageType));
+    *copyPtr = *typePtr;
+    copyPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList;
+    tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList = copyPtr;
 }
 
 void
-Tk_CreateImageType(typePtr)
-    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Structure describing the type.  All of
-				 * the fields except "nextPtr" must be filled
-				 * in by caller.  Must not have been passed
-				 * to Tk_CreateImageType previously. */
+Tk_CreateImageType(
+    Tk_ImageType *typePtr)	/* Structure describing the type. All of the
+				 * fields except "nextPtr" must be filled in
+				 * by caller. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	Tk_ImageType *copyPtr;
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr =
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
-    typePtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->imageTypeList;
-    tsdPtr->imageTypeList = typePtr;
+    if (!tsdPtr->initialized) {
+	tsdPtr->initialized = 1;
+	Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler(ImageTypeThreadExitProc, NULL);
+    }
+    copyPtr = (Tk_ImageType *) ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_ImageType));
+    *copyPtr = *typePtr;
+    copyPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->imageTypeList;
+    tsdPtr->imageTypeList = copyPtr;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -140,8 +186,8 @@ Tk_CreateImageType(typePtr)
  *
  * Tk_ImageObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "image" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "image" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -153,30 +199,31 @@ Tk_CreateImageType(typePtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_ImageObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument strings. */
+Tk_ImageObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument strings. */
 {
     static CONST char *imageOptions[] = {
 	"create", "delete", "height", "inuse", "names", "type", "types",
-	    "width", (char *) NULL
+	"width", NULL
     };
     enum options {
 	IMAGE_CREATE, IMAGE_DELETE, IMAGE_HEIGHT, IMAGE_INUSE, IMAGE_NAMES,
 	IMAGE_TYPE, IMAGE_TYPES, IMAGE_WIDTH
     };
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) clientData;
-    int i, new, firstOption,  index;
+    int i, isNew, firstOption, index;
     Tk_ImageType *typePtr;
     ImageMaster *masterPtr;
     Image *imagePtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
-    char idString[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE], *name;
+    char idString[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    char *arg, *name;
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (objc < 2) {
@@ -189,276 +236,256 @@ Tk_ImageObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case IMAGE_CREATE: {
-	    char *arg;
-	    Tcl_Obj **args;
-	    int oldimage = 0;
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "type ?name? ?options?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+    case IMAGE_CREATE: {
+	Tcl_Obj **args;
+	int oldimage = 0;
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "type ?name? ?options?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    /*
-	     * Look up the image type.
-	     */
+	/*
+	 * Look up the image type.
+	 */
 
-	    arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-	    for (typePtr = tsdPtr->imageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
-		 typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
+	arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	for (typePtr = tsdPtr->imageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
+		typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if ((*arg == typePtr->name[0])
+		    && (strcmp(arg, typePtr->name) == 0)) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+	if (typePtr == NULL) {
+	    oldimage = 1;
+	    for (typePtr = tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
+		    typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
 		if ((*arg == typePtr->name[0])
 			&& (strcmp(arg, typePtr->name) == 0)) {
 		    break;
 		}
 	    }
-	    if (typePtr == NULL) {
-		oldimage = 1;
-		for (typePtr = tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
-		     typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
-		    if ((*arg == typePtr->name[0])
-			    && (strcmp(arg, typePtr->name) == 0)) {
-			break;
-		    }
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (typePtr == NULL) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image type \"", arg,
-			"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+	}
+	if (typePtr == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image type \"", arg, "\" doesn't exist",
+		    NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    /*
-	     * Figure out a name to use for the new image.
-	     */
+	/*
+	 * Figure out a name to use for the new image.
+	 */
 
-	    if ((objc == 3) || (*(arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[3])) == '-')) {
-                Tcl_CmdInfo dummy;
-                do {
-		    dispPtr->imageId++;
-		    sprintf(idString, "image%d", dispPtr->imageId);
-		    name = idString;
-                } while (Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, name, &dummy) != 0);
-		firstOption = 3;
-	    } else {
-		TkWindow *topWin;
-
-		name = arg;
-		firstOption = 4;
-		/*
-		 * Need to check if the _command_ that we are about to
-		 * create is the name of the current master widget
-		 * command (normally "." but could have been renamed)
-		 * and fail in that case before a really nasty and
-		 * hard to stop crash happens.
-		 */
-		topWin = (TkWindow *) TkToplevelWindowForCommand(interp, name);
-		if (topWin != NULL && winPtr->mainPtr->winPtr == topWin) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "images may not be named the ",
-			    "same as the main window", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
+	if ((objc == 3) || (*(arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[3])) == '-')) {
+	    Tcl_CmdInfo dummy;
+	    do {
+		dispPtr->imageId++;
+		sprintf(idString, "image%d", dispPtr->imageId);
+		name = idString;
+	    } while (Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, name, &dummy) != 0);
+	    firstOption = 3;
+	} else {
+	    TkWindow *topWin;
+
+	    name = arg;
+	    firstOption = 4;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Create the data structure for the new image.
+	     * Need to check if the _command_ that we are about to create is
+	     * the name of the current master widget command (normally "." but
+	     * could have been renamed) and fail in that case before a really
+	     * nasty and hard to stop crash happens.
 	     */
 
-	    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable,
-		    name, &new);
-	    if (new) {
-		masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) ckalloc(sizeof(ImageMaster));
-		masterPtr->typePtr = NULL;
-		masterPtr->masterData = NULL;
-		masterPtr->width = masterPtr->height = 1;
-		masterPtr->tablePtr = &winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable;
-		masterPtr->hPtr = hPtr;
-		masterPtr->instancePtr = NULL;
-		masterPtr->deleted = 0;
-		masterPtr->winPtr = winPtr->mainPtr->winPtr;
-		Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) masterPtr->winPtr);
-		Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, masterPtr);
-	    } else {
-		/*
-		 * An image already exists by this name.  Disconnect the
-		 * instances from the master.
-		 */
-
-		masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-		if (masterPtr->typePtr != NULL) {
-		    for (imagePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; imagePtr != NULL;
-			 imagePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr) {
-			(*masterPtr->typePtr->freeProc)(
-			    imagePtr->instanceData, imagePtr->display);
-			(*imagePtr->changeProc)(imagePtr->widgetClientData,
-				0, 0, masterPtr->width, masterPtr->height,
-				masterPtr->width, masterPtr->height);
-		    }
-		    (*masterPtr->typePtr->deleteProc)(masterPtr->masterData);
-		    masterPtr->typePtr = NULL;
-		}
+	    topWin = (TkWindow *) TkToplevelWindowForCommand(interp, name);
+	    if (topWin != NULL && winPtr->mainPtr->winPtr == topWin) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "images may not be named the ",
+			"same as the main window", NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
+	}
 
+	/*
+	 * Create the data structure for the new image.
+	 */
+
+	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, name, &isNew);
+	if (isNew) {
+	    masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) ckalloc(sizeof(ImageMaster));
+	    masterPtr->typePtr = NULL;
+	    masterPtr->masterData = NULL;
+	    masterPtr->width = masterPtr->height = 1;
+	    masterPtr->tablePtr = &winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable;
+	    masterPtr->hPtr = hPtr;
+	    masterPtr->instancePtr = NULL;
+	    masterPtr->deleted = 0;
+	    masterPtr->winPtr = winPtr->mainPtr->winPtr;
+	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) masterPtr->winPtr);
+	    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, masterPtr);
+	} else {
 	    /*
-	     * Call the image type manager so that it can perform its own
-	     * initialization, then re-"get" for any existing instances of
-	     * the image.
+	     * An image already exists by this name. Disconnect the instances
+	     * from the master.
 	     */
 
-	    objv += firstOption;
-	    objc -= firstOption;
-	    args = (Tcl_Obj **) objv;
-	    if (oldimage) {
-		int i;
-		args = (Tcl_Obj **) ckalloc((objc+1) * sizeof(char *));
-		for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
-		    args[i] = (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	    masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	    if (masterPtr->typePtr != NULL) {
+		for (imagePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; imagePtr != NULL;
+			imagePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr) {
+		    (*masterPtr->typePtr->freeProc)(imagePtr->instanceData,
+			    imagePtr->display);
+		    (*imagePtr->changeProc)(imagePtr->widgetClientData,
+			    0, 0, masterPtr->width, masterPtr->height,
+			    masterPtr->width, masterPtr->height);
 		}
-		args[objc] = NULL;
+		(*masterPtr->typePtr->deleteProc)(masterPtr->masterData);
+		masterPtr->typePtr = NULL;
 	    }
-	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) masterPtr);
-	    if ((*typePtr->createProc)(interp, name, objc,
-		    args, typePtr, (Tk_ImageMaster) masterPtr,
-		    &masterPtr->masterData) != TCL_OK) {
-		EventuallyDeleteImage(masterPtr, 0);
-		Tcl_Release((ClientData) masterPtr);
-		if (oldimage) {
-		    ckfree((char *) args);
-		}
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    masterPtr->deleted = 0;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Call the image type manager so that it can perform its own
+	 * initialization, then re-"get" for any existing instances of the
+	 * image.
+	 */
+
+	objv += firstOption;
+	objc -= firstOption;
+	args = (Tcl_Obj **) objv;
+	if (oldimage) {
+	    int i;
+
+	    args = (Tcl_Obj **) ckalloc((objc+1) * sizeof(char *));
+	    for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
+		args[i] = (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
 	    }
+	    args[objc] = NULL;
+	}
+	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) masterPtr);
+	if ((*typePtr->createProc)(interp, name, objc, args, typePtr,
+		(Tk_ImageMaster)masterPtr, &masterPtr->masterData) != TCL_OK) {
+	    EventuallyDeleteImage(masterPtr, 0);
 	    Tcl_Release((ClientData) masterPtr);
 	    if (oldimage) {
 		ckfree((char *) args);
 	    }
-	    masterPtr->typePtr = typePtr;
-	    for (imagePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; imagePtr != NULL;
-		 imagePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr) {
-		imagePtr->instanceData = (*typePtr->getProc)(
-		    imagePtr->tkwin, masterPtr->masterData);
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
-		    Tcl_GetHashKey(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, hPtr),
-		    TCL_STATIC);
-	    break;
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case IMAGE_DELETE: {
-	    for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
-		char *arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
-		hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, arg);
-		if (hPtr == NULL) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"", arg,
-			    "\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		DeleteImage((ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr));
-	    }
-	    break;
+	Tcl_Release((ClientData) masterPtr);
+	if (oldimage) {
+	    ckfree((char *) args);
 	}
-	case IMAGE_HEIGHT: {	
-	    char *arg;
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "name");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, arg);
-	    if (hPtr == NULL) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"", arg,
-			"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), masterPtr->height);
-	    break;
+	masterPtr->typePtr = typePtr;
+	for (imagePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; imagePtr != NULL;
+		imagePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    imagePtr->instanceData = (*typePtr->getProc)(imagePtr->tkwin,
+		    masterPtr->masterData);
 	}
-
-	case IMAGE_INUSE: {
-	    int count = 0;
-	    char *arg;
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "name");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+		Tcl_GetHashKey(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, hPtr),
+		TCL_STATIC);
+	break;
+    }
+    case IMAGE_DELETE:
+	for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
+	    arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
 	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, arg);
 	    if (hPtr == NULL) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"", arg,
-			"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+		goto alreadyDeleted;
 	    }
 	    masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-	    if (masterPtr->typePtr != NULL && masterPtr->instancePtr != NULL) {
-		count = 1;
+	    if (masterPtr->deleted) {
+		goto alreadyDeleted;
 	    }
-	    Tcl_SetBooleanObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), count);
-	    break;
+	    DeleteImage(masterPtr);
 	}
-
-	case IMAGE_NAMES: {
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+	break;
+    case IMAGE_NAMES:
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, &search);
+	for ( ; hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	    masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	    if (masterPtr->deleted) {
+		continue;
 	    }
-	    hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, &search);
-	    for ( ; hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
-		Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tcl_GetHashKey(
+	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tcl_GetHashKey(
 		    &winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, hPtr));
-	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	
-	case IMAGE_TYPE: {
-	    char *arg;
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "name");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, arg);
-	    if (hPtr == NULL) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"", arg,
-			"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	break;
+    case IMAGE_TYPES:
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	for (typePtr = tsdPtr->imageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
+		typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, typePtr->name);
+	}
+	for (typePtr = tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
+		typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, typePtr->name);
+	}
+	break;
+
+    case IMAGE_HEIGHT:
+    case IMAGE_INUSE:
+    case IMAGE_TYPE:
+    case IMAGE_WIDTH:
+	/*
+	 * These operations all parse virtually identically. First check to
+	 * see if three args are given. Then get a non-deleted master from the
+	 * third arg.
+	 */
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "name");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, arg);
+	if (hPtr == NULL) {
+	    goto alreadyDeleted;
+	}
+	masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	if (masterPtr->deleted) {
+	    goto alreadyDeleted;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Now we read off the specific piece of data we were asked for.
+	 */
+
+	switch ((enum options) index) {
+	case IMAGE_HEIGHT:
+	    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), masterPtr->height);
+	    break;
+	case IMAGE_INUSE:
+	    Tcl_SetBooleanObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
+		    masterPtr->typePtr!=NULL && masterPtr->instancePtr!=NULL);
+	    break;
+	case IMAGE_TYPE:
 	    if (masterPtr->typePtr != NULL) {
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, masterPtr->typePtr->name, TCL_STATIC);
 	    }
 	    break;
-	}
-	case IMAGE_TYPES: {
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    for (typePtr = tsdPtr->imageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
-		 typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
-		Tcl_AppendElement(interp, typePtr->name);
-	    }
-	    for (typePtr = tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
-		 typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
-		Tcl_AppendElement(interp, typePtr->name);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case IMAGE_WIDTH: {
-	    char *arg;
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "name");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, arg);
-	    if (hPtr == NULL) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"", arg,
-			"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	case IMAGE_WIDTH:
 	    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), masterPtr->width);
 	    break;
+	default:
+	    Tcl_Panic("can't happen");
 	}
+	break;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
+
+  alreadyDeleted:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"", arg, "\" doesn't exist", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -466,33 +493,32 @@ Tk_ImageObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * Tk_ImageChanged --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by an image manager whenever something
- *	has happened that requires the image to be redrawn (some of its
- *	pixels have changed, or its size has changed).
+ *	This function is called by an image manager whenever something has
+ *	happened that requires the image to be redrawn (some of its pixels
+ *	have changed, or its size has changed).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Any widgets that display the image are notified so that they
- *	can redisplay themselves as appropriate.
+ *	Any widgets that display the image are notified so that they can
+ *	redisplay themselves as appropriate.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_ImageChanged(imageMaster, x, y, width, height, imageWidth,
-	imageHeight)
-    Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster;	/* Image that needs redisplay. */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of upper-left pixel of
-				 * region of image that needs to be
-				 * redrawn. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions (in pixels) of region of
-				 * image to redraw.  If either dimension
-				 * is zero then the image doesn't need to
-				 * be redrawn (perhaps all that happened is
-				 * that its size changed). */
-    int imageWidth, imageHeight;/* New dimensions of image. */
+Tk_ImageChanged(
+    Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster,	/* Image that needs redisplay. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Coordinates of upper-left pixel of region
+				 * of image that needs to be redrawn. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions (in pixels) of region of image
+				 * to redraw. If either dimension is zero then
+				 * the image doesn't need to be redrawn
+				 * (perhaps all that happened is that its size
+				 * changed). */
+    int imageWidth, int imageHeight)
+				/* New dimensions of image. */
 {
     ImageMaster *masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) imageMaster;
     Image *imagePtr;
@@ -500,7 +526,7 @@ Tk_ImageChanged(imageMaster, x, y, width, height, imageWidth,
     masterPtr->width = imageWidth;
     masterPtr->height = imageHeight;
     for (imagePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; imagePtr != NULL;
-	 imagePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    imagePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr) {
 	(*imagePtr->changeProc)(imagePtr->widgetClientData, x, y,
 		width, height, imageWidth, imageHeight);
     }
@@ -511,8 +537,8 @@ Tk_ImageChanged(imageMaster, x, y, width, height, imageWidth,
  *
  * Tk_NameOfImage --
  *
- *	Given a token for an image master, this procedure returns
- *	the name of the image.
+ *	Given a token for an image master, this function returns the name of
+ *	the image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is the string name for imageMaster.
@@ -524,8 +550,8 @@ Tk_ImageChanged(imageMaster, x, y, width, height, imageWidth,
  */
 
 CONST char *
-Tk_NameOfImage(imageMaster)
-    Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster;		/* Token for image. */
+Tk_NameOfImage(
+    Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster)	/* Token for image. */
 {
     ImageMaster *masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) imageMaster;
 
@@ -540,36 +566,34 @@ Tk_NameOfImage(imageMaster)
  *
  * Tk_GetImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by a widget when it wants to use
- *	a particular image in a particular window.
+ *	This function is invoked by a widget when it wants to use a particular
+ *	image in a particular window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the image.  If there is no image
- *	by the given name, then NULL is returned and an error message is
- *	left in the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a token for the image. If there is no image by the
+ *	given name, then NULL is returned and an error message is left in the
+ *	interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Tk records the fact that the widget is using the image, and
- *	it will invoke changeProc later if the widget needs redisplay
- *	(i.e. its size changes or some of its pixels change).  The
- *	caller must eventually invoke Tk_FreeImage when it no longer
- *	needs the image.
+ *	Tk records the fact that the widget is using the image, and it will
+ *	invoke changeProc later if the widget needs redisplay (i.e. its size
+ *	changes or some of its pixels change). The caller must eventually
+ *	invoke Tk_FreeImage when it no longer needs the image.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Image
-Tk_GetImage(interp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Place to leave error message if image
-				 * can't be found. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window in which image will
-				 * be used. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of desired image. */
-    Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc;
-				/* Procedure to invoke when redisplay is
-				 * needed because image's pixels or size
-				 * changed. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* One-word argument to pass to damageProc. */
+Tk_GetImage(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Place to leave error message if image can't
+				 * be found. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window in which image will be
+				 * used. */
+    CONST char *name,		/* Name of desired image. */
+    Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc,
+				/* Function to invoke when redisplay is needed
+				 * because image's pixels or size changed. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* One-word argument to pass to damageProc. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     ImageMaster *masterPtr;
@@ -583,6 +607,9 @@ Tk_GetImage(interp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData)
     if (masterPtr->typePtr == NULL) {
 	goto noSuchImage;
     }
+    if (masterPtr->deleted) {
+	goto noSuchImage;
+    }
     imagePtr = (Image *) ckalloc(sizeof(Image));
     imagePtr->tkwin = tkwin;
     imagePtr->display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
@@ -595,9 +622,10 @@ Tk_GetImage(interp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData)
     masterPtr->instancePtr = imagePtr;
     return (Tk_Image) imagePtr;
 
-    noSuchImage:
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"", name, "\" doesn't exist",
-	    (char *) NULL);
+  noSuchImage:
+    if (interp) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"", name, "\" doesn't exist", NULL);
+    }
     return NULL;
 }
 
@@ -606,9 +634,9 @@ Tk_GetImage(interp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData)
  *
  * Tk_FreeImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by a widget when it no longer needs
- *	an image acquired by a previous call to Tk_GetImage.  For each
- *	call to Tk_GetImage there must be exactly one call to Tk_FreeImage.
+ *	This function is invoked by a widget when it no longer needs an image
+ *	acquired by a previous call to Tk_GetImage. For each call to
+ *	Tk_GetImage there must be exactly one call to Tk_FreeImage.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -620,9 +648,9 @@ Tk_GetImage(interp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeImage(image)
-    Tk_Image image;		/* Token for image that is no longer
-				 * needed by a widget. */
+Tk_FreeImage(
+    Tk_Image image)		/* Token for image that is no longer needed by
+				 * a widget. */
 {
     Image *imagePtr = (Image *) image;
     ImageMaster *masterPtr = imagePtr->masterPtr;
@@ -647,16 +675,16 @@ Tk_FreeImage(image)
     }
     ckfree((char *) imagePtr);
 
-    /* 
-     * If there are no more instances left for the master, and if the
-     * master image has been deleted, then delete the master too.
+    /*
+     * If there are no more instances left for the master, and if the master
+     * image has been deleted, then delete the master too.
      */
 
     if ((masterPtr->typePtr == NULL) && (masterPtr->instancePtr == NULL)) {
 	if (masterPtr->hPtr != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(masterPtr->hPtr);
 	}
-	Tcl_Release(masterPtr->winPtr);
+	Tcl_Release((ClientData) masterPtr->winPtr);
 	ckfree((char *) masterPtr);
     }
 }
@@ -666,29 +694,29 @@ Tk_FreeImage(image)
  *
  * Tk_PostscriptImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by widgets that contain images in order
- *	to redisplay an image on the screen or an off-screen pixmap.
+ *	This function is called by widgets that contain images in order to
+ *	redisplay an image on the screen or an off-screen pixmap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The image's manager is notified, and it redraws the desired
- *	portion of the image before returning.
+ *	The image's manager is notified, and it redraws the desired portion of
+ *	the image before returning.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_PostscriptImage(image, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height, prepass)
-    Tk_Image image;		/* Token for image to redisplay. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo;	/* postscript info */
-    int x, y;			/* Upper-left pixel of region in image that
+Tk_PostscriptImage(
+    Tk_Image image,		/* Token for image to redisplay. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo,	/* postscript info */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper-left pixel of region in image that
 				 * needs to be redisplayed. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of region to redraw. */
-    int prepass;
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of region to redraw. */
+    int prepass)
 {
     Image *imagePtr = (Image *) image;
     int result;
@@ -701,12 +729,13 @@ Tk_PostscriptImage(image, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height, prepass)
 	/*
 	 * No master for image, so nothing to display on postscript.
 	 */
+
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Check if an image specific postscript-generation function
-     * exists; otherwise go on with generic code.
+     * Check if an image specific postscript-generation function exists;
+     * otherwise go on with generic code.
      */
 
     if (imagePtr->masterPtr->typePtr->postscriptProc != NULL) {
@@ -721,12 +750,12 @@ Tk_PostscriptImage(image, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height, prepass)
 
     /*
      * Create a Pixmap, tell the image to redraw itself there, and then
-     * generate an XImage from the Pixmap.  We can then read pixel 
-     * values out of the XImage.
+     * generate an XImage from the Pixmap. We can then read pixel values out
+     * of the XImage.
      */
 
-    pmap = Tk_GetPixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
-                        width, height, Tk_Depth(tkwin));
+    pmap = Tk_GetPixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_WindowId(tkwin), width, height,
+	    Tk_Depth(tkwin));
 
     gcValues.foreground = WhitePixelOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
     newGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
@@ -742,11 +771,13 @@ Tk_PostscriptImage(image, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height, prepass)
 	    (unsigned int)width, (unsigned int)height, AllPlanes, ZPixmap);
 
     Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), pmap);
-    
+
     if (ximage == NULL) {
-	/* The XGetImage() function is apparently not
-	 * implemented on this system. Just ignore it.
+	/*
+	 * The XGetImage() function is apparently not implemented on this
+	 * system. Just ignore it.
 	 */
+
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
     result = TkPostscriptImage(interp, tkwin, psinfo, ximage, x, y,
@@ -755,39 +786,38 @@ Tk_PostscriptImage(image, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height, prepass)
     XDestroyImage(ximage);
     return result;
 }
-
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_RedrawImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by widgets that contain images in order
- *	to redisplay an image on the screen or an off-screen pixmap.
+ *	This function is called by widgets that contain images in order to
+ *	redisplay an image on the screen or an off-screen pixmap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The image's manager is notified, and it redraws the desired
- *	portion of the image before returning.
+ *	The image's manager is notified, and it redraws the desired portion of
+ *	the image before returning.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_RedrawImage(image, imageX, imageY, width, height, drawable,
-	drawableX, drawableY)
-    Tk_Image image;		/* Token for image to redisplay. */
-    int imageX, imageY;		/* Upper-left pixel of region in image that
+Tk_RedrawImage(
+    Tk_Image image,		/* Token for image to redisplay. */
+    int imageX, int imageY,	/* Upper-left pixel of region in image that
 				 * needs to be redisplayed. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of region to redraw. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* Drawable in which to display image
-				 * (window or pixmap).  If this is a pixmap,
-				 * it must have the same depth as the window
-				 * used in the Tk_GetImage call for the
-				 * image. */
-    int drawableX, drawableY;	/* Coordinates in drawable that correspond
-				 * to imageX and imageY. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of region to redraw. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Drawable in which to display image (window
+				 * or pixmap). If this is a pixmap, it must
+				 * have the same depth as the window used in
+				 * the Tk_GetImage call for the image. */
+    int drawableX, int drawableY)
+				/* Coordinates in drawable that correspond to
+				 * imageX and imageY. */
 {
     Image *imagePtr = (Image *) image;
 
@@ -829,11 +859,11 @@ Tk_RedrawImage(image, imageX, imageY, width, height, drawable,
  *
  * Tk_SizeOfImage --
  *
- *	This procedure returns the current dimensions of an image.
+ *	This function returns the current dimensions of an image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The width and height of the image are returned in *widthPtr
- *	and *heightPtr.
+ *	The width and height of the image are returned in *widthPtr and
+ *	*heightPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -842,10 +872,10 @@ Tk_RedrawImage(image, imageX, imageY, width, height, drawable,
  */
 
 void
-Tk_SizeOfImage(image, widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    Tk_Image image;		/* Token for image whose size is wanted. */
-    int *widthPtr;		/* Return width of image here. */
-    int *heightPtr;		/* Return height of image here. */
+Tk_SizeOfImage(
+    Tk_Image image,		/* Token for image whose size is wanted. */
+    int *widthPtr,		/* Return width of image here. */
+    int *heightPtr)		/* Return height of image here. */
 {
     Image *imagePtr = (Image *) image;
 
@@ -858,25 +888,23 @@ Tk_SizeOfImage(image, widthPtr, heightPtr)
  *
  * Tk_DeleteImage --
  *
- *	Given the name of an image, this procedure destroys the
- *	image.
+ *	Given the name of an image, this function destroys the image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The image is destroyed; existing instances will display as
- *	blank areas.  If no such image exists then the procedure does
- *	nothing.
+ *	The image is destroyed; existing instances will display as blank
+ *	areas. If no such image exists then the function does nothing.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DeleteImage(interp, name)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which the image was
+Tk_DeleteImage(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter in which the image was
 				 * created. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of image. */
+    CONST char *name)		/* Name of image. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     TkWindow *winPtr;
@@ -897,22 +925,22 @@ Tk_DeleteImage(interp, name)
  *
  * DeleteImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is responsible for deleting an image.
+ *	This function is responsible for deleting an image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The connection is dropped between instances of this image and
- *	an image master.  Image instances will redisplay themselves
- *	as empty areas, but existing instances will not be deleted.
+ *	The connection is dropped between instances of this image and an image
+ *	master. Image instances will redisplay themselves as empty areas, but
+ *	existing instances will not be deleted.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteImage(masterPtr)
-    ImageMaster *masterPtr;	/* Pointer to main data structure for image. */
+DeleteImage(
+    ImageMaster *masterPtr)	/* Pointer to main data structure for image. */
 {
     Image *imagePtr;
     Tk_ImageType *typePtr;
@@ -922,9 +950,9 @@ DeleteImage(masterPtr)
     if (typePtr != NULL) {
 	for (imagePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; imagePtr != NULL;
 		imagePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr) {
-	   (*typePtr->freeProc)(imagePtr->instanceData,
-		   imagePtr->display);
-	   (*imagePtr->changeProc)(imagePtr->widgetClientData, 0, 0,
+	    (*typePtr->freeProc)(imagePtr->instanceData,
+		    imagePtr->display);
+	    (*imagePtr->changeProc)(imagePtr->widgetClientData, 0, 0,
 		    masterPtr->width, masterPtr->height, masterPtr->width,
 		    masterPtr->height);
 	}
@@ -936,6 +964,8 @@ DeleteImage(masterPtr)
 	}
 	Tcl_Release((ClientData) masterPtr->winPtr);
 	ckfree((char *) masterPtr);
+    } else {
+	masterPtr->deleted = 1;
     }
 }
 
@@ -950,19 +980,20 @@ DeleteImage(masterPtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Image will get freed, though not until it is no longer
- *	Tcl_Preserve()d by anything.  May be called multiple times on
- *	the same image without ill effects.
+ *	Image will get freed, though not until it is no longer Tcl_Preserve()d
+ *	by anything. May be called multiple times on the same image without
+ *	ill effects.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EventuallyDeleteImage(masterPtr, forgetHashEntryNow)
-    ImageMaster *masterPtr;	/* Pointer to main data structure for image. */
-    int forgetHashEntryNow;
+EventuallyDeleteImage(
+    ImageMaster *masterPtr,	/* Pointer to main data structure for image. */
+    int forgetImageHashNow)	/* Flag to say whether the hash table is about
+				 * to vanish. */
 {
-    if (forgetHashEntryNow) {
+    if (forgetImageHashNow) {
 	masterPtr->hPtr = NULL;
     }
     if (!masterPtr->deleted) {
@@ -977,10 +1008,9 @@ EventuallyDeleteImage(masterPtr, forgetHashEntryNow)
  *
  * TkDeleteAllImages --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is deleted.  It
- *	calls back all of the managers for all images so that they
- *	can cleanup, then it deletes all of Tk's internal information
- *	about images.
+ *	This function is called when an application is deleted. It calls back
+ *	all of the managers for all images so that they can cleanup, then it
+ *	deletes all of Tk's internal information about images.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -992,8 +1022,8 @@ EventuallyDeleteImage(masterPtr, forgetHashEntryNow)
  */
 
 void
-TkDeleteAllImages(mainPtr)
-    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* Structure describing application that is
+TkDeleteAllImages(
+    TkMainInfo *mainPtr)	/* Structure describing application that is
 				 * going away. */
 {
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
@@ -1011,15 +1041,14 @@ TkDeleteAllImages(mainPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetImageMasterData --
  *
- *	Given the name of an image, this procedure returns the type
- *	of the image and the clientData associated with its master.
+ *	Given the name of an image, this function returns the type of the
+ *	image and the clientData associated with its master.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If there is no image by the given name, then NULL is returned
- *	and a NULL value is stored at *typePtrPtr.  Otherwise the return
- *	value is the clientData returned by the createProc when the
- *	image was created and a pointer to the type structure for the
- *	image is stored at *typePtrPtr.
+ *	If there is no image by the given name, then NULL is returned and a
+ *	NULL value is stored at *typePtrPtr. Otherwise the return value is the
+ *	clientData returned by the createProc when the image was created and a
+ *	pointer to the type structure for the image is stored at *typePtrPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1028,12 +1057,12 @@ TkDeleteAllImages(mainPtr)
  */
 
 ClientData
-Tk_GetImageMasterData(interp, name, typePtrPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which the image was
+Tk_GetImageMasterData(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter in which the image was
 				 * created. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of image. */
-    Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr;	/* Points to location to fill in with
-				 * pointer to type information for image. */
+    CONST char *name,		/* Name of image. */
+    Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr)	/* Points to location to fill in with pointer
+				 * to type information for image. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     TkWindow *winPtr;
@@ -1046,36 +1075,41 @@ Tk_GetImageMasterData(interp, name, typePtrPtr)
 	return NULL;
     }
     masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    if (masterPtr->deleted) {
+	*typePtrPtr = NULL;
+	return NULL;
+    }
     *typePtrPtr = masterPtr->typePtr;
     return masterPtr->masterData;
 }
-
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_SetTSOrigin --
  *
- *	Set the pattern origin of the tile to a common point (i.e. the
- *	origin (0,0) of the top level window) so that tiles from two
- *	different widgets will match up.  This done by setting the
- *	GCTileStipOrigin field is set to the translated origin of the
- *	toplevel window in the hierarchy.
+ *	Set the pattern origin of the tile to a common point (i.e. the origin
+ *	(0,0) of the top level window) so that tiles from two different
+ *	widgets will match up. This done by setting the GCTileStipOrigin field
+ *	is set to the translated origin of the toplevel window in the
+ *	hierarchy.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side Effects:
- *	The GCTileStipOrigin is reset in the GC.  This will cause the
- *	tile origin to change when the GC is used for drawing.
+ *	The GCTileStipOrigin is reset in the GC. This will cause the tile
+ *	origin to change when the GC is used for drawing.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 /*ARGSUSED*/
 void
-Tk_SetTSOrigin(tkwin, gc, x, y)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    GC gc;
-    int x, y;
+Tk_SetTSOrigin(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    GC gc,
+    int x, int y)
 {
     while (!Tk_TopWinHierarchy(tkwin)) {
 	x -= Tk_X(tkwin) + Tk_Changes(tkwin)->border_width;
@@ -1084,4 +1118,11 @@ Tk_SetTSOrigin(tkwin, gc, x, y)
     }
     XSetTSOrigin(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc, x, y);
 }
-
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkImgBmap.c b/generic/tkImgBmap.c
index 2542697..4f5c6ac 100644
--- a/generic/tkImgBmap.c
+++ b/generic/tkImgBmap.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkImgBmap.c --
  *
  *	This procedure implements images of type "bitmap" for Tk.
@@ -12,7 +12,6 @@
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 
 /*
  * The following data structure represents the master for a bitmap
@@ -20,21 +19,19 @@
  */
 
 typedef struct BitmapMaster {
-    Tk_ImageMaster tkMaster;	/* Tk's token for image master.  NULL means
-				 * the image is being deleted. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for application that is
-				 * using image. */
-    Tcl_Command imageCmd;	/* Token for image command (used to delete
-				 * it when the image goes away).  NULL means
-				 * the image command has already been
-				 * deleted. */
+    Tk_ImageMaster tkMaster;	/* Tk's token for image master. NULL means the
+				 * image is being deleted. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for application that is using
+				 * image. */
+    Tcl_Command imageCmd;	/* Token for image command (used to delete it
+				 * when the image goes away). NULL means the
+				 * image command has already been deleted. */
     int width, height;		/* Dimensions of image. */
-    char *data;			/* Data comprising bitmap (suitable for
-				 * input to XCreateBitmapFromData).   May
-				 * be NULL if no data.  Malloc'ed. */
-    char *maskData;		/* Data for bitmap's mask (suitable for
-				 * input to XCreateBitmapFromData).
-				 * Malloc'ed. */
+    char *data;			/* Data comprising bitmap (suitable for input
+				 * to XCreateBitmapFromData). May be NULL if
+				 * no data. Malloc'ed. */
+    char *maskData;		/* Data for bitmap's mask (suitable for input
+				 * to XCreateBitmapFromData). Malloc'ed. */
     Tk_Uid fgUid;		/* Value of -foreground option (malloc'ed). */
     Tk_Uid bgUid;		/* Value of -background option (malloc'ed). */
     char *fileString;		/* Value of -file option (malloc'ed). */
@@ -47,13 +44,13 @@ typedef struct BitmapMaster {
 } BitmapMaster;
 
 /*
- * The following data structure represents all of the instances of an
- * image that lie within a particular window:
+ * The following data structure represents all of the instances of an image
+ * that lie within a particular window:
  */
 
 typedef struct BitmapInstance {
-    int refCount;		/* Number of instances that share this
-				 * data structure. */
+    int refCount;		/* Number of instances that share this data
+				 * structure. */
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr;	/* Pointer to master for image. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which the instances will be
 				 * displayed. */
@@ -63,37 +60,35 @@ typedef struct BitmapInstance {
     Pixmap mask;		/* Mask: only display bitmap pixels where
 				 * there are 1's here. */
     GC gc;			/* Graphics context for displaying bitmap.
-				 * None means there was an error while
-				 * setting up the instance, so it cannot
-				 * be displayed. */
+				 * None means there was an error while setting
+				 * up the instance, so it cannot be
+				 * displayed. */
     struct BitmapInstance *nextPtr;
 				/* Next in list of all instance structures
-				 * associated with masterPtr (NULL means
-				 * end of list). */
+				 * associated with masterPtr (NULL means end
+				 * of list). */
 } BitmapInstance;
 
 /*
  * The type record for bitmap images:
  */
 
-static int		GetByte _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan));
-static int		ImgBmapCreate _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static int		GetByte(Tcl_Channel chan);
+static int		ImgBmapCreate(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    char *name, int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
 			    Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageMaster master,
-			    ClientData *clientDataPtr));
-static ClientData	ImgBmapGet _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		ImgBmapDisplay _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Display *display, Drawable drawable, 
+			    ClientData *clientDataPtr);
+static ClientData	ImgBmapGet(Tk_Window tkwin, ClientData clientData);
+static void		ImgBmapDisplay(ClientData clientData,
+			    Display *display, Drawable drawable,
 			    int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height,
-			    int drawableX, int drawableY));
-static void		ImgBmapFree _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Display *display));
-static void		ImgBmapDelete _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int		ImgBmapPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    int drawableX, int drawableY);
+static void		ImgBmapFree(ClientData clientData, Display *display);
+static void		ImgBmapDelete(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ImgBmapPostscript(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo, int x, int y,
-			    int width, int height, int prepass));
+			    int width, int height, int prepass);
 
 Tk_ImageType tkBitmapImageType = {
     "bitmap",			/* name */
@@ -103,7 +98,7 @@ Tk_ImageType tkBitmapImageType = {
     ImgBmapFree,		/* freeProc */
     ImgBmapDelete,		/* deleteProc */
     ImgBmapPostscript,		/* postscriptProc */
-    (Tk_ImageType *) NULL	/* nextPtr */
+    NULL			/* nextPtr */
 };
 
 /*
@@ -111,28 +106,25 @@ Tk_ImageType tkBitmapImageType = {
  */
 
 static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_UID, "-background", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_UID, "-background", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, bgUid), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-data", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, dataString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-file", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, fileString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_UID, "-foreground", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-data", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, dataString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-file", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, fileString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_UID, "-foreground", NULL, NULL,
 	"#000000", Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, fgUid), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-maskdata", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, maskDataString),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-maskfile", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, maskFileString),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-maskdata", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, maskDataString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-maskfile", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, maskFileString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * The following data structure is used to describe the state of
- * parsing a bitmap file or string.  It is used for communication
- * between TkGetBitmapData and NextBitmapWord.
+ * The following data structure is used to describe the state of parsing a
+ * bitmap file or string. It is used for communication between TkGetBitmapData
+ * and NextBitmapWord.
  */
 
 #define MAX_WORD_LENGTH 100
@@ -140,8 +132,8 @@ typedef struct ParseInfo {
     char *string;		/* Next character of string data for bitmap,
 				 * or NULL if bitmap is being read from
 				 * file. */
-    Tcl_Channel chan;		/* File containing bitmap data, or NULL
-				 * if no file. */
+    Tcl_Channel chan;		/* File containing bitmap data, or NULL if no
+				 * file. */
     char word[MAX_WORD_LENGTH+1];
 				/* Current word of bitmap data, NULL
 				 * terminated. */
@@ -152,24 +144,20 @@ typedef struct ParseInfo {
  * Prototypes for procedures used only locally in this file:
  */
 
-static int		ImgBmapCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		ImgBmapConfigureInstance _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    BitmapInstance *instancePtr));
-static int		ImgBmapConfigureMaster _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    BitmapMaster *masterPtr, int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
-			    int flags));
-static int		NextBitmapWord _ANSI_ARGS_((ParseInfo *parseInfoPtr));
+static int		ImgBmapCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		ImgBmapConfigureInstance(BitmapInstance *instancePtr);
+static int		ImgBmapConfigureMaster(BitmapMaster *masterPtr,
+			    int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags);
+static int		NextBitmapWord(ParseInfo *parseInfoPtr);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * ImgBmapCreate --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the Tk image code to create "test"
- *	images.
+ *	This procedure is called by the Tk image code to create "test" images.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -182,18 +170,18 @@ static int		NextBitmapWord _ANSI_ARGS_((ParseInfo *parseInfoPtr));
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-ImgBmapCreate(interp, name, argc, argv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for application containing
+ImgBmapCreate(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for application containing
 				 * image. */
-    char *name;			/* Name to use for image. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[];	/* Argument objects for options (doesn't
+    char *name,			/* Name to use for image. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[],	/* Argument objects for options (doesn't
 				 * include image name or type). */
-    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
-    Tk_ImageMaster master;	/* Token for image, to be used by us in
-				 * later callbacks. */
-    ClientData *clientDataPtr;	/* Store manager's token for image here;
-				 * it will be returned in later callbacks. */
+    Tk_ImageType *typePtr,	/* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
+    Tk_ImageMaster master,	/* Token for image, to be used by us in later
+				 * callbacks. */
+    ClientData *clientDataPtr)	/* Store manager's token for image here; it
+				 * will be returned in later callbacks. */
 {
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr;
 
@@ -226,28 +214,28 @@ ImgBmapCreate(interp, name, argc, argv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
  * ImgBmapConfigureMaster --
  *
  *	This procedure is called when a bitmap image is created or
- *	reconfigured.  It process configuration options and resets
- *	any instances of the image.
+ *	reconfigured. It process configuration options and resets any
+ *	instances of the image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If TCL_ERROR is returned then
- *	an error message is left in the masterPtr->interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the masterPtr->interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Existing instances of the image will be redisplayed to match
- *	the new configuration options.
+ *	Existing instances of the image will be redisplayed to match the new
+ *	configuration options.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ImgBmapConfigureMaster(masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    BitmapMaster *masterPtr;	/* Pointer to data structure describing
+ImgBmapConfigureMaster(
+    BitmapMaster *masterPtr,	/* Pointer to data structure describing
 				 * overall bitmap image to (reconfigure). */
-    int objc;			/* Number of entries in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Pairs of configuration options for image. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget,
-				 * such as TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of entries in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Pairs of configuration options for image. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget, such
+				 * as TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY. */
 {
     BitmapInstance *instancePtr;
     int maskWidth, maskHeight, dummy1, dummy2;
@@ -267,8 +255,8 @@ ImgBmapConfigureMaster(masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     ckfree((char *) argv);
 
     /*
-     * Parse the bitmap and/or mask to create binary data.  Make sure that
-     * the bitmap and mask have the same dimensions.
+     * Parse the bitmap and/or mask to create binary data. Make sure that the
+     * bitmap and mask have the same dimensions.
      */
 
     if (masterPtr->data != NULL) {
@@ -311,9 +299,9 @@ ImgBmapConfigureMaster(masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Cycle through all of the instances of this image, regenerating
-     * the information for each instance.  Then force the image to be
-     * redisplayed everywhere that it is used.
+     * Cycle through all of the instances of this image, regenerating the
+     * information for each instance. Then force the image to be redisplayed
+     * everywhere that it is used.
      */
 
     for (instancePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; instancePtr != NULL;
@@ -330,24 +318,24 @@ ImgBmapConfigureMaster(masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * ImgBmapConfigureInstance --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to create displaying information for
- *	a bitmap image instance based on the configuration information
- *	in the master.  It is invoked both when new instances are
- *	created and when the master is reconfigured.
+ *	This procedure is called to create displaying information for a bitmap
+ *	image instance based on the configuration information in the master.
+ *	It is invoked both when new instances are created and when the master
+ *	is reconfigured.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Generates errors via Tcl_BackgroundError if there are problems
- *	in setting up the instance.
+ *	Generates errors via Tcl_BackgroundError if there are problems in
+ *	setting up the instance.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ImgBmapConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
-    BitmapInstance *instancePtr;	/* Instance to reconfigure. */
+ImgBmapConfigureInstance(
+    BitmapInstance *instancePtr)/* Instance to reconfigure. */
 {
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr = instancePtr->masterPtr;
     XColor *colorPtr;
@@ -357,8 +345,8 @@ ImgBmapConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
     Pixmap oldBitmap, oldMask;
 
     /*
-     * For each of the options in masterPtr, translate the string
-     * form into an internal form appropriate for instancePtr.
+     * For each of the options in masterPtr, translate the string form into an
+     * internal form appropriate for instancePtr.
      */
 
     if (*masterPtr->bgUid != 0) {
@@ -385,9 +373,6 @@ ImgBmapConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
     }
     instancePtr->fg = colorPtr;
 
-    oldMask = instancePtr->mask;
-    instancePtr->mask = None;
-
     /*
      * Careful: We have to allocate new Pixmaps before deleting the old ones.
      * Otherwise, The XID allocator will always return the same XID for the
@@ -447,11 +432,10 @@ ImgBmapConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
     instancePtr->gc = gc;
     return;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     /*
-     * An error occurred: clear the graphics context in the instance to
-     * make it clear that this instance cannot be displayed.  Then report
-     * the error.
+     * An error occurred: clear the graphics context in the instance to make
+     * it clear that this instance cannot be displayed. Then report the error.
      */
 
     if (instancePtr->gc != None) {
@@ -469,17 +453,16 @@ ImgBmapConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
  *
  * TkGetBitmapData --
  *
- *	Given a file name or ASCII string, this procedure parses the
- *	file or string contents to produce binary data for a bitmap.
+ *	Given a file name or ASCII string, this procedure parses the file or
+ *	string contents to produce binary data for a bitmap.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If the bitmap description was parsed successfully then the
- *	return value is a malloc-ed array containing the bitmap data.
- *	The dimensions of the data are stored in *widthPtr and
- *	*heightPtr.  *hotXPtr and *hotYPtr are set to the bitmap
- *	hotspot if one is defined, otherwise they are set to -1, -1.
- *	If an error occurred, NULL is returned and an error message is
- *	left in the interp's result.
+ *	If the bitmap description was parsed successfully then the return
+ *	value is a malloc-ed array containing the bitmap data. The dimensions
+ *	of the data are stored in *widthPtr and *heightPtr. *hotXPtr and
+ *	*hotYPtr are set to the bitmap hotspot if one is defined, otherwise
+ *	they are set to -1, -1. If an error occurred, NULL is returned and an
+ *	error message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	A bitmap is created.
@@ -488,18 +471,15 @@ ImgBmapConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
  */
 
 char *
-TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
-	hotXPtr, hotYPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* For reporting errors, or NULL. */
-    char *string;			/* String describing bitmap.  May
-					 * be NULL. */
-    char *fileName;			/* Name of file containing bitmap
-					 * description.  Used only if string
-					 * is NULL.  Must not be NULL if
-					 * string is NULL. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;		/* Dimensions of bitmap get returned
-					 * here. */
-    int *hotXPtr, *hotYPtr;		/* Position of hot spot or -1,-1. */
+TkGetBitmapData(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For reporting errors, or NULL. */
+    char *string,		/* String describing bitmap. May be NULL. */
+    char *fileName,		/* Name of file containing bitmap description.
+				 * Used only if string is NULL. Must not be
+				 * NULL if string is NULL. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+				/* Dimensions of bitmap get returned here. */
+    int *hotXPtr, int *hotYPtr)	/* Position of hot spot or -1,-1. */
 {
     int width, height, numBytes, hotX, hotY;
     CONST char *expandedFileName;
@@ -510,11 +490,11 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
 
     pi.string = string;
     if (string == NULL) {
-        if ((interp != NULL) && Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
-            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't get bitmap data from a file in a",
-                    " safe interpreter", (char *) NULL);
-            return NULL;
-        }
+	if ((interp != NULL) && Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't get bitmap data from a file in a",
+		    " safe interpreter", NULL);
+	    return NULL;
+	}
 	expandedFileName = Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, fileName, &buffer);
 	if (expandedFileName == NULL) {
 	    return NULL;
@@ -525,29 +505,28 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
 	    if (interp != NULL) {
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "couldn't read bitmap file \"",
-			fileName, "\": ", Tcl_PosixError(interp),
-			(char *) NULL);
+			fileName, "\": ", Tcl_PosixError(interp), NULL);
 	    }
 	    return NULL;
 	}
-	
-        if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, pi.chan, "-translation", "binary")
+
+	if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, pi.chan, "-translation", "binary")
 		!= TCL_OK) {
-            return NULL;
-        }
-        if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, pi.chan, "-encoding", "binary")
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, pi.chan, "-encoding", "binary")
 		!= TCL_OK) {
-            return NULL;
-        }
+	    return NULL;
+	}
     } else {
 	pi.chan = NULL;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Parse the lines that define the dimensions of the bitmap,
-     * plus the first line that defines the bitmap data (it declares
-     * the name of a data variable but doesn't include any actual
-     * data).  These lines look something like the following:
+     * Parse the lines that define the dimensions of the bitmap, plus the
+     * first line that defines the bitmap data (it declares the name of a data
+     * variable but doesn't include any actual data). These lines look
+     * something like the following:
      *
      *		#define foo_width 16
      *		#define foo_height 16
@@ -555,9 +534,9 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
      *		#define foo_y_hot 3
      *		static char foo_bits[] = {
      *
-     * The x_hot and y_hot lines may or may not be present.  It's
-     * important to check for "char" in the last line, in order to
-     * reject old X10-style bitmaps that used shorts.
+     * The x_hot and y_hot lines may or may not be present. It's important to
+     * check for "char" in the last line, in order to reject old X10-style
+     * bitmaps that used shorts.
      */
 
     width = 0;
@@ -616,19 +595,18 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
 	} else if ((pi.word[0] == '{') && (pi.word[1] == 0)) {
 	    if (interp != NULL) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "format error in bitmap data; ",
-			"looks like it's an obsolete X10 bitmap file",
-			(char *) NULL);
+			"looks like it's an obsolete X10 bitmap file", NULL);
 	    }
 	    goto errorCleanup;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Now we've read everything but the data.  Allocate an array
-     * and read in the data.
+     * Now we've read everything but the data. Allocate an array and read in
+     * the data.
      */
 
-    getData:
+  getData:
     if ((width <= 0) || (height <= 0)) {
 	goto error;
     }
@@ -645,7 +623,7 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
     }
 
     /*
-     * All done.  Clean up and return.
+     * All done. Clean up and return.
      */
 
     if (pi.chan != NULL) {
@@ -657,12 +635,12 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
     *hotYPtr = hotY;
     return data;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     if (interp != NULL) {
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, "format error in bitmap data", TCL_STATIC);
     }
-    
-    errorCleanup:
+
+  errorCleanup:
     if (data != NULL) {
 	ckfree(data);
     }
@@ -677,13 +655,13 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
  *
  * NextBitmapWord --
  *
- *	This procedure retrieves the next word of information (stuff
- *	between commas or white space) from a bitmap description.
+ *	This procedure retrieves the next word of information (stuff between
+ *	commas or white space) from a bitmap description.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns TCL_OK if all went well.  In this case the next word,
- *	and its length, will be availble in *parseInfoPtr.  If the end
- *	of the bitmap description was reached then TCL_ERROR is returned.
+ *	Returns TCL_OK if all went well. In this case the next word, and its
+ *	length, will be availble in *parseInfoPtr. If the end of the bitmap
+ *	description was reached then TCL_ERROR is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -692,9 +670,9 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
  */
 
 static int
-NextBitmapWord(parseInfoPtr)
-    ParseInfo *parseInfoPtr;		/* Describes what we're reading
-					 * and where we are in it. */
+NextBitmapWord(
+    ParseInfo *parseInfoPtr)	/* Describes what we're reading and where we
+				 * are in it. */
 {
     char *src, *dst;
     int c;
@@ -746,9 +724,9 @@ NextBitmapWord(parseInfoPtr)
  *
  * ImgBmapCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to an image managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to an image managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -760,15 +738,15 @@ NextBitmapWord(parseInfoPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-ImgBmapCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about the image master. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+ImgBmapCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about the image master. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    static CONST char *bmapOptions[] = {"cget", "configure", (char *) NULL};
+    static CONST char *bmapOptions[] = {"cget", "configure", NULL};
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr = (BitmapMaster *) clientData;
-    int code, index;
+    int index;
 
     if (objc < 2) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
@@ -779,33 +757,29 @@ ImgBmapCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     switch (index) {
-      case 0: {
+    case 0: /* cget */
 	if (objc != 3) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	return Tk_ConfigureValue(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), configSpecs,
 		(char *) masterPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 0);
-      }
-      case 1: {
+    case 1: /* configure */
 	if (objc == 2) {
-	    code = Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-		    configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr, (char *) NULL, 0);
+	    return Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
+		    configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr, NULL, 0);
 	} else if (objc == 3) {
-	    code = Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
+	    return Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
 		    configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr,
 		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 0);
 	} else {
-	    code = ImgBmapConfigureMaster(masterPtr, objc-2, objv+2,
+	    return ImgBmapConfigureMaster(masterPtr, objc-2, objv+2,
 		    TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
 	}
-	return code;
-      }
-      default: {
-	panic("bad const entries to bmapOptions in ImgBmapCmd");
-      }
+    default:
+	Tcl_Panic("bad const entries to bmapOptions in ImgBmapCmd");
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
-    return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -813,33 +787,32 @@ ImgBmapCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ImgBmapGet --
  *
- *	This procedure is called for each use of a bitmap image in a
- *	widget.
+ *	This procedure is called for each use of a bitmap image in a widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the instance, which is passed
- *	back to us in calls to ImgBmapDisplay and ImgBmapFree.
+ *	The return value is a token for the instance, which is passed back to
+ *	us in calls to ImgBmapDisplay and ImgBmapFree.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A data structure is set up for the instance (or, an existing
- *	instance is re-used for the new one).
+ *	A data structure is set up for the instance (or, an existing instance
+ *	is re-used for the new one).
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static ClientData
-ImgBmapGet(tkwin, masterData)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which the instance will be
+ImgBmapGet(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which the instance will be
 				 * used. */
-    ClientData masterData;	/* Pointer to our master structure for the
+    ClientData masterData)	/* Pointer to our master structure for the
 				 * image. */
 {
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr = (BitmapMaster *) masterData;
     BitmapInstance *instancePtr;
 
     /*
-     * See if there is already an instance for this window.  If so
-     * then just re-use it.
+     * See if there is already an instance for this window. If so then just
+     * re-use it.
      */
 
     for (instancePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; instancePtr != NULL;
@@ -851,8 +824,8 @@ ImgBmapGet(tkwin, masterData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The image isn't already in use in this window.  Make a new
-     * instance of the image.
+     * The image isn't already in use in this window. Make a new instance of
+     * the image.
      */
 
     instancePtr = (BitmapInstance *) ckalloc(sizeof(BitmapInstance));
@@ -897,24 +870,24 @@ ImgBmapGet(tkwin, masterData)
  */
 
 static void
-ImgBmapDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
-	height, drawableX, drawableY)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to BitmapInstance structure for
-				 * for instance to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display on which to draw image. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw image. */
-    int imageX, imageY;		/* Upper-left corner of region within image
-				 * to draw. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of region within image to draw. */
-    int drawableX, drawableY;	/* Coordinates within drawable that
-				 * correspond to imageX and imageY. */
+ImgBmapDisplay(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to BitmapInstance structure for
+				 * instance to be displayed. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw image. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw image. */
+    int imageX, int imageY,	/* Upper-left corner of region within image to
+				 * draw. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of region within image to draw. */
+    int drawableX, int drawableY)
+				/* Coordinates within drawable that correspond
+				 * to imageX and imageY. */
 {
     BitmapInstance *instancePtr = (BitmapInstance *) clientData;
     int masking;
 
     /*
-     * If there's no graphics context, it means that an error occurred
-     * while creating the image instance so it can't be displayed.
+     * If there's no graphics context, it means that an error occurred while
+     * creating the image instance so it can't be displayed.
      */
 
     if (instancePtr->gc == None) {
@@ -922,10 +895,9 @@ ImgBmapDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
     }
 
     /*
-     * If masking is in effect, must modify the mask origin within
-     * the graphics context to line up with the image's origin.
-     * Then draw the image and reset the clip origin, if there's
-     * a mask.
+     * If masking is in effect, must modify the mask origin within the
+     * graphics context to line up with the image's origin. Then draw the
+     * image and reset the clip origin, if there's a mask.
      */
 
     masking = (instancePtr->mask != None) || (instancePtr->bg == NULL);
@@ -946,8 +918,8 @@ ImgBmapDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
  *
  * ImgBmapFree --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when a widget ceases to use a
- *	particular instance of an image.
+ *	This procedure is called when a widget ceases to use a particular
+ *	instance of an image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -959,10 +931,10 @@ ImgBmapDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
  */
 
 static void
-ImgBmapFree(clientData, display)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to BitmapInstance structure for
-				 * for instance to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing window that used image. */
+ImgBmapFree(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to BitmapInstance structure for
+				 * instance to be displayed. */
+    Display *display)		/* Display containing window that used image. */
 {
     BitmapInstance *instancePtr = (BitmapInstance *) clientData;
     BitmapInstance *prevPtr;
@@ -973,8 +945,8 @@ ImgBmapFree(clientData, display)
     }
 
     /*
-     * There are no more uses of the image within this widget.  Free
-     * the instance structure.
+     * There are no more uses of the image within this widget. Free the
+     * instance structure.
      */
 
     if (instancePtr->fg != NULL) {
@@ -1009,8 +981,8 @@ ImgBmapFree(clientData, display)
  *
  * ImgBmapDelete --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the image code to delete the
- *	master structure for an image.
+ *	This procedure is called by the image code to delete the master
+ *	structure for an image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1022,14 +994,14 @@ ImgBmapFree(clientData, display)
  */
 
 static void
-ImgBmapDelete(masterData)
-    ClientData masterData;	/* Pointer to BitmapMaster structure for
-				 * image.  Must not have any more instances. */
+ImgBmapDelete(
+    ClientData masterData)	/* Pointer to BitmapMaster structure for
+				 * image. Must not have any more instances. */
 {
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr = (BitmapMaster *) masterData;
 
     if (masterPtr->instancePtr != NULL) {
-	panic("tried to delete bitmap image when instances still exist");
+	Tcl_Panic("tried to delete bitmap image when instances still exist");
     }
     masterPtr->tkMaster = NULL;
     if (masterPtr->imageCmd != NULL) {
@@ -1041,7 +1013,7 @@ ImgBmapDelete(masterData)
     if (masterPtr->maskData != NULL) {
 	ckfree(masterPtr->maskData);
     }
-    Tk_FreeOptions(configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr, (Display *) NULL, 0);
+    Tk_FreeOptions(configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr, NULL, 0);
     ckfree((char *) masterPtr);
 }
 
@@ -1050,8 +1022,8 @@ ImgBmapDelete(masterData)
  *
  * ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when the image command for an image
- *	is deleted.  It deletes the image.
+ *	This procedure is invoked when the image command for an image is
+ *	deleted. It deletes the image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1063,8 +1035,8 @@ ImgBmapDelete(masterData)
  */
 
 static void
-ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to BitmapMaster structure for
+ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to BitmapMaster structure for
 				 * image. */
 {
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr = (BitmapMaster *) clientData;
@@ -1092,8 +1064,8 @@ ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static int
-GetByte(chan)
-    Tcl_Channel chan;	/* The channel we read from. */
+GetByte(
+    Tcl_Channel chan)	/* The channel we read from. */
 {
     char buffer;
     int size;
@@ -1112,29 +1084,28 @@ GetByte(chan)
  *
  * ImgBmapPsImagemask --
  *
- *	This procedure generates postscript suitable for rendering a
- *      single bitmap of an image.  A single bitmap image might contain both
- *      a foreground and a background bitmap.  This routine is called once
- *      for each such bitmap in a bitmap image.
+ *	This procedure generates postscript suitable for rendering a single
+ *	bitmap of an image. A single bitmap image might contain both a
+ *	foreground and a background bitmap. This routine is called once for
+ *	each such bitmap in a bitmap image.
  *
- *      Prior to invoking this routine, the following setup has occurred:
+ *	Prior to invoking this routine, the following setup has occurred:
  *
- *	   1.  The postscript foreground color has been set to the color
- *	       used to render the bitmap.
+ *	   1.  The postscript foreground color has been set to the color used
+ *	       to render the bitmap.
  *
- *	   2.  The origin of the postscript coordinate system is set to
- *             the lower left corner of the bitmap.
+ *	   2.  The origin of the postscript coordinate system is set to the
+ *	       lower left corner of the bitmap.
  *
- *	   3.  The postscript coordinate system has been scaled so that
- *	       the entire bitmap is one unit squared.
+ *	   3.  The postscript coordinate system has been scaled so that the
+ *	       entire bitmap is one unit squared.
  *
- * 	Some postscript implementations cannot handle bitmap strings
- *	longer than about 60k characters.  If the bitmap data is that big
- *	or bigger, then we render it by splitting it into several smaller
- *	bitmaps.
+ *	Some postscript implementations cannot handle bitmap strings longer
+ *	than about 60k characters. If the bitmap data is that big or bigger,
+ *	then we render it by splitting it into several smaller bitmaps.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns TCL_OK on success.  Returns TCL_ERROR and leaves and error
+ *	Returns TCL_OK on success. Returns TCL_ERROR and leaves and error
  *	message in interp->result if there is a problem.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -1144,22 +1115,23 @@ GetByte(chan)
  */
 
 static int
-ImgBmapPsImagemask(interp, width, height, data)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;       /* Append postscript to this interpreter */
-    int width, height;        /* Width and height of the bitmap in pixels */
-    char *data;               /* Data for the bitmap */
+ImgBmapPsImagemask(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Append postscript to this interpreter */
+    int width, int height,	/* Width and height of the bitmap in pixels */
+    char *data)			/* Data for the bitmap */
 {
     int i, j, nBytePerRow;
     char buffer[200];
 
-    /* 
+    /*
      * The bit order of bitmaps in Tk is the opposite of the bit order that
-     * postscript uses.  (In Tk, the least significant bit is on the right
-     * side of the bitmap and in postscript the least significant bit is shown
-     * on the left.)  The following array is used to reverse the order of bits
+     * postscript uses. (In Tk, the least significant bit is on the right side
+     * of the bitmap and in postscript the least significant bit is shown on
+     * the left.) The following array is used to reverse the order of bits
      * within a byte so that the bits will be in the order postscript expects.
      */
-    static CONST unsigned char bit_reverse[] = {
+
+    static const unsigned char bit_reverse[] = {
        0, 128, 64, 192, 32, 160,  96, 224, 16, 144, 80, 208, 48, 176, 112, 240,
        8, 136, 72, 200, 40, 168, 104, 232, 24, 152, 88, 216, 56, 184, 120, 248,
        4, 132, 68, 196, 36, 164, 100, 228, 20, 148, 84, 212, 52, 180, 116, 244,
@@ -1184,17 +1156,21 @@ ImgBmapPsImagemask(interp, width, height, data)
 		"larger than 60000 pixels", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
+
     sprintf(buffer, "0 0 moveto %d %d true [%d 0 0 %d 0 %d] {<\n",
-      width, height, width, -height, height);
+	    width, height, width, -height, height);
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+
     nBytePerRow = (width+7)/8;
     for(i=0; i<height; i++){
-      for(j=0; j<nBytePerRow; j++){
-        sprintf(buffer, " %02x", bit_reverse[0xff & data[i*nBytePerRow + j]]);
-        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
-      }
-      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", NULL);
+	for(j=0; j<nBytePerRow; j++){
+	    sprintf(buffer, " %02x",
+		    bit_reverse[0xff & data[i*nBytePerRow + j]]);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+	}
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", NULL);
     }
+
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ">} imagemask \n", NULL);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -1207,9 +1183,10 @@ ImgBmapPsImagemask(interp, width, height, data)
  *	This procedure generates postscript for rendering a bitmap image.
  *
  * Results:
+
  *	On success, this routine writes postscript code into interp->result
- *      and returns TCL_OK  TCL_ERROR is returned and an error
- *      message is left in interp->result if anything goes wrong.
+ *	and returns TCL_OK TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left
+ *	in interp->result if anything goes wrong.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1218,13 +1195,13 @@ ImgBmapPsImagemask(interp, width, height, data)
  */
 
 static int
-ImgBmapPostscript(clientData, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height,
-	prepass)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo;
-    int x, y, width, height, prepass;
+ImgBmapPostscript(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo,
+    int x, int y, int width, int height,
+    int prepass)
 {
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr = (BitmapMaster *) clientData;
     char buffer[200];
@@ -1234,38 +1211,42 @@ ImgBmapPostscript(clientData, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height,
     }
 
     /*
-     * There is nothing to do for bitmaps with zero width or height
+     * There is nothing to do for bitmaps with zero width or height.
      */
-    if( width<=0 || height<=0 || masterPtr->width<=0 || masterPtr->height<=0 ){
+
+    if (width<=0 || height<=0 || masterPtr->width<=0 || masterPtr->height<= 0){
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
     /*
      * Translate the origin of the coordinate system to be the lower-left
-     * corner of the bitmap and adjust the scale of the coordinate system
-     * so that entire bitmap covers one square unit of the page.
-     * The calling function put a "gsave" into the postscript and
-     * will add a "grestore" at after this routine returns, so it is safe
-     * to make whatever changes are necessary here.
+     * corner of the bitmap and adjust the scale of the coordinate system so
+     * that entire bitmap covers one square unit of the page. The calling
+     * function put a "gsave" into the postscript and will add a "grestore" at
+     * after this routine returns, so it is safe to make whatever changes are
+     * necessary here.
      */
-    if( x!=0 || y!=0 ){
+
+    if (x!=0 || y!=0) {
 	sprintf(buffer, "%d %d moveto\n", x, y);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     }
-    if( width!=1 || height!=1 ){
+    if (width!=1 || height!=1) {
 	sprintf(buffer, "%d %d scale\n", width, height);
  	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Color the background, if there is one.  This step is skipped if the
-     * background is transparent.  If the background is not transparent and
+     * Color the background, if there is one. This step is skipped if the
+     * background is transparent. If the background is not transparent and
      * there is no background mask, then color the complete rectangle that
-     * encloses the bitmap.  If there is a background mask, then only apply
+     * encloses the bitmap. If there is a background mask, then only apply
      * color to the bits specified by the mask.
      */
+
     if ((masterPtr->bgUid != NULL) && (masterPtr->bgUid[0] != '\000')) {
 	XColor color;
+
 	TkParseColor(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_Colormap(tkwin), masterPtr->bgUid,
 		&color);
 	if (Tk_PostscriptColor(interp, psinfo, &color) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1273,10 +1254,10 @@ ImgBmapPostscript(clientData, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height,
 	}
 	if (masterPtr->maskData == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-		"0 0 moveto 1 0 rlineto 0 1 rlineto -1 0 rlineto "
-		"closepath fill\n", NULL);
+		    "0 0 moveto 1 0 rlineto 0 1 rlineto -1 0 rlineto ",
+		    "closepath fill\n", NULL);
 	} else if (ImgBmapPsImagemask(interp, masterPtr->width,
-		     masterPtr->height, masterPtr->maskData) != TCL_OK) {
+		masterPtr->height, masterPtr->maskData) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     }
@@ -1284,8 +1265,10 @@ ImgBmapPostscript(clientData, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height,
     /*
      * Draw the bitmap foreground, assuming there is one.
      */
-    if ( (masterPtr->fgUid != NULL) && (masterPtr->data != NULL) ) {
+
+    if ((masterPtr->fgUid != NULL) && (masterPtr->data != NULL)) {
 	XColor color;
+
 	TkParseColor(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_Colormap(tkwin), masterPtr->fgUid,
 		&color);
 	if (Tk_PostscriptColor(interp, psinfo, &color) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1298,3 +1281,11 @@ ImgBmapPostscript(clientData, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height,
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkImgGIF.c b/generic/tkImgGIF.c
index d46f9f9..e576559 100644
--- a/generic/tkImgGIF.c
+++ b/generic/tkImgGIF.c
@@ -1,20 +1,20 @@
 /*
  * tkImgGIF.c --
  *
- *	A photo image file handler for GIF files. Reads 87a and 89a GIF
- *	files. At present, there only is a file write function. GIF images
- *	may be read using the -data option of the photo image.  The data may be
- *	given as a binary string in a Tcl_Obj or by representing
- *	the data as BASE64 encoded ascii.  Derived from the giftoppm code
- *	found in the pbmplus package and tkImgFmtPPM.c in the tk4.0b2
- *	distribution.
+ *	A photo image file handler for GIF files. Reads 87a and 89a GIF files.
+ *	At present, there only is a file write function. GIF images may be
+ *	read using the -data option of the photo image. The data may be given
+ *	as a binary string in a Tcl_Obj or by representing the data as BASE64
+ *	encoded ascii. Derived from the giftoppm code found in the pbmplus
+ *	package and tkImgFmtPPM.c in the tk4.0b2 distribution.
  *
  * Copyright (c) Reed Wade (wade@cs.utk.edu), University of Tennessee
  * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1997 Australian National University
+ * Copyright (c) 2005 Donal K. Fellows
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
  * This file also contains code from the giftoppm program, which is
  * copyrighted as follows:
@@ -25,18 +25,22 @@
  * |   and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby	|
  * |   granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all	|
  * |   copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission	|
- * |   notice appear in supporting documentation.  This software is	|
+ * |   notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is	|
  * |   provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.		|
- * +-------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ * +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ *
+ * This file also contains code from miGIF. See lower down in file for the
+ * applicable copyright notice for that portion.
  */
 
+#include "tkInt.h"
+
 /*
- * GIF's are represented as data in base64 format.
- * base64 strings consist of 4 6-bit characters -> 3 8 bit bytes.
- * A-Z, a-z, 0-9, + and / represent the 64 values (in order).
- * '=' is a trailing padding char when the un-encoded data is not a
- * multiple of 3 bytes.  We'll ignore white space when encountered.
- * Any other invalid character is treated as an EOF
+ * GIF's are represented as data in either binary or base64 format. base64
+ * strings consist of 4 6-bit characters -> 3 8 bit bytes. A-Z, a-z, 0-9, +
+ * and / represent the 64 values (in order). '=' is a trailing padding char
+ * when the un-encoded data is not a multiple of 3 bytes. We'll ignore white
+ * space when encountered. Any other invalid character is treated as an EOF
  */
 
 #define GIF_SPECIAL	(256)
@@ -46,77 +50,86 @@
 #define GIF_DONE	(GIF_SPECIAL+4)
 
 /*
- * structure to "mimic" FILE for Mread, so we can look like fread.
- * The decoder state keeps track of which byte we are about to read,
- * or EOF.
+ * structure to "mimic" FILE for Mread, so we can look like fread. The decoder
+ * state keeps track of which byte we are about to read, or EOF.
  */
 
 typedef struct mFile {
     unsigned char *data;	/* mmencoded source string */
-    int length;			/* Length of string in bytes */
     int c;			/* bits left over from previous character */
     int state;			/* decoder state (0-4 or GIF_DONE) */
+    int length;			/* Total amount of bytes in data */
 } MFile;
 
-#include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
-
 /*
  * Non-ASCII encoding support:
- * Most data in a GIF image is binary and is treated as such.  However,
- * a few key bits are stashed in ASCII.  If we try to compare those pieces
- * to the char they represent, it will fail on any non-ASCII (eg, EBCDIC)
- * system.  To accomodate these systems, we test against the numeric value
- * of the ASCII characters instead of the characters themselves.  This is
- * encoding independant.
+ * Most data in a GIF image is binary and is treated as such. However, a few
+ * key bits are stashed in ASCII. If we try to compare those pieces to the
+ * char they represent, it will fail on any non-ASCII (eg, EBCDIC) system. To
+ * accomodate these systems, we test against the numeric value of the ASCII
+ * characters instead of the characters themselves. This is encoding
+ * independant.
  */
 
-static CONST char GIF87a[] = {			/* ASCII GIF87a */
+static const char GIF87a[] = {			/* ASCII GIF87a */
     0x47, 0x49, 0x46, 0x38, 0x37, 0x61, 0x00
 };
-static CONST char GIF89a[] = {			/* ASCII GIF89a */
+static const char GIF89a[] = {			/* ASCII GIF89a */
     0x47, 0x49, 0x46, 0x38, 0x39, 0x61, 0x00
 };
-#  define GIF_TERMINATOR 0x3b			/* ASCII ; */
-#  define GIF_EXTENSION  0x21			/* ASCII ! */
-#  define GIF_START	 0x2c			/* ASCII , */
+#define GIF_TERMINATOR	0x3b			/* ASCII ; */
+#define GIF_EXTENSION	0x21			/* ASCII ! */
+#define GIF_START	0x2c			/* ASCII , */
 
 /*
- * 			 HACK ALERT!!  HACK ALERT!!  HACK ALERT!!
- * This code is hard-wired for reading from files.  In order to read
- * from a data stream, we'll trick fread so we can reuse the same code.
- * 0==from file; 1==from base64 encoded data; 2==from binary data
+ * Flags used to notify that we've got inline data instead of a file to read
+ * from. Note that we need to figure out which type of inline data we've got
+ * before handing off to the GIF reading code; this is done in StringReadGIF.
  */
 
-typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    int fromData;
-} ThreadSpecificData;
-static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
+#define INLINE_DATA_BINARY	((const char *) 0x01)
+#define INLINE_DATA_BASE64	((const char *) 0x02)
+
+/*
+ *		HACK ALERT!!  HACK ALERT!!  HACK ALERT!!
+ * This code is hard-wired for reading from files. In order to read from a
+ * data stream, we'll trick fread so we can reuse the same code. 0==from file;
+ * 1==from base64 encoded data; 2==from binary data
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    const char *fromData;
+    unsigned char workingBuffer[280];
+    struct {
+	int bytes;
+	int done;
+	unsigned int window;
+	int bitsInWindow;
+	unsigned char *c;
+    } reader;
+} GIFImageConfig;
 
 /*
  * The format record for the GIF file format:
  */
 
-static int	FileMatchGIF _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan, CONST char *fileName,
-		    Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
-		    Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static int	FileReadGIF  _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-		    Tcl_Channel chan, CONST char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format,
-		    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY,
-		    int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY));
-static int	StringMatchGIF _ANSI_ARGS_(( Tcl_Obj *dataObj,
-		    Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
-		    Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static int	StringReadGIF _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *dataObj,
-		    Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle,
-		    int destX, int destY, int width, int height,
-		    int srcX, int srcY));
-static int 	FileWriteGIF _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,  
-		    CONST char *filename, Tcl_Obj *format,
-		    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
-static int	CommonWriteGIF _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-		    Tcl_Channel handle, Tcl_Obj *format,
-		    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
+static int		FileMatchGIF(Tcl_Channel chan, const char *fileName,
+			    Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static int		FileReadGIF(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan,
+			    const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format,
+			    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY,
+			    int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY);
+static int		StringMatchGIF(Tcl_Obj *dataObj, Tcl_Obj *format,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static int		StringReadGIF(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *dataObj,
+			    Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle,
+			    int destX, int destY, int width, int height,
+			    int srcX, int srcY);
+static int		FileWriteGIF(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *filename,
+			    Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
+static int		CommonWriteGIF(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel handle,
+			    Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
 
 Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtGIF = {
     "gif",		/* name */
@@ -138,54 +151,53 @@ Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtGIF = {
 #define CM_ALPHA		3
 #define MAX_LWZ_BITS		12
 #define LM_to_uint(a,b)		(((b)<<8)|(a))
-#define ReadOK(file,buffer,len)	(Fread(buffer, len, 1, file) != 0)
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for local procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for local functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static int		DoExtension _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan, int label,
-			    int *transparent));
-static int		GetCode _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan, int code_size,
-			    int flag));
-static int		GetDataBlock _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan,
-			    unsigned char *buf));
-static int		ReadColorMap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan, int number,
-			    unsigned char buffer[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4]));
-static int		ReadGIFHeader _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
-static int		ReadImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *imagePtr, Tcl_Channel chan,
-			    int len, int rows,
-			    unsigned char cmap[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4],
-			    int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY,
-			    int interlace, int transparent));
+static int		DoExtension(GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+			    Tcl_Channel chan, int label, unsigned char *buffer,
+			    int *transparent);
+static int		GetCode(Tcl_Channel chan, int code_size, int flag,
+			    GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr);
+static int		GetDataBlock(GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+			    Tcl_Channel chan, unsigned char *buf);
+static int		ReadColorMap(GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+			    Tcl_Channel chan, int number,
+			    unsigned char buffer[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4]);
+static int		ReadGIFHeader(GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+			    Tcl_Channel chan, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+static int		ReadImage(GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, unsigned char *imagePtr,
+			    Tcl_Channel chan, int len, int rows,
+			    unsigned char cmap[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4], int srcX,
+			    int srcY, int interlace, int transparent);
 
 /*
  * these are for the BASE64 image reader code only
  */
 
-static int		Fread _ANSI_ARGS_((unsigned char *dst, size_t size,
-			    size_t count, Tcl_Channel chan));
-static int		Mread _ANSI_ARGS_((unsigned char *dst, size_t size,
-			    size_t count, MFile *handle));
-static int		Mgetc _ANSI_ARGS_((MFile *handle));
-static int		char64 _ANSI_ARGS_((int c));
-static void		mInit _ANSI_ARGS_((unsigned char *string,
-			    int length, MFile *handle));
-
+static int		Fread(GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr, unsigned char *dst,
+			    size_t size, size_t count, Tcl_Channel chan);
+static int		Mread(unsigned char *dst, size_t size, size_t count,
+			    MFile *handle);
+static int		Mgetc(MFile *handle);
+static int		char64(int c);
+static void		mInit(unsigned char *string, MFile *handle,
+			    int length);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * FileMatchGIF --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the photo image type to see if
- *	a file contains image data in GIF format.
+ *	This function is invoked by the photo image type to see if a file
+ *	contains image data in GIF format.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if the first characters in file f look
- *	like GIF data, and 0 otherwise.
+ *	The return value is 1 if the first characters in file f look like GIF
+ *	data, and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The access position in f may change.
@@ -194,16 +206,19 @@ static void		mInit _ANSI_ARGS_((unsigned char *string,
  */
 
 static int
-FileMatchGIF(chan, fileName, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
-    Tcl_Channel chan;		/* The image file, open for reading. */
-    CONST char *fileName;	/* The name of the image file. */
-    Tcl_Obj *format;		/* User-specified format object, or NULL. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are
-				 * returned here if the file is a valid
-				 * raw GIF file. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* not used */
+FileMatchGIF(
+    Tcl_Channel chan,		/* The image file, open for reading. */
+    const char *fileName,	/* The name of the image file. */
+    Tcl_Obj *format,		/* User-specified format object, or NULL. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+				/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+				 * here if the file is a valid raw GIF file. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* not used */
 {
-	return ReadGIFHeader(chan, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    GIFImageConfig gifConf;
+
+    memset(&gifConf, 0, sizeof(GIFImageConfig));
+    return ReadGIFHeader(&gifConf, chan, widthPtr, heightPtr);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -211,88 +226,108 @@ FileMatchGIF(chan, fileName, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
  *
  * FileReadGIF --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the photo image type to read
- *	GIF format data from a file and write it into a given
- *	photo image.
+ *	This function is called by the photo image type to read GIF format
+ *	data from a file and write it into a given photo image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL completion code.  If TCL_ERROR is returned
- *	then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard TCL completion code. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The access position in file f is changed, and new data is
- *	added to the image given by imageHandle.
+ *	The access position in file f is changed, and new data is added to the
+ *	image given by imageHandle.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-FileReadGIF(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
-	width, height, srcX, srcY)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
-    Tcl_Channel chan;		/* The image file, open for reading. */
-    CONST char *fileName;	/* The name of the image file. */
-    Tcl_Obj *format;		/* User-specified format object, or NULL. */
-    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle;	/* The photo image to write into. */
-    int destX, destY;		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel in
-				 * photo image to be written to. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of block of photo image to
-				 * be written to. */
-    int srcX, srcY;		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used
-				 * in image being read. */
+FileReadGIF(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
+    Tcl_Channel chan,		/* The image file, open for reading. */
+    const char *fileName,	/* The name of the image file. */
+    Tcl_Obj *format,		/* User-specified format object, or NULL. */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle,	/* The photo image to write into. */
+    int destX, int destY,	/* Coordinates of top-left pixel in photo
+				 * image to be written to. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of block of photo image to be
+				 * written to. */
+    int srcX, int srcY)		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used in
+				 * image being read. */
 {
     int fileWidth, fileHeight, imageWidth, imageHeight;
-    int nBytes, index = 0, argc = 0, i;
+    int nBytes, index = 0, argc = 0, i, result = TCL_ERROR;
     Tcl_Obj **objv;
-    Tk_PhotoImageBlock block;
     unsigned char buf[100];
     unsigned char *trashBuffer = NULL;
     int bitPixel;
     unsigned char colorMap[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4];
     int transparent = -1;
-    static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
-	"-index",	NULL
+    static const char *optionStrings[] = {
+	"-index", NULL
     };
+    GIFImageConfig gifConf, *gifConfPtr = &gifConf;
+
+    /*
+     * Decode the magic used to convey when we're sourcing data from a string
+     * source and not a file.
+     */
+
+    memset(gifConfPtr, 0, sizeof(GIFImageConfig));
+    if (fileName == INLINE_DATA_BINARY || fileName == INLINE_DATA_BASE64) {
+	gifConfPtr->fromData = fileName;
+	fileName = "inline data";
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Parse the format string to get options.
+     */
 
     if (format && Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, format,
 	    &argc, &objv) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     for (i = 1; i < argc; i++) {
-	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings, "option name", 0,
-		&nBytes) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings, "option name",
+		0, &nBytes) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (i == (argc-1)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no value given for \"",
-		    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], NULL),
-		    "\" option", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), "\" option", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[++i], &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     }
-    if (!ReadGIFHeader(chan, &fileWidth, &fileHeight)) {
-    	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "couldn't read GIF header from file \"",
+
+    /*
+     * Read the GIF file header and check for some sanity.
+     */
+
+    if (!ReadGIFHeader(gifConfPtr, chan, &fileWidth, &fileHeight)) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "couldn't read GIF header from file \"",
 		fileName, "\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     if ((fileWidth <= 0) || (fileHeight <= 0)) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "GIF image file \"", fileName,
-		"\" has dimension(s) <= 0", (char *) NULL);
+		"\" has dimension(s) <= 0", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    if (Fread(buf, 1, 3, chan) != 3) {
+    /*
+     * Get the general colormap information.
+     */
+
+    if (Fread(gifConfPtr, buf, 1, 3, chan) != 3) {
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
-    bitPixel = 2<<(buf[0]&0x07);
+    bitPixel = 2 << (buf[0] & 0x07);
 
     if (BitSet(buf[0], LOCALCOLORMAP)) {	/* Global Colormap */
-	if (!ReadColorMap(chan, bitPixel, colorMap)) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error reading color map",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	if (!ReadColorMap(gifConfPtr, chan, bitPixel, colorMap)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error reading color map", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     }
@@ -308,85 +343,87 @@ FileReadGIF(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    Tk_PhotoExpand(imageHandle, destX + width, destY + height);
+    /*
+     * Make sure we have enough space in the photo image to hold the data from
+     * the GIF.
+     */
+
+    if (Tk_PhotoExpand(interp, imageHandle,
+	    destX + width, destY + height) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
 
-    block.width = width;
-    block.height = height;
-    block.pixelSize = 4;
-    block.pitch = block.pixelSize * block.width;
-    block.offset[0] = 0;
-    block.offset[1] = 1;
-    block.offset[2] = 2;
-    block.offset[3] = 3;
-    block.pixelPtr = NULL;
+    /*
+     * Search for the frame from the GIF to display.
+     */
 
     while (1) {
-	if (Fread(buf, 1, 1, chan) != 1) {
+	if (Fread(gifConfPtr, buf, 1, 1, chan) != 1) {
 	    /*
 	     * Premature end of image.
 	     */
 
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"premature end of image data for this index",
-                             (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		    "premature end of image data for this index", NULL);
 	    goto error;
 	}
 
-	if (buf[0] == GIF_TERMINATOR) {
-	    /*
-	     * GIF terminator.
-	     */
-
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"no image data for this index",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	switch (buf[0]) {
+	case GIF_TERMINATOR:
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no image data for this index", NULL);
 	    goto error;
-	}
 
-	if (buf[0] == GIF_EXTENSION) {
+	case GIF_EXTENSION:
 	    /*
 	     * This is a GIF extension.
 	     */
 
-	    if (Fread(buf, 1, 1, chan) != 1) {
+	    if (Fread(gifConfPtr, buf, 1, 1, chan) != 1) {
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp,
 			"error reading extension function code in GIF image",
 			TCL_STATIC);
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (DoExtension(chan, buf[0], &transparent) < 0) {
+	    if (DoExtension(gifConfPtr, chan, buf[0],
+		    gifConfPtr->workingBuffer, &transparent) < 0) {
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "error reading extension in GIF image",
 			TCL_STATIC);
 		goto error;
 	    }
 	    continue;
-	}
-
-	if (buf[0] != GIF_START) {
+	case GIF_START:
+	    if (Fread(gifConfPtr, buf, 1, 9, chan) != 9) {
+		Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+			"couldn't read left/top/width/height in GIF image",
+			TCL_STATIC);
+		goto error;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	default:
 	    /*
 	     * Not a valid start character; ignore it.
 	     */
-	    continue;
-	}
 
-	if (Fread(buf, 1, 9, chan) != 9) {
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
-		    "couldn't read left/top/width/height in GIF image",
-		    TCL_STATIC);
-	    goto error;
+	    continue;
 	}
 
-	imageWidth = LM_to_uint(buf[4],buf[5]);
-	imageHeight = LM_to_uint(buf[6],buf[7]);
+	/*
+	 * We've read the header for a GIF frame. Work out what we are going
+	 * to do about it.
+	 */
 
-	bitPixel = 1<<((buf[8]&0x07)+1);
+	imageWidth = LM_to_uint(buf[4], buf[5]);
+	imageHeight = LM_to_uint(buf[6], buf[7]);
+	bitPixel = 1 << ((buf[8] & 0x07) + 1);
 
 	if (index--) {
 	    /*
-	     * This is not the image we want to read: skip it.
+	     * This is not the GIF frame we want to read: skip it.
 	     */
+
 	    if (BitSet(buf[8], LOCALCOLORMAP)) {
-		if (!ReadColorMap(chan, bitPixel, colorMap)) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-			    "error reading color map", (char *) NULL);
+		if (!ReadColorMap(gifConfPtr, chan, bitPixel, colorMap)) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error reading color map", NULL);
 		    goto error;
 		}
 	    }
@@ -394,113 +431,126 @@ FileReadGIF(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
 	    /*
 	     * If we've not yet allocated a trash buffer, do so now.
 	     */
+
 	    if (trashBuffer == NULL) {
 		nBytes = fileWidth * fileHeight * 3;
-		trashBuffer =
-		    (unsigned char *) ckalloc((unsigned int) nBytes);
+		trashBuffer = (unsigned char *) ckalloc((unsigned) nBytes);
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Slurp!  Process the data for this image and stuff it in
-	     * a trash buffer.
+	     * Slurp! Process the data for this image and stuff it in a trash
+	     * buffer.
 	     *
-	     * Yes, it might be more efficient here to *not* store the
-	     * data (we're just going to throw it away later).
-	     * However, I elected to implement it this way for good
-	     * reasons.  First, I wanted to avoid duplicating the
-	     * (fairly complex) LWZ decoder in ReadImage.  Fine, you
-	     * say, why didn't you just modify it to allow the use of
-	     * a NULL specifier for the output buffer?  I tried that,
-	     * but it negatively impacted the performance of what I
-	     * think will be the common case: reading the first image
-	     * in the file.  Rather than marginally improve the speed
-	     * of the less frequent case, I chose to maintain high
-	     * performance for the common case.
+	     * Yes, it might be more efficient here to *not* store the data
+	     * (we're just going to throw it away later). However, I elected
+	     * to implement it this way for good reasons. First, I wanted to
+	     * avoid duplicating the (fairly complex) LWZ decoder in
+	     * ReadImage. Fine, you say, why didn't you just modify it to
+	     * allow the use of a NULL specifier for the output buffer? I
+	     * tried that, but it negatively impacted the performance of what
+	     * I think will be the common case: reading the first image in the
+	     * file. Rather than marginally improve the speed of the less
+	     * frequent case, I chose to maintain high performance for the
+	     * common case.
 	     */
-	    if (ReadImage(interp, (char *) trashBuffer, chan, imageWidth,
-		    imageHeight, colorMap, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, -1) != TCL_OK) {
+
+	    if (ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, trashBuffer, chan, imageWidth,
+		    imageHeight, colorMap, 0, 0, 0, -1) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
 	    continue;
 	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-	if (BitSet(buf[8], LOCALCOLORMAP)) {
-	    if (!ReadColorMap(chan, bitPixel, colorMap)) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error reading color map", 
-			    (char *) NULL);
-		    goto error;
-	    }
-	}
+    /*
+     * Found the frame we want to read. Next, check for a local color map for
+     * this frame.
+     */
 
-	index = LM_to_uint(buf[0],buf[1]);
-	srcX -= index;
-	if (srcX<0) {
-	    destX -= srcX; width += srcX;
-	    srcX = 0;
+    if (BitSet(buf[8], LOCALCOLORMAP)) {
+	if (!ReadColorMap(gifConfPtr, chan, bitPixel, colorMap)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error reading color map", NULL);
+	    goto error;
 	}
+    }
 
-	if (width > imageWidth) {
-	    width = imageWidth;
-	}
+    /*
+     * Extract the location within the overall visible image to put the data
+     * in this frame, together with the size of this frame.
+     */
 
-	index = LM_to_uint(buf[2],buf[3]);
-	srcY -= index;
-	if (index > srcY) {
-	    destY -= srcY; height += srcY;
-	    srcY = 0;
-	}
-	if (height > imageHeight) {
-	    height = imageHeight;
-	}
+    index = LM_to_uint(buf[0], buf[1]);
+    srcX -= index;
+    if (srcX<0) {
+	destX -= srcX; width += srcX;
+	srcX = 0;
+    }
 
-	if ((width <= 0) || (height <= 0)) {
-	    block.pixelPtr = 0;
-	    goto noerror;
-	}
+    if (width > imageWidth) {
+	width = imageWidth;
+    }
+
+    index = LM_to_uint(buf[2], buf[3]);
+    srcY -= index;
+    if (index > srcY) {
+	destY -= srcY; height += srcY;
+	srcY = 0;
+    }
+    if (height > imageHeight) {
+	height = imageHeight;
+    }
+
+    if ((width > 0) && (height > 0)) {
+	Tk_PhotoImageBlock block;
+
+	/*
+	 * Read the data and put it into the photo buffer for display by the
+	 * general image machinery.
+	 */
 
 	block.width = width;
 	block.height = height;
 	block.pixelSize = (transparent>=0) ? 4 : 3;
+	block.offset[0] = 0;
+	block.offset[1] = 1;
+	block.offset[2] = 2;
 	block.offset[3] = (transparent>=0) ? 3 : 0;
 	block.pitch = block.pixelSize * imageWidth;
 	nBytes = block.pitch * imageHeight;
 	block.pixelPtr = (unsigned char *) ckalloc((unsigned) nBytes);
 
-	if (ReadImage(interp, (char *) block.pixelPtr, chan, imageWidth,
-		imageHeight, colorMap, fileWidth, fileHeight, srcX, srcY,
-		BitSet(buf[8], INTERLACE), transparent) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, block.pixelPtr, chan, imageWidth,
+		imageHeight, colorMap, srcX, srcY, BitSet(buf[8],INTERLACE),
+		transparent) != TCL_OK) {
+	    ckfree((char *) block.pixelPtr);
 	    goto error;
 	}
-	break;
+	if (Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, imageHandle, &block, destX, destY,
+		width, height, TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET) != TCL_OK) {
+	    ckfree((char *) block.pixelPtr);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	ckfree((char *) block.pixelPtr);
     }
 
-    Tk_PhotoPutBlock(imageHandle, &block, destX, destY, width, height,
-	    TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET);
-
-    noerror:
     /*
-     * If a trash buffer has been allocated, free it now.
+     * We've successfully read the GIF frame (or there was nothing to read,
+     * which suits as well). We're done.
      */
-    if (trashBuffer != NULL) {
-	ckfree((char *)trashBuffer);
-    }
-    if (block.pixelPtr) {
-	ckfree((char *) block.pixelPtr);
-    }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, tkImgFmtGIF.name, (char *) NULL);
-    return TCL_OK;
 
-    error:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, tkImgFmtGIF.name, NULL);
+    result = TCL_OK;
+
+  error:
     /*
      * If a trash buffer has been allocated, free it now.
      */
+
     if (trashBuffer != NULL) {
-	ckfree((char *)trashBuffer);
-    }
-    if (block.pixelPtr) {
-	ckfree((char *) block.pixelPtr);
+	ckfree((char *) trashBuffer);
     }
-    return TCL_ERROR;
+    return result;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -508,26 +558,26 @@ FileReadGIF(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
  *
  * StringMatchGIF --
  *
- *  This procedure is invoked by the photo image type to see if
- *  an object contains image data in GIF format.
+ *	This function is invoked by the photo image type to see if an object
+ *	contains image data in GIF format.
  *
  * Results:
- *  The return value is 1 if the first characters in the data are
- *  like GIF data, and 0 otherwise.
+ *	The return value is 1 if the first characters in the data are like GIF
+ *	data, and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *  the size of the image is placed in widthPre and heightPtr.
+ *	The size of the image is placed in widthPtr and heightPtr.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-StringMatchGIF(dataObj, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
-    Tcl_Obj *dataObj;		/* the object containing the image data */
-    Tcl_Obj *format;		/* the image format object, or NULL */
-    int *widthPtr;		/* where to put the string width */
-    int *heightPtr;		/* where to put the string height */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* not used */
+StringMatchGIF(
+    Tcl_Obj *dataObj,		/* the object containing the image data */
+    Tcl_Obj *format,		/* the image format object, or NULL */
+    int *widthPtr,		/* where to put the string width */
+    int *heightPtr,		/* where to put the string height */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* not used */
 {
     unsigned char *data, header[10];
     int got, length;
@@ -538,6 +588,7 @@ StringMatchGIF(dataObj, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
     /*
      * Header is a minimum of 10 bytes.
      */
+
     if (length < 10) {
 	return 0;
     }
@@ -546,97 +597,99 @@ StringMatchGIF(dataObj, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
      * Check whether the data is Base64 encoded.
      */
 
-    if ((strncmp(GIF87a, (char *) data, 6) != 0) && 
+    if ((strncmp(GIF87a, (char *) data, 6) != 0) &&
 	    (strncmp(GIF89a, (char *) data, 6) != 0)) {
 	/*
 	 * Try interpreting the data as Base64 encoded
 	 */
-	mInit((unsigned char *) data, length, &handle);
+
+	mInit((unsigned char *) data, &handle, length);
 	got = Mread(header, 10, 1, &handle);
-	if (got != 10
-		|| ((strncmp(GIF87a, (char *) header, 6) != 0)
+	if (got != 10 ||
+		((strncmp(GIF87a, (char *) header, 6) != 0)
 		&& (strncmp(GIF89a, (char *) header, 6) != 0))) {
 	    return 0;
 	}
     } else {
-	memcpy((VOID *) header, (VOID *) data, 10);
+	memcpy(header, data, 10);
     }
-    *widthPtr = LM_to_uint(header[6],header[7]);
-    *heightPtr = LM_to_uint(header[8],header[9]);
+    *widthPtr = LM_to_uint(header[6], header[7]);
+    *heightPtr = LM_to_uint(header[8], header[9]);
     return 1;
 }
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * StringReadGif -- --
+ * StringReadGIF --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the photo image type to read
- *	GIF format data from an object, optionally base64 encoded, 
- *	and give it to the photo image.
+ *	This function is called by the photo image type to read GIF format
+ *	data from an object, optionally base64 encoded, and give it to the
+ *	photo image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL completion code.  If TCL_ERROR is returned
- *	then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard TCL completion code. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	new data is added to the image given by imageHandle.  This
- *	procedure calls FileReadGif by redefining the operation of
- *	fprintf temporarily.
+ *	New data is added to the image given by imageHandle. This function
+ *	calls FileReadGIF by redefining the operation of fprintf temporarily.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-StringReadGIF(interp, dataObj, format, imageHandle,
-	destX, destY, width, height, srcX, srcY)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* interpreter for reporting errors in */
-    Tcl_Obj *dataObj;		/* object containing the image */
-    Tcl_Obj *format;		/* format object, or NULL */
-    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle;	/* the image to write this data into */
-    int destX, destY;		/* The rectangular region of the  */
-    int width, height;		/*   image to copy */
-    int srcX, srcY;
+StringReadGIF(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* interpreter for reporting errors in */
+    Tcl_Obj *dataObj,		/* object containing the image */
+    Tcl_Obj *format,		/* format object, or NULL */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle,	/* the image to write this data into */
+    int destX, int destY,	/* The rectangular region of the */
+    int width, int height,	/* image to copy */
+    int srcX, int srcY)
 {
-    int result, length;
-    MFile handle;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
-    Tcl_Channel dataSrc;
-    char *data;
+    MFile handle, *hdlPtr = &handle;
+    int length;
+    const char *xferFormat;
+    unsigned char *data = Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(dataObj, &length);
+
+    mInit(data, hdlPtr, length);
 
     /*
-     * Check whether the data is Base64 encoded
+     * Check whether the data is Base64 encoded by doing a character-by-
+     * charcter comparison with the binary-format headers; BASE64-encoded
+     * never matches (matching the other way is harder because of potential
+     * padding of the BASE64 data).
      */
-    data = (char *) Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(dataObj, &length);
-    if ((strncmp(GIF87a, data, 6) != 0) && (strncmp(GIF89a, data, 6) != 0)) {
-	mInit((unsigned char *)data, length, &handle);
-	tsdPtr->fromData = 1;
-	dataSrc = (Tcl_Channel) &handle;
+
+    if (strncmp(GIF87a, (char *) data, 6)
+	    && strncmp(GIF89a, (char *) data, 6)) {
+	xferFormat = INLINE_DATA_BASE64;
     } else {
-	tsdPtr->fromData = 2;
-	mInit((unsigned char *)data, length, &handle);
-	dataSrc = (Tcl_Channel) &handle;
+	xferFormat = INLINE_DATA_BINARY;
     }
-    result = FileReadGIF(interp, dataSrc, "inline data",
-	    format, imageHandle, destX, destY, width, height, srcX, srcY);
-    tsdPtr->fromData = 0;
-    return result;
-}
 
+    /*
+     * Fall through to the file reader now that we have a correctly-configured
+     * pseudo-channel to pull the data from.
+     */
+
+    return FileReadGIF(interp, (Tcl_Channel) hdlPtr, xferFormat, format,
+	    imageHandle, destX, destY, width, height, srcX, srcY);
+}
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * ReadGIFHeader --
  *
- *	This procedure reads the GIF header from the beginning of a
- *	GIF file and returns the dimensions of the image.
+ *	This function reads the GIF header from the beginning of a GIF file
+ *	and returns the dimensions of the image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if file "f" appears to start with
- *	a valid GIF header, 0 otherwise.  If the header is valid,
- *	then *widthPtr and *heightPtr are modified to hold the
- *	dimensions of the image.
+ *	The return value is 1 if file "f" appears to start with a valid GIF
+ *	header, 0 otherwise. If the header is valid, then *widthPtr and
+ *	*heightPtr are modified to hold the dimensions of the image.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The access position in f advances.
@@ -645,68 +698,70 @@ StringReadGIF(interp, dataObj, format, imageHandle,
  */
 
 static int
-ReadGIFHeader(chan, widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    Tcl_Channel chan;		/* Image file to read the header from */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are
-				 * returned here. */
+ReadGIFHeader(
+    GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+    Tcl_Channel chan,		/* Image file to read the header from */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+				/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+				 * here. */
 {
     unsigned char buf[7];
 
-    if ((Fread(buf, 1, 6, chan) != 6)
+    if ((Fread(gifConfPtr, buf, 1, 6, chan) != 6)
 	    || ((strncmp(GIF87a, (char *) buf, 6) != 0)
 	    && (strncmp(GIF89a, (char *) buf, 6) != 0))) {
 	return 0;
     }
 
-    if (Fread(buf, 1, 4, chan) != 4) {
+    if (Fread(gifConfPtr, buf, 1, 4, chan) != 4) {
 	return 0;
     }
 
-    *widthPtr = LM_to_uint(buf[0],buf[1]);
-    *heightPtr = LM_to_uint(buf[2],buf[3]);
+    *widthPtr = LM_to_uint(buf[0], buf[1]);
+    *heightPtr = LM_to_uint(buf[2], buf[3]);
     return 1;
 }
-
+
 /*
  *-----------------------------------------------------------------
- * The code below is copied from the giftoppm program and modified
- * just slightly.
+ * The code below is copied from the giftoppm program and modified just
+ * slightly.
  *-----------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ReadColorMap(chan, number, buffer)
-    Tcl_Channel chan;
-    int number;
-    unsigned char buffer[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4];
+ReadColorMap(
+    GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+    Tcl_Channel chan,
+    int number,
+    unsigned char buffer[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4])
 {
     int i;
     unsigned char rgb[3];
 
     for (i = 0; i < number; ++i) {
-	if (! ReadOK(chan, rgb, sizeof(rgb))) {
+	if (Fread(gifConfPtr, rgb, sizeof(rgb), 1, chan) <= 0) {
 	    return 0;
 	}
 
 	if (buffer) {
-	    buffer[i][CM_RED] = rgb[0] ;
-	    buffer[i][CM_GREEN] = rgb[1] ;
-	    buffer[i][CM_BLUE] = rgb[2] ;
-	    buffer[i][CM_ALPHA] = 255 ;
+	    buffer[i][CM_RED] = rgb[0];
+	    buffer[i][CM_GREEN] = rgb[1];
+	    buffer[i][CM_BLUE] = rgb[2];
+	    buffer[i][CM_ALPHA] = 255;
 	}
     }
     return 1;
 }
-
-
-
+
 static int
-DoExtension(chan, label, transparent)
-    Tcl_Channel chan;
-    int label;
-    int *transparent;
+DoExtension(
+    GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+    Tcl_Channel chan,
+    int label,
+    unsigned char *buf,
+    int *transparent)
 {
-    static unsigned char buf[256];
     int count;
 
     switch (label) {
@@ -718,12 +773,12 @@ DoExtension(chan, label, transparent)
 
     case 0xfe:		/* Comment Extension */
 	do {
-	    count = GetDataBlock(chan, (unsigned char*) buf);
+	    count = GetDataBlock(gifConfPtr, chan, buf);
 	} while (count > 0);
 	return count;
 
     case 0xf9:		/* Graphic Control Extension */
-	count = GetDataBlock(chan, (unsigned char*) buf);
+	count = GetDataBlock(gifConfPtr, chan, buf);
 	if (count < 0) {
 	    return 1;
 	}
@@ -732,53 +787,52 @@ DoExtension(chan, label, transparent)
 	}
 
 	do {
-	    count = GetDataBlock(chan, (unsigned char*) buf);
+	    count = GetDataBlock(gifConfPtr, chan, buf);
 	} while (count > 0);
 	return count;
     }
 
     do {
-	count = GetDataBlock(chan, (unsigned char*) buf);
+	count = GetDataBlock(gifConfPtr, chan, buf);
     } while (count > 0);
     return count;
 }
-
+
 static int
-GetDataBlock(chan, buf)
-    Tcl_Channel chan;
-    unsigned char *buf;
+GetDataBlock(
+    GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+    Tcl_Channel chan,
+    unsigned char *buf)
 {
     unsigned char count;
 
-    if (! ReadOK(chan, &count,1)) {
+    if (Fread(gifConfPtr, &count, 1, 1, chan) <= 0) {
 	return -1;
     }
 
-    if ((count != 0) && (! ReadOK(chan, buf, count))) {
+    if ((count != 0) && (Fread(gifConfPtr, buf, count, 1, chan) <= 0)) {
 	return -1;
     }
 
     return count;
 }
-
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * ReadImage --
  *
- *	Process a GIF image from a given source, with a given height,
- *	width, transparency, etc.
+ *	Process a GIF image from a given source, with a given height, width,
+ *	transparency, etc.
  *
  *	This code is based on the code found in the ImageMagick GIF decoder,
  *	which is (c) 2000 ImageMagick Studio.
  *
  *	Some thoughts on our implementation:
- *	It sure would be nice if ReadImage didn't take 11 parameters!  I think
+ *	It sure would be nice if ReadImage didn't take 11 parameters! I think
  *	that if we were smarter, we could avoid doing that.
  *
- *	Possible further optimizations:  we could pull the GetCode function
+ *	Possible further optimizations: we could pull the GetCode function
  *	directly into ReadImage, which would improve our speed.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -791,37 +845,36 @@ GetDataBlock(chan, buf)
  */
 
 static int
-ReadImage(interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
-	width, height, srcX, srcY, interlace, transparent)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    char *imagePtr;
-    Tcl_Channel chan;
-    int len, rows;
-    unsigned char cmap[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4];
-    int width, height;
-    int srcX, srcY;
-    int interlace;
-    int transparent;
+ReadImage(
+    GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    unsigned char *imagePtr,
+    Tcl_Channel chan,
+    int len, int rows,
+    unsigned char cmap[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4],
+    int srcX, int srcY,
+    int interlace,
+    int transparent)
 {
     unsigned char initialCodeSize;
-    int v;
     int xpos = 0, ypos = 0, pass = 0, i;
-    register char *pixelPtr;
-    static CONST int interlaceStep[] = { 8, 8, 4, 2 };
-    static CONST int interlaceStart[] = { 0, 4, 2, 1 };
+    register unsigned char *pixelPtr;
+    static const int interlaceStep[] = { 8, 8, 4, 2 };
+    static const int interlaceStart[] = { 0, 4, 2, 1 };
     unsigned short prefix[(1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS)];
-    unsigned char  append[(1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS)];
-    unsigned char  stack[(1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS)*2];
+    unsigned char append[(1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS)];
+    unsigned char stack[(1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS)*2];
     register unsigned char *top;
     int codeSize, clearCode, inCode, endCode, oldCode, maxCode;
-    int code, firstCode;
+    int code, firstCode, v;
 
     /*
-     *  Initialize the decoder
+     * Initialize the decoder
      */
-    if (! ReadOK(chan, &initialCodeSize, 1))  {
+
+    if (Fread(gifConfPtr, &initialCodeSize, 1, 1, chan) <= 0) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error reading GIF image: ",
-		Tcl_PosixError(interp), (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_PosixError(interp), NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -848,46 +901,49 @@ ReadImage(interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
      * code size	size of the next code to retrieve
      * max code		next available table position
      */
+
     clearCode = 1 << (int) initialCodeSize;
     endCode = clearCode + 1;
     codeSize = (int) initialCodeSize + 1;
     maxCode = clearCode + 2;
     oldCode = -1;
     firstCode = -1;
-    
-    memset((void *)prefix, 0, (1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS) * sizeof(short));
-    memset((void *)append, 0, (1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS) * sizeof(char));
+
+    memset(prefix, 0, (1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS) * sizeof(short));
+    memset(append, 0, (1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS) * sizeof(char));
     for (i = 0; i < clearCode; i++) {
 	append[i] = i;
     }
     top = stack;
 
-    GetCode(chan, 0, 1);
+    GetCode(chan, 0, 1, gifConfPtr);
 
     /*
      * Read until we finish the image
      */
+
     for (i = 0, ypos = 0; i < rows; i++) {
 	for (xpos = 0; xpos < len; ) {
-
 	    if (top == stack) {
 		/*
-		 * Bummer -- our stack is empty.  Now we have to work!
+		 * Bummer - our stack is empty. Now we have to work!
 		 */
-		code = GetCode(chan, codeSize, 0);
+
+		code = GetCode(chan, codeSize, 0, gifConfPtr);
 		if (code < 0) {
 		    return TCL_OK;
 		}
 
 		if (code > maxCode || code == endCode) {
 		    /*
-		     * If we're doing things right, we should never
-		     * receive a code that is greater than our current
-		     * maximum code.  If we do, bail, because our decoder
-		     * does not yet have that code set up.
+		     * If we're doing things right, we should never receive a
+		     * code that is greater than our current maximum code. If
+		     * we do, bail, because our decoder does not yet have that
+		     * code set up.
 		     *
 		     * If the code is the magic endCode value, quit.
 		     */
+
 		    return TCL_OK;
 		}
 
@@ -895,44 +951,48 @@ ReadImage(interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
 		    /*
 		     * Reset the decoder.
 		     */
+
 		    codeSize = initialCodeSize + 1;
 		    maxCode = clearCode + 2;
 		    oldCode = -1;
 		    continue;
 		}
-		
+
 		if (oldCode == -1) {
 		    /*
-		     * Last pass reset the decoder, so the first code we
-		     * see must be a singleton.  Seed the stack with it,
-		     * and set up the old/first code pointers for
-		     * insertion into the string table.  We can't just
-		     * roll this into the clearCode test above, because
-		     * at that point we have not yet read the next code.
+		     * Last pass reset the decoder, so the first code we see
+		     * must be a singleton. Seed the stack with it, and set up
+		     * the old/first code pointers for insertion into the
+		     * string table. We can't just roll this into the
+		     * clearCode test above, because at that point we have not
+		     * yet read the next code.
 		     */
+
 		    *top++ = append[code];
 		    oldCode = code;
 		    firstCode = code;
 		    continue;
 		}
-		
+
 		inCode = code;
 
 		if (code == maxCode) {
 		    /*
 		     * maxCode is always one bigger than our highest assigned
-		     * code.  If the code we see is equal to maxCode, then
-		     * we are about to add a new string to the table. ???
+		     * code. If the code we see is equal to maxCode, then we
+		     * are about to add a new string to the table. ???
 		     */
+
 		    *top++ = firstCode;
 		    code = oldCode;
 		}
 
 		while (code > clearCode) {
 		    /*
-		     * Populate the stack by tracing the string in the
-		     * string table from its tail to its head
+		     * Populate the stack by tracing the string in the string
+		     * table from its tail to its head
 		     */
+
 		    *top++ = append[code];
 		    code = prefix[code];
 		}
@@ -942,6 +1002,7 @@ ReadImage(interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
 		 * If there's no more room in our string table, quit.
 		 * Otherwise, add a new string to the table
 		 */
+
 		if (maxCode >= (1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS)) {
 		    return TCL_OK;
 		}
@@ -949,21 +1010,24 @@ ReadImage(interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
 		/*
 		 * Push the head of the string onto the stack.
 		 */
+
 		*top++ = firstCode;
 
 		/*
 		 * Add a new string to the string table
 		 */
+
 		prefix[maxCode] = oldCode;
 		append[maxCode] = firstCode;
 		maxCode++;
 
 		/*
-		 * maxCode tells us the maximum code value we can accept.
-		 * If we see that we need more bits to represent it than
-		 * we are requesting from the unpacker, we need to increase
-		 * the number we ask for.
+		 * maxCode tells us the maximum code value we can accept. If
+		 * we see that we need more bits to represent it than we are
+		 * requesting from the unpacker, we need to increase the
+		 * number we ask for.
 		 */
+
 		if ((maxCode >= (1 << codeSize))
 			&& (maxCode < (1<<MAX_LWZ_BITS))) {
 		    codeSize++;
@@ -974,16 +1038,18 @@ ReadImage(interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
 	    /*
 	     * Pop the next color index off the stack.
 	     */
+
 	    v = *(--top);
 	    if (v < 0) {
 		return TCL_OK;
 	    }
 
-	    /* 
+	    /*
 	     * If pixelPtr is null, we're skipping this image (presumably
-	     * there are more in the file and we will be called to read 
-	     * one of them later)
+	     * there are more in the file and we will be called to read one of
+	     * them later)
 	     */
+
 	    *pixelPtr++ = cmap[v][CM_RED];
 	    *pixelPtr++ = cmap[v][CM_GREEN];
 	    *pixelPtr++ = cmap[v][CM_BLUE];
@@ -995,8 +1061,9 @@ ReadImage(interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If interlacing, the next ypos is not just +1
+	 * If interlacing, the next ypos is not just +1.
 	 */
+
 	if (interlace) {
 	    ypos += interlaceStep[pass];
 	    while (ypos >= rows) {
@@ -1013,27 +1080,25 @@ ReadImage(interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * GetCode --
  *
- *	Extract the next compression code from the file.  In GIF's, the
- *	compression codes are between 3 and 12 bits long and are then
- *	packed into 8 bit bytes, left to right, for example:
+ *	Extract the next compression code from the file. In GIF's, the
+ *	compression codes are between 3 and 12 bits long and are then packed
+ *	into 8 bit bytes, left to right, for example:
  *		bbbaaaaa
  *		dcccccbb
  *		eeeedddd
  *		...
- *	We use a byte buffer read from the file and a sliding window
- *	to unpack the bytes.  Thanks to ImageMagick for the sliding window
- *	idea.
+ *	We use a byte buffer read from the file and a sliding window to unpack
+ *	the bytes. Thanks to ImageMagick for the sliding window idea.
  *	args:  chan	    the channel to read from
  *	       code_size    size of the code to extract
- *	       flag	    boolean indicating whether the extractor
- *			    should be reset or not
+ *	       flag	    boolean indicating whether the extractor should be
+ *			    reset or not
  *
  * Results:
  *	code		    the next compression code
@@ -1045,69 +1110,72 @@ ReadImage(interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
  */
 
 static int
-GetCode(chan, code_size, flag)
-    Tcl_Channel chan;
-    int code_size;
-    int flag;
+GetCode(
+    Tcl_Channel chan,
+    int code_size,
+    int flag,
+    GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr)
 {
-    static unsigned char buf[280];
-    static int bytes = 0, done;
-    static unsigned char *c;
-
-    static unsigned int window;
-    static int bitsInWindow = 0;
     int ret;
-    
+
     if (flag) {
 	/*
 	 * Initialize the decoder.
 	 */
-	bitsInWindow = 0;
-	bytes = 0;
-	window = 0;
-	done = 0;
-	c = NULL;
+
+	gifConfPtr->reader.bitsInWindow = 0;
+	gifConfPtr->reader.bytes = 0;
+	gifConfPtr->reader.window = 0;
+	gifConfPtr->reader.done = 0;
+	gifConfPtr->reader.c = NULL;
 	return 0;
     }
 
-    while (bitsInWindow < code_size) {
+    while (gifConfPtr->reader.bitsInWindow < code_size) {
 	/*
 	 * Not enough bits in our window to cover the request.
 	 */
-	if (done) {
+
+	if (gifConfPtr->reader.done) {
 	    return -1;
 	}
-	if (bytes == 0) {
+	if (gifConfPtr->reader.bytes == 0) {
 	    /*
 	     * Not enough bytes in our buffer to add to the window.
 	     */
-	    bytes = GetDataBlock(chan, buf);
-	    c = buf;
-	    if (bytes <= 0) {
-		done = 1;
+
+	    gifConfPtr->reader.bytes =
+		    GetDataBlock(gifConfPtr, chan, gifConfPtr->workingBuffer);
+	    gifConfPtr->reader.c = gifConfPtr->workingBuffer;
+	    if (gifConfPtr->reader.bytes <= 0) {
+		gifConfPtr->reader.done = 1;
 		break;
 	    }
 	}
+
 	/*
 	 * Tack another byte onto the window, see if that's enough.
 	 */
-	window += (*c) << bitsInWindow;
-	c++;
-	bitsInWindow += 8;
-	bytes--;
-    }
 
+	gifConfPtr->reader.window +=
+		(*gifConfPtr->reader.c) << gifConfPtr->reader.bitsInWindow;
+	gifConfPtr->reader.c++;
+	gifConfPtr->reader.bitsInWindow += 8;
+	gifConfPtr->reader.bytes--;
+    }
 
     /*
      * The next code will always be the last code_size bits of the window.
      */
-    ret = window & ((1 << code_size) - 1);
-    
+
+    ret = gifConfPtr->reader.window & ((1 << code_size) - 1);
+
     /*
      * Shift data in the window to put the next code at the end.
      */
-    window >>= code_size;
-    bitsInWindow -= code_size;
+
+    gifConfPtr->reader.window >>= code_size;
+    gifConfPtr->reader.bitsInWindow -= code_size;
     return ret;
 }
 
@@ -1116,27 +1184,27 @@ GetCode(chan, code_size, flag)
  *
  * Minit -- --
  *
- *  This procedure initializes a base64 decoder handle
+ *	This function initializes a base64 decoder handle
  *
  * Results:
- *  none
+ *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
- *  the base64 handle is initialized
+ *	The base64 handle is initialized
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-mInit(string, length, handle)
-    unsigned char *string;	/* string containing initial mmencoded data */
-    int length;			/* Length of string */
-    MFile *handle;		/* mmdecode "file" handle */
+mInit(
+    unsigned char *string,	/* string containing initial mmencoded data */
+    MFile *handle,		/* mmdecode "file" handle */
+    int length)			/* Number of bytes in string */
 {
     handle->data = string;
-    handle->length = length;
     handle->state = 0;
     handle->c = 0;
+    handle->length = length;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1144,9 +1212,9 @@ mInit(string, length, handle)
  *
  * Mread --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the GIF file reader as a 
- *	temporary replacement for "fread", to get GIF data out
- *	of a string (using Mgetc).
+ *	This function is invoked by the GIF file reader as a temporary
+ *	replacement for "fread", to get GIF data out of a string (using
+ *	Mgetc).
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is the number of characters "read"
@@ -1158,50 +1226,45 @@ mInit(string, length, handle)
  */
 
 static int
-Mread(dst, chunkSize, numChunks, handle)  
-    unsigned char *dst;	/* where to put the result */
-    size_t chunkSize;	/* size of each transfer */
-    size_t numChunks;	/* number of chunks */
-    MFile *handle;	/* mmdecode "file" handle */
+Mread(
+    unsigned char *dst,		/* where to put the result */
+    size_t chunkSize,		/* size of each transfer */
+    size_t numChunks,		/* number of chunks */
+    MFile *handle)		/* mmdecode "file" handle */
 {
     register int i, c;
     int count = chunkSize * numChunks;
 
-    for(i=0; i<count && (c=Mgetc(handle)) != GIF_DONE; i++) {
+    for (i=0; i<count && (c=Mgetc(handle)) != GIF_DONE; i++) {
 	*dst++ = c;
     }
     return i;
 }
-
-/*
- * get the next decoded character from an mmencode handle
- * This causes at least 1 character to be "read" from the encoded string
- */
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Mgetc --
  *
- *  This procedure decodes and returns the next byte from a base64
- *  encoded string.
+ *	This function gets the next decoded character from an mmencode handle.
+ *	This causes at least 1 character to be "read" from the encoded string.
  *
  * Results:
- *  The next byte (or GIF_DONE) is returned.
+ *	The next byte (or GIF_DONE) is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *  The base64 handle will change state.
+ *	The base64 handle will change state.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-Mgetc(handle)
-   MFile *handle;		/* Handle containing decoder data and state */
+Mgetc(
+    MFile *handle)		/* Handle containing decoder data and state */
 {
     int c;
-    int result = 0;		/* Initialization needed only to prevent
-				 * gcc compiler warning. */
+    int result = 0;		/* Initialization needed only to prevent gcc
+				 * compiler warning. */
 
     if (handle->state == GIF_DONE) {
 	return GIF_DONE;
@@ -1209,7 +1272,6 @@ Mgetc(handle)
 
     do {
 	if (handle->length-- <= 0) {
-	    handle->state = GIF_DONE;
 	    return GIF_DONE;
 	}
 	c = char64(*handle->data);
@@ -1247,21 +1309,22 @@ Mgetc(handle)
  *
  * char64 --
  *
- *	This procedure converts a base64 ascii character into its binary
- *	equivalent.  This code is a slightly modified version of the
- *	char64 proc in N. Borenstein's metamail decoder.
+ *	This function converts a base64 ascii character into its binary
+ *	equivalent. This code is a slightly modified version of the char64
+ *	function in N. Borenstein's metamail decoder.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The binary value, or an error code.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-char64(c)
-int c;
+char64(
+    int c)
 {
     switch(c) {
     case 'A': return 0;  case 'B': return 1;  case 'C': return 2;
@@ -1303,52 +1366,53 @@ int c;
  *
  * Fread --
  *
- *  This procedure calls either fread or Mread to read data
- *  from a file or a base64 encoded string.
+ *	This function calls either fread or Mread to read data from a file or
+ *	a base64 encoded string.
  *
- * Results: - same as fread
+ * Results: - same as POSIX fread() or Tcl Tcl_Read()
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-Fread(dst, hunk, count, chan)
-    unsigned char *dst;		/* where to put the result */
-    size_t hunk,count;		/* how many */
-    Tcl_Channel chan;
+Fread(
+    GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+    unsigned char *dst,		/* where to put the result */
+    size_t hunk, size_t count,	/* how many */
+    Tcl_Channel chan)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
-    MFile *handle;
-
-    switch (tsdPtr->fromData) {
-    case 1:
+    if (gifConfPtr->fromData == INLINE_DATA_BASE64) {
 	return Mread(dst, hunk, count, (MFile *) chan);
-    case 2:
-	handle = (MFile *) chan;
-	if (handle->length <= 0 || (size_t)handle->length < (size_t) (hunk * count)) {
+    }
+
+    if (gifConfPtr->fromData == INLINE_DATA_BINARY) {
+	MFile *handle = (MFile *) chan;
+
+	if (handle->length <= 0 || (size_t) handle->length < hunk*count) {
 	    return -1;
 	}
-	memcpy((VOID *)dst, (VOID *) handle->data, (size_t) (hunk * count));
+	memcpy(dst, handle->data, (size_t) (hunk * count));
 	handle->data += hunk * count;
-	handle->length -= hunk * count;
 	return (int)(hunk * count);
-    default:
-	return Tcl_Read(chan, (char *) dst, (int) (hunk * count));
     }
-}
 
+    /*
+     * Otherwise we've got a real file to read.
+     */
+
+    return Tcl_Read(chan, (char *) dst, (int) (hunk * count));
+}
 
 /*
  * ChanWriteGIF - writes a image in GIF format.
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
- * Author:			Lolo
- *				Engeneering Projects Area 
- *				Department of Mining 
- *				University of Oviedo
- * e-mail			zz11425958@zeus.etsimo.uniovi.es
- *				lolo@pcsig22.etsimo.uniovi.es
- * Date:			Fri September 20 1996
+ * Author:		Lolo
+ *			Engeneering Projects Area
+ *			Department of Mining
+ *			University of Oviedo
+ * e-mail		zz11425958@zeus.etsimo.uniovi.es
+ *			lolo@pcsig22.etsimo.uniovi.es
+ * Date:		Fri September 20 1996
  *
  * Modified for transparency handling (gif89a) and miGIF compression
  * by Jan Nijtmans <j.nijtmans@chello.nl>
@@ -1356,60 +1420,65 @@ Fread(dst, hunk, count, chan)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  * FileWriteGIF-
  *
- *    This procedure is called by the photo image type to write
- *    GIF format data from a photo image into a given file 
+ *	This function is called by the photo image type to write GIF format
+ *	data from a photo image into a given file
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL completion code.  If TCL_ERROR is returned
- *	then an error message is left in interp->result.
+ *	A standard TCL completion code. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in interp->result.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
- /*
-  *  Types, defines and variables needed to write and compress a GIF.
-  */
-
-typedef int (* ifunptr) _ANSI_ARGS_((void));	
-
-#define LSB(a)			((unsigned char) (((short)(a)) & 0x00FF))
-#define MSB(a)			((unsigned char) (((short)(a)) >> 8))
-
-#define GIFBITS 12
-#define HSIZE  5003		/* 80% occupancy */
+/*
+ * Types, defines and variables needed to write and compress a GIF.
+ */
 
-static int ssize;
-static int csize;
-static int rsize;
-static unsigned char *pixelo;
-static int pixelSize;
-static int pixelPitch;
-static int greenOffset;
-static int blueOffset;
-static int alphaOffset;
-static int num;
-static unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3];
+typedef int (* ifunptr) (ClientData clientData);
+
+#define LSB(a)		((unsigned char) (((short)(a)) & 0x00FF))
+#define MSB(a)		((unsigned char) (((short)(a)) >> 8))
+
+#define GIFBITS		12
+#define HSIZE		5003	/* 80% occupancy */
+
+typedef struct {
+    int ssize;
+    int csize;
+    int rsize;
+    unsigned char *pixelo;
+    int pixelSize;
+    int pixelPitch;
+    int greenOffset;
+    int blueOffset;
+    int alphaOffset;
+    int num;
+    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3];
+} GifWriterState;
 
 /*
- *	Definition of new functions to write GIFs
+ * Definition of new functions to write GIFs
  */
 
-static int color _ANSI_ARGS_((int red,int green, int blue,
-		unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3]));
-static void compress _ANSI_ARGS_((int init_bits, Tcl_Channel handle,
-		ifunptr readValue));
-static int nuevo _ANSI_ARGS_((int red, int green ,int blue,
-		unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3]));
-static void savemap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
-		unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3]));
-static int ReadValue _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
-
+static int		color(GifWriterState *statePtr,
+			    int red, int green, int blue,
+			    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3]);
+static void		compress(int initBits, Tcl_Channel handle,
+			    ifunptr readValue, ClientData clientData);
+static int		nuevo(GifWriterState *statePtr,
+			    int red, int green, int blue,
+			    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3]);
+static void		savemap(GifWriterState *statePtr,
+			    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
+			    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3]);
+static int		ReadValue(ClientData clientData);
+
 static int
-FileWriteGIF(interp, filename, format, blockPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
-    CONST char	*filename;
-    Tcl_Obj	*format;
-    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
+FileWriteGIF(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
+    const char *filename,
+    Tcl_Obj *format,
+    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
 {
     Tcl_Channel chan = NULL;
     int result;
@@ -1418,167 +1487,168 @@ FileWriteGIF(interp, filename, format, blockPtr)
     if (!chan) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, chan, "-translation", "binary") != TCL_OK) {
+    if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, chan, "-translation",
+	    "binary") != TCL_OK) {
 	Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     result = CommonWriteGIF(interp, chan, format, blockPtr);
+
     if (Tcl_Close(interp, chan) == TCL_ERROR) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     return result;
 }
-
-#define Mputc(c,handle) Tcl_Write(handle,(char *) &c,1)
-
+
 static int
-CommonWriteGIF(interp, handle, format, blockPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tcl_Channel handle;
-    Tcl_Obj *format;
-    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
+CommonWriteGIF(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_Channel handle,
+    Tcl_Obj *format,
+    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
 {
-    int  resolution;
-
-    long  width,height,x;
+    GifWriterState state, *statePtr = &state;
+    int resolution;
+    long width, height, x;
     unsigned char c;
-    unsigned int top,left;
+    unsigned int top, left;
 
     top = 0;
     left = 0;
 
-    pixelSize = blockPtr->pixelSize;
-    greenOffset = blockPtr->offset[1]-blockPtr->offset[0];
-    blueOffset = blockPtr->offset[2]-blockPtr->offset[0];
-    alphaOffset = blockPtr->offset[0];
-    if (alphaOffset < blockPtr->offset[2]) {
-	alphaOffset = blockPtr->offset[2];
+    memset(statePtr, 0, sizeof(state));
+
+    statePtr->pixelSize = blockPtr->pixelSize;
+    statePtr->greenOffset = blockPtr->offset[1]-blockPtr->offset[0];
+    statePtr->blueOffset = blockPtr->offset[2]-blockPtr->offset[0];
+    statePtr->alphaOffset = blockPtr->offset[0];
+    if (statePtr->alphaOffset < blockPtr->offset[2]) {
+	statePtr->alphaOffset = blockPtr->offset[2];
     }
-    if (++alphaOffset < pixelSize) {
-	alphaOffset -= blockPtr->offset[0];
+    if (++statePtr->alphaOffset < statePtr->pixelSize) {
+	statePtr->alphaOffset -= blockPtr->offset[0];
     } else {
-	alphaOffset = 0;
+	statePtr->alphaOffset = 0;
     }
 
-    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) (alphaOffset ? GIF89a : GIF87a), 6);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) (statePtr->alphaOffset ? GIF89a : GIF87a), 6);
 
     for (x=0 ; x<MAXCOLORMAPSIZE ; x++) {
-	mapa[x][CM_RED] = 255;
-	mapa[x][CM_GREEN] = 255;
-	mapa[x][CM_BLUE] = 255;
+	statePtr->mapa[x][CM_RED] = 255;
+	statePtr->mapa[x][CM_GREEN] = 255;
+	statePtr->mapa[x][CM_BLUE] = 255;
     }
 
-
     width = blockPtr->width;
     height = blockPtr->height;
-    pixelo = blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0];
-    pixelPitch = blockPtr->pitch;
-    savemap(blockPtr,mapa);
-    if (num >= MAXCOLORMAPSIZE) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "too many colors", (char *) NULL);
+    statePtr->pixelo = blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0];
+    statePtr->pixelPitch = blockPtr->pitch;
+    savemap(statePtr, blockPtr, statePtr->mapa);
+    if (statePtr->num >= MAXCOLORMAPSIZE) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "too many colors", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    if (num<2) {
-	num = 2;
+    if (statePtr->num<2) {
+	statePtr->num = 2;
     }
     c = LSB(width);
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
     c = MSB(width);
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
     c = LSB(height);
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
     c = MSB(height);
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
 
     resolution = 0;
-    while (num >> resolution) {
+    while (statePtr->num >> resolution) {
 	resolution++;
     }
     c = 111 + resolution * 17;
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
 
-    num = 1 << resolution;
+    statePtr->num = 1 << resolution;
 
     /*
-     * background color
+     * Background color
      */
 
     c = 0;
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
 
     /*
-     * zero for future expansion.
+     * Zero for future expansion.
      */
 
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
 
-    for (x=0 ; x<num ; x++) {
-	c = mapa[x][CM_RED];
-	Mputc(c,handle);
-	c = mapa[x][CM_GREEN];
-	Mputc(c,handle);
-	c = mapa[x][CM_BLUE];
-	Mputc(c,handle);
+    for (x=0 ; x<statePtr->num ; x++) {
+	c = statePtr->mapa[x][CM_RED];
+	Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
+	c = statePtr->mapa[x][CM_GREEN];
+	Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
+	c = statePtr->mapa[x][CM_BLUE];
+	Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
     }
 
     /*
      * Write out extension for transparent colour index, if necessary.
      */
 
-    if (alphaOffset) {
+    if (statePtr->alphaOffset) {
 	c = GIF_EXTENSION;
-	Mputc(c, handle);
+	Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
 	Tcl_Write(handle, "\371\4\1\0\0\0", 7);
     }
 
     c = GIF_START;
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
     c = LSB(top);
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
     c = MSB(top);
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
     c = LSB(left);
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
     c = MSB(left);
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
 
     c = LSB(width);
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
     c = MSB(width);
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
 
     c = LSB(height);
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
     c = MSB(height);
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
 
     c = 0;
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
     c = resolution;
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
 
-    ssize = rsize = blockPtr->width;
-    csize = blockPtr->height;
-    compress(resolution+1, handle, ReadValue);
+    statePtr->ssize = statePtr->rsize = blockPtr->width;
+    statePtr->csize = blockPtr->height;
+    compress(resolution+1, handle, ReadValue, (ClientData) statePtr);
 
-    c = 0; 
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    c = 0;
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
     c = GIF_TERMINATOR;
-    Mputc(c,handle);
+    Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
 
-    return TCL_OK;	
+    return TCL_OK;
 }
-
+
 static int
-color(red, green, blue, mapa)
-    int red;
-    int green;
-    int blue;
-    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3];
+color(
+    GifWriterState *statePtr,
+    int red, int green, int blue,
+    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3])
 {
-    int x;
-    for (x=(alphaOffset != 0) ; x<=MAXCOLORMAPSIZE ; x++) {
+    int x = (statePtr->alphaOffset != 0);
+
+    for (; x<=MAXCOLORMAPSIZE ; x++) {
 	if ((mapa[x][CM_RED] == red) && (mapa[x][CM_GREEN] == green) &&
 		(mapa[x][CM_BLUE] == blue)) {
 	    return x;
@@ -1586,15 +1656,16 @@ color(red, green, blue, mapa)
     }
     return -1;
 }
-
 
 static int
-nuevo(red, green, blue, mapa)
-    int red,green,blue;
-    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3];
+nuevo(
+    GifWriterState *statePtr,
+    int red, int green, int blue,
+    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3])
 {
-    int x = (alphaOffset != 0);
-    for (; x<=num ; x++) {
+    int x = (statePtr->alphaOffset != 0);
+
+    for (; x<=statePtr->num ; x++) {
 	if ((mapa[x][CM_RED] == red) && (mapa[x][CM_GREEN] == green) &&
 		(mapa[x][CM_BLUE] == blue)) {
 	    return 0;
@@ -1602,74 +1673,76 @@ nuevo(red, green, blue, mapa)
     }
     return 1;
 }
-
+
 static void
-savemap(blockPtr,mapa)
-    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
-    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3];
+savemap(
+    GifWriterState *statePtr,
+    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
+    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3])
 {
     unsigned char *colores;
-    int x,y;
-    unsigned char red,green,blue;
+    int x, y;
+    unsigned char red, green, blue;
 
-    if (alphaOffset) {
-	num = 0;
+    if (statePtr->alphaOffset) {
+	statePtr->num = 0;
 	mapa[0][CM_RED] = 0xd9;
 	mapa[0][CM_GREEN] = 0xd9;
 	mapa[0][CM_BLUE] = 0xd9;
     } else {
-	num = -1;
+	statePtr->num = -1;
     }
 
-    for(y=0 ; y<blockPtr->height ; y++) {
-	colores = blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0]
-		+ y * blockPtr->pitch;
-	for(x=0 ; x<blockPtr->width ; x++) {
-	    if (!alphaOffset || (colores[alphaOffset] != 0)) {
+    for (y=0 ; y<blockPtr->height ; y++) {
+	colores = blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0] + y*blockPtr->pitch;
+	for (x=0 ; x<blockPtr->width ; x++) {
+	    if (!statePtr->alphaOffset || colores[statePtr->alphaOffset]!=0) {
 		red = colores[0];
-		green = colores[greenOffset];
-		blue = colores[blueOffset];
-		if (nuevo(red,green,blue,mapa)) {
-		    num++;
-		    if (num >= MAXCOLORMAPSIZE) {
+		green = colores[statePtr->greenOffset];
+		blue = colores[statePtr->blueOffset];
+		if (nuevo(statePtr, red, green, blue, mapa)) {
+		    statePtr->num++;
+		    if (statePtr->num >= MAXCOLORMAPSIZE) {
 			return;
 		    }
-		    mapa[num][CM_RED] = red;
-		    mapa[num][CM_GREEN] = green;
-		    mapa[num][CM_BLUE] = blue;
+		    mapa[statePtr->num][CM_RED] = red;
+		    mapa[statePtr->num][CM_GREEN] = green;
+		    mapa[statePtr->num][CM_BLUE] = blue;
 		}
 	    }
-	    colores += pixelSize;
+	    colores += statePtr->pixelSize;
 	}
     }
-    return;
 }
-
+
 static int
-ReadValue()
+ReadValue(
+    ClientData clientData)
 {
+    GifWriterState *statePtr = (GifWriterState *) clientData;
     unsigned int col;
 
-    if (csize == 0) {
+    if (statePtr->csize == 0) {
 	return EOF;
     }
-    if (alphaOffset && (pixelo[alphaOffset] == 0)) {
+    if (statePtr->alphaOffset && statePtr->pixelo[statePtr->alphaOffset]==0) {
 	col = 0;
     } else {
-	col = color(pixelo[0], pixelo[greenOffset], pixelo[blueOffset], mapa);
+	col = color(statePtr, statePtr->pixelo[0],
+		statePtr->pixelo[statePtr->greenOffset],
+		statePtr->pixelo[statePtr->blueOffset], statePtr->mapa);
     }
-    pixelo += pixelSize;
-    if (--ssize <= 0) {
-	ssize = rsize;
-	csize--;
-	pixelo += pixelPitch - (rsize * pixelSize);
+    statePtr->pixelo += statePtr->pixelSize;
+    if (--statePtr->ssize <= 0) {
+	statePtr->ssize = statePtr->rsize;
+	statePtr->csize--;
+	statePtr->pixelo += statePtr->pixelPitch
+		- (statePtr->rsize * statePtr->pixelSize);
     }
 
     return col;
 }
-
 
-
 /*
  *-----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
@@ -1681,30 +1754,27 @@ ReadValue()
  *		 http://www.hasc.com
  *		 info@hasc.com
  *
- * Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and
- * its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
- * granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
- * copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission
- * notice appear in supporting documentation.  This software is
- * provided "AS IS." The Hutchison Avenue Software Corporation
- * disclaims all warranties, either express or implied, including but
- * not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness
- * for a particular purpose, with respect to this code and
+ * Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+ * documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+ * that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+ * copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+ * documentation. This software is provided "AS IS." The Hutchison Avenue
+ * Software Corporation disclaims all warranties, either express or implied,
+ * including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and
+ * fitness for a particular purpose, with respect to this code and
  * accompanying documentation.
- * 
- * The miGIF compression routines do not, strictly speaking, generate
- * files conforming to the GIF spec, since the image data is not
- * LZW-compressed (this is the point: in order to avoid transgression
- * of the Unisys patent on the LZW algorithm.)  However, miGIF
- * generates data streams that any reasonably sane LZW decompresser
- * will decompress to what we want.
- *
- * miGIF compression uses run length encoding. It compresses
- * horizontal runs of pixels of the same color. This type of
- * compression gives good results on images with many runs, for
- * example images with lines, text and solid shapes on a solid-colored
- * background. It gives little or no compression on images with few
- * runs, for example digital or scanned photos.
+ *
+ * The miGIF compression routines do not, strictly speaking, generate files
+ * conforming to the GIF spec, since the image data is not LZW-compressed
+ * (this is the point: in order to avoid transgression of the Unisys patent on
+ * the LZW algorithm.) However, miGIF generates data streams that any
+ * reasonably sane LZW decompresser will decompress to what we want.
+ *
+ * miGIF compression uses run length encoding. It compresses horizontal runs
+ * of pixels of the same color. This type of compression gives good results on
+ * images with many runs, for example images with lines, text and solid shapes
+ * on a solid-colored background. It gives little or no compression on images
+ * with few runs, for example digital or scanned photos.
  *
  *				 der Mouse
  *			mouse@rodents.montreal.qc.ca
@@ -1712,35 +1782,36 @@ ReadValue()
  *
  *			       ivo@hasc.com
  *
- * The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of
- * CompuServe Incorporated.  GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of
- * CompuServe Incorporated.
+ * The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of CompuServe
+ * Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of CompuServe Incorporated.
  *
  *-----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static int rl_pixel;
-static int rl_basecode;
-static int rl_count;
-static int rl_table_pixel;
-static int rl_table_max;
-static int just_cleared;
-static int out_bits;
-static int out_bits_init;
-static int out_count;
-static int out_bump;
-static int out_bump_init;
-static int out_clear;
-static int out_clear_init;
-static int max_ocodes;
-static int code_clear;
-static int code_eof;
-static unsigned int obuf;
-static int obits;
-static Tcl_Channel ofile;
-static unsigned char oblock[256];
-static int oblen;
-
+typedef struct {
+    int runlengthPixel;
+    int runlengthBaseCode;
+    int runlengthCount;
+    int runlengthTablePixel;
+    int runlengthTableMax;
+    int justCleared;
+    int outputBits;
+    int outputBitsInit;
+    int outputCount;
+    int outputBump;
+    int outputBumpInit;
+    int outputClear;
+    int outputClearInit;
+    int maxOcodes;
+    int codeClear;
+    int codeEOF;
+    unsigned int obuf;
+    int obits;
+    Tcl_Channel ofile;
+    unsigned char oblock[256];
+    int oblen;
+} miGIFState_t;
+
 /*
  * Used only when debugging GIF compression code
  */
@@ -1748,23 +1819,28 @@ static int oblen;
 
 #ifdef MIGIF_DEBUGGING_ENVARS
 
-static int verbose_set = 0;
+/*
+ * This debugging code is _absolutely_ not thread-safe. It's also not normally
+ * enabled either.
+ */
+
+static int verboseSet = 0;
 static int verbose;
-#define MIGIF_VERBOSE (verbose_set?verbose:set_verbose())
-#define DEBUGMSG(printf_args) if (MIGIF_VERBOSE) { printf printf_args; }
+#define MIGIF_VERBOSE		(verboseSet?verbose:setVerbose())
+#define DEBUGMSG(printfArgs)	if (MIGIF_VERBOSE) { printf printfArgs; }
 
 static int
-set_verbose(void)
+setVerbose(void)
 {
     verbose = !!getenv("MIGIF_VERBOSE");
-    verbose_set = 1;
+    verboseSet = 1;
     return verbose;
 }
 
-static CONST char *
-binformat(v, nbits)
-    unsigned int v;
-    int nbits;
+static const char *
+binformat(
+    unsigned int v,
+    int nbits)
 {
     static char bufs[8][64];
     static int bhand = 0;
@@ -1786,112 +1862,119 @@ binformat(v, nbits)
     *bp = '\0';
     return &bufs[bhand][0];
 }
-
-#else
-
-#define MIGIF_VERBOSE 0
-#define DEBUGMSG(printf_args) /* do nothing */
-
+#else /* !MIGIF_DEBUGGING_ENVARS */
+#define DEBUGMSG(printfArgs) /* do nothing */
 #endif
-
+
 static void
-write_block()
+writeBlock(
+    miGIFState_t *statePtr)
 {
-    int i;
     unsigned char c;
 
+#ifdef MIGIF_DEBUGGING_ENVARS
     if (MIGIF_VERBOSE) {
-	printf("write_block %d:", oblen);
-	for (i=0 ; i<oblen ; i++) {
-	    printf(" %02x", oblock[i]);
+	int i;
+	printf("writeBlock %d:", statePtr->oblen);
+	for (i=0 ; i<statePtr->oblen ; i++) {
+	    printf(" %02x", statePtr->oblock[i]);
 	}
 	printf("\n");
     }
-    c = oblen;
-    Tcl_Write(ofile, (char *) &c, 1);
-    Tcl_Write(ofile, (char *) &oblock[0], oblen);
-    oblen = 0;
+#endif
+    c = statePtr->oblen;
+    Tcl_Write(statePtr->ofile, (char *) &c, 1);
+    Tcl_Write(statePtr->ofile, (char *) &statePtr->oblock[0], statePtr->oblen);
+    statePtr->oblen = 0;
 }
-
+
 static void
-block_out(c)
-    unsigned char c;
+blockOut(
+    miGIFState_t *statePtr,
+    unsigned c)
 {
-    DEBUGMSG(("block_out %s\n", binformat(c, 8)));
-    oblock[oblen++] = c;
-    if (oblen >= 255) {
-	write_block();
+    DEBUGMSG(("blockOut %s\n", binformat(c, 8)));
+    statePtr->oblock[statePtr->oblen++] = (unsigned char) c;
+    if (statePtr->oblen >= 255) {
+	writeBlock(statePtr);
     }
 }
-
+
 static void
-block_flush()
+blockFlush(
+    miGIFState_t *statePtr)
 {
-    DEBUGMSG(("block_flush\n"));
-    if (oblen > 0) {
-	write_block();
+    DEBUGMSG(("blockFlush\n"));
+    if (statePtr->oblen > 0) {
+	writeBlock(statePtr);
     }
 }
-
+
 static void
-output(val)
-    int val;
+output(
+    miGIFState_t *statePtr,
+    int val)
 {
-    DEBUGMSG(("output %s [%s %d %d]\n", binformat(val, out_bits),
-	    binformat(obuf, obits), obits, out_bits));
-    obuf |= val << obits;
-    obits += out_bits;
-    while (obits >= 8) {
-	block_out(UCHAR(obuf&0xff));
-	obuf >>= 8;
-	obits -= 8;
-    }
-    DEBUGMSG(("output leaving [%s %d]\n", binformat(obuf, obits), obits));
+    DEBUGMSG(("output %s [%s %d %d]\n", binformat(val, statePtr->outputBits),
+	    binformat(statePtr->obuf, statePtr->obits), statePtr->obits,
+	    statePtr->outputBits));
+    statePtr->obuf |= val << statePtr->obits;
+    statePtr->obits += statePtr->outputBits;
+    while (statePtr->obits >= 8) {
+	blockOut(statePtr, statePtr->obuf & 0xff);
+	statePtr->obuf >>= 8;
+	statePtr->obits -= 8;
+    }
+    DEBUGMSG(("output leaving [%s %d]\n",
+	    binformat(statePtr->obuf, statePtr->obits), statePtr->obits));
 }
-
+
 static void
-output_flush()
+outputFlush(
+    miGIFState_t *statePtr)
 {
-    DEBUGMSG(("output_flush\n"));
-    if (obits > 0) {
-	block_out(UCHAR(obuf));
+    DEBUGMSG(("outputFlush\n"));
+    if (statePtr->obits > 0) {
+	blockOut(statePtr, statePtr->obuf);
     }
-    block_flush();
+    blockFlush(statePtr);
 }
-
+
 static void
-did_clear()
+didClear(
+    miGIFState_t *statePtr)
 {
-    DEBUGMSG(("did_clear\n"));
-    out_bits = out_bits_init;
-    out_bump = out_bump_init;
-    out_clear = out_clear_init;
-    out_count = 0;
-    rl_table_max = 0;
-    just_cleared = 1;
+    DEBUGMSG(("didClear\n"));
+    statePtr->outputBits = statePtr->outputBitsInit;
+    statePtr->outputBump = statePtr->outputBumpInit;
+    statePtr->outputClear = statePtr->outputClearInit;
+    statePtr->outputCount = 0;
+    statePtr->runlengthTableMax = 0;
+    statePtr->justCleared = 1;
 }
-
+
 static void
-output_plain(c)
-    int c;
+outputPlain(
+    miGIFState_t *statePtr,
+    int c)
 {
-    DEBUGMSG(("output_plain %s\n", binformat(c, out_bits)));
-    just_cleared = 0;
-    output(c);
-    out_count++;
-    if (out_count >= out_bump) {
-	out_bits++;
-	out_bump += 1 << (out_bits - 1);
-    }
-    if (out_count >= out_clear) {
-	output(code_clear);
-	did_clear();
+    DEBUGMSG(("outputPlain %s\n", binformat(c, statePtr->outputBits)));
+    statePtr->justCleared = 0;
+    output(statePtr, c);
+    statePtr->outputCount++;
+    if (statePtr->outputCount >= statePtr->outputBump) {
+	statePtr->outputBits++;
+	statePtr->outputBump += 1 << (statePtr->outputBits - 1);
+    }
+    if (statePtr->outputCount >= statePtr->outputClear) {
+	output(statePtr, statePtr->codeClear);
+	didClear(statePtr);
     }
 }
-
+
 static unsigned int
-isqrt(x)
-    unsigned int x;
+isqrt(
+    unsigned int x)
 {
     unsigned int r;
     unsigned int v;
@@ -1908,11 +1991,11 @@ isqrt(x)
 	r = v;
     }
 }
-
-static unsigned int
-compute_triangle_count(count, nrepcodes)
-    unsigned int count;
-    unsigned int nrepcodes;
+
+static int
+computeTriangleCount(
+    unsigned int count,
+    unsigned int nrepcodes)
 {
     unsigned int perrep;
     unsigned int cost;
@@ -1924,8 +2007,8 @@ compute_triangle_count(count, nrepcodes)
 	count -= perrep;
     }
     if (count > 0) {
-	unsigned int n;
-	n = isqrt(count);
+	unsigned int n = isqrt(count);
+
 	while (n*(n+1) >= 2*count) {
 	    n--;
 	}
@@ -1934,204 +2017,233 @@ compute_triangle_count(count, nrepcodes)
 	}
 	cost += n;
     }
-    return cost;
+    return (int) cost + 1;
 }
-
+
 static void
-max_out_clear()
+maxOutputClear(
+    miGIFState_t *statePtr)
 {
-    out_clear = max_ocodes;
+    statePtr->outputClear = statePtr->maxOcodes;
 }
-
+
 static void
-reset_out_clear()
+resetOutputClear(
+    miGIFState_t *statePtr)
 {
-    out_clear = out_clear_init;
-    if (out_count >= out_clear) {
-	output(code_clear);
-	did_clear();
+    statePtr->outputClear = statePtr->outputClearInit;
+    if (statePtr->outputCount >= statePtr->outputClear) {
+	output(statePtr, statePtr->codeClear);
+	didClear(statePtr);
     }
 }
-
+
 static void
-rl_flush_fromclear(count)
-    int count;
+runlengthFlushFromClear(
+    miGIFState_t *statePtr,
+    int count)
 {
     int n;
 
-    DEBUGMSG(("rl_flush_fromclear %d\n", count));
-    max_out_clear();
-    rl_table_pixel = rl_pixel;
+    DEBUGMSG(("runlengthFlushFromClear %d\n", count));
+    maxOutputClear(statePtr);
+    statePtr->runlengthTablePixel = statePtr->runlengthPixel;
     n = 1;
     while (count > 0) {
 	if (n == 1) {
-	    rl_table_max = 1;
-	    output_plain(rl_pixel);
+	    statePtr->runlengthTableMax = 1;
+	    outputPlain(statePtr, statePtr->runlengthPixel);
 	    count--;
 	} else if (count >= n) {
-	    rl_table_max = n;
-	    output_plain(rl_basecode+n-2);
+	    statePtr->runlengthTableMax = n;
+	    outputPlain(statePtr, statePtr->runlengthBaseCode+n-2);
 	    count -= n;
 	} else if (count == 1) {
-	    rl_table_max++;
-	    output_plain(rl_pixel);
+	    statePtr->runlengthTableMax++;
+	    outputPlain(statePtr, statePtr->runlengthPixel);
 	    count = 0;
 	} else {
-	    rl_table_max++;
-	    output_plain(rl_basecode+count-2);
+	    statePtr->runlengthTableMax++;
+	    outputPlain(statePtr, statePtr->runlengthBaseCode+count-2);
 	    count = 0;
 	}
-	if (out_count == 0) {
+	if (statePtr->outputCount == 0) {
 	    n = 1;
 	} else {
 	    n++;
 	}
     }
-    reset_out_clear();
-    DEBUGMSG(("rl_flush_fromclear leaving table_max=%d\n", rl_table_max));
+    resetOutputClear(statePtr);
+    DEBUGMSG(("runlengthFlushFromClear leaving tableMax=%d\n",
+	    statePtr->runlengthTableMax));
 }
-
+
 static void
-rl_flush_clearorrep(count)
-    int count;
+runlengthFlushClearOrRep(
+    miGIFState_t *statePtr,
+    int count)
 {
     int withclr;
 
-    DEBUGMSG(("rl_flush_clearorrep %d\n", count));
-    withclr = 1 + compute_triangle_count(count, max_ocodes);
+    DEBUGMSG(("runlengthFlushClearOrRep %d\n", count));
+    withclr = computeTriangleCount((unsigned) count,
+	    (unsigned) statePtr->maxOcodes);
     if (withclr < count) {
-	output(code_clear);
-	did_clear();
-	rl_flush_fromclear(count);
+	output(statePtr, statePtr->codeClear);
+	didClear(statePtr);
+	runlengthFlushFromClear(statePtr, count);
     } else {
 	for (; count>0 ; count--) {
-	    output_plain(rl_pixel);
+	    outputPlain(statePtr, statePtr->runlengthPixel);
 	}
     }
 }
-
+
 static void
-rl_flush_withtable(count)
-    int count;
+runlengthFlushWithTable(
+    miGIFState_t *statePtr,
+    int count)
 {
     int repmax;
     int repleft;
     int leftover;
 
-    DEBUGMSG(("rl_flush_withtable %d\n", count));
-    repmax = count / rl_table_max;
-    leftover = count % rl_table_max;
+    DEBUGMSG(("runlengthFlushWithTable %d\n", count));
+    repmax = count / statePtr->runlengthTableMax;
+    leftover = count % statePtr->runlengthTableMax;
     repleft = (leftover ? 1 : 0);
-    if (out_count+repmax+repleft > max_ocodes) {
-	repmax = max_ocodes - out_count;
-	leftover = count - (repmax * rl_table_max);
-	repleft = 1 + compute_triangle_count(leftover, max_ocodes);
+    if (statePtr->outputCount+repmax+repleft > statePtr->maxOcodes) {
+	repmax = statePtr->maxOcodes - statePtr->outputCount;
+	leftover = count - (repmax * statePtr->runlengthTableMax);
+	repleft = computeTriangleCount((unsigned) leftover,
+		(unsigned) statePtr->maxOcodes);
     }
-    DEBUGMSG(("rl_flush_withtable repmax=%d leftover=%d repleft=%d\n",
+    DEBUGMSG(("runlengthFlushWithTable repmax=%d leftover=%d repleft=%d\n",
 	    repmax, leftover, repleft));
-    if (1+(int)compute_triangle_count(count, max_ocodes) < repmax+repleft) {
-	output(code_clear);
-	did_clear();
-	rl_flush_fromclear(count);
+    if (computeTriangleCount((unsigned) count, (unsigned) statePtr->maxOcodes)
+	    < repmax+repleft) {
+	output(statePtr, statePtr->codeClear);
+	didClear(statePtr);
+	runlengthFlushFromClear(statePtr, count);
 	return;
     }
-    max_out_clear();
+    maxOutputClear(statePtr);
     for (; repmax>0 ; repmax--) {
-	output_plain(rl_basecode + rl_table_max - 2);
+	outputPlain(statePtr,
+		statePtr->runlengthBaseCode + statePtr->runlengthTableMax - 2);
     }
     if (leftover) {
-	if (just_cleared) {
-	    rl_flush_fromclear(leftover);
+	if (statePtr->justCleared) {
+	    runlengthFlushFromClear(statePtr, leftover);
 	} else if (leftover == 1) {
-	    output_plain(rl_pixel);
+	    outputPlain(statePtr, statePtr->runlengthPixel);
 	} else {
-	    output_plain(rl_basecode + leftover - 2);
+	    outputPlain(statePtr, statePtr->runlengthBaseCode + leftover - 2);
 	}
     }
-    reset_out_clear();
+    resetOutputClear(statePtr);
 }
-
+
 static void
-rl_flush()
+runlengthFlush(
+    miGIFState_t *statePtr)
 {
-    DEBUGMSG(("rl_flush [ %d %d\n", rl_count, rl_pixel));
-    if (rl_count == 1) {
-	output_plain(rl_pixel);
-	rl_count = 0;
-	DEBUGMSG(("rl_flush ]\n"));
+    DEBUGMSG(("runlengthFlush [ %d %d\n", statePtr->runlengthCount,
+	    statePtr->runlengthPixel));
+    if (statePtr->runlengthCount == 1) {
+	outputPlain(statePtr, statePtr->runlengthPixel);
+	statePtr->runlengthCount = 0;
+	DEBUGMSG(("runlengthFlush ]\n"));
 	return;
     }
-    if (just_cleared) {
-	rl_flush_fromclear(rl_count);
-    } else if ((rl_table_max < 2) || (rl_table_pixel != rl_pixel)) {
-	rl_flush_clearorrep(rl_count);
+    if (statePtr->justCleared) {
+	runlengthFlushFromClear(statePtr, statePtr->runlengthCount);
+    } else if ((statePtr->runlengthTableMax < 2)
+	    || (statePtr->runlengthTablePixel != statePtr->runlengthPixel)) {
+	runlengthFlushClearOrRep(statePtr, statePtr->runlengthCount);
     } else {
-	rl_flush_withtable(rl_count);
+	runlengthFlushWithTable(statePtr, statePtr->runlengthCount);
     }
-    DEBUGMSG(("rl_flush ]\n"));
-    rl_count = 0;
+    DEBUGMSG(("runlengthFlush ]\n"));
+    statePtr->runlengthCount = 0;
 }
-
-
+
 static void
-compress(init_bits, handle, readValue)
-    int init_bits;
-    Tcl_Channel handle;
-    ifunptr readValue;
+compress(
+    int initBits,
+    Tcl_Channel handle,
+    ifunptr readValue,
+    ClientData clientData)
 {
     int c;
+    miGIFState_t state, *statePtr = &state;
+
+    memset(statePtr, 0, sizeof(state));
+
+    statePtr->ofile = handle;
+    statePtr->obuf = 0;
+    statePtr->obits = 0;
+    statePtr->oblen = 0;
+    statePtr->codeClear = 1 << (initBits - 1);
+    statePtr->codeEOF = statePtr->codeClear + 1;
+    statePtr->runlengthBaseCode = statePtr->codeEOF + 1;
+    statePtr->outputBumpInit = (1 << (initBits - 1)) - 1;
 
-    ofile = handle;
-    obuf = 0;
-    obits = 0;
-    oblen = 0;
-    code_clear = 1 << (init_bits - 1);
-    code_eof = code_clear + 1;
-    rl_basecode = code_eof + 1;
-    out_bump_init = (1 << (init_bits - 1)) - 1;
     /*
-     * For images with a lot of runs, making out_clear_init larger
-     * will give better compression.
+     * For images with a lot of runs, making outputClearInit larger will give
+     * better compression.
      */
-    out_clear_init = (init_bits <= 3) ? 9 : (out_bump_init-1);
+
+    statePtr->outputClearInit =
+	    (initBits <= 3) ? 9 : (statePtr->outputBumpInit-1);
 #ifdef MIGIF_DEBUGGING_ENVARS
     {
-	CONST char *ocienv;
-	ocienv = getenv("MIGIF_OUT_CLEAR_INIT");
+	const char *ocienv = getenv("MIGIF_OUT_CLEAR_INIT");
+
 	if (ocienv) {
-	    out_clear_init = atoi(ocienv);
-	    DEBUGMSG(("[overriding out_clear_init to %d]\n", out_clear_init));
+	    statePtr->outputClearInit = atoi(ocienv);
+	    DEBUGMSG(("[overriding outputClearInit to %d]\n",
+		    statePtr->outputClearInit));
 	}
     }
 #endif
-    out_bits_init = init_bits;
-    max_ocodes = (1 << GIFBITS) - ((1 << (out_bits_init - 1)) + 3);
-    did_clear();
-    output(code_clear);
-    rl_count = 0;
+    statePtr->outputBitsInit = initBits;
+    statePtr->maxOcodes =
+	    (1 << GIFBITS) - ((1 << (statePtr->outputBitsInit - 1)) + 3);
+    didClear(statePtr);
+    output(statePtr, statePtr->codeClear);
+    statePtr->runlengthCount = 0;
     while (1) {
-	c = readValue();
-	if ((rl_count > 0) && (c != rl_pixel)) {
-	    rl_flush();
+	c = readValue(clientData);
+	if (statePtr->runlengthCount>0 && statePtr->runlengthPixel!=c) {
+	    runlengthFlush(statePtr);
 	}
 	if (c == EOF) {
 	    break;
 	}
-	if (rl_pixel == c) {
-	    rl_count++;
+	if (statePtr->runlengthPixel == c) {
+	    statePtr->runlengthCount++;
 	} else {
-	    rl_pixel = c;
-	    rl_count = 1;
+	    statePtr->runlengthPixel = c;
+	    statePtr->runlengthCount = 1;
 	}
     }
-    output(code_eof);
-    output_flush();
+    output(statePtr, statePtr->codeEOF);
+    outputFlush(statePtr);
 }
 
 /*
  *-----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * End of miGIF section  - See copyright notice at start of section.
+ * End of miGIF section - See copyright notice at start of section.
  *
  *-----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkImgPPM.c b/generic/tkImgPPM.c
index ffa369d..8a46fde 100644
--- a/generic/tkImgPPM.c
+++ b/generic/tkImgPPM.c
@@ -6,20 +6,19 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
  * Author: Paul Mackerras (paulus@cs.anu.edu.au),
- *	   Department of Computer Science,
- *	   Australian National University.
+ *	Department of Computer Science,
+ *	Australian National University.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 
 /*
- * The maximum amount of memory to allocate for data read from the
- * file.  If we need more than this, we do it in pieces.
+ * The maximum amount of memory to allocate for data read from the file. If we
+ * need more than this, we do it in pieces.
  */
 
 #define MAX_MEMORY	10000		/* don't allocate > 10KB */
@@ -35,28 +34,23 @@
  * The format record for the PPM file format:
  */
 
-static int		FileMatchPPM _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan,
+static int		FileMatchPPM(Tcl_Channel chan, CONST char *fileName,
+			    Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static int		FileReadPPM(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan,
 			    CONST char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static int		FileReadPPM  _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Channel chan, CONST char *fileName,
+			    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY,
+			    int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY);
+static int		FileWritePPM(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *fileName,
+			    Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
+static int		StringWritePPM(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *format,
+			    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
+static int		StringMatchPPM(Tcl_Obj *dataObj, Tcl_Obj *format,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static int		StringReadPPM(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *dataObj,
 			    Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle,
 			    int destX, int destY, int width, int height,
-			    int srcX, int srcY));
-static int		FileWritePPM _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    CONST char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format,
-			    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
-static int		StringWritePPM _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
-static int		StringMatchPPM _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *dataObj,
-			    Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static int		StringReadPPM _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *dataObj, Tcl_Obj *format,
-			    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY,
-			    int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY));
-
+			    int srcX, int srcY);
 
 Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtPPM = {
     "ppm",			/* name */
@@ -69,28 +63,26 @@ Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtPPM = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for local procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for local functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static int		ReadPPMFileHeader _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
-			    int *maxIntensityPtr));
-static int		ReadPPMStringHeader _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *dataObj,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
-			    int *maxIntensityPtr,
-			    unsigned char **dataBufferPtr, int *dataSizePtr));
+static int		ReadPPMFileHeader(Tcl_Channel chan, int *widthPtr,
+			    int *heightPtr, int *maxIntensityPtr);
+static int		ReadPPMStringHeader(Tcl_Obj *dataObj, int *widthPtr,
+			    int *heightPtr, int *maxIntensityPtr,
+			    unsigned char **dataBufferPtr, int *dataSizePtr);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * FileMatchPPM --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the photo image type to see if
- *	a file contains image data in PPM format.
+ *	This function is invoked by the photo image type to see if a file
+ *	contains image data in PPM format.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is >0 if the first characters in file "f" look
- *	like PPM data, and 0 otherwise.
+ *	The return value is >0 if the first characters in file "f" look like
+ *	PPM data, and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The access position in f may change.
@@ -99,14 +91,15 @@ static int		ReadPPMStringHeader _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *dataObj,
  */
 
 static int
-FileMatchPPM(chan, fileName, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
-    Tcl_Channel chan;		/* The image file, open for reading. */
-    CONST char *fileName;	/* The name of the image file. */
-    Tcl_Obj *format;		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are
-				 * returned here if the file is a valid
-				 * raw PPM file. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+FileMatchPPM(
+    Tcl_Channel chan,		/* The image file, open for reading. */
+    CONST char *fileName,	/* The name of the image file. */
+    Tcl_Obj *format,		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+				/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+				 * here if the file is a valid raw PPM
+				 * file. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* unused */
 {
     int dummy;
 
@@ -118,35 +111,33 @@ FileMatchPPM(chan, fileName, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
  *
  * FileReadPPM --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the photo image type to read
- *	PPM format data from a file and write it into a given
- *	photo image.
+ *	This function is called by the photo image type to read PPM format
+ *	data from a file and write it into a given photo image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL completion code.  If TCL_ERROR is returned
- *	then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard TCL completion code. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The access position in file f is changed, and new data is
- *	added to the image given by imageHandle.
+ *	The access position in file f is changed, and new data is added to the
+ *	image given by imageHandle.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-FileReadPPM(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
-	width, height, srcX, srcY)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
-    Tcl_Channel chan;		/* The image file, open for reading. */
-    CONST char *fileName;	/* The name of the image file. */
-    Tcl_Obj *format;		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
-    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle;	/* The photo image to write into. */
-    int destX, destY;		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel in
-				 * photo image to be written to. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of block of photo image to
-				 * be written to. */
-    int srcX, srcY;		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used
-				 * in image being read. */
+FileReadPPM(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
+    Tcl_Channel chan,		/* The image file, open for reading. */
+    CONST char *fileName,	/* The name of the image file. */
+    Tcl_Obj *format,		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle,	/* The photo image to write into. */
+    int destX, int destY,	/* Coordinates of top-left pixel in photo
+				 * image to be written to. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of block of photo image to be
+				 * written to. */
+    int srcX, int srcY)		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used in
+				 * image being read. */
 {
     int fileWidth, fileHeight, maxIntensity;
     int nLines, nBytes, h, type, count;
@@ -185,14 +176,13 @@ FileReadPPM(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
     }
 
     if (type == PGM) {
-        block.pixelSize = 1;
-        block.offset[0] = 0;
+	block.pixelSize = 1;
+	block.offset[0] = 0;
 	block.offset[1] = 0;
 	block.offset[2] = 0;
-    }
-    else {
-        block.pixelSize = 3;
-        block.offset[0] = 0;
+    } else {
+	block.pixelSize = 3;
+	block.offset[0] = 0;
 	block.offset[1] = 1;
 	block.offset[2] = 2;
     }
@@ -200,7 +190,10 @@ FileReadPPM(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
     block.width = width;
     block.pitch = block.pixelSize * fileWidth;
 
-    Tk_PhotoExpand(imageHandle, destX + width, destY + height);
+    if (Tk_PhotoExpand(interp, imageHandle,
+	    destX + width, destY + height) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
 
     if (srcY > 0) {
 	Tcl_Seek(chan, (Tcl_WideInt)(srcY * block.pitch), SEEK_CUR);
@@ -239,8 +232,11 @@ FileReadPPM(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
 	    }
 	}
 	block.height = nLines;
-	Tk_PhotoPutBlock(imageHandle, &block, destX, destY, width, nLines,
-		TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET);
+	if (Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, imageHandle, &block, destX, destY,
+		width, nLines, TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET) != TCL_OK) {
+	    ckfree((char *) pixelPtr);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 	destY += nLines;
     }
 
@@ -253,12 +249,12 @@ FileReadPPM(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
  *
  * FileWritePPM --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to write image data to a file in PPM
- *	format.
+ *	This function is invoked to write image data to a file in PPM format
+ *	(although we can read PGM files, we never write them).
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL completion code.  If TCL_ERROR is returned
- *	then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard TCL completion code. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Data is written to the file given by "fileName".
@@ -267,15 +263,14 @@ FileReadPPM(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
  */
 
 static int
-FileWritePPM(interp, fileName, format, blockPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    CONST char *fileName;
-    Tcl_Obj *format;
-    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
+FileWritePPM(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    CONST char *fileName,
+    Tcl_Obj *format,
+    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
 {
     Tcl_Channel chan;
-    int w, h;
-    int greenOffset, blueOffset, nBytes;
+    int w, h, greenOffset, blueOffset, nBytes;
     unsigned char *pixelPtr, *pixLinePtr;
     char header[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 2];
 
@@ -312,9 +307,9 @@ FileWritePPM(interp, fileName, format, blockPtr)
 	for (h = blockPtr->height; h > 0; h--) {
 	    pixelPtr = pixLinePtr;
 	    for (w = blockPtr->width; w > 0; w--) {
-		if ((Tcl_Write(chan, (char *) &pixelPtr[0], 1) == -1)
-			|| (Tcl_Write(chan, (char *) &pixelPtr[greenOffset], 1) == -1)
-			|| (Tcl_Write(chan, (char *) &pixelPtr[blueOffset], 1) == -1)) {
+		if (    Tcl_Write(chan,(char *)&pixelPtr[0], 1) == -1 ||
+			Tcl_Write(chan,(char *)&pixelPtr[greenOffset],1)==-1 ||
+			Tcl_Write(chan,(char *)&pixelPtr[blueOffset],1) ==-1) {
 		    goto writeerror;
 		}
 		pixelPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
@@ -328,7 +323,7 @@ FileWritePPM(interp, fileName, format, blockPtr)
     }
     chan = NULL;
 
- writeerror:
+  writeerror:
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error writing \"", fileName, "\": ",
 	    Tcl_PosixError(interp), NULL);
     if (chan != NULL) {
@@ -342,12 +337,12 @@ FileWritePPM(interp, fileName, format, blockPtr)
  *
  * StringWritePPM --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to write image data to a string in PPM
+ *	This function is invoked to write image data to a string in PPM
  *	format.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL completion code.  If TCL_ERROR is returned
- *	then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard TCL completion code. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -356,10 +351,10 @@ FileWritePPM(interp, fileName, format, blockPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-StringWritePPM(interp, format, blockPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tcl_Obj *format;
-    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
+StringWritePPM(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_Obj *format,
+    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
 {
     int w, h, size, greenOffset, blueOffset;
     unsigned char *pixLinePtr, *byteArray;
@@ -367,10 +362,12 @@ StringWritePPM(interp, format, blockPtr)
     Tcl_Obj *byteArrayObj;
 
     sprintf(header, "P6\n%d %d\n255\n", blockPtr->width, blockPtr->height);
+
     /*
      * Construct a byte array of the right size with the header and
      * get a pointer to the data part of it.
      */
+
     size = strlen(header);
     byteArrayObj = Tcl_NewByteArrayObj((unsigned char *)header, size);
     byteArray = Tcl_SetByteArrayLength(byteArrayObj,
@@ -384,6 +381,7 @@ StringWritePPM(interp, format, blockPtr)
     /*
      * Check if we can do the data move in single action.
      */
+
     if ((greenOffset == 1) && (blueOffset == 2) && (blockPtr->pixelSize == 3)
 	    && (blockPtr->pitch == (blockPtr->width * 3))) {
 	memcpy(byteArray, pixLinePtr,
@@ -405,6 +403,7 @@ StringWritePPM(interp, format, blockPtr)
     /*
      * Return the object in the interpreter result.
      */
+
     Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, byteArrayObj);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -414,12 +413,12 @@ StringWritePPM(interp, format, blockPtr)
  *
  * StringMatchPPM --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the photo image type to see if
- *	a string contains image data in PPM format.
+ *	This function is invoked by the photo image type to see if a string
+ *	contains image data in PPM format.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is >0 if the first characters in file "f" look
- *	like PPM data, and 0 otherwise.
+ *	The return value is >0 if the first characters in file "f" look like
+ *	PPM data, and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The access position in f may change.
@@ -428,13 +427,14 @@ StringWritePPM(interp, format, blockPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-StringMatchPPM(dataObj, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
-    Tcl_Obj *dataObj;		/* The image data. */
-    Tcl_Obj *format;		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are
-				 * returned here if the file is a valid
-				 * raw PPM file. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* unused */
+StringMatchPPM(
+    Tcl_Obj *dataObj,		/* The image data. */
+    Tcl_Obj *format,		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+				/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+				 * here if the file is a valid raw PPM
+				 * file. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* unused */
 {
     int dummy;
 
@@ -447,13 +447,12 @@ StringMatchPPM(dataObj, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
  *
  * StringReadPPM --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the photo image type to read
- *	PPM format data from a string and write it into a given
- *	photo image.
+ *	This function is called by the photo image type to read PPM format
+ *	data from a string and write it into a given photo image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL completion code.  If TCL_ERROR is returned
- *	then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard TCL completion code. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	New data is added to the image given by imageHandle.
@@ -462,18 +461,17 @@ StringMatchPPM(dataObj, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
  */
 
 static int
-StringReadPPM(interp, dataObj, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
-	width, height, srcX, srcY)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
-    Tcl_Obj *dataObj;		/* The image data. */
-    Tcl_Obj *format;		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
-    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle;	/* The photo image to write into. */
-    int destX, destY;		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel in
-				 * photo image to be written to. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of block of photo image to
-				 * be written to. */
-    int srcX, srcY;		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used
-				 * in image being read. */
+StringReadPPM(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
+    Tcl_Obj *dataObj,		/* The image data. */
+    Tcl_Obj *format,		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle,	/* The photo image to write into. */
+    int destX, int destY,	/* Coordinates of top-left pixel in photo
+				 * image to be written to. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of block of photo image to be
+				 * written to. */
+    int srcX, int srcY)		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used in
+				 * image being read. */
 {
     int fileWidth, fileHeight, maxIntensity;
     int nLines, nBytes, h, type, count, dataSize;
@@ -514,13 +512,13 @@ StringReadPPM(interp, dataObj, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
     }
 
     if (type == PGM) {
-        block.pixelSize = 1;
-        block.offset[0] = 0;
+	block.pixelSize = 1;
+	block.offset[0] = 0;
 	block.offset[1] = 0;
 	block.offset[2] = 0;
     } else {
-        block.pixelSize = 3;
-        block.offset[0] = 0;
+	block.pixelSize = 3;
+	block.offset[0] = 0;
 	block.offset[1] = 1;
 	block.offset[2] = 2;
     }
@@ -535,21 +533,23 @@ StringReadPPM(interp, dataObj, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
 
     if (maxIntensity == 255) {
 	/*
-	 * We have all the data in memory, so write everything in one
-	 * go.
+	 * We have all the data in memory, so write everything in one go.
 	 */
+
 	if (block.pitch*height > dataSize) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "truncated PPM data", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	block.pixelPtr = dataBuffer + srcX * block.pixelSize;
 	block.height = height;
-	Tk_PhotoPutBlock(imageHandle, &block, destX, destY, width, height,
-		TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET);
-	return TCL_OK;
+	return Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, imageHandle, &block, destX, destY,
+		width, height, TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET);
     }
 
-    Tk_PhotoExpand(imageHandle, destX + width, destY + height);
+    if (Tk_PhotoExpand(interp, imageHandle,
+	    destX + width, destY + height) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
 
     nLines = (MAX_MEMORY + block.pitch - 1) / block.pitch;
     if (nLines > height) {
@@ -579,8 +579,11 @@ StringReadPPM(interp, dataObj, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
 	}
 	dataSize -= nBytes;
 	block.height = nLines;
-	Tk_PhotoPutBlock(imageHandle, &block, destX, destY, width, nLines,
-		TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET);
+	if (Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, imageHandle, &block, destX, destY,
+		width, nLines, TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET) != TCL_OK) {
+	    ckfree((char *) pixelPtr);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 	destY += nLines;
     }
 
@@ -593,16 +596,15 @@ StringReadPPM(interp, dataObj, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
  *
  * ReadPPMFileHeader --
  *
- *	This procedure reads the PPM header from the beginning of a
- *	PPM file and returns information from the header.
+ *	This function reads the PPM header from the beginning of a PPM file
+ *	and returns information from the header.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is PGM if file "f" appears to start with
- *	a valid PGM header, PPM if "f" appears to start with a valid
- *      PPM header, and 0 otherwise.  If the header is valid,
- *	then *widthPtr and *heightPtr are modified to hold the
- *	dimensions of the image and *maxIntensityPtr is modified to
- *	hold the value of a "fully on" intensity value.
+ *	The return value is PGM if file "f" appears to start with a valid PGM
+ *	header, PPM if "f" appears to start with a valid PPM header, and 0
+ *	otherwise. If the header is valid, then *widthPtr and *heightPtr are
+ *	modified to hold the dimensions of the image and *maxIntensityPtr is
+ *	modified to hold the value of a "fully on" intensity value.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The access position in f advances.
@@ -611,22 +613,21 @@ StringReadPPM(interp, dataObj, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
  */
 
 static int
-ReadPPMFileHeader(chan, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr)
-    Tcl_Channel chan;		/* Image file to read the header from */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are
-				 * returned here. */
-    int *maxIntensityPtr;	/* The maximum intensity value for
-				 * the image is stored here. */
+ReadPPMFileHeader(
+    Tcl_Channel chan,		/* Image file to read the header from. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+				/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+				 * here. */
+    int *maxIntensityPtr)	/* The maximum intensity value for the image
+				 * is stored here. */
 {
 #define BUFFER_SIZE 1000
-    char buffer[BUFFER_SIZE];
-    int i, numFields;
-    int type = 0;
-    char c;
+    char buffer[BUFFER_SIZE], c;
+    int i, numFields, type = 0;
 
     /*
-     * Read 4 space-separated fields from the file, ignoring
-     * comments (any line that starts with "#").
+     * Read 4 space-separated fields from the file, ignoring comments (any
+     * line that starts with "#").
      */
 
     if (Tcl_Read(chan, &c, 1) != 1) {
@@ -672,7 +673,8 @@ ReadPPMFileHeader(chan, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr)
 	    i++;
 	}
     }
-    done:
+
+  done:
     buffer[i] = 0;
 
     /*
@@ -698,16 +700,16 @@ ReadPPMFileHeader(chan, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr)
  *
  * ReadPPMStringHeader --
  *
- *	This procedure reads the PPM header from the beginning of a
- *	PPM-format string and returns information from the header.
+ *	This function reads the PPM header from the beginning of a PPM-format
+ *	string and returns information from the header.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is PGM if the string appears to start with
- *	a valid PGM header, PPM if the string appears to start with
- *      a valid PPM header, and 0 otherwise.  If the header is valid,
- *	then *widthPtr and *heightPtr are modified to hold the
- *	dimensions of the image and *maxIntensityPtr is modified to
- *	hold the value of a "fully on" intensity value.
+ *	The return value is PGM if the string appears to start with a valid
+ *	PGM header, PPM if the string appears to start with a valid PPM
+ *	header, and 0 otherwise. If the header is valid, then *widthPtr and
+ *	*heightPtr are modified to hold the dimensions of the image and
+ *	*maxIntensityPtr is modified to hold the value of a "fully on"
+ *	intensity value.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None
@@ -716,28 +718,26 @@ ReadPPMFileHeader(chan, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-ReadPPMStringHeader(dataPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr,
-	dataBufferPtr, dataSizePtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *dataPtr;		/* Object to read the header from. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are
-				 * returned here. */
-    int *maxIntensityPtr;	/* The maximum intensity value for
-				 * the image is stored here. */
-    unsigned char **dataBufferPtr;
-    int *dataSizePtr;
+ReadPPMStringHeader(
+    Tcl_Obj *dataPtr,		/* Object to read the header from. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+				/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+				 * here. */
+    int *maxIntensityPtr,	/* The maximum intensity value for the image
+				 * is stored here. */
+    unsigned char **dataBufferPtr,
+    int *dataSizePtr)
 {
 #define BUFFER_SIZE 1000
-    char buffer[BUFFER_SIZE];
-    int i, numFields, dataSize;
-    int type = 0;
-    char c;
+    char buffer[BUFFER_SIZE], c;
+    int i, numFields, dataSize, type = 0;
     unsigned char *dataBuffer;
 
     dataBuffer = Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(dataPtr, &dataSize);
 
     /*
-     * Read 4 space-separated fields from the string, ignoring
-     * comments (any line that starts with "#").
+     * Read 4 space-separated fields from the string, ignoring comments (any
+     * line that starts with "#").
      */
 
     if (dataSize-- < 1) {
@@ -787,7 +787,8 @@ ReadPPMStringHeader(dataPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr,
 	    i++;
 	}
     }
-    done:
+
+  done:
     buffer[i] = 0;
 
     /*
@@ -811,3 +812,11 @@ ReadPPMStringHeader(dataPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr,
     }
     return type;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkImgPhoto.c b/generic/tkImgPhoto.c
index 7c87c42..85c7de5 100644
--- a/generic/tkImgPhoto.c
+++ b/generic/tkImgPhoto.c
@@ -1,17 +1,17 @@
 /*
  * tkImgPhoto.c --
  *
- *	Implements images of type "photo" for Tk.  Photo images are
- *	stored in full color (32 bits per pixel including alpha channel)
- *	and displayed using dithering if necessary.
+ *	Implements images of type "photo" for Tk. Photo images are stored in
+ *	full color (32 bits per pixel including alpha channel) and displayed
+ *	using dithering if necessary.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
- * Copyright (c) 2002 Donal K. Fellows
+ * Copyright (c) 2002-2003 Donal K. Fellows
  * Copyright (c) 2003 ActiveState Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
  * Author: Paul Mackerras (paulus@cs.anu.edu.au),
  *	   Department of Computer Science,
@@ -19,8 +19,6 @@
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
-#include "tclMath.h"
 #include <ctype.h>
 
 #ifdef __WIN32__
@@ -33,12 +31,12 @@
  * Declaration for internal Xlib function used here:
  */
 
-extern int _XInitImageFuncPtrs _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image));
+extern int _XInitImageFuncPtrs(XImage *image);
 
 /*
- * A signed 8-bit integral type.  If chars are unsigned and the compiler
- * isn't an ANSI one, then we have to use short instead (which wastes
- * space) to get signed behavior.
+ * A signed 8-bit integral type. If chars are unsigned and the compiler isn't
+ * an ANSI one, then we have to use short instead (which wastes space) to get
+ * signed behavior.
  */
 
 #if defined(__STDC__) || defined(_AIX)
@@ -52,16 +50,15 @@ extern int _XInitImageFuncPtrs _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image));
 #endif
 
 /*
- * An unsigned 32-bit integral type, used for pixel values.
- * We use int rather than long here to accommodate those systems
- * where longs are 64 bits.
+ * An unsigned 32-bit integral type, used for pixel values. We use int rather
+ * than long here to accommodate those systems where longs are 64 bits.
  */
 
 typedef unsigned int pixel;
 
 /*
- * The maximum number of pixels to transmit to the server in a
- * single XPutImage call.
+ * The maximum number of pixels to transmit to the server in a single
+ * XPutImage call.
  */
 
 #define MAX_PIXELS 65536
@@ -69,20 +66,19 @@ typedef unsigned int pixel;
 /*
  * The set of colors required to display a photo image in a window depends on:
  *	- the visual used by the window
- *	- the palette, which specifies how many levels of each primary
- *	  color to use, and
+ *	- the palette, which specifies how many levels of each primary color to
+ *	  use, and
  *	- the gamma value for the image.
  *
- * Pixel values allocated for specific colors are valid only for the
- * colormap in which they were allocated.  Sets of pixel values
- * allocated for displaying photos are re-used in other windows if
- * possible, that is, if the display, colormap, palette and gamma
- * values match.  A hash table is used to locate these sets of pixel
- * values, using the following data structure as key:
+ * Pixel values allocated for specific colors are valid only for the colormap
+ * in which they were allocated. Sets of pixel values allocated for displaying
+ * photos are re-used in other windows if possible, that is, if the display,
+ * colormap, palette and gamma values match. A hash table is used to locate
+ * these sets of pixel values, using the following data structure as key:
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    Display *display;		/* Qualifies the colormap resource ID */
+    Display *display;		/* Qualifies the colormap resource ID. */
     Colormap colormap;		/* Colormap that the windows are using. */
     double gamma;		/* Gamma exponent value for images. */
     Tk_Uid palette;		/* Specifies how many shades of each primary
@@ -90,33 +86,33 @@ typedef struct {
 } ColorTableId;
 
 /*
- * For a particular (display, colormap, palette, gamma) combination,
- * a data structure of the following type is used to store the allocated
- * pixel values and other information:
+ * For a particular (display, colormap, palette, gamma) combination, a data
+ * structure of the following type is used to store the allocated pixel values
+ * and other information:
  */
 
 typedef struct ColorTable {
-    ColorTableId id;		/* Information used in selecting this
-				 * color table. */
+    ColorTableId id;		/* Information used in selecting this color
+				 * table. */
     int	flags;			/* See below. */
     int	refCount;		/* Number of instances using this map. */
-    int liveRefCount;		/* Number of instances which are actually
-				 * in use, using this map. */
+    int liveRefCount;		/* Number of instances which are actually in
+				 * use, using this map. */
     int	numColors;		/* Number of colors allocated for this map. */
 
     XVisualInfo	visualInfo;	/* Information about the visual for windows
 				 * using this color table. */
 
-    pixel redValues[256];	/* Maps 8-bit values of red intensity
-				 * to a pixel value or index in pixelMap. */
-    pixel greenValues[256];	/* Ditto for green intensity */
-    pixel blueValues[256];	/* Ditto for blue intensity */
+    pixel redValues[256];	/* Maps 8-bit values of red intensity to a
+				 * pixel value or index in pixelMap. */
+    pixel greenValues[256];	/* Ditto for green intensity. */
+    pixel blueValues[256];	/* Ditto for blue intensity. */
     unsigned long *pixelMap;	/* Actual pixel values allocated. */
 
     unsigned char colorQuant[3][256];
 				/* Maps 8-bit intensities to quantized
-				 * intensities.  The first index is 0 for
-				 * red, 1 for green, 2 for blue. */
+				 * intensities. The first index is 0 for red,
+				 * 1 for green, 2 for blue. */
 } ColorTable;
 
 /*
@@ -125,12 +121,13 @@ typedef struct ColorTable {
  *				available.
  * COLOR_WINDOW:		1 means a full 3-D color cube has been
  *				allocated.
- * DISPOSE_PENDING:		1 means a call to DisposeColorTable has
- *				been scheduled as an idle handler, but it
- *				hasn't been invoked yet.
- * MAP_COLORS:			1 means pixel values should be mapped
- *				through pixelMap.
+ * DISPOSE_PENDING:		1 means a call to DisposeColorTable has been
+ *				scheduled as an idle handler, but it hasn't
+ *				been invoked yet.
+ * MAP_COLORS:			1 means pixel values should be mapped through
+ *				pixelMap.
  */
+
 #ifdef COLOR_WINDOW
 #undef COLOR_WINDOW
 #endif
@@ -145,14 +142,13 @@ typedef struct ColorTable {
  */
 
 typedef struct PhotoMaster {
-    Tk_ImageMaster tkMaster;	/* Tk's token for image master.  NULL means
-				 * the image is being deleted. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with the
-				 * application using this image. */
-    Tcl_Command imageCmd;	/* Token for image command (used to delete
-				 * it when the image goes away).  NULL means
-				 * the image command has already been
-				 * deleted. */
+    Tk_ImageMaster tkMaster;	/* Tk's token for image master. NULL means the
+				 * image is being deleted. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with the application
+				 * using this image. */
+    Tcl_Command imageCmd;	/* Token for image command (used to delete it
+				 * when the image goes away). NULL means the
+				 * image command has already been deleted. */
     int	flags;			/* Sundry flags, defined below. */
     int	width, height;		/* Dimensions of image. */
     int userWidth, userHeight;	/* User-declared image dimensions. */
@@ -161,26 +157,27 @@ typedef struct PhotoMaster {
     double gamma;		/* Display gamma value to correct for. */
     char *fileString;		/* Name of file to read into image. */
     Tcl_Obj *dataString;	/* Object to use as contents of image. */
-    Tcl_Obj *format;		/* User-specified format of data in image
-				 * file or string value. */
+    Tcl_Obj *format;		/* User-specified format of data in image file
+				 * or string value. */
     unsigned char *pix32;	/* Local storage for 32-bit image. */
-    int ditherX, ditherY;	/* Location of first incorrectly
-				 * dithered pixel in image. */
-    TkRegion validRegion;	/* Tk region indicating which parts of
-				 * the image have valid image data. */
+    int ditherX, ditherY;	/* Location of first incorrectly dithered
+				 * pixel in image. */
+    TkRegion validRegion;	/* Tk region indicating which parts of the
+				 * image have valid image data. */
     struct PhotoInstance *instancePtr;
-				/* First in the list of instances
-				 * associated with this master. */
+				/* First in the list of instances associated
+				 * with this master. */
 } PhotoMaster;
 
 /*
  * Bit definitions for the flags field of a PhotoMaster.
  * COLOR_IMAGE:			1 means that the image has different color
  *				components.
- * IMAGE_CHANGED:		1 means that the instances of this image
- *				need to be redithered.
- * COMPLEX_ALPHA:		1 means that the instances of this image
- *				have alpha values that aren't 0 or 255.
+ * IMAGE_CHANGED:		1 means that the instances of this image need
+ *				to be redithered.
+ * COMPLEX_ALPHA:		1 means that the instances of this image have
+ *				alpha values that aren't 0 or 255, and so need
+ *				the copy-merge-replace renderer .
  */
 
 #define COLOR_IMAGE		1
@@ -195,9 +192,8 @@ typedef struct PhotoMaster {
 #define SOURCE_IS_SIMPLE_ALPHA_PHOTO 0x10000000
 
 /*
- * The following data structure represents all of the instances of
- * a photo image in windows on a given screen that are using the
- * same colormap.
+ * The following data structure represents all of the instances of a photo
+ * image in windows on a given screen that are using the same colormap.
  */
 
 typedef struct PhotoInstance {
@@ -206,34 +202,34 @@ typedef struct PhotoInstance {
     Colormap colormap;		/* The image may only be used in windows with
 				 * this particular colormap. */
     struct PhotoInstance *nextPtr;
-				/* Pointer to the next instance in the list
-				 * of instances associated with this master. */
+				/* Pointer to the next instance in the list of
+				 * instances associated with this master. */
     int refCount;		/* Number of instances using this structure. */
     Tk_Uid palette;		/* Palette for these particular instances. */
     double gamma;		/* Gamma value for these instances. */
-    Tk_Uid defaultPalette;	/* Default palette to use if a palette
-				 * is not specified for the master. */
+    Tk_Uid defaultPalette;	/* Default palette to use if a palette is not
+				 * specified for the master. */
     ColorTable *colorTablePtr;	/* Pointer to information about colors
-				 * allocated for image display in windows
-				 * like this one. */
+				 * allocated for image display in windows like
+				 * this one. */
     Pixmap pixels;		/* X pixmap containing dithered image. */
     int width, height;		/* Dimensions of the pixmap. */
     schar *error;		/* Error image, used in dithering. */
     XImage *imagePtr;		/* Image structure for converted pixels. */
     XVisualInfo visualInfo;	/* Information about the visual that these
 				 * windows are using. */
-    GC gc;			/* Graphics context for writing images
-				 * to the pixmap. */
+    GC gc;			/* Graphics context for writing images to the
+				 * pixmap. */
 } PhotoInstance;
 
 /*
- * The following data structure is used to return information
- * from ParseSubcommandOptions:
+ * The following data structure is used to return information from
+ * ParseSubcommandOptions:
  */
 
 struct SubcommandOptions {
-    int options;		/* Individual bits indicate which
-				 * options were specified - see below. */
+    int options;		/* Individual bits indicate which options were
+				 * specified - see below. */
     Tcl_Obj *name;		/* Name specified without an option. */
     int fromX, fromY;		/* Values specified for -from option. */
     int fromX2, fromY2;		/* Second coordinate pair for -from option. */
@@ -243,15 +239,16 @@ struct SubcommandOptions {
     int subsampleX, subsampleY;	/* Values specified for -subsample option. */
     Tcl_Obj *format;		/* Value specified for -format option. */
     XColor *background;		/* Value specified for -background option. */
-    int compositingRule;	/* Value specified for -compositingrule opt */
+    int compositingRule;	/* Value specified for -compositingrule
+				 * option. */
 };
 
 /*
- * Bit definitions for use with ParseSubcommandOptions:
- * Each bit is set in the allowedOptions parameter on a call to
- * ParseSubcommandOptions if that option is allowed for the current
- * photo image subcommand.  On return, the bit is set in the options
- * field of the SubcommandOptions structure if that option was specified.
+ * Bit definitions for use with ParseSubcommandOptions: each bit is set in the
+ * allowedOptions parameter on a call to ParseSubcommandOptions if that option
+ * is allowed for the current photo image subcommand. On return, the bit is
+ * set in the options field of the SubcommandOptions structure if that option
+ * was specified.
  *
  * OPT_BACKGROUND:		Set if -format option allowed/specified.
  * OPT_COMPOSITE:		Set if -compositingrule option allowed/spec'd.
@@ -275,11 +272,11 @@ struct SubcommandOptions {
 #define OPT_ZOOM	0x100
 
 /*
- * List of option names.  The order here must match the order of
- * declarations of the OPT_* constants above.
+ * List of option names. The order here must match the order of declarations
+ * of the OPT_* constants above.
  */
 
-static char *optionNames[] = {
+static const char *const optionNames[] = {
     "-background",
     "-compositingrule",
     "-format",
@@ -289,13 +286,14 @@ static char *optionNames[] = {
     "-subsample",
     "-to",
     "-zoom",
-    (char *) NULL
+    NULL
 };
 
 /*
- * Message to generate when an attempt to resize an image fails due
- * to memory problems.
+ * Message to generate when an attempt to resize an image fails due to memory
+ * problems.
  */
+
 #define TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE \
 	"not enough free memory for image buffer"
 
@@ -303,23 +301,21 @@ static char *optionNames[] = {
  * Functions used in the type record for photo images.
  */
 
-static int		ImgPhotoCreate _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *name, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
+static int		ImgPhotoCreate(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *name,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
 			    Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageMaster master,
-			    ClientData *clientDataPtr));
-static ClientData	ImgPhotoGet _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		ImgPhotoDisplay _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    ClientData *clientDataPtr);
+static ClientData	ImgPhotoGet(Tk_Window tkwin, ClientData clientData);
+static void		ImgPhotoDisplay(ClientData clientData,
 			    Display *display, Drawable drawable,
 			    int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height,
-			    int drawableX, int drawableY));
-static void		ImgPhotoFree _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Display *display));
-static void		ImgPhotoDelete _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int		ImgPhotoPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    int drawableX, int drawableY);
+static void		ImgPhotoFree(ClientData clientData, Display *display);
+static void		ImgPhotoDelete(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ImgPhotoPostscript(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, int x, int y, int width,
-			    int height, int prepass));
+			    int height, int prepass);
 
 /*
  * The type record itself for photo images:
@@ -333,15 +329,18 @@ Tk_ImageType tkPhotoImageType = {
     ImgPhotoFree,		/* freeProc */
     ImgPhotoDelete,		/* deleteProc */
     ImgPhotoPostscript,		/* postscriptProc */
-    (Tk_ImageType *) NULL	/* nextPtr */
+    NULL			/* nextPtr */
 };
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatList;  /* Pointer to the first in the 
-				       * list of known photo image formats.*/
-    Tk_PhotoImageFormat *oldFormatList;  /* Pointer to the first in the 
-				       * list of known photo image formats.*/
-    int initialized;	/* set to 1 if we've initialized the strucuture */
+    Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatList;
+				/* Pointer to the first in the list of known
+				 * photo image formats.*/
+    Tk_PhotoImageFormat *oldFormatList;
+				/* Pointer to the first in the list of known
+				 * photo image formats.*/
+    int initialized;		/* Set to 1 if we've initialized the
+				 * strucuture. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
@@ -357,24 +356,24 @@ static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 /*
  * Information used for parsing configuration specifications:
  */
+
 static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-file", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	 (char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PhotoMaster, fileString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, "-gamma", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-file", NULL, NULL,
+	 NULL, Tk_Offset(PhotoMaster, fileString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, "-gamma", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PHOTO_GAMMA, Tk_Offset(PhotoMaster, gamma), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-height", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-height", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PHOTO_HEIGHT, Tk_Offset(PhotoMaster, userHeight), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_UID, "-palette", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_UID, "-palette", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PHOTO_PALETTE, Tk_Offset(PhotoMaster, palette), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-width", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-width", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PHOTO_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(PhotoMaster, userWidth), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	 (char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+    {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * Hash table used to hash from (display, colormap, palette, gamma)
- * to ColorTable address.
+ * Hash table used to hash from (display, colormap, palette, gamma) to
+ * ColorTable address.
  */
 
 static Tcl_HashTable imgPhotoColorHash;
@@ -394,61 +393,53 @@ static int imgPhotoColorHashInitialized;
  * Forward declarations
  */
 
-static void		PhotoFormatThreadExitProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static int		ImgPhotoCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		ParseSubcommandOptions _ANSI_ARGS_((
+static void		PhotoFormatThreadExitProc(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ImgPhotoCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		ParseSubcommandOptions(
 			    struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int allowedOptions,
-			    int *indexPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static int		ImgPhotoConfigureMaster _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, PhotoMaster *masterPtr,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags));
-static void		ImgPhotoConfigureInstance _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    PhotoInstance *instancePtr));
-static int              ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded _ANSI_ARGS_((
-                            PhotoMaster *mPtr));
-static void             ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    XImage *bgImg, PhotoInstance *iPtr,
-			    int xOffset, int yOffset, int width, int height));
-static int		ImgPhotoSetSize _ANSI_ARGS_((PhotoMaster *masterPtr,
-			    int width, int height));
-static void		ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    PhotoInstance *instancePtr));
-static int		ImgStringWrite _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int *indexPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    PhotoMaster *masterPtr, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int flags);
+static void		ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(PhotoInstance *instancePtr);
+static int		ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded(PhotoMaster *mPtr);
+static void		ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(XImage *bgImg,
+			    PhotoInstance *iPtr, int xOffset, int yOffset,
+			    int width, int height);
+static int		ImgPhotoSetSize(PhotoMaster *masterPtr, int width,
+			    int height);
+static void		ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(PhotoInstance *instancePtr);
+static int		ImgStringWrite(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tcl_Obj *formatString,
-			    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
-static char *		ImgGetPhoto _ANSI_ARGS_((PhotoMaster *masterPtr,
+			    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
+static char *		ImgGetPhoto(PhotoMaster *masterPtr,
 			    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
-			    struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr));
-static int		IsValidPalette _ANSI_ARGS_((PhotoInstance *instancePtr,
-			    CONST char *palette));
-static int		CountBits _ANSI_ARGS_((pixel mask));
-static void		GetColorTable _ANSI_ARGS_((PhotoInstance *instancePtr));
-static void		FreeColorTable _ANSI_ARGS_((ColorTable *colorPtr,
-			    int force));
-static void		AllocateColors _ANSI_ARGS_((ColorTable *colorPtr));
-static void		DisposeColorTable _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		DisposeInstance _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int		ReclaimColors _ANSI_ARGS_((ColorTableId *id,
-			    int numColors));
-static int		MatchFileFormat _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Channel chan, char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *formatString,
+			    struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr);
+static int		IsValidPalette(PhotoInstance *instancePtr,
+			    const char *palette);
+static int		CountBits(pixel mask);
+static void		GetColorTable(PhotoInstance *instancePtr);
+static void		FreeColorTable(ColorTable *colorPtr, int force);
+static void		AllocateColors(ColorTable *colorPtr);
+static void		DisposeColorTable(ClientData clientData);
+static void		DisposeInstance(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ReclaimColors(ColorTableId *id, int numColors);
+static int		MatchFileFormat(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan,
+			    char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *formatString,
 			    Tk_PhotoImageFormat **imageFormatPtr,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, int *oldformat));
-static int		MatchStringFormat _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *data, Tcl_Obj *formatString,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, int *oldformat);
+static int		MatchStringFormat(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *data,
+			    Tcl_Obj *formatString,
 			    Tk_PhotoImageFormat **imageFormatPtr,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, int *oldformat));
-static Tcl_ObjCmdProc *	PhotoOptionFind _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp * interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *obj));
-static void		DitherInstance _ANSI_ARGS_((PhotoInstance *instancePtr,
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
-static void		PhotoOptionCleanupProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp));
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, int *oldformat);
+static Tcl_ObjCmdProc *	PhotoOptionFind(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *obj);
+static void		DitherInstance(PhotoInstance *instancePtr, int x,
+			    int y, int width, int height);
+static void		PhotoOptionCleanupProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
 
 #undef MIN
 #define MIN(a, b)	((a) < (b)? (a): (b))
@@ -458,35 +449,30 @@ static void		PhotoOptionCleanupProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat, Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat --
+ * PhotoFormatThreadExitProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by an image file handler to register
- *	a new photo image format and the procedures that handle the
- *	new format.  The procedure is typically invoked during
- *	Tcl_AppInit.
+ *	Clean up the registered list of photo formats.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The new image file format is entered into a table used in the
- *	photo image "read" and "write" subcommands.
+ *	The thread's linked lists of photo image formats is deleted.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-PhotoFormatThreadExitProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* not used */
+PhotoFormatThreadExitProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* not used */
 {
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *freePtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     while (tsdPtr->oldFormatList != NULL) {
 	freePtr = tsdPtr->oldFormatList;
 	tsdPtr->oldFormatList = tsdPtr->oldFormatList->nextPtr;
-	ckfree((char *) freePtr->name);
 	ckfree((char *) freePtr);
     }
     while (tsdPtr->formatList != NULL) {
@@ -502,31 +488,30 @@ PhotoFormatThreadExitProc(clientData)
  *
  * Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat, Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by an image file handler to register
- *	a new photo image format and the procedures that handle the
- *	new format.  The procedure is typically invoked during
- *	Tcl_AppInit.
+ *	This function is invoked by an image file handler to register a new
+ *	photo image format and the functions that handle the new format. The
+ *	function is typically invoked during Tcl_AppInit.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The new image file format is entered into a table used in the
- *	photo image "read" and "write" subcommands.
+ *	The new image file format is entered into a table used in the photo
+ *	image "read" and "write" subcommands.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 void
-Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat(formatPtr)
-    Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr;
-				/* Structure describing the format.  All of
-				 * the fields except "nextPtr" must be filled
-				 * in by caller.  Must not have been passed
-				 * to Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat previously. */
+Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat(
+    Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr)
+				/* Structure describing the format. All of the
+				 * fields except "nextPtr" must be filled in
+				 * by caller. */
 {
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *copyPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (!tsdPtr->initialized) {
 	tsdPtr->initialized = 1;
@@ -534,23 +519,20 @@ Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat(formatPtr)
     }
     copyPtr = (Tk_PhotoImageFormat *) ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_PhotoImageFormat));
     *copyPtr = *formatPtr;
-    copyPtr->name = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(formatPtr->name) + 1));
-    strcpy(copyPtr->name, formatPtr->name);
     copyPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->oldFormatList;
     tsdPtr->oldFormatList = copyPtr;
 }
 
 void
-Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat(formatPtr)
-    Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr;
-				/* Structure describing the format.  All of
-				 * the fields except "nextPtr" must be filled
-				 * in by caller.  Must not have been passed
-				 * to Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat previously. */
+Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat(
+    Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr)
+				/* Structure describing the format. All of the
+				 * fields except "nextPtr" must be filled in
+				 * by caller. */
 {
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *copyPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (!tsdPtr->initialized) {
 	tsdPtr->initialized = 1;
@@ -558,12 +540,14 @@ Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat(formatPtr)
     }
     copyPtr = (Tk_PhotoImageFormat *) ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_PhotoImageFormat));
     *copyPtr = *formatPtr;
-    copyPtr->name = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(formatPtr->name) + 1));
-    strcpy(copyPtr->name, formatPtr->name);
     if (isupper((unsigned char) *formatPtr->name)) {
 	copyPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->oldFormatList;
 	tsdPtr->oldFormatList = copyPtr;
     } else {
+	/* for compatibility with aMSN: make a copy of formatPtr->name */
+	char *name = ckalloc(strlen(formatPtr->name) + 1);
+	strcpy(name, formatPtr->name);
+	copyPtr->name = name;
 	copyPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->formatList;
 	tsdPtr->formatList = copyPtr;
     }
@@ -574,32 +558,31 @@ Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat(formatPtr)
  *
  * ImgPhotoCreate --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the Tk image code to create
- *	a new photo image.
+ *	This function is called by the Tk image code to create a new photo
+ *	image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The data structure for a new photo image is allocated and
- *	initialized.
+ *	The data structure for a new photo image is allocated and initialized.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ImgPhotoCreate(interp, name, objc, objv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for application containing
+ImgPhotoCreate(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for application containing
 				 * image. */
-    char *name;			/* Name to use for image. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects for options (doesn't
+    char *name,			/* Name to use for image. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Argument objects for options (doesn't
 				 * include image name or type). */
-    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
-    Tk_ImageMaster master;	/* Token for image, to be used by us in
-				 * later callbacks. */
-    ClientData *clientDataPtr;	/* Store manager's token for image here;
-				 * it will be returned in later callbacks. */
+    Tk_ImageType *typePtr,	/* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
+    Tk_ImageMaster master,	/* Token for image, to be used by us in later
+				 * callbacks. */
+    ClientData *clientDataPtr)	/* Store manager's token for image here; it
+				 * will be returned in later callbacks. */
 {
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
 
@@ -608,7 +591,7 @@ ImgPhotoCreate(interp, name, objc, objv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
      */
 
     masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) ckalloc(sizeof(PhotoMaster));
-    memset((void *) masterPtr, 0, sizeof(PhotoMaster));
+    memset(masterPtr, 0, sizeof(PhotoMaster));
     masterPtr->tkMaster = master;
     masterPtr->interp = interp;
     masterPtr->imageCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, name, ImgPhotoCmd,
@@ -636,9 +619,9 @@ ImgPhotoCreate(interp, name, objc, objv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
  *
  * ImgPhotoCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command that
- *	corresponds to a photo image.  See the user documentation
- *	for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a photo image. See the user documentation for details on what it
+ *	does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -650,42 +633,35 @@ ImgPhotoCreate(interp, name, objc, objv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about photo master. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+ImgPhotoCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about photo master. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    int oldformat = 0;
-    static CONST char *photoOptions[] = {
+    static const char *photoOptions[] = {
 	"blank", "cget", "configure", "copy", "data", "get", "put",
-	"read", "redither", "transparency", "write", (char *) NULL
+	"read", "redither", "transparency", "write", NULL
     };
-    enum options {
+    enum PhotoOptions {
 	PHOTO_BLANK, PHOTO_CGET, PHOTO_CONFIGURE, PHOTO_COPY, PHOTO_DATA,
 	PHOTO_GET, PHOTO_PUT, PHOTO_READ, PHOTO_REDITHER, PHOTO_TRANS,
 	PHOTO_WRITE
     };
 
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) clientData;
-    int result, index;
-    int x, y, width, height;
-    int dataWidth, dataHeight;
+    int result, index, x, y, width, height, dataWidth, dataHeight, listObjc;
     struct SubcommandOptions options;
-    int listArgc;
-    CONST char **listArgv;
-    CONST char **srcArgv;
+    Tcl_Obj **listObjv, **srcObjv;
     unsigned char *pixelPtr;
     Tk_PhotoImageBlock block;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
-    XColor color;
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *imageFormat;
-    int imageWidth, imageHeight;
-    int length, matched;
+    int imageWidth, imageHeight, matched, length, oldformat = 0;
     Tcl_Channel chan;
     Tk_PhotoHandle srcHandle;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (objc < 2) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
@@ -696,13 +672,13 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	Tcl_ObjCmdProc *proc;
 	proc = PhotoOptionFind(interp, objv[1]);
-	if (proc == (Tcl_ObjCmdProc *) NULL) {
+	if (proc == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	return proc(clientData, interp, objc, objv);
     }
 
-    switch ((enum options) index) {
+    switch ((enum PhotoOptions) index) {
     case PHOTO_BLANK:
 	/*
 	 * photo blank command - just call Tk_PhotoBlank.
@@ -712,7 +688,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Tk_PhotoBlank(masterPtr);
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	} else {
-	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
@@ -746,53 +722,51 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	if (objc == 2) {
 	    Tcl_Obj *obj, *subobj;
+
 	    result = Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-		    configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr, (char *) NULL, 0);
+		    configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr, NULL, 0);
 	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
 		return result;
 	    }
 	    obj = Tcl_NewObj();
 	    subobj = Tcl_NewStringObj("-data {} {} {}", 14);
 	    if (masterPtr->dataString) {
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, subobj, masterPtr->dataString);
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, subobj, masterPtr->dataString);
 	    } else {
-		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(subobj, " {}", (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(subobj, " {}", NULL);
 	    }
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
 	    subobj = Tcl_NewStringObj("-format {} {} {}", 16);
 	    if (masterPtr->format) {
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, subobj, masterPtr->format);
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, subobj, masterPtr->format);
 	    } else {
-		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(subobj, " {}", (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(subobj, " {}", NULL);
 	    }
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendList(interp, obj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
 	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, obj);
 	    return TCL_OK;
-	}
-	if (objc == 3) {
+
+	} else if (objc == 3) {
 	    char *arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], &length);
 
-	    if (!strncmp(arg, "-data", (unsigned) length)) {
-		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-			"-data {} {} {}", (char *) NULL);
+	    if (length > 1 && !strncmp(arg, "-data", (unsigned) length)) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "-data {} {} {}", NULL);
 		if (masterPtr->dataString) {
 		    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
 			    masterPtr->dataString);
 		} else {
-		    Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-			    " {}", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " {}", NULL);
 		}
 		return TCL_OK;
-	    } else if (!strncmp(arg, "-format", (unsigned) length)) {
-		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-			"-format {} {} {}", (char *) NULL);
+	    } else if (length > 1 &&
+		    !strncmp(arg, "-format", (unsigned) length)) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "-format {} {} {}", NULL);
 		if (masterPtr->format) {
 		    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
 			    masterPtr->format);
 		} else {
-		    Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-			    " {}", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " {}", NULL);
 		}
 		return TCL_OK;
 	    } else {
@@ -809,7 +783,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	 */
 
 	index = 2;
-	memset((VOID *) &options, 0, sizeof(options));
+	memset(&options, 0, sizeof(options));
 	options.zoomX = options.zoomY = 1;
 	options.subsampleX = options.subsampleY = 1;
 	options.name = NULL;
@@ -834,7 +808,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	if (srcHandle == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"",
 		    Tcl_GetString(options.name), "\" doesn't",
-		    " exist or is not a photo image", (char *) NULL);
+		    " exist or is not a photo image", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	Tk_PhotoGetImage(srcHandle, &block);
@@ -842,7 +816,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		|| (options.fromX2 > block.width)
 		|| (options.fromY2 > block.height)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "coordinates for -from option extend ",
-		    "outside source image", (char *) NULL);
+		    "outside source image", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
@@ -895,8 +869,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    if (ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, options.toX2,
 		    options.toY2) != TCL_OK) {
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-			TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
@@ -909,12 +882,11 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		+ options.fromY * block.pitch;
 	block.width = options.fromX2 - options.fromX;
 	block.height = options.fromY2 - options.fromY;
-	Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock((Tk_PhotoHandle) masterPtr, &block,
-		options.toX, options.toY, options.toX2 - options.toX,
+	return Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(interp, (Tk_PhotoHandle) masterPtr,
+		&block, options.toX, options.toY, options.toX2 - options.toX,
 		options.toY2 - options.toY, options.zoomX, options.zoomY,
 		options.subsampleX, options.subsampleY,
 		options.compositingRule);
-	return TCL_OK;
 
     case PHOTO_DATA: {
 	char *data;
@@ -922,10 +894,11 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	/*
 	 * photo data command - first parse and check any options given.
 	 */
+
 	Tk_ImageStringWriteProc *stringWriteProc = NULL;
 
 	index = 2;
-	memset((VOID *) &options, 0, sizeof(options));
+	memset(&options, 0, sizeof(options));
 	options.name = NULL;
 	options.format = NULL;
 	options.fromX = 0;
@@ -944,7 +917,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		|| (options.fromX2 > masterPtr->width)
 		|| (options.fromY2 > masterPtr->height)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "coordinates for -from option extend ",
-		    "outside image", (char *) NULL);
+		    "outside image", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
@@ -992,8 +965,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    if (stringWriteProc == NULL) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image string format \"",
 			Tcl_GetString(options.format), "\" is ",
-			(matched ? "not supported" : "unknown"),
-			(char *) NULL);
+			(matched ? "not supported" : "unknown"), NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	} else {
@@ -1001,8 +973,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Call the handler's string write procedure to write out
-	 * the image.
+	 * Call the handler's string write function to write out the image.
 	 */
 
 	data = ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, &block, &options);
@@ -1011,9 +982,9 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Tcl_DString buffer;
 
 	    Tcl_DStringInit(&buffer);
-	    result = ((int (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-		    Tcl_DString *buffer, char *formatString,
-		    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr))) stringWriteProc)
+	    result = ((int (*) (Tcl_Interp *interp,
+		    Tcl_DString *dataPtr, char *formatString,
+		    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)) stringWriteProc)
 		    (interp, &buffer, Tcl_GetString(options.format), &block);
 	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
 		Tcl_DStringResult(interp, &buffer);
@@ -1021,10 +992,11 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		Tcl_DStringFree(&buffer);
 	    }
 	} else {
-	    result = ((int (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+
+	    result = ((int (*) (Tcl_Interp *interp,
 		    Tcl_Obj *formatString, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
-		    VOID *dummy))) stringWriteProc)
-		    (interp, options.format, &block, (VOID *) NULL);
+		    void *dummy)) stringWriteProc)
+		    (interp, options.format, &block, NULL);
 	}
 	if (options.background) {
 	    Tk_FreeColor(options.background);
@@ -1053,7 +1025,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	if ((x < 0) || (x >= masterPtr->width)
 		|| (y < 0) || (y >= masterPtr->height)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), " get: ",
-		    "coordinates out of range", (char *) NULL);
+		    "coordinates out of range", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
@@ -1064,7 +1036,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	pixelPtr = masterPtr->pix32 + (y * masterPtr->width + x) * 4;
 	sprintf(string, "%d %d %d", pixelPtr[0], pixelPtr[1],
 		pixelPtr[2]);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, string, NULL);
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
@@ -1074,7 +1046,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	 */
 
 	index = 2;
-	memset((VOID *) &options, 0, sizeof(options));
+	memset(&options, 0, sizeof(options));
 	options.name = NULL;
 	if (ParseSubcommandOptions(&options, interp, OPT_TO|OPT_FORMAT,
 		&index, objc, objv) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1085,7 +1057,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
-	if (MatchStringFormat(interp, options.name ? objv[2]:NULL, 
+	if (MatchStringFormat(interp, options.name ? objv[2]:NULL,
 		options.format, &imageFormat, &imageWidth,
 		&imageHeight, &oldformat) == TCL_OK) {
 	    Tcl_Obj *format, *data;
@@ -1121,8 +1093,8 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, Tcl_GetString(options.name),
-		&dataHeight, &srcArgv) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, options.name,
+		&dataHeight, &srcObjv) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	tkwin = Tk_MainWindow(interp);
@@ -1130,44 +1102,80 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	dataWidth = 0;
 	pixelPtr = NULL;
 	for (y = 0; y < dataHeight; ++y) {
-	    if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, srcArgv[y], &listArgc, &listArgv)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
+	    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, srcObjv[y],
+		    &listObjc, &listObjv) != TCL_OK) {
 		break;
 	    }
+
 	    if (y == 0) {
-		if (listArgc == 0) {
+		if (listObjc == 0) {
 		    /*
 		     * Lines must be non-empty...
 		     */
+
 		    break;
 		}
-		dataWidth = listArgc;
+		dataWidth = listObjc;
 		pixelPtr = (unsigned char *)
 			ckalloc((unsigned) dataWidth * dataHeight * 3);
 		block.pixelPtr = pixelPtr;
-	    } else if (listArgc != dataWidth) {
+	    } else if (listObjc != dataWidth) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "all elements of color list must",
-			" have the same number of elements", (char *) NULL);
-		ckfree((char *) listArgv);
+			" have the same number of elements", NULL);
 		break;
 	    }
+
 	    for (x = 0; x < dataWidth; ++x) {
+		char *colorString = Tcl_GetString(listObjv[x]);
+		XColor color;
+		int tmpr, tmpg, tmpb;
+
+		/*
+		 * We do not use Tk_GetColorFromObj() because we absolutely do
+		 * not want to invoke the fallback code.
+		 */
+
+		if (colorString[0] == '#') {
+		    if (isxdigit(UCHAR(colorString[1])) &&
+			    isxdigit(UCHAR(colorString[2])) &&
+			    isxdigit(UCHAR(colorString[3]))) {
+			if (colorString[4] == '\0') {
+			    /* Got #rgb */
+			    sscanf(colorString+1, "%1x%1x%1x",
+				    &tmpr, &tmpg, &tmpb);
+			    *pixelPtr++ = tmpr * 0x11;
+			    *pixelPtr++ = tmpg * 0x11;
+			    *pixelPtr++ = tmpb * 0x11;
+			    continue;
+			} else if (isxdigit(UCHAR(colorString[4])) &&
+				isxdigit(UCHAR(colorString[5])) &&
+				isxdigit(UCHAR(colorString[6])) &&
+				colorString[7] == '\0') {
+			    /* Got #rrggbb */
+			    sscanf(colorString+1, "%2x%2x%2x",
+				    &tmpr, &tmpg, &tmpb);
+			    *pixelPtr++ = tmpr;
+			    *pixelPtr++ = tmpg;
+			    *pixelPtr++ = tmpb;
+			    continue;
+			}
+		    }
+		}
+
 		if (!TkParseColor(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_Colormap(tkwin),
-			listArgv[x], &color)) {
+			colorString, &color)) {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't parse color \"",
-			    listArgv[x], "\"", (char *) NULL);
+			    colorString, "\"", NULL);
 		    break;
 		}
 		*pixelPtr++ = color.red >> 8;
 		*pixelPtr++ = color.green >> 8;
 		*pixelPtr++ = color.blue >> 8;
 	    }
-	    ckfree((char *) listArgv);
 	    if (x < dataWidth) {
 		break;
 	    }
 	}
-	ckfree((char *) srcArgv);
 	if (y < dataHeight || dataHeight == 0 || dataWidth == 0) {
 	    if (block.pixelPtr != NULL) {
 		ckfree((char *) block.pixelPtr);
@@ -1179,8 +1187,8 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Fill in default values for the -to option, then
-	 * copy the block in using Tk_PhotoPutBlock.
+	 * Fill in default values for the -to option, then copy the block in
+	 * using Tk_PhotoPutBlock.
 	 */
 
 	if (!(options.options & OPT_TO) || (options.toX2 < 0)) {
@@ -1195,11 +1203,12 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	block.offset[1] = 1;
 	block.offset[2] = 2;
 	block.offset[3] = 0;
-	Tk_PhotoPutBlock((ClientData)masterPtr, &block,
+	result = Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, (ClientData)masterPtr, &block,
 		options.toX, options.toY, options.toX2 - options.toX,
-		options.toY2 - options.toY, TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET);
+		options.toY2 - options.toY,
+		TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET);
 	ckfree((char *) block.pixelPtr);
-	return TCL_OK;
+	return result;
 
     case PHOTO_READ: {
 	Tcl_Obj *format;
@@ -1209,7 +1218,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	 */
 
 	index = 2;
-	memset((VOID *) &options, 0, sizeof(options));
+	memset(&options, 0, sizeof(options));
 	options.name = NULL;
 	options.format = NULL;
 	if (ParseSubcommandOptions(&options, interp,
@@ -1222,16 +1231,16 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
-        /*
-         * Prevent file system access in safe interpreters.
-         */
+	/*
+	 * Prevent file system access in safe interpreters.
+	 */
+
+	if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't get image from a file in a",
+		    " safe interpreter", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-        if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
-            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't get image from a file in a",
-		    " safe interpreter", (char *) NULL);
-            return TCL_ERROR;
-        }
-        
 	/*
 	 * Open the image file and look for a handler for it.
 	 */
@@ -1241,17 +1250,17 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	if (chan == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-        if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, chan, "-translation", "binary")
+	if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, chan, "-translation", "binary")
 		!= TCL_OK) {
 	    Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
-            return TCL_ERROR;
-        }
-        if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, chan, "-encoding", "binary")
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, chan, "-encoding", "binary")
 		!= TCL_OK) {
 	    Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
-            return TCL_ERROR;
-        }
-    
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
 	if (MatchFileFormat(interp, chan,
 		Tcl_GetString(options.name), options.format, &imageFormat,
 		&imageWidth, &imageHeight, &oldformat) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1267,7 +1276,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		|| (options.fromX2 > imageWidth)
 		|| (options.fromY2 > imageHeight)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "coordinates for -from option extend ",
-		    "outside source image", (char *) NULL);
+		    "outside source image", NULL);
 	    Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
@@ -1287,15 +1296,14 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    if (ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, options.toX + width,
 		    options.toY + height) != TCL_OK) {
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-			TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Call the handler's file read procedure to read the data
-	 * into the image.
+	 * Call the handler's file read function to read the data into the
+	 * image.
 	 */
 
 	format = options.format;
@@ -1314,13 +1322,13 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
     case PHOTO_REDITHER:
 	if (objc != 2) {
-	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Call Dither if any part of the image is not correctly
-	 * dithered at present.
+	 * Call Dither if any part of the image is not correctly dithered at
+	 * present.
 	 */
 
 	x = masterPtr->ditherX;
@@ -1348,8 +1356,8 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_OK;
 
     case PHOTO_TRANS: {
-	static CONST char *photoTransOptions[] = {
-	    "get", "set", (char *) NULL
+	static const char *photoTransOptions[] = {
+	    "get", "set", NULL
 	};
 	enum transOptions {
 	    PHOTO_TRANS_GET, PHOTO_TRANS_SET
@@ -1380,8 +1388,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    if ((x < 0) || (x >= masterPtr->width)
 		|| (y < 0) || (y >= masterPtr->height)) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[0]),
-			" transparency get: coordinates out of range",
-			(char *) NULL);
+			" transparency get: coordinates out of range", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 
@@ -1418,8 +1425,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    if ((x < 0) || (x >= masterPtr->width)
 		|| (y < 0) || (y >= masterPtr->height)) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[0]),
-			" transparency set: coordinates out of range",
-			(char *) NULL);
+			" transparency set: coordinates out of range", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 
@@ -1433,20 +1439,24 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		/*
 		 * Make pixel transparent.
 		 */
+
 		TkRegion clearRegion = TkCreateRegion();
 
 		TkUnionRectWithRegion(&setBox, clearRegion, clearRegion);
 		TkSubtractRegion(masterPtr->validRegion, clearRegion,
 			masterPtr->validRegion);
 		TkDestroyRegion(clearRegion);
+
 		/*
 		 * Set the alpha value correctly.
 		 */
+
 		pixelPtr[3] = 0;
 	    } else {
 		/*
 		 * Make pixel opaque.
 		 */
+
 		TkUnionRectWithRegion(&setBox, masterPtr->validRegion,
 			masterPtr->validRegion);
 		pixelPtr[3] = 255;
@@ -1462,31 +1472,31 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    masterPtr->flags &= ~IMAGE_CHANGED;
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
-	}
 
-	panic("unexpected fallthrough");
+	}
+	Tcl_Panic("unexpected fallthrough");
     }
 
     case PHOTO_WRITE: {
 	char *data;
 	Tcl_Obj *format;
 
-        /*
-         * Prevent file system access in safe interpreters.
-         */
+	/*
+	 * Prevent file system access in safe interpreters.
+	 */
+
+	if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't write image to a file in a",
+		    " safe interpreter", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-        if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
-            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't write image to a file in a",
-		    " safe interpreter", (char *) NULL);
-            return TCL_ERROR;
-        }
-        
 	/*
 	 * photo write command - first parse and check any options given.
 	 */
 
 	index = 2;
-	memset((VOID *) &options, 0, sizeof(options));
+	memset(&options, 0, sizeof(options));
 	options.name = NULL;
 	options.format = NULL;
 	if (ParseSubcommandOptions(&options, interp,
@@ -1503,7 +1513,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		|| (options.fromX2 > masterPtr->width)
 		|| (options.fromY2 > masterPtr->height)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "coordinates for -from option extend ",
-		    "outside image", (char *) NULL);
+		    "outside image", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
@@ -1517,8 +1527,8 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Search for an appropriate image file format handler,
-	 * and give an error if none is found.
+	 * Search for an appropriate image file format handler, and give an
+	 * error if none is found.
 	 */
 
 	matched = 0;
@@ -1550,23 +1560,21 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	if (imageFormat == NULL) {
 	    if (options.format == NULL) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no available image file format ",
-			"has file writing capability", (char *) NULL);
+			"has file writing capability", NULL);
 	    } else if (!matched) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image file format \"",
 			Tcl_GetString(options.format),
-			"\" is unknown", (char *) NULL);
+			"\" is unknown", NULL);
 	    } else {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image file format \"",
 			Tcl_GetString(options.format),
-			"\" has no file writing capability",
-			(char *) NULL);
+			"\" has no file writing capability", NULL);
 	    }
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Call the handler's file write procedure to write out
-	 * the image.
+	 * Call the handler's file write function to write out the image.
 	 */
 
 	data = ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, &block, &options);
@@ -1586,7 +1594,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     }
-    panic("unexpected fallthrough");
+    Tcl_Panic("unexpected fallthrough");
     return TCL_ERROR; /* NOT REACHED */
 }
 
@@ -1595,10 +1603,9 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ParseSubcommandOptions --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process one of the options
- *	which may be specified for the photo image subcommands,
- *	namely, -from, -to, -zoom, -subsample, -format, -shrink,
- *	and -compositingrule.
+ *	This function is invoked to process one of the options which may be
+ *	specified for the photo image subcommands, namely, -from, -to, -zoom,
+ *	-subsample, -format, -shrink, and -compositingrule.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -1610,29 +1617,28 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
-    struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr;
-				/* Information about the options specified
-				 * and the values given is returned here. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
-    int allowedOptions;		/* Indicates which options are valid for
-				 * the current command. */
-    int *optIndexPtr;		/* Points to a variable containing the
-				 * current index in objv; this variable is
-				 * updated by this procedure. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments in objv[]. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments to be parsed. */
+ParseSubcommandOptions(
+    struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr,
+				/* Information about the options specified and
+				 * the values given is returned here. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
+    int allowedOptions,		/* Indicates which options are valid for the
+				 * current command. */
+    int *optIndexPtr,		/* Points to a variable containing the current
+				 * index in objv; this variable is updated by
+				 * this function. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments in objv[]. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Arguments to be parsed. */
 {
-    int index, c, bit, currentBit;
-    int length;
-    char *option, **listPtr;
-    int values[4];
-    int numValues, maxValues, argIndex;
+    int index, c, bit, currentBit, length;
+    int values[4], numValues, maxValues, argIndex;
+    char *option;
+    const char *const *listPtr;
 
     for (index = *optIndexPtr; index < objc; *optIndexPtr = ++index) {
 	/*
-	 * We can have one value specified without an option;
-	 * it goes into optPtr->name.
+	 * We can have one value specified without an option; it goes into
+	 * optPtr->name.
 	 */
 
 	option = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[index], &length);
@@ -1664,24 +1670,24 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If this option is not recognized and allowed, put
-	 * an error message in the interpreter and return.
+	 * If this option is not recognized and allowed, put an error message
+	 * in the interpreter and return.
 	 */
 
 	if ((allowedOptions & bit) == 0) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unrecognized option \"",
 	    	    Tcl_GetString(objv[index]),
-		    "\": must be ", (char *)NULL);
+		    "\": must be ", NULL);
 	    bit = 1;
 	    for (listPtr = optionNames; *listPtr != NULL; ++listPtr) {
 		if ((allowedOptions & bit) != 0) {
 		    if ((allowedOptions & (bit - 1)) != 0) {
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ", ", (char *) NULL);
+			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ", ", NULL);
 			if ((allowedOptions & ~((bit << 1) - 1)) == 0) {
-			    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "or ", (char *) NULL);
+			    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "or ", NULL);
 			}
 		    }
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, *listPtr, (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, *listPtr, NULL);
 		}
 		bit <<= 1;
 	    }
@@ -1689,9 +1695,8 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * For the -from, -to, -zoom and -subsample options,
-	 * parse the values given.  Report an error if too few
-	 * or too many values are given.
+	 * For the -from, -to, -zoom and -subsample options, parse the values
+	 * given. Report an error if too few or too many values are given.
 	 */
 
 	if (bit == OPT_BACKGROUND) {
@@ -1708,14 +1713,13 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 		}
 	    } else {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "the \"-background\" option ",
-			"requires a value", (char *) NULL);
+			"requires a value", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	} else if (bit == OPT_FORMAT) {
 	    /*
-	     * The -format option takes a single string value.  Note
-	     * that parsing this is outside the scope of this
-	     * function.
+	     * The -format option takes a single string value. Note that
+	     * parsing this is outside the scope of this function.
 	     */
 
 	    if (index + 1 < objc) {
@@ -1723,13 +1727,13 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 		optPtr->format = objv[index];
 	    } else {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "the \"-format\" option ",
-			"requires a value", (char *) NULL);
+			"requires a value", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	} else if (bit == OPT_COMPOSITE) {
 	    /*
-	     * The -compositingrule option takes a single value from
-	     * a well-known set.
+	     * The -compositingrule option takes a single value from a
+	     * well-known set.
 	     */
 
 	    if (index + 1 < objc) {
@@ -1737,9 +1741,9 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 		 * Note that these must match the TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_*
 		 * constants.
 		 */
-		static CONST char *compositingRules[] = {
-		    "overlay", "set",
-		    NULL
+
+		static const char *compositingRules[] = {
+		    "overlay", "set", NULL
 		};
 
 		index++;
@@ -1751,7 +1755,7 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 		*optIndexPtr = index;
 	    } else {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "the \"-compositingrule\" option ",
-			"requires a value", (char *) NULL);
+			"requires a value", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	} else if ((bit != OPT_SHRINK) && (bit != OPT_GRAYSCALE)) {
@@ -1762,7 +1766,7 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 		if (argIndex >= objc) {
 		    break;
 		}
-	        val = Tcl_GetString(objv[argIndex]);
+		val = Tcl_GetString(objv[argIndex]);
 		if ((argIndex < objc) && (isdigit(UCHAR(val[0]))
 			|| ((val[0] == '-') && isdigit(UCHAR(val[1]))))) {
 		    if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, val, &values[numValues])
@@ -1778,7 +1782,7 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 	    if (numValues == 0) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "the \"", option, "\" option ",
 			 "requires one ", maxValues == 2? "or two": "to four",
-			 " integer values", (char *) NULL);
+			 " integer values", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    *optIndexPtr = (index += numValues);
@@ -1795,62 +1799,62 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Check the values given and put them in the appropriate
-	     * field of the SubcommandOptions structure.
+	     * Check the values given and put them in the appropriate field of
+	     * the SubcommandOptions structure.
 	     */
 
 	    switch (bit) {
-		case OPT_FROM:
-		    if ((values[0] < 0) || (values[1] < 0) || ((numValues > 2)
-			    && ((values[2] < 0) || (values[3] < 0)))) {
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value(s) for the -from",
-				" option must be non-negative", (char *) NULL);
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    if (numValues <= 2) {
-			optPtr->fromX = values[0];
-			optPtr->fromY = values[1];
-			optPtr->fromX2 = -1;
-			optPtr->fromY2 = -1;
-		    } else {
-			optPtr->fromX = MIN(values[0], values[2]);
-			optPtr->fromY = MIN(values[1], values[3]);
-			optPtr->fromX2 = MAX(values[0], values[2]);
-			optPtr->fromY2 = MAX(values[1], values[3]);
-		    }
-		    break;
-		case OPT_SUBSAMPLE:
-		    optPtr->subsampleX = values[0];
-		    optPtr->subsampleY = values[1];
-		    break;
-		case OPT_TO:
-		    if ((values[0] < 0) || (values[1] < 0) || ((numValues > 2)
-			    && ((values[2] < 0) || (values[3] < 0)))) {
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value(s) for the -to",
-				" option must be non-negative", (char *) NULL);
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    if (numValues <= 2) {
-			optPtr->toX = values[0];
-			optPtr->toY = values[1];
-			optPtr->toX2 = -1;
-			optPtr->toY2 = -1;
-		    } else {
-			optPtr->toX = MIN(values[0], values[2]);
-			optPtr->toY = MIN(values[1], values[3]);
-			optPtr->toX2 = MAX(values[0], values[2]);
-			optPtr->toY2 = MAX(values[1], values[3]);
-		    }
-		    break;
-		case OPT_ZOOM:
-		    if ((values[0] <= 0) || (values[1] <= 0)) {
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value(s) for the -zoom",
-				" option must be positive", (char *) NULL);
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    optPtr->zoomX = values[0];
-		    optPtr->zoomY = values[1];
-		    break;
+	    case OPT_FROM:
+		if ((values[0] < 0) || (values[1] < 0) || ((numValues > 2)
+			&& ((values[2] < 0) || (values[3] < 0)))) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value(s) for the -from",
+			    " option must be non-negative", NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		if (numValues <= 2) {
+		    optPtr->fromX = values[0];
+		    optPtr->fromY = values[1];
+		    optPtr->fromX2 = -1;
+		    optPtr->fromY2 = -1;
+		} else {
+		    optPtr->fromX = MIN(values[0], values[2]);
+		    optPtr->fromY = MIN(values[1], values[3]);
+		    optPtr->fromX2 = MAX(values[0], values[2]);
+		    optPtr->fromY2 = MAX(values[1], values[3]);
+		}
+		break;
+	    case OPT_SUBSAMPLE:
+		optPtr->subsampleX = values[0];
+		optPtr->subsampleY = values[1];
+		break;
+	    case OPT_TO:
+		if ((values[0] < 0) || (values[1] < 0) || ((numValues > 2)
+			&& ((values[2] < 0) || (values[3] < 0)))) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value(s) for the -to",
+			    " option must be non-negative", NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		if (numValues <= 2) {
+		    optPtr->toX = values[0];
+		    optPtr->toY = values[1];
+		    optPtr->toX2 = -1;
+		    optPtr->toY2 = -1;
+		} else {
+		    optPtr->toX = MIN(values[0], values[2]);
+		    optPtr->toY = MIN(values[1], values[3]);
+		    optPtr->toX2 = MAX(values[0], values[2]);
+		    optPtr->toY2 = MAX(values[1], values[3]);
+		}
+		break;
+	    case OPT_ZOOM:
+		if ((values[0] <= 0) || (values[1] <= 0)) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value(s) for the -zoom",
+			    " option must be positive", NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		optPtr->zoomX = values[0];
+		optPtr->zoomY = values[1];
+		break;
 	    }
 	}
 
@@ -1869,45 +1873,42 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ImgPhotoConfigureMaster --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when a photo image is created or
- *	reconfigured.  It processes configuration options and resets
- *	any instances of the image.
+ *	This function is called when a photo image is created or reconfigured.
+ *	It processes configuration options and resets any instances of the
+ *	image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If TCL_ERROR is returned then
- *	an error message is left in the masterPtr->interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the masterPtr->interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Existing instances of the image will be redisplayed to match
- *	the new configuration options.
+ *	Existing instances of the image will be redisplayed to match the new
+ *	configuration options.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
-    PhotoMaster *masterPtr;	/* Pointer to data structure describing
+ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
+    PhotoMaster *masterPtr,	/* Pointer to data structure describing
 				 * overall photo image to (re)configure. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of entries in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Pairs of configuration options for image. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget,
-				 * such as TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of entries in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[],	/* Pairs of configuration options for image. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget, such
+				 * as TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY. */
 {
     PhotoInstance *instancePtr;
-    CONST char *oldFileString, *oldPaletteString;
+    const char *oldFileString, *oldPaletteString;
     Tcl_Obj *oldData, *data = NULL, *oldFormat, *format = NULL;
-    int length, i, j;
+    Tcl_Obj *tempdata, *tempformat;
+    int length, i, j, result, imageWidth, imageHeight, oldformat;
     double oldGamma;
-    int result;
     Tcl_Channel chan;
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *imageFormat;
-    int imageWidth, imageHeight;
-    CONST char **args;
-    int oldformat;
-    Tcl_Obj *tempdata, *tempformat;
+    const char **args;
 
-    args = (CONST char **) ckalloc((objc + 1) * sizeof(char *));
+    args = (const char **) ckalloc((objc + 1) * sizeof(char *));
     for (i = 0, j = 0; i < objc; i++,j++) {
 	args[j] = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
 	if ((length > 1) && (args[j][0] == '-')) {
@@ -1918,7 +1919,7 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 		    j--;
 		} else {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-			    "value for \"-data\" missing", (char *) NULL);
+			    "value for \"-data\" missing", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 	    } else if ((args[j][1] == 'f') &&
@@ -1928,7 +1929,7 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 		    j--;
 		} else {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-			    "value for \"-format\" missing", (char *) NULL);
+			    "value for \"-format\" missing", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 	    }
@@ -1936,12 +1937,10 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Save the current values for fileString and dataString, so we
-     * can tell if the user specifies them anew.
-     * IMPORTANT: if the format changes we have to interpret
-     * "-file" and "-data" again as well!!!!!!! It might be
-     * that the format string influences how "-data" or "-file"
-     * is interpreted.
+     * Save the current values for fileString and dataString, so we can tell
+     * if the user specifies them anew. IMPORTANT: if the format changes we
+     * have to interpret "-file" and "-data" again as well! It might be that
+     * the format string influences how "-data" or "-file" is interpreted.
      */
 
     oldFileString = masterPtr->fileString;
@@ -1972,8 +1971,7 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     ckfree((char *) args);
 
     /*
-     * Regard the empty string for -file, -data or -format as the null
-     * value.
+     * Regard the empty string for -file, -data or -format as the null value.
      */
 
     if ((masterPtr->fileString != NULL) && (masterPtr->fileString[0] == 0)) {
@@ -1982,9 +1980,10 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
     if (data) {
 	/*
-	 * Force into ByteArray format, which most (all) image handlers
-	 * will use anyway.  Empty length means ignore the -data option.
+	 * Force into ByteArray format, which most (all) image handlers will
+	 * use anyway. Empty length means ignore the -data option.
 	 */
+
 	(void) Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(data, &length);
 	if (length) {
 	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(data);
@@ -1998,9 +1997,10 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
     if (format) {
 	/*
-	 * Stringify to ignore -format "".  It may come in as a list or
-	 * other object.
+	 * Stringify to ignore -format "". It may come in as a list or other
+	 * object.
 	 */
+
 	(void) Tcl_GetStringFromObj(format, &length);
 	if (length) {
 	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(format);
@@ -2013,47 +2013,47 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	masterPtr->format = format;
     }
     /*
-     * Set the image to the user-requested size, if any,
-     * and make sure storage is correctly allocated for this image.
+     * Set the image to the user-requested size, if any, and make sure storage
+     * is correctly allocated for this image.
      */
 
     if (ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, masterPtr->width,
 	    masterPtr->height) != TCL_OK) {
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-		TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, NULL);
 	goto errorExit;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Read in the image from the file or string if the user has
-     * specified the -file or -data option.
+     * Read in the image from the file or string if the user has specified the
+     * -file or -data option.
      */
 
     if ((masterPtr->fileString != NULL)
 	    && ((masterPtr->fileString != oldFileString)
 	    || (masterPtr->format != oldFormat))) {
 
-        /*
-         * Prevent file system access in a safe interpreter.
-         */
+	/*
+	 * Prevent file system access in a safe interpreter.
+	 */
 
-        if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
+	if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
 	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-            Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-		    "can't get image from a file in a safe interpreter",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		    "can't get image from a file in a safe interpreter", NULL);
 	    goto errorExit;
-        }
-        
+	}
+
 	chan = Tcl_OpenFileChannel(interp, masterPtr->fileString, "r", 0);
 	if (chan == NULL) {
 	    goto errorExit;
 	}
+
 	/*
 	 * -translation binary also sets -encoding binary
 	 */
-        if ((Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, chan,
+
+	if ((Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, chan,
 		"-translation", "binary") != TCL_OK) ||
 		(MatchFileFormat(interp, chan, masterPtr->fileString,
 			masterPtr->format, &imageFormat, &imageWidth,
@@ -2065,8 +2065,7 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
 	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	    Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-		    TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, NULL);
 	    goto errorExit;
 	}
 	tempformat = masterPtr->format;
@@ -2074,9 +2073,8 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	    tempformat = (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(tempformat);
 	}
 	result = (*imageFormat->fileReadProc)(interp, chan,
-		masterPtr->fileString, tempformat,
-		(Tk_PhotoHandle) masterPtr, 0, 0,
-		imageWidth, imageHeight, 0, 0);
+		masterPtr->fileString, tempformat, (Tk_PhotoHandle) masterPtr,
+		0, 0, imageWidth, imageHeight, 0, 0);
 	Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
 	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto errorExit;
@@ -2097,8 +2095,7 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	}
 	if (ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, imageWidth, imageHeight) != TCL_OK) {
 	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	    Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-		    TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, NULL);
 	    goto errorExit;
 	}
 	tempformat = masterPtr->format;
@@ -2133,9 +2130,9 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Cycle through all of the instances of this image, regenerating
-     * the information for each instance.  Then force the image to be
-     * redisplayed everywhere that it is used.
+     * Cycle through all of the instances of this image, regenerating the
+     * information for each instance. Then force the image to be redisplayed
+     * everywhere that it is used.
      */
 
     for (instancePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; instancePtr != NULL;
@@ -2144,8 +2141,7 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Inform the generic image code that the image
-     * has (potentially) changed.
+     * Inform the generic image code that the image has (potentially) changed.
      */
 
     Tk_ImageChanged(masterPtr->tkMaster, 0, 0, masterPtr->width,
@@ -2178,24 +2174,24 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * ImgPhotoConfigureInstance --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to create displaying information for
- *	a photo image instance based on the configuration information
- *	in the master.  It is invoked both when new instances are
- *	created and when the master is reconfigured.
+ *	This function is called to create displaying information for a photo
+ *	image instance based on the configuration information in the master.
+ *	It is invoked both when new instances are created and when the master
+ *	is reconfigured.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Generates errors via Tcl_BackgroundError if there are problems
- *	in setting up the instance.
+ *	Generates errors via Tcl_BackgroundError if there are problems in
+ *	setting up the instance.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
-    PhotoInstance *instancePtr;	/* Instance to reconfigure. */
+ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(
+    PhotoInstance *instancePtr)	/* Instance to reconfigure. */
 {
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr = instancePtr->masterPtr;
     XImage *imagePtr;
@@ -2204,10 +2200,9 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
     XRectangle validBox;
 
     /*
-     * If the -palette configuration option has been set for the master,
-     * use the value specified for our palette, but only if it is
-     * a valid palette for our windows.  Use the gamma value specified
-     * the master.
+     * If the -palette configuration option has been set for the master, use
+     * the value specified for our palette, but only if it is a valid palette
+     * for our windows. Use the gamma value specified the master.
      */
 
     if ((masterPtr->palette && masterPtr->palette[0])
@@ -2219,9 +2214,9 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
     instancePtr->gamma = masterPtr->gamma;
 
     /*
-     * If we don't currently have a color table, or if the one we
-     * have no longer applies (e.g. because our palette or gamma
-     * has changed), get a new one.
+     * If we don't currently have a color table, or if the one we have no
+     * longer applies (e.g. because our palette or gamma has changed), get a
+     * new one.
      */
 
     colorTablePtr = instancePtr->colorTablePtr;
@@ -2240,8 +2235,8 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
 	GetColorTable(instancePtr);
 
 	/*
-	 * Create a new XImage structure for sending data to
-	 * the X server, if necessary.
+	 * Create a new XImage structure for sending data to the X server, if
+	 * necessary.
 	 */
 
 	if (instancePtr->colorTablePtr->flags & BLACK_AND_WHITE) {
@@ -2257,7 +2252,7 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
 	    }
 	    imagePtr = XCreateImage(instancePtr->display,
 		    instancePtr->visualInfo.visual, (unsigned) bitsPerPixel,
-		    (bitsPerPixel > 1? ZPixmap: XYBitmap), 0, (char *) NULL,
+		    (bitsPerPixel > 1? ZPixmap: XYBitmap), 0, NULL,
 		    1, 1, 32, 0);
 	    instancePtr->imagePtr = imagePtr;
 
@@ -2280,11 +2275,10 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the user has specified a width and/or height for the master
-     * which is different from our current width/height, set the size
-     * to the values specified by the user.  If we have no pixmap, we
-     * do this also, since it has the side effect of allocating a
-     * pixmap for us.
+     * If the user has specified a width and/or height for the master which is
+     * different from our current width/height, set the size to the values
+     * specified by the user. If we have no pixmap, we do this also, since it
+     * has the side effect of allocating a pixmap for us.
      */
 
     if ((instancePtr->pixels == None) || (instancePtr->error == NULL)
@@ -2312,62 +2306,60 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
  *
  * ImgPhotoGet --
  *
- *	This procedure is called for each use of a photo image in a
- *	widget.
+ *	This function is called for each use of a photo image in a widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the instance, which is passed
- *	back to us in calls to ImgPhotoDisplay and ImgPhotoFree.
+ *	The return value is a token for the instance, which is passed back to
+ *	us in calls to ImgPhotoDisplay and ImgPhotoFree.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A data structure is set up for the instance (or, an existing
- *	instance is re-used for the new one).
+ *	A data structure is set up for the instance (or, an existing instance
+ *	is re-used for the new one).
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static ClientData
-ImgPhotoGet(tkwin, masterData)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which the instance will be
+ImgPhotoGet(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which the instance will be
 				 * used. */
-    ClientData masterData;	/* Pointer to our master structure for the
+    ClientData masterData)	/* Pointer to our master structure for the
 				 * image. */
 {
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) masterData;
     PhotoInstance *instancePtr;
     Colormap colormap;
-    int mono, nRed, nGreen, nBlue;
+    int mono, nRed, nGreen, nBlue, numVisuals;
     XVisualInfo visualInfo, *visInfoPtr;
     char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 3];
-    int numVisuals;
     XColor *white, *black;
     XGCValues gcValues;
 
     /*
-     * Table of "best" choices for palette for PseudoColor displays
-     * with between 3 and 15 bits/pixel.
+     * Table of "best" choices for palette for PseudoColor displays with
+     * between 3 and 15 bits/pixel.
      */
 
-    static int paletteChoice[13][3] = {
+    static const int paletteChoice[13][3] = {
 	/*  #red, #green, #blue */
-	 {2,  2,  2,			/* 3 bits, 8 colors */},
-	 {2,  3,  2,			/* 4 bits, 12 colors */},
-	 {3,  4,  2,			/* 5 bits, 24 colors */},
-	 {4,  5,  3,			/* 6 bits, 60 colors */},
-	 {5,  6,  4,			/* 7 bits, 120 colors */},
-	 {7,  7,  4,			/* 8 bits, 198 colors */},
-	 {8, 10,  6,			/* 9 bits, 480 colors */},
-	{10, 12,  8,			/* 10 bits, 960 colors */},
-	{14, 15,  9,			/* 11 bits, 1890 colors */},
-	{16, 20, 12,			/* 12 bits, 3840 colors */},
-	{20, 24, 16,			/* 13 bits, 7680 colors */},
-	{26, 30, 20,			/* 14 bits, 15600 colors */},
-	{32, 32, 30,			/* 15 bits, 30720 colors */}
+	 {2,  2,  2,		/* 3 bits, 8 colors */},
+	 {2,  3,  2,		/* 4 bits, 12 colors */},
+	 {3,  4,  2,		/* 5 bits, 24 colors */},
+	 {4,  5,  3,		/* 6 bits, 60 colors */},
+	 {5,  6,  4,		/* 7 bits, 120 colors */},
+	 {7,  7,  4,		/* 8 bits, 198 colors */},
+	 {8, 10,  6,		/* 9 bits, 480 colors */},
+	{10, 12,  8,		/* 10 bits, 960 colors */},
+	{14, 15,  9,		/* 11 bits, 1890 colors */},
+	{16, 20, 12,		/* 12 bits, 3840 colors */},
+	{20, 24, 16,		/* 13 bits, 7680 colors */},
+	{26, 30, 20,		/* 14 bits, 15600 colors */},
+	{32, 32, 30,		/* 15 bits, 30720 colors */}
     };
 
     /*
-     * See if there is already an instance for windows using
-     * the same colormap.  If so then just re-use it.
+     * See if there is already an instance for windows using the same
+     * colormap. If so then just re-use it.
      */
 
     colormap = Tk_Colormap(tkwin);
@@ -2375,7 +2367,6 @@ ImgPhotoGet(tkwin, masterData)
 	    instancePtr = instancePtr->nextPtr) {
 	if ((colormap == instancePtr->colormap)
 		&& (Tk_Display(tkwin) == instancePtr->display)) {
-
 	    /*
 	     * Re-use this instance.
 	     */
@@ -2397,8 +2388,8 @@ ImgPhotoGet(tkwin, masterData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The image isn't already in use in a window with the same colormap.
-     * Make a new instance of the image.
+     * The image isn't already in use in a window with the same colormap. Make
+     * a new instance of the image.
      */
 
     instancePtr = (PhotoInstance *) ckalloc(sizeof(PhotoInstance));
@@ -2417,53 +2408,51 @@ ImgPhotoGet(tkwin, masterData)
     masterPtr->instancePtr = instancePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Obtain information about the visual and decide on the
-     * default palette.
+     * Obtain information about the visual and decide on the default palette.
      */
 
     visualInfo.screen = Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin);
     visualInfo.visualid = XVisualIDFromVisual(Tk_Visual(tkwin));
     visInfoPtr = XGetVisualInfo(Tk_Display(tkwin),
 	    VisualScreenMask | VisualIDMask, &visualInfo, &numVisuals);
+    if (visInfoPtr == NULL) {
+	Tcl_Panic("ImgPhotoGet couldn't find visual for window");
+    }
+
     nRed = 2;
     nGreen = nBlue = 0;
     mono = 1;
-    if (visInfoPtr != NULL) {
-	instancePtr->visualInfo = *visInfoPtr;
-	switch (visInfoPtr->class) {
-	    case DirectColor:
-	    case TrueColor:
-		nRed = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->red_mask);
-		nGreen = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->green_mask);
-		nBlue = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->blue_mask);
-		mono = 0;
-		break;
-	    case PseudoColor:
-	    case StaticColor:
-		if (visInfoPtr->depth > 15) {
-		    nRed = 32;
-		    nGreen = 32;
-		    nBlue = 32;
-		    mono = 0;
-		} else if (visInfoPtr->depth >= 3) {
-		    int *ip = paletteChoice[visInfoPtr->depth - 3];
-    
-		    nRed = ip[0];
-		    nGreen = ip[1];
-		    nBlue = ip[2];
-		    mono = 0;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case GrayScale:
-	    case StaticGray:
-		nRed = 1 << visInfoPtr->depth;
-		break;
-	}
-	XFree((char *) visInfoPtr);
-
-    } else {
-	panic("ImgPhotoGet couldn't find visual for window");
-    }
+    instancePtr->visualInfo = *visInfoPtr;
+    switch (visInfoPtr->class) {
+    case DirectColor:
+    case TrueColor:
+	nRed = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->red_mask);
+	nGreen = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->green_mask);
+	nBlue = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->blue_mask);
+	mono = 0;
+	break;
+    case PseudoColor:
+    case StaticColor:
+	if (visInfoPtr->depth > 15) {
+	    nRed = 32;
+	    nGreen = 32;
+	    nBlue = 32;
+	    mono = 0;
+	} else if (visInfoPtr->depth >= 3) {
+	    const int *ip = paletteChoice[visInfoPtr->depth - 3];
+
+	    nRed = ip[0];
+	    nGreen = ip[1];
+	    nBlue = ip[2];
+	    mono = 0;
+	}
+	break;
+    case GrayScale:
+    case StaticGray:
+	nRed = 1 << visInfoPtr->depth;
+	break;
+    }
+    XFree((char *) visInfoPtr);
 
     sprintf(buf, ((mono) ? "%d": "%d/%d/%d"), nRed, nGreen, nBlue);
     instancePtr->defaultPalette = Tk_GetUid(buf);
@@ -2485,8 +2474,8 @@ ImgPhotoGet(tkwin, masterData)
 	    GCForeground|GCBackground|GCGraphicsExposures, &gcValues);
 
     /*
-     * Set configuration options and finish the initialization of the instance.
-     * This will also dither the image if necessary.
+     * Set configuration options and finish the initialization of the
+     * instance. This will also dither the image if necessary.
      */
 
     ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr);
@@ -2508,9 +2497,9 @@ ImgPhotoGet(tkwin, masterData)
  *
  * ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an image is modified to
- *	check if any partially transparent pixels exist, which
- *	requires blending instead of straight copy.
+ *	This function is called when an image is modified to check if any
+ *	partially transparent pixels exist, which requires blending instead of
+ *	straight copy.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2522,19 +2511,21 @@ ImgPhotoGet(tkwin, masterData)
  */
 
 static int
-ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded(PhotoMaster *mPtr)
+ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded(
+    PhotoMaster *mPtr)
 {
     size_t len = MAX(mPtr->userWidth, mPtr->width) *
-	MAX(mPtr->userHeight, mPtr->height) * 4;
-    unsigned char *c   = mPtr->pix32;
+	    MAX(mPtr->userHeight, mPtr->height) * 4;
+    unsigned char *c = mPtr->pix32;
     unsigned char *end = c + len;
 
     /*
      * Set the COMPLEX_ALPHA flag if we have an image with partially
      * transparent bits.
      */
+
     mPtr->flags &= ~COMPLEX_ALPHA;
-    c += 3; /* start at first alpha byte */
+    c += 3;			/* Start at first alpha byte. */
     for (; c < end; c += 4) {
 	if (*c && *c != 255) {
      	    mPtr->flags |= COMPLEX_ALPHA;
@@ -2549,8 +2540,13 @@ ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded(PhotoMaster *mPtr)
  *
  * ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an image with partially
- *	transparent pixels must be drawn over another image.
+ *	This function is called when an image with partially transparent
+ *	pixels must be drawn over another image. It blends the photo data onto
+ *	a local copy of the surface that we are drawing on, *including* the
+ *	pixels drawn by everything that should be drawn underneath the image.
+ *
+ *	Much of this code has hard-coded values in for speed because this
+ *	routine is performance critical for complex image drawing.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2558,53 +2554,61 @@ ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded(PhotoMaster *mPtr)
  * Side effects:
  *	Background image passed in gets drawn over with image data.
  *
- *----------------------------------------------------------------------
- */
-
-/*
- * This should work on all platforms that set mask and shift data properly
- * from the visualInfo.
- * RGB is really only a 24+ bpp version whereas RGB15 is the correct version
- * and works for 15bpp+, but it slower, so it's only used for 15bpp+.
+ * Notes:
+ *	This should work on all platforms that set mask and shift data
+ *	properly from the visualInfo. RGB is really only a 24+ bpp version
+ *	whereas RGB15 is the correct version and works for 15bpp+, but it
+ *	slower, so it's only used for 15bpp+.
+ *
+ *	Note that Win32 pre-defines those operations that we really need.
  *
- * Note that Win32 pre-defines those operations that we really need.
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 #ifndef __WIN32__
-#define GetRValue(rgb)	(UCHAR((rgb & red_mask) >> red_shift))
-#define GetGValue(rgb)	(UCHAR((rgb & green_mask) >> green_shift))
-#define GetBValue(rgb)	(UCHAR((rgb & blue_mask) >> blue_shift))
-#define RGB(r,g,b)      ((unsigned)((UCHAR(r)<<red_shift)|(UCHAR(g)<<green_shift)|(UCHAR(b)<<blue_shift)))
-#define RGB15(r,g,b)    ((unsigned)(((r*red_mask/255)&red_mask)|((g*green_mask/255)&green_mask)|((b*blue_mask/255)&blue_mask)))
+#define GetRValue(rgb)	(UCHAR(((rgb) & red_mask) >> red_shift))
+#define GetGValue(rgb)	(UCHAR(((rgb) & green_mask) >> green_shift))
+#define GetBValue(rgb)	(UCHAR(((rgb) & blue_mask) >> blue_shift))
+#define RGB(r, g, b)	((unsigned)( \
+	(UCHAR(r) << red_shift)   | \
+	(UCHAR(g) << green_shift) | \
+	(UCHAR(b) << blue_shift)  ))
+#define RGB15(r, g, b)	((unsigned)( \
+	(((r) * red_mask / 255)   & red_mask)   | \
+	(((g) * green_mask / 255) & green_mask) | \
+	(((b) * blue_mask / 255)  & blue_mask)  ))
 #endif /* !__WIN32__ */
 
 static void
-ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
-    XImage *bgImg;		/* background image to draw on */
-    PhotoInstance *iPtr;	/* image instance to draw */
-    int xOffset, yOffset;	/* X & Y offset into image instance to draw */
-    int width, height;		/* width & height of image to draw */
+ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(
+    XImage *bgImg,		/* Background image to draw on. */
+    PhotoInstance *iPtr,	/* Image instance to draw. */
+    int xOffset, int yOffset,	/* X & Y offset into image instance to
+				 * draw. */
+    int width, int height)	/* Width & height of image to draw. */
 {
     int x, y, line;
     unsigned long pixel;
-    unsigned char r, g, b, alpha, unalpha;
+    unsigned char r, g, b, alpha, unalpha, *masterPtr;
     unsigned char *alphaAr = iPtr->masterPtr->pix32;
-    unsigned char *masterPtr;
 
     /*
-     * This blending is an integer version of the Source-Over
-     * compositing rule (see Porter&Duff, "Compositing Digital
-     * Images", proceedings of SIGGRAPH 1984) that has been hard-coded
-     * (for speed) to work with targetting a solid surface.
+     * This blending is an integer version of the Source-Over compositing rule
+     * (see Porter&Duff, "Compositing Digital Images", proceedings of SIGGRAPH
+     * 1984) that has been hard-coded (for speed) to work with targetting a
+     * solid surface.
+     *
+     * The 'unalpha' field must be 255-alpha; it is separated out to encourage
+     * more efficient compilation.
      */
 
 #define ALPHA_BLEND(bgPix, imgPix, alpha, unalpha) \
 	((bgPix * unalpha + imgPix * alpha) / 255)
 
     /*
-     * We have to get the mask and shift info from the visual on
-     * non-Win32 so that the macros Get*Value(), RGB() and RGB15()
-     * work correctly.  This might be cached for better performance.
+     * We have to get the mask and shift info from the visual on non-Win32 so
+     * that the macros Get*Value(), RGB() and RGB15() work correctly. This
+     * might be cached for better performance.
      */
 
 #ifndef __WIN32__
@@ -2630,9 +2634,9 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
 #endif /* !__WIN32__ */
 
     /*
-     * Only unix requires the special case for <24bpp.  It varies with
-     * 3 extra shifts and uses RGB15.  The 24+bpp version could also
-     * then be further optimized.
+     * Only UNIX requires the special case for <24bpp. It varies with 3 extra
+     * shifts and uses RGB15. The 24+bpp version could also then be further
+     * optimized.
      */
 
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
@@ -2647,14 +2651,17 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
 	    for (x = 0; x < width; x++) {
 		masterPtr = alphaAr + ((line + x + xOffset) * 4);
 		alpha = masterPtr[3];
+
 		/*
 		 * Ignore pixels that are fully transparent
 		 */
+
 		if (alpha) {
 		    /*
 		     * We could perhaps be more efficient than XGetPixel for
 		     * 24 and 32 bit displays, but this seems "fast enough".
 		     */
+
 		    r = masterPtr[0];
 		    g = masterPtr[1];
 		    b = masterPtr[2];
@@ -2662,13 +2669,14 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
 			/*
 			 * Only blend pixels that have some transparency
 			 */
+
 			unsigned char ra, ga, ba;
 
 			pixel = XGetPixel(bgImg, x, y);
 			ra = GetRValue(pixel) << red_mlen;
 			ga = GetGValue(pixel) << green_mlen;
 			ba = GetBValue(pixel) << blue_mlen;
-			unalpha = 255 - alpha;
+			unalpha = 255 - alpha;	/* Calculate once. */
 			r = ALPHA_BLEND(ra, r, alpha, unalpha);
 			g = ALPHA_BLEND(ga, g, alpha, unalpha);
 			b = ALPHA_BLEND(ba, b, alpha, unalpha);
@@ -2686,14 +2694,17 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
 	for (x = 0; x < width; x++) {
 	    masterPtr = alphaAr + ((line + x + xOffset) * 4);
 	    alpha = masterPtr[3];
+
 	    /*
 	     * Ignore pixels that are fully transparent
 	     */
+
 	    if (alpha) {
 		/*
-		 * We could perhaps be more efficient than XGetPixel for
-		 * 24 and 32 bit displays, but this seems "fast enough".
+		 * We could perhaps be more efficient than XGetPixel for 24
+		 * and 32 bit displays, but this seems "fast enough".
 		 */
+
 		r = masterPtr[0];
 		g = masterPtr[1];
 		b = masterPtr[2];
@@ -2701,13 +2712,14 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
 		    /*
 		     * Only blend pixels that have some transparency
 		     */
+
 		    unsigned char ra, ga, ba;
 
 		    pixel = XGetPixel(bgImg, x, y);
 		    ra = GetRValue(pixel);
 		    ga = GetGValue(pixel);
 		    ba = GetBValue(pixel);
-		    unalpha = 255 - alpha;
+		    unalpha = 255 - alpha;	/* Calculate once. */
 		    r = ALPHA_BLEND(ra, r, alpha, unalpha);
 		    g = ALPHA_BLEND(ga, g, alpha, unalpha);
 		    b = ALPHA_BLEND(ba, b, alpha, unalpha);
@@ -2716,7 +2728,6 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
 	    }
 	}
     }
-
 #undef ALPHA_BLEND
 }
 
@@ -2725,7 +2736,7 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
  *
  * ImgPhotoDisplay --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to draw a photo image.
+ *	This function is invoked to draw a photo image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2737,39 +2748,30 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
  */
 
 static void
-ImgPhotoDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
-	height, drawableX, drawableY)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to PhotoInstance structure for
-				 * for instance to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display on which to draw image. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw image. */
-    int imageX, imageY;		/* Upper-left corner of region within image
-				 * to draw. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of region within image to draw. */
-    int drawableX, drawableY;	/* Coordinates within drawable that
-				 * correspond to imageX and imageY. */
+ImgPhotoDisplay(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to PhotoInstance structure for
+				 * instance to be displayed. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw image. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw image. */
+    int imageX, int imageY,	/* Upper-left corner of region within image to
+				 * draw. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of region within image to
+				 * draw. */
+    int drawableX,int drawableY)/* Coordinates within drawable that correspond
+				 * to imageX and imageY. */
 {
     PhotoInstance *instancePtr = (PhotoInstance *) clientData;
     XVisualInfo visInfo = instancePtr->visualInfo;
 
     /*
-     * If there's no pixmap, it means that an error occurred
-     * while creating the image instance so it can't be displayed.
+     * If there's no pixmap, it means that an error occurred while creating
+     * the image instance so it can't be displayed.
      */
 
     if (instancePtr->pixels == None) {
 	return;
     }
 
-    /*
-     * Check for bogus widths/heights.  This prevents us from calling
-     * XGetImage with a zero size, which it does not like. [Bug 979239]
-     */
-
-    if (width < 1 || height < 1) {
-	return;
-    }
-
     if ((instancePtr->masterPtr->flags & COMPLEX_ALPHA)
 	    && visInfo.depth >= 15
 	    && (visInfo.class == DirectColor || visInfo.class == TrueColor)) {
@@ -2780,25 +2782,30 @@ ImgPhotoDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
 	 * Create an error handler to suppress the case where the input was
 	 * not properly constrained, which can cause an X error. [Bug 979239]
 	 */
-	handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(display, -1, -1, -1,
-		(Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+
+	handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(display, -1, -1, -1, NULL,
+		(ClientData) NULL);
+
 	/*
 	 * Pull the current background from the display to blend with
 	 */
+
 	bgImg = XGetImage(display, drawable, drawableX, drawableY,
 		(unsigned int)width, (unsigned int)height, AllPlanes, ZPixmap);
 	if (bgImg == NULL) {
 	    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
-	    return;
+	    /* We failed to get the image so draw without blending alpha. It's the best we can do */
+	    goto fallBack;
 	}
 
-	ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, instancePtr,
-		imageX, imageY, width, height);
+	ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, instancePtr, imageX, imageY, width,
+		height);
 
 	/*
-	 * Color info is unimportant as we only do this operation for
-	 * depth >= 15.
+	 * Color info is unimportant as we only do this operation for depth >=
+	 * 15.
 	 */
+
 	TkPutImage(NULL, 0, display, drawable, instancePtr->gc,
 		bgImg, 0, 0, drawableX, drawableY,
 		(unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height);
@@ -2806,21 +2813,23 @@ ImgPhotoDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
 	Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * masterPtr->region describes which parts of the image contain
-	 * valid data.  We set this region as the clip mask for the gc,
-	 * setting its origin appropriately, and use it when drawing the
-	 * image.
+	 * masterPtr->region describes which parts of the image contain valid
+	 * data. We set this region as the clip mask for the gc, setting its
+	 * origin appropriately, and use it when drawing the image.
 	 */
-	TkSetRegion(display, instancePtr->gc, instancePtr->masterPtr->validRegion);
+
+    fallBack:
+	TkSetRegion(display, instancePtr->gc,
+		instancePtr->masterPtr->validRegion);
 	XSetClipOrigin(display, instancePtr->gc, drawableX - imageX,
-	               drawableY - imageY);
+		drawableY - imageY);
 	XCopyArea(display, instancePtr->pixels, drawable, instancePtr->gc,
-	          imageX, imageY, (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height,
-	          drawableX, drawableY);
+		imageX, imageY, (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height,
+		drawableX, drawableY);
 	XSetClipMask(display, instancePtr->gc, None);
 	XSetClipOrigin(display, instancePtr->gc, 0, 0);
     }
-    XFlush (display);
+    XFlush(display);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -2828,10 +2837,9 @@ ImgPhotoDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
  *
  * ImgPhotoFree --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when a widget ceases to use a
- *	particular instance of an image.  We don't actually get
- *	rid of the instance until later because we may be about
- *	to get this instance again.
+ *	This function is called when a widget ceases to use a particular
+ *	instance of an image. We don't actually get rid of the instance until
+ *	later because we may be about to get this instance again.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2843,10 +2851,11 @@ ImgPhotoDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
  */
 
 static void
-ImgPhotoFree(clientData, display)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to PhotoInstance structure for
-				 * for instance to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing window that used image. */
+ImgPhotoFree(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to PhotoInstance structure for
+				 * instance to be displayed. */
+    Display *display)		/* Display containing window that used
+				 * image. */
 {
     PhotoInstance *instancePtr = (PhotoInstance *) clientData;
     ColorTable *colorPtr;
@@ -2857,17 +2866,17 @@ ImgPhotoFree(clientData, display)
     }
 
     /*
-     * There are no more uses of the image within this widget.
-     * Decrement the count of live uses of its color table, so
-     * that its colors can be reclaimed if necessary, and
-     * set up an idle call to free the instance structure.
+     * There are no more uses of the image within this widget. Decrement the
+     * count of live uses of its color table, so that its colors can be
+     * reclaimed if necessary, and set up an idle call to free the instance
+     * structure.
      */
 
     colorPtr = instancePtr->colorTablePtr;
     if (colorPtr != NULL) {
 	colorPtr->liveRefCount -= 1;
     }
-    
+
     Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisposeInstance, (ClientData) instancePtr);
 }
 
@@ -2876,8 +2885,8 @@ ImgPhotoFree(clientData, display)
  *
  * ImgPhotoDelete --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the image code to delete the
- *	master structure for an image.
+ *	This function is called by the image code to delete the master
+ *	structure for an image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2889,16 +2898,16 @@ ImgPhotoFree(clientData, display)
  */
 
 static void
-ImgPhotoDelete(masterData)
-    ClientData masterData;	/* Pointer to PhotoMaster structure for
-				 * image.  Must not have any more instances. */
+ImgPhotoDelete(
+    ClientData masterData)	/* Pointer to PhotoMaster structure for image.
+				 * Must not have any more instances. */
 {
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) masterData;
     PhotoInstance *instancePtr;
 
     while ((instancePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr) != NULL) {
 	if (instancePtr->refCount > 0) {
-	    panic("tried to delete photo image when instances still exist");
+	    Tcl_Panic("tried to delete photo image when instances still exist");
 	}
 	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisposeInstance, (ClientData) instancePtr);
 	DisposeInstance((ClientData) instancePtr);
@@ -2919,7 +2928,7 @@ ImgPhotoDelete(masterData)
     if (masterPtr->format != NULL) {
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(masterPtr->format);
     }
-    Tk_FreeOptions(configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr, (Display *) NULL, 0);
+    Tk_FreeOptions(configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr, NULL, 0);
     ckfree((char *) masterPtr);
 }
 
@@ -2928,8 +2937,8 @@ ImgPhotoDelete(masterData)
  *
  * ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when the image command for an image
- *	is deleted.  It deletes the image.
+ *	This function is invoked when the image command for an image is
+ *	deleted. It deletes the image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2941,8 +2950,8 @@ ImgPhotoDelete(masterData)
  */
 
 static void
-ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to PhotoMaster structure for
+ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to PhotoMaster structure for
 				 * image. */
 {
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) clientData;
@@ -2958,13 +2967,13 @@ ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * ImgPhotoSetSize --
  *
- *	This procedure reallocates the image storage and instance
- *	pixmaps for a photo image, as necessary, to change the
- *	image's size to `width' x `height' pixels.
+ *	This function reallocates the image storage and instance pixmaps for a
+ *	photo image, as necessary, to change the image's size to `width' x
+ *	`height' pixels.
  *
  * Results:
- *	TCL_OK if successful, TCL_ERROR if failure occurred (currently
- *	just with memory allocation.)
+ *	TCL_OK if successful, TCL_ERROR if failure occurred (currently just
+ *	with memory allocation.)
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Storage gets reallocated, for the master and all its instances.
@@ -2973,9 +2982,9 @@ ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static int
-ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
-    PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
-    int width, height;
+ImgPhotoSetSize(
+    PhotoMaster *masterPtr,
+    int width, int height)
 {
     unsigned char *newPix32 = NULL;
     int h, offset, pitch;
@@ -2994,19 +3003,22 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
     pitch = width * 4;
 
     /*
-     * Test if we're going to (re)allocate the main buffer now, so
-     * that any failures will leave the photo unchanged.
+     * Test if we're going to (re)allocate the main buffer now, so that any
+     * failures will leave the photo unchanged.
      */
+
     if ((width != masterPtr->width) || (height != masterPtr->height)
 	    || (masterPtr->pix32 == NULL)) {
 	/*
 	 * Not a u-long, but should be one.
 	 */
+
 	unsigned /*long*/ newPixSize = (unsigned /*long*/) (height * pitch);
 
 	/*
 	 * Some mallocs() really hate allocating zero bytes. [Bug 619544]
 	 */
+
 	if (newPixSize == 0) {
 	    newPix32 = NULL;
 	} else {
@@ -3018,8 +3030,8 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * We have to trim the valid region if it is currently
-     * larger than the new image size.
+     * We have to trim the valid region if it is currently larger than the new
+     * image size.
      */
 
     TkClipBox(masterPtr->validRegion, &validBox);
@@ -3038,36 +3050,35 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Use the reallocated storage (allocation above) for the 32-bit
-     * image and copy over valid regions.  Note that this test is true
-     * precisely when the allocation has already been done.
+     * Use the reallocated storage (allocation above) for the 32-bit image and
+     * copy over valid regions. Note that this test is true precisely when the
+     * allocation has already been done.
      */
+
     if (newPix32 != NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * Zero the new array.  The dithering code shouldn't read the
-	 * areas outside validBox, but they might be copied to another
-	 * photo image or written to a file.
+	 * Zero the new array. The dithering code shouldn't read the areas
+	 * outside validBox, but they might be copied to another photo image
+	 * or written to a file.
 	 */
 
 	if ((masterPtr->pix32 != NULL)
 	    && ((width == masterPtr->width) || (width == validBox.width))) {
 	    if (validBox.y > 0) {
-		memset((VOID *) newPix32, 0, (size_t) (validBox.y * pitch));
+		memset(newPix32, 0, (size_t) (validBox.y * pitch));
 	    }
 	    h = validBox.y + validBox.height;
 	    if (h < height) {
-		memset((VOID *) (newPix32 + h * pitch), 0,
-			(size_t) ((height - h) * pitch));
+		memset(newPix32 + h*pitch, 0, (size_t) ((height - h) * pitch));
 	    }
 	} else {
-	    memset((VOID *) newPix32, 0, (size_t) (height * pitch));
+	    memset(newPix32, 0, (size_t) (height * pitch));
 	}
 
 	if (masterPtr->pix32 != NULL) {
-
 	    /*
-	     * Copy the common area over to the new array array and
-	     * free the old array.
+	     * Copy the common area over to the new array array and free the
+	     * old array.
 	     */
 
 	    if (width == masterPtr->width) {
@@ -3077,12 +3088,10 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
 		 */
 
 		offset = validBox.y * pitch;
-		memcpy((VOID *) (newPix32 + offset),
-			(VOID *) (masterPtr->pix32 + offset),
+		memcpy(newPix32 + offset, masterPtr->pix32 + offset,
 			(size_t) (validBox.height * pitch));
 
 	    } else if ((validBox.width > 0) && (validBox.height > 0)) {
-
 		/*
 		 * Area to be copied is not contiguous - copy line by line.
 		 */
@@ -3091,8 +3100,7 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
 		srcPtr = masterPtr->pix32 + (validBox.y * masterPtr->width
 			+ validBox.x) * 4;
 		for (h = validBox.height; h > 0; h--) {
-		    memcpy((VOID *) destPtr, (VOID *) srcPtr,
-			    (size_t) (validBox.width * 4));
+		    memcpy(destPtr, srcPtr, (size_t) (validBox.width * 4));
 		    destPtr += width * 4;
 		    srcPtr += masterPtr->width * 4;
 		}
@@ -3106,8 +3114,8 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
 	masterPtr->height = height;
 
 	/*
-	 * Dithering will be correct up to the end of the last
-	 * pre-existing complete scanline.
+	 * Dithering will be correct up to the end of the last pre-existing
+	 * complete scanline.
 	 */
 
 	if ((validBox.x > 0) || (validBox.y > 0)) {
@@ -3144,9 +3152,9 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
  *
  * ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize --
  *
- * 	This procedure reallocates the instance pixmap and dithering
- *	error array for a photo instance, as necessary, to change the
- *	image's size to `width' x `height' pixels.
+ *	This function reallocates the instance pixmap and dithering error
+ *	array for a photo instance, as necessary, to change the image's size
+ *	to `width' x `height' pixels.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -3158,13 +3166,11 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
  */
 
 static void
-ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
-    PhotoInstance *instancePtr;		/* Instance whose size is to be
-					 * changed. */
+ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(
+    PhotoInstance *instancePtr)	/* Instance whose size is to be changed. */
 {
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
-    schar *newError;
-    schar *errSrcPtr, *errDestPtr;
+    schar *newError, *errSrcPtr, *errDestPtr;
     int h, offset;
     XRectangle validBox;
     Pixmap newPixmap;
@@ -3177,22 +3183,21 @@ ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
 	    || (instancePtr->pixels == None)) {
 	newPixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(instancePtr->display,
 		RootWindow(instancePtr->display,
-		    instancePtr->visualInfo.screen),
+			instancePtr->visualInfo.screen),
 		(masterPtr->width > 0) ? masterPtr->width: 1,
 		(masterPtr->height > 0) ? masterPtr->height: 1,
 		instancePtr->visualInfo.depth);
-        if (!newPixmap) {
-            panic("Fail to create pixmap with Tk_GetPixmap in ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize.\n");
-            return;
-        }
+	if (!newPixmap) {
+	    Tcl_Panic("Fail to create pixmap with Tk_GetPixmap in ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize.\n");
+	}
 
 	/*
 	 * The following is a gross hack needed to properly support colormaps
-	 * under Windows.  Before the pixels can be copied to the pixmap,
-	 * the relevent colormap must be associated with the drawable.
-	 * Normally we can infer this association from the window that
-	 * was used to create the pixmap.  However, in this case we're
-	 * using the root window, so we have to be more explicit.
+	 * under Windows. Before the pixels can be copied to the pixmap, the
+	 * relevent colormap must be associated with the drawable. Normally we
+	 * can infer this association from the window that was used to create
+	 * the pixmap. However, in this case we're using the root window, so
+	 * we have to be more explicit.
 	 */
 
 	TkSetPixmapColormap(newPixmap, instancePtr->colormap);
@@ -3201,6 +3206,7 @@ ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
 	    /*
 	     * Copy any common pixels from the old pixmap and free it.
 	     */
+
 	    XCopyArea(instancePtr->display, instancePtr->pixels, newPixmap,
 		    instancePtr->gc, validBox.x, validBox.y,
 		    validBox.width, validBox.height, validBox.x, validBox.y);
@@ -3218,54 +3224,51 @@ ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
 		    masterPtr->height * masterPtr->width * 3 * sizeof(schar));
 
 	    /*
-	     * Zero the new array so that we don't get bogus error
-	     * values propagating into areas we dither later.
+	     * Zero the new array so that we don't get bogus error values
+	     * propagating into areas we dither later.
 	     */
 
 	    if ((instancePtr->error != NULL)
 		    && ((instancePtr->width == masterPtr->width)
 		    || (validBox.width == masterPtr->width))) {
 		if (validBox.y > 0) {
-		    memset((VOID *) newError, 0, (size_t)
+		    memset(newError, 0, (size_t)
 			    validBox.y * masterPtr->width * 3 * sizeof(schar));
 		}
 		h = validBox.y + validBox.height;
 		if (h < masterPtr->height) {
-		    memset((VOID *) (newError + h * masterPtr->width * 3), 0,
+		    memset(newError + h*masterPtr->width*3, 0,
 			    (size_t) (masterPtr->height - h)
 			    * masterPtr->width * 3 * sizeof(schar));
 		}
 	    } else {
-		memset((VOID *) newError, 0, (size_t)
-			masterPtr->height * masterPtr->width * 3 * sizeof(schar));
+		memset(newError, 0, (size_t)
+			masterPtr->height * masterPtr->width *3*sizeof(schar));
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    newError = NULL;
 	}
 
 	if (instancePtr->error != NULL) {
-
 	    /*
-	     * Copy the common area over to the new array
-	     * and free the old array.
+	     * Copy the common area over to the new array and free the old
+	     * array.
 	     */
 
 	    if (masterPtr->width == instancePtr->width) {
-
 		offset = validBox.y * masterPtr->width * 3;
-		memcpy((VOID *) (newError + offset),
-			(VOID *) (instancePtr->error + offset),
+		memcpy(newError + offset, instancePtr->error + offset,
 			(size_t) (validBox.height
 			* masterPtr->width * 3 * sizeof(schar)));
 
 	    } else if (validBox.width > 0 && validBox.height > 0) {
+		errDestPtr = newError +
+			(validBox.y * masterPtr->width + validBox.x) * 3;
+		errSrcPtr = instancePtr->error +
+			(validBox.y * instancePtr->width + validBox.x) * 3;
 
-		errDestPtr = newError
-			+ (validBox.y * masterPtr->width + validBox.x) * 3;
-		errSrcPtr = instancePtr->error
-			+ (validBox.y * instancePtr->width + validBox.x) * 3;
 		for (h = validBox.height; h > 0; --h) {
-		    memcpy((VOID *) errDestPtr, (VOID *) errSrcPtr,
+		    memcpy(errDestPtr, errSrcPtr,
 			    validBox.width * 3 * sizeof(schar));
 		    errDestPtr += masterPtr->width * 3;
 		    errSrcPtr += instancePtr->width * 3;
@@ -3286,9 +3289,8 @@ ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
  *
  * IsValidPalette --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to check whether a value given for
- *	the -palette option is valid for a particular instance
- * 	of a photo image.
+ *	This function is called to check whether a value given for the
+ *	-palette option is valid for a particular instance of a photo image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A boolean value: 1 if the palette is acceptable, 0 otherwise.
@@ -3300,17 +3302,16 @@ ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
  */
 
 static int
-IsValidPalette(instancePtr, palette)
-    PhotoInstance *instancePtr;		/* Instance to which the palette
-					 * specification is to be applied. */
-    CONST char *palette;		/* Palette specification string. */
+IsValidPalette(
+    PhotoInstance *instancePtr,	/* Instance to which the palette specification
+				 * is to be applied. */
+    const char *palette)	/* Palette specification string. */
 {
     int nRed, nGreen, nBlue, mono, numColors;
     char *endp;
 
     /*
-     * First parse the specification: it must be of the form
-     * %d or %d/%d/%d.
+     * First parse the specification: it must be of the form %d or %d/%d/%d.
      */
 
     nRed = strtol(palette, &endp, 10);
@@ -3339,32 +3340,30 @@ IsValidPalette(instancePtr, palette)
     }
 
     switch (instancePtr->visualInfo.class) {
-	case DirectColor:
-	case TrueColor:
-	    if ((nRed > (1 << CountBits(instancePtr->visualInfo.red_mask)))
-		    || (nGreen > (1
-			<< CountBits(instancePtr->visualInfo.green_mask)))
-		    || (nBlue > (1
-			<< CountBits(instancePtr->visualInfo.blue_mask)))) {
-		return 0;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case PseudoColor:
-	case StaticColor:
-	    numColors = nRed;
-	    if (!mono) {
-		numColors *= nGreen*nBlue;
-	    }
-	    if (numColors > (1 << instancePtr->visualInfo.depth)) {
-		return 0;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case GrayScale:
-	case StaticGray:
-	    if (!mono || (nRed > (1 << instancePtr->visualInfo.depth))) {
-		return 0;
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case DirectColor:
+    case TrueColor:
+	if ((nRed > (1 << CountBits(instancePtr->visualInfo.red_mask)))
+		|| (nGreen>(1<<CountBits(instancePtr->visualInfo.green_mask)))
+		|| (nBlue>(1<<CountBits(instancePtr->visualInfo.blue_mask)))) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+	break;
+    case PseudoColor:
+    case StaticColor:
+	numColors = nRed;
+	if (!mono) {
+	    numColors *= nGreen*nBlue;
+	}
+	if (numColors > (1 << instancePtr->visualInfo.depth)) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+	break;
+    case GrayScale:
+    case StaticGray:
+	if (!mono || (nRed > (1 << instancePtr->visualInfo.depth))) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+	break;
     }
 
     return 1;
@@ -3375,7 +3374,7 @@ IsValidPalette(instancePtr, palette)
  *
  * CountBits --
  *
- *	This procedure counts how many bits are set to 1 in `mask'.
+ *	This function counts how many bits are set to 1 in `mask'.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The integer number of bits.
@@ -3387,13 +3386,14 @@ IsValidPalette(instancePtr, palette)
  */
 
 static int
-CountBits(mask)
-    pixel mask;			/* Value to count the 1 bits in. */
+CountBits(
+    pixel mask)			/* Value to count the 1 bits in. */
 {
     int n;
 
-    for( n = 0; mask != 0; mask &= mask - 1 )
+    for (n=0 ; mask!=0 ; mask&=mask-1) {
 	n++;
+    }
     return n;
 }
 
@@ -3402,28 +3402,27 @@ CountBits(mask)
  *
  * GetColorTable --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to allocate a table of colormap
- *	information for an instance of a photo image.  Only one such
- *	table is allocated for all photo instances using the same
- *	display, colormap, palette and gamma values, so that the
- *	application need only request a set of colors from the X
- *	server once for all such photo widgets.  This procedure
- *	maintains a hash table to find previously-allocated
+ *	This function is called to allocate a table of colormap information
+ *	for an instance of a photo image. Only one such table is allocated for
+ *	all photo instances using the same display, colormap, palette and
+ *	gamma values, so that the application need only request a set of
+ *	colors from the X server once for all such photo widgets. This
+ *	function maintains a hash table to find previously-allocated
  *	ColorTables.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new ColorTable may be allocated and placed in the hash
- *	table, and have colors allocated for it.
+ *	A new ColorTable may be allocated and placed in the hash table, and
+ *	have colors allocated for it.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-GetColorTable(instancePtr)
-    PhotoInstance *instancePtr;		/* Instance needing a color table. */
+GetColorTable(
+    PhotoInstance *instancePtr)	/* Instance needing a color table. */
 {
     ColorTable *colorPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
@@ -3434,7 +3433,7 @@ GetColorTable(instancePtr)
      * Look for an existing ColorTable in the hash table.
      */
 
-    memset((VOID *) &id, 0, sizeof(id));
+    memset(&id, 0, sizeof(id));
     id.display = instancePtr->display;
     id.colormap = instancePtr->colormap;
     id.palette = instancePtr->palette;
@@ -3451,7 +3450,6 @@ GetColorTable(instancePtr)
 	 */
 
 	colorPtr = (ColorTable *) Tcl_GetHashValue(entry);
-
     } else {
 	/*
 	 * No color table currently available; need to make one.
@@ -3460,16 +3458,15 @@ GetColorTable(instancePtr)
 	colorPtr = (ColorTable *) ckalloc(sizeof(ColorTable));
 
 	/*
-	 * The following line of code should not normally be needed due
-	 * to the assignment in the following line.  However, it compensates
-	 * for bugs in some compilers (HP, for example) where
-	 * sizeof(ColorTable) is 24 but the assignment only copies 20 bytes,
-	 * leaving 4 bytes uninitialized;  these cause problems when using
-	 * the id for lookups in imgPhotoColorHash, and can result in
-	 * core dumps.
+	 * The following line of code should not normally be needed due to the
+	 * assignment in the following line. However, it compensates for bugs
+	 * in some compilers (HP, for example) where sizeof(ColorTable) is 24
+	 * but the assignment only copies 20 bytes, leaving 4 bytes
+	 * uninitialized; these cause problems when using the id for lookups
+	 * in imgPhotoColorHash, and can result in core dumps.
 	 */
 
-	memset((VOID *) &colorPtr->id, 0, sizeof(ColorTableId));
+	memset(&colorPtr->id, 0, sizeof(ColorTableId));
 	colorPtr->id = id;
 	Tk_PreserveColormap(colorPtr->id.display, colorPtr->id.colormap);
 	colorPtr->flags = 0;
@@ -3504,30 +3501,30 @@ GetColorTable(instancePtr)
  *
  * FreeColorTable --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an instance ceases using a
- *	color table.
+ *	This function is called when an instance ceases using a color table.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If no other instances are using this color table, a when-idle
- *	handler is registered to free up the color table and the colors
- *	allocated for it.
+ *	If no other instances are using this color table, a when-idle handler
+ *	is registered to free up the color table and the colors allocated for
+ *	it.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeColorTable(colorPtr, force)
-    ColorTable *colorPtr;	/* Pointer to the color table which is
-				 * no longer required by an instance. */
-    int force;			/* Force free to happen immediately. */
+FreeColorTable(
+    ColorTable *colorPtr,	/* Pointer to the color table which is no
+				 * longer required by an instance. */
+    int force)			/* Force free to happen immediately. */
 {
     colorPtr->refCount--;
     if (colorPtr->refCount > 0) {
 	return;
     }
+
     if (force) {
 	if ((colorPtr->flags & DISPOSE_PENDING) != 0) {
 	    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisposeColorTable, (ClientData) colorPtr);
@@ -3545,24 +3542,24 @@ FreeColorTable(colorPtr, force)
  *
  * AllocateColors --
  *
- *	This procedure allocates the colors required by a color table,
- *	and sets up the fields in the color table data structure which
- *	are used in dithering.
+ *	This function allocates the colors required by a color table, and sets
+ *	up the fields in the color table data structure which are used in
+ *	dithering.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Colors are allocated from the X server.  Fields in the
- *	color table data structure are updated.
+ *	Colors are allocated from the X server. Fields in the color table data
+ *	structure are updated.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-AllocateColors(colorPtr)
-    ColorTable *colorPtr;	/* Pointer to the color table requiring
-				 * colors to be allocated. */
+AllocateColors(
+    ColorTable *colorPtr)	/* Pointer to the color table requiring colors
+				 * to be allocated. */
 {
     int i, r, g, b, rMult, mono;
     int numColors, nRed, nGreen, nBlue;
@@ -3570,11 +3567,13 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
     XColor *colors;
     unsigned long *pixels;
 
-    /* 16-bit intensity value for i/n of full intensity. */
-#   define CFRAC(i, n)	((i) * 65535 / (n))
+    /*
+     * 16-bit intensity value for i/n of full intensity.
+     */
+#define CFRAC(i, n)	((i) * 65535 / (n))
 
     /* As for CFRAC, but apply exponent of g. */
-#   define CGFRAC(i, n, g)	((int)(65535 * pow((double)(i) / (n), (g))))
+#define CGFRAC(i, n, g)	((int)(65535 * pow((double)(i) / (n), (g))))
 
     /*
      * First parse the palette specification to get the required number of
@@ -3586,16 +3585,14 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
     igam = 1.0 / colorPtr->id.gamma;
 
     /*
-     * Each time around this loop, we reduce the number of colors we're
-     * trying to allocate until we succeed in allocating all of the colors
-     * we need.
+     * Each time around this loop, we reduce the number of colors we're trying
+     * to allocate until we succeed in allocating all of the colors we need.
      */
 
     for (;;) {
 	/*
-	 * If we are using 1 bit/pixel, we don't need to allocate
-	 * any colors (we just use the foreground and background
-	 * colors in the GC).
+	 * If we are using 1 bit/pixel, we don't need to allocate any colors
+	 * (we just use the foreground and background colors in the GC).
 	 */
 
 	if (mono && (nRed <= 2)) {
@@ -3604,12 +3601,12 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Calculate the RGB coordinates of the colors we want to
-	 * allocate and store them in *colors.
+	 * Calculate the RGB coordinates of the colors we want to allocate and
+	 * store them in *colors.
 	 */
 
 	if ((colorPtr->visualInfo.class == DirectColor)
-	    || (colorPtr->visualInfo.class == TrueColor)) {
+		|| (colorPtr->visualInfo.class == TrueColor)) {
 
 	    /*
 	     * Direct/True Color: allocate shades of red, green, blue
@@ -3636,8 +3633,8 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    /*
-	     * PseudoColor, StaticColor, GrayScale or StaticGray visual:
-	     * we have to allocate each color in the color cube separately.
+	     * PseudoColor, StaticColor, GrayScale or StaticGray visual: we
+	     * have to allocate each color in the color cube separately.
 	     */
 
 	    numColors = (mono) ? nRed: (nRed * nGreen * nBlue);
@@ -3689,7 +3686,6 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 	for (i = 0; i < numColors; ++i) {
 	    if (!XAllocColor(colorPtr->id.display, colorPtr->id.colormap,
 		    &colors[i])) {
-
 		/*
 		 * Can't get all the colors we want in the default colormap;
 		 * first try freeing colors from other unused color tables.
@@ -3701,6 +3697,7 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 		    /*
 		     * Still can't allocate the color.
 		     */
+
 		    break;
 		}
 	    }
@@ -3708,9 +3705,8 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If we didn't get all of the colors, reduce the
-	 * resolution of the color cube, free the ones we got,
-	 * and try again.
+	 * If we didn't get all of the colors, reduce the resolution of the
+	 * color cube, free the ones we got, and try again.
 	 */
 
 	if (i >= numColors) {
@@ -3729,10 +3725,10 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 		mono = 1;
 	    } else {
 		/*
-		 * Reduce the number of shades of each primary to about
-		 * 3/4 of the previous value.  This should reduce the
-		 * total number of colors required to about half the
-		 * previous value for PseudoColor displays.
+		 * Reduce the number of shades of each primary to about 3/4 of
+		 * the previous value. This should reduce the total number of
+		 * colors required to about half the previous value for
+		 * PseudoColor displays.
 		 */
 
 		nRed = (nRed * 3 + 2) / 4;
@@ -3747,23 +3743,22 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 	    nRed = nRed / 2;
 	}
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * We have allocated all of the necessary colors:
-     * fill in various fields of the ColorTable record.
+     * We have allocated all of the necessary colors: fill in various fields
+     * of the ColorTable record.
      */
 
     if (!mono) {
 	colorPtr->flags |= COLOR_WINDOW;
 
 	/*
-	 * The following is a hairy hack.  We only want to index into
-	 * the pixelMap on colormap displays.  However, if the display
-	 * is on Windows, then we actually want to store the index not
-	 * the value since we will be passing the color table into the
-	 * TkPutImage call.
+	 * The following is a hairy hack. We only want to index into the
+	 * pixelMap on colormap displays. However, if the display is on
+	 * Windows, then we actually want to store the index not the value
+	 * since we will be passing the color table into the TkPutImage call.
 	 */
-	
+
 #ifndef __WIN32__
 	if ((colorPtr->visualInfo.class != DirectColor)
 		&& (colorPtr->visualInfo.class != TrueColor)) {
@@ -3778,6 +3773,7 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
     /*
      * Set up quantization tables for dithering.
      */
+
     rMult = nGreen * nBlue;
     for (i = 0; i < 256; ++i) {
 	r = (i * (nRed - 1) + 127) / 255;
@@ -3793,12 +3789,12 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 	    b = (i * (nBlue - 1) + 127) / 255;
 	    if ((colorPtr->visualInfo.class == DirectColor)
 		    || (colorPtr->visualInfo.class == TrueColor)) {
-		colorPtr->redValues[i] = colors[r].pixel
-		    & colorPtr->visualInfo.red_mask;
-		colorPtr->greenValues[i] = colors[g].pixel
-		    & colorPtr->visualInfo.green_mask;
-		colorPtr->blueValues[i] = colors[b].pixel
-		    & colorPtr->visualInfo.blue_mask;
+		colorPtr->redValues[i] =
+			colors[r].pixel & colorPtr->visualInfo.red_mask;
+		colorPtr->greenValues[i] =
+			colors[g].pixel & colorPtr->visualInfo.green_mask;
+		colorPtr->blueValues[i] =
+			colors[b].pixel & colorPtr->visualInfo.blue_mask;
 	    } else {
 		r *= rMult;
 		g *= nBlue;
@@ -3828,27 +3824,27 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
  *
  * DisposeColorTable --
  *
+ *	Release a color table and its associated resources.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The colors in the argument color table are freed, as is the
- *	color table structure itself.  The color table is removed
- *	from the hash table which is used to locate color tables.
+ *	The colors in the argument color table are freed, as is the color
+ *	table structure itself. The color table is removed from the hash table
+ *	which is used to locate color tables.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DisposeColorTable(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to the ColorTable whose
+DisposeColorTable(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to the ColorTable whose
 				 * colors are to be released. */
 {
-    ColorTable *colorPtr;
+    ColorTable *colorPtr = (ColorTable *) clientData;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
 
-    colorPtr = (ColorTable *) clientData;
     if (colorPtr->pixelMap != NULL) {
 	if (colorPtr->numColors > 0) {
 	    XFreeColors(colorPtr->id.display, colorPtr->id.colormap,
@@ -3860,7 +3856,7 @@ DisposeColorTable(clientData)
 
     entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&imgPhotoColorHash, (char *) &colorPtr->id);
     if (entry == NULL) {
-	panic("DisposeColorTable couldn't find hash entry");
+	Tcl_Panic("DisposeColorTable couldn't find hash entry");
     }
     Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entry);
 
@@ -3872,48 +3868,46 @@ DisposeColorTable(clientData)
  *
  * ReclaimColors --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to try to free up colors in the
- *	colormap used by a color table.  It looks for other color
- *	tables with the same colormap and with a zero live reference
- *	count, and frees their colors.  It only does so if there is
- *	the possibility of freeing up at least `numColors' colors.
+ *	This function is called to try to free up colors in the colormap used
+ *	by a color table. It looks for other color tables with the same
+ *	colormap and with a zero live reference count, and frees their colors.
+ *	It only does so if there is the possibility of freeing up at least
+ *	`numColors' colors.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is TRUE if any colors were freed, FALSE
- *	otherwise.
+ *	The return value is TRUE if any colors were freed, FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	ColorTables which are not currently in use may lose their
- *	color allocations.
+ *	ColorTables which are not currently in use may lose their color
+ *	allocations.
  *
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
 
 static int
-ReclaimColors(id, numColors)
-    ColorTableId *id;		/* Pointer to information identifying
+ReclaimColors(
+    ColorTableId *id,		/* Pointer to information identifying
 				 * the color table which needs more colors. */
-    int numColors;		/* Number of colors required. */
+    int numColors)		/* Number of colors required. */
 {
     Tcl_HashSearch srch;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
     ColorTable *colorPtr;
-    int nAvail;
+    int nAvail = 0;
 
     /*
-     * First scan through the color hash table to get an
-     * upper bound on how many colors we might be able to free.
+     * First scan through the color hash table to get an upper bound on how
+     * many colors we might be able to free.
      */
 
-    nAvail = 0;
     entry = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&imgPhotoColorHash, &srch);
     while (entry != NULL) {
 	colorPtr = (ColorTable *) Tcl_GetHashValue(entry);
 	if ((colorPtr->id.display == id->display)
-	    && (colorPtr->id.colormap == id->colormap)
-	    && (colorPtr->liveRefCount == 0 )&& (colorPtr->numColors != 0)
-	    && ((colorPtr->id.palette != id->palette)
-		|| (colorPtr->id.gamma != id->gamma))) {
-
+		&& (colorPtr->id.colormap == id->colormap)
+		&& (colorPtr->liveRefCount == 0 )&& (colorPtr->numColors != 0)
+		&& ((colorPtr->id.palette != id->palette)
+			|| (colorPtr->id.gamma != id->gamma))) {
 	    /*
 	     * We could take this guy's colors off him.
 	     */
@@ -3942,8 +3936,7 @@ ReclaimColors(id, numColors)
 		&& (colorPtr->id.colormap == id->colormap)
 		&& (colorPtr->liveRefCount == 0) && (colorPtr->numColors != 0)
 		&& ((colorPtr->id.palette != id->palette)
-		    || (colorPtr->id.gamma != id->gamma))) {
-
+			|| (colorPtr->id.gamma != id->gamma))) {
 	    /*
 	     * Free the colors that this ColorTable has.
 	     */
@@ -3958,7 +3951,7 @@ ReclaimColors(id, numColors)
 
 	entry = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&srch);
     }
-    return 1;			/* we freed some colors */
+    return 1;			/* We freed some colors. */
 }
 
 /*
@@ -3966,23 +3959,22 @@ ReclaimColors(id, numColors)
  *
  * DisposeInstance --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to finally free up an instance
- *	of a photo image which is no longer required.
+ *	This function is called to finally free up an instance of a photo
+ *	image which is no longer required.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The instance data structure and the resources it references
- *	are freed.
+ *	The instance data structure and the resources it references are freed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DisposeInstance(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to the instance whose resources
-				 * are to be released. */
+DisposeInstance(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to the instance whose resources are
+				 * to be released. */
 {
     PhotoInstance *instancePtr = (PhotoInstance *) clientData;
     PhotoInstance *prevPtr;
@@ -4008,7 +4000,7 @@ DisposeInstance(clientData)
     } else {
 	for (prevPtr = instancePtr->masterPtr->instancePtr;
 		prevPtr->nextPtr != instancePtr; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    /* Empty loop body */
+	    /* Empty loop body. */
 	}
 	prevPtr->nextPtr = instancePtr->nextPtr;
     }
@@ -4021,16 +4013,16 @@ DisposeInstance(clientData)
  *
  * MatchFileFormat --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to find a photo image file format
- *	handler which can parse the image data in the given file.
- *	If a user-specified format string is provided, only handlers
- *	whose names match a prefix of the format string are tried.
+ *	This function is called to find a photo image file format handler
+ *	which can parse the image data in the given file. If a user-specified
+ *	format string is provided, only handlers whose names match a prefix of
+ *	the format string are tried.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL return value.  If the return value is TCL_OK, a
- *	pointer to the image format record is returned in
- *	*imageFormatPtr, and the width and height of the image are
- *	returned in *widthPtr and *heightPtr.
+ *	A standard TCL return value. If the return value is TCL_OK, a pointer
+ *	to the image format record is returned in *imageFormatPtr, and the
+ *	width and height of the image are returned in *widthPtr and
+ *	*heightPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4039,24 +4031,23 @@ DisposeInstance(clientData)
  */
 
 static int
-MatchFileFormat(interp, chan, fileName, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
-	widthPtr, heightPtr, oldformat)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
-    Tcl_Channel chan;		/* The image file, open for reading. */
-    char *fileName;		/* The name of the image file. */
-    Tcl_Obj *formatObj;		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
-    Tk_PhotoImageFormat **imageFormatPtr;
-				/* A pointer to the photo image format
-				 * record is returned here. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are
-				 * returned here. */
-    int *oldformat;
+MatchFileFormat(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
+    Tcl_Channel chan,		/* The image file, open for reading. */
+    char *fileName,		/* The name of the image file. */
+    Tcl_Obj *formatObj,		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
+    Tk_PhotoImageFormat **imageFormatPtr,
+				/* A pointer to the photo image format record
+				 * is returned here. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+				/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+				 * here. */
+    int *oldformat)		/* Returns 1 if the old image API is used. */
 {
-    int matched;
-    int useoldformat = 0;
+    int matched = 0, useoldformat = 0;
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     char *formatString = NULL;
 
     if (formatObj) {
@@ -4064,13 +4055,12 @@ MatchFileFormat(interp, chan, fileName, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
     }
 
     /*
-     * Scan through the table of file format handlers to find
-     * one which can handle the image.
+     * Scan through the table of file format handlers to find one which can
+     * handle the image.
      */
 
-    matched = 0;
     for (formatPtr = tsdPtr->formatList; formatPtr != NULL;
-	 formatPtr = formatPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    formatPtr = formatPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (formatObj != NULL) {
 	    if (strncasecmp(formatString,
 		    formatPtr->name, strlen(formatPtr->name)) != 0) {
@@ -4079,13 +4069,13 @@ MatchFileFormat(interp, chan, fileName, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
 	    matched = 1;
 	    if (formatPtr->fileMatchProc == NULL) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "-file option isn't supported for ",
-			formatString, " images", (char *) NULL);
+			formatString, " images", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (formatPtr->fileMatchProc != NULL) {
 	    (void) Tcl_Seek(chan, Tcl_LongAsWide(0L), SEEK_SET);
-	    
+
 	    if ((*formatPtr->fileMatchProc)(chan, fileName, formatObj,
 		    widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)) {
 		if (*widthPtr < 1) {
@@ -4110,7 +4100,7 @@ MatchFileFormat(interp, chan, fileName, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
 		matched = 1;
 		if (formatPtr->fileMatchProc == NULL) {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "-file option isn't supported",
-			    " for ", formatString, " images", (char *) NULL);
+			    " for ", formatString, " images", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 	    }
@@ -4132,13 +4122,12 @@ MatchFileFormat(interp, chan, fileName, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
 
     if (formatPtr == NULL) {
 	if ((formatObj != NULL) && !matched) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image file format \"",
-		    formatString,
-		    "\" is not supported", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image file format \"", formatString,
+		    "\" is not supported", NULL);
 	} else {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-		    "couldn't recognize data in image file \"",
-		    fileName, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    "couldn't recognize data in image file \"", fileName, "\"",
+		    NULL);
 	}
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -4154,16 +4143,16 @@ MatchFileFormat(interp, chan, fileName, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
  *
  * MatchStringFormat --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to find a photo image file format
- *	handler which can parse the image data in the given string.
- *	If a user-specified format string is provided, only handlers
- *	whose names match a prefix of the format string are tried.
+ *	This function is called to find a photo image file format handler
+ *	which can parse the image data in the given string. If a
+ *	user-specified format string is provided, only handlers whose names
+ *	match a prefix of the format string are tried.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL return value.  If the return value is TCL_OK, a
- *	pointer to the image format record is returned in
- *	*imageFormatPtr, and the width and height of the image are
- *	returned in *widthPtr and *heightPtr.
+ *	A standard TCL return value. If the return value is TCL_OK, a pointer
+ *	to the image format record is returned in *imageFormatPtr, and the
+ *	width and height of the image are returned in *widthPtr and
+ *	*heightPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4172,35 +4161,33 @@ MatchFileFormat(interp, chan, fileName, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
  */
 
 static int
-MatchStringFormat(interp, data, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
-	widthPtr, heightPtr, oldformat)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
-    Tcl_Obj *data;		/* Object containing the image data. */
-    Tcl_Obj *formatObj;		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
-    Tk_PhotoImageFormat **imageFormatPtr;
-				/* A pointer to the photo image format
-				 * record is returned here. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are
-				 * returned here. */
-    int *oldformat;		/* returns 1 if the old image API is used */
+MatchStringFormat(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
+    Tcl_Obj *data,		/* Object containing the image data. */
+    Tcl_Obj *formatObj,		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
+    Tk_PhotoImageFormat **imageFormatPtr,
+				/* A pointer to the photo image format record
+				 * is returned here. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+				/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+				 * here. */
+    int *oldformat)		/* Returns 1 if the old image API is used. */
 {
-    int matched;
-    int useoldformat = 0;
+    int matched = 0, useoldformat = 0;
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     char *formatString = NULL;
-    
+
     if (formatObj) {
 	formatString = Tcl_GetString(formatObj);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Scan through the table of file format handlers to find
-     * one which can handle the image.
+     * Scan through the table of file format handlers to find one which can
+     * handle the image.
      */
 
-    matched = 0;
     for (formatPtr = tsdPtr->formatList; formatPtr != NULL;
 	    formatPtr = formatPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (formatObj != NULL) {
@@ -4211,7 +4198,7 @@ MatchStringFormat(interp, data, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
 	    matched = 1;
 	    if (formatPtr->stringMatchProc == NULL) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "-data option isn't supported for ",
-			formatString, " images", (char *) NULL);
+			formatString, " images", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
@@ -4235,7 +4222,7 @@ MatchStringFormat(interp, data, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
 		matched = 1;
 		if (formatPtr->stringMatchProc == NULL) {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "-data option isn't supported",
-			    " for ", formatString, " images", (char *) NULL);
+			    " for ", formatString, " images", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 	    }
@@ -4252,10 +4239,9 @@ MatchStringFormat(interp, data, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
     if (formatPtr == NULL) {
 	if ((formatObj != NULL) && !matched) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image format \"", formatString,
-		    "\" is not supported", (char *) NULL);
+		    "\" is not supported", NULL);
 	} else {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "couldn't recognize image data",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "couldn't recognize image data", NULL);
 	}
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -4270,14 +4256,14 @@ MatchStringFormat(interp, data, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
  *
  * Tk_FindPhoto --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to get an opaque handle (actually a
- *	PhotoMaster *) for a given image, which can be used in
- *	subsequent calls to Tk_PhotoPutBlock, etc.  The `name'
- *	parameter is the name of the image.
+ *	This function is called to get an opaque handle (actually a
+ *	PhotoMaster *) for a given image, which can be used in subsequent
+ *	calls to Tk_PhotoPutBlock, etc. The `name' parameter is the name of
+ *	the image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The handle for the photo image, or NULL if there is no
- *	photo image with the name given.
+ *	The handle for the photo image, or NULL if there is no photo image
+ *	with the name given.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4286,16 +4272,16 @@ MatchStringFormat(interp, data, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
  */
 
 Tk_PhotoHandle
-Tk_FindPhoto(interp, imageName)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter (application) in which image
+Tk_FindPhoto(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter (application) in which image
 				 * exists. */
-    CONST char *imageName;	/* Name of the desired photo image. */
+    CONST char *imageName)	/* Name of the desired photo image. */
 {
     ClientData clientData;
     Tk_ImageType *typePtr;
 
     clientData = Tk_GetImageMasterData(interp, imageName, &typePtr);
-    if (typePtr != &tkPhotoImageType) {
+    if ((typePtr == NULL) || (typePtr->name != tkPhotoImageType.name)) {
 	return NULL;
     }
     return (Tk_PhotoHandle) clientData;
@@ -4306,39 +4292,40 @@ Tk_FindPhoto(interp, imageName)
  *
  * Tk_PhotoPutBlock --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to put image data into a photo image.
+ *	This function is called to put image data into a photo image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	None.
+ *	A standard Tcl result code.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The image data is stored.  The image may be expanded.
- *	The Tk image code is informed that the image has changed.
+ *	The image data is stored. The image may be expanded. The Tk image code
+ *	is informed that the image has changed. If the result code is
+ *	TCL_ERROR, an error message will be placed in the interpreter (if
+ *	non-NULL).
  *
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
 
-void
-Tk_PhotoPutBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
-    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Opaque handle for the photo image
-				 * to be updated. */
-    register Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
-				/* Pointer to a structure describing the
-				 * pixel data to be copied into the image. */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of the top-left pixel to
-				 * be updated in the image. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of the area of the image
-				 * to be updated. */
-    int compRule;		/* Compositing rule to use when processing
+int
+Tk_PhotoPutBlock(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for passing back error
+				 * messages, or NULL. */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle,	/* Opaque handle for the photo image to be
+				 * updated. */
+    register Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
+				/* Pointer to a structure describing the pixel
+				 * data to be copied into the image. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Coordinates of the top-left pixel to be
+				 * updated in the image. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of the area of the image to be
+				 * updated. */
+    int compRule)		/* Compositing rule to use when processing
 				 * transparent pixels. */
 {
     register PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
-    int xEnd, yEnd;
-    int greenOffset, blueOffset, alphaOffset;
-    int wLeft, hLeft;
-    int wCopy, hCopy;
-    unsigned char *srcPtr, *srcLinePtr;
-    unsigned char *destPtr, *destLinePtr;
-    int pitch;
+    int xEnd, yEnd, greenOffset, blueOffset, alphaOffset;
+    int wLeft, hLeft, wCopy, hCopy, pitch;
+    unsigned char *srcPtr, *srcLinePtr, *destPtr, *destLinePtr;
     int sourceIsSimplePhoto = compRule & SOURCE_IS_SIMPLE_ALPHA_PHOTO;
     XRectangle rect;
 
@@ -4353,16 +4340,21 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
 	height = masterPtr->userHeight - y;
     }
     if ((width <= 0) || (height <= 0)) {
-	return;
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
     xEnd = x + width;
     yEnd = y + height;
     if ((xEnd > masterPtr->width) || (yEnd > masterPtr->height)) {
 	int sameSrc = (blockPtr->pixelPtr == masterPtr->pix32);
+
 	if (ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, MAX(xEnd, masterPtr->width),
 		MAX(yEnd, masterPtr->height)) == TCL_ERROR) {
-	    panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE);
+	    if (interp != NULL) {
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, NULL);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (sameSrc) {
 	    blockPtr->pixelPtr = masterPtr->pix32;
@@ -4370,12 +4362,12 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
 	}
     }
 
-
     if ((y < masterPtr->ditherY) || ((y == masterPtr->ditherY)
 	    && (x < masterPtr->ditherX))) {
 	/*
 	 * The dithering isn't correct past the start of this block.
 	 */
+
 	masterPtr->ditherX = x;
 	masterPtr->ditherY = y;
     }
@@ -4399,111 +4391,162 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Copy the data into our local 32-bit/pixel array.
-     * If we can do it with a single memmove, we do.
+     * Copy the data into our local 32-bit/pixel array. If we can do it with a
+     * single memmove, we do.
      */
 
     destLinePtr = masterPtr->pix32 + (y * masterPtr->width + x) * 4;
     pitch = masterPtr->width * 4;
 
     /*
-     * This test is probably too restrictive.  We should also be able to
-     * do a memmove if pixelSize == 3 and alphaOffset == 0.  Maybe other cases
-     * too.
+     * Test to see if we can do the whole write in a single copy. This test is
+     * probably too restrictive. We should also be able to do a memmove if
+     * pixelSize == 3 and alphaOffset == 0. Maybe other cases too.
      */
+
     if ((blockPtr->pixelSize == 4)
 	    && (greenOffset == 1) && (blueOffset == 2) && (alphaOffset == 3)
 	    && (width <= blockPtr->width) && (height <= blockPtr->height)
 	    && ((height == 1) || ((x == 0) && (width == masterPtr->width)
 		&& (blockPtr->pitch == pitch)))
 	    && (compRule == TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET)) {
-	memmove((VOID *) destLinePtr,
-		(VOID *) (blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0]),
+	memmove(destLinePtr, blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0],
 		(size_t) (height * width * 4));
-    } else {
-	int alpha;
-	for (hLeft = height; hLeft > 0;) {
-	    srcLinePtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0];
-	    hCopy = MIN(hLeft, blockPtr->height);
-	    hLeft -= hCopy;
-	    for (; hCopy > 0; --hCopy) {
-		if ((blockPtr->pixelSize == 4) && (greenOffset == 1)
+
+	/*
+	 * We know there's an alpha offset and we're setting the data, so skip
+	 * directly to the point when we recompute the photo validity region.
+	 */
+
+	goto recalculateValidRegion;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Copy and merge pixels according to the compositing rule.
+     */
+
+    for (hLeft = height; hLeft > 0;) {
+	int pixelSize = blockPtr->pixelSize;
+	int compRuleSet = (compRule == TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET);
+
+	srcLinePtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0];
+	hCopy = MIN(hLeft, blockPtr->height);
+	hLeft -= hCopy;
+	for (; hCopy > 0; --hCopy) {
+	    /*
+	     * If the layout of the source line matches our memory layout and
+	     * we're setting, we can just copy the bytes directly, which is
+	     * much faster.
+	     */
+
+	    if ((pixelSize == 4) && (greenOffset == 1)
 		    && (blueOffset == 2) && (alphaOffset == 3)
 		    && (width <= blockPtr->width)
-		    && (compRule == TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET)) {
-		    memcpy((VOID *) destLinePtr, (VOID *) srcLinePtr,
-			   (size_t) (width * 4));
-		} else {
-		    destPtr = destLinePtr;
-		    for (wLeft = width; wLeft > 0;) {
-			wCopy = MIN(wLeft, blockPtr->width);
-			wLeft -= wCopy;
-			srcPtr = srcLinePtr;
-			for (; wCopy > 0; --wCopy) {
-			    alpha = srcPtr[alphaOffset];
-			    
-			    /*
-			     * In the easy case, we can just copy.
-			     */
-			    if (!alphaOffset || (alpha == 255)) {
-				/* new solid part of the image */
-				*destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
-				*destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
-				*destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
-				*destPtr++ = 255;
-				srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
-				continue;
-			    }
+		    && compRuleSet) {
+		memcpy(destLinePtr, srcLinePtr, (size_t) (width * 4));
+		srcLinePtr += blockPtr->pitch;
+		destLinePtr += pitch;
+		continue;
+	    }
 
-			    /*
-			     * Combine according to the compositing rule.
-			     */
-			    switch (compRule) {
-			    case TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY:
-				if (!destPtr[3]) {
-				    /*
-				     * The destination is entirely
-				     * blank, so set it to the source,
-				     * just as if we used the SET
-				     * compositing rule.
-				     */
-				case TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET:
-				    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
-				    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
-				    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
-				    *destPtr++ = alpha;
-				    break;
-				}
+	    /*
+	     * Have to copy the slow way.
+	     */
+
+	    destPtr = destLinePtr;
+	    for (wLeft = width; wLeft > 0;) {
+		wCopy = MIN(wLeft, blockPtr->width);
+		wLeft -= wCopy;
+		srcPtr = srcLinePtr;
 
-				if (alpha) {
-				    int Alpha = destPtr[3];
+		/*
+		 * But we might be lucky and be able to use fairly fast loops.
+		 * It's worth checking...
+		 */
 
-				    /*
-				     * This implements the Porter-Duff
-				     * Source-Over compositing rule.
-				     */
+		if (alphaOffset == 0) {
+		    /*
+		     * This is the non-alpha case, so can still be fairly
+		     * fast. Note that in the non-alpha-source case, the
+		     * compositing rule doesn't apply.
+		     */
 
-				    destPtr[0] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[0],alpha,destPtr[0],Alpha);
-				    destPtr[1] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[greenOffset],alpha,destPtr[1],Alpha);
-				    destPtr[2] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[blueOffset],alpha,destPtr[2],Alpha);
-				    destPtr[3] = PD_SRC_OVER_ALPHA(alpha,Alpha);
-				}
-				/*
-				 * else should be empty space
-				 */
-				destPtr += 4;
-				break;
-
-			    default:
-				panic("unknown compositing rule: %d", compRule);
-			    }
-			    srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
-			}
+		    for (; wCopy>0 ; --wCopy, srcPtr+=pixelSize) {
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
+			*destPtr++ = 255;
+		    }
+		    continue;
+		} else if (compRuleSet) {
+		    /*
+		     * This is the SET compositing rule, which just replaces
+		     * what was there before with the new data. This is
+		     * another fairly fast case. No point in doing a memcpy();
+		     * the order of channels is probably wrong.
+		     */
+
+		    for (; wCopy>0 ; --wCopy, srcPtr+=pixelSize) {
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[alphaOffset];
 		    }
+		    continue;
+		}
+
+		/*
+		 * Bother; need to consider the alpha value of each pixel to
+		 * know what to do.
+		 */
+
+		for (; wCopy>0 ; --wCopy, srcPtr+=pixelSize) {
+		    int alpha = srcPtr[alphaOffset];
+
+		    if (alpha == 255 || !destPtr[3]) {
+			/*
+			 * Either the source is 100% opaque, or the
+			 * destination is entirely blank. In all cases, we
+			 * just set the destination to the source.
+			 */
+
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
+			*destPtr++ = alpha;
+			continue;
+		    }
+
+		    /*
+		     * Can still skip doing work if the source is 100%
+		     * transparent at this point.
+		     */
+
+		    if (alpha) {
+			int Alpha = destPtr[3];
+
+			/*
+			 * OK, there's real work to be done. Luckily, there's
+			 * a substantial literature on what to do in this
+			 * case. In particular, Porter and Duff have done a
+			 * taxonomy of compositing rules, and the right one is
+			 * the "Source Over" rule. This code implements that.
+			 */
+
+			destPtr[0] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[0], alpha, destPtr[0],
+				Alpha);
+			destPtr[1] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[greenOffset], alpha,
+				destPtr[1], Alpha);
+			destPtr[2] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[blueOffset], alpha,
+				destPtr[2], Alpha);
+			destPtr[3] = PD_SRC_OVER_ALPHA(alpha, Alpha);
+		    }
+
+		    destPtr += 4;
 		}
-		srcLinePtr += blockPtr->pitch;
-		destLinePtr += pitch;
 	    }
+	    srcLinePtr += blockPtr->pitch;
+	    destLinePtr += pitch;
 	}
     }
 
@@ -4512,34 +4555,35 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
      */
 
     if (alphaOffset) {
-	int x1, y1, end;
-
 	/*
-	 * This block is grossly inefficient.  For each row in the image, it
+	 * This block is grossly inefficient. For each row in the image, it
 	 * finds each continguous string of nontransparent pixels, then marks
-	 * those areas as valid in the validRegion mask.  This makes drawing
+	 * those areas as valid in the validRegion mask. This makes drawing
 	 * very efficient, because of the way we use X: we just say, here's
-	 * your mask, and here's your data.  We need not worry about the
-	 * current background color, etc.  But this costs us a lot on the
-	 * image setup.  Still, image setup only happens once, whereas the
-	 * drawing happens many times, so this might be the best way to go.
+	 * your mask, and here's your data. We need not worry about the
+	 * current background color, etc. But this costs us a lot on the image
+	 * setup. Still, image setup only happens once, whereas the drawing
+	 * happens many times, so this might be the best way to go.
 	 *
 	 * An alternative might be to not set up this mask, and instead, at
 	 * drawing time, for each transparent pixel, set its color to the
-	 * color of the background behind that pixel.  This is what I suspect
-	 * most of programs do.  However, they don't have to deal with the
+	 * color of the background behind that pixel. This is what I suspect
+	 * most of programs do. However, they don't have to deal with the
 	 * canvas, which could have many different background colors.
 	 * Determining the correct bg color for a given pixel might be
 	 * expensive.
 	 */
 
 	if (compRule != TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY) {
+	    TkRegion workRgn;
+
 	    /*
-	     * Don't need this when using the OVERLAY compositing rule,
-	     * which always strictly increases the valid region.
+	     * Don't need this when using the OVERLAY compositing rule, which
+	     * always strictly increases the valid region.
 	     */
-	    TkRegion workRgn = TkCreateRegion();
 
+	recalculateValidRegion:
+	    workRgn = TkCreateRegion();
 	    rect.x = x;
 	    rect.y = y;
 	    rect.width = width;
@@ -4550,34 +4594,15 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
 	    TkDestroyRegion(workRgn);
 	}
 
-	destLinePtr = masterPtr->pix32 + (y * masterPtr->width + x) * 4 + 3;
-	for (y1 = 0; y1 < height; y1++) {
-	    x1 = 0;
-	    destPtr = destLinePtr;
-	    while (x1 < width) {
-		/* search for first non-transparent pixel */
-		while ((x1 < width) && !*destPtr) {
-		    x1++;
-		    destPtr += 4;
-		}
-		end = x1;
-		/* search for first transparent pixel */
-		while ((end < width) && *destPtr) {
-		    end++;
-		    destPtr += 4;
-		}
-		if (end > x1) {
-		    rect.x = x + x1;
-		    rect.y = y + y1;
-		    rect.width = end - x1;
-		    rect.height = 1;
-		    TkUnionRectWithRegion(&rect, masterPtr->validRegion,
-			    masterPtr->validRegion);
-		}
-		x1 = end;
-	    }
-	    destLinePtr += masterPtr->width * 4;
-	}
+	/*
+	 * Factorize out the main part of the building of the region data to
+	 * allow for more efficient per-platform implementations. [Bug 919066]
+	 */
+
+	TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData(masterPtr->validRegion, (unsigned) x,
+		(unsigned) y, (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height,
+		masterPtr->pix32 + (y * masterPtr->width + x) * 4 + 3,
+		4, (unsigned) masterPtr->width * 4);
     } else {
 	rect.x = x;
 	rect.y = y;
@@ -4597,6 +4622,7 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
 	 * builds up large simple-alpha images by single pixels.  We don't
 	 * negate COMPLEX_ALPHA in this case. [Bug 1409140]
 	 */
+
 	if (!(masterPtr->flags & COMPLEX_ALPHA)) {
 	    unsigned char newAlpha;
 
@@ -4614,6 +4640,7 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
 	 * Toggle to only checking the changed pixels requires knowing where
 	 * the alpha pixels are.
 	 */
+
 	ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded(masterPtr);
     }
 
@@ -4627,8 +4654,9 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
      * Tell the core image code that this image has changed.
      */
 
-    Tk_ImageChanged(masterPtr->tkMaster, x, y, width, height, masterPtr->width,
-	    masterPtr->height);
+    Tk_ImageChanged(masterPtr->tkMaster, x, y, width, height,
+	    masterPtr->width, masterPtr->height);
+    return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -4636,60 +4664,56 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
  *
  * Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to put image data into a photo image,
- *	with possible subsampling and/or zooming of the pixels.
+ *	This function is called to put image data into a photo image, with
+ *	possible subsampling and/or zooming of the pixels.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The image data is stored.  The image may be expanded.
- *	The Tk image code is informed that the image has changed.
+ *	The image data is stored. The image may be expanded. The Tk image code
+ *	is informed that the image has changed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void
-Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY,
-	subsampleX, subsampleY, compRule)
-    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Opaque handle for the photo image
-				 * to be updated. */
-    register Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
-				/* Pointer to a structure describing the
-				 * pixel data to be copied into the image. */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of the top-left pixel to
-				 * be updated in the image. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of the area of the image
-				 * to be updated. */
-    int zoomX, zoomY;		/* Zoom factors for the X and Y axes. */
-    int subsampleX, subsampleY;	/* Subsampling factors for the X and Y axes. */
-    int compRule;		/* Compositing rule to use when processing
+int
+Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for passing back error
+				 * messages, or NULL. */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle,	/* Opaque handle for the photo image to be
+				 * updated. */
+    register Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
+				/* Pointer to a structure describing the pixel
+				 * data to be copied into the image. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Coordinates of the top-left pixel to be
+				 * updated in the image. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of the area of the image to be
+				 * updated. */
+    int zoomX, int zoomY,	/* Zoom factors for the X and Y axes. */
+    int subsampleX, int subsampleY,
+				/* Subsampling factors for the X and Y
+				 * axes. */
+    int compRule)		/* Compositing rule to use when processing
 				 * transparent pixels. */
 {
-    register PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
-    int xEnd, yEnd;
-    int greenOffset, blueOffset, alphaOffset;
-    int wLeft, hLeft;
-    int wCopy, hCopy;
-    int blockWid, blockHt;
-    unsigned char *srcPtr, *srcLinePtr, *srcOrigPtr;
-    unsigned char *destPtr, *destLinePtr;
-    int pitch;
-    int xRepeat, yRepeat;
-    int blockXSkip, blockYSkip, sourceIsSimplePhoto;
+    register PhotoMaster *masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) handle;
+    int xEnd, yEnd, greenOffset, blueOffset, alphaOffset;
+    int wLeft, hLeft, wCopy, hCopy, blockWid, blockHt;
+    unsigned char *srcPtr, *srcLinePtr, *srcOrigPtr, *destPtr, *destLinePtr;
+    int pitch, xRepeat, yRepeat, blockXSkip, blockYSkip, sourceIsSimplePhoto;
     XRectangle rect;
 
     if (zoomX==1 && zoomY==1 && subsampleX==1 && subsampleY==1) {
-	Tk_PhotoPutBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule);
-	return;
+	return Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
+		compRule);
     }
 
     sourceIsSimplePhoto = compRule & SOURCE_IS_SIMPLE_ALPHA_PHOTO;
     compRule &= ~SOURCE_IS_SIMPLE_ALPHA_PHOTO;
-    masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) handle;
 
     if (zoomX <= 0 || zoomY <= 0) {
-	return;
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
     if ((masterPtr->userWidth != 0) && ((x + width) > masterPtr->userWidth)) {
 	width = masterPtr->userWidth - x;
@@ -4699,7 +4723,7 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY,
 	height = masterPtr->userHeight - y;
     }
     if (width <= 0 || height <= 0) {
-	return;
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
     xEnd = x + width;
@@ -4708,7 +4732,11 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY,
 	int sameSrc = (blockPtr->pixelPtr == masterPtr->pix32);
 	if (ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, MAX(xEnd, masterPtr->width),
 		MAX(yEnd, masterPtr->height)) == TCL_ERROR) {
-	    panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE);
+	    if (interp != NULL) {
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, NULL);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (sameSrc) {
 	    blockPtr->pixelPtr = masterPtr->pix32;
@@ -4793,10 +4821,12 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY,
 		srcPtr = srcLinePtr;
 		for (; wCopy > 0; wCopy -= zoomX) {
 		    for (xRepeat = MIN(wCopy, zoomX); xRepeat > 0; xRepeat--) {
-			int alpha = srcPtr[alphaOffset];
+			int alpha = srcPtr[alphaOffset];/* Source alpha. */
+
 			/*
 			 * Common case (solid pixels) first
 			 */
+
 			if (!alphaOffset || (alpha == 255)) {
 			    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
 			    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
@@ -4805,32 +4835,33 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY,
 			    continue;
  			}
 
-			switch (compRule) {
-			case TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY:
-			    if (!destPtr[3]) {
-				/*
-				 * The destination is entirely blank,
-				 * so set it to the source, just as if
-				 * we used the SET compositing rule.
-				 */
-			    case TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET:
-				*destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
-				*destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
-				*destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
-				*destPtr++ = alpha;
-				break;
-			    }
-			    if (alpha) {
-				int Alpha = destPtr[3];
-				destPtr[0] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[0],alpha,destPtr[0],Alpha);
-				destPtr[1] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[greenOffset],alpha,destPtr[1],Alpha);
-				destPtr[2] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[blueOffset],alpha,destPtr[2],Alpha);
-				destPtr[3] = PD_SRC_OVER_ALPHA(alpha,Alpha);
-			    }
+			if (compRule==TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET || !destPtr[3]) {
+			    /*
+			     * Either this is the SET rule (we overwrite
+			     * whatever is there) or the destination is
+			     * entirely blank. In both cases, we just set the
+			     * destination to the source.
+			     */
+
+			    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
+			    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
+			    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
+			    *destPtr++ = alpha;
+			} else if (alpha) {
+			    int Alpha = destPtr[3];	/* Destination
+							 * alpha. */
+
+			    destPtr[0] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[0], alpha,
+				    destPtr[0], Alpha);
+			    destPtr[1] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[greenOffset],alpha,
+				    destPtr[1], Alpha);
+			    destPtr[2] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[blueOffset], alpha,
+				    destPtr[2], Alpha);
+			    destPtr[3] = PD_SRC_OVER_ALPHA(alpha, Alpha);
+
+			    destPtr += 4;
+			} else {
 			    destPtr += 4;
-			    break;
-			default:
-			    panic("unknown compositing rule: %d", compRule);
 			}
 		    }
 		    srcPtr += blockXSkip;
@@ -4850,13 +4881,12 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY,
      */
 
     if (alphaOffset) {
-	int x1, y1, end;
-
 	if (compRule != TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY) {
 	    /*
 	     * Don't need this when using the OVERLAY compositing rule, which
 	     * always strictly increases the valid region.
 	     */
+
 	    TkRegion workRgn = TkCreateRegion();
 
 	    rect.x = x;
@@ -4869,34 +4899,10 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY,
 	    TkDestroyRegion(workRgn);
 	}
 
-	destLinePtr = masterPtr->pix32 + (y * masterPtr->width + x) * 4 + 3;
-	for (y1 = 0; y1 < height; y1++) {
-	    x1 = 0;
-	    destPtr = destLinePtr;
-	    while (x1 < width) {
-		/* search for first non-transparent pixel */
-		while ((x1 < width) && !*destPtr) {
-		    x1++;
-		    destPtr += 4;
-		}
-		end = x1;
-		/* search for first transparent pixel */
-		while ((end < width) && *destPtr) {
-		    end++;
-		    destPtr += 4;
-		}
-		if (end > x1) {
-		    rect.x = x + x1;
-		    rect.y = y + y1;
-		    rect.width = end - x1;
-		    rect.height = 1;
-		    TkUnionRectWithRegion(&rect, masterPtr->validRegion,
-			    masterPtr->validRegion);
-		}
-		x1 = end;
-	    }
-	    destLinePtr += masterPtr->width * 4;
-	}
+	TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData(masterPtr->validRegion,
+		(unsigned)x, (unsigned)y, (unsigned)width, (unsigned)height,
+		&masterPtr->pix32[(y * masterPtr->width + x) * 4 + 3], 4,
+		(unsigned) masterPtr->width * 4);
     } else {
 	rect.x = x;
 	rect.y = y;
@@ -4940,7 +4946,7 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY,
      * Update each instance.
      */
 
-    Tk_DitherPhoto((Tk_PhotoHandle)masterPtr, x, y, width, height);
+    Tk_DitherPhoto((Tk_PhotoHandle) masterPtr, x, y, width, height);
 
     /*
      * Tell the core image code that this image has changed.
@@ -4948,6 +4954,7 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY,
 
     Tk_ImageChanged(masterPtr->tkMaster, x, y, width, height, masterPtr->width,
 	    masterPtr->height);
+    return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -4955,27 +4962,27 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY,
  *
  * Tk_DitherPhoto --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to update an area of each instance's
- *	pixmap by dithering the corresponding area of the image master.
+ *	This function is called to update an area of each instance's pixmap by
+ *	dithering the corresponding area of the image master.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The pixmap of each instance of this image gets updated.
- *	The fields in *masterPtr indicating which area of the image
- *	is correctly dithered get updated.
+ *	The pixmap of each instance of this image gets updated. The fields in
+ *	*masterPtr indicating which area of the image is correctly dithered
+ *	get updated.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DitherPhoto(photo, x, y, width, height)
-    Tk_PhotoHandle photo;	/* Image master whose instances are
-				 * to be updated. */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of the top-left pixel
-				 * in the area to be dithered. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of the area to be dithered. */
+Tk_DitherPhoto(
+    Tk_PhotoHandle photo,	/* Image master whose instances are to be
+				 * updated. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Coordinates of the top-left pixel in the
+				 * area to be dithered. */
+    int width, int height)	/* Dimensions of the area to be dithered. */
 {
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) photo;
     PhotoInstance *instancePtr;
@@ -4990,14 +4997,13 @@ Tk_DitherPhoto(photo, x, y, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Work out whether this block will be correctly dithered
-     * and whether it will extend the correctly dithered region.
+     * Work out whether this block will be correctly dithered and whether it
+     * will extend the correctly dithered region.
      */
 
     if (((y < masterPtr->ditherY)
 	    || ((y == masterPtr->ditherY) && (x <= masterPtr->ditherX)))
 	    && ((y + height) > (masterPtr->ditherY))) {
-
 	/*
 	 * This block starts inside (or immediately after) the correctly
 	 * dithered region, so the first scan line at least will be right.
@@ -5006,8 +5012,8 @@ Tk_DitherPhoto(photo, x, y, width, height)
 
 	if ((x == 0) && (width == masterPtr->width)) {
 	    /*
-	     * We are doing the full width, therefore the dithering
-	     * will be correct to the end.
+	     * We are doing the full width, therefore the dithering will be
+	     * correct to the end.
 	     */
 
 	    masterPtr->ditherX = 0;
@@ -5015,8 +5021,8 @@ Tk_DitherPhoto(photo, x, y, width, height)
 	} else {
 	    /*
 	     * We are doing partial scanlines, therefore the
-	     * correctly-dithered region will be extended by
-	     * at most one scan line.
+	     * correctly-dithered region will be extended by at most one scan
+	     * line.
 	     */
 
 	    if (x <= masterPtr->ditherX) {
@@ -5028,16 +5034,15 @@ Tk_DitherPhoto(photo, x, y, width, height)
 	    }
 	}
     }
-
-}    
+}
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * DitherInstance --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to update an area of an instance's
- *	pixmap by dithering the corresponding area of the master.
+ *	This function is called to update an area of an instance's pixmap by
+ *	dithering the corresponding area of the master.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -5049,33 +5054,24 @@ Tk_DitherPhoto(photo, x, y, width, height)
  */
 
 static void
-DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
-    PhotoInstance *instancePtr;	/* The instance to be updated. */
-    int xStart, yStart;		/* Coordinates of the top-left pixel in the
+DitherInstance(
+    PhotoInstance *instancePtr,	/* The instance to be updated. */
+    int xStart, int yStart,	/* Coordinates of the top-left pixel in the
 				 * block to be dithered. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of the block to be dithered. */
+    int width, int height)	/* Dimensions of the block to be dithered. */
 {
-    PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
-    ColorTable *colorPtr;
+    PhotoMaster *masterPtr = instancePtr->masterPtr;
+    ColorTable *colorPtr = instancePtr->colorTablePtr;
     XImage *imagePtr;
-    int nLines, bigEndian;
-    int i, c, x, y;
-    int xEnd, yEnd;
+    int nLines, bigEndian, i, c, x, y, xEnd, doDithering = 1;
     int bitsPerPixel, bytesPerLine, lineLength;
-    unsigned char *srcLinePtr, *srcPtr;
-    schar *errLinePtr, *errPtr;
-    unsigned char *destBytePtr, *dstLinePtr;
-    pixel *destLongPtr;
+    unsigned char *srcLinePtr;
+    schar *errLinePtr;
     pixel firstBit, word, mask;
-    int col[3];
-    int doDithering = 1;
-
-    colorPtr = instancePtr->colorTablePtr;
-    masterPtr = instancePtr->masterPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Turn dithering off in certain cases where it is not
-     * needed (TrueColor, DirectColor with many colors).
+     * Turn dithering off in certain cases where it is not needed (TrueColor,
+     * DirectColor with many colors).
      */
 
     if ((colorPtr->visualInfo.class == DirectColor)
@@ -5091,9 +5087,8 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * First work out how many lines to do at a time,
-     * then how many bytes we'll need for pixel storage,
-     * and allocate it.
+     * First work out how many lines to do at a time, then how many bytes
+     * we'll need for pixel storage, and allocate it.
      */
 
     nLines = (MAX_PIXELS + width - 1) / width;
@@ -5106,14 +5101,15 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 
     imagePtr = instancePtr->imagePtr;
     if (imagePtr == NULL) {
-	return;			/* we must be really tight on memory */
+	return;			/* We must be really tight on memory. */
     }
     bitsPerPixel = imagePtr->bits_per_pixel;
     bytesPerLine = ((bitsPerPixel * width + 31) >> 3) & ~3;
     imagePtr->width = width;
     imagePtr->height = nLines;
     imagePtr->bytes_per_line = bytesPerLine;
-    imagePtr->data = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (imagePtr->bytes_per_line * nLines));
+    imagePtr->data = (char *)
+	    ckalloc((unsigned) (imagePtr->bytes_per_line * nLines));
     bigEndian = imagePtr->bitmap_bit_order == MSBFirst;
     firstBit = bigEndian? (1 << (imagePtr->bitmap_unit - 1)): 1;
 
@@ -5123,46 +5119,50 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
     xEnd = xStart + width;
 
     /*
-     * Loop over the image, doing at most nLines lines before
-     * updating the screen image.
+     * Loop over the image, doing at most nLines lines before updating the
+     * screen image.
      */
 
     for (; height > 0; height -= nLines) {
+	unsigned char *dstLinePtr = (unsigned char *) imagePtr->data;
+	int yEnd;
+
 	if (nLines > height) {
 	    nLines = height;
 	}
-	dstLinePtr = (unsigned char *) imagePtr->data;
 	yEnd = yStart + nLines;
 	for (y = yStart; y < yEnd; ++y) {
-	    srcPtr = srcLinePtr;
-	    errPtr = errLinePtr;
-	    destBytePtr = dstLinePtr;
-	    destLongPtr = (pixel *) dstLinePtr;
+	    unsigned char *srcPtr = srcLinePtr;
+	    schar *errPtr = errLinePtr;
+	    unsigned char *destBytePtr = dstLinePtr;
+	    pixel *destLongPtr = (pixel *) dstLinePtr;
+
 	    if (colorPtr->flags & COLOR_WINDOW) {
 		/*
-		 * Color window.  We dither the three components
-		 * independently, using Floyd-Steinberg dithering,
-		 * which propagates errors from the quantization of
-		 * pixels to the pixels below and to the right.
+		 * Color window. We dither the three components independently,
+		 * using Floyd-Steinberg dithering, which propagates errors
+		 * from the quantization of pixels to the pixels below and to
+		 * the right.
 		 */
 
 		for (x = xStart; x < xEnd; ++x) {
+		    int col[3];
+
 		    if (doDithering) {
 			for (i = 0; i < 3; ++i) {
 			    /*
 			     * Compute the error propagated into this pixel
-			     * for this component.
-			     * If e[x,y] is the array of quantization error
-			     * values, we compute
+			     * for this component. If e[x,y] is the array of
+			     * quantization error values, we compute
 			     *     7/16 * e[x-1,y] + 1/16 * e[x-1,y-1]
 			     *   + 5/16 * e[x,y-1] + 3/16 * e[x+1,y-1]
 			     * and round it to an integer.
 			     *
-			     * The expression ((c + 2056) >> 4) - 128
-			     * computes round(c / 16), and works correctly on
-			     * machines without a sign-extending right shift.
+			     * The expression ((c + 2056) >> 4) - 128 computes
+			     * round(c / 16), and works correctly on machines
+			     * without a sign-extending right shift.
 			     */
-			    
+
 			    c = (x > 0) ? errPtr[-3] * 7: 0;
 			    if (y > 0) {
 				if (x > 0) {
@@ -5173,13 +5173,13 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 				    c += errPtr[-lineLength+3] * 3;
 				}
 			    }
-			    
+
 			    /*
 			     * Add the propagated error to the value of this
 			     * component, quantize it, and store the
 			     * quantization error.
 			     */
-			    
+
 			    c = ((c + 2056) >> 4) - 128 + *srcPtr++;
 			    if (c < 0) {
 				c = 0;
@@ -5190,9 +5190,9 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 			    *errPtr++ = c - col[i];
 			}
 		    } else {
-			/* 
-			 * Output is virtually continuous in this case,
-			 * so don't bother dithering.
+			/*
+			 * Output is virtually continuous in this case, so
+			 * don't bother dithering.
 			 */
 
 			col[0] = *srcPtr++;
@@ -5202,8 +5202,8 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 		    srcPtr++;
 
 		    /*
-		     * Translate the quantized component values into
-		     * an X pixel value, and store it in the image.
+		     * Translate the quantized component values into an X
+		     * pixel value, and store it in the image.
 		     */
 
 		    i = colorPtr->redValues[col[0]]
@@ -5213,32 +5213,34 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 			i = colorPtr->pixelMap[i];
 		    }
 		    switch (bitsPerPixel) {
-			case NBBY:
-			    *destBytePtr++ = i;
-			    break;
+		    case NBBY:
+			*destBytePtr++ = i;
+			break;
 #ifndef __WIN32__
-/*
- * This case is not valid for Windows because the image format is different
- * from the pixel format in Win32.  Eventually we need to fix the image
- * code in Tk to use the Windows native image ordering.  This would speed
- * up the image code for all of the common sizes.
- */
+			/*
+			 * This case is not valid for Windows because the
+			 * image format is different from the pixel format in
+			 * Win32. Eventually we need to fix the image code in
+			 * Tk to use the Windows native image ordering. This
+			 * would speed up the image code for all of the common
+			 * sizes.
+			 */
 
-			case NBBY * sizeof(pixel):
-			    *destLongPtr++ = i;
-			    break;
+		    case NBBY * sizeof(pixel):
+			*destLongPtr++ = i;
+			break;
 #endif
-			default:
-			    XPutPixel(imagePtr, x - xStart, y - yStart,
-				    (unsigned) i);
+		    default:
+			XPutPixel(imagePtr, x - xStart, y - yStart,
+				(unsigned) i);
 		    }
 		}
 
 	    } else if (bitsPerPixel > 1) {
 		/*
-		 * Multibit monochrome window.  The operation here is similar
+		 * Multibit monochrome window. The operation here is similar
 		 * to the color window case above, except that there is only
-		 * one component.  If the master image is in color, use the
+		 * one component. If the master image is in color, use the
 		 * luminance computed as
 		 *	0.344 * red + 0.5 * green + 0.156 * blue.
 		 */
@@ -5260,7 +5262,7 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 			c += srcPtr[0];
 		    } else {
 			c += (unsigned)(srcPtr[0] * 11 + srcPtr[1] * 16
-					+ srcPtr[2] * 5 + 16) >> 5;
+				+ srcPtr[2] * 5 + 16) >> 5;
 		    }
 		    srcPtr += 4;
 
@@ -5273,40 +5275,42 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 		    *errPtr++ = c - i;
 		    i = colorPtr->redValues[i];
 		    switch (bitsPerPixel) {
-			case NBBY:
-			    *destBytePtr++ = i;
-			    break;
+		    case NBBY:
+			*destBytePtr++ = i;
+			break;
 #ifndef __WIN32__
-/*
- * This case is not valid for Windows because the image format is different
- * from the pixel format in Win32.  Eventually we need to fix the image
- * code in Tk to use the Windows native image ordering.  This would speed
- * up the image code for all of the common sizes.
- */
+			/*
+			 * This case is not valid for Windows because the
+			 * image format is different from the pixel format in
+			 * Win32. Eventually we need to fix the image code in
+			 * Tk to use the Windows native image ordering. This
+			 * would speed up the image code for all of the common
+			 * sizes.
+			 */
 
-			case NBBY * sizeof(pixel):
-			    *destLongPtr++ = i;
-			    break;
+		    case NBBY * sizeof(pixel):
+			*destLongPtr++ = i;
+			break;
 #endif
-			default:
-			    XPutPixel(imagePtr, x - xStart, y - yStart,
-				    (unsigned) i);
+		    default:
+			XPutPixel(imagePtr, x - xStart, y - yStart,
+				(unsigned) i);
 		    }
 		}
 	    } else {
 		/*
-		 * 1-bit monochrome window.  This is similar to the
-		 * multibit monochrome case above, except that the
-		 * quantization is simpler (we only have black = 0
-		 * and white = 255), and we produce an XY-Bitmap.
+		 * 1-bit monochrome window. This is similar to the multibit
+		 * monochrome case above, except that the quantization is
+		 * simpler (we only have black = 0 and white = 255), and we
+		 * produce an XY-Bitmap.
 		 */
 
 		word = 0;
 		mask = firstBit;
 		for (x = xStart; x < xEnd; ++x) {
 		    /*
-		     * If we have accumulated a whole word, store it
-		     * in the image and start a new word.
+		     * If we have accumulated a whole word, store it in the
+		     * image and start a new word.
 		     */
 
 		    if (mask == 0) {
@@ -5331,7 +5335,7 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 			c += srcPtr[0];
 		    } else {
 			c += (unsigned)(srcPtr[0] * 11 + srcPtr[1] * 16
-					+ srcPtr[2] * 5 + 16) >> 5;
+				+ srcPtr[2] * 5 + 16) >> 5;
 		    }
 		    srcPtr += 4;
 
@@ -5356,8 +5360,8 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Update the pixmap for this instance with the block of
-	 * pixels that we have just computed.
+	 * Update the pixmap for this instance with the block of pixels that
+	 * we have just computed.
 	 */
 
 	TkPutImage(colorPtr->pixelMap, colorPtr->numColors,
@@ -5365,7 +5369,6 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 		instancePtr->gc, imagePtr, 0, 0, xStart, yStart,
 		(unsigned) width, (unsigned) nLines);
 	yStart = yEnd;
-	
     }
 
     ckfree(imagePtr->data);
@@ -5377,26 +5380,25 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
  *
  * Tk_PhotoBlank --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to clear an entire photo image.
+ *	This function is called to clear an entire photo image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The valid region for the image is set to the null region.
- *	The generic image code is notified that the image has changed.
+ *	The valid region for the image is set to the null region. The generic
+ *	image code is notified that the image has changed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_PhotoBlank(handle)
-    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Handle for the image to be blanked. */
+Tk_PhotoBlank(
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle)	/* Handle for the image to be blanked. */
 {
-    PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
+    PhotoMaster *masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) handle;
     PhotoInstance *instancePtr;
 
-    masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) handle;
     masterPtr->ditherX = masterPtr->ditherY = 0;
     masterPtr->flags = 0;
 
@@ -5410,16 +5412,16 @@ Tk_PhotoBlank(handle)
     masterPtr->validRegion = TkCreateRegion();
 
     /*
-     * Clear out the 32-bit pixel storage array.
-     * Clear out the dithering error arrays for each instance.
+     * Clear out the 32-bit pixel storage array. Clear out the dithering error
+     * arrays for each instance.
      */
 
-    memset((VOID *) masterPtr->pix32, 0,
+    memset(masterPtr->pix32, 0,
 	    (size_t) (masterPtr->width * masterPtr->height * 4));
     for (instancePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; instancePtr != NULL;
 	    instancePtr = instancePtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (instancePtr->error) {
-	    memset((VOID *) instancePtr->error, 0,
+	    memset(instancePtr->error, 0,
 		    (size_t) (masterPtr->width * masterPtr->height
 		    * 3 * sizeof(schar)));
 	}
@@ -5438,30 +5440,29 @@ Tk_PhotoBlank(handle)
  *
  * Tk_PhotoExpand --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to request that a photo image be
- *	expanded if necessary to be at least `width' pixels wide and
- *	`height' pixels high.  If the user has declared a definite
- *	image size (using the -width and -height configuration
- *	options) then this call has no effect.
+ *	This function is called to request that a photo image be expanded if
+ *	necessary to be at least `width' pixels wide and `height' pixels high.
+ *	If the user has declared a definite image size (using the -width and
+ *	-height configuration options) then this call has no effect.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The size of the photo image may change; if so the generic
- *	image code is informed.
+ *	The size of the photo image may change; if so the generic image code
+ *	is informed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void
-Tk_PhotoExpand(handle, width, height)
-    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Handle for the image to be expanded. */
-    int width, height;		/* Desired minimum dimensions of the image. */
+int
+Tk_PhotoExpand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for passing back error
+				 * messages, or NULL. */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle,	/* Handle for the image to be expanded. */
+    int width, int height)	/* Desired minimum dimensions of the image. */
 {
-    PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
-
-    masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) handle;
+    PhotoMaster *masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) handle;
 
     if (width <= masterPtr->width) {
 	width = masterPtr->width;
@@ -5472,11 +5473,16 @@ Tk_PhotoExpand(handle, width, height)
     if ((width != masterPtr->width) || (height != masterPtr->height)) {
 	if (ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, MAX(width, masterPtr->width),
 		MAX(height, masterPtr->height)) == TCL_ERROR) {
-	    panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE);
+	    if (interp != NULL) {
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, NULL);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	Tk_ImageChanged(masterPtr->tkMaster, 0, 0, 0, 0, masterPtr->width,
 		masterPtr->height);
     }
+    return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -5484,12 +5490,10 @@ Tk_PhotoExpand(handle, width, height)
  *
  * Tk_PhotoGetSize --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to obtain the current size of a photo
- *	image.
+ *	This function is called to obtain the current size of a photo image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The image's width and height are returned in *widthp
- *	and *heightp.
+ *	The image's width and height are returned in *widthp and *heightp.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5498,15 +5502,15 @@ Tk_PhotoExpand(handle, width, height)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_PhotoGetSize(handle, widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Handle for the image whose dimensions
-				 * are requested. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+Tk_PhotoGetSize(
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle,	/* Handle for the image whose dimensions are
+				 * requested. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+				/* The dimensions of the image are returned
 				 * here. */
 {
-    PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
+    PhotoMaster *masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) handle;
 
-    masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) handle;
     *widthPtr = masterPtr->width;
     *heightPtr = masterPtr->height;
 }
@@ -5516,38 +5520,42 @@ Tk_PhotoGetSize(handle, widthPtr, heightPtr)
  *
  * Tk_PhotoSetSize --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to set size of a photo image.
- *	This call is equivalent to using the -width and -height
- *	configuration options.
+ *	This function is called to set size of a photo image. This call is
+ *	equivalent to using the -width and -height configuration options.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The size of the image may change; if so the generic
- *	image code is informed.
+ *	The size of the image may change; if so the generic image code is
+ *	informed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void
-Tk_PhotoSetSize(handle, width, height)
-    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Handle for the image whose size is to
-				 * be set. */
-    int width, height;		/* New dimensions for the image. */
+int
+Tk_PhotoSetSize(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for passing back error
+				 * messages, or NULL. */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle,	/* Handle for the image whose size is to be
+				 * set. */
+    int width, int height)	/* New dimensions for the image. */
 {
-    PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
-
-    masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) handle;
+    PhotoMaster *masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) handle;
 
     masterPtr->userWidth = width;
     masterPtr->userHeight = height;
     if (ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, ((width > 0) ? width: masterPtr->width),
 	    ((height > 0) ? height: masterPtr->height)) == TCL_ERROR) {
-	panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE);
+	if (interp != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE, NULL);
+	}
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     Tk_ImageChanged(masterPtr->tkMaster, 0, 0, 0, 0,
 	    masterPtr->width, masterPtr->height);
+    return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -5555,14 +5563,14 @@ Tk_PhotoSetSize(handle, width, height)
  *
  * TkGetPhotoValidRegion --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to get the part of the photo where
- *	there is valid data.  Or, conversely, the part of the photo
- *	which is transparent.
+ *	This function is called to get the part of the photo where there is
+ *	valid data. Or, conversely, the part of the photo which is
+ *	transparent.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A TkRegion value that indicates the current area of the photo
- *	that is valid.  This value should not be used after any
- *	modification to the photo image.
+ *	A TkRegion value that indicates the current area of the photo that is
+ *	valid. This value should not be used after any modification to the
+ *	photo image.
  *
  * Side Effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5571,13 +5579,12 @@ Tk_PhotoSetSize(handle, width, height)
  */
 
 TkRegion
-TkPhotoGetValidRegion(handle)
-    Tk_PhotoHandle handle; /* Handle for the image whose valid region
-			    * is to obtained. */
+TkPhotoGetValidRegion(
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle)	/* Handle for the image whose valid region is
+				 * to obtained. */
 {
-    PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
+    PhotoMaster *masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) handle;
 
-    masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) handle;
     return masterPtr->validRegion;
 }
 
@@ -5586,15 +5593,15 @@ TkPhotoGetValidRegion(handle)
  *
  * ImgGetPhoto --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to obtain image data from a photo
- *	image.  This procedure fills in the Tk_PhotoImageBlock structure
- *	pointed to by `blockPtr' with details of the address and
- *	layout of the image data in memory.
+ *	This function is called to obtain image data from a photo image. This
+ *	function fills in the Tk_PhotoImageBlock structure pointed to by
+ *	`blockPtr' with details of the address and layout of the image data in
+ *	memory.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A pointer to the allocated data which should be freed later.
- *	NULL if there is no need to free data because
- *	blockPtr->pixelPtr points directly to the image data.
+ *	A pointer to the allocated data which should be freed later. NULL if
+ *	there is no need to free data because blockPtr->pixelPtr points
+ *	directly to the image data.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5603,13 +5610,13 @@ TkPhotoGetValidRegion(handle)
  */
 
 static char *
-ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
-    PhotoMaster *masterPtr;	/* Handle for the photo image from which
-				 * image data is desired. */
-    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
-				/* Information about the address and layout
-				 * of the image data is returned here. */
-    struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr;
+ImgGetPhoto(
+    PhotoMaster *masterPtr,	/* Handle for the photo image from which image
+				 * data is desired. */
+    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
+				/* Information about the address and layout of
+				 * the image data is returned here. */
+    struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr)
 {
     unsigned char *pixelPtr;
     int x, y, greenOffset, blueOffset, alphaOffset;
@@ -5624,8 +5631,7 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
 	    (!(optPtr->options & OPT_BACKGROUND)
 	    || ((optPtr->background->red == optPtr->background->green)
 	    && (optPtr->background->red == optPtr->background->blue)))) {
-	blockPtr->offset[0] = blockPtr->offset[1] =
-		blockPtr->offset[2];
+	blockPtr->offset[0] = blockPtr->offset[1] = blockPtr->offset[2];
     }
     alphaOffset = 0;
     for (y = 0; y < blockPtr->height; y++) {
@@ -5651,13 +5657,14 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
     greenOffset = blockPtr->offset[1] - blockPtr->offset[0];
     blueOffset = blockPtr->offset[2] - blockPtr->offset[0];
     if (((optPtr->options & OPT_BACKGROUND) && alphaOffset) ||
-	    ((optPtr->options & OPT_GRAYSCALE) && (greenOffset || blueOffset))) {
+	    ((optPtr->options & OPT_GRAYSCALE) && (greenOffset||blueOffset))) {
 	int newPixelSize,x,y;
 	unsigned char *srcPtr, *destPtr;
 	char *data;
 
-	newPixelSize =  (!(optPtr->options & OPT_BACKGROUND) && alphaOffset) ? 2 : 1;
-	if ((greenOffset || blueOffset) && !(optPtr->options & OPT_GRAYSCALE)) {
+	newPixelSize = (!(optPtr->options & OPT_BACKGROUND) && alphaOffset)
+		? 2 : 1;
+	if ((greenOffset||blueOffset) && !(optPtr->options & OPT_GRAYSCALE)) {
 	    newPixelSize += 2;
 	}
 	data = ckalloc((unsigned int) (newPixelSize *
@@ -5671,17 +5678,19 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
 		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
 		    destPtr += newPixelSize;
 		}
-		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch - (blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize);
+		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch -
+			blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize;
 	    }
 	} else if (optPtr->options & OPT_GRAYSCALE) {
 	    for (y = blockPtr->height; y > 0; y--) {
 		for (x = blockPtr->width; x > 0; x--) {
-		    *destPtr = (unsigned char) ((srcPtr[0] * 11 + srcPtr[1] * 16
-			    + srcPtr[2] * 5 + 16) >> 5);
+		    *destPtr = (unsigned char) ((srcPtr[0]*11 + srcPtr[1]*16
+			    + srcPtr[2]*5 + 16) >> 5);
 		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
 		    destPtr += newPixelSize;
 		}
-		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch - (blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize);
+		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch -
+			blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize;
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    for (y = blockPtr->height; y > 0; y--) {
@@ -5692,18 +5701,22 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
 		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
 		    destPtr += newPixelSize;
 		}
-		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch - (blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize);
+		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch -
+			blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize;
 	    }
 	}
 	srcPtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr + alphaOffset;
 	destPtr = (unsigned char *) data;
 	if (!alphaOffset) {
-	    /* nothing to be done */
+	    /*
+	     * Nothing to be done.
+	     */
 	} else if (optPtr->options & OPT_BACKGROUND) {
 	    if (newPixelSize > 2) {
-	        int red = optPtr->background->red>>8;
-	        int green = optPtr->background->green>>8;
-	        int blue = optPtr->background->blue>>8;
+		int red = optPtr->background->red>>8;
+		int green = optPtr->background->green>>8;
+		int blue = optPtr->background->blue>>8;
+
 		for (y = blockPtr->height; y > 0; y--) {
 		    for (x = blockPtr->width; x > 0; x--) {
 			destPtr[0] += (unsigned char) (((255 - *srcPtr) *
@@ -5715,12 +5728,14 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
 			srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
 			destPtr += newPixelSize;
 		    }
-		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch - (blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize);
+		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch -
+			    blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize;
 		}
 	    } else {
 	 	int gray = (unsigned char) (((optPtr->background->red>>8) * 11
-			    + (optPtr->background->green>>8) * 16
-			    + (optPtr->background->blue>>8) * 5 + 16) >> 5);
+			+ (optPtr->background->green>>8) * 16
+			+ (optPtr->background->blue>>8) * 5 + 16) >> 5);
+
 		for (y = blockPtr->height; y > 0; y--) {
 		    for (x = blockPtr->width; x > 0; x--) {
 			destPtr[0] += ((255 - *srcPtr) *
@@ -5728,7 +5743,8 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
 			srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
 			destPtr += newPixelSize;
 		    }
-		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch - (blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize);
+		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch -
+			    blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize;
 		}
 	    }
 	} else {
@@ -5739,7 +5755,8 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
 		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
 		    destPtr += newPixelSize;
 		}
-		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch - (blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize);
+		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch -
+			blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize;
 	    }
 	}
 	blockPtr->pixelPtr = (unsigned char *) data;
@@ -5763,8 +5780,8 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
  *
  * ImgStringWrite --
  *
- *	Default string write function. The data is formatted in
- *	the default format as accepted by the "<img> put" command.
+ *	Default string write function. The data is formatted in the default
+ *	format as accepted by the "<img> put" command.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -5776,12 +5793,12 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-ImgStringWrite(interp, formatString, blockPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tcl_Obj *formatString;
-    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
+ImgStringWrite(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_Obj *formatString,
+    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
 {
-    int row,col;
+    int row, col;
     char *line, *linePtr;
     unsigned char *pixelPtr;
     int greenOffset, blueOffset;
@@ -5816,14 +5833,14 @@ ImgStringWrite(interp, formatString, blockPtr)
  *
  * Tk_PhotoGetImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to obtain image data from a photo
- *	image.  This procedure fills in the Tk_PhotoImageBlock structure
- *	pointed to by `blockPtr' with details of the address and
- *	layout of the image data in memory.
+ *	This function is called to obtain image data from a photo image. This
+ *	function fills in the Tk_PhotoImageBlock structure pointed to by
+ *	`blockPtr' with details of the address and layout of the image data in
+ *	memory.
  *
  * Results:
- *	TRUE (1) indicating that image data is available,
- *	for backwards compatibility with the old photo widget.
+ *	TRUE (1) indicating that image data is available, for backwards
+ *	compatibility with the old photo widget.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5832,16 +5849,15 @@ ImgStringWrite(interp, formatString, blockPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_PhotoGetImage(handle, blockPtr)
-    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Handle for the photo image from which
-				 * image data is desired. */
-    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
-				/* Information about the address and layout
-				 * of the image data is returned here. */
+Tk_PhotoGetImage(
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle,	/* Handle for the photo image from which image
+				 * data is desired. */
+    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)
+				/* Information about the address and layout of
+				 * the image data is returned here. */
 {
-    PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
+    PhotoMaster *masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) handle;
 
-    masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) handle;
     blockPtr->pixelPtr = masterPtr->pix32;
     blockPtr->width = masterPtr->width;
     blockPtr->height = masterPtr->height;
@@ -5853,7 +5869,7 @@ Tk_PhotoGetImage(handle, blockPtr)
     blockPtr->offset[3] = 3;
     return 1;
 }
-
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
@@ -5871,57 +5887,56 @@ Tk_PhotoGetImage(handle, blockPtr)
  */
 
 typedef struct OptionAssocData {
-    struct OptionAssocData *nextPtr;	/* pointer to next OptionAssocData */
-    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *command;		/* command associated with this
-					 * option */
-    char name[1];			/* name of option (remaining chars) */
+    struct OptionAssocData *nextPtr;
+				/* Pointer to next OptionAssocData. */
+    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *command;	/* Command associated with this option. */
+    char name[1];		/* Name of option (remaining chars) */
 } OptionAssocData;
 
 static Tcl_ObjCmdProc *
-PhotoOptionFind(interp, obj)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter that is being deleted. */
-    Tcl_Obj *obj;			/* Name of option to be found. */
+PhotoOptionFind(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter that is being deleted. */
+    Tcl_Obj *obj)		/* Name of option to be found. */
 {
     int length;
     char *name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, &length);
-    OptionAssocData *list;
     char *prevname = NULL;
-    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *proc = (Tcl_ObjCmdProc *) NULL;
+    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *proc = NULL;
+    OptionAssocData *list = (OptionAssocData *) Tcl_GetAssocData(interp,
+	    "photoOption", NULL);
 
-    list = (OptionAssocData *) Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "photoOption",
-	    (Tcl_InterpDeleteProc **) NULL);
-    while (list != (OptionAssocData *) NULL) {
+    while (list != NULL) {
 	if (strncmp(name, list->name, (unsigned) length) == 0) {
-	    if (proc != (Tcl_ObjCmdProc *) NULL) {
+	    if (proc != NULL) {
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "ambiguous option \"", name,
-			"\": must be ", prevname, (char *) NULL);
-		while (list->nextPtr != (OptionAssocData *) NULL) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, prevname, ", ",(char *) NULL);
+			"\": must be ", prevname, NULL);
+		while (list->nextPtr != NULL) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, prevname, ", ",NULL);
 		    list = list->nextPtr;
 		    prevname = list->name;
 		}
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ", or", prevname, (char *) NULL);
-		return (Tcl_ObjCmdProc *) NULL;
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ", or", prevname, NULL);
+		return NULL;
 	    }
 	    proc = list->command;
 	    prevname = list->name;
 	}
 	list = list->nextPtr;
     }
-    if (proc != (Tcl_ObjCmdProc *) NULL) {
+    if (proc != NULL) {
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
     }
     return proc;
 }
-
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * PhotoOptionCleanupProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever an interpreter is deleted
- *	to cleanup the AssocData for "photoVisitor".
+ *	This function is invoked whenever an interpreter is deleted to cleanup
+ *	the AssocData for "photoVisitor".
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -5933,49 +5948,47 @@ PhotoOptionFind(interp, obj)
  */
 
 static void
-PhotoOptionCleanupProc(clientData, interp)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Points to "photoVisitor" AssocData
-				 * for the interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter that is being deleted. */
+PhotoOptionCleanupProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Points to "photoVisitor" AssocData for the
+				 * interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Interpreter that is being deleted. */
 {
     OptionAssocData *list = (OptionAssocData *) clientData;
-    OptionAssocData *ptr;
 
     while (list != NULL) {
+	register OptionAssocData *ptr;
+
 	list = (ptr = list)->nextPtr;
 	ckfree((char *) ptr);
     }
 }
-
+
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_CreatePhotoOption --
  *
- *	This procedure may be invoked to add a new kind of photo
- *	option to the core photo command supported by Tk.
+ *	This function may be invoked to add a new kind of photo option to the
+ *	core photo command supported by Tk.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	From now on, the new option will be useable by the
- *	photo command.
+ *	From now on, the new option will be useable by the photo command.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void
-Tk_CreatePhotoOption(interp, name, proc)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* interpreter */
-    CONST char *name;			/* option name */
-    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *proc;		/* proc to execute command */
+MODULE_SCOPE void
+Tk_CreatePhotoOption(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter. */
+    CONST char *name,		/* Option name. */
+    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *proc)	/* Function to execute command. */
 {
     OptionAssocData *typePtr2, *prevPtr, *ptr;
-    OptionAssocData *list;
-
-    list = (OptionAssocData *) Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "photoOption",
-	    (Tcl_InterpDeleteProc **) NULL);
+    OptionAssocData *list = (OptionAssocData *)
+	    Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "photoOption", NULL);
 
     /*
      * If there's already a photo option with the given name, remove it.
@@ -5998,7 +6011,7 @@ Tk_CreatePhotoOption(interp, name, proc)
     ptr->command = proc;
     ptr->nextPtr = list;
     Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, "photoOption", PhotoOptionCleanupProc,
-		(ClientData) ptr);
+	    (ClientData) ptr);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -6006,9 +6019,8 @@ Tk_CreatePhotoOption(interp, name, proc)
  *
  * TkPostscriptPhoto --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to output the contents of a
- *	photo image in Postscript by calling the Tk_PostscriptPhoto
- *	function.
+ *	This function is called to output the contents of a photo image in
+ *	Postscript by calling the Tk_PostscriptPhoto function.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns a standard Tcl return value.
@@ -6018,16 +6030,16 @@ Tk_CreatePhotoOption(interp, name, proc)
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static int
-ImgPhotoPostscript(clientData, interp, tkwin, psInfo,
-        x, y, width, height, prepass)
-     ClientData clientData;	/* Handle for the photo image */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* (unused) */
-    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo;	/* postscript info */
-    int x, y;			/* First pixel to output */
-    int width, height;		/* Width and height of area */
-    int prepass;		/* (unused) */
+ImgPhotoPostscript(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Handle for the photo image. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* (unused) */
+    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo,	/* Postscript info. */
+    int x, int y,		/* First pixel to output. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Width and height of area. */
+    int prepass)		/* (unused) */
 {
     Tk_PhotoImageBlock block;
 
@@ -6042,29 +6054,105 @@ ImgPhotoPostscript(clientData, interp, tkwin, psInfo,
  *
  * Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite, Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite --
  *
- * These backward-compatability functions just exist to fill slots in
- * stubs table.  For the behaviour of *_NoComposite, refer to the
- * corresponding function without the extra suffix.
+ * These backward-compatability functions just exist to fill slots in stubs
+ * table. For the behaviour of *_NoComposite, refer to the corresponding
+ * function without the extra suffix, except that the compositing rule is
+ * always "overlay" and the function always panics on memory-allocation
+ * failure.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 void
-Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height)
-     Tk_PhotoHandle handle;
-     Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
-     int x, y, width, height;
+Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite(
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
+    int x, int y, int width, int height)
 {
-    Tk_PhotoPutBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
-	    TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY);
+    if (Tk_PhotoPutBlock(NULL, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
+	    TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY) != TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE);
+    }
 }
 
 void
-Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
-				   zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY)
-     Tk_PhotoHandle handle;
-     Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
-     int x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY;
+Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite(
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
+    int x, int y, int width, int height,
+    int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY)
 {
-    Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
-	    zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY, TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY);
+    if (Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(NULL, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
+	    zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY,
+	    TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY) != TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE);
+    }
 }
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic, Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic,
+ * Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic, Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic
+ *
+ * Backward compatability functions for preserving the old behaviour (i.e.
+ * panic on memory allocation failure) so that extensions do not need to be
+ * significantly updated to take account of TIP #116. These call the new
+ * interface (i.e. the interface without the extra suffix), but panic if an
+ * error condition is returned.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic(
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+    int width, int height)
+{
+    if (Tk_PhotoExpand(NULL, handle, width, height) != TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE);
+    }
+}
+
+void
+Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic(
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
+    int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule)
+{
+    if (Tk_PhotoPutBlock(NULL, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
+	    compRule) != TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE);
+    }
+}
+
+void
+Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic(
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
+    int x, int y, int width, int height,
+    int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY,
+    int compRule)
+{
+    if (Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(NULL, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
+	    zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY, compRule) != TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE);
+    }
+}
+
+void
+Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic(
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle,
+    int width, int height)
+{
+    if (Tk_PhotoSetSize(NULL, handle, width, height) != TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkImgUtil.c b/generic/tkImgUtil.c
index 0bb599a..8ba6c0e 100644
--- a/generic/tkImgUtil.c
+++ b/generic/tkImgUtil.c
@@ -1,16 +1,15 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkImgUtil.c --
  *
  *	This file contains image related utility functions.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "xbytes.h"
 
 
@@ -19,12 +18,11 @@
  *
  * TkAlignImageData --
  *
- *	This function takes an image and copies the data into an
- *	aligned buffer, performing any necessary bit swapping.
+ *	This function takes an image and copies the data into an aligned
+ *	buffer, performing any necessary bit swapping.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a newly allocated buffer that should be freed by the
- *	caller.
+ *	Returns a newly allocated buffer that should be freed by the caller.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -33,18 +31,19 @@
  */
 
 char *
-TkAlignImageData(image, alignment, bitOrder)
-    XImage *image;		/* Image to be aligned. */
-    int alignment;		/* Number of bytes to which the data should
-				 * be aligned (e.g. 2 or 4) */
-    int bitOrder;		/* Desired bit order: LSBFirst or MSBFirst. */
+TkAlignImageData(
+    XImage *image,		/* Image to be aligned. */
+    int alignment,		/* Number of bytes to which the data should be
+				 * aligned (e.g. 2 or 4) */
+    int bitOrder)		/* Desired bit order: LSBFirst or MSBFirst. */
 {
     long dataWidth;
     char *data, *srcPtr, *destPtr;
     int i, j;
 
     if (image->bits_per_pixel != 1) {
-	panic("TkAlignImageData: Can't handle image depths greater than 1.");
+	Tcl_Panic(
+		"TkAlignImageData: Can't handle image depths greater than 1.");
     }
 
     /*
@@ -56,7 +55,7 @@ TkAlignImageData(image, alignment, bitOrder)
 	dataWidth += (alignment - (dataWidth % alignment));
     }
 
-    data = ckalloc(dataWidth * image->height);
+    data = ckalloc((unsigned) dataWidth * image->height);
 
     destPtr = data;
     for (i = 0; i < image->height; i++) {
@@ -74,3 +73,11 @@ TkAlignImageData(image, alignment, bitOrder)
     }
     return data;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkInitScript.h b/generic/tkInitScript.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 4997fe7..0000000
--- a/generic/tkInitScript.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
-/* 
- * tkInitScript.h --
- *
- *	This file contains Unix & Windows common init script
- *      It is not used on the Mac. (the mac init script is in tkMacInit.c)
- *
- * Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
- *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
- */
-
-
-
-/*
- * In order to find tk.tcl during initialization, the following script
- * is invoked by Tk_Init().  It looks in several different directories:
- *
- *	$tk_library		- can specify a primary location, if set
- *				  no other locations will be checked
- *
- *	$env(TK_LIBRARY)	- highest priority so user can always override
- *				  the search path unless the application has
- *				  specified an exact directory above
- *
- *	$tcl_library/../tk$tk_version
- *				- look relative to init.tcl in an installed
- *				  lib directory (e.g. /usr/local)
- *
- *	<executable directory>/../lib/tk$tk_version
- *				- look for a lib/tk<ver> in a sibling of
- *				  the bin directory (e.g. /usr/local)
- *
- *	<executable directory>/../library
- *				- look in Tk build directory
- *
- *	<executable directory>/../../tk$tk_patchLevel/library
- *				- look for Tk build directory relative
- *				  to a parallel build directory
- *
- * The first directory on this path that contains a valid tk.tcl script
- * will be set ast the value of tk_library.
- *
- * Note that this entire search mechanism can be bypassed by defining an
- * alternate tkInit procedure before calling Tk_Init().
- */
-
-static char initScript[] = "if {[info proc tkInit]==\"\"} {\n\
-  proc tkInit {} {\n\
-    global tk_library tk_version tk_patchLevel\n\
-      rename tkInit {}\n\
-    tcl_findLibrary tk $tk_version $tk_patchLevel tk.tcl TK_LIBRARY tk_library\n\
-  }\n\
-}\n\
-tkInit";
-
diff --git a/generic/tkInt.decls b/generic/tkInt.decls
index a37f986..6794edb 100644
--- a/generic/tkInt.decls
+++ b/generic/tkInt.decls
@@ -5,6 +5,8 @@
 #	tkIntDecls.h, tkIntPlatDecls.h, tkIntStub.c, and tkPlatStub.c files.
 #
 # Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
+# Copyright (c) 2007 Daniel A. Steffen <das@users.sourceforge.net>
+#
 # See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 # of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 
@@ -485,11 +487,88 @@ declare 149 {
     const Tk_OptionSpec *TkGetOptionSpec(const char *name,
 	    Tk_OptionTable optionTable)
 }
+
+# TIP#168
+declare 150 {
+    int TkMakeRawCurve(Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr, int numPoints,
+	    int numSteps, XPoint xPoints[], double dblPoints[])
+}
+declare 151 {
+    void TkMakeRawCurvePostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+	    Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr, int numPoints)
+}
 declare 152 {
     void TkpDrawFrame(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border,
 	    int highlightWidth, int borderWidth, int relief)
 }
+declare 153 {
+    void TkCreateThreadExitHandler(Tcl_ExitProc *proc, ClientData clientData)
+}
+declare 154 {
+    void TkDeleteThreadExitHandler(Tcl_ExitProc *proc, ClientData clientData)
+}
 
+# entries needed only by tktest:
+declare 156 {
+    int TkpTestembedCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc,
+	    const char **argv)
+}
+declare 157 {
+    int TkpTesttextCmd(ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc,
+	    const char **argv)
+}
+
+# Next group of functions exposed due to [Bug 2768945]. Numbers are chosen so
+# as to match 8.6 branch/HEAD.
+declare 169 {
+    int TkStateParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+	    Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)
+}
+declare 170 {
+    char *TkStatePrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+	    char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)
+}
+declare 171 {
+    int TkCanvasDashParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+	    Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)
+}
+declare 172 {
+    char *TkCanvasDashPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+	    char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)
+}
+declare 173 {
+    int TkOffsetParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+	    Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)
+}
+declare 174 {
+    char *TkOffsetPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+	    char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)
+}
+declare 175 {
+    int TkPixelParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+	    Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)
+}
+declare 176 {
+    char *TkPixelPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+	    char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)
+}
+declare 177 {
+    int TkOrientParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+	    Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)
+}
+declare 178 {
+    char *TkOrientPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+	    char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)
+}
+declare 179 {
+    int TkSmoothParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+	    Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)
+}
+declare 180 {
+    char *TkSmoothPrintProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+	    char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)
+}
+
 ##############################################################################
 
 # Define the platform specific internal Tcl interface. These functions are
@@ -539,6 +618,11 @@ declare 11 x11 {
 declare 12 x11 {
     int TkpWmSetState(TkWindow *winPtr, int state)
 }
+# only needed by tktest:
+declare 13 x11 {
+    int TkpTestsendCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc,
+	    const char **argv)
+}
 
 ################################
 # Windows specific functions
@@ -691,6 +775,12 @@ declare 43 win {
 declare 44 win {
     void TkSendCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr)
 }
+# only needed by tktest:
+declare 45 win {
+    int TkpTestsendCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc,
+	    const char **argv)
+}
+
 ################################
 # Aqua specific functions
 
@@ -744,22 +834,22 @@ declare 12 aqua {
 #}
 
 declare 14 aqua {
-    int TkMacOSXDoHLEvent(EventRecord *theEvent)
+    int TkMacOSXDoHLEvent(void *theEvent)
 }
 
 # removed duplicate from tkPlat table(tk.decls)
 #declare 15 aqua {
-#    GWorldPtr TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort(Drawable drawable)
+#    void *TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort(Drawable drawable)
 #}
 
 declare 16 aqua {
-    Window TkMacOSXGetXWindow(WindowRef macWinPtr)
+    Window TkMacOSXGetXWindow(void *macWinPtr)
 }
 declare 17 aqua {
-    int TkMacOSXGrowToplevel(WindowRef whichWindow, Point start)
+    int TkMacOSXGrowToplevel(void *whichWindow, XPoint start)
 }
 declare 18 aqua {
-    void TkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect(MenuID theMenu, MenuItemIndex theItem,
+    void TkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect(short theMenu, unsigned short theItem,
 	    int optionKeyPressed)
 }
 
@@ -782,13 +872,13 @@ declare 23 aqua {
     void TkMacOSXMakeRealWindowExist(TkWindow *winPtr)
 }
 declare 24 aqua {
-    BitMapPtr TkMacOSXMakeStippleMap(Drawable d1, Drawable d2)
+    void *TkMacOSXMakeStippleMap(Drawable d1, Drawable d2)
 }
 declare 25 aqua {
     void TkMacOSXMenuClick(void)
 }
 declare 26 aqua {
-    void TkMacOSXRegisterOffScreenWindow(Window window, GWorldPtr portPtr)
+    void TkMacOSXRegisterOffScreenWindow(Window window, void *portPtr)
 }
 declare 27 aqua {
     int TkMacOSXResizable(TkWindow *winPtr)
@@ -803,28 +893,28 @@ declare 30 aqua {
     void TkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn(Drawable drawable)
 }
 declare 31 aqua {
-    void TkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort(GC gc, GWorldPtr destPort)
+    void TkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort(GC gc, void *destPort)
 }
 declare 32 aqua {
     void TkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn(TkWindow *winPtr)
 }
 declare 33 aqua {
-    void TkMacOSXUnregisterMacWindow(WindowRef portPtr)
+    void TkMacOSXUnregisterMacWindow(void *portPtr)
 }
 declare 34 aqua {
     int TkMacOSXUseMenuID(short macID)
 }
 declare 35 aqua {
-    RgnHandle TkMacOSXVisableClipRgn(TkWindow *winPtr)
+    TkRegion TkMacOSXVisableClipRgn(TkWindow *winPtr)
 }
 declare 36 aqua {
-    void TkMacOSXWinBounds(TkWindow *winPtr, Rect *geometry)
+    void TkMacOSXWinBounds(TkWindow *winPtr, void *geometry)
 }
 declare 37 aqua {
-    void TkMacOSXWindowOffset(WindowRef wRef, int *xOffset, int *yOffset)
+    void TkMacOSXWindowOffset(void *wRef, int *xOffset, int *yOffset)
 }
 declare 38 aqua {
-    int TkSetMacColor(unsigned long pixel, RGBColor *macColor)
+    int TkSetMacColor(unsigned long pixel, void *macColor)
 }
 declare 39 aqua {
     void TkSetWMName(TkWindow *winPtr, Tk_Uid titleUid)
@@ -833,7 +923,7 @@ declare 40 aqua {
     void TkSuspendClipboard(void)
 }
 declare 41 aqua {
-    int TkMacOSXZoomToplevel(WindowPtr whichWindow, short zoomPart)
+    int TkMacOSXZoomToplevel(void *whichWindow, short zoomPart)
 }
 declare 42 aqua {
     Tk_Window Tk_TopCoordsToWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int rootX, int rootY,
@@ -849,7 +939,7 @@ declare 45 aqua {
     void TkMacOSXPreprocessMenu(void)
 }
 declare 46 aqua {
-    int TkpIsWindowFloating(WindowRef window)
+    int TkpIsWindowFloating(void *window)
 }
 declare 47 aqua {
     Tk_Window TkMacOSXGetCapture(void)
@@ -873,6 +963,11 @@ declare 51 aqua {
 declare 53 aqua {
     unsigned long TkpGetMS(void)
 }
+
+# For Canvas3d, requested by Sean Woods
+declare 54 aqua {
+    void *TkMacOSXDrawable(Drawable drawable)
+}
 
 ##############################################################################
 
diff --git a/generic/tkInt.h b/generic/tkInt.h
index c2211aa..9a36e1e 100644
--- a/generic/tkInt.h
+++ b/generic/tkInt.h
@@ -1,15 +1,15 @@
 /*
  * tkInt.h --
  *
- *	Declarations for things used internally by the Tk
- *	procedures but not exported outside the module.
+ *	Declarations for things used internally by the Tk functions but not
+ *	exported outside the module.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKINT
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 #    ifdef BIG_ENDIAN
 #	 if BYTE_ORDER == BIG_ENDIAN
 #	     undef WORDS_BIGENDIAN
-#	     define WORDS_BIGENDIAN
+#	     define WORDS_BIGENDIAN 1
 #	 endif
 #    endif
 #    ifdef LITTLE_ENDIAN
@@ -65,10 +65,36 @@
 #endif
 
 /*
+ * Macros used to cast between pointers and integers (e.g. when storing an int
+ * in ClientData), on 64-bit architectures they avoid gcc warning about "cast
+ * to/from pointer from/to integer of different size".
+ */
+
+#if !defined(INT2PTR) && !defined(PTR2INT)
+#   if defined(HAVE_INTPTR_T) || defined(intptr_t)
+#	define INT2PTR(p) ((void*)(intptr_t)(p))
+#	define PTR2INT(p) ((int)(intptr_t)(p))
+#   else
+#	define INT2PTR(p) ((void*)(p))
+#	define PTR2INT(p) ((int)(p))
+#   endif
+#endif
+#if !defined(UINT2PTR) && !defined(PTR2UINT)
+#   if defined(HAVE_UINTPTR_T) || defined(uintptr_t)
+#	define UINT2PTR(p) ((void*)(uintptr_t)(p))
+#	define PTR2UINT(p) ((unsigned int)(uintptr_t)(p))
+#   else
+#	define UINT2PTR(p) ((void*)(p))
+#	define PTR2UINT(p) ((unsigned int)(p))
+#   endif
+#endif
+
+/*
  * Opaque type declarations:
  */
 
 typedef struct TkColormap TkColormap;
+typedef struct TkFontAttributes TkFontAttributes;
 typedef struct TkGrabEvent TkGrabEvent;
 typedef struct TkpCursor_ *TkpCursor;
 typedef struct TkRegion_ *TkRegion;
@@ -76,18 +102,17 @@ typedef struct TkStressedCmap TkStressedCmap;
 typedef struct TkBindInfo_ *TkBindInfo;
 
 /*
- * Procedure types.
+ * Function types.
  */
 
-typedef int (TkBindEvalProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-	Tcl_Interp *interp, XEvent *eventPtr, Tk_Window tkwin,
-	KeySym keySym));
-typedef void (TkBindFreeProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+typedef int (TkBindEvalProc)(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+	XEvent *eventPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym);
+typedef void (TkBindFreeProc)(ClientData clientData);
 
 /*
- * One of the following structures is maintained for each cursor in
- * use in the system.  This structure is used by tkCursor.c and the
- * various system specific cursor files.
+ * One of the following structures is maintained for each cursor in use in the
+ * system. This structure is used by tkCursor.c and the various system
+ * specific cursor files.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkCursor {
@@ -96,65 +121,53 @@ typedef struct TkCursor {
 				 * disposal and retrieval of cursors. */
     int resourceRefCount;	/* Number of active uses of this cursor (each
 				 * active use corresponds to a call to
-				 * Tk_AllocPreserveFromObj or Tk_Preserve).
-				 * If this count is 0, then this structure
-				 * is no longer valid and it isn't present
-				 * in a hash table: it is being kept around
-				 * only because there are objects referring
-				 * to it.  The structure is freed when
-				 * resourceRefCount and objRefCount are
-				 * both 0. */
-    int objRefCount;		/* Number of Tcl objects that reference
-				 * this structure.. */
-    Tcl_HashTable *otherTable;	/* Second table (other than idTable) used
-				 * to index this entry. */
+				 * Tk_AllocPreserveFromObj or Tk_Preserve). If
+				 * this count is 0, then this structure is no
+				 * longer valid and it isn't present in a hash
+				 * table: it is being kept around only because
+				 * there are objects referring to it. The
+				 * structure is freed when resourceRefCount
+				 * and objRefCount are both 0. */
+    int objRefCount;		/* Number of Tcl objects that reference this
+				 * structure.. */
+    Tcl_HashTable *otherTable;	/* Second table (other than idTable) used to
+				 * index this entry. */
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;	/* Entry in otherTable for this structure
 				 * (needed when deleting). */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr;	/* Entry in idTable for this structure
-				 * (needed when deleting). */
+    Tcl_HashEntry *idHashPtr;	/* Entry in idTable for this structure (needed
+				 * when deleting). */
     struct TkCursor *nextPtr;	/* Points to the next TkCursor structure with
-				 * the same name.  Cursors with the same
-				 * name but different displays are chained
-				 * together off a single hash table entry. */
+				 * the same name. Cursors with the same name
+				 * but different displays are chained together
+				 * off a single hash table entry. */
 } TkCursor;
 
 /*
- * This defines whether we should try to use XIM over-the-spot style
- * input.  Allow users to override it.  It is a much more elegant use
- * of XIM, but uses a bit more memory.
- */
-
-#ifndef TK_XIM_SPOT
-#   define TK_XIM_SPOT	1
-#endif
-
-/*
  * The following structure is kept one-per-TkDisplay to maintain information
- * about the caret (cursor location) on this display.  This is used to
- * dictate global focus location (Windows Accessibility guidelines) and to
- * position the IME or XIM over-the-spot window.
+ * about the caret (cursor location) on this display. This is used to dictate
+ * global focus location (Windows Accessibility guidelines) and to position
+ * the IME or XIM over-the-spot window.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkCaret {
-    struct TkWindow *winPtr;	/* the window on which we requested caret
-				 * placement */
-    int x;			/* relative x coord of the caret */
-    int y;			/* relative y coord of the caret */
-    int height;			/* specified height of the window */
+    struct TkWindow *winPtr;	/* The window on which we requested caret
+				 * placement. */
+    int x;			/* Relative x coord of the caret. */
+    int y;			/* Relative y coord of the caret. */
+    int height;			/* Specified height of the window. */
 } TkCaret;
 
 /*
- * One of the following structures is maintained for each display
- * containing a window managed by Tk.  In part, the structure is 
- * used to store thread-specific data, since each thread will have 
- * its own TkDisplay structure.
+ * One of the following structures is maintained for each display containing a
+ * window managed by Tk. In part, the structure is used to store thread-
+ * specific data, since each thread will have its own TkDisplay structure.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkDisplay {
     Display *display;		/* Xlib's info about display. */
     struct TkDisplay *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of all displays. */
-    char *name;			/* Name of display (with any screen
-				 * identifier removed).  Malloc-ed. */
+    char *name;			/* Name of display (with any screen identifier
+				 * removed). Malloc-ed. */
     Time lastEventTime;		/* Time of last event received for this
 				 * display. */
 
@@ -162,16 +175,16 @@ typedef struct TkDisplay {
      * Information used primarily by tk3d.c:
      */
 
-    int borderInit;             /* 0 means borderTable needs initializing. */
-    Tcl_HashTable borderTable;  /* Maps from color name to TkBorder 
+    int borderInit;		/* 0 means borderTable needs initializing. */
+    Tcl_HashTable borderTable;	/* Maps from color name to TkBorder
 				 * structure. */
 
     /*
      * Information used by tkAtom.c only:
      */
 
-    int atomInit;		/* 0 means stuff below hasn't been
-				 * initialized yet. */
+    int atomInit;		/* 0 means stuff below hasn't been initialized
+				 * yet. */
     Tcl_HashTable nameTable;	/* Maps from names to Atom's. */
     Tcl_HashTable atomTable;	/* Maps from Atom's back to names. */
 
@@ -179,139 +192,137 @@ typedef struct TkDisplay {
      * Information used primarily by tkBind.c:
      */
 
-    int bindInfoStale;		/* Non-zero means the variables in this
-				 * part of the structure are potentially
-				 * incorrect and should be recomputed. */
+    int bindInfoStale;		/* Non-zero means the variables in this part
+				 * of the structure are potentially incorrect
+				 * and should be recomputed. */
     unsigned int modeModMask;	/* Has one bit set to indicate the modifier
-				 * corresponding to "mode shift".  If no
-				 * such modifier, than this is zero. */
+				 * corresponding to "mode shift". If no such
+				 * modifier, than this is zero. */
     unsigned int metaModMask;	/* Has one bit set to indicate the modifier
-				 * corresponding to the "Meta" key.  If no
-				 * such modifier, then this is zero. */
+				 * corresponding to the "Meta" key. If no such
+				 * modifier, then this is zero. */
     unsigned int altModMask;	/* Has one bit set to indicate the modifier
-				 * corresponding to the "Meta" key.  If no
-				 * such modifier, then this is zero. */
+				 * corresponding to the "Meta" key. If no such
+				 * modifier, then this is zero. */
     enum {LU_IGNORE, LU_CAPS, LU_SHIFT} lockUsage;
-				/* Indicates how to interpret lock modifier. */
+				/* Indicates how to interpret lock
+				 * modifier. */
     int numModKeyCodes;		/* Number of entries in modKeyCodes array
 				 * below. */
-    KeyCode *modKeyCodes;	/* Pointer to an array giving keycodes for
-				 * all of the keys that have modifiers
-				 * associated with them.  Malloc'ed, but
-				 * may be NULL. */
+    KeyCode *modKeyCodes;	/* Pointer to an array giving keycodes for all
+				 * of the keys that have modifiers associated
+				 * with them. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
 
     /*
      * Information used by tkBitmap.c only:
      */
-  
-    int bitmapInit;             /* 0 means tables above need initializing. */
-    int bitmapAutoNumber;       /* Used to number bitmaps. */
-    Tcl_HashTable bitmapNameTable;    
-                                /* Maps from name of bitmap to the first 
+
+    int bitmapInit;		/* 0 means tables above need initializing. */
+    int bitmapAutoNumber;	/* Used to number bitmaps. */
+    Tcl_HashTable bitmapNameTable;
+				/* Maps from name of bitmap to the first
 				 * TkBitmap record for that name. */
     Tcl_HashTable bitmapIdTable;/* Maps from bitmap id to the TkBitmap
 				 * structure for the bitmap. */
-    Tcl_HashTable bitmapDataTable;    
-                                /* Used by Tk_GetBitmapFromData to map from
-				 * a collection of in-core data about a 
-				 * bitmap to a reference giving an auto-
-				 * matically-generated name for the bitmap. */
+    Tcl_HashTable bitmapDataTable;
+				/* Used by Tk_GetBitmapFromData to map from a
+				 * collection of in-core data about a bitmap
+				 * to a reference giving an automatically-
+				 * generated name for the bitmap. */
 
     /*
      * Information used by tkCanvas.c only:
      */
 
-    int numIdSearches;          
+    int numIdSearches;
     int numSlowSearches;
 
     /*
      * Used by tkColor.c only:
      */
 
-    int colorInit;              /* 0 means color module needs initializing. */
-    TkStressedCmap *stressPtr;	/* First in list of colormaps that have
-				 * filled up, so we have to pick an
-				 * approximate color. */
+    int colorInit;		/* 0 means color module needs initializing. */
+    TkStressedCmap *stressPtr;	/* First in list of colormaps that have filled
+				 * up, so we have to pick an approximate
+				 * color. */
     Tcl_HashTable colorNameTable;
-                                /* Maps from color name to TkColor structure
+				/* Maps from color name to TkColor structure
 				 * for that color. */
     Tcl_HashTable colorValueTable;
-                                /* Maps from integer RGB values to TkColor
+				/* Maps from integer RGB values to TkColor
 				 * structures. */
 
     /*
      * Used by tkCursor.c only:
      */
 
-    int cursorInit;             /* 0 means cursor module need initializing. */
+    int cursorInit;		/* 0 means cursor module need initializing. */
     Tcl_HashTable cursorNameTable;
-                                /* Maps from a string name to a cursor to the
+				/* Maps from a string name to a cursor to the
 				 * TkCursor record for the cursor. */
     Tcl_HashTable cursorDataTable;
-                                /* Maps from a collection of in-core data
+				/* Maps from a collection of in-core data
 				 * about a cursor to a TkCursor structure. */
     Tcl_HashTable cursorIdTable;
-                                /* Maps from a cursor id to the TkCursor
+				/* Maps from a cursor id to the TkCursor
 				 * structure for the cursor. */
-    char cursorString[20];      /* Used to store a cursor id string. */
-    Font cursorFont;		/* Font to use for standard cursors.
-				 * None means font not loaded yet. */
+    char cursorString[20];	/* Used to store a cursor id string. */
+    Font cursorFont;		/* Font to use for standard cursors. None
+				 * means font not loaded yet. */
 
     /*
      * Information used by tkError.c only:
      */
 
     struct TkErrorHandler *errorPtr;
-				/* First in list of error handlers
-				 * for this display.  NULL means
-				 * no handlers exist at present. */
-    int deleteCount;		/* Counts # of handlers deleted since
-				 * last time inactive handlers were
-				 * garbage-collected.  When this number
-				 * gets big, handlers get cleaned up. */
+				/* First in list of error handlers for this
+				 * display. NULL means no handlers exist at
+				 * present. */
+    int deleteCount;		/* Counts # of handlers deleted since last
+				 * time inactive handlers were garbage-
+				 * collected. When this number gets big,
+				 * handlers get cleaned up. */
 
     /*
      * Used by tkEvent.c only:
      */
 
     struct TkWindowEvent *delayedMotionPtr;
-				/* Points to a malloc-ed motion event
-				 * whose processing has been delayed in
-				 * the hopes that another motion event
-				 * will come along right away and we can
-				 * merge the two of them together.  NULL
-				 * means that there is no delayed motion
-				 * event. */
+				/* Points to a malloc-ed motion event whose
+				 * processing has been delayed in the hopes
+				 * that another motion event will come along
+				 * right away and we can merge the two of them
+				 * together. NULL means that there is no
+				 * delayed motion event. */
 
     /*
      * Information used by tkFocus.c only:
      */
 
-    int focusDebug;             /* 1 means collect focus debugging 
+    int focusDebug;		/* 1 means collect focus debugging
 				 * statistics. */
     struct TkWindow *implicitWinPtr;
 				/* If the focus arrived at a toplevel window
-				 * implicitly via an Enter event (rather
-				 * than via a FocusIn event), this points
-				 * to the toplevel window.  Otherwise it is
-				 * NULL. */
+				 * implicitly via an Enter event (rather than
+				 * via a FocusIn event), this points to the
+				 * toplevel window. Otherwise it is NULL. */
     struct TkWindow *focusPtr;	/* Points to the window on this display that
-				 * should be receiving keyboard events.  When
+				 * should be receiving keyboard events. When
 				 * multiple applications on the display have
-				 * the focus, this will refer to the
-				 * innermost window in the innermost
-				 * application.  This information isn't used
-				 * under Unix or Windows, but it's needed on
-				 * the Macintosh. */
+				 * the focus, this will refer to the innermost
+				 * window in the innermost application. This
+				 * information isn't used on Windows, but it's
+				 * needed on the Mac, and also on X11 when XIM
+				 * processing is being done. */
 
     /*
      * Information used by tkGC.c only:
      */
-    
+
     Tcl_HashTable gcValueTable; /* Maps from a GC's values to a TkGC structure
 				 * describing a GC with those values. */
-    Tcl_HashTable gcIdTable;    /* Maps from a GC to a TkGC. */ 
-    int gcInit;                 /* 0 means the tables below need 
+    Tcl_HashTable gcIdTable;    /* Maps from a GC to a TkGC. */
+    int gcInit;			/* 0 means the tables below need
 				 * initializing. */
 
     /*
@@ -319,24 +330,23 @@ typedef struct TkDisplay {
      */
 
     Tcl_HashTable maintainHashTable;
-                                /* Hash table that maps from a master's 
-				 * Tk_Window token to a list of slaves
-				 * managed by that master. */
-    int geomInit;    
+				/* Hash table that maps from a master's
+				 * Tk_Window token to a list of slaves managed
+				 * by that master. */
+    int geomInit;
 
     /*
      * Information used by tkGet.c only:
      */
-  
-    Tcl_HashTable uidTable;     /* Stores all Tk_Uid  used in a thread. */
-    int uidInit;                /* 0 means uidTable needs initializing. */
+
+    Tcl_HashTable uidTable;	/* Stores all Tk_Uid used in a thread. */
+    int uidInit;		/* 0 means uidTable needs initializing. */
 
     /*
      * Information used by tkGrab.c only:
      */
 
-    struct TkWindow *grabWinPtr;
-				/* Window in which the pointer is currently
+    struct TkWindow *grabWinPtr;/* Window in which the pointer is currently
 				 * grabbed, or NULL if none. */
     struct TkWindow *eventualGrabWinPtr;
 				/* Value that grabWinPtr will have once the
@@ -348,68 +358,65 @@ typedef struct TkDisplay {
 				 * if no such press in effect. */
     struct TkWindow *serverWinPtr;
 				/* If no application contains the pointer then
-				 * this is NULL.  Otherwise it contains the
-				 * last window for which we've gotten an
-				 * Enter or Leave event from the server (i.e.
-				 * the last window known to have contained
-				 * the pointer).  Doesn't reflect events
-				 * that were synthesized in tkGrab.c. */
+				 * this is NULL. Otherwise it contains the
+				 * last window for which we've gotten an Enter
+				 * or Leave event from the server (i.e. the
+				 * last window known to have contained the
+				 * pointer). Doesn't reflect events that were
+				 * synthesized in tkGrab.c. */
     TkGrabEvent *firstGrabEventPtr;
 				/* First in list of enter/leave events
-				 * synthesized by grab code.  These events
-				 * must be processed in order before any other
-				 * events are processed.  NULL means no such
+				 * synthesized by grab code. These events must
+				 * be processed in order before any other
+				 * events are processed. NULL means no such
 				 * events. */
     TkGrabEvent *lastGrabEventPtr;
 				/* Last in list of synthesized events, or NULL
 				 * if list is empty. */
-    int grabFlags;		/* Miscellaneous flag values.  See definitions
+    int grabFlags;		/* Miscellaneous flag values. See definitions
 				 * in tkGrab.c. */
 
     /*
      * Information used by tkGrid.c only:
      */
 
-    int gridInit;               /* 0 means table below needs initializing. */
-    Tcl_HashTable gridHashTable;/* Maps from Tk_Window tokens to 
-				 * corresponding Grid structures. */
+    int gridInit;		/* 0 means table below needs initializing. */
+    Tcl_HashTable gridHashTable;/* Maps from Tk_Window tokens to corresponding
+				 * Grid structures. */
 
     /*
      * Information used by tkImage.c only:
      */
 
-    int imageId;                /* Value used to number image ids. */
+    int imageId;		/* Value used to number image ids. */
 
     /*
      * Information used by tkMacWinMenu.c only:
      */
 
-    int postCommandGeneration;  
+    int postCommandGeneration;
 
     /*
      * Information used by tkOption.c only.
      */
 
-
-
     /*
      * Information used by tkPack.c only.
      */
 
-    int packInit;              /* 0 means table below needs initializing. */
+    int packInit;		/* 0 means table below needs initializing. */
     Tcl_HashTable packerHashTable;
-                               /* Maps from Tk_Window tokens to 
-				* corresponding Packer structures. */
-    
+				/* Maps from Tk_Window tokens to corresponding
+				 * Packer structures. */
 
     /*
      * Information used by tkPlace.c only.
      */
 
-    int placeInit;              /* 0 means tables below need initializing. */
-    Tcl_HashTable masterTable;  /* Maps from Tk_Window toke to the Master
+    int placeInit;		/* 0 means tables below need initializing. */
+    Tcl_HashTable masterTable;	/* Maps from Tk_Window toke to the Master
 				 * structure for the window, if it exists. */
-    Tcl_HashTable slaveTable;   /* Maps from Tk_Window toke to the Slave
+    Tcl_HashTable slaveTable;	/* Maps from Tk_Window toke to the Slave
 				 * structure for the window, if it exists. */
 
     /*
@@ -418,11 +425,11 @@ typedef struct TkDisplay {
 
     struct TkSelectionInfo *selectionInfoPtr;
 				/* First in list of selection information
-				 * records.  Each entry contains information
+				 * records. Each entry contains information
 				 * about the current owner of a particular
 				 * selection on this display. */
-    Atom multipleAtom;		/* Atom for MULTIPLE.  None means
-				 * selection stuff isn't initialized. */
+    Atom multipleAtom;		/* Atom for MULTIPLE. None means selection
+				 * stuff isn't initialized. */
     Atom incrAtom;		/* Atom for INCR. */
     Atom targetsAtom;		/* Atom for TARGETS. */
     Atom timestampAtom;		/* Atom for TIMESTAMP. */
@@ -443,7 +450,7 @@ typedef struct TkDisplay {
 				/* Last application that owned clipboard. */
     struct TkClipboardTarget *clipTargetPtr;
 				/* First in list of clipboard type information
-				 * records.  Each entry contains information
+				 * records. Each entry contains information
 				 * about the buffers for a given selection
 				 * target. */
 
@@ -451,13 +458,13 @@ typedef struct TkDisplay {
      * Information used by tkSend.c only:
      */
 
-    Tk_Window commTkwin;	/* Window used for communication
-				 * between interpreters during "send"
-				 * commands.  NULL means send info hasn't
-				 * been initialized yet. */
+    Tk_Window commTkwin;	/* Window used for communication between
+				 * interpreters during "send" commands. NULL
+				 * means send info hasn't been initialized
+				 * yet. */
     Atom commProperty;		/* X's name for comm property. */
-    Atom registryProperty;	/* X's name for property containing
-				 * registry of interpreter names. */
+    Atom registryProperty;	/* X's name for property containing registry
+				 * of interpreter names. */
     Atom appNameProperty;	/* X's name for property used to hold the
 				 * application name on each comm window. */
 
@@ -469,12 +476,11 @@ typedef struct TkDisplay {
 				/* First in list of chunks of free resource
 				 * identifiers, or NULL if there are no free
 				 * resources. */
-    XID (*defaultAllocProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display));
+    XID (*defaultAllocProc) (Display *display);
 				/* Default resource allocator for display. */
     struct TkIdStack *windowStackPtr;
-				/* First in list of chunks of window
-				 * identifers that can't be reused right
-				 * now. */
+				/* First in list of chunks of window ids that
+				 * can't be reused right now. */
     Tcl_TimerToken idCleanupScheduled;
 				/* If set, it means a call to WindowIdCleanup
 				 * has already been scheduled, 0 means it
@@ -484,17 +490,16 @@ typedef struct TkDisplay {
      * Information used by tkUnixWm.c and tkWinWm.c only:
      */
 
-    struct TkWmInfo *firstWmPtr;  /* Points to first top-level window. */
-    struct TkWmInfo *foregroundWmPtr;    
-                                /* Points to the foreground window. */
+    struct TkWmInfo *firstWmPtr;/* Points to first top-level window. */
+    struct TkWmInfo *foregroundWmPtr;
+				/* Points to the foreground window. */
 
     /*
      * Information maintained by tkWindow.c for use later on by tkXId.c:
      */
 
-
-    int destroyCount;		/* Number of Tk_DestroyWindow operations
-				 * in progress. */
+    int destroyCount;		/* Number of Tk_DestroyWindow operations in
+				 * progress. */
     unsigned long lastDestroyRequest;
 				/* Id of most recent XDestroyWindow request;
 				 * can re-use ids in windowStackPtr when
@@ -513,25 +518,25 @@ typedef struct TkDisplay {
      */
 
 #ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
-    XIM inputMethod;		/* Input method for this display */
-#if TK_XIM_SPOT
+    XIM inputMethod;		/* Input method for this display. */
+    XIMStyle inputStyle;	/* Input style selected for this display. */
     XFontSet inputXfs;		/* XFontSet cached for over-the-spot XIM. */
-#endif
 #endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */
     Tcl_HashTable winTable;	/* Maps from X window ids to TkWindow ptrs. */
 
     int refCount;		/* Reference count of how many Tk applications
-                                 * are using this display. Used to clean up
-                                 * the display when we no longer have any
-                                 * Tk applications using it.
-                                 */
+				 * are using this display. Used to clean up
+				 * the display when we no longer have any Tk
+				 * applications using it. */
+
     /*
      * The following field were all added for Tk8.3
      */
-    int mouseButtonState;	/* current mouse button state for this
-				 * display */
-    Window mouseButtonWindow;	/* Window the button state was set in,
-				 * added in Tk 8.4. */
+
+    int mouseButtonState;	/* Current mouse button state for this
+				 * display. */
+    Window mouseButtonWindow;	/* Window the button state was set in, added
+				 * in Tk 8.4. */
     Window warpWindow;
     int warpX;
     int warpY;
@@ -539,13 +544,14 @@ typedef struct TkDisplay {
     /*
      * The following field(s) were all added for Tk8.4
      */
-    unsigned int flags;		/* Various flag values:  these are all
-				 * defined in below. */
-    TkCaret caret;		/* information about the caret for this
-				 * display.  This is not a pointer. */
 
-    int iconDataSize;		/* size of default iconphoto image data */
-    unsigned char *iconDataPtr;	/* default iconphoto image data, if set */
+    unsigned int flags;		/* Various flag values: these are all defined
+				 * in below. */
+    TkCaret caret;		/* Information about the caret for this
+				 * display. This is not a pointer. */
+
+    int iconDataSize;		/* Size of default iconphoto image data. */
+    unsigned char *iconDataPtr;	/* Default iconphoto image data, if set. */
 } TkDisplay;
 
 /*
@@ -554,8 +560,6 @@ typedef struct TkDisplay {
  *	Indicates that we should collapse motion events on this display
  *  TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM:			(default on, set via tk.tcl)
  *	Whether to use input methods for this display
- *  TK_DISPLAY_XIM_SPOT:		(default off)
- *	Indicates that we should use over-the-spot XIM on this display
  *  TK_DISPLAY_WM_TRACING:		(default off)
  *	Whether we should do wm tracing on this display.
  *  TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP:			(default off)
@@ -564,88 +568,75 @@ typedef struct TkDisplay {
 
 #define TK_DISPLAY_COLLAPSE_MOTION_EVENTS	(1 << 0)
 #define TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM			(1 << 1)
-#define TK_DISPLAY_XIM_SPOT			(1 << 2)
 #define TK_DISPLAY_WM_TRACING			(1 << 3)
 #define TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP			(1 << 4)
 
 /*
- * One of the following structures exists for each error handler
- * created by a call to Tk_CreateErrorHandler.  The structure
- * is managed by tkError.c.
+ * One of the following structures exists for each error handler created by a
+ * call to Tk_CreateErrorHandler. The structure is managed by tkError.c.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkErrorHandler {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display to which handler applies. */
-    unsigned long firstRequest;	/* Only errors with serial numbers
-				 * >= to this are considered. */
-    unsigned long lastRequest;	/* Only errors with serial numbers
-				 * <= to this are considered.  This
-				 * field is filled in when XUnhandle
-				 * is called.  -1 means XUnhandle
-				 * hasn't been called yet. */
-    int error;			/* Consider only errors with this
-				 * error_code (-1 means consider
-				 * all errors). */
-    int request;		/* Consider only errors with this
-				 * major request code (-1 means
-				 * consider all major codes). */
-    int minorCode;		/* Consider only errors with this
-				 * minor request code (-1 means
-				 * consider all minor codes). */
-    Tk_ErrorProc *errorProc;	/* Procedure to invoke when a matching
-				 * error occurs.  NULL means just ignore
-				 * errors. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary value to pass to
-				 * errorProc. */
+    unsigned long firstRequest;	/* Only errors with serial numbers >= to this
+				 * are considered. */
+    unsigned long lastRequest;	/* Only errors with serial numbers <= to this
+				 * are considered. This field is filled in
+				 * when XUnhandle is called. -1 means
+				 * XUnhandle hasn't been called yet. */
+    int error;			/* Consider only errors with this error_code
+				 * (-1 means consider all errors). */
+    int request;		/* Consider only errors with this major
+				 * request code (-1 means consider all major
+				 * codes). */
+    int minorCode;		/* Consider only errors with this minor
+				 * request code (-1 means consider all minor
+				 * codes). */
+    Tk_ErrorProc *errorProc;	/* Function to invoke when a matching error
+				 * occurs. NULL means just ignore errors. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary value to pass to errorProc. */
     struct TkErrorHandler *nextPtr;
-				/* Pointer to next older handler for
-				 * this display, or NULL for end of
-				 * list. */
+				/* Pointer to next older handler for this
+				 * display, or NULL for end of list. */
 } TkErrorHandler;
 
-
 /*
- * One of the following structures exists for each event handler
- * created by calling Tk_CreateEventHandler.  This information
- * is used by tkEvent.c only.
+ * One of the following structures exists for each event handler created by
+ * calling Tk_CreateEventHandler. This information is used by tkEvent.c only.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkEventHandler {
-    unsigned long mask;		/* Events for which to invoke
-				 * proc. */
-    Tk_EventProc *proc;		/* Procedure to invoke when an event
-				 * in mask occurs. */
+    unsigned long mask;		/* Events for which to invoke proc. */
+    Tk_EventProc *proc;		/* Function to invoke when an event in mask
+				 * occurs. */
     ClientData clientData;	/* Argument to pass to proc. */
     struct TkEventHandler *nextPtr;
-				/* Next in list of handlers
-				 * associated with window (NULL means
-				 * end of list). */
+				/* Next in list of handlers associated with
+				 * window (NULL means end of list). */
 } TkEventHandler;
 
 /*
- * Tk keeps one of the following data structures for each main
- * window (created by a call to TkCreateMainWindow).  It stores
- * information that is shared by all of the windows associated
- * with a particular main window.
+ * Tk keeps one of the following data structures for each main window (created
+ * by a call to TkCreateMainWindow). It stores information that is shared by
+ * all of the windows associated with a particular main window.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkMainInfo {
     int refCount;		/* Number of windows whose "mainPtr" fields
-				 * point here.  When this becomes zero, can
-				 * free up the structure (the reference
-				 * count is zero because windows can get
-				 * deleted in almost any order;  the main
-				 * window isn't necessarily the last one
-				 * deleted). */
+				 * point here. When this becomes zero, can
+				 * free up the structure (the reference count
+				 * is zero because windows can get deleted in
+				 * almost any order; the main window isn't
+				 * necessarily the last one deleted). */
     struct TkWindow *winPtr;	/* Pointer to main window. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with application. */
     Tcl_HashTable nameTable;	/* Hash table mapping path names to TkWindow
 				 * structs for all windows related to this
-				 * main window.  Managed by tkWindow.c. */
-    long deletionEpoch;		/* Incremented by window deletions */
+				 * main window. Managed by tkWindow.c. */
+    long deletionEpoch;		/* Incremented by window deletions. */
     Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
-				/* Used in conjunction with "bind" command
-				 * to bind events to Tcl commands. */
+				/* Used in conjunction with "bind" command to
+				 * bind events to Tcl commands. */
     TkBindInfo bindInfo;	/* Information used by tkBind.c on a per
 				 * application basis. */
     struct TkFontInfo *fontInfoPtr;
@@ -659,21 +650,21 @@ typedef struct TkMainInfo {
     struct TkToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr;
 				/* First in list of records containing focus
 				 * information for each top-level in the
-				 * application.  Used only by tkFocus.c. */
+				 * application. Used only by tkFocus.c. */
     struct TkDisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
 				/* First in list of records containing focus
 				 * information for each display that this
-				 * application has ever used.  Used only
-				 * by tkFocus.c. */
+				 * application has ever used. Used only by
+				 * tkFocus.c. */
 
     struct ElArray *optionRootPtr;
-				/* Top level of option hierarchy for this
-				 * main window.  NULL means uninitialized.
-				 * Managed by tkOption.c. */
+				/* Top level of option hierarchy for this main
+				 * window. NULL means uninitialized. Managed
+				 * by tkOption.c. */
     Tcl_HashTable imageTable;	/* Maps from image names to Tk_ImageMaster
-				 * structures.  Managed by tkImage.c. */
-    int strictMotif;		/* This is linked to the tk_strictMotif
-				 * global variable. */
+				 * structures. Managed by tkImage.c. */
+    int strictMotif;		/* This is linked to the tk_strictMotif global
+				 * variable. */
     int alwaysShowSelection;	/* This is linked to the
 				 * ::tk::AlwaysShowSelection variable. */
     struct TkMainInfo *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of all main windows managed by
@@ -681,172 +672,157 @@ typedef struct TkMainInfo {
 } TkMainInfo;
 
 /*
- * Tk keeps the following data structure for each of it's builtin
- * bitmaps.  This structure is only used by tkBitmap.c and other
- * platform specific bitmap files.
+ * Tk keeps the following data structure for each of it's builtin bitmaps.
+ * This structure is only used by tkBitmap.c and other platform specific
+ * bitmap files.
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    CONST char *source;		/* Bits for bitmap. */
+    const char *source;		/* Bits for bitmap. */
     int width, height;		/* Dimensions of bitmap. */
-    int native;			/* 0 means generic (X style) bitmap,
-    				 * 1 means native style bitmap. */
+    int native;			/* 0 means generic (X style) bitmap, 1 means
+    				 * native style bitmap. */
 } TkPredefBitmap;
 
 /*
- * Tk keeps one of the following structures for each window.
- * Some of the information (like size and location) is a shadow
- * of information managed by the X server, and some is special
- * information used here, such as event and geometry management
- * information.  This information is (mostly) managed by tkWindow.c.
- * WARNING: the declaration below must be kept consistent with the
- * Tk_FakeWin structure in tk.h.  If you change one, be sure to
- * change the other!!
+ * Tk keeps one of the following structures for each window. Some of the
+ * information (like size and location) is a shadow of information managed by
+ * the X server, and some is special information used here, such as event and
+ * geometry management information. This information is (mostly) managed by
+ * tkWindow.c. WARNING: the declaration below must be kept consistent with the
+ * Tk_FakeWin structure in tk.h. If you change one, be sure to change the
+ * other!
  */
 
 typedef struct TkWindow {
-
     /*
      * Structural information:
      */
 
     Display *display;		/* Display containing window. */
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Tk's information about display
-				 * for window. */
-    int screenNum;		/* Index of screen for window, among all
-				 * those for dispPtr. */
-    Visual *visual;		/* Visual to use for window.  If not default,
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Tk's information about display for
+				 * window. */
+    int screenNum;		/* Index of screen for window, among all those
+				 * for dispPtr. */
+    Visual *visual;		/* Visual to use for window. If not default,
 				 * MUST be set before X window is created. */
     int depth;			/* Number of bits/pixel. */
-    Window window;		/* X's id for window.   NULL means window
-				 * hasn't actually been created yet, or it's
-				 * been deleted. */
-    struct TkWindow *childList;	/* First in list of child windows,
-				 * or NULL if no children.  List is in
-				 * stacking order, lowest window first.*/
-    struct TkWindow *lastChildPtr;
-				/* Last in list of child windows (highest
-				 * in stacking order), or NULL if no
-				 * children. */
-    struct TkWindow *parentPtr;	/* Pointer to parent window (logical
-				 * parent, not necessarily X parent).  NULL
-				 * means either this is the main window, or
-				 * the window's parent has already been
+    Window window;		/* X's id for window. NULL means window hasn't
+				 * actually been created yet, or it's been
 				 * deleted. */
-    struct TkWindow *nextPtr;	/* Next higher sibling (in stacking order)
-				 * in list of children with same parent.  NULL
+    struct TkWindow *childList;	/* First in list of child windows, or NULL if
+				 * no children. List is in stacking order,
+				 * lowest window first.*/
+    struct TkWindow *lastChildPtr;
+				/* Last in list of child windows (highest in
+				 * stacking order), or NULL if no children. */
+    struct TkWindow *parentPtr;	/* Pointer to parent window (logical parent,
+				 * not necessarily X parent). NULL means
+				 * either this is the main window, or the
+				 * window's parent has already been deleted. */
+    struct TkWindow *nextPtr;	/* Next higher sibling (in stacking order) in
+				 * list of children with same parent. NULL
 				 * means end of list. */
     TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* Information shared by all windows
-				 * associated with a particular main
-				 * window.  NULL means this window is
-				 * a rogue that isn't associated with
-				 * any application (at present, this
-				 * only happens for the dummy windows
-				 * used for "send" communication).  */
+				 * associated with a particular main window.
+				 * NULL means this window is a rogue that is
+				 * not associated with any application (at
+				 * present, this only happens for the dummy
+				 * windows used for "send" communication). */
 
     /*
      * Name and type information for the window:
      */
 
-    char *pathName;		/* Path name of window (concatenation
-				 * of all names between this window and
-				 * its top-level ancestor).  This is a
-				 * pointer into an entry in
-				 * mainPtr->nameTable.  NULL means that
-				 * the window hasn't been completely
-				 * created yet. */
+    char *pathName;		/* Path name of window (concatenation of all
+				 * names between this window and its top-level
+				 * ancestor). This is a pointer into an entry
+				 * in mainPtr->nameTable. NULL means that the
+				 * window hasn't been completely created
+				 * yet. */
     Tk_Uid nameUid;		/* Name of the window within its parent
 				 * (unique within the parent). */
-    Tk_Uid classUid;		/* Class of the window.  NULL means window
+    Tk_Uid classUid;		/* Class of the window. NULL means window
 				 * hasn't been given a class yet. */
 
     /*
-     * Geometry and other attributes of window.  This information
-     * may not be updated on the server immediately;  stuff that
-     * hasn't been reflected in the server yet is called "dirty".
-     * At present, information can be dirty only if the window
-     * hasn't yet been created.
+     * Geometry and other attributes of window. This information may not be
+     * updated on the server immediately; stuff that hasn't been reflected in
+     * the server yet is called "dirty". At present, information can be dirty
+     * only if the window hasn't yet been created.
      */
 
-    XWindowChanges changes;	/* Geometry and other info about
-				 * window. */
-    unsigned int dirtyChanges;	/* Bits indicate fields of "changes"
-				 * that are dirty. */
+    XWindowChanges changes;	/* Geometry and other info about window. */
+    unsigned int dirtyChanges;	/* Bits indicate fields of "changes" that are
+				 * dirty. */
     XSetWindowAttributes atts;	/* Current attributes of window. */
-    unsigned long dirtyAtts;	/* Bits indicate fields of "atts"
-				 * that are dirty. */
+    unsigned long dirtyAtts;	/* Bits indicate fields of "atts" that are
+				 * dirty. */
 
-    unsigned int flags;		/* Various flag values:  these are all
-				 * defined in tk.h (confusing, but they're
-				 * needed there for some query macros). */
+    unsigned int flags;		/* Various flag values: these are all defined
+				 * in tk.h (confusing, but they're needed
+				 * there for some query macros). */
 
     /*
      * Information kept by the event manager (tkEvent.c):
      */
 
-    TkEventHandler *handlerList;/* First in list of event handlers
-				 * declared for this window, or
-				 * NULL if none. */
+    TkEventHandler *handlerList;/* First in list of event handlers declared
+				 * for this window, or NULL if none. */
 #ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
     XIC inputContext;		/* XIM input context. */
 #endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */
 
     /*
-     * Information used for event bindings (see "bind" and "bindtags"
-     * commands in tkCmds.c):
+     * Information used for event bindings (see "bind" and "bindtags" commands
+     * in tkCmds.c):
      */
 
     ClientData *tagPtr;		/* Points to array of tags used for bindings
-				 * on this window.  Each tag is a Tk_Uid.
-				 * Malloc'ed.  NULL means no tags. */
+				 * on this window. Each tag is a Tk_Uid.
+				 * Malloc'ed. NULL means no tags. */
     int numTags;		/* Number of tags at *tagPtr. */
 
     /*
-     * Information used by tkOption.c to manage options for the
-     * window.
+     * Information used by tkOption.c to manage options for the window.
      */
 
-    int optionLevel;		/* -1 means no option information is
-				 * currently cached for this window.
-				 * Otherwise this gives the level in
-				 * the option stack at which info is
-				 * cached. */
+    int optionLevel;		/* -1 means no option information is currently
+				 * cached for this window. Otherwise this
+				 * gives the level in the option stack at
+				 * which info is cached. */
     /*
      * Information used by tkSelect.c to manage the selection.
      */
 
     struct TkSelHandler *selHandlerList;
-				/* First in list of handlers for
-				 * returning the selection in various
-				 * forms. */
+				/* First in list of handlers for returning the
+				 * selection in various forms. */
 
     /*
      * Information used by tkGeometry.c for geometry management.
      */
 
-    Tk_GeomMgr *geomMgrPtr;	/* Information about geometry manager for
-				 * this window. */
-    ClientData geomData;	/* Argument for geometry manager procedures. */
+    const Tk_GeomMgr *geomMgrPtr; /* Information about geometry manager for this
+				 * window. */
+    ClientData geomData;	/* Argument for geometry manager functions. */
     int reqWidth, reqHeight;	/* Arguments from last call to
 				 * Tk_GeometryRequest, or 0's if
-				 * Tk_GeometryRequest hasn't been
-				 * called. */
-    int internalBorderLeft;	/* Width of internal border of window
-				 * (0 means no internal border).  Geometry
-				 * managers should not normally place children
-				 * on top of the border. 
-				 * Fields for the other three sides are found 
-				 * below. */
+				 * Tk_GeometryRequest hasn't been called. */
+    int internalBorderLeft;	/* Width of internal border of window (0 means
+				 * no internal border). Geometry managers
+				 * should not normally place children on top
+				 * of the border. Fields for the other three
+				 * sides are found below. */
 
     /*
      * Information maintained by tkWm.c for window manager communication.
      */
 
-    struct TkWmInfo *wmInfoPtr;	/* For top-level windows (and also
-				 * for special Unix menubar and wrapper
-				 * windows), points to structure with
-				 * wm-related info (see tkWm.c).  For
-				 * other windows, this is NULL. */
+    struct TkWmInfo *wmInfoPtr;	/* For top-level windows (and also for special
+				 * Unix menubar and wrapper windows), points
+				 * to structure with wm-related info (see
+				 * tkWm.c). For other windows, this is NULL. */
 
     /*
      * Information used by widget classes.
@@ -866,32 +842,50 @@ typedef struct TkWindow {
      */
 
     /* The remaining fields of internal border. */
-    int internalBorderRight; 
+    int internalBorderRight;
     int internalBorderTop;
     int internalBorderBottom;
-    
+
     int minReqWidth;		/* Minimum requested width. */
     int minReqHeight;		/* Minimum requested height. */
 } TkWindow;
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used as a two way map between integers
- * and strings, usually to map between an internal C representation
- * and the strings used in Tcl.
+ * Real definition of some events. Note that these events come from outside
+ * but have internally generated pieces added to them.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    XKeyEvent keyEvent;		/* The real event from X11. */
+    char *charValuePtr;		/* A pointer to a string that holds the key's
+				 * %A substitution text (before backslash
+				 * adding), or NULL if that has not been
+				 * computed yet. If non-NULL, this string was
+				 * allocated with ckalloc(). */
+    int charValueLen;		/* Length of string in charValuePtr when that
+				 * is non-NULL. */
+    KeySym keysym;		/* Key symbol computed after input methods
+				 * have been invoked */
+} TkKeyEvent;
+
+/*
+ * The following structure is used as a two way map between integers and
+ * strings, usually to map between an internal C representation and the
+ * strings used in Tcl.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkStateMap {
     int numKey;			/* Integer representation of a value. */
-    char *strKey;		/* String representation of a value. */
+    const char *strKey;		/* String representation of a value. */
 } TkStateMap;
 
 /*
- * This structure is used by the Mac and Window porting layers as
- * the internal representation of a clip_mask in a GC.
+ * This structure is used by the Mac and Window porting layers as the internal
+ * representation of a clip_mask in a GC.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkpClipMask {
-    int type;			/* One of TKP_CLIP_PIXMAP or TKP_CLIP_REGION */
+    int type;			/* TKP_CLIP_PIXMAP or TKP_CLIP_REGION. */
     union {
 	Pixmap pixmap;
 	TkRegion region;
@@ -917,320 +911,304 @@ extern TkDisplay *tkDisplayList;
 #define TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED	3
 
 /*
- * The macro below is used to modify a "char" value (e.g. by casting
- * it to an unsigned character) so that it can be used safely with
- * macros such as isspace.
+ * Additional flag for TkpMeasureCharsInContext. Coordinate with other flags
+ * for this routine, but don't make public until TkpMeasureCharsInContext is
+ * made public, too.
+ */
+
+#define TK_ISOLATE_END		32
+
+/*
+ * The macro below is used to modify a "char" value (e.g. by casting it to an
+ * unsigned character) so that it can be used safely with macros such as
+ * isspace().
  */
 
 #define UCHAR(c) ((unsigned char) (c))
 
 /*
- * The following symbol is used in the mode field of FocusIn events
- * generated by an embedded application to request the input focus from
- * its container.
+ * The following symbol is used in the mode field of FocusIn events generated
+ * by an embedded application to request the input focus from its container.
  */
 
 #define EMBEDDED_APP_WANTS_FOCUS (NotifyNormal + 20)
 
 /*
- * The following special modifier mask bits are defined, to indicate
- * logical modifiers such as Meta and Alt that may float among the
- * actual modifier bits.
+ * The following special modifier mask bits are defined, to indicate logical
+ * modifiers such as Meta and Alt that may float among the actual modifier
+ * bits.
  */
 
 #define META_MASK	(AnyModifier<<1)
 #define ALT_MASK	(AnyModifier<<2)
+#define EXTENDED_MASK	(AnyModifier<<3)
 
 /*
- * Object types not declared in tkObj.c need to be mentioned here so
- * they can be properly registered with Tcl:
+ * Object types not declared in tkObj.c need to be mentioned here so they can
+ * be properly registered with Tcl:
  */
 
-extern Tcl_ObjType tkBorderObjType;
-extern Tcl_ObjType tkBitmapObjType;
-extern Tcl_ObjType tkColorObjType;
-extern Tcl_ObjType tkCursorObjType;
-extern Tcl_ObjType tkFontObjType;
-extern Tcl_ObjType tkOptionObjType;
-extern Tcl_ObjType tkStateKeyObjType;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_ObjType tkBorderObjType;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_ObjType tkBitmapObjType;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_ObjType tkColorObjType;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_ObjType tkCursorObjType;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_ObjType tkFontObjType;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_ObjType tkOptionObjType;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_ObjType tkStateKeyObjType;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_ObjType tkTextIndexType;
 
 /*
- * Miscellaneous variables shared among Tk modules but not exported
- * to the outside world:
+ * Miscellaneous variables shared among Tk modules but not exported to the
+ * outside world:
  */
 
-extern Tk_SmoothMethod		tkBezierSmoothMethod;
-extern Tk_ImageType		tkBitmapImageType;
-extern Tk_PhotoImageFormat	tkImgFmtGIF;
-extern void			(*tkHandleEventProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((
-    				    XEvent* eventPtr));
-extern Tk_PhotoImageFormat	tkImgFmtPPM;
-extern TkMainInfo		*tkMainWindowList;
-extern Tk_ImageType		tkPhotoImageType;
-extern Tcl_HashTable		tkPredefBitmapTable;
-extern int			tkSendSerial;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tk_SmoothMethod	tkBezierSmoothMethod;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tk_ImageType	tkBitmapImageType;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtGIF;
+MODULE_SCOPE void		(*tkHandleEventProc) (XEvent* eventPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtPPM;
+MODULE_SCOPE TkMainInfo		*tkMainWindowList;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tk_ImageType	tkPhotoImageType;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_HashTable	tkPredefBitmapTable;
 
-extern CONST char *const tkWebColors[20];
+MODULE_SCOPE CONST char *const tkWebColors[20];
 
 #include "tkIntDecls.h"
 
 #ifdef BUILD_tk
-# undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
-# define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
+#undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
+#define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
 #endif
 
 /*
- * Internal procedures shared among Tk modules but not exported
- * to the outside world:
+ * Themed widget set init function:
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Ttk_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+
+/*
+ * Internal functions shared among Tk modules but not exported to the outside
+ * world:
  */
 
-EXTERN int		Tk_BellObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_BindObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_BellObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_BindtagsObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_BindObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_ButtonObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_BindtagsObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_CanvasObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_ButtonObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_CanvasObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_CheckbuttonObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_CheckbuttonObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int              Tk_ClipboardObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int              Tk_ChooseColorObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int              Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int              Tk_ChooseFontObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_DestroyObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_EntryObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-                            Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_EventObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_ClipboardObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_FileeventCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, char **argv));
-EXTERN int		Tk_FrameObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_ChooseColorObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_FocusObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_FontObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int              Tk_GetOpenFileObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int              Tk_GetSaveFileObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_GrabObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_GridObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_ChooseFontObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_ImageObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_LabelObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_DestroyObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_LabelframeObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_EntryObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_ListboxObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_EventObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_LowerObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_FrameObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int              Tk_MessageBoxObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-                            Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_MessageObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_FocusObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_FontObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_OptionObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_GetOpenFileObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-	                    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_PackObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_GetSaveFileObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_PlaceObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_GrabObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_RadiobuttonObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_GridObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_RaiseObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_ImageObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_ScaleObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-                            Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_ScrollbarCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-EXTERN int		Tk_SelectionObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_LabelObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_SendCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-EXTERN int		Tk_SendObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_SpinboxObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-                            Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_TextCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-EXTERN int		Tk_TkObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_LabelframeObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_TkwaitObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_ListboxObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_ToplevelObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_LowerObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_UpdateObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_WinfoObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-EXTERN int		Tk_WmObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_MessageBoxObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-
-EXTERN void		TkEventInit _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
-
-EXTERN void		TkRegisterObjTypes _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
-
-EXTERN int		TkCreateMenuCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp));
-EXTERN int		TkDeadAppCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_MessageObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_OptionObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_PackObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_PlaceObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_RadiobuttonObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_RaiseObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_ScaleObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_ScrollbarCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, const char **argv);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_SelectionObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_SendCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, const char **argv);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_SendObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_SpinboxObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_TextObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_TkObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_TkwaitObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_ToplevelObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_UpdateObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_WinfoObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_WmObjCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
 
-EXTERN int		TkpTestembedCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-EXTERN int		TkCanvasGetCoordObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+MODULE_SCOPE int	Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+			    double *doublePtr);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkEventInit(void);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkRegisterObjTypes(void);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkCreateMenuCmd(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkDeadAppCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, const char **argv);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkCanvasGetCoordObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tcl_Obj *obj,
-			    double *doublePtr));
-EXTERN int		TkCanvasDashParseProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value, char *widgRec,
-			    int offset));
-EXTERN char *		TkCanvasDashPrintProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    char *widgRec, int offset,
-			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkGetDoublePixels _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *string,
-			    double *doublePtr));
-EXTERN int		TkOffsetParseProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value, char *widgRec,
-			    int offset));
-EXTERN char *		TkOffsetPrintProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    char *widgRec, int offset,
-			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkOrientParseProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value,
-			    char *widgRec, int offset));
-EXTERN char *		TkOrientPrintProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    char *widgRec, int offset,
-			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkPixelParseProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value, char *widgRec,
-			    int offset));
-EXTERN char *		TkPixelPrintProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    char *widgRec, int offset,
-			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkPostscriptImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo,
-			    XImage *ximage, int x, int y, int width,
-			    int height));
-EXTERN int		TkSmoothParseProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    CONST char *value, char *recordPtr, int offset));
-EXTERN char *		TkSmoothPrintProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *recordPtr, int offset,
-			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkStateParseProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value,
-			    char *widgRec, int offset));
-EXTERN char *		TkStatePrintProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    char *widgRec, int offset,
-			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkTileParseProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value, char *widgRec,
-			    int offset));
-EXTERN char *		TkTilePrintProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    char *widgRec, int offset,
-			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkCreateExitHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_ExitProc *proc,
-			    ClientData clientData));
-EXTERN void		TkDeleteExitHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_ExitProc *proc,
-			    ClientData clientData));
-EXTERN Tcl_ExitProc	TkFinalize;
-EXTERN void		TkPrintPadAmount _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *buffer, int pad1, int pad2));
-EXTERN int		TkParsePadAmount _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    double *doublePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkGetDoublePixels(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    const char *string, double *doublePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkPostscriptImage(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, XImage *ximage,
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height);
+MODULE_SCOPE void       TkMapTopFrame(Tk_Window tkwin);
+MODULE_SCOPE XEvent *	TkpGetBindingXEvent(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkCreateExitHandler(Tcl_ExitProc *proc,
+			    ClientData clientData);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkDeleteExitHandler(Tcl_ExitProc *proc,
+			    ClientData clientData);
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_ExitProc	TkFinalize;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_ExitProc	TkFinalizeThread;
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData(TkRegion region,
+			    unsigned x, unsigned y, unsigned width,
+			    unsigned height, unsigned char *dataPtr,
+			    unsigned pixelStride, unsigned lineStride);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkPrintPadAmount(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    char *buffer, int pad1, int pad2);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkParsePadAmount(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
-			    int *pad1Ptr, int *pad2Ptr));
-EXTERN int		TkpAlwaysShowSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+			    int *pad1Ptr, int *pad2Ptr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void       TkFocusSplit(TkWindow *winPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void       TkFocusJoin(TkWindow *winPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkpAlwaysShowSelection(Tk_Window tkwin);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpDrawCharsInContext(Display * display,
+			    Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    const char *source, int numBytes, int rangeStart,
+			    int rangeLength, int x, int y);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkpMeasureCharsInContext(Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    const char *source, int numBytes, int rangeStart,
+			    int rangeLength, int maxLength, int flags,
+			    int *lengthPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkUnderlineCharsInContext(Display *display,
+			    Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    const char *string, int numBytes, int x, int y,
+			    int firstByte, int lastByte);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpGetFontAttrsForChar(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    Tcl_UniChar c, struct TkFontAttributes *faPtr);
 #ifdef __WIN32__
 #define TkParseColor XParseColor
 #else
-EXTERN Status TkParseColor _ANSI_ARGS_((Display * display,
+MODULE_SCOPE Status TkParseColor (Display * display,
 				Colormap map, CONST char* spec,
-				XColor * colorPtr));
+				XColor * colorPtr);
+#endif
+#ifdef HAVE_XFT
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkUnixSetXftClipRegion(TkRegion clipRegion);
 #endif
 
 /*
  * Unsupported commands.
  */
-EXTERN int		TkUnsupported1ObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
 
-# undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
-# define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkUnsupported1ObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
 
-#endif  /* _TKINT */
+#undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
+#define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
+
+#endif /* _TKINT */
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkIntDecls.h b/generic/tkIntDecls.h
index a590cf2..5fcce30 100644
--- a/generic/tkIntDecls.h
+++ b/generic/tkIntDecls.h
@@ -32,371 +32,702 @@
  * Exported function declarations:
  */
 
+#ifndef TkAllocWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkAllocWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 0 */
-EXTERN TkWindow *	TkAllocWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr,
-				int screenNum, TkWindow *parentPtr));
+EXTERN TkWindow *	TkAllocWindow(TkDisplay *dispPtr, int screenNum,
+				TkWindow *parentPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkBezierPoints_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkBezierPoints_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 1 */
-EXTERN void		TkBezierPoints _ANSI_ARGS_((double control[],
-				int numSteps, double *coordPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkBezierPoints(double control[], int numSteps,
+				double *coordPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkBezierScreenPoints_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkBezierScreenPoints_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 2 */
-EXTERN void		TkBezierScreenPoints _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
+EXTERN void		TkBezierScreenPoints(Tk_Canvas canvas,
 				double control[], int numSteps,
-				XPoint *xPointPtr));
+				XPoint *xPointPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkBindDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkBindDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 3 */
-EXTERN void		TkBindDeadWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkBindDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkBindEventProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkBindEventProc_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 4 */
-EXTERN void		TkBindEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				XEvent *eventPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkBindEventProc(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkBindFree_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkBindFree_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 5 */
-EXTERN void		TkBindFree _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkBindFree(TkMainInfo *mainPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkBindInit_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkBindInit_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 6 */
-EXTERN void		TkBindInit _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkBindInit(TkMainInfo *mainPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkChangeEventWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkChangeEventWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 7 */
-EXTERN void		TkChangeEventWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *eventPtr,
-				TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkChangeEventWindow(XEvent *eventPtr,
+				TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkClipInit_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkClipInit_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 8 */
-EXTERN int		TkClipInit _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+EXTERN int		TkClipInit(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkComputeAnchor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkComputeAnchor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 9 */
-EXTERN void		TkComputeAnchor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Anchor anchor,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, int padX, int padY,
-				int innerWidth, int innerHeight, int *xPtr,
-				int *yPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkComputeAnchor(Tk_Anchor anchor, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				int padX, int padY, int innerWidth,
+				int innerHeight, int *xPtr, int *yPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkCopyAndGlobalEval_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkCopyAndGlobalEval_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 10 */
-EXTERN int		TkCopyAndGlobalEval _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				char *script));
+EXTERN int		TkCopyAndGlobalEval(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *script);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkCreateBindingProcedure_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkCreateBindingProcedure_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 11 */
-EXTERN unsigned long	TkCreateBindingProcedure _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN unsigned long	TkCreateBindingProcedure(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_BindingTable bindingTable,
 				ClientData object, CONST char *eventString,
 				TkBindEvalProc *evalProc,
 				TkBindFreeProc *freeProc,
-				ClientData clientData));
+				ClientData clientData);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkCreateCursorFromData_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkCreateCursorFromData_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 12 */
-EXTERN TkCursor *	TkCreateCursorFromData _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+EXTERN TkCursor *	TkCreateCursorFromData(Tk_Window tkwin,
 				CONST char *source, CONST char *mask,
 				int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot,
-				XColor fg, XColor bg));
+				XColor fg, XColor bg);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkCreateFrame_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkCreateFrame_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 13 */
-EXTERN int		TkCreateFrame _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+EXTERN int		TkCreateFrame(ClientData clientData,
 				Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, char **argv,
-				int toplevel, char *appName));
+				int toplevel, char *appName);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkCreateMainWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkCreateMainWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 14 */
-EXTERN Tk_Window	TkCreateMainWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST char *screenName, char *baseName));
+EXTERN Tk_Window	TkCreateMainWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				CONST char *screenName, char *baseName);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkCurrentTime_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkCurrentTime_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 15 */
-EXTERN Time		TkCurrentTime _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+EXTERN Time		TkCurrentTime(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkDeleteAllImages_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkDeleteAllImages_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 16 */
-EXTERN void		TkDeleteAllImages _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkDeleteAllImages(TkMainInfo *mainPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkDoConfigureNotify_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkDoConfigureNotify_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 17 */
-EXTERN void		TkDoConfigureNotify _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkDoConfigureNotify(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkDrawInsetFocusHighlight_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkDrawInsetFocusHighlight_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 18 */
-EXTERN void		TkDrawInsetFocusHighlight _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int width,
-				Drawable drawable, int padding));
+EXTERN void		TkDrawInsetFocusHighlight(Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc,
+				int width, Drawable drawable, int padding);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkEventDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkEventDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 19 */
-EXTERN void		TkEventDeadWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkEventDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkFillPolygon_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkFillPolygon_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 20 */
-EXTERN void		TkFillPolygon _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-				double *coordPtr, int numPoints,
-				Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc,
-				GC outlineGC));
+EXTERN void		TkFillPolygon(Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr,
+				int numPoints, Display *display,
+				Drawable drawable, GC gc, GC outlineGC);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkFindStateNum_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkFindStateNum_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 21 */
-EXTERN int		TkFindStateNum _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN int		TkFindStateNum(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				CONST char *option, CONST TkStateMap *mapPtr,
-				CONST char *strKey));
+				CONST char *strKey);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkFindStateString_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkFindStateString_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 22 */
-EXTERN char *		TkFindStateString _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				CONST TkStateMap *mapPtr, int numKey));
+EXTERN char *		TkFindStateString(CONST TkStateMap *mapPtr,
+				int numKey);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkFocusDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkFocusDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 23 */
-EXTERN void		TkFocusDeadWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkFocusDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkFocusFilterEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkFocusFilterEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 24 */
-EXTERN int		TkFocusFilterEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				XEvent *eventPtr));
+EXTERN int		TkFocusFilterEvent(TkWindow *winPtr,
+				XEvent *eventPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkFocusKeyEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkFocusKeyEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 25 */
-EXTERN TkWindow *	TkFocusKeyEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				XEvent *eventPtr));
+EXTERN TkWindow *	TkFocusKeyEvent(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkFontPkgInit_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkFontPkgInit_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 26 */
-EXTERN void		TkFontPkgInit _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkFontPkgInit(TkMainInfo *mainPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkFontPkgFree_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkFontPkgFree_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 27 */
-EXTERN void		TkFontPkgFree _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkFontPkgFree(TkMainInfo *mainPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkFreeBindingTags_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkFreeBindingTags_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 28 */
-EXTERN void		TkFreeBindingTags _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkFreeBindingTags(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpFreeCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpFreeCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 29 */
-EXTERN void		TkpFreeCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCursor *cursorPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkpFreeCursor(TkCursor *cursorPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetBitmapData_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetBitmapData_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 30 */
-EXTERN char *		TkGetBitmapData _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				char *string, char *fileName, int *widthPtr,
-				int *heightPtr, int *hotXPtr, int *hotYPtr));
+EXTERN char *		TkGetBitmapData(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *string,
+				char *fileName, int *widthPtr,
+				int *heightPtr, int *hotXPtr, int *hotYPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetButtPoints_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetButtPoints_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 31 */
-EXTERN void		TkGetButtPoints _ANSI_ARGS_((double p1[],
-				double p2[], double width, int project,
-				double m1[], double m2[]));
+EXTERN void		TkGetButtPoints(double p1[], double p2[],
+				double width, int project, double m1[],
+				double m2[]);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetCursorByName_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetCursorByName_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 32 */
-EXTERN TkCursor *	TkGetCursorByName _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid string));
+EXTERN TkCursor *	TkGetCursorByName(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid string);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetDefaultScreenName_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetDefaultScreenName_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 33 */
-EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * TkGetDefaultScreenName _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *screenName));
+EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * TkGetDefaultScreenName(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				CONST char *screenName);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetDisplay_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetDisplay_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 34 */
-EXTERN TkDisplay *	TkGetDisplay _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display));
+EXTERN TkDisplay *	TkGetDisplay(Display *display);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetDisplayOf_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetDisplayOf_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 35 */
-EXTERN int		TkGetDisplayOf _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
-				Tk_Window *tkwinPtr));
+EXTERN int		TkGetDisplayOf(Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+				Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], Tk_Window *tkwinPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetFocusWin_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetFocusWin_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 36 */
-EXTERN TkWindow *	TkGetFocusWin _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN TkWindow *	TkGetFocusWin(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetInterpNames_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetInterpNames_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 37 */
-EXTERN int		TkGetInterpNames _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN int		TkGetInterpNames(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetMiterPoints_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetMiterPoints_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 38 */
-EXTERN int		TkGetMiterPoints _ANSI_ARGS_((double p1[],
-				double p2[], double p3[], double width,
-				double m1[], double m2[]));
+EXTERN int		TkGetMiterPoints(double p1[], double p2[],
+				double p3[], double width, double m1[],
+				double m2[]);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetPointerCoords_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetPointerCoords_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 39 */
-EXTERN void		TkGetPointerCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int *xPtr, int *yPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkGetPointerCoords(Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr,
+				int *yPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetServerInfo_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetServerInfo_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 40 */
-EXTERN void		TkGetServerInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN void		TkGetServerInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGrabDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGrabDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 41 */
-EXTERN void		TkGrabDeadWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkGrabDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGrabState_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGrabState_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 42 */
-EXTERN int		TkGrabState _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN int		TkGrabState(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkIncludePoint_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkIncludePoint_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 43 */
-EXTERN void		TkIncludePoint _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-				double *pointPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkIncludePoint(Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkInOutEvents_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkInOutEvents_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 44 */
-EXTERN void		TkInOutEvents _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *eventPtr,
-				TkWindow *sourcePtr, TkWindow *destPtr,
-				int leaveType, int enterType,
-				Tcl_QueuePosition position));
+EXTERN void		TkInOutEvents(XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *sourcePtr,
+				TkWindow *destPtr, int leaveType,
+				int enterType, Tcl_QueuePosition position);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkInstallFrameMenu_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkInstallFrameMenu_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 45 */
-EXTERN void		TkInstallFrameMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN void		TkInstallFrameMenu(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkKeysymToString_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkKeysymToString_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 46 */
-EXTERN char *		TkKeysymToString _ANSI_ARGS_((KeySym keysym));
+EXTERN char *		TkKeysymToString(KeySym keysym);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkLineToArea_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkLineToArea_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 47 */
-EXTERN int		TkLineToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((double end1Ptr[],
-				double end2Ptr[], double rectPtr[]));
+EXTERN int		TkLineToArea(double end1Ptr[], double end2Ptr[],
+				double rectPtr[]);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkLineToPoint_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkLineToPoint_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 48 */
-EXTERN double		TkLineToPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((double end1Ptr[],
-				double end2Ptr[], double pointPtr[]));
+EXTERN double		TkLineToPoint(double end1Ptr[], double end2Ptr[],
+				double pointPtr[]);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMakeBezierCurve_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMakeBezierCurve_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 49 */
-EXTERN int		TkMakeBezierCurve _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-				double *pointPtr, int numPoints,
-				int numSteps, XPoint xPoints[],
-				double dblPoints[]));
+EXTERN int		TkMakeBezierCurve(Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr,
+				int numPoints, int numSteps,
+				XPoint xPoints[], double dblPoints[]);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMakeBezierPostscript_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMakeBezierPostscript_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 50 */
-EXTERN void		TkMakeBezierPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
-				double *pointPtr, int numPoints));
+EXTERN void		TkMakeBezierPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr,
+				int numPoints);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkOptionClassChanged_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkOptionClassChanged_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 51 */
-EXTERN void		TkOptionClassChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkOptionClassChanged(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkOptionDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkOptionDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 52 */
-EXTERN void		TkOptionDeadWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkOptionDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkOvalToArea_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkOvalToArea_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 53 */
-EXTERN int		TkOvalToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((double *ovalPtr,
-				double *rectPtr));
+EXTERN int		TkOvalToArea(double *ovalPtr, double *rectPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkOvalToPoint_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkOvalToPoint_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 54 */
-EXTERN double		TkOvalToPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((double ovalPtr[],
-				double width, int filled, double pointPtr[]));
+EXTERN double		TkOvalToPoint(double ovalPtr[], double width,
+				int filled, double pointPtr[]);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpChangeFocus_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpChangeFocus_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 55 */
-EXTERN int		TkpChangeFocus _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				int force));
+EXTERN int		TkpChangeFocus(TkWindow *winPtr, int force);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpCloseDisplay_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpCloseDisplay_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 56 */
-EXTERN void		TkpCloseDisplay _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkpCloseDisplay(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpClaimFocus_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpClaimFocus_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 57 */
-EXTERN void		TkpClaimFocus _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *topLevelPtr,
-				int force));
+EXTERN void		TkpClaimFocus(TkWindow *topLevelPtr, int force);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpDisplayWarning_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpDisplayWarning_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 58 */
-EXTERN void		TkpDisplayWarning _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *msg,
-				CONST char *title));
+EXTERN void		TkpDisplayWarning(CONST char *msg, CONST char *title);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpGetAppName_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpGetAppName_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 59 */
-EXTERN void		TkpGetAppName _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tcl_DString *name));
+EXTERN void		TkpGetAppName(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_DString *name);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpGetOtherWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpGetOtherWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 60 */
-EXTERN TkWindow *	TkpGetOtherWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN TkWindow *	TkpGetOtherWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpGetWrapperWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpGetWrapperWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 61 */
-EXTERN TkWindow *	TkpGetWrapperWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN TkWindow *	TkpGetWrapperWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpInit_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpInit_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 62 */
-EXTERN int		TkpInit _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp));
+EXTERN int		TkpInit(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpInitializeMenuBindings_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpInitializeMenuBindings_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 63 */
-EXTERN void		TkpInitializeMenuBindings _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_BindingTable bindingTable));
+EXTERN void		TkpInitializeMenuBindings(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_BindingTable bindingTable);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpMakeContainer_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpMakeContainer_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 64 */
-EXTERN void		TkpMakeContainer _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN void		TkpMakeContainer(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpMakeMenuWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpMakeMenuWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 65 */
-EXTERN void		TkpMakeMenuWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int transient));
+EXTERN void		TkpMakeMenuWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int transient);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpMakeWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpMakeWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 66 */
-EXTERN Window		TkpMakeWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				Window parent));
+EXTERN Window		TkpMakeWindow(TkWindow *winPtr, Window parent);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 67 */
-EXTERN void		TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp, char *menuName));
+EXTERN void		TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				char *menuName);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpOpenDisplay_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpOpenDisplay_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 68 */
-EXTERN TkDisplay *	TkpOpenDisplay _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *display_name));
+EXTERN TkDisplay *	TkpOpenDisplay(CONST char *display_name);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkPointerEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkPointerEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 69 */
-EXTERN int		TkPointerEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *eventPtr,
-				TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN int		TkPointerEvent(XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkPolygonToArea_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkPolygonToArea_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 70 */
-EXTERN int		TkPolygonToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((double *polyPtr,
-				int numPoints, double *rectPtr));
+EXTERN int		TkPolygonToArea(double *polyPtr, int numPoints,
+				double *rectPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkPolygonToPoint_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkPolygonToPoint_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 71 */
-EXTERN double		TkPolygonToPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((double *polyPtr,
-				int numPoints, double *pointPtr));
+EXTERN double		TkPolygonToPoint(double *polyPtr, int numPoints,
+				double *pointPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkPositionInTree_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkPositionInTree_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 72 */
-EXTERN int		TkPositionInTree _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				TkWindow *treePtr));
+EXTERN int		TkPositionInTree(TkWindow *winPtr, TkWindow *treePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpRedirectKeyEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpRedirectKeyEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 73 */
-EXTERN void		TkpRedirectKeyEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				XEvent *eventPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkpRedirectKeyEvent(TkWindow *winPtr,
+				XEvent *eventPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpSetMainMenubar_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpSetMainMenubar_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 74 */
-EXTERN void		TkpSetMainMenubar _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, char *menuName));
+EXTERN void		TkpSetMainMenubar(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, char *menuName);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpUseWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpUseWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 75 */
-EXTERN int		TkpUseWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *string));
+EXTERN int		TkpUseWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *string);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 76 */
-EXTERN int		TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted _ANSI_ARGS_((Window win,
-				TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+EXTERN int		TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted(Window win,
+				TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkQueueEventForAllChildren_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkQueueEventForAllChildren_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 77 */
-EXTERN void		TkQueueEventForAllChildren _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkQueueEventForAllChildren(TkWindow *winPtr,
+				XEvent *eventPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkReadBitmapFile_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkReadBitmapFile_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 78 */
-EXTERN int		TkReadBitmapFile _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Drawable d, CONST char *filename,
+EXTERN int		TkReadBitmapFile(Display *display, Drawable d,
+				CONST char *filename,
 				unsigned int *width_return,
 				unsigned int *height_return,
 				Pixmap *bitmap_return, int *x_hot_return,
-				int *y_hot_return));
+				int *y_hot_return);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkScrollWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkScrollWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 79 */
-EXTERN int		TkScrollWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc,
-				int x, int y, int width, int height, int dx,
-				int dy, TkRegion damageRgn));
+EXTERN int		TkScrollWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int x, int y,
+				int width, int height, int dx, int dy,
+				TkRegion damageRgn);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSelDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSelDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 80 */
-EXTERN void		TkSelDeadWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkSelDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSelEventProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSelEventProc_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 81 */
-EXTERN void		TkSelEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				XEvent *eventPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkSelEventProc(Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSelInit_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSelInit_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 82 */
-EXTERN void		TkSelInit _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN void		TkSelInit(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSelPropProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSelPropProc_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 83 */
-EXTERN void		TkSelPropProc _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *eventPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkSelPropProc(XEvent *eventPtr);
+#endif
 /* Slot 84 is reserved */
+#ifndef TkSetWindowMenuBar_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSetWindowMenuBar_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 85 */
-EXTERN void		TkSetWindowMenuBar _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN void		TkSetWindowMenuBar(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_Window tkwin, char *oldMenuName,
-				char *menuName));
+				char *menuName);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkStringToKeysym_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkStringToKeysym_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 86 */
-EXTERN KeySym		TkStringToKeysym _ANSI_ARGS_((char *name));
+EXTERN KeySym		TkStringToKeysym(char *name);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkThickPolyLineToArea_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkThickPolyLineToArea_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 87 */
-EXTERN int		TkThickPolyLineToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((double *coordPtr,
+EXTERN int		TkThickPolyLineToArea(double *coordPtr,
 				int numPoints, double width, int capStyle,
-				int joinStyle, double *rectPtr));
+				int joinStyle, double *rectPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWmAddToColormapWindows_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWmAddToColormapWindows_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 88 */
-EXTERN void		TkWmAddToColormapWindows _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkWmAddToColormapWindows(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWmDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWmDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 89 */
-EXTERN void		TkWmDeadWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkWmDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWmFocusToplevel_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWmFocusToplevel_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 90 */
-EXTERN TkWindow *	TkWmFocusToplevel _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN TkWindow *	TkWmFocusToplevel(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWmMapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWmMapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 91 */
-EXTERN void		TkWmMapWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkWmMapWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWmNewWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWmNewWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 92 */
-EXTERN void		TkWmNewWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkWmNewWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWmProtocolEventProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWmProtocolEventProc_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 93 */
-EXTERN void		TkWmProtocolEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				XEvent *evenvPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkWmProtocolEventProc(TkWindow *winPtr,
+				XEvent *evenvPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 94 */
-EXTERN void		TkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWmRestackToplevel_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWmRestackToplevel_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 95 */
-EXTERN void		TkWmRestackToplevel _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				int aboveBelow, TkWindow *otherPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkWmRestackToplevel(TkWindow *winPtr, int aboveBelow,
+				TkWindow *otherPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWmSetClass_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWmSetClass_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 96 */
-EXTERN void		TkWmSetClass _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkWmSetClass(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWmUnmapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWmUnmapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 97 */
-EXTERN void		TkWmUnmapWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkWmUnmapWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkDebugBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkDebugBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 98 */
-EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkDebugBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				char *name));
+EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkDebugBitmap(Tk_Window tkwin, char *name);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkDebugBorder_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkDebugBorder_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 99 */
-EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkDebugBorder _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				char *name));
+EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkDebugBorder(Tk_Window tkwin, char *name);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkDebugCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkDebugCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 100 */
-EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkDebugCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				char *name));
+EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkDebugCursor(Tk_Window tkwin, char *name);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkDebugColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkDebugColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 101 */
-EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkDebugColor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				char *name));
+EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkDebugColor(Tk_Window tkwin, char *name);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkDebugConfig_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkDebugConfig_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 102 */
-EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkDebugConfig _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_OptionTable table));
+EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkDebugConfig(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_OptionTable table);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkDebugFont_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkDebugFont_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 103 */
-EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkDebugFont _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, char *name));
+EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkDebugFont(Tk_Window tkwin, char *name);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkFindStateNumObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkFindStateNumObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 104 */
-EXTERN int		TkFindStateNumObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN int		TkFindStateNumObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, CONST TkStateMap *mapPtr,
-				Tcl_Obj *keyPtr));
+				Tcl_Obj *keyPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetBitmapPredefTable_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetBitmapPredefTable_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 105 */
-EXTERN Tcl_HashTable *	TkGetBitmapPredefTable _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN Tcl_HashTable *	TkGetBitmapPredefTable(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetDisplayList_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetDisplayList_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 106 */
-EXTERN TkDisplay *	TkGetDisplayList _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN TkDisplay *	TkGetDisplayList(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetMainInfoList_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetMainInfoList_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 107 */
-EXTERN TkMainInfo *	TkGetMainInfoList _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN TkMainInfo *	TkGetMainInfoList(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetWindowFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetWindowFromObj_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 108 */
-EXTERN int		TkGetWindowFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+EXTERN int		TkGetWindowFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 				Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
-				Tk_Window *windowPtr));
+				Tk_Window *windowPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpGetString_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpGetString_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 109 */
-EXTERN char *		TkpGetString _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_DString *dsPtr));
+EXTERN char *		TkpGetString(TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr,
+				Tcl_DString *dsPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpGetSubFonts_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpGetSubFonts_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 110 */
-EXTERN void		TkpGetSubFonts _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				Tk_Font tkfont));
+EXTERN void		TkpGetSubFonts(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Font tkfont);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpGetSystemDefault_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpGetSystemDefault_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 111 */
-EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkpGetSystemDefault _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				CONST char *dbName, CONST char *className));
+EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkpGetSystemDefault(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *dbName, CONST char *className);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpMenuThreadInit_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpMenuThreadInit_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 112 */
-EXTERN void		TkpMenuThreadInit _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		TkpMenuThreadInit(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkClipBox_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkClipBox_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 113 */
-EXTERN void		TkClipBox _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion rgn,
-				XRectangle *rect_return));
+EXTERN void		TkClipBox(TkRegion rgn, XRectangle *rect_return);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkCreateRegion_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkCreateRegion_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 114 */
-EXTERN TkRegion		TkCreateRegion _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN TkRegion		TkCreateRegion(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkDestroyRegion_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkDestroyRegion_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 115 */
-EXTERN void		TkDestroyRegion _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion rgn));
+EXTERN void		TkDestroyRegion(TkRegion rgn);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkIntersectRegion_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkIntersectRegion_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 116 */
-EXTERN void		TkIntersectRegion _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion sra,
-				TkRegion srcb, TkRegion dr_return));
+EXTERN void		TkIntersectRegion(TkRegion sra, TkRegion srcb,
+				TkRegion dr_return);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkRectInRegion_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkRectInRegion_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 117 */
-EXTERN int		TkRectInRegion _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion rgn, int x,
-				int y, unsigned int width,
-				unsigned int height));
+EXTERN int		TkRectInRegion(TkRegion rgn, int x, int y,
+				unsigned int width, unsigned int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSetRegion_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSetRegion_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 118 */
-EXTERN void		TkSetRegion _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				TkRegion rgn));
+EXTERN void		TkSetRegion(Display *display, GC gc, TkRegion rgn);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkUnionRectWithRegion_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkUnionRectWithRegion_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 119 */
-EXTERN void		TkUnionRectWithRegion _ANSI_ARGS_((XRectangle *rect,
-				TkRegion src, TkRegion dr_return));
+EXTERN void		TkUnionRectWithRegion(XRectangle *rect, TkRegion src,
+				TkRegion dr_return);
+#endif
 /* Slot 120 is reserved */
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
+#ifndef TkpCreateNativeBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpCreateNativeBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 121 */
-EXTERN Pixmap		TkpCreateNativeBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				CONST char *source));
+EXTERN Pixmap		TkpCreateNativeBitmap(Display *display,
+				CONST char *source);
+#endif
 #endif /* AQUA */
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
+#ifndef TkpDefineNativeBitmaps_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpDefineNativeBitmaps_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 122 */
-EXTERN void		TkpDefineNativeBitmaps _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		TkpDefineNativeBitmaps(void);
+#endif
 #endif /* AQUA */
 /* Slot 123 is reserved */
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
+#ifndef TkpGetNativeAppBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpGetNativeAppBitmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 124 */
-EXTERN Pixmap		TkpGetNativeAppBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				CONST char *name, int *width, int *height));
+EXTERN Pixmap		TkpGetNativeAppBitmap(Display *display,
+				CONST char *name, int *width, int *height);
+#endif
 #endif /* AQUA */
 /* Slot 125 is reserved */
 /* Slot 126 is reserved */
@@ -408,177 +739,354 @@ EXTERN Pixmap		TkpGetNativeAppBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
 /* Slot 132 is reserved */
 /* Slot 133 is reserved */
 /* Slot 134 is reserved */
+#ifndef TkpDrawHighlightBorder_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpDrawHighlightBorder_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 135 */
-EXTERN void		TkpDrawHighlightBorder _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				GC fgGC, GC bgGC, int highlightWidth,
-				Drawable drawable));
+EXTERN void		TkpDrawHighlightBorder(Tk_Window tkwin, GC fgGC,
+				GC bgGC, int highlightWidth,
+				Drawable drawable);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSetFocusWin_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSetFocusWin_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 136 */
-EXTERN void		TkSetFocusWin _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				int force));
+EXTERN void		TkSetFocusWin(TkWindow *winPtr, int force);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpSetKeycodeAndState_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpSetKeycodeAndState_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 137 */
-EXTERN void		TkpSetKeycodeAndState _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				KeySym keySym, XEvent *eventPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkpSetKeycodeAndState(Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym,
+				XEvent *eventPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpGetKeySym_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpGetKeySym_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 138 */
-EXTERN KeySym		TkpGetKeySym _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr,
-				XEvent *eventPtr));
+EXTERN KeySym		TkpGetKeySym(TkDisplay *dispPtr, XEvent *eventPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpInitKeymapInfo_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpInitKeymapInfo_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 139 */
-EXTERN void		TkpInitKeymapInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkpInitKeymapInfo(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkPhotoGetValidRegion_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkPhotoGetValidRegion_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 140 */
-EXTERN TkRegion		TkPhotoGetValidRegion _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_PhotoHandle handle));
+EXTERN TkRegion		TkPhotoGetValidRegion(Tk_PhotoHandle handle);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWmStackorderToplevel_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWmStackorderToplevel_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 141 */
-EXTERN TkWindow **	TkWmStackorderToplevel _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				TkWindow *parentPtr));
+EXTERN TkWindow **	TkWmStackorderToplevel(TkWindow *parentPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkFocusFree_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkFocusFree_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 142 */
-EXTERN void		TkFocusFree _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkFocusFree(TkMainInfo *mainPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkClipCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkClipCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 143 */
-EXTERN void		TkClipCleanup _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkClipCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGCCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGCCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 144 */
-EXTERN void		TkGCCleanup _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkGCCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSubtractRegion_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSubtractRegion_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 145 */
-EXTERN void		TkSubtractRegion _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion sra,
-				TkRegion srcb, TkRegion dr_return));
+EXTERN void		TkSubtractRegion(TkRegion sra, TkRegion srcb,
+				TkRegion dr_return);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkStylePkgInit_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkStylePkgInit_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 146 */
-EXTERN void		TkStylePkgInit _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkStylePkgInit(TkMainInfo *mainPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkStylePkgFree_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkStylePkgFree_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 147 */
-EXTERN void		TkStylePkgFree _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkStylePkgFree(TkMainInfo *mainPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkToplevelWindowForCommand_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkToplevelWindowForCommand_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 148 */
-EXTERN Tk_Window	TkToplevelWindowForCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *cmdName));
+EXTERN Tk_Window	TkToplevelWindowForCommand(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				CONST char *cmdName);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGetOptionSpec_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetOptionSpec_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 149 */
-EXTERN CONST Tk_OptionSpec * TkGetOptionSpec _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *name,
-				Tk_OptionTable optionTable));
-/* Slot 150 is reserved */
-/* Slot 151 is reserved */
+EXTERN CONST Tk_OptionSpec * TkGetOptionSpec(CONST char *name,
+				Tk_OptionTable optionTable);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMakeRawCurve_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMakeRawCurve_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 150 */
+EXTERN int		TkMakeRawCurve(Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr,
+				int numPoints, int numSteps,
+				XPoint xPoints[], double dblPoints[]);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMakeRawCurvePostscript_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMakeRawCurvePostscript_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 151 */
+EXTERN void		TkMakeRawCurvePostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr,
+				int numPoints);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpDrawFrame_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpDrawFrame_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 152 */
-EXTERN void		TkpDrawFrame _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tk_3DBorder border, int highlightWidth,
-				int borderWidth, int relief));
+EXTERN void		TkpDrawFrame(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border,
+				int highlightWidth, int borderWidth,
+				int relief);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkCreateThreadExitHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkCreateThreadExitHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 153 */
+EXTERN void		TkCreateThreadExitHandler(Tcl_ExitProc *proc,
+				ClientData clientData);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkDeleteThreadExitHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkDeleteThreadExitHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 154 */
+EXTERN void		TkDeleteThreadExitHandler(Tcl_ExitProc *proc,
+				ClientData clientData);
+#endif
+/* Slot 155 is reserved */
+#ifndef TkpTestembedCmd_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpTestembedCmd_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 156 */
+EXTERN int		TkpTestembedCmd(ClientData clientData,
+				Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc,
+				CONST char **argv);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpTesttextCmd_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpTesttextCmd_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 157 */
+EXTERN int		TkpTesttextCmd(ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				int argc, CONST char **argv);
+#endif
+/* Slot 158 is reserved */
+/* Slot 159 is reserved */
+/* Slot 160 is reserved */
+/* Slot 161 is reserved */
+/* Slot 162 is reserved */
+/* Slot 163 is reserved */
+/* Slot 164 is reserved */
+/* Slot 165 is reserved */
+/* Slot 166 is reserved */
+/* Slot 167 is reserved */
+/* Slot 168 is reserved */
+#ifndef TkStateParseProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkStateParseProc_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 169 */
+EXTERN int		TkStateParseProc(ClientData clientData,
+				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkStatePrintProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkStatePrintProc_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 170 */
+EXTERN char *		TkStatePrintProc(ClientData clientData,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset,
+				Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkCanvasDashParseProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkCanvasDashParseProc_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 171 */
+EXTERN int		TkCanvasDashParseProc(ClientData clientData,
+				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkCanvasDashPrintProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkCanvasDashPrintProc_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 172 */
+EXTERN char *		TkCanvasDashPrintProc(ClientData clientData,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset,
+				Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkOffsetParseProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkOffsetParseProc_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 173 */
+EXTERN int		TkOffsetParseProc(ClientData clientData,
+				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkOffsetPrintProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkOffsetPrintProc_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 174 */
+EXTERN char *		TkOffsetPrintProc(ClientData clientData,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset,
+				Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkPixelParseProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkPixelParseProc_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 175 */
+EXTERN int		TkPixelParseProc(ClientData clientData,
+				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkPixelPrintProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkPixelPrintProc_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 176 */
+EXTERN char *		TkPixelPrintProc(ClientData clientData,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset,
+				Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkOrientParseProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkOrientParseProc_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 177 */
+EXTERN int		TkOrientParseProc(ClientData clientData,
+				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkOrientPrintProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkOrientPrintProc_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 178 */
+EXTERN char *		TkOrientPrintProc(ClientData clientData,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset,
+				Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSmoothParseProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSmoothParseProc_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 179 */
+EXTERN int		TkSmoothParseProc(ClientData clientData,
+				Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSmoothPrintProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSmoothPrintProc_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 180 */
+EXTERN char *		TkSmoothPrintProc(ClientData clientData,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset,
+				Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr);
+#endif
 
 typedef struct TkIntStubs {
     int magic;
     struct TkIntStubHooks *hooks;
 
-    TkWindow * (*tkAllocWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr, int screenNum, TkWindow *parentPtr)); /* 0 */
-    void (*tkBezierPoints) _ANSI_ARGS_((double control[], int numSteps, double *coordPtr)); /* 1 */
-    void (*tkBezierScreenPoints) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, double control[], int numSteps, XPoint *xPointPtr)); /* 2 */
-    void (*tkBindDeadWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 3 */
-    void (*tkBindEventProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr)); /* 4 */
-    void (*tkBindFree) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr)); /* 5 */
-    void (*tkBindInit) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr)); /* 6 */
-    void (*tkChangeEventWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 7 */
-    int (*tkClipInit) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, TkDisplay *dispPtr)); /* 8 */
-    void (*tkComputeAnchor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Anchor anchor, Tk_Window tkwin, int padX, int padY, int innerWidth, int innerHeight, int *xPtr, int *yPtr)); /* 9 */
-    int (*tkCopyAndGlobalEval) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, char *script)); /* 10 */
-    unsigned long (*tkCreateBindingProcedure) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, CONST char *eventString, TkBindEvalProc *evalProc, TkBindFreeProc *freeProc, ClientData clientData)); /* 11 */
-    TkCursor * (*tkCreateCursorFromData) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *source, CONST char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, XColor fg, XColor bg)); /* 12 */
-    int (*tkCreateFrame) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, char **argv, int toplevel, char *appName)); /* 13 */
-    Tk_Window (*tkCreateMainWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *screenName, char *baseName)); /* 14 */
-    Time (*tkCurrentTime) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr)); /* 15 */
-    void (*tkDeleteAllImages) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr)); /* 16 */
-    void (*tkDoConfigureNotify) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 17 */
-    void (*tkDrawInsetFocusHighlight) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int width, Drawable drawable, int padding)); /* 18 */
-    void (*tkEventDeadWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 19 */
-    void (*tkFillPolygon) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr, int numPoints, Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, GC outlineGC)); /* 20 */
-    int (*tkFindStateNum) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *option, CONST TkStateMap *mapPtr, CONST char *strKey)); /* 21 */
-    char * (*tkFindStateString) _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST TkStateMap *mapPtr, int numKey)); /* 22 */
-    void (*tkFocusDeadWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 23 */
-    int (*tkFocusFilterEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr)); /* 24 */
-    TkWindow * (*tkFocusKeyEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr)); /* 25 */
-    void (*tkFontPkgInit) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr)); /* 26 */
-    void (*tkFontPkgFree) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr)); /* 27 */
-    void (*tkFreeBindingTags) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 28 */
-    void (*tkpFreeCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkCursor *cursorPtr)); /* 29 */
-    char * (*tkGetBitmapData) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, char *string, char *fileName, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, int *hotXPtr, int *hotYPtr)); /* 30 */
-    void (*tkGetButtPoints) _ANSI_ARGS_((double p1[], double p2[], double width, int project, double m1[], double m2[])); /* 31 */
-    TkCursor * (*tkGetCursorByName) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid string)); /* 32 */
-    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tkGetDefaultScreenName) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *screenName)); /* 33 */
-    TkDisplay * (*tkGetDisplay) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display)); /* 34 */
-    int (*tkGetDisplayOf) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], Tk_Window *tkwinPtr)); /* 35 */
-    TkWindow * (*tkGetFocusWin) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 36 */
-    int (*tkGetInterpNames) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 37 */
-    int (*tkGetMiterPoints) _ANSI_ARGS_((double p1[], double p2[], double p3[], double width, double m1[], double m2[])); /* 38 */
-    void (*tkGetPointerCoords) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr)); /* 39 */
-    void (*tkGetServerInfo) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 40 */
-    void (*tkGrabDeadWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 41 */
-    int (*tkGrabState) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 42 */
-    void (*tkIncludePoint) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr)); /* 43 */
-    void (*tkInOutEvents) _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *sourcePtr, TkWindow *destPtr, int leaveType, int enterType, Tcl_QueuePosition position)); /* 44 */
-    void (*tkInstallFrameMenu) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 45 */
-    char * (*tkKeysymToString) _ANSI_ARGS_((KeySym keysym)); /* 46 */
-    int (*tkLineToArea) _ANSI_ARGS_((double end1Ptr[], double end2Ptr[], double rectPtr[])); /* 47 */
-    double (*tkLineToPoint) _ANSI_ARGS_((double end1Ptr[], double end2Ptr[], double pointPtr[])); /* 48 */
-    int (*tkMakeBezierCurve) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr, int numPoints, int numSteps, XPoint xPoints[], double dblPoints[])); /* 49 */
-    void (*tkMakeBezierPostscript) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr, int numPoints)); /* 50 */
-    void (*tkOptionClassChanged) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 51 */
-    void (*tkOptionDeadWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 52 */
-    int (*tkOvalToArea) _ANSI_ARGS_((double *ovalPtr, double *rectPtr)); /* 53 */
-    double (*tkOvalToPoint) _ANSI_ARGS_((double ovalPtr[], double width, int filled, double pointPtr[])); /* 54 */
-    int (*tkpChangeFocus) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int force)); /* 55 */
-    void (*tkpCloseDisplay) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr)); /* 56 */
-    void (*tkpClaimFocus) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *topLevelPtr, int force)); /* 57 */
-    void (*tkpDisplayWarning) _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *msg, CONST char *title)); /* 58 */
-    void (*tkpGetAppName) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_DString *name)); /* 59 */
-    TkWindow * (*tkpGetOtherWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 60 */
-    TkWindow * (*tkpGetWrapperWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 61 */
-    int (*tkpInit) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp)); /* 62 */
-    void (*tkpInitializeMenuBindings) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable)); /* 63 */
-    void (*tkpMakeContainer) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 64 */
-    void (*tkpMakeMenuWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int transient)); /* 65 */
-    Window (*tkpMakeWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, Window parent)); /* 66 */
-    void (*tkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, char *menuName)); /* 67 */
-    TkDisplay * (*tkpOpenDisplay) _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *display_name)); /* 68 */
-    int (*tkPointerEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 69 */
-    int (*tkPolygonToArea) _ANSI_ARGS_((double *polyPtr, int numPoints, double *rectPtr)); /* 70 */
-    double (*tkPolygonToPoint) _ANSI_ARGS_((double *polyPtr, int numPoints, double *pointPtr)); /* 71 */
-    int (*tkPositionInTree) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, TkWindow *treePtr)); /* 72 */
-    void (*tkpRedirectKeyEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr)); /* 73 */
-    void (*tkpSetMainMenubar) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, char *menuName)); /* 74 */
-    int (*tkpUseWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *string)); /* 75 */
-    int (*tkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted) _ANSI_ARGS_((Window win, TkDisplay *dispPtr)); /* 76 */
-    void (*tkQueueEventForAllChildren) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr)); /* 77 */
-    int (*tkReadBitmapFile) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d, CONST char *filename, unsigned int *width_return, unsigned int *height_return, Pixmap *bitmap_return, int *x_hot_return, int *y_hot_return)); /* 78 */
-    int (*tkScrollWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int x, int y, int width, int height, int dx, int dy, TkRegion damageRgn)); /* 79 */
-    void (*tkSelDeadWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 80 */
-    void (*tkSelEventProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr)); /* 81 */
-    void (*tkSelInit) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 82 */
-    void (*tkSelPropProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *eventPtr)); /* 83 */
+    TkWindow * (*tkAllocWindow) (TkDisplay *dispPtr, int screenNum, TkWindow *parentPtr); /* 0 */
+    void (*tkBezierPoints) (double control[], int numSteps, double *coordPtr); /* 1 */
+    void (*tkBezierScreenPoints) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double control[], int numSteps, XPoint *xPointPtr); /* 2 */
+    void (*tkBindDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 3 */
+    void (*tkBindEventProc) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 4 */
+    void (*tkBindFree) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 5 */
+    void (*tkBindInit) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 6 */
+    void (*tkChangeEventWindow) (XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *winPtr); /* 7 */
+    int (*tkClipInit) (Tcl_Interp *interp, TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 8 */
+    void (*tkComputeAnchor) (Tk_Anchor anchor, Tk_Window tkwin, int padX, int padY, int innerWidth, int innerHeight, int *xPtr, int *yPtr); /* 9 */
+    int (*tkCopyAndGlobalEval) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *script); /* 10 */
+    unsigned long (*tkCreateBindingProcedure) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, CONST char *eventString, TkBindEvalProc *evalProc, TkBindFreeProc *freeProc, ClientData clientData); /* 11 */
+    TkCursor * (*tkCreateCursorFromData) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *source, CONST char *mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, XColor fg, XColor bg); /* 12 */
+    int (*tkCreateFrame) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, char **argv, int toplevel, char *appName); /* 13 */
+    Tk_Window (*tkCreateMainWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *screenName, char *baseName); /* 14 */
+    Time (*tkCurrentTime) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 15 */
+    void (*tkDeleteAllImages) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 16 */
+    void (*tkDoConfigureNotify) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 17 */
+    void (*tkDrawInsetFocusHighlight) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int width, Drawable drawable, int padding); /* 18 */
+    void (*tkEventDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 19 */
+    void (*tkFillPolygon) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr, int numPoints, Display *display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, GC outlineGC); /* 20 */
+    int (*tkFindStateNum) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *option, CONST TkStateMap *mapPtr, CONST char *strKey); /* 21 */
+    char * (*tkFindStateString) (CONST TkStateMap *mapPtr, int numKey); /* 22 */
+    void (*tkFocusDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 23 */
+    int (*tkFocusFilterEvent) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 24 */
+    TkWindow * (*tkFocusKeyEvent) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 25 */
+    void (*tkFontPkgInit) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 26 */
+    void (*tkFontPkgFree) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 27 */
+    void (*tkFreeBindingTags) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 28 */
+    void (*tkpFreeCursor) (TkCursor *cursorPtr); /* 29 */
+    char * (*tkGetBitmapData) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *string, char *fileName, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, int *hotXPtr, int *hotYPtr); /* 30 */
+    void (*tkGetButtPoints) (double p1[], double p2[], double width, int project, double m1[], double m2[]); /* 31 */
+    TkCursor * (*tkGetCursorByName) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid string); /* 32 */
+    CONST84_RETURN char * (*tkGetDefaultScreenName) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *screenName); /* 33 */
+    TkDisplay * (*tkGetDisplay) (Display *display); /* 34 */
+    int (*tkGetDisplayOf) (Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], Tk_Window *tkwinPtr); /* 35 */
+    TkWindow * (*tkGetFocusWin) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 36 */
+    int (*tkGetInterpNames) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 37 */
+    int (*tkGetMiterPoints) (double p1[], double p2[], double p3[], double width, double m1[], double m2[]); /* 38 */
+    void (*tkGetPointerCoords) (Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr); /* 39 */
+    void (*tkGetServerInfo) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 40 */
+    void (*tkGrabDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 41 */
+    int (*tkGrabState) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 42 */
+    void (*tkIncludePoint) (Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr); /* 43 */
+    void (*tkInOutEvents) (XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *sourcePtr, TkWindow *destPtr, int leaveType, int enterType, Tcl_QueuePosition position); /* 44 */
+    void (*tkInstallFrameMenu) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 45 */
+    char * (*tkKeysymToString) (KeySym keysym); /* 46 */
+    int (*tkLineToArea) (double end1Ptr[], double end2Ptr[], double rectPtr[]); /* 47 */
+    double (*tkLineToPoint) (double end1Ptr[], double end2Ptr[], double pointPtr[]); /* 48 */
+    int (*tkMakeBezierCurve) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr, int numPoints, int numSteps, XPoint xPoints[], double dblPoints[]); /* 49 */
+    void (*tkMakeBezierPostscript) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr, int numPoints); /* 50 */
+    void (*tkOptionClassChanged) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 51 */
+    void (*tkOptionDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 52 */
+    int (*tkOvalToArea) (double *ovalPtr, double *rectPtr); /* 53 */
+    double (*tkOvalToPoint) (double ovalPtr[], double width, int filled, double pointPtr[]); /* 54 */
+    int (*tkpChangeFocus) (TkWindow *winPtr, int force); /* 55 */
+    void (*tkpCloseDisplay) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 56 */
+    void (*tkpClaimFocus) (TkWindow *topLevelPtr, int force); /* 57 */
+    void (*tkpDisplayWarning) (CONST char *msg, CONST char *title); /* 58 */
+    void (*tkpGetAppName) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_DString *name); /* 59 */
+    TkWindow * (*tkpGetOtherWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 60 */
+    TkWindow * (*tkpGetWrapperWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 61 */
+    int (*tkpInit) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 62 */
+    void (*tkpInitializeMenuBindings) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable); /* 63 */
+    void (*tkpMakeContainer) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 64 */
+    void (*tkpMakeMenuWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int transient); /* 65 */
+    Window (*tkpMakeWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr, Window parent); /* 66 */
+    void (*tkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *menuName); /* 67 */
+    TkDisplay * (*tkpOpenDisplay) (CONST char *display_name); /* 68 */
+    int (*tkPointerEvent) (XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *winPtr); /* 69 */
+    int (*tkPolygonToArea) (double *polyPtr, int numPoints, double *rectPtr); /* 70 */
+    double (*tkPolygonToPoint) (double *polyPtr, int numPoints, double *pointPtr); /* 71 */
+    int (*tkPositionInTree) (TkWindow *winPtr, TkWindow *treePtr); /* 72 */
+    void (*tkpRedirectKeyEvent) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 73 */
+    void (*tkpSetMainMenubar) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, char *menuName); /* 74 */
+    int (*tkpUseWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *string); /* 75 */
+    int (*tkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted) (Window win, TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 76 */
+    void (*tkQueueEventForAllChildren) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 77 */
+    int (*tkReadBitmapFile) (Display *display, Drawable d, CONST char *filename, unsigned int *width_return, unsigned int *height_return, Pixmap *bitmap_return, int *x_hot_return, int *y_hot_return); /* 78 */
+    int (*tkScrollWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int x, int y, int width, int height, int dx, int dy, TkRegion damageRgn); /* 79 */
+    void (*tkSelDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 80 */
+    void (*tkSelEventProc) (Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 81 */
+    void (*tkSelInit) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 82 */
+    void (*tkSelPropProc) (XEvent *eventPtr); /* 83 */
     VOID *reserved84;
-    void (*tkSetWindowMenuBar) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, char *oldMenuName, char *menuName)); /* 85 */
-    KeySym (*tkStringToKeysym) _ANSI_ARGS_((char *name)); /* 86 */
-    int (*tkThickPolyLineToArea) _ANSI_ARGS_((double *coordPtr, int numPoints, double width, int capStyle, int joinStyle, double *rectPtr)); /* 87 */
-    void (*tkWmAddToColormapWindows) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 88 */
-    void (*tkWmDeadWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 89 */
-    TkWindow * (*tkWmFocusToplevel) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 90 */
-    void (*tkWmMapWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 91 */
-    void (*tkWmNewWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 92 */
-    void (*tkWmProtocolEventProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *evenvPtr)); /* 93 */
-    void (*tkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 94 */
-    void (*tkWmRestackToplevel) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int aboveBelow, TkWindow *otherPtr)); /* 95 */
-    void (*tkWmSetClass) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 96 */
-    void (*tkWmUnmapWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 97 */
-    Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugBitmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, char *name)); /* 98 */
-    Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugBorder) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, char *name)); /* 99 */
-    Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, char *name)); /* 100 */
-    Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, char *name)); /* 101 */
-    Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugConfig) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_OptionTable table)); /* 102 */
-    Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugFont) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, char *name)); /* 103 */
-    int (*tkFindStateNumObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, CONST TkStateMap *mapPtr, Tcl_Obj *keyPtr)); /* 104 */
-    Tcl_HashTable * (*tkGetBitmapPredefTable) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 105 */
-    TkDisplay * (*tkGetDisplayList) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 106 */
-    TkMainInfo * (*tkGetMainInfoList) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 107 */
-    int (*tkGetWindowFromObj) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *windowPtr)); /* 108 */
-    char * (*tkpGetString) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_DString *dsPtr)); /* 109 */
-    void (*tkpGetSubFonts) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Font tkfont)); /* 110 */
-    Tcl_Obj * (*tkpGetSystemDefault) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *dbName, CONST char *className)); /* 111 */
-    void (*tkpMenuThreadInit) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 112 */
-    void (*tkClipBox) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion rgn, XRectangle *rect_return)); /* 113 */
-    TkRegion (*tkCreateRegion) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 114 */
-    void (*tkDestroyRegion) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion rgn)); /* 115 */
-    void (*tkIntersectRegion) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion sra, TkRegion srcb, TkRegion dr_return)); /* 116 */
-    int (*tkRectInRegion) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion rgn, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height)); /* 117 */
-    void (*tkSetRegion) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, TkRegion rgn)); /* 118 */
-    void (*tkUnionRectWithRegion) _ANSI_ARGS_((XRectangle *rect, TkRegion src, TkRegion dr_return)); /* 119 */
+    void (*tkSetWindowMenuBar) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, char *oldMenuName, char *menuName); /* 85 */
+    KeySym (*tkStringToKeysym) (char *name); /* 86 */
+    int (*tkThickPolyLineToArea) (double *coordPtr, int numPoints, double width, int capStyle, int joinStyle, double *rectPtr); /* 87 */
+    void (*tkWmAddToColormapWindows) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 88 */
+    void (*tkWmDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 89 */
+    TkWindow * (*tkWmFocusToplevel) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 90 */
+    void (*tkWmMapWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 91 */
+    void (*tkWmNewWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 92 */
+    void (*tkWmProtocolEventProc) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *evenvPtr); /* 93 */
+    void (*tkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 94 */
+    void (*tkWmRestackToplevel) (TkWindow *winPtr, int aboveBelow, TkWindow *otherPtr); /* 95 */
+    void (*tkWmSetClass) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 96 */
+    void (*tkWmUnmapWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 97 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugBitmap) (Tk_Window tkwin, char *name); /* 98 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugBorder) (Tk_Window tkwin, char *name); /* 99 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugCursor) (Tk_Window tkwin, char *name); /* 100 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugColor) (Tk_Window tkwin, char *name); /* 101 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugConfig) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_OptionTable table); /* 102 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*tkDebugFont) (Tk_Window tkwin, char *name); /* 103 */
+    int (*tkFindStateNumObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, CONST TkStateMap *mapPtr, Tcl_Obj *keyPtr); /* 104 */
+    Tcl_HashTable * (*tkGetBitmapPredefTable) (void); /* 105 */
+    TkDisplay * (*tkGetDisplayList) (void); /* 106 */
+    TkMainInfo * (*tkGetMainInfoList) (void); /* 107 */
+    int (*tkGetWindowFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *windowPtr); /* 108 */
+    char * (*tkpGetString) (TkWindow *winPtr, XEvent *eventPtr, Tcl_DString *dsPtr); /* 109 */
+    void (*tkpGetSubFonts) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Font tkfont); /* 110 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*tkpGetSystemDefault) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *dbName, CONST char *className); /* 111 */
+    void (*tkpMenuThreadInit) (void); /* 112 */
+    void (*tkClipBox) (TkRegion rgn, XRectangle *rect_return); /* 113 */
+    TkRegion (*tkCreateRegion) (void); /* 114 */
+    void (*tkDestroyRegion) (TkRegion rgn); /* 115 */
+    void (*tkIntersectRegion) (TkRegion sra, TkRegion srcb, TkRegion dr_return); /* 116 */
+    int (*tkRectInRegion) (TkRegion rgn, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 117 */
+    void (*tkSetRegion) (Display *display, GC gc, TkRegion rgn); /* 118 */
+    void (*tkUnionRectWithRegion) (XRectangle *rect, TkRegion src, TkRegion dr_return); /* 119 */
     VOID *reserved120;
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */
     VOID *reserved121;
@@ -588,7 +1096,7 @@ typedef struct TkIntStubs {
 #endif /* WIN */
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
     VOID *reserved121; /* Dummy entry for stubs table backwards compatibility */
-    Pixmap (*tkpCreateNativeBitmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, CONST char *source)); /* 121 */
+    Pixmap (*tkpCreateNativeBitmap) (Display *display, CONST char *source); /* 121 */
 #endif /* AQUA */
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */
     VOID *reserved122;
@@ -598,7 +1106,7 @@ typedef struct TkIntStubs {
 #endif /* WIN */
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
     VOID *reserved122; /* Dummy entry for stubs table backwards compatibility */
-    void (*tkpDefineNativeBitmaps) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 122 */
+    void (*tkpDefineNativeBitmaps) (void); /* 122 */
 #endif /* AQUA */
     VOID *reserved123;
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */
@@ -609,7 +1117,7 @@ typedef struct TkIntStubs {
 #endif /* WIN */
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
     VOID *reserved124; /* Dummy entry for stubs table backwards compatibility */
-    Pixmap (*tkpGetNativeAppBitmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, CONST char *name, int *width, int *height)); /* 124 */
+    Pixmap (*tkpGetNativeAppBitmap) (Display *display, CONST char *name, int *width, int *height); /* 124 */
 #endif /* AQUA */
     VOID *reserved125;
     VOID *reserved126;
@@ -621,24 +1129,52 @@ typedef struct TkIntStubs {
     VOID *reserved132;
     VOID *reserved133;
     VOID *reserved134;
-    void (*tkpDrawHighlightBorder) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, GC fgGC, GC bgGC, int highlightWidth, Drawable drawable)); /* 135 */
-    void (*tkSetFocusWin) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int force)); /* 136 */
-    void (*tkpSetKeycodeAndState) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym, XEvent *eventPtr)); /* 137 */
-    KeySym (*tkpGetKeySym) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr, XEvent *eventPtr)); /* 138 */
-    void (*tkpInitKeymapInfo) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr)); /* 139 */
-    TkRegion (*tkPhotoGetValidRegion) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_PhotoHandle handle)); /* 140 */
-    TkWindow ** (*tkWmStackorderToplevel) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *parentPtr)); /* 141 */
-    void (*tkFocusFree) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr)); /* 142 */
-    void (*tkClipCleanup) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr)); /* 143 */
-    void (*tkGCCleanup) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr)); /* 144 */
-    void (*tkSubtractRegion) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion sra, TkRegion srcb, TkRegion dr_return)); /* 145 */
-    void (*tkStylePkgInit) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr)); /* 146 */
-    void (*tkStylePkgFree) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr)); /* 147 */
-    Tk_Window (*tkToplevelWindowForCommand) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *cmdName)); /* 148 */
-    CONST Tk_OptionSpec * (*tkGetOptionSpec) _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *name, Tk_OptionTable optionTable)); /* 149 */
-    VOID *reserved150;
-    VOID *reserved151;
-    void (*tkpDrawFrame) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border, int highlightWidth, int borderWidth, int relief)); /* 152 */
+    void (*tkpDrawHighlightBorder) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC fgGC, GC bgGC, int highlightWidth, Drawable drawable); /* 135 */
+    void (*tkSetFocusWin) (TkWindow *winPtr, int force); /* 136 */
+    void (*tkpSetKeycodeAndState) (Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 137 */
+    KeySym (*tkpGetKeySym) (TkDisplay *dispPtr, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 138 */
+    void (*tkpInitKeymapInfo) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 139 */
+    TkRegion (*tkPhotoGetValidRegion) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle); /* 140 */
+    TkWindow ** (*tkWmStackorderToplevel) (TkWindow *parentPtr); /* 141 */
+    void (*tkFocusFree) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 142 */
+    void (*tkClipCleanup) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 143 */
+    void (*tkGCCleanup) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 144 */
+    void (*tkSubtractRegion) (TkRegion sra, TkRegion srcb, TkRegion dr_return); /* 145 */
+    void (*tkStylePkgInit) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 146 */
+    void (*tkStylePkgFree) (TkMainInfo *mainPtr); /* 147 */
+    Tk_Window (*tkToplevelWindowForCommand) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *cmdName); /* 148 */
+    CONST Tk_OptionSpec * (*tkGetOptionSpec) (CONST char *name, Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 149 */
+    int (*tkMakeRawCurve) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr, int numPoints, int numSteps, XPoint xPoints[], double dblPoints[]); /* 150 */
+    void (*tkMakeRawCurvePostscript) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr, int numPoints); /* 151 */
+    void (*tkpDrawFrame) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border, int highlightWidth, int borderWidth, int relief); /* 152 */
+    void (*tkCreateThreadExitHandler) (Tcl_ExitProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 153 */
+    void (*tkDeleteThreadExitHandler) (Tcl_ExitProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 154 */
+    VOID *reserved155;
+    int (*tkpTestembedCmd) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv); /* 156 */
+    int (*tkpTesttextCmd) (ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv); /* 157 */
+    VOID *reserved158;
+    VOID *reserved159;
+    VOID *reserved160;
+    VOID *reserved161;
+    VOID *reserved162;
+    VOID *reserved163;
+    VOID *reserved164;
+    VOID *reserved165;
+    VOID *reserved166;
+    VOID *reserved167;
+    VOID *reserved168;
+    int (*tkStateParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 169 */
+    char * (*tkStatePrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 170 */
+    int (*tkCanvasDashParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 171 */
+    char * (*tkCanvasDashPrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 172 */
+    int (*tkOffsetParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 173 */
+    char * (*tkOffsetPrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 174 */
+    int (*tkPixelParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 175 */
+    char * (*tkPixelPrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 176 */
+    int (*tkOrientParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 177 */
+    char * (*tkOrientPrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 178 */
+    int (*tkSmoothParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 179 */
+    char * (*tkSmoothPrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr); /* 180 */
 } TkIntStubs;
 
 #ifdef __cplusplus
@@ -1222,12 +1758,94 @@ extern TkIntStubs *tkIntStubsPtr;
 #define TkGetOptionSpec \
 	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkGetOptionSpec) /* 149 */
 #endif
-/* Slot 150 is reserved */
-/* Slot 151 is reserved */
+#ifndef TkMakeRawCurve
+#define TkMakeRawCurve \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkMakeRawCurve) /* 150 */
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMakeRawCurvePostscript
+#define TkMakeRawCurvePostscript \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkMakeRawCurvePostscript) /* 151 */
+#endif
 #ifndef TkpDrawFrame
 #define TkpDrawFrame \
 	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkpDrawFrame) /* 152 */
 #endif
+#ifndef TkCreateThreadExitHandler
+#define TkCreateThreadExitHandler \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkCreateThreadExitHandler) /* 153 */
+#endif
+#ifndef TkDeleteThreadExitHandler
+#define TkDeleteThreadExitHandler \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkDeleteThreadExitHandler) /* 154 */
+#endif
+/* Slot 155 is reserved */
+#ifndef TkpTestembedCmd
+#define TkpTestembedCmd \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkpTestembedCmd) /* 156 */
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpTesttextCmd
+#define TkpTesttextCmd \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkpTesttextCmd) /* 157 */
+#endif
+/* Slot 158 is reserved */
+/* Slot 159 is reserved */
+/* Slot 160 is reserved */
+/* Slot 161 is reserved */
+/* Slot 162 is reserved */
+/* Slot 163 is reserved */
+/* Slot 164 is reserved */
+/* Slot 165 is reserved */
+/* Slot 166 is reserved */
+/* Slot 167 is reserved */
+/* Slot 168 is reserved */
+#ifndef TkStateParseProc
+#define TkStateParseProc \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkStateParseProc) /* 169 */
+#endif
+#ifndef TkStatePrintProc
+#define TkStatePrintProc \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkStatePrintProc) /* 170 */
+#endif
+#ifndef TkCanvasDashParseProc
+#define TkCanvasDashParseProc \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkCanvasDashParseProc) /* 171 */
+#endif
+#ifndef TkCanvasDashPrintProc
+#define TkCanvasDashPrintProc \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkCanvasDashPrintProc) /* 172 */
+#endif
+#ifndef TkOffsetParseProc
+#define TkOffsetParseProc \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkOffsetParseProc) /* 173 */
+#endif
+#ifndef TkOffsetPrintProc
+#define TkOffsetPrintProc \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkOffsetPrintProc) /* 174 */
+#endif
+#ifndef TkPixelParseProc
+#define TkPixelParseProc \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkPixelParseProc) /* 175 */
+#endif
+#ifndef TkPixelPrintProc
+#define TkPixelPrintProc \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkPixelPrintProc) /* 176 */
+#endif
+#ifndef TkOrientParseProc
+#define TkOrientParseProc \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkOrientParseProc) /* 177 */
+#endif
+#ifndef TkOrientPrintProc
+#define TkOrientPrintProc \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkOrientPrintProc) /* 178 */
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSmoothParseProc
+#define TkSmoothParseProc \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkSmoothParseProc) /* 179 */
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSmoothPrintProc
+#define TkSmoothPrintProc \
+	(tkIntStubsPtr->tkSmoothPrintProc) /* 180 */
+#endif
 
 #endif /* defined(USE_TK_STUBS) && !defined(USE_TK_STUB_PROCS) */
 
@@ -1236,6 +1854,33 @@ extern TkIntStubs *tkIntStubsPtr;
 #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
 
+#if !defined(__WIN32__) && !defined(__CYGWIN__) && !defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
+
+/*
+ * These macros are just wrappers for the equivalent X Region calls.
+ */
+#   undef TkClipBox
+#   undef TkCreateRegion
+#   undef TkDestroyRegion
+#   undef TkIntersectRegion
+#   undef TkRectInRegion
+#   undef TkSetRegion
+#   undef TkSubtractRegion
+#   undef TkUnionRectWithRegion
+
+#   define TkClipBox(rgn, rect) XClipBox((Region) (rgn), (rect))
+#   define TkCreateRegion() (TkRegion) XCreateRegion()
+#   define TkDestroyRegion(rgn) XDestroyRegion((Region) (rgn))
+#   define TkIntersectRegion(a, b, r) XIntersectRegion((Region) (a), \
+(Region) (b), (Region) (r))
+#   define TkRectInRegion(r, x, y, w, h) XRectInRegion((Region) (r), (x), (y), (w), (h))
+#   define TkSetRegion(d, gc, rgn) XSetRegion((d), (gc), (Region) (rgn))
+#   define TkSubtractRegion(a, b, r) XSubtractRegion((Region) (a), \
+(Region) (b), (Region) (r))
+#   define TkUnionRectWithRegion(rect, src, ret) XUnionRectWithRegion((rect), \
+(Region) (src), (Region) (ret))
+#endif /* !__CYGWIN__*/
+
 #if defined(__CYGWIN__) && defined(USE_TK_STUBS) && !defined(USE_TK_STUB_PROCS)
 #   undef TkBindDeadWindow
 #   define TkBindDeadWindow(winPtr) /* Removed from Cygwins stub table, just do nothing */
diff --git a/generic/tkIntPlatDecls.h b/generic/tkIntPlatDecls.h
index eb05c02..a181073 100644
--- a/generic/tkIntPlatDecls.h
+++ b/generic/tkIntPlatDecls.h
@@ -31,277 +31,577 @@
  */
 
 #if defined(__WIN32__) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */
+#ifndef TkAlignImageData_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkAlignImageData_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 0 */
-EXTERN char *		TkAlignImageData _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image,
-				int alignment, int bitOrder));
+EXTERN char *		TkAlignImageData(XImage *image, int alignment,
+				int bitOrder);
+#endif
 /* Slot 1 is reserved */
+#ifndef TkGenerateActivateEvents_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGenerateActivateEvents_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 2 */
-EXTERN void		TkGenerateActivateEvents _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				TkWindow *winPtr, int active));
+EXTERN void		TkGenerateActivateEvents(TkWindow *winPtr,
+				int active);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpGetMS_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpGetMS_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 3 */
-EXTERN unsigned long	TkpGetMS _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN unsigned long	TkpGetMS(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkPointerDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkPointerDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 4 */
-EXTERN void		TkPointerDeadWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkPointerDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpPrintWindowId_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpPrintWindowId_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 5 */
-EXTERN void		TkpPrintWindowId _ANSI_ARGS_((char *buf,
-				Window window));
+EXTERN void		TkpPrintWindowId(char *buf, Window window);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpScanWindowId_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpScanWindowId_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 6 */
-EXTERN int		TkpScanWindowId _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST char *string, Window *idPtr));
+EXTERN int		TkpScanWindowId(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				CONST char *string, Window *idPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpSetCapture_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpSetCapture_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 7 */
-EXTERN void		TkpSetCapture _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkpSetCapture(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpSetCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpSetCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 8 */
-EXTERN void		TkpSetCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((TkpCursor cursor));
+EXTERN void		TkpSetCursor(TkpCursor cursor);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpWmSetState_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpWmSetState_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 9 */
-EXTERN int		TkpWmSetState _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				int state));
+EXTERN int		TkpWmSetState(TkWindow *winPtr, int state);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSetPixmapColormap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSetPixmapColormap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 10 */
-EXTERN void		TkSetPixmapColormap _ANSI_ARGS_((Pixmap pixmap,
-				Colormap colormap));
+EXTERN void		TkSetPixmapColormap(Pixmap pixmap, Colormap colormap);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinCancelMouseTimer_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinCancelMouseTimer_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 11 */
-EXTERN void		TkWinCancelMouseTimer _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		TkWinCancelMouseTimer(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinClipboardRender_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinClipboardRender_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 12 */
-EXTERN void		TkWinClipboardRender _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr,
-				UINT format));
+EXTERN void		TkWinClipboardRender(TkDisplay *dispPtr, UINT format);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinEmbeddedEventProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinEmbeddedEventProc_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 13 */
-EXTERN LRESULT		TkWinEmbeddedEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd,
-				UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
+EXTERN LRESULT		TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+				WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinFillRect_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinFillRect_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 14 */
-EXTERN void		TkWinFillRect _ANSI_ARGS_((HDC dc, int x, int y,
-				int width, int height, int pixel));
+EXTERN void		TkWinFillRect(HDC dc, int x, int y, int width,
+				int height, int pixel);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinGetBorderPixels_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinGetBorderPixels_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 15 */
-EXTERN COLORREF		TkWinGetBorderPixels _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tk_3DBorder border, int which));
+EXTERN COLORREF		TkWinGetBorderPixels(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Tk_3DBorder border, int which);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinGetDrawableDC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinGetDrawableDC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 16 */
-EXTERN HDC		TkWinGetDrawableDC _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Drawable d, TkWinDCState *state));
+EXTERN HDC		TkWinGetDrawableDC(Display *display, Drawable d,
+				TkWinDCState *state);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinGetModifierState_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinGetModifierState_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 17 */
-EXTERN int		TkWinGetModifierState _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN int		TkWinGetModifierState(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinGetSystemPalette_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinGetSystemPalette_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 18 */
-EXTERN HPALETTE		TkWinGetSystemPalette _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN HPALETTE		TkWinGetSystemPalette(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinGetWrapperWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinGetWrapperWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 19 */
-EXTERN HWND		TkWinGetWrapperWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN HWND		TkWinGetWrapperWindow(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinHandleMenuEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinHandleMenuEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 20 */
-EXTERN int		TkWinHandleMenuEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND *phwnd,
-				UINT *pMessage, WPARAM *pwParam,
-				LPARAM *plParam, LRESULT *plResult));
+EXTERN int		TkWinHandleMenuEvent(HWND *phwnd, UINT *pMessage,
+				WPARAM *pwParam, LPARAM *plParam,
+				LRESULT *plResult);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinIndexOfColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinIndexOfColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 21 */
-EXTERN int		TkWinIndexOfColor _ANSI_ARGS_((XColor *colorPtr));
+EXTERN int		TkWinIndexOfColor(XColor *colorPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinReleaseDrawableDC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinReleaseDrawableDC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 22 */
-EXTERN void		TkWinReleaseDrawableDC _ANSI_ARGS_((Drawable d,
-				HDC hdc, TkWinDCState *state));
+EXTERN void		TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(Drawable d, HDC hdc,
+				TkWinDCState *state);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinResendEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinResendEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 23 */
-EXTERN LRESULT		TkWinResendEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((WNDPROC wndproc,
-				HWND hwnd, XEvent *eventPtr));
+EXTERN LRESULT		TkWinResendEvent(WNDPROC wndproc, HWND hwnd,
+				XEvent *eventPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinSelectPalette_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinSelectPalette_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 24 */
-EXTERN HPALETTE		TkWinSelectPalette _ANSI_ARGS_((HDC dc,
-				Colormap colormap));
+EXTERN HPALETTE		TkWinSelectPalette(HDC dc, Colormap colormap);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinSetMenu_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinSetMenu_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 25 */
-EXTERN void		TkWinSetMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				HMENU hMenu));
+EXTERN void		TkWinSetMenu(Tk_Window tkwin, HMENU hMenu);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinSetWindowPos_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinSetWindowPos_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 26 */
-EXTERN void		TkWinSetWindowPos _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd,
-				HWND siblingHwnd, int pos));
+EXTERN void		TkWinSetWindowPos(HWND hwnd, HWND siblingHwnd,
+				int pos);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinWmCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinWmCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 27 */
-EXTERN void		TkWinWmCleanup _ANSI_ARGS_((HINSTANCE hInstance));
+EXTERN void		TkWinWmCleanup(HINSTANCE hInstance);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinXCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinXCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 28 */
-EXTERN void		TkWinXCleanup _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+EXTERN void		TkWinXCleanup(ClientData clientData);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinXInit_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinXInit_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 29 */
-EXTERN void		TkWinXInit _ANSI_ARGS_((HINSTANCE hInstance));
+EXTERN void		TkWinXInit(HINSTANCE hInstance);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinSetForegroundWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinSetForegroundWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 30 */
-EXTERN void		TkWinSetForegroundWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkWinSetForegroundWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinDialogDebug_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinDialogDebug_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 31 */
-EXTERN void		TkWinDialogDebug _ANSI_ARGS_((int debug));
+EXTERN void		TkWinDialogDebug(int debug);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinGetMenuSystemDefault_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinGetMenuSystemDefault_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 32 */
-EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkWinGetMenuSystemDefault _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *dbName,
-				CONST char *className));
+EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkWinGetMenuSystemDefault(Tk_Window tkwin,
+				CONST char *dbName, CONST char *className);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinGetPlatformId_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinGetPlatformId_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 33 */
-EXTERN int		TkWinGetPlatformId _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN int		TkWinGetPlatformId(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinSetHINSTANCE_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinSetHINSTANCE_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 34 */
-EXTERN void		TkWinSetHINSTANCE _ANSI_ARGS_((HINSTANCE hInstance));
+EXTERN void		TkWinSetHINSTANCE(HINSTANCE hInstance);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinGetPlatformTheme_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinGetPlatformTheme_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 35 */
-EXTERN int		TkWinGetPlatformTheme _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN int		TkWinGetPlatformTheme(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWinChildProc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWinChildProc_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 36 */
-EXTERN LRESULT __stdcall TkWinChildProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message,
-				WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
+EXTERN LRESULT __stdcall TkWinChildProc(HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+				WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkCreateXEventSource_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkCreateXEventSource_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 37 */
-EXTERN void		TkCreateXEventSource _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		TkCreateXEventSource(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpCmapStressed_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpCmapStressed_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 38 */
-EXTERN int		TkpCmapStressed _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Colormap colormap));
+EXTERN int		TkpCmapStressed(Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpSync_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpSync_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 39 */
-EXTERN void		TkpSync _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display));
+EXTERN void		TkpSync(Display *display);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkUnixContainerId_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkUnixContainerId_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 40 */
-EXTERN Window		TkUnixContainerId _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN Window		TkUnixContainerId(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkUnixDoOneXEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkUnixDoOneXEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 41 */
-EXTERN int		TkUnixDoOneXEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Time *timePtr));
+EXTERN int		TkUnixDoOneXEvent(Tcl_Time *timePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkUnixSetMenubar_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkUnixSetMenubar_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 42 */
-EXTERN void		TkUnixSetMenubar _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tk_Window menubar));
+EXTERN void		TkUnixSetMenubar(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Window menubar);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWmCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWmCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 43 */
-EXTERN void		TkWmCleanup _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkWmCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSendCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSendCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 44 */
-EXTERN void		TkSendCleanup _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkSendCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpTestsendCmd_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpTestsendCmd_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 45 */
+EXTERN int		TkpTestsendCmd(ClientData clientData,
+				Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc,
+				CONST char **argv);
+#endif
 #endif /* WIN */
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
+#ifndef TkGenerateActivateEvents_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGenerateActivateEvents_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 0 */
-EXTERN void		TkGenerateActivateEvents _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				TkWindow *winPtr, int active));
+EXTERN void		TkGenerateActivateEvents(TkWindow *winPtr,
+				int active);
+#endif
 /* Slot 1 is reserved */
 /* Slot 2 is reserved */
+#ifndef TkPointerDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkPointerDeadWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 3 */
-EXTERN void		TkPointerDeadWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkPointerDeadWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpSetCapture_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpSetCapture_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 4 */
-EXTERN void		TkpSetCapture _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkpSetCapture(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpSetCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpSetCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 5 */
-EXTERN void		TkpSetCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((TkpCursor cursor));
+EXTERN void		TkpSetCursor(TkpCursor cursor);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpWmSetState_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpWmSetState_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 6 */
-EXTERN void		TkpWmSetState _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				int state));
+EXTERN void		TkpWmSetState(TkWindow *winPtr, int state);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkAboutDlg_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkAboutDlg_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 7 */
-EXTERN void		TkAboutDlg _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		TkAboutDlg(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXButtonKeyState_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXButtonKeyState_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 8 */
-EXTERN unsigned int	TkMacOSXButtonKeyState _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN unsigned int	TkMacOSXButtonKeyState(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXClearMenubarActive_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXClearMenubarActive_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 9 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXClearMenubarActive _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXClearMenubarActive(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 10 */
-EXTERN int		TkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((int menuID,
-				int index));
+EXTERN int		TkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent(int menuID, int index);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXInstallCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXInstallCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 11 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXInstallCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				int resizeOverride));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXInstallCursor(int resizeOverride);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 12 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu(void);
+#endif
 /* Slot 13 is reserved */
+#ifndef TkMacOSXDoHLEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXDoHLEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 14 */
-EXTERN int		TkMacOSXDoHLEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((EventRecord *theEvent));
+EXTERN int		TkMacOSXDoHLEvent(VOID *theEvent);
+#endif
 /* Slot 15 is reserved */
+#ifndef TkMacOSXGetXWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXGetXWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 16 */
-EXTERN Window		TkMacOSXGetXWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((WindowRef macWinPtr));
+EXTERN Window		TkMacOSXGetXWindow(VOID *macWinPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXGrowToplevel_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXGrowToplevel_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 17 */
-EXTERN int		TkMacOSXGrowToplevel _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				WindowRef whichWindow, Point start));
+EXTERN int		TkMacOSXGrowToplevel(VOID *whichWindow, XPoint start);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 18 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect _ANSI_ARGS_((MenuID theMenu,
-				MenuItemIndex theItem, int optionKeyPressed));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect(short theMenu,
+				unsigned short theItem, int optionKeyPressed);
+#endif
 /* Slot 19 is reserved */
 /* Slot 20 is reserved */
+#ifndef TkMacOSXInvalidateWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXInvalidateWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 21 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXInvalidateWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				MacDrawable *macWin, int flag));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXInvalidateWindow(MacDrawable *macWin,
+				int flag);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 22 */
-EXTERN int		TkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tk_Font tkfont, unsigned int searchChar));
+EXTERN int		TkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing(Tk_Font tkfont,
+				unsigned int searchChar);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXMakeRealWindowExist_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXMakeRealWindowExist_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 23 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXMakeRealWindowExist _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXMakeRealWindowExist(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXMakeStippleMap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXMakeStippleMap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 24 */
-EXTERN BitMapPtr	TkMacOSXMakeStippleMap _ANSI_ARGS_((Drawable d1,
-				Drawable d2));
+EXTERN VOID *		TkMacOSXMakeStippleMap(Drawable d1, Drawable d2);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXMenuClick_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXMenuClick_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 25 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXMenuClick _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXMenuClick(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXRegisterOffScreenWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXRegisterOffScreenWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 26 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXRegisterOffScreenWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Window window, GWorldPtr portPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXRegisterOffScreenWindow(Window window,
+				VOID *portPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXResizable_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXResizable_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 27 */
-EXTERN int		TkMacOSXResizable _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN int		TkMacOSXResizable(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXSetHelpMenuItemCount_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXSetHelpMenuItemCount_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 28 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXSetHelpMenuItemCount _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXSetHelpMenuItemCount(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXSetScrollbarGrow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXSetScrollbarGrow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 29 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXSetScrollbarGrow _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				TkWindow *winPtr, int flag));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXSetScrollbarGrow(TkWindow *winPtr, int flag);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 30 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Drawable drawable));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn(Drawable drawable);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 31 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort _ANSI_ARGS_((GC gc,
-				GWorldPtr destPort));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort(GC gc, VOID *destPort);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 32 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXUnregisterMacWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXUnregisterMacWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 33 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXUnregisterMacWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				WindowRef portPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXUnregisterMacWindow(VOID *portPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXUseMenuID_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXUseMenuID_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 34 */
-EXTERN int		TkMacOSXUseMenuID _ANSI_ARGS_((short macID));
+EXTERN int		TkMacOSXUseMenuID(short macID);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXVisableClipRgn_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXVisableClipRgn_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 35 */
-EXTERN RgnHandle	TkMacOSXVisableClipRgn _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN TkRegion		TkMacOSXVisableClipRgn(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXWinBounds_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXWinBounds_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 36 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXWinBounds _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				Rect *geometry));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXWinBounds(TkWindow *winPtr, VOID *geometry);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXWindowOffset_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXWindowOffset_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 37 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXWindowOffset _ANSI_ARGS_((WindowRef wRef,
-				int *xOffset, int *yOffset));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXWindowOffset(VOID *wRef, int *xOffset,
+				int *yOffset);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSetMacColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSetMacColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 38 */
-EXTERN int		TkSetMacColor _ANSI_ARGS_((unsigned long pixel,
-				RGBColor *macColor));
+EXTERN int		TkSetMacColor(unsigned long pixel, VOID *macColor);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSetWMName_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSetWMName_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 39 */
-EXTERN void		TkSetWMName _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				Tk_Uid titleUid));
+EXTERN void		TkSetWMName(TkWindow *winPtr, Tk_Uid titleUid);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSuspendClipboard_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSuspendClipboard_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 40 */
-EXTERN void		TkSuspendClipboard _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		TkSuspendClipboard(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXZoomToplevel_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXZoomToplevel_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 41 */
-EXTERN int		TkMacOSXZoomToplevel _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				WindowPtr whichWindow, short zoomPart));
+EXTERN int		TkMacOSXZoomToplevel(VOID *whichWindow,
+				short zoomPart);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_TopCoordsToWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_TopCoordsToWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 42 */
-EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_TopCoordsToWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int rootX, int rootY, int *newX, int *newY));
+EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_TopCoordsToWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int rootX,
+				int rootY, int *newX, int *newY);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXContainerId_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXContainerId_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 43 */
-EXTERN MacDrawable *	TkMacOSXContainerId _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN MacDrawable *	TkMacOSXContainerId(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXGetHostToplevel_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXGetHostToplevel_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 44 */
-EXTERN MacDrawable *	TkMacOSXGetHostToplevel _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN MacDrawable *	TkMacOSXGetHostToplevel(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXPreprocessMenu_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXPreprocessMenu_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 45 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXPreprocessMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXPreprocessMenu(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpIsWindowFloating_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpIsWindowFloating_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 46 */
-EXTERN int		TkpIsWindowFloating _ANSI_ARGS_((WindowRef window));
+EXTERN int		TkpIsWindowFloating(VOID *window);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXGetCapture_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXGetCapture_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 47 */
-EXTERN Tk_Window	TkMacOSXGetCapture _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN Tk_Window	TkMacOSXGetCapture(void);
+#endif
 /* Slot 48 is reserved */
+#ifndef TkGetTransientMaster_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGetTransientMaster_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 49 */
-EXTERN Window		TkGetTransientMaster _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN Window		TkGetTransientMaster(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGenerateButtonEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGenerateButtonEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 50 */
-EXTERN int		TkGenerateButtonEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((int x, int y,
-				Window window, unsigned int state));
+EXTERN int		TkGenerateButtonEvent(int x, int y, Window window,
+				unsigned int state);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGenWMDestroyEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGenWMDestroyEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 51 */
-EXTERN void		TkGenWMDestroyEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN void		TkGenWMDestroyEvent(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
 /* Slot 52 is reserved */
+#ifndef TkpGetMS_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpGetMS_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 53 */
-EXTERN unsigned long	TkpGetMS _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN unsigned long	TkpGetMS(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXDrawable_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXDrawable_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 54 */
+EXTERN VOID *		TkMacOSXDrawable(Drawable drawable);
+#endif
 #endif /* AQUA */
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(__CYGWIN__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */
+#ifndef TkCreateXEventSource_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkCreateXEventSource_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 0 */
-EXTERN void		TkCreateXEventSource _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		TkCreateXEventSource(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkFreeWindowId_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkFreeWindowId_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 1 */
-EXTERN void		TkFreeWindowId _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr,
-				Window w));
+EXTERN void		TkFreeWindowId(TkDisplay *dispPtr, Window w);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkInitXId_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkInitXId_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 2 */
-EXTERN void		TkInitXId _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkInitXId(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpCmapStressed_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpCmapStressed_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 3 */
-EXTERN int		TkpCmapStressed _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Colormap colormap));
+EXTERN int		TkpCmapStressed(Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpSync_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpSync_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 4 */
-EXTERN void		TkpSync _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display));
+EXTERN void		TkpSync(Display *display);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkUnixContainerId_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkUnixContainerId_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 5 */
-EXTERN Window		TkUnixContainerId _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN Window		TkUnixContainerId(TkWindow *winPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkUnixDoOneXEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkUnixDoOneXEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 6 */
-EXTERN int		TkUnixDoOneXEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Time *timePtr));
+EXTERN int		TkUnixDoOneXEvent(Tcl_Time *timePtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkUnixSetMenubar_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkUnixSetMenubar_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 7 */
-EXTERN void		TkUnixSetMenubar _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				Tk_Window menubar));
+EXTERN void		TkUnixSetMenubar(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Window menubar);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpScanWindowId_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpScanWindowId_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 8 */
-EXTERN int		TkpScanWindowId _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-				CONST char *string, Window *idPtr));
+EXTERN int		TkpScanWindowId(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				CONST char *string, Window *idPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkWmCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkWmCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 9 */
-EXTERN void		TkWmCleanup _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkWmCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkSendCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkSendCleanup_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 10 */
-EXTERN void		TkSendCleanup _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkSendCleanup(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkFreeXId_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkFreeXId_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 11 */
-EXTERN void		TkFreeXId _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+EXTERN void		TkFreeXId(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpWmSetState_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpWmSetState_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 12 */
-EXTERN int		TkpWmSetState _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-				int state));
+EXTERN int		TkpWmSetState(TkWindow *winPtr, int state);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkpTestsendCmd_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkpTestsendCmd_TCL_DECLARED
+/* 13 */
+EXTERN int		TkpTestsendCmd(ClientData clientData,
+				Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc,
+				CONST char **argv);
+#endif
 #endif /* X11 */
 
 typedef struct TkIntPlatStubs {
@@ -309,122 +609,125 @@ typedef struct TkIntPlatStubs {
     struct TkIntPlatStubHooks *hooks;
 
 #if defined(__WIN32__) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */
-    char * (*tkAlignImageData) _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image, int alignment, int bitOrder)); /* 0 */
+    char * (*tkAlignImageData) (XImage *image, int alignment, int bitOrder); /* 0 */
     VOID *reserved1;
-    void (*tkGenerateActivateEvents) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int active)); /* 2 */
-    unsigned long (*tkpGetMS) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 3 */
-    void (*tkPointerDeadWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 4 */
-    void (*tkpPrintWindowId) _ANSI_ARGS_((char *buf, Window window)); /* 5 */
-    int (*tkpScanWindowId) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *string, Window *idPtr)); /* 6 */
-    void (*tkpSetCapture) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 7 */
-    void (*tkpSetCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkpCursor cursor)); /* 8 */
-    int (*tkpWmSetState) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int state)); /* 9 */
-    void (*tkSetPixmapColormap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Pixmap pixmap, Colormap colormap)); /* 10 */
-    void (*tkWinCancelMouseTimer) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 11 */
-    void (*tkWinClipboardRender) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr, UINT format)); /* 12 */
-    LRESULT (*tkWinEmbeddedEventProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)); /* 13 */
-    void (*tkWinFillRect) _ANSI_ARGS_((HDC dc, int x, int y, int width, int height, int pixel)); /* 14 */
-    COLORREF (*tkWinGetBorderPixels) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border, int which)); /* 15 */
-    HDC (*tkWinGetDrawableDC) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d, TkWinDCState *state)); /* 16 */
-    int (*tkWinGetModifierState) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 17 */
-    HPALETTE (*tkWinGetSystemPalette) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 18 */
-    HWND (*tkWinGetWrapperWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 19 */
-    int (*tkWinHandleMenuEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND *phwnd, UINT *pMessage, WPARAM *pwParam, LPARAM *plParam, LRESULT *plResult)); /* 20 */
-    int (*tkWinIndexOfColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((XColor *colorPtr)); /* 21 */
-    void (*tkWinReleaseDrawableDC) _ANSI_ARGS_((Drawable d, HDC hdc, TkWinDCState *state)); /* 22 */
-    LRESULT (*tkWinResendEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((WNDPROC wndproc, HWND hwnd, XEvent *eventPtr)); /* 23 */
-    HPALETTE (*tkWinSelectPalette) _ANSI_ARGS_((HDC dc, Colormap colormap)); /* 24 */
-    void (*tkWinSetMenu) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, HMENU hMenu)); /* 25 */
-    void (*tkWinSetWindowPos) _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, HWND siblingHwnd, int pos)); /* 26 */
-    void (*tkWinWmCleanup) _ANSI_ARGS_((HINSTANCE hInstance)); /* 27 */
-    void (*tkWinXCleanup) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData)); /* 28 */
-    void (*tkWinXInit) _ANSI_ARGS_((HINSTANCE hInstance)); /* 29 */
-    void (*tkWinSetForegroundWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 30 */
-    void (*tkWinDialogDebug) _ANSI_ARGS_((int debug)); /* 31 */
-    Tcl_Obj * (*tkWinGetMenuSystemDefault) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *dbName, CONST char *className)); /* 32 */
-    int (*tkWinGetPlatformId) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 33 */
-    void (*tkWinSetHINSTANCE) _ANSI_ARGS_((HINSTANCE hInstance)); /* 34 */
-    int (*tkWinGetPlatformTheme) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 35 */
-    LRESULT (__stdcall *tkWinChildProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)); /* 36 */
-    void (*tkCreateXEventSource) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 37 */
-    int (*tkpCmapStressed) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap)); /* 38 */
-    void (*tkpSync) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display)); /* 39 */
-    Window (*tkUnixContainerId) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 40 */
-    int (*tkUnixDoOneXEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Time *timePtr)); /* 41 */
-    void (*tkUnixSetMenubar) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Window menubar)); /* 42 */
-    void (*tkWmCleanup) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr)); /* 43 */
-    void (*tkSendCleanup) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr)); /* 44 */
+    void (*tkGenerateActivateEvents) (TkWindow *winPtr, int active); /* 2 */
+    unsigned long (*tkpGetMS) (void); /* 3 */
+    void (*tkPointerDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 4 */
+    void (*tkpPrintWindowId) (char *buf, Window window); /* 5 */
+    int (*tkpScanWindowId) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *string, Window *idPtr); /* 6 */
+    void (*tkpSetCapture) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 7 */
+    void (*tkpSetCursor) (TkpCursor cursor); /* 8 */
+    int (*tkpWmSetState) (TkWindow *winPtr, int state); /* 9 */
+    void (*tkSetPixmapColormap) (Pixmap pixmap, Colormap colormap); /* 10 */
+    void (*tkWinCancelMouseTimer) (void); /* 11 */
+    void (*tkWinClipboardRender) (TkDisplay *dispPtr, UINT format); /* 12 */
+    LRESULT (*tkWinEmbeddedEventProc) (HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam); /* 13 */
+    void (*tkWinFillRect) (HDC dc, int x, int y, int width, int height, int pixel); /* 14 */
+    COLORREF (*tkWinGetBorderPixels) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border, int which); /* 15 */
+    HDC (*tkWinGetDrawableDC) (Display *display, Drawable d, TkWinDCState *state); /* 16 */
+    int (*tkWinGetModifierState) (void); /* 17 */
+    HPALETTE (*tkWinGetSystemPalette) (void); /* 18 */
+    HWND (*tkWinGetWrapperWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 19 */
+    int (*tkWinHandleMenuEvent) (HWND *phwnd, UINT *pMessage, WPARAM *pwParam, LPARAM *plParam, LRESULT *plResult); /* 20 */
+    int (*tkWinIndexOfColor) (XColor *colorPtr); /* 21 */
+    void (*tkWinReleaseDrawableDC) (Drawable d, HDC hdc, TkWinDCState *state); /* 22 */
+    LRESULT (*tkWinResendEvent) (WNDPROC wndproc, HWND hwnd, XEvent *eventPtr); /* 23 */
+    HPALETTE (*tkWinSelectPalette) (HDC dc, Colormap colormap); /* 24 */
+    void (*tkWinSetMenu) (Tk_Window tkwin, HMENU hMenu); /* 25 */
+    void (*tkWinSetWindowPos) (HWND hwnd, HWND siblingHwnd, int pos); /* 26 */
+    void (*tkWinWmCleanup) (HINSTANCE hInstance); /* 27 */
+    void (*tkWinXCleanup) (ClientData clientData); /* 28 */
+    void (*tkWinXInit) (HINSTANCE hInstance); /* 29 */
+    void (*tkWinSetForegroundWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 30 */
+    void (*tkWinDialogDebug) (int debug); /* 31 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*tkWinGetMenuSystemDefault) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *dbName, CONST char *className); /* 32 */
+    int (*tkWinGetPlatformId) (void); /* 33 */
+    void (*tkWinSetHINSTANCE) (HINSTANCE hInstance); /* 34 */
+    int (*tkWinGetPlatformTheme) (void); /* 35 */
+    LRESULT (__stdcall *tkWinChildProc) (HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam); /* 36 */
+    void (*tkCreateXEventSource) (void); /* 37 */
+    int (*tkpCmapStressed) (Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap); /* 38 */
+    void (*tkpSync) (Display *display); /* 39 */
+    Window (*tkUnixContainerId) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 40 */
+    int (*tkUnixDoOneXEvent) (Tcl_Time *timePtr); /* 41 */
+    void (*tkUnixSetMenubar) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Window menubar); /* 42 */
+    void (*tkWmCleanup) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 43 */
+    void (*tkSendCleanup) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 44 */
+    int (*tkpTestsendCmd) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv); /* 45 */
 #endif /* WIN */
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
-    void (*tkGenerateActivateEvents) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int active)); /* 0 */
+    void (*tkGenerateActivateEvents) (TkWindow *winPtr, int active); /* 0 */
     VOID *reserved1;
     VOID *reserved2;
-    void (*tkPointerDeadWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 3 */
-    void (*tkpSetCapture) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 4 */
-    void (*tkpSetCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkpCursor cursor)); /* 5 */
-    void (*tkpWmSetState) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int state)); /* 6 */
-    void (*tkAboutDlg) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 7 */
-    unsigned int (*tkMacOSXButtonKeyState) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 8 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXClearMenubarActive) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 9 */
-    int (*tkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((int menuID, int index)); /* 10 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXInstallCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((int resizeOverride)); /* 11 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 12 */
+    void (*tkPointerDeadWindow) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 3 */
+    void (*tkpSetCapture) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 4 */
+    void (*tkpSetCursor) (TkpCursor cursor); /* 5 */
+    void (*tkpWmSetState) (TkWindow *winPtr, int state); /* 6 */
+    void (*tkAboutDlg) (void); /* 7 */
+    unsigned int (*tkMacOSXButtonKeyState) (void); /* 8 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXClearMenubarActive) (void); /* 9 */
+    int (*tkMacOSXDispatchMenuEvent) (int menuID, int index); /* 10 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXInstallCursor) (int resizeOverride); /* 11 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXHandleTearoffMenu) (void); /* 12 */
     VOID *reserved13;
-    int (*tkMacOSXDoHLEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((EventRecord *theEvent)); /* 14 */
+    int (*tkMacOSXDoHLEvent) (VOID *theEvent); /* 14 */
     VOID *reserved15;
-    Window (*tkMacOSXGetXWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((WindowRef macWinPtr)); /* 16 */
-    int (*tkMacOSXGrowToplevel) _ANSI_ARGS_((WindowRef whichWindow, Point start)); /* 17 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect) _ANSI_ARGS_((MenuID theMenu, MenuItemIndex theItem, int optionKeyPressed)); /* 18 */
+    Window (*tkMacOSXGetXWindow) (VOID *macWinPtr); /* 16 */
+    int (*tkMacOSXGrowToplevel) (VOID *whichWindow, XPoint start); /* 17 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXHandleMenuSelect) (short theMenu, unsigned short theItem, int optionKeyPressed); /* 18 */
     VOID *reserved19;
     VOID *reserved20;
-    void (*tkMacOSXInvalidateWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((MacDrawable *macWin, int flag)); /* 21 */
-    int (*tkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font tkfont, unsigned int searchChar)); /* 22 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXMakeRealWindowExist) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 23 */
-    BitMapPtr (*tkMacOSXMakeStippleMap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Drawable d1, Drawable d2)); /* 24 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXMenuClick) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 25 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXRegisterOffScreenWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Window window, GWorldPtr portPtr)); /* 26 */
-    int (*tkMacOSXResizable) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 27 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXSetHelpMenuItemCount) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 28 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXSetScrollbarGrow) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int flag)); /* 29 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn) _ANSI_ARGS_((Drawable drawable)); /* 30 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort) _ANSI_ARGS_((GC gc, GWorldPtr destPort)); /* 31 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 32 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXUnregisterMacWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((WindowRef portPtr)); /* 33 */
-    int (*tkMacOSXUseMenuID) _ANSI_ARGS_((short macID)); /* 34 */
-    RgnHandle (*tkMacOSXVisableClipRgn) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 35 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXWinBounds) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, Rect *geometry)); /* 36 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXWindowOffset) _ANSI_ARGS_((WindowRef wRef, int *xOffset, int *yOffset)); /* 37 */
-    int (*tkSetMacColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((unsigned long pixel, RGBColor *macColor)); /* 38 */
-    void (*tkSetWMName) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, Tk_Uid titleUid)); /* 39 */
-    void (*tkSuspendClipboard) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 40 */
-    int (*tkMacOSXZoomToplevel) _ANSI_ARGS_((WindowPtr whichWindow, short zoomPart)); /* 41 */
-    Tk_Window (*tk_TopCoordsToWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int rootX, int rootY, int *newX, int *newY)); /* 42 */
-    MacDrawable * (*tkMacOSXContainerId) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 43 */
-    MacDrawable * (*tkMacOSXGetHostToplevel) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 44 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXPreprocessMenu) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 45 */
-    int (*tkpIsWindowFloating) _ANSI_ARGS_((WindowRef window)); /* 46 */
-    Tk_Window (*tkMacOSXGetCapture) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 47 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXInvalidateWindow) (MacDrawable *macWin, int flag); /* 21 */
+    int (*tkMacOSXIsCharacterMissing) (Tk_Font tkfont, unsigned int searchChar); /* 22 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXMakeRealWindowExist) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 23 */
+    VOID * (*tkMacOSXMakeStippleMap) (Drawable d1, Drawable d2); /* 24 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXMenuClick) (void); /* 25 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXRegisterOffScreenWindow) (Window window, VOID *portPtr); /* 26 */
+    int (*tkMacOSXResizable) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 27 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXSetHelpMenuItemCount) (void); /* 28 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXSetScrollbarGrow) (TkWindow *winPtr, int flag); /* 29 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXSetUpClippingRgn) (Drawable drawable); /* 30 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXSetUpGraphicsPort) (GC gc, VOID *destPort); /* 31 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXUpdateClipRgn) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 32 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXUnregisterMacWindow) (VOID *portPtr); /* 33 */
+    int (*tkMacOSXUseMenuID) (short macID); /* 34 */
+    TkRegion (*tkMacOSXVisableClipRgn) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 35 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXWinBounds) (TkWindow *winPtr, VOID *geometry); /* 36 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXWindowOffset) (VOID *wRef, int *xOffset, int *yOffset); /* 37 */
+    int (*tkSetMacColor) (unsigned long pixel, VOID *macColor); /* 38 */
+    void (*tkSetWMName) (TkWindow *winPtr, Tk_Uid titleUid); /* 39 */
+    void (*tkSuspendClipboard) (void); /* 40 */
+    int (*tkMacOSXZoomToplevel) (VOID *whichWindow, short zoomPart); /* 41 */
+    Tk_Window (*tk_TopCoordsToWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int rootX, int rootY, int *newX, int *newY); /* 42 */
+    MacDrawable * (*tkMacOSXContainerId) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 43 */
+    MacDrawable * (*tkMacOSXGetHostToplevel) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 44 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXPreprocessMenu) (void); /* 45 */
+    int (*tkpIsWindowFloating) (VOID *window); /* 46 */
+    Tk_Window (*tkMacOSXGetCapture) (void); /* 47 */
     VOID *reserved48;
-    Window (*tkGetTransientMaster) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 49 */
-    int (*tkGenerateButtonEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((int x, int y, Window window, unsigned int state)); /* 50 */
-    void (*tkGenWMDestroyEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 51 */
+    Window (*tkGetTransientMaster) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 49 */
+    int (*tkGenerateButtonEvent) (int x, int y, Window window, unsigned int state); /* 50 */
+    void (*tkGenWMDestroyEvent) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 51 */
     VOID *reserved52;
-    unsigned long (*tkpGetMS) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 53 */
+    unsigned long (*tkpGetMS) (void); /* 53 */
+    VOID * (*tkMacOSXDrawable) (Drawable drawable); /* 54 */
 #endif /* AQUA */
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(__CYGWIN__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */
-    void (*tkCreateXEventSource) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 0 */
-    void (*tkFreeWindowId) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr, Window w)); /* 1 */
-    void (*tkInitXId) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr)); /* 2 */
-    int (*tkpCmapStressed) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap)); /* 3 */
-    void (*tkpSync) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display)); /* 4 */
-    Window (*tkUnixContainerId) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); /* 5 */
-    int (*tkUnixDoOneXEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Time *timePtr)); /* 6 */
-    void (*tkUnixSetMenubar) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Window menubar)); /* 7 */
-    int (*tkpScanWindowId) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *string, Window *idPtr)); /* 8 */
-    void (*tkWmCleanup) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr)); /* 9 */
-    void (*tkSendCleanup) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr)); /* 10 */
-    void (*tkFreeXId) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr)); /* 11 */
-    int (*tkpWmSetState) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int state)); /* 12 */
+    void (*tkCreateXEventSource) (void); /* 0 */
+    void (*tkFreeWindowId) (TkDisplay *dispPtr, Window w); /* 1 */
+    void (*tkInitXId) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 2 */
+    int (*tkpCmapStressed) (Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap); /* 3 */
+    void (*tkpSync) (Display *display); /* 4 */
+    Window (*tkUnixContainerId) (TkWindow *winPtr); /* 5 */
+    int (*tkUnixDoOneXEvent) (Tcl_Time *timePtr); /* 6 */
+    void (*tkUnixSetMenubar) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Window menubar); /* 7 */
+    int (*tkpScanWindowId) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *string, Window *idPtr); /* 8 */
+    void (*tkWmCleanup) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 9 */
+    void (*tkSendCleanup) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 10 */
+    void (*tkFreeXId) (TkDisplay *dispPtr); /* 11 */
+    int (*tkpWmSetState) (TkWindow *winPtr, int state); /* 12 */
+    int (*tkpTestsendCmd) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv); /* 13 */
 #endif /* X11 */
 } TkIntPlatStubs;
 
@@ -620,6 +923,10 @@ extern TkIntPlatStubs *tkIntPlatStubsPtr;
 #define TkSendCleanup \
 	(tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkSendCleanup) /* 44 */
 #endif
+#ifndef TkpTestsendCmd
+#define TkpTestsendCmd \
+	(tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpTestsendCmd) /* 45 */
+#endif
 #endif /* WIN */
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
 #ifndef TkGenerateActivateEvents
@@ -814,6 +1121,10 @@ extern TkIntPlatStubs *tkIntPlatStubsPtr;
 #define TkpGetMS \
 	(tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpGetMS) /* 53 */
 #endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXDrawable
+#define TkMacOSXDrawable \
+	(tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXDrawable) /* 54 */
+#endif
 #endif /* AQUA */
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(__CYGWIN__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */
 #ifndef TkCreateXEventSource
@@ -868,6 +1179,10 @@ extern TkIntPlatStubs *tkIntPlatStubsPtr;
 #define TkpWmSetState \
 	(tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpWmSetState) /* 12 */
 #endif
+#ifndef TkpTestsendCmd
+#define TkpTestsendCmd \
+	(tkIntPlatStubsPtr->tkpTestsendCmd) /* 13 */
+#endif
 #endif /* X11 */
 
 #endif /* defined(USE_TK_STUBS) && !defined(USE_TK_STUB_PROCS) */
@@ -883,5 +1198,11 @@ extern TkIntPlatStubs *tkIntPlatStubsPtr;
     void TkInitXId(TkDisplay *dispPtr);
 #endif
 
+#ifdef __WIN32__
+#undef TkpCmapStressed
+#undef TkpSync
+#define TkpCmapStressed(tkwin,colormap) (0)
+#define TkpSync(display)
+#endif
 
 #endif /* _TKINTPLATDECLS */
diff --git a/generic/tkIntXlibDecls.h b/generic/tkIntXlibDecls.h
index fc12521..1357ceb 100644
--- a/generic/tkIntXlibDecls.h
+++ b/generic/tkIntXlibDecls.h
@@ -19,7 +19,11 @@
  * in the generic/tkInt.decls script.
  */
 
+#ifdef MAC_TCL
+#include "Xutil.h"
+#else
 #include "X11/Xutil.h"
+#endif
 
 #ifdef BUILD_tk
 #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
@@ -37,641 +41,1199 @@ typedef int (*XAfterFunction) (	    /* WARNING, this type not in Xlib spec */
  */
 
 #if defined(__WIN32__) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */
+#ifndef XSetDashes_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetDashes_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 0 */
-EXTERN int		XSetDashes _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				int dash_offset, _Xconst char *dash_list,
-				int n));
+EXTERN int		XSetDashes(Display *display, GC gc, int dash_offset,
+				_Xconst char *dash_list, int n);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetModifierMapping_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetModifierMapping_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 1 */
-EXTERN XModifierKeymap * XGetModifierMapping _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d));
+EXTERN XModifierKeymap * XGetModifierMapping(Display *d);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCreateImage_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCreateImage_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 2 */
-EXTERN XImage *		XCreateImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Visual *v,
-				unsigned int ui1, int i1, int i2, char *cp,
-				unsigned int ui2, unsigned int ui3, int i3,
-				int i4));
+EXTERN XImage *		XCreateImage(Display *d, Visual *v, unsigned int ui1,
+				int i1, int i2, char *cp, unsigned int ui2,
+				unsigned int ui3, int i3, int i4);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetImage_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetImage_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 3 */
-EXTERN XImage *		XGetImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr,
-				int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1,
-				unsigned int ui2, unsigned long ul, int i3));
+EXTERN XImage *		XGetImage(Display *d, Drawable dr, int i1, int i2,
+				unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2,
+				unsigned long ul, int i3);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetAtomName_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetAtomName_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 4 */
-EXTERN char *		XGetAtomName _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Atom a));
+EXTERN char *		XGetAtomName(Display *d, Atom a);
+#endif
+#ifndef XKeysymToString_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XKeysymToString_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 5 */
-EXTERN char *		XKeysymToString _ANSI_ARGS_((KeySym k));
+EXTERN char *		XKeysymToString(KeySym k);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCreateColormap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCreateColormap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 6 */
-EXTERN Colormap		XCreateColormap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				Visual *v, int i));
+EXTERN Colormap		XCreateColormap(Display *d, Window w, Visual *v,
+				int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCreatePixmapCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCreatePixmapCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 7 */
-EXTERN Cursor		XCreatePixmapCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				Pixmap p1, Pixmap p2, XColor *x1, XColor *x2,
-				unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2));
+EXTERN Cursor		XCreatePixmapCursor(Display *d, Pixmap p1, Pixmap p2,
+				XColor *x1, XColor *x2, unsigned int ui1,
+				unsigned int ui2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCreateGlyphCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCreateGlyphCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 8 */
-EXTERN Cursor		XCreateGlyphCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Font f1,
-				Font f2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2,
-				XColor _Xconst *x1, XColor _Xconst *x2));
+EXTERN Cursor		XCreateGlyphCursor(Display *d, Font f1, Font f2,
+				unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2,
+				XColor _Xconst *x1, XColor _Xconst *x2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGContextFromGC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGContextFromGC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 9 */
-EXTERN GContext		XGContextFromGC _ANSI_ARGS_((GC g));
+EXTERN GContext		XGContextFromGC(GC g);
+#endif
+#ifndef XListHosts_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XListHosts_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 10 */
-EXTERN XHostAddress *	XListHosts _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, int *i, Bool *b));
+EXTERN XHostAddress *	XListHosts(Display *d, int *i, Bool *b);
+#endif
+#ifndef XKeycodeToKeysym_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XKeycodeToKeysym_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 11 */
-EXTERN KeySym		XKeycodeToKeysym _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				unsigned int k, int i));
+EXTERN KeySym		XKeycodeToKeysym(Display *d, unsigned int k, int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XStringToKeysym_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XStringToKeysym_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 12 */
-EXTERN KeySym		XStringToKeysym _ANSI_ARGS_((_Xconst char *c));
+EXTERN KeySym		XStringToKeysym(_Xconst char *c);
+#endif
+#ifndef XRootWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XRootWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 13 */
-EXTERN Window		XRootWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, int i));
+EXTERN Window		XRootWindow(Display *d, int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetErrorHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetErrorHandler_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 14 */
-EXTERN XErrorHandler	XSetErrorHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((XErrorHandler x));
+EXTERN XErrorHandler	XSetErrorHandler(XErrorHandler x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XIconifyWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XIconifyWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 15 */
-EXTERN Status		XIconifyWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				int i));
+EXTERN Status		XIconifyWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XWithdrawWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XWithdrawWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 16 */
-EXTERN Status		XWithdrawWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				int i));
+EXTERN Status		XWithdrawWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetWMColormapWindows_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetWMColormapWindows_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 17 */
-EXTERN Status		XGetWMColormapWindows _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				Window w, Window **wpp, int *ip));
+EXTERN Status		XGetWMColormapWindows(Display *d, Window w,
+				Window **wpp, int *ip);
+#endif
+#ifndef XAllocColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XAllocColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 18 */
-EXTERN Status		XAllocColor _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c,
-				XColor *xp));
+EXTERN Status		XAllocColor(Display *d, Colormap c, XColor *xp);
+#endif
+#ifndef XBell_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XBell_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 19 */
-EXTERN int		XBell _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, int i));
+EXTERN int		XBell(Display *d, int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XChangeProperty_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XChangeProperty_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 20 */
-EXTERN int		XChangeProperty _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				Atom a1, Atom a2, int i1, int i2,
-				_Xconst unsigned char *c, int i3));
+EXTERN int		XChangeProperty(Display *d, Window w, Atom a1,
+				Atom a2, int i1, int i2,
+				_Xconst unsigned char *c, int i3);
+#endif
+#ifndef XChangeWindowAttributes_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XChangeWindowAttributes_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 21 */
-EXTERN int		XChangeWindowAttributes _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				Window w, unsigned long ul,
-				XSetWindowAttributes *x));
+EXTERN int		XChangeWindowAttributes(Display *d, Window w,
+				unsigned long ul, XSetWindowAttributes *x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XClearWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XClearWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 22 */
-EXTERN int		XClearWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w));
+EXTERN int		XClearWindow(Display *d, Window w);
+#endif
+#ifndef XConfigureWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XConfigureWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 23 */
-EXTERN int		XConfigureWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				unsigned int i, XWindowChanges *x));
+EXTERN int		XConfigureWindow(Display *d, Window w,
+				unsigned int i, XWindowChanges *x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCopyArea_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCopyArea_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 24 */
-EXTERN int		XCopyArea _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr1,
-				Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2,
-				unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3,
-				int i4));
+EXTERN int		XCopyArea(Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2,
+				GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1,
+				unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCopyPlane_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCopyPlane_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 25 */
-EXTERN int		XCopyPlane _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr1,
-				Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2,
-				unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3,
-				int i4, unsigned long ul));
+EXTERN int		XCopyPlane(Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2,
+				GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1,
+				unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4,
+				unsigned long ul);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCreateBitmapFromData_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCreateBitmapFromData_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 26 */
-EXTERN Pixmap		XCreateBitmapFromData _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Drawable d, _Xconst char *data,
-				unsigned int width, unsigned int height));
+EXTERN Pixmap		XCreateBitmapFromData(Display *display, Drawable d,
+				_Xconst char *data, unsigned int width,
+				unsigned int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDefineCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDefineCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 27 */
-EXTERN int		XDefineCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				Cursor c));
+EXTERN int		XDefineCursor(Display *d, Window w, Cursor c);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDeleteProperty_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDeleteProperty_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 28 */
-EXTERN int		XDeleteProperty _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				Atom a));
+EXTERN int		XDeleteProperty(Display *d, Window w, Atom a);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDestroyWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDestroyWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 29 */
-EXTERN int		XDestroyWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w));
+EXTERN int		XDestroyWindow(Display *d, Window w);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDrawArc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDrawArc_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 30 */
-EXTERN int		XDrawArc _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g,
-				int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1,
-				unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4));
+EXTERN int		XDrawArc(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1,
+				int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2,
+				int i3, int i4);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDrawLines_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDrawLines_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 31 */
-EXTERN int		XDrawLines _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr,
-				GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2));
+EXTERN int		XDrawLines(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x,
+				int i1, int i2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDrawRectangle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDrawRectangle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 32 */
-EXTERN int		XDrawRectangle _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr,
-				GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1,
-				unsigned int ui2));
+EXTERN int		XDrawRectangle(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1,
+				int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFillArc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFillArc_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 33 */
-EXTERN int		XFillArc _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g,
-				int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1,
-				unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4));
+EXTERN int		XFillArc(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1,
+				int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2,
+				int i3, int i4);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFillPolygon_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFillPolygon_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 34 */
-EXTERN int		XFillPolygon _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr,
-				GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2, int i3));
+EXTERN int		XFillPolygon(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g,
+				XPoint *x, int i1, int i2, int i3);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFillRectangles_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFillRectangles_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 35 */
-EXTERN int		XFillRectangles _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr,
-				GC g, XRectangle *x, int i));
+EXTERN int		XFillRectangles(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g,
+				XRectangle *x, int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XForceScreenSaver_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XForceScreenSaver_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 36 */
-EXTERN int		XForceScreenSaver _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, int i));
+EXTERN int		XForceScreenSaver(Display *d, int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFreeColormap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFreeColormap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 37 */
-EXTERN int		XFreeColormap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c));
+EXTERN int		XFreeColormap(Display *d, Colormap c);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFreeColors_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFreeColors_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 38 */
-EXTERN int		XFreeColors _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c,
-				unsigned long *ulp, int i, unsigned long ul));
+EXTERN int		XFreeColors(Display *d, Colormap c,
+				unsigned long *ulp, int i, unsigned long ul);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFreeCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFreeCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 39 */
-EXTERN int		XFreeCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Cursor c));
+EXTERN int		XFreeCursor(Display *d, Cursor c);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFreeModifiermap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFreeModifiermap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 40 */
-EXTERN int		XFreeModifiermap _ANSI_ARGS_((XModifierKeymap *x));
+EXTERN int		XFreeModifiermap(XModifierKeymap *x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetGeometry_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetGeometry_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 41 */
-EXTERN Status		XGetGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr,
-				Window *w, int *i1, int *i2,
-				unsigned int *ui1, unsigned int *ui2,
-				unsigned int *ui3, unsigned int *ui4));
+EXTERN Status		XGetGeometry(Display *d, Drawable dr, Window *w,
+				int *i1, int *i2, unsigned int *ui1,
+				unsigned int *ui2, unsigned int *ui3,
+				unsigned int *ui4);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetInputFocus_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetInputFocus_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 42 */
-EXTERN int		XGetInputFocus _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window *w,
-				int *i));
+EXTERN int		XGetInputFocus(Display *d, Window *w, int *i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetWindowProperty_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetWindowProperty_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 43 */
-EXTERN int		XGetWindowProperty _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				Atom a1, long l1, long l2, Bool b, Atom a2,
-				Atom *ap, int *ip, unsigned long *ulp1,
-				unsigned long *ulp2, unsigned char **cpp));
+EXTERN int		XGetWindowProperty(Display *d, Window w, Atom a1,
+				long l1, long l2, Bool b, Atom a2, Atom *ap,
+				int *ip, unsigned long *ulp1,
+				unsigned long *ulp2, unsigned char **cpp);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetWindowAttributes_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetWindowAttributes_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 44 */
-EXTERN Status		XGetWindowAttributes _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				Window w, XWindowAttributes *x));
+EXTERN Status		XGetWindowAttributes(Display *d, Window w,
+				XWindowAttributes *x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGrabKeyboard_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGrabKeyboard_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 45 */
-EXTERN int		XGrabKeyboard _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				Bool b, int i1, int i2, Time t));
+EXTERN int		XGrabKeyboard(Display *d, Window w, Bool b, int i1,
+				int i2, Time t);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGrabPointer_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGrabPointer_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 46 */
-EXTERN int		XGrabPointer _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w1,
-				Bool b, unsigned int ui, int i1, int i2,
-				Window w2, Cursor c, Time t));
+EXTERN int		XGrabPointer(Display *d, Window w1, Bool b,
+				unsigned int ui, int i1, int i2, Window w2,
+				Cursor c, Time t);
+#endif
+#ifndef XKeysymToKeycode_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XKeysymToKeycode_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 47 */
-EXTERN KeyCode		XKeysymToKeycode _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, KeySym k));
+EXTERN KeyCode		XKeysymToKeycode(Display *d, KeySym k);
+#endif
+#ifndef XLookupColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XLookupColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 48 */
-EXTERN Status		XLookupColor _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c1,
-				_Xconst char *c2, XColor *x1, XColor *x2));
+EXTERN Status		XLookupColor(Display *d, Colormap c1,
+				_Xconst char *c2, XColor *x1, XColor *x2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XMapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XMapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 49 */
-EXTERN int		XMapWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w));
+EXTERN int		XMapWindow(Display *d, Window w);
+#endif
+#ifndef XMoveResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XMoveResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 50 */
-EXTERN int		XMoveResizeWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1,
-				unsigned int ui2));
+EXTERN int		XMoveResizeWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i1,
+				int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XMoveWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XMoveWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 51 */
-EXTERN int		XMoveWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				int i1, int i2));
+EXTERN int		XMoveWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XNextEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XNextEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 52 */
-EXTERN int		XNextEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, XEvent *x));
+EXTERN int		XNextEvent(Display *d, XEvent *x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XPutBackEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XPutBackEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 53 */
-EXTERN int		XPutBackEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, XEvent *x));
+EXTERN int		XPutBackEvent(Display *d, XEvent *x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XQueryColors_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XQueryColors_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 54 */
-EXTERN int		XQueryColors _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c,
-				XColor *x, int i));
+EXTERN int		XQueryColors(Display *d, Colormap c, XColor *x,
+				int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XQueryPointer_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XQueryPointer_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 55 */
-EXTERN Bool		XQueryPointer _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w1,
-				Window *w2, Window *w3, int *i1, int *i2,
-				int *i3, int *i4, unsigned int *ui));
+EXTERN Bool		XQueryPointer(Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2,
+				Window *w3, int *i1, int *i2, int *i3,
+				int *i4, unsigned int *ui);
+#endif
+#ifndef XQueryTree_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XQueryTree_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 56 */
-EXTERN Status		XQueryTree _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w1,
-				Window *w2, Window *w3, Window **w4,
-				unsigned int *ui));
+EXTERN Status		XQueryTree(Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2,
+				Window *w3, Window **w4, unsigned int *ui);
+#endif
+#ifndef XRaiseWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XRaiseWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 57 */
-EXTERN int		XRaiseWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w));
+EXTERN int		XRaiseWindow(Display *d, Window w);
+#endif
+#ifndef XRefreshKeyboardMapping_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XRefreshKeyboardMapping_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 58 */
-EXTERN int		XRefreshKeyboardMapping _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				XMappingEvent *x));
+EXTERN int		XRefreshKeyboardMapping(XMappingEvent *x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 59 */
-EXTERN int		XResizeWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2));
+EXTERN int		XResizeWindow(Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui1,
+				unsigned int ui2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSelectInput_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSelectInput_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 60 */
-EXTERN int		XSelectInput _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				long l));
+EXTERN int		XSelectInput(Display *d, Window w, long l);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSendEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSendEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 61 */
-EXTERN Status		XSendEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Bool b,
-				long l, XEvent *x));
+EXTERN Status		XSendEvent(Display *d, Window w, Bool b, long l,
+				XEvent *x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetCommand_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetCommand_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 62 */
-EXTERN int		XSetCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				char **c, int i));
+EXTERN int		XSetCommand(Display *d, Window w, char **c, int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetIconName_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetIconName_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 63 */
-EXTERN int		XSetIconName _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				_Xconst char *c));
+EXTERN int		XSetIconName(Display *d, Window w, _Xconst char *c);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetInputFocus_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetInputFocus_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 64 */
-EXTERN int		XSetInputFocus _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				int i, Time t));
+EXTERN int		XSetInputFocus(Display *d, Window w, int i, Time t);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetSelectionOwner_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetSelectionOwner_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 65 */
-EXTERN int		XSetSelectionOwner _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Atom a,
-				Window w, Time t));
+EXTERN int		XSetSelectionOwner(Display *d, Atom a, Window w,
+				Time t);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetWindowBackground_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetWindowBackground_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 66 */
-EXTERN int		XSetWindowBackground _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				Window w, unsigned long ul));
+EXTERN int		XSetWindowBackground(Display *d, Window w,
+				unsigned long ul);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 67 */
-EXTERN int		XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				Window w, Pixmap p));
+EXTERN int		XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap(Display *d, Window w,
+				Pixmap p);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetWindowBorder_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetWindowBorder_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 68 */
-EXTERN int		XSetWindowBorder _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				unsigned long ul));
+EXTERN int		XSetWindowBorder(Display *d, Window w,
+				unsigned long ul);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetWindowBorderPixmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetWindowBorderPixmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 69 */
-EXTERN int		XSetWindowBorderPixmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				Window w, Pixmap p));
+EXTERN int		XSetWindowBorderPixmap(Display *d, Window w,
+				Pixmap p);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetWindowBorderWidth_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetWindowBorderWidth_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 70 */
-EXTERN int		XSetWindowBorderWidth _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				Window w, unsigned int ui));
+EXTERN int		XSetWindowBorderWidth(Display *d, Window w,
+				unsigned int ui);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetWindowColormap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetWindowColormap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 71 */
-EXTERN int		XSetWindowColormap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				Colormap c));
+EXTERN int		XSetWindowColormap(Display *d, Window w, Colormap c);
+#endif
+#ifndef XTranslateCoordinates_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XTranslateCoordinates_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 72 */
-EXTERN Bool		XTranslateCoordinates _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				Window w1, Window w2, int i1, int i2,
-				int *i3, int *i4, Window *w3));
+EXTERN Bool		XTranslateCoordinates(Display *d, Window w1,
+				Window w2, int i1, int i2, int *i3, int *i4,
+				Window *w3);
+#endif
+#ifndef XUngrabKeyboard_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XUngrabKeyboard_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 73 */
-EXTERN int		XUngrabKeyboard _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Time t));
+EXTERN int		XUngrabKeyboard(Display *d, Time t);
+#endif
+#ifndef XUngrabPointer_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XUngrabPointer_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 74 */
-EXTERN int		XUngrabPointer _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Time t));
+EXTERN int		XUngrabPointer(Display *d, Time t);
+#endif
+#ifndef XUnmapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XUnmapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 75 */
-EXTERN int		XUnmapWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w));
+EXTERN int		XUnmapWindow(Display *d, Window w);
+#endif
+#ifndef XWindowEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XWindowEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 76 */
-EXTERN int		XWindowEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				long l, XEvent *x));
+EXTERN int		XWindowEvent(Display *d, Window w, long l, XEvent *x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDestroyIC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDestroyIC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 77 */
-EXTERN void		XDestroyIC _ANSI_ARGS_((XIC x));
+EXTERN void		XDestroyIC(XIC x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFilterEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFilterEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 78 */
-EXTERN Bool		XFilterEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *x, Window w));
+EXTERN Bool		XFilterEvent(XEvent *x, Window w);
+#endif
+#ifndef XmbLookupString_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XmbLookupString_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 79 */
-EXTERN int		XmbLookupString _ANSI_ARGS_((XIC xi,
-				XKeyPressedEvent *xk, char *c, int i,
-				KeySym *k, Status *s));
+EXTERN int		XmbLookupString(XIC xi, XKeyPressedEvent *xk,
+				char *c, int i, KeySym *k, Status *s);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkPutImage_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkPutImage_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 80 */
-EXTERN int		TkPutImage _ANSI_ARGS_((unsigned long *colors,
-				int ncolors, Display *display, Drawable d,
-				GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y,
+EXTERN int		TkPutImage(unsigned long *colors, int ncolors,
+				Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc,
+				XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y,
 				int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width,
-				unsigned int height));
+				unsigned int height);
+#endif
 /* Slot 81 is reserved */
+#ifndef XParseColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XParseColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 82 */
-EXTERN Status		XParseColor _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Colormap map, _Xconst char *spec,
-				XColor *colorPtr));
+EXTERN Status		XParseColor(Display *display, Colormap map,
+				_Xconst char *spec, XColor *colorPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCreateGC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCreateGC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 83 */
-EXTERN GC		XCreateGC _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d,
-				unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values));
+EXTERN GC		XCreateGC(Display *display, Drawable d,
+				unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFreeGC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFreeGC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 84 */
-EXTERN int		XFreeGC _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc));
+EXTERN int		XFreeGC(Display *display, GC gc);
+#endif
+#ifndef XInternAtom_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XInternAtom_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 85 */
-EXTERN Atom		XInternAtom _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				_Xconst char *atom_name, Bool only_if_exists));
+EXTERN Atom		XInternAtom(Display *display,
+				_Xconst char *atom_name, Bool only_if_exists);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetBackground_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetBackground_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 86 */
-EXTERN int		XSetBackground _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				unsigned long foreground));
+EXTERN int		XSetBackground(Display *display, GC gc,
+				unsigned long foreground);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetForeground_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetForeground_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 87 */
-EXTERN int		XSetForeground _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				unsigned long foreground));
+EXTERN int		XSetForeground(Display *display, GC gc,
+				unsigned long foreground);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetClipMask_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetClipMask_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 88 */
-EXTERN int		XSetClipMask _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				Pixmap pixmap));
+EXTERN int		XSetClipMask(Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap pixmap);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetClipOrigin_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetClipOrigin_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 89 */
-EXTERN int		XSetClipOrigin _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin));
+EXTERN int		XSetClipOrigin(Display *display, GC gc,
+				int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetTSOrigin_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetTSOrigin_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 90 */
-EXTERN int		XSetTSOrigin _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				int ts_x_origin, int ts_y_origin));
+EXTERN int		XSetTSOrigin(Display *display, GC gc,
+				int ts_x_origin, int ts_y_origin);
+#endif
+#ifndef XChangeGC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XChangeGC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 91 */
-EXTERN int		XChangeGC _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, GC gc,
-				unsigned long mask, XGCValues *values));
+EXTERN int		XChangeGC(Display *d, GC gc, unsigned long mask,
+				XGCValues *values);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetFont_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetFont_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 92 */
-EXTERN int		XSetFont _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				Font font));
+EXTERN int		XSetFont(Display *display, GC gc, Font font);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetArcMode_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetArcMode_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 93 */
-EXTERN int		XSetArcMode _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				int arc_mode));
+EXTERN int		XSetArcMode(Display *display, GC gc, int arc_mode);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetStipple_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetStipple_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 94 */
-EXTERN int		XSetStipple _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				Pixmap stipple));
+EXTERN int		XSetStipple(Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap stipple);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetFillRule_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetFillRule_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 95 */
-EXTERN int		XSetFillRule _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				int fill_rule));
+EXTERN int		XSetFillRule(Display *display, GC gc, int fill_rule);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetFillStyle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetFillStyle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 96 */
-EXTERN int		XSetFillStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				int fill_style));
+EXTERN int		XSetFillStyle(Display *display, GC gc,
+				int fill_style);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetFunction_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetFunction_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 97 */
-EXTERN int		XSetFunction _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				int function));
+EXTERN int		XSetFunction(Display *display, GC gc, int function);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetLineAttributes_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetLineAttributes_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 98 */
-EXTERN int		XSetLineAttributes _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				GC gc, unsigned int line_width,
-				int line_style, int cap_style,
-				int join_style));
+EXTERN int		XSetLineAttributes(Display *display, GC gc,
+				unsigned int line_width, int line_style,
+				int cap_style, int join_style);
+#endif
+#ifndef _XInitImageFuncPtrs_TCL_DECLARED
+#define _XInitImageFuncPtrs_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 99 */
-EXTERN int		_XInitImageFuncPtrs _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image));
+EXTERN int		_XInitImageFuncPtrs(XImage *image);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCreateIC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCreateIC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 100 */
-EXTERN XIC		XCreateIC _ANSI_ARGS_(TCL_VARARGS(XIM,xim));
+EXTERN XIC		XCreateIC(XIM xim, ...);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetVisualInfo_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetVisualInfo_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 101 */
-EXTERN XVisualInfo *	XGetVisualInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				long vinfo_mask, XVisualInfo *vinfo_template,
-				int *nitems_return));
+EXTERN XVisualInfo *	XGetVisualInfo(Display *display, long vinfo_mask,
+				XVisualInfo *vinfo_template,
+				int *nitems_return);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetWMClientMachine_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetWMClientMachine_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 102 */
-EXTERN void		XSetWMClientMachine _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Window w, XTextProperty *text_prop));
+EXTERN void		XSetWMClientMachine(Display *display, Window w,
+				XTextProperty *text_prop);
+#endif
+#ifndef XStringListToTextProperty_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XStringListToTextProperty_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 103 */
-EXTERN Status		XStringListToTextProperty _ANSI_ARGS_((char **list,
-				int count, XTextProperty *text_prop_return));
+EXTERN Status		XStringListToTextProperty(char **list, int count,
+				XTextProperty *text_prop_return);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDrawLine_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDrawLine_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 104 */
-EXTERN int		XDrawLine _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g,
-				int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2));
+EXTERN int		XDrawLine(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int x1,
+				int y1, int x2, int y2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XWarpPointer_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XWarpPointer_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 105 */
-EXTERN int		XWarpPointer _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window s,
-				Window dw, int sx, int sy, unsigned int sw,
-				unsigned int sh, int dx, int dy));
+EXTERN int		XWarpPointer(Display *d, Window s, Window dw, int sx,
+				int sy, unsigned int sw, unsigned int sh,
+				int dx, int dy);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFillRectangle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFillRectangle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 106 */
-EXTERN int		XFillRectangle _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y,
-				unsigned int width, unsigned int height));
+EXTERN int		XFillRectangle(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc,
+				int x, int y, unsigned int width,
+				unsigned int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFlush_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFlush_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 107 */
-EXTERN int		XFlush _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display));
+EXTERN int		XFlush(Display *display);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGrabServer_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGrabServer_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 108 */
-EXTERN int		XGrabServer _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display));
+EXTERN int		XGrabServer(Display *display);
+#endif
+#ifndef XUngrabServer_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XUngrabServer_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 109 */
-EXTERN int		XUngrabServer _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display));
+EXTERN int		XUngrabServer(Display *display);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFree_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFree_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 110 */
-EXTERN int		XFree _ANSI_ARGS_((VOID *data));
+EXTERN int		XFree(VOID *data);
+#endif
+#ifndef XNoOp_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XNoOp_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 111 */
-EXTERN int		XNoOp _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display));
+EXTERN int		XNoOp(Display *display);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSynchronize_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSynchronize_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 112 */
-EXTERN XAfterFunction	XSynchronize _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Bool onoff));
+EXTERN XAfterFunction	XSynchronize(Display *display, Bool onoff);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSync_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSync_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 113 */
-EXTERN int		XSync _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Bool discard));
+EXTERN int		XSync(Display *display, Bool discard);
+#endif
+#ifndef XVisualIDFromVisual_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XVisualIDFromVisual_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 114 */
-EXTERN VisualID		XVisualIDFromVisual _ANSI_ARGS_((Visual *visual));
+EXTERN VisualID		XVisualIDFromVisual(Visual *visual);
+#endif
 #endif /* WIN */
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
+#ifndef XSetDashes_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetDashes_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 0 */
-EXTERN int		XSetDashes _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				int dash_offset, _Xconst char *dash_list,
-				int n));
+EXTERN int		XSetDashes(Display *display, GC gc, int dash_offset,
+				_Xconst char *dash_list, int n);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetModifierMapping_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetModifierMapping_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 1 */
-EXTERN XModifierKeymap * XGetModifierMapping _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d));
+EXTERN XModifierKeymap * XGetModifierMapping(Display *d);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCreateImage_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCreateImage_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 2 */
-EXTERN XImage *		XCreateImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Visual *v,
-				unsigned int ui1, int i1, int i2, char *cp,
-				unsigned int ui2, unsigned int ui3, int i3,
-				int i4));
+EXTERN XImage *		XCreateImage(Display *d, Visual *v, unsigned int ui1,
+				int i1, int i2, char *cp, unsigned int ui2,
+				unsigned int ui3, int i3, int i4);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetImage_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetImage_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 3 */
-EXTERN XImage *		XGetImage _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr,
-				int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1,
-				unsigned int ui2, unsigned long ul, int i3));
+EXTERN XImage *		XGetImage(Display *d, Drawable dr, int i1, int i2,
+				unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2,
+				unsigned long ul, int i3);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetAtomName_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetAtomName_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 4 */
-EXTERN char *		XGetAtomName _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Atom a));
+EXTERN char *		XGetAtomName(Display *d, Atom a);
+#endif
+#ifndef XKeysymToString_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XKeysymToString_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 5 */
-EXTERN char *		XKeysymToString _ANSI_ARGS_((KeySym k));
+EXTERN char *		XKeysymToString(KeySym k);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCreateColormap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCreateColormap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 6 */
-EXTERN Colormap		XCreateColormap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				Visual *v, int i));
+EXTERN Colormap		XCreateColormap(Display *d, Window w, Visual *v,
+				int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGContextFromGC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGContextFromGC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 7 */
-EXTERN GContext		XGContextFromGC _ANSI_ARGS_((GC g));
+EXTERN GContext		XGContextFromGC(GC g);
+#endif
+#ifndef XKeycodeToKeysym_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XKeycodeToKeysym_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 8 */
-EXTERN KeySym		XKeycodeToKeysym _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, KeyCode k,
-				int i));
+EXTERN KeySym		XKeycodeToKeysym(Display *d, KeyCode k, int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XStringToKeysym_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XStringToKeysym_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 9 */
-EXTERN KeySym		XStringToKeysym _ANSI_ARGS_((_Xconst char *c));
+EXTERN KeySym		XStringToKeysym(_Xconst char *c);
+#endif
+#ifndef XRootWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XRootWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 10 */
-EXTERN Window		XRootWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, int i));
+EXTERN Window		XRootWindow(Display *d, int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetErrorHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetErrorHandler_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 11 */
-EXTERN XErrorHandler	XSetErrorHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((XErrorHandler x));
+EXTERN XErrorHandler	XSetErrorHandler(XErrorHandler x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XAllocColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XAllocColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 12 */
-EXTERN Status		XAllocColor _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c,
-				XColor *xp));
+EXTERN Status		XAllocColor(Display *d, Colormap c, XColor *xp);
+#endif
+#ifndef XBell_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XBell_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 13 */
-EXTERN int		XBell _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, int i));
+EXTERN int		XBell(Display *d, int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XChangeProperty_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XChangeProperty_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 14 */
-EXTERN void		XChangeProperty _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				Atom a1, Atom a2, int i1, int i2,
-				_Xconst unsigned char *c, int i3));
+EXTERN void		XChangeProperty(Display *d, Window w, Atom a1,
+				Atom a2, int i1, int i2,
+				_Xconst unsigned char *c, int i3);
+#endif
+#ifndef XChangeWindowAttributes_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XChangeWindowAttributes_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 15 */
-EXTERN void		XChangeWindowAttributes _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				Window w, unsigned long ul,
-				XSetWindowAttributes *x));
+EXTERN void		XChangeWindowAttributes(Display *d, Window w,
+				unsigned long ul, XSetWindowAttributes *x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XConfigureWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XConfigureWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 16 */
-EXTERN void		XConfigureWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				unsigned int i, XWindowChanges *x));
+EXTERN void		XConfigureWindow(Display *d, Window w,
+				unsigned int i, XWindowChanges *x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCopyArea_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCopyArea_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 17 */
-EXTERN void		XCopyArea _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr1,
-				Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2,
-				unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3,
-				int i4));
+EXTERN void		XCopyArea(Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2,
+				GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1,
+				unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCopyPlane_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCopyPlane_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 18 */
-EXTERN void		XCopyPlane _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr1,
-				Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2,
-				unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3,
-				int i4, unsigned long ul));
+EXTERN void		XCopyPlane(Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2,
+				GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1,
+				unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4,
+				unsigned long ul);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCreateBitmapFromData_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCreateBitmapFromData_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 19 */
-EXTERN Pixmap		XCreateBitmapFromData _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Drawable d, _Xconst char *data,
-				unsigned int width, unsigned int height));
+EXTERN Pixmap		XCreateBitmapFromData(Display *display, Drawable d,
+				_Xconst char *data, unsigned int width,
+				unsigned int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDefineCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDefineCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 20 */
-EXTERN int		XDefineCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				Cursor c));
+EXTERN int		XDefineCursor(Display *d, Window w, Cursor c);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDestroyWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDestroyWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 21 */
-EXTERN void		XDestroyWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w));
+EXTERN void		XDestroyWindow(Display *d, Window w);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDrawArc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDrawArc_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 22 */
-EXTERN void		XDrawArc _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g,
-				int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1,
-				unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4));
+EXTERN void		XDrawArc(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1,
+				int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2,
+				int i3, int i4);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDrawLines_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDrawLines_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 23 */
-EXTERN int		XDrawLines _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr,
-				GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2));
+EXTERN int		XDrawLines(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x,
+				int i1, int i2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDrawRectangle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDrawRectangle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 24 */
-EXTERN void		XDrawRectangle _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr,
-				GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1,
-				unsigned int ui2));
+EXTERN void		XDrawRectangle(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1,
+				int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFillArc_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFillArc_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 25 */
-EXTERN void		XFillArc _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g,
-				int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1,
-				unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4));
+EXTERN void		XFillArc(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1,
+				int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2,
+				int i3, int i4);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFillPolygon_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFillPolygon_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 26 */
-EXTERN void		XFillPolygon _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr,
-				GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2, int i3));
+EXTERN void		XFillPolygon(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g,
+				XPoint *x, int i1, int i2, int i3);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFillRectangles_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFillRectangles_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 27 */
-EXTERN int		XFillRectangles _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr,
-				GC g, XRectangle *x, int i));
+EXTERN int		XFillRectangles(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g,
+				XRectangle *x, int i);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFreeColormap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFreeColormap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 28 */
-EXTERN int		XFreeColormap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c));
+EXTERN int		XFreeColormap(Display *d, Colormap c);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFreeColors_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFreeColors_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 29 */
-EXTERN int		XFreeColors _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c,
-				unsigned long *ulp, int i, unsigned long ul));
+EXTERN int		XFreeColors(Display *d, Colormap c,
+				unsigned long *ulp, int i, unsigned long ul);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFreeModifiermap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFreeModifiermap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 30 */
-EXTERN int		XFreeModifiermap _ANSI_ARGS_((XModifierKeymap *x));
+EXTERN int		XFreeModifiermap(XModifierKeymap *x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetGeometry_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetGeometry_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 31 */
-EXTERN Status		XGetGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr,
-				Window *w, int *i1, int *i2,
-				unsigned int *ui1, unsigned int *ui2,
-				unsigned int *ui3, unsigned int *ui4));
+EXTERN Status		XGetGeometry(Display *d, Drawable dr, Window *w,
+				int *i1, int *i2, unsigned int *ui1,
+				unsigned int *ui2, unsigned int *ui3,
+				unsigned int *ui4);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetWindowProperty_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetWindowProperty_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 32 */
-EXTERN int		XGetWindowProperty _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				Atom a1, long l1, long l2, Bool b, Atom a2,
-				Atom *ap, int *ip, unsigned long *ulp1,
-				unsigned long *ulp2, unsigned char **cpp));
+EXTERN int		XGetWindowProperty(Display *d, Window w, Atom a1,
+				long l1, long l2, Bool b, Atom a2, Atom *ap,
+				int *ip, unsigned long *ulp1,
+				unsigned long *ulp2, unsigned char **cpp);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGrabKeyboard_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGrabKeyboard_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 33 */
-EXTERN int		XGrabKeyboard _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				Bool b, int i1, int i2, Time t));
+EXTERN int		XGrabKeyboard(Display *d, Window w, Bool b, int i1,
+				int i2, Time t);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGrabPointer_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGrabPointer_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 34 */
-EXTERN int		XGrabPointer _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w1,
-				Bool b, unsigned int ui, int i1, int i2,
-				Window w2, Cursor c, Time t));
+EXTERN int		XGrabPointer(Display *d, Window w1, Bool b,
+				unsigned int ui, int i1, int i2, Window w2,
+				Cursor c, Time t);
+#endif
+#ifndef XKeysymToKeycode_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XKeysymToKeycode_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 35 */
-EXTERN KeyCode		XKeysymToKeycode _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, KeySym k));
+EXTERN KeyCode		XKeysymToKeycode(Display *d, KeySym k);
+#endif
+#ifndef XMapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XMapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 36 */
-EXTERN void		XMapWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w));
+EXTERN void		XMapWindow(Display *d, Window w);
+#endif
+#ifndef XMoveResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XMoveResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 37 */
-EXTERN void		XMoveResizeWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1,
-				unsigned int ui2));
+EXTERN void		XMoveResizeWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i1,
+				int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XMoveWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XMoveWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 38 */
-EXTERN void		XMoveWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				int i1, int i2));
+EXTERN void		XMoveWindow(Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XQueryPointer_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XQueryPointer_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 39 */
-EXTERN Bool		XQueryPointer _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w1,
-				Window *w2, Window *w3, int *i1, int *i2,
-				int *i3, int *i4, unsigned int *ui));
+EXTERN Bool		XQueryPointer(Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2,
+				Window *w3, int *i1, int *i2, int *i3,
+				int *i4, unsigned int *ui);
+#endif
+#ifndef XRaiseWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XRaiseWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 40 */
-EXTERN void		XRaiseWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w));
+EXTERN void		XRaiseWindow(Display *d, Window w);
+#endif
+#ifndef XRefreshKeyboardMapping_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XRefreshKeyboardMapping_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 41 */
-EXTERN void		XRefreshKeyboardMapping _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				XMappingEvent *x));
+EXTERN void		XRefreshKeyboardMapping(XMappingEvent *x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 42 */
-EXTERN void		XResizeWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2));
+EXTERN void		XResizeWindow(Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui1,
+				unsigned int ui2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSelectInput_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSelectInput_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 43 */
-EXTERN void		XSelectInput _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				long l));
+EXTERN void		XSelectInput(Display *d, Window w, long l);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSendEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSendEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 44 */
-EXTERN Status		XSendEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Bool b,
-				long l, XEvent *x));
+EXTERN Status		XSendEvent(Display *d, Window w, Bool b, long l,
+				XEvent *x);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetIconName_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetIconName_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 45 */
-EXTERN void		XSetIconName _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				_Xconst char *c));
+EXTERN void		XSetIconName(Display *d, Window w, _Xconst char *c);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetInputFocus_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetInputFocus_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 46 */
-EXTERN void		XSetInputFocus _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				int i, Time t));
+EXTERN void		XSetInputFocus(Display *d, Window w, int i, Time t);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetSelectionOwner_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetSelectionOwner_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 47 */
-EXTERN int		XSetSelectionOwner _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Atom a,
-				Window w, Time t));
+EXTERN int		XSetSelectionOwner(Display *d, Atom a, Window w,
+				Time t);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetWindowBackground_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetWindowBackground_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 48 */
-EXTERN void		XSetWindowBackground _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				Window w, unsigned long ul));
+EXTERN void		XSetWindowBackground(Display *d, Window w,
+				unsigned long ul);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 49 */
-EXTERN void		XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				Window w, Pixmap p));
+EXTERN void		XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap(Display *d, Window w,
+				Pixmap p);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetWindowBorder_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetWindowBorder_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 50 */
-EXTERN void		XSetWindowBorder _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				unsigned long ul));
+EXTERN void		XSetWindowBorder(Display *d, Window w,
+				unsigned long ul);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetWindowBorderPixmap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetWindowBorderPixmap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 51 */
-EXTERN void		XSetWindowBorderPixmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				Window w, Pixmap p));
+EXTERN void		XSetWindowBorderPixmap(Display *d, Window w,
+				Pixmap p);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetWindowBorderWidth_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetWindowBorderWidth_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 52 */
-EXTERN void		XSetWindowBorderWidth _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d,
-				Window w, unsigned int ui));
+EXTERN void		XSetWindowBorderWidth(Display *d, Window w,
+				unsigned int ui);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetWindowColormap_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetWindowColormap_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 53 */
-EXTERN void		XSetWindowColormap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w,
-				Colormap c));
+EXTERN void		XSetWindowColormap(Display *d, Window w, Colormap c);
+#endif
+#ifndef XUngrabKeyboard_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XUngrabKeyboard_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 54 */
-EXTERN void		XUngrabKeyboard _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Time t));
+EXTERN void		XUngrabKeyboard(Display *d, Time t);
+#endif
+#ifndef XUngrabPointer_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XUngrabPointer_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 55 */
-EXTERN int		XUngrabPointer _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Time t));
+EXTERN int		XUngrabPointer(Display *d, Time t);
+#endif
+#ifndef XUnmapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XUnmapWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 56 */
-EXTERN void		XUnmapWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w));
+EXTERN void		XUnmapWindow(Display *d, Window w);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkPutImage_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkPutImage_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 57 */
-EXTERN int		TkPutImage _ANSI_ARGS_((unsigned long *colors,
-				int ncolors, Display *display, Drawable d,
-				GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y,
+EXTERN int		TkPutImage(unsigned long *colors, int ncolors,
+				Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc,
+				XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y,
 				int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width,
-				unsigned int height));
+				unsigned int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef XParseColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XParseColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 58 */
-EXTERN Status		XParseColor _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Colormap map, _Xconst char *spec,
-				XColor *colorPtr));
+EXTERN Status		XParseColor(Display *display, Colormap map,
+				_Xconst char *spec, XColor *colorPtr);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCreateGC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCreateGC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 59 */
-EXTERN GC		XCreateGC _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d,
-				unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values));
+EXTERN GC		XCreateGC(Display *display, Drawable d,
+				unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFreeGC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFreeGC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 60 */
-EXTERN int		XFreeGC _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc));
+EXTERN int		XFreeGC(Display *display, GC gc);
+#endif
+#ifndef XInternAtom_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XInternAtom_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 61 */
-EXTERN Atom		XInternAtom _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				_Xconst char *atom_name, Bool only_if_exists));
+EXTERN Atom		XInternAtom(Display *display,
+				_Xconst char *atom_name, Bool only_if_exists);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetBackground_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetBackground_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 62 */
-EXTERN int		XSetBackground _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				unsigned long foreground));
+EXTERN int		XSetBackground(Display *display, GC gc,
+				unsigned long foreground);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetForeground_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetForeground_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 63 */
-EXTERN int		XSetForeground _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				unsigned long foreground));
+EXTERN int		XSetForeground(Display *display, GC gc,
+				unsigned long foreground);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetClipMask_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetClipMask_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 64 */
-EXTERN int		XSetClipMask _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				Pixmap pixmap));
+EXTERN int		XSetClipMask(Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap pixmap);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetClipOrigin_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetClipOrigin_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 65 */
-EXTERN int		XSetClipOrigin _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin));
+EXTERN int		XSetClipOrigin(Display *display, GC gc,
+				int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetTSOrigin_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetTSOrigin_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 66 */
-EXTERN int		XSetTSOrigin _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				int ts_x_origin, int ts_y_origin));
+EXTERN int		XSetTSOrigin(Display *display, GC gc,
+				int ts_x_origin, int ts_y_origin);
+#endif
+#ifndef XChangeGC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XChangeGC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 67 */
-EXTERN int		XChangeGC _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, GC gc,
-				unsigned long mask, XGCValues *values));
+EXTERN int		XChangeGC(Display *d, GC gc, unsigned long mask,
+				XGCValues *values);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetFont_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetFont_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 68 */
-EXTERN int		XSetFont _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				Font font));
+EXTERN int		XSetFont(Display *display, GC gc, Font font);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetArcMode_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetArcMode_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 69 */
-EXTERN int		XSetArcMode _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				int arc_mode));
+EXTERN int		XSetArcMode(Display *display, GC gc, int arc_mode);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetStipple_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetStipple_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 70 */
-EXTERN int		XSetStipple _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				Pixmap stipple));
+EXTERN int		XSetStipple(Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap stipple);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetFillRule_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetFillRule_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 71 */
-EXTERN int		XSetFillRule _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				int fill_rule));
+EXTERN int		XSetFillRule(Display *display, GC gc, int fill_rule);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetFillStyle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetFillStyle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 72 */
-EXTERN int		XSetFillStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				int fill_style));
+EXTERN int		XSetFillStyle(Display *display, GC gc,
+				int fill_style);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetFunction_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetFunction_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 73 */
-EXTERN int		XSetFunction _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc,
-				int function));
+EXTERN int		XSetFunction(Display *display, GC gc, int function);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetLineAttributes_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetLineAttributes_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 74 */
-EXTERN int		XSetLineAttributes _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				GC gc, unsigned int line_width,
-				int line_style, int cap_style,
-				int join_style));
+EXTERN int		XSetLineAttributes(Display *display, GC gc,
+				unsigned int line_width, int line_style,
+				int cap_style, int join_style);
+#endif
+#ifndef _XInitImageFuncPtrs_TCL_DECLARED
+#define _XInitImageFuncPtrs_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 75 */
-EXTERN int		_XInitImageFuncPtrs _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image));
+EXTERN int		_XInitImageFuncPtrs(XImage *image);
+#endif
+#ifndef XCreateIC_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XCreateIC_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 76 */
-EXTERN XIC		XCreateIC _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN XIC		XCreateIC(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef XGetVisualInfo_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XGetVisualInfo_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 77 */
-EXTERN XVisualInfo *	XGetVisualInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				long vinfo_mask, XVisualInfo *vinfo_template,
-				int *nitems_return));
+EXTERN XVisualInfo *	XGetVisualInfo(Display *display, long vinfo_mask,
+				XVisualInfo *vinfo_template,
+				int *nitems_return);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSetWMClientMachine_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSetWMClientMachine_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 78 */
-EXTERN void		XSetWMClientMachine _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Window w, XTextProperty *text_prop));
+EXTERN void		XSetWMClientMachine(Display *display, Window w,
+				XTextProperty *text_prop);
+#endif
+#ifndef XStringListToTextProperty_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XStringListToTextProperty_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 79 */
-EXTERN Status		XStringListToTextProperty _ANSI_ARGS_((char **list,
-				int count, XTextProperty *text_prop_return));
+EXTERN Status		XStringListToTextProperty(char **list, int count,
+				XTextProperty *text_prop_return);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDrawSegments_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDrawSegments_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 80 */
-EXTERN void		XDrawSegments _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Drawable d, GC gc, XSegment *segments,
-				int nsegments));
+EXTERN void		XDrawSegments(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc,
+				XSegment *segments, int nsegments);
+#endif
+#ifndef XForceScreenSaver_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XForceScreenSaver_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 81 */
-EXTERN void		XForceScreenSaver _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				int mode));
+EXTERN void		XForceScreenSaver(Display *display, int mode);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDrawLine_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDrawLine_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 82 */
-EXTERN int		XDrawLine _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g,
-				int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2));
+EXTERN int		XDrawLine(Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int x1,
+				int y1, int x2, int y2);
+#endif
+#ifndef XFillRectangle_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XFillRectangle_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 83 */
-EXTERN int		XFillRectangle _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y,
-				unsigned int width, unsigned int height));
+EXTERN int		XFillRectangle(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc,
+				int x, int y, unsigned int width,
+				unsigned int height);
+#endif
+#ifndef XClearWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XClearWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 84 */
-EXTERN void		XClearWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w));
+EXTERN void		XClearWindow(Display *d, Window w);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDrawPoint_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDrawPoint_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 85 */
-EXTERN void		XDrawPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d,
-				GC gc, int x, int y));
+EXTERN void		XDrawPoint(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc,
+				int x, int y);
+#endif
+#ifndef XDrawPoints_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XDrawPoints_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 86 */
-EXTERN void		XDrawPoints _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Drawable d, GC gc, XPoint *points,
-				int npoints, int mode));
+EXTERN void		XDrawPoints(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc,
+				XPoint *points, int npoints, int mode);
+#endif
+#ifndef XWarpPointer_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XWarpPointer_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 87 */
-EXTERN int		XWarpPointer _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Window src_w, Window dest_w, int src_x,
-				int src_y, unsigned int src_width,
+EXTERN int		XWarpPointer(Display *display, Window src_w,
+				Window dest_w, int src_x, int src_y,
+				unsigned int src_width,
 				unsigned int src_height, int dest_x,
-				int dest_y));
+				int dest_y);
+#endif
+#ifndef XQueryColor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XQueryColor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 88 */
-EXTERN void		XQueryColor _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Colormap colormap, XColor *def_in_out));
+EXTERN void		XQueryColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap,
+				XColor *def_in_out);
+#endif
+#ifndef XQueryColors_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XQueryColors_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 89 */
-EXTERN void		XQueryColors _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-				Colormap colormap, XColor *defs_in_out,
-				int ncolors));
+EXTERN void		XQueryColors(Display *display, Colormap colormap,
+				XColor *defs_in_out, int ncolors);
+#endif
+#ifndef XQueryTree_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XQueryTree_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 90 */
-EXTERN Status		XQueryTree _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w1,
-				Window *w2, Window *w3, Window **w4,
-				unsigned int *ui));
+EXTERN Status		XQueryTree(Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2,
+				Window *w3, Window **w4, unsigned int *ui);
+#endif
+#ifndef XSync_TCL_DECLARED
+#define XSync_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 91 */
-EXTERN int		XSync _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Bool flag));
+EXTERN int		XSync(Display *display, Bool flag);
+#endif
 #endif /* AQUA */
 
 typedef struct TkIntXlibStubs {
@@ -679,215 +1241,215 @@ typedef struct TkIntXlibStubs {
     struct TkIntXlibStubHooks *hooks;
 
 #if defined(__WIN32__) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */
-    int (*xSetDashes) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, int dash_offset, _Xconst char *dash_list, int n)); /* 0 */
-    XModifierKeymap * (*xGetModifierMapping) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d)); /* 1 */
-    XImage * (*xCreateImage) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Visual *v, unsigned int ui1, int i1, int i2, char *cp, unsigned int ui2, unsigned int ui3, int i3, int i4)); /* 2 */
-    XImage * (*xGetImage) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, unsigned long ul, int i3)); /* 3 */
-    char * (*xGetAtomName) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Atom a)); /* 4 */
-    char * (*xKeysymToString) _ANSI_ARGS_((KeySym k)); /* 5 */
-    Colormap (*xCreateColormap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Visual *v, int i)); /* 6 */
-    Cursor (*xCreatePixmapCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Pixmap p1, Pixmap p2, XColor *x1, XColor *x2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2)); /* 7 */
-    Cursor (*xCreateGlyphCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Font f1, Font f2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, XColor _Xconst *x1, XColor _Xconst *x2)); /* 8 */
-    GContext (*xGContextFromGC) _ANSI_ARGS_((GC g)); /* 9 */
-    XHostAddress * (*xListHosts) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, int *i, Bool *b)); /* 10 */
-    KeySym (*xKeycodeToKeysym) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, unsigned int k, int i)); /* 11 */
-    KeySym (*xStringToKeysym) _ANSI_ARGS_((_Xconst char *c)); /* 12 */
-    Window (*xRootWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, int i)); /* 13 */
-    XErrorHandler (*xSetErrorHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((XErrorHandler x)); /* 14 */
-    Status (*xIconifyWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, int i)); /* 15 */
-    Status (*xWithdrawWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, int i)); /* 16 */
-    Status (*xGetWMColormapWindows) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Window **wpp, int *ip)); /* 17 */
-    Status (*xAllocColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c, XColor *xp)); /* 18 */
-    int (*xBell) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, int i)); /* 19 */
-    int (*xChangeProperty) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, Atom a2, int i1, int i2, _Xconst unsigned char *c, int i3)); /* 20 */
-    int (*xChangeWindowAttributes) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul, XSetWindowAttributes *x)); /* 21 */
-    int (*xClearWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w)); /* 22 */
-    int (*xConfigureWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, unsigned int i, XWindowChanges *x)); /* 23 */
-    int (*xCopyArea) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4)); /* 24 */
-    int (*xCopyPlane) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4, unsigned long ul)); /* 25 */
-    Pixmap (*xCreateBitmapFromData) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d, _Xconst char *data, unsigned int width, unsigned int height)); /* 26 */
-    int (*xDefineCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Cursor c)); /* 27 */
-    int (*xDeleteProperty) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Atom a)); /* 28 */
-    int (*xDestroyWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w)); /* 29 */
-    int (*xDrawArc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4)); /* 30 */
-    int (*xDrawLines) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2)); /* 31 */
-    int (*xDrawRectangle) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2)); /* 32 */
-    int (*xFillArc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4)); /* 33 */
-    int (*xFillPolygon) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2, int i3)); /* 34 */
-    int (*xFillRectangles) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XRectangle *x, int i)); /* 35 */
-    int (*xForceScreenSaver) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, int i)); /* 36 */
-    int (*xFreeColormap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c)); /* 37 */
-    int (*xFreeColors) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c, unsigned long *ulp, int i, unsigned long ul)); /* 38 */
-    int (*xFreeCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Cursor c)); /* 39 */
-    int (*xFreeModifiermap) _ANSI_ARGS_((XModifierKeymap *x)); /* 40 */
-    Status (*xGetGeometry) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, Window *w, int *i1, int *i2, unsigned int *ui1, unsigned int *ui2, unsigned int *ui3, unsigned int *ui4)); /* 41 */
-    int (*xGetInputFocus) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window *w, int *i)); /* 42 */
-    int (*xGetWindowProperty) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, long l1, long l2, Bool b, Atom a2, Atom *ap, int *ip, unsigned long *ulp1, unsigned long *ulp2, unsigned char **cpp)); /* 43 */
-    Status (*xGetWindowAttributes) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, XWindowAttributes *x)); /* 44 */
-    int (*xGrabKeyboard) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Bool b, int i1, int i2, Time t)); /* 45 */
-    int (*xGrabPointer) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w1, Bool b, unsigned int ui, int i1, int i2, Window w2, Cursor c, Time t)); /* 46 */
-    KeyCode (*xKeysymToKeycode) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, KeySym k)); /* 47 */
-    Status (*xLookupColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c1, _Xconst char *c2, XColor *x1, XColor *x2)); /* 48 */
-    int (*xMapWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w)); /* 49 */
-    int (*xMoveResizeWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2)); /* 50 */
-    int (*xMoveWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2)); /* 51 */
-    int (*xNextEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, XEvent *x)); /* 52 */
-    int (*xPutBackEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, XEvent *x)); /* 53 */
-    int (*xQueryColors) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c, XColor *x, int i)); /* 54 */
-    Bool (*xQueryPointer) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, int *i1, int *i2, int *i3, int *i4, unsigned int *ui)); /* 55 */
-    Status (*xQueryTree) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, Window **w4, unsigned int *ui)); /* 56 */
-    int (*xRaiseWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w)); /* 57 */
-    int (*xRefreshKeyboardMapping) _ANSI_ARGS_((XMappingEvent *x)); /* 58 */
-    int (*xResizeWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2)); /* 59 */
-    int (*xSelectInput) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, long l)); /* 60 */
-    Status (*xSendEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Bool b, long l, XEvent *x)); /* 61 */
-    int (*xSetCommand) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, char **c, int i)); /* 62 */
-    int (*xSetIconName) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, _Xconst char *c)); /* 63 */
-    int (*xSetInputFocus) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, int i, Time t)); /* 64 */
-    int (*xSetSelectionOwner) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Atom a, Window w, Time t)); /* 65 */
-    int (*xSetWindowBackground) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul)); /* 66 */
-    int (*xSetWindowBackgroundPixmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p)); /* 67 */
-    int (*xSetWindowBorder) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul)); /* 68 */
-    int (*xSetWindowBorderPixmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p)); /* 69 */
-    int (*xSetWindowBorderWidth) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui)); /* 70 */
-    int (*xSetWindowColormap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Colormap c)); /* 71 */
-    Bool (*xTranslateCoordinates) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w1, Window w2, int i1, int i2, int *i3, int *i4, Window *w3)); /* 72 */
-    int (*xUngrabKeyboard) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Time t)); /* 73 */
-    int (*xUngrabPointer) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Time t)); /* 74 */
-    int (*xUnmapWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w)); /* 75 */
-    int (*xWindowEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, long l, XEvent *x)); /* 76 */
-    void (*xDestroyIC) _ANSI_ARGS_((XIC x)); /* 77 */
-    Bool (*xFilterEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *x, Window w)); /* 78 */
-    int (*xmbLookupString) _ANSI_ARGS_((XIC xi, XKeyPressedEvent *xk, char *c, int i, KeySym *k, Status *s)); /* 79 */
-    int (*tkPutImage) _ANSI_ARGS_((unsigned long *colors, int ncolors, Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y, int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height)); /* 80 */
+    int (*xSetDashes) (Display *display, GC gc, int dash_offset, _Xconst char *dash_list, int n); /* 0 */
+    XModifierKeymap * (*xGetModifierMapping) (Display *d); /* 1 */
+    XImage * (*xCreateImage) (Display *d, Visual *v, unsigned int ui1, int i1, int i2, char *cp, unsigned int ui2, unsigned int ui3, int i3, int i4); /* 2 */
+    XImage * (*xGetImage) (Display *d, Drawable dr, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, unsigned long ul, int i3); /* 3 */
+    char * (*xGetAtomName) (Display *d, Atom a); /* 4 */
+    char * (*xKeysymToString) (KeySym k); /* 5 */
+    Colormap (*xCreateColormap) (Display *d, Window w, Visual *v, int i); /* 6 */
+    Cursor (*xCreatePixmapCursor) (Display *d, Pixmap p1, Pixmap p2, XColor *x1, XColor *x2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 7 */
+    Cursor (*xCreateGlyphCursor) (Display *d, Font f1, Font f2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, XColor _Xconst *x1, XColor _Xconst *x2); /* 8 */
+    GContext (*xGContextFromGC) (GC g); /* 9 */
+    XHostAddress * (*xListHosts) (Display *d, int *i, Bool *b); /* 10 */
+    KeySym (*xKeycodeToKeysym) (Display *d, unsigned int k, int i); /* 11 */
+    KeySym (*xStringToKeysym) (_Xconst char *c); /* 12 */
+    Window (*xRootWindow) (Display *d, int i); /* 13 */
+    XErrorHandler (*xSetErrorHandler) (XErrorHandler x); /* 14 */
+    Status (*xIconifyWindow) (Display *d, Window w, int i); /* 15 */
+    Status (*xWithdrawWindow) (Display *d, Window w, int i); /* 16 */
+    Status (*xGetWMColormapWindows) (Display *d, Window w, Window **wpp, int *ip); /* 17 */
+    Status (*xAllocColor) (Display *d, Colormap c, XColor *xp); /* 18 */
+    int (*xBell) (Display *d, int i); /* 19 */
+    int (*xChangeProperty) (Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, Atom a2, int i1, int i2, _Xconst unsigned char *c, int i3); /* 20 */
+    int (*xChangeWindowAttributes) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul, XSetWindowAttributes *x); /* 21 */
+    int (*xClearWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 22 */
+    int (*xConfigureWindow) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned int i, XWindowChanges *x); /* 23 */
+    int (*xCopyArea) (Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4); /* 24 */
+    int (*xCopyPlane) (Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4, unsigned long ul); /* 25 */
+    Pixmap (*xCreateBitmapFromData) (Display *display, Drawable d, _Xconst char *data, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 26 */
+    int (*xDefineCursor) (Display *d, Window w, Cursor c); /* 27 */
+    int (*xDeleteProperty) (Display *d, Window w, Atom a); /* 28 */
+    int (*xDestroyWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 29 */
+    int (*xDrawArc) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4); /* 30 */
+    int (*xDrawLines) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2); /* 31 */
+    int (*xDrawRectangle) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 32 */
+    int (*xFillArc) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4); /* 33 */
+    int (*xFillPolygon) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2, int i3); /* 34 */
+    int (*xFillRectangles) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XRectangle *x, int i); /* 35 */
+    int (*xForceScreenSaver) (Display *d, int i); /* 36 */
+    int (*xFreeColormap) (Display *d, Colormap c); /* 37 */
+    int (*xFreeColors) (Display *d, Colormap c, unsigned long *ulp, int i, unsigned long ul); /* 38 */
+    int (*xFreeCursor) (Display *d, Cursor c); /* 39 */
+    int (*xFreeModifiermap) (XModifierKeymap *x); /* 40 */
+    Status (*xGetGeometry) (Display *d, Drawable dr, Window *w, int *i1, int *i2, unsigned int *ui1, unsigned int *ui2, unsigned int *ui3, unsigned int *ui4); /* 41 */
+    int (*xGetInputFocus) (Display *d, Window *w, int *i); /* 42 */
+    int (*xGetWindowProperty) (Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, long l1, long l2, Bool b, Atom a2, Atom *ap, int *ip, unsigned long *ulp1, unsigned long *ulp2, unsigned char **cpp); /* 43 */
+    Status (*xGetWindowAttributes) (Display *d, Window w, XWindowAttributes *x); /* 44 */
+    int (*xGrabKeyboard) (Display *d, Window w, Bool b, int i1, int i2, Time t); /* 45 */
+    int (*xGrabPointer) (Display *d, Window w1, Bool b, unsigned int ui, int i1, int i2, Window w2, Cursor c, Time t); /* 46 */
+    KeyCode (*xKeysymToKeycode) (Display *d, KeySym k); /* 47 */
+    Status (*xLookupColor) (Display *d, Colormap c1, _Xconst char *c2, XColor *x1, XColor *x2); /* 48 */
+    int (*xMapWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 49 */
+    int (*xMoveResizeWindow) (Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 50 */
+    int (*xMoveWindow) (Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2); /* 51 */
+    int (*xNextEvent) (Display *d, XEvent *x); /* 52 */
+    int (*xPutBackEvent) (Display *d, XEvent *x); /* 53 */
+    int (*xQueryColors) (Display *d, Colormap c, XColor *x, int i); /* 54 */
+    Bool (*xQueryPointer) (Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, int *i1, int *i2, int *i3, int *i4, unsigned int *ui); /* 55 */
+    Status (*xQueryTree) (Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, Window **w4, unsigned int *ui); /* 56 */
+    int (*xRaiseWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 57 */
+    int (*xRefreshKeyboardMapping) (XMappingEvent *x); /* 58 */
+    int (*xResizeWindow) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 59 */
+    int (*xSelectInput) (Display *d, Window w, long l); /* 60 */
+    Status (*xSendEvent) (Display *d, Window w, Bool b, long l, XEvent *x); /* 61 */
+    int (*xSetCommand) (Display *d, Window w, char **c, int i); /* 62 */
+    int (*xSetIconName) (Display *d, Window w, _Xconst char *c); /* 63 */
+    int (*xSetInputFocus) (Display *d, Window w, int i, Time t); /* 64 */
+    int (*xSetSelectionOwner) (Display *d, Atom a, Window w, Time t); /* 65 */
+    int (*xSetWindowBackground) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul); /* 66 */
+    int (*xSetWindowBackgroundPixmap) (Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p); /* 67 */
+    int (*xSetWindowBorder) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul); /* 68 */
+    int (*xSetWindowBorderPixmap) (Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p); /* 69 */
+    int (*xSetWindowBorderWidth) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui); /* 70 */
+    int (*xSetWindowColormap) (Display *d, Window w, Colormap c); /* 71 */
+    Bool (*xTranslateCoordinates) (Display *d, Window w1, Window w2, int i1, int i2, int *i3, int *i4, Window *w3); /* 72 */
+    int (*xUngrabKeyboard) (Display *d, Time t); /* 73 */
+    int (*xUngrabPointer) (Display *d, Time t); /* 74 */
+    int (*xUnmapWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 75 */
+    int (*xWindowEvent) (Display *d, Window w, long l, XEvent *x); /* 76 */
+    void (*xDestroyIC) (XIC x); /* 77 */
+    Bool (*xFilterEvent) (XEvent *x, Window w); /* 78 */
+    int (*xmbLookupString) (XIC xi, XKeyPressedEvent *xk, char *c, int i, KeySym *k, Status *s); /* 79 */
+    int (*tkPutImage) (unsigned long *colors, int ncolors, Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y, int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 80 */
     VOID *reserved81;
-    Status (*xParseColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Colormap map, _Xconst char *spec, XColor *colorPtr)); /* 82 */
-    GC (*xCreateGC) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d, unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values)); /* 83 */
-    int (*xFreeGC) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc)); /* 84 */
-    Atom (*xInternAtom) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, _Xconst char *atom_name, Bool only_if_exists)); /* 85 */
-    int (*xSetBackground) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground)); /* 86 */
-    int (*xSetForeground) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground)); /* 87 */
-    int (*xSetClipMask) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap pixmap)); /* 88 */
-    int (*xSetClipOrigin) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin)); /* 89 */
-    int (*xSetTSOrigin) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, int ts_x_origin, int ts_y_origin)); /* 90 */
-    int (*xChangeGC) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, GC gc, unsigned long mask, XGCValues *values)); /* 91 */
-    int (*xSetFont) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, Font font)); /* 92 */
-    int (*xSetArcMode) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, int arc_mode)); /* 93 */
-    int (*xSetStipple) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap stipple)); /* 94 */
-    int (*xSetFillRule) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, int fill_rule)); /* 95 */
-    int (*xSetFillStyle) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, int fill_style)); /* 96 */
-    int (*xSetFunction) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, int function)); /* 97 */
-    int (*xSetLineAttributes) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, unsigned int line_width, int line_style, int cap_style, int join_style)); /* 98 */
-    int (*_XInitImageFuncPtrs) _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image)); /* 99 */
-    XIC (*xCreateIC) _ANSI_ARGS_((XIM xim, ...)); /* 100 */
-    XVisualInfo * (*xGetVisualInfo) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, long vinfo_mask, XVisualInfo *vinfo_template, int *nitems_return)); /* 101 */
-    void (*xSetWMClientMachine) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Window w, XTextProperty *text_prop)); /* 102 */
-    Status (*xStringListToTextProperty) _ANSI_ARGS_((char **list, int count, XTextProperty *text_prop_return)); /* 103 */
-    int (*xDrawLine) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2)); /* 104 */
-    int (*xWarpPointer) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window s, Window dw, int sx, int sy, unsigned int sw, unsigned int sh, int dx, int dy)); /* 105 */
-    int (*xFillRectangle) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height)); /* 106 */
-    int (*xFlush) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display)); /* 107 */
-    int (*xGrabServer) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display)); /* 108 */
-    int (*xUngrabServer) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display)); /* 109 */
-    int (*xFree) _ANSI_ARGS_((VOID *data)); /* 110 */
-    int (*xNoOp) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display)); /* 111 */
-    XAfterFunction (*xSynchronize) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Bool onoff)); /* 112 */
-    int (*xSync) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Bool discard)); /* 113 */
-    VisualID (*xVisualIDFromVisual) _ANSI_ARGS_((Visual *visual)); /* 114 */
+    Status (*xParseColor) (Display *display, Colormap map, _Xconst char *spec, XColor *colorPtr); /* 82 */
+    GC (*xCreateGC) (Display *display, Drawable d, unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values); /* 83 */
+    int (*xFreeGC) (Display *display, GC gc); /* 84 */
+    Atom (*xInternAtom) (Display *display, _Xconst char *atom_name, Bool only_if_exists); /* 85 */
+    int (*xSetBackground) (Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground); /* 86 */
+    int (*xSetForeground) (Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground); /* 87 */
+    int (*xSetClipMask) (Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap pixmap); /* 88 */
+    int (*xSetClipOrigin) (Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin); /* 89 */
+    int (*xSetTSOrigin) (Display *display, GC gc, int ts_x_origin, int ts_y_origin); /* 90 */
+    int (*xChangeGC) (Display *d, GC gc, unsigned long mask, XGCValues *values); /* 91 */
+    int (*xSetFont) (Display *display, GC gc, Font font); /* 92 */
+    int (*xSetArcMode) (Display *display, GC gc, int arc_mode); /* 93 */
+    int (*xSetStipple) (Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap stipple); /* 94 */
+    int (*xSetFillRule) (Display *display, GC gc, int fill_rule); /* 95 */
+    int (*xSetFillStyle) (Display *display, GC gc, int fill_style); /* 96 */
+    int (*xSetFunction) (Display *display, GC gc, int function); /* 97 */
+    int (*xSetLineAttributes) (Display *display, GC gc, unsigned int line_width, int line_style, int cap_style, int join_style); /* 98 */
+    int (*_XInitImageFuncPtrs) (XImage *image); /* 99 */
+    XIC (*xCreateIC) (XIM xim, ...); /* 100 */
+    XVisualInfo * (*xGetVisualInfo) (Display *display, long vinfo_mask, XVisualInfo *vinfo_template, int *nitems_return); /* 101 */
+    void (*xSetWMClientMachine) (Display *display, Window w, XTextProperty *text_prop); /* 102 */
+    Status (*xStringListToTextProperty) (char **list, int count, XTextProperty *text_prop_return); /* 103 */
+    int (*xDrawLine) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2); /* 104 */
+    int (*xWarpPointer) (Display *d, Window s, Window dw, int sx, int sy, unsigned int sw, unsigned int sh, int dx, int dy); /* 105 */
+    int (*xFillRectangle) (Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 106 */
+    int (*xFlush) (Display *display); /* 107 */
+    int (*xGrabServer) (Display *display); /* 108 */
+    int (*xUngrabServer) (Display *display); /* 109 */
+    int (*xFree) (VOID *data); /* 110 */
+    int (*xNoOp) (Display *display); /* 111 */
+    XAfterFunction (*xSynchronize) (Display *display, Bool onoff); /* 112 */
+    int (*xSync) (Display *display, Bool discard); /* 113 */
+    VisualID (*xVisualIDFromVisual) (Visual *visual); /* 114 */
 #endif /* WIN */
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
-    int (*xSetDashes) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, int dash_offset, _Xconst char *dash_list, int n)); /* 0 */
-    XModifierKeymap * (*xGetModifierMapping) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d)); /* 1 */
-    XImage * (*xCreateImage) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Visual *v, unsigned int ui1, int i1, int i2, char *cp, unsigned int ui2, unsigned int ui3, int i3, int i4)); /* 2 */
-    XImage * (*xGetImage) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, unsigned long ul, int i3)); /* 3 */
-    char * (*xGetAtomName) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Atom a)); /* 4 */
-    char * (*xKeysymToString) _ANSI_ARGS_((KeySym k)); /* 5 */
-    Colormap (*xCreateColormap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Visual *v, int i)); /* 6 */
-    GContext (*xGContextFromGC) _ANSI_ARGS_((GC g)); /* 7 */
-    KeySym (*xKeycodeToKeysym) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, KeyCode k, int i)); /* 8 */
-    KeySym (*xStringToKeysym) _ANSI_ARGS_((_Xconst char *c)); /* 9 */
-    Window (*xRootWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, int i)); /* 10 */
-    XErrorHandler (*xSetErrorHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((XErrorHandler x)); /* 11 */
-    Status (*xAllocColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c, XColor *xp)); /* 12 */
-    int (*xBell) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, int i)); /* 13 */
-    void (*xChangeProperty) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, Atom a2, int i1, int i2, _Xconst unsigned char *c, int i3)); /* 14 */
-    void (*xChangeWindowAttributes) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul, XSetWindowAttributes *x)); /* 15 */
-    void (*xConfigureWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, unsigned int i, XWindowChanges *x)); /* 16 */
-    void (*xCopyArea) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4)); /* 17 */
-    void (*xCopyPlane) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4, unsigned long ul)); /* 18 */
-    Pixmap (*xCreateBitmapFromData) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d, _Xconst char *data, unsigned int width, unsigned int height)); /* 19 */
-    int (*xDefineCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Cursor c)); /* 20 */
-    void (*xDestroyWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w)); /* 21 */
-    void (*xDrawArc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4)); /* 22 */
-    int (*xDrawLines) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2)); /* 23 */
-    void (*xDrawRectangle) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2)); /* 24 */
-    void (*xFillArc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4)); /* 25 */
-    void (*xFillPolygon) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2, int i3)); /* 26 */
-    int (*xFillRectangles) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XRectangle *x, int i)); /* 27 */
-    int (*xFreeColormap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c)); /* 28 */
-    int (*xFreeColors) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Colormap c, unsigned long *ulp, int i, unsigned long ul)); /* 29 */
-    int (*xFreeModifiermap) _ANSI_ARGS_((XModifierKeymap *x)); /* 30 */
-    Status (*xGetGeometry) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, Window *w, int *i1, int *i2, unsigned int *ui1, unsigned int *ui2, unsigned int *ui3, unsigned int *ui4)); /* 31 */
-    int (*xGetWindowProperty) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, long l1, long l2, Bool b, Atom a2, Atom *ap, int *ip, unsigned long *ulp1, unsigned long *ulp2, unsigned char **cpp)); /* 32 */
-    int (*xGrabKeyboard) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Bool b, int i1, int i2, Time t)); /* 33 */
-    int (*xGrabPointer) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w1, Bool b, unsigned int ui, int i1, int i2, Window w2, Cursor c, Time t)); /* 34 */
-    KeyCode (*xKeysymToKeycode) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, KeySym k)); /* 35 */
-    void (*xMapWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w)); /* 36 */
-    void (*xMoveResizeWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2)); /* 37 */
-    void (*xMoveWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2)); /* 38 */
-    Bool (*xQueryPointer) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, int *i1, int *i2, int *i3, int *i4, unsigned int *ui)); /* 39 */
-    void (*xRaiseWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w)); /* 40 */
-    void (*xRefreshKeyboardMapping) _ANSI_ARGS_((XMappingEvent *x)); /* 41 */
-    void (*xResizeWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2)); /* 42 */
-    void (*xSelectInput) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, long l)); /* 43 */
-    Status (*xSendEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Bool b, long l, XEvent *x)); /* 44 */
-    void (*xSetIconName) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, _Xconst char *c)); /* 45 */
-    void (*xSetInputFocus) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, int i, Time t)); /* 46 */
-    int (*xSetSelectionOwner) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Atom a, Window w, Time t)); /* 47 */
-    void (*xSetWindowBackground) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul)); /* 48 */
-    void (*xSetWindowBackgroundPixmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p)); /* 49 */
-    void (*xSetWindowBorder) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul)); /* 50 */
-    void (*xSetWindowBorderPixmap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p)); /* 51 */
-    void (*xSetWindowBorderWidth) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui)); /* 52 */
-    void (*xSetWindowColormap) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w, Colormap c)); /* 53 */
-    void (*xUngrabKeyboard) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Time t)); /* 54 */
-    int (*xUngrabPointer) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Time t)); /* 55 */
-    void (*xUnmapWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w)); /* 56 */
-    int (*tkPutImage) _ANSI_ARGS_((unsigned long *colors, int ncolors, Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y, int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height)); /* 57 */
-    Status (*xParseColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Colormap map, _Xconst char *spec, XColor *colorPtr)); /* 58 */
-    GC (*xCreateGC) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d, unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values)); /* 59 */
-    int (*xFreeGC) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc)); /* 60 */
-    Atom (*xInternAtom) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, _Xconst char *atom_name, Bool only_if_exists)); /* 61 */
-    int (*xSetBackground) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground)); /* 62 */
-    int (*xSetForeground) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground)); /* 63 */
-    int (*xSetClipMask) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap pixmap)); /* 64 */
-    int (*xSetClipOrigin) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin)); /* 65 */
-    int (*xSetTSOrigin) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, int ts_x_origin, int ts_y_origin)); /* 66 */
-    int (*xChangeGC) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, GC gc, unsigned long mask, XGCValues *values)); /* 67 */
-    int (*xSetFont) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, Font font)); /* 68 */
-    int (*xSetArcMode) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, int arc_mode)); /* 69 */
-    int (*xSetStipple) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap stipple)); /* 70 */
-    int (*xSetFillRule) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, int fill_rule)); /* 71 */
-    int (*xSetFillStyle) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, int fill_style)); /* 72 */
-    int (*xSetFunction) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, int function)); /* 73 */
-    int (*xSetLineAttributes) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, GC gc, unsigned int line_width, int line_style, int cap_style, int join_style)); /* 74 */
-    int (*_XInitImageFuncPtrs) _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image)); /* 75 */
-    XIC (*xCreateIC) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 76 */
-    XVisualInfo * (*xGetVisualInfo) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, long vinfo_mask, XVisualInfo *vinfo_template, int *nitems_return)); /* 77 */
-    void (*xSetWMClientMachine) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Window w, XTextProperty *text_prop)); /* 78 */
-    Status (*xStringListToTextProperty) _ANSI_ARGS_((char **list, int count, XTextProperty *text_prop_return)); /* 79 */
-    void (*xDrawSegments) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XSegment *segments, int nsegments)); /* 80 */
-    void (*xForceScreenSaver) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, int mode)); /* 81 */
-    int (*xDrawLine) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2)); /* 82 */
-    int (*xFillRectangle) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height)); /* 83 */
-    void (*xClearWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w)); /* 84 */
-    void (*xDrawPoint) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y)); /* 85 */
-    void (*xDrawPoints) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XPoint *points, int npoints, int mode)); /* 86 */
-    int (*xWarpPointer) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Window src_w, Window dest_w, int src_x, int src_y, unsigned int src_width, unsigned int src_height, int dest_x, int dest_y)); /* 87 */
-    void (*xQueryColor) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *def_in_out)); /* 88 */
-    void (*xQueryColors) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *defs_in_out, int ncolors)); /* 89 */
-    Status (*xQueryTree) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, Window **w4, unsigned int *ui)); /* 90 */
-    int (*xSync) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display, Bool flag)); /* 91 */
+    int (*xSetDashes) (Display *display, GC gc, int dash_offset, _Xconst char *dash_list, int n); /* 0 */
+    XModifierKeymap * (*xGetModifierMapping) (Display *d); /* 1 */
+    XImage * (*xCreateImage) (Display *d, Visual *v, unsigned int ui1, int i1, int i2, char *cp, unsigned int ui2, unsigned int ui3, int i3, int i4); /* 2 */
+    XImage * (*xGetImage) (Display *d, Drawable dr, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, unsigned long ul, int i3); /* 3 */
+    char * (*xGetAtomName) (Display *d, Atom a); /* 4 */
+    char * (*xKeysymToString) (KeySym k); /* 5 */
+    Colormap (*xCreateColormap) (Display *d, Window w, Visual *v, int i); /* 6 */
+    GContext (*xGContextFromGC) (GC g); /* 7 */
+    KeySym (*xKeycodeToKeysym) (Display *d, KeyCode k, int i); /* 8 */
+    KeySym (*xStringToKeysym) (_Xconst char *c); /* 9 */
+    Window (*xRootWindow) (Display *d, int i); /* 10 */
+    XErrorHandler (*xSetErrorHandler) (XErrorHandler x); /* 11 */
+    Status (*xAllocColor) (Display *d, Colormap c, XColor *xp); /* 12 */
+    int (*xBell) (Display *d, int i); /* 13 */
+    void (*xChangeProperty) (Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, Atom a2, int i1, int i2, _Xconst unsigned char *c, int i3); /* 14 */
+    void (*xChangeWindowAttributes) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul, XSetWindowAttributes *x); /* 15 */
+    void (*xConfigureWindow) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned int i, XWindowChanges *x); /* 16 */
+    void (*xCopyArea) (Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4); /* 17 */
+    void (*xCopyPlane) (Display *d, Drawable dr1, Drawable dr2, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4, unsigned long ul); /* 18 */
+    Pixmap (*xCreateBitmapFromData) (Display *display, Drawable d, _Xconst char *data, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 19 */
+    int (*xDefineCursor) (Display *d, Window w, Cursor c); /* 20 */
+    void (*xDestroyWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 21 */
+    void (*xDrawArc) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4); /* 22 */
+    int (*xDrawLines) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2); /* 23 */
+    void (*xDrawRectangle) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 24 */
+    void (*xFillArc) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2, int i3, int i4); /* 25 */
+    void (*xFillPolygon) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XPoint *x, int i1, int i2, int i3); /* 26 */
+    int (*xFillRectangles) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, XRectangle *x, int i); /* 27 */
+    int (*xFreeColormap) (Display *d, Colormap c); /* 28 */
+    int (*xFreeColors) (Display *d, Colormap c, unsigned long *ulp, int i, unsigned long ul); /* 29 */
+    int (*xFreeModifiermap) (XModifierKeymap *x); /* 30 */
+    Status (*xGetGeometry) (Display *d, Drawable dr, Window *w, int *i1, int *i2, unsigned int *ui1, unsigned int *ui2, unsigned int *ui3, unsigned int *ui4); /* 31 */
+    int (*xGetWindowProperty) (Display *d, Window w, Atom a1, long l1, long l2, Bool b, Atom a2, Atom *ap, int *ip, unsigned long *ulp1, unsigned long *ulp2, unsigned char **cpp); /* 32 */
+    int (*xGrabKeyboard) (Display *d, Window w, Bool b, int i1, int i2, Time t); /* 33 */
+    int (*xGrabPointer) (Display *d, Window w1, Bool b, unsigned int ui, int i1, int i2, Window w2, Cursor c, Time t); /* 34 */
+    KeyCode (*xKeysymToKeycode) (Display *d, KeySym k); /* 35 */
+    void (*xMapWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 36 */
+    void (*xMoveResizeWindow) (Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 37 */
+    void (*xMoveWindow) (Display *d, Window w, int i1, int i2); /* 38 */
+    Bool (*xQueryPointer) (Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, int *i1, int *i2, int *i3, int *i4, unsigned int *ui); /* 39 */
+    void (*xRaiseWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 40 */
+    void (*xRefreshKeyboardMapping) (XMappingEvent *x); /* 41 */
+    void (*xResizeWindow) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui1, unsigned int ui2); /* 42 */
+    void (*xSelectInput) (Display *d, Window w, long l); /* 43 */
+    Status (*xSendEvent) (Display *d, Window w, Bool b, long l, XEvent *x); /* 44 */
+    void (*xSetIconName) (Display *d, Window w, _Xconst char *c); /* 45 */
+    void (*xSetInputFocus) (Display *d, Window w, int i, Time t); /* 46 */
+    int (*xSetSelectionOwner) (Display *d, Atom a, Window w, Time t); /* 47 */
+    void (*xSetWindowBackground) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul); /* 48 */
+    void (*xSetWindowBackgroundPixmap) (Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p); /* 49 */
+    void (*xSetWindowBorder) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned long ul); /* 50 */
+    void (*xSetWindowBorderPixmap) (Display *d, Window w, Pixmap p); /* 51 */
+    void (*xSetWindowBorderWidth) (Display *d, Window w, unsigned int ui); /* 52 */
+    void (*xSetWindowColormap) (Display *d, Window w, Colormap c); /* 53 */
+    void (*xUngrabKeyboard) (Display *d, Time t); /* 54 */
+    int (*xUngrabPointer) (Display *d, Time t); /* 55 */
+    void (*xUnmapWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 56 */
+    int (*tkPutImage) (unsigned long *colors, int ncolors, Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image, int src_x, int src_y, int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 57 */
+    Status (*xParseColor) (Display *display, Colormap map, _Xconst char *spec, XColor *colorPtr); /* 58 */
+    GC (*xCreateGC) (Display *display, Drawable d, unsigned long valuemask, XGCValues *values); /* 59 */
+    int (*xFreeGC) (Display *display, GC gc); /* 60 */
+    Atom (*xInternAtom) (Display *display, _Xconst char *atom_name, Bool only_if_exists); /* 61 */
+    int (*xSetBackground) (Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground); /* 62 */
+    int (*xSetForeground) (Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground); /* 63 */
+    int (*xSetClipMask) (Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap pixmap); /* 64 */
+    int (*xSetClipOrigin) (Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin, int clip_y_origin); /* 65 */
+    int (*xSetTSOrigin) (Display *display, GC gc, int ts_x_origin, int ts_y_origin); /* 66 */
+    int (*xChangeGC) (Display *d, GC gc, unsigned long mask, XGCValues *values); /* 67 */
+    int (*xSetFont) (Display *display, GC gc, Font font); /* 68 */
+    int (*xSetArcMode) (Display *display, GC gc, int arc_mode); /* 69 */
+    int (*xSetStipple) (Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap stipple); /* 70 */
+    int (*xSetFillRule) (Display *display, GC gc, int fill_rule); /* 71 */
+    int (*xSetFillStyle) (Display *display, GC gc, int fill_style); /* 72 */
+    int (*xSetFunction) (Display *display, GC gc, int function); /* 73 */
+    int (*xSetLineAttributes) (Display *display, GC gc, unsigned int line_width, int line_style, int cap_style, int join_style); /* 74 */
+    int (*_XInitImageFuncPtrs) (XImage *image); /* 75 */
+    XIC (*xCreateIC) (void); /* 76 */
+    XVisualInfo * (*xGetVisualInfo) (Display *display, long vinfo_mask, XVisualInfo *vinfo_template, int *nitems_return); /* 77 */
+    void (*xSetWMClientMachine) (Display *display, Window w, XTextProperty *text_prop); /* 78 */
+    Status (*xStringListToTextProperty) (char **list, int count, XTextProperty *text_prop_return); /* 79 */
+    void (*xDrawSegments) (Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XSegment *segments, int nsegments); /* 80 */
+    void (*xForceScreenSaver) (Display *display, int mode); /* 81 */
+    int (*xDrawLine) (Display *d, Drawable dr, GC g, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2); /* 82 */
+    int (*xFillRectangle) (Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height); /* 83 */
+    void (*xClearWindow) (Display *d, Window w); /* 84 */
+    void (*xDrawPoint) (Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y); /* 85 */
+    void (*xDrawPoints) (Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XPoint *points, int npoints, int mode); /* 86 */
+    int (*xWarpPointer) (Display *display, Window src_w, Window dest_w, int src_x, int src_y, unsigned int src_width, unsigned int src_height, int dest_x, int dest_y); /* 87 */
+    void (*xQueryColor) (Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *def_in_out); /* 88 */
+    void (*xQueryColors) (Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor *defs_in_out, int ncolors); /* 89 */
+    Status (*xQueryTree) (Display *d, Window w1, Window *w2, Window *w3, Window **w4, unsigned int *ui); /* 90 */
+    int (*xSync) (Display *display, Bool flag); /* 91 */
 #endif /* AQUA */
 } TkIntXlibStubs;
 
diff --git a/generic/tkListbox.c b/generic/tkListbox.c
index 103cd9d..d803d7b 100644
--- a/generic/tkListbox.c
+++ b/generic/tkListbox.c
@@ -1,18 +1,17 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkListbox.c --
  *
- *	This module implements listbox widgets for the Tk
- *	toolkit.  A listbox displays a collection of strings,
- *	one per line, and provides scrolling and selection.
+ *	This module implements listbox widgets for the Tk toolkit. A listbox
+ *	displays a collection of strings, one per line, and provides scrolling
+ *	and selection.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "default.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
@@ -21,38 +20,40 @@
 #endif
 
 typedef struct {
-    Tk_OptionTable listboxOptionTable;	/* Table defining configuration options
-					 * available for the listbox */
-    Tk_OptionTable itemAttrOptionTable;	/* Table definining configuration
-					 * options available for listbox
-					 * items */
+    Tk_OptionTable listboxOptionTable;
+				/* Table defining configuration options
+				 * available for the listbox. */
+    Tk_OptionTable itemAttrOptionTable;
+				/* Table definining configuration options
+				 * available for listbox items. */
 } ListboxOptionTables;
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each listbox
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each listbox widget
+ * managed by this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the listbox.  NULL
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the listbox. NULL
 				 * means that the window has been destroyed
 				 * but the data structures haven't yet been
-				 * cleaned up.*/
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget.  Used, among
+				 * cleaned up. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget. Used, among
 				 * other things, so that resources can be
 				 * freed even after tkwin has gone away. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with listbox. */
     Tcl_Command widgetCmd;	/* Token for listbox's widget command. */
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Table that defines configuration options
 				 * available for this widget. */
-    Tk_OptionTable itemAttrOptionTable;	/* Table that defines configuration
-					 * options available for listbox
-					 * items */
-    char *listVarName;          /* List variable name */
-    Tcl_Obj *listObj;           /* Pointer to the list object being used */
-    int nElements;              /* Holds the current count of elements */
-    Tcl_HashTable *selection;   /* Tracks selection */
-    Tcl_HashTable *itemAttrTable;	/* Tracks item attributes */
+    Tk_OptionTable itemAttrOptionTable;
+				/* Table that defines configuration options
+				 * available for listbox items. */
+    char *listVarName;		/* List variable name */
+    Tcl_Obj *listObj;		/* Pointer to the list object being used */
+    int nElements;		/* Holds the current count of elements */
+    Tcl_HashTable *selection;	/* Tracks selection */
+    Tcl_HashTable *itemAttrTable;
+				/* Tracks item attributes */
 
     /*
      * Information used when displaying widget:
@@ -62,18 +63,18 @@ typedef struct {
 				 * window, plus used for background. */
     int borderWidth;		/* Width of 3-D border around window. */
     int relief;			/* 3-D effect: TK_RELIEF_RAISED, etc. */
-    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw
-				 * around widget when it has the focus.
-				 * <= 0 means don't draw a highlight. */
+    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw around
+				 * widget when it has the focus. <= 0 means
+				 * don't draw a highlight. */
     XColor *highlightBgColorPtr;
-				/* Color for drawing traversal highlight
-				 * area when highlight is off. */
+				/* Color for drawing traversal highlight area
+				 * when highlight is off. */
     XColor *highlightColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing traversal highlight. */
     int inset;			/* Total width of all borders, including
 				 * traversal highlight and 3-D border.
-				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must
-				 * be offset from outside edges to leave
-				 * room for borders. */
+				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must be
+				 * offset from outside edges to leave room for
+				 * borders. */
     Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Information about text font, or NULL. */
     XColor *fgColorPtr;		/* Text color in normal mode. */
     XColor *dfgColorPtr;	/* Text color in disabled mode. */
@@ -85,20 +86,20 @@ typedef struct {
     GC selTextGC;		/* For drawing selected text. */
     int width;			/* Desired width of window, in characters. */
     int height;			/* Desired height of window, in lines. */
-    int lineHeight;		/* Number of pixels allocated for each line
-				 * in display. */
+    int lineHeight;		/* Number of pixels allocated for each line in
+				 * display. */
     int topIndex;		/* Index of top-most element visible in
 				 * window. */
     int fullLines;		/* Number of lines that fit are completely
-				 * visible in window.  There may be one
+				 * visible in window. There may be one
 				 * additional line at the bottom that is
 				 * partially visible. */
     int partialLine;		/* 0 means that the window holds exactly
-				 * fullLines lines.  1 means that there is
-				 * one additional line that is partially
+				 * fullLines lines. 1 means that there is one
+				 * additional line that is partially
 				 * visble. */
-    int setGrid;		/* Non-zero means pass gridding information
-				 * to window manager. */
+    int setGrid;		/* Non-zero means pass gridding information to
+				 * window manager. */
 
     /*
      * Information to support horizontal scrolling:
@@ -110,26 +111,26 @@ typedef struct {
 				 * horizontal scrolling (window scrolls
 				 * horizontally in increments of this size).
 				 * This is an average character size. */
-    int xOffset;		/* The left edge of each string in the
-				 * listbox is offset to the left by this
-				 * many pixels (0 means no offset, positive
-				 * means there is an offset). */
+    int xOffset;		/* The left edge of each string in the listbox
+				 * is offset to the left by this many pixels
+				 * (0 means no offset, positive means there is
+				 * an offset). */
 
     /*
      * Information about what's selected or active, if any.
      */
 
     Tk_Uid selectMode;		/* Selection style: single, browse, multiple,
-				 * or extended.  This value isn't used in C
+				 * or extended. This value isn't used in C
 				 * code, but the Tcl bindings use it. */
     int numSelected;		/* Number of elements currently selected. */
-    int selectAnchor;		/* Fixed end of selection (i.e. element
-				 * at which selection was started.) */
-    int exportSelection;	/* Non-zero means tie internal listbox
-				 * to X selection. */
-    int active;			/* Index of "active" element (the one that
-				 * has been selected by keyboard traversal).
-				 * -1 means none. */
+    int selectAnchor;		/* Fixed end of selection (i.e. element at
+				 * which selection was started.) */
+    int exportSelection;	/* Non-zero means tie internal listbox to X
+				 * selection. */
+    int active;			/* Index of "active" element (the one that has
+				 * been selected by keyboard traversal). -1
+				 * means none. */
     int activeStyle;		/* style in which to draw the active element.
 				 * One of: underline, none, dotbox */
 
@@ -151,18 +152,18 @@ typedef struct {
      */
 
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
-    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option;  not used in
-				 * the C code, but used by keyboard traversal
-				 * scripts.  Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
+    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
+				 * C code, but used by keyboard traversal
+				 * scripts. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
     char *yScrollCmd;		/* Command prefix for communicating with
-				 * vertical scrollbar.  NULL means no command
-				 * to issue.  Malloc'ed. */
+				 * vertical scrollbar. NULL means no command
+				 * to issue. Malloc'ed. */
     char *xScrollCmd;		/* Command prefix for communicating with
-				 * horizontal scrollbar.  NULL means no command
-				 * to issue.  Malloc'ed. */
+				 * horizontal scrollbar. NULL means no command
+				 * to issue. Malloc'ed. */
     int state;			/* Listbox state. */
     Pixmap gray;		/* Pixmap for displaying disabled text. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flag bits:  see below for
+    int flags;			/* Various flag bits: see below for
 				 * definitions. */
 } Listbox;
 
@@ -170,26 +171,26 @@ typedef struct {
  * ItemAttr structures are used to store item configuration information for
  * the items in a listbox
  */
+
 typedef struct {
     Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Used for drawing background around text */
     Tk_3DBorder selBorder;	/* Used for selected text */
     XColor *fgColor;		/* Text color in normal mode. */
     XColor *selFgColor;		/* Text color in selected mode. */
-} ItemAttr;    
+} ItemAttr;
 
 /*
  * Flag bits for listboxes:
  *
- * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler
- *				has already been queued to redraw
- *				this window.
- * UPDATE_V_SCROLLBAR:		Non-zero means vertical scrollbar needs
- *				to be updated.
- * UPDATE_H_SCROLLBAR:		Non-zero means horizontal scrollbar needs
- *				to be updated.
- * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this widget currently
- *				has the input focus.
- * MAXWIDTH_IS_STALE:           Stored maxWidth may be out-of-date
+ * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler has
+ *				already been queued to redraw this window.
+ * UPDATE_V_SCROLLBAR:		Non-zero means vertical scrollbar needs to be
+ *				updated.
+ * UPDATE_H_SCROLLBAR:		Non-zero means horizontal scrollbar needs to
+ *				be updated.
+ * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this widget currently has the
+ *				input focus.
+ * MAXWIDTH_IS_STALE:		Stored maxWidth may be out-of-date
  * LISTBOX_DELETED:		This listbox has been effectively destroyed.
  */
 
@@ -201,42 +202,43 @@ typedef struct {
 #define LISTBOX_DELETED		32
 
 /*
- * The following enum is used to define a type for the -state option
- * of the Entry widget.  These values are used as indices into the 
- * string table below.
+ * The following enum is used to define a type for the -state option of the
+ * Listbox widget. These values are used as indices into the string table
+ * below.
  */
 
 enum state {
     STATE_DISABLED, STATE_NORMAL
 };
 
-static CONST char *CONST stateStrings[] = {
-    "disabled", "normal", (char *) NULL
+static const char *const stateStrings[] = {
+    "disabled", "normal", NULL
 };
 
 enum activeStyle {
     ACTIVE_STYLE_DOTBOX, ACTIVE_STYLE_NONE, ACTIVE_STYLE_UNDERLINE
 };
 
-static CONST char *CONST activeStyleStrings[] = {
-    "dotbox", "none", "underline", (char *) NULL
+static const char *const activeStyleStrings[] = {
+    "dotbox", "none", "underline", NULL
 };
 
 /*
  * The optionSpecs table defines the valid configuration options for the
- * listbox widget
+ * listbox widget.
  */
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+
+static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-activestyle", "activeStyle", "ActiveStyle",
 	DEF_LISTBOX_ACTIVE_STYLE, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, activeStyle),
-        0, (ClientData) activeStyleStrings, 0},
+	0, (ClientData) activeStyleStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	 DEF_LISTBOX_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, normalBorder),
 	 0, (ClientData) DEF_LISTBOX_BG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	 (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	 (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	 NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
+	 NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
 	 DEF_LISTBOX_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, borderWidth),
 	 0, 0, 0},
@@ -249,8 +251,8 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection",
 	 "ExportSelection", DEF_LISTBOX_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1,
 	 Tk_Offset(Listbox, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
-	 (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
+	 NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	 DEF_LISTBOX_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
@@ -258,7 +260,7 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-height", "height", "Height",
 	 DEF_LISTBOX_HEIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, height), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
-	 "HighlightBackground", DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT_BG, -1, 
+	 "HighlightBackground", DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT_BG, -1,
 	 Tk_Offset(Listbox, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
 	 DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, highlightColorPtr),
@@ -283,8 +285,8 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-setgrid", "setGrid", "SetGrid",
 	 DEF_LISTBOX_SET_GRID, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, setGrid), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
-	DEF_LISTBOX_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, state), 
-        0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
+	DEF_LISTBOX_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, state),
+	0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
 	 DEF_LISTBOX_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, takeFocus),
 	 TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
@@ -299,50 +301,48 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-listvariable", "listVariable", "Variable",
 	 DEF_LISTBOX_LIST_VARIABLE, -1, Tk_Offset(Listbox, listVarName),
 	 TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	 (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
  * The itemAttrOptionSpecs table defines the valid configuration options for
  * listbox items
  */
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec itemAttrOptionSpecs[] = {
+
+static const Tk_OptionSpec itemAttrOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
-     (char *)NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(ItemAttr, border),
+     NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(ItemAttr, border),
      TK_OPTION_NULL_OK|TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT,
      (ClientData) DEF_LISTBOX_BG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-     (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
-     (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
+     NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
+     NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
-     (char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(ItemAttr, fgColor),
+     NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(ItemAttr, fgColor),
      TK_OPTION_NULL_OK|TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground",
-     (char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(ItemAttr, selBorder),
+     NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(ItemAttr, selBorder),
      TK_OPTION_NULL_OK|TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT,
      (ClientData) DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background",
-     (char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(ItemAttr, selFgColor),
+     NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(ItemAttr, selFgColor),
      TK_OPTION_NULL_OK|TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT,
      (ClientData) DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_FG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-     (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * The following tables define the listbox widget commands (and sub-
- * commands) and map the indexes into the string tables into 
- * enumerated types used to dispatch the listbox widget command.
+ * The following tables define the listbox widget commands (and sub- commands)
+ * and map the indexes into the string tables into enumerated types used to
+ * dispatch the listbox widget command.
  */
-static CONST char *commandNames[] = {
+
+static const char *commandNames[] = {
     "activate", "bbox", "cget", "configure", "curselection", "delete", "get",
     "index", "insert", "itemcget", "itemconfigure", "nearest", "scan",
-    "see", "selection", "size", "xview", "yview",
-    (char *) NULL
+    "see", "selection", "size", "xview", "yview", NULL
 };
-
 enum command {
     COMMAND_ACTIVATE, COMMAND_BBOX, COMMAND_CGET, COMMAND_CONFIGURE,
     COMMAND_CURSELECTION, COMMAND_DELETE, COMMAND_GET, COMMAND_INDEX,
@@ -351,99 +351,84 @@ enum command {
     COMMAND_SIZE, COMMAND_XVIEW, COMMAND_YVIEW
 };
 
-static CONST char *selCommandNames[] = {
-    "anchor", "clear", "includes", "set", (char *) NULL
+static const char *selCommandNames[] = {
+    "anchor", "clear", "includes", "set", NULL
 };
-
 enum selcommand {
     SELECTION_ANCHOR, SELECTION_CLEAR, SELECTION_INCLUDES, SELECTION_SET
 };
 
-static CONST char *scanCommandNames[] = {
-    "mark", "dragto", (char *) NULL
+static const char *scanCommandNames[] = {
+    "mark", "dragto", NULL
 };
-
 enum scancommand {
     SCAN_MARK, SCAN_DRAGTO
 };
 
-static CONST char *indexNames[] = {
-    "active", "anchor", "end", (char *)NULL
+static const char *indexNames[] = {
+    "active", "anchor", "end", NULL
 };
-
 enum indices {
     INDEX_ACTIVE, INDEX_ANCHOR, INDEX_END
 };
 
+/*
+ * Declarations for procedures defined later in this file.
+ */
 
-/* Declarations for procedures defined later in this file */
-static void		ChangeListboxOffset _ANSI_ARGS_((Listbox *listPtr,
-			    int offset));
-static void		ChangeListboxView _ANSI_ARGS_((Listbox *listPtr,
-			    int index));
-static int		ConfigureListbox _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Listbox *listPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
-			    int flags));
-static int		ConfigureListboxItem _ANSI_ARGS_ ((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static void		ChangeListboxOffset(Listbox *listPtr, int offset);
+static void		ChangeListboxView(Listbox *listPtr, int index);
+static int		ConfigureListbox(Tcl_Interp *interp, Listbox *listPtr,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int flags);
+static int		ConfigureListboxItem(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Listbox *listPtr, ItemAttr *attrs, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int index));
-static int		ListboxDeleteSubCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Listbox *listPtr,
-			    int first, int last));
-static void		DestroyListbox _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static void		DestroyListboxOptionTables _ANSI_ARGS_ (
-			    (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static void		DisplayListbox _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int		GetListboxIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Listbox *listPtr, Tcl_Obj *index, int endIsSize,
-			    int *indexPtr));
-static int		ListboxInsertSubCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Listbox *listPtr,
-			    int index, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		ListboxCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		ListboxComputeGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Listbox *listPtr,
-			    int fontChanged, int maxIsStale, int updateGrid));
-static void		ListboxEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int		ListboxFetchSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, int offset, char *buffer,
-			    int maxBytes));
-static void		ListboxLostSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		EventuallyRedrawRange _ANSI_ARGS_((Listbox *listPtr,
-			    int first, int last));
-static void		ListboxScanTo _ANSI_ARGS_((Listbox *listPtr,
-			    int x, int y));
-static int		ListboxSelect _ANSI_ARGS_((Listbox *listPtr,
-			    int first, int last, int select));
-static void		ListboxUpdateHScrollbar _ANSI_ARGS_(
-    			    (Listbox *listPtr));
-static void		ListboxUpdateVScrollbar _ANSI_ARGS_(
-			    (Listbox *listPtr));
-static int		ListboxWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-	                    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-	                    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		ListboxBboxSubCmd _ANSI_ARGS_ ((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-	                    Listbox *listPtr, int index));
-static int		ListboxSelectionSubCmd _ANSI_ARGS_ (
-			    (Tcl_Interp *interp, Listbox *listPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		ListboxXviewSubCmd _ANSI_ARGS_ ((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Listbox *listPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		ListboxYviewSubCmd _ANSI_ARGS_ ((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Listbox *listPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static ItemAttr *	ListboxGetItemAttributes _ANSI_ARGS_ (
-    			    (Tcl_Interp *interp, Listbox *listPtr, int index));
-static void		ListboxWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData instanceData));
-static int		NearestListboxElement _ANSI_ARGS_((Listbox *listPtr,
-			    int y));
-static char *		ListboxListVarProc _ANSI_ARGS_ ((ClientData clientData,
-	                    Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name1,
-			    CONST char *name2, int flags));
-static void		MigrateHashEntries _ANSI_ARGS_ ((Tcl_HashTable *table,
-			    int first, int last, int offset));
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int index);
+static int		ListboxDeleteSubCmd(Listbox *listPtr,
+			    int first, int last);
+static void		DestroyListbox(char *memPtr);
+static void		DestroyListboxOptionTables(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static void		DisplayListbox(ClientData clientData);
+static int		GetListboxIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, Listbox *listPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *index, int endIsSize, int *indexPtr);
+static int		ListboxInsertSubCmd(Listbox *listPtr,
+			    int index, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		ListboxCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		ListboxComputeGeometry(Listbox *listPtr,
+			    int fontChanged, int maxIsStale, int updateGrid);
+static void		ListboxEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		ListboxFetchSelection(ClientData clientData,
+			    int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes);
+static void		ListboxLostSelection(ClientData clientData);
+static void		EventuallyRedrawRange(Listbox *listPtr,
+			    int first, int last);
+static void		ListboxScanTo(Listbox *listPtr, int x, int y);
+static int		ListboxSelect(Listbox *listPtr,
+			    int first, int last, int select);
+static void		ListboxUpdateHScrollbar(Listbox *listPtr);
+static void		ListboxUpdateVScrollbar(Listbox *listPtr);
+static int		ListboxWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		ListboxBboxSubCmd(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Listbox *listPtr, int index);
+static int		ListboxSelectionSubCmd(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Listbox *listPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		ListboxXviewSubCmd(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Listbox *listPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		ListboxYviewSubCmd(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Listbox *listPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static ItemAttr *	ListboxGetItemAttributes(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Listbox *listPtr, int index);
+static void		ListboxWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
+static int		NearestListboxElement(Listbox *listPtr, int y);
+static char *		ListboxListVarProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name1,
+			    const char *name2, int flags);
+static void		MigrateHashEntries(Tcl_HashTable *table,
+			    int first, int last, int offset);
+
 /*
  * The structure below defines button class behavior by means of procedures
  * that can be invoked from generic window code.
@@ -452,17 +437,17 @@ static void		MigrateHashEntries _ANSI_ARGS_ ((Tcl_HashTable *table,
 static Tk_ClassProcs listboxClass = {
     sizeof(Tk_ClassProcs),	/* size */
     ListboxWorldChanged,	/* worldChangedProc */
+    NULL,					/* createProc */
+    NULL					/* modalProc */
 };
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_ListboxObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "listbox" Tcl
- *	command.  See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the "listbox" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -474,11 +459,11 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs listboxClass = {
  */
 
 int
-Tk_ListboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_ListboxObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     register Listbox *listPtr;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
@@ -490,7 +475,7 @@ Tk_ListboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL);
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -499,56 +484,64 @@ Tk_ListboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "ListboxOptionTables", NULL);
     if (optionTables == NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * We haven't created the option tables for this widget class yet.
-	 * Do it now and save the a pointer to them as the ClientData for
-	 * the command, so future invocations will have access to it.
+	 * We haven't created the option tables for this widget class yet. Do
+	 * it now and save the a pointer to them as the ClientData for the
+	 * command, so future invocations will have access to it.
 	 */
 
 	optionTables = (ListboxOptionTables *)
-	    ckalloc(sizeof(ListboxOptionTables));
-	/* Set up an exit handler to free the optionTables struct */
+		ckalloc(sizeof(ListboxOptionTables));
+
+	/*
+	 * Set up an exit handler to free the optionTables struct.
+	 */
+
 	Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, "ListboxOptionTables",
 		DestroyListboxOptionTables, (ClientData) optionTables);
 
-	/* Create the listbox option table and the listbox item option table */
+	/*
+	 * Create the listbox option table and the listbox item option table.
+	 */
+
 	optionTables->listboxOptionTable =
-	    Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
+		Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
 	optionTables->itemAttrOptionTable =
-	    Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, itemAttrOptionSpecs);
+		Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, itemAttrOptionSpecs);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Initialize the fields of the structure that won't be initialized
-     * by ConfigureListbox, or that ConfigureListbox requires to be
-     * initialized already (e.g. resource pointers).
+     * Initialize the fields of the structure that won't be initialized by
+     * ConfigureListbox, or that ConfigureListbox requires to be initialized
+     * already (e.g. resource pointers).
      */
-    listPtr 				= (Listbox *) ckalloc(sizeof(Listbox));
-    memset((void *) listPtr, 0, (sizeof(Listbox)));
 
-    listPtr->tkwin 			= tkwin;
-    listPtr->display 			= Tk_Display(tkwin);
-    listPtr->interp 			= interp;
-    listPtr->widgetCmd 			= Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
+    listPtr			 = (Listbox *) ckalloc(sizeof(Listbox));
+    memset(listPtr, 0, (sizeof(Listbox)));
+
+    listPtr->tkwin		 = tkwin;
+    listPtr->display		 = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    listPtr->interp		 = interp;
+    listPtr->widgetCmd		 = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
 	    Tk_PathName(listPtr->tkwin), ListboxWidgetObjCmd,
 	    (ClientData) listPtr, ListboxCmdDeletedProc);
-    listPtr->optionTable 		= optionTables->listboxOptionTable;
-    listPtr->itemAttrOptionTable	= optionTables->itemAttrOptionTable;
-    listPtr->selection 			=
-	(Tcl_HashTable *) ckalloc(sizeof(Tcl_HashTable));
+    listPtr->optionTable	 = optionTables->listboxOptionTable;
+    listPtr->itemAttrOptionTable = optionTables->itemAttrOptionTable;
+    listPtr->selection		 = (Tcl_HashTable *)
+	    ckalloc(sizeof(Tcl_HashTable));
     Tcl_InitHashTable(listPtr->selection, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
-    listPtr->itemAttrTable 		=
-	(Tcl_HashTable *) ckalloc(sizeof(Tcl_HashTable));
+    listPtr->itemAttrTable	 = (Tcl_HashTable *)
+	    ckalloc(sizeof(Tcl_HashTable));
     Tcl_InitHashTable(listPtr->itemAttrTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
-    listPtr->relief 			= TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
-    listPtr->textGC 			= None;
-    listPtr->selFgColorPtr 		= None;
-    listPtr->selTextGC 			= None;
-    listPtr->fullLines 			= 1;
-    listPtr->xScrollUnit 		= 1;
-    listPtr->exportSelection 		= 1;
-    listPtr->cursor 			= None;
-    listPtr->state			= STATE_NORMAL;
-    listPtr->gray			= None;
+    listPtr->relief		 = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    listPtr->textGC		 = None;
+    listPtr->selFgColorPtr	 = None;
+    listPtr->selTextGC		 = None;
+    listPtr->fullLines		 = 1;
+    listPtr->xScrollUnit	 = 1;
+    listPtr->exportSelection	 = 1;
+    listPtr->cursor		 = None;
+    listPtr->state		 = STATE_NORMAL;
+    listPtr->gray		 = None;
 
     /*
      * Keep a hold of the associated tkwin until we destroy the listbox,
@@ -585,8 +578,8 @@ Tk_ListboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  * ListboxWidgetObjCmd --
  *
  *	This Tcl_Obj based procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *      that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.  See the user
- *      documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module. See the user
+ *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -598,25 +591,26 @@ Tk_ListboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-ListboxWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about listbox widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Arguments as Tcl_Obj's. */
+ListboxWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about listbox widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Arguments as Tcl_Obj's. */
 {
     register Listbox *listPtr = (Listbox *) clientData;
     int cmdIndex, index;
     int result = TCL_OK;
-    
+
     if (objc < 2) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Parse the command by looking up the second argument in the list
-     * of valid subcommand names
+     * Parse the command by looking up the second argument in the list of
+     * valid subcommand names
      */
+
     result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], commandNames,
 	    "option", 0, &cmdIndex);
     if (result != TCL_OK) {
@@ -624,448 +618,436 @@ ListboxWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData)listPtr);
-    /* The subcommand was valid, so continue processing */
-    switch (cmdIndex) {
-	case COMMAND_ACTIVATE: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &index);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		break;
-	    }
 
-	    if (!(listPtr->state & STATE_NORMAL)) {
-		break;
-	    }
+    /*
+     * The subcommand was valid, so continue processing.
+     */
 
-	    if (index >= listPtr->nElements) {
-		index = listPtr->nElements-1;
-	    }
-	    if (index < 0) {
-		index = 0;
-	    }
-	    listPtr->active = index;
-	    EventuallyRedrawRange(listPtr, listPtr->active, listPtr->active);
-	    result = TCL_OK;
+    switch (cmdIndex) {
+    case COMMAND_ACTIVATE:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    break;
+	}
+	result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &index);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    break;
 	}
 
-	case COMMAND_BBOX: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &index);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		break;
-	    }
-	    
-	    result = ListboxBboxSubCmd(interp, listPtr, index);
+	if (!(listPtr->state & STATE_NORMAL)) {
 	    break;
 	}
 
-	case COMMAND_CGET: {
-	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
+	if (index >= listPtr->nElements) {
+	    index = listPtr->nElements-1;
+	}
+	if (index < 0) {
+	    index = 0;
+	}
+	listPtr->active = index;
+	EventuallyRedrawRange(listPtr, listPtr->active, listPtr->active);
+	result = TCL_OK;
+	break;
 
-	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *)listPtr,
-		    listPtr->optionTable, objv[2], listPtr->tkwin);
-	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-	    result = TCL_OK;
+    case COMMAND_BBOX:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    break;
 	}
-	
-	case COMMAND_CONFIGURE: {
-	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
-	    if (objc <= 3) {
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) listPtr,
-			listPtr->optionTable,
-			(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-			listPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		    break;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		    result = TCL_OK;
-		}
-	    } else {
-		result = ConfigureListbox(interp, listPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0);
-	    }
+	result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &index);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    break;
 	}
 
-	case COMMAND_CURSELECTION: {
-	    char indexStringRep[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	    int i;
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    /*
-	     * Of course, it would be more efficient to use the Tcl_HashTable
-	     * search functions (Tcl_FirstHashEntry, Tcl_NextHashEntry), but
-	     * then the result wouldn't be in sorted order.  So instead we
-	     * loop through the indices in order, adding them to the result
-	     * if they are selected
-	     */
-	    for (i = 0; i < listPtr->nElements; i++) {
-		if (Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, (char *)i) != NULL) {
-		    sprintf(indexStringRep, "%d", i);
-		    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, indexStringRep);
-		}
-	    }
-	    result = TCL_OK;
+	result = ListboxBboxSubCmd(interp, listPtr, index);
+	break;
+
+    case COMMAND_CGET: {
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    break;
 	}
-	
-	case COMMAND_DELETE: {
-	    int first, last;
-	    if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
 
-	    result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &first);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		break;
-	    }
+	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) listPtr,
+		listPtr->optionTable, objv[2], listPtr->tkwin);
+	if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    break;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	result = TCL_OK;
+	break;
+    }
 
-	    if (!(listPtr->state & STATE_NORMAL)) {
-		break;
-	    }
+    case COMMAND_CONFIGURE: {
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
 
-	    if (first < listPtr->nElements) {
-		/*
-		 * if a "last index" was given, get it now; otherwise, use the
-		 * first index as the last index
-		 */
-		if (objc == 4) {
-		    result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr,
-			    objv[3], 0, &last);
-		    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-			break;
-		    }
-		} else {
-		    last = first;
-		}
-		if (last >= listPtr->nElements) {
-		    last = listPtr->nElements - 1;
-		}
-		result = ListboxDeleteSubCmd(listPtr, first, last);
+	if (objc <= 3) {
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) listPtr,
+		    listPtr->optionTable,
+		    (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL, listPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
+		break;
 	    } else {
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
 		result = TCL_OK;
 	    }
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureListbox(interp, listPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case COMMAND_CURSELECTION: {
+	char indexStringRep[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+	int i;
+
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    break;
 	}
 
-	case COMMAND_GET: {
-	    int first, last;
-	    Tcl_Obj **elemPtrs;
-	    int listLen;
-	    if (objc != 3 && objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &first);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		break;
+	/*
+	 * Of course, it would be more efficient to use the Tcl_HashTable
+	 * search functions (Tcl_FirstHashEntry, Tcl_NextHashEntry), but then
+	 * the result wouldn't be in sorted order. So instead we loop through
+	 * the indices in order, adding them to the result if they are
+	 * selected.
+	 */
+
+	for (i = 0; i < listPtr->nElements; i++) {
+	    if (Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, (char *) INT2PTR(i))) {
+		sprintf(indexStringRep, "%d", i);
+		Tcl_AppendElement(interp, indexStringRep);
 	    }
-	    last = first;
+	}
+	result = TCL_OK;
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case COMMAND_DELETE: {
+	int first, last;
+
+	if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &first);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	if (!(listPtr->state & STATE_NORMAL)) {
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	if (first < listPtr->nElements) {
+	    /*
+	     * if a "last index" was given, get it now; otherwise, use the
+	     * first index as the last index.
+	     */
+
 	    if (objc == 4) {
 		result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[3], 0, &last);
 		if (result != TCL_OK) {
 		    break;
 		}
-	    }
-	    if (first >= listPtr->nElements) {
-		result = TCL_OK;
-		break;
+	    } else {
+		last = first;
 	    }
 	    if (last >= listPtr->nElements) {
 		last = listPtr->nElements - 1;
 	    }
-	    if (first < 0) {
-		first = 0;
-	    }
-	    if (first > last) {
-		result = TCL_OK;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    result = Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, listPtr->listObj, &listLen,
-		    &elemPtrs);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		break;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		/*
-		 * One element request - we return a string
-		 */
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, elemPtrs[first]);
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_SetListObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), (last - first + 1),
-			&(elemPtrs[first]));
-	    }
+	    result = ListboxDeleteSubCmd(listPtr, first, last);
+	} else {
 	    result = TCL_OK;
-	    break;
 	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-	case COMMAND_INDEX:{
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 1, &index);
+    case COMMAND_GET: {
+	int first, last, listLen;
+	Tcl_Obj **elemPtrs;
+
+	if (objc != 3 && objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    break;
+	}
+	result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &first);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    break;
+	}
+	last = first;
+	if (objc == 4) {
+	    result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[3], 0, &last);
 	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
 		break;
 	    }
-	    sprintf(buf, "%d", index);
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	}
+	if (first >= listPtr->nElements) {
+	    result = TCL_OK;
+	    break;
+	}
+	if (last >= listPtr->nElements) {
+	    last = listPtr->nElements - 1;
+	}
+	if (first < 0) {
+	    first = 0;
+	}
+	if (first > last) {
 	    result = TCL_OK;
 	    break;
 	}
+	result = Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, listPtr->listObj, &listLen,
+		&elemPtrs);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    break;
+	}
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    /*
+	     * One element request - we return a string
+	     */
 
-	case COMMAND_INSERT: {
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"index ?element element ...?");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, elemPtrs[first]);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetListObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), (last - first + 1),
+		    &(elemPtrs[first]));
+	}
+	result = TCL_OK;
+	break;
+    }
 
-	    result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 1, &index);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		break;
-	    }
+    case COMMAND_INDEX:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    break;
+	}
+	result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 1, &index);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    break;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
+	result = TCL_OK;
+	break;
 
-	    if (!(listPtr->state & STATE_NORMAL)) {
-		break;
-	    }
+    case COMMAND_INSERT:
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index ?element element ...?");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    break;
+	}
 
-	    result = ListboxInsertSubCmd(listPtr, index, objc-3, objv+3);
+	result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 1, &index);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    break;
 	}
 
-	case COMMAND_ITEMCGET: {
-	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
-	    ItemAttr *attrPtr;
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index option");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
+	if (!(listPtr->state & STATE_NORMAL)) {
+	    break;
+	}
 
-	    result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &index);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		break;
-	    }
+	result = ListboxInsertSubCmd(listPtr, index, objc-3, objv+3);
+	break;
 
-	    if (index < 0 || index >= listPtr->nElements) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "item number \"",
-			Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "\" out of range",
-			(char *)NULL);
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    
-	    attrPtr = ListboxGetItemAttributes(interp, listPtr, index);
+    case COMMAND_ITEMCGET: {
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+	ItemAttr *attrPtr;
 
-	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *)attrPtr,
-		    listPtr->itemAttrOptionTable, objv[3], listPtr->tkwin);
-	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-	    result = TCL_OK;
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index option");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    break;
 	}
 
-	case COMMAND_ITEMCONFIGURE: {
-	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
-	    ItemAttr *attrPtr;
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"index ?option? ?value? ?option value ...?");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
+	result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &index);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    break;
+	}
 
-	    result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &index);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		break;
-	    }
-	    
-	    if (index < 0 || index >= listPtr->nElements) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "item number \"",
-			Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "\" out of range",
-			(char *)NULL);
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    
-	    attrPtr = ListboxGetItemAttributes(interp, listPtr, index);
-	    if (objc <= 4) {
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *)attrPtr,
-			listPtr->itemAttrOptionTable,
-			(objc == 4) ? objv[3] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-			listPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		    break;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		    result = TCL_OK;
-		}
-	    } else {
-		result = ConfigureListboxItem(interp, listPtr, attrPtr,
-			objc-3, objv+3, index);
-	    }
+	if (index < 0 || index >= listPtr->nElements) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "item number \"",
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "\" out of range", NULL);
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    break;
 	}
-	
-	case COMMAND_NEAREST: {
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	    int y;
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "y");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    
-	    result = Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &y);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		break;
-	    }
-	    index = NearestListboxElement(listPtr, y);
-	    sprintf(buf, "%d", index);
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-	    result = TCL_OK;
+
+	attrPtr = ListboxGetItemAttributes(interp, listPtr, index);
+
+	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) attrPtr,
+		listPtr->itemAttrOptionTable, objv[3], listPtr->tkwin);
+	if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    break;
 	}
-	
-	case COMMAND_SCAN: {
-	    int x, y, scanCmdIndex;
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	result = TCL_OK;
+	break;
+    }
 
-	    if (objc != 5) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "mark|dragto x y");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
+    case COMMAND_ITEMCONFIGURE: {
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+	ItemAttr *attrPtr;
 
-	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK
-		    || Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &y) != TCL_OK) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "index ?option? ?value? ?option value ...?");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    break;
+	}
 
-	    result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], scanCommandNames,
-		    "option", 0, &scanCmdIndex);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		break;
-	    }
-	    switch (scanCmdIndex) {
-		case SCAN_MARK: {
-		    listPtr->scanMarkX = x;
-		    listPtr->scanMarkY = y;
-		    listPtr->scanMarkXOffset = listPtr->xOffset;
-		    listPtr->scanMarkYIndex = listPtr->topIndex;
-		    break;
-		}
-		case SCAN_DRAGTO: {
-		    ListboxScanTo(listPtr, x, y);
-		    break;
-		}
-	    }
-	    result = TCL_OK;
+	result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &index);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	if (index < 0 || index >= listPtr->nElements) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "item number \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		    "\" out of range", NULL);
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    break;
 	}
 
-	case COMMAND_SEE: {
-	    int diff;
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	attrPtr = ListboxGetItemAttributes(interp, listPtr, index);
+	if (objc <= 4) {
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) attrPtr,
+		    listPtr->itemAttrOptionTable,
+		    (objc == 4) ? objv[3] : NULL, listPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		break;
-	    }
-	    result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &index);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		break;
-	    }
-	    if (index >= listPtr->nElements) {
-		index = listPtr->nElements - 1;
-	    }
-	    if (index < 0) {
-		index = 0;
-	    }
-	    diff = listPtr->topIndex - index;
-	    if (diff > 0) {
-		if (diff <= (listPtr->fullLines/3)) {
-		    ChangeListboxView(listPtr, index);
-		} else {
-		    ChangeListboxView(listPtr,
-			    index - (listPtr->fullLines-1)/2);
-		}
 	    } else {
-		diff = index - (listPtr->topIndex + listPtr->fullLines - 1);
-		if (diff > 0) {
-		    if (diff <= (listPtr->fullLines/3)) {
-			ChangeListboxView(listPtr, listPtr->topIndex + diff);
-		    } else {
-			ChangeListboxView(listPtr,
-				index - (listPtr->fullLines-1)/2);
-		    }
-		}
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+		result = TCL_OK;
 	    }
-	    result = TCL_OK;
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureListboxItem(interp, listPtr, attrPtr,
+		    objc-3, objv+3, index);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case COMMAND_NEAREST: {
+	int y;
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "y");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    break;
 	}
 
-	case COMMAND_SELECTION: {
-	    result = ListboxSelectionSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv);
+	result = Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &y);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    break;
 	}
+	index = NearestListboxElement(listPtr, y);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
+	result = TCL_OK;
+	break;
+    }
 
-	case COMMAND_SIZE: {
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    sprintf(buf, "%d", listPtr->nElements);
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-	    result = TCL_OK;
+    case COMMAND_SCAN: {
+	int x, y, scanCmdIndex;
+
+	if (objc != 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "mark|dragto x y");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK
+		|| Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &y) != TCL_OK) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], scanCommandNames,
+		"option", 0, &scanCmdIndex);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    break;
 	}
+	switch (scanCmdIndex) {
+	case SCAN_MARK:
+	    listPtr->scanMarkX = x;
+	    listPtr->scanMarkY = y;
+	    listPtr->scanMarkXOffset = listPtr->xOffset;
+	    listPtr->scanMarkYIndex = listPtr->topIndex;
+	    break;
+	case SCAN_DRAGTO:
+	    ListboxScanTo(listPtr, x, y);
+	    break;
+	}
+	result = TCL_OK;
+	break;
+    }
 
-	case COMMAND_XVIEW: {
-	    result = ListboxXviewSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv);
+    case COMMAND_SEE: {
+	int diff;
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    break;
+	}
+	result = GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &index);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    break;
 	}
-	
-	case COMMAND_YVIEW: {
-	    result = ListboxYviewSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv);
+	if (index >= listPtr->nElements) {
+	    index = listPtr->nElements - 1;
+	}
+	if (index < 0) {
+	    index = 0;
+	}
+	diff = listPtr->topIndex - index;
+	if (diff > 0) {
+	    if (diff <= (listPtr->fullLines/3)) {
+		ChangeListboxView(listPtr, index);
+	    } else {
+		ChangeListboxView(listPtr, index - (listPtr->fullLines-1)/2);
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    diff = index - (listPtr->topIndex + listPtr->fullLines - 1);
+	    if (diff > 0) {
+		if (diff <= (listPtr->fullLines/3)) {
+		    ChangeListboxView(listPtr, listPtr->topIndex + diff);
+		} else {
+		    ChangeListboxView(listPtr, index-(listPtr->fullLines-1)/2);
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+	result = TCL_OK;
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case COMMAND_SELECTION:
+	result = ListboxSelectionSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case COMMAND_SIZE:
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    break;
 	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(listPtr->nElements));
+	result = TCL_OK;
+	break;
+    case COMMAND_XVIEW:
+	result = ListboxXviewSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case COMMAND_YVIEW:
+	result = ListboxYviewSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv);
+	break;
     }
     Tcl_Release((ClientData)listPtr);
     return result;
@@ -1076,34 +1058,41 @@ ListboxWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ListboxBboxSubCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process a listbox bbox request.
- *      See the user documentation for more information.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process a listbox bbox request. See the
+ *	user documentation for more information.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	For valid indices, places the bbox of the requested element in
- *      the interpreter's result.
+ *	For valid indices, places the bbox of the requested element in the
+ *	interpreter's result.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ListboxBboxSubCmd(interp, listPtr, index)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;          /* Pointer to the calling Tcl interpreter */
-    Listbox *listPtr;            /* Information about the listbox */
-    int index;                   /* Index of the element to get bbox info on */
+ListboxBboxSubCmd(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Pointer to the calling Tcl interpreter */
+    Listbox *listPtr,		/* Information about the listbox */
+    int index)			/* Index of the element to get bbox info on */
 {
     int lastVisibleIndex;
-    /* Determine the index of the last visible item in the listbox */
+
+    /*
+     * Determine the index of the last visible item in the listbox.
+     */
+
     lastVisibleIndex = listPtr->topIndex + listPtr->fullLines
-	+ listPtr->partialLine;
+	    + listPtr->partialLine;
     if (listPtr->nElements < lastVisibleIndex) {
 	lastVisibleIndex = listPtr->nElements;
     }
 
-    /* Only allow bbox requests for indices that are visible */
+    /*
+     * Only allow bbox requests for indices that are visible.
+     */
+
     if ((listPtr->topIndex <= index) && (index < lastVisibleIndex)) {
 	char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
 	Tcl_Obj *el;
@@ -1111,7 +1100,10 @@ ListboxBboxSubCmd(interp, listPtr, index)
 	int pixelWidth, stringLen, x, y, result;
 	Tk_FontMetrics fm;
 
-	/* Compute the pixel width of the requested element */
+	/*
+	 * Compute the pixel width of the requested element.
+	 */
+
 	result = Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, listPtr->listObj, index, &el);
 	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    return result;
@@ -1123,7 +1115,7 @@ ListboxBboxSubCmd(interp, listPtr, index)
 
 	x = listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth - listPtr->xOffset;
 	y = ((index - listPtr->topIndex)*listPtr->lineHeight)
-	    + listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth;
+		+ listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth;
 	sprintf(buf, "%d %d %d %d", x, y, pixelWidth, fm.linespace);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
     }
@@ -1135,8 +1127,8 @@ ListboxBboxSubCmd(interp, listPtr, index)
  *
  * ListboxSelectionSubCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the selection sub command
- *      for listbox widgets.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the selection sub command for
+ *	listbox widgets.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
@@ -1148,14 +1140,15 @@ ListboxBboxSubCmd(interp, listPtr, index)
  */
 
 static int
-ListboxSelectionSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;          /* Pointer to the calling Tcl interpreter */
-    Listbox *listPtr;            /* Information about the listbox */
-    int objc;                    /* Number of arguments in the objv array */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];       /* Array of arguments to the procedure */
+ListboxSelectionSubCmd(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Pointer to the calling Tcl interpreter */
+    Listbox *listPtr,		/* Information about the listbox */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments in the objv array */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Array of arguments to the procedure */
 {
     int selCmdIndex, first, last;
     int result = TCL_OK;
+
     if (objc != 4 && objc != 5) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option index ?index?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1187,40 +1180,36 @@ ListboxSelectionSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch (selCmdIndex) {
-	case SELECTION_ANCHOR: {
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (first >= listPtr->nElements) {
-		first = listPtr->nElements - 1;
-	    }
-	    if (first < 0) {
-		first = 0;
-	    }
-	    listPtr->selectAnchor = first;
-	    result = TCL_OK;
-	    break;
+    case SELECTION_ANCHOR:
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case SELECTION_CLEAR: {
-	    result = ListboxSelect(listPtr, first, last, 0);
-	    break;
+	if (first >= listPtr->nElements) {
+	    first = listPtr->nElements - 1;
 	}
-	case SELECTION_INCLUDES: {
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
-		    Tcl_NewBooleanObj((Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection,
-			    (char *)first) != NULL)));
-	    result = TCL_OK;
-	    break;
+	if (first < 0) {
+	    first = 0;
 	}
-	case SELECTION_SET: {
-	    result = ListboxSelect(listPtr, first, last, 1);
-	    break;
+	listPtr->selectAnchor = first;
+	result = TCL_OK;
+	break;
+    case SELECTION_CLEAR:
+	result = ListboxSelect(listPtr, first, last, 0);
+	break;
+    case SELECTION_INCLUDES:
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+		Tcl_NewBooleanObj((Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection,
+			(char *) INT2PTR(first)) != NULL)));
+	result = TCL_OK;
+	break;
+    case SELECTION_SET:
+	result = ListboxSelect(listPtr, first, last, 1);
+	break;
     }
     return result;
 }
@@ -1242,33 +1231,35 @@ ListboxSelectionSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-ListboxXviewSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;          /* Pointer to the calling Tcl interpreter */
-    Listbox *listPtr;            /* Information about the listbox */
-    int objc;                    /* Number of arguments in the objv array */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];       /* Array of arguments to the procedure */
+ListboxXviewSubCmd(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Pointer to the calling Tcl interpreter */
+    Listbox *listPtr,		/* Information about the listbox */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments in the objv array */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Array of arguments to the procedure */
 {
 
     int index, count, type, windowWidth, windowUnits;
     int offset = 0;		/* Initialized to stop gcc warnings. */
     double fraction, fraction2;
-    
+
     windowWidth = Tk_Width(listPtr->tkwin)
-	- 2*(listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth);
+	    - 2*(listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth);
     if (objc == 2) {
 	if (listPtr->maxWidth == 0) {
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "0 1", TCL_STATIC);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "0.0 1.0", TCL_STATIC);
 	} else {
-	    char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2];
-	    
+	    char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
+
 	    fraction = listPtr->xOffset/((double) listPtr->maxWidth);
 	    fraction2 = (listPtr->xOffset + windowWidth)
-		/((double) listPtr->maxWidth);
+		    / ((double) listPtr->maxWidth);
 	    if (fraction2 > 1.0) {
 		fraction2 = 1.0;
 	    }
-	    sprintf(buf, "%g %g", fraction, fraction2);
+	    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, fraction, buf);
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, fraction2, buf);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ", buf, NULL);
 	}
     } else if (objc == 3) {
 	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1278,23 +1269,23 @@ ListboxXviewSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv)
     } else {
 	type = Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction, &count);
 	switch (type) {
-	    case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
-		offset = (int) (fraction*listPtr->maxWidth + 0.5);
-		break;
-	    case TK_SCROLL_PAGES:
-		windowUnits = windowWidth/listPtr->xScrollUnit;
-		if (windowUnits > 2) {
-		    offset = listPtr->xOffset
+	case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
+	    offset = (int) (fraction*listPtr->maxWidth + 0.5);
+	    break;
+	case TK_SCROLL_PAGES:
+	    windowUnits = windowWidth/listPtr->xScrollUnit;
+	    if (windowUnits > 2) {
+		offset = listPtr->xOffset
 			+ count*listPtr->xScrollUnit*(windowUnits-2);
-		} else {
-		    offset = listPtr->xOffset + count*listPtr->xScrollUnit;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
+	    } else {
 		offset = listPtr->xOffset + count*listPtr->xScrollUnit;
-		break;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
+	    offset = listPtr->xOffset + count*listPtr->xScrollUnit;
+	    break;
 	}
 	ChangeListboxOffset(listPtr, offset);
     }
@@ -1318,29 +1309,31 @@ ListboxXviewSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-ListboxYviewSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;          /* Pointer to the calling Tcl interpreter */
-    Listbox *listPtr;            /* Information about the listbox */
-    int objc;                    /* Number of arguments in the objv array */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];       /* Array of arguments to the procedure */
+ListboxYviewSubCmd(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Pointer to the calling Tcl interpreter */
+    Listbox *listPtr,		/* Information about the listbox */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments in the objv array */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Array of arguments to the procedure */
 {
     int index, count, type;
     double fraction, fraction2;
-    
+
     if (objc == 2) {
 	if (listPtr->nElements == 0) {
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "0 1", TCL_STATIC);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "0.0 1.0", TCL_STATIC);
 	} else {
-	    char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2];
-	    
+	    char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
+
 	    fraction = listPtr->topIndex/((double) listPtr->nElements);
 	    fraction2 = (listPtr->topIndex+listPtr->fullLines)
-		/((double) listPtr->nElements);
+		    /((double) listPtr->nElements);
 	    if (fraction2 > 1.0) {
 		fraction2 = 1.0;
 	    }
-	    sprintf(buf, "%g %g", fraction, fraction2);
+	    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, fraction, buf);
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, fraction2, buf);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ", buf, NULL);
 	}
     } else if (objc == 3) {
 	if (GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1350,22 +1343,22 @@ ListboxYviewSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv)
     } else {
 	type = Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction, &count);
 	switch (type) {
-	    case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
-		index = (int) (listPtr->nElements*fraction + 0.5);
-		break;
-	    case TK_SCROLL_PAGES:
-		if (listPtr->fullLines > 2) {
-		    index = listPtr->topIndex
-			+ count*(listPtr->fullLines-2);
-		} else {
-		    index = listPtr->topIndex + count;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
+	case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
+	    index = (int) (listPtr->nElements*fraction + 0.5);
+	    break;
+	case TK_SCROLL_PAGES:
+	    if (listPtr->fullLines > 2) {
+		index = listPtr->topIndex + count*(listPtr->fullLines-2);
+	    } else {
 		index = listPtr->topIndex + count;
-		break;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
+	    index = listPtr->topIndex + count;
+	    break;
+	case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
+	default:
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	ChangeListboxView(listPtr, index);
     }
@@ -1377,8 +1370,8 @@ ListboxYviewSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ListboxGetItemAttributes --
  *
- *	Returns a pointer to the ItemAttr record for a given index,
- *	creating one if it does not already exist.
+ *	Returns a pointer to the ItemAttr record for a given index, creating
+ *	one if it does not already exist.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Pointer to an ItemAttr record.
@@ -1390,18 +1383,19 @@ ListboxYviewSubCmd(interp, listPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static ItemAttr *
-ListboxGetItemAttributes(interp, listPtr, index)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;          /* Pointer to the calling Tcl interpreter */
-    Listbox *listPtr;            /* Information about the listbox */
-    int index;                   /* Index of the item to retrieve attributes
-				  * for */
+ListboxGetItemAttributes(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Pointer to the calling Tcl interpreter */
+    Listbox *listPtr,		/* Information about the listbox */
+    int index)			/* Index of the item to retrieve attributes
+				 * for. */
 {
-    int new;
+    int isNew;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
     ItemAttr *attrs;
 
-    entry = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(listPtr->itemAttrTable, (char *)index, &new);
-    if (new) {
+    entry = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(listPtr->itemAttrTable,
+	    (char *) INT2PTR(index), &isNew);
+    if (isNew) {
 	attrs = (ItemAttr *) ckalloc(sizeof(ItemAttr));
 	attrs->border = NULL;
 	attrs->selBorder = NULL;
@@ -1420,9 +1414,9 @@ ListboxGetItemAttributes(interp, listPtr, index)
  *
  * DestroyListbox --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a listbox at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to
+ *	clean up the internal structure of a listbox at a safe time (when
+ *	no-one is using it anymore).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1434,14 +1428,17 @@ ListboxGetItemAttributes(interp, listPtr, index)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyListbox(memPtr)
-    char *memPtr;	/* Info about listbox widget. */
+DestroyListbox(
+    char *memPtr)		/* Info about listbox widget. */
 {
     register Listbox *listPtr = (Listbox *) memPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
 
-    /* If we have an internal list object, free it */
+    /*
+     * If we have an internal list object, free it.
+     */
+
     if (listPtr->listObj != NULL) {
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(listPtr->listObj);
 	listPtr->listObj = NULL;
@@ -1452,23 +1449,28 @@ DestroyListbox(memPtr)
 		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		ListboxListVarProc, (ClientData) listPtr);
     }
-    
-    /* Free the selection hash table */
+
+    /*
+     * Free the selection hash table.
+     */
+
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable(listPtr->selection);
     ckfree((char *)listPtr->selection);
 
-    /* Free the item attribute hash table */
+    /*
+     * Free the item attribute hash table.
+     */
+
     for (entry = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(listPtr->itemAttrTable, &search);
-	 entry != NULL; entry = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	    entry != NULL; entry = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	ckfree((char *)Tcl_GetHashValue(entry));
     }
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable(listPtr->itemAttrTable);
     ckfree((char *)listPtr->itemAttrTable);
 
     /*
-     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then
-     * let Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related
-     * stuff.
+     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let
+     * Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
      */
 
     if (listPtr->textGC != None) {
@@ -1494,7 +1496,7 @@ DestroyListbox(memPtr)
  * DestroyListboxOptionTables --
  *
  *	This procedure is registered as an exit callback when the listbox
- *	command is first called.  It cleans up the OptionTables structure
+ *	command is first called. It cleans up the OptionTables structure
  *	allocated by that command.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -1507,11 +1509,11 @@ DestroyListbox(memPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyListboxOptionTables(clientData, interp)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to the OptionTables struct */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Pointer to the calling interp */
+DestroyListboxOptionTables(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to the OptionTables struct */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Pointer to the calling interp */
 {
-    ckfree((char *)clientData);
+    ckfree((char *) clientData);
     return;
 }
 
@@ -1520,30 +1522,29 @@ DestroyListboxOptionTables(clientData, interp)
  *
  * ConfigureListbox --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an objv/objc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure)
- *	a listbox widget.
+ *	This procedure is called to process an objv/objc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) a listbox
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width,
- *	etc. get set for listPtr;  old resources get freed,
- *	if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width, etc. get set
+ *	for listPtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureListbox(interp, listPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    register Listbox *listPtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or may
-				 * not already have values for some fields. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
+ConfigureListbox(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    register Listbox *listPtr,	/* Information about widget; may or may not
+				 * already have values for some fields. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[],	/* Arguments. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
 {
     Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
     Tcl_Obj *oldListObj = NULL;
@@ -1565,7 +1566,7 @@ ConfigureListbox(interp, listPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 
 	    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) listPtr,
 		    listPtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
-		    listPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, (int *) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+		    listPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 		continue;
 	    }
 	} else {
@@ -1601,29 +1602,32 @@ ConfigureListbox(interp, listPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 		    (ClientData) listPtr);
 	}
 
-	/* Verify the current status of the list var.
+	/*
+	 * Verify the current status of the list var.
 	 * PREVIOUS STATE | NEW STATE  | ACTION
 	 * ---------------+------------+----------------------------------
-	 * no listvar     | listvar    | If listvar does not exist, create
-	 *                               it and copy the internal list obj's
-	 *                               content to the new var.  If it does
-	 *                               exist, toss the internal list obj.
+	 * no listvar     | listvar    | If listvar does not exist, create it
+	 *				 and copy the internal list obj's
+	 *				 content to the new var. If it does
+	 *				 exist, toss the internal list obj.
 	 *
-	 * listvar        | no listvar | Copy old listvar content to the
-	 *                               internal list obj
+	 * listvar	  | no listvar | Copy old listvar content to the
+	 *				 internal list obj
 	 *
-	 * listvar        | listvar    | no special action
+	 * listvar	  | listvar    | no special action
 	 *
 	 * no listvar     | no listvar | no special action
 	 */
+
 	oldListObj = listPtr->listObj;
 	if (listPtr->listVarName != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_Obj *listVarObj = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(interp, listPtr->listVarName,
-		    (char *) NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+		    NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
 	    int dummy;
+
 	    if (listVarObj == NULL) {
 		listVarObj = (oldListObj ? oldListObj : Tcl_NewObj());
-		if (Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, listPtr->listVarName, (char *) NULL,
+		if (Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, listPtr->listVarName, NULL,
 			listVarObj, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
 			== NULL) {
 		    if (oldListObj == NULL) {
@@ -1632,11 +1636,15 @@ ConfigureListbox(interp, listPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 		    continue;
 		}
 	    }
-	    /* Make sure the object is a good list object */
+
+	    /*
+	     * Make sure the object is a good list object.
+	     */
+
 	    if (Tcl_ListObjLength(listPtr->interp, listVarObj, &dummy)
 		    != TCL_OK) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(listPtr->interp,
-			": invalid -listvariable value", (char *) NULL);
+			": invalid -listvariable value", NULL);
 		continue;
 	    }
 
@@ -1657,11 +1665,14 @@ ConfigureListbox(interp, listPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
     }
 
-    /* Make sure that the list length is correct */
+    /*
+     * Make sure that the list length is correct.
+     */
+
     Tcl_ListObjLength(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, &listPtr->nElements);
-    
+
     if (error) {
-        Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(errorResult);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     } else {
@@ -1675,45 +1686,46 @@ ConfigureListbox(interp, listPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * ConfigureListboxItem --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an objv/objc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure)
- *	a listbox item.
+ *	This procedure is called to process an objv/objc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) a listbox
+ *	item.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width,
- *	etc. get set for a listbox item;  old resources get freed,
- *	if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width, etc. get set
+ *	for a listbox item; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureListboxItem(interp, listPtr, attrs, objc, objv, index)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    register Listbox *listPtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or may
-				 * not already have values for some fields. */
-    ItemAttr *attrs;		/* Information about the item to configure */
-    int objc;			/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments. */
-    int index;			/* Index of the listbox item being configure */
+ConfigureListboxItem(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    register Listbox *listPtr,	/* Information about widget; may or may not
+				 * already have values for some fields. */
+    ItemAttr *attrs,		/* Information about the item to configure */
+    int objc,			/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[],	/* Arguments. */
+    int index)			/* Index of the listbox item being configure */
 {
     Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
 
     if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *)attrs,
 	    listPtr->itemAttrOptionTable, objc, objv, listPtr->tkwin,
-	    &savedOptions, (int *)NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+	    &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 	Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+
     /*
-     * Redraw this index - ListboxWorldChanged would need to be called
-     * if item attributes were checked in the "world".
+     * Redraw this index - ListboxWorldChanged would need to be called if item
+     * attributes were checked in the "world".
      */
+
     EventuallyRedrawRange(listPtr, index, index);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -1723,50 +1735,46 @@ ConfigureListboxItem(interp, listPtr, attrs, objc, objv, index)
  *
  * ListboxWorldChanged --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way and the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts
- *	and determine its new geometry.
+ *	This procedure is called when the world has changed in some way and
+ *	the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine
+ *	its new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      Listbox will be relayed out and redisplayed.
+ *	Listbox will be relayed out and redisplayed.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 static void
-ListboxWorldChanged(instanceData)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about widget. */
+ListboxWorldChanged(
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     XGCValues gcValues;
     GC gc;
     unsigned long mask;
-    Listbox *listPtr;
-    
-    listPtr = (Listbox *) instanceData;
+    Listbox *listPtr = (Listbox *) instanceData;
 
     if (listPtr->state & STATE_NORMAL) {
 	gcValues.foreground = listPtr->fgColorPtr->pixel;
 	gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
 	mask = GCForeground | GCFont | GCGraphicsExposures;
+    } else if (listPtr->dfgColorPtr != NULL) {
+	gcValues.foreground = listPtr->dfgColorPtr->pixel;
+	gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
+	mask = GCForeground | GCFont | GCGraphicsExposures;
     } else {
-	if (listPtr->dfgColorPtr != NULL) {
-	    gcValues.foreground = listPtr->dfgColorPtr->pixel;
-	    gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
-	    mask = GCForeground | GCFont | GCGraphicsExposures;
-	} else {
-	    gcValues.foreground = listPtr->fgColorPtr->pixel;
-	    mask = GCForeground | GCFont;
-	    if (listPtr->gray == None) {
-		listPtr->gray = Tk_GetBitmap(NULL, listPtr->tkwin, "gray50");
-	    }
-	    if (listPtr->gray != None) {
-		gcValues.fill_style = FillStippled;
-		gcValues.stipple = listPtr->gray;
-		mask |= GCFillStyle | GCStipple;
-	    }
+	gcValues.foreground = listPtr->fgColorPtr->pixel;
+	mask = GCForeground | GCFont;
+	if (listPtr->gray == None) {
+	    listPtr->gray = Tk_GetBitmap(NULL, listPtr->tkwin, "gray50");
+	}
+	if (listPtr->gray != None) {
+	    gcValues.fill_style = FillStippled;
+	    gcValues.stipple = listPtr->gray;
+	    mask |= GCFillStyle | GCStipple;
 	}
     }
 
@@ -1789,8 +1797,8 @@ ListboxWorldChanged(instanceData)
     listPtr->selTextGC = gc;
 
     /*
-     * Register the desired geometry for the window and arrange for
-     * the window to be redisplayed.
+     * Register the desired geometry for the window and arrange for the window
+     * to be redisplayed.
      */
 
     ListboxComputeGeometry(listPtr, 1, 1, 1);
@@ -1815,25 +1823,24 @@ ListboxWorldChanged(instanceData)
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayListbox(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
+DisplayListbox(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about window. */
 {
     register Listbox *listPtr = (Listbox *) clientData;
     register Tk_Window tkwin = listPtr->tkwin;
     GC gc;
-    int i, limit, x, y, width = 0, prevSelected, freeGC;
+    int i, limit, x, y, prevSelected, freeGC, stringLen;
     Tk_FontMetrics fm;
     Tcl_Obj *curElement;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
     char *stringRep;
-    int stringLen;
     ItemAttr *attrs;
     Tk_3DBorder selectedBg;
     XGCValues gcValues;
     unsigned long mask;
-    int left, right;			/* Non-zero values here indicate
-					 * that the left or right edge of
-					 * the listbox is off-screen. */
+    int left, right;		/* Non-zero values here indicate that the left
+				 * or right edge of the listbox is
+				 * off-screen. */
     Pixmap pixmap;
 
     listPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING;
@@ -1867,11 +1874,11 @@ DisplayListbox(clientData)
 
 #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
     /*
-     * Redrawing is done in a temporary pixmap that is allocated
-     * here and freed at the end of the procedure.  All drawing is
-     * done to the pixmap, and the pixmap is copied to the screen
-     * at the end of the procedure.  This provides the smoothest
-     * possible visual effects (no flashing on the screen).
+     * Redrawing is done in a temporary pixmap that is allocated here and
+     * freed at the end of the procedure. All drawing is done to the pixmap,
+     * and the pixmap is copied to the screen at the end of the procedure.
+     * This provides the smoothest possible visual effects (no flashing on the
+     * screen).
      */
 
     pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(listPtr->display, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
@@ -1882,7 +1889,10 @@ DisplayListbox(clientData)
     Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, listPtr->normalBorder, 0, 0,
 	    Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
 
-    /* Display each item in the listbox */
+    /*
+     * Display each item in the listbox.
+     */
+
     limit = listPtr->topIndex + listPtr->fullLines + listPtr->partialLine - 1;
     if (limit >= listPtr->nElements) {
 	limit = listPtr->nElements-1;
@@ -1892,40 +1902,54 @@ DisplayListbox(clientData)
 	left = listPtr->selBorderWidth+1;
     }
     if ((listPtr->maxWidth - listPtr->xOffset) > (Tk_Width(listPtr->tkwin)
-	    - 2*(listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth)))  {
+	    - 2*(listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth))) {
 	right = listPtr->selBorderWidth+1;
     }
     prevSelected = 0;
-    
+
     for (i = listPtr->topIndex; i <= limit; i++) {
+	int width = Tk_Width(tkwin);	/* zeroth approx to silence warning */
+
 	x = listPtr->inset;
-	y = ((i - listPtr->topIndex) * listPtr->lineHeight) 
-		+ listPtr->inset;
+	y = ((i - listPtr->topIndex) * listPtr->lineHeight) + listPtr->inset;
 	gc = listPtr->textGC;
 	freeGC = 0;
+
 	/*
 	 * Lookup this item in the item attributes table, to see if it has
-	 * special foreground/background colors
+	 * special foreground/background colors.
 	 */
-	entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->itemAttrTable, (char *)i);
+
+	entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->itemAttrTable, (char *) INT2PTR(i));
 
 	/*
-	 * If the listbox is enabled, items may be drawn differently;
-	 * they may be drawn selected, or they may have special foreground
-	 * or background colors.
+	 * If the listbox is enabled, items may be drawn differently; they may
+	 * be drawn selected, or they may have special foreground or
+	 * background colors.
 	 */
+
 	if (listPtr->state & STATE_NORMAL) {
-	    if (Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, (char *)i) != NULL) {
-		/* Selected items are drawn differently. */
+	    if (Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, (char *) INT2PTR(i))) {
+		/*
+		 * Selected items are drawn differently.
+		 */
+
 		gc = listPtr->selTextGC;
 		width = Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*listPtr->inset;
 		selectedBg = listPtr->selBorder;
-		
-		/* If there is attribute information for this item,
-		 * adjust the drawing accordingly */
+
+		/*
+		 * If there is attribute information for this item, adjust the
+		 * drawing accordingly.
+		 */
+
 		if (entry != NULL) {
 		    attrs = (ItemAttr *)Tcl_GetHashValue(entry);
-		    /* Default GC has the values from the widget at large */
+
+		    /*
+		     * Default GC has the values from the widget at large.
+		     */
+
 		    if (listPtr->selFgColorPtr) {
 			gcValues.foreground = listPtr->selFgColorPtr->pixel;
 		    } else {
@@ -1934,11 +1958,11 @@ DisplayListbox(clientData)
 		    gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(listPtr->tkfont);
 		    gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
 		    mask = GCForeground | GCFont | GCGraphicsExposures;
-		    
+
 		    if (attrs->selBorder != NULL) {
 			selectedBg = attrs->selBorder;
 		    }
-		    
+
 		    if (attrs->selFgColor != NULL) {
 			gcValues.foreground = attrs->selFgColor->pixel;
 			gc = Tk_GetGC(listPtr->tkwin, mask, &gcValues);
@@ -1988,7 +2012,7 @@ DisplayListbox(clientData)
 		/* Draw bottom bevel */
 		if (i + 1 == listPtr->nElements ||
 			Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection,
-				(char *)(i + 1)) == NULL ) {
+				(char *) INT2PTR(i + 1)) == NULL ) {
 		    Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(tkwin, pixmap, selectedBg, x-left,
 			    y + listPtr->lineHeight - listPtr->selBorderWidth,
 			    width+left+right, listPtr->selBorderWidth, 0, 0, 0,
@@ -2000,28 +2024,29 @@ DisplayListbox(clientData)
 		 * If there is an item attributes record for this item, draw
 		 * the background box and set the foreground color accordingly
 		 */
+
 		if (entry != NULL) {
 		    attrs = (ItemAttr *)Tcl_GetHashValue(entry);
 		    gcValues.foreground = listPtr->fgColorPtr->pixel;
 		    gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(listPtr->tkfont);
 		    gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
 		    mask = GCForeground | GCFont | GCGraphicsExposures;
-		    
+
 		    /*
 		     * If the item has its own background color, draw it now.
 		     */
-		    
+
 		    if (attrs->border != NULL) {
 			width = Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*listPtr->inset;
 			Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, attrs->border, x, y,
 				width, listPtr->lineHeight, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
 		    }
-		    
+
 		    /*
 		     * If the item has its own foreground, use it to override
 		     * the value in the gcValues structure.
 		     */
-		    
+
 		    if ((listPtr->state & STATE_NORMAL)
 			    && attrs->fgColor != NULL) {
 			gcValues.foreground = attrs->fgColor->pixel;
@@ -2033,7 +2058,10 @@ DisplayListbox(clientData)
 	    }
 	}
 
-	/* Draw the actual text of this item */
+	/*
+	 * Draw the actual text of this item.
+	 */
+
 	Tk_GetFontMetrics(listPtr->tkfont, &fm);
 	y += fm.ascent + listPtr->selBorderWidth;
 	x = listPtr->inset + listPtr->selBorderWidth - listPtr->xOffset;
@@ -2042,10 +2070,16 @@ DisplayListbox(clientData)
 	Tk_DrawChars(listPtr->display, pixmap, gc, listPtr->tkfont,
 		stringRep, stringLen, x, y);
 
-	/* If this is the active element, apply the activestyle to it. */
+	/*
+	 * If this is the active element, apply the activestyle to it.
+	 */
+
 	if ((i == listPtr->active) && (listPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)) {
 	    if (listPtr->activeStyle == ACTIVE_STYLE_UNDERLINE) {
-		/* Underline the text. */
+		/*
+		 * Underline the text.
+		 */
+
 		Tk_UnderlineChars(listPtr->display, pixmap, gc,
 			listPtr->tkfont, stringRep, x, y, 0, stringLen);
 	    } else if (listPtr->activeStyle == ACTIVE_STYLE_DOTBOX) {
@@ -2053,52 +2087,59 @@ DisplayListbox(clientData)
 		/*
 		 * This provides for exact default look and feel on Windows.
 		 */
+
 		TkWinDCState state;
 		HDC dc;
 		RECT rect;
 
 		dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(listPtr->display, pixmap, &state);
-		rect.left   = listPtr->inset;
-		rect.top    = ((i - listPtr->topIndex) * listPtr->lineHeight) 
-		    + listPtr->inset;
-		rect.right  = rect.left + width;
+		rect.left = listPtr->inset;
+		rect.top = ((i - listPtr->topIndex) * listPtr->lineHeight)
+			+ listPtr->inset;
+		rect.right = rect.left + width;
 		rect.bottom = rect.top + listPtr->lineHeight;
 		DrawFocusRect(dc, &rect);
 		TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(pixmap, dc, &state);
-#else
+#else /* !WIN32 */
 		/*
 		 * Draw a dotted box around the text.
 		 */
+
 		x = listPtr->inset;
 		y = ((i - listPtr->topIndex) * listPtr->lineHeight)
-		    + listPtr->inset;
+			+ listPtr->inset;
 		width = Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*listPtr->inset - 1;
 
-		gcValues.line_style  = LineOnOffDash;
-		gcValues.line_width  = listPtr->selBorderWidth;
+		gcValues.line_style = LineOnOffDash;
+		gcValues.line_width = listPtr->selBorderWidth;
 		if (gcValues.line_width <= 0) {
 		    gcValues.line_width  = 1;
 		}
 		gcValues.dash_offset = 0;
-		gcValues.dashes      = 1;
+		gcValues.dashes = 1;
+
 		/*
 		 * You would think the XSetDashes was necessary, but it
-		 * appears that the default dotting for just saying we
-		 * want dashes appears to work correctly.
+		 * appears that the default dotting for just saying we want
+		 * dashes appears to work correctly.
 		 static char dashList[] = { 1 };
-		 static int  dashLen    = sizeof(dashList);
+		 static int dashLen = sizeof(dashList);
 		 XSetDashes(listPtr->display, gc, 0, dashList, dashLen);
 		 */
+
 		mask = GCLineWidth | GCLineStyle | GCDashList | GCDashOffset;
 		XChangeGC(listPtr->display, gc, mask, &gcValues);
 		XDrawRectangle(listPtr->display, pixmap, gc, x, y,
 			(unsigned) width, (unsigned) listPtr->lineHeight - 1);
 		if (!freeGC) {
-		    /* Don't bother changing if it is about to be freed. */
+		    /*
+		     * Don't bother changing if it is about to be freed.
+		     */
+
 		    gcValues.line_style = LineSolid;
 		    XChangeGC(listPtr->display, gc, GCLineStyle, &gcValues);
 		}
-#endif
+#endif /* WIN32 */
 	    }
 	}
 
@@ -2108,8 +2149,8 @@ DisplayListbox(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Redraw the border for the listbox to make sure that it's on top
-     * of any of the text of the listbox entries.
+     * Redraw the border for the listbox to make sure that it's on top of any
+     * of the text of the listbox entries.
      */
 
     Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, listPtr->normalBorder,
@@ -2123,11 +2164,11 @@ DisplayListbox(clientData)
 	bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(listPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, pixmap);
 	if (listPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
 	    fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(listPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap);
-	    TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, 
-	            listPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap);
+	    TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC,
+		    listPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap);
 	} else {
-	    TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, bgGC, bgGC, 
-	            listPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap);
+	    TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, bgGC, bgGC,
+		    listPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap);
 	}
     }
 #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
@@ -2143,51 +2184,51 @@ DisplayListbox(clientData)
  *
  * ListboxComputeGeometry --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to recompute geometry information
- *	such as the sizes of the elements and the overall dimensions
- *	desired for the listbox.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to recompute geometry information such as
+ *	the sizes of the elements and the overall dimensions desired for the
+ *	listbox.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Geometry information is updated and a new requested size is
- *	registered for the widget.  Internal border and gridding
- *	information is also set.
+ *	Geometry information is updated and a new requested size is registered
+ *	for the widget. Internal border and gridding information is also set.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ListboxComputeGeometry(listPtr, fontChanged, maxIsStale, updateGrid)
-    Listbox *listPtr;		/* Listbox whose geometry is to be
+ListboxComputeGeometry(
+    Listbox *listPtr,		/* Listbox whose geometry is to be
 				 * recomputed. */
-    int fontChanged;		/* Non-zero means the font may have changed
-				 * so per-element width information also
-				 * has to be computed. */
-    int maxIsStale;		/* Non-zero means the "maxWidth" field may
-				 * no longer be up-to-date and must
-				 * be recomputed.  If fontChanged is 1 then
-				 * this must be 1. */
-    int updateGrid;		/* Non-zero means call Tk_SetGrid or
-				 * Tk_UnsetGrid to update gridding for
-				 * the window. */
+    int fontChanged,		/* Non-zero means the font may have changed so
+				 * per-element width information also has to
+				 * be computed. */
+    int maxIsStale,		/* Non-zero means the "maxWidth" field may no
+				 * longer be up-to-date and must be
+				 * recomputed. If fontChanged is 1 then this
+				 * must be 1. */
+    int updateGrid)		/* Non-zero means call Tk_SetGrid or
+				 * Tk_UnsetGrid to update gridding for the
+				 * window. */
 {
-    int width, height, pixelWidth, pixelHeight;
+    int width, height, pixelWidth, pixelHeight, textLength, i, result;
     Tk_FontMetrics fm;
     Tcl_Obj *element;
-    int textLength;
     char *text;
-    int i, result;
-    
-    if (fontChanged  || maxIsStale) {
+
+    if (fontChanged || maxIsStale) {
 	listPtr->xScrollUnit = Tk_TextWidth(listPtr->tkfont, "0", 1);
 	if (listPtr->xScrollUnit == 0) {
 	    listPtr->xScrollUnit = 1;
 	}
 	listPtr->maxWidth = 0;
 	for (i = 0; i < listPtr->nElements; i++) {
-	    /* Compute the pixel width of the current element */
+	    /*
+	     * Compute the pixel width of the current element.
+	     */
+
 	    result = Tcl_ListObjIndex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, i,
 		    &element);
 	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
@@ -2239,87 +2280,92 @@ ListboxComputeGeometry(listPtr, fontChanged, maxIsStale, updateGrid)
  *
  * ListboxInsertSubCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to handle the listbox "insert"
- *      subcommand.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to handle the listbox "insert" subcommand.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	New elements are added to the listbox pointed to by listPtr;
- *      a refresh callback is registered for the listbox.
+ *	New elements are added to the listbox pointed to by listPtr; a refresh
+ *	callback is registered for the listbox.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ListboxInsertSubCmd(listPtr, index, objc, objv)
-    register Listbox *listPtr;	/* Listbox that is to get the new
-				 * elements. */
-    int index;			/* Add the new elements before this
+ListboxInsertSubCmd(
+    register Listbox *listPtr,	/* Listbox that is to get the new elements. */
+    int index,			/* Add the new elements before this
 				 * element. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of new elements to add. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* New elements (one per entry). */
+    int objc,			/* Number of new elements to add. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* New elements (one per entry). */
 {
-    int i, oldMaxWidth;
+    int i, oldMaxWidth, pixelWidth, result, length;
     Tcl_Obj *newListObj;
-    int pixelWidth;
-    int result;
     char *stringRep;
-    int length;
-    
+
     oldMaxWidth = listPtr->maxWidth;
     for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
 	/*
 	 * Check if any of the new elements are wider than the current widest;
 	 * if so, update our notion of "widest."
 	 */
+
 	stringRep = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
 	pixelWidth = Tk_TextWidth(listPtr->tkfont, stringRep, length);
 	if (pixelWidth > listPtr->maxWidth) {
 	    listPtr->maxWidth = pixelWidth;
 	}
     }
-    
-    /* Adjust selection and attribute information for every index after
-     * the first index */
+
+    /*
+     * Adjust selection and attribute information for every index after the
+     * first index.
+     */
+
     MigrateHashEntries(listPtr->selection, index, listPtr->nElements-1, objc);
     MigrateHashEntries(listPtr->itemAttrTable, index, listPtr->nElements-1,
 	    objc);
-    
-    /* If the object is shared, duplicate it before writing to it */
+
+    /*
+     * If the object is shared, duplicate it before writing to it.
+     */
+
     if (Tcl_IsShared(listPtr->listObj)) {
 	newListObj = Tcl_DuplicateObj(listPtr->listObj);
     } else {
 	newListObj = listPtr->listObj;
     }
-    result =
-	Tcl_ListObjReplace(listPtr->interp, newListObj, index, 0, objc, objv);
+    result = Tcl_ListObjReplace(listPtr->interp, newListObj, index, 0,
+	    objc, objv);
     if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	return result;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Replace the current object and set attached listvar, if any.
-     * This may error if listvar points to a var in a deleted namespace, but
-     * we ignore those errors.  If the namespace is recreated, it will
-     * auto-sync with the current value. [Bug 1424513]
+     * Replace the current object and set attached listvar, if any. This may
+     * error if listvar points to a var in a deleted namespace, but we ignore
+     * those errors. If the namespace is recreated, it will auto-sync with the
+     * current value. [Bug 1424513]
      */
 
     Tcl_IncrRefCount(newListObj);
     Tcl_DecrRefCount(listPtr->listObj);
     listPtr->listObj = newListObj;
     if (listPtr->listVarName != NULL) {
-	Tcl_SetVar2Ex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listVarName,
-		(char *) NULL, listPtr->listObj, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	Tcl_SetVar2Ex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listVarName, NULL,
+		listPtr->listObj, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
     }
 
-    /* Get the new list length */
+    /*
+     * Get the new list length.
+     */
+
     Tcl_ListObjLength(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, &listPtr->nElements);
 
     /*
-     * Update the "special" indices (anchor, topIndex, active) to account
-     * for the renumbering that just occurred.  Then arrange for the new
+     * Update the "special" indices (anchor, topIndex, active) to account for
+     * the renumbering that just occurred. Then arrange for the new
      * information to be displayed.
      */
 
@@ -2350,8 +2396,8 @@ ListboxInsertSubCmd(listPtr, index, objc, objv)
  *
  * ListboxDeleteSubCmd --
  *
- *	Process a listbox "delete" subcommand by removing one or more
- *      elements from a listbox widget.
+ *	Process a listbox "delete" subcommand by removing one or more elements
+ *	from a listbox widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
@@ -2363,23 +2409,19 @@ ListboxInsertSubCmd(listPtr, index, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-ListboxDeleteSubCmd(listPtr, first, last)
-    register Listbox *listPtr;	/* Listbox widget to modify. */
-    int first;			/* Index of first element to delete. */
-    int last;			/* Index of last element to delete. */
+ListboxDeleteSubCmd(
+    register Listbox *listPtr,	/* Listbox widget to modify. */
+    int first,			/* Index of first element to delete. */
+    int last)			/* Index of last element to delete. */
 {
-    int count, i, widthChanged;
-    Tcl_Obj *newListObj;
-    Tcl_Obj *element;
-    int length;
+    int count, i, widthChanged, length, result, pixelWidth;
+    Tcl_Obj *newListObj, *element;
     char *stringRep;
-    int result;
-    int pixelWidth;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
-    
+
     /*
-     * Adjust the range to fit within the existing elements of the
-     * listbox, and make sure there's something to delete.
+     * Adjust the range to fit within the existing elements of the listbox,
+     * and make sure there's something to delete.
      */
 
     if (first < 0) {
@@ -2395,30 +2437,36 @@ ListboxDeleteSubCmd(listPtr, first, last)
 
     /*
      * Foreach deleted index we must:
-     * a) remove selection information
+     * a) remove selection information,
      * b) check the width of the element; if it is equal to the max, set
      *    widthChanged to 1, because it may be the only element with that
-     *    width
+     *    width.
      */
+
     widthChanged = 0;
     for (i = first; i <= last; i++) {
-	/* Remove selection information */
-	entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, (char *)i);
+	/*
+	 * Remove selection information.
+	 */
+
+	entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, (char *) INT2PTR(i));
 	if (entry != NULL) {
 	    listPtr->numSelected--;
 	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entry);
 	}
 
-	entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->itemAttrTable, (char *)i);
+	entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->itemAttrTable, (char *) INT2PTR(i));
 	if (entry != NULL) {
 	    ckfree((char *)Tcl_GetHashValue(entry));
 	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entry);
 	}
-	
-	/* Check width of the element.  We only have to check if widthChanged
+
+	/*
+	 * Check width of the element. We only have to check if widthChanged
 	 * has not already been set to 1, because we only need one maxWidth
 	 * element to disappear for us to have to recompute the width
 	 */
+
 	if (widthChanged == 0) {
 	    Tcl_ListObjIndex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, i, &element);
 	    stringRep = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(element, &length);
@@ -2429,13 +2477,19 @@ ListboxDeleteSubCmd(listPtr, first, last)
 	}
     }
 
-    /* Adjust selection and attribute info for indices after lastIndex */
+    /*
+     * Adjust selection and attribute info for indices after lastIndex.
+     */
+
     MigrateHashEntries(listPtr->selection, last+1,
 	    listPtr->nElements-1, count*-1);
     MigrateHashEntries(listPtr->itemAttrTable, last+1,
 	    listPtr->nElements-1, count*-1);
 
-    /* Delete the requested elements */
+    /*
+     * Delete the requested elements.
+     */
+
     if (Tcl_IsShared(listPtr->listObj)) {
 	newListObj = Tcl_DuplicateObj(listPtr->listObj);
     } else {
@@ -2448,27 +2502,30 @@ ListboxDeleteSubCmd(listPtr, first, last)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Replace the current object and set attached listvar, if any.
-     * This may error if listvar points to a var in a deleted namespace, but
-     * we ignore those errors.  If the namespace is recreated, it will
-     * auto-sync with the current value. [Bug 1424513]
+     * Replace the current object and set attached listvar, if any. This may
+     * error if listvar points to a var in a deleted namespace, but we ignore
+     * those errors. If the namespace is recreated, it will auto-sync with the
+     * current value. [Bug 1424513]
      */
 
     Tcl_IncrRefCount(newListObj);
     Tcl_DecrRefCount(listPtr->listObj);
     listPtr->listObj = newListObj;
     if (listPtr->listVarName != NULL) {
-	Tcl_SetVar2Ex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listVarName,
-		(char *) NULL, listPtr->listObj, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	Tcl_SetVar2Ex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listVarName, NULL,
+		listPtr->listObj, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
     }
 
-    /* Get the new list length */
+    /*
+     * Get the new list length.
+     */
+
     Tcl_ListObjLength(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, &listPtr->nElements);
 
     /*
-     * Update the selection and viewing information to reflect the change
-     * in the element numbering, and redisplay to slide information up over
-     * the elements that were deleted.
+     * Update the selection and viewing information to reflect the change in
+     * the element numbering, and redisplay to slide information up over the
+     * elements that were deleted.
      */
 
     if (first <= listPtr->selectAnchor) {
@@ -2512,26 +2569,26 @@ ListboxDeleteSubCmd(listPtr, first, last)
  *
  * ListboxEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on listboxes.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	listboxes.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up. When
+ *	it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ListboxEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+ListboxEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     Listbox *listPtr = (Listbox *) clientData;
-    
+
     if (eventPtr->type == Expose) {
 	EventuallyRedrawRange(listPtr,
 		NearestListboxElement(listPtr, eventPtr->xexpose.y),
@@ -2564,10 +2621,9 @@ ListboxEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	ChangeListboxOffset(listPtr, listPtr->xOffset);
 
 	/*
-	 * Redraw the whole listbox.  It's hard to tell what needs
-	 * to be redrawn (e.g. if the listbox has shrunk then we
-	 * may only need to redraw the borders), so just redraw
-	 * everything for safety.
+	 * Redraw the whole listbox. It's hard to tell what needs to be
+	 * redrawn (e.g. if the listbox has shrunk then we may only need to
+	 * redraw the borders), so just redraw everything for safety.
 	 */
 
 	EventuallyRedrawRange(listPtr, 0, listPtr->nElements-1);
@@ -2589,9 +2645,9 @@ ListboxEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * ListboxCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2603,16 +2659,16 @@ ListboxEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ListboxCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+ListboxCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     Listbox *listPtr = (Listbox *) clientData;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this procedure destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (!(listPtr->flags & LISTBOX_DELETED)) {
@@ -2625,13 +2681,12 @@ ListboxCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * GetListboxIndex --
  *
- *	Parse an index into a listbox and return either its value
- *	or an error.
+ *	Parse an index into a listbox and return either its value or an error.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.  If all went well, then *indexPtr is
- *	filled in with the index (into listPtr) corresponding to
- *	string.  Otherwise an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result. If all went well, then *indexPtr is filled in
+ *	with the index (into listPtr) corresponding to string. Otherwise an
+ *	error message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2640,62 +2695,62 @@ ListboxCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static int
-GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, indexObj, endIsSize, indexPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* For error messages. */
-    Listbox *listPtr;		/* Listbox for which the index is being
+GetListboxIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For error messages. */
+    Listbox *listPtr,		/* Listbox for which the index is being
 				 * specified. */
-    Tcl_Obj *indexObj;		/* Specifies an element in the listbox. */
-    int endIsSize;		/* If 1, "end" refers to the number of
-				 * entries in the listbox.  If 0, "end"
-				 * refers to 1 less than the number of
-				 * entries. */
-    int *indexPtr;		/* Where to store converted index. */
+    Tcl_Obj *indexObj,		/* Specifies an element in the listbox. */
+    int endIsSize,		/* If 1, "end" refers to the number of entries
+				 * in the listbox. If 0, "end" refers to 1
+				 * less than the number of entries. */
+    int *indexPtr)		/* Where to store converted index. */
 {
-    int result;
-    int index;
+    int result, index;
     char *stringRep;
-    
-    /* First see if the index is one of the named indices */
+
+    /*
+     * First see if the index is one of the named indices.
+     */
+
     result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(NULL, indexObj, indexNames, "", 0, &index);
     if (result == TCL_OK) {
 	switch (index) {
-	    case INDEX_ACTIVE: {
-		/* "active" index */
-		*indexPtr = listPtr->active;
-		break;
-	    }
-
-	    case INDEX_ANCHOR: {
-		/* "anchor" index */
-		*indexPtr = listPtr->selectAnchor;
-		break;
-	    }
-
-	    case INDEX_END: {
-		/* "end" index */
-		if (endIsSize) {
-		    *indexPtr = listPtr->nElements;
-		} else {
-		    *indexPtr = listPtr->nElements - 1;
-		}
-		break;
+	case INDEX_ACTIVE:
+	    /* "active" index */
+	    *indexPtr = listPtr->active;
+	    break;
+	case INDEX_ANCHOR:
+	    /* "anchor" index */
+	    *indexPtr = listPtr->selectAnchor;
+	    break;
+	case INDEX_END:
+	    /* "end" index */
+	    if (endIsSize) {
+		*indexPtr = listPtr->nElements;
+	    } else {
+		*indexPtr = listPtr->nElements - 1;
 	    }
+	    break;
 	}
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    /* The index didn't match any of the named indices; maybe it's an @x,y */
+    /*
+     * The index didn't match any of the named indices; maybe it's an @x,y
+     */
+
     stringRep = Tcl_GetString(indexObj);
     if (stringRep[0] == '@') {
 	/* @x,y index */
 	int y;
 	char *start, *end;
+
 	start = stringRep + 1;
-	strtol(start, &end, 0);
+	y = strtol(start, &end, 0);
 	if ((start == end) || (*end != ',')) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad listbox index \"", stringRep,
 		    "\": must be active, anchor, end, @x,y, or a number",
-		    (char *)NULL);
+		    NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	start = end+1;
@@ -2703,23 +2758,29 @@ GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, indexObj, endIsSize, indexPtr)
 	if ((start == end) || (*end != '\0')) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad listbox index \"", stringRep,
 		    "\": must be active, anchor, end, @x,y, or a number",
-		    (char *)NULL);
+		    NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	*indexPtr = NearestListboxElement(listPtr, y);
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
-    
-    /* Maybe the index is just an integer */
+
+    /*
+     * Maybe the index is just an integer.
+     */
+
     if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, indexObj, indexPtr) == TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    /* Everything failed, nothing matched.  Throw up an error message */
+    /*
+     * Everything failed, nothing matched. Throw up an error message.
+     */
+
     Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad listbox index \"",
 	    Tcl_GetString(indexObj), "\": must be active, anchor, ",
-	    "end, @x,y, or a number", (char *) NULL);
+	    "end, @x,y, or a number", NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -2728,26 +2789,25 @@ GetListboxIndex(interp, listPtr, indexObj, endIsSize, indexPtr)
  *
  * ChangeListboxView --
  *
- *	Change the view on a listbox widget so that a given element
- *	is displayed at the top.
+ *	Change the view on a listbox widget so that a given element is
+ *	displayed at the top.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	What's displayed on the screen is changed.  If there is a
- *	scrollbar associated with this widget, then the scrollbar
- *	is instructed to change its display too.
+ *	What's displayed on the screen is changed. If there is a scrollbar
+ *	associated with this widget, then the scrollbar is instructed to
+ *	change its display too.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ChangeListboxView(listPtr, index)
-    register Listbox *listPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
-    int index;				/* Index of element in listPtr
-					 * that should now appear at the
-					 * top of the listbox. */
+ChangeListboxView(
+    register Listbox *listPtr,	/* Information about widget. */
+    int index)			/* Index of element in listPtr that should now
+				 * appear at the top of the listbox. */
 {
     if (index >= (listPtr->nElements - listPtr->fullLines)) {
 	index = listPtr->nElements - listPtr->fullLines;
@@ -2773,26 +2833,24 @@ ChangeListboxView(listPtr, index)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The listbox may be redrawn to reflect its new horizontal
- *	offset.
+ *	The listbox may be redrawn to reflect its new horizontal offset.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ChangeListboxOffset(listPtr, offset)
-    register Listbox *listPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
-    int offset;				/* Desired new "xOffset" for
-					 * listbox. */
+ChangeListboxOffset(
+    register Listbox *listPtr,	/* Information about widget. */
+    int offset)			/* Desired new "xOffset" for listbox. */
 {
     int maxOffset;
-    
+
     /*
-     * Make sure that the new offset is within the allowable range, and
-     * round it off to an even multiple of xScrollUnit.
+     * Make sure that the new offset is within the allowable range, and round
+     * it off to an even multiple of xScrollUnit.
      *
-     * Add half a scroll unit to do entry/text-like synchronization.
-     * [Bug #225025]
+     * Add half a scroll unit to do entry/text-like synchronization. [Bug
+     * #225025]
      */
 
     offset += listPtr->xScrollUnit / 2;
@@ -2818,8 +2876,8 @@ ChangeListboxOffset(listPtr, offset)
  *
  * ListboxScanTo --
  *
- *	Given a point (presumably of the curent mouse location)
- *	drag the view in the window to implement the scan operation.
+ *	Given a point (presumably of the curent mouse location) drag the view
+ *	in the window to implement the scan operation.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2831,29 +2889,26 @@ ChangeListboxOffset(listPtr, offset)
  */
 
 static void
-ListboxScanTo(listPtr, x, y)
-    register Listbox *listPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
-    int x;				/* X-coordinate to use for scan
-					 * operation. */
-    int y;				/* Y-coordinate to use for scan
-					 * operation. */
+ListboxScanTo(
+    register Listbox *listPtr,	/* Information about widget. */
+    int x,			/* X-coordinate to use for scan operation. */
+    int y)			/* Y-coordinate to use for scan operation. */
 {
     int newTopIndex, newOffset, maxIndex, maxOffset;
-    
+
     maxIndex = listPtr->nElements - listPtr->fullLines;
     maxOffset = listPtr->maxWidth + (listPtr->xScrollUnit - 1)
 	    - (Tk_Width(listPtr->tkwin) - 2*listPtr->inset
 	    - 2*listPtr->selBorderWidth - listPtr->xScrollUnit);
 
     /*
-     * Compute new top line for screen by amplifying the difference
-     * between the current position and the place where the scan
-     * started (the "mark" position).  If we run off the top or bottom
-     * of the list, then reset the mark point so that the current
-     * position continues to correspond to the edge of the window.
-     * This means that the picture will start dragging as soon as the
-     * mouse reverses direction (without this reset, might have to slide
-     * mouse a long ways back before the picture starts moving again).
+     * Compute new top line for screen by amplifying the difference between
+     * the current position and the place where the scan started (the "mark"
+     * position). If we run off the top or bottom of the list, then reset the
+     * mark point so that the current position continues to correspond to the
+     * edge of the window. This means that the picture will start dragging as
+     * soon as the mouse reverses direction (without this reset, might have to
+     * slide mouse a long ways back before the picture starts moving again).
      */
 
     newTopIndex = listPtr->scanMarkYIndex
@@ -2873,7 +2928,7 @@ ListboxScanTo(listPtr, x, y)
      * scan started.
      */
 
-    newOffset = listPtr->scanMarkXOffset - (10*(x - listPtr->scanMarkX));
+    newOffset = listPtr->scanMarkXOffset - 10*(x - listPtr->scanMarkX);
     if (newOffset > maxOffset) {
 	newOffset = listPtr->scanMarkXOffset = maxOffset;
 	listPtr->scanMarkX = x;
@@ -2889,13 +2944,12 @@ ListboxScanTo(listPtr, x, y)
  *
  * NearestListboxElement --
  *
- *	Given a y-coordinate inside a listbox, compute the index of
- *	the element under that y-coordinate (or closest to that
- *	y-coordinate).
+ *	Given a y-coordinate inside a listbox, compute the index of the
+ *	element under that y-coordinate (or closest to that y-coordinate).
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is an index of an element of listPtr.  If
- *	listPtr has no elements, then 0 is always returned.
+ *	The return value is an index of an element of listPtr. If listPtr has
+ *	no elements, then 0 is always returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2904,9 +2958,9 @@ ListboxScanTo(listPtr, x, y)
  */
 
 static int
-NearestListboxElement(listPtr, y)
-    register Listbox *listPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
-    int y;				/* Y-coordinate in listPtr's window. */
+NearestListboxElement(
+    register Listbox *listPtr,	/* Information about widget. */
+    int y)			/* Y-coordinate in listPtr's window. */
 {
     int index;
 
@@ -2935,29 +2989,28 @@ NearestListboxElement(listPtr, y)
  *	Standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	All of the elements in the range between first and last are
- *	marked as either selected or deselected, depending on the
- *	"select" argument.  Any items whose state changes are redisplayed.
- *	The selection is claimed from X when the number of selected
- *	elements changes from zero to non-zero.
+ *	All of the elements in the range between first and last are marked as
+ *	either selected or deselected, depending on the "select" argument. Any
+ *	items whose state changes are redisplayed. The selection is claimed
+ *	from X when the number of selected elements changes from zero to
+ *	non-zero.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ListboxSelect(listPtr, first, last, select)
-    register Listbox *listPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
-    int first;				/* Index of first element to
-					 * select or deselect. */
-    int last;				/* Index of last element to
-					 * select or deselect. */
-    int select;				/* 1 means select items, 0 means
-					 * deselect them. */
+ListboxSelect(
+    register Listbox *listPtr,	/* Information about widget. */
+    int first,			/* Index of first element to select or
+				 * deselect. */
+    int last,			/* Index of last element to select or
+				 * deselect. */
+    int select)			/* 1 means select items, 0 means deselect
+				 * them. */
 {
-    int i, firstRedisplay, oldCount;
+    int i, firstRedisplay, oldCount, isNew;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
-    int new;
-    
+
     if (last < first) {
 	i = first;
 	first = last;
@@ -2976,12 +3029,13 @@ ListboxSelect(listPtr, first, last, select)
     firstRedisplay = -1;
 
     /*
-     * For each index in the range, find it in our selection hash table.
-     * If it's not there but should be, add it.  If it's there but shouldn't
-     * be, remove it.
+     * For each index in the range, find it in our selection hash table. If
+     * it's not there but should be, add it. If it's there but shouldn't be,
+     * remove it.
      */
+
     for (i = first; i <= last; i++) {
-	entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, (char *)i);
+	entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, (char *) INT2PTR(i));
 	if (entry != NULL) {
 	    if (!select) {
 		Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entry);
@@ -2993,7 +3047,7 @@ ListboxSelect(listPtr, first, last, select)
 	} else {
 	    if (select) {
 		entry = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(listPtr->selection,
-			(char *)i, &new);
+			(char *) INT2PTR(i), &isNew);
 		Tcl_SetHashValue(entry, (ClientData) NULL);
 		listPtr->numSelected++;
 		if (firstRedisplay < 0) {
@@ -3019,17 +3073,16 @@ ListboxSelect(listPtr, first, last, select)
  *
  * ListboxFetchSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is called back by Tk when the selection is
- *	requested by someone.  It returns part or all of the selection
- *	in a buffer provided by the caller.
+ *	This procedure is called back by Tk when the selection is requested by
+ *	someone. It returns part or all of the selection in a buffer provided
+ *	by the caller.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the number of non-NULL bytes stored
- *	at buffer.  Buffer is filled (or partially filled) with a
- *	NULL-terminated string containing part or all of the selection,
- *	as given by offset and maxBytes.  The selection is returned
- *	as a Tcl list with one list element for each element in the
- *	listbox.
+ *	The return value is the number of non-NULL bytes stored at buffer.
+ *	Buffer is filled (or partially filled) with a NULL-terminated string
+ *	containing part or all of the selection, as given by offset and
+ *	maxBytes. The selection is returned as a Tcl list with one list
+ *	element for each element in the listbox.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3038,25 +3091,22 @@ ListboxSelect(listPtr, first, last, select)
  */
 
 static int
-ListboxFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about listbox widget. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset within selection of first
-					 * byte to be returned. */
-    char *buffer;			/* Location in which to place
-					 * selection. */
-    int maxBytes;			/* Maximum number of bytes to place
-					 * at buffer, not including terminating
-					 * NULL character. */
+ListboxFetchSelection(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about listbox widget. */
+    int offset,			/* Offset within selection of first byte to be
+				 * returned. */
+    char *buffer,		/* Location in which to place selection. */
+    int maxBytes)		/* Maximum number of bytes to place at buffer,
+				 * not including terminating NULL
+				 * character. */
 {
     register Listbox *listPtr = (Listbox *) clientData;
     Tcl_DString selection;
-    int length, count, needNewline;
+    int length, count, needNewline, stringLen, i;
     Tcl_Obj *curElement;
     char *stringRep;
-    int stringLen;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
-    int i;
-    
+
     if (!listPtr->exportSelection) {
 	return -1;
     }
@@ -3068,7 +3118,7 @@ ListboxFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
     needNewline = 0;
     Tcl_DStringInit(&selection);
     for (i = 0; i < listPtr->nElements; i++) {
-	entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, (char *)i);
+	entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, (char *) INT2PTR(i));
 	if (entry != NULL) {
 	    if (needNewline) {
 		Tcl_DStringAppend(&selection, "\n", 1);
@@ -3097,9 +3147,7 @@ ListboxFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
 	if (count > maxBytes) {
 	    count = maxBytes;
 	}
-	memcpy((VOID *) buffer,
-		(VOID *) (Tcl_DStringValue(&selection) + offset),
-		(size_t) count);
+	memcpy(buffer, Tcl_DStringValue(&selection) + offset, (size_t) count);
     }
     buffer[count] = '\0';
     Tcl_DStringFree(&selection);
@@ -3111,25 +3159,25 @@ ListboxFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  *
  * ListboxLostSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is called back by Tk when the selection is
- *	grabbed away from a listbox widget.
+ *	This procedure is called back by Tk when the selection is grabbed away
+ *	from a listbox widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The existing selection is unhighlighted, and the window is
- *	marked as not containing a selection.
+ *	The existing selection is unhighlighted, and the window is marked as
+ *	not containing a selection.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ListboxLostSelection(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about listbox widget. */
+ListboxLostSelection(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about listbox widget. */
 {
     register Listbox *listPtr = (Listbox *) clientData;
-    
+
     if ((listPtr->exportSelection) && (listPtr->nElements > 0)) {
 	ListboxSelect(listPtr, 0, listPtr->nElements-1, 0);
     }
@@ -3140,8 +3188,8 @@ ListboxLostSelection(clientData)
  *
  * EventuallyRedrawRange --
  *
- *	Ensure that a given range of elements is eventually redrawn on
- *	the display (if those elements in fact appear on the display).
+ *	Ensure that a given range of elements is eventually redrawn on the
+ *	display (if those elements in fact appear on the display).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -3153,17 +3201,19 @@ ListboxLostSelection(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-EventuallyRedrawRange(listPtr, first, last)
-    register Listbox *listPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
-    int first;				/* Index of first element in list
-					 * that needs to be redrawn. */
-    int last;				/* Index of last element in list
-					 * that needs to be redrawn.  May
-					 * be less than first;
-					 * these just bracket a range. */
+EventuallyRedrawRange(
+    register Listbox *listPtr,	/* Information about widget. */
+    int first,			/* Index of first element in list that needs
+				 * to be redrawn. */
+    int last)			/* Index of last element in list that needs to
+				 * be redrawn. May be less than first; these
+				 * just bracket a range. */
 {
-    /* We don't have to register a redraw callback if one is already pending,
-     * or if the window doesn't exist, or if the window isn't mapped */
+    /*
+     * We don't have to register a redraw callback if one is already pending,
+     * or if the window doesn't exist, or if the window isn't mapped.
+     */
+
     if ((listPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)
 	    || (listPtr->flags & LISTBOX_DELETED)
 	    || !Tk_IsMapped(listPtr->tkwin)) {
@@ -3178,30 +3228,30 @@ EventuallyRedrawRange(listPtr, first, last)
  *
  * ListboxUpdateVScrollbar --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever information has changed in
- *	a listbox in a way that would invalidate a vertical scrollbar
- *	display.  If there is an associated scrollbar, then this command
- *	updates it by invoking a Tcl command.
+ *	This procedure is invoked whenever information has changed in a
+ *	listbox in a way that would invalidate a vertical scrollbar display.
+ *	If there is an associated scrollbar, then this command updates it by
+ *	invoking a Tcl command.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A Tcl command is invoked, and an additional command may be
- *	invoked to process errors in the command.
+ *	A Tcl command is invoked, and an additional command may be invoked to
+ *	process errors in the command.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ListboxUpdateVScrollbar(listPtr)
-    register Listbox *listPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
+ListboxUpdateVScrollbar(
+    register Listbox *listPtr)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
-    char string[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2];
+    char firstStr[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE+1], lastStr[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE+1];
     double first, last;
     int result;
     Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    
+
     if (listPtr->yScrollCmd == NULL) {
 	return;
     }
@@ -3209,30 +3259,32 @@ ListboxUpdateVScrollbar(listPtr)
 	first = 0.0;
 	last = 1.0;
     } else {
-	first = listPtr->topIndex/((double) listPtr->nElements);
-	last = (listPtr->topIndex+listPtr->fullLines)
-		/((double) listPtr->nElements);
+	first = listPtr->topIndex / (double) listPtr->nElements;
+	last = (listPtr->topIndex + listPtr->fullLines)
+		/ (double) listPtr->nElements;
 	if (last > 1.0) {
 	    last = 1.0;
 	}
     }
-    sprintf(string, " %g %g", first, last);
+    firstStr[0] = lastStr[0] = ' ';
+    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, first, firstStr+1);
+    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, last, lastStr+1);
 
     /*
-     * We must hold onto the interpreter from the listPtr because the data
-     * at listPtr might be freed as a result of the Tcl_VarEval.
+     * We must hold onto the interpreter from the listPtr because the data at
+     * listPtr might be freed as a result of the Tcl_VarEval.
      */
-    
+
     interp = listPtr->interp;
-    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
-    result = Tcl_VarEval(interp, listPtr->yScrollCmd, string,
-	    (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_Preserve(interp);
+    result = Tcl_VarEval(interp, listPtr->yScrollCmd, firstStr, lastStr,
+	    NULL);
     if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
 		"\n    (vertical scrolling command executed by listbox)");
 	Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
     }
-    Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+    Tcl_Release(interp);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -3240,26 +3292,26 @@ ListboxUpdateVScrollbar(listPtr)
  *
  * ListboxUpdateHScrollbar --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever information has changed in
- *	a listbox in a way that would invalidate a horizontal scrollbar
- *	display.  If there is an associated horizontal scrollbar, then
- *	this command updates it by invoking a Tcl command.
+ *	This procedure is invoked whenever information has changed in a
+ *	listbox in a way that would invalidate a horizontal scrollbar display.
+ *	If there is an associated horizontal scrollbar, then this command
+ *	updates it by invoking a Tcl command.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A Tcl command is invoked, and an additional command may be
- *	invoked to process errors in the command.
+ *	A Tcl command is invoked, and an additional command may be invoked to
+ *	process errors in the command.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ListboxUpdateHScrollbar(listPtr)
-    register Listbox *listPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
+ListboxUpdateHScrollbar(
+    register Listbox *listPtr)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
-    char string[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2];
+    char firstStr[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE+1], lastStr[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE+1];
     int result, windowWidth;
     double first, last;
     Tcl_Interp *interp;
@@ -3273,30 +3325,33 @@ ListboxUpdateHScrollbar(listPtr)
 	first = 0;
 	last = 1.0;
     } else {
-	first = listPtr->xOffset/((double) listPtr->maxWidth);
-	last = (listPtr->xOffset + windowWidth)
-		/((double) listPtr->maxWidth);
+	register double maxWide = (double) listPtr->maxWidth;
+
+	first = listPtr->xOffset / maxWide;
+	last = (listPtr->xOffset + windowWidth) / maxWide;
 	if (last > 1.0) {
 	    last = 1.0;
 	}
     }
-    sprintf(string, " %g %g", first, last);
+    firstStr[0] = lastStr[0] = ' ';
+    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, first, firstStr+1);
+    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, last, lastStr+1);
 
     /*
      * We must hold onto the interpreter because the data referred to at
      * listPtr might be freed as a result of the call to Tcl_VarEval.
      */
-    
+
     interp = listPtr->interp;
-    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
-    result = Tcl_VarEval(interp, listPtr->xScrollCmd, string,
-	    (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_Preserve(interp);
+    result = Tcl_VarEval(interp, listPtr->xScrollCmd, firstStr, lastStr,
+	    NULL);
     if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
 		"\n    (horizontal scrolling command executed by listbox)");
 	Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
     }
-    Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+    Tcl_Release(interp);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -3304,60 +3359,72 @@ ListboxUpdateHScrollbar(listPtr)
  *
  * ListboxListVarProc --
  *
- *      Called whenever the trace on the listbox list var fires.
+ *	Called whenever the trace on the listbox list var fires.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static char *
-ListboxListVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
-    ClientData clientData;      /* Information about button. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;         /* Interpreter containing variable. */
-    CONST char *name1;          /* Not used. */
-    CONST char *name2;          /* Not used. */
-    int flags;                  /* Information about what happened. */
+ListboxListVarProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about button. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
+    const char *name1,		/* Not used. */
+    const char *name2,		/* Not used. */
+    int flags)			/* Information about what happened. */
 {
     Listbox *listPtr = (Listbox *)clientData;
     Tcl_Obj *oldListObj, *varListObj;
-    int oldLength;
-    int i;
+    int oldLength, i;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
-    
-    /* Bwah hahahaha -- puny mortal, you can't unset a -listvar'd variable! */
+
+    /*
+     * Bwah hahahaha! Puny mortal, you can't unset a -listvar'd variable!
+     */
+
     if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
 	if ((flags & TCL_TRACE_DESTROYED) && !(flags & TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED)) {
-	    Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, listPtr->listVarName,
-		    (char *)NULL, listPtr->listObj, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	    Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, listPtr->listVarName, NULL,
+		    listPtr->listObj, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
 	    Tcl_TraceVar(interp, listPtr->listVarName,
 		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		    ListboxListVarProc, clientData);
-	    return (char *)NULL;
+	    return NULL;
 	}
     } else {
 	oldListObj = listPtr->listObj;
 	varListObj = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listVarName,
-		(char *)NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+		NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+
 	/*
-	 * Make sure the new value is a good list; if it's not, disallow
-	 * the change -- the fact that it is a listvar means that it must
-	 * always be a valid list -- and return an error message.
+	 * Make sure the new value is a good list; if it's not, disallow the
+	 * change - the fact that it is a listvar means that it must always be
+	 * a valid list - and return an error message.
 	 */
+
 	if (Tcl_ListObjLength(listPtr->interp, varListObj, &i) != TCL_OK) {
-	    Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, listPtr->listVarName, (char *)NULL,
-		    oldListObj, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
-	    return("invalid listvar value");
+	    Tcl_SetVar2Ex(interp, listPtr->listVarName, NULL, oldListObj,
+		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	    return (char *) "invalid listvar value";
 	}
-	
+
 	listPtr->listObj = varListObj;
-	/* Incr the obj ref count so it doesn't vanish if the var is unset */
+
+	/*
+	 * Incr the obj ref count so it doesn't vanish if the var is unset.
+	 */
+
 	Tcl_IncrRefCount(listPtr->listObj);
-	/* Clean up the ref to our old list obj */
+
+	/*
+	 * Clean up the ref to our old list obj.
+	 */
+
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(oldListObj);
     }
 
@@ -3365,21 +3432,29 @@ ListboxListVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
      * If the list length has decreased, then we should clean up selection and
      * attributes information for elements past the end of the new list
      */
+
     oldLength = listPtr->nElements;
     Tcl_ListObjLength(listPtr->interp, listPtr->listObj, &listPtr->nElements);
     if (listPtr->nElements < oldLength) {
 	for (i = listPtr->nElements; i < oldLength; i++) {
-	    /* Clean up selection */
-	    entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, (char *)i);
+	    /*
+	     * Clean up selection.
+	     */
+
+	    entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->selection, (char *) INT2PTR(i));
 	    if (entry != NULL) {
 		listPtr->numSelected--;
 		Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entry);
 	    }
 
-	    /* Clean up attributes */
-	    entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->itemAttrTable, (char *)i);
+	    /*
+	     * Clean up attributes.
+	     */
+
+	    entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(listPtr->itemAttrTable,
+		    (char *) INT2PTR(i));
 	    if (entry != NULL) {
-		ckfree((char *)Tcl_GetHashValue(entry));
+		ckfree((char *) Tcl_GetHashValue(entry));
 		Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entry);
 	    }
 	}
@@ -3398,14 +3473,15 @@ ListboxListVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
     /*
      * The computed maxWidth may have changed as a result of this operation.
      * However, we don't want to recompute it every time this trace fires
-     * (imagine the user doing 1000 lappends to the listvar).  Therefore, set
+     * (imagine the user doing 1000 lappends to the listvar). Therefore, set
      * the MAXWIDTH_IS_STALE flag, which will cause the width to be recomputed
      * next time the list is redrawn.
      */
+
     listPtr->flags |= MAXWIDTH_IS_STALE;
-    
+
     EventuallyRedrawRange(listPtr, 0, listPtr->nElements-1);
-    return (char*)NULL;
+    return NULL;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -3413,10 +3489,10 @@ ListboxListVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
  *
  * MigrateHashEntries --
  *
- *	Given a hash table with entries keyed by a single integer value,
- *	move all entries in a given range by a fixed amount, so that
- *	if in the original table there was an entry with key n and
- *	the offset was i, in the new table that entry would have key n + i.
+ *	Given a hash table with entries keyed by a single integer value, move
+ *	all entries in a given range by a fixed amount, so that if in the
+ *	original table there was an entry with key n and the offset was i, in
+ *	the new table that entry would have key n + i.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -3428,39 +3504,45 @@ ListboxListVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
  */
 
 static void
-MigrateHashEntries(table, first, last, offset)
-    Tcl_HashTable *table;
-    int first;
-    int last;
-    int offset;
+MigrateHashEntries(
+    Tcl_HashTable *table,
+    int first,
+    int last,
+    int offset)
 {
-    int i, new;
+    int i, isNew;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
     ClientData clientData;
 
     if (offset == 0) {
 	return;
     }
-    /* It's more efficient to do one if/else and nest the for loops inside,
+
+    /*
+     * It's more efficient to do one if/else and nest the for loops inside,
      * although we could avoid some code duplication if we nested the if/else
-     * inside the for loops */
+     * inside the for loops.
+     */
+
     if (offset > 0) {
 	for (i = last; i >= first; i--) {
-	    entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(table, (char *)i);
+	    entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(table, (char *) INT2PTR(i));
 	    if (entry != NULL) {
 		clientData = Tcl_GetHashValue(entry);
 		Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entry);
-		entry = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(table, (char *)(i + offset), &new);
+		entry = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(table,
+			(char *) INT2PTR(i + offset), &isNew);
 		Tcl_SetHashValue(entry, clientData);
 	    }
 	}
     } else {
 	for (i = first; i <= last; i++) {
-	    entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(table, (char *)i);
+	    entry = Tcl_FindHashEntry(table, (char *) INT2PTR(i));
 	    if (entry != NULL) {
 		clientData = Tcl_GetHashValue(entry);
 		Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entry);
-		entry = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(table, (char *)(i + offset), &new);
+		entry = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(table,
+			(char *) INT2PTR(i + offset), &isNew);
 		Tcl_SetHashValue(entry, clientData);
 	    }
 	}
@@ -3468,3 +3550,10 @@ MigrateHashEntries(table, first, last, offset)
     return;
 }
 
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkMacWinMenu.c b/generic/tkMacWinMenu.c
index 7138c7d..9351de1 100644
--- a/generic/tkMacWinMenu.c
+++ b/generic/tkMacWinMenu.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkMacWinMenu.c --
  *
  *	This module implements the common elements of the Mac and Windows
@@ -6,10 +6,11 @@
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
+#include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkMenu.h"
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
@@ -17,9 +18,7 @@ typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
-
-static int			PreprocessMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
-
+static int		PreprocessMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -29,8 +28,8 @@ static int			PreprocessMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
  *	The guts of the preprocessing. Recursive.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result (errors can occur
- *	while the postcommands are being processed).
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result (errors can occur while the
+ *	postcommands are being processed).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Since commands can get executed while this routine is being executed,
@@ -40,61 +39,59 @@ static int			PreprocessMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
  */
 
 static int
-PreprocessMenu(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+PreprocessMenu(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)
 {
     int index, result, finished;
-    TkMenu *cascadeMenuPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
-   
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) menuPtr);
-    
+
     /*
      * First, let's process the post command on ourselves. If this command
      * destroys this menu, or if there was an error, we are done.
      */
-     
+
     result = TkPostCommand(menuPtr);
     if ((result != TCL_OK) || (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL)) {
-    	goto done;
+	goto done;
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * Now, we go through structure and process all of the commands.
-     * Since the structure is changing, we stop after we do one command,
-     * and start over. When we get through without doing any, we are done.
+     * Now, we go through structure and process all of the commands. Since the
+     * structure is changing, we stop after we do one command, and start over.
+     * When we get through without doing any, we are done.
      */
-    
-    
+
     do {
-    	finished = 1;
-        for (index = 0; index < menuPtr->numEntries; index++) {
-            if ((menuPtr->entries[index]->type == CASCADE_ENTRY)
-            	    && (menuPtr->entries[index]->namePtr != NULL)) {
-            	if ((menuPtr->entries[index]->childMenuRefPtr != NULL)
-            		&& (menuPtr->entries[index]->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr
-            		!= NULL)) {
-            	    cascadeMenuPtr =
-            	    	    menuPtr->entries[index]->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr;
-            	    if (cascadeMenuPtr->postCommandGeneration != 
-            	    	    tsdPtr->postCommandGeneration) {
-            	    	cascadeMenuPtr->postCommandGeneration = 
-            	    		tsdPtr->postCommandGeneration;
-            	        result = PreprocessMenu(cascadeMenuPtr);
-            	        if (result != TCL_OK) {
-            	            goto done;
-            	        }
-            	        finished = 0;
-            	        break;
-            	    }
-            	}
-            }
-        }
+	finished = 1;
+	for (index = 0; index < menuPtr->numEntries; index++) {
+	    register TkMenuEntry *entryPtr = menuPtr->entries[index];
+
+	    if ((entryPtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY)
+		    && (entryPtr->namePtr != NULL)
+		    && (entryPtr->childMenuRefPtr != NULL)
+		    && (entryPtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL)) {
+		TkMenu *cascadeMenuPtr = entryPtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr;
+
+		if (cascadeMenuPtr->postCommandGeneration !=
+			tsdPtr->postCommandGeneration) {
+		    cascadeMenuPtr->postCommandGeneration =
+			    tsdPtr->postCommandGeneration;
+		    result = PreprocessMenu(cascadeMenuPtr);
+		    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+			goto done;
+		    }
+		    finished = 0;
+		    break;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
     } while (!finished);
-    
-    done:
-    Tcl_Release((ClientData)menuPtr);
+
+  done:
+    Tcl_Release((ClientData) menuPtr);
     return result;
 }
 
@@ -103,23 +100,23 @@ PreprocessMenu(menuPtr)
  *
  * TkPreprocessMenu --
  *
- *	On the Mac and on Windows, all of the postcommand processing has
- *	to be done on the entire tree underneath the main window to be
- *	posted. This means that we have to traverse the menu tree and
- *	issue the postcommands for all of the menus that have cascades
- *	attached. Since the postcommands can change the menu structure while
- *	we are traversing, we have to be extremely careful. Basically, the
- *	idea is to traverse the structure until we succesfully process
- *	one postcommand. Then we start over, and do it again until
- *	we traverse the whole structure without processing any postcommands.
+ *	On the Mac and on Windows, all of the postcommand processing has to be
+ *	done on the entire tree underneath the main window to be posted. This
+ *	means that we have to traverse the menu tree and issue the
+ *	postcommands for all of the menus that have cascades attached. Since
+ *	the postcommands can change the menu structure while we are
+ *	traversing, we have to be extremely careful. Basically, the idea is to
+ *	traverse the structure until we succesfully process one postcommand.
+ *	Then we start over, and do it again until we traverse the whole
+ *	structure without processing any postcommands.
  *
- *	We are also going to set up the cascade back pointers in here
- *	since we have to traverse the entire structure underneath the menu
- *	anyway, We can clear the postcommand marks while we do that.
+ *	We are also going to set up the cascade back pointers in here since we
+ *	have to traverse the entire structure underneath the menu anyway. We
+ *	can clear the postcommand marks while we do that.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result (errors can occur
- *	while the postcommands are being processed).
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result (errors can occur while the
+ *	postcommands are being processed).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Since commands can get executed while this routine is being executed,
@@ -129,13 +126,21 @@ PreprocessMenu(menuPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkPreprocessMenu(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+TkPreprocessMenu(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     tsdPtr->postCommandGeneration++;
     menuPtr->postCommandGeneration = tsdPtr->postCommandGeneration;
     return PreprocessMenu(menuPtr);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkMain.c b/generic/tkMain.c
index 5e5ddb7..b794ce0 100644
--- a/generic/tkMain.c
+++ b/generic/tkMain.c
@@ -3,29 +3,19 @@
  *
  *	This file contains a generic main program for Tk-based applications.
  *	It can be used as-is for many applications, just by supplying a
- *	different appInitProc procedure for each specific application.
- *	Or, it can be used as a template for creating new main programs
- *	for Tk applications.
+ *	different appInitProc function for each specific application. Or, it
+ *	can be used as a template for creating new main programs for Tk
+ *	applications.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include <ctype.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <tcl.h>
-#include <tclInt.h>
-#include <tk.h>
+#include "tclInt.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#ifdef NO_STDLIB_H
-#   include "../compat/stdlib.h"
-#else
-#   include <stdlib.h>
-#endif
 #ifdef __WIN32__
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
 #include "../win/tclWinPort.h"
@@ -37,24 +27,23 @@
 extern int TkCygwinMainEx(int, char **, Tcl_AppInitProc *, Tcl_Interp *);
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;         /* Interpreter for this thread. */
-    Tcl_DString command;        /* Used to assemble lines of terminal input
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for this thread. */
+    Tcl_DString command;	/* Used to assemble lines of terminal input
 				 * into Tcl commands. */
-    Tcl_DString line;           /* Used to read the next line from the
+    Tcl_DString line;		/* Used to read the next line from the
 				 * terminal input. */
-    int tty;                    /* Non-zero means standard input is a
-				 * terminal-like device.  Zero means it's
-				 * a file. */
+    int tty;			/* Non-zero means standard input is a
+				 * terminal-like device. Zero means it's a
+				 * file. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * Declarations for various library procedures and variables (don't want
- * to include tkInt.h or tkPort.h here, because people might copy this
- * file out of the Tk source directory to make their own modified versions).
- * Note: don't declare "exit" here even though a declaration is really
- * needed, because it will conflict with a declaration elsewhere on
- * some systems.
+ * Declarations for various library functions and variables (don't want to
+ * include tkInt.h or tkPort.h here, because people might copy this file out
+ * of the Tk source directory to make their own modified versions). Note: do
+ * not declare "exit" here even though a declaration is really needed, because
+ * it will conflict with a declaration elsewhere on some systems.
  */
 
 #if defined(__WIN32__) || defined(_WIN32)
@@ -96,17 +85,16 @@ static int WinIsTty(int fd) {
     }
 }
 #else
-extern int		isatty _ANSI_ARGS_((int fd));
-extern char *		strrchr _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *string, int c));
+extern int		isatty(int fd);
+extern char *		strrchr(CONST char *string, int c);
 #endif
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file.
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file.
  */
 
-static void		Prompt _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, int partial));
-static void		StdinProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    int mask));
+static void		Prompt(Tcl_Interp *interp, int partial);
+static void		StdinProc(ClientData clientData, int mask);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -116,39 +104,39 @@ static void		StdinProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
  *	Main program for Wish and most other Tk-based applications.
  *
  * Results:
- *	None. This procedure never returns (it exits the process when
- *	it's done.
+ *	None. This function never returns (it exits the process when it's
+ *	done.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	This procedure initializes the Tk world and then starts
- *	interpreting commands;  almost anything could happen, depending
- *	on the script being interpreted.
+ *	This function initializes the Tk world and then starts interpreting
+ *	commands; almost anything could happen, depending on the script being
+ *	interpreted.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 void
-Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, appInitProc, interp)
-    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    char **argv;			/* Array of argument strings. */
-    Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc;	/* Application-specific initialization
-					 * procedure to call after most
-					 * initialization but before starting
-					 * to execute commands. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+Tk_MainEx(
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv,		/* Array of argument strings. */
+    Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc,
+				/* Application-specific initialization
+				 * function to call after most initialization
+				 * but before starting to execute commands. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)
 {
-    Tcl_Obj *argvPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *path, *argvPtr;
+    CONST char *encodingName;
     int code, nullStdin = 0;
-    size_t length;
     Tcl_Channel inChannel, outChannel;
-    Tcl_DString appName;
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr;
+    Tcl_DString appName;
 
     /*
-     * Ensure that we are getting the matching version of Tcl.  This is
-     * really only an issue when Tk is loaded dynamically.
+     * Ensure that we are getting a compatible version of Tcl. This is really
+     * only an issue when Tk is loaded dynamically.
      */
 
-    if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, TCL_VERSION, 1) == NULL) {
+    if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, "8.5.0", 0) == NULL) {
 	abort();
     }
 
@@ -178,7 +166,7 @@ Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, appInitProc, interp)
 #endif
 
     tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
-	Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     Tcl_FindExecutable(argv[0]);
     tsdPtr->interp = interp;
@@ -194,8 +182,8 @@ Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, appInitProc, interp)
 #endif
 
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
-    if (TclGetStartupScriptFileName() == NULL) {
-        TkMacOSXDefaultStartupScript();
+    if (Tcl_GetStartupScript(NULL) == NULL) {
+	TkMacOSXDefaultStartupScript();
     }
 #endif
 
@@ -204,37 +192,51 @@ Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, appInitProc, interp)
 #endif
 
     /*
-     * Parse command-line arguments.  A leading "-file" argument is
-     * ignored (a historical relic from the distant past).  If the
-     * next argument doesn't start with a "-" then strip it off and
-     * use it as the name of a script file to process.
+     * If the application has not already set a startup script, parse the
+     * first few command line arguments to determine the script path and
+     * encoding.
      */
 
-    if (argc > 1) {
-	length = strlen(argv[1]);
-	if ((length >= 2) && (strncmp(argv[1], "-file", length) == 0)) {
-	    argc--;
-	    argv++;
-	}
-    }
-    if (TclGetStartupScriptFileName() == NULL) {
-	if ((argc > 1) && (argv[1][0] != '-')) {
-	    TclSetStartupScriptFileName(argv[1]);
+    if (NULL == Tcl_GetStartupScript(NULL)) {
+	size_t length;
+
+	/*
+	 * Check whether first 3 args (argv[1] - argv[3]) look like
+	 * 	-encoding ENCODING FILENAME
+	 * or like
+	 * 	FILENAME
+	 * or like
+	 *	-file FILENAME		(ancient history support only)
+	 */
+
+	if ((argc > 3) && (0 == strcmp("-encoding", argv[1]))
+		&& ('-' != argv[3][0])) {
+	    Tcl_SetStartupScript(Tcl_NewStringObj(argv[3], -1), argv[2]);
+	    argc -= 3;
+	    argv += 3;
+	} else if ((argc > 1) && ('-' != argv[1][0])) {
+	    Tcl_SetStartupScript(Tcl_NewStringObj(argv[1], -1), NULL);
 	    argc--;
 	    argv++;
+	} else if ((argc > 2) && (length = strlen(argv[1]))
+		&& (length > 1) && (0 == strncmp("-file", argv[1], length))
+		&& ('-' != argv[2][0])) {
+	    Tcl_SetStartupScript(Tcl_NewStringObj(argv[2], -1), NULL);
+	    argc -= 2;
+	    argv += 2;
 	}
     }
 
-    /*
-     * Make command-line arguments available in the Tcl variables "argc"
-     * and "argv".
-     */
-
-    if (TclGetStartupScriptFileName() == NULL) {
+    path = Tcl_GetStartupScript(&encodingName);
+    if (NULL == path) {
 	Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(NULL, argv[0], -1, &appName);
     } else {
-	TclSetStartupScriptFileName(Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(NULL,
-		TclGetStartupScriptFileName(), -1, &appName));
+	int numBytes;
+	CONST char *pathName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(path, &numBytes);
+
+	Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(NULL, pathName, numBytes, &appName);
+	path = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tcl_DStringValue(&appName), -1);
+	Tcl_SetStartupScript(path, encodingName);
     }
     Tcl_SetVar(interp, "argv0", Tcl_DStringValue(&appName), TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
     Tcl_DStringFree(&appName);
@@ -246,6 +248,7 @@ Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, appInitProc, interp)
     argvPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
     while (argc--) {
 	Tcl_DString ds;
+
 	Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(NULL, *argv++, -1, &ds);
 	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, argvPtr, Tcl_NewStringObj(
 		Tcl_DStringValue(&ds), Tcl_DStringLength(&ds)));
@@ -265,7 +268,7 @@ Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, appInitProc, interp)
      * of length 0, (e.g. /dev/null, which is what Finder sets when double
      * clicking Wish) then use the GUI console.
      */
-
+    
     if (!tsdPtr->tty) {
 	struct stat st;
 
@@ -273,8 +276,8 @@ Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, appInitProc, interp)
     }
 #endif
     Tcl_SetVar(interp, "tcl_interactive",
-	    ((TclGetStartupScriptFileName() == NULL) && (tsdPtr->tty
-	    || nullStdin)) ? "1" : "0", TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	    ((path == NULL) && (tsdPtr->tty || nullStdin)) ? "1" : "0",
+	    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
 
     /*
      * Invoke application-specific initialization.
@@ -286,16 +289,18 @@ Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, appInitProc, interp)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Invoke the script specified on the command line, if any.
+     * Invoke the script specified on the command line, if any. Must fetch it
+     * again, as the appInitProc might have reset it.
      */
 
-    if (TclGetStartupScriptFileName() != NULL) {
+    path = Tcl_GetStartupScript(&encodingName);
+    if (path != NULL) {
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	code = Tcl_EvalFile(interp, TclGetStartupScriptFileName());
+	code = Tcl_FSEvalFileEx(interp, path, encodingName);
 	if (code != TCL_OK) {
 	    /*
-	     * The following statement guarantees that the errorInfo
-	     * variable is set properly.
+	     * The following statement guarantees that the errorInfo variable
+	     * is set properly.
 	     */
 
 	    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "");
@@ -336,13 +341,14 @@ Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, appInitProc, interp)
     Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 
     /*
-     * Loop infinitely, waiting for commands to execute.  When there
-     * are no windows left, Tk_MainLoop returns and we exit.
+     * Loop infinitely, waiting for commands to execute. When there are no
+     * windows left, Tk_MainLoop returns and we exit.
      */
 
     Tk_MainLoop();
     Tcl_DeleteInterp(interp);
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+    Tcl_SetStartupScript(NULL, NULL);
     Tcl_Exit(0);
 }
 
@@ -351,64 +357,60 @@ Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, appInitProc, interp)
  *
  * StdinProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the event dispatcher whenever
- *	standard input becomes readable.  It grabs the next line of
- *	input characters, adds them to a command being assembled, and
- *	executes the command if it's complete.
+ *	This function is invoked by the event dispatcher whenever standard
+ *	input becomes readable. It grabs the next line of input characters,
+ *	adds them to a command being assembled, and executes the command if
+ *	it's complete.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Could be almost arbitrary, depending on the command that's
- *	typed.
+ *	Could be almost arbitrary, depending on the command that's typed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
     /* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-StdinProc(clientData, mask)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Not used. */
-    int mask;				/* Not used. */
+StdinProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Not used. */
+    int mask)			/* Not used. */
 {
     static int gotPartial = 0;
     char *cmd;
     int code, count;
     Tcl_Channel chan = (Tcl_Channel) clientData;
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_Interp *interp = tsdPtr->interp;
 
     count = Tcl_Gets(chan, &tsdPtr->line);
 
-    if (count < 0) {
-	if (!gotPartial) {
-	    if (tsdPtr->tty) {
-		Tcl_Exit(0);
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_DeleteChannelHandler(chan, StdinProc, (ClientData) chan);
-	    }
-	    return;
+    if (count < 0 && !gotPartial) {
+	if (tsdPtr->tty) {
+	    Tcl_Exit(0);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_DeleteChannelHandler(chan, StdinProc, (ClientData) chan);
 	}
+	return;
     }
 
     (void) Tcl_DStringAppend(&tsdPtr->command, Tcl_DStringValue(
-            &tsdPtr->line), -1);
+	    &tsdPtr->line), -1);
     cmd = Tcl_DStringAppend(&tsdPtr->command, "\n", -1);
     Tcl_DStringFree(&tsdPtr->line);
     if (!Tcl_CommandComplete(cmd)) {
-        gotPartial = 1;
-        goto prompt;
+	gotPartial = 1;
+	goto prompt;
     }
     gotPartial = 0;
 
     /*
      * Disable the stdin channel handler while evaluating the command;
-     * otherwise if the command re-enters the event loop we might
-     * process commands from stdin before the current command is
-     * finished.  Among other things, this will trash the text of the
-     * command being evaluated.
+     * otherwise if the command re-enters the event loop we might process
+     * commands from stdin before the current command is finished. Among other
+     * things, this will trash the text of the command being evaluated.
      */
 
     Tcl_CreateChannelHandler(chan, 0, StdinProc, (ClientData) chan);
@@ -434,7 +436,7 @@ StdinProc(clientData, mask)
      * Output a prompt.
      */
 
-    prompt:
+  prompt:
     if (tsdPtr->tty) {
 	Prompt(interp, gotPartial);
     }
@@ -446,25 +448,24 @@ StdinProc(clientData, mask)
  *
  * Prompt --
  *
- *	Issue a prompt on standard output, or invoke a script
- *	to issue the prompt.
+ *	Issue a prompt on standard output, or invoke a script to issue the
+ *	prompt.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A prompt gets output, and a Tcl script may be evaluated
- *	in interp.
+ *	A prompt gets output, and a Tcl script may be evaluated in interp.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-Prompt(interp, partial)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter to use for prompting. */
-    int partial;			/* Non-zero means there already
-					 * exists a partial command, so use
-					 * the secondary prompt. */
+Prompt(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for prompting. */
+    int partial)		/* Non-zero means there already exists a
+				 * partial command, so use the secondary
+				 * prompt. */
 {
     Tcl_Obj *promptCmd;
     int code;
@@ -473,41 +474,49 @@ Prompt(interp, partial)
     promptCmd = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(interp,
 	partial ? "tcl_prompt2" : "tcl_prompt1", NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
     if (promptCmd == NULL) {
-defaultPrompt:
+    defaultPrompt:
 	if (!partial) {
-
-            /*
-             * We must check that outChannel is a real channel - it
-             * is possible that someone has transferred stdout out of
-             * this interpreter with "interp transfer".
-             */
+	    /*
+	     * We must check that outChannel is a real channel - it is
+	     * possible that someone has transferred stdout out of this
+	     * interpreter with "interp transfer".
+	     */
 
 	    outChannel = Tcl_GetChannel(interp, "stdout", NULL);
-            if (outChannel != (Tcl_Channel) NULL) {
-                Tcl_WriteChars(outChannel, "% ", 2);
-            }
+	    if (outChannel != (Tcl_Channel) NULL) {
+		Tcl_WriteChars(outChannel, "% ", 2);
+	    }
 	}
     } else {
 	code = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, promptCmd, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
 	if (code != TCL_OK) {
 	    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
 		    "\n    (script that generates prompt)");
-            /*
-             * We must check that errChannel is a real channel - it
-             * is possible that someone has transferred stderr out of
-             * this interpreter with "interp transfer".
-             */
+
+	    /*
+	     * We must check that errChannel is a real channel - it is
+	     * possible that someone has transferred stderr out of this
+	     * interpreter with "interp transfer".
+	     */
 
 	    errChannel = Tcl_GetChannel(interp, "stderr", NULL);
-            if (errChannel != (Tcl_Channel) NULL) {
-                Tcl_WriteObj(errChannel, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
-                Tcl_WriteChars(errChannel, "\n", 1);
-            }
+	    if (errChannel != (Tcl_Channel) NULL) {
+		Tcl_WriteObj(errChannel, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
+		Tcl_WriteChars(errChannel, "\n", 1);
+	    }
 	    goto defaultPrompt;
 	}
     }
     outChannel = Tcl_GetChannel(interp, "stdout", NULL);
     if (outChannel != (Tcl_Channel) NULL) {
-        Tcl_Flush(outChannel);
+	Tcl_Flush(outChannel);
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkMenu.c b/generic/tkMenu.c
index a8fd7ce..064eaca 100755..100644
--- a/generic/tkMenu.c
+++ b/generic/tkMenu.c
@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkMenu.c --
  *
  * This file contains most of the code for implementing menus in Tk. It takes
- * care of all of the generic (platform-independent) parts of menus, and
- * is supplemented by platform-specific files. The geometry calculation
- * and drawing code for menus is in the file tkMenuDraw.c
+ * care of all of the generic (platform-independent) parts of menus, and is
+ * supplemented by platform-specific files. The geometry calculation and
+ * drawing code for menus is in the file tkMenuDraw.c
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 /*
@@ -18,50 +18,49 @@
  *
  * Menus can be used in three ways:
  * - as a popup menu, either as part of a menubutton or standalone.
- * - as a menubar. The menu's cascade items are arranged according to
- * the specific platform to provide the user access to the menus at all
- * times
+ * - as a menubar. The menu's cascade items are arranged according to the
+ *   specific platform to provide the user access to the menus at all times
  * - as a tearoff palette. This is a window with the menu's items in it.
  *
- * The goal is to provide the Tk developer with a way to use a common
- * set of menus for all of these tasks.
+ * The goal is to provide the Tk developer with a way to use a common set of
+ * menus for all of these tasks.
  *
  * In order to make the bindings for cascade menus work properly under Unix,
- * the cascade menus' pathnames must be proper children of the menu that
- * they are cascade from. So if there is a menu .m, and it has two
- * cascades labelled "File" and "Edit", the cascade menus might have
- * the pathnames .m.file and .m.edit. Another constraint is that the menus
- * used for menubars must be children of the toplevel widget that they
- * are attached to. 
+ * the cascade menus' pathnames must be proper children of the menu that they
+ * are cascade from. So if there is a menu .m, and it has two cascades
+ * labelled "File" and "Edit", the cascade menus might have the pathnames
+ * .m.file and .m.edit. Another constraint is that the menus used for menubars
+ * must be children of the toplevel widget that they are attached to. And on
+ * the Macintosh, the platform specific menu handle for cascades attached to a
+ * menu bar must have a title that matches the label for the cascade menu.
  *
  * To handle all of the constraints, Tk menubars and tearoff menus are
  * implemented using menu clones. Menu clones are full menus in their own
- * right; they have a Tk window and pathname associated with them; they have
- * a TkMenu structure and array of entries. However, they are linked with the
- * original menu that they were cloned from. The reflect the attributes of
- * the original, or "master", menu. So if an item is added to a menu, and
- * that menu has clones, then the item must be added to all of its clones
- * also. Menus are cloned when a menu is torn-off or when a menu is assigned
- * as a menubar using the "-menu" option of the toplevel's pathname configure
+ * right; they have a Tk window and pathname associated with them; they have a
+ * TkMenu structure and array of entries. However, they are linked with the
+ * original menu that they were cloned from. The reflect the attributes of the
+ * original, or "master", menu. So if an item is added to a menu, and that
+ * menu has clones, then the item must be added to all of its clones also.
+ * Menus are cloned when a menu is torn-off or when a menu is assigned as a
+ * menubar using the "-menu" option of the toplevel's pathname configure
  * subcommand. When a clone is destroyed, only the clone is destroyed, but
  * when the master menu is destroyed, all clones are also destroyed. This
- * allows the developer to just deal with one set of menus when creating
- * and destroying.
+ * allows the developer to just deal with one set of menus when creating and
+ * destroying.
  *
  * Clones are rather tricky when a menu with cascade entries is cloned (such
  * as a menubar). Not only does the menu have to be cloned, but each cascade
  * entry's corresponding menu must also be cloned. This maintains the pathname
- * parent-child hierarchy necessary for menubars and toplevels to work.
- * This leads to several special cases:
+ * parent-child hierarchy necessary for menubars and toplevels to work. This
+ * leads to several special cases:
  *
  * 1. When a new menu is created, and it is pointed to by cascade entries in
  * cloned menus, the new menu has to be cloned to parallel the cascade
  * structure.
  * 2. When a cascade item is added to a menu that has been cloned, and the
  * menu that the cascade item points to exists, that menu has to be cloned.
- * 3. When the menu that a cascade entry points to is changed, the old
- * cloned cascade menu has to be discarded, and the new one has to be cloned.
- *
+ * 3. When the menu that a cascade entry points to is changed, the old cloned
+ * cascade menu has to be discarded, and the new one has to be cloned.
  */
 
 #if 0
@@ -73,22 +72,21 @@
 #define __NO_OLD_CONFIG
 #endif
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
+#include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkMenu.h"
 
 #define MENU_HASH_KEY "tkMenus"
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    int menusInitialized;       /* Flag indicates whether thread-specific
-				 * elements of the Windows Menu module
-				 * have been initialized. */
+    int menusInitialized;	/* Flag indicates whether thread-specific
+				 * elements of the Windows Menu module have
+				 * been initialized. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * The following flag indicates whether the process-wide state for
- * the Menu module has been intialized.  The Mutex protects access to
- * that flag.
+ * The following flag indicates whether the process-wide state for the Menu
+ * module has been intialized. The Mutex protects access to that flag.
  */
 
 static int menusInitialized;
@@ -99,170 +97,171 @@ TCL_DECLARE_MUTEX(menuMutex)
  * to update code in TkpMenuInit that changes the font string entry.
  */
 
-CONST char *tkMenuStateStrings[] = {"active", "normal", "disabled", (char *) NULL};
+const char *tkMenuStateStrings[] = {"active", "normal", "disabled", NULL};
 
-static CONST char *menuEntryTypeStrings[] = {
-    "cascade", "checkbutton", "command", "radiobutton", "separator",
-    (char *) NULL
+static const char *menuEntryTypeStrings[] = {
+    "cascade", "checkbutton", "command", "radiobutton", "separator", NULL
 };
 
 /*
- * The following table defines the legal values for the -compound option.
- * It is used with the "enum compound" declaration in tkMenu.h
+ * The following table defines the legal values for the -compound option. It
+ * is used with the "enum compound" declaration in tkMenu.h
  */
 
-static CONST char *CONST compoundStrings[] = {
-    "bottom", "center", "left", "none", "right", "top", (char *) NULL
+static const char *compoundStrings[] = {
+    "bottom", "center", "left", "none", "right", "top", NULL
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec tkBasicMenuEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACTIVE_BG, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, activeBorderPtr), -1, 
+static const Tk_OptionSpec tkBasicMenuEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", NULL, NULL,
+	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACTIVE_BG, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, activeBorderPtr), -1,
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACTIVE_FG,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, activeFgPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-accelerator", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-accelerator", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACCELERATOR,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, accelPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BG,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, borderPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BITMAP,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, bitmapPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-columnbreak", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-columnbreak", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COLUMN_BREAK,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, columnBreak)},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COMMAND,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, commandPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound",
-        DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COMPOUND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, compound), 0,
+	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COMPOUND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, compound), 0,
 	(ClientData) compoundStrings, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_FONT,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, fontPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_FG,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, fgPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hidemargin", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hidemargin", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_HIDE_MARGIN,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, hideMargin)},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_IMAGE,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, imagePtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-label", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-label", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_LABEL,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, labelPtr), -1, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_STATE,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, state), 0,
 	(ClientData) tkMenuStateStrings},
-    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_UNDERLINE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, underline)},
     {TK_OPTION_END}
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec tkSeparatorEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+static const Tk_OptionSpec tkSeparatorEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BG,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, borderPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
     {TK_OPTION_END}
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec tkCheckButtonEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-indicatoron", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+static const Tk_OptionSpec tkCheckButtonEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-indicatoron", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_INDICATOR,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, indicatorOn)},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-offvalue", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-offvalue", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_OFF_VALUE,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, offValuePtr), -1},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-onvalue", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-onvalue", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ON_VALUE,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, onValuePtr), -1},
-    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectcolor", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectcolor", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_SELECT,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, indicatorFgPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-selectimage", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-selectimage", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_SELECT_IMAGE,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, selectImagePtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_CHECK_VARIABLE,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, namePtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) tkBasicMenuEntryConfigSpecs}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) tkBasicMenuEntryConfigSpecs}
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec tkRadioButtonEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-indicatoron", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+static const Tk_OptionSpec tkRadioButtonEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-indicatoron", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_INDICATOR,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, indicatorOn)},
-    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectcolor", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectcolor", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_SELECT,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, indicatorFgPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-selectimage", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_SELECT_IMAGE, 
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-selectimage", NULL, NULL,
+	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_SELECT_IMAGE,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, selectImagePtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-value", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-value", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_VALUE,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, onValuePtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_RADIO_VARIABLE,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, namePtr), -1, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) tkBasicMenuEntryConfigSpecs}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) tkBasicMenuEntryConfigSpecs}
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec tkCascadeEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-menu", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+static const Tk_OptionSpec tkCascadeEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-menu", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_MENU,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, namePtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) tkBasicMenuEntryConfigSpecs}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) tkBasicMenuEntryConfigSpecs}
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec tkTearoffEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+static const Tk_OptionSpec tkTearoffEntryConfigSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BG,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, borderPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", NULL, NULL,
 	DEF_MENU_ENTRY_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuEntry, state), 0,
 	(ClientData) tkMenuStateStrings},
     {TK_OPTION_END}
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec *CONST specsArray[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec *const specsArray[] = {
     tkCascadeEntryConfigSpecs, tkCheckButtonEntryConfigSpecs,
     tkBasicMenuEntryConfigSpecs, tkRadioButtonEntryConfigSpecs,
-    tkSeparatorEntryConfigSpecs, tkTearoffEntryConfigSpecs};
-    
+    tkSeparatorEntryConfigSpecs, tkTearoffEntryConfigSpecs
+};
+
 /*
  * Menu type strings for use with Tcl_GetIndexFromObj.
  */
 
-static CONST char *menuTypeStrings[] = {"normal", "tearoff", "menubar",
-	(char *) NULL};
+static const char *menuTypeStrings[] = {
+    "normal", "tearoff", "menubar", NULL
+};
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec tkMenuConfigSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", 
-	"Foreground", DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, 
+static const Tk_OptionSpec tkMenuConfigSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground",
+	"Foreground", DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenu, activeBorderPtr), -1, 0,
 	(ClientData) DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_BG_MONO},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-activeborderwidth", "activeBorderWidth",
-        "BorderWidth", DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_BORDER_WIDTH,
-        Tk_Offset(TkMenu, activeBorderWidthPtr), -1},
-    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", "activeForeground", 
-	"Background", DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR, 
+	"BorderWidth", DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_BORDER_WIDTH,
+	Tk_Offset(TkMenu, activeBorderWidthPtr), -1},
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", "activeForeground",
+	"Background", DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenu, activeFgPtr), -1, 0,
 	(ClientData) DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_FG_MONO},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	DEF_MENU_BG_COLOR, Tk_Offset(TkMenu, borderPtr), -1, 0,
 	(ClientData) DEF_MENU_BG_MONO},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth"},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background"},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth"},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background"},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
 	DEF_MENU_BORDER_WIDTH,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenu, borderWidthPtr), -1, 0},
@@ -273,14 +272,14 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec tkMenuConfigSpecs[] = {
 	"DisabledForeground", DEF_MENU_DISABLED_FG_COLOR,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenu, disabledFgPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
 	(ClientData) DEF_MENU_DISABLED_FG_MONO},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground"},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground"},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	DEF_MENU_FONT, Tk_Offset(TkMenu, fontPtr), -1},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
 	DEF_MENU_FG, Tk_Offset(TkMenu, fgPtr), -1},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-postcommand", "postCommand", "Command",
-	DEF_MENU_POST_COMMAND, 
+	DEF_MENU_POST_COMMAND,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenu, postCommandPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
 	DEF_MENU_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(TkMenu, reliefPtr), -1},
@@ -292,11 +291,11 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec tkMenuConfigSpecs[] = {
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenu, takeFocusPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-tearoff", "tearOff", "TearOff",
 	DEF_MENU_TEAROFF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenu, tearoff)},
-    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tearoffcommand", "tearOffCommand", 
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tearoffcommand", "tearOffCommand",
 	"TearOffCommand", DEF_MENU_TEAROFF_CMD,
 	Tk_Offset(TkMenu, tearoffCommandPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-title", "title", "Title",
-	DEF_MENU_TITLE,  Tk_Offset(TkMenu, titlePtr), -1,
+	DEF_MENU_TITLE,	 Tk_Offset(TkMenu, titlePtr), -1,
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-type", "type", "Type",
 	DEF_MENU_TYPE, Tk_Offset(TkMenu, menuTypePtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
@@ -305,73 +304,70 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec tkMenuConfigSpecs[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Command line options. Put here because MenuCmd has to look at them
- * along with MenuWidgetObjCmd.
+ * Command line options. Put here because MenuCmd has to look at them along
+ * with MenuWidgetObjCmd.
  */
 
-static CONST char *menuOptions[] = {
+static const char *menuOptions[] = {
     "activate", "add", "cget", "clone", "configure", "delete", "entrycget",
     "entryconfigure", "index", "insert", "invoke", "post", "postcascade",
-    "type", "unpost", "yposition", (char *) NULL
+    "type", "unpost", "xposition", "yposition", NULL
 };
 enum options {
     MENU_ACTIVATE, MENU_ADD, MENU_CGET, MENU_CLONE, MENU_CONFIGURE,
     MENU_DELETE, MENU_ENTRYCGET, MENU_ENTRYCONFIGURE, MENU_INDEX,
     MENU_INSERT, MENU_INVOKE, MENU_POST, MENU_POSTCASCADE, MENU_TYPE,
-    MENU_UNPOST, MENU_YPOSITION
+    MENU_UNPOST, MENU_XPOSITION, MENU_YPOSITION
 };
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for static procedures in this file:
+ * Prototypes for static functions in this file:
  */
 
-static int		CloneMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *newMenuName, Tcl_Obj *newMenuTypeString));
-static int		ConfigureMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		ConfigureMenuCloneEntries _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr, int index,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		ConfigureMenuEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		DeleteMenuCloneEntries _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
-			    int first, int last));
-static void		DestroyMenuHashTable _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static void		DestroyMenuInstance _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
-static void		DestroyMenuEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static int		GetIndexFromCoords
-			    _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr,
-			    char *string, int *indexPtr));
-static int		MenuDoYPosition _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static int		MenuAddOrInsert _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static int		CloneMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr, Tcl_Obj *newMenuName,
+			    Tcl_Obj *newMenuTypeString);
+static int		ConfigureMenu(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		ConfigureMenuCloneEntries(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkMenu *menuPtr, int index,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		ConfigureMenuEntry(TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		DeleteMenuCloneEntries(TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    int first, int last);
+static void		DestroyMenuHashTable(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static void		DestroyMenuInstance(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+static void		DestroyMenuEntry(char *memPtr);
+static int		GetIndexFromCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    char *string, int *indexPtr);
+static int		MenuDoYPosition(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkMenu *menuPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static int		MenuDoXPosition(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkMenu *menuPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static int		MenuAddOrInsert(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    TkMenu *menuPtr, Tcl_Obj *indexPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		MenuCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		MenuCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static TkMenuEntry *	MenuNewEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr, int index,
-			    int type));
-static char *		MenuVarProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name1,
-			    CONST char *name2, int flags));
-static int		MenuWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		MenuWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData instanceData));
-static int		PostProcessEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenuEntry *mePtr));
-static void		RecursivelyDeleteMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
-static void		UnhookCascadeEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenuEntry *mePtr));
-static Tcl_ExitProc	TkMenuCleanup;
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		MenuCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		MenuCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static TkMenuEntry *	MenuNewEntry(TkMenu *menuPtr, int index, int type);
+static char *		MenuVarProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name1,
+			    const char *name2, int flags);
+static int		MenuWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		MenuWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
+static int		PostProcessEntry(TkMenuEntry *mePtr);
+static void		RecursivelyDeleteMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+static void		UnhookCascadeEntry(TkMenuEntry *mePtr);
+static void		TkMenuCleanup(ClientData unused);
 
 /*
  * The structure below is a list of procs that respond to certain window
- * manager events. One of these includes a font change, which forces
- * the geometry proc to be called.
+ * manager events. One of these includes a font change, which forces the
+ * geometry proc to be called.
  */
 
 static Tk_ClassProcs menuClass = {
@@ -384,8 +380,7 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs menuClass = {
  *
  * TkCreateMenuCmd --
  *
- *	Called by Tk at initialization time to create the menu
- *	command.
+ *	Called by Tk at initialization time to create the menu command.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -405,14 +400,14 @@ FreeOptionTables(
 }
 
 int
-TkCreateMenuCmd(interp)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter we are creating the 
-				 * command in. */
+TkCreateMenuCmd(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Interpreter we are creating the command
+				 * in. */
 {
-    TkMenuOptionTables *optionTablesPtr = 
+    TkMenuOptionTables *optionTablesPtr =
 	    (TkMenuOptionTables *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkMenuOptionTables));
 
-    optionTablesPtr->menuOptionTable = 
+    optionTablesPtr->menuOptionTable =
 	    Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, tkMenuConfigSpecs);
     optionTablesPtr->entryOptionTables[TEAROFF_ENTRY] =
 	    Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, specsArray[TEAROFF_ENTRY]);
@@ -442,9 +437,8 @@ TkCreateMenuCmd(interp)
  *
  * MenuCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "menu" Tcl
- *	command.  See the user documentation for details on
- *	what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "menu" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -456,21 +450,19 @@ TkCreateMenuCmd(interp)
  */
 
 static int
-MenuCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument strings. */
+MenuCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument strings. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = Tk_MainWindow(interp);
-    Tk_Window new;
+    Tk_Window newWin;
     register TkMenu *menuPtr;
     TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
-    int i, index;
-    int toplevel;
+    int i, index, toplevel;
     char *windowName;
-    static CONST char *typeStringList[] = {"-type", (char *) NULL};
+    static const char *typeStringList[] = {"-type", NULL};
     TkMenuOptionTables *optionTablesPtr = (TkMenuOptionTables *) clientData;
 
     if (objc < 2) {
@@ -492,23 +484,23 @@ MenuCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
     }
 
-    windowName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], NULL);
-    new = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, windowName, toplevel ? ""
-	    : NULL);
-    if (new == NULL) {
+    windowName = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
+    newWin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, windowName,
+	    toplevel ? "" : NULL);
+    if (newWin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Initialize the data structure for the menu.  Note that the
-     * menuPtr is eventually freed in 'TkMenuEventProc' in tkMenuDraw.c,
-     * when Tcl_EventuallyFree is called.
+     * Initialize the data structure for the menu. Note that the menuPtr is
+     * eventually freed in 'TkMenuEventProc' in tkMenuDraw.c, when
+     * Tcl_EventuallyFree is called.
      */
 
     menuPtr = (TkMenu *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkMenu));
     memset(menuPtr, 0, sizeof(TkMenu));
-    menuPtr->tkwin = new;
-    menuPtr->display = Tk_Display(new);
+    menuPtr->tkwin = newWin;
+    menuPtr->display = Tk_Display(newWin);
     menuPtr->interp = interp;
     menuPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
 	    Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin), MenuWidgetObjCmd,
@@ -522,7 +514,8 @@ MenuCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
     Tk_SetClass(menuPtr->tkwin, "Menu");
     Tk_SetClassProcs(menuPtr->tkwin, &menuClass, (ClientData) menuPtr);
-    Tk_CreateEventHandler(new, ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|ActivateMask,
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(newWin,
+	    ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|ActivateMask,
 	    TkMenuEventProc, (ClientData) menuPtr);
     if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) menuPtr,
 	    menuPtr->optionTablesPtr->menuOptionTable, menuPtr->tkwin)
@@ -548,38 +541,36 @@ MenuCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
     /*
      * If a menu has a parent menu pointing to it as a cascade entry, the
-     * parent menu needs to be told that this menu now exists so that
-     * the platform-part of the menu is correctly updated.
+     * parent menu needs to be told that this menu now exists so that the
+     * platform-part of the menu is correctly updated.
      *
      * If a menu has an instance and has cascade entries, then each cascade
-     * menu must also have a parallel instance. This is especially true on
-     * the Mac, where each menu has to have a separate title everytime it is in
-     * a menubar. For instance, say you have a menu .m1 with a cascade entry
-     * for .m2, where .m2 does not exist yet. You then put .m1 into a menubar.
+     * menu must also have a parallel instance. This is especially true on the
+     * Mac, where each menu has to have a separate title everytime it is in a
+     * menubar. For instance, say you have a menu .m1 with a cascade entry for
+     * .m2, where .m2 does not exist yet. You then put .m1 into a menubar.
      * This creates a menubar instance for .m1, but since .m2 is not there,
      * nothing else happens. When we go to create .m2, we hook it up properly
      * with .m1. However, we now need to clone .m2 and assign the clone of .m2
-     * to be the cascade entry for the clone of .m1. This is special case
-     * #1 listed in the introductory comment.
+     * to be the cascade entry for the clone of .m1. This is special case #1
+     * listed in the introductory comment.
      */
 
     if (menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr != NULL) {
-        TkMenuEntry *cascadeListPtr = menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr;
-        TkMenuEntry *nextCascadePtr;
-        Tcl_Obj *newMenuName;
-	Tcl_Obj *newObjv[2];
-
-        while (cascadeListPtr != NULL) {
+	TkMenuEntry *cascadeListPtr = menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr;
+	TkMenuEntry *nextCascadePtr;
+	Tcl_Obj *newMenuName, *newObjv[2];
 
+	while (cascadeListPtr != NULL) {
 	    nextCascadePtr = cascadeListPtr->nextCascadePtr;
 
      	    /*
-     	     * If we have a new master menu, and an existing cloned menu
-	     * points to this menu in a cascade entry, we have to clone
-	     * the new menu and point the entry to the clone instead
-	     * of the menu we are creating. Otherwise, ConfigureMenuEntry
-	     * will hook up the platform-specific cascade linkages now
-	     * that the menu we are creating exists.
+	     * If we have a new master menu, and an existing cloned menu
+	     * points to this menu in a cascade entry, we have to clone the
+	     * new menu and point the entry to the clone instead of the menu
+	     * we are creating. Otherwise, ConfigureMenuEntry will hook up the
+	     * platform-specific cascade linkages now that the menu we are
+	     * creating exists.
      	     */
 
      	    if ((menuPtr->masterMenuPtr != menuPtr)
@@ -600,50 +591,50 @@ MenuCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(normalPtr);
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(windowNamePtr);
-      	    	newMenuName = TkNewMenuName(menuPtr->interp,
+		newMenuName = TkNewMenuName(menuPtr->interp,
      	    		windowNamePtr, menuPtr);
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(newMenuName);
-            	CloneMenu(menuPtr, newMenuName, normalPtr);
+		CloneMenu(menuPtr, newMenuName, normalPtr);
 
-                /*
-                 * Now we can set the new menu instance to be the cascade entry
-                 * of the parent's instance.
-                 */
+		/*
+		 * Now we can set the new menu instance to be the cascade
+		 * entry of the parent's instance.
+		 */
 
 		newObjv[0] = Tcl_NewStringObj("-menu", -1);
 		newObjv[1] = newMenuName;
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(newObjv[0]);
-                ConfigureMenuEntry(cascadeListPtr, 2, newObjv);
+		ConfigureMenuEntry(cascadeListPtr, 2, newObjv);
 		Tcl_DecrRefCount(normalPtr);
 		Tcl_DecrRefCount(newObjv[0]);
 		Tcl_DecrRefCount(newObjv[1]);
 		Tcl_DecrRefCount(windowNamePtr);
-            }
-            cascadeListPtr = nextCascadePtr;
-        }
+	    }
+	    cascadeListPtr = nextCascadePtr;
+	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * If there already exist toplevel widgets that refer to this menu,
-     * find them and notify them so that they can reconfigure their
-     * geometry to reflect the menu.
+     * If there already exist toplevel widgets that refer to this menu, find
+     * them and notify them so that they can reconfigure their geometry to
+     * reflect the menu.
      */
 
     if (menuRefPtr->topLevelListPtr != NULL) {
     	TkMenuTopLevelList *topLevelListPtr = menuRefPtr->topLevelListPtr;
     	TkMenuTopLevelList *nextPtr;
     	Tk_Window listtkwin;
-   	while (topLevelListPtr != NULL) {
 
+	while (topLevelListPtr != NULL) {
     	    /*
-    	     * Need to get the next pointer first. TkSetWindowMenuBar
-    	     * changes the list, so that the next pointer is different
-    	     * after calling it.
+    	     * Need to get the next pointer first. TkSetWindowMenuBar changes
+    	     * the list, so that the next pointer is different after calling
+    	     * it.
     	     */
 
     	    nextPtr = topLevelListPtr->nextPtr;
     	    listtkwin = topLevelListPtr->tkwin;
-    	    TkSetWindowMenuBar(menuPtr->interp, listtkwin, 
+    	    TkSetWindowMenuBar(menuPtr->interp, listtkwin,
     	    	    Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin), Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin));
     	    topLevelListPtr = nextPtr;
     	}
@@ -658,9 +649,9 @@ MenuCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * MenuWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -672,11 +663,11 @@ MenuCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-MenuWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about menu widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument strings. */
+MenuWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about menu widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument strings. */
 {
     register TkMenu *menuPtr = (TkMenu *) clientData;
     register TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
@@ -694,335 +685,331 @@ MenuWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) menuPtr);
 
     switch ((enum options) option) {
-	case MENU_ACTIVATE: {
-	    int index;
+    case MENU_ACTIVATE: {
+	int index;
 
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "activate index");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (menuPtr->active == index) {
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    if ((index >= 0) 
-		    && ((menuPtr->entries[index]->type == SEPARATOR_ENTRY)
-			    || (menuPtr->entries[index]->state
-				    == ENTRY_DISABLED))) {
-		index = -1;
-	    }
-	    result = TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, index);
-	    break;
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (menuPtr->active == index) {
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	if ((index >= 0) && ((menuPtr->entries[index]->type==SEPARATOR_ENTRY)
+		|| (menuPtr->entries[index]->state == ENTRY_DISABLED))) {
+	    index = -1;
+	}
+	result = TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, index);
+	break;
+    }
+    case MENU_ADD:
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "type ?options?");
+	    goto error;
 	}
-	case MENU_ADD:
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "add type ?options?");
-		goto error;
-	    }
 
-	    if (MenuAddOrInsert(interp, menuPtr, (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-		    objc - 2, objv + 2) != TCL_OK) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case MENU_CGET: {
-	    Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
+	if (MenuAddOrInsert(interp, menuPtr, NULL, objc-2, objv+2) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	break;
+    case MENU_CGET: {
+	Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
 
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option");
-		goto error;
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) menuPtr,
+		menuPtr->optionTablesPtr->menuOptionTable, objv[2],
+		menuPtr->tkwin);
+	if (resultPtr == NULL) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
+	break;
+    }
+    case MENU_CLONE:
+	if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "newMenuName ?menuType?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	result = CloneMenu(menuPtr, objv[2], (objc == 3) ? NULL : objv[3]);
+	break;
+    case MENU_CONFIGURE: {
+	Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
+
+	if (objc == 2) {
+	    resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) menuPtr,
+		    menuPtr->optionTablesPtr->menuOptionTable, NULL,
+		    menuPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (resultPtr == NULL) {
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    } else {
+		result = TCL_OK;
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
 	    }
-	    resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) menuPtr,
+	} else if (objc == 3) {
+	    resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) menuPtr,
 		    menuPtr->optionTablesPtr->menuOptionTable, objv[2],
 		    menuPtr->tkwin);
 	    if (resultPtr == NULL) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case MENU_CLONE:
-	    if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv,
-			"clone newMenuName ?menuType?");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-    	    result = CloneMenu(menuPtr, objv[2], (objc == 3) ? NULL : objv[3]);
-	    break;
-	case MENU_CONFIGURE: {
-	    Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
-
-	    if (objc == 2) {
-		resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) menuPtr,
-			menuPtr->optionTablesPtr->menuOptionTable,
-			(Tcl_Obj *) NULL, menuPtr->tkwin);
-		if (resultPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    result = TCL_OK;
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
-		}
-	    } else if (objc == 3) {
-		resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) menuPtr,
-			menuPtr->optionTablesPtr->menuOptionTable,
-			objv[2], menuPtr->tkwin);
-		if (resultPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    result = TCL_OK;
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
-		}
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else {
-    		result = ConfigureMenu(interp, menuPtr, objc - 2, objv + 2);
+		result = TCL_OK;
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
 	    }
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureMenu(interp, menuPtr, objc - 2, objv + 2);
 	}
-	case MENU_DELETE: {
-	    int first, last;
-	    
-	    if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "delete first ?last?");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &first) 
-		    != TCL_OK) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		last = first;
-	    } else {
-		if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[3], 0, &last) 
-			!= TCL_OK) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (menuPtr->tearoff && (first == 0)) {
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case MENU_DELETE: {
+	int first, last;
 
-		/*
-		 * Sorry, can't delete the tearoff entry;  must reconfigure
-		 * the menu.
-		 */
-		
-		first = 1;
-	    }
-	    if ((first < 0) || (last < first)) {
+	if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "first ?last?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * If 'first' explicitly refers to past the end of the menu, we don't
+	 * do anything. [Bug 220950]
+	 */
+
+	if (isdigit(UCHAR(Tcl_GetString(objv[2])[0]))
+		&& Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objv[2], &first) == TCL_OK) {
+	    if (first >= menuPtr->numEntries) {
 		goto done;
 	    }
-	    DeleteMenuCloneEntries(menuPtr, first, last);
-	    break;
+	} else if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp,menuPtr,objv[2],0,&first) != TCL_OK){
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    last = first;
+	} else if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp,menuPtr,objv[3],0,&last) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
 	}
-	case MENU_ENTRYCGET: {
-	    int index;
-	    Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
 
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "entrycget index option");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) 
-		    != TCL_OK) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (index < 0) {
-		goto done;
+	if (menuPtr->tearoff && (first == 0)) {
+	    /*
+	     * Sorry, can't delete the tearoff entry; must reconfigure the
+	     * menu.
+	     */
+
+	    first = 1;
+	}
+	if ((first < 0) || (last < first)) {
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	DeleteMenuCloneEntries(menuPtr, first, last);
+	break;
+    }
+    case MENU_ENTRYCGET: {
+	int index;
+	Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
+
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index option");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (index < 0) {
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	mePtr = menuPtr->entries[index];
+	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) mePtr);
+	resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) mePtr,
+		mePtr->optionTable, objv[3], menuPtr->tkwin);
+	Tcl_Release((ClientData) mePtr);
+	if (resultPtr == NULL) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
+	break;
+    }
+    case MENU_ENTRYCONFIGURE: {
+	int index;
+	Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
+
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index ?option value ...?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (index < 0) {
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	mePtr = menuPtr->entries[index];
+	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) mePtr);
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) mePtr,
+		    mePtr->optionTable, NULL, menuPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (resultPtr == NULL) {
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    } else {
+		result = TCL_OK;
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
 	    }
-	    mePtr = menuPtr->entries[index];
-	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) mePtr);
-	    resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) mePtr, 
+	} else if (objc == 4) {
+	    resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) mePtr,
 		    mePtr->optionTable, objv[3], menuPtr->tkwin);
-	    Tcl_Release((ClientData) mePtr);
 	    if (resultPtr == NULL) {
-		goto error;
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    } else {
+		result = TCL_OK;
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
 	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureMenuCloneEntries(interp, menuPtr, index,
+		    objc-3, objv+3);
 	}
-	case MENU_ENTRYCONFIGURE: {
-	    int index;
-	    Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
+	Tcl_Release((ClientData) mePtr);
+	break;
+    }
+    case MENU_INDEX: {
+	int index;
 
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, 
-			"entryconfigure index ?option value ...?");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (index < 0) {
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    mePtr = menuPtr->entries[index];
-	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) mePtr);
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) mePtr,
-			mePtr->optionTable, (Tcl_Obj *) NULL, menuPtr->tkwin);
-		if (resultPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    result = TCL_OK;
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
-		}
-	    } else if (objc == 4) {
-		resultPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) mePtr,
-			mePtr->optionTable, objv[3], menuPtr->tkwin);
-		if (resultPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    result = TCL_OK;
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultPtr);
-		}
-	    } else {
-		result = ConfigureMenuCloneEntries(interp, menuPtr, index,
-			objc - 3, objv + 3);
-	    }
-	    Tcl_Release((ClientData) mePtr);
-	    break;
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
 	}
-	case MENU_INDEX: {
-	    int index;
+	if (index < 0) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "none", TCL_STATIC);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), index);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case MENU_INSERT:
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index type ?options?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (MenuAddOrInsert(interp,menuPtr,objv[2],objc-3,objv+3) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	break;
+    case MENU_INVOKE: {
+	int index;
 
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "index string");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) 
-		    != TCL_OK) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (index < 0) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "none", TCL_STATIC);
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), index);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    goto error;
 	}
-	case MENU_INSERT:
-	    if (objc < 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, 
-			"insert index type ?options?");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (MenuAddOrInsert(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], objc - 3,
-		    objv + 3) != TCL_OK) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case MENU_INVOKE: {
-	    int index;
+	if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (index < 0) {
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	result = TkInvokeMenu(interp, menuPtr, index);
+	break;
+    }
+    case MENU_POST: {
+	int x, y;
 
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "invoke index");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (index < 0) {
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    result = TkInvokeMenu(interp, menuPtr, index);
-	    break;
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "x y");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK)
+		|| (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)) {
+	    goto error;
 	}
-	case MENU_POST: {
-	    int x, y;
 
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "post x y");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK)
-		    || (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
+	/*
+	 * Tearoff menus are posted differently on Mac and Windows than
+	 * non-tearoffs. TkpPostMenu does not actually map the menu's window
+	 * on those platforms, and popup menus have to be handled specially.
+	 */
 
-	    /*
-	     * Tearoff menus are posted differently on Mac and Windows than
-	     * non-tearoffs. TkpPostMenu does not actually map the menu's
-	     * window on those platforms, and popup menus have to be
-	     * handled specially.
-	     */
-	    
-    	    if (menuPtr->menuType != TEAROFF_MENU) {
-    		result = TkpPostMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y);
-    	    } else {
-    		result = TkPostTearoffMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y);
-    	    }
-	    break;
+	if (menuPtr->menuType != TEAROFF_MENU) {
+	    result = TkpPostMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y);
+	} else {
+	    result = TkPostTearoffMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y);
 	}
-	case MENU_POSTCASCADE: {
-	    int index;
+	break;
+    }
+    case MENU_POSTCASCADE: {
+	int index;
 
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "postcascade index");
-		goto error;
-	    }
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    goto error;
+	}
 
-	    if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if ((index < 0) || (menuPtr->entries[index]->type 
-		    != CASCADE_ENTRY)) {
-		result = TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, (TkMenuEntry *) NULL);
-	    } else {
-		result = TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, 
-			menuPtr->entries[index]);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if ((index < 0) || (menuPtr->entries[index]->type != CASCADE_ENTRY)) {
+	    result = TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, NULL);
+	} else {
+	    result = TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, menuPtr->entries[index]);
 	}
-	case MENU_TYPE: {
-	    int index;
+	break;
+    }
+    case MENU_TYPE: {
+	int index;
 
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "type index");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) 
-		    != TCL_OK) {
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (index < 0) {
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    if (menuPtr->entries[index]->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "tearoff", TCL_STATIC);
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-			menuEntryTypeStrings[menuPtr->entries[index]->type],
-			-1);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    goto error;
 	}
-	case MENU_UNPOST:
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "unpost");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    Tk_UnmapWindow(menuPtr->tkwin);
-	    result = TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, (TkMenuEntry *) NULL);
-	    break;
-	case MENU_YPOSITION:
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "yposition index");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    result = MenuDoYPosition(interp, menuPtr, objv[2]);
-	    break;
+	if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objv[2], 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (index < 0) {
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	if (menuPtr->entries[index]->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "tearoff", TCL_STATIC);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
+		    menuEntryTypeStrings[menuPtr->entries[index]->type], -1);
+	}
+	break;
     }
-    done:
+    case MENU_UNPOST:
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	Tk_UnmapWindow(menuPtr->tkwin);
+	result = TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, NULL);
+	break;
+    case MENU_XPOSITION:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	result = MenuDoXPosition(interp, menuPtr, objv[2]);
+	break;
+    case MENU_YPOSITION:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	result = MenuDoYPosition(interp, menuPtr, objv[2]);
+	break;
+    }
+  done:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) menuPtr);
     return result;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) menuPtr);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -1032,29 +1019,29 @@ MenuWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkInvokeMenu --
  *
- *	Given a menu and an index, takes the appropriate action for the
- *	entry associated with that index.
+ *	Given a menu and an index, takes the appropriate action for the entry
+ *	associated with that index.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Commands may get excecuted; variables may get set; sub-menus may
- *	get posted.
+ *	Commands may get excecuted; variables may get set; sub-menus may get
+ *	posted.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-TkInvokeMenu(interp, menuPtr, index)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interp that the menu lives in. */
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are invoking. */
-    int index;			/* The zero based index of the item we
-    				 * are invoking */
+TkInvokeMenu(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interp that the menu lives in. */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* The menu we are invoking. */
+    int index)			/* The zero based index of the item we are
+    				 * invoking. */
 {
     int result = TCL_OK;
     TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
-    
+
     if (index < 0) {
     	goto done;
     }
@@ -1102,11 +1089,13 @@ TkInvokeMenu(interp, menuPtr, index)
 	}
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(valuePtr);
     }
+
     /*
-     * We check numEntries in addition to whether the menu entry
-     * has a command because that goes to zero if the menu gets
-     * deleted (e.g., during command evaluation).
+     * We check numEntries in addition to whether the menu entry has a command
+     * because that goes to zero if the menu gets deleted (e.g., during
+     * command evaluation).
      */
+
     if ((menuPtr->numEntries != 0) && (result == TCL_OK)
 	    && (mePtr->commandPtr != NULL)) {
 	Tcl_Obj *commandPtr = mePtr->commandPtr;
@@ -1116,7 +1105,7 @@ TkInvokeMenu(interp, menuPtr, index)
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(commandPtr);
     }
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) mePtr);
-    done:
+  done:
     return result;
 }
 
@@ -1125,10 +1114,9 @@ TkInvokeMenu(interp, menuPtr, index)
  *
  * DestroyMenuInstance --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by TkDestroyMenu
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a menu at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore). Only takes care of one instance
- *	of the menu.
+ *	This function is invoked by TkDestroyMenu to clean up the internal
+ *	structure of a menu at a safe time (when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	Only takes care of one instance of the menu.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1140,8 +1128,8 @@ TkInvokeMenu(interp, menuPtr, index)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyMenuInstance(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;	/* Info about menu widget. */
+DestroyMenuInstance(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)		/* Info about menu widget. */
 {
     int i;
     TkMenu *menuInstancePtr;
@@ -1149,19 +1137,19 @@ DestroyMenuInstance(menuPtr)
     Tcl_Obj *newObjv[2];
     TkMenu *parentMasterMenuPtr;
     TkMenuEntry *parentMasterEntryPtr;
-    
+
     /*
      * If the menu has any cascade menu entries pointing to it, the cascade
      * entries need to be told that the menu is going away. We need to clear
-     * the menu ptr field in the menu reference at this point in the code
-     * so that everything else can forget about this menu properly. We also
-     * need to reset -menu field of all entries that are not master menus
-     * back to this entry name if this is a master menu pointed to by another
-     * master menu. If there is a clone menu that points to this menu,
-     * then this menu is itself a clone, so when this menu goes away,
-     * the -menu field of the pointing entry must be set back to this
-     * menu's master menu name so that later if another menu is created
-     * the cascade hierarchy can be maintained.
+     * the menu ptr field in the menu reference at this point in the code so
+     * that everything else can forget about this menu properly. We also need
+     * to reset -menu field of all entries that are not master menus back to
+     * this entry name if this is a master menu pointed to by another master
+     * menu. If there is a clone menu that points to this menu, then this menu
+     * is itself a clone, so when this menu goes away, the -menu field of the
+     * pointing entry must be set back to this menu's master menu name so that
+     * later if another menu is created the cascade hierarchy can be
+     * maintained.
      */
 
     TkpDestroyMenu(menuPtr);
@@ -1176,7 +1164,7 @@ DestroyMenuInstance(menuPtr)
 
     for (; cascadePtr != NULL; cascadePtr = nextCascadePtr) {
     	nextCascadePtr = cascadePtr->nextCascadePtr;
-    	
+
     	if (menuPtr->masterMenuPtr != menuPtr) {
 	    Tcl_Obj *menuNamePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj("-menu", -1);
 
@@ -1185,10 +1173,12 @@ DestroyMenuInstance(menuPtr)
 		    parentMasterMenuPtr->entries[cascadePtr->index];
 	    newObjv[0] = menuNamePtr;
 	    newObjv[1] = parentMasterEntryPtr->namePtr;
+
 	    /*
-	     * It is possible that the menu info is out of sync, and
-	     * these things point to NULL, so verify existence [Bug: 3402]
+	     * It is possible that the menu info is out of sync, and these
+	     * things point to NULL, so verify existence [Bug: 3402]
 	     */
+
 	    if (newObjv[0] && newObjv[1]) {
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(newObjv[0]);
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(newObjv[1]);
@@ -1197,38 +1187,37 @@ DestroyMenuInstance(menuPtr)
 		Tcl_DecrRefCount(newObjv[1]);
 	    }
     	} else {
-    	    ConfigureMenuEntry(cascadePtr, 0, (Tcl_Obj **) NULL);
+    	    ConfigureMenuEntry(cascadePtr, 0, NULL);
     	}
     }
-    
+
     if (menuPtr->masterMenuPtr != menuPtr) {
-        for (menuInstancePtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr; 
-        	menuInstancePtr != NULL;
-        	menuInstancePtr = menuInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr) {
-            if (menuInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr == menuPtr) {
-                menuInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr = 
-                	menuInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr;
-                break;
-            }
-        }
-   } else if (menuPtr->nextInstancePtr != NULL) {
-       panic("Attempting to delete master menu when there are still clones.");
-   }
+	for (menuInstancePtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
+		menuInstancePtr != NULL;
+		menuInstancePtr = menuInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr) {
+	    if (menuInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr == menuPtr) {
+		menuInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr =
+			menuInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr;
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+    } else if (menuPtr->nextInstancePtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Panic("Attempting to delete master menu when there are still clones.");
+    }
 
     /*
-     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then
-     * let Tk_FreeConfigOptions handle all the standard option-related
-     * stuff.
+     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let
+     * Tk_FreeConfigOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
      */
 
     for (i = menuPtr->numEntries; --i >= 0; ) {
 	/*
-	 * As each menu entry is deleted from the end of the array of
-	 * entries, decrement menuPtr->numEntries.  Otherwise, the act of
-	 * deleting menu entry i will dereference freed memory attempting
-	 * to queue a redraw for menu entries (i+1)...numEntries.
+	 * As each menu entry is deleted from the end of the array of entries,
+	 * decrement menuPtr->numEntries. Otherwise, the act of deleting menu
+	 * entry i will dereference freed memory attempting to queue a redraw
+	 * for menu entries (i+1)...numEntries.
 	 */
-	 
+
 	DestroyMenuEntry((char *) menuPtr->entries[i]);
 	menuPtr->numEntries = i;
     }
@@ -1236,7 +1225,7 @@ DestroyMenuInstance(menuPtr)
 	ckfree((char *) menuPtr->entries);
     }
     TkMenuFreeDrawOptions(menuPtr);
-    Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) menuPtr, 
+    Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) menuPtr,
 	    menuPtr->optionTablesPtr->menuOptionTable, menuPtr->tkwin);
     if (menuPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
 	Tk_Window tkwin = menuPtr->tkwin;
@@ -1250,11 +1239,11 @@ DestroyMenuInstance(menuPtr)
  *
  * TkDestroyMenu --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a menu at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).  If called on a master instance,
- *	destroys all of the slave instances. If called on a non-master
- *	instance, just destroys that instance.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to clean
+ *	up the internal structure of a menu at a safe time (when no-one is
+ *	using it anymore). If called on a master instance, destroys all of the
+ *	slave instances. If called on a non-master instance, just destroys
+ *	that instance.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1266,8 +1255,8 @@ DestroyMenuInstance(menuPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkDestroyMenu(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;	/* Info about menu widget. */
+TkDestroyMenu(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)		/* Info about menu widget. */
 {
     TkMenu *menuInstancePtr;
     TkMenuTopLevelList *topLevelListPtr, *nextTopLevelPtr;
@@ -1277,20 +1266,21 @@ TkDestroyMenu(menuPtr)
     }
 
     Tcl_Preserve(menuPtr);
-    
+
     /*
-     * Now destroy all non-tearoff instances of this menu if this is a 
-     * parent menu. Is this loop safe enough? Are there going to be
-     * destroy bindings on child menus which kill the parent? If not,
-     * we have to do a slightly more complex scheme.
+     * Now destroy all non-tearoff instances of this menu if this is a parent
+     * menu. Is this loop safe enough? Are there going to be destroy bindings
+     * on child menus which kill the parent? If not, we have to do a slightly
+     * more complex scheme.
      */
 
     menuPtr->menuFlags |= MENU_DELETION_PENDING;
     if (menuPtr->menuRefPtr != NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * If any toplevel widgets have this menu as their menubar,
-	 * the geometry of the window may have to be recalculated.
+	 * If any toplevel widgets have this menu as their menubar, the
+	 * geometry of the window may have to be recalculated.
 	 */
+
 	topLevelListPtr = menuPtr->menuRefPtr->topLevelListPtr;
 	while (topLevelListPtr != NULL) {
 	    nextTopLevelPtr = topLevelListPtr->nextPtr;
@@ -1304,11 +1294,13 @@ TkDestroyMenu(menuPtr)
 	    menuPtr->nextInstancePtr = menuInstancePtr->nextInstancePtr;
     	    if (menuInstancePtr->tkwin != NULL) {
 		Tk_Window tkwin = menuInstancePtr->tkwin;
-		/* 
-		 * Note: it may be desirable to NULL out the tkwin
-		 * field of menuInstancePtr here:
+
+		/*
+		 * Note: it may be desirable to NULL out the tkwin field of
+		 * menuInstancePtr here:
 		 * menuInstancePtr->tkwin = NULL;
 		 */
+
 	     	Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
 	    }
 	}
@@ -1325,12 +1317,12 @@ TkDestroyMenu(menuPtr)
  * UnhookCascadeEntry --
  *
  *	This entry is removed from the list of entries that point to the
- *	cascade menu. This is done in preparation for changing the menu
- *	that this entry points to.
- *	
- *	At the end of this function, the menu entry no longer contains
- *	a reference to a 'TkMenuReferences' structure, and therefore
- *	no such structure contains a reference to this menu entry either.
+ *	cascade menu. This is done in preparation for changing the menu that
+ *	this entry points to.
+ *
+ *	At the end of this function, the menu entry no longer contains a
+ *	reference to a 'TkMenuReferences' structure, and therefore no such
+ *	structure contains a reference to this menu entry either.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None
@@ -1342,9 +1334,9 @@ TkDestroyMenu(menuPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-UnhookCascadeEntry(mePtr)
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The cascade entry we are removing
-					 * from the cascade list. */
+UnhookCascadeEntry(
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr)		/* The cascade entry we are removing from the
+				 * cascade list. */
 {
     TkMenuEntry *cascadeEntryPtr;
     TkMenuEntry *prevCascadePtr;
@@ -1352,35 +1344,34 @@ UnhookCascadeEntry(mePtr)
 
     menuRefPtr = mePtr->childMenuRefPtr;
     if (menuRefPtr == NULL) {
-        return;
+	return;
     }
-    
+
     cascadeEntryPtr = menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr;
     if (cascadeEntryPtr == NULL) {
 	TkFreeMenuReferences(menuRefPtr);
 	mePtr->childMenuRefPtr = NULL;
     	return;
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * Singularly linked list deletion. The two special cases are
-     * 1. one element; 2. The first element is the one we want.
+     * Singularly linked list deletion. The two special cases are 1. one
+     * element; 2. The first element is the one we want.
      */
 
     if (cascadeEntryPtr == mePtr) {
     	if (cascadeEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr == NULL) {
-
 	    /*
-	     * This is the last menu entry which points to this
-	     * menu, so we need to clear out the list pointer in the
-	     * cascade itself.
+	     * This is the last menu entry which points to this menu, so we
+	     * need to clear out the list pointer in the cascade itself.
 	     */
 
 	    menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr = NULL;
-	    /* 
-	     * The original field is set to zero below, after it is
-	     * freed.
+
+	    /*
+	     * The original field is set to zero below, after it is freed.
 	     */
+
 	    TkFreeMenuReferences(menuRefPtr);
     	} else {
     	    menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr = cascadeEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr;
@@ -1390,15 +1381,15 @@ UnhookCascadeEntry(mePtr)
 	for (prevCascadePtr = cascadeEntryPtr,
 		cascadeEntryPtr = cascadeEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr;
 		cascadeEntryPtr != NULL;
-	        prevCascadePtr = cascadeEntryPtr,
+		prevCascadePtr = cascadeEntryPtr,
 		cascadeEntryPtr = cascadeEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr) {
     	    if (cascadeEntryPtr == mePtr){
     	    	prevCascadePtr->nextCascadePtr =
-            	    	cascadeEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr;
+			cascadeEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr;
     	    	cascadeEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr = NULL;
     	    	break;
     	    }
-        }
+	}
 	mePtr->nextCascadePtr = NULL;
     }
     mePtr->childMenuRefPtr = NULL;
@@ -1409,9 +1400,9 @@ UnhookCascadeEntry(mePtr)
  *
  * DestroyMenuEntry --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a menu entry at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	This function is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to clean
+ *	up the internal structure of a menu entry at a safe time (when no-one
+ *	is using it anymore).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1423,56 +1414,57 @@ UnhookCascadeEntry(mePtr)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyMenuEntry(memPtr)
-    char *memPtr;		/* Pointer to entry to be freed. */
+DestroyMenuEntry(
+    char *memPtr)		/* Pointer to entry to be freed. */
 {
     register TkMenuEntry *mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) memPtr;
     TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
 
     if (menuPtr->postedCascade == mePtr) {
     	/*
-	 * Ignore errors while unposting the menu, since it's possible
-	 * that the menu has already been deleted and the unpost will
-	 * generate an error.
+	 * Ignore errors while unposting the menu, since it's possible that
+	 * the menu has already been deleted and the unpost will generate an
+	 * error.
 	 */
 
-	TkPostSubmenu(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr, (TkMenuEntry *) NULL);
+	TkPostSubmenu(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr, NULL);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then
-     * let Tk_FreeConfigOptions handle all the standard option-related
-     * stuff.
+     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let
+     * Tk_FreeConfigOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
      */
 
     if (mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) {
 	if (menuPtr->masterMenuPtr != menuPtr) {
 	    TkMenu *destroyThis = NULL;
-	    /* 
-	     * The menu as a whole is a clone.  We must delete the clone
-	     * of the cascaded menu for the particular entry we are
-	     * destroying.
+	    /*
+	     * The menu as a whole is a clone. We must delete the clone of the
+	     * cascaded menu for the particular entry we are destroying.
 	     */
+
 	    TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr = mePtr->childMenuRefPtr;
+
 	    if (menuRefPtr != NULL) {
 		destroyThis = menuRefPtr->menuPtr;
-		/* 
-		 * But only if it is a clone.  What can happen is that
-		 * we are in the middle of deleting a menu and this
-		 * menu pointer has already been reset to point to the
-		 * original menu.  In that case we have nothing special
-		 * to do.
+
+		/*
+		 * But only if it is a clone. What can happen is that we are
+		 * in the middle of deleting a menu and this menu pointer has
+		 * already been reset to point to the original menu. In that
+		 * case we have nothing special to do.
 		 */
-		if ((destroyThis != NULL) 
-		  && (destroyThis->masterMenuPtr == destroyThis)) {
+
+		if ((destroyThis != NULL)
+			&& (destroyThis->masterMenuPtr == destroyThis)) {
 		    destroyThis = NULL;
 		}
 	    }
 	    UnhookCascadeEntry(mePtr);
 	    if (menuRefPtr != NULL) {
-	        if (menuRefPtr->menuPtr == destroyThis) {
-	            menuRefPtr->menuPtr = NULL;
-	        }
+		if (menuRefPtr->menuPtr == destroyThis) {
+		    menuRefPtr->menuPtr = NULL;
+		}
 		if (destroyThis != NULL) {
 		    TkDestroyMenu(destroyThis);
 		}
@@ -1487,10 +1479,11 @@ DestroyMenuEntry(memPtr)
     if (mePtr->selectImage != NULL) {
 	Tk_FreeImage(mePtr->selectImage);
     }
-    if (((mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY) 
+    if (((mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY)
 	    || (mePtr->type == RADIO_BUTTON_ENTRY))
 	    && (mePtr->namePtr != NULL)) {
-	char *varName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->namePtr, NULL);
+	char *varName = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->namePtr);
+
 	Tcl_UntraceVar(menuPtr->interp, varName,
 		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		MenuVarProc, (ClientData) mePtr);
@@ -1506,22 +1499,22 @@ DestroyMenuEntry(memPtr)
  *
  * MenuWorldChanged --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way (such as the fonts in the system changing) and the widget needs
- *	to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine its new geometry.
+ *	This function is called when the world has changed in some way (such
+ *	as the fonts in the system changing) and the widget needs to recompute
+ *	all its graphics contexts and determine its new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      Menu will be relayed out and redisplayed.
+ *	Menu will be relayed out and redisplayed.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-MenuWorldChanged(instanceData)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about widget. */
+MenuWorldChanged(
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     TkMenu *menuPtr = (TkMenu *) instanceData;
     int i;
@@ -1540,40 +1533,39 @@ MenuWorldChanged(instanceData)
  *
  * ConfigureMenu --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a menu widget.
+ *	This function is called to process an argv/argc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) a menu widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors, font, etc. get set
- *	for menuPtr;  old resources get freed, if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors, font, etc. get set for
+ *	menuPtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureMenu(interp, menuPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    register TkMenu *menuPtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or may
-				 * not already have values for some fields. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments. */
+ConfigureMenu(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    register TkMenu *menuPtr,	/* Information about widget; may or may not
+				 * already have values for some fields. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Arguments. */
 {
     int i;
     TkMenu *menuListPtr, *cleanupPtr;
     int result;
-    
+
     for (menuListPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr; menuListPtr != NULL;
 	    menuListPtr = menuListPtr->nextInstancePtr) {
 	menuListPtr->errorStructPtr = (Tk_SavedOptions *)
 		ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_SavedOptions));
 	result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) menuListPtr,
-		menuListPtr->optionTablesPtr->menuOptionTable, objc, objv, 
-		menuListPtr->tkwin, menuListPtr->errorStructPtr, (int *) NULL);
+		menuListPtr->optionTablesPtr->menuOptionTable, objc, objv,
+		menuListPtr->tkwin, menuListPtr->errorStructPtr, NULL);
 	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    for (cleanupPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
 		    cleanupPtr != menuListPtr;
@@ -1591,25 +1583,24 @@ ConfigureMenu(interp, menuPtr, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * When a menu is created, the type is in all of the arguments
-	 * to the menu command. Let Tk_ConfigureWidget take care of
-	 * parsing them, and then set the type after we can look at
-	 * the type string. Once set, a menu's type cannot be changed
+	 * When a menu is created, the type is in all of the arguments to the
+	 * menu command. Let Tk_ConfigureWidget take care of parsing them, and
+	 * then set the type after we can look at the type string. Once set, a
+	 * menu's type cannot be changed
 	 */
-	
+
 	if (menuListPtr->menuType == UNKNOWN_TYPE) {
 	    Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(NULL, menuListPtr->menuTypePtr,
 		    menuTypeStrings, NULL, 0, &menuListPtr->menuType);
 
 	    /*
-	     * Configure the new window to be either a pop-up menu
-	     * or a tear-off menu.
-	     * We don't do this for menubars since they are not toplevel
-	     * windows. Also, since this gets called before CloneMenu has
-	     * a chance to set the menuType field, we have to look at the
+	     * Configure the new window to be either a pop-up menu or a
+	     * tear-off menu. We don't do this for menubars since they are not
+	     * toplevel windows. Also, since this gets called before CloneMenu
+	     * has a chance to set the menuType field, we have to look at the
 	     * menuTypeName field to tell that this is a menu bar.
 	     */
-	    
+
 	    if (menuListPtr->menuType == MASTER_MENU) {
 		TkpMakeMenuWindow(menuListPtr->tkwin, 1);
 	    } else if (menuListPtr->menuType == TEAROFF_MENU) {
@@ -1619,10 +1610,10 @@ ConfigureMenu(interp, menuPtr, objc, objv)
 
 
 	/*
-	 * Depending on the -tearOff option, make sure that there is or
-	 * isn't an initial tear-off entry at the beginning of the menu.
+	 * Depending on the -tearOff option, make sure that there is or isn't
+	 * an initial tear-off entry at the beginning of the menu.
 	 */
-	
+
 	if (menuListPtr->tearoff) {
 	    if ((menuListPtr->numEntries == 0)
 		    || (menuListPtr->entries[0]->type != TEAROFF_ENTRY)) {
@@ -1645,7 +1636,7 @@ ConfigureMenu(interp, menuPtr, objc, objv)
 	} else if ((menuListPtr->numEntries > 0)
 		&& (menuListPtr->entries[0]->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY)) {
 	    int i;
-	    
+
 	    Tcl_EventuallyFree((ClientData) menuListPtr->entries[0],
 	    	    DestroyMenuEntry);
 
@@ -1661,21 +1652,21 @@ ConfigureMenu(interp, menuPtr, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuListPtr);
-	
+
 	/*
 	 * After reconfiguring a menu, we need to reconfigure all of the
-	 * entries in the menu, since some of the things in the children
-	 * (such as graphics contexts) may have to change to reflect changes
-	 * in the parent.
+	 * entries in the menu, since some of the things in the children (such
+	 * as graphics contexts) may have to change to reflect changes in the
+	 * parent.
 	 */
-	
+
 	for (i = 0; i < menuListPtr->numEntries; i++) {
 	    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
-	
+
 	    mePtr = menuListPtr->entries[i];
-	    ConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr, 0, (Tcl_Obj **) NULL);
+	    ConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr, 0, NULL);
 	}
-	
+
 	TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(menuListPtr);
     }
 
@@ -1688,7 +1679,6 @@ ConfigureMenu(interp, menuPtr, objc, objv)
 
     return TCL_OK;
 }
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -1696,23 +1686,23 @@ ConfigureMenu(interp, menuPtr, objc, objv)
  * PostProcessEntry --
  *
  *	This is called by ConfigureMenuEntry to do all of the configuration
- *	after Tk_SetOptions is called. This is separate
- *	so that error handling is easier.
+ *	after Tk_SetOptions is called. This is separate so that error handling
+ *	is easier.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information such as label and accelerator get
- *	set for mePtr;  old resources get freed, if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information such as label and accelerator get set for
+ *	mePtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-PostProcessEntry(mePtr)
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are configuring. */
+PostProcessEntry(
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr)			/* The entry we are configuring. */
 {
     TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
     int index = mePtr->index;
@@ -1720,9 +1710,9 @@ PostProcessEntry(mePtr)
     Tk_Image image;
 
     /*
-     * The code below handles special configuration stuff not taken
-     * care of by Tk_ConfigureWidget, such as special processing for
-     * defaults, sizing strings, graphics contexts, etc.
+     * The code below handles special configuration stuff not taken care of by
+     * Tk_ConfigureWidget, such as special processing for defaults, sizing
+     * strings, graphics contexts, etc.
      */
 
     if (mePtr->labelPtr == NULL) {
@@ -1750,16 +1740,15 @@ PostProcessEntry(mePtr)
 					 * prevent compiler warning. */
 
 	/*
-	 * This is a cascade entry. If the menu that the cascade entry
-	 * is pointing to has changed, we need to remove this entry
-	 * from the list of entries pointing to the old menu, and add a
-	 * cascade reference to the list of entries pointing to the
-	 * new menu.
+	 * This is a cascade entry. If the menu that the cascade entry is
+	 * pointing to has changed, we need to remove this entry from the list
+	 * of entries pointing to the old menu, and add a cascade reference to
+	 * the list of entries pointing to the new menu.
 	 *
 	 * BUG: We are not recloning for special case #3 yet.
 	 */
-	
-	name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->namePtr, NULL);
+
+	name = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->namePtr);
 	if (mePtr->childMenuRefPtr != NULL) {
 	    oldHashKey = Tcl_GetHashKey(TkGetMenuHashTable(menuPtr->interp),
 		    mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->hashEntryPtr);
@@ -1768,7 +1757,7 @@ PostProcessEntry(mePtr)
 	    }
 	}
 
-	if ((mePtr->childMenuRefPtr == NULL) 
+	if ((mePtr->childMenuRefPtr == NULL)
 		|| (strcmp(oldHashKey, name) != 0)) {
 	    menuRefPtr = TkCreateMenuReferences(menuPtr->interp, name);
 	    mePtr->childMenuRefPtr = menuRefPtr;
@@ -1786,11 +1775,11 @@ PostProcessEntry(mePtr)
 			break;
 		    }
 		}
-    
+
 		/*
 		 * Put the item at the front of the list.
 		 */
-	    
+
 		if (!alreadyThere) {
 		    mePtr->nextCascadePtr = menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr;
 		    menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr = mePtr;
@@ -1798,23 +1787,20 @@ PostProcessEntry(mePtr)
 	    }
 	}
     }
-    
+
     if (TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index) != TCL_OK) {
     	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    if (TkpConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr) != TCL_OK) {
-    	return TCL_ERROR;
-    }
-    
     /*
-     * Get the images for the entry, if there are any.  Allocate the
-     * new images before freeing the old ones, so that the reference
-     * counts don't go to zero and cause image data to be discarded.
+     * Get the images for the entry, if there are any. Allocate the new images
+     * before freeing the old ones, so that the reference counts don't go to
+     * zero and cause image data to be discarded.
      */
 
     if (mePtr->imagePtr != NULL) {
-	char *imageString = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->imagePtr, NULL);
+	char *imageString = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->imagePtr);
+
 	image = Tk_GetImage(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin, imageString,
 		TkMenuImageProc, (ClientData) mePtr);
 	if (image == NULL) {
@@ -1828,8 +1814,8 @@ PostProcessEntry(mePtr)
     }
     mePtr->image = image;
     if (mePtr->selectImagePtr != NULL) {
-	char *selectImageString = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(
-		mePtr->selectImagePtr, NULL);
+	char *selectImageString = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->selectImagePtr);
+
 	image = Tk_GetImage(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin, selectImageString,
 		TkMenuSelectImageProc, (ClientData) mePtr);
 	if (image == NULL) {
@@ -1866,12 +1852,11 @@ PostProcessEntry(mePtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Select the entry if the associated variable has the
-	 * appropriate value, initialize the variable if it doesn't
-	 * exist, then set a trace on the variable to monitor future
-	 * changes to its value.
+	 * Select the entry if the associated variable has the appropriate
+	 * value, initialize the variable if it doesn't exist, then set a
+	 * trace on the variable to monitor future changes to its value.
 	 */
-	
+
 	if (mePtr->namePtr != NULL) {
 	    valuePtr = Tcl_ObjGetVar2(menuPtr->interp, mePtr->namePtr, NULL,
 		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
@@ -1881,10 +1866,8 @@ PostProcessEntry(mePtr)
 	mePtr->entryFlags &= ~ENTRY_SELECTED;
 	if (valuePtr != NULL) {
 	    if (mePtr->onValuePtr != NULL) {
-		char *value = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, NULL);
-		char *onValue = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->onValuePtr,
-			NULL);
-
+		char *value = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
+		char *onValue = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->onValuePtr);
 
 		if (strcmp(value, onValue) == 0) {
 		    mePtr->entryFlags |= ENTRY_SELECTED;
@@ -1894,19 +1877,21 @@ PostProcessEntry(mePtr)
 	    if (mePtr->namePtr != NULL) {
 		Tcl_ObjSetVar2(menuPtr->interp, mePtr->namePtr, NULL,
 			(mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY)
-			? mePtr->offValuePtr
-			: Tcl_NewObj(),
-			TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+			? mePtr->offValuePtr : Tcl_NewObj(), TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
 	    }
 	}
 	if (mePtr->namePtr != NULL) {
-	    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->namePtr, NULL);
+	    name = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->namePtr);
 	    Tcl_TraceVar(menuPtr->interp, name,
 		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		    MenuVarProc, (ClientData) mePtr);
 	}
     }
-    
+
+    if (TkpConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -1915,41 +1900,41 @@ PostProcessEntry(mePtr)
  *
  * ConfigureMenuEntry --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list in order
- *	to configure (or reconfigure) one entry in a menu.
+ *	This function is called to process an argv/argc list in order to
+ *	configure (or reconfigure) one entry in a menu.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information such as label and accelerator get
- *	set for mePtr;  old resources get freed, if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information such as label and accelerator get set for
+ *	mePtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr, objc, objv)
-    register TkMenuEntry *mePtr;	/* Information about menu entry;  may
-					 * or may not already have values for
-					 * some fields. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Arguments. */
+ConfigureMenuEntry(
+    register TkMenuEntry *mePtr,/* Information about menu entry; may or may
+				 * not already have values for some fields. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Arguments. */
 {
     TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
     Tk_SavedOptions errorStruct;
     int result;
 
     /*
-     * If this entry is a check button or radio button, then remove
-     * its old trace procedure.
+     * If this entry is a check button or radio button, then remove its old
+     * trace function.
      */
 
     if ((mePtr->namePtr != NULL)
     	    && ((mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY)
 	    || (mePtr->type == RADIO_BUTTON_ENTRY))) {
-	char *name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->namePtr, NULL);
+	char *name = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->namePtr);
+
 	Tcl_UntraceVar(menuPtr->interp, name,
 		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		MenuVarProc, (ClientData) mePtr);
@@ -1959,7 +1944,7 @@ ConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr, objc, objv)
     if (menuPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
 	if (Tk_SetOptions(menuPtr->interp, (char *) mePtr,
 		mePtr->optionTable, objc, objv, menuPtr->tkwin,
-		&errorStruct, (int *) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+		&errorStruct, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	result = PostProcessEntry(mePtr);
@@ -1971,7 +1956,7 @@ ConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr, objc, objv)
     }
 
     TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(menuPtr);
-    
+
     return result;
 }
 
@@ -1983,39 +1968,38 @@ ConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr, objc, objv)
  *	Calls ConfigureMenuEntry for each menu in the clone chain.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information such as label and accelerator get
- *	set for mePtr;  old resources get freed, if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information such as label and accelerator get set for
+ *	mePtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureMenuCloneEntries(interp, menuPtr, index, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* Information about whole menu. */
-    int index;				/* Index of mePtr within menuPtr's
-					 * entries. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Arguments. */
+ConfigureMenuCloneEntries(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* Information about whole menu. */
+    int index,			/* Index of mePtr within menuPtr's entries. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Arguments. */
 {
     TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
     TkMenu *menuListPtr;
     int cascadeEntryChanged = 0;
-    TkMenuReferences *oldCascadeMenuRefPtr, *cascadeMenuRefPtr = NULL; 
+    TkMenuReferences *oldCascadeMenuRefPtr, *cascadeMenuRefPtr = NULL;
     Tcl_Obj *oldCascadePtr = NULL;
     char *newCascadeName;
 
     /*
-     * Cascades are kind of tricky here. This is special case #3 in the comment
-     * at the top of this file. Basically, if a menu is the master menu of a
-     * clone chain, and has an entry with a cascade menu, the clones of
-     * the menu will point to clones of the cascade menu. We have
-     * to destroy the clones of the cascades, clone the new cascade
-     * menu, and configure the entry to point to the new clone.
+     * Cascades are kind of tricky here. This is special case #3 in the
+     * comment at the top of this file. Basically, if a menu is the master
+     * menu of a clone chain, and has an entry with a cascade menu, the clones
+     * of the menu will point to clones of the cascade menu. We have to
+     * destroy the clones of the cascades, clone the new cascade menu, and
+     * configure the entry to point to the new clone.
      */
 
     mePtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr->entries[index];
@@ -2034,21 +2018,20 @@ ConfigureMenuCloneEntries(interp, menuPtr, index, objc, objv)
 	char *oldCascadeName;
 
 	if (mePtr->namePtr != NULL) {
-	    newCascadeName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->namePtr, NULL);
+	    newCascadeName = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->namePtr);
 	} else {
 	    newCascadeName = NULL;
 	}
- 
+
 	if ((oldCascadePtr == NULL) && (mePtr->namePtr == NULL)) {
 	    cascadeEntryChanged = 0;
 	} else if (((oldCascadePtr == NULL) && (mePtr->namePtr != NULL))
-		|| ((oldCascadePtr != NULL) 
+		|| ((oldCascadePtr != NULL)
 		&& (mePtr->namePtr == NULL))) {
 	    cascadeEntryChanged = 1;
 	} else {
-	    oldCascadeName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(oldCascadePtr,
-		    NULL);
-	    cascadeEntryChanged = (strcmp(oldCascadeName, newCascadeName) 
+	    oldCascadeName = Tcl_GetString(oldCascadePtr);
+	    cascadeEntryChanged = (strcmp(oldCascadeName, newCascadeName)
 		    != 0);
 	}
 	if (oldCascadePtr != NULL) {
@@ -2058,20 +2041,20 @@ ConfigureMenuCloneEntries(interp, menuPtr, index, objc, objv)
 
     if (cascadeEntryChanged) {
 	if (mePtr->namePtr != NULL) {
-	    newCascadeName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->namePtr, NULL);
+	    newCascadeName = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->namePtr);
 	    cascadeMenuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferences(menuPtr->interp,
 		    newCascadeName);
 	}
     }
 
-    for (menuListPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr->nextInstancePtr; 
+    for (menuListPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr->nextInstancePtr;
     	    menuListPtr != NULL;
 	    menuListPtr = menuListPtr->nextInstancePtr) {
-  	
+
     	mePtr = menuListPtr->entries[index];
 
 	if (cascadeEntryChanged && (mePtr->namePtr != NULL)) {
-	    oldCascadeMenuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferencesObj(menuPtr->interp, 
+	    oldCascadeMenuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferencesObj(menuPtr->interp,
 		    mePtr->namePtr);
 
 	    if ((oldCascadeMenuRefPtr != NULL)
@@ -2083,7 +2066,7 @@ ConfigureMenuCloneEntries(interp, menuPtr, index, objc, objv)
     	if (ConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr, objc, objv) != TCL_OK) {
     	    return TCL_ERROR;
     	}
-	
+
 	if (cascadeEntryChanged && (mePtr->namePtr != NULL)) {
 	    if (cascadeMenuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL) {
 		Tcl_Obj *newObjv[2];
@@ -2095,7 +2078,7 @@ ConfigureMenuCloneEntries(interp, menuPtr, index, objc, objv)
 
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(pathNamePtr);
 		newCloneNamePtr = TkNewMenuName(menuPtr->interp,
-			pathNamePtr, 
+			pathNamePtr,
 			cascadeMenuRefPtr->menuPtr);
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(newCloneNamePtr);
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(normalPtr);
@@ -2121,14 +2104,14 @@ ConfigureMenuCloneEntries(interp, menuPtr, index, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkGetMenuIndex --
  *
- *	Parse a textual index into a menu and return the numerical
- *	index of the indicated entry.
+ *	Parse a textual index into a menu and return the numerical index of
+ *	the indicated entry.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.  If all went well, then *indexPtr is
- *	filled in with the entry index corresponding to string
- *	(ranges from -1 to the number of entries in the menu minus
- *	one).  Otherwise an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result. If all went well, then *indexPtr is filled in
+ *	with the entry index corresponding to string (ranges from -1 to the
+ *	number of entries in the menu minus one). Otherwise an error message
+ *	is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2137,18 +2120,18 @@ ConfigureMenuCloneEntries(interp, menuPtr, index, objc, objv)
  */
 
 int
-TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objPtr, lastOK, indexPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* For error messages. */
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* Menu for which the index is being
+TkGetMenuIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For error messages. */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* Menu for which the index is being
 				 * specified. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Specification of an entry in menu.  See
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* Specification of an entry in menu. See
 				 * manual entry for valid .*/
-    int lastOK;			/* Non-zero means its OK to return index
-				 * just *after* last entry. */
-    int *indexPtr;		/* Where to store converted index. */
+    int lastOK,			/* Non-zero means its OK to return index just
+				 * *after* last entry. */
+    int *indexPtr)		/* Where to store converted index. */
 {
     int i;
-    char *string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, NULL);
+    char *string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
 
     if ((string[0] == 'a') && (strcmp(string, "active") == 0)) {
 	*indexPtr = menuPtr->active;
@@ -2174,7 +2157,7 @@ TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objPtr, lastOK, indexPtr)
     }
 
     if (isdigit(UCHAR(string[0]))) {
-	if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, string,  &i) == TCL_OK) {
+	if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, string, &i) == TCL_OK) {
 	    if (i >= menuPtr->numEntries) {
 		if (lastOK) {
 		    i = menuPtr->numEntries;
@@ -2187,26 +2170,23 @@ TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objPtr, lastOK, indexPtr)
 	    *indexPtr = i;
 	    goto success;
 	}
-	Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *) NULL, TCL_STATIC);
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, NULL, TCL_STATIC);
     }
 
     for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
 	Tcl_Obj *labelPtr = menuPtr->entries[i]->labelPtr;
-	char *label = (labelPtr == NULL) ? NULL
-	        : Tcl_GetStringFromObj(labelPtr, NULL);
-	
-	if ((label != NULL)
-		&& (Tcl_StringMatch(label, string))) {
+	char *label = (labelPtr == NULL) ? NULL : Tcl_GetString(labelPtr);
+
+	if ((label != NULL) && (Tcl_StringMatch(label, string))) {
 	    *indexPtr = i;
 	    goto success;
 	}
     }
 
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad menu entry index \"",
-	    string, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad menu entry index \"", string, "\"", NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 
-success:
+  success:
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -2215,9 +2195,9 @@ success:
  *
  * MenuCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2229,25 +2209,26 @@ success:
  */
 
 static void
-MenuCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+MenuCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     TkMenu *menuPtr = (TkMenu *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = menuPtr->tkwin;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (tkwin != NULL) {
-	/* 
-	 * Note: it may be desirable to NULL out the tkwin
-	 * field of menuPtr here:
+	/*
+	 * Note: it may be desirable to NULL out the tkwin field of menuPtr
+	 * here:
 	 * menuPtr->tkwin = NULL;
 	 */
+
 	Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
     }
 }
@@ -2257,12 +2238,12 @@ MenuCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * MenuNewEntry --
  *
- *	This procedure allocates and initializes a new menu entry.
+ *	This function allocates and initializes a new menu entry.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to a new menu entry structure,
- *	which has been malloc-ed, initialized, and entered into the
- *	entry array for the  menu.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to a new menu entry structure, which has
+ *	been malloc-ed, initialized, and entered into the entry array for the
+ *	menu.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Storage gets allocated.
@@ -2271,19 +2252,18 @@ MenuCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static TkMenuEntry *
-MenuNewEntry(menuPtr, index, type)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* Menu that will hold the new entry. */
-    int index;			/* Where in the menu the new entry is to
+MenuNewEntry(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* Menu that will hold the new entry. */
+    int index,			/* Where in the menu the new entry is to
 				 * go. */
-    int type;			/* The type of the new entry. */
+    int type)			/* The type of the new entry. */
 {
     TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
     TkMenuEntry **newEntries;
     int i;
 
     /*
-     * Create a new array of entries with an empty slot for the
-     * new entry.
+     * Create a new array of entries with an empty slot for the new entry.
      */
 
     newEntries = (TkMenuEntry **) ckalloc((unsigned)
@@ -2291,7 +2271,7 @@ MenuNewEntry(menuPtr, index, type)
     for (i = 0; i < index; i++) {
 	newEntries[i] = menuPtr->entries[i];
     }
-    for (  ; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
+    for (; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
 	newEntries[i+1] = menuPtr->entries[i];
 	newEntries[i+1]->index = i + 1;
     }
@@ -2354,8 +2334,8 @@ MenuNewEntry(menuPtr, index, type)
  *
  * MenuAddOrInsert --
  *
- *	This procedure does all of the work of the "add" and "insert"
- *	widget commands, allowing the code for these to be shared.
+ *	This function does all of the work of the "add" and "insert" widget
+ *	commands, allowing the code for these to be shared.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return value.
@@ -2367,34 +2347,29 @@ MenuNewEntry(menuPtr, index, type)
  */
 
 static int
-MenuAddOrInsert(interp, menuPtr, indexPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* Widget in which to create new
-					 * entry. */
-    Tcl_Obj *indexPtr;			/* Object describing index at which
-					 * to insert.  NULL means insert at
-					 * end. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of elements in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Arguments to command:  first arg
-					 * is type of entry, others are
-					 * config options. */
+MenuAddOrInsert(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* Widget in which to create new entry. */
+    Tcl_Obj *indexPtr,		/* Object describing index at which to insert.
+				 * NULL means insert at end. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of elements in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Arguments to command: first arg is type of
+				 * entry, others are config options. */
 {
     int type, index;
     TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
     TkMenu *menuListPtr;
 
     if (indexPtr != NULL) {
-	if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, indexPtr, 1, &index)
-		!= TCL_OK) {
+	if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, indexPtr, 1, &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     } else {
 	index = menuPtr->numEntries;
     }
     if (index < 0) {
-	char *indexString = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(indexPtr, NULL);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad index \"", indexString, "\"",
-		 (char *) NULL);
+	char *indexString = Tcl_GetString(indexPtr);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad index \"", indexString, "\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     if (menuPtr->tearoff && (index == 0)) {
@@ -2414,9 +2389,9 @@ MenuAddOrInsert(interp, menuPtr, indexPtr, objc, objv)
      * Now we have to add an entry for every instance related to this menu.
      */
 
-    for (menuListPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr; menuListPtr != NULL; 
+    for (menuListPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr; menuListPtr != NULL;
     	    menuListPtr = menuListPtr->nextInstancePtr) {
-    	
+
     	mePtr = MenuNewEntry(menuListPtr, index, type);
     	if (mePtr == NULL) {
     	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -2445,48 +2420,46 @@ MenuAddOrInsert(interp, menuPtr, indexPtr, objc, objv)
 	    }
     	    return TCL_ERROR;
     	}
-    	
+
     	/*
-    	 * If a menu has cascades, then every instance of the menu has
-    	 * to have its own parallel cascade structure. So adding an
-	 * entry to a menu with clones means that the menu that the
-	 * entry points to has to be cloned for every clone the
-	 * master menu has. This is special case #2 in the comment
-	 * at the top of this file.
+	 * If a menu has cascades, then every instance of the menu has to have
+	 * its own parallel cascade structure. So adding an entry to a menu
+	 * with clones means that the menu that the entry points to has to be
+	 * cloned for every clone the master menu has. This is special case #2
+	 * in the comment at the top of this file.
     	 */
- 
-    	if ((menuPtr != menuListPtr) && (type == CASCADE_ENTRY)) {    	    
+
+    	if ((menuPtr != menuListPtr) && (type == CASCADE_ENTRY)) {
     	    if ((mePtr->namePtr != NULL)
 		    && (mePtr->childMenuRefPtr != NULL)
     	    	    && (mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL)) {
-    	        TkMenu *cascadeMenuPtr =
+		TkMenu *cascadeMenuPtr =
 			mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
-    	        Tcl_Obj *newCascadePtr;
+		Tcl_Obj *newCascadePtr, *newObjv[2];
 		Tcl_Obj *menuNamePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj("-menu", -1);
-		Tcl_Obj *windowNamePtr = 
+		Tcl_Obj *windowNamePtr =
 			Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(menuListPtr->tkwin), -1);
 		Tcl_Obj *normalPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj("normal", -1);
-  		Tcl_Obj *newObjv[2];
 		TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
-    	          
+
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(windowNamePtr);
 		newCascadePtr = TkNewMenuName(menuListPtr->interp,
 			windowNamePtr, cascadeMenuPtr);
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(newCascadePtr);
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(normalPtr);
 		CloneMenu(cascadeMenuPtr, newCascadePtr, normalPtr);
-		
+
 		menuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferencesObj(menuListPtr->interp,
 			newCascadePtr);
 		if (menuRefPtr == NULL) {
-		    panic("CloneMenu failed inside of MenuAddOrInsert.");
+		    Tcl_Panic("CloneMenu failed inside of MenuAddOrInsert.");
 		}
 		newObjv[0] = menuNamePtr;
 		newObjv[1] = newCascadePtr;
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(menuNamePtr);
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(newCascadePtr);
-    	        ConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr, 2, newObjv);
-    	        Tcl_DecrRefCount(newCascadePtr);
+		ConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr, 2, newObjv);
+		Tcl_DecrRefCount(newCascadePtr);
 		Tcl_DecrRefCount(menuNamePtr);
 		Tcl_DecrRefCount(windowNamePtr);
 		Tcl_DecrRefCount(normalPtr);
@@ -2501,10 +2474,9 @@ MenuAddOrInsert(interp, menuPtr, indexPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * MenuVarProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when someone changes the
- *	state variable associated with a radiobutton or checkbutton
- *	menu entry.  The entry's selected state is set to match
- *	the value of the variable.
+ *	This function is invoked when someone changes the state variable
+ *	associated with a radiobutton or checkbutton menu entry. The entry's
+ *	selected state is set to match the value of the variable.
  *
  * Results:
  *	NULL is always returned.
@@ -2516,16 +2488,16 @@ MenuAddOrInsert(interp, menuPtr, indexPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static char *
-MenuVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about menu entry. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
-    CONST char *name1;		/* First part of variable's name. */
-    CONST char *name2;		/* Second part of variable's name. */
-    int flags;			/* Describes what just happened. */
+MenuVarProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about menu entry. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
+    const char *name1,		/* First part of variable's name. */
+    const char *name2,		/* Second part of variable's name. */
+    int flags)			/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     TkMenuEntry *mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) clientData;
     TkMenu *menuPtr;
-    CONST char *value;
+    const char *value;
     char *name;
     char *onValue;
 
@@ -2534,11 +2506,11 @@ MenuVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
 	 * Do nothing if the interpreter is going away.
 	 */
 
-    	return (char *) NULL;
+    	return NULL;
     }
 
     menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
-    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->namePtr, NULL);
+    name = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->namePtr);
 
     /*
      * If the variable is being unset, then re-establish the trace.
@@ -2552,13 +2524,13 @@ MenuVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
 		    MenuVarProc, clientData);
 	}
 	TkpConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr);
-	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, (TkMenuEntry *) NULL);
-	return (char *) NULL;
+	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, NULL);
+	return NULL;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Use the value of the variable to update the selected status of
-     * the menu entry.
+     * Use the value of the variable to update the selected status of the menu
+     * entry.
      */
 
     value = Tcl_GetVar(interp, name, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
@@ -2566,23 +2538,23 @@ MenuVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
 	value = "";
     }
     if (mePtr->onValuePtr != NULL) {
-	onValue = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->onValuePtr, NULL);
+	onValue = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->onValuePtr);
 	if (strcmp(value, onValue) == 0) {
 	    if (mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_SELECTED) {
-		return (char *) NULL;
+		return NULL;
 	    }
 	    mePtr->entryFlags |= ENTRY_SELECTED;
 	} else if (mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_SELECTED) {
 	    mePtr->entryFlags &= ~ENTRY_SELECTED;
 	} else {
-	    return (char *) NULL;
+	    return NULL;
 	}
     } else {
-	return (char *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
     TkpConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr);
     TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, mePtr);
-    return (char *) NULL;
+    return NULL;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -2590,26 +2562,25 @@ MenuVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
  *
  * TkActivateMenuEntry --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to make a particular menu entry
- *	the active one, deactivating any other entry that might
- *	currently be active.
+ *	This function is invoked to make a particular menu entry the active
+ *	one, deactivating any other entry that might currently be active.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result (errors can occur
- *	while posting and unposting submenus).
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result (errors can occur while
+ *	posting and unposting submenus).
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Menu entries get redisplayed, and the active entry changes.
- *	Submenus may get posted and unposted.
+ *	Menu entries get redisplayed, and the active entry changes. Submenus
+ *	may get posted and unposted.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, index)
-    register TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* Menu in which to activate. */
-    int index;				/* Index of entry to activate, or
-					 * -1 to deactivate all entries. */
+TkActivateMenuEntry(
+    register TkMenu *menuPtr,	/* Menu in which to activate. */
+    int index)			/* Index of entry to activate, or -1 to
+				 * deactivate all entries. */
 {
     register TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
     int result = TCL_OK;
@@ -2618,8 +2589,8 @@ TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, index)
 	mePtr = menuPtr->entries[menuPtr->active];
 
 	/*
-	 * Don't change the state unless it's currently active (state
-	 * might already have been changed to disabled).
+	 * Don't change the state unless it's currently active (state might
+	 * already have been changed to disabled).
 	 */
 
 	if (mePtr->state == ENTRY_ACTIVE) {
@@ -2644,8 +2615,8 @@ TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, index)
  *	Execute the postcommand for the given menu.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result (errors can occur
- *	while the postcommands are being processed).
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result (errors can occur while the
+ *	postcommands are being processed).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Since commands can get executed while this routine is being executed,
@@ -2653,17 +2624,17 @@ TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, index)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 int
-TkPostCommand(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+TkPostCommand(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)
 {
     int result;
 
     /*
-     * If there is a command for the menu, execute it.  This
-     * may change the size of the menu, so be sure to recompute
-     * the menu's geometry if needed.
+     * If there is a command for the menu, execute it. This may change the
+     * size of the menu, so be sure to recompute the menu's geometry if
+     * needed.
      */
 
     if (menuPtr->postCommandPtr != NULL) {
@@ -2686,37 +2657,36 @@ TkPostCommand(menuPtr)
  *
  * CloneMenu --
  *
- *	Creates a child copy of the menu. It will be inserted into
- *	the menu's instance chain. All attributes and entry
- *	attributes will be duplicated.
+ *	Creates a child copy of the menu. It will be inserted into the menu's
+ *	instance chain. All attributes and entry attributes will be
+ *	duplicated.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Allocates storage. After the menu is created, any 
- *	configuration done with this menu or any related one
- *	will be reflected in all of them.
+ *	Allocates storage. After the menu is created, any configuration done
+ *	with this menu or any related one will be reflected in all of them.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-CloneMenu(menuPtr, newMenuNamePtr, newMenuTypePtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are going to clone */
-    Tcl_Obj *newMenuNamePtr;	/* The name to give the new menu */
-    Tcl_Obj *newMenuTypePtr;	/* What kind of menu is this, a normal menu
-    				 * a menubar, or a tearoff? */
+CloneMenu(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* The menu we are going to clone. */
+    Tcl_Obj *newMenuNamePtr,	/* The name to give the new menu. */
+    Tcl_Obj *newMenuTypePtr)	/* What kind of menu is this, a normal menu a
+    				 * menubar, or a tearoff? */
 {
     int returnResult;
     int menuType, i;
     TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
     Tcl_Obj *menuDupCommandArray[4];
-    
+
     if (newMenuTypePtr == NULL) {
-    	menuType = MASTER_MENU;
+	menuType = MASTER_MENU;
     } else {
-	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(menuPtr->interp, newMenuTypePtr, 
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(menuPtr->interp, newMenuTypePtr,
 		menuTypeStrings, "menu type", 0, &menuType) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
@@ -2742,12 +2712,12 @@ CloneMenu(menuPtr, newMenuNamePtr, newMenuTypePtr)
     /*
      * Make sure the tcl command actually created the clone.
      */
-    
+
     if ((returnResult == TCL_OK) &&
-    	    ((menuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferencesObj(menuPtr->interp, 
-	    newMenuNamePtr)) != (TkMenuReferences *) NULL)
+	    ((menuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferencesObj(menuPtr->interp,
+	    newMenuNamePtr)) != NULL)
 	    && (menuPtr->numEntries == menuRefPtr->menuPtr->numEntries)) {
-    	TkMenu *newMenuPtr = menuRefPtr->menuPtr;
+	TkMenu *newMenuPtr = menuRefPtr->menuPtr;
 	Tcl_Obj *newObjv[3];
 	int i, numElements;
 
@@ -2761,83 +2731,85 @@ CloneMenu(menuPtr, newMenuNamePtr, newMenuTypePtr)
 	    newMenuPtr->masterMenuPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
 	} else {
 	    TkMenu *masterMenuPtr;
-	    
+
 	    masterMenuPtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
 	    newMenuPtr->nextInstancePtr = masterMenuPtr->nextInstancePtr;
 	    masterMenuPtr->nextInstancePtr = newMenuPtr;
 	    newMenuPtr->masterMenuPtr = masterMenuPtr;
 	}
-   	
-   	/*
-   	 * Add the master menu's window to the bind tags for this window
-   	 * after this window's tag. This is so the user can bind to either
-   	 * this clone (which may not be easy to do) or the entire menu
-   	 * clone structure.
-   	 */
-   	
+
+	/*
+	 * Add the master menu's window to the bind tags for this window after
+	 * this window's tag. This is so the user can bind to either this
+	 * clone (which may not be easy to do) or the entire menu clone
+	 * structure.
+	 */
+
 	newObjv[0] = Tcl_NewStringObj("bindtags", -1);
-   	newObjv[1] = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(newMenuPtr->tkwin), -1);
+	newObjv[1] = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(newMenuPtr->tkwin), -1);
 	Tcl_IncrRefCount(newObjv[0]);
 	Tcl_IncrRefCount(newObjv[1]);
-   	if (Tk_BindtagsObjCmd((ClientData)newMenuPtr->tkwin, 
-   		newMenuPtr->interp, 2, newObjv) == TCL_OK) {
-   	    char *windowName;
-   	    Tcl_Obj *bindingsPtr =
+	if (Tk_BindtagsObjCmd((ClientData)newMenuPtr->tkwin,
+		newMenuPtr->interp, 2, newObjv) == TCL_OK) {
+	    char *windowName;
+	    Tcl_Obj *bindingsPtr =
 		    Tcl_DuplicateObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(newMenuPtr->interp));
-   	    Tcl_Obj *elementPtr;
-     
+	    Tcl_Obj *elementPtr;
+
 	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(bindingsPtr);
-   	    Tcl_ListObjLength(newMenuPtr->interp, bindingsPtr, &numElements);
-   	    for (i = 0; i < numElements; i++) {
-   	    	Tcl_ListObjIndex(newMenuPtr->interp, bindingsPtr, i,
+	    Tcl_ListObjLength(newMenuPtr->interp, bindingsPtr, &numElements);
+	    for (i = 0; i < numElements; i++) {
+		Tcl_ListObjIndex(newMenuPtr->interp, bindingsPtr, i,
 			&elementPtr);
-   	    	windowName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(elementPtr, NULL);
-   	    	if (strcmp(windowName, Tk_PathName(newMenuPtr->tkwin))
-   	    		== 0) {
-   	    	    Tcl_Obj *newElementPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
-   	    	    	    Tk_PathName(newMenuPtr->masterMenuPtr->tkwin), -1);
-		    /* 
+		windowName = Tcl_GetString(elementPtr);
+		if (strcmp(windowName, Tk_PathName(newMenuPtr->tkwin))
+			== 0) {
+		    Tcl_Obj *newElementPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
+			    Tk_PathName(newMenuPtr->masterMenuPtr->tkwin), -1);
+
+		    /*
 		     * The newElementPtr will have its refCount incremented
 		     * here, so we don't need to worry about it any more.
 		     */
-   	    	    Tcl_ListObjReplace(menuPtr->interp, bindingsPtr,
-   	    	    	    i + 1, 0, 1, &newElementPtr);
+
+		    Tcl_ListObjReplace(menuPtr->interp, bindingsPtr,
+			    i + 1, 0, 1, &newElementPtr);
 		    newObjv[2] = bindingsPtr;
 		    Tk_BindtagsObjCmd((ClientData)newMenuPtr->tkwin,
 			    menuPtr->interp, 3, newObjv);
-   	    	    break;
-   	    	}
-   	    }
-   	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(bindingsPtr);   	    
-   	}
+		    break;
+		}
+	    }
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(bindingsPtr);
+	}
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(newObjv[0]);
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(newObjv[1]);
-   	Tcl_ResetResult(menuPtr->interp);
-      	
-   	/*
-   	 * Clone all of the cascade menus that this menu points to.
-   	 */
-   	
-   	for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
-   	    TkMenuReferences *cascadeRefPtr;
-   	    TkMenu *oldCascadePtr;
-   	    
-   	    if ((menuPtr->entries[i]->type == CASCADE_ENTRY)
+	Tcl_ResetResult(menuPtr->interp);
+
+	/*
+	 * Clone all of the cascade menus that this menu points to.
+	 */
+
+	for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
+	    TkMenuReferences *cascadeRefPtr;
+	    TkMenu *oldCascadePtr;
+
+	    if ((menuPtr->entries[i]->type == CASCADE_ENTRY)
 		&& (menuPtr->entries[i]->namePtr != NULL)) {
-   	    	cascadeRefPtr =
+		cascadeRefPtr =
 			TkFindMenuReferencesObj(menuPtr->interp,
 			menuPtr->entries[i]->namePtr);
-   	    	if ((cascadeRefPtr != NULL) && (cascadeRefPtr->menuPtr)) {
-		    Tcl_Obj *windowNamePtr = 
+		if ((cascadeRefPtr != NULL) && (cascadeRefPtr->menuPtr)) {
+		    Tcl_Obj *windowNamePtr =
 			    Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(newMenuPtr->tkwin),
 			    -1);
 		    Tcl_Obj *newCascadePtr;
-		    
-   	    	    oldCascadePtr = cascadeRefPtr->menuPtr;
+
+		    oldCascadePtr = cascadeRefPtr->menuPtr;
 
 		    Tcl_IncrRefCount(windowNamePtr);
-   	    	    newCascadePtr = TkNewMenuName(menuPtr->interp,
-   	    	     	    windowNamePtr, oldCascadePtr);
+		    newCascadePtr = TkNewMenuName(menuPtr->interp,
+			    windowNamePtr, oldCascadePtr);
 		    Tcl_IncrRefCount(newCascadePtr);
 		    CloneMenu(oldCascadePtr, newCascadePtr, NULL);
 
@@ -2848,13 +2820,13 @@ CloneMenu(menuPtr, newMenuNamePtr, newMenuTypePtr)
 		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(newObjv[0]);
 		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(newCascadePtr);
 		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(windowNamePtr);
-   	    	}
-   	    }
-   	}
-   	
-    	returnResult = TCL_OK;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+
+	returnResult = TCL_OK;
     } else {
-    	returnResult = TCL_ERROR;
+	returnResult = TCL_ERROR;
     }
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) menuPtr);
     return returnResult;
@@ -2863,6 +2835,43 @@ CloneMenu(menuPtr, newMenuNamePtr, newMenuTypePtr)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * MenuDoXPosition --
+ *
+ *	Given arguments from an option command line, returns the X position.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns TCL_OK or TCL_Error
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	xPosition is set to the X-position of the menu entry.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+MenuDoXPosition(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    int index;
+
+    TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr);
+    if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objPtr, 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    if (index < 0) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(0));
+    } else {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(menuPtr->entries[index]->x));
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * MenuDoYPosition --
  *
  *	Given arguments from an option command line, returns the Y position.
@@ -2875,18 +2884,18 @@ CloneMenu(menuPtr, newMenuNamePtr, newMenuTypePtr)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-    
+
 static int
-MenuDoYPosition(interp, menuPtr, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+MenuDoYPosition(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
 {
     int index;
-    
+
     TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr);
     if (TkGetMenuIndex(interp, menuPtr, objPtr, 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
-    	goto error;
+	goto error;
     }
     Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
     if (index < 0) {
@@ -2896,8 +2905,8 @@ MenuDoYPosition(interp, menuPtr, objPtr)
     }
 
     return TCL_OK;
-    
-error:
+
+  error:
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -2906,36 +2915,39 @@ error:
  *
  * GetIndexFromCoords --
  *
- *	Given a string of the form "@int", return the menu item corresponding
- *	to int.
+ *	Given a string of the form "@integer", return the menu item
+ *	corresponding to the provided y-coordinate in the menu window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If int is a valid number, *indexPtr will be the number of the menuentry
- *	that is the correct height. If int is invaled, *indexPtr will be
- *	unchanged. Returns appropriate Tcl error number.
+ *	If int is a valid number, *indexPtr will be the number of the
+ *	menuentry that is the correct height. If int is invalid, *indexPtr
+ *	will be unchanged. Returns appropriate Tcl error number.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If int is invalid, interp's result will set to NULL.
+ *	If int is invalid, interp's result will be set to NULL.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-GetIndexFromCoords(interp, menuPtr, string, indexPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* interp of menu */
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* the menu we are searching */
-    char *string;		/* The @string we are parsing */
-    int *indexPtr;		/* The index of the item that matches */
+GetIndexFromCoords(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter of menu. */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* The menu we are searching. */
+    char *string,		/* The @string we are parsing. */
+    int *indexPtr)		/* The index of the item that matches. */
 {
     int x, y, i;
     char *p, *end;
-    
+    int x2, borderwidth, max;
+
     TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr);
     p = string + 1;
     y = strtol(p, &end, 0);
     if (end == p) {
 	goto error;
     }
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, menuPtr->tkwin,
+	menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderwidth);
     if (*end == ',') {
 	x = y;
 	p = end + 1;
@@ -2944,27 +2956,36 @@ GetIndexFromCoords(interp, menuPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	    goto error;
 	}
     } else {
-	Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, menuPtr->tkwin, 
-		menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &x);
+	x = borderwidth;
     }
-    
+
+    *indexPtr = -1;
+
+    /* set the width of the final column to the remainder of the window 
+     * being aware of windows that may not be mapped yet.
+     */
+    max = Tk_IsMapped(menuPtr->tkwin) 
+      ? Tk_Width(menuPtr->tkwin) : Tk_ReqWidth(menuPtr->tkwin);
+    max -= borderwidth;
+
     for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
+	if (menuPtr->entries[i]->entryFlags & ENTRY_LAST_COLUMN) {
+	    x2 = max;
+	} else {
+	    x2 = menuPtr->entries[i]->x + menuPtr->entries[i]->width;
+	}
 	if ((x >= menuPtr->entries[i]->x) && (y >= menuPtr->entries[i]->y)
-		&& (x < (menuPtr->entries[i]->x + menuPtr->entries[i]->width))
+		&& (x < x2)
 		&& (y < (menuPtr->entries[i]->y
 		+ menuPtr->entries[i]->height))) {
+	    *indexPtr = i;
 	    break;
 	}
     }
-    if (i >= menuPtr->numEntries) {
-	/* i = menuPtr->numEntries - 1; */
-	i = -1;
-    }
-    *indexPtr = i;
     return TCL_OK;
 
-    error:
-    Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *) NULL, TCL_STATIC);
+  error:
+    Tcl_SetResult(interp, NULL, TCL_STATIC);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -2974,8 +2995,8 @@ GetIndexFromCoords(interp, menuPtr, string, indexPtr)
  * RecursivelyDeleteMenu --
  *
  *	Deletes a menu and any cascades underneath it. Used for deleting
- *	instances when a menu is no longer being used as a menubar,
- *	for instance.
+ *	instances when a menu is no longer being used as a menubar, for
+ *	instance.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2987,19 +3008,19 @@ GetIndexFromCoords(interp, menuPtr, string, indexPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-RecursivelyDeleteMenu(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menubar instance we are deleting */
+RecursivelyDeleteMenu(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)		/* The menubar instance we are deleting. */
 {
     int i;
     TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
-    
-    /* 
-     * It is not 100% clear that this preserve/release pair is
-     * required, but we have added them for safety in this
-     * very complex code.
+
+    /*
+     * It is not 100% clear that this preserve/release pair is required, but
+     * we have added them for safety in this very complex code.
      */
+
     Tcl_Preserve(menuPtr);
-    
+
     for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
     	mePtr = menuPtr->entries[i];
     	if ((mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY)
@@ -3011,7 +3032,7 @@ RecursivelyDeleteMenu(menuPtr)
     if (menuPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
 	Tk_DestroyWindow(menuPtr->tkwin);
     }
-    
+
     Tcl_Release(menuPtr);
 }
 
@@ -3020,8 +3041,7 @@ RecursivelyDeleteMenu(menuPtr)
  *
  * TkNewMenuName --
  *
- *	Makes a new unique name for a cloned menu. Will be a child
- *	of oldName.
+ *	Makes a new unique name for a cloned menu. Will be a child of oldName.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns a char * which has been allocated; caller must free.
@@ -3033,10 +3053,10 @@ RecursivelyDeleteMenu(menuPtr)
  */
 
 Tcl_Obj *
-TkNewMenuName(interp, parentPtr, menuPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interp the new name has to live in.*/
-    Tcl_Obj *parentPtr;		/* The prefix path of the new name. */
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are cloning. */
+TkNewMenuName(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interp the new name has to live in.*/
+    Tcl_Obj *parentPtr,		/* The prefix path of the new name. */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)		/* The menu we are cloning. */
 {
     Tcl_Obj *resultPtr = NULL;	/* Initialization needed only to prevent
 				 * compiler warning. */
@@ -3047,7 +3067,7 @@ TkNewMenuName(interp, parentPtr, menuPtr)
     Tcl_CmdInfo cmdInfo;
     Tcl_HashTable *nameTablePtr = NULL;
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) menuPtr->tkwin;
-    char *parentName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(parentPtr, NULL);
+    char *parentName = Tcl_GetString(parentPtr);
 
     if (winPtr->mainPtr != NULL) {
 	nameTablePtr = &(winPtr->mainPtr->nameTable);
@@ -3056,13 +3076,13 @@ TkNewMenuName(interp, parentPtr, menuPtr)
     doDot = parentName[strlen(parentName) - 1] != '.';
 
     childPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin), -1);
-    for (destString = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(childPtr, NULL);
+    for (destString = Tcl_GetString(childPtr);
     	    *destString != '\0'; destString++) {
     	if (*destString == '.') {
     	    *destString = '#';
     	}
     }
-    
+
     for (i = 0; ; i++) {
     	if (i == 0) {
 	    resultPtr = Tcl_DuplicateObj(parentPtr);
@@ -3083,7 +3103,7 @@ TkNewMenuName(interp, parentPtr, menuPtr)
 	    Tcl_AppendObjToObj(resultPtr, intPtr);
 	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(intPtr);
     	}
-	destString = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(resultPtr, NULL);
+	destString = Tcl_GetString(resultPtr);
     	if ((Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, destString, &cmdInfo) == 0)
 		&& ((nameTablePtr == NULL)
 		|| (Tcl_FindHashEntry(nameTablePtr, destString) == NULL))) {
@@ -3099,76 +3119,73 @@ TkNewMenuName(interp, parentPtr, menuPtr)
  *
  * TkSetWindowMenuBar --
  *
- *	Associates a menu with a window. Called by ConfigureFrame in
- *	in response to a "-menu .foo" configuration option for a top
- *	level.
+ *	Associates a menu with a window. Called by ConfigureFrame in in
+ *	response to a "-menu .foo" configuration option for a top level.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The old menu clones for the menubar are thrown away, and a
- *	handler is set up to allocate the new ones.
+ *	The old menu clones for the menubar are thrown away, and a handler is
+ *	set up to allocate the new ones.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 void
-TkSetWindowMenuBar(interp, tkwin, oldMenuName, menuName)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interpreter the toplevel lives in. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The toplevel window */
-    char *oldMenuName;		/* The name of the menubar previously set in
-    				 * this toplevel. NULL means no menu was
-				 * set previously. */
-    char *menuName;		/* The name of the new menubar that the
+TkSetWindowMenuBar(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interpreter the toplevel lives in. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The toplevel window. */
+    char *oldMenuName,		/* The name of the menubar previously set in
+    				 * this toplevel. NULL means no menu was set
+    				 * previously. */
+    char *menuName)		/* The name of the new menubar that the
 				 * toplevel needs to be set to. NULL means
 				 * that their is no menu now. */
 {
     TkMenuTopLevelList *topLevelListPtr, *prevTopLevelPtr;
     TkMenu *menuPtr;
     TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
-    
-    TkMenuInit();
 
     /*
-     * Destroy the menubar instances of the old menu. Take this window
-     * out of the old menu's top level reference list.
+     * Destroy the menubar instances of the old menu. Take this window out of
+     * the old menu's top level reference list.
      */
-    
-    if (oldMenuName != NULL) {
-        menuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferences(interp, oldMenuName);
-    	if (menuRefPtr != NULL) {
 
+    if (oldMenuName != NULL) {
+	menuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferences(interp, oldMenuName);
+	if (menuRefPtr != NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * Find the menubar instance that is to be removed. Destroy
-	     * it and all of the cascades underneath it.
+	     * Find the menubar instance that is to be removed. Destroy it and
+	     * all of the cascades underneath it.
 	     */
 
-	    if (menuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL) {    	    
-    	    	TkMenu *instancePtr;
-
-    	    	menuPtr = menuRefPtr->menuPtr;
-    	        	    
-    	    	for (instancePtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
-		        instancePtr != NULL; 
-    	    	    	instancePtr = instancePtr->nextInstancePtr) {
-    	    	    if (instancePtr->menuType == MENUBAR 
-    	    		    && instancePtr->parentTopLevelPtr == tkwin) {
-    	    	    	RecursivelyDeleteMenu(instancePtr);
-    	    	    	break;
-    	    	    }
-    	    	}
-    	    }
- 
- 	    /*
- 	     * Now we need to remove this toplevel from the list of toplevels
+	    if (menuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL) {
+		TkMenu *instancePtr;
+
+		menuPtr = menuRefPtr->menuPtr;
+
+		for (instancePtr = menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
+			instancePtr != NULL;
+			instancePtr = instancePtr->nextInstancePtr) {
+		    if (instancePtr->menuType == MENUBAR
+			    && instancePtr->parentTopLevelPtr == tkwin) {
+			RecursivelyDeleteMenu(instancePtr);
+			break;
+		    }
+		}
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * Now we need to remove this toplevel from the list of toplevels
 	     * that reference this menu.
- 	     */
- 
+	     */
+
 	    topLevelListPtr = menuRefPtr->topLevelListPtr;
 	    prevTopLevelPtr = NULL;
-	    
-            while ((topLevelListPtr != NULL) 
-		   && (topLevelListPtr->tkwin != tkwin)) {
+
+	    while ((topLevelListPtr != NULL)
+		    && (topLevelListPtr->tkwin != tkwin)) {
 		prevTopLevelPtr = topLevelListPtr;
 		topLevelListPtr = topLevelListPtr->nextPtr;
 	    }
@@ -3179,54 +3196,54 @@ TkSetWindowMenuBar(interp, tkwin, oldMenuName, menuName)
 	     */
 
 	    if (topLevelListPtr != NULL) {
-            	if (prevTopLevelPtr == NULL) {
+		if (prevTopLevelPtr == NULL) {
 		    menuRefPtr->topLevelListPtr =
 			    menuRefPtr->topLevelListPtr->nextPtr;
 		} else {
-            	    prevTopLevelPtr->nextPtr = topLevelListPtr->nextPtr;
-            	}
-            	ckfree((char *) topLevelListPtr);
-            	TkFreeMenuReferences(menuRefPtr);
-            }
-        }
+		    prevTopLevelPtr->nextPtr = topLevelListPtr->nextPtr;
+		}
+		ckfree((char *) topLevelListPtr);
+		TkFreeMenuReferences(menuRefPtr);
+	    }
+	}
     }
 
     /*
      * Now, add the clone references for the new menu.
      */
-    
+
     if (menuName != NULL && menuName[0] != 0) {
-    	TkMenu *menuBarPtr = NULL;
-
-	menuRefPtr = TkCreateMenuReferences(interp, menuName);    	
-    	
-    	menuPtr = menuRefPtr->menuPtr;
-    	if (menuPtr != NULL) {
-   	    Tcl_Obj *cloneMenuPtr;
-   	    TkMenuReferences *cloneMenuRefPtr;
+	TkMenu *menuBarPtr = NULL;
+
+	menuRefPtr = TkCreateMenuReferences(interp, menuName);
+
+	menuPtr = menuRefPtr->menuPtr;
+	if (menuPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *cloneMenuPtr;
+	    TkMenuReferences *cloneMenuRefPtr;
 	    Tcl_Obj *newObjv[4];
-	    Tcl_Obj *windowNamePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(tkwin), 
+	    Tcl_Obj *windowNamePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(tkwin),
 		    -1);
 	    Tcl_Obj *menubarPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj("menubar", -1);
-    	
-            /*
-             * Clone the menu and all of the cascades underneath it.
-             */
+
+	    /*
+	     * Clone the menu and all of the cascades underneath it.
+	     */
 
 	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(windowNamePtr);
-    	    cloneMenuPtr = TkNewMenuName(interp, windowNamePtr,
-    	    	    menuPtr);
+	    cloneMenuPtr = TkNewMenuName(interp, windowNamePtr,
+		    menuPtr);
 	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(cloneMenuPtr);
 	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(menubarPtr);
-            CloneMenu(menuPtr, cloneMenuPtr, menubarPtr);
-	    
-            cloneMenuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferencesObj(interp, cloneMenuPtr);
-            if ((cloneMenuRefPtr != NULL)
+	    CloneMenu(menuPtr, cloneMenuPtr, menubarPtr);
+
+	    cloneMenuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferencesObj(interp, cloneMenuPtr);
+	    if ((cloneMenuRefPtr != NULL)
 		    && (cloneMenuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL)) {
 		Tcl_Obj *cursorPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj("-cursor", -1);
 		Tcl_Obj *nullPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
-            	cloneMenuRefPtr->menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr = tkwin;
-            	menuBarPtr = cloneMenuRefPtr->menuPtr;
+		cloneMenuRefPtr->menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr = tkwin;
+		menuBarPtr = cloneMenuRefPtr->menuPtr;
 		newObjv[0] = cursorPtr;
 		newObjv[1] = nullPtr;
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(cursorPtr);
@@ -3235,27 +3252,26 @@ TkSetWindowMenuBar(interp, tkwin, oldMenuName, menuName)
 			2, newObjv);
 		Tcl_DecrRefCount(cursorPtr);
 		Tcl_DecrRefCount(nullPtr);
-            }
+	    }
 
 	    TkpSetWindowMenuBar(tkwin, menuBarPtr);
 	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(cloneMenuPtr);
 	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(menubarPtr);
 	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(windowNamePtr);
-        } else {
-    	    TkpSetWindowMenuBar(tkwin, NULL);
+	} else {
+	    TkpSetWindowMenuBar(tkwin, NULL);
 	}
 
-        
-        /*
-         * Add this window to the menu's list of windows that refer
-         * to this menu.
-         */
+	/*
+	 * Add this window to the menu's list of windows that refer to this
+	 * menu.
+	 */
 
-        topLevelListPtr = (TkMenuTopLevelList *)
+	topLevelListPtr = (TkMenuTopLevelList *)
 		ckalloc(sizeof(TkMenuTopLevelList));
-        topLevelListPtr->tkwin = tkwin;
-        topLevelListPtr->nextPtr = menuRefPtr->topLevelListPtr;
-        menuRefPtr->topLevelListPtr = topLevelListPtr;
+	topLevelListPtr->tkwin = tkwin;
+	topLevelListPtr->nextPtr = menuRefPtr->topLevelListPtr;
+	menuRefPtr->topLevelListPtr = topLevelListPtr;
     } else {
 	TkpSetWindowMenuBar(tkwin, NULL);
     }
@@ -3267,8 +3283,8 @@ TkSetWindowMenuBar(interp, tkwin, oldMenuName, menuName)
  *
  * DestroyMenuHashTable --
  *
- *	Called when an interp is deleted and a menu hash table has
- *	been set in it.
+ *	Called when an interp is deleted and a menu hash table has been set in
+ *	it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -3280,9 +3296,9 @@ TkSetWindowMenuBar(interp, tkwin, oldMenuName, menuName)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyMenuHashTable(clientData, interp)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* The menu hash table we are destroying */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interpreter we are destroying */
+DestroyMenuHashTable(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* The menu hash table we are destroying. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* The interpreter we are destroying. */
 {
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable((Tcl_HashTable *) clientData);
     ckfree((char *) clientData);
@@ -3293,8 +3309,8 @@ DestroyMenuHashTable(clientData, interp)
  *
  * TkGetMenuHashTable --
  *
- *	For a given interp, give back the menu hash table that goes with
- *	it. If the hash table does not exist, it is created.
+ *	For a given interp, give back the menu hash table that goes with it.
+ *	If the hash table does not exist, it is created.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns a hash table pointer.
@@ -3307,13 +3323,13 @@ DestroyMenuHashTable(clientData, interp)
  */
 
 Tcl_HashTable *
-TkGetMenuHashTable(interp)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interp we need the hash table in.*/
+TkGetMenuHashTable(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* The interp we need the hash table in.*/
 {
     Tcl_HashTable *menuTablePtr;
 
-    menuTablePtr = (Tcl_HashTable *) Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, MENU_HASH_KEY,
-	    NULL);
+    menuTablePtr = (Tcl_HashTable *)
+	    Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, MENU_HASH_KEY, NULL);
     if (menuTablePtr == NULL) {
 	menuTablePtr = (Tcl_HashTable *) ckalloc(sizeof(Tcl_HashTable));
 	Tcl_InitHashTable(menuTablePtr, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
@@ -3328,25 +3344,26 @@ TkGetMenuHashTable(interp)
  *
  * TkCreateMenuReferences --
  *
- *	Given a pathname, gives back a pointer to a TkMenuReferences structure.
- *	If a reference is not already in the hash table, one is created.
+ *	Given a pathname, gives back a pointer to a TkMenuReferences
+ *	structure. If a reference is not already in the hash table, one is
+ *	created.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a pointer to a menu reference structure. Should not
- *	be freed by calller; when a field of the reference is cleared,
+ *	Returns a pointer to a menu reference structure. Should not be freed
+ *	by calller; when a field of the reference is cleared,
  *	TkFreeMenuReferences should be called.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new hash table entry is created if there were no references
- *	to the menu originally.
+ *	A new hash table entry is created if there were no references to the
+ *	menu originally.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 TkMenuReferences *
-TkCreateMenuReferences(interp, pathName)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    char *pathName;		/* The path of the menu widget */
+TkCreateMenuReferences(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    char *pathName)		/* The path of the menu widget. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;
     TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
@@ -3376,8 +3393,8 @@ TkCreateMenuReferences(interp, pathName)
  *	structure.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a pointer to a menu reference structure. Should not
- *	be freed by calller; when a field of the reference is cleared,
+ *	Returns a pointer to a menu reference structure. Should not be freed
+ *	by calller; when a field of the reference is cleared,
  *	TkFreeMenuReferences should be called. Returns NULL if no reference
  *	with this pathname exists.
  *
@@ -3388,9 +3405,9 @@ TkCreateMenuReferences(interp, pathName)
  */
 
 TkMenuReferences *
-TkFindMenuReferences(interp, pathName)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interp the menu is living in. */
-    char *pathName;		/* The path of the menu widget */
+TkFindMenuReferences(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interp the menu is living in. */
+    char *pathName)		/* The path of the menu widget. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;
     TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr = NULL;
@@ -3413,8 +3430,8 @@ TkFindMenuReferences(interp, pathName)
  *	structure.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a pointer to a menu reference structure. Should not
- *	be freed by calller; when a field of the reference is cleared,
+ *	Returns a pointer to a menu reference structure. Should not be freed
+ *	by calller; when a field of the reference is cleared,
  *	TkFreeMenuReferences should be called. Returns NULL if no reference
  *	with this pathname exists.
  *
@@ -3425,11 +3442,11 @@ TkFindMenuReferences(interp, pathName)
  */
 
 TkMenuReferences *
-TkFindMenuReferencesObj(interp, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interp the menu is living in. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The path of the menu widget */
+TkFindMenuReferencesObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interp the menu is living in. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The path of the menu widget. */
 {
-    char *pathName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, NULL);
+    char *pathName = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
     return TkFindMenuReferences(interp, pathName);
 }
 
@@ -3438,26 +3455,25 @@ TkFindMenuReferencesObj(interp, objPtr)
  *
  * TkFreeMenuReferences --
  *
- *	This is called after one of the fields in a menu reference
- *	is cleared. It cleans up the ref if it is now empty.
+ *	This is called after one of the fields in a menu reference is cleared.
+ *	It cleans up the ref if it is now empty.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns 1 if the references structure was freed, and 0 
- *	otherwise.
+ *	Returns 1 if the references structure was freed, and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If this is the last field to be cleared, the menu ref is
- *	taken out of the hash table.
+ *	If this is the last field to be cleared, the menu ref is taken out of
+ *	the hash table.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-TkFreeMenuReferences(menuRefPtr)
-    TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;		/* The menu reference to
-						 * free */
+TkFreeMenuReferences(
+    TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr)
+				/* The menu reference to free. */
 {
-    if ((menuRefPtr->menuPtr == NULL) 
+    if ((menuRefPtr->menuPtr == NULL)
     	    && (menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr == NULL)
     	    && (menuRefPtr->topLevelListPtr == NULL)) {
     	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(menuRefPtr->hashEntryPtr);
@@ -3472,8 +3488,8 @@ TkFreeMenuReferences(menuRefPtr)
  *
  * DeleteMenuCloneEntries --
  *
- *	For every clone in this clone chain, delete the menu entries
- *	given by the parameters.
+ *	For every clone in this clone chain, delete the menu entries given by
+ *	the parameters.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -3485,13 +3501,12 @@ TkFreeMenuReferences(menuRefPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteMenuCloneEntries(menuPtr, first, last)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;		    /* the menu the command was issued with */
-    int	first;			    /* the zero-based first entry in the set
-				     * of entries to delete. */
-    int last;			    /* the zero-based last entry */
+DeleteMenuCloneEntries(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* The menu the command was issued with. */
+    int	first,			/* The zero-based first entry in the set of
+				 * entries to delete. */
+    int last)			/* The zero-based last entry. */
 {
-
     TkMenu *menuListPtr;
     int numDeleted, i, j;
 
@@ -3506,13 +3521,13 @@ DeleteMenuCloneEntries(menuPtr, first, last)
 	    j = i - numDeleted;
 	    menuListPtr->entries[j] = menuListPtr->entries[i];
 	    menuListPtr->entries[j]->index = j;
-	  }
+	}
 	menuListPtr->numEntries -= numDeleted;
 	if (menuListPtr->numEntries == 0) {
 	    ckfree((char *) menuListPtr->entries);
 	    menuListPtr->entries = NULL;
 	}
-	if ((menuListPtr->active >= first) 
+	if ((menuListPtr->active >= first)
 		&& (menuListPtr->active <= last)) {
 	    menuListPtr->active = -1;
 	} else if (menuListPtr->active > last) {
@@ -3522,28 +3537,29 @@ DeleteMenuCloneEntries(menuPtr, first, last)
     }
 }
 
-/* 
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------- 
- * 
- * TkMenuCleanup -- 
- * 
- *      Resets menusInitialized to allow Tk to be finalized and reused 
- *      without the DLL being unloaded. 
- * 
- * Results: 
- *      None. 
- * 
- * Side effects: 
- *      None. 
- * 
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------- 
- */ 
-
-static void 
-TkMenuCleanup(ClientData unused) 
-{ 
-    menusInitialized = 0; 
-} 
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkMenuCleanup --
+ *
+ *	Resets menusInitialized to allow Tk to be finalized and reused without
+ *	the DLL being unloaded.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+TkMenuCleanup(
+    ClientData unused)
+{
+    menusInitialized = 0;
+}
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -3563,21 +3579,23 @@ TkMenuCleanup(ClientData unused)
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuInit()
+TkMenuInit(void)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
 	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
-    
+
     if (!menusInitialized) {
 	Tcl_MutexLock(&menuMutex);
 	if (!menusInitialized) {
 	    TkpMenuInit();
 	    menusInitialized = 1;
 	}
-	/* 
-	 * Make sure we cleanup on finalize. 
-	 */ 
-	TkCreateExitHandler(TkMenuCleanup, NULL); 
+
+	/*
+	 * Make sure we cleanup on finalize.
+	 */
+
+	TkCreateExitHandler((Tcl_ExitProc *) TkMenuCleanup, NULL);
 	Tcl_MutexUnlock(&menuMutex);
     }
     if (!tsdPtr->menusInitialized) {
@@ -3585,3 +3603,11 @@ TkMenuInit()
 	tsdPtr->menusInitialized = 1;
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkMenu.h b/generic/tkMenu.h
index a428d4c..e8470ca 100644
--- a/generic/tkMenu.h
+++ b/generic/tkMenu.h
@@ -1,12 +1,13 @@
 /*
  * tkMenu.h --
  *
- *	Declarations shared among all of the files that implement menu widgets.
+ *	Declarations shared among all of the files that implement menu
+ *	widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1998 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKMENU
@@ -37,26 +38,41 @@ typedef struct TkMenuPlatformData_ *TkMenuPlatformData;
 typedef struct TkMenuPlatformEntryData_ *TkMenuPlatformEntryData;
 
 /*
- * Legal values for the "compound" field of TkMenuEntry and TkMenuButton records.
+ * Legal values for the "compound" field of TkMenuEntry and TkMenuButton
+ * records.
  */
 
 enum compound {
     COMPOUND_BOTTOM, COMPOUND_CENTER, COMPOUND_LEFT, COMPOUND_NONE,
-	COMPOUND_RIGHT, COMPOUND_TOP
+    COMPOUND_RIGHT, COMPOUND_TOP
 };
 
 /*
- * One of the following data structures is kept for each entry of each
- * menu managed by this file:
+ * Additional menu entry drawing parameters for Windows platform.
+ * DRAW_MENU_ENTRY_ARROW makes TkpDrawMenuEntry draw the arrow
+ * itself when cascade entry is disabled.
+ * DRAW_MENU_ENTRY_NOUNDERLINE forbids underline when ODS_NOACCEL
+ * is set, thus obeying the system-wide Windows UI setting.
+ */
+
+enum drawingParameters {
+    DRAW_MENU_ENTRY_ARROW = (1<<0),
+    DRAW_MENU_ENTRY_NOUNDERLINE = (1<<1)
+};
+
+/*
+ * One of the following data structures is kept for each entry of each menu
+ * managed by this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct TkMenuEntry {
-    int type;			/* Type of menu entry;  see below for
-				 * valid types. */
-    struct TkMenu *menuPtr;	/* Menu with which this entry is associated. */
+    int type;			/* Type of menu entry; see below for valid
+				 * types. */
+    struct TkMenu *menuPtr;	/* Menu with which this entry is
+				 * associated. */
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Option table for this menu entry. */
-    Tcl_Obj *labelPtr;		/* Main text label displayed in entry (NULL
-				 * if no label). */
+    Tcl_Obj *labelPtr;		/* Main text label displayed in entry (NULL if
+				 * no label). */
     int labelLength;		/* Number of non-NULL characters in label. */
     int state;			/* State of button for display purposes:
 				 * normal, active, or disabled. */
@@ -66,19 +82,18 @@ typedef struct TkMenuEntry {
     Tcl_Obj *underlinePtr;	/* Index of character to underline. */
     Tcl_Obj *bitmapPtr;		/* Bitmap to display in menu entry, or None.
 				 * If not None then label is ignored. */
-    Tcl_Obj *imagePtr;		/* Name of image to display, or
-				 * NULL.  If non-NULL, bitmap, text, and
-				 * textVarName are ignored. */
+    Tcl_Obj *imagePtr;		/* Name of image to display, or NULL. If not
+				 * NULL, bitmap, text, and textVarName are
+				 * ignored. */
     Tk_Image image;		/* Image to display in menu entry, or NULL if
 				 * none. */
-    Tcl_Obj *selectImagePtr;	/* Name of image to display when selected, or 
+    Tcl_Obj *selectImagePtr;	/* Name of image to display when selected, or
 				 * NULL. */
-    Tk_Image selectImage;	/* Image to display in entry when selected,
-				 * or NULL if none.  Ignored if image is
-				 * NULL. */
-    Tcl_Obj *accelPtr;		/* Accelerator string displayed at right
-				 * of menu entry.  NULL means no such
-				 * accelerator.  Malloc'ed. */
+    Tk_Image selectImage;	/* Image to display in entry when selected, or
+				 * NULL if none. Ignored if image is NULL. */
+    Tcl_Obj *accelPtr;		/* Accelerator string displayed at right of
+				 * menu entry. NULL means no such accelerator.
+				 * Malloc'ed. */
     int accelLength;		/* Number of non-NULL characters in
 				 * accelerator. */
     int indicatorOn;		/* True means draw indicator, false means
@@ -89,42 +104,43 @@ typedef struct TkMenuEntry {
      */
 
     Tcl_Obj *borderPtr;		/* Structure used to draw background for
-				 * entry.  NULL means use overall border
-				 * for menu. */
-    Tcl_Obj *fgPtr;		/* Foreground color to use for entry.  NULL
+				 * entry. NULL means use overall border for
+				 * menu. */
+    Tcl_Obj *fgPtr;		/* Foreground color to use for entry. NULL
 				 * means use foreground color from menu. */
     Tcl_Obj *activeBorderPtr;	/* Used to draw background and border when
-				 * element is active.  NULL means use
+				 * element is active. NULL means use
 				 * activeBorder from menu. */
     Tcl_Obj *activeFgPtr;	/* Foreground color to use when entry is
-				 * active.  NULL means use active foreground
+				 * active. NULL means use active foreground
 				 * from menu. */
     Tcl_Obj *indicatorFgPtr;	/* Color for indicators in radio and check
-				 * button entries.  NULL means use indicatorFg
+				 * button entries. NULL means use indicatorFg
 				 * GC from menu. */
-    Tcl_Obj *fontPtr;		/* Text font for menu entries.  NULL means
-				 * use overall font for menu. */
-    int columnBreak;		/* If this is 0, this item appears below
-				 * the item in front of it. If this is
-				 * 1, this item starts a new column. This
-				 * field is always 0 for tearoff and separator
+    Tcl_Obj *fontPtr;		/* Text font for menu entries. NULL means use
+				 * overall font for menu. */
+    int columnBreak;		/* If this is 0, this item appears below the
+				 * item in front of it. If this is 1, this
+				 * item starts a new column. This field is
+				 * always 0 for tearoff and separator
 				 * entries. */
     int hideMargin;		/* If this is 0, then the item has enough
     				 * margin to accomodate a standard check mark
     				 * and a default right margin. If this is 1,
-    				 * then the item has no such margins.  and
+    				 * then the item has no such margins, and
     				 * checkbuttons and radiobuttons with this set
-    				 * will have a rectangle drawn in the indicator
-    				 * around the item if the item is checked. This
-    				 * is useful for palette menus.  This field is
-    				 * ignored for separators and tearoffs. */
+    				 * will have a rectangle drawn in the
+    				 * indicator around the item if the item is
+    				 * checked. This is useful for palette menus.
+    				 * This field is ignored for separators and
+    				 * tearoffs. */
     int indicatorSpace;		/* The width of the indicator space for this
 				 * entry. */
     int labelWidth;		/* Number of pixels to allow for displaying
 				 * labels in menu entries. */
-    int compound;		/* Value of -compound option; specifies whether
-				 * the entry should show both an image and
-				 * text, and, if so, how. */
+    int compound;		/* Value of -compound option; specifies
+				 * whether the entry should show both an image
+				 * and text, and, if so, how. */
 
     /*
      * Information used to implement this entry's action:
@@ -134,78 +150,76 @@ typedef struct TkMenuEntry {
 				 * Malloc'ed. */
     Tcl_Obj *namePtr;		/* Name of variable (for check buttons and
 				 * radio buttons) or menu (for cascade
-				 * entries).  Malloc'ed.*/
+				 * entries). Malloc'ed. */
     Tcl_Obj *onValuePtr;	/* Value to store in variable when selected
 				 * (only for radio and check buttons).
 				 * Malloc'ed. */
     Tcl_Obj *offValuePtr;	/* Value to store in variable when not
 				 * selected (only for check buttons).
 				 * Malloc'ed. */
-    
+
     /*
      * Information used for drawing this menu entry.
      */
-     
+
     int width;			/* Number of pixels occupied by entry in
-				 * horizontal dimension. Not used except
-				 * in menubars. The width of norma menus
-				 * is dependent on the rest of the menu. */
-    int x;			/* X-coordinate of leftmost pixel in entry */
+				 * horizontal dimension. Not used except in
+				 * menubars. The width of norma menus is
+				 * dependent on the rest of the menu. */
+    int x;			/* X-coordinate of leftmost pixel in entry. */
     int height;			/* Number of pixels occupied by entry in
-				 * vertical dimension, including raised
-				 * border drawn around entry when active. */
+				 * vertical dimension, including raised border
+				 * drawn around entry when active. */
     int y;			/* Y-coordinate of topmost pixel in entry. */
-    GC textGC;			/* GC for drawing text in entry.  NULL means
+    GC textGC;			/* GC for drawing text in entry. NULL means
 				 * use overall textGC for menu. */
     GC activeGC;		/* GC for drawing text in entry when active.
 				 * NULL means use overall activeGC for
 				 * menu. */
     GC disabledGC;		/* Used to produce disabled effect for entry.
-				 * NULL means use overall disabledGC from
-				 * menu structure.  See comments for
-				 * disabledFg in menu structure for more
-				 * information. */
-    GC indicatorGC;		/* For drawing indicators.  None means use
-				 * GC from menu. */
+				 * NULL means use overall disabledGC from menu
+				 * structure. See comments for disabledFg in
+				 * menu structure for more information. */
+    GC indicatorGC;		/* For drawing indicators. None means use GC
+				 * from menu. */
 
     /*
      * Miscellaneous fields.
      */
- 
-    int entryFlags;		/* Various flags.  See below for
-				   definitions. */
-    int index;			/* Need to know which index we are. This
-    				 * is zero-based. This is the top-left entry
-    				 * of the menu. */
-				 
+
+    int entryFlags;		/* Various flags. See below for
+				 * definitions. */
+    int index;			/* Need to know which index we are. This is
+    				 * zero-based. This is the top-left entry of
+    				 * the menu. */
+
     /*
      * Bookeeping for master menus and cascade menus.
      */
-     
+
     struct TkMenuReferences *childMenuRefPtr;
-    				/* A pointer to the hash table entry for
-    				 * the child menu. Stored here when the menu
-    				 * entry is configured so that a hash lookup
-    				 * is not necessary later.*/
+    				/* A pointer to the hash table entry for the
+    				 * child menu. Stored here when the menu entry
+    				 * is configured so that a hash lookup is not
+    				 * necessary later.*/
     struct TkMenuEntry *nextCascadePtr;
     				/* The next cascade entry that is a parent of
-    				 * this entry's child cascade menu. NULL
-    				 * end of list, this is not a cascade entry,
-    				 * or the menu that this entry point to
-    				 * does not yet exist. */
+    				 * this entry's child cascade menu. NULL end
+    				 * of list, this is not a cascade entry, or
+    				 * the menu that this entry point to does not
+    				 * yet exist. */
     TkMenuPlatformEntryData platformEntryData;
     				/* The data for the specific type of menu.
-				 * Depends on platform and menu type what
-  				 * kind of options are in this structure.
-  				 */
+				 * Depends on platform and menu type what kind
+				 * of options are in this structure. */
 } TkMenuEntry;
 
 /*
  * Flag values defined for menu entries:
  *
- * ENTRY_SELECTED:		Non-zero means this is a radio or check
- *				button and that it should be drawn in
- *				the "selected" state.
+ * ENTRY_SELECTED:		Non-zero means this is a radio or check button
+ *				and that it should be drawn in the "selected"
+ *				state.
  * ENTRY_NEEDS_REDISPLAY:	Non-zero means the entry should be redisplayed.
  * ENTRY_LAST_COLUMN:		Used by the drawing code. If the entry is in
  *				the last column, the space to its right needs
@@ -238,44 +252,43 @@ typedef struct TkMenuEntry {
  * Menu states
  */
 
-EXTERN CONST char *tkMenuStateStrings[];
+MODULE_SCOPE const char *tkMenuStateStrings[];
 
 #define ENTRY_ACTIVE 0
 #define ENTRY_NORMAL 1
 #define ENTRY_DISABLED 2
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each
- * menu widget:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each menu widget:
  */
 
 typedef struct TkMenu {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the pane.  NULL
-				 * means that the window has been destroyed
-				 * but the data structures haven't yet been
-				 * cleaned up.*/
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget.  Needed, among
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the pane. NULL means
+				 * that the window has been destroyed but the
+				 * data structures haven't yet been cleaned
+				 * up. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget. Needed, among
 				 * other things, so that resources can be
 				 * freed up even after tkwin has gone away. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with menu. */
     Tcl_Command widgetCmd;	/* Token for menu's widget command. */
-    TkMenuEntry **entries;	/* Array of pointers to all the entries
-				 * in the menu.  NULL means no entries. */
+    TkMenuEntry **entries;	/* Array of pointers to all the entries in the
+				 * menu. NULL means no entries. */
     int numEntries;		/* Number of elements in entries. */
-    int active;			/* Index of active entry.  -1 means
-				 * nothing active. */
-    int menuType;		/* MASTER_MENU, TEAROFF_MENU, or MENUBAR.
-    				 * See below for definitions. */
-    Tcl_Obj *menuTypePtr;	/* Used to control whether created tkwin
-				 * is a toplevel or not. "normal", "menubar",
-				 * or "toplevel" */
+    int active;			/* Index of active entry. -1 means nothing
+				 * active. */
+    int menuType;		/* MASTER_MENU, TEAROFF_MENU, or MENUBAR. See
+    				 * below for definitions. */
+    Tcl_Obj *menuTypePtr;	/* Used to control whether created tkwin is a
+				 * toplevel or not. "normal", "menubar", or
+				 * "toplevel" */
 
     /*
      * Information used when displaying widget:
      */
 
-    Tcl_Obj *borderPtr;		/* Structure used to draw 3-D
-				 * border and background for menu. */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderPtr;		/* Structure used to draw 3-D border and
+				 * background for menu. */
     Tcl_Obj *borderWidthPtr;	/* Width of border around whole menu. */
     Tcl_Obj *activeBorderPtr;	/* Used to draw background and border for
 				 * active element (if any). */
@@ -284,18 +297,17 @@ typedef struct TkMenu {
     Tcl_Obj *reliefPtr;		/* 3-d effect: TK_RELIEF_RAISED, etc. */
     Tcl_Obj *fontPtr;		/* Text font for menu entries. */
     Tcl_Obj *fgPtr;		/* Foreground color for entries. */
-    Tcl_Obj *disabledFgPtr;	/* Foreground color when disabled.  NULL
-				 * means use normalFg with a 50% stipple
-				 * instead. */
+    Tcl_Obj *disabledFgPtr;	/* Foreground color when disabled. NULL means
+				 * use normalFg with a 50% stipple instead. */
     Tcl_Obj *activeFgPtr;	/* Foreground color for active entry. */
     Tcl_Obj *indicatorFgPtr;	/* Color for indicators in radio and check
 				 * button entries. */
-    Pixmap gray;		/* Bitmap for drawing disabled entries in
-				 * a stippled fashion.  None means not
-				 * allocated yet. */
-    GC textGC;			/* GC for drawing text and other features
-				 * of menu entries. */
-    GC disabledGC;		/* Used to produce disabled effect.  If
+    Pixmap gray;		/* Bitmap for drawing disabled entries in a
+				 * stippled fashion. None means not allocated
+				 * yet. */
+    GC textGC;			/* GC for drawing text and other features of
+				 * menu entries. */
+    GC disabledGC;		/* Used to produce disabled effect. If
 				 * disabledFg isn't NULL, this GC is used to
 				 * draw text and icons for disabled entries.
 				 * Otherwise text and icons are drawn with
@@ -303,52 +315,51 @@ typedef struct TkMenu {
 				 * background across them. */
     GC activeGC;		/* GC for drawing active entry. */
     GC indicatorGC;		/* For drawing indicators. */
-    GC disabledImageGC;		/* Used for drawing disabled images. They
-				 * have to be stippled. This is created
-				 * when the image is about to be drawn the
-				 * first time. */
+    GC disabledImageGC;		/* Used for drawing disabled images. They have
+				 * to be stippled. This is created when the
+				 * image is about to be drawn the first
+				 * time. */
 
     /*
      * Information about geometry of menu.
      */
-    
-    int totalWidth;		/* Width of entire menu */
-    int totalHeight;		/* Height of entire menu */
-   
+
+    int totalWidth;		/* Width of entire menu. */
+    int totalHeight;		/* Height of entire menu. */
+
     /*
      * Miscellaneous information:
      */
 
     int tearoff;		/* 1 means this menu can be torn off. On some
-    				 * platforms, the user can drag an outline
-    				 * of the menu by just dragging outside of
-    				 * the menu, and the tearoff is created where
-    				 * the mouse is released. On others, an
-				 * indicator (such as a dashed stripe) is
-				 * drawn, and when the menu is selected, the
-				 * tearoff is created. */
+    				 * platforms, the user can drag an outline of
+    				 * the menu by just dragging outside of the
+    				 * menu, and the tearoff is created where the
+    				 * mouse is released. On others, an indicator
+    				 * (such as a dashed stripe) is drawn, and
+    				 * when the menu is selected, the tearoff is
+    				 * created. */
     Tcl_Obj *titlePtr;		/* The title to use when this menu is torn
-    				 * off. If this is NULL, a default scheme
-    				 * will be used to generate a title for
-    				 * tearoff. */
-    Tcl_Obj *tearoffCommandPtr;	/* If non-NULL, points to a command to
-				 * run whenever the menu is torn-off. */
-    Tcl_Obj *takeFocusPtr;	/* Value of -takefocus option;  not used in
-				 * the C code, but used by keyboard traversal
-				 * scripts.  Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
+    				 * off. If this is NULL, a default scheme will
+    				 * be used to generate a title for tearoff. */
+    Tcl_Obj *tearoffCommandPtr;	/* If non-NULL, points to a command to run
+				 * whenever the menu is torn-off. */
+    Tcl_Obj *takeFocusPtr;	/* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
+				 * C code, but used by keyboard traversal
+				 * scripts. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
     Tcl_Obj *cursorPtr;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
     Tcl_Obj *postCommandPtr;	/* Used to detect cycles in cascade hierarchy
-    				 * trees when preprocessing postcommands
-    				 * on some platforms. See PostMenu for
-    				 * more details. */
+    				 * trees when preprocessing postcommands on
+    				 * some platforms. See PostMenu for more
+    				 * details. */
     int postCommandGeneration;	/* Need to do pre-invocation post command
-				 * traversal */
+				 * traversal. */
     int menuFlags;		/* Flags for use by X; see below for
-				   definition */
+				 * definition. */
     TkMenuEntry *postedCascade;	/* Points to menu entry for cascaded submenu
 				 * that is currently posted or NULL if no
 				 * submenu posted. */
-    struct TkMenu *nextInstancePtr;	
+    struct TkMenu *nextInstancePtr;
     				/* The next instance of this menu in the
     				 * chain. */
     struct TkMenu *masterMenuPtr;
@@ -356,29 +367,26 @@ typedef struct TkMenu {
     				 * clone chain. Points back to this structure
     				 * if this menu is a master menu. */
     struct TkMenuOptionTables *optionTablesPtr;
-				/* A pointer to the collection of option tables
-				 * that work with menus and menu entries. */
+				/* A pointer to the collection of option
+				 * tables that work with menus and menu
+				 * entries. */
     Tk_Window parentTopLevelPtr;/* If this menu is a menubar, this is the
-    				 * toplevel that owns the menu. Only applicable
-    				 * for menubar clones.
-    				 */
-    struct TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;	
+    				 * toplevel that owns the menu. Only
+    				 * applicable for menubar clones. */
+    struct TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
     				/* Each menu is hashed into a table with the
-    				 * name of the menu's window as the key.
-    				 * The information in this hash table includes
-    				 * a pointer to the menu (so that cascades
-    				 * can find this menu), a pointer to the
-    				 * list of toplevel widgets that have this
-    				 * menu as its menubar, and a list of menu
-    				 * entries that have this menu specified
-    				 * as a cascade. */    
+    				 * name of the menu's window as the key. The
+    				 * information in this hash table includes a
+    				 * pointer to the menu (so that cascades can
+    				 * find this menu), a pointer to the list of
+    				 * toplevel widgets that have this menu as its
+    				 * menubar, and a list of menu entries that
+    				 * have this menu specified as a cascade. */
     TkMenuPlatformData platformData;
 				/* The data for the specific type of menu.
-  				 * Depends on platform and menu type what
-  				 * kind of options are in this structure.
-  				 */
-    Tk_OptionSpec *extensionPtr;
-				/* Needed by the configuration package for
+				 * Depends on platform and menu type what kind
+				 * of options are in this structure. */
+    Tk_OptionSpec *extensionPtr;/* Needed by the configuration package for
 				 * this widget to be extended. */
     Tk_SavedOptions *errorStructPtr;
 				/* We actually have to allocate these because
@@ -388,95 +396,94 @@ typedef struct TkMenu {
 
 /*
  * When the toplevel configure -menu command is executed, the menu may not
- * exist yet. We need to keep a linked list of windows that reference
- * a particular menu.
+ * exist yet. We need to keep a linked list of windows that reference a
+ * particular menu.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkMenuTopLevelList {
     struct TkMenuTopLevelList *nextPtr;
-    				/* The next window in the list */
+    				/* The next window in the list. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window that has this menu as its
 				 * menubar. */
 } TkMenuTopLevelList;
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used to keep track of things which
- * reference a menu. It is created when:
+ * The following structure is used to keep track of things which reference a
+ * menu. It is created when:
  * - a menu is created.
  * - a cascade entry is added to a menu with a non-null name
- * - the "-menu" configuration option is used on a toplevel widget
- * with a non-null parameter.
+ * - the "-menu" configuration option is used on a toplevel widget with a
+ *   non-null parameter.
  *
- * One of these three fields must be non-NULL, but any of the fields may
- * be NULL. This structure makes it easy to determine whether or not
- * anything like recalculating platform data or geometry is necessary
- * when one of the three actions above is performed.
+ * One of these three fields must be non-NULL, but any of the fields may be
+ * NULL. This structure makes it easy to determine whether or not anything
+ * like recalculating platform data or geometry is necessary when one of the
+ * three actions above is performed.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkMenuReferences {
-    struct TkMenu *menuPtr;	/* The menu data structure. This is NULL
-    				 * if the menu does not exist. */
+    struct TkMenu *menuPtr;	/* The menu data structure. This is NULL if
+    				 * the menu does not exist. */
     TkMenuTopLevelList *topLevelListPtr;
-    				/* First in the list of all toplevels that 
-    				 * have this menu as its menubar. NULL if no 
+    				/* First in the list of all toplevels that
+    				 * have this menu as its menubar. NULL if no
     				 * toplevel widgets have this menu as its
     				 * menubar. */
-    TkMenuEntry *parentEntryPtr;/* First in the list of all cascade menu 
+    TkMenuEntry *parentEntryPtr;/* First in the list of all cascade menu
     				 * entries that have this menu as their child.
     				 * NULL means no cascade entries. */
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;/* This is needed because the pathname of the
     				 * window (which is what we hash on) may not
-    				 * be around when we are deleting.
-    				 */
+    				 * be around when we are deleting. */
 } TkMenuReferences;
 
 /*
- * This structure contains all of the option tables that are needed
- * by menus.
+ * This structure contains all of the option tables that are needed by menus.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkMenuOptionTables {
-    Tk_OptionTable menuOptionTable;	/* The option table for menus. */
-    Tk_OptionTable entryOptionTables[6];/* The tables for menu entries. */
+    Tk_OptionTable menuOptionTable;
+				/* The option table for menus. */
+    Tk_OptionTable entryOptionTables[6];
+				/* The tables for menu entries. */
 } TkMenuOptionTables;
 
 /*
  * Flag bits for menus:
  *
- * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler
- *				has already been queued to redraw
- *				this window.
+ * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler has
+ *				already been queued to redraw this window.
  * RESIZE_PENDING:		Non-zero means a call to ComputeMenuGeometry
  *				has already been scheduled.
- * MENU_DELETION_PENDING	Non-zero means that we are currently destroying
- *				this menu's internal structures. This is useful 
- *				when we are in the middle of cleaning
- *				this master menu's chain of menus up when
- *				TkDestroyMenu was called again on this
+ * MENU_DELETION_PENDING	Non-zero means that we are currently
+ *				destroying this menu's internal structures.
+ *				This is useful when we are in the middle of
+ *				cleaning this master menu's chain of menus up
+ *				when TkDestroyMenu was called again on this
  *				menu (via a destroy binding or somesuch).
- * MENU_WIN_DESTRUCTION_PENDING Non-zero means we are in the middle of 
- *                              destroying this menu's Tk_Window.
+ * MENU_WIN_DESTRUCTION_PENDING Non-zero means we are in the middle of
+ *				destroying this menu's Tk_Window.
  * MENU_PLATFORM_FLAG1...	Reserved for use by the platform-specific menu
  *				code.
  */
 
-#define REDRAW_PENDING		        1
-#define RESIZE_PENDING		        2
-#define MENU_DELETION_PENDING	        4
+#define REDRAW_PENDING			1
+#define RESIZE_PENDING			2
+#define MENU_DELETION_PENDING		4
 #define MENU_WIN_DESTRUCTION_PENDING	8
 #define MENU_PLATFORM_FLAG1	(1 << 30)
 #define MENU_PLATFORM_FLAG2	(1 << 29)
 #define MENU_PLATFORM_FLAG3	(1 << 28)
 
 /*
- * Each menu created by the user is a MASTER_MENU. When a menu is torn off,
- * a TEAROFF_MENU instance is created. When a menu is assigned to a toplevel
- * as a menu bar, a MENUBAR instance is created. All instances have the same
+ * Each menu created by the user is a MASTER_MENU. When a menu is torn off, a
+ * TEAROFF_MENU instance is created. When a menu is assigned to a toplevel as
+ * a menu bar, a MENUBAR instance is created. All instances have the same
  * configuration information. If the master instance is deleted, all instances
  * are deleted. If one of the other instances is deleted, only that instance
  * is deleted.
  */
- 
+
 #define UNKNOWN_TYPE		-1
 #define MASTER_MENU 		0
 #define TEAROFF_MENU 		1
@@ -486,101 +493,81 @@ typedef struct TkMenuOptionTables {
  * Various geometry definitions:
  */
 
-#define CASCADE_ARROW_HEIGHT 10
-#define CASCADE_ARROW_WIDTH 8
-#define DECORATION_BORDER_WIDTH 2
+#define CASCADE_ARROW_HEIGHT	10
+#define CASCADE_ARROW_WIDTH	8
+#define DECORATION_BORDER_WIDTH	2
 
 /*
- * Menu-related procedures that are shared among Tk modules but not exported
- * to the outside world:
+ * Menu-related functions that are shared among Tk modules but not exported to
+ * the outside world:
  */
 
-EXTERN int		TkActivateMenuEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
-			    int index));
-EXTERN void		TkBindMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, TkMenu *menuPtr));
-EXTERN TkMenuReferences *
-			TkCreateMenuReferences _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *name));
-EXTERN void		TkDestroyMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
-EXTERN void             TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkEventuallyRedrawMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((
-    			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr));
-EXTERN TkMenuReferences *
-			TkFindMenuReferences _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *name));
-EXTERN TkMenuReferences *
-			TkFindMenuReferencesObj _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *namePtr));
-EXTERN int		TkFreeMenuReferences _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr));
-EXTERN Tcl_HashTable *	TkGetMenuHashTable _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp));
-EXTERN int		TkGetMenuIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int lastOK,
-			    int *indexPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkMenuInitializeDrawingFields _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkMenuInitializeEntryDrawingFields _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr));
-EXTERN int		TkInvokeMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr, int index));
-EXTERN void		TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, int index));
-EXTERN void		TkMenuFreeDrawOptions _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkMenuEntryFreeDrawOptions _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr));
-EXTERN void		TkMenuEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-    			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkMenuImageProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-    			    ClientData clientData, int x, int y, int width,
-			    int height, int imgWidth, int imgHeight));
-EXTERN void		TkMenuInit _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
-EXTERN void		TkMenuSelectImageProc _ANSI_ARGS_
-			    ((ClientData clientData, int x, int y,
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkActivateMenuEntry(TkMenu *menuPtr, int index);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkBindMenu(Tk_Window tkwin, TkMenu *menuPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkMenuReferences*TkCreateMenuReferences(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    char *name);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkDestroyMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkMenuReferences*TkFindMenuReferences(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *name);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkMenuReferences*TkFindMenuReferencesObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *namePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkFreeMenuReferences(TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_HashTable *TkGetMenuHashTable(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkGetMenuIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int lastOK, int *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkMenuInitializeDrawingFields(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkMenuInitializeEntryDrawingFields(TkMenuEntry *mePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkInvokeMenu(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    int index);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, int index);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkMenuFreeDrawOptions(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkMenuEntryFreeDrawOptions(TkMenuEntry *mePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkMenuEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+    			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkMenuImageProc(ClientData clientData, int x, int y,
 			    int width, int height, int imgWidth,
-			    int imgHeight));
-EXTERN Tcl_Obj *	TkNewMenuName _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *parentNamePtr, TkMenu *menuPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkPostCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkPostSubmenu _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr));
-EXTERN int		TkPostTearoffMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr, int x, int y));
-EXTERN int		TkPreprocessMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
-EXTERN void             TkRecomputeMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
+			    int imgHeight);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkMenuInit(void);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkMenuSelectImageProc(ClientData clientData, int x,
+			    int y, int width, int height, int imgWidth,
+			    int imgHeight);
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Obj *	TkNewMenuName(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *parentNamePtr, TkMenu *menuPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkPostCommand(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkPostSubmenu(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkPostTearoffMenu(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    int x, int y);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkPreprocessMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkRecomputeMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr);
 
 /*
- * These routines are the platform-dependent routines called by the
- * common code.
+ * These routines are the platform-dependent routines called by the common
+ * code.
  */
 
-EXTERN void		TkpComputeMenubarGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkpComputeStandardMenuGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_
-			    ((TkMenu *menuPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkpConfigureMenuEntry
-                            _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenuEntry *mePtr));
-EXTERN void		TkpDestroyMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkpDestroyMenuEntry
-			    _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenuEntry *mEntryPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkpDrawMenuEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
-			    Drawable d, Tk_Font tkfont, 
-			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *menuMetricsPtr, int x,
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpComputeMenubarGeometry(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpComputeStandardMenuGeometry(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkpConfigureMenuEntry(TkMenuEntry *mePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpDestroyMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpDestroyMenuEntry(TkMenuEntry *mEntryPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpDrawMenuEntry(TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    Drawable d, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    const Tk_FontMetrics *menuMetricsPtr, int x,
 			    int y, int width, int height, int strictMotif,
-			    int drawArrow));
-EXTERN void		TkpMenuInit _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
-EXTERN int		TkpMenuNewEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenuEntry *mePtr));
-EXTERN int		TkpNewMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkpPostMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr, int x, int y));
-EXTERN void		TkpSetWindowMenuBar _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr));
+			    int drawingParameters);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpMenuInit(void);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkpMenuNewEntry(TkMenuEntry *mePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkpNewMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkpPostMenu(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    int x, int y);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpSetWindowMenuBar(Tk_Window tkwin, TkMenu *menuPtr);
 
 # undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
 
 #endif /* _TKMENU */
-
diff --git a/generic/tkMenuDraw.c b/generic/tkMenuDraw.c
index d4634cd..c49f513 100644
--- a/generic/tkMenuDraw.c
+++ b/generic/tkMenuDraw.c
@@ -1,35 +1,34 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkMenuDraw.c --
  *
- *	This module implements the platform-independent drawing and
- *	geometry calculations of menu widgets.
+ *	This module implements the platform-independent drawing and geometry
+ *	calculations of menu widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
+#include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkMenu.h"
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		AdjustMenuCoords _ANSI_ARGS_ ((TkMenu *menuPtr,
-			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, int *xPtr, int *yPtr,
-			    char *string));
-static void		ComputeMenuGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		DisplayMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+static void		AdjustMenuCoords(TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    int *xPtr, int *yPtr);
+static void		ComputeMenuGeometry(ClientData clientData);
+static void		DisplayMenu(ClientData clientData);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkMenuInitializeDrawingFields --
  *
- *	Fills in drawing fields of a new menu. Called when new menu is
- *	created by MenuCmd.
+ *	Fills in drawing fields of a new menu. Called when new menu is created
+ *	by MenuCmd.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -41,8 +40,8 @@ static void		DisplayMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuInitializeDrawingFields(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are initializing. */
+TkMenuInitializeDrawingFields(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)		/* The menu we are initializing. */
 {
     menuPtr->textGC = None;
     menuPtr->gray = None;
@@ -58,8 +57,8 @@ TkMenuInitializeDrawingFields(menuPtr)
  *
  * TkMenuInitializeEntryDrawingFields --
  *
- *	Fills in drawing fields of a new menu entry. Called when an
- *	entry is created.
+ *	Fills in drawing fields of a new menu entry. Called when an entry is
+ *	created.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -71,8 +70,8 @@ TkMenuInitializeDrawingFields(menuPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuInitializeEntryDrawingFields(mePtr)
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		/* The menu we are initializing. */
+TkMenuInitializeEntryDrawingFields(
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr)		/* The menu we are initializing. */
 {
     mePtr->width = 0;
     mePtr->height = 0;
@@ -91,8 +90,8 @@ TkMenuInitializeEntryDrawingFields(mePtr)
  *
  * TkMenuFreeDrawOptions --
  *
- *	Frees up any structures allocated for the drawing of a menu.
- *	Called when menu is deleted.
+ *	Frees up any structures allocated for the drawing of a menu. Called
+ *	when menu is deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -104,8 +103,8 @@ TkMenuInitializeEntryDrawingFields(mePtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuFreeDrawOptions(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+TkMenuFreeDrawOptions(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)
 {
     if (menuPtr->textGC != None) {
 	Tk_FreeGC(menuPtr->display, menuPtr->textGC);
@@ -132,8 +131,8 @@ TkMenuFreeDrawOptions(menuPtr)
  *
  * TkMenuEntryFreeDrawOptions --
  *
- *	Frees up drawing structures for a menu entry. Called when
- *	menu entry is freed.
+ *	Frees up drawing structures for a menu entry. Called when menu entry
+ *	is freed.
  *
  * RESULTS:
  *	None.
@@ -145,8 +144,8 @@ TkMenuFreeDrawOptions(menuPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuEntryFreeDrawOptions(mePtr)
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
+TkMenuEntryFreeDrawOptions(
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr)
 {
     if (mePtr->textGC != None) {
 	Tk_FreeGC(mePtr->menuPtr->display, mePtr->textGC);
@@ -167,8 +166,8 @@ TkMenuEntryFreeDrawOptions(mePtr)
  *
  * TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions --
  *
- *	Sets the menu's drawing attributes in preparation for drawing
- *	the menu.
+ *	Sets the menu's drawing attributes in preparation for drawing the
+ *	menu.
  *
  * RESULTS:
  *	None.
@@ -180,8 +179,8 @@ TkMenuEntryFreeDrawOptions(mePtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are configuring. */
+TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)		/* The menu we are configuring. */
 {
     XGCValues gcValues;
     GC newGC;
@@ -189,11 +188,11 @@ TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
     Tk_3DBorder border, activeBorder;
     Tk_Font tkfont;
     XColor *fg, *activeFg, *indicatorFg;
- 
+
     /*
-     * A few options need special processing, such as setting the
-     * background from a 3-D border, or filling in complicated
-     * defaults that couldn't be specified to Tk_ConfigureWidget.
+     * A few options need special processing, such as setting the background
+     * from a 3-D border, or filling in complicated defaults that couldn't be
+     * specified to Tk_ConfigureWidget.
      */
 
     border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderPtr);
@@ -216,7 +215,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
     if (menuPtr->disabledFgPtr != NULL) {
 	XColor *disabledFg;
 
-	disabledFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
+	disabledFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
 		menuPtr->disabledFgPtr);
 	gcValues.foreground = disabledFg->pixel;
 	mask = GCForeground|GCBackground|GCFont;
@@ -247,7 +246,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
     if (menuPtr->gray != None) {
 	gcValues.fill_style = FillStippled;
 	gcValues.stipple = menuPtr->gray;
-	newGC = Tk_GetGC(menuPtr->tkwin, 
+	newGC = Tk_GetGC(menuPtr->tkwin,
 	    GCForeground|GCFillStyle|GCStipple, &gcValues);
     }
     if (menuPtr->disabledImageGC != None) {
@@ -258,7 +257,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
     gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(tkfont);
     activeFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->activeFgPtr);
     gcValues.foreground = activeFg->pixel;
-    activeBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
+    activeBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
 	    menuPtr->activeBorderPtr);
     gcValues.background = Tk_3DBorderColor(activeBorder)->pixel;
     newGC = Tk_GetGC(menuPtr->tkwin, GCForeground|GCBackground|GCFont,
@@ -268,7 +267,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
     }
     menuPtr->activeGC = newGC;
 
-    indicatorFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
+    indicatorFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
 	    menuPtr->indicatorFgPtr);
     gcValues.foreground = indicatorFg->pixel;
     gcValues.background = Tk_3DBorderColor(border)->pixel;
@@ -285,8 +284,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
  *
  * TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions --
  *
- *	Calculates any entry-specific draw options for the given menu
- *	entry.
+ *	Calculates any entry-specific draw options for the given menu entry.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns a standard Tcl error.
@@ -298,11 +296,10 @@ TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
-    int index;
+TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+    int index)
 {
-
     XGCValues gcValues;
     GC newGC, newActiveGC, newDisabledGC, newIndicatorGC;
     unsigned long mask;
@@ -311,7 +308,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
 
     tkfont = Tk_GetFontFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
 	    (mePtr->fontPtr != NULL) ? mePtr->fontPtr : menuPtr->fontPtr);
-    
+
     if (mePtr->state == ENTRY_ACTIVE) {
 	if (index != menuPtr->active) {
 	    TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, index);
@@ -330,21 +327,21 @@ TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
 	    || (mePtr->indicatorFgPtr != NULL)) {
 	XColor *fg, *indicatorFg, *activeFg;
 	Tk_3DBorder border, activeBorder;
-    
+
 	fg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, (mePtr->fgPtr != NULL)
 		? mePtr->fgPtr : menuPtr->fgPtr);
 	gcValues.foreground = fg->pixel;
-	border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
-		(mePtr->borderPtr != NULL) ? mePtr->borderPtr 
+	border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
+		(mePtr->borderPtr != NULL) ? mePtr->borderPtr
 		: menuPtr->borderPtr);
 	gcValues.background = Tk_3DBorderColor(border)->pixel;
 
 	gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(tkfont);
 
 	/*
-	 * Note: disable GraphicsExpose events;  we know there won't be
-	 * obscured areas when copying from an off-screen pixmap to the
-	 * screen and this gets rid of unnecessary events.
+	 * Note: disable GraphicsExpose events; we know there won't be
+	 * obscured areas when copying from an off-screen pixmap to the screen
+	 * and this gets rid of unnecessary events.
 	 */
 
 	gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
@@ -352,7 +349,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
 		GCForeground|GCBackground|GCFont|GCGraphicsExposures,
 		&gcValues);
 
-	indicatorFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
+	indicatorFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
 		(mePtr->indicatorFgPtr != NULL) ? mePtr->indicatorFgPtr
 		: menuPtr->indicatorFgPtr);
 	gcValues.foreground = indicatorFg->pixel;
@@ -363,7 +360,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
 	if ((menuPtr->disabledFgPtr != NULL) || (mePtr->image != NULL)) {
 	    XColor *disabledFg;
 
-	    disabledFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
+	    disabledFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
 		    menuPtr->disabledFgPtr);
 	    gcValues.foreground = disabledFg->pixel;
 	    mask = GCForeground|GCBackground|GCFont|GCGraphicsExposures;
@@ -375,13 +372,13 @@ TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
 	}
 	newDisabledGC = Tk_GetGC(menuPtr->tkwin, mask, &gcValues);
 
-	activeFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
+	activeFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
 		(mePtr->activeFgPtr != NULL) ? mePtr->activeFgPtr
 		: menuPtr->activeFgPtr);
-	activeBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
-		(mePtr->activeBorderPtr != NULL) ? mePtr->activeBorderPtr 
+	activeBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
+		(mePtr->activeBorderPtr != NULL) ? mePtr->activeBorderPtr
 		: menuPtr->activeBorderPtr);
-		
+
 	gcValues.foreground = activeFg->pixel;
 	gcValues.background = Tk_3DBorderColor(activeBorder)->pixel;
 	newActiveGC = Tk_GetGC(menuPtr->tkwin,
@@ -394,15 +391,15 @@ TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
 	newIndicatorGC = None;
     }
     if (mePtr->textGC != None) {
-	    Tk_FreeGC(menuPtr->display, mePtr->textGC);
+	Tk_FreeGC(menuPtr->display, mePtr->textGC);
     }
     mePtr->textGC = newGC;
     if (mePtr->activeGC != None) {
-	    Tk_FreeGC(menuPtr->display, mePtr->activeGC);
+	Tk_FreeGC(menuPtr->display, mePtr->activeGC);
     }
     mePtr->activeGC = newActiveGC;
     if (mePtr->disabledGC != None) {
-	    Tk_FreeGC(menuPtr->display, mePtr->disabledGC);
+	Tk_FreeGC(menuPtr->display, mePtr->disabledGC);
     }
     mePtr->disabledGC = newDisabledGC;
     if (mePtr->indicatorGC != None) {
@@ -430,8 +427,8 @@ TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
  */
 
 void
-TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)
 {
     if (!(menuPtr->menuFlags & RESIZE_PENDING)) {
 	menuPtr->menuFlags |= RESIZE_PENDING;
@@ -444,8 +441,8 @@ TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(menuPtr)
  *
  * TkRecomputeMenu --
  *
- *	Tells Tcl to redo the geometry because this menu has changed.
- *	Does it now; removes any ComputeMenuGeometries from the idler.
+ *	Tells Tcl to redo the geometry because this menu has changed. Does it
+ *	now; removes any ComputeMenuGeometries from the idler.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -457,9 +454,9 @@ TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(menuPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;
-{    
+TkRecomputeMenu(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)
+{
     if (menuPtr->menuFlags & RESIZE_PENDING) {
 	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ComputeMenuGeometry, (ClientData) menuPtr);
 	ComputeMenuGeometry((ClientData) menuPtr);
@@ -471,27 +468,27 @@ TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr)
  *
  * TkEventuallyRedrawMenu --
  *
- *	Arrange for an entry of a menu, or the whole menu, to be
- *	redisplayed at some point in the future.
+ *	Arrange for an entry of a menu, or the whole menu, to be redisplayed
+ *	at some point in the future.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A when-idle hander is scheduled to do the redisplay, if there
- *	isn't one already scheduled.
+ *	A when-idle hander is scheduled to do the redisplay, if there isn't
+ *	one already scheduled.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, mePtr)
-    register TkMenu *menuPtr;	/* Information about menu to redraw. */
-    register TkMenuEntry *mePtr;/* Entry to redraw.  NULL means redraw
-				 * all the entries in the menu. */
+TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(
+    register TkMenu *menuPtr,	/* Information about menu to redraw. */
+    register TkMenuEntry *mePtr)/* Entry to redraw. NULL means redraw all the
+				 * entries in the menu. */
 {
     int i;
-    
+
     if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
 	return;
     }
@@ -515,25 +512,23 @@ TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, mePtr)
  *
  * ComputeMenuGeometry --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to recompute the size and
- *	layout of a menu.  It is called as a when-idle handler so
- *	that it only gets done once, even if a group of changes is
- *	made to the menu.
+ *	This function is invoked to recompute the size and layout of a menu.
+ *	It is called as a when-idle handler so that it only gets done once,
+ *	even if a group of changes is made to the menu.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Fields of menu entries are changed to reflect their
- *	current positions, and the size of the menu window
- *	itself may be changed.
+ *	Fields of menu entries are changed to reflect their current positions,
+ *	and the size of the menu window itself may be changed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ComputeMenuGeometry(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Structure describing menu. */
+ComputeMenuGeometry(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Structure describing menu. */
 {
     TkMenu *menuPtr = (TkMenu *) clientData;
 
@@ -552,16 +547,15 @@ ComputeMenuGeometry(clientData)
 	Tk_GeometryRequest(menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->totalWidth,
 		menuPtr->totalHeight);
     }
-	
+
     /*
-     * Must always force a redisplay here if the window is mapped
-     * (even if the size didn't change, something else might have
-     * changed in the menu, such as a label or accelerator).  The
-     * resize will force a redisplay above.
+     * Must always force a redisplay here if the window is mapped (even if the
+     * size didn't change, something else might have changed in the menu, such
+     * as a label or accelerator). The resize will force a redisplay above.
      */
-    
-    TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, (TkMenuEntry *) NULL);
-    
+
+    TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, NULL);
+
     menuPtr->menuFlags &= ~RESIZE_PENDING;
 }
 
@@ -570,9 +564,9 @@ ComputeMenuGeometry(clientData)
  *
  * TkMenuSelectImageProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the image code whenever the manager
- *	for an image does something that affects the size of contents
- *	of an image displayed in a menu entry when it is selected.
+ *	This function is invoked by the image code whenever the manager for an
+ *	image does something that affects the size of contents of an image
+ *	displayed in a menu entry when it is selected.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -584,20 +578,18 @@ ComputeMenuGeometry(clientData)
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuSelectImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth,
-	imgHeight)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to widget record. */
-    int x, y;				/* Upper left pixel (within image)
-					 * that must be redisplayed. */
-    int width, height;			/* Dimensions of area to redisplay
-					 * (may be <= 0). */
-    int imgWidth, imgHeight;		/* New dimensions of image. */
+TkMenuSelectImageProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to widget record. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
+				 * be redisplayed. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be
+				 * <=0). */
+    int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
 {
     register TkMenuEntry *mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) clientData;
 
     if ((mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_SELECTED)
-	    && !(mePtr->menuPtr->menuFlags &
-	    REDRAW_PENDING)) {
+	    && !(mePtr->menuPtr->menuFlags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
 	mePtr->menuPtr->menuFlags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayMenu, (ClientData) mePtr->menuPtr);
     }
@@ -608,21 +600,20 @@ TkMenuSelectImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth,
  *
  * DisplayMenu --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to display a menu widget.
+ *	This function is invoked to display a menu widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
- *	current mode.
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its current mode.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayMenu(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about widget. */
+DisplayMenu(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     register TkMenu *menuPtr = (TkMenu *) clientData;
     register TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
@@ -649,8 +640,8 @@ DisplayMenu(clientData)
 	    menuPtr->activeBorderWidthPtr, &activeBorderWidth);
 
     if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) {
-	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border, borderWidth, 
-		borderWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * borderWidth,	
+	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border, borderWidth,
+		borderWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * borderWidth,
 		Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * borderWidth, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
     }
 
@@ -688,15 +679,15 @@ DisplayMenu(clientData)
 	    }
 	}
 	TkpDrawMenuEntry(mePtr, Tk_WindowId(menuPtr->tkwin), tkfont,
-		&menuMetrics, mePtr->x, mePtr->y, width, 
+		&menuMetrics, mePtr->x, mePtr->y, width,
 		mePtr->height, strictMotif, 1);
 	if ((index > 0) && (menuPtr->menuType != MENUBAR)
 		&& mePtr->columnBreak) {
 	    mePtr = menuPtr->entries[index - 1];
 	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border,
-		mePtr->x, mePtr->y + mePtr->height, 
+		mePtr->x, mePtr->y + mePtr->height,
 		mePtr->width,
-		Tk_Height(tkwin) - mePtr->y - mePtr->height - 
+		Tk_Height(tkwin) - mePtr->y - mePtr->height -
 		activeBorderWidth, 0,
 		TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
 	}
@@ -712,7 +703,7 @@ DisplayMenu(clientData)
 	} else {
 	    mePtr = menuPtr->entries[menuPtr->numEntries - 1];
 	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
-		border, mePtr->x, mePtr->y + mePtr->height, mePtr->width, 
+		border, mePtr->x, mePtr->y + mePtr->height, mePtr->width,
 		Tk_Height(tkwin) - mePtr->y - mePtr->height
 		- activeBorderWidth, 0,
 		TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
@@ -721,13 +712,13 @@ DisplayMenu(clientData)
 	    width = Tk_Width(tkwin) - x - activeBorderWidth;
 	    height = Tk_Height(tkwin) - y - activeBorderWidth;
 	}
-	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border, x, y, 
+	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border, x, y,
 		width, height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
     }
 
     Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->reliefPtr, &relief);
     Tk_Draw3DRectangle(menuPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
-	    border, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), borderWidth, 
+	    border, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), borderWidth,
 	    relief);
 }
 
@@ -736,31 +727,31 @@ DisplayMenu(clientData)
  *
  * TkMenuEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on menus.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	menus.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up. When
+ *	it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+TkMenuEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     TkMenu *menuPtr = (TkMenu *) clientData;
-    
+
     if ((eventPtr->type == Expose) && (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0)) {
-	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, (TkMenuEntry *) NULL);
+	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, NULL);
     } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
 	TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(menuPtr);
-	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, (TkMenuEntry *) NULL);
+	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, NULL);
     } else if (eventPtr->type == ActivateNotify) {
 	if (menuPtr->menuType == TEAROFF_MENU) {
 	    TkpSetMainMenubar(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin, NULL);
@@ -797,9 +788,9 @@ TkMenuEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkMenuImageProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the image code whenever the manager
- *	for an image does something that affects the size of contents
- *	of an image displayed in a menu entry.
+ *	This function is invoked by the image code whenever the manager for an
+ *	image does something that affects the size of contents of an image
+ *	displayed in a menu entry.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -811,19 +802,17 @@ TkMenuEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth,
-	imgHeight)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to widget record. */
-    int x, y;				/* Upper left pixel (within image)
-					 * that must be redisplayed. */
-    int width, height;			/* Dimensions of area to redisplay
-					 * (may be <= 0). */
-    int imgWidth, imgHeight;		/* New dimensions of image. */
+TkMenuImageProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to widget record. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
+				 * be redisplayed. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be
+				 * <=0). */
+    int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
 {
     register TkMenu *menuPtr = ((TkMenuEntry *)clientData)->menuPtr;
 
-    if ((menuPtr->tkwin != NULL) && !(menuPtr->menuFlags
-	    & RESIZE_PENDING)) {
+    if ((menuPtr->tkwin != NULL) && !(menuPtr->menuFlags & RESIZE_PENDING)) {
 	menuPtr->menuFlags |= RESIZE_PENDING;
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ComputeMenuGeometry, (ClientData) menuPtr);
     }
@@ -834,9 +823,9 @@ TkMenuImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth,
  *
  * TkPostTearoffMenu --
  *
- *	Posts a menu on the screen. Used to post tearoff menus. On Unix,
- *	all menus are posted this way. Adjusts the menu's position
- *	so that it fits on the screen, and maps and raises the menu.
+ *	Posts a menu on the screen. Used to post tearoff menus. On Unix, all
+ *	menus are posted this way. Adjusts the menu's position so that it fits
+ *	on the screen, and maps and raises the menu.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns a standard Tcl Error.
@@ -848,13 +837,11 @@ TkMenuImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth,
  */
 
 int
-TkPostTearoffMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* The interpreter of the menu */
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are posting */
-    int x;				/* The root X coordinate where we
-					 * are posting */
-    int y;				/* The root Y coordinate where we
-					 * are posting */
+TkPostTearoffMenu(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interpreter of the menu */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* The menu we are posting */
+    int x, int y)		/* The root X,Y coordinates where we are
+				 * posting */
 {
     int vRootX, vRootY, vRootWidth, vRootHeight;
     int result;
@@ -867,8 +854,8 @@ TkPostTearoffMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The post commands could have deleted the menu, which means
-     * we are dead and should go away.
+     * The post commands could have deleted the menu, which means we are dead
+     * and should go away.
      */
 
     if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
@@ -876,22 +863,20 @@ TkPostTearoffMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Adjust the position of the menu if necessary to keep it
-     * visible on the screen.  There are two special tricks to
-     * make this work right:
+     * Adjust the position of the menu if necessary to keep it visible on the
+     * screen. There are two special tricks to make this work right:
      *
-     * 1. If a virtual root window manager is being used then
-     *    the coordinates are in the virtual root window of
-     *    menuPtr's parent;  since the menu uses override-redirect
-     *    mode it will be in the *real* root window for the screen,
-     *    so we have to map the coordinates from the virtual root
-     *    (if any) to the real root.  Can't get the virtual root
-     *    from the menu itself (it will never be seen by the wm)
-     *    so use its parent instead (it would be better to have an
-     *    an option that names a window to use for this...).
-     * 2. The menu may not have been mapped yet, so its current size
-     *    might be the default 1x1.  To compute how much space it
-     *    needs, use its requested size, not its actual size.
+     * 1. If a virtual root window manager is being used then the coordinates
+     *    are in the virtual root window of menuPtr's parent; since the menu
+     *    uses override-redirect mode it will be in the *real* root window for
+     *    the screen, so we have to map the coordinates from the virtual root
+     *    (if any) to the real root. Can't get the virtual root from the menu
+     *    itself (it will never be seen by the wm) so use its parent instead
+     *    (it would be better to have an an option that names a window to use
+     *    for this...).
+     * 2. The menu may not have been mapped yet, so its current size might be
+     *    the default 1x1. To compute how much space it needs, use its
+     *    requested size, not its actual size.
      */
 
     Tk_GetVRootGeometry(Tk_Parent(menuPtr->tkwin), &vRootX, &vRootY,
@@ -923,59 +908,58 @@ TkPostTearoffMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y)
  *
  * TkPostSubmenu --
  *
- *	This procedure arranges for a particular submenu (i.e. the
- *	menu corresponding to a given cascade entry) to be
- *	posted.
+ *	This function arranges for a particular submenu (i.e. the menu
+ *	corresponding to a given cascade entry) to be posted.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return result.  Errors may occur in the
- *	Tcl commands generated to post and unpost submenus.
+ *	A standard Tcl return result. Errors may occur in the Tcl commands
+ *	generated to post and unpost submenus.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If there is already a submenu posted, it is unposted.
- *	The new submenu is then posted.
+ *	If there is already a submenu posted, it is unposted. The new submenu
+ *	is then posted.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, mePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for invoking sub-commands and
+TkPostSubmenu(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for invoking sub-commands and
 				 * reporting errors. */
-    register TkMenu *menuPtr;	/* Information about menu as a whole. */
-    register TkMenuEntry *mePtr;	/* Info about submenu that is to be
-				 * posted.  NULL means make sure that
-				 * no submenu is posted. */
+    register TkMenu *menuPtr,	/* Information about menu as a whole. */
+    register TkMenuEntry *mePtr)/* Info about submenu that is to be posted.
+				 * NULL means make sure that no submenu is
+				 * posted. */
 {
     int result, x, y;
+    Tcl_Obj *subary[4];
 
     if (mePtr == menuPtr->postedCascade) {
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
     if (menuPtr->postedCascade != NULL) {
-	char *name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(menuPtr->postedCascade->namePtr,
-		NULL);
-
 	/*
-	 * Note: when unposting a submenu, we have to redraw the entire
-	 * parent menu.  This is because of a combination of the following
-	 * things:
+	 * Note: when unposting a submenu, we have to redraw the entire parent
+	 * menu. This is because of a combination of the following things:
 	 * (a) the submenu partially overlaps the parent.
-	 * (b) the submenu specifies "save under", which causes the X
-	 *     server to make a copy of the information under it when it
-	 *     is posted.  When the submenu is unposted, the X server
-	 *     copies this data back and doesn't generate any Expose
-	 *     events for the parent.
-	 * (c) the parent may have redisplayed itself after the submenu
-	 *     was posted, in which case the saved information is no
-	 *     longer correct.
-	 * The simplest solution is just force a complete redisplay of
-	 * the parent.
+	 * (b) the submenu specifies "save under", which causes the X server
+	 *     to make a copy of the information under it when it is posted.
+	 *     When the submenu is unposted, the X server copies this data
+	 *     back and doesn't generate any Expose events for the parent.
+	 * (c) the parent may have redisplayed itself after the submenu was
+	 *     posted, in which case the saved information is no longer
+	 *     correct.
+	 * The simplest solution is just force a complete redisplay of the
+	 * parent.
 	 */
 
-	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, (TkMenuEntry *) NULL);
-	result = Tcl_VarEval(interp, "{", name, "} unpost", (char *) NULL);
+	subary[0] = menuPtr->postedCascade->namePtr;
+	subary[1] = Tcl_NewStringObj("unpost", -1);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(subary[1]);
+	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, NULL);
+	result = Tcl_EvalObjv(interp, 2, subary, 0);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(subary[1]);
 	menuPtr->postedCascade = NULL;
 	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    return result;
@@ -985,21 +969,31 @@ TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, mePtr)
     if ((mePtr != NULL) && (mePtr->namePtr != NULL)
 	    && Tk_IsMapped(menuPtr->tkwin)) {
 	/*
-	 * Position the cascade with its upper left corner slightly
-	 * below and to the left of the upper right corner of the
-	 * menu entry (this is an attempt to match Motif behavior).
+	 * Position the cascade with its upper left corner slightly below and
+	 * to the left of the upper right corner of the menu entry (this is an
+	 * attempt to match Motif behavior).
 	 *
 	 * The menu has to redrawn so that the entry can change relief.
+	 *
+	 * Set postedCascade early to ensure tear-off submenus work on
+	 * Windows. [Bug 873613]
 	 */
 
-	char string[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 2];
-	char *name;
-
-	name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->namePtr, NULL);
 	Tk_GetRootCoords(menuPtr->tkwin, &x, &y);
-	AdjustMenuCoords(menuPtr, mePtr, &x, &y, string);
+	AdjustMenuCoords(menuPtr, mePtr, &x, &y);
+
 	menuPtr->postedCascade = mePtr;
-	result = Tcl_VarEval(interp, "{", name, "} post ", string, (char *) NULL);
+	subary[0] = mePtr->namePtr;
+	subary[1] = Tcl_NewStringObj("post", -1);
+	subary[2] = Tcl_NewIntObj(x);
+	subary[3] = Tcl_NewIntObj(y);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(subary[1]);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(subary[2]);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(subary[3]);
+	result = Tcl_EvalObjv(interp, 4, subary, 0);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(subary[1]);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(subary[2]);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(subary[3]);
 	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    menuPtr->postedCascade = NULL;
 	    return result;
@@ -1014,8 +1008,7 @@ TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, mePtr)
  *
  * AdjustMenuCoords --
  *
- *	Adjusts the given coordinates down and the left to give a Motif
- *	look.
+ *	Adjusts the given coordinates down and the left to give a Motif look.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1027,12 +1020,11 @@ TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, mePtr)
  */
 
 static void
-AdjustMenuCoords(menuPtr, mePtr, xPtr, yPtr, string)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
-    int *xPtr;
-    int *yPtr;
-    char *string;
+AdjustMenuCoords(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+    int *xPtr,
+    int *yPtr)
 {
     if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) {
 	*xPtr += mePtr->x;
@@ -1042,11 +1034,18 @@ AdjustMenuCoords(menuPtr, mePtr, xPtr, yPtr, string)
 
 	Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderWidthPtr,
 		&borderWidth);
-	Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, 
+	Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin,
 		menuPtr->activeBorderWidthPtr, &activeBorderWidth);
-	*xPtr += Tk_Width(menuPtr->tkwin) - borderWidth	- activeBorderWidth 
+	*xPtr += Tk_Width(menuPtr->tkwin) - borderWidth	- activeBorderWidth
 		- 2;
 	*yPtr += mePtr->y + activeBorderWidth + 2;
     }
-    sprintf(string, "%d %d", *xPtr, *yPtr);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkMenubutton.c b/generic/tkMenubutton.c
index 0e85308..94ac8b2 100644
--- a/generic/tkMenubutton.c
+++ b/generic/tkMenubutton.c
@@ -1,115 +1,114 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkMenubutton.c --
  *
- *	This module implements button-like widgets that are used
- *	to invoke pull-down menus.
+ *	This module implements button-like widgets that are used to invoke
+ *	pull-down menus.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
+#include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkMenubutton.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "default.h"
 
 /*
- * The following table defines the legal values for the -direction 
- * option.  It is used together with the "enum direction" declaration 
- * in tkMenubutton.h.
+ * The following table defines the legal values for the -direction option. It
+ * is used together with the "enum direction" declaration in tkMenubutton.h.
  */
 
-static CONST char *CONST directionStrings[] = {
-    "above", "below", "flush", "left", "right", (char *) NULL
+static const char *const directionStrings[] = {
+    "above", "below", "flush", "left", "right", NULL
 };
 
 /*
- * The following table defines the legal values for the -state option.
- * It is used together with the "enum state" declaration in tkMenubutton.h.
+ * The following table defines the legal values for the -state option. It is
+ * used together with the "enum state" declaration in tkMenubutton.h.
  */
 
-static CONST char *CONST stateStrings[] = {
-    "active", "disabled", "normal", (char *) NULL
+static const char *const stateStrings[] = {
+    "active", "disabled", "normal", NULL
 };
 
 /*
- * The following table defines the legal values for the -compound option.
- * It is used with the "enum compound" declaration in tkMenuButton.h
+ * The following table defines the legal values for the -compound option. It
+ * is used with the "enum compound" declaration in tkMenuButton.h
  */
 
-static CONST char *CONST compoundStrings[] = {
-    "bottom", "center", "left", "none", "right", "top", (char *) NULL
+static const char *const compoundStrings[] = {
+    "bottom", "center", "left", "none", "right", "top", NULL
 };
 
 /*
  * Information used for parsing configuration specs:
  */
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground",
-        DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, activeBorder), 0, 
-        (ClientData) DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, activeBorder), 0,
+	(ClientData) DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", "activeForeground", "Background",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR, -1, 
-         Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, activeFg),
-         0, (ClientData) DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_MONO, 0},
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR, -1,
+	 Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, activeFg),
+	 0, (ClientData) DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_ANCHOR, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, anchor), 0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_ANCHOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, anchor), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, normalBorder),
-        0, (ClientData) DEF_MENUBUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
+	0, (ClientData) DEF_MENUBUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0,
+	(ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0,
+	(ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_BITMAP, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, bitmap),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_BORDER_WIDTH, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, cursor),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-direction", "direction", "Direction",
-    	DEF_MENUBUTTON_DIRECTION, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, direction), 
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_DIRECTION, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, direction),
 	0, (ClientData) directionStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
 	"DisabledForeground", DEF_MENUBUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, disabledFg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
 	(ClientData) DEF_MENUBUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0,
+	(ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, normalFg), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-height", "height", "Height",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_HEIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, heightString), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_HEIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, heightString),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
 	"HighlightBackground", DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, highlightColorPtr),	0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, highlightColorPtr),	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
 	"HighlightThickness", DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_IMAGE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, imageString), 
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_IMAGE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, imageString),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-indicatoron", "indicatorOn", "IndicatorOn",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_INDICATOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, indicatorOn),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
-	DEF_BUTTON_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, justify), 0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, justify), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-menu", "menu", "Menu",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_MENU, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, menuName), 
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_MENU, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, menuName),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_PADX, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, padX),
@@ -118,43 +117,42 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_PADY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, padY),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, relief), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, relief),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound",
-         DEF_BUTTON_COMPOUND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, compound), 0,
-         (ClientData) compoundStrings, 0},
+	 DEF_BUTTON_COMPOUND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, compound), 0,
+	 (ClientData) compoundStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, state),
 	0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, takeFocus), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_TAKE_FOCUS, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, takeFocus), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_TEXT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, text), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, textVarName), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, textVarName), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_UNDERLINE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, underline),
-         0, 0, 0},
+	 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, widthString), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, widthString),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, wrapLength),
-        0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+	0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * The following tables define the menubutton widget commands and map the 
- * indexes into the string tables into a single enumerated type used 
- * to dispatch the scale widget command.
+ * The following tables define the menubutton widget commands and map the
+ * indexes into the string tables into a single enumerated type used to
+ * dispatch the scale widget command.
  */
 
-static CONST char *commandNames[] = {
-    "cget", "configure", (char *) NULL
+static const char *commandNames[] = {
+    "cget", "configure", NULL
 };
 
 enum command {
@@ -162,35 +160,34 @@ enum command {
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		MenuButtonEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		MenuButtonImageProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+static void		MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		MenuButtonEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		MenuButtonImageProc(ClientData clientData,
 			    int x, int y, int width, int height, int imgWidth,
-			    int imgHeight));
-static char *		MenuButtonTextVarProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    CONST char *name1, CONST char *name2, int flags));
-static int		MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((
-                            ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, 
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		ConfigureMenuButton _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkMenuButton *mbPtr, int objc, 
-                            Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		DestroyMenuButton _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
+			    int imgHeight);
+static char *		MenuButtonTextVarProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name1,
+			    const char *name2, int flags);
+static int		MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		ConfigureMenuButton(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkMenuButton *mbPtr, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		DestroyMenuButton(char *memPtr);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "button", "label",
- *	"radiobutton", and "checkbutton" Tcl commands.  See the
- *	user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "button", "label",
+ *	"radiobutton", and "checkbutton" Tcl commands. See the user
+ *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -202,11 +199,11 @@ static void		DestroyMenuButton _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
  */
 
 int
-Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     register TkMenuButton *mbPtr;
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
@@ -222,14 +219,14 @@ Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
      */
 
     tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL);
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has already
-     * been created, the cached pointer will be returned.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, the cached pointer will be returned.
      */
 
     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
@@ -246,9 +243,9 @@ Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     mbPtr->tkwin = tkwin;
     mbPtr->display = Tk_Display (tkwin);
     mbPtr->interp = interp;
-    mbPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, 
-            Tk_PathName(mbPtr->tkwin), MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd, 
-            (ClientData) mbPtr, MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc);
+    mbPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
+	    Tk_PathName(mbPtr->tkwin), MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd,
+	    (ClientData) mbPtr, MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc);
     mbPtr->optionTable = optionTable;
     mbPtr->menuName = NULL;
     mbPtr->text = NULL;
@@ -318,9 +315,9 @@ Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -332,66 +329,62 @@ Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about button widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about button widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     register TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *) clientData;
     int result, index;
     Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
 
     if (objc < 2) {
-        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], 
-            commandNames, "option", 0, &index);
+    result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], commandNames, "option", 0,
+	    &index);
     if (result != TCL_OK) {
-        return result;
+	return result;
     }
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) mbPtr);
 
     switch (index) {
-        case COMMAND_CGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option");
+    case COMMAND_CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option");
 	    goto error;
-	    }
+	}
 
-	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) mbPtr,
-                    mbPtr->optionTable, objv[2], mbPtr->tkwin);
-	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
-	        goto error;
-	    } else {
-	        Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) mbPtr,
+		mbPtr->optionTable, objv[2], mbPtr->tkwin);
+	if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	    goto error;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
 	}
+	break;
 
-        case COMMAND_CONFIGURE: {
-	    if (objc <= 3) {
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) mbPtr,
-			mbPtr->optionTable,
-			(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-			mbPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    goto error;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		}
+    case COMMAND_CONFIGURE:
+	if (objc <= 3) {
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) mbPtr,
+		    mbPtr->optionTable, (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL,
+		    mbPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
+		goto error;
 	    } else {
-		result = ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc-2, 
-		        objv+2);
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc-2, objv+2);
 	}
+	break;
     }
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) mbPtr);
     return result;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) mbPtr);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -401,10 +394,10 @@ MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * DestroyMenuButton --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to recycle all of the resources
- *	associated with a menubutton widget.  It is invoked as a
- *	when-idle handler in order to make sure that there is no
- *	other use of the menubutton pending at the time of the deletion.
+ *	This function is invoked to recycle all of the resources associated
+ *	with a menubutton widget. It is invoked as a when-idle handler in
+ *	order to make sure that there is no other use of the menubutton
+ *	pending at the time of the deletion.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -416,20 +409,19 @@ MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyMenuButton(memPtr)
-    char *memPtr;		/* Info about button widget. */
+DestroyMenuButton(
+    char *memPtr)		/* Info about button widget. */
 {
     register TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *) memPtr;
     TkpDestroyMenuButton(mbPtr);
 
     if (mbPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
-        Tcl_CancelIdleCall(TkpDisplayMenuButton, (ClientData) mbPtr);
+	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(TkpDisplayMenuButton, (ClientData) mbPtr);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then
-     * let Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related
-     * stuff.
+     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let
+     * Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
      */
 
     Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(mbPtr->interp, mbPtr->widgetCmd);
@@ -457,7 +449,7 @@ DestroyMenuButton(memPtr)
 	Tk_FreeBitmap(mbPtr->display, mbPtr->gray);
     }
     if (mbPtr->textLayout != NULL) {
-        Tk_FreeTextLayout(mbPtr->textLayout);
+	Tk_FreeTextLayout(mbPtr->textLayout);
     }
     Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) mbPtr, mbPtr->optionTable, mbPtr->tkwin);
     mbPtr->tkwin = NULL;
@@ -469,31 +461,30 @@ DestroyMenuButton(memPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureMenuButton --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a menubutton widget.
+ *	This function is called to process an argv/argc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) a menubutton
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font,
- *	etc. get set for mbPtr;  old resources get freed, if there
- *	were any.  The menubutton is redisplayed.
+ *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font, etc. get
+ *	set for mbPtr; old resources get freed, if there were any. The
+ *	menubutton is redisplayed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    register TkMenuButton *mbPtr;	
-                                /* Information about widget;  may or may
-				 * not already have values for some 
-				 * fields. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of valid entries in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments. */
+ConfigureMenuButton(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    register TkMenuButton *mbPtr,
+				/* Information about widget; may or may not
+				 * already have values for some fields. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of valid entries in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Arguments. */
 {
     Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
     Tcl_Obj *errorResult = NULL;
@@ -501,21 +492,20 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
     Tk_Image image;
 
     /*
-     * Eliminate any existing trace on variables monitored by the 
-     * menubutton.
+     * Eliminate any existing trace on variables monitored by the menubutton.
      */
 
     if (mbPtr->textVarName != NULL) {
-	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, mbPtr->textVarName, 
+	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, mbPtr->textVarName,
 		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		MenuButtonTextVarProc, (ClientData) mbPtr);
     }
 
     /*
-     * The following loop is potentially executed twice.  During the
-     * first pass configuration options get set to their new values.
-     * If there is an error in this pass, we execute a second pass
-     * to restore all the options to their previous values.
+     * The following loop is potentially executed twice. During the first pass
+     * configuration options get set to their new values. If there is an error
+     * in this pass, we execute a second pass to restore all the options to
+     * their previous values.
      */
 
     for (error = 0; error <= 1; error++) {
@@ -526,7 +516,7 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
 
 	    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) mbPtr,
 		    mbPtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
-		    mbPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, (int *) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+		    mbPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 		continue;
 	    }
 	} else {
@@ -541,8 +531,8 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
 
 	/*
 	 * A few options need special processing, such as setting the
-	 * background from a 3-D border, or filling in complicated
-	 * defaults that couldn't be specified to Tk_SetOptions.
+	 * background from a 3-D border, or filling in complicated defaults
+	 * that couldn't be specified to Tk_SetOptions.
 	 */
 
 	if ((mbPtr->state == STATE_ACTIVE)
@@ -564,17 +554,17 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Get the image for the widget, if there is one.  Allocate the
-	 * new image before freeing the old one, so that the reference
-	 * count doesn't go to zero and cause image data to be discarded.
+	 * Get the image for the widget, if there is one. Allocate the new
+	 * image before freeing the old one, so that the reference count
+	 * doesn't go to zero and cause image data to be discarded.
 	 */
 
 	if (mbPtr->imageString != NULL) {
 	    image = Tk_GetImage(mbPtr->interp, mbPtr->tkwin,
-		    mbPtr->imageString, MenuButtonImageProc, 
+		    mbPtr->imageString, MenuButtonImageProc,
 		    (ClientData) mbPtr);
 	    if (image == NULL) {
-	        return TCL_ERROR;
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    image = NULL;
@@ -590,32 +580,32 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
 
 	if ((mbPtr->bitmap != None) || (mbPtr->image != NULL)) {
 	    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, mbPtr->tkwin, mbPtr->widthString,
-                    &mbPtr->width) != TCL_OK) {
-                widthError:
-	        Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (processing -width option)");
+		    &mbPtr->width) != TCL_OK) {
+	    widthError:
+		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (processing -width option)");
 		continue;
 	    }
 	    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, mbPtr->tkwin, mbPtr->heightString,
 		    &mbPtr->height) != TCL_OK) {
-	        heightError:
-	        Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (processing -height option)");
+	    heightError:
+		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (processing -height option)");
 		continue;
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, mbPtr->widthString, &mbPtr->width)
 		    != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto widthError;
+		goto widthError;
 	    }
 	    if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, mbPtr->heightString, &mbPtr->height)
 		    != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto heightError;
+		goto heightError;
 	    }
 	}
 	break;
     }
 
     if (!error) {
-      Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+	Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
     }
 
     if (mbPtr->textVarName != NULL) {
@@ -624,7 +614,7 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
 	 * Set up a trace to watch for any changes in it, create the variable
 	 * if it doesn't exist, and fetch its current value.
 	 */
-	CONST char *value;
+	const char *value;
 
 	value = Tcl_GetVar(interp, mbPtr->textVarName, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
 	if (value == NULL) {
@@ -646,10 +636,9 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
     if (error) {
 	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(errorResult);
-        return TCL_ERROR;
-    } else {
-        return TCL_OK;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
+    return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -657,22 +646,22 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkMenuButtonWorldChanged --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way and the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts
- *	and determine its new geometry.
+ *	This function is called when the world has changed in some way and the
+ *	widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine its
+ *	new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      TkMenuButton will be relayed out and redisplayed.
+ *	TkMenuButton will be relayed out and redisplayed.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 void
-TkMenuButtonWorldChanged(instanceData)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about widget. */
+TkMenuButtonWorldChanged(
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     XGCValues gcValues;
     GC gc;
@@ -686,9 +675,9 @@ TkMenuButtonWorldChanged(instanceData)
     gcValues.background = Tk_3DBorderColor(mbPtr->normalBorder)->pixel;
 
     /*
-     * Note: GraphicsExpose events are disabled in GC's because they're
-     * used to copy stuff from an off-screen pixmap onto the screen (we know
-     * that there's no problem with obscured areas).
+     * Note: GraphicsExpose events are disabled in GC's because they're used
+     * to copy stuff from an off-screen pixmap onto the screen (we know that
+     * there's no problem with obscured areas).
      */
 
     gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
@@ -729,8 +718,8 @@ TkMenuButtonWorldChanged(instanceData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Allocate the disabled graphics context, for drawing text in
-     * its disabled state.
+     * Allocate the disabled graphics context, for drawing text in its
+     * disabled state.
      */
 
     mask = GCForeground | GCBackground | GCFont;
@@ -762,36 +751,36 @@ TkMenuButtonWorldChanged(instanceData)
  *
  * MenuButtonEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on buttons.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	buttons.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up.
+ *	When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-MenuButtonEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+MenuButtonEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *) clientData;
     if ((eventPtr->type == Expose) && (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0)) {
 	goto redraw;
     } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
 	/*
-	 * Must redraw after size changes, since layout could have changed
-	 * and borders will need to be redrawn.
+	 * Must redraw after size changes, since layout could have changed and
+	 * borders will need to be redrawn.
 	 */
 
 	goto redraw;
     } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
-        DestroyMenuButton((char *) mbPtr);
+	DestroyMenuButton((char *) mbPtr);
     } else if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) {
 	if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) {
 	    mbPtr->flags |= GOT_FOCUS;
@@ -809,7 +798,7 @@ MenuButtonEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
     }
     return;
 
-    redraw:
+  redraw:
     if ((mbPtr->tkwin != NULL) && !(mbPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TkpDisplayMenuButton, (ClientData) mbPtr);
 	mbPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
@@ -821,9 +810,9 @@ MenuButtonEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -835,17 +824,17 @@ MenuButtonEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = mbPtr->tkwin;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (tkwin != NULL) {
@@ -858,8 +847,8 @@ MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * MenuButtonTextVarProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when someone changes the variable
- *	whose contents are to be displayed in a menu button.
+ *	This function is invoked when someone changes the variable whose
+ *	contents are to be displayed in a menu button.
  *
  * Results:
  *	NULL is always returned.
@@ -873,19 +862,20 @@ MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static char *
-MenuButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about button. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
-    CONST char *name1;		/* Name of variable. */
-    CONST char *name2;		/* Second part of variable name. */
-    int flags;			/* Information about what happened. */
+MenuButtonTextVarProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about button. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
+    const char *name1,		/* Name of variable. */
+    const char *name2,		/* Second part of variable name. */
+    int flags)			/* Information about what happened. */
 {
     register TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *) clientData;
-    CONST char *value;
+    const char *value;
+    unsigned len;
 
     /*
-     * If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless
-     * the whole interpreter is going away.
+     * If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless the whole
+     * interpreter is going away.
      */
 
     if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
@@ -896,7 +886,7 @@ MenuButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
 		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		    MenuButtonTextVarProc, clientData);
 	}
-	return (char *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
 
     value = Tcl_GetVar(interp, mbPtr->textVarName, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
@@ -906,8 +896,9 @@ MenuButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
     if (mbPtr->text != NULL) {
 	ckfree(mbPtr->text);
     }
-    mbPtr->text = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(value) + 1));
-    strcpy(mbPtr->text, value);
+    len = 1 + (unsigned) strlen(value);
+    mbPtr->text = (char *) ckalloc(len);
+    memcpy(mbPtr->text, value, len);
     TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry(mbPtr);
 
     if ((mbPtr->tkwin != NULL) && Tk_IsMapped(mbPtr->tkwin)
@@ -915,7 +906,7 @@ MenuButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TkpDisplayMenuButton, (ClientData) mbPtr);
 	mbPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
     }
-    return (char *) NULL;
+    return NULL;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -923,9 +914,9 @@ MenuButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
  *
  * MenuButtonImageProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the image code whenever the manager
- *	for an image does something that affects the size of contents
- *	of an image displayed in a button.
+ *	This function is invoked by the image code whenever the manager for an
+ *	image does something that affects the size of contents of an image
+ *	displayed in a button.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -937,13 +928,13 @@ MenuButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
  */
 
 static void
-MenuButtonImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth, imgHeight)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to widget record. */
-    int x, y;				/* Upper left pixel (within image)
-					 * that must be redisplayed. */
-    int width, height;			/* Dimensions of area to redisplay
-					 * (may be <= 0). */
-    int imgWidth, imgHeight;		/* New dimensions of image. */
+MenuButtonImageProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to widget record. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
+				 * be redisplayed. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be <=
+				 * 0). */
+    int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
 {
     register TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *) clientData;
 
@@ -955,3 +946,11 @@ MenuButtonImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth, imgHeight)
 	}
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkMenubutton.h b/generic/tkMenubutton.h
index 7e36fe6..41af675 100644
--- a/generic/tkMenubutton.h
+++ b/generic/tkMenubutton.h
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
 /*
  * tkMenubutton.h --
  *
- *	Declarations of types and functions used to implement
- *	the menubutton widget.
+ *	Declarations of types and functions used to implement the menubutton
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKMENUBUTTON
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
  */
 
 enum direction {
-    DIRECTION_ABOVE, DIRECTION_BELOW, DIRECTION_FLUSH, 
+    DIRECTION_ABOVE, DIRECTION_BELOW, DIRECTION_FLUSH,
     DIRECTION_LEFT, DIRECTION_RIGHT
 };
 
@@ -44,16 +44,16 @@ enum state {
 };
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each widget managed by
+ * this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the widget.  NULL
-				 * means that the window has been destroyed
-				 * but the data structures haven't yet been
-				 * cleaned up.*/
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget.  Needed, among
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the widget. NULL means
+				 * that the window has been destroyed but the
+				 * data structures haven't yet been cleaned
+				 * up. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget. Needed, among
 				 * other things, so that resources can bee
 				 * freed up even after tkwin has gone away. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with menubutton. */
@@ -67,17 +67,17 @@ typedef struct {
      * Information about what's displayed in the menu button:
      */
 
-    char *text;			/* Text to display in button (malloc'ed)
-				 * or NULL. */
+    char *text;			/* Text to display in button (malloc'ed) or
+				 * NULL. */
     int underline;		/* Index of character to underline. */
-    char *textVarName;		/* Name of variable (malloc'ed) or NULL.
-				 * If non-NULL, button displays the contents
-				 * of this variable. */
-    Pixmap bitmap;		/* Bitmap to display or None.  If not None
-				 * then text and textVar and underline
-				 * are ignored. */
+    char *textVarName;		/* Name of variable (malloc'ed) or NULL. If
+				 * non-NULL, button displays the contents of
+				 * this variable. */
+    Pixmap bitmap;		/* Bitmap to display or None. If not None then
+				 * text and textVar and underline are
+				 * ignored. */
     char *imageString;		/* Name of image to display (malloc'ed), or
-				 * NULL.  If non-NULL, bitmap, text, and
+				 * NULL. If non-NULL, bitmap, text, and
 				 * textVarName are ignored. */
     Tk_Image image;		/* Image to display in window, or NULL if
 				 * none. */
@@ -86,115 +86,113 @@ typedef struct {
      * Information used when displaying widget:
      */
 
-    enum state state;          	/* State of button for display purposes:
+    enum state state;		/* State of button for display purposes:
 				 * normal, active, or disabled. */
-    Tk_3DBorder normalBorder;	/* Structure used to draw 3-D
-				 * border and background when window
-				 * isn't active.  NULL means no such
-				 * border exists. */
-    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;	/* Structure used to draw 3-D
-				 * border and background when window
-				 * is active.  NULL means no such
-				 * border exists. */
+    Tk_3DBorder normalBorder;	/* Structure used to draw 3-D border and
+				 * background when window isn't active. NULL
+				 * means no such border exists. */
+    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;	/* Structure used to draw 3-D border and
+				 * background when window is active. NULL
+				 * means no such border exists. */
     int borderWidth;		/* Width of border. */
     int relief;			/* 3-d effect: TK_RELIEF_RAISED, etc. */
-    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw
-				 * around widget when it has the focus.
-				 * <= 0 means don't draw a highlight. */
-    XColor *highlightBgColorPtr;
-				/* Color for drawing traversal highlight
-				 * area when highlight is off. */
+    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw around
+				 * widget when it has the focus. <= 0 means
+				 * don't draw a highlight. */
+    XColor *highlightBgColorPtr;/* Color for drawing traversal highlight area
+				 * when highlight is off. */
     XColor *highlightColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing traversal highlight. */
     int inset;			/* Total width of all borders, including
 				 * traversal highlight and 3-D border.
-				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must
-				 * be offset from outside edges to leave
-				 * room for borders. */
+				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must be
+				 * offset from outside edges to leave room for
+				 * borders. */
     Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Information about text font, or NULL. */
     XColor *normalFg;		/* Foreground color in normal mode. */
-    XColor *activeFg;		/* Foreground color in active mode.  NULL
-				 * means use normalFg instead. */
-    XColor *disabledFg;		/* Foreground color when disabled.  NULL
-				 * means use normalFg with a 50% stipple
-				 * instead. */
+    XColor *activeFg;		/* Foreground color in active mode. NULL means
+				 * use normalFg instead. */
+    XColor *disabledFg;		/* Foreground color when disabled. NULL means
+				 * use normalFg with a 50% stipple instead. */
     GC normalTextGC;		/* GC for drawing text in normal mode. */
     GC activeTextGC;		/* GC for drawing text in active mode (NULL
 				 * means use normalTextGC). */
     Pixmap gray;		/* Pixmap for displaying disabled text/icon if
 				 * disabledFg is NULL. */
-    GC disabledGC;		/* Used to produce disabled effect for text. */
-    GC stippleGC;		/* Used to produce disabled stipple effect
-				 * for images when disabled. */
+    GC disabledGC;		/* Used to produce disabled effect for
+				 * text. */
+    GC stippleGC;		/* Used to produce disabled stipple effect for
+				 * images when disabled. */
     int leftBearing;		/* Distance from text origin to leftmost drawn
 				 * pixel (positive means to right). */
-    int rightBearing;		/* Amount text sticks right from its origin. */
-    char *widthString;		/* Value of -width option.  Malloc'ed. */
-    char *heightString;		/* Value of -height option.  Malloc'ed. */
+    int rightBearing;		/* Amount text sticks right from its
+				 * origin. */
+    char *widthString;		/* Value of -width option. Malloc'ed. */
+    char *heightString;		/* Value of -height option. Malloc'ed. */
     int width, height;		/* If > 0, these specify dimensions to request
 				 * for window, in characters for text and in
-				 * pixels for bitmaps.  In this case the actual
+				 * pixels for bitmaps. In this case the actual
 				 * size of the text string or bitmap is
-				 * ignored in computing desired window size. */
+				 * ignored in computing desired window
+				 * size. */
     int wrapLength;		/* Line length (in pixels) at which to wrap
-				 * onto next line.  <= 0 means don't wrap
+				 * onto next line. <= 0 means don't wrap
 				 * except at newlines. */
     int padX, padY;		/* Extra space around text or bitmap (pixels
 				 * on each side). */
     Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Where text/bitmap should be displayed
 				 * inside window region. */
-    Tk_Justify justify;		/* Justification to use for multi-line text. */
+    Tk_Justify justify;		/* Justification to use for multi-line
+				 * text. */
     int textWidth;		/* Width needed to display text as requested,
 				 * in pixels. */
     int textHeight;		/* Height needed to display text as requested,
 				 * in pixels. */
     Tk_TextLayout textLayout;	/* Saved text layout information. */
-    int indicatorOn;		/* Non-zero means display indicator;  0 means
+    int indicatorOn;		/* Non-zero means display indicator; 0 means
 				 * don't display. */
-    int indicatorHeight;	/* Height of indicator in pixels.  This same
+    int indicatorHeight;	/* Height of indicator in pixels. This same
 				 * amount of extra space is also left on each
-				 * side of the indicator. 0 if no indicator. */
+				 * side of the indicator. 0 if no
+				 * indicator. */
     int indicatorWidth;		/* Width of indicator in pixels, including
-				 * indicatorHeight in padding on each side.
-				 * 0 if no indicator. */
+				 * indicatorHeight in padding on each side. 0
+				 * if no indicator. */
 
     /*
      * Miscellaneous information:
      */
 
-    int compound;               /* Value of -compound option; specifies whether
-                                 * the menubutton should show both an image and
-                                 * text, and, if so, how. */
-
-    enum direction direction;	/* Direction for where to pop the menu.
-    				 * Valid directions are "above", "below",
-    				 * "left", "right", and "flush". "flush"
-    				 * means that the upper left corner of the
-    				 * menubutton is where the menu pops up.
-    				 * "above" and "below" will attempt to pop
-    				 * the menu compleletly above or below
-    				 * the menu respectively.
-    				 * "left" and "right" will pop the menu
-    				 * left or right, and the active item
-    				 * will be next to the button. */
+    int compound;		/* Value of -compound option; specifies
+				 * whether the menubutton should show both an
+				 * image and text, and, if so, how. */
+    enum direction direction;	/* Direction for where to pop the menu. Valid
+    				 * directions are "above", "below", "left",
+    				 * "right", and "flush". "flush" means that
+    				 * the upper left corner of the menubutton is
+    				 * where the menu pops up. "above" and "below"
+    				 * will attempt to pop the menu compleletly
+    				 * above or below the menu respectively.
+    				 * "left" and "right" will pop the menu left
+    				 * or right, and the active item will be next
+    				 * to the button. */
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
-    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option;  not used in
-				 * the C code, but used by keyboard traversal
-				 * scripts.  Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flags;  see below for
+    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
+				 * C code, but used by keyboard traversal
+				 * scripts. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
+    int flags;			/* Various flags; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
 } TkMenuButton;
 
 /*
  * Flag bits for buttons:
  *
- * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler
- *				has already been queued to redraw
- *				this window.
- * POSTED:			Non-zero means that the menu associated
- *				with this button has been posted (typically
- *				because of an active button press).
- * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this button currently
- *				has the input focus.
+ * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler has
+ *				already been queued to redraw this window.
+ * POSTED:			Non-zero means that the menu associated with
+ *				this button has been posted (typically because
+ *				of an active button press).
+ * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this button currently has the
+ *				input focus.
  */
 
 #define REDRAW_PENDING		1
@@ -203,7 +201,7 @@ typedef struct {
 
 /*
  * The following constants define the dimensions of the cascade indicator,
- * which is displayed if the "-indicatoron" option is true.  The units for
+ * which is displayed if the "-indicatoron" option is true. The units for
  * these options are 1/10 millimeters.
  */
 
@@ -214,22 +212,17 @@ typedef struct {
  * Declaration of variables shared between the files in the button module.
  */
 
-extern Tk_ClassProcs tkpMenubuttonClass;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tk_ClassProcs tkpMenubuttonClass;
 
 /*
- * Declaration of procedures used in the implementation of the button
- * widget. 
+ * Declaration of procedures used in the implementation of the button widget.
  */
 
-EXTERN void		TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenuButton *mbPtr));
-EXTERN TkMenuButton *	TkpCreateMenuButton _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-EXTERN void		TkpDisplayMenuButton _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-EXTERN void 		TkpDestroyMenuButton _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenuButton *mbPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkMenuButtonWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData instanceData));
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry(TkMenuButton *mbPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkMenuButton *TkpCreateMenuButton(Tk_Window tkwin);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpDisplayMenuButton(ClientData clientData);
+MODULE_SCOPE void 	TkpDestroyMenuButton(TkMenuButton *mbPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkMenuButtonWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
 
 # undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
diff --git a/generic/tkMessage.c b/generic/tkMessage.c
index 0b3f36d..0fd57a9 100644
--- a/generic/tkMessage.c
+++ b/generic/tkMessage.c
@@ -1,35 +1,34 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkMessage.c --
  *
- *	This module implements a message widgets for the Tk
- *	toolkit.  A message widget displays a multi-line string
- *	in a window according to a particular aspect ratio.
+ *	This module implements a message widgets for the Tk toolkit. A message
+ *	widget displays a multi-line string in a window according to a
+ *	particular aspect ratio.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Ajuba Solutions.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "default.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each message
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each message widget
+ * managed by this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the message.  NULL
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the message. NULL
 				 * means that the window has been destroyed
 				 * but the data structures haven't yet been
 				 * cleaned up.*/
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Table that defines options available for
 				 * this widget. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget.  Used, among
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget. Used, among
 				 * other things, so that resources can be
 				 * freed even after tkwin has gone away. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with message. */
@@ -46,8 +45,8 @@ typedef struct {
 				 * If non-NULL, message displays the contents
 				 * of this variable. */
     Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Structure used to draw 3-D border and
-				 * background.  NULL means a border hasn't
-				 * been created yet. */
+				 * background. NULL means a border hasn't been
+				 * created yet. */
     int borderWidth;		/* Width of border. */
     int relief;			/* 3-D effect: TK_RELIEF_RAISED, etc. */
     int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw
@@ -61,7 +60,7 @@ typedef struct {
     XColor *fgColorPtr;		/* Foreground color in normal mode. */
     Tcl_Obj *padXPtr, *padYPtr;	/* Tcl_Obj rep's of padX, padY values. */
     int padX, padY;		/* User-requested extra space around text. */
-    int width;			/* User-requested width, in pixels.  0 means
+    int width;			/* User-requested width, in pixels. 0 means
 				 * compute width using aspect ratio below. */
     int aspect;			/* Desired aspect ratio for window
 				 * (100*width/height). */
@@ -82,10 +81,10 @@ typedef struct {
      */
 
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
-    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option;  not used in
-				 * the C code, but used by keyboard traversal
-				 * scripts.  Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flags;  see below for
+    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
+				 * C code, but used by keyboard traversal
+				 * scripts. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
+    int flags;			/* Various flags; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
 } Message;
 
@@ -108,7 +107,7 @@ typedef struct {
  * Information used for argv parsing.
  */
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor", DEF_MESSAGE_ANCHOR,
 	 -1, Tk_Offset(Message, anchor), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-aspect", "aspect", "Aspect", DEF_MESSAGE_ASPECT,
@@ -116,9 +115,9 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	 DEF_MESSAGE_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, border), 0,
 	 (ClientData) DEF_MESSAGE_BG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL,
 	 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL,
 	 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
 	 DEF_MESSAGE_BORDER_WIDTH, -1,
@@ -126,7 +125,7 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
 	 DEF_MESSAGE_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, cursor),
 	 TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL, NULL,
 	 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	DEF_MESSAGE_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
@@ -161,35 +160,31 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width",
 	DEF_MESSAGE_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Message, width), 0, 0 ,0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		MessageCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		MessageEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static char *		MessageTextVarProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+static void		MessageCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		MessageEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static char *		MessageTextVarProc(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name1,
-			    CONST char *name2, int flags));
-static int		MessageWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    CONST char *name2, int flags);
+static int		MessageWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-	                    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		MessageWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData instanceData));
-static void		ComputeMessageGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Message *msgPtr));
-static int		ConfigureMessage _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Message *msgPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
-			    int flags));
-static void		DestroyMessage _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static void		DisplayMessage _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		MessageWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
+static void		ComputeMessageGeometry(Message *msgPtr);
+static int		ConfigureMessage(Tcl_Interp *interp, Message *msgPtr,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags);
+static void		DestroyMessage(char *memPtr);
+static void		DisplayMessage(ClientData clientData);
 
 /*
- * The structure below defines message class behavior by means of procedures
+ * The structure below defines message class behavior by means of functions
  * that can be invoked from generic window code.
  */
 
@@ -197,16 +192,14 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs messageClass = {
     sizeof(Tk_ClassProcs),	/* size */
     MessageWorldChanged,	/* worldChangedProc */
 };
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_MessageObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "message" Tcl
- *	command.  See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "message" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -218,11 +211,11 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs messageClass = {
  */
 
 int
-Tk_MessageObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument strings. */
+Tk_MessageObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument strings. */
 {
     register Message *msgPtr;
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
@@ -234,14 +227,14 @@ Tk_MessageObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL);
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has already
-     * been created, the cached pointer will be returned.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, the cached pointer will be returned.
      */
 
     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
@@ -252,19 +245,20 @@ Tk_MessageObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     /*
      * Set values for those fields that don't take a 0 or NULL value.
      */
-    msgPtr->tkwin		= tkwin;
-    msgPtr->display		= Tk_Display(tkwin);
-    msgPtr->interp		= interp;
-    msgPtr->widgetCmd		= Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
+
+    msgPtr->tkwin = tkwin;
+    msgPtr->display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    msgPtr->interp = interp;
+    msgPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
 	    Tk_PathName(msgPtr->tkwin), MessageWidgetObjCmd,
 	    (ClientData) msgPtr, MessageCmdDeletedProc);
-    msgPtr->optionTable		= optionTable;
-    msgPtr->relief		= TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
-    msgPtr->textGC		= None;
-    msgPtr->anchor		= TK_ANCHOR_CENTER;
-    msgPtr->aspect		= 150;
-    msgPtr->justify		= TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
-    msgPtr->cursor		= None;
+    msgPtr->optionTable = optionTable;
+    msgPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+    msgPtr->textGC = None;
+    msgPtr->anchor = TK_ANCHOR_CENTER;
+    msgPtr->aspect = 150;
+    msgPtr->justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+    msgPtr->cursor = None;
 
     Tk_SetClass(msgPtr->tkwin, "Message");
     Tk_SetClassProcs(msgPtr->tkwin, &messageClass, (ClientData) msgPtr);
@@ -290,9 +284,9 @@ Tk_MessageObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * MessageWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -304,19 +298,19 @@ Tk_MessageObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-MessageWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about message widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument strings. */
+MessageWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about message widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument strings. */
 {
     register Message *msgPtr = (Message *) clientData;
-    static CONST char *optionStrings[] = { "cget", "configure", (char *) NULL };
+    static CONST char *optionStrings[] = { "cget", "configure", NULL };
     enum options { MESSAGE_CGET, MESSAGE_CONFIGURE };
     int index;
     int result = TCL_OK;
     Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
-    
+
     if (objc < 2) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -328,43 +322,40 @@ MessageWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) msgPtr);
-    
+
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case MESSAGE_CGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+    case MESSAGE_CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	} else {
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) msgPtr,
+		    msgPtr->optionTable, objv[2], msgPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else {
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) msgPtr,
-			msgPtr->optionTable, objv[2], msgPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		    result = TCL_OK;
-		}
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+		result = TCL_OK;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case MESSAGE_CONFIGURE: {
-	    if (objc <= 3) {
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) msgPtr,
-			msgPtr->optionTable,
-			(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-			msgPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		    result = TCL_OK;
-		}
+	break;
+    case MESSAGE_CONFIGURE:
+	if (objc <= 3) {
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) msgPtr,
+		    msgPtr->optionTable, (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL,
+		    msgPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else {
-		result = ConfigureMessage(interp, msgPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0);
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+		result = TCL_OK;
 	    }
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureMessage(interp, msgPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0);
 	}
+	break;
     }
-    
+
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) msgPtr);
     return result;
 }
@@ -374,9 +365,9 @@ MessageWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * DestroyMessage --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a message at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	This function is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to clean
+ *	up the internal structure of a message at a safe time (when no-one is
+ *	using it anymore).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -388,8 +379,8 @@ MessageWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyMessage(memPtr)
-    char *memPtr;		/* Info about message widget. */
+DestroyMessage(
+    char *memPtr)		/* Info about message widget. */
 {
     register Message *msgPtr = (Message *) memPtr;
 
@@ -399,11 +390,10 @@ DestroyMessage(memPtr)
     if (msgPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
 	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayMessage, (ClientData) msgPtr);
     }
-   
+
     /*
-     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then
-     * let Tk_FreeConfigOptions handle all the standard option-related
-     * stuff.
+     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let
+     * Tk_FreeConfigOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
      */
 
     if (msgPtr->textGC != None) {
@@ -427,30 +417,29 @@ DestroyMessage(memPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureMessage --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a message widget.
+ *	This function is called to process an argv/argc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) a message
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font,
- *	etc. get set for msgPtr;  old resources get freed, if there
- *	were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font, etc. get
+ *	set for msgPtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureMessage(interp, msgPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    register Message *msgPtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or may
-				 * not already have values for some fields. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
+ConfigureMessage(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    register Message *msgPtr,	/* Information about widget; may or may not
+				 * already have values for some fields. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Arguments. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
 {
     Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
 
@@ -459,22 +448,21 @@ ConfigureMessage(interp, msgPtr, objc, objv, flags)
      */
 
     if (msgPtr->textVarName != NULL) {
-	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, msgPtr->textVarName, 
+	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, msgPtr->textVarName,
 		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		MessageTextVarProc, (ClientData) msgPtr);
     }
 
     if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) msgPtr, msgPtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
-	    msgPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, (int *)NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+	    msgPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 	Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-	    
-    
+
     /*
-     * If the message is to display the value of a variable, then set up
-     * a trace on the variable's value, create the variable if it doesn't
-     * exist, and fetch its current value.
+     * If the message is to display the value of a variable, then set up a
+     * trace on the variable's value, create the variable if it doesn't exist,
+     * and fetch its current value.
      */
 
     if (msgPtr->textVarName != NULL) {
@@ -496,9 +484,9 @@ ConfigureMessage(interp, msgPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * A few other options need special processing, such as setting
-     * the background from a 3-D border or handling special defaults
-     * that couldn't be specified to Tk_ConfigureWidget.
+     * A few other options need special processing, such as setting the
+     * background from a 3-D border or handling special defaults that couldn't
+     * be specified to Tk_ConfigureWidget.
      */
 
     msgPtr->numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(msgPtr->string, -1);
@@ -517,22 +505,22 @@ ConfigureMessage(interp, msgPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * MessageWorldChanged --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way and the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts
- *	and determine its new geometry.
+ *	This function is called when the world has changed in some way and the
+ *	widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine its
+ *	new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      Message will be relayed out and redisplayed.
+ *	Message will be relayed out and redisplayed.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 static void
-MessageWorldChanged(instanceData)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about widget. */
+MessageWorldChanged(
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     XGCValues gcValues;
     GC gc = None;
@@ -562,8 +550,8 @@ MessageWorldChanged(instanceData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Recompute the desired geometry for the window, and arrange for
-     * the window to be redisplayed.
+     * Recompute the desired geometry for the window, and arrange for the
+     * window to be redisplayed.
      */
 
     ComputeMessageGeometry(msgPtr);
@@ -579,23 +567,22 @@ MessageWorldChanged(instanceData)
  *
  * ComputeMessageGeometry --
  *
- *	Compute the desired geometry for a message window,
- *	taking into account the desired aspect ratio for the
- *	window.
+ *	Compute the desired geometry for a message window, taking into account
+ *	the desired aspect ratio for the window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Tk_GeometryRequest is called to inform the geometry
- *	manager of the desired geometry for this window.
+ *	Tk_GeometryRequest is called to inform the geometry manager of the
+ *	desired geometry for this window.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ComputeMessageGeometry(msgPtr)
-    register Message *msgPtr;	/* Information about window. */
+ComputeMessageGeometry(
+    register Message *msgPtr)	/* Information about window. */
 {
     int width, inc, height;
     int thisWidth, thisHeight, maxWidth;
@@ -617,12 +604,11 @@ ComputeMessageGeometry(msgPtr)
     upperBound = msgPtr->aspect + aspect;
 
     /*
-     * Do the computation in multiple passes:  start off with
-     * a very wide window, and compute its height.  Then change
-     * the width and try again.  Reduce the size of the change
-     * and iterate until dimensions are found that approximate
-     * the desired aspect ratio.  Or, if the user gave an explicit
-     * width then just use that.
+     * Do the computation in multiple passes: start off with a very wide
+     * window, and compute its height. Then change the width and try again.
+     * Reduce the size of the change and iterate until dimensions are found
+     * that approximate the desired aspect ratio. Or, if the user gave an
+     * explicit width then just use that.
      */
 
     if (msgPtr->width > 0) {
@@ -665,7 +651,7 @@ ComputeMessageGeometry(msgPtr)
  *
  * DisplayMessage --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws the contents of a message window.
+ *	This function redraws the contents of a message window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -677,8 +663,8 @@ ComputeMessageGeometry(msgPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayMessage(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
+DisplayMessage(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about window. */
 {
     register Message *msgPtr = (Message *) clientData;
     register Tk_Window tkwin = msgPtr->tkwin;
@@ -702,8 +688,8 @@ DisplayMessage(clientData)
 	    0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
 
     /*
-     * Compute starting y-location for message based on message size
-     * and anchor option.
+     * Compute starting y-location for message based on message size and
+     * anchor option.
      */
 
     TkComputeAnchor(msgPtr->anchor, tkwin, msgPtr->padX, msgPtr->padY,
@@ -723,7 +709,7 @@ DisplayMessage(clientData)
 
 	bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(msgPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
 	if (msgPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
-	    fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(msgPtr->highlightColorPtr, Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
+	    fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(msgPtr->highlightColorPtr,Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
 	    TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, msgPtr->highlightWidth,
 		    Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
 	} else {
@@ -738,23 +724,23 @@ DisplayMessage(clientData)
  *
  * MessageEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on messages.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	messages.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up.
+ *	When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-MessageEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+MessageEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     Message *msgPtr = (Message *) clientData;
 
@@ -780,7 +766,7 @@ MessageEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
     }
     return;
 
-    redraw:
+  redraw:
     if ((msgPtr->tkwin != NULL) && !(msgPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayMessage, (ClientData) msgPtr);
 	msgPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
@@ -792,9 +778,9 @@ MessageEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * MessageCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -806,16 +792,16 @@ MessageEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-MessageCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+MessageCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     Message *msgPtr = (Message *) clientData;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (!(msgPtr->flags & MESSAGE_DELETED)) {
@@ -828,34 +814,33 @@ MessageCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * MessageTextVarProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when someone changes the variable
- *	whose contents are to be displayed in a message.
+ *	This function is invoked when someone changes the variable whose
+ *	contents are to be displayed in a message.
  *
  * Results:
  *	NULL is always returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The text displayed in the message will change to match the
- *	variable.
+ *	The text displayed in the message will change to match the variable.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static char *
-MessageTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about message. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
-    CONST char *name1;		/* Name of variable. */
-    CONST char *name2;		/* Second part of variable name. */
-    int flags;			/* Information about what happened. */
+MessageTextVarProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about message. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
+    CONST char *name1,		/* Name of variable. */
+    CONST char *name2,		/* Second part of variable name. */
+    int flags)			/* Information about what happened. */
 {
     register Message *msgPtr = (Message *) clientData;
     CONST char *value;
 
     /*
-     * If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless
-     * the whole interpreter is going away.
+     * If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless the whole
+     * interpreter is going away.
      */
 
     if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
@@ -866,7 +851,7 @@ MessageTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
 		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		    MessageTextVarProc, clientData);
 	}
-	return (char *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
 
     value = Tcl_GetVar(interp, msgPtr->textVarName, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
@@ -886,5 +871,13 @@ MessageTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayMessage, (ClientData) msgPtr);
 	msgPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
     }
-    return (char *) NULL;
+    return NULL;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkObj.c b/generic/tkObj.c
index 291c70d..7672240 100644
--- a/generic/tkObj.c
+++ b/generic/tkObj.c
@@ -1,13 +1,12 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkObj.c --
  *
- *	This file contains procedures that implement the common Tk object
- *	types
+ *	This file contains functions that implement the common Tk object types
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
@@ -15,7 +14,7 @@
 /*
  * The following structure is the internal representation for pixel objects.
  */
- 
+
 typedef struct PixelRep {
     double value;
     int units;
@@ -27,11 +26,11 @@ typedef struct PixelRep {
     ((objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2 == 0)
 
 #define SET_SIMPLEPIXEL(objPtr, intval)			\
-    (objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) (intval);	\
+    (objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = INT2PTR(intval);	\
     (objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2 = 0
 
 #define GET_SIMPLEPIXEL(objPtr)				\
-    ((int) (objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1)
+    (PTR2INT((objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1))
 
 #define SET_COMPLEXPIXEL(objPtr, repPtr)		\
     (objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = 0;		\
@@ -40,11 +39,24 @@ typedef struct PixelRep {
 #define GET_COMPLEXPIXEL(objPtr)			\
     ((PixelRep *) (objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2)
 
+/*
+ * One of these structures is created per thread to store thread-specific
+ * data. In this case, it is used to contain references to selected
+ * Tcl_ObjTypes that we can use as screen distances without conversion. The
+ * "dataKey" below is used to locate the ThreadSpecificData for the current
+ * thread.
+ */
+
+typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
+    const Tcl_ObjType *doubleTypePtr;
+    const Tcl_ObjType *intTypePtr;
+} ThreadSpecificData;
+static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
  * The following structure is the internal representation for mm objects.
  */
- 
+
 typedef struct MMRep {
     double value;
     int units;
@@ -54,41 +66,37 @@ typedef struct MMRep {
 
 /*
  * The following structure is the internal representation for window objects.
- * A WindowRep caches name-to-window lookups.  The cache is invalid
- * if tkwin is NULL or if mainPtr->deletionEpoch does not match epoch.
+ * A WindowRep caches name-to-window lookups. The cache is invalid if tkwin is
+ * NULL or if mainPtr->deletionEpoch does not match epoch.
  */
+
 typedef struct WindowRep {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Cached window; NULL if not found */
-    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* MainWindow associated with tkwin */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Cached window; NULL if not found. */
+    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* MainWindow associated with tkwin. */
     long epoch;			/* Value of mainPtr->deletionEpoch at last
-				 * successful lookup.  */
+				 * successful lookup. */
 } WindowRep;
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		DupMMInternalRep _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *copyPtr));
-static void		DupPixelInternalRep _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *copyPtr));
-static void		DupWindowInternalRep _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *copyPtr));
-static void		FreeMMInternalRep _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		FreePixelInternalRep _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		FreeWindowInternalRep _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		UpdateStringOfMM _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static int		SetMMFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static int		SetPixelFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static int		SetWindowFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+static void		DupMMInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr, Tcl_Obj *copyPtr);
+static void		DupPixelInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr, Tcl_Obj *copyPtr);
+static void		DupWindowInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,Tcl_Obj *copyPtr);
+static void		FreeMMInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		FreePixelInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		FreeWindowInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static ThreadSpecificData *GetTypeCache(void);
+static void		UpdateStringOfMM(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static int		SetMMFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static int		SetPixelFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static int		SetWindowFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
 
 /*
- * The following structure defines the implementation of the "pixel"
- * Tcl object, used for measuring distances.  The pixel object remembers
- * its initial display-independant settings.
+ * The following structure defines the implementation of the "pixel" Tcl
+ * object, used for measuring distances. The pixel object remembers its
+ * initial display-independant settings.
  */
 
 static Tcl_ObjType pixelObjType = {
@@ -100,9 +108,9 @@ static Tcl_ObjType pixelObjType = {
 };
 
 /*
- * The following structure defines the implementation of the "pixel"
- * Tcl object, used for measuring distances.  The pixel object remembers
- * its initial display-independant settings.
+ * The following structure defines the implementation of the "pixel" Tcl
+ * object, used for measuring distances. The pixel object remembers its
+ * initial display-independant settings.
  */
 
 static Tcl_ObjType mmObjType = {
@@ -119,23 +127,46 @@ static Tcl_ObjType mmObjType = {
  */
 
 static Tcl_ObjType windowObjType = {
-    "window",				/* name */
-    FreeWindowInternalRep,		/* freeIntRepProc */
-    DupWindowInternalRep,		/* dupIntRepProc */
-    NULL,				/* updateStringProc */
-    SetWindowFromAny			/* setFromAnyProc */
+    "window",			/* name */
+    FreeWindowInternalRep,	/* freeIntRepProc */
+    DupWindowInternalRep,	/* dupIntRepProc */
+    NULL,			/* updateStringProc */
+    SetWindowFromAny		/* setFromAnyProc */
 };
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetTypeCache --
+ *
+ *	Get (and build if necessary) the cache of useful Tcl object types for
+ *	comparisons in the conversion functions.  This allows optimized checks
+ *	for standard cases.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
 
+static ThreadSpecificData *
+GetTypeCache()
+{
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
+    if (tsdPtr->doubleTypePtr == NULL) {
+	tsdPtr->doubleTypePtr = Tcl_GetObjType("double");
+	tsdPtr->intTypePtr = Tcl_GetObjType("int");
+    }
+    return tsdPtr;
+}
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_GetPixelsFromObj --
+ * GetPixelsFromObjEx --
  *
  *	Attempt to return a pixel value from the Tcl object "objPtr". If the
- *	object is not already a pixel value, an attempt will be made to convert
- *	it to one.
+ *	object is not already a pixel value, an attempt will be made to
+ *	convert it to one.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a standard Tcl object result. If an error occurs
@@ -143,51 +174,94 @@ static Tcl_ObjType windowObjType = {
  *	result unless "interp" is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a pixel, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a pixel, the conversion will free any old
+ *	internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
+static
 int
-Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, intPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp; 	/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object from which to get pixels. */
-    int *intPtr;		/* Place to store resulting pixels. */
+GetPixelsFromObjEx(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, 	/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* The object from which to get pixels. */
+    int *intPtr,
+    double *dblPtr)		/* Places to store resulting pixels. */
 {
-    int result;
+    int result,fresh;
     double d;
     PixelRep *pixelPtr;
     static double bias[] = {
-	1.0,	10.0,	25.4,	25.4 / 72.0
+	1.0,	10.0,	25.4,	0.35278 /*25.4 / 72.0*/
     };
 
+    /*
+     * Special hacks where the type of the object is known to be something
+     * that is just numeric and cannot require distance conversion. This pokes
+     * holes in Tcl's abstractions, but they are just for optimization, not
+     * semantics.
+     */
+
+    if (objPtr->typePtr != &pixelObjType) {
+	ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = GetTypeCache();
+
+	if (objPtr->typePtr == tsdPtr->doubleTypePtr) {
+	    (void) Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objPtr, &d);
+	    if (dblPtr != NULL) {
+		*dblPtr = d;
+	    }
+	    *intPtr = (int) (d<0 ? d-0.5 : d+0.5);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else if (objPtr->typePtr == tsdPtr->intTypePtr) {
+	    (void) Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objPtr, intPtr);
+	    if (dblPtr) {
+		*dblPtr = (double) (*intPtr);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+    }
+
+ retry:
     if (objPtr->typePtr != &pixelObjType) {
 	result = SetPixelFromAny(interp, objPtr);
 	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    return result;
 	}
+	fresh = 1;
+    } else {
+	fresh = 0;
     }
 
     if (SIMPLE_PIXELREP(objPtr)) {
 	*intPtr = GET_SIMPLEPIXEL(objPtr);
+	if (dblPtr) {
+	    *dblPtr = (double) (*intPtr);
+	}
     } else {
 	pixelPtr = GET_COMPLEXPIXEL(objPtr);
-	if (pixelPtr->tkwin != tkwin) {
+	if ((!fresh) && (pixelPtr->tkwin != tkwin)) {
+	    /*
+	     * In case of exo-screen conversions of non-pixels we force a
+	     * recomputation from the string.
+	     */
+
+	    FreePixelInternalRep(objPtr);
+	    goto retry;
+	}
+	if ((pixelPtr->tkwin != tkwin)||dblPtr) {
 	    d = pixelPtr->value;
 	    if (pixelPtr->units >= 0) {
 		d *= bias[pixelPtr->units] * WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
 		d /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
 	    }
-	    if (d < 0) {
-		pixelPtr->returnValue = (int) (d - 0.5);
-	    } else {
-		pixelPtr->returnValue = (int) (d + 0.5);
-	    }
+	    pixelPtr->returnValue = (int) (d<0 ? d-0.5 : d+0.5);
 	    pixelPtr->tkwin = tkwin;
+	    if (dblPtr) {
+		*dblPtr = d;
+	    }
 	}
-        *intPtr = pixelPtr->returnValue;
+	*intPtr = pixelPtr->returnValue;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -195,6 +269,88 @@ Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, intPtr)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * Tk_GetPixelsFromObj --
+ *
+ *	Attempt to return a pixel value from the Tcl object "objPtr". If the
+ *	object is not already a pixel value, an attempt will be made to
+ *	convert it to one.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl object result. If an error occurs
+ *	during conversion, an error message is left in the interpreter's
+ *	result unless "interp" is NULL.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If the object is not already a pixel, the conversion will free any old
+ *	internal representation.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, 	/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* The object from which to get pixels. */
+    int *intPtr)		/* Place to store resulting pixels. */
+{
+    return GetPixelsFromObjEx(interp,tkwin,objPtr,intPtr,NULL);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj --
+ *
+ *	Attempt  to  return   a  double  pixel  value  from   the  Tcl  object
+ *	"objPtr". If the object is not  already a pixel value, an attempt will
+ *	be made to convert it to one, the internal unit being pixels.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl object result. If an error occurs
+ *	during conversion, an error message is left in the interpreter's
+ *	result unless "interp" is NULL.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If the object is not already a pixel, the conversion will free any old
+ *	internal representation.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, 	/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* The object from which to get pixels. */
+    double *doublePtr)		/* Place to store resulting pixels. */
+{
+    double d;
+    int result,val;
+
+    result = GetPixelsFromObjEx(interp, tkwin, objPtr, &val, &d);
+    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	return result;
+    }
+    if (objPtr->typePtr == &pixelObjType && !SIMPLE_PIXELREP(objPtr)) {
+	PixelRep *pixelPtr = GET_COMPLEXPIXEL(objPtr);
+
+	if (pixelPtr->units >= 0) {
+	    /*
+	     * Internally "shimmer" to pixel units.
+	     */
+
+	    pixelPtr->units = -1;
+	    pixelPtr->value = d;
+	}
+    }
+    *doublePtr = d;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * FreePixelInternalRep --
  *
  *	Deallocate the storage associated with a pixel object's internal
@@ -204,20 +360,19 @@ Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, intPtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Frees objPtr's internal representation and sets objPtr's
- *	internalRep to NULL.
+ *	Frees objPtr's internal representation and sets objPtr's internalRep
+ *	to NULL.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreePixelInternalRep(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Pixel object with internal rep to free. */
+FreePixelInternalRep(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Pixel object with internal rep to free. */
 {
-    PixelRep *pixelPtr;
-    
     if (!SIMPLE_PIXELREP(objPtr)) {
-	pixelPtr = GET_COMPLEXPIXEL(objPtr);
+	PixelRep *pixelPtr = GET_COMPLEXPIXEL(objPtr);
+
 	ckfree((char *) pixelPtr);
     }
     SET_SIMPLEPIXEL(objPtr, 0);
@@ -229,31 +384,31 @@ FreePixelInternalRep(objPtr)
  *
  * DupPixelInternalRep --
  *
- *	Initialize the internal representation of a pixel Tcl_Obj to a
- *	copy of the internal representation of an existing pixel object. 
+ *	Initialize the internal representation of a pixel Tcl_Obj to a copy of
+ *	the internal representation of an existing pixel object.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	copyPtr's internal rep is set to the pixel corresponding to
- *	srcPtr's internal rep.
+ *	copyPtr's internal rep is set to the pixel corresponding to srcPtr's
+ *	internal rep.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DupPixelInternalRep(srcPtr, copyPtr)
-    register Tcl_Obj *srcPtr;	/* Object with internal rep to copy. */
-    register Tcl_Obj *copyPtr;	/* Object with internal rep to set. */
+DupPixelInternalRep(
+    register Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,	/* Object with internal rep to copy. */
+    register Tcl_Obj *copyPtr)	/* Object with internal rep to set. */
 {
-    PixelRep *oldPtr, *newPtr;
-    
     copyPtr->typePtr = srcPtr->typePtr;
 
     if (SIMPLE_PIXELREP(srcPtr)) {
 	SET_SIMPLEPIXEL(copyPtr, GET_SIMPLEPIXEL(srcPtr));
     } else {
+	PixelRep *oldPtr, *newPtr;
+
 	oldPtr = GET_COMPLEXPIXEL(srcPtr);
 	newPtr = (PixelRep *) ckalloc(sizeof(PixelRep));
 	newPtr->value = oldPtr->value;
@@ -269,8 +424,7 @@ DupPixelInternalRep(srcPtr, copyPtr)
  *
  * SetPixelFromAny --
  *
- *	Attempt to generate a pixel internal form for the Tcl object
- *	"objPtr".
+ *	Attempt to generate a pixel internal form for the Tcl object "objPtr".
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If an error occurs during
@@ -278,70 +432,54 @@ DupPixelInternalRep(srcPtr, copyPtr)
  *	unless "interp" is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If no error occurs, a pixel representation of the object is
- *	stored internally and the type of "objPtr" is set to pixel.
+ *	If no error occurs, a pixel representation of the object is stored
+ *	internally and the type of "objPtr" is set to pixel.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-SetPixelFromAny(interp, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object to convert. */
+SetPixelFromAny(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object to convert. */
 {
-    Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
+    const Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
     char *string, *rest;
     double d;
     int i, units;
-    PixelRep *pixelPtr;
 
     string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, NULL);
 
     d = strtod(string, &rest);
     if (rest == string) {
-	/*
-	 * Must copy string before resetting the result in case a caller
-	 * is trying to convert the interpreter's result to pixels.
-	 */
-
-	char buf[100];
-
-	error:
-	sprintf(buf, "bad screen distance \"%.50s\"", string);
-	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL);
-	return TCL_ERROR;
+	goto error;
     }
     while ((*rest != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*rest))) {
 	rest++;
     }
-    switch (*rest) {
-	case '\0':
-	    units = -1;
-	    break;
 
-	case 'm':
-	    units = 0;
-	    break;
-
-	case 'c':
-	    units = 1;
-	    break;
-
-	case 'i':
-	    units = 2;
-	    break;
-
-	case 'p':
-	    units = 3;
-	    break;
-
-	default:
-	    goto error;
+    switch (*rest) {
+    case '\0':
+	units = -1;
+	break;
+    case 'm':
+	units = 0;
+	break;
+    case 'c':
+	units = 1;
+	break;
+    case 'i':
+	units = 2;
+	break;
+    case 'p':
+	units = 3;
+	break;
+    default:
+	goto error;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. 
+     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
      */
 
     typePtr = objPtr->typePtr;
@@ -355,7 +493,8 @@ SetPixelFromAny(interp, objPtr)
     if ((units < 0) && (i == d)) {
 	SET_SIMPLEPIXEL(objPtr, i);
     } else {
-	pixelPtr = (PixelRep *) ckalloc(sizeof(PixelRep));
+	PixelRep *pixelPtr = (PixelRep *) ckalloc(sizeof(PixelRep));
+
 	pixelPtr->value = d;
 	pixelPtr->units = units;
 	pixelPtr->tkwin = NULL;
@@ -363,6 +502,21 @@ SetPixelFromAny(interp, objPtr)
 	SET_COMPLEXPIXEL(objPtr, pixelPtr);
     }
     return TCL_OK;
+
+  error:
+    if (interp != NULL) {
+	/*
+	 * Must copy string before resetting the result in case a caller is
+	 * trying to convert the interpreter's result to pixels.
+	 */
+
+	char buf[100];
+
+	sprintf(buf, "bad screen distance \"%.50s\"", string);
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL);
+    }
+    return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -380,24 +534,24 @@ SetPixelFromAny(interp, objPtr)
  *	result unless "interp" is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a pixel, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a pixel, the conversion will free any old
+ *	internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetMMFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, doublePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp; 	/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object from which to get mms. */
-    double *doublePtr;		/* Place to store resulting millimeters. */
+Tk_GetMMFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, 	/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* The object from which to get mms. */
+    double *doublePtr)		/* Place to store resulting millimeters. */
 {
     int result;
     double d;
     MMRep *mmPtr;
     static double bias[] = {
-	10.0,	25.4,	1.0,	25.4 / 72.0
+	10.0,	25.4,	1.0,	0.35278 /*25.4 / 72.0*/
     };
 
     if (objPtr->typePtr != &mmObjType) {
@@ -436,15 +590,15 @@ Tk_GetMMFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, doublePtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Frees objPtr's internal representation and sets objPtr's
- *	internalRep to NULL.
+ *	Frees objPtr's internal representation and sets objPtr's internalRep
+ *	to NULL.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeMMInternalRep(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* MM object with internal rep to free. */
+FreeMMInternalRep(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* MM object with internal rep to free. */
 {
     ckfree((char *) objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr);
     objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr = NULL;
@@ -456,26 +610,26 @@ FreeMMInternalRep(objPtr)
  *
  * DupMMInternalRep --
  *
- *	Initialize the internal representation of a pixel Tcl_Obj to a
- *	copy of the internal representation of an existing pixel object. 
+ *	Initialize the internal representation of a pixel Tcl_Obj to a copy of
+ *	the internal representation of an existing pixel object.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	copyPtr's internal rep is set to the pixel corresponding to
- *	srcPtr's internal rep.
+ *	copyPtr's internal rep is set to the pixel corresponding to srcPtr's
+ *	internal rep.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DupMMInternalRep(srcPtr, copyPtr)
-    register Tcl_Obj *srcPtr;	/* Object with internal rep to copy. */
-    register Tcl_Obj *copyPtr;	/* Object with internal rep to set. */
+DupMMInternalRep(
+    register Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,	/* Object with internal rep to copy. */
+    register Tcl_Obj *copyPtr)	/* Object with internal rep to set. */
 {
     MMRep *oldPtr, *newPtr;
-    
+
     copyPtr->typePtr = srcPtr->typePtr;
     oldPtr = (MMRep *) srcPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr;
     newPtr = (MMRep *) ckalloc(sizeof(MMRep));
@@ -491,24 +645,23 @@ DupMMInternalRep(srcPtr, copyPtr)
  *
  * UpdateStringOfMM --
  *
- *      Update the string representation for a pixel Tcl_Obj
- *      this function is only called, if the pixel Tcl_Obj has no unit,
- *      because with units the string representation is created by
- *      SetMMFromAny
+ *	Update the string representation for a pixel Tcl_Obj this function is
+ *	only called, if the pixel Tcl_Obj has no unit, because with units the
+ *	string representation is created by SetMMFromAny
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      The object's string is set to a valid string that results from
- *      the double-to-string conversion.
+ *	The object's string is set to a valid string that results from the
+ *	double-to-string conversion.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-UpdateStringOfMM(objPtr)
-    register Tcl_Obj *objPtr;   /* pixel obj with string rep to update. */
+UpdateStringOfMM(
+    register Tcl_Obj *objPtr)   /* pixel obj with string rep to update. */
 {
     MMRep *mmPtr;
     char buffer[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
@@ -517,11 +670,11 @@ UpdateStringOfMM(objPtr)
     mmPtr = (MMRep *) objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr;
     /* assert( mmPtr->units == -1 && objPtr->bytes == NULL ); */
     if ((mmPtr->units != -1) || (objPtr->bytes != NULL)) {
-        panic("UpdateStringOfMM: false precondition");
+	Tcl_Panic("UpdateStringOfMM: false precondition");
     }
 
-    Tcl_PrintDouble((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, mmPtr->value, buffer);
-    len = strlen(buffer);
+    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, mmPtr->value, buffer);
+    len = (int)strlen(buffer);
 
     objPtr->bytes = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) len + 1);
     strcpy(objPtr->bytes, buffer);
@@ -533,8 +686,7 @@ UpdateStringOfMM(objPtr)
  *
  * SetMMFromAny --
  *
- *	Attempt to generate a mm internal form for the Tcl object
- *	"objPtr".
+ *	Attempt to generate a mm internal form for the Tcl object "objPtr".
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If an error occurs during
@@ -542,49 +694,38 @@ UpdateStringOfMM(objPtr)
  *	unless "interp" is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If no error occurs, a mm representation of the object is
- *	stored internally and the type of "objPtr" is set to mm.
+ *	If no error occurs, a mm representation of the object is stored
+ *	internally and the type of "objPtr" is set to mm.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-SetMMFromAny(interp, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object to convert. */
+SetMMFromAny(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object to convert. */
 {
-    Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = GetTypeCache();
+    const Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
     char *string, *rest;
     double d;
     int units;
     MMRep *mmPtr;
 
-    static Tcl_ObjType *tclDoubleObjType = NULL;
-    static Tcl_ObjType *tclIntObjType = NULL;
-
-    if (tclDoubleObjType == NULL) {
-	/*
-	 * Cache the object types for comaprison below.
-	 * This allows optimized checks for standard cases.
-	 */
-
-	tclDoubleObjType = Tcl_GetObjType("double");
-	tclIntObjType    = Tcl_GetObjType("int");
-    }
-
-    if (objPtr->typePtr == tclDoubleObjType) {
+    if (objPtr->typePtr == tsdPtr->doubleTypePtr) {
 	Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objPtr, &d);
 	units = -1;
-    } else if (objPtr->typePtr == tclIntObjType) {
+    } else if (objPtr->typePtr == tsdPtr->intTypePtr) {
 	Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objPtr, &units);
 	d = (double) units;
 	units = -1;
 
 	/*
-	 * In the case of ints, we need to ensure that a valid
-	 * string exists in order for int-but-not-string objects
-	 * to be converted back to ints again from mm obj types.
+	 * In the case of ints, we need to ensure that a valid string exists
+	 * in order for int-but-not-string objects to be converted back to
+	 * ints again from mm obj types.
 	 */
+
 	(void) Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, NULL);
     } else {
 	/*
@@ -600,42 +741,38 @@ SetMMFromAny(interp, objPtr)
 	     * is trying to convert the interpreter's result to mms.
 	     */
 
-	    error:
-            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad screen distance \"", string,
-                    "\"", (char *) NULL);
-            return TCL_ERROR;
-        }
-        while ((*rest != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*rest))) {
-            rest++;
-        }
-        switch (*rest) {
-	    case '\0':
-		units = -1;
-		break;
-
-	    case 'c':
-		units = 0;
-		break;
-
-	    case 'i':
-		units = 1;
-		break;
-
-	    case 'm':
-		units = 2;
-		break;
-
-	    case 'p':
-		units = 3;
-		break;
-
-	    default:
-		goto error;
+	error:
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad screen distance \"", string,
+		    "\"", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	while ((*rest != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*rest))) {
+	    rest++;
+	}
+
+	switch (*rest) {
+	case '\0':
+	    units = -1;
+	    break;
+	case 'c':
+	    units = 0;
+	    break;
+	case 'i':
+	    units = 1;
+	    break;
+	case 'm':
+	    units = 2;
+	    break;
+	case 'p':
+	    units = 3;
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    goto error;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. 
+     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
      */
 
     typePtr = objPtr->typePtr;
@@ -671,18 +808,18 @@ SetMMFromAny(interp, objPtr)
  *	result unless "interp" is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a Tk_Window, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a Tk_Window, the conversion will free any
+ *	old internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, windowPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp; 	/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* A token to get the main window from. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object from which to get window. */
-    Tk_Window *windowPtr;	/* Place to store resulting window. */
+TkGetWindowFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, 	/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* A token to get the main window from. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* The object from which to get window. */
+    Tk_Window *windowPtr)	/* Place to store resulting window. */
 {
     TkMainInfo *mainPtr = ((TkWindow *)tkwin)->mainPtr;
     register WindowRep *winPtr;
@@ -696,11 +833,13 @@ TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, windowPtr)
     winPtr = (WindowRep *) objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr;
     if (    winPtr->tkwin == NULL
 	 || winPtr->mainPtr == NULL
-	 || winPtr->mainPtr != mainPtr 
-	 || winPtr->epoch != mainPtr->deletionEpoch) 
+	 || winPtr->mainPtr != mainPtr
+	 || winPtr->epoch != mainPtr->deletionEpoch)
     {
-	/* Cache is invalid.
+	/*
+	 * Cache is invalid.
 	 */
+
 	winPtr->tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp,
 		Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, NULL), tkwin);
 	winPtr->mainPtr = mainPtr;
@@ -720,14 +859,15 @@ TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, windowPtr)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * SetWindowFromAny --
+ *
  *	Generate a windowObj internal form for the Tcl object "objPtr".
  *
  * Results:
- *	Always returns TCL_OK. 
+ *	Always returns TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Sets objPtr's internal representation to an uninitialized
- *	windowObj. Frees the old internal representation, if any.
+ *	Sets objPtr's internal representation to an uninitialized windowObj.
+ *	Frees the old internal representation, if any.
  *
  * See also:
  * 	TkGetWindowFromObj, which initializes the WindowRep cache.
@@ -736,15 +876,15 @@ TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, windowPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-SetWindowFromAny(interp, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
-    register Tcl_Obj *objPtr;	/* The object to convert. */
+SetWindowFromAny(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
+    register Tcl_Obj *objPtr)	/* The object to convert. */
 {
-    Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
+    const Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
     WindowRep *winPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. 
+     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
      */
 
     Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, NULL);
@@ -769,23 +909,23 @@ SetWindowFromAny(interp, objPtr)
  *
  * DupWindowInternalRep --
  *
- *	Initialize the internal representation of a window Tcl_Obj to a
- *	copy of the internal representation of an existing window object. 
+ *	Initialize the internal representation of a window Tcl_Obj to a copy
+ *	of the internal representation of an existing window object.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	copyPtr's internal rep is set to refer to the same window as
- *	srcPtr's internal rep.
+ *	copyPtr's internal rep is set to refer to the same window as srcPtr's
+ *	internal rep.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DupWindowInternalRep(srcPtr, copyPtr)
-    register Tcl_Obj *srcPtr;
-    register Tcl_Obj *copyPtr;
+DupWindowInternalRep(
+    register Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,
+    register Tcl_Obj *copyPtr)
 {
     register WindowRep *oldPtr, *newPtr;
 
@@ -810,15 +950,15 @@ DupWindowInternalRep(srcPtr, copyPtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Frees objPtr's internal representation and sets objPtr's
- *	internalRep to NULL.
+ *	Frees objPtr's internal representation and sets objPtr's internalRep
+ *	to NULL.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeWindowInternalRep(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Window object with internal rep to free. */
+FreeWindowInternalRep(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Window object with internal rep to free. */
 {
     ckfree((char *) objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr);
     objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr = NULL;
@@ -830,39 +970,39 @@ FreeWindowInternalRep(objPtr)
  *
  * TkParsePadAmount --
  *
- *	This procedure parses a padding specification and returns
- *	the appropriate padding values.  A padding specification can
- *	be either a single pixel width, or a list of two pixel widths.
- *	If a single pixel width, the amount specified is used for 
- *	padding on both sides.  If two amounts are specified, then
- *	they specify the left/right or top/bottom padding.
+ *	This function parses a padding specification and returns the
+ *	appropriate padding values. A padding specification can be either a
+ *	single pixel width, or a list of two pixel widths. If a single pixel
+ *	width, the amount specified is used for padding on both sides. If two
+ *	amounts are specified, then they specify the left/right or top/bottom
+ *	padding.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return value.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	An error message is written to the interpreter is something
- *	is not right.
+ *	An error message is written to the interpreter if something is not
+ *	right.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, specObj, halfPtr, allPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* A window.  Needed by Tk_GetPixels() */
-    Tcl_Obj *specObj;		/* The argument to "-padx", "-pady", "-ipadx",
-				 * or "-ipady".  The thing to be parsed. */
-    int *halfPtr;		/* Write the left/top part of padding here */
-    int *allPtr;		/* Write the total padding here */
+TkParsePadAmount(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* A window.  Needed by Tk_GetPixels() */
+    Tcl_Obj *specObj,		/* The argument to "-padx", "-pady", "-ipadx",
+				 * or "-ipady". The thing to be parsed. */
+    int *halfPtr,		/* Write the left/top part of padding here */
+    int *allPtr)		/* Write the total padding here */
 {
     int firstInt, secondInt;    /* The two components of the padding */
     int objc;			/* The length of the list (should be 1 or 2) */
     Tcl_Obj **objv;		/* The objects in the list */
 
     /*
-     * Check for a common case where a single object would otherwise
-     * be shimmered between a list and a pixel spec.
+     * Check for a common case where a single object would otherwise be
+     * shimmered between a list and a pixel spec.
      */
 
     if (specObj->typePtr == &pixelObjType) {
@@ -870,7 +1010,7 @@ TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, specObj, halfPtr, allPtr)
 	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad pad value \"",
 		    Tcl_GetString(specObj),
-		    "\": must be positive screen distance", (char *) NULL);
+		    "\": must be positive screen distance", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	secondInt = firstInt;
@@ -878,8 +1018,8 @@ TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, specObj, halfPtr, allPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Pad specifications are a list of one or two elements, each of
-     * which is a pixel specification.
+     * Pad specifications are a list of one or two elements, each of which is
+     * a pixel specification.
      */
 
     if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, specObj, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -899,13 +1039,13 @@ TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, specObj, halfPtr, allPtr)
 	    (firstInt < 0)) {
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad pad value \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]),
-		"\": must be positive screen distance", (char *) NULL);
+		"\": must be positive screen distance", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Parse the second part if it exists, otherwise it is as if it
-     * was the same as the first part.
+     * Parse the second part if it exists, otherwise it is as if it was the
+     * same as the first part.
      */
 
     if (objc == 1) {
@@ -915,7 +1055,7 @@ TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, specObj, halfPtr, allPtr)
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad 2nd pad value \"",
 		Tcl_GetString(objv[1]),
-		"\": must be positive screen distance", (char *) NULL);
+		"\": must be positive screen distance", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -942,14 +1082,14 @@ TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, specObj, halfPtr, allPtr)
  *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	All instances of Tcl_ObjType structues used in Tk are registered
- *	with Tcl.
+ *	All instances of Tcl_ObjType structues used in Tk are registered with
+ *	Tcl.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkRegisterObjTypes()
+TkRegisterObjTypes(void)
 {
     Tcl_RegisterObjType(&tkBorderObjType);
     Tcl_RegisterObjType(&tkBitmapObjType);
@@ -961,4 +1101,13 @@ TkRegisterObjTypes()
     Tcl_RegisterObjType(&pixelObjType);
     Tcl_RegisterObjType(&tkStateKeyObjType);
     Tcl_RegisterObjType(&windowObjType);
+    Tcl_RegisterObjType(&tkTextIndexType);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkOldConfig.c b/generic/tkOldConfig.c
index 6c6303d..97ad5cb 100644
--- a/generic/tkOldConfig.c
+++ b/generic/tkOldConfig.c
@@ -1,106 +1,101 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkOldConfig.c --
  *
- *	This file contains the Tk_ConfigureWidget procedure. THIS FILE
- *	IS HERE FOR BACKWARD COMPATIBILITY; THE NEW CONFIGURATION
- *	PACKAGE SHOULD BE USED FOR NEW PROJECTS.
+ *	This file contains the Tk_ConfigureWidget function. THIS FILE IS HERE
+ *	FOR BACKWARD COMPATIBILITY; THE NEW CONFIGURATION PACKAGE SHOULD BE
+ *	USED FOR NEW PROJECTS.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkPort.h"
-#include "tk.h"
 
 /*
- * Values for "flags" field of Tk_ConfigSpec structures.  Be sure
- * to coordinate these values with those defined in tk.h
- * (TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY, etc.).  There must not be overlap!
+ * Values for "flags" field of Tk_ConfigSpec structures. Be sure to coordinate
+ * these values with those defined in tk.h (TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY, etc.) There
+ * must not be overlap!
  *
- * INIT -		Non-zero means (char *) things have been
- *			converted to Tk_Uid's.
+ * INIT -		Non-zero means (char *) things have been converted to
+ *			Tk_Uid's.
  */
 
 #define INIT		0x20
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static int		DoConfig _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr,
-			    Tk_Uid value, int valueIsUid, char *widgRec));
-static Tk_ConfigSpec *	FindConfigSpec _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static int		DoConfig(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr, Tk_Uid value,
+			    int valueIsUid, char *widgRec);
+static Tk_ConfigSpec *	FindConfigSpec(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, CONST char *argvName,
-			    int needFlags, int hateFlags));
-static char *		FormatConfigInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr,
-			    char *widgRec));
-static CONST char *	FormatConfigValue _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr,
-			    char *widgRec, char *buffer,
-			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
-static Tk_ConfigSpec *	GetCachedSpecs _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    CONST Tk_ConfigSpec *staticSpecs));
-static void		DeleteSpecCacheTable _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp));
+			    int needFlags, int hateFlags);
+static char *		FormatConfigInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr, char *widgRec);
+static CONST char *	FormatConfigValue(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr, char *widgRec,
+			    char *buffer, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr);
+static Tk_ConfigSpec *	GetCachedSpecs(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    const Tk_ConfigSpec *staticSpecs);
+static void		DeleteSpecCacheTable(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_ConfigureWidget --
  *
- *	Process command-line options and database options to
- *	fill in fields of a widget record with resources and
- *	other parameters.
+ *	Process command-line options and database options to fill in fields of
+ *	a widget record with resources and other parameters.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  In case of an error,
- *	the interp's result will hold an error message.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. In case of an error, the interp's result
+ *	will hold an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The fields of widgRec get filled in with information from
- *	argc/argv and the option database.  Old information in
- *	widgRec's fields gets recycled. A copy of the spec-table is
- *	taken with (some of) the char* *fields converted into Tk_Uid
- *	fields; this copy will be released when *the interpreter
- *	terminates.
+ *	The fields of widgRec get filled in with information from argc/argv
+ *	and the option database. Old information in widgRec's fields gets
+ *	recycled. A copy of the spec-table is taken with (some of) the char*
+ *	fields converted into Tk_Uid fields; this copy will be released when
+ *	the interpreter terminates.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, origSpecs, argc, argv, widgRec, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window containing widget (needed to
-				 * set up X resources). */
-    Tk_ConfigSpec *origSpecs;	/* Describes legal options. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of elements in argv. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Command-line options. */
-    char *widgRec;		/* Record whose fields are to be
-				 * modified.  Values must be properly
-				 * initialized. */
-    int flags;			/* Used to specify additional flags
-				 * that must be present in config specs
-				 * for them to be considered.  Also,
-				 * may have TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY set. */
+Tk_ConfigureWidget(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing widget (needed to set up
+				 * X resources). */
+    Tk_ConfigSpec *specs,	/* Describes legal options. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of elements in argv. */
+    CONST char **argv,		/* Command-line options. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Record whose fields are to be modified.
+				 * Values must be properly initialized. */
+    int flags)			/* Used to specify additional flags that must
+				 * be present in config specs for them to be
+				 * considered. Also, may have
+				 * TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY set. */
 {
-    register Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, *specPtr, *origSpecPtr;
+    register Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr;
     Tk_Uid value;		/* Value of option from database. */
-    int needFlags;		/* Specs must contain this set of flags
-				 * or else they are not considered. */
-    int hateFlags;		/* If a spec contains any bits here, it's
-				 * not considered. */
+    int needFlags;		/* Specs must contain this set of flags or
+				 * else they are not considered. */
+    int hateFlags;		/* If a spec contains any bits here, it's not
+				 * considered. */
 
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	/*
 	 * Either we're not really in Tk, or the main window was destroyed and
 	 * we're on our way out of the application
 	 */
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "NULL main window", (char *)NULL);
+
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "NULL main window", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -112,19 +107,14 @@ Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, origSpecs, argc, argv, widgRec, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Get the build of the config for this interpreter and reset any
-     * indication of changed options.
+     * Get the build of the config for this interpreter.
      */
 
-    specs = GetCachedSpecs(interp, origSpecs);
-
-    for (specPtr = specs; specPtr->type != TK_CONFIG_END; specPtr++) {
-	specPtr->specFlags &= ~TK_CONFIG_OPTION_SPECIFIED;
-    }
+    specs = GetCachedSpecs(interp, specs);
 
     /*
-     * Pass one:  scan through all of the arguments, processing those
-     * that match entries in the specs.
+     * Pass one: scan through all of the arguments, processing those that
+     * match entries in the specs.
      */
 
     for ( ; argc > 0; argc -= 2, argv += 2) {
@@ -145,8 +135,7 @@ Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, origSpecs, argc, argv, widgRec, flags)
 	 */
 
 	if (argc < 2) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", arg,
-		    "\" missing", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", arg, "\" missing", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (flags & TK_CONFIG_OBJS) {
@@ -162,25 +151,15 @@ Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, origSpecs, argc, argv, widgRec, flags)
 	    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, msg);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	specPtr->specFlags |= TK_CONFIG_OPTION_SPECIFIED;
-    }
-
-    /*
-     * Thread Unsafe!  For compatibility through 8.4.x, we set the original
-     * specPtr flags to indicate changed options.  This has been removed
-     * from 8.5.  Switch to Tcl_Obj-based options instead. [Bug 749908]
-     */
-
-    for (origSpecPtr = origSpecs, specPtr = specs;
-	 specPtr->type != TK_CONFIG_END; origSpecPtr++, specPtr++) {
-	origSpecPtr->specFlags = specPtr->specFlags;
+	if (!(flags & TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY)) {
+	    specPtr->specFlags |= TK_CONFIG_OPTION_SPECIFIED;
+	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Pass two:  scan through all of the specs again;  if no
-     * command-line argument matched a spec, then check for info
-     * in the option database.  If there was nothing in the
-     * database, then use the default.
+     * Pass two: scan through all of the specs again; if no command-line
+     * argument matched a spec, then check for info in the option database.
+     * If there was nothing in the database, then use the default.
      */
 
     if (!(flags & TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY)) {
@@ -188,6 +167,7 @@ Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, origSpecs, argc, argv, widgRec, flags)
 	    if ((specPtr->specFlags & TK_CONFIG_OPTION_SPECIFIED)
 		    || (specPtr->argvName == NULL)
 		    || (specPtr->type == TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM)) {
+		specPtr->specFlags &= ~TK_CONFIG_OPTION_SPECIFIED;
 		continue;
 	    }
 	    if (((specPtr->specFlags & needFlags) != needFlags)
@@ -241,13 +221,13 @@ Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, origSpecs, argc, argv, widgRec, flags)
  *
  * FindConfigSpec --
  *
- *	Search through a table of configuration specs, looking for
- *	one that matches a given argvName.
+ *	Search through a table of configuration specs, looking for one that
+ *	matches a given argvName.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the matching entry, or NULL
- *	if nothing matched.  In that case an error message is left
- *	in the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the matching entry, or NULL if
+ *	nothing matched. In that case an error message is left in the interp's
+ *	result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -256,16 +236,16 @@ Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, origSpecs, argc, argv, widgRec, flags)
  */
 
 static Tk_ConfigSpec *
-FindConfigSpec(interp, specs, argvName, needFlags, hateFlags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for reporting errors. */
-    Tk_ConfigSpec *specs;	/* Pointer to table of configuration
+FindConfigSpec(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for reporting errors. */
+    Tk_ConfigSpec *specs,	/* Pointer to table of configuration
 				 * specifications for a widget. */
-    CONST char *argvName;	/* Name (suitable for use in a "config"
+    CONST char *argvName,	/* Name (suitable for use in a "config"
 				 * command) identifying particular option. */
-    int needFlags;		/* Flags that must be present in matching
+    int needFlags,		/* Flags that must be present in matching
+				 * entry. */
+    int hateFlags)		/* Flags that must NOT be present in matching
 				 * entry. */
-    int hateFlags;		/* Flags that must NOT be present in
-				 * matching entry. */
 {
     register Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr;
     register char c;		/* First character of current argument. */
@@ -293,34 +273,32 @@ FindConfigSpec(interp, specs, argvName, needFlags, hateFlags)
 	}
 	if (matchPtr != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "ambiguous option \"", argvName,
-		    "\"", (char *) NULL);
-	    return (Tk_ConfigSpec *) NULL;
+		    "\"", NULL);
+	    return NULL;
 	}
 	matchPtr = specPtr;
     }
 
     if (matchPtr == NULL) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown option \"", argvName,
-		"\"", (char *) NULL);
-	return (Tk_ConfigSpec *) NULL;
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown option \"", argvName, "\"", NULL);
+	return NULL;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Found a matching entry.  If it's a synonym, then find the
-     * entry that it's a synonym for.
+     * Found a matching entry. If it's a synonym, then find the entry that
+     * it's a synonym for.
      */
 
-    gotMatch:
+  gotMatch:
     specPtr = matchPtr;
     if (specPtr->type == TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM) {
 	for (specPtr = specs; ; specPtr++) {
 	    if (specPtr->type == TK_CONFIG_END) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-			"couldn't find synonym for option \"",
-			argvName, "\"", (char *) NULL);
-		return (Tk_ConfigSpec *) NULL;
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "couldn't find synonym for option \"",
+			argvName, "\"", NULL);
+		return NULL;
 	    }
-	    if ((specPtr->dbName == matchPtr->dbName) 
+	    if ((specPtr->dbName == matchPtr->dbName)
 		    && (specPtr->type != TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM)
 		    && ((specPtr->specFlags & needFlags) == needFlags)
 		    && !(specPtr->specFlags & hateFlags)) {
@@ -336,32 +314,30 @@ FindConfigSpec(interp, specs, argvName, needFlags, hateFlags)
  *
  * DoConfig --
  *
- *	This procedure applies a single configuration option
- *	to a widget record.
+ *	This function applies a single configuration option to a widget
+ *	record.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return value.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	WidgRec is modified as indicated by specPtr and value.
- *	The old value is recycled, if that is appropriate for
- *	the value type.
+ *	WidgRec is modified as indicated by specPtr and value. The old value
+ *	is recycled, if that is appropriate for the value type.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-DoConfig(interp, tkwin, specPtr, value, valueIsUid, widgRec)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window containing widget (needed to
-				 * set up X resources). */
-    Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr;	/* Specifier to apply. */
-    Tk_Uid value;		/* Value to use to fill in widgRec. */
-    int valueIsUid;		/* Non-zero means value is a Tk_Uid;
-				 * zero means it's an ordinary string. */
-    char *widgRec;		/* Record whose fields are to be
-				 * modified.  Values must be properly
-				 * initialized. */
+DoConfig(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing widget (needed to set up
+				 * X resources). */
+    Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr,	/* Specifier to apply. */
+    Tk_Uid value,		/* Value to use to fill in widgRec. */
+    int valueIsUid,		/* Non-zero means value is a Tk_Uid; zero
+				 * means it's an ordinary string. */
+    char *widgRec)		/* Record whose fields are to be modified.
+				 * Values must be properly initialized. */
 {
     char *ptr;
     Tk_Uid uid;
@@ -375,211 +351,209 @@ DoConfig(interp, tkwin, specPtr, value, valueIsUid, widgRec)
     do {
 	ptr = widgRec + specPtr->offset;
 	switch (specPtr->type) {
-	    case TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN:
-		if (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, value, (int *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_INT:
-		if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, value, (int *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE:
-		if (Tcl_GetDouble(interp, value, (double *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_STRING: {
-		char *old, *new;
-
-		if (nullValue) {
-		    new = NULL;
-		} else {
-		    new = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(value) + 1));
-		    strcpy(new, value);
-		}
-		old = *((char **) ptr);
-		if (old != NULL) {
-		    ckfree(old);
-		}
-		*((char **) ptr) = new;
-		break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, value, (int *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case TK_CONFIG_UID:
-		if (nullValue) {
-		    *((Tk_Uid *) ptr) = NULL;
-		} else {
-		    uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
-		    *((Tk_Uid *) ptr) = uid;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_COLOR: {
-		XColor *newPtr, *oldPtr;
-
-		if (nullValue) {
-		    newPtr = NULL;
-		} else {
-		    uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
-		    newPtr = Tk_GetColor(interp, tkwin, uid);
-		    if (newPtr == NULL) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		}
-		oldPtr = *((XColor **) ptr);
-		if (oldPtr != NULL) {
-		    Tk_FreeColor(oldPtr);
-		}
-		*((XColor **) ptr) = newPtr;
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_INT:
+	    if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, value, (int *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE:
+	    if (Tcl_GetDouble(interp, value, (double *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case TK_CONFIG_FONT: {
-		Tk_Font new;
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_STRING: {
+	    char *oldStr, *newStr;
 
-		if (nullValue) {
-		    new = NULL;
-		} else {
-		    new = Tk_GetFont(interp, tkwin, value);
-		    if (new == NULL) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		}
-		Tk_FreeFont(*((Tk_Font *) ptr));
-		*((Tk_Font *) ptr) = new;
-		break;
+	    if (nullValue) {
+		newStr = NULL;
+	    } else {
+		newStr = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(value) + 1));
+		strcpy(newStr, value);
 	    }
-	    case TK_CONFIG_BITMAP: {
-		Pixmap new, old;
-
-		if (nullValue) {
-		    new = None;
-	        } else {
-		    uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
-		    new = Tk_GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, uid);
-		    if (new == None) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		}
-		old = *((Pixmap *) ptr);
-		if (old != None) {
-		    Tk_FreeBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), old);
-		}
-		*((Pixmap *) ptr) = new;
-		break;
+	    oldStr = *((char **) ptr);
+	    if (oldStr != NULL) {
+		ckfree(oldStr);
 	    }
-	    case TK_CONFIG_BORDER: {
-		Tk_3DBorder new, old;
-
-		if (nullValue) {
-		    new = NULL;
-		} else {
-		    uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
-		    new = Tk_Get3DBorder(interp, tkwin, uid);
-		    if (new == NULL) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		}
-		old = *((Tk_3DBorder *) ptr);
-		if (old != NULL) {
-		    Tk_Free3DBorder(old);
-		}
-		*((Tk_3DBorder *) ptr) = new;
-		break;
+	    *((char **) ptr) = newStr;
+	    break;
+	}
+	case TK_CONFIG_UID:
+	    if (nullValue) {
+		*((Tk_Uid *) ptr) = NULL;
+	    } else {
+		uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
+		*((Tk_Uid *) ptr) = uid;
 	    }
-	    case TK_CONFIG_RELIEF:
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_COLOR: {
+	    XColor *newPtr, *oldPtr;
+
+	    if (nullValue) {
+		newPtr = NULL;
+	    } else {
 		uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
-		if (Tk_GetRelief(interp, uid, (int *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+		newPtr = Tk_GetColor(interp, tkwin, uid);
+		if (newPtr == NULL) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_CURSOR:
-	    case TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR: {
-		Tk_Cursor new, old;
-
-		if (nullValue) {
-		    new = None;
-		} else {
-		    uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
-		    new = Tk_GetCursor(interp, tkwin, uid);
-		    if (new == None) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		}
-		old = *((Tk_Cursor *) ptr);
-		if (old != None) {
-		    Tk_FreeCursor(Tk_Display(tkwin), old);
-		}
-		*((Tk_Cursor *) ptr) = new;
-		if (specPtr->type == TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR) {
-		    Tk_DefineCursor(tkwin, new);
-		}
-		break;
 	    }
-	    case TK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY:
-		uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
-		if (Tk_GetJustify(interp, uid, (Tk_Justify *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+	    oldPtr = *((XColor **) ptr);
+	    if (oldPtr != NULL) {
+		Tk_FreeColor(oldPtr);
+	    }
+	    *((XColor **) ptr) = newPtr;
+	    break;
+	}
+	case TK_CONFIG_FONT: {
+	    Tk_Font newFont;
+
+	    if (nullValue) {
+		newFont = NULL;
+	    } else {
+		newFont = Tk_GetFont(interp, tkwin, value);
+		if (newFont == NULL) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR:
+	    }
+	    Tk_FreeFont(*((Tk_Font *) ptr));
+	    *((Tk_Font *) ptr) = newFont;
+	    break;
+	}
+	case TK_CONFIG_BITMAP: {
+	    Pixmap newBmp, oldBmp;
+
+	    if (nullValue) {
+		newBmp = None;
+	    } else {
 		uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
-		if (Tk_GetAnchor(interp, uid, (Tk_Anchor *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+		newBmp = Tk_GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, uid);
+		if (newBmp == None) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE:
+	    }
+	    oldBmp = *((Pixmap *) ptr);
+	    if (oldBmp != None) {
+		Tk_FreeBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), oldBmp);
+	    }
+	    *((Pixmap *) ptr) = newBmp;
+	    break;
+	}
+	case TK_CONFIG_BORDER: {
+	    Tk_3DBorder newBorder, oldBorder;
+
+	    if (nullValue) {
+		newBorder = NULL;
+	    } else {
 		uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
-		if (Tk_GetCapStyle(interp, uid, (int *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+		newBorder = Tk_Get3DBorder(interp, tkwin, uid);
+		if (newBorder == NULL) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE:
+	    }
+	    oldBorder = *((Tk_3DBorder *) ptr);
+	    if (oldBorder != NULL) {
+		Tk_Free3DBorder(oldBorder);
+	    }
+	    *((Tk_3DBorder *) ptr) = newBorder;
+	    break;
+	}
+	case TK_CONFIG_RELIEF:
+	    uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
+	    if (Tk_GetRelief(interp, uid, (int *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_CURSOR:
+	case TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR: {
+	    Tk_Cursor newCursor, oldCursor;
+
+	    if (nullValue) {
+		newCursor = None;
+	    } else {
 		uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
-		if (Tk_GetJoinStyle(interp, uid, (int *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_PIXELS:
-		if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, value, (int *) ptr)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_MM:
-		if (Tk_GetScreenMM(interp, tkwin, value, (double *) ptr)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
+		newCursor = Tk_GetCursor(interp, tkwin, uid);
+		if (newCursor == None) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_WINDOW: {
-		Tk_Window tkwin2;
-
-		if (nullValue) {
-		    tkwin2 = NULL;
-		} else {
-		    tkwin2 = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, value, tkwin);
-		    if (tkwin2 == NULL) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		}
-		*((Tk_Window *) ptr) = tkwin2;
-		break;
 	    }
-	    case TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM:
-		if ((*specPtr->customPtr->parseProc)(
-			specPtr->customPtr->clientData, interp, tkwin,
-			value, widgRec, specPtr->offset) != TCL_OK) {
+	    oldCursor = *((Tk_Cursor *) ptr);
+	    if (oldCursor != None) {
+		Tk_FreeCursor(Tk_Display(tkwin), oldCursor);
+	    }
+	    *((Tk_Cursor *) ptr) = newCursor;
+	    if (specPtr->type == TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR) {
+		Tk_DefineCursor(tkwin, newCursor);
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+	case TK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY:
+	    uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
+	    if (Tk_GetJustify(interp, uid, (Tk_Justify *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR:
+	    uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
+	    if (Tk_GetAnchor(interp, uid, (Tk_Anchor *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE:
+	    uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
+	    if (Tk_GetCapStyle(interp, uid, (int *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE:
+	    uid = valueIsUid ? (Tk_Uid) value : Tk_GetUid(value);
+	    if (Tk_GetJoinStyle(interp, uid, (int *) ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_PIXELS:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, value, (int *) ptr)
+		!= TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_MM:
+	    if (Tk_GetScreenMM(interp, tkwin, value, (double*)ptr) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_WINDOW: {
+	    Tk_Window tkwin2;
+
+	    if (nullValue) {
+		tkwin2 = NULL;
+	    } else {
+		tkwin2 = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, value, tkwin);
+		if (tkwin2 == NULL) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		break;
-	    default: {
-		char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-
-		sprintf(buf, "bad config table: unknown type %d",
-			specPtr->type);
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	    }
+	    *((Tk_Window *) ptr) = tkwin2;
+	    break;
+	}
+	case TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM:
+	    if ((*specPtr->customPtr->parseProc)(
+		    specPtr->customPtr->clientData, interp, tkwin, value,
+		    widgRec, specPtr->offset) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
+	    break;
+	default: {
+	    char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+
+	    sprintf(buf, "bad config table: unknown type %d", specPtr->type);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 	}
 	specPtr++;
     } while ((specPtr->argvName == NULL) && (specPtr->type != TK_CONFIG_END));
@@ -591,24 +565,22 @@ DoConfig(interp, tkwin, specPtr, value, valueIsUid, widgRec)
  *
  * Tk_ConfigureInfo --
  *
- *	Return information about the configuration options
- *	for a window, and their current values.
+ *	Return information about the configuration options for a window, and
+ *	their current values.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Always returns TCL_OK.  The interp's result will be modified
- *	hold a description of either a single configuration option
- *	available for "widgRec" via "specs", or all the configuration
- *	options available.  In the "all" case, the result will
- *	available for "widgRec" via "specs".  The result will
- *	be a list, each of whose entries describes one option.
- *	Each entry will itself be a list containing the option's
- *	name for use on command lines, database name, database
- *	class, default value, and current value (empty string
- *	if none).  For options that are synonyms, the list will
- *	contain only two values:  name and synonym name.  If the
- *	"name" argument is non-NULL, then the only information
- *	returned is that for the named argument (i.e. the corresponding
- *	entry in the overall list is returned).
+ *	Always returns TCL_OK. The interp's result will be modified hold a
+ *	description of either a single configuration option available for
+ *	"widgRec" via "specs", or all the configuration options available. In
+ *	the "all" case, the result will available for "widgRec" via "specs".
+ *	The result will be a list, each of whose entries describes one option.
+ *	Each entry will itself be a list containing the option's name for use
+ *	on command lines, database name, database class, default value, and
+ *	current value (empty string if none). For options that are synonyms,
+ *	the list will contain only two values: name and synonym name. If the
+ *	"name" argument is non-NULL, then the only information returned is
+ *	that for the named argument (i.e. the corresponding entry in the
+ *	overall list is returned).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -617,18 +589,18 @@ DoConfig(interp, tkwin, specPtr, value, valueIsUid, widgRec)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window corresponding to widgRec. */
-    Tk_ConfigSpec *specs;	/* Describes legal options. */
-    char *widgRec;		/* Record whose fields contain current
-				 * values for options. */
-    CONST char *argvName;	/* If non-NULL, indicates a single option
-				 * whose info is to be returned.  Otherwise
+Tk_ConfigureInfo(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window corresponding to widgRec. */
+    Tk_ConfigSpec *specs,	/* Describes legal options. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Record whose fields contain current values
+				 * for options. */
+    CONST char *argvName,	/* If non-NULL, indicates a single option
+				 * whose info is to be returned. Otherwise
 				 * info is returned for all options. */
-    int flags;			/* Used to specify additional flags
-				 * that must be present in config specs
-				 * for them to be considered. */
+    int flags)			/* Used to specify additional flags that must
+				 * be present in config specs for them to be
+				 * considered. */
 {
     register Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr;
     int needFlags, hateFlags;
@@ -649,11 +621,11 @@ Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags)
     specs = GetCachedSpecs(interp, specs);
 
     /*
-     * If information is only wanted for a single configuration
-     * spec, then handle that one spec specially.
+     * If information is only wanted for a single configuration spec, then
+     * handle that one spec specially.
      */
 
-    Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *) NULL, TCL_STATIC);
+    Tcl_SetResult(interp, NULL, TCL_STATIC);
     if (argvName != NULL) {
 	specPtr = FindConfigSpec(interp, specs, argvName, needFlags,hateFlags);
 	if (specPtr == NULL) {
@@ -666,8 +638,8 @@ Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Loop through all the specs, creating a big list with all
-     * their information.
+     * Loop through all the specs, creating a big list with all their
+     * information.
      */
 
     for (specPtr = specs; specPtr->type != TK_CONFIG_END; specPtr++) {
@@ -682,7 +654,7 @@ Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags)
 	    continue;
 	}
 	list = FormatConfigInfo(interp, tkwin, specPtr, widgRec);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, leader, list, "}", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, leader, list, "}", NULL);
 	ckfree(list);
 	leader = " {";
     }
@@ -694,12 +666,12 @@ Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags)
  *
  * FormatConfigInfo --
  *
- *	Create a valid Tcl list holding the configuration information
- *	for a single configuration option.
+ *	Create a valid Tcl list holding the configuration information for a
+ *	single configuration option.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A Tcl list, dynamically allocated.  The caller is expected to
- *	arrange for this list to be freed eventually.
+ *	A Tcl list, dynamically allocated. The caller is expected to arrange
+ *	for this list to be freed eventually.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory is allocated.
@@ -708,19 +680,20 @@ Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags)
  */
 
 static char *
-FormatConfigInfo(interp, tkwin, specPtr, widgRec)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter to use for things
-					 * like floating-point precision. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window corresponding to widget. */
-    register Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr;	/* Pointer to information describing
-					 * option. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record holding current
-					 * values of info for widget. */
+FormatConfigInfo(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for things like
+				 * floating-point precision. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window corresponding to widget. */
+    register Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr,
+				/* Pointer to information describing
+				 * option. */
+    char *widgRec)		/* Pointer to record holding current values of
+				 * info for widget. */
 {
     CONST char *argv[6];
     char *result;
     char buffer[200];
-    Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc = (Tcl_FreeProc *) NULL;
+    Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc = NULL;
 
     argv[0] = specPtr->argvName;
     argv[1] = specPtr->dbName;
@@ -759,16 +732,14 @@ FormatConfigInfo(interp, tkwin, specPtr, widgRec)
  *
  * FormatConfigValue --
  *
- *	This procedure formats the current value of a configuration
- *	option.
+ *	This function formats the current value of a configuration option.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the formatted value of the option given
- *	by specPtr and widgRec.  If the value is static, so that it
- *	need not be freed, *freeProcPtr will be set to NULL;  otherwise
- *	*freeProcPtr will be set to the address of a procedure to
- *	free the result, and the caller must invoke this procedure
- *	when it is finished with the result.
+ *	The return value is the formatted value of the option given by specPtr
+ *	and widgRec. If the value is static, so that it need not be freed,
+ *	*freeProcPtr will be set to NULL; otherwise *freeProcPtr will be set
+ *	to the address of a function to free the result, and the caller must
+ *	invoke this function when it is finished with the result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -777,18 +748,18 @@ FormatConfigInfo(interp, tkwin, specPtr, widgRec)
  */
 
 static CONST char *
-FormatConfigValue(interp, tkwin, specPtr, widgRec, buffer, freeProcPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for use in real conversions. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window corresponding to widget. */
-    Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr;	/* Pointer to information describing option.
+FormatConfigValue(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for use in real conversions. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window corresponding to widget. */
+    Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr,	/* Pointer to information describing option.
 				 * Must not point to a synonym option. */
-    char *widgRec;		/* Pointer to record holding current
-				 * values of info for widget. */
-    char *buffer;		/* Static buffer to use for small values.
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record holding current values of
+				 * info for widget. */
+    char *buffer,		/* Static buffer to use for small values.
 				 * Must have at least 200 bytes of storage. */
-    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr;	/* Pointer to word to fill in with address
-				 * of procedure to free the result, or NULL
-				 * if result is static. */
+    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)	/* Pointer to word to fill in with address of
+				 * function to free the result, or NULL if
+				 * result is static. */
 {
     CONST char *ptr, *result;
 
@@ -796,109 +767,115 @@ FormatConfigValue(interp, tkwin, specPtr, widgRec, buffer, freeProcPtr)
     ptr = widgRec + specPtr->offset;
     result = "";
     switch (specPtr->type) {
-	case TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN:
-	    if (*((int *) ptr) == 0) {
-		result = "0";
-	    } else {
-		result = "1";
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_CONFIG_INT:
-	    sprintf(buffer, "%d", *((int *) ptr));
-	    result = buffer;
-	    break;
-	case TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE:
-	    Tcl_PrintDouble(interp, *((double *) ptr), buffer);
-	    result = buffer;
-	    break;
-	case TK_CONFIG_STRING:
-	    result = (*(char **) ptr);
-	    if (result == NULL) {
-		result = "";
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_CONFIG_UID: {
-	    Tk_Uid uid = *((Tk_Uid *) ptr);
-	    if (uid != NULL) {
-		result = uid;
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN:
+	if (*((int *) ptr) == 0) {
+	    result = "0";
+	} else {
+	    result = "1";
 	}
-	case TK_CONFIG_COLOR: {
-	    XColor *colorPtr = *((XColor **) ptr);
-	    if (colorPtr != NULL) {
-		result = Tk_NameOfColor(colorPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	break;
+    case TK_CONFIG_INT:
+	sprintf(buffer, "%d", *((int *) ptr));
+	result = buffer;
+	break;
+    case TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE:
+	Tcl_PrintDouble(interp, *((double *) ptr), buffer);
+	result = buffer;
+	break;
+    case TK_CONFIG_STRING:
+	result = (*(char **) ptr);
+	if (result == NULL) {
+	    result = "";
 	}
-	case TK_CONFIG_FONT: {
-	    Tk_Font tkfont = *((Tk_Font *) ptr);
-	    if (tkfont != NULL) {
-		result = Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	break;
+    case TK_CONFIG_UID: {
+	Tk_Uid uid = *((Tk_Uid *) ptr);
+
+	if (uid != NULL) {
+	    result = uid;
 	}
-	case TK_CONFIG_BITMAP: {
-	    Pixmap pixmap = *((Pixmap *) ptr);
-	    if (pixmap != None) {
-		result = Tk_NameOfBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_CONFIG_COLOR: {
+	XColor *colorPtr = *((XColor **) ptr);
+
+	if (colorPtr != NULL) {
+	    result = Tk_NameOfColor(colorPtr);
 	}
-	case TK_CONFIG_BORDER: {
-	    Tk_3DBorder border = *((Tk_3DBorder *) ptr);
-	    if (border != NULL) {
-		result = Tk_NameOf3DBorder(border);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_CONFIG_FONT: {
+	Tk_Font tkfont = *((Tk_Font *) ptr);
+
+	if (tkfont != NULL) {
+	    result = Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont);
 	}
-	case TK_CONFIG_RELIEF:
-	    result = Tk_NameOfRelief(*((int *) ptr));
-	    break;
-	case TK_CONFIG_CURSOR:
-	case TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR: {
-	    Tk_Cursor cursor = *((Tk_Cursor *) ptr);
-	    if (cursor != None) {
-		result = Tk_NameOfCursor(Tk_Display(tkwin), cursor);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_CONFIG_BITMAP: {
+	Pixmap pixmap = *((Pixmap *) ptr);
+
+	if (pixmap != None) {
+	    result = Tk_NameOfBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap);
 	}
-	case TK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY:
-	    result = Tk_NameOfJustify(*((Tk_Justify *) ptr));
-	    break;
-	case TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR:
-	    result = Tk_NameOfAnchor(*((Tk_Anchor *) ptr));
-	    break;
-	case TK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE:
-	    result = Tk_NameOfCapStyle(*((int *) ptr));
-	    break;
-	case TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE:
-	    result = Tk_NameOfJoinStyle(*((int *) ptr));
-	    break;
-	case TK_CONFIG_PIXELS:
-	    sprintf(buffer, "%d", *((int *) ptr));
-	    result = buffer;
-	    break;
-	case TK_CONFIG_MM:
-	    Tcl_PrintDouble(interp, *((double *) ptr), buffer);
-	    result = buffer;
-	    break;
-	case TK_CONFIG_WINDOW: {
-	    Tk_Window tkwin;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_CONFIG_BORDER: {
+	Tk_3DBorder border = *((Tk_3DBorder *) ptr);
 
-	    tkwin = *((Tk_Window *) ptr);
-	    if (tkwin != NULL) {
-		result = Tk_PathName(tkwin);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (border != NULL) {
+	    result = Tk_NameOf3DBorder(border);
 	}
-	case TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM:
-	    result = (*specPtr->customPtr->printProc)(
-		    specPtr->customPtr->clientData, tkwin, widgRec,
-		    specPtr->offset, freeProcPtr);
-	    break;
-	default: 
-	    result = "?? unknown type ??";
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_CONFIG_RELIEF:
+	result = Tk_NameOfRelief(*((int *) ptr));
+	break;
+    case TK_CONFIG_CURSOR:
+    case TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR: {
+	Tk_Cursor cursor = *((Tk_Cursor *) ptr);
+
+	if (cursor != None) {
+	    result = Tk_NameOfCursor(Tk_Display(tkwin), cursor);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY:
+	result = Tk_NameOfJustify(*((Tk_Justify *) ptr));
+	break;
+    case TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR:
+	result = Tk_NameOfAnchor(*((Tk_Anchor *) ptr));
+	break;
+    case TK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE:
+	result = Tk_NameOfCapStyle(*((int *) ptr));
+	break;
+    case TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE:
+	result = Tk_NameOfJoinStyle(*((int *) ptr));
+	break;
+    case TK_CONFIG_PIXELS:
+	sprintf(buffer, "%d", *((int *) ptr));
+	result = buffer;
+	break;
+    case TK_CONFIG_MM:
+	Tcl_PrintDouble(interp, *((double *) ptr), buffer);
+	result = buffer;
+	break;
+    case TK_CONFIG_WINDOW: {
+	Tk_Window tkwin;
+
+	tkwin = *((Tk_Window *) ptr);
+	if (tkwin != NULL) {
+	    result = Tk_PathName(tkwin);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM:
+	result = (*specPtr->customPtr->printProc)(
+		specPtr->customPtr->clientData, tkwin, widgRec,
+		specPtr->offset, freeProcPtr);
+	break;
+    default:
+	result = "?? unknown type ??";
     }
     return result;
 }
@@ -908,14 +885,14 @@ FormatConfigValue(interp, tkwin, specPtr, widgRec, buffer, freeProcPtr)
  *
  * Tk_ConfigureValue --
  *
- *	This procedure returns the current value of a configuration
- *	option for a widget.
+ *	This function returns the current value of a configuration option for
+ *	a widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a standard Tcl completion code (TCL_OK or
- *	TCL_ERROR).  The interp's result will be set to hold either the value
- *	of the option given by argvName (if TCL_OK is returned) or
- *	an error message (if TCL_ERROR is returned).
+ *	TCL_ERROR). The interp's result will be set to hold either the value
+ *	of the option given by argvName (if TCL_OK is returned) or an error
+ *	message (if TCL_ERROR is returned).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -924,17 +901,17 @@ FormatConfigValue(interp, tkwin, specPtr, widgRec, buffer, freeProcPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_ConfigureValue(interp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window corresponding to widgRec. */
-    Tk_ConfigSpec *specs;	/* Describes legal options. */
-    char *widgRec;		/* Record whose fields contain current
-				 * values for options. */
-    CONST char *argvName;	/* Gives the command-line name for the
-				 * option whose value is to be returned. */
-    int flags;			/* Used to specify additional flags
-				 * that must be present in config specs
-				 * for them to be considered. */
+Tk_ConfigureValue(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window corresponding to widgRec. */
+    Tk_ConfigSpec *specs,	/* Describes legal options. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Record whose fields contain current values
+				 * for options. */
+    CONST char *argvName,	/* Gives the command-line name for the option
+				 * whose value is to be returned. */
+    int flags)			/* Used to specify additional flags that must
+				 * be present in config specs for them to be
+				 * considered. */
 {
     Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr;
     int needFlags, hateFlags;
@@ -959,7 +936,8 @@ Tk_ConfigureValue(interp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags)
     if (specPtr == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    result = FormatConfigValue(interp, tkwin, specPtr, widgRec, buffer, &freeProc);
+    result = FormatConfigValue(interp, tkwin, specPtr, widgRec, buffer,
+	    &freeProc);
     Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *) result, TCL_VOLATILE);
     if (freeProc != NULL) {
 	if ((freeProc == TCL_DYNAMIC) || (freeProc == (Tcl_FreeProc *) free)) {
@@ -982,24 +960,27 @@ Tk_ConfigureValue(interp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Any resource in widgRec that is controlled by a configuration
- *	option (e.g. a Tk_3DBorder or XColor) is freed in the appropriate
- *	fashion.
+ *	Any resource in widgRec that is controlled by a configuration option
+ *	(e.g. a Tk_3DBorder or XColor) is freed in the appropriate fashion.
+ *
+ * Notes:
+ *	Since this is not looking anything up, this uses the static version of
+ *	the config specs.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 void
-Tk_FreeOptions(specs, widgRec, display, needFlags)
-    Tk_ConfigSpec *specs;	/* Describes legal options. */
-    char *widgRec;		/* Record whose fields contain current
-				 * values for options. */
-    Display *display;		/* X display; needed for freeing some
+Tk_FreeOptions(
+    Tk_ConfigSpec *specs,	/* Describes legal options. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Record whose fields contain current values
+				 * for options. */
+    Display *display,		/* X display; needed for freeing some
 				 * resources. */
-    int needFlags;		/* Used to specify additional flags
-				 * that must be present in config specs
-				 * for them to be considered. */
+    int needFlags)		/* Used to specify additional flags that must
+				 * be present in config specs for them to be
+				 * considered. */
 {
     register Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr;
     char *ptr;
@@ -1010,40 +991,40 @@ Tk_FreeOptions(specs, widgRec, display, needFlags)
 	}
 	ptr = widgRec + specPtr->offset;
 	switch (specPtr->type) {
-	    case TK_CONFIG_STRING:
-		if (*((char **) ptr) != NULL) {
-		    ckfree(*((char **) ptr));
-		    *((char **) ptr) = NULL;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_COLOR:
-		if (*((XColor **) ptr) != NULL) {
-		    Tk_FreeColor(*((XColor **) ptr));
-		    *((XColor **) ptr) = NULL;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_FONT:
-		Tk_FreeFont(*((Tk_Font *) ptr));
-		*((Tk_Font *) ptr) = NULL;
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_BITMAP:
-		if (*((Pixmap *) ptr) != None) {
-		    Tk_FreeBitmap(display, *((Pixmap *) ptr));
-		    *((Pixmap *) ptr) = None;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_BORDER:
-		if (*((Tk_3DBorder *) ptr) != NULL) {
-		    Tk_Free3DBorder(*((Tk_3DBorder *) ptr));
-		    *((Tk_3DBorder *) ptr) = NULL;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case TK_CONFIG_CURSOR:
-	    case TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR:
-		if (*((Tk_Cursor *) ptr) != None) {
-		    Tk_FreeCursor(display, *((Tk_Cursor *) ptr));
-		    *((Tk_Cursor *) ptr) = None;
-		}
+	case TK_CONFIG_STRING:
+	    if (*((char **) ptr) != NULL) {
+		ckfree(*((char **) ptr));
+		*((char **) ptr) = NULL;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_COLOR:
+	    if (*((XColor **) ptr) != NULL) {
+		Tk_FreeColor(*((XColor **) ptr));
+		*((XColor **) ptr) = NULL;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_FONT:
+	    Tk_FreeFont(*((Tk_Font *) ptr));
+	    *((Tk_Font *) ptr) = NULL;
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_BITMAP:
+	    if (*((Pixmap *) ptr) != None) {
+		Tk_FreeBitmap(display, *((Pixmap *) ptr));
+		*((Pixmap *) ptr) = None;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_BORDER:
+	    if (*((Tk_3DBorder *) ptr) != NULL) {
+		Tk_Free3DBorder(*((Tk_3DBorder *) ptr));
+		*((Tk_3DBorder *) ptr) = NULL;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case TK_CONFIG_CURSOR:
+	case TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR:
+	    if (*((Tk_Cursor *) ptr) != None) {
+		Tk_FreeCursor(display, *((Tk_Cursor *) ptr));
+		*((Tk_Cursor *) ptr) = None;
+	    }
 	}
     }
 }
@@ -1053,28 +1034,28 @@ Tk_FreeOptions(specs, widgRec, display, needFlags)
  *
  * GetCachedSpecs --
  *
- *Returns a writable per-interpreter (and hence thread-local) copy of
- *the given spec-table with (some of) the char* fields converted into
- *Tk_Uid fields; this copy will be released when the interpreter
- *terminates (during AssocData cleanup).
+ *	Returns a writable per-interpreter (and hence thread-local) copy of
+ *	the given spec-table with (some of) the char* fields converted into
+ *	Tk_Uid fields; this copy will be released when the interpreter
+ *	terminates (during AssocData cleanup).
  *
  * Results:
- *A pointer to the copied table.
+ *	A pointer to the copied table.
  *
  * Notes:
- *The conversion to Tk_Uid is only done the first time, when the table
- *copy is taken. After that, the table is assumed to have Tk_Uids where
- *they are needed. The time of deletion of the caches isn't very
- *important unless you've got a lot of code that uses Tk_ConfigureWidget
- *(or *Info or *Value} when the interpreter is being deleted.
+ *	The conversion to Tk_Uid is only done the first time, when the table
+ *	copy is taken. After that, the table is assumed to have Tk_Uids where
+ *	they are needed. The time of deletion of the caches isn't very
+ *	important unless you've got a lot of code that uses Tk_ConfigureWidget
+ *	(or *Info or *Value} when the interpreter is being deleted.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static Tk_ConfigSpec *
-GetCachedSpecs(interp, staticSpecs)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which to store the cache. */
-    CONST Tk_ConfigSpec *staticSpecs;
+GetCachedSpecs(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter in which to store the cache. */
+    const Tk_ConfigSpec *staticSpecs)
 				/* Value to cache a copy of; it is also used
 				 * as a key into the cache. */
 {
@@ -1107,7 +1088,7 @@ GetCachedSpecs(interp, staticSpecs)
 	    &isNew);
     if (isNew) {
 	unsigned int entrySpace = sizeof(Tk_ConfigSpec);
-	CONST Tk_ConfigSpec *staticSpecPtr;
+	const Tk_ConfigSpec *staticSpecPtr;
 	Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr;
 
 	/*
@@ -1126,7 +1107,7 @@ GetCachedSpecs(interp, staticSpecs)
 	 */
 
 	cachedSpecs = (Tk_ConfigSpec *) ckalloc(entrySpace);
-	memcpy((void *) cachedSpecs, (void *) staticSpecs, entrySpace);
+	memcpy(cachedSpecs, staticSpecs, entrySpace);
 	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, (ClientData) cachedSpecs);
 
 	/*
@@ -1147,6 +1128,7 @@ GetCachedSpecs(interp, staticSpecs)
 		    specPtr->defValue = Tk_GetUid(specPtr->defValue);
 		}
 	    }
+	    specPtr->specFlags &= ~TK_CONFIG_OPTION_SPECIFIED;
 	}
     } else {
 	cachedSpecs = (Tk_ConfigSpec *) Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
@@ -1167,15 +1149,15 @@ GetCachedSpecs(interp, staticSpecs)
  *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	None
+ *	None (does *not* use any Tk API).
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteSpecCacheTable(clientData, interp)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+DeleteSpecCacheTable(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)
 {
     Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr = (Tcl_HashTable *) clientData;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
@@ -1192,3 +1174,11 @@ DeleteSpecCacheTable(clientData, interp)
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable(tablePtr);
     ckfree((char *) tablePtr);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkOldTest.c b/generic/tkOldTest.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cfbce23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/tkOldTest.c
@@ -0,0 +1,404 @@
+/*
+ * tkOldTest.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains C command functions for additional Tcl
+ *	commands that are used to test Tk's support for legacy
+ *	interfaces.  These commands are not normally included in Tcl/Tk
+ *	applications; they're only used for testing.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1993-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
+ * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
+ * Contributions by Don Porter, NIST, 2007.  (not subject to US copyright)
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ */
+
+#define USE_OLD_IMAGE
+#include "tkInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * The following data structure represents the master for a test image:
+ */
+
+typedef struct TImageMaster {
+    Tk_ImageMaster master;      /* Tk's token for image master. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;         /* Interpreter for application. */
+    int width, height;          /* Dimensions of image. */
+    char *imageName;            /* Name of image (malloc-ed). */
+    char *varName;              /* Name of variable in which to log events for
+                                 * image (malloc-ed). */
+} TImageMaster;
+
+/*
+ * The following data structure represents a particular use of a particular
+ * test image.
+ */
+
+typedef struct TImageInstance {
+    TImageMaster *masterPtr;    /* Pointer to master for image. */
+    XColor *fg;                 /* Foreground color for drawing in image. */
+    GC gc;                      /* Graphics context for drawing in image. */
+} TImageInstance;
+
+/*
+ * The type record for test images:
+ */
+
+static int		ImageCreate(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    char *name, int argc, char **argv,
+			    Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageMaster master,
+			    ClientData *clientDataPtr);
+static ClientData	ImageGet(Tk_Window tkwin, ClientData clientData);
+static void		ImageDisplay(ClientData clientData,
+			    Display *display, Drawable drawable,
+			    int imageX, int imageY, int width,
+			    int height, int drawableX,
+			    int drawableY);
+static void		ImageFree(ClientData clientData, Display *display);
+static void		ImageDelete(ClientData clientData);
+
+static Tk_ImageType imageType = {
+    "oldtest",			/* name */
+    (Tk_ImageCreateProc *) ImageCreate, /* createProc */
+    ImageGet,			/* getProc */
+    ImageDisplay,		/* displayProc */
+    ImageFree,			/* freeProc */
+    ImageDelete,		/* deleteProc */
+    NULL,			/* postscriptPtr */
+    NULL			/* nextPtr */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
+ */
+
+static int              ImageCmd(ClientData dummy,
+                            Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkOldTestInit(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkOldTestInit --
+ *
+ *	This function performs intialization for the Tk test suite
+ *	extensions for testing support for legacy interfaces.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl completion code, and leaves an error message in
+ *	the interp's result if an error occurs.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Creates several test commands.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkOldTestInit(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    static int initialized = 0;
+
+    if (!initialized) {
+	initialized = 1;
+	Tk_CreateImageType(&imageType);
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ImageCreate --
+ *
+ *	This function is called by the Tk image code to create "oldtest" images.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The data structure for a new image is allocated.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+	/* ARGSUSED */
+static int
+ImageCreate(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for application containing
+				 * image. */
+    char *name,			/* Name to use for image. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv,		/* Argument strings for options (doesn't
+				 * include image name or type). */
+    Tk_ImageType *typePtr,	/* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
+    Tk_ImageMaster master,	/* Token for image, to be used by us in later
+				 * callbacks. */
+    ClientData *clientDataPtr)	/* Store manager's token for image here; it
+				 * will be returned in later callbacks. */
+{
+    TImageMaster *timPtr;
+    char *varName;
+    int i;
+
+    varName = "log";
+    for (i = 0; i < argc; i += 2) {
+	if (strcmp(argv[i], "-variable") != 0) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option name \"",
+		    argv[i], "\"", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if ((i+1) == argc) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no value given for \"",
+		    argv[i], "\" option", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	varName = argv[i+1];
+    }
+
+    timPtr = (TImageMaster *) ckalloc(sizeof(TImageMaster));
+    timPtr->master = master;
+    timPtr->interp = interp;
+    timPtr->width = 30;
+    timPtr->height = 15;
+    timPtr->imageName = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(name) + 1));
+    strcpy(timPtr->imageName, name);
+    timPtr->varName = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(varName) + 1));
+    strcpy(timPtr->varName, varName);
+    Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, name, ImageCmd, (ClientData) timPtr, NULL);
+    *clientDataPtr = (ClientData) timPtr;
+    Tk_ImageChanged(master, 0, 0, 30, 15, 30, 15);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ImageCmd --
+ *
+ *	This function implements the commands corresponding to individual
+ *	images.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Forces windows to be created.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+	/* ARGSUSED */
+static int
+ImageCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    CONST char **argv)		/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    TImageMaster *timPtr = (TImageMaster *) clientData;
+    int x, y, width, height;
+
+    if (argc < 2) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
+		argv[0], "option ?arg arg ...?", NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (strcmp(argv[1], "changed") == 0) {
+	if (argc != 8) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"", argv[0],
+		    " changed x y width height imageWidth imageHeight", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[2], &x) != TCL_OK)
+		|| (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)
+		|| (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[4], &width) != TCL_OK)
+		|| (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[5], &height) != TCL_OK)
+		|| (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[6], &timPtr->width) != TCL_OK)
+		|| (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[7], &timPtr->height) != TCL_OK)) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Tk_ImageChanged(timPtr->master, x, y, width, height, timPtr->width,
+		timPtr->height);
+    } else {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option \"", argv[1],
+		"\": must be changed", NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ImageGet --
+ *
+ *	This function is called by Tk to set things up for using a test image
+ *	in a particular widget.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is a token for the image instance, which is used in
+ *	future callbacks to ImageDisplay and ImageFree.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static ClientData
+ImageGet(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window in which image will be
+				 * used. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to TImageMaster for image. */
+{
+    TImageMaster *timPtr = (TImageMaster *) clientData;
+    TImageInstance *instPtr;
+    char buffer[100];
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+
+    sprintf(buffer, "%s get", timPtr->imageName);
+    Tcl_SetVar(timPtr->interp, timPtr->varName, buffer,
+	    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT);
+
+    instPtr = (TImageInstance *) ckalloc(sizeof(TImageInstance));
+    instPtr->masterPtr = timPtr;
+    instPtr->fg = Tk_GetColor(timPtr->interp, tkwin, "#ff0000");
+    gcValues.foreground = instPtr->fg->pixel;
+    instPtr->gc = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
+    return (ClientData) instPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ImageDisplay --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked to redisplay part or all of an image in a
+ *	given drawable.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The image gets partially redrawn, as an "X" that shows the exact
+ *	redraw area.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+ImageDisplay(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to TImageInstance for image. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display to use for drawing. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Where to redraw image. */
+    int imageX, int imageY,	/* Origin of area to redraw, relative to
+				 * origin of image. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of area to redraw. */
+    int drawableX, int drawableY)
+				/* Coordinates in drawable corresponding to
+				 * imageX and imageY. */
+{
+    TImageInstance *instPtr = (TImageInstance *) clientData;
+    char buffer[200 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 6];
+
+    sprintf(buffer, "%s display %d %d %d %d %d %d",
+	    instPtr->masterPtr->imageName, imageX, imageY, width, height,
+	    drawableX, drawableY);
+    Tcl_SetVar(instPtr->masterPtr->interp, instPtr->masterPtr->varName, buffer,
+	    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT);
+    if (width > (instPtr->masterPtr->width - imageX)) {
+	width = instPtr->masterPtr->width - imageX;
+    }
+    if (height > (instPtr->masterPtr->height - imageY)) {
+	height = instPtr->masterPtr->height - imageY;
+    }
+    XDrawRectangle(display, drawable, instPtr->gc, drawableX, drawableY,
+	    (unsigned) (width-1), (unsigned) (height-1));
+    XDrawLine(display, drawable, instPtr->gc, drawableX, drawableY,
+	    (int) (drawableX + width - 1), (int) (drawableY + height - 1));
+    XDrawLine(display, drawable, instPtr->gc, drawableX,
+	    (int) (drawableY + height - 1),
+	    (int) (drawableX + width - 1), drawableY);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ImageFree --
+ *
+ *	This function is called when an instance of an image is no longer
+ *	used.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Information related to the instance is freed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+ImageFree(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to TImageInstance for instance. */
+    Display *display)		/* Display where image was to be drawn. */
+{
+    TImageInstance *instPtr = (TImageInstance *) clientData;
+    char buffer[200];
+
+    sprintf(buffer, "%s free", instPtr->masterPtr->imageName);
+    Tcl_SetVar(instPtr->masterPtr->interp, instPtr->masterPtr->varName, buffer,
+	    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT);
+    Tk_FreeColor(instPtr->fg);
+    Tk_FreeGC(display, instPtr->gc);
+    ckfree((char *) instPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ImageDelete --
+ *
+ *	This function is called to clean up a test image when an application
+ *	goes away.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Information about the image is deleted.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+ImageDelete(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to TImageMaster for image. When
+				 * this function is called, no more instances
+				 * exist. */
+{
+    TImageMaster *timPtr = (TImageMaster *) clientData;
+    char buffer[100];
+
+    sprintf(buffer, "%s delete", timPtr->imageName);
+    Tcl_SetVar(timPtr->interp, timPtr->varName, buffer,
+	    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT);
+
+    Tcl_DeleteCommand(timPtr->interp, timPtr->imageName);
+    ckfree(timPtr->imageName);
+    ckfree(timPtr->varName);
+    ckfree((char *) timPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkOption.c b/generic/tkOption.c
index 0df3f8d..de92627 100644
--- a/generic/tkOption.c
+++ b/generic/tkOption.c
@@ -1,93 +1,90 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkOption.c --
  *
- *	This module contains procedures to manage the option
- *	database, which allows various strings to be associated
- *	with windows either by name or by class or both.
+ *	This module contains functions to manage the option database, which
+ *	allows various strings to be associated with windows either by name or
+ *	by class or both.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * The option database is stored as one tree for each main window.
- * Each name or class field in an option is associated with a node or
- * leaf of the tree.  For example, the options "x.y.z" and "x.y*a"
- * each correspond to three nodes in the tree;  they share the nodes
- * "x" and "x.y", but have different leaf nodes.  One of the following
- * structures exists for each node or leaf in the option tree.  It is
- * actually stored as part of the parent node, and describes a particular
- * child of the parent.
- *
- * The structure of the option db tree is a little confusing.  There are
- * four different kinds of nodes in the tree:
+ * The option database is stored as one tree for each main window. Each name
+ * or class field in an option is associated with a node or leaf of the tree.
+ * For example, the options "x.y.z" and "x.y*a" each correspond to three nodes
+ * in the tree; they share the nodes "x" and "x.y", but have different leaf
+ * nodes. One of the following structures exists for each node or leaf in the
+ * option tree. It is actually stored as part of the parent node, and
+ * describes a particular child of the parent.
+ *
+ * The structure of the option db tree is a little confusing. There are four
+ * different kinds of nodes in the tree:
  *	interior class nodes
  *	interior name nodes
  *	leaf class nodes
  *	leaf name nodes
  *
  * All interior nodes refer to _window_ classes and names; all leaf nodes
- * refer to _option_ classes and names.  When looking for a particular option,
+ * refer to _option_ classes and names. When looking for a particular option,
  * therefore, you must compare interior node values to corresponding window
  * values, and compare leaf node values to corresponding option values.
  *
  * The tree is actually stored in a collection of arrays; there is one each
- * combination of WILDCARD/EXACT and CLASS/NAME and NODE/LEAF.  The NODE arrays
+ * combination of WILDCARD/EXACT and CLASS/NAME and NODE/LEAF. The NODE arrays
  * contain the interior nodes of the tree; each element has a pointer to an
- * array of elements which are the leaves of the tree.  The LEAF arrays, rather
+ * array of elements which are the leaves of the tree. The LEAF arrays, rather
  * than holding the leaves of the tree, hold a cached subset of the option
  * database, consisting of the values of all defined options for a single
  * window, and some additional information about each ancestor of the window
- * (since some options may be inherited from a parent), all the way back to the
- * root window.
+ * (since some options may be inherited from a parent), all the way back to
+ * the root window.
  *
  * Each time a call is made to Tk_GetOption, Tk will attempt to use the cached
- * information to satisfy the lookup.  If the call is for a window other than
+ * information to satisfy the lookup. If the call is for a window other than
  * that for which options are currently cached, the portion of the cache that
- * contains information for common ancestors of the two windows is retained and
- * the remainder is discarded and rebuilt with new information for the new
+ * contains information for common ancestors of the two windows is retained
+ * and the remainder is discarded and rebuilt with new information for the new
  * window.
  */
 
 typedef struct Element {
-    Tk_Uid nameUid;			/* Name or class from one element of
-					 * an option spec. */
+    Tk_Uid nameUid;		/* Name or class from one element of an option
+				 * spec. */
     union {
-	struct ElArray *arrayPtr;	/* If this is an intermediate node,
-					 * a pointer to a structure describing
-					 * the remaining elements of all
-					 * options whose prefixes are the
-					 * same up through this element. */
-	Tk_Uid valueUid;		/* For leaf nodes, this is the string
-					 * value of the option. */
+	struct ElArray *arrayPtr;
+				/* If this is an intermediate node, a pointer
+				 * to a structure describing the remaining
+				 * elements of all options whose prefixes are
+				 * the same up through this element. */
+	Tk_Uid valueUid;	/* For leaf nodes, this is the string value of
+				 * the option. */
     } child;
-    int priority;			/* Used to select among matching
-					 * options.  Includes both the
-					 * priority level and a serial #.
-					 * Greater value means higher
-					 * priority.  Irrelevant except in
-					 * leaf nodes. */
-    int flags;				/* OR-ed combination of bits.  See
-					 * below for values. */
+    int priority;		/* Used to select among matching options.
+				 * Includes both the priority level and a
+				 * serial #. Greater value means higher
+				 * priority. Irrelevant except in leaf
+				 * nodes. */
+    int flags;			/* OR-ed combination of bits. See below for
+				 * values. */
 } Element;
 
 /*
  * Flags in Element structures:
  *
- * CLASS -		Non-zero means this element refers to a class,
- *			Zero means this element refers to a name.
- * NODE -		Zero means this is a leaf element (the child
- *			field is a value, not a pointer to another node).
- *			One means this is a node element.
- * WILDCARD -		Non-zero means this there was a star in the
- *			original specification just before this element.
- *			Zero means there was a dot.
+ * CLASS -		Non-zero means this element refers to a class, zero
+ *			means this element refers to a name.
+ * NODE -		Zero means this is a leaf element (the child field is
+ *			a value, not a pointer to another node). One means
+ *			this is a node element.
+ * WILDCARD -		Non-zero means this there was a star in the original
+ *			specification just before this element. Zero means
+ *			there was a dot.
  */
 
 #define TYPE_MASK		0x7
@@ -106,25 +103,22 @@ typedef struct Element {
 #define WILDCARD_NODE_CLASS	0x7
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used to manage a dynamic array of
- * Elements.  These structures are used for two purposes:  to store
- * the contents of a node in the option tree, and for the option
- * stacks described below.
+ * The following structure is used to manage a dynamic array of Elements.
+ * These structures are used for two purposes: to store the contents of a node
+ * in the option tree, and for the option stacks described below.
  */
 
 typedef struct ElArray {
-    int arraySize;		/* Number of elements actually
-				 * allocated in the "els" array. */
-    int numUsed;		/* Number of elements currently in
-				 * use out of els. */
+    int arraySize;		/* Number of elements actually allocated in
+				 * the "els" array. */
+    int numUsed;		/* Number of elements currently in use out of
+				 * els. */
     Element *nextToUse;		/* Pointer to &els[numUsed]. */
-    Element els[1];		/* Array of structures describing
-				 * children of this node.  The
-				 * array will actually contain enough
-				 * elements for all of the children
-				 * (and even a few extras, perhaps).
-				 * This must be the last field in
-				 * the structure. */
+    Element els[1];		/* Array of structures describing children of
+				 * this node. The array will actually contain
+				 * enough elements for all of the children
+				 * (and even a few extras, perhaps). This must
+				 * be the last field in the structure. */
 } ElArray;
 
 #define EL_ARRAY_SIZE(numEls) ((unsigned) (sizeof(ElArray) \
@@ -133,114 +127,104 @@ typedef struct ElArray {
 
 /*
  * In addition to the option tree, which is a relatively static structure,
- * there are eight additional structures called "stacks", which are used
- * to speed up queries into the option database.  The stack structures
- * are designed for the situation where an individual widget makes repeated
- * requests for its particular options.  The requests differ only in
- * their last name/class, so during the first request we extract all
- * the options pertaining to the particular widget and save them in a
- * stack-like cache;  subsequent requests for the same widget can search
- * the cache relatively quickly.  In fact, the cache is a hierarchical
- * one, storing a list of relevant options for this widget and all of
- * its ancestors up to the application root;  hence the name "stack".
- *
- * Each of the eight stacks consists of an array of Elements, ordered in
- * terms of levels in the window hierarchy.  All the elements relevant
- * for the top-level widget appear first in the array, followed by all
- * those from the next-level widget on the path to the current widget,
- * etc. down to those for the current widget.
- *
- * Cached information is divided into eight stacks according to the
- * CLASS, NODE, and WILDCARD flags.  Leaf and non-leaf information is
- * kept separate to speed up individual probes (non-leaf information is
- * only relevant when building the stacks, but isn't relevant when
- * making probes;  similarly, only non-leaf information is relevant
- * when the stacks are being extended to the next widget down in the
- * widget hierarchy).  Wildcard elements are handled separately from
- * "exact" elements because once they appear at a particular level in
- * the stack they remain active for all deeper levels;  exact elements
- * are only relevant at a particular level.  For example, when searching
- * for options relevant in a particular window, the entire wildcard
- * stacks get checked, but only the portions of the exact stacks that
- * pertain to the window's parent.  Lastly, name and class stacks are
- * kept separate because different search keys are used when searching
- * them;  keeping them separate speeds up the searches.
+ * there are eight additional structures called "stacks", which are used to
+ * speed up queries into the option database. The stack structures are
+ * designed for the situation where an individual widget makes repeated
+ * requests for its particular options. The requests differ only in their last
+ * name/class, so during the first request we extract all the options
+ * pertaining to the particular widget and save them in a stack-like cache;
+ * subsequent requests for the same widget can search the cache relatively
+ * quickly. In fact, the cache is a hierarchical one, storing a list of
+ * relevant options for this widget and all of its ancestors up to the
+ * application root; hence the name "stack".
+ *
+ * Each of the eight stacks consists of an array of Elements, ordered in terms
+ * of levels in the window hierarchy. All the elements relevant for the
+ * top-level widget appear first in the array, followed by all those from the
+ * next-level widget on the path to the current widget, etc. down to those for
+ * the current widget.
+ *
+ * Cached information is divided into eight stacks according to the CLASS,
+ * NODE, and WILDCARD flags. Leaf and non-leaf information is kept separate to
+ * speed up individual probes (non-leaf information is only relevant when
+ * building the stacks, but isn't relevant when making probes; similarly, only
+ * non-leaf information is relevant when the stacks are being extended to the
+ * next widget down in the widget hierarchy). Wildcard elements are handled
+ * separately from "exact" elements because once they appear at a particular
+ * level in the stack they remain active for all deeper levels; exact elements
+ * are only relevant at a particular level. For example, when searching for
+ * options relevant in a particular window, the entire wildcard stacks get
+ * checked, but only the portions of the exact stacks that pertain to the
+ * window's parent. Lastly, name and class stacks are kept separate because
+ * different search keys are used when searching them; keeping them separate
+ * speeds up the searches.
  */
 
 #define NUM_STACKS 8
 
 /*
- * One of the following structures is used to keep track of each
- * level in the stacks.
+ * One of the following structures is used to keep track of each level in the
+ * stacks.
  */
 
 typedef struct StackLevel {
     TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window corresponding to this stack
 				 * level. */
-    int bases[NUM_STACKS];	/* For each stack, index of first
-				 * element on stack corresponding to
-				 * this level (used to restore "numUsed"
-				 * fields when popping out of a level. */
+    int bases[NUM_STACKS];	/* For each stack, index of first element on
+				 * stack corresponding to this level (used to
+				 * restore "numUsed" fields when popping out
+				 * of a level. */
 } StackLevel;
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    int initialized;            /* 0 means the ThreadSpecific Data structure
+    int initialized;		/* 0 means the ThreadSpecific Data structure
 				 * for the current thread needs to be
 				 * initialized. */
     ElArray *stacks[NUM_STACKS];
-    TkWindow *cachedWindow;
-                                /* Lowest-level window currently
-				 * loaded in stacks at present. 
-				 * NULL means stacks have never
-				 * been used, or have been
-				 * invalidated because of a change
-				 * to the database. */
+    TkWindow *cachedWindow;	/* Lowest-level window currently loaded in
+				 * stacks at present. NULL means stacks have
+				 * never been used, or have been invalidated
+				 * because of a change to the database. */
     /*
-     * Information about all of the stack levels that are currently
-     * active.  This array grows dynamically to become as large as needed.
+     * Information about all of the stack levels that are currently active.
+     * This array grows dynamically to become as large as needed.
      */
 
-    StackLevel *levels;	        /* Array describing current stack. */
-    int numLevels;	        /* Total space allocated. */
-    int curLevel;	        /* Highest level currently in use.  Note:
-				 * curLevel is never 0!  (I don't remember
-				 * why anymore...) */
-    /*
-     * The variable below is a serial number for all options entered into
-     * the database so far.  It increments on each addition to the option
-     * database.  It is used in computing option priorities, so that the
-     * most recent entry wins when choosing between options at the same
-     * priority level.
-     */
-
-    int serial;
-    Element defaultMatch;       /* Special "no match" Element to use as 
+    StackLevel *levels;		/* Array describing current stack. */
+    int numLevels;		/* Total space allocated. */
+    int curLevel;		/* Highest level currently in use. Note:
+				 * curLevel is never 0! (I don't remember why
+				 * anymore...) */
+    int serial;			/* A serial number for all options entered
+				 * into the database so far. It increments on
+				 * each addition to the option database. It is
+				 * used in computing option priorities, so
+				 * that the most recent entry wins when
+				 * choosing between options at the same
+				 * priority level. */
+    Element defaultMatch;	/* Special "no match" Element to use as
 				 * default for searches.*/
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static int		AddFromString _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *string, int priority));
-static void		ClearOptionTree _ANSI_ARGS_((ElArray *arrayPtr));
-static ElArray *	ExtendArray _ANSI_ARGS_((ElArray *arrayPtr,
-			    Element *elPtr));
-static void		ExtendStacks _ANSI_ARGS_((ElArray *arrayPtr,
-			    int leaf));
-static int		GetDefaultOptions _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkWindow *winPtr));	
-static ElArray *	NewArray _ANSI_ARGS_((int numEls));	
-static void		OptionThreadExitProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		OptionInit _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr));
-static int		ParsePriority _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *string));
-static int		ReadOptionFile _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *fileName, int priority));
-static void		SetupStacks _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int leaf));
+static int		AddFromString(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    char *string, int priority);
+static void		ClearOptionTree(ElArray *arrayPtr);
+static ElArray *	ExtendArray(ElArray *arrayPtr, Element *elPtr);
+static void		ExtendStacks(ElArray *arrayPtr, int leaf);
+static int		GetDefaultOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkWindow *winPtr);
+static ElArray *	NewArray(int numEls);
+static void		OptionThreadExitProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		OptionInit(TkMainInfo *mainPtr);
+static int		ParsePriority(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *string);
+static int		ReadOptionFile(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    char *fileName, int priority);
+static void		SetupStacks(TkWindow *winPtr, int leaf);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -259,15 +243,15 @@ static void		SetupStacks _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int leaf));
  */
 
 void
-Tk_AddOption(tkwin, name, value, priority)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window token;  option will be associated
+Tk_AddOption(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window token; option will be associated
 				 * with main window for this window. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Multi-element name of option. */
-    CONST char *value;		/* String value for option. */
-    int priority;		/* Overall priority level to use for
-				 * this option, such as TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO
-				 * or TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO.  Must be between
-				 * 0 and TK_MAX_PRIO. */
+    CONST char *name,		/* Multi-element name of option. */
+    CONST char *value,		/* String value for option. */
+    int priority)		/* Overall priority level to use for this
+				 * option, such as TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO or
+				 * TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO. Must be between 0 and
+				 * TK_MAX_PRIO. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->winPtr;
     register ElArray **arrayPtrPtr;
@@ -275,21 +259,21 @@ Tk_AddOption(tkwin, name, value, priority)
     Element newEl;
     register CONST char *p;
     CONST char *field;
-    int count, firstField, length;
+    int count, firstField;
+    ptrdiff_t length;
 #define TMP_SIZE 100
     char tmp[TMP_SIZE+1];
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (winPtr->mainPtr->optionRootPtr == NULL) {
 	OptionInit(winPtr->mainPtr);
     }
-    tsdPtr->cachedWindow = NULL;	/* Invalidate the cache. */
+    tsdPtr->cachedWindow = NULL;/* Invalidate the cache. */
 
     /*
-     * Compute the priority for the new element, including both the
-     * overall level and the serial number (to disambiguate with the
-     * level).
+     * Compute the priority for the new element, including both the overall
+     * level and the serial number (to disambiguate with the level).
      */
 
     if (priority < 0) {
@@ -307,11 +291,10 @@ Tk_AddOption(tkwin, name, value, priority)
     arrayPtrPtr = &(((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->optionRootPtr);
     p = name;
     for (firstField = 1; ; firstField = 0) {
-
 	/*
-	 * Scan the next field from the name and convert it to a Tk_Uid.
-	 * Must copy the field before calling Tk_Uid, so that a terminating
-	 * NULL may be added without modifying the source string.
+	 * Scan the next field from the name and convert it to a Tk_Uid. Must
+	 * copy the field before calling Tk_Uid, so that a terminating NULL
+	 * may be added without modifying the source string.
 	 */
 
 	if (*p == '*') {
@@ -336,12 +319,10 @@ Tk_AddOption(tkwin, name, value, priority)
 	}
 
 	if (*p != 0) {
-
 	    /*
-	     * New element will be a node.  If this option can't possibly
-	     * apply to this main window, then just skip it.  Otherwise,
-	     * add it to the parent, if it isn't already there, and descend
-	     * into it.
+	     * New element will be a node. If this option can't possibly apply
+	     * to this main window, then just skip it. Otherwise, add it to
+	     * the parent, if it isn't already there, and descend into it.
 	     */
 
 	    newEl.flags |= NODE;
@@ -355,7 +336,8 @@ Tk_AddOption(tkwin, name, value, priority)
 		if (count == 0) {
 		    newEl.child.arrayPtr = NewArray(5);
 		    *arrayPtrPtr = ExtendArray(*arrayPtrPtr, &newEl);
-		    arrayPtrPtr = &((*arrayPtrPtr)->nextToUse[-1].child.arrayPtr);
+		    arrayPtrPtr = &((*arrayPtrPtr)
+			    ->nextToUse[-1].child.arrayPtr);
 		    break;
 		}
 		if ((elPtr->nameUid == newEl.nameUid)
@@ -368,11 +350,10 @@ Tk_AddOption(tkwin, name, value, priority)
 		p++;
 	    }
 	} else {
-
 	    /*
-	     * New element is a leaf.  Add it to the parent, if it isn't
-	     * already there.  If it exists already, keep whichever value
-	     * has highest priority.
+	     * New element is a leaf. Add it to the parent, if it isn't
+	     * already there. If it exists already, keep whichever value has
+	     * highest priority.
 	     */
 
 	    newEl.child.valueUid = Tk_GetUid(value);
@@ -403,27 +384,26 @@ Tk_AddOption(tkwin, name, value, priority)
  *	Retrieve an option from the option database.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the value specified in the option
- *	database for the given name and class on the given
- *	window.  If there is nothing specified in the database
- *	for that option, then NULL is returned.
+ *	The return value is the value specified in the option database for the
+ *	given name and class on the given window. If there is nothing
+ *	specified in the database for that option, then NULL is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The internal caches used to speed up option mapping
- *	may be modified, if this tkwin is different from the
- *	last tkwin used for option retrieval.
+ *	The internal caches used to speed up option mapping may be modified,
+ *	if this tkwin is different from the last tkwin used for option
+ *	retrieval.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Uid
-Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window that option is
-				 * associated with. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of option. */
-    CONST char *className;	/* Class of option.  NULL means there
-				 * is no class for this option:  just
-				 * check for name. */
+Tk_GetOption(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window that option is associated
+				 * with. */
+    CONST char *name,		/* Name of option. */
+    CONST char *className)	/* Class of option. NULL means there is no
+				 * class for this option: just check for
+				 * name. */
 {
     Tk_Uid nameId, classId = NULL;
     char *masqName;
@@ -431,12 +411,12 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
     register int count;
     StackLevel *levelPtr;
     int stackDepth[NUM_STACKS];
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
-     * Note:  no need to call OptionInit here:  it will be done by
-     * the SetupStacks call below (squeeze out those nanoseconds).
+     * Note: no need to call OptionInit here: it will be done by the
+     * SetupStacks call below (squeeze out those nanoseconds).
      */
 
     if (tkwin != (Tk_Window) tsdPtr->cachedWindow) {
@@ -446,32 +426,33 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
     /*
      * Get a default "best" match.
      */
-    
+
     bestPtr = &tsdPtr->defaultMatch;
 
     /*
      * For megawidget support, we want to have some widget options masquerade
-     * as options for other widgets.  For example, a combobox has a button in
+     * as options for other widgets. For example, a combobox has a button in
      * it; this button ought to pick up the *Button.background, etc., options.
      * But because the class of the widget is Combobox, our normal search
      * won't get that option.
      *
      * To work around this, the option name field syntax was extended to allow
      * for a "." in the name; if this character occurs in the name, then it
-     * indicates that this name contains a new window class and an option name,
-     * ie, "Button.foreground".  If we see this form in the name field, we 
-     * query the option database directly (since the option stacks will not
+     * indicates that this name contains a new window class and an option
+     * name, ie, "Button.foreground". If we see this form in the name field,
+     * we query the option database directly (since the option stacks will not
      * have the information we need).
      */
 
     masqName = strchr(name, (int)'.');
     if (masqName != NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * This option is masquerading with a different window class.
-	 * Search the stack to the depth it was before the current window's
+	 * This option is masquerading with a different window class. Search
+	 * the stack to the depth it was before the current window's
 	 * information was pushed (the value for which is stored in the bases
 	 * field).
 	 */
+
 	levelPtr = &tsdPtr->levels[tsdPtr->curLevel];
 	nameId = Tk_GetUid(masqName+1);
 	for (count = 0; count < NUM_STACKS; count++) {
@@ -479,9 +460,10 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
 	}
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * No option masquerading here.  Just use the current level to get the
+	 * No option masquerading here. Just use the current level to get the
 	 * stack depths.
 	 */
+
 	nameId = Tk_GetUid(name);
 	for (count = 0; count < NUM_STACKS; count++) {
 	    stackDepth[count] = tsdPtr->stacks[count]->numUsed;
@@ -528,11 +510,11 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
 	    }
 	}
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * If this option was masquerading with a different window class,
-     * probe the option database now.  Note that this will be inefficient
-     * if the option database is densely populated, or if the widget has many
+     * If this option was masquerading with a different window class, probe
+     * the option database now. Note that this will be inefficient if the
+     * option database is densely populated, or if the widget has many
      * masquerading options.
      */
 
@@ -541,43 +523,42 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
 	Tk_Uid nodeId, winClassId, winNameId;
 	unsigned int classNameLength;
 	register Element *nodePtr, *leafPtr;
-	static int searchOrder[] = { EXACT_NODE_NAME,
-					 WILDCARD_NODE_NAME,
-					 EXACT_NODE_CLASS,
-					 WILDCARD_NODE_CLASS,
-					 -1 };
+	static int searchOrder[] = {
+	    EXACT_NODE_NAME, WILDCARD_NODE_NAME, EXACT_NODE_CLASS,
+	    WILDCARD_NODE_CLASS, -1
+	};
 	int *currentPtr, currentStack, leafCount;
-	
+
 	/*
 	 * Extract the masquerade class name from the name field.
 	 */
-	
+
 	classNameLength	= (unsigned int)(masqName - name);
-	masqClass	= (char *)ckalloc(classNameLength + 1);
+	masqClass = (char *) ckalloc(classNameLength + 1);
 	strncpy(masqClass, name, classNameLength);
 	masqClass[classNameLength] = '\0';
-	
-	winClassId	= Tk_GetUid(masqClass);
+
+	winClassId = Tk_GetUid(masqClass);
 	ckfree(masqClass);
-	winNameId	= ((TkWindow *)tkwin)->nameUid;
+	winNameId = ((TkWindow *)tkwin)->nameUid;
 
 	levelPtr = &tsdPtr->levels[tsdPtr->curLevel];
 
 	for (currentPtr = searchOrder; *currentPtr != -1; currentPtr++) {
 	    currentStack = *currentPtr;
-	    nodePtr	= tsdPtr->stacks[currentStack]->els;
-	    count	= levelPtr->bases[currentStack];
+	    nodePtr = tsdPtr->stacks[currentStack]->els;
+	    count = levelPtr->bases[currentStack];
 
 	    /*
-	     * For wildcard stacks, check all entries;  for non-wildcard
+	     * For wildcard stacks, check all entries; for non-wildcard
 	     * stacks, only check things that matched in the parent.
 	     */
-	    
+
 	    if (!(currentStack & WILDCARD)) {
 		nodePtr += levelPtr[-1].bases[currentStack];
 		count	-= levelPtr[-1].bases[currentStack];
 	    }
-	    
+
 	    if (currentStack && CLASS) {
 		nodeId = winClassId;
 	    } else {
@@ -586,8 +567,8 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
 
 	    for ( ; count > 0; nodePtr++, count--) {
 		if (nodePtr->nameUid == nodeId) {
-		    leafPtr	= nodePtr->child.arrayPtr->els;
-		    leafCount	= nodePtr->child.arrayPtr->numUsed;
+		    leafPtr = nodePtr->child.arrayPtr->els;
+		    leafCount = nodePtr->child.arrayPtr->numUsed;
 		    for ( ; leafCount > 0; leafPtr++, leafCount--) {
 			if (leafPtr->flags & CLASS && className != NULL) {
 			    if (leafPtr->nameUid == classId &&
@@ -605,7 +586,7 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
 	    }
 	}
     }
-    
+
     return bestPtr->child.valueUid;
 }
 
@@ -614,8 +595,8 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
  *
  * Tk_OptionObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "option" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "option" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -627,17 +608,16 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_OptionObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of Tcl_Obj arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Tcl_Obj arguments. */
+Tk_OptionObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of Tcl_Obj arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Tcl_Obj arguments. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     int index, result;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     static CONST char *optionCmds[] = {
 	"add", "clear", "get", "readfile", NULL
@@ -657,85 +637,85 @@ Tk_OptionObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	return result;
     }
-    
+
     result = TCL_OK;
     switch ((enum optionVals) index) {
-	case OPTION_ADD: {
-	    int priority;
-	    if ((objc != 4) && (objc != 5)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pattern value ?priority?");
+    case OPTION_ADD: {
+	int priority;
+	if ((objc != 4) && (objc != 5)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pattern value ?priority?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	if (objc == 4) {
+	    priority = TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO;
+	} else {
+	    priority = ParsePriority(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
+	    if (priority < 0) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
+	}
+	Tk_AddOption(tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+		priority);
+	break;
+    }
 
-	    if (objc == 4) {
-		priority = TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO;
-	    } else {
-		priority = ParsePriority(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
-		if (priority < 0) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    Tk_AddOption(tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), priority);
-	    break;
+    case OPTION_CLEAR: {
+	TkMainInfo *mainPtr;
+
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	mainPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr;
+	if (mainPtr->optionRootPtr != NULL) {
+	    ClearOptionTree(mainPtr->optionRootPtr);
+	    mainPtr->optionRootPtr = NULL;
 	}
+	tsdPtr->cachedWindow = NULL;
+	break;
+    }
 
-	case OPTION_CLEAR: {
-	    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;
+    case OPTION_GET: {
+	Tk_Window window;
+	Tk_Uid value;
 
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    mainPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr;
-	    if (mainPtr->optionRootPtr != NULL) {
-		ClearOptionTree(mainPtr->optionRootPtr);
-		mainPtr->optionRootPtr = NULL;
-	    }
-	    tsdPtr->cachedWindow = NULL;
-	    break;
+	if (objc != 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window name class");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	window = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), tkwin);
+	if (window == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
+	value = Tk_GetOption(window, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+		Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
+	if (value != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *)value, TCL_STATIC);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-	case OPTION_GET: {
-	    Tk_Window window;
-	    Tk_Uid value;
-	    
-	    if (objc != 5) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window name class");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    window = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), tkwin);
-	    if (window == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    value = Tk_GetOption(window, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
-	    if (value != NULL) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *)value, TCL_STATIC);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case OPTION_READFILE: {
+	int priority;
+
+	if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fileName ?priority?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
-	case OPTION_READFILE: {
-	    int priority;
-	    
-	    if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fileName ?priority?");
+	if (objc == 4) {
+	    priority = ParsePriority(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+	    if (priority < 0) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-
-	    if (objc == 4) {
-		priority = ParsePriority(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
-		if (priority < 0) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    } else {
-		priority = TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO;
-	    }
-	    result = ReadOptionFile(interp, tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-		    priority);
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    priority = TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO;
 	}
+	result = ReadOptionFile(interp, tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		priority);
+	break;
+    }
     }
     return result;
 }
@@ -745,33 +725,31 @@ Tk_OptionObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkOptionDeadWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is called whenever a window is deleted.
- *	It cleans up any option-related stuff associated with
- *	the window.
+ *	This function is called whenever a window is deleted. It cleans up any
+ *	option-related stuff associated with the window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Option-related resources are freed.  See code below
- *	for details.
+ *	Option-related resources are freed. See code below for details.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkOptionDeadWindow(winPtr)
-    register TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to be cleaned up. */
+TkOptionDeadWindow(
+    register TkWindow *winPtr)	/* Window to be cleaned up. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
      * If this window is in the option stacks, then clear the stacks.
      *
      * XXX: OptionThreadExitProc will be invoked before DeleteWindowsExitProc
      * XXX: if it is thread-specific (which it should be), invalidating the
-     * XXX: tsd.  Tk shutdown needs to be verified to handle this correctly.
+     * XXX: tsd. Tk shutdown needs to be verified to handle this correctly.
      */
 
     if (tsdPtr->initialized && (winPtr->optionLevel != -1)) {
@@ -785,8 +763,7 @@ TkOptionDeadWindow(winPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If this window was a main window, then delete its option
-     * database.
+     * If this window was a main window, then delete its option database.
      */
 
     if ((winPtr->mainPtr != NULL) && (winPtr->mainPtr->winPtr == winPtr)
@@ -801,10 +778,9 @@ TkOptionDeadWindow(winPtr)
  *
  * TkOptionClassChanged --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a window's class changes.  If
- *	the window is on the option cache, this procedure flushes
- *	any information for the window, since the new class could change
- *	what is relevant.
+ *	This function is invoked when a window's class changes. If the window
+ *	is on the option cache, this function flushes any information for the
+ *	window, since the new class could change what is relevant.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -816,21 +792,21 @@ TkOptionDeadWindow(winPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkOptionClassChanged(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;			/* Window whose class changed. */
+TkOptionClassChanged(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Window whose class changed. */
 {
     int i, j, *basePtr;
     ElArray *arrayPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (winPtr->optionLevel == -1) {
 	return;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the lowest stack level that refers to this window, then
-     * flush all of the levels above the matching one.
+     * Find the lowest stack level that refers to this window, then flush all
+     * of the levels above the matching one.
      */
 
     for (i = 1; i <= tsdPtr->curLevel; i++) {
@@ -863,9 +839,9 @@ TkOptionClassChanged(winPtr)
  *	Parse a string priority value.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the integer priority level corresponding
- *	to string, or -1 if string doesn't point to a valid priority level.
- *	In this case, an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is the integer priority level corresponding to
+ *	string, or -1 if string doesn't point to a valid priority level. In
+ *	this case, an error message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -874,9 +850,9 @@ TkOptionClassChanged(winPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-ParsePriority(interp, string)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    char *string;		/* Describes a priority level, either
+ParsePriority(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    char *string)		/* Describes a priority level, either
 				 * symbolically or numerically. */
 {
     int priority, c;
@@ -902,10 +878,9 @@ ParsePriority(interp, string)
 	priority = strtoul(string, &end, 0);
 	if ((end == string) || (*end != 0) || (priority < 0)
 		|| (priority > 100)) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,  "bad priority level \"", string,
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad priority level \"", string,
 		    "\": must be widgetDefault, startupFile, userDefault, ",
-		    "interactive, or a number between 0 and 100",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    "interactive, or a number between 0 and 100", NULL);
 	    return -1;
 	}
     }
@@ -917,17 +892,17 @@ ParsePriority(interp, string)
  *
  * AddFromString --
  *
- *	Given a string containing lines in the standard format for
- *	X resources (see other documentation for details on what this
- *	is), parse the resource specifications and enter them as options
- *	for tkwin's main window.
+ *	Given a string containing lines in the standard format for X resources
+ *	(see other documentation for details on what this is), parse the
+ *	resource specifications and enter them as options for tkwin's main
+ *	window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return code.  In the case of
- *	an error in parsing string, TCL_ERROR will be returned and an
- *	error message will be left in the interp's result.  The memory at
- *	string is totally trashed by this procedure.  If you care about
- *	its contents, make a copy before calling here.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return code. In the case of an
+ *	error in parsing string, TCL_ERROR will be returned and an error
+ *	message will be left in the interp's result. The memory at string is
+ *	totally trashed by this function. If you care about its contents, make
+ *	a copy before calling here.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -936,15 +911,15 @@ ParsePriority(interp, string)
  */
 
 static int
-AddFromString(interp, tkwin, string, priority)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting results. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window:  options are entered
-				 * for this window's main window. */
-    char *string;		/* String containing option specifiers. */
-    int priority;		/* Priority level to use for options in
-				 * this string, such as TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO
-				 * or TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO.  Must be between
-				 * 0 and TK_MAX_PRIO. */
+AddFromString(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for reporting results. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window: options are entered for
+				 * this window's main window. */
+    char *string,		/* String containing option specifiers. */
+    int priority)		/* Priority level to use for options in this
+				 * string, such as TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO or
+				 * TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO. Must be between 0 and
+				 * TK_MAX_PRIO. */
 {
     register char *src, *dst;
     char *name, *value;
@@ -975,7 +950,7 @@ AddFromString(interp, tkwin, string, priority)
 	    src++;
 	    lineNum++;
 	    continue;
-	} 
+	}
 	if (*src == '\0') {
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -989,7 +964,7 @@ AddFromString(interp, tkwin, string, priority)
 	while (*src != ':') {
 	    if ((*src == '\0') || (*src == '\n')) {
 		char buf[32 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-		
+
 		sprintf(buf, "missing colon on line %d", lineNum);
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1024,7 +999,7 @@ AddFromString(interp, tkwin, string, priority)
 	}
 	if (*src == '\0') {
 	    char buf[32 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	    
+
 	    sprintf(buf, "missing value on line %d", lineNum);
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1039,7 +1014,7 @@ AddFromString(interp, tkwin, string, priority)
 	while (*src != '\n') {
 	    if (*src == '\0') {
 		char buf[32 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-		
+
 		sprintf(buf, "missing newline on line %d", lineNum);
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1071,13 +1046,13 @@ AddFromString(interp, tkwin, string, priority)
  *
  * ReadOptionFile --
  *
- * 	Read a file of options ("resources" in the old X terminology)
- *	and load them into the option database.
+ *	Read a file of options ("resources" in the old X terminology) and load
+ *	them into the option database.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return code.  In the case of
- *	an error in parsing string, TCL_ERROR will be returned and an
- *	error message will be left in the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return code. In the case of an
+ *	error in parsing string, TCL_ERROR will be returned and an error
+ *	message will be left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1086,15 +1061,15 @@ AddFromString(interp, tkwin, string, priority)
  */
 
 static int
-ReadOptionFile(interp, tkwin, fileName, priority)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting results. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window:  options are entered
-				 * for this window's main window. */
-    char *fileName;		/* Name of file containing options. */
-    int priority;		/* Priority level to use for options in
-				 * this file, such as TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO
-				 * or TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO.  Must be between
-				 * 0 and TK_MAX_PRIO. */
+ReadOptionFile(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for reporting results. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window: options are entered for
+				 * this window's main window. */
+    char *fileName,		/* Name of file containing options. */
+    int priority)		/* Priority level to use for options in this
+				 * file, such as TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO or
+				 * TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO. Must be between 0 and
+				 * TK_MAX_PRIO. */
 {
     CONST char *realName;
     char *buffer;
@@ -1105,13 +1080,13 @@ ReadOptionFile(interp, tkwin, fileName, priority)
     /*
      * Prevent file system access in a safe interpreter.
      */
-    
+
     if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
-        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't read options from a file in a",
-                " safe interpreter", (char *) NULL);
-        return TCL_ERROR;
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't read options from a file in a",
+		" safe interpreter", NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     realName = Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, fileName, &newName);
     if (realName == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1119,23 +1094,23 @@ ReadOptionFile(interp, tkwin, fileName, priority)
     chan = Tcl_OpenFileChannel(interp, realName, "r", 0);
     Tcl_DStringFree(&newName);
     if (chan == NULL) {
-        Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "couldn't open \"", fileName,
-		"\": ", Tcl_PosixError(interp), (char *) NULL);
+		"\": ", Tcl_PosixError(interp), NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Compute size of file by seeking to the end of the file.  This will
+     * Compute size of file by seeking to the end of the file. This will
      * overallocate if we are performing CRLF translation.
      */
-    
+
     bufferSize = (int) Tcl_Seek(chan, (Tcl_WideInt) 0, SEEK_END);
     (void) Tcl_Seek(chan, (Tcl_WideInt) 0, SEEK_SET);
 
     if (bufferSize < 0) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error seeking to end of file \"",
-		fileName, "\":", Tcl_PosixError(interp), (char *) NULL);
+		fileName, "\":", Tcl_PosixError(interp), NULL);
 	Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
 
@@ -1144,7 +1119,7 @@ ReadOptionFile(interp, tkwin, fileName, priority)
     bufferSize = Tcl_Read(chan, buffer, bufferSize);
     if (bufferSize < 0) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error reading file \"", fileName, "\":",
-		Tcl_PosixError(interp), (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_PosixError(interp), NULL);
 	Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -1163,9 +1138,8 @@ ReadOptionFile(interp, tkwin, fileName, priority)
  *	Create a new ElArray structure of a given size.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to a properly initialized
- *	element array with "numEls" space.  The array is marked
- *	as having no active elements.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to a properly initialized element array
+ *	with "numEls" space. The array is marked as having no active elements.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory is allocated.
@@ -1174,8 +1148,8 @@ ReadOptionFile(interp, tkwin, fileName, priority)
  */
 
 static ElArray *
-NewArray(numEls)
-    int numEls;			/* How many elements of space to allocate. */
+NewArray(
+    int numEls)			/* How many elements of space to allocate. */
 {
     register ElArray *arrayPtr;
 
@@ -1191,12 +1165,11 @@ NewArray(numEls)
  *
  * ExtendArray --
  *
- *	Add a new element to an array, extending the array if
- *	necessary.
+ *	Add a new element to an array, extending the array if necessary.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the new array, which
- *	will be different from arrayPtr if the array got expanded.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the new array, which will be
+ *	different from arrayPtr if the array got expanded.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory may be allocated or freed.
@@ -1205,9 +1178,9 @@ NewArray(numEls)
  */
 
 static ElArray *
-ExtendArray(arrayPtr, elPtr)
-    register ElArray *arrayPtr;		/* Array to be extended. */
-    register Element *elPtr;		/* Element to be copied into array. */
+ExtendArray(
+    register ElArray *arrayPtr,	/* Array to be extended. */
+    register Element *elPtr)	/* Element to be copied into array. */
 {
     /*
      * If the current array has filled up, make it bigger.
@@ -1220,8 +1193,8 @@ ExtendArray(arrayPtr, elPtr)
 	newPtr->arraySize = 2*arrayPtr->arraySize;
 	newPtr->numUsed = arrayPtr->numUsed;
 	newPtr->nextToUse = &newPtr->els[newPtr->numUsed];
-	memcpy((VOID *) newPtr->els, (VOID *) arrayPtr->els,
-		(arrayPtr->arraySize*sizeof(Element)));
+	memcpy(newPtr->els, arrayPtr->els,
+		arrayPtr->arraySize * sizeof(Element));
 	ckfree((char *) arrayPtr);
 	arrayPtr = newPtr;
     }
@@ -1237,40 +1210,40 @@ ExtendArray(arrayPtr, elPtr)
  *
  * SetupStacks --
  *
- *	Arrange the stacks so that they cache all the option
- *	information for a particular window.
+ *	Arrange the stacks so that they cache all the option information for a
+ *	particular window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The stacks are modified to hold information for tkwin
- *	and all its ancestors in the window hierarchy.
+ *	The stacks are modified to hold information for tkwin and all its
+ *	ancestors in the window hierarchy.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window for which information is to
-				 * be cached. */
-    int leaf;			/* Non-zero means this is the leaf
-				 * window being probed.  Zero means this
-				 * is an ancestor of the desired leaf. */
+SetupStacks(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Window for which information is to be
+				 * cached. */
+    int leaf)			/* Non-zero means this is the leaf window
+				 * being probed. Zero means this is an
+				 * ancestor of the desired leaf. */
 {
     int level, i, *iPtr;
     register StackLevel *levelPtr;
     register ElArray *arrayPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
-     * The following array defines the order in which the current
-     * stacks are searched to find matching entries to add to the
-     * stacks.  Given the current priority-based scheme, the order
-     * below is no longer relevant;  all that matters is that an
-     * element is on the list *somewhere*.  The ordering is a relic
-     * of the old days when priorities were determined differently.
+     * The following array defines the order in which the current stacks are
+     * searched to find matching entries to add to the stacks. Given the
+     * current priority-based scheme, the order below is no longer relevant;
+     * all that matters is that an element is on the list *somewhere*. The
+     * ordering is a relic of the old days when priorities were determined
+     * differently.
      */
 
     static int searchOrder[] = {WILDCARD_NODE_CLASS, WILDCARD_NODE_NAME,
@@ -1281,8 +1254,7 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Step 1:  make sure that options are cached for this window's
-     * parent.
+     * Step 1: make sure that options are cached for this window's parent.
      */
 
     if (winPtr->parentPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1297,8 +1269,8 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Step 2:  pop extra unneeded information off the stacks and
-     * mark those windows as no longer having cached information.
+     * Step 2: pop extra unneeded information off the stacks and mark those
+     * windows as no longer having cached information.
      */
 
     if (tsdPtr->curLevel >= level) {
@@ -1316,9 +1288,9 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
     tsdPtr->curLevel = winPtr->optionLevel = level;
 
     /*
-     * Step 3:  if the root database information isn't loaded or
-     * isn't valid, initialize level 0 of the stack from the
-     * database root (this only happens if winPtr is a main window).
+     * Step 3: if the root database information isn't loaded or isn't valid,
+     * initialize level 0 of the stack from the database root (this only
+     * happens if winPtr is a main window).
      */
 
     if ((tsdPtr->curLevel == 1)
@@ -1333,19 +1305,18 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Step 4: create a new stack level;  grow the level array if
-     * we've run out of levels.  Clear the stacks for EXACT_LEAF_NAME
-     * and EXACT_LEAF_CLASS (anything that was there is of no use
-     * any more).
+     * Step 4: create a new stack level; grow the level array if we've run out
+     * of levels. Clear the stacks for EXACT_LEAF_NAME and EXACT_LEAF_CLASS
+     * (anything that was there is of no use any more).
      */
 
     if (tsdPtr->curLevel >= tsdPtr->numLevels) {
 	StackLevel *newLevels;
 
 	newLevels = (StackLevel *) ckalloc((unsigned)
-		(tsdPtr->numLevels*2*sizeof(StackLevel)));
-	memcpy((VOID *) newLevels, (VOID *) tsdPtr->levels,
-		(tsdPtr->numLevels*sizeof(StackLevel)));
+		(tsdPtr->numLevels * 2 * sizeof(StackLevel)));
+	memcpy(newLevels, tsdPtr->levels,
+		tsdPtr->numLevels * sizeof(StackLevel));
 	ckfree((char *) tsdPtr->levels);
 	tsdPtr->numLevels *= 2;
 	tsdPtr->levels = newLevels;
@@ -1361,10 +1332,10 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
     for (i = 0; i < NUM_STACKS; i++) {
 	levelPtr->bases[i] = tsdPtr->stacks[i]->numUsed;
     }
+
     /*
      * Step 5: scan the current stack level looking for matches to this
-     * window's name or class;  where found, add new information to the
-     * stacks.
+     * window's name or class; where found, add new information to the stacks.
      */
 
     for (iPtr = searchOrder; *iPtr != -1; iPtr++) {
@@ -1382,8 +1353,8 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
 	count = levelPtr->bases[i];
 
 	/*
-	 * For wildcard stacks, check all entries;  for non-wildcard
-	 * stacks, only check things that matched in the parent.
+	 * For wildcard stacks, check all entries; for non-wildcard stacks,
+	 * only check things that matched in the parent.
 	 */
 
 	if (!(i & WILDCARD)) {
@@ -1405,9 +1376,8 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
  *
  * ExtendStacks --
  *
- *	Given an element array, copy all the elements from the
- *	array onto the system stacks (except for irrelevant leaf
- *	elements).
+ *	Given an element array, copy all the elements from the array onto the
+ *	system stacks (except for irrelevant leaf elements).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1419,23 +1389,23 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
  */
 
 static void
-ExtendStacks(arrayPtr, leaf)
-    ElArray *arrayPtr;		/* Array of elements to copy onto stacks. */
-    int leaf;			/* If zero, then don't copy exact leaf
+ExtendStacks(
+    ElArray *arrayPtr,		/* Array of elements to copy onto stacks. */
+    int leaf)			/* If zero, then don't copy exact leaf
 				 * elements. */
 {
     register int count;
     register Element *elPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     for (elPtr = arrayPtr->els, count = arrayPtr->numUsed;
 	    count > 0; elPtr++, count--) {
 	if (!(elPtr->flags & (NODE|WILDCARD)) && !leaf) {
 	    continue;
 	}
-	tsdPtr->stacks[elPtr->flags] = ExtendArray(
-                tsdPtr->stacks[elPtr->flags], elPtr);
+	tsdPtr->stacks[elPtr->flags] =
+		ExtendArray(tsdPtr->stacks[elPtr->flags], elPtr);
     }
 }
 
@@ -1456,14 +1426,15 @@ ExtendStacks(arrayPtr, leaf)
  */
 
 static void
-OptionThreadExitProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* not used */
+OptionThreadExitProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* not used */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (tsdPtr->initialized) {
 	int i;
+
 	for (i = 0; i < NUM_STACKS; i++) {
 	    ckfree((char *) tsdPtr->stacks[i]);
 	}
@@ -1489,35 +1460,35 @@ OptionThreadExitProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-OptionInit(mainPtr)
-    register TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* Top-level information about
-					 * window that isn't initialized
-					 * yet. */
+OptionInit(
+    register TkMainInfo *mainPtr)
+				/* Top-level information about window that
+				 * isn't initialized yet. */
 {
     int i;
     Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Element *defaultMatchPtr = &tsdPtr->defaultMatch;
 
     /*
      * First, once-only initialization.
      */
-    
+
     if (tsdPtr->initialized == 0) {
-        tsdPtr->initialized = 1;
-        tsdPtr->cachedWindow = NULL;
+	tsdPtr->initialized = 1;
+	tsdPtr->cachedWindow = NULL;
 	tsdPtr->numLevels = 5;
 	tsdPtr->curLevel = -1;
 	tsdPtr->serial = 0;
 
-	tsdPtr->levels = (StackLevel *) ckalloc((unsigned) 
-                (5*sizeof(StackLevel)));
+	tsdPtr->levels = (StackLevel *)
+		ckalloc((unsigned) (5*sizeof(StackLevel)));
 	for (i = 0; i < NUM_STACKS; i++) {
 	    tsdPtr->stacks[i] = NewArray(10);
 	    tsdPtr->levels[0].bases[i] = 0;
 	}
-    
+
 	defaultMatchPtr->nameUid = NULL;
 	defaultMatchPtr->child.valueUid = NULL;
 	defaultMatchPtr->priority = -1;
@@ -1526,7 +1497,7 @@ OptionInit(mainPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Then, per-main-window initialization.  Create and delete dummy
+     * Then, per-main-window initialization. Create and delete dummy
      * interpreter for message logging.
      */
 
@@ -1541,23 +1512,22 @@ OptionInit(mainPtr)
  *
  * ClearOptionTree --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to erase everything in a
- *	hierarchical option database.
+ *	This function is called to erase everything in a hierarchical option
+ *	database.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	All the options associated with arrayPtr are deleted,
- *	along with all option subtrees.  The space pointed to
- *	by arrayPtr is freed.
+ *	All the options associated with arrayPtr are deleted, along with all
+ *	option subtrees. The space pointed to by arrayPtr is freed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ClearOptionTree(arrayPtr)
-    ElArray *arrayPtr;		/* Array of options;  delete everything
+ClearOptionTree(
+    ElArray *arrayPtr)		/* Array of options; delete everything
 				 * referred to recursively by this. */
 {
     register Element *elPtr;
@@ -1577,28 +1547,27 @@ ClearOptionTree(arrayPtr)
  *
  * GetDefaultOptions --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to load the default set of options
- *	for a window.
+ *	This function is invoked to load the default set of options for a
+ *	window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Options are added to those for winPtr's main window.  If
- *	there exists a RESOURCE_MANAGER proprety for winPtr's
- *	display, that is used.  Otherwise, the .Xdefaults file in
- *	the user's home directory is used.
+ *	Options are added to those for winPtr's main window. If there exists a
+ *	RESOURCE_MANAGER proprety for winPtr's display, that is used.
+ *	Otherwise, the .Xdefaults file in the user's home directory is used.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-GetDefaultOptions(interp, winPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Fetch option defaults for main window
+GetDefaultOptions(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Fetch option defaults for main window
 				 * associated with this. */
 {
-    char *regProp;
+    char *regProp, **regPropPtr = &regProp;
     int result, actualFormat;
     unsigned long numItems, bytesAfter;
     Atom actualType;
@@ -1609,10 +1578,9 @@ GetDefaultOptions(interp, winPtr)
 
     regProp = NULL;
     result = XGetWindowProperty(winPtr->display,
-	    RootWindow(winPtr->display, 0),
-	    XA_RESOURCE_MANAGER, 0, 100000,
-	    False, XA_STRING, &actualType, &actualFormat,
-	    &numItems, &bytesAfter, (unsigned char **) &regProp);
+	    RootWindow(winPtr->display, 0), XA_RESOURCE_MANAGER, 0, 100000,
+	    False, XA_STRING, &actualType, &actualFormat, &numItems,
+	    &bytesAfter, (unsigned char **) regPropPtr);
 
     if ((result == Success) && (actualType == XA_STRING)
 	    && (actualFormat == 8)) {
@@ -1623,8 +1591,7 @@ GetDefaultOptions(interp, winPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * No luck there.  Try a .Xdefaults file in the user's home
-     * directory.
+     * No luck there. Try a .Xdefaults file in the user's home directory.
      */
 
     if (regProp != NULL) {
@@ -1634,3 +1601,11 @@ GetDefaultOptions(interp, winPtr)
 	    TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO);
     return result;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkPack.c b/generic/tkPack.c
index 8498df6..47eddd6 100644
--- a/generic/tkPack.c
+++ b/generic/tkPack.c
@@ -1,22 +1,21 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkPack.c --
  *
- *	This file contains code to implement the "packer"
- *	geometry manager for Tk.
+ *	This file contains code to implement the "packer" geometry manager for
+ *	Tk.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 typedef enum {TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, RIGHT} Side;
 static CONST char *sideNames[] = {
-    "top", "bottom", "left", "right", (char *) NULL
+    "top", "bottom", "left", "right", NULL
 };
 
 /* For each window that the packer cares about (either because
@@ -26,70 +25,68 @@ static CONST char *sideNames[] = {
  */
 
 typedef struct Packer {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk token for window.  NULL means that
-				 * the window has been deleted, but the
-				 * packet hasn't had a chance to clean up
-				 * yet because the structure is still in
-				 * use. */
-    struct Packer *masterPtr;	/* Master window within which this window
-				 * is packed (NULL means this window
-				 * isn't managed by the packer). */
-    struct Packer *nextPtr;	/* Next window packed within same
-				 * parent.  List is priority-ordered:
-				 * first on list gets packed first. */
-    struct Packer *slavePtr;	/* First in list of slaves packed
-				 * inside this window (NULL means
-				 * no packed slaves). */
-    Side side;			/* Side of parent against which
-				 * this window is packed. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk token for window. NULL means that the
+				 * window has been deleted, but the packet
+				 * hasn't had a chance to clean up yet because
+				 * the structure is still in use. */
+    struct Packer *masterPtr;	/* Master window within which this window is
+				 * packed (NULL means this window isn't
+				 * managed by the packer). */
+    struct Packer *nextPtr;	/* Next window packed within same master.
+				 * List is priority-ordered: first on list
+				 * gets packed first. */
+    struct Packer *slavePtr;	/* First in list of slaves packed inside this
+				 * window (NULL means no packed slaves). */
+    Side side;			/* Side of master against which this window is
+				 * packed. */
     Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* If frame allocated for window is larger
-				 * than window needs, this indicates how
-				 * where to position window in frame. */
+				 * than window needs, this indicates how where
+				 * to position window in frame. */
     int padX, padY;		/* Total additional pixels to leave around the
-				 * window.  Some is of this space is on each 
-				 * side.  This is space *outside* the window:
+				 * window. Some is of this space is on each
+				 * side. This is space *outside* the window:
 				 * we'll allocate extra space in frame but
 				 * won't enlarge window). */
-    int padLeft, padTop;	/* The part of padX or padY to use on the
-				 * left or top of the widget, respectively.
-				 * By default, this is half of padX or padY. */
+    int padLeft, padTop;	/* The part of padX or padY to use on the left
+				 * or top of the widget, respectively. By
+				 * default, this is half of padX or padY. */
     int iPadX, iPadY;		/* Total extra pixels to allocate inside the
 				 * window (half of this amount will appear on
 				 * each side). */
-    int doubleBw;		/* Twice the window's last known border
-				 * width.  If this changes, the window
-				 * must be repacked within its parent. */
-    int *abortPtr;		/* If non-NULL, it means that there is a nested
-				 * call to ArrangePacking already working on
-				 * this window.  *abortPtr may be set to 1 to
-				 * abort that nested call.  This happens, for
-				 * example, if tkwin or any of its slaves
-				 * is deleted. */
-    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags;  see below
-				 * for definitions. */
+    int doubleBw;		/* Twice the window's last known border width.
+				 * If this changes, the window must be
+				 * repacked within its master. */
+    int *abortPtr;		/* If non-NULL, it means that there is a
+				 * nested call to ArrangePacking already
+				 * working on this window. *abortPtr may be
+				 * set to 1 to abort that nested call. This
+				 * happens, for example, if tkwin or any of
+				 * its slaves is deleted. */
+    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags; see below for
+				 * definitions. */
 } Packer;
 
 /*
  * Flag values for Packer structures:
  *
- * REQUESTED_REPACK:		1 means a Tcl_DoWhenIdle request
- *				has already been made to repack
- *				all the slaves of this window.
- * FILLX:			1 means if frame allocated for window
- *				is wider than window needs, expand window
- *				to fill frame.  0 means don't make window
- *				any larger than needed.
+ * REQUESTED_REPACK:		1 means a Tcl_DoWhenIdle request has already
+ *				been made to repack all the slaves of this
+ *				window.
+ * FILLX:			1 means if frame allocated for window is wider
+ *				than window needs, expand window to fill
+ *				frame. 0 means don't make window any larger
+ *				than needed.
  * FILLY:			Same as FILLX, except for height.
  * EXPAND:			1 means this window's frame will absorb any
- *				extra space in the parent window.
- * OLD_STYLE:			1 means this window is being managed with
- *				the old-style packer algorithms (before
- *				Tk version 3.3).  The main difference is
- *				that padding and filling are done differently.
+ *				extra space in the master window.
+ * OLD_STYLE:			1 means this window is being managed with the
+ *				old-style packer algorithms (before Tk version
+ *				3.3). The main difference is that padding and
+ *				filling are done differently.
  * DONT_PROPAGATE:		1 means don't set this window's requested
- *				size.  0 means if this window is a master
- *				then Tk will set its requested size to fit
- *				the needs of its slaves.
+ *				size. 0 means if this window is a master then
+ *				Tk will set its requested size to fit the
+ *				needs of its slaves.
  */
 
 #define REQUESTED_REPACK	1
@@ -100,52 +97,44 @@ typedef struct Packer {
 #define DONT_PROPAGATE		32
 
 /*
- * The following structure is the official type record for the
- * packer:
+ * The following structure is the official type record for the packer:
  */
 
-static void		PackReqProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		PackLostSlaveProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
+static void		PackReqProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		PackLostSlaveProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
 
-static Tk_GeomMgr packerType = {
+static const Tk_GeomMgr packerType = {
     "pack",			/* name */
     PackReqProc,		/* requestProc */
     PackLostSlaveProc,		/* lostSlaveProc */
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ArrangePacking _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int		ConfigureSlaves _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void             DestroyPacker _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static Packer *		GetPacker _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-static int		PackAfter _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Packer *prevPtr, Packer *masterPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		PackReqProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		PackStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		Unlink _ANSI_ARGS_((Packer *packPtr));
-static int		XExpansion _ANSI_ARGS_((Packer *slavePtr,
-			    int cavityWidth));
-static int		YExpansion _ANSI_ARGS_((Packer *slavePtr,
-			    int cavityHeight));
+static void		ArrangePacking(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ConfigureSlaves(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DestroyPacker(char *memPtr);
+static Packer *		GetPacker(Tk_Window tkwin);
+static int		PackAfter(Tcl_Interp *interp, Packer *prevPtr,
+			    Packer *masterPtr, int objc,Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		PackStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		Unlink(Packer *packPtr);
+static int		XExpansion(Packer *slavePtr, int cavityWidth);
+static int		YExpansion(Packer *slavePtr, int cavityHeight);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkPrintPadAmount --
  *
- *	This procedure generates a text value that describes one
- *	of the -padx, -pady, -ipadx, or -ipady configuration options.
- *	The text value generated is appended to the interpreter
- *	result.
+ *	This function generates a text value that describes one of the -padx,
+ *	-pady, -ipadx, or -ipady configuration options. The text value
+ *	generated is appended to the interpreter result.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -155,13 +144,14 @@ static int		YExpansion _ANSI_ARGS_((Packer *slavePtr,
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-void 
-TkPrintPadAmount(interp, switchName, halfSpace, allSpace)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interpreter into which the result
-				 * is written. */
-    char *switchName;		/* One of "padx", "pady", "ipadx" or "ipady" */
-    int halfSpace;		/* The left or top padding amount */
-    int allSpace;		/* The total amount of padding */
+
+void
+TkPrintPadAmount(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interpreter into which the result is
+				 * written. */
+    char *switchName,		/* One of "padx", "pady", "ipadx" or "ipady" */
+    int halfSpace,		/* The left or top padding amount */
+    int allSpace)		/* The total amount of padding */
 {
     char buffer[60 + 2*TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
     if (halfSpace*2 == allSpace) {
@@ -170,17 +160,16 @@ TkPrintPadAmount(interp, switchName, halfSpace, allSpace)
 	sprintf(buffer, " -%.10s {%d %d}", switchName, halfSpace,
 		allSpace - halfSpace);
     }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *)NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 }
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_PackCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "pack" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "pack" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -192,19 +181,18 @@ TkPrintPadAmount(interp, switchName, halfSpace, allSpace)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_PackObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     char *argv2;
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
 	/* after, append, before and unpack are deprecated */
 	"after", "append", "before", "unpack",
-	"configure", "forget", "info", "propagate", "slaves", (char *) NULL };
+	"configure", "forget", "info", "propagate", "slaves", NULL };
     enum options {
 	PACK_AFTER, PACK_APPEND, PACK_BEFORE, PACK_UNPACK,
 	PACK_CONFIGURE, PACK_FORGET, PACK_INFO, PACK_PROPAGATE, PACK_SLAVES };
@@ -224,9 +212,8 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], optionStrings, "option", 0,
 	    &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	/*
-	 * Call it again without the deprecated ones to get a proper
-	 * error message.
-	 * This works well since there can't be any ambiguity between
+	 * Call it again without the deprecated ones to get a proper error
+	 * message. This works well since there can't be any ambiguity between
 	 * deprecated and new options.
 	 */
 
@@ -237,7 +224,8 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     argv2 = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-    if (index == PACK_AFTER) {
+    switch ((enum options) index) {
+    case PACK_AFTER: {
 	Packer *prevPtr;
 	Tk_Window tkwin2;
 
@@ -247,11 +235,12 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	prevPtr = GetPacker(tkwin2);
 	if (prevPtr->masterPtr == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", argv2,
-		    "\" isn't packed", (char *) NULL);
+		    "\" isn't packed", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	return PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, prevPtr->masterPtr, objc-3, objv+3);
-    } else if (index == PACK_APPEND) {
+    }
+    case PACK_APPEND: {
 	Packer *masterPtr;
 	register Packer *prevPtr;
 	Tk_Window tkwin2;
@@ -267,7 +256,8 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	}
 	return PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc-3, objv+3);
-    } else if (index == PACK_BEFORE) {
+    }
+    case PACK_BEFORE: {
 	Packer *packPtr, *masterPtr;
 	register Packer *prevPtr;
 	Tk_Window tkwin2;
@@ -278,7 +268,7 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	packPtr = GetPacker(tkwin2);
 	if (packPtr->masterPtr == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", argv2,
-		    "\" isn't packed", (char *) NULL);
+		    "\" isn't packed", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	masterPtr = packPtr->masterPtr;
@@ -288,7 +278,7 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	} else {
 	    for ( ; ; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) {
 		if (prevPtr == NULL) {
-		    panic("\"pack before\" couldn't find predecessor");
+		    Tcl_Panic("\"pack before\" couldn't find predecessor");
 		}
 		if (prevPtr->nextPtr == packPtr) {
 		    break;
@@ -296,14 +286,15 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	}
 	return PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc-3, objv+3);
-    } else if (index == PACK_CONFIGURE) {
+    }
+    case PACK_CONFIGURE:
 	if (argv2[0] != '.') {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad argument \"", argv2,
-		    "\": must be name of window", (char *) NULL);
+		    "\": must be name of window", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	return ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc-2, objv+2);
-    } else if (index == PACK_FORGET) {
+    case PACK_FORGET: {
 	Tk_Window slave;
 	Packer *slavePtr;
 	int i;
@@ -314,7 +305,7 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	    slavePtr = GetPacker(slave);
 	    if ((slavePtr != NULL) && (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL)) {
-		Tk_ManageGeometry(slave, (Tk_GeomMgr *) NULL,
+		Tk_ManageGeometry(slave, NULL,
 			(ClientData) NULL);
 		if (slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin)) {
 		    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin,
@@ -324,7 +315,9 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		Tk_UnmapWindow(slavePtr->tkwin);
 	    }
 	}
-    } else if (index == PACK_INFO) {
+	break;
+    }
+    case PACK_INFO: {
 	register Packer *slavePtr;
 	Tk_Window slave;
 
@@ -338,7 +331,7 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	slavePtr = GetPacker(slave);
 	if (slavePtr->masterPtr == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", argv2,
-		    "\" isn't packed", (char *) NULL);
+		    "\" isn't packed", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, "-in");
@@ -346,29 +339,29 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, "-anchor");
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tk_NameOfAnchor(slavePtr->anchor));
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -expand ",
-		(slavePtr->flags & EXPAND) ? "1" : "0", " -fill ",
-		(char *) NULL);
+		(slavePtr->flags & EXPAND) ? "1" : "0", " -fill ", NULL);
 	switch (slavePtr->flags & (FILLX|FILLY)) {
-	    case 0:
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "none", (char *) NULL);
-		break;
-	    case FILLX:
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "x", (char *) NULL);
-		break;
-	    case FILLY:
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "y", (char *) NULL);
-		break;
-	    case FILLX|FILLY:
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "both", (char *) NULL);
-		break;
+	case 0:
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "none", NULL);
+	    break;
+	case FILLX:
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "x", NULL);
+	    break;
+	case FILLY:
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "y", NULL);
+	    break;
+	case FILLX|FILLY:
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "both", NULL);
+	    break;
 	}
-        TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "ipadx", slavePtr->iPadX/2, slavePtr->iPadX);
-        TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "ipady", slavePtr->iPadY/2, slavePtr->iPadY);
-        TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "padx", slavePtr->padLeft, slavePtr->padX);
-        TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "pady", slavePtr->padTop, slavePtr->padY);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -side ", sideNames[slavePtr->side],
-		(char *) NULL);
-    } else if (index == PACK_PROPAGATE) {
+	TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "ipadx", slavePtr->iPadX/2, slavePtr->iPadX);
+	TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "ipady", slavePtr->iPadY/2, slavePtr->iPadY);
+	TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "padx", slavePtr->padLeft, slavePtr->padX);
+	TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "pady", slavePtr->padTop, slavePtr->padY);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -side ", sideNames[slavePtr->side], NULL);
+	break;
+    }
+    case PACK_PROPAGATE: {
 	Tk_Window master;
 	Packer *masterPtr;
 	int propagate;
@@ -407,7 +400,9 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	} else {
 	    masterPtr->flags |= DONT_PROPAGATE;
 	}
-    } else if (index == PACK_SLAVES) {
+	break;
+    }
+    case PACK_SLAVES: {
 	Tk_Window master;
 	Packer *masterPtr, *slavePtr;
 
@@ -423,7 +418,9 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
 	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tk_PathName(slavePtr->tkwin));
 	}
-    } else if (index == PACK_UNPACK) {
+	break;
+    }
+    case PACK_UNPACK: {
 	Tk_Window tkwin2;
 	Packer *packPtr;
 
@@ -436,7 +433,7 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 	packPtr = GetPacker(tkwin2);
 	if ((packPtr != NULL) && (packPtr->masterPtr != NULL)) {
-	    Tk_ManageGeometry(tkwin2, (Tk_GeomMgr *) NULL,
+	    Tk_ManageGeometry(tkwin2, NULL,
 		    (ClientData) NULL);
 	    if (packPtr->masterPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(packPtr->tkwin)) {
 		Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(packPtr->tkwin,
@@ -445,6 +442,8 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Unlink(packPtr);
 	    Tk_UnmapWindow(packPtr->tkwin);
 	}
+	break;
+    }
     }
 
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -455,27 +454,26 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * PackReqProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk_GeometryRequest for
- *	windows managed by the packer.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk_GeometryRequest for windows managed by
+ *	the packer.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Arranges for tkwin, and all its managed siblings, to
- *	be re-packed at the next idle point.
+ *	Arranges for tkwin, and all its managed siblings, to be re-packed at
+ *	the next idle point.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-PackReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Packer's information about
-				 * window that got new preferred
-				 * geometry.  */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Other Tk-related information
-				 * about the window. */
+PackReqProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Packer's information about window that got
+				 * new preferred geometry.  */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Other Tk-related information about the
+				 * window. */
 {
     register Packer *packPtr = (Packer *) clientData;
 
@@ -491,8 +489,8 @@ PackReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * PackLostSlaveProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry
- *	claims control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry claims
+ *	control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -505,10 +503,10 @@ PackReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-PackLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Packer structure for slave window that
-				 * was stolen away. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
+PackLostSlaveProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Packer structure for slave window that was
+				 * stolen away. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
 {
     register Packer *slavePtr = (Packer *) clientData;
 
@@ -524,38 +522,36 @@ PackLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * ArrangePacking --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked (using the Tcl_DoWhenIdle
- *	mechanism) to re-layout a set of windows managed by
- *	the packer.  It is invoked at idle time so that a
- *	series of packer requests can be merged into a single
- *	layout operation.
+ *	This function is invoked (using the Tcl_DoWhenIdle mechanism) to
+ *	re-layout a set of windows managed by the packer. It is invoked at
+ *	idle time so that a series of packer requests can be merged into a
+ *	single layout operation.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The packed slaves of masterPtr may get resized or
- *	moved.
+ *	The packed slaves of masterPtr may get resized or moved.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ArrangePacking(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Structure describing parent whose slaves
+ArrangePacking(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Structure describing master whose slaves
 				 * are to be re-layed out. */
 {
     register Packer *masterPtr = (Packer *) clientData;
-    register Packer *slavePtr;	
+    register Packer *slavePtr;
     int cavityX, cavityY, cavityWidth, cavityHeight;
 				/* These variables keep track of the
-				 * as-yet-unallocated space remaining in
-				 * the middle of the parent window. */
+				 * as-yet-unallocated space remaining in the
+				 * middle of the master window. */
     int frameX, frameY, frameWidth, frameHeight;
 				/* These variables keep track of the frame
 				 * allocated to the current window. */
-    int x, y, width, height;	/* These variables are used to hold the
-				 * actual geometry of the current window. */
+    int x, y, width, height;	/* These variables are used to hold the actual
+				 * geometry of the current window. */
     int abort;			/* May get set to non-zero to abort this
 				 * repacking operation. */
     int borderX, borderY;
@@ -566,8 +562,8 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
     masterPtr->flags &= ~REQUESTED_REPACK;
 
     /*
-     * If the parent has no slaves anymore, then don't do anything
-     * at all:  just leave the parent's size as-is.
+     * If the master has no slaves anymore, then don't do anything at all:
+     * just leave the master's size as-is.
      */
 
     if (masterPtr->slavePtr == NULL) {
@@ -575,9 +571,9 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Abort any nested call to ArrangePacking for this window, since
-     * we'll do everything necessary here, and set up so this call
-     * can be aborted if necessary.  
+     * Abort any nested call to ArrangePacking for this window, since we'll do
+     * everything necessary here, and set up so this call can be aborted if
+     * necessary.
      */
 
     if (masterPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
@@ -588,22 +584,19 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) masterPtr);
 
     /*
-     * Pass #1: scan all the slaves to figure out the total amount
-     * of space needed.  Two separate width and height values are
-     * computed:
+     * Pass #1: scan all the slaves to figure out the total amount of space
+     * needed. Two separate width and height values are computed:
      *
-     * width -		Holds the sum of the widths (plus padding) of
-     *			all the slaves seen so far that were packed LEFT
-     *			or RIGHT.
-     * height -		Holds the sum of the heights (plus padding) of
-     *			all the slaves seen so far that were packed TOP
-     *			or BOTTOM.
+     * width -		Holds the sum of the widths (plus padding) of all the
+     *			slaves seen so far that were packed LEFT or RIGHT.
+     * height -		Holds the sum of the heights (plus padding) of all the
+     *			slaves seen so far that were packed TOP or BOTTOM.
      *
-     * maxWidth -	Gradually builds up the width needed by the master
-     *			to just barely satisfy all the slave's needs.  For
-     *			each slave, the code computes the width needed for
-     *			all the slaves so far and updates maxWidth if the
-     *			new value is greater.
+     * maxWidth -	Gradually builds up the width needed by the master to
+     *			just barely satisfy all the slave's needs. For each
+     *			slave, the code computes the width needed for all the
+     *			slaves so far and updates maxWidth if the new value is
+     *			greater.
      * maxHeight -	Same as maxWidth, except keeps height info.
      */
 
@@ -646,11 +639,10 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the total amount of space needed in the parent window has
-     * changed, and if we're propagating geometry information, then
-     * notify the next geometry manager up and requeue ourselves to
-     * start again after the parent has had a chance to
-     * resize us.
+     * If the total amount of space needed in the master window has changed,
+     * and if we're propagating geometry information, then notify the next
+     * geometry manager up and requeue ourselves to start again after the
+     * master has had a chance to resize us.
      */
 
     if (((maxWidth != Tk_ReqWidth(masterPtr->tkwin))
@@ -663,14 +655,12 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Pass #2: scan the slaves a second time assigning
-     * new sizes.  The "cavity" variables keep track of the
-     * unclaimed space in the cavity of the window;  this
-     * shrinks inward as we allocate windows around the
-     * edges.  The "frame" variables keep track of the space
-     * allocated to the current window and its frame.  The
-     * current window is then placed somewhere inside the
-     * frame, depending on anchor.
+     * Pass #2: scan the slaves a second time assigning new sizes. The
+     * "cavity" variables keep track of the unclaimed space in the cavity of
+     * the window; this shrinks inward as we allocate windows around the
+     * edges. The "frame" variables keep track of the space allocated to the
+     * current window and its frame. The current window is then placed
+     * somewhere inside the frame, depending on anchor.
      */
 
     cavityX = x = Tk_InternalBorderLeft(masterPtr->tkwin);
@@ -724,13 +714,12 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Now that we've got the size of the frame for the window,
-	 * compute the window's actual size and location using the
-	 * fill, padding, and frame factors.  The variables "borderX"
-	 * and "borderY" are used to handle the differences between
-	 * old-style packing and the new style (in old-style, iPadX
-	 * and iPadY are always zero and padding is completely ignored
-	 * except when computing frame size).
+	 * Now that we've got the size of the frame for the window, compute
+	 * the window's actual size and location using the fill, padding, and
+	 * frame factors. The variables "borderX" and "borderY" are used to
+	 * handle the differences between old-style packing and the new style
+	 * (in old-style, iPadX and iPadY are always zero and padding is
+	 * completely ignored except when computing frame size).
 	 */
 
 	if (slavePtr->flags & OLD_STYLE) {
@@ -758,52 +747,52 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
 	    height = frameHeight - borderY;
 	}
 	switch (slavePtr->anchor) {
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_N:
-		x = frameX + (borderLeft + frameWidth - width - borderRight)/2;
-		y = frameY + borderTop;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
-		x = frameX + frameWidth - width - borderRight;
-		y = frameY + borderTop;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_E:
-		x = frameX + frameWidth - width - borderRight;
-		y = frameY + (borderTop + frameHeight - height - borderBtm)/2;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
-		x = frameX + frameWidth - width - borderRight;
-		y = frameY + frameHeight - height - borderBtm;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_S:
-		x = frameX + (borderLeft + frameWidth - width - borderRight)/2;
-		y = frameY + frameHeight - height - borderBtm;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
-		x = frameX + borderLeft;
-		y = frameY + frameHeight - height - borderBtm;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_W:
-		x = frameX + borderLeft;
-		y = frameY + (borderTop + frameHeight - height - borderBtm)/2;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
-		x = frameX + borderLeft;
-		y = frameY + borderTop;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
-		x = frameX + (borderLeft + frameWidth - width - borderRight)/2;
-		y = frameY + (borderTop + frameHeight - height - borderBtm)/2;
-		break;
-	    default:
-		panic("bad frame factor in ArrangePacking");
+	case TK_ANCHOR_N:
+	    x = frameX + (borderLeft + frameWidth - width - borderRight)/2;
+	    y = frameY + borderTop;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
+	    x = frameX + frameWidth - width - borderRight;
+	    y = frameY + borderTop;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_E:
+	    x = frameX + frameWidth - width - borderRight;
+	    y = frameY + (borderTop + frameHeight - height - borderBtm)/2;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
+	    x = frameX + frameWidth - width - borderRight;
+	    y = frameY + frameHeight - height - borderBtm;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_S:
+	    x = frameX + (borderLeft + frameWidth - width - borderRight)/2;
+	    y = frameY + frameHeight - height - borderBtm;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
+	    x = frameX + borderLeft;
+	    y = frameY + frameHeight - height - borderBtm;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_W:
+	    x = frameX + borderLeft;
+	    y = frameY + (borderTop + frameHeight - height - borderBtm)/2;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
+	    x = frameX + borderLeft;
+	    y = frameY + borderTop;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
+	    x = frameX + (borderLeft + frameWidth - width - borderRight)/2;
+	    y = frameY + (borderTop + frameHeight - height - borderBtm)/2;
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    Tcl_Panic("bad frame factor in ArrangePacking");
 	}
 	width -= slavePtr->doubleBw;
 	height -= slavePtr->doubleBw;
 
 	/*
 	 * The final step is to set the position, size, and mapped/unmapped
-	 * state of the slave.  If the slave is a child of the master, then
-	 * do this here.  Otherwise let Tk_MaintainGeometry do the work.
+	 * state of the slave. If the slave is a child of the master, then do
+	 * this here. Otherwise let Tk_MaintainGeometry do the work.
 	 */
 
 	if (masterPtr->tkwin == Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin)) {
@@ -821,8 +810,8 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
 		}
 
 		/*
-		 * Don't map the slave if the master isn't mapped: wait
-		 * until the master gets mapped later.
+		 * Don't map the slave if the master isn't mapped: wait until
+		 * the master gets mapped later.
 		 */
 
 		if (Tk_IsMapped(masterPtr->tkwin)) {
@@ -840,9 +829,9 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Changes to the window's structure could cause almost anything
-	 * to happen, including deleting the parent or child.  If this
-	 * happens, we'll be told to abort.
+	 * Changes to the window's structure could cause almost anything to
+	 * happen, including deleting the parent or child. If this happens,
+	 * we'll be told to abort.
 	 */
 
 	if (abort) {
@@ -850,7 +839,7 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
 	}
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     masterPtr->abortPtr = NULL;
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) masterPtr);
 }
@@ -860,13 +849,12 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
  *
  * XExpansion --
  *
- *	Given a list of packed slaves, the first of which is packed
- *	on the left or right and is expandable, compute how much to
- *	expand the child.
+ *	Given a list of packed slaves, the first of which is packed on the
+ *	left or right and is expandable, compute how much to expand the child.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the number of additional pixels to give to
- *	the child.
+ *	The return value is the number of additional pixels to give to the
+ *	child.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -875,24 +863,23 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
  */
 
 static int
-XExpansion(slavePtr, cavityWidth)
-    register Packer *slavePtr;		/* First in list of remaining
-					 * slaves. */
-    int cavityWidth;			/* Horizontal space left for all
-					 * remaining slaves. */
+XExpansion(
+    register Packer *slavePtr,	/* First in list of remaining slaves. */
+    int cavityWidth)		/* Horizontal space left for all remaining
+				 * slaves. */
 {
     int numExpand, minExpand, curExpand;
     int childWidth;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure is tricky because windows packed top or bottom can
-     * be interspersed among expandable windows packed left or right.
-     * Scan through the list, keeping a running sum of the widths of
-     * all left and right windows (actually, count the cavity space not
-     * allocated) and a running count of all expandable left and right
-     * windows.  At each top or bottom window, and at the end of the
-     * list, compute the expansion factor that seems reasonable at that
-     * point.  Return the smallest factor seen at any of these points.
+     * This function is tricky because windows packed top or bottom can be
+     * interspersed among expandable windows packed left or right. Scan
+     * through the list, keeping a running sum of the widths of all left and
+     * right windows (actually, count the cavity space not allocated) and a
+     * running count of all expandable left and right windows. At each top or
+     * bottom window, and at the end of the list, compute the expansion factor
+     * that seems reasonable at that point. Return the smallest factor seen at
+     * any of these points.
      */
 
     minExpand = cavityWidth;
@@ -924,13 +911,12 @@ XExpansion(slavePtr, cavityWidth)
  *
  * YExpansion --
  *
- *	Given a list of packed slaves, the first of which is packed
- *	on the top or bottom and is expandable, compute how much to
- *	expand the child.
+ *	Given a list of packed slaves, the first of which is packed on the top
+ *	or bottom and is expandable, compute how much to expand the child.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the number of additional pixels to give to
- *	the child.
+ *	The return value is the number of additional pixels to give to the
+ *	child.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -939,11 +925,10 @@ XExpansion(slavePtr, cavityWidth)
  */
 
 static int
-YExpansion(slavePtr, cavityHeight)
-    register Packer *slavePtr;		/* First in list of remaining
-					 * slaves. */
-    int cavityHeight;			/* Vertical space left for all
-					 * remaining slaves. */
+YExpansion(
+    register Packer *slavePtr,	/* First in list of remaining slaves. */
+    int cavityHeight)		/* Vertical space left for all remaining
+				 * slaves. */
 {
     int numExpand, minExpand, curExpand;
     int childHeight;
@@ -981,30 +966,28 @@ YExpansion(slavePtr, cavityHeight)
  *
  * GetPacker --
  *
- *	This internal procedure is used to locate a Packer
- *	structure for a given window, creating one if one
- *	doesn't exist already.
+ *	This internal function is used to locate a Packer structure for a
+ *	given window, creating one if one doesn't exist already.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the Packer structure
- *	corresponding to tkwin.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the Packer structure corresponding to
+ *	tkwin.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new packer structure may be created.  If so, then
- *	a callback is set up to clean things up when the
- *	window is deleted.
+ *	A new packer structure may be created. If so, then a callback is set
+ *	up to clean things up when the window is deleted.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static Packer *
-GetPacker(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window for which
-				 * packer structure is desired. */
+GetPacker(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for window for which packer structure
+				 * is desired. */
 {
     register Packer *packPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-    int new;
+    int isNew;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
     if (!dispPtr->packInit) {
@@ -1013,13 +996,13 @@ GetPacker(tkwin)
     }
 
     /*
-     * See if there's already packer for this window.  If not,
-     * then create a new one.
+     * See if there's already packer for this window. If not, then create a
+     * new one.
      */
 
-    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->packerHashTable, (char *) tkwin, 
-            &new);
-    if (!new) {
+    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->packerHashTable, (char *) tkwin,
+	    &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
 	return (Packer *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
     }
     packPtr = (Packer *) ckalloc(sizeof(Packer));
@@ -1046,30 +1029,30 @@ GetPacker(tkwin)
  *
  * PackAfter --
  *
- *	This procedure does most of the real work of adding
- *	one or more windows into the packing order for its parent.
+ *	This function does most of the real work of adding one or more windows
+ *	into the packing order for its master.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return value.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The geometry of the specified windows may change, both now and
- *	again in the future.
+ *	The geometry of the specified windows may change, both now and again
+ *	in the future.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Packer *prevPtr;		/* Pack windows in argv just after this
-				 * window;  NULL means pack as first
-				 * child of masterPtr. */
-    Packer *masterPtr;		/* Master in which to pack windows. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of elements in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Array of lists, each containing 2
-				 * elements:  window name and side
-				 * against which to pack. */
+PackAfter(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Packer *prevPtr,		/* Pack windows in argv just after this
+				 * window; NULL means pack as first child of
+				 * masterPtr. */
+    Packer *masterPtr,		/* Master in which to pack windows. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of elements in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Array of lists, each containing 2 elements:
+				 * window name and side against which to
+				 * pack. */
 {
     register Packer *packPtr;
     Tk_Window tkwin, ancestor, parent;
@@ -1078,24 +1061,23 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
     int index, optionCount, c;
 
     /*
-     * Iterate over all of the window specifiers, each consisting of
-     * two arguments.  The first argument contains the window name and
-     * the additional arguments contain options such as "top" or
-     * "padx 20".
+     * Iterate over all of the window specifiers, each consisting of two
+     * arguments. The first argument contains the window name and the
+     * additional arguments contain options such as "top" or "padx 20".
      */
 
     for ( ; objc > 0; objc -= 2, objv += 2, prevPtr = packPtr) {
 	if (objc < 2) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: window \"",
 		    Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), "\" should be followed by options",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Find the packer for the window to be packed, and make sure
-	 * that the window in which it will be packed is either its
-	 * or a descendant of its parent.
+	 * Find the packer for the window to be packed, and make sure that the
+	 * window in which it will be packed is either its or a descendant of
+	 * its parent.
 	 */
 
 	if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, masterPtr->tkwin, objv[0], &tkwin)
@@ -1109,10 +1091,9 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
 		break;
 	    }
 	    if (((Tk_FakeWin *) (ancestor))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) {
-		badWindow:
+	    badWindow:
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't pack ", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]),
-			" inside ", Tk_PathName(masterPtr->tkwin),
-			(char *) NULL);
+			" inside ", Tk_PathName(masterPtr->tkwin), NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
@@ -1146,19 +1127,19 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
 	    c = curOpt[0];
 
 	    if ((c == 't')
-		    && (strncmp(curOpt, "top", (unsigned) length)) == 0) {
+		    && (strncmp(curOpt, "top", (size_t) length)) == 0) {
 		packPtr->side = TOP;
 	    } else if ((c == 'b')
-		    && (strncmp(curOpt, "bottom", (unsigned) length)) == 0) {
+		    && (strncmp(curOpt, "bottom", (size_t) length)) == 0) {
 		packPtr->side = BOTTOM;
 	    } else if ((c == 'l')
-		    && (strncmp(curOpt, "left", (unsigned) length)) == 0) {
+		    && (strncmp(curOpt, "left", (size_t) length)) == 0) {
 		packPtr->side = LEFT;
 	    } else if ((c == 'r')
-		    && (strncmp(curOpt, "right", (unsigned) length)) == 0) {
+		    && (strncmp(curOpt, "right", (size_t) length)) == 0) {
 		packPtr->side = RIGHT;
 	    } else if ((c == 'e')
-		    && (strncmp(curOpt, "expand", (unsigned) length)) == 0) {
+		    && (strncmp(curOpt, "expand", (size_t) length)) == 0) {
 		packPtr->flags |= EXPAND;
 	    } else if ((c == 'f')
 		    && (strcmp(curOpt, "fill")) == 0) {
@@ -1169,10 +1150,10 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
 		packPtr->flags |= FILLY;
 	    } else if ((c == 'p') && (strcmp(curOpt, "padx")) == 0) {
 		if (optionCount < (index+2)) {
-		    missingPad:
+		missingPad:
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: \"", curOpt,
 			    "\" option must be followed by screen distance",
-			    (char *) NULL);
+			    NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, options[index+1],
@@ -1196,11 +1177,10 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
 		packPtr->iPadY = 0;
 		index++;
 	    } else if ((c == 'f') && (length > 1)
-		    && (strncmp(curOpt, "frame", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
+		    && (strncmp(curOpt, "frame", (size_t) length) == 0)) {
 		if (optionCount < (index+2)) {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: \"frame\" ",
-			    "option must be followed by anchor point",
-			    (char *) NULL);
+			    "option must be followed by anchor point", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		if (Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(interp, options[index+1],
@@ -1210,9 +1190,8 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
 		index++;
 	    } else {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option \"", curOpt,
-			"\": should be top, bottom, left, right, ",
-			"expand, fill, fillx, filly, padx, pady, or frame",
-			(char *) NULL);
+			"\": should be top, bottom, left, right, expand, ",
+			"fill, fillx, filly, padx, pady, or frame", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
@@ -1232,11 +1211,10 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
 		}
 		Unlink(packPtr);
 	    }
-	
+
 	    /*
-	     * Add the window in the correct place in its parent's
-	     * packing order, then make sure that the window is
-	     * managed by us.
+	     * Add the window in the correct place in its master's packing
+	     * order, then make sure that the window is managed by us.
 	     */
 
 	    packPtr->masterPtr = masterPtr;
@@ -1252,8 +1230,7 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Arrange for the parent to be re-packed at the first
-     * idle moment.
+     * Arrange for the master to be re-packed at the first idle moment.
      */
 
     if (masterPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1271,20 +1248,20 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * Unlink --
  *
- *	Remove a packer from its parent's list of slaves.
+ *	Remove a packer from its master's list of slaves.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The parent will be scheduled for repacking.
+ *	The master will be scheduled for repacking.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-Unlink(packPtr)
-    register Packer *packPtr;		/* Window to unlink. */
+Unlink(
+    register Packer *packPtr)	/* Window to unlink. */
 {
     register Packer *masterPtr, *packPtr2;
 
@@ -1297,7 +1274,7 @@ Unlink(packPtr)
     } else {
 	for (packPtr2 = masterPtr->slavePtr; ; packPtr2 = packPtr2->nextPtr) {
 	    if (packPtr2 == NULL) {
-		panic("Unlink couldn't find previous window");
+		Tcl_Panic("Unlink couldn't find previous window");
 	    }
 	    if (packPtr2->nextPtr == packPtr) {
 		packPtr2->nextPtr = packPtr->nextPtr;
@@ -1321,9 +1298,9 @@ Unlink(packPtr)
  *
  * DestroyPacker --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a packer at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	This function is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to clean
+ *	up the internal structure of a packer at a safe time (when no-one is
+ *	using it anymore).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1335,9 +1312,9 @@ Unlink(packPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyPacker(memPtr)
-    char *memPtr;		/* Info about packed window that
-				 * is now dead. */
+DestroyPacker(
+    char *memPtr)		/* Info about packed window that is now
+				 * dead. */
 {
     register Packer *packPtr = (Packer *) memPtr;
     ckfree((char *) packPtr);
@@ -1348,25 +1325,24 @@ DestroyPacker(memPtr)
  *
  * PackStructureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher in response
- *	to StructureNotify events.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher in response to
+ *	StructureNotify events.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	If a window was just deleted, clean up all its packer-related
- *	information.  If it was just resized, repack its slaves, if
- *	any.
+ *	information. If it was just resized, repack its slaves, if any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-PackStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Our information about window
-					 * referred to by eventPtr. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Describes what just happened. */
+PackStructureProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Our information about window referred to by
+				 * eventPtr. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     register Packer *packPtr = (Packer *) clientData;
 
@@ -1376,9 +1352,9 @@ PackStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	    packPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_REPACK;
 	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ArrangePacking, (ClientData) packPtr);
 	}
-	if (packPtr->doubleBw != 2*Tk_Changes(packPtr->tkwin)->border_width) {
-	    if ((packPtr->masterPtr != NULL)
-		    && !(packPtr->masterPtr->flags & REQUESTED_REPACK)) {
+	if ((packPtr->masterPtr != NULL)
+	        && (packPtr->doubleBw != 2*Tk_Changes(packPtr->tkwin)->border_width)) {
+	    if (!(packPtr->masterPtr->flags & REQUESTED_REPACK)) {
 		packPtr->doubleBw = 2*Tk_Changes(packPtr->tkwin)->border_width;
 		packPtr->masterPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_REPACK;
 		Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ArrangePacking, (ClientData) packPtr->masterPtr);
@@ -1390,20 +1366,23 @@ PackStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	if (packPtr->masterPtr != NULL) {
 	    Unlink(packPtr);
 	}
+
 	for (slavePtr = packPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
 		slavePtr = nextPtr) {
-	    Tk_ManageGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, (Tk_GeomMgr *) NULL,
+	    Tk_ManageGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, NULL,
 		    (ClientData) NULL);
 	    Tk_UnmapWindow(slavePtr->tkwin);
 	    slavePtr->masterPtr = NULL;
 	    nextPtr = slavePtr->nextPtr;
 	    slavePtr->nextPtr = NULL;
 	}
+
 	if (packPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
 	    TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) packPtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
             Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->packerHashTable,
 		    (char *) packPtr->tkwin));
 	}
+
 	if (packPtr->flags & REQUESTED_REPACK) {
 	    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ArrangePacking, (ClientData) packPtr);
 	}
@@ -1411,8 +1390,8 @@ PackStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	Tcl_EventuallyFree((ClientData) packPtr, DestroyPacker);
     } else if (eventPtr->type == MapNotify) {
 	/*
-	 * When a master gets mapped, must redo the geometry computation
-	 * so that all of its slaves get remapped.
+	 * When a master gets mapped, must redo the geometry computation so
+	 * that all of its slaves get remapped.
 	 */
 
 	if ((packPtr->slavePtr != NULL)
@@ -1424,10 +1403,10 @@ PackStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	register Packer *packPtr2;
 
 	/*
-	 * Unmap all of the slaves when the master gets unmapped,
-	 * so that they don't bother to keep redisplaying
-	 * themselves.
+	 * Unmap all of the slaves when the master gets unmapped, so that they
+	 * don't bother to keep redisplaying themselves.
 	 */
+
 	for (packPtr2 = packPtr->slavePtr; packPtr2 != NULL;
 	     packPtr2 = packPtr2->nextPtr) {
 	    Tk_UnmapWindow(packPtr2->tkwin);
@@ -1440,13 +1419,13 @@ PackStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureSlaves --
  *
- *	This implements the guts of the "pack configure" command.  Given
- *	a list of slaves and configuration options, it arranges for the
- *	packer to manage the slaves and sets the specified options.
+ *	This implements the guts of the "pack configure" command. Given a list
+ *	of slaves and configuration options, it arranges for the packer to
+ *	manage the slaves and sets the specified options.
  *
  * Results:
- *	TCL_OK is returned if all went well.  Otherwise, TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned and the interp's result is set to contain an error message.
+ *	TCL_OK is returned if all went well. Otherwise, TCL_ERROR is returned
+ *	and the interp's result is set to contain an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Slave windows get taken over by the packer.
@@ -1455,16 +1434,15 @@ PackStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Any window in application containing
-				 * slaves.  Used to look up slave names. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of elements in argv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects:  contains one or more
-				 * window names followed by any number
-				 * of "option value" pairs.  Caller must
-				 * make sure that there is at least one
-				 * window name. */
+ConfigureSlaves(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Any window in application containing
+				 * slaves. Used to look up slave names. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of elements in argv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects: contains one or more
+				 * window names followed by any number of
+				 * "option value" pairs. Caller must make sure
+				 * that there is at least one window name. */
 {
     Packer *masterPtr, *slavePtr, *prevPtr, *otherPtr;
     Tk_Window other, slave, parent, ancestor;
@@ -1472,7 +1450,7 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
     char *string;
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
 	"-after", "-anchor", "-before", "-expand", "-fill",
-	"-in", "-ipadx", "-ipady", "-padx", "-pady", "-side", (char *) NULL };
+	"-in", "-ipadx", "-ipady", "-padx", "-pady", "-side", NULL };
     enum options {
 	CONF_AFTER, CONF_ANCHOR, CONF_BEFORE, CONF_EXPAND, CONF_FILL,
 	CONF_IN, CONF_IPADX, CONF_IPADY, CONF_PADX, CONF_PADY, CONF_SIDE };
@@ -1491,13 +1469,12 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 
     /*
      * Iterate over all of the slave windows, parsing the configuration
-     * options for each slave.  It's a bit wasteful to re-parse the
-     * options for each slave, but things get too messy if we try to
-     * parse the arguments just once at the beginning.  For example,
-     * if a slave already is packed we want to just change a few
-     * existing values without resetting everything.  If there are
-     * multiple windows, the -after, -before, and -in options only
-     * get processed for the first window.
+     * options for each slave. It's a bit wasteful to re-parse the options for
+     * each slave, but things get too messy if we try to parse the arguments
+     * just once at the beginning. For example, if a slave already is packed
+     * we want to just change a few existing values without resetting
+     * everything. If there are multiple windows, the -after, -before, and -in
+     * options only get processed for the first window.
      */
 
     masterPtr = NULL;
@@ -1509,16 +1486,16 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	}
 	if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(slave)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't pack \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[j]),
-		    "\": it's a top-level window", (char *) NULL);
+		    "\": it's a top-level window", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	slavePtr = GetPacker(slave);
 	slavePtr->flags &= ~OLD_STYLE;
 
 	/*
-	 * If the slave isn't currently packed, reset all of its
-	 * configuration information to default values (there could
-	 * be old values left from a previous packing).
+	 * If the slave isn't currently packed, reset all of its configuration
+	 * information to default values (there could be old values left from
+	 * a previous packing).
 	 */
 
 	if (slavePtr->masterPtr == NULL) {
@@ -1534,14 +1511,16 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	    if ((i+2) > objc) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "extra option \"",
 			Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
-			"\" (option with no value?)", (char *) NULL);
+			"\" (option with no value?)", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings, "option",
 		    0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (index == CONF_AFTER) {
+
+	    switch ((enum options) index) {
+	    case CONF_AFTER:
 		if (j == 0) {
 		    if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other)
 			    != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1549,21 +1528,23 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		    }
 		    prevPtr = GetPacker(other);
 		    if (prevPtr->masterPtr == NULL) {
-			notPacked:
+		    notPacked:
 			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"",
 				Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
-				"\" isn't packed", (char *) NULL);
+				"\" isn't packed", NULL);
 			return TCL_ERROR;
 		    }
 		    masterPtr = prevPtr->masterPtr;
 		    positionGiven = 1;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_ANCHOR) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_ANCHOR:
 		if (Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &slavePtr->anchor)
 			!= TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_BEFORE) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_BEFORE:
 		if (j == 0) {
 		    if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other)
 			    != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1584,7 +1565,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		    }
 		    positionGiven = 1;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_EXPAND) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_EXPAND:
 		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
@@ -1592,7 +1574,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		if (tmp) {
 		    slavePtr->flags |= EXPAND;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_FILL) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_FILL:
 		string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
 		if (strcmp(string, "none") == 0) {
 		    slavePtr->flags &= ~(FILLX|FILLY);
@@ -1604,10 +1587,11 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		    slavePtr->flags |= FILLX|FILLY;
 		} else {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad fill style \"", string,
-			    "\": must be none, x, y, or both", (char *) NULL);
+			    "\": must be none, x, y, or both", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_IN) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_IN:
 		if (j == 0) {
 		    if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other)
 			    != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1622,53 +1606,57 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		    }
 		    positionGiven = 1;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_IPADX) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_IPADX:
 		if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, slave, objv[i+1], &tmp)
 			!= TCL_OK)
 			|| (tmp < 0)) {
 		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad ipadx value \"",
 			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
-			    "\": must be positive screen distance",
-			    (char *) NULL);
+			    "\": must be positive screen distance", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		slavePtr->iPadX = tmp * 2;
-	    } else if (index == CONF_IPADY) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_IPADY:
 		if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, slave, objv[i+1], &tmp)
 			!= TCL_OK)
 			|| (tmp < 0)) {
 		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad ipady value \"",
 			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
-			    "\": must be positive screen distance",
-			    (char *) NULL);
+			    "\": must be positive screen distance", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		slavePtr->iPadY = tmp * 2;
-	    } else if (index == CONF_PADX) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_PADX:
 		if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, slave, objv[i+1],
 			&slavePtr->padLeft, &slavePtr->padX) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_PADY) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_PADY:
 		if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, slave, objv[i+1],
 			&slavePtr->padTop, &slavePtr->padY) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_SIDE) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_SIDE:
 		if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], sideNames, "side",
 			TCL_EXACT, &side) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		slavePtr->side = (Side) side;
+		break;
 	    }
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If no position in a packing list was specified and the slave
-	 * is already packed, then leave it in its current location in
-	 * its current packing list.
+	 * If no position in a packing list was specified and the slave is
+	 * already packed, then leave it in its current location in its
+	 * current packing list.
 	 */
 
 	if (!positionGiven && (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL)) {
@@ -1677,21 +1665,22 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If the slave is going to be put back after itself then
-	 * skip the whole operation, since it won't work anyway.
+	 * If the slave is going to be put back after itself or the same -in
+	 * window is passed in again, then just skip the whole operation,
+	 * since it won't work anyway.
 	 */
 
 	if (prevPtr == slavePtr) {
 	    masterPtr = slavePtr->masterPtr;
 	    goto scheduleLayout;
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
-	 * If none of the "-in", "-before", or "-after" options has
-	 * been specified, arrange for the slave to go at the end of
-	 * the order for its parent.
+	 * If none of the "-in", "-before", or "-after" options has been
+	 * specified, arrange for the slave to go at the end of the order for
+	 * its parent.
 	 */
-    
+
 	if (!positionGiven) {
 	    masterPtr = GetPacker(Tk_Parent(slave));
 	    prevPtr = masterPtr->slavePtr;
@@ -1703,11 +1692,11 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Make sure that the slave's parent is either the master or
-	 * an ancestor of the master, and that the master and slave
-	 * aren't the same.
+	 * Make sure that the slave's parent is either the master or an
+	 * ancestor of the master, and that the master and slave aren't the
+	 * same.
 	 */
-    
+
 	parent = Tk_Parent(slave);
 	for (ancestor = masterPtr->tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
 	    if (ancestor == parent) {
@@ -1715,20 +1704,19 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	    if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(ancestor)) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't pack ", Tcl_GetString(objv[j]),
-			" inside ", Tk_PathName(masterPtr->tkwin),
-			(char *) NULL);
+			" inside ", Tk_PathName(masterPtr->tkwin), NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (slave == masterPtr->tkwin) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't pack ", Tcl_GetString(objv[j]),
-		    " inside itself", (char *) NULL);
+		    " inside itself", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Unpack the slave if it's currently packed, then position it
-	 * after prevPtr.
+	 * Unpack the slave if it's currently packed, then position it after
+	 * prevPtr.
 	 */
 
 	if (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1752,11 +1740,10 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	prevPtr = slavePtr;
 
 	/*
-	 * Arrange for the parent to be re-packed at the first
-	 * idle moment.
+	 * Arrange for the master to be re-packed at the first idle moment.
 	 */
 
-	scheduleLayout:
+    scheduleLayout:
 	if (masterPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
 	    *masterPtr->abortPtr = 1;
 	}
@@ -1767,3 +1754,11 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkPanedWindow.c b/generic/tkPanedWindow.c
index a876ae8..cf3611f 100644
--- a/generic/tkPanedWindow.c
+++ b/generic/tkPanedWindow.c
@@ -1,23 +1,23 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkPanedWindow.c --
  *
- *	This module implements "paned window" widgets that are object
- *	based.  A "paned window" is a widget that manages the geometry for
- *	some number of other widgets, placing a movable "sash" between them,
- *	which can be used to alter the relative sizes of adjacent widgets.
+ *	This module implements "paned window" widgets that are object based. A
+ *	"paned window" is a widget that manages the geometry for some number
+ *	of other widgets, placing a movable "sash" between them, which can be
+ *	used to alter the relative sizes of adjacent widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "default.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
-/* Flag values for "sticky"ness  The 16 combinations subsume the packer's
+/*
+ * Flag values for "sticky"ness. The 16 combinations subsume the packer's
  * notion of anchor and fill.
  *
  * STICK_NORTH  	This window sticks to the top of its cavity.
@@ -30,16 +30,44 @@
 #define STICK_EAST		2
 #define STICK_SOUTH		4
 #define STICK_WEST		8
+
 /*
  * The following table defines the legal values for the -orient option.
  */
 
-static CONST char *CONST orientStrings[] = {
-    "horizontal", "vertical", (char *) NULL
+static const char *const orientStrings[] = {
+    "horizontal", "vertical", NULL
 };
 
 enum orient { ORIENT_HORIZONTAL, ORIENT_VERTICAL };
 
+/*
+ * The following table defines the legal values for the -stretch option.
+ */
+
+static const char *const stretchStrings[] = {
+    "always", "first", "last", "middle", "never", NULL
+};
+
+enum stretch {
+    STRETCH_ALWAYS,		/* Always give extra space to this pane. */
+    STRETCH_FIRST,		/* Give extra space to pane if it is first. */
+    STRETCH_LAST,		/* Give extra space to pane if it is last. */
+    STRETCH_MIDDLE,		/* Give extra space to pane only if it is
+				 * neither first nor last. */
+    STRETCH_NEVER		/* Never give extra space to this pane. */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Codify the stretchiness rule in one place.
+ */
+
+#define IsStretchable(stretch,index,first,last)			\
+    (((stretch) == STRETCH_ALWAYS) ||				\
+     ((stretch) == STRETCH_FIRST && (index) == (first)) ||	\
+     ((stretch) == STRETCH_LAST && (index) == (last)) ||	\
+     ((stretch) == STRETCH_MIDDLE && (index) != (first) && (index) != (last)))
+
 typedef struct {
     Tk_OptionTable pwOptions;	/* Token for paned window option table. */
     Tk_OptionTable slaveOpts;	/* Token for slave cget option table. */
@@ -51,35 +79,38 @@ typedef struct {
  */
 
 typedef struct Slave {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window being managed. */
-    
-    int minSize;			/* Minimum size of this pane, on the
-					 * relevant axis, in pixels. */
-    int padx;				/* Additional padding requested for
-					 * slave, in the x dimension. */
-    int pady;				/* Additional padding requested for
-					 * slave, in the y dimension. */
-    Tcl_Obj *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* Tcl_Obj rep's of slave width/height,
-					 * to allow for null values. */
-    int width;				/* Slave width. */
-    int height;				/* Slave height. */
-    int sticky;				/* Sticky string. */
-    int x, y;				/* Coordinates of the widget. */
-    int paneWidth, paneHeight;		/* Pane dimensions (may be different
-					 * from slave width/height). */
-    int sashx, sashy;			/* Coordinates of the sash of the
-					 * right or bottom of this pane. */
-    int markx, marky;			/* Coordinates of the last mark set
-					 * for the sash. */
-    int handlex, handley;		/* Coordinates of the sash handle. */
-    struct PanedWindow *masterPtr;	/* Paned window managing the window. */
-    Tk_Window after;			/* Placeholder for parsing options. */
-    Tk_Window before;			/* Placeholder for parsing options. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window being managed. */
+    int minSize;		/* Minimum size of this pane, on the relevant
+				 * axis, in pixels. */
+    int padx;			/* Additional padding requested for slave, in
+				 * the x dimension. */
+    int pady;			/* Additional padding requested for slave, in
+				 * the y dimension. */
+    Tcl_Obj *widthPtr, *heightPtr;
+				/* Tcl_Obj rep's of slave width/height, to
+				 * allow for null values. */
+    int width;			/* Slave width. */
+    int height;			/* Slave height. */
+    int sticky;			/* Sticky string. */
+    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of the widget. */
+    int paneWidth, paneHeight;	/* Pane dimensions (may be different from
+				 * slave width/height). */
+    int sashx, sashy;		/* Coordinates of the sash of the right or
+				 * bottom of this pane. */
+    int markx, marky;		/* Coordinates of the last mark set for the
+				 * sash. */
+    int handlex, handley;	/* Coordinates of the sash handle. */
+    enum stretch stretch;	/* Controls how slave grows/shrinks */
+    int hide;			/* Controls visibility of pane */
+    struct PanedWindow *masterPtr;
+				/* Paned window managing the window. */
+    Tk_Window after;		/* Placeholder for parsing options. */
+    Tk_Window before;		/* Placeholder for parsing options. */
 } Slave;
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each paned window
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each paned window widget
+ * managed by this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct PanedWindow {
@@ -101,7 +132,6 @@ typedef struct PanedWindow {
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
     int resizeOpaque;		/* Boolean indicating whether resize should be
 				 * opaque or rubberband style. */
-    
     int sashRelief;		/* Relief used to draw sash. */
     int sashWidth;		/* Width of each sash, in pixels. */
     Tcl_Obj *sashWidthPtr;	/* Tcl_Obj rep for sash width. */
@@ -114,7 +144,6 @@ typedef struct PanedWindow {
     int handlePad;		/* Distance from border to draw handle. */
     Tcl_Obj *handleSizePtr;	/* Tcl_Obj rep for handle size. */
     Tk_Cursor sashCursor;	/* Cursor used when mouse is above a sash. */
-
     GC gc;			/* Graphics context for copying from
 				 * off-screen pixmap onto screen. */
     int proxyx, proxyy;		/* Proxy x,y coordinates. */
@@ -127,11 +156,11 @@ typedef struct PanedWindow {
 /*
  * Flags used for paned windows:
  *
- * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler has
- *				been queued to redraw this window.
+ * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler has been
+ *				queued to redraw this window.
  *
- * WIDGET_DELETED:		Non-zero means that the paned window has
- *				been, or is in the process of being, deleted.
+ * WIDGET_DELETED:		Non-zero means that the paned window has been,
+ *				or is in the process of being, deleted.
  *
  * RESIZE_PENDING:		Non-zero means that the window might need to
  *				change its size (or the size of its panes)
@@ -147,59 +176,63 @@ typedef struct PanedWindow {
 #define RESIZE_PENDING		0x0020
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-int		Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static void	PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int	ConfigurePanedWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			PanedWindow *pwPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void	DestroyPanedWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr));
-static void	DisplayPanedWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void	PanedWindowEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void	ProxyWindowEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void	DisplayProxyWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void	PanedWindowWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData instanceData));
-static int	PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tcl_Interp *, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static void	PanedWindowLostSlaveProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void	PanedWindowReqProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void	ArrangePanes _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void	Unlink _ANSI_ARGS_((Slave *slavePtr));
-static Slave *	GetPane _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr, Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void	SlaveStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int	PanedWindowSashCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static int	PanedWindowProxyCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static void	ComputeGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr));
-static int	ConfigureSlaves _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static void	DestroyOptionTables _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static int	SetSticky _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Obj **value, char *recordPtr, int internalOffset,
-			char *oldInternalPtr, int flags));
-static Tcl_Obj *GetSticky _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			char *recordPtr, int internalOffset));
-static void	RestoreSticky _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr,
-			char *oldInternalPtr));
-static void	AdjustForSticky _ANSI_ARGS_((int sticky, int cavityWidth,
-			int cavityHeight, int *xPtr, int *yPtr,
-			int *slaveWidthPtr, int *slaveHeightPtr));
-static void	MoveSash _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr, int sash, int diff));
-static int	ObjectIsEmpty _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static char *	ComputeSlotAddress _ANSI_ARGS_((char *recordPtr, int offset));
-static int	PanedWindowIdentifyCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int x, int y));
+int			Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ConfigurePanedWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    PanedWindow *pwPtr, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		DestroyPanedWindow(PanedWindow *pwPtr);
+static void		DisplayPanedWindow(ClientData clientData);
+static void		PanedWindowEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		ProxyWindowEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		DisplayProxyWindow(ClientData clientData);
+static void		PanedWindowWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
+static int		PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *, int objc, Tcl_Obj * const objv[]);
+static void		PanedWindowLostSlaveProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		PanedWindowReqProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		ArrangePanes(ClientData clientData);
+static void		Unlink(Slave *slavePtr);
+static Slave *		GetPane(PanedWindow *pwPtr, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		SlaveStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		PanedWindowSashCommand(PanedWindow *pwPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj * const objv[]);
+static int		PanedWindowProxyCommand(PanedWindow *pwPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj * const objv[]);
+static void		ComputeGeometry(PanedWindow *pwPtr);
+static int		ConfigureSlaves(PanedWindow *pwPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj * const objv[]);
+static void		DestroyOptionTables(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static int		SetSticky(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj **value, char *recordPtr,
+			    int internalOffset, char *oldInternalPtr,
+			    int flags);
+static Tcl_Obj *	GetSticky(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    char *recordPtr, int internalOffset);
+static void		RestoreSticky(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    char *internalPtr, char *oldInternalPtr);
+static void		AdjustForSticky(int sticky, int cavityWidth,
+			    int cavityHeight, int *xPtr, int *yPtr,
+			    int *slaveWidthPtr, int *slaveHeightPtr);
+static void		MoveSash(PanedWindow *pwPtr, int sash, int diff);
+static int		ObjectIsEmpty(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static char *		ComputeSlotAddress(char *recordPtr, int offset);
+static int		PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(PanedWindow *pwPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int x, int y);
 
 /*
  * Sashes are between panes only, so there is one less sash than slaves
@@ -208,7 +241,7 @@ static int	PanedWindowIdentifyCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr,
 #define ValidSashIndex(pwPtr, sash) \
 	(((sash) >= 0) && ((sash) < ((pwPtr)->numSlaves-1)))
 
-static Tk_GeomMgr panedWindowMgrType = {
+static const Tk_GeomMgr panedWindowMgrType = {
     "panedwindow",		/* name */
     PanedWindowReqProc,		/* requestProc */
     PanedWindowLostSlaveProc,	/* lostSlaveProc */
@@ -225,32 +258,32 @@ static Tk_GeomMgr panedWindowMgrType = {
  * the custom "-sticky" option for slave windows.
  */
 
-static Tk_ObjCustomOption stickyOption = {
-    "sticky",				/* name */
-    SetSticky,				/* setProc */
-    GetSticky,				/* getProc */
-    RestoreSticky,			/* restoreProc */
-    (Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc *)NULL,	/* freeProc */
+static const Tk_ObjCustomOption stickyOption = {
+    "sticky",			/* name */
+    SetSticky,			/* setProc */
+    GetSticky,			/* getProc */
+    RestoreSticky,		/* restoreProc */
+    NULL,			/* freeProc */
     0
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, background), 0,
 	 (ClientData) DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BG_MONO},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	 (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth"},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	 (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background"},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	 NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth"},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
+	 NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background"},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BORDERWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, borderWidth),
-         0, 0, GEOMETRY},
+	 0, 0, GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, cursor),
 	 TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-handlepad", "handlePad", "HandlePad",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_HANDLEPAD, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, handlePad),
-         0, 0, GEOMETRY},
+	 0, 0, GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-handlesize", "handleSize", "HandleSize",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_HANDLESIZE, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, handleSizePtr),
 	 Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, handleSize), 0, 0, GEOMETRY},
@@ -259,9 +292,9 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
 	 Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, height), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-opaqueresize", "opaqueResize", "OpaqueResize",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_OPAQUERESIZE, -1,
-         Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, resizeOpaque), 0, 0, 0},
+	 Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, resizeOpaque), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-orient", "orient", "Orient",
-	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_ORIENT, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, orient), 
+	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_ORIENT, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, orient),
 	 0, (ClientData) orientStrings, GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, relief), 0, 0, 0},
@@ -270,55 +303,59 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
 	 TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-sashpad", "sashPad", "SashPad",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_SASHPAD, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, sashPad),
-         0, 0, GEOMETRY},
+	 0, 0, GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-sashrelief", "sashRelief", "Relief",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_SASHRELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, sashRelief),
-         0, 0, 0},
+	 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-sashwidth", "sashWidth", "Width",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_SASHWIDTH, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, sashWidthPtr),
 	 Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, sashWidth), 0, 0, GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-showhandle", "showHandle", "ShowHandle",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_SHOWHANDLE, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, showHandle),
-         0, 0, GEOMETRY},
+	 0, 0, GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, widthPtr),
 	 Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, width), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_END}
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec slaveOptionSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-after", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+static const Tk_OptionSpec slaveOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-after", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_AFTER, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, after),
-         TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-before", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-         DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_BEFORE, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, before),
-         TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+	 TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-before", NULL, NULL,
+	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_BEFORE, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, before),
+	 TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_HEIGHT, Tk_Offset(Slave, heightPtr),
-         Tk_Offset(Slave, height), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-minsize", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+	 Tk_Offset(Slave, height), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hide", "hide", "Hide",
+	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_HIDE, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, hide), 0,0,GEOMETRY},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-minsize", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_MINSIZE, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, minSize), 0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_PADX, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, padx), 0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_PADY, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, pady), 0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-sticky", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-sticky", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_STICKY, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, sticky), 0,
-         (ClientData) &stickyOption, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+	 (ClientData) &stickyOption, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-stretch", "stretch", "Stretch",
+	DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_STRETCH, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, stretch), 0,
+	(ClientData) stretchStrings, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(Slave, widthPtr),
-         Tk_Offset(Slave, width), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	 Tk_Offset(Slave, width), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_END}
 };
-    
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "panedwindow" Tcl
- *	command.  It creates a new "panedwindow" widget.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "panedwindow" Tcl command. It
+ *	creates a new "panedwindow" widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -330,11 +367,11 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec slaveOptionSpecs[] = {
  */
 
 int
-Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj * const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     PanedWindow *pwPtr;
     Tk_Window tkwin, parent;
@@ -346,27 +383,35 @@ Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), 
+    tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
 	    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], NULL), NULL);
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     pwOpts = (OptionTables *)
-	Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "PanedWindowOptionTables", NULL);
+	    Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "PanedWindowOptionTables", NULL);
     if (pwOpts == NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * The first time this procedure is invoked, the option tables will
-	 * be NULL.  We then create the option tables from the templates
-	 * and store a pointer to the tables as the command's clinical so
-	 * we'll have easy access to it in the future.
+	 * The first time this function is invoked, the option tables will be
+	 * NULL. We then create the option tables from the templates and store
+	 * a pointer to the tables as the command's clinical so we'll have
+	 * easy access to it in the future.
 	 */
+
 	pwOpts = (OptionTables *) ckalloc(sizeof(OptionTables));
-	/* Set up an exit handler to free the optionTables struct */
+
+	/*
+	 * Set up an exit handler to free the optionTables struct.
+	 */
+
 	Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, "PanedWindowOptionTables",
 		DestroyOptionTables, (ClientData) pwOpts);
 
-	/* Create the paned window option tables. */
+	/*
+	 * Create the paned window option tables.
+	 */
+
 	pwOpts->pwOptions = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
 	pwOpts->slaveOpts = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, slaveOptionSpecs);
     }
@@ -379,18 +424,18 @@ Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
     pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) ckalloc(sizeof(PanedWindow));
     memset((void *)pwPtr, 0, (sizeof(PanedWindow)));
-    pwPtr->tkwin	= tkwin;
-    pwPtr->display	= Tk_Display(tkwin);
-    pwPtr->interp	= interp;
-    pwPtr->widgetCmd	= Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
+    pwPtr->tkwin = tkwin;
+    pwPtr->display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    pwPtr->interp = interp;
+    pwPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
 	    Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin), PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd,
 	    (ClientData) pwPtr, PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc);
-    pwPtr->optionTable	= pwOpts->pwOptions;
-    pwPtr->slaveOpts	= pwOpts->slaveOpts;
-    pwPtr->relief	= TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
-    pwPtr->gc		= None;
-    pwPtr->cursor	= None;
-    pwPtr->sashCursor	= None;
+    pwPtr->optionTable = pwOpts->pwOptions;
+    pwPtr->slaveOpts = pwOpts->slaveOpts;
+    pwPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    pwPtr->gc = None;
+    pwPtr->cursor = None;
+    pwPtr->sashCursor = None;
 
     /*
      * Keep a hold of the associated tkwin until we destroy the widget,
@@ -409,10 +454,11 @@ Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    PanedWindowEventProc, (ClientData) pwPtr);
 
     /*
-     * Find the toplevel ancestor of the panedwindow, and make a proxy
-     * win as a child of that window; this way the proxy can always float
-     * above slaves in the panedwindow.
+     * Find the toplevel ancestor of the panedwindow, and make a proxy win as
+     * a child of that window; this way the proxy can always float above
+     * slaves in the panedwindow.
      */
+
     parent = Tk_Parent(pwPtr->tkwin);
     while (!(Tk_IsTopLevel(parent))) {
 	parent = Tk_Parent(parent);
@@ -422,15 +468,16 @@ Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
     }
 
-    pwPtr->proxywin = Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow(interp, parent, (char *) NULL);
+    pwPtr->proxywin = Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow(interp, parent, NULL);
+
     /*
-     * The proxy window has to be able to share GCs with the main
-     * panedwindow despite being children of windows with potentially
-     * different characteristics, and it looks better that way too.
-     * [Bug 702230]
-     * Also Set the X window save under attribute to avoid expose events as
-     * the proxy sash is dragged across the panes.  [Bug 1036963]
+     * The proxy window has to be able to share GCs with the main panedwindow
+     * despite being children of windows with potentially different
+     * characteristics, and it looks better that way too. [Bug 702230] Also
+     * set the X window save under attribute to avoid expose events as the
+     * proxy sash is dragged across the panes. [Bug 1036963]
      */
+
     Tk_SetWindowVisual(pwPtr->proxywin,
 	    Tk_Visual(tkwin), Tk_Depth(tkwin), Tk_Colormap(tkwin));
     Tk_CreateEventHandler(pwPtr->proxywin, ExposureMask, ProxyWindowEventProc,
@@ -453,9 +500,9 @@ Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -467,26 +514,27 @@ Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about square widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[];		/* Argument objects. */
+PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about square widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj * const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) clientData;
     int result = TCL_OK;
-    static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {"add", "cget", "configure", "forget",
-					"identify", "panecget",
-                                        "paneconfigure", "panes",
-                                        "proxy", "sash", (char *) NULL};
-    enum options { PW_ADD, PW_CGET, PW_CONFIGURE, PW_FORGET, PW_IDENTIFY,
-		       PW_PANECGET, PW_PANECONFIGURE, PW_PANES, PW_PROXY,
-                       PW_SASH };
+    static const char *optionStrings[] = {
+	"add", "cget", "configure", "forget", "identify", "panecget",
+	"paneconfigure", "panes", "proxy", "sash", NULL
+    };
+    enum options {
+	PW_ADD, PW_CGET, PW_CONFIGURE, PW_FORGET, PW_IDENTIFY, PW_PANECGET,
+	PW_PANECONFIGURE, PW_PANES, PW_PROXY, PW_SASH
+    };
     Tcl_Obj *resultObj;
     int index, count, i, x, y;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     Slave *slavePtr;
-    
+
     if (objc < 2) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -498,196 +546,177 @@ PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) pwPtr);
-    
+
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case PW_ADD: {
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "widget ?widget ...?");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    
-	    result = ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+    case PW_ADD:
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "widget ?widget ...?");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    break;
 	}
-	
-	case PW_CGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    resultObj = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) pwPtr,
-		    pwPtr->optionTable, objv[2], pwPtr->tkwin);
+	result = ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+
+    case PW_CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    break;
+	}
+	resultObj = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) pwPtr,
+		pwPtr->optionTable, objv[2], pwPtr->tkwin);
+	if (resultObj == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
+	}
+	break;
+
+    case PW_CONFIGURE:
+	resultObj = NULL;
+	if (objc <= 3) {
+	    resultObj = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) pwPtr,
+		    pwPtr->optionTable,
+		    (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL, pwPtr->tkwin);
 	    if (resultObj == NULL) {
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else {
 		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
 	    }
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigurePanedWindow(interp, pwPtr, objc - 2, objv + 2);
+	}
+	break;
+
+    case PW_FORGET: {
+	int i;
+
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "widget ?widget ...?");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    break;
 	}
-	
-	case PW_CONFIGURE: {
-	    resultObj = NULL;
-	    if (objc <= 3) {
-		resultObj = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) pwPtr,
-			pwPtr->optionTable,
-			(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-			pwPtr->tkwin);
-		if (resultObj == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
-		}
-	    } else {
-		result = ConfigurePanedWindow(interp, pwPtr, objc - 2,
-			objv + 2);
+
+	/*
+	 * Clean up each window named in the arg list.
+	 */
+	for (count = 0, i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
+	    Tk_Window slave = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
+		    pwPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (slave == NULL) {
+		continue;
+	    }
+	    slavePtr = GetPane(pwPtr, slave);
+	    if ((slavePtr != NULL) && (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL)) {
+		count++;
+		Tk_ManageGeometry(slave, NULL, (ClientData)NULL);
+		Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, pwPtr->tkwin);
+		Tk_DeleteEventHandler(slavePtr->tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
+			SlaveStructureProc, (ClientData) slavePtr);
+		Tk_UnmapWindow(slavePtr->tkwin);
+		Unlink(slavePtr);
+	    }
+	    if (count != 0) {
+		ComputeGeometry(pwPtr);
 	    }
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case PW_IDENTIFY:
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "x y");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    break;
 	}
-	
-	case PW_FORGET: {
-	    Tk_Window slave;
-	    int i;
-	    
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "widget ?widget ...?");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
 
-	    /*
-	     * Clean up each window named in the arg list.
-	     */
-	    for (count = 0, i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
-		slave = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
-			pwPtr->tkwin);
-		if (slave == NULL) {
-		    continue;
-		}
-		slavePtr = GetPane(pwPtr, slave);
-		if ((slavePtr != NULL) && (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL)) {
-		    count++;
-		    Tk_ManageGeometry(slave, (Tk_GeomMgr *) NULL,
-			    (ClientData) NULL);
-		    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, pwPtr->tkwin);
-		    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(slavePtr->tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
-			    SlaveStructureProc, (ClientData) slavePtr);
-		    Tk_UnmapWindow(slavePtr->tkwin);
-		    Unlink(slavePtr);
-		}
-		if (count != 0) {
-		    ComputeGeometry(pwPtr);
-		}
-	    }
+	if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK)
+		|| (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    break;
 	}
+	result = PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(pwPtr, interp, x, y);
+	break;
 
-	case PW_IDENTIFY: {
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "x y");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
+    case PW_PANECGET:
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pane option");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    break;
+	}
+	tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), pwPtr->tkwin);
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    break;
+	}
+	resultObj = NULL;
+	for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
+	    if (pwPtr->slaves[i]->tkwin == tkwin) {
+		resultObj = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp,
+			(char *) pwPtr->slaves[i], pwPtr->slaveOpts,
+			objv[3], tkwin);
 	    }
+	}
+	if (i == pwPtr->numSlaves) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "not managed by this window", TCL_STATIC);
+	}
+	if (resultObj == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
+	}
+	break;
 
-	    if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK)
-		    || (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    
-	    result = PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(pwPtr, interp, x, y);
+    case PW_PANECONFIGURE:
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "pane ?option? ?value option value ...?");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    break;
 	}
-
-	case PW_PANECGET: {
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pane option");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
+	resultObj = NULL;
+	if (objc <= 4) {
 	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
 		    pwPtr->tkwin);
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    resultObj = NULL;
 	    for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
 		if (pwPtr->slaves[i]->tkwin == tkwin) {
-		    resultObj = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp,
+		    resultObj = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp,
 			    (char *) pwPtr->slaves[i], pwPtr->slaveOpts,
-			    objv[3], tkwin);
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (i == pwPtr->numSlaves) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "not managed by this window",
-			TCL_STATIC);
-	    }
-	    if (resultObj == NULL) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-
-	case PW_PANECONFIGURE: {
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"pane ?option? ?value option value ...?");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    resultObj = NULL;
-	    if (objc <= 4) {
-		tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-			pwPtr->tkwin);
-		for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
-		    if (pwPtr->slaves[i]->tkwin == tkwin) {
-			resultObj = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp,
-				(char *) pwPtr->slaves[i],
-				pwPtr->slaveOpts,
-				(objc == 4) ? objv[3] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-				pwPtr->tkwin);
-			if (resultObj == NULL) {
-			    result = TCL_ERROR;
-			} else {
-			    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
-			}
-			break;
+			    (objc == 4) ? objv[3] : NULL,
+			    pwPtr->tkwin);
+		    if (resultObj == NULL) {
+			result = TCL_ERROR;
+		    } else {
+			Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
 		    }
+		    break;
 		}
-	    } else {
-		result = ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv);
 	}
-	    
-	case PW_PANES: {
-	    resultObj = Tcl_NewObj();
+	break;
 
-	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(resultObj);
+    case PW_PANES:
+	resultObj = Tcl_NewObj();
 
-	    for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, resultObj,
-			Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(pwPtr->slaves[i]->tkwin),
-				-1));
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
-	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(resultObj);
-	    break;
-	}
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(resultObj);
 
-	case PW_PROXY: {
-	    result = PanedWindowProxyCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-	    break;
+	for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, resultObj,
+		    Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(pwPtr->slaves[i]->tkwin),-1));
 	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(resultObj);
+	break;
 
-	case PW_SASH: {
-	    result = PanedWindowSashCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
+    case PW_PROXY:
+	result = PanedWindowProxyCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+
+    case PW_SASH:
+	result = PanedWindowSashCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
     }
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) pwPtr);
     return result;
@@ -698,39 +727,38 @@ PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ConfigureSlaves --
  *
- *	Add or alter the configuration options of a slave in a paned
- *	window.
+ *	Add or alter the configuration options of a slave in a paned window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Depends on options; may add a slave to the paned window, may
- *	alter the geometry management options of a slave.
+ *	Depends on options; may add a slave to the paned window, may alter the
+ *	geometry management options of a slave.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;			/* Information about paned window. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[];		/* Argument objects. */
+ConfigureSlaves(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr,		/* Information about paned window. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     int i, firstOptionArg, j, found, doubleBw, index, numNewSlaves, haveLoc;
     int insertIndex;
     Tk_Window tkwin = NULL, ancestor, parent;
-    Slave *slavePtr, **inserts, **new;
+    Slave *slavePtr, **inserts, **newSlaves;
     Slave options;
     char *arg;
-   
+
     /*
-     * Find the non-window name arguments; these are the configure options
-     * for the slaves.  Also validate that the window names given are
-     * legitimate (ie, they are real windows, they are not the panedwindow
-     * itself, etc.).
+     * Find the non-window name arguments; these are the configure options for
+     * the slaves. Also validate that the window names given are legitimate
+     * (ie, they are real windows, they are not the panedwindow itself, etc.).
      */
+
     for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
 	arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
 	if (arg[0] == '-') {
@@ -742,28 +770,32 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 		 * Just a plain old bad window; Tk_NameToWindow filled in an
 		 * error message for us.
 		 */
+
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else if (tkwin == pwPtr->tkwin) {
 		/*
 		 * A panedwindow cannot manage itself.
 		 */
+
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't add ", arg, " to itself",
-			(char *) NULL);
+			NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else if (Tk_IsTopLevel(tkwin)) {
 		/*
 		 * A panedwindow cannot manage a toplevel.
 		 */
+
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't add toplevel ", arg, " to ",
-			Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin), (char *) NULL);
+			Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin), NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else {
 		/*
 		 * Make sure the panedwindow is the parent of the slave,
 		 * or a descendant of the slave's parent.
 		 */
+
 		parent = Tk_Parent(tkwin);
 		for (ancestor = pwPtr->tkwin;;ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
 		    if (ancestor == parent) {
@@ -771,9 +803,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 		    }
 		    if (Tk_IsTopLevel(ancestor)) {
 			Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't add ", arg,
-				" to ", Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin),
-				(char *) NULL);
+			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't add ", arg, " to ",
+				Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin), NULL);
 			return TCL_ERROR;
 		    }
 		}
@@ -784,10 +815,11 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 
     /*
      * Pre-parse the configuration options, to get the before/after specifiers
-     * into an easy-to-find location (a local variable).  Also, check the
+     * into an easy-to-find location (a local variable). Also, check the
      * return from Tk_SetOptions once, here, so we can save a little bit of
      * extra testing in the for loop below.
      */
+
     memset((void *)&options, 0, sizeof(Slave));
     if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) &options, pwPtr->slaveOpts,
 	    objc - firstOptionArg, objv + firstOptionArg,
@@ -797,9 +829,10 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 
     /*
      * If either -after or -before was given, find the numerical index that
-     * corresponds to the given window.  If both -after and -before are
-     * given, the option precedence is:  -after, then -before.
+     * corresponds to the given window. If both -after and -before are given,
+     * the option precedence is: -after, then -before.
      */
+
     index = -1;
     haveLoc = 0;
     if (options.after != None) {
@@ -823,14 +856,14 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If a window was given for -after/-before, but it's not a window
-     * managed by the panedwindow, throw an error
+     * If a window was given for -after/-before, but it's not a window managed
+     * by the panedwindow, throw an error
      */
+
     if (haveLoc && index == -1) {
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", Tk_PathName(tkwin),
-		"\" is not managed by ", Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin),
-		(char *) NULL);
+		"\" is not managed by ", Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin), NULL);
 	Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) &options, pwPtr->slaveOpts,
 		pwPtr->tkwin);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -838,23 +871,26 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 
     /*
      * Allocate an array to hold, in order, the pointers to the slave
-     * structures corresponding to the windows specified.  Some of those
+     * structures corresponding to the windows specified. Some of those
      * structures may already have existed, some may be new.
      */
+
     inserts = (Slave **)ckalloc(sizeof(Slave *) * (firstOptionArg - 2));
     insertIndex = 0;
-    
+
     /*
      * Populate the inserts array, creating new slave structures as necessary,
      * applying the options to each structure as we go, and, if necessary,
-     * marking the spot in the original slaves array as empty (for pre-existing
-     * slave structures).
+     * marking the spot in the original slaves array as empty (for
+     * pre-existing slave structures).
      */
+
     for (i = 0, numNewSlaves = 0; i < firstOptionArg - 2; i++) {
 	/*
 	 * We don't check that tkwin is NULL here, because the pre-pass above
 	 * guarantees that the input at this stage is good.
 	 */
+
 	tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[i + 2]),
 		pwPtr->tkwin);
 
@@ -888,8 +924,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	/*
 	 * Make sure this slave wasn't already put into the inserts array,
-	 * ie, when the user specifies the same window multiple times in
-	 * a single add commaned.
+	 * i.e., when the user specifies the same window multiple times in a
+	 * single add commaned.
 	 */
 	for (j = 0; j < insertIndex; j++) {
 	    if (inserts[j]->tkwin == tkwin) {
@@ -900,12 +936,12 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	if (found) {
 	    continue;
 	}
-	
+
 	/*
-	 * Create a new slave structure and initialize it.  All slaves
-	 * start out with their "natural" dimensions.
+	 * Create a new slave structure and initialize it. All slaves start
+	 * out with their "natural" dimensions.
 	 */
-	
+
 	slavePtr = (Slave *) ckalloc(sizeof(Slave));
 	memset(slavePtr, 0, sizeof(Slave));
 	Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *)slavePtr, pwPtr->slaveOpts,
@@ -913,8 +949,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *)slavePtr, pwPtr->slaveOpts,
 		objc - firstOptionArg, objv + firstOptionArg,
 		pwPtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL);
-	slavePtr->tkwin		= tkwin;
-	slavePtr->masterPtr	= pwPtr;
+	slavePtr->tkwin = tkwin;
+	slavePtr->masterPtr = pwPtr;
 	doubleBw = 2 * Tk_Changes(slavePtr->tkwin)->border_width;
 	if (slavePtr->width > 0) {
 	    slavePtr->paneWidth = slavePtr->width;
@@ -943,43 +979,44 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Allocate the new slaves array, then copy the slaves into it, in
-     * order.
+     * Allocate the new slaves array, then copy the slaves into it, in order.
      */
+
     i = sizeof(Slave *) * (pwPtr->numSlaves+numNewSlaves);
-    new = (Slave **)ckalloc((unsigned) i);
-    memset(new, 0, (size_t) i);
+    newSlaves = (Slave **)ckalloc((unsigned) i);
+    memset(newSlaves, 0, (size_t) i);
     if (index == -1) {
 	/*
 	 * If none of the existing slaves have to be moved, just copy the old
 	 * and append the new.
 	 */
-	memcpy((void *)&(new[0]), pwPtr->slaves,
+	memcpy((void *)&(newSlaves[0]), pwPtr->slaves,
 		sizeof(Slave *) * pwPtr->numSlaves);
-	memcpy((void *)&(new[pwPtr->numSlaves]), inserts,
+	memcpy((void *)&(newSlaves[pwPtr->numSlaves]), inserts,
 		sizeof(Slave *) * numNewSlaves);
     } else {
 	/*
 	 * If some of the existing slaves were moved, the old slaves array
 	 * will be partially populated, with some valid and some invalid
-	 * entries.  Walk through it, copying valid entries to the new slaves
+	 * entries. Walk through it, copying valid entries to the new slaves
 	 * array as we go; when we get to the insert location for the new
 	 * slaves, copy the inserts array over, then finish off the old slaves
 	 * array.
 	 */
+
 	for (i = 0, j = 0; i < index; i++) {
 	    if (pwPtr->slaves[i] != NULL) {
-		new[j] = pwPtr->slaves[i];
+		newSlaves[j] = pwPtr->slaves[i];
 		j++;
 	    }
 	}
-	
-	memcpy((void *)&(new[j]), inserts, sizeof(Slave *) * (insertIndex));
+
+	memcpy((void *)&(newSlaves[j]), inserts, sizeof(Slave *)*insertIndex);
 	j += firstOptionArg - 2;
-	
+
 	for (i = index; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
 	    if (pwPtr->slaves[i] != NULL) {
-		new[j] = pwPtr->slaves[i];
+		newSlaves[j] = pwPtr->slaves[i];
 		j++;
 	    }
 	}
@@ -988,17 +1025,19 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     /*
      * Make the new slaves array the paned window's slave array, and clean up.
      */
+
     ckfree((void *)pwPtr->slaves);
     ckfree((void *)inserts);
-    pwPtr->slaves = new;
+    pwPtr->slaves = newSlaves;
 
     /*
      * Set the paned window's slave count to the new value.
      */
+
     pwPtr->numSlaves += numNewSlaves;
 
     Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) &options, pwPtr->slaveOpts, pwPtr->tkwin);
-    
+
     ComputeGeometry(pwPtr);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -1008,7 +1047,7 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * PanedWindowSashCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the panedwindow sash subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the panedwindow sash subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -1021,133 +1060,132 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-PanedWindowSashCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;		/* Pointer to paned window information. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+PanedWindowSashCommand(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr,		/* Pointer to paned window information. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    static CONST char *sashOptionStrings[] = { "coord", "dragto", "mark",
-					     "place", (char *) NULL };
-    enum sashOptions { SASH_COORD, SASH_DRAGTO, SASH_MARK, SASH_PLACE };
+    static const char *sashOptionStrings[] = {
+	"coord", "dragto", "mark", "place", NULL
+    };
+    enum sashOptions {
+	SASH_COORD, SASH_DRAGTO, SASH_MARK, SASH_PLACE
+    };
     int index, sash, x, y, diff;
     Tcl_Obj *coords[2];
     Slave *slavePtr;
-    
+
     if (objc < 3) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], sashOptionStrings,
-	    "option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], sashOptionStrings, "option", 0,
+	    &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
     switch ((enum sashOptions) index) {
-	case SASH_COORD: {
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+    case SASH_COORD:
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &sash) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &sash) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    if (!ValidSashIndex(pwPtr, sash)) {
-		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "invalid sash index", TCL_STATIC);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    slavePtr = pwPtr->slaves[sash];
-	    
-	    coords[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(slavePtr->sashx);
-	    coords[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(slavePtr->sashy);
-	    Tcl_SetListObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), 2, coords);
-	    break;
+	if (!ValidSashIndex(pwPtr, sash)) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "invalid sash index", TCL_STATIC);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
+	slavePtr = pwPtr->slaves[sash];
 
-	case SASH_MARK: {
-	    if (objc != 6 && objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index ?x y?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    
-	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &sash) != TCL_OK) {
+	coords[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(slavePtr->sashx);
+	coords[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(slavePtr->sashy);
+	Tcl_SetListObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), 2, coords);
+	break;
+
+    case SASH_MARK:
+	if (objc != 6 && objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index ?x y?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &sash) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	if (!ValidSashIndex(pwPtr, sash)) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "invalid sash index", TCL_STATIC);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	if (objc == 6) {
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &x) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 
-	    if (!ValidSashIndex(pwPtr, sash)) {
-		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "invalid sash index", TCL_STATIC);
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[5], &y) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 
-	    if (objc == 6) {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &x) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[5], &y) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
+	    pwPtr->slaves[sash]->markx = x;
+	    pwPtr->slaves[sash]->marky = y;
+	} else {
+	    coords[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pwPtr->slaves[sash]->markx);
+	    coords[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pwPtr->slaves[sash]->marky);
+	    Tcl_SetListObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), 2, coords);
+	}
+	break;
 
-		pwPtr->slaves[sash]->markx = x;
-		pwPtr->slaves[sash]->marky = y;
-	    } else {
-		coords[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pwPtr->slaves[sash]->markx);
-		coords[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pwPtr->slaves[sash]->marky);
-		Tcl_SetListObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), 2, coords);
-	    }
+    case SASH_DRAGTO:
+    case SASH_PLACE:
+	if (objc != 6) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index x y");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    break;
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &sash) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	
-	case SASH_DRAGTO:
-	case SASH_PLACE: {
-	    if (objc != 6) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index x y");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    
-	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &sash) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
 
-	    if (!ValidSashIndex(pwPtr, sash)) {
-		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "invalid sash index", TCL_STATIC);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+	if (!ValidSashIndex(pwPtr, sash)) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "invalid sash index", TCL_STATIC);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &x) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &x) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[5], &y) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[5], &y) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	slavePtr = pwPtr->slaves[sash];
+	if (pwPtr->orient == ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	    if (index == SASH_PLACE) {
+		diff = x - pwPtr->slaves[sash]->sashx;
+	    } else {
+		diff = x - pwPtr->slaves[sash]->markx;
 	    }
-	    
-	    slavePtr = pwPtr->slaves[sash];
-	    if (pwPtr->orient == ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
-		if (index == SASH_PLACE) {
-		    diff = x - pwPtr->slaves[sash]->sashx;
-		} else {
-		    diff = x - pwPtr->slaves[sash]->markx;
-		}
+	} else {
+	    if (index == SASH_PLACE) {
+		diff = y - pwPtr->slaves[sash]->sashy;
 	    } else {
-		if (index == SASH_PLACE) {
-		    diff = y - pwPtr->slaves[sash]->sashy;
-		} else {
-		    diff = y - pwPtr->slaves[sash]->marky;
-		}
+		diff = y - pwPtr->slaves[sash]->marky;
 	    }
-
-	    MoveSash(pwPtr, sash, diff);
-	    ComputeGeometry(pwPtr);
 	}
+
+	MoveSash(pwPtr, sash, diff);
+	ComputeGeometry(pwPtr);
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -1157,32 +1195,31 @@ PanedWindowSashCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ConfigurePanedWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list in
- *	conjunction with the Tk option database to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a paned window widget.
+ *	This function is called to process an argv/argc list in conjunction
+ *	with the Tk option database to configure (or reconfigure) a paned
+ *	window widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width,
- *	etc. get set for pwPtr;  old resources get freed,
- *	if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width, etc. get set
+ *	for pwPtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigurePanedWindow(interp, pwPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument values. */
+ConfigurePanedWindow(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr,		/* Information about widget. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument values. */
 {
     Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
     int typemask = 0;
-    
+
     if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) pwPtr, pwPtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
 	    pwPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, &typemask) != TCL_OK) {
 	Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
@@ -1194,14 +1231,14 @@ ConfigurePanedWindow(interp, pwPtr, objc, objv)
     PanedWindowWorldChanged((ClientData) pwPtr);
 
     /*
-     * If an option that affects geometry has changed, make a relayout
+     * If an option that affects geometry has changed, make a re-layout
      * request.
      */
 
     if (typemask & GEOMETRY) {
 	ComputeGeometry(pwPtr);
     }
-    
+
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -1210,9 +1247,9 @@ ConfigurePanedWindow(interp, pwPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * PanedWindowWorldChanged --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked anytime a paned window's world has
- *	changed in some way that causes the widget to have to recompute
- *	graphics contexts and geometry.
+ *	This function is invoked anytime a paned window's world has changed in
+ *	some way that causes the widget to have to recompute graphics contexts
+ *	and geometry.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1224,8 +1261,8 @@ ConfigurePanedWindow(interp, pwPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static void
-PanedWindowWorldChanged(instanceData)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about the paned window. */
+PanedWindowWorldChanged(
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Information about the paned window. */
 {
     XGCValues gcValues;
     GC newGC;
@@ -1235,7 +1272,7 @@ PanedWindowWorldChanged(instanceData)
      * Allocated a graphics context for drawing the paned window widget
      * elements (background, sashes, etc.) and set the window background.
      */
-    
+
     gcValues.background = Tk_3DBorderColor(pwPtr->background)->pixel;
     newGC = Tk_GetGC(pwPtr->tkwin, GCBackground, &gcValues);
     if (pwPtr->gc != None) {
@@ -1268,23 +1305,23 @@ PanedWindowWorldChanged(instanceData)
  *
  * PanedWindowEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on paned windows.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	paned windows.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up. When
+ *	it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-PanedWindowEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+PanedWindowEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) clientData;
 
@@ -1309,9 +1346,9 @@ PanedWindowEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1323,16 +1360,16 @@ PanedWindowEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) clientData;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted or because the command was
-     * deleted, and then this procedure destroys the widget.  The
-     * WIDGET_DELETED flag distinguishes these cases.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted or because the command was deleted,
+     * and then this function destroys the widget. The WIDGET_DELETED flag
+     * distinguishes these cases.
      */
 
     if (!(pwPtr->flags & WIDGET_DELETED)) {
@@ -1346,9 +1383,9 @@ PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * DisplayPanedWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws the contents of a paned window widget.
- *	It is invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs
- *	when there's nothing else for the application to do.
+ *	This function redraws the contents of a paned window widget. It is
+ *	invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs when there's
+ *	nothing else for the application to do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1360,15 +1397,15 @@ PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayPanedWindow(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
+DisplayPanedWindow(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about window. */
 {
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) clientData;
     Slave *slavePtr;
     Pixmap pixmap;
     Tk_Window tkwin = pwPtr->tkwin;
     int i, sashWidth, sashHeight;
-    CONST int horizontal = (pwPtr->orient == ORIENT_HORIZONTAL);
+    const int horizontal = (pwPtr->orient == ORIENT_HORIZONTAL);
 
     pwPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING;
     if ((pwPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) {
@@ -1417,9 +1454,14 @@ DisplayPanedWindow(clientData)
 
     for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves - 1; i++) {
 	slavePtr = pwPtr->slaves[i];
-	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, pwPtr->background,
-		slavePtr->sashx, slavePtr->sashy,
-		sashWidth, sashHeight, 1, pwPtr->sashRelief);
+	if (slavePtr->hide) {
+	    continue;
+	}
+	if (sashWidth > 0 && sashHeight > 0) {
+	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, pwPtr->background,
+		    slavePtr->sashx, slavePtr->sashy, sashWidth, sashHeight,
+		    1, pwPtr->sashRelief);
+	}
 	if (pwPtr->showHandle) {
 	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, pwPtr->background,
 		    slavePtr->handlex, slavePtr->handley,
@@ -1430,13 +1472,12 @@ DisplayPanedWindow(clientData)
 
 #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
     /*
-     * Copy the information from the off-screen pixmap onto the screen,
-     * then delete the pixmap.
+     * Copy the information from the off-screen pixmap onto the screen, then
+     * delete the pixmap.
      */
 
-    XCopyArea(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), pwPtr->gc,
-	    0, 0, (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin), (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin),
-	    0, 0);
+    XCopyArea(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), pwPtr->gc, 0, 0,
+	    (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin), (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, 0);
     Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap);
 #endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
 }
@@ -1446,8 +1487,8 @@ DisplayPanedWindow(clientData)
  *
  * DestroyPanedWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by PanedWindowEventProc to free the
- *	internal structure of a paned window.
+ *	This function is invoked by PanedWindowEventProc to free the internal
+ *	structure of a paned window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1459,23 +1500,23 @@ DisplayPanedWindow(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyPanedWindow(pwPtr)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;		/* Info about paned window widget. */
+DestroyPanedWindow(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr)		/* Info about paned window widget. */
 {
     int i;
-    
+
     /*
-     * First mark the widget as in the process of being deleted,
-     * so that any code that causes calls to other paned window procedures
-     * will abort.
+     * First mark the widget as in the process of being deleted, so that any
+     * code that causes calls to other paned window functions will abort.
      */
 
     pwPtr->flags |= WIDGET_DELETED;
 
     /*
-     * Cancel idle callbacks for redrawing the widget and for rearranging
-     * the panes.
+     * Cancel idle callbacks for redrawing the widget and for rearranging the
+     * panes.
      */
+
     if (pwPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
 	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayPanedWindow, (ClientData) pwPtr);
     }
@@ -1489,7 +1530,7 @@ DestroyPanedWindow(pwPtr)
      *  o  Cancel geometry management for the slave.
      *  o  Free memory for the slave
      */
-    
+
     for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
 	Tk_DeleteEventHandler(pwPtr->slaves[i]->tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
 		SlaveStructureProc, (ClientData) pwPtr->slaves[i]);
@@ -1525,26 +1566,25 @@ DestroyPanedWindow(pwPtr)
  *
  * PanedWindowReqProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk_GeometryRequest for
- *	windows managed by a paned window.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk_GeometryRequest for windows managed by
+ *	a paned window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Arranges for tkwin, and all its managed siblings, to
- *	be re-arranged at the next idle point.
+ *	Arranges for tkwin, and all its managed siblings, to be re-arranged at
+ *	the next idle point.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-PanedWindowReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Paned window's information about
-				 * window that got new preferred
-				 * geometry.  */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Other Tk-related information
-				 * about the window. */
+PanedWindowReqProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Paned window's information about window
+				 * that got new preferred geometry. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Other Tk-related information about the
+				 * window. */
 {
     Slave *slavePtr = (Slave *) clientData;
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) (slavePtr->masterPtr);
@@ -1555,6 +1595,7 @@ PanedWindowReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
 	}
     } else {
 	int doubleBw = 2 * Tk_Changes(slavePtr->tkwin)->border_width;
+
 	if (slavePtr->width <= 0) {
 	    slavePtr->paneWidth = Tk_ReqWidth(slavePtr->tkwin) + doubleBw;
 	}
@@ -1570,27 +1611,28 @@ PanedWindowReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * PanedWindowLostSlaveProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry
- *	claims control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry claims
+ *	control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Forgets all information about the slave.  Causes geometry to
- *	be recomputed for the panedwindow.
+ *	Forgets all information about the slave. Causes geometry to be
+ *	recomputed for the panedwindow.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-PanedWindowLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Grid structure for slave window that
-				 * was stolen away. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
+PanedWindowLostSlaveProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Grid structure for slave window that was
+				 * stolen away. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
 {
     register Slave *slavePtr = (Slave *) clientData;
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) (slavePtr->masterPtr);
+
     if (pwPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin)) {
 	Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, pwPtr->tkwin);
     }
@@ -1608,11 +1650,10 @@ PanedWindowLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * ArrangePanes --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked (using the Tcl_DoWhenIdle
- *	mechanism) to re-layout a set of windows managed by
- *	a paned window.  It is invoked at idle time so that a
- *	series of pane requests can be merged into a single
- *	layout operation.
+ *	This function is invoked (using the Tcl_DoWhenIdle mechanism) to
+ *	re-layout a set of windows managed by a paned window. It is invoked at
+ *	idle time so that a series of pane requests can be merged into a
+ *	single layout operation.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1624,8 +1665,8 @@ PanedWindowLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
  */
 
 static void
-ArrangePanes(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Structure describing parent whose slaves
+ArrangePanes(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Structure describing parent whose slaves
 				 * are to be re-layed out. */
 {
     register PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) clientData;
@@ -1638,16 +1679,17 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
     int sashReserve, sxReserve, syReserve;
     int internalBW;
     int paneDynSize, paneDynMinSize, pwHeight, pwWidth, pwSize;
+    int first, last;
     int stretchReserve, stretchAmount;
-    CONST int horizontal = (pwPtr->orient == ORIENT_HORIZONTAL);
+    const int horizontal = (pwPtr->orient == ORIENT_HORIZONTAL);
 
     pwPtr->flags &= ~(REQUESTED_RELAYOUT|RESIZE_PENDING);
 
     /*
-     * If the parent has no slaves anymore, then don't do anything
-     * at all:  just leave the parent's size as-is.  Otherwise there is
-     * no way to "relinquish" control over the parent so another geometry
-     * manager can take over.
+     * If the parent has no slaves anymore, then don't do anything at all:
+     * just leave the parent's size as-is. Otherwise there is no way to
+     * "relinquish" control over the parent so another geometry manager can
+     * take over.
      */
 
     if (pwPtr->numSlaves == 0) {
@@ -1657,6 +1699,19 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) pwPtr);
 
     /*
+     * Find index of last visible pane.
+     */
+
+    for (i = 0, last = 0, first = -1; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
+	if (pwPtr->slaves[i]->hide == 0) {
+	    if (first < 0) {
+		first = i;
+	    }
+	    last = i;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
      * First pass; compute sizes
      */
 
@@ -1668,8 +1723,8 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
     stretchReserve = (horizontal ? pwWidth : pwHeight);
 
     /*
-     * Calculate the sash width, including handle and padding,
-     * and the sash and handle offsets.
+     * Calculate the sash width, including handle and padding, and the sash
+     * and handle offsets.
      */
 
     sashOffset = handleOffset = pwPtr->sashPad;
@@ -1682,14 +1737,17 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
 	handleOffset = ((pwPtr->sashWidth - pwPtr->handleSize) / 2)
 		+ pwPtr->sashPad;
     }
-    sashCount = pwPtr->numSlaves - 1;
 
-    for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
+    for (i = sashCount = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
 	slavePtr = pwPtr->slaves[i];
 
+	if (slavePtr->hide) {
+	    continue;
+	}
+
 	/*
-	 * Compute the total size needed by all the slaves and the
-	 * left-over, or shortage of space available.
+	 * Compute the total size needed by all the slaves and the left-over,
+	 * or shortage of space available.
 	 */
 
 	if (horizontal) {
@@ -1699,11 +1757,14 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
 	    paneSize = slavePtr->paneHeight;
 	    stretchReserve -= paneSize + (2 * slavePtr->pady);
 	}
-	if (i == sashCount) {
+	if (IsStretchable(slavePtr->stretch,i,first,last)
+		&& Tk_IsMapped(pwPtr->tkwin)) {
 	    paneDynSize += paneSize;
 	    paneDynMinSize += slavePtr->minSize;
-	} else {
+	}
+	if (i != last) {
 	    stretchReserve -= sashWidth;
+	    sashCount++;
 	}
     }
 
@@ -1714,16 +1775,21 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
     for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
 	slavePtr = pwPtr->slaves[i];
 
+	if (slavePtr->hide) {
+	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, pwPtr->tkwin);
+	    Tk_UnmapWindow(slavePtr->tkwin);
+	    continue;
+	}
+
 	/*
-	 * Compute the size of this slave.  The algorithm (assuming a
+	 * Compute the size of this slave. The algorithm (assuming a
 	 * horizontal paned window) is:
 	 *
-	 * 1.  Get "base" dimensions.  If a width or height is specified
-	 *	for this slave, use those values; else use the
-	 *	ReqWidth/ReqHeight.
+	 * 1.  Get "base" dimensions. If a width or height is specified for
+	 *     this slave, use those values; else use the ReqWidth/ReqHeight.
 	 * 2.  Using base dimensions, pane dimensions, and sticky values,
-	 *	determine the x and y, and actual width and height of the
-	 *	widget.
+	 *     determine the x and y, and actual width and height of the
+	 *     widget.
 	 */
 
 	doubleBw = 2 * Tk_Changes(slavePtr->tkwin)->border_width;
@@ -1744,37 +1810,37 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
 	    paneSize = slavePtr->paneHeight;
 	    pwSize = pwHeight;
 	}
-	if (Tk_IsMapped(pwPtr->tkwin)) {
-	    if (i == pwPtr->numSlaves - 1) {
-		double frac;
-		if (paneDynSize > 0) {
-		    frac = (double)paneSize / (double)paneDynSize;
-		} else {
-		    frac = (double)paneSize / (double)pwSize;
-		}
-		paneDynSize -= paneSize;
-		paneDynMinSize -= slavePtr->minSize;
-		stretchAmount = (int) (frac * stretchReserve);
-		if (paneSize + stretchAmount >= paneMinSize) {
-		    stretchReserve -= stretchAmount;
-		    paneSize += stretchAmount;
-		} else {
-		    stretchReserve += paneSize - paneMinSize;
-		    paneSize = paneMinSize;
-		}
-	        if (stretchReserve > 0) {
-		    paneSize += stretchReserve;
-		    stretchReserve = 0;
-	        }
-	    } else if (paneDynSize - paneDynMinSize + stretchReserve < 0) {
-		if (paneSize + paneDynSize - paneDynMinSize + stretchReserve
-			<= paneMinSize) {
-		    stretchReserve += paneSize - paneMinSize;
-		    paneSize = paneMinSize;
-		} else {
-		    paneSize += paneDynSize - paneDynMinSize + stretchReserve;
-		    stretchReserve = paneDynMinSize - paneDynSize;
-		}
+	if (IsStretchable(slavePtr->stretch, i, first, last)) {
+	    double frac;
+
+	    if (paneDynSize > 0) {
+		frac = (double)paneSize / (double)paneDynSize;
+	    } else {
+		frac = (double)paneSize / (double)pwSize;
+	    }
+
+	    paneDynSize -= paneSize;
+	    paneDynMinSize -= slavePtr->minSize;
+	    stretchAmount = (int) (frac * stretchReserve);
+	    if (paneSize + stretchAmount >= paneMinSize) {
+		stretchReserve -= stretchAmount;
+		paneSize += stretchAmount;
+	    } else {
+		stretchReserve += paneSize - paneMinSize;
+		paneSize = paneMinSize;
+	    }
+	    if (i == last && stretchReserve > 0) {
+		paneSize += stretchReserve;
+		stretchReserve = 0;
+	    }
+	} else if (paneDynSize - paneDynMinSize + stretchReserve < 0) {
+	    if (paneSize + paneDynSize - paneDynMinSize + stretchReserve
+		    <= paneMinSize) {
+		stretchReserve += paneSize - paneMinSize;
+		paneSize = paneMinSize;
+	    } else {
+		paneSize += paneDynSize - paneDynMinSize + stretchReserve;
+		stretchReserve = paneDynMinSize - paneDynSize;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (horizontal) {
@@ -1829,8 +1895,8 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
 	    if (x < internalBW) {
 		x = internalBW;
 	    }
-	    slavePtr->sashx   = x + sashOffset;
-	    slavePtr->sashy   = y;
+	    slavePtr->sashx = x + sashOffset;
+	    slavePtr->sashy = y;
 	    slavePtr->handlex = x + handleOffset;
 	    slavePtr->handley = y + pwPtr->handlePad;
 	    x += sashWidth;
@@ -1839,8 +1905,8 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
 	    if (y < internalBW) {
 		y = internalBW;
 	    }
-	    slavePtr->sashx   = x;
-	    slavePtr->sashy   = y + sashOffset;
+	    slavePtr->sashx = x;
+	    slavePtr->sashy = y + sashOffset;
 	    slavePtr->handlex = x + pwPtr->handlePad;
 	    slavePtr->handley = y + handleOffset;
 	    y += sashWidth;
@@ -1893,12 +1959,12 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-Unlink(slavePtr)
-    register Slave *slavePtr;		/* Window to unlink. */
+Unlink(
+    register Slave *slavePtr)		/* Window to unlink. */
 {
     register PanedWindow *masterPtr;
     int i, j;
-    
+
     masterPtr = slavePtr->masterPtr;
     if (masterPtr == NULL) {
 	return;
@@ -1921,6 +1987,7 @@ Unlink(slavePtr)
     /*
      * Clean out any -after or -before references to this slave
      */
+
     for (i = 0; i < masterPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
 	if (masterPtr->slaves[i]->before == slavePtr->tkwin) {
 	    masterPtr->slaves[i]->before = None;
@@ -1937,9 +2004,10 @@ Unlink(slavePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Set the slave's masterPtr to NULL, so that we can tell that the
-     * slave is no longer attached to any panedwindow.
+     * Set the slave's masterPtr to NULL, so that we can tell that the slave
+     * is no longer attached to any panedwindow.
      */
+
     slavePtr->masterPtr = NULL;
 
     masterPtr->numSlaves--;
@@ -1950,12 +2018,12 @@ Unlink(slavePtr)
  *
  * GetPane --
  *
- *	Given a token to a Tk window, find the pane that corresponds to
- *	that token in a given paned window.
+ *	Given a token to a Tk window, find the pane that corresponds to that
+ *	token in a given paned window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Pointer to the slave structure, or NULL if the window is not
- *	managed by this paned window.
+ *	Pointer to the slave structure, or NULL if the window is not managed
+ *	by this paned window.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1964,11 +2032,12 @@ Unlink(slavePtr)
  */
 
 static Slave *
-GetPane(pwPtr, tkwin)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;		/* Pointer to the paned window info. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to search for. */
+GetPane(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr,		/* Pointer to the paned window info. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window to search for. */
 {
     int i;
+
     for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
 	if (pwPtr->slaves[i]->tkwin == tkwin) {
 	    return pwPtr->slaves[i];
@@ -1982,10 +2051,9 @@ GetPane(pwPtr, tkwin)
  *
  * SlaveStructureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever StructureNotify events
- *	occur for a window that's managed by a paned window.  This
- *	procedure's only purpose is to clean up when windows are
- *	deleted.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever StructureNotify events occur for a
+ *	window that's managed by a paned window. This function's only purpose
+ *	is to clean up when windows are deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1999,13 +2067,13 @@ GetPane(pwPtr, tkwin)
  */
 
 static void
-SlaveStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to record describing window item. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Describes what just happened. */
+SlaveStructureProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to record describing window item. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     Slave *slavePtr = (Slave *) clientData;
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = slavePtr->masterPtr;
-    
+
     if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
 	Unlink(slavePtr);
 	slavePtr->tkwin = NULL;
@@ -2019,8 +2087,8 @@ SlaveStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * ComputeGeometry --
  *
- *	Compute geometry for the paned window, including coordinates of
- *	all slave windows and each sash.
+ *	Compute geometry for the paned window, including coordinates of all
+ *	slave windows and each sash.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2032,14 +2100,14 @@ SlaveStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;		/* Pointer to the Paned Window structure. */
+ComputeGeometry(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr)		/* Pointer to the Paned Window structure. */
 {
     int i, x, y, doubleBw, internalBw;
     int sashWidth, sashOffset, handleOffset;
     int reqWidth, reqHeight, dim;
     Slave *slavePtr;
-    CONST int horizontal = (pwPtr->orient == ORIENT_HORIZONTAL);
+    const int horizontal = (pwPtr->orient == ORIENT_HORIZONTAL);
 
     pwPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_RELAYOUT;
 
@@ -2047,10 +2115,10 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
     reqWidth = reqHeight = 0;
 
     /*
-     * Sashes and handles share space on the display.  To simplify
-     * processing below, precompute the x and y offsets of the handles and
-     * sashes within the space occupied by their combination; later, just add
-     * those offsets blindly (avoiding the extra showHandle, etc, checks).
+     * Sashes and handles share space on the display. To simplify processing
+     * below, precompute the x and y offsets of the handles and sashes within
+     * the space occupied by their combination; later, just add those offsets
+     * blindly (avoiding the extra showHandle, etc, checks).
      */
 
     sashOffset = handleOffset = pwPtr->sashPad;
@@ -2067,6 +2135,10 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
     for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
 	slavePtr = pwPtr->slaves[i];
 
+	if (slavePtr->hide) {
+	    continue;
+	}
+
 	/*
 	 * First set the coordinates for the top left corner of the slave's
 	 * parcel.
@@ -2076,9 +2148,9 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
 	slavePtr->y = y;
 
 	/*
-	 * Make sure the pane's paned dimension is at least minsize.
-	 * This check may be redundant, since the only way to change a pane's
-	 * size is by moving a sash, and that code checks the minsize.
+	 * Make sure the pane's paned dimension is at least minsize. This
+	 * check may be redundant, since the only way to change a pane's size
+	 * is by moving a sash, and that code checks the minsize.
 	 */
 
 	if (horizontal) {
@@ -2098,15 +2170,15 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
 
 	if (horizontal) {
 	    x += slavePtr->paneWidth + (2 * slavePtr->padx);
-	    slavePtr->sashx   = x + sashOffset;
-	    slavePtr->sashy   = y;
+	    slavePtr->sashx = x + sashOffset;
+	    slavePtr->sashy = y;
 	    slavePtr->handlex = x + handleOffset;
 	    slavePtr->handley = y + pwPtr->handlePad;
 	    x += sashWidth;
 	} else {
 	    y += slavePtr->paneHeight + (2 * slavePtr->pady);
-	    slavePtr->sashx   = x;
-	    slavePtr->sashy   = y + sashOffset;
+	    slavePtr->sashx = x;
+	    slavePtr->sashy = y + sashOffset;
 	    slavePtr->handlex = x + pwPtr->handlePad;
 	    slavePtr->handley = y + handleOffset;
 	    y += sashWidth;
@@ -2118,7 +2190,6 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
 	 */
 
 	if (horizontal) {
-
 	    /*
 	     * If the slave has an explicit height set, use that; otherwise,
 	     * use the slave's requested height.
@@ -2135,10 +2206,9 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
 		reqHeight = dim;
 	    }
 	} else {
-
 	    /*
-	     * If the slave has an explicit width set use that; otherwise,
-	     * use the slave's requested width.
+	     * If the slave has an explicit width set use that; otherwise, use
+	     * the slave's requested width.
 	     */
 
 	    if (slavePtr->width > 0) {
@@ -2155,21 +2225,21 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The loop above should have left x (or y) equal to the sum of the
-     * widths (or heights) of the widgets, plus the size of one sash and
-     * the sash padding for each widget, plus the width of the left (or top)
-     * border of the paned window.
+     * The loop above should have left x (or y) equal to the sum of the widths
+     * (or heights) of the widgets, plus the size of one sash and the sash
+     * padding for each widget, plus the width of the left (or top) border of
+     * the paned window.
      *
      * The requested width (or height) is therefore x (or y) minus the size of
-     * one sash and padding, plus the width of the right (or bottom) border
-     * of the paned window.
+     * one sash and padding, plus the width of the right (or bottom) border of
+     * the paned window.
      *
-     * The height (or width) is equal to the maximum height (or width) of
-     * the slaves, plus the width of the border of the top and bottom (or left
-     * and right) of the paned window.
+     * The height (or width) is equal to the maximum height (or width) of the
+     * slaves, plus the width of the border of the top and bottom (or left and
+     * right) of the paned window.
      *
-     * If the panedwindow has an explicit width/height set use that; otherwise,
-     * use the requested width/height.
+     * If the panedwindow has an explicit width/height set use that;
+     * otherwise, use the requested width/height.
      */
 
     if (horizontal) {
@@ -2195,8 +2265,8 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
  *
  * DestroyOptionTables --
  *
- *	This procedure is registered as an exit callback when the paned window
- *	command is first called.  It cleans up the OptionTables structure
+ *	This function is registered as an exit callback when the paned window
+ *	command is first called. It cleans up the OptionTables structure
  *	allocated by that command.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -2209,9 +2279,9 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyOptionTables(clientData, interp)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to the OptionTables struct */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Pointer to the calling interp */
+DestroyOptionTables(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to the OptionTables struct */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Pointer to the calling interp */
 {
     ckfree((char *)clientData);
     return;
@@ -2222,8 +2292,8 @@ DestroyOptionTables(clientData, interp)
  *
  * GetSticky -
  *
- *	Converts an internal boolean combination of "sticky" bits into a
- *	a Tcl string obj containing zero or mor of n, s, e, or w.
+ *	Converts an internal boolean combination of "sticky" bits into a Tcl
+ *	string obj containing zero or more of n, s, e, or w.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Tcl_Obj containing the string representation of the sticky value.
@@ -2235,11 +2305,11 @@ DestroyOptionTables(clientData, interp)
  */
 
 static Tcl_Obj *
-GetSticky(clientData, tkwin, recordPtr, internalOffset)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to widget record. */
-    int internalOffset;		/* Offset within *recordPtr containing the
+GetSticky(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    char *recordPtr,		/* Pointer to widget record. */
+    int internalOffset)		/* Offset within *recordPtr containing the
 				 * sticky value. */
 {
     int sticky = *(int *)(recordPtr + internalOffset);
@@ -2247,16 +2317,16 @@ GetSticky(clientData, tkwin, recordPtr, internalOffset)
     int count = 0;
 
     if (sticky & STICK_NORTH) {
-    	buffer[count++] = 'n';
+	buffer[count++] = 'n';
     }
     if (sticky & STICK_EAST) {
-    	buffer[count++] = 'e';
+	buffer[count++] = 'e';
     }
     if (sticky & STICK_SOUTH) {
-    	buffer[count++] = 's';
+	buffer[count++] = 's';
     }
     if (sticky & STICK_WEST) {
-    	buffer[count++] = 'w';
+	buffer[count++] = 'w';
     }
     buffer[count] = '\0';
 
@@ -2268,64 +2338,70 @@ GetSticky(clientData, tkwin, recordPtr, internalOffset)
  *
  * SetSticky --
  *
- *	Converts a Tcl_Obj representing a widgets stickyness into an
- *	integer value.
+ *	Converts a Tcl_Obj representing a widgets stickyness into an integer
+ *	value.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	May store the integer value into the internal representation
- *	pointer.  May change the pointer to the Tcl_Obj to NULL to indicate
- *	that the specified string was empty and that is acceptable.
+ *	May store the integer value into the internal representation pointer.
+ *	May change the pointer to the Tcl_Obj to NULL to indicate that the
+ *	specified string was empty and that is acceptable.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-SetSticky(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, internalOffset,
-	oldInternalPtr, flags)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interp; may be used for errors. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which option is being set. */
-    Tcl_Obj **value;		/* Pointer to the pointer to the value object.
-				 * We use a pointer to the pointer because
-				 * we may need to return a value (NULL). */
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to storage for the widget record. */
-    int internalOffset;		/* Offset within *recordPtr at which the
-				   internal value is to be stored. */
-    char *oldInternalPtr;	/* Pointer to storage for the old value. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags for the option, set Tk_SetOptions. */
+SetSticky(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interp; may be used for errors. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window for which option is being set. */
+    Tcl_Obj **value,		/* Pointer to the pointer to the value object.
+				 * We use a pointer to the pointer because we
+				 * may need to return a value (NULL). */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* Pointer to storage for the widget record. */
+    int internalOffset,		/* Offset within *recordPtr at which the
+				 * internal value is to be stored. */
+    char *oldInternalPtr,	/* Pointer to storage for the old value. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags for the option, set Tk_SetOptions. */
 {
     int sticky = 0;
     char c, *string, *internalPtr;
 
     internalPtr = ComputeSlotAddress(recordPtr, internalOffset);
-    
+
     if (flags & TK_OPTION_NULL_OK && ObjectIsEmpty(*value)) {
 	*value = NULL;
     } else {
 	/*
 	 * Convert the sticky specifier into an integer value.
 	 */
-	
+
 	string = Tcl_GetString(*value);
-    
+
 	while ((c = *string++) != '\0') {
 	    switch (c) {
-		case 'n': case 'N': sticky |= STICK_NORTH; break;
-		case 'e': case 'E': sticky |= STICK_EAST;  break;
-		case 's': case 'S': sticky |= STICK_SOUTH; break;
-		case 'w': case 'W': sticky |= STICK_WEST;  break;
-		case ' ': case ',': case '\t': case '\r': case '\n': break;
-		default: {
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad stickyness value \"",
-			    Tcl_GetString(*value), "\": must be a string ",
-			    "containing zero or more of n, e, s, and w",
-			    (char *)NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
+	    case 'n': case 'N':
+		sticky |= STICK_NORTH;
+		break;
+	    case 'e': case 'E':
+		sticky |= STICK_EAST;
+		break;
+	    case 's': case 'S':
+		sticky |= STICK_SOUTH;
+		break;
+	    case 'w': case 'W':
+		sticky |= STICK_WEST;
+		break;
+	    case ' ': case ',': case '\t': case '\r': case '\n':
+		break;
+	    default:
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad stickyness value \"",
+			Tcl_GetString(*value), "\": must be a string ",
+			"containing zero or more of n, e, s, and w", NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
     }
@@ -2335,7 +2411,7 @@ SetSticky(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, internalOffset,
 	*((int *) internalPtr) = sticky;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
-}		
+}
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -2354,11 +2430,11 @@ SetSticky(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, internalOffset,
  */
 
 static void
-RestoreSticky(clientData, tkwin, internalPtr, oldInternalPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    char *internalPtr;		/* Pointer to storage for value. */
-    char *oldInternalPtr;	/* Pointer to old value. */
+RestoreSticky(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    char *internalPtr,		/* Pointer to storage for value. */
+    char *oldInternalPtr)	/* Pointer to old value. */
 {
     *(int *)internalPtr = *(int *)oldInternalPtr;
 }
@@ -2368,14 +2444,13 @@ RestoreSticky(clientData, tkwin, internalPtr, oldInternalPtr)
  *
  * AdjustForSticky --
  *
- *	Given the x,y coords of the top-left corner of a pane, the
- *	dimensions of that pane, and the dimensions of a slave, compute
- *	the x,y coords and actual dimensions of the slave based on the slave's
- *	sticky value.
+ *	Given the x,y coords of the top-left corner of a pane, the dimensions
+ *	of that pane, and the dimensions of a slave, compute the x,y coords
+ *	and actual dimensions of the slave based on the slave's sticky value.
  *
  * Results:
- *	No direct return; sets the x, y, slaveWidth and slaveHeight to
- *	correct values.
+ *	No direct return; sets the x, y, slaveWidth and slaveHeight to correct
+ *	values.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2384,19 +2459,19 @@ RestoreSticky(clientData, tkwin, internalPtr, oldInternalPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-AdjustForSticky(sticky, cavityWidth, cavityHeight, xPtr, yPtr,
-	slaveWidthPtr, slaveHeightPtr)
-    int sticky;		/* Sticky value; see top of file for definition. */
-    int cavityWidth;	/* Width of the cavity. */
-    int cavityHeight;	/* Height of the cavity. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;		/* Initially, coordinates of the top-left
+AdjustForSticky(
+    int sticky,			/* Sticky value; see top of file for
+				 * definition. */
+    int cavityWidth,		/* Width of the cavity. */
+    int cavityHeight,		/* Height of the cavity. */
+    int *xPtr, int *yPtr,	/* Initially, coordinates of the top-left
 				 * corner of cavity; also return values for
 				 * actual x, y coords of slave. */
-    int *slaveWidthPtr;		/* Slave width. */
-    int *slaveHeightPtr;	/* Slave height. */
+    int *slaveWidthPtr,		/* Slave width. */
+    int *slaveHeightPtr)	/* Slave height. */
 {
-    int diffx=0;	/* Cavity width - slave width. */
-    int diffy=0;	/* Cavity hight - slave height. */
+    int diffx = 0;		/* Cavity width - slave width. */
+    int diffy = 0;		/* Cavity hight - slave height. */
 
     if (cavityWidth > *slaveWidthPtr) {
 	diffx = cavityWidth - *slaveWidthPtr;
@@ -2413,10 +2488,10 @@ AdjustForSticky(sticky, cavityWidth, cavityHeight, xPtr, yPtr,
 	*slaveHeightPtr += diffy;
     }
     if (!(sticky & STICK_WEST)) {
-    	*xPtr += (sticky & STICK_EAST) ? diffx : diffx/2;
+	*xPtr += (sticky & STICK_EAST) ? diffx : diffx/2;
     }
     if (!(sticky & STICK_NORTH)) {
-    	*yPtr += (sticky & STICK_SOUTH) ? diffy : diffy/2;
+	*yPtr += (sticky & STICK_SOUTH) ? diffy : diffy/2;
     }
 }
 
@@ -2437,17 +2512,17 @@ AdjustForSticky(sticky, cavityWidth, cavityHeight, xPtr, yPtr,
  */
 
 static void
-MoveSash(pwPtr, sash, diff)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;
-    int sash;
-    int diff;
+MoveSash(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr,
+    int sash,
+    int diff)
 {
     int i;
     int expandPane, reduceFirst, reduceLast, reduceIncr, slaveSize, sashOffset;
     Slave *slavePtr;
     int stretchReserve = 0;
     int nextSash = sash + 1;
-    CONST int horizontal = (pwPtr->orient == ORIENT_HORIZONTAL);
+    const int horizontal = (pwPtr->orient == ORIENT_HORIZONTAL);
 
     if (diff == 0)
 	return;
@@ -2464,6 +2539,9 @@ MoveSash(pwPtr, sash, diff)
     }
     for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
 	slavePtr = pwPtr->slaves[i];
+	if (slavePtr->hide) {
+	    continue;
+	}
 	if (horizontal) {
 	    slavePtr->paneWidth = slavePtr->width = slavePtr->sashx
 		    - sashOffset - slavePtr->x - (2 * slavePtr->padx);
@@ -2474,6 +2552,16 @@ MoveSash(pwPtr, sash, diff)
     }
 
     /*
+     * There must be a next sash since it is only possible to enter this
+     * routine when moving an actual sash which implies there exists a visible
+     * pane to either side of the sash.
+     */
+
+    while (nextSash < pwPtr->numSlaves-1 && pwPtr->slaves[nextSash]->hide) {
+	nextSash++;
+    }
+
+    /*
      * Consolidate +/-diff variables to reduce duplicate code.
      */
 
@@ -2491,12 +2579,15 @@ MoveSash(pwPtr, sash, diff)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Calculate how much room we have to stretch in
-     * and adjust diff value accordingly.
+     * Calculate how much room we have to stretch in and adjust diff value
+     * accordingly.
      */
 
     for (i = reduceFirst; i != reduceLast; i += reduceIncr) {
 	slavePtr = pwPtr->slaves[i];
+	if (slavePtr->hide) {
+	    continue;
+	}
 	if (horizontal) {
 	    stretchReserve += slavePtr->width - slavePtr->minSize;
 	} else {
@@ -2527,6 +2618,9 @@ MoveSash(pwPtr, sash, diff)
 
     for (i = reduceFirst; i != reduceLast; i += reduceIncr) {
 	slavePtr = pwPtr->slaves[i];
+	if (slavePtr->hide) {
+	    continue;
+	}
 	if (horizontal) {
 	    slaveSize = slavePtr->width;
 	} else {
@@ -2552,23 +2646,23 @@ MoveSash(pwPtr, sash, diff)
  *
  * ProxyWindowEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on paned window proxy windows.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	paned window proxy windows.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up. Whena
+ *	it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ProxyWindowEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+ProxyWindowEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) clientData;
 
@@ -2585,9 +2679,9 @@ ProxyWindowEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * DisplayProxyWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws a paned window proxy window.
- *	It is invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs
- *	when there's nothing else for the application to do.
+ *	This function redraws a paned window proxy window. It is invoked as a
+ *	do-when-idle handler, so it only runs when there's nothing else for
+ *	the application to do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2599,8 +2693,8 @@ ProxyWindowEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayProxyWindow(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
+DisplayProxyWindow(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about window. */
 {
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) clientData;
     Pixmap pixmap;
@@ -2624,6 +2718,7 @@ DisplayProxyWindow(clientData)
     /*
      * Redraw the widget's background and border.
      */
+
     Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, pwPtr->background, 0, 0,
 	    Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), 2, pwPtr->sashRelief);
 
@@ -2631,9 +2726,9 @@ DisplayProxyWindow(clientData)
     /*
      * Copy the pixmap to the display.
      */
-    XCopyArea(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), pwPtr->gc,
-	    0, 0, (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin), (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin),
-	    0, 0);
+
+    XCopyArea(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), pwPtr->gc, 0, 0,
+	    (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin), (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, 0);
     Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap);
 #endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
 }
@@ -2643,8 +2738,8 @@ DisplayProxyWindow(clientData)
  *
  * PanedWindowProxyCommand --
  *
- *	Handles the panedwindow proxy subcommand.  See the user
- *	documentation for details.
+ *	Handles the panedwindow proxy subcommand. See the user documentation
+ *	for details.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
@@ -2656,18 +2751,21 @@ DisplayProxyWindow(clientData)
  */
 
 static int
-PanedWindowProxyCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;		/* Pointer to paned window information. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+PanedWindowProxyCommand(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr,		/* Pointer to paned window information. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    static CONST char *optionStrings[] = { "coord", "forget", "place",
-					 (char *) NULL };
-    enum options { PROXY_COORD, PROXY_FORGET, PROXY_PLACE };
+    static const char *optionStrings[] = {
+	"coord", "forget", "place", NULL
+    };
+    enum options {
+	PROXY_COORD, PROXY_FORGET, PROXY_PLACE
+    };
     int index, x, y, sashWidth, sashHeight;
     Tcl_Obj *coords[2];
-    
+
     if (objc < 3) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -2679,85 +2777,92 @@ PanedWindowProxyCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case PROXY_COORD:
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+    case PROXY_COORD:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    coords[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pwPtr->proxyx);
-	    coords[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pwPtr->proxyy);
-	    Tcl_SetListObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), 2, coords);
-	    break;
+	coords[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pwPtr->proxyx);
+	coords[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pwPtr->proxyy);
+	Tcl_SetListObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), 2, coords);
+	break;
 
-	case PROXY_FORGET:
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (Tk_IsMapped(pwPtr->proxywin)) {
-		Tk_UnmapWindow(pwPtr->proxywin);
-		Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(pwPtr->proxywin, pwPtr->tkwin);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case PROXY_FORGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (Tk_IsMapped(pwPtr->proxywin)) {
+	    Tk_UnmapWindow(pwPtr->proxywin);
+	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(pwPtr->proxywin, pwPtr->tkwin);
+	}
+	break;
 
-	case PROXY_PLACE: {
-	    if (objc != 5) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "x y");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+    case PROXY_PLACE:
+	if (objc != 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "x y");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &y) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &y) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    if (pwPtr->orient == ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
-		if (x < 0) {
-		    x = 0;
-		}
-		y = Tk_InternalBorderWidth(pwPtr->tkwin);
-		sashWidth = pwPtr->sashWidth;
-		sashHeight = Tk_Height(pwPtr->tkwin) -
-		    (2 * Tk_InternalBorderWidth(pwPtr->tkwin));
-	    } else {
-		if (y < 0) {
-		    y = 0;
-		}
-		x = Tk_InternalBorderWidth(pwPtr->tkwin);
-		sashHeight = pwPtr->sashWidth;
-		sashWidth = Tk_Width(pwPtr->tkwin) -
+	if (pwPtr->orient == ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	    if (x < 0) {
+		x = 0;
+	    }
+	    y = Tk_InternalBorderWidth(pwPtr->tkwin);
+	    sashWidth = pwPtr->sashWidth;
+	    sashHeight = Tk_Height(pwPtr->tkwin) -
 		    (2 * Tk_InternalBorderWidth(pwPtr->tkwin));
+	} else {
+	    if (y < 0) {
+		y = 0;
 	    }
+	    x = Tk_InternalBorderWidth(pwPtr->tkwin);
+	    sashHeight = pwPtr->sashWidth;
+	    sashWidth = Tk_Width(pwPtr->tkwin) -
+		    (2 * Tk_InternalBorderWidth(pwPtr->tkwin));
+	}
 
-	    /*
-	     * Stash the proxy coordinates for future "proxy coord" calls.
-	     */
+        if (sashWidth < 1) {
+            sashWidth = 1;
+        }
+        if (sashHeight < 1) {
+            sashHeight = 1;
+        }
 
-	    pwPtr->proxyx = x;
-	    pwPtr->proxyy = y;
-	    
-	    /*
-	     * Make sure the proxy window is higher in the stacking order
-	     * than the slaves, so that it will be visible when drawn.
-	     * It would be more correct to push the proxy window just high
-	     * enough to appear above the highest slave, but it's much easier
-	     * to just force it all the way to the top of the stacking order.
-	     */
-	    
-	    Tk_RestackWindow(pwPtr->proxywin, Above, NULL);
-	    
-	    /*
-	     * Let Tk_MaintainGeometry take care of placing the window at
-	     * the right coordinates.
-	     */
-	    Tk_MaintainGeometry(pwPtr->proxywin, pwPtr->tkwin,
-		    x, y, sashWidth, sashHeight);
-	    break;
-	}
+	/*
+	 * Stash the proxy coordinates for future "proxy coord" calls.
+	 */
+
+	pwPtr->proxyx = x;
+	pwPtr->proxyy = y;
+
+	/*
+	 * Make sure the proxy window is higher in the stacking order than the
+	 * slaves, so that it will be visible when drawn. It would be more
+	 * correct to push the proxy window just high enough to appear above
+	 * the highest slave, but it's much easier to just force it all the
+	 * way to the top of the stacking order.
+	 */
+
+	Tk_RestackWindow(pwPtr->proxywin, Above, NULL);
+
+	/*
+	 * Let Tk_MaintainGeometry take care of placing the window at the
+	 * right coordinates.
+	 */
+
+	Tk_MaintainGeometry(pwPtr->proxywin, pwPtr->tkwin, x, y,
+		sashWidth, sashHeight);
+	break;
     }
 
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -2768,12 +2873,11 @@ PanedWindowProxyCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ObjectIsEmpty --
  *
- *	This procedure tests whether the string value of an object is
- *	empty.
+ *	This function tests whether the string value of an object is empty.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if the string value of objPtr has length
- *	zero, and 0 otherwise.
+ *	The return value is 1 if the string value of objPtr has length zero,
+ *	and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	May cause object shimmering, since this function can force a
@@ -2783,8 +2887,8 @@ PanedWindowProxyCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-ObjectIsEmpty(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object to test.  May be NULL. */
+ObjectIsEmpty(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Object to test. May be NULL. */
 {
     int length;
 
@@ -2807,8 +2911,8 @@ ObjectIsEmpty(objPtr)
  *	within that record, compute the address of that slot.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If offset is non-negative, returns the computed address; else,
- *	returns NULL.
+ *	If offset is non-negative, returns the computed address; else, returns
+ *	NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2817,9 +2921,9 @@ ObjectIsEmpty(objPtr)
  */
 
 static char *
-ComputeSlotAddress(recordPtr, offset)
-    char *recordPtr;	/* Pointer to the start of a record. */
-    int offset;		/* Offset of a slot within that record; may be < 0. */
+ComputeSlotAddress(
+    char *recordPtr,	/* Pointer to the start of a record. */
+    int offset)		/* Offset of a slot within that record; may be < 0. */
 {
     if (offset >= 0) {
 	return recordPtr + offset;
@@ -2833,25 +2937,25 @@ ComputeSlotAddress(recordPtr, offset)
  *
  * PanedWindowIdentifyCoords --
  *
- *	Given a pair of x,y coordinates, identify the panedwindow component
- *	at that point, if any.
+ *	Given a pair of x,y coordinates, identify the panedwindow component at
+ *	that point, if any.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Modifies the interpreter's result to contain either an empty list,
- *	or a two element list of the form {sash n} or {handle n} to indicate
- *	that the point lies within the n'th sash or handle.
+ *	Modifies the interpreter's result to contain either an empty list, or
+ *	a two element list of the form {sash n} or {handle n} to indicate that
+ *	the point lies within the n'th sash or handle.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(pwPtr, interp, x, y)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;		/* Information about the widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which to store result. */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of the point to identify. */
+PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr,		/* Information about the widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter in which to store result. */
+    int x, int y)		/* Coordinates of the point to identify. */
 {
     Tcl_Obj *list;
     int i, sashHeight, sashWidth, thisx, thisy;
@@ -2860,45 +2964,48 @@ PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(pwPtr, interp, x, y)
 
     if (pwPtr->orient == ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
 	if (Tk_IsMapped(pwPtr->tkwin)) {
-	    sashHeight	= Tk_Height(pwPtr->tkwin);
+	    sashHeight = Tk_Height(pwPtr->tkwin);
 	} else {
-	    sashHeight	= Tk_ReqHeight(pwPtr->tkwin);
+	    sashHeight = Tk_ReqHeight(pwPtr->tkwin);
 	}
-	sashHeight	-= 2 * Tk_InternalBorderWidth(pwPtr->tkwin);
+	sashHeight -= 2 * Tk_InternalBorderWidth(pwPtr->tkwin);
 	if (pwPtr->showHandle && pwPtr->handleSize > pwPtr->sashWidth) {
-	    sashWidth	= pwPtr->handleSize;
-	    lpad	= (pwPtr->handleSize - pwPtr->sashWidth) / 2;
-	    rpad	= pwPtr->handleSize - lpad;
-	    lpad	+= pwPtr->sashPad;
-	    rpad	+= pwPtr->sashPad;
+	    sashWidth = pwPtr->handleSize;
+	    lpad = (pwPtr->handleSize - pwPtr->sashWidth) / 2;
+	    rpad = pwPtr->handleSize - lpad;
+	    lpad += pwPtr->sashPad;
+	    rpad += pwPtr->sashPad;
 	} else {
-	    sashWidth	= pwPtr->sashWidth;
+	    sashWidth = pwPtr->sashWidth;
 	    lpad = rpad = pwPtr->sashPad;
 	}
-	tpad = bpad	= 0;
+	tpad = bpad = 0;
     } else {
 	if (pwPtr->showHandle && pwPtr->handleSize > pwPtr->sashWidth) {
-	    sashHeight	= pwPtr->handleSize;
-	    tpad	= (pwPtr->handleSize - pwPtr->sashWidth) / 2;
-	    bpad	= pwPtr->handleSize - tpad;
-	    tpad	+= pwPtr->sashPad;
-	    bpad	+= pwPtr->sashPad;
+	    sashHeight = pwPtr->handleSize;
+	    tpad = (pwPtr->handleSize - pwPtr->sashWidth) / 2;
+	    bpad = pwPtr->handleSize - tpad;
+	    tpad += pwPtr->sashPad;
+	    bpad += pwPtr->sashPad;
 	} else {
-	    sashHeight	= pwPtr->sashWidth;
+	    sashHeight = pwPtr->sashWidth;
 	    tpad = bpad = pwPtr->sashPad;
 	}
 	if (Tk_IsMapped(pwPtr->tkwin)) {
-	    sashWidth	= Tk_Width(pwPtr->tkwin);
+	    sashWidth = Tk_Width(pwPtr->tkwin);
 	} else {
-	    sashWidth	= Tk_ReqWidth(pwPtr->tkwin);
+	    sashWidth = Tk_ReqWidth(pwPtr->tkwin);
 	}
-	sashWidth	-= 2 * Tk_InternalBorderWidth(pwPtr->tkwin);
-	lpad = rpad	= 0;
+	sashWidth -= 2 * Tk_InternalBorderWidth(pwPtr->tkwin);
+	lpad = rpad = 0;
     }
-    
+
     isHandle = 0;
     found = -1;
     for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves - 1; i++) {
+	if (pwPtr->slaves[i]->hide) {
+	    continue;
+	}
 	thisx = pwPtr->slaves[i]->sashx;
 	thisy = pwPtr->slaves[i]->sashy;
 
@@ -2909,6 +3016,7 @@ PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(pwPtr, interp, x, y)
 	    /*
 	     * Determine if the point is over the handle or the sash.
 	     */
+
 	    if (pwPtr->showHandle) {
 		thisx = pwPtr->slaves[i]->handlex;
 		thisy = pwPtr->slaves[i]->handley;
@@ -2929,17 +3037,21 @@ PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(pwPtr, interp, x, y)
     /*
      * Set results.
      */
+
     if (found != -1) {
 	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, list, Tcl_NewIntObj(found));
-	if (isHandle) {
-	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, list,
-		    Tcl_NewStringObj("handle", -1));
-	} else {
-	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, list,
-		    Tcl_NewStringObj("sash", -1));
-	}
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, list, Tcl_NewStringObj(
+		(isHandle ? "handle" : "sash"), -1));
     }
-    
+
     Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, list);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkPlace.c b/generic/tkPlace.c
index 4c7f0f4..2f527ba 100644
--- a/generic/tkPlace.c
+++ b/generic/tkPlace.c
@@ -1,85 +1,86 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkPlace.c --
  *
- *	This file contains code to implement a simple geometry manager
- *	for Tk based on absolute placement or "rubber-sheet" placement.
+ *	This file contains code to implement a simple geometry manager for Tk
+ *	based on absolute placement or "rubber-sheet" placement.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
-
 /*
  * Border modes for relative placement:
  *
- * BM_INSIDE:		relative distances computed using area inside
- *			all borders of master window.
- * BM_OUTSIDE:		relative distances computed using outside area
- *			that includes all borders of master.
- * BM_IGNORE:		border issues are ignored:  place relative to
- *			master's actual window size.
+ * BM_INSIDE:		relative distances computed using area inside all
+ *			borders of master window.
+ * BM_OUTSIDE:		relative distances computed using outside area that
+ *			includes all borders of master.
+ * BM_IGNORE:		border issues are ignored: place relative to master's
+ *			actual window size.
  */
 
 static CONST char *borderModeStrings[] = {
-    "inside", "outside", "ignore", (char *) NULL
+    "inside", "outside", "ignore", NULL
 };
 
 typedef enum {BM_INSIDE, BM_OUTSIDE, BM_IGNORE} BorderMode;
 
 /*
- * For each window whose geometry is managed by the placer there is
- * a structure of the following type:
+ * For each window whose geometry is managed by the placer there is a
+ * structure of the following type:
  */
 
 typedef struct Slave {
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's token for window. */
     Tk_Window inTkwin;		/* Token for the -in window. */
-    struct Master *masterPtr;	/* Pointer to information for window
-				 * relative to which tkwin is placed.
-				 * This isn't necessarily the logical
-				 * parent of tkwin.  NULL means the
-				 * master was deleted or never assigned. */
-    struct Slave *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of windows placed relative
-				 * to same master (NULL for end of list). */
+    struct Master *masterPtr;	/* Pointer to information for window relative
+				 * to which tkwin is placed. This isn't
+				 * necessarily the logical parent of tkwin.
+				 * NULL means the master was deleted or never
+				 * assigned. */
+    struct Slave *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of windows placed relative to
+				 * same master (NULL for end of list). */
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Table that defines configuration options
 				 * available for this command. */
     /*
-     * Geometry information for window;  where there are both relative
-     * and absolute values for the same attribute (e.g. x and relX) only
-     * one of them is actually used, depending on flags.
+     * Geometry information for window; where there are both relative and
+     * absolute values for the same attribute (e.g. x and relX) only one of
+     * them is actually used, depending on flags.
      */
 
     int x, y;			/* X and Y pixel coordinates for tkwin. */
-    Tcl_Obj *xPtr, *yPtr;	/* Tcl_Obj rep's of x, y coords, to keep
-				 * pixel spec. information */
+    Tcl_Obj *xPtr, *yPtr;	/* Tcl_Obj rep's of x, y coords, to keep pixel
+				 * spec. information. */
     double relX, relY;		/* X and Y coordinates relative to size of
 				 * master. */
     int width, height;		/* Absolute dimensions for tkwin. */
-    Tcl_Obj *widthPtr;		/* Tcl_Obj rep of width, to keep pixel spec */
-    Tcl_Obj *heightPtr;		/* Tcl_Obj rep of height, to keep pixel spec */
+    Tcl_Obj *widthPtr;		/* Tcl_Obj rep of width, to keep pixel
+				 * spec. */
+    Tcl_Obj *heightPtr;		/* Tcl_Obj rep of height, to keep pixel
+				 * spec. */
     double relWidth, relHeight;	/* Dimensions for tkwin relative to size of
 				 * master. */
     Tcl_Obj *relWidthPtr;
     Tcl_Obj *relHeightPtr;
-    Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Which point on tkwin is placed at the
-				 * given position. */
+    Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Which point on tkwin is placed at the given
+				 * position. */
     BorderMode borderMode;	/* How to treat borders of master window. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flags;  see below for bit
+    int flags;			/* Various flags; see below for bit
 				 * definitions. */
 } Slave;
 
 /*
  * Type masks for options:
  */
+
 #define IN_MASK		1
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", NULL, NULL, "nw", -1,
 	 Tk_Offset(Slave, anchor), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-bordermode", NULL, NULL, "inside", -1,
@@ -104,10 +105,9 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
 	 Tk_Offset(Slave, x), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-y", NULL, NULL, "0", Tk_Offset(Slave, yPtr),
 	 Tk_Offset(Slave, y), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	 (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
 };
-	
+
 /*
  * Flag definitions for Slave structures:
  *
@@ -123,14 +123,14 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
 #define CHILD_REL_HEIGHT	8
 
 /*
- * For each master window that has a slave managed by the placer there
- * is a structure of the following form:
+ * For each master window that has a slave managed by the placer there is a
+ * structure of the following form:
  */
 
 typedef struct Master {
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's token for master window. */
-    struct Slave *slavePtr;	/* First in linked list of slaves
-				 * placed relative to this master. */
+    struct Slave *slavePtr;	/* First in linked list of slaves placed
+				 * relative to this master. */
     int *abortPtr;		/* If non-NULL, it means that there is a nested
 				 * call to RecomputePlacement already working on
 				 * this window.  *abortPtr may be set to 1 to
@@ -143,58 +143,54 @@ typedef struct Master {
 /*
  * Flag definitions for masters:
  *
- * PARENT_RECONFIG_PENDING -	1 means that a call to RecomputePlacement
- *				is already pending via a Do_When_Idle handler.
+ * PARENT_RECONFIG_PENDING -	1 means that a call to RecomputePlacement is
+ *				already pending via a Do_When_Idle handler.
  */
 
 #define PARENT_RECONFIG_PENDING	1
 
 /*
- * The following structure is the official type record for the
- * placer:
+ * The following structure is the official type record for the placer:
  */
 
-static void		PlaceRequestProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		PlaceLostSlaveProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
+static void		PlaceRequestProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		PlaceLostSlaveProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
 
-static Tk_GeomMgr placerType = {
-    "place",				/* name */
-    PlaceRequestProc,			/* requestProc */
-    PlaceLostSlaveProc,			/* lostSlaveProc */
+static const Tk_GeomMgr placerType = {
+    "place",			/* name */
+    PlaceRequestProc,		/* requestProc */
+    PlaceLostSlaveProc,		/* lostSlaveProc */
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		SlaveStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int		ConfigureSlave _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_OptionTable table,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		PlaceInfoCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static Slave *		CreateSlave _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    Tk_OptionTable table));
-static void             FreeSlave _ANSI_ARGS_((Slave *slavePtr));
-static Slave *		FindSlave _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-static Master *		CreateMaster _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-static Master *		FindMaster _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		MasterStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		RecomputePlacement _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		UnlinkSlave _ANSI_ARGS_((Slave *slavePtr));
+static void		SlaveStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		ConfigureSlave(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tk_OptionTable table, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		PlaceInfoCommand(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static Slave *		CreateSlave(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_OptionTable table);
+static void		FreeSlave(Slave *slavePtr);
+static Slave *		FindSlave(Tk_Window tkwin);
+static Master *		CreateMaster(Tk_Window tkwin);
+static Master *		FindMaster(Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		MasterStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		RecomputePlacement(ClientData clientData);
+static void		UnlinkSlave(Slave *slavePtr);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_PlaceObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "place" Tcl
- *	commands.  See the user documentation for details on
- *	what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "place" Tcl commands. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -206,11 +202,11 @@ static void		UnlinkSlave _ANSI_ARGS_((Slave *slavePtr));
  */
 
 int
-Tk_PlaceObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_PlaceObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     Slave *slavePtr;
@@ -218,23 +214,22 @@ Tk_PlaceObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
-	"configure", "forget", "info", "slaves", (char *) NULL
+	"configure", "forget", "info", "slaves", NULL
     };
     enum options { PLACE_CONFIGURE, PLACE_FORGET, PLACE_INFO, PLACE_SLAVES };
     int index;
-    
-    
+
     if (objc < 3) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option|pathName args");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has already
-     * been created, the cached pointer will be returned.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, the cached pointer will be returned.
      */
 
-    optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
+     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
 
     /*
      * Handle special shortcut where window name is first argument.
@@ -262,8 +257,8 @@ Tk_PlaceObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Handle more general case of option followed by window name followed
-     * by possible additional arguments.
+     * Handle more general case of option followed by window name followed by
+     * possible additional arguments.
      */
 
     tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
@@ -289,81 +284,74 @@ Tk_PlaceObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case PLACE_CONFIGURE: {
+    case PLACE_CONFIGURE:
+	if (objc == 3 || objc == 4) {
 	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
-	    if (objc == 3 || objc == 4) {
-		slavePtr = FindSlave(tkwin);
-		if (slavePtr == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_OK;
-		}
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) slavePtr,
-			optionTable,
-			(objc == 4) ? objv[3] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL, tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		    return TCL_OK;
-		}
-	    } else {
-		return ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, optionTable, objc-3,
-			objv+3);
-	    }
-	}
-	
-	case PLACE_FORGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pathName");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+
 	    slavePtr = FindSlave(tkwin);
 	    if (slavePtr == NULL) {
 		return TCL_OK;
 	    }
-	    if ((slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL) &&
-		    (slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin !=
-			    Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin))) {
-		Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin,
-			slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin);
-	    }
-	    UnlinkSlave(slavePtr);
-	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable,
-		    (char *) tkwin));
-	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
-		    SlaveStructureProc,	(ClientData) slavePtr);
-	    Tk_ManageGeometry(tkwin, (Tk_GeomMgr *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
-	    Tk_UnmapWindow(tkwin);
-	    FreeSlave(slavePtr);
-	    break;
-	}
-	
-	case PLACE_INFO: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pathName");
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) slavePtr, optionTable,
+		    (objc == 4) ? objv[3] : NULL, tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    return PlaceInfoCommand(interp, tkwin);
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
+	return ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, optionTable, objc-3, objv+3);
 
-	case PLACE_SLAVES: {
-	    Master *masterPtr;
-	    Tcl_Obj *listPtr;
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pathName");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    masterPtr = FindMaster(tkwin);
-	    if (masterPtr != NULL) {
-		listPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
-		for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
-		     slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
-		    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listPtr,
-			    Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(slavePtr->tkwin),-1));
-		}
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listPtr);
+    case PLACE_FORGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pathName");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	slavePtr = FindSlave(tkwin);
+	if (slavePtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if ((slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL) &&
+		(slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin))) {
+	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin);
+	}
+	UnlinkSlave(slavePtr);
+	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable,
+		(char *) tkwin));
+	Tk_DeleteEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask, SlaveStructureProc,
+		(ClientData) slavePtr);
+	Tk_ManageGeometry(tkwin, NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+	Tk_UnmapWindow(tkwin);
+	FreeSlave(slavePtr);
+	break;
+
+    case PLACE_INFO:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pathName");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	return PlaceInfoCommand(interp, tkwin);
+
+    case PLACE_SLAVES: {
+	Master *masterPtr;
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pathName");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	masterPtr = FindMaster(tkwin);
+	if (masterPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *listPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
+
+	    for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
+		    slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listPtr,
+			Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(slavePtr->tkwin),-1));
 	    }
-	    break;
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listPtr);
 	}
+	break;
+    }
     }
 
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -374,8 +362,8 @@ Tk_PlaceObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * CreateSlave --
  *
- *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Slave structure corresponding
- *	to that token, creating a new one if necessary.
+ *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Slave structure corresponding to
+ *	that token, creating a new one if necessary.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Pointer to the Slave structure.
@@ -387,34 +375,37 @@ Tk_PlaceObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static Slave *
-CreateSlave(tkwin, table)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for desired slave. */
-    Tk_OptionTable table;
+CreateSlave(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for desired slave. */
+    Tk_OptionTable table)
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     register Slave *slavePtr;
-    int new;
-    TkDisplay * dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
-
-    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable, (char *) tkwin, &new);
-    if (new) {
-	slavePtr = (Slave *) ckalloc(sizeof(Slave));
-	memset(slavePtr, 0, sizeof(Slave));
-	slavePtr->tkwin		= tkwin;
-	slavePtr->inTkwin	= None;
-	slavePtr->anchor	= TK_ANCHOR_NW;
-	slavePtr->borderMode	= BM_INSIDE;
-	slavePtr->optionTable   = table;
-	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, slavePtr);
-	Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask, SlaveStructureProc,
-		(ClientData) slavePtr);
-	Tk_ManageGeometry(tkwin, &placerType, (ClientData) slavePtr);
-    } else {
-	slavePtr = (Slave *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    int isNew;
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
+
+    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable, (char *) tkwin, &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
+	return (Slave *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
     }
+
+    /*
+     * No preexisting slave structure for that window, so make a new one and
+     * populate it with some default values.
+     */
+
+    slavePtr = (Slave *) ckalloc(sizeof(Slave));
+    memset(slavePtr, 0, sizeof(Slave));
+    slavePtr->tkwin = tkwin;
+    slavePtr->inTkwin = None;
+    slavePtr->anchor = TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+    slavePtr->borderMode = BM_INSIDE;
+    slavePtr->optionTable = table;
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, slavePtr);
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask, SlaveStructureProc,
+	    (ClientData) slavePtr);
     return slavePtr;
 }
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -433,22 +424,22 @@ CreateSlave(tkwin, table)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeSlave(Slave *slavePtr)
+FreeSlave(
+    Slave *slavePtr)
 {
     Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) slavePtr, slavePtr->optionTable,
 	    slavePtr->tkwin);
     ckfree((char *) slavePtr);
 }
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * FindSlave --
  *
- *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Slave structure corresponding
- *	to that token.  This is purely a lookup function; it will not
- *	create a record if one does not yet exist.
+ *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Slave structure corresponding to
+ *	that token. This is purely a lookup function; it will not create a
+ *	record if one does not yet exist.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Pointer to Slave structure; NULL if none exists.
@@ -460,12 +451,12 @@ FreeSlave(Slave *slavePtr)
  */
 
 static Slave *
-FindSlave(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for desired slave. */
+FindSlave(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for desired slave. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     register Slave *slavePtr;
-    TkDisplay * dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
     hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable, (char *) tkwin);
     if (hPtr == NULL) {
@@ -480,8 +471,8 @@ FindSlave(tkwin)
  *
  * UnlinkSlave --
  *
- *	This procedure removes a slave window from the chain of slaves
- *	in its master.
+ *	This function removes a slave window from the chain of slaves in its
+ *	master.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -493,8 +484,8 @@ FindSlave(tkwin)
  */
 
 static void
-UnlinkSlave(slavePtr)
-    Slave *slavePtr;		/* Slave structure to be unlinked. */
+UnlinkSlave(
+    Slave *slavePtr)		/* Slave structure to be unlinked. */
 {
     register Master *masterPtr;
     register Slave *prevPtr;
@@ -506,10 +497,9 @@ UnlinkSlave(slavePtr)
     if (masterPtr->slavePtr == slavePtr) {
 	masterPtr->slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr;
     } else {
-	for (prevPtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; ;
-		prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) {
+	for (prevPtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; ; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
-		panic("UnlinkSlave couldn't find slave to unlink");
+		Tcl_Panic("UnlinkSlave couldn't find slave to unlink");
 	    }
 	    if (prevPtr->nextPtr == slavePtr) {
 		prevPtr->nextPtr = slavePtr->nextPtr;
@@ -529,8 +519,8 @@ UnlinkSlave(slavePtr)
  *
  * CreateMaster --
  *
- *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Master structure corresponding
- *	to that token, creating a new one if necessary.
+ *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Master structure corresponding to
+ *	that token, creating a new one if necessary.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Pointer to the Master structure.
@@ -542,21 +532,21 @@ UnlinkSlave(slavePtr)
  */
 
 static Master *
-CreateMaster(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for desired master. */
+CreateMaster(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for desired master. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     register Master *masterPtr;
-    int new;
-    TkDisplay * dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
+    int isNew;
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
-    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->masterTable, (char *) tkwin, &new);
-    if (new) {
+    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->masterTable, (char *) tkwin, &isNew);
+    if (isNew) {
 	masterPtr = (Master *) ckalloc(sizeof(Master));
-	masterPtr->tkwin	= tkwin;
-	masterPtr->slavePtr	= NULL;
-	masterPtr->abortPtr	= NULL;
-	masterPtr->flags	= 0;
+	masterPtr->tkwin = tkwin;
+	masterPtr->slavePtr = NULL;
+	masterPtr->abortPtr = NULL;
+	masterPtr->flags = 0;
 	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, masterPtr);
 	Tk_CreateEventHandler(masterPtr->tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
 		MasterStructureProc, (ClientData) masterPtr);
@@ -571,13 +561,13 @@ CreateMaster(tkwin)
  *
  * FindMaster --
  *
- *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Master structure corresponding
- *	to that token.  This is simply a lookup procedure; a new record
- *	will not be created if one does not already exist.
+ *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Master structure corresponding to
+ *	that token. This is simply a lookup function; a new record will not be
+ *	created if one does not already exist.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Pointer to the Master structure; NULL if one does not exist for
- *	the given Tk_Window token.
+ *	Pointer to the Master structure; NULL if one does not exist for the
+ *	given Tk_Window token.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -586,12 +576,12 @@ CreateMaster(tkwin)
  */
 
 static Master *
-FindMaster(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for desired master. */
+FindMaster(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for desired master. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     register Master *masterPtr;
-    TkDisplay * dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
     hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->masterTable, (char *) tkwin);
     if (hPtr == NULL) {
@@ -606,38 +596,37 @@ FindMaster(tkwin)
  *
  * ConfigureSlave --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list to
- *	reconfigure the placement of a window.
+ *	This function is called to process an argv/argc list to reconfigure
+ *	the placement of a window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.  If an error occurs then a message is
- *	left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result. If an error occurs then a message is left in
+ *	the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Information in slavePtr may change, and slavePtr's master is
- *	scheduled for reconfiguration.
+ *	Information in slavePtr may change, and slavePtr's master is scheduled
+ *	for reconfiguration.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, table, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for the window to manipulate. */
-    Tk_OptionTable table;	/* Token for option table. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of config arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Object values for arguments. */
+ConfigureSlave(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for the window to manipulate. */
+    Tk_OptionTable table,	/* Token for option table. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of config arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Object values for arguments. */
 {
     register Master *masterPtr;
     Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
     int mask;
-    int result = TCL_OK;
     Slave *slavePtr;
-    
+    Tk_Window masterWin = (Tk_Window) NULL;
+
     if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(tkwin)) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't use placer on top-level window \"",
-		Tk_PathName(tkwin), "\"; use wm command instead",
-		(char *) NULL);
+		Tk_PathName(tkwin), "\"; use wm command instead", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -645,24 +634,51 @@ ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, table, objc, objv)
 
     if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) slavePtr, table, objc, objv,
 	    slavePtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, &mask) != TCL_OK) {
-	Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
-	result = TCL_ERROR;
-	goto done;
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Set slave flags. First clear the field, then add bits as needed.
+     */
+
+    slavePtr->flags = 0;
+    if (slavePtr->heightPtr) {
+	slavePtr->flags |= CHILD_HEIGHT;
+    }
+
+    if (slavePtr->relHeightPtr) {
+	slavePtr->flags |= CHILD_REL_HEIGHT;
+    }
+
+    if (slavePtr->relWidthPtr) {
+	slavePtr->flags |= CHILD_REL_WIDTH;
+    }
+
+    if (slavePtr->widthPtr) {
+	slavePtr->flags |= CHILD_WIDTH;
     }
 
-    if (mask & IN_MASK) {
+    if (((mask & IN_MASK) == 0) && (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL)) {
+	/*
+	 * If no -in option was passed and the slave is already placed then
+	 * just recompute the placement.
+	 */
+
+	masterPtr = slavePtr->masterPtr;
+	goto scheduleLayout;
+    } else if (mask & IN_MASK) {
 	/* -in changed */
 	Tk_Window tkwin;
 	Tk_Window ancestor;
-	
+
 	tkwin = slavePtr->inTkwin;
-	
+
 	/*
-	 * Make sure that the new master is either the logical parent
-	 * of the slave or a descendant of that window, and that the
-	 * master and slave aren't the same.
+	 * Make sure that the new master is either the logical parent of the
+	 * slave or a descendant of that window, and that the master and slave
+	 * aren't the same.
 	 */
-	
+
 	for (ancestor = tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
 	    if (ancestor == Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin)) {
 		break;
@@ -670,80 +686,72 @@ ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, table, objc, objv)
 	    if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(ancestor)) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't place ",
 			Tk_PathName(slavePtr->tkwin), " relative to ",
-			Tk_PathName(tkwin), (char *) NULL);
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
-		goto done;
+			Tk_PathName(tkwin), NULL);
+		goto error;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (slavePtr->tkwin == tkwin) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't place ",
 		    Tk_PathName(slavePtr->tkwin), " relative to itself",
-		    (char *) NULL);
-	    result = TCL_ERROR;
-	    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
-	    goto done;
+		    NULL);
+	    goto error;
 	}
 	if ((slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL)
 		&& (slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin == tkwin)) {
 	    /*
-	     * Re-using same old master.  Nothing to do.
+	     * Re-using same old master. Nothing to do.
 	     */
-	} else {
-	    if ((slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL)
-		    && (slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin
-			    != Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin))) {
-		Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin,
-			slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin);
-	    }
-	    UnlinkSlave(slavePtr);
-	    slavePtr->masterPtr = CreateMaster(tkwin);
-	    slavePtr->nextPtr = slavePtr->masterPtr->slavePtr;
-	    slavePtr->masterPtr->slavePtr = slavePtr;
+
+	    masterPtr = slavePtr->masterPtr;
+	    goto scheduleLayout;
+	}
+	if ((slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL) &&
+		(slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin))) {
+	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin);
 	}
+	UnlinkSlave(slavePtr);
+	masterWin = tkwin;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Set slave flags.  First clear the field, then add bits as needed.
+     * If there's no master specified for this slave, use its Tk_Parent.
      */
 
-    slavePtr->flags = 0;
-    if (slavePtr->heightPtr) {
-	slavePtr->flags |= CHILD_HEIGHT;
-    }
-
-    if (slavePtr->relHeightPtr) {
-	slavePtr->flags |= CHILD_REL_HEIGHT;
+    if (masterWin == NULL) {
+	masterWin = Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin);
+	slavePtr->inTkwin = masterWin;
     }
 
-    if (slavePtr->relWidthPtr) {
-	slavePtr->flags |= CHILD_REL_WIDTH;
-    }
+    /*
+     * Manage the slave window in this master.
+     */
 
-    if (slavePtr->widthPtr) {
-	slavePtr->flags |= CHILD_WIDTH;
-    }
+    masterPtr = CreateMaster(masterWin);
+    slavePtr->masterPtr = masterPtr;
+    slavePtr->nextPtr = masterPtr->slavePtr;
+    masterPtr->slavePtr = slavePtr;
+    Tk_ManageGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, &placerType, (ClientData) slavePtr);
 
     /*
-     * If there's no master specified for this slave, use its Tk_Parent.
-     * Then arrange for a placement recalculation in the master.
+     * Arrange for the master to be re-arranged at the first idle moment.
      */
 
+  scheduleLayout:
     Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
-    done:
-    masterPtr = slavePtr->masterPtr;
-    if (masterPtr == NULL) {
-	masterPtr = CreateMaster(Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin));
-	slavePtr->masterPtr = masterPtr;
-	slavePtr->nextPtr = masterPtr->slavePtr;
-	masterPtr->slavePtr = slavePtr;
-    }
-    slavePtr->inTkwin = masterPtr->tkwin;
+
     if (!(masterPtr->flags & PARENT_RECONFIG_PENDING)) {
 	masterPtr->flags |= PARENT_RECONFIG_PENDING;
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(RecomputePlacement, (ClientData) masterPtr);
     }
-    return result;
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+    /*
+     * Error while processing some option, cleanup and return.
+     */
+
+  error:
+    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -751,27 +759,27 @@ ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, table, objc, objv)
  *
  * PlaceInfoCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [place info] subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the [place info] subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for information on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the given tkwin is managed by the placer, this function will
- *	put information about that placement in the interp's result.
+ *	If the given tkwin is managed by the placer, this function will put
+ *	information about that placement in the interp's result.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-PlaceInfoCommand(interp, tkwin)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp into which to place result. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for the window to get info on. */
+PlaceInfoCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp into which to place result. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for the window to get info on. */
 {
     char buffer[32 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
     Slave *slavePtr;
-    
+
     slavePtr = FindSlave(tkwin);
     if (slavePtr == NULL) {
 	return TCL_OK;
@@ -781,38 +789,38 @@ PlaceInfoCommand(interp, tkwin)
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tk_PathName(slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin));
     }
     sprintf(buffer, " -x %d", slavePtr->x);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     sprintf(buffer, " -relx %.4g", slavePtr->relX);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     sprintf(buffer, " -y %d", slavePtr->y);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     sprintf(buffer, " -rely %.4g", slavePtr->relY);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     if (slavePtr->flags & CHILD_WIDTH) {
 	sprintf(buffer, " -width %d", slavePtr->width);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -width {}", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -width {}", NULL);
     }
     if (slavePtr->flags & CHILD_REL_WIDTH) {
 	sprintf(buffer, " -relwidth %.4g", slavePtr->relWidth);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -relwidth {}", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -relwidth {}", NULL);
     }
     if (slavePtr->flags & CHILD_HEIGHT) {
 	sprintf(buffer, " -height %d", slavePtr->height);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -height {}", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -height {}", NULL);
     }
     if (slavePtr->flags & CHILD_REL_HEIGHT) {
 	sprintf(buffer, " -relheight %.4g", slavePtr->relHeight);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -relheight {}", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -relheight {}", NULL);
     }
-    
+
     Tcl_AppendElement(interp, "-anchor");
     Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tk_NameOfAnchor(slavePtr->anchor));
     Tcl_AppendElement(interp, "-bordermode");
@@ -825,8 +833,8 @@ PlaceInfoCommand(interp, tkwin)
  *
  * RecomputePlacement --
  *
- *	This procedure is called as a when-idle handler.  It recomputes
- *	the geometries of all the slaves of a given master.
+ *	This function is called as a when-idle handler. It recomputes the
+ *	geometries of all the slaves of a given master.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -838,8 +846,8 @@ PlaceInfoCommand(interp, tkwin)
  */
 
 static void
-RecomputePlacement(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to Master record. */
+RecomputePlacement(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to Master record. */
 {
     register Master *masterPtr = (Master *) clientData;
     register Slave *slavePtr;
@@ -866,18 +874,17 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) masterPtr);
 
     /*
-     * Iterate over all the slaves for the master.  Each slave's
-     * geometry can be computed independently of the other slaves.
-     * Changes to the window's structure could cause almost anything
-     * to happen, including deleting the parent or child.  If this
-     * happens, we'll be told to abort.
+     * Iterate over all the slaves for the master. Each slave's geometry can
+     * be computed independently of the other slaves. Changes to the window's
+     * structure could cause almost anything to happen, including deleting the
+     * parent or child.  If this happens, we'll be told to abort.
      */
 
     for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL && !abort;
-	    slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {    
+	    slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
 	/*
-	 * Step 1: compute size and borderwidth of master, taking into
-	 * account desired border mode.
+	 * Step 1: compute size and borderwidth of master, taking into account
+	 * desired border mode.
 	 */
 
 	masterX = masterY = 0;
@@ -886,18 +893,18 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
 	if (slavePtr->borderMode == BM_INSIDE) {
 	    masterX = Tk_InternalBorderLeft(masterPtr->tkwin);
 	    masterY = Tk_InternalBorderTop(masterPtr->tkwin);
-            masterWidth -= masterX + Tk_InternalBorderRight(masterPtr->tkwin);
-            masterHeight -= masterY +
+	    masterWidth -= masterX + Tk_InternalBorderRight(masterPtr->tkwin);
+	    masterHeight -= masterY +
 		    Tk_InternalBorderBottom(masterPtr->tkwin);
 	} else if (slavePtr->borderMode == BM_OUTSIDE) {
 	    masterX = masterY = -Tk_Changes(masterPtr->tkwin)->border_width;
-            masterWidth -= 2 * masterX;
-            masterHeight -= 2 * masterY;
+	    masterWidth -= 2 * masterX;
+	    masterHeight -= 2 * masterY;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Step 2:  compute size of slave (outside dimensions including
-	 * border) and location of anchor point within master.
+	 * Step 2: compute size of slave (outside dimensions including border)
+	 * and location of anchor point within master.
 	 */
 
 	x1 = slavePtr->x + masterX + (slavePtr->relX*masterWidth);
@@ -911,11 +918,11 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
 	    }
 	    if (slavePtr->flags & CHILD_REL_WIDTH) {
 		/*
-		 * The code below is a bit tricky.  In order to round
-		 * correctly when both relX and relWidth are specified,
-		 * compute the location of the right edge and round that,
-		 * then compute width.  If we compute the width and round
-		 * it, rounding errors in relX and relWidth accumulate.
+		 * The code below is a bit tricky. In order to round correctly
+		 * when both relX and relWidth are specified, compute the
+		 * location of the right edge and round that, then compute
+		 * width. If we compute the width and round it, rounding
+		 * errors in relX and relWidth accumulate.
 		 */
 
 		x2 = x1 + (slavePtr->relWidth*masterWidth);
@@ -932,7 +939,7 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
 		height += slavePtr->height;
 	    }
 	    if (slavePtr->flags & CHILD_REL_HEIGHT) {
-		/* 
+		/*
 		 * See note above for rounding errors in width computation.
 		 */
 
@@ -946,47 +953,47 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Step 3: adjust the x and y positions so that the desired
-	 * anchor point on the slave appears at that position.  Also
-	 * adjust for the border mode and master's border.
+	 * Step 3: adjust the x and y positions so that the desired anchor
+	 * point on the slave appears at that position. Also adjust for the
+	 * border mode and master's border.
 	 */
 
 	switch (slavePtr->anchor) {
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_N:
-		x -= width/2;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
-		x -= width;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_E:
-		x -= width;
-		y -= height/2;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
-		x -= width;
-		y -= height;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_S:
-		x -= width/2;
-		y -= height;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
-		y -= height;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_W:
-		y -= height/2;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
-		x -= width/2;
-		y -= height/2;
-		break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_N:
+	    x -= width/2;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
+	    x -= width;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_E:
+	    x -= width;
+	    y -= height/2;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
+	    x -= width;
+	    y -= height;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_S:
+	    x -= width/2;
+	    y -= height;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
+	    y -= height;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_W:
+	    y -= height/2;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
+	    x -= width/2;
+	    y -= height/2;
+	    break;
 	}
 
 	/*
 	 * Step 4: adjust width and height again to reflect inside dimensions
-	 * of window rather than outside.  Also make sure that the width and
+	 * of window rather than outside. Also make sure that the width and
 	 * height aren't zero.
 	 */
 
@@ -1000,11 +1007,10 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Step 5: reconfigure the window and map it if needed.  If the
-	 * slave is a child of the master, we do this ourselves.  If the
-	 * slave isn't a child of the master, let Tk_MaintainGeometry do
-	 * the work (it will re-adjust things as relevant windows map,
-	 * unmap, and move).
+	 * Step 5: reconfigure the window and map it if needed. If the slave
+	 * is a child of the master, we do this ourselves. If the slave isn't
+	 * a child of the master, let Tk_MaintainGeometry do the work (it will
+	 * re-adjust things as relevant windows map, unmap, and move).
 	 */
 
 	if (masterPtr->tkwin == Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin)) {
@@ -1019,8 +1025,8 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
             }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Don't map the slave unless the master is mapped: the slave
-	     * will get mapped later, when the master is mapped.
+	     * Don't map the slave unless the master is mapped: the slave will
+	     * get mapped later, when the master is mapped.
 	     */
 
 	    if (Tk_IsMapped(masterPtr->tkwin)) {
@@ -1046,24 +1052,24 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
  *
  * MasterStructureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event handler when
- *	StructureNotify events occur for a master window.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk event handler when StructureNotify
+ *	events occur for a master window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Structures get cleaned up if the window was deleted.  If the
- *	window was resized then slave geometries get recomputed.
+ *	Structures get cleaned up if the window was deleted. If the window was
+ *	resized then slave geometries get recomputed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-MasterStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to Master structure for window
+MasterStructureProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to Master structure for window
 				 * referred to by eventPtr. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Describes what just happened. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     register Master *masterPtr = (Master *) clientData;
     register Slave *slavePtr, *nextPtr;
@@ -1094,8 +1100,8 @@ MasterStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	Tcl_EventuallyFree((ClientData) masterPtr, TCL_DYNAMIC);
     } else if (eventPtr->type == MapNotify) {
 	/*
-	 * When a master gets mapped, must redo the geometry computation
-	 * so that all of its slaves get remapped.
+	 * When a master gets mapped, must redo the geometry computation so
+	 * that all of its slaves get remapped.
 	 */
 
 	if ((masterPtr->slavePtr != NULL)
@@ -1105,8 +1111,8 @@ MasterStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	}
     } else if (eventPtr->type == UnmapNotify) {
 	/*
-	 * Unmap all of the slaves when the master gets unmapped,
-	 * so that they don't keep redisplaying themselves.
+	 * Unmap all of the slaves when the master gets unmapped, so that they
+	 * don't keep redisplaying themselves.
 	 */
 
 	for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
@@ -1121,8 +1127,8 @@ MasterStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * SlaveStructureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event handler when
- *	StructureNotify events occur for a slave window.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk event handler when StructureNotify
+ *	events occur for a slave window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1134,16 +1140,18 @@ MasterStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-SlaveStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to Slave structure for window
+SlaveStructureProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to Slave structure for window
 				 * referred to by eventPtr. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Describes what just happened. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     register Slave *slavePtr = (Slave *) clientData;
-    TkDisplay * dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) slavePtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) slavePtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
     if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
-	UnlinkSlave(slavePtr);
+	if (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL) {
+	    UnlinkSlave(slavePtr);
+	}
 	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable,
 		(char *) slavePtr->tkwin));
 	FreeSlave(slavePtr);
@@ -1155,25 +1163,24 @@ SlaveStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * PlaceRequestProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever a slave managed by us
- *	changes its requested geometry.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk whenever a slave managed by us changes
+ *	its requested geometry.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The window will get relayed out, if its requested size has
- *	anything to do with its actual size.
+ *	The window will get relayed out, if its requested size has anything to
+ *	do with its actual size.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-PlaceRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to our record for slave. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window that changed its desired
-					 * size. */
+PlaceRequestProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to our record for slave. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window that changed its desired size. */
 {
     Slave *slavePtr = (Slave *) clientData;
     Master *masterPtr;
@@ -1197,8 +1204,8 @@ PlaceRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * PlaceLostSlaveProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry
- *	claims control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry claims
+ *	control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1211,22 +1218,30 @@ PlaceRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-PlaceLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Slave structure for slave window that
-				 * was stolen away. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
+PlaceLostSlaveProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Slave structure for slave window that was
+				 * stolen away. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
 {
     register Slave *slavePtr = (Slave *) clientData;
-    TkDisplay * dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) slavePtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) slavePtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
     if (slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin)) {
 	Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin);
     }
     Tk_UnmapWindow(tkwin);
     UnlinkSlave(slavePtr);
-    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable, 
-            (char *) tkwin));
+    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable,
+	    (char *) tkwin));
     Tk_DeleteEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask, SlaveStructureProc,
 	    (ClientData) slavePtr);
     FreeSlave(slavePtr);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkPlatDecls.h b/generic/tkPlatDecls.h
index 509b4f5..549ae30 100644
--- a/generic/tkPlatDecls.h
+++ b/generic/tkPlatDecls.h
@@ -30,55 +30,101 @@
  */
 
 #if defined(__WIN32__) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */
+#ifndef Tk_AttachHWND_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_AttachHWND_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 0 */
-EXTERN Window		Tk_AttachHWND _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				HWND hwnd));
+EXTERN Window		Tk_AttachHWND(Tk_Window tkwin, HWND hwnd);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetHINSTANCE_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetHINSTANCE_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 1 */
-EXTERN HINSTANCE	Tk_GetHINSTANCE _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN HINSTANCE	Tk_GetHINSTANCE(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_GetHWND_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_GetHWND_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 2 */
-EXTERN HWND		Tk_GetHWND _ANSI_ARGS_((Window window));
+EXTERN HWND		Tk_GetHWND(Window window);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_HWNDToWindow_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_HWNDToWindow_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 3 */
-EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_HWNDToWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd));
+EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_HWNDToWindow(HWND hwnd);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_PointerEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_PointerEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 4 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_PointerEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, int x, int y));
+EXTERN void		Tk_PointerEvent(HWND hwnd, int x, int y);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_TranslateWinEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_TranslateWinEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 5 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_TranslateWinEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd,
-				UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam,
-				LRESULT *result));
+EXTERN int		Tk_TranslateWinEvent(HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+				WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam,
+				LRESULT *result);
+#endif
 #endif /* WIN */
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
+#ifndef Tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 0 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((
+EXTERN void		Tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler(
 				Tk_MacOSXEmbedRegisterWinProc *registerWinProcPtr,
 				Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetGrafPortProc *getPortProcPtr,
 				Tk_MacOSXEmbedMakeContainerExistProc *containerExistProcPtr,
 				Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetClipProc *getClipProc,
-				Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetOffsetInParentProc *getOffsetProc));
+				Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetOffsetInParentProc *getOffsetProc);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 1 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		Tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 2 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((int tkOwnsIt));
+EXTERN void		Tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor(int tkOwnsIt);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXInitMenus_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXInitMenus_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 3 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXInitMenus _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXInitMenus(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 4 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Tcl_Interp *interp));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkGenWMConfigureEvent_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkGenWMConfigureEvent_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 5 */
-EXTERN void		TkGenWMConfigureEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-				int x, int y, int width, int height,
-				int flags));
+EXTERN void		TkGenWMConfigureEvent(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y,
+				int width, int height, int flags);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 6 */
-EXTERN void		TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+EXTERN void		TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns(Tk_Window tkwin);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 7 */
-EXTERN GWorldPtr	TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Drawable drawable));
+EXTERN VOID *		TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort(Drawable drawable);
+#endif
+#ifndef TkMacOSXGetRootControl_TCL_DECLARED
+#define TkMacOSXGetRootControl_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 8 */
-EXTERN ControlRef	TkMacOSXGetRootControl _ANSI_ARGS_((
-				Drawable drawable));
+EXTERN VOID *		TkMacOSXGetRootControl(Drawable drawable);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 9 */
-EXTERN void		Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN void		Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier(void);
+#endif
+#ifndef Tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront_TCL_DECLARED
+#define Tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront_TCL_DECLARED
 /* 10 */
-EXTERN int		Tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN int		Tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront(void);
+#endif
 #endif /* AQUA */
 
 typedef struct TkPlatStubs {
@@ -86,25 +132,25 @@ typedef struct TkPlatStubs {
     struct TkPlatStubHooks *hooks;
 
 #if defined(__WIN32__) || defined(__CYGWIN__) /* WIN */
-    Window (*tk_AttachHWND) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, HWND hwnd)); /* 0 */
-    HINSTANCE (*tk_GetHINSTANCE) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 1 */
-    HWND (*tk_GetHWND) _ANSI_ARGS_((Window window)); /* 2 */
-    Tk_Window (*tk_HWNDToWindow) _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd)); /* 3 */
-    void (*tk_PointerEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, int x, int y)); /* 4 */
-    int (*tk_TranslateWinEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam, LRESULT *result)); /* 5 */
+    Window (*tk_AttachHWND) (Tk_Window tkwin, HWND hwnd); /* 0 */
+    HINSTANCE (*tk_GetHINSTANCE) (void); /* 1 */
+    HWND (*tk_GetHWND) (Window window); /* 2 */
+    Tk_Window (*tk_HWNDToWindow) (HWND hwnd); /* 3 */
+    void (*tk_PointerEvent) (HWND hwnd, int x, int y); /* 4 */
+    int (*tk_TranslateWinEvent) (HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam, LRESULT *result); /* 5 */
 #endif /* WIN */
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
-    void (*tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_MacOSXEmbedRegisterWinProc *registerWinProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetGrafPortProc *getPortProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedMakeContainerExistProc *containerExistProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetClipProc *getClipProc, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetOffsetInParentProc *getOffsetProc)); /* 0 */
-    void (*tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 1 */
-    void (*tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor) _ANSI_ARGS_((int tkOwnsIt)); /* 2 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXInitMenus) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp)); /* 3 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXInitAppleEvents) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp)); /* 4 */
-    void (*tkGenWMConfigureEvent) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int flags)); /* 5 */
-    void (*tkMacOSXInvalClipRgns) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin)); /* 6 */
-    GWorldPtr (*tkMacOSXGetDrawablePort) _ANSI_ARGS_((Drawable drawable)); /* 7 */
-    ControlRef (*tkMacOSXGetRootControl) _ANSI_ARGS_((Drawable drawable)); /* 8 */
-    void (*tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 9 */
-    int (*tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront) _ANSI_ARGS_((void)); /* 10 */
+    void (*tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler) (Tk_MacOSXEmbedRegisterWinProc *registerWinProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetGrafPortProc *getPortProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedMakeContainerExistProc *containerExistProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetClipProc *getClipProc, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetOffsetInParentProc *getOffsetProc); /* 0 */
+    void (*tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus) (void); /* 1 */
+    void (*tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor) (int tkOwnsIt); /* 2 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXInitMenus) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 3 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXInitAppleEvents) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 4 */
+    void (*tkGenWMConfigureEvent) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int flags); /* 5 */
+    void (*tkMacOSXInvalClipRgns) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 6 */
+    VOID * (*tkMacOSXGetDrawablePort) (Drawable drawable); /* 7 */
+    VOID * (*tkMacOSXGetRootControl) (Drawable drawable); /* 8 */
+    void (*tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier) (void); /* 9 */
+    int (*tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront) (void); /* 10 */
 #endif /* AQUA */
 } TkPlatStubs;
 
diff --git a/generic/tkPointer.c b/generic/tkPointer.c
index 7b2408f..dd4f7e6 100644
--- a/generic/tkPointer.c
+++ b/generic/tkPointer.c
@@ -1,15 +1,15 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkPointer.c --
  *
- *	This file contains functions for emulating the X server
- *	pointer and grab state machine.  This file is used by the
- *	Mac and Windows platforms to generate appropriate enter/leave
- *	events, and to update the global grab window information.
+ *	This file contains functions for emulating the X server pointer and
+ *	grab state machine. This file is used by the Mac and Windows platforms
+ *	to generate appropriate enter/leave events, and to update the global
+ *	grab window information.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
@@ -24,8 +24,8 @@
 #endif
 
 /*
- * Mask that selects any of the state bits corresponding to buttons,
- * plus masks that select individual buttons' bits:
+ * Mask that selects any of the state bits corresponding to buttons, plus
+ * masks that select individual buttons' bits:
  */
 
 #define ALL_BUTTONS \
@@ -36,15 +36,15 @@ static unsigned int buttonMasks[] = {
 #define ButtonMask(b) (buttonMasks[(b)-Button1])
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    TkWindow *grabWinPtr;	        /* Window that defines the top of the
-					 * grab tree in a global grab. */
-    int lastState;		        /* Last known state flags. */
-    XPoint lastPos;	                /* Last reported mouse position. */
-    TkWindow *lastWinPtr;	        /* Last reported mouse window. */
-    TkWindow *restrictWinPtr;    	/* Window to which all mouse events
-					 * will be reported. */
-    TkWindow *cursorWinPtr;	        /* Window that is currently
-					 * controlling the global cursor. */
+    TkWindow *grabWinPtr;	/* Window that defines the top of the grab
+				 * tree in a global grab. */
+    int lastState;		/* Last known state flags. */
+    XPoint lastPos;		/* Last reported mouse position. */
+    TkWindow *lastWinPtr;	/* Last reported mouse window. */
+    TkWindow *restrictWinPtr;	/* Window to which all mouse events will be
+				 * reported. */
+    TkWindow *cursorWinPtr;	/* Window that is currently controlling the
+				 * global cursor. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
@@ -52,12 +52,11 @@ static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
  * Forward declarations of procedures used in this file.
  */
 
-static int		GenerateEnterLeave _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-			    int x, int y, int state));
-static void		InitializeEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent* eventPtr,
-			    TkWindow *winPtr, int type, int x, int y,
-			    int state, int detail));
-static void		UpdateCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+static int		GenerateEnterLeave(TkWindow *winPtr, int x, int y,
+			    int state);
+static void		InitializeEvent(XEvent* eventPtr, TkWindow *winPtr,
+			    int type, int x, int y, int state, int detail);
+static void		UpdateCursor(TkWindow *winPtr);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -76,13 +75,13 @@ static void		UpdateCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
  */
 
 static void
-InitializeEvent(eventPtr, winPtr, type, x, y, state, detail)
-    XEvent* eventPtr;		/* Event structure to initialize. */
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to make event relative to. */
-    int type;			/* Message type. */
-    int x, y;			/* Root coords of event. */
-    int state;			/* State flags. */
-    int detail;			/* Detail value. */
+InitializeEvent(
+    XEvent *eventPtr,		/* Event structure to initialize. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Window to make event relative to. */
+    int type,			/* Message type. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Root coords of event. */
+    int state,			/* State flags. */
+    int detail)			/* Detail value. */
 {
     eventPtr->type = type;
     eventPtr->xany.serial = LastKnownRequestProcessed(winPtr->display);
@@ -95,22 +94,22 @@ InitializeEvent(eventPtr, winPtr, type, x, y, state, detail)
     eventPtr->xcrossing.y_root = y;
 
     switch (type) {
-	case EnterNotify:
-	case LeaveNotify:
-	    eventPtr->xcrossing.mode = NotifyNormal;
-	    eventPtr->xcrossing.state = state;
-	    eventPtr->xcrossing.detail = detail;
-	    eventPtr->xcrossing.focus = False;
-	    break;
-	case MotionNotify:
-	    eventPtr->xmotion.state = state;
-	    eventPtr->xmotion.is_hint = detail;
-	    break;
-	case ButtonPress:
-	case ButtonRelease:
-	    eventPtr->xbutton.state = state;
-	    eventPtr->xbutton.button = detail;
-	    break;
+    case EnterNotify:
+    case LeaveNotify:
+	eventPtr->xcrossing.mode = NotifyNormal;
+	eventPtr->xcrossing.state = state;
+	eventPtr->xcrossing.detail = detail;
+	eventPtr->xcrossing.focus = False;
+	break;
+    case MotionNotify:
+	eventPtr->xmotion.state = state;
+	eventPtr->xmotion.is_hint = detail;
+	break;
+    case ButtonPress:
+    case ButtonRelease:
+	eventPtr->xbutton.state = state;
+	eventPtr->xbutton.button = detail;
+	break;
     }
     TkChangeEventWindow(eventPtr, winPtr);
 }
@@ -120,8 +119,8 @@ InitializeEvent(eventPtr, winPtr, type, x, y, state, detail)
  *
  * GenerateEnterLeave --
  *
- *	Update the current mouse window and position, and generate
- *	any enter/leave events that are needed.
+ *	Update the current mouse window and position, and generate any
+ *	enter/leave events that are needed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns 1 if enter/leave events were generated.
@@ -133,14 +132,14 @@ InitializeEvent(eventPtr, winPtr, type, x, y, state, detail)
  */
 
 static int
-GenerateEnterLeave(winPtr, x, y, state)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Current Tk window (or NULL). */
-    int x,y;			/* Current mouse position in root coords. */
-    int state;			/* State flags. */
+GenerateEnterLeave(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Current Tk window (or NULL). */
+    int x, int y,		/* Current mouse position in root coords. */
+    int state)			/* State flags. */
 {
     int crossed = 0;		/* 1 if mouse crossed a window boundary */
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     TkWindow *restrictWinPtr = tsdPtr->restrictWinPtr;
     TkWindow *lastWinPtr = tsdPtr->lastWinPtr;
 
@@ -152,8 +151,8 @@ GenerateEnterLeave(winPtr, x, y, state)
 	    oldPos = TkPositionInTree(lastWinPtr, restrictWinPtr);
 
 	    /*
-	     * Check if the mouse crossed into or out of the restrict
-	     * window.  If so, we need to generate an Enter or Leave event.
+	     * Check if the mouse crossed into or out of the restrict window.
+	     * If so, we need to generate an Enter or Leave event.
 	     */
 
 	    if ((newPos != oldPos) && ((newPos == TK_GRAB_IN_TREE)
@@ -213,8 +212,8 @@ GenerateEnterLeave(winPtr, x, y, state)
  *
  * Tk_UpdatePointer --
  *
- *	This function updates the pointer state machine given an
- *	the current window, position and modifier state.
+ *	This function updates the pointer state machine given an the current
+ *	window, position and modifier state.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -226,14 +225,14 @@ GenerateEnterLeave(winPtr, x, y, state)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to which pointer event
-				 * is reported. May be NULL. */
-    int x, y;			/* Pointer location in root coords. */
-    int state;			/* Modifier state mask. */
+Tk_UpdatePointer(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to which pointer event is reported.
+				 * May be NULL. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Pointer location in root coords. */
+    int state)			/* Modifier state mask. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)tkwin;
     TkWindow *targetWinPtr;
     XPoint pos;
@@ -245,15 +244,15 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
     pos.y = y;
 
     /*
-     * Use the current keyboard state, but the old mouse button
-     * state since we haven't generated the button events yet.
+     * Use the current keyboard state, but the old mouse button state since we
+     * haven't generated the button events yet.
      */
 
     tsdPtr->lastState = (state & ~ALL_BUTTONS) | (tsdPtr->lastState
 	    & ALL_BUTTONS);
 
     /*
-     * Generate Enter/Leave events.  If the pointer has crossed window
+     * Generate Enter/Leave events. If the pointer has crossed window
      * boundaries, update the current mouse position so we don't generate
      * redundant motion events.
      */
@@ -267,20 +266,19 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
      * between the current button state and the last known button state.
      */
 
-    for (b = Button1; b <= Button3; b++) {
+    for (b = Button1; b <= Button5; b++) {
 	mask = ButtonMask(b);
 	if (changes & mask) {
-	    if (state & mask) {	
+	    if (state & mask) {
 		type = ButtonPress;
 
-	        /*
+		/*
 		 * ButtonPress - Set restrict window if we aren't grabbed, or
 		 * if this is the first button down.
 		 */
 
 		if (!tsdPtr->restrictWinPtr) {
 		    if (!tsdPtr->grabWinPtr) {
-
 			/*
 			 * Mouse is not grabbed, so set a button grab.
 			 */
@@ -289,10 +287,9 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
 			TkpSetCapture(tsdPtr->restrictWinPtr);
 
 		    } else if ((tsdPtr->lastState & ALL_BUTTONS) == 0) {
-
 			/*
-			 * Mouse is in a non-button grab, so ensure
-			 * the button grab is inside the grab tree.
+			 * Mouse is in a non-button grab, so ensure the button
+			 * grab is inside the grab tree.
 			 */
 
 			if (TkPositionInTree(winPtr, tsdPtr->grabWinPtr)
@@ -308,7 +305,7 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
 	    } else {
 		type = ButtonRelease;
 
-	        /*
+		/*
 		 * ButtonRelease - Release the mouse capture and clear the
 		 * restrict window when the last button is released. If we
 		 * are in a global grab, restore the grab window capture.
@@ -319,9 +316,9 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
 		}
 
 		/*
-		 * If we are releasing a restrict window, then we need
-		 * to send the button event followed by mouse motion from
-		 * the restrict window to the current mouse position.
+		 * If we are releasing a restrict window, then we need to send
+		 * the button event followed by mouse motion from the restrict
+		 * window to the current mouse position.
 		 */
 
 		if (tsdPtr->restrictWinPtr) {
@@ -335,14 +332,14 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
 		    GenerateEnterLeave(winPtr, x, y, tsdPtr->lastState);
 		    tsdPtr->lastPos = pos;
 		    continue;
-		}		
+		}
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * If a restrict window is set, make sure the pointer event
-	     * is reported relative to that window.  Otherwise, if a
-	     * global grab is in effect then events outside of windows
-	     * managed by Tk should be reported to the grab window.
+	     * If a restrict window is set, make sure the pointer event is
+	     * reported relative to that window. Otherwise, if a global grab
+	     * is in effect then events outside of windows managed by Tk
+	     * should be reported to the grab window.
 	     */
 
 	    if (tsdPtr->restrictWinPtr) {
@@ -357,7 +354,7 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
 	     * If we still have a target window, send the event.
 	     */
 
-	    if (winPtr != NULL) {
+	    if (targetWinPtr != NULL) {
 		InitializeEvent(&event, targetWinPtr, type, x, y,
 			tsdPtr->lastState, b);
 		Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
@@ -368,7 +365,7 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
 	     */
 
 	    tsdPtr->lastState = (type == ButtonPress)
-		? (tsdPtr->lastState | mask) : (tsdPtr->lastState & ~mask);
+		    ? (tsdPtr->lastState | mask) : (tsdPtr->lastState & ~mask);
 	    tsdPtr->lastPos = pos;
 	}
     }
@@ -388,8 +385,8 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
     UpdateCursor(targetWinPtr);
 
     /*
-     * If no other events caused the position to be updated,
-     * generate a motion event.
+     * If no other events caused the position to be updated, generate a motion
+     * event.
      */
 
     if (tsdPtr->lastPos.x != pos.x || tsdPtr->lastPos.y != pos.y) {
@@ -413,42 +410,41 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
  *
  * XGrabPointer --
  *
- *	Capture the mouse so event are reported outside of toplevels.
- *	Note that this is a very limited implementation that only
- *	supports GrabModeAsync and owner_events True.
+ *	Capture the mouse so event are reported outside of toplevels. Note
+ *	that this is a very limited implementation that only supports
+ *	GrabModeAsync and owner_events True.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Always returns GrabSuccess.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Turns on mouse capture, sets the global grab pointer, and
- *	clears any window restrictions.
+ *	Turns on mouse capture, sets the global grab pointer, and clears any
+ *	window restrictions.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-XGrabPointer(display, grab_window, owner_events, event_mask, pointer_mode,
-	keyboard_mode, confine_to, cursor, time)
-    Display* display;
-    Window grab_window;
-    Bool owner_events;
-    unsigned int event_mask;
-    int pointer_mode;
-    int keyboard_mode;
-    Window confine_to;
-    Cursor cursor;
-    Time time;
+XGrabPointer(
+    Display *display,
+    Window grab_window,
+    Bool owner_events,
+    unsigned int event_mask,
+    int pointer_mode,
+    int keyboard_mode,
+    Window confine_to,
+    Cursor cursor,
+    Time time)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     display->request++;
     tsdPtr->grabWinPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_IdToWindow(display, grab_window);
     tsdPtr->restrictWinPtr = NULL;
     TkpSetCapture(tsdPtr->grabWinPtr);
-    if (TkPositionInTree(tsdPtr->lastWinPtr, tsdPtr->grabWinPtr) 
-            != TK_GRAB_IN_TREE) {
+    if (TkPositionInTree(tsdPtr->lastWinPtr, tsdPtr->grabWinPtr)
+	    != TK_GRAB_IN_TREE) {
 	UpdateCursor(tsdPtr->grabWinPtr);
     }
     return GrabSuccess;
@@ -471,12 +467,12 @@ XGrabPointer(display, grab_window, owner_events, event_mask, pointer_mode,
  */
 
 int
-XUngrabPointer(display, time)
-    Display* display;
-    Time time;
+XUngrabPointer(
+    Display *display,
+    Time time)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     display->request++;
     tsdPtr->grabWinPtr = NULL;
@@ -503,11 +499,11 @@ XUngrabPointer(display, time)
  */
 
 void
-TkPointerDeadWindow(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
+TkPointerDeadWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (winPtr == tsdPtr->lastWinPtr) {
 	tsdPtr->lastWinPtr = NULL;
@@ -528,8 +524,8 @@ TkPointerDeadWindow(winPtr)
  *
  * UpdateCursor --
  *
- *	Set the windows global cursor to the cursor associated with
- *	the given Tk window.
+ *	Set the windows global cursor to the cursor associated with the given
+ *	Tk window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -541,17 +537,16 @@ TkPointerDeadWindow(winPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-UpdateCursor(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
+UpdateCursor(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
 {
     Cursor cursor = None;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
-     * A window inherits its cursor from its parent if it doesn't
-     * have one of its own.  Top level windows inherit the default
-     * cursor.
+     * A window inherits its cursor from its parent if it doesn't have one of
+     * its own. Top level windows inherit the default cursor.
      */
 
     tsdPtr->cursorWinPtr = winPtr;
@@ -572,10 +567,9 @@ UpdateCursor(winPtr)
  *
  * XDefineCursor --
  *
- *	This function is called to update the cursor on a window.
- *	Since the mouse might be in the specified window, we need to
- *	check the specified window against the current mouse position
- *	and grab state.
+ *	This function is called to update the cursor on a window. Since the
+ *	mouse might be in the specified window, we need to check the specified
+ *	window against the current mouse position and grab state.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -587,14 +581,14 @@ UpdateCursor(winPtr)
  */
 
 int
-XDefineCursor(display, w, cursor)
-    Display* display;
-    Window w;
-    Cursor cursor;
+XDefineCursor(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w,
+    Cursor cursor)
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)Tk_IdToWindow(display, w);
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (tsdPtr->cursorWinPtr == winPtr) {
 	UpdateCursor(winPtr);
@@ -608,10 +602,10 @@ XDefineCursor(display, w, cursor)
  *
  * TkGenerateActivateEvents --
  *
- *	This function is called by the Mac and Windows window manager
- *	routines when a toplevel window is activated or deactivated.
- *	Activate/Deactivate events will be sent to every subwindow of
- *	the toplevel followed by a FocusIn/FocusOut message.
+ *	This function is called by the Mac and Windows window manager routines
+ *	when a toplevel window is activated or deactivated.
+ *	Activate/Deactivate events will be sent to every subwindow of the
+ *	toplevel followed by a FocusIn/FocusOut message.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -623,16 +617,16 @@ XDefineCursor(display, w, cursor)
  */
 
 void
-TkGenerateActivateEvents(winPtr, active)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Toplevel to activate. */
-    int active;			/* Non-zero if the window is being
-				 * activated, else 0.*/
+TkGenerateActivateEvents(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Toplevel to activate. */
+    int active)			/* Non-zero if the window is being activated,
+				 * else 0.*/
 {
     XEvent event;
-    
-    /* 
-     * Generate Activate and Deactivate events.  This event
-     * is sent to every subwindow in a toplevel window.
+
+    /*
+     * Generate Activate and Deactivate events. This event is sent to every
+     * subwindow in a toplevel window.
      */
 
     event.xany.serial = winPtr->display->request++;
@@ -642,5 +636,12 @@ TkGenerateActivateEvents(winPtr, active)
 
     event.xany.type = active ? ActivateNotify : DeactivateNotify;
     TkQueueEventForAllChildren(winPtr, &event);
-    
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkRectOval.c b/generic/tkRectOval.c
index b7ab331..c9cd7cb 100644
--- a/generic/tkRectOval.c
+++ b/generic/tkRectOval.c
@@ -1,20 +1,17 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkRectOval.c --
  *
- *	This file implements rectangle and oval items for canvas
- *	widgets.
+ *	This file implements rectangle and oval items for canvas widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include <stdio.h>
-#include "tk.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkCanvas.h"
 
 /*
@@ -23,18 +20,22 @@
 
 typedef struct RectOvalItem  {
     Tk_Item header;		/* Generic stuff that's the same for all
-				 * types.  MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
+				 * types. MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
     Tk_Outline outline;		/* Outline structure */
     double bbox[4];		/* Coordinates of bounding box for rectangle
-				 * or oval (x1, y1, x2, y2).  Item includes
-				 * x1 and x2 but not y1 and y2. */
+				 * or oval (x1, y1, x2, y2). Item includes x1
+				 * and x2 but not y1 and y2. */
     Tk_TSOffset tsoffset;
     XColor *fillColor;		/* Color for filling rectangle/oval. */
-    XColor *activeFillColor;	/* Color for filling rectangle/oval if state is active. */
-    XColor *disabledFillColor;	/* Color for filling rectangle/oval if state is disabled. */
+    XColor *activeFillColor;	/* Color for filling rectangle/oval if state
+				 * is active. */
+    XColor *disabledFillColor;	/* Color for filling rectangle/oval if state
+				 * is disabled. */
     Pixmap fillStipple;		/* Stipple bitmap for filling item. */
-    Pixmap activeFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling item if state is active. */
-    Pixmap disabledFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling item if state is disabled. */
+    Pixmap activeFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling item if state is
+				 * active. */
+    Pixmap disabledFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling item if state is
+				 * disabled. */
     GC fillGC;			/* Graphics context for filling item. */
 } RectOvalItem;
 
@@ -64,160 +65,150 @@ static Tk_CustomOption pixelOption = {
 };
 
 static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activedash", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.activeDash),
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activedash", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.activeDash),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activefill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, activeFillColor),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activeoutline", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.activeColor),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activeoutlinestipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.activeStipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activestipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, activeFillStipple),
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activefill", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, activeFillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-activeoutline", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.activeColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activeoutlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.activeStipple),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-activestipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, activeFillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-activewidth", NULL, NULL,
 	"0.0", Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.activeWidth),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.dash),
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-dash", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.dash),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-dashoffset", NULL, NULL,
 	"0", Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.offset),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.disabledDash),
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-disableddash", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.disabledDash),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &dashOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, disabledFillColor),
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledfill", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, disabledFillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledoutline", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.disabledColor),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-disabledoutline", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.disabledColor),
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledoutlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.disabledStipple),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledoutlinestipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.disabledStipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, disabledFillStipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-disabledwidth", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-disabledstipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, disabledFillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-disabledwidth", NULL, NULL,
 	"0.0", Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.disabledWidth),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, fillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-fill", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, fillColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-offset", NULL, NULL,
 	"0,0", Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, tsoffset),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &offsetOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-outline", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-outline", NULL, NULL,
 	"black", Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.color), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-outlineoffset", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-outlineoffset", NULL, NULL,
 	"0,0", Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.tsoffset),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &offsetOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-outlinestipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.stipple),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state),TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK,
-	&stateOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, fillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-width", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-outlinestipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.stipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state),TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &stateOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, fillStipple),TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
+    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-width", NULL, NULL,
 	"1.0", Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, outline.width),
 	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &pixelOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+    {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ComputeRectOvalBbox _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr));
-static int		ConfigureRectOval _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags));
-static int		CreateRectOval _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		DeleteRectOval _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display));
-static void		DisplayRectOval _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst,
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
-static int		OvalToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *areaPtr));
-static double		OvalToPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr));
-static int		RectOvalCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		RectOvalToPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass));
-static int		RectToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *areaPtr));
-static double		RectToPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr));
-static void		ScaleRectOval _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY,
-			    double scaleX, double scaleY));
-static void		TranslateRectOval _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY));
+static void		ComputeRectOvalBbox(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr);
+static int		ConfigureRectOval(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
+			    int flags);
+static int		CreateRectOval(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DeleteRectOval(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    Display *display);
+static void		DisplayRectOval(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    Display *display, Drawable dst, int x, int y,
+			    int width, int height);
+static int		OvalToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    double *areaPtr);
+static double		OvalToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    double *pointPtr);
+static int		RectOvalCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		RectOvalToPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass);
+static int		RectToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    double *areaPtr);
+static double		RectToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    double *pointPtr);
+static void		ScaleRectOval(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    double originX, double originY,
+			    double scaleX, double scaleY);
+static void		TranslateRectOval(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    double deltaX, double deltaY);
 
 /*
- * The structures below defines the rectangle and oval item types
- * by means of procedures that can be invoked by generic item code.
+ * The structures below defines the rectangle and oval item types by means of
+ * functions that can be invoked by generic item code.
  */
 
 Tk_ItemType tkRectangleType = {
-    "rectangle",			/* name */
-    sizeof(RectOvalItem),		/* itemSize */
-    CreateRectOval,			/* createProc */
-    configSpecs,			/* configSpecs */
-    ConfigureRectOval,			/* configureProc */
-    RectOvalCoords,			/* coordProc */
-    DeleteRectOval,			/* deleteProc */
-    DisplayRectOval,			/* displayProc */
-    TK_CONFIG_OBJS,			/* flags */
-    RectToPoint,			/* pointProc */
-    RectToArea,				/* areaProc */
-    RectOvalToPostscript,		/* postscriptProc */
-    ScaleRectOval,			/* scaleProc */
-    TranslateRectOval,			/* translateProc */
-    (Tk_ItemIndexProc *) NULL,		/* indexProc */
-    (Tk_ItemCursorProc *) NULL,		/* icursorProc */
-    (Tk_ItemSelectionProc *) NULL,	/* selectionProc */
-    (Tk_ItemInsertProc *) NULL,		/* insertProc */
-    (Tk_ItemDCharsProc *) NULL,		/* dTextProc */
-    (Tk_ItemType *) NULL,		/* nextPtr */
+    "rectangle",		/* name */
+    sizeof(RectOvalItem),	/* itemSize */
+    CreateRectOval,		/* createProc */
+    configSpecs,		/* configSpecs */
+    ConfigureRectOval,		/* configureProc */
+    RectOvalCoords,		/* coordProc */
+    DeleteRectOval,		/* deleteProc */
+    DisplayRectOval,		/* displayProc */
+    TK_CONFIG_OBJS,		/* flags */
+    RectToPoint,		/* pointProc */
+    RectToArea,			/* areaProc */
+    RectOvalToPostscript,	/* postscriptProc */
+    ScaleRectOval,		/* scaleProc */
+    TranslateRectOval,		/* translateProc */
+    NULL,			/* indexProc */
+    NULL,			/* icursorProc */
+    NULL,			/* selectionProc */
+    NULL,			/* insertProc */
+    NULL,			/* dTextProc */
+    NULL,			/* nextPtr */
 };
 
 Tk_ItemType tkOvalType = {
-    "oval",				/* name */
-    sizeof(RectOvalItem),		/* itemSize */
-    CreateRectOval,			/* createProc */
-    configSpecs,			/* configSpecs */
-    ConfigureRectOval,			/* configureProc */
-    RectOvalCoords,			/* coordProc */
-    DeleteRectOval,			/* deleteProc */
-    DisplayRectOval,			/* displayProc */
-    TK_CONFIG_OBJS,			/* flags */
-    OvalToPoint,			/* pointProc */
-    OvalToArea,				/* areaProc */
-    RectOvalToPostscript,		/* postscriptProc */
-    ScaleRectOval,			/* scaleProc */
-    TranslateRectOval,			/* translateProc */
-    (Tk_ItemIndexProc *) NULL,		/* indexProc */
-    (Tk_ItemCursorProc *) NULL,		/* cursorProc */
-    (Tk_ItemSelectionProc *) NULL,	/* selectionProc */
-    (Tk_ItemInsertProc *) NULL,		/* insertProc */
-    (Tk_ItemDCharsProc *) NULL,		/* dTextProc */
-    (Tk_ItemType *) NULL,		/* nextPtr */
+    "oval",			/* name */
+    sizeof(RectOvalItem),	/* itemSize */
+    CreateRectOval,		/* createProc */
+    configSpecs,		/* configSpecs */
+    ConfigureRectOval,		/* configureProc */
+    RectOvalCoords,		/* coordProc */
+    DeleteRectOval,		/* deleteProc */
+    DisplayRectOval,		/* displayProc */
+    TK_CONFIG_OBJS,		/* flags */
+    OvalToPoint,		/* pointProc */
+    OvalToArea,			/* areaProc */
+    RectOvalToPostscript,	/* postscriptProc */
+    ScaleRectOval,		/* scaleProc */
+    TranslateRectOval,		/* translateProc */
+    NULL,			/* indexProc */
+    NULL,			/* cursorProc */
+    NULL,			/* selectionProc */
+    NULL,			/* insertProc */
+    NULL,			/* dTextProc */
+    NULL,			/* nextPtr */
 };
 
 /*
@@ -225,14 +216,14 @@ Tk_ItemType tkOvalType = {
  *
  * CreateRectOval --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to create a new rectangle
- *	or oval item in a canvas.
+ *	This function is invoked to create a new rectangle or oval item in a
+ *	canvas.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurred in
- *	creating the item, then an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result;  in this case itemPtr is left uninitialized,
- *	so it can be safely freed by the caller.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If an error occurred in creating the
+ *	item, then an error message is left in the interp's result; in this
+ *	case itemPtr is left uninitialized, so it can be safely freed by the
+ *	caller.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	A new rectangle or oval item is created.
@@ -241,24 +232,24 @@ Tk_ItemType tkOvalType = {
  */
 
 static int
-CreateRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* For error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas to hold new item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Record to hold new item;  header
-					 * has been initialized by caller. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Arguments describing rectangle. */
+CreateRectOval(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas to hold new item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Record to hold new item; header has been
+				 * initialized by caller. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Arguments describing rectangle. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
     int i;
 
     if (objc == 0) {
-	panic("canvas did not pass any coords\n");
+	Tcl_Panic("canvas did not pass any coords\n");
     }
 
     /*
-     * Carry out initialization that is needed in order to clean
-     * up after errors during the the remainder of this procedure.
+     * Carry out initialization that is needed in order to clean up after
+     * errors during the the remainder of this function.
      */
 
     Tk_CreateOutline(&(rectOvalPtr->outline));
@@ -279,6 +270,7 @@ CreateRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 
     for (i = 1; i < objc; i++) {
 	char *arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+
 	if ((arg[0] == '-') && (arg[1] >= 'a') && (arg[1] <= 'z')) {
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -291,7 +283,7 @@ CreateRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    error:
+  error:
     DeleteRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, Tk_Display(Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas)));
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -301,9 +293,9 @@ CreateRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * RectOvalCoords --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "coords" widget
- *	command on rectangles and ovals.  See the user documentation
- *	for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "coords" widget command on
+ *	rectangles and ovals. See the user documentation for details on what
+ *	it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR, and sets the interp's result.
@@ -315,60 +307,73 @@ CreateRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-RectOvalCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item whose coordinates are to be
-					 * read or modified. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of coordinates supplied in
-					 * objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1,
-					 * x2, y2, ... */
+RectOvalCoords(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item whose coordinates are to be read or
+				 * modified. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of coordinates supplied in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Array of coordinates: x1,y1,x2,y2,... */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
 
+    /*
+     * If no coordinates, return the current coordinates (i.e. bounding box).
+     */
+
     if (objc == 0) {
 	Tcl_Obj *obj = Tcl_NewObj();
-	Tcl_Obj *subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]);
-	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
-	subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]);
-	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
-	subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]);
-	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
-	subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]);
-	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
+
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, obj,
+		Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]));
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, obj,
+		Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]));
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, obj,
+		Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]));
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, obj,
+		Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]));
 	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, obj);
-    } else if ((objc == 1)||(objc == 4)) {
- 	if (objc==1) {
-	    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[0], &objc,
-		    (Tcl_Obj ***) &objv) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    } else if (objc != 4) {
-		char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
 
-		sprintf(buf, "wrong # coordinates: expected 0 or 4, got %d", objc);
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	}
-	if ((Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[0],
- 		    &rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]) != TCL_OK)
-		|| (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[1],
-		    &rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]) != TCL_OK)
-		|| (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[2],
-			&rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]) != TCL_OK)
-		|| (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[3],
-			&rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]) != TCL_OK)) {
+    /*
+     * If one "coordinate", treat as list of coordinates.
+     */
+
+    if (objc == 1) {
+	if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[0], &objc,
+		(Tcl_Obj ***) &objv) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr);
-    } else {
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Better have four coordinates now. Spit out an error message otherwise.
+     */
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
 	char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	
+
 	sprintf(buf, "wrong # coordinates: expected 0 or 4, got %d", objc);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
+
+    /*
+     * Parse the coordinates and update our bounding box.
+     */
+
+    if ((Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[0],
+		&rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]) != TCL_OK)
+	    || (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[1],
+		&rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]) != TCL_OK)
+	    || (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[2],
+		&rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]) != TCL_OK)
+	    || (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[3],
+		&rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]) != TCL_OK)) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -377,29 +382,28 @@ RectOvalCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ConfigureRectOval --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to configure various aspects
- *	of a rectangle or oval item, such as its border and
- *	background colors.
+ *	This function is invoked to configure various aspects of a rectangle
+ *	or oval item, such as its border and background colors.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result code.  If an error occurs, then
- *	an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result code. If an error occurs, then an error message
+ *	is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors and stipple
- *	patterns, may be set for itemPtr.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors and stipple patterns, may be
+ *	set for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Rectangle item to reconfigure. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of elements in objv.  */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
+ConfigureRectOval(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Rectangle item to reconfigure. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of elements in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
     XGCValues gcValues;
@@ -414,14 +418,14 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas);
 
     if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc,
-	    (CONST char **) objv, (char *) rectOvalPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS)) {
+	    (CONST char **)objv, (char *) rectOvalPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS)) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     state = itemPtr->state;
 
     /*
-     * A few of the options require additional processing, such as
-     * graphics contexts.
+     * A few of the options require additional processing, such as graphics
+     * contexts.
      */
 
     if (rectOvalPtr->outline.activeWidth > rectOvalPtr->outline.width ||
@@ -440,27 +444,28 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     if (flags & TK_OFFSET_LEFT) {
 	tsoffset->xoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[0] + 0.5);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
-	tsoffset->xoffset = (int) ((rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]+1)/2);
+	tsoffset->xoffset = (int)
+		((rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]+1)/2);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_RIGHT) {
 	tsoffset->xoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[2] + 0.5);
     }
     if (flags & TK_OFFSET_TOP) {
 	tsoffset->yoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[1] + 0.5);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE) {
-	tsoffset->yoffset = (int) ((rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]+1)/2);
+	tsoffset->yoffset = (int)
+		((rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]+1)/2);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM) {
 	tsoffset->yoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[2] + 0.5);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Configure the outline graphics context.  If mask is non-zero,
-     * the gc has changed and must be reallocated, provided that the
-     * new settings specify a valid outline (non-zero width and non-NULL
-     * color)
+     * Configure the outline graphics context. If mask is non-zero, the gc has
+     * changed and must be reallocated, provided that the new settings specify
+     * a valid outline (non-zero width and non-NULL color)
      */
 
     mask = Tk_ConfigOutlineGC(&gcValues, canvas, itemPtr,
-	     &(rectOvalPtr->outline));
+	    &(rectOvalPtr->outline));
     if (mask && \
 	    rectOvalPtr->outline.width != 0 && \
 	    rectOvalPtr->outline.color != NULL) {
@@ -475,10 +480,10 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
     rectOvalPtr->outline.gc = newGC;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
-    if (state==TK_STATE_HIDDEN) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN) {
 	ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr);
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
@@ -492,7 +497,7 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	if (rectOvalPtr->activeFillStipple!=None) {
 	    stipple = rectOvalPtr->activeFillStipple;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (rectOvalPtr->disabledFillColor!=NULL) {
 	    color = rectOvalPtr->disabledFillColor;
 	}
@@ -533,14 +538,16 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     if (flags & TK_OFFSET_LEFT) {
 	tsoffset->xoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[0] + 0.5);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
-	tsoffset->xoffset = (int) ((rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]+1)/2);
+	tsoffset->xoffset = (int)
+		((rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]+1)/2);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_RIGHT) {
 	tsoffset->xoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[2] + 0.5);
     }
     if (flags & TK_OFFSET_TOP) {
 	tsoffset->yoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[1] + 0.5);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE) {
-	tsoffset->yoffset = (int) ((rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]+1)/2);
+	tsoffset->yoffset = (int)
+		((rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]+1)/2);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM) {
 	tsoffset->yoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[3] + 0.5);
     }
@@ -555,8 +562,8 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * DeleteRectOval --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to clean up the data structure
- *	associated with a rectangle or oval item.
+ *	This function is called to clean up the data structure associated with
+ *	a rectangle or oval item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -568,11 +575,10 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Info about overall widget. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being deleted. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display containing window for
-					 * canvas. */
+DeleteRectOval(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Info about overall widget. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being deleted. */
+    Display *display)		/* Display containing window for canvas. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -605,37 +611,34 @@ DeleteRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display)
  *
  * ComputeRectOvalBbox --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to compute the bounding box of
- *	all the pixels that may be drawn as part of a rectangle
- *	or oval.
+ *	This function is invoked to compute the bounding box of all the pixels
+ *	that may be drawn as part of a rectangle or oval.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header
- *	for itemPtr.
+ *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr;		/* Item whose bbox is to be
-					 * recomputed. */
+ComputeRectOvalBbox(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr)	/* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
 {
     int bloat, tmp;
     double dtmp, width;
     Tk_State state = rectOvalPtr->header.state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
     width = rectOvalPtr->outline.width;
-    if (state==TK_STATE_HIDDEN) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN) {
 	rectOvalPtr->header.x1 = rectOvalPtr->header.y1 =
 	rectOvalPtr->header.x2 = rectOvalPtr->header.y2 = -1;
 	return;
@@ -644,7 +647,7 @@ ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr)
 	if (rectOvalPtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
 	    width = rectOvalPtr->outline.activeWidth;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (rectOvalPtr->outline.disabledWidth>0) {
 	    width = rectOvalPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
 	}
@@ -655,24 +658,25 @@ ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr)
      */
 
     if (rectOvalPtr->bbox[1] > rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]) {
-	double tmp;
-	tmp = rectOvalPtr->bbox[3];
+	double tmpY = rectOvalPtr->bbox[3];
+
 	rectOvalPtr->bbox[3] = rectOvalPtr->bbox[1];
-	rectOvalPtr->bbox[1] = tmp;
+	rectOvalPtr->bbox[1] = tmpY;
     }
     if (rectOvalPtr->bbox[0] > rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]) {
-	double tmp;
-	tmp = rectOvalPtr->bbox[2];
+	double tmpX = rectOvalPtr->bbox[2];
+
 	rectOvalPtr->bbox[2] = rectOvalPtr->bbox[0];
-	rectOvalPtr->bbox[0] = tmp;
+	rectOvalPtr->bbox[0] = tmpX;
     }
 
     if (rectOvalPtr->outline.gc == None) {
 	/*
-	 * The Win32 switch was added for 8.3 to solve a problem
-	 * with ovals leaving traces on bottom and right of 1 pixel.
-	 * This may not be the correct place to solve it, but it works.
+	 * The Win32 switch was added for 8.3 to solve a problem with ovals
+	 * leaving traces on bottom and right of 1 pixel. This may not be the
+	 * correct place to solve it, but it works.
 	 */
+
 #ifdef __WIN32__
 	bloat = 1;
 #else
@@ -680,9 +684,12 @@ ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr)
 #endif
     } else {
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
-	/* Mac OS X CoreGraphics needs correct rounding here 
-	 * otherwise it will draw outside the bounding box.
-	 * Probably correct on other platforms as well? */
+	/*
+	 * Mac OS X CoreGraphics needs correct rounding here otherwise it will
+	 * draw outside the bounding box. Probably correct on other platforms
+	 * as well?
+	 */
+
 	bloat = (int) (width+1.5)/2;
 #else
 	bloat = (int) (width+1)/2;
@@ -690,9 +697,9 @@ ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Special note:  the rectangle is always drawn at least 1x1 in
-     * size, so round up the upper coordinates to be at least 1 unit
-     * greater than the lower ones.
+     * Special note: the rectangle is always drawn at least 1x1 in size, so
+     * round up the upper coordinates to be at least 1 unit greater than the
+     * lower ones.
      */
 
     tmp = (int) ((rectOvalPtr->bbox[0] >= 0) ? rectOvalPtr->bbox[0] + .5
@@ -720,28 +727,28 @@ ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr)
  *
  * DisplayRectOval --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to draw a rectangle or oval
- *	item in a given drawable.
+ *	This function is invoked to draw a rectangle or oval item in a given
+ *	drawable.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation
- *	information in canvas.
+ *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation information in
+ *	canvas.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display on which to draw item. */
-    Drawable drawable;			/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
-					 * item. */
-    int x, y, width, height;		/* Describes region of canvas that
-					 * must be redisplayed (not used). */
+DisplayRectOval(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to be displayed. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw item. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw item. */
+    int x, int y, int width, int height)
+				/* Describes region of canvas that must be
+				 * redisplayed (not used). */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
     short x1, y1, x2, y2;
@@ -749,9 +756,9 @@ DisplayRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
     /*
-     * Compute the screen coordinates of the bounding box for the item.
-     * Make sure that the bbox is at least one pixel large, since some
-     * X servers will die if it isn't.
+     * Compute the screen coordinates of the bounding box for the item. Make
+     * sure that the bbox is at least one pixel large, since some X servers
+     * will die if it isn't.
      */
 
     Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, rectOvalPtr->bbox[0], rectOvalPtr->bbox[1],
@@ -766,22 +773,21 @@ DisplayRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Display filled part first (if wanted), then outline.  If we're
-     * stippling, then modify the stipple offset in the GC.  Be sure to
-     * reset the offset when done, since the GC is supposed to be
-     * read-only.
+     * Display filled part first (if wanted), then outline. If we're
+     * stippling, then modify the stipple offset in the GC. Be sure to reset
+     * the offset when done, since the GC is supposed to be read-only.
      */
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
     fillStipple = rectOvalPtr->fillStipple;
     if (((TkCanvas *)canvas)->currentItemPtr == (Tk_Item *)rectOvalPtr) {
-	if (rectOvalPtr->activeFillStipple!=None) {
+	if (rectOvalPtr->activeFillStipple != None) {
 	    fillStipple = rectOvalPtr->activeFillStipple;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
-	if (rectOvalPtr->disabledFillStipple!=None) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+	if (rectOvalPtr->disabledFillStipple != None) {
 	    fillStipple = rectOvalPtr->disabledFillStipple;
 	}
     }
@@ -789,10 +795,12 @@ DisplayRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
     if (rectOvalPtr->fillGC != None) {
 	if (fillStipple != None) {
 	    Tk_TSOffset *tsoffset;
-	    int w=0; int h=0;
+	    int w = 0, h = 0;
+
 	    tsoffset = &rectOvalPtr->tsoffset;
 	    if (tsoffset) {
 		int flags = tsoffset->flags;
+
 		if (flags & (TK_OFFSET_CENTER|TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE)) {
 		    Tk_SizeOfBitmap(display, fillStipple, &w, &h);
 		    if (flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
@@ -827,6 +835,7 @@ DisplayRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 	    XSetTSOrigin(display, rectOvalPtr->fillGC, 0, 0);
 	}
     }
+
     if (rectOvalPtr->outline.gc != None) {
 	Tk_ChangeOutlineGC(canvas, itemPtr, &(rectOvalPtr->outline));
 	if (rectOvalPtr->header.typePtr == &tkRectangleType) {
@@ -845,17 +854,16 @@ DisplayRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
  *
  * RectToPoint --
  *
- *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given
- *	rectangle, in canvas units.
+ *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given rectangle, in
+ *	canvas units.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates
- *	are coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the rectangle.  If the
- *	point isn't inside the rectangle then the return value is the
- *	distance from the point to the rectangle.  If itemPtr is filled,
- *	then anywhere in the interior is considered "inside"; if
- *	itemPtr isn't filled, then "inside" means only the area
- *	occupied by the outline.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates are
+ *	coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the rectangle. If the point
+ *	isn't inside the rectangle then the return value is the distance from
+ *	the point to the rectangle. If itemPtr is filled, then anywhere in the
+ *	interior is considered "inside"; if itemPtr isn't filled, then
+ *	"inside" means only the area occupied by the outline.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -865,17 +873,17 @@ DisplayRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static double
-RectToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against point. */
-    double *pointPtr;		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
+RectToPoint(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against point. */
+    double *pointPtr)		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
     double xDiff, yDiff, x1, y1, x2, y2, inc, tmp;
     double width;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
@@ -884,15 +892,15 @@ RectToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	if (rectPtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
 	    width = rectPtr->outline.activeWidth;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (rectPtr->outline.disabledWidth>0) {
 	    width = rectPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Generate a new larger rectangle that includes the border
-     * width, if there is one.
+     * Generate a new larger rectangle that includes the border width, if
+     * there is one.
      */
 
     x1 = rectPtr->bbox[0];
@@ -908,14 +916,13 @@ RectToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the point is inside the rectangle, handle specially:
-     * distance is 0 if rectangle is filled, otherwise compute
-     * distance to nearest edge of rectangle and subtract width
-     * of edge.
+     * If the point is inside the rectangle, handle specially: distance is 0
+     * if rectangle is filled, otherwise compute distance to nearest edge of
+     * rectangle and subtract width of edge.
      */
 
     if ((pointPtr[0] >= x1) && (pointPtr[0] < x2)
-		&& (pointPtr[1] >= y1) && (pointPtr[1] < y2)) {
+	    && (pointPtr[1] >= y1) && (pointPtr[1] < y2)) {
 	if ((rectPtr->fillGC != None) || (rectPtr->outline.gc == None)) {
 	    return 0.0;
 	}
@@ -967,17 +974,16 @@ RectToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
  *
  * OvalToPoint --
  *
- *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given
- *	oval, in canvas units.
+ *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given oval, in canvas
+ *	units.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates
- *	are coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the oval.  If the
- *	point isn't inside the oval then the return value is the
- *	distance from the point to the oval.  If itemPtr is filled,
- *	then anywhere in the interior is considered "inside"; if
- *	itemPtr isn't filled, then "inside" means only the area
- *	occupied by the outline.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates are
+ *	coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the oval. If the point isn't
+ *	inside the oval then the return value is the distance from the point
+ *	to the oval. If itemPtr is filled, then anywhere in the interior is
+ *	considered "inside"; if itemPtr isn't filled, then "inside" means only
+ *	the area occupied by the outline.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -987,17 +993,17 @@ RectToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static double
-OvalToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against point. */
-    double *pointPtr;		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
+OvalToPoint(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against point. */
+    double *pointPtr)		/* Pointer to x and y coordinates. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *ovalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
     double width;
     int filled;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
@@ -1006,7 +1012,7 @@ OvalToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	if (ovalPtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
 	    width = (double) ovalPtr->outline.activeWidth;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (ovalPtr->outline.disabledWidth>0) {
 	    width = (double) ovalPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
 	}
@@ -1026,14 +1032,13 @@ OvalToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
  *
  * RectToArea --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to determine whether an item
- *	lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or overlapping
- *	a given rectangle.
+ *	This function is called to determine whether an item lies entirely
+ *	inside, entirely outside, or overlapping a given rectangle.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area
- *	given by rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely
- *	inside the given area.
+ *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area given by
+ *	rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside the given
+ *	area.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1043,19 +1048,18 @@ OvalToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-RectToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against rectangle. */
-    double *areaPtr;		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
-				 * (x1, y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular
-				 * area.  */
+RectToArea(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against rectangle. */
+    double *areaPtr)		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates (x1,
+				 * y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular area. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
     double halfWidth;
     double width;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
@@ -1064,7 +1068,7 @@ RectToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
 	if (rectPtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
 	    width = rectPtr->outline.activeWidth;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (rectPtr->outline.disabledWidth>0) {
 	    width = rectPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
 	}
@@ -1102,14 +1106,13 @@ RectToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
  *
  * OvalToArea --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to determine whether an item
- *	lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or overlapping
- *	a given rectangular area.
+ *	This function is called to determine whether an item lies entirely
+ *	inside, entirely outside, or overlapping a given rectangular area.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area
- *	given by rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely
- *	inside the given area.
+ *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area given by
+ *	rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside the given
+ *	area.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1119,12 +1122,11 @@ RectToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-OvalToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against oval. */
-    double *areaPtr;		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
-				 * (x1, y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular
-				 * area.  */
+OvalToArea(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item to check against oval. */
+    double *areaPtr)		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates (x1,
+				 * y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular area. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *ovalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
     double oval[4], halfWidth;
@@ -1132,7 +1134,7 @@ OvalToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
     double width;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
@@ -1141,7 +1143,7 @@ OvalToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
 	if (ovalPtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
 	    width = ovalPtr->outline.activeWidth;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (ovalPtr->outline.disabledWidth>0) {
 	    width = ovalPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
 	}
@@ -1163,10 +1165,10 @@ OvalToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
     result = TkOvalToArea(oval, areaPtr);
 
     /*
-     * If the rectangle appears to overlap the oval and the oval
-     * isn't filled, do one more check to see if perhaps all four
-     * of the rectangle's corners are totally inside the oval's
-     * unfilled center, in which case we should return "outside".
+     * If the rectangle appears to overlap the oval and the oval isn't filled,
+     * do one more check to see if perhaps all four of the rectangle's corners
+     * are totally inside the oval's unfilled center, in which case we should
+     * return "outside".
      */
 
     if ((result == 0) && (ovalPtr->outline.gc != None)
@@ -1201,16 +1203,14 @@ OvalToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
  *
  * ScaleRectOval --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to rescale a rectangle or oval
- *	item.
+ *	This function is invoked to rescale a rectangle or oval item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The rectangle or oval referred to by itemPtr is rescaled
- *	so that the following transformation is applied to all
- *	point coordinates:
+ *	The rectangle or oval referred to by itemPtr is rescaled so that the
+ *	following transformation is applied to all point coordinates:
  *		x' = originX + scaleX*(x-originX)
  *		y' = originY + scaleY*(y-originY)
  *
@@ -1218,12 +1218,13 @@ OvalToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ScaleRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing rectangle. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Rectangle to be scaled. */
-    double originX, originY;		/* Origin about which to scale rect. */
-    double scaleX;			/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
-    double scaleY;			/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
+ScaleRectOval(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing rectangle. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Rectangle to be scaled. */
+    double originX, double originY,
+				/* Origin about which to scale rect. */
+    double scaleX,		/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
+    double scaleY)		/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -1239,26 +1240,25 @@ ScaleRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
  *
  * TranslateRectOval --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to move a rectangle or oval by a
- *	given amount.
+ *	This function is called to move a rectangle or oval by a given amount.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The position of the rectangle or oval is offset by
- *	(xDelta, yDelta), and the bounding box is updated in the
- *	generic part of the item structure.
+ *	The position of the rectangle or oval is offset by (xDelta, yDelta),
+ *	and the bounding box is updated in the generic part of the item
+ *	structure.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TranslateRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being moved. */
-    double deltaX, deltaY;		/* Amount by which item is to be
-					 * moved. */
+TranslateRectOval(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item that is being moved. */
+    double deltaX, double deltaY)
+				/* Amount by which item is to be moved. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -1274,15 +1274,14 @@ TranslateRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
  *
  * RectOvalToPostscript --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to generate Postscript for
- *	rectangle and oval items.
+ *	This function is called to generate Postscript for rectangle and oval
+ *	items.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If an error
- *	occurs in generating Postscript then an error message is
- *	left in the interp's result, replacing whatever used to be there.
- *	If no error occurs, then Postscript for the rectangle is
- *	appended to the result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If an error occurs in
+ *	generating Postscript then an error message is left in the interp's
+ *	result, replacing whatever used to be there. If no error occurs, then
+ *	Postscript for the rectangle is appended to the result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1291,14 +1290,13 @@ TranslateRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
  */
 
 static int
-RectOvalToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about overall canvas. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item for which Postscript is
-					 * wanted. */
-    int prepass;			/* 1 means this is a prepass to
-					 * collect font information;  0 means
-					 * final Postscript is being created. */
+RectOvalToPostscript(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Information about overall canvas. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr,		/* Item for which Postscript is wanted. */
+    int prepass)		/* 1 means this is a prepass to collect font
+				 * information; 0 means final Postscript is
+				 * being created. */
 {
     char pathCmd[500];
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
@@ -1312,12 +1310,10 @@ RectOvalToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
     y2 = Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]);
 
     /*
-     * Generate a string that creates a path for the rectangle or oval.
-     * This is the only part of the procedure's code that is type-
-     * specific.
+     * Generate a string that creates a path for the rectangle or oval. This
+     * is the only part of the function's code that is type-specific.
      */
 
-
     if (rectOvalPtr->header.typePtr == &tkRectangleType) {
 	sprintf(pathCmd, "%.15g %.15g moveto %.15g 0 rlineto 0 %.15g rlineto %.15g 0 rlineto closepath\n",
 		rectOvalPtr->bbox[0], y1,
@@ -1329,7 +1325,7 @@ RectOvalToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 		(rectOvalPtr->bbox[2] - rectOvalPtr->bbox[0])/2, (y1 - y2)/2);
     }
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
     color = rectOvalPtr->outline.color;
@@ -1345,7 +1341,7 @@ RectOvalToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 	if (rectOvalPtr->activeFillStipple!=None) {
 	    fillStipple = rectOvalPtr->activeFillStipple;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (rectOvalPtr->outline.disabledColor!=NULL) {
 	    color = rectOvalPtr->outline.disabledColor;
 	}
@@ -1362,22 +1358,20 @@ RectOvalToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
      */
 
     if (fillColor != NULL) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, pathCmd, (char *) NULL);
-	if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, fillColor)
-		!= TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, pathCmd, NULL);
+	if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, fillColor) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (fillStipple != None) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", (char *) NULL);
-	    if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, fillStipple)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", NULL);
+	    if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, fillStipple) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    if (color != NULL) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore gsave\n", (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "grestore gsave\n", NULL);
 	    }
 	} else {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "fill\n", NULL);
 	}
     }
 
@@ -1387,7 +1381,7 @@ RectOvalToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 
     if (color != NULL) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, pathCmd, "0 setlinejoin 2 setlinecap\n",
-		(char *) NULL);
+		NULL);
 	if (Tk_CanvasPsOutline(canvas, itemPtr,
 		&(rectOvalPtr->outline))!= TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1395,3 +1389,11 @@ RectOvalToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkScale.c b/generic/tkScale.c
index 1c5c6f3..28e5b16 100644
--- a/generic/tkScale.c
+++ b/generic/tkScale.c
@@ -1,49 +1,45 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkScale.c --
  *
- *	This module implements a scale widgets for the Tk toolkit.
- *	A scale displays a slider that can be adjusted to change a
- *	value;  it also displays numeric labels and a textual label,
- *	if desired.
- *	
- *	The modifications to use floating-point values are based on
- *	an implementation by Paul Mackerras.  The -variable option
- *	is due to Henning Schulzrinne.  All of these are used with
- *	permission.
+ *	This module implements a scale widgets for the Tk toolkit. A scale
+ *	displays a slider that can be adjusted to change a value; it also
+ *	displays numeric labels and a textual label, if desired.
+ *
+ *	The modifications to use floating-point values are based on an
+ *	implementation by Paul Mackerras. The -variable option is due to
+ *	Henning Schulzrinne. All of these are used with permission.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "default.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tclMath.h"
 #include "tkScale.h"
 
 /*
- * The following table defines the legal values for the -orient option.
- * It is used together with the "enum orient" declaration in tkScale.h.
+ * The following table defines the legal values for the -orient option. It is
+ * used together with the "enum orient" declaration in tkScale.h.
  */
 
-static CONST char *CONST orientStrings[] = {
-    "horizontal", "vertical", (char *) NULL
+static const char *const orientStrings[] = {
+    "horizontal", "vertical", NULL
 };
 
 /*
- * The following table defines the legal values for the -state option.
- * It is used together with the "enum state" declaration in tkScale.h.
+ * The following table defines the legal values for the -state option. It is
+ * used together with the "enum state" declaration in tkScale.h.
  */
 
-static CONST char *CONST stateStrings[] = {
-    "active", "disabled", "normal", (char *) NULL
+static const char *const stateStrings[] = {
+    "active", "disabled", "normal", NULL
 };
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground",
 	DEF_SCALE_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, activeBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_SCALE_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
@@ -51,42 +47,42 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
 	DEF_SCALE_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, bgBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_SCALE_BG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-bigincrement", "bigIncrement", "BigIncrement",
-        DEF_SCALE_BIG_INCREMENT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, bigIncrement), 
-        0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
+	DEF_SCALE_BIG_INCREMENT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, bigIncrement),
+	0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_SCALE_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, borderWidth), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SCALE_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, borderWidth),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
 	DEF_SCALE_COMMAND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, command),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
 	DEF_SCALE_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, cursor),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-digits", "digits", "Digits", 
-	DEF_SCALE_DIGITS, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, digits), 
-        0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-digits", "digits", "Digits",
+	DEF_SCALE_DIGITS, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, digits),
+	0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	DEF_SCALE_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
-	DEF_SCALE_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, textColorPtr), 0, 
-        (ClientData) DEF_SCALE_FG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-from", "from", "From", DEF_SCALE_FROM, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(TkScale, fromValue), 0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SCALE_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, textColorPtr), 0,
+	(ClientData) DEF_SCALE_FG_MONO, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-from", "from", "From", DEF_SCALE_FROM, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(TkScale, fromValue), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
 	"HighlightBackground", DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR,
-	-1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, highlightBorder), 
-        0, (ClientData) DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT_BG_MONO, 0},
+	-1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, highlightBorder),
+	0, (ClientData) DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT_BG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
 	DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, highlightColorPtr),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
-	"HighlightThickness", DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1, 
+	"HighlightThickness", DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1,
 	Tk_Offset(TkScale, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-label", "label", "Label",
 	DEF_SCALE_LABEL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, label),
@@ -94,59 +90,58 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-length", "length", "Length",
 	DEF_SCALE_LENGTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, length), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-orient", "orient", "Orient",
-        DEF_SCALE_ORIENT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, orient), 
-        0, (ClientData) orientStrings, 0},
+	DEF_SCALE_ORIENT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, orient),
+	0, (ClientData) orientStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
 	DEF_SCALE_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, relief), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatdelay", "repeatDelay", "RepeatDelay",
-        DEF_SCALE_REPEAT_DELAY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, repeatDelay),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SCALE_REPEAT_DELAY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, repeatDelay),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatinterval", "repeatInterval", "RepeatInterval",
-        DEF_SCALE_REPEAT_INTERVAL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, repeatInterval),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SCALE_REPEAT_INTERVAL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, repeatInterval),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-resolution", "resolution", "Resolution",
-        DEF_SCALE_RESOLUTION, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, resolution),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SCALE_RESOLUTION, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, resolution),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-showvalue", "showValue", "ShowValue",
-        DEF_SCALE_SHOW_VALUE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, showValue),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SCALE_SHOW_VALUE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, showValue),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-sliderlength", "sliderLength", "SliderLength",
-        DEF_SCALE_SLIDER_LENGTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, sliderLength),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SCALE_SLIDER_LENGTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, sliderLength),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-sliderrelief", "sliderRelief", "SliderRelief",
-	DEF_SCALE_SLIDER_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, sliderRelief), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SCALE_SLIDER_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, sliderRelief),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
-        DEF_SCALE_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, state), 
-        0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
+	DEF_SCALE_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, state),
+	0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
 	DEF_SCALE_TAKE_FOCUS, Tk_Offset(TkScale, takeFocusPtr), -1,
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-tickinterval", "tickInterval", "TickInterval",
-        DEF_SCALE_TICK_INTERVAL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, tickInterval),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SCALE_TICK_INTERVAL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, tickInterval),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-to", "to", "To",
-        DEF_SCALE_TO, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, toValue), 0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SCALE_TO, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, toValue), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-troughcolor", "troughColor", "Background",
-        DEF_SCALE_TROUGH_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, troughColorPtr),
-        0, (ClientData) DEF_SCALE_TROUGH_MONO, 0},
+	DEF_SCALE_TROUGH_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, troughColorPtr),
+	0, (ClientData) DEF_SCALE_TROUGH_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable",
 	DEF_SCALE_VARIABLE, Tk_Offset(TkScale, varNamePtr), -1,
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width",
 	DEF_SCALE_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkScale, width), 0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * The following tables define the scale widget commands and map the 
- * indexes into the string tables into a single enumerated type used 
- * to dispatch the scale widget command.
+ * The following tables define the scale widget commands and map the indexes
+ * into the string tables into a single enumerated type used to dispatch the
+ * scale widget command.
  */
 
-static CONST char *commandNames[] = {
-    "cget", "configure", "coords", "get", "identify", "set", (char *) NULL
+static const char *commandNames[] = {
+    "cget", "configure", "coords", "get", "identify", "set", NULL
 };
 
 enum command {
@@ -158,25 +153,22 @@ enum command {
  * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ComputeFormat _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr));
-static void		ComputeScaleGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr));
-static int		ConfigureScale _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkScale *scalePtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		DestroyScale _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static void		ScaleCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		ScaleEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static char *		ScaleVarProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name1,
-			    CONST char *name2, int flags));
-static int		ScaleWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		ScaleWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData instanceData));
-static void		ScaleSetVariable _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr));
+static void		ComputeFormat(TkScale *scalePtr);
+static void		ComputeScaleGeometry(TkScale *scalePtr);
+static int		ConfigureScale(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkScale *scalePtr,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		DestroyScale(char *memPtr);
+static void		ScaleCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		ScaleEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static char *		ScaleVarProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name1,
+			    const char *name2, int flags);
+static int		ScaleWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		ScaleWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
+static void		ScaleSetVariable(TkScale *scalePtr);
 
 /*
  * The structure below defines scale class behavior by means of procedures
@@ -187,16 +179,14 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs scaleClass = {
     sizeof(Tk_ClassProcs),	/* size */
     ScaleWorldChanged,		/* worldChangedProc */
 };
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_ScaleObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "scale" Tcl
- *	command.  See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the "scale" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -208,11 +198,11 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs scaleClass = {
  */
 
 int
-Tk_ScaleObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument values. */
+Tk_ScaleObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument values. */
 {
     register TkScale *scalePtr;
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
@@ -224,14 +214,14 @@ Tk_ScaleObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-            Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL);
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has already
-     * been created, the cached pointer will be returned.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, the cached pointer will be returned.
      */
 
     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
@@ -240,9 +230,9 @@ Tk_ScaleObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     scalePtr = TkpCreateScale(tkwin);
 
     /*
-     * Initialize fields that won't be initialized by ConfigureScale,
-     * or which ConfigureScale expects to have reasonable values
-     * (e.g. resource pointers).
+     * Initialize fields that won't be initialized by ConfigureScale, or which
+     * ConfigureScale expects to have reasonable values (e.g. resource
+     * pointers).
      */
 
     scalePtr->tkwin		= tkwin;
@@ -320,9 +310,9 @@ Tk_ScaleObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ScaleWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -334,157 +324,151 @@ Tk_ScaleObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-ScaleWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about scale
-					 * widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Argument strings. */
+ScaleWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about scale widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument strings. */
 {
     TkScale *scalePtr = (TkScale *) clientData;
     Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
     int index, result;
 
     if (objc < 2) {
-        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], commandNames,
-            "option", 0, &index);
+	    "option", 0, &index);
     if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	return result;
     }
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) scalePtr);
 
     switch (index) {
-        case COMMAND_CGET: {
-  	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) scalePtr,
-		    scalePtr->optionTable, objv[2], scalePtr->tkwin);
+    case COMMAND_CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) scalePtr,
+		scalePtr->optionTable, objv[2], scalePtr->tkwin);
+	if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	    goto error;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case COMMAND_CONFIGURE:
+	if (objc <= 3) {
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) scalePtr,
+		    scalePtr->optionTable,
+		    (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL, scalePtr->tkwin);
 	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		 goto error;
+		goto error;
 	    } else {
 		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureScale(interp, scalePtr, objc-2, objv+2);
 	}
-        case COMMAND_CONFIGURE: {
-	    if (objc <= 3) {
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) scalePtr,
-			scalePtr->optionTable,
-			(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-			scalePtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    goto error;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		}
-	    } else {
-		result = ConfigureScale(interp, scalePtr, objc-2, objv+2);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	break;
+    case COMMAND_COORDS: {
+	int x, y ;
+	double value;
+	char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 2];
+
+	if ((objc != 2) && (objc != 3)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "coords ?value?");
+	    goto error;
 	}
-        case COMMAND_COORDS: {
-	    int x, y ;
-	    double value;
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 2];
-
-	    if ((objc != 2) && (objc != 3)) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "coords ?value?");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-	        if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &value) 
-                        != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
-	    } else {
-	        value = scalePtr->value;
-	    }
-	    if (scalePtr->orient == ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
-	        x = scalePtr->vertTroughX + scalePtr->width/2
-		        + scalePtr->borderWidth;
-		y = TkScaleValueToPixel(scalePtr, value);
-	    } else {
-	        x = TkScaleValueToPixel(scalePtr, value);
-		y = scalePtr->horizTroughY + scalePtr->width/2
-                        + scalePtr->borderWidth;
-	    }
-	    sprintf(buf, "%d %d", x, y);
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-            break;
-        }
-        case COMMAND_GET: {
-	    double value;
-	    int x, y;
-	    char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
-
-	    if ((objc != 2) && (objc != 4)) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "get ?x y?");
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &value) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (objc == 2) {
-	        value = scalePtr->value;
-	    } else {
-	        if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK)
-		        || (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) 
-                        != TCL_OK)) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
-		value = TkScalePixelToValue(scalePtr, x, y);
-	    }
-	    sprintf(buf, scalePtr->format, value);
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-            break;
-        }
-        case COMMAND_IDENTIFY: {
-	    int x, y, thing;
-
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "identify x y");
+	} else {
+	    value = scalePtr->value;
+	}
+	if (scalePtr->orient == ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	    x = scalePtr->vertTroughX + scalePtr->width/2
+		    + scalePtr->borderWidth;
+	    y = TkScaleValueToPixel(scalePtr, value);
+	} else {
+	    x = TkScaleValueToPixel(scalePtr, value);
+	    y = scalePtr->horizTroughY + scalePtr->width/2
+		    + scalePtr->borderWidth;
+	}
+	sprintf(buf, "%d %d", x, y);
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	break;
+    }
+    case COMMAND_GET: {
+	double value;
+	int x, y;
+	char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
+
+	if ((objc != 2) && (objc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "get ?x y?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (objc == 2) {
+	    value = scalePtr->value;
+	} else {
+	    if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK) ||
+		    (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK)
-                    || (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    thing = TkpScaleElement(scalePtr, x,y);
-	    switch (thing) {
-	        case TROUGH1:
-		    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "trough1", TCL_STATIC);
-		    break;
-	        case SLIDER:
-		    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "slider", TCL_STATIC);
-		    break;
-	        case TROUGH2:
-		    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "trough2", TCL_STATIC);
-		    break;
-	    }
-            break;
-        }
-        case COMMAND_SET: {
-	    double value;
+	    value = TkScalePixelToValue(scalePtr, x, y);
+	}
+	sprintf(buf, scalePtr->format, value);
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	break;
+    }
+    case COMMAND_IDENTIFY: {
+	int x, y, thing;
 
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "set value");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &value) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (scalePtr->state != STATE_DISABLED) {
-	      TkScaleSetValue(scalePtr, value, 1, 1);
-	    }
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "identify x y");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK)
+		|| (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	thing = TkpScaleElement(scalePtr, x,y);
+	switch (thing) {
+	case TROUGH1:
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "trough1", TCL_STATIC);
+	    break;
+	case SLIDER:
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "slider", TCL_STATIC);
 	    break;
-        } 
+	case TROUGH2:
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "trough2", TCL_STATIC);
+	    break;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case COMMAND_SET: {
+	double value;
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "set value");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &value) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (scalePtr->state != STATE_DISABLED) {
+	    TkScaleSetValue(scalePtr, value, 1, 1);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
     }
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) scalePtr);
     return result;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) scalePtr);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -494,9 +478,9 @@ ScaleWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * DestroyScale --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a button at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to
+ *	clean up the internal structure of a button at a safe time (when
+ *	no-one is using it anymore).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -508,8 +492,8 @@ ScaleWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyScale(memPtr)
-    char *memPtr;	/* Info about scale widget. */
+DestroyScale(
+    char *memPtr)	/* Info about scale widget. */
 {
     register TkScale *scalePtr = (TkScale *) memPtr;
 
@@ -521,9 +505,8 @@ DestroyScale(memPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then
-     * let Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related
-     * stuff.
+     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let
+     * Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
      */
 
     if (scalePtr->varNamePtr != NULL) {
@@ -551,29 +534,28 @@ DestroyScale(memPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureScale --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a scale widget.
+ *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) a scale
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width,
- *	etc. get set for scalePtr;  old resources get freed,
- *	if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width, etc. get set
+ *	for scalePtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureScale(interp, scalePtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    register TkScale *scalePtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or may
-				 * not already have values for some fields. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of valid entries in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument values. */
+ConfigureScale(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    register TkScale *scalePtr,	/* Information about widget; may or may not
+				 * already have values for some fields. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of valid entries in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument values. */
 {
     Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
     Tcl_Obj *errorResult = NULL;
@@ -598,7 +580,7 @@ ConfigureScale(interp, scalePtr, objc, objv)
 
 	    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) scalePtr,
 		    scalePtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
-		    scalePtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, (int *) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+		    scalePtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 		continue;
 	    }
 	} else {
@@ -612,9 +594,9 @@ ConfigureScale(interp, scalePtr, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If the scale is tied to the value of a variable, then set 
-	 * the scale's value from the value of the variable, if it exists
-	 * and it holds a valid double value.
+	 * If the scale is tied to the value of a variable, then set the
+	 * scale's value from the value of the variable, if it exists and it
+	 * holds a valid double value.
 	 */
 
 	if (scalePtr->varNamePtr != NULL) {
@@ -634,11 +616,11 @@ ConfigureScale(interp, scalePtr, objc, objv)
 	 * orientation and creating GCs.
 	 */
 
-	scalePtr->fromValue = TkRoundToResolution(scalePtr, 
-                scalePtr->fromValue);
+	scalePtr->fromValue = TkRoundToResolution(scalePtr,
+		scalePtr->fromValue);
 	scalePtr->toValue = TkRoundToResolution(scalePtr, scalePtr->toValue);
 	scalePtr->tickInterval = TkRoundToResolution(scalePtr,
-	        scalePtr->tickInterval);
+		scalePtr->tickInterval);
 
 	/*
 	 * Make sure that the tick interval has the right sign so that
@@ -646,13 +628,13 @@ ConfigureScale(interp, scalePtr, objc, objv)
 	 */
 
 	if ((scalePtr->tickInterval < 0)
-		^ ((scalePtr->toValue - scalePtr->fromValue) <  0)) {
-	  scalePtr->tickInterval = -scalePtr->tickInterval;
+		^ ((scalePtr->toValue - scalePtr->fromValue) < 0)) {
+	    scalePtr->tickInterval = -scalePtr->tickInterval;
 	}
 
 	ComputeFormat(scalePtr);
 
-	scalePtr->labelLength = scalePtr->label ? strlen(scalePtr->label) : 0;
+	scalePtr->labelLength = scalePtr->label ? (int)strlen(scalePtr->label) : 0;
 
 	Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(scalePtr->tkwin, scalePtr->bgBorder);
 
@@ -663,14 +645,14 @@ ConfigureScale(interp, scalePtr, objc, objv)
 	break;
     }
     if (!error) {
-        Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+	Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Set the scale value to itself;  all this does is to make sure
-     * that the scale's value is within the new acceptable range for
-     * the scale.  We don't set the var here because we need to make
-     * special checks for possibly changed varNamePtr.
+     * Set the scale value to itself; all this does is to make sure that the
+     * scale's value is within the new acceptable range for the scale. We
+     * don't set the var here because we need to make special checks for
+     * possibly changed varNamePtr.
      */
 
     TkScaleSetValue(scalePtr, scalePtr->value, 0, 1);
@@ -683,36 +665,36 @@ ConfigureScale(interp, scalePtr, objc, objv)
 	Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;
 
 	/*
-	 * Set the associated variable only when the new value differs
-	 * from the current value, or the variable doesn't yet exist
+	 * Set the associated variable only when the new value differs from
+	 * the current value, or the variable doesn't yet exist.
 	 */
+
 	valuePtr = Tcl_ObjGetVar2(interp, scalePtr->varNamePtr, NULL,
 		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
 	if ((valuePtr == NULL) || (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL,
 		valuePtr, &varValue) != TCL_OK)) {
 	    ScaleSetVariable(scalePtr);
 	} else {
-	    char varString[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
-	    char scaleString[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
+	    char varString[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE], scaleString[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
+
 	    sprintf(varString, scalePtr->format, varValue);
 	    sprintf(scaleString, scalePtr->format, scalePtr->value);
 	    if (strcmp(varString, scaleString)) {
 		ScaleSetVariable(scalePtr);
 	    }
 	}
-        Tcl_TraceVar(interp, Tcl_GetString(scalePtr->varNamePtr),
-	        TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
-	        ScaleVarProc, (ClientData) scalePtr);
+	Tcl_TraceVar(interp, Tcl_GetString(scalePtr->varNamePtr),
+		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
+		ScaleVarProc, (ClientData) scalePtr);
     }
 
     ScaleWorldChanged((ClientData) scalePtr);
     if (error) {
-        Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(errorResult);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
-    } else {
-	return TCL_OK;
     }
+    return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -720,22 +702,22 @@ ConfigureScale(interp, scalePtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ScaleWorldChanged --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way and the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts
- *	and determine its new geometry.
+ *	This procedure is called when the world has changed in some way and
+ *	the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine
+ *	its new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      Scale will be relayed out and redisplayed.
+ *	Scale will be relayed out and redisplayed.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 static void
-ScaleWorldChanged(instanceData)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about widget. */
+ScaleWorldChanged(
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     XGCValues gcValues;
     GC gc;
@@ -761,13 +743,13 @@ ScaleWorldChanged(instanceData)
     if (scalePtr->copyGC == None) {
 	gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
 	scalePtr->copyGC = Tk_GetGC(scalePtr->tkwin, GCGraphicsExposures,
-	    &gcValues);
+		&gcValues);
     }
     scalePtr->inset = scalePtr->highlightWidth + scalePtr->borderWidth;
 
     /*
-     * Recompute display-related information, and let the geometry
-     * manager know how much space is needed now.
+     * Recompute display-related information, and let the geometry manager
+     * know how much space is needed now.
      */
 
     ComputeScaleGeometry(scalePtr);
@@ -780,9 +762,9 @@ ScaleWorldChanged(instanceData)
  *
  * ComputeFormat --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to recompute the "format" field
- *	of a scale's widget record, which determines how the value
- *	of the scale is converted to a string.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to recompute the "format" field of a scale's
+ *	widget record, which determines how the value of the scale is
+ *	converted to a string.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -794,16 +776,16 @@ ScaleWorldChanged(instanceData)
  */
 
 static void
-ComputeFormat(scalePtr)
-    TkScale *scalePtr;			/* Information about scale widget. */
+ComputeFormat(
+    TkScale *scalePtr)		/* Information about scale widget. */
 {
     double maxValue, x;
     int mostSigDigit, numDigits, leastSigDigit, afterDecimal;
     int eDigits, fDigits;
 
     /*
-     * Compute the displacement from the decimal of the most significant
-     * digit required for any number in the scale's range.
+     * Compute the displacement from the decimal of the most significant digit
+     * required for any number in the scale's range.
      */
 
     maxValue = fabs(scalePtr->fromValue);
@@ -818,17 +800,16 @@ ComputeFormat(scalePtr)
 
     /*
      * If the number of significant digits wasn't specified explicitly,
-     * compute it. It's the difference between the most significant
-     * digit needed to represent any number on the scale and the
-     * most significant digit of the smallest difference between
-     * numbers on the scale.  In other words, display enough digits so
-     * that at least one digit will be different between any two adjacent
-     * positions of the scale.
+     * compute it. It's the difference between the most significant digit
+     * needed to represent any number on the scale and the most significant
+     * digit of the smallest difference between numbers on the scale. In other
+     * words, display enough digits so that at least one digit will be
+     * different between any two adjacent positions of the scale.
      */
 
     numDigits = scalePtr->digits;
     if (numDigits <= 0) {
-	if  (scalePtr->resolution > 0) {
+	if (scalePtr->resolution > 0) {
 	    /*
 	     * A resolution was specified for the scale, so just use it.
 	     */
@@ -836,9 +817,9 @@ ComputeFormat(scalePtr)
 	    leastSigDigit = (int) floor(log10(scalePtr->resolution));
 	} else {
 	    /*
-	     * No resolution was specified, so compute the difference
-	     * in value between adjacent pixels and use it for the least
-	     * significant digit.
+	     * No resolution was specified, so compute the difference in value
+	     * between adjacent pixels and use it for the least significant
+	     * digit.
 	     */
 
 	    x = fabs(scalePtr->fromValue - scalePtr->toValue);
@@ -858,8 +839,8 @@ ComputeFormat(scalePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Compute the number of characters required using "e" format and
-     * "f" format, and then choose whichever one takes fewer characters.
+     * Compute the number of characters required using "e" format and "f"
+     * format, and then choose whichever one takes fewer characters.
      */
 
     eDigits = numDigits + 4;
@@ -889,23 +870,23 @@ ComputeFormat(scalePtr)
  *
  * ComputeScaleGeometry --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to compute various geometrical
- *	information for a scale, such as where various things get
- *	displayed.  It's called when the window is reconfigured.
+ *	This procedure is called to compute various geometrical information
+ *	for a scale, such as where various things get displayed. It's called
+ *	when the window is reconfigured.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Display-related numbers get changed in *scalePtr.  The
- *	geometry manager gets told about the window's preferred size.
+ *	Display-related numbers get changed in *scalePtr. The geometry manager
+ *	gets told about the window's preferred size.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ComputeScaleGeometry(scalePtr)
-    register TkScale *scalePtr;		/* Information about widget. */
+ComputeScaleGeometry(
+    register TkScale *scalePtr)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     char valueString[PRINT_CHARS];
     int tmp, valuePixels, x, y, extraSpace;
@@ -915,9 +896,9 @@ ComputeScaleGeometry(scalePtr)
     scalePtr->fontHeight = fm.linespace + SPACING;
 
     /*
-     * Horizontal scales are simpler than vertical ones because
-     * all sizes are the same (the height of a line of text);
-     * handle them first and then quit.
+     * Horizontal scales are simpler than vertical ones because all sizes are
+     * the same (the height of a line of text); handle them first and then
+     * quit.
      */
 
     if (scalePtr->orient == ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
@@ -949,9 +930,9 @@ ComputeScaleGeometry(scalePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Vertical scale:  compute the amount of space needed to display
-     * the scales value by formatting strings for the two end points;
-     * use whichever length is longer.
+     * Vertical scale: compute the amount of space needed to display the
+     * scales value by formatting strings for the two end points; use
+     * whichever length is longer.
      */
 
     sprintf(valueString, scalePtr->format, scalePtr->fromValue);
@@ -964,8 +945,8 @@ ComputeScaleGeometry(scalePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Assign x-locations to the elements of the scale, working from
-     * left to right.
+     * Assign x-locations to the elements of the scale, working from left to
+     * right.
      */
 
     x = scalePtr->inset;
@@ -1006,23 +987,23 @@ ComputeScaleGeometry(scalePtr)
  *
  * ScaleEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on scales.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	scales.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up.
+ *	When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ScaleEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+ScaleEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     TkScale *scalePtr = (TkScale *) clientData;
 
@@ -1055,9 +1036,9 @@ ScaleEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * ScaleCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1069,17 +1050,17 @@ ScaleEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ScaleCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+ScaleCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     TkScale *scalePtr = (TkScale *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = scalePtr->tkwin;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this procedure destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (!(scalePtr->flags & SCALE_DELETED)) {
@@ -1093,25 +1074,25 @@ ScaleCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * TkEventuallyRedrawScale --
  *
- *	Arrange for part or all of a scale widget to redrawn at
- *	the next convenient time in the future.
+ *	Arrange for part or all of a scale widget to redrawn at the next
+ *	convenient time in the future.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If "what" is REDRAW_SLIDER then just the slider and the
- *	value readout will be redrawn;  if "what" is REDRAW_ALL
- *	then the entire widget will be redrawn.
+ *	If "what" is REDRAW_SLIDER then just the slider and the value readout
+ *	will be redrawn; if "what" is REDRAW_ALL then the entire widget will
+ *	be redrawn.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkEventuallyRedrawScale(scalePtr, what)
-    register TkScale *scalePtr;	/* Information about widget. */
-    int what;			/* What to redraw:  REDRAW_SLIDER
-				 * or REDRAW_ALL. */
+TkEventuallyRedrawScale(
+    register TkScale *scalePtr,	/* Information about widget. */
+    int what)			/* What to redraw: REDRAW_SLIDER or
+				 * REDRAW_ALL. */
 {
     if ((what == 0) || (scalePtr->tkwin == NULL)
 	    || !Tk_IsMapped(scalePtr->tkwin)) {
@@ -1129,8 +1110,8 @@ TkEventuallyRedrawScale(scalePtr, what)
  *
  * TkRoundToResolution --
  *
- *	Round a given floating-point value to the nearest multiple
- *	of the scale's resolution.
+ *	Round a given floating-point value to the nearest multiple of the
+ *	scale's resolution.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is the rounded result.
@@ -1142,28 +1123,28 @@ TkEventuallyRedrawScale(scalePtr, what)
  */
 
 double
-TkRoundToResolution(scalePtr, value)
-    TkScale *scalePtr;		/* Information about scale widget. */
-    double value;		/* Value to round. */
+TkRoundToResolution(
+    TkScale *scalePtr,		/* Information about scale widget. */
+    double value)		/* Value to round. */
 {
-    double rem, new, tick;
+    double rem, rounded, tick;
 
     if (scalePtr->resolution <= 0) {
 	return value;
     }
     tick = floor(value/scalePtr->resolution);
-    new = scalePtr->resolution * tick;
-    rem = value - new;
+    rounded = scalePtr->resolution * tick;
+    rem = value - rounded;
     if (rem < 0) {
 	if (rem <= -scalePtr->resolution/2) {
-	    new = (tick - 1.0) * scalePtr->resolution;
+	    rounded = (tick - 1.0) * scalePtr->resolution;
 	}
     } else {
 	if (rem >= scalePtr->resolution/2) {
-	    new = (tick + 1.0) * scalePtr->resolution;
+	    rounded = (tick + 1.0) * scalePtr->resolution;
 	}
     }
-    return new;
+    return rounded;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1171,28 +1152,28 @@ TkRoundToResolution(scalePtr, value)
  *
  * ScaleVarProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl whenever someone modifies a
- *	variable associated with a scale widget.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl whenever someone modifies a variable
+ *	associated with a scale widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	NULL is always returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The value displayed in the scale will change to match the
- *	variable's new value.  If the variable has a bogus value then
- *	it is reset to the value of the scale.
+ *	The value displayed in the scale will change to match the variable's
+ *	new value. If the variable has a bogus value then it is reset to the
+ *	value of the scale.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
     /* ARGSUSED */
 static char *
-ScaleVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about button. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
-    CONST char *name1;		/* Name of variable. */
-    CONST char *name2;		/* Second part of variable name. */
-    int flags;			/* Information about what happened. */
+ScaleVarProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about button. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
+    const char *name1,		/* Name of variable. */
+    const char *name2,		/* Second part of variable name. */
+    int flags)			/* Information about what happened. */
 {
     register TkScale *scalePtr = (TkScale *) clientData;
     char *resultStr;
@@ -1201,8 +1182,8 @@ ScaleVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
     int result;
 
     /*
-     * If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless
-     * the whole interpreter is going away.
+     * If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless the whole
+     * interpreter is going away.
      */
 
     if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
@@ -1213,34 +1194,33 @@ ScaleVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
 	    scalePtr->flags |= NEVER_SET;
 	    TkScaleSetValue(scalePtr, scalePtr->value, 1, 0);
 	}
-	return (char *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
 
     /*
      * If we came here because we updated the variable (in TkScaleSetValue),
-     * then ignore the trace.  Otherwise update the scale with the value
-     * of the variable.
+     * then ignore the trace. Otherwise update the scale with the value of the
+     * variable.
      */
 
     if (scalePtr->flags & SETTING_VAR) {
-	return (char *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
     resultStr = NULL;
-    valuePtr = Tcl_ObjGetVar2(interp, scalePtr->varNamePtr, NULL, 
-            TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    valuePtr = Tcl_ObjGetVar2(interp, scalePtr->varNamePtr, NULL,
+	    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
     result = Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &value);
     if (result != TCL_OK) {
-        resultStr = "can't assign non-numeric value to scale variable";
+	resultStr = "can't assign non-numeric value to scale variable";
 	ScaleSetVariable(scalePtr);
     } else {
 	scalePtr->value = TkRoundToResolution(scalePtr, value);
 
 	/*
 	 * This code is a bit tricky because it sets the scale's value before
-	 * calling TkScaleSetValue.  This way, TkScaleSetValue won't bother 
-	 * to set the variable again or to invoke the -command.  However, it
-	 * also won't redisplay the scale, so we have to ask for that
-	 * explicitly.
+	 * calling TkScaleSetValue. This way, TkScaleSetValue won't bother to
+	 * set the variable again or to invoke the -command. However, it also
+	 * won't redisplay the scale, so we have to ask for that explicitly.
 	 */
 
 	TkScaleSetValue(scalePtr, scalePtr->value, 1, 0);
@@ -1255,28 +1235,28 @@ ScaleVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
  *
  * TkScaleSetValue --
  *
- *	This procedure changes the value of a scale and invokes
- *	a Tcl command to reflect the current position of a scale
+ *	This procedure changes the value of a scale and invokes a Tcl command
+ *	to reflect the current position of a scale
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A Tcl command is invoked, and an additional error-processing
- *	command may also be invoked.  The scale's slider is redrawn.
+ *	A Tcl command is invoked, and an additional error-processing command
+ *	may also be invoked. The scale's slider is redrawn.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkScaleSetValue(scalePtr, value, setVar, invokeCommand)
-    register TkScale *scalePtr;	/* Info about widget. */
-    double value;		/* New value for scale.  Gets adjusted
-				 * if it's off the scale. */
-    int setVar;			/* Non-zero means reflect new value through
-				 * to associated variable, if any. */
-    int invokeCommand;		/* Non-zero means invoked -command option
-				 * to notify of new value, 0 means don't. */
+TkScaleSetValue(
+    register TkScale *scalePtr,	/* Info about widget. */
+    double value,		/* New value for scale. Gets adjusted if it's
+				 * off the scale. */
+    int setVar,			/* Non-zero means reflect new value through to
+				 * associated variable, if any. */
+    int invokeCommand)		/* Non-zero means invoked -command option to
+				 * notify of new value, 0 means don't. */
 {
     value = TkRoundToResolution(scalePtr, value);
     if ((value < scalePtr->fromValue)
@@ -1320,11 +1300,12 @@ TkScaleSetValue(scalePtr, value, setVar, invokeCommand)
  */
 
 static void
-ScaleSetVariable(scalePtr)
-    register TkScale *scalePtr;	/* Info about widget. */
+ScaleSetVariable(
+    register TkScale *scalePtr)	/* Info about widget. */
 {
     if (scalePtr->varNamePtr != NULL) {
 	char string[PRINT_CHARS];
+
 	sprintf(string, scalePtr->format, scalePtr->value);
 	scalePtr->flags |= SETTING_VAR;
 	Tcl_ObjSetVar2(scalePtr->interp, scalePtr->varNamePtr, NULL,
@@ -1338,13 +1319,12 @@ ScaleSetVariable(scalePtr)
  *
  * TkScalePixelToValue --
  *
- *	Given a pixel within a scale window, return the scale
- *	reading corresponding to that pixel.
+ *	Given a pixel within a scale window, return the scale reading
+ *	corresponding to that pixel.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A double-precision scale reading.  If the value is outside
- *	the legal range for the scale then it's rounded to the nearest
- *	end of the scale.
+ *	A double-precision scale reading. If the value is outside the legal
+ *	range for the scale then it's rounded to the nearest end of the scale.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1353,10 +1333,9 @@ ScaleSetVariable(scalePtr)
  */
 
 double
-TkScalePixelToValue(scalePtr, x, y)
-    register TkScale *scalePtr;		/* Information about widget. */
-    int x, y;				/* Coordinates of point within
-					 * window. */
+TkScalePixelToValue(
+    register TkScale *scalePtr,	/* Information about widget. */
+    int x, int y)		/* Coordinates of point within window. */
 {
     double value, pixelRange;
 
@@ -1372,14 +1351,14 @@ TkScalePixelToValue(scalePtr, x, y)
 
     if (pixelRange <= 0) {
 	/*
-	 * Not enough room for the slider to actually slide:  just return
-	 * the scale's current value.
+	 * Not enough room for the slider to actually slide: just return the
+	 * scale's current value.
 	 */
 
 	return scalePtr->value;
     }
     value -= scalePtr->sliderLength/2 + scalePtr->inset
-		+ scalePtr->borderWidth;
+	    + scalePtr->borderWidth;
     value /= pixelRange;
     if (value < 0) {
 	value = 0;
@@ -1397,14 +1376,13 @@ TkScalePixelToValue(scalePtr, x, y)
  *
  * TkScaleValueToPixel --
  *
- *	Given a reading of the scale, return the x-coordinate or
- *	y-coordinate corresponding to that reading, depending on
- *	whether the scale is vertical or horizontal, respectively.
+ *	Given a reading of the scale, return the x-coordinate or y-coordinate
+ *	corresponding to that reading, depending on whether the scale is
+ *	vertical or horizontal, respectively.
  *
  * Results:
- *	An integer value giving the pixel location corresponding
- *	to reading.  The value is restricted to lie within the
- *	defined range for the scale.
+ *	An integer value giving the pixel location corresponding to reading.
+ *	The value is restricted to lie within the defined range for the scale.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1413,9 +1391,9 @@ TkScalePixelToValue(scalePtr, x, y)
  */
 
 int
-TkScaleValueToPixel(scalePtr, value)
-    register TkScale *scalePtr;		/* Information about widget. */
-    double value;			/* Reading of the widget. */
+TkScaleValueToPixel(
+    register TkScale *scalePtr,	/* Information about widget. */
+    double value)		/* Reading of the widget. */
 {
     int y, pixelRange;
     double valueRange;
@@ -1428,7 +1406,7 @@ TkScaleValueToPixel(scalePtr, value)
 	y = 0;
     } else {
 	y = (int) ((value - scalePtr->fromValue) * pixelRange
-		  / valueRange + 0.5);
+		/ valueRange + 0.5);
 	if (y < 0) {
 	    y = 0;
 	} else if (y > pixelRange) {
@@ -1438,3 +1416,11 @@ TkScaleValueToPixel(scalePtr, value)
     y += scalePtr->sliderLength/2 + scalePtr->inset + scalePtr->borderWidth;
     return y;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkScale.h b/generic/tkScale.h
index 71d5d53..f406bf6 100644
--- a/generic/tkScale.h
+++ b/generic/tkScale.h
@@ -1,21 +1,21 @@
 /*
  * tkScale.h --
  *
- *	Declarations of types and functions used to implement
- *	the scale widget.
+ *	Declarations of types and functions used to implement the scale
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1999-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKSCALE
 #define _TKSCALE
 
-#ifndef _TK
-#include "tk.h"
+#ifndef _TKINT
+#include "tkInt.h"
 #endif
 
 #ifdef BUILD_tk
@@ -40,16 +40,16 @@ enum state {
 };
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each scale
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each scale widget
+ * managed by this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct TkScale {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the scale.  NULL
-				 * means that the window has been destroyed
-				 * but the data structures haven't yet been
-				 * cleaned up.*/
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget.  Used, among
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the scale. NULL means
+				 * that the window has been destroyed but the
+				 * data structures haven't yet been cleaned
+				 * up.*/
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget. Used, among
 				 * other things, so that resources can be
 				 * freed even after tkwin has gone away. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with scale. */
@@ -58,42 +58,41 @@ typedef struct TkScale {
 				 * available for this widget. */
     enum orient orient;		/* Orientation for window (vertical or
 				 * horizontal). */
-    int width;			/* Desired narrow dimension of scale,
-				 * in pixels. */
-    int length;			/* Desired long dimension of scale,
-				 * in pixels. */
+    int width;			/* Desired narrow dimension of scale, in
+				 * pixels. */
+    int length;			/* Desired long dimension of scale, in
+				 * pixels. */
     double value;		/* Current value of scale. */
-    Tcl_Obj *varNamePtr;	/* Name of variable or NULL.
-				 * If non-NULL, scale's value tracks
-				 * the contents of this variable and
-				 * vice versa. */
+    Tcl_Obj *varNamePtr;	/* Name of variable or NULL. If non-NULL,
+				 * scale's value tracks the contents of this
+				 * variable and vice versa. */
     double fromValue;		/* Value corresponding to left or top of
 				 * scale. */
-    double toValue;		/* Value corresponding to right or bottom
-				 * of scale. */
-    double tickInterval;	/* Distance between tick marks;
-				 * 0 means don't display any tick marks. */
-    double resolution;		/* If > 0, all values are rounded to an
-				 * even multiple of this value. */
-    int digits;			/* Number of significant digits to print
-				 * in values.  0 means we get to choose the
-				 * number based on resolution and/or the
-				 * range of the scale. */
+    double toValue;		/* Value corresponding to right or bottom of
+				 * scale. */
+    double tickInterval;	/* Distance between tick marks; 0 means don't
+				 * display any tick marks. */
+    double resolution;		/* If > 0, all values are rounded to an even
+				 * multiple of this value. */
+    int digits;			/* Number of significant digits to print in
+				 * values. 0 means we get to choose the number
+				 * based on resolution and/or the range of the
+				 * scale. */
     char format[10];		/* Sprintf conversion specifier computed from
 				 * digits and other information. */
-    double bigIncrement;	/* Amount to use for large increments to
-				 * scale value.	 (0 means we pick a value). */
+    double bigIncrement;	/* Amount to use for large increments to scale
+				 * value. (0 means we pick a value). */
     char *command;		/* Command prefix to use when invoking Tcl
 				 * commands because the scale value changed.
 				 * NULL means don't invoke commands. */
-    int repeatDelay;		/* How long to wait before auto-repeating
-				 * on scrolling actions (in ms). */
+    int repeatDelay;		/* How long to wait before auto-repeating on
+				 * scrolling actions (in ms). */
     int repeatInterval;		/* Interval between autorepeats (in ms). */
     char *label;		/* Label to display above or to right of
-				 * scale;  NULL means don't display a label. */
+				 * scale; NULL means don't display a label. */
     int labelLength;		/* Number of non-NULL chars. in label. */
     enum state state;		/* Values are active, normal, or disabled.
-				 * Value of scale cannot be changed when 
+				 * Value of scale cannot be changed when
 				 * disabled. */
 
     /*
@@ -104,19 +103,19 @@ typedef struct TkScale {
     Tk_3DBorder bgBorder;	/* Used for drawing slider and other
 				 * background areas. */
     Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;	/* For drawing the slider when active. */
-    int sliderRelief;		/* Is slider to be drawn raised, sunken, 
+    int sliderRelief;		/* Is slider to be drawn raised, sunken,
 				 * etc. */
     XColor *troughColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing trough. */
     GC troughGC;		/* For drawing trough. */
-    GC copyGC;			/* Used for copying from pixmap onto screen. */
+    GC copyGC;			/* Used for copying from pixmap onto screen */
     Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Information about text font, or NULL. */
     XColor *textColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing text. */
     GC textGC;			/* GC for drawing text in normal mode. */
     int relief;			/* Indicates whether window as a whole is
 				 * raised, sunken, or flat. */
-    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw
-				 * around widget when it has the focus.
-				 * <= 0 means don't draw a highlight. */
+    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw around
+				 * widget when it has the focus. <= 0 means
+				 * don't draw a highlight. */
     Tk_3DBorder highlightBorder;/* Value of -highlightbackground option:
 				 * specifies background with which to draw 3-D
 				 * default ring and focus highlight area when
@@ -124,18 +123,18 @@ typedef struct TkScale {
     XColor *highlightColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing traversal highlight. */
     int inset;			/* Total width of all borders, including
 				 * traversal highlight and 3-D border.
-				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must
-				 * be offset from outside edges to leave
-				 * room for borders. */
+				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must be
+				 * offset from outside edges to leave room for
+				 * borders. */
     int sliderLength;		/* Length of slider, measured in pixels along
 				 * long dimension of scale. */
     int showValue;		/* Non-zero means to display the scale value
-				 * below or to the left of the slider;	zero
+				 * below or to the left of the slider; zero
 				 * means don't display the value. */
 
     /*
-     * Layout information for horizontal scales, assuming that window
-     * gets the size it requested:
+     * Layout information for horizontal scales, assuming that window gets the
+     * size it requested:
      */
 
     int horizLabelY;		/* Y-coord at which to draw label. */
@@ -143,8 +142,8 @@ typedef struct TkScale {
     int horizTroughY;		/* Y-coord of top of slider trough. */
     int horizTickY;		/* Y-coord at which to draw tick text. */
     /*
-     * Layout information for vertical scales, assuming that window
-     * gets the size it requested:
+     * Layout information for vertical scales, assuming that window gets the
+     * size it requested:
      */
 
     int vertTickRightX;		/* X-location of right side of tick-marks. */
@@ -158,37 +157,37 @@ typedef struct TkScale {
 
     int fontHeight;		/* Height of scale font. */
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
-    Tcl_Obj *takeFocusPtr;	/* Value of -takefocus option;	not used in
-				 * the C code, but used by keyboard traversal
-				 * scripts.  May be NULL. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flags;  see below for
+    Tcl_Obj *takeFocusPtr;	/* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
+				 * C code, but used by keyboard traversal
+				 * scripts. May be NULL. */
+    int flags;			/* Various flags; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
 } TkScale;
 
 /*
  * Flag bits for scales:
  *
- * REDRAW_SLIDER -		1 means slider (and numerical readout) need
- *				to be redrawn.
+ * REDRAW_SLIDER -		1 means slider (and numerical readout) need to
+ *				be redrawn.
  * REDRAW_OTHER -		1 means other stuff besides slider and value
  *				need to be redrawn.
  * REDRAW_ALL -			1 means the entire widget needs to be redrawn.
  * REDRAW_PENDING -		1 means any sort of redraw is pending
- * ACTIVE -			1 means the widget is active (the mouse is
- *				in its window).
+ * ACTIVE -			1 means the widget is active (the mouse is in
+ *				its window).
  * INVOKE_COMMAND -		1 means the scale's command needs to be
- *				invoked during the next redisplay (the
- *				value of the scale has changed since the
- *				last time the command was invoked).
- * SETTING_VAR -		1 means that the associated variable is
- *				being set by us, so there's no need for
- *				ScaleVarProc to do anything.
- * NEVER_SET -			1 means that the scale's value has never
- *				been set before (so must invoke -command and
- *				set associated variable even if the value
- *				doesn't appear to have changed).
- * GOT_FOCUS -			1 means that the focus is currently in
- *				this widget.
+ *				invoked during the next redisplay (the value
+ *				of the scale has changed since the last time
+ *				the command was invoked).
+ * SETTING_VAR -		1 means that the associated variable is being
+ *				set by us, so there's no need for ScaleVarProc
+ *				to do anything.
+ * NEVER_SET -			1 means that the scale's value has never been
+ *				set before (so must invoke -command and set
+ *				associated variable even if the value doesn't
+ *				appear to have changed).
+ * GOT_FOCUS -			1 means that the focus is currently in this
+ *				widget.
  * SCALE_DELETED -		1 means the scale widget is being deleted
  */
 
@@ -204,8 +203,8 @@ typedef struct TkScale {
 #define SCALE_DELETED		(1<<8)
 
 /*
- * Symbolic values for the active parts of a slider.  These are
- * the values that may be returned by the ScaleElement procedure.
+ * Symbolic values for the active parts of a slider. These are the values that
+ * may be returned by the ScaleElement procedure.
  */
 
 #define OTHER		0
@@ -214,39 +213,32 @@ typedef struct TkScale {
 #define TROUGH2		3
 
 /*
- * Space to leave between scale area and text, and between text and
- * edge of window.
+ * Space to leave between scale area and text, and between text and edge of
+ * window.
  */
 
 #define SPACING 2
 
 /*
- * How many characters of space to provide when formatting the
- * scale's value:
+ * How many characters of space to provide when formatting the scale's value:
  */
 
 #define PRINT_CHARS 150
 
 /*
- * Declaration of procedures used in the implementation of the scale
- * widget. 
+ * Declaration of procedures used in the implementation of the scale widget.
  */
 
-EXTERN void		TkEventuallyRedrawScale _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr,
-			    int what));
-EXTERN double		TkRoundToResolution _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr,
-			    double value));
-EXTERN TkScale *	TkpCreateScale _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-EXTERN void		TkpDestroyScale _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr));
-EXTERN void		TkpDisplayScale _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-EXTERN int		TkpScaleElement _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr,
-			     int x, int y));
-EXTERN void		TkScaleSetValue _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr,
-			    double value, int setVar, int invokeCommand));
-EXTERN double		TkScalePixelToValue _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr, 
-			    int x, int y));
-EXTERN int		TkScaleValueToPixel _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr,
-			    double value));
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkEventuallyRedrawScale(TkScale *scalePtr, int what);
+MODULE_SCOPE double	TkRoundToResolution(TkScale *scalePtr, double value);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkScale *	TkpCreateScale(Tk_Window tkwin);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpDestroyScale(TkScale *scalePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpDisplayScale(ClientData clientData);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkpScaleElement(TkScale *scalePtr, int x, int y);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkScaleSetValue(TkScale *scalePtr, double value,
+			    int setVar, int invokeCommand);
+MODULE_SCOPE double	TkScalePixelToValue(TkScale *scalePtr, int x, int y);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkScaleValueToPixel(TkScale *scalePtr, double value);
 
 # undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
diff --git a/generic/tkScrollbar.c b/generic/tkScrollbar.c
index d4f3d88..3fff58d 100644
--- a/generic/tkScrollbar.c
+++ b/generic/tkScrollbar.c
@@ -1,19 +1,18 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkScrollbar.c --
  *
- *	This module implements a scrollbar widgets for the Tk
- *	toolkit.  A scrollbar displays a slider and two arrows;
- *	mouse clicks on features within the scrollbar cause
- *	scrolling commands to be invoked.
+ *	This module implements a scrollbar widgets for the Tk toolkit. A
+ *	scrollbar displays a slider and two arrows; mouse clicks on features
+ *	within the scrollbar cause scrolling commands to be invoked.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
+#include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkScrollbar.h"
 #include "default.h"
 
@@ -27,11 +26,14 @@ static Tk_CustomOption orientOption = {
     (ClientData) NULL
 };
 
+/* non-const space for "-width" default value for scrollbars */
+char tkDefScrollbarWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE] = DEF_SCROLLBAR_WIDTH;
+
 /*
  * Information used for argv parsing.
  */
 
-Tk_ConfigSpec tkpScrollbarConfigSpecs[] = {
+static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
     {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground",
 	DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, Tk_Offset(TkScrollbar, activeBorder),
 	TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY},
@@ -46,10 +48,8 @@ Tk_ConfigSpec tkpScrollbarConfigSpecs[] = {
     {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_MONO, Tk_Offset(TkScrollbar, bgBorder),
 	TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY},
-    {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bd", "borderWidth", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bg", "background", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0},
+    {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bd", "borderWidth", NULL, NULL, 0, 0},
+    {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bg", "background", NULL, NULL, 0, 0},
     {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
 	DEF_SCROLLBAR_BORDER_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkScrollbar, borderWidth), 0},
     {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
@@ -90,31 +90,28 @@ Tk_ConfigSpec tkpScrollbarConfigSpecs[] = {
 	DEF_SCROLLBAR_TROUGH_MONO, Tk_Offset(TkScrollbar, troughColorPtr),
 	TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY},
     {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width",
-	DEF_SCROLLBAR_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkScrollbar, width), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+	tkDefScrollbarWidth, Tk_Offset(TkScrollbar, width), 0},
+    {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static int		ConfigureScrollbar _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkScrollbar *scrollPtr, int argc, CONST char **argv,
-			    int flags));
-static void		ScrollbarCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static int		ScrollbarWidgetCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *, int argc, CONST char **argv));
+static int		ConfigureScrollbar(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkScrollbar *scrollPtr, int argc,
+			    CONST char **argv, int flags);
+static void		ScrollbarCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ScrollbarWidgetCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *, int argc, CONST char **argv);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_ScrollbarCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "scrollbar" Tcl
- *	command.  See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "scrollbar" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -126,41 +123,40 @@ static int		ScrollbarWidgetCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
  */
 
 int
-Tk_ScrollbarCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+Tk_ScrollbarCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    CONST char **argv)		/* Argument strings. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;
-    Tk_Window new;
+    Tk_Window newWin;
 
     if (argc < 2) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		argv[0], " pathName ?options?\"", (char *) NULL);
+		argv[0], " pathName ?options?\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    new = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, argv[1], (char *) NULL);
-    if (new == NULL) {
+    newWin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, argv[1], NULL);
+    if (newWin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    Tk_SetClass(new, "Scrollbar");
-    scrollPtr = TkpCreateScrollbar(new);
+    Tk_SetClass(newWin, "Scrollbar");
+    scrollPtr = TkpCreateScrollbar(newWin);
 
-    Tk_SetClassProcs(new, &tkpScrollbarProcs, (ClientData) scrollPtr);
+    Tk_SetClassProcs(newWin, &tkpScrollbarProcs, (ClientData) scrollPtr);
 
     /*
-     * Initialize fields that won't be initialized by ConfigureScrollbar,
-     * or which ConfigureScrollbar expects to have reasonable values
-     * (e.g. resource pointers).
+     * Initialize fields that won't be initialized by ConfigureScrollbar, or
+     * which ConfigureScrollbar expects to have reasonable values (e.g.
+     * resource pointers).
      */
 
-    scrollPtr->tkwin = new;
-    scrollPtr->display = Tk_Display(new);
+    scrollPtr->tkwin = newWin;
+    scrollPtr->display = Tk_Display(newWin);
     scrollPtr->interp = interp;
     scrollPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateCommand(interp,
 	    Tk_PathName(scrollPtr->tkwin), ScrollbarWidgetCmd,
@@ -210,9 +206,9 @@ Tk_ScrollbarCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * ScrollbarWidgetCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -224,12 +220,11 @@ Tk_ScrollbarCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  */
 
 static int
-ScrollbarWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about scrollbar
-					 * widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Argument strings. */
+ScrollbarWidgetCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about scrollbar widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    CONST char **argv)		/* Argument strings. */
 {
     register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr = (TkScrollbar *) clientData;
     int result = TCL_OK;
@@ -238,7 +233,7 @@ ScrollbarWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 
     if (argc < 2) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		argv[0], " option ?arg arg ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+		argv[0], " option ?arg arg ...?\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) scrollPtr);
@@ -248,21 +243,21 @@ ScrollbarWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 	int oldActiveField;
 	if (argc == 2) {
 	    switch (scrollPtr->activeField) {
-		case TOP_ARROW:
-		    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "arrow1", TCL_STATIC);
-		    break;
-		case SLIDER:
-		    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "slider", TCL_STATIC);
-		    break;
-		case BOTTOM_ARROW:
-		    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "arrow2", TCL_STATIC);
-		    break;
+	    case TOP_ARROW:
+		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "arrow1", TCL_STATIC);
+		break;
+	    case SLIDER:
+		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "slider", TCL_STATIC);
+		break;
+	    case BOTTOM_ARROW:
+		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "arrow2", TCL_STATIC);
+		break;
 	    }
 	    goto done;
 	}
 	if (argc != 3) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " activate element\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    argv[0], " activate element\"", NULL);
 	    goto error;
 	}
 	c = argv[2][0];
@@ -285,20 +280,19 @@ ScrollbarWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 	if (argc != 3) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
 		    argv[0], " cget option\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    NULL);
 	    goto error;
 	}
 	result = Tk_ConfigureValue(interp, scrollPtr->tkwin,
-		tkpScrollbarConfigSpecs, (char *) scrollPtr, argv[2], 0);
+		configSpecs, (char *) scrollPtr, argv[2], 0);
     } else if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(argv[1], "configure", length) == 0)
 	    && (length >= 2)) {
 	if (argc == 2) {
 	    result = Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, scrollPtr->tkwin,
-		    tkpScrollbarConfigSpecs, (char *) scrollPtr,
-		    (char *) NULL, 0);
+		    configSpecs, (char *) scrollPtr, NULL, 0);
 	} else if (argc == 3) {
 	    result = Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, scrollPtr->tkwin,
-		    tkpScrollbarConfigSpecs, (char *) scrollPtr, argv[2], 0);
+		    configSpecs, (char *) scrollPtr, argv[2], 0);
 	} else {
 	    result = ConfigureScrollbar(interp, scrollPtr, argc-2, argv+2,
 		    TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
@@ -310,7 +304,7 @@ ScrollbarWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 
 	if (argc != 4) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " delta xDelta yDelta\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    argv[0], " delta xDelta yDelta\"", NULL);
 	    goto error;
 	}
 	if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[2], &xDelta) != TCL_OK)
@@ -331,7 +325,7 @@ ScrollbarWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 	} else {
 	    fraction = ((double) pixels / (double) length);
 	}
-	sprintf(buf, "%g", fraction);
+	Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, fraction, buf);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
     } else if ((c == 'f') && (strncmp(argv[1], "fraction", length) == 0)) {
 	int x, y, pos, length;
@@ -340,7 +334,7 @@ ScrollbarWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 
 	if (argc != 4) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " fraction x y\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    argv[0], " fraction x y\"", NULL);
 	    goto error;
 	}
 	if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[2], &x) != TCL_OK)
@@ -366,12 +360,12 @@ ScrollbarWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 	} else if (fraction > 1.0) {
 	    fraction = 1.0;
 	}
-	sprintf(buf, "%g", fraction);
+	Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, fraction, buf);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
     } else if ((c == 'g') && (strncmp(argv[1], "get", length) == 0)) {
 	if (argc != 2) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " get\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    argv[0], " get\"", NULL);
 	    goto error;
 	}
 	if (scrollPtr->flags & NEW_STYLE_COMMANDS) {
@@ -379,7 +373,7 @@ ScrollbarWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 
 	    Tcl_PrintDouble(interp, scrollPtr->firstFraction, first);
 	    Tcl_PrintDouble(interp, scrollPtr->lastFraction, last);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, first, " ", last, (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, first, " ", last, NULL);
 	} else {
 	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
 
@@ -393,7 +387,7 @@ ScrollbarWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 
 	if (argc != 4) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " identify x y\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    argv[0], " identify x y\"", NULL);
 	    goto error;
 	}
 	if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[2], &x) != TCL_OK)
@@ -402,21 +396,21 @@ ScrollbarWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 	}
 	thing = TkpScrollbarPosition(scrollPtr, x,y);
 	switch (thing) {
-	    case TOP_ARROW:
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "arrow1", TCL_STATIC);
-		break;
-	    case TOP_GAP:
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "trough1", TCL_STATIC);
-		break;
-	    case SLIDER:
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "slider", TCL_STATIC);
-		break;
-	    case BOTTOM_GAP:
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "trough2", TCL_STATIC);
-		break;
-	    case BOTTOM_ARROW:
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "arrow2", TCL_STATIC);
-		break;
+	case TOP_ARROW:
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "arrow1", TCL_STATIC);
+	    break;
+	case TOP_GAP:
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "trough1", TCL_STATIC);
+	    break;
+	case SLIDER:
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "slider", TCL_STATIC);
+	    break;
+	case BOTTOM_GAP:
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "trough2", TCL_STATIC);
+	    break;
+	case BOTTOM_ARROW:
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "arrow2", TCL_STATIC);
+	    break;
 	}
     } else if ((c == 's') && (strncmp(argv[1], "set", length) == 0)) {
 	int totalUnits, windowUnits, firstUnit, lastUnit;
@@ -487,8 +481,7 @@ ScrollbarWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
 		    argv[0], " set firstFraction lastFraction\" or \"",
 		    argv[0],
-		    " set totalUnits windowUnits firstUnit lastUnit\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    " set totalUnits windowUnits firstUnit lastUnit\"", NULL);
 	    goto error;
 	}
 	TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(scrollPtr);
@@ -496,14 +489,15 @@ ScrollbarWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
     } else {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option \"", argv[1],
 		"\": must be activate, cget, configure, delta, fraction, ",
-		"get, identify, or set", (char *) NULL);
+		"get, identify, or set", NULL);
 	goto error;
     }
-    done:
+
+  done:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) scrollPtr);
     return result;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) scrollPtr);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -513,45 +507,43 @@ ScrollbarWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * ConfigureScrollbar --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a scrollbar widget.
+ *	This function is called to process an argv/argc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) a scrollbar
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width,
- *	etc. get set for scrollPtr;  old resources get freed,
- *	if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width, etc. get set
+ *	for scrollPtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureScrollbar(interp, scrollPtr, argc, argv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or
-					 * may not already have values for
-					 * some fields. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Arguments. */
-    int flags;				/* Flags to pass to
-					 * Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
+ConfigureScrollbar(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr,
+				/* Information about widget; may or may not
+				 * already have values for some fields. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
+    CONST char **argv,		/* Arguments. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
 {
-    if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, scrollPtr->tkwin, tkpScrollbarConfigSpecs,
+    if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, scrollPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
 	    argc, argv, (char *) scrollPtr, flags) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * A few options need special processing, such as setting the
-     * background from a 3-D border.
+     * A few options need special processing, such as setting the background
+     * from a 3-D border.
      */
 
     if (scrollPtr->command != NULL) {
-	scrollPtr->commandSize = strlen(scrollPtr->command);
+        scrollPtr->commandSize = (int)strlen(scrollPtr->command);
     } else {
 	scrollPtr->commandSize = 0;
     }
@@ -563,10 +555,9 @@ ConfigureScrollbar(interp, scrollPtr, argc, argv, flags)
     TkpConfigureScrollbar(scrollPtr);
 
     /*
-     * Register the desired geometry for the window (leave enough space
-     * for the two arrows plus a minimum-size slider, plus border around
-     * the whole window, if any).  Then arrange for the window to be
-     * redisplayed.
+     * Register the desired geometry for the window (leave enough space for
+     * the two arrows plus a minimum-size slider, plus border around the whole
+     * window, if any). Then arrange for the window to be redisplayed.
      */
 
     TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(scrollPtr);
@@ -579,23 +570,23 @@ ConfigureScrollbar(interp, scrollPtr, argc, argv, flags)
  *
  * TkScrollbarEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on scrollbars.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	scrollbars.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up.
+ *	When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkScrollbarEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+TkScrollbarEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     TkScrollbar *scrollPtr = (TkScrollbar *) clientData;
 
@@ -606,18 +597,17 @@ TkScrollbarEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	if (scrollPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
 	    scrollPtr->tkwin = NULL;
 	    Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(scrollPtr->interp,
-                    scrollPtr->widgetCmd);
+		    scrollPtr->widgetCmd);
 	}
 	if (scrollPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
 	    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(TkpDisplayScrollbar, (ClientData) scrollPtr);
 	}
 	/*
-	 * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then
-	 * let Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related
-	 * stuff.
+	 * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let
+	 * Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
 	 */
-	
-	Tk_FreeOptions(tkpScrollbarConfigSpecs, (char *) scrollPtr,
+
+	Tk_FreeOptions(configSpecs, (char *) scrollPtr,
 		scrollPtr->display, 0);
 	Tcl_EventuallyFree((ClientData) scrollPtr, TCL_DYNAMIC);
     } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
@@ -645,9 +635,9 @@ TkScrollbarEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * ScrollbarCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -659,17 +649,17 @@ TkScrollbarEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ScrollbarCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+ScrollbarCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     TkScrollbar *scrollPtr = (TkScrollbar *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = scrollPtr->tkwin;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (tkwin != NULL) {
@@ -683,8 +673,7 @@ ScrollbarCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * TkScrollbarEventuallyRedraw --
  *
- *	Arrange for one or more of the fields of a scrollbar
- *	to be redrawn.
+ *	Arrange for one or more of the fields of a scrollbar to be redrawn.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -696,8 +685,8 @@ ScrollbarCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  */
 
 void
-TkScrollbarEventuallyRedraw(scrollPtr)
-    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;	/* Information about widget. */
+TkScrollbarEventuallyRedraw(
+    TkScrollbar *scrollPtr)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     if ((scrollPtr->tkwin == NULL) || (!Tk_IsMapped(scrollPtr->tkwin))) {
 	return;
@@ -707,3 +696,11 @@ TkScrollbarEventuallyRedraw(scrollPtr)
 	scrollPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkScrollbar.h b/generic/tkScrollbar.h
index 6b7f2dc..126d590 100644
--- a/generic/tkScrollbar.h
+++ b/generic/tkScrollbar.h
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
 /*
  * tkScrollbar.h --
  *
- *	Declarations of types and functions used to implement
- *	the scrollbar widget.
+ *	Declarations of types and functions used to implement the scrollbar
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKSCROLLBAR
@@ -17,36 +17,30 @@
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #endif
 
-#ifdef BUILD_tk
-# undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
-# define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
-#endif
-
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each scrollbar
- * widget.
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each scrollbar widget.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkScrollbar {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the scrollbar.  NULL
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the scrollbar. NULL
 				 * means that the window has been destroyed
 				 * but the data structures haven't yet been
 				 * cleaned up.*/
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget.  Used, among
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget. Used, among
 				 * other things, so that resources can be
 				 * freed even after tkwin has gone away. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with scrollbar. */
     Tcl_Command widgetCmd;	/* Token for scrollbar's widget command. */
     int vertical;		/* Non-zero means vertical orientation
 				 * requested, zero means horizontal. */
-    int width;			/* Desired narrow dimension of scrollbar,
-				 * in pixels. */
+    int width;			/* Desired narrow dimension of scrollbar, in
+				 * pixels. */
     char *command;		/* Command prefix to use when invoking
-				 * scrolling commands.  NULL means don't
-				 * invoke commands.  Malloc'ed. */
+				 * scrolling commands. NULL means don't invoke
+				 * commands. Malloc'ed. */
     int commandSize;		/* Number of non-NULL bytes in command. */
-    int repeatDelay;		/* How long to wait before auto-repeating
-				 * on scrolling actions (in ms). */
+    int repeatDelay;		/* How long to wait before auto-repeating on
+				 * scrolling actions (in ms). */
     int repeatInterval;		/* Interval between autorepeats (in ms). */
     int jump;			/* Value of -jump option. */
 
@@ -62,60 +56,58 @@ typedef struct TkScrollbar {
     XColor *troughColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing trough. */
     int relief;			/* Indicates whether window as a whole is
 				 * raised, sunken, or flat. */
-    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw
-				 * around widget when it has the focus.
-				 * <= 0 means don't draw a highlight. */
+    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw around
+				 * widget when it has the focus. <= 0 means
+				 * don't draw a highlight. */
     XColor *highlightBgColorPtr;
-				/* Color for drawing traversal highlight
-				 * area when highlight is off. */
+				/* Color for drawing traversal highlight area
+				 * when highlight is off. */
     XColor *highlightColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing traversal highlight. */
     int inset;			/* Total width of all borders, including
 				 * traversal highlight and 3-D border.
-				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must
-				 * be offset from outside edges to leave
-				 * room for borders. */
+				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must be
+				 * offset from outside edges to leave room for
+				 * borders. */
     int elementBorderWidth;	/* Width of border to draw around elements
-				 * inside scrollbar (arrows and slider).
-				 * -1 means use borderWidth. */
+				 * inside scrollbar (arrows and slider). -1
+				 * means use borderWidth. */
     int arrowLength;		/* Length of arrows along long dimension of
 				 * scrollbar, including space for a small gap
 				 * between the arrow and the slider.
 				 * Recomputed on window size changes. */
-    int sliderFirst;		/* Pixel coordinate of top or left edge
-				 * of slider area, including border. */
-    int sliderLast;		/* Coordinate of pixel just after bottom
-				 * or right edge of slider area, including
+    int sliderFirst;		/* Pixel coordinate of top or left edge of
+				 * slider area, including border. */
+    int sliderLast;		/* Coordinate of pixel just after bottom or
+				 * right edge of slider area, including
 				 * border. */
     int activeField;		/* Names field to be displayed in active
-				 * colors, such as TOP_ARROW, or 0 for
-				 * no field. */
-    int activeRelief;		/* Value of -activeRelief option: relief
-				 * to use for active element. */
+				 * colors, such as TOP_ARROW, or 0 for no
+				 * field. */
+    int activeRelief;		/* Value of -activeRelief option: relief to
+				 * use for active element. */
 
     /*
-     * Information describing the application related to the scrollbar.
-     * This information is provided by the application by invoking the
-     * "set" widget command.  This information can now be provided in
-     * two ways:  the "old" form (totalUnits, windowUnits, firstUnit,
-     * and lastUnit), or the "new" form (firstFraction and lastFraction).
-     * FirstFraction and lastFraction will always be valid, but
-     * the old-style information is only valid if the NEW_STYLE_COMMANDS
-     * flag is 0.
+     * Information describing the application related to the scrollbar. This
+     * information is provided by the application by invoking the "set" widget
+     * command. This information can now be provided in two ways: the "old"
+     * form (totalUnits, windowUnits, firstUnit, and lastUnit), or the "new"
+     * form (firstFraction and lastFraction). FirstFraction and lastFraction
+     * will always be valid, but the old-style information is only valid if
+     * the NEW_STYLE_COMMANDS flag is 0.
      */
 
-    int totalUnits;		/* Total dimension of application, in
-				 * units.  Valid only if the NEW_STYLE_COMMANDS
-				 * flag isn't set. */
+    int totalUnits;		/* Total dimension of application, in units.
+				 * Valid only if the NEW_STYLE_COMMANDS flag
+				 * isn't set. */
     int windowUnits;		/* Maximum number of units that can be
-				 * displayed in the window at once.  Valid
-				 * only if the NEW_STYLE_COMMANDS flag isn't
-				 * set. */
+				 * displayed in the window at once. Valid only
+				 * if the NEW_STYLE_COMMANDS flag isn't set. */
     int firstUnit;		/* Number of last unit visible in
-				 * application's window.  Valid only if the
+				 * application's window. Valid only if the
 				 * NEW_STYLE_COMMANDS flag isn't set. */
     int lastUnit;		/* Index of last unit visible in window.
-				 * Valid only if the NEW_STYLE_COMMANDS
-				 * flag isn't set. */
+				 * Valid only if the NEW_STYLE_COMMANDS flag
+				 * isn't set. */
     double firstFraction;	/* Position of first visible thing in window,
 				 * specified as a fraction between 0 and
 				 * 1.0. */
@@ -128,16 +120,16 @@ typedef struct TkScrollbar {
      */
 
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
-    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option;  not used in
-				 * the C code, but used by keyboard traversal
-				 * scripts.  Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flags;  see below for
+    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
+				 * C code, but used by keyboard traversal
+				 * scripts. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
+    int flags;			/* Various flags; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
 } TkScrollbar;
 
 /*
- * Legal values for "activeField" field of Scrollbar structures.  These
- * are also the return values from the ScrollbarPosition procedure.
+ * Legal values for "activeField" field of Scrollbar structures. These are
+ * also the return values from the ScrollbarPosition function.
  */
 
 #define OUTSIDE		0
@@ -149,14 +141,13 @@ typedef struct TkScrollbar {
 
 /*
  * Flag bits for scrollbars:
- * 
- * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler
- *				has already been queued to redraw
- *				this window.
+ *
+ * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler has
+ *				already been queued to redraw this window.
  * NEW_STYLE_COMMANDS:		Non-zero means the new style of commands
- *				should be used to communicate with the
- *				widget:  ".t yview scroll 2 lines", instead
- *				of ".t yview 40", for example.
+ *				should be used to communicate with the widget:
+ *				".t yview scroll 2 lines", instead of
+ *				".t yview 40", for example.
  * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this window has the input
  *				focus.
  */
@@ -166,39 +157,27 @@ typedef struct TkScrollbar {
 #define GOT_FOCUS		4
 
 /*
- * Declaration of scrollbar class procedures structure.
+ * Declaration of scrollbar class functions structure
+ * and default scrollbar width, for use in configSpec.
  */
 
-extern Tk_ClassProcs tkpScrollbarProcs;
+MODULE_SCOPE Tk_ClassProcs tkpScrollbarProcs;
+MODULE_SCOPE char tkDefScrollbarWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
 
 /*
- * Declaration of scrollbar configuration options.
- */
-
-extern Tk_ConfigSpec tkpScrollbarConfigSpecs[];
-
-/*
- * Declaration of procedures used in the implementation of the scrollbar
- * widget. 
+ * Declaration of functions used in the implementation of the scrollbar
+ * widget.
  */
 
-EXTERN void		TkScrollbarEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkScrollbarEventuallyRedraw _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkScrollbar *scrollPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkScrollbar *scrollPtr));
-EXTERN TkScrollbar *	TkpCreateScrollbar _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-EXTERN void 		TkpDestroyScrollbar _ANSI_ARGS_((
-    			    TkScrollbar *scrollPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkpDisplayScrollbar _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-EXTERN void		TkpConfigureScrollbar _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkScrollbar *scrollPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkpScrollbarPosition _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkScrollbar *scrollPtr, int x, int y));
-
-# undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
-# define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkScrollbarEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkScrollbarEventuallyRedraw(TkScrollbar *scrollPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(TkScrollbar *scrollPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkScrollbar *TkpCreateScrollbar(Tk_Window tkwin);
+MODULE_SCOPE void 	TkpDestroyScrollbar(TkScrollbar *scrollPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpDisplayScrollbar(ClientData clientData);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkpConfigureScrollbar(TkScrollbar *scrollPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkpScrollbarPosition(TkScrollbar *scrollPtr,
+			    int x, int y);
 
 #endif /* _TKSCROLLBAR */
diff --git a/generic/tkSelect.c b/generic/tkSelect.c
index 1b65c42..7c96b94 100644
--- a/generic/tkSelect.c
+++ b/generic/tkSelect.c
@@ -1,24 +1,23 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkSelect.c --
  *
- *	This file manages the selection for the Tk toolkit,
- *	translating between the standard X ICCCM conventions
- *	and Tcl commands.
+ *	This file manages the selection for the Tk toolkit, translating
+ *	between the standard X ICCCM conventions and Tcl commands.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkSelect.h"
 
 /*
- * When a selection handler is set up by invoking "selection handle",
- * one of the following data structures is set up to hold information
- * about the command to invoke and its interpreter.
+ * When a selection handler is set up by invoking "selection handle", one of
+ * the following data structures is set up to hold information about the
+ * command to invoke and its interpreter.
  */
 
 typedef struct {
@@ -28,109 +27,105 @@ typedef struct {
     int byteOffset;		/* The expected byte offset of the next
 				 * chunk. */
     char buffer[TCL_UTF_MAX];	/* A buffer to hold part of a UTF character
-				 * that is split across chunks.*/
-    char command[4];		/* Command to invoke.  Actual space is
-				 * allocated as large as necessary.  This
-				 * must be the last entry in the structure. */
+				 * that is split across chunks. */
+    char command[4];		/* Command to invoke. Actual space is
+				 * allocated as large as necessary. This must
+				 * be the last entry in the structure. */
 } CommandInfo;
 
 /*
  * When selection ownership is claimed with the "selection own" Tcl command,
- * one of the following structures is created to record the Tcl command
- * to be executed when the selection is lost again.
+ * one of the following structures is created to record the Tcl command to be
+ * executed when the selection is lost again.
  */
 
 typedef struct LostCommand {
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which to invoke command. */
-    char command[4];		/* Command to invoke.  Actual space is
-				 * allocated as large as necessary.  This
-				 * must be the last entry in the structure. */
+    char command[4];		/* Command to invoke. Actual space is
+				 * allocated as large as necessary. This must
+				 * be the last entry in the structure. */
 } LostCommand;
 
 /*
- * The structure below is used to keep each thread's pending list
- * separate.
+ * The structure below is used to keep each thread's pending list separate.
  */
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
     TkSelInProgress *pendingPtr;
-				/* Topmost search in progress, or
-				 * NULL if none. */
+				/* Topmost search in progress, or NULL if
+				 * none. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static int		HandleTclCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes));
-static void		LostSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int		SelGetProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, char *portion));
+static int		HandleTclCommand(ClientData clientData,
+			    int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes);
+static void		LostSelection(ClientData clientData);
+static int		SelGetProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, char *portion);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_CreateSelHandler --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to register a procedure
- *	as the handler for selection requests of a particular
- *	target type on a particular window for a particular
- *	selection.
+ *	This function is called to register a function as the handler for
+ *	selection requests of a particular target type on a particular window
+ *	for a particular selection.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	In the future, whenever the selection is in tkwin's
- *	window and someone requests the selection in the
- *	form given by target, proc will be invoked to provide
- *	part or all of the selection in the given form.  If
- *	there was already a handler declared for the given
- *	window, target and selection type, then it is replaced.
- *	Proc should have the following form:
+
+ *	In the future, whenever the selection is in tkwin's window and someone
+ *	requests the selection in the form given by target, proc will be
+ *	invoked to provide part or all of the selection in the given form. If
+ *	there was already a handler declared for the given window, target and
+ *	selection type, then it is replaced. Proc should have the following
+ *	form:
  *
  *	int
- *	proc(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
- *	    ClientData clientData;
- *	    int offset;
- *	    char *buffer;
- *	    int maxBytes;
+ *	proc(
+ *	    ClientData clientData,
+ *	    int offset,
+ *	    char *buffer,
+ *	    int maxBytes)
  *	{
  *	}
  *
- *	The clientData argument to proc will be the same as
- *	the clientData argument to this procedure.  The offset
- *	argument indicates which portion of the selection to
- *	return:  skip the first offset bytes.  Buffer is a
- *	pointer to an area in which to place the converted
- *	selection, and maxBytes gives the number of bytes
- *	available at buffer.  Proc should place the selection
- *	in buffer as a string, and return a count of the number
- *	of bytes of selection actually placed in buffer (not
- *	including the terminating NULL character).  If the
- *	return value equals maxBytes, this is a sign that there
- *	is probably still more selection information available.
+ *	The clientData argument to proc will be the same as the clientData
+ *	argument to this function. The offset argument indicates which portion
+ *	of the selection to return: skip the first offset bytes. Buffer is a
+ *	pointer to an area in which to place the converted selection, and
+ *	maxBytes gives the number of bytes available at buffer. Proc should
+ *	place the selection in buffer as a string, and return a count of the
+ *	number of bytes of selection actually placed in buffer (not including
+ *	the terminating NULL character). If the return value equals maxBytes,
+ *	this is a sign that there is probably still more selection information
+ *	available.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_CreateSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData, format)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window. */
-    Atom selection;		/* Selection to be handled. */
-    Atom target;		/* The kind of selection conversions
-				 * that can be handled by proc,
-				 * e.g. TARGETS or STRING. */
-    Tk_SelectionProc *proc;	/* Procedure to invoke to convert
-				 * selection to type "target". */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Value to pass to proc. */
-    Atom format;		/* Format in which the selection
-				 * information should be returned to
-				 * the requestor. XA_STRING is best by
-				 * far, but anything listed in the ICCCM
-				 * will be tolerated (blech). */
+Tk_CreateSelHandler(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window. */
+    Atom selection,		/* Selection to be handled. */
+    Atom target,		/* The kind of selection conversions that can
+				 * be handled by proc, e.g. TARGETS or
+				 * STRING. */
+    Tk_SelectionProc *proc,	/* Function to invoke to convert selection to
+				 * type "target". */
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Value to pass to proc. */
+    Atom format)		/* Format in which the selection information
+				 * should be returned to the requestor.
+				 * XA_STRING is best by far, but anything
+				 * listed in the ICCCM will be tolerated
+				 * (blech). */
 {
     register TkSelHandler *selPtr;
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
@@ -140,8 +135,8 @@ Tk_CreateSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData, format)
     }
 
     /*
-     * See if there's already a handler for this target and selection on
-     * this window.  If so, re-use it.  If not, create a new one.
+     * See if there's already a handler for this target and selection on this
+     * window. If so, re-use it. If not, create a new one.
      */
 
     for (selPtr = winPtr->selHandlerList; ; selPtr = selPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -152,11 +147,10 @@ Tk_CreateSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData, format)
 	    break;
 	}
 	if ((selPtr->selection == selection) && (selPtr->target == target)) {
-
 	    /*
-	     * Special case:  when replacing handler created by
-	     * "selection handle", free up memory.  Should there be a
-	     * callback to allow other clients to do this too?
+	     * Special case: when replacing handler created by "selection
+	     * handle", free up memory. Should there be a callback to allow
+	     * other clients to do this too?
 	     */
 
 	    if (selPtr->proc == HandleTclCommand) {
@@ -176,15 +170,14 @@ Tk_CreateSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData, format)
 	selPtr->size = 32;
     }
 
-    if ((target == XA_STRING) && (winPtr->dispPtr->utf8Atom != (Atom) NULL)) {
+    if ((target == XA_STRING) && (winPtr->dispPtr->utf8Atom != (Atom) 0)) {
 	/*
 	 * If the user asked for a STRING handler and we understand
 	 * UTF8_STRING, we implicitly create a UTF8_STRING handler for them.
 	 */
 
 	target = winPtr->dispPtr->utf8Atom;
-	for (selPtr = winPtr->selHandlerList; ;
-	     selPtr = selPtr->nextPtr) {
+	for (selPtr = winPtr->selHandlerList; ; selPtr = selPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (selPtr == NULL) {
 		selPtr = (TkSelHandler *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkSelHandler));
 		selPtr->nextPtr = winPtr->selHandlerList;
@@ -195,11 +188,13 @@ Tk_CreateSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData, format)
 		selPtr->proc = proc;
 		if (selPtr->proc == HandleTclCommand) {
 		    /*
-		     * The clientData is selection controlled memory, so
-		     * we should make a copy for this selPtr.
+		     * The clientData is selection controlled memory, so we
+		     * should make a copy for this selPtr.
 		     */
-		    unsigned cmdInfoLen = sizeof(CommandInfo) + 
+
+		    unsigned cmdInfoLen = sizeof(CommandInfo) +
 			    ((CommandInfo*)clientData)->cmdLength - 3;
+
 		    selPtr->clientData = (ClientData)ckalloc(cmdInfoLen);
 		    memcpy(selPtr->clientData, clientData, cmdInfoLen);
 		} else {
@@ -208,10 +203,9 @@ Tk_CreateSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData, format)
 		selPtr->size = 8;
 		break;
 	    }
-	    if ((selPtr->selection == selection)
-		    && (selPtr->target == target)) {
+	    if (selPtr->selection==selection && selPtr->target==target) {
 		/*
-		 * Looks like we had a utf-8 target already.  Leave it alone.
+		 * Looks like we had a utf-8 target already. Leave it alone.
 		 */
 
 		break;
@@ -232,30 +226,30 @@ Tk_CreateSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData, format)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The selection handler for tkwin and target is removed.  If there
- *	is no such handler then nothing happens.
+ *	The selection handler for tkwin and target is removed. If there is no
+ *	such handler then nothing happens.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DeleteSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Token for window. */
-    Atom selection;			/* The selection whose handler
-					 * is to be removed. */
-    Atom target;			/* The target whose selection
-					 * handler is to be removed. */
+Tk_DeleteSelHandler(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window. */
+    Atom selection,		/* The selection whose handler is to be
+				 * removed. */
+    Atom target)		/* The target whose selection handler is to be
+				 * removed. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     register TkSelHandler *selPtr, *prevPtr;
     register TkSelInProgress *ipPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
      * Find the selection handler to be deleted, or return if it doesn't
      * exist.
-     */ 
+     */
 
     for (selPtr = winPtr->selHandlerList, prevPtr = NULL; ;
 	    prevPtr = selPtr, selPtr = selPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -272,8 +266,8 @@ Tk_DeleteSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target)
      * handler is dead.
      */
 
-    for (ipPtr = tsdPtr->pendingPtr; ipPtr != NULL; 
-            ipPtr = ipPtr->nextPtr) {
+    for (ipPtr = tsdPtr->pendingPtr; ipPtr != NULL;
+	    ipPtr = ipPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (ipPtr->selPtr == selPtr) {
 	    ipPtr->selPtr = NULL;
 	}
@@ -289,17 +283,18 @@ Tk_DeleteSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target)
 	prevPtr->nextPtr = selPtr->nextPtr;
     }
 
-    if ((target == XA_STRING) && (winPtr->dispPtr->utf8Atom != (Atom) NULL)) {
+    if ((target == XA_STRING) && (winPtr->dispPtr->utf8Atom != (Atom) 0)) {
 	/*
 	 * If the user asked for a STRING handler and we understand
 	 * UTF8_STRING, we may have implicitly created a UTF8_STRING handler
-	 * for them.  Look for it and delete it as necessary.
+	 * for them. Look for it and delete it as necessary.
 	 */
+
 	TkSelHandler *utf8selPtr;
 
 	target = winPtr->dispPtr->utf8Atom;
 	for (utf8selPtr = winPtr->selHandlerList; utf8selPtr != NULL;
-	     utf8selPtr = utf8selPtr->nextPtr) {
+		utf8selPtr = utf8selPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if ((utf8selPtr->selection == selection)
 		    && (utf8selPtr->target == target)) {
 		break;
@@ -310,9 +305,10 @@ Tk_DeleteSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target)
 		    && (utf8selPtr->proc == selPtr->proc)
 		    && (utf8selPtr->size == selPtr->size)) {
 		/*
-		 * This recursive call is OK, because we've
-		 * changed the value of 'target'
+		 * This recursive call is OK, because we've changed the value
+		 * of 'target'.
 		 */
+
 		Tk_DeleteSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target);
 	    }
 	}
@@ -340,49 +336,45 @@ Tk_DeleteSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	From now on, requests for the selection will be directed
- *	to procedures associated with tkwin (they must have been
- *	declared with calls to Tk_CreateSelHandler).  When the
- *	selection is lost by this window, proc will be invoked
- *	(see the manual entry for details).  This procedure may
- *	invoke callbacks, including Tcl scripts, so any calling
- *	function should be reentrant at the point where
- *	Tk_OwnSelection is invoked.
+ *	From now on, requests for the selection will be directed to functions
+ *	associated with tkwin (they must have been declared with calls to
+ *	Tk_CreateSelHandler). When the selection is lost by this window, proc
+ *	will be invoked (see the manual entry for details). This function may
+ *	invoke callbacks, including Tcl scripts, so any calling function
+ *	should be reentrant at the point where Tk_OwnSelection is invoked.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_OwnSelection(tkwin, selection, proc, clientData)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to become new selection
-				 * owner. */
-    Atom selection;		/* Selection that window should own. */
-    Tk_LostSelProc *proc;	/* Procedure to call when selection
-				 * is taken away from tkwin. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary one-word argument to
-				 * pass to proc. */
+Tk_OwnSelection(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to become new selection owner. */
+    Atom selection,		/* Selection that window should own. */
+    Tk_LostSelProc *proc,	/* Function to call when selection is taken
+				 * away from tkwin. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Arbitrary one-word argument to pass to
+				 * proc. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
     TkSelectionInfo *infoPtr;
     Tk_LostSelProc *clearProc = NULL;
-    ClientData clearData = NULL;	/* Initialization needed only to
-					 * prevent compiler warning. */
-    
-    
+    ClientData clearData = NULL;/* Initialization needed only to prevent
+				 * compiler warning. */
+
     if (dispPtr->multipleAtom == None) {
 	TkSelInit(tkwin);
     }
     Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin);
 
     /*
-     * This code is somewhat tricky.  First, we find the specified selection
-     * on the selection list.  If the previous owner is in this process, and
-     * is a different window, then we need to invoke the clearProc.  However,
-     * it's dangerous to call the clearProc right now, because it could
-     * invoke a Tcl script that wrecks the current state (e.g. it could
-     * delete the window).  To be safe, defer the call until the end of the
-     * procedure when we no longer care about the state.
+     * This code is somewhat tricky. First, we find the specified selection on
+     * the selection list. If the previous owner is in this process, and is a
+     * different window, then we need to invoke the clearProc. However, it's
+     * dangerous to call the clearProc right now, because it could invoke a
+     * Tcl script that wrecks the current state (e.g. it could delete the
+     * window). To be safe, defer the call until the end of the function when
+     * we no longer care about the state.
      */
 
     for (infoPtr = dispPtr->selectionInfoPtr; infoPtr != NULL;
@@ -402,9 +394,9 @@ Tk_OwnSelection(tkwin, selection, proc, clientData)
 	    clearData = infoPtr->clearData;
 	} else if (infoPtr->clearProc == LostSelection) {
 	    /*
-	     * If the selection handler is one created by "selection own",
-	     * be sure to free the record for it;  otherwise there will be
-	     * a memory leak.
+	     * If the selection handler is one created by "selection own", be
+	     * sure to free the record for it; otherwise there will be a
+	     * memory leak.
 	     */
 
 	    ckfree((char *) infoPtr->clearData);
@@ -417,10 +409,10 @@ Tk_OwnSelection(tkwin, selection, proc, clientData)
     infoPtr->clearData = clientData;
 
     /*
-     * Note that we are using CurrentTime, even though ICCCM recommends against
-     * this practice (the problem is that we don't necessarily have a valid
-     * time to use).  We will not be able to retrieve a useful timestamp for
-     * the TIMESTAMP target later.
+     * Note that we are using CurrentTime, even though ICCCM recommends
+     * against this practice (the problem is that we don't necessarily have a
+     * valid time to use). We will not be able to retrieve a useful timestamp
+     * for the TIMESTAMP target later.
      */
 
     infoPtr->time = CurrentTime;
@@ -456,18 +448,19 @@ Tk_OwnSelection(tkwin, selection, proc, clientData)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The specified selection is cleared, so that future requests to retrieve
- *	it will fail until some application owns it again.  This procedure
- *	invokes callbacks, possibly including Tcl scripts, so any calling
- *	function should be reentrant at the point Tk_ClearSelection is invoked.
+ *	The specified selection is cleared, so that future requests to
+ *	retrieve it will fail until some application owns it again. This
+ *	function invokes callbacks, possibly including Tcl scripts, so any
+ *	calling function should be reentrant at the point Tk_ClearSelection is
+ *	invoked.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_ClearSelection(tkwin, selection)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that selects a display. */
-    Atom selection;		/* Selection to be cancelled. */
+Tk_ClearSelection(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window that selects a display. */
+    Atom selection)		/* Selection to be cancelled. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
@@ -475,15 +468,15 @@ Tk_ClearSelection(tkwin, selection)
     TkSelectionInfo *prevPtr;
     TkSelectionInfo *nextPtr;
     Tk_LostSelProc *clearProc = NULL;
-    ClientData clearData = NULL;	/* Initialization needed only to
-					 * prevent compiler warning. */
+    ClientData clearData = NULL;/* Initialization needed only to prevent
+				 * compiler warning. */
 
     if (dispPtr->multipleAtom == None) {
 	TkSelInit(tkwin);
     }
 
     for (infoPtr = dispPtr->selectionInfoPtr, prevPtr = NULL;
-	     infoPtr != NULL; infoPtr = nextPtr) {
+	    infoPtr != NULL; infoPtr = nextPtr) {
 	nextPtr = infoPtr->nextPtr;
 	if (infoPtr->selection == selection) {
 	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
@@ -495,7 +488,7 @@ Tk_ClearSelection(tkwin, selection)
 	}
 	prevPtr = infoPtr;
     }
-    
+
     if (infoPtr != NULL) {
 	clearProc = infoPtr->clearProc;
 	clearData = infoPtr->clearData;
@@ -513,80 +506,77 @@ Tk_ClearSelection(tkwin, selection)
  *
  * Tk_GetSelection --
  *
- *	Retrieve the value of a selection and pass it off (in
- *	pieces, possibly) to a given procedure.
+ *	Retrieve the value of a selection and pass it off (in pieces,
+ *	possibly) to a given function.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return value.
- *	If an error occurs (such as no selection exists)
- *	then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs
+ *	(such as no selection exists) then an error message is left in the
+ *	interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The standard X11 protocols are used to retrieve the
- *	selection.  When it arrives, it is passed to proc.  If
- *	the selection is very large, it will be passed to proc
- *	in several pieces.  Proc should have the following
+ *	The standard X11 protocols are used to retrieve the selection. When it
+ *	arrives, it is passed to proc. If the selection is very large, it will
+ *	be passed to proc in several pieces. Proc should have the following
  *	structure:
  *
  *	int
- *	proc(clientData, interp, portion)
- *	    ClientData clientData;
- *	    Tcl_Interp *interp;
- *	    char *portion;
+ *	proc(
+ *	    ClientData clientData,
+ *	    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+ *	    char *portion)
  *	{
  *	}
  *
- *	The interp and clientData arguments to proc will be the
- *	same as the corresponding arguments to Tk_GetSelection.
- *	The portion argument points to a character string
- *	containing part of the selection, and numBytes indicates
- *	the length of the portion, not including the terminating
- *	NULL character.  If the selection arrives in several pieces,
- *	the "portion" arguments in separate calls will contain
- *	successive parts of the selection.  Proc should normally
- *	return TCL_OK.  If it detects an error then it should return
- *	TCL_ERROR and leave an error message in the interp's result; the
- *	remainder of the selection retrieval will be aborted.
+ *	The interp and clientData arguments to proc will be the same as the
+ *	corresponding arguments to Tk_GetSelection. The portion argument
+ *	points to a character string containing part of the selection, and
+ *	numBytes indicates the length of the portion, not including the
+ *	terminating NULL character. If the selection arrives in several
+ *	pieces, the "portion" arguments in separate calls will contain
+ *	successive parts of the selection. Proc should normally return TCL_OK.
+ *	If it detects an error then it should return TCL_ERROR and leave an
+ *	error message in the interp's result; the remainder of the selection
+ *	retrieval will be aborted.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting
-				 * errors. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window on whose behalf to retrieve
-				 * the selection (determines display
-				 * from which to retrieve). */
-    Atom selection;		/* Selection to retrieve. */
-    Atom target;		/* Desired form in which selection
-				 * is to be returned. */
-    Tk_GetSelProc *proc;	/* Procedure to call to process the
-				 * selection, once it has been retrieved. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
+Tk_GetSelection(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window on whose behalf to retrieve the
+				 * selection (determines display from which to
+				 * retrieve). */
+    Atom selection,		/* Selection to retrieve. */
+    Atom target,		/* Desired form in which selection is to be
+				 * returned. */
+    Tk_GetSelProc *proc,	/* Function to call to process the selection,
+				 * once it has been retrieved. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
     TkSelectionInfo *infoPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (dispPtr->multipleAtom == None) {
 	TkSelInit(tkwin);
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the selection is owned by a window managed by this
-     * process, then call the retrieval procedure directly,
-     * rather than going through the X server (it's dangerous
-     * to go through the X server in this case because it could
-     * result in deadlock if an INCR-style selection results).
+     * If the selection is owned by a window managed by this process, then
+     * call the retrieval function directly, rather than going through the X
+     * server (it's dangerous to go through the X server in this case because
+     * it could result in deadlock if an INCR-style selection results).
      */
 
     for (infoPtr = dispPtr->selectionInfoPtr; infoPtr != NULL;
 	    infoPtr = infoPtr->nextPtr) {
-	if (infoPtr->selection == selection)
+	if (infoPtr->selection == selection) {
 	    break;
+	}
     }
     if (infoPtr != NULL) {
 	register TkSelHandler *selPtr;
@@ -595,9 +585,8 @@ Tk_GetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData)
 	TkSelInProgress ip;
 
 	for (selPtr = ((TkWindow *) infoPtr->owner)->selHandlerList;
-	     selPtr != NULL; selPtr = selPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    if  ((selPtr->target == target)
-		    && (selPtr->selection == selection)) {
+		selPtr != NULL; selPtr = selPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (selPtr->target==target && selPtr->selection==selection) {
 		break;
 	    }
 	}
@@ -607,7 +596,7 @@ Tk_GetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData)
 	    count = TkSelDefaultSelection(infoPtr, target, buffer,
 		    TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE, &type);
 	    if (count > TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE) {
-		panic("selection handler returned too many bytes");
+		Tcl_Panic("selection handler returned too many bytes");
 	    }
 	    if (count < 0) {
 		goto cantget;
@@ -628,7 +617,7 @@ Tk_GetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData)
 		    goto cantget;
 		}
 		if (count > TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE) {
-		    panic("selection handler returned too many bytes");
+		    Tcl_Panic("selection handler returned too many bytes");
 		}
 		buffer[count] = '\0';
 		result = (*proc)(clientData, interp, buffer);
@@ -650,10 +639,10 @@ Tk_GetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData)
     return TkSelGetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc,
 	    clientData);
 
-    cantget:
+  cantget:
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, selection),
-	" selection doesn't exist or form \"", Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, target),
-	"\" not defined", (char *) NULL);
+	    " selection doesn't exist or form \"",
+	    Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, target), "\" not defined", NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -662,9 +651,8 @@ Tk_GetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData)
  *
  * Tk_SelectionObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "selection" Tcl
- *	command.  See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "selection" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -676,12 +664,12 @@ Tk_GetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_SelectionObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
+Tk_SelectionObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with
 				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     char *path = NULL;
@@ -690,11 +678,12 @@ Tk_SelectionObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     int count, index;
     Tcl_Obj **objs;
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
-	"clear", "get", "handle", "own", (char *) NULL
+	"clear", "get", "handle", "own", NULL
     };
-    enum options { SELECTION_CLEAR, SELECTION_GET, SELECTION_HANDLE,
-		       SELECTION_OWN };
-    
+    enum options {
+	SELECTION_CLEAR, SELECTION_GET, SELECTION_HANDLE, SELECTION_OWN
+    };
+
     if (objc < 2) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -706,319 +695,323 @@ Tk_SelectionObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case SELECTION_CLEAR: {
-	    static CONST char *clearOptionStrings[] = {
-		"-displayof", "-selection", (char *) NULL
-	    };
-	    enum clearOptions { CLEAR_DISPLAYOF, CLEAR_SELECTION };
-	    int clearIndex;
-	    
-	    for (count = objc-2, objs = ((Tcl_Obj **)objv)+2; count > 0;
-		 count-=2, objs+=2) {
-		string = Tcl_GetString(objs[0]);
-		if (string[0] != '-') {
-		    break;
-		}
-		if (count < 2) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string,
-			    "\" missing", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-
-		if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objs[0], clearOptionStrings,
-			"option", 0, &clearIndex) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		switch ((enum clearOptions) clearIndex) {
-		    case CLEAR_DISPLAYOF:
-			path = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
-			break;
-		    case CLEAR_SELECTION:
-			selName = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
-			break;
-		}
+    case SELECTION_CLEAR: {
+	static CONST char *clearOptionStrings[] = {
+	    "-displayof", "-selection", NULL
+	};
+	enum clearOptions { CLEAR_DISPLAYOF, CLEAR_SELECTION };
+	int clearIndex;
+
+	for (count = objc-2, objs = ((Tcl_Obj **)objv)+2; count > 0;
+		count-=2, objs+=2) {
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(objs[0]);
+	    if (string[0] != '-') {
+		break;
 	    }
-	    if (count == 1) {
-		path = Tcl_GetString(objs[0]);
-	    } else if (count > 1) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options?");
+	    if (count < 2) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string,
+			"\" missing", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (path != NULL) {
-		tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, path, tkwin);
-	    }
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
+
+	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objs[0], clearOptionStrings,
+		    "option", 0, &clearIndex) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (selName != NULL) {
-		selection = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, selName);
-	    } else {
-		selection = XA_PRIMARY;
+	    switch ((enum clearOptions) clearIndex) {
+	    case CLEAR_DISPLAYOF:
+		path = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
+		break;
+	    case CLEAR_SELECTION:
+		selName = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
+		break;
 	    }
-	    
-	    Tk_ClearSelection(tkwin, selection);
-	    break;
 	}
 
-	case SELECTION_GET: {
-	    Atom target;
-	    char *targetName = NULL;
-	    Tcl_DString selBytes;
-	    int result;
-	    static CONST char *getOptionStrings[] = {
-		"-displayof", "-selection", "-type", (char *) NULL
-	    };
-	    enum getOptions { GET_DISPLAYOF, GET_SELECTION, GET_TYPE };
-	    int getIndex;
-	    
-	    for (count = objc-2, objs = ((Tcl_Obj **)objv)+2; count>0;
-		 count-=2, objs+=2) {
-		string = Tcl_GetString(objs[0]);
-		if (string[0] != '-') {
-		    break;
-		}
-		if (count < 2) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string,
-			    "\" missing", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		
-		if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objs[0], getOptionStrings,
-			"option", 0, &getIndex) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
+	if (count == 1) {
+	    path = Tcl_GetString(objs[0]);
+	} else if (count > 1) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (path != NULL) {
+	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, path, tkwin);
+	}
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (selName != NULL) {
+	    selection = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, selName);
+	} else {
+	    selection = XA_PRIMARY;
+	}
 
-		switch ((enum getOptions) getIndex) {
-		    case GET_DISPLAYOF:
-			path = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
-			break;
-		    case GET_SELECTION:
-			selName = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
-			break;
-		    case GET_TYPE:
-			targetName = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
-			break;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (path != NULL) {
-		tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, path, tkwin);
+	Tk_ClearSelection(tkwin, selection);
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case SELECTION_GET: {
+	Atom target;
+	char *targetName = NULL;
+	Tcl_DString selBytes;
+	int result;
+	static CONST char *getOptionStrings[] = {
+	    "-displayof", "-selection", "-type", NULL
+	};
+	enum getOptions { GET_DISPLAYOF, GET_SELECTION, GET_TYPE };
+	int getIndex;
+
+	for (count = objc-2, objs = ((Tcl_Obj **)objv)+2; count>0;
+		count-=2, objs+=2) {
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(objs[0]);
+	    if (string[0] != '-') {
+		break;
 	    }
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    if (count < 2) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string,
+			"\" missing", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (selName != NULL) {
-		selection = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, selName);
-	    } else {
-		selection = XA_PRIMARY;
-	    }
-	    if (count > 1) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options?");
+
+	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objs[0], getOptionStrings,
+		    "option", 0, &getIndex) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    } else if (count == 1) {
-		target = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objs[0]));
-	    } else if (targetName != NULL) {
-		target = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, targetName);
-	    } else {
-		target = XA_STRING;
 	    }
 
-	    Tcl_DStringInit(&selBytes);
-	    result = Tk_GetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target,
-		    SelGetProc,	(ClientData) &selBytes);
-	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		Tcl_DStringResult(interp, &selBytes);
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_DStringFree(&selBytes);
+	    switch ((enum getOptions) getIndex) {
+	    case GET_DISPLAYOF:
+		path = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
+		break;
+	    case GET_SELECTION:
+		selName = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
+		break;
+	    case GET_TYPE:
+		targetName = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
+		break;
 	    }
-	    return result;
 	}
 
-	case SELECTION_HANDLE: {
-	    Atom target, format;
-	    char *targetName = NULL;
-	    char *formatName = NULL;
-	    register CommandInfo *cmdInfoPtr;
-	    int cmdLength;
-	    static CONST char *handleOptionStrings[] = {
-		"-format", "-selection", "-type", (char *) NULL
-	    };
-	    enum handleOptions { HANDLE_FORMAT, HANDLE_SELECTION,
-				     HANDLE_TYPE };
-	    int handleIndex;
-	    
-	    for (count = objc-2, objs = ((Tcl_Obj **)objv)+2; count > 0;
-		 count-=2, objs+=2) {
-		string = Tcl_GetString(objs[0]);
-		if (string[0] != '-') {
-		    break;
-		}
-		if (count < 2) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string,
-			    "\" missing", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
+	if (path != NULL) {
+	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, path, tkwin);
+	}
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (selName != NULL) {
+	    selection = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, selName);
+	} else {
+	    selection = XA_PRIMARY;
+	}
+	if (count > 1) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	} else if (count == 1) {
+	    target = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objs[0]));
+	} else if (targetName != NULL) {
+	    target = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, targetName);
+	} else {
+	    target = XA_STRING;
+	}
 
-		if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objs[0],handleOptionStrings,
-			"option", 0, &handleIndex) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
+	Tcl_DStringInit(&selBytes);
+	result = Tk_GetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target,
+		SelGetProc, (ClientData) &selBytes);
+	if (result == TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_DStringResult(interp, &selBytes);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&selBytes);
+	}
+	return result;
+    }
 
-		switch ((enum handleOptions) handleIndex) {
-		    case HANDLE_FORMAT:
-			formatName = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
-			break;
-		    case HANDLE_SELECTION:
-			selName = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
-			break;
-		    case HANDLE_TYPE:
-			targetName = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
-			break;
-		}
+    case SELECTION_HANDLE: {
+	Atom target, format;
+	char *targetName = NULL;
+	char *formatName = NULL;
+	register CommandInfo *cmdInfoPtr;
+	int cmdLength;
+	static CONST char *handleOptionStrings[] = {
+	    "-format", "-selection", "-type", NULL
+	};
+	enum handleOptions {
+	    HANDLE_FORMAT, HANDLE_SELECTION, HANDLE_TYPE
+	};
+	int handleIndex;
+
+	for (count = objc-2, objs = ((Tcl_Obj **)objv)+2; count > 0;
+		count-=2, objs+=2) {
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(objs[0]);
+	    if (string[0] != '-') {
+		break;
 	    }
-
-	    if ((count < 2) || (count > 4)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options? window command");
+	    if (count < 2) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string,
+			"\" missing", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objs[0]), tkwin);
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
+
+	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objs[0],handleOptionStrings,
+		    "option", 0, &handleIndex) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (selName != NULL) {
-		selection = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, selName);
-	    } else {
-		selection = XA_PRIMARY;
-	    }
-	    
-	    if (count > 2) {
-		target = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objs[2]));
-	    } else if (targetName != NULL) {
-		target = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, targetName);
-	    } else {
-		target = XA_STRING;
-	    }
-	    if (count > 3) {
-		format = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objs[3]));
-	    } else if (formatName != NULL) {
-		format = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, formatName);
-	    } else {
-		format = XA_STRING;
-	    }
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objs[1], &cmdLength);
-	    if (cmdLength == 0) {
-		Tk_DeleteSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target);
-	    } else {
-		cmdInfoPtr = (CommandInfo *) ckalloc((unsigned) (
-		    sizeof(CommandInfo) - 3 + cmdLength));
-		cmdInfoPtr->interp = interp;
-		cmdInfoPtr->charOffset = 0;
-		cmdInfoPtr->byteOffset = 0;
-		cmdInfoPtr->buffer[0] = '\0';
-		cmdInfoPtr->cmdLength = cmdLength;
-		memcpy(cmdInfoPtr->command, string, cmdLength + 1);
-		Tk_CreateSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target, HandleTclCommand,
-			(ClientData) cmdInfoPtr, format);
+
+	    switch ((enum handleOptions) handleIndex) {
+	    case HANDLE_FORMAT:
+		formatName = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
+		break;
+	    case HANDLE_SELECTION:
+		selName = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
+		break;
+	    case HANDLE_TYPE:
+		targetName = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
+		break;
 	    }
-	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
-	
-	case SELECTION_OWN: {
-	    register LostCommand *lostPtr;
-	    char *script = NULL;
-	    int cmdLength;
-	    static CONST char *ownOptionStrings[] = {
-		"-command", "-displayof", "-selection", (char *) NULL
-	    };
-	    enum ownOptions { OWN_COMMAND, OWN_DISPLAYOF, OWN_SELECTION };
-	    int ownIndex;
-	    
-	    for (count = objc-2, objs = ((Tcl_Obj **)objv)+2; count > 0;
-		 count-=2, objs+=2) {
-		string = Tcl_GetString(objs[0]);
-		if (string[0] != '-') {
-		    break;
-		}
-		if (count < 2) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string,
-			    "\" missing", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
 
-		if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objs[0], ownOptionStrings,
-			"option", 0, &ownIndex) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
+	if ((count < 2) || (count > 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options? window command");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objs[0]), tkwin);
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (selName != NULL) {
+	    selection = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, selName);
+	} else {
+	    selection = XA_PRIMARY;
+	}
 
-		switch ((enum ownOptions) ownIndex) {
-		    case OWN_COMMAND:
-			script = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
-			break;
-		    case OWN_DISPLAYOF:
-			path = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
-			break;
-		    case OWN_SELECTION:
-			selName = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
-			break;
-		}
+	if (count > 2) {
+	    target = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objs[2]));
+	} else if (targetName != NULL) {
+	    target = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, targetName);
+	} else {
+	    target = XA_STRING;
+	}
+	if (count > 3) {
+	    format = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objs[3]));
+	} else if (formatName != NULL) {
+	    format = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, formatName);
+	} else {
+	    format = XA_STRING;
+	}
+	string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objs[1], &cmdLength);
+	if (cmdLength == 0) {
+	    Tk_DeleteSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target);
+	} else {
+	    cmdInfoPtr = (CommandInfo *) ckalloc((unsigned) (
+		    sizeof(CommandInfo) - 3 + cmdLength));
+	    cmdInfoPtr->interp = interp;
+	    cmdInfoPtr->charOffset = 0;
+	    cmdInfoPtr->byteOffset = 0;
+	    cmdInfoPtr->buffer[0] = '\0';
+	    cmdInfoPtr->cmdLength = cmdLength;
+	    memcpy(cmdInfoPtr->command, string, cmdLength + 1);
+	    Tk_CreateSelHandler(tkwin, selection, target, HandleTclCommand,
+		    (ClientData) cmdInfoPtr, format);
+	}
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    case SELECTION_OWN: {
+	register LostCommand *lostPtr;
+	char *script = NULL;
+	int cmdLength;
+	static CONST char *ownOptionStrings[] = {
+	    "-command", "-displayof", "-selection", NULL
+	};
+	enum ownOptions { OWN_COMMAND, OWN_DISPLAYOF, OWN_SELECTION };
+	int ownIndex;
+
+	for (count = objc-2, objs = ((Tcl_Obj **)objv)+2; count > 0;
+		count-=2, objs+=2) {
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(objs[0]);
+	    if (string[0] != '-') {
+		break;
 	    }
-	    
-	    if (count > 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options? ?window?");
+	    if (count < 2) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string,
+			"\" missing", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (selName != NULL) {
-		selection = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, selName);
-	    } else {
-		selection = XA_PRIMARY;
+
+	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objs[0], ownOptionStrings,
+		    "option", 0, &ownIndex) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (count == 0) {
-		TkSelectionInfo *infoPtr;
-		TkWindow *winPtr;
-		if (path != NULL) {
-		    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, path, tkwin);
-		}
-		if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		winPtr = (TkWindow *)tkwin;
-		for (infoPtr = winPtr->dispPtr->selectionInfoPtr;
-		     infoPtr != NULL; infoPtr = infoPtr->nextPtr) {
-		    if (infoPtr->selection == selection)
-			break;
-		}
-		
-		/*
-		 * Ignore the internal clipboard window.
-		 */
-		
-		if ((infoPtr != NULL)
-			&& (infoPtr->owner != winPtr->dispPtr->clipWindow)) {
-		    Tcl_SetResult(interp, Tk_PathName(infoPtr->owner),
-			    TCL_STATIC);
-		}
-		return TCL_OK;
+
+	    switch ((enum ownOptions) ownIndex) {
+	    case OWN_COMMAND:
+		script = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
+		break;
+	    case OWN_DISPLAYOF:
+		path = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
+		break;
+	    case OWN_SELECTION:
+		selName = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	if (count > 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options? ?window?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (selName != NULL) {
+	    selection = Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, selName);
+	} else {
+	    selection = XA_PRIMARY;
+	}
+
+	if (count == 0) {
+	    TkSelectionInfo *infoPtr;
+	    TkWindow *winPtr;
+
+	    if (path != NULL) {
+		tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, path, tkwin);
 	    }
-	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objs[0]), tkwin);
 	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (count == 2) {
-		script = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
+	    winPtr = (TkWindow *)tkwin;
+	    for (infoPtr = winPtr->dispPtr->selectionInfoPtr;
+		    infoPtr != NULL; infoPtr = infoPtr->nextPtr) {
+		if (infoPtr->selection == selection) {
+		    break;
+		}
 	    }
-	    if (script == NULL) {
-		Tk_OwnSelection(tkwin, selection, (Tk_LostSelProc *) NULL,
-			(ClientData) NULL);
-		return TCL_OK;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Ignore the internal clipboard window.
+	     */
+
+	    if ((infoPtr != NULL)
+		    && (infoPtr->owner != winPtr->dispPtr->clipWindow)) {
+		Tcl_SetResult(interp, Tk_PathName(infoPtr->owner), TCL_STATIC);
 	    }
-	    cmdLength = strlen(script);
-	    lostPtr = (LostCommand *) ckalloc((unsigned) (sizeof(LostCommand)
-		    -3 + cmdLength));
-	    lostPtr->interp = interp;
-	    memcpy(lostPtr->command, script, cmdLength + 1);
-	    Tk_OwnSelection(tkwin, selection, LostSelection,
-		    (ClientData) lostPtr);
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
+
+	tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objs[0]), tkwin);
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (count == 2) {
+	    script = Tcl_GetString(objs[1]);
+	}
+	if (script == NULL) {
+	    Tk_OwnSelection(tkwin, selection, NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	cmdLength = strlen(script);
+	lostPtr = (LostCommand *) ckalloc((unsigned) (sizeof(LostCommand)
+		-3 + cmdLength));
+	lostPtr->interp = interp;
+	strcpy(lostPtr->command, script);
+	Tk_OwnSelection(tkwin, selection, LostSelection, (ClientData) lostPtr);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -1028,12 +1021,12 @@ Tk_SelectionObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkSelGetInProgress --
  *
- *	This procedure returns a pointer to the thread-local
- *      list of pending searches.
+ *	This function returns a pointer to the thread-local list of pending
+ *	searches.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the first search in progress, 
- *      or NULL if there are none. 
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the first search in progress, or NULL
+ *	if there are none.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1042,10 +1035,10 @@ Tk_SelectionObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 TkSelInProgress *
-TkSelGetInProgress _ANSI_ARGS_((void))
+TkSelGetInProgress(void)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     return tsdPtr->pendingPtr;
 }
@@ -1055,9 +1048,9 @@ TkSelGetInProgress _ANSI_ARGS_((void))
  *
  * TkSelSetInProgress --
  *
- *	This procedure is used to set the thread-local list of pending 
- *      searches.  It is required because the pending list is kept
- *      in thread local storage.
+ *	This function is used to set the thread-local list of pending
+ *	searches. It is required because the pending list is kept in thread
+ *	local storage.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1068,13 +1061,13 @@ TkSelGetInProgress _ANSI_ARGS_((void))
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 void
-TkSelSetInProgress(pendingPtr)
-    TkSelInProgress *pendingPtr;
+TkSelSetInProgress(
+    TkSelInProgress *pendingPtr)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
-   tsdPtr->pendingPtr = pendingPtr;
+    tsdPtr->pendingPtr = pendingPtr;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1082,8 +1075,8 @@ TkSelSetInProgress(pendingPtr)
  *
  * TkSelDeadWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked just before a TkWindow is deleted.
- *	It performs selection-related cleanup.
+ *	This function is invoked just before a TkWindow is deleted. It
+ *	performs selection-related cleanup.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1095,14 +1088,14 @@ TkSelSetInProgress(pendingPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkSelDeadWindow(winPtr)
-    register TkWindow *winPtr;	/* Window that's being deleted. */
+TkSelDeadWindow(
+    register TkWindow *winPtr)	/* Window that's being deleted. */
 {
     register TkSelHandler *selPtr;
     register TkSelInProgress *ipPtr;
     TkSelectionInfo *infoPtr, *prevPtr, *nextPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
      * While deleting all the handlers, be careful to check whether
@@ -1113,8 +1106,8 @@ TkSelDeadWindow(winPtr)
     while (winPtr->selHandlerList != NULL) {
 	selPtr = winPtr->selHandlerList;
 	winPtr->selHandlerList = selPtr->nextPtr;
-	for (ipPtr = tsdPtr->pendingPtr; ipPtr != NULL; 
-                ipPtr = ipPtr->nextPtr) {
+	for (ipPtr = tsdPtr->pendingPtr; ipPtr != NULL;
+		ipPtr = ipPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (ipPtr->selPtr == selPtr) {
 		ipPtr->selPtr = NULL;
 	    }
@@ -1135,7 +1128,7 @@ TkSelDeadWindow(winPtr)
      */
 
     for (infoPtr = winPtr->dispPtr->selectionInfoPtr, prevPtr = NULL;
-	     infoPtr != NULL; infoPtr = nextPtr) {
+	    infoPtr != NULL; infoPtr = nextPtr) {
 	nextPtr = infoPtr->nextPtr;
 	if (infoPtr->owner == (Tk_Window) winPtr) {
 	    if (infoPtr->clearProc == LostSelection) {
@@ -1170,9 +1163,9 @@ TkSelDeadWindow(winPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkSelInit(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window token (used to find
-				 * display to initialize). */
+TkSelInit(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window token (used to find display to
+				 * initialize). */
 {
     register TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
@@ -1191,17 +1184,16 @@ TkSelInit(tkwin)
     dispPtr->clipboardAtom	= Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, "CLIPBOARD");
 
     /*
-     * Using UTF8_STRING instead of the XA_UTF8_STRING macro allows us
-     * to support older X servers that didn't have UTF8_STRING yet.
-     * This is necessary on Unix systems.
-     * For more information, see:
-     *    http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/~mgk25/unicode.html#x11
+     * Using UTF8_STRING instead of the XA_UTF8_STRING macro allows us to
+     * support older X servers that didn't have UTF8_STRING yet. This is
+     * necessary on Unix systems. For more information, see:
+     *	  http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/~mgk25/unicode.html#x11
      */
 
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
     dispPtr->utf8Atom		= Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, "UTF8_STRING");
 #else
-    dispPtr->utf8Atom		= (Atom) NULL;
+    dispPtr->utf8Atom		= (Atom) 0;
 #endif
 }
 
@@ -1210,22 +1202,22 @@ TkSelInit(tkwin)
  *
  * TkSelClearSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process a SelectionClear event.
+ *	This function is invoked to process a SelectionClear event.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Invokes the clear procedure for the window which lost the
+ *	Invokes the clear function for the window which lost the
  *	selection.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkSelClearSelection(tkwin, eventPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which event was targeted. */
-    register XEvent *eventPtr;	/* X SelectionClear event. */
+TkSelClearSelection(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window for which event was targeted. */
+    register XEvent *eventPtr)	/* X SelectionClear event. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
@@ -1233,24 +1225,24 @@ TkSelClearSelection(tkwin, eventPtr)
     TkSelectionInfo *prevPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Invoke clear procedure for window that just lost the selection.  This
+     * Invoke clear function for window that just lost the selection. This
      * code is a bit tricky, because any callbacks due to selection changes
-     * between windows managed by the process have already been made.  Thus,
+     * between windows managed by the process have already been made. Thus,
      * ignore the event unless it refers to the window that's currently the
      * selection owner and the event was generated after the server saw the
      * SetSelectionOwner request.
      */
 
     for (infoPtr = dispPtr->selectionInfoPtr, prevPtr = NULL;
-	 infoPtr != NULL; infoPtr = infoPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    infoPtr != NULL; infoPtr = infoPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (infoPtr->selection == eventPtr->xselectionclear.selection) {
 	    break;
 	}
 	prevPtr = infoPtr;
     }
 
-    if (infoPtr != NULL && (infoPtr->owner == tkwin)
-	    && (eventPtr->xselectionclear.serial >= (unsigned) infoPtr->serial)) {
+    if (infoPtr != NULL && (infoPtr->owner == tkwin) &&
+	    (eventPtr->xselectionclear.serial >= (unsigned) infoPtr->serial)) {
 	if (prevPtr == NULL) {
 	    dispPtr->selectionInfoPtr = infoPtr->nextPtr;
 	} else {
@@ -1259,9 +1251,9 @@ TkSelClearSelection(tkwin, eventPtr)
 
 	/*
 	 * Because of reentrancy problems, calling clearProc must be done
-	 * after the infoPtr has been removed from the selectionInfoPtr
-	 * list (clearProc could modify the list, e.g. by creating
-	 * a new selection).
+	 * after the infoPtr has been removed from the selectionInfoPtr list
+	 * (clearProc could modify the list, e.g. by creating a new
+	 * selection).
 	 */
 
 	if (infoPtr->clearProc != NULL) {
@@ -1276,27 +1268,27 @@ TkSelClearSelection(tkwin, eventPtr)
  *
  * SelGetProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process pieces of the selection
- *	as they arrive during "selection get" commands.
+ *	This function is invoked to process pieces of the selection as they
+ *	arrive during "selection get" commands.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Always returns TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Bytes get appended to the dynamic string pointed to by the
- *	clientData argument.
+ *	Bytes get appended to the dynamic string pointed to by the clientData
+ *	argument.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-SelGetProc(clientData, interp, portion)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Dynamic string holding partially
-				 * assembled selection. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter used for error
-				 * reporting (not used). */
-    char *portion;		/* New information to be appended. */
+SelGetProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Dynamic string holding partially assembled
+				 * selection. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter used for error reporting (not
+				 * used). */
+    char *portion)		/* New information to be appended. */
 {
     Tcl_DStringAppend((Tcl_DString *) clientData, portion, -1);
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -1307,14 +1299,14 @@ SelGetProc(clientData, interp, portion)
  *
  * HandleTclCommand --
  *
- *	This procedure acts as selection handler for handlers created
- *	by the "selection handle" command.  It invokes a Tcl command to
- *	retrieve the selection.
+ *	This function acts as selection handler for handlers created by the
+ *	"selection handle" command. It invokes a Tcl command to retrieve the
+ *	selection.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a count of the number of bytes actually
- *	stored at buffer, or -1 if an error occurs while executing
- *	the Tcl command to retrieve the selection.
+ *	The return value is a count of the number of bytes actually stored at
+ *	buffer, or -1 if an error occurs while executing the Tcl command to
+ *	retrieve the selection.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None except for things done by the Tcl command.
@@ -1323,12 +1315,12 @@ SelGetProc(clientData, interp, portion)
  */
 
 static int
-HandleTclCommand(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about command to execute. */
-    int offset;			/* Return selection bytes starting at this
+HandleTclCommand(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about command to execute. */
+    int offset,			/* Return selection bytes starting at this
 				 * offset. */
-    char *buffer;		/* Place to store converted selection. */
-    int maxBytes;		/* Maximum # of bytes to store at buffer. */
+    char *buffer,		/* Place to store converted selection. */
+    int maxBytes)		/* Maximum # of bytes to store at buffer. */
 {
     CommandInfo *cmdInfoPtr = (CommandInfo *) clientData;
     int spaceNeeded, length;
@@ -1342,16 +1334,16 @@ HandleTclCommand(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
     CONST char *p;
 
     /*
-     * We must also protect the interpreter and the command from being
-     * deleted too soon.
+     * We must also protect the interpreter and the command from being deleted
+     * too soon.
      */
 
     Tcl_Preserve(clientData);
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
 
     /*
-     * Compute the proper byte offset in the case where the last chunk
-     * split a character.
+     * Compute the proper byte offset in the case where the last chunk split a
+     * character.
      */
 
     if (offset == cmdInfoPtr->byteOffset) {
@@ -1370,8 +1362,8 @@ HandleTclCommand(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
     }
 
     /*
-     * First, generate a command by taking the command string
-     * and appending the offset and maximum # of bytes.
+     * First, generate a command by taking the command string and appending
+     * the offset and maximum # of bytes.
      */
 
     spaceNeeded = cmdInfoPtr->cmdLength + 30;
@@ -1383,8 +1375,8 @@ HandleTclCommand(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
     sprintf(command, "%s %d %d", cmdInfoPtr->command, charOffset, maxBytes);
 
     /*
-     * Execute the command.  Be sure to restore the state of the
-     * interpreter after executing the command.
+     * Execute the command. Be sure to restore the state of the interpreter
+     * after executing the command.
      */
 
     Tcl_DStringInit(&oldResult);
@@ -1393,12 +1385,12 @@ HandleTclCommand(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
 	objPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
 	string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, &length);
 	count = (length > maxBytes) ? maxBytes : length;
-	memcpy((VOID *) buffer, (VOID *) string, (size_t) count);
+	memcpy(buffer, string, (size_t) count);
 	buffer[count] = '\0';
 
 	/*
-	 * Update the partial character information for the next
-	 * retrieval if the command has not been deleted.
+	 * Update the partial character information for the next retrieval if
+	 * the command has not been deleted.
 	 */
 
 	if (cmdInfoPtr->interp != NULL) {
@@ -1419,7 +1411,7 @@ HandleTclCommand(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
 		    strncpy(cmdInfoPtr->buffer, string, (size_t) length);
 		}
 		cmdInfoPtr->buffer[length] = '\0';
-	    }		
+	    }
 	    cmdInfoPtr->byteOffset += count + extraBytes;
 	}
 	count += extraBytes;
@@ -1432,7 +1424,6 @@ HandleTclCommand(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
 	ckfree(command);
     }
 
-
     Tcl_Release(clientData);
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
     return count;
@@ -1443,20 +1434,18 @@ HandleTclCommand(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  *
  * TkSelDefaultSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to generate selection information
- *	for a few standard targets such as TIMESTAMP and TARGETS.
- *	It is invoked only if no handler has been declared by the
- *	application.
+ *	This function is called to generate selection information for a few
+ *	standard targets such as TIMESTAMP and TARGETS. It is invoked only if
+ *	no handler has been declared by the application.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If "target" is a standard target understood by this procedure,
- *	the selection is converted to that form and stored as a
- *	character string in buffer.  The type of the selection (e.g.
- *	STRING or ATOM) is stored in *typePtr, and the return value is
- *	a count of the # of non-NULL bytes at buffer.  If the target
- *	wasn't understood, or if there isn't enough space at buffer
- *	to hold the entire selection (no INCR-mode transfers for this
- *	stuff!), then -1 is returned.
+ *	If "target" is a standard target understood by this function, the
+ *	selection is converted to that form and stored as a character string
+ *	in buffer. The type of the selection (e.g. STRING or ATOM) is stored
+ *	in *typePtr, and the return value is a count of the # of non-NULL
+ *	bytes at buffer. If the target wasn't understood, or if there isn't
+ *	enough space at buffer to hold the entire selection (no INCR-mode
+ *	transfers for this stuff!), then -1 is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1465,13 +1454,13 @@ HandleTclCommand(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  */
 
 int
-TkSelDefaultSelection(infoPtr, target, buffer, maxBytes, typePtr)
-    TkSelectionInfo *infoPtr;	/* Info about selection being retrieved. */
-    Atom target;		/* Desired form of selection. */
-    char *buffer;		/* Place to put selection characters. */
-    int maxBytes;		/* Maximum # of bytes to store at buffer. */
-    Atom *typePtr;		/* Store here the type of the selection,
-				 * for use in converting to proper X format. */
+TkSelDefaultSelection(
+    TkSelectionInfo *infoPtr,	/* Info about selection being retrieved. */
+    Atom target,		/* Desired form of selection. */
+    char *buffer,		/* Place to put selection characters. */
+    int maxBytes,		/* Maximum # of bytes to store at buffer. */
+    Atom *typePtr)		/* Store here the type of the selection, for
+				 * use in converting to proper X format. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) infoPtr->owner;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
@@ -1551,22 +1540,22 @@ TkSelDefaultSelection(infoPtr, target, buffer, maxBytes, typePtr)
  *
  * LostSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a window has lost ownership of
- *	the selection and the ownership was claimed with the command
- *	"selection own".
+ *	This function is invoked when a window has lost ownership of the
+ *	selection and the ownership was claimed with the command "selection
+ *	own".
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A Tcl script is executed;  it can do almost anything.
+ *	A Tcl script is executed; it can do almost anything.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-LostSelection(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to LostCommand structure. */
+LostSelection(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to LostCommand structure. */
 {
     LostCommand *lostPtr = (LostCommand *) clientData;
     Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
@@ -1574,10 +1563,10 @@ LostSelection(clientData)
 
     interp = lostPtr->interp;
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
-    
+
     /*
-     * Execute the command.  Save the interpreter's result, if any, and
-     * restore it after executing the command.
+     * Execute the command. Save the interpreter's result, if any, and restore
+     * it after executing the command.
      */
 
     objPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
@@ -1592,10 +1581,18 @@ LostSelection(clientData)
     Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
 
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
-    
+
     /*
      * Free the storage for the command, since we're done with it now.
      */
 
     ckfree((char *) lostPtr);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkSelect.h b/generic/tkSelect.h
index 4d1c9d0..b9d7d2d 100644
--- a/generic/tkSelect.h
+++ b/generic/tkSelect.h
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
 /*
  * tkSelect.h --
  *
- *	Declarations of types shared among the files that implement
- *	selection support.
+ *	Declarations of types shared among the files that implement selection
+ *	support.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKSELECT
@@ -16,142 +16,134 @@
 /*
  * When a selection is owned by a window on a given display, one of the
  * following structures is present on a list of current selections in the
- * display structure.  The structure is used to record the current owner of
- * a selection for use in later retrieval requests.  There is a list of
- * such structures because a display can have multiple different selections
- * active at the same time.
+ * display structure. The structure is used to record the current owner of a
+ * selection for use in later retrieval requests. There is a list of such
+ * structures because a display can have multiple different selections active
+ * at the same time.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkSelectionInfo {
     Atom selection;		/* Selection name, e.g. XA_PRIMARY. */
     Tk_Window owner;		/* Current owner of this selection. */
     int serial;			/* Serial number of last XSelectionSetOwner
-				 * request made to server for this
-				 * selection (used to filter out redundant
+				 * request made to server for this selection
+				 * (used to filter out redundant
 				 * SelectionClear events). */
     Time time;			/* Timestamp used to acquire selection. */
     Tk_LostSelProc *clearProc;	/* Procedure to call when owner loses
 				 * selection. */
     ClientData clearData;	/* Info to pass to clearProc. */
     struct TkSelectionInfo *nextPtr;
-				/* Next in list of current selections on
-                                 * this display.  NULL means end of list */
+				/* Next in list of current selections on this
+				 * display. NULL means end of list. */
 } TkSelectionInfo;
 
 /*
- * One of the following structures exists for each selection handler
- * created for a window by calling Tk_CreateSelHandler.  The handlers
- * are linked in a list rooted in the TkWindow structure.
+ * One of the following structures exists for each selection handler created
+ * for a window by calling Tk_CreateSelHandler. The handlers are linked in a
+ * list rooted in the TkWindow structure.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkSelHandler {
-    Atom selection;		/* Selection name, e.g. XA_PRIMARY */
-    Atom target;		/* Target type for selection
-				 * conversion, such as TARGETS or
-				 * STRING. */
-    Atom format;		/* Format in which selection
-				 * info will be returned, such
-				 * as STRING or ATOM. */
-    Tk_SelectionProc *proc;	/* Procedure to generate selection
-				 * in this format. */
+    Atom selection;		/* Selection name, e.g. XA_PRIMARY. */
+    Atom target;		/* Target type for selection conversion, such
+				 * as TARGETS or STRING. */
+    Atom format;		/* Format in which selection info will be
+				 * returned, such as STRING or ATOM. */
+    Tk_SelectionProc *proc;	/* Procedure to generate selection in this
+				 * format. */
     ClientData clientData;	/* Argument to pass to proc. */
-    int size;			/* Size of units returned by proc
-				 * (8 for STRING, 32 for almost
-				 * anything else). */
+    int size;			/* Size of units returned by proc (8 for
+				 * STRING, 32 for almost anything else). */
     struct TkSelHandler *nextPtr;
-				/* Next selection handler associated
-				 * with same window (NULL for end of
-				 * list). */
+				/* Next selection handler associated with same
+				 * window (NULL for end of list). */
 } TkSelHandler;
 
 /*
- * When the selection is being retrieved, one of the following
- * structures is present on a list of pending selection retrievals.
- * The structure is used to communicate between the background
- * procedure that requests the selection and the foreground
- * event handler that processes the events in which the selection
- * is returned.  There is a list of such structures so that there
- * can be multiple simultaneous selection retrievals (e.g. on
- * different displays).
+ * When the selection is being retrieved, one of the following structures is
+ * present on a list of pending selection retrievals. The structure is used to
+ * communicate between the background procedure that requests the selection
+ * and the foreground event handler that processes the events in which the
+ * selection is returned. There is a list of such structures so that there can
+ * be multiple simultaneous selection retrievals (e.g. on different displays).
  */
 
 typedef struct TkSelRetrievalInfo {
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window used as requestor for
-				 * selection. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window used as requestor for selection. */
     Atom selection;		/* Selection being requested. */
     Atom property;		/* Property where selection will appear. */
     Atom target;		/* Desired form for selection. */
     int (*proc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-	char *portion));	/* Procedure to call to handle pieces
-				 * of selection. */
+	char *portion));	/* Procedure to call to handle pieces of
+				 * selection. */
     ClientData clientData;	/* Argument for proc. */
-    int result;			/* Initially -1.  Set to a Tcl
-				 * return value once the selection
-				 * has been retrieved. */
+    int result;			/* Initially -1. Set to a Tcl return value
+				 * once the selection has been retrieved. */
     Tcl_TimerToken timeout;	/* Token for current timeout procedure. */
-    int idleTime;		/* Number of seconds that have gone by
-				 * without hearing anything from the
-				 * selection owner. */
+    int idleTime;		/* Number of seconds that have gone by without
+				 * hearing anything from the selection
+				 * owner. */
     Tcl_EncodingState encState;	/* Holds intermediate state during translations
 				 * of data that cross buffer boundaries. */
     int encFlags;		/* Encoding translation state flags. */
     Tcl_DString buf;		/* Buffer to hold translation data. */
     struct TkSelRetrievalInfo *nextPtr;
-				/* Next in list of all pending
-				 * selection retrievals.  NULL means
-				 * end of list. */
+				/* Next in list of all pending selection
+				 * retrievals. NULL means end of list. */
 } TkSelRetrievalInfo;
 
 /*
- * The clipboard contains a list of buffers of various types and formats.
- * All of the buffers of a given type will be returned in sequence when the
- * CLIPBOARD selection is retrieved.  All buffers of a given type on the
- * same clipboard must have the same format.  The TkClipboardTarget structure
- * is used to record the information about a chain of buffers of the same
- * type.
+ * The clipboard contains a list of buffers of various types and formats. All
+ * of the buffers of a given type will be returned in sequence when the
+ * CLIPBOARD selection is retrieved. All buffers of a given type on the same
+ * clipboard must have the same format. The TkClipboardTarget structure is
+ * used to record the information about a chain of buffers of the same type.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkClipboardBuffer {
-    char *buffer;			/* Null terminated data buffer. */
-    long length;			/* Length of string in buffer. */
-    struct TkClipboardBuffer *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of buffers.  NULL
-					 * means end of list . */
+    char *buffer;		/* Null terminated data buffer. */
+    long length;		/* Length of string in buffer. */
+    struct TkClipboardBuffer *nextPtr;
+				/* Next in list of buffers. NULL means end of
+				 * list . */
 } TkClipboardBuffer;
 
 typedef struct TkClipboardTarget {
-    Atom type;				/* Type conversion supported. */
-    Atom format;			/* Representation used for data. */
-    TkClipboardBuffer *firstBufferPtr;	/* First in list of data buffers. */
-    TkClipboardBuffer *lastBufferPtr;	/* Last in list of clipboard buffers.
-					 * Used to speed up appends. */
-    struct TkClipboardTarget *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of targets on
-					 * clipboard.  NULL means end of
-					 * list. */
+    Atom type;			/* Type conversion supported. */
+    Atom format;		/* Representation used for data. */
+    TkClipboardBuffer *firstBufferPtr;
+				/* First in list of data buffers. */
+    TkClipboardBuffer *lastBufferPtr;
+				/* Last in list of clipboard buffers. Used to
+				 * speed up appends. */
+    struct TkClipboardTarget *nextPtr;
+				/* Next in list of targets on clipboard. NULL
+				 * means end of list. */
 } TkClipboardTarget;
 
 /*
  * It is possible for a Tk_SelectionProc to delete the handler that it
- * represents.  If this happens, the code that is retrieving the selection
- * needs to know about it so it doesn't use the now-defunct handler
- * structure.  One structure of the following form is created for each
- * retrieval in progress, so that the retriever can find out if its
- * handler is deleted.  All of the pending retrievals (if there are more
- * than one) are linked into a list.
+ * represents. If this happens, the code that is retrieving the selection
+ * needs to know about it so it doesn't use the now-defunct handler structure.
+ * One structure of the following form is created for each retrieval in
+ * progress, so that the retriever can find out if its handler is deleted. All
+ * of the pending retrievals (if there are more than one) are linked into a
+ * list.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkSelInProgress {
-    TkSelHandler *selPtr;	/* Handler being executed.  If this handler
-				 * is deleted, the field is set to NULL. */
+    TkSelHandler *selPtr;	/* Handler being executed. If this handler is
+				 * deleted, the field is set to NULL. */
     struct TkSelInProgress *nextPtr;
 				/* Next higher nested search. */
 } TkSelInProgress;
 
 /*
- * Chunk size for retrieving selection.  It's defined both in
- * words and in bytes;  the word size is used to allocate
- * buffer space that's guaranteed to be word-aligned and that
- * has an extra character for the terminating NULL.
+ * Chunk size for retrieving selection. It's defined both in words and in
+ * bytes; the word size is used to allocate buffer space that's guaranteed to
+ * be word-aligned and that has an extra character for the terminating NULL.
  */
 
 #define TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE 4000
@@ -162,22 +154,18 @@ typedef struct TkSelInProgress {
  * but shouldn't be used anywhere else in Tk (or by Tk clients):
  */
 
-extern TkSelInProgress * 
-                        TkSelGetInProgress _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
-extern void             TkSelSetInProgress _ANSI_ARGS_((
-                            TkSelInProgress *pendingPtr));
-
-extern void		TkSelClearSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-extern int		TkSelDefaultSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkSelectionInfo *infoPtr, Atom target,
-			    char *buffer, int maxBytes, Atom *typePtr));
-extern int		TkSelGetSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target,
-			    Tk_GetSelProc *proc, ClientData clientData));
+MODULE_SCOPE TkSelInProgress *TkSelGetInProgress(void);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkSelSetInProgress(TkSelInProgress *pendingPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkSelClearSelection(Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkSelDefaultSelection(TkSelectionInfo *infoPtr,
+			    Atom target, char *buffer, int maxBytes,
+			    Atom *typePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkSelGetSelection(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Atom selection, Atom target, Tk_GetSelProc *proc,
+			    ClientData clientData);
 #ifndef TkSelUpdateClipboard
-extern void		TkSelUpdateClipboard _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-			    TkClipboardTarget *targetPtr));
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkSelUpdateClipboard(TkWindow *winPtr,
+			    TkClipboardTarget *targetPtr);
 #endif
 
 #endif /* _TKSELECT */
diff --git a/generic/tkSquare.c b/generic/tkSquare.c
index 9f07b27..a35832a 100644
--- a/generic/tkSquare.c
+++ b/generic/tkSquare.c
@@ -1,32 +1,32 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkSquare.c --
  *
- *	This module implements "square" widgets that are object
- *	based.  A "square" is a widget that displays a single square that can 
- *	be moved around and resized.  This file is intended as an example
- *	of how to build a widget;  it isn't included in the
- *	normal wish, but it is included in "tktest".
+ *	This module implements "square" widgets that are object based. A
+ *	"square" is a widget that displays a single square that can be moved
+ *	around and resized. This file is intended as an example of how to
+ *	build a widget; it isn't included in the normal wish, but it is
+ *	included in "tktest".
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
+#if 0
 #define __NO_OLD_CONFIG
-#include "tk.h"
+#endif
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each square
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each square widget
+ * managed by this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the square.  NULL
-				 * means window has been deleted but
-				 * widget record hasn't been cleaned up yet. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the square. NULL means
+				 * window has been deleted but widget record
+				 * hasn't been cleaned up yet. */
     Display *display;		/* X's token for the window's display. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with widget. */
     Tcl_Command widgetCmd;	/* Token for square's widget command. */
@@ -47,31 +47,31 @@ typedef struct {
     Tcl_Obj *reliefPtr;
     GC gc;			/* Graphics context for copying from
 				 * off-screen pixmap onto screen. */
-    Tcl_Obj *doubleBufferPtr;	/* Non-zero means double-buffer redisplay
-				 * with pixmap;  zero means draw straight
-				 * onto the display. */
-    int updatePending;		/* Non-zero means a call to SquareDisplay
-				 * has already been scheduled. */
+    Tcl_Obj *doubleBufferPtr;	/* Non-zero means double-buffer redisplay with
+				 * pixmap; zero means draw straight onto the
+				 * display. */
+    int updatePending;		/* Non-zero means a call to SquareDisplay has
+				 * already been scheduled. */
 } Square;
 
 /*
  * Information used for argv parsing.
  */
 
-static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	    "#d9d9d9", Tk_Offset(Square, bgBorderPtr), -1, 0,
 	    (ClientData) "white"},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	    (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth"},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	    (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background"},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0,
+	    (ClientData) "-borderwidth"},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0,
+	    (ClientData) "-background"},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
 	    "2", Tk_Offset(Square, borderWidthPtr), -1},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-dbl", "doubleBuffer", "DoubleBuffer",
 	    "1", Tk_Offset(Square, doubleBufferPtr), -1},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	    (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground"},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0,
+	    (ClientData) "-foreground"},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
 	    "#b03060", Tk_Offset(Square, fgBorderPtr), -1, 0,
 	    (ClientData) "black"},
@@ -90,28 +90,26 @@ static CONST Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
  * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
  */
 
-int			SquareObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static void		SquareDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static int		SquareConfigure _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Square *squarePtr));
-static void		SquareDestroy _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static void		SquareDisplay _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		KeepInWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Square *squarePtr));
-static void		SquareObjEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int		SquareWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
+int			SquareObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]);
+static void		SquareDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static int		SquareConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, Square *squarePtr);
+static void		SquareDestroy(char *memPtr);
+static void		SquareDisplay(ClientData clientData);
+static void		KeepInWindow(Square *squarePtr);
+static void		SquareObjEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		SquareWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * SquareCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "square" Tcl
- *	command.  It creates a new "square" widget.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the "square" Tcl command. It
+ *	creates a new "square" widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -123,11 +121,11 @@ static int		SquareWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
  */
 
 int
-SquareObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+SquareObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Square *squarePtr;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
@@ -138,39 +136,38 @@ SquareObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), 
-	    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], NULL), (char *) NULL);
+    tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
+	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL);
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     Tk_SetClass(tkwin, "Square");
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has
-     * already been created, the refcount will get bumped and just
-     * the pointer will be returned.  The refcount getting bumped
-     * does not concern us, because Tk will ensure the table is
-     * deleted when the interpreter is destroyed.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, the refcount will get bumped and just the pointer will be
+     * returned. The refcount getting bumped does not concern us, because Tk
+     * will ensure the table is deleted when the interpreter is destroyed.
      */
 
     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
 
     /*
-     * Allocate and initialize the widget record.  The memset allows
-     * us to set just the non-NULL/0 items.
+     * Allocate and initialize the widget record. The memset allows us to set
+     * just the non-NULL/0 items.
      */
 
-    squarePtr			= (Square *) ckalloc(sizeof(Square));
+    squarePtr = (Square *) ckalloc(sizeof(Square));
     memset((void *) squarePtr, 0, (sizeof(Square)));
 
-    squarePtr->tkwin		= tkwin;
-    squarePtr->display		= Tk_Display(tkwin);
-    squarePtr->interp		= interp;
-    squarePtr->widgetCmd	= Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
+    squarePtr->tkwin = tkwin;
+    squarePtr->display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    squarePtr->interp = interp;
+    squarePtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
 	    Tk_PathName(squarePtr->tkwin), SquareWidgetObjCmd,
 	    (ClientData) squarePtr, SquareDeletedProc);
-    squarePtr->gc		= None;
-    squarePtr->optionTable	= optionTable;
+    squarePtr->gc = None;
+    squarePtr->optionTable = optionTable;
 
     if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) squarePtr, optionTable, tkwin)
 	    != TCL_OK) {
@@ -182,7 +179,7 @@ SquareObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     Tk_CreateEventHandler(squarePtr->tkwin, ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask,
 	    SquareObjEventProc, (ClientData) squarePtr);
     if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) squarePtr, optionTable, objc - 2,
-	    objv + 2, tkwin, NULL, (int *) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+	    objv + 2, tkwin, NULL, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 	goto error;
     }
     if (SquareConfigure(interp, squarePtr) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -193,7 +190,7 @@ SquareObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(squarePtr->tkwin), -1));
     return TCL_OK;
 
-error:
+  error:
     Tk_DestroyWindow(squarePtr->tkwin);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -203,9 +200,9 @@ error:
  *
  * SquareWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -217,15 +214,15 @@ error:
  */
 
 static int
-SquareWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about square widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[];		/* Argument objects. */
+SquareWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about square widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Square *squarePtr = (Square *) clientData;
     int result = TCL_OK;
-    static CONST char *squareOptions[] = {"cget", "configure", (char *) NULL};
+    static CONST char *squareOptions[] = {"cget", "configure", NULL};
     enum {
 	SQUARE_CGET, SQUARE_CONFIGURE
     };
@@ -243,58 +240,55 @@ SquareWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) squarePtr);
-    
+
     switch (index) {
-	case SQUARE_CGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
-		goto error;
+    case SQUARE_CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
+		squarePtr->optionTable, objv[2], squarePtr->tkwin);
+	if (resultObjPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case SQUARE_CONFIGURE:
+	resultObjPtr = NULL;
+	if (objc == 2) {
+	    resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
+		    squarePtr->optionTable, NULL, squarePtr->tkwin);
+	    if (resultObjPtr == NULL) {
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
+	} else if (objc == 3) {
+	    resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
 		    squarePtr->optionTable, objv[2], squarePtr->tkwin);
 	    if (resultObjPtr == NULL) {
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case SQUARE_CONFIGURE: {
-	    resultObjPtr = NULL;
-	    if (objc == 2) {
-		resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
-			squarePtr->optionTable, (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-			squarePtr->tkwin);
-		if (resultObjPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    } else if (objc == 3) {
-		resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
-			squarePtr->optionTable, objv[2], squarePtr->tkwin);
-		if (resultObjPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    } else {
-		result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
-			squarePtr->optionTable, objc - 2, objv + 2,
-			squarePtr->tkwin, NULL, (int *) NULL);
-		if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		    result = SquareConfigure(interp, squarePtr);
-		}
-		if (!squarePtr->updatePending) {
-		    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SquareDisplay, (ClientData) squarePtr);
-		    squarePtr->updatePending = 1;
-		}
+	} else {
+	    result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
+		    squarePtr->optionTable, objc - 2, objv + 2,
+		    squarePtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL);
+	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
+		result = SquareConfigure(interp, squarePtr);
 	    }
-	    if (resultObjPtr != NULL) {
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr);
+	    if (!squarePtr->updatePending) {
+		Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SquareDisplay, (ClientData) squarePtr);
+		squarePtr->updatePending = 1;
 	    }
 	}
+	if (resultObjPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr);
+	}
     }
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) squarePtr);
     return result;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) squarePtr);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -304,37 +298,36 @@ SquareWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * SquareConfigure --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list in
- *	conjunction with the Tk option database to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a square widget.
+ *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list in conjunction
+ *	with the Tk option database to configure (or reconfigure) a square
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width,
- *	etc. get set for squarePtr;  old resources get freed,
- *	if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width, etc. get set
+ *	for squarePtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-SquareConfigure(interp, squarePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Square *squarePtr;			/* Information about widget. */
+SquareConfigure(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Square *squarePtr)		/* Information about widget. */
 {
     int borderWidth;
     Tk_3DBorder bgBorder;
     int doubleBuffer;
 
     /*
-     * Set the background for the window and create a graphics context
-     * for use during redisplay.
+     * Set the background for the window and create a graphics context for use
+     * during redisplay.
      */
 
-    bgBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(squarePtr->tkwin, 
+    bgBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(squarePtr->tkwin,
 	    squarePtr->bgBorderPtr);
     Tk_SetWindowBackground(squarePtr->tkwin,
 	    Tk_3DBorderColor(bgBorder)->pixel);
@@ -348,8 +341,8 @@ SquareConfigure(interp, squarePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Register the desired geometry for the window.  Then arrange for
-     * the window to be redisplayed.
+     * Register the desired geometry for the window. Then arrange for the
+     * window to be redisplayed.
      */
 
     Tk_GeometryRequest(squarePtr->tkwin, 200, 150);
@@ -369,23 +362,23 @@ SquareConfigure(interp, squarePtr)
  *
  * SquareObjEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on squares.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	squares.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up. When
+ *	it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-SquareObjEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+SquareObjEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     Square *squarePtr = (Square *) clientData;
 
@@ -423,9 +416,9 @@ SquareObjEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * SquareDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -437,17 +430,17 @@ SquareObjEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-SquareDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+SquareDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     Square *squarePtr = (Square *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = squarePtr->tkwin;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this procedure destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (tkwin != NULL) {
@@ -460,9 +453,9 @@ SquareDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * SquareDisplay --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws the contents of a square window.
- *	It is invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs
- *	when there's nothing else for the application to do.
+ *	This procedure redraws the contents of a square window. It is invoked
+ *	as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs when there's nothing else
+ *	for the application to do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -474,8 +467,8 @@ SquareDeletedProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-SquareDisplay(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
+SquareDisplay(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about window. */
 {
     Square *squarePtr = (Square *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = squarePtr->tkwin;
@@ -510,7 +503,7 @@ SquareDisplay(clientData)
 
     Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->borderWidthPtr,
 	    &borderWidth);
-    bgBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(squarePtr->tkwin, 
+    bgBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(squarePtr->tkwin,
 	    squarePtr->bgBorderPtr);
     Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->reliefPtr, &relief);
     Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, bgBorder, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin),
@@ -521,9 +514,9 @@ SquareDisplay(clientData)
      */
 
     Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->sizeObjPtr, &size);
-    fgBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(squarePtr->tkwin, 
+    fgBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(squarePtr->tkwin,
 	    squarePtr->fgBorderPtr);
-    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, fgBorder, squarePtr->x, squarePtr->y, size, 
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, fgBorder, squarePtr->x, squarePtr->y, size,
 	    size, borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
 
     /*
@@ -543,9 +536,9 @@ SquareDisplay(clientData)
  *
  * SquareDestroy --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a square at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to
+ *	clean up the internal structure of a square at a safe time (when
+ *	no-one is using it anymore).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -557,11 +550,11 @@ SquareDisplay(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-SquareDestroy(memPtr)
-    char *memPtr;		/* Info about square widget. */
+SquareDestroy(
+    char *memPtr)		/* Info about square widget. */
 {
     Square *squarePtr = (Square *) memPtr;
-    
+
     ckfree((char *) squarePtr);
 }
 
@@ -570,31 +563,31 @@ SquareDestroy(memPtr)
  *
  * KeepInWindow --
  *
- *	Adjust the position of the square if necessary to keep it in
- *	the widget's window.
+ *	Adjust the position of the square if necessary to keep it in the
+ *	widget's window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The x and y position of the square are adjusted if necessary
- *	to keep the square in the window.
+ *	The x and y position of the square are adjusted if necessary to keep
+ *	the square in the window.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-KeepInWindow(squarePtr)
-    register Square *squarePtr;		/* Pointer to widget record. */
+KeepInWindow(
+    register Square *squarePtr)	/* Pointer to widget record. */
 {
     int i, bd, relief;
     int borderWidth, size;
 
     Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->borderWidthPtr,
 	    &borderWidth);
-    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->xPtr, 
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->xPtr,
 	    &squarePtr->x);
-    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->yPtr, 
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->yPtr,
 	    &squarePtr->y);
     Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->sizeObjPtr, &size);
     Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->reliefPtr, &relief);
@@ -617,3 +610,11 @@ KeepInWindow(squarePtr)
 	squarePtr->y = bd;
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkStubImg.c b/generic/tkStubImg.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 608d627..0000000
--- a/generic/tkStubImg.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
-/* 
- * tkStubImg.c --
- *
- *	Stub object that will be statically linked into extensions that wish
- *	to access Tk.
- *
- * Copyright (c) 1999 Jan Nijtmans.
- * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
- *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
- */
-
-#include "tcl.h"
-
-
-/*
- *----------------------------------------------------------------------
- *
- * Tk_InitImageArgs --
- *
- *	Performs the necessary conversion from Tcl_Obj's to strings
- *      in the createProc for Tcl_CreateImageType. If running under
- *      Tk 8.2 or earlier without the Img-patch, this function has
- *      no effect.
- *
- * Results:
- *	argvPtr will point to an argument list which is guaranteed to
- *	contain strings, no matter what Tk version is running.
- *
- * Side effects:
- *	None
- *
- *----------------------------------------------------------------------
- */
-
-#ifdef Tk_InitImageArgs
-#undef Tk_InitImageArgs
-#endif
-
-void
-Tk_InitImageArgs(interp, argc, argvPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    int argc;
-    char ***argvPtr;
-{
-    static int useNewImage = -1;
-    static char **argv = NULL;
-
-    if (argv) {
-	tclStubsPtr->tcl_Free((char *) argv);
-	argv = NULL;
-    }
-
-    if (useNewImage < 0) {
-	Tcl_CmdInfo cmdInfo;
-	if (!tclStubsPtr->tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp,"image", &cmdInfo)) {
-	    tclStubsPtr->tcl_Panic("cannot find the \"image\" command");
-	}
-	if (cmdInfo.isNativeObjectProc == 1) {
-	    useNewImage = 1; /* Tk uses the new image interface */
-	} else {
-	    useNewImage = 0; /* Tk uses old image interface */
-	}
-    }
-    if (useNewImage && (argc > 0)) {
-	int i;
-	argv = (char **) tclStubsPtr->tcl_Alloc(argc * sizeof(char *));
-	for (i = 0; i < argc; i++) {
-	    argv[i] = tclStubsPtr->tcl_GetString((Tcl_Obj *)(*argvPtr)[i]);
-	}
-	*argvPtr = (char **) argv;
-    }
-}
diff --git a/generic/tkStubInit.c b/generic/tkStubInit.c
index dc22008..c2ef290 100644
--- a/generic/tkStubInit.c
+++ b/generic/tkStubInit.c
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 
-#if !(defined(__WIN32__) && defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
+#if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
 /* UNIX */
 #define UNIX_TK
+#include "tkUnixInt.h"
 #endif
 
 #ifdef __WIN32__
@@ -22,14 +22,12 @@
 #endif
 
 #if defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
-/* set this locally .. we could have used _TKMACINT */
+/* we could have used _TKMACINT */
 #include "tkMacOSXInt.h"
 #endif
 
-#include "tkDecls.h"
+/* TODO: These ought to come in some other way */
 #include "tkPlatDecls.h"
-#include "tkIntDecls.h"
-#include "tkIntPlatDecls.h"
 #include "tkIntXlibDecls.h"
 
 #ifdef __WIN32__
@@ -86,6 +84,7 @@ XVisualIDFromVisual(Visual *visual)
 #   define TkUnixSetMenubar 0
 #   define TkWmCleanup (void (*) (TkDisplay *)) doNothing
 #   define TkSendCleanup (void (*) (TkDisplay *)) doNothing
+#   define TkpTestsendCmd 0
 #   define XFlush (int (*) (Display *)) doNothing
 #   define XGrabServer (int (*) (Display *)) doNothing
 #   define XUngrabServer (int (*) (Display *)) doNothing
@@ -247,14 +246,14 @@ void TkSubtractRegion (TkRegion a, TkRegion b, TkRegion c)
 #	undef TkUnionRectWithRegion
 #	undef TkSubtractRegion
 
-#	define TkClipBox (void (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion, XRectangle *))) XClipBox
+#	define TkClipBox (void (*) (TkRegion, XRectangle *)) XClipBox
 #	define TkCreateRegion (TkRegion (*) ()) XCreateRegion
-#	define TkDestroyRegion (void (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion))) XDestroyRegion
-#	define TkIntersectRegion (void (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion, TkRegion, TkRegion))) XIntersectRegion
-#	define TkRectInRegion (int (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion, int, int, unsigned int, unsigned int))) XRectInRegion
-#	define TkSetRegion (void (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *, GC, TkRegion))) XSetRegion
-#	define TkUnionRectWithRegion (void (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((XRectangle *, TkRegion, TkRegion))) XUnionRectWithRegion
-#	define TkSubtractRegion (void (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((TkRegion, TkRegion, TkRegion))) XSubtractRegion
+#	define TkDestroyRegion (void (*) (TkRegion)) XDestroyRegion
+#	define TkIntersectRegion (void (*) (TkRegion, TkRegion, TkRegion)) XIntersectRegion
+#	define TkRectInRegion (int (*) (TkRegion, int, int, unsigned int, unsigned int)) XRectInRegion
+#	define TkSetRegion (void (*) (Display *, GC, TkRegion)) XSetRegion
+#	define TkUnionRectWithRegion (void (*) (XRectangle *, TkRegion, TkRegion)) XUnionRectWithRegion
+#	define TkSubtractRegion (void (*) (TkRegion, TkRegion, TkRegion)) XSubtractRegion
 #   endif
 #endif /* !__WIN32__ */
 
@@ -446,9 +445,37 @@ TkIntStubs tkIntStubs = {
     TkStylePkgFree, /* 147 */
     TkToplevelWindowForCommand, /* 148 */
     TkGetOptionSpec, /* 149 */
-    NULL, /* 150 */
-    NULL, /* 151 */
+    TkMakeRawCurve, /* 150 */
+    TkMakeRawCurvePostscript, /* 151 */
     TkpDrawFrame, /* 152 */
+    TkCreateThreadExitHandler, /* 153 */
+    TkDeleteThreadExitHandler, /* 154 */
+    NULL, /* 155 */
+    TkpTestembedCmd, /* 156 */
+    TkpTesttextCmd, /* 157 */
+    NULL, /* 158 */
+    NULL, /* 159 */
+    NULL, /* 160 */
+    NULL, /* 161 */
+    NULL, /* 162 */
+    NULL, /* 163 */
+    NULL, /* 164 */
+    NULL, /* 165 */
+    NULL, /* 166 */
+    NULL, /* 167 */
+    NULL, /* 168 */
+    TkStateParseProc, /* 169 */
+    TkStatePrintProc, /* 170 */
+    TkCanvasDashParseProc, /* 171 */
+    TkCanvasDashPrintProc, /* 172 */
+    TkOffsetParseProc, /* 173 */
+    TkOffsetPrintProc, /* 174 */
+    TkPixelParseProc, /* 175 */
+    TkPixelPrintProc, /* 176 */
+    TkOrientParseProc, /* 177 */
+    TkOrientPrintProc, /* 178 */
+    TkSmoothParseProc, /* 179 */
+    TkSmoothPrintProc, /* 180 */
 };
 
 TkIntPlatStubs tkIntPlatStubs = {
@@ -500,6 +527,7 @@ TkIntPlatStubs tkIntPlatStubs = {
     TkUnixSetMenubar, /* 42 */
     TkWmCleanup, /* 43 */
     TkSendCleanup, /* 44 */
+    TkpTestsendCmd, /* 45 */
 #endif /* WIN */
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */
     TkGenerateActivateEvents, /* 0 */
@@ -556,6 +584,7 @@ TkIntPlatStubs tkIntPlatStubs = {
     TkGenWMDestroyEvent, /* 51 */
     NULL, /* 52 */
     TkpGetMS, /* 53 */
+    TkMacOSXDrawable, /* 54 */
 #endif /* AQUA */
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(__CYGWIN__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */
     TkCreateXEventSource, /* 0 */
@@ -571,6 +600,7 @@ TkIntPlatStubs tkIntPlatStubs = {
     TkSendCleanup, /* 10 */
     TkFreeXId, /* 11 */
     TkpWmSetState, /* 12 */
+    TkpTestsendCmd, /* 13 */
 #endif /* X11 */
 };
 
@@ -974,9 +1004,9 @@ TkStubs tkStubs = {
     Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite, /* 145 */
     Tk_PhotoGetImage, /* 146 */
     Tk_PhotoBlank, /* 147 */
-    Tk_PhotoExpand, /* 148 */
+    Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic, /* 148 */
     Tk_PhotoGetSize, /* 149 */
-    Tk_PhotoSetSize, /* 150 */
+    Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic, /* 150 */
     Tk_PointToChar, /* 151 */
     Tk_PostscriptFontName, /* 152 */
     Tk_PreserveColormap, /* 153 */
@@ -1072,8 +1102,8 @@ TkStubs tkStubs = {
     Tk_SetInternalBorderEx, /* 243 */
     Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize, /* 244 */
     Tk_SetCaretPos, /* 245 */
-    Tk_PhotoPutBlock, /* 246 */
-    Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock, /* 247 */
+    Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic, /* 246 */
+    Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic, /* 247 */
     Tk_CollapseMotionEvents, /* 248 */
     Tk_RegisterStyleEngine, /* 249 */
     Tk_GetStyleEngine, /* 250 */
@@ -1091,10 +1121,18 @@ TkStubs tkStubs = {
     Tk_GetElementBox, /* 262 */
     Tk_GetElementBorderWidth, /* 263 */
     Tk_DrawElement, /* 264 */
+    Tk_PhotoExpand, /* 265 */
+    Tk_PhotoPutBlock, /* 266 */
+    Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock, /* 267 */
+    Tk_PhotoSetSize, /* 268 */
+    Tk_GetUserInactiveTime, /* 269 */
+    Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime, /* 270 */
+    Tk_Interp, /* 271 */
+    Tk_CreateOldImageType, /* 272 */
+    Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat, /* 273 */
 };
 
 /* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */
 
 #undef UNIX_TK
-#undef MAC_TK
 #undef MAC_OSX_TK
diff --git a/generic/tkStubLib.c b/generic/tkStubLib.c
index f803e49..f605b5d 100644
--- a/generic/tkStubLib.c
+++ b/generic/tkStubLib.c
@@ -11,7 +11,6 @@
  * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 #ifdef __WIN32__
@@ -22,10 +21,12 @@
 #include "tkMacOSXInt.h"
 #endif
 
-#include "tkDecls.h"
-#include "tkIntDecls.h"
+#if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
+#include "tkUnixInt.h"
+#endif
+
+/* TODO: These ought to come in some other way */
 #include "tkPlatDecls.h"
-#include "tkIntPlatDecls.h"
 #include "tkIntXlibDecls.h"
 
 TkStubs *tkStubsPtr = NULL;
@@ -39,8 +40,7 @@ TkIntXlibStubs *tkIntXlibStubsPtr = NULL;
  */
 
 static int
-isDigit(c)
-    CONST int c;
+isDigit(const int c)
 {
     return (c >= '0' && c <= '9');
 }
@@ -64,13 +64,13 @@ isDigit(c)
  */
 #undef Tk_InitStubs
 CONST char *
-Tk_InitStubs(interp, version, exact)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    char *version;
-    int exact;
+Tk_InitStubs(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    CONST char *version,
+    int exact)
 {
-    CONST char *packageName = "Tk";
-    CONST char *errMsg = NULL;
+    const char *packageName = "Tk";
+    const char *errMsg = NULL;
     ClientData clientData = NULL;
     CONST char *actualVersion = tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgRequireEx(interp,
 	    packageName, version, 0, &clientData);
@@ -96,11 +96,11 @@ Tk_InitStubs(interp, version, exact)
 	    }
 	    if (*p || isDigit(*q)) {
 		/* Construct error message */
-		tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgRequireEx(interp, packageName, version, 1, NULL);
+		tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgRequireEx(interp, "Tk", version, 1, NULL);
 		return NULL;
 	    }
 	} else {
-	    actualVersion = tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgRequireEx(interp, packageName,
+	    actualVersion = tclStubsPtr->tcl_PkgRequireEx(interp, "Tk",
 		    version, 1, NULL);
 	    if (actualVersion == NULL) {
 		return NULL;
diff --git a/generic/tkStyle.c b/generic/tkStyle.c
index e802dde..dd3b2e8 100644
--- a/generic/tkStyle.c
+++ b/generic/tkStyle.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkStyle.c --
  *
  *	This file implements the widget styles and themes support.
@@ -6,96 +6,91 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used to cache widget option specs matching an 
+ * The following structure is used to cache widget option specs matching an
  * element's required options defined by Tk_ElementOptionSpecs. It also holds
  * information behind Tk_StyledElement opaque tokens.
  */
 
 typedef struct StyledWidgetSpec {
-    struct StyledElement *elementPtr;	/* Pointer to the element holding this
-					 * structure. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;		/* Option table for the widget class 
-					 * using the element. */
-    CONST Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr;	/* Table of option spec pointers, 
-					 * matching the option list provided 
-					 * during element registration. 
-					 * Malloc'd. */
+    struct StyledElement *elementPtr;
+				/* Pointer to the element holding this
+				 * structure. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Option table for the widget class using the
+				 * element. */
+    const Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr;
+				/* Table of option spec pointers, matching the
+				 * option list provided during element
+				 * registration. Malloc'd. */
 } StyledWidgetSpec;
 
 /*
- * Elements are declared using static templates. But static
- * information must be completed by dynamic information only
- * accessible at runtime. For each registered element, an instance of
- * the following structure is stored in each style engine and used to
- * cache information about the widget types (identified by their
- * optionTable) that use the given element.
+ * Elements are declared using static templates. But static information must
+ * be completed by dynamic information only accessible at runtime. For each
+ * registered element, an instance of the following structure is stored in
+ * each style engine and used to cache information about the widget types
+ * (identified by their optionTable) that use the given element.
  */
 
 typedef struct StyledElement {
-    struct Tk_ElementSpec *specPtr;	
-				/* Filled with template provided during 
-				 * registration. NULL means no implementation 
-				 * is available for the current engine. */ 
-    int nbWidgetSpecs;		/* Size of the array below. Number of distinct 
-				 * widget classes (actually, distinct option 
+    struct Tk_ElementSpec *specPtr;
+				/* Filled with template provided during
+				 * registration. NULL means no implementation
+				 * is available for the current engine. */
+    int nbWidgetSpecs;		/* Size of the array below. Number of distinct
+				 * widget classes (actually, distinct option
 				 * tables) that used the element so far. */
-    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecs;	
+    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecs;
 				/* See above for the structure definition.
-				 * Table grows dynamically as new widgets
-				 * use the element. Malloc'd. */
+				 * Table grows dynamically as new widgets use
+				 * the element. Malloc'd. */
 } StyledElement;
 
 /*
- * The following structure holds information behind Tk_StyleEngine opaque 
+ * The following structure holds information behind Tk_StyleEngine opaque
  * tokens.
  */
 
 typedef struct StyleEngine {
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of engine. Points to a hash key. */
-    StyledElement *elements;	/* Table of widget element descriptors. Each 
-				 * element is indexed by a unique system-wide 
-				 * ID. Table grows dynamically as new elements 
+    const char *name;		/* Name of engine. Points to a hash key. */
+    StyledElement *elements;	/* Table of widget element descriptors. Each
+				 * element is indexed by a unique system-wide
+				 * ID. Table grows dynamically as new elements
 				 * are registered. Malloc'd*/
-    struct StyleEngine *parentPtr;	
-				/* Parent engine. Engines may be layered to form
-				 * a fallback chain, terminated by the default 
-				 * system engine. */
+    struct StyleEngine *parentPtr;
+				/* Parent engine. Engines may be layered to
+				 * form a fallback chain, terminated by the
+				 * default system engine. */
 } StyleEngine;
 
 /*
- * Styles are instances of style engines. The following structure holds 
+ * Styles are instances of style engines. The following structure holds
  * information behind Tk_Style opaque tokens.
  */
 
 typedef struct Style {
-    int refCount;		/* Number of active uses of this style.
-				 * If this count is 0, then this Style
-				 * structure is no longer valid. */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;	/* Entry in style table for this structure,
-				 * used when deleting it. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of style. Points to a hash key. */
-    StyleEngine *enginePtr;	/* Style engine of which the style is an 
+    const char *name;		/* Name of style. Points to a hash key. */
+    StyleEngine *enginePtr;	/* Style engine of which the style is an
 				 * instance. */
     ClientData clientData;	/* Data provided during registration. */
 } Style;
 
 /*
- * Each registered element uses an instance of the following structure. 
+ * Each registered element uses an instance of the following structure.
  */
 
 typedef struct Element {
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of element. Points to a hash key. */
+    const char *name;		/* Name of element. Points to a hash key. */
     int id;			/* Id of element. */
     int genericId;		/* Id of generic element. */
-    int created;		/* Boolean, whether the element was created 
-				 * explicitly (was registered) or implicitly 
+    int created;		/* Boolean, whether the element was created
+				 * explicitly (was registered) or implicitly
 				 * (by a derived element). */
 } Element;
 
@@ -105,66 +100,54 @@ typedef struct Element {
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
     int nbInit;			/* Number of calls to the init proc. */
-    Tcl_HashTable engineTable;	/* Map a name to a style engine. Keys are 
-				 * strings, values are Tk_StyleEngine 
+    Tcl_HashTable engineTable;	/* Map a name to a style engine. Keys are
+				 * strings, values are Tk_StyleEngine
 				 * pointers. */
-    StyleEngine *defaultEnginePtr;	
-				/* Default, core-defined style engine. Global 
+    StyleEngine *defaultEnginePtr;
+				/* Default, core-defined style engine. Global
 				 * fallback for all engines. */
-    Tcl_HashTable styleTable;	/* Map a name to a style. Keys are strings, 
+    Tcl_HashTable styleTable;	/* Map a name to a style. Keys are strings,
 				 * values are Tk_Style pointers.*/
     int nbElements;		/* Size of the below tables. */
-    Tcl_HashTable elementTable;	/* Map a name to an element Id. Keys are 
+    Tcl_HashTable elementTable;	/* Map a name to an element Id. Keys are
 				 * strings, values are integer element IDs. */
-    Element *elements;		/* Array of Elements. */				
+    Element *elements;		/* Array of Elements. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-/* TODO: sort alpha. */
-static int		CreateElement _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *name,
-			    int create));
-static void		DupStyleObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr));
-static void		FreeElement _ANSI_ARGS_((Element *elementPtr));
-static void		FreeStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((Style *stylePtr));
-static void		FreeStyledElement _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    StyledElement *elementPtr));
-static void		FreeStyleEngine _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    StyleEngine *enginePtr));
-static void		FreeStyleObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		FreeWidgetSpec _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr));
-static StyledElement *	GetStyledElement _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    StyleEngine *enginePtr, int elementId));
-static StyledWidgetSpec * GetWidgetSpec _ANSI_ARGS_((StyledElement *elementPtr,
-			    Tk_OptionTable optionTable));
-static void		InitElement _ANSI_ARGS_((Element *elementPtr, 
-			    CONST char *name, int id, int genericId, 
-			    int created));
-static void		InitStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((Style *stylePtr, 
-			    Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr, CONST char *name, 
-			    StyleEngine *enginePtr, ClientData clientData));
-static void		InitStyledElement _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    StyledElement *elementPtr));
-static void		InitStyleEngine _ANSI_ARGS_((StyleEngine *enginePtr,
-			    CONST char *name, StyleEngine *parentPtr));
-static void		InitWidgetSpec _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr, 
-			    StyledElement *elementPtr, 
-			    Tk_OptionTable optionTable));
-static int		SetStyleFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+static int		CreateElement(const char *name, int create);
+static void		DupStyleObjProc(Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr);
+static void		FreeElement(Element *elementPtr);
+static void		FreeStyledElement(StyledElement *elementPtr);
+static void		FreeStyleEngine(StyleEngine *enginePtr);
+static void		FreeStyleObjProc(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		FreeWidgetSpec(StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr);
+static StyledElement *	GetStyledElement(StyleEngine *enginePtr,
+			    int elementId);
+static StyledWidgetSpec*GetWidgetSpec(StyledElement *elementPtr,
+			    Tk_OptionTable optionTable);
+static void		InitElement(Element *elementPtr, const char *name,
+			    int id, int genericId, int created);
+static void		InitStyle(Style *stylePtr, const char *name,
+			    StyleEngine *enginePtr, ClientData clientData);
+static void		InitStyledElement(StyledElement *elementPtr);
+static void		InitStyleEngine(StyleEngine *enginePtr,
+			    const char *name, StyleEngine *parentPtr);
+static void		InitWidgetSpec(StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr,
+			    StyledElement *elementPtr,
+			    Tk_OptionTable optionTable);
+static int		SetStyleFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
 
 /*
  * The following structure defines the implementation of the "style" Tcl
- * object, used for drawing. The internalRep.otherValuePtr field of
- * each style object points to the Style structure for the stylefont, or
- * NULL.
+ * object, used for drawing. The internalRep.otherValuePtr field of each style
+ * object points to the Style structure for the stylefont, or NULL.
  */
 
 static Tcl_ObjType styleObjType = {
@@ -180,9 +163,9 @@ static Tcl_ObjType styleObjType = {
  *
  * TkStylePkgInit --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is created.  It
- *	initializes all the structures that are used by the style
- *	package on a per application basis.
+ *	This function is called when an application is created. It initializes
+ *	all the structures that are used by the style package on a per
+ *	application basis.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Stores data in thread-local storage.
@@ -194,13 +177,15 @@ static Tcl_ObjType styleObjType = {
  */
 
 void
-TkStylePkgInit(mainPtr)
-    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* The application being created. */
+TkStylePkgInit(
+    TkMainInfo *mainPtr)	/* The application being created. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
-    if (tsdPtr->nbInit != 0) return;
+    if (tsdPtr->nbInit != 0) {
+	return;
+    }
 
     /*
      * Initialize tables.
@@ -215,15 +200,15 @@ TkStylePkgInit(mainPtr)
     /*
      * Create the default system engine.
      */
-    
-    tsdPtr->defaultEnginePtr = 
-	    (StyleEngine *) Tk_RegisterStyleEngine(NULL, NULL);
+
+    tsdPtr->defaultEnginePtr = (StyleEngine *)
+	    Tk_RegisterStyleEngine(NULL, NULL);
 
     /*
      * Create the default system style.
      */
 
-    Tk_CreateStyle(NULL, (Tk_StyleEngine) tsdPtr->defaultEnginePtr, 
+    Tk_CreateStyle(NULL, (Tk_StyleEngine) tsdPtr->defaultEnginePtr,
 	    (ClientData) 0);
 
     tsdPtr->nbInit++;
@@ -234,9 +219,9 @@ TkStylePkgInit(mainPtr)
  *
  * TkStylePkgFree --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is deleted.  It
- *	deletes all the structures that were used by the style package
- *	for this application.
+ *	This function is called when an application is deleted. It deletes all
+ *	the structures that were used by the style package for this
+ *	application.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -248,18 +233,20 @@ TkStylePkgInit(mainPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkStylePkgFree(mainPtr)
-    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* The application being deleted. */
+TkStylePkgFree(
+    TkMainInfo *mainPtr)	/* The application being deleted. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
     StyleEngine *enginePtr;
     int i;
 
     tsdPtr->nbInit--;
-    if (tsdPtr->nbInit != 0) return;
+    if (tsdPtr->nbInit != 0) {
+	return;
+    }
 
     /*
      * Free styles.
@@ -301,11 +288,12 @@ TkStylePkgFree(mainPtr)
  *
  * Tk_RegisterStyleEngine --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to register a new style engine. Style engines
+ *	This function is called to register a new style engine. Style engines
  *	are stored in thread-local space.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The newly allocated engine.
+ *	The newly allocated engine, or NULL if an engine with the same name
+ *	exists.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory allocated. Data added to thread-local table.
@@ -314,24 +302,24 @@ TkStylePkgFree(mainPtr)
  */
 
 Tk_StyleEngine
-Tk_RegisterStyleEngine(name, parent)
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the engine to create. NULL or empty
+Tk_RegisterStyleEngine(
+    const char *name,		/* Name of the engine to create. NULL or empty
 				 * means the default system engine. */
-    Tk_StyleEngine parent;	/* The engine's parent. NULL means the default 
+    Tk_StyleEngine parent)	/* The engine's parent. NULL means the default
 				 * system engine. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
     int newEntry;
     StyleEngine *enginePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Attempt to create a new entry in the engine table. 
+     * Attempt to create a new entry in the engine table.
      */
 
-    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->engineTable, (name?name:""), 
-	    &newEntry);
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->engineTable,
+	    (name != NULL ? name : ""), &newEntry);
     if (!newEntry) {
 	/*
 	 * An engine was already registered by that name.
@@ -369,16 +357,16 @@ Tk_RegisterStyleEngine(name, parent)
  */
 
 static void
-InitStyleEngine(enginePtr, name, parentPtr)
-    StyleEngine *enginePtr;	/* Points to an uninitialized engine. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the registered engine. NULL or empty
+InitStyleEngine(
+    StyleEngine *enginePtr,	/* Points to an uninitialized engine. */
+    const char *name,		/* Name of the registered engine. NULL or empty
 				 * means the default system engine. Usually
 				 * points to the hash key. */
-    StyleEngine *parentPtr;	/* The engine's parent. NULL means the default 
+    StyleEngine *parentPtr)	/* The engine's parent. NULL means the default
 				 * system engine. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     int elementId;
 
     if (name == NULL || *name == '\0') {
@@ -399,8 +387,8 @@ InitStyleEngine(enginePtr, name, parentPtr)
 	enginePtr->parentPtr = parentPtr;
     }
 
-    /* 
-     * Allocate and initialize elements array. 
+    /*
+     * Allocate and initialize elements array.
      */
 
     if (tsdPtr->nbElements > 0) {
@@ -431,11 +419,11 @@ InitStyleEngine(enginePtr, name, parentPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeStyleEngine(enginePtr)
-    StyleEngine *enginePtr;	/* The style engine to free. */
+FreeStyleEngine(
+    StyleEngine *enginePtr)	/* The style engine to free. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     int elementId;
 
     /*
@@ -465,19 +453,19 @@ FreeStyleEngine(enginePtr)
  */
 
 Tk_StyleEngine
-Tk_GetStyleEngine(name)
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the engine to retrieve. NULL or
+Tk_GetStyleEngine(
+    const char *name)		/* Name of the engine to retrieve. NULL or
 				 * empty means the default system engine. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
 
     if (name == NULL) {
 	return (Tk_StyleEngine) tsdPtr->defaultEnginePtr;
     }
 
-    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->engineTable, (name?name:""));
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->engineTable, (name!=NULL?name:""));
     if (!entryPtr) {
 	return NULL;
     }
@@ -502,14 +490,14 @@ Tk_GetStyleEngine(name)
  */
 
 static void
-InitElement(elementPtr, name, id, genericId, created)
-    Element *elementPtr;	/* Points to an uninitialized element.*/
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the registered element. Usually
+InitElement(
+    Element *elementPtr,	/* Points to an uninitialized element.*/
+    const char *name,		/* Name of the registered element. Usually
 				 * points to the hash key. */
-    int id;			/* Unique element ID. */
-    int genericId;		/* ID of generic element. -1 means none. */
-    int created;		/* Boolean, whether the element was created 
-				 * explicitly (was registered) or implicitly 
+    int id,			/* Unique element ID. */
+    int genericId,		/* ID of generic element. -1 means none. */
+    int created)		/* Boolean, whether the element was created
+				 * explicitly (was registered) or implicitly
 				 * (by a derived element). */
 {
     elementPtr->name = name;
@@ -535,8 +523,8 @@ InitElement(elementPtr, name, id, genericId, created)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeElement(elementPtr)
-    Element *elementPtr;	/* The element to free. */
+FreeElement(
+    Element *elementPtr)	/* The element to free. */
 {
     /* Nothing to do. */
 }
@@ -558,8 +546,8 @@ FreeElement(elementPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-InitStyledElement(elementPtr)
-    StyledElement *elementPtr;	/* Points to an uninitialized element.*/
+InitStyledElement(
+    StyledElement *elementPtr)	/* Points to an uninitialized element.*/
 {
     memset(elementPtr, 0, sizeof(StyledElement));
 }
@@ -581,8 +569,8 @@ InitStyledElement(elementPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeStyledElement(elementPtr)
-    StyledElement *elementPtr;	/* The styled element to free. */
+FreeStyledElement(
+    StyledElement *elementPtr)	/* The styled element to free. */
 {
     int i;
 
@@ -613,14 +601,14 @@ FreeStyledElement(elementPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-CreateElement(name, create)
-    CONST char *name;	/* Name of the element. */
-    int create;		/* Boolean, whether the element is being created 
-			 * explicitly (being registered) or implicitly (by a 
+CreateElement(
+    const char *name,	/* Name of the element. */
+    int create)		/* Boolean, whether the element is being created
+			 * explicitly (being registered) or implicitly (by a
 			 * derived element). */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr, *engineEntryPtr;
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
     int newEntry;
@@ -634,7 +622,7 @@ CreateElement(name, create)
 
     entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->elementTable, name, &newEntry);
     if (!newEntry) {
-	elementId = (int) Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	elementId = PTR2INT(Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
 	if (create) {
 	    tsdPtr->elements[elementId].created = 1;
 	}
@@ -642,8 +630,8 @@ CreateElement(name, create)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The element didn't exist. If it's a derived element, find or
-     * create its generic element ID.
+     * The element didn't exist. If it's a derived element, find or create its
+     * generic element ID.
      */
 
     dot = strchr(name, '.');
@@ -652,15 +640,15 @@ CreateElement(name, create)
     }
 
     elementId = tsdPtr->nbElements++;
-    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, (ClientData) elementId);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, (ClientData) INT2PTR(elementId));
 
     /*
      * Reallocate element table.
      */
 
-    tsdPtr->elements = (Element *) ckrealloc((char *) tsdPtr->elements, 
+    tsdPtr->elements = (Element *) ckrealloc((char *) tsdPtr->elements,
 	    sizeof(Element) * tsdPtr->nbElements);
-    InitElement(tsdPtr->elements+elementId, 
+    InitElement(tsdPtr->elements+elementId,
 	    Tcl_GetHashKey(&tsdPtr->elementTable, entryPtr), elementId,
 	    genericId, create);
 
@@ -673,7 +661,7 @@ CreateElement(name, create)
 	enginePtr = (StyleEngine *) Tcl_GetHashValue(engineEntryPtr);
 
 	enginePtr->elements = (StyledElement *) ckrealloc(
-		(char *) enginePtr->elements, 
+		(char *) enginePtr->elements,
 		sizeof(StyledElement) * tsdPtr->nbElements);
 	InitStyledElement(enginePtr->elements+elementId);
 
@@ -700,11 +688,11 @@ CreateElement(name, create)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetElementId(name)
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the element. */
+Tk_GetElementId(
+    const char *name)		/* Name of the element. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
     int genericId = -1;
     char *dot;
@@ -715,11 +703,11 @@ Tk_GetElementId(name)
 
     entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->elementTable, name);
     if (entryPtr) {
-	return (int) Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	return PTR2INT(Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
     }
 
     /*
-     * Element not found. If the given name was derived, then first search for 
+     * Element not found. If the given name was derived, then first search for
      * the generic element. If found, create the new derived element.
      */
 
@@ -732,7 +720,7 @@ Tk_GetElementId(name)
 	return -1;
     }
     if (!tsdPtr->elements[genericId].created) {
-	/* 
+	/*
 	 * The generic element was created implicitly and thus has no real
 	 * existence.
 	 */
@@ -753,8 +741,8 @@ Tk_GetElementId(name)
  *
  * Tk_RegisterStyledElement --
  *
- *	Register an implementation of a new or existing element for the
- *	given style engine.
+ *	Register an implementation of a new or existing element for the given
+ *	style engine.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The unique ID for the created or found element.
@@ -766,11 +754,11 @@ Tk_GetElementId(name)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_RegisterStyledElement(engine, templatePtr)
-    Tk_StyleEngine engine;		/* Style engine providing the
-					 * implementation. */
-    Tk_ElementSpec *templatePtr;	/* Static template information about
-					 * the element. */
+Tk_RegisterStyledElement(
+    Tk_StyleEngine engine,	/* Style engine providing the
+				 * implementation. */
+    Tk_ElementSpec *templatePtr)/* Static template information about the
+				 * element. */
 {
     int elementId;
     StyledElement *elementPtr;
@@ -791,7 +779,7 @@ Tk_RegisterStyledElement(engine, templatePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Register the element, allocating storage in the various engines if 
+     * Register the element, allocating storage in the various engines if
      * necessary.
      */
 
@@ -809,13 +797,13 @@ Tk_RegisterStyledElement(engine, templatePtr)
     strcpy(specPtr->name, templatePtr->name);
     nbOptions = 0;
     for (nbOptions = 0, srcOptions = templatePtr->options;
-	 srcOptions->name != NULL;
-	 nbOptions++, srcOptions++);
-    specPtr->options = (Tk_ElementOptionSpec *) ckalloc(
-	    sizeof(Tk_ElementOptionSpec) * (nbOptions+1));
+	    srcOptions->name != NULL; nbOptions++, srcOptions++) {
+	/* empty body */
+    }
+    specPtr->options = (Tk_ElementOptionSpec *)
+	    ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_ElementOptionSpec) * (nbOptions+1));
     for (srcOptions = templatePtr->options, dstOptions = specPtr->options;
-	 /* End condition within loop */;
-	 srcOptions++, dstOptions++) {
+	    /* End condition within loop */; srcOptions++, dstOptions++) {
 	if (srcOptions->name == NULL) {
 	    dstOptions->name = NULL;
 	    break;
@@ -842,8 +830,8 @@ Tk_RegisterStyledElement(engine, templatePtr)
  *
  * GetStyledElement --
  *
- *	Get a registered implementation of an existing element for the
- *	given style engine.
+ *	Get a registered implementation of an existing element for the given
+ *	style engine.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The styled element descriptor, or NULL if not found.
@@ -855,12 +843,13 @@ Tk_RegisterStyledElement(engine, templatePtr)
  */
 
 static StyledElement *
-GetStyledElement(enginePtr, elementId)
-    StyleEngine *enginePtr;	/* Style engine providing the implementation. 
+GetStyledElement(
+    StyleEngine *enginePtr,	/* Style engine providing the implementation.
 				 * NULL means the default system engine. */
-    int elementId;		/* Unique element ID */{
+    int elementId)		/* Unique element ID */
+{
     StyledElement *elementPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
 	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     StyleEngine *enginePtr2;
 
@@ -913,45 +902,44 @@ GetStyledElement(enginePtr, elementId)
  */
 
 static void
-InitWidgetSpec(widgetSpecPtr, elementPtr, optionTable)
-    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr;	/* Points to an uninitialized widget
-					 * spec. */
-    StyledElement *elementPtr;		/* Styled element descriptor. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;		/* The widget's option table. */
+InitWidgetSpec(
+    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr,
+				/* Points to an uninitialized widget spec. */
+    StyledElement *elementPtr,	/* Styled element descriptor. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable)	/* The widget's option table. */
 {
     int i, nbOptions;
     Tk_ElementOptionSpec *elementOptionPtr;
-    CONST Tk_OptionSpec *widgetOptionPtr;
+    const Tk_OptionSpec *widgetOptionPtr;
 
     widgetSpecPtr->elementPtr = elementPtr;
     widgetSpecPtr->optionTable = optionTable;
-    
+
     /*
      * Count the number of options.
      */
 
-    for (nbOptions = 0, elementOptionPtr = elementPtr->specPtr->options; 
-	    elementOptionPtr->name != NULL;
-	    nbOptions++, elementOptionPtr++) {
+    for (nbOptions = 0, elementOptionPtr = elementPtr->specPtr->options;
+	    elementOptionPtr->name != NULL; nbOptions++, elementOptionPtr++) {
+	/* empty body */
     }
 
     /*
      * Build the widget option list.
      */
 
-    widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr = (CONST Tk_OptionSpec **) ckalloc(
-	    sizeof(Tk_OptionSpec *) * nbOptions);
-    for (i = 0, elementOptionPtr = elementPtr->specPtr->options; 
-	    i < nbOptions;
-	    i++, elementOptionPtr++) {
+    widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr = (const Tk_OptionSpec **)
+	    ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_OptionSpec *) * nbOptions);
+    for (i = 0, elementOptionPtr = elementPtr->specPtr->options;
+	    i < nbOptions; i++, elementOptionPtr++) {
 	widgetOptionPtr = TkGetOptionSpec(elementOptionPtr->name, optionTable);
 
 	/*
-	 * Check that the widget option type is compatible with one of the 
+	 * Check that the widget option type is compatible with one of the
 	 * element's required types.
 	 */
 
-	if (   elementOptionPtr->type == TK_OPTION_END
+	if (elementOptionPtr->type == TK_OPTION_END
 	    || elementOptionPtr->type == widgetOptionPtr->type) {
 	    widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr[i] = widgetOptionPtr;
 	} else {
@@ -977,8 +965,9 @@ InitWidgetSpec(widgetSpecPtr, elementPtr, optionTable)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeWidgetSpec(widgetSpecPtr)
-    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr;	/* The widget spec to free. */
+FreeWidgetSpec(
+    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr)
+				/* The widget spec to free. */
 {
     ckfree((char *) widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr);
 }
@@ -988,8 +977,8 @@ FreeWidgetSpec(widgetSpecPtr)
  *
  * GetWidgetSpec --
  *
- *	Return a new or existing widget spec for the given element and
- *	widget type (identified by its option table).
+ *	Return a new or existing widget spec for the given element and widget
+ *	type (identified by its option table).
  *
  * Results:
  *	A pointer to the matching widget spec.
@@ -1001,9 +990,9 @@ FreeWidgetSpec(widgetSpecPtr)
  */
 
 static StyledWidgetSpec *
-GetWidgetSpec(elementPtr, optionTable)
-    StyledElement *elementPtr;		/* Styled element descriptor. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;		/* The widget's option table. */
+GetWidgetSpec(
+    StyledElement *elementPtr,	/* Styled element descriptor. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable)	/* The widget's option table. */
 {
     StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr;
     int i;
@@ -1025,7 +1014,7 @@ GetWidgetSpec(elementPtr, optionTable)
 
     i = elementPtr->nbWidgetSpecs++;
     elementPtr->widgetSpecs = (StyledWidgetSpec *) ckrealloc(
-	    (char *) elementPtr->widgetSpecs, 
+	    (char *) elementPtr->widgetSpecs,
 	    sizeof(StyledWidgetSpec) * elementPtr->nbWidgetSpecs);
     widgetSpecPtr = elementPtr->widgetSpecs+i;
     InitWidgetSpec(widgetSpecPtr, elementPtr, optionTable);
@@ -1038,7 +1027,7 @@ GetWidgetSpec(elementPtr, optionTable)
  *
  * Tk_GetStyledElement --
  *
- *	This procedure returns a styled instance of the given element.
+ *	This function returns a styled instance of the given element.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1050,10 +1039,10 @@ GetWidgetSpec(elementPtr, optionTable)
  */
 
 Tk_StyledElement
-Tk_GetStyledElement(style, elementId, optionTable)
-    Tk_Style style;		/* The widget style. */
-    int elementId;		/* Unique element ID. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Option table for the widget. */
+Tk_GetStyledElement(
+    Tk_Style style,		/* The widget style. */
+    int elementId,		/* Unique element ID. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable)	/* Option table for the widget. */
 {
     Style *stylePtr = (Style *) style;
     StyledElement *elementPtr;
@@ -1062,7 +1051,7 @@ Tk_GetStyledElement(style, elementId, optionTable)
      * Get an element implementation and call corresponding hook.
      */
 
-    elementPtr = GetStyledElement((stylePtr?stylePtr->enginePtr:NULL), 
+    elementPtr = GetStyledElement((stylePtr?stylePtr->enginePtr:NULL),
 	    elementId);
     if (!elementPtr) {
 	return NULL;
@@ -1076,7 +1065,7 @@ Tk_GetStyledElement(style, elementId, optionTable)
  *
  * Tk_GetElementSize --
  *
- *	This procedure computes the size of the given widget element according
+ *	This function computes the size of the given widget element according
  *	to its style.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -1089,26 +1078,25 @@ Tk_GetStyledElement(style, elementId, optionTable)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_GetElementSize(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, width, height, inner, widthPtr, 
-	heightPtr)
-    Tk_Style style;			/* The widget style. */
-    Tk_StyledElement element;		/* The styled element, previously
-					 * returned by Tk_GetStyledElement. */
-    char *recordPtr;			/* The widget record. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* The widget window. */
-    int width, height;			/* Requested size. */
-    int inner;				/* Boolean. If TRUE, compute the outer
-					 * size according to the requested
-					 * minimum inner size. If FALSE, compute
-					 * the inner size according to the 
-					 * requested maximum outer size. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;		/* Returned size. */
+Tk_GetElementSize(
+    Tk_Style style,		/* The widget style. */
+    Tk_StyledElement element,	/* The styled element, previously returned by
+				 * Tk_GetStyledElement. */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* The widget record. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The widget window. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Requested size. */
+    int inner,			/* If TRUE, compute the outer size according
+				 * to the requested minimum inner size. If
+				 * FALSE, compute the inner size according to
+				 * the requested maximum outer size. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+				/* Returned size. */
 {
     Style *stylePtr = (Style *) style;
     StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr = (StyledWidgetSpec *) element;
 
-    widgetSpecPtr->elementPtr->specPtr->getSize(stylePtr->clientData, 
-	    recordPtr, widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr, tkwin, width, height, inner, 
+    widgetSpecPtr->elementPtr->specPtr->getSize(stylePtr->clientData,
+	    recordPtr, widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr, tkwin, width, height, inner,
 	    widthPtr, heightPtr);
 }
 
@@ -1117,9 +1105,9 @@ Tk_GetElementSize(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, width, height, inner, widthP
  *
  * Tk_GetElementBox --
  *
- *	This procedure computes the bounding or inscribed box coordinates
- *	of the given widget element according to its style and within the
- *	given limits.
+ *	This function computes the bounding or inscribed box coordinates of
+ *	the given widget element according to its style and within the given
+ *	limits.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1131,29 +1119,27 @@ Tk_GetElementSize(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, width, height, inner, widthP
  */
 
 void
-Tk_GetElementBox(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, x, y, width, height, inner, 
-	xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    Tk_Style style;			/* The widget style. */
-    Tk_StyledElement element;		/* The styled element, previously
-					 * returned by Tk_GetStyledElement. */
-    char *recordPtr;			/* The widget record. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* The widget window. */
-    int x, y;				/* Top left corner of available area. */
-    int width, height;			/* Size of available area. */
-    int inner;				/* Boolean. If TRUE, compute the 
-					 * bounding box according to the 
-					 * requested inscribed box size. If 
-					 * FALSE, compute the inscribed box 
-					 * according to the requested bounding
-					 * box. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;			/* Returned top left corner. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;		/* Returned size. */
+Tk_GetElementBox(
+    Tk_Style style,		/* The widget style. */
+    Tk_StyledElement element,	/* The styled element, previously returned by
+				 * Tk_GetStyledElement. */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* The widget record. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The widget window. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Top left corner of available area. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Size of available area. */
+    int inner,			/* Boolean. If TRUE, compute the bounding box
+				 * according to the requested inscribed box
+				 * size. If FALSE, compute the inscribed box
+				 * according to the requested bounding box. */
+    int *xPtr, int *yPtr,	/* Returned top left corner. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+				/* Returned size. */
 {
     Style *stylePtr = (Style *) style;
     StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr = (StyledWidgetSpec *) element;
 
-    widgetSpecPtr->elementPtr->specPtr->getBox(stylePtr->clientData, 
-	    recordPtr, widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr, tkwin, x, y, width, height, 
+    widgetSpecPtr->elementPtr->specPtr->getBox(stylePtr->clientData,
+	    recordPtr, widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr, tkwin, x, y, width, height,
 	    inner, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr);
 }
 
@@ -1162,7 +1148,7 @@ Tk_GetElementBox(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, x, y, width, height, inner,
  *
  * Tk_GetElementBorderWidth --
  *
- *	This procedure computes the border widthof the given widget element 
+ *	This function computes the border widthof the given widget element
  *	according to its style and within the given limits.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -1175,12 +1161,12 @@ Tk_GetElementBox(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, x, y, width, height, inner,
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetElementBorderWidth(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin)
-    Tk_Style style;			/* The widget style. */
-    Tk_StyledElement element;		/* The styled element, previously
-					 * returned by Tk_GetStyledElement. */
-    char *recordPtr;			/* The widget record. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* The widget window. */
+Tk_GetElementBorderWidth(
+    Tk_Style style,		/* The widget style. */
+    Tk_StyledElement element,	/* The styled element, previously returned by
+				 * Tk_GetStyledElement. */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* The widget record. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* The widget window. */
 {
     Style *stylePtr = (Style *) style;
     StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr = (StyledWidgetSpec *) element;
@@ -1194,7 +1180,7 @@ Tk_GetElementBorderWidth(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin)
  *
  * Tk_DrawElement --
  *
- *	This procedure draw the given widget element in a given drawable area.
+ *	This function draw the given widget element in a given drawable area.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None
@@ -1206,22 +1192,22 @@ Tk_GetElementBorderWidth(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DrawElement(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, d, x, y, width, height, state)
-    Tk_Style style;			/* The widget style. */
-    Tk_StyledElement element;		/* The styled element, previously
-					 * returned by Tk_GetStyledElement. */
-    char *recordPtr;			/* The widget record. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* The widget window. */
-    Drawable d;				/* Where to draw element. */
-    int x, y;				/* Top left corner of element. */
-    int width, height;			/* Size of element. */
-    int state;				/* Drawing state flags. */
+Tk_DrawElement(
+    Tk_Style style,		/* The widget style. */
+    Tk_StyledElement element,	/* The styled element, previously returned by
+				 * Tk_GetStyledElement. */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* The widget record. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The widget window. */
+    Drawable d,			/* Where to draw element. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Top left corner of element. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Size of element. */
+    int state)			/* Drawing state flags. */
 {
     Style *stylePtr = (Style *) style;
     StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr = (StyledWidgetSpec *) element;
 
-    widgetSpecPtr->elementPtr->specPtr->draw(stylePtr->clientData, 
-	    recordPtr, widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr, tkwin, d, x, y, width, 
+    widgetSpecPtr->elementPtr->specPtr->draw(stylePtr->clientData,
+	    recordPtr, widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr, tkwin, d, x, y, width,
 	    height, state);
 }
 
@@ -1230,37 +1216,36 @@ Tk_DrawElement(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, d, x, y, width, height, state)
  *
  * Tk_CreateStyle --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to create a new style as an instance of the
+ *	This function is called to create a new style as an instance of the
  *	given engine. Styles are stored in thread-local space.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The newly allocated style.
+ *	The newly allocated style, or NULL if the style already exists.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Memory allocated. Data added to thread-local table. The style's
- *	refCount is incremented.
+ *	Memory allocated. Data added to thread-local table.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Style
-Tk_CreateStyle(name, engine, clientData)
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the style to create. NULL or empty
+Tk_CreateStyle(
+    const char *name,		/* Name of the style to create. NULL or empty
 				 * means the default system style. */
-    Tk_StyleEngine engine;	/* The style engine. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Private data passed as is to engine code. */
+    Tk_StyleEngine engine,	/* The style engine. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Private data passed as is to engine code. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
     int newEntry;
     Style *stylePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Attempt to create a new entry in the style table. 
+     * Attempt to create a new entry in the style table.
      */
 
-    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->styleTable, (name?name:""), 
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->styleTable, (name?name:""),
 	    &newEntry);
     if (!newEntry) {
 	/*
@@ -1275,10 +1260,11 @@ Tk_CreateStyle(name, engine, clientData)
      */
 
     stylePtr = (Style *) ckalloc(sizeof(Style));
-    InitStyle(stylePtr, entryPtr, Tcl_GetHashKey(&tsdPtr->styleTable, entryPtr),
-	    (engine?(StyleEngine *) engine:tsdPtr->defaultEnginePtr), clientData);
+    InitStyle(stylePtr, Tcl_GetHashKey(&tsdPtr->styleTable, entryPtr),
+	    (engine != NULL ? (StyleEngine *) engine :
+		    tsdPtr->defaultEnginePtr),
+	    clientData);
     Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, (ClientData) stylePtr);
-    stylePtr->refCount++;
 
     return (Tk_Style) stylePtr;
 }
@@ -1291,9 +1277,9 @@ Tk_CreateStyle(name, engine, clientData)
  *	Given a style, return its registered name.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the name that was passed to Tk_CreateStyle() to 
- *	create the style.  The storage for the returned string is private
- *	(it points to the corresponding hash key) The caller should not modify 
+ *	The return value is the name that was passed to Tk_CreateStyle() to
+ *	create the style. The storage for the returned string is private (it
+ *	points to the corresponding hash key) The caller should not modify
  *	this string.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -1302,9 +1288,9 @@ Tk_CreateStyle(name, engine, clientData)
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-CONST char *
-Tk_NameOfStyle(style)
-    Tk_Style style;		/* Style whose name is desired. */
+const char *
+Tk_NameOfStyle(
+    Tk_Style style)		/* Style whose name is desired. */
 {
     Style *stylePtr = (Style *) style;
 
@@ -1328,17 +1314,14 @@ Tk_NameOfStyle(style)
  */
 
 static void
-InitStyle(stylePtr, hashPtr, name, enginePtr, clientData)
-    Style *stylePtr;		/* Points to an uninitialized style. */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;	/* Hash entry for the registered style. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the registered style. NULL or empty
+InitStyle(
+    Style *stylePtr,		/* Points to an uninitialized style. */
+    const char *name,		/* Name of the registered style. NULL or empty
 				 * means the default system style. Usually
 				 * points to the hash key. */
-    StyleEngine *enginePtr;	/* The style engine. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Private data passed as is to engine code. */
+    StyleEngine *enginePtr,	/* The style engine. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Private data passed as is to engine code. */
 {
-    stylePtr->refCount = 0;
-    stylePtr->hashPtr = hashPtr;
     stylePtr->name = name;
     stylePtr->enginePtr = enginePtr;
     stylePtr->clientData = clientData;
@@ -1347,36 +1330,13 @@ InitStyle(stylePtr, hashPtr, name, enginePtr, clientData)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * FreeStyle --
- *
- *	Free a style and its associated data.
- *
- * Results:
- *	None
- *
- * Side effects:
- *	None.
- *
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
- */
-
-static void
-FreeStyle(stylePtr)
-    Style *stylePtr;		/* The style to free. */
-{
-    /* Nothing to do. */
-}
-
-/*
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
- *
  * Tk_GetStyle --
  *
  *	Retrieve a registered style by its name.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A pointer to the style engine, or NULL if none found.  In the latter
- *	case and if the interp is not NULL, an error message is left in the 
+ *	A pointer to the style engine, or NULL if none found. In the latter
+ *	case and if the interp is not NULL, an error message is left in the
  *	interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -1386,29 +1346,29 @@ FreeStyle(stylePtr)
  */
 
 Tk_Style
-Tk_GetStyle(interp, name)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error return. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the style to retrieve. NULL or empty
+Tk_GetStyle(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error return. */
+    const char *name)		/* Name of the style to retrieve. NULL or empty
 				 * means the default system style. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
     Style *stylePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Search for a corresponding entry in the style table. 
+     * Search for a corresponding entry in the style table.
      */
 
-    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->styleTable, (name?name:""));
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->styleTable, (name!=NULL?name:""));
     if (entryPtr == NULL) {
 	if (interp != NULL) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "style \"", name, "\" doesn't exist", NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "style \"", name, "\" doesn't exist",
+		    NULL);
 	}
 	return (Tk_Style) NULL;
     }
     stylePtr = (Style *) Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
-    stylePtr->refCount++;
 
     return (Tk_Style) stylePtr;
 }
@@ -1418,72 +1378,37 @@ Tk_GetStyle(interp, name)
  *
  * Tk_FreeStyle --
  *
- *	Free a style previously created by Tk_CreateStyle.
- *
- * Results:
- *	None
- *
- * Side effects:
- *	The style's refCount is decremented. If it reaches zero, the style
- *	is freed.
+ *	No-op. Present only for stubs compatibility.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void 
-Tk_FreeStyle(style)
-    Tk_Style style;		/* The style to free. */
+void
+Tk_FreeStyle(
+    Tk_Style style)
 {
-    Style *stylePtr = (Style *) style;
-
-    if (stylePtr == NULL) {
-	return;
-    }
-    stylePtr->refCount--;
-    if (stylePtr->refCount > 0) {
-	return;
-    }
-    
-    /*
-     * Keep the default style alive.
-     */
-
-    if (*stylePtr->name == '\0') {
-	stylePtr->refCount = 1;
-	return;
-    }
-
-    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(stylePtr->hashPtr);
-    FreeStyle(stylePtr);
-    ckfree((char *) stylePtr);
 }
 
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_AllocStyleFromObj -- 
+ * Tk_AllocStyleFromObj --
  *
- *	Map the string name of a style to a corresponding Tk_Style. The style 
+ *	Map the string name of a style to a corresponding Tk_Style. The style
  *	must have already been created by Tk_CreateStyle.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the style that matches objPtr, or 
- *	NULL if none found.  If NULL is returned, an error message will be 
- *	left in interp's result object.
- *
- * Side effects:
- * 	The style's reference count is incremented. For each call to this 
- *	procedure, there should eventually be a call to Tk_FreeStyle() or 
- *	Tk_FreeStyleFromObj() so that the database is cleaned up when styles
- *	aren't in use anymore.
+ *	The return value is a token for the style that matches objPtr, or NULL
+ *	if none found. If NULL is returned, an error message will be left in
+ *	interp's result object.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Style
-Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(interp, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error return. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object containing name of the style to
+Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error return. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Object containing name of the style to
 				 * retrieve. */
 {
     Style *stylePtr;
@@ -1493,7 +1418,6 @@ Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(interp, objPtr)
 	stylePtr = (Style *) objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr;
     } else {
 	stylePtr = (Style *) objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr;
-	stylePtr->refCount++;
     }
 
     return (Tk_Style) stylePtr;
@@ -1504,26 +1428,26 @@ Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(interp, objPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetStyleFromObj --
  *
- *	Find the style that corresponds to a given object.  The style must
- *	have already been created by Tk_CreateStyle.
+ *	Find the style that corresponds to a given object. The style must have
+ *	already been created by Tk_CreateStyle.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the style that matches objPtr, or 
- *	NULL if none found.
+ *	The return value is a token for the style that matches objPtr, or NULL
+ *	if none found.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a style ref, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a style ref, the conversion will free any
+ *	old internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Style
-Tk_GetStyleFromObj(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object from which to get the style. */
+Tk_GetStyleFromObj(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object from which to get the style. */
 {
     if (objPtr->typePtr != &styleObjType) {
-	SetStyleFromAny((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, objPtr);
+	SetStyleFromAny(NULL, objPtr);
     }
 
     return (Tk_Style) objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr;
@@ -1532,27 +1456,16 @@ Tk_GetStyleFromObj(objPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_FreeStyleFromObj -- 
+ * Tk_FreeStyleFromObj --
  *
- *	Called to release a style inside a Tcl_Obj *.
- *
- * Results:
- *	None.
- *
- * Side effects:
- *	If the object is a style ref, the conversion will free its 
- *	internal representation. 
+ *	No-op. Present only for stubs compatibility.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-
 void
-Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The Tcl_Obj * to be freed. */
+Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
 {
-    if (objPtr->typePtr == &styleObjType) {
-	FreeStyleObjProc(objPtr);
-    }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1560,31 +1473,29 @@ Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(objPtr)
  *
  * SetStyleFromAny --
  *
- *	Convert the internal representation of a Tcl object to the
- *	style internal form.
+ *	Convert the internal representation of a Tcl object to the style
+ *	internal form.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Always returns TCL_OK.  If an error occurs is returned (e.g. the
- *	style doesn't exist), an error message will be left in interp's 
- *	result.
+ *	Always returns TCL_OK. If an error occurs is returned (e.g. the style
+ *	doesn't exist), an error message will be left in interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The object is left with its typePtr pointing to styleObjType.
- *	The reference count is incremented (in Tk_GetStyle()).
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-SetStyleFromAny(interp, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object to convert. */
+SetStyleFromAny(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object to convert. */
 {
-    Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
-    char *name;
+    const Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
+    const char *name;
 
     /*
-     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. 
+     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
      */
 
     name = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
@@ -1602,61 +1513,49 @@ SetStyleFromAny(interp, objPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * FreeStyleObjProc -- 
+ * FreeStyleObjProc --
  *
- *	This proc is called to release an object reference to a style.
- *	Called when the object's internal rep is released.
+ *	This proc is called to release an object reference to a style. Called
+ *	when the object's internal rep is released.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
- * Side effects:
- *	The reference count is decremented (in Tk_FreeStyle()).
- *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeStyleObjProc(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object we are releasing. */
+FreeStyleObjProc(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object we are releasing. */
 {
-    Style *stylePtr = (Style *) objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr;
-
-    if (stylePtr != NULL) {
-	Tk_FreeStyle((Tk_Style) stylePtr);
-	objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr = NULL;
-    }
+    objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr = NULL;
+    objPtr->typePtr = NULL;
 }
 
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * DupStyleObjProc -- 
+ * DupStyleObjProc --
  *
- *	When a cached style object is duplicated, this is called to
- *	update the internal reps.
- *
- * Results:
- *	None.
- *
- * Side effects:
- *	The style's refCount is incremented and the internal rep of the copy 
- *	is set to point to it.
+ *	When a cached style object is duplicated, this is called to update the
+ *	internal reps.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DupStyleObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying from. */
-    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying to. */
+DupStyleObjProc(
+    Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,		/* The object we are copying from. */
+    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr)		/* The object we are copying to. */
 {
-    Style *stylePtr = (Style *) srcObjPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr;
-    
     dupObjPtr->typePtr = srcObjPtr->typePtr;
-    dupObjPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr = (VOID *) stylePtr;
-
-    if (stylePtr != NULL) {
-	stylePtr->refCount++;
-    }
+    dupObjPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr=srcObjPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkTest.c b/generic/tkTest.c
index e8d8d88..9fe2222 100644
--- a/generic/tkTest.c
+++ b/generic/tkTest.c
@@ -1,21 +1,20 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkTest.c --
  *
- *	This file contains C command procedures for a bunch of additional
- *	Tcl commands that are used for testing out Tcl's C interfaces.
- *	These commands are not normally included in Tcl applications;
- *	they're only used for testing.
+ *	This file contains C command functions for a bunch of additional Tcl
+ *	commands that are used for testing out Tcl's C interfaces. These
+ *	commands are not normally included in Tcl applications; they're only
+ *	used for testing.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1993-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkText.h"
 
 #ifdef __WIN32__
@@ -23,6 +22,7 @@
 #endif
 
 #if defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
+#include "tkMacOSXInt.h"
 #include "tkScrollbar.h"
 #endif
 
@@ -31,8 +31,7 @@
 #endif
 
 /*
- * The following data structure represents the master for a test
- * image:
+ * The following data structure represents the master for a test image:
  */
 
 typedef struct TImageMaster {
@@ -40,13 +39,13 @@ typedef struct TImageMaster {
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for application. */
     int width, height;		/* Dimensions of image. */
     char *imageName;		/* Name of image (malloc-ed). */
-    char *varName;		/* Name of variable in which to log
-				 * events for image (malloc-ed). */
+    char *varName;		/* Name of variable in which to log events for
+				 * image (malloc-ed). */
 } TImageMaster;
 
 /*
- * The following data structure represents a particular use of a
- * particular test image.
+ * The following data structure represents a particular use of a particular
+ * test image.
  */
 
 typedef struct TImageInstance {
@@ -59,43 +58,34 @@ typedef struct TImageInstance {
  * The type record for test images:
  */
 
-#ifdef USE_OLD_IMAGE
-static int		ImageCreate _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *name, int argc, char **argv,
-			    Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageMaster master,
-			    ClientData *clientDataPtr));
-#else
-static int		ImageCreate _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *name, int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
+static int		ImageCreate(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    char *name, int argc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[],
 			    Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageMaster master,
-			    ClientData *clientDataPtr));
-#endif
-static ClientData	ImageGet _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		ImageDisplay _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Display *display, Drawable drawable, 
+			    ClientData *clientDataPtr);
+static ClientData	ImageGet(Tk_Window tkwin, ClientData clientData);
+static void		ImageDisplay(ClientData clientData,
+			    Display *display, Drawable drawable,
 			    int imageX, int imageY, int width,
 			    int height, int drawableX,
-			    int drawableY));
-static void		ImageFree _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Display *display));
-static void		ImageDelete _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+			    int drawableY);
+static void		ImageFree(ClientData clientData, Display *display);
+static void		ImageDelete(ClientData clientData);
 
 static Tk_ImageType imageType = {
     "test",			/* name */
-    (Tk_ImageCreateProc *) ImageCreate, /* createProc */
+    ImageCreate,		/* createProc */
     ImageGet,			/* getProc */
     ImageDisplay,		/* displayProc */
     ImageFree,			/* freeProc */
     ImageDelete,		/* deleteProc */
-    (Tk_ImagePostscriptProc *) NULL,/* postscriptPtr */
-    (Tk_ImageType *) NULL	/* nextPtr */
+    NULL,			/* postscriptPtr */
+    NULL			/* nextPtr */
 };
 
 /*
- * One of the following structures describes each of the interpreters
- * created by the "testnewapp" command.  This information is used by
- * the "testdeleteinterps" command to destroy all of those interpreters.
+ * One of the following structures describes each of the interpreters created
+ * by the "testnewapp" command. This information is used by the
+ * "testdeleteinterps" command to destroy all of those interpreters.
  */
 
 typedef struct NewApp {
@@ -103,15 +93,15 @@ typedef struct NewApp {
     struct NewApp *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of new interpreters. */
 } NewApp;
 
-static NewApp *newAppPtr = NULL;
-				/* First in list of all new interpreters. */
+static NewApp *newAppPtr = NULL;/* First in list of all new interpreters. */
 
 /*
- * Declaration for the square widget's class command procedure:
+ * Declaration for the square widget's class command function:
  */
 
-extern int SquareObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-	Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
+extern int		SquareObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj * const objv[]);
 
 typedef struct CBinding {
     Tcl_Interp *interp;
@@ -128,118 +118,114 @@ typedef struct CBinding {
 
 enum {
     NONE,
-    ODD_TYPE, 
+    ODD_TYPE,
     EVEN_TYPE
 };
 
 typedef struct TrivialCommandHeader {
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* The interp that this command 
-					 * lives in. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;		/* The option table that go with
-					 * this command. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* For widgets, the window associated
-					 * with this widget. */
-    Tcl_Command widgetCmd;		/* For widgets, the command associated
-					 * with this widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interp that this command lives in. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* The option table that go with this
+				 * command. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For widgets, the window associated with
+				 * this widget. */
+    Tcl_Command widgetCmd;	/* For widgets, the command associated with
+				 * this widget. */
 } TrivialCommandHeader;
 
-
-
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static int		CBindingEvalProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, 
+static int		CBindingEvalProc(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, XEvent *eventPtr,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym));
-static void		CBindingFreeProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-int			Tktest_Init _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static int		ImageCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-static int		TestcbindCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-static int		TestbitmapObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym);
+static void		CBindingFreeProc(ClientData clientData);
+int			Tktest_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static int		ImageCmd(ClientData dummy,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, const char **argv);
+static int		TestcbindCmd(ClientData dummy,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, const char **argv);
+static int		TestbitmapObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static int		TestborderObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
+			    Tcl_Obj * const objv[]);
+static int		TestborderObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static int		TestcolorObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
+			    Tcl_Obj * const objv[]);
+static int		TestcolorObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static int		TestcursorObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
+			    Tcl_Obj * const objv[]);
+static int		TestcursorObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static int		TestdeleteappsCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-static int		TestfontObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
+			    Tcl_Obj * const objv[]);
+static int		TestdeleteappsCmd(ClientData dummy,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, const char **argv);
+static int		TestfontObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		TestmakeexistCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		TestmakeexistCmd(ClientData dummy,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, const char **argv);
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
-static int		TestmenubarCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
+static int		TestmenubarCmd(ClientData dummy,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, const char **argv);
 #endif
 #if defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
-static int		TestmetricsCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
+static int		TestmetricsCmd(ClientData dummy,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, const char **argv);
 #endif
-static int		TestobjconfigObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
+static int		TestobjconfigObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static int	CustomOptionSet _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Obj **value, char *recordPtr, int internalOffset,
-			char *saveInternalPtr, int flags));
-static Tcl_Obj *CustomOptionGet _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tk_Window tkwin, char *recordPtr, int internalOffset));
-static void	CustomOptionRestore _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr,
-			char *saveInternalPtr));
-static void	CustomOptionFree _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr));
-static int		TestpropCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-#if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
-static int		TestsendCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-#endif
-static int		TesttextCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
+			    Tcl_Obj * const objv[]);
+static int		CustomOptionSet(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj **value, char *recordPtr,
+			    int internalOffset, char *saveInternalPtr,
+			    int flags);
+static Tcl_Obj *	CustomOptionGet(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *recordPtr,
+			    int internalOffset);
+static void		CustomOptionRestore(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr,
+			    char *saveInternalPtr);
+static void		CustomOptionFree(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr);
+static int		TestpropCmd(ClientData dummy,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, const char **argv);
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
-static int		TestwrapperCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
+static int		TestwrapperCmd(ClientData dummy,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, const char **argv);
 #endif
-static void		TrivialCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static int		TrivialConfigObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
+static void		TrivialCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static int		TrivialConfigObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static void		TrivialEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
+			    Tcl_Obj * const objv[]);
+static void		TrivialEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
 
 /*
  * External (platform specific) initialization routine:
  */
 
-extern int		TkplatformtestInit _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp));
-
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
 #define TkplatformtestInit(x) TCL_OK
+#else
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkplatformtestInit(Tcl_Interp *interp);
 #endif
+
+/*
+ * External legacy testing initialization routine:
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkOldTestInit(Tcl_Interp *interp);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tktest_Init --
  *
- *	This procedure performs intialization for the Tk test
- *	suite exensions.
+ *	This function performs intialization for the Tk test suite exensions.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl completion code, and leaves an error
- *	message in the interp's result if an error occurs.
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl completion code, and leaves an error message in
+ *	the interp's result if an error occurs.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Creates several test commands.
@@ -248,8 +234,8 @@ extern int		TkplatformtestInit _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp));
  */
 
 int
-Tktest_Init(interp)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for application. */
+Tktest_Init(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Interpreter for application. */
 {
     static int initialized = 0;
 
@@ -262,47 +248,43 @@ Tktest_Init(interp)
     }
 
     Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "square", SquareObjCmd,
-	    (ClientData) NULL, (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
+	    (ClientData) NULL, NULL);
     Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testcbind", TestcbindCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
     Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "testbitmap", TestbitmapObjCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
     Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "testborder", TestborderObjCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
     Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "testcolor", TestcolorObjCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
     Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "testcursor", TestcursorObjCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
     Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testdeleteapps", TestdeleteappsCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
     Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testembed", TkpTestembedCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
     Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "testobjconfig", TestobjconfigObjCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
     Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "testfont", TestfontObjCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
     Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testmakeexist", TestmakeexistCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
-#if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
-    Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testmenubar", TestmenubarCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
-#endif
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
+    Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testprop", TestpropCmd,
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
+    Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testtext", TkpTesttextCmd,
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
+
 #if defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
     Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testmetrics", TestmetricsCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
-#endif
-    Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testprop", TestpropCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
-#if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
-    Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testsend", TestsendCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
-#endif
-    Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testtext", TesttextCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
-#if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
+#else
+    Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testmenubar", TestmenubarCmd,
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
+    Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testsend", TkpTestsendCmd,
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
     Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testwrapper", TestwrapperCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
-#endif
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
+#endif /* __WIN32__ || MAC_OSX_TK */
 
     /*
      * Create test image type.
@@ -314,9 +296,17 @@ Tktest_Init(interp)
     }
 
     /*
+     *	Enable testing of legacy interfaces.
+     */
+
+    if (TkOldTestInit(interp) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
      * And finally add any platform specific test commands.
      */
-    
+
     return TkplatformtestInit(interp);
 }
 
@@ -325,34 +315,34 @@ Tktest_Init(interp)
  *
  * TestcbindCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "testcbinding" command.  It provides
- *	a set of functions for testing C bindings in tkBind.c.
+ *	This function implements the "testcbinding" command. It provides a set
+ *	of functions for testing C bindings in tkBind.c.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Depends on option;  see below.
+ *	Depends on option; see below.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-TestcbindCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Argument strings. */
+TestcbindCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    const char **argv)		/* Argument strings. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     ClientData object;
     CBinding *cbindPtr;
-    
-    
+
+
     if (argc < 4 || argc > 5) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"", argv[0],
-		" bindtag pattern command ?deletecommand?", (char *) NULL);
+		" bindtag pattern command ?deletecommand?", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -399,26 +389,26 @@ TestcbindCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 }
 
 static int
-CBindingEvalProc(clientData, interp, eventPtr, tkwin, keySym)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    XEvent *eventPtr;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    KeySym keySym;
+CBindingEvalProc(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    XEvent *eventPtr,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    KeySym keySym)
 {
     CBinding *cbindPtr;
 
     cbindPtr = (CBinding *) clientData;
-    
+
     return Tcl_EvalEx(interp, cbindPtr->command, -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
 }
 
 static void
-CBindingFreeProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;
+CBindingFreeProc(
+    ClientData clientData)
 {
     CBinding *cbindPtr = (CBinding *) clientData;
-    
+
     if (cbindPtr->delete != NULL) {
 	Tcl_EvalEx(cbindPtr->interp, cbindPtr->delete, -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
 	ckfree((char *) cbindPtr->delete);
@@ -432,8 +422,8 @@ CBindingFreeProc(clientData)
  *
  * TestbitmapObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "testbitmap" command, which is used
- *	to test color resource handling in tkBitmap tmp.c.
+ *	This function implements the "testbitmap" command, which is used to
+ *	test color resource handling in tkBitmap tmp.c.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -446,11 +436,11 @@ CBindingFreeProc(clientData)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-TestbitmapObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+TestbitmapObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
 
     if (objc < 2) {
@@ -467,8 +457,8 @@ TestbitmapObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TestborderObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "testborder" command, which is used
- *	to test color resource handling in tkBorder.c.
+ *	This function implements the "testborder" command, which is used to
+ *	test color resource handling in tkBorder.c.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -481,11 +471,11 @@ TestbitmapObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-TestborderObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+TestborderObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
 
     if (objc < 2) {
@@ -502,8 +492,8 @@ TestborderObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TestcolorObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "testcolor" command, which is used
- *	to test color resource handling in tkColor.c.
+ *	This function implements the "testcolor" command, which is used to
+ *	test color resource handling in tkColor.c.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -516,13 +506,12 @@ TestborderObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-TestcolorObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+TestcolorObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-
     if (objc < 2) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "color");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -537,8 +526,8 @@ TestcolorObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TestcursorObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "testcursor" command, which is used
- *	to test color resource handling in tkCursor.c.
+ *	This function implements the "testcursor" command, which is used to
+ *	test color resource handling in tkCursor.c.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -551,13 +540,12 @@ TestcolorObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-TestcursorObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+TestcursorObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-
     if (objc < 2) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cursor");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -572,26 +560,26 @@ TestcursorObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TestdeleteappsCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "testdeleteapps" command.  It cleans
- *	up all the interpreters left behind by the "testnewapp" command.
+ *	This function implements the "testdeleteapps" command. It cleans up
+ *	all the interpreters left behind by the "testnewapp" command.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	All the intepreters created by previous calls to "testnewapp"
- *	get deleted.
+ *	All the intepreters created by previous calls to "testnewapp" get
+ *	deleted.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-TestdeleteappsCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Argument strings. */
+TestdeleteappsCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    const char **argv)		/* Argument strings. */
 {
     NewApp *nextPtr;
 
@@ -610,8 +598,8 @@ TestdeleteappsCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * TestobjconfigObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "testobjconfig" command,
- *	which is used to test the procedures in tkConfig.c.
+ *	This function implements the "testobjconfig" command, which is used to
+ *	test the functions in tkConfig.c.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -624,46 +612,40 @@ TestdeleteappsCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-TestobjconfigObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+TestobjconfigObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    static CONST char *options[] = {"alltypes", "chain1", "chain2",
-	    "configerror", "delete", "info", "internal", "new",
-	    "notenoughparams", "twowindows", (char *) NULL};
+    static const char *options[] = {
+	"alltypes", "chain1", "chain2", "configerror", "delete", "info",
+	"internal", "new", "notenoughparams", "twowindows", NULL
+    };
     enum {
-	ALL_TYPES,
-	CHAIN1,
-	CHAIN2,
-	CONFIG_ERROR,
+	ALL_TYPES, CHAIN1, CHAIN2, CONFIG_ERROR,
 	DEL,			/* Can't use DELETE: VC++ compiler barfs. */
-	INFO,
-	INTERNAL,
-	NEW,
-	NOT_ENOUGH_PARAMS,
-	TWO_WINDOWS
+	INFO, INTERNAL, NEW, NOT_ENOUGH_PARAMS, TWO_WINDOWS
     };
-    static Tk_OptionTable tables[11];	/* Holds pointers to option tables
-					 * created by commands below; indexed
-					 * with same values as "options"
-					 * array. */
-    static CONST Tk_ObjCustomOption CustomOption = {
+    static Tk_OptionTable tables[11];
+				/* Holds pointers to option tables created by
+				 * commands below; indexed with same values as
+				 * "options" array. */
+    static const Tk_ObjCustomOption CustomOption = {
 	"custom option",
-	    CustomOptionSet,
-	    CustomOptionGet,
-	    CustomOptionRestore,
-	    CustomOptionFree,
-	    (ClientData) 1
+	CustomOptionSet,
+	CustomOptionGet,
+	CustomOptionRestore,
+	CustomOptionFree,
+	(ClientData) 1
     };
     Tk_Window mainWin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     int index, result = TCL_OK;
 
     /*
-     * Structures used by the "chain1" subcommand and also shared by
-     * the "chain2" subcommand:
+     * Structures used by the "chain1" subcommand and also shared by the
+     * "chain2" subcommand:
      */
 
     typedef struct ExtensionWidgetRecord {
@@ -674,12 +656,10 @@ TestobjconfigObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tcl_Obj *extension4ObjPtr;
 	Tcl_Obj *extension5ObjPtr;
     } ExtensionWidgetRecord;
-    static CONST Tk_OptionSpec baseSpecs[] = {
-	{TK_OPTION_STRING,
-		"-one", "one", "One", "one",
+    static const Tk_OptionSpec baseSpecs[] = {
+	{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-one", "one", "One", "one",
 		Tk_Offset(ExtensionWidgetRecord, base1ObjPtr), -1},
-	{TK_OPTION_STRING,
-		"-two", "two", "Two", "two",
+	{TK_OPTION_STRING, "-two", "two", "Two", "two",
 		Tk_Offset(ExtensionWidgetRecord, base2ObjPtr), -1},
 	{TK_OPTION_END}
     };
@@ -695,633 +675,550 @@ TestobjconfigObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch (index) {
-	case ALL_TYPES: {
-	    typedef struct TypesRecord {
-		TrivialCommandHeader header;
-		Tcl_Obj *booleanPtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *integerPtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *doublePtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *stringPtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *stringTablePtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *colorPtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *fontPtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *bitmapPtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *borderPtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *reliefPtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *cursorPtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *activeCursorPtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *justifyPtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *anchorPtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *pixelPtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *mmPtr;
-		Tcl_Obj *customPtr;
-	    } TypesRecord;
-	    TypesRecord *recordPtr;
-	    static CONST char *CONST stringTable[] = {"one", "two", "three", "four",
-		    (char *) NULL};
-	    static CONST Tk_OptionSpec typesSpecs[] = {
-		{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN,
-			"-boolean", "boolean", "Boolean",
-			"1", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, booleanPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0x1},
-		{TK_OPTION_INT,
-			"-integer", "integer", "Integer",
-			"7", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, integerPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0x2},
-		{TK_OPTION_DOUBLE,
-			"-double", "double", "Double",
-			"3.14159", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, doublePtr), -1, 0, 0,
-			0x4},
-		{TK_OPTION_STRING,
-			"-string", "string", "String",
-			"foo", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, stringPtr), -1, 
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x8},
-		{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE,
-			"-stringtable", "StringTable", "stringTable",
-			"one", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, stringTablePtr), -1,
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) stringTable, 0x10},
-		{TK_OPTION_COLOR,
-			"-color", "color", "Color",
-			"red", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, colorPtr), -1, 
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) "black", 0x20},
-		{TK_OPTION_FONT,
-			"-font", "font", "Font",
-			"Helvetica 12",
-			Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, fontPtr), -1,
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x40},
-		{TK_OPTION_BITMAP,
-			"-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap",
-			"gray50",
-			Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, bitmapPtr), -1,
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x80},
-		{TK_OPTION_BORDER,
-			"-border", "border", "Border",
-			"blue", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, borderPtr), -1,
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) "white", 0x100},
-		{TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
-			"-relief", "relief", "Relief",
-			"raised",
-			Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, reliefPtr), -1,
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x200},
-		{TK_OPTION_CURSOR,
-			"-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
-			"xterm",
-			Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, cursorPtr), -1,
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x400},
-		{TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY,
-			"-justify", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-			"left",
-			Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, justifyPtr), -1,
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x800},
-		{TK_OPTION_ANCHOR,
-			"-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
-			(char *) NULL,
-			Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, anchorPtr), -1,
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x1000},
-		{TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
-			"-pixel", "pixel", "Pixel",
-			"1", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, pixelPtr), -1,
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x2000},
-		{TK_OPTION_CUSTOM,
-		        "-custom", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-		        "", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, customPtr), -1,
-  		        TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData)&CustomOption, 0x4000},
-		{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM,
-			"-synonym", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-			(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-color",
-			0x8000},
-		{TK_OPTION_END}
-	    };
-	    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
-	    Tk_Window tkwin;
-	    optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp,
-		    typesSpecs);
-	    tables[index] = optionTable;
-	    tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, (Tk_Window) clientData, 
-		    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL), (char *) NULL);
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    Tk_SetClass(tkwin, "Test");
-
-	    recordPtr = (TypesRecord *) ckalloc(sizeof(TypesRecord));
-	    recordPtr->header.interp = interp;
-	    recordPtr->header.optionTable = optionTable;
-	    recordPtr->header.tkwin = tkwin;
-	    recordPtr->booleanPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->integerPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->doublePtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->stringPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->colorPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->fontPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->bitmapPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->borderPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->reliefPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->cursorPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->justifyPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->anchorPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->pixelPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->mmPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->stringTablePtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->customPtr = NULL;
-	    result = Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr, optionTable,
-		    tkwin);
-	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		recordPtr->header.widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
-			Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL),
-			TrivialConfigObjCmd, (ClientData) recordPtr,
-			TrivialCmdDeletedProc);
-		Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
-			TrivialEventProc, (ClientData) recordPtr);
-		result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr,
-			optionTable, objc - 3, objv + 3, tkwin,
-			(Tk_SavedOptions *) NULL, (int *) NULL);
-		if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		    Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
-		}
-	    } else {
+    case ALL_TYPES: {
+	typedef struct TypesRecord {
+	    TrivialCommandHeader header;
+	    Tcl_Obj *booleanPtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *integerPtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *doublePtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *stringPtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *stringTablePtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *colorPtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *fontPtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *bitmapPtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *borderPtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *reliefPtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *cursorPtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *activeCursorPtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *justifyPtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *anchorPtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *pixelPtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *mmPtr;
+	    Tcl_Obj *customPtr;
+	} TypesRecord;
+	TypesRecord *recordPtr;
+	static const char *stringTable[] = {
+	    "one", "two", "three", "four", NULL
+	};
+	static const Tk_OptionSpec typesSpecs[] = {
+	    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-boolean", "boolean", "Boolean", "1",
+		Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, booleanPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0x1},
+	    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-integer", "integer", "Integer", "7",
+		Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, integerPtr), -1, 0, 0, 0x2},
+	    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-double", "double", "Double", "3.14159",
+		Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, doublePtr), -1, 0, 0, 0x4},
+	    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-string", "string", "String",
+		"foo", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, stringPtr), -1,
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x8},
+	    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE,
+		"-stringtable", "StringTable", "stringTable",
+		"one", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, stringTablePtr), -1,
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) stringTable, 0x10},
+	    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-color", "color", "Color",
+		"red", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, colorPtr), -1,
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) "black", 0x20},
+	    {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", "Helvetica 12",
+		Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, fontPtr), -1,
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x40},
+	    {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap", "gray50",
+		Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, bitmapPtr), -1,
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x80},
+	    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-border", "border", "Border",
+		"blue", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, borderPtr), -1,
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) "white", 0x100},
+	    {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", "raised",
+		Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, reliefPtr), -1,
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x200},
+	    {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", "xterm",
+		Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, cursorPtr), -1,
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x400},
+	    {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", NULL, NULL, "left",
+		Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, justifyPtr), -1,
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x800},
+	    {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor", NULL,
+		Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, anchorPtr), -1,
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x1000},
+	    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pixel", "pixel", "Pixel",
+		"1", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, pixelPtr), -1,
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x2000},
+	    {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-custom", NULL, NULL,
+		"", Tk_Offset(TypesRecord, customPtr), -1,
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData)&CustomOption, 0x4000},
+	    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-synonym", NULL, NULL,
+		NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-color", 0x8000},
+	    {TK_OPTION_END}
+	};
+	Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
+	Tk_Window tkwin;
+
+	optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, typesSpecs);
+	tables[index] = optionTable;
+	tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, (Tk_Window) clientData,
+		Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), NULL);
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Tk_SetClass(tkwin, "Test");
+
+	recordPtr = (TypesRecord *) ckalloc(sizeof(TypesRecord));
+	recordPtr->header.interp = interp;
+	recordPtr->header.optionTable = optionTable;
+	recordPtr->header.tkwin = tkwin;
+	recordPtr->booleanPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->integerPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->doublePtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->stringPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->colorPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->fontPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->bitmapPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->borderPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->reliefPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->cursorPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->justifyPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->anchorPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->pixelPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->mmPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->stringTablePtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->customPtr = NULL;
+	result = Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr, optionTable,
+		tkwin);
+	if (result == TCL_OK) {
+	    recordPtr->header.widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), TrivialConfigObjCmd,
+		    (ClientData) recordPtr, TrivialCmdDeletedProc);
+	    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
+		    TrivialEventProc, (ClientData) recordPtr);
+	    result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr, optionTable,
+		    objc-3, objv+3, tkwin, NULL, NULL);
+	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
 		Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
-		ckfree((char *) recordPtr);
-	    }
-	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[2]);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
+	    ckfree((char *) recordPtr);
 	}
+	if (result == TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[2]);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-	case CHAIN1: {
-	    ExtensionWidgetRecord *recordPtr;
-	    Tk_Window tkwin;
-	    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
+    case CHAIN1: {
+	ExtensionWidgetRecord *recordPtr;
+	Tk_Window tkwin;
+	Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
 
-	    tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, (Tk_Window) clientData, 
-		    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL), (char *) NULL);
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    Tk_SetClass(tkwin, "Test");
-	    optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, baseSpecs);
-	    tables[index] = optionTable;
-
-	    recordPtr = (ExtensionWidgetRecord *) ckalloc(
-	    	    sizeof(ExtensionWidgetRecord));
-	    recordPtr->header.interp = interp;
-	    recordPtr->header.optionTable = optionTable;
-	    recordPtr->header.tkwin = tkwin;
-	    recordPtr->base1ObjPtr = recordPtr->base2ObjPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->extension3ObjPtr = recordPtr->extension4ObjPtr = NULL;
-	    result = Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr, optionTable,
-		    tkwin);
-	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr, optionTable,
-			objc - 3, objv + 3, tkwin, (Tk_SavedOptions *) NULL,
-			(int *) NULL);
-		if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		    Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) recordPtr, optionTable,
-			    tkwin);
-		}
+	tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, (Tk_Window) clientData,
+		Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), NULL);
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Tk_SetClass(tkwin, "Test");
+	optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, baseSpecs);
+	tables[index] = optionTable;
+
+	recordPtr = (ExtensionWidgetRecord *)
+		ckalloc(sizeof(ExtensionWidgetRecord));
+	recordPtr->header.interp = interp;
+	recordPtr->header.optionTable = optionTable;
+	recordPtr->header.tkwin = tkwin;
+	recordPtr->base1ObjPtr = recordPtr->base2ObjPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->extension3ObjPtr = recordPtr->extension4ObjPtr = NULL;
+	result = Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *)recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin);
+	if (result == TCL_OK) {
+	    result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr, optionTable,
+		    objc-3, objv+3, tkwin, NULL, NULL);
+	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+		Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin);
 	    }
-	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		recordPtr->header.widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
-			Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL),
-			TrivialConfigObjCmd, (ClientData) recordPtr,
-			TrivialCmdDeletedProc);
-		Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
-			TrivialEventProc, (ClientData) recordPtr);
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[2]);
+	}
+	if (result == TCL_OK) {
+	    recordPtr->header.widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), TrivialConfigObjCmd,
+		    (ClientData) recordPtr, TrivialCmdDeletedProc);
+	    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
+		    TrivialEventProc, (ClientData) recordPtr);
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[2]);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case CHAIN2: {
+	ExtensionWidgetRecord *recordPtr;
+	static const Tk_OptionSpec extensionSpecs[] = {
+	    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-three", "three", "Three", "three",
+		Tk_Offset(ExtensionWidgetRecord, extension3ObjPtr), -1},
+	    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-four", "four", "Four", "four",
+		Tk_Offset(ExtensionWidgetRecord, extension4ObjPtr), -1},
+	    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-two", "two", "Two", "two and a half",
+		Tk_Offset(ExtensionWidgetRecord, base2ObjPtr), -1},
+	    {TK_OPTION_STRING,
+		"-oneAgain", "oneAgain", "OneAgain", "one again",
+		Tk_Offset(ExtensionWidgetRecord, extension5ObjPtr), -1},
+	    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0,
+		(ClientData) baseSpecs}
+	};
+	Tk_Window tkwin;
+	Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
+
+	tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, (Tk_Window) clientData,
+		Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), NULL);
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Tk_SetClass(tkwin, "Test");
+	optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, extensionSpecs);
+	tables[index] = optionTable;
+
+	recordPtr = (ExtensionWidgetRecord *) ckalloc(
+		sizeof(ExtensionWidgetRecord));
+	recordPtr->header.interp = interp;
+	recordPtr->header.optionTable = optionTable;
+	recordPtr->header.tkwin = tkwin;
+	recordPtr->base1ObjPtr = recordPtr->base2ObjPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->extension3ObjPtr = recordPtr->extension4ObjPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->extension5ObjPtr = NULL;
+	result = Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *)recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin);
+	if (result == TCL_OK) {
+	    result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr, optionTable,
+		    objc-3, objv+3, tkwin, NULL, NULL);
+	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+		Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin);
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
+	if (result == TCL_OK) {
+	    recordPtr->header.widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), TrivialConfigObjCmd,
+		    (ClientData) recordPtr, TrivialCmdDeletedProc);
+	    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
+		    TrivialEventProc, (ClientData) recordPtr);
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[2]);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-	case CHAIN2: {
-	    ExtensionWidgetRecord *recordPtr;
-	    static CONST Tk_OptionSpec extensionSpecs[] = {
-		{TK_OPTION_STRING,
-			"-three", "three", "Three", "three",
-			Tk_Offset(ExtensionWidgetRecord, extension3ObjPtr),
-			-1},
-		{TK_OPTION_STRING,
-			"-four", "four", "Four", "four",
-			Tk_Offset(ExtensionWidgetRecord, extension4ObjPtr),
-			-1},
-		{TK_OPTION_STRING,
-			"-two", "two", "Two", "two and a half",
-			Tk_Offset(ExtensionWidgetRecord, base2ObjPtr),
-			-1},
-		{TK_OPTION_STRING,
-			"-oneAgain", "oneAgain", "OneAgain", "one again",
-			Tk_Offset(ExtensionWidgetRecord, extension5ObjPtr),
-			-1},
-		{TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-			(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) baseSpecs}
-	    };
-	    Tk_Window tkwin;
-	    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
+    case CONFIG_ERROR: {
+	typedef struct ErrorWidgetRecord {
+	    Tcl_Obj *intPtr;
+	} ErrorWidgetRecord;
+	ErrorWidgetRecord widgetRecord;
+	static const Tk_OptionSpec errorSpecs[] = {
+	    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-int", "integer", "Integer", "bogus",
+		Tk_Offset(ErrorWidgetRecord, intPtr)},
+	    {TK_OPTION_END}
+	};
+	Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
+
+	widgetRecord.intPtr = NULL;
+	optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, errorSpecs);
+	tables[index] = optionTable;
+	return Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) &widgetRecord, optionTable,
+		(Tk_Window) NULL);
+    }
 
-	    tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, (Tk_Window) clientData, 
-		    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL), (char *) NULL);
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    Tk_SetClass(tkwin, "Test");
-	    optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, extensionSpecs);
-	    tables[index] = optionTable;
-
-	    recordPtr = (ExtensionWidgetRecord *) ckalloc(
-	    	    sizeof(ExtensionWidgetRecord));
-	    recordPtr->header.interp = interp;
-	    recordPtr->header.optionTable = optionTable;
-	    recordPtr->header.tkwin = tkwin;
-	    recordPtr->base1ObjPtr = recordPtr->base2ObjPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->extension3ObjPtr = recordPtr->extension4ObjPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->extension5ObjPtr = NULL;
-	    result = Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr, optionTable,
-		    tkwin);
-	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr, optionTable,
-			objc - 3, objv + 3, tkwin, (Tk_SavedOptions *) NULL,
-			(int *) NULL);
-		if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		    Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) recordPtr, optionTable,
-			    tkwin);
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		recordPtr->header.widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
-			Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL),
-			TrivialConfigObjCmd, (ClientData) recordPtr,
-			TrivialCmdDeletedProc);
-		Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
-			TrivialEventProc, (ClientData) recordPtr);
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[2]);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case DEL:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tableName");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], options, "table", 0,
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (tables[index] != NULL) {
+	    Tk_DeleteOptionTable(tables[index]);
 	}
+	break;
 
-	case CONFIG_ERROR: {
-	    typedef struct ErrorWidgetRecord {
-		Tcl_Obj *intPtr;
-	    } ErrorWidgetRecord;
-	    ErrorWidgetRecord widgetRecord;
-	    static CONST Tk_OptionSpec errorSpecs[] = {
-		{TK_OPTION_INT, 
-			"-int", "integer", "Integer",
-			"bogus", Tk_Offset(ErrorWidgetRecord, intPtr)},
-		{TK_OPTION_END}
-	    };
-	    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
-
-	    widgetRecord.intPtr = NULL;
-	    optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, errorSpecs);
-	    tables[index] = optionTable;
-	    return Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) &widgetRecord, optionTable,
-		    (Tk_Window) NULL);
+    case INFO:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tableName");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], options, "table", 0,
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkDebugConfig(interp, tables[index]));
+	break;
 
-	case DEL: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tableName");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], options, "table", 0,
-		    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (tables[index] != NULL) {
-		Tk_DeleteOptionTable(tables[index]);
+    case INTERNAL: {
+	/*
+	 * This command is similar to the "alltypes" command except that it
+	 * stores all the configuration options as internal forms instead of
+	 * objects.
+	 */
+
+	typedef struct InternalRecord {
+	    TrivialCommandHeader header;
+	    int boolean;
+	    int integer;
+	    double doubleValue;
+	    char *string;
+	    int index;
+	    XColor *colorPtr;
+	    Tk_Font tkfont;
+	    Pixmap bitmap;
+	    Tk_3DBorder border;
+	    int relief;
+	    Tk_Cursor cursor;
+	    Tk_Justify justify;
+	    Tk_Anchor anchor;
+	    int pixels;
+	    double mm;
+	    Tk_Window tkwin;
+	    char *custom;
+	} InternalRecord;
+	InternalRecord *recordPtr;
+	static const char *const internalStringTable[] = {
+	    "one", "two", "three", "four", NULL
+	};
+	static const Tk_OptionSpec internalSpecs[] = {
+	    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-boolean", "boolean", "Boolean", "1",
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, boolean), 0, 0, 0x1},
+	    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-integer", "integer", "Integer", "148962237",
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, integer), 0, 0, 0x2},
+	    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-double", "double", "Double", "3.14159",
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, doubleValue), 0, 0, 0x4},
+	    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-string", "string", "String", "foo",
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, string),
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x8},
+	    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE,
+		"-stringtable", "StringTable", "stringTable", "one",
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, index),
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) internalStringTable, 0x10},
+	    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-color", "color", "Color", "red",
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, colorPtr),
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) "black", 0x20},
+	    {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font", "Helvetica 12",
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, tkfont),
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x40},
+	    {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap", "gray50",
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, bitmap),
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x80},
+	    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-border", "border", "Border", "blue",
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, border),
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) "white", 0x100},
+	    {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", "raised",
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, relief),
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x200},
+	    {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", "xterm",
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, cursor),
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x400},
+	    {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", NULL, NULL, "left",
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, justify),
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x800},
+	    {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor", NULL,
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, anchor),
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x1000},
+	    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pixel", "pixel", "Pixel", "1",
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, pixels),
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x2000},
+	    {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-window", "window", "Window", NULL,
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, tkwin),
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	    {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-custom", NULL, NULL, "",
+		-1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, custom),
+		TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData)&CustomOption, 0x4000},
+	    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-synonym", NULL, NULL,
+		NULL, -1, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-color", 0x8000},
+	    {TK_OPTION_END}
+	};
+	Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
+	Tk_Window tkwin;
+
+	optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, internalSpecs);
+	tables[index] = optionTable;
+	tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, (Tk_Window) clientData,
+		Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), NULL);
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Tk_SetClass(tkwin, "Test");
+
+	recordPtr = (InternalRecord *) ckalloc(sizeof(InternalRecord));
+	recordPtr->header.interp = interp;
+	recordPtr->header.optionTable = optionTable;
+	recordPtr->header.tkwin = tkwin;
+	recordPtr->boolean = 0;
+	recordPtr->integer = 0;
+	recordPtr->doubleValue = 0.0;
+	recordPtr->string = NULL;
+	recordPtr->index = 0;
+	recordPtr->colorPtr = NULL;
+	recordPtr->tkfont = NULL;
+	recordPtr->bitmap = None;
+	recordPtr->border = NULL;
+	recordPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+	recordPtr->cursor = NULL;
+	recordPtr->justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+	recordPtr->anchor = TK_ANCHOR_N;
+	recordPtr->pixels = 0;
+	recordPtr->mm = 0.0;
+	recordPtr->tkwin = NULL;
+	recordPtr->custom = NULL;
+	result = Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr, optionTable,
+		tkwin);
+	if (result == TCL_OK) {
+	    recordPtr->header.widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), TrivialConfigObjCmd,
+		    (ClientData) recordPtr, TrivialCmdDeletedProc);
+	    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
+		    TrivialEventProc, (ClientData) recordPtr);
+	    result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr, optionTable,
+		    objc - 3, objv + 3, tkwin, NULL, NULL);
+	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+		Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
+	    ckfree((char *) recordPtr);
 	}
+	if (result == TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[2]);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-	case INFO: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tableName");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], options, "table", 0,
-		    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkDebugConfig(interp, tables[index]));
-	    break;
+    case NEW: {
+	typedef struct FiveRecord {
+	    TrivialCommandHeader header;
+	    Tcl_Obj *one;
+	    Tcl_Obj *two;
+	    Tcl_Obj *three;
+	    Tcl_Obj *four;
+	    Tcl_Obj *five;
+	} FiveRecord;
+	FiveRecord *recordPtr;
+	static const Tk_OptionSpec smallSpecs[] = {
+	    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-one", "one", "One", "1",
+		Tk_Offset(FiveRecord, one), -1},
+	    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-two", "two", "Two", "2",
+		Tk_Offset(FiveRecord, two), -1},
+	    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-three", "three", "Three", "3",
+		Tk_Offset(FiveRecord, three), -1},
+	    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-four", "four", "Four", "4",
+		Tk_Offset(FiveRecord, four), -1},
+	    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-five", NULL, NULL, NULL,
+		Tk_Offset(FiveRecord, five), -1},
+	    {TK_OPTION_END}
+	};
+
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "new name ?options?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
-	case INTERNAL: {
-	    /*
-	     * This command is similar to the "alltypes" command except
-	     * that it stores all the configuration options as internal
-	     * forms instead of objects.
-	     */
-
-	    typedef struct InternalRecord {
-		TrivialCommandHeader header;
-		int boolean;
-		int integer;
-		double doubleValue;
-		char *string;
-		int index;
-		XColor *colorPtr;
-		Tk_Font tkfont;
-		Pixmap bitmap;
-		Tk_3DBorder border;
-		int relief;
-		Tk_Cursor cursor;
-		Tk_Justify justify;
-		Tk_Anchor anchor;
-		int pixels;
-		double mm;
-		Tk_Window tkwin;
-		char *custom;
-	    } InternalRecord;
-	    InternalRecord *recordPtr;
-	    static CONST char *internalStringTable[] = {
-		    "one", "two", "three", "four", (char *) NULL
-	    };
-	    static CONST Tk_OptionSpec internalSpecs[] = {
-		{TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN,
-			"-boolean", "boolean", "Boolean",
-			"1", -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, boolean), 0, 0, 0x1},
-		{TK_OPTION_INT,
-			"-integer", "integer", "Integer",
-			"148962237", -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, integer),
-			0, 0, 0x2},
-		{TK_OPTION_DOUBLE,
-			"-double", "double", "Double",
-			"3.14159", -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, doubleValue),
-			0, 0, 0x4},
-		{TK_OPTION_STRING,
-			"-string", "string", "String",
-			"foo", -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, string), 
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x8},
-		{TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE,
-			"-stringtable", "StringTable", "stringTable",
-			"one", -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, index),
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) internalStringTable,
-			0x10},
-		{TK_OPTION_COLOR,
-			"-color", "color", "Color",
-			"red", -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, colorPtr), 
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) "black", 0x20},
-		{TK_OPTION_FONT,
-			"-font", "font", "Font",
-			"Helvetica 12", -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, tkfont),
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x40},
-		{TK_OPTION_BITMAP,
-			"-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap",
-			"gray50", -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, bitmap),
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x80},
-		{TK_OPTION_BORDER,
-			"-border", "border", "Border",
-			"blue", -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, border),
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) "white", 0x100},
-		{TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
-			"-relief", "relief", "Relief",
-			"raised", -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, relief),
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x200},
-		{TK_OPTION_CURSOR,
-			"-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
-			"xterm", -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, cursor),
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x400},
-		{TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY,
-			"-justify", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-			"left", -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, justify),
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x800},
-		{TK_OPTION_ANCHOR,
-			"-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
-			(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, anchor),
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x1000},
-		{TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
-			"-pixel", "pixel", "Pixel",
-			"1", -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, pixels),
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0x2000},
-		{TK_OPTION_WINDOW,
-			"-window", "window", "Window",
-			(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, tkwin),
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-		{TK_OPTION_CUSTOM,
-		        "-custom", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-		        "", -1, Tk_Offset(InternalRecord, custom),
-		        TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData)&CustomOption, 0x4000},
-		{TK_OPTION_SYNONYM,
-			"-synonym", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-			(char *) NULL, -1, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-color",
-			0x8000},
-		{TK_OPTION_END}
-	    };
-	    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
-	    Tk_Window tkwin;
-	    optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, internalSpecs);
-	    tables[index] = optionTable;
-	    tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, (Tk_Window) clientData, 
-		    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL), (char *) NULL);
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    Tk_SetClass(tkwin, "Test");
-
-	    recordPtr = (InternalRecord *) ckalloc(sizeof(InternalRecord));
-	    recordPtr->header.interp = interp;
-	    recordPtr->header.optionTable = optionTable;
-	    recordPtr->header.tkwin = tkwin;
-	    recordPtr->boolean = 0;
-	    recordPtr->integer = 0;
-	    recordPtr->doubleValue = 0.0;
-	    recordPtr->string = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->index = 0;
-	    recordPtr->colorPtr = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->tkfont = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->bitmap = None;
-	    recordPtr->border = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
-	    recordPtr->cursor = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
-	    recordPtr->anchor = TK_ANCHOR_N;
-	    recordPtr->pixels = 0;
-	    recordPtr->mm = 0.0;
-	    recordPtr->tkwin = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->custom = NULL;
-	    result = Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr, optionTable,
-		    tkwin);
+	recordPtr = (FiveRecord *) ckalloc(sizeof(FiveRecord));
+	recordPtr->header.interp = interp;
+	recordPtr->header.optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp,
+		smallSpecs);
+	tables[index] = recordPtr->header.optionTable;
+	recordPtr->header.tkwin = NULL;
+	recordPtr->one = recordPtr->two = recordPtr->three = NULL;
+	recordPtr->four = recordPtr->five = NULL;
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[2]);
+	result = Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr,
+		recordPtr->header.optionTable, (Tk_Window) NULL);
+	if (result == TCL_OK) {
+	    result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr,
+		    recordPtr->header.optionTable, objc - 3, objv + 3,
+		    (Tk_Window) NULL, NULL, NULL);
 	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
 		recordPtr->header.widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
-			Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL),
-			TrivialConfigObjCmd, (ClientData) recordPtr,
-			TrivialCmdDeletedProc);
-		Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
-			TrivialEventProc, (ClientData) recordPtr);
-		result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr,
-			optionTable, objc - 3, objv + 3, tkwin,
-			(Tk_SavedOptions *) NULL, (int *) NULL);
-		if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		    Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
-		}
+			Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), TrivialConfigObjCmd,
+			(ClientData) recordPtr, TrivialCmdDeletedProc);
 	    } else {
-		Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
-		ckfree((char *) recordPtr);
-	    }
-	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[2]);
+		Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) recordPtr,
+			recordPtr->header.optionTable, (Tk_Window) NULL);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	}
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    ckfree((char *) recordPtr);
 	}
 
-	case NEW: {
-	    typedef struct FiveRecord {
-		TrivialCommandHeader header;
-		Tcl_Obj *one;
-		Tcl_Obj *two;
-		Tcl_Obj *three;
-		Tcl_Obj *four;
-		Tcl_Obj *five;
-	    } FiveRecord;
-	    FiveRecord *recordPtr;
-	    static CONST Tk_OptionSpec smallSpecs[] = {
-		{TK_OPTION_INT,
-			"-one", "one", "One",
-			"1",
-			Tk_Offset(FiveRecord, one), -1},
-		{TK_OPTION_INT,
-			"-two", "two", "Two",
-			"2",
-			Tk_Offset(FiveRecord, two), -1},
-		{TK_OPTION_INT,
-			"-three", "three", "Three",
-			"3",
-			Tk_Offset(FiveRecord, three), -1},
-		{TK_OPTION_INT,
-			"-four", "four", "Four",
-			"4",
-			Tk_Offset(FiveRecord, four), -1},
-		{TK_OPTION_STRING,
-			"-five", NULL, NULL,
-			NULL,
-			Tk_Offset(FiveRecord, five), -1},
-		{TK_OPTION_END}
-	    };
-
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "new name ?options?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+	break;
+    }
+    case NOT_ENOUGH_PARAMS: {
+	typedef struct NotEnoughRecord {
+	    Tcl_Obj *fooObjPtr;
+	} NotEnoughRecord;
+	NotEnoughRecord record;
+	static const Tk_OptionSpec errorSpecs[] = {
+	    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-foo", "foo", "Foo", "0",
+		Tk_Offset(NotEnoughRecord, fooObjPtr)},
+	    {TK_OPTION_END}
+	};
+	Tcl_Obj *newObjPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj("-foo", -1);
+	Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
+
+	record.fooObjPtr = NULL;
+
+	tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, mainWin, ".config", NULL);
+	Tk_SetClass(tkwin, "Config");
+	optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, errorSpecs);
+	tables[index] = optionTable;
+	Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) &record, optionTable, tkwin);
+	if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) &record, optionTable, 1,
+		&newObjPtr, tkwin, NULL, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(newObjPtr);
+	Tk_FreeConfigOptions( (char *) &record, optionTable, tkwin);
+	Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
+	return result;
+    }
 
-	    recordPtr = (FiveRecord *) ckalloc(sizeof(FiveRecord));
-	    recordPtr->header.interp = interp;
-	    recordPtr->header.optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp,
-		    smallSpecs);
-	    tables[index] = recordPtr->header.optionTable;
-	    recordPtr->header.tkwin = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->one = recordPtr->two = recordPtr->three = NULL;
-	    recordPtr->four = recordPtr->five = NULL;
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[2]);
-	    result = Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr, 
-		    recordPtr->header.optionTable, (Tk_Window) NULL);
-	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr,
-			recordPtr->header.optionTable, objc - 3, objv + 3,
-			(Tk_Window) NULL, (Tk_SavedOptions *) NULL,
-			(int *) NULL);
-		if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		    recordPtr->header.widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, 
-			    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL),
-			    TrivialConfigObjCmd, (ClientData) recordPtr,
-			    TrivialCmdDeletedProc);
-		} else {
-		    Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) recordPtr,
-			    recordPtr->header.optionTable, (Tk_Window) NULL);
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		ckfree((char *) recordPtr);
-	    }
+    case TWO_WINDOWS: {
+	typedef struct SlaveRecord {
+	    TrivialCommandHeader header;
+	    Tcl_Obj *windowPtr;
+	} SlaveRecord;
+	SlaveRecord *recordPtr;
+	static const Tk_OptionSpec slaveSpecs[] = {
+	    {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-window", "window", "Window", ".bar",
+		Tk_Offset(SlaveRecord, windowPtr), -1, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+	    {TK_OPTION_END}
+	};
+	Tk_Window tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp,
+		(Tk_Window) clientData, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), NULL);
 
-	    break;
-	}
-	case NOT_ENOUGH_PARAMS: {
-	    typedef struct NotEnoughRecord {
-		Tcl_Obj *fooObjPtr;
-	    } NotEnoughRecord;
-	    NotEnoughRecord record;
-	    static CONST Tk_OptionSpec errorSpecs[] = {
-		{TK_OPTION_INT, 
-			"-foo", "foo", "Foo",
-			"0", Tk_Offset(NotEnoughRecord, fooObjPtr)},
-		{TK_OPTION_END}
-	    };
-	    Tcl_Obj *newObjPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj("-foo", -1);
-	    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
-
-	    record.fooObjPtr = NULL;
-
-	    tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, mainWin,
-		    ".config", (char *) NULL);
-	    Tk_SetClass(tkwin, "Config");
-	    optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, errorSpecs);
-	    tables[index] = optionTable;
-	    Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) &record, optionTable, tkwin);
-	    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) &record, optionTable,
-		    1, &newObjPtr, tkwin, (Tk_SavedOptions *) NULL,
-		    (int *) NULL)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(newObjPtr);
-	    Tk_FreeConfigOptions( (char *) &record, optionTable, tkwin);
-	    Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
-	    return result;
+	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-
-	case TWO_WINDOWS: {
-	    typedef struct SlaveRecord {
-		TrivialCommandHeader header;
-		Tcl_Obj *windowPtr;
-	    } SlaveRecord;
-	    SlaveRecord *recordPtr;
-	    static CONST Tk_OptionSpec slaveSpecs[] = {
-		{TK_OPTION_WINDOW,
-			"-window", "window", "Window",
-			".bar", Tk_Offset(SlaveRecord, windowPtr), -1,
-			TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-	       {TK_OPTION_END}
-	    };
-	    Tk_Window tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp,
-		    (Tk_Window) clientData,
-		    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL), (char *) NULL);
-	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    Tk_SetClass(tkwin, "Test");
-
-	    recordPtr = (SlaveRecord *) ckalloc(sizeof(SlaveRecord));
-	    recordPtr->header.interp = interp;
-	    recordPtr->header.optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp,
-		    slaveSpecs);
-	    tables[index] = recordPtr->header.optionTable;
-	    recordPtr->header.tkwin = tkwin;
-	    recordPtr->windowPtr = NULL;
-
-	    result = Tk_InitOptions(interp,  (char *) recordPtr, 
-		    recordPtr->header.optionTable, tkwin);
+	Tk_SetClass(tkwin, "Test");
+
+	recordPtr = (SlaveRecord *) ckalloc(sizeof(SlaveRecord));
+	recordPtr->header.interp = interp;
+	recordPtr->header.optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp,
+		slaveSpecs);
+	tables[index] = recordPtr->header.optionTable;
+	recordPtr->header.tkwin = tkwin;
+	recordPtr->windowPtr = NULL;
+
+	result = Tk_InitOptions(interp,  (char *) recordPtr,
+		recordPtr->header.optionTable, tkwin);
+	if (result == TCL_OK) {
+	    result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr,
+		    recordPtr->header.optionTable, objc - 3, objv + 3,
+		    tkwin, NULL, NULL);
 	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) recordPtr, 
-			recordPtr->header.optionTable, objc - 3, objv + 3,
-			tkwin, (Tk_SavedOptions *) NULL, (int *) NULL);
-		if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		    recordPtr->header.widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
-			    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL),
-			    TrivialConfigObjCmd, (ClientData) recordPtr,
-			    TrivialCmdDeletedProc);
-		    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
-			    TrivialEventProc, (ClientData) recordPtr);
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[2]);
-		} else {
-		    Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) recordPtr, 
-			    recordPtr->header.optionTable, tkwin);
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
-		ckfree((char *) recordPtr);
+		recordPtr->header.widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
+			Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), TrivialConfigObjCmd,
+			(ClientData) recordPtr, TrivialCmdDeletedProc);
+		Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
+			TrivialEventProc, (ClientData) recordPtr);
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[2]);
+	    } else {
+		Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) recordPtr,
+			recordPtr->header.optionTable, tkwin);
 	    }
-		
 	}
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
+	    ckfree((char *) recordPtr);
+	}
+    }
     }
 
     return result;
@@ -1346,15 +1243,15 @@ TestobjconfigObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-TrivialConfigObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+TrivialConfigObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     int result = TCL_OK;
-    static CONST char *options[] = {
-	"cget", "configure", "csave", (char *) NULL
+    static const char *options[] = {
+	"cget", "configure", "csave", NULL
     };
     enum {
 	CGET, CONFIGURE, CSAVE
@@ -1370,69 +1267,66 @@ TrivialConfigObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], options, "command",
-	    0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], options, "command", 0,
+	    &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     Tcl_Preserve(clientData);
-    
+
     switch (index) {
-	case CGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+    case CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) clientData,
+		headerPtr->optionTable, objv[2], tkwin);
+	if (resultObjPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr);
+	    result = TCL_OK;
+	} else {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	break;
+    case CONFIGURE:
+	if (objc == 2) {
+	    resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) clientData,
+		    headerPtr->optionTable, NULL, tkwin);
+	    if (resultObjPtr == NULL) {
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr);
 	    }
-	    resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) clientData, 
+	} else if (objc == 3) {
+	    resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) clientData,
 		    headerPtr->optionTable, objv[2], tkwin);
-	    if (resultObjPtr != NULL) {
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr);
-		result = TCL_OK;
-	    } else {
+	    if (resultObjPtr == NULL) {
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case CONFIGURE: {
-	    if (objc == 2) {
-		resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) clientData, 
-			headerPtr->optionTable, (Tcl_Obj *) NULL, tkwin);
-		if (resultObjPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr);
-		}
-	    } else if (objc == 3) {
-		resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) clientData,
-			headerPtr->optionTable, objv[2], tkwin);
-		if (resultObjPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr);
-		}
 	    } else {
-		result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) clientData,
-			headerPtr->optionTable, objc - 2, objv + 2, 
-			tkwin, (Tk_SavedOptions *) NULL, &mask);
-		if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), mask);
-		}
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case CSAVE: {
+	} else {
 	    result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) clientData,
-			headerPtr->optionTable, objc - 2, objv + 2, 
-			tkwin, &saved, &mask);
-	    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&saved);
+		    headerPtr->optionTable, objc - 2, objv + 2,
+		    tkwin, NULL, &mask);
 	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
 		Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), mask);
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
+	break;
+    case CSAVE:
+	result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) clientData,
+		headerPtr->optionTable, objc - 2, objv + 2,
+		tkwin, &saved, &mask);
+	Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&saved);
+	if (result == TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), mask);
+	}
+	break;
     }
-done:
+  done:
     Tcl_Release(clientData);
     return result;
 }
@@ -1442,9 +1336,9 @@ done:
  *
  * TrivialCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1456,8 +1350,8 @@ done:
  */
 
 static void
-TrivialCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+TrivialCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     TrivialCommandHeader *headerPtr = (TrivialCommandHeader *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = headerPtr->tkwin;
@@ -1466,9 +1360,9 @@ TrivialCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
 	Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
     } else if (headerPtr->optionTable != NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * This is a "new" object, which doesn't have a window, so
-	 * we can't depend on cleaning up in the event procedure.
-	 * Free its resources here.
+	 * This is a "new" object, which doesn't have a window, so we can't
+	 * depend on cleaning up in the event function. Free its resources
+	 * here.
 	 */
 
 	Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) clientData,
@@ -1488,16 +1382,15 @@ TrivialCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TrivialEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+TrivialEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     TrivialCommandHeader *headerPtr = (TrivialCommandHeader *) clientData;
 
@@ -1519,8 +1412,8 @@ TrivialEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * TestfontObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "testfont" command, which is used
- *	to test TkFont objects.
+ *	This function implements the "testfont" command, which is used to test
+ *	TkFont objects.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -1533,18 +1426,18 @@ TrivialEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-TestfontObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+TestfontObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    static CONST char *options[] = {"counts", "subfonts", (char *) NULL};
+    static const char *options[] = {"counts", "subfonts", NULL};
     enum option {COUNTS, SUBFONTS};
     int index;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     Tk_Font tkfont;
-    
+
     tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
 
     if (objc < 3) {
@@ -1558,20 +1451,18 @@ TestfontObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch ((enum option) index) {
-	case COUNTS: {
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkDebugFont(Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2])));
-	    break;
-	}
-	case SUBFONTS: {
-	    tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
-	    if (tkfont == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    TkpGetSubFonts(interp, tkfont);
-	    Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
-	    break;
+    case COUNTS:
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+		TkDebugFont(Tk_MainWindow(interp), Tcl_GetString(objv[2])));
+	break;
+    case SUBFONTS:
+	tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
+	if (tkfont == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
+	TkpGetSubFonts(interp, tkfont);
+	Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
+	break;
     }
 
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -1582,8 +1473,7 @@ TestfontObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ImageCreate --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the Tk image code to create "test"
- *	images.
+ *	This function is called by the Tk image code to create "test" images.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -1595,54 +1485,19 @@ TestfontObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
-#ifdef USE_OLD_IMAGE
 static int
-ImageCreate(interp, name, argc, argv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for application containing
+ImageCreate(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for application containing
 				 * image. */
-    char *name;			/* Name to use for image. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    char **argv;		/* Argument strings for options (doesn't
+    char *name,			/* Name to use for image. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[],	/* Argument strings for options (doesn't
 				 * include image name or type). */
-    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
-    Tk_ImageMaster master;	/* Token for image, to be used by us in
-				 * later callbacks. */
-    ClientData *clientDataPtr;	/* Store manager's token for image here;
-				 * it will be returned in later callbacks. */
-{
-    TImageMaster *timPtr;
-    char *varName;
-    int i;
-
-    Tk_InitImageArgs(interp, argc, &argv);
-    varName = "log";
-    for (i = 0; i < argc; i += 2) {
-	if (strcmp(argv[i], "-variable") != 0) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option name \"",
-		    argv[i], "\"", (char *) NULL);
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	}
-	if ((i+1) == argc) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no value given for \"",
-		    argv[i], "\" option", (char *) NULL);
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	}
-	varName = argv[i+1];
-    }
-#else
-static int
-ImageCreate(interp, name, objc, objv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for application containing
-				 * image. */
-    char *name;			/* Name to use for image. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument strings for options (doesn't
-				 * include image name or type). */
-    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
-    Tk_ImageMaster master;	/* Token for image, to be used by us in
-				 * later callbacks. */
-    ClientData *clientDataPtr;	/* Store manager's token for image here;
-				 * it will be returned in later callbacks. */
+    Tk_ImageType *typePtr,	/* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
+    Tk_ImageMaster master,	/* Token for image, to be used by us in later
+				 * callbacks. */
+    ClientData *clientDataPtr)	/* Store manager's token for image here; it
+				 * will be returned in later callbacks. */
 {
     TImageMaster *timPtr;
     char *varName;
@@ -1652,17 +1507,17 @@ ImageCreate(interp, name, objc, objv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
     for (i = 0; i < objc; i += 2) {
 	if (strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), "-variable") != 0) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option name \"",
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), "\"", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if ((i+1) == objc) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no value given for \"",
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), "\" option", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), "\" option", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	varName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
     }
-#endif
+
     timPtr = (TImageMaster *) ckalloc(sizeof(TImageMaster));
     timPtr->master = master;
     timPtr->interp = interp;
@@ -1672,8 +1527,7 @@ ImageCreate(interp, name, objc, objv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
     strcpy(timPtr->imageName, name);
     timPtr->varName = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(varName) + 1));
     strcpy(timPtr->varName, varName);
-    Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, name, ImageCmd, (ClientData) timPtr,
-	    (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
+    Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, name, ImageCmd, (ClientData) timPtr, NULL);
     *clientDataPtr = (ClientData) timPtr;
     Tk_ImageChanged(master, 0, 0, 30, 15, 30, 15);
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -1684,8 +1538,8 @@ ImageCreate(interp, name, objc, objv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
  *
  * ImageCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the commands corresponding to individual
- *	images. 
+ *	This function implements the commands corresponding to individual
+ *	images.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -1698,26 +1552,24 @@ ImageCreate(interp, name, objc, objv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-ImageCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Argument strings. */
+ImageCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    const char **argv)		/* Argument strings. */
 {
     TImageMaster *timPtr = (TImageMaster *) clientData;
     int x, y, width, height;
 
     if (argc < 2) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		argv[0], "option ?arg arg ...?", (char *) NULL);
+		argv[0], "option ?arg arg ...?", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     if (strcmp(argv[1], "changed") == 0) {
 	if (argc != 8) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0],
-		    " changed x y width height imageWidth imageHeight",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"", argv[0],
+		    " changed x y width height imageWidth imageHeight", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[2], &x) != TCL_OK)
@@ -1732,7 +1584,7 @@ ImageCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 		timPtr->height);
     } else {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option \"", argv[1],
-		"\": must be changed", (char *) NULL);
+		"\": must be changed", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -1743,12 +1595,12 @@ ImageCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * ImageGet --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by Tk to set things up for using a
- *	test image in a particular widget.
+ *	This function is called by Tk to set things up for using a test image
+ *	in a particular widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the image instance, which is
- *	used in future callbacks to ImageDisplay and ImageFree.
+ *	The return value is a token for the image instance, which is used in
+ *	future callbacks to ImageDisplay and ImageFree.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1757,10 +1609,10 @@ ImageCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  */
 
 static ClientData
-ImageGet(tkwin, clientData)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window in which image will
-				 * be used. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to TImageMaster for image. */
+ImageGet(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window in which image will be
+				 * used. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to TImageMaster for image. */
 {
     TImageMaster *timPtr = (TImageMaster *) clientData;
     TImageInstance *instPtr;
@@ -1784,29 +1636,29 @@ ImageGet(tkwin, clientData)
  *
  * ImageDisplay --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to redisplay part or all of an
- *	image in a given drawable.
+ *	This function is invoked to redisplay part or all of an image in a
+ *	given drawable.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The image gets partially redrawn, as an "X" that shows the
- *	exact redraw area.
+ *	The image gets partially redrawn, as an "X" that shows the exact
+ *	redraw area.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ImageDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width, height,
-	drawableX, drawableY)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to TImageInstance for image. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display to use for drawing. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* Where to redraw image. */
-    int imageX, imageY;		/* Origin of area to redraw, relative to
+ImageDisplay(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to TImageInstance for image. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display to use for drawing. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Where to redraw image. */
+    int imageX, int imageY,	/* Origin of area to redraw, relative to
 				 * origin of image. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of area to redraw. */
-    int drawableX, drawableY;	/* Coordinates in drawable corresponding to
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of area to redraw. */
+    int drawableX, int drawableY)
+				/* Coordinates in drawable corresponding to
 				 * imageX and imageY. */
 {
     TImageInstance *instPtr = (TImageInstance *) clientData;
@@ -1837,8 +1689,8 @@ ImageDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width, height,
  *
  * ImageFree --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an instance of an image is
- * 	no longer used.
+ *	This function is called when an instance of an image is no longer
+ *	used.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1850,9 +1702,9 @@ ImageDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width, height,
  */
 
 static void
-ImageFree(clientData, display)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to TImageInstance for instance. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display where image was to be drawn. */
+ImageFree(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to TImageInstance for instance. */
+    Display *display)		/* Display where image was to be drawn. */
 {
     TImageInstance *instPtr = (TImageInstance *) clientData;
     char buffer[200];
@@ -1870,8 +1722,8 @@ ImageFree(clientData, display)
  *
  * ImageDelete --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to clean up a test image when
- *	an application goes away.
+ *	This function is called to clean up a test image when an application
+ *	goes away.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1883,10 +1735,10 @@ ImageFree(clientData, display)
  */
 
 static void
-ImageDelete(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to TImageMaster for image.  When
-				 * this procedure is called, no more
-				 * instances exist. */
+ImageDelete(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to TImageMaster for image. When
+				 * this function is called, no more instances
+				 * exist. */
 {
     TImageMaster *timPtr = (TImageMaster *) clientData;
     char buffer[100];
@@ -1906,9 +1758,9 @@ ImageDelete(clientData)
  *
  * TestmakeexistCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "testmakeexist" command.  It calls
- *	Tk_MakeWindowExist on each of its arguments to force the windows
- *	to be created.
+ *	This function implements the "testmakeexist" command. It calls
+ *	Tk_MakeWindowExist on each of its arguments to force the windows to be
+ *	created.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -1921,11 +1773,11 @@ ImageDelete(clientData)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-TestmakeexistCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Argument strings. */
+TestmakeexistCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    const char **argv)		/* Argument strings. */
 {
     Tk_Window mainWin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     int i;
@@ -1947,9 +1799,9 @@ TestmakeexistCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * TestmenubarCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "testmenubar" command.  It is used
- *	to test the Unix facilities for creating space above a toplevel
- *	window for a menubar.
+ *	This function implements the "testmenubar" command. It is used to test
+ *	the Unix facilities for creating space above a toplevel window for a
+ *	menubar.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -1963,11 +1815,11 @@ TestmakeexistCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
 static int
-TestmenubarCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Argument strings. */
+TestmenubarCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    const char **argv)		/* Argument strings. */
 {
 #ifdef __UNIX__
     Tk_Window mainWin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
@@ -1975,14 +1827,14 @@ TestmenubarCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 
     if (argc < 2) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args;  must be \"", argv[0],
-		" option ?arg ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+		" option ?arg ...?\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     if (strcmp(argv[1], "window") == 0) {
 	if (argc != 4) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args;  must be \"", argv[0],
-		    "window toplevel menubar\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    "window toplevel menubar\"", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, argv[2], mainWin);
@@ -2000,7 +1852,7 @@ TestmenubarCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 	}
     } else {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option \"", argv[1],
-		"\": must be  window", (char *) NULL);
+		"\": must be  window", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -2018,8 +1870,8 @@ TestmenubarCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * TestmetricsCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the testmetrics command. It provides
- *	a way to determine the size of various widget components.
+ *	This function implements the testmetrics command. It provides a way to
+ *	determine the size of various widget components.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -2032,11 +1884,11 @@ TestmenubarCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 
 #if defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
 static int
-TestmetricsCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Argument strings. */
+TestmetricsCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    const char **argv)		/* Argument strings. */
 {
     char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
     int val;
@@ -2044,7 +1896,7 @@ TestmetricsCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 #ifdef __WIN32__
     if (argc < 2) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args;  must be \"", argv[0],
-		" option ?arg ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+		" option ?arg ...?\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 #else
@@ -2053,7 +1905,7 @@ TestmetricsCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 
     if (argc != 3) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args;  must be \"", argv[0],
-		" option window\"", (char *) NULL);
+		" option window\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -2077,11 +1929,11 @@ TestmetricsCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 #endif
     } else {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option \"", argv[1],
-		"\": must be cxhscroll or cyvscroll", (char *) NULL);
+		"\": must be cxhscroll or cyvscroll", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     sprintf(buf, "%d", val);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 #endif
@@ -2091,8 +1943,8 @@ TestmetricsCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * TestpropCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "testprop" command.  It fetches
- *	and prints the value of a property on a window.
+ *	This function implements the "testprop" command. It fetches and prints
+ *	the value of a property on a window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -2105,23 +1957,24 @@ TestmetricsCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-TestpropCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Argument strings. */
+TestpropCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    const char **argv)		/* Argument strings. */
 {
     Tk_Window mainWin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     int result, actualFormat;
     unsigned long bytesAfter, length, value;
     Atom actualType, propName;
-    char *property, *p, *end;
+    unsigned char *property, *p;
+    char *end;
     Window w;
     char buffer[30];
 
     if (argc != 3) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args;  must be \"", argv[0],
-		" window property\"", (char *) NULL);
+		" window property\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -2131,7 +1984,7 @@ TestpropCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
     result = XGetWindowProperty(Tk_Display(mainWin),
 	    w, propName, 0, 100000, False, AnyPropertyType,
 	    &actualType, &actualFormat, &length,
-	    &bytesAfter, (unsigned char **) &property);
+	    &bytesAfter, &property);
     if ((result == Success) && (actualType != None)) {
 	if ((actualFormat == 8) && (actualType == XA_STRING)) {
 	    for (p = property; ((unsigned long)(p-property)) < length; p++) {
@@ -2139,7 +1992,7 @@ TestpropCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 		    *p = '\n';
 		}
 	    }
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, property, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, (/*!unsigned*/char*)property, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	} else {
 	    for (p = property; length > 0; length--) {
 		if (actualFormat == 32) {
@@ -2163,209 +2016,15 @@ TestpropCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
-/*
- *----------------------------------------------------------------------
- *
- * TestsendCmd --
- *
- *	This procedure implements the "testsend" command.  It provides
- *	a set of functions for testing the "send" command and support
- *	procedure in tkSend.c.
- *
- * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.
- *
- * Side effects:
- *	Depends on option;  see below.
- *
- *----------------------------------------------------------------------
- */
-
-	/* ARGSUSED */
-#if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
-static int
-TestsendCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Argument strings. */
-{
-    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) clientData;
-
-    if (argc < 2) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args;  must be \"", argv[0],
-		" option ?arg ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
-	return TCL_ERROR;
-    }
-
-    if (strcmp(argv[1], "bogus") == 0) {
-	XChangeProperty(winPtr->dispPtr->display,
-		RootWindow(winPtr->dispPtr->display, 0),
-		winPtr->dispPtr->registryProperty, XA_INTEGER, 32,
-		PropModeReplace,
-		(unsigned char *) "This is bogus information", 6);
-    } else if (strcmp(argv[1], "prop") == 0) {
-	int result, actualFormat;
-	unsigned long length, bytesAfter;
-	Atom actualType, propName;
-	char *property, *p, *end;
-	Window w;
-
-	if ((argc != 4) && (argc != 5)) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args;  must be \"", argv[0],
-		    " prop window name ?value ?\"", (char *) NULL);
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	}
-	if (strcmp(argv[2], "root") == 0) {
-	    w = RootWindow(winPtr->dispPtr->display, 0);
-	} else if (strcmp(argv[2], "comm") == 0) {
-	    w = Tk_WindowId(winPtr->dispPtr->commTkwin);
-	} else {
-	    w = strtoul(argv[2], &end, 0);
-	}
-	propName = Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr, argv[3]);
-	if (argc == 4) {
-	    property = NULL;
-	    result = XGetWindowProperty(winPtr->dispPtr->display,
-		    w, propName, 0, 100000, False, XA_STRING,
-		    &actualType, &actualFormat, &length,
-		    &bytesAfter, (unsigned char **) &property);
-	    if ((result == Success) && (actualType != None)
-		    && (actualFormat == 8) && (actualType == XA_STRING)) {
-		for (p = property; (p-property) < length; p++) {
-		    if (*p == 0) {
-			*p = '\n';
-		    }
-		}
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, property, TCL_VOLATILE);
-	    }
-	    if (property != NULL) {
-		XFree(property);
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    if (argv[4][0] == 0) {
-		XDeleteProperty(winPtr->dispPtr->display, w, propName);
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_DString tmp;
-
-		Tcl_DStringInit(&tmp);
-		for (p = Tcl_DStringAppend(&tmp, argv[4],
-			(int) strlen(argv[4]));
-			*p != 0; p++) {
-		    if (*p == '\n') {
-			*p = 0;
-		    }
-		}
-
-		XChangeProperty(winPtr->dispPtr->display,
-			w, propName, XA_STRING, 8, PropModeReplace,
-			(unsigned char *) Tcl_DStringValue(&tmp),
-			p-Tcl_DStringValue(&tmp));
-		Tcl_DStringFree(&tmp);
-	    }
-	}
-    } else if (strcmp(argv[1], "serial") == 0) {
-	char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	
-	sprintf(buf, "%d", tkSendSerial+1);
-	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-    } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option \"", argv[1],
-		"\": must be bogus, prop, or serial", (char *) NULL);
-	return TCL_ERROR;
-    }
-    return TCL_OK;
-}
-#endif
-
-/*
- *----------------------------------------------------------------------
- *
- * TesttextCmd --
- *
- *	This procedure implements the "testtext" command.  It provides
- *	a set of functions for testing text widgets and the associated
- *	functions in tkText*.c.
- *
- * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.
- *
- * Side effects:
- *	Depends on option;  see below.
- *
- *----------------------------------------------------------------------
- */
-
-static int
-TesttextCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Argument strings. */
-{
-    TkText *textPtr;
-    size_t len;
-    int lineIndex, byteIndex, byteOffset;
-    TkTextIndex index;
-    char buf[64];
-    Tcl_CmdInfo info;
-
-    if (argc < 3) {
-	return TCL_ERROR;
-    }
-
-    if (Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, argv[1], &info) == 0) {
-	return TCL_ERROR;
-    }
-    textPtr = (TkText *) info.clientData;
-    len = strlen(argv[2]);
-    if (strncmp(argv[2], "byteindex", len) == 0) {
-	if (argc != 5) {
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	}
-	lineIndex = atoi(argv[3]) - 1;
-	byteIndex = atoi(argv[4]);
-
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineIndex, byteIndex, &index);
-    } else if (strncmp(argv[2], "forwbytes", len) == 0) {
-	if (argc != 5) {
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	}
-	byteOffset = atoi(argv[4]);
-	TkTextIndexForwBytes(&index, byteOffset, &index);
-    } else if (strncmp(argv[2], "backbytes", len) == 0) {
-	if (argc != 5) {
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	}
-	byteOffset = atoi(argv[4]);
-	TkTextIndexBackBytes(&index, byteOffset, &index);
-    } else {
-	return TCL_ERROR;
-    }
-
-    TkTextSetMark(textPtr, "insert", &index);
-    TkTextPrintIndex(&index, buf);
-    sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), " %d", index.byteIndex);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL);
-
-    return TCL_OK;
-}
-
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TestwrapperCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "testwrapper" command.  It 
- *	provides a way from Tcl to determine the extra window Tk adds
- *	in between the toplevel window and the window decorations.
+ *	This function implements the "testwrapper" command. It provides a way
+ *	from Tcl to determine the extra window Tk adds in between the toplevel
+ *	window and the window decorations.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -2378,21 +2037,21 @@ TesttextCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-TestwrapperCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Argument strings. */
+TestwrapperCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    const char **argv)		/* Argument strings. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr, *wrapperPtr;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
 
     if (argc != 2) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args;  must be \"", argv[0],
-		" window\"", (char *) NULL);
+		" window\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, argv[1], tkwin);
     if (winPtr == NULL) {
@@ -2415,7 +2074,7 @@ TestwrapperCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * CustomOptionSet, CustomOptionGet, CustomOptionRestore, CustomOptionFree --
  *
- *	Handlers for object-based custom configuration options.  See
+ *	Handlers for object-based custom configuration options. See
  *	Testobjconfigcommand.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -2437,20 +2096,19 @@ TestwrapperCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  */
 
 static int
-CustomOptionSet(clientData,interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, internalOffset,
-	saveInternalPtr, flags)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    Tcl_Obj **value;
-    char *recordPtr;
-    int internalOffset;
-    char *saveInternalPtr;
-    int flags;
+CustomOptionSet(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tcl_Obj **value,
+    char *recordPtr,
+    int internalOffset,
+    char *saveInternalPtr,
+    int flags)
 {
     int objEmpty, length;
-    char *new, *string, *internalPtr;
-    
+    char *newStr, *string, *internalPtr;
+
     objEmpty = 0;
 
     if (internalOffset >= 0) {
@@ -2458,21 +2116,20 @@ CustomOptionSet(clientData,interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, internalOffset,
     } else {
 	internalPtr = NULL;
     }
-    
+
     /*
      * See if the object is empty.
      */
+
     if (value == NULL) {
 	objEmpty = 1;
+    } else if ((*value)->bytes != NULL) {
+	objEmpty = ((*value)->length == 0);
     } else {
-	if ((*value)->bytes != NULL) {
-	    objEmpty = ((*value)->length == 0);
-	} else {
-	    Tcl_GetStringFromObj((*value), &length);
-	    objEmpty = (length == 0);
-	}
+	Tcl_GetStringFromObj((*value), &length);
+	objEmpty = (length == 0);
     }
-    
+
     if ((flags & TK_OPTION_NULL_OK) && objEmpty) {
 	*value = NULL;
     } else {
@@ -2487,47 +2144,54 @@ CustomOptionSet(clientData,interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, internalOffset,
     if (internalPtr != NULL) {
 	if ((*value) != NULL) {
 	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj((*value), &length);
-	    new = ckalloc((size_t) (length + 1));
-	    strcpy(new, string);
+	    newStr = ckalloc((size_t) (length + 1));
+	    strcpy(newStr, string);
 	} else {
-	    new = NULL;
+	    newStr = NULL;
 	}
 	*((char **) saveInternalPtr) = *((char **) internalPtr);
-	*((char **) internalPtr) = new;
+	*((char **) internalPtr) = newStr;
     }
 
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 static Tcl_Obj *
-CustomOptionGet(clientData, tkwin, recordPtr, internalOffset)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    char *recordPtr;
-    int internalOffset;
+CustomOptionGet(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    char *recordPtr,
+    int internalOffset)
 {
     return (Tcl_NewStringObj(*(char **)(recordPtr + internalOffset), -1));
 }
 
 static void
-CustomOptionRestore(clientData, tkwin, internalPtr, saveInternalPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    char *internalPtr;
-    char *saveInternalPtr;
+CustomOptionRestore(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    char *internalPtr,
+    char *saveInternalPtr)
 {
     *(char **)internalPtr = *(char **)saveInternalPtr;
     return;
 }
 
 static void
-CustomOptionFree(clientData, tkwin, internalPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    char *internalPtr;
+CustomOptionFree(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    char *internalPtr)
 {
     if (*(char **)internalPtr != NULL) {
 	ckfree(*(char **)internalPtr);
     }
 }
-
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkText.c b/generic/tkText.c
index fb15468..f3e1c26 100644
--- a/generic/tkText.c
+++ b/generic/tkText.c
@@ -1,22 +1,20 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkText.c --
  *
- *	This module provides a big chunk of the implementation of
- *	multi-line editable text widgets for Tk.  Among other things,
- *	it provides the Tcl command interfaces to text widgets and
- *	the display code.  The B-tree representation of text is
- *	implemented elsewhere.
+ *	This module provides a big chunk of the implementation of multi-line
+ *	editable text widgets for Tk. Among other things, it provides the Tcl
+ *	command interfaces to text widgets. The B-tree representation of text
+ *	and its actual display are implemented elsewhere.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "default.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkUndo.h"
 
@@ -25,323 +23,409 @@
 #define DInfo TkDInfo
 #endif
 
+/*
+ * For compatibility with Tk 4.0 through 8.4.x, we allow tabs to be
+ * mis-specified with non-increasing values. These are converted into tabs
+ * which are the equivalent of at least a character width apart.
+ */
+
+#if (TK_MAJOR_VERSION < 9)
+#define _TK_ALLOW_DECREASING_TABS
+#endif
+
 #include "tkText.h"
 
 /*
- * Custom options for handling "-state"
+ * Used to avoid having to allocate and deallocate arrays on the fly for
+ * commonly used functions. Must be > 0.
+ */
+
+#define PIXEL_CLIENTS 5
+
+/*
+ * The 'TkTextState' enum in tkText.h is used to define a type for the -state
+ * option of the Text widget. These values are used as indices into the string
+ * table below.
  */
 
-static Tk_CustomOption stateOption = {
-    (Tk_OptionParseProc *) TkStateParseProc,
-    TkStatePrintProc, (ClientData) NULL /* only "normal" and "disabled" */
+static const char *const stateStrings[] = {
+    "disabled", "normal", NULL
 };
 
 /*
- * Information used to parse text configuration options:
+ * The 'TkWrapMode' enum in tkText.h is used to define a type for the -wrap
+ * option of the Text widget. These values are used as indices into the string
+ * table below.
  */
 
-static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, "-autoseparators", "autoSeparators",
-        "AutoSeparators", DEF_TEXT_AUTO_SEPARATORS,
-        Tk_Offset(TkText, autoSeparators), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
-	DEF_TEXT_BG_COLOR, Tk_Offset(TkText, border), TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
-	DEF_TEXT_BG_MONO, Tk_Offset(TkText, border), TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY},
-    {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bd", "borderWidth", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-bg", "background", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_TEXT_BORDER_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkText, borderWidth), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
-	DEF_TEXT_CURSOR, Tk_Offset(TkText, cursor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection",
-	"ExportSelection", DEF_TEXT_EXPORT_SELECTION,
-	Tk_Offset(TkText, exportSelection), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
-	DEF_TEXT_FONT, Tk_Offset(TkText, tkfont), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
-	DEF_TEXT_FG, Tk_Offset(TkText, fgColor), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height",
-	DEF_TEXT_HEIGHT, Tk_Offset(TkText, height), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
-	"HighlightBackground", DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT_BG,
-	Tk_Offset(TkText, highlightBgColorPtr), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
-	DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT, Tk_Offset(TkText, highlightColorPtr), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
-	"HighlightThickness",
-	DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkText, highlightWidth), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-insertbackground", "insertBackground", "Foreground",
-	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BG, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertBorder), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BD_COLOR, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertBorderWidth),
-	TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BD_MONO, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertBorderWidth),
-	TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY},
-    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-insertofftime", "insertOffTime", "OffTime",
-	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_OFF_TIME, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertOffTime), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-insertontime", "insertOnTime", "OnTime",
-	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_ON_TIME, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertOnTime), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-insertwidth", "insertWidth", "InsertWidth",
-	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertWidth), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-maxundo", "maxUndo", "MaxUndo",
-	DEF_TEXT_MAX_UNDO, Tk_Offset(TkText, maxUndo), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
-	DEF_TEXT_PADX, Tk_Offset(TkText, padX), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad",
-	DEF_TEXT_PADY, Tk_Offset(TkText, padY), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
-	DEF_TEXT_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(TkText, relief), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground",
-	DEF_TEXT_SELECT_COLOR, Tk_Offset(TkText, selBorder),
-	TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground",
-	DEF_TEXT_SELECT_MONO, Tk_Offset(TkText, selBorder),
-	TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_TEXT_SELECT_BD_COLOR, Tk_Offset(TkText, selBdString),
-	TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_TEXT_SELECT_BD_MONO, Tk_Offset(TkText, selBdString),
-	TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background",
-	DEF_TEXT_SELECT_FG_COLOR, Tk_Offset(TkText, selFgColorPtr),
-	TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background",
-	DEF_TEXT_SELECT_FG_MONO, Tk_Offset(TkText, selFgColorPtr),
-	TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, "-setgrid", "setGrid", "SetGrid",
-	DEF_TEXT_SET_GRID, Tk_Offset(TkText, setGrid), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-spacing1", "spacing1", "Spacing",
-	DEF_TEXT_SPACING1, Tk_Offset(TkText, spacing1),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-spacing2", "spacing2", "Spacing",
-	DEF_TEXT_SPACING2, Tk_Offset(TkText, spacing2),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-spacing3", "spacing3", "Spacing",
-	DEF_TEXT_SPACING3, Tk_Offset(TkText, spacing3),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-state", "state", "State",
-	DEF_TEXT_STATE, Tk_Offset(TkText, state), 0, &stateOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-tabs", "tabs", "Tabs",
-	DEF_TEXT_TABS, Tk_Offset(TkText, tabOptionString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
-	DEF_TEXT_TAKE_FOCUS, Tk_Offset(TkText, takeFocus),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, "-undo", "undo", "Undo",
-        DEF_TEXT_UNDO, Tk_Offset(TkText, undo), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
-	DEF_TEXT_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(TkText, width), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-wrap", "wrap", "Wrap",
-	DEF_TEXT_WRAP, Tk_Offset(TkText, wrapMode), 0, &TkTextWrapModeOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-xscrollcommand", "xScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
-	DEF_TEXT_XSCROLL_COMMAND, Tk_Offset(TkText, xScrollCmd),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-yscrollcommand", "yScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
-	DEF_TEXT_YSCROLL_COMMAND, Tk_Offset(TkText, yScrollCmd),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+static const char *const wrapStrings[] = {
+    "char", "none", "word", NULL
 };
 
 /*
- * Boolean variable indicating whether or not special debugging code
- * should be executed.
+ * The 'TkTextTabStyle' enum in tkText.h is used to define a type for the
+ * -tabstyle option of the Text widget. These values are used as indices into
+ * the string table below.
  */
 
-int tkTextDebug = 0;
+static const char *const tabStyleStrings[] = {
+    "tabular", "wordprocessor", NULL
+};
 
 /*
- * Custom options for handling "-wrap":
+ * The following functions and custom option type are used to define the
+ * "line" option type, and thereby handle the text widget '-startline',
+ * '-endline' configuration options which are of that type.
+ *
+ * We do not need a 'freeProc' because all changes to these two options are
+ * handled through the TK_TEXT_LINE_RANGE flag in the optionSpecs list, and
+ * the internal storage is just a pointer, which therefore doesn't need
+ * freeing.
  */
 
-static int		WrapModeParseProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+static int		SetLineStartEnd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset));
-static char *		WrapModePrintProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset,
-			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
-
-Tk_CustomOption TkTextWrapModeOption = {
-    WrapModeParseProc,
-    WrapModePrintProc,
-    (ClientData) NULL
+			    Tcl_Obj **value, char *recordPtr,
+			    int internalOffset, char *oldInternalPtr,
+			    int flags);
+static Tcl_Obj *	GetLineStartEnd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *recordPtr,
+			    int internalOffset);
+static void		RestoreLineStartEnd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr,
+			    char *oldInternalPtr);
+static int		ObjectIsEmpty(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+
+static const Tk_ObjCustomOption lineOption = {
+    "line",			/* name */
+    SetLineStartEnd,		/* setProc */
+    GetLineStartEnd,		/* getProc */
+    RestoreLineStartEnd,	/* restoreProc */
+    NULL,			/* freeProc */
+    0
 };
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
- *
- * WrapModeParseProc --
- *
- *	This procedure is invoked during option processing to handle
- *	"-wrap" options for text widgets.
- *
- * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.
- *
- * Side effects:
- *	The wrap mode for a given item gets replaced by the wrap mode
- *	indicated in the value argument.
- *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ * Information used to parse text configuration options:
  */
 
-static int
-WrapModeParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* some flags.*/
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for reporting errors. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    CONST char *value;			/* Value of option (list of tag
-					 * names). */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item. */
-{
-    int c;
-    size_t length;
+static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-autoseparators", "autoSeparators",
+	"AutoSeparators", DEF_TEXT_AUTO_SEPARATORS, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(TkText, autoSeparators), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
+	DEF_TEXT_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, border),
+	0, (ClientData) DEF_TEXT_BG_MONO, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth",
+	TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-blockcursor", "blockCursor",
+	"BlockCursor", DEF_TEXT_BLOCK_CURSOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(TkText, insertCursorType), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
+	DEF_TEXT_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, borderWidth),
+	0, 0, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
+    {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
+	DEF_TEXT_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, cursor),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-endline", NULL, NULL,
+	 NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, end), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
+	 (ClientData) &lineOption, TK_TEXT_LINE_RANGE},
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection",
+	"ExportSelection", DEF_TEXT_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(TkText, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL,
+	NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
+	DEF_TEXT_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, tkfont), 0, 0,
+	TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
+	DEF_TEXT_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, fgColor), 0,
+	0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height",
+	DEF_TEXT_HEIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, height), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
+	"HighlightBackground", DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT_BG,
+	-1, Tk_Offset(TkText, highlightBgColorPtr),
+	0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
+	DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, highlightColorPtr),
+	0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
+	"HighlightThickness", DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(TkText, highlightWidth), 0, 0, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-inactiveselectbackground","inactiveSelectBackground",
+	"Foreground",
+	DEF_TEXT_INACTIVE_SELECT_COLOR,
+	-1, Tk_Offset(TkText, inactiveSelBorder),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, (ClientData) DEF_TEXT_SELECT_MONO, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-insertbackground", "insertBackground", "Foreground",
+	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BG,
+	-1, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertBorder),
+	0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth",
+	"BorderWidth", DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BD_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(TkText, insertBorderWidth), 0,
+	(ClientData) DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertofftime", "insertOffTime", "OffTime",
+	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_OFF_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertOffTime),
+	0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertontime", "insertOnTime", "OnTime",
+	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_ON_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertOnTime),
+	0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertwidth", "insertWidth", "InsertWidth",
+	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertWidth),
+	0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-maxundo", "maxUndo", "MaxUndo",
+	DEF_TEXT_MAX_UNDO, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, maxUndo), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
+	DEF_TEXT_PADX, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, padX), 0, 0,
+	TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad",
+	DEF_TEXT_PADY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, padY), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
+	DEF_TEXT_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, relief), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground",
+	DEF_TEXT_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, selBorder),
+	0, (ClientData) DEF_TEXT_SELECT_MONO, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth",
+	"BorderWidth", DEF_TEXT_SELECT_BD_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(TkText, selBorderWidthPtr),
+	Tk_Offset(TkText, selBorderWidth),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, (ClientData) DEF_TEXT_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background",
+	DEF_TEXT_SELECT_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, selFgColorPtr),
+	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, (ClientData) DEF_TEXT_SELECT_FG_MONO, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-setgrid", "setGrid", "SetGrid",
+	DEF_TEXT_SET_GRID, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, setGrid), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-spacing1", "spacing1", "Spacing",
+	DEF_TEXT_SPACING1, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, spacing1),
+	TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, 0 , TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY },
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-spacing2", "spacing2", "Spacing",
+	DEF_TEXT_SPACING2, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, spacing2),
+	TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, 0 , TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY },
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-spacing3", "spacing3", "Spacing",
+	DEF_TEXT_SPACING3, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, spacing3),
+	TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, 0 , TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY },
+    {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-startline", NULL, NULL,
+	 NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, start), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
+	 (ClientData) &lineOption, TK_TEXT_LINE_RANGE},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
+	DEF_TEXT_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, state),
+	0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tabs", "tabs", "Tabs",
+	DEF_TEXT_TABS, Tk_Offset(TkText, tabOptionPtr), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-tabstyle", "tabStyle", "TabStyle",
+	DEF_TEXT_TABSTYLE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, tabStyle),
+	0, (ClientData) tabStyleStrings, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
+	DEF_TEXT_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, takeFocus),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-undo", "undo", "Undo",
+	DEF_TEXT_UNDO, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, undo), 0, 0 , 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
+	DEF_TEXT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, width), 0, 0,
+	TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-wrap", "wrap", "Wrap",
+	DEF_TEXT_WRAP, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, wrapMode),
+	0, (ClientData) wrapStrings, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-xscrollcommand", "xScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
+	DEF_TEXT_XSCROLL_COMMAND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, xScrollCmd),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-yscrollcommand", "yScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
+	DEF_TEXT_YSCROLL_COMMAND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, yScrollCmd),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0}
+};
 
-    register TkWrapMode *wrapPtr = (TkWrapMode *) (widgRec + offset);
+/*
+ * These three typedefs, the structure and the SearchPerform, SearchCore
+ * functions below are used for line-based searches of the text widget, and,
+ * in particular, to handle multi-line matching even though the text widget is
+ * a single-line based data structure. They are completely abstracted away
+ * from the Text widget internals, however, so could easily be re-used with
+ * any line-based entity to provide multi-line matching.
+ *
+ * We have abstracted this code away from the text widget to try to keep Tk as
+ * modular as possible.
+ */
 
-    if(value == NULL || *value == 0) {
-	*wrapPtr = TEXT_WRAPMODE_NULL;
-	return TCL_OK;
-    }
+struct SearchSpec;	/* Forward declaration. */
+
+typedef ClientData	SearchAddLineProc(int lineNum,
+			    struct SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *theLine, int *lenPtr,
+			    int *extraLinesPtr);
+typedef int		SearchMatchProc(int lineNum,
+			    struct SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr,
+			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Obj *theLine,
+			    int matchOffset, int matchLength);
+typedef int		SearchLineIndexProc(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, struct SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr,
+			    int *linePosPtr, int *offsetPosPtr);
+
+typedef struct SearchSpec {
+    int exact;			/* Whether search is exact or regexp. */
+    int noCase;			/* Case-insenstivive? */
+    int noLineStop;		/* If not set, a regexp search will use the
+				 * TCL_REG_NLSTOP flag. */
+    int overlap;		/* If set, results from multiple searches
+				 * (-all) are allowed to overlap each
+				 * other. */
+    int strictLimits;		/* If set, matches must be completely inside
+				 * the from,to range. Otherwise the limits
+				 * only apply to the start of each match. */
+    int all;			/* Whether all or the first match should be
+				 * reported. */
+    int startLine;		/* First line to examine. */
+    int startOffset;		/* Index in first line to start at. */
+    int stopLine;		/* Last line to examine, or -1 when we search
+				 * all available text. */
+    int stopOffset;		/* Index to stop at, provided stopLine is not
+				 * -1. */
+    int numLines;		/* Total lines which are available. */
+    int backwards;		/* Searching forwards or backwards. */
+    Tcl_Obj *varPtr;		/* If non-NULL, store length(s) of match(es)
+				 * in this variable. */
+    Tcl_Obj *countPtr;		/* Keeps track of currently found lengths. */
+    Tcl_Obj *resPtr;		/* Keeps track of currently found locations */
+    int searchElide;		/* Search in hidden text as well. */
+    SearchAddLineProc *addLineProc;
+				/* Function to call when we need to add
+				 * another line to the search string so far */
+    SearchMatchProc *foundMatchProc;
+				/* Function to call when we have found a
+				 * match. */
+    SearchLineIndexProc *lineIndexProc;
+				/* Function to call when we have found a
+				 * match. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about structure being searched,
+				 * in this case a text widget. */
+} SearchSpec;
 
-    c = value[0];
-    length = strlen(value);
+/*
+ * The text-widget-independent functions which actually perform the search,
+ * handling both regexp and exact searches.
+ */
 
-    if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(value, "char", length) == 0)) {
-	*wrapPtr = TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR;
-	return TCL_OK;
-    }
-    if ((c == 'n') && (strncmp(value, "none", length) == 0)) {
-	*wrapPtr = TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE;
-	return TCL_OK;
-    }
-    if ((c == 'w') && (strncmp(value, "word", length) == 0)) {
-	*wrapPtr = TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD;
-	return TCL_OK;
-    }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad wrap mode \"", value,
-	    "\": must be char, none, or word",
-	    (char *) NULL);
-    *wrapPtr = TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR;
-    return TCL_ERROR;
-}
+static int		SearchCore(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr, Tcl_Obj *patObj);
+static int		SearchPerform(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr, Tcl_Obj *patObj,
+			    Tcl_Obj *fromPtr, Tcl_Obj *toPtr);
 
 /*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
- *
- * WrapModePrintProc --
- *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk configuration code
- *	to produce a printable string for the "-wrap" configuration
- *	option for canvas items.
- *
- * Results:
- *	The return value is a string describing the state for
- *	the item referred to by "widgRec".  In addition, *freeProcPtr
- *	is filled in with the address of a procedure to call to free
- *	the result string when it's no longer needed (or NULL to
- *	indicate that the string doesn't need to be freed).
- *
- * Side effects:
- *	None.
- *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ * Boolean variable indicating whether or not special debugging code should be
+ * executed.
  */
 
-static char *
-WrapModePrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Ignored. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Ignored. */
-    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr;		/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
-					 * information about how to reclaim
-					 * storage for return string. */
-{
-    register TkWrapMode *wrapPtr = (TkWrapMode *) (widgRec + offset);
-
-    if (*wrapPtr==TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR) {
-	return "char";
-    } else if (*wrapPtr==TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE) {
-	return "none";
-    } else if (*wrapPtr==TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD) {
-	return "word";
-    } else {
-	return "";
-    }
-}
+int tkTextDebug = 0;
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static int		ConfigureText _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkText *textPtr, int argc, CONST char **argv,
-			    int flags));
-static int		DeleteChars _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    CONST char *index1String, CONST char *index2String,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr1, TkTextIndex *indexPtr2));
-static void		DestroyText _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static void		InsertChars _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, CONST char *string));
-static void		TextBlinkProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		TextCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		TextEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int		TextFetchSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes));
-static int		TextIndexSortProc _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST VOID *first,
-			    CONST VOID *second));
-static int		TextSearchCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-static int		TextEditCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-static int		TextWidgetCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-static void		TextWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData instanceData));
-static int		TextDumpCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-static void		DumpLine _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, 
-			    TkText *textPtr, int what, TkTextLine *linePtr,
-			    int start, int end, int lineno,
-			    CONST char *command));
-static int		DumpSegment _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, char *key,
-			    char *value, CONST char * command,
-			    TkTextIndex *index, int what));
-static int		TextEditUndo _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr));
-static int		TextEditRedo _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr));
-static void		TextGetText _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextIndex * index1,
-			    TkTextIndex * index2, Tcl_DString *dsPtr));
+static int		ConfigureText(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkText *textPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		DeleteIndexRange(TkSharedText *sharedPtr,
+			    TkText *textPtr, const TkTextIndex *indexPtr1,
+			    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr2, int viewUpdate);
+static int		CountIndices(const TkText *textPtr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr1,
+			    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr2,
+			    TkTextCountType type);
+static void		DestroyText(TkText *textPtr);
+static int		InsertChars(TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr,
+			    TkText *textPtr, TkTextIndex *indexPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *stringPtr, int viewUpdate);
+static void		TextBlinkProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		TextCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static int		CreateWidget(TkSharedText *sharedPtr, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, const TkText *parent,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		TextEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		TextFetchSelection(ClientData clientData, int offset,
+			    char *buffer, int maxBytes);
+static int		TextIndexSortProc(const void *first,
+			    const void *second);
+static int		TextInsertCmd(TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr,
+			    TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[],
+			    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int viewUpdate);
+static int		TextReplaceCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    const TkTextIndex *indexFromPtr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *indexToPtr,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int viewUpdate);
+static int		TextSearchCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		TextEditCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		TextWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		SharedTextObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		TextWorldChangedCallback(ClientData instanceData);
+static void		TextWorldChanged(TkText *textPtr, int mask);
+static int		TextDumpCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		DumpLine(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkText *textPtr,
+			    int what, TkTextLine *linePtr, int start, int end,
+			    int lineno, Tcl_Obj *command);
+static int		DumpSegment(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    const char *key, const char *value,
+			    Tcl_Obj *command, const TkTextIndex *index,
+			    int what);
+static int		TextEditUndo(TkText *textPtr);
+static int		TextEditRedo(TkText *textPtr);
+static Tcl_Obj *	TextGetText(const TkText *textPtr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *index1,
+			    const TkTextIndex *index2, int visibleOnly);
 static void		GenerateModifiedEvent(TkText *textPtr);
-static void		updateDirtyFlag _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr));
+static void		UpdateDirtyFlag(TkSharedText *sharedPtr);
+static void		TextPushUndoAction(TkText *textPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *undoString, int insert,
+			    const TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *index2Ptr);
+static int		TextSearchIndexInLine(const SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int byteIndex);
+static int		TextPeerCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static TkUndoProc	TextUndoRedoCallback;
+
+/*
+ * Declarations of the three search procs required by the multi-line search
+ * routines.
+ */
+
+static SearchMatchProc		TextSearchFoundMatch;
+static SearchAddLineProc	TextSearchAddNextLine;
+static SearchLineIndexProc	TextSearchGetLineIndex;
 
 /*
- * The structure below defines text class behavior by means of procedures
- * that can be invoked from generic window code.
+ * The structure below defines text class behavior by means of functions that
+ * can be invoked from generic window code.
  */
 
 static Tk_ClassProcs textClass = {
     sizeof(Tk_ClassProcs),	/* size */
-    TextWorldChanged,		/* worldChangedProc */
+    TextWorldChangedCallback,	/* worldChangedProc */
+    NULL,					/* createProc */
+    NULL					/* modalProc */
 };
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_TextCmd --
+ * Tk_TextObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "text" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "text" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -353,85 +437,201 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs textClass = {
  */
 
 int
-Tk_TextCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+Tk_TextObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
-    Tk_Window new;
-    register TkText *textPtr;
-    TkTextIndex startIndex;
 
-    if (argc < 2) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		argv[0], " pathName ?options?\"", (char *) NULL);
+    if (objc < 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "pathName ?options?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
+    return CreateWidget(NULL, tkwin, interp, NULL, objc, objv);
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * CreateWidget --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "text" Tcl command, (when
+ *	called by Tk_TextObjCmd) and the "$text peer create" text widget
+ *	sub-command (called from TextPeerCmd).
+ *
+ *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result, places the name of the widget created into the
+ *	interp's result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	See the user documentation.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+CreateWidget(
+    TkSharedText *sharedPtr,	/* Shared widget info, or NULL. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    const TkText *parent,	/* If non-NULL then take default start, end
+				 * from this parent. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
+{
+    register TkText *textPtr;
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
+    TkTextIndex startIndex;
+    Tk_Window newWin;
+
     /*
      * Create the window.
      */
 
-    new = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, argv[1], (char *) NULL);
-    if (new == NULL) {
+    newWin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[1]),
+	    NULL);
+    if (newWin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the text widget and initialize everything to zero,
-     * then set the necessary initial (non-NULL) values.
+     * Create the text widget and initialize everything to zero, then set the
+     * necessary initial (non-NULL) values. It is important that the 'set' tag
+     * and 'insert', 'current' mark pointers are all NULL to start.
      */
 
     textPtr = (TkText *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkText));
-    memset((VOID *) textPtr, 0, sizeof(TkText));
+    memset(textPtr, 0, sizeof(TkText));
 
-    textPtr->tkwin = new;
-    textPtr->display = Tk_Display(new);
+    textPtr->tkwin = newWin;
+    textPtr->display = Tk_Display(newWin);
     textPtr->interp = interp;
-    textPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateCommand(interp,
-	    Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), TextWidgetCmd,
+    textPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
+	    Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), TextWidgetObjCmd,
 	    (ClientData) textPtr, TextCmdDeletedProc);
-    textPtr->tree = TkBTreeCreate(textPtr);
-    Tcl_InitHashTable(&textPtr->tagTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
-    Tcl_InitHashTable(&textPtr->markTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
-    Tcl_InitHashTable(&textPtr->windowTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
-    Tcl_InitHashTable(&textPtr->imageTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
-    textPtr->state = TK_STATE_NORMAL;
+
+    if (sharedPtr == NULL) {
+	sharedPtr = (TkSharedText *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkSharedText));
+	memset(sharedPtr, 0, sizeof(TkSharedText));
+
+	sharedPtr->refCount = 0;
+	sharedPtr->peers = NULL;
+	sharedPtr->tree = TkBTreeCreate(sharedPtr);
+
+	Tcl_InitHashTable(&sharedPtr->tagTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+	Tcl_InitHashTable(&sharedPtr->markTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+	Tcl_InitHashTable(&sharedPtr->windowTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+	Tcl_InitHashTable(&sharedPtr->imageTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+	sharedPtr->undoStack = TkUndoInitStack(interp,0);
+	sharedPtr->undo = 1;
+	sharedPtr->isDirty = 0;
+	sharedPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_NORMAL;
+	sharedPtr->autoSeparators = 1;
+	sharedPtr->lastEditMode = TK_TEXT_EDIT_OTHER;
+	sharedPtr->stateEpoch = 0;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Add the new widget to the shared list.
+     */
+
+    textPtr->sharedTextPtr = sharedPtr;
+    sharedPtr->refCount++;
+    textPtr->next = sharedPtr->peers;
+    sharedPtr->peers = textPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * This refCount will be held until DestroyText is called. Note also that
+     * the later call to 'TkTextCreateDInfo' will add more refCounts.
+     */
+
+    textPtr->refCount = 1;
+
+    /*
+     * Specify start and end lines in the B-tree. The default is the same as
+     * the parent, but this can be adjusted to display more or less if the
+     * start, end where given as configuration options.
+     */
+
+    if (parent != NULL) {
+	textPtr->start = parent->start;
+	textPtr->end = parent->end;
+    } else {
+	textPtr->start = NULL;
+	textPtr->end = NULL;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Register with the B-tree. In some sense it would be best if we could do
+     * this later (after configuration options), so that any changes to
+     * start,end do not require a total recalculation.
+     */
+
+    TkBTreeAddClient(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr, textPtr->charHeight);
+
+    textPtr->state = TK_TEXT_STATE_NORMAL;
     textPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
     textPtr->cursor = None;
     textPtr->charWidth = 1;
+    textPtr->charHeight = 10;
     textPtr->wrapMode = TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR;
-    textPtr->prevWidth = Tk_Width(new);
-    textPtr->prevHeight = Tk_Height(new);
+    textPtr->prevWidth = Tk_Width(newWin);
+    textPtr->prevHeight = Tk_Height(newWin);
+
+    /*
+     * This will add refCounts to textPtr.
+     */
+
     TkTextCreateDInfo(textPtr);
-    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, 0, 0, &startIndex);
+    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0,
+	    &startIndex);
     TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &startIndex, 0);
     textPtr->exportSelection = 1;
     textPtr->pickEvent.type = LeaveNotify;
-    textPtr->undoStack = TkUndoInitStack(interp,0);
-    textPtr->undo = 1;
-    textPtr->isDirty = 0;
-    textPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_NORMAL;
-    textPtr->autoSeparators = 1;
-    textPtr->lastEditMode = TK_TEXT_EDIT_OTHER;
+    textPtr->undo = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo;
+    textPtr->maxUndo = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->maxUndo;
+    textPtr->autoSeparators = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators;
+    textPtr->tabOptionPtr = NULL;
 
     /*
      * Create the "sel" tag and the "current" and "insert" marks.
      */
 
-    textPtr->selTagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, "sel");
-    textPtr->selTagPtr->reliefString =
-	    (char *) ckalloc(sizeof(DEF_TEXT_SELECT_RELIEF));
+    textPtr->selBorder = NULL;
+    textPtr->inactiveSelBorder = NULL;
+    textPtr->selBorderWidth = 0;
+    textPtr->selBorderWidthPtr = NULL;
+    textPtr->selFgColorPtr = NULL;
+
+    /*
+     * Note: it is important that textPtr->selTagPtr is NULL before this
+     * initial call.
+     */
+
+    textPtr->selTagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, "sel", NULL);
+    textPtr->selTagPtr->reliefString = (char *)
+	    ckalloc(sizeof(DEF_TEXT_SELECT_RELIEF));
     strcpy(textPtr->selTagPtr->reliefString, DEF_TEXT_SELECT_RELIEF);
-    Tk_GetRelief(interp, DEF_TEXT_SELECT_RELIEF, &(textPtr->selTagPtr->relief));
+    Tk_GetRelief(interp, DEF_TEXT_SELECT_RELIEF, &textPtr->selTagPtr->relief);
     textPtr->currentMarkPtr = TkTextSetMark(textPtr, "current", &startIndex);
     textPtr->insertMarkPtr = TkTextSetMark(textPtr, "insert", &startIndex);
 
+    /*
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, the cached pointer will be returned.
+     */
+
+    optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
+
     Tk_SetClass(textPtr->tkwin, "Text");
     Tk_SetClassProcs(textPtr->tkwin, &textClass, (ClientData) textPtr);
+    textPtr->optionTable = optionTable;
+
     Tk_CreateEventHandler(textPtr->tkwin,
 	    ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
 	    TextEventProc, (ClientData) textPtr);
@@ -441,23 +641,30 @@ Tk_TextCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 	    TkTextBindProc, (ClientData) textPtr);
     Tk_CreateSelHandler(textPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING,
 	    TextFetchSelection, (ClientData) textPtr, XA_STRING);
-    if (ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, argc-2, argv+2, 0) != TCL_OK) {
+
+    if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) textPtr, optionTable, textPtr->tkwin)
+	    != TCL_OK) {
+	Tk_DestroyWindow(textPtr->tkwin);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, objc-2, objv+2) != TCL_OK) {
 	Tk_DestroyWindow(textPtr->tkwin);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    Tcl_SetResult(interp, Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), TCL_STATIC);
 
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin),-1));
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * TextWidgetCmd --
+ * TextWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a text widget.  See the user
- *	documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a text widget. See the user documentation for details on what it
+ *	does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -469,88 +676,118 @@ Tk_TextCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  */
 
 static int
-TextWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+TextWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     register TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData;
-    int c, result = TCL_OK;
-    size_t length;
-    TkTextIndex index1, index2;
+    int result = TCL_OK;
+    int index;
+
+    static const char *optionStrings[] = {
+	"bbox", "cget", "compare", "configure", "count", "debug", "delete",
+	"dlineinfo", "dump", "edit", "get", "image", "index", "insert",
+	"mark", "peer", "replace", "scan", "search", "see", "tag", "window",
+	"xview", "yview", NULL
+    };
+    enum options {
+	TEXT_BBOX, TEXT_CGET, TEXT_COMPARE, TEXT_CONFIGURE, TEXT_COUNT,
+	TEXT_DEBUG, TEXT_DELETE, TEXT_DLINEINFO, TEXT_DUMP, TEXT_EDIT,
+	TEXT_GET, TEXT_IMAGE, TEXT_INDEX, TEXT_INSERT, TEXT_MARK,
+	TEXT_PEER, TEXT_REPLACE, TEXT_SCAN, TEXT_SEARCH, TEXT_SEE,
+	TEXT_TAG, TEXT_WINDOW, TEXT_XVIEW, TEXT_YVIEW
+    };
+
+    if (objc < 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
 
-    if (argc < 2) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		argv[0], " option ?arg arg ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], optionStrings, "option", 0,
+	    &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) textPtr);
-    c = argv[1][0];
-    length = strlen(argv[1]);
-    if ((c == 'b') && (strncmp(argv[1], "bbox", length) == 0)) {
+    textPtr->refCount++;
+
+    switch ((enum options) index) {
+    case TEXT_BBOX: {
 	int x, y, width, height;
+	const TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
 
-	if (argc != 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " bbox index\"", (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[2], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
+	indexPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
+	if (indexPtr == NULL) {
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	if (TkTextCharBbox(textPtr, &index1, &x, &y, &width, &height) == 0) {
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
-	    
-	    sprintf(buf, "%d %d %d %d", x, y, width, height);
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-	}
-    } else if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(argv[1], "cget", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 2)) {
-	if (argc != 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " cget option\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	if (TkTextIndexBbox(textPtr, indexPtr, &x, &y, &width, &height,
+		NULL) == 0) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(x));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(y));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(width));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(height));
+
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) textPtr,
+		    textPtr->optionTable, objv[2], textPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
+		goto done;
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+		result = TCL_OK;
+	    }
 	}
-	result = Tk_ConfigureValue(interp, textPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
-		(char *) textPtr, argv[2], 0);
-    } else if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(argv[1], "compare", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 3)) {
+	break;
+    case TEXT_COMPARE: {
 	int relation, value;
-	CONST char *p;
+	const char *p;
+	const TkTextIndex *index1Ptr, *index2Ptr;
 
-	if (argc != 5) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " compare index1 op index2\"", (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc != 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index1 op index2");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	if ((TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[2], &index1) != TCL_OK)
-		|| (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[4], &index2)
-		!= TCL_OK)) {
+	index1Ptr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
+	index2Ptr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[4]);
+	if (index1Ptr == NULL || index2Ptr == NULL) {
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	relation = TkTextIndexCmp(&index1, &index2);
-	p = argv[3];
+	relation = TkTextIndexCmp(index1Ptr, index2Ptr);
+	p = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
 	if (p[0] == '<') {
-		value = (relation < 0);
+	    value = (relation < 0);
 	    if ((p[1] == '=') && (p[2] == 0)) {
 		value = (relation <= 0);
 	    } else if (p[1] != 0) {
-		compareError:
+	    compareError:
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad comparison operator \"",
-			argv[3], "\": must be <, <=, ==, >=, >, or !=",
-			(char *) NULL);
+			Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+			"\": must be <, <=, ==, >=, >, or !=", NULL);
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
 	} else if (p[0] == '>') {
-		value = (relation > 0);
+	    value = (relation > 0);
 	    if ((p[1] == '=') && (p[2] == 0)) {
 		value = (relation >= 0);
 	    } else if (p[1] != 0) {
@@ -563,104 +800,347 @@ TextWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 	} else {
 	    goto compareError;
 	}
-	Tcl_SetResult(interp, ((value) ? "1" : "0"), TCL_STATIC);
-    } else if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(argv[1], "configure", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 3)) {
-	if (argc == 2) {
-	    result = Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, textPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
-		    (char *) textPtr, (char *) NULL, 0);
-	} else if (argc == 3) {
-	    result = Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, textPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
-		    (char *) textPtr, argv[2], 0);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(value));
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_CONFIGURE:
+	if (objc <= 3) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) textPtr,
+		    textPtr->optionTable, ((objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL),
+		    textPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
+		goto done;
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	    }
 	} else {
-	    result = ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, argc-2, argv+2,
-		    TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
-	}
-    } else if ((c == 'd') && (strncmp(argv[1], "debug", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 3)) {
-	if (argc > 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " debug boolean\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    result = ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, objc-2, objv+2);
+	}
+	break;
+    case TEXT_COUNT: {
+	const TkTextIndex *indexFromPtr, *indexToPtr;
+	int i, found = 0, update = 0;
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr = NULL;
+
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options? index1 index2");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+
+	indexFromPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[objc-2]);
+	if (indexFromPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	indexToPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[objc-1]);
+	if (indexToPtr == NULL) {
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	if (argc == 2) {
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, ((tkBTreeDebug) ? "1" : "0"), TCL_STATIC);
+
+	for (i = 2; i < objc-2; i++) {
+	    int value, length;
+	    const char *option = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
+	    char c;
+
+	    if (length < 2 || option[0] != '-') {
+	    badOption:
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option \"",
+			Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
+			"\" must be -chars, -displaychars, -displayindices, ",
+			"-displaylines, -indices, -lines, -update, ",
+			"-xpixels, or -ypixels", NULL);
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
+		goto done;
+	    }
+	    c = option[1];
+	    if (c == 'c' && !strncmp("-chars", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr,
+			COUNT_CHARS);
+	    } else if (c == 'd' && (length > 8)
+		    && !strncmp("-displaychars", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr,
+			COUNT_DISPLAY_CHARS);
+	    } else if (c == 'd' && (length > 8)
+		    && !strncmp("-displayindices", option,(unsigned)length)) {
+		value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr,
+			COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+	    } else if (c == 'd' && (length > 8)
+		    && !strncmp("-displaylines", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		TkTextLine *fromPtr, *lastPtr;
+		TkTextIndex index;
+
+		int compare = TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, indexToPtr);
+		value = 0;
+
+		if (compare == 0) {
+		    goto countDone;
+		}
+
+		if (compare > 0) {
+		    const TkTextIndex *tmpPtr = indexFromPtr;
+
+		    indexFromPtr = indexToPtr;
+		    indexToPtr = tmpPtr;
+		}
+
+		lastPtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+			textPtr,
+			TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,textPtr));
+		fromPtr = indexFromPtr->linePtr;
+		if (fromPtr == lastPtr) {
+		    goto countDone;
+		}
+
+		/*
+		 * Caution: we must NEVER call TkTextUpdateOneLine with the
+		 * last artificial line in the widget.
+		 */
+
+		index = *indexFromPtr;
+		index.byteIndex = 0;
+
+		/*
+		 * We're going to count up all display lines in the logical
+		 * line of 'indexFromPtr' up to, but not including the logical
+		 * line of 'indexToPtr', and then subtract off what we didn't
+		 * want from 'from' and add on what we didn't count from 'to.
+		 */
+
+		while (index.linePtr != indexToPtr->linePtr) {
+		    value += TkTextUpdateOneLine(textPtr, fromPtr,0,&index,0);
+
+		    /*
+		     * We might have skipped past indexToPtr, if we have
+		     * multiple logical lines in a single display line.
+		     */
+		    if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index,indexToPtr) > 0) {
+			break;
+		    }
+		}
+
+		/*
+		 * Now we need to adjust the count to add on the number of
+		 * display lines in the last logical line, and subtract off
+		 * the number of display lines overcounted in the first
+		 * logical line. This logic is still ok if both indices are in
+		 * the same logical line.
+		 */
+
+		index.linePtr = indexFromPtr->linePtr;
+		index.byteIndex = 0;
+		while (1) {
+		    TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, &index, 1, NULL);
+		    if (index.byteIndex >= indexFromPtr->byteIndex) {
+			break;
+		    }
+		    TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &index, 1, &index);
+		    value--;
+
+		}
+		if (indexToPtr->linePtr != lastPtr) {
+		    index.linePtr = indexToPtr->linePtr;
+		    index.byteIndex = 0;
+		    while (1) {
+			TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, &index, 1, NULL);
+			if (index.byteIndex >= indexToPtr->byteIndex) {
+			    break;
+			}
+			TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &index, 1, &index);
+			value++;
+		    }
+		}
+
+		if (compare > 0) {
+		    value = -value;
+		}
+	    } else if (c == 'i'
+		    && !strncmp("-indices", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr,
+			COUNT_INDICES);
+	    } else if (c == 'l'
+		    && !strncmp("-lines", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		value = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexToPtr->linePtr)
+			- TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexFromPtr->linePtr);
+	    } else if (c == 'u'
+		    && !strncmp("-update", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		update = 1;
+		continue;
+	    } else if (c == 'x'
+		    && !strncmp("-xpixels", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		int x1, x2;
+		TkTextIndex index;
+
+		index = *indexFromPtr;
+		TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, &index, 0, &x1);
+		index = *indexToPtr;
+		TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, &index, 0, &x2);
+		value = x2 - x1;
+	    } else if (c == 'y'
+		    && !strncmp("-ypixels", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		if (update) {
+		    TkTextUpdateLineMetrics(textPtr,
+			    TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexFromPtr->linePtr),
+			    TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexToPtr->linePtr), -1);
+		}
+		value = TkTextIndexYPixels(textPtr, indexToPtr)
+			- TkTextIndexYPixels(textPtr, indexFromPtr);
+	    } else {
+		goto badOption;
+	    }
+
+	countDone:
+	    found++;
+	    if (found == 1) {
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(value));
+	    } else {
+		if (found == 2) {
+		    /*
+		     * Move the first item we put into the result into the
+		     * first element of the list object.
+		     */
+
+		    objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
+		    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
+			    Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
+		}
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, Tcl_NewIntObj(value));
+	    }
+	}
+
+	if (found == 0) {
+	    /*
+	     * Use the default '-indices'.
+	     */
+
+	    int value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr,
+		    COUNT_INDICES);
+
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(value));
+	} else if (found > 1) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_DEBUG:
+	if (objc > 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "boolean");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	if (objc == 2) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(tkBTreeDebug));
 	} else {
-	    if (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, argv[2], &tkBTreeDebug) != TCL_OK) {
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[2],
+		    &tkBTreeDebug) != TCL_OK) {
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
 	    tkTextDebug = tkBTreeDebug;
 	}
-    } else if ((c == 'd') && (strncmp(argv[1], "delete", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 3)) {
-	int i;
-
-	if (argc < 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " delete index1 ?index2 ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_DELETE:
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index1 ?index2 ...?");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	if (textPtr->state == TK_STATE_NORMAL) {
-	    if (argc < 5) {
+	if (textPtr->state == TK_TEXT_STATE_NORMAL) {
+	    if (objc < 5) {
 		/*
 		 * Simple case requires no predetermination of indices.
 		 */
-		result = DeleteChars(textPtr, argv[2],
-			(argc == 4) ? argv[3] : NULL, NULL, NULL);
+
+		const TkTextIndex *indexPtr1, *indexPtr2;
+
+		/*
+		 * Parse the starting and stopping indices.
+		 */
+
+		indexPtr1 = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(textPtr->interp, textPtr,
+			objv[2]);
+		if (indexPtr1 == NULL) {
+		    result = TCL_ERROR;
+		    goto done;
+		}
+		if (objc == 4) {
+		    indexPtr2 = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(textPtr->interp,
+			    textPtr, objv[3]);
+		    if (indexPtr2 == NULL) {
+			result = TCL_ERROR;
+			goto done;
+		    }
+		} else {
+		    indexPtr2 = NULL;
+		}
+		DeleteIndexRange(NULL, textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, 1);
 	    } else {
 		/*
 		 * Multi-index pair case requires that we prevalidate the
-		 * indices and sort from last to first so that deletes
-		 * occur in the exact (unshifted) text.  It also needs to
-		 * handle partial and fully overlapping ranges.  We have to
-		 * do this with multiple passes.
+		 * indices and sort from last to first so that deletes occur
+		 * in the exact (unshifted) text. It also needs to handle
+		 * partial and fully overlapping ranges. We have to do this
+		 * with multiple passes.
 		 */
+
 		TkTextIndex *indices, *ixStart, *ixEnd, *lastStart;
 		char *useIdx;
+		int i;
 
-		argc -= 2;
-		argv += 2;
+		objc -= 2;
+		objv += 2;
 		indices = (TkTextIndex *)
-		    ckalloc((argc + 1) * sizeof(TkTextIndex));
+			ckalloc((objc + 1) * sizeof(TkTextIndex));
 
 		/*
 		 * First pass verifies that all indices are valid.
 		 */
-		for (i = 0; i < argc; i++) {
-		    if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[i],
-			    &indices[i]) != TCL_OK) {
+
+		for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
+		    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr =
+			    TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[i]);
+
+		    if (indexPtr == NULL) {
 			result = TCL_ERROR;
 			ckfree((char *) indices);
 			goto done;
 		    }
+		    indices[i] = *indexPtr;
 		}
+
 		/*
 		 * Pad out the pairs evenly to make later code easier.
 		 */
-		if (argc & 1) {
+
+		if (objc & 1) {
 		    indices[i] = indices[i-1];
-		    TkTextIndexForwChars(&indices[i], 1, &indices[i]);
-		    argc++;
+		    TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, &indices[i], 1, &indices[i],
+			    COUNT_INDICES);
+		    objc++;
 		}
-		useIdx = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) argc);
-		memset(useIdx, 0, (unsigned) argc);
+		useIdx = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) objc);
+		memset(useIdx, 0, (unsigned) objc);
+
 		/*
-		 * Do a decreasing order sort so that we delete the end
-		 * ranges first to maintain index consistency.
+		 * Do a decreasing order sort so that we delete the end ranges
+		 * first to maintain index consistency.
 		 */
-		qsort((VOID *) indices, (unsigned) (argc / 2),
+
+		qsort(indices, (unsigned) objc / 2,
 			2 * sizeof(TkTextIndex), TextIndexSortProc);
 		lastStart = NULL;
+
 		/*
 		 * Second pass will handle bogus ranges (end < start) and
 		 * overlapping ranges.
 		 */
-		for (i = 0; i < argc; i += 2) {
+
+		for (i = 0; i < objc; i += 2) {
 		    ixStart = &indices[i];
-		    ixEnd   = &indices[i+1];
+		    ixEnd = &indices[i+1];
 		    if (TkTextIndexCmp(ixEnd, ixStart) <= 0) {
 			continue;
 		    }
@@ -670,13 +1150,15 @@ TextWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 			     * Start indices were equal, and the sort placed
 			     * the longest range first, so skip this one.
 			     */
+
 			    continue;
 			} else if (TkTextIndexCmp(lastStart, ixEnd) < 0) {
 			    /*
 			     * The next pair has a start range before the end
-			     * point of the last range.  Constrain the delete
+			     * point of the last range. Constrain the delete
 			     * range, but use the pointer values.
 			     */
+
 			    *ixEnd = *lastStart;
 			    if (TkTextIndexCmp(ixEnd, ixStart) <= 0) {
 				continue;
@@ -684,200 +1166,589 @@ TextWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
 			}
 		    }
 		    lastStart = ixStart;
-		    useIdx[i]   = 1;
+		    useIdx[i] = 1;
 		}
+
 		/*
-		 * Final pass take the input from the previous and deletes
-		 * the ranges which are flagged to be deleted.
+		 * Final pass take the input from the previous and deletes the
+		 * ranges which are flagged to be deleted.
 		 */
-		for (i = 0; i < argc; i += 2) {
+
+		for (i = 0; i < objc; i += 2) {
 		    if (useIdx[i]) {
 			/*
 			 * We don't need to check the return value because all
 			 * indices are preparsed above.
 			 */
-			DeleteChars(textPtr, NULL, NULL,
-				&indices[i], &indices[i+1]);
+
+			DeleteIndexRange(NULL, textPtr, &indices[i],
+				&indices[i+1], 1);
 		    }
 		}
 		ckfree((char *) indices);
 	    }
 	}
-    } else if ((c == 'd') && (strncmp(argv[1], "dlineinfo", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	break;
+    case TEXT_DLINEINFO: {
 	int x, y, width, height, base;
+	const TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
 
-	if (argc != 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " dlineinfo index\"", (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[2], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
+	indexPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
+	if (indexPtr == NULL) {
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	if (TkTextDLineInfo(textPtr, &index1, &x, &y, &width, &height, &base)
-		== 0) {
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 5];
-	    
-	    sprintf(buf, "%d %d %d %d %d", x, y, width, height, base);
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	if (TkTextDLineInfo(textPtr, indexPtr, &x, &y, &width, &height,
+		&base) == 0) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(x));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(y));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(width));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(height));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(base));
+
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj);
 	}
-    } else if ((c == 'e') && (strncmp(argv[1], "edit", length) == 0)) {
-        result = TextEditCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv);
-    } else if ((c == 'g') && (strncmp(argv[1], "get", length) == 0)) {
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_DUMP:
+	result = TextDumpCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_EDIT:
+	result = TextEditCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_GET: {
 	Tcl_Obj *objPtr = NULL;
-	Tcl_DString ds;
-	int i, found = 0;
+	int i, found = 0, visible = 0;
+	const char *name;
+	int length;
 
-	if (argc < 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " get index1 ?index2 ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "?-displaychars? ?--? index1 ?index2 ...?");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	for (i = 2; i < argc; i += 2) {
-	    if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[i], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
+
+	/*
+	 * Simple, restrictive argument parsing. The only options are -- and
+	 * -displaychars (or any unique prefix).
+	 */
+
+	i = 2;
+	if (objc > 3) {
+	    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
+	    if (length > 1 && name[0] == '-') {
+		if (strncmp("-displaychars", name, (unsigned)length)==0) {
+		    i++;
+		    visible = 1;
+		    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
+		}
+		if ((i < objc-1) && (length == 2) && !strcmp("--", name)) {
+		    i++;
+		}
 	    }
-	    if (i+1 == argc) {
-		index2 = index1;
-		TkTextIndexForwChars(&index2, 1, &index2);
-	    } else if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[i+1], &index2)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
+	}
+
+	for (; i < objc; i += 2) {
+	    const TkTextIndex *index1Ptr, *index2Ptr;
+	    TkTextIndex index2;
+
+	    index1Ptr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[i]);
+	    if (index1Ptr == NULL) {
 		if (objPtr) {
 		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
 		}
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
-	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index1, &index2) < 0) {
-		/* 
-		 * Place the text in a DString and move it to the result.
-		 * Since this could in principle be a megabyte or more, we
-		 * want to do it efficiently!
+
+	    if (i+1 == objc) {
+		TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, index1Ptr, 1, &index2,
+			COUNT_INDICES);
+		index2Ptr = &index2;
+	    } else {
+		index2Ptr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[i+1]);
+		if (index2Ptr == NULL) {
+		    if (objPtr) {
+			Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
+		    }
+		    result = TCL_ERROR;
+		    goto done;
+		}
+	    }
+
+	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(index1Ptr, index2Ptr) < 0) {
+		/*
+		 * We want to move the text we get from the window into the
+		 * result, but since this could in principle be a megabyte or
+		 * more, we want to do it efficiently!
 		 */
-		TextGetText(&index1, &index2, &ds);
+
+		Tcl_Obj *get = TextGetText(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr,
+			visible);
+
 		found++;
 		if (found == 1) {
-		    Tcl_DStringResult(interp, &ds);
+		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, get);
 		} else {
 		    if (found == 2) {
 			/*
-			 * Move the first item we put into the result into
-			 * the first element of the list object.
+			 * Move the first item we put into the result into the
+			 * first element of the list object.
 			 */
+
 			objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
 			Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
 				Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
 		    }
-		    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
-			    Tcl_NewStringObj(Tcl_DStringValue(&ds),
-				    Tcl_DStringLength(&ds)));
+		    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, get);
 		}
-		Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
 	    }
 	}
 	if (found > 1) {
 	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
 	}
-    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "index", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 3)) {
-	char buf[200];
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_IMAGE:
+	result = TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_INDEX: {
+	const TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
 
-	if (argc != 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " index index\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[2], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
+
+	indexPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
+	if (indexPtr == NULL) {
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	TkTextPrintIndex(&index1, buf);
-	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "insert", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 3)) {
-	int i, j, numTags;
-	CONST char **tagNames;
-	TkTextTag **oldTagArrayPtr;
-
-	if (argc < 4) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0],
-		    " insert index chars ?tagList chars tagList ...?\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, indexPtr));
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_INSERT: {
+	const TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
+
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "index chars ?tagList chars tagList ...?");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[2], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
+	indexPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
+	if (indexPtr == NULL) {
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	if (textPtr->state == TK_STATE_NORMAL) {
-	    for (j = 3;  j < argc; j += 2) {
-		InsertChars(textPtr, &index1, argv[j]);
-		if (argc > (j+1)) {
-		    TkTextIndexForwBytes(&index1, (int) strlen(argv[j]),
-			    &index2);
-		    oldTagArrayPtr = TkBTreeGetTags(&index1, &numTags);
-		    if (oldTagArrayPtr != NULL) {
-			for (i = 0; i < numTags; i++) {
-			    TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2, oldTagArrayPtr[i], 0);
-			}
-			ckfree((char *) oldTagArrayPtr);
-		    }
-		    if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, argv[j+1], &numTags, &tagNames)
-			    != TCL_OK) {
-			result = TCL_ERROR;
-			goto done;
-		    }
-		    for (i = 0; i < numTags; i++) {
-			TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2,
-				TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, tagNames[i]), 1);
-		    }
-		    ckfree((char *) tagNames);
-		    index1 = index2;
+	if (textPtr->state == TK_TEXT_STATE_NORMAL) {
+	    result = TextInsertCmd(NULL, textPtr, interp, objc-3, objv+3,
+		    indexPtr, 1);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_MARK:
+	result = TkTextMarkCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_PEER:
+	result = TextPeerCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_REPLACE: {
+	const TkTextIndex *indexFromPtr, *indexToPtr;
+
+	if (objc < 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "index1 index2 chars ?tagList chars tagList ...?");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	indexFromPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
+	if (indexFromPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	indexToPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[3]);
+	if (indexToPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	if (TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, indexToPtr) > 0) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Index \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+		    "\" before \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		    "\" in the text", NULL);
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	if (textPtr->state == TK_TEXT_STATE_NORMAL) {
+	    int lineNum, byteIndex;
+	    TkTextIndex index;
+
+	    /*
+	     * The 'replace' operation is quite complex to do correctly,
+	     * because we want a number of criteria to hold:
+	     *
+	     * 1.  The insertion point shouldn't move, unless it is within the
+	     *	   deleted range. In this case it should end up after the new
+	     *	   text.
+	     *
+	     * 2.  The window should not change the text it shows - should not
+	     *	   scroll vertically - unless the result of the replace is
+	     *	   that the insertion position which used to be on-screen is
+	     *	   now off-screen.
+	     */
+
+	    byteIndex = textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex;
+	    lineNum = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, textPtr->topIndex.linePtr);
+
+	    TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, textPtr->insertMarkPtr, &index);
+	    if ((TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, &index) < 0)
+		    && (TkTextIndexCmp(indexToPtr, &index) > 0)) {
+		/*
+		 * The insertion point is inside the range to be replaced, so
+		 * we have to do some calculations to ensure it doesn't move
+		 * unnecessarily.
+		 */
+
+		int deleteInsertOffset, insertLength, j;
+
+		insertLength = 0;
+		for (j = 4; j < objc; j += 2) {
+		    insertLength += Tcl_GetCharLength(objv[j]);
 		}
+
+		/*
+		 * Calculate 'deleteInsertOffset' as an offset we will apply
+		 * to the insertion point after this operation.
+		 */
+
+		deleteInsertOffset = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr,
+			&index, COUNT_CHARS);
+		if (deleteInsertOffset > insertLength) {
+		    deleteInsertOffset = insertLength;
+		}
+
+		result = TextReplaceCmd(textPtr, interp, indexFromPtr,
+			indexToPtr, objc, objv, 0);
+
+		if (result == TCL_OK) {
+		    /*
+		     * Move the insertion position to the correct place.
+		     */
+
+		    TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, indexFromPtr,
+			    deleteInsertOffset, &index, COUNT_INDICES);
+		    TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(textPtr->insertMarkPtr,
+			    textPtr->insertMarkPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
+		    TkBTreeLinkSegment(textPtr->insertMarkPtr, &index);
+		}
+	    } else {
+		result = TextReplaceCmd(textPtr, interp, indexFromPtr,
+			indexToPtr, objc, objv, 1);
+	    }
+	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
+		/*
+		 * Now ensure the top-line is in the right place.
+		 */
+
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+			lineNum, byteIndex, &index);
+		TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, TK_TEXT_NOPIXELADJUST);
 	    }
 	}
-    } else if ((c == 'd') && (strncmp(argv[1], "dump", length) == 0)) {
-	result = TextDumpCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv);
-    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "image", length) == 0)) {
-	result = TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv);
-    } else if ((c == 'm') && (strncmp(argv[1], "mark", length) == 0)) {
-	result = TkTextMarkCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv);
-    } else if ((c == 's') && (strcmp(argv[1], "scan") == 0) && (length >= 2)) {
-	result = TkTextScanCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv);
-    } else if ((c == 's') && (strcmp(argv[1], "search") == 0)
-	    && (length >= 3)) {
-	result = TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv);
-    } else if ((c == 's') && (strcmp(argv[1], "see") == 0) && (length >= 3)) {
-	result = TkTextSeeCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv);
-    } else if ((c == 't') && (strcmp(argv[1], "tag") == 0)) {
-	result = TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv);
-    } else if ((c == 'w') && (strncmp(argv[1], "window", length) == 0)) {
-	result = TkTextWindowCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv);
-    } else if ((c == 'x') && (strncmp(argv[1], "xview", length) == 0)) {
-	result = TkTextXviewCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv);
-    } else if ((c == 'y') && (strncmp(argv[1], "yview", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 2)) {
-	result = TkTextYviewCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv);
-    } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option \"", argv[1],
-		"\": must be bbox, cget, compare, configure, debug, delete, ",
-                "dlineinfo, dump, edit, get, image, index, insert, mark, ",
-                "scan, search, see, tag, window, xview, or yview",
-		(char *) NULL);
-	result = TCL_ERROR;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_SCAN:
+	result = TkTextScanCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_SEARCH:
+	result = TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_SEE:
+	result = TkTextSeeCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_TAG:
+	result = TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_WINDOW:
+	result = TkTextWindowCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_XVIEW:
+	result = TkTextXviewCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_YVIEW:
+	result = TkTextYviewCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    }
+
+  done:
+    textPtr->refCount--;
+    if (textPtr->refCount == 0) {
+	ckfree((char *) textPtr);
+    }
+    return result;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * SharedTextObjCmd --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked to process commands on the shared portion of
+ *	a text widget. Currently it is not actually exported as a Tcl command,
+ *	and is only used internally to process parts of undo/redo scripts.
+ *	See the user documentation for 'text' for details on what it does -
+ *	the only subcommands it currently supports are 'insert' and 'delete'.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	See the user documentation for "text".
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+SharedTextObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about shared test B-tree. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
+{
+    register TkSharedText *sharedPtr = (TkSharedText *) clientData;
+    int result = TCL_OK;
+    int index;
+
+    static const char *optionStrings[] = {
+	"delete", "insert", NULL
+    };
+    enum options {
+	TEXT_DELETE, TEXT_INSERT
+    };
+
+    if (objc < 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], optionStrings, "option", 0,
+	    &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    switch ((enum options) index) {
+    case TEXT_DELETE:
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index1 ?index2 ...?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (objc < 5) {
+	    /*
+	     * Simple case requires no predetermination of indices.
+	     */
+
+	    TkTextIndex index1;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Parse the starting and stopping indices.
+	     */
+
+	    result = TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(interp, sharedPtr, objv[2],
+		    &index1);
+	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+		return result;
+	    }
+	    if (objc == 4) {
+		TkTextIndex index2;
+
+		result = TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(interp, sharedPtr, objv[3],
+			&index2);
+		if (result != TCL_OK) {
+		    return result;
+		}
+		DeleteIndexRange(sharedPtr, NULL, &index1, &index2, 1);
+	    } else {
+		DeleteIndexRange(sharedPtr, NULL, &index1, NULL, 1);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else {
+	    /* Too many arguments */
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	break;
+    case TEXT_INSERT: {
+	TkTextIndex index1;
+
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "index chars ?tagList chars tagList ...?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	result = TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(interp, sharedPtr, objv[2],
+		&index1);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    return result;
+	}
+	return TextInsertCmd(sharedPtr, NULL, interp, objc-3, objv+3, &index1,
+		1);
+    }
+    default:
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TextPeerCmd --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "text peer" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	See the user documentation.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+TextPeerCmd(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
+{
+    Tk_Window tkwin = textPtr->tkwin;
+    int index;
+
+    static const char *peerOptionStrings[] = {
+	"create", "names", NULL
+    };
+    enum peerOptions {
+	PEER_CREATE, PEER_NAMES
+    };
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], peerOptionStrings,
+	    "peer option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    switch ((enum peerOptions)index) {
+    case PEER_CREATE:
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "pathName ?options?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	return CreateWidget(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, tkwin, interp, textPtr,
+		objc-2, objv+2);
+    case PEER_NAMES: {
+	TkText *tPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->peers;
+
+	if (objc > 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	while (tPtr != NULL) {
+	    if (tPtr != textPtr) {
+		Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tk_PathName(tPtr->tkwin));
+	    }
+	    tPtr = tPtr->next;
+	}
+    }
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TextReplaceCmd --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked to process part of the "replace" widget
+ *	command for text widgets.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	See the user documentation.
+ *
+ *	If 'viewUpdate' is false, then textPtr->topIndex may no longer be a
+ *	valid index after this function returns. The caller is responsible for
+ *	ensuring a correct index is in place.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+TextReplaceCmd(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    const TkTextIndex *indexFromPtr,
+				/* Index from which to replace. */
+    const TkTextIndex *indexToPtr,
+				/* Index to which to replace. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[],	/* Argument objects. */
+    int viewUpdate)		/* Update vertical view if set. */
+{
+    /*
+     * Perform the deletion and insertion, but ensure no undo-separator is
+     * placed between the two operations. Since we are using the helper
+     * functions 'DeleteIndexRange' and 'TextInsertCmd' we have to pretend
+     * that the autoSeparators setting is off, so that we don't get an
+     * undo-separator between the delete and insert.
+     */
+
+    int origAutoSep = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators;
+    int result, lineNumber;
+    TkTextIndex indexTmp;
+
+    if (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo) {
+	textPtr->sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators = 0;
+	if (origAutoSep &&
+		textPtr->sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode!=TK_TEXT_EDIT_REPLACE) {
+	    TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Must save and restore line in indexFromPtr based on line number; can't
+     * keep the line itself as that might be eliminated/invalidated when
+     * deleting the range. [Bug 1602537]
+     */
+
+    indexTmp = *indexFromPtr;
+    lineNumber = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexFromPtr->linePtr);
+    DeleteIndexRange(NULL, textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr, viewUpdate);
+    indexTmp.linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(indexTmp.tree, textPtr, lineNumber);
+    result = TextInsertCmd(NULL, textPtr, interp, objc-4, objv+4,
+	    &indexTmp, viewUpdate);
+
+    if (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo) {
+	textPtr->sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode = TK_TEXT_EDIT_REPLACE;
+	textPtr->sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators = origAutoSep;
     }
 
-    done:
-    Tcl_Release((ClientData) textPtr);
     return result;
 }
 
@@ -886,13 +1757,13 @@ TextWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * TextIndexSortProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by qsort when sorting an array of
- *	indices in *decreasing* order (last to first).
+ *	This function is called by qsort when sorting an array of indices in
+ *	*decreasing* order (last to first).
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is -1 if the first argument should be before
- *	the second element, 0 if it's equivalent, and 1 if it should be
- *	after the second element.
+ *	The return value is -1 if the first argument should be before the
+ *	second element, 0 if it's equivalent, and 1 if it should be after the
+ *	second element.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -901,8 +1772,9 @@ TextWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  */
 
 static int
-TextIndexSortProc(first, second)
-    CONST VOID *first, *second;		/* Elements to be compared. */
+TextIndexSortProc(
+    const void *first,		/* Elements to be compared. */
+    const void *second)
 {
     TkTextIndex *pair1 = (TkTextIndex *) first;
     TkTextIndex *pair2 = (TkTextIndex *) second;
@@ -911,9 +1783,10 @@ TextIndexSortProc(first, second)
     if (cmp == 0) {
 	/*
 	 * If the first indices were equal, we want the second index of the
-	 * pair also to be the greater.  Use pointer magic to access the
-	 * second index pair.
+	 * pair also to be the greater. Use pointer magic to access the second
+	 * index pair.
 	 */
+
 	cmp = TkTextIndexCmp(&pair1[0], &pair2[0]);
     }
     if (cmp > 0) {
@@ -929,71 +1802,168 @@ TextIndexSortProc(first, second)
  *
  * DestroyText --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a text at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	This function is invoked when we receive a destroy event to clean up
+ *	the internal structure of a text widget. We will free up most of the
+ *	internal structure and delete the associated Tcl command. If there are
+ *	no outstanding references to the widget, we also free up the textPtr
+ *	itself.
+ *
+ *	The widget has already been flagged as deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Everything associated with the text is freed up.
+ *	Either everything or almost everything associated with the text is
+ *	freed up.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyText(memPtr)
-    char *memPtr;		/* Info about text widget. */
+DestroyText(
+    TkText *textPtr)		/* Info about text widget. */
 {
-    register TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) memPtr;
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     TkTextTag *tagPtr;
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then
-     * let Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related
-     * stuff.  Special note:  free up display-related information
-     * before deleting the B-tree, since display-related stuff
-     * may refer to stuff in the B-tree.
+     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling. We have already
+     * called let Tk_FreeConfigOptions to handle all the standard
+     * option-related stuff (and so none of that exists when we are called).
+     * Special note: free up display-related information before deleting the
+     * B-tree, since display-related stuff may refer to stuff in the B-tree.
      */
 
     TkTextFreeDInfo(textPtr);
-    TkBTreeDestroy(textPtr->tree);
-    for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->tagTable, &search);
-	    hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
-	tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-	TkTextFreeTag(textPtr, tagPtr);
-    }
-    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&textPtr->tagTable);
-    for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->markTable, &search);
-	    hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
-	ckfree((char *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr));
-    }
-    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&textPtr->markTable);
+    textPtr->dInfoPtr = NULL;
+
+    /*
+     * Remove ourselves from the peer list.
+     */
+
+    if (sharedTextPtr->peers == textPtr) {
+	sharedTextPtr->peers = textPtr->next;
+    } else {
+	TkText *nextPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers;
+	while (nextPtr != NULL) {
+	    if (nextPtr->next == textPtr) {
+		nextPtr->next = textPtr->next;
+		break;
+	    }
+	    nextPtr = nextPtr->next;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Always clean up the widget-specific tags first. Common tags (i.e. most)
+     * will only be cleaned up when the shared structure is cleaned up.
+     *
+     * We also need to clean up widget-specific marks ('insert', 'current'),
+     * since otherwise marks will never disappear from the B-tree.
+     */
+
+    TkTextDeleteTag(textPtr, textPtr->selTagPtr);
+    TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(textPtr->insertMarkPtr,
+	    textPtr->insertMarkPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
+    ckfree((char *) textPtr->insertMarkPtr);
+    TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(textPtr->currentMarkPtr,
+	    textPtr->currentMarkPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
+    ckfree((char *) textPtr->currentMarkPtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Now we've cleaned up everything of relevance to us in the B-tree, so we
+     * disassociate outselves from it.
+     *
+     * When the refCount reaches zero, it's time to clean up the shared
+     * portion of the text widget.
+     */
+
+    sharedTextPtr->refCount--;
+
+    if (sharedTextPtr->refCount > 0) {
+	TkBTreeRemoveClient(sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr);
+
+	/*
+	 * Free up any embedded windows which belong to this widget.
+	 */
+
+	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&sharedTextPtr->windowTable, &search);
+		hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	    TkTextEmbWindowClient *loop;
+	    TkTextSegment *ewPtr = (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+
+	    loop = ewPtr->body.ew.clients;
+	    if (loop->textPtr == textPtr) {
+		ewPtr->body.ew.clients = loop->next;
+		TkTextWinFreeClient(hPtr, loop);
+	    } else {
+		TkTextEmbWindowClient *client = ewPtr->body.ew.clients;
+
+		client = loop->next;
+		while (client != NULL) {
+		    if (client->textPtr == textPtr) {
+			loop->next = client->next;
+			TkTextWinFreeClient(hPtr, client);
+			break;
+		    } else {
+			loop = loop->next;
+		    }
+		    client = loop->next;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * No need to call 'TkBTreeRemoveClient' first, since this will do
+	 * everything in one go, more quickly.
+	 */
+
+	TkBTreeDestroy(sharedTextPtr->tree);
+
+	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&sharedTextPtr->tagTable, &search);
+		hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	    tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+
+	    /*
+	     * No need to use 'TkTextDeleteTag' since we've already removed
+	     * the B-tree completely.
+	     */
+
+	    TkTextFreeTag(textPtr, tagPtr);
+	}
+	Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&sharedTextPtr->tagTable);
+	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&sharedTextPtr->markTable, &search);
+	     hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	    ckfree((char *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr));
+	}
+	Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&sharedTextPtr->markTable);
+	TkUndoFreeStack(sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
+
+	Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&sharedTextPtr->windowTable);
+	Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&sharedTextPtr->imageTable);
+
+	if (sharedTextPtr->bindingTable != NULL) {
+	    Tk_DeleteBindingTable(sharedTextPtr->bindingTable);
+	}
+	ckfree((char *) sharedTextPtr);
+    }
+
     if (textPtr->tabArrayPtr != NULL) {
 	ckfree((char *) textPtr->tabArrayPtr);
     }
     if (textPtr->insertBlinkHandler != NULL) {
 	Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(textPtr->insertBlinkHandler);
     }
-    if (textPtr->bindingTable != NULL) {
-	Tk_DeleteBindingTable(textPtr->bindingTable);
-    }
-    TkUndoFreeStack(textPtr->undoStack);
 
-    /*
-     * NOTE: do NOT free up selBorder, selBdString, or selFgColorPtr:
-     * they are duplicates of information in the "sel" tag, which was
-     * freed up as part of deleting the tags above.
-     */
-
-    textPtr->selBorder = NULL;
-    textPtr->selBdString = NULL;
-    textPtr->selFgColorPtr = NULL;
-    Tk_FreeOptions(configSpecs, (char *) textPtr, textPtr->display, 0);
-    ckfree((char *) textPtr);
+    textPtr->tkwin = NULL;
+    textPtr->refCount--;
+    Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(textPtr->interp, textPtr->widgetCmd);
+    if (textPtr->refCount == 0) {
+	ckfree((char *) textPtr);
+    }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1001,47 +1971,165 @@ DestroyText(memPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureText --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a text widget.
+ *	This function is called to process an objv/objc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) a text widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font,
- *	etc. get set for textPtr;  old resources get freed, if there
- *	were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font, etc. get
+ *	set for textPtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, argc, argv, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    register TkText *textPtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or may
-				 * not already have values for some fields. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of valid entries in argv. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Arguments. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
+ConfigureText(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    register TkText *textPtr,	/* Information about widget; may or may not
+				 * already have values for some fields. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
+    Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
     int oldExport = textPtr->exportSelection;
+    int mask = 0;
 
-    if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, textPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
-	    argc, argv, (char *) textPtr, flags) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) textPtr, textPtr->optionTable,
+	    objc, objv, textPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, &mask) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    TkUndoSetDepth(textPtr->undoStack, textPtr->maxUndo);
+    /*
+     * Copy down shared flags.
+     */
+
+    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo = textPtr->undo;
+    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->maxUndo = textPtr->maxUndo;
+    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators = textPtr->autoSeparators;
+
+    TkUndoSetDepth(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack,
+	    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->maxUndo);
 
     /*
-     * A few other options also need special processing, such as parsing
-     * the geometry and setting the background from a 3-D border.
+     * A few other options also need special processing, such as parsing the
+     * geometry and setting the background from a 3-D border.
      */
 
     Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(textPtr->tkwin, textPtr->border);
 
+    if (mask & TK_TEXT_LINE_RANGE) {
+	int start, end, current;
+	TkTextIndex index1, index2, index3;
+
+	/*
+	 * Line start and/or end have been adjusted. We need to validate the
+	 * first displayed line and arrange for re-layout.
+	 */
+
+	TkBTreeClientRangeChanged(textPtr, textPtr->charHeight);
+
+	if (textPtr->start != NULL) {
+	    start = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, textPtr->start);
+	} else {
+	    start = 0;
+	}
+	if (textPtr->end != NULL) {
+	    end = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, textPtr->end);
+	} else {
+	    end = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL);
+	}
+	if (start > end) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		    "-startline must be less than or equal to -endline",
+		    NULL);
+	    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	current = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, textPtr->topIndex.linePtr);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL, start, 0,
+		    &index1);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL, end, 0,
+		    &index2);
+	if (current < start || current > end) {
+	    TkTextSearch search;
+	    TkTextIndex first, last;
+	    int selChanged = 0;
+
+	    TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index1, 0);
+
+	    /*
+	     * We may need to adjust the selection. So we have to check
+	     * whether the "sel" tag was applied to anything outside the
+	     * current start,end.
+	     */
+
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL, 0, 0,
+		    &first);
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL,
+		    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL),
+		    0, &last);
+	    TkBTreeStartSearch(&first, &last, textPtr->selTagPtr, &search);
+	    if (!TkBTreeCharTagged(&first, textPtr->selTagPtr)
+		    && !TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) {
+		/* Nothing tagged with "sel" */
+	    } else {
+		int line = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, search.curIndex.linePtr);
+		if (line < start) {
+		    selChanged = 1;
+		} else {
+		    TkTextLine *linePtr = search.curIndex.linePtr;
+
+		    while (TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) {
+			linePtr = search.curIndex.linePtr;
+		    }
+		    line = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, linePtr);
+		    if (line >= end) {
+			selChanged = 1;
+		    }
+		}
+	    }
+	    if (selChanged) {
+		/*
+		 * Send an event that the selection has changed, and abort any
+		 * partial-selections in progress.
+		 */
+
+		TkTextSelectionEvent(textPtr);
+		textPtr->abortSelections = 1;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	/* Indices are potentially obsolete after changing -startline and/or
+	 * -endline, therefore increase the epoch.
+	 * Also, clamp the insert and current (unshared) marks to the new
+	 * -startline/-endline range limits of the widget. All other (shared)
+	 * marks are unchanged.
+         * The return value of TkTextMarkNameToIndex does not need to be
+         * checked: "insert" and "current" marks always exist, and the
+         * purpose of the code below precisely is to move them inside the
+         * -startline/-endline range.
+	 */
+
+	textPtr->sharedTextPtr->stateEpoch++;
+	TkTextMarkNameToIndex(textPtr, "insert", &index3);
+	if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index3, &index1) < 0) {
+	    textPtr->insertMarkPtr = TkTextSetMark(textPtr, "insert", &index1);
+	}
+	if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index3, &index2) > 0) {
+	    textPtr->insertMarkPtr = TkTextSetMark(textPtr, "insert", &index2);
+	}
+	TkTextMarkNameToIndex(textPtr, "current", &index3);
+	if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index3, &index1) < 0) {
+	    textPtr->currentMarkPtr = TkTextSetMark(textPtr, "current", &index1);
+	}
+	if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index3, &index2) > 0) {
+	    textPtr->currentMarkPtr = TkTextSetMark(textPtr, "current", &index2);
+	}
+    }
+
     /*
      * Don't allow negative spacings.
      */
@@ -1064,62 +2152,56 @@ ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, argc, argv, flags)
 	ckfree((char *) textPtr->tabArrayPtr);
 	textPtr->tabArrayPtr = NULL;
     }
-    if (textPtr->tabOptionString != NULL) {
-	textPtr->tabArrayPtr = TkTextGetTabs(interp, textPtr->tkwin,
-		textPtr->tabOptionString);
+    if (textPtr->tabOptionPtr != NULL) {
+	textPtr->tabArrayPtr = TkTextGetTabs(interp, textPtr,
+		textPtr->tabOptionPtr);
 	if (textPtr->tabArrayPtr == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,"\n    (while processing -tabs option)");
+	    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Make sure that configuration options are properly mirrored
-     * between the widget record and the "sel" tags.  NOTE: we don't
-     * have to free up information during the mirroring;  old
-     * information was freed when it was replaced in the widget
-     * record.
+     * Make sure that configuration options are properly mirrored between the
+     * widget record and the "sel" tags. NOTE: we don't have to free up
+     * information during the mirroring; old information was freed when it was
+     * replaced in the widget record.
      */
 
     textPtr->selTagPtr->border = textPtr->selBorder;
-    if (textPtr->selTagPtr->bdString != textPtr->selBdString) {
-	textPtr->selTagPtr->bdString = textPtr->selBdString;
-	if (textPtr->selBdString != NULL) {
-	    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin, textPtr->selBdString,
-		    &textPtr->selTagPtr->borderWidth) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (textPtr->selTagPtr->borderWidth < 0) {
-		textPtr->selTagPtr->borderWidth = 0;
-	    }
-	}
+    if (textPtr->selTagPtr->borderWidthPtr != textPtr->selBorderWidthPtr) {
+	textPtr->selTagPtr->borderWidthPtr = textPtr->selBorderWidthPtr;
+	textPtr->selTagPtr->borderWidth = textPtr->selBorderWidth;
     }
     textPtr->selTagPtr->fgColor = textPtr->selFgColorPtr;
     textPtr->selTagPtr->affectsDisplay = 0;
-    if ((textPtr->selTagPtr->border != NULL)
-	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->bdString != NULL)
-	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->reliefString != NULL)
-	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->bgStipple != None)
-	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->fgColor != NULL)
+    textPtr->selTagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry = 0;
+    if ((textPtr->selTagPtr->elideString != NULL)
 	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->tkfont != None)
-	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->fgStipple != None)
 	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->justifyString != NULL)
 	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->lMargin1String != NULL)
 	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->lMargin2String != NULL)
 	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->offsetString != NULL)
-	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->overstrikeString != NULL)
 	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->rMarginString != NULL)
 	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->spacing1String != NULL)
 	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->spacing2String != NULL)
 	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->spacing3String != NULL)
-	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->tabString != NULL)
-	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->underlineString != NULL)
-	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->elideString != NULL)
+	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->tabStringPtr != NULL)
 	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->wrapMode != TEXT_WRAPMODE_NULL)) {
 	textPtr->selTagPtr->affectsDisplay = 1;
+	textPtr->selTagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry = 1;
     }
-    TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, (TkTextIndex *) NULL, (TkTextIndex *) NULL,
-	    textPtr->selTagPtr, 1);
+    if ((textPtr->selTagPtr->border != NULL)
+	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->reliefString != NULL)
+	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->bgStipple != None)
+	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->fgColor != NULL)
+	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->fgStipple != None)
+	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->overstrikeString != NULL)
+	    || (textPtr->selTagPtr->underlineString != NULL)) {
+	textPtr->selTagPtr->affectsDisplay = 1;
+    }
+    TkTextRedrawTag(NULL, textPtr, NULL, NULL, textPtr->selTagPtr, 1);
 
     /*
      * Claim the selection if we've suddenly started exporting it and there
@@ -1130,9 +2212,11 @@ ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, argc, argv, flags)
 	TkTextSearch search;
 	TkTextIndex first, last;
 
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, 0, 0, &first);
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree,
-		TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree), 0, &last);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0,
+		&first);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr),
+		0, &last);
 	TkBTreeStartSearch(&first, &last, textPtr->selTagPtr, &search);
 	if (TkBTreeCharTagged(&first, textPtr->selTagPtr)
 		|| TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) {
@@ -1153,8 +2237,8 @@ ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, argc, argv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Register the desired geometry for the window, and arrange for
-     * the window to be redisplayed.
+     * Register the desired geometry for the window, and arrange for the
+     * window to be redisplayed.
      */
 
     if (textPtr->width <= 0) {
@@ -1163,60 +2247,97 @@ ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, argc, argv, flags)
     if (textPtr->height <= 0) {
 	textPtr->height = 1;
     }
-    TextWorldChanged((ClientData) textPtr);
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    TextWorldChanged(textPtr, mask);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * TextWorldChanged --
+ * TextWorldChangedCallback --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way and the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts
- *	and determine its new geometry.
+ *	This function is called when the world has changed in some way and the
+ *	widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine its
+ *	new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configures all tags in the Text with a empty argc/argv, for
- *	the side effect of causing all the items to recompute their
- *	geometry and to be redisplayed.
+ *	Configures all tags in the Text with a empty objc/objv, for the side
+ *	effect of causing all the items to recompute their geometry and to be
+ *	redisplayed.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 static void
-TextWorldChanged(instanceData)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about widget. */
+TextWorldChangedCallback(
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     TkText *textPtr;
-    Tk_FontMetrics fm;
 
     textPtr = (TkText *) instanceData;
+    TextWorldChanged(textPtr, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TextWorldChanged --
+ *
+ *	This function is called when the world has changed in some way and the
+ *	widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine its
+ *	new geometry.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Configures all tags in the Text with a empty objc/objv, for the side
+ *	effect of causing all the items to recompute their geometry and to be
+ *	redisplayed.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+TextWorldChanged(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about widget. */
+    int mask)			/* OR'd collection of bits showing what has
+				 * changed. */
+{
+    Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+    int border;
 
     textPtr->charWidth = Tk_TextWidth(textPtr->tkfont, "0", 1);
     if (textPtr->charWidth <= 0) {
 	textPtr->charWidth = 1;
     }
     Tk_GetFontMetrics(textPtr->tkfont, &fm);
+
+    textPtr->charHeight = fm.linespace;
+    if (textPtr->charHeight <= 0) {
+	textPtr->charHeight = 1;
+    }
+    border = textPtr->borderWidth + textPtr->highlightWidth;
     Tk_GeometryRequest(textPtr->tkwin,
-	    textPtr->width * textPtr->charWidth + 2*textPtr->borderWidth
-		    + 2*textPtr->padX + 2*textPtr->highlightWidth,
-	    textPtr->height * (fm.linespace + textPtr->spacing1
-		    + textPtr->spacing3) + 2*textPtr->borderWidth
-		    + 2*textPtr->padY + 2*textPtr->highlightWidth);
-    Tk_SetInternalBorder(textPtr->tkwin,
-	    textPtr->borderWidth + textPtr->highlightWidth);
+	    textPtr->width * textPtr->charWidth + 2*textPtr->padX + 2*border,
+	    textPtr->height*(fm.linespace+textPtr->spacing1+textPtr->spacing3)
+		    + 2*textPtr->padY + 2*border);
+
+    Tk_SetInternalBorderEx(textPtr->tkwin,
+	    border + textPtr->padX, border + textPtr->padX,
+	    border + textPtr->padY, border + textPtr->padY);
     if (textPtr->setGrid) {
 	Tk_SetGrid(textPtr->tkwin, textPtr->width, textPtr->height,
-		textPtr->charWidth, fm.linespace);
+		textPtr->charWidth, textPtr->charHeight);
     } else {
 	Tk_UnsetGrid(textPtr->tkwin);
     }
 
-    TkTextRelayoutWindow(textPtr);
+    TkTextRelayoutWindow(textPtr, mask);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1224,24 +2345,24 @@ TextWorldChanged(instanceData)
  *
  * TextEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher on
- *	structure changes to a text.  For texts with 3D
- *	borders, this procedure is also invoked for exposures.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher on structure changes to
+ *	a text. For texts with 3D borders, this function is also invoked for
+ *	exposures.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up.
+ *	When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TextEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    register XEvent *eventPtr;	/* Information about event. */
+TextEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    register XEvent *eventPtr)	/* Information about event. */
 {
     register TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData;
     TkTextIndex index, index2;
@@ -1253,22 +2374,51 @@ TextEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
     } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
 	if ((textPtr->prevWidth != Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin))
 		|| (textPtr->prevHeight != Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin))) {
-	    TkTextRelayoutWindow(textPtr);
+	    int mask = 0;
+
+	    if (textPtr->prevWidth != Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin)) {
+		mask = TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY;
+	    }
+	    TkTextRelayoutWindow(textPtr, mask);
 	    textPtr->prevWidth = Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin);
 	    textPtr->prevHeight = Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin);
 	}
     } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
-	if (textPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
-	    if (textPtr->setGrid) {
-		Tk_UnsetGrid(textPtr->tkwin);
-	    }
-	    textPtr->tkwin = NULL;
-	    Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(textPtr->interp,
-		    textPtr->widgetCmd);
+	/*
+	 * NOTE: we must zero out selBorder, selBorderWidthPtr and
+	 * selFgColorPtr: they are duplicates of information in the "sel" tag,
+	 * which will be freed up when we delete all tags. Hence we don't want
+	 * the automatic config options freeing process to delete them as
+	 * well.
+	 */
+
+	textPtr->selBorder = NULL;
+	textPtr->selBorderWidthPtr = NULL;
+	textPtr->selBorderWidth = 0;
+	textPtr->selFgColorPtr = NULL;
+	if (textPtr->setGrid) {
+	    Tk_UnsetGrid(textPtr->tkwin);
+	    textPtr->setGrid = 0;
 	}
-	Tcl_EventuallyFree((ClientData) textPtr, DestroyText);
+	if (!(textPtr->flags & OPTIONS_FREED)) {
+	    Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) textPtr, textPtr->optionTable,
+		    textPtr->tkwin);
+	    textPtr->flags |= OPTIONS_FREED;
+	}
+	textPtr->flags |= DESTROYED;
+
+	/*
+	 * Call 'DestroyTest' to handle the deletion for us. The actual
+	 * textPtr may still exist after this, if there are some outstanding
+	 * references. But we have flagged it as DESTROYED just above, so
+	 * nothing will try to make use of it very extensively.
+	 */
+
+	DestroyText(textPtr);
     } else if ((eventPtr->type == FocusIn) || (eventPtr->type == FocusOut)) {
-	if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) {
+	if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyInferior
+		|| eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyAncestor
+		|| eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyNonlinear) {
 	    Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(textPtr->insertBlinkHandler);
 	    if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) {
 		textPtr->flags |= GOT_FOCUS | INSERT_ON;
@@ -1281,19 +2431,19 @@ TextEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 		textPtr->flags &= ~(GOT_FOCUS | INSERT_ON);
 		textPtr->insertBlinkHandler = (Tcl_TimerToken) NULL;
 	    }
-	    if (
-#ifndef MAC_OSX_TK
-		    !TkpAlwaysShowSelection(textPtr->tkwin)
-#else
-		    /* Don't show inactive selection in disabled widgets. */
-		    textPtr->state != TK_STATE_DISABLED
-#endif
-	    ) {
-		TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, NULL, NULL, textPtr->selTagPtr, 1);
+	    if (textPtr->inactiveSelBorder != textPtr->selBorder) {
+		TkTextRedrawTag(NULL, textPtr, NULL, NULL, textPtr->selTagPtr,
+			1);
 	    }
 	    TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, textPtr->insertMarkPtr, &index);
-	    TkTextIndexForwChars(&index, 1, &index2);
-	    TkTextChanged(textPtr, &index, &index2);
+	    TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, &index, 1, &index2, COUNT_INDICES);
+
+	    /*
+	     * While we wish to redisplay, no heights have changed, so no need
+	     * to call TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics.
+	     */
+
+	    TkTextChanged(NULL, textPtr, &index, &index2);
 	    if (textPtr->highlightWidth > 0) {
 		TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, 0, 0, textPtr->highlightWidth,
 			textPtr->highlightWidth);
@@ -1307,9 +2457,9 @@ TextEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * TextCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1321,24 +2471,25 @@ TextEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-TextCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+TextCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = textPtr->tkwin;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which this flag is already set) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
-    if (tkwin != NULL) {
+    if (!(textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
 	if (textPtr->setGrid) {
 	    Tk_UnsetGrid(textPtr->tkwin);
+	    textPtr->setGrid = 0;
 	}
-	textPtr->tkwin = NULL;
+	textPtr->flags |= DESTROYED;
 	Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
     }
 }
@@ -1348,205 +2499,483 @@ TextCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * InsertChars --
  *
- *	This procedure implements most of the functionality of the
- *	"insert" widget command.
+ *	This function implements most of the functionality of the "insert"
+ *	widget command.
  *
  * Results:
- *	None.
+ *	The length of the inserted string.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The characters in "string" get added to the text just before
- *	the character indicated by "indexPtr".
+ *	The characters in "stringPtr" get added to the text just before the
+ *	character indicated by "indexPtr".
+ *
+ *	If 'viewUpdate' is true, we may adjust the window contents'
+ *	y-position, and scrollbar setting.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static void
-InsertChars(textPtr, indexPtr, string)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information about text widget. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Where to insert new characters.  May be
-				 * modified and/or invalidated. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* Null-terminated string containing new
+static int
+InsertChars(
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr,
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr,	/* Where to insert new characters. May be
+				 * modified if the index is not valid for
+				 * insertion (e.g. if at "end"). */
+    Tcl_Obj *stringPtr,		/* Null-terminated string containing new
 				 * information to add to text. */
+    int viewUpdate)		/* Update the view if set. */
 {
-    int lineIndex, resetView, offset;
-    TkTextIndex newTop;
-    char indexBuffer[TK_POS_CHARS];
+    int lineIndex, length;
+    TkText *tPtr;
+    int *lineAndByteIndex;
+    int resetViewCount;
+    int pixels[2*PIXEL_CLIENTS];
 
-    /*
-     * Don't do anything for an empty string [Bug 1275237]
-     */
+    const char *string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(stringPtr, &length);
 
-    if (*string == '\0') {
-	return;
+    if (sharedTextPtr == NULL) {
+	sharedTextPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Don't allow insertions on the last (dummy) line of the text.
+     * Don't allow insertions on the last (dummy) line of the text. This is
+     * the only place in this function where the indexPtr is modified.
      */
 
-    lineIndex = TkBTreeLineIndex(indexPtr->linePtr);
-    if (lineIndex == TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree)) {
+    lineIndex = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr->linePtr);
+    if (lineIndex == TkBTreeNumLines(sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr)) {
 	lineIndex--;
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineIndex, 1000000, indexPtr);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineIndex, 1000000,
+		indexPtr);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Notify the display module that lines are about to change, then do
-     * the insertion.  If the insertion occurs on the top line of the
-     * widget (textPtr->topIndex), then we have to recompute topIndex
-     * after the insertion, since the insertion could invalidate it.
+     * Notify the display module that lines are about to change, then do the
+     * insertion. If the insertion occurs on the top line of the widget
+     * (textPtr->topIndex), then we have to recompute topIndex after the
+     * insertion, since the insertion could invalidate it.
      */
 
-    resetView = offset = 0;
-    if (indexPtr->linePtr == textPtr->topIndex.linePtr) {
-	resetView = 1;
-	offset = textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex;
-	if (offset > indexPtr->byteIndex) {
-	    offset += strlen(string);
+    resetViewCount = 0;
+    if (sharedTextPtr->refCount > PIXEL_CLIENTS) {
+	lineAndByteIndex = (int *)
+		ckalloc(sizeof(int) * 2 * sharedTextPtr->refCount);
+    } else {
+	lineAndByteIndex = pixels;
+    }
+    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; tPtr = tPtr->next) {
+	lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount] = -1;
+	if (indexPtr->linePtr == tPtr->topIndex.linePtr) {
+	    lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount] =
+		    TkBTreeLinesTo(tPtr, indexPtr->linePtr);
+	    lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount+1] = tPtr->topIndex.byteIndex;
+	    if (lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount+1] > indexPtr->byteIndex) {
+		lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount+1] += length;
+	    }
 	}
+	resetViewCount += 2;
     }
-    TkTextChanged(textPtr, indexPtr, indexPtr);
-    TkBTreeInsertChars(indexPtr, string);
+
+    TkTextChanged(sharedTextPtr, NULL, indexPtr, indexPtr);
+
+    sharedTextPtr->stateEpoch++;
+
+    TkBTreeInsertChars(sharedTextPtr->tree, indexPtr, string);
 
     /*
-     * Push the insertion on the undo stack
+     * Push the insertion on the undo stack, and update the modified status of
+     * the widget.
      */
 
-    if (textPtr->undo) {
-	CONST char *cmdName;
-	TkTextIndex toIndex;
+    if (length > 0) {
+	if (sharedTextPtr->undo) {
+	    TkTextIndex toIndex;
+
+	    if (sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators &&
+		sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode != TK_TEXT_EDIT_INSERT) {
+		TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
+	    }
 
-	Tcl_DString actionCommand;
-	Tcl_DString revertCommand;
+	    sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode = TK_TEXT_EDIT_INSERT;
 
-	if (textPtr->autoSeparators &&
-		textPtr->lastEditMode != TK_TEXT_EDIT_INSERT) {
-	    TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(textPtr->undoStack);
+	    TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, indexPtr, length, &toIndex);
+	    TextPushUndoAction(textPtr, stringPtr, 1, indexPtr, &toIndex);
 	}
 
-	textPtr->lastEditMode = TK_TEXT_EDIT_INSERT;
-	cmdName = Tcl_GetCommandName(textPtr->interp, textPtr->widgetCmd);
+	UpdateDirtyFlag(sharedTextPtr);
+    }
+
+    resetViewCount = 0;
+    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; tPtr = tPtr->next) {
+	if (lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount] != -1) {
+	    if ((tPtr != textPtr) || viewUpdate) {
+		TkTextIndex newTop;
+
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedTextPtr->tree, tPtr,
+			lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount], 0, &newTop);
+		TkTextIndexForwBytes(tPtr, &newTop,
+			lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount+1], &newTop);
+		TkTextSetYView(tPtr, &newTop, 0);
+	    }
+	}
+	resetViewCount += 2;
+    }
+    if (sharedTextPtr->refCount > PIXEL_CLIENTS) {
+	ckfree((char *) lineAndByteIndex);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Invalidate any selection retrievals in progress.
+     */
+
+    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; tPtr = tPtr->next) {
+	tPtr->abortSelections = 1;
+    }
 
-	Tcl_DStringInit(&actionCommand);
-	Tcl_DStringInit(&revertCommand);
+    /*
+     * For convenience, return the length of the string.
+     */
 
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&actionCommand, cmdName);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, " insert ", -1);
-	TkTextPrintIndex(indexPtr,indexBuffer);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, indexBuffer, -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, " ", -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&actionCommand, string);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, ";", -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&actionCommand, cmdName);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, " mark set insert ", -1);
-	TkTextIndexForwBytes(indexPtr, (int) strlen(string), &toIndex);
-	TkTextPrintIndex(&toIndex, indexBuffer);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, indexBuffer,-1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, "; ", -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&actionCommand, cmdName);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, " see insert", -1);
+    return length;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TextPushUndoAction --
+ *
+ *	Shared by insert and delete actions. Stores the appropriate scripts
+ *	into our undo stack. We will add a single refCount to the 'undoString'
+ *	object, so, if it previously had a refCount of zero, the caller should
+ *	not free it.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Items pushed onto stack.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
 
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&revertCommand, cmdName);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, " delete ", -1);
-	TkTextPrintIndex(indexPtr, indexBuffer);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, indexBuffer, -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, " ", -1);
-	TkTextPrintIndex(&toIndex, indexBuffer);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, indexBuffer, -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, " ;", -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&revertCommand, cmdName);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, " mark set insert ", -1);
-	TkTextPrintIndex(indexPtr,indexBuffer);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, indexBuffer, -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, "; ", -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&revertCommand, cmdName);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand," see insert", -1);
+static void
+TextPushUndoAction(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Obj *undoString,	/* New text. */
+    int insert,			/* 1 if insert, else delete. */
+    const TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
+				/* Index describing first location. */
+    const TkTextIndex *index2Ptr)
+				/* Index describing second location. */
+{
+    TkUndoSubAtom *iAtom, *dAtom;
 
-	TkUndoPushAction(textPtr->undoStack, &actionCommand, &revertCommand);
+    /*
+     * Create the helpers.
+     */
 
-	Tcl_DStringFree(&actionCommand);
-	Tcl_DStringFree(&revertCommand);
+    Tcl_Obj *seeInsertObj = Tcl_NewObj();
+    Tcl_Obj *markSet1InsertObj = Tcl_NewObj();
+    Tcl_Obj *markSet2InsertObj = NULL;
+    Tcl_Obj *insertCmdObj = Tcl_NewObj();
+    Tcl_Obj *deleteCmdObj = Tcl_NewObj();
+
+    /*
+     * Get the index positions.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_Obj *index1Obj = TkTextNewIndexObj(NULL, index1Ptr);
+    Tcl_Obj *index2Obj = TkTextNewIndexObj(NULL, index2Ptr);
+
+    /*
+     * These need refCounts, because they are used more than once below.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(seeInsertObj);
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(index1Obj);
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(index2Obj);
+
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, seeInsertObj,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), -1));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, seeInsertObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("see", 3));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, seeInsertObj,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj("insert", 6));
+
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet1InsertObj,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), -1));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet1InsertObj,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj("mark", 4));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet1InsertObj,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj("set", 3));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet1InsertObj,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj("insert", 6));
+    markSet2InsertObj = Tcl_DuplicateObj(markSet1InsertObj);
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet1InsertObj, index1Obj);
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet2InsertObj, index2Obj);
+
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, insertCmdObj,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj("insert", 6));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, insertCmdObj, index1Obj);
+
+    /*
+     * Only use of 'undoString' is here.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, insertCmdObj, undoString);
+
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, deleteCmdObj,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj("delete", 6));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, deleteCmdObj, index1Obj);
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, deleteCmdObj, index2Obj);
+
+    /*
+     * Note: we don't wish to use textPtr->widgetCmd in these callbacks
+     * because if we delete the textPtr, but peers still exist, we will then
+     * have references to a non-existent Tcl_Command in the undo stack, which
+     * will lead to crashes later. Also, the behaviour of the widget w.r.t.
+     * bindings (%W substitutions) always uses the widget path name, so there
+     * is no good reason the undo stack should do otherwise.
+     *
+     * For the 'insert' and 'delete' actions, we have to register a functional
+     * callback, because these actions are defined to operate on the
+     * underlying data shared by all peers.
+     */
+
+    iAtom = TkUndoMakeSubAtom(&TextUndoRedoCallback,
+	    (ClientData)textPtr->sharedTextPtr, insertCmdObj, NULL);
+    TkUndoMakeCmdSubAtom(NULL, markSet2InsertObj, iAtom);
+    TkUndoMakeCmdSubAtom(NULL, seeInsertObj, iAtom);
+
+    dAtom = TkUndoMakeSubAtom(&TextUndoRedoCallback,
+	    (ClientData)textPtr->sharedTextPtr, deleteCmdObj, NULL);
+    TkUndoMakeCmdSubAtom(NULL, markSet1InsertObj, dAtom);
+    TkUndoMakeCmdSubAtom(NULL, seeInsertObj, dAtom);
+
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(seeInsertObj);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(index1Obj);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(index2Obj);
+
+    /*
+     * Depending whether the action is to insert or delete, we provide the
+     * appropriate second and third arguments to TkUndoPushAction. (The first
+     * is the 'actionCommand', and the second the 'revertCommand').
+     */
+
+    if (insert) {
+	TkUndoPushAction(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack, iAtom, dAtom);
+    } else {
+	TkUndoPushAction(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack, dAtom, iAtom);
     }
-    updateDirtyFlag(textPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TextUndoRedoCallback --
+ *
+ *	This function is registered with the generic undo/redo code to handle
+ *	'insert' and 'delete' actions on all text widgets. We cannot perform
+ *	those actions on any particular text widget, because that text widget
+ *	might have been deleted by the time we get here.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Will insert or delete text, depending on the first word contained in
+ *	objPtr.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
 
-    if (resetView) {
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineIndex, 0, &newTop);
-	TkTextIndexForwBytes(&newTop, offset, &newTop);
-	TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &newTop, 0);
+int
+TextUndoRedoCallback(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Passed from undo code, but contains our
+				 * shared text data structure. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Arguments of a command to be handled by the
+				 * shared text data structure. */
+{
+    TkSharedText *sharedPtr = (TkSharedText *) clientData;
+    int res, objc;
+    Tcl_Obj **objv;
+    TkText *textPtr;
+
+    res = Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv);
+    if (res != TCL_OK) {
+	return res;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Invalidate any selection retrievals in progress.
+     * If possible, use a real text widget to perform the undo/redo action
+     * (i.e. insertion or deletion of text). This provides maximum
+     * compatibility with older versions of Tk, in which the user may rename
+     * the text widget to allow capture of undo or redo actions.
+     *
+     * In particular, this sorting of capture is useful in text editors based
+     * on the Tk text widget, which need to know which new text needs
+     * re-coloring.
+     *
+     * It would be better if the text widget provided some other mechanism to
+     * allow capture of this information ("What has just changed in the text
+     * widget?"). What we have here is not entirely satisfactory under all
+     * circumstances.
+     */
+
+    textPtr = sharedPtr->peers;
+    while (textPtr != NULL) {
+	if (textPtr->start == NULL && textPtr->end == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *cmdNameObj, *evalObj;
+
+	    evalObj = Tcl_NewObj();
+	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(evalObj);
+
+	    /*
+	     * We might wish to use the real, current command-name for the
+	     * widget, but this will break any code that has over-ridden the
+	     * widget, and is expecting to observe the insert/delete actions
+	     * which are caused by undo/redo operations.
+	     *
+	     * cmdNameObj = Tcl_NewObj();
+	     * Tcl_GetCommandFullName(interp, textPtr->widgetCmd, cmdNameObj);
+	     *
+	     * While such interception is not explicitly documented as
+	     * supported, it does occur, and so until we can provide some
+	     * alternative mechanism for such code to do what it needs, we
+	     * allow it to take place here.
+	     */
+
+	    cmdNameObj = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), -1);
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, evalObj, cmdNameObj);
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendList(NULL, evalObj, objPtr);
+	    res = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, evalObj, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(evalObj);
+	    return res;
+	}
+	textPtr = textPtr->next;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If there's no current text widget which shows everything, then we fall
+     * back on acting directly. This means there is no way to intercept from
+     * the Tcl level.
      */
 
-    textPtr->abortSelections = 1;
+    return SharedTextObjCmd((ClientData)sharedPtr, interp, objc+1, objv-1);
 }
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * DeleteChars --
+ * CountIndices --
+ *
+ *	This function implements most of the functionality of the "count"
+ *	widget command.
  *
- *	This procedure implements most of the functionality of the
- *	"delete" widget command.
+ *	Note that 'textPtr' is only used if we need to check for elided
+ *	attributes, i.e. if type is COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES or
+ *	COUNT_DISPLAY_CHARS
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl result, and leaves an error message
- *	in textPtr->interp if there is an error.
+ *	Returns the number of characters in the range.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Characters get deleted from the text.
+ *	None.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-DeleteChars(textPtr, index1String, index2String, indexPtr1, indexPtr2)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information about text widget. */
-    CONST char *index1String;	/* String describing location of first
-				 * character to delete. */
-    CONST char *index2String;	/* String describing location of last
-				 * character to delete.  NULL means just
-				 * delete the one character given by
-				 * index1String. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr1;	/* index describing location of first
+CountIndices(
+    const TkText *textPtr,	/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr1,
+				/* Index describing location of first
 				 * character to delete. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr2;	/* index describing location of last
-				 * character to delete.  NULL means just
-				 * delete the one character given by
-				 * indexPtr1. */
+    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr2,
+				/* Index describing location of last character
+				 * to delete. NULL means just delete the one
+				 * character given by indexPtr1. */
+    TkTextCountType type)	/* The kind of indices to count. */
+{
+    /*
+     * Order the starting and stopping indices.
+     */
+
+    int compare = TkTextIndexCmp(indexPtr1, indexPtr2);
+
+    if (compare == 0) {
+	return 0;
+    } else if (compare > 0) {
+	return -TkTextIndexCount(textPtr, indexPtr2, indexPtr1, type);
+    } else {
+	return TkTextIndexCount(textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, type);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DeleteIndexRange --
+ *
+ *	This function implements most of the functionality of the "delete"
+ *	widget command.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl result, currently always TCL_OK.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Characters and other entities (windows, images) get deleted from the
+ *	text.
+ *
+ *	If 'viewUpdate' is true, we may adjust the window contents'
+ *	y-position, and scrollbar setting.
+ *
+ *	If 'viewUpdate' is false, true we can guarantee that textPtr->topIndex
+ *	points to a valid TkTextLine after this function returns. However, if
+ *	'viewUpdate' is false, then there is no such guarantee (since
+ *	topIndex.linePtr can be garbage). The caller is expected to take
+ *	actions to ensure the topIndex is validated before laying out the
+ *	window again.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+DeleteIndexRange(
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr,/* Shared portion of peer widgets. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr1,
+				/* Index describing location of first
+				 * character (or other entity) to delete. */
+    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr2,
+				/* Index describing location of last
+				 * character (or other entity) to delete.
+				 * NULL means just delete the one character
+				 * given by indexPtr1. */
+    int viewUpdate)		/* Update vertical view if set. */
 {
-    int line1, line2, line, byteIndex, resetView;
+    int line1, line2;
     TkTextIndex index1, index2;
-    char indexBuffer[TK_POS_CHARS];
+    TkText *tPtr;
+    int *lineAndByteIndex;
+    int resetViewCount;
+    int pixels[2*PIXEL_CLIENTS];
+
+    if (sharedTextPtr == NULL) {
+	sharedTextPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr;
+    }
 
     /*
-     * Parse the starting and stopping indices.
+     * Prepare the starting and stopping indices.
      */
 
-    if (index1String != NULL) {
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(textPtr->interp, textPtr, index1String, &index1)
-		!= TCL_OK) {
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	}
-	if (index2String != NULL) {
-	    if (TkTextGetIndex(textPtr->interp, textPtr, index2String, &index2)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    index2 = index1;
-	    TkTextIndexForwChars(&index2, 1, &index2);
-	}
+    index1 = *indexPtr1;
+    if (indexPtr2 != NULL) {
+	index2 = *indexPtr2;
     } else {
-	index1 = *indexPtr1;
-	if (indexPtr2 != NULL) {
-	    index2 = *indexPtr2;
-	} else {
-	    index2 = index1;
-	    TkTextIndexForwChars(&index2, 1, &index2);
-	}
+	index2 = index1;
+	TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, &index2, 1, &index2, COUNT_INDICES);
     }
 
     /*
@@ -1558,32 +2987,33 @@ DeleteChars(textPtr, index1String, index2String, indexPtr1, indexPtr2)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The code below is ugly, but it's needed to make sure there
-     * is always a dummy empty line at the end of the text.  If the
-     * final newline of the file (just before the dummy line) is being
-     * deleted, then back up index to just before the newline.  If
-     * there is a newline just before the first character being deleted,
-     * then back up the first index too, so that an even number of lines
-     * gets deleted.  Furthermore, remove any tags that are present on
-     * the newline that isn't going to be deleted after all (this simulates
-     * deleting the newline and then adding a "clean" one back again).
+     * The code below is ugly, but it's needed to make sure there is always a
+     * dummy empty line at the end of the text. If the final newline of the
+     * file (just before the dummy line) is being deleted, then back up index
+     * to just before the newline. If there is a newline just before the first
+     * character being deleted, then back up the first index too, so that an
+     * even number of lines gets deleted. Furthermore, remove any tags that
+     * are present on the newline that isn't going to be deleted after all
+     * (this simulates deleting the newline and then adding a "clean" one back
+     * again). Note that index1 and index2 might now be equal again which
+     * means that no text will be deleted but tags might be removed.
      */
 
-    line1 = TkBTreeLineIndex(index1.linePtr);
-    line2 = TkBTreeLineIndex(index2.linePtr);
-    if (line2 == TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree)) {
+    line1 = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, index1.linePtr);
+    line2 = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, index2.linePtr);
+    if (line2 == TkBTreeNumLines(sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr)) {
 	TkTextTag **arrayPtr;
 	int arraySize, i;
 	TkTextIndex oldIndex2;
 
 	oldIndex2 = index2;
-	TkTextIndexBackChars(&oldIndex2, 1, &index2);
+	TkTextIndexBackChars(NULL, &oldIndex2, 1, &index2, COUNT_INDICES);
 	line2--;
 	if ((index1.byteIndex == 0) && (line1 != 0)) {
-	    TkTextIndexBackChars(&index1, 1, &index1);
+	    TkTextIndexBackChars(NULL, &index1, 1, &index1, COUNT_INDICES);
 	    line1--;
 	}
-	arrayPtr = TkBTreeGetTags(&index2, &arraySize);
+	arrayPtr = TkBTreeGetTags(&index2, NULL, &arraySize);
 	if (arrayPtr != NULL) {
 	    for (i = 0; i < arraySize; i++) {
 		TkBTreeTag(&index2, &oldIndex2, arrayPtr[i], 0);
@@ -1597,144 +3027,206 @@ DeleteChars(textPtr, index1String, index2String, indexPtr1, indexPtr2)
 	 * We are deleting more than one line. For speed, we remove all tags
 	 * from the range first. If we don't do this, the code below can (when
 	 * there are many tags) grow non-linearly in execution time.
-	 * [Bug 1456342]
 	 */
 
 	Tcl_HashSearch search;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+	int i;
 
-	for (hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->tagTable, &search);
-	     hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	for (i=0, hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&sharedTextPtr->tagTable, &search);
+		hPtr != NULL; i++, hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	    TkTextTag *tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 
 	    TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2, tagPtr, 0);
 	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Special case for the sel tag which is not in the hash table. We
+	 * need to do this once for each peer text widget.
+	 */
+
+	for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ;
+		tPtr = tPtr->next) {
+	    if (TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2, tPtr->selTagPtr, 0)) {
+		/*
+		 * Send an event that the selection changed. This is
+		 * equivalent to:
+		 *	event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>
+		 */
+
+		TkTextSelectionEvent(textPtr);
+		tPtr->abortSelections = 1;
+	    }
+	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Tell the display what's about to happen so it can discard
-     * obsolete display information, then do the deletion.  Also,
-     * if the deletion involves the top line on the screen, then
-     * we have to reset the view (the deletion will invalidate
-     * textPtr->topIndex).  Compute what the new first character
-     * will be, then do the deletion, then reset the view.
+     * Tell the display what's about to happen so it can discard obsolete
+     * display information, then do the deletion. Also, if the deletion
+     * involves the top line on the screen, then we have to reset the view
+     * (the deletion will invalidate textPtr->topIndex). Compute what the new
+     * first character will be, then do the deletion, then reset the view.
      */
 
-    TkTextChanged(textPtr, &index1, &index2);
-    resetView = 0;
-    line = 0;
-    byteIndex = 0;
-    if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index2, &textPtr->topIndex) >= 0) {
-	if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index1, &textPtr->topIndex) <= 0) {
-	    /*
-	     * Deletion range straddles topIndex: use the beginning
-	     * of the range as the new topIndex.
-	     */
+    TkTextChanged(sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index1, &index2);
 
-	    resetView = 1;
-	    line = line1;
-	    byteIndex = index1.byteIndex;
-	} else if (index1.linePtr == textPtr->topIndex.linePtr) {
+    resetViewCount = 0;
+    if (sharedTextPtr->refCount > PIXEL_CLIENTS) {
+	lineAndByteIndex = (int *)
+		ckalloc(sizeof(int) * 2 * sharedTextPtr->refCount);
+    } else {
+	lineAndByteIndex = pixels;
+    }
+    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; tPtr = tPtr->next) {
+	int line = 0;
+	int byteIndex = 0;
+	int resetView = 0;
+
+	if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index2, &tPtr->topIndex) >= 0) {
+	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index1, &tPtr->topIndex) <= 0) {
+		/*
+		 * Deletion range straddles topIndex: use the beginning of the
+		 * range as the new topIndex.
+		 */
+
+		resetView = 1;
+		line = line1;
+		byteIndex = index1.byteIndex;
+	    } else if (index1.linePtr == tPtr->topIndex.linePtr) {
+		/*
+		 * Deletion range starts on top line but after topIndex. Use
+		 * the current topIndex as the new one.
+		 */
+
+		resetView = 1;
+		line = line1;
+		byteIndex = tPtr->topIndex.byteIndex;
+            } else {
+                /*
+                 * Deletion range starts after the top line. This peers's view
+                 * will not need to be reset. Nothing to do.
+                 */
+	    }
+	} else if (index2.linePtr == tPtr->topIndex.linePtr) {
 	    /*
-	     * Deletion range starts on top line but after topIndex.
-	     * Use the current topIndex as the new one.
+	     * Deletion range ends on top line but before topIndex. Figure out
+	     * what will be the new character index for the character
+	     * currently pointed to by topIndex.
 	     */
 
 	    resetView = 1;
-	    line = line1;
-	    byteIndex = textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex;
+	    line = line2;
+	    byteIndex = tPtr->topIndex.byteIndex;
+	    if (index1.linePtr != index2.linePtr) {
+		byteIndex -= index2.byteIndex;
+	    } else {
+		byteIndex -= (index2.byteIndex - index1.byteIndex);
+	    }
+        } else {
+            /*
+             * Deletion range ends before the top line. This peers's view
+             * will not need to be reset. Nothing to do.
+             */
 	}
-    } else if (index2.linePtr == textPtr->topIndex.linePtr) {
-	/*
-	 * Deletion range ends on top line but before topIndex.
-	 * Figure out what will be the new character index for
-	 * the character currently pointed to by topIndex.
-	 */
-
-	resetView = 1;
-	line = line2;
-	byteIndex = textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex;
-	if (index1.linePtr != index2.linePtr) {
-	    byteIndex -= index2.byteIndex;
+	if (resetView) {
+	    lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount] = line;
+	    lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount+1] = byteIndex;
 	} else {
-	    byteIndex -= (index2.byteIndex - index1.byteIndex);
+	    lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount] = -1;
 	}
+	resetViewCount+=2;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Push the deletion on the undo stack
+     * Push the deletion on the undo stack if something was actually deleted.
      */
 
-    if (textPtr->undo) {
-	CONST char *cmdName;
-	Tcl_DString ds;
-	Tcl_DString actionCommand;
-	Tcl_DString revertCommand;
-
-	if (textPtr->autoSeparators
-		&& (textPtr->lastEditMode != TK_TEXT_EDIT_DELETE)) {
-	   TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(textPtr->undoStack);
-	}
-
-	textPtr->lastEditMode = TK_TEXT_EDIT_DELETE;
-	cmdName = Tcl_GetCommandName(textPtr->interp, textPtr->widgetCmd);
+    if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index1, &index2) < 0) {
+	if (sharedTextPtr->undo) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *get;
 
-	Tcl_DStringInit(&actionCommand);
-	Tcl_DStringInit(&revertCommand);
-
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&actionCommand, cmdName);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, " delete ", -1);
-	TkTextPrintIndex(&index1, indexBuffer);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, indexBuffer, -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, " ", -1);
-	TkTextPrintIndex(&index2, indexBuffer);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, indexBuffer, -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, "; ", -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&actionCommand, cmdName);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, " mark set insert ", -1);
-	TkTextPrintIndex(&index1, indexBuffer);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand,indexBuffer, -1);
-
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, "; ", -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&actionCommand, cmdName);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&actionCommand, " see insert", -1);
+	    if (sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators
+		    && (sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode != TK_TEXT_EDIT_DELETE)) {
+		TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
+	    }
 
-	TextGetText(&index1, &index2, &ds);
+	    sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode = TK_TEXT_EDIT_DELETE;
 
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&revertCommand, cmdName);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, " insert ", -1);
-	TkTextPrintIndex(&index1, indexBuffer);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, indexBuffer, -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, " ", -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&revertCommand, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds));
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, "; ", -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&revertCommand, cmdName);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, " mark set insert ", -1);
-	TkTextPrintIndex(&index2, indexBuffer);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, indexBuffer, -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, "; ", -1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&revertCommand, cmdName);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&revertCommand, " see insert", -1);
+	    get = TextGetText(textPtr, &index1, &index2, 0);
+	    TextPushUndoAction(textPtr, get, 0, &index1, &index2);
+	}
+	sharedTextPtr->stateEpoch++;
 
-	TkUndoPushAction(textPtr->undoStack, &actionCommand, &revertCommand);
+	TkBTreeDeleteIndexRange(sharedTextPtr->tree, &index1, &index2);
 
-	Tcl_DStringFree(&actionCommand);
-	Tcl_DStringFree(&revertCommand);
+    	UpdateDirtyFlag(sharedTextPtr);
     }
-    TkBTreeDeleteChars(&index1, &index2);
-
-    updateDirtyFlag(textPtr);
 
-    if (resetView) {
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, line, byteIndex, &index1);
-	TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index1, 0);
+    resetViewCount = 0;
+    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; tPtr = tPtr->next) {
+	int line = lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount];
+
+	if (line != -1) {
+	    int byteIndex = lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount+1];
+	    TkTextIndex indexTmp;
+
+	    if (tPtr == textPtr) {
+                if (viewUpdate) {
+                    /*
+                     * line cannot be before -startline of textPtr because
+                     * this line corresponds to an index which is necessarily
+                     * between "1.0" and "end" relative to textPtr.
+                     * Therefore no need to clamp line to the -start/-end
+                     * range.
+                     */
+
+		    TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, line,
+			    byteIndex, &indexTmp);
+		    TkTextSetYView(tPtr, &indexTmp, 0);
+		}
+	    } else {
+                TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedTextPtr->tree, tPtr, line,
+			byteIndex, &indexTmp);
+                /*
+                 * line may be before -startline of tPtr and must be
+                 * clamped to -startline before providing it to
+                 * TkTextSetYView otherwise lines before -startline
+                 * would be displayed.
+                 * There is no need to worry about -endline however,
+                 * because the view will only be reset if the deletion
+                 * involves the TOP line of the screen
+                 */
+
+                if (tPtr->start != NULL) {
+                    int start;
+                    TkTextIndex indexStart;
+
+                    start = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, tPtr->start);
+                    TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL, start,
+			    0, &indexStart);
+                    if (TkTextIndexCmp(&indexTmp, &indexStart) < 0) {
+                        indexTmp = indexStart;
+                    }
+                }
+		TkTextSetYView(tPtr, &indexTmp, 0);
+	    }
+	}
+	resetViewCount += 2;
+    }
+    if (sharedTextPtr->refCount > PIXEL_CLIENTS) {
+	ckfree((char *) lineAndByteIndex);
     }
 
-    /*
-     * Invalidate any selection retrievals in progress.
-     */
+    if (line1 >= line2) {
+	/*
+	 * Invalidate any selection retrievals in progress, assuming we didn't
+	 * check for this case above.
+	 */
 
-    textPtr->abortSelections = 1;
+	for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; tPtr = tPtr->next) {
+	    tPtr->abortSelections = 1;
+	}
+    }
 
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -1744,15 +3236,15 @@ DeleteChars(textPtr, index1String, index2String, indexPtr1, indexPtr2)
  *
  * TextFetchSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is called back by Tk when the selection is
- *	requested by someone.  It returns part or all of the selection
- *	in a buffer provided by the caller.
+ *	This function is called back by Tk when the selection is requested by
+ *	someone. It returns part or all of the selection in a buffer provided
+ *	by the caller.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the number of non-NULL bytes stored
- *	at buffer.  Buffer is filled (or partially filled) with a
- *	NULL-terminated string containing part or all of the selection,
- *	as given by offset and maxBytes.
+ *	The return value is the number of non-NULL bytes stored at buffer.
+ *	Buffer is filled (or partially filled) with a NULL-terminated string
+ *	containing part or all of the selection, as given by offset and
+ *	maxBytes.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1761,15 +3253,14 @@ DeleteChars(textPtr, index1String, index2String, indexPtr1, indexPtr2)
  */
 
 static int
-TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about text widget. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset within selection of first
-					 * character to be returned. */
-    char *buffer;			/* Location in which to place
-					 * selection. */
-    int maxBytes;			/* Maximum number of bytes to place
-					 * at buffer, not including terminating
-					 * NULL character. */
+TextFetchSelection(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about text widget. */
+    int offset,			/* Offset within selection of first character
+				 * to be returned. */
+    char *buffer,		/* Location in which to place selection. */
+    int maxBytes)		/* Maximum number of bytes to place at buffer,
+				 * not including terminating NULL
+				 * character. */
 {
     register TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData;
     TkTextIndex eof;
@@ -1782,20 +3273,21 @@ TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the beginning of the next range of selected text.  Note:  if
-     * the selection is being retrieved in multiple pieces (offset != 0)
-     * and some modification has been made to the text that affects the
-     * selection then reject the selection request (make 'em start over
-     * again).
+     * Find the beginning of the next range of selected text. Note: if the
+     * selection is being retrieved in multiple pieces (offset != 0) and some
+     * modification has been made to the text that affects the selection then
+     * reject the selection request (make 'em start over again).
      */
 
     if (offset == 0) {
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, 0, 0, &textPtr->selIndex);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0,
+		&textPtr->selIndex);
 	textPtr->abortSelections = 0;
     } else if (textPtr->abortSelections) {
 	return 0;
     }
-    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree), 0, &eof);
+    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+	    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr), 0, &eof);
     TkBTreeStartSearch(&textPtr->selIndex, &eof, textPtr->selTagPtr, &search);
     if (!TkBTreeCharTagged(&textPtr->selIndex, textPtr->selTagPtr)) {
 	if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) {
@@ -1810,8 +3302,8 @@ TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
 
     /*
      * Each iteration through the outer loop below scans one selected range.
-     * Each iteration through the inner loop scans one segment in the
-     * selected range.
+     * Each iteration through the inner loop scans one segment in the selected
+     * range.
      */
 
     count = 0;
@@ -1821,18 +3313,18 @@ TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
 	 */
 
 	if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) {
-	    panic("TextFetchSelection couldn't find end of range");
+	    Tcl_Panic("TextFetchSelection couldn't find end of range");
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Copy information from character segments into the buffer
-	 * until either we run out of space in the buffer or we get
-	 * to the end of this range of text.
+	 * Copy information from character segments into the buffer until
+	 * either we run out of space in the buffer or we get to the end of
+	 * this range of text.
 	 */
 
 	while (1) {
 	    if (maxBytes == 0) {
-		goto done;
+		goto fetchDone;
 	    }
 	    segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&textPtr->selIndex, &offsetInSeg);
 	    chunkSize = segPtr->size - offsetInSeg;
@@ -1852,14 +3344,14 @@ TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
 		}
 	    }
 	    if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType)
-		    && !TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &textPtr->selIndex)) {
-		memcpy((VOID *) buffer, (VOID *) (segPtr->body.chars
-			+ offsetInSeg), (size_t) chunkSize);
+		    && !TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &textPtr->selIndex, NULL)) {
+		memcpy(buffer, segPtr->body.chars + offsetInSeg,
+			(size_t) chunkSize);
 		buffer += chunkSize;
 		maxBytes -= chunkSize;
 		count += chunkSize;
 	    }
-	    TkTextIndexForwBytes(&textPtr->selIndex, chunkSize,
+	    TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &textPtr->selIndex, chunkSize,
 		    &textPtr->selIndex);
 	}
 
@@ -1873,7 +3365,7 @@ TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
 	textPtr->selIndex = search.curIndex;
     }
 
-    done:
+  fetchDone:
     *buffer = 0;
     return count;
 }
@@ -1883,11 +3375,10 @@ TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  *
  * TkTextLostSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is called back by Tk when the selection is
- *	grabbed away from a text widget.  On Windows and Mac systems, we
- *	want to remember the selection for the next time the focus
- *	enters the window.  On Unix, just remove the "sel" tag from
- *	everything in the widget.
+ *	This function is called back by Tk when the selection is grabbed away
+ *	from a text widget. On Windows and Mac systems, we want to remember
+ *	the selection for the next time the focus enters the window. On Unix,
+ *	just remove the "sel" tag from everything in the widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1899,11 +3390,10 @@ TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  */
 
 void
-TkTextLostSelection(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about text widget. */
+TkTextLostSelection(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about text widget. */
 {
     register TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData;
-    XEvent event;
 
     if (TkpAlwaysShowSelection(textPtr->tkwin)) {
 	TkTextIndex start, end;
@@ -1913,30 +3403,26 @@ TkTextLostSelection(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * On Windows and Mac systems, we want to remember the selection
-	 * for the next time the focus enters the window.  On Unix, 
-	 * just remove the "sel" tag from everything in the widget.
+	 * On Windows and Mac systems, we want to remember the selection for
+	 * the next time the focus enters the window. On Unix, just remove the
+	 * "sel" tag from everything in the widget.
 	 */
 
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, 0, 0, &start);
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree), 0, &end);
-	TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, &start, &end, textPtr->selTagPtr, 1);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		0, 0, &start);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr),
+		0, &end);
+	TkTextRedrawTag(NULL, textPtr, &start, &end, textPtr->selTagPtr, 1);
 	TkBTreeTag(&start, &end, textPtr->selTagPtr, 0);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Send an event that the selection changed.  This is equivalent to
-     * "event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>"
+     * Send an event that the selection changed. This is equivalent to:
+     *	   event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>
      */
 
-    memset((VOID *) &event, 0, sizeof(event));
-    event.xany.type = VirtualEvent;
-    event.xany.serial = NextRequest(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin));
-    event.xany.send_event = False;
-    event.xany.window = Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin);
-    event.xany.display = Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin);
-    ((XVirtualEvent *) &event)->name = Tk_GetUid("Selection");
-    Tk_HandleEvent(&event);
+    TkTextSelectionEvent(textPtr);
 
     textPtr->flags &= ~GOT_SELECTION;
 }
@@ -1944,31 +3430,78 @@ TkTextLostSelection(clientData)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * TkTextSelectionEvent --
+ *
+ *	When anything relevant to the "sel" tag has been changed, call this
+ *	function to generate a <<Selection>> event.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If <<Selection>> bindings are present, they will trigger.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkTextSelectionEvent(
+    TkText *textPtr)
+{
+    /*
+     * Send an event that the selection changed. This is equivalent to:
+     *     event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>
+     */
+
+    union {XEvent general; XVirtualEvent virtual;} event;
+
+    memset(&event, 0, sizeof(event));
+    event.general.xany.type = VirtualEvent;
+    event.general.xany.serial = NextRequest(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin));
+    event.general.xany.send_event = False;
+    event.general.xany.window = Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin);
+    event.general.xany.display = Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin);
+    event.virtual.name = Tk_GetUid("Selection");
+    Tk_HandleEvent(&event.general);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TextBlinkProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called as a timer handler to blink the
- *	insertion cursor off and on.
+ *	This function is called as a timer handler to blink the insertion
+ *	cursor off and on.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The cursor gets turned on or off, redisplay gets invoked,
- *	and this procedure reschedules itself.
+ *	The cursor gets turned on or off, redisplay gets invoked, and this
+ *	function reschedules itself.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TextBlinkProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to record describing text. */
+TextBlinkProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to record describing text. */
 {
     register TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData;
     TkTextIndex index;
-    int x, y, w, h;
+    int x, y, w, h, charWidth;
 
-    if ((textPtr->state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) ||
+    if ((textPtr->state == TK_TEXT_STATE_DISABLED) ||
 	    !(textPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) || (textPtr->insertOffTime == 0)) {
+	if ((textPtr->insertOffTime == 0) && !(textPtr->flags & INSERT_ON)) {
+	    /*
+	     * The widget was configured to have zero offtime while the
+	     * insertion point was not displayed. We have to display it once.
+	     */
+
+	    textPtr->flags |= INSERT_ON;
+	    goto redrawInsert;
+	}
 	return;
     }
     if (textPtr->flags & INSERT_ON) {
@@ -1980,21 +3513,111 @@ TextBlinkProc(clientData)
 	textPtr->insertBlinkHandler = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(
 		textPtr->insertOnTime, TextBlinkProc, (ClientData) textPtr);
     }
+  redrawInsert:
     TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, textPtr->insertMarkPtr, &index);
-    if (TkTextCharBbox(textPtr, &index, &x, &y, &w, &h) == 0) {
-	TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, x - textPtr->insertWidth / 2, y,
-		textPtr->insertWidth, h);
+    if (TkTextIndexBbox(textPtr, &index, &x, &y, &w, &h, &charWidth) == 0) {
+	if (textPtr->insertCursorType) {
+	    /* Block cursor */
+	    TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, x - textPtr->width / 2, y,
+		    charWidth + textPtr->insertWidth / 2, h);
+	} else {
+	    /* I-beam cursor */
+	    TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, x - textPtr->insertWidth / 2, y,
+		    textPtr->insertWidth, h);
+	}
     }
 }
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * TextInsertCmd --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "insert" and "replace" widget
+ *	commands for text widgets.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	See the user documentation.
+ *
+ *	If 'viewUpdate' is true, we may adjust the window contents'
+ *	y-position, and scrollbar setting.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+TextInsertCmd(
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr,/* Shared portion of peer widgets. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[],	/* Argument objects. */
+    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr,/* Index at which to insert. */
+    int viewUpdate)		/* Update the view if set. */
+{
+    TkTextIndex index1, index2;
+    int j;
+
+    if (sharedTextPtr == NULL) {
+	sharedTextPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr;
+    }
+
+    index1 = *indexPtr;
+    for (j = 0; j < objc; j += 2) {
+	/*
+	 * Here we rely on this call to modify index1 if it is outside the
+	 * acceptable range. In particular, if index1 is "end", it must be set
+	 * to the last allowable index for insertion, otherwise subsequent tag
+	 * insertions will fail.
+	 */
+
+	int length = InsertChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, &index1, objv[j],
+		viewUpdate);
+
+	if (objc > (j+1)) {
+	    Tcl_Obj **tagNamePtrs;
+	    TkTextTag **oldTagArrayPtr;
+	    int numTags;
+
+	    TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &index1, length, &index2);
+	    oldTagArrayPtr = TkBTreeGetTags(&index1, NULL, &numTags);
+	    if (oldTagArrayPtr != NULL) {
+		int i;
+
+		for (i = 0; i < numTags; i++) {
+		    TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2, oldTagArrayPtr[i], 0);
+		}
+		ckfree((char *) oldTagArrayPtr);
+	    }
+	    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[j+1], &numTags,
+		    &tagNamePtrs) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    } else {
+		int i;
+
+		for (i = 0; i < numTags; i++) {
+		    const char *strTag = Tcl_GetString(tagNamePtrs[i]);
+
+		    TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2,
+			    TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, strTag, NULL), 1);
+		}
+		index1 = index2;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TextSearchCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "search" widget command
- *	for text widgets.  See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "search" widget command for
+ *	text widgets. See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -2006,393 +3629,680 @@ TextBlinkProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static int
-TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+TextSearchCmd(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    int backwards, exact, searchElide, c, i, argsLeft, noCase, leftToScan;
-    size_t length;
-    int numLines, startingLine, startingByte, lineNum, firstByte, lastByte;
-    int code, matchLength, matchByte, passes, stopLine, searchWholeText;
-    int patLength;
-    CONST char *arg, *pattern, *varName, *p, *startOfLine;
-    char buffer[20];
-    TkTextIndex index, stopIndex;
-    Tcl_DString line, patDString;
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;
-    TkTextIndex curIndex;
-    Tcl_Obj *patObj = NULL;
-    Tcl_RegExp regexp = NULL;		/* Initialization needed only to
-					 * prevent compiler warning. */
+    int i, argsLeft, code;
+    SearchSpec searchSpec;
+
+    static const char *switchStrings[] = {
+	"--", "-all", "-backwards", "-count", "-elide", "-exact", "-forwards",
+	"-hidden", "-nocase", "-nolinestop", "-overlap", "-regexp",
+	"-strictlimits", NULL
+    };
+    enum SearchSwitches {
+	SEARCH_END, SEARCH_ALL, SEARCH_BACK, SEARCH_COUNT, SEARCH_ELIDE,
+	SEARCH_EXACT, SEARCH_FWD, SEARCH_HIDDEN, SEARCH_NOCASE,
+	SEARCH_NOLINESTOP, SEARCH_OVERLAP, SEARCH_REGEXP, SEARCH_STRICTLIMITS
+    };
+
+    /*
+     * Set up the search specification, including the last 4 fields which are
+     * text widget specific.
+     */
+
+    searchSpec.exact = 1;
+    searchSpec.noCase = 0;
+    searchSpec.all = 0;
+    searchSpec.backwards = 0;
+    searchSpec.varPtr = NULL;
+    searchSpec.countPtr = NULL;
+    searchSpec.resPtr = NULL;
+    searchSpec.searchElide = 0;
+    searchSpec.noLineStop = 0;
+    searchSpec.overlap = 0;
+    searchSpec.strictLimits = 0;
+    searchSpec.numLines =
+	    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr);
+    searchSpec.clientData = (ClientData)textPtr;
+    searchSpec.addLineProc = &TextSearchAddNextLine;
+    searchSpec.foundMatchProc = &TextSearchFoundMatch;
+    searchSpec.lineIndexProc = &TextSearchGetLineIndex;
 
     /*
      * Parse switches and other arguments.
      */
 
-    exact = 1;
-    searchElide = 0;
-    curIndex.tree = textPtr->tree;
-    backwards = 0;
-    noCase = 0;
-    varName = NULL;
-    for (i = 2; i < argc; i++) {
-	arg = argv[i];
-	if (arg[0] != '-') {
+    for (i=2 ; i<objc ; i++) {
+	int index;
+	if (Tcl_GetString(objv[i])[0] != '-') {
 	    break;
 	}
-	length = strlen(arg);
-	if (length < 2) {
-	    badSwitch:
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad switch \"", arg,
-		    "\": must be --, -backward, -count, -elide, -exact, ",
-		    "-forward, -nocase, or -regexp", (char *) NULL);
+
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], switchStrings, "switch", 0,
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    /*
+	     * Hide the -hidden option.
+	     */
+
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad switch \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
+		    "\": must be --, -all, -backward, -count, -elide, ",
+		    "-exact, -forward, -nocase, -nolinestop, -overlap, ",
+		    "-regexp, or -strictlimits", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	c = arg[1];
-	if ((c == 'b') && (strncmp(argv[i], "-backwards", length) == 0)) {
-	    backwards = 1;
-	} else if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(argv[i], "-count", length) == 0)) {
-	    if (i >= (argc-1)) {
+
+	switch ((enum SearchSwitches) index) {
+	case SEARCH_END:
+	    i++;
+	    goto endOfSwitchProcessing;
+	case SEARCH_ALL:
+	    searchSpec.all = 1;
+	    break;
+	case SEARCH_BACK:
+	    searchSpec.backwards = 1;
+	    break;
+	case SEARCH_COUNT:
+	    if (i >= objc-1) {
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "no value given for \"-count\" option",
 			TCL_STATIC);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    i++;
-	    varName = argv[i];
-	} else if ((c == 'e') && (length > 2)
-		&& (strncmp(argv[i], "-exact", length) == 0)) {
-	    exact = 1;
-	} else if ((c == 'e') && (length > 2)
-		&& (strncmp(argv[i], "-elide", length) == 0)) {
-	    searchElide = 1;
-	} else if ((c == 'h') && (strncmp(argv[i], "-hidden", length) == 0)) {
+
 	    /*
-	     * -hidden is kept around for backwards compatibility with
-	     * the dash patch, but -elide is the official option
+	     * Assumption objv[i] isn't going to disappear on us during this
+	     * function, which is fair.
 	     */
-	    searchElide = 1;
-	} else if ((c == 'f') && (strncmp(argv[i], "-forwards", length) == 0)) {
-	    backwards = 0;
-	} else if ((c == 'n') && (strncmp(argv[i], "-nocase", length) == 0)) {
-	    noCase = 1;
-	} else if ((c == 'r') && (strncmp(argv[i], "-regexp", length) == 0)) {
-	    exact = 0;
-	} else if ((c == '-') && (strncmp(argv[i], "--", length) == 0)) {
-	    i++;
+
+	    searchSpec.varPtr = objv[i];
 	    break;
-	} else {
-	    goto badSwitch;
+	case SEARCH_ELIDE:
+	case SEARCH_HIDDEN:
+	    searchSpec.searchElide = 1;
+	    break;
+	case SEARCH_EXACT:
+	    searchSpec.exact = 1;
+	    break;
+	case SEARCH_FWD:
+	    searchSpec.backwards = 0;
+	    break;
+	case SEARCH_NOCASE:
+	    searchSpec.noCase = 1;
+	    break;
+	case SEARCH_NOLINESTOP:
+	    searchSpec.noLineStop = 1;
+	    break;
+	case SEARCH_OVERLAP:
+	    searchSpec.overlap = 1;
+	    break;
+	case SEARCH_STRICTLIMITS:
+	    searchSpec.strictLimits = 1;
+	    break;
+	case SEARCH_REGEXP:
+	    searchSpec.exact = 0;
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    Tcl_Panic("unexpected switch fallthrough");
 	}
     }
-    argsLeft = argc - (i+2);
+  endOfSwitchProcessing:
+
+    argsLeft = objc - (i+2);
     if ((argsLeft != 0) && (argsLeft != 1)) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		argv[0], " search ?switches? pattern index ?stopIndex?\"",
-		(char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		"?switches? pattern index ?stopIndex?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (searchSpec.noLineStop && searchSpec.exact) {
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, "the \"-nolinestop\" option requires the "
+		"\"-regexp\" option to be present", TCL_STATIC);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (searchSpec.overlap && !searchSpec.all) {
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, "the \"-overlap\" option requires the "
+		"\"-all\" option to be present", TCL_STATIC);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    pattern = argv[i];
 
     /*
-     * Convert the pattern to lower-case if we're supposed to ignore case.
+     * Scan through all of the lines of the text circularly, starting at the
+     * given index. 'objv[i]' is the pattern which may be an exact string or a
+     * regexp pattern depending on the flags set above.
      */
 
-    if (noCase && exact) {
-	Tcl_DStringInit(&patDString);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&patDString, pattern, -1);
-	Tcl_UtfToLower(Tcl_DStringValue(&patDString));
-	pattern = Tcl_DStringValue(&patDString);
+    code = SearchPerform(interp, &searchSpec, objv[i], objv[i+1],
+	    (argsLeft == 1 ? objv[i+2] : NULL));
+    if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	goto cleanup;
     }
 
-    Tcl_DStringInit(&line);
-    if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[i+1], &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	code = TCL_ERROR;
-	goto done;
-    }
-    numLines = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree);
-    startingLine = TkBTreeLineIndex(index.linePtr);
-    startingByte = index.byteIndex;
-    if (startingLine >= numLines) {
-	if (backwards) {
-	    startingLine = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree) - 1;
-	    startingByte = TkBTreeBytesInLine(TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree,
-		    startingLine));
-	} else {
-	    startingLine = 0;
-	    startingByte = 0;
-	}
-    }
-    if (argsLeft == 1) {
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[i+2], &stopIndex) != TCL_OK) {
+    /*
+     * Set the '-count' variable, if given.
+     */
+
+    if (searchSpec.varPtr != NULL && searchSpec.countPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(searchSpec.countPtr);
+	if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, searchSpec.varPtr, NULL,
+		searchSpec.countPtr, TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG) == NULL) {
 	    code = TCL_ERROR;
-	    goto done;
-	}
-	stopLine = TkBTreeLineIndex(stopIndex.linePtr);
-	if (!backwards && (stopLine == numLines)) {
-	    stopLine = numLines-1;
+	    goto cleanup;
 	}
-	searchWholeText = 0;
-    } else {
-	stopLine = 0;
-	searchWholeText = 1;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Scan through all of the lines of the text circularly, starting
-     * at the given index.
+     * Set the result.
      */
 
-    matchLength = patLength = 0;	/* Only needed to prevent compiler
-					 * warnings. */
-    if (exact) {
-	patLength = strlen(pattern);
-    } else {
-	patObj = Tcl_NewStringObj(pattern, -1);
-	Tcl_IncrRefCount(patObj);
-	regexp = Tcl_GetRegExpFromObj(interp, patObj,
-		(noCase ? TCL_REG_NOCASE : 0) | TCL_REG_ADVANCED);
-	if (regexp == NULL) {
-	    code = TCL_ERROR;
-	    goto done;
-	}
+    if (searchSpec.resPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, searchSpec.resPtr);
+	searchSpec.resPtr = NULL;
     }
-    lineNum = startingLine;
-    code = TCL_OK;
-    for (passes = 0; passes < 2; ) {
-	if (lineNum >= numLines) {
-	    /*
-	     * Don't search the dummy last line of the text.
-	     */
 
-	    goto nextLine;
-	}
+  cleanup:
+    if (searchSpec.countPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(searchSpec.countPtr);
+    }
+    if (searchSpec.resPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(searchSpec.resPtr);
+    }
+    return code;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TextSearchGetLineIndex --
+ *
+ *	Extract a row, text offset index position from an objPtr
+ *
+ *	This means we ignore any embedded windows/images and elidden text
+ *	(unless we are searching that).
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Standard Tcl error code (with a message in the interpreter on error
+ *	conditions).
+ *
+ *	The offset placed in offsetPosPtr is a utf-8 char* byte index for
+ *	exact searches, and a Unicode character index for regexp searches.
+ *
+ *	The line number should start at zero (searches which wrap around
+ *	assume the first line is numbered 0).
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+TextSearchGetLineIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For error messages. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* Contains a textual index like "1.2" */
+    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr,	/* Contains other search parameters. */
+    int *linePosPtr,		/* For returning the line number. */
+    int *offsetPosPtr)		/* For returning the text offset in the
+				 * line. */
+{
+    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
+    int line;
+    TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) searchSpecPtr->clientData;
+
+    indexPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objPtr);
+    if (indexPtr == NULL) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    line = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr->linePtr);
+    if (line >= searchSpecPtr->numLines) {
+	TkTextLine *linePtr;
+	int count = 0;
+	TkTextSegment *segPtr;
+
+	line = searchSpecPtr->numLines-1;
+	linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, line);
 
 	/*
-	 * Extract the text from the line.  If we're doing regular
-	 * expression matching, drop the newline from the line, so
-	 * that "$" can be used to match the end of the line.
+	 * Count the number of bytes in this line.
 	 */
 
-	linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree, lineNum);
-	curIndex.linePtr = linePtr; curIndex.byteIndex = 0;
-	for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; segPtr != NULL;
+	for (segPtr=linePtr->segPtr ; segPtr!=NULL ; segPtr=segPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    count += segPtr->size;
+	}
+	*offsetPosPtr = TextSearchIndexInLine(searchSpecPtr, linePtr, count);
+    } else {
+	*offsetPosPtr = TextSearchIndexInLine(searchSpecPtr,
+		indexPtr->linePtr, indexPtr->byteIndex);
+    }
+
+    *linePosPtr = line;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TextSearchIndexInLine --
+ *
+ *	Find textual index of 'byteIndex' in the searchable characters of
+ *	'linePtr'.
+ *
+ *	This means we ignore any embedded windows/images and elidden text
+ *	(unless we are searching that).
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The returned index is a utf-8 char* byte index for exact searches, and
+ *	a Unicode character index for regexp searches.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+TextSearchIndexInLine(
+    const SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr,
+				/* Search parameters. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr,	/* The line we're looking at. */
+    int byteIndex)		/* Index into the line. */
+{
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr;
+    TkTextIndex curIndex;
+    int index, leftToScan;
+    TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) searchSpecPtr->clientData;
+
+    index = 0;
+    curIndex.tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
+    curIndex.linePtr = linePtr; curIndex.byteIndex = 0;
+    for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr, leftToScan = byteIndex;
+	    leftToScan > 0;
+	    curIndex.byteIndex += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) &&
+		(searchSpecPtr->searchElide
+		|| !TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL))) {
+	    if (leftToScan < segPtr->size) {
+		if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
+		    index += leftToScan;
+		} else {
+		    index += Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, leftToScan);
+		}
+	    } else if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
+		index += segPtr->size;
+	    } else {
+		index += Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, -1);
+	    }
+	}
+	leftToScan -= segPtr->size;
+    }
+    return index;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TextSearchAddNextLine --
+ *
+ *	Adds a line from the text widget to the object 'theLine'.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A pointer to the TkTextLine corresponding to the given line, or NULL
+ *	if there was no available line.
+ *
+ *	Also 'lenPtr' (if non-NULL) is filled in with the total length of
+ *	'theLine' (not just what we added to it, but the length including what
+ *	was already in there). This is in bytes for an exact search and in
+ *	chars for a regexp search.
+ *
+ *	Also 'extraLinesPtr' (if non-NULL) will have its value incremented by
+ *	1 for each additional logical line we have added because a newline is
+ *	elided (this will only ever happen if we have chosen not to search
+ *	elided text, of course).
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Memory may be allocated or re-allocated for theLine's string
+ *	representation.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static ClientData
+TextSearchAddNextLine(
+    int lineNum,		/* Line we must add. */
+    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr,	/* Search parameters. */
+    Tcl_Obj *theLine,		/* Object to append to. */
+    int *lenPtr,		/* For returning the total length. */
+    int *extraLinesPtr)		/* If non-NULL, will have its value
+				 * incremented by the number of additional
+				 * logical lines which are merged into this
+				 * one by newlines being elided. */
+{
+    TkTextLine *linePtr, *thisLinePtr;
+    TkTextIndex curIndex;
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr;
+    TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) searchSpecPtr->clientData;
+    int nothingYet = 1;
+
+    /*
+     * Extract the text from the line.
+     */
+
+    linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineNum);
+    if (linePtr == NULL) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+    curIndex.tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
+    thisLinePtr = linePtr;
+
+    while (thisLinePtr != NULL) {
+	int elideWraps = 0;
+
+	curIndex.linePtr = thisLinePtr;
+	curIndex.byteIndex = 0;
+	for (segPtr = thisLinePtr->segPtr; segPtr != NULL;
 		curIndex.byteIndex += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    if ((segPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType)
-		    || (!searchElide && TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex))) {
+	    if (!searchSpecPtr->searchElide
+		    && TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL)) {
+		/*
+		 * If we reach the end of the logical line, and if we have at
+		 * least one character in the string, then we continue
+		 * wrapping to the next logical line. If there are no
+		 * characters yet, then the entire line of characters is
+		 * elided and there's no need to complicate matters by
+		 * wrapping - we'll look at the next line in due course.
+		 */
+
+		if (segPtr->nextPtr == NULL && !nothingYet) {
+		    elideWraps = 1;
+		}
+		continue;
+	    }
+	    if (segPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType) {
 		continue;
 	    }
-	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&line, segPtr->body.chars, segPtr->size);
+	    Tcl_AppendToObj(theLine, segPtr->body.chars, segPtr->size);
+	    nothingYet = 0;
 	}
-	if (!exact) {
-	    Tcl_DStringSetLength(&line, Tcl_DStringLength(&line)-1);
+	if (!elideWraps) {
+	    break;
+	}
+	lineNum++;
+	if (lineNum >= searchSpecPtr->numLines) {
+	    break;
 	}
-	startOfLine = Tcl_DStringValue(&line);
+	thisLinePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, thisLinePtr);
+	if (thisLinePtr != NULL && extraLinesPtr != NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Tell our caller we have an extra line merged in.
+	     */
 
-	/*
-	 * If we're ignoring case, convert the line to lower case.
-	 */
+	    *extraLinesPtr = (*extraLinesPtr) + 1;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If we're ignoring case, convert the line to lower case. There is no
+     * need to do this for regexp searches, since they handle a flag for this
+     * purpose.
+     */
 
-	if (noCase) {
-	    Tcl_DStringSetLength(&line,
-		    Tcl_UtfToLower(Tcl_DStringValue(&line)));
+    if (searchSpecPtr->exact && searchSpecPtr->noCase) {
+	Tcl_SetObjLength(theLine, Tcl_UtfToLower(Tcl_GetString(theLine)));
+    }
+
+    if (lenPtr != NULL) {
+	if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
+	    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(theLine, lenPtr);
+	} else {
+	    *lenPtr = Tcl_GetCharLength(theLine);
 	}
+    }
+    return (ClientData)linePtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TextSearchFoundMatch --
+ *
+ *	Stores information from a successful search.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	1 if the information was stored, 0 if the position at which the match
+ *	was found actually falls outside the allowable search region (and
+ *	therefore the search is actually complete).
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Memory may be allocated in the 'countPtr' and 'resPtr' fields of
+ *	'searchSpecPtr'. Each of those objects will have refCount zero and
+ *	must eventually be freed or stored elsewhere as appropriate.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
 
+static int
+TextSearchFoundMatch(
+    int lineNum,		/* Line on which match was found. */
+    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr,	/* Search parameters. */
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Token returned by the 'addNextLineProc',
+				 * TextSearchAddNextLine. May be NULL, in
+				 * which we case we must generate it (from
+				 * lineNum). */
+    Tcl_Obj *theLine,		/* Text from current line, only accessed for
+				 * exact searches, and is allowed to be NULL
+				 * for regexp searches. */
+    int matchOffset,		/* Offset of found item in utf-8 bytes for
+				 * exact search, Unicode chars for regexp. */
+    int matchLength)		/* Length also in bytes/chars as per search
+				 * type. */
+{
+    int numChars;
+    int leftToScan;
+    TkTextIndex curIndex, foundIndex;
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr;
+    TkTextLine *linePtr;
+    TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) searchSpecPtr->clientData;
+
+    if (lineNum == searchSpecPtr->stopLine) {
 	/*
-	 * Check for matches within the current line.  If so, and if we're
-	 * searching backwards, repeat the search to find the last match
-	 * in the line.  (Note: The lastByte should include the NULL char
-	 * so we can handle searching for end of line easier.)
+	 * If the current index is on the wrong side of the stopIndex, then
+	 * the item we just found is actually outside the acceptable range,
+	 * and the search is over.
 	 */
 
-	matchByte = -1;
-	firstByte = 0;
-	lastByte = Tcl_DStringLength(&line) + 1;
-	if (lineNum == startingLine) {
-	    int indexInDString;
+	if (searchSpecPtr->backwards ^
+		(matchOffset >= searchSpecPtr->stopOffset)) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+    }
 
-	    /*
-	     * The starting line is tricky: the first time we see it
-	     * we check one part of the line, and the second pass through
-	     * we check the other part of the line.  We have to be very
-	     * careful here because there could be embedded windows or
-	     * other things that are not in the extracted line.  Rescan
-	     * the original line to compute the index in it of the first
-	     * character.
-	     */
+    /*
+     * Calculate the character count, which may need augmenting if there are
+     * embedded windows or elidden text.
+     */
+
+    if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
+	const char *startOfLine = Tcl_GetString(theLine);
+
+	numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(startOfLine + matchOffset, matchLength);
+    } else {
+	numChars = matchLength;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If we're using strict limits checking, ensure that the match with its
+     * full length fits inside the given range.
+     */
+
+    if (searchSpecPtr->strictLimits && lineNum == searchSpecPtr->stopLine) {
+	if (searchSpecPtr->backwards ^
+		((matchOffset + numChars) > searchSpecPtr->stopOffset)) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * The index information returned by the regular expression parser only
+     * considers textual information: it doesn't account for embedded windows,
+     * elided text (when we are not searching elided text) or any other
+     * non-textual info. Scan through the line's segments again to adjust both
+     * matchChar and matchCount.
+     *
+     * We will walk through the segments of this line until we have either
+     * reached the end of the match or we have reached the end of the line.
+     */
+
+    linePtr = (TkTextLine *)clientData;
+    if (linePtr == NULL) {
+	linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		lineNum);
+    }
+
+    curIndex.tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
+
+    /*
+     * Find the starting point.
+     */
+
+    leftToScan = matchOffset;
+    while (1) {
+	curIndex.linePtr = linePtr;
+	curIndex.byteIndex = 0;
 
-	    indexInDString = startingByte;
-	    for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr, leftToScan = startingByte;
-		    leftToScan > 0; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-		if (segPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType) {
-		    indexInDString -= segPtr->size;
+	/*
+	 * Note that we allow leftToScan to be zero because we want to skip
+	 * over any preceding non-textual items.
+	 */
+
+	for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; leftToScan >= 0 && segPtr;
+		segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (segPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType) {
+		matchOffset += segPtr->size;
+	    } else if (!searchSpecPtr->searchElide
+		    && TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL)) {
+		if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
+		    matchOffset += segPtr->size;
+		} else {
+		    matchOffset += Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, -1);
 		}
+	    } else {
 		leftToScan -= segPtr->size;
 	    }
+	    curIndex.byteIndex += segPtr->size;
+	}
+	if (segPtr == NULL && leftToScan >= 0) {
+	    /*
+	     * This will only happen if we are eliding newlines.
+	     */
 
-	    passes++;
-	    if ((passes == 1) ^ backwards) {
+	    linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, linePtr);
+	    if (linePtr == NULL) {
 		/*
-		 * Only use the last part of the line.
+		 * If we reach the end of the text, we have a serious problem,
+		 * unless there's actually nothing left to look for.
 		 */
 
-		firstByte = indexInDString;
-		if ((firstByte >= Tcl_DStringLength(&line))
-			&& !((Tcl_DStringLength(&line) == 0) && !exact)) {
-		    goto nextLine;
+		if (leftToScan == 0) {
+		    break;
+		} else {
+		    Tcl_Panic("Reached end of text in a match");
 		}
-	    } else {
-		/*
-		 * Use only the first part of the line.
-		 */
-
-		lastByte = indexInDString;
 	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * We've wrapped to the beginning of the next logical line, which
+	     * has been merged with the previous one whose newline was elided.
+	     */
+
+	    lineNum++;
+	    matchOffset = 0;
+	} else {
+	    break;
 	}
-	do {
-	    int thisLength;
-	    Tcl_UniChar ch;
+    }
 
-	    if (exact) {
-		p = strstr(startOfLine + firstByte,	/* INTL: Native. */
-			pattern); 
-		if (p == NULL) {
-		    break;
-		}
-		i = p - startOfLine;
-		thisLength = patLength;
-	    } else {
-		CONST char *start, *end;
-		int match;
+    /*
+     * Calculate and store the found index in the result.
+     */
 
-		match = Tcl_RegExpExec(interp, regexp,
-			startOfLine + firstByte, startOfLine);
-		if (match < 0) {
-		    code = TCL_ERROR;
-		    goto done;
-		}
-		if (!match) {
-		    break;
-		}
-		Tcl_RegExpRange(regexp, 0, &start, &end);
-		i = start - startOfLine;
-		thisLength = end - start;
-	    }
-	    if (i >= lastByte) {
-		break;
-	    }
-	    matchByte = i;
-	    matchLength = thisLength;
-	    firstByte = i + Tcl_UtfToUniChar(startOfLine + matchByte, &ch);
-	} while (backwards);
+    if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineNum,
+		matchOffset, &foundIndex);
+    } else {
+	TkTextMakeCharIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineNum,
+		matchOffset, &foundIndex);
+    }
 
-	/*
-	 * If we found a match then we're done.  Make sure that
-	 * the match occurred before the stopping index, if one was
-	 * specified.
-	 */
+    if (searchSpecPtr->all) {
+	if (searchSpecPtr->resPtr == NULL) {
+	    searchSpecPtr->resPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
+	}
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, searchSpecPtr->resPtr,
+		TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, &foundIndex));
+    } else {
+	searchSpecPtr->resPtr = TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, &foundIndex);
+    }
 
-	if (matchByte >= 0) {
-	    int numChars;
+    /*
+     * Find the end point. Here 'leftToScan' could be negative already as a
+     * result of the above loop if the segment we reached spanned the start of
+     * the string. When we add matchLength it will become non-negative.
+     */
 
+    for (leftToScan += matchLength; leftToScan > 0;
+	    curIndex.byteIndex += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (segPtr == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * Convert the byte length to a character count.
+	     * We are on the next line - this of course should only ever
+	     * happen with searches which have matched across multiple lines.
 	     */
 
-	    numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(startOfLine + matchByte,
-		    matchLength);
-
+	    linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, linePtr);
+	    segPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
+	    curIndex.linePtr = linePtr; curIndex.byteIndex = 0;
+	}
+	if (segPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType) {
 	    /*
-	     * The index information returned by the regular expression
-	     * parser only considers textual information:  it doesn't
-	     * account for embedded windows, elided text (when we are not
-	     * searching elided text) or any other non-textual info.
-	     * Scan through the line's segments again to adjust both
-	     * matchChar and matchCount.
-	     *
-	     * We will walk through the segments of this line until we have
-	     * either reached the end of the match or we have reached the end
-	     * of the line.
+	     * Anything we didn't count in the search needs adding.
 	     */
 
-	    curIndex.linePtr = linePtr; curIndex.byteIndex = 0;
-	    for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr, leftToScan = matchByte;
-		    leftToScan >= 0 && segPtr; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-		if (segPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType || \
-			(!searchElide && TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex))) {
-		    matchByte += segPtr->size;
-		} else {
-		    leftToScan -= segPtr->size;
-		}
-		curIndex.byteIndex += segPtr->size;
-	    }
-	    for (leftToScan += matchLength; leftToScan > 0;
-		    segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-		if (segPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType) {
-		    numChars += segPtr->size;
-		    continue;
-		}
-		leftToScan -= segPtr->size;
-	    }
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineNum, matchByte, &index);
-	    if (!searchWholeText) {
-		if (!backwards && (TkTextIndexCmp(&index, &stopIndex) >= 0)) {
-		    goto done;
-		}
-		if (backwards && (TkTextIndexCmp(&index, &stopIndex) < 0)) {
-		    goto done;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (varName != NULL) {
-		sprintf(buffer, "%d", numChars);
-		if (Tcl_SetVar(interp, varName, buffer, TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
-			== NULL) {
-		    code = TCL_ERROR;
-		    goto done;
-		}
-	    }
-	    TkTextPrintIndex(&index, buffer);
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buffer, TCL_VOLATILE);
-	    goto done;
+	    numChars += segPtr->size;
+	    continue;
+	} else if (!searchSpecPtr->searchElide
+		&& TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL)) {
+	    numChars += Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, -1);
+	    continue;
+	}
+	if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
+	    leftToScan -= segPtr->size;
+	} else {
+	    leftToScan -= Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, -1);
 	}
+    }
 
-	/*
-	 * Go to the next (or previous) line;
-	 */
+    /*
+     * Now store the count result, if it is wanted.
+     */
 
-	nextLine:
-	if (backwards) {
-	    lineNum--;
-	    if (!searchWholeText) {
-		if (lineNum < stopLine) {
-		    break;
-		}
-	    } else if (lineNum < 0) {
-		lineNum = numLines-1;
+    if (searchSpecPtr->varPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *tmpPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(numChars);
+	if (searchSpecPtr->all) {
+	    if (searchSpecPtr->countPtr == NULL) {
+		searchSpecPtr->countPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
 	    }
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, searchSpecPtr->countPtr, tmpPtr);
 	} else {
-	    lineNum++;
-	    if (!searchWholeText) {
-		if (lineNum > stopLine) {
-		    break;
-		}
-	    } else if (lineNum >= numLines) {
-		lineNum = 0;
-	    }
+	    searchSpecPtr->countPtr = tmpPtr;
 	}
-	Tcl_DStringSetLength(&line, 0);
-    }
-    done:
-    Tcl_DStringFree(&line);
-    if (noCase && exact) {
-	Tcl_DStringFree(&patDString);
     }
-    if (patObj != NULL) {
-	Tcl_DecrRefCount(patObj);
-    }
-    return code;
+    return 1;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -2403,105 +4313,158 @@ TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
  *	Parses a string description of a set of tab stops.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to a malloc'ed structure holding
- *	parsed information about the tab stops.  If an error occurred
- *	then the return value is NULL and an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to a malloc'ed structure holding parsed
+ *	information about the tab stops. If an error occurred then the return
+ *	value is NULL and an error message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Memory is allocated for the structure that is returned.  It is
- *	up to the caller to free this structure when it is no longer
- *	needed.
+ *	Memory is allocated for the structure that is returned. It is up to
+ *	the caller to free this structure when it is no longer needed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 TkTextTabArray *
-TkTextGetTabs(interp, tkwin, string)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window in which the tabs will be
-					 * used. */
-    char *string;			/* Description of the tab stops.  See
-					 * the text manual entry for details. */
+TkTextGetTabs(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about the text widget. */
+    Tcl_Obj *stringPtr)		/* Description of the tab stops. See the text
+				 * manual entry for details. */
 {
-    int argc, i, count, c;
-    CONST char **argv;
+    int objc, i, count;
+    Tcl_Obj **objv;
     TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr;
     TkTextTab *tabPtr;
     Tcl_UniChar ch;
+    double prevStop, lastStop;
+    /*
+     * Map these strings to TkTextTabAlign values.
+     */
+    static const char *tabOptionStrings[] = {
+	"left", "right", "center", "numeric", NULL
+    };
 
-    if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, string, &argc, &argv) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, stringPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK) {
 	return NULL;
     }
 
     /*
-     * First find out how many entries we need to allocate in the
-     * tab array.
+     * First find out how many entries we need to allocate in the tab array.
      */
 
     count = 0;
-    for (i = 0; i < argc; i++) {
-	c = argv[i][0];
+    for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
+	char c = Tcl_GetString(objv[i])[0];
 	if ((c != 'l') && (c != 'r') && (c != 'c') && (c != 'n')) {
 	    count++;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Parse the elements of the list one at a time to fill in the
-     * array.
+     * Parse the elements of the list one at a time to fill in the array.
      */
 
     tabArrayPtr = (TkTextTabArray *) ckalloc((unsigned)
 	    (sizeof(TkTextTabArray) + (count-1)*sizeof(TkTextTab)));
     tabArrayPtr->numTabs = 0;
-    for (i = 0, tabPtr = &tabArrayPtr->tabs[0]; i  < argc; i++, tabPtr++) {
-	if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, argv[i], &tabPtr->location)
-		!= TCL_OK) {
+    prevStop = 0.0;
+    lastStop = 0.0;
+    for (i = 0, tabPtr = &tabArrayPtr->tabs[0]; i < objc; i++, tabPtr++) {
+	int index;
+
+	/*
+	 * This will round fractional pixels above 0.5 upwards, and otherwise
+	 * downwards, to find the right integer pixel position.
+	 */
+
+	if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, textPtr->tkwin, objv[i],
+		&tabPtr->location) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	if (tabPtr->location <= 0) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "tab stop \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
+		    "\" is not at a positive distance", NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	prevStop = lastStop;
+	if (Tk_GetDoublePixelsFromObj (interp, textPtr->tkwin, objv[i],
+				       &lastStop) != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto error;
 	}
+
+	if (i > 0 && (tabPtr->location <= (tabPtr-1)->location)) {
+	    /*
+	     * This tab is actually to the left of the previous one, which is
+	     * illegal.
+	     */
+
+#ifdef _TK_ALLOW_DECREASING_TABS
+	    /*
+	     * Force the tab to be a typical character width to the right of
+	     * the previous one, and update the 'lastStop' with the changed
+	     * position.
+	     */
+
+	    if (textPtr->charWidth > 0) {
+		tabPtr->location = (tabPtr-1)->location + textPtr->charWidth;
+	    } else {
+		tabPtr->location = (tabPtr-1)->location + 8;
+	    }
+	    lastStop = tabPtr->location;
+#else
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		    "tabs must be monotonically increasing, but \"",
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
+		    "\" is smaller than or equal to the previous tab",
+		    NULL);
+	    goto error;
+#endif /* _TK_ALLOW_DECREASING_TABS */
+	}
+
 	tabArrayPtr->numTabs++;
 
 	/*
-	 * See if there is an explicit alignment in the next list
-	 * element.  Otherwise just use "left".
+	 * See if there is an explicit alignment in the next list element.
+	 * Otherwise just use "left".
 	 */
 
 	tabPtr->alignment = LEFT;
-	if ((i+1) == argc) {
+	if ((i+1) == objc) {
 	    continue;
 	}
-	Tcl_UtfToUniChar(argv[i+1], &ch);
+
+	/*
+	 * There may be a more efficient way of getting this.
+	 */
+
+	Tcl_UtfToUniChar(Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]), &ch);
 	if (!Tcl_UniCharIsAlpha(ch)) {
 	    continue;
 	}
 	i += 1;
-	c = argv[i][0];
-	if ((c == 'l') && (strncmp(argv[i], "left",
-		strlen(argv[i])) == 0)) {
-	    tabPtr->alignment = LEFT;
-	} else if ((c == 'r') && (strncmp(argv[i], "right",
-		strlen(argv[i])) == 0)) {
-	    tabPtr->alignment = RIGHT;
-	} else if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(argv[i], "center",
-		strlen(argv[i])) == 0)) {
-	    tabPtr->alignment = CENTER;
-	} else if ((c == 'n') && (strncmp(argv[i],
-		"numeric", strlen(argv[i])) == 0)) {
-	    tabPtr->alignment = NUMERIC;
-	} else {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad tab alignment \"",
-		    argv[i], "\": must be left, right, center, or numeric",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], tabOptionStrings,
+		"tab alignment", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto error;
 	}
+	tabPtr->alignment = ((TkTextTabAlign)index);
     }
-    ckfree((char *) argv);
+
+    /*
+     * For when we need to interpolate tab stops, store these two so we know
+     * the tab stop size to very high precision. With the above checks, we can
+     * guarantee that tabIncrement is strictly positive here.
+     */
+
+    tabArrayPtr->lastTab = lastStop;
+    tabArrayPtr->tabIncrement = lastStop - prevStop;
+
     return tabArrayPtr;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     ckfree((char *) tabArrayPtr);
-    ckfree((char *) argv);
     return NULL;
 }
 
@@ -2511,8 +4474,8 @@ TkTextGetTabs(interp, tkwin, string)
  * TextDumpCmd --
  *
  *	Return information about the text, tags, marks, and embedded windows
- *	and images in a text widget.  See the man page for the description
- *	of the text dump operation for all the details.
+ *	and images in a text widget. See the man page for the description of
+ *	the text dump operation for all the details.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -2525,21 +4488,21 @@ TkTextGetTabs(interp, tkwin, string)
  */
 
 static int
-TextDumpCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
-    register TkText *textPtr;	/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Argument strings.  Someone else has already
+TextDumpCmd(
+    register TkText *textPtr,	/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. Someone else has already
 				 * parsed this command enough to know that
-				 * argv[1] is "dump". */
+				 * objv[1] is "dump". */
 {
     TkTextIndex index1, index2;
     int arg;
-    int lineno;			/* Current line number */
-    int what = 0;		/* bitfield to select segment types */
-    int atEnd;			/* True if dumping up to logical end */
+    int lineno;			/* Current line number. */
+    int what = 0;		/* bitfield to select segment types. */
+    int atEnd;			/* True if dumping up to logical end. */
     TkTextLine *linePtr;
-    CONST char *command = NULL;	/* Script callback to apply to segments */
+    Tcl_Obj *command = NULL;	/* Script callback to apply to segments. */
 #define TK_DUMP_TEXT	0x1
 #define TK_DUMP_MARK	0x2
 #define TK_DUMP_TAG	0x4
@@ -2547,116 +4510,189 @@ TextDumpCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 #define TK_DUMP_IMG	0x10
 #define TK_DUMP_ALL	(TK_DUMP_TEXT|TK_DUMP_MARK|TK_DUMP_TAG| \
 	TK_DUMP_WIN|TK_DUMP_IMG)
-
-    for (arg=2 ; argv[arg] != (char *) NULL ; arg++) {
-	size_t len;
-	if (argv[arg][0] != '-') {
+    static const char *optStrings[] = {
+	"-all", "-command", "-image", "-mark", "-tag", "-text", "-window",
+	NULL
+    };
+    enum opts {
+	DUMP_ALL, DUMP_CMD, DUMP_IMG, DUMP_MARK, DUMP_TAG, DUMP_TXT, DUMP_WIN
+    };
+
+    for (arg=2 ; arg < objc ; arg++) {
+	int index;
+	if (Tcl_GetString(objv[arg])[0] != '-') {
 	    break;
 	}
-	len = strlen(argv[arg]);
-	if (strncmp("-all", argv[arg], len) == 0) {
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[arg], optStrings, "option", 0,
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	switch ((enum opts) index) {
+	case DUMP_ALL:
 	    what = TK_DUMP_ALL;
-	} else if (strncmp("-text", argv[arg], len) == 0) {
+	    break;
+	case DUMP_TXT:
 	    what |= TK_DUMP_TEXT;
-	} else if (strncmp("-tag", argv[arg], len) == 0) {
+	    break;
+	case DUMP_TAG:
 	    what |= TK_DUMP_TAG;
-	} else if (strncmp("-mark", argv[arg], len) == 0) {
+	    break;
+	case DUMP_MARK:
 	    what |= TK_DUMP_MARK;
-	} else if (strncmp("-image", argv[arg], len) == 0) {
+	    break;
+	case DUMP_IMG:
 	    what |= TK_DUMP_IMG;
-	} else if (strncmp("-window", argv[arg], len) == 0) {
+	    break;
+	case DUMP_WIN:
 	    what |= TK_DUMP_WIN;
-	} else if (strncmp("-command", argv[arg], len) == 0) {
+	    break;
+	case DUMP_CMD:
 	    arg++;
-	    if (arg >= argc) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Usage: ", argv[0], " dump ?-all -image -text -mark -tag -window? ?-command script? index ?index2?", NULL);
+	    if (arg >= objc) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Usage: ", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]),
+			" dump ?-all -image -text -mark -tag -window? ",
+			"?-command script? index ?index2?", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    command = argv[arg];
-	} else {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Usage: ", argv[0], " dump ?-all -image -text -mark -tag -window? ?-command script? index ?index2?", NULL);
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	    command = objv[arg];
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    Tcl_Panic("unexpected switch fallthrough");
 	}
     }
-    if (arg >= argc) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Usage: ", argv[0], " dump ?-all -image -text -mark -tag -window? ?-command script? index ?index2?", NULL);
+    if (arg >= objc || arg+2 < objc) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Usage: ", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]),
+		" dump ?-all -image -text -mark -tag -window? ",
+		"?-command script? index ?index2?", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     if (what == 0) {
 	what = TK_DUMP_ALL;
     }
-    if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[arg], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[arg], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    lineno = TkBTreeLineIndex(index1.linePtr);
     arg++;
     atEnd = 0;
-    if (argc == arg) {
-	TkTextIndexForwChars(&index1, 1, &index2);
+    if (objc == arg) {
+	TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, &index1, 1, &index2, COUNT_INDICES);
     } else {
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[arg], &index2) != TCL_OK) {
+	int length;
+	char *str;
+
+	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[arg], &index2) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (strncmp(argv[arg], "end", strlen(argv[arg])) == 0) {
+	str = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[arg], &length);
+	if (strncmp(str, "end", (unsigned)length) == 0) {
 	    atEnd = 1;
 	}
     }
     if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index1, &index2) >= 0) {
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
+    lineno = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, index1.linePtr);
     if (index1.linePtr == index2.linePtr) {
 	DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what, index1.linePtr,
-	    index1.byteIndex, index2.byteIndex, lineno, command);
+		index1.byteIndex, index2.byteIndex, lineno, command);
     } else {
-	DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what, index1.linePtr,
+	int textChanged;
+	int lineend = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, index2.linePtr);
+	int endByteIndex = index2.byteIndex;
+
+	textChanged = DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what, index1.linePtr,
 		index1.byteIndex, 32000000, lineno, command);
-	linePtr = index1.linePtr;
-	while ((linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(linePtr)) != (TkTextLine *)NULL) {
+	if (textChanged) {
+	    if (textPtr->flags & DESTROYED) {
+		return TCL_OK;
+	    }
+	    linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+		    textPtr, lineno);
+	    textChanged = 0;
+	} else {
+	    linePtr = index1.linePtr;
+	}
+	while ((linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, linePtr)) != NULL) {
 	    lineno++;
-	    if (linePtr == index2.linePtr) {
+	    if (lineno == lineend) {
 		break;
 	    }
-	    DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what, linePtr, 0, 32000000,
+	    textChanged = DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what, linePtr, 0, 32000000,
 		    lineno, command);
+	    if (textChanged) {
+		if (textPtr->flags & DESTROYED) {
+		    return TCL_OK;
+		}
+		linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+			textPtr, lineno);
+		textChanged = 0;
+	    }
+	}
+	if (linePtr != NULL) {
+	    DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what, linePtr, 0, endByteIndex, lineno,
+		    command);
+	    if (textPtr->flags & DESTROYED) {
+		return TCL_OK;
+	    }
 	}
-	DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what, index2.linePtr, 0,
-		index2.byteIndex, lineno, command);
     }
+
     /*
      * Special case to get the leftovers hiding at the end mark.
      */
+
     if (atEnd) {
-	DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what & ~TK_DUMP_TEXT, index2.linePtr,
-		0, 1, lineno, command);			    
+	if (textPtr->flags & DESTROYED) {
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Re-get the end index, in case it has changed.
+	 */
 
+	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[arg], &index2) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what & ~TK_DUMP_TEXT, index2.linePtr,
+		0, 1, lineno, command);
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * DumpLine
- * 	Return information about a given text line from character
- *	position "start" up to, but not including, "end".
+ *
+ *	Return information about a given text line from character position
+ *	"start" up to, but not including, "end".
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.
+ *	Returns 1 if the command callback made any changes to the text widget
+ *	which will have invalidated internal structures such as TkTextSegment,
+ *	TkTextIndex, pointers. Our caller can then take action to recompute
+ *	such entities. Returns 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	None, but see DumpSegment.
+ *	None, but see DumpSegment which can have arbitrary side-effects
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static void
-DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what, linePtr, startByte, endByte, lineno, command)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    TkText *textPtr;
-    int what;			/* bit flags to select segment types */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* The current line */
-    int startByte, endByte;	/* Byte range to dump */
-    int lineno;			/* Line number for indices dump */
-    CONST char *command;	/* Script to apply to the segment */
+
+static int
+DumpLine(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    TkText *textPtr,
+    int what,			/* Bit flags to select segment types. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr,	/* The current line. */
+    int startByte, int endByte,	/* Byte range to dump. */
+    int lineno,			/* Line number for indices dump. */
+    Tcl_Obj *command)		/* Script to apply to the segment. */
 {
-    int offset;
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr, *nextPtr;
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr;
     TkTextIndex index;
+    int offset = 0, textChanged = 0;
+
     /*
      * Must loop through line looking at its segments.
      * character
@@ -2666,335 +4702,485 @@ DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what, linePtr, startByte, endByte, lineno, command)
      * window
      */
 
-    for (offset = 0, segPtr = linePtr->segPtr ;
-	    (offset < endByte) && (segPtr != (TkTextSegment *)NULL) ;
-	    offset += segPtr->size, segPtr = nextPtr) {
-	nextPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
+    segPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
+    while ((offset < endByte) && (segPtr != NULL)) {
+	int lineChanged = 0;
+	int currentSize = segPtr->size;
+
 	if ((what & TK_DUMP_TEXT) && (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) &&
-		(offset + segPtr->size > startByte)) {
-	    char savedChar;		/* Last char used in the seg */
-	    int last = segPtr->size;	/* Index of savedChar */
-	    int first = 0;		/* Index of first char in seg */
-	    if (offset + segPtr->size > endByte) {
+		(offset + currentSize > startByte)) {
+	    int last = currentSize;	/* Index of last char in seg. */
+	    int first = 0;		/* Index of first char in seg. */
+
+	    if (offset + currentSize > endByte) {
 		last = endByte - offset;
 	    }
 	    if (startByte > offset) {
 		first = startByte - offset;
 	    }
-	    savedChar = segPtr->body.chars[last];
-	    segPtr->body.chars[last] = '\0';
-	    
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineno, offset + first, &index);
-	    DumpSegment(interp, "text", segPtr->body.chars + first,
-		    command, &index, what);
-	    segPtr->body.chars[last] = savedChar;
+	    if (last != currentSize) {
+		/*
+		 * To avoid modifying the string in place we copy over just
+		 * the segment that we want. Since DumpSegment can modify the
+		 * text, we could not confidently revert the modification
+		 * here.
+		 */
+
+		int length = last - first;
+		char *range = ckalloc((length + 1) * sizeof(char));
+
+		memcpy(range, segPtr->body.chars + first,
+			length * sizeof(char));
+		range[length] = '\0';
+
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+			lineno, offset + first, &index);
+		lineChanged = DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "text", range,
+			command, &index, what);
+		ckfree(range);
+	    } else {
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+			lineno, offset + first, &index);
+		lineChanged = DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "text",
+			segPtr->body.chars + first, command, &index, what);
+	    }
 	} else if ((offset >= startByte)) {
 	    if ((what & TK_DUMP_MARK) && (segPtr->typePtr->name[0] == 'm')) {
-		TkTextMark *markPtr = (TkTextMark *)&segPtr->body;
-		char *name = Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->markTable, markPtr->hPtr);
-
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineno, offset, &index);
-		DumpSegment(interp, "mark", name, command, &index, what);
+		char *name;
+		TkTextMark *markPtr = (TkTextMark *) &segPtr->body;
+
+		if (segPtr == textPtr->insertMarkPtr) {
+		    name = "insert";
+		} else if (segPtr == textPtr->currentMarkPtr) {
+		    name = "current";
+		} else if (markPtr->hPtr == NULL) {
+		    name = NULL;
+		    lineChanged = 0;
+		} else {
+		    name = Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable,
+			    markPtr->hPtr);
+		}
+		if (name != NULL) {
+		    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+			    lineno, offset, &index);
+		    lineChanged = DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "mark", name,
+			    command, &index, what);
+		}
 	    } else if ((what & TK_DUMP_TAG) &&
-			(segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) {
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineno, offset, &index);
-		DumpSegment(interp, "tagon",
-			segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->name,
-			command, &index, what);
-	    } else if ((what & TK_DUMP_TAG) && 
-			(segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)) {
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineno, offset, &index);
-		DumpSegment(interp, "tagoff",
-			segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->name,
-			command, &index, what);
-	    } else if ((what & TK_DUMP_IMG) && 
-			(segPtr->typePtr->name[0] == 'i')) {
+		    (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) {
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+			lineno, offset, &index);
+		lineChanged = DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "tagon",
+			segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->name, command, &index,
+			what);
+	    } else if ((what & TK_DUMP_TAG) &&
+		    (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)) {
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+			lineno, offset, &index);
+		lineChanged = DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "tagoff",
+			segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->name, command, &index,
+			what);
+	    } else if ((what & TK_DUMP_IMG) &&
+		    (segPtr->typePtr->name[0] == 'i')) {
 		TkTextEmbImage *eiPtr = (TkTextEmbImage *)&segPtr->body;
-		char *name = (eiPtr->name ==  NULL) ? "" : eiPtr->name;
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineno, offset, &index);
-		DumpSegment(interp, "image", name,
+		char *name = (eiPtr->name == NULL) ? "" : eiPtr->name;
+
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+			lineno, offset, &index);
+		lineChanged = DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "image", name,
 			command, &index, what);
-	    } else if ((what & TK_DUMP_WIN) && 
-			(segPtr->typePtr->name[0] == 'w')) {
+	    } else if ((what & TK_DUMP_WIN) &&
+		    (segPtr->typePtr->name[0] == 'w')) {
 		TkTextEmbWindow *ewPtr = (TkTextEmbWindow *)&segPtr->body;
 		char *pathname;
+
 		if (ewPtr->tkwin == (Tk_Window) NULL) {
 		    pathname = "";
 		} else {
 		    pathname = Tk_PathName(ewPtr->tkwin);
 		}
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineno, offset, &index);
-		DumpSegment(interp, "window", pathname,
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+			lineno, offset, &index);
+		lineChanged = DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "window", pathname,
 			command, &index, what);
 	    }
 	}
-	if (nextPtr != segPtr->nextPtr) {
+	offset += currentSize;
+	if (lineChanged) {
+	    TkTextSegment *newSegPtr;
+	    int newOffset = 0;
+
+	    textChanged = 1;
+
 	    /*
-	     * Someone modified the text widget while we were dumping.
-	     * Just stop dumping. [Bug 1414171]
+	     * Our indices are no longer valid.
 	     */
-	    break;
+
+	    if (textPtr->flags & DESTROYED) {
+		return textChanged;
+	    }
+	    linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+		    textPtr, lineno);
+	    newSegPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
+	    if (segPtr == newSegPtr) {
+		segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
+	    } else {
+		while ((newOffset < endByte) && (newOffset < offset)
+			&& (newSegPtr != NULL)) {
+		    newOffset += currentSize;
+		    newSegPtr = newSegPtr->nextPtr;
+		    if (segPtr == newSegPtr) {
+			break;
+		    }
+		}
+		if (segPtr != newSegPtr && newOffset == offset
+			&& currentSize == 0) {
+		    TkTextSegment *searchPtr = newSegPtr;
+
+		    while (searchPtr != NULL && searchPtr->size == 0) {
+			if (searchPtr == segPtr) {
+			    newSegPtr = searchPtr;
+			    break;
+			}
+			searchPtr = searchPtr->nextPtr;
+		    }
+		}
+		segPtr = newSegPtr;
+		if (segPtr != NULL) {
+		    segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
+		}
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
 	}
     }
+    return textChanged;
 }
 
 /*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * DumpSegment
- *	Either append information about the current segment to the result,
- *	or make a script callback with that information as arguments.
+ *
+ *	Either append information about the current segment to the result, or
+ *	make a script callback with that information as arguments.
  *
  * Results:
- *	None
+ *	Returns 1 if the command callback made any changes to the text widget
+ *	which will have invalidated internal structures such as TkTextSegment,
+ *	TkTextIndex, pointers. Our caller can then take action to recompute
+ *	such entities. Returns 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Either evals the callback or appends elements to the result string.
+ *	The callback can have arbitrary side-effects.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static int
-DumpSegment(interp, key, value, command, index, what)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    char *key;			/* Segment type key */
-    char *value;		/* Segment value */
-    CONST char *command;	/* Script callback */
-    TkTextIndex *index;         /* index with line/byte position info */
-    int what;			/* Look for TK_DUMP_INDEX bit */
+DumpSegment(
+    TkText *textPtr,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    const char *key,		/* Segment type key. */
+    const char *value,		/* Segment value. */
+    Tcl_Obj *command,		/* Script callback. */
+    const TkTextIndex *index,	/* index with line/byte position info. */
+    int what)			/* Look for TK_DUMP_INDEX bit. */
 {
-    char buffer[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE*2];
-    TkTextPrintIndex(index, buffer);
+    char buffer[TK_POS_CHARS];
+
+    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, index, buffer);
     if (command == NULL) {
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, key);
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, value);
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, buffer);
-	return TCL_OK;
+	return 0;
     } else {
-	CONST char *argv[4];
+	const char *argv[4];
 	char *list;
-	int result;
+	int oldStateEpoch = TkBTreeEpoch(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree);
+
 	argv[0] = key;
 	argv[1] = value;
 	argv[2] = buffer;
 	argv[3] = NULL;
 	list = Tcl_Merge(3, argv);
-	result = Tcl_VarEval(interp, command, " ", list, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_VarEval(interp, Tcl_GetString(command), " ", list, NULL);
 	ckfree(list);
-	return result;
+	if ((textPtr->flags & DESTROYED) ||
+		TkBTreeEpoch(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree) != oldStateEpoch) {
+	    return 1;
+	} else {
+	    return 0;
+	}
     }
 }
 
 /*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TextEditUndo --
- *    undo the last change.
+ *
+ *	Undo the last change.
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	Apart from manipulating the undo and redo stacks, the state of the
+ *	rest of the widget may also change (due to whatever is being undone).
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-TextEditUndo(textPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information about text widget. */
+TextEditUndo(
+    TkText *textPtr)		/* Overall information about text widget. */
 {
     int status;
 
-    if (!textPtr->undo) {
+    if (!textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo) {
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    /* Turn off the undo feature */
-    textPtr->undo = 0;
+    /*
+     * Turn off the undo feature while we revert a compound action, setting
+     * the dirty handling mode to undo for the duration (unless it is
+     * 'fixed').
+     */
 
-    /* Set dirty mode to undo, unless it is fixed */
-    if (textPtr->dirtyMode != TK_TEXT_DIRTY_FIXED) {
-	textPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_UNDO;
+    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo = 0;
+    if (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->dirtyMode != TK_TEXT_DIRTY_FIXED) {
+	textPtr->sharedTextPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_UNDO;
     }
 
-    /* revert one compound action */
-    status = TkUndoRevert(textPtr->undoStack);
+    status = TkUndoRevert(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
 
-    /* Restore dirty mode */
-    if (textPtr->dirtyMode != TK_TEXT_DIRTY_FIXED) {
-	textPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_NORMAL;
+    if (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->dirtyMode != TK_TEXT_DIRTY_FIXED) {
+	textPtr->sharedTextPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_NORMAL;
     }
-
-    /* Turn back on the undo feature */
-    textPtr->undo = 1;
+    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo = 1;
 
     return status;
 }
 
 /*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TextEditRedo --
- *    redo the last undone change.
+ *
+ *	Redo the last undone change.
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	Apart from manipulating the undo and redo stacks, the state of the
+ *	rest of the widget may also change (due to whatever is being redone).
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-TextEditRedo(textPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information about text widget. */
+TextEditRedo(
+    TkText *textPtr)		/* Overall information about text widget. */
 {
     int status;
 
-    if (!textPtr->undo) {
+    if (!textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo) {
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    /* Turn off the undo feature temporarily */
-    textPtr->undo = 0;
+    /*
+     * Turn off the undo feature temporarily while we revert a previously
+     * undone compound action, setting the dirty handling mode to redo for the
+     * duration (unless it is 'fixed').
+     */
 
-    /* Set dirty mode to redo, unless it is fixed */
-    if (textPtr->dirtyMode != TK_TEXT_DIRTY_FIXED) {
-	textPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_REDO;
+    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo = 0;
+    if (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->dirtyMode != TK_TEXT_DIRTY_FIXED) {
+	textPtr->sharedTextPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_REDO;
     }
 
-    /* reapply one compound action */
-    status = TkUndoApply(textPtr->undoStack);
+    status = TkUndoApply(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
 
-    /* Restore dirty mode */
-    if (textPtr->dirtyMode != TK_TEXT_DIRTY_FIXED) {
-	textPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_NORMAL;
+    if (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->dirtyMode != TK_TEXT_DIRTY_FIXED) {
+	textPtr->sharedTextPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_NORMAL;
     }
-
-    /* Turn back on the undo feature */
-    textPtr->undo = 1;
-
+    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo = 1;
     return status;
 }
 
 /*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TextEditCmd --
  *
- *    Handle the subcommands to "$text edit ...".
- *    See documentation for details.
+ *	Handle the subcommands to "$text edit ...". See documentation for
+ *	details.
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-TextEditCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
-    TkText *textPtr;          /* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;       /* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;                 /* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;        /* Argument strings. */
+TextEditCmd(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    int      c;
-    size_t   length;
+    int index;
 
-    if (argc < 3) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		argv[0], " edit option ?arg arg ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+    static const char *editOptionStrings[] = {
+	"modified", "redo", "reset", "separator", "undo", NULL
+    };
+    enum editOptions {
+	EDIT_MODIFIED, EDIT_REDO, EDIT_RESET, EDIT_SEPARATOR, EDIT_UNDO
+    };
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    c = argv[2][0];
-    length = strlen(argv[2]);
-    if ((c == 'm') && (strncmp(argv[2], "modified", length) == 0)) {
-	if (argc == 3) {
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(textPtr->isDirty));
-	} else if (argc != 4) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " edit modified ?boolean?\"", (char *) NULL);
+
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], editOptionStrings,
+	    "edit option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    switch ((enum editOptions) index) {
+    case EDIT_MODIFIED:
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+		    Tcl_NewBooleanObj(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->isDirty));
+	} else if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?boolean?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	} else {
-	    int setModified, wasModified = textPtr->isDirty;
+	    int setModified, oldModified;
 
-	    if (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, argv[3], &setModified) != TCL_OK) {
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[3],
+		    &setModified) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Set or reset the dirty info, and trigger a Modified event (.
+	     * Set or reset the dirty info, and trigger a Modified event.
 	     */
 
 	    setModified = setModified ? 1 : 0;
 
-	    textPtr->isDirty = setModified;
+	    oldModified = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->isDirty;
+	    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->isDirty = setModified;
 	    if (setModified) {
-		textPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_FIXED;
+		textPtr->sharedTextPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_FIXED;
 	    } else {
-		textPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_NORMAL;
+		textPtr->sharedTextPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_NORMAL;
 	    }
-	    if ((!wasModified) != (!setModified)) {
+
+	    /*
+	     * Only issue the <<Modified>> event if the flag actually changed.
+	     * However, degree of modified-ness doesn't matter. [Bug 1799782]
+	     */
+
+	    if ((!oldModified) != (!setModified)) {
 		GenerateModifiedEvent(textPtr);
 	    }
-        }
-    } else if ((c == 'r') && (strncmp(argv[2], "redo", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 3)) {
-	if (argc != 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " edit redo\"", (char *) NULL);
+	}
+	break;
+    case EDIT_REDO:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-        if ( TextEditRedo(textPtr) ) {
-            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "nothing to redo", (char *) NULL);
+	if (TextEditRedo(textPtr)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "nothing to redo", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
-        }
-    } else if ((c == 'r') && (strncmp(argv[2], "reset", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 3)) {
-	if (argc != 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " edit reset\"", (char *) NULL);
+	}
+	break;
+    case EDIT_RESET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-        TkUndoClearStacks(textPtr->undoStack);
-    } else if ((c == 's') && (strncmp(argv[2], "separator", length) == 0)) {
-	if (argc != 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " edit separator\"", (char *) NULL);
+	TkUndoClearStacks(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
+	break;
+    case EDIT_SEPARATOR:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-        TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(textPtr->undoStack);
-    } else if ((c == 'u') && (strncmp(argv[2], "undo", length) == 0)) {
-	if (argc != 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " edit undo\"", (char *) NULL);
+	TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
+	break;
+    case EDIT_UNDO:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-        if ( TextEditUndo(textPtr) ) {
-            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "nothing to undo",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	if (TextEditUndo(textPtr)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "nothing to undo", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
-        }
-    } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad edit option \"", argv[2],
-		"\": must be modified, redo, reset, separator or undo",
-		(char *) NULL);
-	return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	break;
     }
-    
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TextGetText --
- *    Returns the text from indexPtr1 to indexPtr2, placing that text
- *    in the Tcl_DString given.  That DString should be free or uninitialized.
+ *
+ *	Returns the text from indexPtr1 to indexPtr2, placing that text in a
+ *	string object which is returned with a refCount of zero.
+ *
+ *	Since the amount of text may potentially be several megabytes (e.g.
+ *	in text editors built on the text widget), efficiency is very
+ *	important. We may want to investigate the efficiency of the
+ *	Tcl_AppendToObj more carefully (e.g. if we know we are going to be
+ *	appending several thousand lines, we could attempt to pre-allocate a
+ *	larger space).
+ *
+ *	Also the result is built up as a utf-8 string, but, if we knew we
+ *	wanted it as Unicode, we could potentially save a huge conversion by
+ *	building it up as Unicode directly. This could be as simple as
+ *	replacing Tcl_NewObj by Tcl_NewUnicodeObj.
  *
  * Results:
- *    None.
+ *	Tcl_Obj of string type containing the specified text. If the
+ *	visibleOnly flag is set to 1, then only those characters which are not
+ *	elided will be returned. Otherwise (flag is 0) all characters in the
+ *	given range are returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    Memory will be allocated for the DString.  Remember to free it.
+ *	Memory will be allocated for the new object. Remember to free it if it
+ *	isn't going to be stored appropriately.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static void 
-TextGetText(indexPtr1,indexPtr2, dsPtr)
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr1;
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr2;
-    Tcl_DString *dsPtr;
+static Tcl_Obj *
+TextGetText(
+    const TkText *textPtr,	/* Information about text widget. */
+    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr1,
+				/* Get text from this index... */
+    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr2,
+				/* ...to this index. */
+    int visibleOnly)		/* If non-zero, then only return non-elided
+				 * characters. */
 {
     TkTextIndex tmpIndex;
-    Tcl_DStringInit(dsPtr);
-    
-    TkTextMakeByteIndex(indexPtr1->tree, TkBTreeLineIndex(indexPtr1->linePtr),
+    Tcl_Obj *resultPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
+
+    TkTextMakeByteIndex(indexPtr1->tree, textPtr,
+	    TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr1->linePtr),
 	    indexPtr1->byteIndex, &tmpIndex);
 
     if (TkTextIndexCmp(indexPtr1, indexPtr2) < 0) {
@@ -3005,26 +5191,38 @@ TextGetText(indexPtr1,indexPtr2, dsPtr)
 	    segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&tmpIndex, &offset);
 	    last = segPtr->size;
 	    if (tmpIndex.linePtr == indexPtr2->linePtr) {
-		int last2;
+		/*
+		 * The last line that was requested must be handled carefully,
+		 * because we may need to break out of this loop in the middle
+		 * of the line.
+		 */
 
 		if (indexPtr2->byteIndex == tmpIndex.byteIndex) {
 		    break;
-		}
-		last2 = indexPtr2->byteIndex - tmpIndex.byteIndex + offset;
-		if (last2 < last) {
-		    last = last2;
+		} else {
+		    int last2 = indexPtr2->byteIndex - tmpIndex.byteIndex
+			    + offset;
+
+		    if (last2 < last) {
+			last = last2;
+		    }
 		}
 	    }
 	    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
-		Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, segPtr->body.chars + offset,
-			last - offset);
+		if (!visibleOnly || !TkTextIsElided(textPtr,&tmpIndex,NULL)) {
+		    Tcl_AppendToObj(resultPtr, segPtr->body.chars + offset,
+			    last - offset);
+		}
 	    }
-	    TkTextIndexForwBytes(&tmpIndex, last-offset, &tmpIndex);
+	    TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &tmpIndex, last-offset, &tmpIndex);
 	}
     }
+    return resultPtr;
 }
 
 /*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * GenerateModifiedEvent --
  *
  *	Send an event that the text was modified. This is equivalent to
@@ -3035,68 +5233,1464 @@ TextGetText(indexPtr1,indexPtr2, dsPtr)
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	May force the text window into existence.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 GenerateModifiedEvent(
     TkText *textPtr)	/* Information about text widget. */
 {
-    XEvent event;
+    union {XEvent general; XVirtualEvent virtual;} event;
 
     Tk_MakeWindowExist(textPtr->tkwin);
 
     memset(&event, 0, sizeof(event));
-    event.xany.type = VirtualEvent;
-    event.xany.serial = NextRequest(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin));
-    event.xany.send_event = False;
-    event.xany.window = Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin);
-    event.xany.display = Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin);
-    ((XVirtualEvent *) &event)->name = Tk_GetUid("Modified");
-    Tk_HandleEvent(&event);
+    event.general.xany.type = VirtualEvent;
+    event.general.xany.serial = NextRequest(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin));
+    event.general.xany.send_event = False;
+    event.general.xany.window = Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin);
+    event.general.xany.display = Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin);
+    event.virtual.name = Tk_GetUid("Modified");
+    Tk_HandleEvent(&event.general);
 }
 
 /*
- * updateDirtyFlag --
- *    updates the dirtyness of the text widget
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * UpdateDirtyFlag --
+ *
+ *	Updates the dirtyness of the text widget
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-updateDirtyFlag(textPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;          /* Information about text widget. */
+UpdateDirtyFlag(
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr)/* Information about text widget. */
 {
     int oldDirtyFlag;
+    TkText *textPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * If we've been forced to be dirty, we stay dirty (until explicitly
+     * reset, of course).
+     */
+
+    if (sharedTextPtr->dirtyMode == TK_TEXT_DIRTY_FIXED) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (sharedTextPtr->isDirty < 0
+	    && sharedTextPtr->dirtyMode == TK_TEXT_DIRTY_NORMAL) {
+	/*
+	 * If dirty flag is negative, only redo operations can make it zero
+	 * again. If we do a normal operation, it can never become zero any
+	 * more (other than by explicit reset).
+	 */
 
-    if (textPtr->dirtyMode == TK_TEXT_DIRTY_FIXED) {
+	sharedTextPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_FIXED;
 	return;
     }
 
+    oldDirtyFlag = sharedTextPtr->isDirty;
+    if (sharedTextPtr->dirtyMode == TK_TEXT_DIRTY_UNDO) {
+	sharedTextPtr->isDirty--;
+    } else {
+	sharedTextPtr->isDirty++;
+    }
+
+    if (sharedTextPtr->isDirty == 0 || oldDirtyFlag == 0) {
+	for (textPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; textPtr != NULL;
+		textPtr = textPtr->next) {
+	    GenerateModifiedEvent(textPtr);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * SearchPerform --
+ *
+ *	Overall control of search process. Is given a pattern, a starting
+ *	index and an ending index, and attempts to perform a search. This
+ *	function is actually completely independent of Tk, and could in the
+ *	future be split off.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Standard Tcl result code. In particular, if fromPtr or toPtr are not
+ *	considered valid by the 'lineIndexProc', an error will be thrown and
+ *	no search performed.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	See 'SearchCore'.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+SearchPerform(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For error messages. */
+    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr,	/* Search parameters. */
+    Tcl_Obj *patObj,		/* Contains an exact string or a regexp
+				 * pattern. Must have a refCount > 0. */
+    Tcl_Obj *fromPtr,		/* Contains information describing the first
+				 * index. */
+    Tcl_Obj *toPtr)		/* NULL or information describing the last
+				 * index. */
+{
     /*
-     * If dirty flag is negative, only redo operations can make it zero again.
-     * If we do a normal operation, it can never become zero anymore.
+     * Find the starting line and starting offset (measured in Unicode chars
+     * for regexp search, utf-8 bytes for exact search).
      */
-    if (textPtr->isDirty < 0 && textPtr->dirtyMode == TK_TEXT_DIRTY_NORMAL) {
-	textPtr->dirtyMode = TK_TEXT_DIRTY_FIXED;
-	return;
+
+    if ((*searchSpecPtr->lineIndexProc)(interp, fromPtr, searchSpecPtr,
+	    &searchSpecPtr->startLine,
+	    &searchSpecPtr->startOffset) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    oldDirtyFlag = textPtr->isDirty;
+    /*
+     * Find the optional end location, similarly.
+     */
 
-    switch (textPtr->dirtyMode) {
-    case TK_TEXT_DIRTY_UNDO:
-	textPtr->isDirty--;
-	break;
-    default:
-	textPtr->isDirty++;
-	break;
+    if (toPtr != NULL) {
+	const TkTextIndex *indexToPtr, *indexFromPtr;
+	TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) searchSpecPtr->clientData;
+
+	indexToPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, toPtr);
+	if (indexToPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	indexFromPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, fromPtr);
+
+	/*
+	 * Check for any empty search range here. It might be better in the
+	 * future to embed that in SearchCore (whose default behaviour is to
+	 * wrap when given a negative search range).
+	 */
+
+	if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
+	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, indexToPtr) == -1) {
+		return TCL_OK;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, indexToPtr) == 1) {
+		return TCL_OK;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	if ((*searchSpecPtr->lineIndexProc)(interp, toPtr, searchSpecPtr,
+		&searchSpecPtr->stopLine,
+		&searchSpecPtr->stopOffset) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    } else {
+	searchSpecPtr->stopLine = -1;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Scan through all of the lines of the text circularly, starting at the
+     * given index. 'patObj' is the pattern which may be an exact string or a
+     * regexp pattern depending on the flags in searchSpecPtr.
+     */
+
+    return SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * SearchCore --
+ *
+ *	The core of the search function. This function is actually completely
+ *	independent of Tk, and could in the future be split off.
+ *
+ *	The function assumes regexp-based searches operate on Unicode strings,
+ *	and exact searches on utf-8 strings. Therefore the 'foundMatchProc'
+ *	and 'addLineProc' need to be aware of this distinction.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Standard Tcl result code.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Only those of the 'searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc' which is called
+ *	whenever a match is found.
+ *
+ *	Note that the way matching across multiple lines is implemented, we
+ *	start afresh with each line we have available, even though we may
+ *	already have examined the contents of that line (and further ones) if
+ *	we were attempting a multi-line match using the previous line. This
+ *	means there may be ways to speed this up a lot by not throwing away
+ *	all the multi-line information one has accumulated. Profiling should
+ *	be done to see where the bottlenecks lie before attempting this,
+ *	however. We would also need to be very careful such optimisation keep
+ *	within the specified search bounds.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+SearchCore(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For error messages. */
+    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr,	/* Search parameters. */
+    Tcl_Obj *patObj)		/* Contains an exact string or a regexp
+				 * pattern. Must have a refCount > 0. */
+{
+    /*
+     * For exact searches these are utf-8 char* offsets, for regexp searches
+     * they are Unicode char offsets.
+     */
+
+    int firstOffset, lastOffset, matchOffset, matchLength;
+    int passes;
+    int lineNum = searchSpecPtr->startLine;
+    int code = TCL_OK;
+    Tcl_Obj *theLine;
+    int alreadySearchOffset = -1;
+
+    const char *pattern = NULL;	/* For exact searches only. */
+    int firstNewLine = -1; 	/* For exact searches only. */
+    Tcl_RegExp regexp = NULL;	/* For regexp searches only. */
+
+    /*
+     * These items are for backward regexp searches only. They are for two
+     * purposes: to allow us to report backwards matches in the correct order,
+     * even though the implementation uses repeated forward searches; and to
+     * provide for overlap checking between backwards matches on different
+     * text lines.
+     */
+
+#define LOTS_OF_MATCHES 20
+    int matchNum = LOTS_OF_MATCHES;
+    int smArray[2 * LOTS_OF_MATCHES];
+    int *storeMatch = smArray;
+    int *storeLength = smArray + LOTS_OF_MATCHES;
+    int lastBackwardsLineMatch = -1;
+    int lastBackwardsMatchOffset = -1;
+
+    if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
+	/*
+	 * Convert the pattern to lower-case if we're supposed to ignore case.
+	 */
+
+	if (searchSpecPtr->noCase) {
+	    patObj = Tcl_DuplicateObj(patObj);
+
+	    /*
+	     * This can change the length of the string behind the object's
+	     * back, so ensure it is correctly synchronised.
+	     */
+
+	    Tcl_SetObjLength(patObj, Tcl_UtfToLower(Tcl_GetString(patObj)));
+	}
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * Compile the regular expression. We want '^$' to match after and
+	 * before \n respectively, so use the TCL_REG_NLANCH flag.
+	 */
+
+	regexp = Tcl_GetRegExpFromObj(interp, patObj,
+		(searchSpecPtr->noCase ? TCL_REG_NOCASE : 0)
+		| (searchSpecPtr->noLineStop ? 0 : TCL_REG_NLSTOP)
+		| TCL_REG_ADVANCED | TCL_REG_CANMATCH | TCL_REG_NLANCH);
+	if (regexp == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * For exact strings, we want to know where the first newline is, and we
+     * will also use this as a flag to test whether it is even possible to
+     * match the pattern on a single line. If not we will have to search
+     * across multiple lines.
+     */
+
+    if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
+	const char *nl;
+
+	/*
+	 * We only need to set the matchLength once for exact searches, and we
+	 * do it here. It is also used below as the actual pattern length, so
+	 * it has dual purpose.
+	 */
+
+	pattern = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(patObj, &matchLength);
+	nl = strchr(pattern, '\n');
+
+	/*
+	 * If there is no newline, or it is the very end of the string, then
+	 * we don't need any special treatment, since single-line matching
+	 * will work fine.
+	 */
+
+	if (nl != NULL && nl[1] != '\0') {
+	    firstNewLine = (nl - pattern);
+	}
+    } else {
+	matchLength = 0;	/* Only needed to prevent compiler warnings. */
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Keep a reference here, so that we can be sure the object doesn't
+     * disappear behind our backs and invalidate its contents which we are
+     * using.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(patObj);
+
+    /*
+     * For building up the current line being checked.
+     */
+
+    theLine = Tcl_NewObj();
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(theLine);
+
+    for (passes = 0; passes < 2; ) {
+	ClientData lineInfo;
+	int linesSearched = 1;
+	int extraLinesSearched = 0;
+
+	if (lineNum >= searchSpecPtr->numLines) {
+	    /*
+	     * Don't search the dummy last line of the text.
+	     */
+
+	    goto nextLine;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Extract the text from the line, storing its length in 'lastOffset'
+	 * (in bytes if exact, chars if regexp), since obviously the length is
+	 * the maximum offset at which it is possible to find something on
+	 * this line, which is what 'lastOffset' represents.
+	 */
+
+	lineInfo = (*searchSpecPtr->addLineProc)(lineNum, searchSpecPtr,
+		theLine, &lastOffset, &linesSearched);
+
+	if (lineInfo == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * This should not happen, since 'lineNum' should be valid in the
+	     * call above. However, let's try to be flexible and not cause a
+	     * crash below.
+	     */
+
+	    goto nextLine;
+	}
+
+	if (lineNum == searchSpecPtr->stopLine && searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
+	    firstOffset = searchSpecPtr->stopOffset;
+	} else {
+	    firstOffset = 0;
+	}
+
+	if (alreadySearchOffset != -1) {
+	    if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
+		if (alreadySearchOffset < lastOffset) {
+		    lastOffset = alreadySearchOffset;
+		}
+	    } else {
+		if (alreadySearchOffset > firstOffset) {
+		    firstOffset = alreadySearchOffset;
+		}
+	    }
+	    alreadySearchOffset = -1;
+	}
+
+	if (lineNum == searchSpecPtr->startLine) {
+	    /*
+	     * The starting line is tricky: the first time we see it we check
+	     * one part of the line, and the second pass through we check the
+	     * other part of the line.
+	     */
+
+	    passes++;
+	    if ((passes == 1) ^ searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
+		/*
+		 * Forward search and first pass, or backward search and
+		 * second pass.
+		 *
+		 * Only use the last part of the line.
+		 */
+
+		if (searchSpecPtr->startOffset > firstOffset) {
+		    firstOffset = searchSpecPtr->startOffset;
+		}
+		if ((firstOffset >= lastOffset)
+		    && ((lastOffset != 0) || searchSpecPtr->exact)) {
+		    goto nextLine;
+		}
+	    } else {
+		/*
+		 * Use only the first part of the line.
+		 */
+
+		if (searchSpecPtr->startOffset < lastOffset) {
+		    lastOffset = searchSpecPtr->startOffset;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Check for matches within the current line 'lineNum'. If so, and if
+	 * we're searching backwards or for all matches, repeat the search
+	 * until we find the last match in the line. The 'lastOffset' is one
+	 * beyond the last position in the line at which a match is allowed to
+	 * begin.
+	 */
+
+	matchOffset = -1;
+
+	if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
+	    int maxExtraLines = 0;
+	    const char *startOfLine = Tcl_GetString(theLine);
+
+	    do {
+		Tcl_UniChar ch;
+		const char *p;
+		int lastFullLine = lastOffset;
+
+		if (firstNewLine == -1) {
+		    if (searchSpecPtr->strictLimits
+			    && (firstOffset + matchLength > lastOffset)) {
+			/*
+			 * Not enough characters to match.
+			 */
+
+			break;
+		    }
+
+		    /*
+		     * Single line matching. We want to scan forwards or
+		     * backwards as appropriate.
+		     */
+
+		    if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
+			/*
+			 * Search back either from the previous match or from
+			 * 'startOfLine + lastOffset - 1' until we find a
+			 * match.
+			 */
+
+			const char c = pattern[0];
+
+			if (alreadySearchOffset != -1) {
+			    p = startOfLine + alreadySearchOffset;
+			    alreadySearchOffset = -1;
+			} else {
+			    p = startOfLine + lastOffset -1;
+			}
+			while (p >= startOfLine + firstOffset) {
+			    if (p[0] == c && !strncmp(p, pattern,
+				    (unsigned)matchLength)) {
+				goto backwardsMatch;
+			    }
+			    p--;
+			}
+			break;
+		    } else {
+			p = strstr(startOfLine + firstOffset, pattern);
+		    }
+		    if (p == NULL) {
+			/*
+			 * Single line match failed.
+			 */
+
+			break;
+		    }
+		} else if (firstNewLine >= (lastOffset - firstOffset)) {
+		    /*
+		     * Multi-line match, but not enough characters to match.
+		     */
+
+		    break;
+		} else {
+		    /*
+		     * Multi-line match has only one possible match position,
+		     * because we know where the '\n' is.
+		     */
+
+		    p = startOfLine + lastOffset - firstNewLine - 1;
+		    if (strncmp(p, pattern, (unsigned)(firstNewLine + 1))) {
+			/*
+			 * No match.
+			 */
+
+			break;
+		    } else {
+			int extraLines = 1;
+
+			/*
+			 * If we find a match that overlaps more than one
+			 * line, we will use this value to determine the first
+			 * allowed starting offset for the following search
+			 * (to avoid overlapping results).
+			 */
+
+			int lastTotal = lastOffset;
+			int skipFirst = lastOffset - firstNewLine -1;
+
+			/*
+			 * We may be able to match if given more text. The
+			 * following 'while' block handles multi-line exact
+			 * searches.
+			 */
+
+			while (1) {
+			    lastFullLine = lastTotal;
+
+			    if (lineNum+extraLines>=searchSpecPtr->numLines) {
+				p = NULL;
+				break;
+			    }
+
+			    /*
+			     * Only add the line if we haven't already done so
+			     * already.
+			     */
+
+			    if (extraLines > maxExtraLines) {
+				if ((*searchSpecPtr->addLineProc)(lineNum
+					+ extraLines, searchSpecPtr, theLine,
+					&lastTotal, &extraLines) == NULL) {
+				    p = NULL;
+				    if (!searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
+					extraLinesSearched = extraLines;
+				    }
+				    break;
+				}
+				maxExtraLines = extraLines;
+			    }
+
+			    startOfLine = Tcl_GetString(theLine);
+			    p = startOfLine + skipFirst;
+
+			    /*
+			     * Use the fact that 'matchLength = patLength' for
+			     * exact searches.
+			     */
+
+			    if ((lastTotal - skipFirst) >= matchLength) {
+				/*
+				 * We now have enough text to match, so we
+				 * make a final test and break whatever the
+				 * result.
+				 */
+
+				if (strncmp(p,pattern,(unsigned)matchLength)) {
+				    p = NULL;
+				}
+				break;
+			    } else {
+				/*
+				 * Not enough text yet, but check the prefix.
+				 */
+
+				if (strncmp(p, pattern,
+					(unsigned)(lastTotal - skipFirst))) {
+				    p = NULL;
+				    break;
+				}
+
+				/*
+				 * The prefix matches, so keep looking.
+				 */
+			    }
+			    extraLines++;
+			}
+			/*
+			 * If we reach here, with p != NULL, we've found a
+			 * multi-line match, else we started a multi-match but
+			 * didn't finish it off, so we go to the next line.
+			 */
+
+			if (p == NULL) {
+			    break;
+			}
+
+			/*
+			 * We've found a multi-line match.
+			 */
+
+			if (extraLines > 0) {
+			    extraLinesSearched = extraLines - 1;
+			}
+		    }
+		}
+
+	    backwardsMatch:
+		if ((p - startOfLine) >= lastOffset) {
+		    break;
+		}
+
+		/*
+		 * Remember the match.
+		 */
+
+		matchOffset = p - startOfLine;
+
+		if (searchSpecPtr->all &&
+			!(*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lineNum,
+			searchSpecPtr, lineInfo, theLine, matchOffset,
+			matchLength)) {
+		    /*
+		     * We reached the end of the search.
+		     */
+
+		    goto searchDone;
+		}
+
+		if (!searchSpecPtr->overlap) {
+		    if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
+			alreadySearchOffset = p - startOfLine;
+			if (firstNewLine != -1) {
+			    break;
+			} else {
+			    alreadySearchOffset -= matchLength;
+			}
+		    } else {
+			firstOffset = p - startOfLine + matchLength;
+			if (firstOffset >= lastOffset) {
+			    /*
+			     * Now, we have to be careful not to find
+			     * overlapping matches either on the same or
+			     * following lines. Assume that if we did find
+			     * something, it goes until the last extra line we
+			     * added.
+			     *
+			     * We can break out of the loop, since we know no
+			     * more will be found.
+			     */
+
+			    if (!searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
+				alreadySearchOffset =
+					firstOffset - lastFullLine;
+				break;
+			    }
+			}
+		    }
+		} else {
+		    if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
+			alreadySearchOffset = p - startOfLine - 1;
+			if (alreadySearchOffset < 0) {
+			    break;
+			}
+		    } else {
+			firstOffset = p - startOfLine +
+				Tcl_UtfToUniChar(startOfLine+matchOffset,&ch);
+		    }
+		}
+	    } while (searchSpecPtr->all);
+	} else {
+	    int maxExtraLines = 0;
+	    int matches = 0;
+	    int lastNonOverlap = -1;
+
+	    do {
+		Tcl_RegExpInfo info;
+		int match;
+		int lastFullLine = lastOffset;
+
+		match = Tcl_RegExpExecObj(interp, regexp, theLine,
+			firstOffset, 1, (firstOffset>0 ? TCL_REG_NOTBOL : 0));
+		if (match < 0) {
+		    code = TCL_ERROR;
+		    goto searchDone;
+		}
+		Tcl_RegExpGetInfo(regexp, &info);
+
+		/*
+		 * If we don't have a match, or if we do, but it extends to
+		 * the end of the line, we must try to add more lines to get a
+		 * full greedy match.
+		 */
+
+		if (!match ||
+			((info.extendStart == info.matches[0].start)
+			&& (info.matches[0].end == lastOffset-firstOffset))) {
+		    int extraLines = 0;
+		    int prevFullLine;
+
+		    /*
+		     * If we find a match that overlaps more than one line, we
+		     * will use this value to determine the first allowed
+		     * starting offset for the following search (to avoid
+		     * overlapping results).
+		     */
+
+		    int lastTotal = lastOffset;
+
+		    if ((lastBackwardsLineMatch != -1)
+			    && (lastBackwardsLineMatch == (lineNum + 1))) {
+			lastNonOverlap = lastTotal;
+		    }
+
+		    if (info.extendStart < 0) {
+			/*
+			 * No multi-line match is possible.
+			 */
+
+			break;
+		    }
+
+		    /*
+		     * We may be able to match if given more text. The
+		     * following 'while' block handles multi-line regexp
+		     * searches.
+		     */
+
+		    while (1) {
+			prevFullLine = lastTotal;
+
+			/*
+			 * Move firstOffset to first possible start.
+			 */
+
+			if (!match) {
+			    firstOffset += info.extendStart;
+			}
+			if (firstOffset >= lastOffset) {
+			    /*
+			     * We're being told that the only possible new
+			     * match is starting after the end of the line.
+			     * But, that is the next line which we will handle
+			     * when we look at that line.
+			     */
+
+			    if (!match && !searchSpecPtr->backwards
+				    && (firstOffset == 0)) {
+				extraLinesSearched = extraLines;
+			    }
+			    break;
+			}
+
+			if (lineNum + extraLines >= searchSpecPtr->numLines) {
+			    break;
+			}
+
+			/*
+			 * Add next line, provided we haven't already done so.
+			 */
+
+			if (extraLines > maxExtraLines) {
+			    if ((*searchSpecPtr->addLineProc)(lineNum
+				    + extraLines, searchSpecPtr, theLine,
+				    &lastTotal, &extraLines) == NULL) {
+				/*
+				 * There are no more acceptable lines, so we
+				 * can say we have searched all of these.
+				 */
+
+				if (!match && !searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
+				    extraLinesSearched = extraLines;
+				}
+				break;
+			    }
+
+			    maxExtraLines = extraLines;
+			    if ((lastBackwardsLineMatch != -1)
+				    && (lastBackwardsLineMatch
+				    == (lineNum + extraLines + 1))) {
+				lastNonOverlap = lastTotal;
+			    }
+			}
+
+			match = Tcl_RegExpExecObj(interp, regexp, theLine,
+				firstOffset, 1,
+				((firstOffset > 0) ? TCL_REG_NOTBOL : 0));
+			if (match < 0) {
+			    code = TCL_ERROR;
+			    goto searchDone;
+			}
+			Tcl_RegExpGetInfo(regexp, &info);
+
+			/*
+			 * Unfortunately there are bugs in Tcl's regexp
+			 * library, which tells us that info.extendStart is
+			 * zero when it should not be (should be -1), which
+			 * makes our task a bit more complicated here. We
+			 * check if there was a match, and the end of the
+			 * match leaves an entire extra line unmatched, then
+			 * we stop searching. Clearly it still might sometimes
+			 * be possible to add more text and match again, but
+			 * Tcl's regexp library doesn't tell us that.
+			 *
+			 * This means we often add and search one more line
+			 * than might be necessary if Tcl were able to give us
+			 * a correct value of info.extendStart under all
+			 * circumstances.
+			 */
+
+			if ((match &&
+				firstOffset+info.matches[0].end != lastTotal &&
+				firstOffset+info.matches[0].end < prevFullLine)
+				|| info.extendStart < 0) {
+			    break;
+			}
+
+			/*
+			 * If there is a match, but that match starts after
+			 * the end of the first line, then we'll handle that
+			 * next time around, when we're actually looking at
+			 * that line.
+			 */
+
+			if (match && (info.matches[0].start >= lastOffset)) {
+			    break;
+			}
+			if (match && ((firstOffset + info.matches[0].end)
+				>= prevFullLine)) {
+			    if (extraLines > 0) {
+				extraLinesSearched = extraLines - 1;
+			    }
+			    lastFullLine = prevFullLine;
+			}
+
+			/*
+			 * The prefix matches, so keep looking.
+			 */
+
+			extraLines++;
+		    }
+
+		    /*
+		     * If we reach here with 'match == 1', we've found a
+		     * multi-line match, which we will record in the code
+		     * which follows directly else we started a multi-line
+		     * match but didn't finish it off, so we go to the next
+		     * line.
+		     */
+
+		    if (!match) {
+			/*
+			 * Here is where we could perform an optimisation,
+			 * since we have already retrieved the contents of the
+			 * next line (perhaps many more), so we shouldn't
+			 * really throw it all away and start again. This
+			 * could be particularly important for complex regexp
+			 * searches.
+			 *
+			 * This 'break' will take us to just before the
+			 * 'nextLine:' below.
+			 */
+
+			break;
+		    }
+
+		    if (lastBackwardsLineMatch != -1) {
+			if ((lineNum + linesSearched + extraLinesSearched)
+				== lastBackwardsLineMatch) {
+			    /*
+			     * Possible overlap or inclusion.
+			     */
+
+			    int thisOffset = firstOffset + info.matches[0].end
+				    - info.matches[0].start;
+
+			    if (lastNonOverlap != -1) {
+				/*
+				 * Possible overlap or enclosure.
+				 */
+
+				if (thisOffset-lastNonOverlap >=
+					lastBackwardsMatchOffset+matchLength){
+				    /*
+				     * Totally encloses previous match, so
+				     * forget the previous match.
+				     */
+
+				    lastBackwardsLineMatch = -1;
+				} else if ((thisOffset - lastNonOverlap)
+					> lastBackwardsMatchOffset) {
+				    /*
+				     * Overlap. Previous match is ok, and the
+				     * current match is only ok if we are
+				     * searching with -overlap.
+				     */
+
+				    if (searchSpecPtr->overlap) {
+					goto recordBackwardsMatch;
+				    } else {
+					match = 0;
+					break;
+				    }
+				} else {
+				    /*
+				     * No overlap, although the same line was
+				     * reached.
+				     */
+
+				    goto recordBackwardsMatch;
+				}
+			    } else {
+				/*
+				 * No overlap.
+				 */
+
+				goto recordBackwardsMatch;
+			    }
+			} else if (lineNum+linesSearched+extraLinesSearched
+				< lastBackwardsLineMatch) {
+			    /*
+			     * No overlap.
+			     */
+
+			    goto recordBackwardsMatch;
+			} else {
+			    /*
+			     * Totally enclosed.
+			     */
+
+			    lastBackwardsLineMatch = -1;
+			}
+		    }
+
+		} else {
+		    /*
+		     * Matched in a single line.
+		     */
+
+		    if (lastBackwardsLineMatch != -1) {
+		    recordBackwardsMatch:
+			(*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(
+				lastBackwardsLineMatch, searchSpecPtr, NULL,
+				NULL, lastBackwardsMatchOffset, matchLength);
+			lastBackwardsLineMatch = -1;
+			if (!searchSpecPtr->all) {
+			    goto searchDone;
+			}
+		    }
+		}
+
+		firstOffset += info.matches[0].start;
+		if (firstOffset >= lastOffset) {
+		    break;
+		}
+
+		/*
+		 * Update our local variables with the match, if we haven't
+		 * yet found anything, or if we're doing '-all' or
+		 * '-backwards' _and_ this match isn't fully enclosed in the
+		 * previous match.
+		 */
+
+		if (matchOffset == -1 ||
+			((searchSpecPtr->all || searchSpecPtr->backwards)
+			&& ((firstOffset < matchOffset)
+			|| ((firstOffset + info.matches[0].end
+				- info.matches[0].start)
+				> (matchOffset + matchLength))))) {
+
+		    matchOffset = firstOffset;
+		    matchLength = info.matches[0].end - info.matches[0].start;
+
+		    if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
+			/*
+			 * To get backwards searches in the correct order, we
+			 * must store them away here.
+			 */
+
+			if (matches == matchNum) {
+			    /*
+			     * We've run out of space in our normal store, so
+			     * we must allocate space for these backwards
+			     * matches on the heap.
+			     */
+
+			    int *newArray = (int *)
+				    ckalloc(4 * matchNum * sizeof(int));
+			    memcpy(newArray, storeMatch, matchNum*sizeof(int));
+			    memcpy(newArray + 2*matchNum, storeLength,
+				    matchNum * sizeof(int));
+			    if (storeMatch != smArray) {
+				ckfree((char *) storeMatch);
+			    }
+			    matchNum *= 2;
+			    storeMatch = newArray;
+			    storeLength = newArray + matchNum;
+			}
+			storeMatch[matches] = matchOffset;
+			storeLength[matches] = matchLength;
+			matches++;
+		    } else {
+			/*
+			 * Now actually record the match, but only if we are
+			 * doing an '-all' search.
+			 */
+
+			if (searchSpecPtr->all &&
+				!(*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lineNum,
+				searchSpecPtr, lineInfo, theLine, matchOffset,
+				matchLength)) {
+			    /*
+			     * We reached the end of the search.
+			     */
+
+			    goto searchDone;
+			}
+		    }
+
+		    /*
+		     * For forward matches, unless we allow overlaps, we move
+		     * this on by the length of the current match so that we
+		     * explicitly disallow overlapping matches.
+		     */
+
+		    if (matchLength > 0 && !searchSpecPtr->overlap
+			    && !searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
+			firstOffset += matchLength;
+			if (firstOffset >= lastOffset) {
+			    /*
+			     * Now, we have to be careful not to find
+			     * overlapping matches either on the same or
+			     * following lines. Assume that if we did find
+			     * something, it goes until the last extra line we
+			     * added.
+			     *
+			     * We can break out of the loop, since we know no
+			     * more will be found.
+			     */
+
+			    alreadySearchOffset = firstOffset - lastFullLine;
+			    break;
+			}
+
+			/*
+			 * We'll add this on again just below.
+			 */
+
+			firstOffset --;
+		    }
+		}
+
+		/*
+		 * Move the starting point on, in case we are doing repeated
+		 * or backwards searches (for the latter, we actually do
+		 * repeated forward searches).
+		 */
+
+		firstOffset++;
+	    } while (searchSpecPtr->backwards || searchSpecPtr->all);
+
+	    if (matches > 0) {
+		/*
+		 * Now we have all the matches in our array, but not stored
+		 * with 'foundMatchProc' yet.
+		 */
+
+		matches--;
+		matchOffset = storeMatch[matches];
+		matchLength = storeLength[matches];
+		while (--matches >= 0) {
+		    if (lineNum == searchSpecPtr->stopLine) {
+			/*
+			 * It appears as if a condition like:
+			 *
+			 * if (storeMatch[matches]<searchSpecPtr->stopOffset)
+			 *	break;
+			 *
+			 * might be needed here, but no test case has been
+			 * found which would exercise such a problem.
+			 */
+		    }
+		    if (storeMatch[matches] + storeLength[matches]
+			    >= matchOffset + matchLength) {
+			/*
+			 * The new match totally encloses the previous one, so
+			 * we overwrite the previous one.
+			 */
+
+			matchOffset = storeMatch[matches];
+			matchLength = storeLength[matches];
+			continue;
+		    }
+		    if (!searchSpecPtr->overlap) {
+			if (storeMatch[matches] + storeLength[matches]
+				> matchOffset) {
+			    continue;
+			}
+		    }
+		    (*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lineNum, searchSpecPtr,
+			    lineInfo, theLine, matchOffset, matchLength);
+		    if (!searchSpecPtr->all) {
+			goto searchDone;
+		    }
+		    matchOffset = storeMatch[matches];
+		    matchLength = storeLength[matches];
+		}
+		if (searchSpecPtr->all && matches > 0) {
+		    /*
+		     * We only need to do this for the '-all' case, because
+		     * just below we will call the foundMatchProc for the
+		     * non-all case.
+		     */
+
+		    (*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lineNum, searchSpecPtr,
+			    lineInfo, theLine, matchOffset, matchLength);
+		} else {
+		    lastBackwardsLineMatch = lineNum;
+		    lastBackwardsMatchOffset = matchOffset;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * If the 'all' flag is set, we will already have stored all matches,
+	 * so we just proceed to the next line.
+	 *
+	 * If not, and there is a match we need to store that information and
+	 * we are done.
+	 */
+
+	if ((lastBackwardsLineMatch == -1) && (matchOffset >= 0)
+		&& !searchSpecPtr->all) {
+	    (*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lineNum, searchSpecPtr, lineInfo,
+		    theLine, matchOffset, matchLength);
+	    goto searchDone;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Go to the next (or previous) line;
+	 */
+
+    nextLine:
+	linesSearched += extraLinesSearched;
+
+	while (linesSearched-- > 0) {
+	    /*
+	     * If we have just completed the 'stopLine', we are done.
+	     */
+
+	    if (lineNum == searchSpecPtr->stopLine) {
+		goto searchDone;
+	    }
+
+	    if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
+		lineNum--;
+
+		if (lastBackwardsLineMatch != -1
+			&& ((lineNum < 0)
+			|| (lineNum + 2 < lastBackwardsLineMatch))) {
+		    (*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lastBackwardsLineMatch,
+			    searchSpecPtr, NULL, NULL,
+			    lastBackwardsMatchOffset, matchLength);
+		    lastBackwardsLineMatch = -1;
+		    if (!searchSpecPtr->all) {
+			goto searchDone;
+		    }
+		}
+
+		if (lineNum < 0) {
+		    lineNum = searchSpecPtr->numLines-1;
+		}
+		if (!searchSpecPtr->exact) {
+		    /*
+		     * The 'exact' search loops above are designed to give us
+		     * an accurate picture of the number of lines which we can
+		     * skip here. For 'regexp' searches, on the other hand,
+		     * which can match potentially variable lengths, we cannot
+		     * skip multiple lines when searching backwards. Therefore
+		     * we only allow one line to be skipped here.
+		     */
+
+		    break;
+		}
+	    } else {
+		lineNum++;
+		if (lineNum >= searchSpecPtr->numLines) {
+		    lineNum = 0;
+		}
+	    }
+	    if (lineNum == searchSpecPtr->startLine && linesSearched > 0) {
+		/*
+		 * We've just searched all the way round and have gone right
+		 * through the start line without finding anything in the last
+		 * attempt.
+		 */
+
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	Tcl_SetObjLength(theLine, 0);
     }
+  searchDone:
 
-    if (textPtr->isDirty == 0 || oldDirtyFlag == 0) {
-	GenerateModifiedEvent(textPtr);
+    if (lastBackwardsLineMatch != -1) {
+	(*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lastBackwardsLineMatch, searchSpecPtr,
+		NULL, NULL, lastBackwardsMatchOffset, matchLength);
     }
+
+    /*
+     * Free up the cached line and pattern.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(theLine);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(patObj);
+
+    /*
+     * Free up any extra space we allocated.
+     */
+
+    if (storeMatch != smArray) {
+	ckfree((char *) storeMatch);
+    }
+
+    return code;
 }
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetLineStartEnd -
+ *
+ *	Converts an internal TkTextLine ptr into a Tcl string obj containing
+ *	the line number. (Handler for the 'line' configuration option type.)
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Tcl_Obj containing the string representation of the line value.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Creates a new Tcl_Obj.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static Tcl_Obj *
+GetLineStartEnd(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    char *recordPtr,		/* Pointer to widget record. */
+    int internalOffset)		/* Offset within *recordPtr containing the
+				 * line value. */
+{
+    TkTextLine *linePtr = *(TkTextLine **)(recordPtr + internalOffset);
+
+    if (linePtr == NULL) {
+	return Tcl_NewObj();
+    } else {
+	return Tcl_NewIntObj(1+TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, linePtr));
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * SetLineStartEnd --
+ *
+ *	Converts a Tcl_Obj representing a widget's (start or end) line into a
+ *	TkTextLine* value. (Handler for the 'line' configuration option type.)
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Standard Tcl result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May store the TkTextLine* value into the internal representation
+ *	pointer. May change the pointer to the Tcl_Obj to NULL to indicate
+ *	that the specified string was empty and that is acceptable.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+SetLineStartEnd(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interp; may be used for errors. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window for which option is being set. */
+    Tcl_Obj **value,		/* Pointer to the pointer to the value object.
+				 * We use a pointer to the pointer because we
+				 * may need to return a value (NULL). */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* Pointer to storage for the widget record. */
+    int internalOffset,		/* Offset within *recordPtr at which the
+				 * internal value is to be stored. */
+    char *oldInternalPtr,	/* Pointer to storage for the old value. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags for the option, set Tk_SetOptions. */
+{
+    TkTextLine *linePtr = NULL;
+    char *internalPtr;
+    TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) recordPtr;
+
+    if (internalOffset >= 0) {
+	internalPtr = recordPtr + internalOffset;
+    } else {
+	internalPtr = NULL;
+    }
+
+    if (flags & TK_OPTION_NULL_OK && ObjectIsEmpty(*value)) {
+	*value = NULL;
+    } else {
+	int line;
+
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, *value, &line) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL, line-1);
+    }
+
+    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	*((TkTextLine **) oldInternalPtr) = *((TkTextLine **) internalPtr);
+	*((TkTextLine **) internalPtr) = linePtr;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * RestoreLineStartEnd --
+ *
+ *	Restore a line option value from a saved value. (Handler for the
+ *	'line' configuration option type.)
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Restores the old value.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+RestoreLineStartEnd(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    char *internalPtr,		/* Pointer to storage for value. */
+    char *oldInternalPtr)	/* Pointer to old value. */
+{
+    *(TkTextLine **)internalPtr = *(TkTextLine **)oldInternalPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ObjectIsEmpty --
+ *
+ *	This function tests whether the string value of an object is empty.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is 1 if the string value of objPtr has length zero,
+ *	and 0 otherwise.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May cause object shimmering, since this function can force a
+ *	conversion to a string object.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+ObjectIsEmpty(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Object to test. May be NULL. */
+{
+    int length;
+
+    if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	return 1;
+    }
+    if (objPtr->bytes != NULL) {
+	return (objPtr->length == 0);
+    }
+    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, &length);
+    return (length == 0);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpTesttextCmd --
+ *
+ *	This function implements the "testtext" command. It provides a set of
+ *	functions for testing text widgets and the associated functions in
+ *	tkText*.c.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Depends on option; see below.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpTesttextCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    const char **argv)		/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    TkText *textPtr;
+    size_t len;
+    int lineIndex, byteIndex, byteOffset;
+    TkTextIndex index;
+    char buf[64];
+    Tcl_CmdInfo info;
+
+    if (argc < 3) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, argv[1], &info) == 0) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (info.isNativeObjectProc) {
+	textPtr = (TkText *) info.objClientData;
+    } else {
+	textPtr = (TkText *) info.clientData;
+    }
+    len = strlen(argv[2]);
+    if (strncmp(argv[2], "byteindex", len) == 0) {
+	if (argc != 5) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	lineIndex = atoi(argv[3]) - 1;
+	byteIndex = atoi(argv[4]);
+
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineIndex,
+		byteIndex, &index);
+    } else if (strncmp(argv[2], "forwbytes", len) == 0) {
+	if (argc != 5) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	byteOffset = atoi(argv[4]);
+	TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &index, byteOffset, &index);
+    } else if (strncmp(argv[2], "backbytes", len) == 0) {
+	if (argc != 5) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	byteOffset = atoi(argv[4]);
+	TkTextIndexBackBytes(textPtr, &index, byteOffset, &index);
+    } else {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    TkTextSetMark(textPtr, "insert", &index);
+    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &index, buf);
+    sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), " %d", index.byteIndex);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkText.h b/generic/tkText.h
index 6331735..4ffdc8a 100644
--- a/generic/tkText.h
+++ b/generic/tkText.h
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
 /*
  * tkText.h --
  *
- *	Declarations shared among the files that implement text
- *	widgets.
+ *	Declarations shared among the files that implement text widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKTEXT
@@ -28,122 +27,142 @@
 #endif
 
 /*
- * Opaque types for structures whose guts are only needed by a single
- * file:
+ * Opaque types for structures whose guts are only needed by a single file.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkTextBTree_ *TkTextBTree;
 
 /*
- * The data structure below defines a single line of text (from newline
- * to newline, not necessarily what appears on one line of the screen).
+ * The data structure below defines a single logical line of text (from
+ * newline to newline, not necessarily what appears on one display line of the
+ * screen).
  */
 
 typedef struct TkTextLine {
-    struct Node *parentPtr;		/* Pointer to parent node containing
-					 * line. */
-    struct TkTextLine *nextPtr;		/* Next in linked list of lines with
-					 * same parent node in B-tree.  NULL
-					 * means end of list. */
-    struct TkTextSegment *segPtr;	/* First in ordered list of segments
-					 * that make up the line. */
+    struct Node *parentPtr;	/* Pointer to parent node containing line. */
+    struct TkTextLine *nextPtr;	/* Next in linked list of lines with same
+				 * parent node in B-tree. NULL means end of
+				 * list. */
+    struct TkTextSegment *segPtr;
+				/* First in ordered list of segments that make
+				 * up the line. */
+    int *pixels;		/* Array containing two integers for each
+				 * referring text widget. The first of these
+				 * is the number of vertical pixels taken up
+				 * by this line, whether currently displayed
+				 * or not. This number is only updated
+				 * asychronously. The second of these is the
+				 * last epoch at which the pixel height was
+				 * recalculated. */
 } TkTextLine;
 
 /*
  * -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  * Segments: each line is divided into one or more segments, where each
- * segment is one of several things, such as a group of characters, a
- * tag toggle, a mark, or an embedded widget.  Each segment starts with
- * a standard header followed by a body that varies from type to type.
+ * segment is one of several things, such as a group of characters, a tag
+ * toggle, a mark, or an embedded widget. Each segment starts with a standard
+ * header followed by a body that varies from type to type.
  * -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 /*
- * The data structure below defines the body of a segment that represents
- * a tag toggle.  There is one of these structures at both the beginning
- * and end of each tagged range.
+ * The data structure below defines the body of a segment that represents a
+ * tag toggle. There is one of these structures at both the beginning and end
+ * of each tagged range.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkTextToggle {
-    struct TkTextTag *tagPtr;		/* Tag that starts or ends here. */
-    int inNodeCounts;			/* 1 means this toggle has been
-					 * accounted for in node toggle
-					 * counts; 0 means it hasn't, yet. */
+    struct TkTextTag *tagPtr;	/* Tag that starts or ends here. */
+    int inNodeCounts;		/* 1 means this toggle has been accounted for
+				 * in node toggle counts; 0 means it hasn't,
+				 * yet. */
 } TkTextToggle;
 
 /*
- * The data structure below defines line segments that represent
- * marks.  There is one of these for each mark in the text.
+ * The data structure below defines line segments that represent marks. There
+ * is one of these for each mark in the text.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkTextMark {
-    struct TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information about text
-					 * widget. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line structure that contains the
-					 * segment. */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;		/* Pointer to hash table entry for mark
-					 * (in textPtr->markTable). */
+    struct TkText *textPtr;	/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* Line structure that contains the
+				 * segment. */
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;	/* Pointer to hash table entry for mark (in
+				 * sharedTextPtr->markTable). */
 } TkTextMark;
 
 /*
  * A structure of the following type holds information for each window
- * embedded in a text widget.  This information is only used by the
- * file tkTextWind.c
+ * embedded in a text widget. This information is only used by the file
+ * tkTextWind.c
  */
 
+typedef struct TkTextEmbWindowClient {
+    struct TkText *textPtr;	/* Information about the overall text
+				 * widget. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for this segment. NULL means that
+				 * the window hasn't been created yet. */
+    int chunkCount;		/* Number of display chunks that refer to this
+				 * window. */
+    int displayed;		/* Non-zero means that the window has been
+				 * displayed on the screen recently. */
+    struct TkTextSegment *parent;
+    struct TkTextEmbWindowClient *next;
+} TkTextEmbWindowClient;
+
 typedef struct TkTextEmbWindow {
-    struct TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about the overall text
-					 * widget. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line structure that contains this
-					 * window. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window for this segment.  NULL
-					 * means that the window hasn't
-					 * been created yet. */
-    char *create;			/* Script to create window on-demand.
-					 * NULL means no such script.
-					 * Malloc-ed. */
-    int align;				/* How to align window in vertical
-					 * space.  See definitions in
-					 * tkTextWind.c. */
-    int padX, padY;			/* Padding to leave around each side
-					 * of window, in pixels. */
-    int stretch;			/* Should window stretch to fill
-					 * vertical space of line (except for
-					 * pady)?  0 or 1. */
-    int chunkCount;			/* Number of display chunks that
-					 * refer to this window. */
-    int displayed;			/* Non-zero means that the window
-					 * has been displayed on the screen
-					 * recently. */
+    struct TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr;
+				/* Information about the shared portion of the
+				 * text widget. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for this segment. This is just a
+				 * temporary value, copied from 'clients', to
+				 * make option table updating easier. NULL
+				 * means that the window hasn't been created
+				 * yet. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* Line structure that contains this
+				 * window. */
+    char *create;		/* Script to create window on-demand. NULL
+				 * means no such script. Malloc-ed. */
+    int align;			/* How to align window in vertical space. See
+				 * definitions in tkTextWind.c. */
+    int padX, padY;		/* Padding to leave around each side of
+				 * window, in pixels. */
+    int stretch;		/* Should window stretch to fill vertical
+				 * space of line (except for pady)? 0 or 1. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Token representing the configuration
+				 * specifications. */
+    TkTextEmbWindowClient *clients;
+				/* Linked list of peer-widget specific
+				 * information for this embedded window. */
 } TkTextEmbWindow;
 
 /*
- * A structure of the following type holds information for each image
- * embedded in a text widget.  This information is only used by the
- * file tkTextImage.c
+ * A structure of the following type holds information for each image embedded
+ * in a text widget. This information is only used by the file tkTextImage.c
  */
 
 typedef struct TkTextEmbImage {
-    struct TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about the overall text
-					 * widget. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line structure that contains this
-					 * image. */
-    char *imageString;			/* Name of the image for this segment */
-    char *imageName;			/* Name used by text widget to identify
-    					 * this image.  May be unique-ified */
-    char *name;				/* Name used in the hash table.
-    					 * used by "image names" to identify
-    					 * this instance of the image */
-    Tk_Image image;			/* Image for this segment.  NULL
-					 * means that the image hasn't
-					 * been created yet. */
-    int align;				/* How to align image in vertical
-					 * space.  See definitions in
-					 * tkTextImage.c. */
-    int padX, padY;			/* Padding to leave around each side
-					 * of image, in pixels. */
-    int chunkCount;			/* Number of display chunks that
-					 * refer to this image. */
+    struct TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr;
+				/* Information about the shared portion of the
+				 * text widget. This is used when the image
+				 * changes or is deleted. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* Line structure that contains this image. */
+    char *imageString;		/* Name of the image for this segment. */
+    char *imageName;		/* Name used by text widget to identify this
+				 * image. May be unique-ified. */
+    char *name;			/* Name used in the hash table. Used by
+				 * "image names" to identify this instance of
+				 * the image. */
+    Tk_Image image;		/* Image for this segment. NULL means that the
+				 * image hasn't been created yet. */
+    int align;			/* How to align image in vertical space. See
+				 * definitions in tkTextImage.c. */
+    int padX, padY;		/* Padding to leave around each side of image,
+				 * in pixels. */
+    int chunkCount;		/* Number of display chunks that refer to this
+				 * image. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Token representing the configuration
+				 * specifications. */
 } TkTextEmbImage;
 
 /*
@@ -151,40 +170,43 @@ typedef struct TkTextEmbImage {
  */
 
 typedef struct TkTextSegment {
-    struct Tk_SegType *typePtr;		/* Pointer to record describing
-					 * segment's type. */
-    struct TkTextSegment *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of segments for this
-					 * line, or NULL for end of list. */
-    int size;				/* Size of this segment (# of bytes
-					 * of index space it occupies). */
+    const struct Tk_SegType *typePtr;
+				/* Pointer to record describing segment's
+				 * type. */
+    struct TkTextSegment *nextPtr;
+				/* Next in list of segments for this line, or
+				 * NULL for end of list. */
+    int size;			/* Size of this segment (# of bytes of index
+				 * space it occupies). */
     union {
-	char chars[4];			/* Characters that make up character
-					 * info.  Actual length varies to
-					 * hold as many characters as needed.*/
-	TkTextToggle toggle;		/* Information about tag toggle. */
-	TkTextMark mark;		/* Information about mark. */
-	TkTextEmbWindow ew;		/* Information about embedded
-					 * window. */
-	TkTextEmbImage ei;		/* Information about embedded
-					 * image. */
+	char chars[4];		/* Characters that make up character info.
+				 * Actual length varies to hold as many
+				 * characters as needed.*/
+	TkTextToggle toggle;	/* Information about tag toggle. */
+	TkTextMark mark;	/* Information about mark. */
+	TkTextEmbWindow ew;	/* Information about embedded window. */
+	TkTextEmbImage ei;	/* Information about embedded image. */
     } body;
 } TkTextSegment;
 
 /*
- * Data structures of the type defined below are used during the
- * execution of Tcl commands to keep track of various interesting
- * places in a text.  An index is only valid up until the next
- * modification to the character structure of the b-tree so they
- * can't be retained across Tcl commands.  However, mods to marks
- * or tags don't invalidate indices.
+ * Data structures of the type defined below are used during the execution of
+ * Tcl commands to keep track of various interesting places in a text. An
+ * index is only valid up until the next modification to the character
+ * structure of the b-tree so they can't be retained across Tcl commands.
+ * However, mods to marks or tags don't invalidate indices.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkTextIndex {
-    TkTextBTree tree;			/* Tree containing desired position. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Pointer to line containing position
-					 * of interest. */
-    int byteIndex;			/* Index within line of desired
-					 * character (0 means first one). */
+    TkTextBTree tree;		/* Tree containing desired position. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* Pointer to line containing position of
+				 * interest. */
+    int byteIndex;		/* Index within line of desired character (0
+				 * means first one). */
+    struct TkText *textPtr;	/* May be NULL, but otherwise the text widget
+				 * with which this index is associated. If not
+				 * NULL, then we have a refCount on the
+				 * widget. */
 } TkTextIndex;
 
 /*
@@ -193,204 +215,209 @@ typedef struct TkTextIndex {
 
 typedef struct TkTextDispChunk TkTextDispChunk;
 
-typedef void 		Tk_ChunkDisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
+typedef void 		Tk_ChunkDisplayProc(struct TkText *textPtr,
 			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x, int y,
 			    int height, int baseline, Display *display,
-			    Drawable dst, int screenY));
-typedef void		Tk_ChunkUndisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    struct TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr));
-typedef int		Tk_ChunkMeasureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x));
-typedef void		Tk_ChunkBboxProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    Drawable dst, int screenY);
+typedef void		Tk_ChunkUndisplayProc(struct TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr);
+typedef int		Tk_ChunkMeasureProc(TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x);
+typedef void		Tk_ChunkBboxProc(struct TkText *textPtr,
 			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int index, int y,
 			    int lineHeight, int baseline, int *xPtr,
-			    int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
+			    int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
 
 /*
- * The structure below represents a chunk of stuff that is displayed
- * together on the screen.  This structure is allocated and freed by
- * generic display code but most of its fields are filled in by
- * segment-type-specific code.
+ * The structure below represents a chunk of stuff that is displayed together
+ * on the screen. This structure is allocated and freed by generic display
+ * code but most of its fields are filled in by segment-type-specific code.
  */
 
 struct TkTextDispChunk {
     /*
-     * The fields below are set by the type-independent code before
-     * calling the segment-type-specific layoutProc.  They should not
-     * be modified by segment-type-specific code.
+     * The fields below are set by the type-independent code before calling
+     * the segment-type-specific layoutProc. They should not be modified by
+     * segment-type-specific code.
      */
 
-    int x;				/* X position of chunk, in pixels.
-					 * This position is measured from the
-					 * left edge of the logical line,
-					 * not from the left edge of the
-					 * window (i.e. it doesn't change
-					 * under horizontal scrolling). */
-    struct TkTextDispChunk *nextPtr;	/* Next chunk in the display line
-					 * or NULL for the end of the list. */
-    struct TextStyle *stylePtr;		/* Display information, known only
-					 * to tkTextDisp.c. */
+    int x;			/* X position of chunk, in pixels. This
+				 * position is measured from the left edge of
+				 * the logical line, not from the left edge of
+				 * the window (i.e. it doesn't change under
+				 * horizontal scrolling). */
+    struct TkTextDispChunk *nextPtr;
+				/* Next chunk in the display line or NULL for
+				 * the end of the list. */
+    struct TextStyle *stylePtr;	/* Display information, known only to
+				 * tkTextDisp.c. */
 
     /*
-     * The fields below are set by the layoutProc that creates the
-     * chunk.
+     * The fields below are set by the layoutProc that creates the chunk.
      */
 
-    Tk_ChunkDisplayProc *displayProc;	/* Procedure to invoke to draw this
-					 * chunk on the display or an
-					 * off-screen pixmap. */
+    Tk_ChunkDisplayProc *displayProc;
+				/* Procedure to invoke to draw this chunk on
+				 * the display or an off-screen pixmap. */
     Tk_ChunkUndisplayProc *undisplayProc;
-					/* Procedure to invoke when segment
-					 * ceases to be displayed on screen
-					 * anymore. */
-    Tk_ChunkMeasureProc *measureProc;	/* Procedure to find character under
-					 * a given x-location. */
-    Tk_ChunkBboxProc *bboxProc;		/* Procedure to find bounding box
-					 * of character in chunk. */
-    int numBytes;			/* Number of bytes that will be
-					 * displayed in the chunk. */
-    int minAscent;			/* Minimum space above the baseline
-					 * needed by this chunk. */
-    int minDescent;			/* Minimum space below the baseline
-					 * needed by this chunk. */
-    int minHeight;			/* Minimum total line height needed
-					 * by this chunk. */
-    int width;				/* Width of this chunk, in pixels.
-					 * Initially set by chunk-specific
-					 * code, but may be increased to
-					 * include tab or extra space at end
-					 * of line. */
-    int breakIndex;			/* Index within chunk of last
-					 * acceptable position for a line
-					 * (break just before this byte index).
-					 * <= 0 means don't break during or
-					 * immediately after this chunk. */
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Additional information for use
-					 * of displayProc and undisplayProc. */
+				/* Procedure to invoke when segment ceases to
+				 * be displayed on screen anymore. */
+    Tk_ChunkMeasureProc *measureProc;
+				/* Procedure to find character under a given
+				 * x-location. */
+    Tk_ChunkBboxProc *bboxProc;	/* Procedure to find bounding box of character
+				 * in chunk. */
+    int numBytes;		/* Number of bytes that will be displayed in
+				 * the chunk. */
+    int minAscent;		/* Minimum space above the baseline needed by
+				 * this chunk. */
+    int minDescent;		/* Minimum space below the baseline needed by
+				 * this chunk. */
+    int minHeight;		/* Minimum total line height needed by this
+				 * chunk. */
+    int width;			/* Width of this chunk, in pixels. Initially
+				 * set by chunk-specific code, but may be
+				 * increased to include tab or extra space at
+				 * end of line. */
+    int breakIndex;		/* Index within chunk of last acceptable
+				 * position for a line (break just before this
+				 * byte index). <= 0 means don't break during
+				 * or immediately after this chunk. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Additional information for use of
+				 * displayProc and undisplayProc. */
 };
 
 /*
- * One data structure of the following type is used for each tag in a
- * text widget.  These structures are kept in textPtr->tagTable and
- * referred to in other structures.
+ * One data structure of the following type is used for each tag in a text
+ * widget. These structures are kept in sharedTextPtr->tagTable and referred
+ * to in other structures.
  */
 
-typedef enum {	TEXT_WRAPMODE_NULL, TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE,
-		TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR, TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD
+typedef enum {
+    TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR, TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE, TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD,
+    TEXT_WRAPMODE_NULL
 } TkWrapMode;
 
-EXTERN Tk_CustomOption TkTextWrapModeOption;
-
 typedef struct TkTextTag {
-    char *name;			/* Name of this tag.  This field is actually
-				 * a pointer to the key from the entry in
-				 * textPtr->tagTable, so it needn't be freed
-				 * explicitly. */
-    int priority;		/* Priority of this tag within widget.  0
-				 * means lowest priority.  Exactly one tag
-				 * has each integer value between 0 and
-				 * numTags-1. */
-    struct Node *tagRootPtr;	/* Pointer into the B-Tree at the lowest
-				 * node that completely dominates the ranges
-				 * of text occupied by the tag.  At this
-				 * node there is no information about the
-				 * tag.  One or more children of the node
-				 * do contain information about the tag. */
-    int toggleCount;		/* Total number of tag toggles */
+    const char *name;		/* Name of this tag. This field is actually a
+				 * pointer to the key from the entry in
+				 * sharedTextPtr->tagTable, so it needn't be
+				 * freed explicitly. For 'sel' tags this is
+				 * just a static string, so again need not be
+				 * freed. */
+    const struct TkText *textPtr;
+				/* If non-NULL, then this tag only applies to
+				 * the given text widget (when there are peer
+				 * widgets). */
+    int priority;		/* Priority of this tag within widget. 0 means
+				 * lowest priority. Exactly one tag has each
+				 * integer value between 0 and numTags-1. */
+    struct Node *tagRootPtr;	/* Pointer into the B-Tree at the lowest node
+				 * that completely dominates the ranges of
+				 * text occupied by the tag. At this node
+				 * there is no information about the tag. One
+				 * or more children of the node do contain
+				 * information about the tag. */
+    int toggleCount;		/* Total number of tag toggles. */
 
     /*
-     * Information for displaying text with this tag.  The information
-     * belows acts as an override on information specified by lower-priority
-     * tags.  If no value is specified, then the next-lower-priority tag
-     * on the text determins the value.  The text widget itself provides
-     * defaults if no tag specifies an override.
+     * Information for displaying text with this tag. The information belows
+     * acts as an override on information specified by lower-priority tags.
+     * If no value is specified, then the next-lower-priority tag on the text
+     * determins the value. The text widget itself provides defaults if no tag
+     * specifies an override.
      */
 
-    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Used for drawing background.  NULL means
-				 * no value specified here. */
-    char *bdString;		/* -borderwidth option string (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means option not specified. */
+    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Used for drawing background. NULL means no
+				 * value specified here. */
     int borderWidth;		/* Width of 3-D border for background. */
-    char *reliefString;		/* -relief option string (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means option not specified. */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthPtr;	/* Width of 3-D border for background. */
+    char *reliefString;		/* -relief option string (malloc-ed). NULL
+				 * means option not specified. */
     int relief;			/* 3-D relief for background. */
-    Pixmap bgStipple;		/* Stipple bitmap for background.  None
-				 * means no value specified here. */
-    XColor *fgColor;		/* Foreground color for text.  NULL means
-				 * no value specified here. */
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font for displaying text.  NULL means
+    Pixmap bgStipple;		/* Stipple bitmap for background. None means
 				 * no value specified here. */
+    XColor *fgColor;		/* Foreground color for text. NULL means no
+				 * value specified here. */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font for displaying text. NULL means no
+				 * value specified here. */
     Pixmap fgStipple;		/* Stipple bitmap for text and other
-				 * foreground stuff.   None means no value
+				 * foreground stuff. None means no value
 				 * specified here.*/
-    char *justifyString;	/* -justify option string (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means option not specified. */
+    char *justifyString;	/* -justify option string (malloc-ed). NULL
+				 * means option not specified. */
     Tk_Justify justify;		/* How to justify text: TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT,
 				 * TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT, or TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER.
 				 * Only valid if justifyString is non-NULL. */
-    char *lMargin1String;	/* -lmargin1 option string (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means option not specified. */
-    int lMargin1;		/* Left margin for first display line of
-				 * each text line, in pixels.  Only valid
-				 * if lMargin1String is non-NULL. */
-    char *lMargin2String;	/* -lmargin2 option string (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means option not specified. */
+    char *lMargin1String;	/* -lmargin1 option string (malloc-ed). NULL
+				 * means option not specified. */
+    int lMargin1;		/* Left margin for first display line of each
+				 * text line, in pixels. Only valid if
+				 * lMargin1String is non-NULL. */
+    char *lMargin2String;	/* -lmargin2 option string (malloc-ed). NULL
+				 * means option not specified. */
     int lMargin2;		/* Left margin for second and later display
-				 * lines of each text line, in pixels.  Only
+				 * lines of each text line, in pixels. Only
 				 * valid if lMargin2String is non-NULL. */
-    char *offsetString;		/* -offset option string (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means option not specified. */
+    char *offsetString;		/* -offset option string (malloc-ed). NULL
+				 * means option not specified. */
     int offset;			/* Vertical offset of text's baseline from
-				 * baseline of line.  Used for superscripts
-				 * and subscripts.  Only valid if
-				 * offsetString is non-NULL. */
-    char *overstrikeString;	/* -overstrike option string (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means option not specified. */
+				 * baseline of line. Used for superscripts and
+				 * subscripts. Only valid if offsetString is
+				 * non-NULL. */
+    char *overstrikeString;	/* -overstrike option string (malloc-ed). NULL
+				 * means option not specified. */
     int overstrike;		/* Non-zero means draw horizontal line through
-				 * middle of text.  Only valid if
+				 * middle of text. Only valid if
 				 * overstrikeString is non-NULL. */
-    char *rMarginString;	/* -rmargin option string (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means option not specified. */
-    int rMargin;		/* Right margin for text, in pixels.  Only
+    char *rMarginString;	/* -rmargin option string (malloc-ed). NULL
+				 * means option not specified. */
+    int rMargin;		/* Right margin for text, in pixels. Only
 				 * valid if rMarginString is non-NULL. */
-    char *spacing1String;	/* -spacing1 option string (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means option not specified. */
-    int spacing1;		/* Extra spacing above first display
-				 * line for text line.  Only valid if
-				 * spacing1String is non-NULL. */
-    char *spacing2String;	/* -spacing2 option string (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means option not specified. */
-    int spacing2;		/* Extra spacing between display
-				 * lines for the same text line.  Only valid
-				 * if spacing2String is non-NULL. */
-    char *spacing3String;	/* -spacing2 option string (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means option not specified. */
-    int spacing3;		/* Extra spacing below last display
-				 * line for text line.  Only valid if
-				 * spacing3String is non-NULL. */
-    char *tabString;		/* -tabs option string (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means option not specified. */
+    char *spacing1String;	/* -spacing1 option string (malloc-ed). NULL
+				 * means option not specified. */
+    int spacing1;		/* Extra spacing above first display line for
+				 * text line. Only valid if spacing1String is
+				 * non-NULL. */
+    char *spacing2String;	/* -spacing2 option string (malloc-ed). NULL
+				 * means option not specified. */
+    int spacing2;		/* Extra spacing between display lines for the
+				 * same text line. Only valid if
+				 * spacing2String is non-NULL. */
+    char *spacing3String;	/* -spacing2 option string (malloc-ed). NULL
+				 * means option not specified. */
+    int spacing3;		/* Extra spacing below last display line for
+				 * text line. Only valid if spacing3String is
+				 * non-NULL. */
+    Tcl_Obj *tabStringPtr;	/* -tabs option string. NULL means option not
+				 * specified. */
     struct TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr;
-				/* Info about tabs for tag (malloc-ed)
-				 * or NULL.  Corresponds to tabString. */
-    char *underlineString;	/* -underline option string (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means option not specified. */
+				/* Info about tabs for tag (malloc-ed) or
+				 * NULL. Corresponds to tabString. */
+    int tabStyle;		/* One of TABULAR or WORDPROCESSOR or NONE (if
+				 * not specified). */
+    char *underlineString;	/* -underline option string (malloc-ed). NULL
+				 * means option not specified. */
     int underline;		/* Non-zero means draw underline underneath
-				 * text.  Only valid if underlineString is
+				 * text. Only valid if underlineString is
 				 * non-NULL. */
     TkWrapMode wrapMode;	/* How to handle wrap-around for this tag.
 				 * Must be TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR,
-				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE, TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD,
-				 * or TEXT_WRAPMODE_NULL to use wrapmode for
+				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE, TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD, or
+				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_NULL to use wrapmode for
 				 * whole widget. */
-    char *elideString;		/* -elide option string (malloc-ed).
-				 * NULL means option not specified. */
+    char *elideString;		/* -elide option string (malloc-ed). NULL
+				 * means option not specified. */
     int elide;			/* Non-zero means that data under this tag
 				 * should not be displayed. */
     int affectsDisplay;		/* Non-zero means that this tag affects the
 				 * way information is displayed on the screen
 				 * (so need to redisplay if tag changes). */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Token representing the configuration
+				 * specifications. */
+    int affectsDisplayGeometry;	/* Non-zero means that this tag affects the
+				 * size with which information is displayed on
+				 * the screen (so need to recalculate line
+				 * dimensions if tag changes). */
 } TkTextTag;
 
 #define TK_TAG_AFFECTS_DISPLAY	0x1
@@ -399,66 +426,81 @@ typedef struct TkTextTag {
 #define TK_TAG_OFFSET		0x10
 
 /*
- * The data structure below is used for searching a B-tree for transitions
- * on a single tag (or for all tag transitions).  No code outside of
- * tkTextBTree.c should ever modify any of the fields in these structures,
- * but it's OK to use them for read-only information.
+ * The data structure below is used for searching a B-tree for transitions on
+ * a single tag (or for all tag transitions). No code outside of tkTextBTree.c
+ * should ever modify any of the fields in these structures, but it's OK to
+ * use them for read-only information.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkTextSearch {
-    TkTextIndex curIndex;		/* Position of last tag transition
-					 * returned by TkBTreeNextTag, or
-					 * index of start of segment
-					 * containing starting position for
-					 * search if TkBTreeNextTag hasn't
-					 * been called yet, or same as
-					 * stopIndex if search is over. */
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;		/* Actual tag segment returned by last
-					 * call to TkBTreeNextTag, or NULL if
-					 * TkBTreeNextTag hasn't returned
-					 * anything yet. */
-    TkTextSegment *nextPtr;		/* Where to resume search in next
-					 * call to TkBTreeNextTag. */
-    TkTextSegment *lastPtr;		/* Stop search before just before
-					 * considering this segment. */
-    TkTextTag *tagPtr;			/* Tag to search for (or tag found, if
-					 * allTags is non-zero). */
-    int linesLeft;			/* Lines left to search (including
-					 * curIndex and stopIndex).  When
-					 * this becomes <= 0 the search is
-					 * over. */
-    int allTags;			/* Non-zero means ignore tag check:
-					 * search for transitions on all
-					 * tags. */
+    TkTextIndex curIndex;	/* Position of last tag transition returned by
+				 * TkBTreeNextTag, or index of start of
+				 * segment containing starting position for
+				 * search if TkBTreeNextTag hasn't been called
+				 * yet, or same as stopIndex if search is
+				 * over. */
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr;	/* Actual tag segment returned by last call to
+				 * TkBTreeNextTag, or NULL if TkBTreeNextTag
+				 * hasn't returned anything yet. */
+    TkTextSegment *nextPtr;	/* Where to resume search in next call to
+				 * TkBTreeNextTag. */
+    TkTextSegment *lastPtr;	/* Stop search before just before considering
+				 * this segment. */
+    TkTextTag *tagPtr;		/* Tag to search for (or tag found, if allTags
+				 * is non-zero). */
+    int linesLeft;		/* Lines left to search (including curIndex
+				 * and stopIndex). When this becomes <= 0 the
+				 * search is over. */
+    int allTags;		/* Non-zero means ignore tag check: search for
+				 * transitions on all tags. */
 } TkTextSearch;
 
 /*
- * The following data structure describes a single tab stop.
+ * The following data structure describes a single tab stop. It must be kept
+ * in sync with the 'tabOptionStrings' array in the function 'TkTextGetTabs'
  */
 
 typedef enum {LEFT, RIGHT, CENTER, NUMERIC} TkTextTabAlign;
 
+/*
+ * The following are the supported styles of tabbing, used for the -tabstyle
+ * option of the text widget. The last element is only used for tag options.
+ */
+
+typedef enum {
+    TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_TABULAR,
+    TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_WORDPROCESSOR,
+    TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_NONE
+} TkTextTabStyle;
+
 typedef struct TkTextTab {
-    int location;			/* Offset in pixels of this tab stop
-					 * from the left margin (lmargin2) of
-					 * the text. */
-    TkTextTabAlign alignment;		/* Where the tab stop appears relative
-					 * to the text. */
+    int location;		/* Offset in pixels of this tab stop from the
+				 * left margin (lmargin2) of the text. */
+    TkTextTabAlign alignment;	/* Where the tab stop appears relative to the
+				 * text. */
 } TkTextTab;
 
 typedef struct TkTextTabArray {
-    int numTabs;			/* Number of tab stops. */
-    TkTextTab tabs[1];			/* Array of tabs.  The actual size
-					 * will be numTabs.  THIS FIELD MUST
-					 * BE THE LAST IN THE STRUCTURE. */
+    int numTabs;		/* Number of tab stops. */
+    double lastTab;		/* The accurate fractional pixel position of
+				 * the last tab. */
+    double tabIncrement;	/* The accurate fractional pixel increment
+				 * between interpolated tabs we have to create
+				 * when we exceed numTabs. */
+    TkTextTab tabs[1];		/* Array of tabs. The actual size will be
+				 * numTabs. THIS FIELD MUST BE THE LAST IN THE
+				 * STRUCTURE. */
 } TkTextTabArray;
 
-/* enum definining the edit modes of */
+/*
+ * Enumeration definining the edit modes of the widget.
+ */
 
 typedef enum {
-    TK_TEXT_EDIT_INSERT,			/* insert mode */
-    TK_TEXT_EDIT_DELETE,			/* delete mode */
-    TK_TEXT_EDIT_OTHER			   /* none of the above */
+    TK_TEXT_EDIT_INSERT,	/* insert mode */
+    TK_TEXT_EDIT_DELETE,	/* delete mode */
+    TK_TEXT_EDIT_REPLACE,	/* replace mode */
+    TK_TEXT_EDIT_OTHER		/* none of the above */
 } TkTextEditMode;
 
 /*
@@ -475,46 +517,127 @@ typedef enum {
 } TkTextDirtyMode;
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each text widget that
- * currently exists for this process:
+ * The following enum is used to define a type for the -state option of the
+ * Text widget.
  */
 
-typedef struct TkText {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the text.  NULL
-				 * means that the window has been destroyed
-				 * but the data structures haven't yet been
-				 * cleaned up.*/
-    Display *display;		/* Display for widget.  Needed, among other
-				 * things, to allow resources to be freed
-				 * even after tkwin has gone away. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with widget.  Used
-				 * to delete widget command.  */
-    Tcl_Command widgetCmd;	/* Token for text's widget command. */
+typedef enum {
+    TK_TEXT_STATE_DISABLED, TK_TEXT_STATE_NORMAL
+} TkTextState;
+
+/*
+ * A data structure of the following type is shared between each text widget
+ * that are peers.
+ */
+
+typedef struct TkSharedText {
+    int refCount;		/* Reference count this shared object. */
     TkTextBTree tree;		/* B-tree representation of text and tags for
 				 * widget. */
     Tcl_HashTable tagTable;	/* Hash table that maps from tag names to
-				 * pointers to TkTextTag structures. */
+				 * pointers to TkTextTag structures. The "sel"
+				 * tag does not feature in this table, since
+				 * there's one of those for each text peer. */
     int numTags;		/* Number of tags currently defined for
-				 * widget;  needed to keep track of
+				 * widget; needed to keep track of
 				 * priorities. */
     Tcl_HashTable markTable;	/* Hash table that maps from mark names to
-				 * pointers to mark segments. */
-    Tcl_HashTable windowTable;	/* Hash table that maps from window names
-				 * to pointers to window segments.  If a
-				 * window segment doesn't yet have an
-				 * associated window, there is no entry for
-				 * it here. */
-    Tcl_HashTable imageTable;	/* Hash table that maps from image names
-				 * to pointers to image segments.  If an
-				 * image segment doesn't yet have an
-				 * associated image, there is no entry for
-				 * it here. */
+				 * pointers to mark segments. The special
+				 * "insert" and "current" marks are not stored
+				 * in this table, but directly accessed as
+				 * fields of textPtr. */
+    Tcl_HashTable windowTable;	/* Hash table that maps from window names to
+				 * pointers to window segments. If a window
+				 * segment doesn't yet have an associated
+				 * window, there is no entry for it here. */
+    Tcl_HashTable imageTable;	/* Hash table that maps from image names to
+				 * pointers to image segments. If an image
+				 * segment doesn't yet have an associated
+				 * image, there is no entry for it here. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
+				/* Table of all bindings currently defined for
+				 * this widget. NULL means that no bindings
+				 * exist, so the table hasn't been created.
+				 * Each "object" used for this table is the
+				 * name of a tag. */
+    int stateEpoch;		/* This is incremented each time the B-tree's
+				 * contents change structurally, or when the
+				 * start/end limits change, and means that any
+				 * cached TkTextIndex objects are no longer
+				 * valid. */
+
+    /*
+     * Information related to the undo/redo functionality.
+     */
+
+    TkUndoRedoStack *undoStack;	/* The undo/redo stack. */
+    int undo;			/* Non-zero means the undo/redo behaviour is
+				 * enabled. */
+    int maxUndo;		/* The maximum depth of the undo stack
+				 * expressed as the maximum number of compound
+				 * statements. */
+    int autoSeparators;		/* Non-zero means the separators will be
+				 * inserted automatically. */
+    int isDirty;		/* Flag indicating the 'dirtyness' of the
+				 * text widget. If the flag is not zero,
+				 * unsaved modifications have been applied to
+				 * the text widget. */
+    TkTextDirtyMode dirtyMode;	/* The nature of the dirtyness characterized
+				 * by the isDirty flag. */
+    TkTextEditMode lastEditMode;/* Keeps track of what the last edit mode
+				 * was. */
+
+    /*
+     * Keep track of all the peers
+     */
+
+    struct TkText *peers;
+} TkSharedText;
+
+/*
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each text widget that
+ * currently exists for this process:
+ */
+
+typedef struct TkText {
+    /*
+     * Information related to and accessed by widget peers and the
+     * TkSharedText handling routines.
+     */
+
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr;/* Shared section of all peers. */
+    struct TkText *next;	/* Next in list of linked peers. */
+    TkTextLine *start;		/* First B-tree line to show, or NULL to start
+				 * at the beginning. */
+    TkTextLine *end;		/* Last B-tree line to show, or NULL for up to
+				 * the end. */
+    int pixelReference;		/* Counter into the current tree reference
+				 * index corresponding to this widget. */
+    int abortSelections;	/* Set to 1 whenever the text is modified in a
+				 * way that interferes with selection
+				 * retrieval: used to abort incremental
+				 * selection retrievals. */
+
+    /*
+     * Standard Tk widget information and text-widget specific items
+     */
+
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the text. NULL means
+				 * that the window has been destroyed but the
+				 * data structures haven't yet been cleaned
+				 * up.*/
+    Display *display;		/* Display for widget. Needed, among other
+				 * things, to allow resources to be freed even
+				 * after tkwin has gone away. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with widget. Used to
+				 * delete widget command. */
+    Tcl_Command widgetCmd;	/* Token for text's widget command. */
     int state;			/* Either STATE_NORMAL or STATE_DISABLED. A
 				 * text widget is read-only when disabled. */
 
     /*
-     * Default information for displaying (may be overridden by tags
-     * applied to ranges of characters).
+     * Default information for displaying (may be overridden by tags applied
+     * to ranges of characters).
      */
 
     Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Structure used to draw 3-D border and
@@ -522,44 +645,47 @@ typedef struct TkText {
     int borderWidth;		/* Width of 3-D border to draw around entire
 				 * widget. */
     int padX, padY;		/* Padding between text and window border. */
-    int relief;			/* 3-d effect for border around entire
-				 * widget: TK_RELIEF_RAISED etc. */
-    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw
-				 * around widget when it has the focus.
-				 * <= 0 means don't draw a highlight. */
+    int relief;			/* 3-d effect for border around entire widget:
+				 * TK_RELIEF_RAISED etc. */
+    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw around
+				 * widget when it has the focus. <= 0 means
+				 * don't draw a highlight. */
     XColor *highlightBgColorPtr;
-				/* Color for drawing traversal highlight
-				 * area when highlight is off. */
+				/* Color for drawing traversal highlight area
+				 * when highlight is off. */
     XColor *highlightColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing traversal highlight. */
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
     XColor *fgColor;		/* Default foreground color for text. */
     Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Default font for displaying text. */
     int charWidth;		/* Width of average character in default
 				 * font. */
+    int charHeight;		/* Height of average character in default
+				 * font, including line spacing. */
     int spacing1;		/* Default extra spacing above first display
 				 * line for each text line. */
     int spacing2;		/* Default extra spacing between display lines
 				 * for the same text line. */
     int spacing3;		/* Default extra spacing below last display
 				 * line for each text line. */
-    char *tabOptionString;	/* Value of -tabs option string (malloc'ed). */
+    Tcl_Obj *tabOptionPtr; 	/* Value of -tabs option string. */
     TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr;
 				/* Information about tab stops (malloc'ed).
 				 * NULL means perform default tabbing
 				 * behavior. */
+    int tabStyle;		/* One of TABULAR or WORDPROCESSOR. */
 
     /*
      * Additional information used for displaying:
      */
 
-    TkWrapMode wrapMode;	/* How to handle wrap-around.  Must be
+    TkWrapMode wrapMode;	/* How to handle wrap-around. Must be
 				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR, TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE, or
 				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD. */
-    int width, height;		/* Desired dimensions for window, measured
-				 * in characters. */
-    int setGrid;		/* Non-zero means pass gridding information
-				 * to window manager. */
-    int prevWidth, prevHeight;	/* Last known dimensions of window;  used to
+    int width, height;		/* Desired dimensions for window, measured in
+				 * characters. */
+    int setGrid;		/* Non-zero means pass gridding information to
+				 * window manager. */
+    int prevWidth, prevHeight;	/* Last known dimensions of window; used to
 				 * detect changes in size. */
     TkTextIndex topIndex;	/* Identifies first character in top display
 				 * line of window. */
@@ -569,31 +695,27 @@ typedef struct TkText {
      * Information related to selection.
      */
 
-    TkTextTag *selTagPtr;	/* Pointer to "sel" tag.  Used to tell when
-				 * a new selection has been made. */
+    TkTextTag *selTagPtr;	/* Pointer to "sel" tag. Used to tell when a
+				 * new selection has been made. */
     Tk_3DBorder selBorder;	/* Border and background for selected
-				 * characters.  This is a copy of information
-				 * in *cursorTagPtr, so it shouldn't be
-				 * explicitly freed. */
-    char *selBdString;		/* Value of -selectborderwidth option, or NULL
-				 * if not specified (malloc'ed). */
-    XColor *selFgColorPtr;	/* Foreground color for selected text.
-				 * This is a copy of information in
-				 * *cursorTagPtr, so it shouldn't be
+				 * characters. This is a copy of information
+				 * in *selTagPtr, so it shouldn't be
 				 * explicitly freed. */
+    Tk_3DBorder inactiveSelBorder;
+				/* Border and background for selected
+				 * characters when they don't have the
+				 * focus. */
+    int selBorderWidth;		/* Width of border around selection. */
+    Tcl_Obj *selBorderWidthPtr;	/* Width of border around selection. */
+    XColor *selFgColorPtr;	/* Foreground color for selected text. This is
+				 * a copy of information in *selTagPtr, so it
+				 * shouldn't be explicitly freed. */
     int exportSelection;	/* Non-zero means tie "sel" tag to X
 				 * selection. */
-    TkTextIndex selIndex;	/* Used during multi-pass selection retrievals.
-				 * This index identifies the next character
-				 * to be returned from the selection. */
-    int abortSelections;	/* Set to 1 whenever the text is modified
-				 * in a way that interferes with selection
-				 * retrieval:  used to abort incremental
-				 * selection retrievals. */
-    int selOffset;		/* Offset in selection corresponding to
-				 * selLine and selCh.  -1 means neither
-				 * this information nor selIndex is of any
-				 * use. */
+    TkTextIndex selIndex;	/* Used during multi-pass selection
+				 * retrievals. This index identifies the next
+				 * character to be returned from the
+				 * selection. */
 
     /*
      * Information related to insertion cursor:
@@ -617,58 +739,49 @@ typedef struct TkText {
      * Information used for event bindings associated with tags:
      */
 
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
-				/* Table of all bindings currently defined
-				 * for this widget.  NULL means that no
-				 * bindings exist, so the table hasn't been
-				 * created.  Each "object" used for this
-				 * table is the address of a tag. */
     TkTextSegment *currentMarkPtr;
-				/* Pointer to segment for "current" mark,
-				 * or NULL if none. */
+				/* Pointer to segment for "current" mark, or
+				 * NULL if none. */
     XEvent pickEvent;		/* The event from which the current character
-				 * was chosen.	Must be saved so that we
-				 * can repick after modifications to the
-				 * text. */
-    int numCurTags;		/* Number of tags associated with character
-				 * at current mark. */
-    TkTextTag **curTagArrayPtr;	/* Pointer to array of tags for current
-				 * mark, or NULL if none. */
+				 * was chosen. Must be saved so that we can
+				 * repick after modifications to the text. */
+    int numCurTags;		/* Number of tags associated with character at
+				 * current mark. */
+    TkTextTag **curTagArrayPtr;	/* Pointer to array of tags for current mark,
+				 * or NULL if none. */
 
     /*
      * Miscellaneous additional information:
      */
 
-    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takeFocus option;	not used in
-				 * the C code, but used by keyboard traversal
-				 * scripts.  Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
+    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takeFocus option; not used in the
+				 * C code, but used by keyboard traversal
+				 * scripts. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
     char *xScrollCmd;		/* Prefix of command to issue to update
 				 * horizontal scrollbar when view changes. */
     char *yScrollCmd;		/* Prefix of command to issue to update
 				 * vertical scrollbar when view changes. */
-    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags;	 see below for
+    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Token representing the configuration
+				 * specifications. */
+    int refCount;		/* Number of cached TkTextIndex objects
+				 * refering to us. */
+    int insertCursorType;	/* 0 = standard insertion cursor, 1 = block
+				 * cursor. */
 
     /*
-     * Information related to the undo/redo funcitonality
+     * Copies of information from the shared section relating to the undo/redo
+     * functonality
      */
-     
-    TkUndoRedoStack *undoStack;	/* The undo/redo stack. */
-    int undo;			/* non zero means the undo/redo behaviour is 
+
+    int undo;			/* Non-zero means the undo/redo behaviour is
 				 * enabled. */
     int maxUndo;		/* The maximum depth of the undo stack
 				 * expressed as the maximum number of compound
 				 * statements. */
-    int autoSeparators;		/* non zero means the separatorss will be 
+    int autoSeparators;		/* Non-zero means the separators will be
 				 * inserted automatically. */
-    int isDirty;		/* Flag indicating the 'dirtynesss' of the
-				 * text widget. If the flag is not zero,
-				 * unsaved modifications have been applied to
-				 * the text widget. */
-    TkTextDirtyMode dirtyMode;	/* The nature of the dirtyness characterized
-				 * by the isDirty flag. */
-    TkTextEditMode lastEditMode;/* Keeps track of what the last edit mode
-				 * was. */
 } TkText;
 
 /*
@@ -680,11 +793,15 @@ typedef struct TkText {
  *				displayed on screen.
  * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this window has the input
  *				focus.
- * BUTTON_DOWN:			1 means that a mouse button is currently
- *				down;  this is used to implement grabs
- *				for the duration of button presses.
+ * BUTTON_DOWN:			1 means that a mouse button is currently down;
+ *				this is used to implement grabs for the
+ *				duration of button presses.
  * UPDATE_SCROLLBARS:		Non-zero means scrollbar(s) should be updated
  *				during next redisplay operation.
+ * NEED_REPICK			This appears unused and should probably be
+ *				ignored.
+ * OPTIONS_FREED		The widget's options have been freed.
+ * DESTROYED			The widget is going away.
  */
 
 #define GOT_SELECTION		1
@@ -693,230 +810,367 @@ typedef struct TkText {
 #define BUTTON_DOWN		8
 #define UPDATE_SCROLLBARS	0x10
 #define NEED_REPICK		0x20
+#define OPTIONS_FREED		0x40
+#define DESTROYED		0x80
 
 /*
- * Records of the following type define segment types in terms of
- * a collection of procedures that may be called to manipulate
- * segments of that type.
- */
-
-typedef TkTextSegment *	Tk_SegSplitProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    struct TkTextSegment *segPtr, int index));
-typedef int		Tk_SegDeleteProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    struct TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int treeGone));
-typedef TkTextSegment *	Tk_SegCleanupProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    struct TkTextSegment *segPtr, TkTextLine *linePtr));
-typedef void		Tk_SegLineChangeProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    struct TkTextSegment *segPtr, TkTextLine *linePtr));
-typedef int		Tk_SegLayoutProc _ANSI_ARGS_((struct TkText *textPtr,
-			    struct TkTextIndex *indexPtr, TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    int offset, int maxX, int maxChars,
-			    int noCharsYet, TkWrapMode wrapMode,
-			    struct TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr));
-typedef void		Tk_SegCheckProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr));
+ * Records of the following type define segment types in terms of a collection
+ * of procedures that may be called to manipulate segments of that type.
+ */
+
+typedef TkTextSegment *	Tk_SegSplitProc(struct TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    int index);
+typedef int		Tk_SegDeleteProc(struct TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int treeGone);
+typedef TkTextSegment *	Tk_SegCleanupProc(struct TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+typedef void		Tk_SegLineChangeProc(struct TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+typedef int		Tk_SegLayoutProc(struct TkText *textPtr,
+			    struct TkTextIndex *indexPtr,
+			    TkTextSegment *segPtr, int offset, int maxX,
+			    int maxChars, int noCharsYet, TkWrapMode wrapMode,
+			    struct TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr);
+typedef void		Tk_SegCheckProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
 
 typedef struct Tk_SegType {
-    char *name;				/* Name of this kind of segment. */
-    int leftGravity;			/* If a segment has zero size (e.g. a
-					 * mark or tag toggle), does it
-					 * attach to character to its left
-					 * or right?  1 means left, 0 means
-					 * right. */
-    Tk_SegSplitProc *splitProc;		/* Procedure to split large segment
-					 * into two smaller ones. */
-    Tk_SegDeleteProc *deleteProc;	/* Procedure to call to delete
-					 * segment. */
-    Tk_SegCleanupProc *cleanupProc;	/* After any change to a line, this
-					 * procedure is invoked for all
-					 * segments left in the line to
-					 * perform any cleanup they wish
-					 * (e.g. joining neighboring
-					 * segments). */
+    const char *name;		/* Name of this kind of segment. */
+    int leftGravity;		/* If a segment has zero size (e.g. a mark or
+				 * tag toggle), does it attach to character to
+				 * its left or right? 1 means left, 0 means
+				 * right. */
+    Tk_SegSplitProc *splitProc;	/* Procedure to split large segment into two
+				 * smaller ones. */
+    Tk_SegDeleteProc *deleteProc;
+				/* Procedure to call to delete segment. */
+    Tk_SegCleanupProc *cleanupProc;
+				/* After any change to a line, this procedure
+				 * is invoked for all segments left in the
+				 * line to perform any cleanup they wish
+				 * (e.g. joining neighboring segments). */
     Tk_SegLineChangeProc *lineChangeProc;
-					/* Invoked when a segment is about
-					 * to be moved from its current line
-					 * to an earlier line because of
-					 * a deletion.  The linePtr is that
-					 * for the segment's old line.
-					 * CleanupProc will be invoked after
-					 * the deletion is finished. */
-    Tk_SegLayoutProc *layoutProc;	/* Returns size information when
-					 * figuring out what to display in
-					 * window. */
-    Tk_SegCheckProc *checkProc;		/* Called during consistency checks
-					 * to check internal consistency of
-					 * segment. */
+				/* Invoked when a segment is about to be moved
+				 * from its current line to an earlier line
+				 * because of a deletion. The linePtr is that
+				 * for the segment's old line. CleanupProc
+				 * will be invoked after the deletion is
+				 * finished. */
+    Tk_SegLayoutProc *layoutProc;
+				/* Returns size information when figuring out
+				 * what to display in window. */
+    Tk_SegCheckProc *checkProc;	/* Called during consistency checks to check
+				 * internal consistency of segment. */
 } Tk_SegType;
 
 /*
- * The constant below is used to specify a line when what is really
- * wanted is the entire text.  For now, just use a very big number.
+ * The following type and items describe different flags for text widget items
+ * to count. They are used in both tkText.c and tkTextIndex.c, in
+ * 'CountIndices', 'TkTextIndexBackChars', 'TkTextIndexForwChars', and
+ * 'TkTextIndexCount'.
+ */
+
+typedef int TkTextCountType;
+
+#define COUNT_CHARS 0
+#define COUNT_INDICES 1
+#define COUNT_DISPLAY 2
+#define COUNT_DISPLAY_CHARS (COUNT_CHARS | COUNT_DISPLAY)
+#define COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES (COUNT_INDICES | COUNT_DISPLAY)
+
+/*
+ * The following structure is used to keep track of elided text taking account
+ * of different tag priorities, it is need for quick calculations of whether a
+ * single index is elided, and to start at a given index and maintain a
+ * correct elide state as we move or count forwards or backwards.
+ */
+
+#define LOTSA_TAGS 1000
+typedef struct TkTextElideInfo {
+    int numTags;		/* Total tags in widget. */
+    int elide;			/* Is the state currently elided. */
+    int elidePriority;		/* Tag priority controlling elide state. */
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr;	/* Segment to look at next. */
+    int segOffset;		/* Offset of segment within line. */
+    int deftagCnts[LOTSA_TAGS];
+    TkTextTag *deftagPtrs[LOTSA_TAGS];
+    int *tagCnts;		/* 0 or 1 depending if the tag with that
+				 * priority is on or off. */
+    TkTextTag **tagPtrs;	/* Only filled with a tagPtr if the
+				 * corresponding tagCnt is 1. */
+} TkTextElideInfo;
+
+/*
+ * The constant below is used to specify a line when what is really wanted is
+ * the entire text. For now, just use a very big number.
  */
 
-#define TK_END_OF_TEXT 1000000
+#define TK_END_OF_TEXT		1000000
 
 /*
- * The following definition specifies the maximum number of characters
- * needed in a string to hold a position specifier.
+ * The following definition specifies the maximum number of characters needed
+ * in a string to hold a position specifier.
  */
 
-#define TK_POS_CHARS 30
+#define TK_POS_CHARS		30
+
+/*
+ * Mask used for those options which may impact the pixel height calculations
+ * of individual lines displayed in the widget.
+ */
+
+#define TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY	1
+
+/*
+ * Mask used for those options which may impact the start and end lines used
+ * in the widget.
+ */
+
+#define TK_TEXT_LINE_RANGE	2
+
+/*
+ * Used as 'action' values in calls to TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics
+ */
+
+#define TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY		0
+#define TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_INSERT	1
+#define TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_DELETE	2
+
+/*
+ * Used as special 'pickPlace' values in calls to TkTextSetYView. Zero or
+ * positive values indicate a number of pixels.
+ */
+
+#define TK_TEXT_PICKPLACE	-1
+#define TK_TEXT_NOPIXELADJUST	-2
 
 /*
  * Declarations for variables shared among the text-related files:
  */
 
-EXTERN int		tkBTreeDebug;
-EXTERN int		tkTextDebug;
-EXTERN Tk_SegType	tkTextCharType;
-EXTERN Tk_SegType	tkTextLeftMarkType;
-EXTERN Tk_SegType	tkTextRightMarkType;
-EXTERN Tk_SegType	tkTextToggleOnType;
-EXTERN Tk_SegType	tkTextToggleOffType;
-
-/*
- * Declarations for procedures that are used by the text-related files
- * but shouldn't be used anywhere else in Tk (or by Tk clients):
- */
-
-EXTERN int		TkBTreeCharTagged _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextIndex *indexPtr,
-			    TkTextTag *tagPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkBTreeCheck _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextBTree tree));
-EXTERN int		TkBTreeCharsInLine _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextLine *linePtr));
-EXTERN int		TkBTreeBytesInLine _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextLine *linePtr));
-EXTERN TkTextBTree	TkBTreeCreate _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkBTreeDestroy _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextBTree tree));
-EXTERN void		TkBTreeDeleteChars _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
-			    TkTextIndex *index2Ptr));
-EXTERN TkTextLine *	TkBTreeFindLine _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextBTree tree,
-			    int line));
-EXTERN TkTextTag **	TkBTreeGetTags _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextIndex *indexPtr,
-			    int *numTagsPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkBTreeInsertChars _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextIndex *indexPtr,
-			    CONST char *string));
-EXTERN int		TkBTreeLineIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextLine *linePtr));
-EXTERN void		TkBTreeLinkSegment _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-EXTERN TkTextLine *	TkBTreeNextLine _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextLine *linePtr));
-EXTERN int		TkBTreeNextTag _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSearch *searchPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkBTreeNumLines _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextBTree tree));
-EXTERN TkTextLine *	TkBTreePreviousLine _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextLine *linePtr));
-EXTERN int		TkBTreePrevTag _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSearch *searchPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkBTreeStartSearch _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
+MODULE_SCOPE int	tkBTreeDebug;
+MODULE_SCOPE int	tkTextDebug;
+MODULE_SCOPE const Tk_SegType tkTextCharType;
+MODULE_SCOPE const Tk_SegType tkTextLeftMarkType;
+MODULE_SCOPE const Tk_SegType tkTextRightMarkType;
+MODULE_SCOPE const Tk_SegType tkTextToggleOnType;
+MODULE_SCOPE const Tk_SegType tkTextToggleOffType;
+
+/*
+ * Convenience macros for use by B-tree clients which want to access pixel
+ * information on each line. Currently only used by TkTextDisp.c
+ */
+
+#define TkBTreeLinePixelCount(text, line) \
+	(line)->pixels[2*(text)->pixelReference]
+#define TkBTreeLinePixelEpoch(text, line) \
+	(line)->pixels[1+2*(text)->pixelReference]
+
+/*
+ * Declarations for procedures that are used by the text-related files but
+ * shouldn't be used anywhere else in Tk (or by Tk clients):
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkBTreeAdjustPixelHeight(const TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int newPixelHeight,
+			    int mergedLogicalLines);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkBTreeCharTagged(const TkTextIndex *indexPtr,
+			    TkTextTag *tagPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkBTreeCheck(TkTextBTree tree);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkTextBTree TkBTreeCreate(TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkBTreeAddClient(TkTextBTree tree, TkText *textPtr,
+			    int defaultHeight);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkBTreeClientRangeChanged(TkText *textPtr,
+			    int defaultHeight);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkBTreeRemoveClient(TkTextBTree tree,
+			    TkText *textPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkBTreeDestroy(TkTextBTree tree);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkBTreeDeleteIndexRange(TkTextBTree tree,
+			    TkTextIndex *index1Ptr, TkTextIndex *index2Ptr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkBTreeEpoch(TkTextBTree tree);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkTextLine *TkBTreeFindLine(TkTextBTree tree,
+			    const TkText *textPtr, int line);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkTextLine *TkBTreeFindPixelLine(TkTextBTree tree,
+			    const TkText *textPtr, int pixels,
+			    int *pixelOffset);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkTextTag **TkBTreeGetTags(const TkTextIndex *indexPtr,
+			    const TkText *textPtr, int *numTagsPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkBTreeInsertChars(TkTextBTree tree,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, const char *string);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkBTreeLinesTo(const TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkBTreePixelsTo(const TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkBTreeLinkSegment(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkTextLine *TkBTreeNextLine(const TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkBTreeNextTag(TkTextSearch *searchPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkBTreeNumLines(TkTextBTree tree,
+			    const TkText *textPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkBTreeNumPixels(TkTextBTree tree,
+			    const TkText *textPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkTextLine *TkBTreePreviousLine(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkBTreePrevTag(TkTextSearch *searchPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkBTreeStartSearch(TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
 			    TkTextIndex *index2Ptr, TkTextTag *tagPtr,
-			    TkTextSearch *searchPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkBTreeStartSearchBack _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
+			    TkTextSearch *searchPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkBTreeStartSearchBack(TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
 			    TkTextIndex *index2Ptr, TkTextTag *tagPtr,
-			    TkTextSearch *searchPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkBTreeTag _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
+			    TkTextSearch *searchPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkBTreeTag(TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
 			    TkTextIndex *index2Ptr, TkTextTag *tagPtr,
-			    int add));
-EXTERN void		TkBTreeUnlinkSegment _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextBTree tree,
-			    TkTextSegment *segPtr, TkTextLine *linePtr));
-EXTERN void		TkTextBindProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkTextChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextIndex *index1Ptr, TkTextIndex *index2Ptr));
-EXTERN int		TkTextCharBbox _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int *xPtr, int *yPtr,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkTextCharLayoutProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
+			    int add);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextBindProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextSelectionEvent(TkText *textPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextChanged(TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr,
+			    TkText *textPtr, const TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *index2Ptr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextIndexBbox(TkText *textPtr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int *xPtr, int *yPtr,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, int *charWidthPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextCharLayoutProc(TkText *textPtr,
 			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, TkTextSegment *segPtr,
 			    int offset, int maxX, int maxChars, int noBreakYet,
-			    TkWrapMode wrapMode, TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkTextCreateDInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkTextDLineInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int *xPtr, int *yPtr,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, int *basePtr));
-EXTERN TkTextTag *	TkTextCreateTag _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    CONST char *tagName));
-EXTERN void		TkTextFreeDInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkTextFreeTag _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextTag *tagPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkTextGetIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkText *textPtr, CONST char *string,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-EXTERN TkTextTabArray *	TkTextGetTabs _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *string));
-EXTERN void		TkTextIndexBackBytes _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int count,
-			    TkTextIndex *dstPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkTextIndexBackChars _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int count,
-			    TkTextIndex *dstPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkTextIndexCmp _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *index2Ptr));
-EXTERN void		TkTextIndexForwBytes _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int count,
-			    TkTextIndex *dstPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkTextIndexForwChars _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int count,
-			    TkTextIndex *dstPtr));
-EXTERN TkTextSegment *	TkTextIndexToSeg _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int *offsetPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkTextInsertDisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x, int y, int height,
-			    int baseline, Display *display, Drawable dst,
-			    int screenY));
-EXTERN void		TkTextLostSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-EXTERN TkTextIndex *	TkTextMakeCharIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextBTree tree,
+			    TkWrapMode wrapMode, TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextCreateDInfo(TkText *textPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextDLineInfo(TkText *textPtr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int *xPtr, int *yPtr,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, int *basePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextEmbWinDisplayProc(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x, int y,
+			    int lineHeight, int baseline, Display *display,
+			    Drawable dst, int screenY);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkTextTag *TkTextCreateTag(TkText *textPtr,
+			    const char *tagName, int *newTag);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextFreeDInfo(TkText *textPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextDeleteTag(TkText *textPtr, TkTextTag *tagPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextFreeTag(TkText *textPtr, TkTextTag *tagPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextGetIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkText *textPtr,
+			    const char *string, TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextGetObjIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkText *textPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *idxPtr, TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr, Tcl_Obj *idxPtr,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE const TkTextIndex *TkTextGetIndexFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkTextTabArray *TkTextGetTabs(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Obj *stringPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int end, int *xOffset);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextIndexBackBytes(const TkText *textPtr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int count,
+			    TkTextIndex *dstPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextIndexBackChars(const TkText *textPtr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int count,
+			    TkTextIndex *dstPtr, TkTextCountType type);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextIndexCmp(const TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *index2Ptr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextIndexCount(const TkText *textPtr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *index2Ptr,
+			    TkTextCountType type);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextIndexForwBytes(const TkText *textPtr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int count,
+			    TkTextIndex *dstPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextIndexForwChars(const TkText *textPtr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int count,
+			    TkTextIndex *dstPtr, TkTextCountType type);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextIndexOfX(TkText *textPtr, int x,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextIndexYPixels(TkText *textPtr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkTextSegment *TkTextIndexToSeg(const TkTextIndex *indexPtr,
+			    int *offsetPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextInsertDisplayProc(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x, int y,
+			    int height, int baseline, Display *display,
+			    Drawable dst, int screenY);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextLostSelection(ClientData clientData);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkTextIndex *TkTextMakeCharIndex(TkTextBTree tree, TkText *textPtr,
 			    int lineIndex, int charIndex,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkTextIsElided _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-EXTERN TkTextIndex *	TkTextMakeByteIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextBTree tree,
-			    int lineIndex, int byteIndex,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkTextMarkCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-EXTERN int		TkTextMarkNameToIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    CONST char *name, TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkTextMarkSegToIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextSegment *markPtr, TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkTextEventuallyRepick _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkTextPickCurrent _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkTextPixelIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    int x, int y, TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkTextPrintIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr, char *string));
-EXTERN void		TkTextRedrawRegion _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
-EXTERN void		TkTextRedrawTag _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextIndex *index1Ptr, TkTextIndex *index2Ptr,
-			    TkTextTag *tagPtr, int withTag));
-EXTERN void		TkTextRelayoutWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkTextScanCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-EXTERN int		TkTextSeeCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-EXTERN int		TkTextSegToOffset _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    CONST TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    CONST TkTextLine *linePtr));
-EXTERN TkTextSegment *	TkTextSetMark _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    CONST char *name, TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkTextSetYView _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int pickPlace));
-EXTERN int		TkTextTagCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-EXTERN int		TkTextImageCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-EXTERN int		TkTextImageIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    CONST char *name, TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkTextWindowCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-EXTERN int		TkTextWindowIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    CONST char *name, TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkTextXviewCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-EXTERN int		TkTextYviewCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv));
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextMeasureDown(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int distance);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextFreeElideInfo(TkTextElideInfo *infoPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextIsElided(const TkText *textPtr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr,
+			    TkTextElideInfo *infoPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkTextIndex *TkTextMakeByteIndex(TkTextBTree tree,
+			    const TkText *textPtr, int lineIndex,
+			    int byteIndex, TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextMakePixelIndex(TkText *textPtr,
+			    int pixelIndex, TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(
+			    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr, TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int lineCount, int action);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextUpdateLineMetrics(TkText *textPtr, int lineNum,
+			    int endLine, int doThisMuch);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextUpdateOneLine(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int pixelHeight,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int partialCalc);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextMarkCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextMarkNameToIndex(TkText *textPtr,
+			    const char *name, TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextMarkSegToIndex(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextSegment *markPtr, TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextEventuallyRepick(TkText *textPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextPickCurrent(TkText *textPtr, XEvent *eventPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextPixelIndex(TkText *textPtr, int x, int y,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int *nearest);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextPrintIndex(const TkText *textPtr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr, char *string);
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Obj *	TkTextNewIndexObj(TkText *textPtr,
+			    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextRedrawRegion(TkText *textPtr, int x, int y,
+			    int width, int height);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextRedrawTag(TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr,
+			    TkText *textPtr, TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
+			    TkTextIndex *index2Ptr, TkTextTag *tagPtr,
+			    int withTag);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextRelayoutWindow(TkText *textPtr, int mask);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextScanCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextSeeCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextSegToOffset(const TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    const TkTextLine *linePtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkTextSegment *TkTextSetMark(TkText *textPtr,
+			    const char *name, TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextSetYView(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int pickPlace);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextTagCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextImageCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextImageIndex(TkText *textPtr,
+			    const char *name, TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextWindowCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextWindowIndex(TkText *textPtr, const char *name,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextXviewCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkTextYviewCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkTextWinFreeClient(Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr,
+			    TkTextEmbWindowClient *client);
 
 # undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
 
 #endif /* _TKTEXT */
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkTextBTree.c b/generic/tkTextBTree.c
index 5a5a9b5..67ff79d 100644
--- a/generic/tkTextBTree.c
+++ b/generic/tkTextBTree.c
@@ -1,33 +1,54 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkTextBTree.c --
  *
- *	This file contains code that manages the B-tree representation
- *	of text for Tk's text widget and implements character and
- *	toggle segment types.
+ *	This file contains code that manages the B-tree representation of text
+ *	for Tk's text widget and implements character and toggle segment
+ *	types.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkText.h"
 
 /*
- * The data structure below keeps summary information about one tag as part
- * of the tag information in a node.
+ * Implementation notes:
+ *
+ * Most of this file is independent of the text widget implementation and
+ * representation now. Without much effort this could be developed further
+ * into a new Tcl object type of which the Tk text widget is one example of a
+ * client.
+ *
+ * The B-tree is set up with a dummy last line of text which must not be
+ * displayed, and must _never_ have a non-zero pixel count. This dummy line is
+ * a historical convenience to avoid other code having to deal with NULL
+ * TkTextLines. Since Tk 8.5, with pixel line height calculations and peer
+ * widgets, this dummy line is becoming somewhat of a liability, and special
+ * case code has been required to deal with it. It is probably a good idea to
+ * investigate removing the dummy line completely. This could result in an
+ * overall simplification (although it would require new special case code to
+ * deal with the fact that '.text index end' would then not really point to a
+ * valid line, rather it would point to the beginning of a non-existent line
+ * one beyond all current lines - we could perhaps define that as a
+ * TkTextIndex with a NULL TkTextLine ptr).
+ */
+
+/*
+ * The data structure below keeps summary information about one tag as part of
+ * the tag information in a node.
  */
 
 typedef struct Summary {
-    TkTextTag *tagPtr;			/* Handle for tag. */
-    int toggleCount;			/* Number of transitions into or
-					 * out of this tag that occur in
-					 * the subtree rooted at this node. */
-    struct Summary *nextPtr;		/* Next in list of all tags for same
-					 * node, or NULL if at end of list. */
+    TkTextTag *tagPtr;		/* Handle for tag. */
+    int toggleCount;		/* Number of transitions into or out of this
+				 * tag that occur in the subtree rooted at
+				 * this node. */
+    struct Summary *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of all tags for same node, or
+				 * NULL if at end of list. */
 } Summary;
 
 /*
@@ -35,43 +56,63 @@ typedef struct Summary {
  */
 
 typedef struct Node {
-    struct Node *parentPtr;		/* Pointer to parent node, or NULL if
-					 * this is the root. */
-    struct Node *nextPtr;		/* Next in list of siblings with the
-					 * same parent node, or NULL for end
-					 * of list. */
-    Summary *summaryPtr;		/* First in malloc-ed list of info
-					 * about tags in this subtree (NULL if
-					 * no tag info in the subtree). */
-    int level;				/* Level of this node in the B-tree.
-					 * 0 refers to the bottom of the tree
-					 * (children are lines, not nodes). */
-    union {				/* First in linked list of children. */
-	struct Node *nodePtr;		/* Used if level > 0. */
-	TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Used if level == 0. */
+    struct Node *parentPtr;	/* Pointer to parent node, or NULL if this is
+				 * the root. */
+    struct Node *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of siblings with the same
+				 * parent node, or NULL for end of list. */
+    Summary *summaryPtr;	/* First in malloc-ed list of info about tags
+				 * in this subtree (NULL if no tag info in the
+				 * subtree). */
+    int level;			/* Level of this node in the B-tree. 0 refers
+				 * to the bottom of the tree (children are
+				 * lines, not nodes). */
+    union {			/* First in linked list of children. */
+	struct Node *nodePtr;	/* Used if level > 0. */
+	TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* Used if level == 0. */
     } children;
-    int numChildren;			/* Number of children of this node. */
-    int numLines;			/* Total number of lines (leaves) in
-					 * the subtree rooted here. */
+    int numChildren;		/* Number of children of this node. */
+    int numLines;		/* Total number of lines (leaves) in the
+				 * subtree rooted here. */
+    int *numPixels;		/* Array containing total number of vertical
+				 * display pixels in the subtree rooted here,
+				 * one entry for each peer widget. */
 } Node;
 
 /*
- * Upper and lower bounds on how many children a node may have:
- * rebalance when either of these limits is exceeded.  MAX_CHILDREN
- * should be twice MIN_CHILDREN and MIN_CHILDREN must be >= 2.
+ * Used to avoid having to allocate and deallocate arrays on the fly for
+ * commonly used functions. Must be > 0.
+ */
+
+#define PIXEL_CLIENTS 5
+
+/*
+ * Upper and lower bounds on how many children a node may have: rebalance when
+ * either of these limits is exceeded. MAX_CHILDREN should be twice
+ * MIN_CHILDREN and MIN_CHILDREN must be >= 2.
  */
 
 #define MAX_CHILDREN 12
 #define MIN_CHILDREN 6
 
 /*
- * The data structure below defines an entire B-tree.
+ * The data structure below defines an entire B-tree. Since text widgets are
+ * the only current B-tree clients, 'clients' and 'pixelReferences' are
+ * identical.
  */
 
 typedef struct BTree {
-    Node *rootPtr;			/* Pointer to root of B-tree. */
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Used to find tagTable in consistency
-					 * checking code */
+    Node *rootPtr;		/* Pointer to root of B-tree. */
+    int clients;		/* Number of clients of this B-tree. */
+    int pixelReferences;	/* Number of clients of this B-tree which care
+				 * about pixel heights. */
+    int stateEpoch;		/* Updated each time any aspect of the B-tree
+				 * changes. */
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr;/* Used to find tagTable in consistency
+				 * checking code, and to access list of all
+				 * B-tree clients. */
+    int startEndCount;
+    TkTextLine **startEnd;
+    TkText **startEndRef;
 } BTree;
 
 /*
@@ -80,20 +121,17 @@ typedef struct BTree {
  */
 
 typedef struct TagInfo {
-    int numTags;			/* Number of tags for which there
-					 * is currently information in
-					 * tags and counts. */
-    int arraySize;			/* Number of entries allocated for
-					 * tags and counts. */
-    TkTextTag **tagPtrs;		/* Array of tags seen so far.
-					 * Malloc-ed. */
-    int *counts;			/* Toggle count (so far) for each
-					 * entry in tags.  Malloc-ed. */
+    int numTags;		/* Number of tags for which there is currently
+				 * information in tags and counts. */
+    int arraySize;		/* Number of entries allocated for tags and
+				 * counts. */
+    TkTextTag **tagPtrs;	/* Array of tags seen so far. Malloc-ed. */
+    int *counts;		/* Toggle count (so far) for each entry in
+				 * tags. Malloc-ed. */
 } TagInfo;
 
 /*
- * Variable that indicates whether to enable consistency checks for
- * debugging.
+ * Variable that indicates whether to enable consistency checks for debugging.
  */
 
 int tkBTreeDebug = 0;
@@ -108,86 +146,98 @@ int tkBTreeDebug = 0;
 	+ sizeof(TkTextToggle)))
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
- */
-
-static void		ChangeNodeToggleCount _ANSI_ARGS_((Node *nodePtr,
-			    TkTextTag *tagPtr, int delta));
-static void		CharCheckProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr));
-static int		CharDeleteProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int treeGone));
-static TkTextSegment *	CharCleanupProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr));
-static TkTextSegment *	CharSplitProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    int index));
-static void		CheckNodeConsistency _ANSI_ARGS_((Node *nodePtr));
-static void		CleanupLine _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextLine *linePtr));
-static void		DeleteSummaries _ANSI_ARGS_((Summary *tagPtr));
-static void		DestroyNode _ANSI_ARGS_((Node *nodePtr));
-static TkTextSegment *	FindTagEnd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextBTree tree, 
-			    TkTextTag *tagPtr, TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-static void		IncCount _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextTag *tagPtr, int inc,
-			    TagInfo *tagInfoPtr));
-static void		Rebalance _ANSI_ARGS_((BTree *treePtr, Node *nodePtr));
-static void		RecomputeNodeCounts _ANSI_ARGS_((Node *nodePtr));
-static TkTextSegment *	SplitSeg _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-static void		ToggleCheckProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr));
-static TkTextSegment *	ToggleCleanupProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr));
-static int		ToggleDeleteProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int treeGone));
-static void		ToggleLineChangeProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr));
-static TkTextSegment *	FindTagStart _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextBTree tree,
-			    TkTextTag *tagPtr, TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
+ */
+
+static int		AdjustPixelClient(BTree *treePtr, int defaultHeight,
+			    Node *nodePtr, TkTextLine *start, TkTextLine *end,
+			    int useReference, int newPixelReferences,
+			    int *counting);
+static void		ChangeNodeToggleCount(Node *nodePtr,
+			    TkTextTag *tagPtr, int delta);
+static void		CharCheckProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+static int		CharDeleteProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int treeGone);
+static TkTextSegment *	CharCleanupProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+static TkTextSegment *	CharSplitProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr, int index);
+static void		CheckNodeConsistency(Node *nodePtr, int references);
+static void		CleanupLine(TkTextLine *linePtr);
+static void		DeleteSummaries(Summary *tagPtr);
+static void		DestroyNode(Node *nodePtr);
+static TkTextSegment *	FindTagEnd(TkTextBTree tree, TkTextTag *tagPtr,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+static void		IncCount(TkTextTag *tagPtr, int inc,
+			    TagInfo *tagInfoPtr);
+static void		Rebalance(BTree *treePtr, Node *nodePtr);
+static void		RecomputeNodeCounts(BTree *treePtr, Node *nodePtr);
+static void		RemovePixelClient(BTree *treePtr, Node *nodePtr,
+			    int overwriteWithLast);
+static TkTextSegment *	SplitSeg(TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+static void		ToggleCheckProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+static TkTextSegment *	ToggleCleanupProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+static int		ToggleDeleteProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int treeGone);
+static void		ToggleLineChangeProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+static TkTextSegment *	FindTagStart(TkTextBTree tree, TkTextTag *tagPtr,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+static void		AdjustStartEndRefs(BTree *treePtr, TkText *textPtr,
+			    int action);
+
+/*
+ * Actions for use by AdjustStartEndRefs
+ */
+
+#define TEXT_ADD_REFS		1
+#define TEXT_REMOVE_REFS	2
 
 /*
  * Type record for character segments:
  */
 
-Tk_SegType tkTextCharType = {
-    "character",				/* name */
-    0,						/* leftGravity */
-    CharSplitProc,				/* splitProc */
-    CharDeleteProc,				/* deleteProc */
-    CharCleanupProc,				/* cleanupProc */
-    (Tk_SegLineChangeProc *) NULL,		/* lineChangeProc */
-    TkTextCharLayoutProc,			/* layoutProc */
-    CharCheckProc				/* checkProc */
+const Tk_SegType tkTextCharType = {
+    "character",		/* name */
+    0,				/* leftGravity */
+    CharSplitProc,		/* splitProc */
+    CharDeleteProc,		/* deleteProc */
+    CharCleanupProc,		/* cleanupProc */
+    NULL,			/* lineChangeProc */
+    TkTextCharLayoutProc,	/* layoutProc */
+    CharCheckProc		/* checkProc */
 };
 
 /*
- * Type record for segments marking the beginning of a tagged
- * range:
+ * Type record for segments marking the beginning of a tagged range:
  */
 
-Tk_SegType tkTextToggleOnType = {
-    "toggleOn",					/* name */
-    0,						/* leftGravity */
-    (Tk_SegSplitProc *) NULL,			/* splitProc */
-    ToggleDeleteProc,				/* deleteProc */
-    ToggleCleanupProc,				/* cleanupProc */
-    ToggleLineChangeProc,			/* lineChangeProc */
-    (Tk_SegLayoutProc *) NULL,			/* layoutProc */
-    ToggleCheckProc				/* checkProc */
+const Tk_SegType tkTextToggleOnType = {
+    "toggleOn",			/* name */
+    0,				/* leftGravity */
+    NULL,			/* splitProc */
+    ToggleDeleteProc,		/* deleteProc */
+    ToggleCleanupProc,		/* cleanupProc */
+    ToggleLineChangeProc,	/* lineChangeProc */
+    NULL,			/* layoutProc */
+    ToggleCheckProc		/* checkProc */
 };
 
 /*
- * Type record for segments marking the end of a tagged
- * range:
+ * Type record for segments marking the end of a tagged range:
  */
 
-Tk_SegType tkTextToggleOffType = {
-    "toggleOff",				/* name */
-    1,						/* leftGravity */
-    (Tk_SegSplitProc *) NULL,			/* splitProc */
-    ToggleDeleteProc,				/* deleteProc */
-    ToggleCleanupProc,				/* cleanupProc */
-    ToggleLineChangeProc,			/* lineChangeProc */
-    (Tk_SegLayoutProc *) NULL,			/* layoutProc */
-    ToggleCheckProc				/* checkProc */
+const Tk_SegType tkTextToggleOffType = {
+    "toggleOff",		/* name */
+    1,				/* leftGravity */
+    NULL,			/* splitProc */
+    ToggleDeleteProc,		/* deleteProc */
+    ToggleCleanupProc,		/* cleanupProc */
+    ToggleLineChangeProc,	/* lineChangeProc */
+    NULL,			/* layoutProc */
+    ToggleCheckProc		/* checkProc */
 };
 
 /*
@@ -195,11 +245,11 @@ Tk_SegType tkTextToggleOffType = {
  *
  * TkBTreeCreate --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to create a new text B-tree.
+ *	This function is called to create a new text B-tree.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to a new B-tree containing
- *	one line with nothing but a newline character.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to a new B-tree containing one line with
+ *	nothing but a newline character.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory is allocated and initialized.
@@ -208,8 +258,8 @@ Tk_SegType tkTextToggleOffType = {
  */
 
 TkTextBTree
-TkBTreeCreate(textPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;
+TkBTreeCreate(
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr)
 {
     register BTree *treePtr;
     register Node *rootPtr;
@@ -217,15 +267,16 @@ TkBTreeCreate(textPtr)
     register TkTextSegment *segPtr;
 
     /*
-     * The tree will initially have two empty lines.  The second line
-     * isn't actually part of the tree's contents, but its presence
-     * makes several operations easier.  The tree will have one node,
-     * which is also the root of the tree.
+     * The tree will initially have two empty lines. The second line isn't
+     * actually part of the tree's contents, but its presence makes several
+     * operations easier. The tree will have one node, which is also the root
+     * of the tree.
      */
 
     rootPtr = (Node *) ckalloc(sizeof(Node));
     linePtr = (TkTextLine *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextLine));
     linePtr2 = (TkTextLine *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextLine));
+
     rootPtr->parentPtr = NULL;
     rootPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
     rootPtr->summaryPtr = NULL;
@@ -234,6 +285,15 @@ TkBTreeCreate(textPtr)
     rootPtr->numChildren = 2;
     rootPtr->numLines = 2;
 
+    /*
+     * The tree currently has no registered clients, so all pixel count
+     * pointers are simply NULL.
+     */
+
+    rootPtr->numPixels = NULL;
+    linePtr->pixels = NULL;
+    linePtr2->pixels = NULL;
+
     linePtr->parentPtr = rootPtr;
     linePtr->nextPtr = linePtr2;
     segPtr = (TkTextSegment *) ckalloc(CSEG_SIZE(1));
@@ -255,8 +315,14 @@ TkBTreeCreate(textPtr)
     segPtr->body.chars[1] = 0;
 
     treePtr = (BTree *) ckalloc(sizeof(BTree));
+    treePtr->sharedTextPtr = sharedTextPtr;
     treePtr->rootPtr = rootPtr;
-    treePtr->textPtr = textPtr;
+    treePtr->clients = 0;
+    treePtr->stateEpoch = 0;
+    treePtr->pixelReferences = 0;
+    treePtr->startEndCount = 0;
+    treePtr->startEnd = NULL;
+    treePtr->startEndRef = NULL;
 
     return (TkTextBTree) treePtr;
 }
@@ -264,13 +330,133 @@ TkBTreeCreate(textPtr)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * TkBTreeAddClient --
+ *
+ *	This function is called to provide a client with access to a given
+ *	B-tree. If the client wishes to make use of the B-tree's pixel height
+ *	storage, caching and calculation mechanisms, then a non-negative
+ *	'defaultHeight' must be provided. In this case the return value is a
+ *	pixel tree reference which must be provided in all of the B-tree API
+ *	which refers to or modifies pixel heights:
+ *
+ *	TkBTreeAdjustPixelHeight,
+ *	TkBTreeFindPixelLine,
+ *	TkBTreeNumPixels,
+ *	TkBTreePixelsTo,
+ *	(and two private functions AdjustPixelClient, RemovePixelClient).
+ *
+ *	If this is not provided, then the above functions must never be called
+ *	for this client.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is the pixelReference used by the B-tree to refer to
+ *	pixel counts for the new client. It should be stored by the caller. If
+ *	defaultHeight was negative, then the return value will be -1.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Memory may be allocated and initialized.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkBTreeAddClient(
+    TkTextBTree tree,		/* B-tree to add a client to. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Client to add. */
+    int defaultHeight)		/* Default line height for the new client, or
+				 * -1 if no pixel heights are to be kept. */
+{
+    register BTree *treePtr = (BTree *) tree;
+
+    if (treePtr == NULL) {
+	Tcl_Panic("NULL treePtr in TkBTreeAddClient");
+    }
+
+    if (textPtr->start != NULL || textPtr->end != NULL) {
+	AdjustStartEndRefs(treePtr, textPtr, TEXT_ADD_REFS);
+    }
+
+    if (defaultHeight >= 0) {
+	TkTextLine *end;
+	int counting = (textPtr->start == NULL ? 1 : 0);
+	int useReference = treePtr->pixelReferences;
+
+	/*
+	 * We must set the 'end' value in AdjustPixelClient so that the last
+	 * dummy line in the B-tree doesn't contain a pixel height.
+	 */
+
+	end = textPtr->end;
+	if (end == NULL) {
+	    end = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, NULL, TkBTreeNumLines(tree, NULL));
+	}
+	AdjustPixelClient(treePtr, defaultHeight, treePtr->rootPtr,
+		textPtr->start, end, useReference, useReference+1, &counting);
+
+	textPtr->pixelReference = useReference;
+	treePtr->pixelReferences++;
+    } else {
+	textPtr->pixelReference = -1;
+    }
+    treePtr->clients++;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkBTreeClientRangeChanged --
+ *
+ *	Called when the -startline or -endline options of a text widget client
+ *	of the B-tree have changed.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Lots of processing of the B-tree is done, with potential for memory to
+ *	be allocated and initialized for the pixel heights of the widget.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkBTreeClientRangeChanged(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Client whose start, end have changed. */
+    int defaultHeight)		/* Default line height for the new client, or
+				 * -1 if no pixel heights are to be kept. */
+{
+    TkTextLine *end;
+    BTree *treePtr = (BTree *) textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
+
+    int counting = (textPtr->start == NULL ? 1 : 0);
+    int useReference = textPtr->pixelReference;
+
+    AdjustStartEndRefs(treePtr, textPtr, TEXT_ADD_REFS | TEXT_REMOVE_REFS);
+
+    /*
+     * We must set the 'end' value in AdjustPixelClient so that the last dummy
+     * line in the B-tree doesn't contain a pixel height.
+     */
+
+    end = textPtr->end;
+    if (end == NULL) {
+	end = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+		NULL, TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL));
+    }
+    AdjustPixelClient(treePtr, defaultHeight, treePtr->rootPtr,
+	    textPtr->start, end, useReference, treePtr->pixelReferences,
+	    &counting);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TkBTreeDestroy --
  *
  *	Delete a B-tree, recycling all of the storage it contains.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The tree given by treePtr is deleted.  TreePtr should never
- *	again be used.
+ *	The tree is deleted, so 'tree' should never again be used.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory is freed.
@@ -279,22 +465,382 @@ TkBTreeCreate(textPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkBTreeDestroy(tree)
-    TkTextBTree tree;			/* Pointer to tree to delete. */ 
+TkBTreeDestroy(
+    TkTextBTree tree)		/* Tree to clean up. */
 {
     BTree *treePtr = (BTree *) tree;
 
+    /*
+     * There's no need to loop over each client of the tree, calling
+     * 'TkBTreeRemoveClient', since the 'DestroyNode' will clean everything up
+     * itself.
+     */
+
     DestroyNode(treePtr->rootPtr);
+    if (treePtr->startEnd != NULL) {
+	ckfree((char *) treePtr->startEnd);
+	ckfree((char *) treePtr->startEndRef);
+    }
     ckfree((char *) treePtr);
 }
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * TkBTreeEpoch --
+ *
+ *	Return the epoch for the B-tree. This number is incremented any time
+ *	anything changes in the tree.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The epoch number.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkBTreeEpoch(
+    TkTextBTree tree)		/* Tree to get epoch for. */
+{
+    BTree *treePtr = (BTree *) tree;
+    return treePtr->stateEpoch;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkBTreeRemoveClient --
+ *
+ *	Remove a client widget from its B-tree, cleaning up the pixel arrays
+ *	which it uses if necessary. If this is the last such widget, we also
+ *	destroy the whole tree.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	All tree-specific aspects of the given client are deleted. If no more
+ *	references exist, then the given tree is also deleted (in which case
+ *	'tree' must not be used again).
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Memory may be freed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkBTreeRemoveClient(
+    TkTextBTree tree,		/* Tree to remove client from. */
+    TkText *textPtr)		/* Client to remove. */
+{
+    BTree *treePtr = (BTree *) tree;
+    int pixelReference = textPtr->pixelReference;
+
+    if (treePtr->clients == 1) {
+	/*
+	 * The last reference to the tree.
+	 */
+
+	DestroyNode(treePtr->rootPtr);
+	ckfree((char *) treePtr);
+	return;
+    } else if (pixelReference == -1) {
+	/*
+	 * A client which doesn't care about pixels.
+	 */
+
+	treePtr->clients--;
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * Clean up pixel data for the given reference.
+	 */
+
+	if (pixelReference == (treePtr->pixelReferences-1)) {
+	    /*
+	     * The widget we're removing has the last index, so deletion is
+	     * easier.
+	     */
+
+	    RemovePixelClient(treePtr, treePtr->rootPtr, -1);
+	} else {
+	    TkText *adjustPtr;
+
+	    RemovePixelClient(treePtr, treePtr->rootPtr, pixelReference);
+
+	    /*
+	     * Now we need to adjust the 'pixelReference' of the peer widget
+	     * whose storage we've just moved.
+	     */
+
+	    adjustPtr = treePtr->sharedTextPtr->peers;
+	    while (adjustPtr != NULL) {
+		if (adjustPtr->pixelReference == treePtr->pixelReferences-1) {
+		    adjustPtr->pixelReference = pixelReference;
+		    break;
+		}
+		adjustPtr = adjustPtr->next;
+	    }
+	    if (adjustPtr == NULL) {
+		Tcl_Panic("Couldn't find text widget with correct reference");
+	    }
+	}
+	treePtr->pixelReferences--;
+	treePtr->clients--;
+    }
+
+    if (textPtr->start != NULL || textPtr->end != NULL) {
+	AdjustStartEndRefs(treePtr, textPtr, TEXT_REMOVE_REFS);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * AdjustStartEndRefs --
+ *
+ *	Modify B-tree's cache of start, end lines for the given text widget.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The number of cached items may change (treePtr->startEndCount).
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+AdjustStartEndRefs(
+    BTree *treePtr,		/* The entire B-tree. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* The text widget for which we want to adjust
+				 * it's start and end cache. */
+    int action)			/* Action to perform. */
+{
+    if (action & TEXT_REMOVE_REFS) {
+	int i = 0;
+	int count = 0;
+
+	while (i < treePtr->startEndCount) {
+	    if (i != count) {
+		treePtr->startEnd[count] = treePtr->startEnd[i];
+		treePtr->startEndRef[count] = treePtr->startEndRef[i];
+	    }
+	    if (treePtr->startEndRef[i] != textPtr) {
+		count++;
+	    }
+	    i++;
+	}
+	treePtr->startEndCount = count;
+	treePtr->startEnd = (TkTextLine **)
+		ckrealloc((char *) treePtr->startEnd,
+		sizeof(TkTextLine *) * count);
+	treePtr->startEndRef = (TkText **)
+		ckrealloc((char *) treePtr->startEndRef,
+		sizeof(TkText *) * count);
+    }
+    if ((action & TEXT_ADD_REFS)
+	    && (textPtr->start != NULL || textPtr->end != NULL)) {
+	int count;
+
+	if (textPtr->start != NULL) {
+	    treePtr->startEndCount++;
+	}
+	if (textPtr->end != NULL) {
+	    treePtr->startEndCount++;
+	}
+
+	count = treePtr->startEndCount;
+
+	treePtr->startEnd = (TkTextLine **)
+		ckrealloc((char *) treePtr->startEnd,
+		sizeof(TkTextLine *) * count);
+	treePtr->startEndRef = (TkText **)
+		ckrealloc((char *) treePtr->startEndRef,
+		sizeof(TkText *) * count);
+
+	if (textPtr->start != NULL) {
+	    count--;
+	    treePtr->startEnd[count] = textPtr->start;
+	    treePtr->startEndRef[count] = textPtr;
+	}
+	if (textPtr->end != NULL) {
+	    count--;
+	    treePtr->startEnd[count] = textPtr->end;
+	    treePtr->startEndRef[count] = textPtr;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * AdjustPixelClient --
+ *
+ *	Utility function used to update all data structures for the existence
+ *	of a new peer widget based on this B-tree, or for the modification of
+ *	the start, end lines of an existing peer widget.
+ *
+ *	Immediately _after_ calling this, treePtr->pixelReferences and
+ *	treePtr->clients should be adjusted if needed (i.e. if this is a new
+ *	peer).
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	All the storage for Nodes and TkTextLines in the tree may be adjusted.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+AdjustPixelClient(
+    BTree *treePtr,		/* Pointer to tree. */
+    int defaultHeight,		/* Default pixel line height, which can be
+				 * zero. */
+    Node *nodePtr,		/* Adjust from this node downwards. */
+    TkTextLine *start,		/* First line for this pixel client. */
+    TkTextLine *end,		/* Last line for this pixel client. */
+    int useReference,		/* pixel reference for the client we are
+				 * adding or changing. */
+    int newPixelReferences,	/* New number of pixel references to this
+				 * B-tree. */
+    int *counting)		/* References an integer which is zero if
+				 * we're outside the relevant range for this
+				 * client, and 1 if we're inside. */
+{
+    int pixelCount = 0;
+
+    /*
+     * Traverse entire tree down from nodePtr, reallocating pixel structures
+     * for each Node and TkTextLine, adding room for the new peer's pixel
+     * information (1 extra int per Node, 2 extra ints per TkTextLine). Also
+     * copy the information from the last peer into the new space (so it
+     * contains something sensible).
+     */
+
+    if (nodePtr->level != 0) {
+	Node *loopPtr = nodePtr->children.nodePtr;
+
+	while (loopPtr != NULL) {
+	    pixelCount += AdjustPixelClient(treePtr, defaultHeight, loopPtr,
+		    start, end, useReference, newPixelReferences, counting);
+	    loopPtr = loopPtr->nextPtr;
+	}
+    } else {
+	register TkTextLine *linePtr = nodePtr->children.linePtr;
+
+	while (linePtr != NULL) {
+	    if (!*counting && (linePtr == start)) {
+		*counting = 1;
+	    }
+	    if (*counting && (linePtr == end)) {
+		*counting = 0;
+	    }
+	    if (newPixelReferences != treePtr->pixelReferences) {
+		linePtr->pixels = (int *) ckrealloc((char *) linePtr->pixels,
+			sizeof(int) * 2 * newPixelReferences);
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * Notice that for the very last line, we are never counting and
+	     * therefore this always has a height of 0 and an epoch of 1.
+	     */
+
+	    linePtr->pixels[2*useReference] = (*counting ? defaultHeight : 0);
+	    linePtr->pixels[2*useReference+1] = (*counting ? 0 : 1);
+	    pixelCount += linePtr->pixels[2*useReference];
+
+	    linePtr = linePtr->nextPtr;
+	}
+    }
+    if (newPixelReferences != treePtr->pixelReferences) {
+	nodePtr->numPixels = (int *) ckrealloc((char *) nodePtr->numPixels,
+		sizeof(int) * newPixelReferences);
+    }
+    nodePtr->numPixels[useReference] = pixelCount;
+    return pixelCount;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * RemovePixelClient --
+ *
+ *	Utility function used to update all data structures for the removal of
+ *	a peer widget which used to be based on this B-tree.
+ *
+ *	Immediately _after_ calling this, treePtr->clients should be
+ *	decremented.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	All the storage for Nodes and TkTextLines in the tree may be adjusted.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+RemovePixelClient(
+    BTree *treePtr,		/* Pointer to tree. */
+    Node *nodePtr,		/* Adjust from this node downwards. */
+    int overwriteWithLast)	/* Over-write this peer widget's information
+				 * with the last one. */
+{
+    /*
+     * Traverse entire tree down from nodePtr, reallocating pixel structures
+     * for each Node and TkTextLine, removing space allocated for one peer. If
+     * 'overwriteWithLast' is not -1, then copy the information which was in
+     * the last slot on top of one of the others (i.e. it's not the last one
+     * we're deleting).
+     */
+
+    if (overwriteWithLast != -1) {
+	nodePtr->numPixels[overwriteWithLast] =
+		nodePtr->numPixels[treePtr->pixelReferences-1];
+    }
+    if (treePtr->pixelReferences == 1) {
+	nodePtr->numPixels = NULL;
+    } else {
+	nodePtr->numPixels = (int *) ckrealloc((char *) nodePtr->numPixels,
+		sizeof(int) * (treePtr->pixelReferences - 1));
+    }
+    if (nodePtr->level != 0) {
+	nodePtr = nodePtr->children.nodePtr;
+	while (nodePtr != NULL) {
+	    RemovePixelClient(treePtr, nodePtr, overwriteWithLast);
+	    nodePtr = nodePtr->nextPtr;
+	}
+    } else {
+	register TkTextLine *linePtr = nodePtr->children.linePtr;
+	while (linePtr != NULL) {
+	    if (overwriteWithLast != -1) {
+		linePtr->pixels[2*overwriteWithLast] =
+			linePtr->pixels[2*(treePtr->pixelReferences-1)];
+		linePtr->pixels[1+2*overwriteWithLast] =
+			linePtr->pixels[1+2*(treePtr->pixelReferences-1)];
+	    }
+	    if (treePtr->pixelReferences == 1) {
+		linePtr->pixels = NULL;
+	    } else {
+		linePtr->pixels = (int *) ckrealloc((char *) linePtr->pixels,
+			sizeof(int) * 2 * (treePtr->pixelReferences-1));
+	    }
+	    linePtr = linePtr->nextPtr;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * DestroyNode --
  *
- *	This is a recursive utility procedure used during the deletion
- *	of a B-tree.
+ *	This is a recursive utility function used during the deletion of a
+ *	B-tree.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -306,8 +852,8 @@ TkBTreeDestroy(tree)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyNode(nodePtr)
-    register Node *nodePtr;
+DestroyNode(
+    register Node *nodePtr)	/* Destroy from this node downwards. */
 {
     if (nodePtr->level == 0) {
 	TkTextLine *linePtr;
@@ -321,6 +867,7 @@ DestroyNode(nodePtr)
 		linePtr->segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
 		(*segPtr->typePtr->deleteProc)(segPtr, linePtr, 1);
 	    }
+	    ckfree((char *) linePtr->pixels);
 	    ckfree((char *) linePtr);
 	}
     } else {
@@ -333,6 +880,7 @@ DestroyNode(nodePtr)
 	}
     }
     DeleteSummaries(nodePtr->summaryPtr);
+    ckfree((char *) nodePtr->numPixels);
     ckfree((char *) nodePtr);
 }
 
@@ -341,8 +889,8 @@ DestroyNode(nodePtr)
  *
  * DeleteSummaries --
  *
- *	Free up all of the memory in a list of tag summaries associated
- *	with a node.
+ *	Free up all of the memory in a list of tag summaries associated with a
+ *	node.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -354,11 +902,12 @@ DestroyNode(nodePtr)
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteSummaries(summaryPtr)
-    register Summary *summaryPtr;	/* First in list of node's tag
-					 * summaries. */
+DeleteSummaries(
+    register Summary *summaryPtr)
+				/* First in list of node's tag summaries. */
 {
     register Summary *nextPtr;
+
     while (summaryPtr != NULL) {
 	nextPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr;
 	ckfree((char *) summaryPtr);
@@ -369,6 +918,74 @@ DeleteSummaries(summaryPtr)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * TkBTreeAdjustPixelHeight --
+ *
+ *	Adjust the pixel height of a given logical line to the specified
+ *	value.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Total number of valid pixels currently known in the tree.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Updates overall data structures so pixel height count is consistent.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkBTreeAdjustPixelHeight(
+    const TkText *textPtr,	/* Client of the B-tree. */
+    register TkTextLine *linePtr,
+				/* The logical line to update. */
+    int newPixelHeight,		/* The line's known height in pixels. */
+    int mergedLogicalLines)	/* The number of extra logical lines which
+				 * have been merged with this one (due to
+				 * elided eols). They will have their pixel
+				 * height set to zero, and the total pixel
+				 * height associated with the given
+				 * linePtr. */
+{
+    register Node *nodePtr;
+    int changeToPixelCount;	/* Counts change to total number of pixels in
+				 * file. */
+    int pixelReference = textPtr->pixelReference;
+
+    changeToPixelCount = newPixelHeight - linePtr->pixels[2 * pixelReference];
+
+    /*
+     * Increment the pixel counts in all the parent nodes of the current line,
+     * then rebalance the tree if necessary.
+     */
+
+    nodePtr = linePtr->parentPtr;
+    nodePtr->numPixels[pixelReference] += changeToPixelCount;
+
+    while (nodePtr->parentPtr != NULL) {
+	nodePtr = nodePtr->parentPtr;
+	nodePtr->numPixels[pixelReference] += changeToPixelCount;
+    }
+
+    linePtr->pixels[2 * pixelReference] = newPixelHeight;
+
+    /*
+     * Any merged logical lines must have their height set to zero.
+     */
+
+    while (mergedLogicalLines-- > 0) {
+	linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, linePtr);
+	TkBTreeAdjustPixelHeight(textPtr, linePtr, 0, 0);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Return total number of pixels in the tree.
+     */
+
+    return nodePtr->numPixels[pixelReference];
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TkBTreeInsertChars --
  *
  *	Insert characters at a given position in a B-tree.
@@ -377,53 +994,68 @@ DeleteSummaries(summaryPtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Characters are added to the B-tree at the given position.
- *	If the string contains newlines, new lines will be added,
- *	which could cause the structure of the B-tree to change.
+ *	Characters are added to the B-tree at the given position. If the
+ *	string contains newlines, new lines will be added, which could cause
+ *	the structure of the B-tree to change.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkBTreeInsertChars(indexPtr, string)
-    register TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Indicates where to insert text.
-					 * When the procedure returns, this
-					 * index is no longer valid because
-					 * of changes to the segment
-					 * structure. */
-    CONST char *string;			/* Pointer to bytes to insert (may
-					 * contain newlines, must be null-
-					 * terminated). */
+TkBTreeInsertChars(
+    TkTextBTree tree,		/* Tree to insert into. */
+    register TkTextIndex *indexPtr,
+				/* Indicates where to insert text. When the
+				 * function returns, this index is no longer
+				 * valid because of changes to the segment
+				 * structure. */
+    const char *string)		/* Pointer to bytes to insert (may contain
+				 * newlines, must be null-terminated). */
 {
     register Node *nodePtr;
-    register TkTextSegment *prevPtr;	/* The segment just before the first
-					 * new segment (NULL means new segment
-					 * is at beginning of line). */
-    TkTextSegment *curPtr;		/* Current segment;  new characters
-					 * are inserted just after this one. 
-					 * NULL means insert at beginning of
-					 * line. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Current line (new segments are
-					 * added to this line). */
+    register TkTextSegment *prevPtr;
+				/* The segment just before the first new
+				 * segment (NULL means new segment is at
+				 * beginning of line). */
+    TkTextSegment *curPtr;	/* Current segment; new characters are
+				 * inserted just after this one. NULL means
+				 * insert at beginning of line. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* Current line (new segments are added to
+				 * this line). */
     register TkTextSegment *segPtr;
     TkTextLine *newLinePtr;
-    int chunkSize;			/* # characters in current chunk. */
-    register CONST char *eol;		/* Pointer to character just after last
-					 * one in current chunk. */
-    int changeToLineCount;		/* Counts change to total number of
-					 * lines in file. */
+    int chunkSize;		/* # characters in current chunk. */
+    register const char *eol;	/* Pointer to character just after last one in
+				 * current chunk. */
+    int changeToLineCount;	/* Counts change to total number of lines in
+				 * file. */
+    int *changeToPixelCount;	/* Counts change to total number of pixels in
+				 * file. */
+    int ref;
+    int pixels[PIXEL_CLIENTS];
 
+    BTree *treePtr = (BTree *) tree;
+    treePtr->stateEpoch++;
     prevPtr = SplitSeg(indexPtr);
     linePtr = indexPtr->linePtr;
     curPtr = prevPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Chop the string up into lines and create a new segment for
-     * each line, plus a new line for the leftovers from the
-     * previous line.
+     * Chop the string up into lines and create a new segment for each line,
+     * plus a new line for the leftovers from the previous line.
      */
 
     changeToLineCount = 0;
+    if (treePtr->pixelReferences > PIXEL_CLIENTS) {
+	changeToPixelCount = (int *)
+		ckalloc(sizeof(int) * treePtr->pixelReferences);
+    } else {
+	changeToPixelCount = pixels;
+    }
+    for (ref = 0; ref < treePtr->pixelReferences; ref++) {
+	changeToPixelCount[ref] = 0;
+    }
+
     while (*string != 0) {
 	for (eol = string; *eol != 0; eol++) {
 	    if (*eol == '\n') {
@@ -450,15 +1082,30 @@ TkBTreeInsertChars(indexPtr, string)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * The chunk ended with a newline, so create a new TkTextLine
-	 * and move the remainder of the old line to it.
+	 * The chunk ended with a newline, so create a new TkTextLine and move
+	 * the remainder of the old line to it.
 	 */
 
 	newLinePtr = (TkTextLine *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextLine));
+	newLinePtr->pixels = (int *)
+		ckalloc(sizeof(int) * 2 * treePtr->pixelReferences);
+
 	newLinePtr->parentPtr = linePtr->parentPtr;
 	newLinePtr->nextPtr = linePtr->nextPtr;
 	linePtr->nextPtr = newLinePtr;
 	newLinePtr->segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
+
+	/*
+	 * Set up a starting default height, which will be re-adjusted later.
+	 * We need to do this for each referenced widget.
+	 */
+
+	for (ref = 0; ref < treePtr->pixelReferences; ref++) {
+	    newLinePtr->pixels[2 * ref] = linePtr->pixels[2 * ref];
+	    newLinePtr->pixels[2 * ref + 1] = 0;
+	    changeToPixelCount[ref] += newLinePtr->pixels[2 * ref];
+	}
+
 	segPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
 	linePtr = newLinePtr;
 	curPtr = NULL;
@@ -468,8 +1115,18 @@ TkBTreeInsertChars(indexPtr, string)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Cleanup the starting line for the insertion, plus the ending
-     * line if it's different.
+     * I don't believe it's possible for either of the two lines passed to
+     * this function to be the last line of text, but the function is robust
+     * to that case anyway. (We must never re-calculated the line height of
+     * the last line).
+     */
+
+    TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(treePtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+	    indexPtr->linePtr, changeToLineCount, TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_INSERT);
+
+    /*
+     * Cleanup the starting line for the insertion, plus the ending line if
+     * it's different.
      */
 
     CleanupLine(indexPtr->linePtr);
@@ -478,18 +1135,25 @@ TkBTreeInsertChars(indexPtr, string)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Increment the line counts in all the parent nodes of the insertion
-     * point, then rebalance the tree if necessary.
+     * Increment the line and pixel counts in all the parent nodes of the
+     * insertion point, then rebalance the tree if necessary.
      */
 
     for (nodePtr = linePtr->parentPtr ; nodePtr != NULL;
 	    nodePtr = nodePtr->parentPtr) {
 	nodePtr->numLines += changeToLineCount;
+	for (ref = 0; ref < treePtr->pixelReferences; ref++) {
+	    nodePtr->numPixels[ref] += changeToPixelCount[ref];
+	}
+    }
+    if (treePtr->pixelReferences > PIXEL_CLIENTS) {
+	ckfree((char *) changeToPixelCount);
     }
+
     nodePtr = linePtr->parentPtr;
     nodePtr->numChildren += changeToLineCount;
     if (nodePtr->numChildren > MAX_CHILDREN) {
-	Rebalance((BTree *) indexPtr->tree, nodePtr);
+	Rebalance(treePtr, nodePtr);
     }
 
     if (tkBTreeDebug) {
@@ -502,40 +1166,41 @@ TkBTreeInsertChars(indexPtr, string)
  *
  * SplitSeg --
  *
- *	This procedure is called before adding or deleting
- *	segments.  It does three things: (a) it finds the segment
- *	containing indexPtr;  (b) if there are several such
- *	segments (because some segments have zero length) then
- *	it picks the first segment that does not have left
- *	gravity;  (c) if the index refers to the middle of
- *	a segment then it splits the segment so that the
- *	index now refers to the beginning of a segment.
+ *	This function is called before adding or deleting segments. It does
+ *	three things: (a) it finds the segment containing indexPtr; (b) if
+ *	there are several such segments (because some segments have zero
+ *	length) then it picks the first segment that does not have left
+ *	gravity; (c) if the index refers to the middle of a segment then it
+ *	splits the segment so that the index now refers to the beginning of a
+ *	segment.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the segment just
- *	before the segment corresponding to indexPtr (as
- *	described above).  If the segment corresponding to
- *	indexPtr is the first in its line then the return
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the segment just before the segment
+ *	corresponding to indexPtr (as described above). If the segment
+ *	corresponding to indexPtr is the first in its line then the return
  *	value is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The segment referred to by indexPtr is split unless
- *	indexPtr refers to its first character.
+ *	The segment referred to by indexPtr is split unless indexPtr refers to
+ *	its first character.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static TkTextSegment *
-SplitSeg(indexPtr)
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;		/* Index identifying position
-					 * at which to split a segment. */
+SplitSeg(
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Index identifying position at which to
+				 * split a segment. */
 {
     TkTextSegment *prevPtr, *segPtr;
-    int count;
+    TkTextLine *linePtr;
+    int count = indexPtr->byteIndex;
 
-    for (count = indexPtr->byteIndex, prevPtr = NULL,
-	    segPtr = indexPtr->linePtr->segPtr; segPtr != NULL;
-	    count -= segPtr->size, prevPtr = segPtr, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+    linePtr = indexPtr->linePtr;
+    prevPtr = NULL;
+    segPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
+
+    while (segPtr != NULL) {
 	if (segPtr->size > count) {
 	    if (count == 0) {
 		return prevPtr;
@@ -551,8 +1216,26 @@ SplitSeg(indexPtr)
 		&& !segPtr->typePtr->leftGravity) {
 	    return prevPtr;
 	}
+
+	count -= segPtr->size;
+	prevPtr = segPtr;
+	segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
+	if (segPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Two logical lines merged into one display line through eliding
+	     * of a newline.
+	     */
+
+	    linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, linePtr);
+	    if (linePtr == NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * Reached end of the text.
+		 */
+	    }
+	    segPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
+	}
     }
-    panic("SplitSeg reached end of line!");
+    Tcl_Panic("SplitSeg reached end of line!");
     return NULL;
 }
 
@@ -561,36 +1244,34 @@ SplitSeg(indexPtr)
  *
  * CleanupLine --
  *
- *	This procedure is called after modifications have been
- *	made to a line.  It scans over all of the segments in
- *	the line, giving each a chance to clean itself up, e.g.
- *	by merging with the following segments, updating internal
- *	information, etc.
+ *	This function is called after modifications have been made to a line.
+ *	It scans over all of the segments in the line, giving each a chance to
+ *	clean itself up, e.g. by merging with the following segments, updating
+ *	internal information, etc.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Depends on what the segment-specific cleanup procedures do.
+ *	Depends on what the segment-specific cleanup functions do.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-CleanupLine(linePtr)
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line to be cleaned up. */
+CleanupLine(
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Line to be cleaned up. */
 {
     TkTextSegment *segPtr, **prevPtrPtr;
     int anyChanges;
 
     /*
-     * Make a pass over all of the segments in the line, giving each
-     * a chance to clean itself up.  This could potentially change
-     * the structure of the line, e.g. by merging two segments
-     * together or having two segments cancel themselves;  if so,
-     * then repeat the whole process again, since the first structure
-     * change might make other structure changes possible.  Repeat
-     * until eventually there are no changes.
+     * Make a pass over all of the segments in the line, giving each a chance
+     * to clean itself up. This could potentially change the structure of the
+     * line, e.g. by merging two segments together or having two segments
+     * cancel themselves; if so, then repeat the whole process again, since
+     * the first structure change might make other structure changes possible.
+     * Repeat until eventually there are no changes.
      */
 
     while (1) {
@@ -614,49 +1295,55 @@ CleanupLine(linePtr)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * TkBTreeDeleteChars --
+ * TkBTreeDeleteIndexRange --
  *
- *	Delete a range of characters from a B-tree.  The caller
- *	must make sure that the final newline of the B-tree is
- *	never deleted.
+ *	Delete a range of characters from a B-tree. The caller must make sure
+ *	that the final newline of the B-tree is never deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Information is deleted from the B-tree.  This can cause the
- *	internal structure of the B-tree to change.  Note: because
- *	of changes to the B-tree structure, the indices pointed
- *	to by index1Ptr and index2Ptr should not be used after this
- *	procedure returns.
+ *	Information is deleted from the B-tree. This can cause the internal
+ *	structure of the B-tree to change. Note: because of changes to the
+ *	B-tree structure, the indices pointed to by index1Ptr and index2Ptr
+ *	should not be used after this function returns.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkBTreeDeleteChars(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
-    register TkTextIndex *index1Ptr;	/* Indicates first character that is
-					 * to be deleted. */
-    register TkTextIndex *index2Ptr;	/* Indicates character just after the
-					 * last one that is to be deleted. */
+TkBTreeDeleteIndexRange(
+    TkTextBTree tree,		/* Tree to delete from. */
+    register TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
+				/* Indicates first character that is to be
+				 * deleted. */
+    register TkTextIndex *index2Ptr)
+				/* Indicates character just after the last one
+				 * that is to be deleted. */
 {
-    TkTextSegment *prevPtr;		/* The segment just before the start
-					 * of the deletion range. */
-    TkTextSegment *lastPtr;		/* The segment just after the end
-					 * of the deletion range. */
+    TkTextSegment *prevPtr;	/* The segment just before the start of the
+				 * deletion range. */
+    TkTextSegment *lastPtr;	/* The segment just after the end of the
+				 * deletion range. */
     TkTextSegment *segPtr, *nextPtr;
     TkTextLine *curLinePtr;
     Node *curNodePtr, *nodePtr;
+    int changeToLineCount = 0;
+    int ref;
+    BTree *treePtr = (BTree *) tree;
+
+    treePtr->stateEpoch++;
 
     /*
-     * Tricky point:  split at index2Ptr first;  otherwise the split
-     * at index2Ptr may invalidate segPtr and/or prevPtr.
+     * Tricky point: split at index2Ptr first; otherwise the split at
+     * index2Ptr may invalidate segPtr and/or prevPtr.
      */
 
     lastPtr = SplitSeg(index2Ptr);
     if (lastPtr != NULL) {
 	lastPtr = lastPtr->nextPtr;
-    }  else {
+    } else {
 	lastPtr = index2Ptr->linePtr->segPtr;
     }
     prevPtr = SplitSeg(index1Ptr);
@@ -673,18 +1360,19 @@ TkBTreeDeleteChars(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
      */
 
     curLinePtr = index1Ptr->linePtr;
+
     curNodePtr = curLinePtr->parentPtr;
     while (segPtr != lastPtr) {
 	if (segPtr == NULL) {
 	    TkTextLine *nextLinePtr;
 
 	    /*
-	     * We just ran off the end of a line.  First find the
-	     * next line, then go back to the old line and delete it
-	     * (unless it's the starting line for the range).
+	     * We just ran off the end of a line. First find the next line,
+	     * then go back to the old line and delete it (unless it's the
+	     * starting line for the range).
 	     */
 
-	    nextLinePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(curLinePtr);
+	    nextLinePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, curLinePtr);
 	    if (curLinePtr != index1Ptr->linePtr) {
 		if (curNodePtr == index1Ptr->linePtr->parentPtr) {
 		    index1Ptr->linePtr->nextPtr = curLinePtr->nextPtr;
@@ -694,16 +1382,50 @@ TkBTreeDeleteChars(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
 		for (nodePtr = curNodePtr; nodePtr != NULL;
 			nodePtr = nodePtr->parentPtr) {
 		    nodePtr->numLines--;
+		    for (ref = 0; ref < treePtr->pixelReferences; ref++) {
+			nodePtr->numPixels[ref] -= curLinePtr->pixels[2*ref];
+		    }
 		}
+		changeToLineCount++;
 		curNodePtr->numChildren--;
+
+		/*
+		 * Check if we need to adjust any partial clients.
+		 */
+
+		if (treePtr->startEnd != NULL) {
+		    int checkCount = 0;
+
+		    while (checkCount < treePtr->startEndCount) {
+			if (treePtr->startEnd[checkCount] == curLinePtr) {
+			    TkText *peer = treePtr->startEndRef[checkCount];
+
+			    /*
+			     * We're deleting a line which is the start or end
+			     * of a current client. This means we need to
+			     * adjust that client.
+			     */
+
+			    treePtr->startEnd[checkCount] = nextLinePtr;
+			    if (peer->start == curLinePtr) {
+				peer->start = nextLinePtr;
+			    }
+			    if (peer->end == curLinePtr) {
+				peer->end = nextLinePtr;
+			    }
+			}
+			checkCount++;
+		    }
+		}
+		ckfree((char *) curLinePtr->pixels);
 		ckfree((char *) curLinePtr);
 	    }
 	    curLinePtr = nextLinePtr;
 	    segPtr = curLinePtr->segPtr;
 
 	    /*
-	     * If the node is empty then delete it and its parents,
-	     * recursively upwards until a non-empty node is found.
+	     * If the node is empty then delete it and its parents recursively
+	     * upwards until a non-empty node is found.
 	     */
 
 	    while (curNodePtr->numChildren == 0) {
@@ -730,8 +1452,8 @@ TkBTreeDeleteChars(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
 	nextPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
 	if ((*segPtr->typePtr->deleteProc)(segPtr, curLinePtr, 0) != 0) {
 	    /*
-	     * This segment refuses to die.  Move it to prevPtr and
-	     * advance prevPtr if the segment has left gravity.
+	     * This segment refuses to die. Move it to prevPtr and advance
+	     * prevPtr if the segment has left gravity.
 	     */
 
 	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
@@ -749,8 +1471,8 @@ TkBTreeDeleteChars(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the beginning and end of the deletion range are in different
-     * lines, join the two lines together and discard the ending line.
+     * If the beginning and end of the deletion range are in different lines,
+     * join the two lines together and discard the ending line.
      */
 
     if (index1Ptr->linePtr != index2Ptr->linePtr) {
@@ -766,7 +1488,11 @@ TkBTreeDeleteChars(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
 	for (nodePtr = curNodePtr; nodePtr != NULL;
 		nodePtr = nodePtr->parentPtr) {
 	    nodePtr->numLines--;
+	    for (ref = 0; ref < treePtr->pixelReferences; ref++) {
+		nodePtr->numPixels[ref] -= index2Ptr->linePtr->pixels[2*ref];
+	    }
 	}
+	changeToLineCount++;
 	curNodePtr->numChildren--;
 	prevLinePtr = curNodePtr->children.linePtr;
 	if (prevLinePtr == index2Ptr->linePtr) {
@@ -777,7 +1503,43 @@ TkBTreeDeleteChars(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
 	    }
 	    prevLinePtr->nextPtr = index2Ptr->linePtr->nextPtr;
 	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Check if we need to adjust any partial clients. In this case if
+	 * we're deleting the line, we actually move back to the previous line
+	 * for our (start,end) storage. We do this because we still want the
+	 * portion of the second line that still exists to be in the start,end
+	 * range.
+	 */
+
+	if (treePtr->startEnd != NULL) {
+	    int checkCount = 0;
+
+	    while (checkCount < treePtr->startEndCount &&
+		    treePtr->startEnd[checkCount] != NULL) {
+		if (treePtr->startEnd[checkCount] == index2Ptr->linePtr) {
+		    TkText *peer = treePtr->startEndRef[checkCount];
+
+		    /*
+		     * We're deleting a line which is the start or end of a
+		     * current client. This means we need to adjust that
+		     * client.
+		     */
+
+		    treePtr->startEnd[checkCount] = index1Ptr->linePtr;
+		    if (peer->start == index2Ptr->linePtr) {
+			peer->start = index1Ptr->linePtr;
+		    }
+		    if (peer->end == index2Ptr->linePtr) {
+			peer->end = index1Ptr->linePtr;
+		    }
+		}
+		checkCount++;
+	    }
+	}
+	ckfree((char *) index2Ptr->linePtr->pixels);
 	ckfree((char *) index2Ptr->linePtr);
+
 	Rebalance((BTree *) index2Ptr->tree, curNodePtr);
     }
 
@@ -788,6 +1550,19 @@ TkBTreeDeleteChars(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
     CleanupLine(index1Ptr->linePtr);
 
     /*
+     * This line now needs to have its height recalculated. For safety, ensure
+     * we don't call this function with the last artificial line of text. I
+     * _believe_ that it isn't possible to get this far with the last line,
+     * but it is good to be safe.
+     */
+
+    if (TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, index1Ptr->linePtr) != NULL) {
+	TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(treePtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+		index1Ptr->linePtr, changeToLineCount,
+		TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_DELETE);
+    }
+
+    /*
      * Lastly, rebalance the first node of the range.
      */
 
@@ -805,8 +1580,8 @@ TkBTreeDeleteChars(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
  *	Find a particular line in a B-tree based on its line number.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the line structure for the
- *	line whose index is "line", or NULL if no such line exists.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the line structure for the line whose
+ *	index is "line", or NULL if no such line exists.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -815,34 +1590,54 @@ TkBTreeDeleteChars(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
  */
 
 TkTextLine *
-TkBTreeFindLine(tree, line)
-    TkTextBTree tree;			/* B-tree in which to find line. */
-    int line;				/* Index of desired line. */
+TkBTreeFindLine(
+    TkTextBTree tree,		/* B-tree in which to find line. */
+    const TkText *textPtr,	/* Relative to this client of the B-tree. */
+    int line)			/* Index of desired line. */
 {
     BTree *treePtr = (BTree *) tree;
     register Node *nodePtr;
     register TkTextLine *linePtr;
-    int linesLeft;
+
+    if (treePtr == NULL) {
+	treePtr = (BTree *) textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
+    }
 
     nodePtr = treePtr->rootPtr;
-    linesLeft = line;
     if ((line < 0) || (line >= nodePtr->numLines)) {
 	return NULL;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Work down through levels of the tree until a node is found at
-     * level 0.
+     * Check for any start/end offset for this text widget.
+     */
+
+    if (textPtr != NULL) {
+	if (textPtr->start != NULL) {
+	    line += TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, textPtr->start);
+	    if (line >= nodePtr->numLines) {
+		return NULL;
+	    }
+	}
+	if (textPtr->end != NULL) {
+	    if (line > TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, textPtr->end)) {
+		return NULL;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Work down through levels of the tree until a node is found at level 0.
      */
 
     while (nodePtr->level != 0) {
 	for (nodePtr = nodePtr->children.nodePtr;
-		nodePtr->numLines <= linesLeft;
+		nodePtr->numLines <= line;
 		nodePtr = nodePtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (nodePtr == NULL) {
-		panic("TkBTreeFindLine ran out of nodes");
+		Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeFindLine ran out of nodes");
 	    }
-	    linesLeft -= nodePtr->numLines;
+	    line -= nodePtr->numLines;
 	}
     }
 
@@ -850,12 +1645,90 @@ TkBTreeFindLine(tree, line)
      * Work through the lines attached to the level-0 node.
      */
 
-    for (linePtr = nodePtr->children.linePtr; linesLeft > 0;
+    for (linePtr = nodePtr->children.linePtr; line > 0;
 	    linePtr = linePtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (linePtr == NULL) {
-	    panic("TkBTreeFindLine ran out of lines");
+	    Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeFindLine ran out of lines");
 	}
-	linesLeft -= 1;
+	line -= 1;
+    }
+    return linePtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkBTreeFindPixelLine --
+ *
+ *	Find a particular line in a B-tree based on its pixel count.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the line structure for the line which
+ *	contains the pixel "pixels", or NULL if no such line exists. If the
+ *	first line is of height 20, then pixels 0-19 will return it, and
+ *	pixels = 20 will return the next line.
+ *
+ *	If pixelOffset is non-NULL, it is set to the amount by which 'pixels'
+ *	exceeds the first pixel located on the returned line. This should
+ *	always be non-negative.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkTextLine *
+TkBTreeFindPixelLine(
+    TkTextBTree tree,		/* B-tree to use. */
+    const TkText *textPtr,	/* Relative to this client of the B-tree. */
+    int pixels,			/* Pixel index of desired line. */
+    int *pixelOffset)		/* Used to return offset. */
+{
+    BTree *treePtr = (BTree *) tree;
+    register Node *nodePtr;
+    register TkTextLine *linePtr;
+    int pixelReference = textPtr->pixelReference;
+
+    nodePtr = treePtr->rootPtr;
+
+    if ((pixels < 0) || (pixels > nodePtr->numPixels[pixelReference])) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    if (nodePtr->numPixels[pixelReference] == 0) {
+	Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeFindPixelLine called with empty window");
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Work down through levels of the tree until a node is found at level 0.
+     */
+
+    while (nodePtr->level != 0) {
+	for (nodePtr = nodePtr->children.nodePtr;
+		nodePtr->numPixels[pixelReference] <= pixels;
+		nodePtr = nodePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (nodePtr == NULL) {
+		Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeFindPixelLine ran out of nodes");
+	    }
+	    pixels -= nodePtr->numPixels[pixelReference];
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Work through the lines attached to the level-0 node.
+     */
+
+    for (linePtr = nodePtr->children.linePtr;
+	    linePtr->pixels[2 * pixelReference] < pixels;
+	    linePtr = linePtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (linePtr == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeFindPixelLine ran out of lines");
+	}
+	pixels -= linePtr->pixels[2 * pixelReference];
+    }
+    if (pixelOffset != NULL && linePtr != NULL) {
+	*pixelOffset = pixels;
     }
     return linePtr;
 }
@@ -865,13 +1738,13 @@ TkBTreeFindLine(tree, line)
  *
  * TkBTreeNextLine --
  *
- *	Given an existing line in a B-tree, this procedure locates the
- *	next line in the B-tree.  This procedure is used for scanning
- *	through the B-tree.
+ *	Given an existing line in a B-tree, this function locates the next
+ *	line in the B-tree. This function is used for scanning through the
+ *	B-tree.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the line that immediately
- *	follows linePtr, or NULL if there is no such line.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the line that immediately follows
+ *	linePtr, or NULL if there is no such line.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -880,20 +1753,25 @@ TkBTreeFindLine(tree, line)
  */
 
 TkTextLine *
-TkBTreeNextLine(linePtr)
-    register TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* Pointer to existing line in
-					 * B-tree. */
+TkBTreeNextLine(
+    const TkText *textPtr,	/* Next line in the context of this client. */
+    register TkTextLine *linePtr)
+				/* Pointer to existing line in B-tree. */
 {
     register Node *nodePtr;
 
     if (linePtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
-	return linePtr->nextPtr;
+	if (textPtr != NULL && (linePtr == textPtr->end)) {
+	    return NULL;
+	} else {
+	    return linePtr->nextPtr;
+	}
     }
 
     /*
      * This was the last line associated with the particular parent node.
-     * Search up the tree for the next node, then search down from that
-     * node to find the first line.
+     * Search up the tree for the next node, then search down from that node
+     * to find the first line.
      */
 
     for (nodePtr = linePtr->parentPtr; ; nodePtr = nodePtr->parentPtr) {
@@ -902,7 +1780,7 @@ TkBTreeNextLine(linePtr)
 	    break;
 	}
 	if (nodePtr->parentPtr == NULL) {
-	    return (TkTextLine *) NULL;
+	    return NULL;
 	}
     }
     while (nodePtr->level > 0) {
@@ -916,13 +1794,13 @@ TkBTreeNextLine(linePtr)
  *
  * TkBTreePreviousLine --
  *
- *	Given an existing line in a B-tree, this procedure locates the
- *	previous line in the B-tree.  This procedure is used for scanning
- *	through the B-tree in the reverse direction.
+ *	Given an existing line in a B-tree, this function locates the previous
+ *	line in the B-tree. This function is used for scanning through the
+ *	B-tree in the reverse direction.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the line that immediately
- *	preceeds linePtr, or NULL if there is no such line.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the line that immediately preceeds
+ *	linePtr, or NULL if there is no such line.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -931,25 +1809,31 @@ TkBTreeNextLine(linePtr)
  */
 
 TkTextLine *
-TkBTreePreviousLine(linePtr)
-    register TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* Pointer to existing line in
-					 * B-tree. */
+TkBTreePreviousLine(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Relative to this client of the B-tree. */
+    register TkTextLine *linePtr)
+				/* Pointer to existing line in B-tree. */
 {
     register Node *nodePtr;
     register Node *node2Ptr;
     register TkTextLine *prevPtr;
 
+    if (textPtr != NULL && textPtr->start == linePtr) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
     /*
      * Find the line under this node just before the starting line.
      */
-    prevPtr = linePtr->parentPtr->children.linePtr;	/* First line at leaf */
+
+    prevPtr = linePtr->parentPtr->children.linePtr;   /* First line at leaf. */
     while (prevPtr != linePtr) {
 	if (prevPtr->nextPtr == linePtr) {
 	    return prevPtr;
 	}
 	prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr;
-	if (prevPtr == (TkTextLine *) NULL) {
-	    panic("TkBTreePreviousLine ran out of lines");
+	if (prevPtr == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_Panic("TkBTreePreviousLine ran out of lines");
 	}
     }
 
@@ -958,15 +1842,16 @@ TkBTreePreviousLine(linePtr)
      * Search up the tree for the previous node, then search down from that
      * node to find its last line.
      */
+
     for (nodePtr = linePtr->parentPtr; ; nodePtr = nodePtr->parentPtr) {
-	if (nodePtr == (Node *) NULL || nodePtr->parentPtr == (Node *) NULL) {
-	    return (TkTextLine *) NULL;
+	if (nodePtr == NULL || nodePtr->parentPtr == NULL) {
+	    return NULL;
 	}
 	if (nodePtr != nodePtr->parentPtr->children.nodePtr) {
 	    break;
 	}
     }
-    for (node2Ptr = nodePtr->parentPtr->children.nodePtr; ; 
+    for (node2Ptr = nodePtr->parentPtr->children.nodePtr; ;
 	    node2Ptr = node2Ptr->children.nodePtr) {
 	while (node2Ptr->nextPtr != nodePtr) {
 	    node2Ptr = node2Ptr->nextPtr;
@@ -974,10 +1859,10 @@ TkBTreePreviousLine(linePtr)
 	if (node2Ptr->level == 0) {
 	    break;
 	}
-	nodePtr = (Node *)NULL;
+	nodePtr = NULL;
     }
     for (prevPtr = node2Ptr->children.linePtr ; ; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) {
-	if (prevPtr->nextPtr == (TkTextLine *) NULL) {
+	if (prevPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
 	    return prevPtr;
 	}
     }
@@ -986,10 +1871,15 @@ TkBTreePreviousLine(linePtr)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * TkBTreeLineIndex --
+ * TkBTreePixelsTo --
  *
- *	Given a pointer to a line in a B-tree, return the numerical
- *	index of that line.
+ *	Given a pointer to a line in a B-tree, return the numerical pixel
+ *	index of the top of that line (i.e. the result does not include the
+ *	height of the given line).
+ *
+ *	Since the last line of text (the artificial one) has zero height by
+ *	defintion, calling this with the last line will return the total
+ *	number of pixels in the widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The result is the index of linePtr within the tree, where 0
@@ -1002,17 +1892,78 @@ TkBTreePreviousLine(linePtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkBTreeLineIndex(linePtr)
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Pointer to existing line in
-					 * B-tree. */
+TkBTreePixelsTo(
+    const TkText *textPtr,	/* Relative to this client of the B-tree. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Pointer to existing line in B-tree. */
+{
+    register TkTextLine *linePtr2;
+    register Node *nodePtr, *parentPtr;
+    int index;
+    int pixelReference = textPtr->pixelReference;
+
+    /*
+     * First count how many pixels precede this line in its level-0 node.
+     */
+
+    nodePtr = linePtr->parentPtr;
+    index = 0;
+    for (linePtr2 = nodePtr->children.linePtr; linePtr2 != linePtr;
+	    linePtr2 = linePtr2->nextPtr) {
+	if (linePtr2 == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_Panic("TkBTreePixelsTo couldn't find line");
+	}
+	index += linePtr2->pixels[2 * pixelReference];
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Now work up through the levels of the tree one at a time, counting how
+     * many pixels are in nodes preceding the current node.
+     */
+
+    for (parentPtr = nodePtr->parentPtr ; parentPtr != NULL;
+	    nodePtr = parentPtr, parentPtr = parentPtr->parentPtr) {
+	register Node *nodePtr2;
+
+	for (nodePtr2 = parentPtr->children.nodePtr; nodePtr2 != nodePtr;
+		nodePtr2 = nodePtr2->nextPtr) {
+	    if (nodePtr2 == NULL) {
+		Tcl_Panic("TkBTreePixelsTo couldn't find node");
+	    }
+	    index += nodePtr2->numPixels[pixelReference];
+	}
+    }
+    return index;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkBTreeLinesTo --
+ *
+ *	Given a pointer to a line in a B-tree, return the numerical index of
+ *	that line.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The result is the index of linePtr within the tree, where 0
+ *	corresponds to the first line in the tree.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkBTreeLinesTo(
+    const TkText *textPtr,	/* Relative to this client of the B-tree. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Pointer to existing line in B-tree. */
 {
     register TkTextLine *linePtr2;
     register Node *nodePtr, *parentPtr, *nodePtr2;
     int index;
 
     /*
-     * First count how many lines precede this one in its level-0
-     * node.
+     * First count how many lines precede this one in its level-0 node.
      */
 
     nodePtr = linePtr->parentPtr;
@@ -1020,15 +1971,14 @@ TkBTreeLineIndex(linePtr)
     for (linePtr2 = nodePtr->children.linePtr; linePtr2 != linePtr;
 	    linePtr2 = linePtr2->nextPtr) {
 	if (linePtr2 == NULL) {
-	    panic("TkBTreeLineIndex couldn't find line");
+	    Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeLinesTo couldn't find line");
 	}
 	index += 1;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Now work up through the levels of the tree one at a time,
-     * counting how many lines are in nodes preceding the current
-     * node.
+     * Now work up through the levels of the tree one at a time, counting how
+     * many lines are in nodes preceding the current node.
      */
 
     for (parentPtr = nodePtr->parentPtr ; parentPtr != NULL;
@@ -1036,21 +1986,48 @@ TkBTreeLineIndex(linePtr)
 	for (nodePtr2 = parentPtr->children.nodePtr; nodePtr2 != nodePtr;
 		nodePtr2 = nodePtr2->nextPtr) {
 	    if (nodePtr2 == NULL) {
-		panic("TkBTreeLineIndex couldn't find node");
+		Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeLinesTo couldn't find node");
 	    }
 	    index += nodePtr2->numLines;
 	}
     }
+    if (textPtr != NULL) {
+        /* 
+         * The index to return must be relative to textPtr, not to the entire
+         * tree. Take care to never return a negative index when linePtr
+         * denotes a line before -startline, or an index larger than the
+         * number of lines in textPtr when linePtr is a line past -endline.
+         */
+
+        int indexStart, indexEnd;
+
+        if (textPtr->start != NULL) {
+            indexStart = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, textPtr->start);
+        } else {
+            indexStart = 0;
+        }
+        if (textPtr->end != NULL) {
+            indexEnd = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, textPtr->end);
+        } else {
+            indexEnd = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL);
+        }
+        if (index < indexStart) {
+            index = 0;
+        } else if (index > indexEnd) {
+            index = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr);
+        } else {
+            index -= indexStart;
+        }
+    }
     return index;
 }
-
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkBTreeLinkSegment --
  *
- *	This procedure adds a new segment to a B-tree at a given
- *	location.
+ *	This function adds a new segment to a B-tree at a given location.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1063,13 +2040,12 @@ TkBTreeLineIndex(linePtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 void
-TkBTreeLinkSegment(segPtr, indexPtr)
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;	/* Pointer to new segment to be added to
-				 * B-tree.  Should be completely initialized
-				 * by caller except for nextPtr field. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Where to add segment:  it gets linked
-				 * in just before the segment indicated
-				 * here. */
+TkBTreeLinkSegment(
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr,	/* Pointer to new segment to be added to
+				 * B-tree. Should be completely initialized by
+				 * caller except for nextPtr field. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Where to add segment: it gets linked in
+				 * just before the segment indicated here. */
 {
     register TkTextSegment *prevPtr;
 
@@ -1085,6 +2061,7 @@ TkBTreeLinkSegment(segPtr, indexPtr)
     if (tkBTreeDebug) {
 	TkBTreeCheck(indexPtr->tree);
     }
+    ((BTree *)indexPtr->tree)->stateEpoch++;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1092,34 +2069,42 @@ TkBTreeLinkSegment(segPtr, indexPtr)
  *
  * TkBTreeUnlinkSegment --
  *
- *	This procedure unlinks a segment from its line in a B-tree.
+ *	This function unlinks a segment from its line in a B-tree.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	SegPtr will be unlinked from linePtr.  The segment itself
- *	isn't modified by this procedure.
+ *	SegPtr will be unlinked from linePtr. The segment itself isn't
+ *	modified by this function.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 void
-TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(tree, segPtr, linePtr)
-    TkTextBTree tree;			/* Tree containing segment. */
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;		/* Segment to be unlinked. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line that currently contains
-					 * segment. */
+TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr,	/* Segment to be unlinked. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Line that currently contains segment. */
 {
     register TkTextSegment *prevPtr;
 
     if (linePtr->segPtr == segPtr) {
 	linePtr->segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
     } else {
-	for (prevPtr = linePtr->segPtr; prevPtr->nextPtr != segPtr;
-		prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    /* Empty loop body. */
+	prevPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
+	while (prevPtr->nextPtr != segPtr) {
+	    prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr;
+
+	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * Two logical lines merged into one display line through
+		 * eliding of a newline.
+		 */
+
+		linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, linePtr);
+		prevPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
+	    }
 	}
 	prevPtr->nextPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
     }
@@ -1131,44 +2116,44 @@ TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(tree, segPtr, linePtr)
  *
  * TkBTreeTag --
  *
- *	Turn a given tag on or off for a given range of characters in
- *	a B-tree of text.
+ *	Turn a given tag on or off for a given range of characters in a B-tree
+ *	of text.
  *
  * Results:
- *	None.
+ *	1 if the tags on any characters in the range were changed, and zero
+ *	otherwise (i.e. if the tag was already absent (add = 0) or present
+ *	(add = 1) on the index range in question).
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The given tag is added to the given range of characters
- *	in the tree or removed from all those characters, depending
- *	on the "add" argument.  The structure of the btree is modified
- *	enough that index1Ptr and index2Ptr are no longer valid after
- *	this procedure returns, and the indexes may be modified by
- *	this procedure.
+ *	The given tag is added to the given range of characters in the tree or
+ *	removed from all those characters, depending on the "add" argument.
+ *	The structure of the btree is modified enough that index1Ptr and
+ *	index2Ptr are no longer valid after this function returns, and the
+ *	indexes may be modified by this function.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void
-TkBTreeTag(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, add)
-    register TkTextIndex *index1Ptr;	/* Indicates first character in
-					 * range. */
-    register TkTextIndex *index2Ptr;	/* Indicates character just after the
-					 * last one in range. */
-    TkTextTag *tagPtr;			/* Tag to add or remove. */
-    int add;				/* One means add tag to the given
-					 * range of characters;  zero means
-					 * remove the tag from the range. */
+int
+TkBTreeTag(
+    register TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
+				/* Indicates first character in range. */
+    register TkTextIndex *index2Ptr,
+				/* Indicates character just after the last one
+				 * in range. */
+    TkTextTag *tagPtr,		/* Tag to add or remove. */
+    int add)			/* One means add tag to the given range of
+				 * characters; zero means remove the tag from
+				 * the range. */
 {
     TkTextSegment *segPtr, *prevPtr;
     TkTextSearch search;
     TkTextLine *cleanupLinePtr;
-    int oldState;
-    int changed;
+    int oldState, changed, anyChanges = 0;
 
     /*
-     * See whether the tag is present at the start of the range.  If
-     * the state doesn't already match what we want then add a toggle
-     * there.
+     * See whether the tag is present at the start of the range. If the state
+     * doesn't already match what we want then add a toggle there.
      */
 
     oldState = TkBTreeCharTagged(index1Ptr, tagPtr);
@@ -1186,17 +2171,19 @@ TkBTreeTag(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, add)
 	segPtr->size = 0;
 	segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr = tagPtr;
 	segPtr->body.toggle.inNodeCounts = 0;
+	anyChanges = 1;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Scan the range of characters and delete any internal tag
-     * transitions.  Keep track of what the old state was at the end
-     * of the range, and add a toggle there if it's needed.
+     * Scan the range of characters and delete any internal tag transitions.
+     * Keep track of what the old state was at the end of the range, and add a
+     * toggle there if it's needed.
      */
 
     TkBTreeStartSearch(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, &search);
     cleanupLinePtr = index1Ptr->linePtr;
     while (TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) {
+	anyChanges = 1;
 	oldState ^= 1;
 	segPtr = search.segPtr;
 	prevPtr = search.curIndex.linePtr->segPtr;
@@ -1219,24 +2206,24 @@ TkBTreeTag(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, add)
 	ckfree((char *) segPtr);
 
 	/*
-	 * The code below is a bit tricky.  After deleting a toggle
-	 * we eventually have to call CleanupLine, in order to allow
-	 * character segments to be merged together.  To do this, we
-	 * remember in cleanupLinePtr a line that needs to be
-	 * cleaned up, but we don't clean it up until we've moved
-	 * on to a different line.  That way the cleanup process
-	 * won't goof up segPtr.
+	 * The code below is a bit tricky. After deleting a toggle we
+	 * eventually have to call CleanupLine, in order to allow character
+	 * segments to be merged together. To do this, we remember in
+	 * cleanupLinePtr a line that needs to be cleaned up, but we don't
+	 * clean it up until we've moved on to a different line. That way the
+	 * cleanup process won't goof up segPtr.
 	 */
 
 	if (cleanupLinePtr != search.curIndex.linePtr) {
 	    CleanupLine(cleanupLinePtr);
 	    cleanupLinePtr = search.curIndex.linePtr;
 	}
+
 	/*
-	 * Quick hack.  ChangeNodeToggleCount may move the tag's root
-	 * location around and leave the search in the void.  This resets
-	 * the search.
+	 * Quick hack. ChangeNodeToggleCount may move the tag's root location
+	 * around and leave the search in the void. This resets the search.
 	 */
+
 	if (changed) {
 	    TkBTreeStartSearch(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, &search);
 	}
@@ -1255,21 +2242,26 @@ TkBTreeTag(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, add)
 	segPtr->size = 0;
 	segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr = tagPtr;
 	segPtr->body.toggle.inNodeCounts = 0;
+	anyChanges = 1;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Cleanup cleanupLinePtr and the last line of the range, if
-     * these are different.
+     * Cleanup cleanupLinePtr and the last line of the range, if these are
+     * different.
      */
 
-    CleanupLine(cleanupLinePtr);
-    if (cleanupLinePtr != index2Ptr->linePtr) {
-	CleanupLine(index2Ptr->linePtr);
+    if (anyChanges) {
+	CleanupLine(cleanupLinePtr);
+	if (cleanupLinePtr != index2Ptr->linePtr) {
+	    CleanupLine(index2Ptr->linePtr);
+	}
+	((BTree *)index1Ptr->tree)->stateEpoch++;
     }
 
     if (tkBTreeDebug) {
 	TkBTreeCheck(index1Ptr->tree);
     }
+    return anyChanges;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1277,42 +2269,42 @@ TkBTreeTag(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, add)
  *
  * ChangeNodeToggleCount --
  *
- *	This procedure increments or decrements the toggle count for
- *	a particular tag in a particular node and all its ancestors
- *	up to the per-tag root node.
+ *	This function increments or decrements the toggle count for a
+ *	particular tag in a particular node and all its ancestors up to the
+ *	per-tag root node.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The toggle count for tag is adjusted up or down by "delta" in
- *	nodePtr.  This routine maintains the tagRootPtr that identifies
- *	the root node for the tag, moving it up or down the tree as needed.
+ *	The toggle count for tag is adjusted up or down by "delta" in nodePtr.
+ *	This routine maintains the tagRootPtr that identifies the root node
+ *	for the tag, moving it up or down the tree as needed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ChangeNodeToggleCount(nodePtr, tagPtr, delta)
-    register Node *nodePtr;		/* Node whose toggle count for a tag
-					 * must be changed. */
-    TkTextTag *tagPtr;			/* Information about tag. */
-    int delta;				/* Amount to add to current toggle
-					 * count for tag (may be negative). */
+ChangeNodeToggleCount(
+    register Node *nodePtr,	/* Node whose toggle count for a tag must be
+				 * changed. */
+    TkTextTag *tagPtr,		/* Information about tag. */
+    int delta)			/* Amount to add to current toggle count for
+				 * tag (may be negative). */
 {
     register Summary *summaryPtr, *prevPtr;
     register Node *node2Ptr;
-    int rootLevel;			/* Level of original tag root */
+    int rootLevel;		/* Level of original tag root. */
 
     tagPtr->toggleCount += delta;
-    if (tagPtr->tagRootPtr == (Node *) NULL) {
+    if (tagPtr->tagRootPtr == NULL) {
 	tagPtr->tagRootPtr = nodePtr;
 	return;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Note the level of the existing root for the tag so we can detect
-     * if it needs to be moved because of the toggle count change.
+     * Note the level of the existing root for the tag so we can detect if it
+     * needs to be moved because of the toggle count change.
      */
 
     rootLevel = tagPtr->tagRootPtr->level;
@@ -1325,10 +2317,10 @@ ChangeNodeToggleCount(nodePtr, tagPtr, delta)
 
     for ( ; nodePtr != tagPtr->tagRootPtr; nodePtr = nodePtr->parentPtr) {
 	/*
-	 * See if there's already an entry for this tag for this node.  If so,
+	 * See if there's already an entry for this tag for this node. If so,
 	 * perhaps all we have to do is adjust its count.
 	 */
-    
+
 	for (prevPtr = NULL, summaryPtr = nodePtr->summaryPtr;
 		summaryPtr != NULL;
 		prevPtr = summaryPtr, summaryPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -1349,12 +2341,12 @@ ChangeNodeToggleCount(nodePtr, tagPtr, delta)
 		 * first place).
 		 */
 
-		panic("ChangeNodeToggleCount: bad toggle count (%d) max (%d)",
+		Tcl_Panic("ChangeNodeToggleCount: bad toggle count (%d) max (%d)",
 		    summaryPtr->toggleCount, tagPtr->toggleCount);
 	    }
-    
+
 	    /*
-	     * Zero toggle count;  must remove this tag from the list.
+	     * Zero toggle count; must remove this tag from the list.
 	     */
 
 	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
@@ -1367,21 +2359,20 @@ ChangeNodeToggleCount(nodePtr, tagPtr, delta)
 	    /*
 	     * This tag isn't currently in the summary information list.
 	     */
-    
+
 	    if (rootLevel == nodePtr->level) {
-    
 		/*
 		 * The old tag root is at the same level in the tree as this
-		 * node, but it isn't at this node.  Move the tag root up
-		 * a level, in the hopes that it will now cover this node
-		 * as well as the old root (if not, we'll move it up again
-		 * the next time through the loop).  To push it up one level
-		 * we copy the original toggle count into the summary
-		 * information at the old root and change the root to its
-		 * parent node.
+		 * node, but it isn't at this node. Move the tag root up a
+		 * level, in the hopes that it will now cover this node as
+		 * well as the old root (if not, we'll move it up again the
+		 * next time through the loop). To push it up one level we
+		 * copy the original toggle count into the summary information
+		 * at the old root and change the root to its parent node.
 		 */
-    
+
 		Node *rootNodePtr = tagPtr->tagRootPtr;
+
 		summaryPtr = (Summary *) ckalloc(sizeof(Summary));
 		summaryPtr->tagPtr = tagPtr;
 		summaryPtr->toggleCount = tagPtr->toggleCount - delta;
@@ -1400,26 +2391,26 @@ ChangeNodeToggleCount(nodePtr, tagPtr, delta)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If we've decremented the toggle count, then it may be necessary
-     * to push the tag root down one or more levels.
+     * If we've decremented the toggle count, then it may be necessary to push
+     * the tag root down one or more levels.
      */
 
     if (delta >= 0) {
 	return;
     }
     if (tagPtr->toggleCount == 0) {
-	tagPtr->tagRootPtr = (Node *) NULL;
+	tagPtr->tagRootPtr = NULL;
 	return;
     }
     nodePtr = tagPtr->tagRootPtr;
     while (nodePtr->level > 0) {
 	/*
-	 * See if a single child node accounts for all of the tag's
-	 * toggles.  If so, push the root down one level.
+	 * See if a single child node accounts for all of the tag's toggles.
+	 * If so, push the root down one level.
 	 */
 
 	for (node2Ptr = nodePtr->children.nodePtr;
-		node2Ptr != (Node *)NULL ;
+		node2Ptr != NULL ;
 		node2Ptr = node2Ptr->nextPtr) {
 	    for (prevPtr = NULL, summaryPtr = node2Ptr->summaryPtr;
 		    summaryPtr != NULL;
@@ -1464,10 +2455,10 @@ ChangeNodeToggleCount(nodePtr, tagPtr, delta)
  *	Find the start of the first range of a tag.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the first tag toggle segment
- *	for the tag.  This can be either a tagon or tagoff segments because
- *	of the way TkBTreeAdd removes a tag.
- *	Sets *indexPtr to be the index of the tag toggle.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the first tag toggle segment for the
+ *	tag. This can be either a tagon or tagoff segments because of the way
+ *	TkBTreeAdd removes a tag. Sets *indexPtr to be the index of the tag
+ *	toggle.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1476,10 +2467,10 @@ ChangeNodeToggleCount(nodePtr, tagPtr, delta)
  */
 
 static TkTextSegment *
-FindTagStart(tree, tagPtr, indexPtr)
-    TkTextBTree tree;			/* Tree to search within */
-    TkTextTag *tagPtr;			/* Tag to search for. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;		/* Return - index information */
+FindTagStart(
+    TkTextBTree tree,		/* Tree to search within. */
+    TkTextTag *tagPtr,		/* Tag to search for. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Return - index information. */
 {
     register Node *nodePtr;
     register TkTextLine *linePtr;
@@ -1488,17 +2479,17 @@ FindTagStart(tree, tagPtr, indexPtr)
     int offset;
 
     nodePtr = tagPtr->tagRootPtr;
-    if (nodePtr == (Node *) NULL) {
+    if (nodePtr == NULL) {
 	return NULL;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Search from the root of the subtree that contains the tag down
-     * to the level 0 node.
+     * Search from the root of the subtree that contains the tag down to the
+     * level 0 node.
      */
 
     while (nodePtr->level > 0) {
-	for (nodePtr = nodePtr->children.nodePtr ; nodePtr != (Node *) NULL;
+	for (nodePtr = nodePtr->children.nodePtr ; nodePtr != NULL;
 		nodePtr = nodePtr->nextPtr) {
 	    for (summaryPtr = nodePtr->summaryPtr ; summaryPtr != NULL;
 		    summaryPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -1507,7 +2498,7 @@ FindTagStart(tree, tagPtr, indexPtr)
 		}
 	    }
 	}
-	gotNodeWithTag:
+    gotNodeWithTag:
 	continue;
     }
 
@@ -1515,7 +2506,7 @@ FindTagStart(tree, tagPtr, indexPtr)
      * Work through the lines attached to the level-0 node.
      */
 
-    for (linePtr = nodePtr->children.linePtr; linePtr != (TkTextLine *) NULL;
+    for (linePtr = nodePtr->children.linePtr; linePtr != NULL;
 	    linePtr = linePtr->nextPtr) {
 	for (offset = 0, segPtr = linePtr->segPtr ; segPtr != NULL;
 		offset += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -1523,9 +2514,10 @@ FindTagStart(tree, tagPtr, indexPtr)
 		    || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType))
 		    && (segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr == tagPtr)) {
 		/*
-		 * It is possible that this is a tagoff tag, but that
-		 * gets cleaned up later.
+		 * It is possible that this is a tagoff tag, but that gets
+		 * cleaned up later.
 		 */
+
 		indexPtr->tree = tree;
 		indexPtr->linePtr = linePtr;
 		indexPtr->byteIndex = offset;
@@ -1544,10 +2536,10 @@ FindTagStart(tree, tagPtr, indexPtr)
  *	Find the end of the last range of a tag.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the last tag toggle segment
- *	for the tag.  This can be either a tagon or tagoff segments because
- *	of the way TkBTreeAdd removes a tag.
- *	Sets *indexPtr to be the index of the tag toggle.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the last tag toggle segment for the
+ *	tag. This can be either a tagon or tagoff segments because of the way
+ *	TkBTreeAdd removes a tag. Sets *indexPtr to be the index of the tag
+ *	toggle.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1556,10 +2548,10 @@ FindTagStart(tree, tagPtr, indexPtr)
  */
 
 static TkTextSegment *
-FindTagEnd(tree, tagPtr, indexPtr)
-    TkTextBTree tree;			/* Tree to search within */
-    TkTextTag *tagPtr;			/* Tag to search for. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;		/* Return - index information */
+FindTagEnd(
+    TkTextBTree tree,		/* Tree to search within. */
+    TkTextTag *tagPtr,		/* Tag to search for. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Return - index information. */
 {
     register Node *nodePtr, *lastNodePtr;
     register TkTextLine *linePtr ,*lastLinePtr;
@@ -1568,18 +2560,18 @@ FindTagEnd(tree, tagPtr, indexPtr)
     int lastoffset, lastoffset2, offset;
 
     nodePtr = tagPtr->tagRootPtr;
-    if (nodePtr == (Node *) NULL) {
+    if (nodePtr == NULL) {
 	return NULL;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Search from the root of the subtree that contains the tag down
-     * to the level 0 node.
+     * Search from the root of the subtree that contains the tag down to the
+     * level 0 node.
      */
 
     while (nodePtr->level > 0) {
 	for (lastNodePtr = NULL, nodePtr = nodePtr->children.nodePtr ;
-		nodePtr != (Node *) NULL; nodePtr = nodePtr->nextPtr) {
+		nodePtr != NULL; nodePtr = nodePtr->nextPtr) {
 	    for (summaryPtr = nodePtr->summaryPtr ; summaryPtr != NULL;
 		    summaryPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr) {
 		if (summaryPtr->tagPtr == tagPtr) {
@@ -1594,13 +2586,14 @@ FindTagEnd(tree, tagPtr, indexPtr)
     /*
      * Work through the lines attached to the level-0 node.
      */
+
     last2SegPtr = NULL;
     lastoffset2 = 0;
     lastoffset = 0;
     for (lastLinePtr = NULL, linePtr = nodePtr->children.linePtr;
-	    linePtr != (TkTextLine *) NULL; linePtr = linePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    linePtr != NULL; linePtr = linePtr->nextPtr) {
 	for (offset = 0, lastSegPtr = NULL, segPtr = linePtr->segPtr ;
-		segPtr != NULL; 
+		segPtr != NULL;
 		offset += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)
 		    || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType))
@@ -1626,51 +2619,50 @@ FindTagEnd(tree, tagPtr, indexPtr)
  *
  * TkBTreeStartSearch --
  *
- *	This procedure sets up a search for tag transitions involving
- *	a given tag (or all tags) in a given range of the text.
+ *	This function sets up a search for tag transitions involving a given
+ *	tag (or all tags) in a given range of the text.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The information at *searchPtr is set up so that subsequent calls
- *	to TkBTreeNextTag or TkBTreePrevTag will return information about the
- *	locations of tag transitions.  Note that TkBTreeNextTag or 
- *	TkBTreePrevTag must be called to get the first transition.
- *	Note: unlike TkBTreeNextTag and TkBTreePrevTag, this routine does not
- *	guarantee that searchPtr->curIndex is equal to *index1Ptr.  It may be
+ *	The information at *searchPtr is set up so that subsequent calls to
+ *	TkBTreeNextTag or TkBTreePrevTag will return information about the
+ *	locations of tag transitions. Note that TkBTreeNextTag or
+ *	TkBTreePrevTag must be called to get the first transition. Note:
+ *	unlike TkBTreeNextTag and TkBTreePrevTag, this routine does not
+ *	guarantee that searchPtr->curIndex is equal to *index1Ptr. It may be
  *	greater than that if *index1Ptr is less than the first tag transition.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkBTreeStartSearch(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, searchPtr)
-    TkTextIndex *index1Ptr;		/* Search starts here.  Tag toggles
-					 * at this position will not be
-					 * returned. */
-    TkTextIndex *index2Ptr;		/* Search stops here.  Tag toggles
-					 * at this position *will* be
-					 * returned. */
-    TkTextTag *tagPtr;			/* Tag to search for.  NULL means
-					 * search for any tag. */
-    register TkTextSearch *searchPtr;	/* Where to store information about
-					 * search's progress. */
+TkBTreeStartSearch(
+    TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,	/* Search starts here. Tag toggles at this
+				 * position will not be returned. */
+    TkTextIndex *index2Ptr,	/* Search stops here. Tag toggles at this
+				 * position *will* be returned. */
+    TkTextTag *tagPtr,		/* Tag to search for. NULL means search for
+				 * any tag. */
+    register TkTextSearch *searchPtr)
+				/* Where to store information about search's
+				 * progress. */
 {
     int offset;
-    TkTextIndex index0;		/* First index of the tag */
-    TkTextSegment *seg0Ptr;	/* First segment of the tag */
+    TkTextIndex index0;		/* First index of the tag. */
+    TkTextSegment *seg0Ptr;	/* First segment of the tag. */
 
     /*
-     * Find the segment that contains the first toggle for the tag.  This
-     * may become the starting point in the search.
+     * Find the segment that contains the first toggle for the tag. This may
+     * become the starting point in the search.
      */
 
     seg0Ptr = FindTagStart(index1Ptr->tree, tagPtr, &index0);
-    if (seg0Ptr == (TkTextSegment *) NULL) {
+    if (seg0Ptr == NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * Even though there are no toggles, the display code still
-	 * uses the search curIndex, so initialize that anyway.
+	 * Even though there are no toggles, the display code still uses the
+	 * search curIndex, so initialize that anyway.
 	 */
 
 	searchPtr->linesLeft = 0;
@@ -1681,12 +2673,12 @@ TkBTreeStartSearch(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, searchPtr)
     }
     if (TkTextIndexCmp(index1Ptr, &index0) < 0) {
 	/*
-	 * Adjust start of search up to the first range of the tag
+	 * Adjust start of search up to the first range of the tag.
 	 */
 
 	searchPtr->curIndex = index0;
 	searchPtr->segPtr = NULL;
-	searchPtr->nextPtr = seg0Ptr;	/* Will be returned by NextTag */
+	searchPtr->nextPtr = seg0Ptr;	/* Will be returned by NextTag. */
 	index1Ptr = &index0;
     } else {
 	searchPtr->curIndex = *index1Ptr;
@@ -1694,23 +2686,24 @@ TkBTreeStartSearch(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, searchPtr)
 	searchPtr->nextPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(index1Ptr, &offset);
 	searchPtr->curIndex.byteIndex -= offset;
     }
-    searchPtr->lastPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(index2Ptr, (int *) NULL);
+    searchPtr->lastPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(index2Ptr, NULL);
     searchPtr->tagPtr = tagPtr;
-    searchPtr->linesLeft = TkBTreeLineIndex(index2Ptr->linePtr) + 1
-	    - TkBTreeLineIndex(index1Ptr->linePtr);
+    searchPtr->linesLeft = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, index2Ptr->linePtr) + 1
+	    - TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, index1Ptr->linePtr);
     searchPtr->allTags = (tagPtr == NULL);
     if (searchPtr->linesLeft == 1) {
 	/*
 	 * Starting and stopping segments are in the same line; mark the
 	 * search as over immediately if the second segment is before the
-	 * first.  A search does not return a toggle at the very start of
-	 * the range, unless the range is artificially moved up to index0.
+	 * first. A search does not return a toggle at the very start of the
+	 * range, unless the range is artificially moved up to index0.
 	 */
-	if (((index1Ptr == &index0) && 
+
+	if (((index1Ptr == &index0) &&
 		(index1Ptr->byteIndex > index2Ptr->byteIndex)) ||
-	    ((index1Ptr != &index0) && 
+		((index1Ptr != &index0) &&
 		(index1Ptr->byteIndex >= index2Ptr->byteIndex))) {
-		searchPtr->linesLeft = 0;
+	    searchPtr->linesLeft = 0;
 	}
     }
 }
@@ -1720,55 +2713,53 @@ TkBTreeStartSearch(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, searchPtr)
  *
  * TkBTreeStartSearchBack --
  *
- *	This procedure sets up a search backwards for tag transitions involving
- *	a given tag (or all tags) in a given range of the text.  In the
- *	normal case the first index (*index1Ptr) is beyond the second
- *	index (*index2Ptr).
- *	
+ *	This function sets up a search backwards for tag transitions involving
+ *	a given tag (or all tags) in a given range of the text. In the normal
+ *	case the first index (*index1Ptr) is beyond the second index
+ *	(*index2Ptr).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The information at *searchPtr is set up so that subsequent calls
- *	to TkBTreePrevTag will return information about the
- *	locations of tag transitions.  Note that TkBTreePrevTag must be called
- *	to get the first transition.
- *	Note: unlike TkBTreeNextTag and TkBTreePrevTag, this routine does not
- *	guarantee that searchPtr->curIndex is equal to *index1Ptr.  It may be
- *	less than that if *index1Ptr is greater than the last tag transition.
+ *	The information at *searchPtr is set up so that subsequent calls to
+ *	TkBTreePrevTag will return information about the locations of tag
+ *	transitions. Note that TkBTreePrevTag must be called to get the first
+ *	transition. Note: unlike TkBTreeNextTag and TkBTreePrevTag, this
+ *	routine does not guarantee that searchPtr->curIndex is equal to
+ *	*index1Ptr. It may be less than that if *index1Ptr is greater than the
+ *	last tag transition.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkBTreeStartSearchBack(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, searchPtr)
-    TkTextIndex *index1Ptr;		/* Search starts here.  Tag toggles
-					 * at this position will not be
-					 * returned. */
-    TkTextIndex *index2Ptr;		/* Search stops here.  Tag toggles
-					 * at this position *will* be
-					 * returned. */
-    TkTextTag *tagPtr;			/* Tag to search for.  NULL means
-					 * search for any tag. */
-    register TkTextSearch *searchPtr;	/* Where to store information about
-					 * search's progress. */
+TkBTreeStartSearchBack(
+    TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,	/* Search starts here. Tag toggles at this
+				 * position will not be returned. */
+    TkTextIndex *index2Ptr,	/* Search stops here. Tag toggles at this
+				 * position *will* be returned. */
+    TkTextTag *tagPtr,		/* Tag to search for. NULL means search for
+				 * any tag. */
+    register TkTextSearch *searchPtr)
+				/* Where to store information about search's
+				 * progress. */
 {
     int offset;
-    TkTextIndex index0;		/* Last index of the tag */
-    TkTextIndex backOne;	/* One character before starting index */
-    TkTextSegment *seg0Ptr;	/* Last segment of the tag */
+    TkTextIndex index0;		/* Last index of the tag. */
+    TkTextIndex backOne;	/* One character before starting index. */
+    TkTextSegment *seg0Ptr;	/* Last segment of the tag. */
 
     /*
-     * Find the segment that contains the last toggle for the tag.  This
-     * may become the starting point in the search.
+     * Find the segment that contains the last toggle for the tag. This may
+     * become the starting point in the search.
      */
 
     seg0Ptr = FindTagEnd(index1Ptr->tree, tagPtr, &index0);
-    if (seg0Ptr == (TkTextSegment *) NULL) {
+    if (seg0Ptr == NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * Even though there are no toggles, the display code still
-	 * uses the search curIndex, so initialize that anyway.
+	 * Even though there are no toggles, the display code still uses the
+	 * search curIndex, so initialize that anyway.
 	 */
 
 	searchPtr->linesLeft = 0;
@@ -1787,28 +2778,29 @@ TkBTreeStartSearchBack(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, searchPtr)
 	searchPtr->curIndex = index0;
 	index1Ptr = &index0;
     } else {
-	TkTextIndexBackChars(index1Ptr, 1, &searchPtr->curIndex);
+	TkTextIndexBackChars(NULL, index1Ptr, 1, &searchPtr->curIndex,
+		COUNT_INDICES);
     }
     searchPtr->segPtr = NULL;
     searchPtr->nextPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&searchPtr->curIndex, &offset);
     searchPtr->curIndex.byteIndex -= offset;
 
     /*
-     * Adjust the end of the search so it does find toggles that are right
-     * at the second index specified by the user.
+     * Adjust the end of the search so it does find toggles that are right at
+     * the second index specified by the user.
      */
 
-    if ((TkBTreeLineIndex(index2Ptr->linePtr) == 0) &&
+    if ((TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, index2Ptr->linePtr) == 0) &&
 	    (index2Ptr->byteIndex == 0)) {
 	backOne = *index2Ptr;
-	searchPtr->lastPtr = NULL;	/* Signals special case for 1.0 */
+	searchPtr->lastPtr = NULL;	/* Signals special case for 1.0. */
     } else {
-	TkTextIndexBackChars(index2Ptr, 1, &backOne);
-	searchPtr->lastPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&backOne, (int *) NULL);
+	TkTextIndexBackChars(NULL, index2Ptr, 1, &backOne, COUNT_INDICES);
+	searchPtr->lastPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&backOne, NULL);
     }
     searchPtr->tagPtr = tagPtr;
-    searchPtr->linesLeft = TkBTreeLineIndex(index1Ptr->linePtr) + 1
-	    - TkBTreeLineIndex(backOne.linePtr);
+    searchPtr->linesLeft = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, index1Ptr->linePtr) + 1
+	    - TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, backOne.linePtr);
     searchPtr->allTags = (tagPtr == NULL);
     if (searchPtr->linesLeft == 1) {
 	/*
@@ -1828,18 +2820,18 @@ TkBTreeStartSearchBack(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, searchPtr)
  *
  * TkBTreeNextTag --
  *
- *	Once a tag search has begun, successive calls to this procedure
- *	return successive tag toggles.  Note:  it is NOT SAFE to call this
- *	procedure if characters have been inserted into or deleted from
- *	the B-tree since the call to TkBTreeStartSearch.
+ *	Once a tag search has begun, successive calls to this function return
+ *	successive tag toggles. Note: it is NOT SAFE to call this function if
+ *	characters have been inserted into or deleted from the B-tree since
+ *	the call to TkBTreeStartSearch.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is 1 if another toggle was found that met the
- *	criteria specified in the call to TkBTreeStartSearch;  in this
- *	case searchPtr->curIndex gives the toggle's position and
- *	searchPtr->curTagPtr points to its segment.  0 is returned if
- *	no more matching tag transitions were found; in this case
- *	searchPtr->curIndex is the same as searchPtr->stopIndex.
+ *	criteria specified in the call to TkBTreeStartSearch; in this case
+ *	searchPtr->curIndex gives the toggle's position and
+ *	searchPtr->curTagPtr points to its segment. 0 is returned if no more
+ *	matching tag transitions were found; in this case searchPtr->curIndex
+ *	is the same as searchPtr->stopIndex.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Information in *searchPtr is modified to update the state of the
@@ -1849,10 +2841,11 @@ TkBTreeStartSearchBack(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, searchPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkBTreeNextTag(searchPtr)
-    register TkTextSearch *searchPtr;	/* Information about search in
-					 * progress;  must have been set up by
-					 * call to TkBTreeStartSearch. */
+TkBTreeNextTag(
+    register TkTextSearch *searchPtr)
+				/* Information about search in progress; must
+				 * have been set up by call to
+				 * TkBTreeStartSearch. */
 {
     register TkTextSegment *segPtr;
     register Node *nodePtr;
@@ -1863,9 +2856,9 @@ TkBTreeNextTag(searchPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The outermost loop iterates over lines that may potentially contain
-     * a relevant tag transition, starting from the current segment in
-     * the current line.
+     * The outermost loop iterates over lines that may potentially contain a
+     * relevant tag transition, starting from the current segment in the
+     * current line.
      */
 
     segPtr = searchPtr->nextPtr;
@@ -1889,11 +2882,10 @@ TkBTreeNextTag(searchPtr)
 	    }
 	    searchPtr->curIndex.byteIndex += segPtr->size;
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
 	 * See if there are more lines associated with the current parent
-	 * node.  If so, go back to the top of the loop to search the next
-	 * one.
+	 * node. If so, go back to the top of the loop to search the next one.
 	 */
 
 	nodePtr = searchPtr->curIndex.linePtr->parentPtr;
@@ -1910,14 +2902,14 @@ TkBTreeNextTag(searchPtr)
 	if (nodePtr == searchPtr->tagPtr->tagRootPtr) {
 	    goto searchOver;
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
 	 * Search across and up through the B-tree's node hierarchy looking
 	 * for the next node that has a relevant tag transition somewhere in
-	 * its subtree.  Be sure to update linesLeft as we skip over large
+	 * its subtree. Be sure to update linesLeft as we skip over large
 	 * chunks of lines.
 	 */
-    
+
 	while (1) {
 	    while (nodePtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
 		if (nodePtr->parentPtr == NULL ||
@@ -1936,14 +2928,14 @@ TkBTreeNextTag(searchPtr)
 	    }
 	    searchPtr->linesLeft -= nodePtr->numLines;
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
 	 * At this point we've found a subtree that has a relevant tag
-	 * transition.  Now search down (and across) through that subtree
-	 * to find the first level-0 node that has a relevant tag transition.
+	 * transition. Now search down (and across) through that subtree to
+	 * find the first level-0 node that has a relevant tag transition.
 	 */
-    
-	gotNodeWithTag:
+
+    gotNodeWithTag:
 	while (nodePtr->level > 0) {
 	    for (nodePtr = nodePtr->children.nodePtr; ;
 		    nodePtr = nodePtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -1951,21 +2943,25 @@ TkBTreeNextTag(searchPtr)
 			summaryPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr) {
 		    if ((searchPtr->allTags)
 			    || (summaryPtr->tagPtr == searchPtr->tagPtr)) {
+			/*
+			 * Would really like a multi-level continue here...
+			 */
+
 			goto nextChild;
 		    }
 		}
 		searchPtr->linesLeft -= nodePtr->numLines;
 		if (nodePtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
-		    panic("TkBTreeNextTag found incorrect tag summary info.");
+		    Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeNextTag found incorrect tag summary info.");
 		}
 	    }
-	    nextChild:
+	nextChild:
 	    continue;
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
 	 * Now we're down to a level-0 node that contains a line that contains
-	 * a relevant tag transition.  Set up line information and go back to
+	 * a relevant tag transition. Set up line information and go back to
 	 * the beginning of the loop to search through lines.
 	 */
 
@@ -1978,7 +2974,7 @@ TkBTreeNextTag(searchPtr)
 	continue;
     }
 
-    searchOver:
+  searchOver:
     searchPtr->linesLeft = 0;
     searchPtr->segPtr = NULL;
     return 0;
@@ -1989,19 +2985,18 @@ TkBTreeNextTag(searchPtr)
  *
  * TkBTreePrevTag --
  *
- *	Once a tag search has begun, successive calls to this procedure
- *	return successive tag toggles in the reverse direction.
- *	Note:  it is NOT SAFE to call this
- *	procedure if characters have been inserted into or deleted from
- *	the B-tree since the call to TkBTreeStartSearch.
+ *	Once a tag search has begun, successive calls to this function return
+ *	successive tag toggles in the reverse direction. Note: it is NOT SAFE
+ *	to call this function if characters have been inserted into or deleted
+ *	from the B-tree since the call to TkBTreeStartSearch.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is 1 if another toggle was found that met the
- *	criteria specified in the call to TkBTreeStartSearch;  in this
- *	case searchPtr->curIndex gives the toggle's position and
- *	searchPtr->curTagPtr points to its segment.  0 is returned if
- *	no more matching tag transitions were found; in this case
- *	searchPtr->curIndex is the same as searchPtr->stopIndex.
+ *	criteria specified in the call to TkBTreeStartSearch; in this case
+ *	searchPtr->curIndex gives the toggle's position and
+ *	searchPtr->curTagPtr points to its segment. 0 is returned if no more
+ *	matching tag transitions were found; in this case searchPtr->curIndex
+ *	is the same as searchPtr->stopIndex.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Information in *searchPtr is modified to update the state of the
@@ -2011,43 +3006,46 @@ TkBTreeNextTag(searchPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkBTreePrevTag(searchPtr)
-    register TkTextSearch *searchPtr;	/* Information about search in
-					 * progress;  must have been set up by
-					 * call to TkBTreeStartSearch. */
+TkBTreePrevTag(
+    register TkTextSearch *searchPtr)
+				/* Information about search in progress; must
+				 * have been set up by call to
+				 * TkBTreeStartSearch. */
 {
     register TkTextSegment *segPtr, *prevPtr;
     register TkTextLine *linePtr, *prevLinePtr;
     register Node *nodePtr, *node2Ptr, *prevNodePtr;
     register Summary *summaryPtr;
-    int byteIndex;
-    int pastLast;			/* Saw last marker during scan */
-    int linesSkipped;
+    int byteIndex, linesSkipped;
+    int pastLast;		/* Saw last marker during scan. */
 
     if (searchPtr->linesLeft <= 0) {
 	goto searchOver;
     }
 
     /*
-     * The outermost loop iterates over lines that may potentially contain
-     * a relevant tag transition, starting from the current segment in
-     * the current line.  "nextPtr" is maintained as the last segment in
-     * a line that we can look at. 
+     * The outermost loop iterates over lines that may potentially contain a
+     * relevant tag transition, starting from the current segment in the
+     * current line. "nextPtr" is maintained as the last segment in a line
+     * that we can look at.
      */
 
     while (1) {
 	/*
 	 * Check for the last toggle before the current segment on this line.
 	 */
+
 	byteIndex = 0;
 	if (searchPtr->lastPtr == NULL) {
-	    /* 
+	    /*
 	     * Search back to the very beginning, so pastLast is irrelevent.
 	     */
-	    pastLast = 1; 
+
+	    pastLast = 1;
 	} else {
 	    pastLast = 0;
 	}
+
 	for (prevPtr = NULL, segPtr = searchPtr->curIndex.linePtr->segPtr ;
 		segPtr != NULL && segPtr != searchPtr->nextPtr;
 		segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -2059,7 +3057,8 @@ TkBTreePrevTag(searchPtr)
 		searchPtr->curIndex.byteIndex = byteIndex;
 	    }
 	    if (segPtr == searchPtr->lastPtr) {
-	        prevPtr = NULL;   /* Segments earlier than last don't count */
+		prevPtr = NULL;		/* Segments earlier than last don't
+					 * count. */
 		pastLast = 1;
 	    }
 	    byteIndex += segPtr->size;
@@ -2067,9 +3066,10 @@ TkBTreePrevTag(searchPtr)
 	if (prevPtr != NULL) {
 	    if (searchPtr->linesLeft == 1 && !pastLast) {
 		/*
-		 * We found a segment that is before the stopping index.
-		 * Note that it is OK if prevPtr == lastPtr.
+		 * We found a segment that is before the stopping index. Note
+		 * that it is OK if prevPtr == lastPtr.
 		 */
+
 		goto searchOver;
 	    }
 	    searchPtr->segPtr = prevPtr;
@@ -2077,7 +3077,7 @@ TkBTreePrevTag(searchPtr)
 	    searchPtr->tagPtr = prevPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr;
 	    return 1;
 	}
-    
+
 	searchPtr->linesLeft--;
 	if (searchPtr->linesLeft <= 0) {
 	    goto searchOver;
@@ -2085,7 +3085,7 @@ TkBTreePrevTag(searchPtr)
 
 	/*
 	 * See if there are more lines associated with the current parent
-	 * node.  If so, go back to the top of the loop to search the previous
+	 * node. If so, go back to the top of the loop to search the previous
 	 * one.
 	 */
 
@@ -2103,17 +3103,17 @@ TkBTreePrevTag(searchPtr)
 	if (nodePtr == searchPtr->tagPtr->tagRootPtr) {
 	    goto searchOver;
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
 	 * Search across and up through the B-tree's node hierarchy looking
-	 * for the previous node that has a relevant tag transition somewhere in
-	 * its subtree.  The search and line counting is trickier with/out
-	 * back pointers. We'll scan all the nodes under a parent up to
-	 * the current node, searching all of them for tag state.  The last
-	 * one we find, if any, is recorded in prevNodePtr, and any nodes
-	 * past prevNodePtr that don't have tag state increment linesSkipped.
+	 * for the previous node that has a relevant tag transition somewhere
+	 * in its subtree. The search and line counting is trickier with/out
+	 * back pointers. We'll scan all the nodes under a parent up to the
+	 * current node, searching all of them for tag state. The last one we
+	 * find, if any, is recorded in prevNodePtr, and any nodes past
+	 * prevNodePtr that don't have tag state increment linesSkipped.
 	 */
-    
+
 	while (1) {
 	    for (prevNodePtr = NULL, linesSkipped = 0,
 		    node2Ptr = nodePtr->parentPtr->children.nodePtr ;
@@ -2129,7 +3129,7 @@ TkBTreePrevTag(searchPtr)
 		}
 		linesSkipped += node2Ptr->numLines;
 
-		keepLooking:
+	    keepLooking:
 		continue;
 	    }
 	    if (prevNodePtr != NULL) {
@@ -2143,14 +3143,14 @@ TkBTreePrevTag(searchPtr)
 		goto searchOver;
 	    }
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
 	 * At this point we've found a subtree that has a relevant tag
-	 * transition.  Now search down (and across) through that subtree
-	 * to find the last level-0 node that has a relevant tag transition.
+	 * transition. Now search down (and across) through that subtree to
+	 * find the last level-0 node that has a relevant tag transition.
 	 */
-    
-	gotNodeWithTag:
+
+    gotNodeWithTag:
 	while (nodePtr->level > 0) {
 	    for (linesSkipped = 0, prevNodePtr = NULL,
 		    nodePtr = nodePtr->children.nodePtr; nodePtr != NULL ;
@@ -2166,20 +3166,20 @@ TkBTreePrevTag(searchPtr)
 		}
 		linesSkipped += nodePtr->numLines;
 
-		keepLooking2:
+	    keepLooking2:
 		continue;
 	    }
 	    if (prevNodePtr == NULL) {
-		panic("TkBTreePrevTag found incorrect tag summary info.");
+		Tcl_Panic("TkBTreePrevTag found incorrect tag summary info.");
 	    }
 	    searchPtr->linesLeft -= linesSkipped;
 	    nodePtr = prevNodePtr;
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
 	 * Now we're down to a level-0 node that contains a line that contains
-	 * a relevant tag transition.  Set up line information and go back to
-	 * the beginning of the loop to search through lines.  We start with
+	 * a relevant tag transition. Set up line information and go back to
+	 * the beginning of the loop to search through lines. We start with
 	 * the last line below the node.
 	 */
 
@@ -2196,7 +3196,7 @@ TkBTreePrevTag(searchPtr)
 	continue;
     }
 
-    searchOver:
+  searchOver:
     searchPtr->linesLeft = 0;
     searchPtr->segPtr = NULL;
     return 0;
@@ -2210,8 +3210,8 @@ TkBTreePrevTag(searchPtr)
  *	Determine whether a particular character has a particular tag.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if the given tag is in effect at the
- *	character given by linePtr and ch, and 0 otherwise.
+ *	The return value is 1 if the given tag is in effect at the character
+ *	given by linePtr and ch, and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2220,10 +3220,10 @@ TkBTreePrevTag(searchPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkBTreeCharTagged(indexPtr, tagPtr)
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;		/* Indicates a character position at
-					 * which to check for a tag. */
-    TkTextTag *tagPtr;			/* Tag of interest. */
+TkBTreeCharTagged(
+    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr,/* Indicates a character position at which to
+				 * check for a tag. */
+    TkTextTag *tagPtr)		/* Tag of interest. */
 {
     register Node *nodePtr;
     register TkTextLine *siblingLinePtr;
@@ -2231,10 +3231,10 @@ TkBTreeCharTagged(indexPtr, tagPtr)
     TkTextSegment *toggleSegPtr;
     int toggles, index;
 
-    /* 
-     * Check for toggles for the tag in indexPtr's line but before
-     * indexPtr.  If there is one, its type indicates whether or
-     * not the character is tagged.
+    /*
+     * Check for toggles for the tag in indexPtr's line but before indexPtr.
+     * If there is one, its type indicates whether or not the character is
+     * tagged.
      */
 
     toggleSegPtr = NULL;
@@ -2252,9 +3252,8 @@ TkBTreeCharTagged(indexPtr, tagPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * No toggle in this line.  Look for toggles for the tag in lines
-     * that are predecessors of indexPtr->linePtr but under the same
-     * level-0 node.
+     * No toggle in this line. Look for toggles for the tag in lines that are
+     * predecessors of indexPtr->linePtr but under the same level-0 node.
      */
 
     for (siblingLinePtr = indexPtr->linePtr->parentPtr->children.linePtr;
@@ -2274,9 +3273,9 @@ TkBTreeCharTagged(indexPtr, tagPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * No toggle in this node.  Scan upwards through the ancestors of
-     * this node, counting the number of toggles of the given tag in
-     * siblings that precede that node.
+     * No toggle in this node. Scan upwards through the ancestors of this
+     * node, counting the number of toggles of the given tag in siblings that
+     * precede that node.
      */
 
     toggles = 0;
@@ -2285,7 +3284,7 @@ TkBTreeCharTagged(indexPtr, tagPtr)
 	register Node *siblingPtr;
 	register Summary *summaryPtr;
 
-	for (siblingPtr = nodePtr->parentPtr->children.nodePtr; 
+	for (siblingPtr = nodePtr->parentPtr->children.nodePtr;
 		siblingPtr != nodePtr; siblingPtr = siblingPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    for (summaryPtr = siblingPtr->summaryPtr; summaryPtr != NULL;
 		    summaryPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -2300,8 +3299,8 @@ TkBTreeCharTagged(indexPtr, tagPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * An odd number of toggles means that the tag is present at the
-     * given point.
+     * An odd number of toggles means that the tag is present at the given
+     * point.
      */
 
     return toggles & 1;
@@ -2312,17 +3311,17 @@ TkBTreeCharTagged(indexPtr, tagPtr)
  *
  * TkBTreeGetTags --
  *
- *	Return information about all of the tags that are associated
- *	with a particular character in a B-tree of text.
+ *	Return information about all of the tags that are associated with a
+ *	particular character in a B-tree of text.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a malloc-ed array containing pointers to
- *	information for each of the tags that is associated with
- *	the character at the position given by linePtr and ch.  The
- *	word at *numTagsPtr is filled in with the number of pointers
- *	in the array.  It is up to the caller to free the array by
- *	passing it to free.  If there are no tags at the given character
- *	then a NULL pointer is returned and *numTagsPtr will be set to 0.
+ *	information for each of the tags that is associated with the character
+ *	at the position given by linePtr and ch. The word at *numTagsPtr is
+ *	filled in with the number of pointers in the array. It is up to the
+ *	caller to free the array by passing it to free. If there are no tags
+ *	at the given character then a NULL pointer is returned and *numTagsPtr
+ *	will be set to 0.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2332,38 +3331,54 @@ TkBTreeCharTagged(indexPtr, tagPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 TkTextTag **
-TkBTreeGetTags(indexPtr, numTagsPtr)
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Indicates a particular position in
-				 * the B-tree. */
-    int *numTagsPtr;		/* Store number of tags found at this
+TkBTreeGetTags(
+    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr,/* Indicates a particular position in the
+				 * B-tree. */
+    const TkText *textPtr,	/* If non-NULL, then only return tags for this
+				 * text widget (when there are peer
+				 * widgets). */
+    int *numTagsPtr)		/* Store number of tags found at this
 				 * location. */
 {
     register Node *nodePtr;
     register TkTextLine *siblingLinePtr;
     register TkTextSegment *segPtr;
+    TkTextLine *linePtr;
     int src, dst, index;
     TagInfo tagInfo;
 #define NUM_TAG_INFOS 10
 
     tagInfo.numTags = 0;
     tagInfo.arraySize = NUM_TAG_INFOS;
-    tagInfo.tagPtrs = (TkTextTag **) ckalloc((unsigned)
-	    NUM_TAG_INFOS*sizeof(TkTextTag *));
-    tagInfo.counts = (int *) ckalloc((unsigned)
-	    NUM_TAG_INFOS*sizeof(int));
+    tagInfo.tagPtrs = (TkTextTag **)
+	    ckalloc((unsigned) NUM_TAG_INFOS * sizeof(TkTextTag *));
+    tagInfo.counts = (int *)
+	    ckalloc((unsigned) NUM_TAG_INFOS * sizeof(int));
 
     /*
-     * Record tag toggles within the line of indexPtr but preceding
-     * indexPtr.
+     * Record tag toggles within the line of indexPtr but preceding indexPtr.
      */
 
-    for (index = 0, segPtr = indexPtr->linePtr->segPtr;
-	    (index + segPtr->size) <= indexPtr->byteIndex;
-	    index += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+    linePtr = indexPtr->linePtr;
+    index = 0;
+    segPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
+    while ((index + segPtr->size) <= indexPtr->byteIndex) {
 	if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)
 		|| (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)) {
 	    IncCount(segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr, 1, &tagInfo);
 	}
+	index += segPtr->size;
+	segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
+
+	if (segPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Two logical lines merged into one display line through eliding
+	     * of a newline.
+	     */
+
+	    linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, linePtr);
+	    segPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
+	}
     }
 
     /*
@@ -2384,8 +3399,8 @@ TkBTreeGetTags(indexPtr, numTagsPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * For each node in the ancestry of this line, record tag toggles
-     * for all siblings that precede that node.
+     * For each node in the ancestry of this line, record tag toggles for all
+     * siblings that precede that node.
      */
 
     for (nodePtr = indexPtr->linePtr->parentPtr; nodePtr->parentPtr != NULL;
@@ -2393,7 +3408,7 @@ TkBTreeGetTags(indexPtr, numTagsPtr)
 	register Node *siblingPtr;
 	register Summary *summaryPtr;
 
-	for (siblingPtr = nodePtr->parentPtr->children.nodePtr; 
+	for (siblingPtr = nodePtr->parentPtr->children.nodePtr;
 		siblingPtr != nodePtr; siblingPtr = siblingPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    for (summaryPtr = siblingPtr->summaryPtr; summaryPtr != NULL;
 		    summaryPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -2406,15 +3421,20 @@ TkBTreeGetTags(indexPtr, numTagsPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Go through the tag information and squash out all of the tags
-     * that have even toggle counts (these tags exist before the point
-     * of interest, but not at the desired character itself).
+     * Go through the tag information and squash out all of the tags that have
+     * even toggle counts (these tags exist before the point of interest, but
+     * not at the desired character itself). Also squash out all tags that
+     * don't belong to the requested widget.
      */
 
     for (src = 0, dst = 0; src < tagInfo.numTags; src++) {
 	if (tagInfo.counts[src] & 1) {
-	    tagInfo.tagPtrs[dst] = tagInfo.tagPtrs[src];
-	    dst++;
+	    const TkText *tagTextPtr = tagInfo.tagPtrs[src]->textPtr;
+
+	    if (tagTextPtr==NULL || textPtr==NULL || tagTextPtr==textPtr) {
+		tagInfo.tagPtrs[dst] = tagInfo.tagPtrs[src];
+		dst++;
+	    }
 	}
     }
     *numTagsPtr = dst;
@@ -2432,14 +3452,25 @@ TkBTreeGetTags(indexPtr, numTagsPtr)
  * TkTextIsElided --
  *
  *	Special case to just return information about elided attribute.
- *	Specialized from TkBTreeGetTags(indexPtr, numTagsPtr)
- *	and GetStyle(textPtr, indexPtr).
- *	Just need to keep track of invisibility settings for each priority,
- *	pick highest one active at end
+ *	Specialized from TkBTreeGetTags(indexPtr, textPtr, numTagsPtr) and
+ *	GetStyle(textPtr, indexPtr). Just need to keep track of invisibility
+ *	settings for each priority, pick highest one active at end.
+ *
+ *	Note that this returns all elide information up to and including the
+ *	given index (quite obviously). However, this does mean that if
+ *	indexPtr is a line-start and one then iterates from the beginning of
+ *	that line forwards, one will actually revisit the segPtrs of size zero
+ *	(for tag toggling, for example) which have already been seen here.
+ *
+ *	For this reason we fill in the fields 'segPtr' and 'segOffset' of
+ *	elideInfo, enabling our caller easily to calculate incremental changes
+ *	from where we left off.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns whether this text should be elided or not.
  *
+ *	Optionally returns more detailed information in elideInfo.
+ *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
@@ -2448,93 +3479,129 @@ TkBTreeGetTags(indexPtr, numTagsPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 int
-TkTextIsElided(textPtr, indexPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information about text widget. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* The character in the text for which
-				 * display information is wanted. */
+TkTextIsElided(
+    const TkText *textPtr,	/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    const TkTextIndex *indexPtr,/* The character in the text for which display
+				 * information is wanted. */
+    TkTextElideInfo *elideInfo)	/* NULL or a pointer to a structure in which
+				 * indexPtr's elide state will be stored and
+				 * returned. */
 {
-#define LOTSA_TAGS 1000
-    int elide = 0;		/* if nobody says otherwise, it's visible */
-
-    int deftagCnts[LOTSA_TAGS];
-    int *tagCnts = deftagCnts;
-    TkTextTag *deftagPtrs[LOTSA_TAGS];
-    TkTextTag **tagPtrs = deftagPtrs;
-    int numTags = textPtr->numTags;
     register Node *nodePtr;
     register TkTextLine *siblingLinePtr;
     register TkTextSegment *segPtr;
-    register TkTextTag *tagPtr = NULL; /* silence gcc 4 warning */
+    register TkTextTag *tagPtr = NULL;
     register int i, index;
+    register TkTextElideInfo *infoPtr;
+    TkTextLine *linePtr;
+    int elide;
 
-	/* almost always avoid malloc, so stay out of system calls */
-    if (LOTSA_TAGS < numTags) {
-	tagCnts = (int *)ckalloc((unsigned)sizeof(int) * numTags);
-	tagPtrs = (TkTextTag **)ckalloc((unsigned)sizeof(TkTextTag *) * numTags);
+    if (elideInfo == NULL) {
+	infoPtr = (TkTextElideInfo *)
+		ckalloc((unsigned) sizeof(TkTextElideInfo));
+    } else {
+	infoPtr = elideInfo;
     }
- 
-    for (i=0; i<numTags; i++) {
-	tagCnts[i] = 0;
+
+    infoPtr->elide = 0;		/* If nobody says otherwise, it's visible. */
+    infoPtr->tagCnts = infoPtr->deftagCnts;
+    infoPtr->tagPtrs = infoPtr->deftagPtrs;
+    infoPtr->numTags = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags;
+
+    /*
+     * Almost always avoid malloc, so stay out of system calls.
+     */
+
+    if (LOTSA_TAGS < infoPtr->numTags) {
+	infoPtr->tagCnts = (int *)
+		ckalloc((unsigned) sizeof(int) * infoPtr->numTags);
+	infoPtr->tagPtrs = (TkTextTag **)
+		ckalloc((unsigned) sizeof(TkTextTag *) * infoPtr->numTags);
+    }
+
+    for (i=0; i<infoPtr->numTags; i++) {
+	infoPtr->tagCnts[i] = 0;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Record tag toggles within the line of indexPtr but preceding
-     * indexPtr.
+     * Record tag toggles within the line of indexPtr but preceding indexPtr.
      */
 
-    for (index = 0, segPtr = indexPtr->linePtr->segPtr;
-	 (index + segPtr->size) <= indexPtr->byteIndex;
-	 index += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+    index = 0;
+    linePtr = indexPtr->linePtr;
+    segPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
+    while ((index + segPtr->size) <= indexPtr->byteIndex) {
 	if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)
 		|| (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)) {
 	    tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr;
 	    if (tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
-		tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr;
-		tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++;
+		infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr;
+		infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++;
 	    }
 	}
+
+	index += segPtr->size;
+	segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
+	if (segPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Two logical lines merged into one display line through eliding
+	     * of a newline.
+	     */
+
+	    linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, linePtr);
+	    segPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
+	}
     }
 
     /*
+     * Store the first segPtr we haven't examined completely so that our
+     * caller knows where to start.
+     */
+
+    infoPtr->segPtr = segPtr;
+    infoPtr->segOffset = index;
+
+    /*
      * Record toggles for tags in lines that are predecessors of
      * indexPtr->linePtr but under the same level-0 node.
      */
 
     for (siblingLinePtr = indexPtr->linePtr->parentPtr->children.linePtr;
-	 siblingLinePtr != indexPtr->linePtr;
-	 siblingLinePtr = siblingLinePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    siblingLinePtr != indexPtr->linePtr;
+	    siblingLinePtr = siblingLinePtr->nextPtr) {
 	for (segPtr = siblingLinePtr->segPtr; segPtr != NULL;
-	     segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+		segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)
 		    || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)) {
 		tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr;
 		if (tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
-		    tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr;
-		    tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++;
+		    infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr;
+		    infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++;
 		}
 	    }
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * For each node in the ancestry of this line, record tag toggles
-     * for all siblings that precede that node.
+     * For each node in the ancestry of this line, record tag toggles for all
+     * siblings that precede that node.
      */
 
     for (nodePtr = indexPtr->linePtr->parentPtr; nodePtr->parentPtr != NULL;
-	 nodePtr = nodePtr->parentPtr) {
+	    nodePtr = nodePtr->parentPtr) {
 	register Node *siblingPtr;
 	register Summary *summaryPtr;
 
-	for (siblingPtr = nodePtr->parentPtr->children.nodePtr; 
-	     siblingPtr != nodePtr; siblingPtr = siblingPtr->nextPtr) {
+	for (siblingPtr = nodePtr->parentPtr->children.nodePtr;
+		siblingPtr != nodePtr; siblingPtr = siblingPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    for (summaryPtr = siblingPtr->summaryPtr; summaryPtr != NULL;
-		 summaryPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr) {
+		    summaryPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr) {
 		if (summaryPtr->toggleCount & 1) {
 		    tagPtr = summaryPtr->tagPtr;
 		    if (tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
-			tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr;
-			tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] += summaryPtr->toggleCount;
+			infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr;
+			infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] +=
+				summaryPtr->toggleCount;
 		    }
 		}
 	    }
@@ -2542,32 +3609,47 @@ TkTextIsElided(textPtr, indexPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Now traverse from highest priority to lowest, 
-     * take elided value from first odd count (= on)
+     * Now traverse from highest priority to lowest, take elided value from
+     * first odd count (= on).
      */
 
-    for (i = numTags-1; i >=0; i--) {
-	if (tagCnts[i] & 1) {
-	    /* who would make the selection elided? */
-	    if (
-#ifndef MAC_OSX_TK
-		    !TkpAlwaysShowSelection(textPtr->tkwin)
-#else
+    infoPtr->elidePriority = -1;
+    for (i = infoPtr->numTags-1; i >=0; i--) {
+	if (infoPtr->tagCnts[i] & 1) {
+	    /*
+	     * Who would make the selection elided?
+	     */
+
+	    if ((tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr)
+		    && !(textPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)
+		    && (textPtr->inactiveSelBorder == NULL
+#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
 		    /* Don't show inactive selection in disabled widgets. */
-		    textPtr->state == TK_STATE_DISABLED
+		    || textPtr->state == TK_TEXT_STATE_DISABLED
 #endif
-		    && (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr)
-		    && !(textPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)) {
+	    )) {
 		continue;
 	    }
-	    elide = tagPtrs[i]->elide;
+	    infoPtr->elide = infoPtr->tagPtrs[i]->elide;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Note: i == infoPtr->tagPtrs[i]->priority
+	     */
+
+	    infoPtr->elidePriority = i;
 	    break;
 	}
     }
 
-    if (LOTSA_TAGS < numTags) {
-	ckfree((char *) tagCnts);
-	ckfree((char *) tagPtrs);
+    elide = infoPtr->elide;
+
+    if (elideInfo == NULL) {
+	if (LOTSA_TAGS < infoPtr->numTags) {
+	    ckfree((char *) infoPtr->tagCnts);
+	    ckfree((char *) infoPtr->tagPtrs);
+	}
+
+	ckfree((char *) infoPtr);
     }
 
     return elide;
@@ -2576,27 +3658,55 @@ TkTextIsElided(textPtr, indexPtr)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * TkTextFreeElideInfo --
+ *
+ *	This is a utility function used to free up any memory allocated by the
+ *	TkTextIsElided function above.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Memory may be freed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkTextFreeElideInfo(
+    TkTextElideInfo *elideInfo)	/* Free any allocated memory in this
+				 * structure. */
+{
+    if (LOTSA_TAGS < elideInfo->numTags) {
+	ckfree((char *) elideInfo->tagCnts);
+	ckfree((char *) elideInfo->tagPtrs);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * IncCount --
  *
- *	This is a utility procedure used by TkBTreeGetTags.  It
- *	increments the count for a particular tag, adding a new
- *	entry for that tag if there wasn't one previously.
+ *	This is a utility function used by TkBTreeGetTags. It increments the
+ *	count for a particular tag, adding a new entry for that tag if there
+ *	wasn't one previously.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The information at *tagInfoPtr may be modified, and the arrays
- *	may be reallocated to make them larger.
+ *	The information at *tagInfoPtr may be modified, and the arrays may be
+ *	reallocated to make them larger.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-IncCount(tagPtr, inc, tagInfoPtr)
-    TkTextTag *tagPtr;		/* Handle for tag. */
-    int inc;			/* Amount by which to increment tag count. */
-    TagInfo *tagInfoPtr;	/* Holds cumulative information about tags;
+IncCount(
+    TkTextTag *tagPtr,		/* Handle for tag. */
+    int inc,			/* Amount by which to increment tag count. */
+    TagInfo *tagInfoPtr)	/* Holds cumulative information about tags;
 				 * increment count here. */
 {
     register TkTextTag **tagPtrPtr;
@@ -2611,24 +3721,23 @@ IncCount(tagPtr, inc, tagInfoPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * There isn't currently an entry for this tag, so we have to
-     * make a new one.  If the arrays are full, then enlarge the
-     * arrays first.
+     * There isn't currently an entry for this tag, so we have to make a new
+     * one. If the arrays are full, then enlarge the arrays first.
      */
 
     if (tagInfoPtr->numTags == tagInfoPtr->arraySize) {
 	TkTextTag **newTags;
 	int *newCounts, newSize;
 
-	newSize = 2*tagInfoPtr->arraySize;
-	newTags = (TkTextTag **) ckalloc((unsigned)
-		(newSize*sizeof(TkTextTag *)));
-	memcpy((VOID *) newTags, (VOID *) tagInfoPtr->tagPtrs,
+	newSize = 2 * tagInfoPtr->arraySize;
+	newTags = (TkTextTag **)
+		ckalloc((unsigned) newSize * sizeof(TkTextTag *));
+	memcpy(newTags, tagInfoPtr->tagPtrs,
 		tagInfoPtr->arraySize * sizeof(TkTextTag *));
 	ckfree((char *) tagInfoPtr->tagPtrs);
 	tagInfoPtr->tagPtrs = newTags;
-	newCounts = (int *) ckalloc((unsigned) (newSize*sizeof(int)));
-	memcpy((VOID *) newCounts, (VOID *) tagInfoPtr->counts,
+	newCounts = (int *) ckalloc((unsigned) newSize * sizeof(int));
+	memcpy(newCounts, tagInfoPtr->counts,
 		tagInfoPtr->arraySize * sizeof(int));
 	ckfree((char *) tagInfoPtr->counts);
 	tagInfoPtr->counts = newCounts;
@@ -2645,22 +3754,22 @@ IncCount(tagPtr, inc, tagInfoPtr)
  *
  * TkBTreeCheck --
  *
- *	This procedure runs a set of consistency checks over a B-tree
- *	and panics if any inconsistencies are found.
+ *	This function runs a set of consistency checks over a B-tree and
+ *	panics if any inconsistencies are found.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If a structural defect is found, the procedure panics with an
- *	error message.
+ *	If a structural defect is found, the function panics with an error
+ *	message.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkBTreeCheck(tree)
-    TkTextBTree tree;		/* Tree to check. */
+TkBTreeCheck(
+    TkTextBTree tree)		/* Tree to check. */
 {
     BTree *treePtr = (BTree *) tree;
     register Summary *summaryPtr;
@@ -2675,27 +3784,28 @@ TkBTreeCheck(tree)
     /*
      * Make sure that the tag toggle counts and the tag root pointers are OK.
      */
-    for (entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&treePtr->textPtr->tagTable, &search);
+
+    for (entryPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&treePtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable,&search);
 	    entryPtr != NULL ; entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
 	nodePtr = tagPtr->tagRootPtr;
-	if (nodePtr == (Node *) NULL) {
+	if (nodePtr == NULL) {
 	    if (tagPtr->toggleCount != 0) {
-		panic("TkBTreeCheck found \"%s\" with toggles (%d) but no root",
-		    tagPtr->name, tagPtr->toggleCount);
+		Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeCheck found \"%s\" with toggles (%d) but no root",
+			tagPtr->name, tagPtr->toggleCount);
 	    }
-	    continue;		/* no ranges for the tag */
+	    continue;		/* No ranges for the tag. */
 	} else if (tagPtr->toggleCount == 0) {
-	    panic("TkBTreeCheck found root for \"%s\" with no toggles",
+	    Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeCheck found root for \"%s\" with no toggles",
 		    tagPtr->name);
 	} else if (tagPtr->toggleCount & 1) {
-	    panic("TkBTreeCheck found odd toggle count for \"%s\" (%d)",
+	    Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeCheck found odd toggle count for \"%s\" (%d)",
 		    tagPtr->name, tagPtr->toggleCount);
 	}
 	for (summaryPtr = nodePtr->summaryPtr; summaryPtr != NULL;
 		summaryPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (summaryPtr->tagPtr == tagPtr) {
-		panic("TkBTreeCheck found root node with summary info");
+		Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeCheck found root node with summary info");
 	    }
 	}
 	count = 0;
@@ -2723,25 +3833,25 @@ TkBTreeCheck(tree)
 	    }
 	}
 	if (count != tagPtr->toggleCount) {
-	    panic("TkBTreeCheck toggleCount (%d) wrong for \"%s\" should be (%d)",
-		tagPtr->toggleCount, tagPtr->name, count);
+	    Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeCheck toggleCount (%d) wrong for \"%s\" should be (%d)",
+		    tagPtr->toggleCount, tagPtr->name, count);
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Call a recursive procedure to do the main body of checks.
+     * Call a recursive function to do the main body of checks.
      */
 
     nodePtr = treePtr->rootPtr;
-    CheckNodeConsistency(treePtr->rootPtr);
+    CheckNodeConsistency(treePtr->rootPtr, treePtr->pixelReferences);
 
     /*
-     * Make sure that there are at least two lines in the text and
-     * that the last line has no characters except a newline.
+     * Make sure that there are at least two lines in the text and that the
+     * last line has no characters except a newline.
      */
 
     if (nodePtr->numLines < 2) {
-	panic("TkBTreeCheck: less than 2 lines in tree");
+	Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeCheck: less than 2 lines in tree");
     }
     while (nodePtr->level > 0) {
 	nodePtr = nodePtr->children.nodePtr;
@@ -2758,25 +3868,24 @@ TkBTreeCheck(tree)
 	    || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextRightMarkType)
 	    || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextLeftMarkType)) {
 	/*
-	 * It's OK to toggle a tag off in the last line, but
-	 * not to start a new range.  It's also OK to have marks
-	 * in the last line.
+	 * It's OK to toggle a tag off in the last line, but not to start a
+	 * new range. It's also OK to have marks in the last line.
 	 */
 
 	segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
     }
     if (segPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType) {
-	panic("TkBTreeCheck: last line has bogus segment type");
+	Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeCheck: last line has bogus segment type");
     }
     if (segPtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
-	panic("TkBTreeCheck: last line has too many segments");
+	Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeCheck: last line has too many segments");
     }
     if (segPtr->size != 1) {
-	panic("TkBTreeCheck: last line has wrong # characters: %d",
+	Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeCheck: last line has wrong # characters: %d",
 		segPtr->size);
     }
     if ((segPtr->body.chars[0] != '\n') || (segPtr->body.chars[1] != 0)) {
-	panic("TkBTreeCheck: last line had bad value: %s",
+	Tcl_Panic("TkBTreeCheck: last line had bad value: %s",
 		segPtr->body.chars);
     }
 }
@@ -2786,54 +3895,66 @@ TkBTreeCheck(tree)
  *
  * CheckNodeConsistency --
  *
- *	This procedure is called as part of consistency checking for
- *	B-trees:  it checks several aspects of a node and also runs
- *	checks recursively on the node's children.
+ *	This function is called as part of consistency checking for B-trees:
+ *	it checks several aspects of a node and also runs checks recursively
+ *	on the node's children.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If anything suspicious is found in the tree structure, the
- *	procedure panics.
+ *	If anything suspicious is found in the tree structure, the function
+ *	panics.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-CheckNodeConsistency(nodePtr)
-    register Node *nodePtr;		/* Node whose subtree should be
-					 * checked. */
+CheckNodeConsistency(
+    register Node *nodePtr,	/* Node whose subtree should be checked. */
+    int references)		/* Number of referring widgets which have
+				 * pixel counts. */
 {
     register Node *childNodePtr;
     register Summary *summaryPtr, *summaryPtr2;
     register TkTextLine *linePtr;
     register TkTextSegment *segPtr;
-    int numChildren, numLines, toggleCount, minChildren;
+    int numChildren, numLines, toggleCount, minChildren, i;
+    int *numPixels;
+    int pixels[PIXEL_CLIENTS];
 
     if (nodePtr->parentPtr != NULL) {
 	minChildren = MIN_CHILDREN;
     } else if (nodePtr->level > 0) {
 	minChildren = 2;
-    } else  {
+    } else {
 	minChildren = 1;
     }
     if ((nodePtr->numChildren < minChildren)
 	    || (nodePtr->numChildren > MAX_CHILDREN)) {
-	panic("CheckNodeConsistency: bad child count (%d)",
+	Tcl_Panic("CheckNodeConsistency: bad child count (%d)",
 		nodePtr->numChildren);
     }
 
     numChildren = 0;
     numLines = 0;
+    if (references > PIXEL_CLIENTS) {
+	numPixels = (int *) ckalloc(sizeof(int) * references);
+    } else {
+	numPixels = pixels;
+    }
+    for (i = 0; i<references; i++) {
+	numPixels[i] = 0;
+    }
+
     if (nodePtr->level == 0) {
 	for (linePtr = nodePtr->children.linePtr; linePtr != NULL;
 		linePtr = linePtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (linePtr->parentPtr != nodePtr) {
-		panic("CheckNodeConsistency: line doesn't point to parent");
+		Tcl_Panic("CheckNodeConsistency: line doesn't point to parent");
 	    }
 	    if (linePtr->segPtr == NULL) {
-		panic("CheckNodeConsistency: line has no segments");
+		Tcl_Panic("CheckNodeConsistency: line has no segments");
 	    }
 	    for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; segPtr != NULL;
 		    segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -2844,27 +3965,30 @@ CheckNodeConsistency(nodePtr)
 			&& (segPtr->nextPtr != NULL)
 			&& (segPtr->nextPtr->size == 0)
 			&& (segPtr->nextPtr->typePtr->leftGravity)) {
-		    panic("CheckNodeConsistency: wrong segment order for gravity");
+		    Tcl_Panic("CheckNodeConsistency: wrong segment order for gravity");
 		}
 		if ((segPtr->nextPtr == NULL)
 			&& (segPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType)) {
-		    panic("CheckNodeConsistency: line ended with wrong type");
+		    Tcl_Panic("CheckNodeConsistency: line ended with wrong type");
 		}
 	    }
 	    numChildren++;
 	    numLines++;
+	    for (i = 0; i<references; i++) {
+		numPixels[i] += linePtr->pixels[2 * i];
+	    }
 	}
     } else {
 	for (childNodePtr = nodePtr->children.nodePtr; childNodePtr != NULL;
 		childNodePtr = childNodePtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (childNodePtr->parentPtr != nodePtr) {
-		panic("CheckNodeConsistency: node doesn't point to parent");
+		Tcl_Panic("CheckNodeConsistency: node doesn't point to parent");
 	    }
 	    if (childNodePtr->level != (nodePtr->level-1)) {
-		panic("CheckNodeConsistency: level mismatch (%d %d)",
+		Tcl_Panic("CheckNodeConsistency: level mismatch (%d %d)",
 			nodePtr->level, childNodePtr->level);
 	    }
-	    CheckNodeConsistency(childNodePtr);
+	    CheckNodeConsistency(childNodePtr, references);
 	    for (summaryPtr = childNodePtr->summaryPtr; summaryPtr != NULL;
 			summaryPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr) {
 		for (summaryPtr2 = nodePtr->summaryPtr; ;
@@ -2873,7 +3997,7 @@ CheckNodeConsistency(nodePtr)
 			if (summaryPtr->tagPtr->tagRootPtr == nodePtr) {
 			    break;
 			}
-			panic("CheckNodeConsistency: node tag \"%s\" not %s",
+			Tcl_Panic("CheckNodeConsistency: node tag \"%s\" not %s",
 				summaryPtr->tagPtr->name,
 				"present in parent summaries");
 		    }
@@ -2884,22 +4008,34 @@ CheckNodeConsistency(nodePtr)
 	    }
 	    numChildren++;
 	    numLines += childNodePtr->numLines;
+	    for (i = 0; i<references; i++) {
+		numPixels[i] += childNodePtr->numPixels[i];
+	    }
 	}
     }
     if (numChildren != nodePtr->numChildren) {
-	panic("CheckNodeConsistency: mismatch in numChildren (%d %d)",
+	Tcl_Panic("CheckNodeConsistency: mismatch in numChildren (%d %d)",
 		numChildren, nodePtr->numChildren);
     }
     if (numLines != nodePtr->numLines) {
-	panic("CheckNodeConsistency: mismatch in numLines (%d %d)",
+	Tcl_Panic("CheckNodeConsistency: mismatch in numLines (%d %d)",
 		numLines, nodePtr->numLines);
     }
+    for (i = 0; i<references; i++) {
+	if (numPixels[i] != nodePtr->numPixels[i]) {
+	    Tcl_Panic("CheckNodeConsistency: mismatch in numPixels (%d %d) for widget (%d)",
+		    numPixels[i], nodePtr->numPixels[i], i);
+	}
+    }
+    if (references > PIXEL_CLIENTS) {
+	ckfree((char *) numPixels);
+    }
 
     for (summaryPtr = nodePtr->summaryPtr; summaryPtr != NULL;
 	    summaryPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (summaryPtr->tagPtr->toggleCount == summaryPtr->toggleCount) {
-	    panic("CheckNodeConsistency: found unpruned root for \"%s\"",
-		summaryPtr->tagPtr->name);
+	    Tcl_Panic("CheckNodeConsistency: found unpruned root for \"%s\"",
+		    summaryPtr->tagPtr->name);
 	}
 	toggleCount = 0;
 	if (nodePtr->level == 0) {
@@ -2912,7 +4048,7 @@ CheckNodeConsistency(nodePtr)
 			continue;
 		    }
 		    if (segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr == summaryPtr->tagPtr) {
-			toggleCount ++;
+			toggleCount++;
 		    }
 		}
 	    }
@@ -2930,13 +4066,13 @@ CheckNodeConsistency(nodePtr)
 	    }
 	}
 	if (toggleCount != summaryPtr->toggleCount) {
-	    panic("CheckNodeConsistency: mismatch in toggleCount (%d %d)",
+	    Tcl_Panic("CheckNodeConsistency: mismatch in toggleCount (%d %d)",
 		    toggleCount, summaryPtr->toggleCount);
 	}
 	for (summaryPtr2 = summaryPtr->nextPtr; summaryPtr2 != NULL;
 		summaryPtr2 = summaryPtr2->nextPtr) {
 	    if (summaryPtr2->tagPtr == summaryPtr->tagPtr) {
-		panic("CheckNodeConsistency: duplicated node tag: %s",
+		Tcl_Panic("CheckNodeConsistency: duplicated node tag: %s",
 			summaryPtr->tagPtr->name);
 	    }
 	}
@@ -2948,9 +4084,9 @@ CheckNodeConsistency(nodePtr)
  *
  * Rebalance --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when a node of a B-tree appears to be
- *	out of balance (too many children, or too few).  It rebalances
- *	that node and all of its ancestors in the tree.
+ *	This function is called when a node of a B-tree appears to be out of
+ *	balance (too many children, or too few). It rebalances that node and
+ *	all of its ancestors in the tree.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2962,14 +4098,13 @@ CheckNodeConsistency(nodePtr)
  */
 
 static void
-Rebalance(treePtr, nodePtr)
-    BTree *treePtr;			/* Tree that is being rebalanced. */
-    register Node *nodePtr;		/* Node that may be out of balance. */
+Rebalance(
+    BTree *treePtr,		/* Tree that is being rebalanced. */
+    register Node *nodePtr)	/* Node that may be out of balance. */
 {
     /*
-     * Loop over the entire ancestral chain of the node, working up
-     * through the tree one node at a time until the root node has
-     * been processed.
+     * Loop over the entire ancestral chain of the node, working up through
+     * the tree one node at a time until the root node has been processed.
      */
 
     for ( ; nodePtr != NULL; nodePtr = nodePtr->parentPtr) {
@@ -2978,19 +4113,19 @@ Rebalance(treePtr, nodePtr)
 	int i;
 
 	/*
-	 * Check to see if the node has too many children.  If it does,
-	 * then split off all but the first MIN_CHILDREN into a separate
-	 * node following the original one.  Then repeat until the
-	 * node has a decent size.
+	 * Check to see if the node has too many children. If it does, then
+	 * split off all but the first MIN_CHILDREN into a separate node
+	 * following the original one. Then repeat until the node has a decent
+	 * size.
 	 */
 
 	if (nodePtr->numChildren > MAX_CHILDREN) {
 	    while (1) {
 		/*
-		 * If the node being split is the root node, then make a
-		 * new root node above it first.
+		 * If the node being split is the root node, then make a new
+		 * root node above it first.
 		 */
-    
+
 		if (nodePtr->parentPtr == NULL) {
 		    newPtr = (Node *) ckalloc(sizeof(Node));
 		    newPtr->parentPtr = NULL;
@@ -3000,10 +4135,20 @@ Rebalance(treePtr, nodePtr)
 		    newPtr->children.nodePtr = nodePtr;
 		    newPtr->numChildren = 1;
 		    newPtr->numLines = nodePtr->numLines;
-		    RecomputeNodeCounts(newPtr);
+		    newPtr->numPixels = (int *)
+			    ckalloc(sizeof(int) * treePtr->pixelReferences);
+		    for (i=0; i<treePtr->pixelReferences; i++) {
+			newPtr->numPixels[i] = nodePtr->numPixels[i];
+		    }
+		    RecomputeNodeCounts(treePtr, newPtr);
 		    treePtr->rootPtr = newPtr;
 		}
 		newPtr = (Node *) ckalloc(sizeof(Node));
+		newPtr->numPixels = (int *)
+			ckalloc(sizeof(int) * treePtr->pixelReferences);
+		for (i=0; i<treePtr->pixelReferences; i++) {
+		    newPtr->numPixels[i] = 0;
+		}
 		newPtr->parentPtr = nodePtr->parentPtr;
 		newPtr->nextPtr = nodePtr->nextPtr;
 		nodePtr->nextPtr = newPtr;
@@ -3027,11 +4172,11 @@ Rebalance(treePtr, nodePtr)
 		    newPtr->children.nodePtr = childPtr->nextPtr;
 		    childPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
 		}
-		RecomputeNodeCounts(nodePtr);
+		RecomputeNodeCounts(treePtr, nodePtr);
 		nodePtr->parentPtr->numChildren++;
 		nodePtr = newPtr;
 		if (nodePtr->numChildren <= MAX_CHILDREN) {
-		    RecomputeNodeCounts(nodePtr);
+		    RecomputeNodeCounts(treePtr, nodePtr);
 		    break;
 		}
 	    }
@@ -3039,16 +4184,16 @@ Rebalance(treePtr, nodePtr)
 
 	while (nodePtr->numChildren < MIN_CHILDREN) {
 	    register Node *otherPtr;
-	    Node *halfwayNodePtr = NULL;	/* Initialization needed only */
-	    TkTextLine *halfwayLinePtr = NULL;	/* to prevent cc warnings. */
+	    Node *halfwayNodePtr = NULL;       /* Initialization needed only */
+	    TkTextLine *halfwayLinePtr = NULL; /* to prevent cc warnings. */
 	    int totalChildren, firstChildren, i;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Too few children for this node.  If this is the root then,
-	     * it's OK for it to have less than MIN_CHILDREN children
-	     * as long as it's got at least two.  If it has only one
-	     * (and isn't at level 0), then chop the root node out of
-	     * the tree and use its child as the new root.
+	     * Too few children for this node. If this is the root then, it's
+	     * OK for it to have less than MIN_CHILDREN children as long as
+	     * it's got at least two. If it has only one (and isn't at level
+	     * 0), then chop the root node out of the tree and use its child
+	     * as the new root.
 	     */
 
 	    if (nodePtr->parentPtr == NULL) {
@@ -3062,8 +4207,8 @@ Rebalance(treePtr, nodePtr)
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Not the root.  Make sure that there are siblings to
-	     * balance with.
+	     * Not the root. Make sure that there are siblings to balance
+	     * with.
 	     */
 
 	    if (nodePtr->parentPtr->numChildren < 2) {
@@ -3072,8 +4217,8 @@ Rebalance(treePtr, nodePtr)
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Find a sibling neighbor to borrow from, and arrange for
-	     * nodePtr to be the earlier of the pair.
+	     * Find a sibling neighbor to borrow from, and arrange for nodePtr
+	     * to be the earlier of the pair.
 	     */
 
 	    if (nodePtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
@@ -3087,11 +4232,10 @@ Rebalance(treePtr, nodePtr)
 	    otherPtr = nodePtr->nextPtr;
 
 	    /*
-	     * We're going to either merge the two siblings together
-	     * into one node or redivide the children among them to
-	     * balance their loads.  As preparation, join their two
-	     * child lists into a single list and remember the half-way
-	     * point in the list.
+	     * We're going to either merge the two siblings together into one
+	     * node or redivide the children among them to balance their
+	     * loads. As preparation, join their two child lists into a single
+	     * list and remember the half-way point in the list.
 	     */
 
 	    totalChildren = nodePtr->numChildren + otherPtr->numChildren;
@@ -3142,7 +4286,7 @@ Rebalance(treePtr, nodePtr)
 	     */
 
 	    if (totalChildren <= MAX_CHILDREN) {
-		RecomputeNodeCounts(nodePtr);
+		RecomputeNodeCounts(treePtr, nodePtr);
 		nodePtr->nextPtr = otherPtr->nextPtr;
 		nodePtr->parentPtr->numChildren--;
 		DeleteSummaries(otherPtr->summaryPtr);
@@ -3151,8 +4295,8 @@ Rebalance(treePtr, nodePtr)
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * The siblings can't be merged, so just divide their
-	     * children evenly between them.
+	     * The siblings can't be merged, so just divide their children
+	     * evenly between them.
 	     */
 
 	    if (nodePtr->level == 0) {
@@ -3162,8 +4306,8 @@ Rebalance(treePtr, nodePtr)
 		otherPtr->children.nodePtr = halfwayNodePtr->nextPtr;
 		halfwayNodePtr->nextPtr = NULL;
 	    }
-	    RecomputeNodeCounts(nodePtr);
-	    RecomputeNodeCounts(otherPtr);
+	    RecomputeNodeCounts(treePtr, nodePtr);
+	    RecomputeNodeCounts(treePtr, otherPtr);
 	}
     }
 }
@@ -3173,37 +4317,38 @@ Rebalance(treePtr, nodePtr)
  *
  * RecomputeNodeCounts --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to recompute all the counts in a node
- *	(tags, child information, etc.) by scanning the information in
- *	its descendants.  This procedure is called during rebalancing
- *	when a node's child structure has changed.
+ *	This function is called to recompute all the counts in a node (tags,
+ *	child information, etc.) by scanning the information in its
+ *	descendants. This function is called during rebalancing when a node's
+ *	child structure has changed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The tag counts for nodePtr are modified to reflect its current
- *	child structure, as are its numChildren and numLines fields.
- *	Also, all of the childrens' parentPtr fields are made to point
- *	to nodePtr.
+ *	The tag counts for nodePtr are modified to reflect its current child
+ *	structure, as are its numChildren and numLines fields. Also, all of
+ *	the childrens' parentPtr fields are made to point to nodePtr.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-RecomputeNodeCounts(nodePtr)
-    register Node *nodePtr;		/* Node whose tag summary information
-					 * must be recomputed. */
+RecomputeNodeCounts(
+    register BTree *treePtr,	/* The whole B-tree. */
+    register Node *nodePtr)	/* Node whose tag summary information must be
+				 * recomputed. */
 {
     register Summary *summaryPtr, *summaryPtr2;
     register Node *childPtr;
     register TkTextLine *linePtr;
     register TkTextSegment *segPtr;
     TkTextTag *tagPtr;
+    int ref;
 
     /*
-     * Zero out all the existing counts for the node, but don't delete
-     * the existing Summary records (most of them will probably be reused).
+     * Zero out all the existing counts for the node, but don't delete the
+     * existing Summary records (most of them will probably be reused).
      */
 
     for (summaryPtr = nodePtr->summaryPtr; summaryPtr != NULL;
@@ -3212,11 +4357,13 @@ RecomputeNodeCounts(nodePtr)
     }
     nodePtr->numChildren = 0;
     nodePtr->numLines = 0;
+    for (ref = 0; ref<treePtr->pixelReferences; ref++) {
+	nodePtr->numPixels[ref] = 0;
+    }
 
     /*
-     * Scan through the children, adding the childrens' tag counts into
-     * the node's tag counts and adding new Summary structures if
-     * necessary.
+     * Scan through the children, adding the childrens' tag counts into the
+     * node's tag counts and adding new Summary structures if necessary.
      */
 
     if (nodePtr->level == 0) {
@@ -3224,6 +4371,9 @@ RecomputeNodeCounts(nodePtr)
 		linePtr = linePtr->nextPtr) {
 	    nodePtr->numChildren++;
 	    nodePtr->numLines++;
+	    for (ref = 0; ref<treePtr->pixelReferences; ref++) {
+		nodePtr->numPixels[ref] += linePtr->pixels[2 * ref];
+	    }
 	    linePtr->parentPtr = nodePtr;
 	    for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; segPtr != NULL;
 		    segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -3255,6 +4405,9 @@ RecomputeNodeCounts(nodePtr)
 		childPtr = childPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    nodePtr->numChildren++;
 	    nodePtr->numLines += childPtr->numLines;
+	    for (ref = 0; ref<treePtr->pixelReferences; ref++) {
+		nodePtr->numPixels[ref] += childPtr->numPixels[ref];
+	    }
 	    childPtr->parentPtr = nodePtr;
 	    for (summaryPtr2 = childPtr->summaryPtr; summaryPtr2 != NULL;
 		    summaryPtr2 = summaryPtr2->nextPtr) {
@@ -3280,19 +4433,20 @@ RecomputeNodeCounts(nodePtr)
     /*
      * Scan through the node's tag records again and delete any Summary
      * records that still have a zero count, or that have all the toggles.
-     * The node with the children that account for all the tags toggles
-     * have no summary information, and they become the tagRootPtr for the tag.
+     * The node with the children that account for all the tags toggles have
+     * no summary information, and they become the tagRootPtr for the tag.
      */
 
     summaryPtr2 = NULL;
     for (summaryPtr = nodePtr->summaryPtr; summaryPtr != NULL; ) {
-	if (summaryPtr->toggleCount > 0 && 
+	if (summaryPtr->toggleCount > 0 &&
 		summaryPtr->toggleCount < summaryPtr->tagPtr->toggleCount) {
 	    if (nodePtr->level == summaryPtr->tagPtr->tagRootPtr->level) {
 		/*
-		 * The tag's root node split and some toggles left.
-		 * The tag root must move up a level.
+		 * The tag's root node split and some toggles left. The tag
+		 * root must move up a level.
 		 */
+
 		summaryPtr->tagPtr->tagRootPtr = nodePtr->parentPtr;
 	    }
 	    summaryPtr2 = summaryPtr;
@@ -3301,9 +4455,10 @@ RecomputeNodeCounts(nodePtr)
 	}
 	if (summaryPtr->toggleCount == summaryPtr->tagPtr->toggleCount) {
 	    /*
-	     * A node merge has collected all the toggles under one node.
-	     * Push the root down to this level.
+	     * A node merge has collected all the toggles under one node. Push
+	     * the root down to this level.
 	     */
+
 	    summaryPtr->tagPtr->tagRootPtr = nodePtr;
 	}
 	if (summaryPtr2 != NULL) {
@@ -3323,13 +4478,13 @@ RecomputeNodeCounts(nodePtr)
  *
  * TkBTreeNumLines --
  *
- *	This procedure returns a count of the number of lines of
- *	text present in a given B-tree.
+ *	This function returns a count of the number of logical lines of text
+ *	present in a given B-tree.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a count of the number of usable lines
- *	in tree (i.e. it doesn't include the dummy line that is just
- * 	used to mark the end of the tree).
+ *	The return value is a count of the number of usable lines in tree
+ *	(i.e. it doesn't include the dummy line that is just used to mark the
+ *	end of the tree).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3338,11 +4493,53 @@ RecomputeNodeCounts(nodePtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkBTreeNumLines(tree)
-    TkTextBTree tree;			/* Information about tree. */
+TkBTreeNumLines(
+    TkTextBTree tree,		/* Information about tree. */
+    const TkText *textPtr)	/* Relative to this client of the B-tree. */
 {
     BTree *treePtr = (BTree *) tree;
-    return treePtr->rootPtr->numLines - 1;
+    int count;
+
+    if (textPtr != NULL && textPtr->end != NULL) {
+	count = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, textPtr->end);
+    } else {
+	count = treePtr->rootPtr->numLines - 1;
+    }
+    if (textPtr != NULL && textPtr->start != NULL) {
+	count -= TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, textPtr->start);
+    }
+
+    return count;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkBTreeNumPixels --
+ *
+ *	This function returns a count of the number of pixels of text present
+ *	in a given widget's B-tree representation.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is a count of the number of usable pixels in tree
+ *	(since the dummy line used to mark the end of the B-tree is maintained
+ *	with zero height, as are any lines that are before or after the
+ *	'-start -end' range of the text widget in question, the number stored
+ *	at the root is the number we want).
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkBTreeNumPixels(
+    TkTextBTree tree,		/* The B-tree. */
+    const TkText *textPtr)	/* Relative to this client of the B-tree. */
+{
+    BTree *treePtr = (BTree *) tree;
+    return treePtr->rootPtr->numPixels[textPtr->pixelReference];
 }
 
 /*
@@ -3350,12 +4547,11 @@ TkBTreeNumLines(tree)
  *
  * CharSplitProc --
  *
- *	This procedure implements splitting for character segments.
+ *	This function implements splitting for character segments.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to a chain of two segments
- *	that have the same characters as segPtr except split
- *	among the two segments.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to a chain of two segments that have the
+ *	same characters as segPtr except split among the two segments.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Storage for segPtr is freed.
@@ -3364,10 +4560,10 @@ TkBTreeNumLines(tree)
  */
 
 static TkTextSegment *
-CharSplitProc(segPtr, index)
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;		/* Pointer to segment to split. */
-    int index;				/* Position within segment at which
-					 * to split. */
+CharSplitProc(
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr,	/* Pointer to segment to split. */
+    int index)			/* Position within segment at which to
+				 * split. */
 {
     TkTextSegment *newPtr1, *newPtr2;
 
@@ -3384,7 +4580,7 @@ CharSplitProc(segPtr, index)
     newPtr2->size = segPtr->size - index;
     memcpy(newPtr2->body.chars, segPtr->body.chars + index, newPtr2->size);
     newPtr2->body.chars[newPtr2->size] = 0;
-    ckfree((char*) segPtr);
+    ckfree((char *) segPtr);
     return newPtr1;
 }
 
@@ -3393,12 +4589,12 @@ CharSplitProc(segPtr, index)
  *
  * CharCleanupProc --
  *
- *	This procedure merges adjacent character segments into
- *	a single character segment, if possible.
+ *	This function merges adjacent character segments into a single
+ *	character segment, if possible.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the first segment in
- *	the (new) list of segments that used to start with segPtr.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the first segment in the (new) list
+ *	of segments that used to start with segPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Storage for the segments may be allocated and freed.
@@ -3408,11 +4604,10 @@ CharSplitProc(segPtr, index)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static TkTextSegment *
-CharCleanupProc(segPtr, linePtr)
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;		/* Pointer to first of two adjacent
-					 * segments to join. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line containing segments (not
-					 * used). */
+CharCleanupProc(
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr,	/* Pointer to first of two adjacent segments
+				 * to join. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Line containing segments (not used). */
 {
     TkTextSegment *segPtr2, *newPtr;
 
@@ -3428,8 +4623,8 @@ CharCleanupProc(segPtr, linePtr)
     memcpy(newPtr->body.chars, segPtr->body.chars, segPtr->size);
     memcpy(newPtr->body.chars + segPtr->size, segPtr2->body.chars, segPtr2->size);
     newPtr->body.chars[newPtr->size] = 0;
-    ckfree((char*) segPtr);
-    ckfree((char*) segPtr2);
+    ckfree((char *) segPtr);
+    ckfree((char *) segPtr2);
     return newPtr;
 }
 
@@ -3438,7 +4633,7 @@ CharCleanupProc(segPtr, linePtr)
  *
  * CharDeleteProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to delete a character segment.
+ *	This function is invoked to delete a character segment.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Always returns 0 to indicate that the segment was deleted.
@@ -3451,14 +4646,14 @@ CharCleanupProc(segPtr, linePtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-CharDeleteProc(segPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;		/* Segment to delete. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line containing segment. */
-    int treeGone;			/* Non-zero means the entire tree is
-					 * being deleted, so everything must
-					 * get cleaned up. */
+CharDeleteProc(
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr,	/* Segment to delete. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr,	/* Line containing segment. */
+    int treeGone)		/* Non-zero means the entire tree is being
+				 * deleted, so everything must get cleaned
+				 * up. */
 {
-    ckfree((char*) segPtr);
+    ckfree((char *) segPtr);
     return 0;
 }
 
@@ -3467,47 +4662,43 @@ CharDeleteProc(segPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
  *
  * CharCheckProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to perform consistency checks
- *	on character segments.
+ *	This function is invoked to perform consistency checks on character
+ *	segments.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the segment isn't inconsistent then the procedure
- *	panics.
+ *	If the segment isn't inconsistent then the function panics.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-CharCheckProc(segPtr, linePtr)
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;		/* Segment to check. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line containing segment. */
+CharCheckProc(
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr,	/* Segment to check. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Line containing segment. */
 {
     /*
-     * Make sure that the segment contains the number of
-     * characters indicated by its header, and that the last
-     * segment in a line ends in a newline.  Also make sure
-     * that there aren't ever two character segments adjacent
-     * to each other:  they should be merged together.
+     * Make sure that the segment contains the number of characters indicated
+     * by its header, and that the last segment in a line ends in a newline.
+     * Also make sure that there aren't ever two character segments adjacent
+     * to each other: they should be merged together.
      */
 
     if (segPtr->size <= 0) {
-	panic("CharCheckProc: segment has size <= 0");
+	Tcl_Panic("CharCheckProc: segment has size <= 0");
     }
     if (strlen(segPtr->body.chars) != (size_t) segPtr->size) {
-	panic("CharCheckProc: segment has wrong size");
+	Tcl_Panic("CharCheckProc: segment has wrong size");
     }
     if (segPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
 	if (segPtr->body.chars[segPtr->size-1] != '\n') {
-	    panic("CharCheckProc: line doesn't end with newline");
-	}
-    } else {
-	if (segPtr->nextPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
-	    panic("CharCheckProc: adjacent character segments weren't merged");
+	    Tcl_Panic("CharCheckProc: line doesn't end with newline");
 	}
+    } else if (segPtr->nextPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
+	Tcl_Panic("CharCheckProc: adjacent character segments weren't merged");
     }
 }
 
@@ -3516,27 +4707,26 @@ CharCheckProc(segPtr, linePtr)
  *
  * ToggleDeleteProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to delete toggle segments.
+ *	This function is invoked to delete toggle segments.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns 1 to indicate that the segment may not be deleted,
- *	unless the entire B-tree is going away.
+ *	Returns 1 to indicate that the segment may not be deleted, unless the
+ *	entire B-tree is going away.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the tree is going away then the toggle's memory is
- *	freed;  otherwise the toggle counts in nodes above the
- *	segment get updated.
+ *	If the tree is going away then the toggle's memory is freed; otherwise
+ *	the toggle counts in nodes above the segment get updated.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ToggleDeleteProc(segPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;		/* Segment to check. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line containing segment. */
-    int treeGone;			/* Non-zero means the entire tree is
-					 * being deleted, so everything must
-					 * get cleaned up. */
+ToggleDeleteProc(
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr,	/* Segment to check. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr,	/* Line containing segment. */
+    int treeGone)		/* Non-zero means the entire tree is being
+				 * deleted, so everything must get cleaned
+				 * up. */
 {
     if (treeGone) {
 	ckfree((char *) segPtr);
@@ -3544,11 +4734,11 @@ ToggleDeleteProc(segPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
     }
 
     /*
-     * This toggle is in the middle of a range of characters that's
-     * being deleted.  Refuse to die.  We'll be moved to the end of
-     * the deleted range and our cleanup procedure will be called
-     * later.  Decrement node toggle counts here, and set a flag
-     * so we'll re-increment them in the cleanup procedure.
+     * This toggle is in the middle of a range of characters that's being
+     * deleted. Refuse to die. We'll be moved to the end of the deleted range
+     * and our cleanup function will be called later. Decrement node toggle
+     * counts here, and set a flag so we'll re-increment them in the cleanup
+     * function.
      */
 
     if (segPtr->body.toggle.inNodeCounts) {
@@ -3564,37 +4754,36 @@ ToggleDeleteProc(segPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
  *
  * ToggleCleanupProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when a toggle is part of a line that's
- *	been modified in some way.  It's invoked after the
- *	modifications are complete.
+ *	This function is called when a toggle is part of a line that's been
+ *	modified in some way. It's invoked after the modifications are
+ *	complete.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the head segment in a new list
- *	that is to replace the tail of the line that used to
- *	start at segPtr.  This allows the procedure to delete
- *	or modify segPtr.
+ *	The return value is the head segment in a new list that is to replace
+ *	the tail of the line that used to start at segPtr. This allows the
+ *	function to delete or modify segPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Toggle counts in the nodes above the new line will be
- *	updated if they're not already.  Toggles may be collapsed
- *	if there are duplicate toggles at the same position.
+ *	Toggle counts in the nodes above the new line will be updated if
+ *	they're not already. Toggles may be collapsed if there are duplicate
+ *	toggles at the same position.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static TkTextSegment *
-ToggleCleanupProc(segPtr, linePtr)
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;	/* Segment to check. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* Line that now contains segment. */
+ToggleCleanupProc(
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr,	/* Segment to check. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Line that now contains segment. */
 {
     TkTextSegment *segPtr2, *prevPtr;
     int counts;
 
     /*
-     * If this is a toggle-off segment, look ahead through the next
-     * segments to see if there's a toggle-on segment for the same tag
-     * before any segments with non-zero size.  If so then the two
-     * toggles cancel each other;  remove them both.
+     * If this is a toggle-off segment, look ahead through the next segments
+     * to see if there's a toggle-on segment for the same tag before any
+     * segments with non-zero size. If so then the two toggles cancel each
+     * other; remove them both.
      */
 
     if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) {
@@ -3634,8 +4823,8 @@ ToggleCleanupProc(segPtr, linePtr)
  *
  * ToggleLineChangeProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a toggle segment is about
- *	to move from one line to another.
+ *	This function is invoked when a toggle segment is about to move from
+ *	one line to another.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -3647,9 +4836,9 @@ ToggleCleanupProc(segPtr, linePtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ToggleLineChangeProc(segPtr, linePtr)
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;	/* Segment to check. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* Line that used to contain segment. */
+ToggleLineChangeProc(
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr,	/* Segment to check. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Line that used to contain segment. */
 {
     if (segPtr->body.toggle.inNodeCounts) {
 	ChangeNodeToggleCount(linePtr->parentPtr,
@@ -3663,45 +4852,45 @@ ToggleLineChangeProc(segPtr, linePtr)
  *
  * ToggleCheckProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to perform consistency checks
- *	on toggle segments.
+ *	This function is invoked to perform consistency checks on toggle
+ *	segments.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If a consistency problem is found the procedure panics.
+ *	If a consistency problem is found the function panics.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ToggleCheckProc(segPtr, linePtr)
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;		/* Segment to check. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line containing segment. */
+ToggleCheckProc(
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr,	/* Segment to check. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Line containing segment. */
 {
     register Summary *summaryPtr;
     int needSummary;
 
     if (segPtr->size != 0) {
-	panic("ToggleCheckProc: segment had non-zero size");
+	Tcl_Panic("ToggleCheckProc: segment had non-zero size");
     }
     if (!segPtr->body.toggle.inNodeCounts) {
-	panic("ToggleCheckProc: toggle counts not updated in nodes");
+	Tcl_Panic("ToggleCheckProc: toggle counts not updated in nodes");
     }
-    needSummary = (segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->tagRootPtr != linePtr->parentPtr);
+    needSummary = (segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->tagRootPtr!=linePtr->parentPtr);
     for (summaryPtr = linePtr->parentPtr->summaryPtr; ;
 	    summaryPtr = summaryPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (summaryPtr == NULL) {
 	    if (needSummary) {
-		panic("ToggleCheckProc: tag not present in node");
+		Tcl_Panic("ToggleCheckProc: tag not present in node");
 	    } else {
 		break;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (summaryPtr->tagPtr == segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr) {
 	    if (!needSummary) {
-		panic("ToggleCheckProc: tag present in root node summary");
+		Tcl_Panic("ToggleCheckProc: tag present in root node summary");
 	    }
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -3709,52 +4898,9 @@ ToggleCheckProc(segPtr, linePtr)
 }
 
 /*
- *----------------------------------------------------------------------
- *
- * TkBTreeCharsInLine --
- *
- *	This procedure returns a count of the number of characters
- *	in a given line.
- *
- * Results:
- *	The return value is the character count for linePtr.
- *
- * Side effects:
- *	None.
- *
- *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
  */
-
-int
-TkBTreeCharsInLine(linePtr)
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line whose characters should be
-					 * counted. */
-{
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;
-    int count;
-
-    count = 0;
-    for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; segPtr != NULL; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-	if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
-	    count += Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, segPtr->size);
-	} else {
-	    count += segPtr->size;
-	}
-    }
-    return count;
-}
-
-int
-TkBTreeBytesInLine(linePtr)
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line whose characters should be
-					 * counted. */
-{
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;
-    int count;
-
-    count = 0;
-    for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; segPtr != NULL; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-	count += segPtr->size;
-    }
-    return count;
-}
diff --git a/generic/tkTextDisp.c b/generic/tkTextDisp.c
index 4637b5c..2516e1c 100644
--- a/generic/tkTextDisp.c
+++ b/generic/tkTextDisp.c
@@ -1,18 +1,18 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkTextDisp.c --
  *
- *	This module provides facilities to display text widgets.  It is
- *	the only place where information is kept about the screen layout
- *	of text widgets.
+ *	This module provides facilities to display text widgets. It is the
+ *	only place where information is kept about the screen layout of text
+ *	widgets. (Well, strictly, each TkTextLine and B-tree node caches its
+ *	last observed pixel height, but that information originates here).
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkText.h"
 
@@ -22,18 +22,102 @@
 #include "tkUnixInt.h"
 #endif
 
-#ifdef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
 #include "tkMacOSXInt.h"
 #endif
-#endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
+
+/*
+ * "Calculations of line pixel heights and the size of the vertical
+ * scrollbar."
+ *
+ * Given that tag, font and elide changes can happen to large numbers of
+ * diverse chunks in a text widget containing megabytes of text, it is not
+ * possible to recalculate all affected height information immediately any
+ * such change takes place and maintain a responsive user-experience. Yet, for
+ * an accurate vertical scrollbar to be drawn, we must know the total number
+ * of vertical pixels shown on display versus the number available to be
+ * displayed.
+ *
+ * The way the text widget solves this problem is by maintaining cached line
+ * pixel heights (in the BTree for each logical line), and having asynchronous
+ * timer callbacks (i) to iterate through the logical lines recalculating
+ * their heights, and (ii) to recalculate the vertical scrollbar's position
+ * and size.
+ *
+ * Typically this works well but there are some situations where the overall
+ * functional design of this file causes some problems. These problems can
+ * only arise because the calculations used to display lines on screen are not
+ * connected to those in the iterating-line- recalculation-process.
+ *
+ * The reason for this disconnect is that the display calculations operate in
+ * display lines, and the iteration and cache operates in logical lines.
+ * Given that the display calculations both need not contain complete logical
+ * lines (at top or bottom of display), and that they do not actually keep
+ * track of logical lines (for simplicity of code and historical design), this
+ * means a line may be known and drawn with a different pixel height to that
+ * which is cached in the BTree, and this might cause some temporary
+ * undesirable mismatch between display and the vertical scrollbar.
+ *
+ * All such mismatches should be temporary, however, since the asynchronous
+ * height calculations will always catch up eventually.
+ *
+ * For further details see the comments before and within the following
+ * functions below: LayoutDLine, AsyncUpdateLineMetrics, GetYView,
+ * GetYPixelCount, TkTextUpdateOneLine, TkTextUpdateLineMetrics.
+ *
+ * For details of the way in which the BTree keeps track of pixel heights, see
+ * tkTextBTree.c. Basically the BTree maintains two pieces of information: the
+ * logical line indices and the pixel height cache.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS:
+ *
+ *	With this macro set, collect all char chunks that have no holes
+ *	between them, that are on the same line and use the same font and font
+ *	size. Allocate the chars of all these chunks, the so-called "stretch",
+ *	in a DString in the first chunk, the so-called "base chunk". Use the
+ *	base chunk string for measuring and drawing, so that these actions are
+ *	always performed with maximum context.
+ *
+ *	This is necessary for text rendering engines that provide ligatures
+ *	and sub-pixel layout, like ATSU on Mac. If we don't do this, the
+ *	measuring will change all the time, leading to an ugly "tremble and
+ *	shiver" effect. This is because of the continuous splitting and
+ *	re-merging of chunks that goes on in a text widget, when the cursor or
+ *	the selection move.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *
+ *	Memory management changes. Instead of attaching the character data to
+ *	the clientData structures of the char chunks, an additional DString is
+ *	used. The collection process will even lead to resizing this DString
+ *	for large stretches (> TCL_DSTRING_STATIC_SIZE == 200). We could
+ *	reduce the overall memory footprint by copying the result to a plain
+ *	char array after the line breaking process, but that would complicate
+ *	the code and make performance even worse speedwise. See also TODOs.
+ *
+ * TODOs:
+ *
+ *    -	Move the character collection process from the LayoutProc into
+ *	LayoutDLine(), so that the collection can be done before actual
+ *	layout. In this way measuring can look at the following text, too,
+ *	right from the beginning. Memory handling can also be improved with
+ *	this. Problem: We don't easily know which chunks are adjacent until
+ *	all the other chunks have calculated their width. Apparently marks
+ *	would return width==0. A separate char collection loop would have to
+ *	know these things.
+ *
+ *    -	Use a new context parameter to pass the context from LayoutDLine() to
+ *	the LayoutProc instead of using a global variable like now. Not
+ *	pressing until the previous point gets implemented.
+ */
 
 /*
  * The following structure describes how to display a range of characters.
- * The information is generated by scanning all of the tags associated
- * with the characters and combining that with default information for
- * the overall widget.  These structures form the hash keys for
- * dInfoPtr->styleTable.
+ * The information is generated by scanning all of the tags associated with
+ * the characters and combining that with default information for the overall
+ * widget. These structures form the hash keys for dInfoPtr->styleTable.
  */
 
 typedef struct StyleValues {
@@ -41,13 +125,12 @@ typedef struct StyleValues {
 				 * NULL means use widget background. */
     int borderWidth;		/* Width of 3-D border for background. */
     int relief;			/* 3-D relief for background. */
-    Pixmap bgStipple;		/* Stipple bitmap for background.  None
-				 * means draw solid. */
+    Pixmap bgStipple;		/* Stipple bitmap for background. None means
+				 * draw solid. */
     XColor *fgColor;		/* Foreground color for text. */
     Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font for displaying text. */
     Pixmap fgStipple;		/* Stipple bitmap for text and other
-				 * foreground stuff.   None means draw
-				 * solid.*/
+				 * foreground stuff. None means draw solid.*/
     int justify;		/* Justification style for text. */
     int lMargin1;		/* Left margin, in pixels, for first display
 				 * line of each text line. */
@@ -61,11 +144,12 @@ typedef struct StyleValues {
     int spacing1;		/* Spacing above first dline in text line. */
     int spacing2;		/* Spacing between lines of dline. */
     int spacing3;		/* Spacing below last dline in text line. */
-    TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr;/* Locations and types of tab stops (may
-				 * be NULL). */
+    TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr;/* Locations and types of tab stops (may be
+				 * NULL). */
+    int tabStyle;		/* One of TABULAR or WORDPROCESSOR. */
     int underline;		/* Non-zero means draw underline underneath
 				 * text. */
-    int elide;			/* Non-zero means draw text */
+    int elide;			/* Zero means draw text, otherwise not. */
     TkWrapMode wrapMode;	/* How to handle wrap-around for this tag.
 				 * One of TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR,
 				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE or TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD.*/
@@ -73,128 +157,146 @@ typedef struct StyleValues {
 
 /*
  * The following structure extends the StyleValues structure above with
- * graphics contexts used to actually draw the characters.  The entries
- * in dInfoPtr->styleTable point to structures of this type.
+ * graphics contexts used to actually draw the characters. The entries in
+ * dInfoPtr->styleTable point to structures of this type.
  */
 
 typedef struct TextStyle {
     int refCount;		/* Number of times this structure is
 				 * referenced in Chunks. */
-    GC bgGC;			/* Graphics context for background.  None
-				 * means use widget background. */
+    GC bgGC;			/* Graphics context for background. None means
+				 * use widget background. */
     GC fgGC;			/* Graphics context for foreground. */
     StyleValues *sValuePtr;	/* Raw information from which GCs were
 				 * derived. */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;	/* Pointer to entry in styleTable.  Used
-				 * to delete entry. */
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;	/* Pointer to entry in styleTable. Used to
+				 * delete entry. */
 } TextStyle;
 
 /*
- * The following macro determines whether two styles have the same
- * background so that, for example, no beveled border should be drawn
- * between them.
+ * The following macro determines whether two styles have the same background
+ * so that, for example, no beveled border should be drawn between them.
  */
 
 #define SAME_BACKGROUND(s1, s2) \
     (((s1)->sValuePtr->border == (s2)->sValuePtr->border) \
-        && ((s1)->sValuePtr->borderWidth == (s2)->sValuePtr->borderWidth) \
-        && ((s1)->sValuePtr->relief == (s2)->sValuePtr->relief) \
-        && ((s1)->sValuePtr->bgStipple == (s2)->sValuePtr->bgStipple))
+	&& ((s1)->sValuePtr->borderWidth == (s2)->sValuePtr->borderWidth) \
+	&& ((s1)->sValuePtr->relief == (s2)->sValuePtr->relief) \
+	&& ((s1)->sValuePtr->bgStipple == (s2)->sValuePtr->bgStipple))
 
 /*
- * The following macro is used to compare two floating-point numbers
- * to within a certain degree of scale.  Direct comparison fails on
- * processors where the processor and memory representations of FP
- * numbers of a particular precision is different (e.g. Intel)
+ * The following macro is used to compare two floating-point numbers to within
+ * a certain degree of scale. Direct comparison fails on processors where the
+ * processor and memory representations of FP numbers of a particular
+ * precision is different (e.g. Intel)
  */
 
 #define FP_EQUAL_SCALE(double1, double2, scaleFactor) \
     (fabs((double1)-(double2))*((scaleFactor)+1.0) < 0.3)
 
 /*
- * The following structure describes one line of the display, which may
- * be either part or all of one line of the text.
+ * Macro to make debugging/testing logging a little easier.
+ */
+
+#define LOG(toVar,what) \
+    Tcl_SetVar2(textPtr->interp, toVar, NULL, (what), \
+	    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT)
+
+/*
+ * The following structure describes one line of the display, which may be
+ * either part or all of one line of the text.
  */
 
 typedef struct DLine {
-    TkTextIndex index;		/* Identifies first character in text
-				 * that is displayed on this line. */
+    TkTextIndex index;		/* Identifies first character in text that is
+				 * displayed on this line. */
     int byteCount;		/* Number of bytes accounted for by this
-				 * display line, including a trailing space
-				 * or newline that isn't actually displayed. */
-    int y;			/* Y-position at which line is supposed to
-				 * be drawn (topmost pixel of rectangular
-				 * area occupied by line). */
-    int oldY;			/* Y-position at which line currently
-				 * appears on display.  -1 means line isn't
-				 * currently visible on display and must be
-				 * redrawn.  This is used to move lines by
-				 * scrolling rather than re-drawing. */
+				 * display line, including a trailing space or
+				 * newline that isn't actually displayed. */
+    int logicalLinesMerged;	/* Number of extra logical lines merged into
+				 * this one due to elided newlines. */
+    int y;			/* Y-position at which line is supposed to be
+				 * drawn (topmost pixel of rectangular area
+				 * occupied by line). */
+    int oldY;			/* Y-position at which line currently appears
+				 * on display. This is used to move lines by
+				 * scrolling rather than re-drawing. If
+				 * 'flags' have the OLD_Y_INVALID bit set,
+				 * then we will never examine this field
+				 * (which means line isn't currently visible
+				 * on display and must be redrawn). */
     int height;			/* Height of line, in pixels. */
     int baseline;		/* Offset of text baseline from y, in
 				 * pixels. */
-    int spaceAbove;		/* How much extra space was added to the
-				 * top of the line because of spacing
-				 * options.  This is included in height
-				 * and baseline. */
+    int spaceAbove;		/* How much extra space was added to the top
+				 * of the line because of spacing options.
+				 * This is included in height and baseline. */
     int spaceBelow;		/* How much extra space was added to the
 				 * bottom of the line because of spacing
-				 * options.  This is included in height. */
+				 * options. This is included in height. */
     int length;			/* Total length of line, in pixels. */
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;	/* Pointer to first chunk in list of all
-				 * of those that are displayed on this
-				 * line of the screen. */
-    struct DLine *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of all display lines for
-				 * this window.   The list is sorted in
-				 * order from top to bottom.  Note:  the
-				 * next DLine doesn't always correspond
-				 * to the next line of text:  (a) can have
-				 * multiple DLines for one text line, and
-				 * (b) can have gaps where DLine's have been
-				 * deleted because they're out of date. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flag bits:  see below for values. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;	/* Pointer to first chunk in list of all of
+				 * those that are displayed on this line of
+				 * the screen. */
+    struct DLine *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of all display lines for this
+				 * window. The list is sorted in order from
+				 * top to bottom. Note: the next DLine doesn't
+				 * always correspond to the next line of text:
+				 * (a) can have multiple DLines for one text
+				 * line, and (b) can have gaps where DLine's
+				 * have been deleted because they're out of
+				 * date. */
+    int flags;			/* Various flag bits: see below for values. */
 } DLine;
 
 /*
  * Flag bits for DLine structures:
  *
- * HAS_3D_BORDER -		Non-zero means that at least one of the
- *				chunks in this line has a 3D border, so
- *				it potentially interacts with 3D borders
- *				in neighboring lines (see
- *				DisplayLineBackground).
+ * HAS_3D_BORDER -		Non-zero means that at least one of the chunks
+ *				in this line has a 3D border, so it
+ *				potentially interacts with 3D borders in
+ *				neighboring lines (see DisplayLineBackground).
  * NEW_LAYOUT -			Non-zero means that the line has been
- *				re-layed out since the last time the
- *				display was updated.
- * TOP_LINE -			Non-zero means that this was the top line
+ *				re-layed out since the last time the display
+ *				was updated.
+ * TOP_LINE -			Non-zero means that this was the top line in
  *				in the window the last time that the window
- *				was laid out.  This is important because
- *				a line may be displayed differently if its
- *				at the top or bottom than if it's in the
- *				middle (e.g. beveled edges aren't displayed
- *				for middle lines if the adjacent line has
- *				a similar background).
+ *				was laid out. This is important because a line
+ *				may be displayed differently if its at the top
+ *				or bottom than if it's in the middle
+ *				(e.g. beveled edges aren't displayed for
+ *				middle lines if the adjacent line has a
+ *				similar background).
  * BOTTOM_LINE -		Non-zero means that this was the bottom line
  *				in the window the last time that the window
  *				was laid out.
- * IS_DISABLED -		This Dline cannot be edited.
+ * OLD_Y_INVALID -		The value of oldY in the structure is not
+ *				valid or useful and should not be examined.
+ *				'oldY' is only useful when the DLine is
+ *				currently displayed at a different position
+ *				and we wish to re-display it via scrolling, so
+ *				this means the DLine needs redrawing.
  */
 
 #define HAS_3D_BORDER	1
 #define NEW_LAYOUT	2
 #define TOP_LINE	4
 #define BOTTOM_LINE	8
-#define IS_DISABLED    16
+#define OLD_Y_INVALID  16
 
 /*
  * Overall display information for a text widget:
  */
 
 typedef struct TextDInfo {
-    Tcl_HashTable styleTable;	/* Hash table that maps from StyleValues
-				 * to TextStyles for this widget. */
-    DLine *dLinePtr;		/* First in list of all display lines for
-				 * this widget, in order from top to bottom. */
+    Tcl_HashTable styleTable;	/* Hash table that maps from StyleValues to
+				 * TextStyles for this widget. */
+    DLine *dLinePtr;		/* First in list of all display lines for this
+				 * widget, in order from top to bottom. */
+    int topPixelOffset;		/* Identifies first pixel in top display line
+				 * to display in window. */
+    int newTopPixelOffset;	/* Desired first pixel in top display line to
+				 * display in window. */
     GC copyGC;			/* Graphics context for copying from off-
 				 * screen pixmaps onto screen. */
     GC scrollGC;		/* Graphics context for copying from one place
@@ -209,12 +311,12 @@ typedef struct TextDInfo {
 				 * Leaves space for border, etc. */
     int maxX;			/* First x-coordinate to right of available
 				 * space for displaying lines. */
-    int maxY;			/* First y-coordinate below available
-				 * space for displaying lines. */
+    int maxY;			/* First y-coordinate below available space
+				 * for displaying lines. */
     int topOfEof;		/* Top-most pixel (lowest y-value) that has
 				 * been drawn in the appropriate fashion for
 				 * the portion of the window after the last
-				 * line of the text.  This field is used to
+				 * line of the text. This field is used to
 				 * figure out when to redraw part or all of
 				 * the eof field. */
 
@@ -222,34 +324,32 @@ typedef struct TextDInfo {
      * Information used for scrolling:
      */
 
-    int newByteOffset;		/* Desired x scroll position, measured as the
-				 * number of average-size characters off-screen
-				 * to the left for a line with no left
-				 * margin. */
-    int curPixelOffset;		/* Actual x scroll position, measured as the
+    int newXPixelOffset;	/* Desired x scroll position, measured as the
+				 * number of pixels off-screen to the left for
+				 * a line with no left margin. */
+    int curXPixelOffset;	/* Actual x scroll position, measured as the
 				 * number of pixels off-screen to the left. */
     int maxLength;		/* Length in pixels of longest line that's
 				 * visible in window (length may exceed window
-				 * size).  If there's no wrapping, this will
-				 * be zero. */
+				 * size). If there's no wrapping, this will be
+				 * zero. */
     double xScrollFirst, xScrollLast;
 				/* Most recent values reported to horizontal
-				 * scrollbar;  used to eliminate unnecessary
+				 * scrollbar; used to eliminate unnecessary
 				 * reports. */
     double yScrollFirst, yScrollLast;
 				/* Most recent values reported to vertical
-				 * scrollbar;  used to eliminate unnecessary
+				 * scrollbar; used to eliminate unnecessary
 				 * reports. */
 
     /*
      * The following information is used to implement scanning:
      */
 
-    int scanMarkIndex;		/* Byte index of character that was at the
-				 * left edge of the window when the scan
-				 * started. */
+    int scanMarkXPixel;		/* Pixel index of left edge of the window when
+				 * the scan started. */
     int scanMarkX;		/* X-position of mouse at time scan started. */
-    int scanTotalScroll;	/* Total scrolling (in screen lines) that has
+    int scanTotalYScroll;	/* Total scrolling (in screen pixels) that has
 				 * occurred since scanMarkY was set. */
     int scanMarkY;		/* Y-position of mouse at time scan started. */
 
@@ -259,47 +359,112 @@ typedef struct TextDInfo {
 
     int dLinesInvalidated;	/* This value is set to 1 whenever something
 				 * happens that invalidates information in
-				 * DLine structures;  if a redisplay
-				 * is in progress, it will see this and
-				 * abort the redisplay.  This is needed
-				 * because, for example, an embedded window
-				 * could change its size when it is first
-				 * displayed, invalidating the DLine that
-				 * is currently being displayed.  If redisplay
-				 * continues, it will use freed memory and
-				 * could dump core. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flag values:  see below for
+				 * DLine structures; if a redisplay is in
+				 * progress, it will see this and abort the
+				 * redisplay. This is needed because, for
+				 * example, an embedded window could change
+				 * its size when it is first displayed,
+				 * invalidating the DLine that is currently
+				 * being displayed. If redisplay continues, it
+				 * will use freed memory and could dump
+				 * core. */
+    int flags;			/* Various flag values: see below for
 				 * definitions. */
+    /*
+     * Information used to handle the asynchronous updating of the y-scrollbar
+     * and the vertical height calculations:
+     */
+
+    int lineMetricUpdateEpoch;	/* Stores a number which is incremented each
+				 * time the text widget changes in a
+				 * significant way (e.g. resizing or
+				 * geometry-influencing tag changes). */
+    int currentMetricUpdateLine;/* Stores a counter which is used to iterate
+				 * over the logical lines contained in the
+				 * widget and update their geometry
+				 * calculations, if they are out of date. */
+    TkTextIndex metricIndex;	/* If the current metric update line wraps
+				 * into very many display lines, then this is
+				 * used to keep track of what index we've got
+				 * to so far... */
+    int metricPixelHeight;	/* ...and this is for the height calculation
+				 * so far...*/
+    int metricEpoch;		/* ...and this for the epoch of the partial
+				 * calculation so it can be cancelled if
+				 * things change once more. This field will be
+				 * -1 if there is no long-line calculation in
+				 * progress, and take a non-negative value if
+				 * there is such a calculation in progress. */
+    int lastMetricUpdateLine;	/* When the current update line reaches this
+				 * line, we are done and should stop the
+				 * asychronous callback mechanism. */
+    Tcl_TimerToken lineUpdateTimer;
+				/* A token pointing to the current line metric
+				 * update callback. */
+    Tcl_TimerToken scrollbarTimer;
+				/* A token pointing to the current scrollbar
+				 * update callback. */
 } TextDInfo;
 
 /*
- * In TkTextDispChunk structures for character segments, the clientData
- * field points to one of the following structures:
+ * In TkTextDispChunk structures for character segments, the clientData field
+ * points to one of the following structures:
  */
 
+#if !TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+
 typedef struct CharInfo {
     int numBytes;		/* Number of bytes to display. */
-    char chars[4];		/* UTF characters to display.  Actual size
-				 * will be numBytes, not 4.  THIS MUST BE
-				 * THE LAST FIELD IN THE STRUCTURE. */
+    char chars[4];		/* UTF characters to display. Actual size will
+				 * be numBytes, not 4. THIS MUST BE THE LAST
+				 * FIELD IN THE STRUCTURE. */
+} CharInfo;
+
+#else /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
+
+typedef struct CharInfo {
+    TkTextDispChunk *baseChunkPtr;
+    int baseOffset;		/* Starting offset in base chunk
+				 * baseChars. */
+    int numBytes;		/* Number of bytes that belong to this
+				 * chunk. */
+    const char *chars;		/* UTF characters to display. Actually points
+				 * into the baseChars of the base chunk. Only
+				 * valid after FinalizeBaseChunk(). */
 } CharInfo;
 
 /*
+ * The BaseCharInfo is a CharInfo with some additional data added.
+ */
+
+typedef struct BaseCharInfo {
+    CharInfo ci;
+    Tcl_DString baseChars;	/* Actual characters for the stretch of text
+				 * represented by this base chunk. */
+    int width;			/* Width in pixels of the whole string, if
+				 * known, else -1. Valid during
+				 * LayoutDLine(). */
+} BaseCharInfo;
+
+static TkTextDispChunk *baseCharChunkPtr = NULL;
+
+#endif /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
+
+/*
  * Flag values for TextDInfo structures:
  *
- * DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE:		Non-zero means that the DLine structures
- *				for this window are partially or completely
- *				out of date and need to be recomputed.
+ * DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE:		Non-zero means that the DLine structures for
+ *				this window are partially or completely out of
+ *				date and need to be recomputed.
  * REDRAW_PENDING:		Means that a when-idle handler has been
  *				scheduled to update the display.
  * REDRAW_BORDERS:		Means window border or pad area has
  *				potentially been damaged and must be redrawn.
- * REPICK_NEEDED:		1 means that the widget has been modified
- *				in a way that could change the current
- *				character (a different character might be
- *				under the mouse cursor now).  Need to
- *				recompute the current character before
- *				the next redisplay.
+ * REPICK_NEEDED:		1 means that the widget has been modified in a
+ *				way that could change the current character (a
+ *				different character might be under the mouse
+ *				cursor now). Need to recompute the current
+ *				character before the next redisplay.
  */
 
 #define DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE	1
@@ -308,92 +473,140 @@ typedef struct CharInfo {
 #define REPICK_NEEDED		8
 
 /*
- * The following counters keep statistics about redisplay that can be
- * checked to see how clever this code is at reducing redisplays.
+ * Action values for FreeDLines:
+ *
+ * DLINE_FREE:		Free the lines, but no need to unlink them from the
+ *			current list of actual display lines.
+ * DLINE_UNLINK:	Free and unlink from current display.
+ * DLINE_FREE_TEMP:	Free, but don't unlink, and also don't set
+ *			'dLinesInvalidated'.
+ */
+
+#define DLINE_FREE	  0
+#define DLINE_UNLINK	  1
+#define DLINE_FREE_TEMP	  2
+
+/*
+ * The following counters keep statistics about redisplay that can be checked
+ * to see how clever this code is at reducing redisplays.
  */
 
 static int numRedisplays;	/* Number of calls to DisplayText. */
 static int linesRedrawn;	/* Number of calls to DisplayDLine. */
 static int numCopies;		/* Number of calls to XCopyArea to copy part
 				 * of the screen. */
-
+static int lineHeightsRecalculated;
+				/* Number of line layouts purely for height
+				 * calculation purposes.*/
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		AdjustForTab _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
+static void		AdjustForTab(TkText *textPtr,
 			    TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr, int index,
-			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr));
-static void		CharBboxProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,
-			    int index, int y, int lineHeight, int baseline,
-			    int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr,
-			    int *heightPtr));
-static void		CharDisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,
-			    int x, int y, int height, int baseline,
-			    Display *display, Drawable dst, int screenY));
-static int		CharMeasureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,
-			    int x));
-static void		CharUndisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr));
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr);
+static void		CharBboxProc(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int index, int y,
+			    int lineHeight, int baseline, int *xPtr,
+			    int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+static int		CharChunkMeasureChars(TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,
+			    const char *chars, int charsLen,
+			    int start, int end, int startX, int maxX,
+			    int flags, int *nextX);
+static void		CharDisplayProc(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x, int y,
+			    int height, int baseline, Display *display,
+			    Drawable dst, int screenY);
+static int		CharMeasureProc(TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x);
+static void		CharUndisplayProc(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr);
+#if TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+static void		FinalizeBaseChunk(TkTextDispChunk *additionalChunkPtr);
+static void		FreeBaseChunk(TkTextDispChunk *baseChunkPtr);
+static int		IsSameFGStyle(TextStyle *style1, TextStyle *style2);
+static void		RemoveFromBaseChunk(TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr);
+#endif
+/*
+ * Definitions of elided procs. Compiler can't inline these since we use
+ * pointers to these functions. ElideDisplayProc and ElideUndisplayProc are
+ * special-cased for speed, as potentially many elided DLine chunks if large,
+ * tag toggle-filled elided region.
+ */
+static void		ElideBboxProc(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int index, int y,
+			    int lineHeight, int baseline, int *xPtr,
+			    int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+static int		ElideMeasureProc(TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x);
+static void		DisplayDLine(TkText *textPtr, DLine *dlPtr,
+			    DLine *prevPtr, Pixmap pixmap);
+static void		DisplayLineBackground(TkText *textPtr, DLine *dlPtr,
+			    DLine *prevPtr, Pixmap pixmap);
+static void		DisplayText(ClientData clientData);
+static DLine *		FindDLine(DLine *dlPtr, CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+static void		FreeDLines(TkText *textPtr, DLine *firstPtr,
+			    DLine *lastPtr, int action);
+static void		FreeStyle(TkText *textPtr, TextStyle *stylePtr);
+static TextStyle *	GetStyle(TkText *textPtr, CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+static void		GetXView(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkText *textPtr,
+			    int report);
+static void		GetYView(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkText *textPtr,
+			    int report);
+static int		GetYPixelCount(TkText *textPtr, DLine *dlPtr);
+static DLine *		LayoutDLine(TkText *textPtr,
+			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+static int		MeasureChars(Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char *source,
+			    int maxBytes, int rangeStart, int rangeLength,
+			    int startX, int maxX, int flags, int *nextXPtr);
+static void		MeasureUp(TkText *textPtr,
+			    CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int distance,
+			    TkTextIndex *dstPtr, int *overlap);
+static int		NextTabStop(Tk_Font tkfont, int x, int tabOrigin);
+static void		UpdateDisplayInfo(TkText *textPtr);
+static void		YScrollByLines(TkText *textPtr, int offset);
+static void		YScrollByPixels(TkText *textPtr, int offset);
+static int		SizeOfTab(TkText *textPtr, int tabStyle,
+			    TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr, int *indexPtr, int x,
+			    int maxX);
+static void		TextChanged(TkText *textPtr,
+			    CONST TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
+			    CONST TkTextIndex *index2Ptr);
+static void		TextInvalidateRegion(TkText *textPtr, TkRegion region);
+static void		TextRedrawTag(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextIndex *index1Ptr, TkTextIndex *index2Ptr,
+			    TkTextTag *tagPtr, int withTag);
+static void		TextInvalidateLineMetrics(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int lineCount, int action);
+static int		CalculateDisplayLineHeight(TkText *textPtr,
+			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int *byteCountPtr,
+			    int *mergedLinePtr);
+static void		DlineIndexOfX(TkText *textPtr,
+			    DLine *dlPtr, int x, TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+static int		DlineXOfIndex(TkText *textPtr,
+			    DLine *dlPtr, int byteIndex);
+static int		TextGetScrollInfoObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkText *textPtr, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], double *dblPtr,
+			    int *intPtr);
+static void		AsyncUpdateLineMetrics(ClientData clientData);
+static void		AsyncUpdateYScrollbar(ClientData clientData);
 
 /*
-   Definitions of elided procs.
-   Compiler can't inline these since we use pointers to these functions.
-   ElideDisplayProc, ElideUndisplayProc special-cased for speed,
-   as potentially many elided DLine chunks if large, tag toggle-filled
-   elided region.
-*/
-static void		ElideBboxProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,
-			    int index, int y, int lineHeight, int baseline,
-			    int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr,
-			    int *heightPtr));
-static int		ElideMeasureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,
-			    int x));
-
-static void		DisplayDLine _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    DLine *dlPtr, DLine *prevPtr, Pixmap pixmap));
-static void		DisplayLineBackground _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    DLine *dlPtr, DLine *prevPtr, Pixmap pixmap));
-static void		DisplayText _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static DLine *		FindDLine _ANSI_ARGS_((DLine *dlPtr,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-static void		FreeDLines _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    DLine *firstPtr, DLine *lastPtr, int unlink));
-static void		FreeStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TextStyle *stylePtr));
-static TextStyle *	GetStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-static void		GetXView _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkText *textPtr, int report));
-static void		GetYView _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkText *textPtr, int report));
-static DLine *		LayoutDLine _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-static int		MeasureChars _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font tkfont,
-			    CONST char *source, int maxBytes, int startX,
-			    int maxX, int tabOrigin, int *nextXPtr));
-static void		MeasureUp _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextIndex *srcPtr, int distance,
-			    TkTextIndex *dstPtr));
-static int		NextTabStop _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Font tkfont, int x,
-			    int tabOrigin));
-static void		UpdateDisplayInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr));
-static void		ScrollByLines _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    int offset));
-static int		SizeOfTab _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr, int index, int x,
-			    int maxX));
-static void		TextInvalidateRegion _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkRegion region));
+ * Result values returned by TextGetScrollInfoObj:
+ */
 
+#define TKTEXT_SCROLL_MOVETO	1
+#define TKTEXT_SCROLL_PAGES	2
+#define TKTEXT_SCROLL_UNITS	3
+#define TKTEXT_SCROLL_ERROR	4
+#define TKTEXT_SCROLL_PIXELS	5
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkTextCreateDInfo --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when a new text widget is created.
- *	Its job is to set up display-related information for the widget.
+ *	This function is called when a new text widget is created. Its job is
+ *	to set up display-related information for the widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -406,8 +619,8 @@ static void		TextInvalidateRegion _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
  */
 
 void
-TkTextCreateDInfo(textPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information for text widget. */
+TkTextCreateDInfo(
+    TkText *textPtr)		/* Overall information for text widget. */
 {
     register TextDInfo *dInfoPtr;
     XGCValues gcValues;
@@ -420,19 +633,39 @@ TkTextCreateDInfo(textPtr)
     dInfoPtr->scrollGC = Tk_GetGC(textPtr->tkwin, GCGraphicsExposures,
 	    &gcValues);
     dInfoPtr->topOfEof = 0;
-    dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = 0;
-    dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset = 0;
+    dInfoPtr->newXPixelOffset = 0;
+    dInfoPtr->curXPixelOffset = 0;
     dInfoPtr->maxLength = 0;
     dInfoPtr->xScrollFirst = -1;
     dInfoPtr->xScrollLast = -1;
     dInfoPtr->yScrollFirst = -1;
     dInfoPtr->yScrollLast = -1;
-    dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex = 0;
+    dInfoPtr->scanMarkXPixel = 0;
     dInfoPtr->scanMarkX = 0;
-    dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll = 0;
+    dInfoPtr->scanTotalYScroll = 0;
     dInfoPtr->scanMarkY = 0;
     dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated = 0;
     dInfoPtr->flags = DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE;
+    dInfoPtr->topPixelOffset = 0;
+    dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset = 0;
+    dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine = -1;
+    dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine = -1;
+    dInfoPtr->lineMetricUpdateEpoch = 1;
+    dInfoPtr->metricEpoch = -1;
+    dInfoPtr->metricIndex.textPtr = NULL;
+    dInfoPtr->metricIndex.linePtr = NULL;
+
+    /*
+     * Add a refCount for each of the idle call-backs.
+     */
+
+    textPtr->refCount++;
+    dInfoPtr->lineUpdateTimer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(0,
+	    AsyncUpdateLineMetrics, (ClientData) textPtr);
+    textPtr->refCount++;
+    dInfoPtr->scrollbarTimer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(200,
+	    AsyncUpdateYScrollbar, (ClientData) textPtr);
+
     textPtr->dInfoPtr = dInfoPtr;
 }
 
@@ -441,7 +674,7 @@ TkTextCreateDInfo(textPtr)
  *
  * TkTextFreeDInfo --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to free up all of the private display
+ *	This function is called to free up all of the private display
  *	information kept by this file for a text widget.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -454,19 +687,19 @@ TkTextCreateDInfo(textPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkTextFreeDInfo(textPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information for text widget. */
+TkTextFreeDInfo(
+    TkText *textPtr)		/* Overall information for text widget. */
 {
     register TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Be careful to free up styleTable *after* freeing up all the
-     * DLines, so that the hash table is still intact to free up the
-     * style-related information from the lines.  Once the lines are
-     * all free then styleTable will be empty.
+     * Be careful to free up styleTable *after* freeing up all the DLines, so
+     * that the hash table is still intact to free up the style-related
+     * information from the lines. Once the lines are all free then styleTable
+     * will be empty.
      */
 
-    FreeDLines(textPtr, dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, (DLine *) NULL, 1);
+    FreeDLines(textPtr, dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, NULL, DLINE_UNLINK);
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&dInfoPtr->styleTable);
     if (dInfoPtr->copyGC != None) {
 	Tk_FreeGC(textPtr->display, dInfoPtr->copyGC);
@@ -475,6 +708,16 @@ TkTextFreeDInfo(textPtr)
     if (dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
 	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr);
     }
+    if (dInfoPtr->lineUpdateTimer != NULL) {
+	Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(dInfoPtr->lineUpdateTimer);
+	textPtr->refCount--;
+	dInfoPtr->lineUpdateTimer = NULL;
+    }
+    if (dInfoPtr->scrollbarTimer != NULL) {
+	Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(dInfoPtr->scrollbarTimer);
+	textPtr->refCount--;
+	dInfoPtr->scrollbarTimer = NULL;
+    }
     ckfree((char *) dInfoPtr);
 }
 
@@ -483,8 +726,8 @@ TkTextFreeDInfo(textPtr)
  *
  * GetStyle --
  *
- *	This procedure creates all the information needed to display
- *	text at a particular location.
+ *	This function creates all the information needed to display text at a
+ *	particular location.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a pointer to a TextStyle structure that
@@ -497,47 +740,44 @@ TkTextFreeDInfo(textPtr)
  */
 
 static TextStyle *
-GetStyle(textPtr, indexPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information about text widget. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* The character in the text for which
-				 * display information is wanted. */
+GetStyle(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr)/* The character in the text for which display
+				 * information is wanted. */
 {
     TkTextTag **tagPtrs;
     register TkTextTag *tagPtr;
     StyleValues styleValues;
     TextStyle *stylePtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-    int numTags, new, i;
+    int numTags, isNew, i;
     XGCValues gcValues;
     unsigned long mask;
-
     /*
      * The variables below keep track of the highest-priority specification
      * that has occurred for each of the various fields of the StyleValues.
      */
-
     int borderPrio, borderWidthPrio, reliefPrio, bgStipplePrio;
     int fgPrio, fontPrio, fgStipplePrio;
     int underlinePrio, elidePrio, justifyPrio, offsetPrio;
     int lMargin1Prio, lMargin2Prio, rMarginPrio;
     int spacing1Prio, spacing2Prio, spacing3Prio;
-    int overstrikePrio, tabPrio, wrapPrio;
+    int overstrikePrio, tabPrio, tabStylePrio, wrapPrio;
 
     /*
-     * Find out what tags are present for the character, then compute
-     * a StyleValues structure corresponding to those tags (scan
-     * through all of the tags, saving information for the highest-
-     * priority tag).
+     * Find out what tags are present for the character, then compute a
+     * StyleValues structure corresponding to those tags (scan through all of
+     * the tags, saving information for the highest-priority tag).
      */
 
-    tagPtrs = TkBTreeGetTags(indexPtr, &numTags);
+    tagPtrs = TkBTreeGetTags(indexPtr, textPtr, &numTags);
     borderPrio = borderWidthPrio = reliefPrio = bgStipplePrio = -1;
     fgPrio = fontPrio = fgStipplePrio = -1;
     underlinePrio = elidePrio = justifyPrio = offsetPrio = -1;
     lMargin1Prio = lMargin2Prio = rMarginPrio = -1;
     spacing1Prio = spacing2Prio = spacing3Prio = -1;
-    overstrikePrio = tabPrio = wrapPrio = -1;
-    memset((VOID *) &styleValues, 0, sizeof(StyleValues));
+    overstrikePrio = tabPrio = tabStylePrio = wrapPrio = -1;
+    memset(&styleValues, 0, sizeof(StyleValues));
     styleValues.relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
     styleValues.fgColor = textPtr->fgColor;
     styleValues.tkfont = textPtr->tkfont;
@@ -546,33 +786,40 @@ GetStyle(textPtr, indexPtr)
     styleValues.spacing2 = textPtr->spacing2;
     styleValues.spacing3 = textPtr->spacing3;
     styleValues.tabArrayPtr = textPtr->tabArrayPtr;
+    styleValues.tabStyle = textPtr->tabStyle;
     styleValues.wrapMode = textPtr->wrapMode;
     styleValues.elide = 0;
+
     for (i = 0 ; i < numTags; i++) {
+	Tk_3DBorder border;
+
 	tagPtr = tagPtrs[i];
+	border = tagPtr->border;
 
 	/*
-	 * Skip the selection tag if we don't have focus,
-	 * unless we always want to show the selection.
+	 * If this is the selection tag, and inactiveSelBorder is NULL (the
+	 * default on Windows), then we need to skip it if we don't have the
+	 * focus.
 	 */
 
-	if (
-#ifndef MAC_OSX_TK
-		!TkpAlwaysShowSelection(textPtr->tkwin)
-#else
-		/* Don't show inactive selection in disabled widgets. */
-		textPtr->state == TK_STATE_DISABLED
+	if ((tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) && !(textPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)) {
+	    if (textPtr->inactiveSelBorder == NULL
+#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
+		    /* Don't show inactive selection in disabled widgets. */
+		    || textPtr->state == TK_TEXT_STATE_DISABLED
 #endif
-		&& (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr)
-		&& !(textPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)) {
-	    continue;
+	    ) {
+		continue;
+	    }
+	    border = textPtr->inactiveSelBorder;
 	}
 
-	if ((tagPtr->border != NULL) && (tagPtr->priority > borderPrio)) {
-	    styleValues.border = tagPtr->border;
+	if ((border != NULL) && (tagPtr->priority > borderPrio)) {
+	    styleValues.border = border;
 	    borderPrio = tagPtr->priority;
 	}
-	if ((tagPtr->bdString != NULL)
+	if ((tagPtr->borderWidthPtr != NULL)
+		&& (Tcl_GetString(tagPtr->borderWidthPtr)[0] != '\0')
 		&& (tagPtr->priority > borderWidthPrio)) {
 	    styleValues.borderWidth = tagPtr->borderWidth;
 	    borderWidthPrio = tagPtr->priority;
@@ -648,11 +895,16 @@ GetStyle(textPtr, indexPtr)
 	    styleValues.spacing3 = tagPtr->spacing3;
 	    spacing3Prio = tagPtr->priority;
 	}
-	if ((tagPtr->tabString != NULL)
+	if ((tagPtr->tabStringPtr != NULL)
 		&& (tagPtr->priority > tabPrio)) {
 	    styleValues.tabArrayPtr = tagPtr->tabArrayPtr;
 	    tabPrio = tagPtr->priority;
 	}
+	if ((tagPtr->tabStyle != TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_NONE)
+		&& (tagPtr->priority > tabStylePrio)) {
+	    styleValues.tabStyle = tagPtr->tabStyle;
+	    tabStylePrio = tagPtr->priority;
+	}
 	if ((tagPtr->underlineString != NULL)
 		&& (tagPtr->priority > underlinePrio)) {
 	    styleValues.underline = tagPtr->underline;
@@ -678,15 +930,15 @@ GetStyle(textPtr, indexPtr)
      */
 
     hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->dInfoPtr->styleTable,
-	    (char *) &styleValues, &new);
-    if (!new) {
+	    (char *) &styleValues, &isNew);
+    if (!isNew) {
 	stylePtr = (TextStyle *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 	stylePtr->refCount++;
 	return stylePtr;
     }
 
     /*
-     * No existing style matched.  Make a new one.
+     * No existing style matched. Make a new one.
      */
 
     stylePtr = (TextStyle *) ckalloc(sizeof(TextStyle));
@@ -725,25 +977,25 @@ GetStyle(textPtr, indexPtr)
  *
  * FreeStyle --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when a TextStyle structure is no longer
- *	needed.  It decrements the reference count and frees up the
- *	space for the style structure if the reference count is 0.
+ *	This function is called when a TextStyle structure is no longer
+ *	needed. It decrements the reference count and frees up the space for
+ *	the style structure if the reference count is 0.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The storage and other resources associated with the style
- *	are freed up if no-one's still using it.
+ *	The storage and other resources associated with the style are freed up
+ *	if no-one's still using it.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-FreeStyle(textPtr, stylePtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Information about overall widget. */
-    register TextStyle *stylePtr;	/* Information about style to free. */
-
+FreeStyle(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about overall widget. */
+    register TextStyle *stylePtr)
+				/* Information about style to free. */
 {
     stylePtr->refCount--;
     if (stylePtr->refCount == 0) {
@@ -763,70 +1015,91 @@ FreeStyle(textPtr, stylePtr)
  *
  * LayoutDLine --
  *
- *	This procedure generates a single DLine structure for a display
- *	line whose leftmost character is given by indexPtr.
- *	
+ *	This function generates a single DLine structure for a display line
+ *	whose leftmost character is given by indexPtr.
+ *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a pointer to a DLine structure desribing the
- *	display line.  All fields are filled in and correct except for
- *	y and nextPtr.
+ *	display line. All fields are filled in and correct except for y and
+ *	nextPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Storage is allocated for the new DLine.
  *
+ *	See the comments in 'GetYView' for some thoughts on what the side-
+ *	effects of this call (or its callers) should be; the synchronisation
+ *	of TkTextLine->pixelHeight with the sum of the results of this
+ *	function operating on all display lines within each logical line.
+ *	Ideally the code should be refactored to ensure the cached pixel
+ *	height is never behind what is known when this function is called
+ *	elsewhere.
+ *
+ *	Unfortunately, this function is currently called from many different
+ *	places, not just to layout a display line for actual display, but also
+ *	simply to calculate some metric or other of one or more display lines
+ *	(typically the height). It would be a good idea to do some profiling
+ *	of typical text widget usage and the way in which this is called and
+ *	see if some optimization could or should be done.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static DLine *
-LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information about text widget. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Beginning of display line.  May not
-				 * necessarily point to a character segment. */
+LayoutDLine(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr)/* Beginning of display line. May not
+				 * necessarily point to a character
+				 * segment. */
 {
-    register DLine *dlPtr;		/* New display line. */
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;		/* Current segment in text. */
-    TkTextDispChunk *lastChunkPtr;	/* Last chunk allocated so far
-					 * for line. */
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Current chunk. */
+    register DLine *dlPtr;	/* New display line. */
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr;	/* Current segment in text. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *lastChunkPtr;
+				/* Last chunk allocated so far for line. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;	/* Current chunk. */
     TkTextIndex curIndex;
-    TkTextDispChunk *breakChunkPtr;	/* Chunk containing best word break
-					 * point, if any. */
-    TkTextIndex breakIndex;		/* Index of first character in
-					 * breakChunkPtr. */
-    int breakByteOffset;		/* Byte offset of character within
-					 * breakChunkPtr just to right of best
-					 * break point. */
-    int noCharsYet;			/* Non-zero means that no characters
-					 * have been placed on the line yet. */
-    int justify;			/* How to justify line: taken from
-					 * style for the first character in
-					 * line. */
-    int jIndent;			/* Additional indentation (beyond
-					 * margins) due to justification. */
-    int rMargin;			/* Right margin width for line. */
-    TkWrapMode wrapMode;		/* Wrap mode to use for this line. */
-    int x = 0, maxX = 0;		/* Initializations needed only to
-					 * stop compiler warnings. */
-    int wholeLine;			/* Non-zero means this display line
-					 * runs to the end of the text line. */
-    int tabIndex;			/* Index of the current tab stop. */
-    int gotTab;				/* Non-zero means the current chunk
-					 * contains a tab. */
-    TkTextDispChunk *tabChunkPtr;	/* Pointer to the chunk containing
-					 * the previous tab stop. */
-    int maxBytes;			/* Maximum number of bytes to
-					 * include in this chunk. */
-    TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr;	/* Tab stops for line; taken from
-					 * style for the first character on
-					 * line. */
-    int tabSize;			/* Number of pixels consumed by current
-					 * tab stop. */
-    TkTextDispChunk *lastCharChunkPtr;	/* Pointer to last chunk in display
-					 * lines with numBytes > 0.  Used to
-					 * drop 0-sized chunks from the end
-					 * of the line. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *breakChunkPtr;
+				/* Chunk containing best word break point, if
+				 * any. */
+    TkTextIndex breakIndex;	/* Index of first character in
+				 * breakChunkPtr. */
+    int breakByteOffset;	/* Byte offset of character within
+				 * breakChunkPtr just to right of best break
+				 * point. */
+    int noCharsYet;		/* Non-zero means that no characters have been
+				 * placed on the line yet. */
+    int paragraphStart;		/* Non-zero means that we are on the first
+				 * line of a paragraph (used to choose between
+				 * lmargin1, lmargin2). */
+    int justify;		/* How to justify line: taken from style for
+				 * the first character in line. */
+    int jIndent;		/* Additional indentation (beyond margins) due
+				 * to justification. */
+    int rMargin;		/* Right margin width for line. */
+    TkWrapMode wrapMode;	/* Wrap mode to use for this line. */
+    int x = 0, maxX = 0;	/* Initializations needed only to stop
+				 * compiler warnings. */
+    int wholeLine;		/* Non-zero means this display line runs to
+				 * the end of the text line. */
+    int tabIndex;		/* Index of the current tab stop. */
+    int gotTab;			/* Non-zero means the current chunk contains a
+				 * tab. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *tabChunkPtr;
+				/* Pointer to the chunk containing the
+				 * previous tab stop. */
+    int maxBytes;		/* Maximum number of bytes to include in this
+				 * chunk. */
+    TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr;/* Tab stops for line; taken from style for
+				 * the first character on line. */
+    int tabStyle;		/* One of TABULAR or WORDPROCESSOR. */
+    int tabSize;		/* Number of pixels consumed by current tab
+				 * stop. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *lastCharChunkPtr;
+				/* Pointer to last chunk in display lines with
+				 * numBytes > 0. Used to drop 0-sized chunks
+				 * from the end of the line. */
     int byteOffset, ascent, descent, code, elide, elidesize;
     StyleValues *sValuePtr;
+    TkTextElideInfo info;	/* Keep track of elide state. */
 
     /*
      * Create and initialize a new DLine structure.
@@ -836,33 +1109,91 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
     dlPtr->index = *indexPtr;
     dlPtr->byteCount = 0;
     dlPtr->y = 0;
-    dlPtr->oldY = -1;
+    dlPtr->oldY = 0;		/* Only set to avoid compiler warnings. */
     dlPtr->height = 0;
     dlPtr->baseline = 0;
     dlPtr->chunkPtr = NULL;
     dlPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
-    dlPtr->flags = NEW_LAYOUT;
+    dlPtr->flags = NEW_LAYOUT | OLD_Y_INVALID;
+    dlPtr->logicalLinesMerged = 0;
 
     /*
-     * Special case entirely elide line as there may be 1000s or more
+     * This is not necessarily totally correct, where we have merged logical
+     * lines. Fixing this would require a quite significant overhaul, though,
+     * so currently we make do with this.
      */
-    elide = TkTextIsElided(textPtr, indexPtr);		/* save a malloc */
-    if (elide && indexPtr->byteIndex==0) {
+
+    paragraphStart = (indexPtr->byteIndex == 0);
+
+    /*
+     * Special case entirely elide line as there may be 1000s or more.
+     */
+
+    elide = TkTextIsElided(textPtr, indexPtr, &info);
+    if (elide && indexPtr->byteIndex == 0) {
 	maxBytes = 0;
-	for (segPtr = indexPtr->linePtr->segPtr;
-	     elide && (segPtr != NULL);
-	     segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    if ((elidesize = segPtr->size) > 0) {
-		maxBytes += elidesize;
+	for (segPtr = info.segPtr; segPtr != NULL; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (segPtr->size > 0) {
+		if (elide == 0) {
+		    /*
+		     * We toggled a tag and the elide state changed to
+		     * visible, and we have something of non-zero size.
+		     * Therefore we must bail out.
+		     */
+
+		    break;
+		}
+		maxBytes += segPtr->size;
+
 		/*
-		 * If have we have a tag toggle, there is a chance
-		 * that invisibility state changed, so bail out
+		 * Reset tag elide priority, since we're on a new character.
 		 */
+
 	    } else if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)
 		    || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) {
-		if (segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
-		    elide = (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)
-			^ segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elide;
+		TkTextTag *tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr;
+
+		/*
+		 * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the
+		 * current highest priority tag (and is therefore being
+		 * toggled off), or it's a new tag with higher priority.
+		 */
+
+		if (tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
+		    info.tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++;
+		    if (info.tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] & 1) {
+			info.tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr;
+		    }
+		    if (tagPtr->priority >= info.elidePriority) {
+			if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) {
+			    /*
+			     * If it is being toggled off, and it has an elide
+			     * string, it must actually be the current highest
+			     * priority tag, so this check is redundant:
+			     */
+
+			    if (tagPtr->priority != info.elidePriority) {
+				Tcl_Panic("Bad tag priority being toggled off");
+			    }
+
+			    /*
+			     * Find previous elide tag, if any (if not then
+			     * elide will be zero, of course).
+			     */
+
+			    elide = 0;
+			    while (--info.elidePriority > 0) {
+				if (info.tagCnts[info.elidePriority] & 1) {
+				    elide = info.tagPtrs[info.elidePriority]
+					    ->elide;
+				    break;
+				}
+			    }
+			} else {
+			    elide = tagPtr->elide;
+			    info.elidePriority = tagPtr->priority;
+			}
+		    }
 		}
 	    }
 	}
@@ -870,15 +1201,31 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
 	if (elide) {
 	    dlPtr->byteCount = maxBytes;
 	    dlPtr->spaceAbove = dlPtr->spaceBelow = dlPtr->length = 0;
+	    if (dlPtr->index.byteIndex == 0) {
+		/*
+		 * Elided state goes from beginning to end of an entire
+		 * logical line. This means we can update the line's pixel
+		 * height, and bring its pixel calculation up to date.
+		 */
+
+		TkBTreeLinePixelEpoch(textPtr, dlPtr->index.linePtr)
+			= textPtr->dInfoPtr->lineMetricUpdateEpoch;
+
+		if (TkBTreeLinePixelCount(textPtr,dlPtr->index.linePtr) != 0) {
+		    TkBTreeAdjustPixelHeight(textPtr,
+			    dlPtr->index.linePtr, 0, 0);
+		}
+	    }
+	    TkTextFreeElideInfo(&info);
 	    return dlPtr;
 	}
     }
+    TkTextFreeElideInfo(&info);
 
     /*
-     * Each iteration of the loop below creates one TkTextDispChunk for
-     * the new display line.  The line will always have at least one
-     * chunk (for the newline character at the end, if there's nothing
-     * else available).
+     * Each iteration of the loop below creates one TkTextDispChunk for the
+     * new display line. The line will always have at least one chunk (for the
+     * newline character at the end, if there's nothing else available).
      */
 
     curIndex = *indexPtr;
@@ -892,53 +1239,108 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
     tabIndex = -1;
     tabChunkPtr = NULL;
     tabArrayPtr = NULL;
+    tabStyle = TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_TABULAR;
     rMargin = 0;
     wrapMode = TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR;
     tabSize = 0;
     lastCharChunkPtr = NULL;
 
     /*
-     * Find the first segment to consider for the line.  Can't call
-     * TkTextIndexToSeg for this because it won't return a segment
-     * with zero size (such as the insertion cursor's mark).
+     * Find the first segment to consider for the line. Can't call
+     * TkTextIndexToSeg for this because it won't return a segment with zero
+     * size (such as the insertion cursor's mark).
      */
 
-    for (byteOffset = curIndex.byteIndex, segPtr = curIndex.linePtr->segPtr;
-	 (byteOffset > 0) && (byteOffset >= segPtr->size);
-	 byteOffset -= segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-	/* Empty loop body. */
+  connectNextLogicalLine:
+    byteOffset = curIndex.byteIndex;
+    segPtr = curIndex.linePtr->segPtr;
+    while ((byteOffset > 0) && (byteOffset >= segPtr->size)) {
+	byteOffset -= segPtr->size;
+	segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
+
+	if (segPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Two logical lines merged into one display line through eliding
+	     * of a newline.
+	     */
+
+	    TkTextLine *linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, curIndex.linePtr);
+	    if (linePtr != NULL) {
+		dlPtr->logicalLinesMerged++;
+		curIndex.byteIndex = 0;
+		curIndex.linePtr = linePtr;
+		segPtr = curIndex.linePtr->segPtr;
+	    } else {
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
     }
 
     while (segPtr != NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * Every line still gets at least one chunk due to expectations
-	 * in the rest of the code, but we are able to skip elided portions
-	 * of the line quickly.
-	 * If current chunk is elided and last chunk was too, coalese
+	 * Every logical line still gets at least one chunk due to
+	 * expectations in the rest of the code, but we are able to skip
+	 * elided portions of the line quickly.
+	 *
+	 * If current chunk is elided and last chunk was too, coalese.
+	 *
+	 * This also means that each logical line which is entirely elided
+	 * still gets laid out into a DLine, but with zero height. This isn't
+	 * particularly a problem, but it does seem somewhat unnecessary. We
+	 * may wish to redesign the code to remove these zero height DLines in
+	 * the future.
 	 */
+
 	if (elide && (lastChunkPtr != NULL)
 		&& (lastChunkPtr->displayProc == NULL /*ElideDisplayProc*/)) {
-	    if ((elidesize = segPtr->size - byteOffset) > 0) {
+	    elidesize = segPtr->size - byteOffset;
+	    if (elidesize > 0) {
 		curIndex.byteIndex += elidesize;
 		lastChunkPtr->numBytes += elidesize;
-		breakByteOffset = lastChunkPtr->breakIndex = lastChunkPtr->numBytes;
+		breakByteOffset = lastChunkPtr->breakIndex
+			= lastChunkPtr->numBytes;
+
 		/*
-		 * If have we have a tag toggle, there is a chance
-		 * that invisibility state changed, so bail out
+		 * If have we have a tag toggle, there is a chance that
+		 * invisibility state changed, so bail out.
 		 */
 	    } else if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)
 		    || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) {
 		if (segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
 		    elide = (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)
-			^ segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elide;
+			    ^ segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->elide;
 		}
 	    }
 
 	    byteOffset = 0;
 	    segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
+
+	    if (segPtr == NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * Two logical lines merged into one display line through
+		 * eliding of a newline.
+		 */
+
+		TkTextLine *linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, curIndex.linePtr);
+
+		if (linePtr != NULL) {
+		    dlPtr->logicalLinesMerged++;
+		    curIndex.byteIndex = 0;
+		    curIndex.linePtr = linePtr;
+		    goto connectNextLogicalLine;
+		}
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * Code no longer needed, now that we allow logical lines to merge
+	     * into a single display line.
+	     *
 	    if (segPtr == NULL && chunkPtr != NULL) {
 		ckfree((char *) chunkPtr);
+		chunkPtr = NULL;
 	    }
+	     */
+
 	    continue;
 	}
 
@@ -950,24 +1352,44 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
 	if (chunkPtr == NULL) {
 	    chunkPtr = (TkTextDispChunk *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextDispChunk));
 	    chunkPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
+	    chunkPtr->clientData = NULL;
 	}
 	chunkPtr->stylePtr = GetStyle(textPtr, &curIndex);
 	elide = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->elide;
 
 	/*
-	 * Save style information such as justification and indentation,
-	 * up until the first character is encountered, then retain that
+	 * Save style information such as justification and indentation, up
+	 * until the first character is encountered, then retain that
 	 * information for the rest of the line.
 	 */
 
-	if (noCharsYet) {
+	if (!elide && noCharsYet) {
 	    tabArrayPtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tabArrayPtr;
+	    tabStyle = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tabStyle;
 	    justify = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->justify;
 	    rMargin = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->rMargin;
 	    wrapMode = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->wrapMode;
-	    x = ((curIndex.byteIndex == 0)
-		    ? chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->lMargin1
-		    : chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->lMargin2);
+
+	    /*
+	     * See above - this test may not be entirely correct where we have
+	     * partially elided lines (and therefore merged logical lines).
+	     * In such a case a byteIndex of zero doesn't necessarily mean the
+	     * beginning of a logical line.
+	     */
+
+	    if (paragraphStart) {
+		/*
+		 * Beginning of logical line.
+		 */
+
+		x = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->lMargin1;
+	    } else {
+		/*
+		 * Beginning of display line.
+		 */
+
+		x = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->lMargin2;
+	    }
 	    if (wrapMode == TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE) {
 		maxX = -1;
 	    } else {
@@ -979,18 +1401,19 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
 	    }
 	}
 
-	/*
-	 * See if there is a tab in the current chunk; if so, only
-	 * layout characters up to (and including) the tab.
-	 */
-
 	gotTab = 0;
 	maxBytes = segPtr->size - byteOffset;
-	if (!elide && justify == TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT) {
-	    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
+	if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
+
+	    /*
+	     * See if there is a tab in the current chunk; if so, only layout
+	     * characters up to (and including) the tab.
+	     */
+
+	    if (!elide && justify == TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT) {
 		char *p;
 
-		for (p = segPtr->body.chars  + byteOffset; *p != 0; p++) {
+		for (p = segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset; *p != 0; p++) {
 		    if (*p == '\t') {
 			maxBytes = (p + 1 - segPtr->body.chars) - byteOffset;
 			gotTab = 1;
@@ -998,25 +1421,48 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
 		    }
 		}
 	    }
+
+#if TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+	    if (baseCharChunkPtr != NULL) {
+		int expectedX =
+			((BaseCharInfo *) baseCharChunkPtr->clientData)->width
+			+ baseCharChunkPtr->x;
+
+		if ((expectedX != x) || !IsSameFGStyle(
+			baseCharChunkPtr->stylePtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr)) {
+		    FinalizeBaseChunk(NULL);
+		}
+	    }
+#endif /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
 	}
 	chunkPtr->x = x;
-	if (elide && maxBytes) {
-	    /* don't free style here, as other code expects to be able to do that */
-	    /*breakByteOffset =*/ chunkPtr->breakIndex = chunkPtr->numBytes = maxBytes;
+	if (elide /*&& maxBytes*/) {
+	    /*
+	     * Don't free style here, as other code expects to be able to do
+	     * that.
+	     */
+
+	    /* breakByteOffset =*/
+	    chunkPtr->breakIndex = chunkPtr->numBytes = maxBytes;
 	    chunkPtr->width = 0;
-	    chunkPtr->minAscent = chunkPtr->minDescent = chunkPtr->minHeight = 0;
+	    chunkPtr->minAscent = chunkPtr->minDescent
+		    = chunkPtr->minHeight = 0;
 
-	    /* would just like to point to canonical empty chunk */
-	    chunkPtr->displayProc = (Tk_ChunkDisplayProc *) NULL;
-	    chunkPtr->undisplayProc = (Tk_ChunkUndisplayProc *) NULL;
+	    /*
+	     * Would just like to point to canonical empty chunk.
+	     */
+
+	    chunkPtr->displayProc = NULL;
+	    chunkPtr->undisplayProc = NULL;
 	    chunkPtr->measureProc = ElideMeasureProc;
 	    chunkPtr->bboxProc = ElideBboxProc;
 
 	    code = 1;
-	} else
-	code = (*segPtr->typePtr->layoutProc)(textPtr, &curIndex, segPtr,
-		byteOffset, maxX-tabSize, maxBytes, noCharsYet, wrapMode,
-		chunkPtr);
+	} else {
+	    code = (*segPtr->typePtr->layoutProc)(textPtr, &curIndex, segPtr,
+		    byteOffset, maxX-tabSize, maxBytes, noCharsYet, wrapMode,
+		    chunkPtr);
+	}
 	if (code <= 0) {
 	    FreeStyle(textPtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr);
 	    if (code < 0) {
@@ -1031,8 +1477,8 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * No characters from this segment fit in the window: this
-	     * means we're at the end of the display line.
+	     * No characters from this segment fit in the window: this means
+	     * we're at the end of the display line.
 	     */
 
 	    if (chunkPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1040,7 +1486,19 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
 	    }
 	    break;
 	}
-	if (chunkPtr->numBytes > 0) {
+
+	/*
+	 * We currently say we have some characters (and therefore something
+	 * from which to examine tag values for the first character of the
+	 * line) even if those characters are actually elided. This behaviour
+	 * is not well documented, and it might be more consistent to
+	 * completely ignore such elided characters and their tags. To do so
+	 * change this to:
+	 *
+	 * if (!elide && chunkPtr->numBytes > 0).
+	 */
+
+	if (!elide && chunkPtr->numBytes > 0) {
 	    noCharsYet = 0;
 	    lastCharChunkPtr = chunkPtr;
 	}
@@ -1062,9 +1520,9 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
 
 	/*
 	 * If we're at a new tab, adjust the layout for all the chunks
-	 * pertaining to the previous tab.  Also adjust the amount of
-	 * space left in the line to account for space that will be eaten
-	 * up by the tab.
+	 * pertaining to the previous tab. Also adjust the amount of space
+	 * left in the line to account for space that will be eaten up by the
+	 * tab.
 	 */
 
 	if (gotTab) {
@@ -1072,9 +1530,9 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
 		AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, tabIndex, tabChunkPtr);
 		x = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width;
 	    }
-	    tabIndex++;
 	    tabChunkPtr = chunkPtr;
-	    tabSize = SizeOfTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, tabIndex, x, maxX);
+	    tabSize = SizeOfTab(textPtr, tabStyle, tabArrayPtr, &tabIndex, x,
+		    maxX);
 	    if ((maxX >= 0) && (tabSize >= maxX - x)) {
 		break;
 	    }
@@ -1084,28 +1542,60 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
 	if (byteOffset >= segPtr->size) {
 	    byteOffset = 0;
 	    segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
+	    if (elide && segPtr == NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * An elided section started on this line, and carries on
+		 * until the newline. Hence the newline is actually elided,
+		 * and we want to merge the display of the next logical line
+		 * with this one.
+		 */
+
+		TkTextLine *linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, curIndex.linePtr);
+
+		if (linePtr != NULL) {
+		    dlPtr->logicalLinesMerged++;
+		    curIndex.byteIndex = 0;
+		    curIndex.linePtr = linePtr;
+		    chunkPtr = NULL;
+		    goto connectNextLogicalLine;
+		}
+	    }
 	}
 
 	chunkPtr = NULL;
     }
+#if TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+    FinalizeBaseChunk(NULL);
+#endif /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
     if (noCharsYet) {
-	panic("LayoutDLine couldn't place any characters on a line");
+	dlPtr->spaceAbove = 0;
+	dlPtr->spaceBelow = 0;
+	dlPtr->length = 0;
+
+	/*
+	 * We used to Tcl_Panic here, saying that LayoutDLine couldn't place
+	 * any characters on a line, but I believe a more appropriate response
+	 * is to return a DLine with zero height. With elided lines, tag
+	 * transitions and asynchronous line height calculations, it is hard
+	 * to avoid this situation ever arising with the current code design.
+	 */
+
+	return dlPtr;
     }
     wholeLine = (segPtr == NULL);
 
     /*
-     * We're at the end of the display line.  Throw away everything
-     * after the most recent word break, if there is one;  this may
-     * potentially require the last chunk to be layed out again.
+     * We're at the end of the display line. Throw away everything after the
+     * most recent word break, if there is one; this may potentially require
+     * the last chunk to be layed out again.
      */
 
     if (breakChunkPtr == NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * This code makes sure that we don't accidentally display
-	 * chunks with no characters at the end of the line (such as
-	 * the insertion cursor).  These chunks belong on the next
-	 * line.  So, throw away everything after the last chunk that
-	 * has characters in it.
+	 * This code makes sure that we don't accidentally display chunks with
+	 * no characters at the end of the line (such as the insertion
+	 * cursor). These chunks belong on the next line. So, throw away
+	 * everything after the last chunk that has characters in it.
 	 */
 
 	breakChunkPtr = lastCharChunkPtr;
@@ -1120,21 +1610,27 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
 	    }
 	    FreeStyle(textPtr, chunkPtr->stylePtr);
 	    breakChunkPtr->nextPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr;
-	    (*chunkPtr->undisplayProc)(textPtr, chunkPtr);
+	    if (chunkPtr->undisplayProc != NULL) {
+		(*chunkPtr->undisplayProc)(textPtr, chunkPtr);
+	    }
 	    ckfree((char *) chunkPtr);
 	}
 	if (breakByteOffset != breakChunkPtr->numBytes) {
-	    (*breakChunkPtr->undisplayProc)(textPtr, breakChunkPtr);
+	    if (breakChunkPtr->undisplayProc != NULL) {
+		(*breakChunkPtr->undisplayProc)(textPtr, breakChunkPtr);
+	    }
 	    segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&breakIndex, &byteOffset);
 	    (*segPtr->typePtr->layoutProc)(textPtr, &breakIndex,
-		    segPtr, byteOffset, maxX, breakByteOffset, 0, 
+		    segPtr, byteOffset, maxX, breakByteOffset, 0,
 		    wrapMode, breakChunkPtr);
+#if TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+	    FinalizeBaseChunk(NULL);
+#endif /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
 	}
 	lastChunkPtr = breakChunkPtr;
 	wholeLine = 0;
     }
 
-
     /*
      * Make tab adjustments for the last tab stop, if there is one.
      */
@@ -1144,16 +1640,15 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Make one more pass over the line to recompute various things
-     * like its height, length, and total number of bytes.  Also
-     * modify the x-locations of chunks to reflect justification.
-     * If we're not wrapping, I'm not sure what is the best way to
-     * handle left and center justification:  should the total length,
-     * for purposes of justification, be (a) the window width, (b)
-     * the length of the longest line in the window, or (c) the length
-     * of the longest line in the text?  (c) isn't available, (b) seems
-     * weird, since it can change with vertical scrolling, so (a) is
-     * what is implemented below.
+     * Make one more pass over the line to recompute various things like its
+     * height, length, and total number of bytes. Also modify the x-locations
+     * of chunks to reflect justification. If we're not wrapping, I'm not sure
+     * what is the best way to handle left and center justification: should
+     * the total length, for purposes of justification, be (a) the window
+     * width, (b) the length of the longest line in the window, or (c) the
+     * length of the longest line in the text? (c) isn't available, (b) seems
+     * weird, since it can change with vertical scrolling, so (a) is what is
+     * implemented below.
      */
 
     if (wrapMode == TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE) {
@@ -1208,10 +1703,11 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
     dlPtr->baseline += dlPtr->spaceAbove;
 
     /*
-     * Recompute line length:  may have changed because of justification.
+     * Recompute line length: may have changed because of justification.
      */
 
     dlPtr->length = lastChunkPtr->x + lastChunkPtr->width;
+
     return dlPtr;
 }
 
@@ -1220,38 +1716,37 @@ LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr)
  *
  * UpdateDisplayInfo --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to recompute some or all of the
- *	DLine structures for a text widget.  At the time it is called
- *	the DLine structures still left in the widget are guaranteed
- *	to be correct except that (a) the y-coordinates aren't
- *	necessarily correct, (b) there may be missing structures
- *	(the DLine structures get removed as soon as they are potentially
- *	out-of-date), and (c) DLine structures that don't start at the
- *	beginning of a line may be incorrect if previous information in
- *	the same line changed size in a way that moved a line boundary
- *	(DLines for any info that changed will have been deleted, but
- *	not DLines for unchanged info in the same text line).
+ *	This function is invoked to recompute some or all of the DLine
+ *	structures for a text widget. At the time it is called the DLine
+ *	structures still left in the widget are guaranteed to be correct
+ *	except that (a) the y-coordinates aren't necessarily correct, (b)
+ *	there may be missing structures (the DLine structures get removed as
+ *	soon as they are potentially out-of-date), and (c) DLine structures
+ *	that don't start at the beginning of a line may be incorrect if
+ *	previous information in the same line changed size in a way that moved
+ *	a line boundary (DLines for any info that changed will have been
+ *	deleted, but not DLines for unchanged info in the same text line).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Upon return, the DLine information for textPtr correctly reflects
- *	the positions where characters will be displayed.  However, this
- *	procedure doesn't actually bring the display up-to-date.
+ *	Upon return, the DLine information for textPtr correctly reflects the
+ *	positions where characters will be displayed. However, this function
+ *	doesn't actually bring the display up-to-date.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Text widget to update. */
+UpdateDisplayInfo(
+    TkText *textPtr)		/* Text widget to update. */
 {
     register TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
     register DLine *dlPtr, *prevPtr;
     TkTextIndex index;
     TkTextLine *lastLinePtr;
-    int y, maxY, pixelOffset, maxOffset;
+    int y, maxY, xPixelOffset, maxOffset, lineHeight;
 
     if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE)) {
 	return;
@@ -1265,21 +1760,24 @@ UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr)
     index = textPtr->topIndex;
     dlPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, &index);
     if ((dlPtr != NULL) && (dlPtr != dInfoPtr->dLinePtr)) {
-	FreeDLines(textPtr, dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, dlPtr, 1);
+	FreeDLines(textPtr, dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, dlPtr, DLINE_UNLINK);
+    }
+    if (index.byteIndex == 0) {
+	lineHeight = 0;
+    } else {
+	lineHeight = -1;
     }
 
     /*
-     *--------------------------------------------------------------
-     * Scan through the contents of the window from top to bottom,
-     * recomputing information for lines that are missing.
-     *--------------------------------------------------------------
+     * Scan through the contents of the window from top to bottom, recomputing
+     * information for lines that are missing.
      */
 
-    lastLinePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree,
-	    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree));
+    lastLinePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+	    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr));
     dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr;
     prevPtr = NULL;
-    y = dInfoPtr->y;
+    y = dInfoPtr->y - dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset;
     maxY = dInfoPtr->maxY;
     while (1) {
 	register DLine *newPtr;
@@ -1292,22 +1790,20 @@ UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr)
 	 * There are three possibilities right now:
 	 * (a) the next DLine (dlPtr) corresponds exactly to the next
 	 *     information we want to display: just use it as-is.
-	 * (b) the next DLine corresponds to a different line, or to
-	 *     a segment that will be coming later in the same line:
-	 *     leave this DLine alone in the hopes that we'll be able
-	 *     to use it later, then create a new DLine in front of
-	 *     it.
-	 * (c) the next DLine corresponds to a segment in the line we
-	 *     want, but it's a segment that has already been processed
-	 *     or will never be processed.  Delete the DLine and try
-	 *     again.
+	 * (b) the next DLine corresponds to a different line, or to a segment
+	 *     that will be coming later in the same line: leave this DLine
+	 *     alone in the hopes that we'll be able to use it later, then
+	 *     create a new DLine in front of it.
+	 * (c) the next DLine corresponds to a segment in the line we want,
+	 *     but it's a segment that has already been processed or will
+	 *     never be processed. Delete the DLine and try again.
 	 *
-	 * One other twist on all this.  It's possible for 3D borders
-	 * to interact between lines (see DisplayLineBackground) so if
-	 * a line is relayed out and has styles with 3D borders, its
-	 * neighbors have to be redrawn if they have 3D borders too,
-	 * since the interactions could have changed (the neighbors
-	 * don't have to be relayed out, just redrawn).
+	 * One other twist on all this. It's possible for 3D borders to
+	 * interact between lines (see DisplayLineBackground) so if a line is
+	 * relayed out and has styles with 3D borders, its neighbors have to
+	 * be redrawn if they have 3D borders too, since the interactions
+	 * could have changed (the neighbors don't have to be relayed out,
+	 * just redrawn).
 	 */
 
 	if ((dlPtr == NULL) || (dlPtr->index.linePtr != index.linePtr)) {
@@ -1315,20 +1811,17 @@ UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr)
 	     * Case (b) -- must make new DLine.
 	     */
 
-	    makeNewDLine:
+	makeNewDLine:
 	    if (tkTextDebug) {
 		char string[TK_POS_CHARS];
 
 		/*
-		 * Debugging is enabled, so keep a log of all the lines
-		 * that were re-layed out.  The test suite uses this
-		 * information.
+		 * Debugging is enabled, so keep a log of all the lines that
+		 * were re-layed out. The test suite uses this information.
 		 */
 
-		TkTextPrintIndex(&index, string);
-		Tcl_SetVar2(textPtr->interp, "tk_textRelayout", (char *) NULL,
-			string,
-			TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT);
+		TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &index, string);
+		LOG("tk_textRelayout", string);
 	    }
 	    newPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index);
 	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
@@ -1336,25 +1829,25 @@ UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr)
 	    } else {
 		prevPtr->nextPtr = newPtr;
 		if (prevPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER) {
-		    prevPtr->oldY = -1;
+		    prevPtr->flags |= OLD_Y_INVALID;
 		}
 	    }
 	    newPtr->nextPtr = dlPtr;
 	    dlPtr = newPtr;
 	} else {
 	    /*
-	     * DlPtr refers to the line we want.  Next check the
-	     * index within the line.
+	     * DlPtr refers to the line we want. Next check the index within
+	     * the line.
 	     */
 
 	    if (index.byteIndex == dlPtr->index.byteIndex) {
 		/*
-		 * Case (a) -- can use existing display line as-is.
+		 * Case (a) - can use existing display line as-is.
 		 */
 
 		if ((dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER) && (prevPtr != NULL)
 			&& (prevPtr->flags & (NEW_LAYOUT))) {
-		    dlPtr->oldY = -1;
+		    dlPtr->flags |= OLD_Y_INVALID;
 		}
 		goto lineOK;
 	    }
@@ -1363,12 +1856,12 @@ UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr)
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Case (c) -- dlPtr is useless.  Discard it and start
-	     * again with the next display line.
+	     * Case (c) - dlPtr is useless. Discard it and start again with
+	     * the next display line.
 	     */
 
 	    newPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr;
-	    FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, newPtr, 0);
+	    FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, newPtr, DLINE_FREE);
 	    dlPtr = newPtr;
 	    if (prevPtr != NULL) {
 		prevPtr->nextPtr = newPtr;
@@ -1382,16 +1875,19 @@ UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr)
 	 * Advance to the start of the next line.
 	 */
 
-	lineOK:
+    lineOK:
 	dlPtr->y = y;
 	y += dlPtr->height;
-	TkTextIndexForwBytes(&index, dlPtr->byteCount, &index);
+	if (lineHeight != -1) {
+	    lineHeight += dlPtr->height;
+	}
+	TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &index, dlPtr->byteCount, &index);
 	prevPtr = dlPtr;
 	dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr;
 
 	/*
-	 * If we switched text lines, delete any DLines left for the
-	 * old text line.
+	 * If we switched text lines, delete any DLines left for the old text
+	 * line.
 	 */
 
 	if (index.linePtr != prevPtr->index.linePtr) {
@@ -1403,17 +1899,46 @@ UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr)
 		nextPtr = nextPtr->nextPtr;
 	    }
 	    if (nextPtr != dlPtr) {
-		FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, nextPtr, 0);
+		FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, nextPtr, DLINE_FREE);
 		prevPtr->nextPtr = nextPtr;
 		dlPtr = nextPtr;
 	    }
+
+	    if ((lineHeight != -1) && (TkBTreeLinePixelCount(textPtr,
+		    prevPtr->index.linePtr) != lineHeight)) {
+		/*
+		 * The logical line height we just calculated is actually
+		 * differnt to the currently cached height of the text line.
+		 * That is fine (the text line heights are only calculated
+		 * asynchronously), but we must update the cached height so
+		 * that any counts made with DLine pointers are the same as
+		 * counts made through the BTree. This helps to ensure that
+		 * the scrollbar size corresponds accurately to that displayed
+		 * contents, even as the window is re-sized.
+		 */
+
+		TkBTreeAdjustPixelHeight(textPtr, prevPtr->index.linePtr,
+			lineHeight, 0);
+
+		/*
+		 * I believe we can be 100% sure that we started at the
+		 * beginning of the logical line, so we can also adjust the
+		 * 'pixelCalculationEpoch' to mark it as being up to date.
+		 * There is a slight concern that we might not have got this
+		 * right for the first line in the re-display.
+		 */
+
+		TkBTreeLinePixelEpoch(textPtr, prevPtr->index.linePtr) =
+			dInfoPtr->lineMetricUpdateEpoch;
+	    }
+	    lineHeight = 0;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * It's important to have the following check here rather than in
-	 * the while statement for the loop, so that there's always at least
-	 * one DLine generated, regardless of how small the window is.  This
-	 * keeps a lot of other code from breaking.
+	 * It's important to have the following check here rather than in the
+	 * while statement for the loop, so that there's always at least one
+	 * DLine generated, regardless of how small the window is. This keeps
+	 * a lot of other code from breaking.
 	 */
 
 	if (y >= maxY) {
@@ -1425,133 +1950,240 @@ UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr)
      * Delete any DLine structures that don't fit on the screen.
      */
 
-    FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 1);
+    FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, NULL, DLINE_UNLINK);
 
     /*
-     *--------------------------------------------------------------
-     * If there is extra space at the bottom of the window (because
-     * we've hit the end of the text), then bring in more lines at
-     * the top of the window, if there are any, to fill in the view.
-     *--------------------------------------------------------------
+     * If there is extra space at the bottom of the window (because we've hit
+     * the end of the text), then bring in more lines at the top of the
+     * window, if there are any, to fill in the view.
+     *
+     * Since the top line may only be partially visible, we try first to
+     * simply show more pixels from that line (newTopPixelOffset). If that
+     * isn't enough, we have to layout more lines.
      */
 
     if (y < maxY) {
-	int lineNum, spaceLeft, bytesToCount;
-	DLine *lowestPtr;
-
 	/*
-	 * Layout an entire text line (potentially > 1 display line),
-	 * then link in as many display lines as fit without moving
-	 * the bottom line out of the window.  Repeat this until
-	 * all the extra space has been used up or we've reached the
-	 * beginning of the text.
+	 * This counts how many vertical pixels we have left to fill by
+	 * pulling in more display pixels either from the first currently
+	 * displayed, or the lines above it.
 	 */
 
-	spaceLeft = maxY - y;
-	lineNum = TkBTreeLineIndex(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->index.linePtr);
-	bytesToCount = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->index.byteIndex;
-	if (bytesToCount == 0) {
-	    bytesToCount = INT_MAX;
-	    lineNum--;
-	}
-	for ( ; (lineNum >= 0) && (spaceLeft > 0); lineNum--) {
-	    index.linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree, lineNum);
-	    index.byteIndex = 0;
-	    lowestPtr = NULL;
+	int spaceLeft = maxY - y;
 
-	    do {
-		dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index);
-		dlPtr->nextPtr = lowestPtr;
-		lowestPtr = dlPtr;
-		if (dlPtr->length == 0 && dlPtr->height == 0) { bytesToCount--; break; }	/* elide */
-		TkTextIndexForwBytes(&index, dlPtr->byteCount, &index);
-		bytesToCount -= dlPtr->byteCount;
-	    } while ((bytesToCount > 0)
-		    && (index.linePtr == lowestPtr->index.linePtr));
+	if (spaceLeft <= dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset) {
+	    /*
+	     * We can fill up all the needed space just by showing more of the
+	     * current top line.
+	     */
+
+	    dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset -= spaceLeft;
+	    y += spaceLeft;
+	    spaceLeft = 0;
+	} else {
+	    int lineNum, bytesToCount;
+	    DLine *lowestPtr;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Scan through the display lines from the bottom one up to
-	     * the top one.
+	     * Add in all of the current top line, which won't be enough to
+	     * bring y up to maxY (if it was we would be in the 'if' block
+	     * above).
 	     */
 
-	    while (lowestPtr != NULL) {
-		dlPtr = lowestPtr;
-		spaceLeft -= dlPtr->height;
-		if (spaceLeft < 0) {
-		    break;
+	    y += dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset;
+	    dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset = 0;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Layout an entire text line (potentially > 1 display line), then
+	     * link in as many display lines as fit without moving the bottom
+	     * line out of the window. Repeat this until all the extra space
+	     * has been used up or we've reached the beginning of the text.
+	     */
+
+	    spaceLeft = maxY - y;
+	    if (dInfoPtr->dLinePtr == NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * No lines have been laid out. This must be an empty peer
+		 * widget.
+		 */
+
+                lineNum = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+                        textPtr) - 1;
+                bytesToCount = INT_MAX;
+	    } else {
+		lineNum = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr,
+			dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->index.linePtr);
+		bytesToCount = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->index.byteIndex;
+		if (bytesToCount == 0) {
+		    bytesToCount = INT_MAX;
+		    lineNum--;
+		}
+	    }
+	    for ( ; (lineNum >= 0) && (spaceLeft > 0); lineNum--) {
+		int pixelHeight = 0;
+
+		index.linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+			textPtr, lineNum);
+		index.byteIndex = 0;
+		lowestPtr = NULL;
+
+		do {
+		    dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index);
+		    pixelHeight += dlPtr->height;
+		    dlPtr->nextPtr = lowestPtr;
+		    lowestPtr = dlPtr;
+		    if (dlPtr->length == 0 && dlPtr->height == 0) {
+			bytesToCount--;
+			break;
+		    }	/* elide */
+		    TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &index, dlPtr->byteCount,
+			    &index);
+		    bytesToCount -= dlPtr->byteCount;
+		} while ((bytesToCount > 0)
+			&& (index.linePtr == lowestPtr->index.linePtr));
+
+		/*
+		 * We may not have examined the entire line (depending on the
+		 * value of 'bytesToCount', so we only want to set this if it
+		 * is genuinely bigger).
+		 */
+
+		if (pixelHeight > TkBTreeLinePixelCount(textPtr,
+			lowestPtr->index.linePtr)) {
+		    TkBTreeAdjustPixelHeight(textPtr,
+			    lowestPtr->index.linePtr, pixelHeight, 0);
+		    if (index.linePtr != lowestPtr->index.linePtr) {
+			/*
+			 * We examined the entire line, so can update the
+			 * epoch.
+			 */
+
+			TkBTreeLinePixelEpoch(textPtr,
+				lowestPtr->index.linePtr) =
+				dInfoPtr->lineMetricUpdateEpoch;
+		    }
 		}
-		lowestPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr;
-		dlPtr->nextPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr;
-		dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = dlPtr;
-		if (tkTextDebug) {
-		    char string[TK_POS_CHARS];
 
-		    TkTextPrintIndex(&dlPtr->index, string);
-		    Tcl_SetVar2(textPtr->interp, "tk_textRelayout",
-			    (char *) NULL, string,
-			    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT);
+		/*
+		 * Scan through the display lines from the bottom one up to
+		 * the top one.
+		 */
+
+		while (lowestPtr != NULL) {
+		    dlPtr = lowestPtr;
+		    spaceLeft -= dlPtr->height;
+		    lowestPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr;
+		    dlPtr->nextPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr;
+		    dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = dlPtr;
+		    if (tkTextDebug) {
+			char string[TK_POS_CHARS];
+
+			TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &dlPtr->index, string);
+			LOG("tk_textRelayout", string);
+		    }
+		    if (spaceLeft <= 0) {
+			break;
+		    }
+		}
+		FreeDLines(textPtr, lowestPtr, NULL, DLINE_FREE);
+		bytesToCount = INT_MAX;
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * We've either filled in the space we wanted to or we've run out
+	     * of display lines at the top of the text. Note that we already
+	     * set dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset to zero above.
+	     */
+
+	    if (spaceLeft < 0) {
+		/*
+		 * We've laid out a few too many vertical pixels at or above
+		 * the first line. Therefore we only want to show part of the
+		 * first displayed line, so that the last displayed line just
+		 * fits in the window.
+		 */
+
+		dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset = -spaceLeft;
+		if (dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset>=dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->height) {
+		    /*
+		     * Somehow the entire first line we laid out is shorter
+		     * than the new offset. This should not occur and would
+		     * indicate a bad problem in the logic above.
+		     */
+
+		    Tcl_Panic("Error in pixel height consistency while filling in spacesLeft");
 		}
 	    }
-	    FreeDLines(textPtr, lowestPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0);
-	    bytesToCount = INT_MAX;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Now we're all done except that the y-coordinates in all the
-	 * DLines are wrong and the top index for the text is wrong.
-	 * Update them.
+	 * Now we're all done except that the y-coordinates in all the DLines
+	 * are wrong and the top index for the text is wrong. Update them.
 	 */
 
-	textPtr->topIndex = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->index;
-	y = dInfoPtr->y;
-	for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL;
-		dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    if (y > dInfoPtr->maxY) {
-		panic("Added too many new lines in UpdateDisplayInfo");
+	if (dInfoPtr->dLinePtr != NULL) {
+	    textPtr->topIndex = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->index;
+	    y = dInfoPtr->y - dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset;
+	    for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL;
+		    dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) {
+		if (y > dInfoPtr->maxY) {
+		    Tcl_Panic("Added too many new lines in UpdateDisplayInfo");
+		}
+		dlPtr->y = y;
+		y += dlPtr->height;
 	    }
-	    dlPtr->y = y;
-	    y += dlPtr->height; 
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     *--------------------------------------------------------------
-     * If the old top or bottom line has scrolled elsewhere on the
-     * screen, we may not be able to re-use its old contents by
-     * copying bits (e.g., a beveled edge that was drawn when it was
-     * at the top or bottom won't be drawn when the line is in the
-     * middle and its neighbor has a matching background).  Similarly,
-     * if the new top or bottom line came from somewhere else on the
-     * screen, we may not be able to copy the old bits.
-     *--------------------------------------------------------------
+     * If the old top or bottom line has scrolled elsewhere on the screen, we
+     * may not be able to re-use its old contents by copying bits (e.g., a
+     * beveled edge that was drawn when it was at the top or bottom won't be
+     * drawn when the line is in the middle and its neighbor has a matching
+     * background). Similarly, if the new top or bottom line came from
+     * somewhere else on the screen, we may not be able to copy the old bits.
      */
 
     dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr;
-    if ((dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER) && !(dlPtr->flags & TOP_LINE)) {
-	dlPtr->oldY = -1;
-    }
-    while (1) {
-	if ((dlPtr->flags & TOP_LINE) && (dlPtr != dInfoPtr->dLinePtr)
-		&& (dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER)) {
-	    dlPtr->oldY = -1;
-	}
-	if ((dlPtr->flags & BOTTOM_LINE) && (dlPtr->nextPtr != NULL)
-		&& (dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER)) {
-	    dlPtr->oldY = -1;
+    if (dlPtr != NULL) {
+	if ((dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER) && !(dlPtr->flags & TOP_LINE)) {
+	    dlPtr->flags |= OLD_Y_INVALID;
 	}
-	if (dlPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
-	    if ((dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER)
-		    && !(dlPtr->flags & BOTTOM_LINE)) {
-		dlPtr->oldY = -1;
+	while (1) {
+	    if ((dlPtr->flags & TOP_LINE) && (dlPtr != dInfoPtr->dLinePtr)
+		    && (dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER)) {
+		dlPtr->flags |= OLD_Y_INVALID;
 	    }
-	    dlPtr->flags &= ~TOP_LINE;
-	    dlPtr->flags |= BOTTOM_LINE;
-	    break;
+
+	    /*
+	     * If the old top-line was not completely showing (i.e. the
+	     * pixelOffset is non-zero) and is no longer the top-line, then we
+	     * must re-draw it.
+	     */
+
+	    if ((dlPtr->flags & TOP_LINE) &&
+		    dInfoPtr->topPixelOffset!=0 && dlPtr!=dInfoPtr->dLinePtr) {
+		dlPtr->flags |= OLD_Y_INVALID;
+	    }
+	    if ((dlPtr->flags & BOTTOM_LINE) && (dlPtr->nextPtr != NULL)
+		    && (dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER)) {
+		dlPtr->flags |= OLD_Y_INVALID;
+	    }
+	    if (dlPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
+		if ((dlPtr->flags & HAS_3D_BORDER)
+			&& !(dlPtr->flags & BOTTOM_LINE)) {
+		    dlPtr->flags |= OLD_Y_INVALID;
+		}
+		dlPtr->flags &= ~TOP_LINE;
+		dlPtr->flags |= BOTTOM_LINE;
+		break;
+	    }
+	    dlPtr->flags &= ~(TOP_LINE|BOTTOM_LINE);
+	    dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr;
 	}
-	dlPtr->flags &= ~(TOP_LINE|BOTTOM_LINE);
-	dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr;
+	dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->flags |= TOP_LINE;
+	dInfoPtr->topPixelOffset = dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset;
     }
-    dInfoPtr->dLinePtr->flags |= TOP_LINE;
 
     /*
      * Arrange for scrollbars to be updated.
@@ -1560,15 +2192,12 @@ UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr)
     textPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBARS;
 
     /*
-     *--------------------------------------------------------------
      * Deal with horizontal scrolling:
-     * 1. If there's empty space to the right of the longest line,
-     *    shift the screen to the right to fill in the empty space.
-     * 2. If the desired horizontal scroll position has changed,
-     *    force a full redisplay of all the lines in the widget.
-     * 3. If the wrap mode isn't "none" then re-scroll to the base
-     *    position.
-     *--------------------------------------------------------------
+     * 1. If there's empty space to the right of the longest line, shift the
+     *	  screen to the right to fill in the empty space.
+     * 2. If the desired horizontal scroll position has changed, force a full
+     *	  redisplay of all the lines in the widget.
+     * 3. If the wrap mode isn't "none" then re-scroll to the base position.
      */
 
     dInfoPtr->maxLength = 0;
@@ -1578,20 +2207,35 @@ UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr)
 	    dInfoPtr->maxLength = dlPtr->length;
 	}
     }
-    maxOffset = (dInfoPtr->maxLength - (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x)
-	    + textPtr->charWidth - 1)/textPtr->charWidth;
-    if (dInfoPtr->newByteOffset > maxOffset) {
-	dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = maxOffset;
+    maxOffset = dInfoPtr->maxLength - (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x);
+
+    xPixelOffset = dInfoPtr->newXPixelOffset;
+    if (xPixelOffset > maxOffset) {
+	xPixelOffset = maxOffset;
     }
-    if (dInfoPtr->newByteOffset < 0) {
-	dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = 0;
+    if (xPixelOffset < 0) {
+	xPixelOffset = 0;
     }
-    pixelOffset = dInfoPtr->newByteOffset * textPtr->charWidth;
-    if (pixelOffset != dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset) {
-	dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset = pixelOffset;
+
+    /*
+     * Here's a problem: see the tests textDisp-29.2.1-4
+     *
+     * If the widget is being created, but has not yet been configured it will
+     * have a maxY of 1 above, and we we won't have examined all the lines
+     * (just the first line, in fact), and so maxOffset will not be a true
+     * reflection of the widget's lines. Therefore we must not overwrite the
+     * original newXPixelOffset in this case.
+     */
+
+    if (!(((Tk_FakeWin *) (textPtr->tkwin))->flags & TK_NEED_CONFIG_NOTIFY)) {
+	dInfoPtr->newXPixelOffset = xPixelOffset;
+    }
+
+    if (xPixelOffset != dInfoPtr->curXPixelOffset) {
+	dInfoPtr->curXPixelOffset = xPixelOffset;
 	for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL;
 		dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    dlPtr->oldY = -1;
+	    dlPtr->flags |= OLD_Y_INVALID;
 	}
     }
 }
@@ -1601,8 +2245,8 @@ UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr)
  *
  * FreeDLines --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to free up all of the resources
- *	associated with one or more DLine structures.
+ *	This function is called to free up all of the resources associated
+ *	with one or more DLine structures.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1614,27 +2258,43 @@ UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeDLines(textPtr, firstPtr, lastPtr, unlink)
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Information about overall text
-					 * widget. */
-    register DLine *firstPtr;		/* Pointer to first DLine to free up. */
-    DLine *lastPtr;			/* Pointer to DLine just after last
-					 * one to free (NULL means everything
-					 * starting with firstPtr). */
-    int unlink;				/* 1 means DLines are currently linked
-					 * into the list rooted at
-					 * textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr and
-					 * they have to be unlinked.  0 means
-					 * just free without unlinking. */
+FreeDLines(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about overall text widget. */
+    register DLine *firstPtr,	/* Pointer to first DLine to free up. */
+    DLine *lastPtr,		/* Pointer to DLine just after last one to
+				 * free (NULL means everything starting with
+				 * firstPtr). */
+    int action)			/* DLINE_UNLINK means DLines are currently
+				 * linked into the list rooted at
+				 * textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr and they have
+				 * to be unlinked. DLINE_FREE means just free
+				 * without unlinking. DLINE_FREE_TEMP means
+				 * the DLine given is just a temporary one and
+				 * we shouldn't invalidate anything for the
+				 * overall widget. */
 {
     register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, *nextChunkPtr;
     register DLine *nextDLinePtr;
 
-    if (unlink) {
+    if (action == DLINE_FREE_TEMP) {
+	lineHeightsRecalculated++;
+	if (tkTextDebug) {
+	    char string[TK_POS_CHARS];
+
+	    /*
+	     * Debugging is enabled, so keep a log of all the lines whose
+	     * height was recalculated. The test suite uses this information.
+	     */
+
+	    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &firstPtr->index, string);
+	    LOG("tk_textHeightCalc", string);
+	}
+    } else if (action == DLINE_UNLINK) {
 	if (textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr == firstPtr) {
 	    textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = lastPtr;
 	} else {
 	    register DLine *prevPtr;
+
 	    for (prevPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr;
 		    prevPtr->nextPtr != firstPtr; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) {
 		/* Empty loop body. */
@@ -1656,7 +2316,9 @@ FreeDLines(textPtr, firstPtr, lastPtr, unlink)
 	ckfree((char *) firstPtr);
 	firstPtr = nextDLinePtr;
     }
-    textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated = 1;
+    if (action != DLINE_FREE_TEMP) {
+	textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated = 1;
+    }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1664,38 +2326,36 @@ FreeDLines(textPtr, firstPtr, lastPtr, unlink)
  *
  * DisplayDLine --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to draw a single line on the
- *	screen.
+ *	This function is invoked to draw a single line on the screen.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The line given by dlPtr is drawn at its correct position in
- *	textPtr's window.  Note that this is one *display* line, not
- *	one *text* line.
+ *	The line given by dlPtr is drawn at its correct position in textPtr's
+ *	window. Note that this is one *display* line, not one *text* line.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayDLine(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget in which to draw line. */
-    register DLine *dlPtr;	/* Information about line to draw. */
-    DLine *prevPtr;		/* Line just before one to draw, or NULL
-				 * if dlPtr is the top line. */
-    Pixmap pixmap;		/* Pixmap to use for double-buffering.
-				 * Caller must make sure it's large enough
-				 * to hold line. */
+DisplayDLine(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget in which to draw line. */
+    register DLine *dlPtr,	/* Information about line to draw. */
+    DLine *prevPtr,		/* Line just before one to draw, or NULL if
+				 * dlPtr is the top line. */
+    Pixmap pixmap)		/* Pixmap to use for double-buffering. Caller
+				 * must make sure it's large enough to hold
+				 * line. */
 {
     register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
     Display *display;
-    int height, x;
+    int height, y_off;
 #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
-    CONST int y = 0;
+    const int y = 0;
 #else
-    CONST int y = dlPtr->y;
+    const int y = dlPtr->y;
 #endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
 
     if (dlPtr->chunkPtr == NULL) return;
@@ -1706,15 +2366,21 @@ DisplayDLine(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
     if ((height + dlPtr->y) > dInfoPtr->maxY) {
 	height = dInfoPtr->maxY - dlPtr->y;
     }
+    if (dlPtr->y < dInfoPtr->y) {
+	y_off = dInfoPtr->y - dlPtr->y;
+	height -= y_off;
+    } else {
+	y_off = 0;
+    }
 
 #ifdef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
-    TkpClipDrawableToRect(display, pixmap, dInfoPtr->x, y,
+    TkpClipDrawableToRect(display, pixmap, dInfoPtr->x, y + y_off,
 	    dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x, height);
 #endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
 
     /*
-     * First, clear the area of the line to the background color for the
-     * text widget.
+     * First, clear the area of the line to the background color for the text
+     * widget.
      */
 
     Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, textPtr->border, 0, y,
@@ -1727,19 +2393,20 @@ DisplayDLine(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
     DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap);
 
     /*
-     * Make another pass through all of the chunks to redraw the
-     * insertion cursor, if it is visible on this line.  Must do
-     * it here rather than in the foreground pass below because
-     * otherwise a wide insertion cursor will obscure the character
-     * to its left.
+     * Make another pass through all of the chunks to redraw the insertion
+     * cursor, if it is visible on this line. Must do it here rather than in
+     * the foreground pass below because otherwise a wide insertion cursor
+     * will obscure the character to its left.
      */
 
-    if (textPtr->state == TK_STATE_NORMAL) {
+    if (textPtr->state == TK_TEXT_STATE_NORMAL) {
 	for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; (chunkPtr != NULL);
 		chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    x = chunkPtr->x + dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset;
 	    if (chunkPtr->displayProc == TkTextInsertDisplayProc) {
-		(*chunkPtr->displayProc)(chunkPtr, x, y + dlPtr->spaceAbove,
+		int x = chunkPtr->x + dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curXPixelOffset;
+
+		(*chunkPtr->displayProc)(textPtr, chunkPtr, x,
+			y + dlPtr->spaceAbove,
 			dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow,
 			dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, display, pixmap,
 			dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove);
@@ -1749,49 +2416,49 @@ DisplayDLine(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
 
     /*
      * Make yet another pass through all of the chunks to redraw all of
-     * foreground information.  Note:  we have to call the displayProc
-     * even for chunks that are off-screen.  This is needed, for
-     * example, so that embedded windows can be unmapped in this case.
-     * Conve
+     * foreground information. Note: we have to call the displayProc even for
+     * chunks that are off-screen. This is needed, for example, so that
+     * embedded windows can be unmapped in this case.
      */
 
     for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; (chunkPtr != NULL);
 	    chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (chunkPtr->displayProc == TkTextInsertDisplayProc) {
 	    /*
-	     * Already displayed the insertion cursor above.  Don't
-	     * do it again here.
+	     * Already displayed the insertion cursor above. Don't do it again
+	     * here.
 	     */
 
 	    continue;
 	}
-	x = chunkPtr->x + dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset;
-	if ((x + chunkPtr->width <= 0) || (x >= dInfoPtr->maxX)) {
-	    /*
-	     * Note:  we have to call the displayProc even for chunks
-	     * that are off-screen.  This is needed, for example, so
-	     * that embedded windows can be unmapped in this case.
-	     * Display the chunk at a coordinate that can be clearly
-	     * identified by the displayProc as being off-screen to
-	     * the left (the displayProc may not be able to tell if
-	     * something is off to the right).
-	     */
 
-	    if (chunkPtr->displayProc != NULL)
-	    (*chunkPtr->displayProc)(chunkPtr, -chunkPtr->width,
-		    y + dlPtr->spaceAbove,
-		    dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow,
-		    dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, display, pixmap,
-		    dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove);
-	} else {
-	    /* don't call if elide.  This tax ok since not very many visible DLine's in
-		  an area, but potentially many elide ones */
-	    if (chunkPtr->displayProc != NULL)
-	    (*chunkPtr->displayProc)(chunkPtr, x, y + dlPtr->spaceAbove,
-		    dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow,
-		    dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, display, pixmap,
-		    dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove);
+	/*
+	 * Don't call if elide. This tax OK since not very many visible DLines
+	 * in an area, but potentially many elide ones.
+	 */
+
+	if (chunkPtr->displayProc != NULL) {
+	    int x = chunkPtr->x + dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curXPixelOffset;
+
+	    if ((x + chunkPtr->width <= 0) || (x >= dInfoPtr->maxX)) {
+		/*
+		 * Note: we have to call the displayProc even for chunks that
+		 * are off-screen. This is needed, for example, so that
+		 * embedded windows can be unmapped in this case. Display the
+		 * chunk at a coordinate that can be clearly identified by the
+		 * displayProc as being off-screen to the left (the
+		 * displayProc may not be able to tell if something is off to
+		 * the right).
+		 */
+
+		x = -chunkPtr->width;
+	    }
+	    (*chunkPtr->displayProc)(textPtr, chunkPtr, x,
+		    y + dlPtr->spaceAbove, dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove -
+		    dlPtr->spaceBelow, dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove,
+		    display, pixmap, dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove);
 	}
+
 	if (dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated) {
 	    return;
 	}
@@ -1799,17 +2466,17 @@ DisplayDLine(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
 
 #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
     /*
-     * Copy the pixmap onto the screen.  If this is the last line on
-     * the screen then copy a piece of the line, so that it doesn't
-     * overflow into the border area.  Another special trick:  copy the
-     * padding area to the left of the line;  this is because the
-     * insertion cursor sometimes overflows onto that area and we want
-     * to get as much of the cursor as possible.
+     * Copy the pixmap onto the screen. If this is the first or last line on
+     * the screen then copy a piece of the line, so that it doesn't overflow
+     * into the border area. Another special trick: copy the padding area to
+     * the left of the line; this is because the insertion cursor sometimes
+     * overflows onto that area and we want to get as much of the cursor as
+     * possible.
      */
 
     XCopyArea(display, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin), dInfoPtr->copyGC,
-	    dInfoPtr->x, y, (unsigned) (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x),
-	    (unsigned) height, dInfoPtr->x, dlPtr->y);
+	    dInfoPtr->x, y + y_off, (unsigned) (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x),
+	    (unsigned) height, dInfoPtr->x, dlPtr->y + y_off);
 #else
     TkpClipDrawableToRect(display, pixmap, 0, 0, -1, -1);
 #endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
@@ -1821,14 +2488,13 @@ DisplayDLine(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
  *
  * DisplayLineBackground --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to fill in the background for
- *	a display line.  It draws 3D borders cleverly so that
- *	adjacent chunks with the same style (whether on the same
- *	line or different lines) have a single 3D border around
- *	the whole region.
+ *	This function is called to fill in the background for a display line.
+ *	It draws 3D borders cleverly so that adjacent chunks with the same
+ *	style (whether on the same line or different lines) have a single 3D
+ *	border around the whole region.
  *
  * Results:
- *	There is no return value.  Pixmap is filled in with background
+ *	There is no return value. Pixmap is filled in with background
  *	information for dlPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -1838,75 +2504,71 @@ DisplayDLine(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget containing line. */
-    register DLine *dlPtr;	/* Information about line to draw. */
-    DLine *prevPtr;		/* Line just above dlPtr, or NULL if dlPtr
-				 * is the top-most line in the window. */
-    Pixmap pixmap;		/* Pixmap to use for double-buffering.
-				 * Caller must make sure it's large enough
-				 * to hold line.  Caller must also have
-				 * filled it with the background color for
-				 * the widget. */
+DisplayLineBackground(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget containing line. */
+    register DLine *dlPtr,	/* Information about line to draw. */
+    DLine *prevPtr,		/* Line just above dlPtr, or NULL if dlPtr is
+				 * the top-most line in the window. */
+    Pixmap pixmap)		/* Pixmap to use for double-buffering. Caller
+				 * must make sure it's large enough to hold
+				 * line. Caller must also have filled it with
+				 * the background color for the widget. */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;  /* Pointer to chunk in the current line. */
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr2;	/* Pointer to chunk in the line above or
-				 * below the current one.  NULL if we're to
-				 * the left of or to the right of the chunks
-				 * in the line. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;	/* Pointer to chunk in the current line. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr2;	/* Pointer to chunk in the line above or below
+				 * the current one. NULL if we're to the left
+				 * of or to the right of the chunks in the
+				 * line. */
     TkTextDispChunk *nextPtr2;	/* Next chunk after chunkPtr2 (it's not the
 				 * same as chunkPtr2->nextPtr in the case
-				 * where chunkPtr2 is NULL because the line
-				 * is indented). */
-    int leftX;			/* The left edge of the region we're
-				 * currently working on. */
+				 * where chunkPtr2 is NULL because the line is
+				 * indented). */
+    int leftX;			/* The left edge of the region we're currently
+				 * working on. */
     int leftXIn;		/* 1 means beveled edge at leftX slopes right
-				 * as it goes down, 0 means it slopes left
-				 * as it goes down. */
+				 * as it goes down, 0 means it slopes left as
+				 * it goes down. */
     int rightX;			/* Right edge of chunkPtr. */
     int rightX2;		/* Right edge of chunkPtr2. */
-    int matchLeft;		/* Does the style of this line match that
-				 * of its neighbor just to the left of
-				 * the current x coordinate? */
-    int matchRight;		/* Does line's style match its neighbor
-				 * just to the right of the current x-coord? */
+    int matchLeft;		/* Does the style of this line match that of
+				 * its neighbor just to the left of the
+				 * current x coordinate? */
+    int matchRight;		/* Does line's style match its neighbor just
+				 * to the right of the current x-coord? */
     int minX, maxX, xOffset;
     StyleValues *sValuePtr;
     Display *display;
 #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
-    CONST int y = 0;
+    const int y = 0;
 #else
-    CONST int y = dlPtr->y;
+    const int y = dlPtr->y;
 #endif /* TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING */
 
     /*
-     * Pass 1: scan through dlPtr from left to right.  For each range of
-     * chunks with the same style, draw the main background for the style
-     * plus the vertical parts of the 3D borders (the left and right
-     * edges).
+     * Pass 1: scan through dlPtr from left to right. For each range of chunks
+     * with the same style, draw the main background for the style plus the
+     * vertical parts of the 3D borders (the left and right edges).
      */
 
     display = Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin);
-    minX = dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset;
+    minX = dInfoPtr->curXPixelOffset;
     xOffset = dInfoPtr->x - minX;
     maxX = minX + dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x;
     chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Note A: in the following statement, and a few others later in
-     * this file marked with "See Note A above", the right side of the
-     * assignment was replaced with 0 on 6/18/97.  This has the effect
-     * of highlighting the empty space to the left of a line whenever
-     * the leftmost character of the line is highlighted.  This way,
-     * multi-line highlights always line up along their left edges. 
-     * However, this may look funny in the case where a single word is
-     * highlighted. To undo the change, replace "leftX = 0" with "leftX
-     * = chunkPtr->x" and "rightX2 = 0" with "rightX2 = nextPtr2->x"
-     * here and at all the marked points below.  This restores the old
-     * behavior where empty space to the left of a line is not
-     * highlighted, leaving a ragged left edge for multi-line
-     * highlights.
+     * Note A: in the following statement, and a few others later in this file
+     * marked with "See Note A above", the right side of the assignment was
+     * replaced with 0 on 6/18/97. This has the effect of highlighting the
+     * empty space to the left of a line whenever the leftmost character of
+     * the line is highlighted. This way, multi-line highlights always line up
+     * along their left edges. However, this may look funny in the case where
+     * a single word is highlighted. To undo the change, replace "leftX = 0"
+     * with "leftX = chunkPtr->x" and "rightX2 = 0" with "rightX2 =
+     * nextPtr2->x" here and at all the marked points below. This restores the
+     * old behavior where empty space to the left of a line is not
+     * highlighted, leaving a ragged left edge for multi-line highlights.
      */
 
     leftX = 0;
@@ -1922,9 +2584,12 @@ DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
 	    rightX = maxX;
 	}
 	if (chunkPtr->stylePtr->bgGC != None) {
-	    /* Not visible - bail out now */
+	    /*
+	     * Not visible - bail out now.
+	     */
+
 	    if (rightX + xOffset <= 0) {
-	        leftX = rightX;
+		leftX = rightX;
 		continue;
 	    }
 
@@ -1934,11 +2599,12 @@ DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
 	     * -32768 (or less) to +something simply does not display
 	     * correctly. [Patch #541999]
 	     */
+
 	    if ((leftX + xOffset) < -(sValuePtr->borderWidth)) {
-	        leftX = -sValuePtr->borderWidth - xOffset;
+		leftX = -sValuePtr->borderWidth - xOffset;
 	    }
 	    if ((rightX - leftX) > 32767) {
-	        rightX = leftX + 32767;
+		rightX = leftX + 32767;
 	    }
 
 	    XFillRectangle(display, pixmap, chunkPtr->stylePtr->bgGC,
@@ -1958,9 +2624,9 @@ DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Pass 2: draw the horizontal bevels along the top of the line.  To
-     * do this, scan through dlPtr from left to right while simultaneously
-     * scanning through the line just above dlPtr.  ChunkPtr2 and nextPtr2
+     * Pass 2: draw the horizontal bevels along the top of the line. To do
+     * this, scan through dlPtr from left to right while simultaneously
+     * scanning through the line just above dlPtr. ChunkPtr2 and nextPtr2
      * refer to two adjacent chunks in the line above.
      */
 
@@ -2001,8 +2667,8 @@ DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
 	sValuePtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr;
 	if (rightX <= rightX2) {
 	    /*
-	     * The chunk in our line is about to end.  If its style
-	     * changes then draw the bevel for the current style.
+	     * The chunk in our line is about to end. If its style changes
+	     * then draw the bevel for the current style.
 	     */
 
 	    if ((chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL)
@@ -2018,9 +2684,8 @@ DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
 		leftXIn = 1;
 
 		/*
-		 * If the chunk in the line above is also ending at
-		 * the same point then advance to the next chunk in
-		 * that line.
+		 * If the chunk in the line above is also ending at the same
+		 * point then advance to the next chunk in that line.
 		 */
 
 		if ((rightX == rightX2) && (chunkPtr2 != NULL)) {
@@ -2039,11 +2704,10 @@ DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * The chunk in the line above is ending at an x-position where
-	 * there is no change in the style of the current line.  If the
-	 * style above matches the current line on one side of the change
-	 * but not on the other, we have to draw an L-shaped piece of
-	 * bevel.
+	 * The chunk in the line above is ending at an x-position where there
+	 * is no change in the style of the current line. If the style above
+	 * matches the current line on one side of the change but not on the
+	 * other, we have to draw an L-shaped piece of bevel.
 	 */
 
 	matchRight = (nextPtr2 != NULL)
@@ -2063,12 +2727,12 @@ DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
 		    rightX2 + xOffset, y, sValuePtr->borderWidth,
 		    sValuePtr->borderWidth, 1, sValuePtr->relief);
 	    Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(textPtr->tkwin, pixmap, sValuePtr->border,
-		    leftX + xOffset, y, rightX2 + sValuePtr->borderWidth -
+		    leftX + xOffset, y, rightX2 + sValuePtr->borderWidth - 
 		    leftX, sValuePtr->borderWidth, leftXIn, 0, 1,
 		    sValuePtr->relief);
 	}
 
-	nextChunk2:
+    nextChunk2:
 	chunkPtr2 = nextPtr2;
 	if (chunkPtr2 == NULL) {
 	    rightX2 = INT_MAX;
@@ -2080,9 +2744,10 @@ DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
 	    }
 	}
     }
+
     /*
-     * Pass 3: draw the horizontal bevels along the bottom of the line.
-     * This uses the same approach as pass 2.
+     * Pass 3: draw the horizontal bevels along the bottom of the line. This
+     * uses the same approach as pass 2.
      */
 
     chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr;
@@ -2173,7 +2838,7 @@ DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
 		    sValuePtr->relief);
 	}
 
-	nextChunk2b:
+    nextChunk2b:
 	chunkPtr2 = nextPtr2;
 	if (chunkPtr2 == NULL) {
 	    rightX2 = INT_MAX;
@@ -2190,11 +2855,1025 @@ DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * AsyncUpdateLineMetrics --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked as a background handler to update the pixel-
+ *	height calculations of individual lines in an asychronous manner.
+ *
+ *	Currently a timer-handler is used for this purpose, which continuously
+ *	reschedules itself. It may well be better to use some other approach
+ *	(e.g., a background thread). We can't use an idle-callback because of
+ *	a known bug in Tcl/Tk in which idle callbacks are not allowed to
+ *	re-schedule themselves. This just causes an effective infinite loop.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Line heights may be recalculated.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+AsyncUpdateLineMetrics(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about widget. */
+{
+    register TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData;
+    TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
+    int lineNum;
+
+    dInfoPtr->lineUpdateTimer = NULL;
+
+    if ((textPtr->tkwin == NULL) || (textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
+	/*
+	 * The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything.
+	 */
+
+	if (--textPtr->refCount == 0) {
+	    ckfree((char *) textPtr);
+	}
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
+	dInfoPtr->lineUpdateTimer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(1,
+		AsyncUpdateLineMetrics, clientData);
+	return;
+    }
+
+    lineNum = dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine;
+    if (dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine == -1) {
+	dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine =
+		TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Update the lines in blocks of about 24 recalculations, or 250+ lines
+     * examined, so we pass in 256 for 'doThisMuch'.
+     */
+
+    lineNum = TkTextUpdateLineMetrics(textPtr, lineNum,
+	    dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine, 256);
+
+    if (tkTextDebug) {
+	char buffer[2 * TCL_INTEGER_SPACE + 1];
+
+	sprintf(buffer, "%d %d", lineNum, dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine);
+	LOG("tk_textInvalidateLine", buffer);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If we're not in the middle of a long-line calculation (metricEpoch==-1)
+     * and we've reached the last line, then we're done.
+     */
+
+    if (dInfoPtr->metricEpoch == -1
+	    && lineNum == dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine) {
+	/*
+	 * We have looped over all lines, so we're done. We must release our
+	 * refCount on the widget (the timer token was already set to NULL
+	 * above).
+	 */
+
+	textPtr->refCount--;
+	if (textPtr->refCount == 0) {
+	    ckfree((char *) textPtr);
+	}
+	return;
+    }
+    dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine = lineNum;
+
+    /*
+     * Re-arm the timer. We already have a refCount on the text widget so no
+     * need to adjust that.
+     */
+
+    dInfoPtr->lineUpdateTimer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(1,
+	    AsyncUpdateLineMetrics, (ClientData) textPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkTextUpdateLineMetrics --
+ *
+ *	This function updates the pixel height calculations of a range of
+ *	lines in the widget. The range is from lineNum to endLine, but, if
+ *	doThisMuch is positive, then the function may return earlier, once a
+ *	certain number of lines has been examined. The line counts are from 0.
+ *
+ *	If doThisMuch is -1, then all lines in the range will be updated. This
+ *	will potentially take quite some time for a large text widget.
+ *
+ *	Note: with bad input for lineNum and endLine, this function can loop
+ *	indefinitely.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The index of the last line examined (or -1 if we are about to wrap
+ *	around from end to beginning of the widget, and the next line will be
+ *	the first line).
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Line heights may be recalculated.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkTextUpdateLineMetrics(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about widget. */
+    int lineNum,		/* Start at this line. */
+    int endLine,		/* Go no further than this line. */
+    int doThisMuch)		/* How many lines to check, or how many 10s of
+				 * lines to recalculate. If '-1' then do
+				 * everything in the range (which may take a
+				 * while). */
+{
+    TkTextLine *linePtr = NULL;
+    int count = 0;
+    int totalLines = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr);
+
+    if (totalLines == 0) {
+	/*
+	 * Empty peer widget.
+	 */
+
+	return endLine;
+    }
+
+    while (1) {
+	/*
+	 * Get a suitable line.
+	 */
+
+	if (lineNum == -1 && linePtr == NULL) {
+	    lineNum = 0;
+	    linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		    lineNum);
+	} else {
+	    if (lineNum == -1 || linePtr == NULL) {
+		if (lineNum == -1) {
+		    lineNum = 0;
+		}
+		linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+			textPtr, lineNum);
+	    } else {
+		lineNum++;
+		linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, linePtr);
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * If we're in the middle of a partial-line height calculation,
+	     * then we can't be done.
+	     */
+
+	    if (textPtr->dInfoPtr->metricEpoch == -1 && lineNum == endLine) {
+		/*
+		 * We have looped over all lines, so we're done.
+		 */
+
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	if (lineNum < totalLines) {
+	    if (tkTextDebug) {
+		char buffer[4 * TCL_INTEGER_SPACE + 3];
+
+		sprintf(buffer, "%d %d %d %d",
+			lineNum, endLine, totalLines, count);
+		LOG("tk_textInvalidateLine", buffer);
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * Now update the line's metrics if necessary.
+	     */
+
+	    if (TkBTreeLinePixelEpoch(textPtr, linePtr)
+		!= textPtr->dInfoPtr->lineMetricUpdateEpoch) {
+		if (doThisMuch == -1) {
+		    count += 8 * TkTextUpdateOneLine(textPtr, linePtr, 0,
+			    NULL, 0);
+		} else {
+		    TkTextIndex index;
+		    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
+		    int pixelHeight;
+
+		    /*
+		     * If the metric epoch is the same as the widget's epoch,
+		     * then we know that indexPtrs are still valid, and if the
+		     * cached metricIndex (if any) is for the same line as we
+		     * wish to examine, then we are looking at a long line
+		     * wrapped many times, which we will examine in pieces.
+		     */
+
+		    if (textPtr->dInfoPtr->metricEpoch ==
+			    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->stateEpoch &&
+			    textPtr->dInfoPtr->metricIndex.linePtr==linePtr) {
+			indexPtr = &textPtr->dInfoPtr->metricIndex;
+			pixelHeight = textPtr->dInfoPtr->metricPixelHeight;
+		    } else {
+			/*
+			 * We must reset the partial line height calculation
+			 * data here, so we don't use it when it is out of
+			 * date.
+			 */
+
+			textPtr->dInfoPtr->metricEpoch = -1;
+			index.tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
+			index.linePtr = linePtr;
+			index.byteIndex = 0;
+			index.textPtr = NULL;
+			indexPtr = &index;
+			pixelHeight = 0;
+		    }
+
+		    /*
+		     * Update the line and update the counter, counting 8 for
+		     * each display line we actually re-layout.
+		     */
+
+		    count += 8 * TkTextUpdateOneLine(textPtr, linePtr,
+			    pixelHeight, indexPtr, 1);
+
+		    if (indexPtr->linePtr == linePtr) {
+			/*
+			 * We didn't complete the logical line, because it
+			 * produced very many display lines - it must be a
+			 * long line wrapped many times. So we must cache as
+			 * far as we got for next time around.
+			 */
+
+			if (pixelHeight == 0) {
+			    /*
+			     * These have already been stored, unless we just
+			     * started the new line.
+			     */
+
+			    textPtr->dInfoPtr->metricIndex = index;
+			    textPtr->dInfoPtr->metricEpoch =
+				    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->stateEpoch;
+			}
+			textPtr->dInfoPtr->metricPixelHeight =
+				TkBTreeLinePixelCount(textPtr, linePtr);
+			break;
+		    } else {
+			/*
+			 * We're done with this long line.
+			 */
+
+			textPtr->dInfoPtr->metricEpoch = -1;
+		    }
+		}
+	    } else {
+		/*
+		 * This line is already up to date. That means there's nothing
+		 * to do here.
+		 */
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * We must never recalculate the height of the last artificial
+	     * line. It must stay at zero, and if we recalculate it, it will
+	     * change.
+	     */
+
+	    if (endLine >= totalLines) {
+		lineNum = endLine;
+		break;
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * Set things up for the next loop through.
+	     */
+
+	    lineNum = -1;
+	}
+	count++;
+
+	if (doThisMuch != -1 && count >= doThisMuch) {
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    if (doThisMuch == -1) {
+	/*
+	 * If we were requested to provide a full update, then also update the
+	 * scrollbar.
+	 */
+
+	GetYView(textPtr->interp, textPtr, 1);
+    }
+    return lineNum;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics, TextInvalidateLineMetrics --
+ *
+ *	Mark a number of text lines as having invalid line metric
+ *	calculations. Never call this with linePtr as the last (artificial)
+ *	line in the text. Depending on 'action' which indicates whether the
+ *	given lines are simply invalid or have been inserted or deleted, the
+ *	pre-existing asynchronous line update range may need to be adjusted.
+ *
+ *	If linePtr is NULL then 'lineCount' and 'action' are ignored and all
+ *	lines are invalidated.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May schedule an asychronous callback.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr,/* Shared widget section for all peers, or
+				 * NULL. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr,	/* Invalidation starts from this line. */
+    int lineCount,		/* And includes this many following lines. */
+    int action)			/* Indicates what type of invalidation
+				 * occurred (insert, delete, or simple). */
+{
+    if (sharedTextPtr == NULL) {
+	TextInvalidateLineMetrics(textPtr, linePtr, lineCount, action);
+    } else {
+	textPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers;
+	while (textPtr != NULL) {
+	    TextInvalidateLineMetrics(textPtr, linePtr, lineCount, action);
+	    textPtr = textPtr->next;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+TextInvalidateLineMetrics(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr,	/* Invalidation starts from this line. */
+    int lineCount,		/* And includes this many following lines. */
+    int action)			/* Indicates what type of invalidation
+				 * occurred (insert, delete, or simple). */
+{
+    int fromLine;
+    TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
+
+    if (linePtr != NULL) {
+	int counter = lineCount;
+
+	fromLine = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, linePtr);
+
+	/*
+	 * Invalidate the height calculations of each line in the given range.
+	 */
+
+	TkBTreeLinePixelEpoch(textPtr, linePtr) = 0;
+	while (counter > 0 && linePtr != NULL) {
+	    linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, linePtr);
+	    if (linePtr != NULL) {
+		TkBTreeLinePixelEpoch(textPtr, linePtr) = 0;
+	    }
+	    counter--;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Now schedule an examination of each line in the union of the old
+	 * and new update ranges, including the (possibly empty) range in
+	 * between. If that between range is not-empty, then we are examining
+	 * more lines than is strictly necessary (but the examination of the
+	 * extra lines should be quick, since their pixelCalculationEpoch will
+	 * be up to date). However, to keep track of that would require more
+	 * complex record-keeping than what we have.
+	 */
+
+	if (dInfoPtr->lineUpdateTimer == NULL) {
+	    dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine = fromLine;
+	    if (action == TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_DELETE) {
+		lineCount = 0;
+	    }
+	    dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine = fromLine + lineCount + 1;
+	} else {
+	    int toLine = fromLine + lineCount + 1;
+
+	    if (action == TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_DELETE) {
+		if (toLine <= dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine) {
+		    dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine = fromLine;
+		    if (dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine != -1) {
+			dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine -= lineCount;
+		    }
+		} else if (fromLine <= dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine) {
+		    dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine = fromLine;
+		    if (toLine <= dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine) {
+			dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine -= lineCount;
+		    }
+		} else {
+		    if (dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine != -1) {
+			dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine = toLine;
+		    }
+		}
+	    } else if (action == TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_INSERT) {
+		if (toLine <= dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine) {
+		    dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine = fromLine;
+		    if (dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine != -1) {
+			dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine += lineCount;
+		    }
+		} else if (fromLine <= dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine) {
+		    dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine = fromLine;
+		    if (toLine <= dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine) {
+			dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine += lineCount;
+		    }
+		    if (toLine > dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine) {
+			dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine = toLine;
+		    }
+		} else {
+		    if (dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine != -1) {
+			dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine = toLine;
+		    }
+		}
+	    } else {
+		if (fromLine < dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine) {
+		    dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine = fromLine;
+		}
+		if (dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine != -1
+			&& toLine > dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine) {
+		    dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine = toLine;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * This invalidates the height of all lines in the widget.
+	 */
+
+	if ((++dInfoPtr->lineMetricUpdateEpoch) == 0) {
+	    dInfoPtr->lineMetricUpdateEpoch++;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * This has the effect of forcing an entire new loop of update checks
+	 * on all lines in the widget.
+	 */
+
+	if (dInfoPtr->lineUpdateTimer == NULL) {
+	    dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine = -1;
+	}
+	dInfoPtr->lastMetricUpdateLine = dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Now re-set the current update calculations.
+     */
+
+    if (dInfoPtr->lineUpdateTimer == NULL) {
+	textPtr->refCount++;
+	dInfoPtr->lineUpdateTimer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(1,
+		AsyncUpdateLineMetrics, (ClientData) textPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked to find the index of the beginning or end of
+ *	the particular display line on which the given index sits, whether
+ *	that line is displayed or not.
+ *
+ *	If 'end' is zero, we look for the start, and if 'end' is one we look
+ *	for the end.
+ *
+ *	If the beginning of the current display line is elided, and we are
+ *	looking for the start of the line, then the returned index will be the
+ *	first elided index on the display line.
+ *
+ *	Similarly if the end of the current display line is elided and we are
+ *	looking for the end, then the returned index will be the last elided
+ *	index on the display line.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Modifies indexPtr to point to the given end.
+ *
+ *	If xOffset is non-NULL, it is set to the x-pixel offset of the given
+ *	original index within the given display line.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The combination of 'LayoutDLine' and 'FreeDLines' seems like a rather
+ *	time-consuming way of gathering the information we need, so this would
+ *	be a good place to look to speed up the calculations. In particular
+ *	these calls will map and unmap embedded windows respectively, which I
+ *	would hope isn't exactly necessary!
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr,	/* Index we will adjust to the display line
+				 * start or end. */
+    int end,			/* 0 = start, 1 = end. */
+    int *xOffset)		/* NULL, or used to store the x-pixel offset
+				 * of the original index within its display
+				 * line. */
+{
+    if (!end && indexPtr->byteIndex == 0) {
+	/*
+	 * Nothing to do.
+	 */
+
+	if (xOffset != NULL) {
+	    *xOffset = 0;
+	}
+	return;
+    } else {
+	TkTextIndex index = *indexPtr;
+
+	index.byteIndex = 0;
+	index.textPtr = NULL;
+
+	while (1) {
+	    TkTextIndex endOfLastLine;
+
+	    if (TkTextIndexBackBytes(textPtr, &index, 1, &endOfLastLine)) {
+		/*
+		 * Reached beginning of text.
+		 */
+
+		break;
+	    }
+
+	    if (!TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &endOfLastLine, NULL)) {
+		/*
+		 * The eol is not elided, so 'index' points to the start of a
+		 * display line (as well as logical line).
+		 */
+
+		break;
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * indexPtr's logical line is actually merged with the previous
+	     * logical line whose eol is elided. Continue searching back to
+	     * get a real line start.
+	     */
+
+	    index = endOfLastLine;
+	    index.byteIndex = 0;
+	}
+
+	while (1) {
+	    DLine *dlPtr;
+	    int byteCount;
+	    TkTextIndex nextLineStart;
+
+	    dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index);
+	    byteCount = dlPtr->byteCount;
+
+	    TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &index, byteCount, &nextLineStart);
+
+	    /*
+	     * 'byteCount' goes up to the beginning of the next display line,
+	     * so equality here says we need one more line. We try to perform
+	     * a quick comparison which is valid for the case where the
+	     * logical line is the same, but otherwise fall back on a full
+	     * TkTextIndexCmp.
+	     */
+
+	    if (((index.linePtr == indexPtr->linePtr)
+		    && (index.byteIndex + byteCount > indexPtr->byteIndex))
+		    || (dlPtr->logicalLinesMerged > 0
+		    && TkTextIndexCmp(&nextLineStart, indexPtr) > 0)) {
+		/*
+		 * It's on this display line.
+		 */
+
+		if (xOffset != NULL) {
+		    /*
+		     * This call takes a byte index relative to the start of
+		     * the current _display_ line, not logical line. We are
+		     * about to overwrite indexPtr->byteIndex, so we must do
+		     * this now.
+		     */
+
+		    *xOffset = DlineXOfIndex(textPtr, dlPtr,
+			    indexPtr->byteIndex - dlPtr->index.byteIndex);
+		}
+		if (end) {
+		    /*
+		     * The index we want is one less than the number of bytes
+		     * in the display line.
+		     */
+
+		    TkTextIndexBackBytes(textPtr, &nextLineStart, 1, indexPtr);
+		} else {
+		    *indexPtr = index;
+		}
+		FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, NULL, DLINE_FREE_TEMP);
+		return;
+	    }
+	    FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, NULL, DLINE_FREE_TEMP);
+	    index = nextLineStart;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * CalculateDisplayLineHeight --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked to recalculate the height of the particular
+ *	display line which starts with the given index, whether that line is
+ *	displayed or not.
+ *
+ *	This function does not, in itself, update any cached information about
+ *	line heights. That should be done, where necessary, by its callers.
+ *
+ *	The behaviour of this function is _undefined_ if indexPtr is not
+ *	currently at the beginning of a display line.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The number of vertical pixels used by the display line.
+ *
+ *	If 'byteCountPtr' is non-NULL, then returns in that pointer the number
+ *	of byte indices on the given display line (which can be used to update
+ *	indexPtr in a loop).
+ *
+ *	If 'mergedLinePtr' is non-NULL, then returns in that pointer the
+ *	number of extra logical lines merged into the given display line.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The combination of 'LayoutDLine' and 'FreeDLines' seems like a rather
+ *	time-consuming way of gathering the information we need, so this would
+ *	be a good place to look to speed up the calculations. In particular
+ *	these calls will map and unmap embedded windows respectively, which I
+ *	would hope isn't exactly necessary!
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+CalculateDisplayLineHeight(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr,/* The index at the beginning of the display
+				 * line of interest. */
+    int *byteCountPtr,		/* NULL or used to return the number of byte
+				 * indices on the given display line. */
+    int *mergedLinePtr)		/* NULL or used to return if the given display
+				 * line merges with a following logical line
+				 * (because the eol is elided). */
+{
+    DLine *dlPtr;
+    int pixelHeight;
+
+    /*
+     * Special case for artificial last line. May be better to move this
+     * inside LayoutDLine.
+     */
+
+    if (indexPtr->byteIndex == 0
+	    && TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, indexPtr->linePtr) == NULL) {
+	if (byteCountPtr != NULL) {
+	    *byteCountPtr = 0;
+	}
+	if (mergedLinePtr != NULL) {
+	    *mergedLinePtr = 0;
+	}
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Layout, find the information we need and then free the display-line we
+     * laid-out. We must use 'FreeDLines' because it will actually call the
+     * relevant code to unmap any embedded windows which were mapped in the
+     * LayoutDLine call!
+     */
+
+    dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr);
+    pixelHeight = dlPtr->height;
+    if (byteCountPtr != NULL) {
+	*byteCountPtr = dlPtr->byteCount;
+    }
+    if (mergedLinePtr != NULL) {
+	*mergedLinePtr = dlPtr->logicalLinesMerged;
+    }
+    FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, NULL, DLINE_FREE_TEMP);
+
+    return pixelHeight;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkTextIndexYPixels --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked to calculate the number of vertical pixels
+ *	between the first index of the text widget and the given index. The
+ *	range from first logical line to given logical line is determined
+ *	using the cached values, and the range inside the given logical line
+ *	is calculated on the fly.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The pixel distance between first pixel in the widget and the
+ *	top of the index's current display line (could be zero).
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Just those of 'CalculateDisplayLineHeight'.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkTextIndexYPixels(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr)/* The index of which we want the pixel
+				 * distance from top of logical line to top of
+				 * index. */
+{
+    int pixelHeight;
+    TkTextIndex index;
+
+    pixelHeight = TkBTreePixelsTo(textPtr, indexPtr->linePtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Iterate through all display-lines corresponding to the single logical
+     * line belonging to indexPtr, adding up the pixel height of each such
+     * display line as we go along, until we go past 'indexPtr'.
+     */
+
+    if (indexPtr->byteIndex == 0) {
+	return pixelHeight;
+    }
+
+    index.tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
+    index.linePtr = indexPtr->linePtr;
+    index.byteIndex = 0;
+    index.textPtr = NULL;
+
+    while (1) {
+	int bytes, height;
+
+	/*
+	 * Currently this call doesn't have many side-effects. However, if in
+	 * the future we change the code so there are side-effects (such as
+	 * adjusting linePtr->pixelHeight), then the code might not quite work
+	 * as intended, specifically the 'linePtr->pixelHeight == pixelHeight'
+	 * test below this while loop.
+	 */
+
+	height = CalculateDisplayLineHeight(textPtr, &index, &bytes, NULL);
+
+	index.byteIndex += bytes;
+
+	if (index.byteIndex > indexPtr->byteIndex) {
+	    return pixelHeight;
+	}
+
+	if (height > 0) {
+	    pixelHeight += height;
+	}
+
+	if (index.byteIndex == indexPtr->byteIndex) {
+	    return pixelHeight;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkTextUpdateOneLine --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked to recalculate the height of a particular
+ *	logical line, whether that line is displayed or not.
+ *
+ *	It must NEVER be called for the artificial last TkTextLine which is
+ *	used internally for administrative purposes only. That line must
+ *	retain its initial height of 0 otherwise the pixel height calculation
+ *	maintained by the B-tree will be wrong.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The number of display lines in the logical line. This could be zero if
+ *	the line is totally elided.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Line heights may be recalculated, and a timer to update the scrollbar
+ *	may be installed. Also see the called function
+ *	CalculateDisplayLineHeight for its side effects.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkTextUpdateOneLine(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr,	/* The line of which to calculate the
+				 * height. */
+    int pixelHeight,		/* If indexPtr is non-NULL, then this is the
+				 * number of pixels in the logical line
+				 * linePtr, up to the index which has been
+				 * given. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr,	/* Either NULL or an index at the start of a
+				 * display line belonging to linePtr, at which
+				 * we wish to start (e.g. up to which we have
+				 * already calculated). On return this will be
+				 * set to the first index on the next line. */
+    int partialCalc)		/* Set to 1 if we are allowed to do partial
+				 * height calculations of long-lines. In this
+				 * case we'll only return what we know so
+				 * far. */
+{
+    TkTextIndex index;
+    int displayLines;
+    int mergedLines;
+
+    if (indexPtr == NULL) {
+	index.tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
+	index.linePtr = linePtr;
+	index.byteIndex = 0;
+	index.textPtr = NULL;
+	indexPtr = &index;
+	pixelHeight = 0;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Iterate through all display-lines corresponding to the single logical
+     * line 'linePtr', adding up the pixel height of each such display line as
+     * we go along. The final total is, therefore, the height of the logical
+     * line.
+     */
+
+    displayLines = 0;
+    mergedLines = 0;
+
+    while (1) {
+	int bytes, height, logicalLines;
+
+	/*
+	 * Currently this call doesn't have many side-effects. However, if in
+	 * the future we change the code so there are side-effects (such as
+	 * adjusting linePtr->pixelHeight), then the code might not quite work
+	 * as intended, specifically the 'linePtr->pixelHeight == pixelHeight'
+	 * test below this while loop.
+	 */
+
+	height = CalculateDisplayLineHeight(textPtr, indexPtr, &bytes,
+		&logicalLines);
+
+	if (height > 0) {
+	    pixelHeight += height;
+	    displayLines++;
+	}
+
+	mergedLines += logicalLines;
+
+	if (TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, indexPtr, bytes, indexPtr)) {
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	if (logicalLines == 0) {
+	    if (indexPtr->linePtr != linePtr) {
+		/*
+		 * If we reached the end of the logical line, then either way
+		 * we don't have a partial calculation.
+		 */
+
+		partialCalc = 0;
+		break;
+	    }
+	} else if (indexPtr->byteIndex != 0) {
+	    /*
+	     * We must still be on the same wrapped line.
+	     */
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * Must check if indexPtr is really a new logical line which is
+	     * not merged with the previous line. The only code that would
+	     * really know this is LayoutDLine, which doesn't pass the
+	     * information on, so we have to check manually here.
+	     */
+
+	    TkTextIndex idx;
+
+	    TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, &idx, COUNT_INDICES);
+	    if (!TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &idx, NULL)) {
+		/*
+		 * We've ended a logical line.
+		 */
+
+		partialCalc = 0;
+		break;
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * We must still be on the same wrapped line.
+	     */
+	}
+	if (partialCalc && displayLines > 50 && mergedLines == 0) {
+	    /*
+	     * Only calculate 50 display lines at a time, to avoid huge
+	     * delays. In any case it is very rare that a single line wraps 50
+	     * times!
+	     *
+	     * If we have any merged lines, we must complete the full logical
+	     * line layout here and now, because the partial-calculation code
+	     * isn't designed to handle merged logical lines. Hence the
+	     * 'mergedLines == 0' check.
+	     */
+
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (!partialCalc) {
+	int changed = 0;
+
+	/*
+	 * Cancel any partial line height calculation state.
+	 */
+
+	textPtr->dInfoPtr->metricEpoch = -1;
+
+	/*
+	 * Mark the logical line as being up to date (caution: it isn't yet up
+	 * to date, that will happen in TkBTreeAdjustPixelHeight just below).
+	 */
+
+	TkBTreeLinePixelEpoch(textPtr, linePtr)
+		= textPtr->dInfoPtr->lineMetricUpdateEpoch;
+	if (TkBTreeLinePixelCount(textPtr, linePtr) != pixelHeight) {
+	    changed = 1;
+	}
+
+	if (mergedLines > 0) {
+	    int i = mergedLines;
+	    TkTextLine *mergedLinePtr;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Loop over all merged logical lines, marking them up to date
+	     * (again, the pixel count setting will actually happen in
+	     * TkBTreeAdjustPixelHeight).
+	     */
+
+	    mergedLinePtr = linePtr;
+	    while (i-- > 0) {
+		mergedLinePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, mergedLinePtr);
+		TkBTreeLinePixelEpoch(textPtr, mergedLinePtr)
+			= textPtr->dInfoPtr->lineMetricUpdateEpoch;
+		if (TkBTreeLinePixelCount(textPtr, mergedLinePtr) != 0) {
+		    changed = 1;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+
+	if (!changed) {
+	    /*
+	     * If there's nothing to change, then we can already return.
+	     */
+
+	    return displayLines;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * We set the line's height, but the return value is now the height of the
+     * entire widget, which may be used just below for reporting/debugging
+     * purposes.
+     */
+
+    pixelHeight = TkBTreeAdjustPixelHeight(textPtr, linePtr, pixelHeight,
+	    mergedLines);
+
+    if (tkTextDebug) {
+	char buffer[2 * TCL_INTEGER_SPACE + 1];
+
+	if (TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, linePtr) == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_Panic("Mustn't ever update line height of last artificial line");
+	}
+
+	sprintf(buffer, "%d %d", TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr,linePtr), pixelHeight);
+	LOG("tk_textNumPixels", buffer);
+    }
+    if (textPtr->dInfoPtr->scrollbarTimer == NULL) {
+	textPtr->refCount++;
+	textPtr->dInfoPtr->scrollbarTimer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(200,
+		AsyncUpdateYScrollbar, (ClientData) textPtr);
+    }
+    return displayLines;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * DisplayText --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked as a when-idle handler to update the
- *	display.  It only redisplays the parts of the text widget that
- *	are out of date.
+ *	This function is invoked as a when-idle handler to update the display.
+ *	It only redisplays the parts of the text widget that are out of date.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2206,24 +3885,22 @@ DisplayLineBackground(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap)
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayText(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about widget. */
+DisplayText(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     register TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData;
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
     register DLine *dlPtr;
     DLine *prevPtr;
     Pixmap pixmap;
     int maxHeight, borders;
-    int bottomY = 0;		/* Initialization needed only to stop
-				 * compiler warnings. */
+    int bottomY = 0;		/* Initialization needed only to stop compiler
+				 * warnings. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;
 
-    if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
-
+    if ((textPtr->tkwin == NULL) || (textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
 	/*
-	 * The widget has been deleted.  Don't do anything.
+	 * The widget has been deleted.	 Don't do anything.
 	 */
 
 	return;
@@ -2233,17 +3910,15 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
 
     if (tkTextDebug) {
-	Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "tk_textRelayout", (char *) NULL, "",
-                TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "tk_textRelayout", NULL, "", TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
     }
 
-    if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
-
+    if ((textPtr->tkwin == NULL) || (textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
 	/*
-	 * The widget has been deleted.  Don't do anything.
+	 * The widget has been deleted.	 Don't do anything.
 	 */
 
-        goto end;
+	goto end;
     }
 
     if (!Tk_IsMapped(textPtr->tkwin) || (dInfoPtr->maxX <= dInfoPtr->x)
@@ -2254,34 +3929,34 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
     }
     numRedisplays++;
     if (tkTextDebug) {
-	Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "tk_textRedraw", (char *) NULL, "",
-                TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "tk_textRedraw", NULL, "", TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
     }
 
-    if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
-
+    if ((textPtr->tkwin == NULL) || (textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
 	/*
-	 * The widget has been deleted.  Don't do anything.
+	 * The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything.
 	 */
 
 	goto end;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Choose a new current item if that is needed (this could cause
-     * event handlers to be invoked, hence the preserve/release calls
-     * and the loop, since the handlers could conceivably necessitate
-     * yet another current item calculation).  The tkwin check is because
-     * the whole window could go away in the Tcl_Release call.
+     * Choose a new current item if that is needed (this could cause event
+     * handlers to be invoked, hence the preserve/release calls and the loop,
+     * since the handlers could conceivably necessitate yet another current
+     * item calculation). The tkwin check is because the whole window could go
+     * away in the Tcl_Release call.
      */
 
     while (dInfoPtr->flags & REPICK_NEEDED) {
-	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) textPtr);
+	textPtr->refCount++;
 	dInfoPtr->flags &= ~REPICK_NEEDED;
 	TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, &textPtr->pickEvent);
-	tkwin = textPtr->tkwin;
-	Tcl_Release((ClientData) textPtr);
-	if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	if (--textPtr->refCount == 0) {
+	    ckfree((char *) textPtr);
+	    goto end;
+	}
+	if ((textPtr->tkwin == NULL) || (textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
 	    goto end;
 	}
     }
@@ -2294,8 +3969,11 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
     dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated = 0;
 
     /*
-     * See if it's possible to bring some parts of the screen up-to-date
-     * by scrolling (copying from other parts of the screen).
+     * See if it's possible to bring some parts of the screen up-to-date by
+     * scrolling (copying from other parts of the screen). We have to be
+     * particularly careful with the top and bottom lines of the display,
+     * since these may only be partially visible and therefore not helpful for
+     * some scrolling purposes.
      */
 
     for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL; dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -2303,15 +3981,37 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
 	int offset, height, y, oldY;
 	TkRegion damageRgn;
 
-	if ((dlPtr->oldY == -1) || (dlPtr->y == dlPtr->oldY)
-		|| ((dlPtr->oldY + dlPtr->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY)) {
+	/*
+	 * These tests are, in order:
+	 *
+	 * 1. If the line is already marked as invalid
+	 * 2. If the line hasn't moved
+	 * 3. If the line overlaps the bottom of the window and we are
+	 *    scrolling up.
+	 * 4. If the line overlaps the top of the window and we are scrolling
+	 *    down.
+	 *
+	 * If any of these tests are true, then we can't scroll this line's
+	 * part of the display.
+	 *
+	 * Note that even if tests 3 or 4 aren't true, we may be able to
+	 * scroll the line, but we still need to be sure to call embedded
+	 * window display procs on top and bottom lines if they have any
+	 * portion non-visible (see below).
+	 */
+
+	if ((dlPtr->flags & OLD_Y_INVALID)
+		|| (dlPtr->y == dlPtr->oldY)
+		|| (((dlPtr->oldY + dlPtr->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY)
+		    && (dlPtr->y < dlPtr->oldY))
+		|| ((dlPtr->oldY < dInfoPtr->y) && (dlPtr->y > dlPtr->oldY))) {
 	    continue;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * This line is already drawn somewhere in the window so it only
-	 * needs to be copied to its new location.  See if there's a group
-	 * of lines that can all be copied together.
+	 * This line is already drawn somewhere in the window so it only needs
+	 * to be copied to its new location. See if there's a group of lines
+	 * that can all be copied together.
 	 */
 
 	offset = dlPtr->y - dlPtr->oldY;
@@ -2319,7 +4019,7 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
 	y = dlPtr->y;
 	for (dlPtr2 = dlPtr->nextPtr; dlPtr2 != NULL;
 		dlPtr2 = dlPtr2->nextPtr) {
-	    if ((dlPtr2->oldY == -1)
+	    if ((dlPtr2->flags & OLD_Y_INVALID)
 		    || ((dlPtr2->oldY + offset) != dlPtr2->y)
 		    || ((dlPtr2->oldY + dlPtr2->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY)) {
 		break;
@@ -2328,21 +4028,36 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Reduce the height of the area being copied if necessary to
-	 * avoid overwriting the border area.
+	 * Reduce the height of the area being copied if necessary to avoid
+	 * overwriting the border area.
 	 */
 
 	if ((y + height) > dInfoPtr->maxY) {
 	    height = dInfoPtr->maxY -y;
 	}
 	oldY = dlPtr->oldY;
+	if (y < dInfoPtr->y) {
+	    /*
+	     * Adjust if the area being copied is going to overwrite the top
+	     * border of the window (so the top line is only half onscreen).
+	     */
+
+	    int y_off = dInfoPtr->y - dlPtr->y;
+	    height -= y_off;
+	    oldY += y_off;
+	    y = dInfoPtr->y;
+	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Update the lines we are going to scroll to show that they
-	 * have been copied.
+	 * Update the lines we are going to scroll to show that they have been
+	 * copied.
 	 */
 
 	while (1) {
+	    /*
+	     * The DLine already has OLD_Y_INVALID cleared.
+	     */
+
 	    dlPtr->oldY = dlPtr->y;
 	    if (dlPtr->nextPtr == dlPtr2) {
 		break;
@@ -2351,30 +4066,28 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Scan through the lines following the copied ones to see if
-	 * we are going to overwrite them with the copy operation.
-	 * If so, mark them for redisplay.
+	 * Scan through the lines following the copied ones to see if we are
+	 * going to overwrite them with the copy operation. If so, mark them
+	 * for redisplay.
 	 */
 
 	for ( ; dlPtr2 != NULL; dlPtr2 = dlPtr2->nextPtr) {
-	    if ((dlPtr2->oldY != -1)
+	    if ((!(dlPtr2->flags & OLD_Y_INVALID))
 		    && ((dlPtr2->oldY + dlPtr2->height) > y)
 		    && (dlPtr2->oldY < (y + height))) {
-		dlPtr2->oldY = -1;
+		dlPtr2->flags |= OLD_Y_INVALID;
 	    }
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Now scroll the lines.  This may generate damage which we
-	 * handle by calling TextInvalidateRegion to mark the display
-	 * blocks as stale.
+	 * Now scroll the lines. This may generate damage which we handle by
+	 * calling TextInvalidateRegion to mark the display blocks as stale.
 	 */
 
 	damageRgn = TkCreateRegion();
-	if (TkScrollWindow(textPtr->tkwin, dInfoPtr->scrollGC,
-		dInfoPtr->x, oldY,
-		(dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x), height,
-		0, y - oldY, damageRgn)) {
+	if (TkScrollWindow(textPtr->tkwin, dInfoPtr->scrollGC, dInfoPtr->x,
+		oldY, dInfoPtr->maxX-dInfoPtr->x, height, 0, y-oldY,
+		damageRgn)) {
 	    TextInvalidateRegion(textPtr, damageRgn);
 	}
 	numCopies++;
@@ -2382,14 +4095,13 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Clear the REDRAW_PENDING flag here.  This is actually pretty
-     * tricky.  We want to wait until *after* doing the scrolling,
-     * since that could generate more areas to redraw and don't
-     * want to reschedule a redisplay for them.  On the other hand,
-     * we can't wait until after all the redisplaying, because the
-     * act of redisplaying could actually generate more redisplays
-     * (e.g. in the case of a nested window with event bindings triggered
-     * by redisplay).
+     * Clear the REDRAW_PENDING flag here. This is actually pretty tricky. We
+     * want to wait until *after* doing the scrolling, since that could
+     * generate more areas to redraw and don't want to reschedule a redisplay
+     * for them. On the other hand, we can't wait until after all the
+     * redisplaying, because the act of redisplaying could actually generate
+     * more redisplays (e.g. in the case of a nested window with event
+     * bindings triggered by redisplay).
      */
 
     dInfoPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING;
@@ -2400,18 +4112,16 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
 
     if (dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_BORDERS) {
 	if (tkTextDebug) {
-	    Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "tk_textRedraw", (char *) NULL, "borders",
-		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT);
+	    LOG("tk_textRedraw", "borders");
 	}
 
-        if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
-
+	if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
 	    /*
-             * The widget has been deleted.  Don't do anything.
-             */
+	     * The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything.
+	     */
 
-            goto end;
-        }
+	    goto end;
+	}
 
 	Tk_Draw3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin),
 		textPtr->border, textPtr->highlightWidth,
@@ -2421,17 +4131,17 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
 		textPtr->borderWidth, textPtr->relief);
 	if (textPtr->highlightWidth != 0) {
 	    GC fgGC, bgGC;
-    
+
 	    bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(textPtr->highlightBgColorPtr,
-			Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin));
+		    Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin));
 	    if (textPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
 		fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(textPtr->highlightColorPtr,
 			Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin));
-	        TkpDrawHighlightBorder(textPtr->tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, 
-		        textPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin));
+		TkpDrawHighlightBorder(textPtr->tkwin, fgGC, bgGC,
+			textPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin));
 	    } else {
-	        TkpDrawHighlightBorder(textPtr->tkwin, bgGC, bgGC, 
-		        textPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin));
+		TkpDrawHighlightBorder(textPtr->tkwin, bgGC, bgGC,
+			textPtr->highlightWidth, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin));
 	    }
 	}
 	borders = textPtr->borderWidth + textPtr->highlightWidth;
@@ -2463,23 +4173,33 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Now we have to redraw the lines that couldn't be updated by
-     * scrolling.  First, compute the height of the largest line and
-     * allocate an off-screen pixmap to use for double-buffered
-     * displays.
+     * Now we have to redraw the lines that couldn't be updated by scrolling.
+     * First, compute the height of the largest line and allocate an off-
+     * screen pixmap to use for double-buffered displays.
      */
 
     maxHeight = -1;
     for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL;
 	    dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) {
-	if ((dlPtr->height > maxHeight) && (dlPtr->oldY != dlPtr->y)) {
+	if ((dlPtr->height > maxHeight) &&
+		((dlPtr->flags&OLD_Y_INVALID) || (dlPtr->oldY != dlPtr->y))) {
 	    maxHeight = dlPtr->height;
 	}
 	bottomY = dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height;
     }
-    if (maxHeight > dInfoPtr->maxY) {
-	maxHeight = dInfoPtr->maxY;
+
+    /*
+     * There used to be a line here which restricted 'maxHeight' to be no
+     * larger than 'dInfoPtr->maxY', but this is incorrect for the case where
+     * individual lines may be taller than the widget _and_ we have smooth
+     * scrolling. What we can do is restrict maxHeight to be no larger than
+     * 'dInfoPtr->maxY + dInfoPtr->topPixelOffset'.
+     */
+
+    if (maxHeight > (dInfoPtr->maxY + dInfoPtr->topPixelOffset)) {
+	maxHeight = (dInfoPtr->maxY + dInfoPtr->topPixelOffset);
     }
+
     if (maxHeight > 0) {
 #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
 	pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin),
@@ -2491,14 +4211,15 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
 	for (prevPtr = NULL, dlPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr->dLinePtr;
 		(dlPtr != NULL) && (dlPtr->y < dInfoPtr->maxY);
 		prevPtr = dlPtr, dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    if (dlPtr->chunkPtr == NULL) continue;
-	    if (dlPtr->oldY != dlPtr->y) {
+	    if (dlPtr->chunkPtr == NULL) {
+		continue;
+	    }
+	    if ((dlPtr->flags & OLD_Y_INVALID) || dlPtr->oldY != dlPtr->y) {
 		if (tkTextDebug) {
 		    char string[TK_POS_CHARS];
-		    TkTextPrintIndex(&dlPtr->index, string);
-		    Tcl_SetVar2(textPtr->interp, "tk_textRedraw",
-			    (char *) NULL, string,
-			    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT);
+
+		    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &dlPtr->index, string);
+		    LOG("tk_textRedraw", string);
 		}
 		DisplayDLine(textPtr, dlPtr, prevPtr, pixmap);
 		if (dInfoPtr->dLinesInvalidated) {
@@ -2508,9 +4229,55 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
 		    return;
 		}
 		dlPtr->oldY = dlPtr->y;
-		dlPtr->flags &= ~NEW_LAYOUT;
+		dlPtr->flags &= ~(NEW_LAYOUT | OLD_Y_INVALID);
+	    } else if (dlPtr->chunkPtr != NULL && ((dlPtr->y < 0)
+		    || (dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height > dInfoPtr->maxY))) {
+		register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;
+
+		/*
+		 * It's the first or last DLine which are also overlapping the
+		 * top or bottom of the window, but we decided above it wasn't
+		 * necessary to display them (we were able to update them by
+		 * scrolling). This is fine, except that if the lines contain
+		 * any embedded windows, we must still call the display proc
+		 * on them because they might need to be unmapped or they
+		 * might need to be moved to reflect their new position.
+		 * Otherwise, everything else moves, but the embedded window
+		 * doesn't!
+		 *
+		 * So, we loop through all the chunks, calling the display
+		 * proc of embedded windows only.
+		 */
+
+		for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; (chunkPtr != NULL);
+			chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) {
+		    int x;
+		    if (chunkPtr->displayProc != TkTextEmbWinDisplayProc) {
+			continue;
+		    }
+		    x = chunkPtr->x + dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curXPixelOffset;
+		    if ((x + chunkPtr->width <= 0) || (x >= dInfoPtr->maxX)) {
+			/*
+			 * Note: we have to call the displayProc even for
+			 * chunks that are off-screen. This is needed, for
+			 * example, so that embedded windows can be unmapped
+			 * in this case. Display the chunk at a coordinate
+			 * that can be clearly identified by the displayProc
+			 * as being off-screen to the left (the displayProc
+			 * may not be able to tell if something is off to the
+			 * right).
+			 */
+
+			x = -chunkPtr->width;
+		    }
+		    TkTextEmbWinDisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr, x,
+			    dlPtr->spaceAbove,
+			    dlPtr->height-dlPtr->spaceAbove-dlPtr->spaceBelow,
+			    dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, NULL,
+			    (Drawable) None, dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove);
+		}
+
 	    }
-	    /*prevPtr = dlPtr;*/
 	}
 #ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
 	Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin), pixmap);
@@ -2518,10 +4285,10 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * See if we need to refresh the part of the window below the
-     * last line of text (if there is any such area).  Refresh the
-     * padding area on the left too, since the insertion cursor might
-     * have been displayed there previously).
+     * See if we need to refresh the part of the window below the last line of
+     * text (if there is any such area). Refresh the padding area on the left
+     * too, since the insertion cursor might have been displayed there
+     * previously).
      */
 
     if (dInfoPtr->topOfEof > dInfoPtr->maxY) {
@@ -2529,19 +4296,16 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
     }
     if (bottomY < dInfoPtr->topOfEof) {
 	if (tkTextDebug) {
-	    Tcl_SetVar2(textPtr->interp, "tk_textRedraw",
-		    (char *) NULL, "eof",
-		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_APPEND_VALUE|TCL_LIST_ELEMENT);
+	    LOG("tk_textRedraw", "eof");
 	}
 
-        if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
-
+	if ((textPtr->tkwin == NULL) || (textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
 	    /*
-             * The widget has been deleted.  Don't do anything.
-             */
+	     * The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything.
+	     */
 
-            goto end;
-        }
+	    goto end;
+	}
 
 	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin),
 		textPtr->border, dInfoPtr->x - textPtr->padX, bottomY,
@@ -2550,28 +4314,26 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
     }
     dInfoPtr->topOfEof = bottomY;
 
-    doScrollbars:
-
     /*
-     * Update the vertical scrollbar, if there is one.  Note:  it's
-     * important to clear REDRAW_PENDING here, just in case the
-     * scroll procedure does something that requires redisplay.
+     * Update the vertical scrollbar, if there is one. Note: it's important to
+     * clear REDRAW_PENDING here, just in case the scroll function does
+     * something that requires redisplay.
      */
-    
+
+  doScrollbars:
     if (textPtr->flags & UPDATE_SCROLLBARS) {
 	textPtr->flags &= ~UPDATE_SCROLLBARS;
 	if (textPtr->yScrollCmd != NULL) {
 	    GetYView(textPtr->interp, textPtr, 1);
 	}
 
-        if (textPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
-
+	if ((textPtr->tkwin == NULL) || (textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
 	    /*
-             * The widget has been deleted.  Don't do anything.
-             */
+	     * The widget has been deleted. Don't do anything.
+	     */
 
-            goto end;
-        }
+	    goto end;
+	}
 
 	/*
 	 * Update the horizontal scrollbar, if any.
@@ -2582,7 +4344,7 @@ DisplayText(clientData)
 	}
     }
 
-end:
+  end:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
 }
 
@@ -2591,9 +4353,8 @@ end:
  *
  * TkTextEventuallyRepick --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever something happens that
- *	could change the current character or the tags associated
- *	with it.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever something happens that could change
+ *	the current character or the tags associated with it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2604,10 +4365,9 @@ end:
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-	/* ARGSUSED */
 void
-TkTextEventuallyRepick(textPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+TkTextEventuallyRepick(
+    TkText *textPtr)		/* Widget record for text widget. */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
 
@@ -2623,9 +4383,9 @@ TkTextEventuallyRepick(textPtr)
  *
  * TkTextRedrawRegion --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to schedule a redisplay for a given
- *	region of a text widget.  The redisplay itself may not occur
- *	immediately:  it's scheduled as a when-idle handler.
+ *	This function is invoked to schedule a redisplay for a given region of
+ *	a text widget. The redisplay itself may not occur immediately: it's
+ *	scheduled as a when-idle handler.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2636,14 +4396,13 @@ TkTextEventuallyRepick(textPtr)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-	/* ARGSUSED */
 void
-TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, x, y, width, height)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget record for text widget. */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of upper-left corner of area
-				 * to be redrawn, in pixels relative to
-				 * textPtr's window. */
-    int width, height;		/* Width and height of area to be redrawn. */
+TkTextRedrawRegion(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Coordinates of upper-left corner of area to
+				 * be redrawn, in pixels relative to textPtr's
+				 * window. */
+    int width, int height)	/* Width and height of area to be redrawn. */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
     TkRegion damageRgn = TkCreateRegion();
@@ -2681,9 +4440,9 @@ TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, x, y, width, height)
  */
 
 static void
-TextInvalidateRegion(textPtr, region)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget record for text widget. */
-    TkRegion region;		/* Region of area to redraw. */
+TextInvalidateRegion(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    TkRegion region)		/* Region of area to redraw. */
 {
     register DLine *dlPtr;
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
@@ -2699,9 +4458,10 @@ TextInvalidateRegion(textPtr, region)
     maxY = rect.y + rect.height;
     for (dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; dlPtr != NULL;
 	    dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) {
-	if ((dlPtr->oldY != -1) && (TkRectInRegion(region, rect.x, dlPtr->y,
+	if ((!(dlPtr->flags & OLD_Y_INVALID))
+		&& (TkRectInRegion(region, rect.x, dlPtr->y,
 		rect.width, (unsigned int) dlPtr->height) != RectangleOut)) {
-	    dlPtr->oldY = -1;
+	    dlPtr->flags |= OLD_Y_INVALID;
 	}
     }
     if (dInfoPtr->topOfEof < maxY) {
@@ -2709,8 +4469,7 @@ TextInvalidateRegion(textPtr, region)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Schedule the redisplay operation if there isn't one already
-     * scheduled.
+     * Schedule the redisplay operation if there isn't one already scheduled.
      */
 
     inset = textPtr->borderWidth + textPtr->highlightWidth;
@@ -2726,32 +4485,54 @@ TextInvalidateRegion(textPtr, region)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * TkTextChanged --
+ * TkTextChanged, TextChanged --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when info in a text widget is about
- *	to be modified in a way that changes how it is displayed (e.g.
- *	characters were inserted or deleted, or tag information was
- *	changed).  This procedure must be called *before* a change is
- *	made, so that indexes in the display information are still
- *	valid.
+ *	This function is invoked when info in a text widget is about to be
+ *	modified in a way that changes how it is displayed (e.g. characters
+ *	were inserted or deleted, or tag information was changed). This
+ *	function must be called *before* a change is made, so that indexes in
+ *	the display information are still valid.
+ *
+ *	Note: if the range of indices may change geometry as well as simply
+ *	requiring redisplay, then the caller should also call
+ *	TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The range of character between index1Ptr (inclusive) and
- *	index2Ptr (exclusive) will be redisplayed at some point in the
- *	future (the actual redisplay is scheduled as a when-idle handler).
+ *	The range of character between index1Ptr (inclusive) and index2Ptr
+ *	(exclusive) will be redisplayed at some point in the future (the
+ *	actual redisplay is scheduled as a when-idle handler).
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkTextChanged(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget record for text widget. */
-    TkTextIndex *index1Ptr;	/* Index of first character to redisplay. */
-    TkTextIndex *index2Ptr;	/* Index of character just after last one
-				 * to redisplay. */
+TkTextChanged(
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr,/* Shared widget section, or NULL. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget, or NULL. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex*index1Ptr,/* Index of first character to redisplay. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex*index2Ptr)/* Index of character just after last one to
+				 * redisplay. */
+{
+    if (sharedTextPtr == NULL) {
+	TextChanged(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr);
+    } else {
+	textPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers;
+	while (textPtr != NULL) {
+	    TextChanged(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr);
+	    textPtr = textPtr->next;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+TextChanged(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget, or NULL. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex*index1Ptr,/* Index of first character to redisplay. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex*index2Ptr)/* Index of character just after last one to
+				 * redisplay. */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
     DLine *firstPtr, *lastPtr;
@@ -2759,18 +4540,18 @@ TkTextChanged(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
 
     /*
      * Schedule both a redisplay and a recomputation of display information.
-     * It's done here rather than the end of the procedure for two reasons:
+     * It's done here rather than the end of the function for two reasons:
      *
      * 1. If there are no display lines to update we'll want to return
-     *    immediately, well before the end of the procedure.
+     *	  immediately, well before the end of the function.
      * 2. It's important to arrange for the redisplay BEFORE calling
-     *    FreeDLines.  The reason for this is subtle and has to do with
-     *    embedded windows.  The chunk delete procedure for an embedded
-     *    window will schedule an idle handler to unmap the window.
-     *    However, we want the idle handler for redisplay to be called
-     *    first, so that it can put the embedded window back on the screen
-     *    again (if appropriate).  This will prevent the window from ever
-     *    being unmapped, and thereby avoid flashing.
+     *	  FreeDLines. The reason for this is subtle and has to do with
+     *	  embedded windows. The chunk delete function for an embedded window
+     *	  will schedule an idle handler to unmap the window. However, we want
+     *	  the idle handler for redisplay to be called first, so that it can
+     *	  put the embedded window back on the screen again (if appropriate).
+     *	  This will prevent the window from ever being unmapped, and thereby
+     *	  avoid flashing.
      */
 
     if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
@@ -2779,13 +4560,13 @@ TkTextChanged(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
     dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE|REPICK_NEEDED;
 
     /*
-     * Find the DLines corresponding to index1Ptr and index2Ptr.  There
-     * is one tricky thing here, which is that we have to relayout in
-     * units of whole text lines:  round index1Ptr back to the beginning
-     * of its text line, and include all the display lines after index2,
-     * up to the end of its text line.  This is necessary because the
-     * indices stored in the display lines will no longer be valid.  It's
-     * also needed because any edit could change the way lines wrap.
+     * Find the DLines corresponding to index1Ptr and index2Ptr. There is one
+     * tricky thing here, which is that we have to relayout in units of whole
+     * text lines: round index1Ptr back to the beginning of its text line, and
+     * include all the display lines after index2, up to the end of its text
+     * line. This is necessary because the indices stored in the display lines
+     * will no longer be valid. It's also needed because any edit could change
+     * the way lines wrap.
      */
 
     rounded = *index1Ptr;
@@ -2804,39 +4585,64 @@ TkTextChanged(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
      * Delete all the DLines from firstPtr up to but not including lastPtr.
      */
 
-    FreeDLines(textPtr, firstPtr, lastPtr, 1);
+    FreeDLines(textPtr, firstPtr, lastPtr, DLINE_UNLINK);
 }
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * TkTextRedrawTag --
+ * TkTextRedrawTag, TextRedrawTag --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to request a redraw of all characters
- *	in a given range that have a particular tag on or off.  It's
- *	called, for example, when tag options change.
+ *	This function is invoked to request a redraw of all characters in a
+ *	given range that have a particular tag on or off. It's called, for
+ *	example, when tag options change.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Information on the screen may be redrawn, and the layout of
- *	the screen may change.
+ *	Information on the screen may be redrawn, and the layout of the screen
+ *	may change.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, withTag)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget record for text widget. */
-    TkTextIndex *index1Ptr;	/* First character in range to consider
-				 * for redisplay.  NULL means start at
-				 * beginning of text. */
-    TkTextIndex *index2Ptr;	/* Character just after last one to consider
-				 * for redisplay.  NULL means process all
-				 * the characters in the text. */
-    TkTextTag *tagPtr;		/* Information about tag. */
-    int withTag;		/* 1 means redraw characters that have the
+TkTextRedrawTag(
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr,/* Shared widget section, or NULL. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,	/* First character in range to consider for
+				 * redisplay. NULL means start at beginning of
+				 * text. */
+    TkTextIndex *index2Ptr,	/* Character just after last one to consider
+				 * for redisplay. NULL means process all the
+				 * characters in the text. */
+    TkTextTag *tagPtr,		/* Information about tag. */
+    int withTag)		/* 1 means redraw characters that have the
+				 * tag, 0 means redraw those without. */
+{
+    if (sharedTextPtr == NULL) {
+	TextRedrawTag(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, withTag);
+    } else {
+	textPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers;
+	while (textPtr != NULL) {
+	    TextRedrawTag(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, withTag);
+	    textPtr = textPtr->next;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+TextRedrawTag(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,	/* First character in range to consider for
+				 * redisplay. NULL means start at beginning of
+				 * text. */
+    TkTextIndex *index2Ptr,	/* Character just after last one to consider
+				 * for redisplay. NULL means process all the
+				 * characters in the text. */
+    TkTextTag *tagPtr,		/* Information about tag. */
+    int withTag)		/* 1 means redraw characters that have the
 				 * tag, 0 means redraw those without. */
 {
     register DLine *dlPtr;
@@ -2848,15 +4654,45 @@ TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, withTag)
     TkTextIndex endOfText, *endIndexPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Round up the starting position if it's before the first line
-     * visible on the screen (we only care about what's on the screen).
+     * Invalidate the pixel calculation of all lines in the given range. This
+     * may be a bit over-aggressive, so we could consider more subtle
+     * techniques here in the future. In particular, when we create a tag for
+     * the first time with '.t tag configure foo -font "Arial 20"', say, even
+     * though that obviously can't apply to anything at all (the tag didn't
+     * exist a moment ago), we invalidate every single line in the widget.
+     */
+
+    if (tagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry) {
+	TkTextLine *startLine, *endLine;
+	int lineCount;
+
+	if (index2Ptr == NULL) {
+	    endLine = NULL;
+	    lineCount = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr);
+	} else {
+	    endLine = index2Ptr->linePtr;
+	    lineCount = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, endLine);
+	}
+	if (index1Ptr == NULL) {
+	    startLine = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    startLine = index1Ptr->linePtr;
+	    lineCount -= TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, startLine);
+	}
+	TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(NULL, textPtr, startLine, lineCount,
+		TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Round up the starting position if it's before the first line visible on
+     * the screen (we only care about what's on the screen).
      */
 
     dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr;
     if (dlPtr == NULL) {
 	return;
     }
-    if ((index1Ptr == NULL) || (TkTextIndexCmp(&dlPtr->index, index1Ptr) > 0)) {
+    if ((index1Ptr == NULL) || (TkTextIndexCmp(&dlPtr->index, index1Ptr)>0)) {
 	index1Ptr = &dlPtr->index;
     }
 
@@ -2865,22 +4701,26 @@ TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, withTag)
      */
 
     if (index2Ptr == NULL) {
-	index2Ptr = TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree,
-		TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree), 0, &endOfText);
+	int lastLine = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr);
+
+	index2Ptr = TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		lastLine, 0, &endOfText);
     }
 
-    /* 
-     * Initialize a search through all transitions on the tag, starting
-     * with the first transition where the tag's current state is different
-     * from what it will eventually be.
+    /*
+     * Initialize a search through all transitions on the tag, starting with
+     * the first transition where the tag's current state is different from
+     * what it will eventually be.
      */
 
     TkBTreeStartSearch(index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, &search);
+
     /*
-     * Make our own curIndex because at this point search.curIndex
-     * may not equal index1Ptr->curIndex in the case the first tag toggle
-     * comes after index1Ptr (See the use of FindTagStart in TkBTreeStartSearch)
+     * Make our own curIndex because at this point search.curIndex may not
+     * equal index1Ptr->curIndex in the case the first tag toggle comes after
+     * index1Ptr (See the use of FindTagStart in TkBTreeStartSearch).
      */
+
     curIndexPtr = index1Ptr;
     tagOn = TkBTreeCharTagged(index1Ptr, tagPtr);
     if (tagOn != withTag) {
@@ -2891,9 +4731,9 @@ TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, withTag)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Schedule a redisplay and layout recalculation if they aren't
-     * already pending.  This has to be done before calling FreeDLines,
-     * for the reason given in TkTextChanged.
+     * Schedule a redisplay and layout recalculation if they aren't already
+     * pending. This has to be done before calling FreeDLines, for the reason
+     * given in TkTextChanged.
      */
 
     if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
@@ -2902,21 +4742,20 @@ TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, withTag)
     dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE|REPICK_NEEDED;
 
     /*
-     * Each loop through the loop below is for one range of characters
-     * where the tag's current state is different than its eventual
-     * state.  At the top of the loop, search contains information about
-     * the first character in the range.
+     * Each loop through the loop below is for one range of characters where
+     * the tag's current state is different than its eventual state. At the
+     * top of the loop, search contains information about the first character
+     * in the range.
      */
 
     while (1) {
 	/*
-	 * Find the first DLine structure in the range.  Note: if the
-	 * desired character isn't the first in its text line, then look
-	 * for the character just before it instead.  This is needed to
-	 * handle the case where the first character of a wrapped
-	 * display line just got smaller, so that it now fits on the
-	 * line before:  need to relayout the line containing the
-	 * previous character.
+	 * Find the first DLine structure in the range. Note: if the desired
+	 * character isn't the first in its text line, then look for the
+	 * character just before it instead. This is needed to handle the case
+	 * where the first character of a wrapped display line just got
+	 * smaller, so that it now fits on the line before: need to relayout
+	 * the line containing the previous character.
 	 */
 
 	if (curIndexPtr->byteIndex == 0) {
@@ -2949,11 +4788,11 @@ TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, withTag)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Delete all of the display lines in the range, so that they'll
-	 * be re-layed out and redrawn.
+	 * Delete all of the display lines in the range, so that they'll be
+	 * re-layed out and redrawn.
 	 */
 
-	FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, endPtr, 1);
+	FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, endPtr, DLINE_UNLINK);
 	dlPtr = endPtr;
 
 	/*
@@ -2971,33 +4810,35 @@ TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr, tagPtr, withTag)
  *
  * TkTextRelayoutWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when something has happened that
- *	invalidates the whole layout of characters on the screen, such
- *	as a change in a configuration option for the overall text
- *	widget or a change in the window size.  It causes all display
- *	information to be recomputed and the window to be redrawn.
+ *	This function is called when something has happened that invalidates
+ *	the whole layout of characters on the screen, such as a change in a
+ *	configuration option for the overall text widget or a change in the
+ *	window size. It causes all display information to be recomputed and
+ *	the window to be redrawn.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	All the display information will be recomputed for the window
- *	and the window will be redrawn.
+ *	All the display information will be recomputed for the window and the
+ *	window will be redrawn.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkTextRelayoutWindow(textPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+TkTextRelayoutWindow(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    int mask)			/* OR'd collection of bits showing what has
+				 * changed. */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
-    GC new;
+    GC newGC;
     XGCValues gcValues;
 
     /*
-     * Schedule the window redisplay.  See TkTextChanged for the
-     * reason why this has to be done before any calls to FreeDLines.
+     * Schedule the window redisplay. See TkTextChanged for the reason why
+     * this has to be done before any calls to FreeDLines.
      */
 
     if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
@@ -3007,28 +4848,27 @@ TkTextRelayoutWindow(textPtr)
 	    |REPICK_NEEDED;
 
     /*
-     * (Re-)create the graphics context for drawing the traversal
-     * highlight.
+     * (Re-)create the graphics context for drawing the traversal highlight.
      */
 
     gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
-    new = Tk_GetGC(textPtr->tkwin, GCGraphicsExposures, &gcValues);
+    newGC = Tk_GetGC(textPtr->tkwin, GCGraphicsExposures, &gcValues);
     if (dInfoPtr->copyGC != None) {
 	Tk_FreeGC(textPtr->display, dInfoPtr->copyGC);
     }
-    dInfoPtr->copyGC = new;
+    dInfoPtr->copyGC = newGC;
 
     /*
      * Throw away all the current layout information.
      */
 
-    FreeDLines(textPtr, dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, (DLine *) NULL, 1);
+    FreeDLines(textPtr, dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, NULL, DLINE_UNLINK);
     dInfoPtr->dLinePtr = NULL;
 
     /*
-     * Recompute some overall things for the layout.  Even if the
-     * window gets very small, pretend that there's at least one
-     * pixel of drawing space in it.
+     * Recompute some overall things for the layout. Even if the window gets
+     * very small, pretend that there's at least one pixel of drawing space in
+     * it.
      */
 
     if (textPtr->highlightWidth < 0) {
@@ -3043,6 +4883,11 @@ TkTextRelayoutWindow(textPtr)
     if (dInfoPtr->maxX <= dInfoPtr->x) {
 	dInfoPtr->maxX = dInfoPtr->x + 1;
     }
+
+    /*
+     * This is the only place where dInfoPtr->maxY is set.
+     */
+
     dInfoPtr->maxY = Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin) - textPtr->highlightWidth
 	    - textPtr->borderWidth - textPtr->padY;
     if (dInfoPtr->maxY <= dInfoPtr->y) {
@@ -3051,22 +4896,50 @@ TkTextRelayoutWindow(textPtr)
     dInfoPtr->topOfEof = dInfoPtr->maxY;
 
     /*
-     * If the upper-left character isn't the first in a line, recompute
-     * it.  This is necessary because a change in the window's size
-     * or options could change the way lines wrap.
+     * If the upper-left character isn't the first in a line, recompute it.
+     * This is necessary because a change in the window's size or options
+     * could change the way lines wrap.
      */
 
     if (textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex != 0) {
-	MeasureUp(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex, 0, &textPtr->topIndex);
+	TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex, 0, NULL);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Invalidate cached scrollbar positions, so that scrollbars
-     * sliders will be udpated.
+     * Invalidate cached scrollbar positions, so that scrollbars sliders will
+     * be udpated.
      */
 
     dInfoPtr->xScrollFirst = dInfoPtr->xScrollLast = -1;
     dInfoPtr->yScrollFirst = dInfoPtr->yScrollLast = -1;
+
+    if (mask & TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY) {
+	/*
+	 * Set up line metric recalculation.
+	 *
+	 * Avoid the special zero value, since that is used to mark individual
+	 * lines as being out of date.
+	 */
+
+	if ((++dInfoPtr->lineMetricUpdateEpoch) == 0) {
+	    dInfoPtr->lineMetricUpdateEpoch++;
+	}
+
+	dInfoPtr->currentMetricUpdateLine = -1;
+
+	/*
+	 * Also cancel any partial line-height calculations (for long-wrapped
+	 * lines) in progress.
+	 */
+
+	dInfoPtr->metricEpoch = -1;
+
+	if (dInfoPtr->lineUpdateTimer == NULL) {
+	    textPtr->refCount++;
+	    dInfoPtr->lineUpdateTimer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(1,
+		    AsyncUpdateLineMetrics, (ClientData) textPtr);
+	}
+    }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -3074,68 +4947,84 @@ TkTextRelayoutWindow(textPtr)
  *
  * TkTextSetYView --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to specify what lines are to be
- *	displayed in a text widget.
+ *	This function is called to specify what lines are to be displayed in a
+ *	text widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The display will (eventually) be updated so that the position
- *	given by "indexPtr" is visible on the screen at the position
- *	determined by "pickPlace".
+ *	The display will (eventually) be updated so that the position given by
+ *	"indexPtr" is visible on the screen at the position determined by
+ *	"pickPlace".
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkTextSetYView(textPtr, indexPtr, pickPlace)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget record for text widget. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Position that is to appear somewhere
-				 * in the view. */
-    int pickPlace;		/* 0 means topLine must appear at top of
-				 * screen.  1 means we get to pick where it
-				 * appears:  minimize screen motion or else
-				 * display line at center of screen. */
+TkTextSetYView(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr,	/* Position that is to appear somewhere in the
+				 * view. */
+    int pickPlace)		/* 0 means the given index must appear exactly
+				 * at the top of the screen. TK_TEXT_PICKPLACE
+				 * (-1) means we get to pick where it appears:
+				 * minimize screen motion or else display line
+				 * at center of screen. TK_TEXT_NOPIXELADJUST
+				 * (-2) indicates to make the given index the
+				 * top line, but if it is already the top
+				 * line, don't nudge it up or down by a few
+				 * pixels just to make sure it is entirely
+				 * displayed. Positive numbers indicate the
+				 * number of pixels of the index's line which
+				 * are to be off the top of the screen. */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
     register DLine *dlPtr;
     int bottomY, close, lineIndex;
     TkTextIndex tmpIndex, rounded;
-    Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+    int lineHeight;
 
     /*
-     * If the specified position is the extra line at the end of the
-     * text, round it back to the last real line.
+     * If the specified position is the extra line at the end of the text,
+     * round it back to the last real line.
      */
 
-    lineIndex = TkBTreeLineIndex(indexPtr->linePtr);
-    if (lineIndex == TkBTreeNumLines(indexPtr->tree)) {
-	TkTextIndexBackChars(indexPtr, 1, &rounded);
+    lineIndex = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr->linePtr);
+    if (lineIndex == TkBTreeNumLines(indexPtr->tree, textPtr)) {
+	TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, &rounded, COUNT_INDICES);
 	indexPtr = &rounded;
     }
 
-    if (!pickPlace) {
+    if (pickPlace == TK_TEXT_NOPIXELADJUST) {
+	if (textPtr->topIndex.linePtr == indexPtr->linePtr
+		&& textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex == indexPtr->byteIndex) {
+	    pickPlace = dInfoPtr->topPixelOffset;
+	} else {
+	    pickPlace = 0;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (pickPlace != TK_TEXT_PICKPLACE) {
 	/*
-	 * The specified position must go at the top of the screen.
-	 * Just leave all the DLine's alone: we may be able to reuse
-	 * some of the information that's currently on the screen
-	 * without redisplaying it all.
+	 * The specified position must go at the top of the screen. Just leave
+	 * all the DLine's alone: we may be able to reuse some of the
+	 * information that's currently on the screen without redisplaying it
+	 * all.
 	 */
 
-	if (indexPtr->byteIndex == 0) {
-	    textPtr->topIndex = *indexPtr;
-	} else {
-	    MeasureUp(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, &textPtr->topIndex);
+	textPtr->topIndex = *indexPtr;
+	if (indexPtr->byteIndex != 0) {
+	    TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex, 0, NULL);
 	}
+	dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset = pickPlace;
 	goto scheduleUpdate;
     }
 
     /*
-     * We have to pick where to display the index.  First, bring
-     * the display information up to date and see if the index will be
-     * completely visible in the current screen configuration.  If so
-     * then there's nothing to do.
+     * We have to pick where to display the index. First, bring the display
+     * information up to date and see if the index will be completely visible
+     * in the current screen configuration. If so then there's nothing to do.
      */
 
     if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) {
@@ -3145,68 +5034,92 @@ TkTextSetYView(textPtr, indexPtr, pickPlace)
     if (dlPtr != NULL) {
 	if ((dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY) {
 	    /*
-	     * Part of the line hangs off the bottom of the screen;
-	     * pretend the whole line is off-screen.
+	     * Part of the line hangs off the bottom of the screen; pretend
+	     * the whole line is off-screen.
 	     */
 
 	    dlPtr = NULL;
 	} else if ((dlPtr->index.linePtr == indexPtr->linePtr)
 		&& (dlPtr->index.byteIndex <= indexPtr->byteIndex)) {
+	    if (dInfoPtr->dLinePtr == dlPtr && dInfoPtr->topPixelOffset != 0) {
+		/*
+		 * It is on the top line, but that line is hanging off the top
+		 * of the screen. Change the top overlap to zero and update.
+		 */
+
+		dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset = 0;
+		goto scheduleUpdate;
+	    }
 	    return;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * The desired line isn't already on-screen.  Figure out what
-     * it means to be "close" to the top or bottom of the screen.
-     * Close means within 1/3 of the screen height or within three
-     * lines, whichever is greater.  Add one extra line also, to
-     * account for the way MeasureUp rounds.
+     * The desired line isn't already on-screen. Figure out what it means to
+     * be "close" to the top or bottom of the screen. Close means within 1/3
+     * of the screen height or within three lines, whichever is greater.
+     *
+     * If the line is not close, place it in the center of the window.
+     */
+
+    lineHeight = CalculateDisplayLineHeight(textPtr, indexPtr, NULL, NULL);
+
+    /*
+     * It would be better if 'bottomY' were calculated using the actual height
+     * of the given line, not 'textPtr->charHeight'.
      */
 
-    Tk_GetFontMetrics(textPtr->tkfont, &fm);
-    bottomY = (dInfoPtr->y + dInfoPtr->maxY + fm.linespace)/2;
+    bottomY = (dInfoPtr->y + dInfoPtr->maxY + lineHeight)/2;
     close = (dInfoPtr->maxY - dInfoPtr->y)/3;
-    if (close < 3*fm.linespace) {
-	close = 3*fm.linespace;
+    if (close < 3*textPtr->charHeight) {
+	close = 3*textPtr->charHeight;
     }
-    close += fm.linespace;
     if (dlPtr != NULL) {
+	int overlap;
+
 	/*
-	 * The desired line is above the top of screen.  If it is
-	 * "close" to the top of the window then make it the top
-	 * line on the screen.
+	 * The desired line is above the top of screen. If it is "close" to
+	 * the top of the window then make it the top line on the screen.
+	 * MeasureUp counts from the bottom of the given index upwards, so we
+	 * add an extra half line to be sure we count far enough.
 	 */
 
-	MeasureUp(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex, close, &tmpIndex);
+	MeasureUp(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex, close + textPtr->charHeight/2,
+		&tmpIndex, &overlap);
 	if (TkTextIndexCmp(&tmpIndex, indexPtr) <= 0) {
-	    MeasureUp(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, &textPtr->topIndex);
+	    textPtr->topIndex = *indexPtr;
+	    TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex, 0, NULL);
+	    dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset = 0;
 	    goto scheduleUpdate;
 	}
     } else {
+	int overlap;
+
 	/*
-	 * The desired line is below the bottom of the screen.  If it is
-	 * "close" to the bottom of the screen then position it at the
-	 * bottom of the screen.
+	 * The desired line is below the bottom of the screen. If it is
+	 * "close" to the bottom of the screen then position it at the bottom
+	 * of the screen.
 	 */
 
-	MeasureUp(textPtr, indexPtr, close, &tmpIndex);
+	MeasureUp(textPtr, indexPtr, close + lineHeight
+		- textPtr->charHeight/2, &tmpIndex, &overlap);
 	if (FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, &tmpIndex) != NULL) {
 	    bottomY = dInfoPtr->maxY - dInfoPtr->y;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Our job now is to arrange the display so that indexPtr appears
-     * as low on the screen as possible but with its bottom no lower
-     * than bottomY.  BottomY is the bottom of the window if the
-     * desired line is just below the current screen, otherwise it
-     * is a half-line lower than the center of the window.
+     * Our job now is to arrange the display so that indexPtr appears as low
+     * on the screen as possible but with its bottom no lower than bottomY.
+     * BottomY is the bottom of the window if the desired line is just below
+     * the current screen, otherwise it is a half-line lower than the center
+     * of the window.
      */
 
-    MeasureUp(textPtr, indexPtr, bottomY, &textPtr->topIndex);
+    MeasureUp(textPtr, indexPtr, bottomY, &textPtr->topIndex,
+	    &dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset);
 
-    scheduleUpdate:
+  scheduleUpdate:
     if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr);
     }
@@ -3216,21 +5129,78 @@ TkTextSetYView(textPtr, indexPtr, pickPlace)
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * TkTextMeasureDown --
+ *
+ *	Given one index, find the index of the first character on the highest
+ *	display line that would be displayed no more than "distance" pixels
+ *	below the top of the given index.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The srcPtr is manipulated in place to reflect the new position. We
+ *	return the number of pixels by which 'distance' overlaps the srcPtr.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkTextMeasureDown(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget in which to measure. */
+    TkTextIndex *srcPtr,	/* Index of character from which to start
+				 * measuring. */
+    int distance)		/* Vertical distance in pixels measured from
+				 * the top pixel in srcPtr's logical line. */
+{
+    TkTextLine *lastLinePtr;
+    DLine *dlPtr;
+    TkTextIndex loop;
+
+    lastLinePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+	    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr));
+
+    do {
+	dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, srcPtr);
+	dlPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
+
+	if (distance < dlPtr->height) {
+	    FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, NULL, DLINE_FREE_TEMP);
+	    break;
+	}
+	distance -= dlPtr->height;
+	TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, srcPtr, dlPtr->byteCount, &loop);
+	FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, NULL, DLINE_FREE_TEMP);
+	if (loop.linePtr == lastLinePtr) {
+	    break;
+	}
+	*srcPtr = loop;
+    } while (distance > 0);
+
+    return distance;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * MeasureUp --
  *
- *	Given one index, find the index of the first character
- *	on the highest display line that would be displayed no more
- *	than "distance" pixels above the given index.
+ *	Given one index, find the index of the first character on the highest
+ *	display line that would be displayed no more than "distance" pixels
+ *	above the given index.
+ *
+ *	If this function is called with distance=0, it simply finds the first
+ *	index on the same display line as srcPtr. However, there is a another
+ *	function TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd designed just for that task which is
+ *	probably better to use.
  *
  * Results:
- *	*dstPtr is filled in with the index of the first character
- *	on a display line.  The display line is found by measuring
- *	up "distance" pixels above the pixel just below an imaginary
- *	display line that contains srcPtr.  If the display line
- *	that covers this coordinate actually extends above the 
- *	coordinate, then return the index of the next lower line
- *	instead (i.e. the returned index will be completely visible
- *	at or below the given y-coordinate).
+ *	*dstPtr is filled in with the index of the first character on a
+ *	display line. The display line is found by measuring up "distance"
+ *	pixels above the pixel just below an imaginary display line that
+ *	contains srcPtr. If the display line that covers this coordinate
+ *	actually extends above the coordinate, then return any excess pixels
+ *	in *overlap, if that is non-NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3239,83 +5209,87 @@ TkTextSetYView(textPtr, indexPtr, pickPlace)
  */
 
 static void
-MeasureUp(textPtr, srcPtr, distance, dstPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget in which to measure. */
-    TkTextIndex *srcPtr;	/* Index of character from which to start
+MeasureUp(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget in which to measure. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr,	/* Index of character from which to start
 				 * measuring. */
-    int distance;		/* Vertical distance in pixels measured
-				 * from the pixel just below the lowest
-				 * one in srcPtr's line. */
-    TkTextIndex *dstPtr;	/* Index to fill in with result. */
+    int distance,		/* Vertical distance in pixels measured from
+				 * the pixel just below the lowest one in
+				 * srcPtr's line. */
+    TkTextIndex *dstPtr,	/* Index to fill in with result. */
+    int *overlap)		/* Used to store how much of the final index
+				 * returned was not covered by 'distance'. */
 {
     int lineNum;		/* Number of current line. */
     int bytesToCount;		/* Maximum number of bytes to measure in
 				 * current line. */
-    TkTextIndex bestIndex = {NULL, NULL, 0}; /* Best candidate seen so far for
-					      * result. Silence gcc 4 warning */
     TkTextIndex index;
     DLine *dlPtr, *lowestPtr;
-    int noBestYet;		/* 1 means bestIndex hasn't been set. */
 
-    noBestYet = 1;
     bytesToCount = srcPtr->byteIndex + 1;
     index.tree = srcPtr->tree;
-    for (lineNum = TkBTreeLineIndex(srcPtr->linePtr); lineNum >= 0;
+    for (lineNum = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, srcPtr->linePtr); lineNum >= 0;
 	    lineNum--) {
 	/*
 	 * Layout an entire text line (potentially > 1 display line).
-	 * For the first line, which contains srcPtr, only layout the
-	 * part up through srcPtr (bytesToCount is non-infinite to
-	 * accomplish this).  Make a list of all the display lines
-	 * in backwards order (the lowest DLine on the screen is first
-	 * in the list).
+	 *
+	 * For the first line, which contains srcPtr, only layout the part up
+	 * through srcPtr (bytesToCount is non-infinite to accomplish this).
+	 * Make a list of all the display lines in backwards order (the lowest
+	 * DLine on the screen is first in the list).
 	 */
 
-	index.linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(srcPtr->tree, lineNum);
+	index.linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(srcPtr->tree, textPtr, lineNum);
 	index.byteIndex = 0;
 	lowestPtr = NULL;
 	do {
 	    dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index);
 	    dlPtr->nextPtr = lowestPtr;
 	    lowestPtr = dlPtr;
-	    TkTextIndexForwBytes(&index, dlPtr->byteCount, &index);
+	    TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &index, dlPtr->byteCount, &index);
 	    bytesToCount -= dlPtr->byteCount;
-	} while ((bytesToCount > 0) && (index.linePtr == dlPtr->index.linePtr));
+	} while (bytesToCount>0 && index.linePtr==dlPtr->index.linePtr);
 
 	/*
 	 * Scan through the display lines to see if we've covered enough
-	 * vertical distance.  If so, save the starting index for the
-	 * line at the desired location.
+	 * vertical distance. If so, save the starting index for the line at
+	 * the desired location. If distance was zero to start with then we
+	 * simply get the first index on the same display line as the original
+	 * index.
 	 */
 
 	for (dlPtr = lowestPtr; dlPtr != NULL; dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    distance -= dlPtr->height;
-	    if (distance < 0) {
-		*dstPtr = (noBestYet) ? dlPtr->index : bestIndex;
+	    if (distance <= 0) {
+		*dstPtr = dlPtr->index;
+		if (overlap != NULL) {
+		    *overlap = -distance;
+		}
 		break;
 	    }
-	    bestIndex = dlPtr->index;
-	    noBestYet = 0;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Discard the display lines, then either return or prepare
-	 * for the next display line to lay out.
+	 * Discard the display lines, then either return or prepare for the
+	 * next display line to lay out.
 	 */
 
-	FreeDLines(textPtr, lowestPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0);
-	if (distance < 0) {
+	FreeDLines(textPtr, lowestPtr, NULL, DLINE_FREE);
+	if (distance <= 0) {
 	    return;
 	}
 	bytesToCount = INT_MAX;		/* Consider all chars. in next line. */
     }
 
     /*
-     * Ran off the beginning of the text.  Return the first character
-     * in the text.
+     * Ran off the beginning of the text. Return the first character in the
+     * text.
      */
 
-    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, 0, 0, dstPtr);
+    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0, dstPtr);
+    if (overlap != NULL) {
+	*overlap = 0;
+    }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -3323,9 +5297,9 @@ MeasureUp(textPtr, srcPtr, distance, dstPtr)
  *
  * TkTextSeeCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "see" option for
- *	the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation
- *	for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "see" option for the widget
+ *	command for text widgets. See the user documentation for details on
+ *	what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3337,13 +5311,13 @@ MeasureUp(textPtr, srcPtr, distance, dstPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkTextSeeCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Argument strings.  Someone else has already
+TkTextSeeCmd(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. Someone else has already
 				 * parsed this command enough to know that
-				 * argv[1] is "see". */
+				 * objv[1] is "see". */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
     TkTextIndex index;
@@ -3351,29 +5325,29 @@ TkTextSeeCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
     DLine *dlPtr;
     TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;
 
-    if (argc != 3) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		argv[0], " see index\"", (char *) NULL);
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the specified position is the extra line at the end of the
-     * text, round it back to the last real line.
+     * If the specified position is the extra line at the end of the text,
+     * round it back to the last real line.
      */
 
-    if (TkBTreeLineIndex(index.linePtr) == TkBTreeNumLines(index.tree)) {
-	TkTextIndexBackChars(&index, 1, &index);
+    if (TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, index.linePtr)
+	    == TkBTreeNumLines(index.tree, textPtr)) {
+	TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, &index, 1, &index, COUNT_INDICES);
     }
 
     /*
      * First get the desired position into the vertical range of the window.
      */
 
-    TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, 1);
+    TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, TK_TEXT_PICKPLACE);
 
     /*
      * Now make sure that the character is in view horizontally.
@@ -3388,8 +5362,8 @@ TkTextSeeCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the chunk that contains the desired index.
-     * dlPtr may be NULL if the widget is not mapped. [Bug #641778]
+     * Find the chunk that contains the desired index. dlPtr may be NULL if
+     * the widget is not mapped. [Bug #641778]
      */
 
     dlPtr = FindDLine(dInfoPtr->dLinePtr, &index);
@@ -3399,7 +5373,7 @@ TkTextSeeCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 
     byteCount = index.byteIndex - dlPtr->index.byteIndex;
     for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; chunkPtr != NULL ;
-	 chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (byteCount < chunkPtr->numBytes) {
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -3407,36 +5381,32 @@ TkTextSeeCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Call a chunk-specific procedure to find the horizontal range of
-     * the character within the chunk.
-     * chunkPtr is NULL if trying to see in elided region.
+     * Call a chunk-specific function to find the horizontal range of the
+     * character within the chunk. chunkPtr is NULL if trying to see in elided
+     * region.
      */
 
     if (chunkPtr != NULL) {
-	(*chunkPtr->bboxProc)(chunkPtr, byteCount,
+	(*chunkPtr->bboxProc)(textPtr, chunkPtr, byteCount,
 		dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove,
 		dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow,
 		dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, &x, &y, &width,
 		&height);
-	delta = x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset;
+	delta = x - dInfoPtr->curXPixelOffset;
 	oneThird = lineWidth/3;
 	if (delta < 0) {
 	    if (delta < -oneThird) {
-		dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = (x - lineWidth/2)
-		    / textPtr->charWidth;
+		dInfoPtr->newXPixelOffset = (x - lineWidth/2);
 	    } else {
-		dInfoPtr->newByteOffset -= ((-delta) + textPtr->charWidth - 1)
-		    / textPtr->charWidth;
+		dInfoPtr->newXPixelOffset -= ((-delta) );
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    delta -= (lineWidth - width);
 	    if (delta > 0) {
 		if (delta > oneThird) {
-		    dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = (x - lineWidth/2)
-			/ textPtr->charWidth;
+		    dInfoPtr->newXPixelOffset = (x - lineWidth/2);
 		} else {
-		    dInfoPtr->newByteOffset += (delta + textPtr->charWidth - 1)
-			/ textPtr->charWidth;
+		    dInfoPtr->newXPixelOffset += (delta );
 		}
 	    } else {
 		return TCL_OK;
@@ -3456,9 +5426,9 @@ TkTextSeeCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * TkTextXviewCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "xview" option for
- *	the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation
- *	for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "xview" option for the widget
+ *	command for text widgets. See the user documentation for details on
+ *	what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3470,56 +5440,60 @@ TkTextSeeCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
  */
 
 int
-TkTextXviewCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Argument strings.  Someone else has already
+TkTextXviewCmd(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. Someone else has already
 				 * parsed this command enough to know that
-				 * argv[1] is "xview". */
+				 * objv[1] is "xview". */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
-    int type, charsPerPage, count, newOffset;
+    int type, count;
     double fraction;
 
     if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) {
 	UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr);
     }
 
-    if (argc == 2) {
+    if (objc == 2) {
 	GetXView(interp, textPtr, 0);
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    newOffset = dInfoPtr->newByteOffset;
-    type = Tk_GetScrollInfo(interp, argc, argv, &fraction, &count);
+    type = TextGetScrollInfoObj(interp, textPtr, objc, objv,
+	    &fraction, &count);
     switch (type) {
-	case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
-	    if (fraction > 1.0) {
-		fraction = 1.0;
-	    }
-	    if (fraction < 0) {
-		fraction = 0;
-	    }
-	    newOffset = (int) (((fraction * dInfoPtr->maxLength) / textPtr->charWidth)
-		    + 0.5);
-	    break;
-	case TK_SCROLL_PAGES:
-	    charsPerPage = ((dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x) / textPtr->charWidth)
-		    - 2;
-	    if (charsPerPage < 1) {
-		charsPerPage = 1;
-	    }
-	    newOffset += charsPerPage * count;
-	    break;
-	case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
-	    newOffset += count;
-	    break;
+    case TKTEXT_SCROLL_ERROR:
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    case TKTEXT_SCROLL_MOVETO:
+	if (fraction > 1.0) {
+	    fraction = 1.0;
+	}
+	if (fraction < 0) {
+	    fraction = 0;
+	}
+	dInfoPtr->newXPixelOffset = (int)
+		(fraction * dInfoPtr->maxLength + 0.5);
+	break;
+    case TKTEXT_SCROLL_PAGES: {
+	int pixelsPerPage;
+
+	pixelsPerPage = (dInfoPtr->maxX-dInfoPtr->x) - 2*textPtr->charWidth;
+	if (pixelsPerPage < 1) {
+	    pixelsPerPage = 1;
+	}
+	dInfoPtr->newXPixelOffset += pixelsPerPage * count;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TKTEXT_SCROLL_UNITS:
+	dInfoPtr->newXPixelOffset += count * textPtr->charWidth;
+	break;
+    case TKTEXT_SCROLL_PIXELS:
+	dInfoPtr->newXPixelOffset += count;
+	break;
     }
 
-    dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = newOffset;
     dInfoPtr->flags |= DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE;
     if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
 	dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
@@ -3531,56 +5505,141 @@ TkTextXviewCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * ScrollByLines --
+ * YScrollByPixels --
+ *
+ *	This function is called to scroll a text widget up or down by a given
+ *	number of pixels.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The view in textPtr's window changes to reflect the value of "offset".
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+YScrollByPixels(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget to scroll. */
+    int offset)			/* Amount by which to scroll, in pixels.
+				 * Positive means that information later in
+				 * text becomes visible, negative means that
+				 * information earlier in the text becomes
+				 * visible. */
+{
+    TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
+
+    if (offset < 0) {
+	/*
+	 * Now we want to measure up this number of pixels from the top of the
+	 * screen. But the top line may not be totally visible. Note that
+	 * 'count' is negative here.
+	 */
+
+	offset -= CalculateDisplayLineHeight(textPtr,
+		&textPtr->topIndex, NULL, NULL) - dInfoPtr->topPixelOffset;
+	MeasureUp(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex, -offset,
+		&textPtr->topIndex, &dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset);
+    } else if (offset > 0) {
+	DLine *dlPtr;
+	TkTextLine *lastLinePtr;
+	TkTextIndex newIdx;
+
+	/*
+	 * Scrolling down by pixels. Layout lines starting at the top index
+	 * and count through the desired vertical distance.
+	 */
+
+	lastLinePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr));
+	offset += dInfoPtr->topPixelOffset;
+	dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset = 0;
+	while (offset > 0) {
+	    dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex);
+	    dlPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
+	    TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex,
+		    dlPtr->byteCount, &newIdx);
+	    if (offset <= dlPtr->height) {
+		/*
+		 * Adjust the top overlap accordingly.
+		 */
+
+		dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset = offset;
+	    }
+	    offset -= dlPtr->height;
+	    FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, NULL, DLINE_FREE_TEMP);
+	    if (newIdx.linePtr == lastLinePtr || offset <= 0) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	    textPtr->topIndex = newIdx;
+	}
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * offset = 0, so no scrolling required.
+	 */
+
+	return;
+    }
+    if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr);
+    }
+    dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE|REPICK_NEEDED;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * YScrollByLines --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to scroll a text widget up or down
- *	by a given number of lines.
+ *	This function is called to scroll a text widget up or down by a given
+ *	number of lines.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The view in textPtr's window changes to reflect the value
- *	of "offset".
+ *	The view in textPtr's window changes to reflect the value of "offset".
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ScrollByLines(textPtr, offset)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget to scroll. */
-    int offset;			/* Amount by which to scroll, in *screen*
-				 * lines.  Positive means that information
+YScrollByLines(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget to scroll. */
+    int offset)			/* Amount by which to scroll, in display
+				 * lines. Positive means that information
 				 * later in text becomes visible, negative
-				 * means that information earlier in the
-				 * text becomes visible. */
+				 * means that information earlier in the text
+				 * becomes visible. */
 {
     int i, bytesToCount, lineNum;
-    TkTextIndex new, index;
+    TkTextIndex newIdx, index;
     TkTextLine *lastLinePtr;
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
     DLine *dlPtr, *lowestPtr;
 
     if (offset < 0) {
 	/*
-	 * Must scroll up (to show earlier information in the text).
-	 * The code below is similar to that in MeasureUp, except that
-	 * it counts lines instead of pixels.
+	 * Must scroll up (to show earlier information in the text). The code
+	 * below is similar to that in MeasureUp, except that it counts lines
+	 * instead of pixels.
 	 */
 
 	bytesToCount = textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex + 1;
-	index.tree = textPtr->tree;
-	offset--;			/* Skip line containing topIndex. */
-	for (lineNum = TkBTreeLineIndex(textPtr->topIndex.linePtr);
+	index.tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
+	offset--;		/* Skip line containing topIndex. */
+	for (lineNum = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, textPtr->topIndex.linePtr);
 		lineNum >= 0; lineNum--) {
-	    index.linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree, lineNum);
+	    index.linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+		    textPtr, lineNum);
 	    index.byteIndex = 0;
 	    lowestPtr = NULL;
 	    do {
 		dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index);
 		dlPtr->nextPtr = lowestPtr;
 		lowestPtr = dlPtr;
-		TkTextIndexForwBytes(&index, dlPtr->byteCount, &index);
+		TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &index, dlPtr->byteCount,&index);
 		bytesToCount -= dlPtr->byteCount;
 	    } while ((bytesToCount > 0)
 		    && (index.linePtr == dlPtr->index.linePtr));
@@ -3594,45 +5653,51 @@ ScrollByLines(textPtr, offset)
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Discard the display lines, then either return or prepare
-	     * for the next display line to lay out.
+	     * Discard the display lines, then either return or prepare for
+	     * the next display line to lay out.
 	     */
-    
-	    FreeDLines(textPtr, lowestPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0);
+
+	    FreeDLines(textPtr, lowestPtr, NULL, DLINE_FREE);
 	    if (offset >= 0) {
 		goto scheduleUpdate;
 	    }
 	    bytesToCount = INT_MAX;
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
-	 * Ran off the beginning of the text.  Return the first character
-	 * in the text.
+	 * Ran off the beginning of the text. Return the first character in
+	 * the text, and make sure we haven't left anything overlapping the
+	 * top window border.
 	 */
 
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, 0, 0, &textPtr->topIndex);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0,
+		&textPtr->topIndex);
+	dInfoPtr->newTopPixelOffset = 0;
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * Scrolling down, to show later information in the text.
-	 * Just count lines from the current top of the window.
+	 * Scrolling down, to show later information in the text. Just count
+	 * lines from the current top of the window.
 	 */
 
-	lastLinePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree,
-		TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree));
+	lastLinePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr));
 	for (i = 0; i < offset; i++) {
 	    dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex);
-	    if (dlPtr->length == 0 && dlPtr->height == 0) offset++;
+	    if (dlPtr->length == 0 && dlPtr->height == 0) {
+		offset++;
+	    }
 	    dlPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
-	    TkTextIndexForwBytes(&textPtr->topIndex, dlPtr->byteCount, &new);
-	    FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0);
-	    if (new.linePtr == lastLinePtr) {
+	    TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex,
+		    dlPtr->byteCount, &newIdx);
+	    FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, NULL, DLINE_FREE);
+	    if (newIdx.linePtr == lastLinePtr) {
 		break;
 	    }
-	    textPtr->topIndex = new;
+	    textPtr->topIndex = newIdx;
 	}
     }
 
-    scheduleUpdate:
+  scheduleUpdate:
     if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr);
     }
@@ -3644,9 +5709,9 @@ ScrollByLines(textPtr, offset)
  *
  * TkTextYviewCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "yview" option for
- *	the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation
- *	for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "yview" option for the widget
+ *	command for text widgets. See the user documentation for details on
+ *	what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3658,29 +5723,26 @@ ScrollByLines(textPtr, offset)
  */
 
 int
-TkTextYviewCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Argument strings.  Someone else has already
+TkTextYviewCmd(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. Someone else has already
 				 * parsed this command enough to know that
-				 * argv[1] is "yview". */
+				 * objv[1] is "yview". */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
-    int pickPlace, lineNum, type, bytesInLine;
-    Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+    int pickPlace, type;
     int pixels, count;
-    size_t switchLength;
+    int switchLength;
     double fraction;
-    TkTextIndex index, new;
-    TkTextLine *lastLinePtr;
-    DLine *dlPtr;
+    TkTextIndex index;
 
     if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) {
 	UpdateDisplayInfo(textPtr);
     }
 
-    if (argc == 2) {
+    if (objc == 2) {
 	GetYView(interp, textPtr, 0);
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
@@ -3690,117 +5752,135 @@ TkTextYviewCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
      */
 
     pickPlace = 0;
-    if (argv[2][0] == '-') {
-	switchLength = strlen(argv[2]);
-	if ((switchLength >= 2)
-		&& (strncmp(argv[2], "-pickplace", switchLength) == 0)) {
+    if (Tcl_GetString(objv[2])[0] == '-') {
+	register CONST char *switchStr =
+		Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], &switchLength);
+
+	if ((switchLength >= 2) && (strncmp(switchStr, "-pickplace",
+		(unsigned) switchLength) == 0)) {
 	    pickPlace = 1;
-	    if (argc != 4) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-			argv[0], " yview -pickplace lineNum|index\"",
-			(char *) NULL);
+	    if (objc != 4) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "lineNum|index");
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
     }
-    if ((argc == 3) || pickPlace) {
-	if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[2+pickPlace], &lineNum) == TCL_OK) {
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineNum, 0, &index);
+    if ((objc == 3) || pickPlace) {
+	int lineNum;
+
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2+pickPlace], &lineNum) == TCL_OK) {
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		    lineNum, 0, &index);
 	    TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, 0);
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
 	 * The argument must be a regular text index.
 	 */
-    
+
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[2+pickPlace],
+	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[2+pickPlace],
 		&index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, pickPlace);
+	TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, (pickPlace ? TK_TEXT_PICKPLACE : 0));
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
     /*
-     * New syntax: dispatch based on argv[2].
+     * New syntax: dispatch based on objv[2].
      */
 
-    type = Tk_GetScrollInfo(interp, argc, argv, &fraction, &count);
+    type = TextGetScrollInfoObj(interp, textPtr, objc,objv, &fraction, &count);
     switch (type) {
-	case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
-	    if (fraction > 1.0) {
-		fraction = 1.0;
-	    }
-	    if (fraction < 0) {
-		fraction = 0;
-	    }
-	    fraction *= TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree);
-	    lineNum = (int) fraction;
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineNum, 0, &index);
-	    bytesInLine = TkBTreeBytesInLine(index.linePtr);
-	    index.byteIndex = (int)((bytesInLine * (fraction-lineNum)) + 0.5);
-	    if (index.byteIndex >= bytesInLine) {
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineNum + 1, 0, &index);
-	    }
-	    TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, 0);
-	    break;
-	case TK_SCROLL_PAGES:
+    case TKTEXT_SCROLL_ERROR:
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    case TKTEXT_SCROLL_MOVETO: {
+	int numPixels = TkBTreeNumPixels(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+		textPtr);
+	int topMostPixel;
+
+	if (numPixels == 0) {
 	    /*
-	     * Scroll up or down by screenfuls.  Actually, use the
-	     * window height minus two lines, so that there's some
-	     * overlap between adjacent pages.
+	     * If the window is totally empty no scrolling is needed, and the
+	     * TkTextMakePixelIndex call below will fail.
 	     */
 
-	    Tk_GetFontMetrics(textPtr->tkfont, &fm);
-	    if (count < 0) {
-		pixels = (dInfoPtr->maxY - 2*fm.linespace - dInfoPtr->y)*(-count)
-			+ fm.linespace;
-		MeasureUp(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex, pixels, &new);
-		if (TkTextIndexCmp(&textPtr->topIndex, &new) == 0) {
-		    /*
-		     * A page of scrolling ended up being less than one line.
-		     * Scroll one line anyway.
-		     */
+	    break;
+	}
+	if (fraction > 1.0) {
+	    fraction = 1.0;
+	}
+	if (fraction < 0) {
+	    fraction = 0;
+	}
 
-		    count = -1;
-		    goto scrollByLines;
-		}
-		textPtr->topIndex = new;
-	    } else {
+	/*
+	 * Calculate the pixel count for the new topmost pixel in the topmost
+	 * line of the window. Note that the interpretation of 'fraction' is
+	 * that it counts from 0 (top pixel in buffer) to 1.0 (one pixel past
+	 * the last pixel in buffer).
+	 */
+
+	topMostPixel = (int) (0.5 + fraction * numPixels);
+	if (topMostPixel >= numPixels) {
+	    topMostPixel = numPixels -1;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * This function returns the number of pixels by which the given line
+	 * should overlap the top of the visible screen.
+	 *
+	 * This is then used to provide smooth scrolling.
+	 */
+
+	pixels = TkTextMakePixelIndex(textPtr, topMostPixel, &index);
+	TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, pixels);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TKTEXT_SCROLL_PAGES: {
+	/*
+	 * Scroll up or down by screenfuls. Actually, use the window height
+	 * minus two lines, so that there's some overlap between adjacent
+	 * pages.
+	 */
+
+	int height = dInfoPtr->maxY - dInfoPtr->y;
+
+	if (textPtr->charHeight * 4 >= height) {
+	    /*
+	     * A single line is more than a quarter of the display. We choose
+	     * to scroll by 3/4 of the height instead.
+	     */
+
+	    pixels = 3*height/4;
+	    if (pixels < textPtr->charHeight) {
 		/*
-		 * Scrolling down by pages.  Layout lines starting at the
-		 * top index and count through the desired vertical distance.
+		 * But, if 3/4 of the height is actually less than a single
+		 * typical character height, then scroll by the minimum of the
+		 * linespace or the total height.
 		 */
 
-		pixels = (dInfoPtr->maxY - 2*fm.linespace - dInfoPtr->y)*count;
-		lastLinePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->tree,
-			TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree));
-		do {
-		    dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &textPtr->topIndex);
-		    dlPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
-		    TkTextIndexForwBytes(&textPtr->topIndex, dlPtr->byteCount,
-			    &new);
-		    pixels -= dlPtr->height;
-		    FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, (DLine *) NULL, 0);
-		    if (new.linePtr == lastLinePtr) {
-			break;
-		    }
-		    textPtr->topIndex = new;
-		} while (pixels > 0);
-	    }
-	    if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
-		Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr);
+		if (textPtr->charHeight < height) {
+		    pixels = textPtr->charHeight;
+		} else {
+		    pixels = height;
+		}
 	    }
-	    dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING|DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE|REPICK_NEEDED;
-	    break;
-	case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
-	    scrollByLines:
-	    ScrollByLines(textPtr, count);
-	    break;
+	    pixels *= count;
+	} else {
+	    pixels = (height - 2*textPtr->charHeight)*count;
+	}
+	YScrollByPixels(textPtr, pixels);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TKTEXT_SCROLL_PIXELS:
+	YScrollByPixels(textPtr, count);
+	break;
+    case TKTEXT_SCROLL_UNITS:
+	YScrollByLines(textPtr, count);
+	break;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -3810,9 +5890,9 @@ TkTextYviewCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * TkTextScanCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "scan" option for
- *	the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation
- *	for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "scan" option for the widget
+ *	command for text widgets. See the user documentation for details on
+ *	what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3824,91 +5904,93 @@ TkTextYviewCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
  */
 
 int
-TkTextScanCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
-    register TkText *textPtr;	/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Argument strings.  Someone else has already
+TkTextScanCmd(
+    register TkText *textPtr,	/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. Someone else has already
 				 * parsed this command enough to know that
-				 * argv[1] is "scan". */
+				 * objv[1] is "scan". */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
     TkTextIndex index;
-    int c, x, y, totalScroll, newByte, maxByte, gain=10;
-    Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+    int c, x, y, totalScroll, gain=10;
     size_t length;
 
-    if ((argc != 5) && (argc != 6)) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		argv[0], " scan mark x y\" or \"",
-		argv[0], " scan dragto x y ?gain?\"", (char *) NULL);
+    if ((objc != 5) && (objc != 6)) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "mark x y");
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " or \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]),
+		" scan dragto x y ?gain?\"", NULL);
+	/*
+	 * Ought to be:
+	 * Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objc, "dragto x y ?gain?");
+	 */
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[4], &y) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &y) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    if ((argc == 6) && (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[5], &gain) != TCL_OK))
+    if ((objc == 6) && (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[5], &gain) != TCL_OK)) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
-    c = argv[2][0];
-    length = strlen(argv[2]);
-    if ((c == 'd') && (strncmp(argv[2], "dragto", length) == 0)) {
+    }
+    c = Tcl_GetString(objv[2])[0];
+    length = strlen(Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
+    if (c=='d' && strncmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "dragto", length)==0) {
+	int newX, maxX;
+
 	/*
-	 * Amplify the difference between the current position and the
-	 * mark position to compute how much the view should shift, then
-	 * update the mark position to correspond to the new view.  If we
-	 * run off the edge of the text, reset the mark point so that the
-	 * current position continues to correspond to the edge of the
-	 * window.  This means that the picture will start dragging as
-	 * soon as the mouse reverses direction (without this reset, might
-	 * have to slide mouse a long ways back before the picture starts
-	 * moving again).
+	 * Amplify the difference between the current position and the mark
+	 * position to compute how much the view should shift, then update the
+	 * mark position to correspond to the new view. If we run off the edge
+	 * of the text, reset the mark point so that the current position
+	 * continues to correspond to the edge of the window. This means that
+	 * the picture will start dragging as soon as the mouse reverses
+	 * direction (without this reset, might have to slide mouse a long
+	 * ways back before the picture starts moving again).
 	 */
 
-	newByte = dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex + (gain*(dInfoPtr->scanMarkX - x))
-		/ (textPtr->charWidth);
-	maxByte = 1 + (dInfoPtr->maxLength - (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x)
-		+ textPtr->charWidth - 1)/textPtr->charWidth;
-	if (newByte < 0) {
-	    newByte = 0;
-	    dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex = 0;
+	newX = dInfoPtr->scanMarkXPixel + gain*(dInfoPtr->scanMarkX - x);
+	maxX = 1 + dInfoPtr->maxLength - (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x);
+	if (newX < 0) {
+	    newX = 0;
+	    dInfoPtr->scanMarkXPixel = 0;
 	    dInfoPtr->scanMarkX = x;
-	} else if (newByte > maxByte) {
-	    newByte = maxByte;
-	    dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex = maxByte;
+	} else if (newX > maxX) {
+	    newX = maxX;
+	    dInfoPtr->scanMarkXPixel = maxX;
 	    dInfoPtr->scanMarkX = x;
 	}
-	dInfoPtr->newByteOffset = newByte;
+	dInfoPtr->newXPixelOffset = newX;
 
-	Tk_GetFontMetrics(textPtr->tkfont, &fm);
-	totalScroll = (gain*(dInfoPtr->scanMarkY - y)) / fm.linespace;
-	if (totalScroll != dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll) {
+	totalScroll = gain*(dInfoPtr->scanMarkY - y);
+	if (totalScroll != dInfoPtr->scanTotalYScroll) {
 	    index = textPtr->topIndex;
-	    ScrollByLines(textPtr, totalScroll-dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll);
-	    dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll = totalScroll;
+	    YScrollByPixels(textPtr, totalScroll-dInfoPtr->scanTotalYScroll);
+	    dInfoPtr->scanTotalYScroll = totalScroll;
 	    if ((index.linePtr == textPtr->topIndex.linePtr) &&
 		    (index.byteIndex == textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex)) {
-		dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll = 0;
+		dInfoPtr->scanTotalYScroll = 0;
 		dInfoPtr->scanMarkY = y;
 	    }
 	}
-    } else if ((c == 'm') && (strncmp(argv[2], "mark", length) == 0)) {
-	dInfoPtr->scanMarkIndex = dInfoPtr->newByteOffset;
+	dInfoPtr->flags |= DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE;
+	if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
+	    dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
+	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr);
+	}
+    } else if (c=='m' && strncmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "mark", length)==0) {
+	dInfoPtr->scanMarkXPixel = dInfoPtr->newXPixelOffset;
 	dInfoPtr->scanMarkX = x;
-	dInfoPtr->scanTotalScroll = 0;
+	dInfoPtr->scanTotalYScroll = 0;
 	dInfoPtr->scanMarkY = y;
     } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad scan option \"", argv[2],
-		"\": must be mark or dragto", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad scan option \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		"\": must be mark or dragto", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    dInfoPtr->flags |= DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE;
-    if (!(dInfoPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
-	dInfoPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
-	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayText, (ClientData) textPtr);
-    }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -3917,19 +5999,19 @@ TkTextScanCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * GetXView --
  *
- *	This procedure computes the fractions that indicate what's
- *	visible in a text window and, optionally, evaluates a
- *	Tcl script to report them to the text's associated scrollbar.
+ *	This function computes the fractions that indicate what's visible in a
+ *	text window and, optionally, evaluates a Tcl script to report them to
+ *	the text's associated scrollbar.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If report is zero, then the interp's result is filled in with
- *	two real numbers separated by a space, giving the position of
- *	the left and right edges of the window as fractions from 0 to
- *	1, where 0 means the left edge of the text and 1 means the right
- *	edge.  If report is non-zero, then the interp's result isn't modified
- *	directly, but instead a script is evaluated in interp to report
- *	the new horizontal scroll position to the scrollbar (if the scroll
- *	position hasn't changed then no script is invoked).
+ *	If report is zero, then the interp's result is filled in with two real
+ *	numbers separated by a space, giving the position of the left and
+ *	right edges of the window as fractions from 0 to 1, where 0 means the
+ *	left edge of the text and 1 means the right edge. If report is
+ *	non-zero, then the interp's result isn't modified directly, but
+ *	instead a script is evaluated in interp to report the new horizontal
+ *	scroll position to the scrollbar (if the scroll position hasn't
+ *	changed then no script is invoked).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3938,24 +6020,24 @@ TkTextScanCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
  */
 
 static void
-GetXView(interp, textPtr, report)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* If "report" is FALSE, string
-					 * describing visible range gets
-					 * stored in the interp's result. */
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Information about text widget. */
-    int report;				/* Non-zero means report info to
-					 * scrollbar if it has changed. */
+GetXView(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* If "report" is FALSE, string describing
+				 * visible range gets stored in the interp's
+				 * result. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    int report)			/* Non-zero means report info to scrollbar if
+				 * it has changed. */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
-    char buffer[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2 + 1];
     double first, last;
     int code;
+    Tcl_Obj *listObj;
 
     if (dInfoPtr->maxLength > 0) {
-	first = ((double) dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset)
-		/ dInfoPtr->maxLength;
-	last = first + ((double) (dInfoPtr->maxX - dInfoPtr->x))
+	first = ((double) dInfoPtr->curXPixelOffset)
 		/ dInfoPtr->maxLength;
+	last = ((double) (dInfoPtr->curXPixelOffset + dInfoPtr->maxX
+		- dInfoPtr->x))/dInfoPtr->maxLength;
 	if (last > 1.0) {
 	    last = 1.0;
 	}
@@ -3964,44 +6046,177 @@ GetXView(interp, textPtr, report)
 	last = 1.0;
     }
     if (!report) {
-	sprintf(buffer, "%g %g", first, last);
-	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buffer, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(first));
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(last));
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj);
 	return;
     }
     if (FP_EQUAL_SCALE(first, dInfoPtr->xScrollFirst, dInfoPtr->maxLength) &&
-	FP_EQUAL_SCALE(last,  dInfoPtr->xScrollLast,  dInfoPtr->maxLength)) {
+	    FP_EQUAL_SCALE(last, dInfoPtr->xScrollLast, dInfoPtr->maxLength)) {
 	return;
     }
     dInfoPtr->xScrollFirst = first;
     dInfoPtr->xScrollLast = last;
-    sprintf(buffer, " %g %g", first, last);
-    code = Tcl_VarEval(interp, textPtr->xScrollCmd,
-	    buffer, (char *) NULL);
-    if (code != TCL_OK) {
-	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
-		"\n    (horizontal scrolling command executed by text)");
-	Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+    if (textPtr->xScrollCmd != NULL) {
+	char buf1[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE+1];
+	char buf2[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE+1];
+
+	buf1[0] = ' ';
+	buf2[0] = ' ';
+	Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, first, buf1+1);
+	Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, last, buf2+1);
+	code = Tcl_VarEval(interp, textPtr->xScrollCmd, buf1, buf2, NULL);
+	if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
+		    "\n    (horizontal scrolling command executed by text)");
+	    Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+	}
     }
 }
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * GetYPixelCount --
+ *
+ *	How many pixels are there between the absolute top of the widget and
+ *	the top of the given DLine.
+ *
+ *	While this function will work for any valid DLine, it is only ever
+ *	called when dlPtr is the first display line in the widget (by
+ *	'GetYView'). This means that usually this function is a very quick
+ *	calculation, since it can use the pre-calculated linked-list of DLines
+ *	for height information.
+ *
+ *	The only situation where this breaks down is if dlPtr's logical line
+ *	wraps enough times to fill the text widget's current view - in this
+ *	case we won't have enough dlPtrs in the linked list to be able to
+ *	subtract off what we want.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The number of pixels.
+ *
+ *	This value has a valid range between '0' (the very top of the widget)
+ *	and the number of pixels in the total widget minus the pixel-height of
+ *	the last line.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+GetYPixelCount(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    DLine *dlPtr)		/* Information about the layout of a given
+				 * index. */
+{
+    TkTextLine *linePtr = dlPtr->index.linePtr;
+    int count;
+
+    /*
+     * Get the pixel count to the top of dlPtr's logical line. The rest of the
+     * function is then concerned with updating 'count' for any difference
+     * between the top of the logical line and the display line.
+     */
+
+    count = TkBTreePixelsTo(textPtr, linePtr);
+
+    /*
+     * For the common case where this dlPtr is also the start of the logical
+     * line, we can return right away. Note the implicit assumption here that
+     * the start of a logical line is always the start of a display line (if
+     * the 'elide won't elide first newline' bug is fixed, this will no longer
+     * necessarily be true).
+     */
+
+    if (dlPtr->index.byteIndex == 0) {
+	return count;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Add on the logical line's height to reach one pixel beyond the bottom
+     * of the logical line. And then subtract off the heights of all the
+     * display lines from dlPtr to the end of its logical line.
+     *
+     * A different approach would be to lay things out from the start of the
+     * logical line until we reach dlPtr, but since none of those are
+     * pre-calculated, it'll usually take a lot longer. (But there are cases
+     * where it would be more efficient: say if we're on the second of 1000
+     * wrapped lines all from a single logical line - but that sort of
+     * optimization is left for the future).
+     */
+
+    count += TkBTreeLinePixelCount(textPtr, linePtr);
+
+    do {
+	count -= dlPtr->height;
+	if (dlPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * We've run out of pre-calculated display lines, so we have to
+	     * lay them out ourselves until the end of the logical line. Here
+	     * is where we could be clever and ask: what's faster, to layout
+	     * all lines from here to line-end, or all lines from the original
+	     * dlPtr to the line-start? We just assume the former.
+	     */
+
+	    TkTextIndex index;
+	    int notFirst = 0;
+
+	    while (1) {
+		TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &dlPtr->index,
+			dlPtr->byteCount, &index);
+		if (notFirst) {
+		    FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, NULL, DLINE_FREE_TEMP);
+		}
+		if (index.linePtr != linePtr) {
+		    break;
+		}
+		dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, &index);
+
+		if (tkTextDebug) {
+		    char string[TK_POS_CHARS];
+
+		    /*
+		     * Debugging is enabled, so keep a log of all the lines
+		     * whose height was recalculated. The test suite uses this
+		     * information.
+		     */
+
+		    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &index, string);
+		    LOG("tk_textHeightCalc", string);
+		}
+		count -= dlPtr->height;
+		notFirst = 1;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	} else {
+	    dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr;
+	}
+    } while (dlPtr->index.linePtr == linePtr);
+
+    return count;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * GetYView --
  *
- *	This procedure computes the fractions that indicate what's
- *	visible in a text window and, optionally, evaluates a
- *	Tcl script to report them to the text's associated scrollbar.
+ *	This function computes the fractions that indicate what's visible in a
+ *	text window and, optionally, evaluates a Tcl script to report them to
+ *	the text's associated scrollbar.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If report is zero, then the interp's result is filled in with
- *	two real numbers separated by a space, giving the position of
- *	the top and bottom of the window as fractions from 0 to 1, where
- *	0 means the beginning of the text and 1 means the end.  If
- *	report is non-zero, then the interp's result isn't modified directly,
- *	but a script is evaluated in interp to report the new scroll
- *	position to the scrollbar (if the scroll position hasn't changed
- *	then no script is invoked).
+ *	If report is zero, then the interp's result is filled in with two real
+ *	numbers separated by a space, giving the position of the top and
+ *	bottom of the window as fractions from 0 to 1, where 0 means the
+ *	beginning of the text and 1 means the end. If report is non-zero, then
+ *	the interp's result isn't modified directly, but a script is evaluated
+ *	in interp to report the new scroll position to the scrollbar (if the
+ *	scroll position hasn't changed then no script is invoked).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4010,62 +6225,171 @@ GetXView(interp, textPtr, report)
  */
 
 static void
-GetYView(interp, textPtr, report)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* If "report" is FALSE, string
-					 * describing visible range gets
-					 * stored in the interp's result. */
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Information about text widget. */
-    int report;				/* Non-zero means report info to
-					 * scrollbar if it has changed. */
+GetYView(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* If "report" is FALSE, string describing
+				 * visible range gets stored in the interp's
+				 * result. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    int report)			/* Non-zero means report info to scrollbar if
+				 * it has changed. */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
-    char buffer[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2 + 1];
     double first, last;
     DLine *dlPtr;
-    int totalLines, code, count;
+    int totalPixels, code, count;
+    Tcl_Obj *listObj;
 
     dlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr;
-    totalLines = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree);
-    first = (double) TkBTreeLineIndex(dlPtr->index.linePtr)
-	    + (double) dlPtr->index.byteIndex
-		    / TkBTreeBytesInLine(dlPtr->index.linePtr);
-    first /= totalLines;
-    while (1) {
-	if ((dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY) {
+
+    if (dlPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    totalPixels = TkBTreeNumPixels(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr);
+
+    if (totalPixels == 0) {
+	first = 0.0;
+	last = 1.0;
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * Get the pixel count for the first visible pixel of the first
+	 * visible line. If the first visible line is only partially visible,
+	 * then we use 'topPixelOffset' to get the difference.
+	 */
+
+	count = GetYPixelCount(textPtr, dlPtr);
+	first = (count + dInfoPtr->topPixelOffset) / (double) totalPixels;
+
+	/*
+	 * Add on the total number of visible pixels to get the count to one
+	 * pixel _past_ the last visible pixel. This is how the 'yview'
+	 * command is documented, and also explains why we are dividing by
+	 * 'totalPixels' and not 'totalPixels-1'.
+	 */
+
+	while (1) {
+	    int extra;
+
+	    count += dlPtr->height;
+	    extra = dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height - dInfoPtr->maxY;
+	    if (extra > 0) {
+		/*
+		 * This much of the last line is not visible, so don't count
+		 * these pixels. Since we've reached the bottom of the window,
+		 * we break out of the loop.
+		 */
+
+		count -= extra;
+		break;
+	    }
+	    if (dlPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	    dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr;
+	}
+
+	if (count > totalPixels) {
 	    /*
-	     * The last line is only partially visible, so don't
-	     * count its characters in what's visible.
+	     * It can be possible, if we do not update each line's pixelHeight
+	     * cache when we lay out individual DLines that the count
+	     * generated here is more up-to-date than that maintained by the
+	     * BTree. In such a case, the best we can do here is to fix up
+	     * 'count' and continue, which might result in small, temporary
+	     * perturbations to the size of the scrollbar. This is basically
+	     * harmless, but in a perfect world we would not have this
+	     * problem.
+	     *
+	     * For debugging purposes, if anyone wishes to improve the text
+	     * widget further, the following 'panic' can be activated. In
+	     * principle it should be possible to ensure the BTree is always
+	     * at least as up to date as the display, so in the future we
+	     * might be able to leave the 'panic' in permanently when we
+	     * believe we have resolved the cache synchronisation issue.
+	     *
+	     * However, to achieve that goal would, I think, require a fairly
+	     * substantial refactorisation of the code in this file so that
+	     * there is much more obvious and explicit coordination between
+	     * calls to LayoutDLine and updating of each TkTextLine's
+	     * pixelHeight. The complicated bit is that LayoutDLine deals with
+	     * individual display lines, but pixelHeight is for a logical
+	     * line.
 	     */
-	    count = 0;
-	    break;
-	}
-	if (dlPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
-	    count = dlPtr->byteCount;
-	    break;
+
+#if 0
+	    Tcl_Panic("Counted more pixels (%d) than expected (%d) total "
+		    "pixels in text widget scroll bar calculation.", count,
+		    totalPixels);
+#endif
+	    count = totalPixels;
 	}
-	dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr;
+
+	last = ((double) count)/((double)totalPixels);
     }
-    last = ((double) TkBTreeLineIndex(dlPtr->index.linePtr))
-	    + ((double) (dlPtr->index.byteIndex + count))
-		    / (TkBTreeBytesInLine(dlPtr->index.linePtr));
-    last /= totalLines;
+
     if (!report) {
-	sprintf(buffer, "%g %g", first, last);
-	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buffer, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0,NULL);
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(first));
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(last));
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj);
 	return;
     }
-    if (FP_EQUAL_SCALE(first, dInfoPtr->yScrollFirst, totalLines) &&
-	FP_EQUAL_SCALE(last,  dInfoPtr->yScrollLast,  totalLines)) {
+
+    if (FP_EQUAL_SCALE(first, dInfoPtr->yScrollFirst, totalPixels) &&
+	    FP_EQUAL_SCALE(last, dInfoPtr->yScrollLast, totalPixels)) {
 	return;
     }
+
     dInfoPtr->yScrollFirst = first;
     dInfoPtr->yScrollLast = last;
-    sprintf(buffer, " %g %g", first, last);
-    code = Tcl_VarEval(interp, textPtr->yScrollCmd, buffer, (char *) NULL);
-    if (code != TCL_OK) {
-	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
-		"\n    (vertical scrolling command executed by text)");
-	Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+    if (textPtr->yScrollCmd != NULL) {
+	char buf1[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE+1];
+	char buf2[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE+1];
+
+	buf1[0] = ' ';
+	buf2[0] = ' ';
+	Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, first, buf1+1);
+	Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, last, buf2+1);
+	code = Tcl_VarEval(interp, textPtr->yScrollCmd, buf1, buf2, NULL);
+	if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
+		    "\n    (vertical scrolling command executed by text)");
+	    Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * AsyncUpdateYScrollbar --
+ *
+ *	This function is called to update the vertical scrollbar asychronously
+ *	as the pixel height calculations progress for lines in the widget.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	See 'GetYView'. In particular the scrollbar position and size may be
+ *	changed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+AsyncUpdateYScrollbar(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about widget. */
+{
+    register TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData;
+
+    textPtr->dInfoPtr->scrollbarTimer = NULL;
+
+    if (!(textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
+	GetYView(textPtr->interp, textPtr, 1);
+    }
+
+    if (--textPtr->refCount == 0) {
+	ckfree((char *) textPtr);
     }
 }
 
@@ -4074,14 +6398,13 @@ GetYView(interp, textPtr, report)
  *
  * FindDLine --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to find the DLine corresponding to a
- *	given text index.
+ *	This function is called to find the DLine corresponding to a given
+ *	text index.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the first DLine found in the
- *	list headed by dlPtr that displays information at or after the
- *	specified position.  If there is no such line in the list then
- *	NULL is returned.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the first DLine found in the list
+ *	headed by dlPtr that displays information at or after the specified
+ *	position. If there is no such line in the list then NULL is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4090,21 +6413,22 @@ GetYView(interp, textPtr, report)
  */
 
 static DLine *
-FindDLine(dlPtr, indexPtr)
-    register DLine *dlPtr;	/* Pointer to first in list of DLines
-				 * to search. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index of desired character. */
+FindDLine(
+    register DLine *dlPtr,	/* Pointer to first in list of DLines to
+				 * search. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr)/* Index of desired character. */
 {
     TkTextLine *linePtr;
 
     if (dlPtr == NULL) {
 	return NULL;
     }
-    if (TkBTreeLineIndex(indexPtr->linePtr)
-	    < TkBTreeLineIndex(dlPtr->index.linePtr)) {
+    if (TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, indexPtr->linePtr)
+	    < TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, dlPtr->index.linePtr)) {
 	/*
 	 * The first display line is already past the desired line.
 	 */
+
 	return dlPtr;
     }
 
@@ -4120,9 +6444,15 @@ FindDLine(dlPtr, indexPtr)
 		return NULL;
 	    }
 	}
-	linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(linePtr);
+
+	/*
+	 * VMD: some concern here as to whether this logic, or the caller's
+	 * logic will work well with partial peer widgets.
+	 */
+
+	linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, linePtr);
 	if (linePtr == NULL) {
-	    panic("FindDLine reached end of text");
+	    Tcl_Panic("FindDLine reached end of text");
 	}
     }
     if (indexPtr->linePtr != dlPtr->index.linePtr) {
@@ -4133,7 +6463,7 @@ FindDLine(dlPtr, indexPtr)
      * Now get to the right position within the text line.
      */
 
-    while (indexPtr->byteIndex >= (dlPtr->index.byteIndex + dlPtr->byteCount)) {
+    while (indexPtr->byteIndex >= (dlPtr->index.byteIndex+dlPtr->byteCount)) {
 	dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr;
 	if ((dlPtr == NULL) || (dlPtr->index.linePtr != indexPtr->linePtr)) {
 	    break;
@@ -4147,12 +6477,12 @@ FindDLine(dlPtr, indexPtr)
  *
  * TkTextPixelIndex --
  *
- *	Given an (x,y) coordinate on the screen, find the location of
- *	the character closest to that location.
+ *	Given an (x,y) coordinate on the screen, find the location of the
+ *	character closest to that location.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The index at *indexPtr is modified to refer to the character
- *	on the display that is closest to (x,y).
+ *	The index at *indexPtr is modified to refer to the character on the
+ *	display that is closest to (x,y).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4161,20 +6491,24 @@ FindDLine(dlPtr, indexPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkTextPixelIndex(textPtr, x, y, indexPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget record for text widget. */
-    int x, y;			/* Pixel coordinates of point in widget's
+TkTextPixelIndex(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Pixel coordinates of point in widget's
 				 * window. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* This index gets filled in with the
-				 * index of the character nearest to (x,y). */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr,	/* This index gets filled in with the index of
+				 * the character nearest to (x,y). */
+    int *nearest)		/* If non-NULL then gets set to 0 if (x,y) is
+				 * actually over the returned index, and 1 if
+				 * it is just nearby (e.g. if x,y is on the
+				 * border of the widget). */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
-    register DLine *dlPtr, *validdlPtr;
-    register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;
+    register DLine *dlPtr, *validDlPtr;
+    int nearby = 0;
 
     /*
-     * Make sure that all of the layout information about what's
-     * displayed where on the screen is up-to-date.
+     * Make sure that all of the layout information about what's displayed
+     * where on the screen is up-to-date.
      */
 
     if (dInfoPtr->flags & DINFO_OUT_OF_DATE) {
@@ -4182,72 +6516,143 @@ TkTextPixelIndex(textPtr, x, y, indexPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the coordinates are above the top of the window, then adjust
-     * them to refer to the upper-right corner of the window.  If they're
-     * off to one side or the other, then adjust to the closest side.
+     * If the coordinates are above the top of the window, then adjust them to
+     * refer to the upper-right corner of the window. If they're off to one
+     * side or the other, then adjust to the closest side.
      */
 
     if (y < dInfoPtr->y) {
 	y = dInfoPtr->y;
 	x = dInfoPtr->x;
+	nearby = 1;
     }
     if (x >= dInfoPtr->maxX) {
 	x = dInfoPtr->maxX - 1;
+	nearby = 1;
     }
     if (x < dInfoPtr->x) {
 	x = dInfoPtr->x;
+	nearby = 1;
     }
 
     /*
      * Find the display line containing the desired y-coordinate.
      */
 
-    for (dlPtr = validdlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr; y >= (dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height);
-	    dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) {
-	if (dlPtr->chunkPtr !=NULL) validdlPtr = dlPtr;
-	if (dlPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
-	    /*
-	     * Y-coordinate is off the bottom of the displayed text.
-	     * Use the last character on the last line.
-	     */
+    if (dInfoPtr->dLinePtr == NULL) {
+	if (nearest != NULL) {
+	    *nearest = 1;
+	}
+	*indexPtr = textPtr->topIndex;
+	return;
+    } else {
+	for (dlPtr = validDlPtr = dInfoPtr->dLinePtr;
+		y >= (dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height);
+		dlPtr = dlPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (dlPtr->chunkPtr != NULL) {
+		validDlPtr = dlPtr;
+	    }
+	    if (dlPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * Y-coordinate is off the bottom of the displayed text. Use
+		 * the last character on the last line.
+		 */
 
-	    x = dInfoPtr->maxX - 1;
-	    break;
+		x = dInfoPtr->maxX - 1;
+		nearby = 1;
+		break;
+	    }
 	}
+	if (dlPtr->chunkPtr == NULL) dlPtr = validDlPtr;
     }
-    if (dlPtr->chunkPtr == NULL) dlPtr = validdlPtr;
 
-    *indexPtr = dlPtr->index;
+    if (nearest != NULL) {
+	*nearest = nearby;
+    }
+
+    DlineIndexOfX(textPtr, dlPtr, x, indexPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DlineIndexOfX --
+ *
+ *	Given an x coordinate in a display line, find the index of the
+ *	character closest to that location.
+ *
+ *	This is effectively the opposite of DlineXOfIndex.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The index at *indexPtr is modified to refer to the character on the
+ *	display line that is closest to x.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DlineIndexOfX(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    DLine *dlPtr,		/* Display information for this display
+				 * line. */
+    int x,			/* Pixel x coordinate of point in widget's
+				 * window. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* This index gets filled in with the index of
+				 * the character nearest to x. */
+{
+    TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
+    register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;
 
     /*
-     * If it is still empty, we have nothing to access. [Bug 1442102]
+     * Scan through the line's chunks to find the one that contains the
+     * desired x-coordinate. Before doing this, translate the x-coordinate
+     * from the coordinate system of the window to the coordinate system of
+     * the line (to take account of x-scrolling).
      */
 
-    if (dlPtr->chunkPtr == NULL) {
+    *indexPtr = dlPtr->index;
+    x = x - dInfoPtr->x + dInfoPtr->curXPixelOffset;
+    chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr;
+
+    if (chunkPtr == NULL || x == 0) {
+	/*
+	 * This may occur if everything is elided, or if we're simply already
+	 * at the beginning of the line.
+	 */
+
 	return;
     }
 
-    /*
-     * Scan through the line's chunks to find the one that contains
-     * the desired x-coordinate.  Before doing this, translate the
-     * x-coordinate from the coordinate system of the window to the
-     * coordinate system of the line (to take account of x-scrolling).
-     */
+    while (x >= (chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width)) {
+	/*
+	 * Note that this forward then backward movement of the index can be
+	 * problematic at the end of the buffer (we can't move forward, and
+	 * then when we move backward, we do, leading to the wrong position).
+	 * Hence when x == 0 we take special action above.
+	 */
 
-    x = x - dInfoPtr->x + dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset;
-    for (chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr; x >= (chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width);
-	    indexPtr->byteIndex += chunkPtr->numBytes,
-	    chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (TkTextIndexForwBytes(NULL,indexPtr,chunkPtr->numBytes,indexPtr)) {
+	    /*
+	     * We've reached the end of the text.
+	     */
+
+	    return;
+	}
 	if (chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
-	    indexPtr->byteIndex += chunkPtr->numBytes;
-	    TkTextIndexBackChars(indexPtr, 1, indexPtr);
+	    TkTextIndexBackChars(NULL, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr, COUNT_INDICES);
 	    return;
 	}
+	chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr;
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the chunk has more than one byte in it, ask it which
-     * character is at the desired location.
+     * If the chunk has more than one byte in it, ask it which character is at
+     * the desired location. In this case we can manipulate
+     * 'indexPtr->byteIndex' directly, because we know we're staying inside a
+     * single logical line.
      */
 
     if (chunkPtr->numBytes > 1) {
@@ -4258,17 +6663,119 @@ TkTextPixelIndex(textPtr, x, y, indexPtr)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * TkTextCharBbox --
+ * TkTextIndexOfX --
  *
- *	Given an index, find the bounding box of the screen area
- *	occupied by that character.
+ *	Given a logical x coordinate (i.e. distance in pixels from the
+ *	beginning of the display line, not taking into account any information
+ *	about the window, scrolling etc.) on the display line starting with
+ *	the given index, adjust that index to refer to the object under the x
+ *	coordinate.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Zero is returned if the character is on the screen.  -1
- *	means the character isn't on the screen.  If the return value
- *	is 0, then the bounding box of the part of the character that's
- *	visible on the screen is returned to *xPtr, *yPtr, *widthPtr,
- *	and *heightPtr.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkTextIndexOfX(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    int x,			/* The x coordinate for which we want the
+				 * index. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Index of display line start, which will be
+				 * adjusted to the index under the given x
+				 * coordinate. */
+{
+    DLine *dlPtr = LayoutDLine(textPtr, indexPtr);
+    DlineIndexOfX(textPtr, dlPtr, x + textPtr->dInfoPtr->x
+		- textPtr->dInfoPtr->curXPixelOffset, indexPtr);
+    FreeDLines(textPtr, dlPtr, NULL, DLINE_FREE_TEMP);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DlineXOfIndex --
+ *
+ *	Given a relative byte index on a given display line (i.e. the number
+ *	of byte indices from the beginning of the given display line), find
+ *	the x coordinate of that index within the abstract display line,
+ *	without adjusting for the x-scroll state of the line.
+ *
+ *	This is effectively the opposite of DlineIndexOfX.
+ *
+ *	NB. The 'byteIndex' is relative to the display line, NOT the logical
+ *	line.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The x coordinate.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+DlineXOfIndex(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    DLine *dlPtr,		/* Display information for this display
+				 * line. */
+    int byteIndex)		/* The byte index for which we want the
+				 * coordinate. */
+{
+    register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr;
+    int x;
+
+    if (byteIndex == 0 || chunkPtr == NULL) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Scan through the line's chunks to find the one that contains the
+     * desired byte index.
+     */
+
+    chunkPtr = dlPtr->chunkPtr;
+    while (byteIndex > 0) {
+	if (byteIndex < chunkPtr->numBytes) {
+	    int y, width, height;
+
+	    (*chunkPtr->bboxProc)(textPtr, chunkPtr, byteIndex,
+		    dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove,
+		    dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow,
+		    dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, &x, &y, &width,
+		    &height);
+	    break;
+	} else {
+	    byteIndex -= chunkPtr->numBytes;
+	}
+	if (chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL || byteIndex == 0) {
+	    x = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->width;
+	    break;
+	}
+	chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr;
+    }
+
+    return x;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkTextIndexBbox --
+ *
+ *	Given an index, find the bounding box of the screen area occupied by
+ *	the entity (character, window, image) at that index.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Zero is returned if the index is on the screen. -1 means the index is
+ *	not on the screen. If the return value is 0, then the bounding box of
+ *	the part of the index that's visible on the screen is returned to
+ *	*xPtr, *yPtr, *widthPtr, and *heightPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4277,13 +6784,17 @@ TkTextPixelIndex(textPtr, x, y, indexPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkTextCharBbox(textPtr, indexPtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget record for text widget. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index of character whose bounding
-				 * box is desired. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;		/* Filled with character's upper-left
+TkTextIndexBbox(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr,/* Index whose bounding box is desired. */
+    int *xPtr, int *yPtr,	/* Filled with index's upper-left
 				 * coordinate. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* Filled in with character's dimensions. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+				/* Filled in with index's dimensions. */
+    int *charWidthPtr)		/* If the 'index' is at the end of a display
+				 * line and therefore takes up a very large
+				 * width, this is used to return the smaller
+				 * width actually desired by the index. */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
     DLine *dlPtr;
@@ -4308,8 +6819,7 @@ TkTextCharBbox(textPtr, indexPtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the chunk within the line that contains the desired
-     * index.
+     * Find the chunk within the line that contains the desired index.
      */
 
     byteIndex = indexPtr->byteIndex - dlPtr->index.byteIndex;
@@ -4324,31 +6834,52 @@ TkTextCharBbox(textPtr, indexPtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Call a chunk-specific procedure to find the horizontal range of
-     * the character within the chunk, then fill in the vertical range.
-     * The x-coordinate returned by bboxProc is a coordinate within a
-     * line, not a coordinate on the screen.  Translate it to reflect
-     * horizontal scrolling.
+     * Call a chunk-specific function to find the horizontal range of the
+     * character within the chunk, then fill in the vertical range. The
+     * x-coordinate returned by bboxProc is a coordinate within a line, not a
+     * coordinate on the screen. Translate it to reflect horizontal scrolling.
      */
 
-    (*chunkPtr->bboxProc)(chunkPtr, byteIndex, dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove,
+    (*chunkPtr->bboxProc)(textPtr, chunkPtr, byteIndex,
+	    dlPtr->y + dlPtr->spaceAbove,
 	    dlPtr->height - dlPtr->spaceAbove - dlPtr->spaceBelow,
 	    dlPtr->baseline - dlPtr->spaceAbove, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr,
 	    heightPtr);
-    *xPtr = *xPtr + dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset;
-    if ((byteIndex == (chunkPtr->numBytes - 1)) && (chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL)) {
+    *xPtr = *xPtr + dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curXPixelOffset;
+    if ((byteIndex == chunkPtr->numBytes-1) && (chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL)) {
 	/*
-	 * Last character in display line.  Give it all the space up to
-	 * the line.
+	 * Last character in display line. Give it all the space up to the
+	 * line.
 	 */
 
+	if (charWidthPtr != NULL) {
+	    *charWidthPtr = dInfoPtr->maxX - *xPtr;
+            if (*charWidthPtr > textPtr->charWidth) {
+                *charWidthPtr = textPtr->charWidth;
+            }
+	}
 	if (*xPtr > dInfoPtr->maxX) {
 	    *xPtr = dInfoPtr->maxX;
 	}
 	*widthPtr = dInfoPtr->maxX - *xPtr;
+    } else {
+	if (charWidthPtr != NULL) {
+	    *charWidthPtr = *widthPtr;
+	}
     }
-    if ((*xPtr + *widthPtr) <= dInfoPtr->x) {
-	return -1;
+    if (*widthPtr == 0) {
+	/*
+	 * With zero width (e.g. elided text) we just need to make sure it is
+	 * onscreen, where the '=' case here is ok.
+	 */
+
+	if (*xPtr < dInfoPtr->x) {
+	    return -1;
+	}
+    } else {
+	if ((*xPtr + *widthPtr) <= dInfoPtr->x) {
+	    return -1;
+	}
     }
     if ((*xPtr + *widthPtr) > dInfoPtr->maxX) {
 	*widthPtr = dInfoPtr->maxX - *xPtr;
@@ -4370,14 +6901,14 @@ TkTextCharBbox(textPtr, indexPtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
  *
  * TkTextDLineInfo --
  *
- *	Given an index, return information about the display line
- *	containing that character.
+ *	Given an index, return information about the display line containing
+ *	that character.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Zero is returned if the character is on the screen.  -1
- *	means the character isn't on the screen.  If the return value
- *	is 0, then information is returned in the variables pointed
- *	to by xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, and basePtr.
+ *	Zero is returned if the character is on the screen. -1 means the
+ *	character isn't on the screen. If the return value is 0, then
+ *	information is returned in the variables pointed to by xPtr, yPtr,
+ *	widthPtr, heightPtr, and basePtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4386,14 +6917,15 @@ TkTextCharBbox(textPtr, indexPtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkTextDLineInfo(textPtr, indexPtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, basePtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget record for text widget. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index of character whose bounding
-				 * box is desired. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;		/* Filled with line's upper-left
+TkTextDLineInfo(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget record for text widget. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr,/* Index of character whose bounding box is
+				 * desired. */
+    int *xPtr, int *yPtr,	/* Filled with line's upper-left
 				 * coordinate. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* Filled in with line's dimensions. */
-    int *basePtr;		/* Filled in with the baseline position,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+				/* Filled in with line's dimensions. */
+    int *basePtr)		/* Filled in with the baseline position,
 				 * measured as an offset down from *yPtr. */
 {
     TextDInfo *dInfoPtr = textPtr->dInfoPtr;
@@ -4418,7 +6950,7 @@ TkTextDLineInfo(textPtr, indexPtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, basePtr)
     }
 
     dlx = (dlPtr->chunkPtr != NULL? dlPtr->chunkPtr->x: 0);
-    *xPtr = dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curPixelOffset + dlx;
+    *xPtr = dInfoPtr->x - dInfoPtr->curXPixelOffset + dlx;
     *widthPtr = dlPtr->length - dlx;
     *yPtr = dlPtr->y;
     if ((dlPtr->y + dlPtr->height) > dInfoPtr->maxY) {
@@ -4430,37 +6962,43 @@ TkTextDLineInfo(textPtr, indexPtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, basePtr)
     return 0;
 }
 
+/*
+ * Get bounding-box information about an elided chunk.
+ */
+
 static void
-ElideBboxProc(chunkPtr, index, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr,
-	widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk containing desired char. */
-    int index;				/* Index of desired character within
-					 * the chunk. */
-    int y;				/* Topmost pixel in area allocated
-					 * for this line. */
-    int lineHeight;			/* Height of line, in pixels. */
-    int baseline;			/* Location of line's baseline, in
-					 * pixels measured down from y. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;			/* Gets filled in with coords of
-					 * character's upper-left pixel. 
-					 * X-coord is in same coordinate
-					 * system as chunkPtr->x. */
-    int *widthPtr;			/* Gets filled in with width of
-					 * character, in pixels. */
-    int *heightPtr;			/* Gets filled in with height of
-					 * character, in pixels. */
+ElideBboxProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,	/* Chunk containing desired char. */
+    int index,			/* Index of desired character within the
+				 * chunk. */
+    int y,			/* Topmost pixel in area allocated for this
+				 * line. */
+    int lineHeight,		/* Height of line, in pixels. */
+    int baseline,		/* Location of line's baseline, in pixels
+				 * measured down from y. */
+    int *xPtr, int *yPtr,	/* Gets filled in with coords of character's
+				 * upper-left pixel. X-coord is in same
+				 * coordinate system as chunkPtr->x. */
+    int *widthPtr,		/* Gets filled in with width of character, in
+				 * pixels. */
+    int *heightPtr)		/* Gets filled in with height of character, in
+				 * pixels. */
 {
     *xPtr = chunkPtr->x;
     *yPtr = y;
     *widthPtr = *heightPtr = 0;
 }
-
+
+/*
+ * Measure an elided chunk.
+ */
 
 static int
-ElideMeasureProc(chunkPtr, x)
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk containing desired coord. */
-    int x;				/* X-coordinate, in same coordinate
-					 * system as chunkPtr->x. */
+ElideMeasureProc(
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,	/* Chunk containing desired coord. */
+    int x)			/* X-coordinate, in same coordinate system as
+				 * chunkPtr->x. */
 {
     return 0 /*chunkPtr->numBytes - 1*/;
 }
@@ -4470,45 +7008,43 @@ ElideMeasureProc(chunkPtr, x)
  *
  * TkTextCharLayoutProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is the "layoutProc" for character segments.
+ *	This function is the "layoutProc" for character segments.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If there is something to display for the chunk then a
- *	non-zero value is returned and the fields of chunkPtr
- *	will be filled in (see the declaration of TkTextDispChunk
- *	in tkText.h for details).  If zero is returned it means
- *	that no characters from this chunk fit in the window.
- *	If -1 is returned it means that this segment just doesn't
- *	need to be displayed (never happens for text).
+ *	If there is something to display for the chunk then a non-zero value
+ *	is returned and the fields of chunkPtr will be filled in (see the
+ *	declaration of TkTextDispChunk in tkText.h for details). If zero is
+ *	returned it means that no characters from this chunk fit in the
+ *	window. If -1 is returned it means that this segment just doesn't need
+ *	to be displayed (never happens for text).
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Memory is allocated to hold additional information about
- *	the chunk.
+ *	Memory is allocated to hold additional information about the chunk.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-TkTextCharLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, segPtr, byteOffset, maxX, maxBytes,
-	noCharsYet, wrapMode, chunkPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget being layed out. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index of first character to lay out
+TkTextCharLayoutProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget being layed out. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr,	/* Index of first character to lay out
 				 * (corresponds to segPtr and offset). */
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;	/* Segment being layed out. */
-    int byteOffset;		/* Byte offset within segment of first
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr,	/* Segment being layed out. */
+    int byteOffset,		/* Byte offset within segment of first
 				 * character to consider. */
-    int maxX;			/* Chunk must not occupy pixels at this
+    int maxX,			/* Chunk must not occupy pixels at this
 				 * position or higher. */
-    int maxBytes;		/* Chunk must not include more than this
-				 * many characters. */
-    int noCharsYet;		/* Non-zero means no characters have been
+    int maxBytes,		/* Chunk must not include more than this many
+				 * characters. */
+    int noCharsYet,		/* Non-zero means no characters have been
 				 * assigned to this display line yet. */
-    TkWrapMode wrapMode;	/* How to handle line wrapping: TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR,
-				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE, or TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD. */
-    register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;
-				/* Structure to fill in with information
-				 * about this chunk.  The x field has already
-				 * been set by the caller. */
+    TkWrapMode wrapMode,	/* How to handle line wrapping:
+				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR, TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE, or
+				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD. */
+    register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr)
+				/* Structure to fill in with information about
+				 * this chunk. The x field has already been
+				 * set by the caller. */
 {
     Tk_Font tkfont;
     int nextX, bytesThatFit, count;
@@ -4516,36 +7052,80 @@ TkTextCharLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, segPtr, byteOffset, maxX, maxBytes,
     char *p;
     TkTextSegment *nextPtr;
     Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+#if TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+    const char *line;
+    int lineOffset;
+    BaseCharInfo *bciPtr;
+    Tcl_DString *baseString;
+#endif
 
     /*
-     * Figure out how many characters will fit in the space we've got.
-     * Include the next character, even though it won't fit completely,
-     * if any of the following is true:
-     *   (a) the chunk contains no characters and the display line contains
-     *	     no characters yet (i.e. the line isn't wide enough to hold
-     *	     even a single character).
-     *   (b) at least one pixel of the character is visible, we haven't
-     *	     already exceeded the character limit, and the next character
-     *	     is a white space character.
+     * Figure out how many characters will fit in the space we've got. Include
+     * the next character, even though it won't fit completely, if any of the
+     * following is true:
+     *	 (a) the chunk contains no characters and the display line contains no
+     *	     characters yet (i.e. the line isn't wide enough to hold even a
+     *	     single character).
+     *	 (b) at least one pixel of the character is visible, we have not
+     *	     already exceeded the character limit, and the next character is a
+     *	     white space character.
      */
 
     p = segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset;
     tkfont = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont;
-    bytesThatFit = MeasureChars(tkfont, p, maxBytes, chunkPtr->x, maxX, 0,
-	    &nextX);
+
+#if TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+    if (baseCharChunkPtr == NULL) {
+	baseCharChunkPtr = chunkPtr;
+	bciPtr = (BaseCharInfo *) ckalloc(sizeof(BaseCharInfo));
+	baseString = &bciPtr->baseChars;
+	Tcl_DStringInit(baseString);
+	bciPtr->width = 0;
+
+	ciPtr = &bciPtr->ci;
+    } else {
+	bciPtr = (BaseCharInfo *) baseCharChunkPtr->clientData;
+	ciPtr = (CharInfo *) ckalloc(sizeof(CharInfo));
+	baseString = &bciPtr->baseChars;
+    }
+
+    lineOffset = Tcl_DStringLength(baseString);
+    line = Tcl_DStringAppend(baseString,p,maxBytes);
+
+    chunkPtr->clientData = (ClientData) ciPtr;
+    ciPtr->baseChunkPtr = baseCharChunkPtr;
+    ciPtr->baseOffset = lineOffset;
+    ciPtr->chars = NULL;
+    ciPtr->numBytes = 0;
+
+    bytesThatFit = CharChunkMeasureChars(chunkPtr, line,
+	    lineOffset + maxBytes, lineOffset, -1, chunkPtr->x, maxX,
+	    TK_ISOLATE_END, &nextX);
+#else /* !TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
+    bytesThatFit = CharChunkMeasureChars(chunkPtr, p, maxBytes, 0, -1,
+	    chunkPtr->x, maxX, TK_ISOLATE_END, &nextX);
+#endif /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
+
     if (bytesThatFit < maxBytes) {
 	if ((bytesThatFit == 0) && noCharsYet) {
 	    Tcl_UniChar ch;
-	    
-	    bytesThatFit = MeasureChars(tkfont, p, Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch),
+	    int chLen = Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch);
+
+#if TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+	    bytesThatFit = CharChunkMeasureChars(chunkPtr, line,
+		    lineOffset+chLen, lineOffset, -1, chunkPtr->x, -1, 0,
+		    &nextX);
+#else /* !TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
+	    bytesThatFit = CharChunkMeasureChars(chunkPtr, p, chLen, 0, -1,
 		    chunkPtr->x, -1, 0, &nextX);
+#endif /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
 	}
 	if ((nextX < maxX) && ((p[bytesThatFit] == ' ')
 		|| (p[bytesThatFit] == '\t'))) {
 	    /*
-	     * Space characters are funny, in that they are considered
-	     * to fit if there is at least one pixel of space left on the
-	     * line.  Just give the space character whatever space is left.
+	     * Space characters are funny, in that they are considered to fit
+	     * if there is at least one pixel of space left on the line. Just
+	     * give the space character whatever space is left.
 	     */
 
 	    nextX = maxX;
@@ -4560,16 +7140,26 @@ TkTextCharLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, segPtr, byteOffset, maxX, maxBytes,
 	    bytesThatFit++;
 	}
 	if (bytesThatFit == 0) {
+#if TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+	    chunkPtr->clientData = NULL;
+	    if (chunkPtr == baseCharChunkPtr) {
+		baseCharChunkPtr = NULL;
+		Tcl_DStringFree(baseString);
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_DStringSetLength(baseString,lineOffset);
+	    }
+	    ckfree((char *) ciPtr);
+#endif /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
 	    return 0;
 	}
     }
-	
+
     Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, &fm);
 
     /*
-     * Fill in the chunk structure and allocate and initialize a
-     * CharInfo structure.  If the last character is a newline
-     * then don't bother to display it.
+     * Fill in the chunk structure and allocate and initialize a CharInfo
+     * structure. If the last character is a newline then don't bother to
+     * display it.
      */
 
     chunkPtr->displayProc = CharDisplayProc;
@@ -4582,20 +7172,41 @@ TkTextCharLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, segPtr, byteOffset, maxX, maxBytes,
     chunkPtr->minHeight = 0;
     chunkPtr->width = nextX - chunkPtr->x;
     chunkPtr->breakIndex = -1;
-    ciPtr = (CharInfo *) ckalloc((unsigned)
-	    (sizeof(CharInfo) - 3 + bytesThatFit));
+
+#if !TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+    ciPtr = (CharInfo *)
+	    ckalloc((unsigned) bytesThatFit + Tk_Offset(CharInfo, chars) + 1);
     chunkPtr->clientData = (ClientData) ciPtr;
+    memcpy(ciPtr->chars, p, (unsigned) bytesThatFit);
+#endif /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
+
     ciPtr->numBytes = bytesThatFit;
-    memcpy(ciPtr->chars, p, (size_t) bytesThatFit);
     if (p[bytesThatFit - 1] == '\n') {
 	ciPtr->numBytes--;
     }
 
+#if TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
     /*
-     * Compute a break location.  If we're in word wrap mode, a
-     * break can occur after any space character, or at the end of
-     * the chunk if the next segment (ignoring those with zero size)
-     * is not a character segment.
+     * Final update for the current base chunk data.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_DStringSetLength(baseString,lineOffset+ciPtr->numBytes);
+    bciPtr->width = nextX - baseCharChunkPtr->x;
+
+    /*
+     * Finalize the base chunk if this chunk ends in a tab, which definitly
+     * breaks the context and needs to be handled on a higher level.
+     */
+
+    if (ciPtr->numBytes > 0 && p[ciPtr->numBytes - 1] == '\t') {
+	FinalizeBaseChunk(chunkPtr);
+    }
+#endif /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
+
+    /*
+     * Compute a break location. If we're in word wrap mode, a break can occur
+     * after any space character, or at the end of the chunk if the next
+     * segment (ignoring those with zero size) is not a character segment.
      */
 
     if (wrapMode != TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD) {
@@ -4603,7 +7214,7 @@ TkTextCharLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, segPtr, byteOffset, maxX, maxBytes,
     } else {
 	for (count = bytesThatFit, p += bytesThatFit - 1; count > 0;
 		count--, p--) {
-	    if (isspace(UCHAR(*p))) {
+	    if (UCHAR(*p) < 0x80 && isspace(UCHAR(*p))) {
 		chunkPtr->breakIndex = count;
 		break;
 	    }
@@ -4624,12 +7235,112 @@ TkTextCharLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, segPtr, byteOffset, maxX, maxBytes,
 }
 
 /*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * CharChunkMeasureChars --
+ *
+ *	Determine the number of characters from a char chunk that will fit in
+ *	the given horizontal span.
+ *
+ *	This is the same as MeasureChars (which see), but in the context of a
+ *	char chunk, i.e. on a higher level of abstraction. Use this function
+ *	whereever possible instead of plain MeasureChars, so that the right
+ *	context is used automatically.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is the number of bytes from the range of start to end
+ *	in source that fit in the span given by startX and maxX. *nextXPtr is
+ *	filled in with the x-coordinate at which the first character that
+ *	didn't fit would be drawn, if it were to be drawn.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+CharChunkMeasureChars(
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,	/* Chunk from which to measure. */
+    const char *chars,		/* Chars to use, instead of the chunk's own.
+				 * Used by the layoutproc during chunk setup.
+				 * All other callers use NULL. Not
+				 * NUL-terminated. */
+    int charsLen,		/* Length of the "chars" parameter. */
+    int start, int end,		/* The range of chars to measure inside the
+				 * chunk (or inside the additional chars). */
+    int startX,			/* Starting x coordinate where the measured
+				 * span will begin. */
+    int maxX,			/* Maximum pixel width of the span. May be -1
+				 * for unlimited. */
+    int flags,			/* Flags to pass to MeasureChars. */
+    int *nextXPtr)		/* The function puts the newly calculated
+				 * right border x-position of the span
+				 * here. */
+{
+    Tk_Font tkfont = chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont;
+    CharInfo *ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData;
+
+#if !TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+    if (chars == NULL) {
+	chars = ciPtr->chars;
+	charsLen = ciPtr->numBytes;
+    }
+    if (end == -1) {
+	end = charsLen;
+    }
+
+    return MeasureChars(tkfont, chars, charsLen, start, end-start,
+	    startX, maxX, flags, nextXPtr);
+#else
+    {
+	int xDisplacement;
+	int fit, bstart = start, bend = end;
+
+	if (chars == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_DString *baseChars = &((BaseCharInfo *)
+		    ciPtr->baseChunkPtr->clientData)->baseChars;
+
+	    chars = Tcl_DStringValue(baseChars);
+	    charsLen = Tcl_DStringLength(baseChars);
+	    bstart += ciPtr->baseOffset;
+	    if (bend == -1) {
+		bend = ciPtr->baseOffset + ciPtr->numBytes;
+	    } else {
+		bend += ciPtr->baseOffset;
+	    }
+	} else if (bend == -1) {
+	    bend = charsLen;
+	}
+
+	if (bstart == ciPtr->baseOffset) {
+	    xDisplacement = startX - chunkPtr->x;
+	} else {
+	    int widthUntilStart = 0;
+
+	    MeasureChars(tkfont, chars, charsLen, 0, bstart,
+		    0, -1, 0, &widthUntilStart);
+	    xDisplacement = startX - widthUntilStart - chunkPtr->x;
+	}
+
+	fit = MeasureChars(tkfont, chars, charsLen, 0, bend,
+		ciPtr->baseChunkPtr->x + xDisplacement, maxX, flags, nextXPtr);
+
+	if (fit < bstart) {
+	    return 0;
+	} else {
+	    return fit - bstart;
+	}
+    }
+#endif
+}
+
+/*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * CharDisplayProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to display a character chunk on
- *	the screen or in an off-screen pixmap.
+ *	This function is called to display a character chunk on the screen or
+ *	in an off-screen pixmap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -4641,26 +7352,29 @@ TkTextCharLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, segPtr, byteOffset, maxX, maxBytes,
  */
 
 static void
-CharDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, height, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk that is to be drawn. */
-    int x;				/* X-position in dst at which to
-					 * draw this chunk (may differ from
-					 * the x-position in the chunk because
-					 * of scrolling). */
-    int y;				/* Y-position at which to draw this
-					 * chunk in dst. */
-    int height;				/* Total height of line. */
-    int baseline;			/* Offset of baseline from y. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display to use for drawing. */
-    Drawable dst;			/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
-					 * chunk. */
-    int screenY;			/* Y-coordinate in text window that
-					 * corresponds to y. */
+CharDisplayProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,	/* Chunk that is to be drawn. */
+    int x,			/* X-position in dst at which to draw this
+				 * chunk (may differ from the x-position in
+				 * the chunk because of scrolling). */
+    int y,			/* Y-position at which to draw this chunk in
+				 * dst. */
+    int height,			/* Total height of line. */
+    int baseline,		/* Offset of baseline from y. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display to use for drawing. */
+    Drawable dst,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw chunk. */
+    int screenY)		/* Y-coordinate in text window that
+				 * corresponds to y. */
 {
     CharInfo *ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData;
+    const char *string;
     TextStyle *stylePtr;
     StyleValues *sValuePtr;
-    int offsetBytes, offsetX;
+    int numBytes, offsetBytes, offsetX;
+#if TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT
+    BaseCharInfo *bciPtr;
+#endif /* TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */
 
     if ((x + chunkPtr->width) <= 0) {
 	/*
@@ -4670,31 +7384,90 @@ CharDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, height, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
 	return;
     }
 
+#if TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT
+    bciPtr = (BaseCharInfo *) ciPtr->baseChunkPtr->clientData;
+    numBytes = Tcl_DStringLength(&bciPtr->baseChars);
+    string = Tcl_DStringValue(&bciPtr->baseChars);
+
+#elif TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+    if (ciPtr->baseChunkPtr != chunkPtr) {
+	/*
+	 * Without context drawing only base chunks display their foreground.
+	 */
+
+	return;
+    }
+
+    numBytes = Tcl_DStringLength(&((BaseCharInfo *) ciPtr)->baseChars);
+    string = ciPtr->chars;
+
+#else /* !TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
+    numBytes = ciPtr->numBytes;
+    string = ciPtr->chars;
+#endif /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
+
     stylePtr = chunkPtr->stylePtr;
     sValuePtr = stylePtr->sValuePtr;
 
     /*
-     * If the text sticks out way to the left of the window, skip
-     * over the characters that aren't in the visible part of the
-     * window.  This is essential if x is very negative (such as
-     * less than 32K);  otherwise overflow problems will occur
-     * in servers that use 16-bit arithmetic, like X.
+     * If the text sticks out way to the left of the window, skip over the
+     * characters that aren't in the visible part of the window. This is
+     * essential if x is very negative (such as less than 32K); otherwise
+     * overflow problems will occur in servers that use 16-bit arithmetic,
+     * like X.
      */
 
     offsetX = x;
     offsetBytes = 0;
     if (x < 0) {
-	offsetBytes = MeasureChars(sValuePtr->tkfont, ciPtr->chars,
-	    ciPtr->numBytes, x, 0, x - chunkPtr->x, &offsetX);
+	offsetBytes = CharChunkMeasureChars(chunkPtr, NULL, 0, 0, -1,
+		x, 0, 0, &offsetX);
     }
 
     /*
      * Draw the text, underline, and overstrike for this chunk.
      */
 
-    if (!sValuePtr->elide && (ciPtr->numBytes > offsetBytes) && (stylePtr->fgGC != None)) {
-	int numBytes = ciPtr->numBytes - offsetBytes;
-	char *string = ciPtr->chars + offsetBytes;
+    if (!sValuePtr->elide && (numBytes > offsetBytes)
+	    && (stylePtr->fgGC != None)) {
+#if TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT
+	int start = ciPtr->baseOffset + offsetBytes;
+	int len = ciPtr->numBytes - offsetBytes;
+	int xDisplacement = x - chunkPtr->x;
+
+	if ((len > 0) && (string[start + len - 1] == '\t')) {
+	    len--;
+	}
+	if (len <= 0) {
+	    return;
+	}
+
+	TkpDrawCharsInContext(display, dst, stylePtr->fgGC, sValuePtr->tkfont,
+		string, numBytes, start, len,
+		ciPtr->baseChunkPtr->x + xDisplacement,
+		y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset);
+
+	if (sValuePtr->underline) {
+	    TkUnderlineCharsInContext(display, dst, stylePtr->fgGC,
+		    sValuePtr->tkfont, string, numBytes,
+		    ciPtr->baseChunkPtr->x + xDisplacement,
+		    y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset,
+		    start, start+len);
+	}
+	if (sValuePtr->overstrike) {
+	    Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+
+	    Tk_GetFontMetrics(sValuePtr->tkfont, &fm);
+	    TkUnderlineCharsInContext(display, dst, stylePtr->fgGC,
+		    sValuePtr->tkfont, string, numBytes,
+		    ciPtr->baseChunkPtr->x + xDisplacement,
+		    y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset
+			    - fm.descent - (fm.ascent * 3) / 10,
+		    start, start+len);
+	}
+#else /* !TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */
+	string += offsetBytes;
+	numBytes -= offsetBytes;
 
 	if ((numBytes > 0) && (string[numBytes - 1] == '\t')) {
 	    numBytes--;
@@ -4703,20 +7476,22 @@ CharDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, height, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
 		numBytes, offsetX, y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset);
 	if (sValuePtr->underline) {
 	    Tk_UnderlineChars(display, dst, stylePtr->fgGC, sValuePtr->tkfont,
-		    ciPtr->chars + offsetBytes, offsetX,
-		    y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset, 0, numBytes);
+		    string, offsetX,
+		    y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset,
+		    0, numBytes);
 
 	}
 	if (sValuePtr->overstrike) {
 	    Tk_FontMetrics fm;
-	    
+
 	    Tk_GetFontMetrics(sValuePtr->tkfont, &fm);
 	    Tk_UnderlineChars(display, dst, stylePtr->fgGC, sValuePtr->tkfont,
-		    ciPtr->chars + offsetBytes, offsetX,
+		    string, offsetX,
 		    y + baseline - sValuePtr->offset
 			    - fm.descent - (fm.ascent * 3) / 10,
 		    0, numBytes);
 	}
+#endif /* TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */
     }
 }
 
@@ -4725,9 +7500,9 @@ CharDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, height, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
  *
  * CharUndisplayProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when a character chunk is no
- *	longer going to be displayed.  It frees up resources
- *	that were allocated to display the chunk.
+ *	This function is called when a character chunk is no longer going to
+ *	be displayed. It frees up resources that were allocated to display the
+ *	chunk.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -4739,14 +7514,40 @@ CharDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, height, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
  */
 
 static void
-CharUndisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Overall information about text
-					 * widget. */
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk that is about to be freed. */
+CharUndisplayProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr)	/* Chunk that is about to be freed. */
 {
     CharInfo *ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData;
 
-    ckfree((char *) ciPtr);
+    if (ciPtr) {
+#if TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+	if (chunkPtr == ciPtr->baseChunkPtr) {
+	    /*
+	     * Basechunks are undisplayed first, when DLines are freed or
+	     * partially freed, so this makes sure we don't access their data
+	     * any more.
+	     */
+
+	    FreeBaseChunk(chunkPtr);
+	} else if (ciPtr->baseChunkPtr != NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * When other char chunks are undisplayed, drop their characters
+	     * from the base chunk. This usually happens, when they are last
+	     * in a line and need to be re-layed out.
+	     */
+
+	    RemoveFromBaseChunk(chunkPtr);
+	}
+
+	ciPtr->baseChunkPtr = NULL;
+	ciPtr->chars = NULL;
+	ciPtr->numBytes = 0;
+#endif /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
+
+	ckfree((char *) ciPtr);
+	chunkPtr->clientData = NULL;
+    }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -4754,12 +7555,12 @@ CharUndisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr)
  *
  * CharMeasureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to determine which character in
- *	a character chunk lies over a given x-coordinate.
+ *	This function is called to determine which character in a character
+ *	chunk lies over a given x-coordinate.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the index *within the chunk* of the
- *	character that covers the position given by "x".
+ *	The return value is the index *within the chunk* of the character that
+ *	covers the position given by "x".
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4768,17 +7569,15 @@ CharUndisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-CharMeasureProc(chunkPtr, x)
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk containing desired coord. */
-    int x;				/* X-coordinate, in same coordinate
-					 * system as chunkPtr->x. */
+CharMeasureProc(
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,	/* Chunk containing desired coord. */
+    int x)			/* X-coordinate, in same coordinate system as
+				 * chunkPtr->x. */
 {
-    CharInfo *ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData;
     int endX;
 
-    return MeasureChars(chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont, ciPtr->chars,
-	    chunkPtr->numBytes - 1, chunkPtr->x, x, 0, &endX);
-						/* CHAR OFFSET */
+    return CharChunkMeasureChars(chunkPtr, NULL, 0, 0, chunkPtr->numBytes-1,
+	    chunkPtr->x, x, 0, &endX); /* CHAR OFFSET */
 }
 
 /*
@@ -4786,17 +7585,16 @@ CharMeasureProc(chunkPtr, x)
  *
  * CharBboxProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to compute the bounding box of
- *	the area occupied by a single character.
+ *	This function is called to compute the bounding box of the area
+ *	occupied by a single character.
  *
  * Results:
- *	There is no return value.  *xPtr and *yPtr are filled in
- *	with the coordinates of the upper left corner of the
- *	character, and *widthPtr and *heightPtr are filled in with
- *	the dimensions of the character in pixels.  Note:  not all
- *	of the returned bbox is necessarily visible on the screen
- *	(the rightmost part might be off-screen to the right,
- *	and the bottommost part might be off-screen to the bottom).
+ *	There is no return value. *xPtr and *yPtr are filled in with the
+ *	coordinates of the upper left corner of the character, and *widthPtr
+ *	and *heightPtr are filled in with the dimensions of the character in
+ *	pixels. Note: not all of the returned bbox is necessarily visible on
+ *	the screen (the rightmost part might be off-screen to the right, and
+ *	the bottommost part might be off-screen to the bottom).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4805,51 +7603,50 @@ CharMeasureProc(chunkPtr, x)
  */
 
 static void
-CharBboxProc(chunkPtr, byteIndex, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr,
-	widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk containing desired char. */
-    int byteIndex;				/* Byte offset of desired character
-					 * within the chunk. */
-    int y;				/* Topmost pixel in area allocated
-					 * for this line. */
-    int lineHeight;			/* Height of line, in pixels. */
-    int baseline;			/* Location of line's baseline, in
-					 * pixels measured down from y. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;			/* Gets filled in with coords of
-					 * character's upper-left pixel. 
-					 * X-coord is in same coordinate
-					 * system as chunkPtr->x. */
-    int *widthPtr;			/* Gets filled in with width of
-					 * character, in pixels. */
-    int *heightPtr;			/* Gets filled in with height of
-					 * character, in pixels. */
+CharBboxProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,	/* Chunk containing desired char. */
+    int byteIndex,		/* Byte offset of desired character within the
+				 * chunk. */
+    int y,			/* Topmost pixel in area allocated for this
+				 * line. */
+    int lineHeight,		/* Height of line, in pixels. */
+    int baseline,		/* Location of line's baseline, in pixels
+				 * measured down from y. */
+    int *xPtr, int *yPtr,	/* Gets filled in with coords of character's
+				 * upper-left pixel. X-coord is in same
+				 * coordinate system as chunkPtr->x. */
+    int *widthPtr,		/* Gets filled in with width of character, in
+				 * pixels. */
+    int *heightPtr)		/* Gets filled in with height of character, in
+				 * pixels. */
 {
     CharInfo *ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData;
     int maxX;
 
     maxX = chunkPtr->width + chunkPtr->x;
-    MeasureChars(chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont, ciPtr->chars,
-	    byteIndex, chunkPtr->x, -1, 0, xPtr);
+    CharChunkMeasureChars(chunkPtr, NULL, 0, 0, byteIndex,
+	    chunkPtr->x, -1, 0, xPtr);
 
     if (byteIndex == ciPtr->numBytes) {
 	/*
-	 * This situation only happens if the last character in a line
-	 * is a space character, in which case it absorbs all of the
-	 * extra space in the line (see TkTextCharLayoutProc).
+	 * This situation only happens if the last character in a line is a
+	 * space character, in which case it absorbs all of the extra space in
+	 * the line (see TkTextCharLayoutProc).
 	 */
 
 	*widthPtr = maxX - *xPtr;
     } else if ((ciPtr->chars[byteIndex] == '\t')
 	    && (byteIndex == ciPtr->numBytes - 1)) {
 	/*
-	 * The desired character is a tab character that terminates a
-	 * chunk;  give it all the space left in the chunk.
+	 * The desired character is a tab character that terminates a chunk;
+	 * give it all the space left in the chunk.
 	 */
 
 	*widthPtr = maxX - *xPtr;
     } else {
-	MeasureChars(chunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont, 
-		ciPtr->chars + byteIndex, 1, *xPtr, -1, 0, widthPtr);
+	CharChunkMeasureChars(chunkPtr, NULL, 0, byteIndex, byteIndex+1,
+		*xPtr, -1, 0, widthPtr);
 	if (*widthPtr > maxX) {
 	    *widthPtr = maxX - *xPtr;
 	} else {
@@ -4865,64 +7662,73 @@ CharBboxProc(chunkPtr, byteIndex, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr,
  *
  * AdjustForTab --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to move a series of chunks right
- *	in order to align them with a tab stop.
+ *	This function is called to move a series of chunks right in order to
+ *	align them with a tab stop.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The width of chunkPtr gets adjusted so that it absorbs the
- *	extra space due to the tab.  The x locations in all the chunks
- *	after chunkPtr are adjusted rightward to align with the tab
- *	stop given by tabArrayPtr and index.
+ *	The width of chunkPtr gets adjusted so that it absorbs the extra space
+ *	due to the tab. The x locations in all the chunks after chunkPtr are
+ *	adjusted rightward to align with the tab stop given by tabArrayPtr and
+ *	index.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, chunkPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Information about the text widget as
-					 * a whole. */
-    TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr;	/* Information about the tab stops
-					 * that apply to this line.  May be
-					 * NULL to indicate default tabbing
-					 * (every 8 chars). */
-    int index;				/* Index of current tab stop. */
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk whose last character is
-					 * the tab;  the following chunks
-					 * contain information to be shifted
-					 * right. */
-
+AdjustForTab(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about the text widget as a
+				 * whole. */
+    TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr,/* Information about the tab stops that apply
+				 * to this line. May be NULL to indicate
+				 * default tabbing (every 8 chars). */
+    int index,			/* Index of current tab stop. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr)	/* Chunk whose last character is the tab; the
+				 * following chunks contain information to be
+				 * shifted right. */
 {
     int x, desired, delta, width, decimal, i, gotDigit;
     TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr2, *decimalChunkPtr;
     CharInfo *ciPtr;
-    int tabX, prev, spaceWidth;
-    char *p;
+    int tabX, spaceWidth;
+    const char *p;
     TkTextTabAlign alignment;
 
     if (chunkPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * Nothing after the actual tab;  just return.
+	 * Nothing after the actual tab; just return.
 	 */
 
 	return;
     }
 
+    x = chunkPtr->nextPtr->x;
+
     /*
-     * If no tab information has been given, do the usual thing:
-     * round up to the next boundary of 8 average-sized characters.
+     * If no tab information has been given, assuming tab stops are at 8
+     * average-sized characters. Still ensure we respect the tabular versus
+     * wordprocessor tab style.
      */
 
-    x = chunkPtr->nextPtr->x;
     if ((tabArrayPtr == NULL) || (tabArrayPtr->numTabs == 0)) {
 	/*
 	 * No tab information has been given, so use the default
 	 * interpretation of tabs.
 	 */
 
-	desired = NextTabStop(textPtr->tkfont, x, 0);
+	if (textPtr->tabStyle == TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_TABULAR) {
+	    int tabWidth = Tk_TextWidth(textPtr->tkfont, "0", 1) * 8;
+	    if (tabWidth == 0) {
+		tabWidth = 1;
+	    }
+
+	    desired = tabWidth * (index + 1);
+	} else {
+	    desired = NextTabStop(textPtr->tkfont, x, 0);
+	}
+
 	goto update;
     }
 
@@ -4931,19 +7737,14 @@ AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, chunkPtr)
 	tabX = tabArrayPtr->tabs[index].location;
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * Ran out of tab stops;  compute a tab position by extrapolating
-	 * from the last two tab positions.
+	 * Ran out of tab stops; compute a tab position by extrapolating from
+	 * the last two tab positions.
 	 */
 
-	if (tabArrayPtr->numTabs > 1) {
-	    prev = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-2].location;
-	} else {
-	    prev = 0;
-	}
+	tabX = (int) (tabArrayPtr->lastTab +
+		(index + 1 - tabArrayPtr->numTabs)*tabArrayPtr->tabIncrement +
+		0.5);
 	alignment = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].alignment;
-	tabX = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].location
-		+ (index + 1 - tabArrayPtr->numTabs)
-		* (tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].location - prev);
     }
 
     if (alignment == LEFT) {
@@ -4953,8 +7754,8 @@ AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, chunkPtr)
 
     if ((alignment == CENTER) || (alignment == RIGHT)) {
 	/*
-	 * Compute the width of all the information in the tab group,
-	 * then use it to pick a desired location.
+	 * Compute the width of all the information in the tab group, then use
+	 * it to pick a desired location.
 	 */
 
 	width = 0;
@@ -4971,9 +7772,9 @@ AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, chunkPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Must be numeric alignment.  Search through the text to be
-     * tabbed, looking for the last , or . before the first character
-     * that isn't a number, comma, period, or sign.
+     * Must be numeric alignment. Search through the text to be tabbed,
+     * looking for the last , or . before the first character that isn't a
+     * number, comma, period, or sign.
      */
 
     decimalChunkPtr = NULL;
@@ -4999,20 +7800,21 @@ AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, chunkPtr)
 	    }
 	}
     }
-    endOfNumber:
+
+  endOfNumber:
     if (decimalChunkPtr != NULL) {
 	int curX;
 
 	ciPtr = (CharInfo *) decimalChunkPtr->clientData;
-	MeasureChars(decimalChunkPtr->stylePtr->sValuePtr->tkfont,
-		ciPtr->chars, decimal, decimalChunkPtr->x, -1, 0, &curX);
+	CharChunkMeasureChars(decimalChunkPtr, NULL, 0, 0, decimal,
+		decimalChunkPtr->x, -1, 0, &curX);
 	desired = tabX - (curX - x);
 	goto update;
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * There wasn't a decimal point.  Right justify the text.
+	 * There wasn't a decimal point. Right justify the text.
 	 */
-    
+
 	width = 0;
 	for (chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr->nextPtr; chunkPtr2 != NULL;
 		chunkPtr2 = chunkPtr2->nextPtr) {
@@ -5022,15 +7824,14 @@ AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, chunkPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Shift all of the chunks to the right so that the left edge is
-     * at the desired location, then expand the chunk containing the
-     * tab.  Be sure that the tab occupies at least the width of a
-     * space character.
+     * Shift all of the chunks to the right so that the left edge is at the
+     * desired location, then expand the chunk containing the tab. Be sure
+     * that the tab occupies at least the width of a space character.
      */
 
-    update:
+  update:
     delta = desired - x;
-    MeasureChars(textPtr->tkfont, " ", 1, 0, -1, 0, &spaceWidth);
+    MeasureChars(textPtr->tkfont, " ", 1, 0, 1, 0, -1, 0, &spaceWidth);
     if (delta < spaceWidth) {
 	delta = spaceWidth;
     }
@@ -5046,15 +7847,18 @@ AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, chunkPtr)
  *
  * SizeOfTab --
  *
- *	This returns an estimate of the amount of white space that will
- *	be consumed by a tab.
+ *	This returns an estimate of the amount of white space that will be
+ *	consumed by a tab.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the minimum number of pixels that will
- *	be occupied by the index'th tab of tabArrayPtr, assuming that
- *	the current position on the line is x and the end of the
- *	line is maxX.  For numeric tabs, this is a conservative
- *	estimate.  The return value is always >= 0.
+ *	The return value is the minimum number of pixels that will be occupied
+ *	by the next tab of tabArrayPtr, assuming that the current position on
+ *	the line is x and the end of the line is maxX. The 'next tab' is
+ *	determined by a combination of the current position (x) which it must
+ *	be equal to or beyond, and the tab count in indexPtr.
+ *
+ *	For numeric tabs, this is a conservative estimate. The return value is
+ *	always >= 0.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5063,50 +7867,88 @@ AdjustForTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, chunkPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-SizeOfTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, x, maxX)
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Information about the text widget as
-					 * a whole. */
-    TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr;	/* Information about the tab stops
-					 * that apply to this line.  NULL
-					 * means use default tabbing (every
-					 * 8 chars.) */
-    int index;				/* Index of current tab stop. */
-    int x;				/* Current x-location in line. Only
-					 * used if tabArrayPtr == NULL. */
-    int maxX;				/* X-location of pixel just past the
-					 * right edge of the line. */
+SizeOfTab(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about the text widget as a
+				 * whole. */
+    int tabStyle,		/* One of TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_TABULAR
+				 * or TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_WORDPROCESSOR. */
+    TkTextTabArray *tabArrayPtr,/* Information about the tab stops that apply
+				 * to this line. NULL means use default
+				 * tabbing (every 8 chars.) */
+    int *indexPtr,		/* Contains index of previous tab stop, will
+				 * be updated to reflect the number of stops
+				 * used. */
+    int x,			/* Current x-location in line. */
+    int maxX)			/* X-location of pixel just past the right
+				 * edge of the line. */
 {
-    int tabX, prev, result, spaceWidth;
+    int tabX, result, index, spaceWidth, tabWidth;
     TkTextTabAlign alignment;
 
+    index = *indexPtr;
+
     if ((tabArrayPtr == NULL) || (tabArrayPtr->numTabs == 0)) {
-	tabX = NextTabStop(textPtr->tkfont, x, 0);
-	return tabX - x;
-    }
-    if (index < tabArrayPtr->numTabs) {
-	tabX = tabArrayPtr->tabs[index].location;
-	alignment = tabArrayPtr->tabs[index].alignment;
+	/*
+	 * We're using a default tab spacing of 8 characters.
+	 */
+
+	tabWidth = Tk_TextWidth(textPtr->tkfont, "0", 1) * 8;
+	if (tabWidth == 0) {
+	    tabWidth = 1;
+	}
     } else {
+	tabWidth = 0;		/* Avoid compiler error. */
+    }
+
+    do {
 	/*
-	 * Ran out of tab stops;  compute a tab position by extrapolating
-	 * from the last two tab positions.
+	 * We were given the count before this tab, so increment it first.
 	 */
 
-	if (tabArrayPtr->numTabs > 1) {
-	    prev = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-2].location;
+	index++;
+
+	if ((tabArrayPtr == NULL) || (tabArrayPtr->numTabs == 0)) {
+	    /*
+	     * We're using a default tab spacing calculated above.
+	     */
+
+	    tabX = tabWidth * (index + 1);
+	    alignment = LEFT;
+	} else if (index < tabArrayPtr->numTabs) {
+	    tabX = tabArrayPtr->tabs[index].location;
+	    alignment = tabArrayPtr->tabs[index].alignment;
 	} else {
-	    prev = 0;
+	    /*
+	     * Ran out of tab stops; compute a tab position by extrapolating.
+	     */
+
+	    tabX = (int) (tabArrayPtr->lastTab
+		    + (index + 1 - tabArrayPtr->numTabs)
+		    * tabArrayPtr->tabIncrement + 0.5);
+	    alignment = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].alignment;
 	}
-	tabX = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].location
-		+ (index + 1 - tabArrayPtr->numTabs)
-		* (tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].location - prev);
-	alignment = tabArrayPtr->tabs[tabArrayPtr->numTabs-1].alignment;
-    }
+
+	/*
+	 * If this tab stop is before the current x position, then we have two
+	 * cases:
+	 *
+	 * With 'wordprocessor' style tabs, we must obviously continue until
+	 * we reach the text tab stop.
+	 *
+	 * With 'tabular' style tabs, we always use the index'th tab stop.
+	 */
+    } while (tabX <= x && (tabStyle == TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_WORDPROCESSOR));
+
+    /*
+     * Inform our caller of how many tab stops we've used up.
+     */
+
+    *indexPtr = index;
+
     if (alignment == CENTER) {
 	/*
-	 * Be very careful in the arithmetic below, because maxX may
-	 * be the largest positive number:  watch out for integer
-	 * overflow.
+	 * Be very careful in the arithmetic below, because maxX may be the
+	 * largest positive number: watch out for integer overflow.
 	 */
 
 	if ((maxX-tabX) < (tabX - x)) {
@@ -5122,10 +7964,9 @@ SizeOfTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, x, maxX)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Note: this treats NUMERIC alignment the same as LEFT
-     * alignment, which is somewhat conservative.  However, it's
-     * pretty tricky at this point to figure out exactly where
-     * the damn decimal point will be.
+     * Note: this treats NUMERIC alignment the same as LEFT alignment, which
+     * is somewhat conservative. However, it's pretty tricky at this point to
+     * figure out exactly where the damn decimal point will be.
      */
 
     if (tabX > x) {
@@ -5134,8 +7975,8 @@ SizeOfTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, x, maxX)
 	result = 0;
     }
 
-    done:
-    MeasureChars(textPtr->tkfont, " ", 1, 0, -1, 0, &spaceWidth);
+  done:
+    MeasureChars(textPtr->tkfont, " ", 1, 0, 1, 0, -1, 0, &spaceWidth);
     if (result < spaceWidth) {
 	result = spaceWidth;
     }
@@ -5147,10 +7988,10 @@ SizeOfTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, x, maxX)
  *
  * NextTabStop --
  *
- *	Given the current position, determine where the next default
- *	tab stop would be located.  This procedure is called when the
- *	current chunk in the text has no tabs defined and so the default
- *	tab spacing for the font should be used.
+ *	Given the current position, determine where the next default tab stop
+ *	would be located. This function is called when the current chunk in
+ *	the text has no tabs defined and so the default tab spacing for the
+ *	font should be used, provided we are using wordprocessor style tabs.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The location in pixels of the next tab stop.
@@ -5162,17 +8003,17 @@ SizeOfTab(textPtr, tabArrayPtr, index, x, maxX)
  */
 
 static int
-NextTabStop(tkfont, x, tabOrigin)
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font in which chunk that contains tab
-				 * stop will be drawn. */
-    int x;			/* X-position in pixels where last
-				 * character was drawn.  The next tab stop
-				 * occurs somewhere after this location. */
-    int tabOrigin;		/* The origin for tab stops.  May be
-				 * non-zero if text has been scrolled. */
+NextTabStop(
+    Tk_Font tkfont,		/* Font in which chunk that contains tab stop
+				 * will be drawn. */
+    int x,			/* X-position in pixels where last character
+				 * was drawn. The next tab stop occurs
+				 * somewhere after this location. */
+    int tabOrigin)		/* The origin for tab stops. May be non-zero
+				 * if text has been scrolled. */
 {
     int tabWidth, rem;
-    
+
     tabWidth = Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, "0", 1) * 8;
     if (tabWidth == 0) {
 	tabWidth = 1;
@@ -5190,26 +8031,24 @@ NextTabStop(tkfont, x, tabOrigin)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- *  MeasureChars --
+ * MeasureChars --
  *
- *	Determine the number of characters from the string that will fit
- *	in the given horizontal span.  The measurement is done under the
- *	assumption that Tk_DrawTextLayout will be used to actually display
- *	the characters.
+ *	Determine the number of characters from the string that will fit in
+ *	the given horizontal span. The measurement is done under the
+ *	assumption that Tk_DrawChars will be used to actually display the
+ *	characters.
  *
- *	If tabs are encountered in the string, they will be expanded
- *	to the next tab stop, unless the TK_IGNORE_TABS flag is specified.
+ *	If tabs are encountered in the string, they will be ignored (they
+ *	should only occur as last character of the string anyway).
  *
- *	If a newline is encountered in the string, the line will be
- *	broken at that point, unless the TK_NEWSLINES_NOT_SPECIAL flag
- *	is specified.  
+ *	If a newline is encountered in the string, the line will be broken at
+ *	that point.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the number of bytes from source
- *	that fit in the span given by startX and maxX.  *nextXPtr
- *	is filled in with the x-coordinate at which the first
- *	character that didn't fit would be drawn, if it were to
- *	be drawn.
+ *	The return value is the number of bytes from the range of start to end
+ *	in source that fit in the span given by startX and maxX. *nextXPtr is
+ *	filled in with the x-coordinate at which the first character that
+ *	didn't fit would be drawn, if it were to be drawn.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5218,29 +8057,31 @@ NextTabStop(tkfont, x, tabOrigin)
  */
 
 static int
-MeasureChars(tkfont, source, maxBytes, startX, maxX, tabOrigin, nextXPtr)
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font in which to draw characters. */
-    CONST char *source;		/* Characters to be displayed.  Need not
-				 * be NULL-terminated. */
-    int maxBytes;		/* Maximum # of bytes to consider from
+MeasureChars(
+    Tk_Font tkfont,		/* Font in which to draw characters. */
+    CONST char *source,		/* Characters to be displayed. Need not be
+				 * NULL-terminated. */
+    int maxBytes,		/* Maximum # of bytes to consider from
 				 * source. */
-    int startX;			/* X-position at which first character will
-				 * be drawn. */
-    int maxX;			/* Don't consider any character that would
+    int rangeStart, int rangeLength,
+				/* Range of bytes to consider in source.*/
+    int startX,			/* X-position at which first character will be
+				 * drawn. */
+    int maxX,			/* Don't consider any character that would
 				 * cross this x-position. */
-    int tabOrigin;		/* X-location that serves as "origin" for
-				 * tab stops. */
-    int *nextXPtr;		/* Return x-position of terminating
-				 * character here. */
+    int flags,			/* Flags to pass to Tk_MeasureChars. */
+    int *nextXPtr)		/* Return x-position of terminating character
+				 * here. */
 {
     int curX, width, ch;
     CONST char *special, *end, *start;
 
     ch = 0;			/* lint. */
     curX = startX;
-    special = source;
-    end = source + maxBytes;
-    for (start = source; start < end; ) {
+    start = source + rangeStart;
+    end = start + rangeLength;
+    special = start;
+    while (start < end) {
 	if (start >= special) {
 	    /*
 	     * Find the next special character in the string.
@@ -5256,14 +8097,21 @@ MeasureChars(tkfont, source, maxBytes, startX, maxX, tabOrigin, nextXPtr)
 
 	/*
 	 * Special points at the next special character (or the end of the
-	 * string).  Process characters between start and special.
+	 * string). Process characters between start and special.
 	 */
 
 	if ((maxX >= 0) && (curX >= maxX)) {
 	    break;
 	}
-	start += Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, start, special - start, maxX - curX,
-		0, &width);
+#if TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT
+	start += TkpMeasureCharsInContext(tkfont, source, maxBytes,
+		start - source, special - start,
+		maxX >= 0 ? maxX - curX : -1, flags, &width);
+#else
+	(void) maxBytes;
+	start += Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, start, special - start,
+		maxX >= 0 ? maxX - curX : -1, flags, &width);
+#endif /* TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */
 	curX += width;
 	if (start < special) {
 	    /*
@@ -5282,5 +8130,378 @@ MeasureChars(tkfont, source, maxBytes, startX, maxX, tabOrigin, nextXPtr)
     }
 
     *nextXPtr = curX;
-    return start - source;
+    return start - (source+rangeStart);
 }
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TextGetScrollInfoObj --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked to parse "xview" and "yview" scrolling
+ *	commands for text widgets using the new scrolling command syntax
+ *	("moveto" or "scroll" options). It extends the public
+ *	Tk_GetScrollInfoObj function with the addition of "pixels" as a valid
+ *	unit alongside "pages" and "units". It is a shame the core API isn't
+ *	more flexible in this regard.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is either TKTEXT_SCROLL_MOVETO, TKTEXT_SCROLL_PAGES,
+ *	TKTEXT_SCROLL_UNITS, TKTEXT_SCROLL_PIXELS or TKTEXT_SCROLL_ERROR. This
+ *	indicates whether the command was successfully parsed and what form
+ *	the command took. If TKTEXT_SCROLL_MOVETO, *dblPtr is filled in with
+ *	the desired position; if TKTEXT_SCROLL_PAGES, TKTEXT_SCROLL_PIXELS or
+ *	TKTEXT_SCROLL_UNITS, *intPtr is filled in with the number of
+ *	pages/pixels/lines to move (may be negative); if TKTEXT_SCROLL_ERROR,
+ *	the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+TextGetScrollInfoObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about the text widget. */
+    int objc,			/* # arguments for command. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Arguments for command. */
+    double *dblPtr,		/* Filled in with argument "moveto" option, if
+				 * any. */
+    int *intPtr)		/* Filled in with number of pages or lines or
+				 * pixels to scroll, if any. */
+{
+    static CONST char *subcommands[] = {
+	"moveto", "scroll", NULL
+    };
+    enum viewSubcmds {
+	VIEW_MOVETO, VIEW_SCROLL
+    };
+    static CONST char *units[] = {
+	"units", "pages", "pixels", NULL
+    };
+    enum viewUnits {
+	VIEW_SCROLL_UNITS, VIEW_SCROLL_PAGES, VIEW_SCROLL_PIXELS
+    };
+    int index;
+
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], subcommands, "option", 0,
+	    &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TKTEXT_SCROLL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    switch ((enum viewSubcmds) index) {
+    case VIEW_MOVETO:
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "fraction");
+	    return TKTEXT_SCROLL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[3], dblPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TKTEXT_SCROLL_ERROR;
+	}
+	return TKTEXT_SCROLL_MOVETO;
+    case VIEW_SCROLL:
+	if (objc != 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "number units|pages|pixels");
+	    return TKTEXT_SCROLL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[4], units, "argument", 0,
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TKTEXT_SCROLL_ERROR;
+	}
+	switch ((enum viewUnits) index) {
+	case VIEW_SCROLL_PAGES:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], intPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TKTEXT_SCROLL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    return TKTEXT_SCROLL_PAGES;
+	case VIEW_SCROLL_PIXELS:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, textPtr->tkwin, objv[3],
+		    intPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TKTEXT_SCROLL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    return TKTEXT_SCROLL_PIXELS;
+	case VIEW_SCROLL_UNITS:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], intPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TKTEXT_SCROLL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    return TKTEXT_SCROLL_UNITS;
+	}
+    }
+    Tcl_Panic("unexpected switch fallthrough");
+    return TKTEXT_SCROLL_ERROR;
+}
+
+#if TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * FinalizeBaseChunk --
+ *
+ *	This procedure makes sure that all the chunks of the stretch are
+ *	up-to-date. It is invoked when the LayoutProc has been called for all
+ *	chunks and the base chunk is stable.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The CharInfo.chars of all dependent chunks point into
+ *	BaseCharInfo.baseChars for easy access (and compatibility).
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+FinalizeBaseChunk(
+    TkTextDispChunk *addChunkPtr)
+				/* An additional chunk to add to the stretch,
+				 * even though it may not be in the linked
+				 * list yet. Used by the LayoutProc, otherwise
+				 * NULL. */
+{
+    const char *baseChars;
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;
+    CharInfo *ciPtr;
+#if TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT
+    int widthAdjust = 0;
+    int newwidth;
+#endif /* TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */
+
+    if (baseCharChunkPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    baseChars = Tcl_DStringValue(
+	    &((BaseCharInfo *) baseCharChunkPtr->clientData)->baseChars);
+
+    for (chunkPtr = baseCharChunkPtr; chunkPtr != NULL;
+	    chunkPtr = chunkPtr->nextPtr) {
+#if TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT
+	chunkPtr->x += widthAdjust;
+#endif /* TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */
+
+	if (chunkPtr->displayProc != CharDisplayProc) {
+	    continue;
+	}
+	ciPtr = (CharInfo *)chunkPtr->clientData;
+	if (ciPtr->baseChunkPtr != baseCharChunkPtr) {
+	    break;
+	}
+	ciPtr->chars = baseChars + ciPtr->baseOffset;
+
+#if TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT
+	newwidth = 0;
+	CharChunkMeasureChars(chunkPtr, NULL, 0, 0, -1, 0, -1, 0, &newwidth);
+	if (newwidth != chunkPtr->width) {
+	    widthAdjust += newwidth - chunkPtr->width;
+	    chunkPtr->width = newwidth;
+	}
+#endif /* TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */
+    }
+
+    if (addChunkPtr != NULL) {
+	ciPtr = (CharInfo *)addChunkPtr->clientData;
+	ciPtr->chars = baseChars + ciPtr->baseOffset;
+
+#if TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT
+	addChunkPtr->x += widthAdjust;
+	CharChunkMeasureChars(addChunkPtr, NULL, 0, 0, -1, 0, -1, 0,
+		&addChunkPtr->width);
+#endif /* TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */
+    }
+
+    baseCharChunkPtr = NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * FreeBaseChunk --
+ *
+ *	This procedure makes sure that all the chunks of the stretch are
+ *	disconnected from the base chunk and the base chunk specific data is
+ *	freed. It is invoked from the UndisplayProc. The procedure doesn't
+ *	ckfree the base chunk clientData itself, that's up to the main
+ *	UndisplayProc.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The CharInfo.chars of all dependent chunks are set to NULL. Memory
+ *	that belongs specifically to the base chunk is freed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+FreeBaseChunk(
+    TkTextDispChunk *baseChunkPtr)
+				/* The base chunk of the stretch and head of
+				 * the linked list. */
+{
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;
+    CharInfo *ciPtr;
+
+    if (baseCharChunkPtr == baseChunkPtr) {
+	baseCharChunkPtr = NULL;
+    }
+
+    for (chunkPtr=baseChunkPtr; chunkPtr!=NULL; chunkPtr=chunkPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (chunkPtr->undisplayProc != CharUndisplayProc) {
+	    continue;
+	}
+	ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData;
+	if (ciPtr->baseChunkPtr != baseChunkPtr) {
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	ciPtr->baseChunkPtr = NULL;
+	ciPtr->chars = NULL;
+    }
+
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&((BaseCharInfo *) baseChunkPtr->clientData)->baseChars);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * IsSameFGStyle --
+ *
+ *	Compare the foreground attributes of two styles. Specifically must
+ *	consider: foreground color, font, font style and font decorations,
+ *	elide, "offset" and foreground stipple. Do *not* consider: background
+ *	color, border, relief or background stipple.
+ *
+ *	If we use TkpDrawCharsInContext(), we also don't need to check
+ *	foreground color, font decorations, elide, offset and foreground
+ *	stipple, so all that is left is font (including font size and font
+ *	style) and "offset".
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	1 if the two styles match, 0 otherwise.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+IsSameFGStyle(
+    TextStyle *style1,
+    TextStyle *style2)
+{
+    StyleValues *sv1;
+    StyleValues *sv2;
+
+    if (style1 == style2) {
+	return 1;
+    }
+
+#if !TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT
+    if (
+#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
+	    !TkMacOSXCompareColors(style1->fgGC->foreground,
+		    style2->fgGC->foreground)
+#else
+	    style1->fgGC->foreground != style2->fgGC->foreground
+#endif
+	    ) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+#endif /* !TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */
+
+    sv1 = style1->sValuePtr;
+    sv2 = style2->sValuePtr;
+
+#if TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT
+    return sv1->tkfont == sv2->tkfont && sv1->offset == sv2->offset;
+#else
+    return sv1->tkfont == sv2->tkfont
+	    && sv1->underline == sv2->underline
+	    && sv1->overstrike == sv2->overstrike
+	    && sv1->elide == sv2->elide
+	    && sv1->offset == sv2->offset
+	    && sv1->fgStipple == sv1->fgStipple;
+#endif /* TK_DRAW_IN_CONTEXT */
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * RemoveFromBaseChunk --
+ *
+ *	This procedure removes a chunk from the stretch as a result of
+ *	UndisplayProc. The chunk in question should be the last in a stretch.
+ *	This happens during re-layouting of the break position.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The characters that belong to this chunk are removed from the base
+ *	chunk. It is assumed that LayoutProc and FinalizeBaseChunk are called
+ *	next to repair any damage that this causes to the integrity of the
+ *	stretch and the other chunks. For that reason the base chunk is also
+ *	put into baseCharChunkPtr automatically, so that LayoutProc can resume
+ *	correctly.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+RemoveFromBaseChunk(
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr)	/* The chunk to remove from the end of the
+				 * stretch. */
+{
+    CharInfo *ciPtr;
+    BaseCharInfo *bciPtr;
+
+    if (chunkPtr->displayProc != CharDisplayProc) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+	fprintf(stderr,"RemoveFromBaseChunk called with wrong chunk type\n");
+#endif
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Reinstitute this base chunk for re-layout.
+     */
+
+    ciPtr = (CharInfo *) chunkPtr->clientData;
+    baseCharChunkPtr = ciPtr->baseChunkPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Remove the chunk data from the base chunk data.
+     */
+
+    bciPtr = (BaseCharInfo *) baseCharChunkPtr->clientData;
+
+    if ((ciPtr->baseOffset + ciPtr->numBytes)
+	    != Tcl_DStringLength(&bciPtr->baseChars)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS
+	fprintf(stderr,"RemoveFromBaseChunk called with wrong chunk "
+		"(not last)\n");
+#endif
+    }
+
+    Tcl_DStringSetLength(&bciPtr->baseChars, ciPtr->baseOffset);
+
+    /*
+     * Invalidate the stored pixel width of the base chunk.
+     */
+
+    bciPtr->width = -1;
+}
+#endif /* TK_LAYOUT_WITH_BASE_CHUNKS */
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkTextImage.c b/generic/tkTextImage.c
index 57d444f..bc2b7c4 100644
--- a/generic/tkTextImage.c
+++ b/generic/tkTextImage.c
@@ -1,120 +1,111 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkImage.c --
  *
- *	This file contains code that allows images to be
- *	nested inside text widgets.  It also implements the "image"
- *	widget command for texts.
+ *	This file contains code that allows images to be nested inside text
+ *	widgets. It also implements the "image" widget command for texts.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tk.h"
-#include "tkText.h"
 #include "tkPort.h"
-
-/*
- * Definitions for alignment values:
- */
-
-#define ALIGN_BOTTOM		0
-#define ALIGN_CENTER		1
-#define ALIGN_TOP		2
-#define ALIGN_BASELINE		3
+#include "tkText.h"
 
 /*
  * Macro that determines the size of an embedded image segment:
  */
 
-#define EI_SEG_SIZE ((unsigned) (Tk_Offset(TkTextSegment, body) \
-	+ sizeof(TkTextEmbImage)))
+#define EI_SEG_SIZE \
+	((unsigned) (Tk_Offset(TkTextSegment, body) + sizeof(TkTextEmbImage)))
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static int		AlignParseProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset));
-static char *		AlignPrintProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset,
-			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
-static TkTextSegment *	EmbImageCleanupProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr));
-static void		EmbImageCheckProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr));
-static void		EmbImageBboxProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,
-			    int index, int y, int lineHeight, int baseline,
-			    int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr,
-			    int *heightPtr));
-static int		EmbImageConfigure _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextSegment *eiPtr, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-static int		EmbImageDeleteProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int treeGone));
-static void		EmbImageDisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
+static TkTextSegment *	EmbImageCleanupProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+static void		EmbImageCheckProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+static void		EmbImageBboxProc(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int index, int y,
+			    int lineHeight, int baseline, int *xPtr, int *yPtr,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+static int		EmbImageConfigure(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextSegment *eiPtr, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static int		EmbImageDeleteProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int treeGone);
+static void		EmbImageDisplayProc(TkText *textPtr,
 			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x, int y,
 			    int lineHeight, int baseline, Display *display,
-			    Drawable dst, int screenY));
-static int		EmbImageLayoutProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
+			    Drawable dst, int screenY);
+static int		EmbImageLayoutProc(TkText *textPtr,
 			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, TkTextSegment *segPtr,
 			    int offset, int maxX, int maxChars,
 			    int noCharsYet, TkWrapMode wrapMode,
-			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr));
-static void		EmbImageProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height,
-			    int imageWidth, int imageHeight));
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr);
+static void		EmbImageProc(ClientData clientData, int x, int y,
+			    int width, int height, int imageWidth,
+			    int imageHeight);
 
 /*
  * The following structure declares the "embedded image" segment type.
  */
 
-static Tk_SegType tkTextEmbImageType = {
-    "image",					/* name */
-    0,						/* leftGravity */
-    (Tk_SegSplitProc *) NULL,			/* splitProc */
-    EmbImageDeleteProc,				/* deleteProc */
-    EmbImageCleanupProc,			/* cleanupProc */
-    (Tk_SegLineChangeProc *) NULL,		/* lineChangeProc */
-    EmbImageLayoutProc,				/* layoutProc */
-    EmbImageCheckProc				/* checkProc */
+static const Tk_SegType tkTextEmbImageType = {
+    "image",			/* name */
+    0,				/* leftGravity */
+    NULL,			/* splitProc */
+    EmbImageDeleteProc,		/* deleteProc */
+    EmbImageCleanupProc,	/* cleanupProc */
+    NULL,			/* lineChangeProc */
+    EmbImageLayoutProc,		/* layoutProc */
+    EmbImageCheckProc		/* checkProc */
 };
 
 /*
+ * Definitions for alignment values:
+ */
+
+static const char *alignStrings[] = {
+    "baseline", "bottom", "center", "top", NULL
+};
+
+typedef enum {
+    ALIGN_BASELINE, ALIGN_BOTTOM, ALIGN_CENTER, ALIGN_TOP
+} alignMode;
+
+/*
  * Information used for parsing image configuration options:
  */
 
-static Tk_CustomOption alignOption = {AlignParseProc, AlignPrintProc,
-	(ClientData) NULL};
-
-static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-align", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"center", 0, TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &alignOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-padx", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"0", Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, padX),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, "-pady", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"0", Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, padY),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-image", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, imageString),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-name", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, imageName),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-align", NULL, NULL,
+	"center", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, align),
+	0, (ClientData) alignStrings, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", NULL, NULL,
+	"0", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, padX), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", NULL, NULL,
+	"0", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, padY), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, imageString),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-name", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, imageName),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_END}
 };
+
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkTextImageCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "image" widget command
- *	for text widgets.  See the user documentation for details
- *	on what it does.
+ *	This function implements the "image" widget command for text widgets.
+ *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result or error.
@@ -126,100 +117,121 @@ static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
  */
 
 int
-TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
-    register TkText *textPtr;	/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Argument strings.  Someone else has already
+TkTextImageCmd(
+    register TkText *textPtr,	/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. Someone else has already
 				 * parsed this command enough to know that
-				 * argv[1] is "image". */
+				 * objv[1] is "image". */
 {
-    size_t length;
+    int idx;
     register TkTextSegment *eiPtr;
-
-    if (argc < 3) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		argv[0], " image option ?arg arg ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+    TkTextIndex index;
+    static const char *optionStrings[] = {
+	"cget", "configure", "create", "names", NULL
+    };
+    enum opts {
+	CMD_CGET, CMD_CONF, CMD_CREATE, CMD_NAMES
+    };
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], optionStrings, "option", 0,
+	    &idx) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    length = strlen(argv[2]);
-    if ((strncmp(argv[2], "cget", length) == 0) && (length >= 2)) {
-	TkTextIndex index;
-	TkTextSegment *eiPtr;
-
-	if (argc != 5) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " image cget index option\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+    switch ((enum opts) idx) {
+    case CMD_CGET: {
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+
+	if (objc != 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index option");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	eiPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&index, (int *) NULL);
+	eiPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&index, NULL);
 	if (eiPtr->typePtr != &tkTextEmbImageType) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no embedded image at index \"",
-		    argv[3], "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "\"", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) &eiPtr->body.ei,
+		eiPtr->body.ei.optionTable, objv[4], textPtr->tkwin);
+	if (objPtr == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
-	return Tk_ConfigureValue(interp, textPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
-		(char *) &eiPtr->body.ei, argv[4], 0);
-    } else if ((strncmp(argv[2], "configure", length) == 0) && (length >= 2)) {
-	TkTextIndex index;
-	TkTextSegment *eiPtr;
-
-	if (argc < 4) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " image configure index ?option value ...?\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+    }
+    case CMD_CONF:
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index ?option value ...?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	eiPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&index, (int *) NULL);
+	eiPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&index, NULL);
 	if (eiPtr->typePtr != &tkTextEmbImageType) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no embedded image at index \"",
-		    argv[3], "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "\"", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (argc == 4) {
-	    return Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, textPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
-		    (char *) &eiPtr->body.ei, (char *) NULL, 0);
-	} else if (argc == 5) {
-	    return Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, textPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
-		    (char *) &eiPtr->body.ei, argv[4], 0);
+	if (objc <= 5) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp,
+		    (char *) &eiPtr->body.ei, eiPtr->body.ei.optionTable,
+		    (objc == 5) ? objv[4] : NULL, textPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+		return TCL_OK;
+	    }
 	} else {
-	    TkTextChanged(textPtr, &index, &index);
-	    return EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, argc-4, argv+4);
+	    TkTextChanged(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index, &index);
+
+	    /*
+	     * It's probably not true that all window configuration can change
+	     * the line height, so we could be more efficient here and only
+	     * call this when necessary.
+	     */
+
+	    TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+		    index.linePtr, 0, TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
+	    return EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, objc-4, objv+4);
 	}
-    } else if ((strncmp(argv[2], "create", length) == 0) && (length >= 2)) {
-	TkTextIndex index;
+    case CMD_CREATE: {
 	int lineIndex;
 
 	/*
-	 * Add a new image.  Find where to put the new image, and
-	 * mark that position for redisplay.
+	 * Add a new image. Find where to put the new image, and mark that
+	 * position for redisplay.
 	 */
 
-	if (argc < 4) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " image create index ?option value ...?\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index ?option value ...?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	/*
 	 * Don't allow insertions on the last (dummy) line of the text.
 	 */
-    
-	lineIndex = TkBTreeLineIndex(index.linePtr);
-	if (lineIndex == TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree)) {
+
+	lineIndex = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, index.linePtr);
+	if (lineIndex == TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+		textPtr)) {
 	    lineIndex--;
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineIndex, 1000000, &index);
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		    lineIndex, 1000000, &index);
 	}
 
 	/*
@@ -229,7 +241,7 @@ TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 	eiPtr = (TkTextSegment *) ckalloc(EI_SEG_SIZE);
 	eiPtr->typePtr = &tkTextEmbImageType;
 	eiPtr->size = 1;
-	eiPtr->body.ei.textPtr = textPtr;
+	eiPtr->body.ei.sharedTextPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr;
 	eiPtr->body.ei.linePtr = NULL;
 	eiPtr->body.ei.imageName = NULL;
 	eiPtr->body.ei.imageString = NULL;
@@ -238,42 +250,45 @@ TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 	eiPtr->body.ei.align = ALIGN_CENTER;
 	eiPtr->body.ei.padX = eiPtr->body.ei.padY = 0;
 	eiPtr->body.ei.chunkCount = 0;
+	eiPtr->body.ei.optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
 
 	/*
-	 * Link the segment into the text widget, then configure it (delete
-	 * it again if the configuration fails).
+	 * Link the segment into the text widget, then configure it (delete it
+	 * again if the configuration fails).
 	 */
 
-	TkTextChanged(textPtr, &index, &index);
+	TkTextChanged(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index, &index);
 	TkBTreeLinkSegment(eiPtr, &index);
-	if (EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, argc-4, argv+4) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, objc-4, objv+4) != TCL_OK) {
 	    TkTextIndex index2;
 
-	    TkTextIndexForwChars(&index, 1, &index2);
-	    TkBTreeDeleteChars(&index, &index2);
+	    TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, &index, 1, &index2, COUNT_INDICES);
+	    TkBTreeDeleteIndexRange(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, &index, &index2);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-    } else if (strncmp(argv[2], "names", length) == 0) {
+	TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+		index.linePtr, 0, TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+    case CMD_NAMES: {
 	Tcl_HashSearch search;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 
-	if (argc != 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " image names\"", (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->imageTable, &search);
-		hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->imageTable,
+		&search); hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp,
-		    Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->markTable, hPtr));
+		    Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable, hPtr));
 	}
-    } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad image option \"", argv[2],
-		"\": must be cget, configure, create, or names",
-		(char *) NULL);
-	return TCL_ERROR;
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
-    return TCL_OK;
+    default:
+	Tcl_Panic("unexpected switch fallthrough");
+    }
+    return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -281,55 +296,54 @@ TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * EmbImageConfigure --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to handle configuration options
- *	for an embedded image, using an argc/argv list.
+ *	This function is called to handle configuration options for an
+ *	embedded image, using an objc/objv list.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message..
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message..
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information for the embedded image changes,
- *	such as alignment, or name of the image.
+ *	Configuration information for the embedded image changes, such as
+ *	alignment, or name of the image.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, argc, argv)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget that
-				 * contains embedded image. */
-    TkTextSegment *eiPtr;	/* Embedded image to be configured. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of strings in argv. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Array of strings describing configuration
+EmbImageConfigure(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget that contains
+				 * embedded image. */
+    TkTextSegment *eiPtr,	/* Embedded image to be configured. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of strings in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Array of strings describing configuration
 				 * options. */
 {
     Tk_Image image;
     Tcl_DString newName;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
-    int new;
     char *name;
     int count = 0;		/* The counter for picking a unique name */
     int conflict = 0;		/* True if we have a name conflict */
-    unsigned int len;		/* length of image name */
+    size_t len;		/* length of image name */
 
-    if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(textPtr->interp, textPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
-	    argc, argv, (char *) &eiPtr->body.ei,TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY)
-	    != TCL_OK) {
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(textPtr->interp, (char*)&eiPtr->body.ei,
+	    eiPtr->body.ei.optionTable,
+	    objc, objv, textPtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the image.  Save the old image around and don't free it
-     * until after the new one is allocated.  This keeps the reference
-     * count from going to zero so the image doesn't have to be recreated
-     * if it hasn't changed.
+     * Create the image. Save the old image around and don't free it until
+     * after the new one is allocated. This keeps the reference count from
+     * going to zero so the image doesn't have to be recreated if it hasn't
+     * changed.
      */
 
     if (eiPtr->body.ei.imageString != NULL) {
-	image = Tk_GetImage(textPtr->interp, textPtr->tkwin, eiPtr->body.ei.imageString,
-		EmbImageProc, (ClientData) eiPtr);
+	image = Tk_GetImage(textPtr->interp, textPtr->tkwin,
+		eiPtr->body.ei.imageString, EmbImageProc, (ClientData) eiPtr);
 	if (image == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
@@ -345,9 +359,9 @@ EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, argc, argv)
     	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    /* 
-     * Find a unique name for this image.  Use imageName (or imageString)
-     * if available, otherwise tack on a #nn and use it.  If a name is already
+    /*
+     * Find a unique name for this image. Use imageName (or imageString) if
+     * available, otherwise tack on a #nn and use it. If a name is already
      * associated with this image, delete the name.
      */
 
@@ -356,42 +370,50 @@ EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, argc, argv)
     	name = eiPtr->body.ei.imageString;
     }
     if (name == NULL) {
-        Tcl_AppendResult(textPtr->interp,"Either a \"-name\" ",
+	Tcl_AppendResult(textPtr->interp, "Either a \"-name\" ",
 		"or a \"-image\" argument must be provided ",
-		"to the \"image create\" subcommand.",
-		(char *) NULL);
+		"to the \"image create\" subcommand.", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     len = strlen(name);
-    for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->imageTable, &search);
-	    hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
-	char *haveName = Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->imageTable, hPtr);
+    for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->imageTable,
+	    &search); hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	char *haveName =
+		Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->imageTable, hPtr);
+
 	if (strncmp(name, haveName, len) == 0) {
-	    new = 0;
-	    sscanf(haveName+len,"#%d",&new);
-	    if (new > count) {
-		count = new;
+	    int newVal = 0;
+
+	    sscanf(haveName+len, "#%d", &newVal);
+	    if (newVal > count) {
+		count = newVal;
 	    }
-	    if (len == (int) strlen(haveName)) {
+	    if (len == strlen(haveName)) {
 	    	conflict = 1;
 	    }
 	}
     }
 
     Tcl_DStringInit(&newName);
-    Tcl_DStringAppend(&newName,name, -1);
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&newName, name, -1);
 
     if (conflict) {
     	char buf[4 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	sprintf(buf, "#%d",count+1);
-	Tcl_DStringAppend(&newName,buf, -1);
+
+	sprintf(buf, "#%d", count+1);
+	Tcl_DStringAppend(&newName, buf, -1);
     }
     name = Tcl_DStringValue(&newName);
-    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->imageTable, name, &new);
+    {
+	int dummy;
+
+	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->imageTable, name,
+		&dummy);
+    }
     Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, eiPtr);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(textPtr->interp, name , (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(textPtr->interp, name, NULL);
     eiPtr->body.ei.name = ckalloc((unsigned) Tcl_DStringLength(&newName)+1);
-    strcpy(eiPtr->body.ei.name,name);
+    strcpy(eiPtr->body.ei.name, name);
     Tcl_DStringFree(&newName);
 
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -400,103 +422,10 @@ EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, argc, argv)
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * AlignParseProc --
- *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk_ConfigureWidget during
- *	option processing to handle "-align" options for embedded
- *	images.
- *
- * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.
- *
- * Side effects:
- *	The alignment for the embedded image may change.
- *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
- */
-
-	/* ARGSUSED */
-static int
-AlignParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Not used.*/
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for reporting errors. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window for text widget. */
-    CONST char *value;			/* Value of option. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to TkTextEmbWindow
-					 * structure. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item (ignored). */
-{
-    register TkTextEmbImage *embPtr = (TkTextEmbImage *) widgRec;
-
-    if (strcmp(value, "baseline") == 0) {
-	embPtr->align = ALIGN_BASELINE;
-    } else if (strcmp(value, "bottom") == 0) {
-	embPtr->align = ALIGN_BOTTOM;
-    } else if (strcmp(value, "center") == 0) {
-	embPtr->align = ALIGN_CENTER;
-    } else if (strcmp(value, "top") == 0) {
-	embPtr->align = ALIGN_TOP;
-    } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad alignment \"", value,
-		"\": must be baseline, bottom, center, or top",
-		(char *) NULL);
-	return TCL_ERROR;
-    }
-    return TCL_OK;
-}
-
-/*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
- *
- * AlignPrintProc --
- *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk configuration code
- *	to produce a printable string for the "-align" configuration
- *	option for embedded images.
- *
- * Results:
- *	The return value is a string describing the embedded
- *	images's current alignment.
- *
- * Side effects:
- *	None.
- *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
- */
-
-	/* ARGSUSED */
-static char *
-AlignPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Ignored. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window for text widget. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to TkTextEmbImage
-					 * structure. */
-    int offset;				/* Ignored. */
-    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr;		/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
-					 * information about how to reclaim
-					 * storage for return string. */
-{
-    switch (((TkTextEmbImage *) widgRec)->align) {
-	case ALIGN_BASELINE:
-	    return "baseline";
-	case ALIGN_BOTTOM:
-	    return "bottom";
-	case ALIGN_CENTER:
-	    return "center";
-	case ALIGN_TOP:
-	    return "top";
-	default:
-	    return "??";
-    }
-}
-
-/*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
- *
  * EmbImageDeleteProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the text B-tree code whenever
- *	an embedded image lies in a range of characters being deleted.
+ *	This function is invoked by the text B-tree code whenever an embedded
+ *	image lies in a range of characters being deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns 0 to indicate that the deletion has been accepted.
@@ -510,17 +439,17 @@ AlignPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-EmbImageDeleteProc(eiPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
-    TkTextSegment *eiPtr;		/* Segment being deleted. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line containing segment. */
-    int treeGone;			/* Non-zero means the entire tree is
-					 * being deleted, so everything must
-					 * get cleaned up. */
+EmbImageDeleteProc(
+    TkTextSegment *eiPtr,	/* Segment being deleted. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr,	/* Line containing segment. */
+    int treeGone)		/* Non-zero means the entire tree is being
+				 * deleted, so everything must get cleaned
+				 * up. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 
     if (eiPtr->body.ei.image != NULL) {
-	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&eiPtr->body.ei.textPtr->imageTable,
+	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&eiPtr->body.ei.sharedTextPtr->imageTable,
 		eiPtr->body.ei.name);
 	if (hPtr != NULL) {
 	    /*
@@ -533,9 +462,15 @@ EmbImageDeleteProc(eiPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
 	}
 	Tk_FreeImage(eiPtr->body.ei.image);
     }
-    Tk_FreeOptions(configSpecs, (char *) &eiPtr->body.ei,
-	    eiPtr->body.ei.textPtr->display, 0);
-    if (eiPtr->body.ei.name != NULL) {
+
+    /*
+     * No need to supply a tkwin argument, since we have no window-specific
+     * options.
+     */
+
+    Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) &eiPtr->body.ei, eiPtr->body.ei.optionTable,
+	    NULL);
+    if (eiPtr->body.ei.name) {
 	ckfree(eiPtr->body.ei.name);
     }
     ckfree((char *) eiPtr);
@@ -547,9 +482,8 @@ EmbImageDeleteProc(eiPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
  *
  * EmbImageCleanupProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the B-tree code whenever a
- *	segment containing an embedded image is moved from one
- *	line to another.
+ *	This function is invoked by the B-tree code whenever a segment
+ *	containing an embedded image is moved from one line to another.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -561,9 +495,9 @@ EmbImageDeleteProc(eiPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
  */
 
 static TkTextSegment *
-EmbImageCleanupProc(eiPtr, linePtr)
-    TkTextSegment *eiPtr;		/* Mark segment that's being moved. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line that now contains segment. */
+EmbImageCleanupProc(
+    TkTextSegment *eiPtr,	/* Mark segment that's being moved. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Line that now contains segment. */
 {
     eiPtr->body.ei.linePtr = linePtr;
     return eiPtr;
@@ -574,12 +508,11 @@ EmbImageCleanupProc(eiPtr, linePtr)
  *
  * EmbImageLayoutProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is the "layoutProc" for embedded image
- *	segments.
+ *	This function is the "layoutProc" for embedded image segments.
  *
  * Results:
- *	1 is returned to indicate that the segment should be
- *	displayed.  The chunkPtr structure is filled in.
+ *	1 is returned to indicate that the segment should be displayed. The
+ *	chunkPtr structure is filled in.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None, except for filling in chunkPtr.
@@ -589,30 +522,30 @@ EmbImageCleanupProc(eiPtr, linePtr)
 
 	/*ARGSUSED*/
 static int
-EmbImageLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, eiPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
-	noCharsYet, wrapMode, chunkPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget being layed out. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Identifies first character in chunk. */
-    TkTextSegment *eiPtr;	/* Segment corresponding to indexPtr. */
-    int offset;			/* Offset within segPtr corresponding to
+EmbImageLayoutProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget being layed out. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr,	/* Identifies first character in chunk. */
+    TkTextSegment *eiPtr,	/* Segment corresponding to indexPtr. */
+    int offset,			/* Offset within segPtr corresponding to
 				 * indexPtr (always 0). */
-    int maxX;			/* Chunk must not occupy pixels at this
+    int maxX,			/* Chunk must not occupy pixels at this
 				 * position or higher. */
-    int maxChars;		/* Chunk must not include more than this
-				 * many characters. */
-    int noCharsYet;		/* Non-zero means no characters have been
+    int maxChars,		/* Chunk must not include more than this many
+				 * characters. */
+    int noCharsYet,		/* Non-zero means no characters have been
 				 * assigned to this line yet. */
-    TkWrapMode wrapMode;	/* Wrap mode to use for line: TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR,
-				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE, or TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD. */
-    register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;
-				/* Structure to fill in with information
-				 * about this chunk.  The x field has already
-				 * been set by the caller. */
+    TkWrapMode wrapMode,	/* Wrap mode to use for line:
+				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR, TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE, or
+				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD. */
+    register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr)
+				/* Structure to fill in with information about
+				 * this chunk. The x field has already been
+				 * set by the caller. */
 {
     int width, height;
 
     if (offset != 0) {
-	panic("Non-zero offset in EmbImageLayoutProc");
+	Tcl_Panic("Non-zero offset in EmbImageLayoutProc");
     }
 
     /*
@@ -637,8 +570,8 @@ EmbImageLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, eiPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
      */
 
     chunkPtr->displayProc = EmbImageDisplayProc;
-    chunkPtr->undisplayProc = (Tk_ChunkUndisplayProc *) NULL;
-    chunkPtr->measureProc = (Tk_ChunkMeasureProc *) NULL;
+    chunkPtr->undisplayProc = NULL;
+    chunkPtr->measureProc = NULL;
     chunkPtr->bboxProc = EmbImageBboxProc;
     chunkPtr->numBytes = 1;
     if (eiPtr->body.ei.align == ALIGN_BASELINE) {
@@ -663,29 +596,30 @@ EmbImageLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, eiPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
  *
  * EmbImageCheckProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the B-tree code to perform
- *	consistency checks on embedded images.
+ *	This function is invoked by the B-tree code to perform consistency
+ *	checks on embedded images.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The procedure panics if it detects anything wrong with
- *	the embedded image.
+ *	The function panics if it detects anything wrong with the embedded
+ *	image.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EmbImageCheckProc(eiPtr, linePtr)
-    TkTextSegment *eiPtr;		/* Segment to check. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line containing segment. */
+EmbImageCheckProc(
+    TkTextSegment *eiPtr,	/* Segment to check. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Line containing segment. */
 {
     if (eiPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
-	panic("EmbImageCheckProc: embedded image is last segment in line");
+	Tcl_Panic("EmbImageCheckProc: embedded image is last segment in line");
     }
     if (eiPtr->size != 1) {
-	panic("EmbImageCheckProc: embedded image has size %d", eiPtr->size);
+	Tcl_Panic("EmbImageCheckProc: embedded image has size %d",
+		eiPtr->size);
     }
 }
 
@@ -694,37 +628,35 @@ EmbImageCheckProc(eiPtr, linePtr)
  *
  * EmbImageDisplayProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the text displaying code
- *	when it is time to actually draw an embedded image
- *	chunk on the screen.
+ *	This function is invoked by the text displaying code when it is time
+ *	to actually draw an embedded image chunk on the screen.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The embedded image gets moved to the correct location
- *	and drawn onto the display.
+ *	The embedded image gets moved to the correct location and drawn onto
+ *	the display.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EmbImageDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, lineHeight, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk that is to be drawn. */
-    int x;				/* X-position in dst at which to
-					 * draw this chunk (differs from
-					 * the x-position in the chunk because
-					 * of scrolling). */
-    int y;				/* Top of rectangular bounding box
-					 * for line: tells where to draw this
-					 * chunk in dst (x-position is in
-					 * the chunk itself). */
-    int lineHeight;			/* Total height of line. */
-    int baseline;			/* Offset of baseline from y. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display to use for drawing. */
-    Drawable dst;			/* Pixmap or window in which to draw */
-    int screenY;			/* Y-coordinate in text window that
-					 * corresponds to y. */
+EmbImageDisplayProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,	/* Chunk that is to be drawn. */
+    int x,			/* X-position in dst at which to draw this
+				 * chunk (differs from the x-position in the
+				 * chunk because of scrolling). */
+    int y,			/* Top of rectangular bounding box for line:
+				 * tells where to draw this chunk in dst
+				 * (x-position is in the chunk itself). */
+    int lineHeight,		/* Total height of line. */
+    int baseline,		/* Offset of baseline from y. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display to use for drawing. */
+    Drawable dst,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw */
+    int screenY)		/* Y-coordinate in text window that
+				 * corresponds to y. */
 {
     TkTextSegment *eiPtr = (TkTextSegment *) chunkPtr->clientData;
     int lineX, imageX, imageY, width, height;
@@ -739,16 +671,15 @@ EmbImageDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, lineHeight, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Compute the image's location and size in the text widget, taking
-     * into account the align value for the image.
+     * Compute the image's location and size in the text widget, taking into
+     * account the align value for the image.
      */
 
-    EmbImageBboxProc(chunkPtr, 0, y, lineHeight, baseline, &lineX,
+    EmbImageBboxProc(textPtr, chunkPtr, 0, y, lineHeight, baseline, &lineX,
 	    &imageY, &width, &height);
     imageX = lineX - chunkPtr->x + x;
 
-    Tk_RedrawImage(image, 0, 0, width, height, dst,
-	    imageX, imageY);
+    Tk_RedrawImage(image, 0, 0, width, height, dst, imageX, imageY);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -756,17 +687,16 @@ EmbImageDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, lineHeight, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
  *
  * EmbImageBboxProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to compute the bounding box of
- *	the area occupied by an embedded image.
+ *	This function is called to compute the bounding box of the area
+ *	occupied by an embedded image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	There is no return value.  *xPtr and *yPtr are filled in
- *	with the coordinates of the upper left corner of the
- *	image, and *widthPtr and *heightPtr are filled in with
- *	the dimensions of the image in pixels.  Note:  not all
- *	of the returned bbox is necessarily visible on the screen
- *	(the rightmost part might be off-screen to the right,
- *	and the bottommost part might be off-screen to the bottom).
+ *	There is no return value. *xPtr and *yPtr are filled in with the
+ *	coordinates of the upper left corner of the image, and *widthPtr and
+ *	*heightPtr are filled in with the dimensions of the image in pixels.
+ *	Note: not all of the returned bbox is necessarily visible on the
+ *	screen (the rightmost part might be off-screen to the right, and the
+ *	bottommost part might be off-screen to the bottom).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -775,22 +705,22 @@ EmbImageDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, lineHeight, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
  */
 
 static void
-EmbImageBboxProc(chunkPtr, index, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr,
-	widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk containing desired char. */
-    int index;				/* Index of desired character within
-					 * the chunk. */
-    int y;				/* Topmost pixel in area allocated
-					 * for this line. */
-    int lineHeight;			/* Total height of line. */
-    int baseline;			/* Location of line's baseline, in
-					 * pixels measured down from y. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;			/* Gets filled in with coords of
-					 * character's upper-left pixel. */
-    int *widthPtr;			/* Gets filled in with width of
-					 * character, in pixels. */
-    int *heightPtr;			/* Gets filled in with height of
-					 * character, in pixels. */
+EmbImageBboxProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,	/* Chunk containing desired char. */
+    int index,			/* Index of desired character within the
+				 * chunk. */
+    int y,			/* Topmost pixel in area allocated for this
+				 * line. */
+    int lineHeight,		/* Total height of line. */
+    int baseline,		/* Location of line's baseline, in pixels
+				 * measured down from y. */
+    int *xPtr, int *yPtr,	/* Gets filled in with coords of character's
+				 * upper-left pixel. */
+    int *widthPtr,		/* Gets filled in with width of image, in
+				 * pixels. */
+    int *heightPtr)		/* Gets filled in with height of image, in
+				 * pixels. */
 {
     TkTextSegment *eiPtr = (TkTextSegment *) chunkPtr->clientData;
     Tk_Image image;
@@ -802,20 +732,22 @@ EmbImageBboxProc(chunkPtr, index, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr,
 	*widthPtr = 0;
 	*heightPtr = 0;
     }
+
     *xPtr = chunkPtr->x + eiPtr->body.ei.padX;
+
     switch (eiPtr->body.ei.align) {
-	case ALIGN_BOTTOM:
-	    *yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr - eiPtr->body.ei.padY);
-	    break;
-	case ALIGN_CENTER:
-	    *yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr)/2;
-	    break;
-	case ALIGN_TOP:
-	    *yPtr = y + eiPtr->body.ei.padY;
-	    break;
-	case ALIGN_BASELINE:
-	    *yPtr = y + (baseline - *heightPtr);
-	    break;
+    case ALIGN_BOTTOM:
+	*yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr - eiPtr->body.ei.padY);
+	break;
+    case ALIGN_CENTER:
+	*yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr)/2;
+	break;
+    case ALIGN_TOP:
+	*yPtr = y + eiPtr->body.ei.padY;
+	break;
+    case ALIGN_BASELINE:
+	*yPtr = y + (baseline - *heightPtr);
+	break;
     }
 }
 
@@ -824,14 +756,13 @@ EmbImageBboxProc(chunkPtr, index, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr,
  *
  * TkTextImageIndex --
  *
- *	Given the name of an embedded image within a text widget,
- *	returns an index corresponding to the image's position
- *	in the text.
+ *	Given the name of an embedded image within a text widget, returns an
+ *	index corresponding to the image's position in the text.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if there is an embedded image by
- *	the given name in the text widget, 0 otherwise.  If the
- *	image exists, *indexPtr is filled in with its index.
+ *	The return value is 1 if there is an embedded image by the given name
+ *	in the text widget, 0 otherwise. If the image exists, *indexPtr is
+ *	filled in with its index.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -840,20 +771,24 @@ EmbImageBboxProc(chunkPtr, index, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr,
  */
 
 int
-TkTextImageIndex(textPtr, name, indexPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget containing image. */
-    CONST char *name;			/* Name of image. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index information gets stored here. */
+TkTextImageIndex(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget containing image. */
+    const char *name,		/* Name of image. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Index information gets stored here. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     TkTextSegment *eiPtr;
 
-    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->imageTable, name);
+    if (textPtr == NULL) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->imageTable, name);
     if (hPtr == NULL) {
 	return 0;
     }
     eiPtr = (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-    indexPtr->tree = textPtr->tree;
+    indexPtr->tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
     indexPtr->linePtr = eiPtr->body.ei.linePtr;
     indexPtr->byteIndex = TkTextSegToOffset(eiPtr, indexPtr->linePtr);
     return 1;
@@ -864,8 +799,8 @@ TkTextImageIndex(textPtr, name, indexPtr)
  *
  * EmbImageProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the image code whenever an
- *	image or its contents changes.
+ *	This function is called by the image code whenever an image or its
+ *	contents changes.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -877,20 +812,37 @@ TkTextImageIndex(textPtr, name, indexPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-EmbImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth, imgHeight)
-    ClientData clientData;              /* Pointer to widget record. */
-    int x, y;                           /* Upper left pixel (within image)
-                                         * that must be redisplayed. */
-    int width, height;                  /* Dimensions of area to redisplay
-                                         * (may be <= 0). */
-    int imgWidth, imgHeight;            /* New dimensions of image. */
+EmbImageProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to widget record. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
+				 * be redisplayed. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be
+				 * <= 0). */
+    int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
 
 {
     TkTextSegment *eiPtr = (TkTextSegment *) clientData;
     TkTextIndex index;
 
-    index.tree = eiPtr->body.ei.textPtr->tree;
+    index.tree = eiPtr->body.ei.sharedTextPtr->tree;
     index.linePtr = eiPtr->body.ei.linePtr;
     index.byteIndex = TkTextSegToOffset(eiPtr, eiPtr->body.ei.linePtr);
-    TkTextChanged(eiPtr->body.ei.textPtr, &index, &index);
+    TkTextChanged(eiPtr->body.ei.sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index, &index);
+
+    /*
+     * It's probably not true that all image changes can change the line
+     * height, so we could be more efficient here and only call this when
+     * necessary.
+     */
+
+    TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(eiPtr->body.ei.sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+	    index.linePtr, 0, TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkTextIndex.c b/generic/tkTextIndex.c
index 714a47d..70c94db 100644
--- a/generic/tkTextIndex.c
+++ b/generic/tkTextIndex.c
@@ -1,18 +1,17 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkTextIndex.c --
  *
- *	This module provides procedures that manipulate indices for
- *	text widgets.
+ *	This module provides functions that manipulate indices for text
+ *	widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "default.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkText.h"
 
@@ -23,21 +22,354 @@
 #define LAST_CHAR 1000000
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Modifiers for index parsing: 'display', 'any' or nothing.
+ */
+
+#define TKINDEX_NONE	0
+#define TKINDEX_DISPLAY	1
+#define TKINDEX_ANY	2
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
+ */
+
+static CONST char *	ForwBack(TkText *textPtr, CONST char *string,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+static CONST char *	StartEnd(TkText *textPtr, CONST char *string,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+static int		GetIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkSharedText *sharedPtr,
+			    TkText *textPtr, CONST char *string,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int *canCachePtr);
+
+/*
+ * The "textindex" Tcl_Obj definition:
+ */
+
+static void		DupTextIndexInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *copyPtr);
+static void		FreeTextIndexInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *listPtr);
+static int		SetTextIndexFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		UpdateStringOfTextIndex(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+
+/*
+ * Accessor macros for the "textindex" type.
+ */
+
+#define GET_TEXTINDEX(objPtr) \
+	((TkTextIndex *) (objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1)
+#define GET_INDEXEPOCH(objPtr) \
+	(PTR2INT((objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2))
+#define SET_TEXTINDEX(objPtr, indexPtr) \
+	((objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) (indexPtr))
+#define SET_INDEXEPOCH(objPtr, epoch) \
+	((objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2 = INT2PTR(epoch))
+
+/*
+ * Define the 'textindex' object type, which Tk uses to represent indices in
+ * text widgets internally.
+ */
+
+Tcl_ObjType tkTextIndexType = {
+    "textindex",		/* name */
+    FreeTextIndexInternalRep,	/* freeIntRepProc */
+    DupTextIndexInternalRep,	/* dupIntRepProc */
+    NULL,			/* updateStringProc */
+    SetTextIndexFromAny		/* setFromAnyProc */
+};
+
+static void
+FreeTextIndexInternalRep(
+    Tcl_Obj *indexObjPtr)	/* TextIndex object with internal rep to
+				 * free. */
+{
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr = GET_TEXTINDEX(indexObjPtr);
+    if (indexPtr->textPtr != NULL) {
+	if (--indexPtr->textPtr->refCount == 0) {
+	    /*
+	     * The text widget has been deleted and we need to free it now.
+	     */
+
+	    ckfree((char *) (indexPtr->textPtr));
+	}
+    }
+    ckfree((char *) indexPtr);
+}
+
+static void
+DupTextIndexInternalRep(
+    Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,		/* TextIndex obj with internal rep to copy. */
+    Tcl_Obj *copyPtr)		/* TextIndex obj with internal rep to set. */
+{
+    int epoch;
+    TkTextIndex *dupIndexPtr, *indexPtr;
+
+    dupIndexPtr = (TkTextIndex *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextIndex));
+    indexPtr = GET_TEXTINDEX(srcPtr);
+    epoch = GET_INDEXEPOCH(srcPtr);
+
+    dupIndexPtr->tree = indexPtr->tree;
+    dupIndexPtr->linePtr = indexPtr->linePtr;
+    dupIndexPtr->byteIndex = indexPtr->byteIndex;
+    dupIndexPtr->textPtr = indexPtr->textPtr;
+    if (dupIndexPtr->textPtr != NULL) {
+	dupIndexPtr->textPtr->refCount++;
+    }
+    SET_TEXTINDEX(copyPtr, dupIndexPtr);
+    SET_INDEXEPOCH(copyPtr, epoch);
+    copyPtr->typePtr = &tkTextIndexType;
+}
+
+/*
+ * This will not be called except by TkTextNewIndexObj below. This is because
+ * if a TkTextIndex is no longer valid, it is not possible to regenerate the
+ * string representation.
  */
 
-static CONST char *	ForwBack _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *string,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-static CONST char *	StartEnd _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *string,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
+static void
+UpdateStringOfTextIndex(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    char buffer[TK_POS_CHARS];
+    register int len;
+
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr = GET_TEXTINDEX(objPtr);
+
+    len = TkTextPrintIndex(indexPtr->textPtr, indexPtr, buffer);
+
+    objPtr->bytes = ckalloc((unsigned) len + 1);
+    strcpy(objPtr->bytes, buffer);
+    objPtr->length = len;
+}
+
+static int
+SetTextIndexFromAny(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object to convert. */
+{
+    Tcl_AppendToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
+	    "can't convert value to textindex except via TkTextGetIndexFromObj API",
+	    -1);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * MakeObjIndex --
+ *
+ *	This function generates a Tcl_Obj description of an index, suitable
+ *	for reading in again later. If the 'textPtr' is NULL then we still
+ *	generate an index object, but it's internal description is deemed
+ *	non-cacheable, and therefore effectively useless (apart from as a
+ *	temporary memory storage). This is used for indices whose meaning is
+ *	very temporary (like @0,0 or the name of a mark or tag). The mapping
+ *	from such strings/objects to actual TkTextIndex pointers is not stable
+ *	to minor text widget changes which we do not track (we track
+ *	insertions and deletions).
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A pointer to an allocated TkTextIndex which will be freed
+ *	automatically when the Tcl_Obj is used for other purposes.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A small amount of memory is allocated.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static TkTextIndex *
+MakeObjIndex(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,		/* Object containing description of
+				 * position. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *origPtr)	/* Pointer to index. */
+{
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr = (TkTextIndex *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextIndex));
+
+    indexPtr->tree = origPtr->tree;
+    indexPtr->linePtr = origPtr->linePtr;
+    indexPtr->byteIndex = origPtr->byteIndex;
+    SET_TEXTINDEX(objPtr, indexPtr);
+    objPtr->typePtr = &tkTextIndexType;
+    indexPtr->textPtr = textPtr;
+
+    if (textPtr != NULL) {
+	textPtr->refCount++;
+	SET_INDEXEPOCH(objPtr, textPtr->sharedTextPtr->stateEpoch);
+    } else {
+	SET_INDEXEPOCH(objPtr, 0);
+    }
+    return indexPtr;
+}
+
+CONST TkTextIndex *
+TkTextGetIndexFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Use this for error reporting. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Object containing description of
+				 * position. */
+{
+    TkTextIndex index;
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr = NULL;
+    int cache;
+
+    if (objPtr->typePtr == &tkTextIndexType) {
+	int epoch;
+
+	indexPtr = GET_TEXTINDEX(objPtr);
+	epoch = GET_INDEXEPOCH(objPtr);
+
+	if (epoch == textPtr->sharedTextPtr->stateEpoch) {
+	    if (indexPtr->textPtr == textPtr) {
+		return indexPtr;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * The object is either not an index type or referred to a different text
+     * widget, or referred to the correct widget, but it is out of date (text
+     * has been added/deleted since).
+     */
+
+    if (GetIndex(interp, NULL, textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objPtr), &index,
+	    &cache) != TCL_OK) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    if (objPtr->typePtr != NULL) {
+	if (objPtr->bytes == NULL) {
+	    objPtr->typePtr->updateStringProc(objPtr);
+	}
+	if ((objPtr->typePtr->freeIntRepProc) != NULL) {
+	    (*objPtr->typePtr->freeIntRepProc)(objPtr);
+	}
+    }
+
+    return MakeObjIndex((cache ? textPtr : NULL), objPtr, &index);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkTextNewIndexObj --
+ *
+ *	This function generates a Tcl_Obj description of an index, suitable
+ *	for reading in again later. The index generated is effectively stable
+ *	to all except insertion/deletion operations on the widget.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A new Tcl_Obj with refCount zero.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A small amount of memory is allocated.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+Tcl_Obj *
+TkTextNewIndexObj(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget for this index */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr)/* Pointer to index. */
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *retVal;
+
+    retVal = Tcl_NewObj();
+    retVal->bytes = NULL;
+
+    /*
+     * Assumption that the above call returns an object with:
+     * retVal->typePtr == NULL
+     */
+
+    MakeObjIndex(textPtr, retVal, indexPtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Unfortunately, it isn't possible for us to regenerate the string
+     * representation so we have to create it here, while we can be sure the
+     * contents of the index are still valid.
+     */
+
+    UpdateStringOfTextIndex(retVal);
+    return retVal;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkTextMakePixelIndex --
+ *
+ *	Given a pixel index and a byte index, look things up in the B-tree and
+ *	fill in a TkTextIndex structure.
+ *
+ *	The valid input range for pixelIndex is from 0 to the number of pixels
+ *	in the widget-1. Anything outside that range will be rounded to the
+ *	closest acceptable value.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *
+ *	The structure at *indexPtr is filled in with information about the
+ *	character at pixelIndex (or the closest existing character, if the
+ *	specified one doesn't exist), and the number of excess pixels is
+ *	returned as a result. This means if the given pixel index is exactly
+ *	correct for the top-edge of the indexPtr, then zero will be returned,
+ *	and otherwise we will return the calculation 'desired pixelIndex' -
+ *	'actual pixel index of indexPtr'.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkTextMakePixelIndex(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* The Text Widget */
+    int pixelIndex,		/* Pixel-index of desired line (0 means first
+				 * pixel of first line of text). */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Structure to fill in. */
+{
+    int pixelOffset = 0;
+
+    indexPtr->tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
+    indexPtr->textPtr = textPtr;
+
+    if (pixelIndex < 0) {
+	pixelIndex = 0;
+    }
+    indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindPixelLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+	    textPtr, pixelIndex, &pixelOffset);
+
+    /*
+     * 'pixelIndex' was too large, so we try again, just to find the last
+     * pixel in the window.
+     */
+
+    if (indexPtr->linePtr == NULL) {
+	int lastMinusOne = TkBTreeNumPixels(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+		textPtr)-1;
+
+	indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindPixelLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+		textPtr, lastMinusOne, &pixelOffset);
+	indexPtr->byteIndex = 0;
+	return pixelOffset;
+    }
+    indexPtr->byteIndex = 0;
+
+    if (pixelOffset <= 0) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+    return TkTextMeasureDown(textPtr, indexPtr, pixelOffset);
+}
 
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkTextMakeByteIndex --
  *
- *	Given a line index and a byte index, look things up in the B-tree
- *	and fill in a TkTextIndex structure.
+ *	Given a line index and a byte index, look things up in the B-tree and
+ *	fill in a TkTextIndex structure.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The structure at *indexPtr is filled in with information about the
@@ -52,13 +384,14 @@ static CONST char *	StartEnd _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *string,
  */
 
 TkTextIndex *
-TkTextMakeByteIndex(tree, lineIndex, byteIndex, indexPtr)
-    TkTextBTree tree;		/* Tree that lineIndex and charIndex refer
+TkTextMakeByteIndex(
+    TkTextBTree tree,		/* Tree that lineIndex and byteIndex refer
 				 * to. */
-    int lineIndex;		/* Index of desired line (0 means first
-				 * line of text). */
-    int byteIndex;		/* Byte index of desired character. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Structure to fill in. */
+    CONST TkText *textPtr,
+    int lineIndex,		/* Index of desired line (0 means first line
+				 * of text). */
+    int byteIndex,		/* Byte index of desired character. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Structure to fill in. */
 {
     TkTextSegment *segPtr;
     int index;
@@ -73,9 +406,10 @@ TkTextMakeByteIndex(tree, lineIndex, byteIndex, indexPtr)
     if (byteIndex < 0) {
 	byteIndex = 0;
     }
-    indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, lineIndex);
+    indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, textPtr, lineIndex);
     if (indexPtr->linePtr == NULL) {
-	indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, TkBTreeNumLines(tree));
+	indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(tree, textPtr));
 	byteIndex = 0;
     }
     if (byteIndex == 0) {
@@ -84,19 +418,19 @@ TkTextMakeByteIndex(tree, lineIndex, byteIndex, indexPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Verify that the index is within the range of the line and points
-     * to a valid character boundary.  
+     * Verify that the index is within the range of the line and points to a
+     * valid character boundary.
      */
 
     index = 0;
     for (segPtr = indexPtr->linePtr->segPtr; ; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (segPtr == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * Use the index of the last character in the line.  Since
-	     * the last character on the line is guaranteed to be a '\n',
-	     * we can back up a constant sizeof(char) bytes.
+	     * Use the index of the last character in the line. Since the last
+	     * character on the line is guaranteed to be a '\n', we can back
+	     * up a constant sizeof(char) bytes.
 	     */
-	     
+
 	    indexPtr->byteIndex = index - sizeof(char);
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -105,7 +439,7 @@ TkTextMakeByteIndex(tree, lineIndex, byteIndex, indexPtr)
 	    if ((byteIndex > index) && (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType)) {
 		/*
 		 * Prevent UTF-8 character from being split up by ensuring
-		 * that byteIndex falls on a character boundary.  If index
+		 * that byteIndex falls on a character boundary. If index
 		 * falls in the middle of a UTF-8 character, it will be
 		 * adjusted to the end of that UTF-8 character.
 		 */
@@ -127,8 +461,8 @@ TkTextMakeByteIndex(tree, lineIndex, byteIndex, indexPtr)
  *
  * TkTextMakeCharIndex --
  *
- *	Given a line index and a character index, look things up in the
- *	B-tree and fill in a TkTextIndex structure.
+ *	Given a line index and a character index, look things up in the B-tree
+ *	and fill in a TkTextIndex structure.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The structure at *indexPtr is filled in with information about the
@@ -143,13 +477,14 @@ TkTextMakeByteIndex(tree, lineIndex, byteIndex, indexPtr)
  */
 
 TkTextIndex *
-TkTextMakeCharIndex(tree, lineIndex, charIndex, indexPtr)
-    TkTextBTree tree;		/* Tree that lineIndex and charIndex refer
+TkTextMakeCharIndex(
+    TkTextBTree tree,		/* Tree that lineIndex and charIndex refer
 				 * to. */
-    int lineIndex;		/* Index of desired line (0 means first
-				 * line of text). */
-    int charIndex;		/* Index of desired character. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Structure to fill in. */
+    TkText *textPtr,
+    int lineIndex,		/* Index of desired line (0 means first line
+				 * of text). */
+    int charIndex,		/* Index of desired character. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Structure to fill in. */
 {
     register TkTextSegment *segPtr;
     char *p, *start, *end;
@@ -164,26 +499,27 @@ TkTextMakeCharIndex(tree, lineIndex, charIndex, indexPtr)
     if (charIndex < 0) {
 	charIndex = 0;
     }
-    indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, lineIndex);
+    indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, textPtr, lineIndex);
     if (indexPtr->linePtr == NULL) {
-	indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, TkBTreeNumLines(tree));
+	indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(tree, textPtr));
 	charIndex = 0;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Verify that the index is within the range of the line.
-     * If not, just use the index of the last character in the line.
+     * Verify that the index is within the range of the line. If not, just use
+     * the index of the last character in the line.
      */
 
     index = 0;
     for (segPtr = indexPtr->linePtr->segPtr; ; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (segPtr == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * Use the index of the last character in the line.  Since
-	     * the last character on the line is guaranteed to be a '\n',
-	     * we can back up a constant sizeof(char) bytes.
+	     * Use the index of the last character in the line. Since the last
+	     * character on the line is guaranteed to be a '\n', we can back
+	     * up a constant sizeof(char) bytes.
 	     */
-	     
+
 	    indexPtr->byteIndex = index - sizeof(char);
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -220,14 +556,14 @@ TkTextMakeCharIndex(tree, lineIndex, charIndex, indexPtr)
  *
  * TkTextIndexToSeg --
  *
- *	Given an index, this procedure returns the segment and offset
- *	within segment for the index.
+ *	Given an index, this function returns the segment and offset within
+ *	segment for the index.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the segment referred to by
- *	indexPtr; this will always be a segment with non-zero size.  The
- *	variable at *offsetPtr is set to hold the integer offset within
- *	the segment of the character given by indexPtr.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the segment referred to by indexPtr;
+ *	this will always be a segment with non-zero size. The variable at
+ *	*offsetPtr is set to hold the integer offset within the segment of the
+ *	character given by indexPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -236,9 +572,9 @@ TkTextMakeCharIndex(tree, lineIndex, charIndex, indexPtr)
  */
 
 TkTextSegment *
-TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, offsetPtr)
-    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr;/* Text index. */
-    int *offsetPtr;		/* Where to store offset within segment, or
+TkTextIndexToSeg(
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr,/* Text index. */
+    int *offsetPtr)		/* Where to store offset within segment, or
 				 * NULL if offset isn't wanted. */
 {
     TkTextSegment *segPtr;
@@ -260,7 +596,7 @@ TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, offsetPtr)
  *
  * TkTextSegToOffset --
  *
- *	Given a segment pointer and the line containing it, this procedure
+ *	Given a segment pointer and the line containing it, this function
  *	returns the offset of the segment within its line.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -274,14 +610,13 @@ TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, offsetPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkTextSegToOffset(segPtr, linePtr)
-    CONST TkTextSegment *segPtr;/* Segment whose offset is desired. */
-    CONST TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* Line containing segPtr. */
+TkTextSegToOffset(
+    CONST TkTextSegment *segPtr,/* Segment whose offset is desired. */
+    CONST TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Line containing segPtr. */
 {
     CONST TkTextSegment *segPtr2;
-    int offset;
+    int offset = 0;
 
-    offset = 0;
     for (segPtr2 = linePtr->segPtr; segPtr2 != segPtr;
 	    segPtr2 = segPtr2->nextPtr) {
 	offset += segPtr2->size;
@@ -292,15 +627,73 @@ TkTextSegToOffset(segPtr, linePtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * TkTextGetObjIndex --
+ *
+ *	Simpler wrapper around the string based function, but could be
+ *	enhanced with a new object type in the future.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	see TkTextGetIndex
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkTextGetObjIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Use this for error reporting. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Obj *idxObj,		/* Object containing textual description of
+				 * position. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Index structure to fill in. */
+{
+    return GetIndex(interp, NULL, textPtr, Tcl_GetString(idxObj), indexPtr,
+	    NULL);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkTextSharedGetObjIndex --
+ *
+ *	Simpler wrapper around the string based function, but could be
+ *	enhanced with a new object type in the future.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	see TkTextGetIndex
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Use this for error reporting. */
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr,/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Obj *idxObj,		/* Object containing textual description of
+				 * position. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Index structure to fill in. */
+{
+    return GetIndex(interp, sharedTextPtr, NULL, Tcl_GetString(idxObj),
+	    indexPtr, NULL);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TkTextGetIndex --
  *
  *	Given a string, return the index that is described.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result.  If TCL_OK is
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result. If TCL_OK is
  *	returned, then everything went well and the index at *indexPtr is
- *	filled in; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message
- *	is left in the interp's result.
+ *	filled in; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is
+ *	left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -309,21 +702,59 @@ TkTextSegToOffset(segPtr, linePtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, indexPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Use this for error reporting. */
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* Textual description of position. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index structure to fill in. */
+TkTextGetIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Use this for error reporting. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* Textual description of position. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Index structure to fill in. */
+{
+    return GetIndex(interp, NULL, textPtr, string, indexPtr, NULL);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetIndex --
+ *
+ *	Given a string, return the index that is described.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result. If TCL_OK is
+ *	returned, then everything went well and the index at *indexPtr is
+ *	filled in; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is
+ *	left in the interp's result.
+ *
+ *	If *canCachePtr is non-NULL, and everything went well, the integer it
+ *	points to is set to 1 if the indexPtr is something which can be
+ *	cached, and zero otherwise.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+GetIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Use this for error reporting. */
+    TkSharedText *sharedPtr,
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* Textual description of position. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr,	/* Index structure to fill in. */
+    int *canCachePtr)		/* Pointer to integer to store whether we can
+				 * cache the index (or NULL). */
 {
     char *p, *end, *endOfBase;
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-    TkTextTag *tagPtr;
-    TkTextSearch search;
     TkTextIndex first, last;
     int wantLast, result;
     char c;
     CONST char *cp;
     Tcl_DString copy;
+    int canCache = 0;
+
+    if (sharedPtr == NULL) {
+	sharedPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr;
+    }
 
     /*
      *---------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -336,7 +767,7 @@ TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, indexPtr)
      */
 
     if (TkTextMarkNameToIndex(textPtr, string, indexPtr) == TCL_OK) {
-	return TCL_OK;
+	goto done;
     }
 
     if (TkTextWindowIndex(textPtr, string, indexPtr) != 0) {
@@ -353,19 +784,24 @@ TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, indexPtr)
      *------------------------------------------------
      */
 
-    indexPtr->tree = textPtr->tree;
+    indexPtr->tree = sharedPtr->tree;
 
     /*
-     * First look for the form "tag.first" or "tag.last" where "tag"
-     * is the name of a valid tag.  Try to use up as much as possible
-     * of the string in this check (strrchr instead of strchr below).
-     * Doing the check now, and in this way, allows tag names to include
-     * funny characters like "@" or "+1c".
+     * First look for the form "tag.first" or "tag.last" where "tag" is the
+     * name of a valid tag. Try to use up as much as possible of the string in
+     * this check (strrchr instead of strchr below). Doing the check now, and
+     * in this way, allows tag names to include funny characters like "@" or
+     * "+1c".
      */
 
     Tcl_DStringInit(&copy);
     p = strrchr(Tcl_DStringAppend(&copy, string, -1), '.');
     if (p != NULL) {
+	TkTextSearch search;
+	TkTextTag *tagPtr;
+	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = NULL;
+	CONST char *tagName;
+
 	if ((p[1] == 'f') && (strncmp(p+1, "first", 5) == 0)) {
 	    wantLast = 0;
 	    endOfBase = p+6;
@@ -375,23 +811,42 @@ TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	} else {
 	    goto tryxy;
 	}
-	*p = 0;
-	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->tagTable, Tcl_DStringValue(&copy));
-	*p = '.';
-	if (hPtr == NULL) {
+
+	tagPtr = NULL;
+	tagName = Tcl_DStringValue(&copy);
+	if (((p - tagName) == 3) && !strncmp(tagName, "sel", 3)) {
+	    /*
+	     * Special case for sel tag which is not stored in the hash table.
+	     */
+
+	    tagPtr = textPtr->selTagPtr;
+	} else {
+	    *p = 0;
+	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&sharedPtr->tagTable, tagName);
+	    *p = '.';
+	    if (hPtr != NULL) {
+		tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	    }
+	}
+
+	if (tagPtr == NULL) {
 	    goto tryxy;
 	}
-	tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, 0, 0, &first);
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree), 0,
-		&last);
+
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0, &first);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr), 0, &last);
 	TkBTreeStartSearch(&first, &last, tagPtr, &search);
 	if (!TkBTreeCharTagged(&first, tagPtr) && !TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) {
+	    if (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) {
+		tagName = "sel";
+	    } else {
+		tagName = Tcl_GetHashKey(&sharedPtr->tagTable, hPtr);
+	    }
 	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
 		    "text doesn't contain any characters tagged with \"",
-		    Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->tagTable, hPtr), "\"",
-			    (char *) NULL);
+		    tagName, "\"", NULL);
 	    Tcl_DStringFree(&copy);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
@@ -404,7 +859,7 @@ TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	goto gotBase;
     }
 
-    tryxy:
+  tryxy:
     if (string[0] == '@') {
 	/*
 	 * Find character at a given x,y location in the window.
@@ -422,9 +877,9 @@ TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	if (end == cp) {
 	    goto error;
 	}
-	TkTextPixelIndex(textPtr, x, y, indexPtr);
+	TkTextPixelIndex(textPtr, x, y, indexPtr, NULL);
 	endOfBase = end;
-	goto gotBase; 
+	goto gotBase;
     }
 
     if (isdigit(UCHAR(string[0])) || (string[0] == '-')) {
@@ -449,7 +904,9 @@ TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	    }
 	    endOfBase = end;
 	}
-	TkTextMakeCharIndex(textPtr->tree, lineIndex, charIndex, indexPtr);
+	TkTextMakeCharIndex(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr, lineIndex, charIndex,
+		indexPtr);
+	canCache = 1;
 	goto gotBase;
     }
 
@@ -479,8 +936,9 @@ TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	 * Base position is end of text.
 	 */
 
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree),
-		0, indexPtr);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr), 0, indexPtr);
+	canCache = 1;
 	goto gotBase;
     } else {
 	/*
@@ -497,7 +955,7 @@ TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * See if the base position is the name of an embedded image
+	 * See if the base position is the name of an embedded image.
 	 */
 
 	c = *endOfBase;
@@ -512,14 +970,14 @@ TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 
     /*
      *-------------------------------------------------------------------
-     * Stage 3: process zero or more modifiers.  Each modifier is either
-     * a keyword like "wordend" or "linestart", or it has the form
-     * "op count units" where op is + or -, count is a number, and units
-     * is "chars" or "lines".
+     * Stage 3: process zero or more modifiers. Each modifier is either a
+     * keyword like "wordend" or "linestart", or it has the form "op count
+     * units" where op is + or -, count is a number, and units is "chars" or
+     * "lines".
      *-------------------------------------------------------------------
      */
 
-    gotBase:
+  gotBase:
     cp = endOfBase;
     while (1) {
 	while (isspace(UCHAR(*cp))) {
@@ -528,24 +986,31 @@ TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	if (*cp == 0) {
 	    break;
 	}
-    
+
 	if ((*cp == '+') || (*cp == '-')) {
-	    cp = ForwBack(cp, indexPtr);
+	    cp = ForwBack(textPtr, cp, indexPtr);
 	} else {
-	    cp = StartEnd(cp, indexPtr);
+	    cp = StartEnd(textPtr, cp, indexPtr);
 	}
 	if (cp == NULL) {
 	    goto error;
 	}
     }
     Tcl_DStringFree(&copy);
+
+  done:
+    if (canCachePtr != NULL) {
+	*canCachePtr = canCache;
+    }
+    if (indexPtr->linePtr == NULL) {
+	Tcl_Panic("Bad index created");
+    }
     return TCL_OK;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_DStringFree(&copy);
     Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad text index \"", string, "\"",
-	    (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad text index \"", string, "\"", NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -553,12 +1018,13 @@ TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, indexPtr)
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkTextPrintIndex --
- *	
- *	This procedure generates a string description of an index, suitable
- *	for reading in again later.
+ *
+ *	This function generates a string description of an index, suitable for
+ *	reading in again later.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The characters pointed to by string are modified.
+ *	The characters pointed to by string are modified. Returns the number
+ *	of characters in the string.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -566,18 +1032,31 @@ TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, indexPtr)
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void
-TkTextPrintIndex(indexPtr, string)
-    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr;/* Pointer to index. */
-    char *string;		/* Place to store the position.  Must have
-				 * at least TK_POS_CHARS characters. */
+int
+TkTextPrintIndex(
+    CONST TkText *textPtr,
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr,/* Pointer to index. */
+    char *string)		/* Place to store the position. Must have at
+				 * least TK_POS_CHARS characters. */
 {
     TkTextSegment *segPtr;
+    TkTextLine *linePtr;
     int numBytes, charIndex;
 
     numBytes = indexPtr->byteIndex;
     charIndex = 0;
-    for (segPtr = indexPtr->linePtr->segPtr; ; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+    linePtr = indexPtr->linePtr;
+
+    for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; ; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (segPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Two logical lines merged into one display line through eliding
+	     * of a newline.
+	     */
+
+	    linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, linePtr);
+	    segPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
+	}
 	if (numBytes <= segPtr->size) {
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -588,13 +1067,15 @@ TkTextPrintIndex(indexPtr, string)
 	}
 	numBytes -= segPtr->size;
     }
+
     if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
 	charIndex += Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, numBytes);
     } else {
 	charIndex += numBytes;
     }
-    sprintf(string, "%d.%d", TkBTreeLineIndex(indexPtr->linePtr) + 1,
-	    charIndex);
+
+    return sprintf(string, "%d.%d",
+	    TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr->linePtr) + 1, charIndex);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -616,9 +1097,9 @@ TkTextPrintIndex(indexPtr, string)
  */
 
 int
-TkTextIndexCmp(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
-    CONST TkTextIndex *index1Ptr;		/* First index. */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *index2Ptr;		/* Second index. */
+TkTextIndexCmp(
+    CONST TkTextIndex*index1Ptr,/* First index. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex*index2Ptr)/* Second index. */
 {
     int line1, line2;
 
@@ -631,8 +1112,16 @@ TkTextIndexCmp(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
 	    return 0;
 	}
     }
-    line1 = TkBTreeLineIndex(index1Ptr->linePtr);
-    line2 = TkBTreeLineIndex(index2Ptr->linePtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Assumption here that it is ok for comparisons to reflect the full
+     * B-tree and not just the portion that is available to any client. This
+     * should be true because the only indexPtr's we should be given are ones
+     * which are valid for the current client.
+     */
+
+    line1 = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, index1Ptr->linePtr);
+    line2 = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, index2Ptr->linePtr);
     if (line1 < line2) {
 	return -1;
     }
@@ -647,14 +1136,14 @@ TkTextIndexCmp(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
  *
  * ForwBack --
  *
- *	This procedure handles +/- modifiers for indices to adjust the
- *	index forwards or backwards.
+ *	This function handles +/- modifiers for indices to adjust the index
+ *	forwards or backwards.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If the modifier in string is successfully parsed then the return
- *	value is the address of the first character after the modifier,
- *	and *indexPtr is updated to reflect the modifier.  If there is a
- *	syntax error in the modifier then NULL is returned.
+ *	If the modifier in string is successfully parsed then the return value
+ *	is the address of the first character after the modifier, and
+ *	*indexPtr is updated to reflect the modifier. If there is a syntax
+ *	error in the modifier then NULL is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -663,16 +1152,16 @@ TkTextIndexCmp(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
  */
 
 static CONST char *
-ForwBack(string, indexPtr)
-    CONST char *string;		/* String to parse for additional info
-				 * about modifier (count and units). 
-				 * Points to "+" or "-" that starts
-				 * modifier. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index to update as specified in string. */
+ForwBack(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* String to parse for additional info about
+				 * modifier (count and units). Points to "+"
+				 * or "-" that starts modifier. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Index to update as specified in string. */
 {
     register CONST char *p, *units;
     char *end;
-    int count, lineIndex;
+    int count, lineIndex, modifier;
     size_t length;
 
     /*
@@ -693,53 +1182,193 @@ ForwBack(string, indexPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the end of this modifier (next space or + or - character),
-     * then parse the unit specifier and update the position
-     * accordingly.
+     * Find the end of this modifier (next space or + or - character), then
+     * check if there is a textual 'display' or 'any' modifier. These
+     * modifiers can be their own word (in which case they can be abbreviated)
+     * or they can follow on to the actual unit in a single word (in which
+     * case no abbreviation is allowed). So, 'display lines', 'd lines',
+     * 'displaylin' are all ok, but 'dline' is not.
      */
 
-    units = p; 
+    units = p;
     while ((*p != '\0') && !isspace(UCHAR(*p)) && (*p != '+') && (*p != '-')) {
 	p++;
     }
     length = p - units;
+    if ((*units == 'd') &&
+	    (strncmp(units, "display", (length > 7 ? 7 : length)) == 0)) {
+	modifier = TKINDEX_DISPLAY;
+	if (length > 7) {
+	    p -= (length - 7);
+	}
+    } else if ((*units == 'a') &&
+	    (strncmp(units, "any", (length > 3 ? 3 : length)) == 0)) {
+	modifier = TKINDEX_ANY;
+	if (length > 3) {
+	    p -= (length - 3);
+	}
+    } else {
+	modifier = TKINDEX_NONE;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If we had a modifier, which we interpreted ok, so now forward to the
+     * actual units.
+     */
+
+    if (modifier != TKINDEX_NONE) {
+	while (isspace(UCHAR(*p))) {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	units = p;
+	while (*p!='\0' && !isspace(UCHAR(*p)) && *p!='+' && *p!='-') {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	length = p - units;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Finally parse the units.
+     */
+
     if ((*units == 'c') && (strncmp(units, "chars", length) == 0)) {
+	TkTextCountType type;
+
+	if (modifier == TKINDEX_NONE) {
+	    type = COUNT_INDICES;
+	} else if (modifier == TKINDEX_ANY) {
+	    type = COUNT_CHARS;
+	} else {
+	    type = COUNT_DISPLAY_CHARS;
+	}
+
 	if (*string == '+') {
-	    TkTextIndexForwChars(indexPtr, count, indexPtr);
+	    TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, count, indexPtr, type);
 	} else {
-	    TkTextIndexBackChars(indexPtr, count, indexPtr);
+	    TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, indexPtr, count, indexPtr, type);
 	}
-    } else if ((*units == 'l') && (strncmp(units, "lines", length) == 0)) {
-	lineIndex = TkBTreeLineIndex(indexPtr->linePtr);
+    } else if ((*units == 'i') && (strncmp(units, "indices", length) == 0)) {
+	TkTextCountType type;
+
+	if (modifier == TKINDEX_DISPLAY) {
+	    type = COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES;
+	} else {
+	    type = COUNT_INDICES;
+	}
+
 	if (*string == '+') {
-	    lineIndex += count;
+	    TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, count, indexPtr, type);
 	} else {
-	    lineIndex -= count;
+	    TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, indexPtr, count, indexPtr, type);
+	}
+    } else if ((*units == 'l') && (strncmp(units, "lines", length) == 0)) {
+	if (modifier == TKINDEX_DISPLAY) {
+	    /*
+	     * Find the appropriate pixel offset of the current position
+	     * within its display line. This also has the side-effect of
+	     * moving indexPtr, but that doesn't matter since we will do it
+	     * again below.
+	     *
+	     * Then find the right display line, and finally calculated the
+	     * index we want in that display line, based on the original pixel
+	     * offset.
+	     */
+
+	    int xOffset, forward;
+
+	    if (TkTextIsElided(textPtr, indexPtr, NULL)) {
+		/*
+		 * Go forward to the first non-elided index.
+		 */
+
+		TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, indexPtr,
+			COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * The check below retains the character position, even
-	     * if the line runs off the start of the file.  Without
-	     * it, the character position will get reset to 0 by
-	     * TkTextMakeIndex.
+	     * Unlike the Forw/BackChars code, the display line code is
+	     * sensitive to whether we are genuinely going forwards or
+	     * backwards. So, we need to determine that. This is important in
+	     * the case where we have "+ -3 displaylines", for example.
 	     */
 
-	    if (lineIndex < 0) {
-		lineIndex = 0;
+	    if ((count < 0) ^ (*string == '-')) {
+		forward = 0;
+	    } else {
+		forward = 1;
 	    }
-	}
-	/*
-	 * This doesn't work quite right if using a proportional font or
-	 * UTF-8 characters with varying numbers of bytes.  The cursor will
-	 * bop around, keeping a constant number of bytes (not characters)
-	 * from the left edge (but making sure not to split any UTF-8
-	 * characters), regardless of the x-position the index corresponds
-	 * to.  The proper way to do this is to get the x-position of the
-	 * index and then pick the character at the same x-position in the
-	 * new line.
-	 */
 
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(indexPtr->tree, lineIndex, indexPtr->byteIndex,
-		indexPtr);
+	    count = abs(count);
+	    if (count == 0) {
+		return p;
+	    }
+
+	    if (forward) {
+		TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, &xOffset);
+		while (count-- > 0) {
+		    /*
+		     * Go to the end of the line, then forward one char/byte
+		     * to get to the beginning of the next line.
+		     */
+
+		    TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, NULL);
+		    TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr,
+			    COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+		}
+	    } else {
+		TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, &xOffset);
+		while (count-- > 0) {
+		    /*
+		     * Go to the beginning of the line, then backward one
+		     * char/byte to get to the end of the previous line.
+		     */
+
+		    TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, NULL);
+		    TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr,
+			    COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+		}
+		TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, NULL);
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * This call assumes indexPtr is the beginning of a display line
+	     * and moves it to the 'xOffset' position of that line, which is
+	     * just what we want.
+	     */
+
+	    TkTextIndexOfX(textPtr, xOffset, indexPtr);
+	} else {
+	    lineIndex = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr->linePtr);
+	    if (*string == '+') {
+		lineIndex += count;
+	    } else {
+		lineIndex -= count;
+
+		/*
+		 * The check below retains the character position, even if the
+		 * line runs off the start of the file. Without it, the
+		 * character position will get reset to 0 by TkTextMakeIndex.
+		 */
+
+		if (lineIndex < 0) {
+		    lineIndex = 0;
+		}
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * This doesn't work quite right if using a proportional font or
+	     * UTF-8 characters with varying numbers of bytes, or if there are
+	     * embedded windows, images, etc. The cursor will bop around,
+	     * keeping a constant number of bytes (not characters) from the
+	     * left edge (but making sure not to split any UTF-8 characters),
+	     * regardless of the x-position the index corresponds to. The
+	     * proper way to do this is to get the x-position of the index and
+	     * then pick the character at the same x-position in the new line.
+	     */
+
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(indexPtr->tree, textPtr, lineIndex,
+		    indexPtr->byteIndex, indexPtr);
+	}
     } else {
 	return NULL;
     }
@@ -751,13 +1380,16 @@ ForwBack(string, indexPtr)
  *
  * TkTextIndexForwBytes --
  *
- *	Given an index for a text widget, this procedure creates a new
- *	index that points "count" bytes ahead of the source index.
+ *	Given an index for a text widget, this function creates a new index
+ *	that points "count" bytes ahead of the source index.
  *
  * Results:
  *	*dstPtr is modified to refer to the character "count" bytes after
- *	srcPtr, or to the last character in the TkText if there aren't
- *	"count" bytes left.
+ *	srcPtr, or to the last character in the TkText if there aren't "count"
+ *	bytes left.
+ *
+ *	In this latter case, the function returns '1' to indicate that not all
+ *	of 'byteCount' could be used.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -765,20 +1397,21 @@ ForwBack(string, indexPtr)
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void
-TkTextIndexForwBytes(srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
-    CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr;	/* Source index. */
-    int byteCount;		/* How many bytes forward to move.  May be
+int
+TkTextIndexForwBytes(
+    CONST TkText *textPtr,
+    CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr,	/* Source index. */
+    int byteCount,		/* How many bytes forward to move. May be
 				 * negative. */
-    TkTextIndex *dstPtr;	/* Destination index: gets modified. */
+    TkTextIndex *dstPtr)	/* Destination index: gets modified. */
 {
     TkTextLine *linePtr;
     TkTextSegment *segPtr;
     int lineLength;
 
     if (byteCount < 0) {
-	TkTextIndexBackBytes(srcPtr, -byteCount, dstPtr);
-	return;
+	TkTextIndexBackBytes(textPtr, srcPtr, -byteCount, dstPtr);
+	return 0;
     }
 
     *dstPtr = *srcPtr;
@@ -795,18 +1428,18 @@ TkTextIndexForwBytes(srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If the new index is in the same line then we're done.
-	 * Otherwise go on to the next line.
+	 * If the new index is in the same line then we're done. Otherwise go
+	 * on to the next line.
 	 */
 
 	if (dstPtr->byteIndex < lineLength) {
-	    return;
+	    return 0;
 	}
 	dstPtr->byteIndex -= lineLength;
-	linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(dstPtr->linePtr);
+	linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, dstPtr->linePtr);
 	if (linePtr == NULL) {
 	    dstPtr->byteIndex = lineLength - 1;
-	    return;
+	    return 1;
 	}
 	dstPtr->linePtr = linePtr;
     }
@@ -817,13 +1450,18 @@ TkTextIndexForwBytes(srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
  *
  * TkTextIndexForwChars --
  *
- *	Given an index for a text widget, this procedure creates a new
- *	index that points "count" characters ahead of the source index.
+ *	Given an index for a text widget, this function creates a new index
+ *	that points "count" items of type given by "type" ahead of the source
+ *	index. "count" can be zero, which is useful in the case where one
+ *	wishes to move forward by display (non-elided) chars or indices or one
+ *	wishes to move forward by chars, skipping any intervening indices. In
+ *	this case dstPtr will point to the first acceptable index which is
+ *	encountered.
  *
  * Results:
- *	*dstPtr is modified to refer to the character "count" characters
- *	after srcPtr, or to the last character in the TkText if there
- *	aren't "count" characters left in the file.
+ *	*dstPtr is modified to refer to the character "count" items after
+ *	srcPtr, or to the last character in the TkText if there aren't
+ *	sufficient items left in the widget.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -832,31 +1470,52 @@ TkTextIndexForwBytes(srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkTextIndexForwChars(srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr)
-    CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr;	/* Source index. */
-    int charCount;		/* How many characters forward to move.
-				 * May be negative. */
-    TkTextIndex *dstPtr;	/* Destination index: gets modified. */
+TkTextIndexForwChars(
+    CONST TkText *textPtr,	/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr,	/* Source index. */
+    int charCount,		/* How many characters forward to move. May
+				 * be negative. */
+    TkTextIndex *dstPtr,	/* Destination index: gets modified. */
+    TkTextCountType type)	/* The type of item to count */
 {
     TkTextLine *linePtr;
     TkTextSegment *segPtr;
+    TkTextElideInfo *infoPtr = NULL;
     int byteOffset;
     char *start, *end, *p;
     Tcl_UniChar ch;
+    int elide = 0;
+    int checkElided = (type & COUNT_DISPLAY);
 
     if (charCount < 0) {
-	TkTextIndexBackChars(srcPtr, -charCount, dstPtr);
+	TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, srcPtr, -charCount, dstPtr, type);
 	return;
     }
+    if (checkElided) {
+	infoPtr = (TkTextElideInfo *)
+		ckalloc((unsigned) sizeof(TkTextElideInfo));
+	elide = TkTextIsElided(textPtr, srcPtr, infoPtr);
+    }
 
     *dstPtr = *srcPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Find seg that contains src byteIndex.
-     * Move forward specified number of chars.
+     * Find seg that contains src byteIndex. Move forward specified number of
+     * chars.
      */
 
-    segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(dstPtr, &byteOffset);
+    if (checkElided) {
+	/*
+	 * In this case we have already calculated the information we need, so
+	 * no need to use TkTextIndexToSeg()
+	 */
+
+	segPtr = infoPtr->segPtr;
+	byteOffset = dstPtr->byteIndex - infoPtr->segOffset;
+    } else {
+	segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(dstPtr, &byteOffset);
+    }
+
     while (1) {
 	/*
 	 * Go through each segment in line looking for specified character
@@ -864,76 +1523,341 @@ TkTextIndexForwChars(srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr)
 	 */
 
 	for ( ; segPtr != NULL; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
-		start = segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset;
-		end = segPtr->body.chars + segPtr->size;
-		for (p = start; p < end; p += Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch)) {
-		    if (charCount == 0) {
-			dstPtr->byteIndex += (p - start);
-			return;
+	    /*
+	     * If we do need to pay attention to the visibility of
+	     * characters/indices, check that first. If the current segment
+	     * isn't visible, then we simply continue the loop.
+	     */
+
+	    if (checkElided && ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)
+		    || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType))) {
+		TkTextTag *tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr;
+
+		/*
+		 * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the
+		 * current highest priority tag (and is therefore being
+		 * toggled off), or it's a new tag with higher priority.
+		 */
+
+		if (tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
+		    infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++;
+		    if (infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] & 1) {
+			infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr;
+		    }
+
+		    if (tagPtr->priority >= infoPtr->elidePriority) {
+			if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) {
+			    /*
+			     * If it is being toggled off, and it has an elide
+			     * string, it must actually be the current highest
+			     * priority tag, so this check is redundant:
+			     */
+
+			    if (tagPtr->priority != infoPtr->elidePriority) {
+				Tcl_Panic("Bad tag priority being toggled off");
+			    }
+
+			    /*
+			     * Find previous elide tag, if any (if not then
+			     * elide will be zero, of course).
+			     */
+
+			    elide = 0;
+			    while (--infoPtr->elidePriority > 0) {
+				if (infoPtr->tagCnts[infoPtr->elidePriority]
+					& 1) {
+				    elide = infoPtr->tagPtrs
+					    [infoPtr->elidePriority]->elide;
+				    break;
+				}
+			    }
+			} else {
+			    elide = tagPtr->elide;
+			    infoPtr->elidePriority = tagPtr->priority;
+			}
 		    }
-		    charCount--;
 		}
-	    } else {
-		if (charCount < segPtr->size - byteOffset) {
-		    dstPtr->byteIndex += charCount;
-		    return;
+	    }
+
+	    if (!elide) {
+		if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
+		    start = segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset;
+		    end = segPtr->body.chars + segPtr->size;
+		    for (p = start; p < end; p += Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch)) {
+			if (charCount == 0) {
+			    dstPtr->byteIndex += (p - start);
+			    goto forwardCharDone;
+			}
+			charCount--;
+		    }
+		} else if (type & COUNT_INDICES) {
+		    if (charCount < segPtr->size - byteOffset) {
+			dstPtr->byteIndex += charCount;
+			goto forwardCharDone;
+		    }
+		    charCount -= segPtr->size - byteOffset;
 		}
-		charCount -= segPtr->size - byteOffset;
 	    }
+
 	    dstPtr->byteIndex += segPtr->size - byteOffset;
 	    byteOffset = 0;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Go to the next line.  If we are at the end of the text item,
-	 * back up one byte (for the terminal '\n' character) and return
-	 * that index.
+	 * Go to the next line. If we are at the end of the text item, back up
+	 * one byte (for the terminal '\n' character) and return that index.
 	 */
-	 
-	linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(dstPtr->linePtr);
+
+	linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, dstPtr->linePtr);
 	if (linePtr == NULL) {
 	    dstPtr->byteIndex -= sizeof(char);
-	    return;
+	    goto forwardCharDone;
 	}
 	dstPtr->linePtr = linePtr;
 	dstPtr->byteIndex = 0;
 	segPtr = dstPtr->linePtr->segPtr;
     }
+
+  forwardCharDone:
+    if (infoPtr != NULL) {
+	TkTextFreeElideInfo(infoPtr);
+	ckfree((char *) infoPtr);
+    }
 }
 
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * TkTextIndexCount --
+ *
+ *	Given an ordered pair of indices in a text widget, this function
+ *	counts how many characters (not bytes) are between the two indices.
+ *
+ *	It is illegal to call this function with unordered indices.
+ *
+ *	Note that 'textPtr' is only used if we need to check for elided
+ *	attributes, i.e. if type is COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES or
+ *	COUNT_DISPLAY_CHARS.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The number of characters in the given range, which meet the
+ *	appropriate 'type' attributes.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkTextIndexCount(
+    CONST TkText *textPtr,	/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1,
+				/* Index describing location of character from
+				 * which to count. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr2,
+				/* Index describing location of last character
+				 * at which to stop the count. */
+    TkTextCountType type)	/* The kind of indices to count. */
+{
+    TkTextLine *linePtr1;
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr, *seg2Ptr = NULL;
+    TkTextElideInfo *infoPtr = NULL;
+    int byteOffset, maxBytes, count = 0, elide = 0;
+    int checkElided = (type & COUNT_DISPLAY);
+
+    /*
+     * Find seg that contains src index, and remember how many bytes not to
+     * count in the given segment.
+     */
+
+    segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr1, &byteOffset);
+    linePtr1 = indexPtr1->linePtr;
+
+    seg2Ptr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr2, &maxBytes);
+
+    if (checkElided) {
+	infoPtr = (TkTextElideInfo *)
+		ckalloc((unsigned) sizeof(TkTextElideInfo));
+	elide = TkTextIsElided(textPtr, indexPtr1, infoPtr);
+    }
+
+    while (1) {
+	/*
+	 * Go through each segment in line adding up the number of characters.
+	 */
+
+	for ( ; segPtr != NULL; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    /*
+	     * If we do need to pay attention to the visibility of
+	     * characters/indices, check that first. If the current segment
+	     * isn't visible, then we simply continue the loop.
+	     */
+
+	    if (checkElided) {
+		if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)
+			|| (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) {
+		    TkTextTag *tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr;
+
+		    /*
+		     * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the
+		     * current highest priority tag (and is therefore being
+		     * toggled off), or it's a new tag with higher priority.
+		     */
+
+		    if (tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
+			infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++;
+			if (infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] & 1) {
+			    infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr;
+			}
+			if (tagPtr->priority >= infoPtr->elidePriority) {
+			    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) {
+				/*
+				 * If it is being toggled off, and it has an
+				 * elide string, it must actually be the
+				 * current highest priority tag, so this check
+				 * is redundant:
+				 */
+
+				if (tagPtr->priority!=infoPtr->elidePriority) {
+				    Tcl_Panic("Bad tag priority being toggled off");
+				}
+
+				/*
+				 * Find previous elide tag, if any (if not
+				 * then elide will be zero, of course).
+				 */
+
+				elide = 0;
+				while (--infoPtr->elidePriority > 0) {
+				    if (infoPtr->tagCnts[
+					    infoPtr->elidePriority] & 1) {
+					elide = infoPtr->tagPtrs[
+						infoPtr->elidePriority]->elide;
+					break;
+				    }
+				}
+			    } else {
+				elide = tagPtr->elide;
+				infoPtr->elidePriority = tagPtr->priority;
+			    }
+			}
+		    }
+		}
+		if (elide) {
+		    if (segPtr == seg2Ptr) {
+			goto countDone;
+		    }
+		    byteOffset = 0;
+		    continue;
+		}
+	    }
+
+	    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
+		int byteLen = segPtr->size - byteOffset;
+		register unsigned char *str = (unsigned char *)
+			segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset;
+		register int i;
+
+		if (segPtr == seg2Ptr) {
+		    if (byteLen > (maxBytes - byteOffset)) {
+			byteLen = maxBytes - byteOffset;
+		    }
+		}
+		i = byteLen;
+
+		/*
+		 * This is a speed sensitive function, so run specially over
+		 * the string to count continuous ascii characters before
+		 * resorting to the Tcl_NumUtfChars call. This is a long form
+		 * of:
+		 *
+		 *   stringPtr->numChars =
+		 *	     Tcl_NumUtfChars(objPtr->bytes, objPtr->length);
+		 */
+
+		while (i && (*str < 0xC0)) {
+		    i--;
+		    str++;
+		}
+		count += byteLen - i;
+		if (i) {
+		    count += Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset
+			    + (byteLen - i), i);
+		}
+	    } else {
+		if (type & COUNT_INDICES) {
+		    int byteLen = segPtr->size - byteOffset;
+
+		    if (segPtr == seg2Ptr) {
+			if (byteLen > (maxBytes - byteOffset)) {
+			    byteLen = maxBytes - byteOffset;
+			}
+		    }
+		    count += byteLen;
+		}
+	    }
+	    if (segPtr == seg2Ptr) {
+		goto countDone;
+	    }
+	    byteOffset = 0;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Go to the next line. If we are at the end of the text item, back up
+	 * one byte (for the terminal '\n' character) and return that index.
+	 */
+
+	linePtr1 = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, linePtr1);
+	if (linePtr1 == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_Panic("Reached end of text widget when counting characters");
+	}
+	segPtr = linePtr1->segPtr;
+    }
+
+  countDone:
+    if (infoPtr != NULL) {
+	TkTextFreeElideInfo(infoPtr);
+	ckfree((char *) infoPtr);
+    }
+    return count;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TkTextIndexBackBytes --
  *
- *	Given an index for a text widget, this procedure creates a new
- *	index that points "count" bytes earlier than the source index.
+ *	Given an index for a text widget, this function creates a new index
+ *	that points "count" bytes earlier than the source index.
  *
  * Results:
  *	*dstPtr is modified to refer to the character "count" bytes before
  *	srcPtr, or to the first character in the TkText if there aren't
  *	"count" bytes earlier than srcPtr.
  *
+ *	Returns 1 if we couldn't use all of 'byteCount' because we have run
+ *	into the beginning or end of the text, and zero otherwise.
+ *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void
-TkTextIndexBackBytes(srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
-    CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr;	/* Source index. */
-    int byteCount;		/* How many bytes backward to move.  May be
+int
+TkTextIndexBackBytes(
+    CONST TkText *textPtr,
+    CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr,	/* Source index. */
+    int byteCount,		/* How many bytes backward to move. May be
 				 * negative. */
-    TkTextIndex *dstPtr;	/* Destination index: gets modified. */
+    TkTextIndex *dstPtr)	/* Destination index: gets modified. */
 {
     TkTextSegment *segPtr;
     int lineIndex;
 
     if (byteCount < 0) {
-	TkTextIndexForwBytes(srcPtr, -byteCount, dstPtr);
-	return;
+	return TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, srcPtr, -byteCount, dstPtr);
     }
 
     *dstPtr = *srcPtr;
@@ -941,19 +1865,19 @@ TkTextIndexBackBytes(srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
     lineIndex = -1;
     while (dstPtr->byteIndex < 0) {
 	/*
-	 * Move back one line in the text.  If we run off the beginning
-	 * of the file then just return the first character in the text.
+	 * Move back one line in the text. If we run off the beginning of the
+	 * file then just return the first character in the text.
 	 */
 
 	if (lineIndex < 0) {
-	    lineIndex = TkBTreeLineIndex(dstPtr->linePtr);
+	    lineIndex = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, dstPtr->linePtr);
 	}
 	if (lineIndex == 0) {
 	    dstPtr->byteIndex = 0;
-	    return;
+	    return 1;
 	}
 	lineIndex--;
-	dstPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(dstPtr->tree, lineIndex);
+	dstPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(dstPtr->tree, textPtr, lineIndex);
 
 	/*
 	 * Compute the length of the line and add that to dstPtr->charIndex.
@@ -964,6 +1888,7 @@ TkTextIndexBackBytes(srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
 	    dstPtr->byteIndex += segPtr->size;
 	}
     }
+    return 0;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -971,13 +1896,18 @@ TkTextIndexBackBytes(srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
  *
  * TkTextIndexBackChars --
  *
- *	Given an index for a text widget, this procedure creates a new
- *	index that points "count" characters earlier than the source index.
+ *	Given an index for a text widget, this function creates a new index
+ *	that points "count" items of type given by "type" earlier than the
+ *	source index. "count" can be zero, which is useful in the case where
+ *	one wishes to move backward by display (non-elided) chars or indices
+ *	or one wishes to move backward by chars, skipping any intervening
+ *	indices. In this case the returned index *dstPtr will point just
+ *	_after_ the first acceptable index which is encountered.
  *
  * Results:
- *	*dstPtr is modified to refer to the character "count" characters
- *	before srcPtr, or to the first character in the file if there
- *	aren't "count" characters earlier than srcPtr.
+ *	*dstPtr is modified to refer to the character "count" items before
+ *	srcPtr, or to the first index in the window if there aren't sufficient
+ *	items earlier than srcPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -986,57 +1916,145 @@ TkTextIndexBackBytes(srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkTextIndexBackChars(srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr)
-    CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr;	/* Source index. */
-    int charCount;		/* How many characters backward to move.
-				 * May be negative. */
-    TkTextIndex *dstPtr;	/* Destination index: gets modified. */
+TkTextIndexBackChars(
+    CONST TkText *textPtr,	/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr,	/* Source index. */
+    int charCount,		/* How many characters backward to move. May
+				 * be negative. */
+    TkTextIndex *dstPtr,	/* Destination index: gets modified. */
+    TkTextCountType type)	/* The type of item to count */
 {
     TkTextSegment *segPtr, *oldPtr;
+    TkTextElideInfo *infoPtr = NULL;
     int lineIndex, segSize;
     CONST char *p, *start, *end;
+    int elide = 0;
+    int checkElided = (type & COUNT_DISPLAY);
 
-    if (charCount <= 0) {
-	TkTextIndexForwChars(srcPtr, -charCount, dstPtr);
+    if (charCount < 0) {
+	TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, srcPtr, -charCount, dstPtr, type);
 	return;
     }
+    if (checkElided) {
+	infoPtr = (TkTextElideInfo *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextElideInfo));
+	elide = TkTextIsElided(textPtr, srcPtr, infoPtr);
+    }
 
     *dstPtr = *srcPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Find offset within seg that contains byteIndex.
-     * Move backward specified number of chars.
+     * Find offset within seg that contains byteIndex. Move backward specified
+     * number of chars.
      */
 
     lineIndex = -1;
-    
+
     segSize = dstPtr->byteIndex;
-    for (segPtr = dstPtr->linePtr->segPtr; ; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-	if (segSize <= segPtr->size) {
-	    break;
+
+    if (checkElided) {
+	segPtr = infoPtr->segPtr;
+	segSize -= infoPtr->segOffset;
+    } else {
+	TkTextLine *linePtr = dstPtr->linePtr;
+	for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; ; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (segPtr == NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * Two logical lines merged into one display line through
+		 * eliding of a newline.
+		 */
+
+		linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, linePtr);
+		segPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
+	    }
+	    if (segSize <= segPtr->size) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	    segSize -= segPtr->size;
 	}
-	segSize -= segPtr->size;
     }
+
+    /*
+     * Now segPtr points to the segment containing the starting index.
+     */
+
     while (1) {
-	if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
-	    start = segPtr->body.chars;
-	    end = segPtr->body.chars + segSize;
-	    for (p = end; ; p = Tcl_UtfPrev(p, start)) {
-		if (charCount == 0) {
-		    dstPtr->byteIndex -= (end - p);
-		    return;
+	/*
+	 * If we do need to pay attention to the visibility of
+	 * characters/indices, check that first. If the current segment isn't
+	 * visible, then we simply continue the loop.
+	 */
+
+	if (checkElided && ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)
+		|| (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType))) {
+	    TkTextTag *tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr;
+
+	    /*
+	     * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the current
+	     * highest priority tag (and is therefore being toggled off), or
+	     * it's a new tag with higher priority.
+	     */
+
+	    if (tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
+		infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++;
+		if (infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] & 1) {
+		    infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr;
 		}
-		if (p == start) {
-		    break;
+		if (tagPtr->priority >= infoPtr->elidePriority) {
+		    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType) {
+			/*
+			 * If it is being toggled on, and it has an elide
+			 * string, it must actually be the current highest
+			 * priority tag, so this check is redundant:
+			 */
+
+			if (tagPtr->priority != infoPtr->elidePriority) {
+			    Tcl_Panic("Bad tag priority being toggled on");
+			}
+
+			/*
+			 * Find previous elide tag, if any (if not then elide
+			 * will be zero, of course).
+			 */
+
+			elide = 0;
+			while (--infoPtr->elidePriority > 0) {
+			    if (infoPtr->tagCnts[infoPtr->elidePriority] & 1) {
+				elide = infoPtr->tagPtrs[
+					infoPtr->elidePriority]->elide;
+				break;
+			    }
+			}
+		    } else {
+			elide = tagPtr->elide;
+			infoPtr->elidePriority = tagPtr->priority;
+		    }
 		}
-		charCount--;
 	    }
-	} else {
-	    if (charCount <= segSize) {
-		dstPtr->byteIndex -= charCount;
-		return;
+	}
+
+	if (!elide) {
+	    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
+		start = segPtr->body.chars;
+		end = segPtr->body.chars + segSize;
+		for (p = end; ; p = Tcl_UtfPrev(p, start)) {
+		    if (charCount == 0) {
+			dstPtr->byteIndex -= (end - p);
+			goto backwardCharDone;
+		    }
+		    if (p == start) {
+			break;
+		    }
+		    charCount--;
+		}
+	    } else {
+		if (type & COUNT_INDICES) {
+		    if (charCount <= segSize) {
+			dstPtr->byteIndex -= charCount;
+			goto backwardCharDone;
+		    }
+		    charCount -= segSize;
+		}
 	    }
-	    charCount -= segSize;
 	}
 	dstPtr->byteIndex -= segSize;
 
@@ -1059,14 +2077,14 @@ TkTextIndexBackChars(srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr)
 	 */
 
 	if (lineIndex < 0) {
-	    lineIndex = TkBTreeLineIndex(dstPtr->linePtr);
+	    lineIndex = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, dstPtr->linePtr);
 	}
 	if (lineIndex == 0) {
 	    dstPtr->byteIndex = 0;
-	    return;
+	    goto backwardCharDone;
 	}
 	lineIndex--;
-	dstPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(dstPtr->tree, lineIndex);
+	dstPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(dstPtr->tree, textPtr, lineIndex);
 
 	/*
 	 * Compute the length of the line and add that to dstPtr->byteIndex.
@@ -1080,6 +2098,12 @@ TkTextIndexBackChars(srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr)
 	segPtr = oldPtr;
 	segSize = segPtr->size;
     }
+
+  backwardCharDone:
+    if (infoPtr != NULL) {
+	TkTextFreeElideInfo(infoPtr);
+	ckfree((char *) infoPtr);
+    }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1087,14 +2111,14 @@ TkTextIndexBackChars(srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr)
  *
  * StartEnd --
  *
- *	This procedure handles modifiers like "wordstart" and "lineend"
- *	to adjust indices forwards or backwards.
+ *	This function handles modifiers like "wordstart" and "lineend" to
+ *	adjust indices forwards or backwards.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If the modifier is successfully parsed then the return value
- *	is the address of the first character after the modifier, and
- *	*indexPtr is updated to reflect the modifier. If there is a
- *	syntax error in the modifier then NULL is returned.
+ *	If the modifier is successfully parsed then the return value is the
+ *	address of the first character after the modifier, and *indexPtr is
+ *	updated to reflect the modifier. If there is a syntax error in the
+ *	modifier then NULL is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1103,17 +2127,17 @@ TkTextIndexBackChars(srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr)
  */
 
 static CONST char *
-StartEnd(string, indexPtr)
-    CONST char *string;		/* String to parse for additional info
-				 * about modifier (count and units). 
-				 * Points to first character of modifer
-				 * word. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index to mdoify based on string. */
+StartEnd(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* String to parse for additional info about
+				 * modifier (count and units). Points to first
+				 * character of modifer word. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Index to modify based on string. */
 {
     CONST char *p;
-    int c, offset;
     size_t length;
     register TkTextSegment *segPtr;
+    int modifier;
 
     /*
      * Find the end of the modifier word.
@@ -1122,68 +2146,144 @@ StartEnd(string, indexPtr)
     for (p = string; isalnum(UCHAR(*p)); p++) {
 	/* Empty loop body. */
     }
+
     length = p-string;
+    if ((*string == 'd') &&
+	    (strncmp(string, "display", (length > 7 ? 7 : length)) == 0)) {
+	modifier = TKINDEX_DISPLAY;
+	if (length > 7) {
+	    p -= (length - 7);
+	}
+    } else if ((*string == 'a') &&
+	    (strncmp(string, "any", (length > 3 ? 3 : length)) == 0)) {
+	modifier = TKINDEX_ANY;
+	if (length > 3) {
+	    p -= (length - 3);
+	}
+    } else {
+	modifier = TKINDEX_NONE;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If we had a modifier, which we interpreted ok, so now forward to the
+     * actual units.
+     */
+
+    if (modifier != TKINDEX_NONE) {
+	while (isspace(UCHAR(*p))) {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	string = p;
+	while ((*p!='\0') && !isspace(UCHAR(*p)) && (*p!='+') && (*p!='-')) {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	length = p - string;
+    }
+
     if ((*string == 'l') && (strncmp(string, "lineend", length) == 0)
 	    && (length >= 5)) {
-	indexPtr->byteIndex = 0;
-	for (segPtr = indexPtr->linePtr->segPtr; segPtr != NULL;
-		segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    indexPtr->byteIndex += segPtr->size;
+	if (modifier == TKINDEX_DISPLAY) {
+	    TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, NULL);
+	} else {
+	    indexPtr->byteIndex = 0;
+	    for (segPtr = indexPtr->linePtr->segPtr; segPtr != NULL;
+		    segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+		indexPtr->byteIndex += segPtr->size;
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * We know '\n' is encoded with a single byte index.
+	     */
+
+	    indexPtr->byteIndex -= sizeof(char);
 	}
-	indexPtr->byteIndex -= sizeof(char);
     } else if ((*string == 'l') && (strncmp(string, "linestart", length) == 0)
 	    && (length >= 5)) {
-	indexPtr->byteIndex = 0;
+	if (modifier == TKINDEX_DISPLAY) {
+	    TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, NULL);
+	} else {
+	    indexPtr->byteIndex = 0;
+	}
     } else if ((*string == 'w') && (strncmp(string, "wordend", length) == 0)
 	    && (length >= 5)) {
 	int firstChar = 1;
+	int offset;
 
 	/*
 	 * If the current character isn't part of a word then just move
-	 * forward one character.  Otherwise move forward until finding
-	 * a character that isn't part of a word and stop there.
+	 * forward one character. Otherwise move forward until finding a
+	 * character that isn't part of a word and stop there.
 	 */
 
+	if (modifier == TKINDEX_DISPLAY) {
+	    TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, indexPtr,
+		    COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+	}
 	segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, &offset);
 	while (1) {
+	    int chSize = 1;
+
 	    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
-		c = segPtr->body.chars[offset];
-		if (!isalnum(UCHAR(c)) && (c != '_')) {
+		Tcl_UniChar ch;
+
+		chSize = Tcl_UtfToUniChar(segPtr->body.chars + offset, &ch);
+		if (!Tcl_UniCharIsWordChar(ch)) {
 		    break;
 		}
 		firstChar = 0;
 	    }
-	    offset += 1;
-	    indexPtr->byteIndex += sizeof(char);
+	    offset += chSize;
+	    indexPtr->byteIndex += chSize;
 	    if (offset >= segPtr->size) {
 		segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, &offset);
 	    }
 	}
 	if (firstChar) {
-	    TkTextIndexForwChars(indexPtr, 1, indexPtr);
+	    if (modifier == TKINDEX_DISPLAY) {
+		TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr,
+			COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+	    } else {
+		TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr,
+			COUNT_INDICES);
+	    }
 	}
     } else if ((*string == 'w') && (strncmp(string, "wordstart", length) == 0)
 	    && (length >= 5)) {
 	int firstChar = 1;
+	int offset;
+
+	if (modifier == TKINDEX_DISPLAY) {
+	    TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, indexPtr, 0, indexPtr,
+		    COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Starting with the current character, look for one that's not
-	 * part of a word and keep moving backward until you find one.
-	 * Then if the character found wasn't the first one, move forward
-	 * again one position.
+	 * Starting with the current character, look for one that's not part
+	 * of a word and keep moving backward until you find one. Then if the
+	 * character found wasn't the first one, move forward again one
+	 * position.
 	 */
 
 	segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, &offset);
 	while (1) {
+	    int chSize = 1;
+
 	    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
-		c = segPtr->body.chars[offset];
-		if (!isalnum(UCHAR(c)) && (c != '_')) {
+		Tcl_UniChar ch;
+
+		Tcl_UtfToUniChar(segPtr->body.chars + offset, &ch);
+		if (!Tcl_UniCharIsWordChar(ch)) {
 		    break;
 		}
+		if (offset > 0) {
+		    chSize = (segPtr->body.chars + offset
+			    - Tcl_UtfPrev(segPtr->body.chars + offset,
+			    segPtr->body.chars));
+		}
 		firstChar = 0;
 	    }
-	    offset -= 1;
-	    indexPtr->byteIndex -= sizeof(char);
+	    offset -= chSize;
+	    indexPtr->byteIndex -= chSize;
 	    if (offset < 0) {
 		if (indexPtr->byteIndex < 0) {
 		    indexPtr->byteIndex = 0;
@@ -1192,12 +2292,28 @@ StartEnd(string, indexPtr)
 		segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, &offset);
 	    }
 	}
+
 	if (!firstChar) {
-	    TkTextIndexForwChars(indexPtr, 1, indexPtr);
+	    if (modifier == TKINDEX_DISPLAY) {
+		TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr,
+			COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+	    } else {
+		TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr,
+			COUNT_INDICES);
+	    }
 	}
     } else {
 	return NULL;
     }
-    done:
+
+  done:
     return p;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkTextMark.c b/generic/tkTextMark.c
index c84bc9c..71a7949 100644
--- a/generic/tkTextMark.c
+++ b/generic/tkTextMark.c
@@ -1,19 +1,18 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkTextMark.c --
  *
- *	This file contains the procedure that implement marks for
- *	text widgets.
+ *	This file contains the functions that implement marks for text
+ *	widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkText.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 
 /*
  * Macro that determines the size of a mark segment:
@@ -23,55 +22,53 @@
 	+ sizeof(TkTextMark)))
 
 /*
- * Forward references for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Forward references for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		InsertUndisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr));
-static int		MarkDeleteProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int treeGone));
-static TkTextSegment *	MarkCleanupProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr));
-static void		MarkCheckProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr));
-static int		MarkLayoutProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    int offset, int maxX, int maxChars,
-			    int noCharsYet, TkWrapMode wrapMode,
-			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr));
-static int		MarkFindNext _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkText *textPtr, CONST char *markName));
-static int		MarkFindPrev _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkText *textPtr, CONST char *markName));
+static void		InsertUndisplayProc(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr);
+static int		MarkDeleteProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int treeGone);
+static TkTextSegment *	MarkCleanupProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+static void		MarkCheckProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+static int		MarkLayoutProc(TkText *textPtr, TkTextIndex *indexPtr,
+			    TkTextSegment *segPtr, int offset, int maxX,
+			    int maxChars, int noCharsYet, TkWrapMode wrapMode,
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr);
+static int		MarkFindNext(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkText *textPtr, const char *markName);
+static int		MarkFindPrev(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkText *textPtr, const char *markName);
 
 
 /*
- * The following structures declare the "mark" segment types.
- * There are actually two types for marks, one with left gravity
- * and one with right gravity.  They are identical except for
- * their gravity property.
+ * The following structures declare the "mark" segment types. There are
+ * actually two types for marks, one with left gravity and one with right
+ * gravity. They are identical except for their gravity property.
  */
 
-Tk_SegType tkTextRightMarkType = {
-    "mark",					/* name */
-    0,						/* leftGravity */
-    (Tk_SegSplitProc *) NULL,			/* splitProc */
-    MarkDeleteProc,				/* deleteProc */
-    MarkCleanupProc,				/* cleanupProc */
-    (Tk_SegLineChangeProc *) NULL,		/* lineChangeProc */
-    MarkLayoutProc,				/* layoutProc */
-    MarkCheckProc				/* checkProc */
+const Tk_SegType tkTextRightMarkType = {
+    "mark",			/* name */
+    0,				/* leftGravity */
+    NULL,			/* splitProc */
+    MarkDeleteProc,		/* deleteProc */
+    MarkCleanupProc,		/* cleanupProc */
+    NULL,			/* lineChangeProc */
+    MarkLayoutProc,		/* layoutProc */
+    MarkCheckProc		/* checkProc */
 };
 
-Tk_SegType tkTextLeftMarkType = {
-    "mark",					/* name */
-    1,						/* leftGravity */
-    (Tk_SegSplitProc *) NULL,			/* splitProc */
-    MarkDeleteProc,				/* deleteProc */
-    MarkCleanupProc,				/* cleanupProc */
-    (Tk_SegLineChangeProc *) NULL,		/* lineChangeProc */
-    MarkLayoutProc,				/* layoutProc */
-    MarkCheckProc				/* checkProc */
+const Tk_SegType tkTextLeftMarkType = {
+    "mark",			/* name */
+    1,				/* leftGravity */
+    NULL,			/* splitProc */
+    MarkDeleteProc,		/* deleteProc */
+    MarkCleanupProc,		/* cleanupProc */
+    NULL,			/* lineChangeProc */
+    MarkLayoutProc,		/* layoutProc */
+    MarkCheckProc		/* checkProc */
 };
 
 /*
@@ -79,9 +76,9 @@ Tk_SegType tkTextLeftMarkType = {
  *
  * TkTextMarkCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "mark" options of
- *	the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation
- *	for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "mark" options of the widget
+ *	command for text widgets. See the user documentation for details on
+ *	what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -93,44 +90,62 @@ Tk_SegType tkTextLeftMarkType = {
  */
 
 int
-TkTextMarkCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
-    register TkText *textPtr;	/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Argument strings.  Someone else has already
+TkTextMarkCmd(
+    register TkText *textPtr,	/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. Someone else has already
 				 * parsed this command enough to know that
-				 * argv[1] is "mark". */
+				 * objv[1] is "mark". */
 {
-    int c, i;
-    size_t length;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     TkTextSegment *markPtr;
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
     TkTextIndex index;
-    Tk_SegType *newTypePtr;
-
-    if (argc < 3) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		argv[0], " mark option ?arg arg ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+    const Tk_SegType *newTypePtr;
+    int optionIndex;
+    static const char *markOptionStrings[] = {
+	"gravity", "names", "next", "previous", "set", "unset", NULL
+    };
+    enum markOptions {
+	MARK_GRAVITY, MARK_NAMES, MARK_NEXT, MARK_PREVIOUS, MARK_SET,
+	MARK_UNSET
+    };
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], markOptionStrings, "mark option",
+	    0, &optionIndex) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    c = argv[2][0];
-    length = strlen(argv[2]);
-    if ((c == 'g') && (strncmp(argv[2], "gravity", length) == 0)) {
-	if (argc < 4 || argc > 5) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " mark gravity markName ?gravity?\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+
+    switch ((enum markOptions) optionIndex) {
+    case MARK_GRAVITY: {
+	char c;
+	int length;
+	char *str;
+
+	if (objc < 4 || objc > 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "markName ?gravity?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->markTable, argv[3]);
-	if (hPtr == NULL) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "there is no mark named \"",
-		    argv[3], "\"", (char *) NULL);
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	str = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3],&length);
+	if (length == 6 && !strcmp(str, "insert")) {
+	    markPtr = textPtr->insertMarkPtr;
+	} else if (length == 7 && !strcmp(str, "current")) {
+	    markPtr = textPtr->currentMarkPtr;
+	} else {
+	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable, str);
+	    if (hPtr == NULL) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "there is no mark named \"",
+			Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "\"", NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    markPtr = (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 	}
-	markPtr = (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-	if (argc == 4) {
+	if (objc == 4) {
 	    if (markPtr->typePtr == &tkTextRightMarkType) {
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "right", TCL_STATIC);
 	    } else {
@@ -138,77 +153,83 @@ TkTextMarkCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 	    }
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
-	length = strlen(argv[4]);
-	c = argv[4][0];
-	if ((c == 'l') && (strncmp(argv[4], "left", length) == 0)) {
+	str = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[4],&length);
+	c = str[0];
+	if ((c == 'l') && (strncmp(str, "left", (unsigned)length) == 0)) {
 	    newTypePtr = &tkTextLeftMarkType;
-	} else if ((c == 'r') && (strncmp(argv[4], "right", length) == 0)) {
+	} else if ((c == 'r') &&
+		(strncmp(str, "right", (unsigned)length) == 0)) {
 	    newTypePtr = &tkTextRightMarkType;
 	} else {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad mark gravity \"",
-		    argv[4], "\": must be left or right", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad mark gravity \"", str,
+		    "\": must be left or right", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, markPtr, &index);
-	TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(textPtr->tree, markPtr,
-		markPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
+	TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(markPtr, markPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
 	markPtr->typePtr = newTypePtr;
 	TkBTreeLinkSegment(markPtr, &index);
-    } else if ((c == 'n') && (strncmp(argv[2], "names", length) == 0)) {
-	if (argc != 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " mark names\"", (char *) NULL);
+	break;
+    }
+    case MARK_NAMES:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->markTable, &search);
-		hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, "insert");
+	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, "current");
+	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable,
+		&search); hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp,
-		    Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->markTable, hPtr));
+		    Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable, hPtr));
 	}
-    } else if ((c == 'n') && (strncmp(argv[2], "next", length) == 0)) {
-	if (argc != 4) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " mark next index\"", (char *) NULL);
+	break;
+    case MARK_NEXT:
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	return MarkFindNext(interp, textPtr, argv[3]);
-    } else if ((c == 'p') && (strncmp(argv[2], "previous", length) == 0)) {
-	if (argc != 4) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " mark previous index\"", (char *) NULL);
+	return MarkFindNext(interp, textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+    case MARK_PREVIOUS:
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	return MarkFindPrev(interp, textPtr, argv[3]);
-    } else if ((c == 's') && (strncmp(argv[2], "set", length) == 0)) {
-	if (argc != 5) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " mark set markName index\"", (char *) NULL);
+	return MarkFindPrev(interp, textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+    case MARK_SET:
+	if (objc != 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "markName index");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[4], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[4], &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	TkTextSetMark(textPtr, argv[3], &index);
-    } else if ((c == 'u') && (strncmp(argv[2], "unset", length) == 0)) {
-	for (i = 3; i < argc; i++) {
-	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->markTable, argv[i]);
+	TkTextSetMark(textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    case MARK_UNSET: {
+	int i;
+
+	for (i = 3; i < objc; i++) {
+	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]));
 	    if (hPtr != NULL) {
 		markPtr = (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+
+		/*
+		 * Special case not needed with peer widgets.
+		 */
+
 		if ((markPtr == textPtr->insertMarkPtr)
 			|| (markPtr == textPtr->currentMarkPtr)) {
 		    continue;
 		}
-		TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(textPtr->tree, markPtr,
-			markPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
+		TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(markPtr, markPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
 		Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
 		ckfree((char *) markPtr);
 	    }
 	}
-    } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad mark option \"", argv[2],
-		"\": must be gravity, names, next, previous, set, or unset",
-		(char *) NULL);
-	return TCL_ERROR;
+	break;
+    }
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -218,8 +239,8 @@ TkTextMarkCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * TkTextSetMark --
  *
- *	Set a mark to a particular position, creating a new mark if
- *	one doesn't already exist.
+ *	Set a mark to a particular position, creating a new mark if one
+ *	doesn't already exist.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a pointer to the mark that was just set.
@@ -231,39 +252,67 @@ TkTextMarkCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
  */
 
 TkTextSegment *
-TkTextSetMark(textPtr, name, indexPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget in which to create mark. */
-    CONST char *name;			/* Name of mark to set. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Where to set mark. */
+TkTextSetMark(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget in which to create mark. */
+    const char *name,		/* Name of mark to set. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Where to set mark. */
 {
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = NULL;
     TkTextSegment *markPtr;
     TkTextIndex insertIndex;
-    int new;
-
-    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->markTable, name, &new);
-    markPtr = (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-    if (!new) {
+    int isNew, widgetSpecific;
+
+    if (!strcmp(name, "insert")) {
+	widgetSpecific = 1;
+	markPtr = textPtr->insertMarkPtr;
+	isNew = (markPtr == NULL ? 1 : 0);
+    } else if (!strcmp(name, "current")) {
+	widgetSpecific = 2;
+	markPtr = textPtr->currentMarkPtr;
+	isNew = (markPtr == NULL ? 1 : 0);
+    } else {
+	widgetSpecific = 0;
+	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable, name,
+		&isNew);
+	markPtr = (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    }
+    if (!isNew) {
 	/*
-	 * If this is the insertion point that's being moved, be sure
-	 * to force a display update at the old position.  Also, don't
-	 * let the insertion cursor be after the final newline of the
-	 * file.
+	 * If this is the insertion point that's being moved, be sure to force
+	 * a display update at the old position. Also, don't let the insertion
+	 * cursor be after the final newline of the file.
 	 */
 
 	if (markPtr == textPtr->insertMarkPtr) {
 	    TkTextIndex index, index2;
+            int nblines;
+
 	    TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, textPtr->insertMarkPtr, &index);
-	    TkTextIndexForwChars(&index, 1, &index2);
-	    TkTextChanged(textPtr, &index, &index2);
-	    if (TkBTreeLineIndex(indexPtr->linePtr)
-		    == TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree))  {
-		TkTextIndexBackChars(indexPtr, 1, &insertIndex);
+	    TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL,&index, 1, &index2, COUNT_INDICES);
+
+	    /*
+	     * While we wish to redisplay, no heights have changed, so no need
+	     * to call TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics.
+	     */
+
+	    TkTextChanged(NULL, textPtr, &index, &index2);
+
+            /*
+             * The number of lines in the widget is zero if and only if it is
+             * a partial peer with -startline == -endline, i.e. an empty
+             * peer. In this case the mark shall be set exactly at the given
+             * index, and not one character backwards (bug 3487407).
+             */
+
+	    nblines = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr);
+	    if ((TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr->linePtr) == nblines)
+		    && (nblines > 0))  {
+		TkTextIndexBackChars(NULL,indexPtr, 1, &insertIndex,
+			COUNT_INDICES);
 		indexPtr = &insertIndex;
 	    }
 	}
-	TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(textPtr->tree, markPtr,
-		markPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
+	TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(markPtr, markPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
     } else {
 	markPtr = (TkTextSegment *) ckalloc(MSEG_SIZE);
 	markPtr->typePtr = &tkTextRightMarkType;
@@ -271,7 +320,13 @@ TkTextSetMark(textPtr, name, indexPtr)
 	markPtr->body.mark.textPtr = textPtr;
 	markPtr->body.mark.linePtr = indexPtr->linePtr;
 	markPtr->body.mark.hPtr = hPtr;
-	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, markPtr);
+	if (widgetSpecific == 0) {
+	    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, markPtr);
+	} else if (widgetSpecific == 1) {
+	    textPtr->insertMarkPtr = markPtr;
+	} else {
+	    textPtr->currentMarkPtr = markPtr;
+	}
     }
     TkBTreeLinkSegment(markPtr, indexPtr);
 
@@ -283,8 +338,14 @@ TkTextSetMark(textPtr, name, indexPtr)
     if (markPtr == textPtr->insertMarkPtr) {
 	TkTextIndex index2;
 
-	TkTextIndexForwChars(indexPtr, 1, &index2);
-	TkTextChanged(textPtr, indexPtr, &index2);
+	TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL,indexPtr, 1, &index2, COUNT_INDICES);
+
+	/*
+	 * While we wish to redisplay, no heights have changed, so no need to
+	 * call TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics
+	 */
+
+	TkTextChanged(NULL, textPtr, indexPtr, &index2);
     }
     return markPtr;
 }
@@ -294,9 +355,9 @@ TkTextSetMark(textPtr, name, indexPtr)
  *
  * TkTextMarkSegToIndex --
  *
- *	Given a segment that is a mark, create an index that
- *	refers to the next text character (or other text segment
- *	with non-zero size) after the mark.
+ *	Given a segment that is a mark, create an index that refers to the
+ *	next text character (or other text segment with non-zero size) after
+ *	the mark.
  *
  * Results:
  *	*IndexPtr is filled in with index information.
@@ -308,14 +369,14 @@ TkTextSetMark(textPtr, name, indexPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, markPtr, indexPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget containing mark. */
-    TkTextSegment *markPtr;	/* Mark segment. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index information gets stored here.  */
+TkTextMarkSegToIndex(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget containing mark. */
+    TkTextSegment *markPtr,	/* Mark segment. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Index information gets stored here.  */
 {
     TkTextSegment *segPtr;
 
-    indexPtr->tree = textPtr->tree;
+    indexPtr->tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
     indexPtr->linePtr = markPtr->body.mark.linePtr;
     indexPtr->byteIndex = 0;
     for (segPtr = indexPtr->linePtr->segPtr; segPtr != markPtr;
@@ -329,15 +390,20 @@ TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, markPtr, indexPtr)
  *
  * TkTextMarkNameToIndex --
  *
- *	Given the name of a mark, return an index corresponding
- *	to the mark name.
+ *	Given the name of a mark, return an index corresponding to the mark
+ *	name.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is TCL_OK if "name" exists as a mark in
- *	the text widget.  In this case *indexPtr is filled in with
- *	the next segment whose after the mark whose size is
- *	non-zero.  TCL_ERROR is returned if the mark doesn't exist
- *	in the text widget.
+ *	The return value is TCL_OK if "name" exists as a mark in the text
+ *	widget and is located within its -starline/-endline range. In this
+ *	case *indexPtr is filled in with the next segment who is after the
+ *	mark whose size is non-zero. TCL_ERROR is returned if the mark
+ *	doesn't exist in the text widget, or if it is out of its -starline/
+ *	-endline range. In this latter case *indexPtr still contains valid
+ *	information, in particular TkTextMarkNameToIndex called with the
+ *	"insert" or "current" mark name may return TCL_ERROR, but *indexPtr
+ *	contains the correct index of this mark before -startline or after
+ *	-endline.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -346,19 +412,55 @@ TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, markPtr, indexPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkTextMarkNameToIndex(textPtr, name, indexPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget containing mark. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of mark. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index information gets stored here. */
+TkTextMarkNameToIndex(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget containing mark. */
+    const char *name,		/* Name of mark. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Index information gets stored here. */
 {
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr;
+    TkTextIndex index;
+    int start, end;
 
-    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->markTable, name);
-    if (hPtr == NULL) {
-	return TCL_ERROR;
+    if (textPtr == NULL) {
+        return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (!strcmp(name, "insert")) {
+	segPtr = textPtr->insertMarkPtr;
+    } else if (!strcmp(name, "current")) {
+	segPtr = textPtr->currentMarkPtr;
+    } else {
+	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable, name);
+	if (hPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	segPtr = (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    }
+    TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, segPtr, indexPtr);
+
+    /* If indexPtr refers to somewhere outside the -startline/-endline
+     * range limits of the widget, error out since the mark indeed is not
+     * reachable from this text widget (it may be reachable from a peer)
+     * (bug 1630271).
+     */
+
+    if (textPtr->start != NULL) {
+	start = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, textPtr->start);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL, start, 0,
+		&index);
+	if (TkTextIndexCmp(indexPtr, &index) < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+    if (textPtr->end != NULL) {
+	end = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, textPtr->end);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL, end, 0,
+		&index);
+	if (TkTextIndexCmp(indexPtr, &index) > 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
     }
-    TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr),
-	    indexPtr);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -367,27 +469,27 @@ TkTextMarkNameToIndex(textPtr, name, indexPtr)
  *
  * MarkDeleteProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the text B-tree code whenever
- *	a mark lies in a range of characters being deleted.
+ *	This function is invoked by the text B-tree code whenever a mark lies
+ *	in a range of characters being deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns 1 to indicate that deletion has been rejected.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	None (even if the whole tree is being deleted we don't
- *	free up the mark;  it will be done elsewhere).
+ *	None (even if the whole tree is being deleted we don't free up the
+ *	mark; it will be done elsewhere).
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-MarkDeleteProc(segPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;		/* Segment being deleted. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line containing segment. */
-    int treeGone;			/* Non-zero means the entire tree is
-					 * being deleted, so everything must
-					 * get cleaned up. */
+MarkDeleteProc(
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr,	/* Segment being deleted. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr,	/* Line containing segment. */
+    int treeGone)		/* Non-zero means the entire tree is being
+				 * deleted, so everything must get cleaned
+				 * up. */
 {
     return 1;
 }
@@ -397,8 +499,8 @@ MarkDeleteProc(segPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
  *
  * MarkCleanupProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the B-tree code whenever a
- *	mark segment is moved from one line to another.
+ *	This function is invoked by the B-tree code whenever a mark segment is
+ *	moved from one line to another.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -410,9 +512,9 @@ MarkDeleteProc(segPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
  */
 
 static TkTextSegment *
-MarkCleanupProc(markPtr, linePtr)
-    TkTextSegment *markPtr;		/* Mark segment that's being moved. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line that now contains segment. */
+MarkCleanupProc(
+    TkTextSegment *markPtr,	/* Mark segment that's being moved. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Line that now contains segment. */
 {
     markPtr->body.mark.linePtr = linePtr;
     return markPtr;
@@ -423,13 +525,13 @@ MarkCleanupProc(markPtr, linePtr)
  *
  * MarkLayoutProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is the "layoutProc" for mark segments.
+ *	This function is the "layoutProc" for mark segments.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If the mark isn't the insertion cursor then the return
- *	value is -1 to indicate that this segment shouldn't be
- *	displayed.  If the mark is the insertion character then
- *	1 is returned and the chunkPtr structure is filled in.
+ *	If the mark isn't the insertion cursor then the return value is -1 to
+ *	indicate that this segment shouldn't be displayed. If the mark is the
+ *	insertion character then 1 is returned and the chunkPtr structure is
+ *	filled in.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None, except for filling in chunkPtr.
@@ -437,26 +539,24 @@ MarkCleanupProc(markPtr, linePtr)
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-	/*ARGSUSED*/
 static int
-MarkLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, segPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
-	noCharsYet, wrapMode, chunkPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget being layed out. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Identifies first character in chunk. */
-    TkTextSegment *segPtr;	/* Segment corresponding to indexPtr. */
-    int offset;			/* Offset within segPtr corresponding to
+MarkLayoutProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget being layed out. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr,	/* Identifies first character in chunk. */
+    TkTextSegment *segPtr,	/* Segment corresponding to indexPtr. */
+    int offset,			/* Offset within segPtr corresponding to
 				 * indexPtr (always 0). */
-    int maxX;			/* Chunk must not occupy pixels at this
+    int maxX,			/* Chunk must not occupy pixels at this
 				 * position or higher. */
-    int maxChars;		/* Chunk must not include more than this
-				 * many characters. */
-    int noCharsYet;		/* Non-zero means no characters have been
+    int maxChars,		/* Chunk must not include more than this many
+				 * characters. */
+    int noCharsYet,		/* Non-zero means no characters have been
 				 * assigned to this line yet. */
-    TkWrapMode wrapMode;	/* Not used. */
-    register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;
-				/* Structure to fill in with information
-				 * about this chunk.  The x field has already
-				 * been set by the caller. */
+    TkWrapMode wrapMode,	/* Not used. */
+    register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr)
+				/* Structure to fill in with information about
+				 * this chunk. The x field has already been
+				 * set by the caller. */
 {
     if (segPtr != textPtr->insertMarkPtr) {
 	return -1;
@@ -464,8 +564,8 @@ MarkLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, segPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
 
     chunkPtr->displayProc = TkTextInsertDisplayProc;
     chunkPtr->undisplayProc = InsertUndisplayProc;
-    chunkPtr->measureProc = (Tk_ChunkMeasureProc *) NULL;
-    chunkPtr->bboxProc = (Tk_ChunkBboxProc *) NULL;
+    chunkPtr->measureProc = NULL;
+    chunkPtr->bboxProc = NULL;
     chunkPtr->numBytes = 0;
     chunkPtr->minAscent = 0;
     chunkPtr->minDescent = 0;
@@ -473,9 +573,8 @@ MarkLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, segPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
     chunkPtr->width = 0;
 
     /*
-     * Note: can't break a line after the insertion cursor:  this
-     * prevents the insertion cursor from being stranded at the end
-     * of a line.
+     * Note: can't break a line after the insertion cursor: this prevents the
+     * insertion cursor from being stranded at the end of a line.
      */
 
     chunkPtr->breakIndex = -1;
@@ -488,8 +587,7 @@ MarkLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, segPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
  *
  * TkTextInsertDisplayProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to display the insertion
- *	cursor.
+ *	This function is called to display the insertion cursor.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -502,30 +600,43 @@ MarkLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, segPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 void
-TkTextInsertDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, height, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk that is to be drawn. */
-    int x;				/* X-position in dst at which to
-					 * draw this chunk (may differ from
-					 * the x-position in the chunk because
-					 * of scrolling). */
-    int y;				/* Y-position at which to draw this
-					 * chunk in dst (x-position is in
-					 * the chunk itself). */
-    int height;				/* Total height of line. */
-    int baseline;			/* Offset of baseline from y. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display to use for drawing. */
-    Drawable dst;			/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
-					 * chunk. */
-    int screenY;			/* Y-coordinate in text window that
-					 * corresponds to y. */
+TkTextInsertDisplayProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* The current text widget. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,	/* Chunk that is to be drawn. */
+    int x,			/* X-position in dst at which to draw this
+				 * chunk (may differ from the x-position in
+				 * the chunk because of scrolling). */
+    int y,			/* Y-position at which to draw this chunk in
+				 * dst (x-position is in the chunk itself). */
+    int height,			/* Total height of line. */
+    int baseline,		/* Offset of baseline from y. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display to use for drawing. */
+    Drawable dst,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw chunk. */
+    int screenY)		/* Y-coordinate in text window that
+				 * corresponds to y. */
 {
-    TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) chunkPtr->clientData;
+    /*
+     * We have no need for the clientData.
+     */
+
+    /* TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) chunkPtr->clientData; */
+    TkTextIndex index;
     int halfWidth = textPtr->insertWidth/2;
+    int rightSideWidth;
+    int ix = 0, iy = 0, iw = 0, ih = 0, charWidth = 0;
+
+    if(textPtr->insertCursorType) {
+	TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, textPtr->insertMarkPtr, &index);
+	TkTextIndexBbox(textPtr, &index, &ix, &iy, &iw, &ih, &charWidth);
+	rightSideWidth = charWidth + halfWidth;
+    } else {
+	rightSideWidth = halfWidth;
+    }
 
-    if ((x + halfWidth) < 0) {
+    if ((x + rightSideWidth) < 0) {
 	/*
-	 * The insertion cursor is off-screen.
-	 * Indicate caret at 0,0 and return.
+	 * The insertion cursor is off-screen. Indicate caret at 0,0 and
+	 * return.
 	 */
 
 	Tk_SetCaretPos(textPtr->tkwin, 0, 0, height);
@@ -535,20 +646,20 @@ TkTextInsertDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, height, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
     Tk_SetCaretPos(textPtr->tkwin, x - halfWidth, screenY, height);
 
     /*
-     * As a special hack to keep the cursor visible on mono displays
-     * (or anywhere else that the selection and insertion cursors
-     * have the same color) write the default background in the cursor
-     * area (instead of nothing) when the cursor isn't on.  Otherwise
-     * the selection might hide the cursor.
+     * As a special hack to keep the cursor visible on mono displays (or
+     * anywhere else that the selection and insertion cursors have the same
+     * color) write the default background in the cursor area (instead of
+     * nothing) when the cursor isn't on. Otherwise the selection might hide
+     * the cursor.
      */
 
     if (textPtr->flags & INSERT_ON) {
 	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, dst, textPtr->insertBorder,
-		x - halfWidth, y, textPtr->insertWidth, height,
+		x - halfWidth, y, charWidth + textPtr->insertWidth, height,
 		textPtr->insertBorderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
     } else if (textPtr->selBorder == textPtr->insertBorder) {
 	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(textPtr->tkwin, dst, textPtr->border,
-		x - halfWidth, y, textPtr->insertWidth, height,
+		x - halfWidth, y, charWidth + textPtr->insertWidth, height,
 		0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
     }
 }
@@ -558,9 +669,8 @@ TkTextInsertDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, height, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
  *
  * InsertUndisplayProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when the insertion cursor is no
- *	longer at a visible point on the display.  It does nothing
- *	right now.
+ *	This function is called when the insertion cursor is no longer at a
+ *	visible point on the display. It does nothing right now.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -573,10 +683,9 @@ TkTextInsertDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, height, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-InsertUndisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Overall information about text
-					 * widget. */
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk that is about to be freed. */
+InsertUndisplayProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr)	/* Chunk that is about to be freed. */
 {
     return;
 }
@@ -586,41 +695,52 @@ InsertUndisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr)
  *
  * MarkCheckProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the B-tree code to perform
- *	consistency checks on mark segments.
+ *	This function is invoked by the B-tree code to perform consistency
+ *	checks on mark segments.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The procedure panics if it detects anything wrong with
+ *	The function panics if it detects anything wrong with
  *	the mark.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-MarkCheckProc(markPtr, linePtr)
-    TkTextSegment *markPtr;		/* Segment to check. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line containing segment. */
+MarkCheckProc(
+    TkTextSegment *markPtr,	/* Segment to check. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Line containing segment. */
 {
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 
     if (markPtr->body.mark.linePtr != linePtr) {
-	panic("MarkCheckProc: markPtr->body.mark.linePtr bogus");
+	Tcl_Panic("MarkCheckProc: markPtr->body.mark.linePtr bogus");
     }
 
     /*
-     * Make sure that the mark is still present in the text's mark
-     * hash table.
+     * These two marks are not in the hash table
      */
 
-    for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&markPtr->body.mark.textPtr->markTable,
+    if (markPtr->body.mark.textPtr->insertMarkPtr == markPtr) {
+        return;
+    }
+    if (markPtr->body.mark.textPtr->currentMarkPtr == markPtr) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Make sure that the mark is still present in the text's mark hash table.
+     */
+
+    for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(
+	    &markPtr->body.mark.textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable,
 	    &search); hPtr != markPtr->body.mark.hPtr;
 	    hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	if (hPtr == NULL) {
-	    panic("MarkCheckProc couldn't find hash table entry for mark");
+	    Tcl_Panic("MarkCheckProc couldn't find hash table entry for mark");
 	}
     }
 }
@@ -630,7 +750,7 @@ MarkCheckProc(markPtr, linePtr)
  *
  * MarkFindNext --
  *
- *	This procedure searches forward for the next mark.
+ *	This function searches forward for the next mark.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result, which is a mark name or an empty string.
@@ -642,56 +762,88 @@ MarkCheckProc(markPtr, linePtr)
  */
 
 static int
-MarkFindNext(interp, textPtr, string)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* For error reporting */
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* The widget */
-    CONST char *string;			/* The starting index or mark name */
+MarkFindNext(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For error reporting */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* The widget */
+    const char *string)		/* The starting index or mark name */
 {
     TkTextIndex index;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     register TkTextSegment *segPtr;
     int offset;
 
-
-    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->markTable, string);
-    if (hPtr != NULL) {
-	/*
-	 * If given a mark name, return the next mark in the list of
-	 * segments, even if it happens to be at the same character position.
-	 */
-	segPtr = (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    if (!strcmp(string, "insert")) {
+	segPtr = textPtr->insertMarkPtr;
+	TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, segPtr, &index);
+	segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
+    } else if (!strcmp(string, "current")) {
+	segPtr = textPtr->currentMarkPtr;
 	TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, segPtr, &index);
 	segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
     } else {
-	/*
-	 * For non-mark name indices we want to return any marks that
-	 * are right at the index.
-	 */
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	}
-	for (offset = 0, segPtr = index.linePtr->segPtr; 
-		segPtr != NULL && offset < index.byteIndex;
-		offset += segPtr->size,	segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    /* Empty loop body */ ;
+	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable, string);
+	if (hPtr != NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * If given a mark name, return the next mark in the list of
+	     * segments, even if it happens to be at the same character
+	     * position.
+	     */
+
+	    segPtr = (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	    TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, segPtr, &index);
+	    segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr;
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * For non-mark name indices we want to return any marks that are
+	     * right at the index.
+	     */
+
+	    if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    for (offset = 0, segPtr = index.linePtr->segPtr;
+		    segPtr != NULL && offset < index.byteIndex;
+		    offset += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+		/* Empty loop body */ ;
+	    }
 	}
     }
+
     while (1) {
 	/*
-	 * segPtr points at the first possible candidate,
-	 * or NULL if we ran off the end of the line.
+	 * segPtr points at the first possible candidate, or NULL if we ran
+	 * off the end of the line.
 	 */
+
 	for ( ; segPtr != NULL ; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextRightMarkType ||
 		    segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextLeftMarkType) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp,
-		    Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->markTable, segPtr->body.mark.hPtr),
-		    TCL_STATIC);
+		if (segPtr == textPtr->currentMarkPtr) {
+		    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "current", TCL_STATIC);
+		} else if (segPtr == textPtr->insertMarkPtr) {
+		    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "insert", TCL_STATIC);
+		} else if (segPtr->body.mark.hPtr == NULL) {
+		    /*
+		     * Ignore widget-specific marks for the other widgets.
+                     * This is either an insert or a current mark
+                     * (markPtr->body.mark.hPtr actually receives NULL
+                     * for these marks in TkTextSetMark).
+                     * The insert and current marks for textPtr having
+                     * already been tested above, the current segment is
+                     * an insert or current mark from a peer of textPtr,
+                     * which we don't want to return.
+                     */
+		    continue;
+		} else {
+		    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+			    Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable,
+			    segPtr->body.mark.hPtr), TCL_STATIC);
+		}
 		return TCL_OK;
 	    }
 	}
-	index.linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(index.linePtr);
-	if (index.linePtr == (TkTextLine *) NULL) {
+	index.linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, index.linePtr);
+	if (index.linePtr == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
 	index.byteIndex = 0;
@@ -704,7 +856,7 @@ MarkFindNext(interp, textPtr, string)
  *
  * MarkFindPrev --
  *
- *	This procedure searches backwards for the previous mark.
+ *	This function searches backwards for the previous mark.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result, which is a mark name or an empty string.
@@ -716,62 +868,111 @@ MarkFindNext(interp, textPtr, string)
  */
 
 static int
-MarkFindPrev(interp, textPtr, string)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* For error reporting */
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* The widget */
-    CONST char *string;			/* The starting index or mark name */
+MarkFindPrev(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For error reporting */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* The widget */
+    const char *string)		/* The starting index or mark name */
 {
     TkTextIndex index;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     register TkTextSegment *segPtr, *seg2Ptr, *prevPtr;
     int offset;
 
-
-    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->markTable, string);
-    if (hPtr != NULL) {
-	/*
-	 * If given a mark name, return the previous mark in the list of
-	 * segments, even if it happens to be at the same character position.
-	 */
-	segPtr = (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    if (!strcmp(string, "insert")) {
+	segPtr = textPtr->insertMarkPtr;
+	TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, segPtr, &index);
+    } else if (!strcmp(string, "current")) {
+	segPtr = textPtr->currentMarkPtr;
 	TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, segPtr, &index);
     } else {
-	/*
-	 * For non-mark name indices we do not return any marks that
-	 * are right at the index.
-	 */
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
-	}
-	for (offset = 0, segPtr = index.linePtr->segPtr; 
-		segPtr != NULL && offset < index.byteIndex;
-		offset += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    /* Empty loop body */ ;
+	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable, string);
+	if (hPtr != NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * If given a mark name, return the previous mark in the list of
+	     * segments, even if it happens to be at the same character
+	     * position.
+	     */
+
+	    segPtr = (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	    TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, segPtr, &index);
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * For non-mark name indices we do not return any marks that are
+	     * right at the index.
+	     */
+
+	    if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    for (offset = 0, segPtr = index.linePtr->segPtr;
+		    segPtr != NULL && offset < index.byteIndex;
+		    offset += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+		/* Empty loop body */
+	    }
 	}
     }
+
     while (1) {
 	/*
-	 * segPtr points just past the first possible candidate,
-	 * or at the begining of the line.
+	 * segPtr points just past the first possible candidate, or at the
+	 * beginning of the line.
 	 */
-	for (prevPtr = NULL, seg2Ptr = index.linePtr->segPtr; 
+
+	for (prevPtr = NULL, seg2Ptr = index.linePtr->segPtr;
 		seg2Ptr != NULL && seg2Ptr != segPtr;
 		seg2Ptr = seg2Ptr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (seg2Ptr->typePtr == &tkTextRightMarkType ||
 		    seg2Ptr->typePtr == &tkTextLeftMarkType) {
+	        if (seg2Ptr->body.mark.hPtr == NULL) {
+                    if (seg2Ptr != textPtr->currentMarkPtr &&
+                            seg2Ptr != textPtr->insertMarkPtr) {
+	                /*
+                         * This is an insert or current mark from a
+                         * peer of textPtr.
+                         */
+                        continue;
+                    }
+	        }
 		prevPtr = seg2Ptr;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (prevPtr != NULL) {
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, 
-		Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->markTable, prevPtr->body.mark.hPtr),
-		TCL_STATIC);
-	    return TCL_OK;
+	    if (prevPtr == textPtr->currentMarkPtr) {
+		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "current", TCL_STATIC);
+	        return TCL_OK;
+	    } else if (prevPtr == textPtr->insertMarkPtr) {
+		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "insert", TCL_STATIC);
+	        return TCL_OK;
+	    } else if (prevPtr->body.mark.hPtr == NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * Ignore widget-specific marks for the other widgets.
+                 * This is either an insert or a current mark
+                 * (markPtr->body.mark.hPtr actually receives NULL
+                 * for these marks in TkTextSetMark).
+                 * The insert and current marks for textPtr having
+                 * already been tested above, the current segment is
+                 * an insert or current mark from a peer of textPtr,
+                 * which we don't want to return.
+                 */
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+			Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable,
+			prevPtr->body.mark.hPtr), TCL_STATIC);
+	        return TCL_OK;
+	    }
 	}
-	index.linePtr = TkBTreePreviousLine(index.linePtr);
-	if (index.linePtr == (TkTextLine *) NULL) {
+	index.linePtr = TkBTreePreviousLine(textPtr, index.linePtr);
+	if (index.linePtr == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
 	segPtr = NULL;
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkTextTag.c b/generic/tkTextTag.c
index b05eb8f..5162e16 100644
--- a/generic/tkTextTag.c
+++ b/generic/tkTextTag.c
@@ -1,93 +1,116 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkTextTag.c --
  *
- *	This module implements the "tag" subcommand of the widget command
- *	for text widgets, plus most of the other high-level functions
- *	related to tags.
+ *	This module implements the "tag" subcommand of the widget command for
+ *	text widgets, plus most of the other high-level functions related to
+ *	tags.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "default.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkText.h"
 
-static Tk_ConfigSpec tagConfigSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_BORDER, "-background", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, border), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-bgstipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, bgStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-borderwidth", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"0", Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, bdString),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-elide", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"0", Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, elideString),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-fgstipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, fgStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_FONT, "-font", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, tkfont), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_COLOR, "-foreground", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, fgColor), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-justify", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, justifyString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-lmargin1", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, lMargin1String), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-lmargin2", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, lMargin2String), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-offset", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, offsetString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-overstrike", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, overstrikeString),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-relief", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, reliefString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-rmargin", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, rMarginString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-spacing1", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, spacing1String), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-spacing2", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, spacing2String), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-spacing3", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, spacing3String), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-tabs", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, tabString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-underline", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, underlineString),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-wrap", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, wrapMode),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &TkTextWrapModeOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+/*
+ * The 'TkWrapMode' enum in tkText.h is used to define a type for the -wrap
+ * option of tags in a Text widget. These values are used as indices into the
+ * string table below. Tags are allowed an empty wrap value, but the widget as
+ * a whole is not.
+ */
+
+static const char *wrapStrings[] = {
+    "char", "none", "word", "", NULL
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * The 'TkTextTabStyle' enum in tkText.h is used to define a type for the
+ * -tabstyle option of the Text widget. These values are used as indices into
+ * the string table below. Tags are allowed an empty wrap value, but the
+ * widget as a whole is not.
  */
 
-static void		ChangeTagPriority _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextTag *tagPtr, int prio));
-static TkTextTag *	FindTag _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkText *textPtr, CONST char *tagName));
-static void		SortTags _ANSI_ARGS_((int numTags,
-			    TkTextTag **tagArrayPtr));
-static int		TagSortProc _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST VOID *first,
-			    CONST VOID *second));
+static const char *tabStyleStrings[] = {
+    "tabular", "wordprocessor", "", NULL
+};
+
+static const Tk_OptionSpec tagOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, border), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bgstipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, bgStipple), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", NULL, NULL,
+	"0", Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, borderWidthPtr), Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, borderWidth),
+	TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT|TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-elide", NULL, NULL,
+	"0", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, elideString),
+	TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT|TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-fgstipple", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, fgStipple), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, tkfont), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, fgColor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-justify", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, justifyString), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-lmargin1", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, lMargin1String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-lmargin2", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, lMargin2String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-offset", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, offsetString), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-overstrike", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, overstrikeString),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-relief", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, reliefString), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-rmargin", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, rMarginString), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-spacing1", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, spacing1String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-spacing2", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, spacing2String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-spacing3", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, spacing3String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tabs", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, tabStringPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-tabstyle", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, tabStyle),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, (ClientData) tabStyleStrings, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-underline", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, underlineString),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-wrap", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, wrapMode),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, (ClientData) wrapStrings, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_END}
+};
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
+ */
+
+static void		ChangeTagPriority(TkText *textPtr, TkTextTag *tagPtr,
+			    int prio);
+static TkTextTag *	FindTag(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkText *textPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *tagName);
+static void		SortTags(int numTags, TkTextTag **tagArrayPtr);
+static int		TagSortProc(CONST VOID *first, CONST VOID *second);
+static void             TagBindEvent(TkText *textPtr, XEvent *eventPtr,
+			    int numTags, TkTextTag **tagArrayPtr);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkTextTagCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "tag" options of
- *	the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation
- *	for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "tag" options of the widget
+ *	command for text widgets. See the user documentation for details on
+ *	what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -99,47 +122,61 @@ static int		TagSortProc _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST VOID *first,
  */
 
 int
-TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
-    register TkText *textPtr;	/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Argument strings.  Someone else has already
+TkTextTagCmd(
+    register TkText *textPtr,	/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. Someone else has already
 				 * parsed this command enough to know that
-				 * argv[1] is "tag". */
+				 * objv[1] is "tag". */
 {
-    int c, i, addTag;
-    size_t length;
-    char *fullOption;
+    static CONST char *tagOptionStrings[] = {
+	"add", "bind", "cget", "configure", "delete", "lower", "names",
+	"nextrange", "prevrange", "raise", "ranges", "remove", NULL
+    };
+    enum tagOptions {
+	TAG_ADD, TAG_BIND, TAG_CGET, TAG_CONFIGURE, TAG_DELETE, TAG_LOWER,
+	TAG_NAMES, TAG_NEXTRANGE, TAG_PREVRANGE, TAG_RAISE, TAG_RANGES,
+	TAG_REMOVE
+    };
+    int optionIndex, i;
     register TkTextTag *tagPtr;
-    TkTextIndex first, last, index1, index2;
+    TkTextIndex index1, index2;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
 
-    if (argc < 3) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		argv[0], " tag option ?arg arg ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], tagOptionStrings,
+	    "tag option", 0, &optionIndex) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    c = argv[2][0];
-    length = strlen(argv[2]);
-    if ((c == 'a') && (strncmp(argv[2], "add", length) == 0)) {
-	fullOption = "add";
-	addTag = 1;
-
-	addAndRemove:
-	if (argc < 5) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " tag ", fullOption,
-		    " tagName index1 ?index2 index1 index2 ...?\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+
+    switch ((enum tagOptions)optionIndex) {
+    case TAG_ADD:
+    case TAG_REMOVE: {
+	int addTag;
+
+	if (((enum tagOptions)optionIndex) == TAG_ADD) {
+	    addTag = 1;
+	} else {
+	    addTag = 0;
+	}
+	if (objc < 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv,
+		    "tagName index1 ?index2 index1 index2 ...?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	tagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, argv[3]);
-	for (i = 4; i < argc; i += 2) {
-	    if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[i], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
+	tagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), NULL);
+	for (i = 4; i < objc; i += 2) {
+	    if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[i],
+		    &index1) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (argc > (i+1)) {
-		if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[i+1], &index2)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
+	    if (objc > (i+1)) {
+		if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[i+1],
+			&index2) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index1, &index2) >= 0) {
@@ -147,85 +184,88 @@ TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 		}
 	    } else {
 		index2 = index1;
-		TkTextIndexForwChars(&index2, 1, &index2);
+		TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL,&index2, 1, &index2, COUNT_INDICES);
 	    }
 
 	    if (tagPtr->affectsDisplay) {
-		TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, &index1, &index2, tagPtr, !addTag);
+		TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index1, &index2,
+			tagPtr, !addTag);
 	    } else {
 		/*
-		 * Still need to trigger enter/leave events on tags that
-		 * have changed.
+		 * Still need to trigger enter/leave events on tags that have
+		 * changed.
 		 */
 
 		TkTextEventuallyRepick(textPtr);
 	    }
-	    TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2, tagPtr, addTag);
-
-	    /*
-	     * If the tag is "sel" then grab the selection if we're supposed
-	     * to export it and don't already have it.  Also, invalidate
-	     * partially-completed selection retrievals.
-	     */
-
-	    if (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) {
-		XEvent event;
+	    if (TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2, tagPtr, addTag)) {
 		/*
-		 * Send an event that the selection changed.
-		 * This is equivalent to
-		 * "event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>"
+		 * If the tag is "sel", and we actually adjusted something
+		 * then grab the selection if we're supposed to export it and
+		 * don't already have it.
+		 *
+		 * Also, invalidate partially-completed selection retrievals.
+		 * We only need to check whether the tag is "sel" for this
+		 * textPtr (not for other peer widget's "sel" tags) because we
+		 * cannot reach this code path with a different widget's "sel"
+		 * tag.
 		 */
 
-		memset((VOID *) &event, 0, sizeof(event));
-		event.xany.type = VirtualEvent;
-		event.xany.serial = NextRequest(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin));
-		event.xany.send_event = False;
-		event.xany.window = Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin);
-		event.xany.display = Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin);
-		((XVirtualEvent *) &event)->name = Tk_GetUid("Selection");
-		Tk_HandleEvent(&event);
-
-		if (addTag && textPtr->exportSelection
-			&& !(textPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)) {
-		    Tk_OwnSelection(textPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY,
-			    TkTextLostSelection, (ClientData) textPtr);
-		    textPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
+		if (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) {
+		    /*
+		     * Send an event that the selection changed.  This is
+		     * equivalent to:
+		     *	   event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>
+		     */
+
+		    TkTextSelectionEvent(textPtr);
+
+		    if (addTag && textPtr->exportSelection
+			    && !(textPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)) {
+			Tk_OwnSelection(textPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY,
+				TkTextLostSelection, (ClientData) textPtr);
+			textPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
+		    }
+		    textPtr->abortSelections = 1;
 		}
-		textPtr->abortSelections = 1;
 	    }
 	}
-    } else if ((c == 'b') && (strncmp(argv[2], "bind", length) == 0)) {
-	if ((argc < 4) || (argc > 6)) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " tag bind tagName ?sequence? ?command?\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_BIND:
+	if ((objc < 4) || (objc > 6)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?sequence? ?command?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	tagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, argv[3]);
+	tagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), NULL);
 
 	/*
-	 * Make a binding table if the widget doesn't already have
-	 * one.
+	 * Make a binding table if the widget doesn't already have one.
 	 */
 
-	if (textPtr->bindingTable == NULL) {
-	    textPtr->bindingTable = Tk_CreateBindingTable(interp);
+	if (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable == NULL) {
+	    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable =
+		    Tk_CreateBindingTable(interp);
 	}
 
-	if (argc == 6) {
+	if (objc == 6) {
 	    int append = 0;
 	    unsigned long mask;
+	    char *fifth = Tcl_GetString(objv[5]);
 
-	    if (argv[5][0] == 0) {
-		return Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, textPtr->bindingTable,
-			(ClientData) tagPtr, argv[4]);
+	    if (fifth[0] == 0) {
+		return Tk_DeleteBinding(interp,
+			textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
+			(ClientData) tagPtr->name, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
 	    }
-	    if (argv[5][0] == '+') {
-		argv[5]++;
+	    if (fifth[0] == '+') {
+		fifth++;
 		append = 1;
 	    }
-	    mask = Tk_CreateBinding(interp, textPtr->bindingTable,
-		    (ClientData) tagPtr, argv[4], argv[5], append);
+	    mask = Tk_CreateBinding(interp,
+		    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
+		    (ClientData) tagPtr->name, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]), fifth,
+		    append);
 	    if (mask == 0) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
@@ -234,89 +274,97 @@ TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 		    |Button5MotionMask|ButtonPressMask|ButtonReleaseMask
 		    |EnterWindowMask|LeaveWindowMask|KeyPressMask
 		    |KeyReleaseMask|PointerMotionMask|VirtualEventMask)) {
-		Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, textPtr->bindingTable,
-			(ClientData) tagPtr, argv[4]);
+		Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
+			(ClientData) tagPtr->name, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "requested illegal events; ",
 			"only key, button, motion, enter, leave, and virtual ",
-			"events may be used", (char *) NULL);
+			"events may be used", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	} else if (argc == 5) {
+	} else if (objc == 5) {
 	    CONST char *command;
-    
-	    command = Tk_GetBinding(interp, textPtr->bindingTable,
-		    (ClientData) tagPtr, argv[4]);
+
+	    command = Tk_GetBinding(interp,
+		    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
+		    (ClientData) tagPtr->name, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
 	    if (command == NULL) {
-		CONST char *string = Tcl_GetStringResult(interp); 
+		CONST char *string = Tcl_GetStringResult(interp);
 
 		/*
-		 * Ignore missing binding errors.  This is a special hack
-		 * that relies on the error message returned by FindSequence
-		 * in tkBind.c.
+		 * Ignore missing binding errors. This is a special hack that
+		 * relies on the error message returned by FindSequence in
+		 * tkBind.c.
 		 */
 
 		if (string[0] != '\0') {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		}
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	    } else {
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *) command, TCL_STATIC);
 	    }
 	} else {
-	    Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, textPtr->bindingTable,
-		    (ClientData) tagPtr);
-	}
-    } else if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(argv[2], "cget", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 2)) {
-	if (argc != 5) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " tag cget tagName option\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	    Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
+		    (ClientData) tagPtr->name);
 	}
-	tagPtr = FindTag(interp, textPtr, argv[3]);
-	if (tagPtr == NULL) {
+	break;
+    case TAG_CGET:
+	if (objc != 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "tag cget tagName option");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+
+	    tagPtr = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[3]);
+	    if (tagPtr == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) tagPtr,
+		    tagPtr->optionTable, objv[4], textPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
-	return Tk_ConfigureValue(interp, textPtr->tkwin, tagConfigSpecs,
-		(char *) tagPtr, argv[4], 0);
-    } else if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(argv[2], "configure", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 2)) {
-	if (argc < 4) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " tag configure tagName ?option? ?value? ",
-		    "?option value ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	break;
+    case TAG_CONFIGURE: {
+	int newTag;
+
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv,
+		    "tagName ?option? ?value? ?option value ...?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	tagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, argv[3]);
-	if (argc == 4) {
-	    return Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, textPtr->tkwin, tagConfigSpecs,
-		    (char *) tagPtr, (char *) NULL, 0);
-	} else if (argc == 5) {
-	    return Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, textPtr->tkwin, tagConfigSpecs,
-		    (char *) tagPtr, argv[4], 0);
+	tagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &newTag);
+	if (objc <= 5) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) tagPtr,
+		    tagPtr->optionTable,
+		    (objc == 5) ? objv[4] : NULL, textPtr->tkwin);
+
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	    return TCL_OK;
 	} else {
-	    int result;
+	    int result = TCL_OK;
+
+	    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char*)tagPtr, tagPtr->optionTable,
+		    objc-4, objv+4, textPtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
 
-	    result = Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, textPtr->tkwin, tagConfigSpecs,
-		    argc-4, argv+4, (char *) tagPtr, 0);
 	    /*
-	     * Some of the configuration options, like -underline
-	     * and -justify, require additional translation (this is
-	     * needed because we need to distinguish a particular value
-	     * of an option from "unspecified").
+	     * Some of the configuration options, like -underline and
+	     * -justify, require additional translation (this is needed
+	     * because we need to distinguish a particular value of an option
+	     * from "unspecified").
 	     */
 
-	    if (tagPtr->bdString != NULL) {
-		if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin, tagPtr->bdString,
-			&tagPtr->borderWidth) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (tagPtr->borderWidth < 0) {
-		    tagPtr->borderWidth = 0;
-		}
+	    if (tagPtr->borderWidth < 0) {
+		tagPtr->borderWidth = 0;
 	    }
 	    if (tagPtr->reliefString != NULL) {
 		if (Tk_GetRelief(interp, tagPtr->reliefString,
@@ -391,9 +439,9 @@ TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 		ckfree((char *) tagPtr->tabArrayPtr);
 		tagPtr->tabArrayPtr = NULL;
 	    }
-	    if (tagPtr->tabString != NULL) {
-		tagPtr->tabArrayPtr = TkTextGetTabs(interp, textPtr->tkwin,
-			tagPtr->tabString);
+	    if (tagPtr->tabStringPtr != NULL) {
+		tagPtr->tabArrayPtr =
+			TkTextGetTabs(interp, textPtr, tagPtr->tabStringPtr);
 		if (tagPtr->tabArrayPtr == NULL) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
@@ -409,59 +457,91 @@ TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 			&tagPtr->elide) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
+	        /* Indices are potentially obsolete after changing -elide,
+	         * especially those computed with "display" or "any"
+                 * submodifier, therefore increase the epoch.
+                 */
+	        textPtr->sharedTextPtr->stateEpoch++;
 	    }
 
 	    /*
 	     * If the "sel" tag was changed, be sure to mirror information
-	     * from the tag back into the text widget record.   NOTE: we
-	     * don't have to free up information in the widget record
-	     * before overwriting it, because it was mirrored in the tag
-	     * and hence freed when the tag field was overwritten.
+	     * from the tag back into the text widget record. NOTE: we don't
+	     * have to free up information in the widget record before
+	     * overwriting it, because it was mirrored in the tag and hence
+	     * freed when the tag field was overwritten.
 	     */
 
 	    if (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) {
 		textPtr->selBorder = tagPtr->border;
-		textPtr->selBdString = tagPtr->bdString;
+		textPtr->selBorderWidth = tagPtr->borderWidth;
+		textPtr->selBorderWidthPtr = tagPtr->borderWidthPtr;
 		textPtr->selFgColorPtr = tagPtr->fgColor;
 	    }
+
 	    tagPtr->affectsDisplay = 0;
-	    if ((tagPtr->border != NULL)
-		    || (tagPtr->bdString != NULL)
-		    || (tagPtr->reliefString != NULL)
-		    || (tagPtr->bgStipple != None)
-		    || (tagPtr->fgColor != NULL) || (tagPtr->tkfont != None)
-		    || (tagPtr->fgStipple != None)
+	    tagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry = 0;
+	    if ((tagPtr->elideString != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->tkfont != None)
 		    || (tagPtr->justifyString != NULL)
 		    || (tagPtr->lMargin1String != NULL)
 		    || (tagPtr->lMargin2String != NULL)
 		    || (tagPtr->offsetString != NULL)
-		    || (tagPtr->overstrikeString != NULL)
 		    || (tagPtr->rMarginString != NULL)
 		    || (tagPtr->spacing1String != NULL)
 		    || (tagPtr->spacing2String != NULL)
 		    || (tagPtr->spacing3String != NULL)
-		    || (tagPtr->tabString != NULL)
-		    || (tagPtr->underlineString != NULL)
-		    || (tagPtr->elideString != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->tabStringPtr != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->tabStyle != TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_NONE)
 		    || (tagPtr->wrapMode != TEXT_WRAPMODE_NULL)) {
 		tagPtr->affectsDisplay = 1;
+		tagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry = 1;
+	    }
+	    if ((tagPtr->border != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->reliefString != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->bgStipple != None)
+		    || (tagPtr->fgColor != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->fgStipple != None)
+		    || (tagPtr->overstrikeString != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->underlineString != NULL)) {
+		tagPtr->affectsDisplay = 1;
+	    }
+	    if (!newTag) {
+		/*
+		 * This line is not necessary if this is a new tag, since it
+		 * can't possibly have been applied to anything yet.
+		 */
+
+		/*
+		 * VMD: If this is the 'sel' tag, then we don't need to call
+		 * this for all peers, unless we actually want to synchronize
+		 * sel-style changes across the peers.
+		 */
+
+		TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+			NULL, NULL, tagPtr, 1);
 	    }
-	    TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, (TkTextIndex *) NULL,
-		    (TkTextIndex *) NULL, tagPtr, 1);
 	    return result;
 	}
-    } else if ((c == 'd') && (strncmp(argv[2], "delete", length) == 0)) {
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_DELETE: {
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 
-	if (argc < 4) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " tag delete tagName tagName ...\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?tagName ...?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	for (i = 3; i < argc; i++) {
-	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->tagTable, argv[i]);
+	for (i = 3; i < objc; i++) {
+	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]));
 	    if (hPtr == NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * Either this tag doesn't exist or it's the 'sel' tag (which
+		 * is not in the hash table). Either way we don't want to
+		 * delete it.
+		 */
+
 		continue;
 	    }
 	    tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
@@ -469,62 +549,28 @@ TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 		continue;
 	    }
 	    if (tagPtr->affectsDisplay) {
-		TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, (TkTextIndex *) NULL,
-			(TkTextIndex *) NULL, tagPtr, 1);
+		TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+			NULL, NULL, tagPtr, 1);
 	    }
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, 0, 0, &first);
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree),
-		    0, &last),
-	    TkBTreeTag(&first, &last, tagPtr, 0);
-
-	    if (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) {
-		XEvent event;
-		/*
-		 * Send an event that the selection changed.
-		 * This is equivalent to
-		 * "event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>"
-		 */
-
-		memset((VOID *) &event, 0, sizeof(event));
-		event.xany.type = VirtualEvent;
-		event.xany.serial = NextRequest(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin));
-		event.xany.send_event = False;
-		event.xany.window = Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin);
-		event.xany.display = Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin);
-		((XVirtualEvent *) &event)->name = Tk_GetUid("Selection");
-		Tk_HandleEvent(&event);
-	    }
-
+	    TkTextDeleteTag(textPtr, tagPtr);
 	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
-	    if (textPtr->bindingTable != NULL) {
-		Tk_DeleteAllBindings(textPtr->bindingTable,
-			(ClientData) tagPtr);
-	    }
-	
-	    /*
-	     * Update the tag priorities to reflect the deletion of this tag.
-	     */
-
-	    ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, textPtr->numTags-1);
-	    textPtr->numTags -= 1;
-	    TkTextFreeTag(textPtr, tagPtr);
 	}
-    } else if ((c == 'l') && (strncmp(argv[2], "lower", length) == 0)) {
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_LOWER: {
 	TkTextTag *tagPtr2;
 	int prio;
 
-	if ((argc != 4) && (argc != 5)) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " tag lower tagName ?belowThis?\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	if ((objc != 4) && (objc != 5)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?belowThis?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	tagPtr = FindTag(interp, textPtr, argv[3]);
+	tagPtr = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[3]);
 	if (tagPtr == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (argc == 5) {
-	    tagPtr2 = FindTag(interp, textPtr, argv[4]);
+	if (objc == 5) {
+	    tagPtr2 = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[4]);
 	    if (tagPtr2 == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
@@ -537,81 +583,99 @@ TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 	    prio = 0;
 	}
 	ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, prio);
-	TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, (TkTextIndex *) NULL, (TkTextIndex *) NULL,
-		tagPtr, 1);
-    } else if ((c == 'n') && (strncmp(argv[2], "names", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 2)) {
+
+	/*
+	 * If this is the 'sel' tag, then we don't actually need to call this
+	 * for all peers.
+	 */
+
+	TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, NULL, NULL, tagPtr, 1);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_NAMES: {
 	TkTextTag **arrayPtr;
 	int arraySize;
+	Tcl_Obj *listObj;
 
-	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " tag names ?index?\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?index?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (argc == 3) {
+	if (objc == 3) {
 	    Tcl_HashSearch search;
 	    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 
 	    arrayPtr = (TkTextTag **) ckalloc((unsigned)
-		    (textPtr->numTags * sizeof(TkTextTag *)));
-	    for (i = 0, hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->tagTable, &search);
+		    (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags * sizeof(TkTextTag *)));
+	    for (i=0, hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(
+		    &textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable, &search);
 		    hPtr != NULL; i++, hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 		arrayPtr[i] = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 	    }
-	    arraySize = textPtr->numTags;
+
+	    /*
+	     * The 'sel' tag is not in the hash table.
+	     */
+
+	    arrayPtr[i] = textPtr->selTagPtr;
+	    arraySize = ++i;
 	} else {
-	    if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[3], &index1)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
+	    if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[3],
+		    &index1) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    arrayPtr = TkBTreeGetTags(&index1, &arraySize);
+	    arrayPtr = TkBTreeGetTags(&index1, textPtr, &arraySize);
 	    if (arrayPtr == NULL) {
 		return TCL_OK;
 	    }
 	}
+
 	SortTags(arraySize, arrayPtr);
+	listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+
 	for (i = 0; i < arraySize; i++) {
 	    tagPtr = arrayPtr[i];
-	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, tagPtr->name);
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj,
+		    Tcl_NewStringObj(tagPtr->name,-1));
 	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj);
 	ckfree((char *) arrayPtr);
-    } else if ((c == 'n') && (strncmp(argv[2], "nextrange", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_NEXTRANGE: {
+	TkTextIndex last;
 	TkTextSearch tSearch;
 	char position[TK_POS_CHARS];
 
-	if ((argc != 5) && (argc != 6)) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " tag nextrange tagName index1 ?index2?\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	if ((objc != 5) && (objc != 6)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName index1 ?index2?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	tagPtr = FindTag((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, textPtr, argv[3]);
+	tagPtr = FindTag(NULL, textPtr, objv[3]);
 	if (tagPtr == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[4], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[4], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree),
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr),
 		0, &last);
-	if (argc == 5) {
+	if (objc == 5) {
 	    index2 = last;
-	} else if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[5], &index2)
-		!= TCL_OK) {
+	} else if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[5],
+		&index2) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * The search below is a bit tricky.  Rather than use the B-tree
-	 * facilities to stop the search at index2, let it search up
-	 * until the end of the file but check for a position past index2
-	 * ourselves.  The reason for doing it this way is that we only
-	 * care whether the *start* of the range is before index2;  once
-	 * we find the start, we don't want TkBTreeNextTag to abort the
-	 * search because the end of the range is after index2.
+	 * The search below is a bit tricky. Rather than use the B-tree
+	 * facilities to stop the search at index2, let it search up until the
+	 * end of the file but check for a position past index2 ourselves.
+	 * The reason for doing it this way is that we only care whether the
+	 * *start* of the range is before index2; once we find the start, we
+	 * don't want TkBTreeNextTag to abort the search because the end of
+	 * the range is after index2.
 	 */
 
 	TkBTreeStartSearch(&index1, &last, tagPtr, &tSearch);
@@ -620,12 +684,12 @@ TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 	    int offset;
 
 	    /*
-	     * The first character is tagged.  See if there is an
-	     * on-toggle just before the character.  If not, then
-	     * skip to the end of this tagged range.
+	     * The first character is tagged. See if there is an on-toggle
+	     * just before the character. If not, then skip to the end of this
+	     * tagged range.
 	     */
 
-	    for (segPtr = index1.linePtr->segPtr, offset = index1.byteIndex; 
+	    for (segPtr = index1.linePtr->segPtr, offset = index1.byteIndex;
 		    offset >= 0;
 		    offset -= segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 		if ((offset == 0) && (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)
@@ -634,7 +698,7 @@ TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 		}
 	    }
 	    if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch)) {
-		 return TCL_OK;
+		return TCL_OK;
 	    }
 	}
 
@@ -645,87 +709,139 @@ TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 	if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch)) {
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
-	gotStart:
+
+    gotStart:
 	if (TkTextIndexCmp(&tSearch.curIndex, &index2) >= 0) {
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
-	TkTextPrintIndex(&tSearch.curIndex, position);
+	TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position);
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position);
 	TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch);
-	TkTextPrintIndex(&tSearch.curIndex, position);
+	TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position);
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position);
-    } else if ((c == 'p') && (strncmp(argv[2], "prevrange", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_PREVRANGE: {
+	TkTextIndex last;
 	TkTextSearch tSearch;
 	char position1[TK_POS_CHARS];
 	char position2[TK_POS_CHARS];
 
-	if ((argc != 5) && (argc != 6)) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " tag prevrange tagName index1 ?index2?\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	if ((objc != 5) && (objc != 6)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName index1 ?index2?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	tagPtr = FindTag((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, textPtr, argv[3]);
+	tagPtr = FindTag(NULL, textPtr, objv[3]);
 	if (tagPtr == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[4], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[4], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (argc == 5) {
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, 0, 0, &index2);
-	} else if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[5], &index2)
-		!= TCL_OK) {
+	if (objc == 5) {
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0,
+		    &index2);
+	} else if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[5],
+		&index2) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * The search below is a bit weird.  The previous toggle can be
-	 * either an on or off toggle. If it is an on toggle, then we
-	 * need to turn around and search forward for the end toggle.
-	 * Otherwise we keep searching backwards.
+	 * The search below is a bit weird. The previous toggle can be either
+	 * an on or off toggle. If it is an on toggle, then we need to turn
+	 * around and search forward for the end toggle. Otherwise we keep
+	 * searching backwards.
 	 */
 
 	TkBTreeStartSearchBack(&index1, &index2, tagPtr, &tSearch);
 
 	if (!TkBTreePrevTag(&tSearch)) {
+	    /*
+	     * Special case, there may be a tag off toggle at index1, and a
+	     * tag on toggle before the start of a partial peer widget. In
+	     * this case we missed it.
+	     */
+
+	    if (textPtr->start != NULL && (textPtr->start == index2.linePtr)
+		    && (index2.byteIndex == 0)
+		    && TkBTreeCharTagged(&index2, tagPtr)
+		    && (TkTextIndexCmp(&index2, &index1) < 0)) {
+		/*
+		 * The first character is tagged, so just add the range from
+		 * the first char to the start of the range.
+		 */
+
+		TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &index2, position1);
+		TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &index1, position2);
+		Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position1);
+		Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position2);
+	    }
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
+
 	if (tSearch.segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType) {
-	    TkTextPrintIndex(&tSearch.curIndex, position1);
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree),
+	    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position1);
+	    if (textPtr->start != NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * Make sure the first index is not before the first allowed
+		 * text index in this widget.
+		 */
+
+		TkTextIndex firstIndex;
+
+		firstIndex.linePtr = textPtr->start;
+		firstIndex.byteIndex = 0;
+		firstIndex.textPtr = NULL;
+		if (TkTextIndexCmp(&tSearch.curIndex, &firstIndex) < 0) {
+		    if (TkTextIndexCmp(&firstIndex, &index1) >= 0) {
+			/*
+			 * But now the new first index is actually too far
+			 * along in the text, so nothing is returned.
+			 */
+
+			return TCL_OK;
+		    }
+		    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &firstIndex, position1);
+		}
+	    }
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr),
 		    0, &last);
 	    TkBTreeStartSearch(&tSearch.curIndex, &last, tagPtr, &tSearch);
 	    TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch);
-	    TkTextPrintIndex(&tSearch.curIndex, position2);
+	    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position2);
 	} else {
-	    TkTextPrintIndex(&tSearch.curIndex, position2);
+	    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position2);
 	    TkBTreePrevTag(&tSearch);
+	    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position1);
 	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(&tSearch.curIndex, &index2) < 0) {
-		return TCL_OK;
+		if (textPtr->start != NULL && index2.linePtr == textPtr->start
+			&& index2.byteIndex == 0) {
+		    /* It's ok */
+		    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &index2, position1);
+		} else {
+		    return TCL_OK;
+		}
 	    }
-	    TkTextPrintIndex(&tSearch.curIndex, position1);
 	}
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position1);
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position2);
-    } else if ((c == 'r') && (strncmp(argv[2], "raise", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 3)) {
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_RAISE: {
 	TkTextTag *tagPtr2;
 	int prio;
 
-	if ((argc != 4) && (argc != 5)) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " tag raise tagName ?aboveThis?\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	if ((objc != 4) && (objc != 5)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?aboveThis?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	tagPtr = FindTag(interp, textPtr, argv[3]);
+	tagPtr = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[3]);
 	if (tagPtr == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (argc == 5) {
-	    tagPtr2 = FindTag(interp, textPtr, argv[4]);
+	if (objc == 5) {
+	    tagPtr2 = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[4]);
 	    if (tagPtr2 == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
@@ -735,48 +851,61 @@ TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 		prio = tagPtr2->priority + 1;
 	    }
 	} else {
-	    prio = textPtr->numTags-1;
+	    prio = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags-1;
 	}
 	ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, prio);
-	TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr, (TkTextIndex *) NULL, (TkTextIndex *) NULL,
-		tagPtr, 1);
-    } else if ((c == 'r') && (strncmp(argv[2], "ranges", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 3)) {
+
+	/*
+	 * If this is the 'sel' tag, then we don't actually need to call this
+	 * for all peers.
+	 */
+
+	TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, NULL, NULL, tagPtr, 1);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_RANGES: {
+	TkTextIndex first, last;
 	TkTextSearch tSearch;
-	char position[TK_POS_CHARS];
+	Tcl_Obj *listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+	int count = 0;
 
-	if (argc != 4) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " tag ranges tagName\"", (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	tagPtr = FindTag((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, textPtr, argv[3]);
+	tagPtr = FindTag(NULL, textPtr, objv[3]);
 	if (tagPtr == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, 0, 0, &first);
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree),
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0,
+		&first);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr),
 		0, &last);
 	TkBTreeStartSearch(&first, &last, tagPtr, &tSearch);
 	if (TkBTreeCharTagged(&first, tagPtr)) {
-	    TkTextPrintIndex(&first, position);
-	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position);
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj,
+		    TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, &first));
+	    count++;
 	}
 	while (TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch)) {
-	    TkTextPrintIndex(&tSearch.curIndex, position);
-	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position);
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj,
+		    TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex));
+	    count++;
 	}
-    } else if ((c == 'r') && (strncmp(argv[2], "remove", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 2)) {
-	fullOption = "remove";
-	addTag = 0;
-	goto addAndRemove;
-    } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad tag option \"", argv[2],
-		"\": must be add, bind, cget, configure, delete, lower, ",
-		"names, nextrange, raise, ranges, or remove",
-		(char *) NULL);
-	return TCL_ERROR;
+	if (count % 2 == 1) {
+	    /*
+	     * If a text widget uses '-end', it won't necessarily run to the
+	     * end of the B-tree, and therefore the tag range might not be
+	     * closed. In this case we add the end of the range.
+	     */
+
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj,
+		    TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, &last));
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj);
+	break;
+    }
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -786,46 +915,68 @@ TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * TkTextCreateTag --
  *
- *	Find the record describing a tag within a given text widget,
- *	creating a new record if one doesn't already exist.
+ *	Find the record describing a tag within a given text widget, creating
+ *	a new record if one doesn't already exist.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a pointer to the TkTextTag record for tagName.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new tag record is created if there isn't one already defined
- *	for tagName.
+ *	A new tag record is created if there isn't one already defined for
+ *	tagName.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 TkTextTag *
-TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, tagName)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget in which tag is being used. */
-    CONST char *tagName;	/* Name of desired tag. */
+TkTextCreateTag(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget in which tag is being used. */
+    CONST char *tagName,	/* Name of desired tag. */
+    int *newTag)		/* If non-NULL, then return 1 if new, or 0 if
+				 * already exists. */
 {
     register TkTextTag *tagPtr;
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-    int new;
-
-    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->tagTable, tagName, &new);
-    if (!new) {
-	return (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = NULL;
+    int isNew;
+    CONST char *name;
+
+    if (!strcmp(tagName, "sel")) {
+        if (textPtr->selTagPtr != NULL) {
+	    if (newTag != NULL) {
+	        *newTag = 0;
+	    }
+            return textPtr->selTagPtr;
+        }
+	if (newTag != NULL) {
+	    *newTag = 1;
+        }
+	name = "sel";
+    } else {
+	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable,
+		tagName, &isNew);
+	if (newTag != NULL) {
+	    *newTag = isNew;
+	}
+	if (!isNew) {
+	    return (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	}
+	name = Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable, hPtr);
     }
 
     /*
-     * No existing entry.  Create a new one, initialize it, and add a
-     * pointer to it to the hash table entry.
+     * No existing entry. Create a new one, initialize it, and add a pointer
+     * to it to the hash table entry.
      */
 
     tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextTag));
-    tagPtr->name = Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->tagTable, hPtr);
+    tagPtr->name = name;
+    tagPtr->textPtr = NULL;
     tagPtr->toggleCount = 0;
     tagPtr->tagRootPtr = NULL;
-    tagPtr->priority = textPtr->numTags;
+    tagPtr->priority = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags;
     tagPtr->border = NULL;
-    tagPtr->bdString = NULL;
     tagPtr->borderWidth = 0;
+    tagPtr->borderWidthPtr = NULL;
     tagPtr->reliefString = NULL;
     tagPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
     tagPtr->bgStipple = None;
@@ -850,16 +1001,25 @@ TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, tagName)
     tagPtr->spacing2 = 0;
     tagPtr->spacing3String = NULL;
     tagPtr->spacing3 = 0;
-    tagPtr->tabString = NULL;
+    tagPtr->tabStringPtr = NULL;
     tagPtr->tabArrayPtr = NULL;
+    tagPtr->tabStyle = TK_TEXT_TABSTYLE_NONE;
     tagPtr->underlineString = NULL;
     tagPtr->underline = 0;
     tagPtr->elideString = NULL;
     tagPtr->elide = 0;
     tagPtr->wrapMode = TEXT_WRAPMODE_NULL;
     tagPtr->affectsDisplay = 0;
-    textPtr->numTags++;
-    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, tagPtr);
+    tagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry = 0;
+    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags++;
+    if (!strcmp(tagName, "sel")) {
+	tagPtr->textPtr = textPtr;
+	textPtr->refCount++;
+    } else {
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, tagPtr);
+    }
+    tagPtr->optionTable =
+	    Tk_CreateOptionTable(textPtr->interp, tagOptionSpecs);
     return tagPtr;
 }
 
@@ -871,10 +1031,9 @@ TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, tagName)
  *	See if tag is defined for a given widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If tagName is defined in textPtr, a pointer to its TkTextTag
- *	structure is returned.  Otherwise NULL is returned and an
- *	error message is recorded in the interp's result unless interp
- *	is NULL.
+ *	If tagName is defined in textPtr, a pointer to its TkTextTag structure
+ *	is returned. Otherwise NULL is returned and an error message is
+ *	recorded in the interp's result unless interp is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -883,22 +1042,29 @@ TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, tagName)
  */
 
 static TkTextTag *
-FindTag(interp, textPtr, tagName)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error message;
-				 * if NULL, then don't record an error
+FindTag(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error message; if
+				 * NULL, then don't record an error
 				 * message. */
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget in which tag is being used. */
-    CONST char *tagName;	/* Name of desired tag. */
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Widget in which tag is being used. */
+    Tcl_Obj *tagName)	        /* Name of desired tag. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+    int len;
+    CONST char *str;
 
-    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->tagTable, tagName);
+    str = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(tagName, &len);
+    if (len == 3 && !strcmp(str,"sel")) {
+        return textPtr->selTagPtr;
+    }
+    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable,
+	    Tcl_GetString(tagName));
     if (hPtr != NULL) {
 	return (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
     }
     if (interp != NULL) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "tag \"", tagName,
-		"\" isn't defined in text widget", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "tag \"", Tcl_GetString(tagName),
+		"\" isn't defined in text widget", NULL);
     }
     return NULL;
 }
@@ -906,10 +1072,76 @@ FindTag(interp, textPtr, tagName)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * TkTextDeleteTag --
+ *
+ *	This function is called to carry out most actions associated with the
+ *	'tag delete' sub-command. It will remove all evidence of the tag from
+ *	the B-tree, and then call TkTextFreeTag to clean up the tag structure
+ *	itself.
+ *
+ *	The only actions this doesn't carry out it to check if the deletion of
+ *	the tag requires something to be re-displayed, and to remove the tag
+ *	from the tagTable (hash table) if that is necessary (i.e. if it's not
+ *	the 'sel' tag). It is expected that the caller carry out both of these
+ *	actions.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Memory and other resources are freed, the B-tree is manipulated.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkTextDeleteTag(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Info about overall widget. */
+    register TkTextTag *tagPtr)	/* Tag being deleted. */
+{
+    TkTextIndex first, last;
+
+    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0, &first);
+    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+	    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr), 0, &last),
+    TkBTreeTag(&first, &last, tagPtr, 0);
+
+    if (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) {
+	/*
+	 * Send an event that the selection changed. This is equivalent to:
+	 *	event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>
+	 */
+
+	TkTextSelectionEvent(textPtr);
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * Since all peer widgets have an independent "sel" tag, we
+	 * don't want removal of one sel tag to remove bindings which
+	 * are still valid in other peer widgets.
+	 */
+
+	if (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable != NULL) {
+	    Tk_DeleteAllBindings(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
+		    (ClientData) tagPtr->name);
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Update the tag priorities to reflect the deletion of this tag.
+     */
+
+    ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags-1);
+    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags -= 1;
+    TkTextFreeTag(textPtr, tagPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TkTextFreeTag --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when a tag is deleted to free up the
- *	memory and other resources associated with the tag.
+ *	This function is called when a tag is deleted to free up the memory
+ *	and other resources associated with the tag.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -921,65 +1153,62 @@ FindTag(interp, textPtr, tagName)
  */
 
 void
-TkTextFreeTag(textPtr, tagPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Info about overall widget. */
-    register TkTextTag *tagPtr;		/* Tag being deleted. */
+TkTextFreeTag(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Info about overall widget. */
+    register TkTextTag *tagPtr)	/* Tag being deleted. */
 {
-    if (tagPtr->border != None) {
-	Tk_Free3DBorder(tagPtr->border);
-    }
-    if (tagPtr->bdString != NULL) {
-	ckfree(tagPtr->bdString);
-    }
-    if (tagPtr->reliefString != NULL) {
-	ckfree(tagPtr->reliefString);
-    }
-    if (tagPtr->bgStipple != None) {
-	Tk_FreeBitmap(textPtr->display, tagPtr->bgStipple);
-    }
-    if (tagPtr->fgColor != None) {
-	Tk_FreeColor(tagPtr->fgColor);
-    }
-    Tk_FreeFont(tagPtr->tkfont);
-    if (tagPtr->fgStipple != None) {
-	Tk_FreeBitmap(textPtr->display, tagPtr->fgStipple);
-    }
-    if (tagPtr->justifyString != NULL) {
-	ckfree(tagPtr->justifyString);
-    }
-    if (tagPtr->lMargin1String != NULL) {
-	ckfree(tagPtr->lMargin1String);
-    }
-    if (tagPtr->lMargin2String != NULL) {
-	ckfree(tagPtr->lMargin2String);
-    }
-    if (tagPtr->offsetString != NULL) {
-	ckfree(tagPtr->offsetString);
-    }
-    if (tagPtr->overstrikeString != NULL) {
-	ckfree(tagPtr->overstrikeString);
-    }
-    if (tagPtr->rMarginString != NULL) {
-	ckfree(tagPtr->rMarginString);
-    }
-    if (tagPtr->spacing1String != NULL) {
-	ckfree(tagPtr->spacing1String);
-    }
-    if (tagPtr->spacing2String != NULL) {
-	ckfree(tagPtr->spacing2String);
-    }
-    if (tagPtr->spacing3String != NULL) {
-	ckfree(tagPtr->spacing3String);
-    }
-    if (tagPtr->tabString != NULL) {
-	ckfree(tagPtr->tabString);
-    }
+    int i;
+
+    /*
+     * Let Tk do most of the hard work for us.
+     */
+
+    Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) tagPtr, tagPtr->optionTable,
+	    textPtr->tkwin);
+
+    /*
+     * This associated information is managed by us.
+     */
+
     if (tagPtr->tabArrayPtr != NULL) {
 	ckfree((char *) tagPtr->tabArrayPtr);
     }
-    if (tagPtr->underlineString != NULL) {
-	ckfree(tagPtr->underlineString);
+
+    /*
+     * Make sure this tag isn't referenced from the 'current' tag array.
+     */
+
+    for (i = 0; i < textPtr->numCurTags; i++) {
+	if (textPtr->curTagArrayPtr[i] == tagPtr) {
+	    for (; i < textPtr->numCurTags-1; i++) {
+		textPtr->curTagArrayPtr[i] = textPtr->curTagArrayPtr[i+1];
+	    }
+	    textPtr->curTagArrayPtr[textPtr->numCurTags-1] = NULL;
+	    textPtr->numCurTags--;
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If this tag is widget-specific (peer widgets) then clean up the
+     * refCount it holds.
+     */
+
+    if (tagPtr->textPtr != NULL) {
+	if (textPtr != tagPtr->textPtr) {
+	    Tcl_Panic("Tag being deleted from wrong widget");
+	}
+	textPtr->refCount--;
+	if (textPtr->refCount == 0) {
+	    ckfree((char *) textPtr);
+	}
+	tagPtr->textPtr = NULL;
     }
+
+    /*
+     * Finally free the tag's memory.
+     */
+
     ckfree((char *) tagPtr);
 }
 
@@ -988,9 +1217,8 @@ TkTextFreeTag(textPtr, tagPtr)
  *
  * SortTags --
  *
- *	This procedure sorts an array of tag pointers in increasing
- *	order of priority, optimizing for the common case where the
- *	array is small.
+ *	This function sorts an array of tag pointers in increasing order of
+ *	priority, optimizing for the common case where the array is small.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1002,9 +1230,9 @@ TkTextFreeTag(textPtr, tagPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-SortTags(numTags, tagArrayPtr)
-    int numTags;		/* Number of tag pointers at *tagArrayPtr. */
-    TkTextTag **tagArrayPtr;	/* Pointer to array of pointers. */
+SortTags(
+    int numTags,		/* Number of tag pointers at *tagArrayPtr. */
+    TkTextTag **tagArrayPtr)	/* Pointer to array of pointers. */
 {
     int i, j, prio;
     register TkTextTag **tagPtrPtr;
@@ -1028,8 +1256,7 @@ SortTags(numTags, tagArrayPtr)
 	    *tagArrayPtr = tmp;
 	}
     } else {
-	qsort((VOID *) tagArrayPtr, (unsigned) numTags, sizeof (TkTextTag *),
-		    TagSortProc);
+	qsort(tagArrayPtr,(unsigned)numTags,sizeof(TkTextTag *),TagSortProc);
     }
 }
 
@@ -1038,14 +1265,14 @@ SortTags(numTags, tagArrayPtr)
  *
  * TagSortProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by qsort when sorting an array of
- *	tags in priority order.
+ *	This function is called by qsort() when sorting an array of tags in
+ *	priority order.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is -1 if the first argument should be before
- *	the second element (i.e. it has lower priority), 0 if it's
- *	equivalent (this should never happen!), and 1 if it should be
- *	after the second element.
+ *	The return value is -1 if the first argument should be before the
+ *	second element (i.e. it has lower priority), 0 if it's equivalent
+ *	(this should never happen!), and 1 if it should be after the second
+ *	element.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1054,8 +1281,9 @@ SortTags(numTags, tagArrayPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-TagSortProc(first, second)
-    CONST VOID *first, *second;		/* Elements to be compared. */
+TagSortProc(
+    CONST void *first,
+    CONST void *second)		/* Elements to be compared. */
 {
     TkTextTag *tagPtr1, *tagPtr2;
 
@@ -1069,28 +1297,26 @@ TagSortProc(first, second)
  *
  * ChangeTagPriority --
  *
- *	This procedure changes the priority of a tag by modifying
- *	its priority and the priorities of other tags that are affected
- *	by the change.
+ *	This function changes the priority of a tag by modifying its priority
+ *	and the priorities of other tags that are affected by the change.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Priorities may be changed for some or all of the tags in
- *	textPtr.  The tags will be arranged so that there is exactly
- *	one tag at each priority level between 0 and textPtr->numTags-1,
- *	with tagPtr at priority "prio".
+ *	Priorities may be changed for some or all of the tags in textPtr. The
+ *	tags will be arranged so that there is exactly one tag at each
+ *	priority level between 0 and textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags-1, with
+ *	tagPtr at priority "prio".
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, prio)
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Information about text widget. */
-    TkTextTag *tagPtr;			/* Tag whose priority is to be
-					 * changed. */
-    int prio;				/* New priority for tag. */
+ChangeTagPriority(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    TkTextTag *tagPtr,		/* Tag whose priority is to be changed. */
+    int prio)			/* New priority for tag. */
 {
     int low, high, delta;
     register TkTextTag *tagPtr2;
@@ -1100,12 +1326,13 @@ ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, prio)
     if (prio < 0) {
 	prio = 0;
     }
-    if (prio >= textPtr->numTags) {
-	prio = textPtr->numTags-1;
+    if (prio >= textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags) {
+	prio = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags-1;
     }
     if (prio == tagPtr->priority) {
 	return;
-    } else if (prio < tagPtr->priority) {
+    }
+    if (prio < tagPtr->priority) {
 	low = prio;
 	high = tagPtr->priority-1;
 	delta = 1;
@@ -1114,7 +1341,16 @@ ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, prio)
 	high = prio;
 	delta = -1;
     }
-    for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->tagTable, &search);
+
+    /*
+     * Adjust first the 'sel' tag, then all others from the hash table
+     */
+
+    if ((textPtr->selTagPtr->priority >= low)
+	    && (textPtr->selTagPtr->priority <= high)) {
+	textPtr->selTagPtr->priority += delta;
+    }
+    for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable, &search);
 	    hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	tagPtr2 = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 	if ((tagPtr2->priority >= low) && (tagPtr2->priority <= high)) {
@@ -1129,37 +1365,36 @@ ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, prio)
  *
  * TkTextBindProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher to handle
- *	events associated with bindings on items.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher to handle events
+ *	associated with bindings on items.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Depends on the command invoked as part of the binding
- *	(if there was any).
+ *	Depends on the command invoked as part of the binding (if there was
+ *	any).
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkTextBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to canvas structure. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Pointer to X event that just
-					 * happened. */
+TkTextBindProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to canvas structure. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Pointer to X event that just happened. */
 {
     TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData;
     int repick  = 0;
 
-# define AnyButtonMask (Button1Mask|Button2Mask|Button3Mask\
-	|Button4Mask|Button5Mask)
+# define AnyButtonMask \
+	(Button1Mask|Button2Mask|Button3Mask|Button4Mask|Button5Mask)
 
-    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) textPtr);
+    textPtr->refCount++;
 
     /*
-     * This code simulates grabs for mouse buttons by keeping track
-     * of whether a button is pressed and refusing to pick a new current
-     * character while a button is pressed.
+     * This code simulates grabs for mouse buttons by keeping track of whether
+     * a button is pressed and refusing to pick a new current character while
+     * a button is pressed.
      */
 
     if (eventPtr->type == ButtonPress) {
@@ -1168,24 +1403,24 @@ TkTextBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	int mask;
 
 	switch (eventPtr->xbutton.button) {
-	    case Button1:
-		mask = Button1Mask;
-		break;
-	    case Button2:
-		mask = Button2Mask;
-		break;
-	    case Button3:
-		mask = Button3Mask;
-		break;
-	    case Button4:
-		mask = Button4Mask;
-		break;
-	    case Button5:
-		mask = Button5Mask;
-		break;
-	    default:
-		mask = 0;
-		break;
+	case Button1:
+	    mask = Button1Mask;
+	    break;
+	case Button2:
+	    mask = Button2Mask;
+	    break;
+	case Button3:
+	    mask = Button3Mask;
+	    break;
+	case Button4:
+	    mask = Button4Mask;
+	    break;
+	case Button5:
+	    mask = Button5Mask;
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    mask = 0;
+	    break;
 	}
 	if ((eventPtr->xbutton.state & AnyButtonMask) == (unsigned) mask) {
 	    textPtr->flags &= ~BUTTON_DOWN;
@@ -1208,10 +1443,11 @@ TkTextBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	}
 	TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr);
     }
-    if ((textPtr->numCurTags > 0) && (textPtr->bindingTable != NULL)
-	    && (textPtr->tkwin != NULL)) {
-	Tk_BindEvent(textPtr->bindingTable, eventPtr, textPtr->tkwin,
-		textPtr->numCurTags, (ClientData *) textPtr->curTagArrayPtr);
+    if ((textPtr->numCurTags > 0)
+	    && (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable != NULL)
+	    && (textPtr->tkwin != NULL) && !(textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
+	TagBindEvent(textPtr, eventPtr, textPtr->numCurTags,
+		textPtr->curTagArrayPtr);
     }
     if (repick) {
 	unsigned int oldState;
@@ -1219,12 +1455,16 @@ TkTextBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	oldState = eventPtr->xbutton.state;
 	eventPtr->xbutton.state &= ~(Button1Mask|Button2Mask
 		|Button3Mask|Button4Mask|Button5Mask);
-	TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr);
+	if (!(textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
+	    TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr);
+	}
 	eventPtr->xbutton.state = oldState;
     }
 
-    done:
-    Tcl_Release((ClientData) textPtr);
+  done:
+    if (--textPtr->refCount == 0) {
+	ckfree((char *) textPtr);
+    }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1232,57 +1472,55 @@ TkTextBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkTextPickCurrent --
  *
- *	Find the character containing the coordinates in an event
- *	and place the "current" mark on that character.  If the
- *	"current" mark has moved then generate a fake leave event
- *	on the old current character and a fake enter event on the new
- *	current character.
+ *	Find the character containing the coordinates in an event and place
+ *	the "current" mark on that character. If the "current" mark has moved
+ *	then generate a fake leave event on the old current character and a
+ *	fake enter event on the new current character.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The current mark for textPtr may change.  If it does,
- *	then the commands associated with character entry and leave
- *	could do just about anything.  For example, the text widget
- *	might be deleted.  It is up to the caller to protect itself
- *	with calls to Tcl_Preserve and Tcl_Release.
+ *	The current mark for textPtr may change. If it does, then the commands
+ *	associated with character entry and leave could do just about
+ *	anything. For example, the text widget might be deleted. It is up to
+ *	the caller to protect itself by incrementing the refCount of the text
+ *	widget.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr)
-    register TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget in which to select
-					 * current character. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Event describing location of
-					 * mouse cursor.  Must be EnterWindow,
-					 * LeaveWindow, ButtonRelease, or
-					 * MotionNotify. */
+TkTextPickCurrent(
+    register TkText *textPtr,	/* Text widget in which to select current
+				 * character. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Event describing location of mouse cursor.
+				 * Must be EnterWindow, LeaveWindow,
+				 * ButtonRelease, or MotionNotify. */
 {
     TkTextIndex index;
     TkTextTag **oldArrayPtr, **newArrayPtr;
-    TkTextTag **copyArrayPtr = NULL;	/* Initialization needed to prevent
-					 * compiler warning. */
-
-    int numOldTags, numNewTags, i, j, size;
+    TkTextTag **copyArrayPtr = NULL;
+				/* Initialization needed to prevent compiler
+				 * warning. */
+    int numOldTags, numNewTags, i, j, size, nearby;
     XEvent event;
 
     /*
-     * If a button is down, then don't do anything at all;  we'll be
-     * called again when all buttons are up, and we can repick then.
-     * This implements a form of mouse grabbing.
+     * If a button is down, then don't do anything at all; we'll be called
+     * again when all buttons are up, and we can repick then. This implements
+     * a form of mouse grabbing.
      */
 
     if (textPtr->flags & BUTTON_DOWN) {
-	if (((eventPtr->type == EnterNotify) || (eventPtr->type == LeaveNotify))
+	if (((eventPtr->type == EnterNotify)
+		|| (eventPtr->type == LeaveNotify))
 		&& ((eventPtr->xcrossing.mode == NotifyGrab)
 		|| (eventPtr->xcrossing.mode == NotifyUngrab))) {
 	    /*
-	     * Special case:  the window is being entered or left because
-	     * of a grab or ungrab.  In this case, repick after all.
-	     * Furthermore, clear BUTTON_DOWN to release the simulated
-	     * grab.
+	     * Special case: the window is being entered or left because of a
+	     * grab or ungrab. In this case, repick after all. Furthermore,
+	     * clear BUTTON_DOWN to release the simulated grab.
 	     */
 
 	    textPtr->flags &= ~BUTTON_DOWN;
@@ -1292,12 +1530,12 @@ TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Save information about this event in the widget in case we have
-     * to synthesize more enter and leave events later (e.g. because a
-     * character was deleted, causing a new character to be underneath
-     * the mouse cursor).  Also translate MotionNotify events into
-     * EnterNotify events, since that's what gets reported to event
-     * handlers when the current character changes.
+     * Save information about this event in the widget in case we have to
+     * synthesize more enter and leave events later (e.g. because a character
+     * was deleted, causing a new character to be underneath the mouse
+     * cursor). Also translate MotionNotify events into EnterNotify events,
+     * since that's what gets reported to event handlers when the current
+     * character changes.
      */
 
     if (eventPtr != &textPtr->pickEvent) {
@@ -1328,33 +1566,37 @@ TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the new current character, then find and sort all of the
-     * tags associated with it.
+     * Find the new current character, then find and sort all of the tags
+     * associated with it.
      */
 
     if (textPtr->pickEvent.type != LeaveNotify) {
 	TkTextPixelIndex(textPtr, textPtr->pickEvent.xcrossing.x,
-		textPtr->pickEvent.xcrossing.y, &index);
-	newArrayPtr = TkBTreeGetTags(&index, &numNewTags);
-	SortTags(numNewTags, newArrayPtr);
+		textPtr->pickEvent.xcrossing.y, &index, &nearby);
+	if (nearby) {
+	    newArrayPtr = NULL;
+	    numNewTags = 0;
+	} else {
+	    newArrayPtr = TkBTreeGetTags(&index, textPtr, &numNewTags);
+	    SortTags(numNewTags, newArrayPtr);
+	}
     } else {
 	newArrayPtr = NULL;
 	numNewTags = 0;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Resort the tags associated with the previous marked character
-     * (the priorities might have changed), then make a copy of the
-     * new tags, and compare the old tags to the copy, nullifying
-     * any tags that are present in both groups (i.e. the tags that
-     * haven't changed).
+     * Resort the tags associated with the previous marked character (the
+     * priorities might have changed), then make a copy of the new tags, and
+     * compare the old tags to the copy, nullifying any tags that are present
+     * in both groups (i.e. the tags that haven't changed).
      */
 
     SortTags(textPtr->numCurTags, textPtr->curTagArrayPtr);
     if (numNewTags > 0) {
 	size = numNewTags * sizeof(TkTextTag *);
 	copyArrayPtr = (TkTextTag **) ckalloc((unsigned) size);
-	memcpy((VOID *) copyArrayPtr, (VOID *) newArrayPtr, (size_t) size);
+	memcpy(copyArrayPtr, newArrayPtr, (size_t) size);
 	for (i = 0; i < textPtr->numCurTags; i++) {
 	    for (j = 0; j < numNewTags; j++) {
 		if (textPtr->curTagArrayPtr[i] == copyArrayPtr[j]) {
@@ -1367,13 +1609,12 @@ TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Invoke the binding system with a LeaveNotify event for all of
-     * the tags that have gone away.  We have to be careful here,
-     * because it's possible that the binding could do something
-     * (like calling tkwait) that eventually modifies
-     * textPtr->curTagArrayPtr.  To avoid problems in situations like
-     * this, update curTagArrayPtr to its new value before invoking
-     * any bindings, and don't use it any more here.
+     * Invoke the binding system with a LeaveNotify event for all of the tags
+     * that have gone away. We have to be careful here, because it's possible
+     * that the binding could do something (like calling tkwait) that
+     * eventually modifies textPtr->curTagArrayPtr. To avoid problems in
+     * situations like this, update curTagArrayPtr to its new value before
+     * invoking any bindings, and don't use it any more here.
      */
 
     numOldTags = textPtr->numCurTags;
@@ -1381,41 +1622,120 @@ TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr)
     oldArrayPtr = textPtr->curTagArrayPtr;
     textPtr->curTagArrayPtr = newArrayPtr;
     if (numOldTags != 0) {
-	if ((textPtr->bindingTable != NULL) && (textPtr->tkwin != NULL)) {
+	if ((textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable != NULL)
+		&& (textPtr->tkwin != NULL)
+		&& !(textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
 	    event = textPtr->pickEvent;
 	    event.type = LeaveNotify;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Always use a detail of NotifyAncestor.  Besides being
-	     * consistent, this avoids problems where the binding code
-	     * will discard NotifyInferior events.
+	     * Always use a detail of NotifyAncestor. Besides being
+	     * consistent, this avoids problems where the binding code will
+	     * discard NotifyInferior events.
 	     */
 
 	    event.xcrossing.detail = NotifyAncestor;
-	    Tk_BindEvent(textPtr->bindingTable, &event, textPtr->tkwin,
-		    numOldTags, (ClientData *) oldArrayPtr);
+	    TagBindEvent(textPtr, &event, numOldTags, oldArrayPtr);
 	}
 	ckfree((char *) oldArrayPtr);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Reset the "current" mark (be careful to recompute its location,
-     * since it might have changed during an event binding).  Then
-     * invoke the binding system with an EnterNotify event for all of
-     * the tags that have just appeared.
+     * Reset the "current" mark (be careful to recompute its location, since
+     * it might have changed during an event binding). Then invoke the binding
+     * system with an EnterNotify event for all of the tags that have just
+     * appeared.
      */
 
     TkTextPixelIndex(textPtr, textPtr->pickEvent.xcrossing.x,
-	    textPtr->pickEvent.xcrossing.y, &index);
+	    textPtr->pickEvent.xcrossing.y, &index, &nearby);
     TkTextSetMark(textPtr, "current", &index);
     if (numNewTags != 0) {
-	if ((textPtr->bindingTable != NULL) && (textPtr->tkwin != NULL)) {
+	if ((textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable != NULL)
+		&& (textPtr->tkwin != NULL)
+		&& !(textPtr->flags & DESTROYED) && !nearby) {
 	    event = textPtr->pickEvent;
 	    event.type = EnterNotify;
 	    event.xcrossing.detail = NotifyAncestor;
-	    Tk_BindEvent(textPtr->bindingTable, &event, textPtr->tkwin,
-		    numNewTags, (ClientData *) copyArrayPtr);
+	    TagBindEvent(textPtr, &event, numNewTags, copyArrayPtr);
 	}
 	ckfree((char *) copyArrayPtr);
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TagBindEvent --
+ *
+ *	Trigger given events for all tags that match the relevant bindings.
+ *	To handle the "sel" tag correctly in all peer widgets, we must use the
+ *	name of the tags as the binding table element.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Almost anything can be triggered by tag bindings, including deletion
+ *	of the text widget.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+TagBindEvent(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget to fire bindings in. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr,		/* What actually happened. */
+    int numTags,		/* Number of relevant tags. */
+    TkTextTag **tagArrayPtr)	/* Array of relevant tags. */
+{
+    #define NUM_BIND_TAGS 10
+    CONST char *nameArray[NUM_BIND_TAGS];
+    CONST char **nameArrPtr;
+    int i;
+
+    /*
+     * Try to avoid allocation unless there are lots of tags.
+     */
+
+    if (numTags > NUM_BIND_TAGS) {
+	nameArrPtr = (CONST char **) ckalloc(numTags * sizeof(CONST char *));
+    } else {
+	nameArrPtr = nameArray;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * We use tag names as keys in the hash table. We do this instead of using
+     * the actual tagPtr objects because we want one "sel" tag binding for all
+     * peer widgets, despite the fact that each has its own tagPtr object.
+     */
+
+    for (i = 0; i < numTags; i++) {
+	TkTextTag *tagPtr = tagArrayPtr[i];
+	if (tagPtr != NULL) {
+	    nameArrPtr[i] = tagPtr->name;
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * Tag has been deleted elsewhere, and therefore nulled out in
+	     * this array. Tk_BindEvent is clever enough to cope with NULLs
+	     * being thrown at it.
+	     */
+
+	    nameArrPtr[i] = NULL;
+	}
+    }
+    Tk_BindEvent(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable, eventPtr,
+	    textPtr->tkwin, numTags, (ClientData *) nameArrPtr);
+
+    if (numTags > NUM_BIND_TAGS) {
+	ckfree((char *) nameArrPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkTextWind.c b/generic/tkTextWind.c
index 999febe..8d1f850 100644
--- a/generic/tkTextWind.c
+++ b/generic/tkTextWind.c
@@ -1,47 +1,37 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkTextWind.c --
  *
- *	This file contains code that allows arbitrary windows to be
- *	nested inside text widgets.  It also implements the "window"
- *	widget command for texts.
+ *	This file contains code that allows arbitrary windows to be nested
+ *	inside text widgets. It also implements the "window" widget command
+ *	for texts.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tk.h"
-#include "tkText.h"
 #include "tkPort.h"
+#include "tkText.h"
 
 /*
- * The following structure is the official type record for the
- * embedded window geometry manager:
+ * The following structure is the official type record for the embedded window
+ * geometry manager:
  */
 
-static void		EmbWinRequestProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		EmbWinLostSlaveProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
+static void		EmbWinRequestProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		EmbWinLostSlaveProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
 
-static Tk_GeomMgr textGeomType = {
+static const Tk_GeomMgr textGeomType = {
     "text",			/* name */
     EmbWinRequestProc,		/* requestProc */
     EmbWinLostSlaveProc,	/* lostSlaveProc */
 };
 
 /*
- * Definitions for alignment values:
- */
-
-#define ALIGN_BOTTOM		0
-#define ALIGN_CENTER		1
-#define ALIGN_TOP		2
-#define ALIGN_BASELINE		3
-
-/*
  * Macro that determines the size of an embedded window segment:
  */
 
@@ -49,85 +39,79 @@ static Tk_GeomMgr textGeomType = {
 	+ sizeof(TkTextEmbWindow)))
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static int		AlignParseProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    CONST char *value, char *widgRec, int offset));
-static char *		AlignPrintProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset,
-			    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr));
-static TkTextSegment *	EmbWinCleanupProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr));
-static void		EmbWinCheckProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr));
-static void		EmbWinBboxProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,
-			    int index, int y, int lineHeight, int baseline,
-			    int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr,
-			    int *heightPtr));
-static int		EmbWinConfigure _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextSegment *ewPtr, int argc, CONST char **argv));
-static void		EmbWinDelayedUnmap _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static int		EmbWinDeleteProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int treeGone));
-static void		EmbWinDisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x, int y,
-			    int lineHeight, int baseline, Display *display,
-			    Drawable dst, int screenY));
-static int		EmbWinLayoutProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
+static TkTextSegment *	EmbWinCleanupProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+static void		EmbWinCheckProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+static void		EmbWinBboxProc(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int index, int y,
+			    int lineHeight, int baseline, int *xPtr,int *yPtr,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+static int		EmbWinConfigure(TkText *textPtr, TkTextSegment *ewPtr,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+static void		EmbWinDelayedUnmap(ClientData clientData);
+static int		EmbWinDeleteProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int treeGone);
+static int		EmbWinLayoutProc(TkText *textPtr,
 			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    int offset, int maxX, int maxChars,
-			    int noCharsYet, TkWrapMode wrapMode,
-			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr));
-static void		EmbWinStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		EmbWinUndisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr));
+			    int offset, int maxX, int maxChars,int noCharsYet,
+			    TkWrapMode wrapMode, TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr);
+static void		EmbWinStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		EmbWinUndisplayProc(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr);
+static TkTextEmbWindowClient* EmbWinGetClient(const TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextSegment *ewPtr);
 
 /*
  * The following structure declares the "embedded window" segment type.
  */
 
-static Tk_SegType tkTextEmbWindowType = {
-    "window",					/* name */
-    0,						/* leftGravity */
-    (Tk_SegSplitProc *) NULL,			/* splitProc */
-    EmbWinDeleteProc,				/* deleteProc */
-    EmbWinCleanupProc,				/* cleanupProc */
-    (Tk_SegLineChangeProc *) NULL,		/* lineChangeProc */
-    EmbWinLayoutProc,				/* layoutProc */
-    EmbWinCheckProc				/* checkProc */
+static const Tk_SegType tkTextEmbWindowType = {
+    "window",			/* name */
+    0,				/* leftGravity */
+    NULL,			/* splitProc */
+    EmbWinDeleteProc,		/* deleteProc */
+    EmbWinCleanupProc,		/* cleanupProc */
+    NULL,			/* lineChangeProc */
+    EmbWinLayoutProc,		/* layoutProc */
+    EmbWinCheckProc		/* checkProc */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Definitions for alignment values:
+ */
+
+static const char *alignStrings[] = {
+    "baseline", "bottom", "center", "top", NULL
 };
 
+typedef enum {
+    ALIGN_BASELINE, ALIGN_BOTTOM, ALIGN_CENTER, ALIGN_TOP
+} alignMode;
+
 /*
  * Information used for parsing window configuration options:
  */
 
-static Tk_CustomOption alignOption = {AlignParseProc, AlignPrintProc,
-	(ClientData) NULL};
-
-static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-align", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"center", 0, TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, &alignOption},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-create", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbWindow, create),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-padx", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"0", Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbWindow, padX),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_INT, "-pady", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"0", Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbWindow, padY),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, "-stretch", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"0", Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbWindow, stretch),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT},
-    {TK_CONFIG_WINDOW, "-window", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbWindow, tkwin),
-	TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT|TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+static const Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-align", NULL, NULL,
+	"center", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbWindow, align),
+	0, (ClientData) alignStrings, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-create", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbWindow, create), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", NULL, NULL,
+	"0", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbWindow, padX), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", NULL, NULL,
+	"0", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbWindow, padY), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-stretch", NULL, NULL,
+	"0", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbWindow, stretch), 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-window", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbWindow, tkwin), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_END}
 };
 
 /*
@@ -135,9 +119,8 @@ static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
  *
  * TkTextWindowCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "window" widget command
- *	for text widgets.  See the user documentation for details
- *	on what it does.
+ *	This function implements the "window" widget command for text widgets.
+ *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result or error.
@@ -149,100 +132,154 @@ static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
  */
 
 int
-TkTextWindowCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
-    register TkText *textPtr;	/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Argument strings.  Someone else has already
+TkTextWindowCmd(
+    register TkText *textPtr,	/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. Someone else has already
 				 * parsed this command enough to know that
-				 * argv[1] is "window". */
+				 * objv[1] is "window". */
 {
-    size_t length;
+    int optionIndex;
+    static const char *windOptionStrings[] = {
+	"cget", "configure", "create", "names", NULL
+    };
+    enum windOptions {
+	WIND_CGET, WIND_CONFIGURE, WIND_CREATE, WIND_NAMES
+    };
     register TkTextSegment *ewPtr;
 
-    if (argc < 3) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		argv[0], " window option ?arg arg ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], windOptionStrings,
+	    "window option", 0, &optionIndex) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    length = strlen(argv[2]);
-    if ((strncmp(argv[2], "cget", length) == 0) && (length >= 2)) {
+    switch ((enum windOptions) optionIndex) {
+    case WIND_CGET: {
 	TkTextIndex index;
 	TkTextSegment *ewPtr;
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+	TkTextEmbWindowClient *client;
 
-	if (argc != 5) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " window cget index option\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc != 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index option");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	ewPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&index, (int *) NULL);
+	ewPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&index, NULL);
 	if (ewPtr->typePtr != &tkTextEmbWindowType) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no embedded window at index \"",
-		    argv[3], "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "\"", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Copy over client specific value before querying.
+	 */
+
+	client = EmbWinGetClient(textPtr, ewPtr);
+	if (client != NULL) {
+	    ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = client->tkwin;
+	} else {
+	    ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = NULL;
+	}
+
+	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) &ewPtr->body.ew,
+		ewPtr->body.ew.optionTable, objv[4], textPtr->tkwin);
+	if (objPtr == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	return Tk_ConfigureValue(interp, textPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
-		(char *) &ewPtr->body.ew, argv[4], 0);
-    } else if ((strncmp(argv[2], "configure", length) == 0) && (length >= 2)) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+    case WIND_CONFIGURE: {
 	TkTextIndex index;
 	TkTextSegment *ewPtr;
 
-	if (argc < 4) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " window configure index ?option value ...?\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index ?option value ...?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	ewPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&index, (int *) NULL);
+	ewPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&index, NULL);
 	if (ewPtr->typePtr != &tkTextEmbWindowType) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no embedded window at index \"",
-		    argv[3], "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "\"", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (argc == 4) {
-	    return Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, textPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
-		    (char *) &ewPtr->body.ew, (char *) NULL, 0);
-	} else if (argc == 5) {
-	    return Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, textPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
-		    (char *) &ewPtr->body.ew, argv[4], 0);
+	if (objc <= 5) {
+	    TkTextEmbWindowClient *client;
+	    Tcl_Obj* objPtr;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Copy over client specific value before querying.
+	     */
+
+	    client = EmbWinGetClient(textPtr, ewPtr);
+	    if (client != NULL) {
+		ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = client->tkwin;
+	    } else {
+		ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = NULL;
+	    }
+
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) &ewPtr->body.ew,
+		    ewPtr->body.ew.optionTable, (objc == 5) ? objv[4] : NULL,
+		    textPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	    return TCL_OK;
 	} else {
-	    TkTextChanged(textPtr, &index, &index);
-	    return EmbWinConfigure(textPtr, ewPtr, argc-4, argv+4);
+	    TkTextChanged(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index, &index);
+
+	    /*
+	     * It's probably not true that all window configuration can change
+	     * the line height, so we could be more efficient here and only
+	     * call this when necessary.
+	     */
+
+	    TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+		    index.linePtr, 0, TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
+	    return EmbWinConfigure(textPtr, ewPtr, objc-4, objv+4);
 	}
-    } else if ((strncmp(argv[2], "create", length) == 0) && (length >= 2)) {
+    }
+    case WIND_CREATE: {
 	TkTextIndex index;
 	int lineIndex;
+	TkTextEmbWindowClient *client;
+	int res;
 
 	/*
-	 * Add a new window.  Find where to put the new window, and
-	 * mark that position for redisplay.
+	 * Add a new window. Find where to put the new window, and mark that
+	 * position for redisplay.
 	 */
 
-	if (argc < 4) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " window create index ?option value ...?\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index ?option value ...?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	if (TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, argv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[3], &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	/*
 	 * Don't allow insertions on the last (dummy) line of the text.
 	 */
-    
-	lineIndex = TkBTreeLineIndex(index.linePtr);
-	if (lineIndex == TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->tree)) {
+
+	lineIndex = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, index.linePtr);
+	if (lineIndex == TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+		textPtr)) {
 	    lineIndex--;
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->tree, lineIndex, 1000000, &index);
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		    lineIndex, 1000000, &index);
 	}
 
 	/*
@@ -252,49 +289,61 @@ TkTextWindowCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
 	ewPtr = (TkTextSegment *) ckalloc(EW_SEG_SIZE);
 	ewPtr->typePtr = &tkTextEmbWindowType;
 	ewPtr->size = 1;
-	ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr = textPtr;
+	ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr;
 	ewPtr->body.ew.linePtr = NULL;
 	ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = NULL;
 	ewPtr->body.ew.create = NULL;
 	ewPtr->body.ew.align = ALIGN_CENTER;
 	ewPtr->body.ew.padX = ewPtr->body.ew.padY = 0;
 	ewPtr->body.ew.stretch = 0;
-	ewPtr->body.ew.chunkCount = 0;
-	ewPtr->body.ew.displayed = 0;
+	ewPtr->body.ew.optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
+
+	client = (TkTextEmbWindowClient *)
+		ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextEmbWindowClient));
+	client->next = NULL;
+	client->textPtr = textPtr;
+	client->tkwin = NULL;
+	client->chunkCount = 0;
+	client->displayed = 0;
+	client->parent = ewPtr;
+	ewPtr->body.ew.clients = client;
 
 	/*
-	 * Link the segment into the text widget, then configure it (delete
-	 * it again if the configuration fails).
+	 * Link the segment into the text widget, then configure it (delete it
+	 * again if the configuration fails).
 	 */
 
-	TkTextChanged(textPtr, &index, &index);
+	TkTextChanged(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index, &index);
 	TkBTreeLinkSegment(ewPtr, &index);
-	if (EmbWinConfigure(textPtr, ewPtr, argc-4, argv+4) != TCL_OK) {
+	res = EmbWinConfigure(textPtr, ewPtr, objc-4, objv+4);
+	client->tkwin = ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin;
+	if (res != TCL_OK) {
 	    TkTextIndex index2;
 
-	    TkTextIndexForwChars(&index, 1, &index2);
-	    TkBTreeDeleteChars(&index, &index2);
+	    TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, &index, 1, &index2, COUNT_INDICES);
+	    TkBTreeDeleteIndexRange(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, &index,
+		    &index2);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-    } else if (strncmp(argv[2], "names", length) == 0) {
+	TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+		index.linePtr, 0, TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
+	break;
+    }
+    case WIND_NAMES: {
 	Tcl_HashSearch search;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 
-	if (argc != 3) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " window names\"", (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->windowTable, &search);
-		hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->windowTable,
+		&search); hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp,
-		    Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->markTable, hPtr));
+		    Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable, hPtr));
 	}
-    } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad window option \"", argv[2],
-		"\": must be cget, configure, create, or names",
-		(char *) NULL);
-	return TCL_ERROR;
+	break;
+    }
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -304,76 +353,97 @@ TkTextWindowCmd(textPtr, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  * EmbWinConfigure --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to handle configuration options
- *	for an embedded window, using an argc/argv list.
+ *	This function is called to handle configuration options for an
+ *	embedded window, using an objc/objv list.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message..
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message..
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information for the embedded window changes,
- *	such as alignment, stretching, or name of the embedded
- *	window.
+ *	Configuration information for the embedded window changes, such as
+ *	alignment, stretching, or name of the embedded window.
+ *
+ *	Note that this function may leave widget specific client information
+ *	with a NULL tkwin attached to ewPtr. While we could choose to clean up
+ *	the client data structure here, there is no need to do so, and it is
+ *	likely that the user is going to adjust the tkwin again soon.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-EmbWinConfigure(textPtr, ewPtr, argc, argv)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget that
-				 * contains embedded window. */
-    TkTextSegment *ewPtr;	/* Embedded window to be configured. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of strings in argv. */
-    CONST char **argv;		/* Array of strings describing configuration
+EmbWinConfigure(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget that contains
+				 * embedded window. */
+    TkTextSegment *ewPtr,	/* Embedded window to be configured. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of strings in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Array of objects describing configuration
 				 * options. */
 {
     Tk_Window oldWindow;
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-    int new;
+    TkTextEmbWindowClient *client;
+
+    /*
+     * Copy over client specific value before querying or setting.
+     */
+
+    client = EmbWinGetClient(textPtr, ewPtr);
+    if (client != NULL) {
+	ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = client->tkwin;
+    } else {
+	ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = NULL;
+    }
 
     oldWindow = ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin;
-    if (Tk_ConfigureWidget(textPtr->interp, textPtr->tkwin, configSpecs,
-	    argc, argv, (char *) &ewPtr->body.ew, TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY)
-	    != TCL_OK) {
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(textPtr->interp, (char *) &ewPtr->body.ew,
+	    ewPtr->body.ew.optionTable, objc, objv, textPtr->tkwin, NULL,
+	    NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
+
     if (oldWindow != ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin) {
 	if (oldWindow != NULL) {
-	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->windowTable,
+	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(
+		    &textPtr->sharedTextPtr->windowTable,
 		    Tk_PathName(oldWindow)));
 	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(oldWindow, StructureNotifyMask,
-		    EmbWinStructureProc, (ClientData) ewPtr);
-	    Tk_ManageGeometry(oldWindow, (Tk_GeomMgr *) NULL,
-		    (ClientData) NULL);
+		    EmbWinStructureProc, (ClientData) client);
+	    Tk_ManageGeometry(oldWindow, NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
 	    if (textPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(oldWindow)) {
 		Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(oldWindow, textPtr->tkwin);
 	    } else {
 		Tk_UnmapWindow(oldWindow);
 	    }
 	}
+	if (client != NULL) {
+	    client->tkwin = NULL;
+	}
 	if (ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin != NULL) {
 	    Tk_Window ancestor, parent;
+	    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+	    int isNew;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Make sure that the text is either the parent of the
-	     * embedded window or a descendant of that parent.  Also,
-	     * don't allow a top-level window to be managed inside
-	     * a text.
+	     * Make sure that the text is either the parent of the embedded
+	     * window or a descendant of that parent. Also, don't allow a
+	     * top-level window to be managed inside a text.
 	     */
 
 	    parent = Tk_Parent(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin);
-	    for (ancestor = textPtr->tkwin; ;
-		    ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
+	    for (ancestor = textPtr->tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
 		if (ancestor == parent) {
 		    break;
 		}
 		if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(ancestor)) {
-		    badMaster:
+		badMaster:
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(textPtr->interp, "can't embed ",
 			    Tk_PathName(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin), " in ",
-			    Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), (char *) NULL);
+			    Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), NULL);
 		    ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = NULL;
+		    if (client != NULL) {
+			client->tkwin = NULL;
+		    }
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 	    }
@@ -382,28 +452,43 @@ EmbWinConfigure(textPtr, ewPtr, argc, argv)
 		goto badMaster;
 	    }
 
+	    if (client == NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * Have to make the new client.
+		 */
+
+		client = (TkTextEmbWindowClient *)
+			ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextEmbWindowClient));
+		client->next = ewPtr->body.ew.clients;
+		client->textPtr = textPtr;
+		client->tkwin = NULL;
+		client->chunkCount = 0;
+		client->displayed = 0;
+		client->parent = ewPtr;
+		ewPtr->body.ew.clients = client;
+	    }
+	    client->tkwin = ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin;
+
 	    /*
-	     * Take over geometry management for the window, plus create
-	     * an event handler to find out when it is deleted.
+	     * Take over geometry management for the window, plus create an
+	     * event handler to find out when it is deleted.
 	     */
 
 	    Tk_ManageGeometry(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin, &textGeomType,
-		    (ClientData) ewPtr);
+		    (ClientData) client);
 	    Tk_CreateEventHandler(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
-		    EmbWinStructureProc, (ClientData) ewPtr);
+		    EmbWinStructureProc, (ClientData) client);
 
 	    /*
-	     * Special trick!  Must enter into the hash table *after*
-	     * calling Tk_ManageGeometry:  if the window was already managed
-	     * elsewhere in this text, the Tk_ManageGeometry call will cause
-	     * the entry to be removed, which could potentially lose the new
-	     * entry.
+	     * Special trick!  Must enter into the hash table *after* calling
+	     * Tk_ManageGeometry: if the window was already managed elsewhere
+	     * in this text, the Tk_ManageGeometry call will cause the entry
+	     * to be removed, which could potentially lose the new entry.
 	     */
 
-	    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->windowTable,
-		    Tk_PathName(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin), &new);
+	    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->windowTable,
+		    Tk_PathName(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin), &isNew);
 	    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, ewPtr);
-
 	}
     }
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -412,135 +497,54 @@ EmbWinConfigure(textPtr, ewPtr, argc, argv)
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * AlignParseProc --
- *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk_ConfigureWidget during
- *	option processing to handle "-align" options for embedded
- *	windows.
- *
- * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.
- *
- * Side effects:
- *	The alignment for the embedded window may change.
- *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
- */
-
-	/* ARGSUSED */
-static int
-AlignParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Not used.*/
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for reporting errors. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window for text widget. */
-    CONST char *value;			/* Value of option. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to TkTextEmbWindow
-					 * structure. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item (ignored). */
-{
-    register TkTextEmbWindow *embPtr = (TkTextEmbWindow *) widgRec;
-
-    if (strcmp(value, "baseline") == 0) {
-	embPtr->align = ALIGN_BASELINE;
-    } else if (strcmp(value, "bottom") == 0) {
-	embPtr->align = ALIGN_BOTTOM;
-    } else if (strcmp(value, "center") == 0) {
-	embPtr->align = ALIGN_CENTER;
-    } else if (strcmp(value, "top") == 0) {
-	embPtr->align = ALIGN_TOP;
-    } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad alignment \"", value,
-		"\": must be baseline, bottom, center, or top",
-		(char *) NULL);
-	return TCL_ERROR;
-    }
-    return TCL_OK;
-}
-
-/*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
- *
- * AlignPrintProc --
- *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk configuration code
- *	to produce a printable string for the "-align" configuration
- *	option for embedded windows.
- *
- * Results:
- *	The return value is a string describing the embedded
- *	window's current alignment.
- *
- * Side effects:
- *	None.
- *
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
- */
-
-	/* ARGSUSED */
-static char *
-AlignPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Ignored. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window for text widget. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to TkTextEmbWindow
-					 * structure. */
-    int offset;				/* Ignored. */
-    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr;		/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
-					 * information about how to reclaim
-					 * storage for return string. */
-{
-    switch (((TkTextEmbWindow *) widgRec)->align) {
-	case ALIGN_BASELINE:
-	    return "baseline";
-	case ALIGN_BOTTOM:
-	    return "bottom";
-	case ALIGN_CENTER:
-	    return "center";
-	case ALIGN_TOP:
-	    return "top";
-	default:
-	    return "??";
-    }
-}
-
-/*
- *--------------------------------------------------------------
- *
  * EmbWinStructureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event loop whenever
- *	StructureNotify events occur for a window that's embedded
- *	in a text widget.  This procedure's only purpose is to
- *	clean up when windows are deleted.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk event loop whenever StructureNotify
+ *	events occur for a window that's embedded in a text widget. This
+ *	function's only purpose is to clean up when windows are deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The window is disassociated from the window segment, and
- *	the portion of the text is redisplayed.
+ *	The window is disassociated from the window segment, and the portion
+ *	of the text is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EmbWinStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to record describing window item. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Describes what just happened. */
+EmbWinStructureProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to record describing window item. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
-    register TkTextSegment *ewPtr = (TkTextSegment *) clientData;
+    TkTextEmbWindowClient *client = (TkTextEmbWindowClient*)clientData;
+    TkTextSegment *ewPtr = client->parent;
     TkTextIndex index;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 
     if (eventPtr->type != DestroyNotify) {
 	return;
     }
 
-    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->windowTable,
-	    Tk_PathName(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin)));
+    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr->windowTable,
+	    Tk_PathName(client->tkwin));
+    if (hPtr != NULL) {
+	/*
+	 * This may not exist if the entire widget is being deleted.
+	 */
+
+	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
+    }
+
     ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = NULL;
-    index.tree = ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->tree;
+    client->tkwin = NULL;
+    index.tree = ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr->tree;
     index.linePtr = ewPtr->body.ew.linePtr;
     index.byteIndex = TkTextSegToOffset(ewPtr, ewPtr->body.ew.linePtr);
-    TkTextChanged(ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr, &index, &index);
+    TkTextChanged(ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index, &index);
+    TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+	    index.linePtr, 0, TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -548,8 +552,8 @@ EmbWinStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * EmbWinRequestProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever a window that's associated
- *	with a window canvas item changes its requested dimensions.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever a window that's associated with a
+ *	window canvas item changes its requested dimensions.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -563,18 +567,20 @@ EmbWinStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-EmbWinRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to record for window item. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window that changed its desired
-					 * size. */
+EmbWinRequestProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to record for window item. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window that changed its desired size. */
 {
-    TkTextSegment *ewPtr = (TkTextSegment *) clientData;
+    TkTextEmbWindowClient *client = (TkTextEmbWindowClient*)clientData;
+    TkTextSegment *ewPtr = client->parent;
     TkTextIndex index;
 
-    index.tree = ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->tree;
+    index.tree = ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr->tree;
     index.linePtr = ewPtr->body.ew.linePtr;
     index.byteIndex = TkTextSegToOffset(ewPtr, ewPtr->body.ew.linePtr);
-    TkTextChanged(ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr, &index, &index);
+    TkTextChanged(ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index, &index);
+    TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+	    index.linePtr, 0, TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -582,44 +588,126 @@ EmbWinRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * EmbWinLostSlaveProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk geometry manager when
- *	a slave window managed by a text widget is claimed away
- *	by another geometry manager.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk geometry manager when a slave
+ *	window managed by a text widget is claimed away by another geometry
+ *	manager.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The window is disassociated from the window segment, and
- *	the portion of the text is redisplayed.
+ *	The window is disassociated from the window segment, and the portion
+ *	of the text is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EmbWinLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to record describing window item. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that was claimed away by another
+EmbWinLostSlaveProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to record describing window item. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window that was claimed away by another
 				 * geometry manager. */
 {
-    register TkTextSegment *ewPtr = (TkTextSegment *) clientData;
+    TkTextEmbWindowClient *client = (TkTextEmbWindowClient*)clientData;
+    TkTextSegment *ewPtr = client->parent;
     TkTextIndex index;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+    TkTextEmbWindowClient *loop;
 
-    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
-	    EmbWinStructureProc, (ClientData) ewPtr);
-    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(EmbWinDelayedUnmap, (ClientData) ewPtr);
-    if (ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(tkwin)) {
-	Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(tkwin, ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->tkwin);
+    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(client->tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
+	    EmbWinStructureProc, (ClientData) client);
+    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(EmbWinDelayedUnmap, (ClientData) client);
+    if (client->textPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(tkwin)) {
+	Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(tkwin, client->textPtr->tkwin);
     } else {
 	Tk_UnmapWindow(tkwin);
     }
-    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->windowTable,
-	    Tk_PathName(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin)));
+    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr->windowTable,
+	    Tk_PathName(client->tkwin));
+    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
+    client->tkwin = NULL;
     ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = NULL;
-    index.tree = ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->tree;
+
+    /*
+     * Free up the memory allocation for this client.
+     */
+
+    loop = ewPtr->body.ew.clients;
+    if (loop == client) {
+	ewPtr->body.ew.clients = client->next;
+    } else {
+	while (loop->next != client) {
+	    loop = loop->next;
+	}
+	loop->next = client->next;
+    }
+    ckfree((char *) client);
+
+    index.tree = ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr->tree;
     index.linePtr = ewPtr->body.ew.linePtr;
     index.byteIndex = TkTextSegToOffset(ewPtr, ewPtr->body.ew.linePtr);
-    TkTextChanged(ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr, &index, &index);
+    TkTextChanged(ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index, &index);
+    TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+	    index.linePtr, 0, TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkTextWinFreeClient --
+ *
+ *	Free up the hash entry and client information for a given embedded
+ *	window.
+ *
+ *	It is assumed the caller will manage the linked list of clients
+ *	associated with the relevant TkTextSegment.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Nothing.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The embedded window information for a single client is deleted, if it
+ *	exists, and any resources associated with it are released.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkTextWinFreeClient(
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr,	/* Hash entry corresponding to this client, or
+				 * NULL */
+    TkTextEmbWindowClient *client)
+				/* Client data structure, with the 'tkwin'
+				 * field to be cleaned up. */
+{
+    if (hPtr != NULL) {
+	/*
+	 * (It's possible for there to be no hash table entry for this window,
+	 * if an error occurred while creating the window segment but before
+	 * the window got added to the table)
+	 */
+
+	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Delete the event handler for the window before destroying the window,
+     * so that EmbWinStructureProc doesn't get called (we'll already do
+     * everything that it would have done, and it will just get confused).
+     */
+
+    if (client->tkwin != NULL) {
+	Tk_DeleteEventHandler(client->tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
+		EmbWinStructureProc, (ClientData) client);
+	Tk_DestroyWindow(client->tkwin);
+    }
+    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(EmbWinDelayedUnmap, (ClientData) client);
+
+    /*
+     * Free up this client.
+     */
+
+    ckfree((char *) client);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -627,8 +715,8 @@ EmbWinLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * EmbWinDeleteProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the text B-tree code whenever
- *	an embedded window lies in a range of characters being deleted.
+ *	This function is invoked by the text B-tree code whenever an embedded
+ *	window lies in a range of characters being deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns 0 to indicate that the deletion has been accepted.
@@ -642,42 +730,37 @@ EmbWinLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-EmbWinDeleteProc(ewPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
-    TkTextSegment *ewPtr;		/* Segment being deleted. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line containing segment. */
-    int treeGone;			/* Non-zero means the entire tree is
-					 * being deleted, so everything must
-					 * get cleaned up. */
+EmbWinDeleteProc(
+    TkTextSegment *ewPtr,	/* Segment being deleted. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr,	/* Line containing segment. */
+    int treeGone)		/* Non-zero means the entire tree is being
+				 * deleted, so everything must get cleaned
+				 * up. */
 {
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+    TkTextEmbWindowClient *client;
+    client = ewPtr->body.ew.clients;
 
-    if (ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin != NULL) {
-	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->windowTable,
-		Tk_PathName(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin));
-	if (hPtr != NULL) {
-	    /*
-	     * (It's possible for there to be no hash table entry for this
-	     * window, if an error occurred while creating the window segment
-	     * but before the window got added to the table)
-	     */
+    while (client != NULL) {
+	TkTextEmbWindowClient *next = client->next;
+	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = NULL;
 
-	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
+	if (client->tkwin != NULL) {
+	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(
+		    &ewPtr->body.ew.sharedTextPtr->windowTable,
+		    Tk_PathName(client->tkwin));
 	}
+	TkTextWinFreeClient(hPtr, client);
+	client = next;
+    }
+    ewPtr->body.ew.clients = NULL;
 
-	/*
-	 * Delete the event handler for the window before destroying
-	 * the window, so that EmbWinStructureProc doesn't get called
-	 * (we'll already do everything that it would have done, and
-	 * it will just get confused).
-	 */
+    Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) &ewPtr->body.ew, ewPtr->body.ew.optionTable,
+	    NULL);
+
+    /*
+     * Free up all memory allocated.
+     */
 
-	Tk_DeleteEventHandler(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
-		EmbWinStructureProc, (ClientData) ewPtr);
-	Tk_DestroyWindow(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin);
-    }
-    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(EmbWinDelayedUnmap, (ClientData) ewPtr);
-    Tk_FreeOptions(configSpecs, (char *) &ewPtr->body.ew,
-	    ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->display, 0);
     ckfree((char *) ewPtr);
     return 0;
 }
@@ -687,9 +770,8 @@ EmbWinDeleteProc(ewPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
  *
  * EmbWinCleanupProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the B-tree code whenever a
- *	segment containing an embedded window is moved from one
- *	line to another.
+ *	This function is invoked by the B-tree code whenever a segment
+ *	containing an embedded window is moved from one line to another.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -701,9 +783,9 @@ EmbWinDeleteProc(ewPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
  */
 
 static TkTextSegment *
-EmbWinCleanupProc(ewPtr, linePtr)
-    TkTextSegment *ewPtr;		/* Mark segment that's being moved. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line that now contains segment. */
+EmbWinCleanupProc(
+    TkTextSegment *ewPtr,	/* Mark segment that's being moved. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Line that now contains segment. */
 {
     ewPtr->body.ew.linePtr = linePtr;
     return ewPtr;
@@ -714,12 +796,11 @@ EmbWinCleanupProc(ewPtr, linePtr)
  *
  * EmbWinLayoutProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is the "layoutProc" for embedded window
- *	segments.
+ *	This function is the "layoutProc" for embedded window segments.
  *
  * Results:
- *	1 is returned to indicate that the segment should be
- *	displayed.  The chunkPtr structure is filled in.
+ *	1 is returned to indicate that the segment should be displayed. The
+ *	chunkPtr structure is filled in.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None, except for filling in chunkPtr.
@@ -729,49 +810,105 @@ EmbWinCleanupProc(ewPtr, linePtr)
 
 	/*ARGSUSED*/
 static int
-EmbWinLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, ewPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
-	noCharsYet, wrapMode, chunkPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget being layed out. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Identifies first character in chunk. */
-    TkTextSegment *ewPtr;	/* Segment corresponding to indexPtr. */
-    int offset;			/* Offset within segPtr corresponding to
+EmbWinLayoutProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget being layed out. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr,	/* Identifies first character in chunk. */
+    TkTextSegment *ewPtr,	/* Segment corresponding to indexPtr. */
+    int offset,			/* Offset within segPtr corresponding to
 				 * indexPtr (always 0). */
-    int maxX;			/* Chunk must not occupy pixels at this
+    int maxX,			/* Chunk must not occupy pixels at this
 				 * position or higher. */
-    int maxChars;		/* Chunk must not include more than this
-				 * many characters. */
-    int noCharsYet;		/* Non-zero means no characters have been
+    int maxChars,		/* Chunk must not include more than this many
+				 * characters. */
+    int noCharsYet,		/* Non-zero means no characters have been
 				 * assigned to this line yet. */
-    TkWrapMode wrapMode;	/* Wrap mode to use for line: TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR,
-				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE, or TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD. */
-    register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;
-				/* Structure to fill in with information
-				 * about this chunk.  The x field has already
-				 * been set by the caller. */
+    TkWrapMode wrapMode,	/* Wrap mode to use for line:
+				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR, TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE, or
+				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD. */
+    register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr)
+				/* Structure to fill in with information about
+				 * this chunk. The x field has already been
+				 * set by the caller. */
 {
     int width, height;
+    TkTextEmbWindowClient *client;
 
     if (offset != 0) {
-	panic("Non-zero offset in EmbWinLayoutProc");
+	Tcl_Panic("Non-zero offset in EmbWinLayoutProc");
+    }
+
+    client = EmbWinGetClient(textPtr, ewPtr);
+    if (client == NULL) {
+	ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = NULL;
+    } else {
+	ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = client->tkwin;
     }
 
     if ((ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin == NULL) && (ewPtr->body.ew.create != NULL)) {
-	int code, new;
-	Tcl_DString name;
+	int code, isNew;
 	Tk_Window ancestor;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+	const char *before, *string;
+	Tcl_DString name, buf, *dsPtr = NULL;
+
+	before = ewPtr->body.ew.create;
 
 	/*
-	 * The window doesn't currently exist.  Create it by evaluating
-	 * the creation script.  The script must return the window's
-	 * path name:  look up that name to get back to the window
-	 * token.  Then register ourselves as the geometry manager for
-	 * the window.
+	 * Find everything up to the next % character and append it to the
+	 * result string.
 	 */
 
-	code = Tcl_EvalEx(textPtr->interp, ewPtr->body.ew.create, -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+	string = before;
+	while (*string != 0) {
+	    if ((*string == '%') && (string[1] == '%' || string[1] == 'W')) {
+		if (dsPtr == NULL) {
+		    Tcl_DStringInit(&buf);
+		    dsPtr = &buf;
+		}
+		if (string != before) {
+		    Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, before, (int) (string-before));
+		    before = string;
+		}
+		if (string[1] == '%') {
+		    Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, "%", 1);
+		} else {
+		    /*
+		     * Substitute string as proper Tcl list element.
+		     */
+
+		    int spaceNeeded, cvtFlags, length;
+		    const char *str = Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin);
+
+		    spaceNeeded = Tcl_ScanElement(str, &cvtFlags);
+		    length = Tcl_DStringLength(dsPtr);
+		    Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, length + spaceNeeded);
+		    spaceNeeded = Tcl_ConvertElement(str,
+			    Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + length,
+			    cvtFlags | TCL_DONT_USE_BRACES);
+		    Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, length + spaceNeeded);
+		}
+		before += 2;
+		string++;
+	    }
+	    string++;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * The window doesn't currently exist. Create it by evaluating the
+	 * creation script. The script must return the window's path name:
+	 * look up that name to get back to the window token. Then register
+	 * ourselves as the geometry manager for the window.
+	 */
+
+	if (dsPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, before, (int) (string-before));
+	    code = Tcl_EvalEx(textPtr->interp, Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr), -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(dsPtr);
+	} else {
+	    code = Tcl_EvalEx(textPtr->interp, ewPtr->body.ew.create, -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+	}
 	if (code != TCL_OK) {
-	    createError:
+	createError:
 	    Tcl_BackgroundError(textPtr->interp);
 	    goto gotWindow;
 	}
@@ -780,19 +917,19 @@ EmbWinLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, ewPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
 	Tcl_ResetResult(textPtr->interp);
 	ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(textPtr->interp,
 		Tcl_DStringValue(&name), textPtr->tkwin);
+	Tcl_DStringFree(&name);
 	if (ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin == NULL) {
 	    goto createError;
 	}
-	for (ancestor = textPtr->tkwin; ;
-		ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
+	for (ancestor = textPtr->tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
 	    if (ancestor == Tk_Parent(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin)) {
 		break;
 	    }
 	    if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(ancestor)) {
-		badMaster:
+	    badMaster:
 		Tcl_AppendResult(textPtr->interp, "can't embed ",
 			Tk_PathName(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin), " relative to ",
-			Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), (char *) NULL);
+			Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), NULL);
 		Tcl_BackgroundError(textPtr->interp);
 		ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin = NULL;
 		goto gotWindow;
@@ -802,21 +939,39 @@ EmbWinLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, ewPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
 		|| (textPtr->tkwin == ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin)) {
 	    goto badMaster;
 	}
-	Tk_ManageGeometry(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin, &textGeomType,
-		(ClientData) ewPtr);
-	Tk_CreateEventHandler(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
-		EmbWinStructureProc, (ClientData) ewPtr);
+
+	if (client == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * We just used a '-create' script to make a new window, which we
+	     * now need to add to our client list.
+	     */
+
+	    client = (TkTextEmbWindowClient *)
+		    ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextEmbWindowClient));
+	    client->next = ewPtr->body.ew.clients;
+	    client->textPtr = textPtr;
+	    client->tkwin = NULL;
+	    client->chunkCount = 0;
+	    client->displayed = 0;
+	    client->parent = ewPtr;
+	    ewPtr->body.ew.clients = client;
+	}
+
+	client->tkwin = ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin;
+	Tk_ManageGeometry(client->tkwin, &textGeomType,
+		(ClientData) client);
+	Tk_CreateEventHandler(client->tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
+		EmbWinStructureProc, (ClientData) client);
 
 	/*
-	 * Special trick!  Must enter into the hash table *after*
-	 * calling Tk_ManageGeometry:  if the window was already managed
-	 * elsewhere in this text, the Tk_ManageGeometry call will cause
-	 * the entry to be removed, which could potentially lose the new
-	 * entry.
+	 * Special trick! Must enter into the hash table *after* calling
+	 * Tk_ManageGeometry: if the window was already managed elsewhere in
+	 * this text, the Tk_ManageGeometry call will cause the entry to be
+	 * removed, which could potentially lose the new entry.
 	 */
 
-	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->windowTable,
-		Tk_PathName(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin), &new);
+	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->windowTable,
+		Tk_PathName(client->tkwin), &isNew);
 	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, ewPtr);
     }
 
@@ -824,7 +979,7 @@ EmbWinLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, ewPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
      * See if there's room for this window on this line.
      */
 
-    gotWindow:
+  gotWindow:
     if (ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin == NULL) {
 	width = 0;
 	height = 0;
@@ -841,9 +996,9 @@ EmbWinLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, ewPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
      * Fill in the chunk structure.
      */
 
-    chunkPtr->displayProc = EmbWinDisplayProc;
+    chunkPtr->displayProc = TkTextEmbWinDisplayProc;
     chunkPtr->undisplayProc = EmbWinUndisplayProc;
-    chunkPtr->measureProc = (Tk_ChunkMeasureProc *) NULL;
+    chunkPtr->measureProc = NULL;
     chunkPtr->bboxProc = EmbWinBboxProc;
     chunkPtr->numBytes = 1;
     if (ewPtr->body.ew.align == ALIGN_BASELINE) {
@@ -859,7 +1014,9 @@ EmbWinLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, ewPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
     chunkPtr->breakIndex = -1;
     chunkPtr->breakIndex = 1;
     chunkPtr->clientData = (ClientData) ewPtr;
-    ewPtr->body.ew.chunkCount += 1;
+    if (client != NULL) {
+	client->chunkCount += 1;
+    }
     return 1;
 }
 
@@ -868,84 +1025,89 @@ EmbWinLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, ewPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
  *
  * EmbWinCheckProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the B-tree code to perform
- *	consistency checks on embedded windows.
+ *	This function is invoked by the B-tree code to perform consistency
+ *	checks on embedded windows.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The procedure panics if it detects anything wrong with
- *	the embedded window.
+ *	The function panics if it detects anything wrong with the embedded
+ *	window.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EmbWinCheckProc(ewPtr, linePtr)
-    TkTextSegment *ewPtr;		/* Segment to check. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line containing segment. */
+EmbWinCheckProc(
+    TkTextSegment *ewPtr,	/* Segment to check. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr)	/* Line containing segment. */
 {
     if (ewPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
-	panic("EmbWinCheckProc: embedded window is last segment in line");
+	Tcl_Panic("EmbWinCheckProc: embedded window is last segment in line");
     }
     if (ewPtr->size != 1) {
-	panic("EmbWinCheckProc: embedded window has size %d", ewPtr->size);
+	Tcl_Panic("EmbWinCheckProc: embedded window has size %d", ewPtr->size);
     }
 }
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * EmbWinDisplayProc --
+ * TkTextEmbWinDisplayProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the text displaying code
- *	when it is time to actually draw an embedded window
- *	chunk on the screen.
+ *	This function is invoked by the text displaying code when it is time
+ *	to actually draw an embedded window chunk on the screen.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The embedded window gets moved to the correct location
- *	and mapped onto the screen.
+ *	The embedded window gets moved to the correct location and mapped onto
+ *	the screen.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static void
-EmbWinDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, lineHeight, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk that is to be drawn. */
-    int x;				/* X-position in dst at which to
-					 * draw this chunk (differs from
-					 * the x-position in the chunk because
-					 * of scrolling). */
-    int y;				/* Top of rectangular bounding box
-					 * for line: tells where to draw this
-					 * chunk in dst (x-position is in
-					 * the chunk itself). */
-    int lineHeight;			/* Total height of line. */
-    int baseline;			/* Offset of baseline from y. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display to use for drawing. */
-    Drawable dst;			/* Pixmap or window in which to draw */
-    int screenY;			/* Y-coordinate in text window that
-					 * corresponds to y. */
+void
+TkTextEmbWinDisplayProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,	/* Chunk that is to be drawn. */
+    int x,			/* X-position in dst at which to draw this
+				 * chunk (differs from the x-position in the
+				 * chunk because of scrolling). */
+    int y,			/* Top of rectangular bounding box for line:
+				 * tells where to draw this chunk in dst
+				 * (x-position is in the chunk itself). */
+    int lineHeight,		/* Total height of line. */
+    int baseline,		/* Offset of baseline from y. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display to use for drawing (unused).  */
+    Drawable dst,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
+				 * (unused).  */
+    int screenY)		/* Y-coordinate in text window that
+				 * corresponds to y. */
 {
-    TkTextSegment *ewPtr = (TkTextSegment *) chunkPtr->clientData;
     int lineX, windowX, windowY, width, height;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
+    TkTextSegment *ewPtr = (TkTextSegment*) chunkPtr->clientData;
+    TkTextEmbWindowClient *client = EmbWinGetClient(textPtr, ewPtr);
 
-    tkwin = ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin;
+    if (client == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    tkwin = client->tkwin;
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return;
     }
+
     if ((x + chunkPtr->width) <= 0) {
 	/*
-	 * The window is off-screen;  just unmap it.
+	 * The window is off-screen; just unmap it.
 	 */
 
-	if (ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(tkwin)) {
-	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(tkwin, ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->tkwin);
+	if (textPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(tkwin)) {
+	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(tkwin, textPtr->tkwin);
 	} else {
 	    Tk_UnmapWindow(tkwin);
 	}
@@ -953,15 +1115,15 @@ EmbWinDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, lineHeight, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Compute the window's location and size in the text widget, taking
-     * into account the align and stretch values for the window.
+     * Compute the window's location and size in the text widget, taking into
+     * account the align and stretch values for the window.
      */
 
-    EmbWinBboxProc(chunkPtr, 0, screenY, lineHeight, baseline, &lineX,
-	    &windowY, &width, &height);
+    EmbWinBboxProc(textPtr, chunkPtr, 0, screenY, lineHeight, baseline,
+	    &lineX, &windowY, &width, &height);
     windowX = lineX - chunkPtr->x + x;
 
-    if (ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->tkwin == Tk_Parent(tkwin)) {
+    if (textPtr->tkwin == Tk_Parent(tkwin)) {
 	if ((windowX != Tk_X(tkwin)) || (windowY != Tk_Y(tkwin))
 		|| (Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin) != Tk_Width(tkwin))
 		|| (height != Tk_Height(tkwin))) {
@@ -969,15 +1131,15 @@ EmbWinDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, lineHeight, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
 	}
 	Tk_MapWindow(tkwin);
     } else {
-	Tk_MaintainGeometry(tkwin, ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->tkwin,
-		windowX, windowY, width, height);
+	Tk_MaintainGeometry(tkwin, textPtr->tkwin, windowX, windowY,
+		width, height);
     }
 
     /*
      * Mark the window as displayed so that it won't get unmapped.
      */
 
-    ewPtr->body.ew.displayed = 1;
+    client->displayed = 1;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -985,9 +1147,9 @@ EmbWinDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, lineHeight, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
  *
  * EmbWinUndisplayProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when the chunk for an embedded
- *	window is no longer going to be displayed.  It arranges
- *	for the window associated with the chunk to be unmapped.
+ *	This function is called when the chunk for an embedded window is no
+ *	longer going to be displayed. It arranges for the window associated
+ *	with the chunk to be unmapped.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -999,25 +1161,29 @@ EmbWinDisplayProc(chunkPtr, x, y, lineHeight, baseline, display, dst, screenY)
  */
 
 static void
-EmbWinUndisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Overall information about text
-					 * widget. */
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk that is about to be freed. */
+EmbWinUndisplayProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr)	/* Chunk that is about to be freed. */
 {
-    TkTextSegment *ewPtr = (TkTextSegment *) chunkPtr->clientData;
+    TkTextSegment *ewPtr = (TkTextSegment*) chunkPtr->clientData;
+    TkTextEmbWindowClient *client = EmbWinGetClient(textPtr, ewPtr);
 
-    ewPtr->body.ew.chunkCount--;
-    if (ewPtr->body.ew.chunkCount == 0) {
+    if (client == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    client->chunkCount--;
+    if (client->chunkCount == 0) {
 	/*
 	 * Don't unmap the window immediately, since there's a good chance
-	 * that it will immediately be redisplayed, perhaps even in the
-	 * same place.  Instead, schedule the window to be unmapped later;
-	 * the call to EmbWinDelayedUnmap will be cancelled in the likely
-	 * event that the unmap becomes unnecessary.
+	 * that it will immediately be redisplayed, perhaps even in the same
+	 * place. Instead, schedule the window to be unmapped later; the call
+	 * to EmbWinDelayedUnmap will be cancelled in the likely event that
+	 * the unmap becomes unnecessary.
 	 */
 
-	ewPtr->body.ew.displayed = 0;
-	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(EmbWinDelayedUnmap, (ClientData) ewPtr);
+	client->displayed = 0;
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(EmbWinDelayedUnmap, (ClientData) client);
     }
 }
 
@@ -1026,17 +1192,16 @@ EmbWinUndisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr)
  *
  * EmbWinBboxProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to compute the bounding box of
- *	the area occupied by an embedded window.
+ *	This function is called to compute the bounding box of the area
+ *	occupied by an embedded window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	There is no return value.  *xPtr and *yPtr are filled in
- *	with the coordinates of the upper left corner of the
- *	window, and *widthPtr and *heightPtr are filled in with
- *	the dimensions of the window in pixels.  Note:  not all
- *	of the returned bbox is necessarily visible on the screen
- *	(the rightmost part might be off-screen to the right,
- *	and the bottommost part might be off-screen to the bottom).
+ *	There is no return value. *xPtr and *yPtr are filled in with the
+ *	coordinates of the upper left corner of the window, and *widthPtr and
+ *	*heightPtr are filled in with the dimensions of the window in pixels.
+ *	Note: not all of the returned bbox is necessarily visible on the
+ *	screen (the rightmost part might be off-screen to the right, and the
+ *	bottommost part might be off-screen to the bottom).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1045,27 +1210,32 @@ EmbWinUndisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-EmbWinBboxProc(chunkPtr, index, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr,
-	widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk containing desired char. */
-    int index;				/* Index of desired character within
-					 * the chunk. */
-    int y;				/* Topmost pixel in area allocated
-					 * for this line. */
-    int lineHeight;			/* Total height of line. */
-    int baseline;			/* Location of line's baseline, in
-					 * pixels measured down from y. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;			/* Gets filled in with coords of
-					 * character's upper-left pixel. */
-    int *widthPtr;			/* Gets filled in with width of
-					 * character, in pixels. */
-    int *heightPtr;			/* Gets filled in with height of
-					 * character, in pixels. */
+EmbWinBboxProc(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Information about text widget. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,	/* Chunk containing desired char. */
+    int index,			/* Index of desired character within the
+				 * chunk. */
+    int y,			/* Topmost pixel in area allocated for this
+				 * line. */
+    int lineHeight,		/* Total height of line. */
+    int baseline,		/* Location of line's baseline, in pixels
+				 * measured down from y. */
+    int *xPtr, int *yPtr,	/* Gets filled in with coords of character's
+				 * upper-left pixel. */
+    int *widthPtr,		/* Gets filled in with width of window, in
+				 * pixels. */
+    int *heightPtr)		/* Gets filled in with height of window, in
+				 * pixels. */
 {
-    TkTextSegment *ewPtr = (TkTextSegment *) chunkPtr->clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
+    TkTextSegment *ewPtr = (TkTextSegment *) chunkPtr->clientData;
+    TkTextEmbWindowClient *client = EmbWinGetClient(textPtr, ewPtr);
 
-    tkwin = ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin;
+    if (client == NULL) {
+	tkwin = NULL;
+    } else {
+	tkwin = client->tkwin;
+    }
     if (tkwin != NULL) {
 	*widthPtr = Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin);
 	*heightPtr = Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin);
@@ -1082,18 +1252,18 @@ EmbWinBboxProc(chunkPtr, index, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr,
 	}
     }
     switch (ewPtr->body.ew.align) {
-	case ALIGN_BOTTOM:
-	    *yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr - ewPtr->body.ew.padY);
-	    break;
-	case ALIGN_CENTER:
-	    *yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr)/2;
-	    break;
-	case ALIGN_TOP:
-	    *yPtr = y + ewPtr->body.ew.padY;
-	    break;
-	case ALIGN_BASELINE:
-	    *yPtr = y + (baseline - *heightPtr);
-	    break;
+    case ALIGN_BOTTOM:
+	*yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr - ewPtr->body.ew.padY);
+	break;
+    case ALIGN_CENTER:
+	*yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr)/2;
+	break;
+    case ALIGN_TOP:
+	*yPtr = y + ewPtr->body.ew.padY;
+	break;
+    case ALIGN_BASELINE:
+	*yPtr = y + (baseline - *heightPtr);
+	break;
     }
 }
 
@@ -1102,33 +1272,31 @@ EmbWinBboxProc(chunkPtr, index, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr,
  *
  * EmbWinDelayedUnmap --
  *
- *	This procedure is an idle handler that does the actual
- *	work of unmapping an embedded window.  See the comment
- *	in EmbWinUndisplayProc for details.
+ *	This function is an idle handler that does the actual work of
+ *	unmapping an embedded window. See the comment in EmbWinUndisplayProc
+ *	for details.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The window gets unmapped, unless its chunk reference count
- *	has become non-zero again.
+ *	The window gets unmapped, unless its chunk reference count has become
+ *	non-zero again.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EmbWinDelayedUnmap(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Token for the window to
-					 * be unmapped. */
+EmbWinDelayedUnmap(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Token for the window to be unmapped. */
 {
-    TkTextSegment *ewPtr = (TkTextSegment *) clientData;
+    TkTextEmbWindowClient *client = (TkTextEmbWindowClient*) clientData;
 
-    if (!ewPtr->body.ew.displayed && (ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin != NULL)) {
-	if (ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin)) {
-	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin,
-		    ewPtr->body.ew.textPtr->tkwin);
+    if (!client->displayed && (client->tkwin != NULL)) {
+	if (client->textPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(client->tkwin)) {
+	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(client->tkwin, client->textPtr->tkwin);
 	} else {
-	    Tk_UnmapWindow(ewPtr->body.ew.tkwin);
+	    Tk_UnmapWindow(client->tkwin);
 	}
     }
 }
@@ -1138,14 +1306,13 @@ EmbWinDelayedUnmap(clientData)
  *
  * TkTextWindowIndex --
  *
- *	Given the name of an embedded window within a text widget,
- *	returns an index corresponding to the window's position
- *	in the text.
+ *	Given the name of an embedded window within a text widget, returns an
+ *	index corresponding to the window's position in the text.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if there is an embedded window by
- *	the given name in the text widget, 0 otherwise.  If the
- *	window exists, *indexPtr is filled in with its index.
+ *	The return value is 1 if there is an embedded window by the given name
+ *	in the text widget, 0 otherwise. If the window exists, *indexPtr is
+ *	filled in with its index.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1154,21 +1321,74 @@ EmbWinDelayedUnmap(clientData)
  */
 
 int
-TkTextWindowIndex(textPtr, name, indexPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget containing window. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of window. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index information gets stored here. */
+TkTextWindowIndex(
+    TkText *textPtr,		/* Text widget containing window. */
+    const char *name,		/* Name of window. */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr)	/* Index information gets stored here. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     TkTextSegment *ewPtr;
 
-    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->windowTable, name);
+    if (textPtr == NULL) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->windowTable, name);
     if (hPtr == NULL) {
 	return 0;
     }
+
     ewPtr = (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-    indexPtr->tree = textPtr->tree;
+    indexPtr->tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
     indexPtr->linePtr = ewPtr->body.ew.linePtr;
     indexPtr->byteIndex = TkTextSegToOffset(ewPtr, indexPtr->linePtr);
     return 1;
 }
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * EmbWinGetClient --
+ *
+ *	Given a text widget and a segment which contains an embedded window,
+ *	find the text-widget specific information about the embedded window,
+ *	if any.
+ *
+ *	This function performs a completely linear lookup for a matching data
+ *	structure. If we envisage using this code with dozens of peer widgets,
+ *	then performance could become an issue and a more sophisticated lookup
+ *	mechanism might be desirable.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	NULL if no widget-specific info exists, otherwise the structure is
+ *	returned.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static TkTextEmbWindowClient*
+EmbWinGetClient(
+    const TkText *textPtr,	/* Information about text widget. */
+    TkTextSegment *ewPtr)	/* Segment containing embedded window. */
+{
+    TkTextEmbWindowClient *client = ewPtr->body.ew.clients;
+
+    while (client != NULL) {
+	if (client->textPtr == textPtr) {
+	    return client;
+	}
+	client = client->next;
+    }
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkTrig.c b/generic/tkTrig.c
index 1e90cf3..d7439b3 100644
--- a/generic/tkTrig.c
+++ b/generic/tkTrig.c
@@ -1,21 +1,19 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkTrig.c --
  *
- *	This file contains a collection of trigonometry utility
- *	routines that are used by Tk and in particular by the
- *	canvas code.  It also has miscellaneous geometry functions
- *	used by canvases.
+ *	This file contains a collection of trigonometry utility routines that
+ *	are used by Tk and in particular by the canvas code. It also has
+ *	miscellaneous geometry functions used by canvases.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include <stdio.h>
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkCanvas.h"
 
 #undef MIN
@@ -34,9 +32,8 @@
  *	Compute the distance from a point to a finite line segment.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the distance from the line segment
- *	whose end-points are *end1Ptr and *end2Ptr to the point
- *	given by *pointPtr.
+ *	The return value is the distance from the line segment whose
+ *	end-points are *end1Ptr and *end2Ptr to the point given by *pointPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -45,17 +42,17 @@
  */
 
 double
-TkLineToPoint(end1Ptr, end2Ptr, pointPtr)
-    double end1Ptr[2];		/* Coordinates of first end-point of line. */
-    double end2Ptr[2];		/* Coordinates of second end-point of line. */
-    double pointPtr[2];		/* Points to coords for point. */
+TkLineToPoint(
+    double end1Ptr[2],		/* Coordinates of first end-point of line. */
+    double end2Ptr[2],		/* Coordinates of second end-point of line. */
+    double pointPtr[2])		/* Points to coords for point. */
 {
     double x, y;
 
     /*
-     * Compute the point on the line that is closest to the
-     * point.  This must be done separately for vertical edges,
-     * horizontal edges, and other edges.
+     * Compute the point on the line that is closest to the point. This must
+     * be done separately for vertical edges, horizontal edges, and other
+     * edges.
      */
 
     if (end1Ptr[0] == end2Ptr[0]) {
@@ -90,10 +87,10 @@ TkLineToPoint(end1Ptr, end2Ptr, pointPtr)
 	double m1, b1, m2, b2;
 
 	/*
-	 * The edge is neither horizontal nor vertical.  Convert the
-	 * edge to a line equation of the form y = m1*x + b1.  Then
-	 * compute a line perpendicular to this edge but passing
-	 * through the point, also in the form y = m2*x + b2.
+	 * The edge is neither horizontal nor vertical. Convert the edge to a
+	 * line equation of the form y = m1*x + b1. Then compute a line
+	 * perpendicular to this edge but passing through the point, also in
+	 * the form y = m2*x + b2.
 	 */
 
 	m1 = (end2Ptr[1] - end1Ptr[1])/(end2Ptr[0] - end1Ptr[0]);
@@ -133,14 +130,14 @@ TkLineToPoint(end1Ptr, end2Ptr, pointPtr)
  *
  * TkLineToArea --
  *
- *	Determine whether a line lies entirely inside, entirely
- *	outside, or overlapping a given rectangular area.
+ *	Determine whether a line lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or
+ *	overlapping a given rectangular area.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the line given by end1Ptr and end2Ptr
- *	is entirely outside the rectangle given by rectPtr.  0 is
- *	returned if the polygon overlaps the rectangle, and 1 is
- *	returned if the polygon is entirely inside the rectangle.
+ *	-1 is returned if the line given by end1Ptr and end2Ptr is entirely
+ *	outside the rectangle given by rectPtr. 0 is returned if the polygon
+ *	overlaps the rectangle, and 1 is returned if the polygon is entirely
+ *	inside the rectangle.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -149,20 +146,20 @@ TkLineToPoint(end1Ptr, end2Ptr, pointPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkLineToArea(end1Ptr, end2Ptr, rectPtr)
-    double end1Ptr[2];		/* X and y coordinates for one endpoint
-				 * of line. */
-    double end2Ptr[2];		/* X and y coordinates for other endpoint
-				 * of line. */
-    double rectPtr[4];		/* Points to coords for rectangle, in the
-				 * order x1, y1, x2, y2.  X1 must be no
-				 * larger than x2, and y1 no larger than y2. */
+TkLineToArea(
+    double end1Ptr[2],		/* X and y coordinates for one endpoint of
+				 * line. */
+    double end2Ptr[2],		/* X and y coordinates for other endpoint of
+				 * line. */
+    double rectPtr[4])		/* Points to coords for rectangle, in the
+				 * order x1, y1, x2, y2. X1 must be no larger
+				 * than x2, and y1 no larger than y2. */
 {
     int inside1, inside2;
 
     /*
-     * First check the two points individually to see whether they
-     * are inside the rectangle or not.
+     * First check the two points individually to see whether they are inside
+     * the rectangle or not.
      */
 
     inside1 = (end1Ptr[0] >= rectPtr[0]) && (end1Ptr[0] <= rectPtr[2])
@@ -177,17 +174,16 @@ TkLineToArea(end1Ptr, end2Ptr, rectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Both points are outside the rectangle, but still need to check
-     * for intersections between the line and the rectangle.  Horizontal
-     * and vertical lines are particularly easy, so handle them
-     * separately.
+     * Both points are outside the rectangle, but still need to check for
+     * intersections between the line and the rectangle. Horizontal and
+     * vertical lines are particularly easy, so handle them separately.
      */
 
     if (end1Ptr[0] == end2Ptr[0]) {
 	/*
 	 * Vertical line.
 	 */
-    
+
 	if (((end1Ptr[1] >= rectPtr[1]) ^ (end2Ptr[1] >= rectPtr[1]))
 		&& (end1Ptr[0] >= rectPtr[0])
 		&& (end1Ptr[0] <= rectPtr[2])) {
@@ -197,7 +193,7 @@ TkLineToArea(end1Ptr, end2Ptr, rectPtr)
 	/*
 	 * Horizontal line.
 	 */
-    
+
 	if (((end1Ptr[0] >= rectPtr[0]) ^ (end2Ptr[0] >= rectPtr[0]))
 		&& (end1Ptr[1] >= rectPtr[1])
 		&& (end1Ptr[1] <= rectPtr[3])) {
@@ -205,59 +201,63 @@ TkLineToArea(end1Ptr, end2Ptr, rectPtr)
 	}
     } else {
 	double m, x, y, low, high;
-    
+
 	/*
-	 * Diagonal line.  Compute slope of line and use
-	 * for intersection checks against each of the
-	 * sides of the rectangle: left, right, bottom, top.
+	 * Diagonal line. Compute slope of line and use for intersection
+	 * checks against each of the sides of the rectangle: left, right,
+	 * bottom, top.
 	 */
-    
+
 	m = (end2Ptr[1] - end1Ptr[1])/(end2Ptr[0] - end1Ptr[0]);
 	if (end1Ptr[0] < end2Ptr[0]) {
-	    low = end1Ptr[0];  high = end2Ptr[0];
+	    low = end1Ptr[0];
+	    high = end2Ptr[0];
 	} else {
-	    low = end2Ptr[0]; high = end1Ptr[0];
+	    low = end2Ptr[0];
+	    high = end1Ptr[0];
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
 	 * Left edge.
 	 */
-    
+
 	y = end1Ptr[1] + (rectPtr[0] - end1Ptr[0])*m;
 	if ((rectPtr[0] >= low) && (rectPtr[0] <= high)
 		&& (y >= rectPtr[1]) && (y <= rectPtr[3])) {
 	    return 0;
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
 	 * Right edge.
 	 */
-    
+
 	y += (rectPtr[2] - rectPtr[0])*m;
 	if ((y >= rectPtr[1]) && (y <= rectPtr[3])
 		&& (rectPtr[2] >= low) && (rectPtr[2] <= high)) {
 	    return 0;
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
 	 * Bottom edge.
 	 */
-    
+
 	if (end1Ptr[1] < end2Ptr[1]) {
-	    low = end1Ptr[1];  high = end2Ptr[1];
+	    low = end1Ptr[1];
+	    high = end2Ptr[1];
 	} else {
-	    low = end2Ptr[1]; high = end1Ptr[1];
+	    low = end2Ptr[1];
+	    high = end1Ptr[1];
 	}
 	x = end1Ptr[0] + (rectPtr[1] - end1Ptr[1])/m;
 	if ((x >= rectPtr[0]) && (x <= rectPtr[2])
 		&& (rectPtr[1] >= low) && (rectPtr[1] <= high)) {
 	    return 0;
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
 	 * Top edge.
 	 */
-    
+
 	x += (rectPtr[3] - rectPtr[1])/m;
 	if ((x >= rectPtr[0]) && (x <= rectPtr[2])
 		&& (rectPtr[3] >= low) && (rectPtr[3] <= high)) {
@@ -272,14 +272,13 @@ TkLineToArea(end1Ptr, end2Ptr, rectPtr)
  *
  * TkThickPolyLineToArea --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to determine whether a connected
- *	series of line segments lies entirely inside, entirely
- *	outside, or overlapping a given rectangular area.
+ *	This function is called to determine whether a connected series of
+ *	line segments lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or overlapping a
+ *	given rectangular area.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the lines are entirely outside the area,
- *	0 if they overlap, and 1 if they are entirely inside the
- *	given area.
+ *	-1 is returned if the lines are entirely outside the area, 0 if they
+ *	overlap, and 1 if they are entirely inside the given area.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -289,28 +288,27 @@ TkLineToArea(end1Ptr, end2Ptr, rectPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 int
-TkThickPolyLineToArea(coordPtr, numPoints, width, capStyle, joinStyle, rectPtr)
-    double *coordPtr;		/* Points to an array of coordinates for
-				 * the polyline:  x0, y0, x1, y1, ... */
-    int numPoints;		/* Total number of points at *coordPtr. */
-    double width;		/* Width of each line segment. */
-    int capStyle;		/* How are end-points of polyline drawn?
+TkThickPolyLineToArea(
+    double *coordPtr,		/* Points to an array of coordinates for the
+				 * polyline: x0, y0, x1, y1, ... */
+    int numPoints,		/* Total number of points at *coordPtr. */
+    double width,		/* Width of each line segment. */
+    int capStyle,		/* How are end-points of polyline drawn?
 				 * CapRound, CapButt, or CapProjecting. */
-    int joinStyle;		/* How are joints in polyline drawn?
+    int joinStyle,		/* How are joints in polyline drawn?
 				 * JoinMiter, JoinRound, or JoinBevel. */
-    double *rectPtr;		/* Rectangular area to check against. */
+    double *rectPtr)		/* Rectangular area to check against. */
 {
     double radius, poly[10];
     int count;
-    int changedMiterToBevel;	/* Non-zero means that a mitered corner
-				 * had to be treated as beveled after all
-				 * because the angle was < 11 degrees. */
-    int inside;			/* Tentative guess about what to return,
-				 * based on all points seen so far:  one
-				 * means everything seen so far was
-				 * inside the area;  -1 means everything
-				 * was outside the area.  0 means overlap
-				 * has been found. */ 
+    int changedMiterToBevel;	/* Non-zero means that a mitered corner had to
+				 * be treated as beveled after all because the
+				 * angle was < 11 degrees. */
+    int inside;			/* Tentative guess about what to return, based
+				 * on all points seen so far: one means
+				 * everything seen so far was inside the area;
+				 * -1 means everything was outside the area.
+				 * 0 means overlap has been found. */
 
     radius = width/2.0;
     inside = -1;
@@ -321,19 +319,16 @@ TkThickPolyLineToArea(coordPtr, numPoints, width, capStyle, joinStyle, rectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Iterate through all of the edges of the line, computing a polygon
-     * for each edge and testing the area against that polygon.  In
-     * addition, there are additional tests to deal with rounded joints
-     * and caps.
+     * Iterate through all of the edges of the line, computing a polygon for
+     * each edge and testing the area against that polygon. In addition, there
+     * are additional tests to deal with rounded joints and caps.
      */
 
     changedMiterToBevel = 0;
     for (count = numPoints; count >= 2; count--, coordPtr += 2) {
-
 	/*
-	 * If rounding is done around the first point of the edge
-	 * then test a circular region around the point with the
-	 * area.
+	 * If rounding is done around the first point of the edge then test a
+	 * circular region around the point with the area.
 	 */
 
 	if (((capStyle == CapRound) && (count == numPoints))
@@ -348,9 +343,9 @@ TkThickPolyLineToArea(coordPtr, numPoints, width, capStyle, joinStyle, rectPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Compute the polygonal shape corresponding to this edge,
-	 * consisting of two points for the first point of the edge
-	 * and two points for the last point of the edge.
+	 * Compute the polygonal shape corresponding to this edge, consisting
+	 * of two points for the first point of the edge and two points for
+	 * the last point of the edge.
 	 */
 
 	if (count == numPoints) {
@@ -365,10 +360,10 @@ TkThickPolyLineToArea(coordPtr, numPoints, width, capStyle, joinStyle, rectPtr)
 	    TkGetButtPoints(coordPtr+2, coordPtr, width, 0, poly, poly+2);
 
 	    /*
-	     * If the last joint was beveled, then also check a
-	     * polygon comprising the last two points of the previous
-	     * polygon and the first two from this polygon;  this checks
-	     * the wedges that fill the beveled joint.
+	     * If the last joint was beveled, then also check a polygon
+	     * comprising the last two points of the previous polygon and the
+	     * first two from this polygon; this checks the wedges that fill
+	     * the beveled joint.
 	     */
 
 	    if ((joinStyle == JoinBevel) || changedMiterToBevel) {
@@ -401,8 +396,7 @@ TkThickPolyLineToArea(coordPtr, numPoints, width, capStyle, joinStyle, rectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If caps are rounded, check the cap around the final point
-     * of the line.
+     * If caps are rounded, check the cap around the final point of the line.
      */
 
     if (capStyle == CapRound) {
@@ -426,10 +420,9 @@ TkThickPolyLineToArea(coordPtr, numPoints, width, capStyle, joinStyle, rectPtr)
  *	Compute the distance from a point to a polygon.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0.0 if the point referred to by
- *	pointPtr is within the polygon referred to by polyPtr
- *	and numPoints.  Otherwise the return value is the
- *	distance of the point from the polygon.
+ *	The return value is 0.0 if the point referred to by pointPtr is within
+ *	the polygon referred to by polyPtr and numPoints. Otherwise the return
+ *	value is the distance of the point from the polygon.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -438,15 +431,15 @@ TkThickPolyLineToArea(coordPtr, numPoints, width, capStyle, joinStyle, rectPtr)
  */
 
 double
-TkPolygonToPoint(polyPtr, numPoints, pointPtr)
-    double *polyPtr;		/* Points to an array coordinates for
-				 * closed polygon:  x0, y0, x1, y1, ...
-				 * The polygon may be self-intersecting. */
-    int numPoints;		/* Total number of points at *polyPtr. */
-    double *pointPtr;		/* Points to coords for point. */
+TkPolygonToPoint(
+    double *polyPtr,		/* Points to an array coordinates for closed
+				 * polygon: x0, y0, x1, y1, ... The polygon
+				 * may be self-intersecting. */
+    int numPoints,		/* Total number of points at *polyPtr. */
+    double *pointPtr)		/* Points to coords for point. */
 {
-    double bestDist;		/* Closest distance between point and
-				 * any edge in polygon. */
+    double bestDist;		/* Closest distance between point and any edge
+				 * in polygon. */
     int intersections;		/* Number of edges in the polygon that
 				 * intersect a ray extending vertically
 				 * upwards from the point to infinity. */
@@ -454,13 +447,12 @@ TkPolygonToPoint(polyPtr, numPoints, pointPtr)
     register double *pPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Iterate through all of the edges in the polygon, updating
-     * bestDist and intersections.
+     * Iterate through all of the edges in the polygon, updating bestDist and
+     * intersections.
      *
-     * TRICKY POINT:  when computing intersections, include left
-     * x-coordinate of line within its range, but not y-coordinate.
-     * Otherwise if the point lies exactly below a vertex we'll
-     * count it as two intersections.
+     * TRICKY POINT: when computing intersections, include left x-coordinate
+     * of line within its range, but not y-coordinate. Otherwise if the point
+     * lies exactly below a vertex we'll count it as two intersections.
      */
 
     bestDist = 1.0e36;
@@ -470,10 +462,9 @@ TkPolygonToPoint(polyPtr, numPoints, pointPtr)
 	double x, y, dist;
 
 	/*
-	 * Compute the point on the current edge closest to the point
-	 * and update the intersection count.  This must be done
-	 * separately for vertical edges, horizontal edges, and
-	 * other edges.
+	 * Compute the point on the current edge closest to the point and
+	 * update the intersection count. This must be done separately for
+	 * vertical edges, horizontal edges, and other edges.
 	 */
 
 	if (pPtr[2] == pPtr[0]) {
@@ -514,13 +505,13 @@ TkPolygonToPoint(polyPtr, numPoints, pointPtr)
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    double m1, b1, m2, b2;
-	    int lower;			/* Non-zero means point below line. */
+	    int lower;		/* Non-zero means point below line. */
 
 	    /*
-	     * The edge is neither horizontal nor vertical.  Convert the
-	     * edge to a line equation of the form y = m1*x + b1.  Then
-	     * compute a line perpendicular to this edge but passing
-	     * through the point, also in the form y = m2*x + b2.
+	     * The edge is neither horizontal nor vertical. Convert the edge
+	     * to a line equation of the form y = m1*x + b1. Then compute a
+	     * line perpendicular to this edge but passing through the point,
+	     * also in the form y = m2*x + b2.
 	     */
 
 	    m1 = (pPtr[3] - pPtr[1])/(pPtr[2] - pPtr[0]);
@@ -554,8 +545,8 @@ TkPolygonToPoint(polyPtr, numPoints, pointPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Compute the distance to the closest point, and see if that
-	 * is the best distance seen so far.
+	 * Compute the distance to the closest point, and see if that is the
+	 * best distance seen so far.
 	 */
 
 	dist = hypot(pointPtr[0] - x, pointPtr[1] - y);
@@ -565,8 +556,8 @@ TkPolygonToPoint(polyPtr, numPoints, pointPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * We've processed all of the points.  If the number of intersections
-     * is odd, the point is inside the polygon.
+     * We've processed all of the points. If the number of intersections is
+     * odd, the point is inside the polygon.
      */
 
     if (intersections & 0x1) {
@@ -580,14 +571,14 @@ TkPolygonToPoint(polyPtr, numPoints, pointPtr)
  *
  * TkPolygonToArea --
  *
- *	Determine whether a polygon lies entirely inside, entirely
- *	outside, or overlapping a given rectangular area.
+ *	Determine whether a polygon lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or
+ *	overlapping a given rectangular area.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the polygon given by polyPtr and numPoints
- *	is entirely outside the rectangle given by rectPtr.  0 is
- *	returned if the polygon overlaps the rectangle, and 1 is
- *	returned if the polygon is entirely inside the rectangle.
+ *	-1 is returned if the polygon given by polyPtr and numPoints is
+ *	entirely outside the rectangle given by rectPtr. 0 is returned if the
+ *	polygon overlaps the rectangle, and 1 is returned if the polygon is
+ *	entirely inside the rectangle.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -596,14 +587,14 @@ TkPolygonToPoint(polyPtr, numPoints, pointPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkPolygonToArea(polyPtr, numPoints, rectPtr)
-    double *polyPtr;		/* Points to an array coordinates for
-				 * closed polygon:  x0, y0, x1, y1, ...
-				 * The polygon may be self-intersecting. */
-    int numPoints;		/* Total number of points at *polyPtr. */
-    register double *rectPtr;	/* Points to coords for rectangle, in the
-				 * order x1, y1, x2, y2.  X1 and y1 must
-				 * be lower-left corner. */
+TkPolygonToArea(
+    double *polyPtr,		/* Points to an array coordinates for closed
+				 * polygon: x0, y0, x1, y1, ... The polygon
+				 * may be self-intersecting. */
+    int numPoints,		/* Total number of points at *polyPtr. */
+    register double *rectPtr)	/* Points to coords for rectangle, in the
+				 * order x1, y1, x2, y2. X1 and y1 must be
+				 * lower-left corner. */
 {
     int state;			/* State of all edges seen so far (-1 means
 				 * outside, 1 means inside, won't ever be
@@ -612,9 +603,8 @@ TkPolygonToArea(polyPtr, numPoints, rectPtr)
     register double *pPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Iterate over all of the edges of the polygon and test them
-     * against the rectangle.  Can quit as soon as the state becomes
-     * "intersecting".
+     * Iterate over all of the edges of the polygon and test them against the
+     * rectangle. Can quit as soon as the state becomes "intersecting".
      */
 
     state = TkLineToArea(polyPtr, polyPtr+2, rectPtr);
@@ -629,10 +619,10 @@ TkPolygonToArea(polyPtr, numPoints, rectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If all of the edges were inside the rectangle we're done.
-     * If all of the edges were outside, then the rectangle could
-     * still intersect the polygon (if it's entirely enclosed).
-     * Call TkPolygonToPoint to figure this out.
+     * If all of the edges were inside the rectangle we're done. If all of the
+     * edges were outside, then the rectangle could still intersect the
+     * polygon (if it's entirely enclosed). Call TkPolygonToPoint to figure
+     * this out.
      */
 
     if (state == 1) {
@@ -649,17 +639,16 @@ TkPolygonToArea(polyPtr, numPoints, rectPtr)
  *
  * TkOvalToPoint --
  *
- *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given
- *	oval, in canvas units.
+ *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given oval, in canvas
+ *	units.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the point given by *pointPtr is
- *	inside the oval.  If the point isn't inside the
- *	oval then the return value is approximately the distance
- *	from the point to the oval.  If the oval is filled, then
- *	anywhere in the interior is considered "inside";  if
- *	the oval isn't filled, then "inside" means only the area
- *	occupied by the outline.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the point given by *pointPtr is inside the
+ *	oval. If the point isn't inside the oval then the return value is
+ *	approximately the distance from the point to the oval. If the oval is
+ *	filled, then anywhere in the interior is considered "inside"; if the
+ *	oval isn't filled, then "inside" means only the area occupied by the
+ *	outline.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -669,22 +658,23 @@ TkPolygonToArea(polyPtr, numPoints, rectPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 double
-TkOvalToPoint(ovalPtr, width, filled, pointPtr)
-    double ovalPtr[4];		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
-				 * (x1, y1, x2, y2) defining oval's bounding
+TkOvalToPoint(
+    double ovalPtr[4],		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates (x1,
+				 * y1, x2, y2) defining oval's bounding
 				 * box. */
-    double width;		/* Width of outline for oval. */
-    int filled;			/* Non-zero means oval should be treated as
-				 * filled;  zero means only consider outline. */
-    double pointPtr[2];		/* Coordinates of point. */
+    double width,		/* Width of outline for oval. */
+    int filled,			/* Non-zero means oval should be treated as
+				 * filled; zero means only consider
+				 * outline. */
+    double pointPtr[2])		/* Coordinates of point. */
 {
     double xDelta, yDelta, scaledDistance, distToOutline, distToCenter;
     double xDiam, yDiam;
 
     /*
-     * Compute the distance between the center of the oval and the
-     * point in question, using a coordinate system where the oval
-     * has been transformed to a circle with unit radius.
+     * Compute the distance between the center of the oval and the point in
+     * question, using a coordinate system where the oval has been transformed
+     * to a circle with unit radius.
      */
 
     xDelta = (pointPtr[0] - (ovalPtr[0] + ovalPtr[2])/2.0);
@@ -693,16 +683,14 @@ TkOvalToPoint(ovalPtr, width, filled, pointPtr)
     scaledDistance = hypot(xDelta / ((ovalPtr[2] + width - ovalPtr[0])/2.0),
 	    yDelta / ((ovalPtr[3] + width - ovalPtr[1])/2.0));
 
-
     /*
-     * If the scaled distance is greater than 1 then it means no
-     * hit.  Compute the distance from the point to the edge of
-     * the circle, then scale this distance back to the original
-     * coordinate system.
+     * If the scaled distance is greater than 1 then it means no hit. Compute
+     * the distance from the point to the edge of the circle, then scale this
+     * distance back to the original coordinate system.
      *
-     * Note: this distance isn't completely accurate.  It's only
-     * an approximation, and it can overestimate the correct
-     * distance when the oval is eccentric.
+     * Note: this distance isn't completely accurate. It's only an
+     * approximation, and it can overestimate the correct distance when the
+     * oval is eccentric.
      */
 
     if (scaledDistance > 1.0) {
@@ -710,11 +698,11 @@ TkOvalToPoint(ovalPtr, width, filled, pointPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Scaled distance less than 1 means the point is inside the
-     * outer edge of the oval.  If this is a filled oval, then we
-     * have a hit.  Otherwise, do the same computation as above
-     * (scale back to original coordinate system), but also check
-     * to see if the point is within the width of the outline.
+     * Scaled distance less than 1 means the point is inside the outer edge of
+     * the oval. If this is a filled oval, then we have a hit. Otherwise, do
+     * the same computation as above (scale back to original coordinate
+     * system), but also check to see if the point is within the width of the
+     * outline.
      */
 
     if (filled) {
@@ -725,9 +713,9 @@ TkOvalToPoint(ovalPtr, width, filled, pointPtr)
 		- width;
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * Avoid dividing by a very small number (it could cause an
-	 * arithmetic overflow).  This problem occurs if the point is
-	 * very close to the center of the oval.
+	 * Avoid dividing by a very small number (it could cause an arithmetic
+	 * overflow). This problem occurs if the point is very close to the
+	 * center of the oval.
 	 */
 
 	xDiam = ovalPtr[2] - ovalPtr[0];
@@ -750,14 +738,14 @@ TkOvalToPoint(ovalPtr, width, filled, pointPtr)
  *
  * TkOvalToArea --
  *
- *	Determine whether an oval lies entirely inside, entirely
- *	outside, or overlapping a given rectangular area.
+ *	Determine whether an oval lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or
+ *	overlapping a given rectangular area.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the oval described by ovalPtr is entirely
- *	outside the rectangle given by rectPtr.  0 is returned if the
- *	oval overlaps the rectangle, and 1 is returned if the oval
- *	is entirely inside the rectangle.
+ *	-1 is returned if the oval described by ovalPtr is entirely outside
+ *	the rectangle given by rectPtr. 0 is returned if the oval overlaps the
+ *	rectangle, and 1 is returned if the oval is entirely inside the
+ *	rectangle.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -766,20 +754,20 @@ TkOvalToPoint(ovalPtr, width, filled, pointPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkOvalToArea(ovalPtr, rectPtr)
-    register double *ovalPtr;	/* Points to coordinates definining the
+TkOvalToArea(
+    register double *ovalPtr,	/* Points to coordinates definining the
 				 * bounding rectangle for the oval: x1, y1,
-				 * x2, y2.  X1 must be less than x2 and y1
-				 * less than y2. */
-    register double *rectPtr;	/* Points to coords for rectangle, in the
-				 * order x1, y1, x2, y2.  X1 and y1 must
-				 * be lower-left corner. */
+				 * x2, y2. X1 must be less than x2 and y1 less
+				 * than y2. */
+    register double *rectPtr)	/* Points to coords for rectangle, in the
+				 * order x1, y1, x2, y2. X1 and y1 must be
+				 * lower-left corner. */
 {
     double centerX, centerY, radX, radY, deltaX, deltaY;
 
     /*
-     * First, see if oval is entirely inside rectangle or entirely
-     * outside rectangle.
+     * First, see if oval is entirely inside rectangle or entirely outside
+     * rectangle.
      */
 
     if ((rectPtr[0] <= ovalPtr[0]) && (rectPtr[2] >= ovalPtr[2])
@@ -792,11 +780,10 @@ TkOvalToArea(ovalPtr, rectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Next, go through the rectangle side by side.  For each side
-     * of the rectangle, find the point on the side that is closest
-     * to the oval's center, and see if that point is inside the
-     * oval.  If at least one such point is inside the oval, then
-     * the rectangle intersects the oval.
+     * Next, go through the rectangle side by side. For each side of the
+     * rectangle, find the point on the side that is closest to the oval's
+     * center, and see if that point is inside the oval. If at least one such
+     * point is inside the oval, then the rectangle intersects the oval.
      */
 
     centerX = (ovalPtr[0] + ovalPtr[2])/2;
@@ -872,8 +859,8 @@ TkOvalToArea(ovalPtr, rectPtr)
  *
  * TkIncludePoint --
  *
- *	Given a point and a generic canvas item header, expand
- *	the item's bounding box if needed to include the point.
+ *	Given a point and a generic canvas item header, expand the item's
+ *	bounding box if needed to include the point.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -886,11 +873,11 @@ TkOvalToArea(ovalPtr, rectPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 void
-TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, pointPtr)
-    register Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item whose bounding box is
-					 * being calculated. */
-    double *pointPtr;			/* Address of two doubles giving
-					 * x and y coordinates of point. */
+TkIncludePoint(
+    register Tk_Item *itemPtr,	/* Item whose bounding box is being
+				 * calculated. */
+    double *pointPtr)		/* Address of two doubles giving x and y
+				 * coordinates of point. */
 {
     int tmp;
 
@@ -915,15 +902,14 @@ TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, pointPtr)
  *
  * TkBezierScreenPoints --
  *
- *	Given four control points, create a larger set of XPoints
- *	for a Bezier spline based on the points.
+ *	Given four control points, create a larger set of XPoints for a Bezier
+ *	curve based on the points.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The array at *xPointPtr gets filled in with numSteps XPoints
- *	corresponding to the Bezier spline defined by the four 
- *	control points.  Note:  no output point is generated for the
- *	first input point, but an output point *is* generated for
- *	the last input point.
+ *	corresponding to the Bezier spline defined by the four control points.
+ *	Note: no output point is generated for the first input point, but an
+ *	output point *is* generated for the last input point.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -932,15 +918,12 @@ TkIncludePoint(itemPtr, pointPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkBezierScreenPoints(canvas, control, numSteps, xPointPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas in which curve is to be
-					 * drawn. */
-    double control[];			/* Array of coordinates for four
-					 * control points:  x0, y0, x1, y1,
-					 * ... x3 y3. */
-    int numSteps;			/* Number of curve points to
-					 * generate.  */
-    register XPoint *xPointPtr;		/* Where to put new points. */
+TkBezierScreenPoints(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas in which curve is to be drawn. */
+    double control[],		/* Array of coordinates for four control
+				 * points: x0, y0, x1, y1, ... x3 y3. */
+    int numSteps,		/* Number of curve points to generate. */
+    register XPoint *xPointPtr)	/* Where to put new points. */
 {
     int i;
     double u, u2, u3, t, t2, t3;
@@ -966,15 +949,14 @@ TkBezierScreenPoints(canvas, control, numSteps, xPointPtr)
  *
  * TkBezierPoints --
  *
- *	Given four control points, create a larger set of points
- *	for a Bezier spline based on the points.
+ *	Given four control points, create a larger set of points for a Bezier
+ *	curve based on the points.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The array at *coordPtr gets filled in with 2*numSteps
- *	coordinates, which correspond to the Bezier spline defined
- *	by the four control points.  Note:  no output point is
- *	generated for the first input point, but an output point
- *	*is* generated for the last input point.
+ *	The array at *coordPtr gets filled in with 2*numSteps coordinates,
+ *	which correspond to the Bezier spline defined by the four control
+ *	points. Note: no output point is generated for the first input point,
+ *	but an output point *is* generated for the last input point.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -983,13 +965,11 @@ TkBezierScreenPoints(canvas, control, numSteps, xPointPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkBezierPoints(control, numSteps, coordPtr)
-    double control[];			/* Array of coordinates for four
-					 * control points:  x0, y0, x1, y1,
-					 * ... x3 y3. */
-    int numSteps;			/* Number of curve points to
-					 * generate.  */
-    register double *coordPtr;		/* Where to put new points. */
+TkBezierPoints(
+    double control[],		/* Array of coordinates for four control
+				 * points: x0, y0, x1, y1, ... x3 y3. */
+    int numSteps,		/* Number of curve points to generate. */
+    register double *coordPtr)	/* Where to put new points. */
 {
     int i;
     double u, u2, u3, t, t2, t3;
@@ -1013,20 +993,21 @@ TkBezierPoints(control, numSteps, coordPtr)
  *
  * TkMakeBezierCurve --
  *
- *	Given a set of points, create a new set of points that fit
- *	parabolic splines to the line segments connecting the original
- *	points.  Produces output points in either of two forms.
+ *	Given a set of points, create a new set of points that fit parabolic
+ *	splines to the line segments connecting the original points. Produces
+ *	output points in either of two forms.
  *
- *	Note: in spite of this procedure's name, it does *not* generate
- *	Bezier curves.  Since only three control points are used for
- *	each curve segment, not four, the curves are actually just
- *	parabolic.
+ *	Note: the name of this function should *not* be taken to mean that it
+ *	interprets the input points as directly defining Bezier curves.
+ *	Rather, it internally computes a Bezier curve representation of each
+ *	parabolic spline segment. (These Bezier curves are then flattened to
+ *	produce the points filled into the output arrays.)
  *
  * Results:
- *	Either or both of the xPoints or dblPoints arrays are filled
- *	in.  The return value is the number of points placed in the
- *	arrays.  Note:  if the first and last points are the same, then
- *	a closed curve is generated.
+ *	Either or both of the xPoints or dblPoints arrays are filled in. The
+ *	return value is the number of points placed in the arrays. Note: if
+ *	the first and last points are the same, then a closed curve is
+ *	generated.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1035,40 +1016,40 @@ TkBezierPoints(control, numSteps, coordPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkMakeBezierCurve(canvas, pointPtr, numPoints, numSteps, xPoints, dblPoints)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas in which curve is to be
-					 * drawn. */
-    double *pointPtr;			/* Array of input coordinates:  x0,
-					 * y0, x1, y1, etc.. */
-    int numPoints;			/* Number of points at pointPtr. */
-    int numSteps;			/* Number of steps to use for each
-					 * spline segments (determines
-					 * smoothness of curve). */
-    XPoint xPoints[];			/* Array of XPoints to fill in (e.g.
-					 * for display.  NULL means don't
-					 * fill in any XPoints. */
-    double dblPoints[];			/* Array of points to fill in as
-					 * doubles, in the form x0, y0,
-					 * x1, y1, ....  NULL means don't
-					 * fill in anything in this form. 
-					 * Caller must make sure that this
-					 * array has enough space. */
+TkMakeBezierCurve(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas in which curve is to be drawn. */
+    double *pointPtr,		/* Array of input coordinates: x0, y0, x1, y1,
+				 * etc.. */
+    int numPoints,		/* Number of points at pointPtr. */
+    int numSteps,		/* Number of steps to use for each spline
+				 * segments (determines smoothness of
+				 * curve). */
+    XPoint xPoints[],		/* Array of XPoints to fill in (e.g. for
+				 * display). NULL means don't fill in any
+				 * XPoints. */
+    double dblPoints[])		/* Array of points to fill in as doubles, in
+				 * the form x0, y0, x1, y1, .... NULL means
+				 * don't fill in anything in this form. Caller
+				 * must make sure that this array has enough
+				 * space. */
 {
     int closed, outputPoints, i;
     int numCoords = numPoints*2;
     double control[8];
 
     /*
-     * If the curve is a closed one then generate a special spline
-     * that spans the last points and the first ones.  Otherwise
-     * just put the first point into the output.
+     * If the curve is a closed one then generate a special spline that spans
+     * the last points and the first ones. Otherwise just put the first point
+     * into the output.
      */
 
     if (!pointPtr) {
-	/* Of pointPtr == NULL, this function returns an upper limit.
-	 * of the array size to store the coordinates. This can be
-	 * used to allocate storage, before the actual coordinates
-	 * are calculated. */
+	/*
+	 * Of pointPtr == NULL, this function returns an upper limit of the
+	 * array size to store the coordinates. This can be used to allocate
+	 * storage, before the actual coordinates are calculated.
+	 */
+
 	return 1 + numPoints * numSteps;
     }
 
@@ -1114,9 +1095,8 @@ TkMakeBezierCurve(canvas, pointPtr, numPoints, numSteps, xPoints, dblPoints)
 
     for (i = 2; i < numPoints; i++, pointPtr += 2) {
 	/*
-	 * Set up the first two control points.  This is done
-	 * differently for the first spline of an open curve
-	 * than for other cases.
+	 * Set up the first two control points. This is done differently for
+	 * the first spline of an open curve than for other cases.
 	 */
 
 	if ((i == 2) && !closed) {
@@ -1132,9 +1112,8 @@ TkMakeBezierCurve(canvas, pointPtr, numPoints, numSteps, xPoints, dblPoints)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Set up the last two control points.  This is done
-	 * differently for the last spline of an open curve
-	 * than for other cases.
+	 * Set up the last two control points. This is done differently for
+	 * the last spline of an open curve than for other cases.
 	 */
 
 	if ((i == (numPoints-1)) && !closed) {
@@ -1150,10 +1129,9 @@ TkMakeBezierCurve(canvas, pointPtr, numPoints, numSteps, xPoints, dblPoints)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If the first two points coincide, or if the last
-	 * two points coincide, then generate a single
-	 * straight-line segment by outputting the last control
-	 * point.
+	 * If the first two points coincide, or if the last two points
+	 * coincide, then generate a single straight-line segment by
+	 * outputting the last control point.
 	 */
 
 	if (((pointPtr[0] == pointPtr[2]) && (pointPtr[1] == pointPtr[3]))
@@ -1194,14 +1172,193 @@ TkMakeBezierCurve(canvas, pointPtr, numPoints, numSteps, xPoints, dblPoints)
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * TkMakeRawCurve --
+ *
+ *	Interpret the given set of points as the raw knots and control points
+ *	defining a sequence of cubic Bezier curves. Create a new set of points
+ *	that fit these Bezier curves. Output points are produced in either of
+ *	two forms.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Either or both of the xPoints or dblPoints arrays are filled in. The
+ *	return value is the number of points placed in the arrays.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkMakeRawCurve(
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas in which curve is to be drawn. */
+    double *pointPtr,		/* Array of input coordinates: x0, y0, x1, y1,
+				 * etc.. */
+    int numPoints,		/* Number of points at pointPtr. */
+    int numSteps,		/* Number of steps to use for each curve
+				 * segment (determines smoothness of
+				 * curve). */
+    XPoint xPoints[],		/* Array of XPoints to fill in (e.g. for
+				 * display). NULL means don't fill in any
+				 * XPoints. */
+    double dblPoints[])		/* Array of points to fill in as doubles, in
+				 * the form x0, y0, x1, y1, .... NULL means
+				 * don't fill in anything in this form.
+				 * Caller must make sure that this array has
+				 * enough space. */
+{
+    int outputPoints, i;
+    int numSegments = (numPoints+1)/3;
+    double *segPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * The input describes a curve with s Bezier curve segments if there are
+     * 3s+1, 3s, or 3s-1 input points. In the last two cases, 1 or 2 initial
+     * points from the first curve segment are reused as defining points also
+     * for the last curve segment. In the case of 3s input points, this will
+     * automatically close the curve.
+     */
+
+    if (!pointPtr) {
+	/*
+	 * If pointPtr == NULL, this function returns an upper limit of the
+	 * array size to store the coordinates. This can be used to allocate
+	 * storage, before the actual coordinates are calculated.
+	 */
+
+	return 1 + numSegments * numSteps;
+    }
+
+    outputPoints = 0;
+    if (xPoints != NULL) {
+	Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, pointPtr[0], pointPtr[1],
+		&xPoints->x, &xPoints->y);
+	xPoints += 1;
+    }
+    if (dblPoints != NULL) {
+	dblPoints[0] = pointPtr[0];
+	dblPoints[1] = pointPtr[1];
+	dblPoints += 2;
+    }
+    outputPoints += 1;
+
+    /*
+     * The next loop handles all curve segments except one that overlaps the
+     * end of the list of coordinates.
+     */
+
+    for (i=numPoints,segPtr=pointPtr ; i>=4 ; i-=3,segPtr+=6) {
+	if (segPtr[0]==segPtr[2] && segPtr[1]==segPtr[3] &&
+		segPtr[4]==segPtr[6] && segPtr[5]==segPtr[7]) {
+	    /*
+	     * The control points on this segment are equal to their
+	     * neighbouring knots, so this segment is just a straight line. A
+	     * single point is sufficient.
+	     */
+
+	    if (xPoints != NULL) {
+		Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, segPtr[6], segPtr[7],
+			&xPoints->x, &xPoints->y);
+		xPoints += 1;
+	    }
+	    if (dblPoints != NULL) {
+		dblPoints[0] = segPtr[6];
+		dblPoints[1] = segPtr[7];
+		dblPoints += 2;
+	    }
+	    outputPoints += 1;
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * This is a generic Bezier curve segment.
+	     */
+
+	    if (xPoints != NULL) {
+		TkBezierScreenPoints(canvas, segPtr, numSteps, xPoints);
+		xPoints += numSteps;
+	    }
+	    if (dblPoints != NULL) {
+		TkBezierPoints(segPtr, numSteps, dblPoints);
+		dblPoints += 2*numSteps;
+	    }
+	    outputPoints += numSteps;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If at this point i>1, then there is some point which has not yet been
+     * used. Make another curve segment.
+     */
+
+    if (i > 1) {
+	int j;
+	double control[8];
+
+	/*
+	 * Copy the relevant coordinates to control[], so that it can be
+	 * passed as a unit to e.g. TkBezierPoints.
+	 */
+
+	for (j=0; j<2*i; j++) {
+	    control[j] = segPtr[j];
+	}
+	for (; j<8; j++) {
+	    control[j] = pointPtr[j-2*i];
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Then we just do the same things as above.
+	 */
+
+	if (control[0]==control[2] && control[1]==control[3] &&
+		control[4]==control[6] && control[5]==control[7]) {
+	    /*
+	     * The control points on this segment are equal to their
+	     * neighbouring knots, so this segment is just a straight line. A
+	     * single point is sufficient.
+	     */
+
+	    if (xPoints != NULL) {
+		Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, control[6], control[7],
+			&xPoints->x, &xPoints->y);
+		xPoints += 1;
+	    }
+	    if (dblPoints != NULL) {
+		dblPoints[0] = control[6];
+		dblPoints[1] = control[7];
+		dblPoints += 2;
+	    }
+	    outputPoints += 1;
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * This is a generic Bezier curve segment.
+	     */
+
+	    if (xPoints != NULL) {
+		TkBezierScreenPoints(canvas, control, numSteps, xPoints);
+		xPoints += numSteps;
+	    }
+	    if (dblPoints != NULL) {
+		TkBezierPoints(control, numSteps, dblPoints);
+		dblPoints += 2*numSteps;
+	    }
+	    outputPoints += numSteps;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return outputPoints;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TkMakeBezierPostscript --
  *
- *	This procedure generates Postscript commands that create
- *	a path corresponding to a given Bezier curve.
+ *	This function generates Postscript commands that create a path
+ *	corresponding to a given Bezier curve.
  *
  * Results:
- *	None.  Postscript commands to generate the path are appended
- *	to the interp's result.
+ *	None. Postscript commands to generate the path are appended to the
+ *	interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1210,14 +1367,14 @@ TkMakeBezierCurve(canvas, pointPtr, numPoints, numSteps, xPoints, dblPoints)
  */
 
 void
-TkMakeBezierPostscript(interp, canvas, pointPtr, numPoints)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter in whose result the
-					 * Postscript is to be stored. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas widget for which the
-					 * Postscript is being generated. */
-    double *pointPtr;			/* Array of input coordinates:  x0,
-					 * y0, x1, y1, etc.. */
-    int numPoints;			/* Number of points at pointPtr. */
+TkMakeBezierPostscript(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter in whose result the Postscript
+				 * is to be stored. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas widget for which the Postscript is
+				 * being generated. */
+    double *pointPtr,		/* Array of input coordinates: x0, y0, x1, y1,
+				 * etc.. */
+    int numPoints)		/* Number of points at pointPtr. */
 {
     int closed, i;
     int numCoords = numPoints*2;
@@ -1225,9 +1382,9 @@ TkMakeBezierPostscript(interp, canvas, pointPtr, numPoints)
     char buffer[200];
 
     /*
-     * If the curve is a closed one then generate a special spline
-     * that spans the last points and the first ones.  Otherwise
-     * just put the first point into the path.
+     * If the curve is a closed one then generate a special spline that spans
+     * the last points and the first ones. Otherwise just put the first point
+     * into the path.
      */
 
     if ((pointPtr[0] == pointPtr[numCoords-2])
@@ -1253,11 +1410,11 @@ TkMakeBezierPostscript(interp, canvas, pointPtr, numPoints)
 	sprintf(buffer, "%.15g %.15g moveto\n",
 		control[6], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, control[7]));
     }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
 
     /*
-     * Cycle through all the remaining points in the curve, generating
-     * a curve section for each vertex in the linear path.
+     * Cycle through all the remaining points in the curve, generating a curve
+     * section for each vertex in the linear path.
      */
 
     for (i = numPoints-2, pointPtr += 2; i > 0; i--, pointPtr += 2) {
@@ -1265,9 +1422,8 @@ TkMakeBezierPostscript(interp, canvas, pointPtr, numPoints)
 	control[3] = 0.333*control[7] + 0.667*pointPtr[1];
 
 	/*
-	 * Set up the last two control points.  This is done
-	 * differently for the last spline of an open curve
-	 * than for other cases.
+	 * Set up the last two control points. This is done differently for
+	 * the last spline of an open curve than for other cases.
 	 */
 
 	if ((i == 1) && !closed) {
@@ -1284,7 +1440,115 @@ TkMakeBezierPostscript(interp, canvas, pointPtr, numPoints)
 		control[2], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, control[3]),
 		control[4], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, control[5]),
 		control[6], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, control[7]));
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkMakeRawCurvePostscript --
+ *
+ *	This function interprets the input points as the raw knot and control
+ *	points for a curve composed of Bezier curve segments, just like
+ *	TkMakeRawCurve. It generates Postscript commands that create a path
+ *	corresponding to this given curve.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None. Postscript commands to generate the path are appended to the
+ *	interp's result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkMakeRawCurvePostscript(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter in whose result the Postscript
+				 * is to be stored. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas,		/* Canvas widget for which the Postscript is
+				 * being generated. */
+    double *pointPtr,		/* Array of input coordinates: x0, y0, x1, y1,
+				 * etc.. */
+    int numPoints)		/* Number of points at pointPtr. */
+{
+    int i;
+    double *segPtr;
+    char buffer[200];
+
+    /*
+     * Put the first point into the path.
+     */
+
+    sprintf(buffer, "%.15g %.15g moveto\n",
+	    pointPtr[0], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, pointPtr[1]));
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+
+    /*
+     * Loop through all the remaining points in the curve, generating a
+     * straight line or curve section for every three of them.
+     */
+
+    for (i=numPoints-1,segPtr=pointPtr ; i>=3 ; i-=3,segPtr+=6) {
+	if (segPtr[0]==segPtr[2] && segPtr[1]==segPtr[3] &&
+		segPtr[4]==segPtr[6] && segPtr[5]==segPtr[7]) {
+	    /*
+	     * The control points on this segment are equal to their
+	     * neighbouring knots, so this segment is just a straight line.
+	     */
+
+	    sprintf(buffer, "%.15g %.15g lineto\n",
+		    segPtr[6], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, segPtr[7]));
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * This is a generic Bezier curve segment.
+	     */
+
+	    sprintf(buffer, "%.15g %.15g %.15g %.15g %.15g %.15g curveto\n",
+		    segPtr[2], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, segPtr[3]),
+		    segPtr[4], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, segPtr[5]),
+		    segPtr[6], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, segPtr[7]));
+	}
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If there are any points left that haven't been used, then build the
+     * last segment and generate Postscript in the same way for that.
+     */
+
+    if (i > 0) {
+	int j;
+	double control[8];
+
+	for (j=0; j<2*i+2; j++) {
+	    control[j] = segPtr[j];
+	}
+	for (; j<8; j++) {
+	    control[j] = pointPtr[j-2*i-2];
+	}
+
+	if (control[0]==control[2] && control[1]==control[3] &&
+		control[4]==control[6] && control[5]==control[7]) {
+	    /*
+	     * Straight line.
+	     */
+
+	    sprintf(buffer, "%.15g %.15g lineto\n",
+		    control[6], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, control[7]));
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * Bezier curve segment.
+	     */
+
+	    sprintf(buffer, "%.15g %.15g %.15g %.15g %.15g %.15g curveto\n",
+		    control[2], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, control[3]),
+		    control[4], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, control[5]),
+		    control[6], Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, control[7]));
+	}
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     }
 }
 
@@ -1293,16 +1557,14 @@ TkMakeBezierPostscript(interp, canvas, pointPtr, numPoints)
  *
  * TkGetMiterPoints --
  *
- *	Given three points forming an angle, compute the
- *	coordinates of the inside and outside points of
- *	the mitered corner formed by a line of a given
- *	width at that angle.
+ *	Given three points forming an angle, compute the coordinates of the
+ *	inside and outside points of the mitered corner formed by a line of a
+ *	given width at that angle.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If the angle formed by the three points is less than
- *	11 degrees then 0 is returned and m1 and m2 aren't
- *	modified.  Otherwise 1 is returned and the points at
- *	m1 and m2 are filled in with the positions of the points
+ *	If the angle formed by the three points is less than 11 degrees then 0
+ *	is returned and m1 and m2 aren't modified. Otherwise 1 is returned and
+ *	the points at m1 and m2 are filled in with the positions of the points
  *	of the mitered corner.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -1312,36 +1574,39 @@ TkMakeBezierPostscript(interp, canvas, pointPtr, numPoints)
  */
 
 int
-TkGetMiterPoints(p1, p2, p3, width, m1, m2)
-    double p1[];		/* Points to x- and y-coordinates of point
+TkGetMiterPoints(
+    double p1[],		/* Points to x- and y-coordinates of point
 				 * before vertex. */
-    double p2[];		/* Points to x- and y-coordinates of vertex
+    double p2[],		/* Points to x- and y-coordinates of vertex
 				 * for mitered joint. */
-    double p3[];		/* Points to x- and y-coordinates of point
+    double p3[],		/* Points to x- and y-coordinates of point
 				 * after vertex. */
-    double width;		/* Width of line.  */
-    double m1[];		/* Points to place to put "left" vertex
-				 * point (see as you face from p1 to p2). */
-    double m2[];		/* Points to place to put "right" vertex
+    double width,		/* Width of line. */
+    double m1[],		/* Points to place to put "left" vertex point
+				 * (see as you face from p1 to p2). */
+    double m2[])		/* Points to place to put "right" vertex
 				 * point. */
 {
     double theta1;		/* Angle of segment p2-p1. */
     double theta2;		/* Angle of segment p2-p3. */
-    double theta;		/* Angle between line segments (angle
-				 * of joint). */
-    double theta3;		/* Angle that bisects theta1 and
-				 * theta2 and points to m1. */
+    double theta;		/* Angle between line segments (angle of
+				 * joint). */
+    double theta3;		/* Angle that bisects theta1 and theta2 and
+				 * points to m1. */
     double dist;		/* Distance of miter points from p2. */
-    double deltaX, deltaY;	/* X and y offsets cooresponding to
-				 * dist (fudge factors for bounding
-				 * box). */
+    double deltaX, deltaY;	/* X and y offsets cooresponding to dist
+				 * (fudge factors for bounding box). */
     double p1x, p1y, p2x, p2y, p3x, p3y;
-    static double elevenDegrees = (11.0*2.0*PI)/360.0;
+#ifndef _MSC_VER
+    static const double elevenDegrees = (11.0*2.0*PI)/360.0;
+#else /* msvc8 with -fp:strict requires it this way */
+    static const double elevenDegrees = 0.19198621771937624;
+#endif
 
     /*
-     * Round the coordinates to integers to mimic what happens when the
-     * line segments are displayed; without this code, the bounding box
-     * of a mitered line can be miscomputed greatly.
+     * Round the coordinates to integers to mimic what happens when the line
+     * segments are displayed; without this code, the bounding box of a
+     * mitered line can be miscomputed greatly.
      */
 
     p1x = floor(p1[0]+0.5);
@@ -1358,6 +1623,7 @@ TkGetMiterPoints(p1, p2, p3, width, m1, m2)
     } else {
 	theta1 = atan2(p1y - p2y, p1x - p2x);
     }
+
     if (p3y == p2y) {
 	theta2 = (p3x > p2x) ? 0 : PI;
     } else if (p3x == p2x) {
@@ -1365,23 +1631,26 @@ TkGetMiterPoints(p1, p2, p3, width, m1, m2)
     } else {
 	theta2 = atan2(p3y - p2y, p3x - p2x);
     }
+
     theta = theta1 - theta2;
     if (theta > PI) {
 	theta -= 2*PI;
     } else if (theta < -PI) {
 	theta += 2*PI;
     }
+
     if ((theta < elevenDegrees) && (theta > -elevenDegrees)) {
 	return 0;
     }
+
     dist = 0.5*width/sin(0.5*theta);
     if (dist < 0.0) {
 	dist = -dist;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Compute theta3 (make sure that it points to the left when
-     * looking from p1 to p2).
+     * Compute theta3 (make sure that it points to the left when looking from
+     * p1 to p2).
      */
 
     theta3 = (theta1 + theta2)/2.0;
@@ -1394,6 +1663,7 @@ TkGetMiterPoints(p1, p2, p3, width, m1, m2)
     deltaY = dist*sin(theta3);
     m1[1] = p2y + deltaY;
     m2[1] = p2y - deltaY;
+
     return 1;
 }
 
@@ -1402,13 +1672,13 @@ TkGetMiterPoints(p1, p2, p3, width, m1, m2)
  *
  * TkGetButtPoints --
  *
- *	Given two points forming a line segment, compute the
- *	coordinates of two endpoints of a rectangle formed by
- *	bloating the line segment until it is width units wide.
+ *	Given two points forming a line segment, compute the coordinates of
+ *	two endpoints of a rectangle formed by bloating the line segment until
+ *	it is width units wide.
  *
  * Results:
- *	There is no return value.  M1 and m2 are filled in to
- *	correspond to m1 and m2 in the diagram below:
+ *	There is no return value. M1 and m2 are filled in to correspond to m1
+ *	and m2 in the diagram below:
  *
  *		   ----------------* m1
  *				   |
@@ -1416,9 +1686,9 @@ TkGetMiterPoints(p1, p2, p3, width, m1, m2)
  *				   |
  *		   ----------------* m2
  *
- *	M1 and m2 will be W units apart, with p2 centered between
- *	them and m1-m2 perpendicular to p1-p2.  However, if
- *	"project" is true then m1 and m2 will be as follows:
+ *	M1 and m2 will be W units apart, with p2 centered between them and
+ *	m1-m2 perpendicular to p1-p2. However, if "project" is true then m1
+ *	and m2 will be as follows:
  *
  *		   -------------------* m1
  *				  p2  |
@@ -1435,17 +1705,17 @@ TkGetMiterPoints(p1, p2, p3, width, m1, m2)
  */
 
 void
-TkGetButtPoints(p1, p2, width, project, m1, m2)
-    double p1[];		/* Points to x- and y-coordinates of point
+TkGetButtPoints(
+    double p1[],		/* Points to x- and y-coordinates of point
 				 * before vertex. */
-    double p2[];		/* Points to x- and y-coordinates of vertex
+    double p2[],		/* Points to x- and y-coordinates of vertex
 				 * for mitered joint. */
-    double width;		/* Width of line.  */
-    int project;		/* Non-zero means project p2 by an additional
+    double width,		/* Width of line. */
+    int project,		/* Non-zero means project p2 by an additional
 				 * width/2 before computing m1 and m2. */
-    double m1[];		/* Points to place to put "left" result
-				 * point, as you face from p1 to p2. */
-    double m2[];		/* Points to place to put "right" result
+    double m1[],		/* Points to place to put "left" result point,
+				 * as you face from p1 to p2. */
+    double m2[])		/* Points to place to put "right" result
 				 * point. */
 {
     double length;		/* Length of p1-p2 segment. */
@@ -1471,3 +1741,11 @@ TkGetButtPoints(p1, p2, width, project, m1, m2)
 	}
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkUndo.c b/generic/tkUndo.c
index 81c8648..bf2ed7c 100644
--- a/generic/tkUndo.c
+++ b/generic/tkUndo.c
@@ -1,378 +1,689 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkUndo.c --
  *
  *	This module provides the implementation of an undo stack.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 2002 by Ludwig Callewaert.
+ * Copyright (c) 2003-2004 by Vincent Darley.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
+#include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkUndo.h"
 
+static int		EvaluateActionList(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkUndoSubAtom *action);
 
 /*
- * TkUndoPushStack
- *    Push elem on the stack identified by stack.
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkUndoPushStack --
+ *
+ *	Push elem on the stack identified by stack.
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
-void TkUndoPushStack ( stack, elem )
-    TkUndoAtom ** stack;
-    TkUndoAtom *  elem;
-{ 
+
+void
+TkUndoPushStack(
+    TkUndoAtom **stack,
+    TkUndoAtom *elem)
+{
     elem->next = *stack;
     *stack = elem;
 }
 
 /*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TkUndoPopStack --
- *    Remove and return the top element from the stack identified by 
- *      stack.
+ *
+ *	Remove and return the top element from the stack identified by stack.
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
-TkUndoAtom * TkUndoPopStack ( stack )
-    TkUndoAtom ** stack ;
-{ 
-    TkUndoAtom * elem = NULL;
-    if (*stack != NULL ) {
-        elem   = *stack;
-        *stack = elem->next;
+
+TkUndoAtom *
+TkUndoPopStack(
+    TkUndoAtom **stack)
+{
+    TkUndoAtom *elem = NULL;
+
+    if (*stack != NULL) {
+	elem = *stack;
+	*stack = elem->next;
     }
     return elem;
 }
 
 /*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TkUndoInsertSeparator --
- *    insert a separator on the stack, indicating a border for
- *      an undo/redo chunk.
+ *
+ *	Insert a separator on the stack, indicating a border for an undo/redo
+ *	chunk.
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
-int TkUndoInsertSeparator ( stack )
-    TkUndoAtom ** stack;
+
+int
+TkUndoInsertSeparator(
+    TkUndoAtom **stack)
 {
-    TkUndoAtom * separator;
-
-    if ( *stack != NULL && (*stack)->type != TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR ) {
-        separator = (TkUndoAtom *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkUndoAtom));
-        separator->type = TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR;
-        TkUndoPushStack(stack,separator);
-        return 1;
-    } else {
-        return 0;
+    TkUndoAtom *separator;
+
+    if (*stack!=NULL && (*stack)->type!=TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR) {
+	separator = (TkUndoAtom *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkUndoAtom));
+	separator->type = TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR;
+	TkUndoPushStack(stack,separator);
+	return 1;
     }
+    return 0;
 }
 
 /*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TkUndoClearStack --
- *    Clear an entire undo or redo stack and destroy all elements in it.
+ *
+ *	Clear an entire undo or redo stack and destroy all elements in it.
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void TkUndoClearStack ( stack )
-    TkUndoAtom ** stack;      /* An Undo or Redo stack */
+void
+TkUndoClearStack(
+    TkUndoAtom **stack)		/* An Undo or Redo stack */
 {
-    TkUndoAtom * elem;
-
-    while ( (elem = TkUndoPopStack(stack)) ) {
-        if ( elem->type != TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR ) {
-            Tcl_DecrRefCount(elem->apply);
-            Tcl_DecrRefCount(elem->revert);
-        }
-        ckfree((char *)elem);
+    TkUndoAtom *elem;
+
+    while ((elem = TkUndoPopStack(stack)) != NULL) {
+	if (elem->type != TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR) {
+	    TkUndoSubAtom *sub;
+
+	    sub = elem->apply;
+	    while (sub != NULL) {
+		TkUndoSubAtom *next = sub->next;
+
+		if (sub->action != NULL) {
+		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(sub->action);
+		}
+		ckfree((char *)sub);
+		sub = next;
+	    }
+
+	    sub = elem->revert;
+	    while (sub != NULL) {
+		TkUndoSubAtom *next = sub->next;
+
+		if (sub->action != NULL) {
+		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(sub->action);
+		}
+		ckfree((char *)sub);
+		sub = next;
+	    }
+	}
+	ckfree((char *)elem);
     }
     *stack = NULL;
 }
 
 /*
- * TkUndoPushAction
- *    Push a new elem on the stack identified by stack.
- *    action and revert are given through Tcl_DStrings
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkUndoPushAction --
+ *
+ *	Push a new elem on the stack identified by stack. Action and revert
+ *	are given through Tcl_Obj's to which we will retain a reference. (So
+ *	they can be passed in with a zero refCount if desired).
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
-void TkUndoPushAction ( stack, actionScript, revertScript )
-    TkUndoRedoStack * stack;      /* An Undo or Redo stack */
-    Tcl_DString * actionScript; /* The script to get the action (redo) */
-    Tcl_DString * revertScript; /* The script to revert the action (undo) */
-{ 
-    TkUndoAtom * atom;
+
+void
+TkUndoPushAction(
+    TkUndoRedoStack *stack,	/* An Undo or Redo stack */
+    TkUndoSubAtom *apply,
+    TkUndoSubAtom *revert)
+{
+    TkUndoAtom *atom;
 
     atom = (TkUndoAtom *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkUndoAtom));
     atom->type = TK_UNDO_ACTION;
+    atom->apply = apply;
+    atom->revert = revert;
 
-    atom->apply = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tcl_DStringValue(actionScript),Tcl_DStringLength(actionScript));
-    Tcl_IncrRefCount(atom->apply);
+    TkUndoPushStack(&stack->undoStack, atom);
+    TkUndoClearStack(&stack->redoStack);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkUndoMakeCmdSubAtom --
+ *
+ *	Create a new undo/redo step which must later be place into an undo
+ *	stack with TkUndoPushAction. This sub-atom, if evaluated, will take
+ *	the given command (if non-NULL), find its full Tcl command string, and
+ *	then evaluate that command with the list elements of 'actionScript'
+ *	appended.
+ *
+ *	If 'subAtomList' is non-NULL, the newly created sub-atom is added onto
+ *	the end of the linked list of which 'subAtomList' is a part. This
+ *	makes it easy to build up a sequence of actions which will be pushed
+ *	in one step.
+ *
+ *	Note: if the undo stack can persist for longer than the Tcl_Command
+ *	provided, the stack will cause crashes when actions are evaluated. In
+ *	this case the 'command' argument should not be used. This is the case
+ *	with peer text widgets, for example.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The newly created subAtom is returned. It must be passed to
+ *	TkUndoPushAction otherwise a memory leak will result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A refCount is retained on 'actionScript'.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkUndoSubAtom *
+TkUndoMakeCmdSubAtom(
+    Tcl_Command command,	/* Tcl command token for actions, may be NULL
+				 * if not needed. */
+    Tcl_Obj *actionScript,	/* The script to append to the command to
+				 * perform the action (may be NULL if the
+				 * command is not-null). */
+    TkUndoSubAtom *subAtomList)	/* Add to the end of this list of actions if
+				 * non-NULL */
+{
+    TkUndoSubAtom *atom;
 
-    atom->revert = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tcl_DStringValue(revertScript),Tcl_DStringLength(revertScript));
-    Tcl_IncrRefCount(atom->revert);
+    if (command == NULL && actionScript == NULL) {
+	Tcl_Panic("NULL command and actionScript in TkUndoMakeCmdSubAtom");
+    }
 
-    TkUndoPushStack(&(stack->undoStack), atom);
-    TkUndoClearStack(&(stack->redoStack));
+    atom = (TkUndoSubAtom *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkUndoSubAtom));
+    atom->command = command;
+    atom->funcPtr = NULL;
+    atom->clientData = NULL;
+    atom->next = NULL;
+    atom->action = actionScript;
+    if (atom->action != NULL) {
+        Tcl_IncrRefCount(atom->action);
+    }
+
+    if (subAtomList != NULL) {
+	while (subAtomList->next != NULL) {
+	    subAtomList = subAtomList->next;
+	}
+	subAtomList->next = atom;
+    }
+    return atom;
 }
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkUndoMakeSubAtom --
+ *
+ *	Create a new undo/redo step which must later be place into an undo
+ *	stack with TkUndoPushAction. This sub-atom, if evaluated, will take
+ *	the given C-funcPtr (which must be non-NULL), and call it with three
+ *	arguments: the undo stack's 'interp', the 'clientData' given and the
+ *	'actionScript'. The callback should return a standard Tcl return code
+ *	(TCL_OK on success).
+ *
+ *	If 'subAtomList' is non-NULL, the newly created sub-atom is added onto
+ *	the end of the linked list of which 'subAtomList' is a part. This
+ *	makes it easy to build up a sequence of actions which will be pushed
+ *	in one step.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The newly created subAtom is returned. It must be passed to
+ *	TkUndoPushAction otherwise a memory leak will result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A refCount is retained on 'actionScript'.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkUndoSubAtom *
+TkUndoMakeSubAtom(
+    TkUndoProc *funcPtr,	/* Callback function to perform the
+				 * undo/redo. */
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Data to pass to the callback function. */
+    Tcl_Obj *actionScript,	/* Additional Tcl data to pass to the callback
+				 * function (may be NULL). */
+    TkUndoSubAtom *subAtomList)	/* Add to the end of this list of actions if
+				 * non-NULL */
+{
+    TkUndoSubAtom *atom;
 
+    if (funcPtr == NULL) {
+	Tcl_Panic("NULL funcPtr in TkUndoMakeSubAtom");
+    }
+
+    atom = (TkUndoSubAtom *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkUndoSubAtom));
+    atom->command = NULL;
+    atom->funcPtr = funcPtr;
+    atom->clientData = clientData;
+    atom->next = NULL;
+    atom->action = actionScript;
+    if (atom->action != NULL) {
+        Tcl_IncrRefCount(atom->action);
+    }
+
+    if (subAtomList != NULL) {
+	while (subAtomList->next != NULL) {
+	    subAtomList = subAtomList->next;
+	}
+	subAtomList->next = atom;
+    }
+    return atom;
+}
 
 /*
- * TkUndoInitStack
- *    Initialize a new undo/redo stack
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkUndoInitStack --
+ *
+ *	Initialize a new undo/redo stack.
  *
  * Results:
- *    un Undo/Redo stack pointer
+ *	An Undo/Redo stack pointer.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
-TkUndoRedoStack * TkUndoInitStack ( interp, maxdepth )
-    Tcl_Interp * interp;          /* The interpreter */
-    int          maxdepth;        /* The maximum stack depth */
-{ 
-    TkUndoRedoStack * stack;      /* An Undo/Redo stack */
+
+TkUndoRedoStack *
+TkUndoInitStack(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interpreter */
+    int maxdepth)		/* The maximum stack depth */
+{
+    TkUndoRedoStack *stack;	/* An Undo/Redo stack */
+
     stack = (TkUndoRedoStack *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkUndoRedoStack));
     stack->undoStack = NULL;
     stack->redoStack = NULL;
-    stack->interp    = interp;
-    stack->maxdepth  = maxdepth; 
-    stack->depth     = 0;
+    stack->interp = interp;
+    stack->maxdepth = maxdepth;
+    stack->depth = 0;
     return stack;
 }
-
 
 /*
- * TkUndoInitStack
- *    Initialize a new undo/redo stack
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkUndoSetDepth --
+ *
+ *	Set the maximum depth of stack.
  *
  * Results:
- *    un Undo/Redo stack pointer
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	May delete elements from the stack if the new maximum depth is smaller
+ *	than the number of elements previously in the stack.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
-void TkUndoSetDepth ( stack, maxdepth )
-    TkUndoRedoStack * stack;           /* An Undo/Redo stack */
-    int               maxdepth;        /* The maximum stack depth */
+
+void
+TkUndoSetDepth(
+    TkUndoRedoStack *stack,	/* An Undo/Redo stack */
+    int maxdepth)		/* The maximum stack depth */
 {
-    TkUndoAtom * elem;
-    TkUndoAtom * prevelem;
-    int sepNumber = 0;
-    
     stack->maxdepth = maxdepth;
 
-    if ((stack->maxdepth > 0) && (stack->depth > stack->maxdepth)) {
-        /*
+    if (stack->maxdepth>0 && stack->depth>stack->maxdepth) {
+	TkUndoAtom *elem, *prevelem;
+	int sepNumber = 0;
+
+	/*
 	 * Maximum stack depth exceeded. We have to remove the last compound
 	 * elements on the stack.
 	 */
 
-        elem = stack->undoStack;
-        prevelem = NULL;
-        while (elem && (sepNumber <= stack->maxdepth)) {
-            if (elem->type == TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR) {
-                sepNumber++;
-            }
-            prevelem = elem;
-            elem = elem->next;
-        }
-        prevelem->next = NULL;
-        while ( elem ) {
-           prevelem = elem;
-           elem = elem->next;
-           ckfree((char *) prevelem);
-        }
-        stack->depth = stack->maxdepth;
+	elem = stack->undoStack;
+	prevelem = NULL;
+	while ((elem != NULL) && (sepNumber <= stack->maxdepth)) {
+	    if (elem->type == TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR) {
+		sepNumber++;
+	    }
+	    prevelem = elem;
+	    elem = elem->next;
+	}
+	prevelem->next = NULL;
+	while (elem != NULL) {
+	    prevelem = elem;
+	    if (elem->type != TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR) {
+		TkUndoSubAtom *sub = elem->apply;
+		while (sub != NULL) {
+		    TkUndoSubAtom *next = sub->next;
+
+		    if (sub->action != NULL) {
+			Tcl_DecrRefCount(sub->action);
+		    }
+		    ckfree((char *)sub);
+		    sub = next;
+		}
+		sub = elem->revert;
+		while (sub != NULL) {
+		    TkUndoSubAtom *next = sub->next;
+
+		    if (sub->action != NULL) {
+			Tcl_DecrRefCount(sub->action);
+		    }
+		    ckfree((char *)sub);
+		    sub = next;
+		}
+	    }
+	    elem = elem->next;
+	    ckfree((char *) prevelem);
+	}
+	stack->depth = stack->maxdepth;
     }
 }
-
 
 /*
- * TkUndoClearStacks
- *    Clear both the undo and redo stack
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkUndoClearStacks --
+ *
+ *	Clear both the undo and redo stack.
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
-void TkUndoClearStacks ( stack )
-    TkUndoRedoStack * stack;      /* An Undo/Redo stack */
-{ 
-    TkUndoClearStack(&(stack->undoStack));
-    TkUndoClearStack(&(stack->redoStack));
+
+void
+TkUndoClearStacks(
+    TkUndoRedoStack *stack)	/* An Undo/Redo stack */
+{
+    TkUndoClearStack(&stack->undoStack);
+    TkUndoClearStack(&stack->redoStack);
     stack->depth = 0;
 }
-
 
 /*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TkUndoFreeStack
- *    Clear both the undo and redo stack
- *    also free the memory allocated to the u/r stack pointer
+ *
+ *	Clear both the undo and redo stack and free the memory allocated to
+ *	the u/r stack pointer.
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
-void TkUndoFreeStack ( stack )
-    TkUndoRedoStack * stack;      /* An Undo/Redo stack */
-{ 
-   TkUndoClearStacks(stack);
-/*   ckfree((TkUndoRedoStack *) stack); */
-   ckfree((char *) stack);
-}
 
+void
+TkUndoFreeStack(
+    TkUndoRedoStack *stack)	/* An Undo/Redo stack */
+{
+    TkUndoClearStacks(stack);
+    ckfree((char *) stack);
+}
 
 /*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator --
- *    insert a separator on the undo stack, indicating a border for
- *      an undo/redo chunk.
+ *
+ *	Insert a separator on the undo stack, indicating a border for an
+ *	undo/redo chunk.
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
-void TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator ( stack )
-    TkUndoRedoStack * stack;
+
+void
+TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(
+    TkUndoRedoStack *stack)
 {
-    if ( TkUndoInsertSeparator(&(stack->undoStack)) ) {
-        ++(stack->depth);
-        TkUndoSetDepth(stack,stack->maxdepth);
+    if (TkUndoInsertSeparator(&stack->undoStack)) {
+	stack->depth++;
+	TkUndoSetDepth(stack, stack->maxdepth);
     }
 }
-
 
 /*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TkUndoRevert --
- *    Undo a compound action on the stack.
+ *
+ *	Undo a compound action on the stack.
  *
  * Results:
- *    A TCL status code
+ *	A Tcl status code
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
-int TkUndoRevert ( stack )
-    TkUndoRedoStack * stack;
+
+int
+TkUndoRevert(
+    TkUndoRedoStack *stack)
 {
-    TkUndoAtom * elem;
+    TkUndoAtom *elem;
 
-    /* insert a separator on the undo and the redo stack */
+    /*
+     * Insert a separator on the undo and the redo stack.
+     */
 
     TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(stack);
-    TkUndoInsertSeparator(&(stack->redoStack));
-
-    /* Pop and skip the first separator if there is one*/
+    TkUndoInsertSeparator(&stack->redoStack);
 
-    elem = TkUndoPopStack(&(stack->undoStack));
+    /*
+     * Pop and skip the first separator if there is one.
+     */
 
-    if ( elem == NULL ) {
-        return TCL_ERROR;
+    elem = TkUndoPopStack(&stack->undoStack);
+    if (elem == NULL) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    if ( ( elem != NULL ) && ( elem->type == TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR ) ) {
-        ckfree((char *) elem);
-        elem = TkUndoPopStack(&(stack->undoStack));
+    if (elem->type == TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR) {
+	ckfree((char *) elem);
+	elem = TkUndoPopStack(&stack->undoStack);
     }
-    
-    while ( elem && (elem->type != TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR) ) {
-        Tcl_EvalObjEx(stack->interp,elem->revert,TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
-        
-        TkUndoPushStack(&(stack->redoStack),elem);
-        elem = TkUndoPopStack(&(stack->undoStack));
+
+    while (elem != NULL && elem->type != TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR) {
+	/*
+	 * Note that we currently ignore errors thrown here.
+	 */
+
+	EvaluateActionList(stack->interp, elem->revert);
+
+	TkUndoPushStack(&stack->redoStack, elem);
+	elem = TkUndoPopStack(&stack->undoStack);
     }
-    
-    /* insert a separator on the redo stack */
-    
-    TkUndoInsertSeparator(&(stack->redoStack));
-    
-    --(stack->depth);
-    
+
+    /*
+     * Insert a separator on the redo stack.
+     */
+
+    TkUndoInsertSeparator(&stack->redoStack);
+    stack->depth--;
     return TCL_OK;
 }
-
 
 /*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * TkUndoApply --
- *    Redo a compound action on the stack.
+ *
+ *	Redo a compound action on the stack.
  *
  * Results:
- *    A TCL status code
+ *	A Tcl status code
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
-int TkUndoApply ( stack )
-    TkUndoRedoStack * stack;
+
+int
+TkUndoApply(
+    TkUndoRedoStack *stack)
 {
     TkUndoAtom *elem;
 
-    /* insert a separator on the undo stack */
+    /*
+     * Insert a separator on the undo stack.
+     */
 
-    TkUndoInsertSeparator(&(stack->undoStack));
+    TkUndoInsertSeparator(&stack->undoStack);
 
-    /* Pop and skip the first separator if there is one*/
+    /*
+     * Pop and skip the first separator if there is one.
+     */
 
-    elem = TkUndoPopStack(&(stack->redoStack));
-
-    if ( elem == NULL ) {
-       return TCL_ERROR;
+    elem = TkUndoPopStack(&stack->redoStack);
+    if (elem == NULL) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    if ( ( elem != NULL ) && ( elem->type == TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR ) ) {
-        ckfree((char *) elem);
-        elem = TkUndoPopStack(&(stack->redoStack));
+    if (elem->type == TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR) {
+	ckfree((char *) elem);
+	elem = TkUndoPopStack(&stack->redoStack);
     }
 
-    while ( elem && (elem->type != TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR) ) {
-        Tcl_EvalObjEx(stack->interp,elem->apply,TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
-        
-        TkUndoPushStack(&(stack->undoStack), elem);
-        elem = TkUndoPopStack(&(stack->redoStack));
+    while (elem != NULL && elem->type != TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR) {
+	/*
+	 * Note that we currently ignore errors thrown here.
+	 */
+
+	EvaluateActionList(stack->interp, elem->apply);
+
+	TkUndoPushStack(&stack->undoStack, elem);
+	elem = TkUndoPopStack(&stack->redoStack);
     }
 
-    /* insert a separator on the undo stack */
-    
-    TkUndoInsertSeparator(&(stack->undoStack));
+    /*
+     * Insert a separator on the undo stack.
+     */
 
-    ++(stack->depth);
-    
+    TkUndoInsertSeparator(&stack->undoStack);
+    stack->depth++;
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * EvaluateActionList --
+ *
+ *	Execute a linked list of undo/redo sub-atoms. If any sub-atom returns
+ *	a non TCL_OK value, execution of subsequent sub-atoms is cancelled and
+ *	the error returned immediately.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A Tcl status code
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The undo/redo subAtoms can perform arbitrary actions.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
 
+static int
+EvaluateActionList(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to evaluate the action in. */
+    TkUndoSubAtom *action)	/* Head of linked list of action steps to
+				 * perform. */
+{
+    int result = TCL_OK;
+
+    while (action != NULL) {
+	if (action->funcPtr != NULL) {
+	    result = (*action->funcPtr)(interp, action->clientData,
+		    action->action);
+	} else if (action->command != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *cmdNameObj, *evalObj;
+
+	    cmdNameObj = Tcl_NewObj();
+	    evalObj = Tcl_NewObj();
+	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(evalObj);
+	    Tcl_GetCommandFullName(interp, action->command, cmdNameObj);
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, evalObj, cmdNameObj);
+	    if (action->action != NULL) {
+	        Tcl_ListObjAppendList(NULL, evalObj, action->action);
+	    }
+	    result = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, evalObj, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(evalObj);
+	} else {
+	    result = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, action->action, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+	}
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    return result;
+	}
+	action = action->next;
+    }
+    return result;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkUndo.h b/generic/tkUndo.h
index 8f0411c..b0e2db0 100644
--- a/generic/tkUndo.h
+++ b/generic/tkUndo.h
@@ -1,20 +1,19 @@
 /*
  * tkUndo.h --
  *
- *	Declarations shared among the files that implement an undo
- *	stack.
+ *	Declarations shared among the files that implement an undo stack.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 2002 Ludwig Callewaert.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKUNDO
 #define _TKUNDO
 
-#ifndef _TK
-#include "tk.h"
+#ifndef _TKINT
+#include "tkInt.h"
 #endif
 
 #ifdef BUILD_tk
@@ -22,65 +21,99 @@
 # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
 #endif
 
-/* enum definining the types used in an undo stack */
+/*
+ * Enum definining the types used in an undo stack.
+ */
 
 typedef enum {
-    TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR,			/* Marker */
-    TK_UNDO_ACTION			   /* Command */
+    TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR,		/* Marker */
+    TK_UNDO_ACTION		/* Command */
 } TkUndoAtomType;
 
-/* struct defining the basic undo/redo stack element */
-
-typedef struct TkUndoAtom {
-    TkUndoAtomType type;		 /* The type that will trigger the
-					 * required action*/
-    Tcl_Obj * apply;			   /* Command to apply the action that was taken */
-    Tcl_Obj * revert;			/* The command to undo the action */
-    struct TkUndoAtom * next;	/* Pointer to the next element in the
-					 * stack */
-} TkUndoAtom;
-
-/* struct defining the basic undo/redo stack element */
-
-typedef struct TkUndoRedoStack {
-    TkUndoAtom * undoStack;		 /* The undo stack */
-    TkUndoAtom * redoStack;		 /* The redo stack */
-    Tcl_Interp * interp   ;       /* The interpreter in which to execute the revert and apply scripts */
-    int          maxdepth;
-    int          depth;
-} TkUndoRedoStack;
-
-/* basic functions */
+/*
+ * Callback proc type to carry out an undo or redo action via C code. (Actions
+ * can also be defined by Tcl scripts).
+ */
 
-EXTERN void TkUndoPushStack  _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoAtom ** stack,
-    TkUndoAtom *  elem));
+typedef int (TkUndoProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, ClientData clientData,
+			Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
 
-EXTERN TkUndoAtom * TkUndoPopStack _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoAtom ** stack));
- 
-EXTERN int TkUndoInsertSeparator _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoAtom ** stack));
+/*
+ * Struct defining a single action, one or more of which may be defined (and
+ * stored in a linked list) separately for each undo and redo action of an
+ * undo atom.
+ */
 
-EXTERN void TkUndoClearStack _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoAtom ** stack));
+typedef struct TkUndoSubAtom {
+    Tcl_Command command;	/* Tcl token used to get the current Tcl
+				 * command name which will be used to execute
+				 * apply/revert scripts. If NULL then it is
+				 * assumed the apply/revert scripts already
+				 * contain everything. */
+    TkUndoProc *funcPtr;	/* Function pointer for callback to perform
+				 * undo/redo actions. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Data for 'funcPtr'. */
+    Tcl_Obj *action;		/* Command to apply the action that was
+				 * taken. */
+    struct TkUndoSubAtom *next;	/* Pointer to the next element in the linked
+				 * list. */
+} TkUndoSubAtom;
 
-/* functions working on an undo/redo stack */
+/*
+ * Struct representing a single undo+redo atom to be placed in the stack.
+ */
 
-EXTERN TkUndoRedoStack * TkUndoInitStack _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp * interp,
-    int maxdepth));
+typedef struct TkUndoAtom {
+    TkUndoAtomType type;	/* The type that will trigger the required
+				 * action. */
+    TkUndoSubAtom *apply;	/* Linked list of 'apply' actions to perform
+				 * for this operation. */
+    TkUndoSubAtom *revert;	/* Linked list of 'revert' actions to perform
+				 * for this operation. */
+    struct TkUndoAtom *next;	/* Pointer to the next element in the
+				 * stack. */
+} TkUndoAtom;
 
-EXTERN void TkUndoSetDepth _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoRedoStack * stack,
-    int maxdepth));
+/*
+ * Struct defining a single undo+redo stack.
+ */
 
-EXTERN void TkUndoClearStacks _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoRedoStack * stack));
+typedef struct TkUndoRedoStack {
+    TkUndoAtom *undoStack;	/* The undo stack. */
+    TkUndoAtom *redoStack;	/* The redo stack. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interpreter in which to execute the
+				 * revert and apply scripts. */
+    int maxdepth;
+    int depth;
+} TkUndoRedoStack;
 
-EXTERN void TkUndoFreeStack _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoRedoStack * stack));
+/*
+ * Basic functions.
+ */
 
-EXTERN void TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoRedoStack * stack));
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkUndoPushStack(TkUndoAtom **stack, TkUndoAtom *elem);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkUndoAtom *TkUndoPopStack(TkUndoAtom **stack);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkUndoInsertSeparator(TkUndoAtom **stack);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkUndoClearStack(TkUndoAtom **stack);
 
-EXTERN void TkUndoPushAction _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoRedoStack * stack,
-    Tcl_DString * actionScript, Tcl_DString * revertScript));
+/*
+ * Functions for working on an undo/redo stack.
+ */
 
-EXTERN int TkUndoRevert _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoRedoStack *  stack));
- 
-EXTERN int TkUndoApply _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoRedoStack *  stack));
+MODULE_SCOPE TkUndoRedoStack *TkUndoInitStack(Tcl_Interp *interp, int maxdepth);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkUndoSetDepth(TkUndoRedoStack *stack, int maxdepth);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkUndoClearStacks(TkUndoRedoStack *stack);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkUndoFreeStack(TkUndoRedoStack *stack);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(TkUndoRedoStack *stack);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkUndoSubAtom *TkUndoMakeCmdSubAtom(Tcl_Command command,
+			    Tcl_Obj *actionScript, TkUndoSubAtom *subAtomList);
+MODULE_SCOPE TkUndoSubAtom *TkUndoMakeSubAtom(TkUndoProc *funcPtr,
+			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Obj *actionScript,
+			    TkUndoSubAtom *subAtomList);
+MODULE_SCOPE void	TkUndoPushAction(TkUndoRedoStack *stack,
+			    TkUndoSubAtom *apply, TkUndoSubAtom *revert);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkUndoRevert(TkUndoRedoStack *stack);
+MODULE_SCOPE int	TkUndoApply(TkUndoRedoStack *stack);
 
 # undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
diff --git a/generic/tkUtil.c b/generic/tkUtil.c
index 3d04657..2a8240b 100644
--- a/generic/tkUtil.c
+++ b/generic/tkUtil.c
@@ -1,63 +1,60 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkUtil.c --
  *
- *	This file contains miscellaneous utility procedures that
- *	are used by the rest of Tk, such as a procedure for drawing
- *	a focus highlight.
+ *	This file contains miscellaneous utility functions that are used by
+ *	the rest of Tk, such as a function for drawing a focus highlight.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 
 /*
- * The structure below defines the implementation of the "statekey"
- * Tcl object, used for quickly finding a mapping in a TkStateMap.
+ * The structure below defines the implementation of the "statekey" Tcl
+ * object, used for quickly finding a mapping in a TkStateMap.
  */
 
 Tcl_ObjType tkStateKeyObjType = {
-    "statekey",				/* name */
-    (Tcl_FreeInternalRepProc *) NULL,	/* freeIntRepProc */
-    (Tcl_DupInternalRepProc *) NULL,	/* dupIntRepProc */
-    (Tcl_UpdateStringProc *) NULL,	/* updateStringProc */
-    (Tcl_SetFromAnyProc *) NULL		/* setFromAnyProc */
+    "statekey",			/* name */
+    NULL,			/* freeIntRepProc */
+    NULL,			/* dupIntRepProc */
+    NULL,			/* updateStringProc */
+    NULL			/* setFromAnyProc */
 };
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkStateParseProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked during option processing to handle
- *	the "-state" and "-default" options.
+ *	This function is invoked during option processing to handle the
+ *	"-state" and "-default" options.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return value.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The state for a given item gets replaced by the state
- *	indicated in the value argument.
+ *	The state for a given item gets replaced by the state indicated in the
+ *	value argument.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-TkStateParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* some flags.*/
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for reporting errors. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    CONST char *value;			/* Value of option. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item. */
+TkStateParseProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* some flags.*/
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for reporting errors. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing canvas widget. */
+    const char *value,		/* Value of option. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record for item. */
+    int offset)			/* Offset into item. */
 {
     int c;
-    int flags = (int)clientData;
+    int flags = PTR2INT(clientData);
     size_t length;
 
     register Tk_State *statePtr = (Tk_State *) (widgRec + offset);
@@ -88,18 +85,17 @@ TkStateParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
     }
 
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad ", (flags&4)?"-default" : "state",
-	    " value \"", value, "\": must be normal",
-	    (char *) NULL);
+	    " value \"", value, "\": must be normal", NULL);
     if (flags&1) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ", active",(char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ", active", NULL);
     }
     if (flags&2) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ", hidden",(char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ", hidden", NULL);
     }
     if (flags&3) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ",",(char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ",", NULL);
     }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " or disabled",(char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " or disabled", NULL);
     *statePtr = TK_STATE_NORMAL;
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -109,16 +105,15 @@ TkStateParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  *
  * TkStatePrintProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk configuration code
- *	to produce a printable string for the "-state"
- *	configuration option.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk configuration code to produce a
+ *	printable string for the "-state" configuration option.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a string describing the state for
- *	the item referred to by "widgRec".  In addition, *freeProcPtr
- *	is filled in with the address of a procedure to call to free
- *	the result string when it's no longer needed (or NULL to
- *	indicate that the string doesn't need to be freed).
+ *	The return value is a string describing the state for the item
+ *	referred to by "widgRec". In addition, *freeProcPtr is filled in with
+ *	the address of a function to call to free the result string when it's
+ *	no longer needed (or NULL to indicate that the string doesn't need to
+ *	be freed).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -127,26 +122,27 @@ TkStateParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  */
 
 char *
-TkStatePrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Ignored. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item. */
-    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr;		/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
-					 * information about how to reclaim
-					 * storage for return string. */
+TkStatePrintProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Ignored. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing canvas widget. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record for item. */
+    int offset,			/* Offset into item. */
+    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)	/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
+				 * information about how to reclaim storage
+				 * for return string. */
 {
     register Tk_State *statePtr = (Tk_State *) (widgRec + offset);
 
-    if (*statePtr==TK_STATE_NORMAL) {
+    switch (*statePtr) {
+    case TK_STATE_NORMAL:
 	return "normal";
-    } else if (*statePtr==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    case TK_STATE_DISABLED:
 	return "disabled";
-    } else if (*statePtr==TK_STATE_HIDDEN) {
+    case TK_STATE_HIDDEN:
 	return "hidden";
-    } else if (*statePtr==TK_STATE_ACTIVE) {
+    case TK_STATE_ACTIVE:
 	return "active";
-    } else {
+    default:
 	return "";
     }
 }
@@ -156,8 +152,8 @@ TkStatePrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
  *
  * TkOrientParseProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked during option processing to handle
- *	the "-orient" option.
+ *	This function is invoked during option processing to handle the
+ *	"-orient" option.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return value.
@@ -170,13 +166,13 @@ TkStatePrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkOrientParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* some flags.*/
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for reporting errors. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    CONST char *value;			/* Value of option. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item. */
+TkOrientParseProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* some flags.*/
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for reporting errors. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing canvas widget. */
+    const char *value,		/* Value of option. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record for item. */
+    int offset)			/* Offset into item. */
 {
     int c;
     size_t length;
@@ -200,8 +196,7 @@ TkOrientParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad orientation \"", value,
-	    "\": must be vertical or horizontal",
-	    (char *) NULL);
+	    "\": must be vertical or horizontal", NULL);
     *orientPtr = 0;
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -211,16 +206,15 @@ TkOrientParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  *
  * TkOrientPrintProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk configuration code
- *	to produce a printable string for the "-orient"
- *	configuration option.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk configuration code to produce a
+ *	printable string for the "-orient" configuration option.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a string describing the orientation for
- *	the item referred to by "widgRec".  In addition, *freeProcPtr
- *	is filled in with the address of a procedure to call to free
- *	the result string when it's no longer needed (or NULL to
- *	indicate that the string doesn't need to be freed).
+ *	The return value is a string describing the orientation for the item
+ *	referred to by "widgRec". In addition, *freeProcPtr is filled in with
+ *	the address of a function to call to free the result string when it's
+ *	no longer needed (or NULL to indicate that the string doesn't need to
+ *	be freed).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -229,14 +223,14 @@ TkOrientParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  */
 
 char *
-TkOrientPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Ignored. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window containing canvas widget. */
-    char *widgRec;			/* Pointer to record for item. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset into item. */
-    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr;		/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
-					 * information about how to reclaim
-					 * storage for return string. */
+TkOrientPrintProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Ignored. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window containing canvas widget. */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Pointer to record for item. */
+    int offset,			/* Offset into item. */
+    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)	/* Pointer to variable to fill in with
+				 * information about how to reclaim storage
+				 * for return string. */
 {
     register int *statePtr = (int *) (widgRec + offset);
 
@@ -252,23 +246,24 @@ TkOrientPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
  *
  * TkOffsetParseProc --
  *
- *	Converts the offset of a stipple or tile into the Tk_TSOffset structure.
+ *	Converts the offset of a stipple or tile into the Tk_TSOffset
+ *	structure.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-TkOffsetParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* not used */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to send results back to */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window on same display as tile */
-    CONST char *value;		/* Name of image */
-    char *widgRec;		/* Widget structure record */
-    int offset;			/* Offset of tile in record */
+TkOffsetParseProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* not used */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to send results back to */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window on same display as tile */
+    const char *value,		/* Name of image */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Widget structure record */
+    int offset)			/* Offset of tile in record */
 {
-    Tk_TSOffset *offsetPtr = (Tk_TSOffset *)(widgRec + offset);
+    Tk_TSOffset *offsetPtr = (Tk_TSOffset *) (widgRec + offset);
     Tk_TSOffset tsoffset;
-    CONST char *q, *p;
+    const char *q, *p;
     int result;
 
     if ((value == NULL) || (*value == 0)) {
@@ -279,61 +274,70 @@ TkOffsetParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
     p = value;
 
     switch(value[0]) {
-	case '#':
-	    if (((int)clientData) & TK_OFFSET_RELATIVE) {
-		tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_RELATIVE;
-		p++; break;
-	    }
-	    goto badTSOffset;
-	case 'e':
-	    switch(value[1]) {
-		case '\0':
-		    tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_RIGHT|TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE;
-		    goto goodTSOffset;
-		case 'n':
-		    if (value[2]!='d' || value[3]!='\0') {goto badTSOffset;}
-		    tsoffset.flags = INT_MAX;
-		    goto goodTSOffset;
-	    }
-	case 'w':
-	    if (value[1] != '\0') {goto badTSOffset;}
-	    tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_LEFT|TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE;
+    case '#':
+	if (PTR2INT(clientData) & TK_OFFSET_RELATIVE) {
+	    tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_RELATIVE;
+	    p++;
+	    break;
+	}
+	goto badTSOffset;
+    case 'e':
+	switch(value[1]) {
+	case '\0':
+	    tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_RIGHT|TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE;
 	    goto goodTSOffset;
 	case 'n':
-	    if ((value[1] != '\0') && (value[2] != '\0')) {
+	    if (value[2]!='d' || value[3]!='\0') {
 		goto badTSOffset;
 	    }
-	    switch(value[1]) {
-		case '\0': tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_CENTER|TK_OFFSET_TOP;
-			   goto goodTSOffset;
-		case 'w': tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_LEFT|TK_OFFSET_TOP;
-			   goto goodTSOffset;
-		case 'e': tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_RIGHT|TK_OFFSET_TOP;
-			   goto goodTSOffset;
-	    }
+	    tsoffset.flags = INT_MAX;
+	    goto goodTSOffset;
+	}
+    case 'w':
+	if (value[1] != '\0') {goto badTSOffset;}
+	tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_LEFT|TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE;
+	goto goodTSOffset;
+    case 'n':
+	if ((value[1] != '\0') && (value[2] != '\0')) {
 	    goto badTSOffset;
-	case 's':
-	    if ((value[1] != '\0') && (value[2] != '\0')) {
-		goto badTSOffset;
-	    }
-	    switch(value[1]) {
-		case '\0': tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_CENTER|TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM;
-			   goto goodTSOffset;
-		case 'w': tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_LEFT|TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM;
-			   goto goodTSOffset;
-		case 'e': tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_RIGHT|TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM;
-			   goto goodTSOffset;
-	    }
+	}
+	switch(value[1]) {
+	case '\0':
+	    tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_CENTER|TK_OFFSET_TOP;
+	    goto goodTSOffset;
+	case 'w':
+	    tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_LEFT|TK_OFFSET_TOP;
+	    goto goodTSOffset;
+	case 'e':
+	    tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_RIGHT|TK_OFFSET_TOP;
+	    goto goodTSOffset;
+	}
+	goto badTSOffset;
+    case 's':
+	if ((value[1] != '\0') && (value[2] != '\0')) {
 	    goto badTSOffset;
-	case 'c':
-	    if (strncmp(value, "center", strlen(value)) != 0) {
-		goto badTSOffset;
-	    }
-	    tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_CENTER|TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE;
+	}
+	switch(value[1]) {
+	case '\0':
+	    tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_CENTER|TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM;
+	    goto goodTSOffset;
+	case 'w':
+	    tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_LEFT|TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM;
+	    goto goodTSOffset;
+	case 'e':
+	    tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_RIGHT|TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM;
 	    goto goodTSOffset;
+	}
+	goto badTSOffset;
+    case 'c':
+	if (strncmp(value, "center", strlen(value)) != 0) {
+	    goto badTSOffset;
+	}
+	tsoffset.flags = TK_OFFSET_CENTER|TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE;
+	goto goodTSOffset;
     }
     if ((q = strchr(p,',')) == NULL) {
-	if (((int)clientData) & TK_OFFSET_INDEX) {
+	if (PTR2INT(clientData) & TK_OFFSET_INDEX) {
 	    if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, (char *) p, &tsoffset.flags) != TCL_OK) {
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		goto badTSOffset;
@@ -349,33 +353,31 @@ TkOffsetParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
     if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, (char *) q+1, &tsoffset.yoffset) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, tkwin, (char*)q+1, &tsoffset.yoffset) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-
-goodTSOffset:
-    /* below is a hack to allow the stipple/tile offset to be stored
-     * in the internal tile structure. Most of the times, offsetPtr
-     * is a pointer to an already existing tile structure. However
-     * if this structure is not already created, we must do it
-     * with Tk_GetTile()!!!!;
+  goodTSOffset:
+    /*
+     * Below is a hack to allow the stipple/tile offset to be stored in the
+     * internal tile structure. Most of the times, offsetPtr is a pointer to
+     * an already existing tile structure. However if this structure is not
+     * already created, we must do it with Tk_GetTile()!!!!;
      */
 
-    memcpy(offsetPtr,&tsoffset, sizeof(Tk_TSOffset));
+    memcpy(offsetPtr, &tsoffset, sizeof(Tk_TSOffset));
     return TCL_OK;
 
-badTSOffset:
+  badTSOffset:
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad offset \"", value,
-	    "\": expected \"x,y\"", (char *) NULL);
-    if (((int) clientData) & TK_OFFSET_RELATIVE) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ", \"#x,y\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    "\": expected \"x,y\"", NULL);
+    if (PTR2INT(clientData) & TK_OFFSET_RELATIVE) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ", \"#x,y\"", NULL);
     }
-    if (((int) clientData) & TK_OFFSET_INDEX) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ", <index>", (char *) NULL);
+    if (PTR2INT(clientData) & TK_OFFSET_INDEX) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ", <index>", NULL);
     }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ", n, ne, e, se, s, sw, w, nw, or center",
-	    (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ", n, ne, e, se, s, sw, w, nw, or center", NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -393,60 +395,59 @@ badTSOffset:
  */
 
 char *
-TkOffsetPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* not used */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* not used */
-    char *widgRec;		/* Widget structure record */
-    int offset;			/* Offset of tile in record */
-    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr;	/* not used */
+TkOffsetPrintProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* not used */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* not used */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Widget structure record */
+    int offset,			/* Offset of tile in record */
+    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)	/* not used */
 {
-    Tk_TSOffset *offsetPtr = (Tk_TSOffset *)(widgRec + offset);
+    Tk_TSOffset *offsetPtr = (Tk_TSOffset *) (widgRec + offset);
     char *p, *q;
 
-    if ((offsetPtr->flags) & TK_OFFSET_INDEX) {
-	if ((offsetPtr->flags) >= INT_MAX) {
+    if (offsetPtr->flags & TK_OFFSET_INDEX) {
+	if (offsetPtr->flags >= INT_MAX) {
 	    return "end";
 	}
 	p = (char *) ckalloc(32);
-	sprintf(p, "%d",(offsetPtr->flags & (~TK_OFFSET_INDEX)));
+	sprintf(p, "%d", offsetPtr->flags & ~TK_OFFSET_INDEX);
 	*freeProcPtr = TCL_DYNAMIC;
 	return p;
     }
-    if ((offsetPtr->flags) & TK_OFFSET_TOP) {
-	if ((offsetPtr->flags) & TK_OFFSET_LEFT) {
+    if (offsetPtr->flags & TK_OFFSET_TOP) {
+	if (offsetPtr->flags & TK_OFFSET_LEFT) {
 	    return "nw";
-	} else if ((offsetPtr->flags) & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
+	} else if (offsetPtr->flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
 	    return "n";
-	} else if ((offsetPtr->flags) & TK_OFFSET_RIGHT) {
+	} else if (offsetPtr->flags & TK_OFFSET_RIGHT) {
 	    return "ne";
 	}
-    } else if ((offsetPtr->flags) & TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE) {
-	if ((offsetPtr->flags) & TK_OFFSET_LEFT) {
+    } else if (offsetPtr->flags & TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE) {
+	if (offsetPtr->flags & TK_OFFSET_LEFT) {
 	    return "w";
-	} else if ((offsetPtr->flags) & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
+	} else if (offsetPtr->flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
 	    return "center";
-	} else if ((offsetPtr->flags) & TK_OFFSET_RIGHT) {
+	} else if (offsetPtr->flags & TK_OFFSET_RIGHT) {
 	    return "e";
 	}
-    } else if ((offsetPtr->flags) & TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM) {
-	if ((offsetPtr->flags) & TK_OFFSET_LEFT) {
+    } else if (offsetPtr->flags & TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM) {
+	if (offsetPtr->flags & TK_OFFSET_LEFT) {
 	    return "sw";
-	} else if ((offsetPtr->flags) & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
+	} else if (offsetPtr->flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
 	    return "s";
-	} else if ((offsetPtr->flags) & TK_OFFSET_RIGHT) {
+	} else if (offsetPtr->flags & TK_OFFSET_RIGHT) {
 	    return "se";
 	}
-    } 
+    }
     q = p = (char *) ckalloc(32);
-    if ((offsetPtr->flags) & TK_OFFSET_RELATIVE) {
+    if (offsetPtr->flags & TK_OFFSET_RELATIVE) {
 	*q++ = '#';
     }
-    sprintf(q, "%d,%d",offsetPtr->xoffset, offsetPtr->yoffset);
+    sprintf(q, "%d,%d", offsetPtr->xoffset, offsetPtr->yoffset);
     *freeProcPtr = TCL_DYNAMIC;
     return p;
 }
 
-
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
@@ -458,23 +459,22 @@ TkOffsetPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkPixelParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* if non-NULL, negative values are
-				 * allowed as well */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to send results back to */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window on same display as tile */
-    CONST char *value;		/* Name of image */
-    char *widgRec;		/* Widget structure record */
-    int offset;			/* Offset of tile in record */
+TkPixelParseProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* If non-NULL, negative values are allowed as
+				 * well */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to send results back to */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window on same display as tile */
+    const char *value,		/* Name of image */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Widget structure record */
+    int offset)			/* Offset of tile in record */
 {
-    double *doublePtr = (double *)(widgRec + offset);
+    double *doublePtr = (double *) (widgRec + offset);
     int result;
 
     result = TkGetDoublePixels(interp, tkwin, value, doublePtr);
 
     if ((result == TCL_OK) && (clientData == NULL) && (*doublePtr < 0.0)) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad screen distance \"", value,
-		"\"", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad screen distance \"", value, "\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     return result;
@@ -494,18 +494,17 @@ TkPixelParseProc(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, widgRec, offset)
  */
 
 char *
-TkPixelPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* not used */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* not used */
-    char *widgRec;		/* Widget structure record */
-    int offset;			/* Offset of tile in record */
-    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr;	/* not used */
+TkPixelPrintProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* not used */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* not used */
+    char *widgRec,		/* Widget structure record */
+    int offset,			/* Offset of tile in record */
+    Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)	/* not used */
 {
-    double *doublePtr = (double *)(widgRec + offset);
-    char *p;
+    double *doublePtr = (double *) (widgRec + offset);
+    char *p = (char *) ckalloc(24);
 
-    p = (char *) ckalloc(24);
-    Tcl_PrintDouble((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, *doublePtr, p);
+    Tcl_PrintDouble(NULL, *doublePtr, p);
     *freeProcPtr = TCL_DYNAMIC;
     return p;
 }
@@ -515,31 +514,31 @@ TkPixelPrintProc(clientData, tkwin, widgRec, offset, freeProcPtr)
  *
  * TkDrawInsetFocusHighlight --
  *
- *	This procedure draws a rectangular ring around the outside of
- *	a widget to indicate that it has received the input focus.  It
- *	takes an additional padding argument that specifies how much
- *	padding is present outside th widget.
+ *	This function draws a rectangular ring around the outside of a widget
+ *	to indicate that it has received the input focus. It takes an
+ *	additional padding argument that specifies how much padding is present
+ *	outside the widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A rectangle "width" pixels wide is drawn in "drawable",
- *	corresponding to the outer area of "tkwin".
+ *	A rectangle "width" pixels wide is drawn in "drawable", corresponding
+ *	to the outer area of "tkwin".
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkDrawInsetFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, width, drawable, padding)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window whose focus highlight ring is
-				 * to be drawn. */
-    GC gc;			/* Graphics context to use for drawing
-				 * the highlight ring. */
-    int width;			/* Width of the highlight ring, in pixels. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* Where to draw the ring (typically a
-				 * pixmap for double buffering). */
-    int padding;		/* Width of padding outside of widget. */
+TkDrawInsetFocusHighlight(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window whose focus highlight ring is to be
+				 * drawn. */
+    GC gc,			/* Graphics context to use for drawing the
+				 * highlight ring. */
+    int width,			/* Width of the highlight ring, in pixels. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Where to draw the ring (typically a pixmap
+				 * for double buffering). */
+    int padding)		/* Width of padding outside of widget. */
 {
     XRectangle rects[4];
 
@@ -567,34 +566,34 @@ TkDrawInsetFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, width, drawable, padding)
  *
  * Tk_DrawFocusHighlight --
  *
- *	This procedure draws a rectangular ring around the outside of
- *	a widget to indicate that it has received the input focus.
+ *	This function draws a rectangular ring around the outside of a widget
+ *	to indicate that it has received the input focus.
  *
- *      This function is now deprecated.  Use TkpDrawHighlightBorder instead,
- *      since this function does not handle drawing the Focus ring properly
- *      on the Macintosh - you need to know the background GC as well 
- *      as the foreground since the Mac focus ring separated from the widget
- *      by a 1 pixel border.
+ *	This function is now deprecated. Use TkpDrawHighlightBorder instead,
+ *	since this function does not handle drawing the Focus ring properly on
+ *	the Macintosh - you need to know the background GC as well as the
+ *	foreground since the Mac focus ring separated from the widget by a 1
+ *	pixel border.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A rectangle "width" pixels wide is drawn in "drawable",
- *	corresponding to the outer area of "tkwin".
+ *	A rectangle "width" pixels wide is drawn in "drawable", corresponding
+ *	to the outer area of "tkwin".
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, width, drawable)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window whose focus highlight ring is
-				 * to be drawn. */
-    GC gc;			/* Graphics context to use for drawing
-				 * the highlight ring. */
-    int width;			/* Width of the highlight ring, in pixels. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* Where to draw the ring (typically a
-				 * pixmap for double buffering). */
+Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window whose focus highlight ring is to be
+				 * drawn. */
+    GC gc,			/* Graphics context to use for drawing the
+				 * highlight ring. */
+    int width,			/* Width of the highlight ring, in pixels. */
+    Drawable drawable)		/* Where to draw the ring (typically a pixmap
+				 * for double buffering). */
 {
     TkDrawInsetFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, width, drawable, 0);
 }
@@ -604,19 +603,18 @@ Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, width, drawable)
  *
  * Tk_GetScrollInfo --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to parse "xview" and "yview"
- *	scrolling commands for widgets using the new scrolling
- *	command syntax ("moveto" or "scroll" options).
+ *	This function is invoked to parse "xview" and "yview" scrolling
+ *	commands for widgets using the new scrolling command syntax ("moveto"
+ *	or "scroll" options).
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is either TK_SCROLL_MOVETO, TK_SCROLL_PAGES,
- *	TK_SCROLL_UNITS, or TK_SCROLL_ERROR.  This indicates whether
- *	the command was successfully parsed and what form the command
- *	took.  If TK_SCROLL_MOVETO, *dblPtr is filled in with the
- *	desired position;  if TK_SCROLL_PAGES or TK_SCROLL_UNITS,
- *	*intPtr is filled in with the number of lines to move (may be
- *	negative);  if TK_SCROLL_ERROR, the interp's result contains an
- *	error message.
+ *	TK_SCROLL_UNITS, or TK_SCROLL_ERROR. This indicates whether the
+ *	command was successfully parsed and what form the command took. If
+ *	TK_SCROLL_MOVETO, *dblPtr is filled in with the desired position; if
+ *	TK_SCROLL_PAGES or TK_SCROLL_UNITS, *intPtr is filled in with the
+ *	number of lines to move (may be negative); if TK_SCROLL_ERROR, the
+ *	interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -625,25 +623,22 @@ Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, width, drawable)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetScrollInfo(interp, argc, argv, dblPtr, intPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    int argc;				/* # arguments for command. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Arguments for command. */
-    double *dblPtr;			/* Filled in with argument "moveto"
-					 * option, if any. */
-    int *intPtr;			/* Filled in with number of pages
-					 * or lines to scroll, if any. */
+Tk_GetScrollInfo(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    int argc,			/* # arguments for command. */
+    const char **argv,		/* Arguments for command. */
+    double *dblPtr,		/* Filled in with argument "moveto" option, if
+				 * any. */
+    int *intPtr)		/* Filled in with number of pages or lines to
+				 * scroll, if any. */
 {
-    int c;
-    size_t length;
+    int c = argv[2][0];
+    size_t length = strlen(argv[2]);
 
-    length = strlen(argv[2]);
-    c = argv[2][0];
     if ((c == 'm') && (strncmp(argv[2], "moveto", length) == 0)) {
 	if (argc != 4) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " ", argv[1], " moveto fraction\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"", argv[0],
+		    " ", argv[1], " moveto fraction\"", NULL);
 	    return TK_SCROLL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (Tcl_GetDouble(interp, argv[3], dblPtr) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -653,9 +648,8 @@ Tk_GetScrollInfo(interp, argc, argv, dblPtr, intPtr)
     } else if ((c == 's')
 	    && (strncmp(argv[2], "scroll", length) == 0)) {
 	if (argc != 5) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
-		    argv[0], " ", argv[1], " scroll number units|pages\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"", argv[0],
+		    " ", argv[1], " scroll number units|pages\"", NULL);
 	    return TK_SCROLL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], intPtr) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -665,17 +659,16 @@ Tk_GetScrollInfo(interp, argc, argv, dblPtr, intPtr)
 	c = argv[4][0];
 	if ((c == 'p') && (strncmp(argv[4], "pages", length) == 0)) {
 	    return TK_SCROLL_PAGES;
-	} else if ((c == 'u')
-		&& (strncmp(argv[4], "units", length) == 0)) {
+	} else if ((c == 'u') && (strncmp(argv[4], "units", length) == 0)) {
 	    return TK_SCROLL_UNITS;
-	} else {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad argument \"", argv[4],
-		    "\": must be units or pages", (char *) NULL);
-	    return TK_SCROLL_ERROR;
 	}
+
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad argument \"", argv[4],
+		"\": must be units or pages", NULL);
+	return TK_SCROLL_ERROR;
     }
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown option \"", argv[2],
-	    "\": must be moveto or scroll", (char *) NULL);
+	    "\": must be moveto or scroll", NULL);
     return TK_SCROLL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -684,19 +677,18 @@ Tk_GetScrollInfo(interp, argc, argv, dblPtr, intPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetScrollInfoObj --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to parse "xview" and "yview"
- *	scrolling commands for widgets using the new scrolling
- *	command syntax ("moveto" or "scroll" options).
+ *	This function is invoked to parse "xview" and "yview" scrolling
+ *	commands for widgets using the new scrolling command syntax ("moveto"
+ *	or "scroll" options).
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is either TK_SCROLL_MOVETO, TK_SCROLL_PAGES,
- *	TK_SCROLL_UNITS, or TK_SCROLL_ERROR.  This indicates whether
- *	the command was successfully parsed and what form the command
- *	took.  If TK_SCROLL_MOVETO, *dblPtr is filled in with the
- *	desired position;  if TK_SCROLL_PAGES or TK_SCROLL_UNITS,
- *	*intPtr is filled in with the number of lines to move (may be
- *	negative);  if TK_SCROLL_ERROR, the interp's result contains an
- *	error message.
+ *	TK_SCROLL_UNITS, or TK_SCROLL_ERROR. This indicates whether the
+ *	command was successfully parsed and what form the command took. If
+ *	TK_SCROLL_MOVETO, *dblPtr is filled in with the desired position; if
+ *	TK_SCROLL_PAGES or TK_SCROLL_UNITS, *intPtr is filled in with the
+ *	number of lines to move (may be negative); if TK_SCROLL_ERROR, the
+ *	interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -705,23 +697,23 @@ Tk_GetScrollInfo(interp, argc, argv, dblPtr, intPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, dblPtr, intPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    int objc;				/* # arguments for command. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Arguments for command. */
-    double *dblPtr;			/* Filled in with argument "moveto"
-					 * option, if any. */
-    int *intPtr;			/* Filled in with number of pages
-					 * or lines to scroll, if any. */
+Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    int objc,			/* # arguments for command. */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[],	/* Arguments for command. */
+    double *dblPtr,		/* Filled in with argument "moveto" option, if
+				 * any. */
+    int *intPtr)		/* Filled in with number of pages or lines to
+				 * scroll, if any. */
 {
-    int c;
-    size_t length;
-    char *arg2, *arg4;
+    int length;
+    const char *arg;
+
+    arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], &length);
+
+#define ArgPfxEq(str) ((arg[0]==str[0])&&!strncmp(arg,str,(unsigned)length))
 
-    arg2 = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-    length = strlen(arg2);
-    c = arg2[0];
-    if ((c == 'm') && (strncmp(arg2, "moveto", length) == 0)) {
+    if (ArgPfxEq("moveto")) {
 	if (objc != 4) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "moveto fraction");
 	    return TK_SCROLL_ERROR;
@@ -730,8 +722,7 @@ Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, dblPtr, intPtr)
 	    return TK_SCROLL_ERROR;
 	}
 	return TK_SCROLL_MOVETO;
-    } else if ((c == 's')
-	    && (strncmp(arg2, "scroll", length) == 0)) {
+    } else if (ArgPfxEq("scroll")) {
 	if (objc != 5) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "scroll number units|pages");
 	    return TK_SCROLL_ERROR;
@@ -739,22 +730,20 @@ Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, dblPtr, intPtr)
 	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], intPtr) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TK_SCROLL_ERROR;
 	}
-	arg4 = Tcl_GetString(objv[4]);
-	length = (strlen(arg4));
-	c = arg4[0];
-	if ((c == 'p') && (strncmp(arg4, "pages", length) == 0)) {
+
+	arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[4], &length);
+	if (ArgPfxEq("pages")) {
 	    return TK_SCROLL_PAGES;
-	} else if ((c == 'u')
-		&& (strncmp(arg4, "units", length) == 0)) {
+	} else if (ArgPfxEq("units")) {
 	    return TK_SCROLL_UNITS;
-	} else {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad argument \"", arg4,
-		    "\": must be units or pages", (char *) NULL);
-	    return TK_SCROLL_ERROR;
 	}
+
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad argument \"", arg,
+		"\": must be units or pages", NULL);
+	return TK_SCROLL_ERROR;
     }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown option \"", arg2,
-	    "\": must be moveto or scroll", (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown option \"", arg,
+	    "\": must be moveto or scroll", NULL);
     return TK_SCROLL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -764,66 +753,80 @@ Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, dblPtr, intPtr)
  * TkComputeAnchor --
  *
  *	Determine where to place a rectangle so that it will be properly
- *	anchored with respect to the given window.  Used by widgets
- *	to align a box of text inside a window.  When anchoring with
- *	respect to one of the sides, the rectangle be placed inside of
- *	the internal border of the window.
+ *	anchored with respect to the given window. Used by widgets to align a
+ *	box of text inside a window. When anchoring with respect to one of the
+ *	sides, the rectangle be placed inside of the internal border of the
+ *	window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	*xPtr and *yPtr set to the upper-left corner of the rectangle
- *	anchored in the window.
+ *	*xPtr and *yPtr set to the upper-left corner of the rectangle anchored
+ *	in the window.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 void
-TkComputeAnchor(anchor, tkwin, padX, padY, innerWidth, innerHeight, xPtr, yPtr)
-    Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Desired anchor. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Anchored with respect to this window. */
-    int padX, padY;		/* Use this extra padding inside window, in
+TkComputeAnchor(
+    Tk_Anchor anchor,		/* Desired anchor. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Anchored with respect to this window. */
+    int padX, int padY,		/* Use this extra padding inside window, in
 				 * addition to the internal border. */
-    int innerWidth, innerHeight;/* Size of rectangle to anchor in window. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;		/* Returns upper-left corner of anchored
+    int innerWidth, int innerHeight,
+				/* Size of rectangle to anchor in window. */
+    int *xPtr, int *yPtr)	/* Returns upper-left corner of anchored
 				 * rectangle. */
 {
-    switch (anchor) {
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_W:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
-	    *xPtr = Tk_InternalBorderLeft(tkwin) + padX;
-	    break;
-
-	case TK_ANCHOR_N:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_S:
-	    *xPtr = (Tk_Width(tkwin) - innerWidth) / 2;
-	    break;
-
-	default:
-	    *xPtr = Tk_Width(tkwin) - (Tk_InternalBorderRight(tkwin) + padX)
-		    - innerWidth;
-	    break;
-    }
+    /*
+     * Handle the horizontal parts.
+     */
 
     switch (anchor) {
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_N:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
-	    *yPtr = Tk_InternalBorderTop(tkwin) + padY;
-	    break;
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_W:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
+	*xPtr = Tk_InternalBorderLeft(tkwin) + padX;
+	break;
+
+    case TK_ANCHOR_N:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_S:
+	*xPtr = (Tk_Width(tkwin) - innerWidth - Tk_InternalBorderLeft(tkwin) -
+		Tk_InternalBorderRight(tkwin)) / 2 +
+		Tk_InternalBorderLeft(tkwin);
+	break;
+
+    default:
+	*xPtr = Tk_Width(tkwin) - Tk_InternalBorderRight(tkwin) - padX
+		- innerWidth;
+	break;
+    }
 
-	case TK_ANCHOR_W:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
-	case TK_ANCHOR_E:
-	    *yPtr = (Tk_Height(tkwin) - innerHeight) / 2;
-	    break;
+    /*
+     * Handle the vertical parts.
+     */
 
-	default:
-	    *yPtr = Tk_Height(tkwin) - Tk_InternalBorderBottom(tkwin) - padY
-		    - innerHeight;
-	    break;
+    switch (anchor) {
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_N:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
+	*yPtr = Tk_InternalBorderTop(tkwin) + padY;
+	break;
+
+    case TK_ANCHOR_W:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
+    case TK_ANCHOR_E:
+	*yPtr = (Tk_Height(tkwin) - innerHeight- Tk_InternalBorderTop(tkwin) -
+		Tk_InternalBorderBottom(tkwin)) / 2 +
+		Tk_InternalBorderTop(tkwin);
+	break;
+
+    default:
+	*yPtr = Tk_Height(tkwin) - Tk_InternalBorderBottom(tkwin) - padY
+		- innerHeight;
+	break;
     }
 }
 
@@ -835,10 +838,9 @@ TkComputeAnchor(anchor, tkwin, padX, padY, innerWidth, innerHeight, xPtr, yPtr)
  *	Given a lookup table, map a number to a string in the table.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If numKey was equal to the numeric key of one of the elements
- *	in the table, returns the string key of that element.
- *	Returns NULL if numKey was not equal to any of the numeric keys
- *	in the table.
+ *	If numKey was equal to the numeric key of one of the elements in the
+ *	table, returns the string key of that element. Returns NULL if numKey
+ *	was not equal to any of the numeric keys in the table.
  *
  * Side effects.
  *	None.
@@ -847,13 +849,13 @@ TkComputeAnchor(anchor, tkwin, padX, padY, innerWidth, innerHeight, xPtr, yPtr)
  */
 
 char *
-TkFindStateString(mapPtr, numKey)
-    CONST TkStateMap *mapPtr;	/* The state table. */
-    int numKey;			/* The key to try to find in the table. */
+TkFindStateString(
+    const TkStateMap *mapPtr,	/* The state table. */
+    int numKey)			/* The key to try to find in the table. */
 {
-    for ( ; mapPtr->strKey != NULL; mapPtr++) {
+    for (; mapPtr->strKey!=NULL ; mapPtr++) {
 	if (numKey == mapPtr->numKey) {
-	    return mapPtr->strKey;
+	    return (char *) mapPtr->strKey;
 	}
     }
     return NULL;
@@ -862,17 +864,17 @@ TkFindStateString(mapPtr, numKey)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * TkFindStateNum --
+ * TkFindStateNum, TkFindStateNumObj --
  *
  *	Given a lookup table, map a string to a number in the table.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If strKey was equal to the string keys of one of the elements
- *	in the table, returns the numeric key of that element.
- *	Returns the numKey associated with the last element (the NULL
- *	string one) in the table if strKey was not equal to any of the
- *	string keys in the table.  In that case, an error message is
- *	also left in the interp's result (if interp is not NULL).
+ *	If strKey was equal to the string keys of one of the elements in the
+ *	table, returns the numeric key of that element. Returns the numKey
+ *	associated with the last element (the NULL string one) in the table if
+ *	strKey was not equal to any of the string keys in the table. In that
+ *	case, an error message is also left in the interp's result (if interp
+ *	is not NULL).
  *
  * Side effects.
  *	None.
@@ -881,48 +883,66 @@ TkFindStateString(mapPtr, numKey)
  */
 
 int
-TkFindStateNum(interp, option, mapPtr, strKey)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error reporting. */
-    CONST char *option;		/* String to use when constructing error. */
-    CONST TkStateMap *mapPtr;	/* Lookup table. */
-    CONST char *strKey;		/* String to try to find in lookup table. */
+TkFindStateNum(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error reporting. */
+    const char *option,		/* String to use when constructing error. */
+    const TkStateMap *mapPtr,	/* Lookup table. */
+    const char *strKey)		/* String to try to find in lookup table. */
 {
-    CONST TkStateMap *mPtr;
+    const TkStateMap *mPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * See if the value is in the state map.
+     */
 
     for (mPtr = mapPtr; mPtr->strKey != NULL; mPtr++) {
 	if (strcmp(strKey, mPtr->strKey) == 0) {
 	    return mPtr->numKey;
 	}
     }
+
+    /*
+     * Not there. Generate an error message (if we can) and return the
+     * default.
+     */
+
     if (interp != NULL) {
 	mPtr = mapPtr;
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad ", option, " value \"", strKey,
-		"\": must be ", mPtr->strKey, (char *) NULL);
+		"\": must be ", mPtr->strKey, NULL);
 	for (mPtr++; mPtr->strKey != NULL; mPtr++) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, 
-		    ((mPtr[1].strKey != NULL) ? ", " : ", or "), 
-		    mPtr->strKey, (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		    ((mPtr[1].strKey != NULL) ? ", " : ", or "),
+		    mPtr->strKey, NULL);
 	}
     }
     return mPtr->numKey;
 }
 
 int
-TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, mapPtr, keyPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error reporting. */
-    Tcl_Obj *optionPtr;		/* String to use when constructing error. */
-    CONST TkStateMap *mapPtr;	/* Lookup table. */
-    Tcl_Obj *keyPtr;		/* String key to find in lookup table. */
+TkFindStateNumObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error reporting. */
+    Tcl_Obj *optionPtr,		/* String to use when constructing error. */
+    const TkStateMap *mapPtr,	/* Lookup table. */
+    Tcl_Obj *keyPtr)		/* String key to find in lookup table. */
 {
-    CONST TkStateMap *mPtr;
-    CONST char *key;
-    CONST Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
+    const TkStateMap *mPtr;
+    const char *key;
+    const Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
+
+    /*
+     * See if the value is in the object cache.
+     */
 
     if ((keyPtr->typePtr == &tkStateKeyObjType)
-	    && (keyPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 == (VOID *) mapPtr)) {
-	return (int) keyPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2;
+	    && (keyPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 == mapPtr)) {
+	return PTR2INT(keyPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2);
     }
 
+    /*
+     * Not there. Look in the state map.
+     */
+
     key = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(keyPtr, NULL);
     for (mPtr = mapPtr; mPtr->strKey != NULL; mPtr++) {
 	if (strcmp(key, mPtr->strKey) == 0) {
@@ -930,168 +950,118 @@ TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, mapPtr, keyPtr)
 	    if ((typePtr != NULL) && (typePtr->freeIntRepProc != NULL)) {
 		(*typePtr->freeIntRepProc)(keyPtr);
 	    }
-	    keyPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) mapPtr;
-	    keyPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2 = (VOID *) mPtr->numKey;
-	    keyPtr->typePtr = &tkStateKeyObjType;	    
+	    keyPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (void *) mapPtr;
+	    keyPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2 = INT2PTR(mPtr->numKey);
+	    keyPtr->typePtr = &tkStateKeyObjType;
 	    return mPtr->numKey;
 	}
     }
+
+    /*
+     * Not there either. Generate an error message (if we can) and return the
+     * default.
+     */
+
     if (interp != NULL) {
 	mPtr = mapPtr;
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad ",
-		Tcl_GetStringFromObj(optionPtr, NULL), " value \"", key,
-		"\": must be ", mPtr->strKey, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad ", Tcl_GetString(optionPtr),
+		" value \"", key, "\": must be ", mPtr->strKey, NULL);
 	for (mPtr++; mPtr->strKey != NULL; mPtr++) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, 
-		((mPtr[1].strKey != NULL) ? ", " : ", or "), 
-		mPtr->strKey, (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		((mPtr[1].strKey != NULL) ? ", " : ", or "),
+		mPtr->strKey, NULL);
 	}
     }
     return mPtr->numKey;
 }
-
-/*
- * For each exit handler created with a call to TkCreateExitHandler
- * there is a structure of the following type:
- */
-
-typedef struct ExitHandler {
-    Tcl_ExitProc *proc;		/* Procedure to call when process exits. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* One word of information to pass to proc. */
-    struct ExitHandler *nextPtr;/* Next in list of all exit handlers for
-				 * this application, or NULL for end of list. */
-} ExitHandler;
-
-/*
- * There is both per-process and per-thread exit handlers.
- * The first list is controlled by a mutex.  The other is in
- * thread local storage.
- */
-
-static ExitHandler *firstExitPtr = NULL;
-				/* First in list of all exit handlers for
-				 * application. */
-TCL_DECLARE_MUTEX(exitMutex)
-
+
 /*
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * ----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * TkCreateExitHandler --
+ * TkBackgroundEvalObjv --
  *
- *	Same as Tcl_CreateExitHandler, but private to Tk.
+ *	Evaluate a command while ensuring that we do not affect the
+ *	interpreters state. This is important when evaluating script
+ *	during background tasks.
  *
  * Results:
- *	None.
+ *	A standard Tcl result code.
  *
- * Side effects.
- *	Sets a handler with Tcl_CreateExitHandler if this is the first call.
+ * Side Effects:
+ *	The interpreters variables and code may be modified by the script
+ *	but the result will not be modified.
  *
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * ----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void
-TkCreateExitHandler (proc, clientData)
-    Tcl_ExitProc *proc;		/* Procedure to invoke. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
+int
+TkBackgroundEvalObjv(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    int objc,
+    Tcl_Obj *const *objv,
+    int flags)
 {
-    ExitHandler *exitPtr;
-
-    exitPtr = (ExitHandler *) ckalloc(sizeof(ExitHandler));
-    exitPtr->proc = proc;
-    exitPtr->clientData = clientData;
-    Tcl_MutexLock(&exitMutex);
-    if (firstExitPtr == NULL) {
-	Tcl_CreateExitHandler(TkFinalize, NULL);
-    }
-    exitPtr->nextPtr = firstExitPtr;
-    firstExitPtr = exitPtr;
-    Tcl_MutexUnlock(&exitMutex);
-}
+    Tcl_DString errorInfo, errorCode;
+    Tcl_SavedResult state;
+    int n, r = TCL_OK;
 
-/*
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
- *
- * TkDeleteExitHandler --
- *
- *	Same as Tcl_DeleteExitHandler, but private to Tk.
- *
- * Results:
- *	None.
- *
- * Side effects.
- *	None.
- *
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
- */
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&errorInfo);
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&errorCode);
 
-void
-TkDeleteExitHandler (proc, clientData)
-    Tcl_ExitProc *proc;		/* Procedure that was previously registered. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
-{
-    ExitHandler *exitPtr, *prevPtr;
-
-    Tcl_MutexLock(&exitMutex);
-    for (prevPtr = NULL, exitPtr = firstExitPtr; exitPtr != NULL;
-	    prevPtr = exitPtr, exitPtr = exitPtr->nextPtr) {
-	if ((exitPtr->proc == proc)
-		&& (exitPtr->clientData == clientData)) {
-	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
-		firstExitPtr = exitPtr->nextPtr;
-	    } else {
-		prevPtr->nextPtr = exitPtr->nextPtr;
-	    }
-	    ckfree((char *) exitPtr);
-	    break;
-	}
+    Tcl_Preserve(interp);
+
+    /*
+     * Record the state of the interpreter
+     */
+
+    Tcl_SaveResult(interp, &state);
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&errorInfo,
+	Tcl_GetVar(interp, "errorInfo", TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY), -1);
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&errorCode,
+	Tcl_GetVar(interp, "errorCode", TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY), -1);
+
+    /*
+     * Evaluate the command and handle any error.
+     */
+
+    for (n = 0; n < objc; ++n) {
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(objv[n]);
+    }
+    r = Tcl_EvalObjv(interp, objc, objv, flags);
+    for (n = 0; n < objc; ++n) {
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(objv[n]);
+    }
+    if (r == TCL_ERROR) {
+        Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (background event handler)");
+        Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
     }
-    Tcl_MutexUnlock(&exitMutex);
-    return;
-}
 
-/*
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
- *
- * TkFinalize --
- *
- *	Runs our private exit handlers and removes itself from Tcl. This is
- *	benificial should we want to protect from dangling pointers should
- *	the Tk shared library be unloaded prior to Tcl which can happen on
- *	windows should the process be forcefully exiting from an exception
- *	handler.
- *
- * Results:
- *	None.
- *
- * Side effects.
- *	None.
- *
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
- */
+    Tcl_Release(interp);
 
-void
-TkFinalize (clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
-{
-    ExitHandler *exitPtr;
-
-    Tcl_DeleteExitHandler(TkFinalize, NULL);
-
-    Tcl_MutexLock(&exitMutex);
-    for (exitPtr = firstExitPtr; exitPtr != NULL; exitPtr = firstExitPtr) {
-	/*
-	 * Be careful to remove the handler from the list before
-	 * invoking its callback.  This protects us against
-	 * double-freeing if the callback should call
-	 * Tcl_DeleteExitHandler on itself.
-	 */
-
-	firstExitPtr = exitPtr->nextPtr;
-	Tcl_MutexUnlock(&exitMutex);
-	(*exitPtr->proc)(exitPtr->clientData);
-	ckfree((char *) exitPtr);
-	Tcl_MutexLock(&exitMutex);
-    }    
-    firstExitPtr = NULL;
-    Tcl_MutexUnlock(&exitMutex);
+    /*
+     * Restore the state of the interpreter
+     */
+
+    Tcl_SetVar(interp, "errorInfo",
+	Tcl_DStringValue(&errorInfo), TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    Tcl_SetVar(interp, "errorCode",
+	Tcl_DStringValue(&errorCode), TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    Tcl_RestoreResult(interp, &state);
+
+    /*
+     * Clean up references.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&errorInfo);
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&errorCode);
+
+    return r;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkVisual.c b/generic/tkVisual.c
index 41d2060..ec8be11 100644
--- a/generic/tkVisual.c
+++ b/generic/tkVisual.c
@@ -1,29 +1,28 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkVisual.c --
  *
- *	This file contains library procedures for allocating and
- *	freeing visuals and colormaps.  This code is based on a
- *	prototype implementation by Paul Mackerras.
+ *	This file contains library procedures for allocating and freeing
+ *	visuals and colormaps. This code is based on a prototype
+ *	implementation by Paul Mackerras.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
-#include "tkPort.h"
 
 /*
- * The table below maps from symbolic names for visual classes
- * to the associated X class symbols.
+ * The table below maps from symbolic names for visual classes to the
+ * associated X class symbols.
  */
 
 typedef struct VisualDictionary {
     char *name;			/* Textual name of class. */
-    int minLength;		/* Minimum # characters that must be
-				 * specified for an unambiguous match. */
+    int minLength;		/* Minimum # characters that must be specified
+				 * for an unambiguous match. */
     int class;			/* X symbol for class. */
 } VisualDictionary;
 static VisualDictionary visualNames[] = {
@@ -46,17 +45,16 @@ static VisualDictionary visualNames[] = {
 
 struct TkColormap {
     Colormap colormap;		/* X's identifier for the colormap. */
-    Visual *visual;		/* Visual for which colormap was
-				 * allocated. */
+    Visual *visual;		/* Visual for which colormap was allocated. */
     int refCount;		/* How many uses of the colormap are still
-				 * outstanding (calls to Tk_GetColormap
-				 * minus calls to Tk_FreeColormap). */
-    int shareable;		/* 0 means this colormap was allocated by
-				 * a call to Tk_GetColormap with "new",
-				 * implying that the window wants it all
-				 * for itself.  1 means that the colormap
-				 * was allocated as a default for a particular
-				 * visual, so it can be shared. */
+				 * outstanding (calls to Tk_GetColormap minus
+				 * calls to Tk_FreeColormap). */
+    int shareable;		/* 0 means this colormap was allocated by a
+				 * call to Tk_GetColormap with "new", implying
+				 * that the window wants it all for itself.  1
+				 * means that the colormap was allocated as a
+				 * default for a particular visual, so it can
+				 * be shared. */
     struct TkColormap *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of colormaps for this display,
 				 * or NULL for end of list. */
 };
@@ -66,17 +64,17 @@ struct TkColormap {
  *
  * Tk_GetVisual --
  *
- *	Given a string identifying a particular kind of visual, this
- *	procedure returns a visual and depth that matches the specification.
+ *	Given a string identifying a particular kind of visual, this procedure
+ *	returns a visual and depth that matches the specification.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is normally a pointer to a visual.  If an
- *	error occurred in looking up the visual, NULL is returned and
- *	an error message is left in the interp's result.  The depth of the
- *	visual is returned to *depthPtr under normal returns.  If
- *	colormapPtr is non-NULL, then this procedure also finds a
- *	suitable colormap for use with the visual in tkwin, and it
- *	returns that colormap in *colormapPtr unless an error occurs.
+ *	The return value is normally a pointer to a visual. If an error
+ *	occurred in looking up the visual, NULL is returned and an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result. The depth of the visual is
+ *	returned to *depthPtr under normal returns. If colormapPtr is
+ *	non-NULL, then this procedure also finds a suitable colormap for use
+ *	with the visual in tkwin, and it returns that colormap in *colormapPtr
+ *	unless an error occurs.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	A new colormap may be allocated.
@@ -85,42 +83,40 @@ struct TkColormap {
  */
 
 Visual *
-Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter to use for error
-					 * reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window in which visual will be
-					 * used. */
-    CONST char *string;			/* String describing visual.  See
-					 * manual entry for details. */
-    int *depthPtr;			/* The depth of the returned visual
-					 * is stored here. */
-    Colormap *colormapPtr;		/* If non-NULL, then a suitable
-					 * colormap for visual is placed here.
-					 * This colormap must eventually be
-					 * freed by calling Tk_FreeColormap. */
+Tk_GetVisual(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which visual will be used. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* String describing visual. See manual entry
+				 * for details. */
+    int *depthPtr,		/* The depth of the returned visual is stored
+				 * here. */
+    Colormap *colormapPtr)	/* If non-NULL, then a suitable colormap for
+				 * visual is placed here. This colormap must
+				 * eventually be freed by calling
+				 * Tk_FreeColormap. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin2;
     XVisualInfo template, *visInfoList, *bestPtr;
     long mask;
     Visual *visual;
-    int length, c, numVisuals, prio, bestPrio, i;
+    ptrdiff_t length;
+    int c, numVisuals, prio, bestPrio, i;
     CONST char *p;
     VisualDictionary *dictPtr;
     TkColormap *cmapPtr;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Parse string and set up a template for use in searching for
-     * an appropriate visual.
+     * Parse string and set up a template for use in searching for an
+     * appropriate visual.
      */
 
     c = string[0];
     if (c == '.') {
 	/*
-	 * The string must be a window name.  If the window is on the
-	 * same screen as tkwin, then just use its visual.  Otherwise
-	 * use the information about the visual as a template for the
-	 * search.
+	 * The string must be a window name. If the window is on the same
+	 * screen as tkwin, then just use its visual. Otherwise use the
+	 * information about the visual as a template for the search.
 	 */
 
 	tkwin2 = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
@@ -132,8 +128,8 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
 	    *depthPtr = Tk_Depth(tkwin2);
 	    if (colormapPtr != NULL) {
 		/*
-		 * Use the colormap from the other window too (but be sure
-		 * to increment its reference count if it's one of the ones
+		 * Use the colormap from the other window too (but be sure to
+		 * increment its reference count if it's one of the ones
 		 * allocated here).
 		 */
 
@@ -173,21 +169,21 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
 	int visualId;
 
 	/*
-	* This is a visual ID.
-	*/
+	 * This is a visual ID.
+	 */
 
 	if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, string, &visualId) == TCL_ERROR) {
 	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad X identifier for visual: ",
-		    string, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad X identifier for visual: \"",
+		    string, "\"", NULL);
 	    return NULL;
 	}
 	template.visualid = visualId;
 	mask = VisualIDMask;
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * Parse the string into a class name (or "best") optionally
-	 * followed by whitespace and a depth.
+	 * Parse the string into a class name (or "best") optionally followed
+	 * by whitespace and a depth.
 	 */
 
 	for (p = string; *p != 0; p++) {
@@ -207,11 +203,11 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
 	}
 	if (template.class == -1) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown or ambiguous visual name \"",
-		    string, "\": class must be ", (char *) NULL);
+		    string, "\": class must be ", NULL);
 	    for (dictPtr = visualNames; dictPtr->name != NULL; dictPtr++) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, dictPtr->name, ", ", (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, dictPtr->name, ", ", NULL);
 	    }
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "or default", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "or default", NULL);
 	    return NULL;
 	}
 	while (isspace(UCHAR(*p))) {
@@ -232,8 +228,8 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find all visuals that match the template we've just created,
-     * and return an error if there are none that match.
+     * Find all visuals that match the template we've just created, and return
+     * an error if there are none that match.
      */
 
     template.screen = Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin);
@@ -247,31 +243,37 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Search through the visuals that were returned to find the best
-     * one.  The choice is based on the following criteria, in decreasing
-     * order of importance:
+     * Search through the visuals that were returned to find the best one.
+     * The choice is based on the following criteria, in decreasing order of
+     * importance:
      *
-     * 1. Depth: choose a visual with exactly the desired depth,
-     *	  else one with more bits than requested but as few bits
-     *	  as possible, else one with fewer bits but as many as
-     *    possible.
-     * 2. Class: some visual classes are more desirable than others;
-     *    pick the visual with the most desirable class.
-     * 3. Default: the default visual for the screen gets preference
-     *    over other visuals, all else being equal.
+     * 1. Depth: choose a visual with exactly the desired depth, else one with
+     *	  more bits than requested but as few bits as possible, else one with
+     *	  fewer bits but as many as possible.
+     * 2. Class: some visual classes are more desirable than others; pick the
+     *    visual with the most desirable class.
+     * 3. Default: the default visual for the screen gets preference over
+     *    other visuals, all else being equal.
      */
 
     bestPrio = 0;
     bestPtr = NULL;
     for (i = 0; i < numVisuals; i++) {
 	switch (visInfoList[i].class) {
-	    case DirectColor:	prio = 5; break;
-	    case GrayScale:	prio = 1; break;
-	    case PseudoColor:	prio = 7; break;
-	    case StaticColor:	prio = 3; break;
-	    case StaticGray:	prio = 1; break;
-	    case TrueColor:	prio = 5; break;
-	    default:		prio = 0; break;
+	case DirectColor:
+	    prio = 5; break;
+	case GrayScale:
+	    prio = 1; break;
+	case PseudoColor:
+	    prio = 7; break;
+	case StaticColor:
+	    prio = 3; break;
+	case StaticGray:
+	    prio = 1; break;
+	case TrueColor:
+	    prio = 5; break;
+	default:
+	    prio = 0; break;
 	}
 	if (visInfoList[i].visual
 		== DefaultVisualOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin))) {
@@ -295,7 +297,7 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
 	}
 	continue;
 
-	newBest:
+    newBest:
 	bestPtr = &visInfoList[i];
 	bestPrio = prio;
     }
@@ -304,11 +306,10 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
     XFree((char *) visInfoList);
 
     /*
-     * If we need to find a colormap for this visual, do it now.
-     * If the visual is the default visual for the screen, then
-     * use the default colormap.  Otherwise search for an existing
-     * colormap that's shareable.  If all else fails, create a new
-     * colormap.
+     * If we need to find a colormap for this visual, do it now. If the visual
+     * is the default visual for the screen, then use the default colormap.
+     * Otherwise search for an existing colormap that's shareable. If all else
+     * fails, create a new colormap.
      */
 
     if (colormapPtr != NULL) {
@@ -336,7 +337,7 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
 	}
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     return visual;
 }
 
@@ -345,31 +346,28 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetColormap --
  *
- *	Given a string identifying a colormap, this procedure finds
- *	an appropriate colormap.
+ *	Given a string identifying a colormap, this procedure finds an
+ *	appropriate colormap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is normally the X resource identifier for the
- *	colormap.  If an error occurs, None is returned and an error
- *	message is placed in the interp's result.
+ *	colormap. If an error occurs, None is returned and an error message is
+ *	placed in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A reference count is incremented for the colormap, so
- *	Tk_FreeColormap must eventually be called exactly once for
- *	each call to Tk_GetColormap.
+ *	A reference count is incremented for the colormap, so Tk_FreeColormap
+ *	must eventually be called exactly once for each call to
+ *	Tk_GetColormap.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Colormap
-Tk_GetColormap(interp, tkwin, string)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter to use for error
-					 * reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window where colormap will be
-					 * used. */
-    CONST char *string;			/* String that identifies colormap:
-					 * either "new" or the name of
-					 * another window. */
+Tk_GetColormap(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window where colormap will be used. */
+    CONST char *string)		/* String that identifies colormap: either
+				 * "new" or the name of another window. */
 {
     Colormap colormap;
     TkColormap *cmapPtr;
@@ -394,9 +392,9 @@ Tk_GetColormap(interp, tkwin, string)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Use a colormap from an existing window.  It must have the same
-     * visual as tkwin (which means, among other things, that the
-     * other window must be on the same screen).
+     * Use a colormap from an existing window. It must have the same visual as
+     * tkwin (which means, among other things, that the other window must be
+     * on the same screen).
      */
 
     other = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
@@ -405,12 +403,12 @@ Tk_GetColormap(interp, tkwin, string)
     }
     if (Tk_Screen(other) != Tk_Screen(tkwin)) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't use colormap for ", string,
-		": not on same screen", (char *) NULL);
+		": not on same screen", NULL);
 	return None;
     }
     if (Tk_Visual(other) != Tk_Visual(tkwin)) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't use colormap for ", string,
-		": incompatible visuals", (char *) NULL);
+		": incompatible visuals", NULL);
 	return None;
     }
     colormap = Tk_Colormap(other);
@@ -434,41 +432,40 @@ Tk_GetColormap(interp, tkwin, string)
  *
  * Tk_FreeColormap --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to release a colormap that was
- *	previously allocated by Tk_GetColormap.
+ *	This procedure is called to release a colormap that was previously
+ *	allocated by Tk_GetColormap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The colormap's reference count is decremented.  If this was the
- *	last reference to the colormap, then the colormap is freed.
+ *	The colormap's reference count is decremented. If this was the last
+ *	reference to the colormap, then the colormap is freed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeColormap(display, colormap)
-    Display *display;			/* Display for which colormap was
-					 * allocated. */
-    Colormap colormap;			/* Colormap that is no longer needed.
-					 * Must have been returned by previous
-					 * call to Tk_GetColormap, or
-					 * preserved by a previous call to
-					 * Tk_PreserveColormap. */
+Tk_FreeColormap(
+    Display *display,		/* Display for which colormap was
+				 * allocated. */
+    Colormap colormap)		/* Colormap that is no longer needed. Must
+				 * have been returned by previous call to
+				 * Tk_GetColormap, or preserved by a previous
+				 * call to Tk_PreserveColormap. */
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     TkColormap *cmapPtr, *prevPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Find Tk's information about the display, then see if this
-     * colormap is a non-default one (if it's a default one, there
-     * won't be an entry for it in the display's list).
+     * Find Tk's information about the display, then see if this colormap is a
+     * non-default one (if it's a default one, there won't be an entry for it
+     * in the display's list).
      */
 
     dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
     if (dispPtr == NULL) {
-	panic("unknown display passed to Tk_FreeColormap");
+	Tcl_Panic("unknown display passed to Tk_FreeColormap");
     }
     for (prevPtr = NULL, cmapPtr = dispPtr->cmapPtr; cmapPtr != NULL;
 	    prevPtr = cmapPtr, cmapPtr = cmapPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -485,7 +482,7 @@ Tk_FreeColormap(display, colormap)
 	    }
 	    return;
 	}
-    } 
+    }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -493,41 +490,40 @@ Tk_FreeColormap(display, colormap)
  *
  * Tk_PreserveColormap --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to indicate to Tk that the specified
- *	colormap is being referenced from another location and should
- *	not be freed until all extra references are eliminated.  The
- *	colormap must have been returned by Tk_GetColormap.
+ *	This procedure is called to indicate to Tk that the specified colormap
+ *	is being referenced from another location and should not be freed
+ *	until all extra references are eliminated. The colormap must have been
+ *	returned by Tk_GetColormap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The colormap's reference count is incremented, so
- *	Tk_FreeColormap must eventually be called exactly once for
- *	each call to Tk_PreserveColormap.
+ *	The colormap's reference count is incremented, so Tk_FreeColormap must
+ *	eventually be called exactly once for each call to
+ *	Tk_PreserveColormap.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_PreserveColormap(display, colormap)
-    Display *display;			/* Display for which colormap was
-					 * allocated. */
-    Colormap colormap;			/* Colormap that should be
-					 * preserved. */
+Tk_PreserveColormap(
+    Display *display,		/* Display for which colormap was
+				 * allocated. */
+    Colormap colormap)		/* Colormap that should be preserved. */
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     TkColormap *cmapPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Find Tk's information about the display, then see if this
-     * colormap is a non-default one (if it's a default one, there
-     * won't be an entry for it in the display's list).
+     * Find Tk's information about the display, then see if this colormap is a
+     * non-default one (if it's a default one, there won't be an entry for it
+     * in the display's list).
      */
 
     dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
     if (dispPtr == NULL) {
-	panic("unknown display passed to Tk_PreserveColormap");
+	Tcl_Panic("unknown display passed to Tk_PreserveColormap");
     }
     for (cmapPtr = dispPtr->cmapPtr; cmapPtr != NULL;
 	    cmapPtr = cmapPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -535,5 +531,13 @@ Tk_PreserveColormap(display, colormap)
 	    cmapPtr->refCount += 1;
 	    return;
 	}
-    } 
+    }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkWindow.c b/generic/tkWindow.c
index 40b2fed..ac69455 100644
--- a/generic/tkWindow.c
+++ b/generic/tkWindow.c
@@ -1,32 +1,28 @@
 /*
  * tkWindow.c --
  *
- *	This file provides basic window-manipulation procedures,
- *	which are equivalent to procedures in Xlib (and even
- *	invoke them) but also maintain the local Tk_Window
- *	structure.
+ *	This file provides basic window-manipulation functions, which are
+ *	equivalent to functions in Xlib (and even invoke them) but also
+ *	maintain the local Tk_Window structure.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1989-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  */
 
-#include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 #ifdef __WIN32__
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
-#elif !(defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
+#elif !defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
 #include "tkUnixInt.h"
 #endif
 
-#include "tclInt.h" /* for Tcl_CreateNamespace() */
-
 /*
- * Type used to keep track of Window objects that were
- * only partically deallocated by Tk_DestroyWindow.
+ * Type used to keep track of Window objects that were only partially
+ * deallocated by Tk_DestroyWindow.
  */
 
 #define HD_CLEANUP		1
@@ -41,21 +37,19 @@ typedef struct TkHalfdeadWindow {
     struct TkHalfdeadWindow *nextPtr;
 } TkHalfdeadWindow;
 
-
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    int numMainWindows;    /* Count of numver of main windows currently
-			    * open in this thread. */
+    int numMainWindows;		/* Count of numver of main windows currently
+				 * open in this thread. */
     TkMainInfo *mainWindowList;
-                           /* First in list of all main windows managed
-			    * by this thread. */
+				/* First in list of all main windows managed
+				 * by this thread. */
     TkHalfdeadWindow *halfdeadWindowList;
-                           /* First in list of partially deallocated
-			    * windows. */
-    TkDisplay *displayList;
-                           /* List of all displays currently in use by
-			    * the current thread. */
-    int initialized;       /* 0 means the structures above need
-			    * initializing. */
+				/* First in list of partially deallocated
+				 * windows. */
+    TkDisplay *displayList;	/* List of all displays currently in use by
+				 * the current thread. */
+    int initialized;		/* 0 means the structures above need
+				 * initializing. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
@@ -66,19 +60,19 @@ static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 TCL_DECLARE_MUTEX(windowMutex)
 
 /*
- * Default values for "changes" and "atts" fields of TkWindows.  Note
- * that Tk always requests all events for all windows, except StructureNotify
- * events on internal windows:  these events are generated internally.
+ * Default values for "changes" and "atts" fields of TkWindows. Note that Tk
+ * always requests all events for all windows, except StructureNotify events
+ * on internal windows: these events are generated internally.
  */
 
-static CONST XWindowChanges defChanges = {
+static const XWindowChanges defChanges = {
     0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, Above
 };
 #define ALL_EVENTS_MASK \
     KeyPressMask|KeyReleaseMask|ButtonPressMask|ButtonReleaseMask| \
     EnterWindowMask|LeaveWindowMask|PointerMotionMask|ExposureMask| \
     VisibilityChangeMask|PropertyChangeMask|ColormapChangeMask
-static CONST XSetWindowAttributes defAtts= {
+static const XSetWindowAttributes defAtts= {
     None,			/* background_pixmap */
     0,				/* background_pixel */
     CopyFromParent,		/* border_pixmap */
@@ -97,8 +91,8 @@ static CONST XSetWindowAttributes defAtts= {
 };
 
 /*
- * The following structure defines all of the commands supported by
- * Tk, and the C procedures that execute them.
+ * The following structure defines all of the commands supported by Tk, and
+ * the C functions that execute them.
  */
 
 #define ISSAFE 1
@@ -107,12 +101,12 @@ static CONST XSetWindowAttributes defAtts= {
 #define WINMACONLY 8
 
 typedef struct {
-    CONST char *name;			/* Name of command. */
-    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *objProc;	/* Command's object- (or string-) based procedure. */
+    const char *name;			/* Name of command. */
+    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *objProc;	/* Command's object- (or string-) based function. */
     int flags;
 } TkCmd;
 
-static CONST TkCmd commands[] = {
+static const TkCmd commands[] = {
     /*
      * Commands that are part of the intrinsics:
      */
@@ -136,21 +130,12 @@ static CONST TkCmd commands[] = {
     {"selection",	Tk_SelectionObjCmd,	PASSMAINWINDOW},
     {"tk",		Tk_TkObjCmd,		PASSMAINWINDOW|ISSAFE},
     {"tkwait",		Tk_TkwaitObjCmd,	PASSMAINWINDOW|ISSAFE},
-#if defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
-    {"tk_chooseColor",  Tk_ChooseColorObjCmd,	PASSMAINWINDOW},
-    {"tk_chooseDirectory", Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd, WINMACONLY|PASSMAINWINDOW},
-    {"tk_getOpenFile",  Tk_GetOpenFileObjCmd,	WINMACONLY|PASSMAINWINDOW},
-    {"tk_getSaveFile",  Tk_GetSaveFileObjCmd,	WINMACONLY|PASSMAINWINDOW},
-#endif
-#if defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
-    {"tk_messageBox",   Tk_MessageBoxObjCmd,	PASSMAINWINDOW},
-#endif
     {"update",		Tk_UpdateObjCmd,	PASSMAINWINDOW|ISSAFE},
     {"winfo",		Tk_WinfoObjCmd,		PASSMAINWINDOW|ISSAFE},
     {"wm",		Tk_WmObjCmd,		PASSMAINWINDOW},
 
     /*
-     * Widget class commands.
+     * Default widget class commands.
      */
 
     {"button",		Tk_ButtonObjCmd,	ISSAFE},
@@ -168,23 +153,58 @@ static CONST TkCmd commands[] = {
     {"scale",		Tk_ScaleObjCmd,		ISSAFE},
     {"scrollbar",	(Tcl_ObjCmdProc *) Tk_ScrollbarCmd,	NOOBJPROC|PASSMAINWINDOW|ISSAFE},
     {"spinbox",		Tk_SpinboxObjCmd,	ISSAFE},
-    {"text",		(Tcl_ObjCmdProc *) Tk_TextCmd,		NOOBJPROC|PASSMAINWINDOW|ISSAFE},
+    {"text",		Tk_TextObjCmd,		PASSMAINWINDOW|ISSAFE},
     {"toplevel",	Tk_ToplevelObjCmd,	0},
 
     /*
+     * Classic widget class commands.
+     */
+
+    {"::tk::button",	Tk_ButtonObjCmd,	ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::canvas",	Tk_CanvasObjCmd,	PASSMAINWINDOW|ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::checkbutton",Tk_CheckbuttonObjCmd,	ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::entry",	Tk_EntryObjCmd,		ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::frame",	Tk_FrameObjCmd,		ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::label",	Tk_LabelObjCmd,		ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::labelframe",Tk_LabelframeObjCmd,	ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::listbox",	Tk_ListboxObjCmd,	ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::menubutton",Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd,	ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::message",	Tk_MessageObjCmd,	ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::panedwindow",Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd,	ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::radiobutton",Tk_RadiobuttonObjCmd,	ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::scale",	Tk_ScaleObjCmd,		ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::scrollbar",	(Tcl_ObjCmdProc *) Tk_ScrollbarCmd,			NOOBJPROC|PASSMAINWINDOW|ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::spinbox",	Tk_SpinboxObjCmd,	ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::text",	Tk_TextObjCmd,		PASSMAINWINDOW|ISSAFE},
+    {"::tk::toplevel",	Tk_ToplevelObjCmd,	0},
+
+    /*
+     * Standard dialog support. Note that the Unix/X11 platform implements
+     * these commands differently (via the script library).
+     */
+
+#if defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
+    {"tk_chooseColor",	Tk_ChooseColorObjCmd,	PASSMAINWINDOW},
+    {"tk_chooseDirectory", Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd,WINMACONLY|PASSMAINWINDOW},
+    {"tk_getOpenFile",	Tk_GetOpenFileObjCmd,	WINMACONLY|PASSMAINWINDOW},
+    {"tk_getSaveFile",	Tk_GetSaveFileObjCmd,	WINMACONLY|PASSMAINWINDOW},
+    {"tk_messageBox",	Tk_MessageBoxObjCmd,	PASSMAINWINDOW},
+#endif
+
+    /*
      * Misc.
      */
 
 #if defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
     {"::tk::unsupported::MacWindowStyle",
-	    		TkUnsupported1ObjCmd,			PASSMAINWINDOW|ISSAFE},
+			TkUnsupported1ObjCmd,	PASSMAINWINDOW|ISSAFE},
 #endif
-    {NULL, NULL, 0}
+    {NULL,		NULL,			0}
 };
 
 /*
- * The variables and table below are used to parse arguments from
- * the "argv" variable in Tk_Init.
+ * The variables and table below are used to parse arguments from the "argv"
+ * variable in Tk_Init.
  */
 
 static int synchronize = 0;
@@ -197,62 +217,62 @@ static char *visual = NULL;
 static int rest = 0;
 
 static Tk_ArgvInfo argTable[] = {
-    {"-colormap", TK_ARGV_STRING, (char *) NULL, (char *) &colormap,
+    {"-colormap", TK_ARGV_STRING, NULL, (char *) &colormap,
 	"Colormap for main window"},
-    {"-display", TK_ARGV_STRING, (char *) NULL, (char *) &display,
+    {"-display", TK_ARGV_STRING, NULL, (char *) &display,
 	"Display to use"},
-    {"-geometry", TK_ARGV_STRING, (char *) NULL, (char *) &geometry,
+    {"-geometry", TK_ARGV_STRING, NULL, (char *) &geometry,
 	"Initial geometry for window"},
-    {"-name", TK_ARGV_STRING, (char *) NULL, (char *) &name,
+    {"-name", TK_ARGV_STRING, NULL, (char *) &name,
 	"Name to use for application"},
     {"-sync", TK_ARGV_CONSTANT, (char *) 1, (char *) &synchronize,
 	"Use synchronous mode for display server"},
-    {"-visual", TK_ARGV_STRING, (char *) NULL, (char *) &visual,
+    {"-visual", TK_ARGV_STRING, NULL, (char *) &visual,
 	"Visual for main window"},
-    {"-use", TK_ARGV_STRING, (char *) NULL, (char *) &use,
+    {"-use", TK_ARGV_STRING, NULL, (char *) &use,
 	"Id of window in which to embed application"},
     {"--", TK_ARGV_REST, (char *) 1, (char *) &rest,
 	"Pass all remaining arguments through to script"},
-    {(char *) NULL, TK_ARGV_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL}
+    {NULL, TK_ARGV_END, NULL, NULL, NULL}
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations to procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations to functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static Tk_Window	CreateTopLevelWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static Tk_Window	CreateTopLevelWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Window parent, CONST char *name,
-			    CONST char *screenName, unsigned int flags));
-static void		DeleteWindowsExitProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static TkDisplay *	GetScreen _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    CONST char *screenName, int *screenPtr));
-static int		Initialize _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static int		NameWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkWindow *winPtr, TkWindow *parentPtr,
-			    CONST char *name));
-static void		UnlinkWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+			    CONST char *screenName, unsigned int flags);
+static void		DeleteWindowsExitProc(ClientData clientData);
+static TkDisplay *	GetScreen(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *screenName,
+			    int *screenPtr);
+static int		Initialize(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static int		NameWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkWindow *winPtr,
+			    TkWindow *parentPtr, CONST char *name);
+static void		UnlinkWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkCloseDisplay --
- *	Closing the display can lead to order of deletion problems.
- *	We defer it until exit handling for Mac/Win, but since Unix can
- *	use many displays, try and clean it up as best as possible.
+ *
+ *	Closing the display can lead to order of deletion problems. We defer
+ *	it until exit handling for Mac/Win, but since Unix can use many
+ *	displays, try and clean it up as best as possible.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Resources associated with the display will be free.
- *	The display may not be referenced at all after this.
+ *	Resources associated with the display will be free. The display may
+ *	not be referenced at all after this.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TkCloseDisplay(TkDisplay *dispPtr)
+TkCloseDisplay(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr)
 {
     TkClipCleanup(dispPtr);
 
@@ -269,8 +289,8 @@ TkCloseDisplay(TkDisplay *dispPtr)
     if (dispPtr->errorPtr != NULL) {
 	TkErrorHandler *errorPtr;
 	for (errorPtr = dispPtr->errorPtr;
-	     errorPtr != NULL;
-	     errorPtr = dispPtr->errorPtr) {
+		errorPtr != NULL;
+		errorPtr = dispPtr->errorPtr) {
 	    dispPtr->errorPtr = errorPtr->nextPtr;
 	    ckfree((char *) errorPtr);
 	}
@@ -281,8 +301,8 @@ TkCloseDisplay(TkDisplay *dispPtr)
     TkpCloseDisplay(dispPtr);
 
     /*
-     * Delete winTable after TkpCloseDisplay since special windows
-     * may need call Tk_DestroyWindow and it checks the winTable.
+     * Delete winTable after TkpCloseDisplay since special windows may need
+     * call Tk_DestroyWindow and it checks the winTable.
      */
 
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&dispPtr->winTable);
@@ -299,44 +319,42 @@ TkCloseDisplay(TkDisplay *dispPtr)
  *
  * CreateTopLevelWindow --
  *
- *	Make a new window that will be at top-level (its parent will
- *	be the root window of a screen).
+ *	Make a new window that will be at top-level (its parent will be the
+ *	root window of a screen).
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the new window, or NULL if
- *	an error prevented the new window from being created.  If
- *	NULL is returned, an error message will be left in
- *	the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a token for the new window, or NULL if an error
+ *	prevented the new window from being created. If NULL is returned, an
+ *	error message will be left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new window structure is allocated locally.  An X
- *	window is NOT initially created, but will be created
- *	the first time the window is mapped.
+ *	A new window structure is allocated locally. An X window is NOT
+ *	initially created, but will be created the first time the window is
+ *	mapped.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static Tk_Window
-CreateTopLevelWindow(interp, parent, name, screenName, flags)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window parent;		/* Token for logical parent of new window
-				 * (used for naming, options, etc.).  May
-				 * be NULL. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name for new window;  if parent is
-				 * non-NULL, must be unique among parent's
-				 * children. */
-    CONST char *screenName;	/* Name of screen on which to create
-				 * window.  NULL means use DISPLAY environment
-				 * variable to determine.  Empty string means
-				 * use parent's screen, or DISPLAY if no
+CreateTopLevelWindow(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window parent,		/* Token for logical parent of new window
+				 * (used for naming, options, etc.). May be
+				 * NULL. */
+    CONST char *name,		/* Name for new window; if parent is non-NULL,
+				 * must be unique among parent's children. */
+    CONST char *screenName,	/* Name of screen on which to create window.
+				 * NULL means use DISPLAY environment variable
+				 * to determine. Empty string means use
+				 * parent's screen, or DISPLAY if no
 				 * parent. */
-    unsigned int flags;		/* Additional flags to set on the window. */
+    unsigned int flags)		/* Additional flags to set on the window. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr;
     register TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     int screenId;
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (!tsdPtr->initialized) {
 	tsdPtr->initialized = 1;
@@ -354,16 +372,6 @@ CreateTopLevelWindow(interp, parent, name, screenName, flags)
 
 	Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat(&tkImgFmtGIF);
 	Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat(&tkImgFmtPPM);
-
-	/*
-	 * Create exit handler to delete all windows when the application
-	 * exits.  This must be a thread exit handler, but there may be
-	 * ordering issues with other exit handlers
-	 * (i.e. OptionThreadExitProc).
-	 */
-
-	Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler(DeleteWindowsExitProc,
-		(ClientData) tsdPtr);
     }
 
     if ((parent != NULL) && (screenName != NULL) && (screenName[0] == '\0')) {
@@ -381,28 +389,29 @@ CreateTopLevelWindow(interp, parent, name, screenName, flags)
     /*
      * Set the flags specified in the call.
      */
+
     winPtr->flags |= flags;
 
     /*
-     * Force the window to use a border pixel instead of border pixmap.
-     * This is needed for the case where the window doesn't use the
-     * default visual.  In this case, the default border is a pixmap
-     * inherited from the root window, which won't work because it will
-     * have the wrong visual.
+     * Force the window to use a border pixel instead of border pixmap. This
+     * is needed for the case where the window doesn't use the default visual.
+     * In this case, the default border is a pixmap inherited from the root
+     * window, which won't work because it will have the wrong visual.
      */
 
     winPtr->dirtyAtts |= CWBorderPixel;
 
     /*
-     * (Need to set the TK_TOP_HIERARCHY flag immediately here;  otherwise
-     * Tk_DestroyWindow will core dump if it is called before the flag
-     * has been set.)
+     * (Need to set the TK_TOP_HIERARCHY flag immediately here; otherwise
+     * Tk_DestroyWindow will core dump if it is called before the flag has
+     * been set.)
      */
 
-    winPtr->flags |= TK_TOP_HIERARCHY|TK_TOP_LEVEL|TK_HAS_WRAPPER|TK_WIN_MANAGED;
+    winPtr->flags |=
+	    TK_TOP_HIERARCHY|TK_TOP_LEVEL|TK_HAS_WRAPPER|TK_WIN_MANAGED;
 
     if (parent != NULL) {
-        if (NameWindow(interp, winPtr, (TkWindow *) parent, name) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (NameWindow(interp, winPtr, (TkWindow *) parent, name) != TCL_OK) {
 	    Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) winPtr);
 	    return (Tk_Window) NULL;
 	}
@@ -417,44 +426,40 @@ CreateTopLevelWindow(interp, parent, name, screenName, flags)
  *
  * GetScreen --
  *
- *	Given a string name for a display-plus-screen, find the
- *	TkDisplay structure for the display and return the screen
- *	number too.
+ *	Given a string name for a display-plus-screen, find the TkDisplay
+ *	structure for the display and return the screen number too.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to information about the display,
- *	or NULL if the display couldn't be opened.  In this case, an
- *	error message is left in the interp's result.  The location at
- *	*screenPtr is overwritten with the screen number parsed from
- *	screenName.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to information about the display, or
+ *	NULL if the display couldn't be opened. In this case, an error message
+ *	is left in the interp's result. The location at *screenPtr is
+ *	overwritten with the screen number parsed from screenName.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new connection is opened to the display if there is no
- *	connection already.  A new TkDisplay data structure is also
- *	setup, if necessary.
+ *	A new connection is opened to the display if there is no connection
+ *	already. A new TkDisplay data structure is also setup, if necessary.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static TkDisplay *
-GetScreen(interp, screenName, screenPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Place to leave error message. */
-    CONST char *screenName;	/* Name for screen.  NULL or empty means
-				 * use DISPLAY envariable. */
-    int *screenPtr;		/* Where to store screen number. */
+GetScreen(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Place to leave error message. */
+    CONST char *screenName,	/* Name for screen. NULL or empty means use
+				 * DISPLAY envariable. */
+    int *screenPtr)		/* Where to store screen number. */
 {
     register TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     CONST char *p;
     int screenId;
     size_t length;
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
-     * Separate the screen number from the rest of the display
-     * name.  ScreenName is assumed to have the syntax
-     * <display>.<screen> with the dot and the screen being
-     * optional.
+     * Separate the screen number from the rest of the display name.
+     * ScreenName is assumed to have the syntax <display>.<screen> with the
+     * dot and the screen being optional.
      */
 
     screenName = TkGetDefaultScreenName(interp, screenName);
@@ -462,7 +467,7 @@ GetScreen(interp, screenName, screenPtr)
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp,
 		"no display name and no $DISPLAY environment variable",
 		TCL_STATIC);
-	return (TkDisplay *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
     length = strlen(screenName);
     screenId = 0;
@@ -472,26 +477,27 @@ GetScreen(interp, screenName, screenPtr)
     }
     if ((*p == '.') && (p[1] != '\0')) {
 	length = p - screenName;
-	screenId = strtoul(p+1, (char **) NULL, 10);
+	screenId = strtoul(p+1, NULL, 10);
     }
 
     /*
-     * See if we already have a connection to this display.  If not,
-     * then open a new connection.
+     * See if we already have a connection to this display. If not, then open
+     * a new connection.
      */
 
     for (dispPtr = tsdPtr->displayList; ; dispPtr = dispPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (dispPtr == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * The private function zeros out dispPtr when it is created,
-	     * so we only need to initialize the non-zero items.
+	     * The private function zeros out dispPtr when it is created, so
+	     * we only need to initialize the non-zero items.
 	     */
+
 	    dispPtr = TkpOpenDisplay(screenName);
 	    if (dispPtr == NULL) {
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "couldn't connect to display \"",
-			screenName, "\"", (char *) NULL);
-		return (TkDisplay *) NULL;
+			screenName, "\"", NULL);
+		return NULL;
 	    }
 	    dispPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->displayList; /* TkGetDisplayList(); */
 	    tsdPtr->displayList = dispPtr;
@@ -501,10 +507,12 @@ GetScreen(interp, screenName, screenPtr)
 	    dispPtr->cursorFont = None;
 	    dispPtr->warpWindow = None;
 	    dispPtr->multipleAtom = None;
+
 	    /*
 	     * By default we do want to collapse motion events in
 	     * Tk_QueueWindowEvent.
 	     */
+
 	    dispPtr->flags |= TK_DISPLAY_COLLAPSE_MOTION_EVENTS;
 
 	    Tcl_InitHashTable(&dispPtr->winTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
@@ -526,7 +534,7 @@ GetScreen(interp, screenName, screenPtr)
 
 	sprintf(buf, "bad screen number \"%d\"", screenId);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-	return (TkDisplay *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
     *screenPtr = screenId;
     return dispPtr;
@@ -537,26 +545,26 @@ GetScreen(interp, screenName, screenPtr)
  *
  * TkGetDisplay --
  *
- *	Given an X display, TkGetDisplay returns the TkDisplay
- *      structure for the display.
+ *	Given an X display, TkGetDisplay returns the TkDisplay structure for
+ *	the display.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to information about the display,
- *	or NULL if the display did not have a TkDisplay structure.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to information about the display, or
+ *	NULL if the display did not have a TkDisplay structure.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 TkDisplay *
-TkGetDisplay(display)
-     Display *display;          /* X's display pointer */
+TkGetDisplay(
+    Display *display)		/* X's display pointer */
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     for (dispPtr = tsdPtr->displayList; dispPtr != NULL;
 	    dispPtr = dispPtr->nextPtr) {
@@ -572,23 +580,24 @@ TkGetDisplay(display)
  *
  * TkGetDisplayList --
  *
- *	This procedure returns a pointer to the thread-local
- *      list of TkDisplays corresponding to the open displays.
+ *	This function returns a pointer to the thread-local list of TkDisplays
+ *	corresponding to the open displays.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the first TkDisplay
- *      structure in thread-local-storage.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the first TkDisplay structure in
+ *	thread-local-storage.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 TkDisplay *
-TkGetDisplayList()
+TkGetDisplayList(void)
 {
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     return tsdPtr->displayList;
 }
@@ -598,24 +607,24 @@ TkGetDisplayList()
  *
  * TkGetMainInfoList --
  *
- *	This procedure returns a pointer to the list of structures
- *      containing information about all main windows for the
- *      current thread.
+ *	This function returns a pointer to the list of structures containing
+ *	information about all main windows for the current thread.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the first TkMainInfo
- *      structure in thread local storage.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the first TkMainInfo structure in
+ *	thread local storage.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 TkMainInfo *
-TkGetMainInfoList()
+TkGetMainInfoList(void)
 {
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     return tsdPtr->mainWindowList;
 }
@@ -624,7 +633,7 @@ TkGetMainInfoList()
  *
  * TkAllocWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure creates and initializes a TkWindow structure.
+ *	This function creates and initializes a TkWindow structure.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a pointer to the new window.
@@ -637,13 +646,12 @@ TkGetMainInfoList()
  */
 
 TkWindow *
-TkAllocWindow(dispPtr, screenNum, parentPtr)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display associated with new window. */
-    int screenNum;		/* Index of screen for new window. */
-    TkWindow *parentPtr;	/* Parent from which this window should
-				 * inherit visual information.  NULL means
-				 * use screen defaults instead of
-				 * inheriting. */
+TkAllocWindow(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr,		/* Display associated with new window. */
+    int screenNum,		/* Index of screen for new window. */
+    TkWindow *parentPtr)	/* Parent from which this window should
+				 * inherit visual information. NULL means use
+				 * screen defaults instead of inheriting. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr;
 
@@ -709,41 +717,41 @@ TkAllocWindow(dispPtr, screenNum, parentPtr)
  *
  * NameWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to give a window a name and insert
- *	the window into the hierarchy associated with a particular
- *	application.
+ *	This function is invoked to give a window a name and insert the window
+ *	into the hierarchy associated with a particular application.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return value.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      See above.
+ *	See above.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-NameWindow(interp, winPtr, parentPtr, name)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    register TkWindow *winPtr;	/* Window that is to be named and inserted. */
-    TkWindow *parentPtr;	/* Pointer to logical parent for winPtr
-				 * (used for naming, options, etc.). */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name for winPtr;   must be unique among
+NameWindow(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    register TkWindow *winPtr,	/* Window that is to be named and inserted. */
+    TkWindow *parentPtr,	/* Pointer to logical parent for winPtr (used
+				 * for naming, options, etc.). */
+    CONST char *name)		/* Name for winPtr; must be unique among
 				 * parentPtr's children. */
 {
 #define FIXED_SIZE 200
     char staticSpace[FIXED_SIZE];
     char *pathName;
-    int new;
+    int isNew;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-    int length1, length2;
+    size_t length1, length2;
 
     /*
      * Setup all the stuff except name right away, then do the name stuff
-     * last.  This is so that if the name stuff fails, everything else
-     * will be properly initialized (needed to destroy the window cleanly
-     * after the naming failure).
+     * last. This is so that if the name stuff fails, everything else will be
+     * properly initialized (needed to destroy the window cleanly after the
+     * naming failure).
      */
+
     winPtr->parentPtr = parentPtr;
     winPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
     if (parentPtr->childList == NULL) {
@@ -759,6 +767,7 @@ NameWindow(interp, winPtr, parentPtr, name)
      * If this is an anonymous window (ie, it has no name), just return OK
      * now.
      */
+
     if (winPtr->flags & TK_ANONYMOUS_WINDOW) {
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
@@ -770,22 +779,21 @@ NameWindow(interp, winPtr, parentPtr, name)
     winPtr->nameUid = Tk_GetUid(name);
 
     /*
-     * Don't permit names that start with an upper-case letter:  this
-     * will just cause confusion with class names in the option database.
+     * Don't permit names that start with an upper-case letter: this will just
+     * cause confusion with class names in the option database.
      */
 
     if (isupper(UCHAR(name[0]))) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
 		"window name starts with an upper-case letter: \"",
-		name, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		name, "\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * To permit names of arbitrary length, must be prepared to malloc
-     * a buffer to hold the new path name.  To run fast in the common
-     * case where names are short, use a fixed-size buffer on the
-     * stack.
+     * To permit names of arbitrary length, must be prepared to malloc a
+     * buffer to hold the new path name. To run fast in the common case where
+     * names are short, use a fixed-size buffer on the stack.
      */
 
     length1 = strlen(parentPtr->pathName);
@@ -803,13 +811,14 @@ NameWindow(interp, winPtr, parentPtr, name)
 	pathName[length1] = '.';
 	strcpy(pathName+length1+1, name);
     }
-    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&parentPtr->mainPtr->nameTable, pathName, &new);
+    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&parentPtr->mainPtr->nameTable, pathName,
+	    &isNew);
     if (pathName != staticSpace) {
 	ckfree(pathName);
     }
-    if (!new) {
+    if (!isNew) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window name \"", name,
-		"\" already exists in parent", (char *) NULL);
+		"\" already exists in parent", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, winPtr);
@@ -822,53 +831,50 @@ NameWindow(interp, winPtr, parentPtr, name)
  *
  * TkCreateMainWindow --
  *
- *	Make a new main window.  A main window is a special kind of
- *	top-level window used as the outermost window in an
- *	application.
+ *	Make a new main window. A main window is a special kind of top-level
+ *	window used as the outermost window in an application.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the new window, or NULL if
- *	an error prevented the new window from being created.  If
- *	NULL is returned, an error message will be left in
- *	the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a token for the new window, or NULL if an error
+ *	prevented the new window from being created. If NULL is returned, an
+ *	error message will be left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new window structure is allocated locally;  "interp" is
- *	associated with the window and registered for "send" commands
- *	under "baseName".  BaseName may be extended with an instance
- *	number in the form "#2" if necessary to make it globally
- *	unique.  Tk-related commands are bound into interp.
+ *	A new window structure is allocated locally; "interp" is associated
+ *	with the window and registered for "send" commands under "baseName".
+ *	BaseName may be extended with an instance number in the form "#2" if
+ *	necessary to make it globally unique. Tk-related commands are bound
+ *	into interp.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Window
-TkCreateMainWindow(interp, screenName, baseName)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    CONST char *screenName;	/* Name of screen on which to create
-				 * window.  Empty or NULL string means
-				 * use DISPLAY environment variable. */
-    char *baseName;		/* Base name for application;  usually of the
+TkCreateMainWindow(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    CONST char *screenName,	/* Name of screen on which to create window.
+				 * Empty or NULL string means use DISPLAY
+				 * environment variable. */
+    char *baseName)		/* Base name for application; usually of the
 				 * form "prog instance". */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin;
-    int dummy;
-    int isSafe;
+    int dummy, isSafe;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     register TkMainInfo *mainPtr;
     register TkWindow *winPtr;
-    register CONST TkCmd *cmdPtr;
+    register const TkCmd *cmdPtr;
     ClientData clientData;
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
-     * Panic if someone updated the TkWindow structure without
-     * also updating the Tk_FakeWin structure (or vice versa).
+     * Panic if someone updated the TkWindow structure without also updating
+     * the Tk_FakeWin structure (or vice versa).
      */
 
     if (sizeof(TkWindow) != sizeof(Tk_FakeWin)) {
-	panic("TkWindow and Tk_FakeWin are not the same size");
+	Tcl_Panic("TkWindow and Tk_FakeWin are not the same size");
     }
 
     /*
@@ -882,8 +888,8 @@ TkCreateMainWindow(interp, screenName, baseName)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the TkMainInfo structure for this application, and set
-     * up name-related information for the new window.
+     * Create the TkMainInfo structure for this application, and set up
+     * name-related information for the new window.
      */
 
     winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
@@ -911,8 +917,8 @@ TkCreateMainWindow(interp, screenName, baseName)
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
     }
     if (Tcl_LinkVar(interp, "::tk::AlwaysShowSelection",
-		(char *) &mainPtr->alwaysShowSelection,
-		TCL_LINK_BOOLEAN) != TCL_OK) {
+	    (char *) &mainPtr->alwaysShowSelection,
+	    TCL_LINK_BOOLEAN) != TCL_OK) {
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
     }
     mainPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->mainWindowList;
@@ -923,8 +929,8 @@ TkCreateMainWindow(interp, screenName, baseName)
     winPtr->pathName = Tcl_GetHashKey(&mainPtr->nameTable, hPtr);
 
     /*
-     * We have just created another Tk application; increment the refcount
-     * on the display pointer.
+     * We have just created another Tk application; increment the refcount on
+     * the display pointer.
      */
 
     winPtr->dispPtr->refCount++;
@@ -987,36 +993,35 @@ TkCreateMainWindow(interp, screenName, baseName)
  *
  * Tk_CreateWindow --
  *
- *	Create a new internal or top-level window as a child of an
- *	existing window.
+ *	Create a new internal or top-level window as a child of an existing
+ *	window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the new window.  This
- *	is not the same as X's token for the window.  If an error
- *	occurred in creating the window (e.g. no such display or
- *	screen), then an error message is left in the interp's result and
- *	NULL is returned.
+ *	The return value is a token for the new window. This is not the same
+ *	as X's token for the window. If an error occurred in creating the
+ *	window (e.g. no such display or screen), then an error message is left
+ *	in the interp's result and NULL is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new window structure is allocated locally.  An X
- *	window is not initially created, but will be created
- *	the first time the window is mapped.
+ *	A new window structure is allocated locally. An X window is not
+ *	initially created, but will be created the first time the window is
+ *	mapped.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Window
-Tk_CreateWindow(interp, parent, name, screenName)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting.
+Tk_CreateWindow(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting.
 				 * the interp's result is assumed to be
 				 * initialized by the caller. */
-    Tk_Window parent;		/* Token for parent of new window. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name for new window.  Must be unique
-				 * among parent's children. */
-    CONST char *screenName;	/* If NULL, new window will be internal on
-				 * same screen as its parent.  If non-NULL,
-				 * gives name of screen on which to create
-				 * new window;  window will be a top-level
+    Tk_Window parent,		/* Token for parent of new window. */
+    CONST char *name,		/* Name for new window. Must be unique among
+				 * parent's children. */
+    CONST char *screenName)	/* If NULL, new window will be internal on
+				 * same screen as its parent. If non-NULL,
+				 * gives name of screen on which to create new
+				 * window; window will be a top-level
 				 * window. */
 {
     TkWindow *parentPtr = (TkWindow *) parent;
@@ -1024,29 +1029,26 @@ Tk_CreateWindow(interp, parent, name, screenName)
 
     if ((parentPtr != NULL) && (parentPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD)) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-		"can't create window: parent has been destroyed",
-		(char *) NULL);
+		"can't create window: parent has been destroyed", NULL);
 	return NULL;
     } else if ((parentPtr != NULL) &&
 	    (parentPtr->flags & TK_CONTAINER)) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-		"can't create window: its parent has -container = yes",
-		(char *) NULL);
+		"can't create window: its parent has -container = yes", NULL);
 	return NULL;
     }
+
     if (screenName == NULL) {
 	winPtr = TkAllocWindow(parentPtr->dispPtr, parentPtr->screenNum,
 		parentPtr);
 	if (NameWindow(interp, winPtr, parentPtr, name) != TCL_OK) {
 	    Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) winPtr);
 	    return NULL;
-	} else {
-            return (Tk_Window) winPtr;
 	}
-    } else {
-	return CreateTopLevelWindow(interp, parent, name, screenName,
-		/* flags */ 0);
+	return (Tk_Window) winPtr;
     }
+    return CreateTopLevelWindow(interp, parent, name, screenName,
+	    /* flags */ 0);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1054,35 +1056,34 @@ Tk_CreateWindow(interp, parent, name, screenName)
  *
  * Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow --
  *
- *	Create a new internal or top-level window as a child of an
- *	existing window; this window will be anonymous (unnamed), so
- *	it will not be visible at the Tcl level.
+ *	Create a new internal or top-level window as a child of an existing
+ *	window; this window will be anonymous (unnamed), so it will not be
+ *	visible at the Tcl level.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the new window.  This
- *	is not the same as X's token for the window.  If an error
- *	occurred in creating the window (e.g. no such display or
- *	screen), then an error message is left in the interp's result and
- *	NULL is returned.
+ *	The return value is a token for the new window. This is not the same
+ *	as X's token for the window. If an error occurred in creating the
+ *	window (e.g. no such display or screen), then an error message is left
+ *	in the interp's result and NULL is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new window structure is allocated locally.  An X
- *	window is not initially created, but will be created
- *	the first time the window is mapped.
+ *	A new window structure is allocated locally. An X window is not
+ *	initially created, but will be created the first time the window is
+ *	mapped.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Window
-Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow(interp, parent, screenName)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting.
+Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting.
 				 * the interp's result is assumed to be
 				 * initialized by the caller. */
-    Tk_Window parent;		/* Token for parent of new window. */
-    CONST char *screenName;	/* If NULL, new window will be internal on
-				 * same screen as its parent.  If non-NULL,
-				 * gives name of screen on which to create
-				 * new window;  window will be a top-level
+    Tk_Window parent,		/* Token for parent of new window. */
+    CONST char *screenName)	/* If NULL, new window will be internal on
+				 * same screen as its parent. If non-NULL,
+				 * gives name of screen on which to create new
+				 * window; window will be a top-level
 				 * window. */
 {
     TkWindow *parentPtr = (TkWindow *) parent;
@@ -1090,14 +1091,12 @@ Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow(interp, parent, screenName)
 
     if ((parentPtr != NULL) && (parentPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD)) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-		"can't create window: parent has been destroyed",
-		(char *) NULL);
+		"can't create window: parent has been destroyed", NULL);
 	return NULL;
     } else if ((parentPtr != NULL) &&
 	    (parentPtr->flags & TK_CONTAINER)) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-		"can't create window: its parent has -container = yes",
-		(char *) NULL);
+		"can't create window: its parent has -container = yes", NULL);
 	return NULL;
     }
     if (screenName == NULL) {
@@ -1109,15 +1108,14 @@ Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow(interp, parent, screenName)
 	 */
 
 	winPtr->flags |= TK_ANONYMOUS_WINDOW;
-	if (NameWindow(interp, winPtr, parentPtr, (char *)NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (NameWindow(interp, winPtr, parentPtr, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 	    Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) winPtr);
 	    return NULL;
 	}
 	return (Tk_Window) winPtr;
-    } else {
-	return CreateTopLevelWindow(interp, parent, (char *)NULL, screenName,
-		TK_ANONYMOUS_WINDOW);
     }
+    return CreateTopLevelWindow(interp, parent, NULL, screenName,
+	    TK_ANONYMOUS_WINDOW);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1125,41 +1123,38 @@ Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow(interp, parent, screenName)
  *
  * Tk_CreateWindowFromPath --
  *
- *	This procedure is similar to Tk_CreateWindow except that
- *	it uses a path name to create the window, rather than a
- *	parent and a child name.
+ *	This function is similar to Tk_CreateWindow except that it uses a path
+ *	name to create the window, rather than a parent and a child name.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the new window.  This
- *	is not the same as X's token for the window.  If an error
- *	occurred in creating the window (e.g. no such display or
- *	screen), then an error message is left in the interp's result and
- *	NULL is returned.
+ *	The return value is a token for the new window. This is not the same
+ *	as X's token for the window. If an error occurred in creating the
+ *	window (e.g. no such display or screen), then an error message is left
+ *	in the interp's result and NULL is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new window structure is allocated locally.  An X
- *	window is not initially created, but will be created
- *	the first time the window is mapped.
+ *	A new window structure is allocated locally. An X window is not
+ *	initially created, but will be created the first time the window is
+ *	mapped.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Window
-Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, pathName, screenName)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting.
+Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting.
 				 * the interp's result is assumed to be
 				 * initialized by the caller. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for any window in application
-				 * that is to contain new window. */
-    CONST char *pathName;	/* Path name for new window within the
-				 * application of tkwin.  The parent of
-				 * this window must already exist, but
-				 * the window itself must not exist. */
-    CONST char *screenName;	/* If NULL, new window will be on same
-				 * screen as its parent.  If non-NULL,
-				 * gives name of screen on which to create
-				 * new window;  window will be a top-level
-				 * window. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for any window in application that is
+				 * to contain new window. */
+    CONST char *pathName,	/* Path name for new window within the
+				 * application of tkwin. The parent of this
+				 * window must already exist, but the window
+				 * itself must not exist. */
+    CONST char *screenName)	/* If NULL, new window will be on same screen
+				 * as its parent. If non-NULL, gives name of
+				 * screen on which to create new window;
+				 * window will be a top-level window. */
 {
 #define FIXED_SPACE 5
     char fixedSpace[FIXED_SPACE+1];
@@ -1168,18 +1163,17 @@ Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, pathName, screenName)
     int numChars;
 
     /*
-     * Strip the parent's name out of pathName (it's everything up
-     * to the last dot).  There are two tricky parts: (a) must
-     * copy the parent's name somewhere else to avoid modifying
-     * the pathName string (for large names, space for the copy
-     * will have to be malloc'ed);  (b) must special-case the
-     * situation where the parent is ".".
+     * Strip the parent's name out of pathName (it's everything up to the last
+     * dot). There are two tricky parts: (a) must copy the parent's name
+     * somewhere else to avoid modifying the pathName string (for large names,
+     * space for the copy will have to be malloc'ed); (b) must special-case
+     * the situation where the parent is ".".
      */
 
     p = strrchr(pathName, '.');
     if (p == NULL) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad window path name \"", pathName,
-		"\"", (char *) NULL);
+		"\"", NULL);
 	return NULL;
     }
     numChars = (int) (p-pathName);
@@ -1202,19 +1196,19 @@ Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, pathName, screenName)
 
     parent = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, p, tkwin);
     if (p != fixedSpace) {
-        ckfree(p);
+	ckfree(p);
     }
     if (parent == NULL) {
 	return NULL;
     }
     if (((TkWindow *) parent)->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-	    "can't create window: parent has been destroyed", (char *) NULL);
+		"can't create window: parent has been destroyed", NULL);
 	return NULL;
-    } else if (((TkWindow *) parent)->flags & TK_CONTAINER) {
+    }
+    if (((TkWindow *) parent)->flags & TK_CONTAINER) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-	    "can't create window: its parent has -container = yes",
-		(char *) NULL);
+		"can't create window: its parent has -container = yes", NULL);
 	return NULL;
     }
 
@@ -1232,13 +1226,12 @@ Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, pathName, screenName)
 		!= TCL_OK) {
 	    Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) winPtr);
 	    return NULL;
-	} else {
-	    return (Tk_Window) winPtr;
 	}
-    } else {
-	return CreateTopLevelWindow(interp, parent, pathName+numChars+1,
-		screenName, /* flags */ 0);
+	return (Tk_Window) winPtr;
     }
+
+    return CreateTopLevelWindow(interp, parent, pathName+numChars+1,
+	    screenName, /* flags */ 0);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1246,36 +1239,36 @@ Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, pathName, screenName)
  *
  * Tk_DestroyWindow --
  *
- *	Destroy an existing window.  After this call, the caller
- *	should never again use the token. Note that this function
- *	can be reentered to destroy a window that was only
- *	partially destroyed before a call to exit.
+ *	Destroy an existing window. After this call, the caller should never
+ *	again use the token. Note that this function can be reentered to
+ *	destroy a window that was only partially destroyed before a call to
+ *	exit.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The window is deleted, along with all of its children.
- *	Relevant callback procedures are invoked.
+ *	The window is deleted, along with all of its children. Relevant
+ *	callback functions are invoked.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to destroy. */
+Tk_DestroyWindow(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window to destroy. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
     XEvent event;
     TkHalfdeadWindow *halfdeadPtr, *prev_halfdeadPtr;
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (winPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD) {
 	/*
-	 * A destroy event binding caused the window to be destroyed
-	 * again.  Ignore the request.
+	 * A destroy event binding caused the window to be destroyed again.
+	 * Ignore the request.
 	 */
 
 	return;
@@ -1283,9 +1276,8 @@ Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin)
     winPtr->flags |= TK_ALREADY_DEAD;
 
     /*
-     * Unless we are cleaning up a half dead
-     * window from DeleteWindowsExitProc,
-     * add this window to the half dead list.
+     * Unless we are cleaning up a half dead window from
+     * DeleteWindowsExitProc, add this window to the half dead list.
      */
 
     if (tsdPtr->halfdeadWindowList &&
@@ -1301,12 +1293,12 @@ Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Some cleanup needs to be done immediately, rather than later,
-     * because it needs information that will be destoyed before we
-     * get to the main cleanup point.  For example, TkFocusDeadWindow
-     * needs to access the parentPtr field from a window, but if
-     * a Destroy event handler deletes the window's parent this
-     * field will be NULL before the main cleanup point is reached.
+     * Some cleanup needs to be done immediately, rather than later, because
+     * it needs information that will be destoyed before we get to the main
+     * cleanup point. For example, TkFocusDeadWindow needs to access the
+     * parentPtr field from a window, but if a Destroy event handler deletes
+     * the window's parent this field will be NULL before the main cleanup
+     * point is reached.
      */
 
     if (!(halfdeadPtr->flags & HD_FOCUS)) {
@@ -1315,23 +1307,23 @@ Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If this is a main window, remove it from the list of main
-     * windows.  This needs to be done now (rather than later with
-     * all the other main window cleanup) to handle situations where
-     * a destroy binding for a window calls "exit".  In this case
-     * the child window cleanup isn't complete when exit is called.
-     * This situation is dealt with using the half dead window
-     * list. Windows that are half dead gets cleaned up during exit.
+     * If this is a main window, remove it from the list of main windows.
+     * This needs to be done now (rather than later with all the other main
+     * window cleanup) to handle situations where a destroy binding for a
+     * window calls "exit". In this case the child window cleanup isn't
+     * complete when exit is called. This situation is dealt with using the
+     * half dead window list. Windows that are half dead gets cleaned up
+     * during exit.
      *
-     * Also decrement the display refcount so that if this is the
-     * last Tk application in this process on this display, the display
-     * can be closed and its data structures deleted.
+     * Also decrement the display refcount so that if this is the last Tk
+     * application in this process on this display, the display can be closed
+     * and its data structures deleted.
      */
 
     if (!(halfdeadPtr->flags & HD_MAIN_WIN) &&
 	    winPtr->mainPtr != NULL && winPtr->mainPtr->winPtr == winPtr) {
 	halfdeadPtr->flags |= HD_MAIN_WIN;
-        dispPtr->refCount--;
+	dispPtr->refCount--;
 	if (tsdPtr->mainWindowList == winPtr->mainPtr) {
 	    tsdPtr->mainWindowList = winPtr->mainPtr->nextPtr;
 	} else {
@@ -1348,10 +1340,9 @@ Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Recursively destroy children. Note that this child
-     * window block may need to be run multiple times
-     * in the case where a child window has a Destroy
-     * binding that calls exit.
+     * Recursively destroy children. Note that this child window block may
+     * need to be run multiple times in the case where a child window has a
+     * Destroy binding that calls exit.
      */
 
     if (!(halfdeadPtr->flags & HD_DESTROY_COUNT)) {
@@ -1366,10 +1357,10 @@ Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin)
 	Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) childPtr);
 	if (winPtr->childList == childPtr) {
 	    /*
-	     * The child didn't remove itself from the child list, so
-	     * let's remove it here.  This can happen in some strange
-	     * conditions, such as when a Destroy event handler for a
-	     * window destroys the window's parent.
+	     * The child didn't remove itself from the child list, so let's
+	     * remove it here. This can happen in some strange conditions,
+	     * such as when a Destroy event handler for a window destroys the
+	     * window's parent.
 	     */
 
 	    winPtr->childList = childPtr->nextPtr;
@@ -1379,14 +1370,13 @@ Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin)
     if ((winPtr->flags & (TK_CONTAINER|TK_BOTH_HALVES))
 	    == (TK_CONTAINER|TK_BOTH_HALVES)) {
 	/*
-	 * This is the container for an embedded application, and
-	 * the embedded application is also in this process.  Delete
-	 * the embedded window in-line here, for the same reasons we
-	 * delete children in-line (otherwise, for example, the Tk
-	 * window may appear to exist even though its X window is
-	 * gone; this could cause errors).  Special note: it's possible
-	 * that the embedded window has already been deleted, in which
-	 * case TkpGetOtherWindow will return NULL.
+	 * This is the container for an embedded application, and the embedded
+	 * application is also in this process. Delete the embedded window
+	 * in-line here, for the same reasons we delete children in-line
+	 * (otherwise, for example, the Tk window may appear to exist even
+	 * though its X window is gone; this could cause errors). Special
+	 * note: it's possible that the embedded window has already been
+	 * deleted, in which case TkpGetOtherWindow will return NULL.
 	 */
 
 	TkWindow *childPtr;
@@ -1398,11 +1388,10 @@ Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Generate a DestroyNotify event.  In order for the DestroyNotify
-     * event to be processed correctly, need to make sure the window
-     * exists.  This is a bit of a kludge, and may be unnecessarily
-     * expensive, but without it no event handlers will get called for
-     * windows that don't exist yet.
+     * Generate a DestroyNotify event. In order for the DestroyNotify event to
+     * be processed correctly, need to make sure the window exists. This is a
+     * bit of a kludge, and may be unnecessarily expensive, but without it no
+     * event handlers will get called for windows that don't exist yet.
      *
      * Note: if the window's pathName is NULL and the window is not an
      * anonymous window, it means that the window was not successfully
@@ -1428,28 +1417,28 @@ Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin)
     }
 
     /*
-     * No additional bindings that could call exit
-     * should be invoked from this point on,
-     * so it is safe to remove this window
-     * from the half dead list.
+     * No additional bindings that could call exit should be invoked from this
+     * point on, so it is safe to remove this window from the half dead list.
      */
 
     for (prev_halfdeadPtr = NULL,
 	    halfdeadPtr = tsdPtr->halfdeadWindowList;
 	    halfdeadPtr != NULL; ) {
 	if (halfdeadPtr->winPtr == winPtr) {
-	    if (prev_halfdeadPtr == NULL)
-	        tsdPtr->halfdeadWindowList = halfdeadPtr->nextPtr;
-	    else
-	        prev_halfdeadPtr->nextPtr = halfdeadPtr->nextPtr;
+	    if (prev_halfdeadPtr == NULL) {
+		tsdPtr->halfdeadWindowList = halfdeadPtr->nextPtr;
+	    } else {
+		prev_halfdeadPtr->nextPtr = halfdeadPtr->nextPtr;
+	    }
 	    ckfree((char *) halfdeadPtr);
 	    break;
 	}
 	prev_halfdeadPtr = halfdeadPtr;
 	halfdeadPtr = halfdeadPtr->nextPtr;
     }
-    if (halfdeadPtr == NULL)
-        panic("window not found on half dead list");
+    if (halfdeadPtr == NULL) {
+	Tcl_Panic("window not found on half dead list");
+    }
 
     /*
      * Cleanup the data structures associated with this window.
@@ -1467,11 +1456,10 @@ Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin)
 	if ((winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY)
 		|| !(winPtr->flags & TK_DONT_DESTROY_WINDOW)) {
 	    /*
-	     * The parent has already been destroyed and this isn't
-	     * a top-level window, so this window will be destroyed
-	     * implicitly when the parent's X window is destroyed;
-	     * it's much faster not to do an explicit destroy of this
-	     * X window.
+	     * The parent has already been destroyed and this isn't a
+	     * top-level window, so this window will be destroyed implicitly
+	     * when the parent's X window is destroyed; it's much faster not
+	     * to do an explicit destroy of this X window.
 	     */
 
 	    dispPtr->lastDestroyRequest = NextRequest(winPtr->display);
@@ -1505,47 +1493,49 @@ Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin)
 		    (ClientData) winPtr->pathName);
 	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->nameTable,
 		    winPtr->pathName));
-            /*
-             * The memory pointed to by pathName has been deallocated.
-             * Keep users from accessing it after the window has been
-             * destroyed by setting it to NULL.
-             */
-            winPtr->pathName = NULL;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Invalidate all objects referring to windows
-	     * with the same main window
+	     * The memory pointed to by pathName has been deallocated. Keep
+	     * users from accessing it after the window has been destroyed by
+	     * setting it to NULL.
+	     */
+
+	    winPtr->pathName = NULL;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Invalidate all objects referring to windows with the same main
+	     * window.
 	     */
+
 	    winPtr->mainPtr->deletionEpoch++;
 	}
 	winPtr->mainPtr->refCount--;
 	if (winPtr->mainPtr->refCount == 0) {
-	    register CONST TkCmd *cmdPtr;
+	    register const TkCmd *cmdPtr;
 
 	    /*
-	     * We just deleted the last window in the application.  Delete
-	     * the TkMainInfo structure too and replace all of Tk's commands
-	     * with dummy commands that return errors.	Also delete the
-	     * "send" command to unregister the interpreter.
+	     * We just deleted the last window in the application. Delete the
+	     * TkMainInfo structure too and replace all of Tk's commands with
+	     * dummy commands that return errors. Also delete the "send"
+	     * command to unregister the interpreter.
 	     *
-	     * NOTE: Only replace the commands it if the interpreter is
-	     * not being deleted. If it *is*, the interpreter cleanup will
-	     * do all the needed work.
+	     * NOTE: Only replace the commands it if the interpreter is not
+	     * being deleted. If it *is*, the interpreter cleanup will do all
+	     * the needed work.
 	     */
 
-            if ((winPtr->mainPtr->interp != NULL) &&
-                    (!Tcl_InterpDeleted(winPtr->mainPtr->interp))) {
-                for (cmdPtr = commands; cmdPtr->name != NULL; cmdPtr++) {
-                    Tcl_CreateCommand(winPtr->mainPtr->interp, cmdPtr->name,
-                            TkDeadAppCmd, (ClientData) NULL,
-                            (void (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData))) NULL);
-                }
-                Tcl_CreateCommand(winPtr->mainPtr->interp, "send",
-                        TkDeadAppCmd, (ClientData) NULL,
-                        (void (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData))) NULL);
-                Tcl_UnlinkVar(winPtr->mainPtr->interp, "tk_strictMotif");
-                Tcl_UnlinkVar(winPtr->mainPtr->interp, "::tk::AlwaysShowSelection");
-            }
+	    if ((winPtr->mainPtr->interp != NULL) &&
+		    (!Tcl_InterpDeleted(winPtr->mainPtr->interp))) {
+		for (cmdPtr = commands; cmdPtr->name != NULL; cmdPtr++) {
+		    Tcl_CreateCommand(winPtr->mainPtr->interp, cmdPtr->name,
+			    TkDeadAppCmd, NULL, NULL);
+		}
+		Tcl_CreateCommand(winPtr->mainPtr->interp, "send",
+			TkDeadAppCmd, NULL, NULL);
+		Tcl_UnlinkVar(winPtr->mainPtr->interp, "tk_strictMotif");
+                Tcl_UnlinkVar(winPtr->mainPtr->interp,
+			"::tk::AlwaysShowSelection");
+	    }
 
 	    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&winPtr->mainPtr->nameTable);
 	    TkBindFree(winPtr->mainPtr);
@@ -1554,72 +1544,71 @@ Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin)
 	    TkFocusFree(winPtr->mainPtr);
 	    TkStylePkgFree(winPtr->mainPtr);
 
-            /*
-             * When embedding Tk into other applications, make sure
-             * that all destroy events reach the server. Otherwise
-             * the embedding application may also attempt to destroy
-             * the windows, resulting in an X error
-             */
+	    /*
+	     * When embedding Tk into other applications, make sure that all
+	     * destroy events reach the server. Otherwise the embedding
+	     * application may also attempt to destroy the windows, resulting
+	     * in an X error
+	     */
 
-            if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
-                XSync(winPtr->display, False);
-            }
+	    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+		XSync(winPtr->display, False);
+	    }
 	    ckfree((char *) winPtr->mainPtr);
 
-            /*
-             * If no other applications are using the display, close the
-             * display now and relinquish its data structures.
-             */
+	    /*
+	     * If no other applications are using the display, close the
+	     * display now and relinquish its data structures.
+	     */
 
 #if !defined(WIN32) && defined(NOT_YET)
-            if (dispPtr->refCount <= 0) {
-                /*
-                 * I have disabled this code because on Windows there are
-                 * still order dependencies in close-down. All displays
-                 * and resources will get closed down properly anyway at
-                 * exit, through the exit handler. -- jyl
-                 */
+	    if (dispPtr->refCount <= 0) {
 		/*
+		 * I have disabled this code because on Windows there are
+		 * still order dependencies in close-down. All displays and
+		 * resources will get closed down properly anyway at exit,
+		 * through the exit handler. -- jyl
+		 *
 		 * Ideally this should be enabled, as unix Tk can use multiple
-		 * displays.  However, there are order issues still, as well
-		 * as the handling of queued events and such that must be
-		 * addressed before this can be enabled.  The current cleanup
+		 * displays. However, there are order issues still, as well as
+		 * the handling of queued events and such that must be
+		 * addressed before this can be enabled. The current cleanup
 		 * works except for send event issues. -- hobbs 04/2002
 		 */
 
-                TkDisplay *theDispPtr, *backDispPtr;
-
-                /*
-                 * Splice this display out of the list of displays.
-                 */
-
-                for (theDispPtr = tsdPtr->displayList, backDispPtr = NULL;
-                         (theDispPtr != winPtr->dispPtr) &&
-                             (theDispPtr != NULL);
-                         theDispPtr = theDispPtr->nextPtr) {
-                    backDispPtr = theDispPtr;
-                }
-                if (theDispPtr == NULL) {
-                    panic("could not find display to close!");
-                }
-                if (backDispPtr == NULL) {
-                    tsdPtr->displayList = theDispPtr->nextPtr;
-                } else {
-                    backDispPtr->nextPtr = theDispPtr->nextPtr;
-                }
-
-                /*
+		TkDisplay *theDispPtr, *backDispPtr;
+
+		/*
+		 * Splice this display out of the list of displays.
+		 */
+
+		for (theDispPtr = tsdPtr->displayList, backDispPtr = NULL;
+			(theDispPtr!=winPtr->dispPtr) && (theDispPtr!=NULL);
+			theDispPtr = theDispPtr->nextPtr) {
+		    backDispPtr = theDispPtr;
+		}
+		if (theDispPtr == NULL) {
+		    Tcl_Panic("could not find display to close!");
+		}
+		if (backDispPtr == NULL) {
+		    tsdPtr->displayList = theDispPtr->nextPtr;
+		} else {
+		    backDispPtr->nextPtr = theDispPtr->nextPtr;
+		}
+
+		/*
 		 * Calling XSync creates X server traffic, but addresses a
 		 * focus issue on close (but not the send issue). -- hobbs
-		 XSync(dispPtr->display, True);
+		 *
+		 *	XSync(dispPtr->display, True);
 		 */
 
-                /*
-                 * Found and spliced it out, now actually do the cleanup.
-                 */
+		/*
+		 * Found and spliced it out, now actually do the cleanup.
+		 */
 
 		TkCloseDisplay(dispPtr);
-            }
+	    }
 #endif
 	}
     }
@@ -1631,22 +1620,21 @@ Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin)
  *
  * Tk_MapWindow --
  *
- *	Map a window within its parent.  This may require the
- *	window and/or its parents to actually be created.
+ *	Map a window within its parent. This may require the window and/or its
+ *	parents to actually be created.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The given window will be mapped.  Windows may also
- *	be created.
+ *	The given window will be mapped. Windows may also be created.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_MapWindow(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window to map. */
+Tk_MapWindow(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for window to map. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     XEvent event;
@@ -1666,8 +1654,8 @@ Tk_MapWindow(tkwin)
     }
     if (winPtr->flags & TK_WIN_MANAGED) {
 	/*
-	 * Lots of special processing has to be done for top-level
-	 * windows.  Let tkWm.c handle everything itself.
+	 * Lots of special processing has to be done for top-level windows.
+	 * Let tkWm.c handle everything itself.
 	 */
 
 	TkWmMapWindow(winPtr);
@@ -1690,32 +1678,31 @@ Tk_MapWindow(tkwin)
  *
  * Tk_MakeWindowExist --
  *
- *	Ensure that a particular window actually exists.  This
- *	procedure shouldn't normally need to be invoked from
- *	outside the Tk package, but may be needed if someone
- *	wants to manipulate a window before mapping it.
+ *	Ensure that a particular window actually exists. This function should
+ *	not normally need to be invoked from outside the Tk package, but may
+ *	be needed if someone wants to manipulate a window before mapping it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the procedure returns, the X window associated with
- *	tkwin is guaranteed to exist.  This may require the
- *	window's ancestors to be created also.
+ *	When the function returns, the X window associated with tkwin is
+ *	guaranteed to exist. This may require the window's ancestors to be
+ *	created also.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window. */
+Tk_MakeWindowExist(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for window. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     TkWindow *winPtr2;
     Window parent;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     Tk_ClassCreateProc *createProc;
-    int new;
+    int isNew;
 
     if (winPtr->window != None) {
 	return;
@@ -1731,28 +1718,28 @@ Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin)
     }
 
     createProc = Tk_GetClassProc(winPtr->classProcsPtr, createProc);
-    if (createProc != NULL) {
+    if (createProc != NULL && parent != None) {
 	winPtr->window = (*createProc)(tkwin, parent, winPtr->instanceData);
     } else {
 	winPtr->window = TkpMakeWindow(winPtr, parent);
     }
 
     hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&winPtr->dispPtr->winTable,
-	    (char *) winPtr->window, &new);
+	    (char *) winPtr->window, &isNew);
     Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, winPtr);
     winPtr->dirtyAtts = 0;
     winPtr->dirtyChanges = 0;
 
     if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY)) {
 	/*
-	 * If any siblings higher up in the stacking order have already
-	 * been created then move this window to its rightful position
-	 * in the stacking order.
+	 * If any siblings higher up in the stacking order have already been
+	 * created then move this window to its rightful position in the
+	 * stacking order.
 	 *
-	 * NOTE: this code ignores any changes anyone might have made
-	 * to the sibling and stack_mode field of the window's attributes,
-	 * so it really isn't safe for these to be manipulated except
-	 * by calling Tk_RestackWindow.
+	 * NOTE: this code ignores any changes anyone might have made to the
+	 * sibling and stack_mode field of the window's attributes, so it
+	 * really isn't safe for these to be manipulated except by calling
+	 * Tk_RestackWindow.
 	 */
 
 	for (winPtr2 = winPtr->nextPtr; winPtr2 != NULL;
@@ -1769,8 +1756,8 @@ Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If this window has a different colormap than its parent, add
-	 * the window to the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property for its top-level.
+	 * If this window has a different colormap than its parent, add the
+	 * window to the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property for its top-level.
 	 */
 
 	if ((winPtr->parentPtr != NULL) &&
@@ -1782,9 +1769,9 @@ Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin)
 
     /*
      * Issue a ConfigureNotify event if there were deferred configuration
-     * changes (but skip it if the window is being deleted;  the
-     * ConfigureNotify event could cause problems if we're being called
-     * from Tk_DestroyWindow under some conditions).
+     * changes (but skip it if the window is being deleted; the
+     * ConfigureNotify event could cause problems if we're being called from
+     * Tk_DestroyWindow under some conditions).
      */
 
     if ((winPtr->flags & TK_NEED_CONFIG_NOTIFY)
@@ -1799,12 +1786,11 @@ Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin)
  *
  * Tk_UnmapWindow, etc. --
  *
- *	There are several procedures under here, each of which
- *	mirrors an existing X procedure.  In addition to performing
- *	the functions of the corresponding procedure, each
- *	procedure also updates the local window structure and
- *	synthesizes an X event (if the window's structure is being
- *	managed internally).
+ *	There are several functions under here, each of which mirrors an
+ *	existing X function. In addition to performing the functions of the
+ *	corresponding function, each function also updates the local window
+ *	structure and synthesizes an X event (if the window's structure is
+ *	being managed internally).
  *
  * Results:
  *	See the manual entries.
@@ -1816,8 +1802,8 @@ Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_UnmapWindow(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window to unmap. */
+Tk_UnmapWindow(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for window to unmap. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -1826,8 +1812,8 @@ Tk_UnmapWindow(tkwin)
     }
     if (winPtr->flags & TK_WIN_MANAGED) {
 	/*
-	 * Special processing has to be done for top-level windows.  Let
-	 * tkWm.c handle everything itself.
+	 * Special processing has to be done for top-level windows. Let tkWm.c
+	 * handle everything itself.
 	 */
 
 	TkWmUnmapWindow(winPtr);
@@ -1850,11 +1836,11 @@ Tk_UnmapWindow(tkwin)
 }
 
 void
-Tk_ConfigureWindow(tkwin, valueMask, valuePtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to re-configure. */
-    unsigned int valueMask;	/* Mask indicating which parts of
-				 * *valuePtr are to be used. */
-    XWindowChanges *valuePtr;	/* New values. */
+Tk_ConfigureWindow(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to re-configure. */
+    unsigned int valueMask,	/* Mask indicating which parts of *valuePtr
+				 * are to be used. */
+    XWindowChanges *valuePtr)	/* New values. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -1874,13 +1860,13 @@ Tk_ConfigureWindow(tkwin, valueMask, valuePtr)
 	winPtr->changes.border_width = valuePtr->border_width;
     }
     if (valueMask & (CWSibling|CWStackMode)) {
-	panic("Can't set sibling or stack mode from Tk_ConfigureWindow.");
+	Tcl_Panic("Can't set sibling or stack mode from Tk_ConfigureWindow.");
     }
 
     if (winPtr->window != None) {
 	XConfigureWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->window,
 		valueMask, valuePtr);
-        TkDoConfigureNotify(winPtr);
+	TkDoConfigureNotify(winPtr);
     } else {
 	winPtr->dirtyChanges |= valueMask;
 	winPtr->flags |= TK_NEED_CONFIG_NOTIFY;
@@ -1888,10 +1874,9 @@ Tk_ConfigureWindow(tkwin, valueMask, valuePtr)
 }
 
 void
-Tk_MoveWindow(tkwin, x, y)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to move. */
-    int x, y;			/* New location for window (within
-				 * parent). */
+Tk_MoveWindow(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to move. */
+    int x, int y)		/* New location for window (within parent). */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -1899,7 +1884,7 @@ Tk_MoveWindow(tkwin, x, y)
     winPtr->changes.y = y;
     if (winPtr->window != None) {
 	XMoveWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->window, x, y);
-        TkDoConfigureNotify(winPtr);
+	TkDoConfigureNotify(winPtr);
     } else {
 	winPtr->dirtyChanges |= CWX|CWY;
 	winPtr->flags |= TK_NEED_CONFIG_NOTIFY;
@@ -1907,9 +1892,9 @@ Tk_MoveWindow(tkwin, x, y)
 }
 
 void
-Tk_ResizeWindow(tkwin, width, height)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to resize. */
-    int width, height;		/* New dimensions for window. */
+Tk_ResizeWindow(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to resize. */
+    int width, int height)	/* New dimensions for window. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -1918,7 +1903,7 @@ Tk_ResizeWindow(tkwin, width, height)
     if (winPtr->window != None) {
 	XResizeWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->window, (unsigned) width,
 		(unsigned) height);
-        TkDoConfigureNotify(winPtr);
+	TkDoConfigureNotify(winPtr);
     } else {
 	winPtr->dirtyChanges |= CWWidth|CWHeight;
 	winPtr->flags |= TK_NEED_CONFIG_NOTIFY;
@@ -1926,11 +1911,10 @@ Tk_ResizeWindow(tkwin, width, height)
 }
 
 void
-Tk_MoveResizeWindow(tkwin, x, y, width, height)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to move and resize. */
-    int x, y;			/* New location for window (within
-				 * parent). */
-    int width, height;		/* New dimensions for window. */
+Tk_MoveResizeWindow(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to move and resize. */
+    int x, int y,		/* New location for window (within parent). */
+    int width, int height)	/* New dimensions for window. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -1941,7 +1925,7 @@ Tk_MoveResizeWindow(tkwin, x, y, width, height)
     if (winPtr->window != None) {
 	XMoveResizeWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->window, x, y,
 		(unsigned) width, (unsigned) height);
-        TkDoConfigureNotify(winPtr);
+	TkDoConfigureNotify(winPtr);
     } else {
 	winPtr->dirtyChanges |= CWX|CWY|CWWidth|CWHeight;
 	winPtr->flags |= TK_NEED_CONFIG_NOTIFY;
@@ -1949,9 +1933,9 @@ Tk_MoveResizeWindow(tkwin, x, y, width, height)
 }
 
 void
-Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth(tkwin, width)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to modify. */
-    int width;			/* New border width for window. */
+Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to modify. */
+    int width)			/* New border width for window. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -1959,7 +1943,7 @@ Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth(tkwin, width)
     if (winPtr->window != None) {
 	XSetWindowBorderWidth(winPtr->display, winPtr->window,
 		(unsigned) width);
-        TkDoConfigureNotify(winPtr);
+	TkDoConfigureNotify(winPtr);
     } else {
 	winPtr->dirtyChanges |= CWBorderWidth;
 	winPtr->flags |= TK_NEED_CONFIG_NOTIFY;
@@ -1967,12 +1951,11 @@ Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth(tkwin, width)
 }
 
 void
-Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes(tkwin, valueMask, attsPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to manipulate. */
-    unsigned long valueMask;	/* OR'ed combination of bits,
-				 * indicating which fields of
-				 * *attsPtr are to be used. */
-    register XSetWindowAttributes *attsPtr;
+Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to manipulate. */
+    unsigned long valueMask,	/* OR'ed combination of bits, indicating which
+				 * fields of *attsPtr are to be used. */
+    register XSetWindowAttributes *attsPtr)
 				/* New values for some attributes. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
@@ -2033,10 +2016,10 @@ Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes(tkwin, valueMask, attsPtr)
 }
 
 void
-Tk_SetWindowBackground(tkwin, pixel)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to manipulate. */
-    unsigned long pixel;	/* Pixel value to use for
-				 * window's background. */
+Tk_SetWindowBackground(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to manipulate. */
+    unsigned long pixel)	/* Pixel value to use for window's
+				 * background. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -2051,10 +2034,9 @@ Tk_SetWindowBackground(tkwin, pixel)
 }
 
 void
-Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap(tkwin, pixmap)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to manipulate. */
-    Pixmap pixmap;		/* Pixmap to use for window's
-				 * background. */
+Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to manipulate. */
+    Pixmap pixmap)		/* Pixmap to use for window's background. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -2070,10 +2052,9 @@ Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap(tkwin, pixmap)
 }
 
 void
-Tk_SetWindowBorder(tkwin, pixel)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to manipulate. */
-    unsigned long pixel;	/* Pixel value to use for
-				 * window's border. */
+Tk_SetWindowBorder(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to manipulate. */
+    unsigned long pixel)	/* Pixel value to use for window's border. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -2088,10 +2069,9 @@ Tk_SetWindowBorder(tkwin, pixel)
 }
 
 void
-Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap(tkwin, pixmap)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to manipulate. */
-    Pixmap pixmap;		/* Pixmap to use for window's
-				 * border. */
+Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to manipulate. */
+    Pixmap pixmap)		/* Pixmap to use for window's border. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -2107,9 +2087,9 @@ Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap(tkwin, pixmap)
 }
 
 void
-Tk_DefineCursor(tkwin, cursor)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to manipulate. */
-    Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Cursor to use for window (may be None). */
+Tk_DefineCursor(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to manipulate. */
+    Tk_Cursor cursor)		/* Cursor to use for window (may be None). */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -2127,16 +2107,16 @@ Tk_DefineCursor(tkwin, cursor)
 }
 
 void
-Tk_UndefineCursor(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to manipulate. */
+Tk_UndefineCursor(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window to manipulate. */
 {
     Tk_DefineCursor(tkwin, None);
 }
 
 void
-Tk_SetWindowColormap(tkwin, colormap)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to manipulate. */
-    Colormap colormap;		/* Colormap to use for window. */
+Tk_SetWindowColormap(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to manipulate. */
+    Colormap colormap)		/* Colormap to use for window. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -2158,14 +2138,14 @@ Tk_SetWindowColormap(tkwin, colormap)
  *
  * Tk_SetWindowVisual --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to specify a visual to be used
- *	for a Tk window when it is created.  This procedure, if
- *	called at all, must be called before the X window is created
- *	(i.e. before Tk_MakeWindowExist is called).
+ *	This function is called to specify a visual to be used for a Tk window
+ *	when it is created. This function, if called at all, must be called
+ *	before the X window is created (i.e. before Tk_MakeWindowExist is
+ *	called).
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if successful, or 0 if the X window has
- *	been already created.
+ *	The return value is 1 if successful, or 0 if the X window has been
+ *	already created.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The information given is stored for when the window is created.
@@ -2174,15 +2154,15 @@ Tk_SetWindowColormap(tkwin, colormap)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_SetWindowVisual(tkwin, visual, depth, colormap)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to manipulate. */
-    Visual *visual;		/* New visual for window. */
-    int depth;			/* New depth for window. */
-    Colormap colormap;		/* An appropriate colormap for the visual. */
+Tk_SetWindowVisual(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to manipulate. */
+    Visual *visual,		/* New visual for window. */
+    int depth,			/* New depth for window. */
+    Colormap colormap)		/* An appropriate colormap for the visual. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
-    if( winPtr->window != None ){
+    if (winPtr->window != None) {
 	/* Too late! */
 	return 0;
     }
@@ -2209,8 +2189,8 @@ Tk_SetWindowVisual(tkwin, visual, depth, colormap)
  *
  * TkDoConfigureNotify --
  *
- *	Generate a ConfigureNotify event describing the current
- *	configuration of a window.
+ *	Generate a ConfigureNotify event describing the current configuration
+ *	of a window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2222,9 +2202,9 @@ Tk_SetWindowVisual(tkwin, visual, depth, colormap)
  */
 
 void
-TkDoConfigureNotify(winPtr)
-    register TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window whose configuration
-					 * was just changed. */
+TkDoConfigureNotify(
+    register TkWindow *winPtr)	/* Window whose configuration was just
+				 * changed. */
 {
     XEvent event;
 
@@ -2253,22 +2233,21 @@ TkDoConfigureNotify(winPtr)
  *
  * Tk_SetClass --
  *
- *	This procedure is used to give a window a class.
+ *	This function is used to give a window a class.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new class is stored for tkwin, replacing any existing
- *	class for it.
+ *	A new class is stored for tkwin, replacing any existing class for it.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_SetClass(tkwin, className)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window to assign class. */
-    CONST char *className;	/* New class for tkwin. */
+Tk_SetClass(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window to assign class. */
+    CONST char *className)	/* New class for tkwin. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -2284,24 +2263,24 @@ Tk_SetClass(tkwin, className)
  *
  * Tk_SetClassProcs --
  *
- *	This procedure is used to set the class procedures and
- *	instance data for a window.
+ *	This function is used to set the class functions and instance data for
+ *	a window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new set of class procedures and instance data is stored
- *	for tkwin, replacing any existing values.
+ *	A new set of class functions and instance data is stored for tkwin,
+ *	replacing any existing values.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_SetClassProcs(tkwin, procs, instanceData)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window to modify. */
-    Tk_ClassProcs *procs;	/* Class procs structure. */
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Data to be passed to class procedures. */
+Tk_SetClassProcs(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window to modify. */
+    Tk_ClassProcs *procs,	/* Class procs structure. */
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Data to be passed to class functions. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -2314,14 +2293,14 @@ Tk_SetClassProcs(tkwin, procs, instanceData)
  *
  * Tk_NameToWindow --
  *
- *	Given a string name for a window, this procedure
- *	returns the token for the window, if there exists a
- *	window corresponding to the given name.
+ *	Given a string name for a window, this function returns the token for
+ *	the window, if there exists a window corresponding to the given name.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return result is either a token for the window corresponding
- *	to "name", or else NULL to indicate that there is no such
- *	window.  In this case, an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	The return result is either a token for the window corresponding to
+ *	"name", or else NULL to indicate that there is no such window. In this
+ *	case, an error message is left in the interp's result, unless interp
+ *      is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2330,28 +2309,33 @@ Tk_SetClassProcs(tkwin, procs, instanceData)
  */
 
 Tk_Window
-Tk_NameToWindow(interp, pathName, tkwin)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Where to report errors. */
-    CONST char *pathName;	/* Path name of window. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window:  name is assumed to
-				 * belong to the same main window as tkwin. */
+Tk_NameToWindow(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Where to report errors. */
+    CONST char *pathName,	/* Path name of window. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for window: name is assumed to belong
+				 * to the same main window as tkwin. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	/*
 	 * Either we're not really in Tk, or the main window was destroyed and
-	 * we're on our way out of the application
+	 * we're on our way out of the application.
 	 */
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "NULL main window", (char *)NULL);
+
+	if (interp != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "NULL main window", NULL);
+	}
 	return NULL;
     }
 
     hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->nameTable,
 	    pathName);
     if (hPtr == NULL) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad window path name \"",
-		pathName, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+	if (interp != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad window path name \"",
+		    pathName, "\"", NULL);
+	}
 	return NULL;
     }
     return (Tk_Window) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
@@ -2362,14 +2346,13 @@ Tk_NameToWindow(interp, pathName, tkwin)
  *
  * Tk_IdToWindow --
  *
- *	Given an X display and window ID, this procedure returns the
- *	Tk token for the window, if there exists a Tk window corresponding
- *	to the given ID.
+ *	Given an X display and window ID, this function returns the Tk token
+ *	for the window, if there exists a Tk window corresponding to the given
+ *	ID.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return result is either a token for the window corresponding
- *	to the given X id, or else NULL to indicate that there is no such
- *	window.
+ *	The return result is either a token for the window corresponding to
+ *	the given X id, or else NULL to indicate that there is no such window.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2378,9 +2361,9 @@ Tk_NameToWindow(interp, pathName, tkwin)
  */
 
 Tk_Window
-Tk_IdToWindow(display, window)
-    Display *display;		/* X display containing the window. */
-    Window window;		/* X window window id. */
+Tk_IdToWindow(
+    Display *display,		/* X display containing the window. */
+    Window window)		/* X window window id. */
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
@@ -2409,8 +2392,8 @@ Tk_IdToWindow(display, window)
  *	Return the textual name of a window's display.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the string name of the display associated
- *	with tkwin.
+ *	The return value is the string name of the display associated with
+ *	tkwin.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2419,8 +2402,8 @@ Tk_IdToWindow(display, window)
  */
 
 CONST char *
-Tk_DisplayName(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window whose display name is desired. */
+Tk_DisplayName(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window whose display name is desired. */
 {
     return ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr->name;
 }
@@ -2428,10 +2411,35 @@ Tk_DisplayName(tkwin)
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
+ * Tk_Interp --
+ *
+ *	Get the Tcl interpreter from a Tk window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A pointer to the interpreter or NULL.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+Tcl_Interp *
+Tk_Interp(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)
+{
+    if (tkwin != NULL && ((TkWindow *)tkwin)->mainPtr != NULL) {
+	return ((TkWindow *)tkwin)->mainPtr->interp;
+    }
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * UnlinkWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure removes a window from the childList of its
- *	parent.
+ *	This function removes a window from the childList of its parent.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2443,8 +2451,8 @@ Tk_DisplayName(tkwin)
  */
 
 static void
-UnlinkWindow(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;			/* Child window to be unlinked. */
+UnlinkWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Child window to be unlinked. */
 {
     TkWindow *prevPtr;
 
@@ -2461,7 +2469,7 @@ UnlinkWindow(winPtr)
 	while (prevPtr->nextPtr != winPtr) {
 	    prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr;
 	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
-		panic("UnlinkWindow couldn't find child in parent");
+		Tcl_Panic("UnlinkWindow couldn't find child in parent");
 	    }
 	}
 	prevPtr->nextPtr = winPtr->nextPtr;
@@ -2479,9 +2487,8 @@ UnlinkWindow(winPtr)
  *	Change a window's position in the stacking order.
  *
  * Results:
- *	TCL_OK is normally returned.  If other is not a descendant
- *	of tkwin's parent then TCL_ERROR is returned and tkwin is
- *	not repositioned.
+ *	TCL_OK is normally returned. If other is not a descendant of tkwin's
+ *	parent then TCL_ERROR is returned and tkwin is not repositioned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Tkwin is repositioned in the stacking order.
@@ -2490,23 +2497,23 @@ UnlinkWindow(winPtr)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_RestackWindow(tkwin, aboveBelow, other)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window whose position in
-				 * the stacking order is to change. */
-    int aboveBelow;		/* Indicates new position of tkwin relative
-				 * to other;  must be Above or Below. */
-    Tk_Window other;		/* Tkwin will be moved to a position that
-				 * puts it just above or below this window.
-				 * If NULL then tkwin goes above or below
-				 * all windows in the same parent. */
+Tk_RestackWindow(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window whose position in the
+				 * stacking order is to change. */
+    int aboveBelow,		/* Indicates new position of tkwin relative to
+				 * other; must be Above or Below. */
+    Tk_Window other)		/* Tkwin will be moved to a position that puts
+				 * it just above or below this window. If NULL
+				 * then tkwin goes above or below all windows
+				 * in the same parent. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     TkWindow *otherPtr = (TkWindow *) other;
 
     /*
-     * Special case:  if winPtr is a top-level window then just find
-     * the top-level ancestor of otherPtr and restack winPtr above
-     * otherPtr without changing any of Tk's childLists.
+     * Special case: if winPtr is a top-level window then just find the
+     * top-level ancestor of otherPtr and restack winPtr above otherPtr
+     * without changing any of Tk's childLists.
      */
 
     if (winPtr->flags & TK_WIN_MANAGED) {
@@ -2523,7 +2530,7 @@ Tk_RestackWindow(tkwin, aboveBelow, other)
 
     if (winPtr->parentPtr == NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * Window is going to be deleted shortly;  don't do anything.
+	 * Window is going to be deleted shortly; don't do anything.
 	 */
 
 	return TCL_OK;
@@ -2573,10 +2580,9 @@ Tk_RestackWindow(tkwin, aboveBelow, other)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Notify the X server of the change.  If winPtr hasn't yet been
-     * created then there's no need to tell the X server now, since
-     * the stacking order will be handled properly when the window
-     * is finally created.
+     * Notify the X server of the change. If winPtr hasn't yet been created
+     * then there's no need to tell the X server now, since the stacking order
+     * will be handled properly when the window is finally created.
      */
 
     if (winPtr->window != None) {
@@ -2608,9 +2614,9 @@ Tk_RestackWindow(tkwin, aboveBelow, other)
  *	Returns the main window for an application.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If interp has a Tk application associated with it, the main
- *	window for the application is returned.  Otherwise NULL is
- *	returned and an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	If interp has a Tk application associated with it, the main window for
+ *	the application is returned. Otherwise NULL is returned and an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2619,10 +2625,9 @@ Tk_RestackWindow(tkwin, aboveBelow, other)
  */
 
 Tk_Window
-Tk_MainWindow(interp)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter that embodies the
-					 * application.  Used for error
-					 * reporting also. */
+Tk_MainWindow(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Interpreter that embodies the application.
+				 * Used for error reporting also. */
 {
     TkMainInfo *mainPtr;
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr;
@@ -2653,14 +2658,14 @@ Tk_MainWindow(interp)
  *
  * Tk_StrictMotif --
  *
- *	Indicates whether strict Motif compliance has been specified
- *	for the given window.
+ *	Indicates whether strict Motif compliance has been specified for the
+ *	given window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if strict Motif compliance has been
- *	requested for tkwin's application by setting the tk_strictMotif
- *	variable in its interpreter to a true value.  0 is returned
- *	if tk_strictMotif has a false value.
+ *	The return value is 1 if strict Motif compliance has been requested
+ *	for tkwin's application by setting the tk_strictMotif variable in its
+ *	interpreter to a true value. 0 is returned if tk_strictMotif has a
+ *	false value.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2669,9 +2674,9 @@ Tk_MainWindow(interp)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_StrictMotif(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window whose application is
-					 * to be checked. */
+Tk_StrictMotif(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window whose application is to be
+				 * checked. */
 {
     return ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->strictMotif;
 }
@@ -2681,8 +2686,8 @@ Tk_StrictMotif(tkwin)
  *
  * Tk_GetNumMainWindows --
  *
- *	This procedure returns the number of main windows currently
- *	open in this process.
+ *	This function returns the number of main windows currently open in
+ *	this process.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The number of main windows open in this process.
@@ -2694,7 +2699,7 @@ Tk_StrictMotif(tkwin)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetNumMainWindows()
+Tk_GetNumMainWindows(void)
 {
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr;
 
@@ -2705,7 +2710,7 @@ Tk_GetNumMainWindows()
 #endif
 
     tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
-	Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     return tsdPtr->numMainWindows;
 }
@@ -2731,9 +2736,9 @@ Tk_GetNumMainWindows()
  */
 
 int
-TkpAlwaysShowSelection(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window whose application is
-					 * to be checked. */
+TkpAlwaysShowSelection(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window whose application is to be
+				 * checked. */
 {
     return ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->alwaysShowSelection;
 }
@@ -2743,11 +2748,10 @@ TkpAlwaysShowSelection(tkwin)
  *
  * DeleteWindowsExitProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked as an exit handler.  It deletes all
- *	of the main windows in the current thread. We really should
- *	be using a thread local exit handler to delete windows and a
- *	process exit handler to close the display but Tcl does
- *	not provide support for this usage.
+ *	This function is invoked as an exit handler. It deletes all of the
+ *	main windows in the current thread. We really should be using a thread
+ *	local exit handler to delete windows and a process exit handler to
+ *	close the display but Tcl does not provide support for this usage.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2759,30 +2763,32 @@ TkpAlwaysShowSelection(tkwin)
  */
 
 static void
-DeleteWindowsExitProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* tsdPtr when handler was created. */
+DeleteWindowsExitProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* tsdPtr when handler was created. */
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr, *nextPtr;
     Tcl_Interp *interp;
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) clientData;
 
+    if (tsdPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+
     /*
-     * Finish destroying any windows that are in a
-     * half-dead state. We must protect the interpreter
-     * while destroying the window, because of <Destroy>
-     * bindings which could destroy the interpreter
-     * while the window is being deleted. This would
-     * leave frames on the call stack pointing at
+     * Finish destroying any windows that are in a half-dead state. We must
+     * protect the interpreter while destroying the window, because of
+     * <Destroy> bindings which could destroy the interpreter while the window
+     * is being deleted. This would leave frames on the call stack pointing at
      * deleted memory, causing core dumps.
      */
 
     while (tsdPtr->halfdeadWindowList != NULL) {
-        interp = tsdPtr->halfdeadWindowList->winPtr->mainPtr->interp;
-        Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
-        tsdPtr->halfdeadWindowList->flags |= HD_CLEANUP;
-        tsdPtr->halfdeadWindowList->winPtr->flags &= ~TK_ALREADY_DEAD;
-        Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) tsdPtr->halfdeadWindowList->winPtr);
-        Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+	interp = tsdPtr->halfdeadWindowList->winPtr->mainPtr->interp;
+	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
+	tsdPtr->halfdeadWindowList->flags |= HD_CLEANUP;
+	tsdPtr->halfdeadWindowList->winPtr->flags &= ~TK_ALREADY_DEAD;
+	Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) tsdPtr->halfdeadWindowList->winPtr);
+	Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
     }
 
     /*
@@ -2790,36 +2796,34 @@ DeleteWindowsExitProc(clientData)
      */
 
     while (tsdPtr->mainWindowList != NULL) {
-        interp = tsdPtr->mainWindowList->interp;
-        Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
-        Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) tsdPtr->mainWindowList->winPtr);
-        Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+	interp = tsdPtr->mainWindowList->interp;
+	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
+	Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) tsdPtr->mainWindowList->winPtr);
+	Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Iterate destroying the displays until no more displays remain.
-     * It is possible for displays to get recreated during exit by any
-     * code that calls GetScreen, so we must destroy these new displays
-     * as well as the old ones.
+     * Iterate destroying the displays until no more displays remain. It is
+     * possible for displays to get recreated during exit by any code that
+     * calls GetScreen, so we must destroy these new displays as well as the
+     * old ones.
      */
 
-    for (dispPtr = tsdPtr->displayList;
-         dispPtr != NULL;
-         dispPtr = tsdPtr->displayList) {
-        /*
-         * Now iterate over the current list of open displays, and first
-         * set the global pointer to NULL so we will be able to notice if
-         * any new displays got created during deletion of the current set.
-         * We must also do this to ensure that Tk_IdToWindow does not find
-         * the old display as it is being destroyed, when it wants to see
-         * if it needs to dispatch a message.
-         */
-
-        for (tsdPtr->displayList = NULL; dispPtr != NULL;
-                dispPtr = nextPtr) {
-            nextPtr = dispPtr->nextPtr;
-            TkCloseDisplay(dispPtr);
-        }
+    for (dispPtr = tsdPtr->displayList; dispPtr != NULL;
+	    dispPtr = tsdPtr->displayList) {
+	/*
+	 * Now iterate over the current list of open displays, and first set
+	 * the global pointer to NULL so we will be able to notice if any new
+	 * displays got created during deletion of the current set. We must
+	 * also do this to ensure that Tk_IdToWindow does not find the old
+	 * display as it is being destroyed, when it wants to see if it needs
+	 * to dispatch a message.
+	 */
+
+	for (tsdPtr->displayList = NULL; dispPtr != NULL; dispPtr = nextPtr) {
+	    nextPtr = dispPtr->nextPtr;
+	    TkCloseDisplay(dispPtr);
+	}
     }
 
     tsdPtr->numMainWindows = 0;
@@ -2877,18 +2881,17 @@ TkCygwinMainEx(argc, argv, appInitProc, interp)
  *
  * Tk_Init --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to add Tk to an interpreter.  It
- *	incorporates all of Tk's commands into the interpreter and
- *	creates the main window for a new Tk application.  If the
- *	interpreter contains a variable "argv", this procedure
- *	extracts several arguments from that variable, uses them
- *	to configure the main window, and modifies argv to exclude
- *	the arguments (see the "wish" documentation for a list of
- *	the arguments that are extracted).
+ *	This function is invoked to add Tk to an interpreter. It incorporates
+ *	all of Tk's commands into the interpreter and creates the main window
+ *	for a new Tk application. If the interpreter contains a variable
+ *	"argv", this function extracts several arguments from that variable,
+ *	uses them to configure the main window, and modifies argv to exclude
+ *	the arguments (see the "wish" documentation for a list of the
+ *	arguments that are extracted).
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl completion code and sets the interp's result
- *	if there is an error.
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl completion code and sets the interp's result if
+ *	there is an error.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Depends on various initialization scripts that get invoked.
@@ -2897,8 +2900,8 @@ TkCygwinMainEx(argc, argv, appInitProc, interp)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_Init(interp)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to initialize. */
+Tk_Init(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Interpreter to initialize. */
 {
 #if defined(__WIN32__) && !defined(__WIN64__)
     if (tkcygwindll) {
@@ -2918,12 +2921,12 @@ Tk_Init(interp)
  *
  * Tk_SafeInit --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to add Tk to a safe interpreter. It
- *	invokes the internal procedure that does the real work.
+ *	This function is invoked to add Tk to a safe interpreter. It invokes
+ *	the internal function that does the real work.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl completion code and sets the interp's result
- *	if there is an error.
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl completion code and sets the interp's result if
+ *	there is an error.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Depends on various initialization scripts that are invoked.
@@ -2932,44 +2935,45 @@ Tk_Init(interp)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_SafeInit(interp)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to initialize. */
+Tk_SafeInit(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Interpreter to initialize. */
 {
     /*
-     * Initialize the interpreter with Tk, safely. This removes
-     * all the Tk commands that are unsafe.
+     * Initialize the interpreter with Tk, safely. This removes all the Tk
+     * commands that are unsafe.
      *
      * Rationale:
      *
-     * - Toplevel and menu are unsafe because they can be used to cover
-     *   the entire screen and to steal input from the user.
+     * - Toplevel and menu are unsafe because they can be used to cover the
+     *   entire screen and to steal input from the user.
      * - Continuous ringing of the bell is a nuisance.
-     * - Cannot allow access to the clipboard because a malicious script
-     *   can replace the contents with the string "rm -r *" and lead to
-     *   surprises when the contents of the clipboard are pasted. Similarly,
-     *   the selection command is blocked.
-     * - Cannot allow send because it can be used to cause unsafe
-     *   interpreters to execute commands. The tk command recreates the
-     *   send command, so that too must be hidden.
-     * - Focus can be used to grab the focus away from another window,
-     *   in effect stealing user input. Cannot allow that.
-     *   NOTE: We currently do *not* hide focus as it would make it
-     *   impossible to provide keyboard input to Tk in a safe interpreter.
-     * - Grab can be used to block the user from using any other apps
-     *   on the screen.
+     * - Cannot allow access to the clipboard because a malicious script can
+     *   replace the contents with the string "rm -r *" and lead to surprises
+     *   when the contents of the clipboard are pasted. Similarly, the
+     *   selection command is blocked.
+     * - Cannot allow send because it can be used to cause unsafe interpreters
+     *   to execute commands. The tk command recreates the send command, so
+     *   that too must be hidden.
+     * - Focus can be used to grab the focus away from another window, in
+     *   effect stealing user input. Cannot allow that.
+     *   NOTE: We currently do *not* hide focus as it would make it impossible
+     *   to provide keyboard input to Tk in a safe interpreter.
+     * - Grab can be used to block the user from using any other apps on the
+     *   screen.
      * - Tkwait can block the containing process forever. Use bindings,
      *   fileevents and split the protocol into before-the-wait and
      *   after-the-wait parts. More work but necessary.
-     * - Wm is unsafe because (if toplevels are allowed, in the future)
-     *   it can be used to remove decorations, move windows around, cover
-     *   the entire screen etc etc.
+     * - Wm is unsafe because (if toplevels are allowed, in the future) it can
+     *   be used to remove decorations, move windows around, cover the entire
+     *   screen etc etc.
      *
      * Current risks:
      *
      * - No CPU time limit, no memory allocation limits, no color limits.
+     *   CPU time limits can be imposed by an unsafe master interpreter.
      *
-     *  The actual code called is the same as Tk_Init but Tcl_IsSafe()
-     *  is checked at several places to differentiate the two initialisations.
+     * The actual code called is the same as Tk_Init but Tcl_IsSafe() is
+     * checked at several places to differentiate the two initialisations.
      */
 
 #if defined(__WIN32__) && !defined(__WIN64__)
@@ -2985,7 +2989,6 @@ Tk_SafeInit(interp)
     return Initialize(interp);
 }
 
-
 extern TkStubs tkStubs;
 
 /*
@@ -2993,6 +2996,7 @@ extern TkStubs tkStubs;
  *
  * Initialize --
  *
+ *	???TODO???
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result. Also leaves an error message in the interp's
@@ -3005,8 +3009,8 @@ extern TkStubs tkStubs;
  */
 
 static int
-Initialize(interp)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to initialize. */
+Initialize(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Interpreter to initialize. */
 {
     char *p;
     int argc, code;
@@ -3017,20 +3021,21 @@ Initialize(interp)
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Ensure that we are getting the matching version of Tcl.
+     * Ensure that we are getting a compatible version of Tcl.
      */
 
-    if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, TCL_VERSION, 1) == NULL) {
-        return TCL_ERROR;
+    if (Tcl_InitStubs(interp, "8.5.0", 0) == NULL) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
      * Ensure that our obj-types are registered with the Tcl runtime.
      */
+
     TkRegisterObjTypes();
 
     tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
-	Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
      * Start by initializing all the static variables to default acceptable
@@ -3052,27 +3057,30 @@ Initialize(interp)
     /*
      * We start by resetting the result because it might not be clean
      */
+
     Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 
     if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
 	/*
-	 * Get the clearance to start Tk and the "argv" parameters
-	 * from the master.
+	 * Get the clearance to start Tk and the "argv" parameters from the
+	 * master.
 	 */
+
 	Tcl_DString ds;
 
 	/*
-	 * Step 1 : find the master and construct the interp name
-	 * (could be a function if new APIs were ok).
-	 * We could also construct the path while walking, but there
-	 * is no API to get the name of an interp either.
+	 * Step 1 : find the master and construct the interp name (could be a
+	 * function if new APIs were ok). We could also construct the path
+	 * while walking, but there is no API to get the name of an interp
+	 * either.
 	 */
+
 	Tcl_Interp *master = interp;
 
 	while (1) {
 	    master = Tcl_GetMaster(master);
 	    if (master == NULL) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "NULL master", (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "NULL master", NULL);
 		code = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
@@ -3081,59 +3089,65 @@ Initialize(interp)
 		break;
 	    }
 	}
+
 	/*
 	 * Construct the name (rewalk...)
 	 */
-	if ((code = Tcl_GetInterpPath(master, interp)) != TCL_OK) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error in Tcl_GetInterpPath",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+
+	code = Tcl_GetInterpPath(master, interp);
+	if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error in Tcl_GetInterpPath", NULL);
 	    goto done;
 	}
+
 	/*
 	 * Build the string to eval.
 	 */
+
 	Tcl_DStringInit(&ds);
 	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&ds, "::safe::TkInit");
 	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&ds, Tcl_GetStringResult(master));
 
 	/*
-	 * Step 2 : Eval in the master. The argument is the *reversed*
-	 * interp path of the slave.
+	 * Step 2 : Eval in the master. The argument is the *reversed* interp
+	 * path of the slave.
 	 */
 
-	if ((code = Tcl_Eval(master, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds))) != TCL_OK) {
+	code = Tcl_Eval(master, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds));
+	if (code != TCL_OK) {
 	    /*
-	     * We might want to transfer the error message or not.
-	     * We don't. (no API to do it and maybe security reasons).
+	     * We might want to transfer the error message or not. We don't.
+	     * (No API to do it and maybe security reasons).
 	     */
+
 	    Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-		    "not allowed to start Tk by master's safe::TkInit",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    "not allowed to start Tk by master's safe::TkInit", NULL);
 	    goto done;
 	}
 	Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
+
 	/*
-	 * Use the master's result as argv.
-	 * Note: We don't use the Obj interfaces to avoid dealing with
-	 * cross interp refcounting and changing the code below.
+	 * Use the master's result as argv. Note: We don't use the Obj
+	 * interfaces to avoid dealing with cross interp refcounting and
+	 * changing the code below.
 	 */
 
 	argString = Tcl_GetStringResult(master);
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * If there is an "argv" variable, get its value, extract out
-	 * relevant arguments from it, and rewrite the variable without
-	 * the arguments that we used.
+	 * If there is an "argv" variable, get its value, extract out relevant
+	 * arguments from it, and rewrite the variable without the arguments
+	 * that we used.
 	 */
 
-	argString = Tcl_GetVar2(interp, "argv", (char *) NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	argString = Tcl_GetVar2(interp, "argv", NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
     }
     if (argString != NULL) {
 	char buffer[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
 
 	if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, argString, &argc, &argv) != TCL_OK) {
-	    argError:
+	argError:
 	    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
 		    "\n    (processing arguments in argv variable)");
 	    code = TCL_ERROR;
@@ -3145,9 +3159,9 @@ Initialize(interp)
 	    goto argError;
 	}
 	p = Tcl_Merge(argc, argv);
-	Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "argv", (char *) NULL, p, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "argv", NULL, p, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
 	sprintf(buffer, "%d", argc);
-	Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "argc", (char *) NULL, buffer, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "argc", NULL, buffer, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
 	ckfree(p);
     }
 
@@ -3158,6 +3172,7 @@ Initialize(interp)
     Tcl_DStringInit(&class);
     if (name == NULL) {
 	int offset;
+
 	TkpGetAppName(interp, &class);
 	offset = Tcl_DStringLength(&class)+1;
 	Tcl_DStringSetLength(&class, offset);
@@ -3173,8 +3188,8 @@ Initialize(interp)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create an argument list for creating the top-level window,
-     * using the information parsed from argv, if any.
+     * Create an argument list for creating the top-level window, using the
+     * information parsed from argv, if any.
      */
 
     args[0] = "toplevel";
@@ -3188,9 +3203,9 @@ Initialize(interp)
 	argc += 2;
 
 	/*
-	 * If this is the first application for this process, save
-	 * the display name in the DISPLAY environment variable so
-	 * that it will be available to subprocesses created by us.
+	 * If this is the first application for this process, save the display
+	 * name in the DISPLAY environment variable so that it will be
+	 * available to subprocesses created by us.
 	 */
 
 	if (tsdPtr->numMainWindows == 0) {
@@ -3201,19 +3216,19 @@ Initialize(interp)
 	args[argc] = "-colormap";
 	args[argc+1] = colormap;
 	argc += 2;
-        colormap = NULL;
+	colormap = NULL;
     }
     if (use != NULL) {
 	args[argc] = "-use";
 	args[argc+1] = use;
 	argc += 2;
-        use = NULL;
+	use = NULL;
     }
     if (visual != NULL) {
 	args[argc] = "-visual";
 	args[argc+1] = visual;
 	argc += 2;
-        visual = NULL;
+	visual = NULL;
     }
     args[argc] = NULL;
     code = TkCreateFrame((ClientData) NULL, interp, argc, args, 1, name);
@@ -3228,58 +3243,153 @@ Initialize(interp)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Set the geometry of the main window, if requested.  Put the
-     * requested geometry into the "geometry" variable.
+     * Set the geometry of the main window, if requested. Put the requested
+     * geometry into the "geometry" variable.
      */
 
     if (geometry != NULL) {
 	Tcl_SetVar(interp, "geometry", geometry, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
-	code = Tcl_VarEval(interp, "wm geometry . ", geometry, (char *) NULL);
+	code = Tcl_VarEval(interp, "wm geometry . ", geometry, NULL);
 	if (code != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto done;
 	}
-        geometry = NULL;
+	geometry = NULL;
     }
 
     /*
      * Provide Tk and its stub table.
      */
 
-    code = Tcl_PkgProvideEx(interp, "Tk", TK_VERSION, (ClientData) &tkStubs);
+    code = Tcl_PkgProvideEx(interp, "Tk", TK_PATCH_LEVEL,
+	    (ClientData) &tkStubs);
     if (code != TCL_OK) {
 	goto done;
-    } else {
-	/*
-	 * If we were able to provide ourselves as a package, then set
-	 * the main loop procedure in Tcl to our main loop proc.  This
-	 * will cause tclsh to be event-aware when Tk is dynamically
-	 * loaded.  This will have no effect in wish, which already is
-	 * prepared to run the event loop.
-	 */
-
-	Tcl_SetMainLoop(Tk_MainLoop);
     }
 
+    /*
+     * If we were able to provide ourselves as a package, then set the main
+     * loop function in Tcl to our main loop proc. This will cause tclsh to be
+     * event-aware when Tk is dynamically loaded. This will have no effect in
+     * wish, which already is prepared to run the event loop.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_SetMainLoop(Tk_MainLoop);
+
 #undef Tk_InitStubs
 
     Tk_InitStubs(interp, TK_VERSION, 1);
 
     /*
-     * Invoke platform-specific initialization.
-     * Unlock mutex before entering TkpInit, as that may run through the
-     * Tk_Init routine again for the console window interpreter.
+     * Initialized the themed widget set
+     */
+
+    code = Ttk_Init(interp);
+    if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	goto done;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Invoke platform-specific initialization. Unlock mutex before entering
+     * TkpInit, as that may run through the Tk_Init routine again for the
+     * console window interpreter.
      */
 
     Tcl_MutexUnlock(&windowMutex);
     if (argv != NULL) {
 	ckfree((char *) argv);
     }
-    return TkpInit(interp);
+    code = TkpInit(interp);
+    if (code == TCL_OK) {
+
+	/*
+	 * In order to find tk.tcl during initialization, we evaluate the
+	 * following script.  It calls on the Tcl command [tcl_findLibrary]
+	 * to perform the search.  See the docs for that command for details
+	 * on where it looks.
+	 *
+	 * Note that this entire search mechanism can be bypassed by defining
+	 * an alternate [tkInit] command before calling Tk_Init().
+	 */
+
+	code = Tcl_Eval(interp,
+"if {[namespace which -command tkInit] eq \"\"} {\n\
+  proc tkInit {} {\n\
+    global tk_library tk_version tk_patchLevel\n\
+      rename tkInit {}\n\
+    tcl_findLibrary tk $tk_version $tk_patchLevel tk.tcl TK_LIBRARY tk_library\n\
+  }\n\
+}\n\
+tkInit");
+    }
+    if (code == TCL_OK) {
+	/*
+	 * Create exit handlers to delete all windows when the application or
+	 * thread exits. The handler need to be invoked before other platform
+	 * specific cleanups take place to avoid panics in finalization.
+	 */
+
+	TkCreateThreadExitHandler(DeleteWindowsExitProc, (ClientData) tsdPtr);
+    }
+    return code;
 
-    done:
+  done:
     Tcl_MutexUnlock(&windowMutex);
     if (argv != NULL) {
 	ckfree((char *) argv);
     }
     return code;
 }
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_PkgInitStubsCheck --
+ *
+ *	This is a replacement routine for Tk_InitStubs() that is called
+ *	from code where -DUSE_TK_STUBS has not been enabled.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the version of a conforming Tk stubs table, or NULL, if
+ *	the table version doesn't satisfy the requested requirements,
+ *	according to historical practice.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+CONST char *
+Tk_PkgInitStubsCheck(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    CONST char * version,
+    int exact)
+{
+    CONST char *actualVersion = Tcl_PkgRequire(interp, "Tk", version, 0);
+
+    if (exact && actualVersion) {
+	CONST char *p = version;
+	int count = 0;
+
+	while (*p) {
+	    count += !isdigit(UCHAR(*p++));
+	}
+	if (count == 1) {
+	    if (0 != strncmp(version, actualVersion, strlen(version))) {
+		/* Construct error message */
+		Tcl_PkgPresent(interp, "Tk", version, 1);
+		return NULL;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    return Tcl_PkgPresent(interp, "Tk", version, 1);
+	}
+    }
+    return actualVersion;
+}
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttk.decls b/generic/ttk/ttk.decls
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b2b50b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttk.decls
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+library 	ttk
+interface 	ttk
+epoch  		0
+scspec		TTKAPI
+
+declare 0 current {
+    Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name);
+}
+declare 1 current {
+    Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+}
+declare 2 current {
+    Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetCurrentTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+}
+declare 3 current {
+    Ttk_Theme Ttk_CreateTheme(
+	Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, Ttk_Theme parent);
+}
+declare 4 current {
+    void Ttk_RegisterCleanup(
+	Tcl_Interp *interp, void *deleteData, Ttk_CleanupProc *cleanupProc);
+}
+
+declare 5 current {
+    int Ttk_RegisterElementSpec(
+	Ttk_Theme theme,
+	const char *elementName,
+	Ttk_ElementSpec *elementSpec,
+	void *clientData);
+}
+
+declare 6 current {
+    Ttk_ElementClass *Ttk_RegisterElement(
+	Tcl_Interp *interp,
+	Ttk_Theme theme,
+	const char *elementName,
+	Ttk_ElementSpec *elementSpec,
+	void *clientData);
+}
+
+declare 7 current {
+    int Ttk_RegisterElementFactory(
+	Tcl_Interp *interp,
+	const char *name,
+	Ttk_ElementFactory factoryProc,
+	void *clientData);
+}
+
+declare 8 current {
+    void Ttk_RegisterLayout(
+	Ttk_Theme theme, const char *className, Ttk_LayoutSpec layoutSpec);
+}
+
+#
+# State maps.
+#
+declare 10 current {
+    int Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(
+    	Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_StateSpec *spec_rtn);
+}
+declare 11 current {
+    Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewStateSpecObj(
+    	unsigned int onbits, unsigned int offbits);
+}
+declare 12 current {
+    Ttk_StateMap Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj(
+    	Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+}
+declare 13 current {
+    Tcl_Obj *Ttk_StateMapLookup(
+	Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_StateMap map, Ttk_State state);
+}
+declare 14 current {
+    int Ttk_StateTableLookup(
+    	Ttk_StateTable map[], Ttk_State state);
+}
+
+
+#
+# Low-level geometry utilities.
+#
+declare 20 current {
+    int Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(
+    	Tcl_Interp *interp,
+	Tk_Window tkwin,
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+	Ttk_Padding *pad_rtn);
+}
+declare 21 current {
+    int Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(
+    	Tcl_Interp *interp,
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+	Ttk_Padding *pad_rtn);
+}
+declare 22 current {
+    int Ttk_GetStickyFromObj(
+    	Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_Sticky *sticky_rtn);
+}
+declare 23 current {
+    Ttk_Padding Ttk_MakePadding(
+    	short l, short t, short r, short b);
+}
+declare 24 current {
+    Ttk_Padding Ttk_UniformPadding(
+    	short borderWidth);
+}
+declare 25 current {
+    Ttk_Padding Ttk_AddPadding(Ttk_Padding pad1, Ttk_Padding pad2);
+}
+declare 26 current {
+    Ttk_Padding Ttk_RelievePadding(
+    	Ttk_Padding padding, int relief, int n);
+}
+declare 27 current {
+    Ttk_Box Ttk_MakeBox(int x, int y, int width, int height);
+}
+declare 28 current {
+    int Ttk_BoxContains(Ttk_Box box, int x, int y);
+}
+declare 29 current {
+    Ttk_Box Ttk_PackBox(Ttk_Box *cavity, int w, int h, Ttk_Side side);
+}
+declare 30 current {
+    Ttk_Box Ttk_StickBox(Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h, Ttk_Sticky sticky);
+}
+declare 31 current {
+    Ttk_Box Ttk_AnchorBox(Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h, Tk_Anchor anchor);
+}
+declare 32 current {
+    Ttk_Box Ttk_PadBox(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p);
+}
+declare 33 current {
+    Ttk_Box Ttk_ExpandBox(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p);
+}
+declare 34 current {
+    Ttk_Box Ttk_PlaceBox(
+	Ttk_Box *cavity, int w, int h, Ttk_Side side, Ttk_Sticky sticky);
+}
+declare 35 current {
+    Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewBoxObj(Ttk_Box box);
+}
+
+#
+# Utilities.
+#
+declare 40 current {
+    int Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *orient);
+}
+
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkBlink.c b/generic/ttk/ttkBlink.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7e46fac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkBlink.c
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright 2004, Joe English.
+ *
+ * Usage:
+ * 	TtkBlinkCursor(corePtr), usually called in a widget's Init hook,
+ * 	arranges to periodically toggle the corePtr->flags CURSOR_ON bit
+ * 	on and off (and schedule a redisplay) whenever the widget has focus.
+ *
+ * 	Note: Widgets may have additional logic to decide whether
+ * 	to display the cursor or not (e.g., readonly or disabled states);
+ * 	TtkBlinkCursor() does not account for this.
+ *
+ * TODO:
+ * 	Add script-level access to configure application-wide blink rate.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+#define DEF_CURSOR_ON_TIME	600		/* milliseconds */
+#define DEF_CURSOR_OFF_TIME	300		/* milliseconds */
+
+/* Interp-specific data for tracking cursors:
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore		*owner; 	/* Widget that currently has cursor */
+    Tcl_TimerToken	timer;		/* Blink timer */
+    int 		onTime;		/* #milliseconds to blink cursor on */
+    int 		offTime;	/* #milliseconds to blink cursor off */
+} CursorManager;
+
+/* CursorManagerDeleteProc --
+ * 	InterpDeleteProc for cursor manager.
+ */
+static void CursorManagerDeleteProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    CursorManager *cm = (CursorManager*)clientData;
+    if (cm->timer) {
+	Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(cm->timer);
+    }
+    ckfree(clientData);
+}
+
+/* GetCursorManager --
+ * 	Look up and create if necessary the interp's cursor manager.
+ */
+static CursorManager *GetCursorManager(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    static const char *cm_key = "ttk::CursorManager";
+    CursorManager *cm = (CursorManager *) Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, cm_key,0);
+
+    if (!cm) {
+	cm = (CursorManager*)ckalloc(sizeof(*cm));
+	cm->timer = 0;
+	cm->owner = 0;
+	cm->onTime = DEF_CURSOR_ON_TIME;
+	cm->offTime = DEF_CURSOR_OFF_TIME;
+	Tcl_SetAssocData(interp,cm_key,CursorManagerDeleteProc,(ClientData)cm);
+    }
+    return cm;
+}
+
+/* CursorBlinkProc --
+ *	Timer handler to blink the insert cursor on and off.
+ */
+static void
+CursorBlinkProc(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    CursorManager *cm = (CursorManager*)clientData;
+    int blinkTime;
+
+    if (cm->owner->flags & CURSOR_ON) {
+	cm->owner->flags &= ~CURSOR_ON;
+	blinkTime = cm->offTime;
+    } else {
+	cm->owner->flags |= CURSOR_ON;
+	blinkTime = cm->onTime;
+    }
+    cm->timer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(blinkTime, CursorBlinkProc, clientData);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(cm->owner);
+}
+
+/* LoseCursor --
+ * 	Turn cursor off, disable blink timer.
+ */
+static void LoseCursor(CursorManager *cm, WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    if (corePtr->flags & CURSOR_ON) {
+	corePtr->flags &= ~CURSOR_ON;
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+    }
+    if (cm->owner == corePtr) {
+	cm->owner = NULL;
+    }
+    if (cm->timer) {
+	Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(cm->timer);
+	cm->timer = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+/* ClaimCursor --
+ * 	Claim ownership of the insert cursor and blink on.
+ */
+static void ClaimCursor(CursorManager *cm, WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    if (cm->owner == corePtr)
+	return;
+    if (cm->owner)
+	LoseCursor(cm, cm->owner);
+
+    corePtr->flags |= CURSOR_ON;
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+
+    cm->owner = corePtr;
+    cm->timer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(cm->onTime, CursorBlinkProc, cm);
+}
+
+/*
+ * CursorEventProc --
+ * 	Event handler for FocusIn and FocusOut events;
+ * 	claim/lose ownership of the insert cursor when the widget
+ * 	acquires/loses keyboard focus.
+ */
+
+#define CursorEventMask (FocusChangeMask|StructureNotifyMask)
+#define RealFocusEvent(d) \
+    (d == NotifyInferior || d == NotifyAncestor || d == NotifyNonlinear)
+
+static void
+CursorEventProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = (WidgetCore *)clientData;
+    CursorManager *cm = GetCursorManager(corePtr->interp);
+
+    switch (eventPtr->type) {
+	case DestroyNotify:
+	    if (cm->owner == corePtr)
+		LoseCursor(cm, corePtr);
+	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(
+		corePtr->tkwin, CursorEventMask, CursorEventProc, clientData);
+	    break;
+	case FocusIn:
+	    if (RealFocusEvent(eventPtr->xfocus.detail))
+		ClaimCursor(cm, corePtr);
+	    break;
+	case FocusOut:
+	    if (RealFocusEvent(eventPtr->xfocus.detail))
+		LoseCursor(cm, corePtr);
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * TtkBlinkCursor (main routine) --
+ * 	Arrange to blink the cursor on and off whenever the
+ * 	widget has focus.
+ */
+void TtkBlinkCursor(WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(
+	corePtr->tkwin, CursorEventMask, CursorEventProc, corePtr);
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkButton.c b/generic/ttk/ttkButton.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2954184
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkButton.c
@@ -0,0 +1,853 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2003, Joe English
+ *
+ * label, button, checkbutton, radiobutton, and menubutton widgets.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/* Bit fields for OptionSpec mask field:
+ */
+#define STATE_CHANGED	 	(0x100)		/* -state option changed */
+#define DEFAULTSTATE_CHANGED	(0x200)		/* -default option changed */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Base resources for labels, buttons, checkbuttons, etc:
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    /*
+     * Text element resources:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *textObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *textVariableObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *underlineObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *widthObj;
+
+    Ttk_TraceHandle	*textVariableTrace;
+    Ttk_ImageSpec	*imageSpec;
+
+    /*
+     * Image element resources:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *imageObj;
+
+    /*
+     * Compound label/image resources:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *compoundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *paddingObj;
+
+    /*
+     * Compatibility/legacy options:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *stateObj;
+
+} BasePart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore	core;
+    BasePart	base;
+} Base;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec BaseOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text", "",
+	Tk_Offset(Base,base.textObj), -1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable", "",
+	Tk_Offset(Base,base.textVariableObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline",
+	"-1", Tk_Offset(Base,base.underlineObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    /* SB: OPTION_INT, see <<NOTE-NULLOPTIONS>> */
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Base,base.widthObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    /*
+     * Image options
+     */
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image", NULL/*default*/,
+	Tk_Offset(Base,base.imageObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    /*
+     * Compound base/image options
+     */
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound",
+	 "none", Tk_Offset(Base,base.compoundObj), -1,
+	 0,(ClientData)ttkCompoundStrings,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-padding", "padding", "Pad",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Base,base.paddingObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+
+    /*
+     * Compatibility/legacy options
+     */
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-state", "state", "State",
+	 "normal", Tk_Offset(Base,base.stateObj), -1,
+	 0,0,STATE_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(ttkCoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*
+ * Variable trace procedure for -textvariable option:
+ */
+static void TextVariableChanged(void *clientData, const char *value)
+{
+    Base *basePtr = clientData;
+    Tcl_Obj *newText;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(&basePtr->core)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    newText = value ? Tcl_NewStringObj(value, -1) : Tcl_NewStringObj("", 0);
+
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(newText);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(basePtr->base.textObj);
+    basePtr->base.textObj = newText;
+
+    TtkResizeWidget(&basePtr->core);
+}
+
+static void
+BaseInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Base *basePtr = recordPtr;
+    basePtr->base.textVariableTrace = 0;
+    basePtr->base.imageSpec = NULL;
+}
+
+static void
+BaseCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Base *basePtr = recordPtr;
+    if (basePtr->base.textVariableTrace)
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(basePtr->base.textVariableTrace);
+    if (basePtr->base.imageSpec)
+    	TtkFreeImageSpec(basePtr->base.imageSpec);
+}
+
+static int BaseConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Base *basePtr = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *textVarName = basePtr->base.textVariableObj;
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *vt = 0;
+    Ttk_ImageSpec *imageSpec = NULL;
+
+    if (textVarName != NULL && *Tcl_GetString(textVarName) != '\0') {
+	vt = Ttk_TraceVariable(interp,textVarName,TextVariableChanged,basePtr);
+	if (!vt) return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (basePtr->base.imageObj) {
+	imageSpec = TtkGetImageSpec(
+	    interp, basePtr->core.tkwin, basePtr->base.imageObj);
+	if (!imageSpec) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (TtkCoreConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+error:
+	if (imageSpec) TtkFreeImageSpec(imageSpec);
+	if (vt) Ttk_UntraceVariable(vt);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (basePtr->base.textVariableTrace) {
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(basePtr->base.textVariableTrace);
+    }
+    basePtr->base.textVariableTrace = vt;
+
+    if (basePtr->base.imageSpec) {
+	TtkFreeImageSpec(basePtr->base.imageSpec);
+    }
+    basePtr->base.imageSpec = imageSpec;
+
+    if (mask & STATE_CHANGED) {
+	TtkCheckStateOption(&basePtr->core, basePtr->base.stateObj);
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int
+BasePostConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Base *basePtr = recordPtr;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (basePtr->base.textVariableTrace) {
+	status = Ttk_FireTrace(basePtr->base.textVariableTrace);
+    }
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Label widget.
+ * Just a base widget that adds a few appearance-related options
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *foregroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *fontObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *anchorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *justifyObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *wrapLengthObj;
+} LabelPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore	core;
+    BasePart	base;
+    LabelPart	label;
+} Label;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec LabelOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "frameColor", "FrameColor",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label,label.backgroundObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "textColor", "TextColor",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label,label.foregroundObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label,label.fontObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label,label.borderWidthObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label,label.reliefObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label,label.anchorObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label, label.justifyObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label, label.wrapLengthObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED /*SB: SIZE_CHANGED*/ },
+
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_FALSE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(BaseOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble LabelCommands[] = {
+    { "configure",	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+static WidgetSpec LabelWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TLabel",			/* className */
+    sizeof(Label),		/* recordSize */
+    LabelOptionSpecs,		/* optionSpecs */
+    LabelCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    BaseInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    BaseCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    BaseConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    BasePostConfigure,		/* postConfigureProc */
+    TtkWidgetGetLayout, 	/* getLayoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    TtkWidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(LabelLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Label.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_BORDER,
+	TTK_GROUP("Label.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_BORDER,
+	    TTK_NODE("Label.label", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Button widget.
+ * Adds a new subcommand "invoke", and options "-command" and "-default"
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *commandObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *defaultStateObj;
+} ButtonPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore	core;
+    BasePart	base;
+    ButtonPart	button;
+} Button;
+
+/*
+ * Option specifications:
+ */
+static Tk_OptionSpec ButtonOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Button, button.commandObj), -1, 0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-default", "default", "Default",
+	"normal", Tk_Offset(Button, button.defaultStateObj), -1,
+	0, (ClientData) ttkDefaultStrings, DEFAULTSTATE_CHANGED},
+
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_TRUE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(BaseOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+static int ButtonConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Button *buttonPtr = recordPtr;
+
+    if (BaseConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Handle "-default" option:
+     */
+    if (mask & DEFAULTSTATE_CHANGED) {
+	int defaultState = TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED;
+	Ttk_GetButtonDefaultStateFromObj(
+	    NULL, buttonPtr->button.defaultStateObj, &defaultState);
+	if (defaultState == TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_ACTIVE) {
+	    TtkWidgetChangeState(&buttonPtr->core, TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE, 0);
+	} else {
+	    TtkWidgetChangeState(&buttonPtr->core, 0, TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE);
+	}
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $button invoke --
+ * 	Evaluate the button's -command.
+ */
+static int
+ButtonInvokeCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Button *buttonPtr = recordPtr;
+    if (objc > 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "invoke");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (buttonPtr->core.state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+    return Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, buttonPtr->button.commandObj, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+}
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble ButtonCommands[] = {
+    { "configure",	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "invoke",		ButtonInvokeCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+static WidgetSpec ButtonWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TButton",			/* className */
+    sizeof(Button),		/* recordSize */
+    ButtonOptionSpecs,		/* optionSpecs */
+    ButtonCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    BaseInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    BaseCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    ButtonConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    BasePostConfigure,		/* postConfigureProc */
+    TtkWidgetGetLayout,		/* getLayoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    TtkWidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(ButtonLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Button.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_BORDER,
+	TTK_GROUP("Button.focus", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_GROUP("Button.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	        TTK_NODE("Button.label", TTK_FILL_BOTH))))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Checkbutton widget.
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *variableObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *onValueObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *offValueObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *commandObj;
+
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *variableTrace;
+
+} CheckbuttonPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    BasePart base;
+    CheckbuttonPart checkbutton;
+} Checkbutton;
+
+/*
+ * Option specifications:
+ */
+static Tk_OptionSpec CheckbuttonOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Checkbutton, checkbutton.variableObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-onvalue", "onValue", "OnValue",
+	"1", Tk_Offset(Checkbutton, checkbutton.onValueObj), -1,
+	0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-offvalue", "offValue", "OffValue",
+	"0", Tk_Offset(Checkbutton, checkbutton.offValueObj), -1,
+	0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Checkbutton, checkbutton.commandObj), -1,
+	0,0,0},
+
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_TRUE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(BaseOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*
+ * Variable trace procedure for checkbutton -variable option
+ */
+static void CheckbuttonVariableChanged(void *clientData, const char *value)
+{
+    Checkbutton *checkPtr = clientData;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(&checkPtr->core)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (!value) {
+	TtkWidgetChangeState(&checkPtr->core, TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE, 0);
+	return;
+    }
+    /* else */
+    TtkWidgetChangeState(&checkPtr->core, 0, TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE);
+    if (!strcmp(value, Tcl_GetString(checkPtr->checkbutton.onValueObj))) {
+	TtkWidgetChangeState(&checkPtr->core, TTK_STATE_SELECTED, 0);
+    } else {
+	TtkWidgetChangeState(&checkPtr->core, 0, TTK_STATE_SELECTED);
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+CheckbuttonInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Checkbutton *checkPtr = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *variableObj;
+
+    /* default -variable is the widget name:
+     */
+    variableObj = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(checkPtr->core.tkwin), -1);
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(variableObj);
+    checkPtr->checkbutton.variableObj = variableObj;
+    BaseInitialize(interp, recordPtr);
+}
+
+static void
+CheckbuttonCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Checkbutton *checkPtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_UntraceVariable(checkPtr->checkbutton.variableTrace);
+    checkPtr->checkbutton.variableTrace = 0;
+    BaseCleanup(recordPtr);
+}
+
+static int
+CheckbuttonConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Checkbutton *checkPtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *vt = Ttk_TraceVariable(
+	interp, checkPtr->checkbutton.variableObj,
+	CheckbuttonVariableChanged, checkPtr);
+
+    if (!vt) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (BaseConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK){
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(vt);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_UntraceVariable(checkPtr->checkbutton.variableTrace);
+    checkPtr->checkbutton.variableTrace = vt;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int
+CheckbuttonPostConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Checkbutton *checkPtr = recordPtr;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (checkPtr->checkbutton.variableTrace)
+	status = Ttk_FireTrace(checkPtr->checkbutton.variableTrace);
+    if (status == TCL_OK && !WidgetDestroyed(&checkPtr->core))
+	status = BasePostConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask);
+    return status;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Checkbutton 'invoke' subcommand:
+ * 	Toggles the checkbutton state.
+ */
+static int
+CheckbuttonInvokeCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Checkbutton *checkPtr = recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &checkPtr->core;
+    Tcl_Obj *newValue;
+
+    if (objc > 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "invoke");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (corePtr->state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED)
+	return TCL_OK;
+
+    /*
+     * Toggle the selected state.
+     */
+    if (corePtr->state & TTK_STATE_SELECTED)
+	newValue = checkPtr->checkbutton.offValueObj;
+    else
+	newValue = checkPtr->checkbutton.onValueObj;
+
+    if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp,
+	    checkPtr->checkbutton.variableObj, NULL, newValue,
+	    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
+	== NULL)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(corePtr))
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    return Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp,
+	checkPtr->checkbutton.commandObj, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+}
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble CheckbuttonCommands[] = {
+    { "configure",	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "invoke",		CheckbuttonInvokeCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    /* MISSING: select, deselect, toggle */
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+static WidgetSpec CheckbuttonWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TCheckbutton",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Checkbutton),	/* recordSize */
+    CheckbuttonOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    CheckbuttonCommands,	/* subcommands */
+    CheckbuttonInitialize,	/* initializeProc */
+    CheckbuttonCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    CheckbuttonConfigure,	/* configureProc */
+    CheckbuttonPostConfigure,	/* postConfigureProc */
+    TtkWidgetGetLayout, 	/* getLayoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    TtkWidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(CheckbuttonLayout)
+     TTK_GROUP("Checkbutton.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	 TTK_NODE("Checkbutton.indicator", TTK_PACK_LEFT)
+	 TTK_GROUP("Checkbutton.focus", TTK_PACK_LEFT | TTK_STICK_W,
+	     TTK_NODE("Checkbutton.label", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Radiobutton widget.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *variableObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *valueObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *commandObj;
+
+    Ttk_TraceHandle	*variableTrace;
+
+} RadiobuttonPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    BasePart base;
+    RadiobuttonPart radiobutton;
+} Radiobutton;
+
+/*
+ * Option specifications:
+ */
+static Tk_OptionSpec RadiobuttonOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable",
+	"::selectedButton", Tk_Offset(Radiobutton, radiobutton.variableObj),-1,
+	0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-value", "Value", "Value",
+	"1", Tk_Offset(Radiobutton, radiobutton.valueObj), -1,
+	0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Radiobutton, radiobutton.commandObj), -1,
+	0,0,0},
+
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_TRUE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(BaseOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*
+ * Variable trace procedure for radiobuttons.
+ */
+static void
+RadiobuttonVariableChanged(void *clientData, const char *value)
+{
+    Radiobutton *radioPtr = clientData;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(&radioPtr->core)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (!value) {
+	TtkWidgetChangeState(&radioPtr->core, TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE, 0);
+	return;
+    }
+    /* else */
+    TtkWidgetChangeState(&radioPtr->core, 0, TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE);
+    if (!strcmp(value, Tcl_GetString(radioPtr->radiobutton.valueObj))) {
+	TtkWidgetChangeState(&radioPtr->core, TTK_STATE_SELECTED, 0);
+    } else {
+	TtkWidgetChangeState(&radioPtr->core, 0, TTK_STATE_SELECTED);
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+RadiobuttonCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Radiobutton *radioPtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_UntraceVariable(radioPtr->radiobutton.variableTrace);
+    radioPtr->radiobutton.variableTrace = 0;
+    BaseCleanup(recordPtr);
+}
+
+static int
+RadiobuttonConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Radiobutton *radioPtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *vt = Ttk_TraceVariable(
+	interp, radioPtr->radiobutton.variableObj,
+	RadiobuttonVariableChanged, radioPtr);
+
+    if (!vt) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (BaseConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(vt);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_UntraceVariable(radioPtr->radiobutton.variableTrace);
+    radioPtr->radiobutton.variableTrace = vt;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int
+RadiobuttonPostConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Radiobutton *radioPtr = recordPtr;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (radioPtr->radiobutton.variableTrace)
+	status = Ttk_FireTrace(radioPtr->radiobutton.variableTrace);
+    if (status == TCL_OK && !WidgetDestroyed(&radioPtr->core))
+	status = BasePostConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask);
+    return status;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Radiobutton 'invoke' subcommand:
+ * 	Sets the radiobutton -variable to the -value, evaluates the -command.
+ */
+static int
+RadiobuttonInvokeCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Radiobutton *radioPtr = recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &radioPtr->core;
+
+    if (objc > 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "invoke");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (corePtr->state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED)
+	return TCL_OK;
+
+    if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp,
+	    radioPtr->radiobutton.variableObj, NULL,
+	    radioPtr->radiobutton.valueObj,
+	    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
+	== NULL)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(corePtr))
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    return Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp,
+	radioPtr->radiobutton.commandObj, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+}
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble RadiobuttonCommands[] = {
+    { "configure",	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "invoke",		RadiobuttonInvokeCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    /* MISSING: select, deselect */
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+static WidgetSpec RadiobuttonWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TRadiobutton",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Radiobutton),	/* recordSize */
+    RadiobuttonOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    RadiobuttonCommands,	/* subcommands */
+    BaseInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    RadiobuttonCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    RadiobuttonConfigure,	/* configureProc */
+    RadiobuttonPostConfigure,	/* postConfigureProc */
+    TtkWidgetGetLayout, 	/* getLayoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    TtkWidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(RadiobuttonLayout)
+     TTK_GROUP("Radiobutton.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	 TTK_NODE("Radiobutton.indicator", TTK_PACK_LEFT)
+	 TTK_GROUP("Radiobutton.focus", TTK_PACK_LEFT,
+	     TTK_NODE("Radiobutton.label", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Menubutton widget.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *menuObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *directionObj;
+} MenubuttonPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    BasePart base;
+    MenubuttonPart menubutton;
+} Menubutton;
+
+/*
+ * Option specifications:
+ */
+static const char *const directionStrings[] = {
+    "above", "below", "left", "right", "flush", NULL
+};
+static Tk_OptionSpec MenubuttonOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-menu", "menu", "Menu",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Menubutton, menubutton.menuObj), -1, 0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-direction", "direction", "Direction",
+	"below", Tk_Offset(Menubutton, menubutton.directionObj), -1,
+	0,(ClientData)directionStrings,GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_TRUE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(BaseOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble MenubuttonCommands[] = {
+    { "configure",	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+static WidgetSpec MenubuttonWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TMenubutton",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Menubutton), 	/* recordSize */
+    MenubuttonOptionSpecs, 	/* optionSpecs */
+    MenubuttonCommands,  	/* subcommands */
+    BaseInitialize,     	/* initializeProc */
+    BaseCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    BaseConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    BasePostConfigure,  	/* postConfigureProc */
+    TtkWidgetGetLayout, 	/* getLayoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    TtkWidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(MenubuttonLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Menubutton.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_GROUP("Menubutton.focus", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_NODE("Menubutton.indicator", TTK_PACK_RIGHT)
+	    TTK_GROUP("Menubutton.padding", TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_EXPAND|TTK_FILL_X,
+	        TTK_NODE("Menubutton.label", TTK_PACK_LEFT))))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization.
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE
+void TtkButton_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme = Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TLabel", LabelLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TButton", ButtonLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TCheckbutton", CheckbuttonLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TRadiobutton", RadiobuttonLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TMenubutton", MenubuttonLayout);
+
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::label", &LabelWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::button", &ButtonWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::checkbutton", &CheckbuttonWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::radiobutton", &RadiobuttonWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::menubutton", &MenubuttonWidgetSpec);
+}
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkCache.c b/generic/ttk/ttkCache.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3aeaba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkCache.c
@@ -0,0 +1,350 @@
+/*
+ *      Theme engine resource cache.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * The problem:
+ *
+ * Tk maintains reference counts for fonts, colors, and images,
+ * and deallocates them when the reference count goes to zero.
+ * With the theme engine, resources are allocated right before
+ * drawing an element and released immediately after.
+ * This causes a severe performance penalty, and on PseudoColor
+ * visuals it causes colormap cycling as colormap entries are
+ * released and reused.
+ *
+ * Solution: Acquire fonts, colors, and objects from a
+ * resource cache instead of directly from Tk; the cache
+ * holds a semipermanent reference to the resource to keep
+ * it from being deallocated.
+ *
+ * The plumbing and control flow here is quite contorted;
+ * it would be better to address this problem in the core instead.
+ *
+ * @@@ BUGS/TODO: Need distinct caches for each combination
+ * of display, visual, and colormap.
+ *
+ * @@@ Colormap flashing on PseudoColor visuals is still possible,
+ * but this will be a transient effect.
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>	/* for sprintf */
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+struct Ttk_ResourceCache_ {
+    Tcl_Interp	  *interp;	/* Interpreter for error reporting */
+    Tk_Window	  tkwin;	/* Cache window. */
+    Tcl_HashTable fontTable;	/* Entries: Tcl_Obj* holding FontObjs */
+    Tcl_HashTable colorTable;	/* Entries: Tcl_Obj* holding ColorObjs */
+    Tcl_HashTable borderTable;	/* Entries: Tcl_Obj* holding BorderObjs */
+    Tcl_HashTable imageTable;	/* Entries: Tk_Images */
+
+    Tcl_HashTable namedColors;	/* Entries: RGB values as Tcl_StringObjs */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_CreateResourceCache --
+ * 	Initialize a new resource cache.
+ */
+Ttk_ResourceCache Ttk_CreateResourceCache(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache = (Ttk_ResourceCache)ckalloc(sizeof(*cache));
+
+    cache->tkwin = NULL;	/* initialized later */
+    cache->interp = interp;
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->fontTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->colorTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->borderTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->imageTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->namedColors, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    return cache;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_ClearCache --
+ * 	Release references to all cached resources.
+ */
+static void Ttk_ClearCache(Ttk_ResourceCache cache)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Free fonts:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&cache->fontTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *fontObj = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	if (fontObj) {
+	    Tk_FreeFontFromObj(cache->tkwin, fontObj);
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(fontObj);
+	}
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->fontTable);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->fontTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    /*
+     * Free colors:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&cache->colorTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *colorObj = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	if (colorObj) {
+	    Tk_FreeColorFromObj(cache->tkwin, colorObj);
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(colorObj);
+	}
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->colorTable);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->colorTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    /*
+     * Free borders:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&cache->borderTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *borderObj = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	if (borderObj) {
+	    Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj(cache->tkwin, borderObj);
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(borderObj);
+	}
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->borderTable);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->borderTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    /*
+     * Free images:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&cache->imageTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tk_Image image = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	if (image) {
+	    Tk_FreeImage(image);
+	}
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->imageTable);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->imageTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_FreeResourceCache --
+ * 	Release references to all cached resources, delete the cache.
+ */
+
+void Ttk_FreeResourceCache(Ttk_ResourceCache cache)
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+
+    Ttk_ClearCache(cache);
+
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->colorTable);
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->fontTable);
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->imageTable);
+
+    /*
+     * Free named colors:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&cache->namedColors, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *colorNameObj = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(colorNameObj);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->namedColors);
+
+    ckfree((ClientData)cache);
+}
+
+/*
+ * CacheWinEventHandler --
+ * 	Detect when the cache window is destroyed, clear cache.
+ */
+static void CacheWinEventHandler(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache = clientData;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type != DestroyNotify) {
+	return;
+    }
+    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(cache->tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
+	    CacheWinEventHandler, clientData);
+    Ttk_ClearCache(cache);
+    cache->tkwin = NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ * InitCacheWindow --
+ * 	Specify the cache window if not already set.
+ * 	@@@ SHOULD: use separate caches for each combination
+ * 	@@@ of display, visual, and colormap.
+ */
+static void InitCacheWindow(Ttk_ResourceCache cache, Tk_Window tkwin)
+{
+    if (cache->tkwin == NULL) {
+	cache->tkwin = tkwin;
+	Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
+		CacheWinEventHandler, cache);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_RegisterNamedColor --
+ *	Specify an RGB triplet as a named color.
+ *	Overrides any previous named color specification.
+ */
+void Ttk_RegisterNamedColor(
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache,
+    const char *colorName,
+    XColor *colorPtr)
+{
+    int newEntry;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    char nameBuf[14];
+    Tcl_Obj *colorNameObj;
+
+    sprintf(nameBuf, "#%04X%04X%04X",
+    	colorPtr->red, colorPtr->green, colorPtr->blue);
+    colorNameObj = Tcl_NewStringObj(nameBuf, -1);
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(colorNameObj);
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&cache->namedColors, colorName, &newEntry);
+    if (!newEntry) {
+    	Tcl_Obj *oldColor = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(oldColor);
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, colorNameObj);
+}
+
+/*
+ * CheckNamedColor(objPtr) --
+ *	If objPtr is a registered color name, return a Tcl_Obj *
+ *	containing the registered color value specification.
+ *	Otherwise, return the input argument.
+ */
+static Tcl_Obj *CheckNamedColor(Ttk_ResourceCache cache, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr =
+    	Tcl_FindHashEntry(&cache->namedColors, Tcl_GetString(objPtr));
+    if (entryPtr) {	/* Use named color instead */
+    	objPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+    }
+    return objPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Template for allocation routines:
+ */
+typedef void *(*Allocator)(Tcl_Interp *, Tk_Window, Tcl_Obj *);
+
+static Tcl_Obj *Ttk_Use(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_HashTable *table,
+    Allocator allocate,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    int newEntry;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr =
+	Tcl_CreateHashEntry(table,Tcl_GetString(objPtr),&newEntry);
+    Tcl_Obj *cacheObj;
+
+    if (!newEntry) {
+	return Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    cacheObj = Tcl_DuplicateObj(objPtr);
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(cacheObj);
+
+    if (allocate(interp, tkwin, cacheObj)) {
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, cacheObj);
+	return cacheObj;
+    } else {
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(cacheObj);
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, NULL);
+	Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_UseFont --
+ * 	Acquire a font from the cache.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UseFont(Ttk_ResourceCache cache, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    InitCacheWindow(cache, tkwin);
+    return Ttk_Use(cache->interp,
+	&cache->fontTable,(Allocator)Tk_AllocFontFromObj, tkwin, objPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_UseColor --
+ * 	Acquire a color from the cache.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UseColor(Ttk_ResourceCache cache, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    objPtr = CheckNamedColor(cache, objPtr);
+    InitCacheWindow(cache, tkwin);
+    return Ttk_Use(cache->interp,
+	&cache->colorTable,(Allocator)Tk_AllocColorFromObj, tkwin, objPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_UseBorder --
+ * 	Acquire a Tk_3DBorder from the cache.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UseBorder(
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    objPtr = CheckNamedColor(cache, objPtr);
+    InitCacheWindow(cache, tkwin);
+    return Ttk_Use(cache->interp,
+	&cache->borderTable,(Allocator)Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj, tkwin, objPtr);
+}
+
+/* NullImageChanged --
+ * 	Tk_ImageChangedProc for Ttk_UseImage
+ */
+
+static void NullImageChanged(ClientData clientData,
+    int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight)
+{ /* No-op */ }
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_UseImage --
+ * 	Acquire a Tk_Image from the cache.
+ */
+Tk_Image Ttk_UseImage(Ttk_ResourceCache cache, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    const char *imageName = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+    int newEntry;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr =
+	Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&cache->imageTable,imageName,&newEntry);
+    Tk_Image image;
+
+    InitCacheWindow(cache, tkwin);
+
+    if (!newEntry) {
+	return Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    image = Tk_GetImage(cache->interp, tkwin, imageName, NullImageChanged,0);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, image);
+
+    if (!image) {
+	Tcl_BackgroundError(cache->interp);
+    }
+
+    return image;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkClamTheme.c b/generic/ttk/ttkClamTheme.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..572f630
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkClamTheme.c
@@ -0,0 +1,971 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2004 Joe English
+ *
+ * "clam" theme; inspired by the XFCE family of Gnome themes.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+/* 
+ * Under windows, the Tk-provided XDrawLine and XDrawArc have an 
+ * off-by-one error in the end point. This is especially apparent with this
+ * theme. Defining this macro as true handles this case.
+ */
+#if defined(WIN32) && !defined(WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK)
+#	define WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK 1
+#else
+#	define WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK 0
+#endif
+
+#define STR(x) StR(x)
+#define StR(x) #x
+
+#define SCROLLBAR_THICKNESS 14
+
+#define FRAME_COLOR	"#dcdad5"
+#define LIGHT_COLOR  	"#ffffff"
+#define DARK_COLOR  	"#cfcdc8"
+#define DARKER_COLOR 	"#bab5ab"
+#define DARKEST_COLOR	"#9e9a91"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Utilities.
+ */
+
+static GC Ttk_GCForColor(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj* colorObj, Drawable d)
+{
+    GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, colorObj), d);
+
+#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
+    /*
+     * Workaround for Tk bug under Aqua where the default line width is 0.
+     */
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    unsigned long mask = 0ul;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+
+    gcValues.line_width = 1;
+    mask = GCLineWidth;
+
+    XChangeGC(display, gc, mask, &gcValues);
+#endif
+
+    return gc;
+}
+
+static void DrawSmoothBorder(
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b,
+    Tcl_Obj *outerColorObj, Tcl_Obj *upperColorObj, Tcl_Obj *lowerColorObj)
+{
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    int x1 = b.x, x2 = b.x + b.width - 1;
+    int y1 = b.y, y2 = b.y + b.height - 1;
+    const int w = WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK;
+    GC gc;
+
+    if (   outerColorObj
+	&& (gc=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,outerColorObj,d)))
+    {
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1+1,y1, x2-1+w,y1); /* N */
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1+1,y2, x2-1+w,y2); /* S */
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1,y1+1, x1,y2-1+w); /* E */
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x2,y1+1, x2,y2-1+w); /* W */
+    }
+
+    if (   upperColorObj
+	&& (gc=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,upperColorObj,d)))
+    {
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1+1,y1+1, x2-1+w,y1+1); /* N */
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1+1,y1+1, x1+1,y2-1);   /* E */
+    }
+
+    if (   lowerColorObj
+	&& (gc=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,lowerColorObj,d)))
+    {
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x2-1,y2-1, x1+1-w,y2-1); /* S */
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x2-1,y2-1, x2-1,y1+1-w); /* W */
+    }
+}
+
+static GC BackgroundGC(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj)
+{
+    Tk_3DBorder bd = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, backgroundObj);
+    return Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, bd, TK_3D_FLAT_GC);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Border element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj 	*borderColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*lightColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*darkColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*borderWidthObj;	/* See <<NOTE-BORDERWIDTH>> */
+} BorderElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec BorderElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,borderColorObj), DARKEST_COLOR },
+    { "-lightcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,lightColorObj), LIGHT_COLOR },
+    { "-darkcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,darkColorObj), DARK_COLOR },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,reliefObj), "flat" },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,borderWidthObj), "2" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+/*
+ * <<NOTE-BORDERWIDTH>>: -borderwidth is only partially supported:
+ * in this theme, borders are always exactly 2 pixels thick.
+ * With -borderwidth 0, border is not drawn at all; 
+ * otherwise a 2-pixel border is used.  For -borderwidth > 2, 
+ * the excess is used as padding.
+ */
+
+static void BorderElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    BorderElement *border = (BorderElement*)elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, border->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    if (borderWidth == 1) ++borderWidth;
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static void BorderElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    BorderElement *border = elementRecord;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    Tcl_Obj *outer = 0, *upper = 0, *lower = 0;
+
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, border->reliefObj, &relief);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, border->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+
+    if (borderWidth == 0) return;
+
+    switch (relief) {
+	case TK_RELIEF_GROOVE :
+	case TK_RELIEF_RIDGE :
+	case TK_RELIEF_RAISED :
+	    outer = border->borderColorObj;
+	    upper = border->lightColorObj;
+	    lower = border->darkColorObj;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN :
+	    outer = border->borderColorObj;
+	    upper = border->darkColorObj;
+	    lower = border->lightColorObj;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_FLAT :
+	    outer = upper = lower = 0;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SOLID :
+	    outer = upper = lower = border->borderColorObj;
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    DrawSmoothBorder(tkwin, d, b, outer, upper, lower);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec BorderElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(BorderElement),
+    BorderElementOptions,
+    BorderElementSize,
+    BorderElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Field element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj 	*borderColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*lightColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*darkColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*backgroundObj;
+} FieldElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec FieldElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(FieldElement,borderColorObj), DARKEST_COLOR },
+    { "-lightcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(FieldElement,lightColorObj), LIGHT_COLOR },
+    { "-darkcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(FieldElement,darkColorObj), DARK_COLOR },
+    { "-fieldbackground", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(FieldElement,backgroundObj), "white" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void FieldElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding(2);
+}
+
+static void FieldElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    FieldElement *field = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder bg = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, field->backgroundObj);
+    Ttk_Box f = Ttk_PadBox(b, Ttk_UniformPadding(2));
+    Tcl_Obj *outer = field->borderColorObj,
+	    *inner = field->lightColorObj;
+
+    DrawSmoothBorder(tkwin, d, b, outer, inner, inner);
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(
+	tkwin, d, bg, f.x, f.y, f.width, f.height, 0, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec FieldElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(FieldElement),
+    FieldElementOptions,
+    FieldElementSize,
+    FieldElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ * Modified field element for comboboxes:
+ * 	Right edge is expanded to overlap the dropdown button.
+ */
+static void ComboboxFieldElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    FieldElement *field = elementRecord;
+    GC gc = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,field->borderColorObj,d);
+
+    ++b.width;
+    FieldElementDraw(clientData, elementRecord, tkwin, d, b, state);
+
+    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc,
+	    b.x + b.width - 1, b.y,
+	    b.x + b.width - 1, b.y + b.height - 1 + WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ComboboxFieldElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(FieldElement),
+    FieldElementOptions,
+    FieldElementSize,
+    ComboboxFieldElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Indicator elements for check and radio buttons.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *marginObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *foregroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *upperColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *lowerColorObj;
+} IndicatorElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec IndicatorElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-indicatorsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,sizeObj), "10" },
+    { "-indicatormargin", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,marginObj), "1" },
+    { "-indicatorbackground", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,backgroundObj), "white" },
+    { "-indicatorforeground", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,foregroundObj), "black" },
+    { "-upperbordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,upperColorObj), DARKEST_COLOR },
+    { "-lowerbordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,lowerColorObj), DARK_COLOR },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void IndicatorElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    Ttk_Padding margins;
+    int size = 10;
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, &margins);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->sizeObj, &size);
+    *widthPtr = size + Ttk_PaddingWidth(margins);
+    *heightPtr = size + Ttk_PaddingHeight(margins);
+}
+
+static void RadioIndicatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    GC gcb=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->backgroundObj,d);
+    GC gcf=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->foregroundObj,d);
+    GC gcu=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->upperColorObj,d);
+    GC gcl=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->lowerColorObj,d);
+    Ttk_Padding padding;
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, &padding);
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, padding);
+
+    XFillArc(Tk_Display(tkwin),d,gcb, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height, 0,360*64);
+    XDrawArc(Tk_Display(tkwin),d,gcl, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height, 225*64,180*64);
+    XDrawArc(Tk_Display(tkwin),d,gcu, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height, 45*64,180*64);
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_SELECTED) {
+	b = Ttk_PadBox(b,Ttk_UniformPadding(3));
+	XFillArc(Tk_Display(tkwin),d,gcf, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height, 0,360*64);
+	XDrawArc(Tk_Display(tkwin),d,gcf, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height, 0,360*64);
+#if WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK
+	XDrawArc(Tk_Display(tkwin),d,gcf, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height, 300*64,360*64);
+#endif
+    }
+}
+
+static void CheckIndicatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    GC gcb=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->backgroundObj,d);
+    GC gcf=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->foregroundObj,d);
+    GC gcu=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->upperColorObj,d);
+    GC gcl=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->lowerColorObj,d);
+    Ttk_Padding padding;
+    const int w = WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK;
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, &padding);
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, padding);
+
+    XFillRectangle(display,d,gcb, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height);
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gcl,b.x,b.y+b.height,b.x+b.width+w,b.y+b.height);/*S*/
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gcl,b.x+b.width,b.y,b.x+b.width,b.y+b.height+w); /*E*/
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gcu,b.x,b.y, b.x,b.y+b.height+w); /*W*/
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gcu,b.x,b.y, b.x+b.width+w,b.y);  /*N*/
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_SELECTED) {
+	int p,q,r,s;
+
+	b = Ttk_PadBox(b,Ttk_UniformPadding(2));
+	p = b.x, q = b.y, r = b.x+b.width, s = b.y+b.height;
+
+	r+=w, s+=w;
+	XDrawLine(display, d, gcf, p,   q,   r,   s);
+	XDrawLine(display, d, gcf, p+1, q,   r,   s-1);
+	XDrawLine(display, d, gcf, p,   q+1, r-1, s);
+
+	s-=w, q-=w;
+	XDrawLine(display, d, gcf, p,   s,   r,   q);
+	XDrawLine(display, d, gcf, p+1, s,   r,   q+1);
+	XDrawLine(display, d, gcf, p,   s-1, r-1, q);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec RadioIndicatorElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(IndicatorElement),
+    IndicatorElementOptions,
+    IndicatorElementSize,
+    RadioIndicatorElementDraw
+};
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec CheckIndicatorElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(IndicatorElement),
+    IndicatorElementOptions,
+    IndicatorElementSize,
+    CheckIndicatorElementDraw
+};
+
+#define MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE 5
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *paddingObj;
+} MenuIndicatorElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec MenuIndicatorElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-arrowsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,sizeObj), 
+	STR(MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE)},
+    { "-arrowcolor",TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,colorObj),
+	"black" },
+    { "-arrowpadding",TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,paddingObj),
+	"3" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void MenuIndicatorElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    MenuIndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    Ttk_Padding margins;
+    int size = MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->sizeObj, &size);
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->paddingObj, &margins);
+    TtkArrowSize(size, ARROW_DOWN, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    *widthPtr += Ttk_PaddingWidth(margins);
+    *heightPtr += Ttk_PaddingHeight(margins);
+}
+
+static void MenuIndicatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    MenuIndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    XColor *arrowColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->colorObj);
+    GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(arrowColor, d);
+    int size = MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE;
+    int width, height;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->sizeObj, &size);
+
+    TtkArrowSize(size, ARROW_DOWN, &width, &height);
+    b = Ttk_StickBox(b, width, height, 0);
+    TtkFillArrow(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, b, ARROW_DOWN);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec MenuIndicatorElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(MenuIndicatorElement),
+    MenuIndicatorElementOptions,
+    MenuIndicatorElementSize,
+    MenuIndicatorElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Grips.
+ *
+ * TODO: factor this with ThumbElementDraw
+ */
+
+static Ttk_Orient GripClientData[] = {
+    TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL, TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL
+};
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj 	*lightColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*borderColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*gripCountObj;
+} GripElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec GripElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-lightcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(GripElement,lightColorObj), LIGHT_COLOR },
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(GripElement,borderColorObj), DARKEST_COLOR },
+    { "-gripcount", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(GripElement,gripCountObj), "5" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void GripElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    int horizontal = *((Ttk_Orient*)clientData) == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    GripElement *grip = elementRecord;
+    int gripCount = 0;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, grip->gripCountObj, &gripCount);
+    if (horizontal) {
+	*widthPtr = 2*gripCount;
+    } else {
+	*heightPtr = 2*gripCount;
+    }
+}
+
+static void GripElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    const int w = WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK;
+    int horizontal = *((Ttk_Orient*)clientData) == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    GripElement *grip = elementRecord;
+    GC lightGC = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,grip->lightColorObj,d);
+    GC darkGC = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,grip->borderColorObj,d);
+    int gripPad = 1, gripCount = 0;
+    int i;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, grip->gripCountObj, &gripCount);
+
+    if (horizontal) {
+	int x = b.x + b.width / 2 - gripCount;
+	int y1 = b.y + gripPad, y2 = b.y + b.height - gripPad - 1 + w;
+	for (i=0; i<gripCount; ++i) {
+	    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, darkGC,  x,y1, x,y2); ++x;
+	    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, lightGC, x,y1, x,y2); ++x;
+	}
+    } else {
+	int y = b.y + b.height / 2 - gripCount;
+	int x1 = b.x + gripPad, x2 = b.x + b.width - gripPad - 1 + w;
+	for (i=0; i<gripCount; ++i) {
+	    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, darkGC,  x1,y, x2,y); ++y;
+	    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, lightGC, x1,y, x2,y); ++y;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec GripElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(GripElement),
+    GripElementOptions,
+    GripElementSize,
+    GripElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Scrollbar elements: trough, arrows, thumb.
+ *
+ * Notice that the trough element has 0 internal padding;
+ * that way the thumb and arrow borders overlap the trough.
+ */
+
+typedef struct { /* Common element record for scrollbar elements */
+    Tcl_Obj 	*orientObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*borderColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*troughColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*lightColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*darkColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*arrowColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*arrowSizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*gripCountObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*sliderlengthObj;
+} ScrollbarElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ScrollbarElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement, orientObj), "horizontal" },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,backgroundObj), FRAME_COLOR },
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,borderColorObj), DARKEST_COLOR },
+    { "-troughcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,troughColorObj), DARKER_COLOR },
+    { "-lightcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,lightColorObj), LIGHT_COLOR },
+    { "-darkcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,darkColorObj), DARK_COLOR },
+    { "-arrowcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,arrowColorObj), "#000000" },
+    { "-arrowsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,arrowSizeObj), STR(SCROLLBAR_THICKNESS) },
+    { "-gripcount", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,gripCountObj), "5" },
+    { "-sliderlength", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,sliderlengthObj), "30" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void TroughElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    ScrollbarElement *sb = elementRecord;
+    GC gcb = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,sb->borderColorObj,d);
+    GC gct = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,sb->troughColorObj,d);
+    XFillRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gct, b.x, b.y, b.width-1, b.height-1);
+    XDrawRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gcb, b.x, b.y, b.width-1, b.height-1);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TroughElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ScrollbarElement),
+    ScrollbarElementOptions,
+    TtkNullElementSize,
+    TroughElementDraw
+};
+
+static void ThumbElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ScrollbarElement *sb = elementRecord;
+    int size = SCROLLBAR_THICKNESS;
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, sb->arrowSizeObj, &size);
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = size;
+}
+
+static void ThumbElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    ScrollbarElement *sb = elementRecord;
+    int gripCount = 0, orient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    GC lightGC, darkGC;
+    int x1, y1, x2, y2, dx, dy, i;
+    const int w = WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK;
+
+    DrawSmoothBorder(tkwin, d, b,
+	sb->borderColorObj, sb->lightColorObj, sb->darkColorObj);
+    XFillRectangle(
+	Tk_Display(tkwin), d, BackgroundGC(tkwin, sb->backgroundObj),
+	b.x+2, b.y+2, b.width-4, b.height-4);
+
+    /*
+     * Draw grip:
+     */
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, sb->orientObj, &orient);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, sb->gripCountObj, &gripCount);
+    lightGC = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,sb->lightColorObj,d);
+    darkGC = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,sb->borderColorObj,d);
+    
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	dx = 1; dy = 0;
+	x1 = x2 = b.x + b.width / 2 - gripCount;
+	y1 = b.y + 2;
+	y2 = b.y + b.height - 3 + w;
+    } else {
+	dx = 0; dy = 1;
+	y1 = y2 = b.y + b.height / 2 - gripCount;
+	x1 = b.x + 2;
+	x2 = b.x + b.width - 3 + w;
+    }
+
+    for (i=0; i<gripCount; ++i) {
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, darkGC, x1,y1, x2,y2);
+	x1 += dx; x2 += dx; y1 += dy; y2 += dy;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, lightGC, x1,y1, x2,y2);
+	x1 += dx; x2 += dx; y1 += dy; y2 += dy;
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ThumbElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ScrollbarElement),
+    ScrollbarElementOptions,
+    ThumbElementSize,
+    ThumbElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Slider element.
+ */
+static void SliderElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ScrollbarElement *sb = elementRecord;
+    int length, thickness, orient;
+
+    length = thickness = SCROLLBAR_THICKNESS;
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, sb->orientObj, &orient);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, sb->arrowSizeObj, &thickness);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sb->sliderlengthObj, &length);
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	*heightPtr = length;
+	*widthPtr = thickness;
+    } else {
+	*heightPtr = thickness;
+	*widthPtr = length;
+    }
+
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SliderElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ScrollbarElement),
+    ScrollbarElementOptions,
+    SliderElementSize,
+    ThumbElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Progress bar element
+ */
+static void PbarElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    SliderElementSize(clientData, elementRecord, tkwin,
+	    widthPtr, heightPtr, paddingPtr);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding(2);
+    *widthPtr += 4;
+    *heightPtr += 4;
+}
+
+static void PbarElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    ScrollbarElement *sb = elementRecord;
+    
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, Ttk_UniformPadding(2));
+    if (b.width > 4 && b.height > 4) {
+	DrawSmoothBorder(tkwin, d, b,
+	    sb->borderColorObj, sb->lightColorObj, sb->darkColorObj);
+	XFillRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, 
+	    BackgroundGC(tkwin, sb->backgroundObj),
+	    b.x+2, b.y+2, b.width-4, b.height-4);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec PbarElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ScrollbarElement),
+    ScrollbarElementOptions,
+    PbarElementSize,
+    PbarElementDraw
+};
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Scrollbar arrows.
+ */
+static int ArrowElements[] = { ARROW_UP, ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT };
+
+static void ArrowElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ScrollbarElement *sb = elementRecord;
+    int size = SCROLLBAR_THICKNESS;
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, sb->arrowSizeObj, &size);
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = size;
+}
+
+static void ArrowElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    ArrowDirection dir = *(ArrowDirection*)clientData;
+    ScrollbarElement *sb = elementRecord;
+    GC gc = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,sb->arrowColorObj, d);
+    int h, cx, cy;
+
+    DrawSmoothBorder(tkwin, d, b,
+	sb->borderColorObj, sb->lightColorObj, sb->darkColorObj);
+
+    XFillRectangle(
+	Tk_Display(tkwin), d, BackgroundGC(tkwin, sb->backgroundObj),
+	b.x+2, b.y+2, b.width-4, b.height-4);
+
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, Ttk_UniformPadding(3));
+    h = b.width < b.height ? b.width : b.height;
+    TtkArrowSize(h/2, dir, &cx, &cy);
+    b = Ttk_AnchorBox(b, cx, cy, TK_ANCHOR_CENTER);
+
+    TtkFillArrow(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, b, dir);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ArrowElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ScrollbarElement),
+    ScrollbarElementOptions,
+    ArrowElementSize,
+    ArrowElementDraw
+};
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Notebook elements.
+ * 	
+ * Note: Tabs, except for the rightmost, overlap the neighbor to 
+ * their right by one pixel.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *lightColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *darkColorObj;
+} NotebookElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec NotebookElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(NotebookElement,backgroundObj), FRAME_COLOR },
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(NotebookElement,borderColorObj), DARKEST_COLOR },
+    { "-lightcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(NotebookElement,lightColorObj), LIGHT_COLOR },
+    { "-darkcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(NotebookElement,darkColorObj), DARK_COLOR },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void TabElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    paddingPtr->top = paddingPtr->left = paddingPtr->right = borderWidth;
+    paddingPtr->bottom = 0;
+}
+
+static void TabElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    NotebookElement *tab = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, tab->backgroundObj);
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    int borderWidth = 2, dh = 0;
+    int x1,y1,x2,y2;
+    GC gc;
+    const int w = WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK;
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_SELECTED) {
+	dh = borderWidth;
+    }
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_USER2) {	/* Rightmost tab */
+	--b.width;
+    }
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	b.x+2, b.y+2, b.width-1, b.height-2+dh, borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+
+    x1 = b.x, x2 = b.x + b.width;
+    y1 = b.y, y2 = b.y + b.height;
+
+
+    gc=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,tab->borderColorObj,d);
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1,y1+1, x1,y2+w);
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x2,y1+1, x2,y2+w);
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1+1,y1, x2-1+w,y1);
+
+    gc=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,tab->lightColorObj,d);
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1+1,y1+1, x1+1,y2-1+dh+w);
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1+1,y1+1, x2-1+w,y1+1);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TabElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(NotebookElement),
+    NotebookElementOptions,
+    TabElementSize,
+    TabElementDraw
+};
+
+static void ClientElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static void ClientElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    NotebookElement *ce = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, ce->backgroundObj);
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth,TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    DrawSmoothBorder(tkwin, d, b,
+    	ce->borderColorObj, ce->lightColorObj, ce->darkColorObj);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ClientElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(NotebookElement),
+    NotebookElementOptions,
+    ClientElementSize,
+    ClientElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Modified widget layouts.
+ */
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT_TABLE(LayoutTable)
+
+TTK_LAYOUT("TCombobox",
+    TTK_NODE("Combobox.downarrow", TTK_PACK_RIGHT|TTK_FILL_Y)
+    TTK_GROUP("Combobox.field", TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_EXPAND,
+	TTK_GROUP("Combobox.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_NODE("Combobox.textarea", TTK_FILL_BOTH))))
+
+TTK_LAYOUT("Horizontal.Sash",
+    TTK_GROUP("Sash.hsash", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Sash.hgrip", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+
+TTK_LAYOUT("Vertical.Sash",
+    TTK_GROUP("Sash.vsash", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Sash.vgrip", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+
+TTK_END_LAYOUT_TABLE
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization.
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int
+TtkClamTheme_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme = Ttk_CreateTheme(interp, "clam", 0);
+
+    if (!theme) {
+        return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "border", &BorderElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "field", &FieldElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "Combobox.field", &ComboboxFieldElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "trough", &TroughElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "thumb", &ThumbElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "uparrow", &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "downarrow", &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[1]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "leftarrow", &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[2]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "rightarrow", &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[3]);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "Radiobutton.indicator", &RadioIndicatorElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "Checkbutton.indicator", &CheckIndicatorElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "Menubutton.indicator", &MenuIndicatorElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "tab", &TabElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "client", &ClientElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "slider", &SliderElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "bar", &PbarElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "pbar", &PbarElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "hgrip",
+	    &GripElementSpec,  &GripClientData[0]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "vgrip",
+	    &GripElementSpec,  &GripClientData[1]);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayouts(theme, LayoutTable);
+
+    Tcl_PkgProvide(interp, "ttk::theme::clam", TTK_VERSION);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkClassicTheme.c b/generic/ttk/ttkClassicTheme.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2fbcd76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkClassicTheme.c
@@ -0,0 +1,513 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * "classic" theme; implements the classic Motif-like Tk look.
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include <X11/Xlib.h>
+#include <X11/Xutil.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+#define DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH "2"
+#define DEFAULT_ARROW_SIZE "15"
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Highlight element implementation.
+ * 	Draw a solid highlight border to indicate focus.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*highlightColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*highlightThicknessObj;
+} HighlightElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec HighlightElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-highlightcolor",TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(HighlightElement,highlightColorObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-highlightthickness",TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(HighlightElement,highlightThicknessObj), "0" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void HighlightElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    HighlightElement *hl = elementRecord;
+    int highlightThickness = 0;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL,hl->highlightThicknessObj,&highlightThickness);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)highlightThickness);
+}
+
+static void HighlightElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    HighlightElement *hl = elementRecord;
+    int highlightThickness = 0;
+    XColor *highlightColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, hl->highlightColorObj);
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL,hl->highlightThicknessObj,&highlightThickness);
+    if (highlightColor && highlightThickness > 0) {
+	GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(highlightColor, d);
+	Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, highlightThickness, d);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec HighlightElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(HighlightElement),
+    HighlightElementOptions,
+    HighlightElementSize,
+    HighlightElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Button Border element:
+ * 
+ * The Motif-style button border on X11 consists of (from outside-in):
+ *
+ * + focus indicator (controlled by -highlightcolor and -highlightthickness),
+ * + default ring (if -default active; blank if -default normal)
+ * + shaded border (controlled by -background, -borderwidth, and -relief)
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*defaultStateObj;
+} ButtonBorderElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ButtonBorderElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, 
+	Tk_Offset(ButtonBorderElement,borderObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, 
+	Tk_Offset(ButtonBorderElement,borderWidthObj), DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, 
+	Tk_Offset(ButtonBorderElement,reliefObj), "flat" },
+    { "-default", TK_OPTION_ANY, 
+	Tk_Offset(ButtonBorderElement,defaultStateObj), "disabled" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void ButtonBorderElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ButtonBorderElement *bd = elementRecord;
+    int defaultState = TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED;
+    int borderWidth = 0;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, bd->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Ttk_GetButtonDefaultStateFromObj(NULL, bd->defaultStateObj, &defaultState);
+
+    if (defaultState != TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED) {
+	borderWidth += 5;
+    }
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+/*
+ * (@@@ Note: ButtonBorderElement still still still buggy:
+ * padding for default ring is drawn in the wrong color 
+ * when the button is active.)
+ */
+static void ButtonBorderElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    ButtonBorderElement *bd = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = NULL;
+    int borderWidth = 1, relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+    int defaultState = TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED;
+    int inset = 0;
+
+    /*
+     * Get option values.
+     */
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, bd->borderObj);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, bd->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, bd->reliefObj, &relief);
+    Ttk_GetButtonDefaultStateFromObj(NULL, bd->defaultStateObj, &defaultState);
+
+    /*
+     * Default ring:
+     */
+    switch (defaultState)
+    {
+	case TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED :
+	    break;
+	case TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_NORMAL :
+	    inset += 5;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_ACTIVE :
+            Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+		b.x+inset, b.y+inset, b.width - 2*inset, b.height - 2*inset,
+		2, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+            inset += 2;
+            Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+		b.x+inset, b.y+inset, b.width - 2*inset, b.height - 2*inset,
+		1, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN);
+	    ++inset;
+            Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+		b.x+inset, b.y+inset, b.width - 2*inset, b.height - 2*inset,
+		2, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+	    inset += 2;
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * 3-D border:
+     */
+    if (border && borderWidth > 0) {
+	Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	    b.x+inset, b.y+inset, b.width - 2*inset, b.height - 2*inset,
+	    borderWidth,relief);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ButtonBorderElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ButtonBorderElement),
+    ButtonBorderElementOptions,
+    ButtonBorderElementSize,
+    ButtonBorderElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Arrow element(s).
+ *
+ * Draws a 3-D shaded triangle.
+ * clientData is an enum ArrowDirection pointer.
+ */
+
+static int ArrowElements[] = { ARROW_UP, ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT };
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+} ArrowElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ArrowElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-arrowsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,sizeObj),
+	DEFAULT_ARROW_SIZE },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,borderObj),
+    	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,borderWidthObj),
+    	DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,reliefObj),"raised" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void ArrowElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    int size = 12;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, arrow->sizeObj, &size);
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = size;
+}
+
+static void ArrowElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    int direction = *(int *)clientData;
+    ArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, arrow->borderObj);
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    int size = b.width < b.height ? b.width : b.height;
+    XPoint points[3];
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, arrow->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, arrow->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+
+    /*
+     * @@@ There are off-by-one pixel errors in the way these are drawn;
+     * @@@ need to take a look at Tk_Fill3DPolygon and X11 to find the
+     * @@@ exact rules.
+     */
+    switch (direction)
+    {
+	case ARROW_UP:
+	    points[2].x = b.x; 		points[2].y = b.y + size;
+	    points[1].x = b.x + size/2;	points[1].y = b.y;
+	    points[0].x = b.x + size;	points[0].y = b.y + size;
+	    break;
+	case ARROW_DOWN:
+	    points[0].x = b.x; 		points[0].y = b.y;
+	    points[1].x = b.x + size/2;	points[1].y = b.y + size;
+	    points[2].x = b.x + size;	points[2].y = b.y;
+	    break;
+	case ARROW_LEFT:
+	    points[0].x = b.x; 		points[0].y = b.y + size / 2;
+	    points[1].x = b.x + size;	points[1].y = b.y + size;
+	    points[2].x = b.x + size;	points[2].y = b.y;
+	    break;
+	case ARROW_RIGHT:
+	    points[0].x = b.x + size;	points[0].y = b.y + size / 2;
+	    points[1].x = b.x;		points[1].y = b.y;
+	    points[2].x = b.x;		points[2].y = b.y + size;
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    Tk_Fill3DPolygon(tkwin, d, border, points, 3, borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ArrowElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ArrowElement),
+    ArrowElementOptions,
+    ArrowElementSize,
+    ArrowElementDraw
+};
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Sash element (for ttk::panedwindow)
+ *
+ * NOTES: 
+ *
+ * panedwindows with -orient horizontal use vertical sashes, and vice versa.
+ *
+ * Interpretation of -sashrelief 'groove' and 'ridge' are
+ * swapped wrt. the core panedwindow, which (I think) has them backwards.
+ *
+ * Default -sashrelief is sunken; the core panedwindow has default 
+ * -sashrelief raised, but that looks wrong to me.
+ */
+
+static Ttk_Orient SashClientData[] = {
+    TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL, TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL 
+};
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj; 	/* background color */
+    Tcl_Obj *sashReliefObj;	/* sash relief */
+    Tcl_Obj *sashThicknessObj;	/* overall thickness of sash */
+    Tcl_Obj *sashPadObj;	/* padding on either side of handle */
+    Tcl_Obj *handleSizeObj;	/* handle width and height */
+    Tcl_Obj *handlePadObj;	/* handle's distance from edge */
+} SashElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec SashOptions[] = {
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, 
+	Tk_Offset(SashElement,borderObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-sashrelief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, 
+	Tk_Offset(SashElement,sashReliefObj), "sunken" },
+    { "-sashthickness", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(SashElement,sashThicknessObj), "6" },
+    { "-sashpad", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, 
+	Tk_Offset(SashElement,sashPadObj), "2" },
+    { "-handlesize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(SashElement,handleSizeObj), "8" },
+    { "-handlepad", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(SashElement,handlePadObj), "8" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void SashElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    SashElement *sash = elementRecord;
+    int sashPad = 2, sashThickness = 6, handleSize = 8;
+    int horizontal = *((Ttk_Orient*)clientData) == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sash->sashThicknessObj, &sashThickness);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sash->handleSizeObj, &handleSize);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sash->sashPadObj, &sashPad);
+
+    if (sashThickness < handleSize + 2*sashPad)
+	sashThickness = handleSize + 2*sashPad;
+
+    if (horizontal)
+	*heightPtr = sashThickness;
+    else
+	*widthPtr = sashThickness;
+}
+
+static void SashElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    SashElement *sash = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, sash->borderObj);
+    GC gc1,gc2;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    int handleSize = 8, handlePad = 8;
+    int horizontal = *((Ttk_Orient*)clientData) == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    Ttk_Box hb;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sash->handleSizeObj, &handleSize);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sash->handlePadObj, &handlePad);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, sash->sashReliefObj, &relief);
+
+    switch (relief) {
+	case TK_RELIEF_RAISED: case TK_RELIEF_RIDGE:
+	    gc1 = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC);
+	    gc2 = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC);
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN: case TK_RELIEF_GROOVE:
+	    gc1 = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC);
+	    gc2 = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC);
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SOLID: 
+	    gc1 = gc2 = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC);
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_FLAT: 
+	default:
+	    gc1 = gc2 = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_FLAT_GC);
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    /* Draw sash line:
+     */
+    if (horizontal) {
+	int y = b.y + b.height/2 - 1;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc1, b.x, y, b.x+b.width, y); ++y;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc2, b.x, y, b.x+b.width, y);
+    } else {
+	int x = b.x + b.width/2 - 1;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc1, x, b.y, x, b.y+b.height); ++x;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc2, x, b.y, x, b.y+b.height);
+    }
+
+    /* Draw handle:
+     */
+    if (handleSize >= 0) {
+	if (horizontal) {
+	    hb = Ttk_StickBox(b, handleSize, handleSize, TTK_STICK_W);
+	    hb.x += handlePad;
+	} else {
+	    hb = Ttk_StickBox(b, handleSize, handleSize, TTK_STICK_N);
+	    hb.y += handlePad;
+	}
+	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border, 
+	    hb.x, hb.y, hb.width, hb.height, 1, TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SashElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SashElement),
+    SashOptions,
+    SashElementSize,
+    SashElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget layouts.
+ */
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT_TABLE(LayoutTable)
+
+TTK_LAYOUT("TButton",
+    TTK_GROUP("Button.highlight", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+        TTK_GROUP("Button.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_BORDER,
+	    TTK_GROUP("Button.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	        TTK_NODE("Button.label", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))))
+
+TTK_LAYOUT("TCheckbutton",
+    TTK_GROUP("Checkbutton.highlight", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+        TTK_GROUP("Checkbutton.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_GROUP("Checkbutton.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	        TTK_NODE("Checkbutton.indicator", TTK_PACK_LEFT)
+	        TTK_NODE("Checkbutton.label", TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_FILL_BOTH)))))
+
+TTK_LAYOUT("TRadiobutton",
+    TTK_GROUP("Radiobutton.highlight", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+        TTK_GROUP("Radiobutton.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_GROUP("Radiobutton.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	        TTK_NODE("Radiobutton.indicator", TTK_PACK_LEFT)
+	        TTK_NODE("Radiobutton.label", TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_FILL_BOTH)))))
+
+TTK_LAYOUT("TMenubutton",
+    TTK_GROUP("Menubutton.highlight", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+        TTK_GROUP("Menubutton.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_NODE("Menubutton.indicator", TTK_PACK_RIGHT)
+	    TTK_GROUP("Menubutton.padding", TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_EXPAND|TTK_FILL_X,
+	        TTK_NODE("Menubutton.label", 0)))))
+
+/* "classic" entry, includes highlight border */
+TTK_LAYOUT("TEntry",
+    TTK_GROUP("Entry.highlight", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+        TTK_GROUP("Entry.field", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_BORDER,
+	    TTK_GROUP("Entry.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	        TTK_NODE("Entry.textarea", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))))
+
+/* Notebook tabs -- omit focus ring */
+TTK_LAYOUT("Tab",
+    TTK_GROUP("Notebook.tab", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_GROUP("Notebook.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_NODE("Notebook.label", TTK_FILL_BOTH))))
+
+TTK_END_LAYOUT_TABLE
+
+/* POSSIBLY: include Scale layouts w/focus border
+ */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * TtkClassicTheme_Init --
+ * 	Install classic theme.
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int TtkClassicTheme_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme =  Ttk_CreateTheme(interp, "classic", NULL);
+
+    if (!theme) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Register elements:
+     */
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "highlight",
+	    &HighlightElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Button.border",
+	    &ButtonBorderElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "uparrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "downarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[1]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "leftarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[2]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "rightarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[3]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "arrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "hsash", 
+	    &SashElementSpec, &SashClientData[0]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "vsash",
+	    &SashElementSpec, &SashClientData[1]);
+
+    /*
+     * Register layouts:
+     */
+    Ttk_RegisterLayouts(theme, LayoutTable);
+
+    Tcl_PkgProvide(interp, "ttk::theme::classic", TTK_VERSION);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkDecls.h b/generic/ttk/ttkDecls.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee679b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkDecls.h
@@ -0,0 +1,272 @@
+/*
+ * This file is (mostly) automatically generated from ttk.decls.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TTKDECLS
+#define _TTKDECLS
+
+#if defined(USE_TTK_STUBS)
+
+extern const char *TtkInitializeStubs(
+	Tcl_Interp *, const char *version, int epoch, int revision);
+#define Ttk_InitStubs(interp) TtkInitializeStubs( \
+	interp, TTK_VERSION, TTK_STUBS_EPOCH, TTK_STUBS_REVISION)
+#else
+
+#define Ttk_InitStubs(interp) Tcl_PkgRequire(interp, "Ttk", TTK_VERSION, 0)
+
+#endif
+
+
+/* !BEGIN!: Do not edit below this line. */
+
+#define TTK_STUBS_EPOCH 0
+#define TTK_STUBS_REVISION 31
+
+/*
+ * Exported function declarations:
+ */
+
+/* 0 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme	Ttk_GetTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name);
+/* 1 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme	Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+/* 2 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme	Ttk_GetCurrentTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+/* 3 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme	Ttk_CreateTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name,
+				Ttk_Theme parent);
+/* 4 */
+TTKAPI void		Ttk_RegisterCleanup(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				VOID *deleteData,
+				Ttk_CleanupProc *cleanupProc);
+/* 5 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_RegisterElementSpec(Ttk_Theme theme,
+				CONST char *elementName,
+				Ttk_ElementSpec *elementSpec,
+				VOID *clientData);
+/* 6 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_ElementClass * Ttk_RegisterElement(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Ttk_Theme theme, CONST char *elementName,
+				Ttk_ElementSpec *elementSpec,
+				VOID *clientData);
+/* 7 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_RegisterElementFactory(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				CONST char *name,
+				Ttk_ElementFactory factoryProc,
+				VOID *clientData);
+/* 8 */
+TTKAPI void		Ttk_RegisterLayout(Ttk_Theme theme,
+				CONST char *className,
+				Ttk_LayoutSpec layoutSpec);
+/* Slot 9 is reserved */
+/* 10 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_StateSpec *spec_rtn);
+/* 11 */
+TTKAPI Tcl_Obj *	Ttk_NewStateSpecObj(unsigned int onbits,
+				unsigned int offbits);
+/* 12 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_StateMap	Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+/* 13 */
+TTKAPI Tcl_Obj *	Ttk_StateMapLookup(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Ttk_StateMap map, Ttk_State state);
+/* 14 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_StateTableLookup(Ttk_StateTable map[],
+				Ttk_State state);
+/* Slot 15 is reserved */
+/* Slot 16 is reserved */
+/* Slot 17 is reserved */
+/* Slot 18 is reserved */
+/* Slot 19 is reserved */
+/* 20 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+				Ttk_Padding *pad_rtn);
+/* 21 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_Padding *pad_rtn);
+/* 22 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_GetStickyFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_Sticky *sticky_rtn);
+/* 23 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding	Ttk_MakePadding(short l, short t, short r, short b);
+/* 24 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding	Ttk_UniformPadding(short borderWidth);
+/* 25 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding	Ttk_AddPadding(Ttk_Padding pad1, Ttk_Padding pad2);
+/* 26 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding	Ttk_RelievePadding(Ttk_Padding padding, int relief,
+				int n);
+/* 27 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box		Ttk_MakeBox(int x, int y, int width, int height);
+/* 28 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_BoxContains(Ttk_Box box, int x, int y);
+/* 29 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box		Ttk_PackBox(Ttk_Box *cavity, int w, int h,
+				Ttk_Side side);
+/* 30 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box		Ttk_StickBox(Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h,
+				Ttk_Sticky sticky);
+/* 31 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box		Ttk_AnchorBox(Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h,
+				Tk_Anchor anchor);
+/* 32 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box		Ttk_PadBox(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p);
+/* 33 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box		Ttk_ExpandBox(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p);
+/* 34 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box		Ttk_PlaceBox(Ttk_Box *cavity, int w, int h,
+				Ttk_Side side, Ttk_Sticky sticky);
+/* 35 */
+TTKAPI Tcl_Obj *	Ttk_NewBoxObj(Ttk_Box box);
+/* Slot 36 is reserved */
+/* Slot 37 is reserved */
+/* Slot 38 is reserved */
+/* Slot 39 is reserved */
+/* 40 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+				Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *orient);
+
+typedef struct TtkStubs {
+    int magic;
+    int epoch;
+    int revision;
+    const struct TtkStubHooks *hooks;
+
+    Ttk_Theme (*ttk_GetTheme) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name); /* 0 */
+    Ttk_Theme (*ttk_GetDefaultTheme) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 1 */
+    Ttk_Theme (*ttk_GetCurrentTheme) (Tcl_Interp *interp); /* 2 */
+    Ttk_Theme (*ttk_CreateTheme) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name, Ttk_Theme parent); /* 3 */
+    void (*ttk_RegisterCleanup) (Tcl_Interp *interp, VOID *deleteData, Ttk_CleanupProc *cleanupProc); /* 4 */
+    int (*ttk_RegisterElementSpec) (Ttk_Theme theme, CONST char *elementName, Ttk_ElementSpec *elementSpec, VOID *clientData); /* 5 */
+    Ttk_ElementClass * (*ttk_RegisterElement) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme theme, CONST char *elementName, Ttk_ElementSpec *elementSpec, VOID *clientData); /* 6 */
+    int (*ttk_RegisterElementFactory) (Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name, Ttk_ElementFactory factoryProc, VOID *clientData); /* 7 */
+    void (*ttk_RegisterLayout) (Ttk_Theme theme, CONST char *className, Ttk_LayoutSpec layoutSpec); /* 8 */
+    void (*reserved9)(void);
+    int (*ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_StateSpec *spec_rtn); /* 10 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*ttk_NewStateSpecObj) (unsigned int onbits, unsigned int offbits); /* 11 */
+    Ttk_StateMap (*ttk_GetStateMapFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 12 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*ttk_StateMapLookup) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_StateMap map, Ttk_State state); /* 13 */
+    int (*ttk_StateTableLookup) (Ttk_StateTable map[], Ttk_State state); /* 14 */
+    void (*reserved15)(void);
+    void (*reserved16)(void);
+    void (*reserved17)(void);
+    void (*reserved18)(void);
+    void (*reserved19)(void);
+    int (*ttk_GetPaddingFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_Padding *pad_rtn); /* 20 */
+    int (*ttk_GetBorderFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_Padding *pad_rtn); /* 21 */
+    int (*ttk_GetStickyFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_Sticky *sticky_rtn); /* 22 */
+    Ttk_Padding (*ttk_MakePadding) (short l, short t, short r, short b); /* 23 */
+    Ttk_Padding (*ttk_UniformPadding) (short borderWidth); /* 24 */
+    Ttk_Padding (*ttk_AddPadding) (Ttk_Padding pad1, Ttk_Padding pad2); /* 25 */
+    Ttk_Padding (*ttk_RelievePadding) (Ttk_Padding padding, int relief, int n); /* 26 */
+    Ttk_Box (*ttk_MakeBox) (int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 27 */
+    int (*ttk_BoxContains) (Ttk_Box box, int x, int y); /* 28 */
+    Ttk_Box (*ttk_PackBox) (Ttk_Box *cavity, int w, int h, Ttk_Side side); /* 29 */
+    Ttk_Box (*ttk_StickBox) (Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h, Ttk_Sticky sticky); /* 30 */
+    Ttk_Box (*ttk_AnchorBox) (Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h, Tk_Anchor anchor); /* 31 */
+    Ttk_Box (*ttk_PadBox) (Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p); /* 32 */
+    Ttk_Box (*ttk_ExpandBox) (Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p); /* 33 */
+    Ttk_Box (*ttk_PlaceBox) (Ttk_Box *cavity, int w, int h, Ttk_Side side, Ttk_Sticky sticky); /* 34 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*ttk_NewBoxObj) (Ttk_Box box); /* 35 */
+    void (*reserved36)(void);
+    void (*reserved37)(void);
+    void (*reserved38)(void);
+    void (*reserved39)(void);
+    int (*ttk_GetOrientFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *orient); /* 40 */
+} TtkStubs;
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+extern const TtkStubs *ttkStubsPtr;
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#if defined(USE_TTK_STUBS)
+
+/*
+ * Inline function declarations:
+ */
+
+#define Ttk_GetTheme \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetTheme) /* 0 */
+#define Ttk_GetDefaultTheme \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetDefaultTheme) /* 1 */
+#define Ttk_GetCurrentTheme \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetCurrentTheme) /* 2 */
+#define Ttk_CreateTheme \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_CreateTheme) /* 3 */
+#define Ttk_RegisterCleanup \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_RegisterCleanup) /* 4 */
+#define Ttk_RegisterElementSpec \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_RegisterElementSpec) /* 5 */
+#define Ttk_RegisterElement \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_RegisterElement) /* 6 */
+#define Ttk_RegisterElementFactory \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_RegisterElementFactory) /* 7 */
+#define Ttk_RegisterLayout \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_RegisterLayout) /* 8 */
+/* Slot 9 is reserved */
+#define Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj) /* 10 */
+#define Ttk_NewStateSpecObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_NewStateSpecObj) /* 11 */
+#define Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetStateMapFromObj) /* 12 */
+#define Ttk_StateMapLookup \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_StateMapLookup) /* 13 */
+#define Ttk_StateTableLookup \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_StateTableLookup) /* 14 */
+/* Slot 15 is reserved */
+/* Slot 16 is reserved */
+/* Slot 17 is reserved */
+/* Slot 18 is reserved */
+/* Slot 19 is reserved */
+#define Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetPaddingFromObj) /* 20 */
+#define Ttk_GetBorderFromObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetBorderFromObj) /* 21 */
+#define Ttk_GetStickyFromObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetStickyFromObj) /* 22 */
+#define Ttk_MakePadding \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_MakePadding) /* 23 */
+#define Ttk_UniformPadding \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_UniformPadding) /* 24 */
+#define Ttk_AddPadding \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_AddPadding) /* 25 */
+#define Ttk_RelievePadding \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_RelievePadding) /* 26 */
+#define Ttk_MakeBox \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_MakeBox) /* 27 */
+#define Ttk_BoxContains \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_BoxContains) /* 28 */
+#define Ttk_PackBox \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_PackBox) /* 29 */
+#define Ttk_StickBox \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_StickBox) /* 30 */
+#define Ttk_AnchorBox \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_AnchorBox) /* 31 */
+#define Ttk_PadBox \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_PadBox) /* 32 */
+#define Ttk_ExpandBox \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_ExpandBox) /* 33 */
+#define Ttk_PlaceBox \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_PlaceBox) /* 34 */
+#define Ttk_NewBoxObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_NewBoxObj) /* 35 */
+/* Slot 36 is reserved */
+/* Slot 37 is reserved */
+/* Slot 38 is reserved */
+/* Slot 39 is reserved */
+#define Ttk_GetOrientFromObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetOrientFromObj) /* 40 */
+
+#endif /* defined(USE_TTK_STUBS) */
+
+/* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */
+
+#endif /* _TTKDECLS */
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkDefaultTheme.c b/generic/ttk/ttkDefaultTheme.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d2deee8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkDefaultTheme.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1130 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2003, Joe English
+ *
+ * Tk alternate theme, intended to match the MSUE and Gtk's (old) default theme
+ */
+
+#include <math.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <tkInt.h>
+#include <X11/Xlib.h>
+#include <X11/Xutil.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+#if defined(WIN32)
+static const int WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK = 1;
+#else
+static const int WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK = 0;
+#endif
+
+#define BORDERWIDTH     2
+#define SCROLLBAR_WIDTH 14
+#define MIN_THUMB_SIZE  8
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Helper routines for border drawing:
+ *
+ * NOTE: MSUE specifies a slightly different arrangement
+ * for button borders than for other elements; "shadowColors"
+ * is for button borders.
+ *
+ * Please excuse the gross misspelling "LITE" for "LIGHT",
+ * but it makes things line up nicer.
+ */
+
+enum BorderColor { FLAT = 1, LITE = 2, DARK = 3, BRDR = 4 };
+
+/* top-left outer, top-left inner, bottom-right inner, bottom-right outer */
+static int const shadowColors[6][4] = {
+    { FLAT, FLAT, FLAT, FLAT },	/* TK_RELIEF_FLAT   = 0*/
+    { DARK, LITE, DARK, LITE },	/* TK_RELIEF_GROOVE = 1*/
+    { LITE, FLAT, DARK, BRDR },	/* TK_RELIEF_RAISED = 2*/
+    { LITE, DARK, LITE, DARK },	/* TK_RELIEF_RIDGE  = 3*/
+    { BRDR, BRDR, BRDR, BRDR },	/* TK_RELIEF_SOLID  = 4*/
+    { BRDR, DARK, FLAT, LITE }	/* TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN = 5*/
+};
+
+/* top-left, bottom-right */
+static int const thinShadowColors[6][4] = {
+    { FLAT, FLAT },	/* TK_RELIEF_FLAT   = 0*/
+    { DARK, LITE },	/* TK_RELIEF_GROOVE = 1*/
+    { LITE, DARK },	/* TK_RELIEF_RAISED = 2*/
+    { LITE, DARK },	/* TK_RELIEF_RIDGE  = 3*/
+    { BRDR, BRDR },	/* TK_RELIEF_SOLID  = 4*/
+    { DARK, LITE }	/* TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN = 5*/
+};
+
+static void DrawCorner(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d,
+    Tk_3DBorder border,			/* get most GCs from here... */
+    GC borderGC,			/* "window border" color GC */
+    int x,int y, int width,int height,	/* where to draw */
+    int corner,				/* 0 => top left; 1 => bottom right */
+    enum BorderColor color)
+{
+    XPoint points[3];
+    GC gc;
+
+    --width; --height;
+    points[0].x = x;			points[0].y = y+height;
+    points[1].x = x+width*corner;	points[1].y = y+height*corner;
+    points[2].x = x+width;		points[2].y = y;
+
+    if (color == BRDR)
+	gc = borderGC;
+    else
+	gc = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, (int)color);
+
+    XDrawLines(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, points, 3, CoordModeOrigin);
+}
+
+static void DrawBorder(
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Tk_3DBorder border, XColor *borderColor,
+    Ttk_Box b, int borderWidth, int relief)
+{
+    GC borderGC = Tk_GCForColor(borderColor, d);
+
+    switch (borderWidth) {
+	case 2: /* "thick" border */
+	    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+		b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 0,shadowColors[relief][0]);
+	    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+		b.x+1, b.y+1, b.width-2, b.height-2, 0,shadowColors[relief][1]);
+	    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+		b.x+1, b.y+1, b.width-2, b.height-2, 1,shadowColors[relief][2]);
+	    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+		b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 1,shadowColors[relief][3]);
+	    break;
+	case 1: /* "thin" border */
+	    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+		b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 0, thinShadowColors[relief][0]);
+	    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+		b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 1, thinShadowColors[relief][1]);
+	    break;
+	case 0:	/* no border -- do nothing */
+	    break;
+	default: /* Fall back to Motif-style borders: */
+	    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+		b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth,relief);
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+/* Alternate shadow colors for entry fields:
+ * NOTE: FLAT color is normally white, and the LITE color is a darker shade.
+ */
+static int fieldShadowColors[4] = { DARK, BRDR, LITE, FLAT };
+
+static void DrawFieldBorder(
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Tk_3DBorder border, XColor *borderColor,
+    Ttk_Box b)
+{
+    GC borderGC = Tk_GCForColor(borderColor, d);
+    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 0,fieldShadowColors[0]);
+    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+	b.x+1, b.y+1, b.width-2, b.height-2, 0,fieldShadowColors[1]);
+    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+	b.x+1, b.y+1, b.width-2, b.height-2, 1,fieldShadowColors[2]);
+    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 1,fieldShadowColors[3]);
+    return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * ArrowPoints --
+ * 	Compute points of arrow polygon.
+ */
+static void ArrowPoints(Ttk_Box b, ArrowDirection dir, XPoint points[4])
+{
+    int cx, cy, h;
+
+    switch (dir) {
+	case ARROW_UP:
+	    h = (b.width - 1)/2;
+	    cx = b.x + h;
+	    cy = b.y;
+	    if (b.height <= h) h = b.height - 1;
+	    points[0].x = cx;		points[0].y = cy;
+	    points[1].x = cx - h;  	points[1].y = cy + h;
+	    points[2].x = cx + h; 	points[2].y = cy + h;
+	    break;
+	case ARROW_DOWN:
+	    h = (b.width - 1)/2;
+	    cx = b.x + h;
+	    cy = b.y + b.height - 1;
+	    if (b.height <= h) h = b.height - 1;
+	    points[0].x = cx; 		points[0].y = cy;
+	    points[1].x = cx - h;	points[1].y = cy - h;
+	    points[2].x = cx + h; 	points[2].y = cy - h;
+	    break;
+	case ARROW_LEFT:
+	    h = (b.height - 1)/2;
+	    cx = b.x;
+	    cy = b.y + h;
+	    if (b.width <= h) h = b.width - 1;
+	    points[0].x = cx; 		points[0].y = cy;
+	    points[1].x = cx + h;	points[1].y = cy - h;
+	    points[2].x = cx + h; 	points[2].y = cy + h;
+	    break;
+	case ARROW_RIGHT:
+	    h = (b.height - 1)/2;
+	    cx = b.x + b.width - 1;
+	    cy = b.y + h;
+	    if (b.width <= h) h = b.width - 1;
+	    points[0].x = cx; 		points[0].y = cy;
+	    points[1].x = cx - h;	points[1].y = cy - h;
+	    points[2].x = cx - h; 	points[2].y = cy + h;
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    points[3].x = points[0].x;
+    points[3].y = points[0].y;
+}
+
+/*public*/
+void TtkArrowSize(int h, ArrowDirection dir, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    switch (dir) {
+	case ARROW_UP:
+	case ARROW_DOWN:	*widthPtr = 2*h+1; *heightPtr = h+1; break;
+	case ARROW_LEFT:
+	case ARROW_RIGHT:	*widthPtr = h+1; *heightPtr = 2*h+1;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * TtkDrawArrow, TtkFillArrow --
+ * 	Draw an arrow in the indicated direction inside the specified box.
+ */
+/*public*/
+void TtkFillArrow(
+    Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, Ttk_Box b, ArrowDirection dir)
+{
+    XPoint points[4];
+    ArrowPoints(b, dir, points);
+    XFillPolygon(display, d, gc, points, 3, Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
+    XDrawLines(display, d, gc, points, 4, CoordModeOrigin);
+}
+
+/*public*/
+void TtkDrawArrow(
+    Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, Ttk_Box b, ArrowDirection dir)
+{
+    XPoint points[4];
+    ArrowPoints(b, dir, points);
+    XDrawLines(display, d, gc, points, 4, CoordModeOrigin);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Border element implementation.
+ *
+ * This border consists of (from outside-in):
+ *
+ * + a 1-pixel thick default indicator (defaultable widgets only)
+ * + 1- or 2- pixel shaded border (controlled by -background and -relief)
+ * + 1 pixel padding (???)
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderColorObj;	/* Extra border color */
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*defaultStateObj;	/* for buttons */
+} BorderElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec BorderElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(BorderElement,borderObj),
+    	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-bordercolor",TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,borderColorObj), "black" },
+    { "-default", TK_OPTION_ANY, Tk_Offset(BorderElement,defaultStateObj),
+    	"disabled" },
+    { "-borderwidth",TK_OPTION_PIXELS,Tk_Offset(BorderElement,borderWidthObj),
+    	STRINGIFY(BORDERWIDTH) },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(BorderElement,reliefObj),
+    	"flat" },
+        { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void BorderElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    BorderElement *bd = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 0;
+    int defaultState = TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, bd->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Ttk_GetButtonDefaultStateFromObj(NULL, bd->defaultStateObj, &defaultState);
+
+    if (defaultState != TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED) {
+	++borderWidth;
+    }
+
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static void BorderElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord,
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    BorderElement *bd = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, bd->borderObj);
+    XColor *borderColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, bd->borderColorObj);
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+    int defaultState = TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED;
+
+    /*
+     * Get option values.
+     */
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, bd->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, bd->reliefObj, &relief);
+    Ttk_GetButtonDefaultStateFromObj(NULL, bd->defaultStateObj, &defaultState);
+
+    if (defaultState == TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_ACTIVE) {
+	GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(borderColor, d);
+	XDrawRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc,
+		b.x, b.y, b.width-1, b.height-1);
+    }
+    if (defaultState != TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED) {
+	/* Space for default ring: */
+	b = Ttk_PadBox(b, Ttk_UniformPadding(1));
+    }
+
+    DrawBorder(tkwin, d, border, borderColor, b, borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec BorderElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(BorderElement),
+    BorderElementOptions,
+    BorderElementSize,
+    BorderElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Field element:
+ * 	Used for editable fields.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderColorObj;	/* Extra border color */
+} FieldElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec FieldElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-fieldbackground", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(FieldElement,borderObj),
+    	"white" },
+    { "-bordercolor",TK_OPTION_COLOR, Tk_Offset(FieldElement,borderColorObj),
+	"black" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void FieldElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding(2);
+}
+
+static void FieldElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    FieldElement *field = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, field->borderObj);
+    XColor *borderColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, field->borderColorObj);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(
+	tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 0, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN);
+    DrawFieldBorder(tkwin, d, border, borderColor, b);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec FieldElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(FieldElement),
+    FieldElementOptions,
+    FieldElementSize,
+    FieldElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * Indicators --
+ *
+ * 	Code derived (probably incorrectly) from TIP 109 implementation,
+ * 	unix/tkUnixButton.c r 1.15.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Indicator bitmap descriptor:
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    int width;		/* Width of each image */
+    int height;		/* Height of each image */
+    int nimages;	/* #images / row */
+    const char *const *pixels;	/* array[height] of char[width*nimage] */
+    Ttk_StateTable *map;/* used to look up image index by state */
+} IndicatorSpec;
+
+#if 0
+/*XPM*/
+static const char *const button_images[] = {
+    /* width height ncolors chars_per_pixel */
+    "52 13 8 1",
+    /* colors */
+    "A c #808000000000 s shadow",
+    "B c #000080800000 s highlight",
+    "C c #808080800000 s 3dlight",
+    "D c #000000008080 s window",
+    "E c #808000008080 s 3ddark",
+    "F c #000080808080 s frame",
+    "G c #000000000000 s foreground",
+    "H c #000080800000 s disabledfg",
+};
+#endif
+
+static Ttk_StateTable checkbutton_states[] = {
+    { 0, 0, TTK_STATE_SELECTED|TTK_STATE_DISABLED },
+    { 1, TTK_STATE_SELECTED, TTK_STATE_DISABLED },
+    { 2, TTK_STATE_DISABLED, TTK_STATE_SELECTED },
+    { 3, TTK_STATE_SELECTED|TTK_STATE_DISABLED, 0 },
+    { 0, 0, 0 }
+};
+
+static const char *const checkbutton_pixels[] = {
+    "AAAAAAAAAAAABAAAAAAAAAAAABAAAAAAAAAAAABAAAAAAAAAAAAB",
+    "AEEEEEEEEEECBAEEEEEEEEEECBAEEEEEEEEEECBAEEEEEEEEEECB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDDDDDDDDDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFFFFFFFFFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDDDDDDDGDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFFFFFFFHFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDDDDDDGGDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFFFFFFHHFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDGDDDGGGDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFHFFFHHHFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDGGDGGGDDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFHHFHHHFFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDGGGGGDDDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFHHHHHFFFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDDGGGDDDDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFFHHHFFFFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDDDGDDDDDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFFFHFFFFFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDDDDDDDDDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFFFFFFFFFCB",
+    "ACCCCCCCCCCCBACCCCCCCCCCCBACCCCCCCCCCCBACCCCCCCCCCCB",
+    "BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB",
+};
+
+static IndicatorSpec checkbutton_spec = {
+    13, 13, 4,		/* width, height, nimages */
+    checkbutton_pixels,
+    checkbutton_states
+};
+
+static Ttk_StateTable radiobutton_states[] = {
+    { 0, 0, TTK_STATE_SELECTED|TTK_STATE_DISABLED },
+    { 1, TTK_STATE_SELECTED, TTK_STATE_DISABLED },
+    { 2, TTK_STATE_DISABLED, TTK_STATE_SELECTED },
+    { 3, TTK_STATE_SELECTED|TTK_STATE_DISABLED, 0 },
+    { 0, 0, 0 }
+};
+
+static const char *const radiobutton_pixels[] = {
+    "FFFFAAAAFFFFFFFFFAAAAFFFFFFFFFAAAAFFFFFFFFFAAAAFFFFF",
+    "FFAAEEEEAAFFFFFAAEEEEAAFFFFFAAEEEEAAFFFFFAAEEEEAAFFF",
+    "FAEEDDDDEEBFFFAEEDDDDEEBFFFAEEFFFFEEBFFFAEEFFFFEEBFF",
+    "FAEDDDDDDCBFFFAEDDDDDDCBFFFAEFFFFFFCBFFFAEFFFFFFCBFF",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDCBFAEDDDGGDDDCBFAEFFFFFFFFCBFAEFFFHHFFFCBF",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDCBFAEDDGGGGDDCBFAEFFFFFFFFCBFAEFFHHHHFFCBF",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDCBFAEDDGGGGDDCBFAEFFFFFFFFCBFAEFFHHHHFFCBF",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDCBFAEDDDGGDDDCBFAEFFFFFFFFCBFAEFFFHHFFFCBF",
+    "FAEDDDDDDCBFFFAEDDDDDDCBFFFAEFFFFFFCBFFFAEFFFFFFCBFF",
+    "FACCDDDDCCBFFFACCDDDDCCBFFFACCFFFFCCBFFFACCFFFFCCBFF",
+    "FFBBCCCCBBFFFFFBBCCCCBBFFFFFBBCCCCBBFFFFFBBCCCCBBFFF",
+    "FFFFBBBBFFFFFFFFFBBBBFFFFFFFFFBBBBFFFFFFFFFBBBBFFFFF",
+    "FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF",
+};
+
+static IndicatorSpec radiobutton_spec = {
+    13, 13, 4,		/* width, height, nimages */
+    radiobutton_pixels,
+    radiobutton_states
+};
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *foregroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *lightColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *shadeColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *marginObj;
+} IndicatorElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec IndicatorElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	    Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	    Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,foregroundObj), DEFAULT_FOREGROUND },
+    { "-indicatorcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	    Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,colorObj), "#FFFFFF" },
+    { "-lightcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	    Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,lightColorObj), "#DDDDDD" },
+    { "-shadecolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	    Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,shadeColorObj), "#888888" },
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	    Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,borderColorObj), "black" },
+    { "-indicatormargin", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	    Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,marginObj), "0 2 4 2" },
+	    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void IndicatorElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    IndicatorSpec *spec = clientData;
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    Ttk_Padding margins;
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, &margins);
+    *widthPtr = spec->width + Ttk_PaddingWidth(margins);
+    *heightPtr = spec->height + Ttk_PaddingHeight(margins);
+}
+
+static void IndicatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    IndicatorSpec *spec = clientData;
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    Ttk_Padding padding;
+    XColor *fgColor, *frameColor, *shadeColor, *indicatorColor, *borderColor;
+
+    int index, ix, iy;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+    GC copyGC;
+    unsigned long imgColors[8];
+    XImage *img;
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, &padding);
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, padding);
+
+    if (   b.x < 0
+	|| b.y < 0
+	|| Tk_Width(tkwin) < b.x + spec->width
+	|| Tk_Height(tkwin) < b.y + spec->height)
+    {
+	/* Oops!  not enough room to display the image.
+	 * Don't draw anything.
+	 */
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Fill in imgColors palette:
+     *
+     * (SHOULD: take light and shade colors from the border object,
+     * but Tk doesn't provide easy access to these in the public API.)
+     */
+    fgColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->foregroundObj);
+    frameColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->backgroundObj);
+    shadeColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->shadeColorObj);
+    indicatorColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->colorObj);
+    borderColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->borderColorObj);
+
+    imgColors[0 /*A*/] = shadeColor->pixel;
+    imgColors[1 /*B*/] = indicatorColor->pixel;
+    imgColors[2 /*C*/] = frameColor->pixel;
+    imgColors[3 /*D*/] = indicatorColor->pixel;
+    imgColors[4 /*E*/] = borderColor->pixel;
+    imgColors[5 /*F*/] = frameColor->pixel;
+    imgColors[6 /*G*/] = fgColor->pixel;
+    imgColors[7 /*H*/] = fgColor->pixel;
+
+    /*
+     * Create a scratch buffer to store the image:
+     */
+    img = XGetImage(display,d, 0, 0,
+	    (unsigned int)spec->width, (unsigned int)spec->height,
+	    AllPlanes, ZPixmap);
+    if (img == NULL)
+	return;
+
+    /*
+     * Create the image, painting it into an XImage one pixel at a time.
+     */
+    index = Ttk_StateTableLookup(spec->map, state);
+    for (iy=0 ; iy<spec->height ; iy++) {
+	for (ix=0 ; ix<spec->width ; ix++) {
+	    XPutPixel(img, ix, iy,
+		imgColors[spec->pixels[iy][index*spec->width+ix] - 'A'] );
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Copy onto our target drawable surface.
+     */
+    memset(&gcValues, 0, sizeof(gcValues));
+    copyGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, 0, &gcValues);
+
+    TkPutImage(NULL, 0, display, d, copyGC, img, 0, 0, b.x, b.y,
+               spec->width, spec->height);
+
+    /*
+     * Tidy up.
+     */
+    Tk_FreeGC(display, copyGC);
+    XDestroyImage(img);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec IndicatorElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(IndicatorElement),
+    IndicatorElementOptions,
+    IndicatorElementSize,
+    IndicatorElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Arrow element(s).
+ *
+ * 	Draws a solid triangle, inside a box.
+ * 	clientData is an enum ArrowDirection pointer.
+ */
+
+static int ArrowElements[] = { ARROW_UP, ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT };
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderColorObj;	/* Extra color for borders */
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;		/* Arrow color */
+} ArrowElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ArrowElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-arrowsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,sizeObj), STRINGIFY(SCROLLBAR_WIDTH) },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,borderObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,borderColorObj), "black" },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,reliefObj),"raised"},
+    { "-arrowcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,colorObj),"black"},
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+/*
+ * Note asymmetric padding:
+ * top/left padding is 1 less than bottom/right,
+ * since in this theme 2-pixel borders are asymmetric.
+ */
+static Ttk_Padding ArrowPadding = { 3,3,4,4 };
+
+static void ArrowElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    int direction = *(int *)clientData;
+    int width = SCROLLBAR_WIDTH;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, arrow->sizeObj, &width);
+    width -= Ttk_PaddingWidth(ArrowPadding);
+    TtkArrowSize(width/2, direction, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    *widthPtr += Ttk_PaddingWidth(ArrowPadding);
+    *heightPtr += Ttk_PaddingHeight(ArrowPadding);
+}
+
+static void ArrowElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    int direction = *(int *)clientData;
+    ArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, arrow->borderObj);
+    XColor *borderColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, arrow->borderColorObj);
+    XColor *arrowColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, arrow->colorObj);
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, arrow->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(
+	tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    DrawBorder(tkwin,d,border,borderColor,b,borderWidth,relief);
+
+    TtkFillArrow(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, Tk_GCForColor(arrowColor, d),
+	Ttk_PadBox(b, ArrowPadding), direction);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ArrowElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ArrowElement),
+    ArrowElementOptions,
+    ArrowElementSize,
+    ArrowElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Menubutton indicator:
+ * 	Draw an arrow in the direction where the menu will be posted.
+ */
+
+#define MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE 5
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *directionObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+} MenubuttonArrowElement;
+
+static const char *directionStrings[] = {	/* See also: button.c */
+    "above", "below", "left", "right", "flush", NULL
+};
+enum { POST_ABOVE, POST_BELOW, POST_LEFT, POST_RIGHT, POST_FLUSH };
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec MenubuttonArrowElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-direction", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(MenubuttonArrowElement,directionObj), "below" },
+    { "-arrowsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(MenubuttonArrowElement,sizeObj), STRINGIFY(MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE)},
+    { "-arrowcolor",TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(MenubuttonArrowElement,colorObj), "black"},
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static Ttk_Padding MenubuttonArrowPadding = { 3, 0, 3, 0 };
+
+static void MenubuttonArrowElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    MenubuttonArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    int size = MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, arrow->sizeObj, &size);
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = 2 * size + 1;
+    *widthPtr += Ttk_PaddingWidth(MenubuttonArrowPadding);
+    *heightPtr += Ttk_PaddingHeight(MenubuttonArrowPadding);
+}
+
+static void MenubuttonArrowElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    MenubuttonArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    XColor *arrowColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, arrow->colorObj);
+    GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(arrowColor, d);
+    int size = MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE;
+    int postDirection = POST_BELOW;
+    ArrowDirection arrowDirection = ARROW_DOWN;
+    int width = 0, height = 0;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, arrow->sizeObj, &size);
+    Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(NULL, arrow->directionObj, directionStrings,
+	   ""/*message*/, 0/*flags*/, &postDirection);
+
+    /* ... this might not be such a great idea ... */
+    switch (postDirection) {
+	case POST_ABOVE:	arrowDirection = ARROW_UP; break;
+	case POST_BELOW:	arrowDirection = ARROW_DOWN; break;
+	case POST_LEFT:		arrowDirection = ARROW_LEFT; break;
+	case POST_RIGHT:	arrowDirection = ARROW_RIGHT; break;
+	case POST_FLUSH:	arrowDirection = ARROW_DOWN; break;
+    }
+
+    TtkArrowSize(size, arrowDirection, &width, &height);
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, MenubuttonArrowPadding);
+    b = Ttk_AnchorBox(b, width, height, TK_ANCHOR_CENTER);
+    TtkFillArrow(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, b, arrowDirection);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec MenubuttonArrowElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(MenubuttonArrowElement),
+    MenubuttonArrowElementOptions,
+    MenubuttonArrowElementSize,
+    MenubuttonArrowElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Trough element
+ *
+ * Used in scrollbars and the scale.
+ *
+ * The -groovewidth option can be used to set the size of the short axis
+ * for the drawn area. This will not affect the geometry, but can be used
+ * to draw a thin centered trough inside the packet alloted. This is used
+ * to show a win32-style scale widget. Use -1 or a large number to use the
+ * full area (default).
+ *
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *grooveWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *orientObj;
+} TroughElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TroughElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement, orientObj), "horizontal" },
+    { "-troughborderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement,borderWidthObj), "1" },
+    { "-troughcolor", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement,colorObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-troughrelief",TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement,reliefObj), "sunken" },
+    { "-groovewidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement,grooveWidthObj), "-1" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void TroughElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    TroughElement *troughPtr = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 2, grooveWidth = 0;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->grooveWidthObj, &grooveWidth);
+
+    if (grooveWidth <= 0) {
+	*paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+    }
+}
+
+static void TroughElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    TroughElement *troughPtr = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = NULL;
+    int borderWidth = 2, relief = TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN, groove = -1, orient;
+
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, troughPtr->colorObj);
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, troughPtr->orientObj, &orient);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, troughPtr->reliefObj, &relief);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->grooveWidthObj, &groove);
+
+    if (groove != -1 && groove < b.height && groove < b.width) {
+	if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	    b.y = b.y + b.height/2 - groove/2;
+	    b.height = groove;
+	} else {
+	    b.x = b.x + b.width/2 - groove/2;
+	    b.width = groove;
+	}
+    }
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height,
+	    borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TroughElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TroughElement),
+    TroughElementOptions,
+    TroughElementSize,
+    TroughElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Thumb element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *firstObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *lastObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *orientObj;
+} ThumbElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ThumbElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-width", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,sizeObj),
+        STRINGIFY(SCROLLBAR_WIDTH) },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,borderObj),
+	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR, Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,borderColorObj),
+	"black" },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,reliefObj),"raised" },
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY,Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,orientObj),"horizontal"},
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void ThumbElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ThumbElement *thumb = elementRecord;
+    int orient, size;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, thumb->sizeObj, &size);
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, thumb->orientObj, &orient);
+
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	*widthPtr = size;
+	*heightPtr = MIN_THUMB_SIZE;
+    } else {
+	*widthPtr = MIN_THUMB_SIZE;
+	*heightPtr = size;
+    }
+}
+
+static void ThumbElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    ThumbElement *thumb = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, thumb->borderObj);
+    XColor *borderColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, thumb->borderColorObj);
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+
+    /*
+     * Don't draw the thumb if we are disabled.
+     * This makes it behave like Windows ... if that's what we want.
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED)
+	return;
+     */
+
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, thumb->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(
+	tkwin, d, border, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    DrawBorder(tkwin, d, border, borderColor, b, borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ThumbElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ThumbElement),
+    ThumbElementOptions,
+    ThumbElementSize,
+    ThumbElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Slider element.
+ *
+ * This is the moving part of the scale widget.
+ *
+ * The slider element is the thumb in the scale widget. This is drawn
+ * as an arrow-type element that can point up, down, left or right.
+ *
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *lengthObj;		/* Long axis dimension */
+    Tcl_Obj *thicknessObj;	/* Short axis dimension */
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;		/* Relief for this object */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;		/* Border / background color */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderColorObj;	/* Additional border color */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *orientObj;		/* Orientation of overall slider */
+} SliderElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec SliderElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-sliderlength", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,lengthObj),
+	"15" },
+    { "-sliderthickness",TK_OPTION_PIXELS,Tk_Offset(SliderElement,thicknessObj),
+	"15" },
+    { "-sliderrelief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,reliefObj),
+	"raised" },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,borderWidthObj),
+	STRINGIFY(BORDERWIDTH) },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,borderObj),
+	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR, Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,borderColorObj),
+	"black" },
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,orientObj),
+	"horizontal" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void SliderElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    SliderElement *slider = elementRecord;
+    int orient, length, thickness, borderWidth;
+
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, slider->orientObj, &orient);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->lengthObj, &length);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->thicknessObj, &thickness);
+
+    switch (orient) {
+	case TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL:
+	    *widthPtr = thickness + (borderWidth *2);
+	    *heightPtr = *widthPtr/2;
+	    break;
+
+	case TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL:
+	    *heightPtr = thickness + (borderWidth *2);
+	    *widthPtr = *heightPtr/2;
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+static void SliderElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    SliderElement *slider = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, slider->borderObj);
+    XColor *borderColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, slider->borderColorObj);
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED, borderWidth = 2;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, slider->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height,
+	borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    DrawBorder(tkwin, d, border, borderColor, b, borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SliderElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SliderElement),
+    SliderElementOptions,
+    SliderElementSize,
+    SliderElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tree indicator element.
+ */
+
+#define TTK_STATE_OPEN TTK_STATE_USER1		/* XREF: treeview.c */
+#define TTK_STATE_LEAF TTK_STATE_USER2
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *marginObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *diameterObj;
+} TreeitemIndicator;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TreeitemIndicatorOptions[] = {
+    { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(TreeitemIndicator,colorObj), DEFAULT_FOREGROUND },
+    { "-diameter", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(TreeitemIndicator,diameterObj), "9" },
+    { "-indicatormargins", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(TreeitemIndicator,marginObj), "2 2 4 2" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void TreeitemIndicatorSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    TreeitemIndicator *indicator = elementRecord;
+    int diameter = 0;
+    Ttk_Padding margins;
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, &margins);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->diameterObj, &diameter);
+    *widthPtr = diameter + Ttk_PaddingWidth(margins);
+    *heightPtr = diameter + Ttk_PaddingHeight(margins);
+}
+
+static void TreeitemIndicatorDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    TreeitemIndicator *indicator = elementRecord;
+    XColor *color = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->colorObj);
+    GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(color, d);
+    Ttk_Padding padding = Ttk_UniformPadding(0);
+    int w = WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK;
+    int cx, cy;
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_LEAF) {
+	/* don't draw anything ... */
+	return;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,tkwin,indicator->marginObj,&padding);
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, padding);
+
+    XDrawRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc,
+	    b.x, b.y, b.width - 1, b.height - 1);
+
+    cx = b.x + (b.width - 1) / 2;
+    cy = b.y + (b.height - 1) / 2;
+    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, b.x+2, cy, b.x+b.width-3+w, cy);
+
+    if (!(state & TTK_STATE_OPEN)) {
+	/* turn '-' into a '+' */
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, cx, b.y+2, cx, b.y+b.height-3+w);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TreeitemIndicatorElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TreeitemIndicator),
+    TreeitemIndicatorOptions,
+    TreeitemIndicatorSize,
+    TreeitemIndicatorDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * TtkAltTheme_Init --
+ * 	Install alternate theme.
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE int TtkAltTheme_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme =  Ttk_CreateTheme(interp, "alt", NULL);
+
+    if (!theme) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "border", &BorderElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Checkbutton.indicator",
+	    &IndicatorElementSpec, &checkbutton_spec);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Radiobutton.indicator",
+	    &IndicatorElementSpec, &radiobutton_spec);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Menubutton.indicator",
+	    &MenubuttonArrowElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "field", &FieldElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "trough", &TroughElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "thumb", &ThumbElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "slider", &SliderElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "uparrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "downarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[1]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "leftarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[2]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "rightarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[3]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "arrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "arrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Treeitem.indicator",
+	    &TreeitemIndicatorElementSpec, 0);
+
+    Tcl_PkgProvide(interp, "ttk::theme::alt", TTK_VERSION);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkElements.c b/generic/ttk/ttkElements.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..22af1d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkElements.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1281 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2003, Joe English
+ *
+ * Default implementation for themed elements.
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <tcl.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+#define DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH "2"
+#define DEFAULT_ARROW_SIZE "15"
+#define MIN_THUMB_SIZE 10
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Null element.  Does nothing; used as a stub.
+ * Null element methods, option table and element spec are public,
+ * and may be used in other engines.
+ */
+
+/* public */ Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TtkNullElementOptions[] = { { NULL, 0, 0, NULL } };
+
+/* public */ void
+TtkNullElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+}
+
+/* public */ void
+TtkNullElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+}
+
+/* public */ Ttk_ElementSpec ttkNullElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(NullElement),
+    TtkNullElementOptions,
+    TtkNullElementSize,
+    TtkNullElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Background and fill elements.
+ *
+ * The fill element fills its parcel with the background color.
+ * The background element ignores the parcel, and fills the entire window.
+ *
+ * Ttk_GetLayout() automatically includes a background element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*backgroundObj;
+} BackgroundElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec BackgroundElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	    Tk_Offset(BackgroundElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void FillElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    BackgroundElement *bg = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder backgroundPtr = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin,bg->backgroundObj);
+
+    XFillRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+	Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, backgroundPtr, TK_3D_FLAT_GC),
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height);
+}
+
+static void BackgroundElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    FillElementDraw(
+	clientData, elementRecord, tkwin,
+	d, Ttk_WinBox(tkwin), state);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec FillElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(BackgroundElement),
+    BackgroundElementOptions,
+    TtkNullElementSize,
+    FillElementDraw
+};
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec BackgroundElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(BackgroundElement),
+    BackgroundElementOptions,
+    TtkNullElementSize,
+    BackgroundElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Border element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*reliefObj;
+} BorderElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec BorderElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,borderObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,borderWidthObj), DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,reliefObj), "flat" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void BorderElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    BorderElement *bd = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 0;
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, bd->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static void BorderElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    BorderElement *bd = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = NULL;
+    int borderWidth = 1, relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, bd->borderObj);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, bd->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, bd->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    if (border && borderWidth > 0 && relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
+	Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	    b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth,relief);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec BorderElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(BorderElement),
+    BorderElementOptions,
+    BorderElementSize,
+    BorderElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Field element.
+ * 	Used for editable fields.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderWidthObj;
+} FieldElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec FieldElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-fieldbackground", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(FieldElement,borderObj), "white" },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(FieldElement,borderWidthObj), "2" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void FieldElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    FieldElement *field = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, field->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static void FieldElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    FieldElement *field = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, field->borderObj);
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, field->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	    b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec FieldElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(FieldElement),
+    FieldElementOptions,
+    FieldElementSize,
+    FieldElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Padding element.
+ *
+ * This element has no visual representation, only geometry.
+ * It adds a (possibly non-uniform) internal border.
+ * In addition, if "-shiftrelief" is specified,
+ * adds additional pixels to shift child elements "in" or "out"
+ * depending on the -relief.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*paddingObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*shiftreliefObj;
+} PaddingElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec PaddingElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-padding", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(PaddingElement,paddingObj), "0" },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(PaddingElement,reliefObj), "flat" },
+    { "-shiftrelief", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(PaddingElement,shiftreliefObj), "0" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void PaddingElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    PaddingElement *padding = elementRecord;
+    int shiftRelief = 0;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+    Ttk_Padding pad;
+
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, padding->reliefObj, &relief);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, padding->shiftreliefObj, &shiftRelief);
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,tkwin,padding->paddingObj,&pad);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_RelievePadding(pad, relief, shiftRelief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec PaddingElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(PaddingElement),
+    PaddingElementOptions,
+    PaddingElementSize,
+    TtkNullElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Focus ring element.
+ * 	Draws a dashed focus ring, if the widget has keyboard focus.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*focusColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*focusThicknessObj;
+} FocusElement;
+
+/*
+ * DrawFocusRing --
+ * 	Draw a dotted rectangle to indicate focus.
+ */
+static void DrawFocusRing(
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Tcl_Obj *colorObj, Ttk_Box b)
+{
+    XColor *color = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, colorObj);
+    unsigned long mask = 0UL;
+    XGCValues gcvalues;
+    GC gc;
+
+    gcvalues.foreground = color->pixel;
+    gcvalues.line_style = LineOnOffDash;
+    gcvalues.line_width = 1;
+    gcvalues.dashes = 1;
+    gcvalues.dash_offset = 1;
+    mask = GCForeground | GCLineStyle | GCDashList | GCDashOffset | GCLineWidth;
+
+    gc = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, mask, &gcvalues);
+    XDrawRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, b.x, b.y, b.width-1, b.height-1);
+    Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec FocusElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-focuscolor",TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(FocusElement,focusColorObj), "black" },
+    { "-focusthickness",TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(FocusElement,focusThicknessObj), "1" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void FocusElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    FocusElement *focus = elementRecord;
+    int focusThickness = 0;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, focus->focusThicknessObj, &focusThickness);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)focusThickness);
+}
+
+static void FocusElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    FocusElement *focus = elementRecord;
+    int focusThickness = 0;
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_FOCUS) {
+	Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL,focus->focusThicknessObj,&focusThickness);
+	DrawFocusRing(tkwin, d, focus->focusColorObj, b);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec FocusElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(FocusElement),
+    FocusElementOptions,
+    FocusElementSize,
+    FocusElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Separator element.
+ * 	Just draws a horizontal or vertical bar.
+ * 	Three elements are defined: horizontal, vertical, and general;
+ *	the general separator checks the "-orient" option.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*orientObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderObj;
+} SeparatorElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec SeparatorElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY,
+	Tk_Offset(SeparatorElement, orientObj), "horizontal" },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(SeparatorElement,borderObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void SeparatorElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = 2;
+}
+
+static void HorizontalSeparatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    SeparatorElement *separator = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, separator->borderObj);
+    GC lightGC = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC);
+    GC darkGC = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC);
+
+    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, darkGC, b.x, b.y, b.x + b.width, b.y);
+    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, lightGC, b.x, b.y+1, b.x + b.width, b.y+1);
+}
+
+static void VerticalSeparatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    SeparatorElement *separator = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, separator->borderObj);
+    GC lightGC = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC);
+    GC darkGC = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC);
+
+    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, darkGC, b.x, b.y, b.x, b.y + b.height);
+    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, lightGC, b.x+1, b.y, b.x+1, b.y+b.height);
+}
+
+static void GeneralSeparatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    SeparatorElement *separator = elementRecord;
+    int orient;
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, separator->orientObj, &orient);
+    switch (orient) {
+	case TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL:
+	    HorizontalSeparatorElementDraw(
+		clientData, elementRecord, tkwin, d, b, state);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL:
+	    VerticalSeparatorElementDraw(
+		clientData, elementRecord, tkwin, d, b, state);
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec HorizontalSeparatorElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SeparatorElement),
+    SeparatorElementOptions,
+    SeparatorElementSize,
+    HorizontalSeparatorElementDraw
+};
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec VerticalSeparatorElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SeparatorElement),
+    SeparatorElementOptions,
+    SeparatorElementSize,
+    HorizontalSeparatorElementDraw
+};
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SeparatorElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SeparatorElement),
+    SeparatorElementOptions,
+    SeparatorElementSize,
+    GeneralSeparatorElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Sizegrip: lower-right corner grip handle for resizing window.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*backgroundObj;
+} SizegripElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec SizegripOptions[] = {
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(SizegripElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    {0,0,0,0}
+};
+
+static void SizegripSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    int gripCount = 3, gripSpace = 2, gripThickness = 3;
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = gripCount * (gripSpace + gripThickness);
+}
+
+static void SizegripDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    SizegripElement *grip = elementRecord;
+    int gripCount = 3, gripSpace = 2;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, grip->backgroundObj);
+    GC lightGC = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC);
+    GC darkGC = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC);
+    int x1 = b.x + b.width-1, y1 = b.y + b.height-1, x2 = x1, y2 = y1;
+
+    while (gripCount--) {
+	x1 -= gripSpace; y2 -= gripSpace;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, darkGC,  x1,y1, x2,y2); --x1; --y2;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, darkGC,  x1,y1, x2,y2); --x1; --y2;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, lightGC, x1,y1, x2,y2); --x1; --y2;
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SizegripElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SizegripElement),
+    SizegripOptions,
+    SizegripSize,
+    SizegripDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Indicator element.
+ *
+ * Draws the on/off indicator for checkbuttons and radiobuttons.
+ *
+ * Draws a 3-D square (or diamond), raised if off, sunken if on.
+ *
+ * This is actually a regression from Tk 8.5 back to the ugly old Motif
+ * style; use "altTheme" for the newer, nicer version.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *diameterObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *marginObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+} IndicatorElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec IndicatorElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-indicatorcolor", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,colorObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-indicatorrelief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,reliefObj), "raised" },
+    { "-indicatordiameter", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,diameterObj), "12" },
+    { "-indicatormargin", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,marginObj), "0 2 4 2" },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,borderWidthObj), DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+/*
+ * Checkbutton indicators (default): 3-D square.
+ */
+static void SquareIndicatorElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    Ttk_Padding margins;
+    int diameter = 0;
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, &margins);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->diameterObj, &diameter);
+    *widthPtr = diameter + Ttk_PaddingWidth(margins);
+    *heightPtr = diameter + Ttk_PaddingHeight(margins);
+}
+
+static void SquareIndicatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = 0, interior = 0;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    Ttk_Padding padding;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    int diameter;
+
+    interior = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, indicator->colorObj);
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, indicator->backgroundObj);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL,indicator->borderWidthObj,&borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL,indicator->reliefObj,&relief);
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,tkwin,indicator->marginObj,&padding);
+
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, padding);
+
+    diameter = b.width < b.height ? b.width : b.height;
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, interior, b.x, b.y,
+	    diameter, diameter,borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y,
+	    diameter, diameter, borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Radiobutton indicators:  3-D diamond.
+ */
+static void DiamondIndicatorElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    Ttk_Padding margins;
+    int diameter = 0;
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, &margins);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->diameterObj, &diameter);
+    *widthPtr = diameter + 3 + Ttk_PaddingWidth(margins);
+    *heightPtr = diameter + 3 + Ttk_PaddingHeight(margins);
+}
+
+static void DiamondIndicatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = 0, interior = 0;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    int diameter, radius;
+    XPoint points[4];
+    Ttk_Padding padding;
+
+    interior = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, indicator->colorObj);
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, indicator->backgroundObj);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL,indicator->borderWidthObj,&borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL,indicator->reliefObj,&relief);
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,tkwin,indicator->marginObj,&padding);
+
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, padding);
+
+    diameter = b.width < b.height ? b.width : b.height;
+    radius = diameter / 2;
+
+    points[0].x = b.x;
+    points[0].y = b.y + radius;
+    points[1].x = b.x + radius;
+    points[1].y = b.y + 2*radius;
+    points[2].x = b.x + 2*radius;
+    points[2].y = b.y + radius;
+    points[3].x = b.x + radius;
+    points[3].y = b.y;
+
+    Tk_Fill3DPolygon(tkwin,d,interior,points,4,borderWidth,TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    Tk_Draw3DPolygon(tkwin,d,border,points,4,borderWidth,relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec CheckbuttonIndicatorElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(IndicatorElement),
+    IndicatorElementOptions,
+    SquareIndicatorElementSize,
+    SquareIndicatorElementDraw
+};
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec RadiobuttonIndicatorElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(IndicatorElement),
+    IndicatorElementOptions,
+    DiamondIndicatorElementSize,
+    DiamondIndicatorElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Menubutton indicators.
+ *
+ * These aren't functional like radio/check indicators,
+ * they're just affordability indicators.
+ *
+ * Standard Tk sets the indicator size to 4.0 mm by 1.7 mm.
+ * I have no idea where these numbers came from.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *widthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *heightObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *marginObj;
+} MenuIndicatorElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec MenuIndicatorElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-indicatorwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,widthObj), "4.0m" },
+    { "-indicatorheight", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,heightObj), "1.7m" },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,borderWidthObj), DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-indicatorrelief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,reliefObj),"raised" },
+    { "-indicatormargin", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	    Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,marginObj), "5 0" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void MenuIndicatorElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    MenuIndicatorElement *mi = elementRecord;
+    Ttk_Padding margins;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, mi->widthObj, widthPtr);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, mi->heightObj, heightPtr);
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,tkwin,mi->marginObj, &margins);
+    *widthPtr += Ttk_PaddingWidth(margins);
+    *heightPtr += Ttk_PaddingHeight(margins);
+}
+
+static void MenuIndicatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    MenuIndicatorElement *mi = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, mi->backgroundObj);
+    Ttk_Padding margins;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,tkwin,mi->marginObj,&margins);
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, margins);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, mi->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height,
+	    borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec MenuIndicatorElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(MenuIndicatorElement),
+    MenuIndicatorElementOptions,
+    MenuIndicatorElementSize,
+    MenuIndicatorElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Arrow elements.
+ *
+ * 	Draws a solid triangle inside a box.
+ * 	clientData is an enum ArrowDirection pointer.
+ */
+
+static int ArrowElements[] = { ARROW_UP, ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT };
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+} ArrowElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ArrowElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,borderObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-relief",TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,reliefObj),"raised"},
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,borderWidthObj), "1" },
+    { "-arrowcolor",TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,colorObj),"black"},
+    { "-arrowsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,sizeObj), "14" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static Ttk_Padding ArrowMargins = { 3,3,3,3 };
+
+static void ArrowElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    int direction = *(int *)clientData;
+    int width = 14;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, arrow->sizeObj, &width);
+    width -= Ttk_PaddingWidth(ArrowMargins);
+    TtkArrowSize(width/2, direction, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    *widthPtr += Ttk_PaddingWidth(ArrowMargins);
+    *heightPtr += Ttk_PaddingWidth(ArrowMargins);
+}
+
+static void ArrowElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    int direction = *(int *)clientData;
+    ArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, arrow->borderObj);
+    XColor *arrowColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, arrow->colorObj);
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    int borderWidth = 1;
+
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, arrow->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(
+	tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth, relief);
+
+    TtkFillArrow(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, Tk_GCForColor(arrowColor, d),
+	Ttk_PadBox(b, ArrowMargins), direction);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ArrowElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ArrowElement),
+    ArrowElementOptions,
+    ArrowElementSize,
+    ArrowElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Trough element.
+ *
+ * Used in scrollbars and scales in place of "border".
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+} TroughElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TroughElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement,borderWidthObj), DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-troughcolor", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement,colorObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-troughrelief",TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement,reliefObj), "sunken" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void TroughElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    TroughElement *troughPtr = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static void TroughElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    TroughElement *troughPtr = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = NULL;
+    int borderWidth = 2, relief = TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN;
+
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, troughPtr->colorObj);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, troughPtr->reliefObj, &relief);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height,
+	    borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TroughElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TroughElement),
+    TroughElementOptions,
+    TroughElementSize,
+    TroughElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Thumb element.
+ *
+ * Used in scrollbars.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *orientObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *thicknessObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+} ThumbElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ThumbElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY,
+	Tk_Offset(ThumbElement, orientObj), "horizontal" },
+    { "-width", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,thicknessObj), DEFAULT_ARROW_SIZE },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,reliefObj), "raised" },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,borderObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,borderWidthObj), DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void ThumbElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ThumbElement *thumb = elementRecord;
+    int orient, thickness;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, thumb->thicknessObj, &thickness);
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, thumb->orientObj, &orient);
+
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	*widthPtr = thickness;
+	*heightPtr = MIN_THUMB_SIZE;
+    } else {
+	*widthPtr = MIN_THUMB_SIZE;
+	*heightPtr = thickness;
+    }
+}
+
+static void ThumbElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    ThumbElement *thumb = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder  border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, thumb->borderObj);
+    int borderWidth = 2, relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, thumb->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, thumb->reliefObj, &relief);
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height,
+	    borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ThumbElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ThumbElement),
+    ThumbElementOptions,
+    ThumbElementSize,
+    ThumbElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Slider element.
+ *
+ * This is the moving part of the scale widget.  Drawn as a raised box.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *orientObj;	     /* orientation of overall slider */
+    Tcl_Obj *lengthObj;      /* slider length */
+    Tcl_Obj *thicknessObj;   /* slider thickness */
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;      /* the relief for this object */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;      /* the background color */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj; /* the size of the border */
+} SliderElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec SliderElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-sliderlength", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,lengthObj),
+	"30" },
+    { "-sliderthickness",TK_OPTION_PIXELS,Tk_Offset(SliderElement,thicknessObj),
+	"15" },
+    { "-sliderrelief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,reliefObj),
+	"raised" },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,borderWidthObj),
+	DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,borderObj),
+	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,orientObj),
+	"horizontal" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void SliderElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    SliderElement *slider = elementRecord;
+    int orient, length, thickness;
+
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, slider->orientObj, &orient);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->lengthObj, &length);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->thicknessObj, &thickness);
+
+    switch (orient) {
+	case TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL:
+	    *widthPtr = thickness;
+	    *heightPtr = length;
+	    break;
+
+	case TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL:
+	    *widthPtr = length;
+	    *heightPtr = thickness;
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+static void SliderElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    SliderElement *slider = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = NULL;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED, borderWidth = 2, orient;
+
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, slider->borderObj);
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, slider->orientObj, &orient);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, slider->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height,
+	borderWidth, relief);
+
+    if (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
+	if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	    if (b.width > 4) {
+		b.x += b.width/2;
+		XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+		    Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC),
+		    b.x-1, b.y+borderWidth, b.x-1, b.y+b.height-borderWidth);
+		XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+		    Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC),
+		    b.x, b.y+borderWidth, b.x, b.y+b.height-borderWidth);
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    if (b.height > 4) {
+		b.y += b.height/2;
+		XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+		    Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC),
+		    b.x+borderWidth, b.y-1, b.x+b.width-borderWidth, b.y-1);
+		XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+		    Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC),
+		    b.x+borderWidth, b.y, b.x+b.width-borderWidth, b.y);
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SliderElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SliderElement),
+    SliderElementOptions,
+    SliderElementSize,
+    SliderElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Progress bar element:
+ *	Draws the moving part of the progress bar.
+ *
+ *	-thickness specifies the size along the short axis of the bar.
+ *	-length specifies the default size along the long axis;
+ *	the bar will be this long in indeterminate mode.
+ */
+
+#define DEFAULT_PBAR_THICKNESS "15"
+#define DEFAULT_PBAR_LENGTH "30"
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *orientObj; 	/* widget orientation */
+    Tcl_Obj *thicknessObj;	/* the height/width of the bar */
+    Tcl_Obj *lengthObj;		/* default width/height of the bar */
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj; 	/* border relief for this object */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj; 	/* background color */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj; 	/* thickness of the border */
+} PbarElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec PbarElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY, Tk_Offset(PbarElement,orientObj),
+	"horizontal" },
+    { "-thickness", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(PbarElement,thicknessObj),
+	DEFAULT_PBAR_THICKNESS },
+    { "-barsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(PbarElement,lengthObj),
+	DEFAULT_PBAR_LENGTH },
+    { "-pbarrelief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(PbarElement,reliefObj),
+	"raised" },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(PbarElement,borderWidthObj),
+	DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(PbarElement,borderObj),
+	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void PbarElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    PbarElement *pbar = elementRecord;
+    int orient, thickness = 15, length = 30, borderWidth = 2;
+
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, pbar->orientObj, &orient);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, pbar->thicknessObj, &thickness);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, pbar->lengthObj, &length);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, pbar->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+
+    switch (orient) {
+	case TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL:
+	    *widthPtr	= length + 2 * borderWidth;
+	    *heightPtr	= thickness + 2 * borderWidth;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL:
+	    *widthPtr	= thickness + 2 * borderWidth;
+	    *heightPtr	= length + 2 * borderWidth;
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+static void PbarElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    PbarElement *pbar = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, pbar->borderObj);
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED, borderWidth = 2;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, pbar->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, pbar->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height,
+	borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec PbarElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(PbarElement),
+    PbarElementOptions,
+    PbarElementSize,
+    PbarElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Notebook tabs and client area.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+} TabElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TabElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(TabElement,borderWidthObj),"1" },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(TabElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    {0,0,0,0}
+};
+
+static void TabElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    TabElement *tab = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 1;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(0, tkwin, tab->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    paddingPtr->top = paddingPtr->left = paddingPtr->right = borderWidth;
+    paddingPtr->bottom = 0;
+}
+
+static void TabElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    TabElement *tab = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, tab->backgroundObj);
+    int borderWidth = 1;
+    int cut = 2;
+    XPoint pts[6];
+    int n = 0;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, tab->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_SELECTED) {
+	/*
+	 * Draw slightly outside of the allocated parcel,
+	 * to overwrite the client area border.
+	 */
+	b.height += borderWidth;
+    }
+
+    pts[n].x = b.x; 			pts[n].y = b.y + b.height - 1; ++n;
+    pts[n].x = b.x;			pts[n].y = b.y + cut; ++n;
+    pts[n].x = b.x + cut;  		pts[n].y = b.y; ++n;
+    pts[n].x = b.x + b.width-1-cut;	pts[n].y = b.y; ++n;
+    pts[n].x = b.x + b.width-1; 	pts[n].y = b.y + cut; ++n;
+    pts[n].x = b.x + b.width-1; 	pts[n].y = b.y + b.height; ++n;
+
+    XFillPolygon(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+	Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_FLAT_GC),
+	pts, 6, Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
+
+#ifndef WIN32
+    /*
+     * Account for whether XDrawLines draws endpoints by platform
+     */
+    --pts[5].y;
+#endif
+
+    while (borderWidth--) {
+	XDrawLines(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+		Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC),
+		pts, 4, CoordModeOrigin);
+	XDrawLines(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+		Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC),
+		pts+3, 3, CoordModeOrigin);
+	++pts[0].x; ++pts[1].x; ++pts[2].x;             --pts[4].x; --pts[5].x;
+	                        ++pts[2].y; ++pts[3].y;
+    }
+
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TabElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TabElement),
+    TabElementOptions,
+    TabElementSize,
+    TabElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ * Client area element:
+ * Uses same resources as tab element.
+ */
+typedef TabElement ClientElement;
+#define ClientElementOptions TabElementOptions
+
+static void ClientElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    ClientElement *ce = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, ce->backgroundObj);
+    int borderWidth = 1;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, ce->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth,TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+}
+
+static void ClientElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ClientElement *ce = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 1;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(0, tkwin, ce->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ClientElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ClientElement),
+    ClientElementOptions,
+    ClientElementSize,
+    ClientElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * TtkElements_Init --
+ *	Register default element implementations.
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE
+void TtkElements_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme =  Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    /*
+     * Elements:
+     */
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "background",
+	    &BackgroundElementSpec,NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "fill", &FillElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "border", &BorderElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "field", &FieldElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "focus", &FocusElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "padding", &PaddingElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Checkbutton.indicator",
+	    &CheckbuttonIndicatorElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Radiobutton.indicator",
+	    &RadiobuttonIndicatorElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Menubutton.indicator",
+	    &MenuIndicatorElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "indicator", &ttkNullElementSpec,NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "uparrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "downarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[1]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "leftarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[2]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "rightarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[3]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "arrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "trough", &TroughElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "thumb", &ThumbElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "slider", &SliderElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "pbar", &PbarElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "separator",
+	    &SeparatorElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "hseparator",
+	    &HorizontalSeparatorElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "vseparator",
+	    &VerticalSeparatorElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "sizegrip", &SizegripElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "tab", &TabElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "client", &ClientElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    /*
+     * Register "default" as a user-loadable theme (for now):
+     */
+    Tcl_PkgProvide(interp, "ttk::theme::default", TTK_VERSION);
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkEntry.c b/generic/ttk/ttkEntry.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c280e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkEntry.c
@@ -0,0 +1,2048 @@
+/*
+ * DERIVED FROM: tk/generic/tkEntry.c r1.35.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
+ * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ * Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
+ * Copyright (c) 2002 ActiveState Corporation.
+ * Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <tkInt.h>
+#include <X11/Xatom.h>
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/*
+ * Extra bits for core.flags:
+ */
+#define GOT_SELECTION		(WIDGET_USER_FLAG<<1)
+#define SYNCING_VARIABLE	(WIDGET_USER_FLAG<<2)
+#define VALIDATING		(WIDGET_USER_FLAG<<3)
+#define VALIDATION_SET_VALUE	(WIDGET_USER_FLAG<<4)
+
+/*
+ * Definitions for -validate option values:
+ */
+typedef enum validateMode {
+    VMODE_ALL, VMODE_KEY, VMODE_FOCUS, VMODE_FOCUSIN, VMODE_FOCUSOUT, VMODE_NONE
+} VMODE;
+
+static const char *const validateStrings[] = {
+    "all", "key", "focus", "focusin", "focusout", "none", NULL
+};
+
+/*
+ * Validation reasons:
+ */
+typedef enum validateReason {
+    VALIDATE_INSERT, VALIDATE_DELETE,
+    VALIDATE_FOCUSIN, VALIDATE_FOCUSOUT,
+    VALIDATE_FORCED
+} VREASON;
+
+static const char *const validateReasonStrings[] = {
+    "key", "key", "focusin", "focusout", "forced", NULL
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Entry widget record.
+ *
+ * Dependencies:
+ *
+ * textVariableTrace	: textVariableObj
+ *
+ * numBytes,numChars	: string
+ * displayString	: numChars, showChar
+ * layoutHeight,
+ * layoutWidth,
+ * textLayout		: fontObj, displayString
+ * layoutX, layoutY	: textLayout, justify, xscroll.first
+ *
+ * Invariants:
+ *
+ * 0 <= insertPos <= numChars
+ * 0 <= selectFirst < selectLast <= numChars || selectFirst == selectLast == -1
+ * displayString points to string if showChar == NULL,
+ * or to malloc'ed storage if showChar != NULL.
+ */
+
+/* Style parameters:
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *foregroundObj;	/* Foreground color for normal text */
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;	/* Entry widget background color */
+    Tcl_Obj *selBorderObj;	/* Border and background for selection */
+    Tcl_Obj *selBorderWidthObj;	/* Width of selection border */
+    Tcl_Obj *selForegroundObj;	/* Foreground color for selected text */
+    Tcl_Obj *insertColorObj;	/* Color of insertion cursor */
+    Tcl_Obj *insertWidthObj;	/* Insert cursor width */
+} EntryStyleData;
+
+typedef struct {
+    /*
+     * Internal state:
+     */
+    char *string;		/* Storage for string (malloced) */
+    int numBytes;		/* Length of string in bytes. */
+    int numChars;		/* Length of string in characters. */
+
+    int insertPos;		/* Insert index */
+    int selectFirst;		/* Index of start of selection, or -1 */
+    int selectLast;		/* Index of end of selection, or -1 */
+
+    Scrollable xscroll;		/* Current scroll position */
+    ScrollHandle xscrollHandle;
+
+    /*
+     * Options managed by Tk_SetOptions:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *textVariableObj;	/* Name of linked variable */
+    int exportSelection;	/* Tie internal selection to X selection? */
+
+    VMODE validate;		/* Validation mode */
+    char *validateCmd;		/* Validation script template */
+    char *invalidCmd;		/* Invalid callback script template */
+
+    char *showChar;		/* Used to derive displayString */
+
+    Tcl_Obj *fontObj;		/* Text font to use */
+    Tcl_Obj *widthObj;		/* Desired width of window (in avgchars) */
+    Tk_Justify justify;		/* Text justification */
+
+    EntryStyleData styleData;	/* Display style data (widget options) */
+    EntryStyleData styleDefaults;/* Style defaults (fallback values) */
+
+    Tcl_Obj *stateObj;		/* Compatibility option -- see CheckStateObj */
+
+    /*
+     * Derived resources:
+     */
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *textVariableTrace;
+
+    char *displayString;	/* String to use when displaying */
+    Tk_TextLayout textLayout;	/* Cached text layout information. */
+    int layoutWidth;		/* textLayout width */
+    int layoutHeight;		/* textLayout height */
+
+    int layoutX, layoutY;	/* Origin for text layout. */
+
+} EntryPart;
+
+typedef struct {
+    WidgetCore	core;
+    EntryPart	entry;
+} Entry;
+
+/*
+ * Extra mask bits for Tk_SetOptions()
+ */
+#define STATE_CHANGED	 	(0x100)	/* -state option changed */
+#define TEXTVAR_CHANGED	 	(0x200)	/* -textvariable option changed */
+#define SCROLLCMD_CHANGED	(0x400)	/* -xscrollcommand option changed */
+
+/*
+ * Default option values:
+ */
+#define DEF_SELECT_BG	"#000000"
+#define DEF_SELECT_FG	"#ffffff"
+#define DEF_INSERT_BG	"black"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_WIDTH	"20"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_FONT	"TkTextFont"
+#define DEF_LIST_HEIGHT	"10"
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec EntryOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection",
+        "ExportSelection", "1", -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.exportSelection),
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
+	DEF_ENTRY_FONT, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.fontObj),-1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-invalidcommand", "invalidCommand", "InvalidCommand",
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.invalidCmd),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
+	"left", -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.justify),
+	0, 0, GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-show", "show", "Show",
+        NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.showChar),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-state", "state", "State",
+	"normal", Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.stateObj), -1,
+        0,0,STATE_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.textVariableObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,TEXTVAR_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-validate", "validate", "Validate",
+	"none", -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.validate),
+	0, (ClientData) validateStrings, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-validatecommand", "validateCommand", "ValidateCommand",
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.validateCmd),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
+	DEF_ENTRY_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.widthObj), -1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-xscrollcommand", "xScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.xscroll.scrollCmd),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, SCROLLCMD_CHANGED},
+
+    /* EntryStyleData options:
+     */
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "textColor", "TextColor",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.styleData.foregroundObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-background", "windowColor", "WindowColor",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.styleData.backgroundObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
+
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_TRUE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(ttkCoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ EntryStyleData management.
+ * 	This is still more awkward than it should be;
+ * 	it should be able to use the Element API instead.
+ */
+
+/* EntryInitStyleDefaults --
+ * 	Initialize EntryStyleData record to fallback values.
+ */
+static void EntryInitStyleDefaults(EntryStyleData *es)
+{
+#define INIT(member, value) \
+	es->member = Tcl_NewStringObj(value, -1); \
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(es->member);
+    INIT(foregroundObj, DEFAULT_FOREGROUND)
+    INIT(selBorderObj, DEF_SELECT_BG)
+    INIT(selForegroundObj, DEF_SELECT_FG)
+    INIT(insertColorObj, DEFAULT_FOREGROUND)
+    INIT(selBorderWidthObj, "0")
+    INIT(insertWidthObj, "1")
+#undef INIT
+}
+
+static void EntryFreeStyleDefaults(EntryStyleData *es)
+{
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(es->foregroundObj);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(es->selBorderObj);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(es->selForegroundObj);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(es->insertColorObj);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(es->selBorderWidthObj);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(es->insertWidthObj);
+}
+
+/*
+ * EntryInitStyleData --
+ * 	Look up style-specific data for an entry widget.
+ */
+static void EntryInitStyleData(Entry *entryPtr, EntryStyleData *es)
+{
+    Ttk_State state = entryPtr->core.state;
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache = Ttk_GetResourceCache(entryPtr->core.interp);
+    Tk_Window tkwin = entryPtr->core.tkwin;
+    Tcl_Obj *tmp;
+
+    /* Initialize to fallback values:
+     */
+    *es = entryPtr->entry.styleDefaults;
+
+#   define INIT(member, name) \
+    if ((tmp=Ttk_QueryOption(entryPtr->core.layout,name,state))) \
+    	es->member=tmp;
+    INIT(foregroundObj, "-foreground");
+    INIT(selBorderObj, "-selectbackground")
+    INIT(selBorderWidthObj, "-selectborderwidth")
+    INIT(selForegroundObj, "-selectforeground")
+    INIT(insertColorObj, "-insertcolor")
+    INIT(insertWidthObj, "-insertwidth")
+#undef INIT
+
+    /* Reacquire color & border resources from resource cache.
+     */
+    es->foregroundObj = Ttk_UseColor(cache, tkwin, es->foregroundObj);
+    es->selForegroundObj = Ttk_UseColor(cache, tkwin, es->selForegroundObj);
+    es->insertColorObj = Ttk_UseColor(cache, tkwin, es->insertColorObj);
+    es->selBorderObj = Ttk_UseBorder(cache, tkwin, es->selBorderObj);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Resource management.
+ */
+
+/* EntryDisplayString --
+ * 	Return a malloc'ed string consisting of 'numChars' copies
+ * 	of (the first character in the string) 'showChar'.
+ * 	Used to compute the displayString if -show is non-NULL.
+ */
+static char *EntryDisplayString(const char *showChar, int numChars)
+{
+    char *displayString, *p;
+    int size;
+    Tcl_UniChar ch;
+    char buf[TCL_UTF_MAX];
+
+    Tcl_UtfToUniChar(showChar, &ch);
+    size = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, buf);
+    p = displayString = ckalloc(numChars * size + 1);
+
+    while (numChars--) {
+	p += Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, p);
+    }
+    *p = '\0';
+
+    return displayString;
+}
+
+/* EntryUpdateTextLayout --
+ * 	Recompute textLayout, layoutWidth, and layoutHeight
+ * 	from displayString and fontObj.
+ */
+static void EntryUpdateTextLayout(Entry *entryPtr)
+{
+    Tk_FreeTextLayout(entryPtr->entry.textLayout);
+    entryPtr->entry.textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(
+	    Tk_GetFontFromObj(entryPtr->core.tkwin, entryPtr->entry.fontObj),
+	    entryPtr->entry.displayString, entryPtr->entry.numChars,
+	    0/*wraplength*/, entryPtr->entry.justify, TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES,
+	    &entryPtr->entry.layoutWidth, &entryPtr->entry.layoutHeight);
+}
+
+/* EntryEditable --
+ * 	Returns 1 if the entry widget accepts user changes, 0 otherwise
+ */
+static int
+EntryEditable(Entry *entryPtr)
+{
+    return !(entryPtr->core.state & (TTK_STATE_DISABLED|TTK_STATE_READONLY));
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Selection management.
+ */
+
+/* EntryFetchSelection --
+ *	Selection handler for entry widgets.
+ */
+static int
+EntryFetchSelection(
+    ClientData clientData, int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
+    size_t byteCount;
+    const char *string;
+    const char *selStart, *selEnd;
+
+    if (entryPtr->entry.selectFirst < 0 || !entryPtr->entry.exportSelection) {
+	return -1;
+    }
+    string = entryPtr->entry.displayString;
+
+    selStart = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, entryPtr->entry.selectFirst);
+    selEnd = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(selStart,
+	    entryPtr->entry.selectLast - entryPtr->entry.selectFirst);
+    byteCount = selEnd - selStart - offset;
+    if (byteCount > (size_t)maxBytes) {
+    /* @@@POSSIBLE BUG: Can transfer partial UTF-8 sequences.  Is this OK? */
+	byteCount = maxBytes;
+    }
+    if (byteCount <= 0) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+    memcpy(buffer, selStart + offset, byteCount);
+    buffer[byteCount] = '\0';
+    return byteCount;
+}
+
+/* EntryLostSelection --
+ *	Tk_LostSelProc for Entry widgets; called when an entry
+ *	loses ownership of the selection.
+ */
+static void EntryLostSelection(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
+    entryPtr->core.flags &= ~GOT_SELECTION;
+    entryPtr->entry.selectFirst = entryPtr->entry.selectLast = -1;
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&entryPtr->core);
+}
+
+/* EntryOwnSelection --
+ * 	Assert ownership of the PRIMARY selection,
+ * 	if -exportselection set and selection is present.
+ */
+static void EntryOwnSelection(Entry *entryPtr)
+{
+    if (entryPtr->entry.exportSelection
+	&& !(entryPtr->core.flags & GOT_SELECTION)) {
+	Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->core.tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, EntryLostSelection,
+		(ClientData) entryPtr);
+	entryPtr->core.flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Validation.
+ */
+
+/* ExpandPercents --
+ *	Expand an entry validation script template (-validatecommand
+ *	or -invalidcommand).
+ */
+static void
+ExpandPercents(
+     Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry that needs validation. */
+     const char *template, 	/* Script template */
+     const char *new,		/* Potential new value of entry string */
+     int index,			/* index of insert/delete */
+     int count,			/* #changed characters */
+     VREASON reason,		/* Reason for change */
+     Tcl_DString *dsPtr)	/* Result of %-substitutions */
+{
+    int spaceNeeded, cvtFlags;
+    int number, length;
+    const char *string;
+    int stringLength;
+    Tcl_UniChar ch;
+    char numStorage[2*TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+
+    while (*template) {
+	/* Find everything up to the next % character and append it
+	 * to the result string.
+	 */
+	string = Tcl_UtfFindFirst(template, '%');
+	if (string == NULL) {
+	    /* No more %-sequences to expand.
+	     * Copy the rest of the template.
+	     */
+	    Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, template, -1);
+	    return;
+	}
+	if (string != template) {
+	    Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, template, string - template);
+	    template = string;
+	}
+
+	/* There's a percent sequence here.  Process it.
+	 */
+	++template; /* skip over % */
+	if (*template != '\0') {
+	    template += Tcl_UtfToUniChar(template, &ch);
+	} else {
+	    ch = '%';
+	}
+
+	stringLength = -1;
+	switch (ch) {
+	    case 'd': /* Type of call that caused validation */
+		if (reason == VALIDATE_INSERT) {
+		    number = 1;
+		} else if (reason == VALIDATE_DELETE) {
+		    number = 0;
+		} else {
+		    number = -1;
+		}
+		sprintf(numStorage, "%d", number);
+		string = numStorage;
+		break;
+	    case 'i': /* index of insert/delete */
+		sprintf(numStorage, "%d", index);
+		string = numStorage;
+		break;
+	    case 'P': /* 'Peeked' new value of the string */
+		string = new;
+		break;
+	    case 's': /* Current string value */
+		string = entryPtr->entry.string;
+		break;
+	    case 'S': /* string to be inserted/deleted, if any */
+		if (reason == VALIDATE_INSERT) {
+		    string = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(new, index);
+		    stringLength = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, count) - string;
+		} else if (reason == VALIDATE_DELETE) {
+		    string = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(entryPtr->entry.string, index);
+		    stringLength = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, count) - string;
+		} else {
+		    string = "";
+		    stringLength = 0;
+		}
+		break;
+	    case 'v': /* type of validation currently set */
+		string = validateStrings[entryPtr->entry.validate];
+		break;
+	    case 'V': /* type of validation in effect */
+		string = validateReasonStrings[reason];
+		break;
+	    case 'W': /* widget name */
+		string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->core.tkwin);
+		break;
+	    default:
+		length = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, numStorage);
+		numStorage[length] = '\0';
+		string = numStorage;
+		break;
+	}
+
+	spaceNeeded = Tcl_ScanCountedElement(string, stringLength, &cvtFlags);
+	length = Tcl_DStringLength(dsPtr);
+	Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, length + spaceNeeded);
+	spaceNeeded = Tcl_ConvertCountedElement(string, stringLength,
+		Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + length,
+		cvtFlags | TCL_DONT_USE_BRACES);
+	Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, length + spaceNeeded);
+    }
+}
+
+/* RunValidationScript --
+ * 	Build and evaluate an entry validation script.
+ * 	If the script raises an error, disable validation
+ * 	by setting '-validate none'
+ */
+static int RunValidationScript(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, 	/* Interpreter to use */
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry being validated */
+    const char *template,	/* Script template */
+    const char *optionName,	/* "-validatecommand", "-invalidcommand" */
+    const char *new,		/* Potential new value of entry string */
+    int index,			/* index of insert/delete */
+    int count,			/* #changed characters */
+    VREASON reason)		/* Reason for change */
+{
+    Tcl_DString script;
+    int code;
+
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&script);
+    ExpandPercents(entryPtr, template, new, index, count, reason, &script);
+    code = Tcl_EvalEx(interp,
+		Tcl_DStringValue(&script), Tcl_DStringLength(&script),
+		TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&script);
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(&entryPtr->core))
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (code != TCL_OK && code != TCL_RETURN) {
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n\t(in ");
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, optionName);
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, " validation command executed by ");
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, Tk_PathName(entryPtr->core.tkwin));
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, ")");
+	entryPtr->entry.validate = VMODE_NONE;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* EntryNeedsValidation --
+ * 	Determine whether the specified VREASON should trigger validation
+ * 	in the current VMODE.
+ */
+static int EntryNeedsValidation(VMODE vmode, VREASON reason)
+{
+    return (reason == VALIDATE_FORCED)
+	|| (vmode == VMODE_ALL)
+	|| (reason == VALIDATE_FOCUSIN
+	    && (vmode == VMODE_FOCUSIN || vmode == VMODE_FOCUS))
+	|| (reason == VALIDATE_FOCUSOUT
+	    && (vmode == VMODE_FOCUSOUT || vmode == VMODE_FOCUS))
+	|| (reason == VALIDATE_INSERT && vmode == VMODE_KEY)
+	|| (reason == VALIDATE_DELETE && vmode == VMODE_KEY)
+	;
+}
+
+/* EntryValidateChange --
+ *	Validate a proposed change to the entry widget's value if required.
+ *	Call the -invalidcommand if validation fails.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ *	TCL_OK if the change is accepted
+ *	TCL_BREAK if the change is rejected
+ *      TCL_ERROR if any errors occured
+ *
+ * The change will be rejected if -validatecommand returns 0,
+ * or if -validatecommand or -invalidcommand modifies the value.
+ */
+static int
+EntryValidateChange(
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry that needs validation. */
+    const char *newValue,	/* Potential new value of entry string */
+    int index,			/* index of insert/delete, -1 otherwise */
+    int count,			/* #changed characters */
+    VREASON reason)		/* Reason for change */
+{
+    Tcl_Interp *interp = entryPtr->core.interp;
+    VMODE vmode = entryPtr->entry.validate;
+    int code, change_ok;
+
+    if (   (entryPtr->entry.validateCmd == NULL)
+	|| (entryPtr->core.flags & VALIDATING)
+	|| !EntryNeedsValidation(vmode, reason) )
+    {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    entryPtr->core.flags |= VALIDATING;
+
+    /* Run -validatecommand and check return value:
+     */
+    code = RunValidationScript(interp, entryPtr,
+	    entryPtr->entry.validateCmd, "-validatecommand",
+	    newValue, index, count, reason);
+    if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	goto done;
+    }
+
+    code = Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp,Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), &change_ok);
+    if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	entryPtr->entry.validate = VMODE_NONE;	/* Disable validation */
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
+		"\n(validation command did not return valid boolean)");
+	goto done;
+    }
+
+    /* Run the -invalidcommand if validation failed:
+     */
+    if (!change_ok && entryPtr->entry.invalidCmd != NULL) {
+	code = RunValidationScript(interp, entryPtr,
+		entryPtr->entry.invalidCmd, "-invalidcommand",
+		newValue, index, count, reason);
+	if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto done;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Reject the pending change if validation failed
+     * or if a validation script changed the value.
+     */
+    if (!change_ok || (entryPtr->core.flags & VALIDATION_SET_VALUE)) {
+	code = TCL_BREAK;
+    }
+
+done:
+    entryPtr->core.flags &= ~(VALIDATING|VALIDATION_SET_VALUE);
+    return code;
+}
+
+/* EntryRevalidate --
+ * 	Revalidate the current value of an entry widget,
+ * 	update the TTK_STATE_INVALID bit.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	TCL_OK if valid, TCL_BREAK if invalid, TCL_ERROR on error.
+ */
+static int EntryRevalidate(Tcl_Interp *interp, Entry *entryPtr, VREASON reason)
+{
+    int code = EntryValidateChange(
+		    entryPtr, entryPtr->entry.string, -1,0, reason);
+
+    if (code == TCL_BREAK) {
+	TtkWidgetChangeState(&entryPtr->core, TTK_STATE_INVALID, 0);
+    } else if (code == TCL_OK) {
+	TtkWidgetChangeState(&entryPtr->core, 0, TTK_STATE_INVALID);
+    }
+
+    return code;
+}
+
+/* EntryRevalidateBG --
+ * 	Revalidate in the background (called from event handler).
+ */
+static void EntryRevalidateBG(Entry *entryPtr, VREASON reason)
+{
+    Tcl_Interp *interp = entryPtr->core.interp;
+    if (EntryRevalidate(interp, entryPtr, reason) == TCL_ERROR) {
+	Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Entry widget modification.
+ */
+
+/* AdjustIndex --
+ * 	Adjust index to account for insertion (nChars > 0)
+ * 	or deletion (nChars < 0) at specified index.
+ */
+static int AdjustIndex(int i0, int index, int nChars)
+{
+    if (i0 >= index) {
+	i0 += nChars;
+	if (i0 < index) { /* index was inside deleted range */
+	    i0 = index;
+	}
+    }
+    return i0;
+}
+
+/* AdjustIndices --
+ * 	Adjust all internal entry indexes to account for change.
+ * 	Note that insertPos, and selectFirst have "right gravity",
+ * 	while leftIndex (=xscroll.first) and selectLast have "left gravity".
+ */
+static void AdjustIndices(Entry *entryPtr, int index, int nChars)
+{
+    EntryPart *e = &entryPtr->entry;
+    int g = nChars > 0;		/* left gravity adjustment */
+
+    e->insertPos    = AdjustIndex(e->insertPos, index, nChars);
+    e->selectFirst  = AdjustIndex(e->selectFirst, index, nChars);
+    e->selectLast   = AdjustIndex(e->selectLast, index+g, nChars);
+    e->xscroll.first= AdjustIndex(e->xscroll.first, index+g, nChars);
+
+    if (e->selectLast <= e->selectFirst)
+	e->selectFirst = e->selectLast = -1;
+}
+
+/* EntryStoreValue --
+ *	Replace the contents of a text entry with a given value,
+ *	recompute dependent resources, and schedule a redisplay.
+ *
+ *	See also: EntrySetValue().
+ */
+static void
+EntryStoreValue(Entry *entryPtr, const char *value)
+{
+    size_t numBytes = strlen(value);
+    int numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(value, numBytes);
+
+    if (entryPtr->core.flags & VALIDATING)
+	entryPtr->core.flags |= VALIDATION_SET_VALUE;
+
+    /* Make sure all indices remain in bounds:
+     */
+    if (numChars < entryPtr->entry.numChars)
+	AdjustIndices(entryPtr, numChars, numChars - entryPtr->entry.numChars);
+
+    /* Free old value:
+     */
+    if (entryPtr->entry.displayString != entryPtr->entry.string)
+	ckfree(entryPtr->entry.displayString);
+    ckfree(entryPtr->entry.string);
+
+    /* Store new value:
+     */
+    entryPtr->entry.string = ckalloc(numBytes + 1);
+    strcpy(entryPtr->entry.string, value);
+    entryPtr->entry.numBytes = numBytes;
+    entryPtr->entry.numChars = numChars;
+
+    entryPtr->entry.displayString
+	= entryPtr->entry.showChar
+	? EntryDisplayString(entryPtr->entry.showChar, numChars)
+	: entryPtr->entry.string
+	;
+
+    /* Update layout, schedule redisplay:
+     */
+    EntryUpdateTextLayout(entryPtr);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&entryPtr->core);
+}
+
+/* EntrySetValue --
+ * 	Stores a new value in the entry widget and updates the
+ * 	linked -textvariable, if any.  The write trace on the
+ * 	text variable is temporarily disabled; however, other
+ * 	write traces may change the value of the variable.
+ * 	If so, the widget is updated again with the new value.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	TCL_OK if successful, TCL_ERROR otherwise.
+ */
+static int EntrySetValue(Entry *entryPtr, const char *value)
+{
+    EntryStoreValue(entryPtr, value);
+
+    if (entryPtr->entry.textVariableObj) {
+	const char *textVarName =
+	    Tcl_GetString(entryPtr->entry.textVariableObj);
+	if (textVarName && *textVarName) {
+	    entryPtr->core.flags |= SYNCING_VARIABLE;
+	    value = Tcl_SetVar(entryPtr->core.interp, textVarName,
+		    value, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG);
+	    entryPtr->core.flags &= ~SYNCING_VARIABLE;
+	    if (!value || WidgetDestroyed(&entryPtr->core)) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    } else if (strcmp(value, entryPtr->entry.string) != 0) {
+		/* Some write trace has changed the variable value.
+		 */
+		EntryStoreValue(entryPtr, value);
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* EntryTextVariableTrace --
+ *	Variable trace procedure for entry -textvariable
+ */
+static void EntryTextVariableTrace(void *recordPtr, const char *value)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(&entryPtr->core)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (entryPtr->core.flags & SYNCING_VARIABLE) {
+	/* Trace was fired due to Tcl_SetVar call in EntrySetValue.
+	 * Don't do anything.
+	 */
+	return;
+    }
+
+    EntryStoreValue(entryPtr, value ? value : "");
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Insertion and deletion.
+ */
+
+/* InsertChars --
+ *	Add new characters to an entry widget.
+ */
+static int
+InsertChars(
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry that is to get the new elements. */
+    int index,			/* Insert before this index */
+    const char *value)		/* New characters to add */
+{
+    char *string = entryPtr->entry.string;
+    size_t byteIndex = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, index) - string;
+    size_t byteCount = strlen(value);
+    int charsAdded = Tcl_NumUtfChars(value, byteCount);
+    size_t newByteCount = entryPtr->entry.numBytes + byteCount + 1;
+    char *new;
+    int code;
+
+    if (byteCount == 0) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    new =  ckalloc(newByteCount);
+    memcpy(new, string, byteIndex);
+    strcpy(new + byteIndex, value);
+    strcpy(new + byteIndex + byteCount, string + byteIndex);
+
+    code = EntryValidateChange(
+	    entryPtr, new, index, charsAdded, VALIDATE_INSERT);
+
+    if (code == TCL_OK) {
+	AdjustIndices(entryPtr, index, charsAdded);
+	code = EntrySetValue(entryPtr, new);
+    } else if (code == TCL_BREAK) {
+	code = TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    ckfree(new);
+    return code;
+}
+
+/* DeleteChars --
+ *	Remove one or more characters from an entry widget.
+ */
+static int
+DeleteChars(
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry widget to modify. */
+    int index,			/* Index of first character to delete. */
+    int count)			/* How many characters to delete. */
+{
+    char *string = entryPtr->entry.string;
+    size_t byteIndex, byteCount, newByteCount;
+    char *new;
+    int code;
+
+    if (index < 0) {
+	index = 0;
+    }
+    if (count > entryPtr->entry.numChars - index) {
+	count = entryPtr->entry.numChars - index;
+    }
+    if (count <= 0) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    byteIndex = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, index) - string;
+    byteCount = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string+byteIndex, count) - (string+byteIndex);
+
+    newByteCount = entryPtr->entry.numBytes + 1 - byteCount;
+    new =  ckalloc(newByteCount);
+    memcpy(new, string, byteIndex);
+    strcpy(new + byteIndex, string + byteIndex + byteCount);
+
+    code = EntryValidateChange(
+	    entryPtr, new, index, count, VALIDATE_DELETE);
+
+    if (code == TCL_OK) {
+	AdjustIndices(entryPtr, index, -count);
+	code = EntrySetValue(entryPtr, new);
+    } else if (code == TCL_BREAK) {
+	code = TCL_OK;
+    }
+    ckfree(new);
+
+    return code;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Event handler.
+ */
+
+/* EntryEventProc --
+ *	Extra event handling for entry widgets:
+ *	Triggers validation on FocusIn and FocusOut events.
+ */
+#define EntryEventMask (FocusChangeMask)
+static void
+EntryEventProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
+
+    Tcl_Preserve(clientData);
+    switch (eventPtr->type) {
+	case DestroyNotify:
+	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(entryPtr->core.tkwin,
+		    EntryEventMask, EntryEventProc, clientData);
+	    break;
+	case FocusIn:
+	    EntryRevalidateBG(entryPtr, VALIDATE_FOCUSIN);
+	    break;
+	case FocusOut:
+	    EntryRevalidateBG(entryPtr, VALIDATE_FOCUSOUT);
+	    break;
+    }
+    Tcl_Release(clientData);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization and cleanup.
+ */
+
+static void
+EntryInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(
+	entryPtr->core.tkwin, EntryEventMask, EntryEventProc, entryPtr);
+    Tk_CreateSelHandler(entryPtr->core.tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING,
+	EntryFetchSelection, (ClientData) entryPtr, XA_STRING);
+    TtkBlinkCursor(&entryPtr->core);
+
+    entryPtr->entry.string		= ckalloc(1);
+    *entryPtr->entry.string 		= '\0';
+    entryPtr->entry.displayString	= entryPtr->entry.string;
+    entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace 	= 0;
+    entryPtr->entry.numBytes = entryPtr->entry.numChars = 0;
+
+    EntryInitStyleDefaults(&entryPtr->entry.styleDefaults);
+
+    entryPtr->entry.xscrollHandle =
+	TtkCreateScrollHandle(&entryPtr->core, &entryPtr->entry.xscroll);
+
+    entryPtr->entry.insertPos		= 0;
+    entryPtr->entry.selectFirst 	= -1;
+    entryPtr->entry.selectLast		= -1;
+}
+
+static void
+EntryCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+
+    if (entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace)
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace);
+
+    TtkFreeScrollHandle(entryPtr->entry.xscrollHandle);
+
+    EntryFreeStyleDefaults(&entryPtr->entry.styleDefaults);
+
+    Tk_DeleteSelHandler(entryPtr->core.tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING);
+
+    Tk_FreeTextLayout(entryPtr->entry.textLayout);
+    if (entryPtr->entry.displayString != entryPtr->entry.string)
+	ckfree(entryPtr->entry.displayString);
+    ckfree(entryPtr->entry.string);
+}
+
+/* EntryConfigure --
+ * 	Configure hook for Entry widgets.
+ */
+static int EntryConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *textVarName = entryPtr->entry.textVariableObj;
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *vt = 0;
+
+    if (mask & TEXTVAR_CHANGED) {
+	if (textVarName && *Tcl_GetString(textVarName)) {
+	    vt = Ttk_TraceVariable(interp,
+		    textVarName,EntryTextVariableTrace,entryPtr);
+	    if (!vt) return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (TtkCoreConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (vt) Ttk_UntraceVariable(vt);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Update derived resources:
+     */
+    if (mask & TEXTVAR_CHANGED) {
+	if (entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace)
+	    Ttk_UntraceVariable(entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace);
+	entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace = vt;
+    }
+
+    /* Claim the selection, in case we've suddenly started exporting it.
+     */
+    if (entryPtr->entry.exportSelection && entryPtr->entry.selectFirst != -1) {
+	EntryOwnSelection(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    /* Handle -state compatibility option:
+     */
+    if (mask & STATE_CHANGED) {
+	TtkCheckStateOption(&entryPtr->core, entryPtr->entry.stateObj);
+    }
+
+    /* Force scrollbar update if needed:
+     */
+    if (mask & SCROLLCMD_CHANGED) {
+	TtkScrollbarUpdateRequired(entryPtr->entry.xscrollHandle);
+    }
+
+    /* Recompute the displayString, in case showChar changed:
+     */
+    if (entryPtr->entry.displayString != entryPtr->entry.string)
+	ckfree(entryPtr->entry.displayString);
+
+    entryPtr->entry.displayString
+	= entryPtr->entry.showChar
+	? EntryDisplayString(entryPtr->entry.showChar, entryPtr->entry.numChars)
+	: entryPtr->entry.string
+	;
+
+    /* Update textLayout:
+     */
+    EntryUpdateTextLayout(entryPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* EntryPostConfigure --
+ * 	Post-configuration hook for entry widgets.
+ */
+static int EntryPostConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if ((mask & TEXTVAR_CHANGED) && entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace != NULL) {
+	status = Ttk_FireTrace(entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace);
+    }
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout and display.
+ */
+
+/* EntryCharPosition --
+ * 	Return the X coordinate of the specified character index.
+ * 	Precondition: textLayout and layoutX up-to-date.
+ */
+static int
+EntryCharPosition(Entry *entryPtr, int index)
+{
+    int xPos;
+    Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->entry.textLayout, index, &xPos, NULL, NULL, NULL);
+    return xPos + entryPtr->entry.layoutX;
+}
+
+/* EntryDoLayout --
+ * 	Layout hook for entry widgets.
+ *
+ * 	Determine position of textLayout based on xscroll.first, justify,
+ * 	and display area.
+ *
+ * 	Recalculates layoutX, layoutY, and rightIndex,
+ * 	and updates xscroll accordingly.
+ * 	May adjust xscroll.first to ensure the maximum #characters are onscreen.
+ */
+static void
+EntryDoLayout(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &entryPtr->core;
+    Tk_TextLayout textLayout = entryPtr->entry.textLayout;
+    int leftIndex = entryPtr->entry.xscroll.first;
+    int rightIndex;
+    Ttk_Box textarea;
+
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout,corePtr->state,Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin));
+    textarea = Ttk_ClientRegion(corePtr->layout, "textarea");
+
+    /* Center the text vertically within the available parcel:
+     */
+    entryPtr->entry.layoutY = textarea.y +
+	(textarea.height - entryPtr->entry.layoutHeight)/2;
+
+    /* Recompute where the leftmost character on the display will
+     * be drawn (layoutX) and adjust leftIndex if necessary.
+     */
+    if (entryPtr->entry.layoutWidth <= textarea.width) {
+	/* Everything fits.  Set leftIndex to zero (no need to scroll),
+	 * and compute layoutX based on -justify.
+	 */
+	int extraSpace = textarea.width - entryPtr->entry.layoutWidth;
+	leftIndex = 0;
+	rightIndex = entryPtr->entry.numChars;
+	entryPtr->entry.layoutX = textarea.x;
+	if (entryPtr->entry.justify == TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT) {
+	    entryPtr->entry.layoutX += extraSpace;
+	} else if (entryPtr->entry.justify == TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER) {
+	    entryPtr->entry.layoutX += extraSpace / 2;
+	}
+    } else {
+	/* The whole string doesn't fit in the window.
+	 * Limit leftIndex to leave at most one character's worth
+	 * of empty space on the right.
+	 */
+	int overflow = entryPtr->entry.layoutWidth - textarea.width;
+	int maxLeftIndex = 1 + Tk_PointToChar(textLayout, overflow, 0);
+	int leftX;
+
+	if (leftIndex > maxLeftIndex) {
+	    leftIndex = maxLeftIndex;
+	}
+
+	/* Compute layoutX and rightIndex.
+	 * rightIndex is set to one past the last fully-visible character.
+	 */
+	Tk_CharBbox(textLayout, leftIndex, &leftX, NULL, NULL, NULL);
+	rightIndex = Tk_PointToChar(textLayout, leftX + textarea.width, 0);
+	entryPtr->entry.layoutX = textarea.x - leftX;
+    }
+
+    TtkScrolled(entryPtr->entry.xscrollHandle,
+	    leftIndex, rightIndex, entryPtr->entry.numChars);
+}
+
+/* EntryGetGC -- Helper routine.
+ *      Get a GC using the specified foreground color and the entry's font.
+ *      Result must be freed with Tk_FreeGC().
+ */
+static GC EntryGetGC(Entry *entryPtr, Tcl_Obj *colorObj, TkRegion clip)
+{
+    Tk_Window tkwin = entryPtr->core.tkwin;
+    Tk_Font font = Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, entryPtr->entry.fontObj);
+    XColor *colorPtr;
+    unsigned long mask = 0ul;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+    GC gc;
+
+    gcValues.line_width = 1; mask |= GCLineWidth;
+    gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(font); mask |= GCFont;
+    if (colorObj != 0 && (colorPtr=Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin,colorObj)) != 0) {
+	gcValues.foreground = colorPtr->pixel;
+	mask |= GCForeground;
+    }
+    gc = Tk_GetGC(entryPtr->core.tkwin, mask, &gcValues);
+    if (clip != None) {
+	TkSetRegion(Tk_Display(entryPtr->core.tkwin), gc, clip);
+    }
+    return gc;
+}
+
+/* EntryDisplay --
+ *	Redraws the contents of an entry window.
+ */
+static void EntryDisplay(void *clientData, Drawable d)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = clientData;
+    Tk_Window tkwin = entryPtr->core.tkwin;
+    int leftIndex = entryPtr->entry.xscroll.first,
+	rightIndex = entryPtr->entry.xscroll.last + 1,
+	selFirst = entryPtr->entry.selectFirst,
+	selLast = entryPtr->entry.selectLast;
+    EntryStyleData es;
+    GC gc;
+    int showSelection, showCursor;
+    Ttk_Box textarea;
+    TkRegion clipRegion;
+    XRectangle rect;
+
+    EntryInitStyleData(entryPtr, &es);
+
+    textarea = Ttk_ClientRegion(entryPtr->core.layout, "textarea");
+    showCursor =
+	   (entryPtr->core.flags & CURSOR_ON) != 0
+	&& EntryEditable(entryPtr)
+	&& entryPtr->entry.insertPos >= leftIndex
+	&& entryPtr->entry.insertPos <= rightIndex
+	;
+    showSelection =
+	   (entryPtr->core.state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED) == 0
+	&& selFirst > -1
+	&& selLast > leftIndex
+	&& selFirst <= rightIndex
+	;
+
+    /* Adjust selection range to keep in display bounds.
+     */
+    if (showSelection) {
+	if (selFirst < leftIndex)
+	    selFirst = leftIndex;
+	if (selLast > rightIndex)
+	    selLast = rightIndex;
+    }
+
+    /* Draw widget background & border
+     */
+    Ttk_DrawLayout(entryPtr->core.layout, entryPtr->core.state, d);
+
+    /* Draw selection background
+     */
+    if (showSelection && es.selBorderObj) {
+	Tk_3DBorder selBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, es.selBorderObj);
+	int selStartX = EntryCharPosition(entryPtr, selFirst);
+	int selEndX = EntryCharPosition(entryPtr, selLast);
+	int borderWidth = 1;
+
+	Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, es.selBorderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+
+	if (selBorder) {
+	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, selBorder,
+		selStartX - borderWidth, entryPtr->entry.layoutY - borderWidth,
+		selEndX - selStartX + 2*borderWidth,
+		entryPtr->entry.layoutHeight + 2*borderWidth,
+		borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Initialize the clip region. Note that Xft does _not_ derive its
+     * clipping area from the GC, so we have to supply that by other means.
+     */
+
+    rect.x = textarea.x;
+    rect.y = textarea.y;
+    rect.width = textarea.width;
+    rect.height = textarea.height;
+    clipRegion = TkCreateRegion();
+    TkUnionRectWithRegion(&rect, clipRegion, clipRegion);
+#ifdef HAVE_XFT
+    TkUnixSetXftClipRegion(clipRegion);
+#endif
+
+    /* Draw cursor:
+     */
+    if (showCursor) {
+	int cursorX = EntryCharPosition(entryPtr, entryPtr->entry.insertPos),
+	    cursorY = entryPtr->entry.layoutY,
+	    cursorHeight = entryPtr->entry.layoutHeight,
+	    cursorWidth = 1;
+
+	Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL,es.insertWidthObj,&cursorWidth);
+	if (cursorWidth <= 0) {
+	    cursorWidth = 1;
+	}
+
+	/* @@@ should: maybe: SetCaretPos even when blinked off */
+	Tk_SetCaretPos(tkwin, cursorX, cursorY, cursorHeight);
+
+	gc = EntryGetGC(entryPtr, es.insertColorObj, clipRegion);
+	XFillRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc,
+	    cursorX-cursorWidth/2, cursorY, cursorWidth, cursorHeight);
+	XSetClipMask(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc, None);
+	Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc);
+    }
+
+    /* Draw the text:
+     */
+    gc = EntryGetGC(entryPtr, es.foregroundObj, clipRegion);
+    Tk_DrawTextLayout(
+	Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, entryPtr->entry.textLayout,
+	entryPtr->entry.layoutX, entryPtr->entry.layoutY,
+	leftIndex, rightIndex);
+    XSetClipMask(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc, None);
+    Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc);
+
+    /* Overwrite the selected portion (if any) in the -selectforeground color:
+     */
+    if (showSelection) {
+	gc = EntryGetGC(entryPtr, es.selForegroundObj, clipRegion);
+	Tk_DrawTextLayout(
+	    Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, entryPtr->entry.textLayout,
+	    entryPtr->entry.layoutX, entryPtr->entry.layoutY,
+	    selFirst, selLast);
+	XSetClipMask(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc, None);
+	Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc);
+    }
+
+    /* Drop the region. Note that we have to manually remove the reference to
+     * it from the Xft guts (if they're being used).
+     */
+#ifdef HAVE_XFT
+    TkUnixSetXftClipRegion(None);
+#endif
+    TkDestroyRegion(clipRegion);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands.
+ */
+
+/* EntryIndex --
+ *	Parse an index into an entry and return either its value
+ *	or an error.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result.  If all went well, then *indexPtr is
+ *	filled in with the character index (into entryPtr) corresponding to
+ *	string.  The index value is guaranteed to lie between 0 and
+ *	the number of characters in the string, inclusive.  If an
+ *	error occurs then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ */
+static int
+EntryIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For error messages. */
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry widget to query */
+    Tcl_Obj *indexObj,		/* Symbolic index name */
+    int *indexPtr)		/* Return value */
+{
+#   define EntryWidth(e) (Tk_Width(entryPtr->core.tkwin)) /* Not Right */
+    int length;
+    const char *string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(indexObj, &length);
+
+    if (strncmp(string, "end", length) == 0) {
+	*indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.numChars;
+    } else if (strncmp(string, "insert", length) == 0) {
+	*indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.insertPos;
+    } else if (strncmp(string, "left", length) == 0) {	/* for debugging */
+	*indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.xscroll.first;
+    } else if (strncmp(string, "right", length) == 0) {	/* for debugging */
+	*indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.xscroll.last;
+    } else if (strncmp(string, "sel.", 4) == 0) {
+	if (entryPtr->entry.selectFirst < 0) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "selection isn't in widget ",
+		    Tk_PathName(entryPtr->core.tkwin), NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (strncmp(string, "sel.first", length) == 0) {
+	    *indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.selectFirst;
+	} else if (strncmp(string, "sel.last", length) == 0) {
+	    *indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.selectLast;
+	} else {
+	    goto badIndex;
+	}
+    } else if (string[0] == '@') {
+	int roundUp = 0;
+	int maxWidth = EntryWidth(entryPtr);
+	int x;
+
+	if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, string + 1, &x) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto badIndex;
+	}
+	if (x > maxWidth) {
+	    x = maxWidth;
+	    roundUp = 1;
+	}
+	*indexPtr = Tk_PointToChar(entryPtr->entry.textLayout,
+		x - entryPtr->entry.layoutX, 0);
+
+	if (*indexPtr < entryPtr->entry.xscroll.first) {
+	    *indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.xscroll.first;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Special trick:  if the x-position was off-screen to the right,
+	 * round the index up to refer to the character just after the
+	 * last visible one on the screen.  This is needed to enable the
+	 * last character to be selected, for example.
+	 */
+
+	if (roundUp && (*indexPtr < entryPtr->entry.numChars)) {
+	    *indexPtr += 1;
+	}
+    } else {
+	if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, string, indexPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto badIndex;
+	}
+	if (*indexPtr < 0) {
+	    *indexPtr = 0;
+	} else if (*indexPtr > entryPtr->entry.numChars) {
+	    *indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.numChars;
+	}
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+badIndex:
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad entry index \"", string, "\"", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* $entry bbox $index --
+ * 	Return the bounding box of the character at the specified index.
+ */
+static int
+EntryBBoxCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Box b;
+    int index;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if ((index == entryPtr->entry.numChars) && (index > 0)) {
+	index--;
+    }
+    Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->entry.textLayout, index,
+	    &b.x, &b.y, &b.width, &b.height);
+    b.x += entryPtr->entry.layoutX;
+    b.y += entryPtr->entry.layoutY;
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Ttk_NewBoxObj(b));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry delete $from ?$to? --
+ *	Delete the characters in the range [$from,$to).
+ *	$to defaults to $from+1 if not specified.
+ */
+static int
+EntryDeleteCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    int first, last;
+
+    if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2], &first) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	last = first + 1;
+    } else if (EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[3], &last) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (last >= first && EntryEditable(entryPtr)) {
+	return DeleteChars(entryPtr, first, last - first);
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry get --
+ * 	Return the current value of the entry widget.
+ */
+static int
+EntryGetCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    if (objc != 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_SetResult(interp, entryPtr->entry.string, TCL_VOLATILE);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry icursor $index --
+ * 	Set the insert cursor position.
+ */
+static int
+EntryICursorCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pos");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2],
+	    &entryPtr->entry.insertPos) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&entryPtr->core);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry index $index --
+ * 	Return numeric value (0..numChars) of the specified index.
+ */
+static int
+EntryIndexCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    int index;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry insert $index $text --
+ * 	Insert $text after position $index.
+ * 	Silent no-op if the entry is disabled or read-only.
+ */
+static int
+EntryInsertCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    int index;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index text");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (EntryEditable(entryPtr)) {
+	return InsertChars(entryPtr, index, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry selection clear --
+ * 	Clear selection.
+ */
+static int EntrySelectionClearCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    entryPtr->entry.selectFirst = entryPtr->entry.selectLast = -1;
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&entryPtr->core);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry selection present --
+ * 	Returns 1 if any characters are selected, 0 otherwise.
+ */
+static int EntrySelectionPresentCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+	    Tcl_NewBooleanObj(entryPtr->entry.selectFirst >= 0));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry selection range $start $end --
+ * 	Explicitly set the selection range.
+ */
+static int EntrySelectionRangeCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    int start, end;
+    if (objc != 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "start end");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (    EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[3], &start) != TCL_OK
+         || EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[4], &end) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (entryPtr->core.state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    if (start >= end) {
+	entryPtr->entry.selectFirst = entryPtr->entry.selectLast = -1;
+    } else {
+	entryPtr->entry.selectFirst = start;
+	entryPtr->entry.selectLast = end;
+	EntryOwnSelection(entryPtr);
+    }
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&entryPtr->core);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble EntrySelectionCommands[] = {
+    { "clear",   EntrySelectionClearCommand,0 },
+    { "present", EntrySelectionPresentCommand,0 },
+    { "range",   EntrySelectionRangeCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+/* $entry set $value
+ * 	Sets the value of an entry widget.
+ */
+static int EntrySetCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "value");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    EntrySetValue(entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry validate --
+ * 	Trigger forced validation.  Returns 1/0 if validation succeeds/fails
+ * 	or error status from -validatecommand / -invalidcommand.
+ */
+static int EntryValidateCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    int code;
+
+    if (objc != 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    code = EntryRevalidate(interp, entryPtr, VALIDATE_FORCED);
+
+    if (code == TCL_ERROR)
+	return code;
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(code == TCL_OK));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry xview	-- horizontal scrolling interface
+ */
+static int EntryXViewCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    return TtkScrollviewCommand(interp, objc, objv, entryPtr->entry.xscrollHandle);
+}
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble EntryCommands[] = {
+    { "bbox", 		EntryBBoxCommand,0 },
+    { "cget", 		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "configure", 	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "delete", 	EntryDeleteCommand,0 },
+    { "get", 		EntryGetCommand,0 },
+    { "icursor", 	EntryICursorCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { "index", 		EntryIndexCommand,0 },
+    { "insert", 	EntryInsertCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "selection", 	0,EntrySelectionCommands },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { "validate", 	EntryValidateCommand,0 },
+    { "xview", 		EntryXViewCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Entry widget definition.
+ */
+
+static WidgetSpec EntryWidgetSpec = {
+    "TEntry",			/* className */
+    sizeof(Entry), 		/* recordSize */
+    EntryOptionSpecs, 		/* optionSpecs */
+    EntryCommands,  		/* subcommands */
+    EntryInitialize,     	/* initializeProc */
+    EntryCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    EntryConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    EntryPostConfigure,  	/* postConfigureProc */
+    TtkWidgetGetLayout, 	/* getLayoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    EntryDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    EntryDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Combobox widget record.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*postCommandObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*valuesObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*heightObj;
+    int 	currentIndex;
+} ComboboxPart;
+
+typedef struct {
+    WidgetCore core;
+    EntryPart entry;
+    ComboboxPart combobox;
+} Combobox;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec ComboboxOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-height", "height", "Height",
+        DEF_LIST_HEIGHT, Tk_Offset(Combobox, combobox.heightObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-postcommand", "postCommand", "PostCommand",
+        "", Tk_Offset(Combobox, combobox.postCommandObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-values", "values", "Values",
+        "", Tk_Offset(Combobox, combobox.valuesObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(EntryOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/* ComboboxInitialize --
+ * 	Initialization hook for combobox widgets.
+ */
+static void
+ComboboxInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Combobox *cb = recordPtr;
+
+    cb->combobox.currentIndex = -1;
+    TtkTrackElementState(&cb->core);
+    EntryInitialize(interp, recordPtr);
+}
+
+/* ComboboxConfigure --
+ * 	Configuration hook for combobox widgets.
+ */
+static int
+ComboboxConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Combobox *cbPtr = recordPtr;
+    int unused;
+
+    /* Make sure -values is a valid list:
+     */
+    if (Tcl_ListObjLength(interp,cbPtr->combobox.valuesObj,&unused) != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    return EntryConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask);
+}
+
+/* $cb current ?newIndex? -- get or set current index.
+ * 	Setting the current index updates the combobox value,
+ * 	but the value and -values may be changed independently
+ * 	of the index.  Instead of trying to keep currentIndex
+ * 	in sync at all times, [$cb current] double-checks
+ */
+static int ComboboxCurrentCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Combobox *cbPtr = recordPtr;
+    int currentIndex = cbPtr->combobox.currentIndex;
+    const char *currentValue = cbPtr->entry.string;
+    int nValues;
+    Tcl_Obj **values;
+
+    Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp,cbPtr->combobox.valuesObj,&nValues,&values);
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	/* Check if currentIndex still valid:
+	 */
+	if (    currentIndex < 0
+	     || currentIndex >= nValues
+	     || strcmp(currentValue,Tcl_GetString(values[currentIndex]))
+	   )
+	{
+	    /* Not valid.  Check current value against each element in -values:
+	     */
+	    for (currentIndex = 0; currentIndex < nValues; ++currentIndex) {
+		if (!strcmp(currentValue,Tcl_GetString(values[currentIndex]))) {
+		    break;
+		}
+	    }
+	    if (currentIndex >= nValues) {
+		/* Not found */
+		currentIndex = -1;
+	    }
+	}
+	cbPtr->combobox.currentIndex = currentIndex;
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(currentIndex));
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc == 3) {
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &currentIndex) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (currentIndex < 0 || currentIndex >= nValues) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		    "Index ", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), " out of range",
+		    NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	cbPtr->combobox.currentIndex = currentIndex;
+
+	return EntrySetValue(recordPtr, Tcl_GetString(values[currentIndex]));
+    } else {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?newIndex?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Combobox widget definition.
+ */
+static const Ttk_Ensemble ComboboxCommands[] = {
+    { "bbox", 		EntryBBoxCommand,0 },
+    { "cget", 		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "configure", 	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "current", 	ComboboxCurrentCommand,0 },
+    { "delete", 	EntryDeleteCommand,0 },
+    { "get", 		EntryGetCommand,0 },
+    { "icursor", 	EntryICursorCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { "index", 		EntryIndexCommand,0 },
+    { "insert", 	EntryInsertCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "selection", 	0,EntrySelectionCommands },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { "set", 		EntrySetCommand,0 },
+    { "validate",	EntryValidateCommand,0 },
+    { "xview", 		EntryXViewCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+static WidgetSpec ComboboxWidgetSpec = {
+    "TCombobox",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Combobox), 		/* recordSize */
+    ComboboxOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    ComboboxCommands,  		/* subcommands */
+    ComboboxInitialize,     	/* initializeProc */
+    EntryCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    ComboboxConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    EntryPostConfigure,  	/* postConfigureProc */
+    TtkWidgetGetLayout, 	/* getLayoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    EntryDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    EntryDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Spinbox widget.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*valuesObj;
+
+    Tcl_Obj	*fromObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*toObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*incrementObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*formatObj;
+
+    Tcl_Obj	*wrapObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*commandObj;
+} SpinboxPart;
+
+typedef struct {
+    WidgetCore core;
+    EntryPart entry;
+    SpinboxPart spinbox;
+} Spinbox;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec SpinboxOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-values", "values", "Values",
+        "", Tk_Offset(Spinbox, spinbox.valuesObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+
+    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-from", "from", "From",
+	"0", Tk_Offset(Spinbox,spinbox.fromObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-to", "to", "To",
+	"0", Tk_Offset(Spinbox,spinbox.toObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-increment", "increment", "Increment",
+	"1", Tk_Offset(Spinbox,spinbox.incrementObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-format", "format", "Format",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Spinbox, spinbox.formatObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Spinbox, spinbox.commandObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-wrap", "wrap", "Wrap",
+	"0", Tk_Offset(Spinbox,spinbox.wrapObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(EntryOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/* SpinboxInitialize --
+ * 	Initialization hook for spinbox widgets.
+ */
+static void
+SpinboxInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Spinbox *sb = recordPtr;
+    TtkTrackElementState(&sb->core);
+    EntryInitialize(interp, recordPtr);
+}
+
+/* SpinboxConfigure --
+ * 	Configuration hook for spinbox widgets.
+ */
+static int
+SpinboxConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Spinbox *sb = recordPtr;
+    int unused;
+
+    /* Make sure -values is a valid list:
+     */
+    if (Tcl_ListObjLength(interp,sb->spinbox.valuesObj,&unused) != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    return EntryConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask);
+}
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble SpinboxCommands[] = {
+    { "bbox", 		EntryBBoxCommand,0 },
+    { "cget", 		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "configure", 	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "delete", 	EntryDeleteCommand,0 },
+    { "get", 		EntryGetCommand,0 },
+    { "icursor", 	EntryICursorCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { "index", 		EntryIndexCommand,0 },
+    { "insert", 	EntryInsertCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "selection", 	0,EntrySelectionCommands },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { "set", 		EntrySetCommand,0 },
+    { "validate",	EntryValidateCommand,0 },
+    { "xview", 		EntryXViewCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+static WidgetSpec SpinboxWidgetSpec = {
+    "TSpinbox",			/* className */
+    sizeof(Spinbox), 		/* recordSize */
+    SpinboxOptionSpecs,		/* optionSpecs */
+    SpinboxCommands,  		/* subcommands */
+    SpinboxInitialize,     	/* initializeProc */
+    EntryCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    SpinboxConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    EntryPostConfigure,  	/* postConfigureProc */
+    TtkWidgetGetLayout, 	/* getLayoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    EntryDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    EntryDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Textarea element.
+ *
+ * Text display area for Entry widgets.
+ * Just computes requested size; display is handled by the widget itself.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*fontObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*widthObj;
+} TextareaElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TextareaElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-font", TK_OPTION_FONT,
+	Tk_Offset(TextareaElement,fontObj), DEF_ENTRY_FONT },
+    { "-width", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(TextareaElement,widthObj), "20" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void TextareaElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    TextareaElement *textarea = elementRecord;
+    Tk_Font font = Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, textarea->fontObj);
+    int avgWidth = Tk_TextWidth(font, "0", 1);
+    Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+    int prefWidth = 1;
+
+    Tk_GetFontMetrics(font, &fm);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, textarea->widthObj, &prefWidth);
+    if (prefWidth <= 0)
+	prefWidth = 1;
+
+    *heightPtr = fm.linespace;
+    *widthPtr = prefWidth * avgWidth;
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TextareaElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TextareaElement),
+    TextareaElementOptions,
+    TextareaElementSize,
+    TtkNullElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget layouts.
+ */
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(EntryLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Entry.field", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_BORDER,
+	TTK_GROUP("Entry.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_NODE("Entry.textarea", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(ComboboxLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Combobox.field", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Combobox.downarrow", TTK_PACK_RIGHT|TTK_FILL_Y)
+	TTK_GROUP("Combobox.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_EXPAND,
+	    TTK_NODE("Combobox.textarea", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(SpinboxLayout)
+     TTK_GROUP("Spinbox.field", TTK_PACK_TOP|TTK_FILL_X,
+	 TTK_GROUP("null", TTK_PACK_RIGHT,
+	     TTK_NODE("Spinbox.uparrow", TTK_PACK_TOP|TTK_STICK_E)
+	     TTK_NODE("Spinbox.downarrow", TTK_PACK_BOTTOM|TTK_STICK_E))
+	 TTK_GROUP("Spinbox.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	     TTK_NODE("Spinbox.textarea", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization.
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE
+void TtkEntry_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr =  Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, themePtr, "textarea", &TextareaElementSpec, 0);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "TEntry", EntryLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "TCombobox", ComboboxLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "TSpinbox", SpinboxLayout);
+
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::entry", &EntryWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::combobox", &ComboboxWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::spinbox", &SpinboxWidgetSpec);
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkFrame.c b/generic/ttk/ttkFrame.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7860024
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkFrame.c
@@ -0,0 +1,654 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * ttk::frame and ttk::labelframe widgets.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+#include "ttkManager.h"
+
+/* ======================================================================
+ * +++ Frame widget:
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*paddingObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*widthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*heightObj;
+} FramePart;
+
+typedef struct {
+    WidgetCore	core;
+    FramePart	frame;
+} Frame;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec FrameOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", NULL,
+	Tk_Offset(Frame,frame.borderWidthObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-padding", "padding", "Pad", NULL,
+	Tk_Offset(Frame,frame.paddingObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", NULL,
+	Tk_Offset(Frame,frame.reliefObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width", "0",
+	Tk_Offset(Frame,frame.widthObj), -1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height", "0",
+	Tk_Offset(Frame,frame.heightObj), -1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_FALSE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(ttkCoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble FrameCommands[] = {
+    { "configure",	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",   	TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+/*
+ * FrameMargins --
+ * 	Compute internal margins for a frame widget.
+ * 	This includes the -borderWidth, plus any additional -padding.
+ */
+static Ttk_Padding FrameMargins(Frame *framePtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Padding margins = Ttk_UniformPadding(0);
+
+    /* Check -padding:
+     */
+    if (framePtr->frame.paddingObj) {
+	Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,
+	    framePtr->core.tkwin, framePtr->frame.paddingObj, &margins);
+    }
+
+    /* Add padding for border:
+     */
+    if (framePtr->frame.borderWidthObj) {
+	int border = 0;
+	Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL,
+	    framePtr->core.tkwin, framePtr->frame.borderWidthObj, &border);
+	margins = Ttk_AddPadding(margins, Ttk_UniformPadding((short)border));
+    }
+
+    return margins;
+}
+
+/* FrameSize procedure --
+ * 	The frame doesn't request a size of its own by default,
+ * 	but it does have an internal border.  See also <<NOTE-SIZE>>
+ */
+static int FrameSize(void *recordPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Frame *framePtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_SetMargins(framePtr->core.tkwin, FrameMargins(framePtr));
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ * FrameConfigure -- configure hook.
+ *	<<NOTE-SIZE>> Usually the size of a frame is controlled by
+ *	a geometry manager (pack, grid); the -width and -height
+ *	options are only effective if geometry propagation is turned
+ *	off or if the [place] GM is used for child widgets.
+ *
+ *	To avoid geometry blinking, we issue a geometry request
+ *	in the Configure hook instead of the Size hook, and only
+ *	if -width and/or -height is nonzero and one of them
+ *	or the other size-related options (-borderwidth, -padding)
+ *	has been changed.
+ */
+
+static int FrameConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Frame *framePtr = recordPtr;
+    int width, height;
+
+    /*
+     * Make sure -padding resource, if present, is correct:
+     */
+    if (framePtr->frame.paddingObj) {
+	Ttk_Padding unused;
+	if (Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(interp,
+		    	framePtr->core.tkwin,
+			framePtr->frame.paddingObj,
+			&unused) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* See <<NOTE-SIZE>>
+     */
+    if (  TCL_OK != Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(
+	    interp,framePtr->core.tkwin,framePtr->frame.widthObj,&width)
+       || TCL_OK != Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(
+	    interp,framePtr->core.tkwin,framePtr->frame.heightObj,&height)
+       )
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if ((width > 0 || height > 0) && (mask & GEOMETRY_CHANGED)) {
+	Tk_GeometryRequest(framePtr->core.tkwin, width, height);
+    }
+
+    return TtkCoreConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask);
+}
+
+static WidgetSpec FrameWidgetSpec = {
+    "TFrame",			/* className */
+    sizeof(Frame),		/* recordSize */
+    FrameOptionSpecs,		/* optionSpecs */
+    FrameCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    TtkNullInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    TtkNullCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    FrameConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    TtkNullPostConfigure,	/* postConfigureProc */
+    TtkWidgetGetLayout, 	/* getLayoutProc */
+    FrameSize,			/* sizeProc */
+    TtkWidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(FrameLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Frame.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/* ======================================================================
+ * +++ Labelframe widget:
+ */
+
+#define DEFAULT_LABELINSET	8
+#define DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH	2
+
+int TtkGetLabelAnchorFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_PositionSpec *anchorPtr)
+{
+    const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+    char c = *string++;
+    Ttk_PositionSpec flags = 0;
+
+    /* First character determines side:
+     */
+    switch (c) {
+	case 'w' : flags = TTK_PACK_LEFT; 	break;
+	case 'e' : flags = TTK_PACK_RIGHT; 	break;
+	case 'n' : flags = TTK_PACK_TOP; 	break;
+	case 's' : flags = TTK_PACK_BOTTOM; 	break;
+	default  : goto error;
+    }
+
+    /* Remaining characters are as per -sticky:
+     */
+    while ((c = *string++) != '\0') {
+	switch (c) {
+	    case 'w' : flags |= TTK_STICK_W; break;
+	    case 'e' : flags |= TTK_STICK_E; break;
+	    case 'n' : flags |= TTK_STICK_N; break;
+	    case 's' : flags |= TTK_STICK_S; break;
+	    default  : goto error;
+	}
+    }
+
+    *anchorPtr = flags;
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    if (interp) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	    "Bad label anchor specification ", Tcl_GetString(objPtr),
+	    NULL);
+    }
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* LabelAnchorSide --
+ * 	Returns the side corresponding to a LabelAnchor value.
+ */
+static Ttk_Side LabelAnchorSide(Ttk_PositionSpec flags)
+{
+    if (flags & TTK_PACK_LEFT) 		return TTK_SIDE_LEFT;
+    else if (flags & TTK_PACK_RIGHT)	return TTK_SIDE_RIGHT;
+    else if (flags & TTK_PACK_TOP)	return TTK_SIDE_TOP;
+    else if (flags & TTK_PACK_BOTTOM)	return TTK_SIDE_BOTTOM;
+    /*NOTREACHED*/
+    return TTK_SIDE_TOP;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Labelframe widget record:
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj 	*labelAnchorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*textObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*underlineObj;
+    Tk_Window	labelWidget;
+
+    Ttk_Manager	*mgr;
+    Ttk_Layout	labelLayout;	/* Sublayout for label */
+    Ttk_Box	labelParcel;	/* Set in layoutProc */
+} LabelframePart;
+
+typedef struct {
+    WidgetCore  	core;
+    FramePart   	frame;
+    LabelframePart	label;
+} Labelframe;
+
+#define LABELWIDGET_CHANGED 0x100
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec LabelframeOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-labelanchor", "labelAnchor", "LabelAnchor",
+	"nw", Tk_Offset(Labelframe, label.labelAnchorObj),-1,
+        0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text", "",
+	Tk_Offset(Labelframe,label.textObj), -1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline",
+	"-1", Tk_Offset(Labelframe,label.underlineObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-labelwidget", "labelWidget", "LabelWidget", NULL,
+	-1, Tk_Offset(Labelframe,label.labelWidget),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,LABELWIDGET_CHANGED|GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(FrameOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*
+ * Labelframe style parameters:
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    int 		borderWidth;	/* border width */
+    Ttk_Padding 	padding;	/* internal padding */
+    Ttk_PositionSpec	labelAnchor;	/* corner/side to place label */
+    Ttk_Padding		labelMargins;	/* extra space around label */
+    int 		labelOutside;	/* true=>place label outside border */
+} LabelframeStyle;
+
+static void LabelframeStyleOptions(Labelframe *lf, LabelframeStyle *style)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout layout = lf->core.layout;
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+
+    style->borderWidth = DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH;
+    style->padding = Ttk_UniformPadding(0);
+    style->labelAnchor = TTK_PACK_TOP | TTK_STICK_W;
+    style->labelOutside = 0;
+
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(layout, "-borderwidth", 0)) != NULL) {
+	Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, lf->core.tkwin, objPtr, &style->borderWidth);
+    }
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(layout, "-padding", 0)) != NULL) {
+	Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, lf->core.tkwin, objPtr, &style->padding);
+    }
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(layout,"-labelanchor", 0)) != NULL) {
+	TtkGetLabelAnchorFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &style->labelAnchor);
+    }
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(layout,"-labelmargins", 0)) != NULL) {
+	Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &style->labelMargins);
+    } else {
+	if (style->labelAnchor & (TTK_PACK_TOP|TTK_PACK_BOTTOM)) {
+	    style->labelMargins =
+		Ttk_MakePadding(DEFAULT_LABELINSET,0,DEFAULT_LABELINSET,0);
+	} else {
+	    style->labelMargins =
+		Ttk_MakePadding(0,DEFAULT_LABELINSET,0,DEFAULT_LABELINSET);
+	}
+    }
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(layout,"-labeloutside", 0)) != NULL) {
+	Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &style->labelOutside);
+    }
+
+    return;
+}
+
+/* LabelframeLabelSize --
+ * 	Extract the requested width and height of the labelframe's label:
+ * 	taken from the label widget if specified, otherwise the text label.
+ */
+static void
+LabelframeLabelSize(Labelframe *lframePtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Tk_Window labelWidget = lframePtr->label.labelWidget;
+    Ttk_Layout labelLayout = lframePtr->label.labelLayout;
+
+    if (labelWidget) {
+	*widthPtr = Tk_ReqWidth(labelWidget);
+	*heightPtr = Tk_ReqHeight(labelWidget);
+    } else if (labelLayout) {
+	Ttk_LayoutSize(labelLayout, 0, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    } else {
+	*widthPtr = *heightPtr = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * LabelframeSize --
+ * 	Like the frame, this doesn't request a size of its own
+ * 	but it does have internal padding and a minimum size.
+ */
+static int LabelframeSize(void *recordPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Labelframe *lframePtr = recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &lframePtr->core;
+    Ttk_Padding margins;
+    LabelframeStyle style;
+    int labelWidth, labelHeight;
+
+    LabelframeStyleOptions(lframePtr, &style);
+
+    /* Compute base margins (See also: FrameMargins)
+     */
+    margins = Ttk_AddPadding(
+		style.padding, Ttk_UniformPadding((short)style.borderWidth));
+
+    /* Adjust margins based on label size and position:
+     */
+    LabelframeLabelSize(lframePtr, &labelWidth, &labelHeight);
+    labelWidth += Ttk_PaddingWidth(style.labelMargins);
+    labelHeight += Ttk_PaddingHeight(style.labelMargins);
+
+    switch (LabelAnchorSide(style.labelAnchor)) {
+	case TTK_SIDE_LEFT:	margins.left   += labelWidth;	break;
+	case TTK_SIDE_RIGHT:	margins.right  += labelWidth;	break;
+	case TTK_SIDE_TOP:	margins.top    += labelHeight;	break;
+	case TTK_SIDE_BOTTOM:	margins.bottom += labelHeight;	break;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_SetMargins(corePtr->tkwin,margins);
+
+    /* Request minimum size based on border width and label size:
+     */
+    Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize(corePtr->tkwin,
+	    labelWidth + 2*style.borderWidth,
+	    labelHeight + 2*style.borderWidth);
+
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ * LabelframeGetLayout --
+ * 	Getlayout widget hook.
+ */
+
+static Ttk_Layout LabelframeGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme theme, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Labelframe *lf = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Layout frameLayout = TtkWidgetGetLayout(interp, theme, recordPtr);
+    Ttk_Layout labelLayout;
+
+    if (!frameLayout) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    labelLayout = Ttk_CreateSublayout(
+	interp, theme, frameLayout, ".Label", lf->core.optionTable);
+
+    if (labelLayout) {
+	if (lf->label.labelLayout) {
+	    Ttk_FreeLayout(lf->label.labelLayout);
+	}
+	Ttk_RebindSublayout(labelLayout, recordPtr);
+	lf->label.labelLayout = labelLayout;
+    }
+
+    return frameLayout;
+}
+
+/*
+ * LabelframeDoLayout --
+ * 	Labelframe layout hook.
+ *
+ * Side effects: Computes labelParcel.
+ */
+
+static void LabelframeDoLayout(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Labelframe *lframePtr = recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &lframePtr->core;
+    int lw, lh;			/* Label width and height */
+    LabelframeStyle style;
+    Ttk_Box borderParcel = Ttk_WinBox(lframePtr->core.tkwin);
+    Ttk_Box labelParcel;
+
+    /*
+     * Compute label parcel:
+     */
+    LabelframeStyleOptions(lframePtr, &style);
+    LabelframeLabelSize(lframePtr, &lw, &lh);
+    lw += Ttk_PaddingWidth(style.labelMargins);
+    lh += Ttk_PaddingHeight(style.labelMargins);
+
+    labelParcel = Ttk_PadBox(
+	Ttk_PositionBox(&borderParcel, lw, lh, style.labelAnchor),
+	style.labelMargins);
+
+    if (!style.labelOutside) {
+	/* Move border edge so it's over label:
+	*/
+	switch (LabelAnchorSide(style.labelAnchor)) {
+	    case TTK_SIDE_LEFT: 	borderParcel.x -= lw / 2;
+	    case TTK_SIDE_RIGHT:	borderParcel.width += lw/2; 	break;
+	    case TTK_SIDE_TOP:  	borderParcel.y -= lh / 2;
+	    case TTK_SIDE_BOTTOM:	borderParcel.height += lh / 2;	break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Place border and label:
+     */
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout, corePtr->state, borderParcel);
+    if (lframePtr->label.labelLayout) {
+	Ttk_PlaceLayout(
+	    lframePtr->label.labelLayout, corePtr->state, labelParcel);
+    }
+    /* labelWidget placed in LabelframePlaceSlaves GM hook */
+    lframePtr->label.labelParcel = labelParcel;
+}
+
+static void LabelframeDisplay(void *recordPtr, Drawable d)
+{
+    Labelframe *lframePtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_DrawLayout(lframePtr->core.layout, lframePtr->core.state, d);
+    if (lframePtr->label.labelLayout) {
+	Ttk_DrawLayout(lframePtr->label.labelLayout, lframePtr->core.state, d);
+    }
+}
+
+/* +++ Labelframe geometry manager hooks.
+ */
+
+/* LabelframePlaceSlaves --
+ * 	Sets the position and size of the labelwidget.
+ */
+static void LabelframePlaceSlaves(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Labelframe *lframe = recordPtr;
+
+    if (Ttk_NumberSlaves(lframe->label.mgr) == 1) {
+	Ttk_Box b;
+	LabelframeDoLayout(recordPtr);
+	b = lframe->label.labelParcel;
+	/* ASSERT: slave #0 is lframe->label.labelWidget */
+	Ttk_PlaceSlave(lframe->label.mgr, 0, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height);
+    }
+}
+
+static int LabelRequest(void *managerData, int index, int width, int height)
+{
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/* LabelRemoved --
+ * 	Unset the -labelwidget option.
+ *
+ * <<NOTE-LABELREMOVED>>:
+ * 	This routine is also called when the widget voluntarily forgets
+ * 	the slave in LabelframeConfigure.
+ */
+static void LabelRemoved(void *managerData, int slaveIndex)
+{
+    Labelframe *lframe = managerData;
+    lframe->label.labelWidget = 0;
+}
+
+static Ttk_ManagerSpec LabelframeManagerSpec = {
+    { "labelframe", Ttk_GeometryRequestProc, Ttk_LostSlaveProc },
+    LabelframeSize,
+    LabelframePlaceSlaves,
+    LabelRequest,
+    LabelRemoved
+};
+
+/* LabelframeInitialize --
+ * 	Initialization hook.
+ */
+static void LabelframeInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Labelframe *lframe = recordPtr;
+
+    lframe->label.mgr = Ttk_CreateManager(
+	&LabelframeManagerSpec, lframe, lframe->core.tkwin);
+    lframe->label.labelWidget = 0;
+    lframe->label.labelLayout = 0;
+    lframe->label.labelParcel = Ttk_MakeBox(-1,-1,-1,-1);
+}
+
+/* LabelframeCleanup --
+ * 	Cleanup hook.
+ */
+static void LabelframeCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Labelframe *lframe = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_DeleteManager(lframe->label.mgr);
+    if (lframe->label.labelLayout) {
+	Ttk_FreeLayout(lframe->label.labelLayout);
+    }
+}
+
+/* RaiseLabelWidget --
+ * 	Raise the -labelwidget to ensure that the labelframe doesn't
+ * 	obscure it (if it's not a direct child), or bring it to
+ * 	the top of the stacking order (if it is).
+ */
+static void RaiseLabelWidget(Labelframe *lframe)
+{
+    Tk_Window parent = Tk_Parent(lframe->label.labelWidget);
+    Tk_Window sibling = NULL;
+    Tk_Window w = lframe->core.tkwin;
+
+    while (w && w != parent) {
+	sibling = w;
+	w = Tk_Parent(w);
+    }
+
+    Tk_RestackWindow(lframe->label.labelWidget, Above, sibling);
+}
+
+/* LabelframeConfigure --
+ * 	Configuration hook.
+ */
+static int LabelframeConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp,void *recordPtr,int mask)
+{
+    Labelframe *lframePtr = recordPtr;
+    Tk_Window labelWidget = lframePtr->label.labelWidget;
+    Ttk_PositionSpec unused;
+
+    /* Validate options:
+     */
+    if (mask & LABELWIDGET_CHANGED && labelWidget != NULL) {
+	if (!Ttk_Maintainable(interp, labelWidget, lframePtr->core.tkwin)) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (TtkGetLabelAnchorFromObj(
+    	interp, lframePtr->label.labelAnchorObj, &unused) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Base class configuration:
+     */
+    if (FrameConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Update -labelwidget changes, if any:
+     */
+    if (mask & LABELWIDGET_CHANGED) {
+	if (Ttk_NumberSlaves(lframePtr->label.mgr) == 1) {
+	    Ttk_ForgetSlave(lframePtr->label.mgr, 0);
+	    /* Restore labelWidget field (see <<NOTE-LABELREMOVED>>)
+	     */
+	    lframePtr->label.labelWidget = labelWidget;
+	}
+
+	if (labelWidget) {
+	    Ttk_InsertSlave(lframePtr->label.mgr, 0, labelWidget, NULL);
+	    RaiseLabelWidget(lframePtr);
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (mask & GEOMETRY_CHANGED) {
+	Ttk_ManagerSizeChanged(lframePtr->label.mgr);
+	Ttk_ManagerLayoutChanged(lframePtr->label.mgr);
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static WidgetSpec LabelframeWidgetSpec = {
+    "TLabelframe",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Labelframe),		/* recordSize */
+    LabelframeOptionSpecs, 	/* optionSpecs */
+    FrameCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    LabelframeInitialize,	/* initializeProc */
+    LabelframeCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    LabelframeConfigure,	/* configureProc */
+    TtkNullPostConfigure,  	/* postConfigureProc */
+    LabelframeGetLayout, 	/* getLayoutProc */
+    LabelframeSize,		/* sizeProc */
+    LabelframeDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    LabelframeDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(LabelframeLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Labelframe.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(LabelSublayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Label.fill", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Label.text", TTK_FILL_BOTH))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/* ======================================================================
+ * +++ Initialization.
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE
+void TtkFrame_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme =  Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TFrame", FrameLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TLabelframe", LabelframeLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "Label", LabelSublayout);
+
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::frame", &FrameWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::labelframe", &LabelframeWidgetSpec);
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkGenStubs.tcl b/generic/ttk/ttkGenStubs.tcl
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..90dea25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkGenStubs.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,921 @@
+# ttkGenStubs.tcl --
+#
+#	This script generates a set of stub files for a given
+#	interface.
+#
+#
+# Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
+# See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+# of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+#
+# SOURCE: tcl/tools/genStubs.tcl, revision 1.20
+#
+# CHANGES:
+#	+ Remove xxx_TCL_DECLARED #ifdeffery
+#	+ Use application-defined storage class specifier instead of "EXTERN"
+#	+ Add "epoch" and "revision" fields to stubs table record
+#	+ Remove dead code related to USE_*_STUB_PROCS (emitStubs, makeStub)
+#	+ Second argument to "declare" is used as a status guard
+#	  instead of a platform guard.
+#	+ Use void (*reserved$i)(void) = 0 instead of void *reserved$i = NULL
+#	  for unused stub entries, in case pointer-to-function and
+#	  pointer-to-object are different sizes.
+#	+ Allow trailing semicolon in function declarations
+#	+ stubs table is const-qualified
+#
+
+package require Tcl 8
+
+namespace eval genStubs {
+    # libraryName --
+    #
+    #	The name of the entire library.  This value is used to compute
+    #	the USE_*_STUBS macro and the name of the init file.
+
+    variable libraryName "UNKNOWN"
+
+    # interfaces --
+    #
+    #	An array indexed by interface name that is used to maintain
+    #   the set of valid interfaces.  The value is empty.
+
+    array set interfaces {}
+
+    # curName --
+    #
+    #	The name of the interface currently being defined.
+
+    variable curName "UNKNOWN"
+
+    # scspec --
+    #
+    #	Storage class specifier for external function declarations.
+    #	Normally "extern", may be set to something like XYZAPI
+    #
+    variable scspec "extern"
+
+    # epoch, revision --
+    #
+    #	The epoch and revision numbers of the interface currently being defined.
+    #   (@@@TODO: should be an array mapping interface names -> numbers)
+    #
+
+    variable epoch 0
+    variable revision 0
+
+    # hooks --
+    #
+    #	An array indexed by interface name that contains the set of
+    #	subinterfaces that should be defined for a given interface.
+
+    array set hooks {}
+
+    # stubs --
+    #
+    #	This three dimensional array is indexed first by interface name,
+    #	second by field name, and third by a numeric offset or the
+    #	constant "lastNum".  The lastNum entry contains the largest
+    #	numeric offset used for a given interface.
+    #
+    #	Field "decl,$i" contains the C function specification that
+    #	should be used for the given entry in the stub table.  The spec
+    #	consists of a list in the form returned by parseDecl.
+    #   Other fields TBD later.
+
+    array set stubs {}
+
+    # outDir --
+    #
+    #	The directory where the generated files should be placed.
+
+    variable outDir .
+}
+
+# genStubs::library --
+#
+#	This function is used in the declarations file to set the name
+#	of the library that the interfaces are associated with (e.g. "tcl").
+#	This value will be used to define the inline conditional macro.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The library name.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::library {name} {
+    variable libraryName $name
+}
+
+# genStubs::interface --
+#
+#	This function is used in the declarations file to set the name
+#	of the interface currently being defined.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The name of the interface.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::interface {name} {
+    variable curName $name
+    variable interfaces
+    variable stubs
+
+    set interfaces($name) {}
+    set stubs($name,lastNum) 0
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::scspec --
+#
+#	Define the storage class macro used for external function declarations.
+#	Typically, this will be a macro like XYZAPI or EXTERN that
+#	expands to either DLLIMPORT or DLLEXPORT, depending on whether
+#	-DBUILD_XYZ has been set.
+#
+proc genStubs::scspec {value} {
+    variable scspec $value
+}
+
+# genStubs::epoch --
+#
+#	Define the epoch number for this library.  The epoch
+#	should be incrememented when a release is made that
+#	contains incompatible changes to the public API.
+#
+proc genStubs::epoch {value} {
+    variable epoch $value
+}
+
+# genStubs::hooks --
+#
+#	This function defines the subinterface hooks for the current
+#	interface.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	names	The ordered list of interfaces that are reachable through the
+#		hook vector.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::hooks {names} {
+    variable curName
+    variable hooks
+
+    set hooks($curName) $names
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::declare --
+#
+#	This function is used in the declarations file to declare a new
+#	interface entry.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	index		The index number of the interface.
+#	status  	Status of the interface: one of "current",
+#		  	"deprecated", or "obsolete".
+#	decl		The C function declaration, or {} for an undefined
+#			entry.
+#
+proc genStubs::declare {args} {
+    variable stubs
+    variable curName
+    variable revision
+
+    incr revision
+
+    if {[llength $args] == 2} {
+	lassign $args index decl
+	set status current
+    } elseif {[llength $args] == 3} {
+	lassign $args index status decl
+    } else {
+	puts stderr "wrong # args: declare $args"
+	return
+    }
+
+    # Check for duplicate declarations, then add the declaration and
+    # bump the lastNum counter if necessary.
+
+    if {[info exists stubs($curName,decl,$index)]} {
+	puts stderr "Duplicate entry: $index"
+    }
+    regsub -all const $decl CONST decl
+    regsub -all "\[ \t\n\]+" [string trim $decl] " " decl
+    set decl [parseDecl $decl]
+
+    set stubs($curName,status,$index) $status
+    set stubs($curName,decl,$index) $decl
+
+    if {$index > $stubs($curName,lastNum)} {
+	set stubs($curName,lastNum) $index
+    }
+
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::rewriteFile --
+#
+#	This function replaces the machine generated portion of the
+#	specified file with new contents.  It looks for the !BEGIN! and
+#	!END! comments to determine where to place the new text.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	file	The name of the file to modify.
+#	text	The new text to place in the file.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::rewriteFile {file text} {
+    if {![file exists $file]} {
+	puts stderr "Cannot find file: $file"
+	return
+    }
+    set in [open ${file} r]
+    set out [open ${file}.new w]
+    fconfigure $out -translation lf
+
+    while {![eof $in]} {
+	set line [gets $in]
+	if {[string match "*!BEGIN!*" $line]} {
+	    break
+	}
+	puts $out $line
+    }
+    puts $out "/* !BEGIN!: Do not edit below this line. */"
+    puts $out $text
+    while {![eof $in]} {
+	set line [gets $in]
+	if {[string match "*!END!*" $line]} {
+	    break
+	}
+    }
+    puts $out "/* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */"
+    puts -nonewline $out [read $in]
+    close $in
+    close $out
+    file rename -force ${file}.new ${file}
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::addPlatformGuard --
+#
+#	Wrap a string inside a platform #ifdef.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	plat	Platform to test.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns the original text inside an appropriate #ifdef.
+
+proc genStubs::addPlatformGuard {plat text} {
+    switch $plat {
+	win {
+	    return "#ifdef __WIN32__\n${text}#endif /* __WIN32__ */\n"
+	}
+	unix {
+	    return "#if !defined(__WIN32__) /* UNIX */\n${text}#endif /* UNIX */\n"
+	}
+	macosx {
+	    return "#ifdef MAC_OSX_TCL\n${text}#endif /* MAC_OSX_TCL */\n"
+	}
+	aqua {
+	    return "#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK\n${text}#endif /* MAC_OSX_TK */\n"
+	}
+	x11 {
+	    return "#if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK)) /* X11 */\n${text}#endif /* X11 */\n"
+	}
+    }
+    return $text
+}
+
+# genStubs::emitSlots --
+#
+#	Generate the stub table slots for the given interface.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The name of the interface being emitted.
+#	textVar	The variable to use for output.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::emitSlots {name textVar} {
+    upvar $textVar text
+    forAllStubs $name makeSlot noGuard text {"    void (*reserved$i)(void);\n"}
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::parseDecl --
+#
+#	Parse a C function declaration into its component parts.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	decl	The function declaration.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns a list of the form {returnType name args}.  The args
+#	element consists of a list of type/name pairs, or a single
+#	element "void".  If the function declaration is malformed
+#	then an error is displayed and the return value is {}.
+
+proc genStubs::parseDecl {decl} {
+    if {![regexp {^(.*)\((.*)\);?$} $decl all prefix args]} {
+	set prefix $decl
+	set args {}
+    }
+    set prefix [string trim $prefix]
+    if {![regexp {^(.+[ ][*]*)([^ *]+)$} $prefix all rtype fname]} {
+	puts stderr "Bad return type: $decl"
+	return
+    }
+    set rtype [string trim $rtype]
+    if {$args == ""} {
+	return [list $rtype $fname {}]
+    }
+    foreach arg [split $args ,] {
+	lappend argList [string trim $arg]
+    }
+    if {![string compare [lindex $argList end] "..."]} {
+	set args TCL_VARARGS
+	foreach arg [lrange $argList 0 end-1] {
+	    set argInfo [parseArg $arg]
+	    if {[llength $argInfo] == 2 || [llength $argInfo] == 3} {
+		lappend args $argInfo
+	    } else {
+		puts stderr "Bad argument: '$arg' in '$decl'"
+		return
+	    }
+	}
+    } else {
+	set args {}
+	foreach arg $argList {
+	    set argInfo [parseArg $arg]
+	    if {![string compare $argInfo "void"]} {
+		lappend args "void"
+		break
+	    } elseif {[llength $argInfo] == 2 || [llength $argInfo] == 3} {
+		lappend args $argInfo
+	    } else {
+		puts stderr "Bad argument: '$arg' in '$decl'"
+		return
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    return [list $rtype $fname $args]
+}
+
+# genStubs::parseArg --
+#
+#	This function parses a function argument into a type and name.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	arg	The argument to parse.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns a list of type and name with an optional third array
+#	indicator.  If the argument is malformed, returns "".
+
+proc genStubs::parseArg {arg} {
+    if {![regexp {^(.+[ ][*]*)([^][ *]+)(\[\])?$} $arg all type name array]} {
+	if {$arg == "void"} {
+	    return $arg
+	} else {
+	    return
+	}
+    }
+    set result [list [string trim $type] $name]
+    if {$array != ""} {
+	lappend result $array
+    }
+    return $result
+}
+
+# genStubs::makeDecl --
+#
+#	Generate the prototype for a function.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The interface name.
+#	decl	The function declaration.
+#	index	The slot index for this function.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns the formatted declaration string.
+
+proc genStubs::makeDecl {name decl index} {
+    variable scspec
+
+    lassign $decl rtype fname args
+
+    append text "/* $index */\n"
+    if {$rtype != "void"} {
+	regsub -all void $rtype VOID rtype
+    }
+    set line "$scspec $rtype"
+    set count [expr {2 - ([string length $line] / 8)}]
+    append line [string range "\t\t\t" 0 $count]
+    set pad [expr {24 - [string length $line]}]
+    if {$pad <= 0} {
+	append line " "
+	set pad 0
+    }
+    if {$args == ""} {
+	append line $fname
+	append text $line
+	append text ";\n"
+	return $text
+    }
+    append line $fname
+
+    regsub -all void $args VOID args
+    set arg1 [lindex $args 0]
+    switch -exact $arg1 {
+	VOID {
+	    append line "(void)"
+	}
+	TCL_VARARGS {
+	    set sep "("
+	    foreach arg [lrange $args 1 end] {
+		append line $sep
+		set next {}
+		append next [lindex $arg 0]
+		if {[string index $next end] ne "*"} {
+		    append next " "
+		}
+		append next [lindex $arg 1] [lindex $arg 2]
+		if {[string length $line] + [string length $next] \
+			+ $pad > 76} {
+		    append text [string trimright $line] \n
+		    set line "\t\t\t\t"
+		    set pad 28
+		}
+		append line $next
+		set sep ", "
+	    }
+	    append line ", ...)"
+	}
+	default {
+	    set sep "("
+	    foreach arg $args {
+		append line $sep
+		set next {}
+		append next [lindex $arg 0]
+		if {[string index $next end] ne "*"} {
+		    append next " "
+		}
+		append next [lindex $arg 1] [lindex $arg 2]
+		if {[string length $line] + [string length $next] \
+			+ $pad > 76} {
+		    append text [string trimright $line] \n
+		    set line "\t\t\t\t"
+		    set pad 28
+		}
+		append line $next
+		set sep ", "
+	    }
+	    append line ")"
+	}
+    }
+    return "$text$line;\n"
+}
+
+# genStubs::makeMacro --
+#
+#	Generate the inline macro for a function.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The interface name.
+#	decl	The function declaration.
+#	index	The slot index for this function.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns the formatted macro definition.
+
+proc genStubs::makeMacro {name decl index} {
+    lassign $decl rtype fname args
+
+    set lfname [string tolower [string index $fname 0]]
+    append lfname [string range $fname 1 end]
+
+    set text "#define $fname \\\n\t("
+    if {$args == ""} {
+	append text "*"
+    }
+    append text "${name}StubsPtr->$lfname)"
+    append text " /* $index */\n"
+    return $text
+}
+
+# genStubs::makeSlot --
+#
+#	Generate the stub table entry for a function.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The interface name.
+#	decl	The function declaration.
+#	index	The slot index for this function.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns the formatted table entry.
+
+proc genStubs::makeSlot {name decl index} {
+    lassign $decl rtype fname args
+
+    set lfname [string tolower [string index $fname 0]]
+    append lfname [string range $fname 1 end]
+
+    set text "    "
+    if {$rtype != "void"} {
+	regsub -all void $rtype VOID rtype
+    }
+    if {$args == ""} {
+	append text $rtype " *" $lfname "; /* $index */\n"
+	return $text
+    }
+    append text $rtype " (*" $lfname ") "
+
+    regsub -all void $args VOID args
+    set arg1 [lindex $args 0]
+    switch -exact $arg1 {
+	VOID {
+	    append text "(void)"
+	}
+	TCL_VARARGS {
+	    set sep "("
+	    foreach arg [lrange $args 1 end] {
+		append text $sep [lindex $arg 0]
+		if {[string index $text end] ne "*"} {
+		    append text " "
+		}
+		append text [lindex $arg 1] [lindex $arg 2]
+		set sep ", "
+	    }
+	    append text ", ...)"
+	}
+	default {
+	    set sep "("
+	    foreach arg $args {
+		append text $sep [lindex $arg 0]
+		if {[string index $text end] ne "*"} {
+		    append text " "
+		}
+		append text [lindex $arg 1] [lindex $arg 2]
+		set sep ", "
+	    }
+	    append text ")"
+	}
+    }
+
+    append text "; /* $index */\n"
+    return $text
+}
+
+# genStubs::makeInit --
+#
+#	Generate the prototype for a function.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The interface name.
+#	decl	The function declaration.
+#	index	The slot index for this function.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns the formatted declaration string.
+
+proc genStubs::makeInit {name decl index} {
+    if {[lindex $decl 2] == ""} {
+	append text "    &" [lindex $decl 1] ", /* " $index " */\n"
+    } else {
+	append text "    " [lindex $decl 1] ", /* " $index " */\n"
+    }
+    return $text
+}
+
+# genStubs::forAllStubs --
+#
+#	This function iterates over all of the slots and invokes
+#	a callback for each slot.  The result of the callback is then
+#	placed inside appropriate guards.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name		The interface name.
+#	slotProc	The proc to invoke to handle the slot.  It will
+#			have the interface name, the declaration,  and
+#			the index appended.
+#	guardProc	The proc to invoke to add guards.  It will have
+#		        the slot status and text appended.
+#	textVar		The variable to use for output.
+#	skipString	The string to emit if a slot is skipped.  This
+#			string will be subst'ed in the loop so "$i" can
+#			be used to substitute the index value.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::forAllStubs {name slotProc guardProc textVar
+    	{skipString {"/* Slot $i is reserved */\n"}}} {
+    variable stubs
+    upvar $textVar text
+
+    set lastNum $stubs($name,lastNum)
+
+    for {set i 0} {$i <= $lastNum} {incr i} {
+	if {[info exists stubs($name,decl,$i)]} {
+	    append text [$guardProc $stubs($name,status,$i) \
+	    			[$slotProc $name $stubs($name,decl,$i) $i]]
+	} else {
+	    eval {append text} $skipString
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+proc genStubs::noGuard  {status text} { return $text }
+
+proc genStubs::addGuard {status text} {
+    variable libraryName
+    set upName [string toupper $libraryName]
+
+    switch -- $status {
+	current	{
+	    # No change
+	}
+	deprecated {
+	    set text [ifdeffed "${upName}_DEPRECATED" $text]
+	}
+	obsolete {
+	    set text ""
+	}
+	default {
+	    puts stderr "Unrecognized status code $status"
+	}
+    }
+    return $text
+}
+
+proc genStubs::ifdeffed {macro text} {
+    join [list "#ifdef $macro" $text "#endif" ""] \n
+}
+
+# genStubs::emitDeclarations --
+#
+#	This function emits the function declarations for this interface.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The interface name.
+#	textVar	The variable to use for output.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::emitDeclarations {name textVar} {
+    upvar $textVar text
+
+    append text "\n/*\n * Exported function declarations:\n */\n\n"
+    forAllStubs $name makeDecl noGuard text
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::emitMacros --
+#
+#	This function emits the inline macros for an interface.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The name of the interface being emitted.
+#	textVar	The variable to use for output.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::emitMacros {name textVar} {
+    variable libraryName
+    upvar $textVar text
+
+    set upName [string toupper $libraryName]
+    append text "\n#if defined(USE_${upName}_STUBS)\n"
+    append text "\n/*\n * Inline function declarations:\n */\n\n"
+
+    forAllStubs $name makeMacro addGuard text
+
+    append text "\n#endif /* defined(USE_${upName}_STUBS) */\n"
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::emitHeader --
+#
+#	This function emits the body of the <name>Decls.h file for
+#	the specified interface.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The name of the interface being emitted.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::emitHeader {name} {
+    variable outDir
+    variable hooks
+    variable epoch
+    variable revision
+
+    set capName [string toupper [string index $name 0]]
+    append capName [string range $name 1 end]
+
+    set CAPName [string toupper $name]
+    append text "\n"
+    append text "#define ${CAPName}_STUBS_EPOCH $epoch\n"
+    append text "#define ${CAPName}_STUBS_REVISION $revision\n"
+
+    emitDeclarations $name text
+
+    if {[info exists hooks($name)]} {
+	append text "\ntypedef struct ${capName}StubHooks {\n"
+	foreach hook $hooks($name) {
+	    set capHook [string toupper [string index $hook 0]]
+	    append capHook [string range $hook 1 end]
+	    append text "    const struct ${capHook}Stubs *${hook}Stubs;\n"
+	}
+	append text "} ${capName}StubHooks;\n"
+    }
+    append text "\ntypedef struct ${capName}Stubs {\n"
+    append text "    int magic;\n"
+    append text "    int epoch;\n"
+    append text "    int revision;\n"
+    append text "    const struct ${capName}StubHooks *hooks;\n\n"
+
+    emitSlots $name text
+
+    append text "} ${capName}Stubs;\n\n"
+
+    append text "#ifdef __cplusplus\nextern \"C\" {\n#endif\n"
+    append text "extern const ${capName}Stubs *${name}StubsPtr;\n"
+    append text "#ifdef __cplusplus\n}\n#endif\n"
+
+    emitMacros $name text
+
+    rewriteFile [file join $outDir ${name}Decls.h] $text
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::emitInit --
+#
+#	Generate the table initializers for an interface.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name		The name of the interface to initialize.
+#	textVar		The variable to use for output.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns the formatted output.
+
+proc genStubs::emitInit {name textVar} {
+    variable hooks
+    variable interfaces
+    variable epoch
+    variable revision
+
+    upvar $textVar text
+    set root 1
+
+    set capName [string toupper [string index $name 0]]
+    append capName [string range $name 1 end]
+    set CAPName [string toupper $name]
+
+    if {[info exists hooks($name)]} {
+	append text "\nstatic const ${capName}StubHooks ${name}StubHooks = \{\n"
+	set sep "    "
+	foreach sub $hooks($name) {
+	    append text $sep "&${sub}Stubs"
+	    set sep ",\n    "
+	}
+	append text "\n\};\n"
+    }
+    foreach intf [array names interfaces] {
+	if {[info exists hooks($intf)]} {
+	    if {0<=[lsearch -exact $hooks($intf) $name]} {
+		set root 0
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    if {$root} {
+	append text "\nconst ${capName}Stubs ${name}Stubs = \{\n"
+    } else {
+	append text "\nstatic const ${capName}Stubs ${name}Stubs = \{\n"
+    }
+    append text "    TCL_STUB_MAGIC,\n"
+    append text "    ${CAPName}_STUBS_EPOCH,\n"
+    append text "    ${CAPName}_STUBS_REVISION,\n"
+    if {[info exists hooks($name)]} {
+	append text "    &${name}StubHooks,\n"
+    } else {
+	append text "    0,\n"
+    }
+
+    forAllStubs $name makeInit noGuard text {"    0, /* $i */\n"}
+
+    append text "\};\n"
+    return
+}
+
+# genStubs::emitInits --
+#
+#	This function emits the body of the <name>StubInit.c file for
+#	the specified interface.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	name	The name of the interface being emitted.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::emitInits {} {
+    variable hooks
+    variable outDir
+    variable libraryName
+    variable interfaces
+
+    # Assuming that dependencies only go one level deep, we need to emit
+    # all of the leaves first to avoid needing forward declarations.
+
+    set leaves {}
+    set roots {}
+    foreach name [lsort [array names interfaces]] {
+	if {[info exists hooks($name)]} {
+	    lappend roots $name
+	} else {
+	    lappend leaves $name
+	}
+    }
+    foreach name $leaves {
+	emitInit $name text
+    }
+    foreach name $roots {
+	emitInit $name text
+    }
+
+    rewriteFile [file join $outDir ${libraryName}StubInit.c] $text
+}
+
+# genStubs::init --
+#
+#	This is the main entry point.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	None.
+#
+# Results:
+#	None.
+
+proc genStubs::init {} {
+    global argv argv0
+    variable outDir
+    variable interfaces
+
+    if {[llength $argv] < 2} {
+	puts stderr "usage: $argv0 outDir declFile ?declFile...?"
+	exit 1
+    }
+
+    set outDir [lindex $argv 0]
+
+    foreach file [lrange $argv 1 end] {
+	source $file
+    }
+
+    foreach name [lsort [array names interfaces]] {
+	puts "Emitting $name"
+	emitHeader $name
+    }
+
+    emitInits
+}
+
+# lassign --
+#
+#	This function emulates the TclX lassign command.
+#
+# Arguments:
+#	valueList	A list containing the values to be assigned.
+#	args		The list of variables to be assigned.
+#
+# Results:
+#	Returns any values that were not assigned to variables.
+
+if {[string length [namespace which lassign]] == 0} {
+    proc lassign {valueList args} {
+	if {[llength $args] == 0} {
+	    error "wrong # args: should be \"lassign list varName ?varName ...?\""
+	}
+	uplevel [list foreach $args $valueList {break}]
+	return [lrange $valueList [llength $args] end]
+    }
+}
+
+genStubs::init
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkImage.c b/generic/ttk/ttkImage.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2b12864
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkImage.c
@@ -0,0 +1,415 @@
+/*
+ *	Image specifications and image element factory.
+ *
+ * Copyright (C) 2004 Pat Thoyts <patthoyts@users.sf.net>
+ * Copyright (C) 2004 Joe English
+ *
+ * An imageSpec is a multi-element list; the first element
+ * is the name of the default image to use, the remainder of the
+ * list is a sequence of statespec/imagename options as per
+ * [style map].
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+#define MIN(a,b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b))
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ ImageSpec management.
+ */
+
+struct TtkImageSpec {
+    Tk_Image 		baseImage;	/* Base image to use */
+    int 		mapCount;	/* #state-specific overrides */
+    Ttk_StateSpec	*states;	/* array[mapCount] of states ... */
+    Tk_Image		*images;	/* ... per-state images to use */
+};
+
+/* NullImageChanged --
+ * 	Do-nothing Tk_ImageChangedProc.
+ */
+static void NullImageChanged(ClientData clientData,
+    int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight)
+{ /* No-op */ }
+
+/* TtkGetImageSpec --
+ * 	Constructs a Ttk_ImageSpec * from a Tcl_Obj *.
+ * 	Result must be released using TtkFreeImageSpec.  
+ *
+ * TODO: Need a variant of this that takes a user-specified ImageChanged proc
+ */
+Ttk_ImageSpec *
+TtkGetImageSpec(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_ImageSpec *imageSpec = 0;
+    int i = 0, n = 0, objc;
+    Tcl_Obj **objv;
+
+    imageSpec = (Ttk_ImageSpec *)ckalloc(sizeof(*imageSpec));
+    imageSpec->baseImage = 0;
+    imageSpec->mapCount = 0;
+    imageSpec->states = 0;
+    imageSpec->images = 0;
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK) {
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    if ((objc % 2) != 1) {
+	if (interp) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+		"image specification must contain an odd number of elements",
+		TCL_STATIC);
+	}
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    n = (objc - 1) / 2;
+    imageSpec->states = (Ttk_StateSpec*)ckalloc(n * sizeof(Ttk_StateSpec));
+    imageSpec->images = (Tk_Image*)ckalloc(n * sizeof(Tk_Image *));
+
+    /* Get base image:
+    */
+    imageSpec->baseImage = Tk_GetImage(
+	    interp, tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), NullImageChanged, NULL);
+    if (!imageSpec->baseImage) {
+    	goto error;
+    }
+
+    /* Extract state and image specifications:
+     */
+    for (i = 0; i < n; ++i) {
+	Tcl_Obj *stateSpec = objv[2*i + 1];
+	const char *imageName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2*i + 2]);
+	Ttk_StateSpec state;
+
+	if (Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(interp, stateSpec, &state) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	imageSpec->states[i] = state;
+
+	imageSpec->images[i] = Tk_GetImage(
+	    interp, tkwin, imageName, NullImageChanged, NULL);
+	if (imageSpec->images[i] == NULL) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	imageSpec->mapCount = i+1;
+    }
+
+    return imageSpec;
+
+error:
+    TtkFreeImageSpec(imageSpec);
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/* TtkFreeImageSpec --
+ * 	Dispose of an image specification.
+ */
+void TtkFreeImageSpec(Ttk_ImageSpec *imageSpec)
+{
+    int i;
+
+    for (i=0; i < imageSpec->mapCount; ++i) {
+	Tk_FreeImage(imageSpec->images[i]);
+    }
+
+    if (imageSpec->baseImage) { Tk_FreeImage(imageSpec->baseImage); }
+    if (imageSpec->states) { ckfree((ClientData)imageSpec->states); }
+    if (imageSpec->images) { ckfree((ClientData)imageSpec->images); }
+
+    ckfree((ClientData)imageSpec);
+}
+
+/* TtkSelectImage --
+ * 	Return a state-specific image from an ImageSpec
+ */
+Tk_Image TtkSelectImage(Ttk_ImageSpec *imageSpec, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    int i;
+    for (i = 0; i < imageSpec->mapCount; ++i) {
+	if (Ttk_StateMatches(state, imageSpec->states+i)) {
+	    return imageSpec->images[i];
+	}
+    }
+    return imageSpec->baseImage;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Drawing utilities.
+ */
+
+/* LPadding, CPadding, RPadding --
+ * 	Split a box+padding pair into left, center, and right boxes.
+ */
+static Ttk_Box LPadding(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+    { return Ttk_MakeBox(b.x, b.y, p.left, b.height); }
+
+static Ttk_Box CPadding(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+    { return Ttk_MakeBox(b.x+p.left, b.y, b.width-p.left-p.right, b.height); }
+
+static Ttk_Box RPadding(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+    { return  Ttk_MakeBox(b.x+b.width-p.right, b.y, p.right, b.height); }
+
+/* TPadding, MPadding, BPadding --
+ * 	Split a box+padding pair into top, middle, and bottom parts.
+ */
+static Ttk_Box TPadding(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+    { return Ttk_MakeBox(b.x, b.y, b.width, p.top); }
+
+static Ttk_Box MPadding(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+    { return Ttk_MakeBox(b.x, b.y+p.top, b.width, b.height-p.top-p.bottom); }
+
+static Ttk_Box BPadding(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+    { return Ttk_MakeBox(b.x, b.y+b.height-p.bottom, b.width, p.bottom); }
+
+/* Ttk_Fill --
+ *	Fill the destination area of the drawable by replicating
+ *	the source area of the image.
+ */
+static void Ttk_Fill(
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Tk_Image image, Ttk_Box src, Ttk_Box dst)
+{
+    int dr = dst.x + dst.width;
+    int db = dst.y + dst.height;
+    int x,y;
+
+    if (!(src.width && src.height && dst.width && dst.height))
+	return;
+
+    for (x = dst.x; x < dr; x += src.width) {
+	int cw = MIN(src.width, dr - x);
+	for (y = dst.y; y <= db; y += src.height) {
+	    int ch = MIN(src.height, db - y);
+	    Tk_RedrawImage(image, src.x, src.y, cw, ch, d, x, y);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/* Ttk_Stripe --
+ * 	Fill a horizontal stripe of the destination drawable.
+ */
+static void Ttk_Stripe(
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Tk_Image image,
+    Ttk_Box src, Ttk_Box dst, Ttk_Padding p)
+{
+    Ttk_Fill(tkwin, d, image, LPadding(src,p), LPadding(dst,p));
+    Ttk_Fill(tkwin, d, image, CPadding(src,p), CPadding(dst,p));
+    Ttk_Fill(tkwin, d, image, RPadding(src,p), RPadding(dst,p));
+}
+
+/* Ttk_Tile --
+ * 	Fill successive horizontal stripes of the destination drawable.
+ */
+static void Ttk_Tile(
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Tk_Image image,
+    Ttk_Box src, Ttk_Box dst, Ttk_Padding p)
+{
+    Ttk_Stripe(tkwin, d, image, TPadding(src,p), TPadding(dst,p), p);
+    Ttk_Stripe(tkwin, d, image, MPadding(src,p), MPadding(dst,p), p);
+    Ttk_Stripe(tkwin, d, image, BPadding(src,p), BPadding(dst,p), p);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Image element definition.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {		/* ClientData for image elements */
+    Ttk_ImageSpec *imageSpec;	/* Image(s) to use */
+    int minWidth;		/* Minimum width; overrides image width */
+    int minHeight;		/* Minimum width; overrides image width */
+    Ttk_Sticky sticky;		/* -stickiness specification */
+    Ttk_Padding border;		/* Fixed border region */
+    Ttk_Padding padding;	/* Internal padding */
+
+#if TILE_07_COMPAT
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache;	/* Resource cache for images */
+    Ttk_StateMap imageMap;	/* State-based lookup table for images */
+#endif
+} ImageData;
+
+static void FreeImageData(void *clientData)
+{
+    ImageData *imageData = clientData;
+    if (imageData->imageSpec)	{ TtkFreeImageSpec(imageData->imageSpec); }
+#if TILE_07_COMPAT
+    if (imageData->imageMap)	{ Tcl_DecrRefCount(imageData->imageMap); }
+#endif
+    ckfree(clientData);
+}
+
+static void ImageElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ImageData *imageData = clientData;
+    Tk_Image image = imageData->imageSpec->baseImage;
+
+    if (image) {
+	Tk_SizeOfImage(image, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    }
+    if (imageData->minWidth >= 0) {
+	*widthPtr = imageData->minWidth;
+    }
+    if (imageData->minHeight >= 0) {
+	*heightPtr = imageData->minHeight;
+    }
+
+    *paddingPtr = imageData->padding;
+}
+
+static void ImageElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    ImageData *imageData = clientData;
+    Tk_Image image = 0;
+    int imgWidth, imgHeight;
+    Ttk_Box src, dst;
+
+#if TILE_07_COMPAT
+    if (imageData->imageMap) {
+	Tcl_Obj *imageObj = Ttk_StateMapLookup(NULL,imageData->imageMap,state);
+	if (imageObj) {
+	    image = Ttk_UseImage(imageData->cache, tkwin, imageObj);
+	}
+    }
+    if (!image) {
+	image = TtkSelectImage(imageData->imageSpec, state);
+    }
+#else
+    image = TtkSelectImage(imageData->imageSpec, state);
+#endif
+
+    if (!image) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    Tk_SizeOfImage(image, &imgWidth, &imgHeight);
+    src = Ttk_MakeBox(0, 0, imgWidth, imgHeight);
+    dst = Ttk_StickBox(b, imgWidth, imgHeight, imageData->sticky);
+
+    Ttk_Tile(tkwin, d, image, src, dst, imageData->border);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ImageElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(NullElement),
+    TtkNullElementOptions,
+    ImageElementSize,
+    ImageElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Image element factory.
+ */
+static int
+Ttk_CreateImageElement(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    void *clientData,
+    Ttk_Theme theme,
+    const char *elementName,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    static const char *optionStrings[] =
+	 { "-border","-height","-padding","-sticky","-width",NULL };
+    enum { O_BORDER, O_HEIGHT, O_PADDING, O_STICKY, O_WIDTH };
+
+    Ttk_ImageSpec *imageSpec = 0;
+    ImageData *imageData = 0;
+    int padding_specified = 0;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc <= 0) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Must supply a base image", NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    imageSpec = TtkGetImageSpec(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), objv[0]);
+    if (!imageSpec) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    imageData = (ImageData*)ckalloc(sizeof(*imageData));
+    imageData->imageSpec = imageSpec;
+    imageData->minWidth = imageData->minHeight = -1;
+    imageData->sticky = TTK_FILL_BOTH;
+    imageData->border = imageData->padding = Ttk_UniformPadding(0);
+#if TILE_07_COMPAT
+    imageData->cache = Ttk_GetResourceCache(interp);
+    imageData->imageMap = 0;
+#endif
+
+    for (i = 1; i < objc; i += 2) {
+	int option;
+
+	if (i == objc - 1) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		"Value for ", Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), " missing",
+		NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+#if TILE_07_COMPAT
+	if (!strcmp("-map", Tcl_GetString(objv[i]))) {
+	    imageData->imageMap = objv[i+1];
+	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(imageData->imageMap);
+	    continue;
+	}
+#endif
+
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings,
+		    "option", 0, &option) != TCL_OK) { goto error; }
+
+	switch (option) {
+	    case O_BORDER:
+		if (Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &imageData->border)
+			!= TCL_OK) { goto error; }
+		if (!padding_specified) {
+		    imageData->padding = imageData->border;
+		}
+		break;
+	    case O_PADDING:
+		if (Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &imageData->padding)
+			!= TCL_OK) { goto error; }
+		padding_specified = 1;
+		break;
+	    case O_WIDTH:
+		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &imageData->minWidth)
+			!= TCL_OK) { goto error; }
+		break;
+	    case O_HEIGHT:
+		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &imageData->minHeight)
+			!= TCL_OK) { goto error; }
+		break;
+	    case O_STICKY:
+		if (Ttk_GetStickyFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &imageData->sticky)
+			!= TCL_OK) { goto error; }
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (!Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, elementName, &ImageElementSpec,
+		imageData))
+    {
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_RegisterCleanup(interp, imageData, FreeImageData);
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(elementName, -1));
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    FreeImageData(imageData);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+MODULE_SCOPE
+void TtkImage_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_RegisterElementFactory(interp, "image", Ttk_CreateImageElement, NULL);
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkInit.c b/generic/ttk/ttkInit.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..78676c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkInit.c
@@ -0,0 +1,282 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2003, Joe English
+ *
+ * Ttk package: initialization routine and miscellaneous utilities.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/*
+ * Legal values for the button -default option.
+ * See also: enum Ttk_ButtonDefaultState.
+ */
+const char *ttkDefaultStrings[] = {
+    "normal", "active", "disabled", NULL
+};
+
+int Ttk_GetButtonDefaultStateFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *statePtr)
+{
+    *statePtr = TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED;
+    return Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr,
+	    ttkDefaultStrings, "default state", 0, statePtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Legal values for the -compound option.
+ * See also: enum Ttk_Compound.
+ */
+const char *ttkCompoundStrings[] = {
+    "none", "text", "image", "center",
+    "top", "bottom", "left", "right", NULL
+};
+
+int Ttk_GetCompoundFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *statePtr)
+{
+    *statePtr = TTK_COMPOUND_NONE;
+    return Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr,
+	    ttkCompoundStrings, "compound layout", 0, statePtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Legal values for the -orient option.
+ * See also: enum Ttk_Orient.
+ */
+const char *ttkOrientStrings[] = {
+    "horizontal", "vertical", NULL
+};
+
+int Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *resultPtr)
+{
+    *resultPtr = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    return Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr,
+	    ttkOrientStrings, "orientation", 0, resultPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Recognized values for the -state compatibility option.
+ * Other options are accepted and interpreted as synonyms for "normal".
+ */
+static const char *ttkStateStrings[] = {
+    "normal", "readonly", "disabled", "active", NULL
+};
+enum { 
+    TTK_COMPAT_STATE_NORMAL,
+    TTK_COMPAT_STATE_READONLY,
+    TTK_COMPAT_STATE_DISABLED,
+    TTK_COMPAT_STATE_ACTIVE
+};
+
+/* TtkCheckStateOption -- 
+ * 	Handle -state compatibility option.
+ *
+ *	NOTE: setting -state disabled / -state enabled affects the 
+ *	widget state, but the internal widget state does *not* affect 
+ *	the value of the -state option.
+ *	This option is present for compatibility only.
+ */
+void TtkCheckStateOption(WidgetCore *corePtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    int stateOption = TTK_COMPAT_STATE_NORMAL;
+    unsigned all = TTK_STATE_DISABLED|TTK_STATE_READONLY|TTK_STATE_ACTIVE;
+#   define SETFLAGS(f) TtkWidgetChangeState(corePtr, f, all^f)
+
+    (void)Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(NULL,objPtr,ttkStateStrings,"",0,&stateOption);
+    switch (stateOption) {
+	case TTK_COMPAT_STATE_NORMAL:
+	default:
+	    SETFLAGS(0);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPAT_STATE_READONLY:
+	    SETFLAGS(TTK_STATE_READONLY);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPAT_STATE_DISABLED:
+	    SETFLAGS(TTK_STATE_DISABLED);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPAT_STATE_ACTIVE:
+	    SETFLAGS(TTK_STATE_ACTIVE);
+	    break;
+    }
+#   undef SETFLAGS
+}
+
+/* TtkSendVirtualEvent --
+ * 	Send a virtual event notification to the specified target window.
+ * 	Equivalent to "event generate $tgtWindow <<$eventName>>"
+ *
+ * 	Note that we use Tk_QueueWindowEvent, not Tk_HandleEvent,
+ * 	so this routine does not reenter the interpreter.
+ */
+void TtkSendVirtualEvent(Tk_Window tgtWin, const char *eventName)
+{
+    union {XEvent general; XVirtualEvent virtual;} event;
+
+    memset(&event, 0, sizeof(event));
+    event.general.xany.type = VirtualEvent;
+    event.general.xany.serial = NextRequest(Tk_Display(tgtWin));
+    event.general.xany.send_event = False;
+    event.general.xany.window = Tk_WindowId(tgtWin);
+    event.general.xany.display = Tk_Display(tgtWin);
+    event.virtual.name = Tk_GetUid(eventName);
+
+    Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event.general, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
+}
+
+/* TtkEnumerateOptions, TtkGetOptionValue --
+ *	Common factors for data accessor commands.
+ */
+int TtkEnumerateOptions(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, const Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr,
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tk_Window tkwin)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+    while (specPtr->type != TK_OPTION_END)
+    {
+	Tcl_Obj *optionName = Tcl_NewStringObj(specPtr->optionName, -1);
+	Tcl_Obj *optionValue =
+	    Tk_GetOptionValue(interp,recordPtr,optionTable,optionName,tkwin);
+	if (optionValue) {
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, result, optionName);
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, result, optionValue);
+	}
+	++specPtr;
+
+	if (specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_END && specPtr->clientData != NULL) {
+	    /* Chain to next option spec array: */
+	    specPtr = specPtr->clientData;
+	}
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int TtkGetOptionValue(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tcl_Obj *optionName,
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tk_Window tkwin)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *result =
+	Tk_GetOptionValue(interp,recordPtr,optionTable,optionName,tkwin);
+    if (result) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * Core Option specifications:
+ * type name dbName dbClass default objOffset intOffset flags clientData mask
+ */
+
+/* public */ 
+Tk_OptionSpec ttkCoreOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", NULL,
+	Tk_Offset(WidgetCore, cursorObj), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-style", "style", "Style", "",
+	Tk_Offset(WidgetCore,styleObj), -1, 0,0,STYLE_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "", "", NULL,
+	Tk_Offset(WidgetCore,classObj), -1, 0,0,READONLY_OPTION},
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0}
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization: elements and element factories.
+ */
+
+extern void TtkElements_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void TtkLabel_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void TtkImage_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+
+static void RegisterElements(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    TtkElements_Init(interp);
+    TtkLabel_Init(interp);
+    TtkImage_Init(interp);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization: Widget definitions.
+ */
+
+extern void TtkButton_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void TtkEntry_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void TtkFrame_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void TtkNotebook_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void TtkPanedwindow_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void TtkProgressbar_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void TtkScale_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void TtkScrollbar_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void TtkSeparator_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void TtkTreeview_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+
+#ifdef TTK_SQUARE_WIDGET
+extern int TtkSquareWidget_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+#endif
+
+static void RegisterWidgets(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    TtkButton_Init(interp);
+    TtkEntry_Init(interp);
+    TtkFrame_Init(interp);
+    TtkNotebook_Init(interp);
+    TtkPanedwindow_Init(interp);
+    TtkProgressbar_Init(interp);
+    TtkScale_Init(interp);
+    TtkScrollbar_Init(interp);
+    TtkSeparator_Init(interp);
+    TtkTreeview_Init(interp);
+#ifdef TTK_SQUARE_WIDGET
+    TtkSquareWidget_Init(interp);
+#endif
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization: Built-in themes.
+ */
+
+extern int TtkAltTheme_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern int TtkClassicTheme_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern int TtkClamTheme_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+
+static void RegisterThemes(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+
+    TtkAltTheme_Init(interp);
+    TtkClassicTheme_Init(interp);
+    TtkClamTheme_Init(interp);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk initialization.
+ */
+
+extern const TtkStubs ttkStubs;
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int
+Ttk_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    /*
+     * This will be run for both safe and regular interp init.
+     * Use Tcl_IsSafe if necessary to not initialize unsafe bits.
+     */
+    Ttk_StylePkgInit(interp);
+
+    RegisterElements(interp);
+    RegisterWidgets(interp);
+    RegisterThemes(interp);
+
+    Ttk_PlatformInit(interp);
+
+    Tcl_PkgProvideEx(interp, "Ttk", TTK_PATCH_LEVEL, (ClientData)&ttkStubs);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkLabel.c b/generic/ttk/ttkLabel.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..597682f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkLabel.c
@@ -0,0 +1,693 @@
+/*
+ * text, image, and label elements.
+ *
+ * The label element combines text and image elements,
+ * with layout determined by the "-compound" option.
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <tcl.h>
+#include <tkInt.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Text element.
+ *
+ * This element displays a textual label in the foreground color.
+ *
+ * Optionally underlines the mnemonic character if the -underline resource
+ * is present and >= 0.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    /*
+     * Element options:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj	*textObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*fontObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*foregroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*underlineObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*widthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*anchorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*justifyObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*wrapLengthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj     *embossedObj;
+
+    /*
+     * Computed resources:
+     */
+    Tk_Font		tkfont;
+    Tk_TextLayout	textLayout;
+    int 		width;
+    int 		height;
+    int			embossed;
+
+} TextElement;
+
+/* Text element options table.
+ * NB: Keep in sync with label element option table.
+ */
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TextElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-text", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,textObj), "" },
+    { "-font", TK_OPTION_FONT,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,fontObj), DEFAULT_FONT },
+    { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,foregroundObj), "black" },
+    { "-underline", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,underlineObj), "-1"},
+    { "-width", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,widthObj), "-1"},
+    { "-anchor", TK_OPTION_ANCHOR,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,anchorObj), "w"},
+    { "-justify", TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,justifyObj), "left" },
+    { "-wraplength", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,wrapLengthObj), "0" },
+    { "-embossed", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,embossedObj), "0"},
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static int TextSetup(TextElement *text, Tk_Window tkwin)
+{
+    const char *string = Tcl_GetString(text->textObj);
+    Tk_Justify justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+    int wrapLength = 0;
+
+    text->tkfont = Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, text->fontObj);
+    Tk_GetJustifyFromObj(NULL, text->justifyObj, &justify);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, text->wrapLengthObj, &wrapLength);
+    Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(NULL, text->embossedObj, &text->embossed);
+
+    text->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(
+	    text->tkfont, string, -1/*numChars*/, wrapLength, justify,
+	    0/*flags*/, &text->width, &text->height);
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ * TextReqWidth -- compute the requested width of a text element.
+ *
+ * If -width is positive, use that as the width
+ * If -width is negative, use that as the minimum width
+ * If not specified or empty, use the natural size of the text
+ */
+
+static int TextReqWidth(TextElement *text)
+{
+    int reqWidth;
+
+    if (   text->widthObj
+	&& Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, text->widthObj, &reqWidth) == TCL_OK)
+    {
+	int avgWidth = Tk_TextWidth(text->tkfont, "0", 1);
+	if (reqWidth <= 0) {
+	    int specWidth = avgWidth * -reqWidth;
+	    if (specWidth > text->width)
+		return specWidth;
+	} else {
+	    return avgWidth * reqWidth;
+	}
+    }
+    return text->width;
+}
+
+static void TextCleanup(TextElement *text)
+{
+    Tk_FreeTextLayout(text->textLayout);
+}
+
+/*
+ * TextDraw --
+ * 	Draw a text element.
+ * 	Called by TextElementDraw() and LabelElementDraw().
+ */
+static void TextDraw(TextElement *text, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b)
+{
+    XColor *color = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, text->foregroundObj);
+    int underline = -1;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+    GC gc1, gc2;
+    Tk_Anchor anchor = TK_ANCHOR_CENTER;
+    TkRegion clipRegion = NULL;
+
+    gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(text->tkfont);
+    gcValues.foreground = color->pixel;
+    gc1 = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCFont | GCForeground, &gcValues);
+    gcValues.foreground = WhitePixelOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+    gc2 = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCFont | GCForeground, &gcValues);
+
+    /* 
+     * Place text according to -anchor:
+     */
+    Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(NULL, text->anchorObj, &anchor);
+    b = Ttk_AnchorBox(b, text->width, text->height, anchor);
+
+    /*
+     * Clip text if it's too wide:
+     */
+    if (b.width < text->width) {
+	XRectangle rect;
+
+	clipRegion = TkCreateRegion();
+	rect.x = b.x;
+	rect.y = b.y;
+	rect.width = b.width + (text->embossed ? 1 : 0);
+	rect.height = b.height + (text->embossed ? 1 : 0);
+	TkUnionRectWithRegion(&rect, clipRegion, clipRegion);
+	TkSetRegion(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc1, clipRegion);
+	TkSetRegion(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc2, clipRegion);
+#ifdef HAVE_XFT
+	TkUnixSetXftClipRegion(clipRegion);
+#endif
+    }
+
+    if (text->embossed) {
+	Tk_DrawTextLayout(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc2,
+	    text->textLayout, b.x+1, b.y+1, 0/*firstChar*/, -1/*lastChar*/);
+    }
+    Tk_DrawTextLayout(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc1,
+	    text->textLayout, b.x, b.y, 0/*firstChar*/, -1/*lastChar*/);
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, text->underlineObj, &underline);
+    if (underline >= 0) {
+	if (text->embossed) {
+	    Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc2,
+		text->textLayout, b.x+1, b.y+1, underline);
+	}
+	Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc1,
+	    text->textLayout, b.x, b.y, underline);
+    }
+
+    if (clipRegion != NULL) {
+#ifdef HAVE_XFT
+	TkUnixSetXftClipRegion(None);
+#endif
+	XSetClipMask(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc1, None);
+	XSetClipMask(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc2, None);
+	TkDestroyRegion(clipRegion);
+    }
+    Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc1);
+    Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc2);
+}
+
+static void TextElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    TextElement *text = elementRecord;
+
+    if (!TextSetup(text, tkwin))
+	return;
+
+    *heightPtr = text->height;
+    *widthPtr = TextReqWidth(text);
+
+    TextCleanup(text);
+
+    return;
+}
+
+static void TextElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    TextElement *text = elementRecord;
+    if (TextSetup(text, tkwin)) {
+	TextDraw(text, tkwin, d, b);
+	TextCleanup(text);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TextElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TextElement),
+    TextElementOptions,
+    TextElementSize,
+    TextElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Image element.
+ * Draws an image.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*imageObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*stippleObj;	/* For TTK_STATE_DISABLED */
+    Tcl_Obj 	*backgroundObj;	/* " " */
+
+    Ttk_ImageSpec *imageSpec;
+    Tk_Image	tkimg;
+    int 	width;
+    int		height;
+} ImageElement;
+
+/* ===> NB: Keep in sync with label element option table.  <===
+ */
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ImageElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-image", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(ImageElement,imageObj), "" },
+    { "-stipple", TK_OPTION_STRING, 	/* Really: TK_OPTION_BITMAP */
+	Tk_Offset(ImageElement,stippleObj), "gray50" },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ImageElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+/*
+ * ImageSetup() --
+ * 	Look up the Tk_Image from the image element's imageObj resource.
+ * 	Caller must release the image with ImageCleanup().
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	1 if successful, 0 if there was an error (unreported)
+ * 	or the image resource was not specified.
+ */
+
+static int ImageSetup(
+    ImageElement *image, Tk_Window tkwin, Ttk_State state)
+{
+
+    if (!image->imageObj) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+    image->imageSpec = TtkGetImageSpec(NULL, tkwin, image->imageObj);
+    if (!image->imageSpec) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+    image->tkimg = TtkSelectImage(image->imageSpec, state);
+    if (!image->tkimg) {
+	TtkFreeImageSpec(image->imageSpec);
+	return 0;
+    }
+    Tk_SizeOfImage(image->tkimg, &image->width, &image->height);
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+static void ImageCleanup(ImageElement *image)
+{
+    TtkFreeImageSpec(image->imageSpec);
+}
+
+/*
+ * StippleOver --
+ * 	Draw a stipple over the image area, to make it look "grayed-out"
+ * 	when TTK_STATE_DISABLED is set.
+ */
+static void StippleOver(
+    ImageElement *image, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, int x, int y)
+{
+    Pixmap stipple = Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj(NULL, tkwin, image->stippleObj);
+    XColor *color = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, image->backgroundObj);
+
+    if (stipple != None) {
+	unsigned long mask = GCFillStyle | GCStipple | GCForeground;
+	XGCValues gcvalues;
+	GC gc;
+	gcvalues.foreground = color->pixel;
+	gcvalues.fill_style = FillStippled;
+	gcvalues.stipple = stipple;
+	gc = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, mask, &gcvalues);
+	XFillRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin),d,gc,x,y,image->width,image->height);
+	Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc);
+	Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(tkwin, image->stippleObj);
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImageDraw(
+    ImageElement *image, Tk_Window tkwin,Drawable d,Ttk_Box b,Ttk_State state)
+{
+    int width = image->width, height = image->height;
+
+    /* Clip width and height to remain within window bounds:
+     */
+    if (b.x + width > Tk_Width(tkwin)) {
+	width = Tk_Width(tkwin) - b.x;
+    }
+    if (b.y + height > Tk_Height(tkwin)) {
+	height = Tk_Height(tkwin) - b.y;
+    }
+
+    if (height <= 0 || width <= 0) {
+	/* Completely clipped - bail out.
+	 */
+	return;
+    }
+
+    Tk_RedrawImage(image->tkimg, 0,0, width, height, d, b.x, b.y);
+
+    /* If we're disabled there's no state-specific 'disabled' image, 
+     * stipple the image.
+     * @@@ Possibly: Don't do disabled-stippling at all;
+     * @@@ it's ugly and out of fashion.
+     * Do not stipple at all under Aqua, just draw the image: it shows up 
+     * as a white rectangle otherwise.
+     */
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+	if (TtkSelectImage(image->imageSpec, 0ul) == image->tkimg) {
+#ifndef MAC_OSX_TK
+	    StippleOver(image, tkwin, d, b.x,b.y);
+#endif
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImageElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ImageElement *image = elementRecord;
+
+    if (ImageSetup(image, tkwin, 0)) {
+	*widthPtr = image->width;
+	*heightPtr = image->height;
+	ImageCleanup(image);
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImageElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    ImageElement *image = elementRecord;
+
+    if (ImageSetup(image, tkwin, state)) {
+	ImageDraw(image, tkwin, d, b, state);
+	ImageCleanup(image);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ImageElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ImageElement),
+    ImageElementOptions,
+    ImageElementSize,
+    ImageElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Label element.
+ *
+ * Displays an image and/or text, as determined by the -compound option.
+ *
+ * Differences from Tk 8.4 compound elements:
+ *
+ * This adds two new values for the -compound option, "text"
+ * and "image".  (This is useful for configuring toolbars to
+ * display icons, text and icons, or text only, as found in
+ * many browsers.)
+ *
+ * "-compound none" is supported, but I'd like to get rid of it;
+ * it makes the logic more complex, and the only benefit is
+ * backwards compatibility with Tk < 8.3.0 scripts.
+ *
+ * This adds a new resource, -space, for determining how much
+ * space to leave between the text and image; Tk 8.4 reuses the
+ * -padx or -pady option for this purpose.
+ *
+ * -width always specifies the length in characters of the text part;
+ *  in Tk 8.4 it's either characters or pixels, depending on the
+ *  value of -compound.
+ *
+ * Negative values of -width are interpreted as a minimum width
+ * on all platforms, not just on Windows.
+ *
+ * Tk 8.4 ignores -padx and -pady if -compound is set to "none".
+ * Here, padding is handled by a different element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    /*
+     * Element options:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj		*compoundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj		*spaceObj;
+    TextElement 	text;
+    ImageElement	image;
+
+    /*
+     * Computed values (see LabelSetup)
+     */
+    Ttk_Compound	compound;
+    int  		space;
+    int 		totalWidth, totalHeight;
+} LabelElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec LabelElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-compound", TK_OPTION_ANY,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,compoundObj), "none" },
+    { "-space", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,spaceObj), "4" },
+
+    /* Text element part:
+     * NB: Keep in sync with TextElementOptions.
+     */
+    { "-text", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.textObj), "" },
+    { "-font", TK_OPTION_FONT,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.fontObj), DEFAULT_FONT },
+    { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.foregroundObj), "black" },
+    { "-underline", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.underlineObj), "-1"},
+    { "-width", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.widthObj), ""},
+    { "-anchor", TK_OPTION_ANCHOR,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.anchorObj), "w"},
+    { "-justify", TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.justifyObj), "left" },
+    { "-wraplength", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.wrapLengthObj), "0" },
+    { "-embossed", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.embossedObj), "0"},
+
+    /* Image element part:
+     * NB: Keep in sync with ImageElementOptions.
+     */
+    { "-image", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,image.imageObj), "" },
+    { "-stipple", TK_OPTION_STRING, 	/* Really: TK_OPTION_BITMAP */
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,image.stippleObj), "gray50" },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,image.backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+/*
+ * LabelSetup --
+ * 	Fills in computed fields of the label element.
+ *
+ * 	Calculate the text, image, and total width and height.
+ */
+
+#define MAX(a,b) ((a) > (b) ? a : b);
+static void LabelSetup(
+    LabelElement *c, Tk_Window tkwin, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    Ttk_Compound *compoundPtr = &c->compound;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL,tkwin,c->spaceObj,&c->space);
+    Ttk_GetCompoundFromObj(NULL,c->compoundObj,(int*)compoundPtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Deal with TTK_COMPOUND_NONE.
+     */
+    if (c->compound == TTK_COMPOUND_NONE) {
+	if (ImageSetup(&c->image, tkwin, state)) {
+	    c->compound = TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE;
+	} else {
+	    c->compound = TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT;
+	}
+    } else if (c->compound != TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT) {
+    	if (!ImageSetup(&c->image, tkwin, state)) {
+	    c->compound = TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT;
+	}
+    }
+    if (c->compound != TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE)
+	TextSetup(&c->text, tkwin);
+
+    /*
+     * ASSERT:
+     * if c->compound != IMAGE, then TextSetup() has been called
+     * if c->compound != TEXT, then ImageSetup() has returned successfully
+     * c->compound != COMPOUND_NONE.
+     */
+
+    switch (c->compound)
+    {
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_NONE:
+	    /* Can't happen */
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT:
+	    c->totalWidth  = c->text.width;
+	    c->totalHeight = c->text.height;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE:
+	    c->totalWidth  = c->image.width;
+	    c->totalHeight = c->image.height;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_CENTER:
+	    c->totalWidth  = MAX(c->image.width, c->text.width);
+	    c->totalHeight = MAX(c->image.height, c->text.height);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_TOP:
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_BOTTOM:
+	    c->totalWidth  = MAX(c->image.width, c->text.width);
+	    c->totalHeight = c->image.height + c->text.height + c->space;
+	    break;
+
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_LEFT:
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_RIGHT:
+	    c->totalWidth  = c->image.width + c->text.width + c->space;
+	    c->totalHeight = MAX(c->image.height, c->text.height);
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+static void LabelCleanup(LabelElement *c)
+{
+    if (c->compound != TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT)
+	ImageCleanup(&c->image);
+    if (c->compound != TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE)
+	TextCleanup(&c->text);
+}
+
+static void LabelElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    LabelElement *label = elementRecord;
+    int textReqWidth = 0;
+
+    LabelSetup(label, tkwin, 0);
+
+    *heightPtr = label->totalHeight;
+
+    /* Requested width based on -width option, not actual text width:
+     */
+    if (label->compound != TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE)
+	textReqWidth = TextReqWidth(&label->text);
+
+    switch (label->compound) 
+    {
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT:
+	    *widthPtr = textReqWidth;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE:
+	    *widthPtr = label->image.width;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_TOP:
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_BOTTOM:
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_CENTER:
+	    *widthPtr = MAX(label->image.width, textReqWidth); 
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_LEFT:
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_RIGHT:
+	    *widthPtr = label->image.width + textReqWidth + label->space; 
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_NONE:
+	    break; /* Can't happen */
+    }
+
+    LabelCleanup(label);
+}
+
+/*
+ * DrawCompound --
+ * 	Helper routine for LabelElementDraw;
+ * 	Handles layout for -compound {left,right,top,bottom}
+ */
+static void DrawCompound(
+    LabelElement *l, Ttk_Box b, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_State state,
+    int imageSide, int textSide)
+{
+    Ttk_Box imageBox =
+	Ttk_PlaceBox(&b, l->image.width, l->image.height, imageSide, 0);
+    Ttk_Box textBox =
+	Ttk_PlaceBox(&b, l->text.width, l->text.height, textSide, 0);
+    ImageDraw(&l->image,tkwin,d,imageBox,state);
+    TextDraw(&l->text,tkwin,d,textBox);
+}
+
+static void LabelElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    LabelElement *l = elementRecord;
+    Tk_Anchor anchor = TK_ANCHOR_CENTER;
+
+    LabelSetup(l, tkwin, state);
+
+    /*
+     * Adjust overall parcel based on -anchor:
+     */
+    Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(NULL, l->text.anchorObj, &anchor);
+    b = Ttk_AnchorBox(b, l->totalWidth, l->totalHeight, anchor);
+
+    /*
+     * Draw text and/or image parts based on -compound:
+     */
+    switch (l->compound)
+    {
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_NONE:
+	    /* Can't happen */
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT:
+	    TextDraw(&l->text,tkwin,d,b);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE:
+	    ImageDraw(&l->image,tkwin,d,b,state);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_CENTER:
+	{
+	    Ttk_Box pb = Ttk_AnchorBox(
+		b, l->image.width, l->image.height, TK_ANCHOR_CENTER);
+	    ImageDraw(&l->image, tkwin, d, pb, state);
+	    pb = Ttk_AnchorBox(
+		b, l->text.width, l->text.height, TK_ANCHOR_CENTER);
+	    TextDraw(&l->text, tkwin, d, pb);
+	    break;
+	}
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_TOP:
+	    DrawCompound(l, b, tkwin, d, state, TTK_SIDE_TOP, TTK_SIDE_BOTTOM);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_BOTTOM:
+	    DrawCompound(l, b, tkwin, d, state, TTK_SIDE_BOTTOM, TTK_SIDE_TOP);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_LEFT:
+	    DrawCompound(l, b, tkwin, d, state, TTK_SIDE_LEFT, TTK_SIDE_RIGHT);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_RIGHT:
+	    DrawCompound(l, b, tkwin, d, state, TTK_SIDE_RIGHT, TTK_SIDE_LEFT);
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    LabelCleanup(l);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec LabelElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(LabelElement),
+    LabelElementOptions,
+    LabelElementSize,
+    LabelElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization.
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE
+void TtkLabel_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme =  Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "text", &TextElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "image", &ImageElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "label", &LabelElementSpec, NULL);
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkLayout.c b/generic/ttk/ttkLayout.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..58c99eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkLayout.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1252 @@
+/*
+ * ttkLayout.c --
+ *
+ * Generic layout processing.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2003 Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkThemeInt.h"
+
+#define MAX(a,b) (a > b ? a : b)
+#define MIN(a,b) (a < b ? a : b)
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Ttk_Box and Ttk_Padding utilities:
+ */
+
+Ttk_Box
+Ttk_MakeBox(int x, int y, int width, int height)
+{
+    Ttk_Box b;
+    b.x = x; b.y = y; b.width = width; b.height = height;
+    return b;
+}
+
+int
+Ttk_BoxContains(Ttk_Box box, int x, int y)
+{
+    return box.x <= x && x < box.x + box.width
+	&& box.y <= y && y < box.y + box.height;
+}
+
+Tcl_Obj *
+Ttk_NewBoxObj(Ttk_Box box)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *result[4];
+
+    result[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(box.x);
+    result[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(box.y);
+    result[2] = Tcl_NewIntObj(box.width);
+    result[3] = Tcl_NewIntObj(box.height);
+
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(4, result);
+}
+
+/*
+ * packTop, packBottom, packLeft, packRight --
+ * 	Carve out a parcel of the specified height (resp width)
+ * 	from the specified cavity.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	The new parcel.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ * 	Adjust the cavity.
+ */
+
+static Ttk_Box packTop(Ttk_Box *cavity, int height)
+{
+    Ttk_Box parcel;
+    height = MIN(height, cavity->height);
+    parcel = Ttk_MakeBox(cavity->x, cavity->y, cavity->width, height);
+    cavity->y += height;
+    cavity->height -= height;
+    return parcel;
+}
+
+static Ttk_Box packBottom(Ttk_Box *cavity, int height)
+{
+    height = MIN(height, cavity->height);
+    cavity->height -= height;
+    return Ttk_MakeBox(
+	cavity->x, cavity->y + cavity->height,
+	cavity->width, height);
+}
+
+static Ttk_Box packLeft(Ttk_Box *cavity, int width)
+{
+    Ttk_Box parcel;
+    width = MIN(width, cavity->width);
+    parcel = Ttk_MakeBox(cavity->x, cavity->y, width,cavity->height);
+    cavity->x += width;
+    cavity->width -= width;
+    return parcel;
+}
+
+static Ttk_Box packRight(Ttk_Box *cavity, int width)
+{
+    width = MIN(width, cavity->width);
+    cavity->width -= width;
+    return Ttk_MakeBox(cavity->x + cavity->width,
+	    cavity->y, width, cavity->height);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_PackBox --
+ * 	Carve out a parcel of the specified size on the specified side
+ * 	in the specified cavity.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	The new parcel.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ * 	Adjust the cavity.
+ */
+
+Ttk_Box Ttk_PackBox(Ttk_Box *cavity, int width, int height, Ttk_Side side)
+{
+    switch (side) {
+	default:
+	case TTK_SIDE_TOP:	return packTop(cavity, height);
+	case TTK_SIDE_BOTTOM:	return packBottom(cavity, height);
+	case TTK_SIDE_LEFT:	return packLeft(cavity, width);
+	case TTK_SIDE_RIGHT:	return packRight(cavity, width);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_PadBox --
+ * 	Shrink a box by the specified padding amount.
+ */
+Ttk_Box Ttk_PadBox(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+{
+    b.x += p.left;
+    b.y += p.top;
+    b.width -= (p.left + p.right);
+    b.height -= (p.top + p.bottom);
+    if (b.width <= 0) b.width = 1;
+    if (b.height <= 0) b.height = 1;
+    return b;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_ExpandBox --
+ * 	Grow a box by the specified padding amount.
+ */
+Ttk_Box Ttk_ExpandBox(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+{
+    b.x -= p.left;
+    b.y -= p.top;
+    b.width += (p.left + p.right);
+    b.height += (p.top + p.bottom);
+    return b;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_StickBox --
+ * 	Place a box of size w * h in the specified parcel,
+ * 	according to the specified sticky bits.
+ */
+Ttk_Box Ttk_StickBox(Ttk_Box parcel, int width, int height, unsigned sticky)
+{
+    int dx, dy;
+
+    if (width > parcel.width) width = parcel.width;
+    if (height > parcel.height) height = parcel.height;
+
+    dx = parcel.width - width;
+    dy = parcel.height - height;
+
+    /*
+     * X coordinate adjustment:
+     */
+    switch (sticky & (TTK_STICK_W | TTK_STICK_E))
+    {
+	case TTK_STICK_W | TTK_STICK_E:
+	    /* no-op -- use entire parcel width */
+	    break;
+	case TTK_STICK_W:
+	    parcel.width = width;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_STICK_E:
+	    parcel.x += dx;
+	    parcel.width = width;
+	    break;
+	default :
+	    parcel.x += dx / 2;
+	    parcel.width = width;
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Y coordinate adjustment:
+     */
+    switch (sticky & (TTK_STICK_N | TTK_STICK_S))
+    {
+	case TTK_STICK_N | TTK_STICK_S:
+	    /* use entire parcel height */
+	    break;
+	case TTK_STICK_N:
+	    parcel.height = height;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_STICK_S:
+	    parcel.y += dy;
+	    parcel.height = height;
+	    break;
+	default :
+	    parcel.y += dy / 2;
+	    parcel.height = height;
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    return parcel;
+}
+
+/*
+ * AnchorToSticky --
+ * 	Convert a Tk_Anchor enum to a TTK_STICKY bitmask.
+ */
+static Ttk_Sticky AnchorToSticky(Tk_Anchor anchor)
+{
+    switch (anchor)
+    {
+	case TK_ANCHOR_N:	return TTK_STICK_N;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:	return TTK_STICK_N | TTK_STICK_E;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_E:	return TTK_STICK_E;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:	return TTK_STICK_S | TTK_STICK_E;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_S:	return TTK_STICK_S;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:	return TTK_STICK_S | TTK_STICK_W;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_W:	return TTK_STICK_W;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:	return TTK_STICK_N | TTK_STICK_W;
+	default:
+	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:	return 0;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_AnchorBox --
+ * 	Place a box of size w * h in the specified parcel,
+ * 	according to the specified anchor.
+ */
+Ttk_Box Ttk_AnchorBox(Ttk_Box parcel, int width, int height, Tk_Anchor anchor)
+{
+    return Ttk_StickBox(parcel, width, height, AnchorToSticky(anchor));
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_PlaceBox --
+ * 	Combine Ttk_PackBox() and Ttk_StickBox().
+ */
+Ttk_Box Ttk_PlaceBox(
+    Ttk_Box *cavity, int width, int height, Ttk_Side side, unsigned sticky)
+{
+    return Ttk_StickBox(
+	    Ttk_PackBox(cavity, width, height, side), width, height, sticky);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_PositionBox --
+ * 	Pack and stick a box according to PositionSpec flags.
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Box
+Ttk_PositionBox(Ttk_Box *cavity, int width, int height, Ttk_PositionSpec flags)
+{
+    Ttk_Box parcel;
+
+	 if (flags & TTK_EXPAND)	parcel = *cavity;
+    else if (flags & TTK_PACK_TOP)	parcel = packTop(cavity, height);
+    else if (flags & TTK_PACK_LEFT)	parcel = packLeft(cavity, width);
+    else if (flags & TTK_PACK_BOTTOM)	parcel = packBottom(cavity, height);
+    else if (flags & TTK_PACK_RIGHT)	parcel = packRight(cavity, width);
+    else				parcel = *cavity;
+
+    return Ttk_StickBox(parcel, width, height, flags);
+}
+
+/*
+ * TTKInitPadding --
+ * 	Common factor of Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj and Ttk_GetBorderFromObj.
+ * 	Initializes Ttk_Padding record, supplying default values
+ * 	for missing entries.
+ */
+static void TTKInitPadding(int padc, int pixels[4], Ttk_Padding *pad)
+{
+    switch (padc)
+    {
+	case 0: pixels[0] = 0; /*FALLTHRU*/
+	case 1:	pixels[1] = pixels[0]; /*FALLTHRU*/
+	case 2:	pixels[2] = pixels[0]; /*FALLTHRU*/
+	case 3:	pixels[3] = pixels[1]; /*FALLTHRU*/
+    }
+
+    pad->left	= (short)pixels[0];
+    pad->top	= (short)pixels[1];
+    pad->right	= (short)pixels[2];
+    pad->bottom	= (short)pixels[3];
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj --
+ *
+ * 	Extract a padding specification from a Tcl_Obj * scaled
+ * 	to work with a particular Tk_Window.
+ *
+ * 	The string representation of a Ttk_Padding is a list
+ * 	of one to four Tk_Pixel specifications, corresponding
+ * 	to the left, top, right, and bottom padding.
+ *
+ * 	If the 'bottom' (fourth) element is missing, it defaults to 'top'.
+ * 	If the 'right' (third) element is missing, it defaults to 'left'.
+ * 	If the 'top' (second) element is missing, it defaults to 'left'.
+ *
+ * 	The internal representation is a Tcl_ListObj containing
+ * 	one to four Tk_PixelObj objects.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR.  In the latter case an error message is
+ * 	left in 'interp' and '*paddingPtr' is set to all-zeros.
+ * 	Otherwise, *paddingPtr is filled in with the padding specification.
+ *
+ */
+int Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+    Ttk_Padding *pad)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj **padv;
+    int i, padc, pixels[4];
+
+    if (TCL_OK != Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &padc, &padv)) {
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    if (padc > 4) {
+	if (interp) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Wrong #elements in padding spec", NULL);
+	}
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    for (i=0; i < padc; ++i) {
+	if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, padv[i], &pixels[i]) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+    }
+
+    TTKInitPadding(padc, pixels, pad);
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    pad->left = pad->top = pad->right = pad->bottom = 0;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_GetBorderFromObj --
+ * 	Same as Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj, except padding is a list of integers
+ * 	instead of Tk_Pixel specifications.  Does not require a Tk_Window
+ * 	parameter.
+ *
+ */
+int Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_Padding *pad)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj **padv;
+    int i, padc, pixels[4];
+
+    if (TCL_OK != Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &padc, &padv)) {
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    if (padc > 4) {
+	if (interp) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Wrong #elements in border spec", NULL);
+	}
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    for (i=0; i < padc; ++i) {
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, padv[i], &pixels[i]) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+    }
+
+    TTKInitPadding(padc, pixels, pad);
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    pad->left = pad->top = pad->right = pad->bottom = 0;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_MakePadding --
+ *	Return an initialized Ttk_Padding structure.
+ */
+Ttk_Padding Ttk_MakePadding(short left, short top, short right, short bottom)
+{
+    Ttk_Padding pad;
+    pad.left = left;
+    pad.top = top;
+    pad.right = right;
+    pad.bottom = bottom;
+    return pad;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_UniformPadding --
+ * 	Returns a uniform Ttk_Padding structure, with the same
+ * 	border width on all sides.
+ */
+Ttk_Padding Ttk_UniformPadding(short borderWidth)
+{
+    Ttk_Padding pad;
+    pad.left = pad.top = pad.right = pad.bottom = borderWidth;
+    return pad;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_AddPadding --
+ *	Combine two padding records.
+ */
+Ttk_Padding Ttk_AddPadding(Ttk_Padding p1, Ttk_Padding p2)
+{
+    p1.left += p2.left;
+    p1.top += p2.top;
+    p1.right += p2.right;
+    p1.bottom += p2.bottom;
+    return p1;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_RelievePadding --
+ * 	Add an extra n pixels of padding according to specified relief.
+ * 	This may be used in element geometry procedures to simulate
+ * 	a "pressed-in" look for pushbuttons.
+ */
+Ttk_Padding Ttk_RelievePadding(Ttk_Padding padding, int relief, int n)
+{
+    switch (relief)
+    {
+	case TK_RELIEF_RAISED:
+	    padding.right += n;
+	    padding.bottom += n;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN:	/* shift */
+	    padding.left += n;
+	    padding.top += n;
+	    break;
+	default:
+	{
+	    int h1 = n/2, h2 = h1 + n % 2;
+	    padding.left += h1;
+	    padding.top += h1;
+	    padding.right += h2;
+	    padding.bottom += h2;
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    return padding;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_GetStickyFromObj --
+ * 	Returns a stickiness specification from the specified Tcl_Obj*,
+ * 	consisting of any combination of n, s, e, and w.
+ *
+ * Returns: TCL_OK if objPtr holds a valid stickiness specification,
+ *	otherwise TCL_ERROR.  interp is used for error reporting if non-NULL.
+ *
+ */
+int Ttk_GetStickyFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_Sticky *result)
+{
+    const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+    Ttk_Sticky sticky = 0;
+    char c;
+
+    while ((c = *string++) != '\0') {
+	switch (c) {
+	    case 'w': case 'W': sticky |= TTK_STICK_W; break;
+	    case 'e': case 'E': sticky |= TTK_STICK_E; break;
+	    case 'n': case 'N': sticky |= TTK_STICK_N; break;
+	    case 's': case 'S': sticky |= TTK_STICK_S; break;
+	    default:
+	    	if (interp) {
+		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+			"Bad -sticky specification ",
+			Tcl_GetString(objPtr),
+			NULL);
+		}
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    *result = sticky;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_NewStickyObj --
+ * 	Construct a new Tcl_Obj * containing a stickiness specification.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewStickyObj(Ttk_Sticky sticky)
+{
+    char buf[5];
+    char *p = buf;
+
+    if (sticky & TTK_STICK_N)	*p++ = 'n';
+    if (sticky & TTK_STICK_S)	*p++ = 's';
+    if (sticky & TTK_STICK_W)	*p++ = 'w';
+    if (sticky & TTK_STICK_E)	*p++ = 'e';
+
+    *p = '\0';
+    return Tcl_NewStringObj(buf, p - buf);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout nodes.
+ */
+
+typedef struct Ttk_LayoutNode_ Ttk_LayoutNode;
+struct Ttk_LayoutNode_
+{
+    unsigned		flags;		/* Packing and sticky flags */
+    Ttk_ElementClass 	*eclass;	/* Class record */
+    Ttk_State 	 	state;		/* Current state */
+    Ttk_Box 		parcel;		/* allocated parcel */
+    Ttk_LayoutNode	*next, *child;
+};
+
+static Ttk_LayoutNode *Ttk_NewLayoutNode(
+    unsigned flags, Ttk_ElementClass *elementClass)
+{
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *node = (Ttk_LayoutNode*)ckalloc(sizeof(*node));
+
+    node->flags = flags;
+    node->eclass = elementClass;
+    node->state = 0u;
+    node->next = node->child = 0;
+    node->parcel = Ttk_MakeBox(0,0,0,0);
+
+    return node;
+}
+
+static void Ttk_FreeLayoutNode(Ttk_LayoutNode *node)
+{
+    while (node) {
+	Ttk_LayoutNode *next = node->next;
+	Ttk_FreeLayoutNode(node->child);
+	ckfree((ClientData)node);
+	node = next;
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout templates.
+ */
+
+struct Ttk_TemplateNode_ {
+    char *name;
+    unsigned flags;
+    struct Ttk_TemplateNode_ *next, *child;
+};
+
+static Ttk_TemplateNode *Ttk_NewTemplateNode(const char *name, unsigned flags)
+{
+    Ttk_TemplateNode *op = (Ttk_TemplateNode*)ckalloc(sizeof(*op));
+    op->name = ckalloc(strlen(name) + 1); strcpy(op->name, name);
+    op->flags = flags;
+    op->next = op->child = 0;
+    return op;
+}
+
+void Ttk_FreeLayoutTemplate(Ttk_LayoutTemplate op)
+{
+    while (op) {
+	Ttk_LayoutTemplate next = op->next;
+	Ttk_FreeLayoutTemplate(op->child);
+	ckfree(op->name);
+	ckfree((ClientData)op);
+	op = next;
+    }
+}
+
+/* InstantiateLayout --
+ *	Create a layout tree from a template.
+ */
+static Ttk_LayoutNode *
+Ttk_InstantiateLayout(Ttk_Theme theme, Ttk_TemplateNode *op)
+{
+    Ttk_ElementClass *elementClass = Ttk_GetElement(theme, op->name);
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *node = Ttk_NewLayoutNode(op->flags, elementClass);
+
+    if (op->next) {
+	node->next = Ttk_InstantiateLayout(theme,op->next);
+    }
+    if (op->child) {
+	node->child = Ttk_InstantiateLayout(theme,op->child);
+    }
+
+    return node;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_ParseLayoutTemplate --
+ *	Convert a Tcl list into a layout template.
+ *
+ * Syntax:
+ * 	layoutSpec ::= { elementName ?-option value ...? }+
+ */
+
+/* NB: This must match bit definitions TTK_PACK_LEFT etc. */
+static const char *packSideStrings[] =
+    { "left", "right", "top", "bottom", NULL };
+
+Ttk_LayoutTemplate Ttk_ParseLayoutTemplate(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    enum {  OP_SIDE, OP_STICKY, OP_EXPAND, OP_BORDER, OP_UNIT, OP_CHILDREN };
+    static const char *optStrings[] = {
+	"-side", "-sticky", "-expand", "-border", "-unit", "-children", 0 };
+
+    int i = 0, objc;
+    Tcl_Obj **objv;
+    Ttk_TemplateNode *head = 0, *tail = 0;
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
+	return 0;
+
+    while (i < objc) {
+	const char *elementName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	unsigned flags = 0x0, sticky = TTK_FILL_BOTH;
+	Tcl_Obj *childSpec = 0;
+
+	/*
+	 * Parse options:
+	 */
+	++i;
+	while (i < objc) {
+	    const char *optName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	    int option, value;
+
+	    if (optName[0] != '-')
+		break;
+
+	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(
+		    interp, objv[i], optStrings, "option", 0, &option)
+		!= TCL_OK)
+	    {
+		goto error;
+	    }
+
+	    if (++i >= objc) {
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+			"Missing value for option ",Tcl_GetString(objv[i-1]),
+			NULL);
+		goto error;
+	    }
+
+	    switch (option) {
+		case OP_SIDE:	/* <<NOTE-PACKSIDE>> */
+		    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], packSideStrings,
+				"side", 0, &value) != TCL_OK)
+		    {
+			goto error;
+		    }
+		    flags |= (TTK_PACK_LEFT << value);
+
+		    break;
+		case OP_STICKY:
+		    if (Ttk_GetStickyFromObj(interp,objv[i],&sticky) != TCL_OK)
+			goto error;
+		    break;
+		case OP_EXPAND:
+		    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp,objv[i],&value) != TCL_OK)
+			goto error;
+		    if (value)
+			flags |= TTK_EXPAND;
+		    break;
+		case OP_BORDER:
+		    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp,objv[i],&value) != TCL_OK)
+			goto error;
+		    if (value)
+			flags |= TTK_BORDER;
+		    break;
+		case OP_UNIT:
+		    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp,objv[i],&value) != TCL_OK)
+			goto error;
+		    if (value)
+			flags |= TTK_UNIT;
+		    break;
+		case OP_CHILDREN:
+		    childSpec = objv[i];
+		    break;
+	    }
+	    ++i;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Build new node:
+	 */
+	if (tail) {
+	    tail->next = Ttk_NewTemplateNode(elementName, flags | sticky);
+	    tail = tail->next;
+	} else {
+	    head = tail = Ttk_NewTemplateNode(elementName, flags | sticky);
+	}
+	if (childSpec) {
+	    tail->child = Ttk_ParseLayoutTemplate(interp, childSpec);
+	    if (!tail->child) {
+		goto error;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    return head;
+
+error:
+    Ttk_FreeLayoutTemplate(head);
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_BuildLayoutTemplate --
+ * 	Build a layout template tree from a statically defined
+ * 	Ttk_LayoutSpec array.
+ */
+Ttk_LayoutTemplate Ttk_BuildLayoutTemplate(Ttk_LayoutSpec spec)
+{
+    Ttk_TemplateNode *first = 0, *last = 0;
+
+    for ( ; !(spec->opcode & _TTK_LAYOUT_END) ; ++spec) {
+	if (spec->elementName) {
+	    Ttk_TemplateNode *node =
+		Ttk_NewTemplateNode(spec->elementName, spec->opcode);
+
+	    if (last) {
+		last->next = node;
+	    } else {
+		first = node;
+	    }
+	    last = node;
+	}
+
+	if (spec->opcode & _TTK_CHILDREN && last) {
+	    int depth = 1;
+	    last->child = Ttk_BuildLayoutTemplate(spec+1);
+
+	    /* Skip to end of group:
+	     */
+	    while (depth) {
+		++spec;
+		if (spec->opcode & _TTK_CHILDREN) {
+		    ++depth;
+		}
+		if (spec->opcode & _TTK_LAYOUT_END) {
+		    --depth;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+
+    } /* for */
+
+    return first;
+}
+
+void Ttk_RegisterLayouts(Ttk_Theme theme, Ttk_LayoutSpec spec)
+{
+    while (!(spec->opcode & _TTK_LAYOUT_END)) {
+	Ttk_LayoutTemplate layoutTemplate = Ttk_BuildLayoutTemplate(spec+1);
+	Ttk_RegisterLayoutTemplate(theme, spec->elementName, layoutTemplate);
+	do {
+	    ++spec;
+	} while (!(spec->opcode & _TTK_LAYOUT));
+    }
+}
+
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UnparseLayoutTemplate(Ttk_TemplateNode *node)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+
+#   define APPENDOBJ(obj) Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, obj)
+#   define APPENDSTR(str) APPENDOBJ(Tcl_NewStringObj(str,-1))
+
+    while (node) {
+	unsigned flags = node->flags;
+
+	APPENDSTR(node->name);
+
+	/* Back-compute -side.  <<NOTE-PACKSIDE>>
+	 * @@@ NOTES: Ick.
+	 */
+	if (flags & TTK_EXPAND) {
+	    APPENDSTR("-expand");
+	    APPENDSTR("1");
+	} else {
+	    if (flags & _TTK_MASK_PACK) {
+		int side = 0;
+		unsigned sideFlags = flags & _TTK_MASK_PACK;
+
+		while ((sideFlags & TTK_PACK_LEFT) == 0) {
+		    ++side;
+		    sideFlags >>= 1;
+		}
+		APPENDSTR("-side");
+		APPENDSTR(packSideStrings[side]);
+	    }
+	}
+
+	/* In Ttk_ParseLayoutTemplate, default -sticky is "nsew",
+	 * so always include this even if no sticky bits are set.
+	 */
+	APPENDSTR("-sticky");
+	APPENDOBJ(Ttk_NewStickyObj(flags & _TTK_MASK_STICK));
+
+	/* @@@ Check again: are these necessary? */
+	if (flags & TTK_BORDER)	{ APPENDSTR("-border"); APPENDSTR("1"); }
+	if (flags & TTK_UNIT) 	{ APPENDSTR("-unit"); APPENDSTR("1"); }
+
+	if (node->child) {
+	    APPENDSTR("-children");
+	    APPENDOBJ(Ttk_UnparseLayoutTemplate(node->child));
+	}
+	node = node->next;
+    }
+
+#   undef APPENDOBJ
+#   undef APPENDSTR
+
+    return result;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layouts.
+ */
+struct Ttk_Layout_
+{
+    Ttk_Style	 	style;
+    void 		*recordPtr;
+    Tk_OptionTable	optionTable;
+    Tk_Window		tkwin;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode	*root;
+};
+
+static Ttk_Layout TTKNewLayout(
+    Ttk_Style style,
+    void *recordPtr,Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *root)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout layout = (Ttk_Layout)ckalloc(sizeof(*layout));
+    layout->style = style;
+    layout->recordPtr = recordPtr;
+    layout->optionTable = optionTable;
+    layout->tkwin = tkwin;
+    layout->root = root;
+    return layout;
+}
+
+void Ttk_FreeLayout(Ttk_Layout layout)
+{
+    Ttk_FreeLayoutNode(layout->root);
+    ckfree((ClientData)layout);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_CreateLayout --
+ *	Create a layout from the specified theme and style name.
+ *	Returns: New layout, 0 on error.
+ *	Leaves an error message in interp's result if there is an error.
+ */
+Ttk_Layout Ttk_CreateLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* where to leave error messages */
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr,
+    const char *styleName,
+    void *recordPtr,
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,
+    Tk_Window tkwin)
+{
+    Ttk_Style style = Ttk_GetStyle(themePtr, styleName);
+    Ttk_LayoutTemplate layoutTemplate =
+	Ttk_FindLayoutTemplate(themePtr,styleName);
+    Ttk_ElementClass *bgelement = Ttk_GetElement(themePtr, "background");
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *bgnode;
+
+    if (!layoutTemplate) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Layout ", styleName, " not found", NULL);
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    bgnode = Ttk_NewLayoutNode(TTK_FILL_BOTH, bgelement);
+    bgnode->next = Ttk_InstantiateLayout(themePtr, layoutTemplate);
+
+    return TTKNewLayout(style, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin, bgnode);
+}
+
+/* Ttk_CreateSublayout --
+ * 	Creates a new sublayout.
+ *
+ * 	Sublayouts are used to draw subparts of a compound widget.
+ *	They use the same Tk_Window, but a different option table
+ *	and data record.
+ */
+Ttk_Layout
+Ttk_CreateSublayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr,
+    Ttk_Layout parentLayout,
+    const char *baseName,
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable)
+{
+    Tcl_DString buf;
+    const char *styleName;
+    Ttk_Style style;
+    Ttk_LayoutTemplate layoutTemplate;
+
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&buf);
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&buf, Ttk_StyleName(parentLayout->style), -1);
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&buf, baseName, -1);
+    styleName = Tcl_DStringValue(&buf);
+
+    style = Ttk_GetStyle(themePtr, styleName);
+    layoutTemplate = Ttk_FindLayoutTemplate(themePtr, styleName);
+
+    if (!layoutTemplate) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Layout ", styleName, " not found", NULL);
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&buf);
+
+    return TTKNewLayout(
+	    style, 0, optionTable, parentLayout->tkwin,
+	    Ttk_InstantiateLayout(themePtr, layoutTemplate));
+}
+
+/* Ttk_RebindSublayout --
+ * 	Bind sublayout to new data source.
+ */
+void Ttk_RebindSublayout(Ttk_Layout layout, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    layout->recordPtr = recordPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_QueryOption --
+ * 	Look up an option from a layout's associated option.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_QueryOption(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, const char *optionName, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    return Ttk_QueryStyle(
+	layout->style,layout->recordPtr,layout->optionTable,optionName,state);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_LayoutStyle --
+ * 	Extract Ttk_Style from Ttk_Layout.
+ */
+Ttk_Style Ttk_LayoutStyle(Ttk_Layout layout)
+{
+    return layout->style;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Size computation.
+ */
+static void Ttk_NodeListSize(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node,
+    Ttk_State state, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* Forward */
+
+static void Ttk_NodeSize(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node, Ttk_State state,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    int elementWidth, elementHeight, subWidth, subHeight;
+    Ttk_Padding elementPadding;
+
+    Ttk_ElementSize(node->eclass,
+	layout->style, layout->recordPtr,layout->optionTable, layout->tkwin,
+	state|node->state,
+	&elementWidth, &elementHeight, &elementPadding);
+
+    Ttk_NodeListSize(layout,node->child,state,&subWidth,&subHeight);
+    subWidth += Ttk_PaddingWidth(elementPadding);
+    subHeight += Ttk_PaddingHeight(elementPadding);
+
+    *widthPtr = MAX(elementWidth, subWidth);
+    *heightPtr = MAX(elementHeight, subHeight);
+    *paddingPtr = elementPadding;
+}
+
+static void Ttk_NodeListSize(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node,
+    Ttk_State state, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    if (!node) {
+	*widthPtr = *heightPtr = 0;
+    } else {
+	int width, height, restWidth, restHeight;
+	Ttk_Padding unused;
+
+	Ttk_NodeSize(layout, node, state, &width, &height, &unused);
+	Ttk_NodeListSize(layout, node->next, state, &restWidth, &restHeight);
+
+	if (node->flags & (TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_PACK_RIGHT)) {
+	    *widthPtr = width + restWidth;
+	} else {
+	    *widthPtr = MAX(width, restWidth);
+	}
+
+	if (node->flags & (TTK_PACK_TOP|TTK_PACK_BOTTOM)) {
+	    *heightPtr = height + restHeight;
+	} else {
+	    *heightPtr = MAX(height, restHeight);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalPadding --
+ * 	Returns the internal padding of a layout node.
+ */
+Ttk_Padding Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalPadding(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node)
+{
+    int unused;
+    Ttk_Padding padding;
+    Ttk_ElementSize(node->eclass,
+	layout->style, layout->recordPtr, layout->optionTable, layout->tkwin,
+	0/*state*/, &unused, &unused, &padding);
+    return padding;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalParcel --
+ * 	Returns the inner area of a specified layout node,
+ * 	based on current parcel and element's internal padding.
+ */
+Ttk_Box Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalParcel(Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node)
+{
+    Ttk_Padding padding = Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalPadding(layout, node);
+    return Ttk_PadBox(node->parcel, padding);
+}
+
+/* Ttk_LayoutSize --
+ * 	Compute requested size of a layout.
+ */
+void Ttk_LayoutSize(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_State state, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_NodeListSize(layout, layout->root, state, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+}
+
+void Ttk_LayoutNodeReqSize(	/* @@@ Rename this */
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Padding unused;
+    Ttk_NodeSize(layout, node, 0/*state*/, widthPtr, heightPtr, &unused);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout placement.
+ */
+
+/* Ttk_PlaceNodeList --
+ *	Compute parcel for each node in a layout tree
+ *	according to position specification and overall size.
+ */
+static void Ttk_PlaceNodeList(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node, Ttk_State state, Ttk_Box cavity)
+{
+    for (; node; node = node->next)
+    {
+	int width, height;
+	Ttk_Padding padding;
+
+	/* Compute node size: (@@@ cache this instead?)
+	 */
+	Ttk_NodeSize(layout, node, state, &width, &height, &padding);
+
+	/* Compute parcel:
+	 */
+	node->parcel = Ttk_PositionBox(&cavity, width, height, node->flags);
+
+	/* Place child nodes:
+	 */
+	if (node->child) {
+	    Ttk_Box childBox = Ttk_PadBox(node->parcel, padding);
+	    Ttk_PlaceNodeList(layout,node->child, state, childBox);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+void Ttk_PlaceLayout(Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_State state, Ttk_Box b)
+{
+    Ttk_PlaceNodeList(layout, layout->root, state,  b);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout drawing.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_DrawLayout --
+ * 	Draw a layout tree.
+ */
+static void Ttk_DrawNodeList(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_State state, Ttk_LayoutNode *node, Drawable d)
+{
+    for (; node; node = node->next)
+    {
+	int border = node->flags & TTK_BORDER;
+	int substate = state;
+
+	if (node->flags & TTK_UNIT)
+	    substate |= node->state;
+
+	if (node->child && border)
+	    Ttk_DrawNodeList(layout, substate, node->child, d);
+
+	Ttk_DrawElement(
+	    node->eclass,
+	    layout->style,layout->recordPtr,layout->optionTable,layout->tkwin,
+	    d, node->parcel, state | node->state);
+
+	if (node->child && !border)
+	    Ttk_DrawNodeList(layout, substate, node->child, d);
+    }
+}
+
+void Ttk_DrawLayout(Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_State state, Drawable d)
+{
+    Ttk_DrawNodeList(layout, state, layout->root, d);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Inquiry and modification.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_IdentifyElement --
+ * 	Find the element at the specified x,y coordinate.
+ */
+static Ttk_Element IdentifyNode(Ttk_Element node, int x, int y)
+{
+    Ttk_Element closest = NULL;
+
+    for (; node; node = node->next) {
+	if (Ttk_BoxContains(node->parcel, x, y)) {
+	    closest = node;
+	    if (node->child && !(node->flags & TTK_UNIT)) {
+		Ttk_Element childNode = IdentifyNode(node->child, x,y);
+		if (childNode) {
+		    closest = childNode;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    return closest;
+}
+
+Ttk_Element Ttk_IdentifyElement(Ttk_Layout layout, int x, int y)
+{
+    return IdentifyNode(layout->root, x, y);
+}
+
+/*
+ * tail --
+ * 	Return the last component of an element name, e.g.,
+ * 	"Scrollbar.thumb" => "thumb"
+ */
+static const char *tail(const char *elementName)
+{
+    const char *dot;
+    while ((dot=strchr(elementName,'.')) != NULL)
+	elementName = dot + 1;
+    return elementName;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_FindElement --
+ * 	Look up an element by name
+ */
+static Ttk_Element
+FindNode(Ttk_Element node, const char *nodeName)
+{
+    for (; node ; node = node->next) {
+	if (!strcmp(tail(Ttk_ElementName(node)), nodeName))
+	    return node;
+
+	if (node->child) {
+	    Ttk_Element childNode = FindNode(node->child, nodeName);
+	    if (childNode)
+		return childNode;
+	}
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+Ttk_Element Ttk_FindElement(Ttk_Layout layout, const char *nodeName)
+{
+    return FindNode(layout->root, nodeName);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_ClientRegion --
+ * 	Find the internal parcel of a named element within a given layout.
+ * 	If the element is not present, use the entire window.
+ */
+Ttk_Box Ttk_ClientRegion(Ttk_Layout layout, const char *elementName)
+{
+    Ttk_Element element = Ttk_FindElement(layout, elementName);
+    return element
+	? Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalParcel(layout, element)
+	: Ttk_WinBox(layout->tkwin)
+	;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_ElementName --
+ * 	Return the name (class name) of the element.
+ */
+const char *Ttk_ElementName(Ttk_Element node)
+{
+    return Ttk_ElementClassName(node->eclass);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_ElementParcel --
+ * 	Return the element's current parcel.
+ */
+Ttk_Box Ttk_ElementParcel(Ttk_Element node)
+{
+    return node->parcel;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_PlaceElement --
+ * 	Explicitly specify an element's parcel.
+ */
+void Ttk_PlaceElement(Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_Element node, Ttk_Box b)
+{
+    node->parcel = b;
+    if (node->child) {
+	Ttk_PlaceNodeList(layout, node->child, 0,
+	    Ttk_PadBox(b, Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalPadding(layout, node)));
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_ChangeElementState --
+ */
+void Ttk_ChangeElementState(Ttk_LayoutNode *node,unsigned set,unsigned clr)
+{
+    node->state = (node->state | set) & ~clr;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkManager.c b/generic/ttk/ttkManager.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba9e5c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkManager.c
@@ -0,0 +1,552 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright 2005, Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ *
+ * Support routines for geometry managers.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkManager.h"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ The Geometry Propagation Dance.
+ *
+ * When a slave window requests a new size or some other parameter changes,
+ * the manager recomputes the required size for the master window and calls
+ * Tk_GeometryRequest().  This is scheduled as an idle handler so multiple
+ * updates can be processed as a single batch.
+ *
+ * If all goes well, the master's manager will process the request
+ * (and so on up the chain to the toplevel window), and the master
+ * window will eventually receive a <Configure> event.  At this point
+ * it recomputes the size and position of all slaves and places them.
+ *
+ * If all does not go well, however, the master's request may be ignored
+ * (typically because the top-level window has a fixed, user-specified size).
+ * Tk doesn't provide any notification when this happens; to account for this,
+ * we also schedule an idle handler to call the layout procedure
+ * after making a geometry request.
+ *
+ * +++ Slave removal <<NOTE-LOSTSLAVE>>.
+ *
+ * There are three conditions under which a slave is removed:
+ *
+ * (1) Another GM claims control
+ * (2) Manager voluntarily relinquishes control
+ * (3) Slave is destroyed
+ *
+ * In case (1), Tk calls the manager's lostSlaveProc.
+ * Case (2) is performed by calling Tk_ManageGeometry(slave,NULL,0);
+ * in this case Tk does _not_ call the LostSlaveProc (documented behavior).
+ * Tk doesn't handle case (3) either; to account for that we
+ * register an event handler on the slave widget to track <Destroy> events.
+ */
+
+/* ++ Data structures.
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tk_Window 		slaveWindow;
+    Ttk_Manager 	*manager;
+    void 		*slaveData;
+    unsigned		flags;
+} Ttk_Slave;
+
+/* slave->flags bits:
+ */
+#define SLAVE_MAPPED 		0x1	/* slave to be mapped when master is */
+
+struct TtkManager_
+{
+    Ttk_ManagerSpec	*managerSpec;
+    void 		*managerData;
+    Tk_Window   	masterWindow;
+    unsigned		flags;
+    int 	 	nSlaves;
+    Ttk_Slave 		**slaves;
+};
+
+/* manager->flags bits:
+ */
+#define MGR_UPDATE_PENDING	0x1
+#define MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED	0x2
+#define MGR_RELAYOUT_REQUIRED	0x4
+
+static void ManagerIdleProc(void *);	/* forward */
+
+/* ++ ScheduleUpdate --
+ * 	Schedule a call to recompute the size and/or layout,
+ *	depending on flags.
+ */
+static void ScheduleUpdate(Ttk_Manager *mgr, unsigned flags)
+{
+    if (!(mgr->flags & MGR_UPDATE_PENDING)) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ManagerIdleProc, mgr);
+	mgr->flags |= MGR_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+    mgr->flags |= flags;
+}
+
+/* ++ RecomputeSize --
+ * 	Recomputes the required size of the master window,
+ * 	makes geometry request.
+ */
+static void RecomputeSize(Ttk_Manager *mgr)
+{
+    int width = 1, height = 1;
+
+    if (mgr->managerSpec->RequestedSize(mgr->managerData, &width, &height)) {
+	Tk_GeometryRequest(mgr->masterWindow, width, height);
+	ScheduleUpdate(mgr, MGR_RELAYOUT_REQUIRED);
+    }
+    mgr->flags &= ~MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED;
+}
+
+/* ++ RecomputeLayout --
+ * 	Recompute geometry of all slaves.
+ */
+static void RecomputeLayout(Ttk_Manager *mgr)
+{
+    mgr->managerSpec->PlaceSlaves(mgr->managerData);
+    mgr->flags &= ~MGR_RELAYOUT_REQUIRED;
+}
+
+/* ++ ManagerIdleProc --
+ * 	DoWhenIdle procedure for deferred updates.
+ */
+static void ManagerIdleProc(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = clientData;
+    mgr->flags &= ~MGR_UPDATE_PENDING;
+
+    if (mgr->flags & MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED) {
+	RecomputeSize(mgr);
+    }
+    if (mgr->flags & MGR_RELAYOUT_REQUIRED) {
+	if (mgr->flags & MGR_UPDATE_PENDING) {
+	    /* RecomputeSize has scheduled another update; relayout later */
+	    return;
+	}
+	RecomputeLayout(mgr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Event handlers.
+ */
+
+/* ++ ManagerEventHandler --
+ * 	Recompute slave layout when master widget is resized.
+ * 	Keep the slave's map state in sync with the master's.
+ */
+static const int ManagerEventMask = StructureNotifyMask;
+static void ManagerEventHandler(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = clientData;
+    int i;
+
+    switch (eventPtr->type)
+    {
+	case ConfigureNotify:
+	    RecomputeLayout(mgr);
+	    break;
+	case MapNotify:
+	    for (i = 0; i < mgr->nSlaves; ++i) {
+		Ttk_Slave *slave = mgr->slaves[i];
+		if (slave->flags & SLAVE_MAPPED) {
+		    Tk_MapWindow(slave->slaveWindow);
+		}
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case UnmapNotify:
+	    for (i = 0; i < mgr->nSlaves; ++i) {
+		Ttk_Slave *slave = mgr->slaves[i];
+		Tk_UnmapWindow(slave->slaveWindow);
+	    }
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+/* ++ SlaveEventHandler --
+ * 	Notifies manager when a slave is destroyed
+ * 	(see <<NOTE-LOSTSLAVE>>).
+ */
+static const unsigned SlaveEventMask = StructureNotifyMask;
+static void SlaveEventHandler(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = clientData;
+    if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
+	slave->manager->managerSpec->tkGeomMgr.lostSlaveProc(
+	    slave->manager, slave->slaveWindow);
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Slave initialization and cleanup.
+ */
+
+static Ttk_Slave *NewSlave(
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr, Tk_Window slaveWindow, void *slaveData)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = (Ttk_Slave*)ckalloc(sizeof(*slave));
+
+    slave->slaveWindow = slaveWindow;
+    slave->manager = mgr;
+    slave->flags = 0;
+    slave->slaveData = slaveData;
+
+    return slave;
+}
+
+static void DeleteSlave(Ttk_Slave *slave)
+{
+    ckfree((ClientData)slave);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Manager initialization and cleanup.
+ */
+
+Ttk_Manager *Ttk_CreateManager(
+    Ttk_ManagerSpec *managerSpec, void *managerData, Tk_Window masterWindow)
+{
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = (Ttk_Manager*)ckalloc(sizeof(*mgr));
+
+    mgr->managerSpec 	= managerSpec;
+    mgr->managerData	= managerData;
+    mgr->masterWindow	= masterWindow;
+    mgr->nSlaves 	= 0;
+    mgr->slaves 	= NULL;
+    mgr->flags  	= 0;
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(
+	mgr->masterWindow, ManagerEventMask, ManagerEventHandler, mgr);
+
+    return mgr;
+}
+
+void Ttk_DeleteManager(Ttk_Manager *mgr)
+{
+    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(
+	mgr->masterWindow, ManagerEventMask, ManagerEventHandler, mgr);
+
+    while (mgr->nSlaves > 0) {
+	Ttk_ForgetSlave(mgr, mgr->nSlaves - 1);
+    }
+    if (mgr->slaves) {
+	ckfree((ClientData)mgr->slaves);
+    }
+
+    Tk_CancelIdleCall(ManagerIdleProc, mgr);
+
+    ckfree((ClientData)mgr);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Slave management.
+ */
+
+/* ++ InsertSlave --
+ * 	Adds slave to the list of managed windows.
+ */
+static void InsertSlave(Ttk_Manager *mgr, Ttk_Slave *slave, int index)
+{
+    int endIndex = mgr->nSlaves++;
+    mgr->slaves = (Ttk_Slave**)ckrealloc(
+	    (ClientData)mgr->slaves, mgr->nSlaves * sizeof(Ttk_Slave *));
+
+    while (endIndex > index) {
+	mgr->slaves[endIndex] = mgr->slaves[endIndex - 1];
+	--endIndex;
+    }
+
+    mgr->slaves[index] = slave;
+
+    Tk_ManageGeometry(slave->slaveWindow,
+	&mgr->managerSpec->tkGeomMgr, (ClientData)mgr);
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(slave->slaveWindow,
+	SlaveEventMask, SlaveEventHandler, (ClientData)slave);
+
+    ScheduleUpdate(mgr, MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED);
+}
+
+/* RemoveSlave --
+ * 	Unmanage and delete the slave.
+ *
+ * NOTES/ASSUMPTIONS:
+ *
+ * [1] It's safe to call Tk_UnmapWindow / Tk_UnmaintainGeometry even if this
+ * routine is called from the slave's DestroyNotify event handler.
+ */
+static void RemoveSlave(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int index)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = mgr->slaves[index];
+    int i;
+
+    /* Notify manager:
+     */
+    mgr->managerSpec->SlaveRemoved(mgr->managerData, index);
+
+    /* Remove from array:
+     */
+    --mgr->nSlaves;
+    for (i = index ; i < mgr->nSlaves; ++i) {
+	mgr->slaves[i] = mgr->slaves[i+1];
+    }
+
+    /* Clean up:
+     */
+    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(
+	slave->slaveWindow, SlaveEventMask, SlaveEventHandler, slave);
+
+    /* Note [1] */
+    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slave->slaveWindow, mgr->masterWindow);
+    Tk_UnmapWindow(slave->slaveWindow);
+
+    DeleteSlave(slave);
+
+    ScheduleUpdate(mgr, MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tk_GeomMgr hooks.
+ */
+
+void Ttk_GeometryRequestProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window slaveWindow)
+{
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = clientData;
+    int slaveIndex = Ttk_SlaveIndex(mgr, slaveWindow);
+    int reqWidth = Tk_ReqWidth(slaveWindow);
+    int reqHeight= Tk_ReqHeight(slaveWindow);
+
+    if (mgr->managerSpec->SlaveRequest(
+		mgr->managerData, slaveIndex, reqWidth, reqHeight)) 
+    {
+	ScheduleUpdate(mgr, MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED);
+    }
+}
+
+void Ttk_LostSlaveProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window slaveWindow)
+{
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = clientData;
+    int index = Ttk_SlaveIndex(mgr, slaveWindow);
+
+    /* ASSERT: index >= 0 */
+    RemoveSlave(mgr, index);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Public API.
+ */
+
+/* ++ Ttk_InsertSlave --
+ * 	Add a new slave window at the specified index.
+ */
+void Ttk_InsertSlave(
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr, int index, Tk_Window tkwin, void *slaveData)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = NewSlave(mgr, tkwin, slaveData);
+    InsertSlave(mgr, slave, index);
+}
+
+/* ++ Ttk_ForgetSlave --
+ * 	Unmanage the specified slave.
+ */
+void Ttk_ForgetSlave(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int slaveIndex)
+{
+    Tk_Window slaveWindow = mgr->slaves[slaveIndex]->slaveWindow;
+    RemoveSlave(mgr, slaveIndex);
+    Tk_ManageGeometry(slaveWindow, NULL, 0);
+}
+
+/* ++ Ttk_PlaceSlave --
+ * 	Set the position and size of the specified slave window.
+ *
+ * NOTES:
+ * 	Contrary to documentation, Tk_MaintainGeometry doesn't always
+ * 	map the slave.
+ */
+void Ttk_PlaceSlave(
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr, int slaveIndex, int x, int y, int width, int height)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = mgr->slaves[slaveIndex];
+    Tk_MaintainGeometry(slave->slaveWindow,mgr->masterWindow,x,y,width,height);
+    slave->flags |= SLAVE_MAPPED;
+    if (Tk_IsMapped(mgr->masterWindow)) {
+	Tk_MapWindow(slave->slaveWindow);
+    }
+}
+
+/* ++ Ttk_UnmapSlave --
+ * 	Unmap the specified slave, but leave it managed.
+ */
+void Ttk_UnmapSlave(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int slaveIndex)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = mgr->slaves[slaveIndex];
+    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slave->slaveWindow, mgr->masterWindow);
+    slave->flags &= ~SLAVE_MAPPED;
+    /* Contrary to documentation, Tk_UnmaintainGeometry doesn't always
+     * unmap the slave:
+     */
+    Tk_UnmapWindow(slave->slaveWindow);
+}
+
+/* LayoutChanged, SizeChanged --
+ * 	Schedule a relayout, resp. resize request.
+ */
+void Ttk_ManagerLayoutChanged(Ttk_Manager *mgr)
+{
+    ScheduleUpdate(mgr, MGR_RELAYOUT_REQUIRED);
+}
+
+void Ttk_ManagerSizeChanged(Ttk_Manager *mgr)
+{
+    ScheduleUpdate(mgr, MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED);
+}
+
+/* +++ Accessors.
+ */
+int Ttk_NumberSlaves(Ttk_Manager *mgr)
+{
+    return mgr->nSlaves;
+}
+void *Ttk_SlaveData(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int slaveIndex)
+{
+    return mgr->slaves[slaveIndex]->slaveData;
+}
+Tk_Window Ttk_SlaveWindow(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int slaveIndex)
+{
+    return mgr->slaves[slaveIndex]->slaveWindow;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Utility routines.
+ */
+
+/* ++ Ttk_SlaveIndex --
+ * 	Returns the index of specified slave window, -1 if not found.
+ */
+int Ttk_SlaveIndex(Ttk_Manager *mgr, Tk_Window slaveWindow)
+{
+    int index;
+    for (index = 0; index < mgr->nSlaves; ++index)
+	if (mgr->slaves[index]->slaveWindow == slaveWindow)
+	    return index;
+    return -1;
+}
+
+/* ++ Ttk_GetSlaveIndexFromObj(interp, mgr, objPtr, indexPtr) --
+ * 	Return the index of the slave specified by objPtr.
+ * 	Slaves may be specified as an integer index or
+ * 	as the name of the managed window.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	Standard Tcl completion code.  Leaves an error message in case of error.
+ */
+
+int Ttk_GetSlaveIndexFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Manager *mgr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *indexPtr)
+{
+    const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+    int slaveIndex = 0;
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+
+    /* Try interpreting as an integer first:
+     */
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &slaveIndex) == TCL_OK) {
+	if (slaveIndex < 0 || slaveIndex >= mgr->nSlaves) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		"Slave index ", Tcl_GetString(objPtr), " out of bounds",
+		NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	*indexPtr = slaveIndex;
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /* Try interpreting as a slave window name;
+     */
+    if (   (*string == '.')
+	&& (tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, mgr->masterWindow)))
+    {
+	slaveIndex = Ttk_SlaveIndex(mgr, tkwin);
+	if (slaveIndex < 0) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		string, " is not managed by ", Tk_PathName(mgr->masterWindow),
+		NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	*indexPtr = slaveIndex;
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Invalid slave specification ", string, NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* ++ Ttk_ReorderSlave(mgr, fromIndex, toIndex) --
+ * 	Change slave order.
+ */
+void Ttk_ReorderSlave(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int fromIndex, int toIndex)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *moved = mgr->slaves[fromIndex];
+
+    /* Shuffle down: */
+    while (fromIndex > toIndex) {
+	mgr->slaves[fromIndex] = mgr->slaves[fromIndex - 1];
+	--fromIndex;
+    }
+    /* Or, shuffle up: */
+    while (fromIndex < toIndex) {
+	mgr->slaves[fromIndex] = mgr->slaves[fromIndex + 1];
+	++fromIndex;
+    }
+    /* ASSERT: fromIndex == toIndex */
+    mgr->slaves[fromIndex] = moved;
+
+    /* Schedule a relayout.  In general, rearranging slaves
+     * may also change the size:
+     */
+    ScheduleUpdate(mgr, MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED);
+}
+
+/* ++ Ttk_Maintainable(interp, slave, master) --
+ * 	Utility routine.  Verifies that 'master' may be used to maintain
+ *	the geometry of 'slave' via Tk_MaintainGeometry:
+ *
+ * 	+ 'master' is either 'slave's parent -OR-
+ * 	+ 'master is a descendant of 'slave's parent.
+ * 	+ 'slave' is not a toplevel window
+ * 	+ 'slave' belongs to the same toplevel as 'master'
+ *
+ * Returns: 1 if OK; otherwise 0, leaving an error message in 'interp'.
+ */
+int Ttk_Maintainable(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window slave, Tk_Window master)
+{
+    Tk_Window ancestor = master, parent = Tk_Parent(slave);
+
+    if (Tk_IsTopLevel(slave) || slave == master) {
+	goto badWindow;
+    }
+
+    while (ancestor != parent) {
+	if (Tk_IsTopLevel(ancestor)) {
+	    goto badWindow;
+	}
+	ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor);
+    }
+
+    return 1;
+
+badWindow:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	"can't add ", Tk_PathName(slave),
+	" as slave of ", Tk_PathName(master),
+	NULL);
+    return 0;
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkManager.h b/generic/ttk/ttkManager.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d22ff98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkManager.h
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2005, Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ *
+ * Geometry manager utilities.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TTKMANAGER
+#define _TTKMANAGER
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+typedef struct TtkManager_ Ttk_Manager;
+
+/*
+ * Geometry manager specification record:
+ *
+ * RequestedSize computes the requested size of the master window.
+ *
+ * PlaceSlaves sets the position and size of all managed slaves
+ * by calling Ttk_PlaceSlave().
+ *
+ * SlaveRemoved() is called immediately before a slave is removed.
+ * NB: the associated slave window may have been destroyed when this
+ * routine is called.
+ * 
+ * SlaveRequest() is called when a slave requests a size change.
+ * It should return 1 if the request should propagate, 0 otherwise.
+ */
+typedef struct {			/* Manager hooks */
+    Tk_GeomMgr tkGeomMgr;		/* "real" Tk Geometry Manager */
+
+    int  (*RequestedSize)(void *managerData, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+    void (*PlaceSlaves)(void *managerData);
+    int  (*SlaveRequest)(void *managerData, int slaveIndex, int w, int h);
+    void (*SlaveRemoved)(void *managerData, int slaveIndex);
+} Ttk_ManagerSpec;
+
+/*
+ * Default implementations for Tk_GeomMgr hooks:
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_GeometryRequestProc(ClientData, Tk_Window slave);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_LostSlaveProc(ClientData, Tk_Window slave);
+
+/*
+ * Public API:
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Manager *Ttk_CreateManager(
+	Ttk_ManagerSpec *, void *managerData, Tk_Window masterWindow);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_DeleteManager(Ttk_Manager *);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_InsertSlave(
+    Ttk_Manager *, int position, Tk_Window, void *slaveData);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_ForgetSlave(Ttk_Manager *, int slaveIndex);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_ReorderSlave(Ttk_Manager *, int fromIndex, int toIndex);
+    /* Rearrange slave positions */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_PlaceSlave(
+    Ttk_Manager *, int slaveIndex, int x, int y, int width, int height);
+    /* Position and map the slave */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_UnmapSlave(Ttk_Manager *, int slaveIndex);
+    /* Unmap the slave */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_ManagerSizeChanged(Ttk_Manager *);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_ManagerLayoutChanged(Ttk_Manager *);
+    /* Notify manager that size (resp. layout) needs to be recomputed */
+
+/* Utilities:
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_SlaveIndex(Ttk_Manager *, Tk_Window);
+    /* Returns: index in slave array of specified window, -1 if not found */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_GetSlaveIndexFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_Manager *, Tcl_Obj *, int *indexPtr);
+
+/* Accessor functions:
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_NumberSlaves(Ttk_Manager *);
+    /* Returns: number of managed slaves */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void *Ttk_SlaveData(Ttk_Manager *, int slaveIndex);
+    /* Returns: client data associated with slave */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Tk_Window Ttk_SlaveWindow(Ttk_Manager *, int slaveIndex);
+    /* Returns: slave window */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_Maintainable(Tcl_Interp *, Tk_Window slave, Tk_Window master);
+    /* Returns: 1 if master can manage slave; 0 otherwise leaving error msg */
+
+#endif /* _TTKMANAGER */
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkNotebook.c b/generic/ttk/ttkNotebook.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..551f4a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkNotebook.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1413 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Joe English
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+#include "ttkManager.h"
+
+#define MIN(a,b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b))
+#define MAX(a,b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b))
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tab resources.
+ */
+
+#define DEFAULT_MIN_TAB_WIDTH 24
+
+static const char *const TabStateStrings[] = { "normal", "disabled", "hidden", 0 };
+typedef enum {
+    TAB_STATE_NORMAL, TAB_STATE_DISABLED, TAB_STATE_HIDDEN
+} TAB_STATE;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    /* Internal data:
+     */
+    int 	width, height;		/* Requested size of tab */
+    Ttk_Box	parcel;			/* Tab position */
+
+    /* Tab options:
+     */
+    TAB_STATE 	state;
+
+    /* Child window options:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj	*paddingObj;		/* Padding inside pane */
+    Ttk_Padding	padding;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*stickyObj;
+    Ttk_Sticky	sticky;
+
+    /* Label options:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *textObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *imageObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *compoundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *underlineObj;
+
+} Tab;
+
+/* Two different option tables are used for tabs:
+ * TabOptionSpecs is used to draw the tab, and only includes resources
+ * relevant to the tab.
+ *
+ * PaneOptionSpecs includes additional options for child window placement
+ * and is used to configure the slave.
+ */
+static Tk_OptionSpec TabOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "", "",
+	"normal", -1,Tk_Offset(Tab,state),
+	0,(ClientData)TabStateStrings,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text", "",
+	Tk_Offset(Tab,textObj), -1, 0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image", NULL/*default*/,
+	Tk_Offset(Tab,imageObj), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound",
+	"none", Tk_Offset(Tab,compoundObj), -1,
+	0,(ClientData)ttkCompoundStrings,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline", "-1",
+	Tk_Offset(Tab,underlineObj), -1, 0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 }
+};
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec PaneOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-padding", "padding", "Padding", "0",
+	Tk_Offset(Tab,paddingObj), -1, 0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-sticky", "sticky", "Sticky", "nsew",
+	Tk_Offset(Tab,stickyObj), -1, 0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(TabOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Notebook resources.
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *widthObj;		/* Default width */
+    Tcl_Obj *heightObj;		/* Default height */
+    Tcl_Obj *paddingObj;	/* Padding around notebook */
+
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr;		/* Geometry manager */
+    Tk_OptionTable tabOptionTable;	/* Tab options */
+    Tk_OptionTable paneOptionTable;	/* Tab+pane options */
+    int currentIndex;		/* index of currently selected tab */
+    int activeIndex;		/* index of currently active tab */
+    Ttk_Layout tabLayout;	/* Sublayout for tabs */
+
+    Ttk_Box clientArea;		/* Where to pack slave widgets */
+} NotebookPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    NotebookPart notebook;
+} Notebook;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec NotebookOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width", "0",
+	Tk_Offset(Notebook,notebook.widthObj),-1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-height", "height", "Height", "0",
+	Tk_Offset(Notebook,notebook.heightObj),-1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-padding", "padding", "Padding", NULL,
+	Tk_Offset(Notebook,notebook.paddingObj),-1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_TRUE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(ttkCoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/* Notebook style options:
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    Ttk_PositionSpec	tabPosition;	/* Where to place tabs */
+    Ttk_Padding 	tabMargins;	/* Margins around tab row */
+    Ttk_PositionSpec 	tabPlacement;	/* How to pack tabs within tab row */
+    Ttk_Orient		tabOrient;	/* ... */
+    int 		minTabWidth;	/* Minimum tab width */
+    Ttk_Padding 	padding;	/* External padding */
+} NotebookStyle;
+
+static void NotebookStyleOptions(Notebook *nb, NotebookStyle *nbstyle)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+
+    nbstyle->tabPosition = TTK_PACK_TOP | TTK_STICK_W;
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(nb->core.layout, "-tabposition", 0)) != 0) {
+	TtkGetLabelAnchorFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &nbstyle->tabPosition);
+    }
+
+    /* Guess default tabPlacement as function of tabPosition:
+     */
+    if (nbstyle->tabPosition & TTK_PACK_LEFT) {
+	nbstyle->tabPlacement = TTK_PACK_TOP | TTK_STICK_E;
+    } else if (nbstyle->tabPosition & TTK_PACK_RIGHT) {
+	nbstyle->tabPlacement = TTK_PACK_TOP | TTK_STICK_W;
+    } else if (nbstyle->tabPosition & TTK_PACK_BOTTOM) {
+	nbstyle->tabPlacement = TTK_PACK_LEFT | TTK_STICK_N;
+    } else { /* Assume TTK_PACK_TOP */
+	nbstyle->tabPlacement = TTK_PACK_LEFT | TTK_STICK_S;
+    }
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(nb->core.layout, "-tabplacement", 0)) != 0) {
+	TtkGetLabelAnchorFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &nbstyle->tabPlacement);
+    }
+
+    /* Compute tabOrient as function of tabPlacement:
+     */
+    if (nbstyle->tabPlacement & (TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_PACK_RIGHT)) {
+	nbstyle->tabOrient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    } else {
+	nbstyle->tabOrient = TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL;
+    }
+
+    nbstyle->tabMargins = Ttk_UniformPadding(0);
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(nb->core.layout, "-tabmargins", 0)) != 0) {
+	Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &nbstyle->tabMargins);
+    }
+
+    nbstyle->padding = Ttk_UniformPadding(0);
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(nb->core.layout, "-padding", 0)) != 0) {
+	Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,nb->core.tkwin,objPtr,&nbstyle->padding);
+    }
+
+    nbstyle->minTabWidth = DEFAULT_MIN_TAB_WIDTH;
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(nb->core.layout, "-mintabwidth", 0)) != 0) {
+	Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &nbstyle->minTabWidth);
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tab management.
+ */
+
+static Tab *CreateTab(Tcl_Interp *interp, Notebook *nb, Tk_Window slaveWindow)
+{
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable = nb->notebook.paneOptionTable;
+    void *record = ckalloc(sizeof(Tab));
+    memset(record, 0, sizeof(Tab));
+
+    if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, record, optionTable, slaveWindow) != TCL_OK) {
+	ckfree(record);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    return record;
+}
+
+static void DestroyTab(Notebook *nb, Tab *tab)
+{
+    void *record = tab;
+    Tk_FreeConfigOptions(record, nb->notebook.paneOptionTable, nb->core.tkwin);
+    ckfree(record);
+}
+
+static int ConfigureTab(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Notebook *nb, Tab *tab, Tk_Window slaveWindow,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Ttk_Sticky sticky = tab->sticky;
+    Ttk_Padding padding = tab->padding;
+    Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+    int mask = 0;
+
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (ClientData)tab, nb->notebook.paneOptionTable,
+	    objc, objv, slaveWindow, &savedOptions, &mask) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Check options:
+     * @@@ TODO: validate -image option.
+     */
+    if (Ttk_GetStickyFromObj(interp, tab->stickyObj, &sticky) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	goto error;
+    }
+    if (Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(interp, slaveWindow, tab->paddingObj, &padding)
+	    != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    tab->sticky = sticky;
+    tab->padding = padding;
+
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    Ttk_ManagerSizeChanged(nb->notebook.mgr);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&nb->core);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+error:
+    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ * IdentifyTab --
+ * 	Return the index of the tab at point x,y,
+ * 	or -1 if no tab at that point.
+ */
+static int IdentifyTab(Notebook *nb, int x, int y)
+{
+    int index;
+    for (index = 0; index < Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr); ++index) {
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr,index);
+	if (	tab->state != TAB_STATE_HIDDEN
+	     && Ttk_BoxContains(tab->parcel, x,y))
+	{
+	    return index;
+	}
+    }
+    return -1;
+}
+
+/*
+ * ActivateTab --
+ * 	Set the active tab index, redisplay if necessary.
+ */
+static void ActivateTab(Notebook *nb, int index)
+{
+    if (index != nb->notebook.activeIndex) {
+	nb->notebook.activeIndex = index;
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(&nb->core);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * TabState --
+ * 	Return the state of the specified tab, based on
+ * 	notebook state, currentIndex, activeIndex, and user-specified tab state.
+ *	The USER1 bit is set for the leftmost tab, and USER2
+ * 	is set for the rightmost tab.
+ */
+static Ttk_State TabState(Notebook *nb, int index)
+{
+    Ttk_State state = nb->core.state;
+    Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, index);
+
+    if (index == nb->notebook.currentIndex) {
+	state |= TTK_STATE_SELECTED;
+    } else {
+	state &= ~TTK_STATE_FOCUS;
+    }
+
+    if (index == nb->notebook.activeIndex) {
+	state |= TTK_STATE_ACTIVE;
+    }
+    if (index == 0) {
+    	state |= TTK_STATE_USER1;
+    }
+    if (index == Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr) - 1) {
+    	state |= TTK_STATE_USER2;
+    }
+    if (tab->state == TAB_STATE_DISABLED) {
+	state |= TTK_STATE_DISABLED;
+    }
+
+    return state;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Geometry management - size computation.
+ */
+
+/* TabrowSize --
+ *	Compute max height and total width of all tabs (horizontal layouts)
+ *	or total height and max width (vertical layouts).
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ * 	Sets width and height fields for all tabs.
+ *
+ * Notes:
+ * 	Hidden tabs are included in the perpendicular computation
+ * 	(max height/width) but not parallel (total width/height).
+ */
+static void TabrowSize(
+    Notebook *nb, Ttk_Orient orient, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout tabLayout = nb->notebook.tabLayout;
+    int tabrowWidth = 0, tabrowHeight = 0;
+    int i;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr); ++i) {
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, i);
+	Ttk_State tabState = TabState(nb,i);
+
+	Ttk_RebindSublayout(tabLayout, tab);
+	Ttk_LayoutSize(tabLayout,tabState,&tab->width,&tab->height);
+
+	if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	    tabrowHeight = MAX(tabrowHeight, tab->height);
+	    if (tab->state != TAB_STATE_HIDDEN) { tabrowWidth += tab->width; }
+	} else {
+	    tabrowWidth = MAX(tabrowWidth, tab->width);
+	    if (tab->state != TAB_STATE_HIDDEN) { tabrowHeight += tab->height; }
+	}
+    }
+
+    *widthPtr = tabrowWidth;
+    *heightPtr = tabrowHeight;
+}
+
+/* NotebookSize -- GM and widget size hook.
+ *
+ * Total height is tab height + client area height + pane internal padding
+ * Total width is max(client width, tab width) + pane internal padding
+ * Client area size determined by max size of slaves,
+ * overridden by -width and/or -height if nonzero.
+ */
+
+static int NotebookSize(void *clientData, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = clientData;
+    NotebookStyle nbstyle;
+    Ttk_Padding padding;
+    Ttk_Element clientNode = Ttk_FindElement(nb->core.layout, "client");
+    int clientWidth = 0, clientHeight = 0,
+    	reqWidth = 0, reqHeight = 0,
+	tabrowWidth = 0, tabrowHeight = 0;
+    int i;
+
+    NotebookStyleOptions(nb, &nbstyle);
+
+    /* Compute max requested size of all slaves:
+     */
+    for (i = 0; i < Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr); ++i) {
+	Tk_Window slaveWindow = Ttk_SlaveWindow(nb->notebook.mgr, i);
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, i);
+	int slaveWidth
+	    = Tk_ReqWidth(slaveWindow) + Ttk_PaddingWidth(tab->padding);
+	int slaveHeight
+	    = Tk_ReqHeight(slaveWindow) + Ttk_PaddingHeight(tab->padding);
+
+	clientWidth = MAX(clientWidth, slaveWidth);
+	clientHeight = MAX(clientHeight, slaveHeight);
+    }
+
+    /* Client width/height overridable by widget options:
+     */
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, nb->notebook.widthObj,&reqWidth);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, nb->notebook.heightObj,&reqHeight);
+    if (reqWidth > 0)
+	clientWidth = reqWidth;
+    if (reqHeight > 0)
+	clientHeight = reqHeight;
+
+    /* Tab row:
+     */
+    TabrowSize(nb, nbstyle.tabOrient, &tabrowWidth, &tabrowHeight);
+    tabrowHeight += Ttk_PaddingHeight(nbstyle.tabMargins);
+    tabrowWidth += Ttk_PaddingWidth(nbstyle.tabMargins);
+
+    /* Account for exterior and interior padding:
+     */
+    padding = nbstyle.padding;
+    if (clientNode) {
+	Ttk_Padding ipad =
+	    Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalPadding(nb->core.layout, clientNode);
+	padding = Ttk_AddPadding(padding, ipad);
+    }
+
+    if (nbstyle.tabPosition & (TTK_PACK_TOP|TTK_PACK_BOTTOM)) {
+	*widthPtr = MAX(tabrowWidth, clientWidth) + Ttk_PaddingWidth(padding);
+	*heightPtr = tabrowHeight + clientHeight + Ttk_PaddingHeight(padding);
+    } else {
+	*widthPtr = tabrowWidth + clientWidth + Ttk_PaddingWidth(padding);
+	*heightPtr = MAX(tabrowHeight,clientHeight) + Ttk_PaddingHeight(padding);
+    }
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Geometry management - layout.
+ */
+
+/* SqueezeTabs --
+ *	Squeeze or stretch tabs to fit within the tab area parcel.
+ *
+ *	All tabs are adjusted by an equal amount, but will not be made
+ *	smaller than the minimum width.  (If all the tabs still do
+ *	not fit in the available space, the rightmost ones will
+ *	be further squozen by PlaceTabs()).
+ *
+ *	The algorithm does not always yield an optimal layout, but does
+ *	have the important property that decreasing the available width
+ *	by one pixel will cause at most one tab to shrink by one pixel;
+ *	this means that tabs resize "smoothly" when the window shrinks
+ *	and grows.
+ *
+ * @@@ <<NOTE-TABPOSITION>> bug: only works for horizontal orientations
+ * @@@ <<NOTE-SQUEEZE-HIDDEN>> does not account for hidden tabs.
+ */
+
+static void SqueezeTabs(
+    Notebook *nb, int needed, int available, int minTabWidth)
+{
+    int nTabs = Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr);
+
+    if (nTabs > 0) {
+	int difference = available - needed,
+	    delta = difference / nTabs,
+	    remainder = difference % nTabs,
+	    slack = 0;
+	int i;
+
+	if (remainder < 0) { remainder += nTabs; --delta; }
+
+	for (i = 0; i < nTabs; ++i) {
+	    Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr,i);
+	    int adj = delta + (i < remainder) + slack;
+
+	    if (tab->width + adj >= minTabWidth) {
+		tab->width += adj;
+		slack = 0;
+	    } else {
+		slack = adj - (minTabWidth - tab->width);
+		tab->width = minTabWidth;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/* PlaceTabs --
+ * 	Compute all tab parcels.
+ */
+static void PlaceTabs(
+    Notebook *nb, Ttk_Box tabrowBox, Ttk_PositionSpec tabPlacement)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout tabLayout = nb->notebook.tabLayout;
+    int nTabs = Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr);
+    int i;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < nTabs; ++i) {
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, i);
+	Ttk_State tabState = TabState(nb, i);
+
+	if (tab->state != TAB_STATE_HIDDEN) {
+	    Ttk_Padding expand = Ttk_UniformPadding(0);
+	    Tcl_Obj *expandObj = Ttk_QueryOption(tabLayout,"-expand",tabState);
+
+	    if (expandObj) {
+		Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(NULL, expandObj, &expand);
+	    }
+
+	    tab->parcel =
+		Ttk_ExpandBox(
+		    Ttk_PositionBox(&tabrowBox,
+			tab->width, tab->height, tabPlacement),
+		    expand);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/* NotebookDoLayout --
+ *	Computes notebook layout and places tabs.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ * 	Sets clientArea, used to place slave panes.
+ */
+static void NotebookDoLayout(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    Tk_Window nbwin = nb->core.tkwin;
+    Ttk_Box cavity = Ttk_WinBox(nbwin);
+    int tabrowWidth = 0, tabrowHeight = 0;
+    Ttk_Element clientNode = Ttk_FindElement(nb->core.layout, "client");
+    Ttk_Box tabrowBox;
+    NotebookStyle nbstyle;
+
+    NotebookStyleOptions(nb, &nbstyle);
+
+    /* Notebook internal padding:
+     */
+    cavity = Ttk_PadBox(cavity, nbstyle.padding);
+
+    /* Layout for notebook background (base layout):
+     */
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(nb->core.layout, nb->core.state, Ttk_WinBox(nbwin));
+
+    /* Place tabs:
+     */
+    TabrowSize(nb, nbstyle.tabOrient, &tabrowWidth, &tabrowHeight);
+    tabrowBox = Ttk_PadBox(
+		    Ttk_PositionBox(&cavity,
+			tabrowWidth + Ttk_PaddingWidth(nbstyle.tabMargins),
+			tabrowHeight + Ttk_PaddingHeight(nbstyle.tabMargins),
+			nbstyle.tabPosition),
+		    nbstyle.tabMargins);
+
+    SqueezeTabs(nb, tabrowWidth, tabrowBox.width, nbstyle.minTabWidth);
+    PlaceTabs(nb, tabrowBox, nbstyle.tabPlacement);
+
+    /* Layout for client area frame:
+     */
+    if (clientNode) {
+	Ttk_PlaceElement(nb->core.layout, clientNode, cavity);
+	cavity = Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalParcel(nb->core.layout, clientNode);
+    }
+
+    if (cavity.height <= 0) cavity.height = 1;
+    if (cavity.width <= 0) cavity.width = 1;
+
+    nb->notebook.clientArea = cavity;
+}
+
+/*
+ * NotebookPlaceSlave --
+ * 	Set the position and size of a child widget
+ * 	based on the current client area and slave options:
+ */
+static void NotebookPlaceSlave(Notebook *nb, int slaveIndex)
+{
+    Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, slaveIndex);
+    Tk_Window slaveWindow = Ttk_SlaveWindow(nb->notebook.mgr, slaveIndex);
+    Ttk_Box slaveBox =
+	Ttk_StickBox(Ttk_PadBox(nb->notebook.clientArea, tab->padding),
+	    Tk_ReqWidth(slaveWindow), Tk_ReqHeight(slaveWindow),tab->sticky);
+
+    Ttk_PlaceSlave(nb->notebook.mgr, slaveIndex,
+	slaveBox.x, slaveBox.y, slaveBox.width, slaveBox.height);
+}
+
+/* NotebookPlaceSlaves --
+ * 	Geometry manager hook.
+ */
+static void NotebookPlaceSlaves(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    int currentIndex = nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+    if (currentIndex >= 0) {
+	NotebookDoLayout(nb);
+	NotebookPlaceSlave(nb, currentIndex);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * SelectTab(nb, index) --
+ * 	Change the currently-selected tab.
+ */
+static void SelectTab(Notebook *nb, int index)
+{
+    Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr,index);
+    int currentIndex = nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+
+    if (index == currentIndex) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (TabState(nb, index) & TTK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /* Unhide the tab if it is currently hidden and being selected.
+     */
+    if (tab->state == TAB_STATE_HIDDEN) {
+	tab->state = TAB_STATE_NORMAL;
+    }
+
+    if (currentIndex >= 0) {
+	Ttk_UnmapSlave(nb->notebook.mgr, currentIndex);
+    }
+
+    NotebookPlaceSlave(nb, index);
+
+    nb->notebook.currentIndex = index;
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&nb->core);
+
+    TtkSendVirtualEvent(nb->core.tkwin, "NotebookTabChanged");
+}
+
+/* NextTab --
+ * 	Returns the index of the next tab after the specified tab
+ * 	in the normal state (e.g., not hidden or disabled),
+ * 	or -1 if all tabs are disabled or hidden.
+ */
+static int NextTab(Notebook *nb, int index)
+{
+    int nTabs = Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr);
+    int nextIndex;
+
+    /* Scan forward for following usable tab:
+     */
+    for (nextIndex = index + 1; nextIndex < nTabs; ++nextIndex) {
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, nextIndex);
+	if (tab->state == TAB_STATE_NORMAL) {
+	    return nextIndex;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Not found -- scan backwards.
+     */
+    for (nextIndex = index - 1; nextIndex >= 0; --nextIndex) {
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, nextIndex);
+	if (tab->state == TAB_STATE_NORMAL) {
+	    return nextIndex;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Still nothing.  Give up.
+     */
+    return -1;
+}
+
+/* SelectNearestTab --
+ * 	Handles the case where the current tab is forgotten, hidden,
+ * 	or destroyed.
+ *
+ * 	Unmap the current tab and schedule the next available one
+ * 	to be mapped at the next GM update.
+ */
+static void SelectNearestTab(Notebook *nb)
+{
+    int currentIndex = nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+    int nextIndex = NextTab(nb, currentIndex);
+
+    if (currentIndex >= 0) {
+	Ttk_UnmapSlave(nb->notebook.mgr, currentIndex);
+    }
+    if (currentIndex != nextIndex) {
+	TtkSendVirtualEvent(nb->core.tkwin, "NotebookTabChanged");
+    }
+
+    nb->notebook.currentIndex = nextIndex;
+    Ttk_ManagerLayoutChanged(nb->notebook.mgr);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&nb->core);
+}
+
+/* TabRemoved -- GM SlaveRemoved hook.
+ * 	Select the next tab if the current one is being removed.
+ * 	Adjust currentIndex to account for removed slave.
+ */
+static void TabRemoved(void *managerData, int index)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = managerData;
+    Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, index);
+
+    if (index == nb->notebook.currentIndex) {
+	SelectNearestTab(nb);
+    }
+
+    if (index < nb->notebook.currentIndex) {
+	--nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+    }
+
+    DestroyTab(nb, tab);
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&nb->core);
+}
+
+static int TabRequest(void *managerData, int index, int width, int height)
+{
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/* AddTab --
+ * 	Add new tab at specified index.
+ */
+static int AddTab(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Notebook *nb,
+    int destIndex, Tk_Window slaveWindow,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Tab *tab;
+    if (!Ttk_Maintainable(interp, slaveWindow, nb->core.tkwin)) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+#if 0 /* can't happen */
+    if (Ttk_SlaveIndex(nb->notebook.mgr, slaveWindow) >= 0) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	    Tk_PathName(slaveWindow), " already added",
+	    NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+#endif
+
+    /* Create and insert tab.
+     */
+    tab = CreateTab(interp, nb, slaveWindow);
+    if (!tab) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (ConfigureTab(interp, nb, tab, slaveWindow, objc, objv) != TCL_OK) {
+	DestroyTab(nb, tab);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_InsertSlave(nb->notebook.mgr, destIndex, slaveWindow, tab);
+
+    /* Adjust indices and/or autoselect first tab:
+     */
+    if (nb->notebook.currentIndex < 0) {
+	SelectTab(nb, destIndex);
+    } else if (nb->notebook.currentIndex >= destIndex) {
+	++nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static Ttk_ManagerSpec NotebookManagerSpec = {
+    { "notebook", Ttk_GeometryRequestProc, Ttk_LostSlaveProc },
+    NotebookSize,
+    NotebookPlaceSlaves,
+    TabRequest,
+    TabRemoved
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Event handlers.
+ */
+
+/* NotebookEventHandler --
+ * 	Tracks the active tab.
+ */
+static const int NotebookEventMask
+    = StructureNotifyMask
+    | PointerMotionMask
+    | LeaveWindowMask
+    ;
+static void NotebookEventHandler(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = clientData;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) { /* Remove self */
+	Tk_DeleteEventHandler(nb->core.tkwin,
+	    NotebookEventMask, NotebookEventHandler, clientData);
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == MotionNotify) {
+	int index = IdentifyTab(nb, eventPtr->xmotion.x, eventPtr->xmotion.y);
+	ActivateTab(nb, index);
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == LeaveNotify) {
+	ActivateTab(nb, -1);
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Utilities.
+ */
+
+/* FindTabIndex --
+ *	Find the index of the specified tab.
+ *	Tab identifiers are one of:
+ *
+ *	+ positional specifications @x,y,
+ *	+ "current",
+ *	+ numeric indices [0..nTabs],
+ *	+ slave window names
+ *
+ *	Stores index of specified tab in *index_rtn, -1 if not found.
+ *
+ *	Returns TCL_ERROR and leaves an error message in interp->result
+ *	if the tab identifier was incorrect.
+ *
+ *	See also: GetTabIndex.
+ */
+static int FindTabIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Notebook *nb, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *index_rtn)
+{
+    const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+    int x, y;
+
+    *index_rtn = -1;
+
+    /* Check for @x,y ...
+     */
+    if (string[0] == '@' && sscanf(string, "@%d,%d",&x,&y) == 2) {
+	*index_rtn = IdentifyTab(nb, x, y);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /* ... or "current" ...
+     */
+    if (!strcmp(string, "current")) {
+	*index_rtn = nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /* ... or integer index or slave window name:
+     */
+    if (Ttk_GetSlaveIndexFromObj(
+	    interp, nb->notebook.mgr, objPtr, index_rtn) == TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /* Nothing matched; Ttk_GetSlaveIndexFromObj will have left error message.
+     */
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* GetTabIndex --
+ * 	Get the index of an existing tab.
+ * 	Tab identifiers are as per FindTabIndex.
+ * 	Returns TCL_ERROR if the tab does not exist.
+ */
+static int GetTabIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Notebook *nb, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *index_rtn)
+{
+    int status = FindTabIndex(interp, nb, objPtr, index_rtn);
+
+    if (status == TCL_OK && *index_rtn < 0) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	    "tab '", Tcl_GetString(objPtr), "' not found",
+	    NULL);
+	status = TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return status;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget command routines.
+ */
+
+/* $nb add window ?options ... ?
+ */
+static int NotebookAddCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    int index = Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr);
+    Tk_Window slaveWindow;
+    int slaveIndex;
+    Tab *tab;
+
+    if (objc <= 2 || objc % 2 != 1) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?-option value ...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    slaveWindow = Tk_NameToWindow(interp,Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),nb->core.tkwin);
+    if (!slaveWindow) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    slaveIndex = Ttk_SlaveIndex(nb->notebook.mgr, slaveWindow);
+
+    if (slaveIndex < 0) { /* New tab */
+	return AddTab(interp, nb, index, slaveWindow, objc-3,objv+3);
+    }
+
+    tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, slaveIndex);
+    if (tab->state == TAB_STATE_HIDDEN) {
+	tab->state = TAB_STATE_NORMAL;
+    }
+    if (ConfigureTab(interp, nb, tab, slaveWindow, objc-4,objv+4) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&nb->core);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $nb insert $index $tab ?-option value ...?
+ * 	Insert new tab, or move existing one.
+ */
+static int NotebookInsertCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    int current = nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+    int nSlaves = Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr);
+    int srcIndex, destIndex;
+
+    if (objc < 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "index slave ?-option value ...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (!strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "end")) {
+	destIndex = Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr);
+    } else if (TCL_OK != Ttk_GetSlaveIndexFromObj(
+		interp, nb->notebook.mgr, objv[2], &destIndex)) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_GetString(objv[3])[0] == '.') {
+	/* Window name -- could be new or existing slave.
+	 */
+	Tk_Window slaveWindow =
+	    Tk_NameToWindow(interp,Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),nb->core.tkwin);
+
+	if (!slaveWindow) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	srcIndex = Ttk_SlaveIndex(nb->notebook.mgr, slaveWindow);
+	if (srcIndex < 0) {	/* New slave */
+	    return AddTab(interp, nb, destIndex, slaveWindow, objc-4,objv+4);
+	}
+    } else if (Ttk_GetSlaveIndexFromObj(
+		interp, nb->notebook.mgr, objv[3], &srcIndex) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Move existing slave:
+     */
+    if (ConfigureTab(interp, nb,
+	     Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr,srcIndex),
+	     Ttk_SlaveWindow(nb->notebook.mgr,srcIndex),
+	     objc-4,objv+4) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (destIndex >= nSlaves) {
+	destIndex  = nSlaves - 1;
+    }
+    Ttk_ReorderSlave(nb->notebook.mgr, srcIndex, destIndex);
+
+    /* Adjust internal indexes:
+     */
+    nb->notebook.activeIndex = -1;
+    if (current == srcIndex) {
+	nb->notebook.currentIndex = destIndex;
+    } else if (destIndex <= current && current < srcIndex) {
+	++nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+    } else if (srcIndex < current && current <= destIndex) {
+	--nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+    }
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&nb->core);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $nb forget $tab --
+ * 	Removes the specified tab.
+ */
+static int NotebookForgetCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    int index;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tab");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (GetTabIndex(interp, nb, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_ForgetSlave(nb->notebook.mgr, index);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&nb->core);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $nb hide $tab --
+ * 	Hides the specified tab.
+ */
+static int NotebookHideCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    int index;
+    Tab *tab;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tab");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (GetTabIndex(interp, nb, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, index);
+    tab->state = TAB_STATE_HIDDEN;
+    if (index == nb->notebook.currentIndex) {
+	SelectNearestTab(nb);
+    }
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&nb->core);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $nb identify $x $y --
+ * 	Returns name of tab element at $x,$y; empty string if none.
+ */
+static int NotebookIdentifyCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    static const char *whatTable[] = { "element", "tab", NULL };
+    enum { IDENTIFY_ELEMENT, IDENTIFY_TAB };
+    int what = IDENTIFY_ELEMENT;
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Element element = NULL;
+    int x, y, tabIndex;
+
+    if (objc < 4 || objc > 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "?what? x y");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (   Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[objc-2], &x) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[objc-1], &y) != TCL_OK
+	|| (objc == 5 &&
+	    Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], whatTable, "option", 0, &what)
+		!= TCL_OK)
+    ) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tabIndex = IdentifyTab(nb, x, y);
+    if (tabIndex >= 0) {
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, tabIndex);
+	Ttk_State state = TabState(nb, tabIndex);
+	Ttk_Layout tabLayout = nb->notebook.tabLayout;
+
+	Ttk_RebindSublayout(tabLayout, tab);
+	Ttk_PlaceLayout(tabLayout, state, tab->parcel);
+
+	element = Ttk_IdentifyElement(tabLayout, x, y);
+    }
+
+    switch (what) {
+	case IDENTIFY_ELEMENT:
+	    if (element) {
+		const char *elementName = Ttk_ElementName(element);
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,Tcl_NewStringObj(elementName,-1));
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case IDENTIFY_TAB:
+	    if (tabIndex >= 0) {
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(tabIndex));
+	    }
+	    break;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $nb index $item --
+ * 	Returns the integer index of the tab specified by $item,
+ * 	the empty string if $item does not identify a tab.
+ *	See above for valid item formats.
+ */
+static int NotebookIndexCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    int index, status;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tab");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Special-case for "end":
+     */
+    if (!strcmp("end", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]))) {
+	int nSlaves = Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(nSlaves));
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    status = FindTabIndex(interp, nb, objv[2], &index);
+    if (status == TCL_OK && index >= 0) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
+    }
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/* $nb select ?$item? --
+ * 	Select the specified tab, or return the widget path of
+ * 	the currently-selected pane.
+ */
+static int NotebookSelectCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	if (nb->notebook.currentIndex >= 0) {
+	    Tk_Window pane = Ttk_SlaveWindow(
+		nb->notebook.mgr, nb->notebook.currentIndex);
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(pane), -1));
+	}
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc == 3) {
+	int index, status = GetTabIndex(interp, nb, objv[2], &index);
+	if (status == TCL_OK) {
+	    SelectTab(nb, index);
+	}
+	return status;
+    } /*else*/
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?tab?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* $nb tabs --
+ * 	Return list of tabs.
+ */
+static int NotebookTabsCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = nb->notebook.mgr;
+    Tcl_Obj *result;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc != 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    result = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+    for (i = 0; i < Ttk_NumberSlaves(mgr); ++i) {
+	const char *pathName = Tk_PathName(Ttk_SlaveWindow(mgr,i));
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, result, Tcl_NewStringObj(pathName,-1));
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $nb tab $tab ?-option ?value -option value...??
+ */
+static int NotebookTabCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = nb->notebook.mgr;
+    int index;
+    Tk_Window slaveWindow;
+    Tab *tab;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tab ?-option ?value??...");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (GetTabIndex(interp, nb, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tab = Ttk_SlaveData(mgr, index);
+    slaveWindow = Ttk_SlaveWindow(mgr, index);
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	return TtkEnumerateOptions(interp, tab,
+	    PaneOptionSpecs, nb->notebook.paneOptionTable, slaveWindow);
+    } else if (objc == 4) {
+	return TtkGetOptionValue(interp, tab, objv[3],
+	    nb->notebook.paneOptionTable, slaveWindow);
+    } /* else */
+
+    if (ConfigureTab(interp, nb, tab, slaveWindow, objc-3,objv+3) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* If the current tab has become disabled or hidden,
+     * select the next nondisabled, unhidden one:
+     */
+    if (index == nb->notebook.currentIndex && tab->state != TAB_STATE_NORMAL) {
+	SelectNearestTab(nb);
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* Subcommand table:
+ */
+static const Ttk_Ensemble NotebookCommands[] = {
+    { "add",    	NotebookAddCommand,0 },
+    { "configure",	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "forget",		NotebookForgetCommand,0 },
+    { "hide",		NotebookHideCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	NotebookIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { "index",		NotebookIndexCommand,0 },
+    { "insert",  	NotebookInsertCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "select",		NotebookSelectCommand,0 },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { "tab",   		NotebookTabCommand,0 },
+    { "tabs",   	NotebookTabsCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget class hooks.
+ */
+
+static void NotebookInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+
+    nb->notebook.mgr = Ttk_CreateManager(
+	    &NotebookManagerSpec, recordPtr, nb->core.tkwin);
+
+    nb->notebook.tabOptionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp,TabOptionSpecs);
+    nb->notebook.paneOptionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp,PaneOptionSpecs);
+
+    nb->notebook.currentIndex = -1;
+    nb->notebook.activeIndex = -1;
+    nb->notebook.tabLayout = 0;
+
+    nb->notebook.clientArea = Ttk_MakeBox(0,0,1,1);
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(
+	nb->core.tkwin, NotebookEventMask, NotebookEventHandler, recordPtr);
+}
+
+static void NotebookCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+
+    Ttk_DeleteManager(nb->notebook.mgr);
+    if (nb->notebook.tabLayout)
+	Ttk_FreeLayout(nb->notebook.tabLayout);
+}
+
+static int NotebookConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *clientData, int mask)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = clientData;
+
+    /*
+     * Error-checks:
+     */
+    if (nb->notebook.paddingObj) {
+	/* Check for valid -padding: */
+	Ttk_Padding unused;
+	if (Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(
+		    interp, nb->core.tkwin, nb->notebook.paddingObj, &unused)
+		!= TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return TtkCoreConfigure(interp, clientData, mask);
+}
+
+/* NotebookGetLayout  --
+ * 	GetLayout widget hook.
+ */
+static Ttk_Layout NotebookGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme theme, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Layout notebookLayout = TtkWidgetGetLayout(interp, theme, recordPtr);
+    Ttk_Layout tabLayout;
+
+    if (!notebookLayout) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    tabLayout = Ttk_CreateSublayout(
+	interp, theme, notebookLayout, ".Tab",	nb->notebook.tabOptionTable);
+
+    if (tabLayout) {
+	if (nb->notebook.tabLayout) {
+	    Ttk_FreeLayout(nb->notebook.tabLayout);
+	}
+	nb->notebook.tabLayout = tabLayout;
+    }
+
+    return notebookLayout;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Display routines.
+ */
+
+static void DisplayTab(Notebook *nb, int index, Drawable d)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout tabLayout = nb->notebook.tabLayout;
+    Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, index);
+    Ttk_State state = TabState(nb, index);
+
+    if (tab->state != TAB_STATE_HIDDEN) {
+	Ttk_RebindSublayout(tabLayout, tab);
+	Ttk_PlaceLayout(tabLayout, state, tab->parcel);
+	Ttk_DrawLayout(tabLayout, state, d);
+    }
+}
+
+static void NotebookDisplay(void *clientData, Drawable d)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = clientData;
+    int nSlaves = Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr);
+    int index;
+
+    /* Draw notebook background (base layout):
+     */
+    Ttk_DrawLayout(nb->core.layout, nb->core.state, d);
+
+    /* Draw tabs from left to right, but draw the current tab last
+     * so it will overwrite its neighbors.
+     */
+    for (index = 0; index < nSlaves; ++index) {
+	if (index != nb->notebook.currentIndex) {
+	    DisplayTab(nb, index, d);
+	}
+    }
+    if (nb->notebook.currentIndex >= 0) {
+	DisplayTab(nb, nb->notebook.currentIndex, d);
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget specification and layout definitions.
+ */
+
+static WidgetSpec NotebookWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TNotebook",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Notebook),		/* recordSize */
+    NotebookOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    NotebookCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    NotebookInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    NotebookCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    NotebookConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    TtkNullPostConfigure,	/* postConfigureProc */
+    NotebookGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    NotebookSize,		/* geometryProc */
+    NotebookDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    NotebookDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(NotebookLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Notebook.client", TTK_FILL_BOTH)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(TabLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Notebook.tab", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_GROUP("Notebook.padding", TTK_PACK_TOP|TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_GROUP("Notebook.focus", TTK_PACK_TOP|TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+		TTK_NODE("Notebook.label", TTK_PACK_TOP))))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization.
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE
+void TtkNotebook_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr = Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "Tab", TabLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "TNotebook", NotebookLayout);
+
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::notebook", &NotebookWidgetSpec);
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkPanedwindow.c b/generic/ttk/ttkPanedwindow.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b301372
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkPanedwindow.c
@@ -0,0 +1,975 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2005, Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ *
+ * ttk::panedwindow widget implementation.
+ *
+ * TODO: track active/pressed sash.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkManager.h"
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout algorithm.
+ *
+ * (pos=x/y, size=width/height, depending on -orient=horizontal/vertical)
+ *
+ * Each pane carries two pieces of state: the request size and the
+ * position of the following sash.  (The final pane has no sash,
+ * its sash position is used as a sentinel value).
+ *
+ * Pane geometry is determined by the sash positions.
+ * When resizing, sash positions are computed from the request sizes,
+ * the available space, and pane weights (see PlaceSashes()).
+ * This ensures continuous resize behavior (that is: changing
+ * the size by X pixels then changing the size by Y pixels
+ * gives the same result as changing the size by X+Y pixels
+ * in one step).
+ *
+ * The request size is initially set to the slave window's requested size.
+ * When the user drags a sash, each pane's request size is set to its
+ * actual size.  This ensures that panes "stay put" on the next resize.
+ *
+ * If reqSize == 0, use 0 for the weight as well.  This ensures that
+ * "collapsed" panes stay collapsed during a resize, regardless of
+ * their nominal -weight.
+ *
+ * +++ Invariants.
+ *
+ * #sash 		=  #pane - 1
+ * pos(pane[0]) 	=  0
+ * pos(sash[i]) 	=  pos(pane[i]) + size(pane[i]), 0 <= i <= #sash
+ * pos(pane[i+1]) 	=  pos(sash[i]) + size(sash[i]), 0 <= i <  #sash
+ * pos(sash[#sash])	=  size(pw)   // sentinel value, constraint
+ *
+ * size(pw) 		=  sum(size(pane(0..#pane))) + sum(size(sash(0..#sash)))
+ * size(pane[i]) 	>= 0,  for 0 <= i < #pane
+ * size(sash[i]) 	>= 0,  for 0 <= i < #sash
+ * ==> pos(pane[i]) <= pos(sash[i]) <= pos(pane[i+1]), for 0 <= i < #sash
+ *
+ * Assumption: all sashes are the same size.
+ */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget record.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*orientObj;
+    int 	orient;
+    int 	width;
+    int 	height;
+    Ttk_Manager	*mgr;
+    Tk_OptionTable paneOptionTable;
+    Ttk_Layout	sashLayout;
+    int 	sashThickness;
+} PanedPart;
+
+typedef struct {
+    WidgetCore	core;
+    PanedPart	paned;
+} Paned;
+
+/* @@@ NOTE: -orient is readonly 'cause dynamic oriention changes NYI
+ */
+static Tk_OptionSpec PanedOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-orient", "orient", "Orient", "vertical",
+	Tk_Offset(Paned,paned.orientObj), Tk_Offset(Paned,paned.orient),
+	0,(ClientData)ttkOrientStrings,READONLY_OPTION|STYLE_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width", "0",
+	-1,Tk_Offset(Paned,paned.width),
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-height", "height", "Height", "0",
+	-1,Tk_Offset(Paned,paned.height),
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_FALSE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(ttkCoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Slave pane record.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    int 	reqSize;		/* Pane request size */
+    int 	sashPos;		/* Folowing sash position */
+    int 	weight; 		/* Pane -weight, for resizing */
+} Pane;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec PaneOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-weight", "weight", "Weight", "0",
+	-1,Tk_Offset(Pane,weight), 0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_END, 0,0,0, NULL, -1,-1, 0,0,0}
+};
+
+/* CreatePane --
+ * 	Create a new pane record.
+ */
+static Pane *CreatePane(Tcl_Interp *interp, Paned *pw, Tk_Window slaveWindow)
+{
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable = pw->paned.paneOptionTable;
+    void *record = ckalloc(sizeof(Pane));
+    Pane *pane = record;
+
+    memset(record, 0, sizeof(Pane));
+    if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, record, optionTable, slaveWindow) != TCL_OK) {
+	ckfree(record);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    pane->reqSize
+	= pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL
+	? Tk_ReqWidth(slaveWindow) : Tk_ReqHeight(slaveWindow);
+
+    return pane;
+}
+
+/* DestroyPane --
+ * 	Free pane record.
+ */
+static void DestroyPane(Paned *pw, Pane *pane)
+{
+    void *record = pane;
+    Tk_FreeConfigOptions(record, pw->paned.paneOptionTable, pw->core.tkwin);
+    ckfree(record);
+}
+
+/* ConfigurePane --
+ * 	Set pane options.
+ */
+static int ConfigurePane(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Paned *pw, Pane *pane, Tk_Window slaveWindow,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = pw->paned.mgr;
+    Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+    int mask = 0;
+
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (void*)pane, pw->paned.paneOptionTable,
+	    objc, objv, slaveWindow, &savedOptions, &mask) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Sanity-check:
+     */
+    if (pane->weight < 0) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "-weight must be nonnegative", NULL);
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    /* Done.
+     */
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    Ttk_ManagerSizeChanged(mgr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Sash adjustment.
+ */
+
+/* ShoveUp --
+ * 	Place sash i at specified position, recursively shoving
+ * 	previous sashes upwards as needed, until hitting the top
+ * 	of the window.  If that happens, shove back down.
+ *
+ * 	Returns: final position of sash i.
+ */
+
+static int ShoveUp(Paned *pw, int i, int pos)
+{
+    Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, i);
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+
+    if (i == 0) {
+	if (pos < 0)
+	    pos = 0;
+    } else {
+	Pane *prevPane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, i-1);
+	if (pos < prevPane->sashPos + sashThickness)
+	    pos = ShoveUp(pw, i-1, pos - sashThickness) + sashThickness;
+    }
+    return pane->sashPos = pos;
+}
+
+/* ShoveDown --
+ * 	Same as ShoveUp, but going in the opposite direction
+ * 	and stopping at the sentinel sash.
+ */
+static int ShoveDown(Paned *pw, int i, int pos)
+{
+    Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr,i);
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+
+    if (i == Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr) - 1) {
+	pos = pane->sashPos; /* Sentinel value == master window size */
+    } else {
+	Pane *nextPane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr,i+1);
+	if (pos + sashThickness > nextPane->sashPos)
+	    pos = ShoveDown(pw, i+1, pos + sashThickness) - sashThickness;
+    }
+    return pane->sashPos = pos;
+}
+
+/* PanedSize --
+ * 	Compute the requested size of the paned widget
+ * 	from the individual pane request sizes.
+ *
+ * 	Used as the WidgetSpec sizeProc and the ManagerSpec sizeProc.
+ */
+static int PanedSize(void *recordPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    int nPanes = Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr);
+    int nSashes = nPanes - 1;
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+    int width = 0, height = 0;
+    int index;
+
+    if (pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	for (index = 0; index < nPanes; ++index) {
+	    Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+	    Tk_Window slaveWindow = Ttk_SlaveWindow(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+
+	    if (height < Tk_ReqHeight(slaveWindow))
+		height = Tk_ReqHeight(slaveWindow);
+	    width += pane->reqSize;
+	}
+	width += nSashes * sashThickness;
+    } else {
+	for (index = 0; index < nPanes; ++index) {
+	    Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+	    Tk_Window slaveWindow = Ttk_SlaveWindow(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+
+	    if (width < Tk_ReqWidth(slaveWindow))
+		width = Tk_ReqWidth(slaveWindow);
+	    height += pane->reqSize;
+	}
+	height += nSashes * sashThickness;
+    }
+
+    *widthPtr = pw->paned.width > 0 ? pw->paned.width : width;
+    *heightPtr = pw->paned.height > 0 ? pw->paned.height : height;
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/* AdjustPanes --
+ * 	Set pane request sizes from sash positions.
+ *
+ * NOTE:
+ * 	AdjustPanes followed by PlaceSashes (called during relayout)
+ * 	will leave the sashes in the same place, as long as available size
+ * 	remains contant.
+ */
+static void AdjustPanes(Paned *pw)
+{
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+    int pos = 0;
+    int index;
+
+    for (index = 0; index < Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr); ++index) {
+	Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+	int size = pane->sashPos - pos;
+	pane->reqSize = size >= 0 ? size : 0;
+	pos = pane->sashPos + sashThickness;
+    }
+}
+
+/* PlaceSashes --
+ *	Set sash positions from pane request sizes and available space.
+ *	The sentinel sash position is set to the available space.
+ *
+ *	Allocate pane->reqSize pixels to each pane, and distribute
+ *	the difference = available size - requested size according
+ *	to pane->weight.
+ *
+ *	If there's still some left over, squeeze panes from the bottom up
+ *	(This can happen if all weights are zero, or if one or more panes
+ *	are too small to absorb the required shrinkage).
+ *
+ * Notes:
+ * 	This doesn't distribute the remainder pixels as evenly as it could
+ * 	when more than one pane has weight > 1.
+ */
+static void PlaceSashes(Paned *pw, int width, int height)
+{
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = pw->paned.mgr;
+    int nPanes = Ttk_NumberSlaves(mgr);
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+    int available = pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL ? width : height;
+    int reqSize = 0, totalWeight = 0;
+    int difference, delta, remainder, pos, i;
+
+    if (nPanes == 0)
+	return;
+
+    /* Compute total required size and total available weight:
+     */
+    for (i = 0; i < nPanes; ++i) {
+	Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(mgr, i);
+	reqSize += pane->reqSize;
+	totalWeight += pane->weight * (pane->reqSize != 0);
+    }
+
+    /* Compute difference to be redistributed:
+     */
+    difference = available - reqSize - sashThickness*(nPanes-1);
+    if (totalWeight != 0) {
+	delta = difference / totalWeight;
+	remainder = difference % totalWeight;
+	if (remainder < 0) {
+	    --delta;
+	    remainder += totalWeight;
+	}
+    } else {
+	delta = remainder = 0;
+    }
+    /* ASSERT: 0 <= remainder < totalWeight */
+
+    /* Place sashes:
+     */
+    pos = 0;
+    for (i = 0; i < nPanes; ++i) {
+	Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(mgr, i);
+	int weight = pane->weight * (pane->reqSize != 0);
+	int size = pane->reqSize + delta * weight;
+
+	if (weight > remainder)
+	    weight = remainder;
+	remainder -= weight;
+	size += weight;
+
+	if (size < 0)
+	    size = 0;
+
+	pane->sashPos = (pos += size);
+	pos += sashThickness;
+    }
+
+    /* Handle emergency shrink/emergency stretch:
+     * Set sentinel sash position to end of widget,
+     * shove preceding sashes up.
+     */
+    ShoveUp(pw, nPanes - 1, available);
+}
+
+/* PlacePanes --
+ *	Places slave panes based on sash positions.
+ */
+static void PlacePanes(Paned *pw)
+{
+    int horizontal = pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    int width = Tk_Width(pw->core.tkwin), height = Tk_Height(pw->core.tkwin);
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+    int pos = 0;
+    int index;
+
+    for (index = 0; index < Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr); ++index) {
+	Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+	int size = pane->sashPos - pos;
+
+	if (size > 0) {
+	    if (horizontal) {
+		Ttk_PlaceSlave(pw->paned.mgr, index, pos, 0, size, height);
+	    } else {
+		Ttk_PlaceSlave(pw->paned.mgr, index, 0, pos, width, size);
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    Ttk_UnmapSlave(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+	}
+
+	pos = pane->sashPos + sashThickness;
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Manager specification.
+ */
+
+static void PanedPlaceSlaves(void *managerData)
+{
+    Paned *pw = managerData;
+    PlaceSashes(pw, Tk_Width(pw->core.tkwin), Tk_Height(pw->core.tkwin));
+    PlacePanes(pw);
+}
+
+static void PaneRemoved(void *managerData, int index)
+{
+    Paned *pw = managerData;
+    Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+    DestroyPane(pw, pane);
+}
+
+static int AddPane(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Paned *pw,
+    int destIndex, Tk_Window slaveWindow,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Pane *pane;
+    if (!Ttk_Maintainable(interp, slaveWindow, pw->core.tkwin)) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (Ttk_SlaveIndex(pw->paned.mgr, slaveWindow) >= 0) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	    Tk_PathName(slaveWindow), " already added",
+	    NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    pane = CreatePane(interp, pw, slaveWindow);
+    if (!pane) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (ConfigurePane(interp, pw, pane, slaveWindow, objc, objv) != TCL_OK) {
+	DestroyPane(pw, pane);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_InsertSlave(pw->paned.mgr, destIndex, slaveWindow, pane);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* PaneRequest --
+ * 	Only update pane request size if slave is currently unmapped.
+ * 	Geometry requests from mapped slaves are not directly honored
+ * 	in order to avoid unexpected pane resizes (esp. while the
+ * 	user is dragging a sash [#1325286]).
+ */
+static int PaneRequest(void *managerData, int index, int width, int height)
+{
+    Paned *pw = managerData;
+    Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+    Tk_Window slaveWindow = Ttk_SlaveWindow(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+    int horizontal = pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+
+    if (!Tk_IsMapped(slaveWindow)) {
+	pane->reqSize = horizontal ? width : height;
+    }
+    return 1;
+}
+
+static Ttk_ManagerSpec PanedManagerSpec = {
+    { "panedwindow", Ttk_GeometryRequestProc, Ttk_LostSlaveProc },
+    PanedSize,
+    PanedPlaceSlaves,
+    PaneRequest,
+    PaneRemoved
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Event handler.
+ *
+ * <<NOTE-PW-LEAVE-NOTIFYINFERIOR>>
+ * Tk does not execute binding scripts for <Leave> events when
+ * the pointer crosses from a parent to a child.  This widget
+ * needs to know when that happens, though, so it can reset
+ * the cursor.
+ *
+ * This event handler generates an <<EnteredChild>> virtual event
+ * on LeaveNotify/NotifyInferior.
+ */
+
+static const unsigned PanedEventMask = LeaveWindowMask;
+static void PanedEventProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = clientData;
+    if (   eventPtr->type == LeaveNotify
+	&& eventPtr->xcrossing.detail == NotifyInferior)
+    {
+	TtkSendVirtualEvent(corePtr->tkwin, "EnteredChild");
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization and cleanup hooks.
+ */
+
+static void PanedInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(pw->core.tkwin,
+	PanedEventMask, PanedEventProc, recordPtr);
+    pw->paned.mgr = Ttk_CreateManager(&PanedManagerSpec, pw, pw->core.tkwin);
+    pw->paned.paneOptionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp,PaneOptionSpecs);
+    pw->paned.sashLayout = 0;
+    pw->paned.sashThickness = 1;
+}
+
+static void PanedCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+
+    if (pw->paned.sashLayout)
+	Ttk_FreeLayout(pw->paned.sashLayout);
+    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(pw->core.tkwin,
+	PanedEventMask, PanedEventProc, recordPtr);
+    Ttk_DeleteManager(pw->paned.mgr);
+}
+
+/* Post-configuration hook.
+ */
+static int PanedPostConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *clientData, int mask)
+{
+    Paned *pw = clientData;
+
+    if (mask & GEOMETRY_CHANGED) {
+	/* User has changed -width or -height.
+	 * Recalculate sash positions based on requested size.
+	 */
+	Tk_Window tkwin = pw->core.tkwin;
+	PlaceSashes(pw,
+	    pw->paned.width > 0 ? pw->paned.width : Tk_Width(tkwin),
+	    pw->paned.height > 0 ? pw->paned.height : Tk_Height(tkwin));
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout management hooks.
+ */
+static Ttk_Layout PanedGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme themePtr, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Layout panedLayout = TtkWidgetGetLayout(interp, themePtr, recordPtr);
+
+    if (panedLayout) {
+	int horizontal = pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+	const char *layoutName =
+	    horizontal ? ".Vertical.Sash" : ".Horizontal.Sash";
+	Ttk_Layout sashLayout = Ttk_CreateSublayout(
+	    interp, themePtr, panedLayout, layoutName, pw->core.optionTable);
+
+	if (sashLayout) {
+	    int sashWidth, sashHeight;
+
+	    Ttk_LayoutSize(sashLayout, 0, &sashWidth, &sashHeight);
+	    pw->paned.sashThickness = horizontal ? sashWidth : sashHeight;
+
+	    if (pw->paned.sashLayout)
+		Ttk_FreeLayout(pw->paned.sashLayout);
+	    pw->paned.sashLayout = sashLayout;
+	} else {
+	    Ttk_FreeLayout(panedLayout);
+	    return 0;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return panedLayout;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Drawing routines.
+ */
+
+/* SashLayout --
+ * 	Place the sash sublayout after the specified pane,
+ * 	in preparation for drawing.
+ */
+static Ttk_Layout SashLayout(Paned *pw, int index)
+{
+    Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+    int thickness = pw->paned.sashThickness,
+	height = Tk_Height(pw->core.tkwin),
+	width = Tk_Width(pw->core.tkwin),
+	sashPos = pane->sashPos;
+
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(
+	pw->paned.sashLayout, pw->core.state,
+	pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL
+	    ? Ttk_MakeBox(sashPos, 0, thickness, height)
+	    : Ttk_MakeBox(0, sashPos, width, thickness));
+
+    return pw->paned.sashLayout;
+}
+
+static void DrawSash(Paned *pw, int index, Drawable d)
+{
+    Ttk_DrawLayout(SashLayout(pw, index), pw->core.state, d);
+}
+
+static void PanedDisplay(void *recordPtr, Drawable d)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    int i, nSashes = Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr) - 1;
+
+    TtkWidgetDisplay(recordPtr, d);
+    for (i = 0; i < nSashes; ++i) {
+	DrawSash(pw, i, d);
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands.
+ */
+
+/* $pw add window [ options ... ]
+ */
+static int PanedAddCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    Tk_Window slaveWindow;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    slaveWindow = Tk_NameToWindow(
+	interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), pw->core.tkwin);
+
+    if (!slaveWindow) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    return AddPane(interp, pw, Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr), slaveWindow,
+	    objc - 3, objv + 3);
+}
+
+/* $pw insert $index $slave ?-option value ...?
+ * 	Insert new slave, or move existing one.
+ */
+static int PanedInsertCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    int nSlaves = Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr);
+    int srcIndex, destIndex;
+    Tk_Window slaveWindow;
+
+    if (objc < 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "index slave ?-option value ...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    slaveWindow = Tk_NameToWindow(
+	interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), pw->core.tkwin);
+    if (!slaveWindow) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (!strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "end")) {
+	destIndex = Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr);
+    } else if (TCL_OK != Ttk_GetSlaveIndexFromObj(
+		interp,pw->paned.mgr,objv[2],&destIndex))
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    srcIndex = Ttk_SlaveIndex(pw->paned.mgr, slaveWindow);
+    if (srcIndex < 0) { /* New slave: */
+	return AddPane(interp, pw, destIndex, slaveWindow, objc-4, objv+4);
+    } /* else -- move existing slave: */
+
+    if (destIndex >= nSlaves)
+	destIndex  = nSlaves - 1;
+    Ttk_ReorderSlave(pw->paned.mgr, srcIndex, destIndex);
+
+    return objc == 4 ? TCL_OK :
+	ConfigurePane(interp, pw,
+		Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, destIndex),
+		Ttk_SlaveWindow(pw->paned.mgr, destIndex),
+		objc-4,objv+4);
+}
+
+/* $pw forget $pane
+ */
+static int PanedForgetCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    int paneIndex;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "pane");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (TCL_OK != Ttk_GetSlaveIndexFromObj(
+		    interp, pw->paned.mgr, objv[2], &paneIndex))
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Ttk_ForgetSlave(pw->paned.mgr, paneIndex);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $pw identify ?what? $x $y --
+ * 	Return index of sash at $x,$y
+ */
+static int PanedIdentifyCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    static const char *whatTable[] = { "element", "sash", NULL };
+    enum { IDENTIFY_ELEMENT, IDENTIFY_SASH };
+    int what = IDENTIFY_SASH;
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+    int nSashes = Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr) - 1;
+    int x, y, pos;
+    int index;
+
+    if (objc < 4 || objc > 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "?what? x y");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (   Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[objc-2], &x) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[objc-1], &y) != TCL_OK
+	|| (objc == 5 &&
+	    Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], whatTable, "option", 0, &what)
+		!= TCL_OK)
+    ) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    pos = pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL ? x : y;
+    for (index = 0; index < nSashes; ++index) {
+	Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+	if (pane->sashPos <= pos && pos <= pane->sashPos + sashThickness) {
+	    /* Found it. */
+	    switch (what) {
+		case IDENTIFY_SASH:
+		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
+		    return TCL_OK;
+		case IDENTIFY_ELEMENT:
+		{
+		    Ttk_Element element =
+			Ttk_IdentifyElement(SashLayout(pw, index), x, y);
+		    if (element) {
+			Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+			    Tcl_NewStringObj(Ttk_ElementName(element), -1));
+		    }
+		    return TCL_OK;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK; /* nothing found - return empty string */
+}
+
+/* $pw pane $pane ?-option ?value -option value ...??
+ * 	Query/modify pane options.
+ */
+static int PanedPaneCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    int paneIndex;
+    Tk_Window slaveWindow;
+    Pane *pane;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "pane ?-option value ...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (TCL_OK != Ttk_GetSlaveIndexFromObj(
+		    interp,pw->paned.mgr,objv[2],&paneIndex))
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, paneIndex);
+    slaveWindow = Ttk_SlaveWindow(pw->paned.mgr, paneIndex);
+
+    switch (objc) {
+	case 3:
+	    return TtkEnumerateOptions(interp, pane, PaneOptionSpecs,
+			pw->paned.paneOptionTable, slaveWindow);
+	case 4:
+	    return TtkGetOptionValue(interp, pane, objv[3],
+			pw->paned.paneOptionTable, slaveWindow);
+	default:
+	    return ConfigurePane(interp, pw, pane, slaveWindow, objc-3,objv+3);
+    }
+}
+
+/* $pw panes --
+ * 	Return list of managed panes.
+ */
+static int PanedPanesCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = pw->paned.mgr;
+    Tcl_Obj *panes;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc != 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    panes = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+    for (i = 0; i < Ttk_NumberSlaves(mgr); ++i) {
+	const char *pathName = Tk_PathName(Ttk_SlaveWindow(mgr,i));
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, panes, Tcl_NewStringObj(pathName,-1));
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, panes);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+
+/* $pw sashpos $index ?$newpos?
+ * 	Query or modify sash position.
+ */
+static int PanedSashposCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    int sashIndex, position = -1;
+    Pane *pane;
+
+    if (objc < 3 || objc > 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "index ?newpos?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &sashIndex) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (sashIndex < 0 || sashIndex >= Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr) - 1) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	    "sash index ", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), " out of range",
+	    NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, sashIndex);
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(pane->sashPos));
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+    /* else -- set new sash position */
+
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &position) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (position < pane->sashPos) {
+	ShoveUp(pw, sashIndex, position);
+    } else {
+	ShoveDown(pw, sashIndex, position);
+    }
+
+    AdjustPanes(pw);
+    Ttk_ManagerLayoutChanged(pw->paned.mgr);
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(pane->sashPos));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble PanedCommands[] = {
+    { "add", 		PanedAddCommand,0 },
+    { "configure",	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "forget", 	PanedForgetCommand,0 },
+    { "identify", 	PanedIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { "insert", 	PanedInsertCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "pane",   	PanedPaneCommand,0 },
+    { "panes",   	PanedPanesCommand,0 },
+    { "sashpos",  	PanedSashposCommand,0 },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget specification.
+ */
+
+static WidgetSpec PanedWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TPanedwindow",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Paned),		/* recordSize */
+    PanedOptionSpecs,		/* optionSpecs */
+    PanedCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    PanedInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    PanedCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    TtkCoreConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    PanedPostConfigure, 	/* postConfigureProc */
+    PanedGetLayout,		/* getLayoutProc */
+    PanedSize, 			/* sizeProc */
+    TtkWidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    PanedDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Elements and layouts.
+ */
+
+static const int DEFAULT_SASH_THICKNESS = 5;
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *thicknessObj;
+} SashElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec SashElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-sashthickness", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	    Tk_Offset(SashElement,thicknessObj), "5" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void SashElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    SashElement *sash = elementRecord;
+    int thickness = DEFAULT_SASH_THICKNESS;
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, sash->thicknessObj, &thickness);
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = thickness;
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SashElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SashElement),
+    SashElementOptions,
+    SashElementSize,
+    TtkNullElementDraw
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(PanedLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Panedwindow.background", 0)/* @@@ BUG: empty layouts don't work */
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(HorizontalSashLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Sash.hsash", TTK_FILL_X)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(VerticalSashLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Sash.vsash", TTK_FILL_Y)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Registration routine.
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE
+void TtkPanedwindow_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr = Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::panedwindow", &PanedWidgetSpec);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, themePtr, "hsash", &SashElementSpec, 0);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, themePtr, "vsash", &SashElementSpec, 0);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "TPanedwindow", PanedLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "Horizontal.Sash", HorizontalSashLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "Vertical.Sash", VerticalSashLayout);
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkProgress.c b/generic/ttk/ttkProgress.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4dc50a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkProgress.c
@@ -0,0 +1,545 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) Joe English, Pat Thoyts, Michael Kirkham
+ *
+ * ttk::progressbar widget.
+ */
+
+#include <math.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget record:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_PROGRESSBAR_LENGTH "100"
+enum {
+    TTK_PROGRESSBAR_DETERMINATE, TTK_PROGRESSBAR_INDETERMINATE
+};
+static const char *const ProgressbarModeStrings[] = {
+    "determinate", "indeterminate", NULL
+};
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj 	*orientObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*lengthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*modeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*variableObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*maximumObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*valueObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*phaseObj;
+
+    int 	mode;
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *variableTrace;	/* Trace handle for -variable option */
+    int 	period;			/* Animation period */
+    int 	maxPhase;		/* Max animation phase */
+    Tcl_TimerToken timer;		/* Animation timer */
+
+} ProgressbarPart;
+
+typedef struct {
+    WidgetCore 		core;
+    ProgressbarPart	progress;
+} Progressbar;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec ProgressbarOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-orient", "orient", "Orient",
+	"horizontal", Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.orientObj), -1,
+	0, (ClientData)ttkOrientStrings, STYLE_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-length", "length", "Length",
+        DEF_PROGRESSBAR_LENGTH, Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.lengthObj), -1,
+	0, 0, GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-mode", "mode", "ProgressMode", "determinate",
+	Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.modeObj),
+	Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.mode),
+	0, (ClientData)ProgressbarModeStrings, 0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-maximum", "maximum", "Maximum",
+	"100", Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.maximumObj), -1,
+	0, 0, 0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.variableObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-value", "value", "Value",
+	"0.0", Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.valueObj), -1,
+	0, 0, 0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-phase", "phase", "Phase",
+	"0", Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.phaseObj), -1,
+	0, 0, 0 },
+
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_FALSE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(ttkCoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Animation procedures:
+ */
+
+/* AnimationEnabled --
+ * 	Returns 1 if animation should be active, 0 otherwise.
+ */
+static int AnimationEnabled(Progressbar *pb)
+{
+    double maximum = 100, value = 0;
+
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.maximumObj, &maximum);
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.valueObj, &value);
+
+    return pb->progress.period > 0
+	&& value > 0.0
+	&& (   value < maximum
+	    || pb->progress.mode == TTK_PROGRESSBAR_INDETERMINATE);
+}
+
+/* AnimateProgressProc --
+ * 	Timer callback for progress bar animation.
+ * 	Increments the -phase option, redisplays the widget,
+ * 	and reschedules itself if animation still enabled.
+ */
+static void AnimateProgressProc(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = clientData;
+
+    pb->progress.timer = 0;
+
+    if (AnimationEnabled(pb)) {
+	int phase = 0;
+	Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.phaseObj, &phase);
+
+	/*
+	 * Update -phase:
+	 */
+	++phase;
+	if (pb->progress.maxPhase)
+	    phase %= pb->progress.maxPhase;
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(pb->progress.phaseObj);
+	pb->progress.phaseObj = Tcl_NewIntObj(phase);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(pb->progress.phaseObj);
+
+	/*
+	 * Reschedule:
+	 */
+	pb->progress.timer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(
+	    pb->progress.period, AnimateProgressProc, clientData);
+
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(&pb->core);
+    }
+}
+
+/* CheckAnimation --
+ * 	If animation is enabled and not scheduled, schedule it.
+ * 	If animation is disabled but scheduled, cancel it.
+ */
+static void CheckAnimation(Progressbar *pb)
+{
+    if (AnimationEnabled(pb)) {
+	if (pb->progress.timer == 0) {
+	    pb->progress.timer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(
+		pb->progress.period, AnimateProgressProc, (ClientData)pb);
+	}
+    } else {
+	if (pb->progress.timer != 0) {
+	    Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(pb->progress.timer);
+	    pb->progress.timer = 0;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Trace hook for progressbar -variable option:
+ */
+
+static void VariableChanged(void *recordPtr, const char *value)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *newValue;
+    double scratch;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(&pb->core)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (!value) {
+	/* Linked variable is unset -- disable widget */
+	TtkWidgetChangeState(&pb->core, TTK_STATE_DISABLED, 0);
+	return;
+    }
+    TtkWidgetChangeState(&pb->core, 0, TTK_STATE_DISABLED);
+
+    newValue = Tcl_NewStringObj(value, -1);
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(newValue);
+    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, newValue, &scratch) != TCL_OK) {
+	TtkWidgetChangeState(&pb->core, TTK_STATE_INVALID, 0);
+	return;
+    }
+    TtkWidgetChangeState(&pb->core, 0, TTK_STATE_INVALID);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(pb->progress.valueObj);
+    pb->progress.valueObj = newValue;
+
+    CheckAnimation(pb);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&pb->core);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget class methods:
+ */
+
+static void ProgressbarInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    pb->progress.variableTrace = 0;
+    pb->progress.timer = 0;
+}
+
+static void ProgressbarCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    if (pb->progress.variableTrace)
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(pb->progress.variableTrace);
+    if (pb->progress.timer)
+	Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(pb->progress.timer);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Configure hook:
+ *
+ * @@@ TODO: deal with [$pb configure -value ... -variable ...]
+ */
+static int ProgressbarConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *varName = pb->progress.variableObj;
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *vt = 0;
+
+    if (varName != NULL && *Tcl_GetString(varName) != '\0') {
+	vt = Ttk_TraceVariable(interp, varName, VariableChanged, recordPtr);
+	if (!vt) return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (TtkCoreConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (vt) Ttk_UntraceVariable(vt);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (pb->progress.variableTrace) {
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(pb->progress.variableTrace);
+    }
+    pb->progress.variableTrace = vt;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Post-configuration hook:
+ */
+static int ProgressbarPostConfigure(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (pb->progress.variableTrace) {
+	status = Ttk_FireTrace(pb->progress.variableTrace);
+	if (WidgetDestroyed(&pb->core)) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (status != TCL_OK) {
+	    /* Unset -variable: */
+	    Ttk_UntraceVariable(pb->progress.variableTrace);
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(pb->progress.variableObj);
+	    pb->progress.variableTrace = 0;
+	    pb->progress.variableObj = NULL;
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    CheckAnimation(pb);
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Size hook:
+ * 	Compute base layout size, overrid
+ */
+static int ProgressbarSize(void *recordPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    int length = 100, orient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+
+    TtkWidgetSize(recordPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+
+    /* Override requested width (height) based on -length and -orient
+     */
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, pb->core.tkwin, pb->progress.lengthObj, &length);
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.orientObj, &orient);
+
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	*widthPtr = length;
+    } else {
+	*heightPtr = length;
+    }
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Layout hook:
+ * 	Adjust size and position of pbar element, if present.
+ */
+
+static void ProgressbarDeterminateLayout(
+    Progressbar *pb,
+    Ttk_Element pbar,
+    Ttk_Box parcel,
+    double fraction,
+    Ttk_Orient orient)
+{
+    if (fraction < 0.0) fraction = 0.0;
+    if (fraction > 1.0) fraction = 1.0;
+
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	parcel.width = (int)(parcel.width * fraction);
+    } else {
+	int newHeight = (int)(parcel.height * fraction);
+	parcel.y += (parcel.height - newHeight);
+	parcel.height = newHeight;
+    }
+    Ttk_PlaceElement(pb->core.layout, pbar, parcel);
+}
+
+static void ProgressbarIndeterminateLayout(
+    Progressbar *pb,
+    Ttk_Element pbar,
+    Ttk_Box parcel,
+    double fraction,
+    Ttk_Orient orient)
+{
+    Ttk_Box pbarBox = Ttk_ElementParcel(pbar);
+
+    fraction = fmod(fabs(fraction), 2.0);
+    if (fraction > 1.0) {
+	fraction = 2.0 - fraction;
+    }
+
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	pbarBox.x = parcel.x + (int)(fraction * (parcel.width-pbarBox.width));
+    } else {
+	pbarBox.y = parcel.y + (int)(fraction * (parcel.height-pbarBox.height));
+    }
+    Ttk_PlaceElement(pb->core.layout, pbar, pbarBox);
+}
+
+static void ProgressbarDoLayout(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &pb->core;
+    Ttk_Element pbar = Ttk_FindElement(corePtr->layout, "pbar");
+    double value = 0.0, maximum = 100.0;
+    int orient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout,corePtr->state,Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin));
+
+    /* Adjust the bar size:
+     */
+
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.valueObj, &value);
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.maximumObj, &maximum);
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.orientObj, &orient);
+
+    if (pbar) {
+	double fraction = value / maximum;
+	Ttk_Box parcel = Ttk_ClientRegion(corePtr->layout, "trough");
+
+	if (pb->progress.mode == TTK_PROGRESSBAR_DETERMINATE) {
+	    ProgressbarDeterminateLayout(
+		pb, pbar, parcel, fraction, orient);
+	} else {
+	    ProgressbarIndeterminateLayout(
+		pb, pbar, parcel, fraction, orient);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_Layout ProgressbarGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme theme, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Layout layout = TtkWidgetGetOrientedLayout(
+	interp, theme, recordPtr, pb->progress.orientObj);
+
+    /*
+     * Check if the style supports animation:
+     */
+    pb->progress.period = 0;
+    pb->progress.maxPhase = 0;
+    if (layout) {
+	Tcl_Obj *periodObj = Ttk_QueryOption(layout,"-period", 0);
+	Tcl_Obj *maxPhaseObj = Ttk_QueryOption(layout,"-maxphase", 0);
+	if (periodObj)
+	    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, periodObj, &pb->progress.period);
+	if (maxPhaseObj)
+	    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, maxPhaseObj, &pb->progress.maxPhase);
+    }
+
+    return layout;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands:
+ */
+
+/* $sb step ?amount?
+ */
+static int ProgressbarStepCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    double value = 0.0, stepAmount = 1.0;
+    Tcl_Obj *newValueObj; 
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &stepAmount) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    } else if (objc != 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "?stepAmount?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    (void)Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.valueObj, &value);
+    value += stepAmount;
+
+    /* In determinate mode, wrap around if value exceeds maximum:
+     */
+    if (pb->progress.mode == TTK_PROGRESSBAR_DETERMINATE) {
+	double maximum = 100.0;
+	(void)Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.maximumObj, &maximum);
+	value = fmod(value, maximum);
+    }
+
+    newValueObj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value);
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&pb->core);
+
+    /* Update value by setting the linked -variable, if there is one: 
+     */
+    if (pb->progress.variableTrace) {
+	return Tcl_ObjSetVar2(
+		    interp, pb->progress.variableObj, 0, newValueObj,
+		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY | TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
+	    ? TCL_OK : TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Otherwise, change the -value directly:
+     */
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(newValueObj);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(pb->progress.valueObj);
+    pb->progress.valueObj = newValueObj;
+    CheckAnimation(pb);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $sb start|stop ?args? --
+ * Change [$sb $cmd ...] to [ttk::progressbar::$cmd ...] 
+ * and pass to interpreter.
+ */
+static int ProgressbarStartStopCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *cmdName, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *cmd = Tcl_NewListObj(objc, objv);
+    Tcl_Obj *prefix[2];
+    int status;
+
+    /* ASSERT: objc >= 2 */
+
+    prefix[0] = Tcl_NewStringObj(cmdName, -1);
+    prefix[1] = objv[0];
+    Tcl_ListObjReplace(interp, cmd, 0,2, 2,prefix);
+
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(cmd);
+    status = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, cmd, 0);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(cmd);
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+static int ProgressbarStartCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    return ProgressbarStartStopCommand(
+	interp, "::ttk::progressbar::start", objc, objv);
+}
+
+static int ProgressbarStopCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    return ProgressbarStartStopCommand(
+	interp, "::ttk::progressbar::stop", objc, objv);
+}
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble ProgressbarCommands[] = {
+    { "configure",	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "start", 		ProgressbarStartCommand,0 },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { "step", 		ProgressbarStepCommand,0 },
+    { "stop", 		ProgressbarStopCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+/*
+ * Widget specification:
+ */
+static WidgetSpec ProgressbarWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TProgressbar",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Progressbar),	/* recordSize */
+    ProgressbarOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    ProgressbarCommands,	/* subcommands */
+    ProgressbarInitialize,	/* initializeProc */
+    ProgressbarCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    ProgressbarConfigure,	/* configureProc */
+    ProgressbarPostConfigure,	/* postConfigureProc */
+    ProgressbarGetLayout,	/* getLayoutProc */
+    ProgressbarSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    ProgressbarDoLayout,	/* layoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Layouts:
+ */
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(VerticalProgressbarLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Vertical.Progressbar.trough", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Vertical.Progressbar.pbar", TTK_PACK_BOTTOM|TTK_FILL_X))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(HorizontalProgressbarLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Horizontal.Progressbar.trough", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Horizontal.Progressbar.pbar", TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_FILL_Y))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*
+ * Initialization:
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE
+void TtkProgressbar_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr = Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr,
+	"Vertical.TProgressbar", VerticalProgressbarLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr,
+	"Horizontal.TProgressbar", HorizontalProgressbarLayout);
+
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::progressbar", &ProgressbarWidgetSpec);
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkScale.c b/generic/ttk/ttkScale.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..69753d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkScale.c
@@ -0,0 +1,515 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2004 Pat Thoyts <patthoyts@users.sourceforge.net>
+ *
+ * ttk::scale widget.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+#define DEF_SCALE_LENGTH "100"
+
+#define MAX(a,b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b))
+#define MIN(a,b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b))
+
+/*
+ * Scale widget record
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    /* slider element options */
+    Tcl_Obj *fromObj;         /* minimum value */
+    Tcl_Obj *toObj;           /* maximum value */
+    Tcl_Obj *valueObj;        /* current value */
+    Tcl_Obj *lengthObj;       /* length of the long axis of the scale */
+    Tcl_Obj *orientObj;       /* widget orientation */
+    int orient;
+
+    /* widget options */
+    Tcl_Obj *commandObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *variableObj;
+
+    /* internal state */
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *variableTrace;
+
+} ScalePart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    ScalePart  scale;
+} Scale;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec ScaleOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command", "",
+	Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.commandObj), -1, 
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable", "",
+	Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.variableObj), -1, 
+	0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-orient", "orient", "Orient", "horizontal",
+	Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.orientObj),
+	Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.orient), 0, 
+	(ClientData)ttkOrientStrings, STYLE_CHANGED },
+
+    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-from", "from", "From", "0",
+	Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.fromObj), -1, 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-to", "to", "To", "1.0",
+	Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.toObj), -1, 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-value", "value", "Value", "0",
+	Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.valueObj), -1, 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-length", "length", "Length",
+	DEF_SCALE_LENGTH, Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.lengthObj), -1, 0, 0, 
+    	GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_TRUE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(ttkCoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+static XPoint ValueToPoint(Scale *scalePtr, double value);
+static double PointToValue(Scale *scalePtr, int x, int y);
+
+/* ScaleVariableChanged --
+ * 	Variable trace procedure for scale -variable;
+ * 	Updates the scale's value.
+ * 	If the linked variable is not a valid double, 
+ * 	sets the 'invalid' state.
+ */
+static void ScaleVariableChanged(void *recordPtr, const char *value)
+{
+    Scale *scale = recordPtr;
+    double v;
+
+    if (value == NULL || Tcl_GetDouble(0, value, &v) != TCL_OK) {
+	TtkWidgetChangeState(&scale->core, TTK_STATE_INVALID, 0);
+    } else {
+	Tcl_Obj *valueObj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(v);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(valueObj);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(scale->scale.valueObj);
+	scale->scale.valueObj = valueObj;
+	TtkWidgetChangeState(&scale->core, 0, TTK_STATE_INVALID);
+    }
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&scale->core);
+}
+
+/* ScaleInitialize --
+ * 	Scale widget initialization hook.
+ */
+static void ScaleInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scale *scalePtr = recordPtr;
+    TtkTrackElementState(&scalePtr->core);
+}
+
+static void ScaleCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scale *scale = recordPtr;
+
+    if (scale->scale.variableTrace) {
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(scale->scale.variableTrace);
+	scale->scale.variableTrace = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+/* ScaleConfigure --
+ * 	Configuration hook.
+ */
+static int ScaleConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Scale *scale = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *varName = scale->scale.variableObj;
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *vt = 0;
+
+    if (varName != NULL && *Tcl_GetString(varName) != '\0') {
+	vt = Ttk_TraceVariable(interp,varName, ScaleVariableChanged,recordPtr);
+	if (!vt) return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (TtkCoreConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (vt) Ttk_UntraceVariable(vt);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (scale->scale.variableTrace) {
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(scale->scale.variableTrace);
+    }
+    scale->scale.variableTrace = vt;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* ScalePostConfigure --
+ * 	Post-configuration hook.
+ */
+static int ScalePostConfigure(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Scale *scale = recordPtr;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (scale->scale.variableTrace) {
+	status = Ttk_FireTrace(scale->scale.variableTrace);
+	if (WidgetDestroyed(&scale->core)) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (status != TCL_OK) {
+	    /* Unset -variable: */
+	    Ttk_UntraceVariable(scale->scale.variableTrace);
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(scale->scale.variableObj);
+	    scale->scale.variableTrace = 0;
+	    scale->scale.variableObj = NULL;
+	    status = TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/* ScaleGetLayout --
+ *	getLayout hook.
+ */
+static Ttk_Layout 
+ScaleGetLayout(Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme theme, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scale *scalePtr = recordPtr;
+    return TtkWidgetGetOrientedLayout(
+	interp, theme, recordPtr, scalePtr->scale.orientObj);
+}
+
+/*
+ * TroughBox --
+ * 	Returns the inner area of the trough element.
+ */
+static Ttk_Box TroughBox(Scale *scalePtr)
+{
+    return Ttk_ClientRegion(scalePtr->core.layout, "trough");
+}
+
+/*
+ * TroughRange --
+ * 	Return the value area of the trough element, adjusted
+ * 	for slider size.
+ */
+static Ttk_Box TroughRange(Scale *scalePtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Box troughBox = TroughBox(scalePtr);
+    Ttk_Element slider = Ttk_FindElement(scalePtr->core.layout,"slider");
+
+    /*
+     * If this is a scale widget, adjust range for slider:
+     */
+    if (slider) {
+	Ttk_Box sliderBox = Ttk_ElementParcel(slider);
+	if (scalePtr->scale.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	    troughBox.x += sliderBox.width / 2;
+	    troughBox.width -= sliderBox.width;
+	} else {
+	    troughBox.y += sliderBox.height / 2;
+	    troughBox.height -= sliderBox.height;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return troughBox;
+}
+
+/*
+ * ScaleFraction --
+ */
+static double ScaleFraction(Scale *scalePtr, double value)
+{
+    double from = 0, to = 1, fraction;
+
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, scalePtr->scale.fromObj, &from);
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, scalePtr->scale.toObj, &to);
+
+    if (from == to) {
+	return 1.0;
+    }
+
+    fraction = (value - from) / (to - from);
+
+    return fraction < 0 ? 0 : fraction > 1 ? 1 : fraction;
+}
+
+/* $scale get ?x y? --
+ * 	Returns the current value of the scale widget, or if $x and 
+ * 	$y are specified, the value represented by point @x,y.
+ */
+static int
+ScaleGetCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Scale *scalePtr = recordPtr;
+    int x, y, r = TCL_OK;
+    double value = 0;
+
+    if ((objc != 2) && (objc != 4)) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "get ?x y?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, scalePtr->scale.valueObj);
+    } else {
+	r = Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x);
+	if (r == TCL_OK)
+	    r = Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y);
+	if (r == TCL_OK) {
+	    value = PointToValue(scalePtr, x, y);
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value));
+	}
+    }
+    return r;
+}
+
+/* $scale set $newValue
+ */
+static int
+ScaleSetCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Scale *scalePtr = recordPtr;
+    double from = 0.0, to = 1.0, value;
+    int result = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "set value");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &value) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (scalePtr->core.state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /* ASSERT: fromObj and toObj are valid doubles.
+     */
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, scalePtr->scale.fromObj, &from);
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, scalePtr->scale.toObj, &to);
+
+    /* Limit new value to between 'from' and 'to':
+     */
+    if (from < to) {
+	value = value < from ? from : value > to ? to : value;
+    } else {
+	value = value < to ? to : value > from ? from : value;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Set value:
+     */
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(scalePtr->scale.valueObj);
+    scalePtr->scale.valueObj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value);
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(scalePtr->scale.valueObj);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&scalePtr->core);
+
+    /*
+     * Set attached variable, if any:
+     */
+    if (scalePtr->scale.variableObj != NULL) {
+	Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, scalePtr->scale.variableObj, NULL,
+	    scalePtr->scale.valueObj, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    }
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(&scalePtr->core)) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Invoke -command, if any:
+     */
+    if (scalePtr->scale.commandObj != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *cmdObj = Tcl_DuplicateObj(scalePtr->scale.commandObj);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(cmdObj);
+	Tcl_AppendToObj(cmdObj, " ", 1);
+	Tcl_AppendObjToObj(cmdObj, scalePtr->scale.valueObj);
+	result = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, cmdObj, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(cmdObj);
+    }
+
+    return result;
+}
+
+static int
+ScaleCoordsCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Scale *scalePtr = recordPtr;
+    double value;
+    int r = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (objc < 2 || objc > 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "coords ?value?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	r = Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &value);
+    } else {
+	r = Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, scalePtr->scale.valueObj, &value);
+    }
+
+    if (r == TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_Obj *point[2];
+	XPoint pt = ValueToPoint(scalePtr, value);
+	point[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pt.x);
+	point[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pt.y);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(2, point));
+    }
+    return r;
+}
+
+static void ScaleDoLayout(void *clientData)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_Element slider = Ttk_FindElement(corePtr->layout, "slider");
+
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout,corePtr->state,Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin));
+
+    /* Adjust the slider position:
+     */
+    if (slider) {
+	Scale *scalePtr = clientData;
+	Ttk_Box troughBox = TroughBox(scalePtr);
+	Ttk_Box sliderBox = Ttk_ElementParcel(slider);
+	double value = 0.0;
+	double fraction;
+	int range;
+
+	Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, scalePtr->scale.valueObj, &value);
+	fraction = ScaleFraction(scalePtr, value);
+
+	if (scalePtr->scale.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	    range = troughBox.width - sliderBox.width;
+	    sliderBox.x += (int)(fraction * range);
+	} else {
+	    range = troughBox.height - sliderBox.height;
+	    sliderBox.y += (int)(fraction * range);
+	}
+	Ttk_PlaceElement(corePtr->layout, slider, sliderBox);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * ScaleSize --
+ * 	Compute requested size of scale.
+ */
+static int ScaleSize(void *clientData, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = clientData;
+    Scale *scalePtr = clientData;
+    int length;
+
+    Ttk_LayoutSize(corePtr->layout, corePtr->state, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+
+    /* Assert the -length configuration option */
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, corePtr->tkwin,
+	    scalePtr->scale.lengthObj, &length);
+    if (scalePtr->scale.orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	*heightPtr = MAX(*heightPtr, length);
+    } else {
+	*widthPtr = MAX(*widthPtr, length);
+    }
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+static double
+PointToValue(Scale *scalePtr, int x, int y)
+{
+    Ttk_Box troughBox = TroughRange(scalePtr);
+    double from = 0, to = 1, fraction;
+
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, scalePtr->scale.fromObj, &from);
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, scalePtr->scale.toObj, &to);
+
+    if (scalePtr->scale.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	fraction = (double)(x - troughBox.x) / (double)troughBox.width;
+    } else {
+	fraction = (double)(y - troughBox.y) / (double)troughBox.height;
+    }
+
+    fraction = fraction < 0 ? 0 : fraction > 1 ? 1 : fraction;
+
+    return from + fraction * (to-from);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Return the center point in the widget corresponding to the given
+ * value. This point can be used to center the slider.
+ */
+
+static XPoint
+ValueToPoint(Scale *scalePtr, double value)
+{
+    Ttk_Box troughBox = TroughRange(scalePtr);
+    double fraction = ScaleFraction(scalePtr, value);
+    XPoint pt = {0, 0};
+
+    if (scalePtr->scale.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	pt.x = troughBox.x + (int)(fraction * troughBox.width);
+	pt.y = troughBox.y + troughBox.height / 2;
+    } else {
+	pt.x = troughBox.x + troughBox.width / 2;
+	pt.y = troughBox.y + (int)(fraction * troughBox.height);
+    }
+    return pt;
+}
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble ScaleCommands[] = {
+    { "configure",   TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",        TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "state",       TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",     TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",    TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { "set",         ScaleSetCommand,0 },
+    { "get",         ScaleGetCommand,0 },
+    { "coords",      ScaleCoordsCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+static WidgetSpec ScaleWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TScale",			/* Class name */
+    sizeof(Scale),		/* record size */
+    ScaleOptionSpecs,		/* option specs */
+    ScaleCommands,		/* widget commands */
+    ScaleInitialize,		/* initialization proc */
+    ScaleCleanup,		/* cleanup proc */
+    ScaleConfigure,		/* configure proc */
+    ScalePostConfigure,		/* postConfigure */
+    ScaleGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    ScaleSize,			/* sizeProc */
+    ScaleDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(VerticalScaleLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Vertical.Scale.trough", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Vertical.Scale.slider", TTK_PACK_TOP) )
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(HorizontalScaleLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Horizontal.Scale.trough", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Horizontal.Scale.slider", TTK_PACK_LEFT) )
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*
+ * Initialization.
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE
+void TtkScale_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme = Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "Vertical.TScale", VerticalScaleLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "Horizontal.TScale", HorizontalScaleLayout);
+
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::scale", &ScaleWidgetSpec);
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkScroll.c b/generic/ttk/ttkScroll.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..defe05a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkScroll.c
@@ -0,0 +1,252 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * Support routines for scrollable widgets.
+ *
+ * (This is sort of half-baked; needs some work)
+ *
+ * Scrollable interface:
+ *
+ * 	+ 'first' is controlled by [xy]view widget command 
+ * 	  and other scrolling commands like 'see';
+ *      + 'total' depends on widget contents;
+ *      + 'last' depends on first, total, and widget size.
+ *
+ * Choreography (typical usage):
+ *
+ * 	1. User adjusts scrollbar, scrollbar widget calls its -command
+ * 	2. Scrollbar -command invokes the scrollee [xy]view widget method
+ * 	3. TtkScrollviewCommand calls TtkScrollTo(), which updates 
+ * 	   'first' and schedules a redisplay.
+ * 	4. Once the scrollee knows 'total' and 'last' (typically in 
+ * 	   the LayoutProc), call TtkScrolled(h,first,last,total) to 
+ * 	   synchronize the scrollbar.
+ * 	5. The scrollee -[xy]scrollcommand is called (in an idle callback)
+ * 	6. Which calls the scrollbar 'set' method and redisplays the scrollbar.
+ *
+ * If the scrollee has internal scrolling (e.g., a 'see' method), 
+ * it should TtkScrollTo() directly (step 2).
+ *
+ * If the widget value changes, it should call TtkScrolled() (step 4).
+ * (This usually happens automatically when the widget is redisplayed).
+ *
+ * If the scrollee's -[xy]scrollcommand changes, it should call
+ * TtkScrollbarUpdateRequired, which will invoke step (5) (@@@ Fix this)
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/* Private data:
+ */
+#define SCROLL_UPDATE_PENDING  (0x1)
+#define SCROLL_UPDATE_REQUIRED (0x2)
+
+struct ScrollHandleRec
+{
+    unsigned 	flags;
+    WidgetCore	*corePtr;
+    Scrollable	*scrollPtr;
+};
+
+/* TtkCreateScrollHandle --
+ * 	Initialize scroll handle.
+ */
+ScrollHandle TtkCreateScrollHandle(WidgetCore *corePtr, Scrollable *scrollPtr)
+{
+    ScrollHandle h = (ScrollHandle)ckalloc(sizeof(*h));
+
+    h->flags = 0;
+    h->corePtr = corePtr;
+    h->scrollPtr = scrollPtr;
+
+    scrollPtr->first = 0;
+    scrollPtr->last = 1;
+    scrollPtr->total = 1;
+    return h;
+}
+
+/* UpdateScrollbar --
+ *	Call the -scrollcommand callback to sync the scrollbar.
+ * 	Returns: Whatever the -scrollcommand does.
+ */
+static int UpdateScrollbar(Tcl_Interp *interp, ScrollHandle h)
+{
+    Scrollable *s = h->scrollPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = h->corePtr;
+    char arg1[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE + 2];
+    char arg2[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE + 2];
+    int code;
+
+    h->flags &= ~SCROLL_UPDATE_REQUIRED;
+
+    if (s->scrollCmd == NULL) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    arg1[0] = arg2[0] = ' ';
+    Tcl_PrintDouble(interp, (double)s->first / s->total, arg1+1);
+    Tcl_PrintDouble(interp, (double)s->last / s->total, arg2+1);
+
+    Tcl_Preserve(corePtr);
+    code = Tcl_VarEval(interp, s->scrollCmd, arg1, arg2, NULL);
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(corePtr)) {
+	Tcl_Release(corePtr);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_Release(corePtr);
+
+    if (code != TCL_OK && !Tcl_InterpDeleted(interp)) {
+	/* Disable the -scrollcommand, add to stack trace:
+	 */
+	ckfree(s->scrollCmd);
+	s->scrollCmd = 0;
+
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, /* @@@ "horizontal" / "vertical" */
+		"\n    (scrolling command executed by ");
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, Tk_PathName(h->corePtr->tkwin));
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, ")");
+    }
+    return code;
+}
+
+/* UpdateScrollbarBG --
+ * 	Idle handler to update the scrollbar.
+ */
+static void UpdateScrollbarBG(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    ScrollHandle h = (ScrollHandle)clientData;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp = h->corePtr->interp;
+    int code;
+
+    h->flags &= ~SCROLL_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
+    code = UpdateScrollbar(interp, h);
+    if (code == TCL_ERROR && !Tcl_InterpDeleted(interp)) {
+	Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+    }
+    Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+}
+
+/* TtkScrolled --
+ * 	Update scroll info, schedule scrollbar update.
+ */
+void TtkScrolled(ScrollHandle h, int first, int last, int total)
+{
+    Scrollable *s = h->scrollPtr;
+    
+    /* Sanity-check inputs:
+     */
+    if (total <= 0) {
+	first = 0;
+	last = 1;
+	total = 1;
+    }
+
+    if (last > total) {
+	first -= (last - total);
+	if (first < 0) first = 0;
+	last = total;
+    }
+
+    if (s->first != first || s->last != last || s->total != total
+	    || (h->flags & SCROLL_UPDATE_REQUIRED))
+    {
+	s->first = first;
+	s->last = last;
+	s->total = total;
+
+	if (!(h->flags & SCROLL_UPDATE_PENDING)) {
+	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateScrollbarBG, (ClientData)h);
+	    h->flags |= SCROLL_UPDATE_PENDING;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/* TtkScrollbarUpdateRequired --
+ * 	Force a scrollbar update at the next call to TtkScrolled(),
+ * 	even if scroll parameters haven't changed (e.g., if
+ * 	-yscrollcommand has changed).
+ */
+
+void TtkScrollbarUpdateRequired(ScrollHandle h)
+{
+    h->flags |= SCROLL_UPDATE_REQUIRED;
+}
+
+/* TtkScrollviewCommand --
+ * 	Widget [xy]view command implementation.
+ *
+ *  $w [xy]view -- return current view region
+ *  $w [xy]view $index -- set topmost item
+ *  $w [xy]view moveto $fraction
+ *  $w [xy]view scroll $number $what -- scrollbar interface
+ */
+int TtkScrollviewCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], ScrollHandle h)
+{
+    Scrollable *s = h->scrollPtr;
+    int newFirst = s->first;
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	Tcl_Obj *result[2];
+	result[0] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj((double)s->first / s->total);
+	result[1] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj((double)s->last / s->total);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(2, result));
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc == 3) {
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &newFirst) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    } else {
+	double fraction;
+	int count;
+
+	switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction, &count)) {
+	    case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
+		newFirst = (int) ((fraction * s->total) + 0.5);
+		break;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
+		newFirst = s->first + count;
+		break;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: {
+		int perPage = s->last - s->first;	/* @@@ */
+		newFirst = s->first + count * perPage;
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    TtkScrollTo(h, newFirst);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void TtkScrollTo(ScrollHandle h, int newFirst)
+{
+    Scrollable *s = h->scrollPtr;
+
+    if (newFirst >= s->total)
+	newFirst = s->total - 1;
+    if (newFirst > s->first && s->last >= s->total) /* don't scroll past end */
+	newFirst = s->first;
+    if (newFirst < 0)
+	newFirst = 0;
+
+    if (newFirst != s->first) {
+	s->first = newFirst;
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(h->corePtr);
+    }
+}
+
+void TtkFreeScrollHandle(ScrollHandle h)
+{
+    if (h->flags & SCROLL_UPDATE_PENDING) {
+	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(UpdateScrollbarBG, (ClientData)h);
+    }
+    ckfree((ClientData)h);
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkScrollbar.c b/generic/ttk/ttkScrollbar.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b0c212
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkScrollbar.c
@@ -0,0 +1,345 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2003, Joe English
+ *
+ * ttk::scrollbar widget.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Scrollbar widget record.
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj	*commandObj;
+
+    int 	orient;
+    Tcl_Obj	*orientObj;
+
+    double	first;			/* top fraction */
+    double	last;			/* bottom fraction */
+
+    Ttk_Box	troughBox;		/* trough parcel */ 
+    int 	minSize;		/* minimum size of thumb */
+} ScrollbarPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    ScrollbarPart scrollbar;
+} Scrollbar;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec ScrollbarOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command", "",
+	Tk_Offset(Scrollbar,scrollbar.commandObj), -1, 0,0,0},
+
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-orient", "orient", "Orient", "vertical",
+	Tk_Offset(Scrollbar,scrollbar.orientObj),
+	Tk_Offset(Scrollbar,scrollbar.orient),
+	0,(ClientData)ttkOrientStrings,STYLE_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_FALSE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(ttkCoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget hooks.
+ */
+
+static void 
+ScrollbarInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scrollbar *sb = recordPtr;
+    sb->scrollbar.first = 0.0;
+    sb->scrollbar.last = 1.0;
+
+    TtkTrackElementState(&sb->core);
+}
+
+static Ttk_Layout ScrollbarGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme theme, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scrollbar *sb = recordPtr;
+    return TtkWidgetGetOrientedLayout(
+	interp, theme, recordPtr, sb->scrollbar.orientObj);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ScrollbarDoLayout --
+ * 	Layout hook.  Adjusts the position of the scrollbar thumb.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ * 	Sets sb->troughBox and sb->minSize.
+ */
+static void ScrollbarDoLayout(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scrollbar *sb = recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &sb->core;
+    Ttk_Element thumb;
+    Ttk_Box thumbBox;
+    int thumbWidth, thumbHeight;
+    double first, last, size;
+    int minSize;
+
+    /*
+     * Use generic layout manager to compute initial layout:
+     */
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout,corePtr->state,Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin));
+
+    /*
+     * Locate thumb element, extract parcel and requested minimum size:
+     */
+    thumb = Ttk_FindElement(corePtr->layout, "thumb");
+    if (!thumb)	/* Something has gone wrong -- bail */
+	return;
+
+    sb->scrollbar.troughBox = thumbBox = Ttk_ElementParcel(thumb);
+    Ttk_LayoutNodeReqSize(
+	corePtr->layout, thumb, &thumbWidth,&thumbHeight);
+
+    /*
+     * Adjust thumb element parcel:
+     */
+    first = sb->scrollbar.first;
+    last  = sb->scrollbar.last;
+
+    if (sb->scrollbar.orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	minSize = thumbHeight;
+	size = thumbBox.height - minSize;
+	thumbBox.y += (int)(size * first);
+	thumbBox.height = (int)(size * last) + minSize - (int)(size * first);
+    } else {
+	minSize = thumbWidth;
+	size = thumbBox.width - minSize;
+	thumbBox.x += (int)(size * first);
+	thumbBox.width = (int)(size * last) + minSize - (int)(size * first);
+    }
+    sb->scrollbar.minSize = minSize;
+    Ttk_PlaceElement(corePtr->layout, thumb, thumbBox);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands.
+ */
+
+/* $sb set $first $last --
+ * 	Set the position of the scrollbar.
+ */
+static int
+ScrollbarSetCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Scrollbar *scrollbar = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *firstObj, *lastObj;
+    double first, last;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "first last");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    firstObj = objv[2];
+    lastObj = objv[3];
+    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, firstObj, &first) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, lastObj, &last) != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    /* Range-checks:
+     */
+    if (first < 0.0) {
+	first = 0.0;
+    } else if (first > 1.0) {
+	first = 1.0;
+    }
+
+    if (last < first) {
+	last = first;
+    } else if (last > 1.0) {
+	last = 1.0;
+    }
+
+    /* ASSERT: 0.0 <= first <= last <= 1.0 */
+
+    scrollbar->scrollbar.first = first;
+    scrollbar->scrollbar.last = last;
+    if (first <= 0.0 && last >= 1.0) {
+	scrollbar->core.state |= TTK_STATE_DISABLED;
+    } else {
+	scrollbar->core.state &= ~TTK_STATE_DISABLED;
+    }
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&scrollbar->core);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $sb get --
+ * 	Returns the last thing passed to 'set'.
+ */
+static int
+ScrollbarGetCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Scrollbar *scrollbar = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *result[2];
+
+    if (objc != 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    result[0] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(scrollbar->scrollbar.first);
+    result[1] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(scrollbar->scrollbar.last);
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(2, result));
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $sb delta $dx $dy --
+ * 	Returns the percentage change corresponding to a mouse movement
+ * 	of $dx, $dy.
+ */
+static int
+ScrollbarDeltaCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Scrollbar *sb = recordPtr;
+    double dx, dy;
+    double delta = 0.0;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "dx dy");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &dx) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[3], &dy) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    delta = 0.0;
+    if (sb->scrollbar.orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	int size = sb->scrollbar.troughBox.height - sb->scrollbar.minSize;
+	if (size > 0) {
+	    delta = (double)dy / (double)size;
+	}
+    } else {
+	int size = sb->scrollbar.troughBox.width - sb->scrollbar.minSize;
+	if (size > 0) {
+	    delta = (double)dx / (double)size;
+	}
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(delta));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $sb fraction $x $y --
+ * 	Returns a real number between 0 and 1 indicating  where  the
+ * 	point given by x and y lies in the trough area of the scrollbar. 
+ */
+static int
+ScrollbarFractionCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Scrollbar *sb = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Box b = sb->scrollbar.troughBox;
+    int minSize = sb->scrollbar.minSize;
+    double x, y;
+    double fraction = 0.0;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "x y");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    fraction = 0.0;
+    if (sb->scrollbar.orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	if (b.height > minSize) {
+	    fraction = (double)(y - b.y) / (double)(b.height - minSize);
+	}
+    } else {
+	if (b.width > minSize) {
+	    fraction = (double)(x - b.x) / (double)(b.width - minSize);
+	}
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(fraction));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble ScrollbarCommands[] = {
+    { "configure",	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "delta",    	ScrollbarDeltaCommand,0 },
+    { "fraction",    	ScrollbarFractionCommand,0 },
+    { "get",    	ScrollbarGetCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "set",  		ScrollbarSetCommand,0 },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget specification.
+ */
+static WidgetSpec ScrollbarWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TScrollbar",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Scrollbar),		/* recordSize */
+    ScrollbarOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    ScrollbarCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    ScrollbarInitialize,	/* initializeProc */
+    TtkNullCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    TtkCoreConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    TtkNullPostConfigure,	/* postConfigureProc */
+    ScrollbarGetLayout,		/* getLayoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    ScrollbarDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(VerticalScrollbarLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Vertical.Scrollbar.trough", TTK_FILL_Y,
+	TTK_NODE("Vertical.Scrollbar.uparrow", TTK_PACK_TOP)
+	TTK_NODE("Vertical.Scrollbar.downarrow", TTK_PACK_BOTTOM)
+	TTK_NODE(
+	    "Vertical.Scrollbar.thumb", TTK_PACK_TOP|TTK_EXPAND|TTK_FILL_BOTH))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(HorizontalScrollbarLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Horizontal.Scrollbar.trough", TTK_FILL_X,
+	TTK_NODE("Horizontal.Scrollbar.leftarrow", TTK_PACK_LEFT)
+	TTK_NODE("Horizontal.Scrollbar.rightarrow", TTK_PACK_RIGHT)
+	TTK_NODE(
+	"Horizontal.Scrollbar.thumb", TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_EXPAND|TTK_FILL_BOTH))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization.
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE
+void TtkScrollbar_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme = Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme,"Vertical.TScrollbar",VerticalScrollbarLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme,"Horizontal.TScrollbar",HorizontalScrollbarLayout);
+
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::scrollbar", &ScrollbarWidgetSpec);
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkSeparator.c b/generic/ttk/ttkSeparator.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b52e6f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkSeparator.c
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * ttk::separator and ttk::sizegrip widgets.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/* +++ Separator widget record:
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj	*orientObj;
+    int 	orient;
+} SeparatorPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    SeparatorPart separator;
+} Separator;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec SeparatorOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-orient", "orient", "Orient", "horizontal",
+	Tk_Offset(Separator,separator.orientObj),
+	Tk_Offset(Separator,separator.orient),
+	0,(ClientData)ttkOrientStrings,STYLE_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_FALSE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(ttkCoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*
+ * GetLayout hook --
+ * 	Choose layout based on -orient option.
+ */
+static Ttk_Layout SeparatorGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme theme, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Separator *sep = recordPtr;
+    return TtkWidgetGetOrientedLayout(
+	interp, theme, recordPtr, sep->separator.orientObj);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Widget commands:
+ */
+static const Ttk_Ensemble SeparatorCommands[] = {
+    { "configure",	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+/*
+ * Widget specification:
+ */
+static WidgetSpec SeparatorWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TSeparator",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Separator),		/* recordSize */
+    SeparatorOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    SeparatorCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    TtkNullInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    TtkNullCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    TtkCoreConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    TtkNullPostConfigure,	/* postConfigureProc */
+    SeparatorGetLayout,		/* getLayoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    TtkWidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(SeparatorLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Separator.separator", TTK_FILL_BOTH)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/* +++ Sizegrip widget:
+ * 	Has no options or methods other than the standard ones.
+ */
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec SizegripOptionSpecs[] = {
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_FALSE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(ttkCoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble SizegripCommands[] = {
+    { "configure",	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+static WidgetSpec SizegripWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TSizegrip",		/* className */
+    sizeof(WidgetCore),		/* recordSize */
+    SizegripOptionSpecs, 	/* optionSpecs */
+    SizegripCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    TtkNullInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    TtkNullCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    TtkCoreConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    TtkNullPostConfigure,	/* postConfigureProc */
+    TtkWidgetGetLayout, 	/* getLayoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    TtkWidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(SizegripLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Sizegrip.sizegrip", TTK_PACK_BOTTOM|TTK_STICK_S|TTK_STICK_E)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/* +++ Initialization:
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE
+void TtkSeparator_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme = Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TSeparator", SeparatorLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TSizegrip", SizegripLayout);
+
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::separator", &SeparatorWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::sizegrip", &SizegripWidgetSpec);
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkSquare.c b/generic/ttk/ttkSquare.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d002f2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkSquare.c
@@ -0,0 +1,301 @@
+/* square.c - Copyright (C) 2004 Pat Thoyts <patthoyts@users.sourceforge.net>
+ *
+ * Minimal sample ttk widget.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+#if defined(TTK_SQUARE_WIDGET) || 1
+
+#ifndef DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH
+#define DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH "2"
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * First, we setup the widget record. The Ttk package provides a structure
+ * that contains standard widget data so it is only necessary to define
+ * a structure that holds the data required for our widget. We do this by
+ * defining a widget part and then specifying the widget record as the
+ * concatenation of the two structures.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *widthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *heightObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *foregroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *paddingObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *anchorObj;
+} SquarePart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    SquarePart square;
+} Square;
+
+/*
+ * Widget options.
+ *
+ * This structure is the same as the option specification structure used
+ * for Tk widgets. For each option we provide the type, name and options
+ * database name and class name and the position in the structure and
+ * default values. At the bottom we bring in the standard widget option
+ * defined for all widgets.
+ */
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec SquareOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
+     DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH, Tk_Offset(Square,square.borderWidthObj), -1,
+     0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
+     DEFAULT_BACKGROUND, Tk_Offset(Square,square.foregroundObj),
+     -1, 0, 0, 0},
+    
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width",
+     "50", Tk_Offset(Square,square.widthObj), -1, 0, 0,
+     GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height",
+     "50", Tk_Offset(Square,square.heightObj), -1, 0, 0,
+     GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-padding", "padding", "Pad", NULL,
+     Tk_Offset(Square,square.paddingObj), -1, 
+     TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    
+    {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
+     NULL, Tk_Offset(Square,square.reliefObj), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    
+    {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
+     NULL, Tk_Offset(Square,square.anchorObj), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_TRUE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(ttkCoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*
+ * Almost all of the widget functionality is handled by the default Ttk
+ * widget code and the contained element. The one thing that we must handle
+ * is the -anchor option which positions the square element within the parcel
+ * of space available for the widget.
+ * To do this we must find out the layout preferences for the square
+ * element and adjust its position within our region.
+ *
+ * Note that if we do not have a "square" elememt then just the default
+ * layout will be done. So if someone places a label element into the
+ * widget layout it will still be handled but the -anchor option will be
+ * passed onto the label element instead of handled here.
+ */
+
+static void
+SquareDoLayout(void *clientData)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = (WidgetCore *)clientData;
+    Ttk_Box winBox;
+    Ttk_Element squareNode;
+
+    squareNode = Ttk_FindElement(corePtr->layout, "square");
+    winBox = Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin);
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout, corePtr->state, winBox);
+
+    /*
+     * Adjust the position of the square element within the widget according
+     * to the -anchor option.
+     */
+
+    if (squareNode) {
+	Square *squarePtr = clientData;
+	Tk_Anchor anchor = TK_ANCHOR_CENTER;
+	Ttk_Box b;
+
+	b = Ttk_ElementParcel(squareNode);
+	if (squarePtr->square.anchorObj != NULL)
+	    Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->square.anchorObj, &anchor);
+	b = Ttk_AnchorBox(winBox, b.width, b.height, anchor);
+
+	Ttk_PlaceElement(corePtr->layout, squareNode, b);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Widget commands. A widget is impelemented as an ensemble and the
+ * subcommands are listed here. Ttk provides default implementations
+ * that are sufficient for our needs.
+ */
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble SquareCommands[] = {
+    { "configure",	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",	TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+/*
+ * The Widget specification structure holds all the implementation 
+ * information about this widget and this is what must be registered
+ * with Tk in the package initialization code (see bottom).
+ */
+
+static WidgetSpec SquareWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TSquare",			/* className */
+    sizeof(Square),		/* recordSize */
+    SquareOptionSpecs,		/* optionSpecs */
+    SquareCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    TtkNullInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    TtkNullCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    TtkCoreConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    TtkNullPostConfigure,		/* postConfigureProc */
+    TtkWidgetGetLayout,		/* getLayoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    SquareDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    TtkWidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/* ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 
+ * Square element
+ *
+ * In this section we demonstrate what is required to create a new themed
+ * element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *foregroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *widthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *heightObj;
+} SquareElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec SquareElementOptions[] = 
+{
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(SquareElement,borderObj),
+    	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(SquareElement,foregroundObj),
+    	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(SquareElement,borderWidthObj),
+    	DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(SquareElement,reliefObj),
+    	"raised" },
+    { "-width",  TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(SquareElement,widthObj), "20"},
+    { "-height", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(SquareElement,heightObj), "20"},
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+/*
+ * The element geometry function is called when the layout code wishes to
+ * find out how big this element wants to be. We must return our preferred
+ * size and padding information
+ */
+
+static void SquareElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    SquareElement *square = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 0;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, square->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, square->widthObj, widthPtr);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, square->heightObj, heightPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Draw the element in the box provided.
+ */
+
+static void SquareElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    SquareElement *square = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder foreground = NULL;
+    int borderWidth = 1, relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+
+    foreground = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, square->foregroundObj);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, square->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, square->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, foreground,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SquareElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SquareElement),
+    SquareElementOptions,
+    SquareElementSize,
+    SquareElementDraw
+};
+
+/* ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Layout section.
+ *
+ * Every widget class needs a layout style that specifies which elements
+ * are part of the widget and how they should be placed. The element layout
+ * engine is similar to the Tk pack geometry manager. Read the documentation
+ * for the details. In this example we just need to have the square element
+ * that has been defined for this widget placed on a background. We will
+ * also need some padding to keep it away from the edges. 
+ */
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(SquareLayout)
+     TTK_NODE("Square.background", TTK_FILL_BOTH)
+     TTK_GROUP("Square.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	 TTK_NODE("Square.square", 0))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/* ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 
+ *
+ * Widget initialization.
+ *
+ * This file defines a new element and a new widget. We need to register
+ * the element with the themes that will need it. In this case we will 
+ * register with the default theme that is the root of the theme inheritance
+ * tree. This means all themes will find this element.
+ * We then need to register the widget class style. This is the layout
+ * specification. If a different theme requires an alternative layout, we
+ * could register that here. For instance, in some themes the scrollbars have
+ * one uparrow, in other themes there are two uparrow elements.
+ * Finally we register the widget itself. This step creates a tcl command so
+ * that we can actually create an instance of this class. The widget is
+ * linked to a particular style by the widget class name. This is important
+ * to realise as the programmer may change the classname when creating a
+ * new instance. If this is done, a new layout will need to be created (which
+ * can be done at script level). Some widgets may require particular elements
+ * to be present but we try to avoid this where possible. In this widget's C
+ * code, no reference is made to any particular elements. The programmer is
+ * free to specify a new style using completely different elements.
+ */
+
+/* public */ MODULE_SCOPE int
+TtkSquareWidget_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme = Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    /* register the new elements for this theme engine */
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "square", &SquareElementSpec, NULL);
+    
+    /* register the layout for this theme */
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TSquare", SquareLayout);
+    
+    /* register the widget */
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::square", &SquareWidgetSpec);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+#endif /* TTK_SQUARE_WIDGET */
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkState.c b/generic/ttk/ttkState.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a71ae21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkState.c
@@ -0,0 +1,273 @@
+/*
+ * Tk widget state utilities.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2003 Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+/*
+ * Table of state names.  Must be kept in sync with TTK_STATE_*
+ * #defines in ttkTheme.h.
+ */
+static const char *const stateNames[] =
+{
+    "active",		/* Mouse cursor is over widget or element */
+    "disabled",		/* Widget is disabled */
+    "focus",		/* Widget has keyboard focus */
+    "pressed",		/* Pressed or "armed" */
+    "selected",		/* "on", "true", "current", etc. */
+    "background",	/* Top-level window lost focus (Mac,Win "inactive") */
+    "alternate",	/* Widget-specific alternate display style */
+    "invalid",		/* Bad value */
+    "readonly",		/* Editing/modification disabled */
+    "hover",		/* Mouse cursor is over widget */
+    "reserved1",	/* Reserved for future extension */
+    "reserved2",	/* Reserved for future extension */
+    "reserved3",	/* Reserved for future extension */
+    "user3",		/* User-definable state */
+    "user2",		/* User-definable state */
+    "user1",		/* User-definable state */
+    NULL
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ StateSpec object type:
+ *
+ * The string representation consists of a list of state names,
+ * each optionally prefixed by an exclamation point (!).
+ *
+ * The internal representation uses the upper half of the longValue
+ * to store the on bits and the lower half to store the off bits.
+ * If we ever get more than 16 states, this will need to be reconsidered...
+ */
+
+static int  StateSpecSetFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *obj);
+/* static void StateSpecFreeIntRep(Tcl_Obj *); */
+#define StateSpecFreeIntRep 0		/* not needed */
+static void StateSpecDupIntRep(Tcl_Obj *, Tcl_Obj *);
+static void StateSpecUpdateString(Tcl_Obj *);
+
+static
+struct Tcl_ObjType StateSpecObjType =
+{
+    "StateSpec",
+    StateSpecFreeIntRep,
+    StateSpecDupIntRep,
+    StateSpecUpdateString,
+    StateSpecSetFromAny
+};
+
+static void StateSpecDupIntRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr, Tcl_Obj *copyPtr)
+{
+    copyPtr->internalRep.longValue = srcPtr->internalRep.longValue;
+    copyPtr->typePtr = &StateSpecObjType;
+}
+
+static int StateSpecSetFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    int status;
+    int objc;
+    Tcl_Obj **objv;
+    int i;
+    unsigned int onbits = 0, offbits = 0;
+
+    status = Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv);
+    if (status != TCL_OK)
+	return status;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < objc; ++i) {
+	const char *stateName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	int on, j;
+
+	if (*stateName == '!') {
+	    ++stateName;
+	    on = 0;
+	} else {
+	    on = 1;
+	}
+
+	for (j = 0; stateNames[j] != 0; ++j) {
+	    if (strcmp(stateName, stateNames[j]) == 0)
+		break;
+	}
+
+    	if (stateNames[j] == 0) {
+	    if (interp) {
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Invalid state name ", stateName,NULL);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	if (on) {
+	    onbits |= (1<<j);
+	} else {
+	    offbits |= (1<<j);
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Invalidate old intrep:
+     */
+    if (objPtr->typePtr && objPtr->typePtr->freeIntRepProc) {
+	objPtr->typePtr->freeIntRepProc(objPtr);
+    }
+
+    objPtr->typePtr = &StateSpecObjType;
+    objPtr->internalRep.longValue = (onbits << 16) | offbits;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static void StateSpecUpdateString(Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    unsigned int onbits = (objPtr->internalRep.longValue & 0xFFFF0000) >> 16;
+    unsigned int offbits = objPtr->internalRep.longValue & 0x0000FFFF;
+    unsigned int mask = onbits | offbits;
+    Tcl_DString result;
+    int i, len;
+
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&result);
+
+    for (i=0; stateNames[i] != NULL; ++i) {
+	if (mask & (1<<i)) {
+	    if (offbits & (1<<i))
+		Tcl_DStringAppend(&result, "!", 1);
+	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&result, stateNames[i], -1);
+	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&result, " ", 1);
+	}
+    }
+
+    len = Tcl_DStringLength(&result);
+    if (len) {
+	/* 'len' includes extra trailing ' ' */
+	objPtr->bytes = Tcl_Alloc((unsigned)len);
+	objPtr->length = len-1;
+	strncpy(objPtr->bytes, Tcl_DStringValue(&result), (size_t)len-1);
+	objPtr->bytes[len-1] = '\0';
+    } else {
+	/* empty string */
+	objPtr->length = 0;
+	objPtr->bytes = Tcl_Alloc(1);
+	*objPtr->bytes = '\0';
+    }
+
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&result);
+}
+
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewStateSpecObj(unsigned int onbits, unsigned int offbits)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
+
+    Tcl_InvalidateStringRep(objPtr);
+    objPtr->typePtr = &StateSpecObjType;
+    objPtr->internalRep.longValue = (onbits << 16) | offbits;
+
+    return objPtr;
+}
+
+int Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+    Ttk_StateSpec *spec)
+{
+    if (objPtr->typePtr != &StateSpecObjType) {
+	int status = StateSpecSetFromAny(interp, objPtr);
+	if (status != TCL_OK)
+	    return status;
+    }
+
+    spec->onbits = (objPtr->internalRep.longValue & 0xFFFF0000) >> 16;
+    spec->offbits = objPtr->internalRep.longValue & 0x0000FFFF;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+
+/*
+ * Tk_StateMapLookup --
+ *
+ * 	A state map is a paired list of StateSpec / value pairs.
+ *	Returns the value corresponding to the first matching state
+ *	specification, or NULL if not found or an error occurs.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_StateMapLookup(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Where to leave error messages; may be NULL */
+    Ttk_StateMap map,		/* State map */
+    Ttk_State state)    	/* State to look up */
+{
+    Tcl_Obj **specs;
+    int nSpecs;
+    int j, status;
+
+    status = Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, map, &nSpecs, &specs);
+    if (status != TCL_OK)
+	return NULL;
+
+    for (j = 0; j < nSpecs; j += 2) {
+	Ttk_StateSpec spec;
+	status = Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(interp, specs[j], &spec);
+	if (status != TCL_OK)
+	    return NULL;
+	if (Ttk_StateMatches(state, &spec))
+	    return specs[j+1];
+    }
+    if (interp) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "No match in state map", NULL);
+    }
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj --
+ * 	Returns a Ttk_StateMap from a Tcl_Obj*.
+ * 	Since a Ttk_StateMap is just a specially-formatted Tcl_Obj,
+ * 	this basically just checks for errors.
+ */
+Ttk_StateMap Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Where to leave error messages; may be NULL */
+    Tcl_Obj *mapObj)		/* State map */
+{
+    Tcl_Obj **specs;
+    int nSpecs;
+    int j, status;
+
+    status = Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, mapObj, &nSpecs, &specs);
+    if (status != TCL_OK)
+	return NULL;
+
+    if (nSpecs % 2 != 0) {
+	if (interp)
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+		    "State map must have an even number of elements",
+		    TCL_STATIC);
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    for (j = 0; j < nSpecs; j += 2) {
+	Ttk_StateSpec spec;
+	if (Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(interp, specs[j], &spec) != TCL_OK)
+	    return NULL;
+    }
+
+    return mapObj;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_StateTableLooup --
+ * 	Look up an index from a statically allocated state table.
+ */
+int Ttk_StateTableLookup(Ttk_StateTable *map, unsigned int state)
+{
+    while ((state & map->onBits) != map->onBits
+	    || (~state & map->offBits) != map->offBits)
+    {
+	++map;
+    }
+    return map->index;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkStubInit.c b/generic/ttk/ttkStubInit.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..87b33dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkStubInit.c
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+/*
+ * This file is (mostly) automatically generated from ttk.decls.
+ * It is compiled and linked in with the ttk package proper.
+ */
+
+#include "tk.h"
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+MODULE_SCOPE const TtkStubs ttkStubs;
+
+/* !BEGIN!: Do not edit below this line. */
+
+const TtkStubs ttkStubs = {
+    TCL_STUB_MAGIC,
+    TTK_STUBS_EPOCH,
+    TTK_STUBS_REVISION,
+    0,
+    Ttk_GetTheme, /* 0 */
+    Ttk_GetDefaultTheme, /* 1 */
+    Ttk_GetCurrentTheme, /* 2 */
+    Ttk_CreateTheme, /* 3 */
+    Ttk_RegisterCleanup, /* 4 */
+    Ttk_RegisterElementSpec, /* 5 */
+    Ttk_RegisterElement, /* 6 */
+    Ttk_RegisterElementFactory, /* 7 */
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout, /* 8 */
+    0, /* 9 */
+    Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj, /* 10 */
+    Ttk_NewStateSpecObj, /* 11 */
+    Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj, /* 12 */
+    Ttk_StateMapLookup, /* 13 */
+    Ttk_StateTableLookup, /* 14 */
+    0, /* 15 */
+    0, /* 16 */
+    0, /* 17 */
+    0, /* 18 */
+    0, /* 19 */
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj, /* 20 */
+    Ttk_GetBorderFromObj, /* 21 */
+    Ttk_GetStickyFromObj, /* 22 */
+    Ttk_MakePadding, /* 23 */
+    Ttk_UniformPadding, /* 24 */
+    Ttk_AddPadding, /* 25 */
+    Ttk_RelievePadding, /* 26 */
+    Ttk_MakeBox, /* 27 */
+    Ttk_BoxContains, /* 28 */
+    Ttk_PackBox, /* 29 */
+    Ttk_StickBox, /* 30 */
+    Ttk_AnchorBox, /* 31 */
+    Ttk_PadBox, /* 32 */
+    Ttk_ExpandBox, /* 33 */
+    Ttk_PlaceBox, /* 34 */
+    Ttk_NewBoxObj, /* 35 */
+    0, /* 36 */
+    0, /* 37 */
+    0, /* 38 */
+    0, /* 39 */
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj, /* 40 */
+};
+
+/* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkStubLib.c b/generic/ttk/ttkStubLib.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c07b9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkStubLib.c
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+/*
+ * We need to ensure that we use the tcl stub macros so that this file
+ * contains no references to any of the tcl stub functions.
+ */
+
+#undef USE_TCL_STUBS
+#define USE_TCL_STUBS
+
+#include "tk.h"
+
+#define USE_TTK_STUBS 1
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+MODULE_SCOPE const TtkStubs *ttkStubsPtr;
+const TtkStubs *ttkStubsPtr = NULL;
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TtkInitializeStubs --
+ *	Load the Ttk package, initialize stub table pointer.
+ *	Do not call this function directly, use Ttk_InitStubs() macro instead.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The actual version of the package that satisfies the request, or
+ *	NULL to indicate that an error occurred.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Sets the stub table pointer.
+ *
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE const char *
+TtkInitializeStubs(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *version, int epoch, int revision)
+{
+    int exact = 0;
+    const char *packageName = "Ttk";
+    const char *errMsg = NULL;
+    ClientData pkgClientData = NULL;
+    const char *actualVersion = Tcl_PkgRequireEx(
+	interp, packageName, version, exact, &pkgClientData);
+    const TtkStubs *stubsPtr = pkgClientData;
+
+    if (!actualVersion) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    if (!stubsPtr) {
+	errMsg = "missing stub table pointer";
+	goto error;
+    }
+    if (stubsPtr->epoch != epoch) {
+	errMsg = "epoch number mismatch";
+	goto error;
+    }
+    if (stubsPtr->revision < revision) {
+	errMsg = "require later revision";
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    ttkStubsPtr = stubsPtr;
+    return actualVersion;
+
+error:
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	"Error loading ", packageName, " package",
+	" (requested version '", version,
+	"', loaded version '", actualVersion, "'): ",
+	errMsg, 
+	NULL);
+    return NULL;
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkTagSet.c b/generic/ttk/ttkTagSet.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9f2a87b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkTagSet.c
@@ -0,0 +1,306 @@
+/*
+ * Tag tables.  3/4-baked, work in progress.
+ *
+ * Copyright (C) 2005, Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>	/* for memset() */
+#include <tcl.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Internal data structures.
+ */
+struct TtkTag {
+    int 	priority;		/* 1=>highest */
+    const char	*tagName;		/* Back-pointer to hash table entry */
+    void	*tagRecord;		/* User data */
+};
+
+struct TtkTagTable {
+    Tk_Window		tkwin;		/* owner window */
+    Tk_OptionSpec	*optionSpecs;	/* ... */
+    Tk_OptionTable	optionTable;	/* ... */
+    int         	recordSize;	/* size of tag record */
+    int 		nTags;		/* #tags defined so far */
+    Tcl_HashTable	tags;		/* defined tags */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tags.
+ */
+static Ttk_Tag NewTag(Ttk_TagTable tagTable, const char *tagName)
+{
+    Ttk_Tag tag = (Ttk_Tag)ckalloc(sizeof(*tag));
+    tag->tagRecord = ckalloc(tagTable->recordSize);
+    memset(tag->tagRecord, 0, tagTable->recordSize);
+    /* Don't need Tk_InitOptions() here, all defaults should be NULL. */
+    tag->priority = ++tagTable->nTags;
+    tag->tagName = tagName;
+    return tag;
+}
+
+static void DeleteTag(Ttk_TagTable tagTable, Ttk_Tag tag)
+{
+    Tk_FreeConfigOptions(tag->tagRecord,tagTable->optionTable,tagTable->tkwin);
+    ckfree(tag->tagRecord);
+    ckfree((void*)tag);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tag tables.
+ */
+
+Ttk_TagTable Ttk_CreateTagTable(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[], int recordSize)
+{
+    Ttk_TagTable tagTable = (Ttk_TagTable)ckalloc(sizeof(*tagTable));
+    tagTable->tkwin = tkwin;
+    tagTable->optionSpecs = optionSpecs;
+    tagTable->optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
+    tagTable->recordSize = recordSize;
+    tagTable->nTags = 0;
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&tagTable->tags, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    return tagTable;
+}
+
+void Ttk_DeleteTagTable(Ttk_TagTable tagTable)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&tagTable->tags, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	DeleteTag(tagTable, Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&tagTable->tags);
+    ckfree((void*)tagTable);
+}
+
+Ttk_Tag Ttk_GetTag(Ttk_TagTable tagTable, const char *tagName)
+{
+    int isNew = 0;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(
+	&tagTable->tags, tagName, &isNew);
+
+    if (isNew) {
+	tagName = Tcl_GetHashKey(&tagTable->tags, entryPtr);
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, NewTag(tagTable,tagName));
+    }
+    return Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+}
+
+Ttk_Tag Ttk_GetTagFromObj(Ttk_TagTable tagTable, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    return Ttk_GetTag(tagTable, Tcl_GetString(objPtr));
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tag sets.
+ */
+
+/* Ttk_GetTagSetFromObj --
+ * 	Extract an array of pointers to Ttk_Tags from a Tcl_Obj.
+ * 	objPtr may be NULL, in which case a new empty tag set is returned.
+ *
+ * Returns NULL and leaves an error message in interp->result on error.
+ *
+ * Non-NULL results must be passed to Ttk_FreeTagSet().
+ */
+Ttk_TagSet Ttk_GetTagSetFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_TagTable tagTable, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_TagSet tagset = (Ttk_TagSet)(ckalloc(sizeof *tagset));
+    Tcl_Obj **objv;
+    int i, objc;
+
+    if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	tagset->tags = NULL;
+	tagset->nTags = 0;
+	return tagset;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK) {
+	ckfree((ClientData)tagset);
+    	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    tagset->tags = (Ttk_Tag*)ckalloc((objc+1) * sizeof(Ttk_Tag));
+    for (i=0; i<objc; ++i) {
+	tagset->tags[i] = Ttk_GetTagFromObj(tagTable, objv[i]);
+    }
+    tagset->tags[i] = NULL;
+    tagset->nTags = objc;
+
+    return tagset;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_NewTagSetObj --
+ * 	Construct a fresh Tcl_Obj * from a tag set.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewTagSetObj(Ttk_TagSet tagset)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+    int i;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < tagset->nTags; ++i) {
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(
+	    NULL, result, Tcl_NewStringObj(tagset->tags[i]->tagName, -1));
+    }
+    return result;
+}
+
+void Ttk_FreeTagSet(Ttk_TagSet tagset)
+{
+    ckfree((ClientData)tagset->tags);
+    ckfree((ClientData)tagset);
+}
+
+/* Ttk_TagSetContains -- test if tag set contains a tag.
+ */
+int Ttk_TagSetContains(Ttk_TagSet tagset, Ttk_Tag tag)
+{
+    int i;
+    for (i = 0; i < tagset->nTags; ++i) {
+	if (tagset->tags[i] == tag) {
+	    return 1;
+	}
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_TagSetAdd -- add a tag to a tag set.
+ *
+ * Returns: 0 if tagset already contained tag,
+ * 1 if tagset was modified.
+ */
+int Ttk_TagSetAdd(Ttk_TagSet tagset, Ttk_Tag tag)
+{
+    int i;
+    for (i = 0; i < tagset->nTags; ++i) {
+	if (tagset->tags[i] == tag) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+    }
+    tagset->tags = (void*)ckrealloc((void*)tagset->tags, 
+	    (tagset->nTags+1)*sizeof(tagset->tags[0]));
+    tagset->tags[tagset->nTags++] = tag;
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_TagSetRemove -- remove a tag from a tag set.
+ *
+ * Returns: 0 if tagset did not contain tag,
+ * 1 if tagset was modified.
+ */
+int Ttk_TagSetRemove(Ttk_TagSet tagset, Ttk_Tag tag)
+{
+    int i = 0, j = 0;
+    while (i < tagset->nTags) {
+	if ((tagset->tags[j] = tagset->tags[i]) != tag) {
+	    ++j;
+	}
+	++i;
+    }
+    tagset->nTags = j;
+    return j != i;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Utilities for widget commands.
+ */
+
+/* Ttk_EnumerateTags -- implements [$w tag names]
+ */
+int Ttk_EnumerateTags(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_TagTable tagTable)
+{
+    return TtkEnumerateHashTable(interp, &tagTable->tags);
+}
+
+/* Ttk_EnumerateTagOptions -- implements [$w tag configure $tag]
+ */
+int Ttk_EnumerateTagOptions(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_TagTable tagTable, Ttk_Tag tag)
+{
+    return TtkEnumerateOptions(interp, tag->tagRecord,
+	tagTable->optionSpecs, tagTable->optionTable, tagTable->tkwin);
+}
+
+/* Ttk_TagOptionValue -- implements [$w tag configure $tag -option]
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_TagOptionValue(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Ttk_TagTable tagTable,
+    Ttk_Tag tag,
+    Tcl_Obj *optionName)
+{
+    return Tk_GetOptionValue(interp,
+	tag->tagRecord, tagTable->optionTable, optionName, tagTable->tkwin);
+}
+
+/* Ttk_ConfigureTag -- implements [$w tag configure $tag -option value...]
+ */
+int Ttk_ConfigureTag(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Ttk_TagTable tagTable,
+    Ttk_Tag tag,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    return Tk_SetOptions(
+	interp, tag->tagRecord, tagTable->optionTable,
+	objc, objv, tagTable->tkwin, NULL/*savedOptions*/, NULL/*mask*/);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tag values.
+ */
+
+#define OBJ_AT(record, offset) (*(Tcl_Obj**)(((char*)record)+offset))
+
+void Ttk_TagSetValues(Ttk_TagTable tagTable, Ttk_TagSet tagSet, void *record)
+{
+    const int LOWEST_PRIORITY = 0x7FFFFFFF;
+    int i, j;
+
+    memset(record, 0, tagTable->recordSize);
+
+    for (i = 0; tagTable->optionSpecs[i].type != TK_OPTION_END; ++i) {
+	Tk_OptionSpec *optionSpec = tagTable->optionSpecs + i;
+	int offset = optionSpec->objOffset;
+	int prio = LOWEST_PRIORITY;
+
+	for (j = 0; j < tagSet->nTags; ++j) {
+	    Ttk_Tag tag = tagSet->tags[j];
+	    if (OBJ_AT(tag->tagRecord, offset) != 0 && tag->priority < prio) {
+		OBJ_AT(record, offset) = OBJ_AT(tag->tagRecord, offset);
+		prio = tag->priority;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+void Ttk_TagSetApplyStyle(
+    Ttk_TagTable tagTable, Ttk_Style style, Ttk_State state, void *record)
+{
+    Tk_OptionSpec *optionSpec = tagTable->optionSpecs;
+
+    while (optionSpec->type != TK_OPTION_END) {
+	int offset = optionSpec->objOffset;
+	const char *optionName = optionSpec->optionName;
+	Tcl_Obj *val = Ttk_StyleMap(style, optionName, state);
+	if (val) {
+	    OBJ_AT(record, offset) = val;
+	} else if (OBJ_AT(record, offset) == 0) {
+	    OBJ_AT(record, offset) = Ttk_StyleDefault(style, optionName);
+	}
+	++optionSpec;
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkTheme.c b/generic/ttk/ttkTheme.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a2c51c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkTheme.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1737 @@
+/*
+ * ttkTheme.c --
+ *
+ *	This file implements the widget styles and themes support.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2002 Frederic Bonnet
+ * Copyright (c) 2003 Joe English
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include <tkInt.h>
+#include "ttkThemeInt.h"
+
+#define PKG_ASSOC_KEY "Ttk"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Styles.
+ *
+ * Invariants:
+ * 	If styleName contains a dot, parentStyle->styleName is everything
+ * 	after the first dot; otherwise, parentStyle is the theme's root
+ * 	style ".".  The root style's parentStyle is NULL.
+ *
+ */
+
+typedef struct Ttk_Style_
+{
+    const char		*styleName;	/* points to hash table key */
+    Tcl_HashTable	settingsTable;	/* KEY: string; VALUE: StateMap */
+    Tcl_HashTable	defaultsTable;	/* KEY: string; VALUE: resource */
+    Ttk_LayoutTemplate	layoutTemplate;	/* Layout template for style, or NULL */
+    Ttk_Style		parentStyle;	/* Previous style in chain */
+    Ttk_ResourceCache	cache;		/* Back-pointer to resource cache */
+} Style;
+
+static Style *NewStyle()
+{
+    Style *stylePtr = (Style*)ckalloc(sizeof(Style));
+
+    stylePtr->styleName = NULL;
+    stylePtr->parentStyle = NULL;
+    stylePtr->layoutTemplate = NULL;
+    stylePtr->cache = NULL;
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&stylePtr->settingsTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&stylePtr->defaultsTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    return stylePtr;
+}
+
+static void FreeStyle(Style *stylePtr)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&stylePtr->settingsTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Ttk_StateMap stateMap = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(stateMap);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&stylePtr->settingsTable);
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&stylePtr->defaultsTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *defaultValue = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(defaultValue);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&stylePtr->defaultsTable);
+
+    Ttk_FreeLayoutTemplate(stylePtr->layoutTemplate);
+
+    ckfree((ClientData)stylePtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_StyleMap --
+ * 	Look up state-specific option value from specified style.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_StyleMap(Ttk_Style style, const char *optionName, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    while (style) {
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr =
+	    Tcl_FindHashEntry(&style->settingsTable, optionName);
+	if (entryPtr) {
+	    Ttk_StateMap stateMap = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	    return Ttk_StateMapLookup(NULL, stateMap, state);
+	}
+	style = style->parentStyle;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_StyleDefault --
+ * 	Look up default resource setting the in the specified style.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_StyleDefault(Ttk_Style style, const char *optionName)
+{
+    while (style) {
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr =
+	    Tcl_FindHashEntry(&style->defaultsTable, optionName);
+	if (entryPtr)
+	    return Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	style= style->parentStyle;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Elements.
+ */
+typedef const Tk_OptionSpec **OptionMap;
+    /* array of Tk_OptionSpecs mapping widget options to element options */
+
+struct Ttk_ElementClass_ {
+    const char *name;		/* Points to hash table key */
+    Ttk_ElementSpec *specPtr;	/* Template provided during registration. */
+    void *clientData;		/* Client data passed in at registration time */
+    void *elementRecord;	/* Scratch buffer for element record storage */
+    int nResources;		/* #Element options */
+    Tcl_Obj **defaultValues;	/* Array of option default values */
+    Tcl_HashTable optMapCache;	/* Map: Tk_OptionTable * -> OptionMap */
+};
+
+/* TTKGetOptionSpec --
+ * 	Look up a Tk_OptionSpec by name from a Tk_OptionTable,
+ * 	and verify that it's compatible with the specified Tk_OptionType,
+ * 	along with other constraints (see below).
+ */
+static const Tk_OptionSpec *TTKGetOptionSpec(
+    const char *optionName,
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,
+    Tk_OptionType optionType)
+{
+    const Tk_OptionSpec *optionSpec = TkGetOptionSpec(optionName, optionTable);
+
+    if (!optionSpec)
+	return 0;
+
+    /* Make sure widget option has a Tcl_Obj* entry:
+     */
+    if (optionSpec->objOffset < 0) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    /* Grrr.  Ignore accidental mismatches caused by prefix-matching:
+     */
+    if (strcmp(optionSpec->optionName, optionName)) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    /* Ensure that the widget option type is compatible with
+     * the element option type.
+     *
+     * TK_OPTION_STRING element options are compatible with anything.
+     * As a workaround for the workaround for Bug #967209,
+     * TK_OPTION_STRING widget options are also compatible with anything
+     * (see <<NOTE-NULLOPTIONS>>).
+     */
+    if (   optionType != TK_OPTION_STRING
+	&& optionSpec->type != TK_OPTION_STRING
+	&& optionType != optionSpec->type)
+    {
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    return optionSpec;
+}
+
+/* BuildOptionMap --
+ * 	Construct the mapping from element options to widget options.
+ */
+static OptionMap
+BuildOptionMap(Ttk_ElementClass *elementClass, Tk_OptionTable optionTable)
+{
+    OptionMap optionMap = (OptionMap)ckalloc(
+	    sizeof(const Tk_OptionSpec) * elementClass->nResources + 1);
+    int i;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < elementClass->nResources; ++i) {
+	Ttk_ElementOptionSpec *e = elementClass->specPtr->options+i;
+	optionMap[i] = TTKGetOptionSpec(e->optionName, optionTable, e->type);
+    }
+
+    return optionMap;
+}
+
+/* GetOptionMap --
+ * 	Return a cached OptionMap matching the specified optionTable
+ * 	for the specified element, creating it if necessary.
+ */
+static OptionMap
+GetOptionMap(Ttk_ElementClass *elementClass, Tk_OptionTable optionTable)
+{
+    OptionMap optionMap;
+    int isNew;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(
+	&elementClass->optMapCache, (void*)optionTable, &isNew);
+
+    if (isNew) {
+	optionMap = BuildOptionMap(elementClass, optionTable);
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, optionMap);
+    } else {
+	optionMap = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    return optionMap;
+}
+
+/*
+ * NewElementClass --
+ * 	Allocate and initialize an element class record
+ * 	from the specified element specification.
+ */
+static Ttk_ElementClass *
+NewElementClass(const char *name, Ttk_ElementSpec *specPtr,void *clientData)
+{
+    Ttk_ElementClass *elementClass =
+	    (Ttk_ElementClass*)ckalloc(sizeof(Ttk_ElementClass));
+    int i;
+
+    elementClass->name = name;
+    elementClass->specPtr = specPtr;
+    elementClass->clientData = clientData;
+    elementClass->elementRecord = ckalloc(specPtr->elementSize);
+
+    /* Count #element resources:
+     */
+    for (i = 0; specPtr->options[i].optionName != 0; ++i)
+	continue;
+    elementClass->nResources = i;
+
+    /* Initialize default values:
+     */
+    elementClass->defaultValues = (Tcl_Obj**)
+	ckalloc(elementClass->nResources * sizeof(Tcl_Obj *) + 1);
+    for (i=0; i < elementClass->nResources; ++i) {
+        const char *defaultValue = specPtr->options[i].defaultValue;
+	if (defaultValue) {
+	    elementClass->defaultValues[i] = Tcl_NewStringObj(defaultValue,-1);
+	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(elementClass->defaultValues[i]);
+	} else {
+	    elementClass->defaultValues[i] = 0;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Initialize option map cache:
+     */
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&elementClass->optMapCache, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
+
+    return elementClass;
+}
+
+/*
+ * FreeElementClass --
+ * 	Release resources associated with an element class record.
+ */
+static void FreeElementClass(Ttk_ElementClass *elementClass)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int i;
+
+    /*
+     * Free default values:
+     */
+    for (i = 0; i < elementClass->nResources; ++i) {
+	if (elementClass->defaultValues[i]) {
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(elementClass->defaultValues[i]);
+	}
+    }
+    ckfree((ClientData)elementClass->defaultValues);
+
+    /*
+     * Free option map cache:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&elementClass->optMapCache, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	ckfree(Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&elementClass->optMapCache);
+
+    ckfree(elementClass->elementRecord);
+    ckfree((ClientData)elementClass);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Themes.
+ */
+
+static int ThemeEnabled(Ttk_Theme theme, void *clientData) { return 1; }
+    /* Default ThemeEnabledProc -- always return true */
+
+typedef struct Ttk_Theme_
+{
+    Ttk_Theme parentPtr;             	/* Parent theme. */
+    Tcl_HashTable elementTable;	     	/* Map element names to class records */
+    Tcl_HashTable styleTable;	     	/* Map style names to Styles */
+    Ttk_Style rootStyle;		/* "." style, root of chain */
+    Ttk_ThemeEnabledProc *enabledProc;	/* Function called by SetTheme */
+    void *enabledData;              	/* ClientData for enabledProc */
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache;		/* Back-pointer to resource cache */
+} Theme;
+
+static Theme *NewTheme(Ttk_ResourceCache cache, Ttk_Theme parent)
+{
+    Theme *themePtr = (Theme*)ckalloc(sizeof(Theme));
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int unused;
+
+    themePtr->parentPtr = parent;
+    themePtr->enabledProc = ThemeEnabled;
+    themePtr->enabledData = NULL;
+    themePtr->cache = cache;
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&themePtr->elementTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&themePtr->styleTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    /*
+     * Create root style "."
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&themePtr->styleTable, ".", &unused);
+    themePtr->rootStyle = NewStyle();
+    themePtr->rootStyle->styleName =
+	Tcl_GetHashKey(&themePtr->styleTable, entryPtr);
+    themePtr->rootStyle->cache = themePtr->cache;
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, themePtr->rootStyle);
+
+    return themePtr;
+}
+
+static void FreeTheme(Theme *themePtr)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Free element table:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&themePtr->elementTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Ttk_ElementClass *elementClass = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	FreeElementClass(elementClass);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&themePtr->elementTable);
+
+    /*
+     * Free style table:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&themePtr->styleTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Style *stylePtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	FreeStyle(stylePtr);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&themePtr->styleTable);
+
+    /*
+     * Free theme record:
+     */
+    ckfree((ClientData)themePtr);
+
+    return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Element constructors.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    Ttk_ElementFactory	factory;
+    void		*clientData;
+} FactoryRec;
+
+/*
+ * Cleanup records:
+ */
+typedef struct CleanupStruct {
+    void *clientData;
+    Ttk_CleanupProc *cleanupProc;
+    struct CleanupStruct *next;
+} Cleanup;
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Master style package data structure.
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Owner interp */
+    Tcl_HashTable themeTable;		/* KEY: name; VALUE: Theme pointer */
+    Tcl_HashTable factoryTable; 	/* KEY: name; VALUE: FactoryRec ptr */
+    Theme *defaultTheme;		/* Default theme; global fallback*/
+    Theme *currentTheme;		/* Currently-selected theme */
+    Cleanup *cleanupList;		/* Cleanup records */
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache;		/* Resource cache */
+    int themeChangePending;		/* scheduled ThemeChangedProc call? */
+} StylePackageData;
+
+static void ThemeChangedProc(ClientData);	/* Forward */
+
+/* Ttk_StylePkgFree --
+ *	Cleanup procedure for StylePackageData.
+ */
+static void Ttk_StylePkgFree(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    Cleanup *cleanup;
+
+    /*
+     * Cancel any pending ThemeChanged calls:
+     */
+    if (pkgPtr->themeChangePending) {
+	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ThemeChangedProc, pkgPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Free themes.
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&pkgPtr->themeTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Theme *themePtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	FreeTheme(themePtr);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&pkgPtr->themeTable);
+
+    /*
+     * Free element constructor table:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&pkgPtr->factoryTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	ckfree(Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&pkgPtr->factoryTable);
+
+    /*
+     * Release cache:
+     */
+    Ttk_FreeResourceCache(pkgPtr->cache);
+
+    /*
+     * Call all registered cleanup procedures:
+     */
+    cleanup = pkgPtr->cleanupList;
+    while (cleanup) {
+	Cleanup *next = cleanup->next;
+	cleanup->cleanupProc(cleanup->clientData);
+	ckfree((ClientData)cleanup);
+	cleanup = next;
+    }
+
+    ckfree((ClientData)pkgPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * GetStylePackageData --
+ * 	Look up the package data registered with the interp.
+ */
+
+static StylePackageData *GetStylePackageData(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    return Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, PKG_ASSOC_KEY, NULL);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_RegisterCleanup --
+ *
+ *	Register a function to be called when a theme engine is deleted.
+ *	(This only happens when the main interp is destroyed). The cleanup
+ *	function is called with the current Tcl interpreter and the client
+ *	data provided here.
+ *
+ */
+void Ttk_RegisterCleanup(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, ClientData clientData, Ttk_CleanupProc *cleanupProc)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+    Cleanup *cleanup = (Cleanup*)ckalloc(sizeof(*cleanup));
+
+    cleanup->clientData = clientData;
+    cleanup->cleanupProc = cleanupProc;
+    cleanup->next = pkgPtr->cleanupList;
+    pkgPtr->cleanupList = cleanup;
+}
+
+/* ThemeChangedProc --
+ * 	Notify all widgets that the theme has been changed.
+ * 	Scheduled as an idle callback; clientData is a StylePackageData *.
+ *
+ * 	Sends a <<ThemeChanged>> event to every widget in the hierarchy.
+ * 	Widgets respond to this by calling the  WorldChanged class proc,
+ * 	which in turn recreates the layout.
+ *
+ * 	The Tk C API doesn't doesn't provide an easy way to traverse
+ * 	the widget hierarchy, so this is done by evaluating a Tcl script.
+ */
+
+static void ThemeChangedProc(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    static char ThemeChangedScript[] = "ttk::ThemeChanged";
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+
+    if (Tcl_EvalEx(pkgPtr->interp, ThemeChangedScript, -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL) != TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_BackgroundError(pkgPtr->interp);
+    }
+    pkgPtr->themeChangePending = 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ * ThemeChanged --
+ * 	Schedule a call to ThemeChanged if one is not already pending.
+ */
+static void ThemeChanged(StylePackageData *pkgPtr)
+{
+    if (!pkgPtr->themeChangePending) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ThemeChangedProc, pkgPtr);
+	pkgPtr->themeChangePending = 1;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_CreateTheme --
+ *	Create a new theme and register it in the global theme table.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	Pointer to new Theme structure; NULL if named theme already exists.
+ * 	Leaves an error message in interp's result on error.
+ */
+
+Ttk_Theme
+Ttk_CreateTheme(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter in which to create theme */
+    const char *name,		/* Name of the theme to create. */
+    Ttk_Theme parent) 		/* Parent/fallback theme, NULL for default */
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int newEntry;
+    Theme *themePtr;
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&pkgPtr->themeTable, name, &newEntry);
+    if (!newEntry) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Theme ", name, " already exists", NULL);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Initialize new theme:
+     */
+    if (!parent) parent = pkgPtr->defaultTheme;
+
+    themePtr = NewTheme(pkgPtr->cache, parent);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, themePtr);
+
+    return themePtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_SetThemeEnabledProc --
+ *	Sets a procedure that is used to check that this theme is available.
+ */
+
+void Ttk_SetThemeEnabledProc(
+    Ttk_Theme theme, Ttk_ThemeEnabledProc enabledProc, void *enabledData)
+{
+    theme->enabledProc = enabledProc;
+    theme->enabledData = enabledData;
+}
+
+/*
+ * LookupTheme --
+ *	Retrieve a registered theme by name.  If not found,
+ *	returns NULL and leaves an error message in interp's result.
+ */
+
+static Ttk_Theme LookupTheme(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* where to leave error messages */
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr,	/* style package master record */
+    const char *name)		/* theme name */
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&pkgPtr->themeTable, name);
+    if (!entryPtr) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "theme \"", name, "\" doesn't exist", NULL);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    return Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_GetTheme --
+ *	Public interface to LookupTheme.
+ */
+Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *themeName)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+
+    return LookupTheme(interp, pkgPtr, themeName);
+}
+
+Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetCurrentTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+    return pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+}
+
+Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+    return pkgPtr->defaultTheme;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_UseTheme --
+ * 	Set the current theme, notify all widgets that the theme has changed.
+ */
+int Ttk_UseTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme  theme)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+
+    /*
+     * Check if selected theme is enabled:
+     */
+    while (theme && !theme->enabledProc(theme, theme->enabledData)) {
+    	theme = theme->parentPtr;
+    }
+    if (!theme) {
+    	/* This shouldn't happen -- default theme should always work */
+	Tcl_Panic("No themes available?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    pkgPtr->currentTheme = theme;
+    ThemeChanged(pkgPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_GetResourceCache --
+ * 	Return the resource cache associated with 'interp'
+ */
+Ttk_ResourceCache
+Ttk_GetResourceCache(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+    return pkgPtr->cache;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Register a new layout specification with a style.
+ * @@@ TODO: Make sure layoutName is not ".", root style must not have a layout
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE
+void Ttk_RegisterLayoutTemplate(
+    Ttk_Theme theme,			/* Target theme */
+    const char *layoutName,		/* Name of new layout */
+    Ttk_LayoutTemplate layoutTemplate)	/* Template */
+{
+    Ttk_Style style = Ttk_GetStyle(theme, layoutName);
+    if (style->layoutTemplate) {
+	Ttk_FreeLayoutTemplate(style->layoutTemplate);
+    }
+    style->layoutTemplate = layoutTemplate;
+}
+
+void Ttk_RegisterLayout(
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr,		/* Target theme */
+    const char *layoutName,	/* Name of new layout */
+    Ttk_LayoutSpec specPtr)	/* Static layout information */
+{
+    Ttk_LayoutTemplate layoutTemplate = Ttk_BuildLayoutTemplate(specPtr);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayoutTemplate(themePtr, layoutName, layoutTemplate);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_GetStyle --
+ * 	Look up a Style from a Theme, create new style if not found.
+ */
+Ttk_Style Ttk_GetStyle(Ttk_Theme themePtr, const char *styleName)
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int newStyle;
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&themePtr->styleTable, styleName, &newStyle);
+    if (newStyle) {
+	Ttk_Style stylePtr = NewStyle();
+	const char *dot = strchr(styleName, '.');
+
+	if (dot) {
+	    stylePtr->parentStyle = Ttk_GetStyle(themePtr, dot + 1);
+	} else {
+	    stylePtr->parentStyle = themePtr->rootStyle;
+	}
+
+	stylePtr->styleName = Tcl_GetHashKey(&themePtr->styleTable, entryPtr);
+	stylePtr->cache = stylePtr->parentStyle->cache;
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, stylePtr);
+	return stylePtr;
+    }
+    return Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+}
+
+/* FindLayoutTemplate --
+ * 	Locate a layout template in the layout table, checking
+ * 	generic names to specific names first, then looking for
+ * 	the full name in the parent theme.
+ */
+Ttk_LayoutTemplate
+Ttk_FindLayoutTemplate(Ttk_Theme themePtr, const char *layoutName)
+{
+    while (themePtr) {
+	Ttk_Style stylePtr = Ttk_GetStyle(themePtr, layoutName);
+	while (stylePtr) {
+	    if (stylePtr->layoutTemplate) {
+		return stylePtr->layoutTemplate;
+	    }
+	    stylePtr = stylePtr->parentStyle;
+	}
+	themePtr = themePtr->parentPtr;
+    }
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+const char *Ttk_StyleName(Ttk_Style stylePtr)
+{
+    return stylePtr->styleName;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_GetElement --
+ *	Look up an element class by name in a given theme.
+ *	If not found, try generic element names in this theme, then
+ *	repeat the lookups in the parent theme.
+ *	If not found, return the null element.
+ */
+Ttk_ElementClass *Ttk_GetElement(Ttk_Theme themePtr, const char *elementName)
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    const char *dot = elementName;
+
+    /*
+     * Check if element has already been registered:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&themePtr->elementTable, elementName);
+    if (entryPtr) {
+	return Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Check generic names:
+     */
+    while (!entryPtr && ((dot = strchr(dot, '.')) != NULL)) {
+	dot++;
+	entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&themePtr->elementTable, dot);
+    }
+    if (entryPtr) {
+	return Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Check parent theme:
+     */
+    if (themePtr->parentPtr) {
+	return Ttk_GetElement(themePtr->parentPtr, elementName);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Not found, and this is the root theme; return null element, "".
+     * (@@@ SHOULD: signal a background error)
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&themePtr->elementTable, "");
+    /* ASSERT: entryPtr != 0 */
+    return Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+}
+
+const char *Ttk_ElementClassName(Ttk_ElementClass *elementClass)
+{
+    return elementClass->name;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_RegisterElementFactory --
+ *	Register a new element factory.
+ */
+int Ttk_RegisterElementFactory(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,	const char *name,
+    Ttk_ElementFactory factory, void *clientData)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+    FactoryRec *recPtr = (FactoryRec*)ckalloc(sizeof(*recPtr));
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int newEntry;
+
+    recPtr->factory = factory;
+    recPtr->clientData = clientData;
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&pkgPtr->factoryTable, name, &newEntry);
+    if (!newEntry) {
+    	/* Free old factory: */
+	ckfree(Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+    }
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, recPtr);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_CloneElement -- element factory procedure.
+ * 	(style element create $name) "from" $theme ?$element?
+ */
+static int Ttk_CloneElement(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, void *clientData,
+    Ttk_Theme theme, const char *elementName,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Ttk_Theme fromTheme;
+    Ttk_ElementClass *fromElement;
+
+    if (objc <= 0 || objc > 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 0, objv, "theme ?element?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    fromTheme = Ttk_GetTheme(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[0]));
+    if (!fromTheme) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	fromElement = Ttk_GetElement(fromTheme, Tcl_GetString(objv[1]));
+    } else {
+	fromElement = Ttk_GetElement(fromTheme, elementName);
+    }
+    if (!fromElement) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, elementName,
+		fromElement->specPtr, fromElement->clientData) == NULL)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_RegisterElement--
+ *	Register an element in the given theme.
+ *	Returns: Element handle if successful, NULL otherwise.
+ *	On failure, leaves an error message in interp's result
+ *	if interp is non-NULL.
+ */
+
+Ttk_ElementClass *Ttk_RegisterElement(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Where to leave error messages */
+    Ttk_Theme theme,		/* Style engine providing the implementation. */
+    const char *name,		/* Name of new element */
+    Ttk_ElementSpec *specPtr, 	/* Static template information */
+    void *clientData)		/* application-specific data */
+{
+    Ttk_ElementClass *elementClass;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int newEntry;
+
+    if (specPtr->version != TK_STYLE_VERSION_2) {
+	/* Version mismatch */
+	if (interp) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Internal error: Ttk_RegisterElement (",
+		name, "): invalid version",
+		NULL);
+	}
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&theme->elementTable, name, &newEntry);
+    if (!newEntry) {
+	if (interp) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Duplicate element ", name, NULL);
+	}
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    name = Tcl_GetHashKey(&theme->elementTable, entryPtr);
+    elementClass = NewElementClass(name, specPtr, clientData);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, elementClass);
+
+    return elementClass;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_RegisterElementSpec (deprecated) --
+ * 	Register a new element.
+ */
+int Ttk_RegisterElementSpec(Ttk_Theme theme,
+    const char *name, Ttk_ElementSpec *specPtr, void *clientData)
+{
+    return Ttk_RegisterElement(NULL, theme, name, specPtr, clientData)
+	   ? TCL_OK : TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Element record initialization.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * AllocateResource --
+ * 	Extra initialization for element options like TK_OPTION_COLOR, etc.
+ *
+ * Returns: 1 if OK, 0 on failure.
+ *
+ * Note: if resource allocation fails at this point (just prior
+ * to drawing an element), there's really no good place to
+ * report the error.  Instead we just silently fail.
+ */
+
+static int AllocateResource(
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tcl_Obj **destPtr,
+    int optionType)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *resource = *destPtr;
+
+    switch (optionType)
+    {
+	case TK_OPTION_FONT:
+	    return (*destPtr = Ttk_UseFont(cache, tkwin, resource)) != NULL;
+	case TK_OPTION_COLOR:
+	    return (*destPtr = Ttk_UseColor(cache, tkwin, resource)) != NULL;
+	case TK_OPTION_BORDER:
+	    return (*destPtr = Ttk_UseBorder(cache, tkwin, resource)) != NULL;
+	default:
+	    /* no-op; always succeeds */
+	    return 1;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * InitializeElementRecord --
+ *
+ * 	Fill in the element record based on the element's option table.
+ * 	Resources are initialized from:
+ * 	the corresponding widget option if present and non-NULL,
+ * 	otherwise the dynamic state map if specified,
+ * 	otherwise from the corresponding widget resource if present,
+ * 	otherwise the default value specified at registration time.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	1 if OK, 0 if an error is detected.
+ *
+ * NOTES:
+ * 	Tcl_Obj * reference counts are _NOT_ adjusted.
+ */
+
+static
+int InitializeElementRecord(
+    Ttk_ElementClass *eclass,	/* Element instance to initialize */
+    Ttk_Style style,		/* Style table */
+    char *widgetRecord,		/* Source of widget option values */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,	/* Option table describing widget record */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Corresponding window */
+    Ttk_State state)	/* Widget or element state */
+{
+    char *elementRecord = eclass->elementRecord;
+    OptionMap optionMap = GetOptionMap(eclass,optionTable);
+    int nResources = eclass->nResources;
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache = style->cache;
+    Ttk_ElementOptionSpec *elementOption = eclass->specPtr->options;
+
+    int i;
+    for (i=0; i<nResources; ++i, ++elementOption) {
+	Tcl_Obj **dest = (Tcl_Obj **)
+	    (elementRecord + elementOption->offset);
+	const char *optionName = elementOption->optionName;
+	Tcl_Obj *dynamicSetting = Ttk_StyleMap(style, optionName, state);
+	Tcl_Obj *widgetValue = 0;
+	Tcl_Obj *elementDefault = eclass->defaultValues[i];
+
+	if (optionMap[i]) {
+	    widgetValue = *(Tcl_Obj **)
+		(widgetRecord + optionMap[i]->objOffset);
+	}
+
+	if (widgetValue) {
+	    *dest = widgetValue;
+	} else if (dynamicSetting) {
+	    *dest = dynamicSetting;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_Obj *styleDefault = Ttk_StyleDefault(style, optionName);
+	    *dest = styleDefault ? styleDefault : elementDefault;
+	}
+
+	if (!AllocateResource(cache, tkwin, dest, elementOption->type)) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Public API.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_QueryStyle --
+ * 	Look up a style option based on the current state.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_QueryStyle(
+    Ttk_Style style,		/* Style to query */
+    void *recordPtr,		/* Widget record */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,	/* Option table describing widget record */
+    const char *optionName,	/* Option name */
+    Ttk_State state) 		/* Current state */
+{
+    const Tk_OptionSpec *optionSpec;
+    Tcl_Obj *result;
+
+    /*
+     * Check widget record:
+     */
+    optionSpec = TTKGetOptionSpec(optionName, optionTable, TK_OPTION_ANY);
+    if (optionSpec) {
+	result = *(Tcl_Obj**)(((char*)recordPtr) + optionSpec->objOffset);
+	if (result) {
+	    return result;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Check dynamic settings:
+     */
+    result = Ttk_StyleMap(style, optionName, state);
+    if (result) {
+	return result;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Use style default:
+     */
+    return Ttk_StyleDefault(style, optionName);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_ElementSize --
+ *	Compute the requested size of the given element.
+ */
+
+void
+Ttk_ElementSize(
+    Ttk_ElementClass *eclass,		/* Element to query */
+    Ttk_Style style,			/* Style settings */
+    char *recordPtr,			/* The widget record. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,		/* Description of widget record */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,			/* The widget window. */
+    Ttk_State state,			/* Current widget state */
+    int *widthPtr, 			/* Requested width */
+    int *heightPtr,			/* Reqested height */
+    Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)		/* Requested inner border */
+{
+    paddingPtr->left = paddingPtr->right = paddingPtr->top = paddingPtr->bottom
+	= *widthPtr = *heightPtr = 0;
+
+    if (!InitializeElementRecord(
+	    eclass, style, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin,  state))
+    {
+	return;
+    }
+    eclass->specPtr->size(
+	eclass->clientData, eclass->elementRecord,
+	tkwin, widthPtr, heightPtr, paddingPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_DrawElement --
+ *	Draw the given widget element in a given drawable area.
+ */
+
+void
+Ttk_DrawElement(
+    Ttk_ElementClass *eclass,		/* Element instance */
+    Ttk_Style style,			/* Style settings */
+    char *recordPtr,			/* The widget record. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,		/* Description of option table */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,			/* The widget window. */
+    Drawable d,				/* Where to draw element. */
+    Ttk_Box b,				/* Element area */
+    Ttk_State state)			/* Widget or element state flags. */
+{
+    if (b.width <= 0 || b.height <= 0)
+	return;
+    if (!InitializeElementRecord(
+	    eclass, style, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin,  state))
+    {
+	return;
+    }
+    eclass->specPtr->draw(
+	eclass->clientData, eclass->elementRecord,
+	tkwin, d, b, state);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ 'style' command ensemble procedures.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * TtkEnumerateHashTable --
+ * 	Helper routine.  Sets interp's result to the list of all keys
+ * 	in the hash table.
+ *
+ * Returns: TCL_OK.
+ * Side effects: Sets interp's result.
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE
+int TtkEnumerateHashTable(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_HashTable *ht)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(ht, &search);
+
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *nameObj = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tcl_GetHashKey(ht, entryPtr),-1);
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, result, nameObj);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* HashTableToDict --
+ * 	Helper routine.  Converts a TCL_STRING_KEYS Tcl_HashTable
+ * 	with Tcl_Obj * entries into a dictionary.
+ */
+static Tcl_Obj* HashTableToDict(Tcl_HashTable *ht)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(ht, &search);
+
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *nameObj = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tcl_GetHashKey(ht, entryPtr),-1);
+	Tcl_Obj *valueObj = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, nameObj);
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, valueObj);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+
+    return result;
+}
+
+/* + style map $style ? -resource statemap ... ?
+ *
+ * 	Note that resource names are unconstrained; the Style
+ * 	doesn't know what resources individual elements may use.
+ */
+static int
+StyleMapCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,		/* Master StylePackageData pointer */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,			/* Current interpreter */
+    int objc,				/* Number of arguments */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])		/* Argument objects */
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+    const char *styleName;
+    Style *stylePtr;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+usage:
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp,2,objv,"style ?-option ?value...??");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    styleName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+    stylePtr = Ttk_GetStyle(theme, styleName);
+
+    /* NOTE: StateMaps are actually Tcl_Obj *s, so HashTableToDict works
+     * for settingsTable.
+     */
+    if (objc == 3) {		/* style map $styleName */
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, HashTableToDict(&stylePtr->settingsTable));
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc == 4) {	/* style map $styleName -option */
+	const char *optionName = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr =
+	    Tcl_FindHashEntry(&stylePtr->settingsTable, optionName);
+	if (entryPtr) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, (Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	}
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc % 2 != 1) {
+	goto usage;
+    }
+
+    for (i = 3; i < objc; i += 2) {
+	const char *optionName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	Tcl_Obj *stateMap = objv[i+1];
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+	int newEntry;
+
+	/* Make sure 'stateMap' is legal:
+	 * (@@@ SHOULD: check for valid resource values as well,
+	 * but we don't know what types they should be at this level.)
+	 */
+	if (!Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj(interp, stateMap))
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+	entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(
+		&stylePtr->settingsTable,optionName,&newEntry);
+
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(stateMap);
+	if (!newEntry) {
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount((Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	}
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, stateMap);
+    }
+    ThemeChanged(pkgPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + style configure $style -option ?value...
+ */
+static int StyleConfigureCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+    const char *styleName;
+    Style *stylePtr;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+usage:
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp,2,objv,"style ?-option ?value...??");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    styleName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+    stylePtr = Ttk_GetStyle(theme, styleName);
+
+    if (objc == 3) {		/* style default $styleName */
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, HashTableToDict(&stylePtr->defaultsTable));
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc == 4) {	/* style default $styleName -option */
+	const char *optionName = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr =
+	    Tcl_FindHashEntry(&stylePtr->defaultsTable, optionName);
+	if (entryPtr) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, (Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	}
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc % 2 != 1) {
+	goto usage;
+    }
+
+    for (i = 3; i < objc; i += 2) {
+	const char *optionName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	Tcl_Obj *value = objv[i+1];
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+	int newEntry;
+
+	entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(
+		&stylePtr->defaultsTable,optionName,&newEntry);
+
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(value);
+	if (!newEntry) {
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount((Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	}
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, value);
+    }
+
+    ThemeChanged(pkgPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + style lookup $style -option ?statespec? ?defaultValue?
+ */
+static int StyleLookupCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+    Ttk_Style style = NULL;
+    const char *optionName;
+    Ttk_State state = 0ul;
+    Tcl_Obj *result;
+
+    if (objc < 4 || objc > 6) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "style -option ?state? ?default?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    style = Ttk_GetStyle(theme, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
+    if (!style) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    optionName = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+
+    if (objc >= 5) {
+	Ttk_StateSpec stateSpec;
+	/* @@@ SB: Ttk_GetStateFromObj(); 'offbits' spec is ignored */
+	if (Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(interp, objv[4], &stateSpec) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	state = stateSpec.onbits;
+    }
+
+    result = Ttk_QueryStyle(style, NULL,NULL, optionName, state);
+    if (result == NULL && objc >= 6) { /* Use caller-supplied fallback */
+	result = objv[5];
+    }
+
+    if (result) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int StyleThemeCurrentCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * const objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = NULL;
+    const char *name = NULL;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&pkgPtr->themeTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Theme *ptr = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	if (ptr == pkgPtr->currentTheme) {
+	    name = Tcl_GetHashKey(&pkgPtr->themeTable, entryPtr);
+	    break;
+	}
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+
+    if (name == NULL) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj("error: failed to get theme name", -1));
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(name, -1));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + style theme create name ?-parent $theme? ?-settings { script }?
+ */
+static int StyleThemeCreateCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    static const char *optStrings[] =
+    	 { "-parent", "-settings", NULL };
+    enum { OP_PARENT, OP_SETTINGS };
+    Ttk_Theme parentTheme = pkgPtr->defaultTheme, newTheme;
+    Tcl_Obj *settingsScript = NULL;
+    const char *themeName;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc < 4 || objc % 2 != 0) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "name ?-option value ...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    themeName = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+
+    for (i=4; i < objc; i +=2) {
+	int option;
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(
+	    interp, objv[i], optStrings, "option", 0, &option) != TCL_OK)
+	{
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	switch (option) {
+	    case OP_PARENT:
+		parentTheme = LookupTheme(
+		    interp, pkgPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]));
+		if (!parentTheme)
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+	    	break;
+	    case OP_SETTINGS:
+		settingsScript = objv[i+1];
+		break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    newTheme = Ttk_CreateTheme(interp, themeName, parentTheme);
+    if (!newTheme) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Evaluate the -settings script, if supplied:
+     */
+    if (settingsScript) {
+	Ttk_Theme oldTheme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+	int status;
+
+	pkgPtr->currentTheme = newTheme;
+	status = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, settingsScript, 0);
+	pkgPtr->currentTheme = oldTheme;
+	return status;
+    } else {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + style theme names --
+ * 	Return list of registered themes.
+ */
+static int StyleThemeNamesCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    return TtkEnumerateHashTable(interp, &pkgPtr->themeTable);
+}
+
+/* + style theme settings $theme $script
+ *
+ * 	Temporarily sets the current theme to $themeName,
+ * 	evaluates $script, then restores the old theme.
+ */
+static int
+StyleThemeSettingsCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,		/* Master StylePackageData pointer */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,			/* Current interpreter */
+    int objc,				/* Number of arguments */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])		/* Argument objects */
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme oldTheme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+    Ttk_Theme newTheme;
+    int status;
+
+    if (objc != 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "theme script");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    newTheme = LookupTheme(interp, pkgPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+    if (!newTheme)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    pkgPtr->currentTheme = newTheme;
+    status = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, objv[4], 0);
+    pkgPtr->currentTheme = oldTheme;
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/* + style element create name type ? ...args ?
+ */
+static int StyleElementCreateCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+    const char *elementName, *factoryName;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    FactoryRec *recPtr;
+
+    if (objc < 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "name type ?-option value ...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    elementName = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+    factoryName = Tcl_GetString(objv[4]);
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&pkgPtr->factoryTable, factoryName);
+    if (!entryPtr) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "No such element type ", factoryName, NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    recPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+
+    return recPtr->factory(interp, recPtr->clientData,
+	    theme, elementName, objc - 5, objv + 5);
+}
+
+/* + style element names --
+ * 	Return a list of elements defined in the current theme.
+ */
+static int StyleElementNamesCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return TtkEnumerateHashTable(interp, &theme->elementTable);
+}
+
+/* + style element options $element --
+ * 	Return list of element options for specified element
+ */
+static int StyleElementOptionsCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+    const char *elementName;
+    Ttk_ElementClass *elementClass;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "element");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    elementName = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+    elementClass = Ttk_GetElement(theme, elementName);
+    if (elementClass) {
+	Ttk_ElementSpec *specPtr = elementClass->specPtr;
+	Ttk_ElementOptionSpec *option = specPtr->options;
+	Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+
+	while (option->optionName) {
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(
+		interp, result, Tcl_NewStringObj(option->optionName,-1));
+	    ++option;
+	}
+
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "element ", elementName, " not found", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* + style layout name ?spec?
+ */
+static int StyleLayoutCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+    const char *layoutName;
+    Ttk_LayoutTemplate layoutTemplate;
+
+    if (objc < 3 || objc > 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "name ?spec?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    layoutName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	layoutTemplate = Ttk_FindLayoutTemplate(theme, layoutName);
+	if (!layoutTemplate) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Layout ", layoutName, " not found", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Ttk_UnparseLayoutTemplate(layoutTemplate));
+    } else {
+	layoutTemplate = Ttk_ParseLayoutTemplate(interp, objv[3]);
+	if (!layoutTemplate) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Ttk_RegisterLayoutTemplate(theme, layoutName, layoutTemplate);
+	ThemeChanged(pkgPtr);
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + style theme use $theme --
+ *  	Sets the current theme to $theme
+ */
+static int
+StyleThemeUseCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,		/* Master StylePackageData pointer */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,			/* Current interpreter */
+    int objc,				/* Number of arguments */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])		/* Argument objects */
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme;
+
+    if (objc < 3 || objc > 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?theme?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	return StyleThemeCurrentCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv);
+    }
+
+    theme = LookupTheme(interp, pkgPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+    if (!theme) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    return Ttk_UseTheme(interp, theme);
+}
+
+/*
+ * StyleObjCmd --
+ *	Implementation of the [style] command.
+ */
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble StyleThemeEnsemble[] = {
+    { "create", StyleThemeCreateCmd, 0 },
+    { "names", StyleThemeNamesCmd, 0 },
+    { "settings", StyleThemeSettingsCmd, 0 },
+    { "use", StyleThemeUseCmd, 0 },
+    { NULL, 0, 0 }
+};
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble StyleElementEnsemble[] = {
+    { "create", StyleElementCreateCmd, 0 },
+    { "names", StyleElementNamesCmd, 0 },
+    { "options", StyleElementOptionsCmd, 0 },
+    { NULL, 0, 0 }
+};
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble StyleEnsemble[] = {
+    { "configure", StyleConfigureCmd, 0 },
+    { "map", StyleMapCmd, 0 },
+    { "lookup", StyleLookupCmd, 0 },
+    { "layout", StyleLayoutCmd, 0 },
+    { "theme", 0, StyleThemeEnsemble },
+    { "element", 0, StyleElementEnsemble },
+    { NULL, 0, 0 }
+};
+
+static int
+StyleObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,		/* Master StylePackageData pointer */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,			/* Current interpreter */
+    int objc,				/* Number of arguments */
+    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])		/* Argument objects */
+{
+    return Ttk_InvokeEnsemble(StyleEnsemble, 1, clientData,interp,objc,objv);
+}
+
+MODULE_SCOPE 
+int Ttk_InvokeEnsemble(	/* Run an ensemble command */
+    const Ttk_Ensemble *ensemble, int cmdIndex,
+    void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    while (cmdIndex < objc) {
+	int index;
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp,
+		objv[cmdIndex], ensemble, sizeof(ensemble[0]),
+		"command", 0, &index)
+	    != TCL_OK)
+	{
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	if (ensemble[index].command) {
+	    return ensemble[index].command(clientData, interp, objc, objv);
+	}
+	ensemble = ensemble[index].ensemble;
+	++cmdIndex;
+    }
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, cmdIndex, objv, "option ?arg ...?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_StylePkgInit --
+ *	Initializes all the structures that are used by the style
+ *	package on a per-interp basis.
+ */
+
+void Ttk_StylePkgInit(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Tcl_Namespace *nsPtr;
+
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = (StylePackageData *)
+	ckalloc(sizeof(StylePackageData));
+
+    pkgPtr->interp = interp;
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&pkgPtr->themeTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&pkgPtr->factoryTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    pkgPtr->cleanupList = NULL;
+    pkgPtr->cache = Ttk_CreateResourceCache(interp);
+    pkgPtr->themeChangePending = 0;
+
+    Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, PKG_ASSOC_KEY, Ttk_StylePkgFree, pkgPtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Create the default system theme:
+     *
+     * pkgPtr->defaultTheme must be initialized to 0 before
+     * calling Ttk_CreateTheme for the first time, since it's used
+     * as the parent theme.
+     */
+    pkgPtr->defaultTheme = 0;
+    pkgPtr->defaultTheme = pkgPtr->currentTheme =
+	Ttk_CreateTheme(interp, "default", NULL);
+
+    /*
+     * Register null element, used as a last-resort fallback:
+     */
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, pkgPtr->defaultTheme, "", &ttkNullElementSpec, 0);
+
+    /*
+     * Register commands:
+     */
+    Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "::ttk::style", StyleObjCmd, pkgPtr, 0);
+
+    nsPtr = Tcl_FindNamespace(interp, "::ttk", NULL, TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG);
+    Tcl_Export(interp, nsPtr, "style", 0 /* dontResetList */);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElementFactory(interp, "from", Ttk_CloneElement, 0);
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkTheme.h b/generic/ttk/ttkTheme.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7bf2a7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkTheme.h
@@ -0,0 +1,444 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2003 Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ *
+ * Declarations for Tk theme engine.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TTKTHEME
+#define _TTKTHEME
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+#ifndef MODULE_SCOPE
+#   ifdef __cplusplus
+#	define MODULE_SCOPE extern "C"
+#   else
+#	define MODULE_SCOPE extern
+#   endif
+#endif
+
+#define TTKAPI MODULE_SCOPE
+
+/* Ttk syncs to the Tk version & patchlevel */
+#define TTK_VERSION    TK_VERSION
+#define TTK_PATCH_LEVEL TK_PATCH_LEVEL
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Defaults for element option specifications.
+ */
+#define DEFAULT_FONT 		"TkDefaultFont"
+#define DEFAULT_BACKGROUND	"#d9d9d9"
+#define DEFAULT_FOREGROUND	"black"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget states.
+ * 	Keep in sync with stateNames[] in tkstate.c.
+ */
+
+typedef unsigned int Ttk_State;
+
+#define TTK_STATE_ACTIVE	(1<<0)
+#define TTK_STATE_DISABLED	(1<<1)
+#define TTK_STATE_FOCUS		(1<<2)
+#define TTK_STATE_PRESSED	(1<<3)
+#define TTK_STATE_SELECTED	(1<<4)
+#define TTK_STATE_BACKGROUND	(1<<5)
+#define TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE	(1<<6)
+#define TTK_STATE_INVALID	(1<<7)
+#define TTK_STATE_READONLY 	(1<<8)
+#define TTK_STATE_HOVER		(1<<9)
+#define TTK_STATE_USER6		(1<<10)
+#define TTK_STATE_USER5		(1<<11)
+#define TTK_STATE_USER4		(1<<12)
+#define TTK_STATE_USER3		(1<<13)
+#define TTK_STATE_USER2		(1<<14)
+#define TTK_STATE_USER1		(1<<15)
+
+/* Maintenance note: if you get all the way to "USER1",
+ * see tkstate.c
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    unsigned int onbits;	/* bits to turn on */
+    unsigned int offbits;	/* bits to turn off */
+} Ttk_StateSpec;
+
+#define Ttk_StateMatches(state, spec) \
+    (((state) & ((spec)->onbits|(spec)->offbits)) == (spec)->onbits)
+
+#define Ttk_ModifyState(state, spec) \
+    (((state) & ~(spec)->offbits) | (spec)->onbits)
+
+TTKAPI int Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj *, Ttk_StateSpec *);
+TTKAPI Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewStateSpecObj(unsigned int onbits,unsigned int offbits);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ State maps and state tables.
+ */
+typedef Tcl_Obj *Ttk_StateMap;
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_StateMap Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj *);
+TTKAPI Tcl_Obj *Ttk_StateMapLookup(Tcl_Interp*, Ttk_StateMap, Ttk_State);
+
+/*
+ * Table for looking up an integer index based on widget state:
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    int index;			/* Value to return if this entry matches */
+    unsigned int onBits;	/* Bits which must be set */
+    unsigned int offBits;	/* Bits which must be cleared */
+} Ttk_StateTable;
+
+TTKAPI int Ttk_StateTableLookup(Ttk_StateTable map[], Ttk_State);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Padding.
+ * 	Used to represent internal padding and borders.
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    short left;
+    short top;
+    short right;
+    short bottom;
+} Ttk_Padding;
+
+TTKAPI int Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(Tcl_Interp*,Tk_Window,Tcl_Obj*,Ttk_Padding*);
+TTKAPI int Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(Tcl_Interp*,Tcl_Obj*,Ttk_Padding*);
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding Ttk_MakePadding(short l, short t, short r, short b);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding Ttk_UniformPadding(short borderWidth);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding Ttk_AddPadding(Ttk_Padding, Ttk_Padding);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding Ttk_RelievePadding(Ttk_Padding, int relief, int n);
+
+#define Ttk_PaddingWidth(p) ((p).left + (p).right)
+#define Ttk_PaddingHeight(p) ((p).top + (p).bottom)
+
+#define Ttk_SetMargins(tkwin, pad) \
+    Tk_SetInternalBorderEx(tkwin, pad.left, pad.right, pad.top, pad.bottom)
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Boxes.
+ * 	Used to represent rectangular regions
+ */
+typedef struct 	/* Hey, this is an XRectangle! */
+{
+    int x;
+    int y;
+    int width;
+    int height;
+} Ttk_Box;
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_MakeBox(int x, int y, int width, int height);
+TTKAPI int Ttk_BoxContains(Ttk_Box, int x, int y);
+
+#define Ttk_WinBox(tkwin) Ttk_MakeBox(0,0,Tk_Width(tkwin),Tk_Height(tkwin))
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout utilities.
+ */
+typedef enum {
+    TTK_SIDE_LEFT, TTK_SIDE_TOP, TTK_SIDE_RIGHT, TTK_SIDE_BOTTOM
+} Ttk_Side;
+
+typedef unsigned int Ttk_Sticky;
+
+/*
+ * -sticky bits for Ttk_StickBox:
+ */
+#define TTK_STICK_W	(0x1)
+#define TTK_STICK_E	(0x2)
+#define TTK_STICK_N	(0x4)
+#define TTK_STICK_S	(0x8)
+
+/*
+ * Aliases and useful combinations:
+ */
+#define TTK_FILL_X	(0x3)	/* -sticky ew */
+#define TTK_FILL_Y	(0xC)	/* -sticky ns */
+#define TTK_FILL_BOTH	(0xF)	/* -sticky nswe */
+
+TTKAPI int Ttk_GetStickyFromObj(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj *, Ttk_Sticky *);
+TTKAPI Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewStickyObj(Ttk_Sticky);
+
+/*
+ * Extra bits for position specifications (combine -side and -sticky)
+ */
+
+typedef unsigned int Ttk_PositionSpec;	/* See below */
+
+#define TTK_PACK_LEFT	(0x10)	/* pack at left of current parcel */
+#define TTK_PACK_RIGHT	(0x20)	/* pack at right of current parcel */
+#define TTK_PACK_TOP	(0x40)	/* pack at top of current parcel */
+#define TTK_PACK_BOTTOM	(0x80)	/* pack at bottom of current parcel */
+#define TTK_EXPAND	(0x100)	/* use entire parcel */
+#define TTK_BORDER	(0x200)	/* draw this element after children */
+#define TTK_UNIT	(0x400)	/* treat descendants as a part of element */
+
+/*
+ * Extra bits for layout specifications
+ */
+#define _TTK_CHILDREN	(0x1000)/* for LayoutSpecs -- children follow */
+#define _TTK_LAYOUT_END	(0x2000)/* for LayoutSpecs -- end of child list */
+#define _TTK_LAYOUT	(0x4000)/* for LayoutSpec tables -- define layout */
+
+#define _TTK_MASK_STICK (0x0F)	/* See Ttk_UnparseLayout() */
+#define _TTK_MASK_PACK	(0xF0)	/* See Ttk_UnparseLayout(), packStrings */
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_PackBox(Ttk_Box *cavity, int w, int h, Ttk_Side side);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_StickBox(Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h, Ttk_Sticky sticky);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_AnchorBox(Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h, Tk_Anchor anchor);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_PadBox(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_ExpandBox(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_PlaceBox(Ttk_Box *cavity, int w,int h, Ttk_Side,Ttk_Sticky);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_PositionBox(Ttk_Box *cavity, int w, int h, Ttk_PositionSpec);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Themes.
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_StylePkgInit(Tcl_Interp *);
+
+typedef struct Ttk_Theme_ *Ttk_Theme;
+typedef struct Ttk_ElementClass_ Ttk_ElementClass;
+typedef struct Ttk_Layout_ *Ttk_Layout;
+typedef struct Ttk_LayoutNode_ *Ttk_Element;
+typedef struct Ttk_Style_ *Ttk_Style;
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetCurrentTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme Ttk_CreateTheme(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, Ttk_Theme parent);
+
+typedef int (Ttk_ThemeEnabledProc)(Ttk_Theme theme, void *clientData);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_SetThemeEnabledProc(Ttk_Theme, Ttk_ThemeEnabledProc, void *);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_UseTheme(Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_Theme);
+
+typedef void (Ttk_CleanupProc)(void *clientData);
+TTKAPI void Ttk_RegisterCleanup(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, void *deleteData, Ttk_CleanupProc *cleanupProc);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Elements.
+ */
+
+enum TTKStyleVersion2 { TK_STYLE_VERSION_2 = 2 };
+
+typedef void (Ttk_ElementSizeProc)(void *clientData, void *elementRecord,
+        Tk_Window tkwin, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding*);
+typedef void (Ttk_ElementDrawProc)(void *clientData, void *elementRecord,
+        Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state);
+
+typedef struct Ttk_ElementOptionSpec
+{
+    const char *optionName;		/* Command-line name of the widget option */
+    Tk_OptionType type; 	/* Accepted option types */
+    int offset;			/* Offset of Tcl_Obj* field in element record */
+    const char *defaultValue;		/* Default value to used if resource missing */
+} Ttk_ElementOptionSpec;
+
+#define TK_OPTION_ANY TK_OPTION_STRING
+
+typedef struct Ttk_ElementSpec {
+    enum TTKStyleVersion2 version;	/* Version of the style support. */
+    size_t elementSize;			/* Size of element record */
+    Ttk_ElementOptionSpec *options;	/* List of options, NULL-terminated */
+    Ttk_ElementSizeProc *size;		/* Compute min size and padding */
+    Ttk_ElementDrawProc *draw;  	/* Draw the element */
+} Ttk_ElementSpec;
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_ElementClass *Ttk_RegisterElement(
+	Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme theme, const char *elementName,
+	Ttk_ElementSpec *, void *clientData);
+
+typedef int (*Ttk_ElementFactory)
+	(Tcl_Interp *, void *clientData,
+	 Ttk_Theme, const char *elementName, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+
+TTKAPI int Ttk_RegisterElementFactory(
+	Tcl_Interp *, const char *name, Ttk_ElementFactory, void *clientData);
+
+/*
+ * Null element implementation:
+ * has no geometry or layout; may be used as a stub or placeholder.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*unused;
+} NullElement;
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkNullElementSize
+	(void *, void *, Tk_Window, int *, int *, Ttk_Padding *);
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkNullElementDraw
+	(void *, void *, Tk_Window, Drawable, Ttk_Box, Ttk_State);
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TtkNullElementOptions[];
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_ElementSpec ttkNullElementSpec;
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout templates.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    const char *	elementName;
+    unsigned		opcode;
+} TTKLayoutInstruction, *Ttk_LayoutSpec;
+
+#define TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT_TABLE(name) \
+				static TTKLayoutInstruction name[] = {
+#define TTK_LAYOUT(name, content) \
+				{ name, _TTK_CHILDREN|_TTK_LAYOUT }, \
+				content \
+				{ 0, _TTK_LAYOUT_END },
+#define TTK_GROUP(name, flags, children) \
+				{ name, flags | _TTK_CHILDREN }, \
+				children \
+				{ 0, _TTK_LAYOUT_END },
+#define TTK_NODE(name, flags)	{ name, flags },
+#define TTK_END_LAYOUT_TABLE	{ 0, _TTK_LAYOUT | _TTK_LAYOUT_END } };
+
+#define TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(name)	static TTKLayoutInstruction name[] = {
+#define TTK_END_LAYOUT 		{ 0, _TTK_LAYOUT_END } };
+
+TTKAPI void Ttk_RegisterLayout(
+    Ttk_Theme theme, const char *className, Ttk_LayoutSpec layoutSpec);
+
+TTKAPI void Ttk_RegisterLayouts(
+    Ttk_Theme theme, Ttk_LayoutSpec layoutTable);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout instances.
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Layout Ttk_CreateLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_Theme, const char *name,
+    void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable, Tk_Window tkwin);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Layout Ttk_CreateSublayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_Theme, Ttk_Layout, const char *name, Tk_OptionTable);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_FreeLayout(Ttk_Layout);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_LayoutSize(Ttk_Layout,Ttk_State,int *widthPtr,int *heightPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_PlaceLayout(Ttk_Layout, Ttk_State, Ttk_Box);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_DrawLayout(Ttk_Layout, Ttk_State, Drawable);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_RebindSublayout(Ttk_Layout, void *recordPtr);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Element Ttk_IdentifyElement(Ttk_Layout, int x, int y);
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Element Ttk_FindElement(Ttk_Layout, const char *nodeName);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE const char *Ttk_ElementName(Ttk_Element);
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Box Ttk_ElementParcel(Ttk_Element);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Box Ttk_ClientRegion(Ttk_Layout, const char *elementName);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Box Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalParcel(Ttk_Layout,Ttk_Element);
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Padding Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalPadding(Ttk_Layout,Ttk_Element);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_LayoutNodeReqSize(Ttk_Layout, Ttk_Element, int *w, int *h);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_PlaceElement(Ttk_Layout, Ttk_Element, Ttk_Box);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_ChangeElementState(Ttk_Element,unsigned set,unsigned clr);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Obj *Ttk_QueryOption(Ttk_Layout, const char *, Ttk_State);
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_Style Ttk_LayoutStyle(Ttk_Layout);
+TTKAPI Tcl_Obj *Ttk_StyleDefault(Ttk_Style, const char *optionName);
+TTKAPI Tcl_Obj *Ttk_StyleMap(Ttk_Style, const char *optionName, Ttk_State);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Resource cache.
+ * 	See resource.c for explanation.
+ */
+
+typedef struct Ttk_ResourceCache_ *Ttk_ResourceCache;
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_ResourceCache Ttk_CreateResourceCache(Tcl_Interp *);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_FreeResourceCache(Ttk_ResourceCache);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_ResourceCache Ttk_GetResourceCache(Tcl_Interp*);
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UseFont(Ttk_ResourceCache, Tk_Window, Tcl_Obj *);
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UseColor(Ttk_ResourceCache, Tk_Window, Tcl_Obj *);
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UseBorder(Ttk_ResourceCache, Tk_Window, Tcl_Obj *);
+MODULE_SCOPE Tk_Image Ttk_UseImage(Ttk_ResourceCache, Tk_Window, Tcl_Obj *);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_RegisterNamedColor(Ttk_ResourceCache, const char *, XColor *);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Image specifications.
+ */
+
+typedef struct TtkImageSpec Ttk_ImageSpec;
+TTKAPI Ttk_ImageSpec *TtkGetImageSpec(Tcl_Interp *, Tk_Window, Tcl_Obj *);
+TTKAPI void TtkFreeImageSpec(Ttk_ImageSpec *);
+TTKAPI Tk_Image TtkSelectImage(Ttk_ImageSpec *, Ttk_State);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Miscellaneous enumerations.
+ * 	Other stuff that element implementations need to know about.
+ */
+typedef enum 			/* -default option values */
+{
+    TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_NORMAL,	/* widget defaultable */
+    TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_ACTIVE,	/* currently the default widget */
+    TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED	/* not defaultable */
+} Ttk_ButtonDefaultState;
+
+TTKAPI int Ttk_GetButtonDefaultStateFromObj(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj *, int *);
+
+typedef enum 			/* -compound option values */
+{
+    TTK_COMPOUND_NONE,  	/* image if specified, otherwise text */
+    TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT,  	/* text only */
+    TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE,  	/* image only */
+    TTK_COMPOUND_CENTER,	/* text overlays image */
+    TTK_COMPOUND_TOP,   	/* image above text */
+    TTK_COMPOUND_BOTTOM,	/* image below text */
+    TTK_COMPOUND_LEFT,   	/* image to left of text */
+    TTK_COMPOUND_RIGHT  	/* image to right of text */
+} Ttk_Compound;
+
+TTKAPI int Ttk_GetCompoundFromObj(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj *, int *);
+
+typedef enum { 		/* -orient option values */
+    TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL,
+    TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL
+} Ttk_Orient;
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Utilities.
+ */
+
+typedef struct TtkEnsemble {
+    const char *name;			/* subcommand name */
+    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *command; 		/* subcommand implementation, OR: */
+    const struct TtkEnsemble *ensemble;	/* subcommand ensemble */
+} Ttk_Ensemble;
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_InvokeEnsemble(	/* Run an ensemble command */
+    const Ttk_Ensemble *commands, int cmdIndex,
+    void *clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int TtkEnumerateHashTable(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_HashTable *);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Stub table declarations.
+ */
+
+#include "ttkDecls.h"
+
+/*
+ * Drawing utilities for theme code:
+ * (@@@ find a better home for this)
+ */
+typedef enum { ARROW_UP, ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT } ArrowDirection;
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkArrowSize(int h, ArrowDirection, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkDrawArrow(Display *, Drawable, GC, Ttk_Box, ArrowDirection);
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkFillArrow(Display *, Drawable, GC, Ttk_Box, ArrowDirection);
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+#endif /* _TTKTHEME */
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkThemeInt.h b/generic/ttk/ttkThemeInt.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3aaada8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkThemeInt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+/*
+ * Theme engine: private definitions.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TTKTHEMEINT
+#define _TTKTHEMEINT
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+typedef struct Ttk_TemplateNode_ Ttk_TemplateNode, *Ttk_LayoutTemplate;
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_ElementClass *Ttk_GetElement(Ttk_Theme, const char *name);
+MODULE_SCOPE const char *Ttk_ElementClassName(Ttk_ElementClass *);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_ElementSize(
+	Ttk_ElementClass *, Ttk_Style, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable,
+	Tk_Window tkwin, Ttk_State state,
+	int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding*);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_DrawElement(
+	Ttk_ElementClass *, Ttk_Style, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable,
+	Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Obj *Ttk_QueryStyle(
+    Ttk_Style, void *, Tk_OptionTable, const char *, Ttk_State state);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_LayoutTemplate Ttk_ParseLayoutTemplate(
+	Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj *);
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UnparseLayoutTemplate(Ttk_LayoutTemplate);
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_LayoutTemplate Ttk_BuildLayoutTemplate(Ttk_LayoutSpec);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_FreeLayoutTemplate(Ttk_LayoutTemplate);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_RegisterLayoutTemplate(
+    Ttk_Theme theme, const char *layoutName, Ttk_LayoutTemplate);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Style Ttk_GetStyle(Ttk_Theme themePtr, const char *styleName);
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_LayoutTemplate Ttk_FindLayoutTemplate(
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr, const char *layoutName);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE const char *Ttk_StyleName(Ttk_Style);
+
+#endif /* _TTKTHEMEINT */
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkTrace.c b/generic/ttk/ttkTrace.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8bc8519
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkTrace.c
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright 2003, Joe English
+ *
+ * Simplified interface to Tcl_TraceVariable.
+ *
+ * PROBLEM: Can't distinguish "variable does not exist" (which is OK) 
+ * from other errors (which are not).
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+struct TtkTraceHandle_
+{
+    Tcl_Interp		*interp;	/* Containing interpreter */
+    Tcl_Obj 		*varnameObj;	/* Name of variable being traced */
+    Ttk_TraceProc	callback;	/* Callback procedure */
+    void		*clientData;	/* Data to pass to callback */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Tcl_VarTraceProc for trace handles.
+ */
+static char *
+VarTraceProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Widget record pointer */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, 	/* Interpreter containing variable. */
+    const char *name1,		/* (unused) */
+    const char *name2,		/* (unused) */
+    int flags)			/* Information about what happened. */
+{
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *tracePtr = clientData;
+    const char *name, *value;
+    Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;
+
+    if (flags & TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    name = Tcl_GetString(tracePtr->varnameObj);
+
+    /*
+     * If the variable is being unset, then re-establish the trace:
+     */
+    if (flags & TCL_TRACE_DESTROYED) {
+	/*
+	 * If a prior call to Ttk_UntraceVariable() left behind an
+	 * indicator that we wanted this handler to be deleted (see below),
+	 * cleanup the ClientData bits and exit.
+	 */
+	if (tracePtr->interp == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(tracePtr->varnameObj);
+	    ckfree((ClientData)tracePtr);
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+	Tcl_TraceVar(interp, name,
+		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
+		VarTraceProc, clientData);
+	tracePtr->callback(tracePtr->clientData, NULL);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Call the callback:
+     */
+    valuePtr = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(interp, name, NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    value = valuePtr ?  Tcl_GetString(valuePtr) : NULL;
+    tracePtr->callback(tracePtr->clientData, value);
+
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_TraceVariable(interp, varNameObj, callback, clientdata) --
+ * 	Attach a write trace to the specified variable,
+ * 	which will pass the variable's value to 'callback'
+ * 	whenever the variable is set.
+ *
+ * 	When the variable is unset, passes NULL to the callback
+ * 	and reattaches the trace.
+ */
+Ttk_TraceHandle *Ttk_TraceVariable(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_Obj *varnameObj,
+    Ttk_TraceProc callback,
+    void *clientData)
+{
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *h = (Ttk_TraceHandle*)ckalloc(sizeof(*h));
+    int status;
+
+    h->interp = interp;
+    h->varnameObj = Tcl_DuplicateObj(varnameObj);
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(h->varnameObj);
+    h->clientData = clientData;
+    h->callback = callback;
+
+    status = Tcl_TraceVar(interp, Tcl_GetString(varnameObj),
+	    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
+	    VarTraceProc, (ClientData)h);
+
+    if (status != TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(h->varnameObj);
+	ckfree((ClientData)h);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    return h;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_UntraceVariable --
+ * 	Remove previously-registered trace and free the handle.
+ */
+void Ttk_UntraceVariable(Ttk_TraceHandle *h)
+{
+    if (h) {
+	ClientData cd = NULL;
+
+	/*
+	 * Workaround for Tcl Bug 3062331.  The trace design problem is
+	 * that when variable unset traces fire, Tcl documents that the
+	 * traced variable has already been unset.  It's already gone.
+	 * So from within an unset trace, if you try to call
+	 * Tcl_UntraceVar() on that variable, it will do nothing, because
+	 * the variable by that name can no longer be found.  It's gone.
+	 * This means callers of Tcl_UntraceVar() that might be running
+	 * in response to an unset trace have to handle the possibility
+	 * that their Tcl_UntraceVar() call will do nothing.  In this case,
+	 * we have to support the possibility that Tcl_UntraceVar() will
+	 * leave the trace in place, so we need to leave the ClientData
+	 * untouched so when that trace does fire it will not crash.
+	 */
+
+	/*
+	 * Search the traces on the variable to see if the one we are tasked
+	 * with removing is present.
+	 */
+	while ((cd = Tcl_VarTraceInfo(h->interp, Tcl_GetString(h->varnameObj),
+		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY, VarTraceProc, cd)) != NULL) {
+	    if (cd == (ClientData) h) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+	/*
+	 * If the trace we wish to delete is not visible, Tcl_UntraceVar
+	 * will do nothing, so don't try to call it.  Instead set an
+	 * indicator in the Ttk_TraceHandle that we need to cleanup later.
+	 */
+	if (cd == NULL) {
+	    h->interp = NULL;
+	    return;
+	}
+	Tcl_UntraceVar(h->interp, Tcl_GetString(h->varnameObj),
+		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
+		VarTraceProc, (ClientData)h);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(h->varnameObj);
+	ckfree((ClientData)h);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_FireTrace --
+ * 	Executes a trace handle as if the variable has been written.
+ *
+ * 	Note: may reenter the interpreter.
+ */
+int Ttk_FireTrace(Ttk_TraceHandle *tracePtr)
+{
+    Tcl_Interp *interp = tracePtr->interp;
+    void *clientData = tracePtr->clientData;
+    const char *name = Tcl_GetString(tracePtr->varnameObj);
+    Ttk_TraceProc callback = tracePtr->callback;
+    Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;
+    const char *value;
+
+    /* Read the variable.
+     * Note that this can reenter the interpreter, and anything can happen --
+     * including the current trace handle being freed!
+     */
+    valuePtr = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(interp, name, NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    value = valuePtr ? Tcl_GetString(valuePtr) : NULL;
+
+    /* Call callback.
+     */
+    callback(clientData, value);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkTrack.c b/generic/ttk/ttkTrack.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9cf8267
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkTrack.c
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * TtkTrackElementState() -- helper routine for widgets
+ * like scrollbars in which individual elements may
+ * be active or pressed instead of the widget as a whole.
+ *
+ * Usage:
+ * 	TtkTrackElementState(&recordPtr->core);
+ *
+ * Registers an event handler on the widget that tracks pointer
+ * events and updates the state of the element under the
+ * mouse cursor.
+ *
+ * The "active" element is the one under the mouse cursor,
+ * and is normally set to the ACTIVE state unless another element
+ * is currently being pressed.
+ *
+ * The active element becomes "pressed" on <ButtonPress> events,
+ * and remains "active" and "pressed" until the corresponding
+ * <ButtonRelease> event.
+ *
+ * TODO: Handle "chords" properly (e.g., <B1-ButtonPress-2>)
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+typedef struct {
+    WidgetCore		*corePtr;	/* widget to track */
+    Ttk_Layout		tracking;	/* current layout being tracked */
+    Ttk_Element 	activeElement;	/* element under the mouse cursor */
+    Ttk_Element 	pressedElement; /* currently pressed element */
+} ElementStateTracker;
+
+/*
+ * ActivateElement(es, node) --
+ * 	Make 'node' the active element if non-NULL.
+ * 	Deactivates the currently active element if different.
+ *
+ * 	The active element has TTK_STATE_ACTIVE set _unless_
+ * 	another element is 'pressed'
+ */
+static void ActivateElement(ElementStateTracker *es, Ttk_Element element)
+{
+    if (es->activeElement == element) {
+	/* No change */
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (!es->pressedElement) {
+	if (es->activeElement) {
+	    /* Deactivate old element */
+	    Ttk_ChangeElementState(es->activeElement, 0,TTK_STATE_ACTIVE);
+	}
+	if (element) {
+	    /* Activate new element */
+	    Ttk_ChangeElementState(element, TTK_STATE_ACTIVE,0);
+	}
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(es->corePtr);
+    }
+
+    es->activeElement = element;
+}
+
+/* ReleaseElement --
+ * 	Releases the currently pressed element, if any.
+ */
+static void ReleaseElement(ElementStateTracker *es)
+{
+    if (!es->pressedElement)
+	return;
+
+    Ttk_ChangeElementState(
+	es->pressedElement, 0,TTK_STATE_PRESSED|TTK_STATE_ACTIVE);
+    es->pressedElement = 0;
+
+    /* Reactivate element under the mouse cursor:
+     */
+    if (es->activeElement)
+	Ttk_ChangeElementState(es->activeElement, TTK_STATE_ACTIVE,0);
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(es->corePtr);
+}
+
+/* PressElement --
+ * 	Presses the specified element.
+ */
+static void PressElement(ElementStateTracker *es, Ttk_Element element)
+{
+    if (es->pressedElement) {
+	ReleaseElement(es);
+    }
+
+    if (element) {
+	Ttk_ChangeElementState(
+	    element, TTK_STATE_PRESSED|TTK_STATE_ACTIVE, 0);
+    }
+
+    es->pressedElement = element;
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(es->corePtr);
+}
+
+/* ElementStateEventProc --
+ * 	Event handler for tracking element states.
+ */
+
+static const unsigned ElementStateMask =
+      ButtonPressMask
+    | ButtonReleaseMask
+    | PointerMotionMask
+    | LeaveWindowMask
+    | EnterWindowMask
+    | StructureNotifyMask
+    ;
+
+static void
+ElementStateEventProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *ev)
+{
+    ElementStateTracker *es = clientData;
+    Ttk_Layout layout = es->corePtr->layout;
+    Ttk_Element element;
+
+    /* Guard against dangling pointers [#2431428]
+     */
+    if (es->tracking != layout) {
+	es->pressedElement = es->activeElement = 0;
+	es->tracking = layout;
+    }
+
+    switch (ev->type)
+    {
+	case MotionNotify :
+	    element = Ttk_IdentifyElement(
+		layout, ev->xmotion.x, ev->xmotion.y);
+	    ActivateElement(es, element);
+	    break;
+	case LeaveNotify:
+	    ActivateElement(es, 0);
+	    if (ev->xcrossing.mode == NotifyGrab)
+		PressElement(es, 0);
+	    break;
+	case EnterNotify:
+	    element = Ttk_IdentifyElement(
+		layout, ev->xcrossing.x, ev->xcrossing.y);
+	    ActivateElement(es, element);
+	    break;
+	case ButtonPress:
+	    element = Ttk_IdentifyElement(
+		layout, ev->xbutton.x, ev->xbutton.y);
+	    if (element)
+		PressElement(es, element);
+	    break;
+	case ButtonRelease:
+	    ReleaseElement(es);
+	    break;
+	case DestroyNotify:
+	    /* Unregister this event handler and free client data.
+	     */
+	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(es->corePtr->tkwin,
+		    ElementStateMask, ElementStateEventProc, es);
+	    ckfree(clientData);
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * TtkTrackElementState --
+ * 	Register an event handler to manage the 'pressed'
+ * 	and 'active' states of individual widget elements.
+ */
+
+void TtkTrackElementState(WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    ElementStateTracker *es = (ElementStateTracker*)ckalloc(sizeof(*es));
+    es->corePtr = corePtr;
+    es->tracking = 0;
+    es->activeElement = es->pressedElement = 0;
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(corePtr->tkwin,
+	    ElementStateMask,ElementStateEventProc,es);
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkTreeview.c b/generic/ttk/ttkTreeview.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..862c7f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkTreeview.c
@@ -0,0 +1,3442 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * ttk::treeview widget implementation.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+#define DEF_TREE_ROWS		"10"
+#define DEF_COLWIDTH		"200"
+#define DEF_MINWIDTH		"20"
+
+static const int DEFAULT_ROWHEIGHT 	= 20;
+static const int DEFAULT_INDENT 	= 20;
+static const int HALO   		= 4;	/* separator */
+
+#define TTK_STATE_OPEN TTK_STATE_USER1
+#define TTK_STATE_LEAF TTK_STATE_USER2
+
+#define STATE_CHANGED	 	(0x100)	/* item state option changed */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tree items.
+ *
+ * INVARIANTS:
+ * 	item->children	==> item->children->parent == item
+ *	item->next	==> item->next->parent == item->parent
+ * 	item->next 	==> item->next->prev == item
+ * 	item->prev 	==> item->prev->next == item
+ */
+
+typedef struct TreeItemRec TreeItem;
+struct TreeItemRec {
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;	/* Back-pointer to hash table entry */
+    TreeItem	*parent;	/* Parent item */
+    TreeItem	*children;	/* Linked list of child items */
+    TreeItem	*next;		/* Next sibling */
+    TreeItem	*prev;		/* Previous sibling */
+
+    /*
+     * Options and instance data:
+     */
+    Ttk_State 	state;
+    Tcl_Obj	*textObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*imageObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*valuesObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*openObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*tagsObj;
+
+    /*
+     * Derived resources:
+     */
+    Ttk_TagSet	tagset;
+    Ttk_ImageSpec *imagespec;
+};
+
+#define ITEM_OPTION_TAGS_CHANGED	0x100
+#define ITEM_OPTION_IMAGE_CHANGED	0x200
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec ItemOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
+	"", Tk_Offset(TreeItem,textObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TreeItem,imageObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,ITEM_OPTION_IMAGE_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-values", "values", "Values",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TreeItem,valuesObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-open", "open", "Open",
+	"0", Tk_Offset(TreeItem,openObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tags", "tags", "Tags",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TreeItem,tagsObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,ITEM_OPTION_TAGS_CHANGED },
+
+    {TK_OPTION_END, 0,0,0, NULL, -1,-1, 0,0,0}
+};
+
+/* + NewItem --
+ * 	Allocate a new, uninitialized, unlinked item
+ */
+static TreeItem *NewItem(void)
+{
+    TreeItem *item = (TreeItem*)ckalloc(sizeof(*item));
+
+    item->entryPtr = 0;
+    item->parent = item->children = item->next = item->prev = NULL;
+
+    item->state = 0ul;
+    item->textObj = NULL;
+    item->imageObj = NULL;
+    item->valuesObj = NULL;
+    item->openObj = NULL;
+    item->tagsObj = NULL;
+
+    item->tagset = NULL;
+    item->imagespec = NULL;
+
+    return item;
+}
+
+/* + FreeItem --
+ * 	Destroy an item
+ */
+static void FreeItem(TreeItem *item)
+{
+    if (item->textObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(item->textObj); }
+    if (item->imageObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(item->imageObj); }
+    if (item->valuesObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(item->valuesObj); }
+    if (item->openObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(item->openObj); }
+    if (item->tagsObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(item->tagsObj); }
+
+    if (item->tagset)	{ Ttk_FreeTagSet(item->tagset); }
+    if (item->imagespec) { TtkFreeImageSpec(item->imagespec); }
+
+    ckfree((ClientData)item);
+}
+
+static void FreeItemCB(void *clientData) { FreeItem(clientData); }
+
+/* + DetachItem --
+ * 	Unlink an item from the tree.
+ */
+static void DetachItem(TreeItem *item)
+{
+    if (item->parent && item->parent->children == item)
+	item->parent->children = item->next;
+    if (item->prev)
+	item->prev->next = item->next;
+    if (item->next)
+	item->next->prev = item->prev;
+    item->next = item->prev = item->parent = NULL;
+}
+
+/* + InsertItem --
+ * 	Insert an item into the tree after the specified item.
+ *
+ * Preconditions:
+ * 	+ item is currently detached
+ * 	+ prev != NULL ==> prev->parent == parent.
+ */
+static void InsertItem(TreeItem *parent, TreeItem *prev, TreeItem *item)
+{
+    item->parent = parent;
+    item->prev = prev;
+    if (prev) {
+	item->next = prev->next;
+	prev->next = item;
+    } else {
+	item->next = parent->children;
+	parent->children = item;
+    }
+    if (item->next) {
+	item->next->prev = item;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + NextPreorder --
+ * 	Return the next item in preorder traversal order.
+ */
+
+static TreeItem *NextPreorder(TreeItem *item)
+{
+    if (item->children)
+	return item->children;
+    while (!item->next) {
+	item = item->parent;
+	if (!item)
+	    return 0;
+    }
+    return item->next;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Display items and tag options.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *textObj;		/* taken from item / data cell */
+    Tcl_Obj *imageObj;		/* taken from item */
+    Tcl_Obj *anchorObj;		/* from column <<NOTE-ANCHOR>> */
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;	/* remainder from tag */
+    Tcl_Obj *foregroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *fontObj;
+} DisplayItem;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec TagOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(DisplayItem,textObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(DisplayItem,imageObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(DisplayItem,anchorObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, GEOMETRY_CHANGED},	/* <<NOTE-ANCHOR>> */
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-background", "windowColor", "WindowColor",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(DisplayItem,backgroundObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "textColor", "TextColor",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(DisplayItem,foregroundObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(DisplayItem,fontObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    {TK_OPTION_END, 0,0,0, NULL, -1,-1, 0,0,0}
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Columns.
+ *
+ * There are separate option tables associated with the column record:
+ * ColumnOptionSpecs is for configuring the column,
+ * and HeadingOptionSpecs is for drawing headings.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    int 	width;		/* Column width, in pixels */
+    int 	minWidth;	/* Minimum column width, in pixels */
+    int 	stretch;	/* Should column stretch while resizing? */
+    Tcl_Obj	*idObj;		/* Column identifier, from -columns option */
+
+    Tcl_Obj	*anchorObj;	/* -anchor for cell data <<NOTE-ANCHOR>> */
+
+    /* Column heading data:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj 	*headingObj;		/* Heading label */
+    Tcl_Obj	*headingImageObj;	/* Heading image */
+    Tcl_Obj 	*headingAnchorObj;	/* -anchor for heading label */
+    Tcl_Obj	*headingCommandObj;	/* Command to execute */
+    Tcl_Obj 	*headingStateObj;	/* @@@ testing ... */
+    Ttk_State	headingState;		/* ... */
+
+    /* Temporary storage for cell data
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj 	*data;
+} TreeColumn;
+
+static void InitColumn(TreeColumn *column)
+{
+    column->width = 200;
+    column->minWidth = 20;
+    column->stretch = 1;
+    column->idObj = 0;
+    column->anchorObj = 0;
+
+    column->headingState = 0;
+    column->headingObj = 0;
+    column->headingImageObj = 0;
+    column->headingAnchorObj = 0;
+    column->headingStateObj = 0;
+    column->headingCommandObj = 0;
+
+    column->data = 0;
+}
+
+static void FreeColumn(TreeColumn *column)
+{
+    if (column->idObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->idObj); }
+    if (column->anchorObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->anchorObj); }
+
+    if (column->headingObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->headingObj); }
+    if (column->headingImageObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->headingImageObj); }
+    if (column->headingAnchorObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->headingAnchorObj); }
+    if (column->headingStateObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->headingStateObj); }
+    if (column->headingCommandObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->headingCommandObj); }
+
+    /* Don't touch column->data, it's scratch storage */
+}
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec ColumnOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
+	DEF_COLWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,width),
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-minwidth", "minWidth", "MinWidth",
+	DEF_MINWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,minWidth),
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-stretch", "stretch", "Stretch",
+	"1", -1, Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,stretch),
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
+	"w", Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,anchorObj), -1,	/* <<NOTE-ANCHOR>> */
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-id", "id", "ID",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,idObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,READONLY_OPTION },
+    {TK_OPTION_END, 0,0,0, NULL, -1,-1, 0,0,0}
+};
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec HeadingOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
+	"", Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,headingObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
+	"", Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,headingImageObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
+	"center", Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,headingAnchorObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "", "",
+	"", Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,headingCommandObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "state", "", "",
+	"", Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,headingStateObj), -1,
+	0,0,STATE_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_END, 0,0,0, NULL, -1,-1, 0,0,0}
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ -show option:
+ * TODO: Implement SHOW_BRANCHES.
+ */
+
+#define SHOW_TREE 	(0x1) 	/* Show tree column? */
+#define SHOW_HEADINGS	(0x2)	/* Show heading row? */
+
+#define DEFAULT_SHOW	"tree headings"
+
+static const char *showStrings[] = {
+    "tree", "headings", NULL
+};
+
+static int GetEnumSetFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+    const char *table[],
+    unsigned *resultPtr)
+{
+    unsigned result = 0;
+    int i, objc;
+    Tcl_Obj **objv;
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < objc; ++i) {
+	int index;
+	if (TCL_OK != Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(
+		    interp, objv[i], table, "value", TCL_EXACT, &index))
+	{
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	result |= (1 << index);
+    }
+
+    *resultPtr = result;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Treeview widget record.
+ *
+ * Dependencies:
+ * 	columns, columnNames: -columns
+ * 	displayColumns:	-columns, -displaycolumns
+ * 	headingHeight: [layout]
+ * 	rowHeight, indent: style
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    /* Resources acquired at initialization-time:
+     */
+    Tk_OptionTable itemOptionTable;
+    Tk_OptionTable columnOptionTable;
+    Tk_OptionTable headingOptionTable;
+    Tk_OptionTable tagOptionTable;
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
+    Ttk_TagTable tagTable;
+
+    /* Acquired in GetLayout hook:
+     */
+    Ttk_Layout itemLayout;
+    Ttk_Layout cellLayout;
+    Ttk_Layout headingLayout;
+    Ttk_Layout rowLayout;
+
+    int headingHeight;		/* Space for headings */
+    int rowHeight;		/* Height of each item */
+    int indent;			/* #pixels horizontal offset for child items */
+
+    /* Tree data:
+     */
+    Tcl_HashTable items;	/* Map: item name -> item */
+    int serial;			/* Next item # for autogenerated names */
+    TreeItem *root;		/* Root item */
+
+    TreeColumn column0;		/* Column options for display column #0 */
+    TreeColumn *columns;	/* Array of column options for data columns */
+
+    TreeItem *focus;		/* Current focus item */
+    TreeItem *endPtr;		/* See EndPosition() */
+
+    /* Widget options:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *columnsObj;	/* List of symbolic column names */
+    Tcl_Obj *displayColumnsObj;	/* List of columns to display */
+
+    Tcl_Obj *heightObj;		/* height (rows) */
+    Tcl_Obj *paddingObj;	/* internal padding */
+
+    Tcl_Obj *showObj;		/* -show list */
+    Tcl_Obj *selectModeObj;	/* -selectmode option */
+
+    Scrollable xscroll;
+    ScrollHandle xscrollHandle;
+    Scrollable yscroll;
+    ScrollHandle yscrollHandle;
+
+    /* Derived resources:
+     */
+    Tcl_HashTable columnNames;	/* Map: column name -> column table entry */
+    int nColumns; 		/* #columns */
+    unsigned showFlags;		/* bitmask of subparts to display */
+
+    TreeColumn **displayColumns; /* List of columns for display (incl tree) */
+    int nDisplayColumns;	/* #display columns */
+    Ttk_Box headingArea;	/* Display area for column headings */
+    Ttk_Box treeArea;   	/* Display area for tree */
+    int slack;			/* Slack space (see Resizing section) */
+
+} TreePart;
+
+typedef struct {
+    WidgetCore core;
+    TreePart tree;
+} Treeview;
+
+#define USER_MASK 		0x0100
+#define COLUMNS_CHANGED 	(USER_MASK)
+#define DCOLUMNS_CHANGED	(USER_MASK<<1)
+#define SCROLLCMD_CHANGED	(USER_MASK<<2)
+#define SHOW_CHANGED 		(USER_MASK<<3)
+
+static const char *SelectModeStrings[] = { "none", "browse", "extended", NULL };
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec TreeviewOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-columns", "columns", "Columns",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Treeview,tree.columnsObj), -1,
+	0,0,COLUMNS_CHANGED | GEOMETRY_CHANGED /*| READONLY_OPTION*/ },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-displaycolumns","displayColumns","DisplayColumns",
+	"#all", Tk_Offset(Treeview,tree.displayColumnsObj), -1,
+	0,0,DCOLUMNS_CHANGED | GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-show", "show", "Show",
+	DEFAULT_SHOW, Tk_Offset(Treeview,tree.showObj), -1,
+	0,0,SHOW_CHANGED | GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-selectmode", "selectMode", "SelectMode",
+	"extended", Tk_Offset(Treeview,tree.selectModeObj), -1,
+	0,(ClientData)SelectModeStrings,0 },
+
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height",
+	DEF_TREE_ROWS, Tk_Offset(Treeview,tree.heightObj), -1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-padding", "padding", "Pad",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Treeview,tree.paddingObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-xscrollcommand", "xScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Treeview, tree.xscroll.scrollCmd),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, SCROLLCMD_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-yscrollcommand", "yScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Treeview, tree.yscroll.scrollCmd),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, SCROLLCMD_CHANGED},
+
+    WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_TRUE,
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(ttkCoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Utilities.
+ */
+typedef void (*HashEntryIterator)(void *hashValue);
+
+static void foreachHashEntry(Tcl_HashTable *ht, HashEntryIterator func)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(ht, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	func(Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+}
+
+/* + unshareObj(objPtr) --
+ * 	Ensure that a Tcl_Obj * has refcount 1 -- either return objPtr
+ * 	itself,	or a duplicated copy.
+ */
+static Tcl_Obj *unshareObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    if (Tcl_IsShared(objPtr)) {
+	Tcl_Obj *newObj = Tcl_DuplicateObj(objPtr);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(newObj);
+	return newObj;
+    }
+    return objPtr;
+}
+
+/* DisplayLayout --
+ * 	Rebind, place, and draw a layout + object combination.
+ */
+static void DisplayLayout(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, void *recordPtr, Ttk_State state, Ttk_Box b, Drawable d)
+{
+    Ttk_RebindSublayout(layout, recordPtr);
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(layout, state, b);
+    Ttk_DrawLayout(layout, state, d);
+}
+
+/* + GetColumn --
+ * 	Look up column by name or number.
+ * 	Returns: pointer to column table entry, NULL if not found.
+ * 	Leaves an error message in interp->result on error.
+ */
+static TreeColumn *GetColumn(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, Tcl_Obj *columnIDObj)
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int columnIndex;
+
+    /* Check for named column:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(
+	    &tv->tree.columnNames, Tcl_GetString(columnIDObj));
+    if (entryPtr) {
+	return Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    /* Check for number:
+     */
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, columnIDObj, &columnIndex) == TCL_OK) {
+	if (columnIndex < 0 || columnIndex >= tv->tree.nColumns) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		    "Column index ",
+		    Tcl_GetString(columnIDObj),
+		    " out of bounds",
+		    NULL);
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+
+	return tv->tree.columns + columnIndex;
+    }
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	"Invalid column index ", Tcl_GetString(columnIDObj),
+	NULL);
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/* + FindColumn --
+ * 	Look up column by name, number, or display index.
+ */
+static TreeColumn *FindColumn(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, Tcl_Obj *columnIDObj)
+{
+    int colno;
+
+    if (sscanf(Tcl_GetString(columnIDObj), "#%d", &colno) == 1)
+    {	/* Display column specification, #n */
+	if (colno >= 0 && colno < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns) {
+	    return tv->tree.displayColumns[colno];
+	}
+	/* else */
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	    "Column ", Tcl_GetString(columnIDObj), " out of range",
+	    NULL);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    return GetColumn(interp, tv, columnIDObj);
+}
+
+/* + FindItem --
+ * 	Locates the item with the specified identifier in the tree.
+ * 	If there is no such item, leaves an error message in interp.
+ */
+static TreeItem *FindItem(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, Tcl_Obj *itemNameObj)
+{
+    const char *itemName = Tcl_GetString(itemNameObj);
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr =  Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tv->tree.items, itemName);
+
+    if (!entryPtr) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Item ", itemName, " not found", NULL);
+	return 0;
+    }
+    return Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+}
+
+/* + GetItemListFromObj --
+ * 	Parse a Tcl_Obj * as a list of items.
+ * 	Returns a NULL-terminated array of items; result must
+ * 	be ckfree()d. On error, returns NULL and leaves an error
+ * 	message in interp.
+ */
+
+static TreeItem **GetItemListFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    TreeItem **items;
+    Tcl_Obj **elements;
+    int i, nElements;
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp,objPtr,&nElements,&elements) != TCL_OK) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    items = (TreeItem**)ckalloc((nElements + 1)*sizeof(TreeItem*));
+    for (i = 0; i < nElements; ++i) {
+	items[i] = FindItem(interp, tv, elements[i]);
+	if (!items[i]) {
+	    ckfree((ClientData)items);
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+    }
+    items[i] = NULL;
+    return items;
+}
+
+/* + ItemName --
+ * 	Returns the item's ID.
+ */
+static const char *ItemName(Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item)
+{
+    return Tcl_GetHashKey(&tv->tree.items, item->entryPtr);
+}
+
+/* + ItemID --
+ * 	Returns a fresh Tcl_Obj * (refcount 0) holding the
+ * 	item identifier of the specified item.
+ */
+static Tcl_Obj *ItemID(Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item)
+{
+    return Tcl_NewStringObj(ItemName(tv, item), -1);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Column configuration.
+ */
+
+/* + TreeviewFreeColumns --
+ * 	Free column data.
+ */
+static void TreeviewFreeColumns(Treeview *tv)
+{
+    int i;
+
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&tv->tree.columnNames);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&tv->tree.columnNames, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    if (tv->tree.columns) {
+	for (i = 0; i < tv->tree.nColumns; ++i)
+	    FreeColumn(tv->tree.columns + i);
+	ckfree((ClientData)tv->tree.columns);
+	tv->tree.columns = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + TreeviewInitColumns --
+ *	Initialize column data when -columns changes.
+ *	Returns: TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR;
+ */
+static int TreeviewInitColumns(Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj **columns;
+    int i, ncols;
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(
+	    interp, tv->tree.columnsObj, &ncols, &columns) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Free old values:
+     */
+    TreeviewFreeColumns(tv);
+
+    /*
+     * Initialize columns array and columnNames hash table:
+     */
+    tv->tree.nColumns = ncols;
+    tv->tree.columns =
+	(TreeColumn*)ckalloc(tv->tree.nColumns * sizeof(TreeColumn));
+
+    for (i = 0; i < ncols; ++i) {
+	int isNew;
+	Tcl_Obj *columnName = Tcl_DuplicateObj(columns[i]);
+
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(
+	    &tv->tree.columnNames, Tcl_GetString(columnName), &isNew);
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, tv->tree.columns + i);
+
+	InitColumn(tv->tree.columns + i);
+	Tk_InitOptions(
+	    interp, (ClientData)(tv->tree.columns + i),
+	    tv->tree.columnOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+	Tk_InitOptions(
+	    interp, (ClientData)(tv->tree.columns + i),
+	    tv->tree.headingOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(columnName);
+	tv->tree.columns[i].idObj = columnName;
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + TreeviewInitDisplayColumns --
+ * 	Initializes the 'displayColumns' array.
+ *
+ * 	Note that displayColumns[0] is always the tree column,
+ * 	even when SHOW_TREE is not set.
+ *
+ * @@@ TODO: disallow duplicated columns
+ */
+static int TreeviewInitDisplayColumns(Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj **dcolumns;
+    int index, ndcols;
+    TreeColumn **displayColumns = 0;
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp,
+	    tv->tree.displayColumnsObj, &ndcols, &dcolumns) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (!strcmp(Tcl_GetString(tv->tree.displayColumnsObj), "#all")) {
+	ndcols = tv->tree.nColumns;
+	displayColumns = (TreeColumn**)ckalloc((ndcols+1)*sizeof(TreeColumn*));
+	for (index = 0; index < ndcols; ++index) {
+	    displayColumns[index+1] = tv->tree.columns + index;
+	}
+    } else {
+	displayColumns = (TreeColumn**)ckalloc((ndcols+1)*sizeof(TreeColumn*));
+	for (index = 0; index < ndcols; ++index) {
+	    displayColumns[index+1] = GetColumn(interp, tv, dcolumns[index]);
+	    if (!displayColumns[index+1]) {
+		ckfree((ClientData)displayColumns);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    displayColumns[0] = &tv->tree.column0;
+
+    if (tv->tree.displayColumns)
+	ckfree((ClientData)tv->tree.displayColumns);
+    tv->tree.displayColumns = displayColumns;
+    tv->tree.nDisplayColumns = ndcols + 1;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Resizing.
+ * 	slack invariant: TreeWidth(tree) + slack = treeArea.width
+ */
+
+#define FirstColumn(tv)  ((tv->tree.showFlags&SHOW_TREE) ? 0 : 1)
+
+/* + TreeWidth --
+ * 	Compute the requested tree width from the sum of visible column widths.
+ */
+static int TreeWidth(Treeview *tv)
+{
+    int i = FirstColumn(tv);
+    int width = 0;
+
+    while (i < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns) {
+	width += tv->tree.displayColumns[i++]->width;
+    }
+    return width;
+}
+
+/* + RecomputeSlack --
+ */
+static void RecomputeSlack(Treeview *tv)
+{
+    tv->tree.slack = tv->tree.treeArea.width - TreeWidth(tv);
+}
+
+/* + PickupSlack/DepositSlack --
+ * 	When resizing columns, distribute extra space to 'slack' first,
+ * 	and only adjust column widths if 'slack' goes to zero.
+ * 	That is, don't bother changing column widths if the tree
+ * 	is already scrolled or short.
+ */
+static int PickupSlack(Treeview *tv, int extra)
+{
+    int newSlack = tv->tree.slack + extra;
+
+    if (   (newSlack < 0 && 0 <= tv->tree.slack)
+	|| (newSlack > 0 && 0 >= tv->tree.slack))
+    {
+	tv->tree.slack = 0;
+	return newSlack;
+    } else {
+	tv->tree.slack = newSlack;
+	return 0;
+    }
+}
+
+static void DepositSlack(Treeview *tv, int extra)
+{
+    tv->tree.slack += extra;
+}
+
+/* + Stretch --
+ * 	Adjust width of column by N pixels, down to minimum width.
+ * 	Returns: #pixels actually moved.
+ */
+static int Stretch(TreeColumn *c, int n)
+{
+    int newWidth = n + c->width;
+    if (newWidth < c->minWidth) {
+	n = c->minWidth - c->width;
+	c->width = c->minWidth;
+    } else {
+	c->width = newWidth;
+    }
+    return n;
+}
+
+/* + ShoveLeft --
+ * 	Adjust width of (stretchable) columns to the left by N pixels.
+ * 	Returns: leftover slack.
+ */
+static int ShoveLeft(Treeview *tv, int i, int n)
+{
+    int first = FirstColumn(tv);
+    while (n != 0 && i >= first) {
+	TreeColumn *c = tv->tree.displayColumns[i];
+	if (c->stretch) {
+	    n -= Stretch(c, n);
+	}
+	--i;
+    }
+    return n;
+}
+
+/* + ShoveRight --
+ * 	Adjust width of (stretchable) columns to the right by N pixels.
+ * 	Returns: leftover slack.
+ */
+static int ShoveRight(Treeview *tv, int i, int n)
+{
+    while (n != 0 && i < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns) {
+	TreeColumn *c = tv->tree.displayColumns[i];
+	if (c->stretch) {
+	    n -= Stretch(c, n);
+	}
+	++i;
+    }
+    return n;
+}
+
+/* + DistributeWidth --
+ * 	Distribute n pixels evenly across all stretchable display columns.
+ * 	Returns: leftover slack.
+ * Notes:
+ * 	The "((++w % m) < r)" term is there so that the remainder r = n % m
+ * 	is distributed round-robin.
+ */
+static int DistributeWidth(Treeview *tv, int n)
+{
+    int w = TreeWidth(tv);
+    int m = 0;
+    int i, d, r;
+
+    for (i = FirstColumn(tv); i < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns; ++i) {
+	if (tv->tree.displayColumns[i]->stretch) {
+	    ++m;
+	}
+    }
+    if (m == 0) {
+	return n;
+    }
+
+    d = n / m;
+    r = n % m;
+    if (r < 0) { r += m; --d; }
+
+    for (i = FirstColumn(tv); i < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns; ++i) {
+	TreeColumn *c = tv->tree.displayColumns[i];
+	if (c->stretch) {
+	    n -= Stretch(c, d + ((++w % m) < r));
+	}
+    }
+    return n;
+}
+
+/* + ResizeColumns --
+ * 	Recompute column widths based on available width.
+ * 	Pick up slack first;
+ * 	Distribute the remainder evenly across stretchable columns;
+ * 	If any is still left over due to minwidth constraints, shove left.
+ */
+static void ResizeColumns(Treeview *tv, int newWidth)
+{
+    int delta = newWidth - (TreeWidth(tv) + tv->tree.slack);
+    DepositSlack(tv,
+	ShoveLeft(tv, tv->tree.nDisplayColumns - 1,
+	    DistributeWidth(tv, PickupSlack(tv, delta))));
+}
+
+/* + DragColumn --
+ * 	Move the separator to the right of specified column,
+ * 	adjusting other column widths as necessary.
+ */
+static void DragColumn(Treeview *tv, int i, int delta)
+{
+    TreeColumn *c = tv->tree.displayColumns[i];
+    int dl = delta - ShoveLeft(tv, i-1, delta - Stretch(c, delta));
+    int dr = ShoveRight(tv, i+1, PickupSlack(tv, -dl));
+    DepositSlack(tv, dr);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Event handlers.
+ */
+
+static TreeItem *IdentifyItem(Treeview *tv, int y); /*forward*/
+
+static const unsigned int TreeviewBindEventMask =
+      KeyPressMask|KeyReleaseMask
+    | ButtonPressMask|ButtonReleaseMask
+    | PointerMotionMask|ButtonMotionMask
+    | VirtualEventMask
+    ;
+
+static void TreeviewBindEventProc(void *clientData, XEvent *event)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = clientData;
+    TreeItem *item = NULL;
+    Ttk_TagSet tagset;
+
+    /*
+     * Figure out where to deliver the event.
+     */
+    switch (event->type)
+    {
+	case KeyPress:
+	case KeyRelease:
+	case VirtualEvent:
+	    item = tv->tree.focus;
+	    break;
+	case ButtonPress:
+	case ButtonRelease:
+	    item = IdentifyItem(tv, event->xbutton.y);
+	    break;
+	case MotionNotify:
+	    item = IdentifyItem(tv, event->xmotion.y);
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    if (!item) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /* ASSERT: Ttk_GetTagSetFromObj succeeds.
+     * NB: must use a local copy of the tagset,
+     * in case a binding script stomps on -tags.
+     */
+    tagset = Ttk_GetTagSetFromObj(NULL, tv->tree.tagTable, item->tagsObj);
+
+    /*
+     * Fire binding:
+     */
+    Tcl_Preserve(clientData);
+    Tk_BindEvent(tv->tree.bindingTable, event, tv->core.tkwin,
+	    tagset->nTags, (void **)tagset->tags);
+    Tcl_Release(clientData);
+
+    Ttk_FreeTagSet(tagset);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization and cleanup.
+ */
+
+static void TreeviewInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    int unused;
+
+    tv->tree.itemOptionTable =
+	Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, ItemOptionSpecs);
+    tv->tree.columnOptionTable =
+	Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, ColumnOptionSpecs);
+    tv->tree.headingOptionTable =
+	Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, HeadingOptionSpecs);
+    tv->tree.tagOptionTable =
+	Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, TagOptionSpecs);
+
+    tv->tree.tagTable = Ttk_CreateTagTable(
+	interp, tv->core.tkwin, TagOptionSpecs, sizeof(DisplayItem));
+    tv->tree.bindingTable = Tk_CreateBindingTable(interp);
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tv->core.tkwin,
+	TreeviewBindEventMask, TreeviewBindEventProc, tv);
+
+    tv->tree.itemLayout
+	= tv->tree.cellLayout
+	= tv->tree.headingLayout
+	= tv->tree.rowLayout
+	= 0;
+    tv->tree.headingHeight = tv->tree.rowHeight = DEFAULT_ROWHEIGHT;
+    tv->tree.indent = DEFAULT_INDENT;
+
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&tv->tree.columnNames, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    tv->tree.nColumns = tv->tree.nDisplayColumns = 0;
+    tv->tree.columns = NULL;
+    tv->tree.displayColumns = NULL;
+    tv->tree.showFlags = ~0;
+
+    InitColumn(&tv->tree.column0);
+    Tk_InitOptions(
+	interp, (ClientData)(&tv->tree.column0),
+	tv->tree.columnOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+    Tk_InitOptions(
+	interp, (ClientData)(&tv->tree.column0),
+	tv->tree.headingOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&tv->tree.items, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    tv->tree.serial = 0;
+
+    tv->tree.focus = tv->tree.endPtr = 0;
+
+    /* Create root item "":
+     */
+    tv->tree.root = NewItem();
+    Tk_InitOptions(interp, (ClientData)tv->tree.root,
+	tv->tree.itemOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+    tv->tree.root->tagset = Ttk_GetTagSetFromObj(NULL, tv->tree.tagTable, NULL);
+    tv->tree.root->entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tv->tree.items, "", &unused);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(tv->tree.root->entryPtr, tv->tree.root);
+
+    /* Scroll handles:
+     */
+    tv->tree.xscrollHandle = TtkCreateScrollHandle(&tv->core,&tv->tree.xscroll);
+    tv->tree.yscrollHandle = TtkCreateScrollHandle(&tv->core,&tv->tree.yscroll);
+
+    /* Size parameters:
+     */
+    tv->tree.treeArea = tv->tree.headingArea = Ttk_MakeBox(0,0,0,0);
+    tv->tree.slack = 0;
+}
+
+static void TreeviewCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+
+    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(tv->core.tkwin,
+	    TreeviewBindEventMask,  TreeviewBindEventProc, tv);
+    Tk_DeleteBindingTable(tv->tree.bindingTable);
+    Ttk_DeleteTagTable(tv->tree.tagTable);
+
+    if (tv->tree.itemLayout) Ttk_FreeLayout(tv->tree.itemLayout);
+    if (tv->tree.cellLayout) Ttk_FreeLayout(tv->tree.cellLayout);
+    if (tv->tree.headingLayout) Ttk_FreeLayout(tv->tree.headingLayout);
+    if (tv->tree.rowLayout) Ttk_FreeLayout(tv->tree.rowLayout);
+
+    TreeviewFreeColumns(tv);
+
+    if (tv->tree.displayColumns)
+	Tcl_Free((ClientData)tv->tree.displayColumns);
+
+    foreachHashEntry(&tv->tree.items, FreeItemCB);
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&tv->tree.items);
+
+    TtkFreeScrollHandle(tv->tree.xscrollHandle);
+    TtkFreeScrollHandle(tv->tree.yscrollHandle);
+}
+
+/* + TreeviewConfigure --
+ * 	Configuration widget hook.
+ *
+ * 	BUG: If user sets -columns and -displaycolumns, but -displaycolumns
+ * 	has an error, the widget is left in an inconsistent state.
+ */
+static int
+TreeviewConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    unsigned showFlags = tv->tree.showFlags;
+
+    if (mask & COLUMNS_CHANGED) {
+	if (TreeviewInitColumns(interp, tv) != TCL_OK)
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	mask |= DCOLUMNS_CHANGED;
+    }
+    if (mask & DCOLUMNS_CHANGED) {
+	if (TreeviewInitDisplayColumns(interp, tv) != TCL_OK)
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (mask & SCROLLCMD_CHANGED) {
+	TtkScrollbarUpdateRequired(tv->tree.xscrollHandle);
+	TtkScrollbarUpdateRequired(tv->tree.yscrollHandle);
+    }
+    if (  (mask & SHOW_CHANGED)
+	&& GetEnumSetFromObj(
+		    interp,tv->tree.showObj,showStrings,&showFlags) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (TtkCoreConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tv->tree.showFlags = showFlags;
+
+    if (mask & (SHOW_CHANGED | DCOLUMNS_CHANGED)) {
+	RecomputeSlack(tv);
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + ConfigureItem --
+ * 	Set item options.
+ */
+static int ConfigureItem(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+    int mask;
+    Ttk_ImageSpec *newImageSpec = NULL;
+    Ttk_TagSet newTagSet = NULL;
+
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (ClientData)item, tv->tree.itemOptionTable,
+		objc, objv, tv->core.tkwin, &savedOptions, &mask)
+		!= TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Make sure that -values is a valid list:
+     */
+    if (item->valuesObj) {
+	int unused;
+	if (Tcl_ListObjLength(interp, item->valuesObj, &unused) != TCL_OK)
+	    goto error;
+    }
+
+    /* Check -image.
+     */
+    if ((mask & ITEM_OPTION_IMAGE_CHANGED) && item->imageObj) {
+	newImageSpec = TtkGetImageSpec(interp, tv->core.tkwin, item->imageObj);
+	if (!newImageSpec) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Check -tags.
+     * Side effect: may create new tags.
+     */
+    if (mask & ITEM_OPTION_TAGS_CHANGED) {
+	newTagSet = Ttk_GetTagSetFromObj(
+		interp, tv->tree.tagTable, item->tagsObj);
+	if (!newTagSet) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Keep TTK_STATE_OPEN flag in sync with item->openObj.
+     * We use both a state flag and a Tcl_Obj* resource so elements
+     * can access the value in either way.
+     */
+    if (item->openObj) {
+	int isOpen;
+	if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, item->openObj, &isOpen) != TCL_OK)
+	    goto error;
+	if (isOpen)
+	    item->state |= TTK_STATE_OPEN;
+	else
+	    item->state &= ~TTK_STATE_OPEN;
+    }
+
+    /* All OK.
+     */
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    if (mask & ITEM_OPTION_TAGS_CHANGED) {
+	if (item->tagset) { Ttk_FreeTagSet(item->tagset); }
+	item->tagset = newTagSet;
+    }
+    if (mask & ITEM_OPTION_IMAGE_CHANGED) {
+	if (item->imagespec) { TtkFreeImageSpec(item->imagespec); }
+	item->imagespec = newImageSpec;
+    }
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    if (newTagSet) { Ttk_FreeTagSet(newTagSet); }
+    if (newImageSpec) { TtkFreeImageSpec(newImageSpec); }
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* + ConfigureColumn --
+ * 	Set column options.
+ */
+static int ConfigureColumn(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, TreeColumn *column,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+    int mask;
+
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (ClientData)column,
+	    tv->tree.columnOptionTable, objc, objv, tv->core.tkwin,
+	    &savedOptions,&mask) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (mask & READONLY_OPTION) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Attempt to change read-only option", NULL);
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    /* Propagate column width changes to overall widget request width,
+     * but only if the widget is currently unmapped, in order to prevent
+     * geometry jumping during interactive column resize.
+     */
+    if (mask & GEOMETRY_CHANGED) {
+	if (!Tk_IsMapped(tv->core.tkwin)) {
+	    TtkResizeWidget(&tv->core);
+	}
+	RecomputeSlack(tv);
+    }
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+
+    /* ASSERT: SLACKINVARIANT */
+
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* + ConfigureHeading --
+ * 	Set heading options.
+ */
+static int ConfigureHeading(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, TreeColumn *column,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+    int mask;
+
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (ClientData)column,
+	    tv->tree.headingOptionTable, objc, objv, tv->core.tkwin,
+	    &savedOptions,&mask) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* @@@ testing ... */
+    if ((mask & STATE_CHANGED) && column->headingStateObj) {
+	Ttk_StateSpec stateSpec;
+	if (Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(
+		interp, column->headingStateObj, &stateSpec) != TCL_OK)
+	{
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	column->headingState = Ttk_ModifyState(column->headingState,&stateSpec);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->headingStateObj);
+	column->headingStateObj = Ttk_NewStateSpecObj(column->headingState,0);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(column->headingStateObj);
+    }
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Geometry routines.
+ */
+
+/* + CountRows --
+ * 	Returns the number of viewable rows rooted at item
+ */
+static int CountRows(TreeItem *item)
+{
+    int rows = 1;
+
+    if (item->state & TTK_STATE_OPEN) {
+	TreeItem *child = item->children;
+	while (child) {
+	    rows += CountRows(child);
+	    child = child->next;
+	}
+    }
+    return rows;
+}
+
+/* + IdentifyRow --
+ * 	Recursive search for item at specified y position.
+ * 	Main work routine for IdentifyItem()
+ */
+static TreeItem *IdentifyRow(
+    Treeview *tv,	/* Widget record */
+    TreeItem *item, 	/* Where to start search */
+    int *ypos,		/* Scan position */
+    int y)		/* Target y coordinate */
+{
+    while (item) {
+	int next_ypos = *ypos + tv->tree.rowHeight;
+	if (*ypos <= y && y <= next_ypos) {
+	    return item;
+	}
+	*ypos = next_ypos;
+	if (item->state & TTK_STATE_OPEN) {
+	    TreeItem *subitem = IdentifyRow(tv, item->children, ypos, y);
+	    if (subitem) {
+		return subitem;
+	    }
+	}
+	item = item->next;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/* + IdentifyItem --
+ * 	Locate the item at the specified y position, if any.
+ */
+static TreeItem *IdentifyItem(Treeview *tv, int y)
+{
+    int rowHeight = tv->tree.rowHeight;
+    int ypos = tv->tree.treeArea.y - rowHeight * tv->tree.yscroll.first;
+    return IdentifyRow(tv, tv->tree.root->children, &ypos, y);
+}
+
+/* + IdentifyDisplayColumn --
+ * 	Returns the display column number at the specified x position,
+ * 	or -1 if x is outside any columns.
+ */
+static int IdentifyDisplayColumn(Treeview *tv, int x, int *x1)
+{
+    int colno = FirstColumn(tv);
+    int xpos = tv->tree.treeArea.x - tv->tree.xscroll.first;
+
+    while (colno < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns) {
+	TreeColumn *column = tv->tree.displayColumns[colno];
+	int next_xpos = xpos + column->width;
+	if (xpos <= x && x <= next_xpos + HALO) {
+	    *x1 = next_xpos;
+	    return colno;
+	}
+	++colno;
+	xpos = next_xpos;
+    }
+
+    return -1;
+}
+
+/* + RowNumber --
+ * 	Calculate which row the specified item appears on;
+ * 	returns -1 if the item is not viewable.
+ * 	Xref: DrawForest, IdentifyItem.
+ */
+static int RowNumber(Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item)
+{
+    TreeItem *p = tv->tree.root->children;
+    int n = 0;
+
+    while (p) {
+	if (p == item)
+	    return n;
+
+	++n;
+
+	/* Find next viewable item in preorder traversal order
+	 */
+	if (p->children && (p->state & TTK_STATE_OPEN)) {
+	    p = p->children;
+	} else {
+	    while (!p->next && p && p->parent)
+		p = p->parent;
+	    if (p)
+		p = p->next;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return -1;
+}
+
+/* + ItemDepth -- return the depth of a tree item.
+ * 	The depth of an item is equal to the number of proper ancestors,
+ * 	not counting the root node.
+ */
+static int ItemDepth(TreeItem *item)
+{
+    int depth = 0;
+    while (item->parent) {
+	++depth;
+	item = item->parent;
+    }
+    return depth-1;
+}
+
+/* + ItemRow --
+ * 	Returns row number of specified item relative to root,
+ * 	-1 if item is not viewable.
+ */
+static int ItemRow(Treeview *tv, TreeItem *p)
+{
+    TreeItem *root = tv->tree.root;
+    int rowNumber = 0;
+
+    for (;;) {
+	if (p->prev) {
+	    p = p->prev;
+	    rowNumber += CountRows(p);
+	} else {
+	    p = p->parent;
+	    if (!(p && (p->state & TTK_STATE_OPEN))) {
+		/* detached or closed ancestor */
+		return -1;
+	    }
+	    if (p == root) {
+		return rowNumber;
+	    }
+	    ++rowNumber;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/* + BoundingBox --
+ * 	Compute the parcel of the specified column of the specified item,
+ *	(or the entire item if column is NULL)
+ *	Returns: 0 if item or column is not viewable, 1 otherwise.
+ */
+static int BoundingBox(
+    Treeview *tv,		/* treeview widget */
+    TreeItem *item,		/* desired item */
+    TreeColumn *column,		/* desired column */
+    Ttk_Box *bbox_rtn)		/* bounding box of item */
+{
+    int row = ItemRow(tv, item);
+    Ttk_Box bbox = tv->tree.treeArea;
+
+    if (row < tv->tree.yscroll.first || row > tv->tree.yscroll.last) {
+	/* not viewable, or off-screen */
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    bbox.y += (row - tv->tree.yscroll.first) * tv->tree.rowHeight;
+    bbox.height = tv->tree.rowHeight;
+
+    bbox.x -= tv->tree.xscroll.first;
+    bbox.width = TreeWidth(tv);
+
+    if (column) {
+	int xpos = 0, i = FirstColumn(tv);
+	while (i < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns) {
+	    if (tv->tree.displayColumns[i] == column) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	    xpos += tv->tree.displayColumns[i]->width;
+	    ++i;
+	}
+	if (i == tv->tree.nDisplayColumns) { /* specified column unviewable */
+	    return 0;
+	}
+	bbox.x += xpos;
+	bbox.width = column->width;
+
+	/* Account for indentation in tree column:
+	 */
+	if (column == &tv->tree.column0) {
+	    int indent = tv->tree.indent * ItemDepth(item);
+	    bbox.x += indent;
+	    bbox.width -= indent;
+	}
+    }
+    *bbox_rtn = bbox;
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/* + IdentifyRegion --
+ */
+
+typedef enum {
+    REGION_NOTHING = 0,
+    REGION_HEADING,
+    REGION_SEPARATOR,
+    REGION_TREE,
+    REGION_CELL
+} TreeRegion;
+
+static const char *regionStrings[] = {
+    "nothing", "heading", "separator", "tree", "cell", 0
+};
+
+static TreeRegion IdentifyRegion(Treeview *tv, int x, int y)
+{
+    int x1 = 0, colno;
+
+    colno = IdentifyDisplayColumn(tv, x, &x1);
+    if (Ttk_BoxContains(tv->tree.headingArea, x, y)) {
+	if (colno < 0) {
+	    return REGION_NOTHING;
+	} else if (-HALO <= x1 - x  && x1 - x <= HALO) {
+	    return REGION_SEPARATOR;
+	} else {
+	    return REGION_HEADING;
+	}
+    } else if (Ttk_BoxContains(tv->tree.treeArea, x, y)) {
+	TreeItem *item = IdentifyItem(tv, y);
+	if (item && colno > 0) {
+	    return REGION_CELL;
+	} else if (item) {
+	    return REGION_TREE;
+	}
+    }
+    return REGION_NOTHING;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Display routines.
+ */
+
+/* + GetSublayout --
+ * 	Utility routine; acquires a sublayout for items, cells, etc.
+ */
+static Ttk_Layout GetSublayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr,
+    Ttk_Layout parentLayout,
+    const char *layoutName,
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,
+    Ttk_Layout *layoutPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout newLayout = Ttk_CreateSublayout(
+	    interp, themePtr, parentLayout, layoutName, optionTable);
+
+    if (newLayout) {
+	if (*layoutPtr)
+	    Ttk_FreeLayout(*layoutPtr);
+	*layoutPtr = newLayout;
+    }
+    return newLayout;
+}
+
+/* + TreeviewGetLayout --
+ * 	GetLayout() widget hook.
+ */
+static Ttk_Layout TreeviewGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme themePtr, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Layout treeLayout = TtkWidgetGetLayout(interp, themePtr, recordPtr);
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+    int unused;
+
+    if (!(
+	treeLayout
+     && GetSublayout(interp, themePtr, treeLayout, ".Item",
+	    tv->tree.tagOptionTable, &tv->tree.itemLayout)
+     && GetSublayout(interp, themePtr, treeLayout, ".Cell",
+	    tv->tree.tagOptionTable, &tv->tree.cellLayout)
+     && GetSublayout(interp, themePtr, treeLayout, ".Heading",
+	    tv->tree.headingOptionTable, &tv->tree.headingLayout)
+     && GetSublayout(interp, themePtr, treeLayout, ".Row",
+	    tv->tree.tagOptionTable, &tv->tree.rowLayout)
+    )) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    /* Compute heading height.
+     */
+    Ttk_RebindSublayout(tv->tree.headingLayout, &tv->tree.column0);
+    Ttk_LayoutSize(tv->tree.headingLayout, 0, &unused, &tv->tree.headingHeight);
+
+    /* Get item height, indent from style:
+     * @@@ TODO: sanity-check.
+     */
+    tv->tree.rowHeight = DEFAULT_ROWHEIGHT;
+    tv->tree.indent = DEFAULT_INDENT;
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(treeLayout, "-rowheight", 0))) {
+	(void)Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &tv->tree.rowHeight);
+    }
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(treeLayout, "-indent", 0))) {
+	(void)Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &tv->tree.indent);
+    }
+
+    return treeLayout;
+}
+
+/* + TreeviewDoLayout --
+ * 	DoLayout() widget hook.  Computes widget layout.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ * 	Computes headingArea and treeArea.
+ * 	Computes subtree height.
+ * 	Invokes scroll callbacks.
+ */
+static void TreeviewDoLayout(void *clientData)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = clientData;
+    int visibleRows;
+
+    /* ASSERT: SLACKINVARIANT */
+
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(tv->core.layout,tv->core.state,Ttk_WinBox(tv->core.tkwin));
+    tv->tree.treeArea = Ttk_ClientRegion(tv->core.layout, "treearea");
+
+    ResizeColumns(tv, tv->tree.treeArea.width);
+    /* ASSERT: SLACKINVARIANT */
+
+    TtkScrolled(tv->tree.xscrollHandle,
+	    tv->tree.xscroll.first,
+	    tv->tree.xscroll.first + tv->tree.treeArea.width,
+	    TreeWidth(tv));
+
+    if (tv->tree.showFlags & SHOW_HEADINGS) {
+	tv->tree.headingArea = Ttk_PackBox(
+	    &tv->tree.treeArea, 1, tv->tree.headingHeight, TTK_SIDE_TOP);
+    } else {
+	tv->tree.headingArea = Ttk_MakeBox(0,0,0,0);
+    }
+
+    visibleRows = tv->tree.treeArea.height / tv->tree.rowHeight;
+    tv->tree.root->state |= TTK_STATE_OPEN;
+    TtkScrolled(tv->tree.yscrollHandle,
+	    tv->tree.yscroll.first,
+	    tv->tree.yscroll.first + visibleRows,
+	    CountRows(tv->tree.root) - 1);
+}
+
+/* + TreeviewSize --
+ * 	SizeProc() widget hook.  Size is determined by
+ * 	-height option and column widths.
+ */
+static int TreeviewSize(void *clientData, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = clientData;
+    int nRows, padHeight, padWidth;
+
+    Ttk_LayoutSize(tv->core.layout, tv->core.state, &padWidth, &padHeight);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, tv->tree.heightObj, &nRows);
+
+    *widthPtr = padWidth + TreeWidth(tv);
+    *heightPtr = padHeight + tv->tree.rowHeight * nRows;
+
+    if (tv->tree.showFlags & SHOW_HEADINGS) {
+	*heightPtr += tv->tree.headingHeight;
+    }
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/* + ItemState --
+ * 	Returns the state of the specified item, based
+ * 	on widget state, item state, and other information.
+ */
+static Ttk_State ItemState(Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item)
+{
+    Ttk_State state = tv->core.state | item->state;
+    if (!item->children)
+	state |= TTK_STATE_LEAF;
+    if (item != tv->tree.focus)
+	state &= ~TTK_STATE_FOCUS;
+    return state;
+}
+
+/* + DrawHeadings --
+ *	Draw tree headings.
+ */
+static void DrawHeadings(Treeview *tv, Drawable d)
+{
+    const int x0 = tv->tree.headingArea.x - tv->tree.xscroll.first;
+    const int y0 = tv->tree.headingArea.y;
+    const int h0 = tv->tree.headingArea.height;
+    int i = FirstColumn(tv);
+    int x = 0;
+
+    while (i < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns) {
+	TreeColumn *column = tv->tree.displayColumns[i];
+	Ttk_Box parcel = Ttk_MakeBox(x0+x, y0, column->width, h0);
+	DisplayLayout(tv->tree.headingLayout,
+	    column, column->headingState, parcel, d);
+	x += column->width;
+	++i;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + PrepareItem --
+ * 	Fill in a displayItem record.
+ */
+static void PrepareItem(
+    Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item, DisplayItem *displayItem)
+{
+    Ttk_Style style = Ttk_LayoutStyle(tv->core.layout);
+    Ttk_State state = ItemState(tv, item);
+
+    Ttk_TagSetValues(tv->tree.tagTable, item->tagset, displayItem);
+    Ttk_TagSetApplyStyle(tv->tree.tagTable, style, state, displayItem);
+}
+
+/* + DrawCells --
+ *	Draw data cells for specified item.
+ */
+static void DrawCells(
+    Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item, DisplayItem *displayItem,
+    Drawable d, int x, int y)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout layout = tv->tree.cellLayout;
+    Ttk_State state = ItemState(tv, item);
+    Ttk_Padding cellPadding = {4, 0, 4, 0};
+    int rowHeight = tv->tree.rowHeight;
+    int nValues = 0;
+    Tcl_Obj **values = 0;
+    int i;
+
+    if (!item->valuesObj) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    Tcl_ListObjGetElements(NULL, item->valuesObj, &nValues, &values);
+    for (i = 0; i < tv->tree.nColumns; ++i) {
+	tv->tree.columns[i].data = (i < nValues) ? values[i] : 0;
+    }
+
+    for (i = 1; i < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns; ++i) {
+	TreeColumn *column = tv->tree.displayColumns[i];
+	Ttk_Box parcel = Ttk_PadBox(
+	    Ttk_MakeBox(x, y, column->width, rowHeight), cellPadding);
+
+	displayItem->textObj = column->data;
+	displayItem->anchorObj = column->anchorObj;	/* <<NOTE-ANCHOR>> */
+
+	DisplayLayout(layout, displayItem, state, parcel, d);
+	x += column->width;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + DrawItem --
+ * 	Draw an item (row background, tree label, and cells).
+ */
+static void DrawItem(
+    Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item, Drawable d, int depth, int row)
+{
+    Ttk_State state = ItemState(tv, item);
+    DisplayItem displayItem;
+    int rowHeight = tv->tree.rowHeight;
+    int x = tv->tree.treeArea.x - tv->tree.xscroll.first;
+    int y = tv->tree.treeArea.y + rowHeight * (row - tv->tree.yscroll.first);
+
+    if (row % 2) state |= TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE;
+
+    PrepareItem(tv, item, &displayItem);
+
+    /* Draw row background:
+     */
+    {
+	Ttk_Box rowBox = Ttk_MakeBox(x, y, TreeWidth(tv), rowHeight);
+	DisplayLayout(tv->tree.rowLayout, &displayItem, state, rowBox, d);
+    }
+
+    /* Draw tree label:
+     */
+    if (tv->tree.showFlags & SHOW_TREE) {
+	int indent = depth * tv->tree.indent;
+	int colwidth = tv->tree.column0.width;
+	Ttk_Box parcel = Ttk_MakeBox(
+		x+indent, y, colwidth-indent, rowHeight);
+	if (item->textObj) { displayItem.textObj = item->textObj; }
+	if (item->imageObj) { displayItem.imageObj = item->imageObj; }
+	/* ??? displayItem.anchorObj = 0; <<NOTE-ANCHOR>> */
+	DisplayLayout(tv->tree.itemLayout, &displayItem, state, parcel, d);
+	x += colwidth;
+    }
+
+    /* Draw data cells:
+     */
+    DrawCells(tv, item, &displayItem, d, x, y);
+}
+
+/* + DrawSubtree --
+ * 	Draw an item and all of its (viewable) descendants.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	Row number of the last item drawn.
+ */
+
+static int DrawForest(	/* forward */
+    Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item, Drawable d, int depth, int row);
+
+static int DrawSubtree(
+    Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item, Drawable d, int depth, int row)
+{
+    if (row >= tv->tree.yscroll.first) {
+	DrawItem(tv, item, d, depth, row);
+    }
+
+    if (item->state & TTK_STATE_OPEN) {
+	return DrawForest(tv, item->children, d, depth + 1, row + 1);
+    } else {
+	return row + 1;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + DrawForest --
+ * 	Draw a sequence of items and their visible descendants.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	Row number of the last item drawn.
+ */
+static int DrawForest(
+    Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item, Drawable d, int depth, int row)
+{
+    while (item && row <= tv->tree.yscroll.last) {
+        row = DrawSubtree(tv, item, d, depth, row);
+	item = item->next;
+    }
+    return row;
+}
+
+/* + TreeviewDisplay --
+ * 	Display() widget hook.  Draw the widget contents.
+ */
+static void TreeviewDisplay(void *clientData, Drawable d)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = clientData;
+
+    Ttk_DrawLayout(tv->core.layout, tv->core.state, d);
+    if (tv->tree.showFlags & SHOW_HEADINGS) {
+	DrawHeadings(tv, d);
+    }
+    DrawForest(tv, tv->tree.root->children, d, 0,0);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Utilities for widget commands
+ */
+
+/* + InsertPosition --
+ * 	Locate the previous sibling for [$tree insert].
+ *
+ * 	Returns a pointer to the item just before the specified index,
+ * 	or 0 if the item is to be inserted at the beginning.
+ */
+static TreeItem *InsertPosition(TreeItem *parent, int index)
+{
+    TreeItem *prev = 0, *next = parent->children;
+
+    while (next != 0 && index > 0) {
+	--index;
+	prev = next;
+	next = prev->next;
+    }
+
+    return prev;
+}
+
+/* + EndPosition --
+ * 	Locate the last child of the specified node.
+ *
+ * 	To avoid quadratic-time behavior in the common cases
+ * 	where the treeview is populated in breadth-first or
+ * 	depth-first order using [$tv insert $parent end ...],
+ * 	we cache the result from the last call to EndPosition()
+ * 	and start the search from there on a cache hit.
+ *
+ */
+static TreeItem *EndPosition(Treeview *tv, TreeItem *parent)
+{
+    TreeItem *endPtr = tv->tree.endPtr;
+
+    while (endPtr && endPtr->parent != parent) {
+	endPtr = endPtr->parent;
+    }
+    if (!endPtr) {
+	endPtr = parent->children;
+    }
+
+    if (endPtr) {
+	while (endPtr->next) {
+	    endPtr = endPtr->next;
+	}
+	tv->tree.endPtr = endPtr;
+    }
+
+    return endPtr;
+}
+
+/* + AncestryCheck --
+ * 	Verify that specified item is not an ancestor of the specified parent;
+ * 	returns 1 if OK, 0 and leaves an error message in interp otherwise.
+ */
+static int AncestryCheck(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item, TreeItem *parent)
+{
+    TreeItem *p = parent;
+    while (p) {
+	if (p == item) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		    "Cannot insert ", ItemName(tv, item),
+		    " as a descendant of ", ItemName(tv, parent),
+		    NULL);
+	    return 0;
+	}
+	p = p->parent;
+    }
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/* + DeleteItems --
+ * 	Remove an item and all of its descendants from the hash table
+ * 	and detach them from the tree; returns a linked list (chained
+ * 	along the ->next pointer) of deleted items.
+ */
+static TreeItem *DeleteItems(TreeItem *item, TreeItem *delq)
+{
+    if (item->entryPtr) {
+	DetachItem(item);
+	while (item->children) {
+	    delq = DeleteItems(item->children, delq);
+	}
+	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(item->entryPtr);
+	item->entryPtr = 0;
+	item->next = delq;
+	delq = item;
+    } /* else -- item has already been unlinked */
+    return delq;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands -- item inquiry.
+ */
+
+/* + $tv children $item ?newchildren? --
+ * 	Return the list of children associated with $item
+ */
+static int TreeviewChildrenCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item;
+    Tcl_Obj *result;
+
+    if (objc < 3 || objc > 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item ?newchildren?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]);
+    if (!item) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+	for (item = item->children; item; item = item->next) {
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, result, ItemID(tv, item));
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+    } else {
+	TreeItem **newChildren = GetItemListFromObj(interp, tv, objv[3]);
+	TreeItem *child;
+	int i;
+
+	if (!newChildren)
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+	/* Sanity-check:
+	 */
+	for (i=0; newChildren[i]; ++i) {
+	    if (!AncestryCheck(interp, tv, newChildren[i], item)) {
+		ckfree((ClientData)newChildren);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	/* Detach old children:
+	 */
+	child = item->children;
+	while (child) {
+	    TreeItem *next = child->next;
+	    DetachItem(child);
+	    child = next;
+	}
+
+	/* Detach new children from their current locations:
+	 */
+	for (i=0; newChildren[i]; ++i) {
+	    DetachItem(newChildren[i]);
+	}
+
+	/* Reinsert new children:
+	 * Note: it is not an error for an item to be listed more than once,
+	 * though it probably should be...
+	 */
+	child = 0;
+	for (i=0; newChildren[i]; ++i) {
+	    if (newChildren[i]->parent) {
+		/* This is a duplicate element which has already been
+		 * inserted.  Ignore it.
+		 */
+		continue;
+	    }
+	    InsertItem(item, child, newChildren[i]);
+	    child = newChildren[i];
+	}
+
+	ckfree((ClientData)newChildren);
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv parent $item --
+ * 	Return the item ID of $item's parent.
+ */
+static int TreeviewParentCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]);
+    if (!item) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (item->parent) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ItemID(tv, item->parent));
+    } else {
+	/* This is the root item.  @@@ Return an error? */
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv next $item
+ * 	Return the ID of $item's next sibling.
+ */
+static int TreeviewNextCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]);
+    if (!item) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (item->next) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ItemID(tv, item->next));
+    } /* else -- leave interp-result empty */
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv prev $item
+ * 	Return the ID of $item's previous sibling.
+ */
+static int TreeviewPrevCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]);
+    if (!item) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (item->prev) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ItemID(tv, item->prev));
+    } /* else -- leave interp-result empty */
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv index $item --
+ * 	Return the index of $item within its parent.
+ */
+static int TreeviewIndexCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item;
+    int index = 0;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]);
+    if (!item) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    while (item->prev) {
+	++index;
+	item = item->prev;
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv exists $itemid --
+ * 	Test if the specified item id is present in the tree.
+ */
+static int TreeviewExistsCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "itemid");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tv->tree.items, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(entryPtr != 0));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv bbox $itemid ?$column? --
+ * 	Return bounding box [x y width height] of specified item.
+ */
+static int TreeviewBBoxCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item = 0;
+    TreeColumn *column = 0;
+    Ttk_Box bbox;
+
+    if (objc < 3 || objc > 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "itemid ?column");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]);
+    if (!item) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (objc >=4 && (column = FindColumn(interp,tv,objv[3])) == NULL) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (BoundingBox(tv, item, column, &bbox)) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Ttk_NewBoxObj(bbox));
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv identify $x $y -- (obsolescent)
+ * 	Implements the old, horrible, 2-argument form of [$tv identify].
+ *
+ * Returns: one of
+ * 	heading #n
+ * 	cell itemid #n
+ * 	item itemid element
+ * 	row itemid
+ */
+static int TreeviewHorribleIdentify(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], Treeview *tv)
+{
+    const char *what = "nothing", *detail = NULL;
+    TreeItem *item = 0;
+    Tcl_Obj *result;
+    int dColumnNumber;
+    char dcolbuf[16];
+    int x, y, x1;
+
+    /* ASSERT: objc == 4 */
+
+    if (   Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK
+    ) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    dColumnNumber = IdentifyDisplayColumn(tv, x, &x1);
+    if (dColumnNumber < 0) {
+	goto done;
+    }
+    sprintf(dcolbuf, "#%d", dColumnNumber);
+
+    if (Ttk_BoxContains(tv->tree.headingArea,x,y)) {
+	if (-HALO <= x1 - x  && x1 - x <= HALO) {
+	    what = "separator";
+	} else {
+	    what = "heading";
+	}
+	detail = dcolbuf;
+    } else if (Ttk_BoxContains(tv->tree.treeArea,x,y)) {
+	item = IdentifyItem(tv, y);
+	if (item && dColumnNumber > 0) {
+	    what = "cell";
+	    detail = dcolbuf;
+	} else if (item) {
+	    Ttk_Layout layout = tv->tree.itemLayout;
+	    Ttk_Box itemBox;
+	    DisplayItem displayItem;
+	    Ttk_Element element;
+
+	    BoundingBox(tv, item, NULL, &itemBox);
+	    PrepareItem(tv, item, &displayItem); /*@@@ FIX: -text, etc*/
+	    Ttk_RebindSublayout(layout, &displayItem);
+	    Ttk_PlaceLayout(layout, ItemState(tv,item), itemBox);
+	    element = Ttk_IdentifyElement(layout, x, y);
+
+	    if (element) {
+		what = "item";
+		detail = Ttk_ElementName(element);
+	    } else {
+		what = "row";
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+done:
+    result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, Tcl_NewStringObj(what, -1));
+    if (item)
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, ItemID(tv, item));
+    if (detail)
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, Tcl_NewStringObj(detail, -1));
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv identify $component $x $y --
+ * 	Identify the component at position x,y.
+ */
+
+static int TreeviewIdentifyCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    static const char *submethodStrings[] =
+	 { "region", "item", "column", "row", "element", NULL };
+    enum { I_REGION, I_ITEM, I_COLUMN, I_ROW, I_ELEMENT };
+
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    int submethod;
+    int x, y;
+
+    TreeRegion region;
+    Ttk_Box bbox;
+    TreeItem *item;
+    TreeColumn *column = 0;
+    int colno, x1;
+
+    if (objc == 4) {	/* Old form */
+	return TreeviewHorribleIdentify(interp, objc, objv, tv);
+    } else if (objc != 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "command x y");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (   Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2],
+		submethodStrings, "command", TCL_EXACT, &submethod) != TCL_OK
+        || Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &y) != TCL_OK
+    ) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    region = IdentifyRegion(tv, x, y);
+    item = IdentifyItem(tv, y);
+    colno = IdentifyDisplayColumn(tv, x, &x1);
+    column = (colno >= 0) ?  tv->tree.displayColumns[colno] : NULL;
+
+    switch (submethod)
+    {
+	case I_REGION :
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,Tcl_NewStringObj(regionStrings[region],-1));
+	    break;
+
+	case I_ITEM :
+	case I_ROW :
+	    if (item) {
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ItemID(tv, item));
+	    }
+	    break;
+
+	case I_COLUMN :
+	    if (colno >= 0) {
+		char dcolbuf[16];
+		sprintf(dcolbuf, "#%d", colno);
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(dcolbuf, -1));
+	    }
+	    break;
+
+	case I_ELEMENT :
+	{
+	    Ttk_Layout layout = 0;
+	    DisplayItem displayItem;
+	    Ttk_Element element;
+
+	    switch (region) {
+		case REGION_NOTHING:
+		    layout = tv->core.layout;
+		    return TCL_OK; /* @@@ NYI */
+		case REGION_HEADING:
+		case REGION_SEPARATOR:
+		    layout = tv->tree.headingLayout;
+		    return TCL_OK; /* @@@ NYI */
+		case REGION_TREE:
+		    layout = tv->tree.itemLayout;
+		    break;
+		case REGION_CELL:
+		    layout = tv->tree.cellLayout;
+		    break;
+	    }
+
+	    if (!BoundingBox(tv, item, column, &bbox)) {
+		return TCL_OK;
+	    }
+
+	    PrepareItem(tv, item, &displayItem); /*@@@ FIX: fill in -text,etc */
+	    Ttk_RebindSublayout(layout, &displayItem);
+	    Ttk_PlaceLayout(layout, ItemState(tv,item), bbox);
+	    element = Ttk_IdentifyElement(layout, x, y);
+
+	    if (element) {
+		const char *elementName = Ttk_ElementName(element);
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(elementName, -1));
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands -- item and column configuration.
+ */
+
+/* + $tv item $item ?options ....?
+ * 	Query or configure item options.
+ */
+static int TreeviewItemCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item ?option ?value??...");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!(item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]))) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	return TtkEnumerateOptions(interp, item, ItemOptionSpecs,
+	    tv->tree.itemOptionTable,  tv->core.tkwin);
+    } else if (objc == 4) {
+	return TtkGetOptionValue(interp, item, objv[3],
+	    tv->tree.itemOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+    } else {
+	return ConfigureItem(interp, tv, item, objc-3, objv+3);
+    }
+}
+
+/* + $tv column column ?options ....?
+ * 	Column data accessor
+ */
+static int TreeviewColumnCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeColumn *column;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "column -option value...");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!(column = FindColumn(interp, tv, objv[2]))) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	return TtkEnumerateOptions(interp, column, ColumnOptionSpecs,
+	    tv->tree.columnOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+    } else if (objc == 4) {
+	return TtkGetOptionValue(interp, column, objv[3],
+	    tv->tree.columnOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+    } else {
+	return ConfigureColumn(interp, tv, column, objc-3, objv+3);
+    }
+}
+
+/* + $tv heading column ?options ....?
+ * 	Heading data accessor
+ */
+static int TreeviewHeadingCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable = tv->tree.headingOptionTable;
+    Tk_Window tkwin = tv->core.tkwin;
+    TreeColumn *column;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "column -option value...");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!(column = FindColumn(interp, tv, objv[2]))) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	return TtkEnumerateOptions(
+	    interp, column, HeadingOptionSpecs, optionTable, tkwin);
+    } else if (objc == 4) {
+	return TtkGetOptionValue(
+	    interp, column, objv[3], optionTable, tkwin);
+    } else {
+	return ConfigureHeading(interp, tv, column, objc-3,objv+3);
+    }
+}
+
+/* + $tv set $item ?$column ?value??
+ * 	Query or configure cell values
+ */
+static int TreeviewSetCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item;
+    TreeColumn *column;
+    int columnNumber;
+
+    if (objc < 3 || objc > 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item ?column ?value??");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!(item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2])))
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    /* Make sure -values exists:
+     */
+    if (!item->valuesObj) {
+	item->valuesObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(item->valuesObj);
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	/* Return dictionary:
+	 */
+	Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+	Tcl_Obj *value;
+	for (columnNumber=0; columnNumber<tv->tree.nColumns; ++columnNumber) {
+	    Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, item->valuesObj, columnNumber, &value);
+	    if (value) {
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, result,
+			tv->tree.columns[columnNumber].idObj);
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, result, value);
+	    }
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /* else -- get or set column
+     */
+    if (!(column = FindColumn(interp, tv, objv[3])))
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (column == &tv->tree.column0) {
+	/* @@@ Maybe set -text here instead? */
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Display column #0 cannot be set", NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Note: we don't do any error checking in the list operations,
+     * since item->valuesObj is guaranteed to be a list.
+     */
+    columnNumber = column - tv->tree.columns;
+
+    if (objc == 4) {	/* get column */
+	Tcl_Obj *result = 0;
+	Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, item->valuesObj, columnNumber, &result);
+	if (!result) {
+	    result = Tcl_NewStringObj("",0);
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else {		/* set column */
+	int length;
+
+	item->valuesObj = unshareObj(item->valuesObj);
+
+	/* Make sure -values is fully populated:
+	 */
+	Tcl_ListObjLength(interp, item->valuesObj, &length);
+	while (length < tv->tree.nColumns) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *empty = Tcl_NewStringObj("",0);
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, item->valuesObj, empty);
+	    ++length;
+	}
+
+	/* Set value:
+	 */
+	Tcl_ListObjReplace(interp,item->valuesObj,columnNumber,1,1,objv+4);
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands -- tree modification.
+ */
+
+/* + $tv insert $parent $index ?-id id? ?-option value ...?
+ * 	Insert a new item.
+ */
+static int TreeviewInsertCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *parent, *sibling, *newItem;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int isNew;
+
+    if (objc < 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "parent index ?-id id? -options...");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Get parent node:
+     */
+    if ((parent = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2])) == NULL) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Locate previous sibling based on $index:
+     */
+    if (!strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "end")) {
+	sibling = EndPosition(tv, parent);
+    } else {
+	int index;
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &index) != TCL_OK)
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	sibling = InsertPosition(parent, index);
+    }
+
+    /* Get node name:
+     *     If -id supplied and does not already exist, use that;
+     *     Otherwise autogenerate new one.
+     */
+    objc -= 4; objv += 4;
+    if (objc >= 2 && !strcmp("-id", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]))) {
+	const char *itemName = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tv->tree.items, itemName, &isNew);
+	if (!isNew) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Item ",itemName," already exists",NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	objc -= 2; objv += 2;
+    } else {
+	char idbuf[16];
+	do {
+	    ++tv->tree.serial;
+	    sprintf(idbuf, "I%03X", tv->tree.serial);
+	    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tv->tree.items, idbuf, &isNew);
+	} while (!isNew);
+    }
+
+    /* Create and configure new item:
+     */
+    newItem = NewItem();
+    Tk_InitOptions(
+	interp, (ClientData)newItem, tv->tree.itemOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+    newItem->tagset = Ttk_GetTagSetFromObj(NULL, tv->tree.tagTable, NULL);
+    if (ConfigureItem(interp, tv, newItem, objc, objv) != TCL_OK) {
+    	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entryPtr);
+	FreeItem(newItem);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Store in hash table, link into tree:
+     */
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, newItem);
+    newItem->entryPtr = entryPtr;
+    InsertItem(parent, sibling, newItem);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ItemID(tv, newItem));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv detach $item --
+ * 	Unlink $item from the tree.
+ */
+static int TreeviewDetachCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem **items;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!(items = GetItemListFromObj(interp, tv, objv[2]))) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Sanity-check */
+    for (i = 0; items[i]; ++i) {
+	if (items[i] == tv->tree.root) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Cannot detach root item", NULL);
+	    ckfree((ClientData)items);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    for (i = 0; items[i]; ++i) {
+	DetachItem(items[i]);
+    }
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+    ckfree((ClientData)items);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv delete $items --
+ * 	Delete each item in $items.
+ *
+ * 	Do this in two passes:
+ * 	First detach the item and all its descendants and remove them
+ * 	from the hash table.  Free the items themselves in a second pass.
+ *
+ * 	It's done this way because an item may appear more than once
+ *	in the list of items to delete (either directly or as a descendant
+ *	of a previously deleted item.)
+ */
+
+static int TreeviewDeleteCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem **items, *delq;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "items");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (!(items = GetItemListFromObj(interp, tv, objv[2]))) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Sanity-check:
+     */
+    for (i=0; items[i]; ++i) {
+	if (items[i] == tv->tree.root) {
+	    ckfree((ClientData)items);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Cannot delete root item", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Remove items from hash table.
+     */
+    delq = 0;
+    for (i=0; items[i]; ++i) {
+	delq = DeleteItems(items[i], delq);
+    }
+
+    /* Free items:
+     */
+    while (delq) {
+	TreeItem *next = delq->next;
+	if (tv->tree.focus == delq)
+	    tv->tree.focus = 0;
+	if (tv->tree.endPtr == delq)
+	    tv->tree.endPtr = 0;
+	FreeItem(delq);
+	delq = next;
+    }
+
+    ckfree((ClientData)items);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv move $item $parent $index
+ * 	Move $item to the specified $index in $parent's child list.
+ */
+static int TreeviewMoveCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item, *parent;
+    TreeItem *sibling;
+
+    if (objc != 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item parent index");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (   (item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2])) == 0
+	|| (parent = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[3])) == 0)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Locate previous sibling based on $index:
+     */
+    if (!strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[4]), "end")) {
+	sibling = EndPosition(tv, parent);
+    } else {
+	TreeItem *p;
+	int index;
+
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	sibling = 0;
+	for (p = parent->children; p != NULL && index > 0; p = p->next) {
+	    if (p != item) {
+		--index;
+	    } /* else -- moving node forward, count index+1 nodes  */
+	    sibling = p;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Check ancestry:
+     */
+    if (!AncestryCheck(interp, tv, item, parent)) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Moving an item after itself is a no-op:
+     */
+    if (item == sibling) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /* Move item:
+     */
+    DetachItem(item);
+    InsertItem(parent, sibling, item);
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands -- scrolling
+ */
+
+static int TreeviewXViewCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    return TtkScrollviewCommand(interp, objc, objv, tv->tree.xscrollHandle);
+}
+
+static int TreeviewYViewCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    return TtkScrollviewCommand(interp, objc, objv, tv->tree.yscrollHandle);
+}
+
+/* $tree see $item --
+ * 	Ensure that $item is visible.
+ */
+static int TreeviewSeeCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item, *parent;
+    int rowNumber;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!(item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]))) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Make sure all ancestors are open:
+     */
+    for (parent = item->parent; parent; parent = parent->parent) {
+	if (!(parent->state & TTK_STATE_OPEN)) {
+	    parent->openObj = unshareObj(parent->openObj);
+	    Tcl_SetBooleanObj(parent->openObj, 1);
+	    parent->state |= TTK_STATE_OPEN;
+	    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+	}
+    }
+    tv->tree.yscroll.total = CountRows(tv->tree.root) - 1;
+
+    /* Make sure item is visible:
+     */
+    rowNumber = RowNumber(tv, item);
+    if (rowNumber < tv->tree.yscroll.first) {
+	TtkScrollTo(tv->tree.yscrollHandle, rowNumber);
+    } else if (rowNumber >= tv->tree.yscroll.last) {
+	TtkScrollTo(tv->tree.yscrollHandle,
+	    tv->tree.yscroll.first + (1+rowNumber - tv->tree.yscroll.last));
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands -- interactive column resize
+ */
+
+/* + $tree drag $column $newX --
+ * 	Set right edge of display column $column to x position $X
+ */
+static int TreeviewDragCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    int left = tv->tree.treeArea.x - tv->tree.xscroll.first;
+    int i = FirstColumn(tv);
+    TreeColumn *column;
+    int newx;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "column xposition");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (  (column = FindColumn(interp, tv, objv[2])) == 0
+        || Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &newx) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    for (;i < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns; ++i) {
+	TreeColumn *c = tv->tree.displayColumns[i];
+	int right = left + c->width;
+	if (c == column) {
+	    DragColumn(tv, i, newx - right);
+	    /* ASSERT: SLACKINVARIANT */
+	    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	left = right;
+    }
+
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	"column ", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), " is not displayed",
+	NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands -- focus and selection
+ */
+
+/* + $tree focus ?item?
+ */
+static int TreeviewFocusCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	if (tv->tree.focus) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ItemID(tv, tv->tree.focus));
+	}
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc == 3) {
+	TreeItem *newFocus = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]);
+	if (!newFocus)
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	tv->tree.focus = newFocus;
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?newFocus?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + $tree selection ?add|remove|set|toggle $items?
+ */
+static int TreeviewSelectionCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    enum {
+	SELECTION_SET, SELECTION_ADD, SELECTION_REMOVE, SELECTION_TOGGLE
+    };
+    static const char *selopStrings[] = {
+	"set", "add", "remove", "toggle", NULL
+    };
+
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    int selop, i;
+    TreeItem *item, **items;
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+	for (item = tv->tree.root->children; item; item=NextPreorder(item)) {
+	    if (item->state & TTK_STATE_SELECTED)
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, ItemID(tv, item));
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+    	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?add|remove|set|toggle items?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], selopStrings,
+	    "selection operation", 0, &selop) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    items = GetItemListFromObj(interp, tv, objv[3]);
+    if (!items) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    switch (selop)
+    {
+	case SELECTION_SET:
+	    for (item=tv->tree.root; item; item=NextPreorder(item)) {
+		item->state &= ~TTK_STATE_SELECTED;
+	    }
+	    /*FALLTHRU*/
+	case SELECTION_ADD:
+	    for (i=0; items[i]; ++i) {
+		items[i]->state |= TTK_STATE_SELECTED;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case SELECTION_REMOVE:
+	    for (i=0; items[i]; ++i) {
+		items[i]->state &= ~TTK_STATE_SELECTED;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case SELECTION_TOGGLE:
+	    for (i=0; items[i]; ++i) {
+		items[i]->state ^= TTK_STATE_SELECTED;
+	    }
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    ckfree((ClientData)items);
+    TtkSendVirtualEvent(tv->core.tkwin, "TreeviewSelect");
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands -- tags and bindings.
+ */
+
+/* + $tv tag bind $tag ?$sequence ?$script??
+ */
+static int TreeviewTagBindCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_TagTable tagTable = tv->tree.tagTable;
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable = tv->tree.bindingTable;
+    Ttk_Tag tag;
+
+    if (objc < 4 || objc > 6) {
+    	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?sequence? ?script?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tag = Ttk_GetTagFromObj(tagTable, objv[3]);
+    if (!tag) { return TCL_ERROR; }
+
+    if (objc == 4) {		/* $tv tag bind $tag */
+	Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, bindingTable, tag);
+    } else if (objc == 5) { 	/* $tv tag bind $tag $sequence */
+	/* TODO: distinguish "no such binding" (OK) from "bad pattern" (ERROR)
+	 */
+	const char *script = Tk_GetBinding(interp,
+		bindingTable, tag, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
+	if (script != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(script,-1));
+	}
+    } else if (objc == 6) {	/* $tv tag bind $tag $sequence $script */
+	const char *sequence = Tcl_GetString(objv[4]);
+	const char *script = Tcl_GetString(objv[5]);
+
+	if (!*script) { /* Delete existing binding */
+	    Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, bindingTable, tag, sequence);
+	} else {
+	    unsigned long mask = Tk_CreateBinding(interp,
+		    bindingTable, tag, sequence, script, 0);
+
+	    /* Test mask to make sure event is supported:
+	     */
+	    if (mask & (~TreeviewBindEventMask)) {
+		Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, bindingTable, tag, sequence);
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unsupported event ", sequence,
+		    "\nonly key, button, motion, and virtual events supported",
+		    NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv tag configure $tag ?-option ?value -option value...??
+ */
+static int TreeviewTagConfigureCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_TagTable tagTable = tv->tree.tagTable;
+    Ttk_Tag tag;
+
+    if (objc < 4) {
+    	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?-option ?value ...??");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tag = Ttk_GetTagFromObj(tagTable, objv[3]);
+
+    if (objc == 4) {
+	return Ttk_EnumerateTagOptions(interp, tagTable, tag);
+    } else if (objc == 5) {
+	Tcl_Obj *result = Ttk_TagOptionValue(interp, tagTable, tag, objv[4]);
+	if (result) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} /* else */
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    /* else */
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+    return Ttk_ConfigureTag(interp, tagTable, tag, objc - 4, objv + 4);
+}
+
+/* + $tv tag has $tag ?$item?
+ */
+static int TreeviewTagHasCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+
+    if (objc == 4) {	/* Return list of all items with tag */
+	Ttk_Tag tag = Ttk_GetTagFromObj(tv->tree.tagTable, objv[3]);
+	TreeItem *item = tv->tree.root;
+	Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+
+	while (item) {
+	    if (Ttk_TagSetContains(item->tagset, tag)) {
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, ItemID(tv, item));
+	    }
+	    item = NextPreorder(item);
+	}
+
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc == 5) {	/* Test if item has specified tag */
+	Ttk_Tag tag = Ttk_GetTagFromObj(tv->tree.tagTable, objv[3]);
+	TreeItem *item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[4]);
+	if (!item) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+	    Tcl_NewBooleanObj(Ttk_TagSetContains(item->tagset, tag)));
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else {
+    	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?item?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + $tv tag names $tag
+ */
+static int TreeviewTagNamesCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    return Ttk_EnumerateTags(interp, tv->tree.tagTable);
+}
+
+/* + $tv tag add $tag $items
+ */
+static void AddTag(TreeItem *item, Ttk_Tag tag)
+{
+    if (Ttk_TagSetAdd(item->tagset, tag)) {
+	if (item->tagsObj) Tcl_DecrRefCount(item->tagsObj);
+	item->tagsObj = Ttk_NewTagSetObj(item->tagset);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(item->tagsObj);
+    }
+}
+
+static int TreeviewTagAddCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Tag tag;
+    TreeItem **items;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc != 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName items");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tag = Ttk_GetTagFromObj(tv->tree.tagTable, objv[3]);
+    items = GetItemListFromObj(interp, tv, objv[4]);
+
+    if (!items) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    for (i=0; items[i]; ++i) {
+	AddTag(items[i], tag);
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv tag remove $tag ?$items?
+ */
+static void RemoveTag(TreeItem *item, Ttk_Tag tag)
+{
+    if (Ttk_TagSetRemove(item->tagset, tag)) {
+	if (item->tagsObj) Tcl_DecrRefCount(item->tagsObj);
+	item->tagsObj = Ttk_NewTagSetObj(item->tagset);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(item->tagsObj);
+    }
+}
+
+static int TreeviewTagRemoveCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Tag tag;
+
+    if (objc < 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName items");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tag = Ttk_GetTagFromObj(tv->tree.tagTable, objv[3]);
+
+    if (objc == 5) {
+	TreeItem **items = GetItemListFromObj(interp, tv, objv[4]);
+	int i;
+
+	if (!items) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	for (i=0; items[i]; ++i) {
+	    RemoveTag(items[i], tag);
+	}
+    } else if (objc == 4) {
+	TreeItem *item = tv->tree.root;
+	while (item) {
+	    RemoveTag(item, tag);
+	    item=NextPreorder(item);
+	}
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static const Ttk_Ensemble TreeviewTagCommands[] = {
+    { "add",		TreeviewTagAddCommand,0 },
+    { "bind",		TreeviewTagBindCommand,0 },
+    { "configure",	TreeviewTagConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "has",		TreeviewTagHasCommand,0 },
+    { "names",		TreeviewTagNamesCommand,0 },
+    { "remove",		TreeviewTagRemoveCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands record.
+ */
+static const Ttk_Ensemble TreeviewCommands[] = {
+    { "bbox",  		TreeviewBBoxCommand,0 },
+    { "children",	TreeviewChildrenCommand,0 },
+    { "cget",		TtkWidgetCgetCommand,0 },
+    { "column", 	TreeviewColumnCommand,0 },
+    { "configure",	TtkWidgetConfigureCommand,0 },
+    { "delete", 	TreeviewDeleteCommand,0 },
+    { "detach", 	TreeviewDetachCommand,0 },
+    { "drag",   	TreeviewDragCommand,0 },
+    { "exists", 	TreeviewExistsCommand,0 },
+    { "focus", 		TreeviewFocusCommand,0 },
+    { "heading", 	TreeviewHeadingCommand,0 },
+    { "identify",  	TreeviewIdentifyCommand,0 },
+    { "index",  	TreeviewIndexCommand,0 },
+    { "instate",	TtkWidgetInstateCommand,0 },
+    { "insert", 	TreeviewInsertCommand,0 },
+    { "item", 		TreeviewItemCommand,0 },
+    { "move", 		TreeviewMoveCommand,0 },
+    { "next", 		TreeviewNextCommand,0 },
+    { "parent", 	TreeviewParentCommand,0 },
+    { "prev", 		TreeviewPrevCommand,0 },
+    { "see", 		TreeviewSeeCommand,0 },
+    { "selection" ,	TreeviewSelectionCommand,0 },
+    { "set",  		TreeviewSetCommand,0 },
+    { "state",  	TtkWidgetStateCommand,0 },
+    { "tag",    	0,TreeviewTagCommands },
+    { "xview",  	TreeviewXViewCommand,0 },
+    { "yview",  	TreeviewYViewCommand,0 },
+    { 0,0,0 }
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget definition.
+ */
+
+static WidgetSpec TreeviewWidgetSpec = {
+    "Treeview",			/* className */
+    sizeof(Treeview),   	/* recordSize */
+    TreeviewOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    TreeviewCommands,   	/* subcommands */
+    TreeviewInitialize,   	/* initializeProc */
+    TreeviewCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    TreeviewConfigure,    	/* configureProc */
+    TtkNullPostConfigure,  	/* postConfigureProc */
+    TreeviewGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    TreeviewSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    TreeviewDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    TreeviewDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout specifications.
+ */
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT_TABLE(LayoutTable)
+
+TTK_LAYOUT("Treeview",
+    TTK_GROUP("Treeview.field", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_BORDER,
+	TTK_GROUP("Treeview.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_NODE("Treeview.treearea", TTK_FILL_BOTH))))
+
+TTK_LAYOUT("Item",
+    TTK_GROUP("Treeitem.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Treeitem.indicator", TTK_PACK_LEFT)
+	TTK_NODE("Treeitem.image", TTK_PACK_LEFT)
+	TTK_GROUP("Treeitem.focus", TTK_PACK_LEFT,
+	    TTK_NODE("Treeitem.text", TTK_PACK_LEFT))))
+
+TTK_LAYOUT("Cell",
+    TTK_GROUP("Treedata.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Treeitem.text", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+
+TTK_LAYOUT("Heading",
+    TTK_NODE("Treeheading.cell", TTK_FILL_BOTH)
+    TTK_GROUP("Treeheading.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_GROUP("Treeheading.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_NODE("Treeheading.image", TTK_PACK_RIGHT)
+	    TTK_NODE("Treeheading.text", TTK_FILL_X))))
+
+TTK_LAYOUT("Row",
+    TTK_NODE("Treeitem.row", TTK_FILL_BOTH))
+
+TTK_END_LAYOUT_TABLE
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tree indicator element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *marginsObj;
+} TreeitemIndicator;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TreeitemIndicatorOptions[] = {
+    { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(TreeitemIndicator,colorObj), DEFAULT_FOREGROUND },
+    { "-indicatorsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(TreeitemIndicator,sizeObj), "12" },
+    { "-indicatormargins", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(TreeitemIndicator,marginsObj), "2 2 4 2" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void TreeitemIndicatorSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    TreeitemIndicator *indicator = elementRecord;
+    Ttk_Padding margins;
+    int size = 0;
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginsObj, &margins);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->sizeObj, &size);
+
+    *widthPtr = size + Ttk_PaddingWidth(margins);
+    *heightPtr = size + Ttk_PaddingHeight(margins);
+}
+
+static void TreeitemIndicatorDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    TreeitemIndicator *indicator = elementRecord;
+    ArrowDirection direction =
+	(state & TTK_STATE_OPEN) ? ARROW_DOWN : ARROW_RIGHT;
+    Ttk_Padding margins;
+    XColor *borderColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->colorObj);
+    XGCValues gcvalues; GC gc; unsigned mask;
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_LEAF) /* don't draw anything */
+	return;
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,tkwin,indicator->marginsObj,&margins);
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, margins);
+
+    gcvalues.foreground = borderColor->pixel;
+    gcvalues.line_width = 1;
+    mask = GCForeground | GCLineWidth;
+    gc = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, mask, &gcvalues);
+
+    TtkDrawArrow(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, b, direction);
+
+    Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TreeitemIndicatorElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TreeitemIndicator),
+    TreeitemIndicatorOptions,
+    TreeitemIndicatorSize,
+    TreeitemIndicatorDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Row element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *rowNumberObj;
+} RowElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec RowElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(RowElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-rownumber", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(RowElement,rowNumberObj), "0" },
+    { NULL, 0, 0, NULL }
+};
+
+static void RowElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    RowElement *row = elementRecord;
+    XColor *color = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, row->backgroundObj);
+    GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(color, d);
+    XFillRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc,
+	    b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec RowElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(RowElement),
+    RowElementOptions,
+    TtkNullElementSize,
+    RowElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialisation.
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE
+void TtkTreeview_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme = Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::treeview", &TreeviewWidgetSpec);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Treeitem.indicator",
+	    &TreeitemIndicatorElementSpec, 0);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Treeitem.row", &RowElementSpec, 0);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Treeheading.cell", &RowElementSpec, 0);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "treearea", &ttkNullElementSpec, 0);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayouts(theme, LayoutTable);
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkWidget.c b/generic/ttk/ttkWidget.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d5e0484
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkWidget.c
@@ -0,0 +1,789 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2003, Joe English
+ *
+ * Core widget utilities.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
+#define TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING 1
+#endif
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Internal helper routines.
+ */
+
+/* UpdateLayout --
+ * 	Call the widget's get-layout hook to recompute corePtr->layout.
+ * 	Returns TCL_OK if successful, returns TCL_ERROR and leaves
+ * 	the layout unchanged otherwise.
+ */
+static int UpdateLayout(Tcl_Interp *interp, WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr = Ttk_GetCurrentTheme(interp);
+    Ttk_Layout newLayout =
+    	corePtr->widgetSpec->getLayoutProc(interp, themePtr,corePtr);
+
+    if (newLayout) {
+	if (corePtr->layout) {
+	    Ttk_FreeLayout(corePtr->layout);
+	}
+	corePtr->layout = newLayout;
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* SizeChanged --
+ * 	Call the widget's sizeProc to compute new requested size
+ * 	and pass it to the geometry manager.
+ */
+static void SizeChanged(WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    int reqWidth = 1, reqHeight = 1;
+
+    if (corePtr->widgetSpec->sizeProc(corePtr,&reqWidth,&reqHeight)) {
+	Tk_GeometryRequest(corePtr->tkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight);
+    }
+}
+
+#ifndef TK_NO_DOUBLE_BUFFERING
+
+/* BeginDrawing --
+ * 	Returns a Drawable for drawing the widget contents.
+ *	This is normally an off-screen Pixmap, copied to
+ *	the window by EndDrawing().
+ */
+static Drawable BeginDrawing(Tk_Window tkwin)
+{
+    return Tk_GetPixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
+	    Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), Tk_Depth(tkwin));
+}
+
+/* EndDrawing --
+ *	Copy the drawable contents to the screen and release resources.
+ */
+static void EndDrawing(Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d)
+{
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+    GC gc;
+
+    gcValues.function = GXcopy;
+    gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
+    gc = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCFunction|GCGraphicsExposures, &gcValues);
+
+    XCopyArea(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), gc,
+	    0, 0, (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin), (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin),
+	    0, 0);
+
+    Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), d);
+    Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc);
+}
+#else
+/* No double-buffering: draw directly into the window. */
+static Drawable BeginDrawing(Tk_Window tkwin) { return Tk_WindowId(tkwin); }
+static void EndDrawing(Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d) { }
+#endif
+
+/* DrawWidget --
+ *	Redraw a widget.  Called as an idle handler.
+ */
+static void DrawWidget(ClientData recordPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+
+    corePtr->flags &= ~REDISPLAY_PENDING;
+    if (Tk_IsMapped(corePtr->tkwin)) {
+	Drawable d = BeginDrawing(corePtr->tkwin);
+	corePtr->widgetSpec->layoutProc(recordPtr);
+	corePtr->widgetSpec->displayProc(recordPtr, d);
+	EndDrawing(corePtr->tkwin, d);
+    }
+}
+
+/* TtkRedisplayWidget --
+ * 	Schedule redisplay as an idle handler.
+ */
+void TtkRedisplayWidget(WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    if (corePtr->flags & WIDGET_DESTROYED) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (!(corePtr->flags & REDISPLAY_PENDING)) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DrawWidget, corePtr);
+	corePtr->flags |= REDISPLAY_PENDING;
+    }
+}
+
+/* TtkResizeWidget --
+ * 	Recompute widget size, schedule geometry propagation and redisplay.
+ */
+void TtkResizeWidget(WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    if (corePtr->flags & WIDGET_DESTROYED) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    SizeChanged(corePtr);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+}
+
+/* TtkWidgetChangeState --
+ * 	Set / clear the specified bits in the 'state' flag,
+ */
+void TtkWidgetChangeState(WidgetCore *corePtr,
+    unsigned int setBits, unsigned int clearBits)
+{
+    Ttk_State oldState = corePtr->state;
+    corePtr->state = (oldState & ~clearBits) | setBits;
+    if (corePtr->state ^ oldState) {
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/* WidgetInstanceObjCmd --
+ *	Widget instance command implementation.
+ */
+static int
+WidgetInstanceObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = clientData;
+    const Ttk_Ensemble *commands = corePtr->widgetSpec->commands;
+    int status;
+
+    Tcl_Preserve(clientData);
+    status = Ttk_InvokeEnsemble(commands,1, clientData,interp,objc,objv);
+    Tcl_Release(clientData);
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget destruction.
+ *
+ * A widget can be destroyed when the application explicitly
+ * destroys the window or one of its ancestors via [destroy]
+ * or Tk_DestroyWindow(); when the application deletes the widget
+ * instance command; when there is an error in the widget constructor;
+ * or when another application calls XDestroyWindow on the window ID.
+ *
+ * The window receives a <DestroyNotify> event in all cases,
+ * so we do the bulk of the cleanup there.  See [#2207435] for
+ * further notes (esp. re: Tk_FreeConfigOptions).
+ *
+ * Widget code that reenters the interp should only do so
+ * when the widtget is Tcl_Preserve()d, and should check
+ * the WIDGET_DESTROYED flag bit upon return.
+ */
+
+/* WidgetInstanceObjCmdDeleted --
+ * 	Widget instance command	deletion callback.
+ */
+static void
+WidgetInstanceObjCmdDeleted(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = clientData;
+    corePtr->widgetCmd = NULL;
+    if (corePtr->tkwin != NULL)
+	Tk_DestroyWindow(corePtr->tkwin);
+}
+
+/* FreeWidget --
+ *	 Final cleanup for widget; called via Tcl_EventuallyFree().
+ */
+static void
+FreeWidget(char *memPtr)
+{
+    ckfree(memPtr);
+}
+
+/* DestroyWidget --
+ * 	Main widget destructor; called from <DestroyNotify> event handler.
+ */
+static void
+DestroyWidget(WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    corePtr->flags |= WIDGET_DESTROYED;
+
+    corePtr->widgetSpec->cleanupProc(corePtr);
+
+    Tk_FreeConfigOptions(
+	(ClientData)corePtr, corePtr->optionTable, corePtr->tkwin);
+
+    if (corePtr->layout) {
+	Ttk_FreeLayout(corePtr->layout);
+    }
+
+    if (corePtr->flags & REDISPLAY_PENDING) {
+	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DrawWidget, corePtr);
+    }
+
+    corePtr->tkwin = NULL;
+    if (corePtr->widgetCmd) {
+	Tcl_Command cmd = corePtr->widgetCmd;
+	corePtr->widgetCmd = 0;
+	/* NB: this can reenter the interpreter via a command traces */
+	Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(corePtr->interp, cmd);
+    }
+    Tcl_EventuallyFree(corePtr, FreeWidget);
+}
+
+/*
+ * CoreEventProc --
+ *	Event handler for basic events.
+ *	Processes Expose, Configure, FocusIn/Out, and Destroy events.
+ *	Also handles <<ThemeChanged>> virtual events.
+ *
+ *	For Expose and Configure, simply schedule the widget for redisplay.
+ *	For Destroy events, handle the cleanup process.
+ *
+ *	For Focus events, set/clear the focus bit in the state field.
+ *	It turns out this is impossible to do correctly in a binding script,
+ *	because Tk filters out focus events with detail == NotifyInferior.
+ *
+ *	For Deactivate/Activate pseudo-events, set/clear the background state
+ *	flag.
+ */
+
+static const unsigned CoreEventMask
+    = ExposureMask
+    | StructureNotifyMask
+    | FocusChangeMask
+    | VirtualEventMask
+    | ActivateMask
+    | EnterWindowMask
+    | LeaveWindowMask
+    ;
+
+static void CoreEventProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = clientData;
+
+    switch (eventPtr->type)
+    {
+	case ConfigureNotify :
+	    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	    break;
+	case Expose :
+	    if (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0) {
+		TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case DestroyNotify :
+	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(
+		corePtr->tkwin, CoreEventMask,CoreEventProc,clientData);
+	    DestroyWidget(corePtr);
+	    break;
+	case FocusIn:
+	case FocusOut:
+	    /* Don't process "virtual crossing" events */
+	    if (   eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyInferior
+		|| eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyAncestor
+		|| eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyNonlinear)
+	    {
+		if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn)
+		    corePtr->state |= TTK_STATE_FOCUS;
+		else
+		    corePtr->state &= ~TTK_STATE_FOCUS;
+		TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case ActivateNotify:
+	    corePtr->state &= ~TTK_STATE_BACKGROUND;
+	    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	    break;
+	case DeactivateNotify:
+	    corePtr->state |= TTK_STATE_BACKGROUND;
+	    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	    break;
+	case LeaveNotify:
+	    corePtr->state &= ~TTK_STATE_HOVER;
+	    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	    break;
+	case EnterNotify:
+	    corePtr->state |= TTK_STATE_HOVER;
+	    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	    break;
+	case VirtualEvent:
+	    if (!strcmp("ThemeChanged", ((XVirtualEvent *)(eventPtr))->name)) {
+		(void)UpdateLayout(corePtr->interp, corePtr);
+		SizeChanged(corePtr);
+		TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	    }
+	default:
+	    /* can't happen... */
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * WidgetWorldChanged --
+ * 	Default Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc() for widgets.
+ * 	Invoked whenever fonts or other system resources are changed;
+ * 	recomputes geometry.
+ */
+static void WidgetWorldChanged(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = clientData;
+    SizeChanged(corePtr);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+}
+
+static Tk_ClassProcs widgetClassProcs = {
+    sizeof(Tk_ClassProcs),	/* size */
+    WidgetWorldChanged,	/* worldChangedProc */
+    NULL,					/* createProc */
+    NULL					/* modalProc */
+};
+
+/*
+ * TtkWidgetConstructorObjCmd --
+ *	General-purpose widget constructor command implementation.
+ *	ClientData is a WidgetSpec *.
+ */
+int TtkWidgetConstructorObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    WidgetSpec *widgetSpec = clientData;
+    const char *className = widgetSpec->className;
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable =
+	Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, widgetSpec->optionSpecs);
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+    void *recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr;
+    Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc < 2 || objc % 2 == 1) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "pathName ?-option value ...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Check if a -class option has been specified.
+     * We have to do this before the InitOptions() call,
+     * since InitOptions() is affected by the widget class.
+     */
+    for (i = 2; i < objc; i += 2) {
+	if (!strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), "-class")) {
+	    className = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(
+	interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL);
+    if (tkwin == NULL)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    /*
+     * Allocate and initialize the widget record.
+     */
+    recordPtr = ckalloc(widgetSpec->recordSize);
+    memset(recordPtr, 0, widgetSpec->recordSize);
+    corePtr = recordPtr;
+
+    corePtr->tkwin	= tkwin;
+    corePtr->interp 	= interp;
+    corePtr->widgetSpec	= widgetSpec;
+    corePtr->widgetCmd	= Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, Tk_PathName(tkwin),
+	WidgetInstanceObjCmd, recordPtr, WidgetInstanceObjCmdDeleted);
+    corePtr->optionTable = optionTable;
+    corePtr->layout	= NULL;
+    corePtr->flags 	= 0;
+    corePtr->state 	= 0;
+
+    Tk_SetClass(tkwin, className);
+    Tk_SetClassProcs(tkwin, &widgetClassProcs, recordPtr);
+    Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap(tkwin, ParentRelative);
+
+    widgetSpec->initializeProc(interp, recordPtr);
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, CoreEventMask, CoreEventProc, recordPtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Initial configuration.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_Preserve(corePtr);
+    if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin) != TCL_OK) {
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable,
+	    objc - 2, objv + 2, tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+	Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+	goto error;
+    } else {
+	Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    }
+    if (widgetSpec->configureProc(interp, recordPtr, ~0) != TCL_OK)
+	goto error;
+    if (widgetSpec->postConfigureProc(interp, recordPtr, ~0) != TCL_OK)
+	goto error;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(corePtr))
+	goto error;
+
+    Tcl_Release(corePtr);
+
+    SizeChanged(corePtr);
+    Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin);
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(tkwin), -1));
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(corePtr)) {
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, "Widget has been destroyed", TCL_STATIC);
+    } else {
+	Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
+    }
+    Tcl_Release(corePtr);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Default implementations for widget hook procedures.
+ */
+
+/* TtkWidgetGetLayout --
+ * 	Default getLayoutProc.
+ *	Looks up the layout based on the -style resource (if specified),
+ *	otherwise use the widget class.
+ */
+Ttk_Layout TtkWidgetGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme themePtr, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    const char *styleName = 0;
+
+    if (corePtr->styleObj)
+    	styleName = Tcl_GetString(corePtr->styleObj);
+
+    if (!styleName || *styleName == '\0')
+    	styleName = corePtr->widgetSpec->className;
+
+    return Ttk_CreateLayout(interp, themePtr, styleName,
+	recordPtr, corePtr->optionTable, corePtr->tkwin);
+}
+
+/*
+ * TtkWidgetGetOrientedLayout --
+ * 	Helper routine.  Same as TtkWidgetGetLayout, but prefixes
+ * 	"Horizontal." or "Vertical." to the style name, depending
+ * 	on the value of the 'orient' option.
+ */
+Ttk_Layout TtkWidgetGetOrientedLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme themePtr, void *recordPtr, Tcl_Obj *orientObj)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    const char *baseStyleName = 0;
+    Tcl_DString styleName;
+    int orient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    Ttk_Layout layout;
+
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&styleName);
+
+    /* Prefix:
+     */
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, orientObj, &orient);
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL)
+	Tcl_DStringAppend(&styleName, "Horizontal.", -1);
+    else
+	Tcl_DStringAppend(&styleName, "Vertical.", -1);
+
+    /* Add base style name:
+     */
+    if (corePtr->styleObj)
+    	baseStyleName = Tcl_GetString(corePtr->styleObj);
+    if (!baseStyleName || *baseStyleName == '\0')
+    	baseStyleName = corePtr->widgetSpec->className;
+
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&styleName, baseStyleName, -1);
+
+    /* Create layout:
+     */
+    layout= Ttk_CreateLayout(interp, themePtr, Tcl_DStringValue(&styleName),
+	recordPtr, corePtr->optionTable, corePtr->tkwin);
+
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&styleName);
+
+    return layout;
+}
+
+/* TtkNullInitialize --
+ * 	Default widget initializeProc (no-op)
+ */
+void TtkNullInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+}
+
+/* TtkNullPostConfigure --
+ * 	Default widget postConfigureProc (no-op)
+ */
+int TtkNullPostConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *clientData, int mask)
+{
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* TtkCoreConfigure --
+ * 	Default widget configureProc.
+ * 	Handles -style option.
+ */
+int TtkCoreConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *clientData, int mask)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = clientData;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (mask & STYLE_CHANGED) {
+	status = UpdateLayout(interp, corePtr);
+    }
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/* TtkNullCleanup --
+ * 	Default widget cleanupProc (no-op)
+ */
+void TtkNullCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    return;
+}
+
+/* TtkWidgetDoLayout --
+ * 	Default widget layoutProc.
+ */
+void TtkWidgetDoLayout(void *clientData)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout,corePtr->state,Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin));
+}
+
+/* TtkWidgetDisplay --
+ * 	Default widget displayProc.
+ */
+void TtkWidgetDisplay(void *recordPtr, Drawable d)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_DrawLayout(corePtr->layout, corePtr->state, d);
+}
+
+/* TtkWidgetSize --
+ * 	Default widget sizeProc()
+ */
+int TtkWidgetSize(void *recordPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_LayoutSize(corePtr->layout, corePtr->state, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Default implementations for widget subcommands.
+ */
+
+/* $w cget -option
+ */
+int TtkWidgetCgetCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *result;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    result = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, recordPtr,
+		corePtr->optionTable, objv[2], corePtr->tkwin);
+    if (result == NULL)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $w configure ?-option ?value ....??
+ */
+int TtkWidgetConfigureCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *result;
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	result = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, recordPtr,
+		corePtr->optionTable, NULL, corePtr->tkwin);
+    } else if (objc == 3) {
+	result = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, recordPtr,
+		corePtr->optionTable, objv[2], corePtr->tkwin);
+    } else {
+	Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+	int status;
+	int mask = 0;
+
+	status = Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr,
+		corePtr->optionTable, objc - 2, objv + 2,
+		corePtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, &mask);
+	if (status != TCL_OK)
+	    return status;
+
+	if (mask & READONLY_OPTION) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+		    "Attempt to change read-only option", TCL_STATIC);
+	    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	status = corePtr->widgetSpec->configureProc(interp, recordPtr, mask);
+	if (status != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+	    return status;
+	}
+	Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+
+	status = corePtr->widgetSpec->postConfigureProc(interp,recordPtr,mask);
+	if (WidgetDestroyed(corePtr)) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "Widget has been destroyed", TCL_STATIC);
+	    status = TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (status != TCL_OK) {
+	    return status;
+	}
+
+	if (mask & (STYLE_CHANGED | GEOMETRY_CHANGED)) {
+	    SizeChanged(corePtr);
+	}
+
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	result = Tcl_NewObj();
+    }
+
+    if (result == 0) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $w state ? $stateSpec ?
+ *
+ * 	If $stateSpec is specified, modify the widget state accordingly,
+ * 	return a new stateSpec representing the changed bits.
+ *
+ * 	Otherwise, return a statespec matching all the currently-set bits.
+ */
+
+int TtkWidgetStateCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_StateSpec spec;
+    int status;
+    Ttk_State oldState, changed;
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+	    Ttk_NewStateSpecObj(corePtr->state, 0ul));
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "state-spec");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    status = Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(interp, objv[2], &spec);
+    if (status != TCL_OK)
+	return status;
+
+    oldState = corePtr->state;
+    corePtr->state = Ttk_ModifyState(corePtr->state, &spec);
+    changed = corePtr->state ^ oldState;
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+	Ttk_NewStateSpecObj(oldState & changed, ~oldState & changed));
+    return status;
+}
+
+/* $w instate $stateSpec ?$script?
+ *
+ * 	Tests if widget state matches $stateSpec.
+ *	If $script is specified, execute script if state matches.
+ *	Otherwise, return true/false
+ */
+
+int TtkWidgetInstateCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_State state = corePtr->state;
+    Ttk_StateSpec spec;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (objc < 3 || objc > 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "state-spec ?script?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    status = Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(interp, objv[2], &spec);
+    if (status != TCL_OK)
+	return status;
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+	    Tcl_NewBooleanObj(Ttk_StateMatches(state,&spec)));
+    } else if (objc == 4) {
+	if (Ttk_StateMatches(state,&spec)) {
+	    status = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, objv[3], 0);
+	}
+    }
+    return status;
+}
+
+/* $w identify $x $y
+ * $w identify element $x $y
+ * 	Returns: name of element at $x, $y
+ */
+int TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand(
+    void *recordPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Element element;
+    static const char *whatTable[] = { "element", NULL };
+    int x, y, what;
+
+    if (objc < 4 || objc > 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?what? x y");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (objc == 5) {
+	/* $w identify element $x $y */
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp,objv[2],whatTable,"option",0,&what)
+		!= TCL_OK)
+	{
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (   Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[objc-2], &x) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[objc-1], &y) != TCL_OK
+    ) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    element = Ttk_IdentifyElement(corePtr->layout, x, y);
+    if (element) {
+	const char *elementName = Ttk_ElementName(element);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,Tcl_NewStringObj(elementName,-1));
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkWidget.h b/generic/ttk/ttkWidget.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e9ab69
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkWidget.h
@@ -0,0 +1,273 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2003, Joe English
+ * Helper routines for widget implementations.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TTKWIDGET
+#define _TTKWIDGET
+
+/*
+ * State flags for 'flags' field.
+ */
+#define WIDGET_DESTROYED	0x0001
+#define REDISPLAY_PENDING 	0x0002	/* scheduled call to RedisplayWidget */
+#define CURSOR_ON 		0x0020	/* See TtkBlinkCursor() */
+#define WIDGET_USER_FLAG        0x0100  /* 0x0100 - 0x8000 for user flags */
+
+/*
+ * Bit fields for OptionSpec 'mask' field:
+ */
+#define READONLY_OPTION 	0x1
+#define STYLE_CHANGED   	0x2
+#define GEOMETRY_CHANGED	0x4
+
+/*
+ * Core widget elements
+ */
+typedef struct WidgetSpec_ WidgetSpec;	/* Forward */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window associated with widget */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with widget. */
+    WidgetSpec *widgetSpec;	/* Widget class hooks */
+    Tcl_Command widgetCmd;	/* Token for widget command. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Option table */
+    Ttk_Layout layout;  	/* Widget layout */
+
+    /*
+     * Storage for resources:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *takeFocusPtr;	/* Storage for -takefocus option */
+    Tcl_Obj *cursorObj;		/* Storage for -cursor option */
+    Tcl_Obj *styleObj;		/* Name of currently-applied style */
+    Tcl_Obj *classObj;		/* Class name (readonly option) */
+
+    Ttk_State state;		/* Current widget state */
+    unsigned int flags;		/* internal flags, see above */
+
+} WidgetCore;
+
+/*
+ * Widget specifications:
+ */
+struct WidgetSpec_
+{
+    const char 		*className;	/* Widget class name */
+    size_t 		recordSize;	/* #bytes in widget record */
+    const Tk_OptionSpec	*optionSpecs;	/* Option specifications */
+    const Ttk_Ensemble	*commands;	/* Widget instance subcommands */
+
+    /*
+     * Hooks:
+     */
+    void  	(*initializeProc)(Tcl_Interp *, void *recordPtr);
+    void	(*cleanupProc)(void *recordPtr);
+    int 	(*configureProc)(Tcl_Interp *, void *recordPtr, int flags);
+    int 	(*postConfigureProc)(Tcl_Interp *, void *recordPtr, int flags);
+    Ttk_Layout	(*getLayoutProc)(Tcl_Interp *,Ttk_Theme, void *recordPtr);
+    int 	(*sizeProc)(void *recordPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+    void	(*layoutProc)(void *recordPtr);
+    void	(*displayProc)(void *recordPtr, Drawable d);
+};
+
+/*
+ * Common factors for widget implementations:
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkNullInitialize(Tcl_Interp *, void *);
+MODULE_SCOPE int  TtkNullPostConfigure(Tcl_Interp *, void *, int);
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkNullCleanup(void *recordPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Layout TtkWidgetGetLayout(
+	Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_Theme, void *recordPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Layout TtkWidgetGetOrientedLayout(
+	Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_Theme, void *recordPtr, Tcl_Obj *orientObj);
+MODULE_SCOPE int  TtkWidgetSize(void *recordPtr, int *w, int *h);
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkWidgetDoLayout(void *recordPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkWidgetDisplay(void *recordPtr, Drawable);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int TtkCoreConfigure(Tcl_Interp*, void *, int mask);
+
+/* Common widget commands:
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE int TtkWidgetConfigureCommand(
+	void *,Tcl_Interp *, int, Tcl_Obj*const[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int TtkWidgetCgetCommand(
+	void *,Tcl_Interp *, int, Tcl_Obj*const[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int TtkWidgetInstateCommand(
+	void *,Tcl_Interp *, int, Tcl_Obj*const[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int TtkWidgetStateCommand(
+	void *,Tcl_Interp *, int, Tcl_Obj*const[]);
+MODULE_SCOPE int TtkWidgetIdentifyCommand(
+	void *,Tcl_Interp *, int, Tcl_Obj*const[]);
+
+/* Widget constructor:
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE int TtkWidgetConstructorObjCmd(
+	ClientData, Tcl_Interp*, int, Tcl_Obj*const[]);
+
+#define RegisterWidget(interp, name, specPtr) \
+    Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, name, \
+	TtkWidgetConstructorObjCmd, (ClientData)specPtr,NULL)
+
+/* WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_TRUE --
+ * WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_FALSE --
+ *	Add one or the other of these to each OptionSpecs table 
+ *	to indicate whether the widget should take focus 
+ *	during keyboard traversal.
+ */
+#define WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_TRUE \
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus", \
+	"ttk::takefocus", Tk_Offset(WidgetCore, takeFocusPtr), -1, 0,0,0 }
+#define WIDGET_TAKEFOCUS_FALSE \
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus", \
+	"", Tk_Offset(WidgetCore, takeFocusPtr), -1, 0,0,0 }
+
+/* WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(baseOptionSpecs) --
+ * Add this at the end of an OptionSpecs table to inherit
+ * the options from 'baseOptionSpecs'.
+ */
+#define WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(baseOptionSpecs) \
+    {TK_OPTION_END, 0,0,0, NULL, -1,-1, 0, (ClientData)baseOptionSpecs, 0}
+
+/* All widgets should inherit from ttkCoreOptionSpecs[].
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE Tk_OptionSpec ttkCoreOptionSpecs[];
+
+/*
+ * Useful routines for use inside widget implementations:
+ */
+/* extern int WidgetDestroyed(WidgetCore *); */
+#define WidgetDestroyed(corePtr) ((corePtr)->flags & WIDGET_DESTROYED)
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkWidgetChangeState(WidgetCore *,
+	unsigned int setBits, unsigned int clearBits);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkRedisplayWidget(WidgetCore *);
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkResizeWidget(WidgetCore *);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkTrackElementState(WidgetCore *);
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkBlinkCursor(WidgetCore *);
+
+/*
+ * -state option values (compatibility)
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkCheckStateOption(WidgetCore *, Tcl_Obj *);
+
+/*
+ * Variable traces:
+ */
+typedef void (*Ttk_TraceProc)(void *recordPtr, const char *value);
+typedef struct TtkTraceHandle_ Ttk_TraceHandle;
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_TraceHandle *Ttk_TraceVariable(
+    Tcl_Interp*, Tcl_Obj *varnameObj, Ttk_TraceProc callback, void *clientData);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_UntraceVariable(Ttk_TraceHandle *);
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_FireTrace(Ttk_TraceHandle *);
+
+/*
+ * Virtual events:
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkSendVirtualEvent(Tk_Window tgtWin, const char *eventName);
+
+/*
+ * Helper routines for data accessor commands:
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE int TtkEnumerateOptions(
+    Tcl_Interp *, void *, const Tk_OptionSpec *, Tk_OptionTable, Tk_Window);
+MODULE_SCOPE int TtkGetOptionValue(
+    Tcl_Interp *, void *, Tcl_Obj *optName, Tk_OptionTable, Tk_Window);
+
+/*
+ * Helper routines for scrolling widgets (see scroll.c).
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    int 	first;		/* First visible item */
+    int 	last;		/* Last visible item */
+    int 	total;		/* Total #items */
+    char 	*scrollCmd;	/* Widget option */
+} Scrollable;
+
+typedef struct ScrollHandleRec *ScrollHandle;
+
+MODULE_SCOPE ScrollHandle TtkCreateScrollHandle(WidgetCore *, Scrollable *);
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkFreeScrollHandle(ScrollHandle);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int TtkScrollviewCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], ScrollHandle);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkScrollTo(ScrollHandle, int newFirst);
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkScrolled(ScrollHandle, int first, int last, int total);
+MODULE_SCOPE void TtkScrollbarUpdateRequired(ScrollHandle);
+
+/*
+ * Tag sets (work in progress, half-baked)
+ */
+
+typedef struct TtkTag *Ttk_Tag;
+typedef struct TtkTagTable *Ttk_TagTable;
+typedef struct TtkTagSet {	/* TODO: make opaque */
+    Ttk_Tag	*tags;
+    int 	nTags;
+} *Ttk_TagSet;
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_TagTable Ttk_CreateTagTable(
+	Tcl_Interp *, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_OptionSpec[], int recordSize);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_DeleteTagTable(Ttk_TagTable);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Tag Ttk_GetTag(Ttk_TagTable, const char *tagName);
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_Tag Ttk_GetTagFromObj(Ttk_TagTable, Tcl_Obj *);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Obj *Ttk_TagOptionValue(
+    Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_TagTable, Ttk_Tag, Tcl_Obj *optionName);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_EnumerateTagOptions(
+    Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_TagTable, Ttk_Tag);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_EnumerateTags(Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_TagTable);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_ConfigureTag(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_TagTable tagTable, Ttk_Tag tag,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE Ttk_TagSet Ttk_GetTagSetFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_TagTable, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+MODULE_SCOPE Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewTagSetObj(Ttk_TagSet);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_FreeTagSet(Ttk_TagSet);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_TagSetContains(Ttk_TagSet, Ttk_Tag tag);
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_TagSetAdd(Ttk_TagSet, Ttk_Tag tag);
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_TagSetRemove(Ttk_TagSet, Ttk_Tag tag);
+
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_TagSetValues(Ttk_TagTable, Ttk_TagSet, void *record);
+MODULE_SCOPE void Ttk_TagSetApplyStyle(Ttk_TagTable,Ttk_Style,Ttk_State,void*);
+
+/*
+ * String tables for widget resource specifications:
+ */
+
+MODULE_SCOPE const char *ttkOrientStrings[];
+MODULE_SCOPE const char *ttkCompoundStrings[];
+MODULE_SCOPE const char *ttkDefaultStrings[];
+
+/*
+ * ... other option types...
+ */
+MODULE_SCOPE int TtkGetLabelAnchorFromObj(
+	Tcl_Interp*, Tcl_Obj*, Ttk_PositionSpec *);
+
+/*
+ * Platform-specific initialization.
+ */
+
+#if defined(__WIN32__)
+#define Ttk_PlatformInit Ttk_WinPlatformInit
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_PlatformInit(Tcl_Interp *);
+#elif defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
+#define Ttk_PlatformInit Ttk_MacOSXPlatformInit
+MODULE_SCOPE int Ttk_PlatformInit(Tcl_Interp *);
+#else
+#define Ttk_PlatformInit(interp) /* TTK_X11PlatformInit() */
+#endif
+
+#endif /* _TTKWIDGET */